Eaton Consultant Guide

Electrical Sector
Eaton Corporation
Electrical Sector
1111 Superior Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44114
United States
877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273)
Eaton.com
2011 Eaton Corporation
All other trademarks are property
of their respective owners.
All Rights Reserved
Printed in USA
Publication No. CA08104001E
September 2011
15th Edition
September 2011
C
o
n
s
u
l
t
i
n
g

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

G
u
i
d
e

1
5
t
h

E
d
i
t
i
o
n
Consulting
Application
Guide
CA08104001E For more information, visit:

www.eaton.com/consultants

September 2011

2011 Consulting Application Guide

Sheet

00

i

Introduction

ii

Alphabetical Index

Technical
Discussion

1

Power Distribution Systems

Power
Management
Products

2

Power Management
Connectivity & Monitoring

3

Advanced & Electronic Metering

4

Protective & Predictive Relays

Medium
Voltage
Equipment

5

Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-W
Medium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers

6

Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEF Front-Access
Medium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers

7

Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEB & MSB
Medium Voltage Vacuum Breakers

8

Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMVS Medium
Voltage Load Interrupter Fusible Switch

9

FusesMedium Voltage

10

Motor Starters (AMPGARD)
Medium Voltage

11

BuswayMedium Voltage

12

Transfer SwitchesMedium Voltage

Unit
Substations &
Transformers

13

Primary Unit Substations
Secondary 1000V & Above

14

Secondary Unit Substations
Secondary Below 1000V

15

Unitized Power Centers

16

Substation Transformers

17

Pad-Mounted Transformers

18

Spot Network Equipment

19

Distribution Dry-Type
TransformersLow Voltage

Low
Voltage
Distribution
Equipment

20

Metal-Enclosed Drawout
SwitchgearLow Voltage

21

SwitchboardsLow Voltage

Low
Voltage
Distribution
Equipment

22

Panelboards

23

Lighting Control Systems
Pow-R-Command

24

BuswayPow-R-Way

III

Low Voltage

25

Transfer Switches

Circuit
Breakers
& Safety
Switches

26

Power Circuit Breakers &
Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers

27

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
& Enclosures

28

Switching Devices
Low Voltage

Control
Products

29

Motor Control Centers
Low Voltage

30

Motor Starters &
ContactorsLow Voltage

31

Adjustable Frequency Drives
Low Voltage

32

Control/GF/Current & Voltage Relays
& Pilot Devices

Power
Quality

33

Uninterruptible Power Supplies

34

Surge Protection (SPD) &
Power Conditioning Products

35

Power Factor Capacitors
& Harmonic Filters

36

Resistance Grounding Systems

37

Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment

38

Coordinated Electrical Houses

39

Solar (PV)
Systems Interconnect

40

Cat Generator Paralleling
Switchgear

41

Power System Studies
& Field Services

Contents

001

Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Selector Guide
Medium Voltage
Transformer
Selector Guide
For more information, visit:


CA08104001E
September 2011

2011 Consulting Application Guide

Sheet

00

Copyright

002

Dimensions, Weights and Ratings

Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog

are approximate and should
not be used for construction purposes

. Drawings containing exact dimensions are
available upon request. All listed product specications and ratings are subject to
change without notice. Photographs are representative of production units.

ANSI Voltage Classications

Please note that in the text of the

Consulting Application Guide

the term low voltage
generally refers to system voltages of 1000 volts and lower. The term medium voltage
generally refers to system voltages of 1000 volts and up to 38 kV.

Terms and Conditions

Individual product list prices are published in

Eatons Price and Availability Digest

(PAD).
All orders accepted by Eaton are subject to the general terms and conditions as set forth
in Selling Policy SP03000001E.

Technical and Descriptive Publications

This publication contains technical data for the proper selection of many products
and systems. It may not cover all product details and/or application considerations.
Additional information is available in the form of technical information publications
and illustrated brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your
local Eaton Field Salesperson or Distributor, call

1-800-525-2000

or visit our Web site
at

www.eaton.com

.

Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21

Products are sold by Eaton Corporation as commercial grade product not intended for
application in facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory
Commission for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certication will be required
for use of the product in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by
the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.

WARNING

Installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions
of the U.S. National Electrical Code and/or other local codes or industry standards that
are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these
codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.
National Electrical Code and NEC are registered trademarks of the National Fire
Protection Association, Quincy, Mass.
CAT, Caterpillar, its respective logos and Caterpillar Yellow, as well as corporate and
product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without
permission.
Copyright 2011, Eaton Corporation.

These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide
for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or mainte-
nance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not
covered sufciently for the purchasers purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton
Products Distributor or Sales Ofce. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or
modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the
entire obligation of Eatons electrical business unit. The warranty contained in the contract between
the parties is the sole warranty of Eaton Corporation. Any statements contained herein do not
create new warranties or modify the existing warranty.


i-1

September 2011

Introduction

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

i

001

Welcome

Welcome to the

15th Edition of the Consulting Application
Guide

. This document is designed to assist an electrical
consultant or a power system design engineer in the layout
and specication of equipment. In this expanded edition,
you will nd complete details on our extensive line of
distribution, control and power quality products and
services. Please be sure to browse the various sections
to gain a sense of Eatons overall capabilities.
The

15th Edition of the Consulting Application Guide

is available in printed hardcopy version, electronically at
www.eaton.com/consultants and on CD, as well as in iBook
format. We created this guide to make it easy for you to do
business with us, and continue to offer it to you in multiple
formats to meet your various needs.

Eaton Corporation is a Global Leader in
Power Distribution, Power Quality, Control
and Automation, and Monitoring Products

At Eaton, we believe that a reliable, efcient and safe power
system is the foundation of every successful enterprise.
Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and
our highly skilled services team, we empower businesses
around the world to achieve a powerful advantage.
In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining
powerful customer relationships built on a foundation of
excellence. From the products we manufacture to our
dedicated customer service and support, we know whats
important to you.

Solutions

Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems
management with a holistic and strategic approach,
leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions
and services. We focus on the following three areas in
all that we do:
Reliabilitymaintain the appropriate level of power
continuity without disruption or unexpected downtime
Efciencyminimize energy usage, operating costs,
equipment footprint and environmental impact
Safetyidentify and mitigate electrical hazards to protect
what you value most
Our new guide shows the breadth of our combined power
distribution, control, quality and management product
offerings. Also included are tabs dedicated to our engineer-
ing services operation. You may select with condence
from the products for residential, commercial and industrial
power distribution and control. While Eaton celebrates its
100th year, our heritage is rich with more than 200 years of
innovation and leadership from acquisitions and legendary
brands. This experience has resulted in many innovations
in distribution and industrial control productseach
incorporating leading-edge technology to provide the
highest value to our customers. Our engineers and scientists
are recognized throughout the industry and around the
world as experts in a wide range of disciplines including:
photoelectric optical technology, arc interruption, vacuum
technology, digital and analog electronics, communications
technology and the application of power semiconductors.

New Features of the

Consulting
Application Guide15th Edition

The

15th Edition of the Consulting Application Guide

contains many new products, services and application-
specic information. The


tab
has been updated, and the entire book has been organized
to make it easy to locate items. It is a reference guide that
should be on your bookshelf so that as questions arise, you
can quickly locate the data and pass it on to your customers
or clients. We have included two brand new sections in this
edition, one for solar (PV) systems and another dedicated
to electrical vehicle supply equipment. Detailing Eatons
offering in these areas, these new sections show how Eaton
is innovating new products to meet the new power and
infrastructure demands of the world.

Contents Page

Similar to the 14th Edition, we have grouped the contents
page to allow you to easily nd products that share similar
electrical characteristics and/or applications. These
groupings include:

Power management products

Medium voltage equipment

Unit substations and transformers

Low voltage distribution equipment

Circuit breakers and safety switches

Control products

Power quality products
You may also notice that we have elected to make a few of the
sections dealing with more specialized products available as
electronic only. These sections are included in their entirety
on the CD, iBook and Web versions of the resource, but by
removing them from the printed version, we are able to
dedicate more pages to products that we believe are of a
broader interest to electrical system designers.

CD and Product Specications

In addition to containing sections that were not printed in
the book, the CD version also contains a complete set of
product specications in PDF and MS Word format, as well
as breaker trip curves. This CD can be ordered by lling out
a form on www.eaton.com/consultants.
To aid you in nding the proper Typical Specication Guide
les, a straightforward and intuitive navigation system has
been developed.
You have the option of navigating through the traditional

Table of Contents

or

Alphabetical Index

contained in the
guide. We have built an interactive navigation system
with submenus and links that will guide you to the correct
product specications, permitting you to build a complete
set of specications with relative ease.
i-2



CA08104001E
September 2011

Introduction

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

i

002

Updated Information

We continue to print this publication because we have
received feedback that users love the quick access to this
valuable reference publication. However, the most up-to-date
information and specs are always available on our Web site
at


. Also on this page, users will
nd product spotlights, hot topic coverage, technical papers,
listings of Launch and Learn presentations, newsletters and
training materials. Please visit this Consultant Resource Page
and bookmark it in your browser. Refer back to this page to
stay current on Eatons electrical business.

Delivering the Promise of Power
Through the Power of Information

Theres no doubt about it: Accurate product and application
information makes for better decisions, better systems and
satised customers. Thats why weve completely revised
and updated the

15th Edition of the

Consulting Application
Guide

. This volume is your point-of-entry, your touchstone
and your guide to the most innovative products and support
services in the business.
Comments?
E-mail: marketingsupportEG@eaton.com
Or write: Eaton Corporation
1000 Cherrington Parkway
Moon Township, PA 15108-4312
Attn: Catalog Department

Eaton Corporation

Eaton is dedicated to ensuring that reliable, efcient
and safe power is available when its needed most. With
unparalleled knowledge of electrical power management
across industries, experts at Eaton deliver customized,
integrated solutions to solve our customers most critical
challenges.
Our focus is on delivering the right solution for the
application. But, decision makers demand more than just
innovative products. They turn to Eaton for an unwavering
commitment to personal support that makes customer
success a top priority. For more information, visit
www.eaton.com/electrical.
ii-1

February 2012

Alphabetical Index



i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

ii

001

A

AC Drive Acceleration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0

-7
AC Drive Acceleration and Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0

-3
AC Drive Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0

-2
AC Drive Compatibility
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0

-4
AC Drive Input Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0

-5
AC Drive Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0

-3
Accessories
M-Max Series AC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.1

-3
C440/

XT

Electronic Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.3

-17
C441 Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2

-8
Active Harmonic Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35.3

-1

35.3

-7
Add-On Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.4

-42
Addressable Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.0

-1,

2.1

-26
Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0

-1

31.5

-18
CFX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.3

-1

31.3

-24
CPX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.2

-1

31.2

-18
H-Max Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.5

-2
H-Max Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.5

-1

31.5

-18
IntelliDisconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.5

-11
IntelliPass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.5

-11
HVX9000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.3

-1

31.3

-24
M-Max Series AC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.1

-1

31.1

-5
MVX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.1

-1

31.1

-5
SVX9000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.4

-1

31.4

-20
Adjustment Factors for Calculating
Total AC Drive System Efficiency Table . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0

-4
Advanced and Electronic Metering
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4

-1

3.4

-10
Enclosed Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4

-3
IQ Flange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4

-1
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit . . . . . . . . . .

3.0

-1,

3.4

-1
Sub-Network Master Local
Display (SMLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4

-2
IQ Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4

-1

3.4

-10
AEGIS Powerline Filters
Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34.1

-20
AFD Output Harmonics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0

-2
Air Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0

-7,

18.0

-9,

21.0

-2,

21.0

-9

21.0

-11,

26.1

-6

26.1

-26
Alternative Energy Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4

-35
AMPGARD Medium Voltage
Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.0

-1

10.1

-40
AMPGARD SC9000 Adjustable
Frequency Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.0

-1,

10.2

-1

10.2

-16
ANSI Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5

-6
BuswayMedium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.0

-2
AR Series Low Voltage Breaker Replacement . . . . . . . . . .

41.5

-8
Arc Fault Circuit Interrupters (AFCI). . . . . . . . . . .

22.0

-3,

27.2

-13
Arc Flash Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41.3

-1
Arc Flash Safety Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41.3

-1

41.3

-6
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.0

-13,

20.1

-10,

22.0

-5
Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad
Switchgear Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . .

5.0

-1,

5.2

-1

5.2

-5,

5.5

-19

5.5

-40
Arc-Resistant Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2

-1

5.2

-5,

5.5

-19

5.5

-40
Low Voltage Magnum DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.1

-6
27 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5

-30

5.5

-33
38 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5

-34

5.5

-38
5 and 15 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5

-19

5.5

-29
ATC Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.0

-1,

25.4

-1

25.4

-16
Automatic Transfer Control (ATC) . . . . . . . .

7.3

-3,

8.0

-1,

12.0

-1
Automatic Transfer Switches
Medium VoltageVacuum Breaker. . . . . . . .

12.0

-2

12.0

-13
Autotransformer Starters (LV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.4

-2
Auxiliary Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0

-7

B

Batteries
Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . .

40.0

-5,

40.2

-2,

40.2

-3,

40.2

-9,

40.3

-2,

40.3

-3,

40.3

-11,

40.4

-14
UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33.2

-1

33.2

-11,

33.2

-21
Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33.3

-6
Bearing and DV/DT Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0

-3
BIOTEMP Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.0

-7,

13.0

-8,

14.0

-12,

16.0

-2

16.0

-5,

16.0

-13
Boric Acid FusesMedium Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . .

9.0

-1

9.0

-11
Braking, Regeneration Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0

-3
Breaker Interface Module

II

(BIM

II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-24
Breaker Power Monitoring
and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-21
Breaker-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1, 25.2-1 25.2-11
Bridge Joint Power Takeoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-44
Building Automation Systems (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1
Building Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33
Building Information Model (BIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1-1
Bushing Box Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-17
Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-51
Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-1 24.0-52
Medium Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-1 11.0-24
Busway Joint Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-51
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1-7
C
Cable Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.0-16, 24.0-44
Calculating Total AC Drive System
Efficiency Table, Adjustment Factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
Capacitor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-1, 27.3-6,
35.0-3, 35.0-4
ii-2
February 2012
Alphabetical Index
For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet ii 002
Capacitor Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-2, 35.0-9
Capacitor Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-1, 5.4-4, 5.4-5,
35.0-3, 35.0-4
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.0-1 35.6-7
AUTOVAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.2-1 35.2-11
Cast Coil Transformers
Primary Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-1 13.0-16
Secondary Substation . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-18, 14.0-19,
14.0-37, 14.0-38
Caterpillar Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-1 40.5-5
Closed-Transition Paralleling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.3-1
Closed-Transition Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-4
Engine Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.2-3, 40.3-3
Generator Paralleling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-1 40.5-5
Load Shed/Load Add. . . .40.0-4, 40.1-4, 40.2-1 40.2-3,
40.2-9, 40.2-11, 40.2-12, 40.3-1,
40.3-2, 40.3-11 40.3-13, 40.4-4,
40.4-5, 40.4-9, 40.4-15,
40.5-4, 40.5-5
Modbus Network . . . . . . . . 40.2-2, 40.2-3, 40.3-2, 40.3-3
Paralleling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-1 40.5-5
Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-5, 40.1-5
Soft Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.2-1, 40.5-4, 40.5-5
Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-2, 40.0-4, 40.0-5, 40.2-1,
40.2-2, 40.3-1, 40.3-2
Circuit Breaker Cable Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-5
Circuit Breaker DataSwitchboards . . . . . . . . 21.0-14 21.0-16
Circuit Breaker Retrofit and
Replacement Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.5-1 41.5-4
Circuit Breaker Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1-2, 27.4-8
Circuit Breaker Wire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-8
Circuit Breakers
Air Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . 18.0-7, 18.0-9, 21.0-2,
21.0-9 21.0-11,
26.1-6 26.1-26
Insulated Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-12 26.1-14
Molded Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.0-1 27.4-54
Circuit Breakers Molded Case
Interrupting Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-6
Circuit BreakersMedium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-1 5.5-40
Circuit BreakersMolded Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.0-3 27.4-54
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1-7, 27.1-8,
27.4-33, 27.4-34
Altitude Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-37
Ambient Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-37
Cable Selection/Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-8
Capacitor Protection/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-6
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . 27.2-3, 27.4-4,
27.4-45 27.4-47
DC Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-14
Digitrip OPTIM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-8, 27.4-9
Digitrip RMS Trip Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-8, 27.4-9
Digitrip Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-8, 27.4-9
Earth Leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-12
Engine Generator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-19
Interrupting Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-4, 27.4-5,
27.4-11, 27.4-12
Mining Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-20
Molded Case Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-1
Motor Branch Circuits/Tables . . . . .27.2-2, 27.3-2, 27.3-5
Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . 27.2-1, 27.2-2, 27.3-5,
27.4-38 27.4-40
QUICKLAG Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-1 27.4-54
Series Rated Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.2-8 27.2-11
Time-Current Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-9
Transformer Protection/Tables . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-6, 27.3-7
TRI-PAC (Fused) Circuit Breakers . . . . . . 27.4-46, 27.4-47
Welding Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-26, 27.2-20
100% Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.2-5 27.2-7
400415 Hertz Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-16
Circuit BreakersMolded-Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-12
Cable Selection/Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-5
Interrupting Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-12
Low Voltage Power Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-11, 1.3-12
Motor Branch Circuits/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-7, 1.5-8
Series Combination Tables . . . . . . . . . . .22.0-12 22.0-20
Series Rated Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22.0-10 22.0-20
Time-Current Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-3
Circuit BreakersNRX (Series)
Compact Power Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-13
Circuit Breakers, Enclosed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-48 27.4-54
Circuit Breakers, Molded Case
Add-On Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-42
Earth Leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-42
8002500 Amperes (R-Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-32
Circuit Breakers, Power Magnum DS
Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26.1-1 26.1-26
Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-1 27.4-54
Clean Power Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.2-1 31.2-18
CM52 Network Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18.0-1 18.0-39
Codes and Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-6
Cogeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33
Combination Starter Bus Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-42
Combiner Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39.0-1, 39.3-1, 39.3-2
Commercial Metering Switchboards . . . . . . 21.10-1 21.10-11
Commissioning of Electrical Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1-1
Communication Modules
BACnet
CFX9000 Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11
CANopen (Slave)
CFX9000 Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11
DeviceNet
CFX9000 Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relays. . . . . . . . . . 4.2-3
C441 Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-8
Ethernet/IP
CFX9000 Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11
ii-3
February 2012
Alphabetical Index
CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet ii 003
Johnson Controls Metasys N2
CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11
LonWorks
CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11
Modbus
CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . 4.2-3
Modbus/TCP
CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11
PROFIBUS
CFX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-11
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . 4.2-3
Communication Network
Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-1 2.1-26, 18.0-30
Communications
H-Max Series Drives (IntelliDisconnect)
Onboard Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-14
H-Max Series Drives (IntelliPass)
Onboard Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-14
H-Max Series Drives (Open)
Onboard Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-6
Compatibility
AC Drive Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
Conductor Ampacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-16 1.5-18
Conductor Resistance, Reactance,
Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-14 1.5-16
Constant Horsepower Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6
Constant Horsepower Load Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6
Constant Torque Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6
Constant Torque Load Figure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6
Construction Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-50
Contactor-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1, 25.1-1 25.1-15
Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1-7
Contactors, Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-1 30.2-11
Control Centers, Motorsee Motor Control Centers
Control Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1
Cooling Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
Coordinated Electrical Houses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.0-1 38.0-5
Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-3 1.4-6
CPX Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . 31.2-1 31.2-18,
31.5-1 31.5-18
CSL-3 High-Efficiency Transformers . . . . . . . . . 19.1-4, 19.1-17,
19.1-28, 19.1-33
Cubed Exponential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6
Current Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
Current Limiting Breakers
FCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-45
LCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-45
Magnum MDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-5, 26.1-6, 26.1-10
Magnum SBS. . . . . . . . . . 21.5-1, 26.1-5, 26.1-6, 26.1-12
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-3, 27.4-4,
27.4-45 27.4-47
Current Limiting Fuses
Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-12, 9.0-1 9.0-11
Current Limit-R BreakersNon-Fused. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-3
Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11 3.2-14
Current Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-5, 3.2-6
Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-5 3.4-10
D64 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2-2
CVX050/100
Surge Protective Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . .34.1-18, 34.1-19
C306 Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-1 4.2-4
C441 Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-5 4.2-10
D
DC Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-14
DC Quick Charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37.2-1, 37.2-2
Derating Factors
(Molded Case Circuit Breakers)
Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-37
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-37
Derating Factors
(Molded-Case Circuit Breakers)
Interrupting Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-12
Device Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 1.5-4
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers . . . . . . . . . . . .29.0-1, 29.1-45
Differential Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.3-1 4.3-5
Digital Panel Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-1 32.5-7
Digitrip OPTIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21.0-5, 27.4-8, 27.4-9
Digitrip OPTIM Bus Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-43
Digitrip Retrofit Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.5-5 41.5-8
Digitrip 3000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-1 4.1-5
Digitrip 3000Drawout Case Option . . . . . . . . . . . .4.0-1 4.0-4,
4.1-8 4.1-10
DIM Digital Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-25
Distributed Energy Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33
Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1 1.5-24
Distribution Transformers, Dry-Type . . . . . . . . . 19.0-1 19.1-37
Double Conversion UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.6-1
DPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.5-1
DP-300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.3-3 4.3-5
DP-300 Current Differential
Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.3-3, 4.3-5
DP-300 Differential Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.3-3, 4.3-5
Drawout Case Option
Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-8 4.1-10
ii-4
February 2012
Alphabetical Index
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet ii 004
Drawout Mounted Vacuum
Breakers (MEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-1 7.1-6
Drive Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
Drive Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
Drives, Variable Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-1
Dry-Type Network Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0-1 19.1-36
Dry-Type Transformers
Distribution Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0-1 19.1-37
TC-100 Transformer
Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.4-4 4.4-6
Unit Substation Type. . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-14, 14.0-15
Dual-Source Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.0-1, 4.1-6, 4.1-7
Duplex Receptacle Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1-19
Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
DV/DT Protection, Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
E
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-42
Eaton Distribution Relay
EDR-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-27 4.1-30
Eaton SP1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-21, 34.1-22
EDR-3000 Eaton Distribution Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4,
4.1-27 4.1-30
EDR-4000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4,
4.1-31 4.1-37
EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4,
4.1-38 4.1-44
EES (Essential Electrical System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-17
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
EGP Generator Switchgear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.3-1 40.3-13
EGR-4000 Generator
Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.3-12 4.3-21
ELC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-39
Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 37.0-1 37.2-2
DC Quick Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.2-1, 37.2-2
Pow-R-Station Level 2 AC
Electric Vehicle Charging Station. . . . . . 37.1-1 37.1-3
Electromagnetic Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
Electromechanical Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1
Electronic Metering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1 3.1-18, 27.4-8
Electronic Power Meters
IQ 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-35
IQ 250 and IQ 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-32
Power Xpert Energy Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-31
Electronic Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1-3, 27.4-8
Electronic Voltage Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-27, 34.1-28
Elevator Control Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-9
Elevator Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-7
Emergency Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33, 1.4-34
EMR-3000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.2-22 4.2-28
EMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.2-29 4.2-36
Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-48 27.4-54
NEMA 1
Flush Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-51
Surface Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-51
NEMA 12, 12K
Dustproof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-52
NEMA 3R
Rainproof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-52
Enclosed Starters . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-5, 30.6-1 30.6-3
Enclosed Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28.0-1 28.0-27
Enclosure Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-13
End Cable Tap Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-16
Energy Conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-32
Energy Sentinel (IQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3, 3.0-6, 3.2-15 3.2-20
Engineering Services
and Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1, 1.4-23
EnviroLine Safety Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-10
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
Ester-Based Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-5, 17.0-5
Ethernet Communications
Adapter Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-8
ETR-4000 Transformer
Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.3-6 4.3-11
Expertise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.0-2
Expulsion Fuses
Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-1 9.0-11, 14.0-41
Extended Warranty Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1-3
EZ Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-3, 22.1-2,
22.2-2, 22.3-6
E3 Type Energy-Efficient Transformers
(CSL-3 Compliant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-4, 19.1-17,
19.1-28, 19.1-33
F
Facility-Wide Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-1
Factors Affecting Service
Deviation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
Fault Current Calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.3-3 1.3-10
Feeder Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-1 4.1-44
Filtering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35.3-1 35.3-7
Final Field Fit Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-52
Fixed Mounted Vacuum Breakers (MSB) . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 7.2-8
Fixed Vacuum Breaker Switchgear
(MSB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 7.2-8
Flywheel Converter (Rotary Converter) . . . . . . . . . 1.4-26, 1.4-27
Foreseer Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-20 2.4-24
Foreseer Software and Engineering Services . . . 2.4-20 2.4-24
ii-5
February 2012
Alphabetical Index
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet ii 005
Formulas and Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-19
FP-4000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4,
4.1-11 4.1-15
FP-5000 Advanced Feeder
Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-16 4.1-20
Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-21 4.1-26
Freedom FlashGard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.0-1 29.1-58
Freedom Motor Control Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-1 29.1-58
Freedom Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-1 4.2-10
Freedom Starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.0-1, 30.3-1 30.3-10
Freedom 2100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.0-1 29.1-56
Freedom 2100 and Freedom
FlashGard Motor Control Centers . . . . . . . . . 29.0-1 29.1-52
Freedom 2100 Motor Control Centers. . . . . . . . 29.0-1 29.1-58
Frequency, Output Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
Fused Current Limiting Breakers
TRI-PAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-4
Fused Duplex Receptacle Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-45, 24.1-19
Fused Switches, Low Voltage
Bus Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-39
Distribution Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1-13, 21.2-12,
21.3-2, 22.4-1, 22.4-3,
22.4-7 22.4-9
Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-1 28.0-27
Fused Switches, Medium Voltage (MVS) . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14
Fuses
AMPGARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-2
Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-1 9.0-11
MVS Load Interrupter Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-12, 9.0-2
Power and Distribution Class . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-1 9.0-11
Transformer Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-2, 9.0-7,
9.0-8, 14.0-42
Fusible Panelboard PRL1aF,
PRL-2aF, PRL-4F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.4-1, 22.7-1, 22.7-7
G
Generator Controlssee Caterpillar Switchgear
Generator Parallelingsee Caterpillar Switchgear
Generator Quick Connect Switchboards. . . . . . . . 21.7-1, 21.7-2
Generator System Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2-2
Grid-Tied Solar Inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.0-1 39.1-11
S-Max 250 kW Solar
Grid-Tied Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.0-1 39.1-6
3.87 kW Grid-Tied
Solar Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.0-1, 39.1-7 39.1-11
Ground Detector/Neutralizer
Bus Plug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-42
Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . 1.4-6, 1.4-11 1.4-13, 32.0-1
Ground Fault Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.4-7 1.4-11
Grounding Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-7 1.4-13
Grounding Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.4-7 1.4-14,
36.0-1 36.2-6
Group Control (Multi-Pak) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.7-1
H
Harmonic Considerations
Capacitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.0-7
Harmonic Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-18, 1.4-21 1.4-24,
29.1-20, 29.1-48
Harmonic Correction Units
(Active Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3-1 35.3-7
Harmonic Mitigating
Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-1, 19.1-12 19.1-15
Harmonic Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-21
Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-18, 1.4-21 1.4-24, 29.1-48
K-Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-2
Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3, 27.4-8
Waveform Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1, 27.4-8
Harmonics, AFD Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
Harmonics, Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-5
Health Care Facility Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-14 1.1-19
Heat Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12, 1.5-13
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker
Molded Case Circuit Breakers,
Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-35
High Resistance Grounding
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-7 1.4-13, 36.0-1
High Resistance Pulsing
Grounding Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-7 1.4-13, 36.0-1
High Temperature Hydrocarbon
Fluid (HTH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14.0-4, 17.0-4
High Voltage Equipmentsee Medium
Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide Page 5.0-A
Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-1
Load Interrupter Switchgear (WLI) . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14
Metal-Clad Switchgear (VCP-W) . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-1 5.5-40
Metal-Enclosed Front-Access
Vacuum Breaker Switchgear (MEF) . . . . . 6.0-1 6.0-40
Metal-Enclosed Load Interrupter
Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear (MEB) . . . . . . . . . 7.1-1 7.1-5
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear (MSB) . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 7.2-8
HLE Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.0-1, 9.0-2,
9.0-7, 9.0-8
Human Machine Interface (HMI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0-4
I
IBC (International Building Code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-20
IEEE 519-1992 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-23
IEEE Designations for Suffix Letters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-5
IEEE Device/Relay Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 1.5-4
IFS (Integrated Facility
Switchboards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6-1 21.6-9
ii-6
February 2012
Alphabetical Index
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet ii 006
Impedance Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-11 1.5-15
Conductors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-14
Distribution Transformers, Dry-Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-11
Power Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-11
Industrial Circuit Breakers, QUICKLAG
Solenoid-Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-13, 27.4-15
In-Phase Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-16
Input Harmonics, AC Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-5
Installation Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
Cooling Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
Installation Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-51
Instant Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21.11-1
Insulated Case Breaker Type SB . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-12, 26.1-13
InsulGard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1 5.3-3, 6.0-15,
7.3-4, 7.3-5, 8.0-9, 8.0-10
InsulGard Predictive Maintenance. . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.5-1 4.5-10
InsulGard Predictive Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.4-11
Integrated Facility Switchboards (IFS). . . . . . . . . 21.6-1 21.6-9
Integrated Panelboard SPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-4
Integrated Power Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.0-1 38.0-5
Integrated Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-3
IPAIntegrated Power Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . 38.0-1 38.0-5
IQ Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1 3.4-10
IQ Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4, 3.3-1 3.3-9
IQ Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-5
IQ DP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4
IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-15 3.2-20
IQ Energy Sentinel Bus Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-42
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-10 3.2-14
IQ Power Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-15 3.2-20
IQ 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-35 3.1-37
IQ 250 and IQ 260 Electronic Power Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-32
IQ 250/260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-32 3.1-34
IR Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
Isolation Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-4
K
Kits
CFX9000 Series Drives
CFX9000 Series Option Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-10
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relays
CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-17
C441 Overload Relays
Type 3R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-12
Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-6
Option Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-6
L
Lighting Contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2-1 30.2-11
Lighting Control Circuit Breakers
(Panelboards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1
Lighting Control System
Pow-R-Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23.0-1 23.7-2
Lightning and Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-14 1.4-21
Linear Actuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-4, 6.0-26
Liquid Filled Substation Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-2
Liquid Network Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-A, 18.0-5,
18.0-16, 18.0-17
Liquid-Filled Substation Transformers. . . . . . . 14.0-12, 14.0-13
Load Interrupter Switchgear,
Medium Voltage (MVS/WLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.1-1
Load Shedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-34, 1.4-35, 40.0-4, 40.2-11
Locations
Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.0-3
U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.0-3
Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12, 1.5-13
Low Resistance Grounding Schemes. . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-7 1.4-13
Low Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . .31.0-1 31.5-18
Low Voltage Breaker Drawout
Vacuum Starter Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . 41.5-10, 41.5-11
Low Voltage Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-1 24.0-52
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-12
Low Voltage Distribution
Dry-Type Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19.0-1 19.1-36
Low Voltage Distribution Switchboards . . . . . 21.0-1 21.11-2
Commercial Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.10-1 21.10-11
Multipoint Tenant Submetering . . . . . . . . .21.9-1 21.9-3
Low Voltage Fused Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28.0-1 28.0-27
Bus Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-39
Distribution Panelboards (FDP) . . . . . . . . . .22.0-1 22.0-3
Distribution Switchboards. . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-1 21.11-2
Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28.0-1 28.0-27
Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed
Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-21,
20.0-1 20.1-47, 26.0-1,
26.1-1 26.1-26
(Magnum DS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-21,
20.1-1 20.1-45
Low Voltage Motor Control Centers. . . . . . . . . .29.0-1 29.1-58
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-11, 1.3-12
Low Voltage Starters and Contactors. . . . . . . . . .30.0-1 30.7-2
Low Voltage Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-1 21.11-2
Low Voltage Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-13, 18.0-9, 20.1-1
Low Voltage System
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-7 1.4-13, 36.2-1 36.2-6
M
Magnetic Motor Starters, Full Voltage . . . . . . . .30.3-1 30.3-10
Magnetic Motor Starters, Reduced Voltage. . . .30.4-1 30.5-17
Electromagnetic Reduced Voltage . . . . . . .30.4-1 30.4-4
ii-7
February 2012
Alphabetical Index
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet ii 007
Solid-State Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-17
Magnum DS Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-1 26.1-26
Magnum DS Metal-Enclosed
Low Voltage Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-1 20.1-45
Magnum MDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-10
Magnum MDSX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-9
Magnum Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-27 26.1-30
Magnum SB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-12
Magnum SB Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-13
Magnum-Based Designs. . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1, 25.3-1 25.3-14
Manual Motor Starters,
Individual Enclosed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-1, 30.1-2
Matching the AFD to the Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
MD-3000
Motor Differential Relay . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.3-1, 4.3-2
MD-3000 Motor Differential Relay . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.3-1, 4.3-2
MEB Metal-Enclosed Breaker Switchgear
(Drawout Mounted Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-1 7.1-5
Medium Voltage Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-1 11.0-24
Medium Voltage Capacitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5-1 35.5-7
Medium Voltage Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-11, 9.0-1 9.0-11
Medium Voltage Load Interrupter
Switchgear (MVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14
Medium Voltage ME Front-Access
Vacuum Breaker Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-1 6.0-40
Medium Voltage Metal-Clad
Switchgear (VacClad-W). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-1 5.5-40
Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Bus . . . . . . . . 11.0-1 11.0-24
Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
MEB/MSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.0-1 7.3-5
MEF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-1 6.0-40
MVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-25
Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed
(MEF Front-Access Vacuum
Breaker Switchgear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-1 6.0-40
Medium Voltage Starters (AMPGARD) . . . . . . . 10.0-1 10.1-40
Medium Voltage Switches (MVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-14
Medium Voltage Switchgear
Selector Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-A
Medium Voltage Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . 12.0-1 12.0-13
Vacuum Breaker Transfer Switches. . . . . 12.0-2 12.0-13
Medium Voltage Transformer
Selector Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-A, 13.0-B
Metal-Clad Switchgear Medium Voltage
Arc-Resistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1 5.2-5,
5.5-19 5.5-40
Metal-Clad Switchgear (VacClad-W)
Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-1 5.5-40
Metal-Enclosed Breaker Switchgear
Medium Voltage (MSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 7.2-8
Metal-Enclosed Drawout Switchgear
Low Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.0-1 20.1-47
Magnum DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-1 20.1-47
Metal-Enclosed Load Interrupter
Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-25
Metering Devices
and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-21
IQ Additional Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1
IQ Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4, 3.3-1
IQ Analyzer 6000 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1
IQ DP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4
IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . .3.0-1, 3.0-3, 3.0-6, 3.2-15
IQ Multipoint Energy
Submeter II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.0-5, 3.2-10
IQ 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-35
IQ 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4
IQ 250/260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.0-3, 3.1-32
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit
for IQ 100/200 Series and
PXM 2000 Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1
Power Xpert Energy Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-31
Power Xpert 2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.1-20 3.1-30
Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000. . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.1-1 3.1-18
Sub-Network Master
Local Display (SMLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1
Metering Devices, Protective Relays
and Communications
Protective Relays
DP-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-3 4.3-5
VR-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-1 4.4-3
Metering SwitchboardsCommercial . . . . . 21.10-1 21.10-11
Metering, Protection and Control Devices
Addressable Relay II (ARII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-26
Breaker Interface Module II (BIMII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-24
and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-21
Digitrip 3000 Feeder
Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-1 4.1-5
Digitrip 3000Drawout
Case Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-8 4.1-10
Dual-Source Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-6, 4.1-7
EDR-3000 Eaton
Distribution Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-27 4.1-30
EDR-4000 Distribution
Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-31 4.1-37
EDR-5000 Distribution
EGR-4000 Generator
Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.3-12 4.3-21
ETR-4000 Generator
Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-6 4.3-11
Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.3-6 4.3-11
Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.0-1 4.0-4,
4.1-1 4.1-44
FP-4000 Feeder
ii-8
February 2012
Alphabetical Index
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet ii 008
Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-21 4.1-26
InsulGard Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.5-1 4.5-10
IQ Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4, 3.3-1 3.3-9, 3.4-1
IQ DP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4
IQ Energy Sentinel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-6, 3.2-15 3.2-20
Submeter II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-5, 3.2-10 3.2-14
IQ Power Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-6, 3.2-15 3.2-20
IQ 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-35 3.1-37
IQ 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4
IQ 250/260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-32 3.1-34
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-1 3.2-9
I/O Devices Digital Input
Module (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-25
MD-3000 Motor
Differential Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.0-1, 4.3-1, 4.3-2
Modbus Master INCOM
Network Translator (mMINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-3
Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.2-1 4.2-38
MP-3000 Motor
Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-11 4.2-16
MP-4000 Motor Protection
with Voltage Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.2-17 4.2-21
Power Xpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1 3.1-7
Power Xpert Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1, 2.1-6
Power Xpert 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3, 3.1-20 3.1-30
Product Operated Network
Interface (PONI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-23
PROFIBUS Master INCOM
Network Translator (PMINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-4
Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-37, 4.2-38
VR-300 Multifunctional
Voltage Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.4-1 4.4-3
Meters, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1
Microprocessor Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-15 26.1-22,
27.4-8, 27.4-9
Microprocessor-Based Metering Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-5
MOC Mechanism Operated Cell Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-24
Modbus MINT (mMINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-3
Molded Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-1
Molded-Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2-1
Monitoring Systems (Power Xpert) . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.4-1 2.4-12
Motor Application and
Performance (Drives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
Motor Circuit Protection
Selection Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-7, 1.5-8
Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-1, 27.4-38
Motor Control Centers
Medium Voltage (AMPGARD) . . . . . . . . . 10.0-1 10.2-16
Motor Control, Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-7 10.1-9,
30.4-1 30.5-17
Motor Differential Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.3-1, 4.3-2
Motor Load Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6
Constant Horsepower Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6
Constant Torque Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6
Variable Torque Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-6
Motor Load Types
and Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-5
Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5-7, 1.5-8, 27.2-2,
27.4-38 27.4-40
Overload Relays
C440/XT Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 4.2-4
C441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-5 4.2-10
Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 4.2-10
Motor Protection Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-7, 1.5-8
Motor Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.2-1 4.2-38
Motor Starters (AMPGARD)
Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.0-1 10.2-16
Motor Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-20, 1.3-21
Motor/Generator/Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-26, 1.4-27
MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.2-11 4.2-16
MSB Metal-Enclosed Breaker
Switchgear (Fixed Mounted Devices) . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 7.2-8
Multi-Pak Group Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.7-1, 30.7-2
Multiple Motor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
Multipoint Energy Submeter II (IQ) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-10 3.2-14
Multipoint Tenant Submetering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21.9-1 21.9-3
MVS Medium Voltage Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-1 8.0-25
N
NEMA Enclosure Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-13
NEMA Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-6
NEMA TP-1 Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-16
Network Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-1 2.1-26
Network Disconnects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-32
Network Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-11, 1.1-12,
18.0-1 18.0-39
CM52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18.0-20 18.0-23
MPCV Network Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18.0-25 18.0-28
Spot Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-11, 1.1-12,
18.0-2 18.0-15
Network Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-11, 1.1-12,
18.0-2 18.0-15
Network Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-6, 18.0-10 18.0-12,
18.0-16 18.0-19
Network Transition Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-33
Nonlinear Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4-21 1.4-23, 22.0-6,
29.1-20, 29.1-48
Nonlinear LoadsTransformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-11
Non-Segregated Phase Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-2, 11.0-7
ii-9
February 2012
Alphabetical Index
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet ii 009
NRX Breaker Communications
Adapter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-5
NRX (Series) Compact Power
Circuit Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-13
O
Oil Type Liquid Filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.0-2, 16.0-9
OPTIM Trip Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-5, 27.4-8, 27.4-9
OPTIMizer Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-5, 27.4-10
Options
CFX9000 Series Drives
Enclosed Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-13
Option Board Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3-10
Option Board Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-6
Other Third-Party
Integration Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.5-1 2.5-4
Output Current, AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
Output Harmonics, AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
Output Voltage and Frequency, AFD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
Overcurrent Protection
and Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-3 1.4-5
Overcurrent Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.2-21
DT-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-1 4.1-10
EDR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-31 4.1-37
EDR-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-38 4.1-44
FP-4000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-11 4.1-15
FP-5000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-16 4.1-20
FP-6000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-21 4.1-26
MD-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-1, 4.3-2
MP-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-11 4.2-16
MP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-17 4.2-21
Overload Relays
C440/XT Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 4.2-4
C441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-5 4.2-10
Freedom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 4.2-10
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.0-2
P
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-1 17.0-13
Panel Meters
Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-1 32.5-7
Panelboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-1 22.7-11
Paralleling Equipmentsee
Caterpillar Switchgear
Partial Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.5-1 4.5-10, 6.0-15, 7.3-4,
7.3-5, 8.0-9, 8.0-10, 11.0-2
Partial Discharge Sensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1 5.3-3
Passive Harmonic Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.0-8
PDUsee Power Distribution Units
Peak Shaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-36
Performance, Motor Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-2
Photovoltaic String Disconnect
Switch Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.2-4 39.2-6
Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-1 32.1-3
Plug-in Cable Tap Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-44
Plug-in Device Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-46
Plug-in Device Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-39
Plug-in Device Physical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-48
PONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-23, 2.5-1
Power Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.0-1 38.0-5
Power Breakers, Trip Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-10
Power Center, Unitized Dry-Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0-1 15.0-3
Power Circuit Breakers (DSII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-8, 27.4-9
Power Circuit Breakers (Magnum) . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-1 20.1-31,
26.1-1 26.1-26
Power Conditioning
Sag Ride Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-23 34.1-26
Power Conditioning Products . . . . . . . 34.0-1, 34.1-23 34.1-28
Power Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1 1.5-24
Power Equipment Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12, 1.5-13
Power Factor Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-2
Power Factor CorrectionCapacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.0-9
Power Factor, AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-5
Power Fusessee FusesMedium Voltage
Power Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-18 1.4-24
Power Sentinel (IQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.2-15 3.2-20
Power System Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1 1.1-19
Power System Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.4-1
GearGard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.4-2 41.4-8
Instant Response Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.4-1
Power System Predictive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.4-9
Partial Discharge Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.4-9
Power Takeoff Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-44
Power Xpert Energy Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-31
Power Xpert Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1, 2.1-6
Power Xpert Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.0-2, 3.1-1 3.1-7
Power Xpert 2000 Series . . . . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.0-3, 3.1-20 3.1-30
Power Xpert 2000 Series
Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-22
Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series . . . . . . 3.0-1, 3.1-1 3.1-18
PowerLynx Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.1-5
PowerNet Communication Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1 2.5-4
Addressable Relay II (ARII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-26
Breaker Interface Module II (BIMII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-24
C306 Motor Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1
Digital Input Module (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-1, 2.1-25
Digitrip 3000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . 4.1-1 4.1-5
Digitrip 3000Drawout Case Option . . . . . . 4.1-8 4.1-10
ii-10
February 2012
Alphabetical Index
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet ii 010
Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4,
4.1-21 4.1-26
Integral Protective Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-12
IQ Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1 3.4-10
IQ Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4, 3.3-1 3.3-9
IQ DP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4, 3.4-1
IQ Energy Sentinel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-6, 3.2-15 3.2-20
Submeter II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-5, 3.2-10 3.2-14
IQ Power Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-15 3.2-20
IQ 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-4
MP-3000 Motor
Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.2-11 4.2-16
MP-4000 Motor
Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.2-17 4.2-21
Product Operated Network
Interface (PONI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-23
Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.5-10
Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-22, 4.2-30,
4.2-37, 4.2-38
PowerPort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-10, 4.1-12, 4.1-14, 4.1-19,
4.1-24, 4.1-27, 4.1-36, 4.1-43,
4.2-13, 4.2-20, 4.2-22, 4.2-24,
4.2-26, 4.2-33, 4.2-35
Pow-R-Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1 23.7-2
Pow-R-Command Lighting
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1 23.7-2
Pow-R-Command 100 Panelboard. . . . . . 23.0-1, 23.6-1, 23.6-2
Pow-R-Command 1000 Panelboard. . . . . 23.0-1, 23.4-1, 23.4-2
Pow-R-Command 2000 Panelboard. . . . . 23.0-1, 23.3-1, 23.3-2
Pow-R-Command 25 Panelboard. . . . . . . 23.0-1, 23.7-1, 23.7-2
Pow-R-Command 5000 Panelboard. . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-1, 23.1-1
Pow-R-Command 750 Panelboard. . . . . . 23.0-1, 23.5-1, 23.5-2
Pow-R-Flex Low Ampere Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1-1
Pow-R-Line C Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-9, 21.0-10
Pow-R-Line Column Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6-1 22.6-5
Pow-R-Line i Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-11 21.0-13
Pow-R-Line 1a Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1-1 22.1-3,
22.7-5, 22.7-6
Pow-R-Line 1aF Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-1, 22.7-2
Pow-R-Line 1R Retrofit Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-1, 22.7-2
Pow-R-Line 2a Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2-1, 22.2-2
Pow-R-Line 2aF Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-7, 22.7-8
Pow-R-Line 2R Retrofit Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-3, 22.7-4
Pow-R-Line 3a Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3-1 22.3-4
Pow-R-Line 3E Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3-5, 22.3-6
Pow-R-Line 4 Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.4-1 22.4-9
Pow-R-Line 5P Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5-1 22.5-3
Predictive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-2
Predictive Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-2
Predictive Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.5-10
Primary Selective System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-6 1.1-10
Secondary 1000V & Above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.0-1 13.0-16
PROFIBUS Master INCOM
Network Translator (PMINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-4
Protective and Predictive Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.5-10
Protective Relay Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-5, 4.1-14, 4.1-19,
4.1-24, 4.2-14, 4.3-2,
5.4-26 5.4-28, 5.5-9, 5.5-10
Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 1.5-4, 4.0-1 4.5-10
DP-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.3-3 4.3-5
DT-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-1 4.1-10
EDR-3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-27 4.1-30
EDR-4000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-31 4.1-37
EDR-5000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-38 4.1-44
EGR-4000. . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-12 4.3-21
EMR-3000 . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-22 4.2-28
EMR-4000 . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-29 4.2-36
ETR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-6 4.3-11
FP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-11 4.1-15
FP-5000 . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-16 4.1-20, 7.1-2, 7.2-3
FP-6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-21 4.1-26
MD-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.3-1, 4.3-2
MP-3000 . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-11 4.2-16
MP-4000 . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.2-17 4.2-21
VR-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.4-1 4.4-3
Protective Relays
IEEE Device Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 1.5-4
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1
CompactSquare PushbuttonsE30 . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-2
C22 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-1
E30 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-2
E34 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-2
HT800 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-2
M22 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-1
Square PushbuttonsE30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-2
10250T Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1-1
PV System Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-34
Q
Quad Receptacle Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-45, 24.1-20, 24.1-21
Quick Connection Assembly
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.7-1, 21.7-2
QUICKLAG
Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-1 27.4-3,
27.4-11, 27.4-12
Solenoid-Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-13, 27.4-15
Solenoid-Operated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-13 27.4-16
ii-11
February 2012
Alphabetical Index
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet ii 011
R
Radial System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-6 1.1-9, 1.1-12, 1.3-7
Receptacle Plug-in Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-45
Reduced Voltage
Solid State Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-8
Reduced Voltage Motor Starters
DS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-26
Reduced Voltage, Medium Voltage Starters. . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-7
Reduced Voltage, Solid-State Starters . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-9
Reference Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.5-1
Regeneration Limit and Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
Relays
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1
Differential Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.3-1 4.3-5
Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1 4.0-4, 4.1-1 4.1-44
Ground Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.0-1, 32.2-1
Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10,
4.2-1 4.2-38
Overload
C440/XT Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 4.2-4
C441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-5 4.2-10
Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 4.2-10
Temperature Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-37
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.3-1 32.3-4,
32.4-5, 32.5-7
Voltage Monitoring Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.3-1 32.3-4
Remote Operated Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-2
RESIBLOC Cast Resin Transformers . . . . . . . . . 14.0-16, 14.0-17
Resistance Grounding Equipment . . . . .36.0-1, 36.1-1 36.1-5,
36.2-1 36.2-6
Resistance, Neutral Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.0-1
ResonanceCapacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.0-7
Retrofit Panelboards PRL-1R, PRL-2R . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-1, 22.7-4
Roll-up Generator Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.8-1, 21.8-2
Roll-up Generator Termination Boxes
(RUGTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.8-1
Rotary UPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-26, 1.4-27
S
Safety Switches
Factory Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-30, 28.0-31
Flex Centersee
Factory Modifications
Safety Switches (600V and Below) . . . . . . . . . . 28.0-1 28.0-31
Sag Ride Through
Power Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-23 34.1-26
Secondary Selective System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-9
Secondary Less than 1000Vsee
Unit Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1 14.0-47
Secondary Voltage Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-31, 1.4-32
Seismic Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-20 1.5-25
Selection Considerations for Drives
Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
Drive Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
Duty Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
Speed Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
Speed Regulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
Torque Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7
Selection Guides
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26.0-2, 27.0-2
Medium Voltage Switchgear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-A
Transformer Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-A, 13.0-B
Series G
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . 27.4-35
Series NRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-1 26.2-8
Series Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-10 22.0-20,
27.2-8 27.2-11
Component Ratings
(Breaker-Breaker and Fuse-Breaker). . . 27.2-8 27.2-11
Panelboard Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . 22.0-10 22.0-20
Series Surge Protector (AEGIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.0-1
Service Contract Offerings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1-3 41.1-5
Service Deviation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
Service Deviation Table,
Factors Affecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3
Short-Circuit Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3-1 1.3-5,
1.3-13 1.3-19
Short-Circuit Currents, Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-9, 1.5-10
Silicone Type Liquid Filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.0-2, 16.0-9
Single Receptacle Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24.0-45, 24.1-19
Soft Start Controllers
DS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-26
Soft Start Reduced Voltage
Soft Starters
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-13
Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-15
Solar Combiner Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39.3-1, 39.3-2
Solar DC Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.0-1, 39.2-1 39.2-7
Solar (PV) Systems Interconnect
Combiner Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39.3-1, 39.3-2
Solar DC Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.2-1 39.2-7
Solenoid Operated, Remote
Controlled Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.0-2
Solenoid-Operated, QUICKLAG
Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .27.4-13, 27.4-15
Sound Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4-36, 1.4-37,
13.0-13, 14.0-46, 16.0-8
Sparing Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-10, 1.1-11
SPD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-8
SPD Series Sidemount Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-6 34.1-13
ii-12
February 2012
Alphabetical Index
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet ii 012
SPD (Surge Protective Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-48
SPDsSurge Protection Products . . . . . . . . . . . 34.0-1 34.1-22
Speed Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3, 31.0-7
Speed Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-3, 31.0-7
Spot Network Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-1 18.0-39
Dry-Type Network Transformers . . . . . . . . 18.0-5, 18.0-9,
18.0-18, 18.0-34,
18.0-38, 18.0-39
Liquid-Type Network
Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-9, 18.0-16, 18.0-37
Network Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-1 18.0-39
Network Relaying
Type MPCV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-21, 18.0-25 18.0-28
Low Voltage
NEMA Rated Freedom. . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-7
Magnetic, Electromechanical
Full VoltageNEMA . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-7
Magnetic, Electromechanical
Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.4-4
Manual, Individual Enclosed. . . . . . . . 30.1-1, 30.1-2
NEMA, Magnetic
Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.4-4
Reduced Voltage,
Solid-State Starters . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-17
Solid-State Reduced Voltage . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-17
Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-25, 18.0-27
Spot Network Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-11, 1.1-12,
18.0-2 18.0-15
SPV Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-16, 34.1-17
SP1 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-21, 34.1-22
Standard and Optional Features . . . . . 25.0-1, 25.5-1 25.5-19
Standards
BuswayMedium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0-2
Standby UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-29, 1.4-30
Starters
AMPGARD Medium Voltage
Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0-1 10.2-25
Autotransformer Starters (LV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-2
Enclosure Types and Box Sizes . . . . . . . . . 30.6-1 30.6-3
Freedom Starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-7
Magnetic Motor Starters
Full Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-10
Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.4-4
Manual Motor Starters,
Individual Enclosed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1-1, 30.1-2
Multi-Pak Group Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.7-1, 30.7-2
NEMA Motor Starters
Electromechanical Full Voltage
Enclosure Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-8 30.3-10
Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3-1 30.3-7
NEMA Motor Starters
Microprocessor-based
Electromechanical Full Voltage . . . 30.3-1 30.3-10
Reduced Voltage
DS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-26
Reduced VoltageMagnetic,
Electromechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.4-1 30.4-5
Reduced Voltage
Solid-State Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5-1 30.5-17
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1-1
Static Bypass Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-28 1.4-30
Static Disconnect Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-26, 1.4-27
Static Power Factor Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.4-1
Static Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-28 1.4-30
Static Switching Power Factorsee Capacitors
Static UPSUninterruptible
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-28 1.4-30
Static Bypass Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-28 1.4-30
Static Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-26, 1.4-27
Studies
Harmonic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.2-1
Motor Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.2-1
Power Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.2-1
Power Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.2-1
Substation Study and Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.2-1
Sub-Feed Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1-2, 22.2-2
Substation TransformersPrimary . . . . . . . . . 13.0-1 13.0-16,
16.0-1 16.0-8
Surge Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-7
Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34.1-1 34.1-22
Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-19 1.4-21, 22.0-6
Medium Voltage. . . . . . . 1.4-14 1.4-17, 5.4-17 5.4-19,
7.3-2, 8.0-14
Surge Protection (SPD) &
Power Conditioning Products. . . . . . . . . . . . .34.0-1 34.1-28
Surge Protective Device
(SPD) Voltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-48
Surge Protective Device (SPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-4, 24.1-18
Surge Protective Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-48
AEGIS Powerline Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-20
AEGIS Series Type for
Critical Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-20
CVX Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-18, 34.1-19
SPD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-6, 34.1-1 34.1-15
SPV Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-16, 34.1-17
SP1 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-21, 34.1-22
Surge Protective Devices
in Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-20, 1.4-21
Surge Protective Devices (SPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-14 1.4-17
Surge Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-14 1.4-17, 29.1-48
SVX Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . .31.4-1 31.4-20
Switchboards
Commerical Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.10-1 21.10-11
General and Summary Info
(Including Circuit Breaker
and Fusible Switch Ratings) . . . . . . . . . .21.0-1 21.0-5
Generator Quick Connect
Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.7-1, 21.7-2
IFS (Integrated Facility Systems) . . . . . . . .21.6-1 21.6-9
Instant Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.11-1
Magnum SB, Drawout
Insulated Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21.5-1 21.5-11
Multipoint Tenant Submetering . . . . . . . . .21.9-1 21.9-3
ii-13
February 2012
Alphabetical Index
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet ii 013
Outdoor Enclosures for
Pow-R-Line C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-1, 21.4-2
Pow-R-Line C Front-Access,
Group-Mounted Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . 21.0-1 21.0-10
(RUGTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.8-1
SwitchboardsLow Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-22
Switchgear
Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-13, 18.0-9, 20.1-1
Arc-Resistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1 5.2-5,
5.5-19 5.5-40
Communications and
Supplemental Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-4
Drawout Vacuum Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-1 5.1-13,
5.4-1 5.5-18
Partial Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1 5.3-3
(VCP-W Drawout
Vacuum Breakers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-5 1.3-10,
5.0-1 5.1-13, 5.4-1 5.5-18,
13.0-4, 13.0-10, 14.0-23, 14.0-24,
14.0-26, 14.0-27
(MEB Drawout
Vacuum Breakers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-5 1.3-10, 7.0-1,
7.1-2 7.1-5,
13.0-4, 13.0-10
(MEF Front-Access Vacuum
Breaker Switchgear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-1 6.0-40
(MSB Fixed Mounted
Vacuum Breaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-5 1.3-10, 7.0-1,
7.2-1 7.2-8, 13.0-4,
13.0-10, 14.0-23, 14.0-24,
14.0-26, 14.0-27
(MVS Fusible Interrupter
Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-11, 8.0-1 8.0-14,
13.0-4, 13.0-10,
14.0-23 14.0-27
Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage
(DSII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-21, 20.0-1
Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage
(Magnum DS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-1, 14.0-21,
14.0-25 14.0-27, 14.0-39,
20.0-1, 20.1-1 20.1-45
Synchronous Motor Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-10
Synchronous Motor Starters,
Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-1, 10.1-10
System Analysis, Power Distribution . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.3-1 1.3-24
System Application Considerations . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.4-1 1.4-37
System Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . 1.0-1, 1.1-1 1.1-19,
1.3-1 1.3-24, 1.4-1 1.4-37,
35.0-3 35.0-14
System Reference Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1 1.5-25
T
TC-100 Transformer Temperature
Controller for Dry-Type Transformers . . . 4.0-1, 4.4-4 4.4-6
Temperature Protection
RTD Monitoring of Motors
and Associated Equipment . . . . . 4.2-22, 4.2-29, 4.2-37
Transformer Fan Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-44
Tenant SubmeteringMultipoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.9-1 21.9-3
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.1-1, 41.1-2
Through-Feed Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0-5
Time-Current Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-9
Timers
Elapsed Timers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-1 32.5-3
Timer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-1, 32.5-4 32.5-7
TOC Truck Operated Cell Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-24
Torque Indicating Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-51
Torque Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31.0-5, 31.0-7
Training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41.1-2, 41.1-3
Transfer Switch Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1 25.0-8
Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-1 25.5-19
ATC Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-1 25.4-16
Automatic Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-2
Breaker-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2-1 25.2-11
Bypass Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1-7
Contactor-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1-1 25.1-15
Magnum-Based Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3-1 25.3-14
Service Entrance Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-4
Standard and Optional Features. . . . . . . . 25.5-1 25.5-19
Transfer Switch Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0-2 25.0-7
Transfer Switches, Medium Voltage,
Vacuum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0-1 12.0-13
Transformer Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-13 1.3-15, 1.3-19,
1.5-11, 18.0-6
Transformer Predictive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . 41.4-10 41.4-12
Transformer Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.1-2, 9.0-2,
9.0-7 9.0-11, 14.0-41 14.0-43,
17.0-6, 27.3-6, 27.3-7
Transformer Temperature Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1
TC-100 for Dry-Type Transformers. . . . . . . . . 4.4-4 4.4-6
Transformers
Dry-Type Primary Unit Substation . . . . . . 13.0-9 13.0-12
Dry-Type Secondary
Unit Substation . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-14, 14.0-15, 14.0-26,
14.0-27, 14.0-35,
14.0-37, 14.0-38
Dry-Type, Distribution Type (DT-3). . . . . . 19.0-1 19.1-37
Efficiency Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-32
IFS Mounted Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6-1 21.6-9
Liquid-Type Primary Unit Substation. . . . . 13.0-2 13.0-8
Liquid-Type Secondary
Unit Substation . . . . . . . . . . 14.0-12, 14.0-13, 14.0-23,
14.0-24, 14.0-31, 14.0-43, 14.0-46
ii-14
February 2012
Alphabetical Index
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet ii 014
Loss Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12, 1.5-13
Motor Drive Isolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-18
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0-6, 18.0-8 18.0-12
Pad Mounted (Liquid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0-1 17.0-13
Short-Circuit Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-9, 1.5-10
Sparing Transformer System. . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-10, 1.1-11
Three-Phase
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1-22
Transformer Losses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12
Winding Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-5
Transient-Free Statically Switched
Capacitor Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.4-1
Trip Units
Digitrip 1150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-11, 20.1-14,
26.1-20, 26.2-4
Trip Units Medium Voltage
Digitrip 520V, 520MCV, 1150V . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-11, 6.0-12
Trip Units (Low Voltage) Microprocessor . . . . . . . 27.1-2, 27.4-8
Trip Units, Magnum DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-15 26.1-21
Digitrip 1150+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1-19
Digitrip 520. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-11, 20.1-14, 26.1-18,
26.1-20, 26.2-4
Digitrip 520M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-11, 20.1-14, 26.1-18,
26.1-20, 26.2-4
Digitrip 520MC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-11, 26.1-18, 26.1-20
TRI-PAC Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-4, 27.4-4,
27.4-46, 27.4-47
TVSSsee SPDsSurge Protection Products
Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and
Column Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-10, 22.7-11
U
UBC (Uniform Building Code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-20
Uninterruptible Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.0-1 33.6-1
Eaton Software and Connectivity. . . . . . . 33.4-1 33.4-11
ConnectUPS Web/SNMP
Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-7, 33.4-8
Eaton Extensions for
IBM Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-4
Eaton LanSafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-2, 33.4-3
Eaton Modbus Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-10
Eaton Modbus Profiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-5
Eaton Multiview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-4
Eaton Netwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-5
Expansion Chasis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-11
Forseer Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-1
Intelligent Power Software Suite . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-5
Multi-Server Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-9
Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-6
Power Xpert Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-1
Relay Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4-8, 33.4-9
Serial Protocol Products . . . . . . . . . 33.4-9 33.4-11
General Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-1 33.1-3
Data Center and Facility UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-2
Eaton BladeUPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-2
Eaton Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-2
Eaton EX RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-1
Eaton Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-3
Eaton 5110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-1
Eaton 9130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-1
Eaton 9390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-2
ePDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-2
Network and Server UPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-1
PC/Workstation and Home A/V UPS . . . . . . . . 33.1-1
Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-2
Software and Connectivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-3
Surge Suppressors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1-2
Glossary of Power Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.6-1
Large Three-Phase Units
Eaton 9395 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.3-1 33.3-27
Automatic Hot-Tie System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3-4
Battery Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3-5
ENERSYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3-6
Static Auto-Tie System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3-4
Power Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.5-1 33.5-39
Power Xpert Gateway
PDP Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.5-3
Remote Power Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.5-40 33.5-48
Three-Phase Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.2-1 33.2-49
Eaton 9355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.2-1 33.2-10
Eaton 9390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.2-11 33.2-49
Eaton 9390 IAC-SB or IAT-ST. . . . .33.2-44 33.2-47
Eaton 9390 Integrated
Accessory Cabinet
(IAC-B and IAT-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-44
Eaton 9390 Integrated Accessory
Cabinet-Distribution
(IAC-D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.2-39 33.2-43
Eaton 9390 Integrated
Accessory Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2-38
Eaton 9390 UPS Integrated
Battery Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . .33.2-21 33.2-28
Eaton 9390 UPS Integrated
Distribution Cabinet . . . . . . . . . .33.2-29 33.2-37
UNIPAK600V Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1-4
UNIPUMPCapacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1-1
UNIPUMPsee Capacitors
Unit Substations
Secondary 1000V & Above . . . . . . . . . .13.0-1 13.0-16
Secondary Less than 1000V . . . . . . . . .14.0-1 14.0-47
Unitized Power Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.0-1 15.0-3
UNIVAR 15 kV Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5-6
UNIVAR 5 kV Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5-1
Universal RTD Module. . . . . . . . . . .4.0-1, 4.2-11, 4.2-37, 4.2-38
UPSUninterruptible
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-25 1.4-30
URTD (Universal RTD Module) . . . .4.0-1, 4.2-11, 4.2-37, 4.2-38
V
VacClad-W Metal-Clad Switchgear. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0-1 5.5-40
Vacuum Breaker Transfer Switch (VCP-W)
5 Cycle, Medium Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.0-2 12.0-13
Vacuum Breakers (MEB or MSB) . . . 7.1-1 7.1-5, 7.2-1 7.2-8
Vacuum Breakers (VCP-W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-1, 5.1-3
ii-15
February 2012
Alphabetical Index
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet ii 015
Variable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-1 31.2-14,
31.5-1 31.5-18
VCP-T/VCP-TL MV Vacuum Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-2 6.0-4
Voltage Classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
Voltage Drop
Busway Voltage Drop Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0-46
Cable Voltage Drop
Calculation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-22 1.3-24
Voltage Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1
Voltage Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
Voltage Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-4
Voltage (Nominal System Voltages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
VPR Voltage Protection Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1-14, 34.1-15
VR Series MV Vacuum Replacement
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.5-12 41.5-17
VR-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-1 4.4-3
Voltage Relay . . . . . . . . . 4.0-1, 4.0-8 4.0-10, 4.4-1 4.4-3
W
Watt Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-12, 1.5-13
Waveform Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3, 3.1-1 3.1-30,
3.3-1, 3.3-2, 27.4-8
Waveform Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.0-3 3.0-6,
3.1-1 3.1-30, 3.3-1, 3.3-2
Web-Enabled Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-2, 3.1-1 3.1-30
Wire Ampacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-16 1.5-18
Wiring
Zone Selective Interlocking . . . . . . . . 4.1-4, 4.1-11, 4.1-16
WLIsee MVS
X
XLM Generator Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.2-1 40.2-12
Z
Zone Interlocking
Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26.1-22, 27.1-6
Medium Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-4, 4.1-11, 4.1-16
Zone Selective Interlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1-7
ii-16
February 2012
Alphabetical Index
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet ii 016
This page intentionally left blank.


September 2011

Contents

1.0-1

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

01

001

P
o
w
e
r

D
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n
S
y
s
t
e
m
s


System Design

Basic Principles. . . . . . . . . . .

1.1-1

Modern Electric Power
Technologies . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1-1

Goals of System Design . . .

1.1-2

Voltage Classications; BILs
Basic Impulse Levels . . . . .

1.1-4

Three-Phase Transformer
Winding Connections . . . .

1.1-5

Types of SystemsRadial,
Loop, Selective, Two-Source,
Sparing Transformer, Spot
Network, Distribution . . . .

1.1-6

Health Care Facility
Design Considerations . . .

1.1-14

Generator Systems . . . . . .

1.1-17
Generator System Design

Types of Generators. . . . . . .

1.2-1

Generator Systems . . . . . . .

1.2-2

Generator Grounding. . . . . .

1.2-3

Generator Controls. . . . . . . .

1.2-4

Generator Short-Circuit
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . .

1.2-4

Generator Protection . . . . . .

1.2-5
System Analysis

Systems Analysis . . . . . . . . .

1.3-1

Short-Circuit Currents . . . . .

1.3-2

Fault Current Waveform
Relationships . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3-3

Fault Current Calculations
and Methods Index . . . . . .

1.3-4

Determine X and R from
Transformer Loss Data . . .

1.3-19

Voltage Drop
Considerations . . . . . . . . . .

1.3-20
System Application Considerations

Capacitors and
Power Factor

. . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-1

and Coordination . . . . . . . .

1.4-3

Protection of Conductors. . .

1.4-5

Circuit Breaker Cable
Temperature Ratings . . . . .

1.4-5

Zone Selective Interlocking .

1.4-5

Ground Fault Protection . . .

1.4-6

Suggested Ground
Fault Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4-6
Grounding/Ground Fault Protection

GroundingEquipment,
System, MV System,
LV System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4-9

Ground Fault Protection. . . .

1.4-11

Lightning and Surge
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4-14

Grounding Electrodes. . . . . .

1.4-14

MV Equipment Surge
Protection Considerations .

1.4-14

Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . .

1.4-14

Types of Surge
Protection Devices . . . . . . .

1.4-15
Power Quality

Terms, Technical Overview . .

1.4-18

SPD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4-19

Harmonics and
Nonlinear Loads . . . . . . . . .

1.4-21

UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4-25
Other Application Considerations

Secondary Voltage . . . . . . . .

1.4-31

Energy Conservation . . . . . .

1.4-32

Building Control Systems . .

1.4-33

Distributed Energy
Resources

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33

Cogeneration. . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4-33

PV System Design
Considerations . . . . . . . . . .

1.4-34

Emergency Power. . . . . . . . .

1.4-35

Peak Shaving. . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4-36

Sound Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4-36
Reference Data

IEEE Protective Relay
Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5-1

Codes and Standards . . . . . .

1.5-6

Motor Protective
Device Data. . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5-7

Chart of Short-Circuit
Currents for Transformers . .

1.5-9

Transformer Full Load
Amperes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5-10

Impedances Data . . . . . . . . .

1.5-11

Transformer Losses,
TP-1 Losses. . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5-12

Power Equipment Losses . . .

1.5-13

NEMA Enclosure Denitions

. .

1.5-13

Cable R, X, Z Data . . . . . . . . .

1.5-14

Conductor Ampacities . . . . .

1.5-16

Conductor Temperature
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5-16

Formulas and Terms. . . . . . .

1.5-19

Seismic Requirements . . . . .

1.5-20
Designing a Distribution System
1.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

01

002



1.1-1

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

01

System Design

003

Basic Principles

The best distribution system is one
that will, cost-effectively and safely,
supply adequate electric service to
both present and future probable
loadsthis section is included to aid
in selecting, designing and installing
such a system.
The function of the electric power
distribution system in a building or
an installation site is to receive power
at one or more supply points and
to deliver it to the individual lamps,
motors and all other electrically
operated devices. The importance
of the distribution system to the
function of a building makes it almost
imperative that the best system be
designed and installed.
In order to design the best distribution
system, the system design engineer
must have information concerning the
loads and a knowledge of the various
types of distribution systems that are
applicable. The various categories of
buildings have many specic design
challenges, but certain basic principles
are common to all. Such principles,
if followed, will provide a soundly
executed design.
The basic principles or factors requir-
ing consideration during design of
the power distribution system include:

Functions of structure, present
and future

Life and exibility of structure

Locations of service entrance and
distribution equipment, locations
and characteristics of loads,
locations of unit substations

Demand and diversity factors
of loads

Sources of power; including
normal, standby and emergency
(see

Tab 40

)

Continuity and quality of
power available and required
(see

Tab 33

)

Energy efciency and management

Distribution and utilization voltages

Bus and/or cable feeders

Distribution equipment and
motor control

Power and lighting panelboards
and motor control centers

Types of lighting systems

Installation methods

Power monitoring systems

Electric utility requirements

Modern Electric Power
Technologies

Several new factors to consider in
modern power distribution systems
result from two relatively recent
changes. The rst recent change is
utility deregulation. The traditional
dependence on the utility for problem
analysis, energy conservation mea-
surements and techniques, and a
simplied cost structure for electricity
has changed. The second change is less
obvious to the designer yet will have
an impact on the types of equipment
and systems being designed. It is the
diminishing quantity of qualied build-
ing electrical operators, maintenance
departments and facility engineers.
Modern electric power technologies
may be of use to the designer and
building owner in addressing these
new challenges. The advent of micro-
processor devices (smart devices)
into power distribution equipment has
expanded facility owners options and
capabilities, allowing for automated
communication of vital power system
information (both energy data and
system operation information) and
electrical equipment control.
These technologies may be grouped as:

Power monitoring and control

Building management systems
interfaces

Lighting control

Automated energy management

Predictive diagnostics
Various sections of this guide cover
the application and selection of such
systems and components that may be
incorporated into the power equip-
ment being designed. See

Tabs 2, 3, 4,
23

and

41

.
1.1-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

01

System Design

004

Goals of System Design

When considering the design of an
electrical distribution system for
a given customer and facility, the
electrical engineer must consider
alternate design approaches that
best t the following overall goals.

1. Safety

: The No. 1 goal is to design
a power system that will not
present any electrical hazard to
the people who use the facility,
and/or the utilization equipment
fed from the electrical system.
It is also important to design a
system that is inherently safe for
the people who are responsible
for electrical equipment
maintenance and upkeep.
The National Electrical Code

(NEC

), NFPA

70 and NFPA 70E,
as well as local electrical codes,
provide minimum standards and
requirements in the area of wiring
design and protection, wiring
methods and materials, as well
as equipment for general use with
the overall goal of providing safe
electrical distribution systems
and equipment.
The NEC also covers

minimum

requirements for special
occupancies including hazardous
locations and special use type
facilities such as health care
facilities, places of assembly,
theaters and the like, and the
equipment and systems located in
these facilities. Special equipment
and special conditions such as
emergency systems, standby
systems and communication
systems are also covered in
the code.
It is the responsibility of the design
engineer to be familiar with the
NFPA and NEC code requirements
as well as the customers facility,
process and operating procedures;
to design a system that protects
personnel from live electrical
conductors and uses adequate
circuit protective devices that will
selectively isolate overloaded or
faulted circuits or equipment as
quickly as possible.

2. Minimum Initial Investment

:
The owners overall budget for
rst cost purchase and installa-
tion of the electrical distribution
system and electrical utilization
equipment will be a key factor
in determining which of various
alternate system designs are to be
selected. When trying to minimize
initial investment for electrical
equipment, consideration should
be given to the cost of installation,
oor space requirements and
possible extra cooling require-
ments as well as the initial
purchase price.

3. Maximum Service Continuity

:
The degree of service continuity
and reliability needed will vary
depending on the type and use
of the facility as well as the loads
or processes being supplied by
the electrical distribution system.
For example, for a smaller
commercial ofce building, a
power outage of considerable
time, say several hours, may be
acceptable, whereas in a larger
commercial building or industrial
plant only a few minutes may be
acceptable. In other facilities such
as hospitals, many critical loads
permit a maximum of 10 seconds
outage and certain loads, such
as real-time computers, cannot
tolerate a loss of power for even
a few cycles.
Typically, service continuity and
reliability can be increased by:
A. Supplying multiple utility power
sources or services.
B. Supplying multiple connection
paths to the loads served.
C. Using short-time rated power
circuit breakers.
D. Providing alternate customer-
owned power sources such as
generators or batteries supplying
uninterruptable power supplies.
E. Selecting the highest quality elec-
trical equipment and conductors.
F. Using the best installation methods.
G. Designing appropriate system
alarms, monitoring and diagnostics.
H. Selecting preventative mainte-
nance systems or equipment to
alarm before an outage occurs.

4. Maximum Flexibility and
Expendability

: In many industrial
manufacturing plants, electrical
utilization loads are periodically
relocated or changed requiring
changes in the electrical distribu-
tion system. Consideration of
the layout and design of the
electrical distribution system to
accommodate these changes
must be considered. For example,
providing many smaller trans-
formers or loadcenters associated
with a given area or specic
groups of machinery may lend
more exibility for future changes
than one large transformer; the
use of plug-in busways to feed
selected equipment in lieu of
conduit and wire may facilitate
future revised equipment layouts.
In addition, consideration must be
given to future building expansion,
and/or increased load require-
ments due to added utilization
equipment when designing the
electrical distribution system.
In many cases considering trans-
formers with increased capacity
or fan cooling to serve unexpected
loads as well as including spare
additional protective devices and/
or provision for future addition of
these devices may be desirable.
Also to be considered is increasing
appropriate circuit capacities or
quantities for future growth.
Power monitoring communication
systems connected to electronic
metering can provide the trending
and historical data necessary for
future capacity growth.


1.1-3

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

01

System Design

005

5. Maximum Electrical Efciency
(Minimum Operating Costs)

:
Electrical efciency can generally
be maximized by designing
systems that minimize the losses
in conductors, transformers and
utilization equipment. Proper
voltage level selection plays a
key factor in this area and will
be discussed later. Selecting
equipment, such as transformers,
with lower operating losses,
generally means higher rst cost
and increased oor space require-
ments; thus, there is a balance
to be considered between the
owners utility energy change
for the losses in the transformer
or other equipment versus the
owners rst cost budget and
cost of money.

6. Minimum Maintenance Cost:
Usually the simpler the electrical
system design and the simpler
the electrical equipment, the less
the associated maintenance costs
and operator errors. As electrical
systems and equipment become
more complicated to provide
greater service continuity or
exibility, the maintenance costs
and chance for operator error
increases. The systems should be
designed with an alternate power
circuit to take electrical equipment
(requiring periodic maintenance)
out of service without dropping
essential loads. Use of drawout
type protective devices such as
breakers and combination starters
can also minimize maintenance
cost and out-of-service time.
7. Maximum Power Quality:
The power input requirements
of all utilization equipment has
to be considered including the
acceptable operating range of
the equipment and the electrical
distribution system has to be
designed to meet these needs.
For example, what is the required
input voltage, current, power
factor requirement? Consider-
ation to whether the loads are
affected by harmonics (multiples
of the basic 60 Hz sine wave) or
generate harmonics must be taken
into account as well as transient
voltage phenomena.
The above goals are interrelated
and in some ways contradictory.
As more redundancy is added to
the electrical system design along
with the best quality equipment
to maximize service continuity,
exibility and expandability, and
power quality, the more initial
investment and maintenance
are increased. Thus, the designer
must weigh each factor based
on the type of facility, the loads
to be served, the owners past
experience and criteria.
Summary
It is to be expected that the engineer
will never have complete load infor-
mation available when the system is
designed. The engineer will have to
expand the information made avail-
able to him on the basis of experience
with similar problems. Of course, it
is desirable that the engineer has as
much denite information as possible
concerning the function, requirements,
and characteristics of the utilization
devices. The engineer should know
whether certain loads function
separately or together as a unit, the
magnitude of the demand of the loads
viewed separately and as units, the rated
voltage and frequency of the devices,
their physical location with respect
to each other and with respect to the
source and the probability and possi-
bility of the relocation of load devices
and addition of loads in the future.
Coupled with this information, a
knowledge of the major types of electric
power distribution systems equips the
engineers to arrive at the best system
design for the particular building.
It is beyond the scope of this guide to
present a detailed discussion of loads
that might be found in each of several
types of buildings. Assuming that the
design engineer has assembled the
necessary load data, the following
pages discuss some of the various
types of electrical distribution systems
that can be used. The description of
types of systems, and the diagrams
used to explain the types of systems
on the following pages omits the
location of utility revenue metering
equipment for clarity. A discussion of
short-circuit calculations, coordination,
voltage selection, voltage drop, ground
fault protection, motor protection and
other specic equipment protection
is also presented.
1.1-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
006
Voltage Classications
ANSI and IEEE
standards dene
various voltage classications for
single-phase and three-phase systems.
The terminology used divides voltage
classes into:
Low voltage
Medium voltage
High voltage
Extra-high voltage
Ultra-high voltage
Table 1.1-1 presents the nominal sys-
tem voltages for these classications.
Table 1.1-1. Standard Nominal System
Voltages and Voltage Ranges
(From IEEE Standard 141-1993)
BILBasic Impulse Levels
ANSI standards dene recommended
and required BIL levels for:
Metal-clad switchgear
(typically vacuum breakers)
Metal-enclosed switchgear (typically
load interrupters, switches)
Liquid immersed transformers
Dry-type transformers
Table 1.1-2 through Table 1.1-5 contain
those values.
Table 1.1-2. Metal-Clad Switchgear Voltage
and Insulation Levels (From ANSI/IEEE
C37.20.2-1999)
Table 1.1-3. Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
Voltage and Insulation Levels
(From ANSI C37.20.3-1987)
Table 1.1-4. Liquid-Immersed
Transformers Voltage and Basic
Lightning Impulse Insulation Levels (BIL)
(From ANSI/IEEE C57.12.00-2000)
BIL values in bold typeface are listed as

standard. Others listed are in common use.
Table 1.1-5. Dry-Type Transformers Voltage
and Basic Lightning Impulse Insulation
Levels (BIL)From ANSI/IEEE C57.12.01-1998)
BIL values in bold typeface are listed as

standard. Others listed are in common use.
Optional higher levels used where exposure
to overvoltage occurs and higher protection
margins are required.
Lower levels where surge arrester

protective devices can be applied with
lower spark-over levels.
Voltage Recommendations by
Motor Horsepower
Some factors affecting the selection
of motor operating voltage include:
Motor, motor starter and cable
rst cost
Motor, motor starter and cable
installation cost
Motor and cable losses
Motor availability
Voltage drop
Qualications of the building
operating staff; and many more
The following table is based in part
on the above factors and experience.
Because all the factors affecting the
selection are rarely known, it is only
an approximate guideline.
Table 1.1-6. Selection of Motor Horsepower
Ratings as a Function of System Voltage
Voltage
Class
Nominal System Voltage
Three-Wire Four-Wire
Low
voltage
240/120
240
480
600
208Y/120
240/120
480Y/277
Medium
voltage
2400
4160
4800
6900
13,200
13,800
23,000
34,500
46,000
69,000
4160Y/2400
8320Y/4800
12000Y/6930
12470Y/7200
13200Y/7620
13800Y/7970
20780Y/12000
22860Y/13200
24940Y/14400
34500Y/19920
High
voltage
115,000
138,000
161,000
230,000
Extra-high
voltage
345,000
500,000
765,000
Ultra-high
voltage
1,100,000
Rated Maximum
Voltage (kV rms)
Impulse
Withstand (kV)
4.76
8.25
15.0
60
95
95
27.0
38.0
125
150
Rated Maximum
Voltage (kV rms)
Impulse
Withstand (kV)
4.76
8.25
15.0
60
75
95
15.5
25.8
38.0
110
125
150
Applica-
tion
Nominal
System
Voltage
(kV rms)
BIL
(kV Crest)
Distribu-
tion
1.2
2.5
5.0
30
45
60
8.7
15.0
25.0
75
95
150
125
34.5
46.0
69.0
200
250
350
150
200
250
125
Power 1.2
2.5
5.0
45
60
75
30
45
60
8.7
15.0
25.0
95
110
150
75
95
34.5
46.0
69.0
200
250
350
200
250
115.0
138.0
161.0
550
650
750
450
550
650
350
450
550
230.0
345.0
500.0
765.0
900
1175
1675
2050
825
1050
1550
1925
750
900
1425
1800
650
1300
Nominal
System
Voltage
(kV rms)
BIL (kV Crest)
1.2
2.5
5.0
8.7
10
20
30
45
20
30
45
60
30
45
60
95
15.0
25.0
34.5
95
60
110
125
95
125
150
110
150
200
Motor Voltage
(Volts)
Motor
hp Range
System
Voltage
460
2300
4000
up to 500
250 to 2000
250 to 3000
480
2400
4160
4600
13,200
250 to 3000
above 2000
4800
13,800
1.1-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
007
Table 1.1-7. Three-Phase Transformer Winding Connections
Phasor
Diagram
Notes
1. Suitable for both ungrounded and effectively grounded sources.
2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire service with a mid-tap ground.
2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire grounded service with
XO grounded.
3. With XO grounded, the transformer acts as a ground source for the
secondary system.
4. Fundamental and harmonic frequency zero-sequence currents in the secondary
lines supplied by the transformer do not ow in the primary lines. Instead the
zero sequence currents circulate in the closed delta primary windings.
5. When supplied from an effectively grounded primary system does not see load
unbalances and ground faults in the secondary system.
2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire delta service with a mid-tap ground.
3. Grounding the primary neutral of this connection would create a ground source
for the primary system. This could subject the transformer to severe overloading
during a primary system disturbance or load unbalance.
4. Frequently installed with mid-tap ground on one leg when supplying
combination three-phase and single-phase load where the three-phase
load is much larger than single-phase load.
5. When used in 25 kV and 35 kV three-phase four-wire primary systems,
ferroresonance can occur when energizing or de-energizing the transformer
using single-pole switches located at the primary terminals. With smaller kVA
transformers the probability of ferroresonance is higher.
2. Suitable for a three-wire service only, even if XO is grounded.
3. This connection is incapable of furnishing a stabilized neutral and its use may
result in phase-to-neutral overvoltage (neutral shift) as a result of unbalanced
phase-to-neutral load.
4. If a three-phase unit is built on a three-legged core, the neutral point of the
primary windings is practically locked at ground potential.
1. Suitable for four-wire effectively grounded source only.
2. Suitable for a three-wire service or for four-wire grounded service with
XO grounded.
3. Three-phase transformers with this connection may experience stray ux tank
heating during certain external system unbalances unless the core conguration
(four or ve legged) used provides a return path for the ux.
4. Fundamental and harmonic frequency zero-sequence currents in the secondary
lines supplied by the transformer also ow in the primary lines (and primary
neutral conductor).
5. Ground relay for the primary system may see load unbalances and ground
faults in the secondary system. This must be considered when coordinating
overcurrent protective devices.
6. Three-phase transformers with the neutral points of the high voltage and low
voltage windings connected together internally and brought out through an
HOXO bushing should not be operated with the HOXO bushing ungrounded
(oating). To do so can result in very high voltages in the secondary systems.
2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire service with a mid-tap ground.
3. When using the tap for single-phase circuits, the single-phase load kVA should
not exceed 5% of the three-phase kVA rating of the transformer. The three-phase
rating of the transformer is also substantially reduced.
H2
H1 H3
X2
X1 X3
DELTA-DELTA Connection
Phasor
Diagram:
Angular Displacement (Degrees): 0
H2
H1 H3
X2
X1
X3
DELTA-WYE Connection
Phasor
Diagram:
X0
H2
H1 H3
X2
X1
X3
WYE-DELTA Connection
Phasor
Diagram:
H2
H1 H3
WYE-WYE Connection
Phasor
Diagram:
X2
X1 X3
X0
H2
H1 H3
GROUNDED WYE-WYE Connection
Phasor
Diagram:
X2
X1 X3
X0 H0
H2
H1 H3
X2
X1 X3
DELTA-DELTA Connection with Tap
Phasor
Diagram:
X4
1.1-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
008
Types of Systems
In many cases, power is supplied by
the utility to a building at the utilization
voltage. In these cases, the distribution
of power within the building is achieved
through the use of a simple radial
distribution system.
In cases where the utility service voltage
is at some voltage higher than the
utilization voltage within the building,
the system design engineer has a choice
of a number of types of systems that
may be used. This discussion covers
several major types of distribution
systems and practical modications
of them.
1. Simple radial
2. Loop-primary system
radial secondary system
3. Primary selective system
secondary radial system
4. Two-source primary
secondary selective system
5. Sparing transformer system
6. Simple spot network
7. Medium voltage distribution
system design
1. Simple Radial System
The conventional simple radial system
receives power at the utility supply
voltage at a single substation and steps
the voltage down to the utilization level.
In those cases where the customer
receives his supply from the primary
system and owns the primary switch
and transformer along with the second-
ary low voltage switchboard or switch-
gear, the equipment may take the form
of a separate primary switch, separate
transformer, and separate low voltage
switchgear or switchboard. This equip-
ment may be combined in the form of
an outdoor pad-mounted transformer
with internal primary fused switch
and secondary main breaker feeding
an indoor switchboard.
Another alternative would be a
secondary unit substation where
the primary fused switch, transformer
and secondary switchgear or switch-
board are designed and installed as
a close-coupled single assembly.
In those cases where the utility owns
the primary equipment and transformer,
the supply to the customer is at the
utilization voltage, and the service
equipment then becomes low voltage
main distribution switchgear or
a switchboard.
Low voltage feeder circuits run from
the switchgear or switchboard assem-
blies to panelboards that are located
closer to their respective loads as
shown in Figure 1.1-1.
Each feeder is connected to the switch-
gear or switchboard bus through a
circuit breaker or other overcurrent
protective device. A relatively small
number of circuits are used to distribute
power to the loads from the switch-
gear or switchboard assemblies and
panelboards.
Because the entire load is served from
a single source, full advantage can be
taken of the diversity among the loads.
This makes it possible to minimize the
installed transformer capacity. However,
the voltage regulation and efciency
of this system may be poor because
of the low voltage feeders and single
source. The cost of the low voltage-
feeder circuits and their associated circuit
breakers are high when the feeders are
long and the peak demand is above
1000 kVA.
A fault on the secondary low voltage
bus or in the source transformer will
interrupt service to all loads. Service
cannot be restored until the necessary
repairs have been made. A low voltage
feeder circuit fault will interrupt service
to all loads supplied over that feeder.
A modern and improved form of the
conventional simple radial system
distributes power at a primary voltage.
The voltage is stepped down to
utilization level in the several load
areas within the building typically
through secondary unit substation
transformers. The transformers are
usually connected to their associated
load bus through a circuit breaker, as
shown in Figure 1.1-2. Each secondary
unit substation is an assembled unit
consisting of a three-phase, liquid-
lled or air-cooled transformer, an
integrally connected primary fused
switch, and low voltage switchgear or
switchboard with circuit breakers or
fused switches. Circuits are run to
the loads from these low voltage
protective devices.
Figure 1.1-1. Simple Radial System
Figure 1.1-2. Primary and Secondary Simple Radial System
Primary Fused Switch
Transformer
600V Class
Switchboard
Distribution
Dry-Type
Transformer
Lighting
Panelboard
Distribution
Panel
MCC Distribution
Panel
Secondary Unit
Substation
Primary Main Breaker
Primary Feeder Breakers
Primary
Cables
52
52 52 52 52 52 52
1.1-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
009
Because each transformer is located
within a specic load area, it must
have sufcient capacity to carry the
peak load of that area. Consequently,
if any diversity exists among the load
area, this modied primary radial
system requires more transformer
capacity than the basic form of the
simple radial system. However,
because power is distributed to the
load areas at a primary voltage, losses
are reduced, voltage regulation is
improved, feeder circuit costs are
reduced substantially, and large
low voltage feeder circuit breakers
are eliminated. In many cases the
interrupting duty imposed on the
load circuit breakers is reduced.
This modern form of the simple radial
system will usually be lower in initial
investment than most other types of
primary distribution systems for build-
ings in which the peak load is above
1000 kVA. A fault on a primary feeder
circuit or in one transformer will cause
an outage to only those secondary
loads served by that feeder or trans-
former. In the case of a primary main
bus fault or a utility service outage,
service is interrupted to all loads until
the trouble is eliminated.
Reducing the number of transformers
per primary feeder by adding more
primary feeder circuits will improve
the exibility and service continuity
of this system; the ultimate being one
secondary unit substation per primary
feeder circuit. This of course increases
the investment in the system but
minimizes the extent of an outage
resulting from a transformer or
primary feeder fault.
Primary connections from one secondary
unit substation to the next secondary
unit substation can be made with
double lugs on the unit substation
primary switch as shown, or with
separable connectors made in
manholes or other locations.
Depending on the load kVA connected
to each primary circuit and if no ground
fault protection is desired for either the
primary feeder conductors and trans-
formers connected to that feeder or
the main bus, the primary main and/or
feeder breakers may be changed to
primary fused switches. This will sig-
nicantly reduce the rst cost, but also
decrease the level of conductor and
equipment protection. Thus, should
a fault or overload condition occur,
downtime increases signicantly and
higher costs associated with increased
damage levels and the need for fuse
replacement is typically encountered.
In addition, if only one primary fuse on
a circuit opens, the secondary loads are
then single phased, causing damage to
low voltage motors.
Another approach to reducing costs
is to eliminate the primary feeder
breakers completely, and use a single
primary main breaker or fused switch
for protection of a single primary
feeder circuit with all secondary unit
substations supplied from this circuit.
Although this system results in less
initial equipment cost, system reliability
is reduced drastically because a single
fault in any part of the primary conductor
would cause an outage to all loads
within the facility.
2. Loop Primary System
Radial Secondary System
This system consists of one or more
PRIMARY LOOPS with two or more
transformers connected on the loop.
This system is typically most effective
when two services are available from
the utility as shown in Figure 1.1-3. Each
primary loop is operated such that one
of the loop sectionalizing switches is
kept open to prevent parallel operation
of the sources. When secondary unit
substations are used, each trans-
former has its own duplex (2-load
break switches with load side bus
connection) sectionalizing switches
and primary load break fused switch
as shown in Figure 1.1-4.
When pad-mounted compartmental-
ized transformers are used, they are
furnished with loop-feed oil-immersed
gang-operated load break sectionalizing
switches and drawout current limiting
fuses in dry wells as shown in Figure
1.1-5. By operating the appropriate
sectionalizing switches, it is possible
to disconnect any section of the loop
conductors from the rest of the system.
In addition, by opening the transformer
primary switch (or removing the load
break drawout fuses in the pad-mounted
transformer) it is possible to disconnect
any transformer from the loop.
A key interlocking scheme is normally
recommended to prevent closing all
sectionalizing devices in the loop. Each
primary loop sectionalizing switch and
the feeder breakers to the loop are
interlocked such that to be closed they
require a key (which is held captive
until the switch or breaker is opened)
and one less key than the number of
key interlock cylinders is furnished.
An extra key is provided to defeat the
interlock under qualied supervision.
Figure 1.1-3. Loop PrimaryRadial Secondary System
NC NC NO
Loop A
Loop B
Tie
Breaker
Loop Feeder Breaker
Primary Main Breaker 2
Secondary Unit Substations Consisting of:
Duplex Primary Switches/Fused Primary Switches/
Transformer and Secondary Main Feeder Breakers
NO NC NC NC NC NC
NC
52 52
52
52 52
52 52
Fault Sensors
Primary Main Breaker 1
1.1-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
010
Figure 1.1-4. Secondary Unit Substation
Loop Switching
Figure 1.1-5. Pad-Mounted Transformer
Loop Switching
In addition, the two primary main
breakers, which are normally closed,
and primary tie breaker, which is
normally open, are either mechanically
or electrically interlocked to prevent
paralleling the incoming source lines.
For slightly added cost, an automatic
throw-over scheme can be added
between the two main breakers and
tie breaker. During the more common
event of a utility outage, the automatic
transfer scheme provides signicantly
reduced power outage time.
The system in Figure 1.1-3 has higher
costs than in Figure 1.1-2, but offers
increased reliability and quick restora-
tion of service when 1) a utility outage
occurs, 2) a primary feeder conductor
fault occurs, or 3) a transformer fault
or overload occurs.
Should a utility outage occur on one of
the incoming lines, the associated pri-
mary main breaker is opened and the
tie breaker closed either manually or
through an automatic transfer scheme.
Loop
Feeder
Loop
Feeder
Load Break
Loop Switches
Fused
Disconnect
Switch
Loop
Feeder
Loop
Feeder
Load Break
Loop Switches
Load Break
Drawout Fuses
When a primary feeder conductor fault
occurs, the associated loop feeder
breaker opens and interrupts service
to all loads up to the normally open
primary loop load break switch
(typically half of the loads). Once it is
determined which section of primary
cable has been faulted, the loop sec-
tionalizing switches on each side of
the faulted conductor can be opened,
the loop sectionalizing switch that had
been previously left open then closed
and service restored to all secondary
unit substations while the faulted
conductor is replaced. If the fault
should occur in a conductor directly
on the load side of one of the loop
feeder breakers, the loop feeder
breaker is kept open after tripping and
the next load side loop sectionalizing
switch manually opened so that the
faulted conductor can be sectionalized
and replaced.
Note: Under this condition, all secondary
unit substations are supplied through the
other loop feeder circuit breaker, and thus
all conductors around the loop should be
sized to carry the entire load connected to
the loop. Increasing the number of primary
loops (two loops shown in Figure 1.1-6)
will reduce the extent of the outage from a
conductor fault, but will also increase the
system investment.
When a transformer fault or overload
occurs, the transformer primary fuses
open, and the transformer primary
switch manually opened, disconnecting
the transformer from the loop, and
leaving all other secondary unit
substation loads unaffected.
Figure 1.1-6. Single Primary Feeder
Loop System
A basic primary loop system that
uses a single primary feeder breaker
connected directly to two loop feeder
switches which in turn then feed the
loop is shown in Figure 1.1-6. In this
basic system, the loop may be normally
operated with one of the loop section-
alizing switches open as described
above or with all loop sectionalizing
switches closed. If a fault occurs in the
basic primary loop system, the single
loop feeder breaker trips, and secondary
loads are lost until the faulted conductor
is found and eliminated from the loop
by opening the appropriate loop
sectionalizing switches and then
reclosing the breaker.
3. Primary Selective System
Secondary Radial System
The primary selectivesecondary
radial system, as shown in Figure 1.1-7,
differs from those previously described
in that it employs at least two primary
feeder circuits in each load area. It is
Figure 1.1-7. Basic Primary SelectiveRadial Secondary System
Loop A Loop A
In cases where only one primary line
is available, the use of a single primary
breaker provides the loop connections
to the loads as shown here.
52
Primary Metal-Clad
Switchgear Lineup
Bus A Bus B
Feeder A1 Feeder B1
Primary Feeder Breaker
Feeder B2
Feeder A2
Primary Main Breaker
To Other
Substations
Typical Secondary Unit
Substation Duplex Primary
Switch/Fuses
Transformer/600V Class
Secondary Switchgear
52 52
52
52 52
52 52
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
1.1-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
011
designed so that when one primary
circuit is out of service, the remaining
feeder or feeders have sufcient
capacity to carry the total load. Half
of the transformers are normally
connected to each of the two feeders.
When a fault occurs on one of the
primary feeders, only half of the
load in the building is dropped.
Duplex fused switches as shown in
Figure 1.1-7 and detailed in Figure 1.1-8
are the normal choice for this type of
system. Each duplex fused switch
consists of two (2) load break three-
pole switches each in their own
separate structure, connected together
by bus bars on the load side. Typically,
the load break switch closest to the
transformer includes a fuse assembly
with fuses. Mechanical and/or key
interlocking is furnished such that
both switches cannot be closed at
the same time (to prevent parallel
operation) and interlocking such
that access to either switch or fuse
assembly cannot be obtained unless
both switches are opened.
Figure 1.1-8. Duplex Fused Switch in
Two Structures
As an alternate to the duplex switch
arrangement, a non-load break selector
switch mechanically interlocked with a
load break fused switch can be used as
shown in Figure 1.1-9. The non-load
break selector switch is physically
located in the rear of the load break
fused switch, thus only requiring one
structure and a lower cost and oor
space savings over the duplex
arrangement. The non-load break
switch is mechanically interlocked to
prevent its operation unless the load
break switch is opened. The main
disadvantage of the selector switch is
that conductors from both circuits are
terminated in the same structure.
Figure 1.1-9. Fused Selector Switch in
One Structure
This means limited cable space espe-
cially if double lugs are furnished for
each line as shown in Figure 1.1-7 and
should a faulted primary conductor
have to be changed, both lines would
have to be de-energized for safe
changing of the faulted conductors.
In Figure 1.1-7 when a primary feeder
fault occurs, the associated feeder
breaker opens and the transformers
normally supplied from the faulted
feeder are out of service. Then manu-
ally, each primary switch connected to
the faulted line must be opened and
then the alternate line primary switch
can be closed connecting the trans-
former to the live feeder, thus restoring
service to all loads. Note that each of the
primary circuit conductors for Feeder
A1 and B1 must be sized to handle the
sum of the loads normally connected
to both A1 and B1. Similar sizing of
Feeders A2 and B2, etc., is required.
If a fault occurs in one transformer,
the associated primary fuses blow
and interrupt the service to just
the load served by that transformer.
Service cannot be restored to the
loads normally served by the faulted
transformer until the transformer
is repaired or replaced.
Cost of the primary selective
secondary radial system is greater
than that of the simple primary radial
system of Figure 1.1-1 because of the
additional primary main breakers, tie
breaker, two-sources, increased number
of feeder breakers, the use of primary-
duplex or selector switches, and the
greater amount of primary feeder
cable required. The benets from the
reduction in the amount of load lost
when a primary feeder is faulted, plus
the quick restoration of service to all
or most of the loads, may more than
offset the greater cost. Having two
sources allows for either manual or
automatic transfer of the two primary
main breakers and tie breaker should
one of the sources become unavailable.
The primary selective-secondary radial
system, however, may be less costly or
more costly than a primary loop
secondary radial system of Figure 1.1-3
depending on the physical location
of the transformers while offering
comparable downtime and reliability.
The cost of conductors for the two
types of systems may vary greatly
depending on the location of the
transformers and loads within the
facility and greatly override primary
switching equipment cost differences
between the two systems.
4. Two-Source Primary
Secondary Selective System
This system uses the same principle
of duplicate sources from the power
supply point using two primary main
breakers and a primary tie breaker.
The two primary main breakers and
primary tie breaker being either
manually or electrically interlocked
to prevent closing all three at the same
time and paralleling the sources. Upon
loss of voltage on one source, a manual
or automatic transfer to the alternate
source line may be used to restore
power to all primary loads.
Each transformer secondary is
arranged in a typical double-ended
unit substation arrangement as shown
in Figure 1.1-10. The two secondary
main breakers and secondary tie
breaker of each unit substation are
again either mechanically or electrically
interlocked to prevent parallel operation.
Upon loss of secondary source voltage
on one side, manual or automatic
transfer may be used to transfer the
loads to the other side, thus restoring
power to all secondary loads.
This arrangement permits quick
restoration of service to all loads when
a primary feeder or transformer fault
occurs by opening the associated
secondary main and closing the
secondary tie breaker. If the loss of
secondary voltage has occurred
because of a primary feeder fault
with the associated primary feeder
breaker opening, then all secondary
loads normally served by the faulted
feeder would have to be transferred
to the opposite primary feeder. This
means each primary feeder conductor
must be sized to carry the load on both
sides of all the secondary buses it is
Primary
Feeders
Load Break
Switches
Fuses
Primary
Feeders
Non-Load Break
Selector Switches
Fuses
Load Break
Disconnect
Inter-
lock
1.1-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
012
serving under secondary emergency
transfer. If the loss of voltage was due
to a failure of one of the transformers in
the double-ended unit substation, then
the associated primary fuses would
open taking only the failed transformer
out of service, and then only the
secondary loads normally served by
the faulted transformer would have
to be transferred to the opposite
transformer. In either of the above
emergency conditions, the in-service
transformer of a double-ended unit
substation would have to have the
capability of serving the loads on
both sides of the tie breaker. For this
reason, transformers used in this
application have equal kVA rating
on each side of the double-ended
unit substation and the normal
operating maximum load on each
transformer is typically about 2/3 base
nameplate kVA rating. Typically these
Figure 1.1-10. Two-Source PrimarySecondary Selective System
Figure 1.1-11. Sparing Transformer System
Primary Main Breakers
Primary Feeder Breakers
To Other Substations
To Other Substations
Secondary Main Breaker Tie Breaker Primary Fused Switch Transformer
Typical
Double-Ended
Unit
Substation
52 52
52
52 52 52 52
K K K
K K
K K
Sparing Transformer
Typical Secondary Busway Loop
Typical Single-Ended Substation
transformers are furnished with
fan-cooling and/or lower than normal
temperature rise such that under
emergency conditions they can carry
on a continuous basis the maximum
load on both sides of the secondary tie
breaker. Because of this spare trans-
former capacity, the voltage regulation
provided by the double-ended unit
substation system under normal
conditions is better than that of the
systems previously discussed.
The double-ended unit substation
arrangement can be used in conjunction
with any of the previous systems
discussed, which involve two primary
sources. Although not recommended,
if allowed by the utility, momentary
re-transfer of loads to the restored
source may be made closed transition
(anti-parallel interlock schemes would
have to be defeated) for either the
primary or secondary systems. Under
this condition, all equipment interrupt-
ing and momentary ratings should be
suitable for the fault current available
from both sources.
For double-ended unit substations
equipped with ground fault systems
special consideration to transformer
neutral grounding and equipment
operation should be madesee
Grounding and Ground Fault
Protection in Section 1.4. Where
two single-ended unit substations are
connected together by external tie
conductors, it is recommended that
a tie breaker be furnished at each end
of the tie conductors.
5. Sparing Transformer System
The sparing transformer system concept
came into use as an alternative to the
capital cost intensive double-ended
secondary unit substation distribution
system (see Two-Source Primary
Secondary Selective System). It essen-
tially replaces double-ended substations
with single-ended substations and one
or more sparing transformer substa-
tions all interconnected on a common
secondary bus (see Figure 1.1-11).
Generally no more than three to ve
single-ended substations are on a
sparing loop.
The essence of this design philosophy
is that conservatively designed and
loaded transformers are highly reliable
electrical devices and rarely fail. There-
fore, this design provides a single com-
mon backup transformer for a group of
transformers in lieu of a backup trans-
former for each and every transformer.
This system design still maintains a
high degree of continuity of service.
1.1-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
013
Referring to Figure 1.1-11, it is appar-
ent that the sparing concept backs up
primary switch and primary cable fail-
ure as well. Restoration of lost or failed
utility power is accomplished similarly
to primary selective scheme previously
discussed. It is therefore important to
use an automatic throwover system
in a two source lineup of primary
switchgear to restore utility power
as discussed in the Two-Source
Primary schemesee Figure 1.1-10.
A major advantage of the sparing
transformer system is the typically
lower total base kVA of transformation.
In a double-ended substation design,
each transformer must be rated to
carry the sum of the loads of two busses
and usually requires the addition of
cooling fans to accomplish this rating.
In the sparing concept, each trans-
former carries only its own load, which
is typically not a fan-cooled rating. Major
space savings is also a benet of this
system in addition to rst cost savings.
The sparing transformer system
operates as follows:
All main breakers, including
the sparing main breaker, are
normally closed; the tie breakers
are normally open
Once a transformer (or primary
cable or primary switch/fuse) fails,
the associated secondary main
breaker is opened. The associated
tie breaker is then closed, which
restores power to the single-ended
substation bus
Schemes that require the main to
be opened before the tie is closed
(open transition), and that allow
any tie to be closed before the
substation main is opened, (closed
transition) are possible
With a closed transition scheme, it is
common to add a timer function that
opens the tie breaker unless either
main breaker is opened within a time
interval. This closed transition allows
power to be transferred to the sparing
transformer without interruption, such
as for routine maintenance, and then
back to the substation. This closed
transition transfer has an advantage in
some facilities; however, appropriate
interrupting capacities and bus bracing
must be specied suitable for the
momentary parallel operation.
In facilities without qualied electrical
power operators, an open transition
with key interlocking is often a
prudent design.
Note: Each pair of main breaker/tie breaker
key cylinders should be uniquely keyed to
prevent any paralleled source operations.
Careful sizing of these transformers
as well as careful specication of the
transformers is required for reliability.
Low temperature rise specied with
continuous overload capacity or
upgraded types of transformers
should be considered.
One disadvantage to this system is
the external secondary tie system,
see Figure 1.1-11. As shown, all single-
ended substations are tied together on
the secondary with a tie busway or
cable system. Location of substations
is therefore limited because of voltage
drop and cost considerations.
Routing of busway, if used, must be
carefully layed out. It should also be
noted, that a tie busway or cable fault
will essentially prevent the use of the
sparing transformer until it is repaired.
Commonly, the single-ended substa-
tions and the sparing transformer
must be clustered. This can also be
an advantage, as more kVA can be
supported from a more compact
space layout.
6. Simple Spot Network Systems
The AC secondary network system
is the system that has been used for
many years to distribute electric power
in the high-density, downtown areas
of cities, usually in the form of utility
grids. Modications of this type of
system make it applicable to serve
loads within buildings.
The major advantage of the secondary
network system is continuity of
service. No single fault anywhere
on the primary system will interrupt
service to any of the systems loads.
Most faults will be cleared without
interrupting service to any load.
Another outstanding advantage that
the network system offers is its exi-
bility to meet changing and growing
load conditions at minimum cost and
minimum interruption in service to
other loads on the network. In addition
to exibility and service reliability, the
secondary network system provides
exceptionally uniform and good
voltage regulation, and its high
efciency materially reduces the
costs of system losses.
Three major differences between the
network system and the simple radial
system account for the outstanding
advantages of the network. First,
a network protector is connected in
the secondary leads of each network
transformer in place of, or in addition
to, the secondary main breaker, as
shown in Figure 1.1-12. Also, the
secondaries of each transformer in
a given location (spot) are connected
together by a switchgear or ring bus
from which the loads are served over
short radial feeder circuits. Finally, the
primary supply has sufcient capacity
to carry the entire building load with-
out overloading when any one primary
feeder is out of service.
A network protector is a specially
designed heavy-duty air power breaker,
spring close with electrical motor-charged
mechanism, with a network relay to
control the status of the protector
(tripped or closed). The network relay
is usually a solid-state microprocessor-
based component integrated
Figure 1.1-12. Three-Source Spot Network
Customer
Loads
Customer
Loads
Customer
Loads
NC NC
Tie Tie
Typical Feeder
To Other
Networks
Drawout
Low Voltage
Switchgear
Fuses
Primary Circuit
Network Transformer
Network Protector
Optional Main, 50/51
Relaying and/or
Network Disconnect
LV Feeder
1.1-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
014
into the protector enclosure that
functions to automatically close the
protector only when the voltage
conditions are such that its associated
transformer will supply power to the
secondary network loads, and to auto-
matically open the protector when
power ows from the secondary to the
network transformer. The purpose of
the network protector is to protect the
integrity of the network bus voltage
and the loads served from it against
transformer and primary feeder faults
by quickly disconnecting the defective
feeder-transformer pair from the
network when backfeed occurs.
The simple spot network system
resembles the secondary-selective
radial system in that each load area
is supplied over two or more primary
feeders through two or more trans-
formers. In network systems, the
transformers are connected through
network protectors to a common
bus, as shown in Figure 1.1-12, from
which loads are served. Because the
transformers are connected in parallel,
a primary feeder or transformer fault
does not cause any service interrup-
tion to the loads. The paralleled
transformers supplying each load
bus will normally carry equal load
currents, whereas equal loading of
the two separate transformers supply-
ing a substation in the secondary-
selective radial system is difcult to
obtain. The interrupting duty imposed
on the outgoing feeder breakers in the
network will be greater with the spot
network system.
The optimum size and number of
primary feeders can be used in the
spot network system because the
loss of any primary feeder and its
associated transformers does not
result in the loss of any load even
for an instant. In spite of the spare
capacity usually supplied in network
systems, savings in primary switch-
gear and secondary switchgear costs
often result when compared to a radial
system design with similar spare
capacity. This occurs in many radial
systems because more and smaller
feeders are often used in order to
minimize the extent of any outage
when a primary fault event occurs.
In spot networks, when a fault occurs
on a primary feeder or in a transformer,
the fault is isolated from the system
through the automatic tripping of the
primary feeder circuit breaker and all
of the network protectors associated
with that feeder circuit. This operation
does not interrupt service to any loads.
After the necessary repairs have been
made, the system can be restored to
normal operating conditions by closing
the primary feeder breaker. All network
protectors associated with that feeder
will close automatically.
The chief purpose of the network bus
normally closed ties is to provide for
the sharing of loads and a balancing
of load currents for each primary ser-
vice and transformer regardless of
the condition of the primary services.
Also, the ties provide a means for
isolating and sectionalizing ground
fault events within the switchgear
network bus, thereby saving a portion
of the loads from service interruptions,
yet isolating the faulted portion for
corrective action.
The use of spot network systems
provides users with several important
advantages. First, they save trans-
former capacity. Spot networks permit
equal loading of transformers under
all conditions. Also, networks yield
lower system losses and greatly
improve voltage conditions. The
voltage regulation on a network
system is such that both lights and
power can be fed from the same
load bus. Much larger motors can
be started across-the-line than on a
simple radial system. This can result in
simplied motor control and permits
the use of relatively large low voltage
motors with their less expensive
control. Finally, network systems
provide a greater degree of exibility
in adding future loads; they can be
connected to the closest spot
network bus.
Spot network systems are economical
for buildings that have heavy concen-
trations of loads covering small areas,
with considerable distance between
areas, and light loads within the
distances separating the concentrated
loads. They are commonly used in
hospitals, high rise ofce buildings,
and institutional buildings where a
high degree of service reliability is
required from the utility sources.
Spot network systems are especially
economical where three or more
primary feeders are available.
Principally, this is due to supplying
each load bus through three or
more transformers and the reduction
in spare cable and transformer
capacity required.
They are also economical when
compared to two transformer double-
ended substations with normally
opened tie breakers.
Emergency power should be connected
to network loads downstream from
the network, or upstream at primary
voltage, not at the network bus itself.
7. Medium Voltage Distribution
System Design
A. Single Bus, Figure 1.1-13
The sources (utility and/or generator(s))
are connected to a single bus. All feeders
are connected to the same bus.
Figure 1.1-13. Single Bus
This conguration is the simplest
system; however, outage of the utility
results in total outage.
Normally the generator does not have
adequate capacity for the entire load.
A properly relayed system equipped
with load shedding, automatic voltage/
frequency control may be able to
maintain partial system operation.
Any future addition of breaker sections
to the bus will require a shutdown of
the bus, because there is no tie breaker.
B. Single Bus with Two Sources from the
Utility, Figure 1.1-14
Same as the single bus, except that
two utility sources are available.
This system is operated normally with
the main breaker to one source open.
Upon loss of the normal service, the
transfer to the standby normally
open (NO) breaker can be automatic
or manual. Automatic transfer is
preferred for rapid service restoration
especially in unattended stations.
52
Utility
Main Bus
G
One of Several Feeders
52
52
1.1-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
015
Figure 1.1-14. Single Bus with Two-Sources
Retransfer to the Normal can be
closed transition subject to the approval
of the utility. Closed transition momen-
tarily (510 cycles) parallels both
utility sources. Caution: when both
sources are paralleled, the fault current
available on the load side of the main
device is the sum of the available fault
current from each source plus the motor
fault contribution. It is recommended
that the short-circuit ratings of the
bus, feeder breakers and all load side
equipment are rated for the increased
available fault current. If the utility
requires open transfer, the disconnec-
tion of motors from the bus must be
ensured by means of suitable time delay
on reclosing as well as supervision
of the bus voltage and its phase with
respect to the incoming source voltage.
This busing scheme does not preclude
the use of cogeneration, but requires
the use of sophisticated automatic syn-
chronizing and synchronism checking
controls, in addition to the previously
mentioned load shedding, automatic
frequency and voltage controls.
This conguration is more expensive
than the scheme shown in Figure 1.1-13,
but service restoration is quicker. Again,
a utility outage results in total outage to
the load until transfer occurs. Extension
of the bus or adding breakers requires
a shutdown of the bus.
If paralleling sources, reverse current,
reverse power and other appropriate
relaying protection should be added
as requested by the utility.
C. Multiple Sources with Tie Breaker,
Figure 1.1-15 and Figure 1.1-16
This conguration is similar to congu-
ration B. It differs signicantly in that
both utility sources normally carry the
loads and also by the incorporation
of a normally open tie breaker. The
outage to the system load for a utility
outage is limited to half of the system.
Utility #2 Utility #1
Normal Standby
NC NO
Loads
52 52
Again, the closing of the tie breaker can
be manual or automatic. The statements
made for the retransfer of scheme B
apply to this scheme also.
Figure 1.1-15. Two-Source Utility with
Tie Breaker
If looped or primary selective distribu-
tion system for the loads is used, the
buses can be extended without a shut-
down by closing the tie breaker and
transferring the loads to the other bus.
This conguration is more expensive
than B. The system is not limited to two
buses only. Another advantage is that
the design may incorporate momentary
paralleling of buses on retransfer after
the failed line has been restored to pre-
vent another outage. See the Caution
for Figures 1.1-14, 1.1-15 and 1.1-16.
In Figure 1.1-16, closing of the tie
breaker following the opening of a
main breaker can be manual or auto-
matic. However, because a bus can
be fed through two tie breakers, the
control scheme should be designed
to make the selection.
The third tie breaker allows any bus
to be fed from any utility source.
Summary
The medium voltage system congura-
tions shown are based on using metal-
clad drawout switchgear. The service
continuity required from electrical
systems makes the use of single-source
systems impractical.
In the design of a modern medium
voltage system, the engineer should:
1. Design a system as simple as
possible.
2. Limit an outage to as small a
portion of the system as possible.
3. Provide means for expanding the
system without major shutdowns.
4. Relay the system so that only the
faulted part is removed from
service, and damage to it is mini-
mized consistent with selectivity.
5. Specify and apply all equipment
within its published ratings and
national standards pertaining to
the equipment and its installation.
Figure 1.1-16. Triple-Ended Arrangement
Utility #1
NC
Bus #1 Bus #2
Load Load
Utility #2
NC
NO
52 52
52
52 52
Caution for Figures 1.1-14, 1.1-15 and
1.1-16: If continuous paralleling of
sources is planned, reverse current,
reverse power and other appropriate
relaying protection should be added.
When both sources are paralleled for
any amount of time, the fault current
available on the load side of the main
device is the sum of the available
fault current from each source plus
the motor fault contribution. It is
required that bus bracing, feeder
breakers and all load side equipment
is rated for the increased available
fault current.
NO
NC
Bus #1 Bus #2
Utility #1 Utility #2
NC
NO NO
Utility #3
Bus #3
NC
Tie Busway
52 52 52
52
52
52
52 NO Typical Feeder 52 52 52
1.1-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
016
Health Care Facilities
Health care facilities are dened by
NFPA (National Fire Protection Agency)
as Buildings or portions of buildings
in which medical, dental, psychiatric,
nursing, obstetrical, or surgical care
are provided. Due to the critical
nature of the care being provided at
these facilities and their increasing
dependence on electrical equipment
for preservation of life, health care
facilities have special requirements for
the design of their electrical distribu-
tion systems. These requirements are
typically much more stringent than
commercial or industrial facilities.
The following section summarizes
some of the unique requirements
of health care facility design.
There are several agencies and organi-
zations that develop requirements
for health care electrical distribution
system design. The following is a
listing of some of the specic NFPA
(National Fire Protection Agency)
standards that affect health care
facility design and implementation:
NFPA 37-2010Standard for
Stationary Combustion Engines
and Gas Turbines
NFPA 70-2011National
Electrical Code
NFPA 99-2005Health Care Facilities
NFPA 101-2009Life Safety Code
NFPA 110-2010Standard for Emer-
gency and Standby Power Systems
NFPA 111-2010Standard on
Stored Electrical Energy Emergency
and Standby Power Systems
These NFPA guidelines represent the
most industry recognized standard
requirements for health care electrical
design. However, the electrical design
engineer should consult with the
authorities having jurisdiction over
the local region for specic electrical
distribution requirements.
Health Care Electrical System
Requirements
Health care electrical systems usually
consist of two parts:
1. Non-essential or normal
electrical system.
2. Essential electrical system.
All electrical power in a health care
facility is important, though some
loads are not critical to the safe opera-
tion of the facility. These non-essential
or normal loads include things such
as general lighting, general lab equip-
ment, non-critical service equipment,
patient care areas, etc. These loads are
not required to be fed from an alternate
source of power.
The electrical system requirements for
the essential electrical system (EES)
vary according to the type of health
care facility. Health care facilities are
categorized by NFPA 99 as Type 1,
Type 2 or Type 3 facilities. Some
example health care facilities, classied
by type, are summarized in the
following Table 1.1-8.
Table 1.1-8. Health Care Facilities
If electrical life support or critical care areas

are present, then facility is classied as Type 1.
Type 1 Essential Electrical
Systems (EES)
Type 1 essential electrical systems
(EES) have the most stringent require-
ments for providing continuity of
electrical service and will, therefore,
be the focus of this section. Type 1
EES requirements meet or exceed
the requirements for Type 2 and
Type 3 facilities.
Figure 1.1-17. Typical Large Hospital Electrical SystemType 1 Facility
Description Denition EES Type
Hospitals
Nursing homes
Limited care
facilities
NFPA 99 Chap. 13
NFPA 99 Chap. 17
NFPA 99 Chap. 18
Type 1
Type 2
Type 2
Ambulatory
surgical
facilities
Other health
care facilities
NFPA 99 Chap. 14
NFPA 99 Chap. 14
Type 3
Type 3
Normal Source Normal Source

G
Non-Essential Loads
Non-Essential Loads
Essential Electrical System
Manual Transfer Switch
Normal Source Emergency Power Supply
Life Safety
Branch
Critical
Branch
Emergency System
Equipment
System Delayed Automatic Transfer Switch
Automatic (Non-Delaying)
Transfer Switch
1.1-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
017
Sources: Type 1 systems are required
to have a minimum of two independent
sources of electrical powera normal
source that generally supplies the
entire facility and one or more alter-
nate sources that supply power when
the normal source is interrupted. The
alternate source(s) must be an on-site
generator driven by a prime mover
unless a generator(s) exists as the
normal power source. In the case
where a generator(s) is used as the
normal source, it is permissible for the
alternate source to be a utility feed.
Alternate source generators must be
classied as Type 10, Class X, Level 1
gensets per NFPA 110 Tables 4.1(a)
and 4.2(b) that are capable of providing
power to the load in a maximum of
10 seconds. Typically, the alternate
sources of power are supplied to the
loads through a series of automatic
and/or manual transfer switches (see
Tab 25). The transfer switches can
be non-delayed automatic, delayed
automatic or manual transfer depending
on the requirements of the specic
branch of the EES that they are feeding.
It is permissible to feed multiple
branches or systems of the EES from
a single automatic transfer switch
provided that the maximum demand
on the EES does not exceed 150 kVA.
This conguration is typically seen
in smaller health care facilities that
must meet Type 1 EES requirements
(see Figure 1.1-18).
Figure 1.1-18. Small Hospital Electrical
SystemSingle EES Transfer Switch
Table 1.1-9. Type 1 EES Applicable Codes
Systems and Branches of Service: The
Type 1 EES consists of two separate
power systems capable of supplying
power considered essential for life
safety and effective facility operation
during an interruption of the normal
power source. They are the emergency
system and the equipment system.
1. Emergency systemconsists of
circuits essential to life safety and
critical patient care.
The emergency system is an electrical
sub-system that must be fed from an
automatic transfer switch or series of
automatic transfer switches. This
emergency system consists of two
mandatory branches that provide power
to systems and functions essential to
life safety and critical patient care.
A. Life safety branchsupplies
power for lighting, receptacles
and equipment to perform the
following functions:
1. Illumination of means of egress.
2. Exit signs and exit direction signs.
3. Alarms and alerting systems.
4. Emergency communications
systems.
5. Task illumination, battery
chargers for battery powered
lighting, and select receptacles
at the generator.
6. Elevator lighting control, com-
munication and signal systems.
7. Automatic doors used for egress.
These are the only functions
permitted to be on the life safety
branch. Life safety branch equip-
ment and wiring must be entirely
independent of all other loads
and branches of service. This
includes separation of raceways,
boxes or cabinets. Power must be
supplied to the life safety branch
from a non-delayed automatic
transfer switch.
B. Critical branchsupplies power
for task illumination, xed equip-
ment, selected receptacles and
selected power circuits for areas
related to patient care. The
purpose of the critical branch
is to provide power to a limited
number of receptacles and loca-
tions to reduce load and minimize
the chances of fault conditions.
The transfer switch(es) feeding the
critical branch must be automatic
type. They are permitted to have
appropriate time delays that will
follow the restoration of the life
safety branch, but should have
power restored within 10 seconds
of normal source power loss.
The critical branch provides power
to circuits serving the following
areas and functions:
1. Critical care areas.
2. Isolated power systems in
special environments.
3. Task illumination and selected
receptacles in the following
patient care areas: infant
nurseries, medication prep
areas, pharmacy, selected
acute nursing areas, psychiatric
bed areas, ward treatment
rooms, nurses stations.
4. Specialized patient care task
illumination, where needed.
5. Nurse call systems.
6. Blood, bone and tissue banks.
7. Telephone equipment rooms
and closets.
8. Task illumination, selected
receptacles and selected power
circuits for the following: general
care beds (at least one duplex
receptacle), angiographic labs,
cardiac catheterization labs,
coronary care units, hemodialysis
rooms, selected emergency
room treatment areas, human
physiology labs, intensive care
units, selected postoperative
recovery rooms.
9. Additional circuits and single-
phase fraction motors as needed
for effective facility operation.
Normal Source
G
Non-Essential
Loads
Alternate
Source
Entire Essential
Electric System
(150 kVA or Less)
Description Standard Section
Design
Sources
Uses
Emergency
Power Supply
Classication
NFPA 99
NFPA 99
NFPA 99
NFPA 110
4.4.1.1.1
4.4.1.1.4 thru
4.4.4.1.1.7.2
4.4.1.1.8 (1-3)
4
Distribution NFPA 99
NEC
4.4.2
517.30
1.1-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
018
Table 1.1-10. Type 1Emergency System
Applicable Codes
2. Equipment systemconsists of
major electrical equipment necessary
for patient care and Type 1 operation.
The equipment system is a subsystem
of the EES that consists of large electrical
equipment loads needed for patient
care and basic hospital operation.
Loads on the equipment system that
are essential to generator operation are
required to be fed by a non-delayed
automatic transfer switch.
The following equipment must be
arranged for delayed automatic transfer
to the emergency power supply:
1. Central suction systems for medical
and surgical functions.
2. Sump pumps and other equipment
required for the safe operation of
a major apparatus.
3. Compressed air systems for
medical and surgical functions.
4. Smoke control and stair
pressurization systems.
5. Kitchen hood supply and exhaust
systems, if required to operate
during a re.
The following equipment must be
arranged for delayed automatic or
manual transfer to the emergency
power supply:
1. Select heating equipment.
2. Select elevators.
3. Supply, return and exhaust
ventilating systems for surgical,
obstetrical, intensive care,
coronary care, nurseries and
emergency treatment areas.
4. Supply, return and exhaust
ventilating systems for airborne
infectious/isolation rooms, labs and
medical areas where hazardous
materials are used.
5. Hyperbaric facilities.
6. Hypobaric facilities.
7. Autoclaving equipment.
8. Controls for equipment listed above.
9. Other selected equipment in
kitchens, laundries, radiology
rooms and central refrigeration
as selected.
Table 1.1-11. Type 1Equipment System
Applicable Codes
Any loads served by the generator that
are not approved as outlined above as
part of the essential electrical system
must be connected through a separate
transfer switch. These transfer switches
must be congured such that the loads
will not cause the generator to overload
and must be shed in the event the
generator enters an overload condition.
Ground fault protectionper NFPA 70
NEC Article 230.95, ground fault
protection is required on any feeder or
service disconnect 1000A or larger on
systems with line to ground voltages
of 150V or greater and phase-to-phase
voltages of 600V or less. For health care
facilities (of any type), a second level of
ground fault protection is required to
be on the next level of feeder down-
stream. This second level of ground
fault is only required for feeders that
serve patient care areas and equipment
intended to support life. 100% selective
coordination of the two levels of ground
fault protection must be achieved with a
minimum six-cycle separation between
the upstream and downstream device.
New in the 2011 NEC, ground fault
protection is now allowed between
the generator(s) and the EES transfer
switch(es). However, NEC 517.17(B)
prohibits the installation of ground fault
protection on the load side of a transfer
switch feeding EES circuits (see Figure
1.1-19additional level of ground fault).
Careful consideration should be used in
applying ground fault protection on the
essential electrical system to prevent
a ground fault that causes a trip of the
normal source to also cause a trip on
the emergency source. Such an event
could result in complete power loss of
both normal and emergency power
sources and could not be recovered
until the source of the ground fault
was located and isolated from the
system. To prevent this condition,
NEC 700.26 removes the ground fault
protection requirement for the
Figure 1.1-19. Additional Level of Ground Fault Protection
Ground fault protection is required for service disconnects 1000A and larger or systems with less than 600V phase-to-phase and greater than 150V to
ground per NEC 230.95.
General NFPA 99
NEC
4.4.2.2.2
517.31
Life safety
branch
NFPA 99
NEC
4.4.2.2.2.2
517.32
Critical branch NFPA 99
NEC
4.4.2.2.2.3
517.33
Wiring NFPA 99
NEC
4.4.2.2.4
517.30(C)
General NFPA 99
NEC
4.4.2.2.3
517.34
Equipment NFPA 99
NEC
4.4.2.2.3 (3-5)
517.34(A)-(B)
Normal Source Normal Source(s)
G
480/277V
Service
Entrance
1000A
or Larger
GF
Service
Entrance
1000A
or Larger
GF
480/277V
GF GF GF GF GF GF GF GF GF GF GF
Service
Entrance
1000A
or Larger
GF
480/277V
GF
Non-Essential Loads
Non-Essential Loads
Essential Electrical System
Additional Level
of Ground Fault
Protection
Ground Fault
is Permitted
and EES Transfer
Switches.
(NEC 517.17(B))
Additional Level of Ground Fault is
not
Transfer Switches. (NEC 517.17a(2))
= Ground Fault Protection Required
Generator Breakers are
Supplied with
Ground Fault Alarm
Only. (NEC 700.26)
1.1-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
019
emergency system source. Typically,
the emergency system generator(s)
are equipped with ground fault alarms
that do not automatically disconnect
power during a ground fault.
Table 1.1-12. Ground Fault Protection
Applicable Codes
Wet procedure locationsA wet
procedure location in a health care
facility is any patient care area that
is normally subject to wet conditions
while patients are present. Typical wet
procedure locations can include oper-
ating rooms, anesthetizing locations,
dialysis locations, etc. (Patient beds,
toilets and sinks are not considered
wet locations.) These wet procedure
locations require special protection
to guard against electric shock. The
ground fault current in these areas
must be limited to not exceed 6 mA.
In areas where the interruption of power
is permissible, ground fault circuit
interrupters (GFCI) can be employed.
GFCIs will interrupt a circuit when
ground fault current exceeds 5 mA
(1 mA).
In areas where the interruption of
power cannot be tolerated, protection
from ground fault currents is accom-
plished through the use of an isolated
power system. Isolated power systems
provide power to an area that is iso-
lated from ground (or ungrounded).
This type of system limits the amount
of current that ows to ground in
the event of a single line-to-ground
fault and maintains circuit continuity.
Electronic line isolation monitors (LIM)
are used to monitor and display leakage
currents to ground. When leakage
current thresholds are exceeded, visible
and/or audible alarms are initiated to
alert occupants of a possible hazardous
condition. This alarm occurs without
interrupting power to allow for the
safe conclusion of critical procedures.
Table 1.1-13. Wet Procedure Location
Applicable Codes
Maintenance and Testing
Regular maintenance and testing of
the electrical distribution system in
a health care facility is necessary to
ensure proper operation in an emer-
gency and, in some cases, to maintain
government accreditation. Any health
care facility receiving Medicare or
Medicaid reimbursement from the
government must be accredited by the
Joint Commission on Accreditation of
Health Care Organizations (JCAHO).
JCAHO has established a group of
standards called the Environment of
Care, which must be met for health
care facility accreditation. Included in
these standards is the regular testing
of the emergency (alternate) power
system(s). Diesel-powered EPS instal-
lations must be tested monthly in
accordance with NFPA 110 Standard
for Emergency and Standby Power
Systems. Generators must be tested
for a minimum of 30 minutes under
the criteria dened in NFPA 110.
One method to automate the task of
monthly generator tests is through the
use of Power Xpert
communications.
With the Power Xpert integrated meter-
ing, monitoring and control system, a
facility maintenance director can ini-
tiate a generator test, control/monitor
loads, meter/monitor generator test
points and create a JCAHO compliant
report automatically from a central PC.
The report contains all metered values,
test results, date/time information, etc.
necessary to satisfy JCAHO require-
ments. This automated generator testing
procedure reduces the labor, training
and inaccuracies that occur during
manual emergency power system tests.
(See Power Monitoring Tab 2.)
Table 1.1-14. Maintenance and Testing
Applicable Codes
Routine maintenance should be per-
formed on circuit breakers, transfer
switches, switchgear, generator equip-
ment, etc. by trained professionals
to ensure the most reliable electrical
system possible. See Tab 41 for
Eatons Electrical Services & Systems
(EESS), which provides engineers,
trained in development and execution
of annual preventative maintenance
procedures of health care facility
electrical distribution systems.
Paralleling Emergency Generators
Without Utility Paralleling
In many health care facilities (and
other large facilities with critical
loads), the demand for standby
emergency power is large enough
to require multiple generator sets to
power all of the required essential
electrical system (EES) loads. In many
cases, it becomes more exible and
easier to operate the required multiple
generators from a single location using
generator paralleling switchgear.
Figure 1.1-20 on Page 1.1-18 shows
an example of a typical one-line for a
paralleling switchgear lineup feeding
the EES.
A typical abbreviated sequence of
operation for a multiple emergency
generator and ATS system follows.
Note that other modes of operation
such as generator demand priority and
automated testing modes are available
but are not included below. (Reference
Tab 41 for complete detailed
sequences of operation.)
1. Entering emergency mode
a. Upon loss of normal source,
automatic transfer switches
send generator control system
a run request.
b. All available generators are
started. The rst generator up
to voltage and frequency is
closed to the bus.
c. Unsheddable loads and load
shed Priority 1 loads are pow-
ered in less than 10 seconds.
d. The remaining generators are
synchronized and paralleled
to the bus as they come up to
voltage and frequency.
e. As additional generators are
paralleled to the emergency
bus, load shed priority levels
are added, powering their
associated loads.
f. The system is now in
emergency mode.
2. Exit from emergency mode
a. Automatic transfer switches
sense the utility source is
within acceptable operational
tolerances for a time duration
set at the automatic transfer
switch.
Services
Feeders
NEC
NEC
230.95
215.10
Additional level NEC
NFPA 99
517.17
4.3.2.5
Alternate source NEC
NEC
700.26
701.26
General NFPA 99
NEC
4.3.2.2.9
517.20
Isolated power
systems
NFPA 99
NEC
4.3.2.6
517.160
Grounding NFPA 99 4.3.3.1
Emergency power
system
NFPA 99
JCAHO
4.4.4.1.1
EC.2.14(d)
Generator NFPA 110 8.4
Transfer switches NFPA 110 8.3.5, 8.4.6
Breakers NFPA 99
NFPA 110
4.4.4.1.2
8.4.7
1.1-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
020
b. As each automatic transfer
switch transfers back to utility
power, it removes its run
request from the generator
plant.
c. When the last automatic trans-
fer switch has retransferred to
the utility and all run requests
have been removed from the
generator plant, all generator
circuit breakers are opened.
d. The generators are allowed
to run for their programmed
cool-down period.
e. The system is now back in
automatic/standby mode.
With Utility Paralleling
Today, many utilities are offering their
customers excellent nancial incen-
tives to use their on-site generation
capacity to remove load from the utility
grid. These incentives are sometimes
referred to as limited interruptible
rates (LIP). Under these incentives,
utilities will greatly reduce or eliminate
kWhr or kW demand charges to their
customers with on-site generation
capabilities. In exchange, during times
of peak loading of the utility grid, the
utility can ask their LIP rate customers
to drop load from the grid by using
their on-site generation capabilities.
Health care facilities are ideally suited
to take advantage of these programs
because they already have signicant
on-site generation capabilities due to
the code requirements described.
Many health care facilities are taking
advantage of these utility incentives
by adding generator capacity over
and above the NFPA requirements.
Figure 1.1-21 on Page 1.1-19 shows
an example one-line of a health care
facility with complete generator
backup and utility interconnect.
NFPA 110 requirements state that the
normal and emergency sources must
be separated by a re-rated wall.
The intent of this requirement is so that
a re in one location cannot take out
both sources of power. To meet this
requirement, the paralleling switchgear
must be split into separate sections
with a tie bus through a re-rated wall.
For more information on generator
paralleling switchgear, see Tab 40.
Figure 1.1-20. Typical One-Line for a Paralleling Switchgear Lineup Feeding the Essential Electrical System (EES)
Utility
Metering
Utility
Transformer
Service Main
Normal Bus
Optional
Electrically
Operated
Stored
Energy
Breakers
Non-Essential
Loads
EP1 EP2 EPX
Fx F2 F1
EFx EF2 EF1
Generators X = Number of Units
Typical
Generator
Breaker
Emergency Bus
Equipment
ATS # 1
Life Safety
ATS # 2
Critical
ATS # X
Typical
Panelboards
Gx G2 G1
Optional Electrically
Operated Stored
Energy Breakers
Load Shed/Load
Add ATS Units
Optional Closed
Transition
Paralleling of
Generators and
Utility

1.1-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Design
021
Figure 1.1-21. Typical One-Line Health Care Facility with Complete Generator Backup and Utility Interconnect
Utility
Transformer
Utility
Metering
Generators X = Number of Units
Typical
Generator
Breaker
Gx G2 G1
Emergency Bus
Electrically Operated
Stored Energy
Breakers
EFx EF2 EF1
Service Main
Normal Bus
Optional
Electrically
Operated
Stored
Energy
Breakers
Fx F2 F1
Non-Essential
Loads
Equipment
ATS # 1
Life Safety
ATS # 2
Critical
ATS # X
Load Shed/
Load Add
ATS Units
Typical
Panelboards
EP1 EP2 EPX
Utility
Protective
Relay
TIE Optional TIE
Fire-Rated Wall
or Separation Barrier
Field Installed
Cable or Busway
Closed
Transition
Paralleling of
Generators and
Utility, Plus
Soft Loading/
Unloading

1.1-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01022
1.2-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
023
Generators and
Generator Systems
Typical Diesel GensetCaterpillar
Introduction
The selection and application
of generators into the electrical
distribution system will depend on
the particular application. There are
many factors to consider, including
code requirements, environmental
constraints, fuel sources, control
complexity, utility requirements and
load requirements. The health care
requirements for legally required
emergency standby generation
systems are described starting on
Page 1.1-14. Systems described in
this section are applicable to health
care requirements, as well as other
facilities that may require a high
degree of reliability. The electrical
supply for data centers, nancial
institutions, telecommunications,
government and public utilities
also require high reliability. Threats
of disaster or terror attacks have
prompted many facilities to require
complete self-sufciency for
continuous operation.
2011 NEC Changes Related to
Generator Systems
Article 250.30Grounding Separately
Derived AC Systemshas been
completely rewritten for clarity and
for usability. Most notably, the term
equipment bonding jumper was
changed to supply-side bonding
jumper (see 250.30(A)(2)). This was
necessary to ensure proper identica-
tion and installation of bonding
conductors within or on the supply
side of service equipment and
between the source of a separately
derived system and the rst discon-
necting means. The other require-
ments for grounded systems were
renumbered to accommodate the
250.30(A)(2) change. 250.30(B)(3)
Ungrounded Systemshas been
added, and this language requires
a supply-side bonding jumper to
be installed from the source of a
separately derived system to the rst
disconnecting means in accordance
with 250.30(A)(2). Another new
requirement, 250.30(C)Outdoor
Sourcehas been added, and requires
a grounding electrode connection at
the source location when the separately
derived system is located outside
of the building or the structure
being supplied.
Article 445.19Generators Supplying
Multiple Loadshas been revised
to require that the generator have
overcurrent protection per 240.15(A)
when using individual enclosures
tapped from a single feeder.
Article 517.17(B)Feeder GFP (Health
Care Facilities)now allows, but does
not require, multiple levels of GFPE
upstream of the transfer switch when
the choice is made to provide GFPE
on the alternate power source
(i.e., generator).
Article 701.6(D)Signals (Legally
Required Standby Systems)now
requires ground fault indication for
legally required standby systems of
more than 150V to ground and OCPDs
rated 1000A or more.
Types of Engines
Many generator sets are relatively
small in size, typically ranging from
several kilowatts to several mega-
watts. These units are often required
to come online and operate quickly.
They need to have the capacity to
run for an extended period of time.
The internal combustion engine is
an excellent choice as the prime
mover for the majority of these
applications. Turbines may also be
used. Diesel-fueled engines are the
most common, but other fuels used
include natural gas, digester gas,
landll gas, propane, biodiesel,
crude oil, steam and others.
Some campuses and industrial
facilities use and produce steam
for heating and other processes.
These facilities may nd it economi-
cally feasible to produce electricity as
a byproduct of the steam production.
These installations would typically be
classied as a cogeneration facility
producing a fairly constant power
output and operating in parallel with
the electric utility system.
Types of Generators
Generators can be either synchronous
or asynchronous. Asynchronous
generators are also referred to as
induction generators. The construction
is essentially the same as an induction
motor. It has a squirrel-cage rotor and
wound stator. An induction generator
is a motor driven above its designed
synchronous speed thus generating
power. It will operate as a motor if it
is running below synchronous speed.
The induction generator does not have
an exciter and must operate in parallel
with the utility or another source. The
induction generator requires VARs from
an external source for it to generate
power. The induction generator
operates at a slip frequency so its
output frequency is automatically
locked in with the utility's frequency.
An induction generator is a popular
choice for use when designing
cogeneration systems, where it will
operate in parallel with the utility.
This type of generator offers certain
advantages over a synchronous
generator. For example, voltage and
frequency are controlled by the utility;
thus voltage and frequency regulators
are not required. In addition, the
generator construction offers high
reliability and little maintenance.
Also, a minimum of protective relays
and controls are required. Its major
disadvantages are that it requires
VARs from the system and it normally
cannot operate as a standby/
emergency generator.
Synchronous generators, however,
are the most common. Their output is
determined by their eld and governor
controls. Varying the current in the
DC eld windings controls the voltage
output. The frequency is controlled
by the speed of rotation. The torque
applied to the generator shaft by
the driving engine controls the power
output. In this manner, the synchro-
nous generator offers precise control
over the power it can generate. In
cogeneration applications, it can be
used to improve the power factor of
the system.
1.2-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
024
Generator Systems
Emergency Standby Generator System
There are primarily three types of
generator systems. The rst and
simplest type is a single generator
that operates independently from
the electric utility power grid.
This is typically referred to as an
emergency standby generator
system. Figure 1.2-1 shows a single
standby generator, utility source
and a transfer switch. In this case, the
load is either supplied from the utility
or the generator. The generator and
the utility are never continuously
connected together. This simple radial
system has few requirements for
protection and control. It also has the
least impact on the complete electric
power distribution system. It should
be noted that this type of generator
system improves overall electrical
reliability but does not provide the
redundancy that some facilities
require if the generator fails to
start or is out for maintenance.
Figure 1.2-1. Emergency Standby
Generator System
Multiple Isolated Standby Generators
The second type of generator system
is a multiple isolated set of standby
generators. Figure 1.2-2 shows
multiple generators connected to
a paralleling bus feeding multiple
transfer switches. The utility is the
normal source for the transfer switches.
The generators and the utility are never
continuously connected together in this
scheme. Multiple generators may be
required to meet the load requirements
(N system). Generators may be applied
in an N+1 or a 2N system for improved
system reliability.
Figure 1.2-2. Multiple Isolated Set of
Standby Generators
In an N system, where N is the number
of generators required to carry the
load; if a generator fails or is out for
maintenance, then the load may be
dropped. This is unacceptable for most
critical 24/7 operations. In an N + 1
system, N is the number of generators
needed to carry the load and 1 is
an extra generator for redundancy.
If one generator fails to start or is out
for maintenance, it will not affect the
load. In a 2N system, there is complete
100% redundancy in the standby
generation system such that the failure
of one complete set of generators
will not affect the load.
Multiple generator systems have a
more complex control and protection
requirement as the units have to be
synchronized and paralleled together.
The generators are required to share
the load proportionally without swings
or prolonged hunting in voltage or
frequency for load sharing. They may
also require multiple levels of load
shedding and/or load restoration
schemes to match generation capacity.
Multiple Generators Operating in
Parallel with Utility System
The third type of system is either one
with a single or multiple generators
that operate in parallel with the utility
system. Figure 1.2-3 shows two
generators and a utility source feeding
a switchgear lineup feeding multiple
loads. This system typically requires
generator capacity sufcient to carry
the entire load or sophisticated load
shedding schemes. This system will
require a complete and complex
protection and control scheme. The
electric utility may have very stringent
and costly protection requirements
for the system. IEEE standard 1547
describes the interconnection require-
ments for paralleling to the utility.
Figure 1.2-3. Multiple Generators Operating
in Parallel with Utility System
Utility
ATS
Load
G1
Utility
ATS-1
Load 1
ATS-2
Load 2
G1 G2
Switchgear
Utility
Switchgear
Load 1 Load 2 Load 3
G1 G2
1.2-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
025
Generator Fundamentals
A generator consists of two primary
components, a prime mover and an
alternator. The prime mover is the
energy source used to turn the rotor
of the alternator. It is typically a
diesel combustion engine for most
emergency or standby systems.
In cogeneration applications, the
prime mover may come from a steam
driven turbine or other source. On
diesel units, a governor and voltage
regulator are used to control the speed
and power output.
The alternator is typically a synchro-
nous machine driven by the prime
mover. A voltage regulator controls its
voltage output by adjusting the eld.
The output of a single generator or
multiple paralleled generator sets is
controlled by these two inputs. The
alternator is designed to operate at a
specied speed for the required output
frequency, typically 60 or 50 Hz. The
voltage regulator and engine governor
along with other systems dene the
generators response to dynamic
load changes and motor starting
characteristics.
Generators are rated in power and
voltage output. Most generators are
designed to operate at a 0.8 power
factor. For example, a 2000 kW
generator at 277/480V would have a
kVA rating of 2500 kVA (2000 kW/ 08 pf)
and a continuous current rating
of 3007A
Typical synchronous generators
for industrial and commercial
power systems range in size from
1003000 kVA and from 208V13,800V.
Other ratings are available and these
discussions are applicable to those
ratings as well.
Generators must be considered in the
short-circuit and coordination study
as they may greatly impact the rating
of the electrical distribution system.
This is especially common on large
installations with multiple generators
and systems that parallel with the
utility source. Short-circuit current
contribution from a generator
typically ranges from 8 to 12 times
full load amperes.
2500 kVA 480V 3 ( )
.
The application of generators requires
special protection requirements.
The size, voltage class, importance
and dollar investment will inuence
the protection scheme associated with
the generator(s). Mode of operation
will inuence the utility companys
interface protection requirements.
Paralleling with the electric utility is
the most complicated of the utility
inter-tie requirements. IEEE ANSI 1547
provides recommended practices.
Generator Grounding and Bonding
(Ref. NEC 2011, Article 250.30(A)(1)
and (2))
Generator grounding methods need
to be considered and may affect the
distribution equipment and ratings.
Generators may be connected in delta
or wye, but wye is the most typical
connection. A wye-connected generator
can be solidly grounded, low impedance
grounded, high impedance grounded
or ungrounded. Section 1.4 discusses
general grounding schemes, benets
of each and protection considerations.
A solidly grounded generator may have
a lower zero sequence impedance than
its positive sequence impedance. In this
case, the equipment will need to be rated
for the larger available ground fault
current. The generators neutral may
be connected to the system-neutral; if
it is, the generator is not a separately
derived system and a three-pole transfer
switch is used. If the generators neutral
is bonded to ground separate from the
system-neutral, it is a separately
derived system and a four-pole transfer
switch is required or ground fault relays
could misoperate and unbalanced
neutral current may be carried on
ground conductors.
An IEEE working group has studied the
practice of low resistance grounding
of medium voltage generators within
the general industry. This working
group found that, for internal generator
ground faults, the vast majority of the
damage is done after the generator
breaker is tripped ofine, and the eld
and turbine are tripped. This is due to
the stored energy in the generator ux
that takes several seconds to dissipate
after the generator is tripped ofine.
It is during this time that the low
resistance ground allows signicant
amounts of fault current to ow into
the ground fault. Because the large fault
currents can damage the generators
winding, application of an alternate
protection method is desirable during
this time period. One of the solutions
set forth by this working group is
a hybrid high resistance grounding
(HHRG) scheme as shown in
Figure 1.2-4. In the HHRG scheme,
the low resistance ground (LRG)
is quickly tripped ofine when the
generator protection senses the
ground fault. The LRG is cleared
at the same time that the generator
breaker clears, leaving the high
resistance ground portion connected
to control the transient overvoltages
during the coast-down phase of the
generator, thereby all but eliminating
generator damage.
Figure 1.2-4. Hybrid High Resistance Grounding Scheme
Gen 59G
51G
87GN
86
Phase
Relays
HRG
LRG R
R
1.2-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
026
Generator Controls
The engine generator set has controls
to maintain the output frequency
(speed) and voltage. These controls
consist of a governor and voltage
regulator. As loads change on the
system, the frequency and voltage
will change. The speed control will
then adjust the governor to correct
for the load (kW) change. The
voltage regulator will change the
eld current to adjust the voltage
to the desired voltage value. These
are the basic controls found on all
synchronous generators.
Multiple generator systems require
more sophisticated controls.
Generators are paralleled in a multi-
generator system and they must share
the load. These systems often have
a load shed scheme, which adds to
the complexity.
Multiple generator schemes need a
master controller to prevent units from
being connected out-of-phase. The
sequence of operation is to send a
start signal to all generators simulta-
neously. The rst unit up to frequency
and voltage will be permitted to close
its respective breaker and energize the
paralleling bus. Breakers for the other
generators are held open, not permit-
ted to close, until certain conditions
are met. Once the paralleling bus is
energized, the remaining generators
must be synchronized to it before
the generators can be paralleled.
Synchronization compares the voltage
phasors angle and magnitude. Both
generators must be operating at the
same frequency and phase-matched
within typically 5 to 10 degrees with
each other. The voltage magnitude
typically must be within 20 to 24%.
A synch-scope is typically supplied
on paralleling gear. The synch-scope
displays the relative relationship
between voltage phasors on the
generator to be paralleled and the
bus. If the generator is running slower
than the bus (less than 60 Hz) then the
needle on the scope will spin in the
counterclockwise direction. If it is
running faster, then it will rotate in
the clockwise direction. The greater
the frequency difference, the faster
is the rotation. It is important that the
generators are in phase before they
are paralleled. Severe damage will
occur if generators are paralleled
out-of-phase.
Generator Short-Circuit
Characteristics
If a short circuit is applied directly to
the output terminals of a synchronous
generator, it will produce an extremely
high current initially, gradually decaying
to a steady-state value. This change
is represented by a varying reactive
impedance. Three specic reactances
are used for short-circuit fault currents.
They are:
Subtransient reactance Xd, which
is used to determine the fault
current during the rst 1 to 5 cycles
Transient reactance Xd, which is
used to determine the fault current
during the next 5 to 200 cycles
Synchronous reactance Xd, which
is used to determine the steady-
state fault current
The subtransient reactance Xd will
range from a minimum of approxi-
mately 9% for a two-pole, wound-rotor
machine to approximately 32% for a
low-speed, salient-pole, hydro-generator.
The initial symmetrical fault current can
be as much as 12 times full load current.
Depending on the generator type,
the zero sequence impedance may be
less than the subtransient reactance
and the ground fault current substan-
tially higher than the three-phase
short-circuit current. For example, a
2500 kVA, 480/277V, four-pole, 2/3 pitch
standby generator has a 0.1411 per
unit subtransient reactance Xd and
a 0.033 per unit zero sequence X
o

reactance. The ground current is
approximately a third larger than the
three-phase fault current. The ground
fault current can be reduced to the
three-phase level by simply adding a
small reactance between the generator
neutral and ground while still being
considered solidly grounded.
The electric power system analysis
must be performed based on the worst-
case operating conditions. Typically
this is when all sources are paralleled.
If the system can operate with both
the utility supply and generators in
parallel, then the equipment must be
rated for the combined fault current
plus motor contribution. If the generator
and utility will not be paralleled, then
both cases will need to be looked at
independently and the worst case used
for selecting the equipment ratings.
1.2-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
027
Generator Protection
Generator protection will vary and
depend on the size of the generator,
type of system and importance of the
generator. Generator sizes are dened
as: small1000 kVA maximum up
to 600V (500 kVA maximum when
above 600V); medium over 1000 kVA
to 12,500 kVA maximum regardless
of voltage; largefrom 12,500
50,000 kVA. The simplest is a single
generator system used to feed emer-
gency and/or standby loads. In this
case, the generator is the only source
available when it is operating and
it must keep operating until the
normal source returns.
Figure 1.2-5 Part (A) shows minimum
recommended protection for a single
generator used as an emergency or
standby system. Phase and ground
time overcurrent protection (Device
51 and 51G) will provide protection for
external faults. For medium voltage
generators, a voltage controlled time
overcurrent relay (Device 51V) is
recommended for the phase protec-
tion as it can be set more sensitive
than standard overcurrent relays and
is less likely to false operate on normal
overloads. This scheme may not
provide adequate protection for
internal generator faults when no
other power source exists. Local
generator controllers may offer
additional protection for voltage
and frequency conditions outside
the generators capabilities.
Figure 1.2-5 Part (B) shows the
recommended protection for multiple,
isolated, medium voltage, small
generators. Additional protection
may be desired and could include
generator differential, reverse power,
and loss of eld protection. Differential
protection (Device 87) can be accom-
plished with either a self-balancing
set of CTs as in Figure 1.2-6 or with
a percentage differential scheme as
in Figure 1.2-7 on Page 1.2-6. The
percentage differential scheme
offers the advantage of reducing the
possibility for false tripping due to
CT saturation. The self-balancing
scheme offers the advantages of
increased sensitivity, needing three
current transformers in lieu of six,
and the elimination of current
transformer external wiring from
the generator location to the generator
switchgear location.
Figure 1.2-5. Typical Protective Relaying Scheme for Small Generators
Figure 1.2-6. Self-Balancing Generator
Differential Relay Scheme
51G
1
Preferred
Location
51
51G
1
1
Gen
51
1
Alternate
Location
1 1
51V 32 40
1
3
87
Gen
Generator Protection ANSI/IEEE
Std 242-1986
(A)
(B)
(A) Single Isolated Generator on Low Voltage System
(B) Multiple Isolated Generator on Medium Voltage System
87-1
87-3
87-2
50/5A
50/5A
50/5A
R
Gen
1.2-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
028
Reverse power protection (Device 32)
is used to prevent the generator
from being motored. Motoring could
damage (with other hazards) the prime
mover. A steam turbine could overheat
and fail. A diesel or gas engine could
either catch re or explode. A steam
turbine can typically withstand
approximately 3% reverse power
where a diesel engine can withstand
up to 25% reverse power.
Loss of eld protection (Device 40) is
needed when generators are operating
in parallel with one another or the
power grid. When a synchronous
generator loses its eld, it will continue
to generate power as an induction
generator obtaining its excitation from
the other machines on the system.
During this condition, the rotor will
quickly overheat due to the slip
frequency currents induced in it. Loss
of excitation in one machine could
jeopardize the operation of the other
machines beyond their capability and
the entire system.
Figure 1.2-7. Generator Percentage Differential Relay (Phase Scheme)
and Ground Differential Scheme Using a Directional Relay
87
01
R1
02
R2
03
R3
R1
R2
R3
PC
OC
87G
Grounding
Resistor
51G
To Main Bus
52
Gen
OC = Operating coil
PC = Permissive coil
1.2-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
029
Typical protection for larger generators
is shown in Figure 1.2-8. It adds
phase unbalance and eld ground
fault protection. Phase unbalance
(Device 46) or negative sequence
overcurrent protection prevents the
generators rotor from overheating
damage. Unbalanced loads, fault
conditions or open phasing will
produce a negative sequence current
to ow. The unbalanced currents
induce double system frequency
currents in the rotor, which quickly
causes rotor overheating. Serious
damage will occur to the generator if
the unbalance is allowed to persist.
Other protection functions such as
under/overvoltage (Device 27/59)
could be applied to any size generator.
The voltage regulator typically main-
tains the output voltage within its
desired output range. This protection
can provide backup protection in case
the voltage regulator fails. Under/over
frequency protection (Device 81U/81O)
could be used for backup protection
for the speed control. Sync check
relays (Device 25) are typically applied
as a breaker permissive close function
where generators are paralleled.
Many modern protective relays are
microprocessor-based and provide a
full complement of generator protection
functions in a single package. The cost
per protection function has been
drastically reduced such that it is
feasible to provide more complete
protection even to smaller generators.
IEEE ANSI 1547 provides recom-
mended practices for utility inter-tie
protection. If the system has closed-
transition or paralleling capability,
additional protection may be required
by the utility. Typically, no additional
protection is required if the generator
is paralleled to the utility for a maximum
of 100 msec or less. Systems that
offer soft transfer, peak shaving or
co-generation will require additional
utility inter-tie protection. The protection
could include directional overcurrent
and power relays and even transfer
trip schemes. Please consult your local
utility for specic requirements.
Figure 1.2-8. Typical Protective Relaying Scheme for Large Generator
3
87B
3
87
1
87G
1
49
Gen
1
64
E
60
46 32 40 51V
3
Voltage Regulator and
Metering Circuits
51G
81U/O
27/59
1 1 1
1.2-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
030
Generator Set Sizing
and Ratings
Many factors must be considered
when determining the proper size or
electrical rating of an electrical power
generator set. The engine or prime
mover is sized to provide the actual
or real power in kW, as well as speed
(frequency) control through the use
of an engine governor. The generator
is sized to supply the kVA needed at
startup and during normal running
operation and it also provides voltage
control using a brushless exciter and
voltage regulator. Together the engine
and generator provide the energy
necessary to supply electrical loads
in many different applications
encountered in todays society.
The generator set must be able to
supply the starting and running
electrical load. It must be able to
pick up and start all motor loads and
low power factor loads, and recover
without excessive voltage dip or
extended recovery time. Nonlinear
loads like variable frequency drives,
uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
systems and switching power supplies
also require attention because the SCR
switching causes voltage and current
waveform distortion and harmonics.
The harmonics generate additional
heat in the generator windings, and
the generator may need to be upsized
to accommodate this. The type of
fuel (diesel, natural gas, propane, etc.)
used is important as it is a factor in
determining generator set transient
response. It is also necessary to
determine the load factor or average
power consumption of the generator
set. This is typically dened as the load
(kW) x time (hrs. while under that
particular load) / total running time.
When this load factor or average
power is taken into consideration
with peak demand requirements
and the other operating parameters
mentioned above, the overall electrical
rating of the genset can be deter-
mined. Other items to consider include
the unique installation, ambient, and
site requirements of the project. These
will help to determine the physical
conguration of the overall system.
Typical rating denitions for diesel
gensets are: standby, prime plus 10,
continuous and load management
(paralleled with or isolated from
utility). Any diesel genset can have
several electrical ratings depending
on the number of hours of operation
per year and the ratio of electrical
load/genset rating when in operation.
The same diesel genset can have a
standby rating of 2000 kW at 0.8 power
factor (pf) and a continuous rating of
1825 kW at 0.8 pf. The lower continu-
ous rating is due to the additional
hours of operation and higher load
that the continuous genset must
carry. These additional requirements
put more stress on the engine and
generator and therefore the rating
is decreased to maintain longevity
of the equipment.
Different generator set manufacturers
use basically the same diesel genset
electrical rating denitions and these
are based on international diesel
fuel stop power standards from
organizations like ISO, DIN and others.
A standby diesel genset rating is
typically dened as supplying varying
electrical loads for the duration of a
power outage with the load normally
connected to utility, genset operating
<100 hours per year and no overload
capability. A prime plus 10 rating is
typically dened as supplying varying
electrical loads for the duration of a
power outage with the load normally
connected to utility, genset operating
500 hours per year and overload
capability of 10% above its rating for
1 hour out of 12. A continuous rating
is typically dened as supplying
unvarying electrical loads (i.e., base
loaded) for an unlimited time. The load
management ratings apply to gensets
in parallel operation with the utility
or isolated/islanded from utility and
these ratings vary in usability from
<200 hours per year to unlimited
usage. Refer to generator set manufac-
turers for further denitions on load
management ratings, load factor or
average power consumption, peak
demand and how these ratings are
typically applied. Even though there is
some standardization of these ratings
across the manufacturers, there also
exists some uniqueness with regard to
how each manufacturer applies their
generator sets.
Electrical rating denitions for natural
gas powered gensets are typically
dened as standby or continuous with
denitions similar to those mentioned
above for diesels. Natural gas gensets
recover more slowly than diesel
gensets when subjected to block
loads. Diesel engines have a much
more direct path from the engine gov-
ernor and fuel delivery system to the
combustion chamber and this results
in a very responsive engine-generator.
A natural gas engine is challenged
with air-fuel ow dynamics and a
much more indirect path from the
engine governor (throttle actuator)
and fuel delivery system (natural
gas pressure regulator, fuel valve and
actuator, carburetor mixer, aftercooler,
intake manifold) to the combustion
chamber and this results in a
less responsive engine-generator.
Diesel gensets recover about twice
as fast as natural gas gensets.
For the actual calculations involved
for sizing a genset, there are readily
accessible computer software programs
that are available on the genset manu-
facturers Internet sites or from the
manufacturers dealers or distributors.
These programs are used to quickly
and accurately size generator sets for
their application. The programs take
into consideration the many different
parameters discussed above, including
the size and type of the electrical loads
(resistive, inductive, SCR, etc.), reduced
voltage soft starting devices (RVSS),
motor types, voltage, fuel type, site
conditions, ambient conditions and
other variables. The software will
optimize the starting sequences of the
motors for the least amount of voltage
dip and determine the starting kVA
needed from the genset. It also provides
transient response data, including
voltage dip magnitude and recovery
duration. If the transient response is
unacceptable, then design changes can
be considered, including oversizing
the generator to handle the additional
kVAR load, adding RVSS devices to
reduce the inrush current, improving
system power factor and other methods.
The computer software programs are
quite exible in that they allow changes
to the many different variables and
parameters to achieve an optimum
design. The software allows, for
example, minimizing voltage dips
or using paralleled gensets vs. a
single genset.
1.2-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
031
Genset Sizing Guidelines
Some conservative rules of thumb
for genset sizing include:
1. Oversize genset 2025%
for reserve capacity and for
motor starting.
2. Oversize gensets for unbalanced
loading or low power factor
running loads.
3. Use 1/2 hp per kW for motor loads.
4. For variable frequency drives,
oversize the genset by at
least 40%.
5. For UPS systems, oversize the
genset by 40% for 6 pulse and
15% for 6 pulse with input lters
or 12 pulse.
6. Always start the largest motor
rst when stepping loads.
For basic sizing of a generator system,
the following example could be used:
Step 1: Calculate Running Amperes
Motor loads:
200 hp motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156A
100 hp motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78A
60 hp motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48A
Lighting load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68A
Miscellaneous loads . . . . . . . . . . 95A
Running amperes . . . . . . . . . . . 445A
Step 2: Calculating Starting Amperes
Using 1.25 Multiplier
Motor loads:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60A
Lighting load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68A
Miscellaneous loads . . . . . . . . . . 95A
Starting amperes . . . . . . . . . . . 516A
Step 3: Selecting kVA of Generator
Running kVA =
(445A x 480V x 1.732)/
1000 = 370 kVA
Starting kVA =
(516A x 480V x 1.732)/
1000 = 428 kVA
Solution
Generator must have a minimum
starting capability of 428 kVA and
minimum running capability of 370 kVA.
Also, please see section Factors
Governing Voltage Drop on
Page 1.3-21 for further discussion
on generator loading and reduced
voltage starting techniques for motors.
Generator Set Installation
and Site Considerations
There are many different installation
parameters and site conditions
that must be considered to have a
successful generator set installation.
The following is a partial list of areas
to consider when conducting this
design. Some of these installation
parameters include:
Foundation type (crushed rock,
concrete, dirt, wood, separate
concrete inertia pad, etc.)
Foundation to genset vibration
dampening (spring type, cork
and rubber, etc.)
Noise attenuation (radiator fan
mechanical noise, exhaust noise,
air intake noise)
Combustion and cooling air
requirements
Exhaust backpressure requirements
Emissions permitting
Delivery and rigging requirements
Genset derating due to high
altitudes or excessive ambient
temperatures
Hazardous waste considerations
for fuel, antifreeze, engine oil
Meeting local building and
electrical codes
Genset exposure (coastal
conditions, dust, chemicals, etc.)
Properly sized starting systems
(compressed air, batteries
and charger)
Allowing adequate space for
installation of the genset and for
maintenance (i.e., air lter removal,
oil changing, general genset
inspection, etc)
Flex connections on all systems that
are attached to the genset and a
rigid structure (fuel piping, founda-
tion vibration isolators, exhaust, air
intake, control wiring, power cables,
radiator anges/duct work, etc.)
Diesel fuel day tank systems
(pumps, return piping)
Fuel storage tank (double walled,
re codes) and other parameters
Please see the generator set manufac-
turers application and installation
guidelines for proper application
and operation of their equipment.
Figure 1.2-9. Typical Genset Installation
Note: Courtesy of Caterpillar, Inc.
1.2-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01032
1.3-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
033
Systems Analysis
A major consideration in the
design of a distribution system is to
ensure that it provides the required
quality of service to the various
loads. This includes serving each
load under normal conditions and,
under abnormal conditions, providing
the desired protection to service
and system apparatus so that
interruptions of service are minimized
consistent with good economic and
mechanical design.
Under normal conditions, the impor-
tant technical factors include voltage
prole, losses, load ow, effects of
motor starting, service continuity and
reliability. The prime considerations
under faulted conditions are apparatus
protection, fault isolation and service
continuity. During the system prelimi-
nary planning stage, before selection
of the distribution apparatus, several
distribution systems should be analyzed
and evaluated, including both economic
and technical factors. During this stage,
if system size or complexity warrant,
it may be appropriate to provide a
thorough review of each system under
both normal and abnormal conditions.
The principal types of computer
programs used to provide system
studies include:
Short circuitidentify three-phase
and line-to-ground fault currents
and system impedances
Arc ashcalculates arc ash
energy levels, which leads to the
selection of personal protective
equipment (PPE)
Circuit breaker dutyidentify
asymmetrical fault current based
on X/R ratio
Protective device coordination
determine characteristics and set-
tings of medium voltage protective
relays and fuses, and entire low
voltage circuit breaker and fuse
coordination
Load owsimulate normal
load conditions of system
voltages, power factor, line
and transformer loadings
Motor startingidentify system
voltages, motor terminal voltage,
motor accelerating torque, and
motor accelerating time when
starting large motors
Short-circuit calculations dene
momentary and steady-state fault
currents for LV and MV breaker and
fuse duty and bus bracings at any
selected location in the system, and also
determine the effect on the system
after removal of utility power due to
breaker operation or scheduled power
outages. Computer software programs
can identify the fault current at any
bus, in every line or source connected
to the faulted bus, or to it and every
adjacent bus, or to it and every bus
that is one and two buses away, or
currents in every line or source in the
system. The results of these calculations
permit optimizing service to the loads
while properly applying distribution
apparatus within their intended limits.
The following additional studies
should be considered depending
upon the type and complexity of the
distribution system, the type of facility
and the type of loads to be connected
to the system:
Harmonic analysis
Transient stability
Insulation coordination
Grounding study
Switching transient
Eatons Electrical Services & Systems
division can provide the studies
enumerated above.
1.3-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
034
Short-Circuit Currents
General
The amount of current available in a
short-circuit fault is determined by the
capacity of the system voltage sources
and the impedances of the system,
including the fault. Voltage sources
include the power supply (utility or
on-site generation) plus all rotating
machines connected to the system at
the time of the fault. A fault may be
either an arcing or bolted fault. In an
arcing fault, part of the circuit voltage is
consumed across the fault and the total
fault current is somewhat smaller than
for a bolted fault, so the latter is the
worst condition, and therefore is the
value sought in the fault calculations.
Basically, the short-circuit current is
determined by applying Ohms Law
to an equivalent circuit consisting of
a constant voltage source and a time-
varying impedance. A time-varying
impedance is used in order to account
for the changes in the effective voltages
of the rotating machines during the
fault. In an AC system, the resulting
short-circuit current starts out higher
in magnitude than the nal steady-
state value and asymmetrical (due
to the DC offset) about the X-axis.
The current then decays toward a
lower symmetrical steady-state value.
The time-varying characteristic of the
impedance accounts for the symmetri-
cal decay in current. The ratio of the
reactive and resistive components (X/R
ratio) accounts for the DC decay, see
Figure 1.3-1. The fault current consists
of an exponentially decreasing direct-
current component superimposed
upon a decaying alternating-current.
The rate of decay of both the DC and
AC components depends upon the
ratio of reactance to resistance (X/R)
of the circuit. The greater this ratio,
the longer the current remains higher
than the steady-state value that it
would eventually reach.
The total fault current is not symmetrical
with respect to the time-axis because
of the direct-current component,
hence it is called asymmetrical current.
The DC component depends on the
point on the voltage wave at which
the fault is initiated.
See Table 1.3-2 for multiplying factors
that relate the rms asymmetrical value
of total current to the rms symmetrical
value, and the peak asymmetrical
value of total current to the rms
symmetrical value.
The AC component is not constant
if rotating machines are connected
to the system because the impedance
of this apparatus is not constant. The
rapid variation of motor and generator
impedance is due to these factors:
Subtransient reactance (x "
d
), deter-
mines fault current during the rst
cycle, and after about 6 cycles this
value increases to the transient reac-
tance. It is used for the calculation
of the momentary interrupting and/or
momentary withstand duties of
equipment and/or system.
Transient reactance (x '
d
), which deter-
mines fault current after about 6 cycles
and this value in 1/2 to 2 seconds
increases to the value of the synchro-
nous reactance. It is used in the setting
of the phase OC relays of generators
and medium voltage circuit breakers.
Synchronous reactance (x
d
), which
determines fault current after steady-
state condition is reached. It has no
effect as far as short-circuit calculations
are concerned, but is useful in the
determination of relay settings.
Transformer impedance, in percent, is
dened as that percent of rated primary
voltage that must be applied to the
transformer to produce rated current
owing in the secondary, with second-
ary shorted through zero resistance.
Therefore, assuming the primary
voltage can be sustained (generally
referred to as an innite or unlimited
supply), the maximum current a trans-
former can deliver to a fault condition is
the quantity of (100 divided by percent
impedance) times the transformer
rated secondary current. Limiting the
power source fault capacity will thereby
reduce the maximum fault current from
the transformer.
The electric network that determines
the short-circuit current consists of an
AC driving voltage equal to the pre-fault
system voltage and an impedance
corresponding to that observed when
looking back into the system from the
fault location. In medium and high
voltage work, it is generally satisfactory
to regard reactance as the entire
impedance; resistance may be
neglected. However, this is normally
permissible only if the X/R ratio of the
medium voltage system is equal to or
more than 25. In low voltage (1000V
and below) calculations, it is usually
worthwhile to attempt greater accuracy
by including resistance with reactance
in dealing with impedance. It is for this
reason, plus ease of manipulating the
various impedances of cables and
buses and transformers of the low
voltage circuits, that computer studies
are recommended before nal selection
of apparatus and system arrangements.
When evaluating the adequacy
of short-circuit ratings of medium
voltage circuit breakers and fuses,
both the rms symmetrical value and
asymmetrical value of the short-circuit
current should be determined.
For low voltage circuit breakers and
fuses, the rms symmetrical value
should be determined along with
either: the X/R ratio of the fault
at the device or the asymmetrical
short- circuit current.
Figure 1.3-1. Structure of an Asymmetrical Current Wave
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
Total CurrentA Wholly Offset
Asymmetrical Alternating Wave
rms Value of Total Current
Alternating Component -
Symmetrical Wave
rms Value of
Alternating Component
Direct ComponentThe Axis
of Symmetrical Wave
Time in Cycles of
a 60 Hz Wave
1 2 3 4
S
c
a
l
e

o
f

C
u
r
e
n
t

V
a
l
u
e
s
1.3-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
035
Fault Current Waveform Relationships
The following Figure 1.3-2 describes
the relationship between fault
current peak values, rms symmetrical
values and rms asymmetrical values
depending on the calculated X/R ratio.
The table is based on the following
general formulas:
1.
2.
Where:
I = Symmetrical rms current
I
p
= Peak current
e = 2.718
= 2 f
f = Frequency in Hz
t = Time in seconds
Based on a 60 Hz system and t = 1/2 cycle
(ANSI/IEEE C37.13.1990/10.1.4)
Peak multiplication factor =
rms multiplication factor =
Example for X/R =15
Figure 1.3-2. Relation of X/R Ratio to Multiplication Factor
I
p
I 2 1 e
t
X R
------------
+

=
I
rms asym
I 1 2e
2t
X R
---------------
+ =
I
p
I
----- 2 1 e
260
120
----------------
X R
----------------
+

2 1 e

X R
----------
+

= =
I
rms asym
I
------------------------------ 1 2e
2 ( ) 260 ( )
120
-------------------------------
X R
-------------------------------
+ 1 2e
2
X R
------------
+ = =
Peak mf 2 1 e

15
-------
+

2.5612 = =
rms mf 1 2e
2
15
----------
+ 1.5217 = =
2.8
2.7
2.6
2.5
2.4
2.3
2.2
2.1
2.0
1.9
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.5 1 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
1.2
1.1
P
E
A
K

M
U
L
T
I
P
L
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

F
A
C
T
O
R
R
M
S

M
U
L
T
I
P
L
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

F
A
C
T
O
R
CIRCUIT X/R RATIO (TAN PHASE)
Based Upon: rms Asym = DC
2
+ rms Sym
2
with DC Value
Taken at Current Peak
R
M
S

M
U
L
T
I
P
L
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

F
A
C
T
O
R

=
R
M
S

M
A
X
I
M
U
M

A
S
Y
M
M
E
T
R
I
C
A
L
R
M
S

S
Y
M
M
E
T
R
I
C
A
L
P
E
A
K

M
U
L
T
I
P
L
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

F
A
C
T
O
R

=
P
E
A
K

M
A
X
I
M
U
M

A
S
Y
M
M
E
T
R
I
C
A
L
R
M
S

S
Y
M
M
E
T
R
I
C
A
L
1.3-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
036
The calculation of asymmetrical
currents is a laborious procedure since
the degree of asymmetry is not the
same on all three phases. It is common
practice for medium voltage systems,
to calculate the rms symmetrical fault
current, with the assumption being
made that the DC component has
decayed to zero, and then apply
a multiplying factor to obtain the rst
half-cycle rms asymmetrical current,
which is called the momentary
current. For medium voltage systems
(dened by IEEE as greater than 1000V
up to 69,000V) the multiplying factor
is established by NEMA
and ANSI
standards depending upon the
operating speed of the breaker. For
low voltage systems, short-circuit
study software usually calculates the
symmetrical fault current and the
faulted system X/R ratio using ANSI
guidelines. If the X/R ratio is within the
standard, and the breaker interrupting
current is under the symmetrical fault
value, the breaker is properly rated.
If the X/R ratio is higher than ANSI
standards, the study applies a multi-
plying factor to the symmetrical
calculated value (based on the
X/R value of the system fault) and
compares that value to the breaker
symmetrical value to assess if it is
properly rated. In the past, especially
using manual calculations, a multiply-
ing factor of 1.17 (based on the use
of an X/R ratio of 6.6 representing
a source short-circuit power factor
of 15%) was used to calculate the
asymmetrical current. These values
take into account that medium voltage
breakers are rated on maximum
asymmetry and low voltage breakers
are rated average asymmetry.
To determine the motor contribution
during the rst half-cycle fault current,
when individual motor horsepower
load is known, the subtransient
reactances found in the IEEE Red Book
should be used in the calculations.
When the system motor load is
unknown, the following assumptions
generally are made:
Induction motorsuse 4.0 times
motor full load current (impedance
value of 25%).
Note: For motors fed through adjustable
frequency drives or solid-state soft starters,
there is no contribution to fault current, unless
1) they have an internal run contactor or
2) they have a bypass contactor.
Synchronous motorsuse 5.0 times
motor full load current (impedance
value of 20%).
When the motor load is not known,
the following assumptions generally
are made:
208Y/120V Systems
Assume 50% lighting and 50%
motor load
or
Assume motor feedback contribu-
tion of twice full load current of
transformer
or
240/480/600V Three-Phase, Three-Wire or
Four-Wire Systems
Assume 100% motor load
or
Assume motors 25% synchronous
and 75% induction
or
tion of four times full load current
of transformer
480Y/277V Systems in Commercial Buildings
Assume 50% induction motor load
or
tion of two times full load current
of transformer or source
Medium Voltage Motors
If known, use actual values otherwise
use the values indicated for the same
type of motor.
Calculation Methods
The following pages describe various
methods of calculating short-circuit
currents for both medium and low
voltage systems. A summary of
the types of methods and types of
calculations is as follows:
Medium voltage
switchgearexact
method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-5
Medium voltage
switchgearquick
check table . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-7
Medium voltage
switchgear
Example 1verify
ratings of breakers. . . . . Page 1.3-8
Medium voltage
switchgear
Example 2verify
ratings of breakers
with rotating
loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-9
Medium voltage
switchgear Example 3
verify ratings of
breakers with
generators . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-10
Medium voltage
fusesexact method. . . Page 1.3-11
Power breakers
asymmetry
derating factors . . . . . . . Page 1.3-11
Molded-case
breakersasymmetry
derating factors . . . . . . . Page 1.3-12
Short-circuit
calculations
short cut method
for a system. . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-13
Short-circuit
calculationsshort
cut method for
end of cable . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-15
Short-circuit
calculations
short cut method
for end of cable
chart method . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-16
Short-circuit currents
chart of transformers
3003750 kVA. . . . . . . . . Page 1.5-9
1.3-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
037
for Specic Equipment
Exact Method
The purpose of the fault current calcu-
lations is to determine the fault current
at the location of a circuit breaker, fuse
or other fault interrupting device in
order to select a device adequate for the
calculated fault current or to check the
thermal and momentary ratings of non-
interrupting devices. When the devices
to be used are ANSI-rated devices, the
fault current must be calculated and the
device selected as per ANSI standards.
The calculation of available fault current
and system X/R rating is also used to
verify adequate bus bar bracing and
momentary withstand ratings of
devices such as contactors.
Medium Voltage VCP-W
Metal-Clad Switchgear
The applicable ANSI Standards, C37
is the latest applicable edition. The
following is a review of the meaning
of the ratings. (See Tab 5, Section 5.4.)
The Rated Maximum Voltage
This designates the upper limit of
design and operation of a circuit
breaker. For example, a circuit breaker
with a 4.76 kV rated maximum voltage
cannot be used in a 4.8 kV system.
K-Rated Voltage Factor
The rated voltage divided by this factor
determines the system kV a breaker can
be applied up to the short-circuit kVA
rating calculated by the formula
Note: Interrupting capabilities of some of
todays vacuum breakers may have K = 1,
whereby the interrupting current is constant
across its entire operating range.
Rated Short-Circuit Current
This is the symmetrical rms value of
current that the breaker can interrupt
at rated maximum voltage. It should
be noted that the product x 4.76 x
29,000 = 239,092 kVA is less than the
nominal 250,000 kVA listed. This rating
(29,000A) is also the base quantity
that all the related capabilities are
referred to.
Maximum Symmetrical Interrupting
Capability
This is expressed in rms symmetrical
amperes or kiloamperes and is K x I
rated; 29,000 x 1.24 = 35,960 rounded
to 36 kA.
This is the rms symmetrical current
that the breaker can interrupt down to
3 Rated SC Current Rated Max. Voltage
3
a voltage = maximum rated voltage
divided by K (for example, 4.76/1.24 =
3.85). If this breaker is applied in a
system rated at 2.4 kV, the calculated
fault current must be less than 36 kA.
For example, consider the following case:
Assume a 12.47 kV system with 20,000A
symmetrical available. In order to
determine if an Eaton Type 150 VCP-W
500 vacuum breaker is suitable for this
application, check the following:
From Table 5.4-1B in Tab 5, Section 5.4
under column Rated Maximum
Voltage V = 15 kV, under column
Rated short-circuit Current I = 18 kA,
Rated Voltage Range Factor K = 1.3.
Test 1 for V/V
o
x I or 15 kV/12.47 kV x
18 kA = 21.65; also check K x I (which
is shown in the column headed
Capability) or 1.3 x 18 kA = 23.4 kA.
Because both of these numbers are
greater than the available system fault
current of 20,000A, the breaker is
acceptable (assumes the breakers
momentary and fault close rating is
also acceptable).
Note: If the system available fault current
were 22,000A symmetrical, this breaker
could not be used even though the
Capability is greater than 22,000 because
Test 1 calculation is not satised.
For approximate calculations, Table 1.3-1
provides typical values of % reactance
(X) and X/R values for various rotating
equipment and transformers. For sim-
plication purposes, the transformer
impedance (Z) has been assumed to be
primarily reactance (X). In addition, the
resistance (R) for these simplied cal-
culations has been ignored. For detailed
calculations, the values from the IEEE
Red Book Standard 141, for rotating
machines, and ANSI C57 and/or C37
for transformers should be used.
Table 1.3-1. Reactance X
Table 1.3-2. Typical System X/R Ratio Range (for Estimating Purposes)
System
Component
Reactance X Used for Typical Values and Range
on Component Base
Short-Circuit
Duty
Close and Latch
(Momentary) % Reactance X/R Ratio
Two-pole turbo generator
Four-pole turbo generator
X
X
X
X
9 (714)
15 (1217)
80 (40120)
80 (40120)
Hydro generator with damper wedges
and synchronous condensers
X X 20 (1332) 30 (1060)
Hydro generator without damper windings 0.75X 0.75X 16 (1650) 30 (1060)
All synchronous motors 1.5X 1.0X 20 (1335) 30 (1060)
Induction motors above 1000 hp, 1800 rpm
and above 250 hp, 3600 rpm
1.5X 1.0X 17 (1525) 30 (1540)
All other induction motors 50 hp and above 3.0X 1.2X 17 (1525) 15 (240)
Induction motors below 50 hp and
all single-phase motors
Neglect Neglect
Distribution system from remote
transformers
X X As specied
or calculated
15 (515)
Current limiting reactors X X As specied
or calculated
80 (40120)
Transformers
OA to 10 MVA, 69 kV X X 8.0 18 (724)
OA to 10 MVA, above 69 kV X X 8.0 to 10.5
Depends on
primary
windings BIL
rating
18 (724)
FOA 1230 MVA X X 20 (730)
FOA 40100 MVA X X 38 (3244)
Type of Circuit X/R Range
Remote generation through other types of circuits such as transformers rated 10 MVA
or smaller for each three-phase bank, transmission lines, distribution feeders, etc.
15 or less
Remote generation connected through transformer rated 10 MVA to 100 MVA
for each three-phase bank, where the transformers provide 90% or more
of the total equivalent impedance to the fault point
1540
Remote generation connected through transformers rated 100 MVA or larger
for each three-phase bank where the transformers provide 90% or more
of the total equivalent impedance to the fault point
3050
Synchronous machines connected through transformers rated 25100 MVA
for each three-phase bank
3050
Synchronous machines connected through transformers rated 100 MVA and larger 4060
Synchronous machines connected directly to the bus or through reactors 40120
1.3-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
038
The Close and Latch Capability
This is also a related quantity
expressed in rms asymmetrical
amperes by 1.6 x maximum
symmetrical interrupting capability.
For example, 1.6 x 36 = 57.6 or 58 kA,
or 1.6 K x rated short-circuit current.
Another way of expressing the close
and latch rating is in terms of the peak
current, which is the instantaneous
value of the current at the crest. ANSI
Standard C37.09 indicates that the
ratio of the peak to rms asymmetrical
value for any asymmetry of 100% to
20% (percent asymmetry is dened as
the ratio of DC component of the fault
in per unit to ) varies not more than
2% from a ratio of 1.69. Therefore,
the close and latch current expressed
in terms of the peak amperes is = 1.6 x
1.69 x K x rated short-circuit current.
In the calculation of faults for the pur-
poses of breaker selection, the rotating
machine impedances specied in ANSI
Standard C37.010 Article 5.4.1 should
be used. The value of the impedances
and their X/R ratios should be obtained
from the equipment manufacturer. At
initial short-circuit studies, data from
manufacturers is not available. Typical
values of impedances and their X/R
ratios are given in Table 1.3-1.
Figure 1.3-3. Three-phase Fault Multiplying
Factors that Include Effects of AC and
DC Decrement
The ANSI Standard C37.010 allows the
use of the X values only in determin-
ing the E/X value of a fault current. The
R values are used to determine the X/R
ratio, in order to apply the proper
multiplying factor, to account for the
total fault clearing time, asymmetry,
and decrement of the fault current.
The steps in the calculation of fault
currents and breaker selection are
described hereinafter:
Step 1: Collect the X and R data of the
circuit elements. Convert to a common
kVA and voltage base. If the reactances
and resistances are given either in
ohms or per unit on a different voltage
or kVA base, all should be changed
to the same kVA and voltage base.
This caution does not apply where
the base voltages are the same as
the transformation ratio.
Step 2: Construct the sequence
networks and connect properly for
the type of fault under consideration.
Use the X values required by ANSI
Standard C37.010 for the interrupting
duty value of the short-circuit current.
Figure 1.3-4. Line-to-Ground Fault Multiplying
Factors that Include Effects of AC and
DC Decrement
Step 3: Reduce the reactance network
to an equivalent reactance. Call this
reactance X
I
.
Step 4: Set up the same network for
resistance values.
Step 5: Reduce the resistance network
to an equivalent resistance. Call this
resistance R
I
. The above calculations
of X
I
and R
I
may be calculated by
several computer programs.
Step 6: Calculate the E/X
I
value, where
E is the prefault value of the voltage at
the point of fault nominally assumed
1.0 pu.
Step 7: Determine X/R = as
previously calculated.
Step 8: Go to the proper curve for
the type of fault under consideration
(three-phase, phase-to-phase, phase-
to-ground), type of breaker at the loca-
tion (2, 3, 5 or 8 cycles), and contact
parting time to determine the multi-
plier to the calculated E/X
I
.
See Figures 1.3-3, 1.3-4 and 1.3-5 for
5-cycle breaker multiplying factors.
Use Figure 1.3-5 if the short circuit is
fed predominantly from generators
removed from the fault by two or more
Figure 1.3-5. Three-phase and Line-to-Ground
Fault Multiplying Factors that Include Effects
of DC Decrement Only
2
6
5
4
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
P
A
R
T
I
N
G
T
I
M
E
3
5-CYCLE
BREAKER
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
Multiplying Factors for E / X Amperes
R
a
t
i
o

X
/
R
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
7
8
5-CYCLE
BREAKER
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
3
4
5
R
a
t
i
o

X
/
R
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
X
I
R
I
------
4
5-CYCLE
BREAKER
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
6
8 1
0 1
2
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
P
A
R
T
I
N
G
T
I
M
E
3
R
a
t
i
o

X
/
R
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
1.3-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
039
transformations or the per unit reac-
tance external to the generation is 1.5
times or more than the subtransient
reactance of the generation on a com-
mon base. Also use Figure 1.3-5 where
the fault is supplied by a utility only.
Step 9: Interrupting duty short-circuit
current = E/X
I
x MF
x
= E/X
2
.
Step 10: Construct the sequence
(positive, negative and zero) networks
properly connected for the type of
fault under consideration. Use the
X values required by ANSI Standard
C37.010 for the Close and Latch
duty value of the short-circuit current.
Step 11: Reduce the network to an
equivalent reactance. Call the reac-
tance X. Calculate E/X x 1.6 if the
breaker close and latch capability is
given in rms amperes or E/X x 2.7 if
the breaker close and latch capability
is given in peak or crest amperes.
Step 12: Select a breaker whose:
a. Maximum voltage rating exceeds
the operating voltage of the system:
b.
See Table 6.0-1, Tab 6.
Where:
I = Rated short-circuit current
V
max
= Rated maximum voltage
of the breaker
VD = Actual system voltage
KI = Maximum symmetrical
interrupting capacity
c. E/X x 1.6 rms closing and
latching capability of the breaker
and/or
E/X x 2.7 Crest closing and
latching capability of the breaker.
E
X
2
------- I
V
max
V
o
-------------- KI
The ANSI standards do not require the
inclusion of resistances in the calcula-
tion of the required interrupting and
close and latch capabilities. Thus the
calculated values are conservative.
However, when the capabilities of
existing switchgears are investigated,
the resistances should be included.
For single line-to-ground faults, the
symmetrical interrupting capability
is 1.15 x the symmetrical interrupting
capability at any operating voltage,
but not to exceed the maximum
symmetrical capability of the breaker.
Section 5 of ANSI C37 provides
further guidance for medium voltage
breaker application.
Reclosing Duty
ANSI Standard C37.010 indicates the
reduction factors to use when circuit
breakers are used as reclosers. Eaton
VCP-W breakers are listed at 100%
rating factor for reclosing.
Application Quick Check Table
For application of circuit breakers in a
radial system supplied from a single
source transformer. Short-circuit duty
was determined using E/X amperes
and 1.0 multiplying factor for X/R ratio
of 15 or less and 1.25 multiplying
factor for X/R ratios in the range of
15 to 40.
Application Above 3,300 ft (1,000m)
The rated one-minute power frequency
withstand voltage, the impulse with-
stand voltage, the continuous current
rating, and the maximum voltage rating
must be multiplied by the appropriate
correction factors below to obtain
modied ratings that must equal or
exceed the application requirements.
Note: Intermediate values may be obtained
by interpolation.
Table 1.3-3. Altitude Derating
Table 1.3-4. Application Quick Check Table
Transformer impedance 6.5% or more, all other transformer impedances are 5.5% or more.
Altitude in
Feet (Meters)
Correction Factor
Current Voltage
3300 (1006) (and below)
5000 (1524)
10,000 (3048)
1.00
0.99
0.96
1.00
0.95
0.80
Source
Transformer
MVA Rating
Operating Voltage
kV
Motor Load 2.4 4.16 6.6 12 13.8
100% 0%
1
1.5
2
1.5
2
2.5
50 VCP-W 250
12 kA 50 VCP-W 250
10.1 kA
150 VCP-W 500
23 kA
150 VCP-W 500
22.5 kA
150 VCP-W 500
19.6 kA
2.5
3
3
3.75
3.75
5
5
7.5
50 VCP-W 250
36 kA 50 VCP-W 250
33.2 kA
7.5
10
10
10
50 VCP-W 350
49 kA
10 12
12 15 50 VCP-W 350
46.9 kA
75 VCP-W 500
41.3 kA
15 20
20
20 Breaker Type and

symmetrical interrupting capacity
at the operating voltage
150 VCP-W 750
35 kA
150 VCP-W 750
30.4 kA
25
30
50
150 VCP-W 1000

46.3 kA
150 VCP-W 1000
40.2 kA
1.3-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
040
Application on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis
Example 1Fault Calculations
Given a circuit breaker interrupting and momentary rating in the table below,
verify the adequacy of the ratings for a system without motor loads, as shown.
Table 1.3-5. Short-Circuit Duty
Note: Interrupting capabilities I
1
and I
2
at operating voltage must not exceed maximum
symmetrical interrupting capability Kl.
Check capabilities I
1
, I
2
and I
3
on the following utility system where there is no
motor contribution to short circuit.
Figure 1.3-6. Example 1One-Line Diagram
From transformer losses per unit or percent
R is calculated
31,000 Watts Full Load
6,800 Watts No Load
24,200 Watts Load Losses
On 13.8 kV System, 3.75 MVA Base
Transformer Standard 5.5% Impedance
has a 7.5% Manufacturing Tolerance
5.50 Standard Impedance
0.41 (7.5% Tolerance)
Transformer Z =
5.09%
X = 5.05%
X R X/R
13.8 kV System 0.99% 0.066% 15
Transformer 5.05% 0.65% 8
System Total 6.04% 0.716% 9
or 0.0604 pu 0.00716 pu
Type
Breaker
V Max. Three-Phase Symmetrical Interrupting Capability Close and Latch or
Momentary
at V Max. Max. KI at 4.16 kV Oper. Voltage
50VCPW250 4.76 kV 29 kA 36 kA
(29) = 33.2 kA I
1
58 kA I
3
LG symmetrical interrupting capability
36 kA 1.15 (33.2) = 38.2 kA I
2
4.76
4.16
-----------
13.8 kV
375 MVA VV
Available AA
13.8 kV
3750 kVA VV
4.16 kV
50VPC-W250
= 15
X
R
Z
3.75 MVA
375 MVA
---------------------------------
0.01 pu or 1% = =
Z
2
X
2
R
2
R
2 X
2
R
2
-------- 1 +

= + =
R
Z
X
2
R
2
-------- 1 +
-----------------------
1
266
----------------
1
15.03
------------------ 0.066% = = = =
X
X
R
----- R ( )
15 (0.066) .99% = = =
R
24.2 kW
3750 kVA
-------------------------------- 0.0065 pu or 0.65% = =
Transformer X Z
2
R
2
(5.09)
2
(0.65)
2
25.91 0.42 25.48 = = =
For Three-Phase Fault
where X is ohms per phase and E is
the highest typical line-to-neutral
operating voltage or
where X is per unit reactance
I
B
is base current
would use 1.0 multiplying factor for
short-circuit duty, therefore, short-
circuit duty is 8.6 kA sym. for three-
phase fault I
1
and momentary duty is
8.6 x 1.6 = 13.7 kA I
3
.
For Line-to-Ground Fault
For this system, X
0
is the zero sequence
reactance of the transformer, which
is equal to the transformer positive
sequence reactance and X
1
is the posi-
tive sequence reactance of the system.
Therefore,
Using 1.0 multiplying factor (see
Table 1.3-6), short-circuit duty = 9.1 kA
Sym. LG (I
2
)
Answer
With this application, shortcuts could
have been taken for a quicker check of
the application. If we assume unlimited
short circuit available at 13.8 kV and
that Trans. Z = X
X/R ratio 15 or less multiplying factor
is 1.0 for short-circuit duty.
The short-circuit duty is then 9.5 kA
Sym. (I
1
, I
2
) and momentary duty is
9.5 x 1.6 kA = 15.2 kA (I
3
).
The 50VCP-W250 breaker capabilities
exceed the duty requirements and
may be applied.
I
3-Phase
E
X
----- =
I
3-Phase
I
B
X
----- =
Base current I
B
3.75 MVA
3 4.16 kV ( )
0.52kA = =
I
3-Phase
I
1
X
-----
0.52
0.0604
---------------------- 8.6 kA Sym. = = =
System
X
R
9 (is less than 15) =

I
LG
3E
2X
1
X
0
+
---------------------------
3I
B
2X
1
X
0
+
--------------------------- = =
I
LG
3(0.52)
2(0.0604) 0.0505 +
9.1 kA Sym. = =
Then I
3-Phase
I
B
X
-----
0.52
0.055
------------------ 9.5 kA Sym. = = =
1.3-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
041
Given the system shown with motor
loads, calculate the fault currents
and determine proper circuit breaker
selection.
All calculations on per unit basis.
7.5 MVA base
3000 hp Synchronous Motor
X = 0.20
(0.628)
= 0.638 pu at 7.5 MVA Base
0.197
2500 hp Ind. Motor
X = 0.25
(0.628)
= 0.908 pu at 7.5 MVA Base
0.173
Table 1.3-6. Multiplying Factor for E/X
Amperes (ANSI C37.010, 1979, Figures 1.1-8,
1.1-9 and 1.1-10)
Where system X/R ratio is 15 or less, the

multiplying factor is 1.0.
X R X/R
13.8 kV System
Transformer
0.015
0.055
0.001
0.0055
15
10
Total Source Transformer 0.070 pu 0.0065 pu 11
System
X/R
Type VCP-W Vacuum
Circuit Breaker
Rated Interrupting Time, 5-Cycle
Type of Fault
Ratio Three-
Phase
LG Three-Phase
and LG
Source of Short Circuit
Local Remote
1
15
20
25
30
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.04
1.00
1.00
1.02
1.06
1.10
1.00
1.00
1.05
1.10
1.13
36
40
45
50
55
1.06
1.08
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.14
1.16
1.19
1.22
1.25
1.17
1.22
1.25
1.27
1.30
60
65
70
75
80
1.16
1.17
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.26
1.28
1.29
1.30
1.31
1.32
1.33
1.35
1.36
1.37
85
90
95
100
1.22
1.23
1.32
1.33
1.38
1.39
1.40
1.41
100
120
130
1.24
1.24
1.24
1.34
1.35
1.35
1.42
1.43
1.43
Base Current I
B
7.5 MVA
3 6.9 kV
-------------------------------
0.628 kA = =
X =
0.628 (6.9)
= 0.015
21 (13.8)
I
3-Ph
E
X
-----
I
B
X
----- where X on per unit base = =
System = 0.062 (235) = 14.5 is a Multiplying Factor of 1.0 from Table 1.3-6
Table 1.3-7. Short-Circuit Duty = 10.1 kA
Answer
Source of
Short-Circuit Current
Interrupting
E/X Amperes
Momentary
E/X Amperes
X
R
X (1)
R (X)
1
R
I
3
Source Transformer
0.628
0.070
= 8.971
0.628
0.070
= 8.971
11
11
0.070
= 157
I
1
3000 hp Syn. Motor
0.628
(1.5) 0.638
= 0.656
0.628
0.638
= 0.984 25
25
0.638
= 39
I
1
2500 hp Syn. Motor
0.628
(1.5) 0.908
= 0.461
0.628
0.908
= 0.691 35
35
0.908
= 39
I
3F
= 10.088
or 10.1 kA
10.647 Total 1/R = 235
x 1.6
17.0 kA Momentary Duty
Z = 5.53% = 10
13.8 kV
7500 kVA
6.9 kV
13.8 kV System
3
21 kA Sym. Available = 15
X
R
X = 5.5%
R = 0.55%
X
R
X
R
= 25
X
R
= 35
3000 hp
1.0 PF
Syn.
2500 hp
Ind.
2
197A FL
X'' = 20%
d
173A FL
X'' = 25%
d
1
Total X
I
B
I
3F
--------
0.628
10.1
------------------
0.062 = = =
Breaker
Type
V
Max.
Three-Phase Symmetrical Interrupting Capability Close and Latch
or Momentary
at V Max. Max. KI at 6.9 kV Oper. Voltage
75VCP-W500 8.25 kV 33 kA 41 kA 8.25
6.9
(33) = 39.5 kA
66 kA
150VCP-W500 15 kV 18 kA 23 kA 15 (18)
6.9
(39.1) = 23 kA
(But not to exceed KI)
37 kA
X
R
-----
Either breaker could be properly
applied, but price will make the type
150VCP-W500 the more economical
selection.
1.3-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
042
Check breaker application or generator bus for the system of generators shown.
Each generator is 7.5 MVA, 4.16 kV 1040A full load, I
B
= 1.04 kA
Sub transient reactance Xd = 11% or, X = 0.11 pu
Since generator neutral grounding reactors are used to limit the I
LG
to I
3-phase
or
below, we need only check the I
3
short-circuit duty.
System of 30 is a Multiplying Factor of 1.04 from Table 1.3-6.
Short-circuit duty is 28.4 (1.04) = 29.5 kA Symmetrical
Gen
X
R
----- ratio is 30
Three-Phase Symmetrical Interrupting Capability
Breaker Type V Max. at V Max. Max. KI at 4.16 kV Oper. Voltage
50VCP-W250 4.76 kV 29 kA 36 kA 4.76
4.16
(29) = 33.2 kA
1
X
S
1
X
1
X
1
X
3
X
and
1
R
S
1
R
1
R
1
R
3
R
= + + = = + + =
or X
S
X
3
-----
and R
S
R
3
----
Therefore, System
X
S
R
S
--------
X
R
----- Gen
X
R
-----
30 = = = = =
I
B
Phase
I
B
X
-----
I
B
X
-----
I
B
X
-----
31
B
X
-----------
3(1.04)
0.11
----------------------- 28.4 kA Symmetrical E/X amperes = = + + + =
X
R
-----
Answer
The 50VCP-W250 breaker could be
applied.
G1 G2 G3
4.16 kV
1.3-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
043
Medium Voltage Fuses
Fault Calculations
There are two basic types of medium
voltage fuses. The following denitions
are taken from ANSI Standard C37.40.
Expulsion Fuse (Unit)
A vented fuse (unit) in which the
expulsion effect of the gases produced
by internal arcing, either alone or aided
by other mechanisms, results in current
interruption.
Current-Limiting Fuse (Unit)
A fuse unit that, when its current-
responsive element is melted by a
current within the fuses specied
current-limiting range, abruptly
introduces a high resistance to
reduce current magnitude and
duration, resulting in subsequent
current interruption.
There are two classes of fuses;
power and distribution. They are
distinguished from each other by
the current ratings and minimum
melting type characteristics.
The current-limiting ability of a
current-limiting fuse is specied by
its threshold ratio, peak let-through
current and I
2
t characteristics.
Interrupting Ratings of Fuses
Modern fuses are rated in amperes
rms symmetrical. They also have a
listed asymmetrical rms rating that
is 1.6 x the symmetrical rating.
Refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.48 for fuse
interrupting duty guidelines.
Calculation of the Fuse Required
Interrupting Rating:
Step 1Convert the fault from
the utility to percent or per unit on
a convenient voltage and kVA base.
Step 2Collect the X and R data of all
the other circuit elements and convert
to a percent or per unit on a conve-
nient kVA and voltage base same as
that used in Step 1. Use the substran-
sient X and R for all generators and
motors.
Step 3Construct the sequence
networks using reactances and connect
properly for the type of fault under
consideration and reduce to a single
equivalent reactance.
Step 4Construct the sequence
networks using resistances and
connect properly for the type of
fault under consideration and reduce
to a single equivalent resistance.
Step 5Calculate the E/X
I
value,
where E is the prefault value of the
voltage at the point of fault normally
assumed 1.0 in pu. For three-phase
faults E/X
I
is the fault current to be
used in determining the required inter-
rupting capability of the fuse.
Note: It is not necessary to calculate a
single phase-to-phase fault current. This
current is very nearly /2 x three-phase
fault. The line-to-ground fault may exceed
the three-phase fault for fuses located in
generating stations with solidly grounded
neutral generators, or in delta-wye trans-
formers with the wye solidly grounded,
where the sum of the positive and negative
sequence impedances on the high voltage
side (delta) is smaller than the impedance of
the transformer.
For single line-to-ground fault:
Step 6Select a fuse whose
published interrupting rating
exceeds the calculated fault current.
Figure 1.3-2 should be used where
older fuses asymmetrically rated are
involved.
The voltage rating of power fuses used
on three-phase systems should equal
or exceed the maximum line-to-line
voltage rating of the system. Current
limiting fuses for three-phase systems
should be so applied that the fuse
voltage rating is equal to or less than
1.41 x nominal system voltage.
Low Voltage Power Circuit
BreakersFault Calculations
The steps for calculating the fault cur-
rent for the selection of a low voltage
power circuit breaker are the same as
those used for medium voltage circuit
breakers except that where the con-
nected loads to the low voltage bus
includes induction and synchronous
motor loads. The assumption is made
that in 208Y/120V systems the contri-
bution from motors is two times the full
load current of step-down transformer.
This corresponds to an assumed 50%
motor aggregate impedance on a kVA
base equal to the transformer kVA
rating or 50% motor load. For 480V,
480Y/277V and 600V systems, the
assumption is made that the contribution
from the motors is four times the full
load current of the step-down trans-
former, which corresponds to an assumed
25% aggregate motor impedance on a
kVA base equal to the transformer kVA
rating or 100% motor load.
In low voltage systems that contain
generators, the subtransient reactance
should be used.
If the X/R to the point of fault is greater
than 6.6, a derating multiplying factor
(MF) must be applied. The X/R ratio is
calculated in the same manner as that
for medium voltage circuit breakers.
Calculated symmetrical amperes x
MF breaker interrupting rating.
The multiplying factor MF can be
calculated by the formula:
If the X/R of system feeding the
breaker is not known, use X/R = 15.
For fused breakers by the formula:
If the X/R of the system feeding the
breaker is not known, use X/R = 20.
Refer to Table 1.3-8 for the standard
ranges of X/R and power factors used in
testing and rating low voltage breakers.
Refer to Table 1.3-9 for the circuit
breaker interrupting rating multiplying
factors to be used when the calculated
X/R ratio or power factor at the point
the breaker is to be applied in the
power distribution system falls outside
of the Table 1.3-8 X/R or power factors
used in testing and rating the circuit
breakers. MF is always greater than 1.0.
3
X
I
X
I
(+) X
I
() X
I
(0) + + =
I
f
E
X
I
------ 3 =
MF
2 1 2.718
( ) X/R ( )
+ [ ]
2.29
=
MF
1 2 2.718 ( )
2 ( ) X/R ( )
+
1.25
=
1.3-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
044
Molded-Case Breakers and
Insulated Case Circuit
BreakersFault Calculations
The method of fault calculation is the
same as that for low voltage power
circuit breakers. Again, the calculated
fault current x MF breaker interrupting
capacity. Because molded case breakers
are tested at lower X/R ratios, the MFs
are different than those for low voltage
power circuit breakers.
X
1
R
1
= test X/R value
X
2
R
2
=
X/R at point where breaker
is applied
MF
1 2.718

X
2
R
2

+
1 2.718
X
1
R
1

+
---------------------------------------------------- =
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker
Interrupting Derating Factors
Refer to Table 1.3-8 for the standard
ranges of X/R and power factors used
in testing and rating low voltage
breakers. Refer to Table 1.3-9 for
the circuit breaker interrupting rating
de-rating factors to be used when the
calculated X/R ratio or power factor
at the point the breaker is to be applied
in the power distribution system falls
outside of the Table 1.3-8 X/R or power
factors used in testing and rating the
circuit breakers.
Normally the short-circuit power factor
or X/R ratio of a distribution system
need not be considered in applying
low voltage circuit breakers. This is
because the ratings established in
the applicable standard are based
on power factor values that amply
cover most applications.
Established standard values include
the following:
Table 1.3-8. Standard Test Power Factors
For distribution systems where the
calculated short-circuit current X/R
ratio differs from the standard values
given in the above table, circuit breaker
interrupting rating derating factors from
Table 1.3-9 table should be applied.
Table 1.3-9. Circuit Breaker Interrupting Rating Derating Factors
Note: These are derating factors applied to the breaker and are the inverse of MF.
Interrupting
Rating in kA
Power Factor
Test Range
X/R Test
Range
Molded Case Circuit Breaker
10 or Less
Over 10 to 20
Over 20
0.450.50
0.250.030
0.150.20
1.981.73
3.873.18
6.64.9
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
All 0.15 Maximum 6.6 Minimum
% P.F. X/R Interrupting Rating
Molded Case or Insulated Case Power Circuit Breaker
/ = 10 kA
>10 kA
/ = 20 kA >20 kA Unfused Fused
50
30
25
1.73
3.18
3.87
1.000
0.847
0.805
1.000
1.000
0.950
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
20
15
12
4.90
6.59
8.27
0.762
0.718
0.691
0.899
0.847
0.815
1.000
0.942
0.907
1.000
1.000
0.962
1.000
0.939
0.898
10
8.5
7
9.95
11.72
14.25
0.673
0.659
0.645
0.794
0.778
0.761
0.883
0.865
0.847
0.937
0.918
0.899
0.870
0.849
0.827
5 19.97 0.627 0.740 0.823 0.874 0.797
< <
1.3-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
045
Short-Circuit CalculationsShortcut Method
Determination of Short-Circuit Current
Note 1: Transformer impedance generally relates to self-ventilated rating (e.g., with OA/FA/FOA transformer use OA base).
Note 2: kV refers to line-to-line voltage in kilovolts.
Note 3: Z refers to line-to-neutral impedance of system to fault where R + jX = Z.
Note 4: When totaling the components of system Z, arithmetic combining of impedances as ohms Z. per unit Z. etc., is considered a
shortcut or approximate method; proper combining of impedances (e.g., source, cables transformers, conductors, etc.). should use
individual R and X components. This Total Z = Total R + j Total X (see IEEE Red Book Standard No. 141).
(a) Per unit = pu impedance kVA base
(b) Percent = % impedance kVA base
(a) Per unit impedance = pu
(b) % impedance = %
(c) Ohms impedance =
(a) if utility fault capacity given in kVA
Per-unit impedance = pu
(b) if utility fault capacity given in rms symmetrical short circuit amperes
Per-unit impedance = pu
(a) motor kVA (kV) (I) where I = motor nameplate full-load amperes
(b) if 1.0 power factor synchronous motor kVA = (0.8) (hp)
(c) if 0.8 power factor synchronous motor kVA = (1.0) (hp)
(d) if induction motor kVA = (1.0) (hp)
(a) Base current = I Base = or
(b) Per unit
(c) rms Symmetrical current = I
SC
= (pu I
SC
) (I
Base
Amperes)
(d) rms Symmetrical current = Amperes = or
(e) = or
(g) =
(a) Symmetrical short-circuit kVA =
(b) =
(a) from three-phase transformerapprox. 86% of three-phase current
(b) three single-phase transformers (e.g., 75 kVA, Z = 2%) calculate same as one three-phase
unit (i.e., 3 x 75 kVA = 225 kVA, Z = 2%).
(c) from single-phase transformersee Page 1.3-15.
(a) synchronous motor5 times motor full load current (impedance 20%)
(b) induction motor4 times motor full-load current (impedance 25%)
(c) motor loads not individually identied, use contribution from group of motors as follows:
on 208Y/120V systems2.0 times transformer full-load current
on 240-480-600V three-phase, three-wire systems4.0 times transformer full-load current
on 480Y/277V three-phase, four-wire systems
In commercial buildings, 2.0 times transformers full-load current (50% motor load)
In industrial plants, 4.0 times transformer full-load current (100% motor load)
2
kVA base 2
kVA base 1
(pu impedance on kVA base 1) =
2
kVA base 2
kVA base 1
(% impedance on kVA base 1) =
Z
percent impedance
100
(ohms impedance)
kV ( )
2
(kVA base)
1000 ( )
= =
Z
(ohms impedance)
kV ( )
2
(kVA base)
10 ( )
=
(% impedance)
kV ( )
2
(10)
kVA base
Z
kVA base in study
power-source kVA fault capacity
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
=
Z
kVA base in study
(short-circuit current) 3 ( )(kV of source)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
=
3 ( )
Three-phase kVA
3 ( ) kV ( )
Single-phase kVA
kV line-to-neutral
I
SC
1.0
puZ
=
Three-phase KVA base
puZ ( ) 3 ( ) kV ( )
----------------------------------------------------------------
Single-phase kVA base
puZ ( ) kV ( )
-----------------------------------------------------------------
(Three-phase kVA base) (100)
(%Z) 3 ( ) kV ( )
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Single-phase kVA base (100)
(%Z) kV ( )
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(kV) (1000)
3 (ohms Z)
-----------------------------------
kVA base
puZ ( )
--------------------------
(kVA base) (100)
%Z
----------------------------------------------
kV ( )
2
1000 ( )
ohms Z
----------------------------------
= =
3(line-to-neutral kV)
2
1000 ( )
(ohms Z)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Select convenient kVA base for system to
be studied.
2. Change per unit, or percent, impedance from
one kVA base to another:
3. Change ohms, or percent or per unit, etc.:
4. Change power-source impedance to per unit
or percent impedance on kVA base as selected
for this study:
5. Change motor rating to kVA:
6. Determine symmetrical short-circuit current:
7. Determine symmetrical short-circuit kVA:
8. Determine line-to-line short-circuit current:
9. Determine motor contribution (or feedback) as
source of fault current:

See IEEE
Standard No. 141
1.3-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
046
Example Number 1
How to Calculate Short-Circuit Currents at Ends of Conductors
Figure 1.3-9. Example Number 1
Utility Source 500 MVA
1000 kVA
5.75%
480V
Switchboard Fault
100 ft (30m)
3350 kcmil Cable
in Steel Conduit
Mixed LoadMotors and Lighting
Each Feeder100 ft (30m) of 3350 kcmil
Cable in Steel Conduit Feeding Lighting and
250 kVA of Motors
Cable Fault
Utility
Transformer
Major Contribution
Cables
Switchboard Fault
Cables
Cable Fault
A B C
0.002 pu
Switchboard Fault
0.027 pu
Cable Fault
A B C 0.0575 pu
1.00 pu
0.027 pu
1.00 pu
0.027 pu
1.00 pu
0.027 pu
0.342 pu
0.027 pu
0.0507 pu
0.027 pu
E 0.0777 pu
Combining Series Impedances: Z
TOTAL
= Z
1
+ Z
2
+ ... +Z
n
Combining Parallel Impedances:
Z
TOTAL
1
=
Z
1
1
+
Z
2
1
+ ...
Z
n
1
0.0595 pu
Equation
Step (See) Calculation
1 Select 1000 kVA as most convenient base, since all data except utility source is on
secondary of 1000 kVA transformer.
2 4(a) Utility per unit impedance
3 3(a) Transformer per unit impedance =
4 4(a) and Motor contribution per unit impedance =
9(c)
5 3(a) Cable impedance in ohms (see above) = 0.00619 ohms
Cable impedance per unit =
6 6(d) Total impedance to switchboard fault = 0.0507 pu (see diagram above)
Symmetrical short circuit current at switchboard fault =
7 6(d) Total impedance to cable fault = 0.0777 pu (see diagram above)
Symmetrical short circuit current at cable fault =
Z
pu
kVA base
utility fault kVA
-------------------------------------------
1000
500.000
---------------------
0.002 pu = = = =
Z
pu
%Z
100
----------
5.75
100
-----------
0.0575 pu = = =
Z
pu
kVA base
4 x motor kVA
----------------------------------------
1000
4 x 250
--------------------
1.00 pu = = =
Z
pu
(ohms)(kVA base)
(kV)
2
(1000)
--------------------------------------------------
(0.00619)(1000)
(0.480)
2
(1000)
-------------------------------------------
0.027pu = = =
3-phase kVA base
Z
pu
( ) 3 ( ) kV ( )
1000
0.0507 ( ) 3 ( ) 0.480 ( )
23,720 amperes rms = =

3-phase kVA base
Z
pu
( ) 3 ( ) kV ( )
1000
0.0777 ( ) 3 ( ) 0.480 ( )
15 480 amperes rms , = =

A. System Diagram B. Impedance Diagram (Using Short Cut Method for Combining Impedances
and Sources).
C. Conductor impedance from Table 1.5-16,
Page 1.5-14. Conductors: 3350 kcmil copper,
single conductors Circuit length: 100 ft (30m),
in steel (magnetic) conduit Impedance
Z = 0.00619 ohms/100 ft (30m).
Z
TOT
= 0.00619 ohms (100 circuit feet)
D. Fault current calculations (combining imped-
ances arithmetically, using approximate
Short Cut methodsee Note 4,
Page 1.3-13)
1.3-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
047
Example Number 2
Fault CalculationSecondary Side of Single-Phase Transformer
Figure 1.3-10. Example Number 2
Method 1: Shortcut Methods
End of Cable
This method uses the approximation
of adding Zs instead of the accurate
method of Rs and Xs.
For Example: For a 480/277V system
with 30,000A symmetrical available
at the line side of a conductor run of
100 ft (30m) of 2500 kcmil per phase
and neutral, the approximate fault current
at the load side end of the conductors
can be calculated as follows.
277V/30,000A = 0.00923 ohms (source
impedance)
Conductor ohms for 500 kcmil conductor
from reference data in this section in
magnetic conduit is 0.00551 ohms per
100 ft (30m). For 100 ft (30m) and two
conductors per phase we have:
0.00551/2 = 0.00273 ohms (conductor
impedance)
Add source and conductor impedance or
0.00923 + 0.00273 = 0.01196 total ohms
Next, 277V/0.01196 ohms = 23,160A
rms at load side of conductors
Figure 1.3-11. Short-Circuit Diagram
R
Syst
= 0.00054
R
Cond
= 0.00677
R
Tfmr
= 0.0164
R
Total
= 0.02371
F
1
R
Syst
= 0.00356
R
Cond
= 0.00332
R
Tfmr
= 0.0227
R
Total
= 0.02958
F
1
R
Syst
= 0.00054
R
Cond
= 0.00677
R
Tfmr
= 0.0246
R
Total
= 0.03191
F
2
X
Syst
= 0.00356
X
Cond
= 0.00332
X
Tfmr
= 0.0272
X
Total
= 0.03408
F
2
240V
F1
120V
F2
Half-winding of Transformer
Full-winding of Transformer
{
Multiply % R by 1.5
Multiply % X by 1.2 }
75 kVA Single-Phase 480-120/240V; Z = 2.8%, R = 1.64%, X = 2.27%
100 Ft. Two #2/0 Copper Conductors, Magnetic Conduit
{
R = 0.0104 Ohms
X = 0.0051 Ohms
480V Three-Phase Switchboard Bus at 50,000A Symmetrical, X/R = 6.6
{
R = 0.1498 Z
X = 0.9887 Z
Z
Cond
= (From Page 1.3-13
Formula 3(a) )
ohms kVA Base
kV ( )
2
1000
A. System Diagram
Deriving Transformer R and X:
X = 6.6 R
Z =
R = R = 0.1498Z
X = 6.6R X = 0.9887Z
X
R
6.6 =
X
2
R
2
+ 6.6R ( )
2
R
2
+ 43.56R
2
R
2
+ 44.56R
2
6.6753R = = = =
Z
6.6753
B. Impedance DiagramFault F1
D. Impedance and Fault Current Calculations75 kVA Base
Note: To account for the outgoing and return paths of single-phase circuits (conductors,
systems, etc.) use twice the three-phase values of R and X.
R
Syst
= 2 (0.1498 x Z) = 0.00054 pu
X
Syst
= 2 (0.9887 x Z) = 0.00356 pu
R
Cond
= 2 = 0.00677 pu
X
Cond
= 2 = 0.00332 pu
R
Tfmr
= = 0.0164 pu
X
Tfmr
= = 0.0277 pu
R
Tfmr
= 1.5 = 0.0246 pu
X
Tfmr
= 1.2 = 0.0272 pu
Z = = 0.03791 pu
Z = = 0.04669 pu
0.0104 75
0.48
2
1000

0.0051 75
0.48 ( )
2
1000

1.64
100
2.27
100
1.64
100
( )
2.27
100
( )
0.02371 ( )
2
0.02958 ( )
2
+
0.03191 ( )
2
0.03408 ( )
2
+
Z
Syst
= (From Page 1.3-13
Formula 4(b) )
75
3 0.480 50,000
0.0018
pu
=
Full-winding of Transformer (75 kVA Base)
Half-winding of Transformer (75 kVA Base)
Impedance to Fault F1Full Winding
Impedance to Fault F2Half Winding
Short circuit current F1 = 75 (0.03791 x 0.240 kV) = 8,243A Symmetrical
Short circuit current F2 = 75 (0.04669 x 0.120 kV) = 13,386A Symmetrical
C. Impedance DiagramFault F2
Reference: IEEE Standard No. 141
X 30,000A available
100 ft (30m)
2500 kcmil per phase
X I
f
= 23,160A
1.3-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
048
Method 2: Chart Approximate Method
The chart method is based on the following:
Motor Contribution
For system voltages of 120/208V, it is reasonable to assume
that the connected load consists of 50% motor load, and that
the motors will contribute four times their full load current
into a fault. For system voltages of 240 and 480V, it is rea-
sonable to assume that the connected load consists of 100%
motor load, and that the motors will contribute four times
their full load current into a fault. These motor contributions
have been factored into each curve as if all motors were
connected to the transformer terminals.
Feeder Conductors
The conductor sizes most commonly used for feeders
from molded case circuit breakers are shown. For conductor
sizes not shown, the following table has been included for
conversion to equivalent arrangements. In some cases it
may be necessary to interpolate for unusual feeder ratings.
Table 1.3-10 is based on using copper conductor.
Table 1.3-10. Conductor Conversion (Based on Using Copper Conductor)
Short-Circuit Current Readout
The readout obtained from the charts is the rms symmetrical
amperes available at the given distance from the trans-
former. The circuit breaker should have an interrupting
capacity at least as large as this value.
How to Use the Short-Circuit Charts
Step One
Obtain the following data:
1. System voltage
2. Transformer kVA rating (from transformer nameplate)
3. Transformer impedance (from transformer nameplate)
4. Primary source fault energy available in kVA
(from electric utility or distribution system engineers)
Step Two
Select the applicable chart from the following pages. The
charts are grouped by secondary system voltage, which is
listed with each transformer. Within each group, the chart
for the lowest kVA transformer is shown rst, followed in
ascending order to the highest rated transformer.
Step Three
Select the family of curves that is closest to the available
source kVA. The black line family of curves is for a source of
500,000 kVA. The lower value line (in red) family of curves is
for a source of 50,000 kVA. You may interpolate between
curves if necessary, but for values above 100,000 kVA it is
appropriate to use the 500,000 kVA curves.
Step Four
Select the specic curve for the conductor size being used. If
your conductor size is something other than the sizes shown
on the chart, refer to the conductor conversion Table 1.3-10.
Step Five
Enter the chart along the bottom horizontal scale with the
distance (in feet) from the transformer to the fault point.
Draw a vertical line up the chart to the point where it inter-
sects the selected curve. Then draw a horizontal line to the
left from this point to the scale along the left side of the chart.
Step Six
The value obtained from the left-hand vertical scale is the fault
current (in thousands of amperes) available at the fault point.
For a more exact determination, see the formula method.
It should be noted that even the most exact methods for
calculating fault energy use some approximations and some
assumptions. Therefore, it is appropriate to select a method
which is sufciently accurate for the purpose, but not more
burdensome than is justied. The charts that follow make
use of simplications that are reasonable under most cir-
cumstances and will almost certainly yield answers that are
on the safe side. This may, in some cases, lead to application
of circuit breakers having interrupting ratings higher than
necessary, but should eliminate the possibility of applying
units which will not be safe for the possible fault duty.
Figure 1.3-12. 225 kVA Transformer/4.5% Impedance/208V
If Your Conductor is: Use Equivalent Arrangement
3No. 4/0 cables
4No. 2/0 cables
2500 kcmil
2500 kcmil
32000 kcmil cables
5400 kcmil cables
6300 kcmil cables
4750 kcmil
4750 kcmil
4750 kcmil
800A busway
1000A busway
1600A busway
2500 kcmil
2500 kcmil
4750 kcmil
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
0
2.5
5.0
7.5
10.0
12.5
Distance in Feet from T
250 kcmil
WG W
WG W
UTILITY KVA VV
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
F
a
u
l
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

i
n

T
h
o
u
s
a
n
d
s

o
f

A
m
p
e
r
e
s

(
S
y
m
.
)
B
F
kcmil
#4 AA
KV
F 50,000
1.3-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
049
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
F
a
u
l
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

i
n

T
h
o
u
s
a
n
d
s

o
f

A
m
p
e
r
e
s

(
S
y
m
.
)
B
F
4
2
KV
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
F
a
u
l
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

i
n

T
h
o
u
s
a
n
d
s

o
f

A
m
p
e
r
e
s

(
S
y
m
.
)
B
F
4 kcmil
WG W
AA
F 50,000
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
F
a
u
l
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

i
n

T
h
o
u
s
a
n
d
s

o
f

A
m
p
e
r
e
s

(
S
y
m
.
)
B
F
WG W
kcmil
kcmil
AA
F 50,000
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
B
F
#4 AWG AA
WG W
AA
F 50,000
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
B
F
WG W
AA
F 50,000
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
F
a
u
l
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

i
n

T
h
o
u
s
a
n
d
s

o
f

A
m
p
e
r
e
s

(
S
y
m
.
)
B
4
2
AA
F 50,000
1.3-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
050
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
F
a
u
l
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

i
n

T
h
o
u
s
a
n
d
s

o
f

A
m
p
e
r
e
s

(
S
y
m
.
)
B
AA
F 50,000
#1/0 AWG AA
#4 AWG AA
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
F
a
u
l
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

i
n

T
h
o
u
s
a
n
d
s

o
f

A
m
p
e
r
e
s

(
S
y
m
.
)
B
F
AA
F 50,000
4 kcmil
#4 AA
750
500
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
F
a
u
l
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

i
n

T
h
o
u
s
a
n
d
s

o
f

A
m
p
e
r
e
s

(
S
y
m
.
)
B
F
AA
F 50,000
4 750 kcmil
2
WG W
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
F
a
u
l
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

i
n

T
h
o
u
s
a
n
d
s

o
f

A
m
p
e
r
e
s

(
S
y
m
.
)
B
F
AA
F 50,000
4 750 kcmil
kcmil
#4 AWG AA
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
F
a
u
l
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

i
n

T
h
o
u
s
a
n
d
s

o
f

A
m
p
e
r
e
s

(
S
y
m
.
)
B
F
AA
F 50,000
4 kcmil
WG W
1.3-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
051
Determining X and R Values
from Transformer Loss Data
Method 1:
Given a 500 kVA, 5.5% Z transformer
with 9000W total loss; 1700W no-load
loss; 7300W load loss and primary
voltage of 480V.
%R = 0.0067 ohms
Method 2:
Using same values above.
How to Estimate Short-Circuit
Currents at Transformer
Secondaries:
Method 1:
To obtain three-phase rms symmetrical
short-circuit current available at
transformer secondary terminals,
use the formula:
where %Z is the transformer impedance
in percent, from Tables 1.5-6 through
1.5-10, Page 1.5-11.
This is the maximum three-phase sym-
metrical bolted-fault current, assuming
sustained primary voltage during fault,
i.e., an innite or unlimited primary
power source (zero source impedance).
Because the power source must
always have some impedance, this
is a conservative value; actual fault
current will be somewhat less.
Note: This will not include motor short-
circuit contribution.
Method 2:
Refer to Page 1.5-9 in the Reference
section, and use appropriate row of
data based on transformer kVA and
primary short-circuit current available.
This will yield more accurate results
and allow for including motor short-
circuit contribution.
3
500
3 0.480

2
R 7300W =
%R
0.0067 500
10 0.48
2
1.46% = =
%X 5.5
2
1.46
2
5.30% = =
%R
I R Losses
2
10 kVA
=
7300
10 500
1.46 =
%X 5.5
2
1.46
2
5.30% = =
I
SC
I
FLC
100
%Z
------------ =
1.3-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
052
Voltage Drop Considerations
The rst consideration for voltage
drop is that under the steady-state
conditions of normal load, the voltage
at the utilization equipment must be
adequate. Fine-print notes in the NEC
recommend sizing feeders and branch
circuits so that the maximum voltage
drop in either does not exceed 3%,
with the total voltage drop for feeders
and branch circuits not to exceed 5%,
for efciency of operation. (Fine print
notes in the NEC are not mandatory.)
In addition to steady-state conditions,
voltage drop under transient condi-
tions, with sudden high-current, short-
time loads, must be considered. The
most common loads of this type are
motor inrush currents during starting.
These loads cause a voltage dip on
the system as a result of the voltage
drop in conductors, transformers and
generators under the high current.
This voltage dip can have numerous
adverse effects on equipment in the
system, and equipment and conduc-
tors must be designed and sized to
minimize these problems. In many
cases, reduced-voltage starting of
motors to reduce inrush current
will be necessary.
Recommended Limits of
Voltage Variation
General Illumination: Flicker in
incandescent lighting from voltage
dip can be severe; lumen output drops
about three times as much as the
voltage dips. That is, a 10% drop in
voltage will result in a 30% drop in
light output. While the lumen output
drop in uorescent lamps is roughly
proportional to voltage drop, if the
voltage dips about 25%, the lamp will
go out momentarily and then restrike.
For high-intensity discharge (HID)
lamps such as mercury vapor, high-
pressure sodium or metal halide, if the
lamp goes out because of an excessive
voltage dip, it will not restrike until it
has cooled. This will require several
minutes. These lighting icker effects
can be annoying, and in the case of
HID lamps, sometimes serious. In
areas where close work is being done,
such as drafting rooms, precision
assembly plants, and the like, even
a slight variation, if repeated, can be
very annoying, and reduce efciency.
Voltage variation in such areas should
be held to 2 or 3% under motor-starting
or other transient conditions.
Computer Equipment: With the
proliferation of data-processing and
computer- or microprocessor-controlled
manufacturing, the sensitivity of
computers to voltage has become an
important consideration. Severe dips of
short duration can cause a computer
to crashshut down completely,
and other voltage transients caused
by starting and stopping motors can
cause data-processing errors. While
voltage drops must be held to a mini-
mum, in many cases computers will
require special power-conditioning
equipment to operate properly.
Industrial Plants: Where large motors
exist, and unit substation transformers
are relatively limited in size, voltage
dips of as much as 20% may be per-
missible in some cases, if they do not
occur too frequently. Lighting is often
supplied from separate transformers,
and is minimally affected by voltage
dips in the power systems. However, it
is usually best to limit dips to between
5 and 10% at most. One critical consid-
eration is that a large voltage dip can
cause a dropout (opening) of magnetic
motor contactors and control relays.
The actual dropout voltage varies con-
siderably among starters of different
manufacturers. The only standard that
exists is that of NEMA, which states
that a starter must not drop out at 85%
of its nominal coil voltage, allowing
only a 15% dip. While most starters
will tolerate considerably more volt-
age dip before dropping out, limiting
dip to 15% is the only way to ensure
continuity of operation in all cases.
X-Ray Equipment: Medical x-ray and
similar diagnostic equipment, such as
CAT-scanners, are extremely sensitive
to low voltage. They present a small,
steady load to the system until the
instant the x-ray tube is red. This
presents a brief but extremely high
instantaneous momentary load. In
some modern x-ray equipment, the
ring is repeated rapidly to create
multiple images. The voltage regula-
tion must be maintained within the
manufacturers limits, usually 2 to 3%,
under these momentary loads, to
ensure proper x-ray exposure.
Motor Starting
Motor inrush on starting must be limited
to minimize voltage dips. Table 1.3-11
on the next page will help select the
proper type of motor starter for various
motors, and to select generators of
adequate size to limit voltage dip.
See Tab 29 for additional data on
reduced voltage motor starting.
Utility Systems
Where the power is supplied by a
utility network, the motor inrush can
be assumed to be small compared
to the system capacity, and voltage
at the source can be assumed to
be constant during motor starting.
Voltage dip resulting from motor
starting can be calculated on the basis
of the voltage drop in the conductors
between the power source and
the motor resulting from the inrush
current. Where the utility system is
limited, the utility will often specify the
maximum permissible inrush current
or the maximum hp motor they will
permit to be started across-the-line.
Transformer Considerations
If the power source is a transformer,
and the inrush kVA or current of the
motor being started is small compared
to the full-rated kVA or current of the
transformer, the transformer voltage
dip will be small and may be ignored.
As the motor inrush becomes a signi-
cant percentage of the transformer
full-load rating, an estimate of the
transformer voltage drop must be
added to the conductor voltage drop
to obtain the total voltage drop to the
motor. Accurate voltage drop calcula-
tion would be complex and depend
upon transformer and conductor
resistance, reactance and impedance,
as well as motor inrush current and
power factor. However, an approxima-
tion can be made on the basis of the
low power-factor motor inrush current
(3040%) and impedance of the trans-
former.
The allowable motor inrush current is
determined by the total permissible
voltage drop in transformer and
conductors.
For example, if a 480V transformer
has an impedance of 5%, and the
motor inrush current is 25% of the
transformer full-load current (FLC),
then the worst case voltage drop will
be 0.25 x 5%, or 1.25%.
1.3-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
053
Table 1.3-11. Factors Governing Voltage Drop
Consult NEMA MG-1 sections 1 and 12 for the exact denition of the design letter.
In each case, a solid-state reduced voltage starter can be adjusted and controlled to provide the required inrush current and torque characteristics.
Where accuracy is important, request the code letter of the the motor and starting and breakdown torques from the motor vendor.
Using 80% taps.

Engine Generator Systems
With an engine generator as the
source of power, the type of starter
that will limit the inrush depends on
the characteristics of the generator.
Although automatic voltage regulators
are usually used with all AC engine-
generators, the initial dip in voltage is
caused by the inherent regulation of
the generator and occurs too rapidly
for the voltage regulator to respond.
It will occur whether or not a regulator
is installed. Consequently, the percent
of initial voltage drop depends on the
ratio of the starting kVA taken by the
motor to the generator capacity, the
inherent regulation of the generator,
the power-factor of the load thrown
on the generator, and the percentage
load carried by the generator.
A standard 80% power-factor engine-
type generator (which would be
used where power is to be supplied
to motor loads) has an inherent
regulation of approximately 40%
from no-load to full-load. This means
that a 50% variation in load would
cause approximately 20% variation
in voltage (50% x 40% = 20%).
Assume that a 100 kVA, 80% PF
engine-type generator is supplying
the power and that the voltage drop
should not exceed 10%. Can a 7-1/2 hp,
220V, 1750 rpm, three-phase, squirrel-
cage motor be started without
exceeding this voltage drop?
Starting ratio =
From the nameplate data on the motor,
the full-load amperes of a 7-1/2 hp.
220V, 1750 rpm, three-phase, squirrel-
cage motor is 19.0A. Therefore:
Starting current (%F.L.) =
From Table 1.3-11, a NEMA design C or
NEMA design D motor with an autotrans-
former starter gives approximately this
starting ratio. It could also be obtained
from a properly set solid-state adjust-
able reduced voltage starter.
The choice will depend upon the
torque requirements of the load since
the use of an autotransformer starter
reduces the starting torque in direct
proportion to the reduction in starting
current. In other words, a NEMA
design C motor with an autotrans-
former would have a starting torque
of approximately full-load (see Table
1.3-11) whereas the NEMA design D
motor under the same conditions
would have a starting torque of
approximately 1-1/2 times full-load.
Note: If a resistance starter were used for
the same motor terminal voltage, the start-
ing torque would be the same as that
obtained with autotransformer type, but the
starting current would be higher, as shown.
Shortcut Method
Column 7 in Table 1.3-11 has been
worked out to simplify checking.
The gures were obtained by using
the formula above and assuming
1 kVA generator capacity and 1%
voltage drop.
Example:
Assuming a project having a
1000 kVA generator, where the
voltage variation must not exceed
10%. Can a 75 hp, 1750 rpm, 220V,
three-phase, squirrel-cage motor be
started without objectionable lamp
icker (or 10% voltage drop)?
From tables in the circuit protective
devices reference section, the full-load
amperes of this size and type of motor
is 158A. To convert to same basis as
column 7, 158A must be divided by
the generator capacity and % voltage
drop, or:
158
=
0.0158A per kVA
1000 x 10 per 1% voltage drop
Checking against the table, 0.0158 falls
within the 0.01700.0146 range. This
indicates that a general-purpose motor
with autotransformer starting can
be used.
Note: Designers may obtain calculated
information from engine generator
manufacturers.
The calculation results in conservative
results. The engineer should provide
to the engine-generator vendor the
starting kVA of all motors connected to
the generator and their starting sequence.
The engineer should also specify the
maximum allowable drop. The engineer
should request that the engine-generator
vendor consider the proper generator
size when closed-transition autotrans-
former reduced voltage starters, and
soft-start solid-state starter are used;
so the most economical method of
installation is obtained.
Type of
Motor
Starting
Torque
Starting
Current
How
Started
Starting
Current
% Full-Load
Starting Torque per Unit of

Full Load Torque
Full-Load Amperes
per kVA Generator
Capacity for Each
1% Voltage Drop
Motor Rpm
1750 1150
850
Design A Normal Normal Across-the-line
resistance
autotransformer
600700
480560
375450
1.5
0.96
0.96
1.35
0.87
0.87
1.25
0.80
0.80
0.0109.00936
0.0136.0117
0.0170.0146
Design B Normal Low Across-the-line
resistance
autotransformer
500600
400480
320400
1.5
0.96
0.96
1.35
0.87
0.87
1.25
0.80
0.80
0.0131.0109
0.0164.01365
0.0205.0170
Design C High Low Across-the-line
resistance
autotransformer
500600
400480
320400
0.2 to 2.5
1.28 to 1.6
1.28 to 1.6
0.0131.0109
0.0164.01365
0.0205.0170
Wound Rotor High Low Secondary controller 100% current
for 100%
torque
0.0655
Synchronous (for compressors)
Synchronous (for centrifugal pumps)
Low
Low
Across-the-line
Across-the-line
Autotransformer
300
450550
288350
40% Starting, 40% Pull-In

0.0218
0.0145.0118
0.0228.0197
Percent voltage drop gen. kVA 1000
F.L. amperes volts 3 reg. of gen.
10 100 1000
19.0 220 3 0.40
3.45 or 345%. =
1.3-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
054
Voltage Drop Formulas
Approximate Method
Voltage Drop
where abbreviations are same as below Exact Method.
Exact Methods
Voltage drop
Exact Method 1If sending end voltage and load PF
are known.
where:
E
VD
= Voltage drop, line-to-neutral, volts
E
S
= Source voltage, line-to-neutral, volts
I = Line (Load) current, amperes
R = Circuit (branch, feeder) resistance, ohms
X = Circuit (branch, feeder) reactance, ohms
cos = Power factor of load, decimal
sin = Reactive factor of load, decimal
If the receiving end voltage, load current and power factor
(PF) are known.
E
R
is the receiving end voltage.
Exact Method 2If receiving or sending mVA and its power
factor are known at a known sending or receiving voltage.
or
where:
E
R
= Receiving line-line voltage in kV
E
S
= Sending line-line voltage in kV
MVA
R
= Receiving three-phase mVA
MVA
S
= Sending three-phase mVA
Z = Impedance between and receiving ends
= The angle of impedance Z
R
= Receiving end PF
S
= Sending end PF, positive when lagging
E
VD
IR cos IX sin + =
E
VD
E
S
IR cos IX sin E
S
2
IX cos IR sin ( )
2
+ + =
E
VD
E
R
cos I
R
+ ( )
2
E
R
sin I
X
+ ( )
2
E
R
+ =
E
S
2
E
R
2
ZMVA
R
( )
2
E
R
2
---------------------------------- 2ZMVA
R
cos
R
( ) + + =
E
R
2
E
S
2
ZMVA
R
( )
2
E
S
2
---------------------------------- 2ZMVA
S
cos
S
( ) + =
1.3-23
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
055
Voltage Drop
Voltage Drop Tables
Note: Busway voltage drop tables are
shown in Tab 24 of this catalog.
Tables for calculating voltage drop for
copper and aluminum conductors, in
either magnetic (steel) or nonmagnetic
(aluminum or non-metallic) conduit,
appear on Page 1.3-24. These tables
give voltage drop per ampere per
100 ft (30m) of circuit length. The
circuit length is from the beginning
point to the end point of the circuit
regardless of the number of conductors.
Tables are based on the following
conditions:
1. Three or four single conductors in
a conduit, random lay. For three-
conductor cable, actual voltage
drop will be approximately the
same for small conductor sizes
and high power factors. Actual
voltage drop will be from 10 to
15% lower for larger conductor
sizes and lower power factors.
2. Voltage drops are phase-to-phase,
for three-phase, three-wire or
three-phase, four-wire 60 Hz
circuits. For other circuits, multiply
voltage drop given in the tables by
the following correction factors:
Three-phase, four-wire,
phase-to-neutral x 0.577
Single-phase, two-wire x 1.155
Single-phase, three-wire,
phase-to-phase x 1.155
Single-phase, three-wire,
phase-to-neutral x 0.577
3. Voltage drops are for a conductor
temperature of 75C. They may be
used for conductor temperatures
between 60C and 90C with
reasonable accuracy (within 5%).
However, correction factors in
Table 1.3-12 can be applied if
desired. The values in the table are
in percent of total voltage drop.
For conductor temperature of 60C
SUBTRACT the percentage from
Table 1.3-12.
For conductor temperature of 90C
ADD the percentage from Table 1.3-12.
Table 1.3-12. Temperature Correction Factors
for Voltage Drop
Calculations
To calculate voltage drop:
1. Multiply current in amperes by
the length of the circuit in feet to
get ampere-feet. Circuit length is
the distance from the point of
origin to the load end of the circuit.
2. Divide by 100.
3. Multiply by proper voltage drop
value in tables. Result is voltage
drop.
Example:
A 460V, 100 hp motor, running at 80%
PF, draws 124A full-load current. It is
fed by three 2/0 copper conductors in
steel conduit. The feeder length is
150 ft (46m). What is the voltage drop
in the feeder? What is the percentage
voltage drop?
1. 124A x 150 ft (46m) = 18,600A-ft
2. Divided by 100 = 186
3. Table: 2/0 copper, magnetic conduit,
80% PF = 0.0187
186 x 0.0187 = 3.48V drop
3.48 x 100 = 0.76% drop
460
4. Conclusion: 0.76% voltage drop
is very acceptable. (See NEC 2005
Article 215, which suggests that a
voltage drop of 3% or less on a
feeder is acceptable.)
To select minimum conductor size:
1. Determine maximum desired
voltage drop, in volts.
2. Divide voltage drop by
(amperes x circuit feet).
3. Multiply by 100.
4. Find nearest lower voltage drop
value in tables, in correct column
for type of conductor, conduit and
power factor. Read conductor size
for that value.
5. Where this results in an oversized
cable, verify cable lug sizes for
molded case breakers and fusible
switches. Where lug size available
is exceeded, go to next higher
rating.
Example:
A three-phase, four-wire lighting
feeder on a 208V circuit is 250 ft
(76.2m) long. The load is 175A at
90% PF. It is desired to use aluminum
conductors in aluminum conduit. What
size conductor is required to limit the
voltage drop to 2% phase-to-phase?
1.
2.
3.
4. In table, under aluminum conduc-
tors, nonmagnetic conduit, 90%
PF, the nearest lower value is
0.0091. Conductor required is
500 kcmil. (Size 4/0 THW would
have adequate ampacity, but the
voltage drop would be excessive.)
Conductor
Size
Percent Correction
Power Factors %
100 90 80 70 60
No. 14 to No. 4
No. 2 to 3/0
4/0 to 500 kcmil
600 to 1000 kcmil
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
4.7
4.2
3.1
2.6
4.7
3.7
2.6
2.1
4.6
3.5
2.3
1.5
4.6
3.2
1.9
1.3
VD
2
100
208 4.16V = =
4.16
175 250
0.0000951 =
0.0000951 100 0.00951 =
1.3-24
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
System Analysis
056
Table 1.3-13. Voltage DropVolts per Ampere per 100 Feet (30 m); Three-Phase, Phase-to-Phase
Conductor Size
AWG
or kcmil
Magnetic Conduit (Steel) Nonmagnetic Conduit (Aluminum or Nonmetallic)
Load Power Factor, % Load Power Factor, %
60 70 80 90 100 60 70 80 90 100
Copper Conductors
14
12
10
8
0.3390
0.2170
0.1390
0.0905
0.3910
0.2490
0.1590
0.1030
0.4430
0.2810
0.1790
0.1150
0.4940
0.3130
0.1980
0.1260
0.5410
0.3410
0.2150
0.1350
0.3370
0.2150
0.1370
0.0888
0.3900
0.2480
0.1580
0.1010
0.4410
0.2800
0.1780
0.1140
0.4930
0.3120
0.1970
0.1250
0.5410
0.3410
0.2150
0.1350
6
4
2
1
0.0595
0.0399
0.0275
0.0233
0.0670
0.0443
0.0300
0.0251
0.0742
0.0485
0.0323
0.0267
0.0809
0.0522
0.0342
0.0279
0.0850
0.0534
0.0336
0.0267
0.0579
0.0384
0.0260
0.0218
0.0656
0.0430
0.0287
0.0238
0.0730
0.0473
0.0312
0.0256
0.0800
0.0513
0.0333
0.0270
0.0849
0.0533
0.0335
0.0266
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
0.0198
0.0171
0.0148
0.0130
0.0211
0.0180
0.0154
0.0134
0.0222
0.0187
0.0158
0.0136
0.0229
0.0190
0.0158
0.0133
0.0213
0.0170
0.0136
0.0109
0.0183
0.0156
0.0134
0.0116
0.0198
0.0167
0.0141
0.0121
0.0211
0.0176
0.0147
0.0124
0.0220
0.0181
0.0149
0.0124
0.0211
0.0169
0.0134
0.0107
250
300
350
500
0.0122
0.0111
0.0104
0.0100
0.0124
0.0112
0.0104
0.0091
0.0124
0.0111
0.0102
0.0087
0.0120
0.0106
0.0096
0.0080
0.0094
0.0080
0.0069
0.0053
0.0107
0.0097
0.0090
0.0078
0.0111
0.0099
0.0091
0.0077
0.0112
0.0099
0.0091
0.0075
0.0110
0.0096
0.0087
0.0070
0.0091
0.0077
0.0066
0.0049
600
750
1000
0.0088
0.0084
0.0080
0.0086
0.0081
0.0077
0.0082
0.0077
0.0072
0.0074
0.0069
0.0063
0.0046
0.0040
0.0035
0.0074
0.0069
0.0064
0.0072
0.0067
0.0062
0.0070
0.0064
0.0058
0.0064
0.0058
0.0052
0.0042
0.0035
0.0029
Aluminum Conductors
12
10
8
0.3296
0.2133
0.1305
0.3811
0.2429
0.1552
0.4349
0.2741
0.1758
0.4848
0.3180
0.1951
0.5330
0.3363
0.2106
0.3312
0.2090
0.1286
0.3802
0.2410
0.1534
0.4328
0.2740
0.1745
0.4848
0.3052
0.1933
0.5331
0.3363
0.2115
6
4
2
1
0.0898
0.0595
0.0403
0.0332
0.1018
0.0660
0.0443
0.0357
0.1142
0.0747
0.0483
0.0396
0.1254
0.0809
0.0523
0.0423
0.1349
0.0862
0.0535
0.0428
0.0887
0.0583
0.0389
0.0318
0.1011
0.0654
0.0435
0.0349
0.1127
0.0719
0.0473
0.0391
0.1249
0.0800
0.0514
0.0411
0.1361
0.0849
0.0544
0.0428
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
0.0286
0.0234
0.0209
0.0172
0.0305
0.0246
0.0220
0.0174
0.0334
0.0275
0.0231
0.0179
0.0350
0.0284
0.0241
0.0177
0.0341
0.0274
0.0217
0.0170
0.0263
0.0227
0.0160
0.0152
0.0287
0.0244
0.0171
0.0159
0.0322
0.0264
0.0218
0.0171
0.0337
0.0274
0.0233
0.0179
0.0339
0.0273
0.0222
0.0172
250
300
350
500
0.0158
0.0137
0.0130
0.0112
0.0163
0.0139
0.0133
0.0111
0.0162
0.0143
0.0128
0.0114
0.0159
0.0144
0.0131
0.0099
0.0145
0.0122
0.0100
0.0076
0.0138
0.0126
0.0122
0.0093
0.0144
0.0128
0.0123
0.0094
0.0147
0.0133
0.0119
0.0094
0.0155
0.0132
0.0120
0.0091
0.0138
0.0125
0.0101
0.0072
600
750
1000
0.0101
0.0095
0.0085
0.0106
0.0094
0.0082
0.0097
0.0090
0.0078
0.0090
0.0084
0.0071
0.0063
0.0056
0.0043
0.0084
0.0081
0.0069
0.0085
0.0080
0.0068
0.0085
0.0078
0.0065
0.0081
0.0072
0.0058
0.0060
0.0051
0.0038
1.4-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Capacitors
057
Capacitors and Power Factor
Capacitor General Application
Considerations
Additional application information
is available in Tab 35 regarding
capacitors and harmonic lters
as follows:
Capacitor selection
Where to install capacitors in a plant
distribution system
Locating capacitors on reduced
voltage and multi-speed starters
Harmonic considerations
Eliminating harmonic problems
National Electrical Code
requirements
Medium Voltage
Capacitor Switching
Capacitance switching constitutes
severe operating duty for a circuit
breaker. At the time the breaker opens
at near current zero, the capacitor is
fully charged. After interruption, when
the alternating voltage on the source
side of the breaker reaches its opposite
maximum, the voltage that appears
across the contacts of the open breaker
is at least twice the normal peak line-
to-neutral voltage of the circuit. If a
breakdown occurs across the open
contact, the arc is re-established. Due
to the circuit constants on the supply
side of the breaker, the voltage across
the open contact can reach three times
the normal line-to-neutral voltage.
After it is interrupted and with
subsequent alternation of the supply
side voltage, the voltage across the
open contact is even higher.
ANSI Standard C37.06 (indoor oilless
circuit breakers) indicates the preferred
ratings of Eatons Type VCP-W vacuum
breaker. For capacitor switching,
careful attention should be paid to
the notes accompanying the table.
The denition of the terms are in ANSI
Standard C37.04 Article 5.13 (for the
latest edition). The application guide
ANSI/IEEE Standard C37.012 covers
the method of calculation of the
quantities covered by C37.06 Standard.
Note that the denitions in C37.04
make the switching of two capacitors
banks in close proximity to the switch-
gear bus a back-to-back mode of
switching. This classication requires
a denite purpose circuit breaker
(breakers specically designed for
capacitance switching).
We recommend that such application
be referred to Eaton.
A breaker specied for capacitor
switching should include as applicable:
1. Rated maximum voltage.
2. Rated frequency.
3. Rated open wire line charging
switching current.
4. Rated isolated cable charging and
shunt capacitor switching current.
5. Rated back-to-back cable
charging and back-to-back
capacitor switching current.
6. Rated transient overvoltage factor.
7. Rated transient inrush current and
its frequency.
8. Rated interrupting time.
9. Rated capacitive current
switching life.
10. Grounding of system and
capacitor bank.
Load break interrupter switches
are permitted by ANSI/IEEE Standard
C37.30 to switch capacitance, but they
must have tested ratings for the purpose.
Refer to Eaton Type MVS ratings.
Low Voltage Capacitor Switching
Circuit breakers and switches for use
with a capacitor must have a current
rating in excess of rated capacitor
current to provide for overcurrent from
overvoltages at fundamental frequency
and harmonic currents. The following
percent of the capacitor-rated current
should be used as a general guideline:
Fused and unfused switches. . . . 165%
Molded case breaker or
equivalent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150%
DSII power circuit breakers. . . . . 135%
Magnum DS power
circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135%
Contactors:
Open type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135%
Enclosed type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150%
The NEC, Section 460.8(C), requires
the disconnecting means to be rated not
less than 135% of the rated capacitor
current (for 600V and below).
See Tab 35 for switching device
ampere ratings. They are based on
percentage of capacitor-rated current
as indicated (above). The interrupting
rating of the switch must be selected
to match the system fault current
available at the point of capacitor
application. Whenever a capacitor
bank is purchased with less than the
ultimate kVAR capacity of the rack
or enclosure, the switch rating should
be selected based on the ultimate
kVAR capacitynot the initial
installed capacity.
Refer to Tab 35 for recommended
selection of capacitor switching
devices; recommended maximum
capacitor ratings for various motor
types and voltages; and for required
multipliers to determine capacitor
kVARs required for power factor
correction.
1.4-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Capacitors
058
Motor Power Factor
Correction
See Tab 35 containing suggested
maximum capacitor ratings for
induction motors switched with the
capacitor. The data is general in nature
and representative of general purpose
induction motors of standard design.
The preferable means to select capacitor
ratings is based on the maximum
recommended kVAR information
available from the motor manufacturer.
If this is not possible or feasible, the
tables can be used.
An important point to remember
is that if the capacitor used with the
motor is too large, self-excitation
may cause a motor-damaging over-
voltage when the motor and capacitor
combination is disconnected from the
line. In addition, high transient torques
capable of damaging the motor shaft
or coupling can occur if the motor is
reconnected to the line while rotating
and still generating a voltage of
self-excitation.
Denitions
kVARrating of the capacitor in
reactive kilovolt-amperes. This value
is approximately equal to the motor
no-load magnetizing kilovars.
% ARpercent reduction in line
current due to the capacitor. A
capacitor located on the motor side
of the overload relay reduces line
current through the relay. Therefore, a
different overload relay and/or setting
may be necessary. The reduction in
line current may be determined by
measuring line current with and
without the capacitor or by calculation
as follows:
If a capacitor is used with a lower kVAR
rating than listed in tables, the % AR
can be calculated as follows:
The tables can also be used for other
motor ratings as follows:
A. For standard 60 Hz motors
operating at 50 Hz:
kVAR = 1.71.4 of kVAR listed
% AR= 1.81.35 of % AR listed
B. For standard 50 Hz motors
operating at 50 Hz:
kVAR = 1.41.1 of kVAR listed
% AR= 1.41.05 of % AR listed
C. For standard 60 Hz wound-rotor
motors:
kVAR= 1.1 of kVAR listed
% AR= 1.05 of % AR listed
Note: For A, B, C, the larger multipliers
apply for motors of higher speeds; i.e.,
3600 rpm = 1.7 mult., 1800 rpm = 1.65
mult., etc.
To derate a capacitor used on a system
voltage lower than the capacitor
voltage rating, such as a 240V
capacitor used on a 208V system,
use the following formula:
For the kVAC required to correct the
power factor from a given value of
COS 1 to COS 2, the formula is:
kVAC = kW (tan phase
1
tan phase
2
)
Capacitors cause a voltage rise.
At light load periods the capacitive
voltage rise can raise the voltage at
the location of the capacitors to an
unacceptable level. This voltage rise
can be calculated approximately by
the formula:
MVA
R
is the capacitor rating and MVA
SC

is the system short-circuit capacity.
With the introduction of variable speed
drives and other harmonic current
generating loads, the capacitor
impedance value determined must
not be resonant with the inductive
reactances of the system.
% AR 100 100
(Original PF)
(Improved PF)
=
% AR Listed % AR
Actual kVAR
kVAR in Table
=
Actual kVAR =
Nameplate kVAR
Applied Voltage ( )
2
Nameplate Voltage ( )
2
----------------------------------------------------------------------
% VR
MVA
r
MVA
SC
=
1.4-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Protection and Coordination
059
and Coordination
Overcurrents in a power distribution
system can occur as a result of both
normal (motor starting, transformer
inrush, etc.) and abnormal (overloads,
ground fault, line-to-line fault, etc.)
conditions. In either case, the funda-
mental purposes of current-sensing
protective devices are to detect the
abnormal overcurrent and with proper
coordination, to operate selectively
to protect equipment, property
and personnel while minimizing the
outage of the remainder of the system.
With the increase in electric power
consumption over the past few
decades, dependence on the contin-
ued supply of this power has also
increased so that the direct costs
of power outages have risen signi-
cantly. Power outages can create
dangerous and unsafe conditions as
a result of failure of lighting, elevators,
ventilation, re pumps, security
systems, communications systems,
and the like. In addition, economic loss
from outages can be extremely high
as a result of computer downtime,
or, especially in industrial process
plants, interruption of production.
Protective equipment must be adjusted
and maintained in order to function
properly when an overcurrent occurs,
but coordination begins during power
system design with the knowledgeable
analysis and selection and application
of each overcurrent protective device
in the series circuit from the power
source(s) to each load apparatus. The
objective of coordination is to localize
the overcurrent disturbance so that the
protective device closest to the fault
on the power-source side has the rst
chance to operate; but each preceding
protective device upstream toward the
power source should be capable, within
its designed settings of current and
time, to provide backup and de-energize
the circuit if the fault persists. Sensitivity
of coordination is the degree to which
the protective devices can minimize
the damage to the faulted equipment.
To study and accomplish coordination
requires (a) a one-line diagram, the
roadmap of the power distribution
system, showing all protective devices
and the major or important distribution
and utilization apparatus, (b) identi-
cation of desired degrees of power
continuity or criticality of loads
throughout system, (c) denition
of operating-current characteristics
(normal, peak, starting) of each
utilization circuit, (d) equipment
damage or withstand characteristics,
(e) calculation of maximum short-
circuit currents (and ground fault
currents if ground fault protection is
included) available at each protective
device location, (f) understanding of
operating characteristics and available
adjustments of each protective device,
(g) any special overcurrent protection
requirements including utility limita-
tions. Refer to Figure 1.4-1.
To ensure complete coordination, the
time-trip characteristics of all devices
in series should be plotted on a single
sheet of standard log-log paper.
Devices of different-voltage systems
can be plotted on the same sheet by
converting their current scales, using
the voltage ratios, to the same voltage-
basis. Such a coordination plot is
shown in Figure 1.4-1. In this manner,
primary fuses and circuit breaker
relays on the primary side of a
substation transformer can be coordi-
nated with the low voltage breakers.
Transformer damage points, based on
ANSI standards, and low voltage cable
heating limits can be plotted on this
set of curves to ensure that apparatus
limitations are not exceeded.
Ground-fault curves may also be
included in the coordination study
if ground-fault protection is provided,
but care must be used in interpreting
their meaning.
Standard denitions have been
established for overcurrent protective
devices covering ratings, operation
and application systems.
MMotor (100 hp). Dashed line shows
initial inrush current, starting current
during 9-sec. acceleration, and drop to
124A normal running current, all well
below CBA trip curve.
Figure 1.4-1. Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Typical Power Distribution System
Protective Devices Coordination Analysis
1000
10
9
7
6
.9
4
5
.5
.3
.2
100
90
30
20
500
300
200
1
0
,0
0
0
8
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
9
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
8
0
0
6
0
0
9
0
0
7
0
0
5
0
0
4
0
0
3
0
0
2
0
0
1
0
0
8
0
60 9
0
7
0
50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 5 6 4 3 1 2 .9 .8 .7 .5 .6
600
900
800
700
400
40
8
50
80
60
70
3
1
2
.8
.7
.6
.4
.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.05
.04
.03
.02
.01
1
0
,0
0
0
8
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
9
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
8
0
0
6
0
0
9
0
0
7
0
0
5
0
0
4
0
0
3
0
0
2
0
0
1
0
0
8
0 60 9
0
7
0 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 5 6 4 3 1 2 .9 .8 .7 .5 .6
1000
10
9
7
6
.9
4
5
.5
.3
.2
100
90
30
20
500
300
200
600
900
800
700
400
40
8
50
80
60
70
3
1
2
.8
.7
.6
.4
.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.05
.04
.03
.02
.01
T
I
M
E

I
N

S
E
C
O
N
D
S
SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES AT 480V
SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES AT 480V
T
I
M
E

I
N

S
E
C
O
N
D
S
250 MVA 4.16 kV
250A
1000
kVA
5.75%
4,160V
480/277V
19,600A
1,600A
24,400A
600A
D
C
B
A
M
20,000A
175A
100 hp
124A FLC
X = Available fault current
including motor
contribution.
D
ANSI Three-Phase
Thru Fault
Protection Curve
(More Than 10 in
Lifetime)
C
B
A
C B
A
B
C
Transformer
Inrush
Ground
Fault Trip
M
a
x
.
4
8
0
V

F
a
u
l
t
M
a
x
.

T
h
r
e
e
-
P
h
a
s
e
4
.
1
6

k
V

F
a
u
l
t
M
1.4-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
060
ACB (175A) coordinates selectively
with motor M on starting and running
and with all upstream devices, except
that CB B will trip rst on low level
ground faults.
BCB (600A) coordinates selectively
with all upstream and downstream
devices, except will trip before A on
limited ground faults, since A has no
ground fault trips.
CMain CB (1600A) coordinates
selectively with all downstream
devices and with primary fuse D,
for all faults on load side of CB.
DPrimary fuse (250A, 4160V) coordi-
nates selectively with all secondary
protective devices. Curve converted to
480V basis. Clears transformer inrush
point (12 x FLC for 0.1 sec.), indicating
that fuse will not blow on inrush.
Fuse is underneath right-half of ANSI
three-phase withstand curve, indicating
fuse will protect transformer for high-
magnitude faults up to ANSI rating.
Delta-wye secondary side short
circuit is not reected to the primary
by the relation
for L-L and L-G faults. For line-to-line
fault, the secondary (low voltage) side
fault current is 0.866 x I three-phase
fault current.
However, the primary (high voltage)
side fault is the same as if the secondary
fault was a three-phase fault. Therefore
in coordination studies, the knee of the
short-time pickup setting on the sec-
ondary breaker should be multiplied by
before it is compared to the minimum
melting time of the upstream primary
fuse curve. In the example shown, the
knee is at 4000A 30 sec., and the 30-sec.
trip time should be compared to the
MMT (minimum melt time) of the fuse
curve at 4000 x 1.1547 = 4619A. In this
case, there is adequate clearance to
the fuse curve.
In the example shown, the ANSI
three-phase through fault protection
curve must be multiplied by 0.577
and replotted in order to determine
the protection given by the primary
for a single line to ground fault in
the secondary.
Maximum 480V three-phase fault
indicated on the horizontal current axis.
Maximum 4160V three-phase fault
indicated, converted to 480V basis.
The ANSI protection curves are
specied in ANSI C57.109 for liquid-
lled transformers and C57.12.59 for
dry-type transformers.
Illustrative examples such as shown
here start the coordination study from
the lowest rated device proceeding
upstream. In practice, the setting or
rating of the utilitys protective device
sets the upper limit. Even in cases
where the customer owns the medium
voltage or higher distribution system,
the setting or rating of the lowest set
protective device at the source deter-
mines the settings of the downstream
devices and the coordination.
Therefore the coordination study
should start at the present setting
or rating of the upstream device and
work toward the lowest rated device. If
this procedure results in unacceptable
settings, the setting or rating of the
upstream device should be reviewed.
Where the utility is the sole source,
they should be consulted. Where the
owner has its own medium or higher
voltage distribution, the settings or
ratings of all upstream devices should
be checked.
If perfect coordination is not feasible,
then lack of coordination should be
limited to the smallest part of the system.
Application data is available for all
protective equipment to permit
systems to be designed for adequate
overcurrent protection and coordina-
tion. For circuit breakers of all types,
time-current curves permit selection of
instantaneous and inverse-time trips.
For more complex circuit breakers,
with solid-state trip units, trip curves
include long- and short-time delays,
as well as ground-fault tripping, with a
wide range of settings and features to
provide selectivity and coordination.
For current-limiting circuit breakers,
fuses, and circuit breakers with
integral fuses, not only are time-
current characteristic curves available,
but also data on current-limiting
performance and protection for
downstream devices.
In a fully rated system, all circuit
breakers must have an interrupting
capacity adequate for the maximum
available fault current at their point of
application. All breakers are equipped
with long-time-delay (and possibly
short delay) and instantaneous over-
current trip devices. A main breaker
may have short time-delay tripping to
allow a feeder breaker to isolate the
fault while power is maintained to all
the remaining feeders.
A selective or fully coordinated system
permits maximum service continuity.
The tripping characteristics of each
overcurrent device in the system must
be selected and set so that the breaker
nearest the fault opens to isolate the
faulted circuit, while all other breakers
remain closed, continuing power to
the entire unfaulted part of the system.
The National Electrical Code

contains specic requirements for
designing certain circuits with selective
coordination. Article 100 denes
selective coordination: Coordination
(Selective), the following denition:
Localization of an overcurrent condi-
tion to restrict outages to the circuit or
equipment affected, accomplished by
the choice of overcurrent protective
devices and their ratings or settings.
NEC 2011 NFPA 70: National Electrical Code

International Electrical Code Series.
Article 620.62 (elevators, dumbwaiters,
escalators, moving walks, wheelchair
lifts, and stairway chair lifts) requires
Where more than one driving machine
disconnecting means is supplied by a
single feeder, the overcurrent protective
devices in each disconnecting means
shall be selectively coordinated with
any other supply side overcurrent
protective device. A similar require-
ment under Article 700.27 is as follows;
Emergency system(s) overcurrent
devices shall be selectively coordinated
with all supply side overcurrent
protective devices. Article 701.27
states that Legally required standby
system(s) overcurrent devices shall be
selectively coordinated with all supply
side overcurrent devices.
Exception: Selective coordination
shall not be required between two
overcurrent devices located in series
if no loads are connected in parallel
with the downstream device.
In addition, for health care facilities,
Article 517.26, Application of Other
Articles requires that The essential
electrical system shall meet the
requirements of Article 700, except
as amended by Article 517.
I
P
V
S
V
P
I
S
=
1
0.866
or 1.1547
I
480V
I
4160V
4160
480
=
1.4-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
061
All breakers must have an interrupting
capacity not less than the maximum
available short-circuit current at their
point of application. A selective
system is a fully rated system with
tripping devices chosen and adjusted
to provide the desired selectivity.
The tripping characteristics of each
overcurrent device should not overlap,
but should maintain a minimum time
interval for devices in series (to allow
for normal operating tolerances) at all
current values. Generally, a maximum
of four low voltage circuit breakers can
be operated selectively in series, with
the feeder or branch breaker down-
stream furthest from the source.
Specify true rms sensing devices in
order to avoid false trips due to rapid
currents or spikes. Specify tripping
elements with I
2
t or I
4
t feature for
improved coordination with other
devices having I
2
t or I
4
t (such as
OPTIM trip units) characteristics
and fuses.
In general for systems such as shown
in the example:
1. The settings or ratings of the
primary side fuse and main breaker
must not exceed the settings
allowed by NEC Article 450.
2. At 12 x I
FL
the minimum melting
time characteristic of the fuse
should be higher than 0.1 second.
3. The primary fuse should be to the
left of the transformer damage
curve as much as possible. The
correction factor for a single line-
to-ground factor must be applied
to the damage curve.
4. The setting of the short-time delay
element must be checked against
the fuse MMT after it is corrected
for line-to-line faults.
5. The maximum fault current must
be indicated at the load side of
each protective device.
6. The setting of a feeder protective
device must comply with Article
240 and Article 430 of the NEC.
It also must allow the starting
and acceleration of the largest
motor on the feeder while carrying
all the other loads on the feeder.
Protection of Conductors (Excerpts
from NFPA 70-2011, Article 240.4)
Conductors, other than exible cords
and xture wires, shall be protected
against overcurrent in accordance with
their ampacities as specied in Section
310.15, unless otherwise permitted or
required in (A) through (G).
A. Power Loss Hazard. Conductor
overload protection shall not be
required where the interruption of
the circuit would create a hazard,
such as in a material handling
magnet circuit or re pump circuit.
Short-circuit protection shall be
provided.
Note: FPN See NFPA 20-2003, standard
for the Installation of Stationary Pumps
for Fire Protection.
B. Devices Rated 800A or Less. The
next higher standard overcurrent
device rating (above the ampacity
of the conductors being protected)
shall be permitted to be used,
provided all of the following
conditions are met.
1. The conductors being protected
are not part of a branch circuit
supplying more than one recepta-
cle for cord-and-plug-connected
portable loads.
2. The ampacity of the conductors
does not correspond with the
standard ampere rating of a fuse or
a circuit breaker without overload
trip adjustments above its rating
(but that shall be permitted to have
other trip or rating adjustments).
3. The next higher standard rating
selected does not exceed 800A.
C. Overcurrent Devices Rated Over
800A. Where the overcurrent
device is rated over 800A, the
ampacity of the conductors it
protects shall be equal to or
greater than the rating of the
overcurrent device as dened in
Section 240.6.
D. Small Conductors. Unless
specically permitted in 240.4(E)
or 240.4(G), the overcurrent
protection shall not exceed 15A
for 14 AWG, 20A for 12 AWG, and
30A for 10 AWG copper; or 15A
for 12 AWG and 25A for 10 AWG
aluminum and copper-clad
aluminum after any correction
factors for ambient temperature
and number of conductors have
been applied.
E. Tap Conductors. Tap conductors
shall be permitted to be protected
against overcurrent in accordance
with the following:
1. 210.19(A)(3) and (A)(4) Household
Ranges and Cooking Appliances
and Other Loads.
2. 240.5(B)(2) Fixture Wire.
3. 240.21 Location in Circuit.
4. 368.17(B) Reduction in Ampacity
Size of Busway.
5. 368.17(C) Feeder or Branch Circuits
(busway taps).
6. 430.53(D) Single Motor Taps.
Circuit Breaker Cable
Temperature Ratings
UL listed circuit breakers rated 125A or
less shall be marked as being suitable
for 60C (140F), 75C (167F) only or
60/75C (140/167F) wire. All Eaton
breakers rated 125A or less are marked
60/75C (140/167F). All UL listed circuit
breakers rated over 125A are suitable
for 75C conductors. Conductors rated
for higher temperatures may be used,
but must not be loaded to carry more
current than the 75C ampacity of that
size conductor for equipment marked
or rated 75C or the 60C ampacity of
that size conductor for equipment
marked or rated 60C. However, when
applying derated factors, so long as
the actual load does not exceed the
lower of the derated ampacity or the
75C or 60C ampacity that applies.
Zone Selective Interlocking
Trip elements equipped with zone
selective interlocking, trip without
intentional time delay unless a
restraint signal is received from
a protective device downstream.
Breakers equipped with this feature
reduce the damage at the point of
fault if the fault occurs at a location
between the zone of protection.
The upstream breaker upon receipt
of the restraint signal will not trip until
its time-delay setting times out. If the
breaker immediately downstream of the
fault does not open, then after timing
out, the upstream breaker will trip.
Breakers equipped with ground fault
trip elements should also be specied
to include zone interlocking for the
ground fault trip element.
1.4-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
062
Ground Fault Protection
Article 230.95 of NEC requires ground-
fault protection of equipment shall be
provided for solidly grounded wye
electrical services of more than 150V
to ground, but not exceeding 600V
phase-to-phase for each service
disconnect rated 1000A or more.
The rating of the service disconnect
shall be considered to be the rating
of the largest fuse that can be installed
or the highest continuous current trip
setting for which the actual overcurrent
device installed in a circuit breaker is
rated or can be adjusted.
The maximum allowable settings are:
1200A pickup, 1 second or less trip
delay at currents of 3000A or greater.
The characteristics of the ground-fault
trip elements create coordination
problems with downstream devices
not equipped with ground fault
protection. The National Electrical
Code exempts re pumps and
continuous industrial processes
from this requirement.
It is recommended that in solidly
grounded 480/277V systems where
main breakers are specied to be
equipped with ground fault trip elements
that the feeder breakers be specied
to be equipped with ground fault trip
elements as well.
Suggested Ground Fault Settings
For the main devices:
A ground fault pickup setting equal
to 2030% of the main breaker rating
but not to exceed 1200A, and a time
delay equal to the delay of the short-
time element, but not to exceed
1 second.
For the feeder ground fault setting:
A setting equal to 2030% of the feeder
ampacity and a time delay to coordinate
with the setting of the main (at least
6 cycles below the main).
If the desire to selectively coordinate
ground fault devices results in settings
that do not offer adequate damage
protection against arcing single line-
ground faults, the design engineer
should decide between coordination
and damage limitation.
For low voltage systems with high-
magnitude available short-circuit
currents, common in urban areas and
large industrial installations, several
solutions are available. High interrupt-
ing Series C
molded case breakers,

current-limiting circuit breakers, or
current-limiting fuses, limiters integral
with molded-case circuit breakers
(TRI-PAC
) or mounted on power
circuit breakers (MDSL) can be used to
handle these large fault currents. To
provide current limiting, these devices
must clear the fault completely within
the rst half-cycle, limiting the peak
current (I
p
) and heat energy (I
2
t)
let-through to considerably less than
what would have occurred without
the device. For a fully fusible system,
rule-of-thumb fuse ratios or more
accurate I
2
t curves can be used to
provide selectivity and coordination.
For fuse-breaker combinations, the
fuse should be selected (coordinated)
so as to permit the breaker to handle
those overloads and faults within its
capacity; the fuse should operate
before or with the breaker only on
large faults, approaching the interrupt-
ing capacity of the breaker, to minimize
fuse blowing. Recently, unfused, truly
current-limiting circuit breakers with
interrupting ratings adequate for the
largest systems (Type Series C, FDC,
JDC, KDC, LDC and NDC frames
or Type Current Limit-R
) have
become available.
The Series G high performance,
current-limiting circuit breaker series
offers interrupting ratings to 200 kA.
Frames are EGC, EGU, EGX, JGC,
JGU, JGX, LGC, LGU and LGX.
Any of these current-limiting devices
fuses, fused breakers or current-limit-
ing breakerscannot only clear these
large faults safely, but also will limit
the I
p
and I
2
t let-through signicantly
to prevent damage to apparatus
downstream, extending their zone
of protection. Without the current
limitation of the upstream device,
the fault current could exceed the
withstand capability of the down-
stream equipment. Underwriters
Laboratories tests and lists these
series combinations. Application
information is available for
combinations that have been tested
and UL
-listed for safe operation

downstream from MDSL, TRI-PAC,
and Current Limit-R, or Series C
breakers of various ratings, under
high available fault currents.
Protective devices in electrical
distribution systems may be properly
coordinated when the systems are
designed and built, but that is no
guarantee that they will remain
coordinated. System changes and
additions, plus power source changes,
frequently modify the protection
requirements, sometimes causing loss
of coordination and even increasing
fault currents beyond the ratings of
some devices. Consequently, periodic
study of protective-device settings
and ratings is as important for safety
and preventing power outages
as is periodic maintenance of the
1.4-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
063
Grounding
Grounding encompasses several
different but interrelated aspects of
electrical distribution system design
and construction, all of which are
essential to the safety and proper
operation of the system and equip-
ment supplied by it. Among these
are equipment grounding, system
grounding, static and lightning
protection, and connection to earth
as a reference (zero) potential.
1. Equipment Grounding
Equipment grounding is essential
to safety of personnel. Its function is
to ensure that all exposed noncurrent-
carrying metallic parts of all structures
and equipment in or near the electrical
distribution system are at the same
potential, and that this is the zero
reference potential of the earth.
Equipment grounding is required
by both the National Electrical Code
(Article 250) and the National Electrical
Safety Code regardless of how the
power system is grounded. Equipment
grounding also provides a return path
for ground fault currents, permitting
protective devices to operate. Acciden-
tal contact of an energized conductor
of the system with an improperly
grounded noncurrent-carry metallic
part of the system (such as a motor
frame or panelboard enclosure) would
raise the potential of the metal object
above ground potential. Any person
coming in contact with such an object
while grounded could be seriously
injured or killed. In addition, current
ow from the accidental grounding of
an energized part of the system could
generate sufcient heat (often with
arcing) to start a re. To prevent the
establishment of such unsafe potential
difference requires that (1) the equip-
ment grounding conductor provide a
return path for ground fault currents of
sufciently low impedance to prevent
unsafe voltage drop, and (2) the equip-
ment grounding conductor be large
enough to carry the maximum ground
fault current, without burning off, for
sufcient time to permit protective
devices (ground fault relays, circuit
breakers, fuses) to clear the fault. The
grounded conductor of the system
(usually the neutral conductor),
although grounded at the source, must
not be used for equipment grounding.
The equipment grounding conductor
may be the metallic conduit or raceway
of the wiring system, or a separate
equipment grounding conductor,
run with the circuit conductors, as
permitted by NEC. If a separate
equipment grounding conductor is
used, it may be bare or insulated; if
insulated, the insulation must be green,
green with yellow stripe or green tape.
Conductors with green insulation may
not be used for any purpose other than
for equipment grounding.
The equipment grounding system
must be bonded to the grounding
electrode at the source or service;
however, it may be also connected
to ground at many other points.
This will not cause problems with
the safe operation of the electrical
distribution system. Where computers,
data processing, or microprocessor-
based industrial process control
systems are installed, the equipment
grounding system must be designed
to minimize interference with their
proper operation. Often, isolated
grounding of this equipment, or
isolated electrical supply systems are
required to protect microprocessors
from power system noise that does
not in any way affect motors or other
electrical equipment. Such systems
must use single-point ground concept
to minimize noise and still meet
the NEC requirements. Any separate
isolated ground mat must be tied to
the rest of the facility ground mat
system for NEC compliance.
2. System Grounding
System grounding connects the
electrical supply, from the utility, from
transformer secondary windings, or
from a generator, to ground. A system
can be solidly grounded (no intentional
impedance to ground), impedance
grounded (through a resistance or
reactance), or ungrounded (with no
intentional connection to ground.
3. Medium Voltage System: Grounding
Table 1.4-1. Features of Ungrounded and Grounded Systems (from ANSI C62.92)
Description A
Ungrounded
B
Solidly Grounded
C
Reactance Grounded
D
Resistance Grounded
E
Resonant Grounded
(1) Apparatus
insulation
Fully insulated Lowest Partially graded Partially graded Partially graded
(2) Fault to
ground current
Usually low Maximum value rarely
higher than three-phase
short circuit current
Cannot satisfactorily be
reduced below one-half
or one-third of values for
solid grounding
Low Negligible except when
Petersen coil is short
circuited for relay
purposes when it may
compare with solidly
grounded systems
(3) Stability Usually unimportant Lower than with other
methods but can be
made satisfactory by use
of high-speed breakers
Improved over solid
grounding particularly
if used at receiving end
of system
Improved over solid
grounding particularly
if used at receiving end
of system
Is eliminated from
consideration during
single line-to-ground
faults unless neutralizer
is short circuited to
isolate fault by relays
(4) Relaying Difcult Satisfactory Satisfactory Satisfactory Requires special
provisions but can be
made satisfactory
(5) Arcing
grounds
Likely Unlikely Possible if reactance is
excessive
Unlikely Unlikely
(6) Localizing
faults
Effect of fault transmitted
as excess voltage on
sound phases to all
parts of conductively
connected network
Effect of faults localized
to system or part of
system where they occur
Effect of faults localized to
system or part of system
where they occur unless
reactance is quite high
Effect of faults
transmitted as excess
voltage on sound phases
to all parts of conductively
connected network
Effect of faults
transmitted as excess
voltage on sound phases
to all parts of conductively
connected network
(7) Double
faults
Likely Likely Unlikely unless
reactance is quite high
and insulation weak
Unlikely unless
resistance is quite high
and insulation weak
Seem to be more likely
but conclusive information
not available
1.4-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
064
Table 1.4-1. Features of Ungrounded and Grounded Systems (Continued)
Because the method of grounding
affects the voltage rise of the unfaulted
phases above ground, ANSI C62.92
classies systems from the point of
view of grounding in terms of a
coefcient of grounding
This same standard also denes
systems as effectively grounded when
COG .8 such a system would have
X
0
/X
1
3.0 and R
0
/X
1
1.0. Any other
grounding means that does not satisfy
these conditions at any point in a
system is not effectively grounded.
The aforementioned denition is
of signicance in medium voltage
distribution systems with long lines
and with grounded sources removed
during light load periods so that in
some locations in the system the
X
0
/X
1
, R
0
/X
1
may exceed the dening
limits. Other standards (cable and
lightning arrester) allow the use of
100% rated cables and arresters
selected on the basis of an effectively
grounded system only where the
criteria in the above are met. In
effectively grounded system the line-
to-ground fault current is high and
there is no signicant voltage rise in
the unfaulted phases.
With selective ground fault isolation
the fault current should be at least 60%
of the three-phase current at the point
of fault. Damage to cable shields must
be checked. Although this fact is not
a problem except in small cables, it is
a good idea to supplement the cable
shields returns of ground fault current
to prevent damage, by installing an
equipment grounding conductor.
The burdens on the current transformers
must be checked also (for saturation
considerations), where residually
connected ground relays are used
and the current transformers supply
current to phase relays and meters.
If ground sensor current transformers
(zero sequence type) are used they
must be of high burden capacity.
Description A
Ungrounded
B
Solidly Grounded
C
Reactance Grounded
D
Resistance Grounded
E
Resonant Grounded
(8) Lightning
protection
Ungrounded neutral
service arresters must be
applied at sacrice in cost
and efciency
Highest efciency and
lowest cost
If reactance is very high
arresters for ungrounded
neutral service must be
applied at sacrice in cost
and efciency
Arresters for ungrounded,
neutral service usually
must be applied at
sacrice in cost and
efciency
Ungrounded neutral
service arresters must
be applied at sacrice
in cost and efciency
(9) Telephone
interference
Will usually be low
except in cases of double
faults or electrostatic
induction with neutral
displaced but duration
may be great
Will be greatest in
magnitude due to higher
fault currents but can
be quickly cleared
particularly with high
speed breakers
Will be reduced from
solidly grounded values
Will be reduced from
solidly grounded values
Will be low in magnitude
except in cases of double
faults or series resonance
at harmonic frequencies,
but duration may be great
(10) Radio
interference
May be quite high during
faults or when neutral
is displayed
Minimum Greater than for
solidly grounded,
when faults occur
Greater than for
solidly grounded,
when faults occur
May be high during faults
(11) Line
availability
Will inherently clear
themselves if total length
of interconnected line is
low and require isolation
from system in increas-
ing percentages as length
becomes greater
Must be isolated for
each fault
each fault
each fault
Need not be isolated but
will inherently clear itself
in about 60 to 80 percent
of faults
(12) Adaptability
to interconnection
Cannot be interconnected
unless interconnecting
system is ungrounded
or isolating transformers
are used
Satisfactory indenitely
with reactance-grounded
systems
Satisfactory indenitely
with solidly-grounded
systems
Satisfactory with solidly-
or reactance-grounded
systems with proper
attention to relaying
Cannot be interconnected
unless interconnected
system is resonant
grounded or isolating
transformers are used.
Requires coordination
between interconnected
systems in neutralizer
settings
(13) Circuit
breakers
Interrupting capacity
determined by three-
phase conditions
Same interrupting
capacity as required for
three-phase short circuit
will practically always be
satisfactory
phase fault conditions
(14) Operating
procedure
Ordinarily simple but
possibility of double
faults introduces
complication in times
of trouble
Simple Simple Simple Taps on neutralizers must
be changed when major
system switching is per-
formed and difculty may
arise in interconnected
systems. Difcult to tell
where faults are located
(15) Total cost High, unless conditions
are such that arc tends
to extinguish itself, when
transmission circuits may
be eliminated, reducing
total cost
Lowest Intermediate Intermediate Highest unless the arc
suppressing characteris-
tic is relied on to eliminate
transmission circuits
when it may be lowest
for the particular types
of service
COG
Highest Power Frequency
rms Line Ground Voltage
rms Line Line Voltage at Fault
Location with the Fault Removed
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- =
1.4-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
065
Table 1.4-2 taken from ANSI-C62.92
indicates the characteristics of the
various methods of grounding.
Reactance Grounding
It is generally used in the grounding
of the neutrals of generators directly
connected to the distribution system
bus, in order to limit the line-to-ground
fault to somewhat less than the three-
phase fault at the generator terminals.
If the reactor is so sized, in all probability
the system will remain effectively
grounded.
Resistance Grounded
Medium voltage systems in general
should be low resistance grounded.
The ground fault is typically limited to
about 200400A but less than 1000A
(a cable shield consideration). With a
properly sized resistor and relaying
application, selective fault isolation
is feasible. The fault limit provided
has a bearing on whether residually
connected relays are used or ground
sensor current transformers are used
for ground fault relaying.
In general, where residually connected
ground relays are used (51N), the fault
current at each grounded source
should not be limited to less than the
current transformers rating of the
source. This rule will provide sensitive
differential protection for wye-connected
generators and transformers against
line-to-ground faults near the neutral.
Of course, if the installation of ground
fault differential protection is feasible,
or ground sensor current transformers
are used, sensitive differential relaying
in resistance grounded system with
greater fault limitation is feasible.
In general, ground sensor current
transformers (zero sequence) do not
have high burden capacity. Resistance
grounded systems limit the circulating
currents of triple harmonics and limit
the damage at the point of fault. This
method of grounding is not suitable
for line-to-neutral connection of loads.
On medium voltage systems, 100%
cable insulation is rated for phase-to-
neutral voltage. If continued operation
with one phase faulted to ground is
desired, increased insulation thick-
ness is required. For 100% insulation,
fault clearance is recommended within
one minute; for 133% insulation, one
hour is acceptable; for indenite
operation, as long as necessary,
173% insulation is required.
Table 1.4-2. Characteristics of Grounding
Values of the coefcient of grounding (expressed as a percentage of maximum phase-to-phase

voltage) corresponding to various combinations of these ratios are shown in the ANSI C62.92
Appendix gures. Coefcient of grounding affects the selection of arrester ratings.
Ground-fault current in percentage of the three-phase short-circuit value.
Transient line-to-ground voltage, following the sudden initiation of a fault in per unit of the crest
of the prefault line-to-ground operating voltage for a simple, linear circuit.
In linear circuits, Class A1 limits the fundamental line-to-ground voltage on an unfaulted phase to
138% of the prefault voltage; Class A2 to less than 110%.
See ANSI 62.92 para. 7.3 and precautions given in application sections.
Usual isolated neutral (ungrounded) system for which the zero-sequence reactance is capacitive
(negative).
Same as NOTE (6) and refer to ANSI 62.92 para. 7.4. Each case should be treated on its own merit.
Under restriking arcing ground fault conditions (e.g., vacuum breaker interrupter operation),
this value can approach 500%.
Under arcing ground fault conditions, this value can easily reach 700%, but is essentially unlimited.
Grounding Classes
and Means
Ratios of Symmetrical
Component Parameters
Percent Fault
Current
Per Unit Transient
LG Voltage
A. Effectively
1. Effective
2. Very effective
X
0
/X
1
0-3
0-1
R
0
/X
1
0-1
0-0.1
R
0
/X
0
>60
>95
2
<1.5
B. Noneffectively
1. Inductance
a. Low inductance
b. High inductance
2. Resistance
a. Low resistance
b. High resistance
3. Inductance and resistance
4. Resonant
5. Ungrounded/capacitance
a. Range A
b. Range B
3-10
>10
0-10
>10
- to -40
-40 to 0
0-1
>100
<2
2
(-1)
>2
>25
<25
<25
<1
<10
<1
<8
>8
<2.3
2.73
<2.5
2.73
2.73
2.73
3
>3
Grounding Point
The most commonly used grounding
point is the neutral of the system or the
neutral point created by means of a
zigzag or a wye-broken delta grounding
transformer in a system that was oper-
ating as an ungrounded delta system.
In general, it is a good practice that all
source neutrals be grounded with the
same grounding impedance magnitude.
However, neutrals should not be tied
together to a single resistor. Where
one of the medium voltage sources is
the utility, their consent for impedance
grounding must be obtained.
The neutral impedance must have a
voltage rating at least equal to the rated
line-to-neutral voltage class of the sys-
tem. It must have at least a 10-second
rating equal to the maximum future
line-to-ground fault current and a
continuous rating to accommodate the
triple harmonics that may be present.
4. Low Voltage System: Grounding
Solidly grounded three-phase systems
(Figure 1.4-2) are usually wye-
connected, with the neutral point
grounded. Less common is the red-
leg or high-leg delta, a 240V system
supplied by some utilities with one
winding center-tapped to provide 120V
to ground for lighting. This 240V, three-
phase, four-wire system is used where
120V lighting load is small compared
to 240V power load, because the
installation is low in cost to the utility.
A corner-grounded three-phase delta
system is sometimes found, with
one phase grounded to stabilize all
voltages to ground. Better solutions
are available for new installations.
Figure 1.4-2. Solidly Grounded Systems
Phase B
Phase C
Phase A
Neutral
Center-Tapped (High-Leg) Delta
Grounded Wye
Phase C
Phase A
Phase B
Neutral
N
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C

Corner-Grounded Delta
1.4-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
066
Ungrounded systems (Figure 1.4-3)
can be either wye or delta, although
the ungrounded delta system is far
more common.
Figure 1.4-3. Ungrounded Systems
Resistance-grounded systems
(Figure 1.4-4) are simplest with a
wye connection, grounding the neutral
point directly through the resistor.
Delta systems can be grounded by
means of a zig-zag or other grounding
transformer. Wye broken delta
transformer banks may also be used.
Figure 1.4-4. Resistance-Grounded Systems
This derives a neutral point, which
can be either solidly or impedance-
grounded. If the grounding transformer
has sufcient capacity, the neutral
created can be solidly grounded and
used as part of a three-phase, four-wire
system. Most transformer-supplied
systems are either solidly grounded
or resistance grounded. Generator
neutrals are often grounded through
a reactor, to limit ground fault (zero
sequence) currents to values the
generator can withstand.
Selecting the Low Voltage System
Grounding Method
There is no one best distribution
system for all applications. In choosing
among solidly grounded, resistance
grounded, or ungrounded power
distribution, the characteristics of the
system must be weighed against the
requirements of power loads, lighting
loads, continuity of service, safety
and cost.
Under ground fault conditions, each
system behaves very differently. A
solidly grounded system produces
high fault currents, usually with arcing,
and the faulted circuit must be cleared
on the rst fault within a fraction of a
second to minimize damage. An
ungrounded system will pass limited
current into the rst ground fault
only the charging current of the system,
caused by the distributed capacitance
to ground of the system wiring and
equipment. In low voltage systems,
this is rarely more than 1 or 2A.
Therefore, on rst ground fault, an
ungrounded system can continue in
service, making it desirable where
power outages cannot be tolerated.
However, if the ground fault is
intermittent, sputtering or arcing, a
high voltageas much as 6 to 8 times
phase voltagecan be built up across
the system capacitance, from the
phase conductors to ground. Similar
high voltages can occur as a result
of resonance between system
capacitance and the inductances
of transformers and motors in the
system. The phase-to-phase voltage
is not affected. This high transient
phase-to-ground voltage can puncture
insulation at weak points, such as
motor windings, and is a frequent
cause of multiple motor failures on
ungrounded systems. Locating a rst
fault on an ungrounded system can
be difcult. If, before the rst fault is
cleared, a second ground fault occurs
on a different phase, even on a
different, remote feeder, it is a high-
current phase-to-ground-to-phase
fault, usually arcing, that can cause
severe damage if at least one of the
grounds is not cleared immediately.
If the second circuit is remote, enough
current may not ow to cause
protection to operate. This can leave
high voltages and stray currents on
structures and jeopardize personnel.
In general, where loads will be
connected line-to-neutral, solidly
grounded systems are used. High
resistance grounded systems are
used as substitutes for ungrounded
systems where high system
availability is required.
With one phase grounded, the voltage
to ground of the other two phases
rises 73%, to full phase-to-phase
voltage. In low voltage systems this
is not important, since conductors
are insulated for 600V.
A low voltage resistance grounded
system is normally grounded so that
the single line-to-ground fault current
exceeds the capacitive charging
current of the system. If data for the
charging current is not available, use
4050 ohm resistor in the neutral
of the transformer.
In commercial and institutional
installations, such as ofce buildings,
shopping centers, schools and hospitals,
lighting loads are often 50% or more
of the total load. In addition, a feeder
outage on rst ground fault is seldom
crucialeven in hospitals, that have
emergency power in critical areas. For
these reasons, a solidly grounded wye
distribution, with the neutral used for
lighting circuits, is usually the most
economical, effective and convenient
design. In some instances, it is an
NEC requirement.
In industrial installations, the effect
of a shutdown caused by a single
ground fault could be disastrous.
An interrupted process could cause
the loss of all the materials involved,
often ruin the process equipment
itself, and sometimes create extremely
dangerous situations for operating
personnel. On the other hand, lighting
is usually only a small fraction of the
total industrial electrical load. A solidly
grounded neutral circuit conductor
is not imperative and, when required,
can be obtained from inexpensive
lighting transformers.
Because of the ability to continue in
operation with one ground fault on
the system, many existing industrial
plants use ungrounded delta distribu-
tion. Today, new installations can have
all the advantages of service continuity
of the ungrounded delta, yet minimize
the problems of the system, such
as the difculty of locating the rst
ground fault, risk of damage from a
second ground fault, and damage
transient overvoltages. A high-
resistance grounded wye distribution
can continue in operation with a
ground fault on the system and will
not develop transient overvoltages.
Phase B
Phase A
Phase C

Ungrounded Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Phase C
Phase A
Phase B
N
Resistance-Grounded Wye

Phase C
Phase A
Phase B
R
N

Phase A
Phase B
Phase C

Delta With Derived Neutral Resistance-
Grounded Using Zig-Zag Transformer
R
N
1.4-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
067
And, because the ground point is
established, locating a ground fault is
less difcult than on an ungrounded
system especially when a pulsing
contactor design is applied. When
combined with sensitive ground-fault
protection, damage from a second
ground fault can be nearly eliminated.
Ungrounded delta systems can be
converted to high-resistance grounded
systems, using a zig-zag or other
grounding transformer to derive a
neutral, with similar benets, see
Tab 36. While the majority of
manufacturing plants use solidly
grounded systems, in many instances,
the high-resistance grounded distribu-
tion will be the most advantageous.
A ground fault normally occurs in one
of two ways: by accidental contact of
an energized conductor with normally
grounded metal, or as a result of
an insulation failure of an energized
conductor. When an insulation failure
occurs, the energized conductor
contacts normally noncurrent-carrying
grounded metal, which is bonded to
or part of the equipment grounding
conductor. In a solidly grounded
system, the fault current returns to the
source primarily along the equipment
grounding conductors, with a small
part using parallel paths such as build-
ing steel or piping. If the ground return
impedance was as low as that of the
circuit conductors, ground fault currents
would be high, and the normal phase
overcurrent protection would clear
them with little damage. Unfortunately,
the impedance of the ground return
path is usually higher, the fault itself
is usually arcing and the impedance
of the arc further reduces the fault
current. In a 480Y/277V system, the
voltage drop across the arc can be
from 70 to 140V. The resulting ground
fault current is rarely enough to cause
the phase overcurrent protection
device to open instantaneously and
prevent damage. Sometimes, the
ground fault is below the trip setting of
the protective device and it does not
trip at all until the fault escalates and
extensive damage is done. For these
reasons, low level ground protection
devices with minimum time delay
settings are required to rapidly clear
ground faults. This is emphasized by
the NEC requirement that a ground
fault relay on a service shall have a
maximum delay of one second for
faults of 3000A or more.
The NEC (Sec. 230.95) requires that
ground fault protection, set at no more
than 1200A, be provided for each service
disconnecting means rated 1000A or
more on solidly grounded wye services
of more than 150V to ground, but
not exceeding 600V phase-to-phase.
Practically, this makes ground fault
protection mandatory on 480Y/277V
services, but not on 208Y/120V services.
On a 208V system, the voltage to
ground is 120V. If a ground fault
occurs, the arc goes out at current
zero, and the voltage to ground is
often too low to cause it to restrike.
Therefore, arcing ground faults on
208V systems tend to be self-extin-
guishing. On a 480V system, with 277V
to ground, restrike usually takes place
after current zero, and the arc tends to
be self-sustaining, causing severe and
increasing damage, until the fault is
cleared by a protective device.
The NEC requires ground fault
protection on the service disconnecting
means. This protection works so fast
that for ground faults on feeders, or
even branch circuits, it will often open
the service disconnect before the
feeder or branch circuit overcurrent
device can operate. This is highly
undesirable, and in the NEC (230.95)
a Fine Print Note (FPN) states that
additional ground fault protective
equipment will be needed on feeders
and branch circuits where maximum
continuity of electric service is neces-
sary. Unless it is acceptable to discon-
nect the entire service on a ground
fault almost anywhere in the system,
such additional stages of ground
fault protection must be provided.
At least two stages of protection are
mandatory in health care facilities
(NEC Sec. 517.17).
Overcurrent protection is designed to
protect conductors and equipment
against currents that exceed their
ampacity or rating under prescribed
time values. An overcurrent can result
from an overload, short circuit or (high
level) ground fault condition. When
currents ow outside the normal
current path to ground, supplementary
ground fault protection equipment will
be required to sense low-level ground
fault currents and initiate the protection
required. Normal phase overcurrent
protection devices provide no protection
against low-level ground faults.
There are three basic means of sensing
ground faults. The most simple and
direct method is the ground return
method as illustrated in Figure 1.4-5.
This sensing method is based on the fact
that all currents supplied by a trans-
former must return to that transformer.
Figure 1.4-5. Ground Return Sensing Method
When an energized conductor faults
to grounded metal, the fault current
returns along the ground return path to
the neutral of the source transformer.
This path includes the main bonding
jumper as shown in Figure 1.4-5.
A current sensor on this conductor
(which can be a conventional bar-type
or window type CT) will respond to
ground fault currents only. Normal
neutral currents resulting from
unbalanced loads will return along
the neutral conductor and will not be
detected by the ground return sensor.
This is an inexpensive method of sensing
ground faults where protection per
NEC (230.95) is desired. For it to
operate properly, the neutral must be
grounded in only one place as indicated
in Figure 1.4-5. In many installations,
the servicing utility grounds the neutral
at the transformer and additional
grounding is required in the service
equipment per NEC (250.24(A)(2)).
In such cases, and others including
multiple source with multiple, inter-
connected neutral ground points,
residual or zero sequence ground
sensing methods should be employed.
A second method of detecting ground
faults involves the use of a zero
sequence sensing method, as illus-
trated in Figure 1.4-6. This sensing
method requires a single, specially
designed sensor either of a toroidal
or rectangular shaped conguration.
This core balance current transformer
surrounds all the phase and neutral
conductors in a typical three-phase,
four-wire distribution system. The
sensing method is based on the fact
that the vectorial sum of the phase and
neutral currents in any distribution
circuit will equal zero unless a ground
fault condition exists downstream from
the sensor. All currents that ow only
in the circuit conductors, including
balanced or unbalanced phase-to-phase
and phase-to-neutral normal or fault
currents, and harmonic currents, will
result in zero sensor output.
Main
GFR
Neutral
Typical
Feeder
Sensor
Main Bonding
Jumper
Equipment
Grounding
Conductor
Grounding
Electrode
Conductor
Typical
4W Load
Service
Transformer
Ground Bus
1.4-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
068
However, should any conductor become
grounded, the fault current will return
along the ground pathnot the normal
circuit conductorsand the sensor will
have an unbalanced magnetic ux
condition, and a sensor output will
be generated to actuate the ground
fault relay.
Figure 1.4-6. Zero Sequence Sensing Method
Zero sequence sensors are available
with various window openings for
circuits with small or large conductors,
and even with large rectangular win-
dows to t over bus bars or multiple
large size conductors in parallel. Some
sensors have split cores for installation
over existing conductors without
disturbing the connections.
This method of sensing ground faults
can be employed on the main discon-
nect where protection per NEC (230.95)
is desired. It can also be easily employed
in multi-tier systems where additional
levels of ground fault protection are
desired for added service continuity.
Additional grounding points may be
employed upstream of the sensor, but
not on the load side.
Ground fault protection employing
ground return or zero sequence sensing
methods can be accomplished by the
use of separate ground fault relays
(GFRs) and disconnects equipped with
standard shunt trip devices or by circuit
breakers with integral ground fault
protection with external connections
arranged for these modes of sensing. In
some cases, a reliable source of control
power is needed.
The third basic method of detecting
ground faults involves the use of
multiple current sensors connected in
a residual sensing method as illustrated
in Figure 1.4-7. This is a very common
sensing method used with circuit break-
ers equipped with electronic trip units,
current sensors and integral ground
fault protection. The three-phase sensors
are required for normal phase overcur-
rent protection. Ground fault sensing
is obtained with the addition of an
identically rated sensor mounted on the
Zero
Sequence
Sensor
Main
Neutral
Typical
Feeder
Alternate
Sensor
Location
Typical
4W Load
GFR
neutral. In a residual sensing scheme,
the relationship of the polarity markings
as noted by the X on each sensor
is critical. Because the vectorial sum of
the currents in all the conductors will
total zero under normal, non-ground
faulted conditions, it is imperative
that proper polarity connections are
employed to reect this condition.
Figure 1.4-7. Residual Sensing Method
As with the zero sequence sensing
method, the resultant residual sensor
output to the ground fault relay or
integral ground fault tripping circuit
will be zero if all currents ow only
in the circuit conductors. Should a
ground fault occur, the current from
the faulted conductor will return along
the ground path, rather than on the
other circuit conductors, and the resid-
ual sum of the sensor outputs will not
be zero. When the level of ground fault
current exceeds the pre-set current
and time delay settings, a ground
fault tripping action will be initiated.
This method of sensing ground faults
can be economically applied on main
service disconnects where circuit break-
ers with integral ground fault protection
are provided. It can be used in protec-
tion schemes per NEC (230.95) or in
multi-tier schemes where additional
desired for added service continuity.
Additional grounding points may be
employed upstream of the residual
sensors, but not on the load side.
Both the zero sequence and
residual sensing methods have
been commonly referred to as
vectorial summation methods.
Most distribution systems can use
either of the three sensing methods
exclusively or a combination of the
sensing methods depending upon
the complexity of the system and
the degree of service continuity and
selective coordination desired.
Different methods will be required
depending upon the number of supply
sources, and the number and location
of system grounding points.
As an example, one of the more
frequently used systems where
continuity of service to critical loads
is a factor is the dual source system
illustrated in Figure 1.4-8. This system
uses tie-point grounding as permitted
under NEC Sec. 250.24(A)(3). The use
of this grounding method is limited
to services that are dual fed (double-
ended) in a common enclosure or
grouped together in separate enclosures,
employing a secondary tie.
This scheme uses individual sensors
connected in ground return fashion.
Under tie breaker closed operating
conditions, either the M1 sensor or
M2 sensor could see neutral unbalance
currents and possibly initiate an
improper tripping operation. However,
with the polarity arrangements of
these two sensors along with the tie
breaker auxiliary switch (T/a) and
interconnections as shown, this
possibility is eliminated.
Figure 1.4-8. Dual Source SystemSingle Point Grounding
GFR
Typical
4W Load
Sensor
Polarity
Marks
Neutral
Typical
Feeder
Main
Residual
Sensors
Typical
4-Wire
Feeder
4-Wire
Load
Neutral
A, B, C
Power
Transformer
Power
Transformer
4-Wire
Load
Typical
4-Wire
Feeder
Neutral
A, B, C
33-
52-T
52-T
a
52-T
a
Tie Bkr.
52-T
Neutral Sensor
Main Bkr. 52-2
Neutral Sensor
Tie Bkr. 52-T
Neutral Sensor
Main Bkr. 52-1
Digitrip
Main Bkr.
52-1
Main
Bkr.
52-2
Main
Bkr.
52-1
Digitrip
Digitrip
Main Bkr.
52-2 Digitrip
B4 B5
B5 B4 B4 B5 B4 B5
B4 B5
( )B4
( )B5
M
1
N
M
1
G
M
2
G
M
2
N
T
G
T
N
( )B4
( )B5
Digitrip
Main Bkr.
52-2
1.4-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
069
Selective ground fault tripping coordi-
nation between the tie breaker and the
two main circuit breakers is achieved
by pre-set current pickup and time
delay settings between devices GFR/1,
GFR/2 and GFR/T.
The advantages of increased service
continuity offered by this system can
only be effectively used if additional
added on each downstream feeder.
Some users prefer individual grounding
of the transformer neutrals. In such
cases, a partial differential ground
fault scheme should be used for the
mains and tie breaker.
An example of a residual partial differ-
ential scheme is shown in Figure 1.4-9.
The scheme typically relies upon the
vector sum of at least two neutral
sensors in combination with each
breakers three-phase sensors. To
reduce the complexity of the drawing,
each of the breakers three-phase
sensors have not been shown. It is
absolutely critical that the sensors
polarities are supplied as shown, the
neutral sensor ratings of the mains and
tie are the same, and that there are
no other grounds on the neutral bus
made downstream of points shown.
An innite number of ground fault
protection schemes can be developed
depending upon the number of alternate
sources, the number of grounding points
and system interconnections involved.
Depending upon the individual system
conguration, either mode of sensing
or a combination of all types may be
employed to accomplish the desired
end results.
Because the NEC (230.95) limits the
maximum setting of the ground fault
protection used on service equipment
to 1200A (and timed tripping at 3000A
for one second), to prevent tripping
of the main service disconnect on a
feeder ground fault, ground fault
protection must be provided on all the
feeders. To maintain maximum service
continuity, more than two levels (zones)
of ground fault protection will be
required, so that ground fault outages
can be localized and service interrup-
tion minimized. To obtain selectivity
between different levels of ground
fault relays, time delay settings should
be employed with the GFR furthest
downstream having the minimum
time delay. This will allow the GFR
nearest the fault to operate rst.
With several levels of protection, this
will reduce the level of protection for
faults within the upstream GFR zones.
Zone interlocking was developed for
GFRs to overcome this problem.
GFRs (or circuit breakers with integral
ground fault protection) with zone
interlocking are coordinated in a
system to operate in a time delayed
mode for ground faults occurring most
remote from the source. However, this
time delayed mode is only actuated
when the GFR next upstream from the
fault sends a restraining signal to the
upstream GFRs. The absence of a
restraining signal from a downstream
Figure 1.4-9. Dual Source SystemMultiple Point Grounding
Trip Unit
Main Breaker
52-1
Trip Unit
Tie Breaker
52-T
Power
Transformer
52-T
a
52-2
a
Neutral Sensor
Tie Breaker 52-T
X
X
Typical
Four-Wire
Feeder
T
r
i
p

U
n
i
t
Four-Wire Load
X
X
52-1
a
Neutral Neutral
Tie Breaker
52-T
Neutral
Sensor Main
Breaker 52-1
X
X
X
X
Main
Breaker
52-1
Phase A,
Phase B,
Phase C
Trip Unit
Main Breaker
52-2
Typical
Four-Wire
Feeder
T
r
i
p

U
n
i
t
Four-Wire Load
X
X
Phase A,
Phase B,
Phase C
Power
Transformer
Neutral
Sensor Main
Breaker 52-2
Main
Breaker
52-2
GFR is an indication that any occurring
ground fault is within the zone of the
GFR next upstream from the fault and
that device will operate instantaneously
to clear the fault with minimum dam-
age and maximum service continuity.
This operating mode permits all GFRs
to operate instantaneously for a fault
within their zone and still provide
complete selectivity between zones.
The National Electrical Manufacturers
Association (NEMA) states, in their
application guide for ground fault
protection, that zone interlocking is
necessary to minimize damage from
ground faults. A two-wire connection
is required to carry the restraining
signal from the GFRs in one zone to
the GFRs in the next zone.
Circuit breakers with integral ground
fault protection and standard circuit
breakers with shunt trips activated
by the ground fault relay are ideal for
ground fault protection. Many fused
switches over 1200A, and Eaton Type
FDP fusible switches with ratings from
400 to 1200A, are listed by UL as suitable
for ground fault protection. Fusible
switches so listed must be equipped
with a shunt trip, and be able to
open safely on faults up to 12 times
their rating.
Power distribution systems differ
widely from each other, depending
upon the requirements of each user,
and total system overcurrent protec-
tion, including ground fault currents,
must be individually designed to meet
these needs. Experienced and knowl-
edgeable engineers must consider the
power sources (utility or on-site), the
effects of outages and costs of down-
time, safety for people and equipment,
initial and lifecycle costs, and many
other factors. They must apply protec-
tive devices, analyzing the time-current
characteristics, fault interrupting
capacity, and selectivity and coordina-
tion methods to provide the most safe
and cost-effective distribution system.
Further Information
PRSC-4ESystem Neutral Ground-
ing and Ground Fault Protection
(ABB Publication)
PB 2.2NEMA Application Guide
for Ground Fault Protective Devices
for Equipment
IEEE Standard 142Grounding of
Industrial and Commercial Power
Systems (Green Book)
IEEE Emerald Book (Standard 1100)
UL 96A, Installation Requirements
for Lightning Protection Systems
1.4-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
070
Lightning and Surge Protection
Physical protection of buildings
from direct damage from lightning
is beyond the scope of this section.
Requirements will vary with geographic
location, building type and environ-
ment, and many other factors (see
IEEE/ANSI Standard 142, Grounding
of Industrial and Commercial Power
Systems). Any lightning protection
system must be grounded, and the
lightning protection ground must be
bonded to the electrical equipment
grounding system.
Grounding Electrodes
At some point, the equipment and
system grounds must be connected
to the earth by means of a grounding
electrode system.
Outdoor substations usually use a
ground grid, consisting of a number of
ground rods driven into the earth and
bonded together by buried copper
conductors. The required grounding
electrode system for a building is
spelled out in the NEC Article 250.
The preferred grounding electrode
is a metal underground water pipe in
direct contact with the earth for at least
10 ft (3m). However, because under-
ground water piping is often plastic
outside the building, or may later be
replaced by plastic piping, the NEC
requires this electrode to be supple-
mented by and bonded to at least one
other grounding electrode, such as
the effectively grounded metal frame
of the building, a concrete-encased
electrode, a copper conductor ground
ring encircling the building, or a made
electrode such as one or more driven
ground rods or a buried plate. Where
any of these electrodes are present,
they must be bonded together into
one grounding electrode system.
One of the most effective grounding
electrodes is the concrete-encased
electrode, sometimes called the Ufer
ground, named after the man who
developed it. It consists of at least
20 ft (6m) of steel reinforcing bars or
rods not less than 1/2 inches (12.7 mm)
in diameter, or at least 20 ft (6m) of
bare copper conductor, size No. 4 AWG
or larger, encased in at least 2 inches
(50.8 mm) of concrete. It must be
located within and near the bottom of
a concrete foundation or footing that
is in direct contact with the earth. Tests
have shown this electrode to provide
a low-resistance earth ground even in
poor soil conditions.
The electrical distribution system and
equipment ground must be connected
to this grounding electrode system by
a grounding electrode conductor. All
other grounding electrodes, such as
those for the lightning protection sys-
tem, the telephone system, television
antenna and cable TV system grounds,
and computer systems, must be bonded
to this grounding electrode system.
Medium Voltage Equipment Surge
Protection Considerations
Transformers
If the voltage withstand/BIL rating of
the transformer is less than that of the
switchgear feeding the transformer,
surge protection is recommended at
the transformer terminals, in line with
established practices. In addition,
consideration should be given to using
surge arresters and/or surge capacitors
for transformers having equal or
greater withstand/BIL ratings than that
of the switchgear feeding the trans-
former for distribution systems where
reected voltage waves and/or reso-
nant conditions may occur. Typically
incoming voltage surges are reected
at the transformer primary terminals
(because of the change in impedance)
resulting in voltages at the ends of the
transformer primary terminals/wind-
ings of up to two times the incoming
voltage wave. System capacitance and
inductance values combined with the
transformer impedance values can
cause resonant conditions resulting
in amplied reected waves. Surge
arresters/capacitors when required,
should be located as close to the trans-
former primary terminals as practical.
Motors
Surge capacitors and, where appropri-
ate, surge arresters should be applied
at the motor terminals.
Generators
Surge capacitors and station
class surge arresters at the machine
terminals.
Surge Protection
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad switch-
gear is applied over a broad range of
circuits, and is one of the many types
of equipment in the total system. The
distribution system can be subject to
voltage transients caused by lighting
or switching surges.
Recognizing that distribution system
can be subject to voltage transients
caused by lighting or switching, the
industry has developed standards to
provide guidelines for surge protection
of electrical equipment. Those guide-
lines should be used in design and
protection of electrical distribution
systems independent of the circuit
breaker interrupting medium. The
industry standards are:
ANSI C62
Guides and Standards for Surge
Protection
IEEE 242Buff Book
IEEE Recommended Practice for
Protection and Coordination of
Systems
IEEE 141Red Book
Recommended Practice for
Electric Power Distribution for
Industrial Plants
IEEE C37.20.2
Standards for Metal-Clad Switchgear
Eatons medium voltage metal-clad
and metal-enclosed switchgear that
uses vacuum circuit breakers is applied
over a broad range of circuits. It is one
of the many types of equipment in the
total distribution system. Whenever a
switching device is opened or closed,
certain interactions of the power
system elements with the switching
device can cause high frequency voltage
transients in the system. Due to the
wide range of applications and variety
of ratings used for different elements
in the power systems, a given circuit
may or may not require surge protec-
tion. Therefore, Eaton does not include
surge protection as standard with its
metal-clad or metal-enclosed medium
voltage switchgear. The user exercises
the options as to the type and extent
of the surge protection necessary
depending on the individual circuit
characteristics and cost considerations.
The following are Eatons recommen-
dations for surge protection of medium
voltage equipment. Please note these
recommendations are valid when
using Eatons vacuum breakers only.
1.4-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
071
Surge Protection Recommendations
Note: The abbreviation ZORC
used in the
text below refers to Surge Protection Device
manufactured by Strike Technology (Pty)
Ltd. An equivalent device offered by other
manufacturers, such as Type EHZ by ABB,
and Protec Z by Northern Technologies SA
can also be used.
1. For circuits exposed to lightning,
surge arresters should be applied
in line with Industry standard
practices.
2. Transformers
a. Close-Coupled to medium
voltage primary breaker:
Provide transients surge pro-
tection, such as Surge Arrester
in parallel with RC Snubber, or
ZORC. The surge protection
device selected should be
located and connected at the
transformer primary terminals
or it can be located inside the
switchgear and connected on
the transformer side of the
primary breaker.
b. Cable-Connected to medium
Provide transient surge protec-
tion, such as Surge Arrester in
parallel with RC Snubber, or
ZORC for transformers con-
nected by cables with lengths
up to 75 feet. The surge protec-
tion device should be located
and connected at the trans-
former terminals. No surge
protection is needed for trans-
formers with lightning impulse
withstand ratings equal to that
of the switchgear and connected
to the switchgear by cables at
least 75 feet or longer. For
transformers with lower BIL,
provide surge arrester in parallel
with RC Snubber or ZORC.
RC Snubber and/or ZORC damp
internal transformer resonance:
The natural frequency of transformer
windings can under some circumstances
be excited to resonate. Transformer
windings in resonance can produce
elevated internal voltages that produce
insulation damage or failure. An RC
Snubber or a ZORC applied at the
transformer terminals as indicated
above can damp internal winding
resonance and prevent the production
of damaging elevated internal voltages.
This is typically required where rectiers,
UPS or similar electronic equipment is
on the transformer secondary.
3. Arc-Furnace Transformers
Provide Surge Arrester in parallel
with RC Snubber, or ZORC at the
transformer terminals.
4. MotorsProvide Surge Arrester in
parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC
at the motor terminals. For those
motors using VFDs, surge protec-
tion should be applied and pre-
cede the VFD devices as well.
5. GeneratorsProvide station class
Surge Arrester in parallel with RC
Snubber, or ZORC at the generator
terminals.
6. Capacitor SwitchingNo surge
protection is required. Make sure
that the capacitors lightning
impulse withstand rating is equal
to that of the switchgear.
7. Shunt Reactor Switching
reactor terminals.
8. Motor Starting Reactors or Reduced
Voltage Auto-Transformers
reactor or RVAT terminals.
9. Switching Underground Cables
Surge protection not needed.
Types of Surge Protection Devices
Generally surge protective devices
should be located as closely as possible
to the circuit component(s) that require
protection from the transients, and
connected directly to the terminals of
the component with conductors that
are as short and at as possible to
minimize the inductance. It is also
important that surge protection devices
should be properly grounded for
effectively shunting high frequency
transients to ground.
Figure 1.4-10. Surge Protection Devices
1.4-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
072
Surge Arresters
The modern metal-oxide surge
arresters are recommended because
this latest advance in arrester design
ensures better performance and high
reliability of surge protection schemes.
Manufacturers technical data must
be consulted for correct application
of a given type of surge arrester.
Notice that published arrester MCOV
(Maximum Continuous Operating
Voltage) ratings are based on 40 or
45C ambient temperature. In general,
the following guidelines are recom-
mended for arrester selections, when
installed inside Eatons medium
voltage switchgear:
A. Solidly Grounded Systems:
Arrester MCOV rating should be
equal to 1.05 x V
LL
/(1.732 x T),
where V
LL
is nominal line-to-line
service voltage, 1.05 factor allows
for +5% voltage variation above
the nominal voltage according
to ANSI C84.1, and T is derating
factor to allow for operation at
55C switchgear ambient, which
should be obtained from the
arrester manufacturer for the type
of arrester under consideration.
Typical values of T are: 0.946 to 1.0.
B. Low Resistant Grounded Systems
(systems grounded through
resistor rated for 10 seconds):
Arrester 10-second MCOV capability
at 60C, which is obtained from
manufacturers data, should be
equal to 1.05 x V
LL
, where V
LL
is
nominal line-to-line service voltage,
and 1.05 factor allows for +5%
voltage variation above the
nominal voltage.
C. Ungrounded or Systems
Grounded through impedance
other than 10-second resistor:
equal to 1.05 x V
LL
/T, where V
LL

and T are as dened above.
Refer to Table 1.4-3 for recommended
ratings for metal-oxide surge arresters
that are sized in accordance with the
above guidelines, when located in
Eatons switchgear.
Surge Capacitors
Metal-oxide surge arresters limit the
magnitude of prospective surge over-
voltage, but are ineffective in control-
ling its rate of rise. Specially designed
surge capacitors with low internal
inductance are used to limit the rate of
rise of this surge overvoltage to protect
turn-to-turn insulation. Recommended
values for surge capacitors are: 0.5 f
on 5 and 7.5 kV, 0.25 f on 15 kV, and
0.13 f on systems operating at 24 kV
and higher.
RC Snubber
A RC Snubber device consists of a
non-inductive resistor R sized to match
surge impedance of the load cables,
typically 20 to 30 ohms, and connected
in series with a Surge Capacitor C. The
Surge Capacitor is typically sized to be
0.15 to 0.25 microfarad. Under normal
operating conditions, impedance of
the capacitor is very high, effectively
isolating the resistor R from the
system at normal power frequencies,
and minimizing heat dissipation during
normal operation. Under high frequency
transient conditions, the capacitor
offers very low impedance, thus effec-
tively inserting the resistor R in the
power system as cable terminating
resistor, thus minimizing reection of
the steep wave-fronts of the voltage
transients and prevents voltage dou-
bling of the traveling wave. The RC
Snubber provides protection against
high frequency transients by absorb-
ing and damping and the transients.
Please note RC Snubber is most effec-
tive in mitigating fast-rising transient
voltages, and in attenuating reections
and resonances before they have a
chance to build up, but does not limit
the peak magnitude of the transient.
Therefore, the RC Snubber alone may
not provide adequate protection. To
limit peak magnitude of the transient,
application of surge arrester should
also be considered.
ZORC
A ZORC device consists of parallel
combination of Resistor (R) and Zinc
Oxide Voltage Suppressor (ZnO), con-
nected in series with a Surge Capacitor.
The resistor R is sized to match surge
impedance of the load cables, typically
20 to 30 ohms. The ZnO is a gapless
metal-oxide nonlinear arrester, set
to trigger at 1 to 2 PU voltage, where
1 PU = 1.412*(V
L-L
/1.732). The Surge
Capacitor is typically sized to be 0.15
to 0.25 microfarad. As with RC Snubber,
under normal operating conditions,
impedance of the capacitor is very
high, effectively isolating the resistor
R and ZnO from the system at normal
power frequencies, and minimizing
heat dissipation during normal opera-
tion. Under high frequency transient
conditions, the capacitor offers very
low impedance, thus effectively
inserting the resistor R and ZnO in
the power system as cable terminating
network, thus minimizing reection of
bling of the traveling wave. The ZnO
element limits the peak voltage magni-
tudes. The combined effects of R, ZnO,
and Capacitor of the ZORC device
provides optimum protection against
high frequency transients by absorbing,
damping, and by limiting the peak
amplitude of the voltage wave-fronts.
Please note that the ZORC is not a
lightning protection device. If lightning
can occur or be induced in the electrical
system, a properly rated and applied
surge arrester must precede the ZORC.
1.4-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
073
Surge Protection Summary
Minimum protection: Surge Arrester
for protection from high overvoltage
peaks, or Surge Capacitor for protec-
tion from fast-rising transient. Please
note that the surge arresters or surge
capacitor alone may not provide
adequate surge protection from
escalating voltages caused by circuit
resonance. Note that when applying
surge capacitors on both sides of a
circuit breaker, surge capacitor on
one side of the breaker must be
RC Snubber or ZORC, to mitigate
possible virtual current chopping.
Good protection: Surge Arrester
in parallel with Surge Capacitor for
protection from high overvoltage
peaks and fast rising transient. This
option may not provide adequate
surge protection from escalating
voltages caused by circuit resonance.
When applying surge capacitors on
both sides of a circuit breaker, surge
capacitor on one side of the breaker
must be RC Snubber or ZORC,
to mitigate possible virtual
current chopping.
Better protection: RC Snubber in
parallel with Surge Arrester for
protection from high frequency
transients and voltage peaks.
Best protection: ZORC, plus proper
surge arrester preceding ZORC where
needed for protection against lightning.
ZORC provides protection from high
frequency voltage transients and limits
peak magnitude of the transient to
1 to 2 PU (see ZORC description on
Page 1.4-16 for more detail). Surge
arrester provides protection from
higher voltage peaks resulting from
lightning surges.
Further Information
IEEE/ANSI Standard 142Grounding
Systems (Green Book)
IEEE Standard 241Electric Power
Systems in Commercial Buildings
(Gray Book)
IEEE Standard 141Electric Power
Distribution for Industrial Plants
(Red Book)
Table 1.4-3. Surge Arrester SelectionsRecommended Ratings
Service
Voltage
Line-to-Line
kV
Distribution Class Arresters Station Class Arresters
Solidly
Grounded System
Low Resistance
Grounded System
High Resistance or
Ungrounded System
Solidly
Grounded System
Low Resistance
Grounded System
High Resistance or
Ungrounded System
Arrester Ratings kV Arrester Ratings kV
Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV
2.30
2.40
3.30
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
4.00
4.16
4.76
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
4.80
6.60
6.90
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.20
8.32
8.40
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
11.00
11.50
12.00
9
9
10
7.65
7.65
8.40
9
10
10
7.65
8.40
8.40
15
18
18
12.70
15.30
15.30
9
9
10
7.65
7.65
8.40
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
15
18
18
12.70
15.30
15.30
12.47
13.20
13.80
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
12
12
12
10.20
10.20
10.20
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
12
12
15
10.20
10.20
12.70
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
14.40
18.00
20.78
12
15
18
10.20
12.70
15.30
12
15
18
10.20
12.70
15.30
21
27
30
17.00
22.00
24.40
12
15
18
10.20
12.70
15.30
15
18
21
12.70
15.30
17.00
21
27
30
17.00
22.00
24.40
22.00
22.86
23.00
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
18
21
21
15.30
17.00
17.00
30
24.40
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
21
24
24
17.00
19.50
19.50
30
36
36
24.40
29.00
29.00
24.94
25.80
26.40
21
21
21
17.00
17.00
17.00
24
24
24
19.50
19.50
19.50
21
21
21
17.00
17.00
17.00
24
24
27
19.50
19.50
22.00
36
36
39
29.00
29.00
31.50
33.00
34.50
38.00
27
30
30
22.00
24.40
24.40
30
30
24.40
24.40
27
30
30
22.00
24.40
24.40
36
36
36
29.00
29.00
29.00
45
48
36.50
39.00
1.4-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Power Quality
074
Power Quality Terms
Technical Overview
Introduction
Sensitive electronic loads deployed
today by users require strict require-
ments for the quality of power delivered
to loads.
For electronic equipment, power
disturbances are dened in terms of
amplitude and duration by the elec-
tronic equipment operating envelope.
Electronic loads may be damaged
and disrupted, with shortened life
expectancy, by disturbances.
The proliferation of computers, variable
frequency motor drives, UPS systems
and other electronically controlled
equipment is placing a greater demand
on power producers for a disturbance-
free source of power. Not only do these
types of equipment require quality
power for proper operation; many
times, these types of equipment are
also the sources of power disturbances
that corrupt the quality of power in a
given facility.
Power quality is dened according
to IEEE Standard 1100 as the concept
of powering and grounding electronic
equipment in a manner that is suitable
to the operation of that equipment.
IEEE Standard 1159 notes that within
the industry, alternate denitions or
interpretations of power quality have
been used, reecting different points
of view.
In addressing power quality problems
at an existing site, or in the design
stages of a new building, engineers
need to specify different services or
mitigating technologies. The lowest
cost and highest value solution is
to selectively apply a combination
of different products and services
as follows:
Key services/technologies in the
power quality industry:
Power quality surveys, analysis
and studies
Power monitoring
Grounding products and services
Surge protection
Voltage regulation
Harmonic solutions
Lightning protection (ground rods,
hardware, etc.)
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
or motor-generator (M-G) set
Dening the Problem
Power quality problems can be resolved
in three ways: by reducing the variations
in the power supply (power distur-
bances), by improving the load equip-
ments tolerance to those variations, or
by inserting some interface equipment
(known as power conditioning equip-
ment) between the electrical supply
and the sensitive load(s) to improve the
compatibility of the two. Practicality
and cost usually determine the extent
to which each option is used.
Many methods are used to dene
power quality problems. For example,
one option is a thorough on-site
investigation, which includes inspecting
wiring and grounding for errors,
monitoring the power supply for
power disturbances, investigating
equipment sensitivity to power distur-
bances, and determining the load
disruption and consequential effects
(costs), if any. In this way, the power
quality problem can be dened,
alternative solutions developed,
and optimal solution chosen.
Before applying power-conditioning
equipment to solve power quality
problems, the site should be checked
for wiring and grounding problems.
Sometimes, correcting a relatively
inexpensive wiring error, such as a
loose connection or a reversed neutral
and ground wire, can avoid a more
expensive power conditioning solution.
Sometimes this approach is not practical
because of limitations in time; expense
is not justied for smaller installations;
monitoring for power disturbances
may be needed over an extended
period of time to capture infrequent
disturbances; the exact sensitivities of
the load equipment may be unknown
and difcult to determine; and nally,
the investigative approach tends to
solve only observed problems. Thus
unobserved or potential problems
may not be considered in the solution.
For instance, when planning a new
facility, there is no site to investigate.
Therefore, power quality solutions are
often implemented to solve potential
or perceived problems on a preventive
basis instead of a thorough on-site
investigation.
Another option is to buy power condi-
tioning equipment to correct any and
all perceived power quality problems
without any on-site investigation.
Power Quality Terms
Power disturbance: Any deviation
from the nominal value (or from some
selected thresholds based on load
tolerance) of the input AC power
characteristics.
Total harmonic distortion or distortion
factor: The ratio of the root-mean-
square of the harmonic content to the
root-mean-square of the fundamental
quantity, expressed as a percentage
of the fundamental.
Crest factor: Ratio between the
peak value (crest) and rms value of
a periodic waveform.
Apparent (total) power factor: The
ratio of the total power input in watts
to the total volt-ampere input.
Sag: An rms reduction in the AC
voltage, at the power frequency, for
the duration from a half-cycle to a few
seconds. An undervoltage would have
a duration greater than several seconds.
Interruption: The complete loss of
voltage for a time period.
Transient: A sub-cycle disturbance
in the AC waveform that is evidenced
by a sharp brief discontinuity of the
waveform. May be of either polarity
and may be additive to or subtractive
from the nominal waveform.
Surge or impulse: See transient.
Noise: Unwanted electrical signals
that produce undesirable effects
in the circuits of control systems
in which they occur.
Common-mode noise: The noise
voltage that appears equally and in
phase from each current-carrying
conductor to ground.
Normal-mode noise: Noise signals
measurable between or among active
circuit conductors feeding the subject
load, but not between the equipment
grounding conductor or associated
signal reference structure and the active
circuit conductors.
1.4-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Power Quality
075
Methodology for Ensuring Effective
Power Quality to Electronic Loads
The power quality pyramid is an
effective guide for addressing power
quality problems at an existing facility.
The framework is also effective for
specifying engineers who are design-
ing a new facility. Power quality starts
with grounding (the base of the
pyramid) and then moves upward
to address the potential issues. This
simple, yet proven methodology,
will provide the most cost-effective
approach. As we move higher up the
pyramid, the cost per kVA of mitigating
potential problems increase and the
quality of the power increases (refer
to Figure 1.4-11).
Figure 1.4-11. Power Quality Pyramid
1. Grounding
Grounding represents the foundation
of a reliable power distribution
system. Grounding and wiring
problems can be the cause of up to
80% of all power quality problems.
All other forms of power quality
solutions are dependent upon good
grounding procedures.
5. Uninterruptible Power Supply
(UPS, Gen. Sets, etc.)
4. Harmonic Distortion
3. Voltage Regulation
2. Surge Protection
1. Grounding
C
o
s
t

P
e
r

k
V
A
The proliferation of communication
and computer network systems
has increased the need for proper
grounding and wiring of AC and data/
communication lines. In addition to
reviewing AC grounding and bonding
practices, it is necessary to prevent
ground loops from affecting the signal
reference point.
2. Surge Protection
Surge protection devices (SPDs)
are recommended as the next stage
power quality solutions. NFPA,
UL 96A, IEEE Emerald Book and
equipment manufacturers recommend
the use of surge protectors. The
SPD shunt short duration voltage
disturbances to ground, thereby
preventing the surge from affecting
electronic loads. When installed as
part of the facility-wide design, SPDs
are cost-effective compared to all
other solutions (on a $/kVA basis).
The IEEE Emerald Book recommends
the use of a two-stage protection
concept. For large surge currents,
diversion is best accomplished in
two stages: the rst diversion should
be performed at the service entrance
to the building. Then, any residual
voltage resulting from the action
can be dealt with by a second
protective device at the power
panel of the computer room
(or other critical loads).
The benet of implementing cascaded
network protection is shown in
Figure 1.4-12. Combined, the two
stages of protection at the service
entrance and branch panel locations
reduce the IEEE 62.41 recommended
test wave (C320 kV, 10 kA) to less than
200V voltage, a harmless disturbance
level for 120V rated sensitive loads.
If only building entrance feeder
protection were provided, the let-
through voltage will be approximately
950V in a 277/480V system exposed
to induced lightning surges. This
level of let-through voltage can cause
degradation or physical damage of
most electronic loads.
Wherever possible, consultants,
speciers and application engineers
should ensure similar loads are fed
from the same source. In this way,
disturbance-generating loads are
separated from electronic circuits
affected by power disturbances. For
example, motor loads, HVAC systems
and other linear loads should be
separated from the sensitive process
control and computer systems.
The most effective and economic
solution for protecting a large number
of loads is to install parallel SPDs at
the building service entrance feeder
and panelboard locations. This reduces
the cost of protection for multiple
sensitive loads.
Figure 1.4-12. Cascaded Network Protection
Inputhigh energy
transient disturbance; IEEE Category
C3 Impulse 20,000V; 10,000A
Two stage (cascade
approach) achieves best
possible protection (less
than 200V at Stage 2)
Best achievable
performance with single SPD
at main panel (950V, at Stage 1)
25 uS 50 uS
TIME (MICROSECONDS)
20,000V
800V
400V
0
CP
SPD
SPD
480V 120/208V
Stage 1 Protection
(Service Entrance) Stage 2 Protection
(Branch Location)
Computer or
Sensitive
Loads
System Test Parameters:
IEEE C62.41[10] and C62.45 [10]
test procedures using category;
480V main entrance panels;
100 ft (30m) of three-phase wire;
480/208V distribution transformer;
and 208V branch panel.
= SPD
P
E
A
K

V
O
L
T
A
G
E
1.4-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Power Quality
076
The recommended system approach
for installing SPDs is summarized in
Figure 1.4-13.
Figure 1.4-13. System Approach for Installing SPDs
There may be specic critical loads
within a facility that require a higher
level of protection. A series SPD is best
suited for protecting such loads.
Advantages of the system approach are:
The lowest possible investment
in mitigating equipment to protect
a facility
Building entrance SPDs protect
the facility against large external
transients, including lightning
SPDs are bi-directional and prevent
transient and noise disturbances
from feeding back within a system
when installed at distribution or
branch panels
Two levels of protection safeguard
sensitive loads from physical
damage or operational upset
Side-Mounted SPD vs. Integral SPD
Directly connecting the surge sup-
presser to the bus bar of electrical
distribution equipment results in
the best possible level of protection.
Compared to side-mounted devices,
connecting the SPD unit to the bus
bar eliminates the need for lead wires
and reduces the let-through voltage
up to 50% (see Figure 1.4-14).
Given that surges are high frequency
disturbances, the inductance of the
installation wiring increases the
let-through voltage of the protective
device. Figure 1.4-15 shows that
for every inch of lead length, the
let-through voltage is increased by
an additional 1525V above the
manufacturers stated suppression
performance.
Lead length has the greatest effect on
the actual level of protection realized.
Twisting of the installation wires is
the second most important installation
consideration. By twisting the installa-
tion wires, the area between wires is
reduced and the mutual inductance
affect minimized.
Increasing the diameter of the installation
wires is of negligible benet. Induc-
tance is a skin effect phenomenon and
a function of wire circumference. Since
only a marginal reduction in inductance
is achieved when the diameter of the
installation conductors is increased,
the use of large diameter wire results
in only minimal improvement (see
Figure 1.4-15).
Further benets provided by integrated
surge suppression designs are the
elimination of eld installation costs and
the amount of expensive outboard
wall space taken up by side-mounted
SPD devices.
Building Entrance Feeder Installation
Considerations
Installing an SPD device immediately
after the switchgear or switchboard
main breaker is the optimal location
for protecting against external distur-
bances such as lightning. When placed
in this location, the disturbance is
intercepted by the SPD and reduced
to a minimum before reaching the
distribution and/or branch panel(s).
The use of a disconnect breaker
eliminates the need to de-energize
the building entrance feeder equip-
ment should the SPD fail or require
isolation for Megger testing.
Figure 1.4-14. Performance Comparison of Side-Mounted vs. Integrated SPD
1.
Identify Critical Loads
2.
Identify Non-Critical Loads
3.
Identify Noise and
Disturbance Generating Loads
4.
Review Internal Power Distribution Layout
5.
Identify Facility Exposure to
Expected Levels of Disturbance
6.
Apply Mitigating Equipment to:
a) Service Entrance Main Panels
b) Key Sub-Panels
c) Critical Loads
d) Data and Communication Lines
\
GR O U N D
G
N
G R O U N D
G
N
SPD
208Y/120 Panelboard
(integrated versus side mounted SPD)
Side-Mounted SPD Device
(assuming 14-inch (355.6 mm) lead length to bus)
Integrated SPD
(direct bus bar connection)
Surge
Event
Microseconds
SPD
Side-Mounted SPD
used for Retrofit
Applications
SPD Integrated
into Panelboards,
Switchboards, MCCs
1000
800
600
400
200
0
200
2.00 0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00
L
e
t
-
T
h
r
o
u
g
h

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

a
t

B
u
s

B
a
r
1.4-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Power Quality
077
Figure 1.4-15. The Effect of Installation Lead Length on Let-Through Voltage
Additional to UL 1449 ratings.

The size or capacity of a suppressor is
measured in surge current per phase.
Larger suppressers rated at approxi-
mately 250 kA per phase should be
installed at the service entrance to
survive high-energy surges associated
with lightning.
A 250 kA per phase surge rating allows
for over a 25-year life expectancy
assuming an IEEE dened high
exposure environment. Lower surge
rating devices may be used; however,
device reliability and long-term
performance may be compromised.
For aerial structures, the 99.8 percentile
recorded lightning stroke current is
less than 220 kA. The magnitude of
surges conducted or induced into a
facility electrical distribution system is
considerably lower given the presence
of multiple paths for the surge to travel
along. It is for this reason that IEEE
C62.41 recommends the C3 (20 kV,
10 kA) test wave for testing SPDs
installed at building entrance feeders.
SPDs with surge ratings greater than
250 kA are not required, however, higher
ratings are available and may provide
longer life.
Installing Panelboard Surge
Protection Devices
Smaller surge capacity SPDs (120 kA
per phase) are installed at branch pan-
elboards where power disturbances
are of lower energy, but occur much
more frequently. This level of surge
current rating should result in a
greater than 25-year life expectancy.
When isolated ground systems are
used, the SPD should be installed such
that any common mode surges are
shunted to the safety ground.
The use of a disconnect breaker is
optional. The additional let-through
voltage resulting from the increased
inductance caused by the disconnect
switch is about 5060V. This increase
in disturbance voltage can result in
process disruption and downtime.
Installing Dataline Surge Protection
Most facilities also have communica-
tion lines that are potential sources
for external surges. As identied by
the power quality pyramid, proper
grounding of communication lines is
essential for dependable operation.
NEC Article 800 states that all data,
power and cable lines be grounded
and bonded.
Power disturbances such as lightning
can elevate the ground potential
between two communicating pieces
of electronic equipment with different
ground references. The result is current
owing through the data cable, causing
component failure, terminal lock-up,
data corruption and interference.
NFPA 780 D4.8 warns that surge
suppression devices should be installed
on all wiring entering or leaving elec-
tronic equipment, usually power, data
or communication wiring.
Surge suppressers should be installed
at both ends of a data or communica-
tion cable. In those situations where
one end of the cable is not connected
into an electronic circuit (e.g., contactor
coil), protection on the electronic end
only is required.
To prevent the coupling or inducing of
power disturbances into communication
lines, the following should be avoided:
Data cables should not be run over
uorescent lighting xtures
Data cables should not be in the
vicinity of electric motors
The right category cable should
be used to ensure transmission
performance
Data cables must be grounded at
both ends when communicating
between buildings
14 AWG
10 AWG
4 AWG
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
209V (23%)
673V (75%)
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

L
e
t
-
T
h
r
o
u
g
h

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

Loose Wiring Twisted Wires

3 ft (914.4 mm)
Lead Length
1 ft (304.8 mm)
Lead Length,
Twisted Wires
Additional Let-Through Voltage Using IEEE C1(6000V, 3000A)[3]
Waveform (UL 1449 Test Wave)[12]
Reference Tab 34 for detailed
information on SPDs.
3. Voltage Regulation
Voltage regulation (i.e., sags or over-
voltage) disturbances are generally
site- or load-dependent. A variety of
mitigating solutions are available
depending upon the load sensitivity,
fault duration/magnitude and the
specic problems encountered. It is
recommended to install monitoring
equipment on the AC power lines to
assess the degree and frequency of
occurrences of voltage regulation
problems. The captured data will allow
for the proper solution selection.
4. Harmonics Distortion
Harmonics and Nonlinear Loads
Until recently, most electrical loads were
linear. Linear loads draw the full sine
wave of electric current at its 60 cycle
(Hz) fundamental frequencyFigure
1.4-16 shows balance single-phase,
linear loads. As the gure shows,
little or no current ows in the neutral
conductor when the loads are non-
linear and balanced.
With the arrival of nonlinear electronic
loads, where the AC voltage is con-
verted to a DC voltage, harmonics are
created because of the use of only part
of the AC sine wave. In this conversion
from AC to DC, the electronics are turned
on in the 60 cycle wave at a given point
in time to obtain the required DC level.
The use of only part of the sign wave
causes harmonics.
It is important to note that the current
distortion caused by loads such as rec-
tiers or switch mode power supplies
causes the voltage distortion. That
voltage distortion is caused by distorted
currents owing through an impedance.
The amount of voltage distortion
depends on:
System impedance
Amount of distorted current
Devices that can cause harmonic
disturbances include rectiers, thrust-
ers and switching power supplies, all
of which are nonlinear. Further, the
proliferation of electronic equipment
such as computers, UPS systems,
variable speed drives, programmable
logic controllers, and the like: non-
linear loads have become a signicant
part of many installations. Other types
of harmonic-producing loads include
arcing devices (arc furnaces, uores-
cent lights) and iron core storable
devices (transformers, especially
during energization).
1.4-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Power Quality
078
Nonlinear load currents vary widely
from a sinusoidal wave shape; often
they are discontinuous pulses. This
means that nonlinear loads are
extremely high in harmonic content.
Triplen harmonics are the 3rd, 9th,
15th,...harmonics. Further, triplen
harmonics are the most damaging
to an electrical system because these
harmonics on the A-phase, B-phase
and C-phase are in sequence with each
other. Meaning, the triplen harmonics
present on the three phases add
together in the neutral, as shown in
Figure 1.4-17, rather than cancel each
other out, as shown in Figure 1.4-16.
Odd non-triplen harmonics are
classied as positive sequence
or negative sequence and are the
1st, 5th, 7th, 11th, 13th, etc.
In general, as the order of a harmonic
gets higher, its amplitude becomes
smaller as a percentage of the funda-
mental frequency.
Figure 1.4-16. Balanced Neutral Current Equals Zero
Figure 1.4-17. Unbalanced Single-Phase Loads with Triplen Harmonics
A Phase
B Phase
C Phase
60 Hz Fundamental
Balance
Neutral
Current
120
Lagging
120
Lagging
A Phase
B Phase
C Phase
60 Hz Fundamental
Neutral
Triplen
Current
120
Lagging
120
Lagging
3rd Harmonic
Phase Triplen Harmonics
Added in the Neutral
Harmonic Issues
Harmonic currents perform no work
and result in wasted electrical energy
that may over burden the distribution
system. This electrical overloading
may contribute to preventing an
existing electrical distribution system
from serving additional future loads.
In general, harmonics present on
a distribution system can have the
following detrimental effects:
1. Overheating of transformers and
rotating equipment.
2. Increased hysteresis losses.
3. Decreased kVA capacity.
4. Overloading of neutral.
5. Unacceptable neutral-to-ground
voltages.
6. Distorted voltage and current
waveforms.
7. Failed capacitor banks.
8. Breakers and fuses tripping.
9. Double or ever triple sized neutrals
to defy the negative effects of
triplen harmonics.
In transformers, generators and
uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)
systems, harmonics cause overheating
and failure at loads below their ratings
because the harmonic currents cause
greater heating than standard 60 Hz
current. This results from increased
eddy current losses, hysteresis losses
in the iron cores, and conductor skin
effects of the windings. In addition,
the harmonic currents acting on the
impedance of the source cause
harmonics in the source voltage, which
is then applied to other loads such as
motors, causing them to overheat.
The harmonics also complicate the
application of capacitors for power
factor correction. If, at a given harmonic
frequency, the capacitive impedance
equals the system reactive impedance,
the harmonic voltage and current can
reach dangerous magnitudes. At the
same time, the harmonics create
problems in the application of power
factor correction capacitors, they
lower the actual power factor. The
rotating meters used by the utilities for
watthour and various measurements
do not detect the distortion component
caused by the harmonics. Rectiers
with diode front ends and large DC side
capacitor banks have displacement
power factor of 90% to 95%. More
recent electronic meters are capable
of metering the true kVA hours taken
by the circuit.
1.4-23
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Power Quality
079
Single-phase power supplies for
computer and xture ballasts are
rich in third harmonics and their
odd multiples.
Even with the phase currents perfectly
balanced, the harmonic currents in
the neutral can total 173% of the
phase current. This has resulted in
overheated neutrals. The Information
Technology Industry Council (ITIC)
formerly known as CBEMA, recom-
mends that neutrals in the supply to
electronic equipment be oversized
to at least 173% of the ampacity of
the phase conductors to prevent
problems. ITIC also recommends
derating transformers, loading them
to no more than 50% to 70% of their
nameplate kVA, based on a rule-of-
thumb calculation, to compensate
for harmonic heating effects.
In spite of all the concerns they
cause, nonlinear loads will continue
to increase. Therefore, the design of
nonlinear loads and the systems that
supply them will have to be designed
so that their adverse effects are greatly
reduced. Table 1.4-4 shows the typical
harmonic orders from a variety of
harmonic generating sources.
Table 1.4-4. Source and Typical Harmonics
Generally, magnitude decreases as harmonic

order increases.
Total Harmonic Distortion
Revised standard IEEE 519-1992
indicates the limits of current distor-
tion allowed at the PCC (Point of
Common Coupling) point on the
system where the current distortion
is calculated, usually the point of
connection to the utility or the main
supply bus of the system.
The standard also covers the harmonic
limits of the supply voltage from the
utility or cogenerators.
Table 1.4-5. Low Voltage System Classication
and Distortion Limits for 480V Systems
Special systems are those where the rate

of change of voltage of the notch might
mistrigger an event. A
N
is a measurement
of notch characteristics measured in
volt-microseconds, C is the impedance
ratio of total impedance to impedance
at common point in system. DF is
distortion factor.
Table 1.4-6. Utility or Cogenerator Supply
Voltage Harmonic Limits
Percentages are x 100 for each
harmonic
and
It is important for the system designer
to know the harmonic content of the
utilitys supply voltage because it will
affect the harmonic distortion of
the system.
Table 1.4-7. Current Distortion Limits for
General Distribution Systems (120 69,000V)
All power generation equipment is limited

to these values of current distortion,
regardless of actual I
SC
/I
L
where:
I
SC
= Maximum short-circuit current at PCC.
I
L
= Maximum demand load current
(fundamental frequency component) at PCC.
TDD = Total Demand Distortion. Even
harmonics are limited to 25% of the odd
harmonic limits above. Current distortions
that result in a DC offset, e.g., half-wave
converters, are not allowed.
Harmonic Solutions
In spite of all the concerns nonlinear
loads cause, these loads will continue
to increase. Therefore, the design
of nonlinear loads and the systems
that supply them will need design so
adverse harmonic effects are greatly
reduced. Table 1.4-8 and depicts many
harmonic solutions along with their
advantages and disadvantages.
Eatons Engineering Services &
Systems Group (EESS) can perform
harmonic studies and recommend
solutions for harmonic problems.
Source Typical
Harmonics
6-pulse rectier
12-pulse rectier
18-pulse rectier
5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19
11, 13, 23, 25
17, 19, 35, 37
Switch-mode power
supply
Fluorescent lights
Arcing devices
Transformer energization
3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13
3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13
2, 3, 4, 5, 7
2, 3, 4
Class C A
N
DF
Special application
General system
Dedicated system
10
5
2
16,400
22,800
36,500
3%
5%
10%
Voltage
Range
2.369 kV 69138 kV >138 kV
Maximum
individual
harmonic
3.0% 1.5% 1.0%
Total
harmonic
distortion
5.0% 2.5% 1.5%
V
h
V
1
V
thd
=
h = h
max
h = 2
V
2
h
1/2
Maximum Harmonic Current Distortion in

Percent of I
L
Individual Harmonic Order (Odd Harmonics)
I
SC
/I
L
<11 11
h
<17
17
h
<23
23
h
<35
35
h
TDD
<20
20<50
50<100
100<1000
>1000
4.0
7.0
10.0
12.0
15.0
2.0
3.5
4.5
5.5
7.0
1.5
2.5
4.0
5.0
6.0
0.6
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
0.3
0.5
0.7
1.0
1.4
5.0
8.0
12.0
15.0
20.0
< < < <
1.4-24
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Power Quality
080
Table 1.4-8. Harmonic Solutions for Given Loads
Load
Type
Solutions Advantages Disadvantages
Drives and rectiers
includes three-phase
UPS loads
Line reactors Inexpensive
For 6-pulse standard drive/rectier, can
reduce harmonic current distortion from
80% down to about 3540%
May require additional compensation
K-rated/drive isolation
transformer
Offers series reactance (similar to line
reactors) and provides isolation for
some transients
No advantage over reactors for
reducing harmonics unless in pairs
for shifting phases
DC choke Slightly better than AC line reactors
for 5th and 7th harmonics
Not always an option for drives
Less protection for input semiconductors
12-pulse convertor 85% reduction versus standard
6-pulse drives
Cost difference approaches 18-pulse drive
and blocking lters, which guarantee
IEEE 519 compliance
Harmonic mitigating
transformers/phase shifting
Substantial (5080%) reduction in harmonics
when used in tandem
Harmonic cancellation highly dependent
on load balance
Must have even multiples of matched loads
Tuned lters Bus connectedaccommodates
load diversity
Provides PF correction
Requires allocation analysis
Sized only to the requirements of that system;
must be resized if system changes
Broadband lters Makes 6-pulse into the equivalent
of 18-pulse
Higher cost
Requires one lter per drive
18-pulse converter Excellent harmonic control for drives
above 100 hp
IEEE 519 compliant
High cost
Active lters Handles load/harmonic diversity
Complete solution up to 50th harmonic
High cost
Computers/
switch-mode
power supplies
Neutral blocking lter Eliminates the 3rd harmonic from load
Relieves system capacity
Possible energy savings
High cost
May increase voltage distortion
Harmonic mitigating
transformers
3rd harmonic recalculated back to the load
When used as phase-shifted transformers,
reduces other harmonics
Reduces voltage at-topping
Requires fully rated circuits and
oversized neutrals to the loads
Oversized neutral/derated
transformer
Tolerate harmonics rather than correct
Typically least expensive
Upstream and downstream equipment
fully rated for harmonics
K-rated transformer Tolerate harmonics rather than correct Does not reduce system harmonics
Fluorescent
lighting
Harmonic mitigating
transformers
3rd harmonic recalculated back to the load
When used as phase-shifted transformers,
reduces other harmonics
Reduces voltage at-topping
Requires fully rated circuits and
oversized neutrals to the loads
K-rated transformer Tolerate harmonics rather than correct them Does not reduce system harmonics
Low distortion ballasts Reduce harmonics at the source Additional cost and typically more
expensive than system solutions
Welding/arcing
loads
Active lters Fast response and broadband
harmonic correction
Reduces voltage icker
High cost
Tuned lters SCR controlled tuned lters simulates
an active lter response
SCR controlled units are high cost
but xed lters are reasonable
System
solutions
Tuned lters Provides PF correction
Lower cost compared to other systems
System analysis required to verify application.
Must be resized if system changes
Harmonic mitigating
transformers
Excellent choice for new design or upgrade No PF correction benet
Active lters Ideal solution and handles system diversity Highest cost
1.4-25
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS)
081
5. Uninterruptible Power
Systems (UPS)
The advent of solid-state semiconduc-
tors over 40 years ago, and their
subsequent evolution to transistors,
and the miniaturization of electronics
into microprocessor over 25 years ago,
has created numerous computation
machines that assist us in every
conceivable manner. These machines,
and their clever congurations,
whether they take the form of
computers, appliance controls, fax
machines, phone systems, computers
of all sizes, server systems and server
farms, emergency call centers, data
processing at banks, credit companies,
private company communication
networks, government institutions and
defense agencies, all rely on a narrow
range of nominal AC power in order
for these devices to work properly.
Indeed, many other types of equip-
ment also require that the AC electrical
power source be at or close to nominal
voltage and frequency. Disturbances
of the power translate into failed
processes, lost data, decreased
efciency and lost revenue.
The normal power source supplied by
the local utility or provider is not stable
enough over time to continuously
serve these loads without interruption.
It is possible that a facility outside a
major metropolitan area served by the
utility grid will experience outages of
some nature 1520 times in one year.
Certain outages are caused by the
weather, and others by the failure
of the utility supply system due to
equipment failures or construction
interruptions. Some outages are
only several cycles in duration, while
others may be for hours at a time.
In a broader sense, other problems
exist in the area of power quality, and
many of those issues also contribute
to the failure of the supply to provide
that narrow range of power to the
sensitive loads mentioned above.
Power quality problems take the
form of any of the following: power
failure, power sag, power surge,
undervoltage, overvoltage, line noise,
frequency variations, switching
transients and harmonic distortion.
Regardless of the reason for outages
and power quality problems, the
sensitive loads can not function
normally without a backup power
source, and in many cases, the loads
must be isolated from the instabilities
of the utility supply and power quality
problems and given clean reliable
power on a continuous basis, or be
able to switch over to reliable clean
electrical power quickly.
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
systems have evolved to serve the
needs of sensitive equipment and
can supply a stable source of electrical
power, or switch to backup to allow
for an orderly shutdown of the loads
without appreciable loss of data or
process. In the early days of main-
frame computers, motor-generator
sets provide isolation and clean power
to the computers. They did not have
deep reserves, but provided extensive
ride-through capability while other
sources of power (usually standby
emergency engine generator sets) were
brought to serve the motor-generator
sets while the normal source of power
was unstable or unavailable.
UPS systems have evolved along the
lines of rotary types and static types
of systems, and they come in many
congurations, and even hybrid
designs having characteristics of
both types. The discussion that
follows attempts to compare and
contrast the two types of UPS
systems, and give basic guidance
on selection criteria. This discussion
will focus on the medium, large and
very large UPS systems required by
users who need more than 10 kVA of
clean reliable power.
1.4-26
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
082
Power Ratings of UPS Systems
Small UPS: Typically 300 VA to 10 kVA,
and sometimes as high as 18 kVA
Medium UPS: 1060 kVA
Large UPS: 100200 kVA units, and
higher when units are paralleled
Very Large UPS: 200750 kVA
units, and higher when units
are paralleled
Each of these categories is arbitrary
because manufacturers have many
different UPS offerings for the same
application. The choice of UPS type
and the conguration of UPS modules
for a given application depends upon
many factors, including how many
power quality problems the UPS is
expected to solve; how much future
capacity is to be purchased now for
future loads; the nature of the sensi-
tive loads and load wiring; which
type of UPS system is favored, rotary
or static; choices of battery or DC
storage technology considered; and
a host of other application issues.
Rotary UPS Systems
Typical Ratings
300900 kVA/720 kW maximum.
Typical Rotary Congurations
Rotary UPS systems are among the
oldest working systems developed
to protect sensitive loads. Many of
these systems are complicated engine-
generator sets coupled with high
inertial ywheels operated at relatively
low rotational speeds. These legacy
types of hybrid UPS systems are not
the focus of this discussion, because
only one or two vendors offer these
hybrid types of rotary UPS systems,
although admittedly they continue to
be used in very large-scale data center
applications. See Figure 1.4-18 for the
modern high speed Rotary UPS
systems discussed in this section
of the guide. These types of modern
rotary UPS systems are advanced,
integrated designs using scalable
congurations of high-speed y-
wheel, motor and generator in one
compact UPS package. The new rotary
technologies have the potential to
replace battery backup systems, or
at least reduce the battery content
for certain applications. The appeal
of rotary systems is the avoidance of
the purchase, maintenance and facility
space required by DC battery based
backup systems.
High-Speed Rotary
Concept of Operation
The modern rotary type of UPS
operation is understood by reviewing
the four topics below: startup mode,
normal operation mode, discharge
mode and recharge mode.
Startup Mode
The UPS output is energized on
bypass as soon as power is applied
from the source to the system input.
The UPS continues the startup
procedure automatically when the
front panel controls are placed into
the Online position. Internal UPS
system checks are performed then
the input contactor is closed. The static
disconnect switch is turned on and the
conduction angle is rapidly increased
from zero to an angle that causes the
DC bus voltage between the utility
converter and the ywheel converter
to reach approximately 650V through
the rectifying action of the freewheel-
ing diodes in the utility converter.
As soon as this level of DC voltage is
reached, the static disconnect turns
on fully. The next steps involved the
utility converter IGBTs to start ring,
which allows the converter to act as
a rectier, a regulating voltage source
and an active harmonic lter. As the
IGBTs begin to operate, the DC bus
is increased to a normal operating
voltage of approximately 800V, and
the output bus is transferred from
bypass to the output of the power
electronics module. The transfer from
bypass is completed when the output
contactor is closed and the bypass
contactor opened in a make-before-
break manner.
The ring of the SCRs in the static
disconnect switch is now changed so
that each SCR in each phase is only
turned on during the half-cycle, which
permits real power to ow from the
utility supply to the UPS. This ring
pattern at the static disconnect switch
prevents power from the ywheel
from feeding backward into the
utility supply and ensures that all of
the ywheel energy is available to
support the load.
Figure 1.4-18. Typical-High Speed Modern Rotary UPS
It = Ir + Ic + Ig
Id= Output Current
Ih= Harmonic Current
Ix = Reactive Load Current
Ir = Real Load Current
Source
Field Coil
Driver
Integrated Motor/Flywheel/
and Generator
ac
dc
dc
ac
Ih
Ix
Flywheel Converter Utility Converter
Ic
Ig Filter Inductor
Inverter
Fuse
Line Inductor
Output
Contactor
Input
Contactor
Static Disconnect
Switch
Bypass Contactor
Static Bypass Option
Load
Output Transformer
Id = Ih + Ix + Ir
It = Input Current
Ir = Real Load Current
Ic = Charging Current
Ig= Voltage Regulation Current
1.4-27
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
083
Immediately after the output is trans-
ferred from bypass to the power elec-
tronic module, the ywheel eld is
excited, which also provides magnetic
lift to unload the ywheel bearings.
The ywheel inverter is turned on
and gradually increases frequency
at a constant rate to accelerate the
ywheel to approximately 60 rpm.
Once the ywheel reaches 60 rpm,
the ywheel inverter controls the
acceleration to keep currents below the
maximum charging and the maximum
input settings. Once the ywheel
reaches 4000 rpm, the UPS is fully
functional and capable of supporting
the load during a power quality event.
ywheel acceleration continues until
the Flywheel reaches full charge at
7700 rpm. The total time to complete
startup is less than 5 minutes.
Normal Operation Mode
Once the UPS is started and the
ywheel is operating at greater than
4000 rpm, the UPS is in the normal
operating mode where it is regulating
output voltage and supplying reactive
and harmonic currents required by the
load. At the same time it cancels the
effect of load current harmonics on the
UPS output voltage.
Input current consists of three compo-
nents: real load current, charging
current, and voltage regulation current.
Real current is current that is in phase
with the supply voltage and supplies
real power to the load. Real current
owing through the line inductor causes
a slight phase shift of the current
lagging the voltage by 10 degrees
and ensures that the UPS can quickly
transfer to bypass without causing
unacceptable switching transients. The
second component is charging current
required by the ywheel to keep the
rotating mass fully charged at rated
rpm, or to recharge the rotating mass
after a discharge. The power to main-
tain full charge is low at 2 kW and
is accomplished by the IGBTs of the
ywheel converter gating to provide
small pulses of motoring current to the
ywheel. This current can be much
higher if fast recharge times are
selected. The nal component of input
current is the voltage regulation current,
which is usually a reactive current that
circulates between the input and the
utility converter to regulate the output
voltage. Leading reactive current
causes a voltage boost across the line
inductor, and a lagging current causes
a bucking voltage. By controlling the
utility converter to maintain nominal
output voltage, just enough reactive
current ows through the line inductor
to make up the difference between the
input voltage and the output voltage.
The load current consists of three
components: the harmonic current
required by the load, the reactive load
current, and the real current, which
does the work. The utility converter
supplies both the harmonic and
reactive currents. Because these
currents supply no net power to the
load, the ywheel supplies no energy
for these currents. They circulate
between the utility converter and the
load. The power stage controls analyze
the harmonic current requirements of
the load and set the ring angle of
the inverter IGBTs to make the utility
converter a very low impedance source
to any harmonic currents. Thus,
nonlinear load currents are supplied
almost entirely from the utility
converter with little effect on the
quality of the UPS output voltage
waveform and with almost no
transmission of load harmonics
currents to the input of the UPS.
Discharge Mode
The UPS senses the deviation of
the voltage or frequency beyond
programmed tolerances and quickly
disconnects the supply source by
turning off the static disconnect switch
and opening the input contactor. The
disconnect occurs in less than one-half
cycle. Then the utility converter starts
delivering power from the DC bus to
the load, and the ywheel converter
changes the ring point of its IGBTs
to deliver power to the DC bus. The
UPS maintains a clean output voltage
within 3% or nominal voltage to the
load when input power is lost.
Recharge Mode
When input power is restored to
acceptable limits, the UPS synchronizes
the output and input voltages, closes
the input contactor and turns on the
static disconnect switch. The utility
converter then transfers power from
the ywheel to the input source by
linearly increasing the real input
current. The transfer time is program-
mable from 1 to 15 seconds. As soon
as the load power is completely
transferred to the input source, the util-
ity converter and ywheel converter
start to recharge the ywheel and
return to normal operation mode. The
ywheel recharge power is program-
mable between a slow and fast rate,
and using the fast rate results in an
increase of UPS input current over
nominal levels. Recharging the ywheel
is accomplished by controlling the
utility and ywheel converter in a
similar manner as is used to maintain
full charge in the normal operation
mode, however the IGBT gating points
are changed to increase current into
the ywheel.
High-Speed Rotary Advantages
Addresses all power quality
problems
Battery systems are not required
or used
No battery maintenance required
Unlimited discharge cycles
150-second recharge time available
Wide range of operating tempera-
tures can be accommodated
(20 to 40C)
Small compact size and less oor
space required (500 kW systems
takes 20 sq ft)
N+1 reliability available up to
900 kVA maximum
No disposal issues
High-Speed Rotary Disadvantages
Flywheel does not have deep
reserve capacityrides through
for up to 13 seconds at 100% load
Some enhanced ywheel systems
may extend the ride through to
30 seconds at 100% load
Mechanical ywheel maintenance
required every 23 years, and oil
changes required every year
Recharge fast rates require the
input to be sized for 125% of
nominal current
Flywheels failures in eld not
understood
Requires vacuum pumps for
high-speed ywheels
Limited number of vendors and
experience
1.4-28
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
084
Static UPS Systems
Typical Ratings
40750 kVA/600 kW, and higher when
multiple units are paralleled.
Typical Static UPS Congurations
Static UPS systems modules are
available in three basic types of
congurations known as standby, line
interactive and double conversion.
See Tab 33 in this guide for details on
all the UPS congurations available
from Eaton. The lighter power ratings
are likely to be one of the rst two
types of congurations, e.g., standby
or line interactive. Most medium or
large static UPS installations use the
double conversion technology in one
or multiple module congurations,
i.e., or multiple UPS units in parallel.
Figure 1.4-19 illustrates the one-line
diagram of a simple single Double
Conversion UPS module. Brief
explanations appear for the standby
and line interactive UPS systems
after the text explaining the Double
Conversion static UPS type of system.
A. Double conversion concept of
operationthe basic operation of
the Double Conversion UPS is:
1. Normal power is connected to
the UPS input through the facility
This usually involves two input
circuits that must come from the
same source.
2. The Rectier/Charger function
converts the normal AC power to
DC power to charge the battery
and power the inverter. The load
is isolated from the normal
input source.
3. The battery stores DC energy
for use when input power to the
UPS fails. The amount of power
available from the DC battery
system and time to discharge
voltage is a function of the type of
battery selected and the ampere-
hour sized used. Battery systems
should be sized for no less than
5 minutes of clean power usage
from a fully charged state, and, in
many cases, are sized to provide
more time on battery power.
4. The DC link connects the output
of the rectier/charger to the input
of the inverter and to the battery.
Typically the rectier/charger is
sized slightly higher than 100% of
UPS output because it must power
the inverter and supply charger
power to the battery.
5. The bypass circuit provides a
path for unregulated normal
power to be routed around the
major electronic sub-assemblies
of the UPS to the load so that the
load can continue to operate during
maintenance, or when the UPS
electronics fails. The bypass static
switch can switch to conducting
mode in 150120 milliseconds.
When the UPS recognizes a
requirement to transfer to the
bypass mode, it simultaneously
turns the static switch ON, the
output breaker to OPEN, and the
bypass breaker to CLOSE. The
output breaker opens and the
bypass breaker closes in about
50 milliseconds. The restoration
of normal conditions at the UPS
results in the automatic restoration
of the UPS module powering the
load through the rectier/charger
and inverter with load isolation
from power quality problems, and
the opening of the bypass circuit.
Static Double Conversion Advantages
Addresses all power quality
problems
Suitable for applications from
5 kVA to over 2500 kVA
Simple battery systems are
sized for application
Long battery backup times and
long life batteries are available
Higher reliability is available
using redundant UPS modules
Figure 1.4-19. Typical Static UPS, Double Conversion Type with Battery Backup
Source
Battery
AC
DC
DC
AC
Inverter
Output
Breaker
Normal
Breaker
Bypass Static Switch
UPS Module
Load
Rectifier/Charger
Battery Breaker
Bypass Breaker (Optional)
1.4-29
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
085
Static Double Conversion Disadvantages
Battery systems, battery maintenance
and battery replacement are required
Large space requirement for
battery systems (higher life takes
more space, e.g., 500 kW takes
80200 sq ft depending upon the
type of battery used, VRLA 10 year,
VRLA 20 year or ooded)
Limited discharge cycles of
battery system
Narrow temperature range
for application
Efciencies are in the 9094%
range, which is lower than some
line interactive congurations
Bypass mode places load at risk
unless bypass has UPS backup
Redundancy of UPS modules
results in higher costs
Output faults are cleared by the
bypass circuit
Output rating of the UPS is 150%
for 30 seconds
Battery disposal and safety
issues exist
B. Standby UPS concept of
operationThe basic operation of
the Standby UPS is:
1. The Standby UPS topology is
similar to the double conversion
type, but the operation of the UPS
is different in signicant ways.
Normal power is connected to
the UPS input through the facility
electrical distribution system. This
usually involves two input circuits
that must come from the same
source. See Figure 1.4-20 for
details.
2. The rectier/charger function
converts the normal AC power to
DC power to charge the battery
only, and does not simultaneously
power the inverter. The load is
connected to the input source
through the bypass static switch.
The inverter is in the standby
mode ready to serve the load
from battery power if the input
power source fails.
3. The battery stores DC energy for
use by the inverter when input
power to the UPS fails. The
amount of power available from
the DC battery system and time to
discharge voltage is a function of
the type of battery selected and
the ampere-hour sized used.
Battery systems should be sized
for the anticipated outage.
4. The DC link connects the output of
the rectier/charger to the input of
the inverter and to the battery.
Typically the rectier/charger
is sized only to supply charger
power to the battery, and is
rated far lower than in the
double conversion UPS.
5. The bypass circuit provides a
direct connection of input source
to the load. The load operates
from unregulated power. The
bypass static switch can switch
to non-conducting mode in 150
120 milliseconds. When the UPS
recognizes the loss of normal
input power, it transfers to battery/
inverter mode by simultaneously
turning the Inverter ON and the
static switch OFF.
Static Standby UPS Advantages
Lower costs than double conversion
Rectier and charger are
economically sized
Efcient design
Batteries are sized for the
application
Static Standby UPS Disadvantages
Impractical over 2 kVA
Little to no isolation of load from
power quality disturbances
Standby power is from battery alone
Battery systems, battery mainte-
nance and battery replacement
are required
Limited discharge cycles of
battery system
Narrow temperature range for
application
Output faults are cleared by the
bypass circuit
issues exist
C. Static line interactive UPS
concept of operationthe basic
operation of the Line Interactive
UPS is:
1. The Line Interactive type of UPS
has a different topology than the
static double conversion and
standby systems. The normal
input power is connected to the
load in parallel with a battery
and bi-directional inverter/charger
assembly. The input source usu-
ally terminates at a line inductor
and the output of the inductor is
connected to the load in parallel
with the battery and inverter/
charger circuit. See Figure 1.4-21
for more details.
2. The traditional rectier circuit
is eliminated and this results
in a smaller footprint and
weight reduction. However, line
conditioning is compromised.
3. When the input power fails, the
battery/inverter charger circuit
reverses power and supplies the
load with regulated power.
Static Line Interactive UPS Advantages
Slight improvement of power
conditioning over standby
UPS systems
Small footprints and weights
Efcient design
Batteries are sized for the
application
Static Line Interactive UPS Disadvantages
Impractical over 5 kVA
Not as good conditioning as
double conversion
Standby power is from battery alone
Battery systems, battery mainte-
nance and battery replacement
are required
Limited discharge cycles for the
battery system
Narrow temperature range for
application
issues exist
1.4-30
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
086
Figure 1.4-20. Typical Static UPS, Standby Type with Battery Backup
Figure 1.4-21. Typical Static UPS, Line Interactive Type with Battery Backup
Source
AC
DC
DC
AC
UPS Module
Normal
Breaker
Rectifier/
Charger Inverter
Bypass Static Switch
Battery
Breaker
Output
Breaker
Battery
Load
Source
DC
AC
UPS Module
Bidirectional
Inverter/Charger
Battery
Load
Inductor
1.4-31
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
087
Secondary Voltage Selection
The choice between 208Y/120V and
480Y/277V secondary distribution for
commercial and institutional buildings
depends on several factors. The most
important of these are size and types
of loads (motors, uorescent lighting,
incandescent lighting, receptacles)
and length of feeders. In general, large
motor and uorescent lighting loads,
and long feeders, will tend to make the
higher voltages, such as 480Y/277V,
more economical. Very large loads
and long runs would indicate the use
of medium voltage distribution and
loadcenter unit substations close to
the loads. Conversely, small loads,
short runs and a high percentage of
incandescent lighting would favor
lower utilization voltages such as
208Y/120V.
Industrial installations, with large
motor loads, are almost always 480V,
often ungrounded delta or resistance
grounded delta or wye systems (see
section on ground fault protection).
Practical Factors
Because most low voltage distribution
equipment available is rated for up to
600V, and conductors are insulated for
600V, the installation of 480V systems
uses the same techniques and is
essentially no more difcult, costly, or
hazardous than for 208V systems. The
major difference is that an arc of 120V
to ground tends to be self-extinguishing,
while an arc of 277V to ground tends
to be self-sustaining and likely to
cause severe damage. For this reason,
the National Electrical Code requires
ground fault protection of equipment
on grounded wye services of more
than 150V to ground, but not exceeding
600V phase-to-phase (for practical
purpose, 480Y/277V services), for any
service disconnecting means rated
1000A or more. The National Electrical
Code permits voltage up to 300V
to ground on circuits supplying
permanently installed electric discharge
lamp xtures, provided the luminaires
do not have an integral manual switch
and are mounted at least 8 ft (2.4m)
above the oor. This permits a three-
phase, four-wire, solidly grounded
480Y/277V system to supply directly all
of the uorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting in a building
at 277V, as well as motors at 480V.
Technical Factors
The principal advantage of the use of
higher secondary voltages in buildings
is that for a given load, less current
means smaller conductors and lower
voltage drop. Also, a given conductor
size can supply a large load at the
same voltage drop in volts, but a lower
percentage voltage drop because of
the higher supply voltage. Fewer or
smaller circuits can be used to transmit
the power from the service entrance
point to the nal distribution points.
Smaller conductors can be used in many
branch circuits supplying power loads,
and a reduction in the number of light-
ing branch circuits is usually possible.
It is easier to keep voltage drops within
acceptable limits on 480V circuits than
on 208V circuits. When 120V loads are
supplied from a 480V system through
step-down transformers, voltage drop
in the 480V supply conductors can be
compensated for by the tap adjust-
ments on the transformer, resulting
in full 120V output. Because these
transformers are usually located close
to the 120V loads, secondary voltage
drop should not be a problem. If it is,
taps may be used to compensate by
raising the voltage at the transformer.
The interrupting ratings of circuit
breakers and fuses at 480V have
increased considerably in recent years,
and protective devices are now available
for any required fault duty at 480V.
In addition, many of these protective
devices are current limiting, and can
be used to protect downstream equip-
ment against these high fault currents.
Figure 1.4-22. Typical Power Distribution and Riser Diagram for a Commercial Ofce Building
Include ground fault trip.
Spare
Building and
Miscellaneous
Loads
4000 A
Main CB
Automatic
Transfer Switch
Typical
Gen. CB
4000A at 480Y/277V
100,000A Available Fault Current
Utility
Metering
CTs
PTs
Utility
Service
HVAC
Feeder
Busway
Riser
Elevator
Riser
Elevator
Panel
(Typical Every
Third Floor)
480Y/277 V
Panel
208Y/120 V
Panel
Emergency
Lighting
Riser
HVAC
Panel
Dry Type Transformer
480-208Y/120 V
(Typical Every Floor)
Emergency
Lighting Panel
Typical
Typical
Typical
Typical
Typical
Typical
Typical
Emergency
or Standby
Generator

1.4-32
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
088
Economic Factors
Utilization equipment suitable for
principal loads in most buildings
is available for either 480V or 208V
systems. Three-phase motors and
their controls can be obtained for either
voltage, and for a given horsepower
are less costly at 480V. Fluorescent and
HID lamps can be used with either 277V
or 120V ballasts. However, in almost all
cases, the installed equipment will have
a lower total cost at the higher voltage.
Energy Conservation
Because of the greatly increased cost
of electrical power, designers must
consider the efciency of electrical
distribution systems, and design for
energy conservation. In the past,
especially in commercial buildings,
design was for lowest rst cost,
because energy was inexpensive.
Today, even in the speculative ofce
building, operating costs are so high
that energy-conserving designs can
justify their higher initial cost with a
rapid payback and continuing savings.
Buildings that must meet LEED certi-
cations may require energy-saving
designs. There are four major sources
of energy conservation in a commercial
buildingthe lighting system, the
motors and controls, the transformers
and the HVAC system.
The lighting system must take
advantage of the newest equipment
and techniques. New light sources,
familiar light sources with higher
efciencies, solid-state ballasts with
dimming controls, use of daylight,
environmental design, efcient
luminaires, computerized or
programmed control, and the like,
are some of the methods that can
increase the efciency of lighting
systems. They add up to providing
the necessary amount of light, with the
desired color rendition, from the most
efcient sources, where and when it is
needed, and not providing light where
or when it is not necessary. Using the
best of techniques, ofce spaces that
originally required as much as 3.5W
per square foot have been given
improved lighting, with less glare
and higher visual comfort, using as
little as 1.0 to 2.0W per square foot.
In an ofce building of 200,000 square
feet (60,960m), this could mean a
saving of 400 kW, which, at $0.05 per
kWh, 250 days per year, 10 hours per
day, could save $50,000 per year in
energy costs. Obviously, efcient
lighting is a necessity.
Motors and controls are another cause
of wasted energy that can be reduced.
New, energy-efcient motor designs
are available using more and better
core steel, and larger windings.
For any motor operating 10 or more
hours per day, it is recommended to
use the energy-efcient types. These
motors have a premium cost of about
20% more than standard motors.
Depending on loading, hours of use
and the cost of energy, the additional
initial cost could be repaid in energy
saved within a few months, and it
rarely takes more than two years.
Because, over the life of a motor, the
cost of energy to operate it is many
times the cost of the motor itself, any
motor with many hours of use should
be of the energy-efcient type.
Where a motor drives a load with
variable output requirements such
as a centrifugal pump or a large fan,
customary practice has been to run the
motor at constant speed, and to throttle
the pump output or use inlet vanes or
outlet dampers on the fan. This is highly
inefcient and wasteful of energy. In
recent years, solid-state variable-
frequency, variable-speed drives for
ordinary induction motors have been
available, reliable and relatively
inexpensive. Using a variable-speed
drive, the throttling valves, inlet vanes
or output dampers can be eliminated,
saving their initial cost and energy
over the life of the system. An
additional benet of both energy-
efcient motors and variable-speed
drives (when operated at less than
full speed) is that the motors operate
at reduced temperatures, resulting in
increased motor life.
Transformers have inherent losses.
Transformers, like motors, are designed
for lower losses by using more and
better core materials, larger conductors,
etc., and this results in increased initial
cost. Because the 480V to 208Y/120V
stepdown transformers in an ofce
building are usually energized 24 hours
a day, savings from lower losses can
be substantial, and should be consid-
ered in all transformer specications.
One method of obtaining reduced
losses is to specify transformers with
220C insulation systems designed for
150C average winding temperature
rise, with no more than 80C (or
sometimes 115C) average winding
temperature rise at full load. A
better method would be to evaluate
transformer losses, based on actual
loading cycles throughout the day,
and consider the cost of losses as well
as the initial cost of the transformers
in purchasing.
NEMA standard TP-1 is being adopted
by many states and is another method
of energy-efcient design. NEMA TP-1
establishes minimum operating
efciencies for each distribution
transformer size at a loading equal to
35% of the transformer full load kVA.
The 35% loading value in the NEMA
standard reects eld studies con-
ducted by the U.S. Department of
Energy, which showed that dry-type
transformers installed in commercial
facilities are typically loaded at an
average of 35% of their full load
capacity over a 24-hour time period.
Table 1.4-9 compares losses for
both low temperature rise and TP-1
transformers using a 75 kVA design.
Table 1.4-9. Load Losses
Efciencies above TP-1. Candidates
Standard Level (CSL) is a DOE
efciency evaluation for transformers.
CSL-1 is equivalent to TP-1. Levels
are from CSL-1 to CSL-5. CSL-3 is
being promoted for higher efciency
applications. A NEMA white paper
Clarications on the Use of DOE
DesignLines 6, 7 and 8 is available
from NEMA that elaborates on
the matter.
HVAC systems have traditionally been
very wasteful of energy, often being
designed for lowest rst cost. This,
too, is changing. For example, reheat
systems are being replaced by variable
air volume systems, resulting in equal
comfort with substantial increases in
efciency. While the electrical engineer
has little inuence on the design of the
HVAC system, he/she can specify that
all motors with continuous or long duty
cycles are specied as energy-efcient
types, and that the variable-air-volume
fans do not use inlet vanes or outlet
dampers, but are driven by variable-
speed drives. Variable-speed drives
can often be desirable on centrifugal
compressor units as well. Since some
of these requirements will be in HVAC
specications, it is important for the
energy-conscious electrical engineer
to work closely with the HVAC engineer
at the design stage.
Temp.
Rise C
Load Losses in Watts
No
Loss
25%
Load
35%
Load
50%
Load
75%
Load
Full
Load
150
115
360
420
490
480
620
610
885
805
1535
1170
2450
1950
80
TP-1 150
500
230
535
310
615
480
730
745
945
1235
1410
2280
1.4-33
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
089
Building Control Systems
In order to obtain the maximum benet
from these energy-saving lighting,
power and HVAC systems, they must
be controlled to perform their functions
most efciently. Constant monitoring
would be required for manual operation,
so some form of automatic control
is required. The simplest of these
energy-saving controls, often very
effective, is a time clock to turn various
systems on and off. Where exible
control is required, programmable
controllers may be used. These range
from simple devices, similar to multi-
function time clocks, up to full micro-
processor-based, fully programmable
devices, really small computers. For
complete control of all building systems,
computers with specialized software
can be used. Computers can not only
control lighting and HVAC systems,
and provide peak demand control, to
minimize the cost of energy, but they
can perform many other functions.
Fire detection and alarm systems can
operate through the computer, which
can also perform auxiliary functions
such as elevator control and building
communication in case of re. Building
security systems, such as closed-circuit
television monitoring, door alarms and
intruder sensing, can be performed by
the same building computer system.
The time clocks, programmable
controllers and computers can
obtain data from external sensors
and control the lighting, motors and
other equipment by means of hard
wiring-separate wires to and from
each piece of equipment. In the more
complex systems, this would result in
a tremendous number of control
wires, so other methods are frequently
used. A single pair of wires, with elec-
tronic digital multiplexing, can control
or obtain data from many different
points. Sometimes, coaxial cable is
used with advanced signaling equip-
ment. Some systems dispense with
control wiring completely, sending
and receiving digital signals over the
power wiring. The newest systems
may use ber-optic cables to carry
tremendous quantities of data, free
from electromagnetic interference.
The method used will depend on
the type, number and complexity
of functions to be performed.
Because building design and control
for maximum energy saving is impor-
tant and complex, and frequently
involves many functions and several
systems, it is necessary for the design
engineer to make a thorough building
and environmental study, and to
weigh the costs and advantages of
many systems. The result of good
design can be economical, efcient
operation. Poor design can be wasteful
and extremely costly.
Distributed Energy Resources
Distributed energy resources (DER)
are increasingly becoming prominent
sources of electric power. Distributed
energy resources are usually small-to-
medium sources of electric generation,
either from renewable or non-renewable
sources. Sources include:
Photovoltaic (PV) systems
(solar systems)
Wind
Fossil-fueled (diesel, natural gas,
landll gas, coal-bed methane)
generators (reciprocating engines)
Gas-red turbines (natural gas,
landll gas, coal-bed methane)
Water-powered (hydro)
Fuel cells
Microturbines
Wave power
Coal-red boilers
Distributed energy resources may also
be termed alternative energy resources.
Prime Power
DER can be used for generating prime
power or for cogeneration. Prime power
concerns a system that is electrically
separated from the electrical grid.
Prime power is generated at remote
sites where commercial electrical
power is not available.
Cogeneration
Cogeneration is another outgrowth of
the high cost of energy. Cogeneration
is the production of electric power
concurrently with the production of
steam, hot water and similar energy
uses. The electric power can be the
main product, and steam or hot water
the byproduct, as in most commercial
installations, or the steam or hot water
can be the most required product,
and electric power a byproduct, as
in many industrial installations. In
some industries, cogeneration has
been common practice for many
years, but until recently it has not been
economically feasible for most
commercial installations. This has
been changed by the high cost of
purchased energy, plus a federal law
(Public Utility Regulatory Policies Act,
known as PURPA) that requires public
utilities to purchase any excess power
generated by the cogeneration plant.
In many cases, practical commercial
cogeneration systems have been built
that provide some or all of the electric
power required, plus hot water, steam,
and sometimes steam absorption-type
air conditioning. Such cogeneration
systems are now operating success-
fully in hospitals, shopping centers,
high-rise apartment buildings and
even commercial ofce buildings.
Where a cogeneration system is being
considered, the electrical distribution
system becomes more complex. The
interface with the utility company is
critical, requiring careful relaying
to protect both the utility and the
cogeneration system. Many utilities
have stringent requirements that
must be incorporated into the system.
Proper generator control and protec-
tion is necessary, as well. An on-site
electrical generating plant tied to an
electrical utility, is a sophisticated
engineering design.
Utilities require that when the
protective device at their substation
opens that the device connecting a
cogenerator to the utility open also.
One reason is that most cogenerators
are connected to feeders serving other
customers. Utilities desire to reclose
the feeder after a transient fault is
cleared. Reclosing in most cases will
damage the cogenerator if it had
remained connected to their system.
Islanding is another reason why the
utility insists on the disconnection of
the cogenerator. Islanding is the event
that after a fault in the utilitys system
is cleared by the operation of the
protective devices, a part of the
system may continue to be supplied
by cogeneration. Such a condition is
dangerous to the utilitys operation
during restoration work.
Major cogenerators are connected to
the subtransmission or the transmission
system of a utility. Major cogenerators
have buy-sell agreements. In such
cases, utilities use a trip transfer
scheme to trip the cogenerator breaker.
Guidelines that are given in ANSI
Guide Standard 1001 are a good
starting point, but the entire design
should be coordinated with the utility.
1.4-34
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
090
PV System Design Considerations
Successful photovoltaic (PV) design
and construction is a complex multi-
discipline endeavor. Proper planning
includes the site-layout study for
maximizing the suns energy harvest-
ing for solar module selection, and
for updating the electrical/mechanical
design and construction to the latest
code and local constraints, including
re marshal and seismic regulations.
Professionally prepared bid, permit,
construction and as-build drawings
shall be required and maintained.
For installation in/on/for existing
structures and sites, it is advised
that, at the minimum, pre-design
and construction tests be performed
for existing power-quality issues,
water drainage and the utility feeder/
transformer, and that electrical
distribution panel ratings are veried
sufcient for the planned solar system,
and the necessary arc ash studies be
performed. Connection to the utility
is always a utility interconnect agree-
ment (application) process, and is
typically required for the available
solar incentives and programs offered
by the utility, municipality, state, and
various federal agencies and depart-
ments. State, and IRS tax incentives
require well-documented records.
Solar systems, while low mainte-
nance, do require periodic service.
The solar modules need to be washed-
clean on a regular basis and electrical
terminations require initial and annual
checks. Cooling system lters are
periodic maintenance items, with the
re-fresh rate dependent upon typical
and unusual circumstances.
Solar systems installed near other new
construction where dust is generated
(e.g., grading, paving) or agricultural
environments may require additional
solar-system checks and services.
Planning for such contingencies is
the business of solar-system design,
construction and on-going operation.
Performance-based incentives
require veriable metering, often
by registered/approved independent
third parties. Such monitoring periods
are typically for 60 or more months.
The S-Max inverter offers a wide range
of features and options to enable a
successful and long-lived solar-energy
harvesting solution. The isolation step-
up transformer, coupled to either a
negative or a positive grounded solar
array, ensures that the S-Max can
match to all (known) solar module
technologies. The S-Max follows
standard industry and code practices
in determining the maximum number
of solar modules per string for the
open-circuit photovoltaic (PV) voltage
rise in cold weather (Voc < 600V as per
NEC). Its low 300V MPPT lower-limit
ensures that multiple congurations
are possible for solar systems hot
weather voltage drop (i.e., Vmp
as a function of temperature, solar
irradiance and array-conductor voltage
drop). The following equations are the
basis of all solar system layout and
design. Consult professional engineer-
ing to help when planning any solar
system. Engineering design rms
offering complete solar systems
turn-key calculations, drawings,
construction management and
procurement are a good place to
start. Eaton offers professional S-Max
inverter application assistance, on-site
commissioning and maintenance
services. Eaton maintains a working
relationship with the best engineering
services rms across the country, and
helps arrange the successful implanta-
tion of your solar system. The S-Max
250 kW inverter and up-t solutions
easily perform well in Mega-Watt and
Utility-Scale systems. Eaton also offers
a wide range of balance-of-system
(BOS) products, ranging from solar
module source and array combiners,
to DC and AC breakers, electrical and
distribution panels and switchgear.
Low Temperature Equation
Voc_max = Voc + (temp-differential x
temp-coefcient-of-Voc)
The temp-differential is the difference
between the standard module rating
at 25C and the low temperature.
The voltage (Voc) will rise with
temperatures under 25C.
Seek the solar module data sheet for
a list of standard test condition (STC)
data, temperature coefcients, and
any special module-related informa-
tion to determine the low-temperature
open circuit voltage. The NEC 2011,
and industry practice, requires the
use of the sites Extreme Annual
Mean Minimum Design Dry Bulb
Temperature data, available in the
ASHRAE Handbook. Code requires
that the resulting maximum voltage
(Voc) when added in the string of
modules be under 600V. Record
low temperatures provide an
indication of system performance
when temperatures drop to these
levels. The S-Max inverter is designed
to standards higher than 600 Vdc.
High Temperature Equation
Once the maximum number of
modules per string is established,
the minimum number of modules per
string needs to be calculated. Here,
more site-related aspects come into
play, as the voltage of solar modules
decreases with increasing tempera-
ture. The modules (photovoltaic cell)
temperature is inuenced by the
ambient temperature, reected sun-
loads from nearby structures, parapet
walls, roof-coatings, etc. Air-ow
above and behind the solar modules
affect the cell temperature. The
accepted industry standards to add
to the module heating is listed below.
Unusual mounting systems may
adjust these gures, and it is best to
seek assistance in establishing and
planning such installations.
20C for ground or pole mounted
solar systems
25C for roof-top solar systems
mounted at inclined angles
(offers improved air-ow behind
the modules)
30C for roof-top solar systems
mounted at, yet at least 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm) above the roof surface
Vmp_min = Vmp + (temp-differential x
temp-coefcient-of-Vmp)
The temp-differential in this case
includes the above temperature
adders. The Vmp and related
temperature coefcients are listed
on the solar modules data sheets.
While the code doesnt indicate the
high temperature to use (i.e., because
it is an equipment application issue),
the industry standard is to evaluate the
ASHRAE 2% and 4% high temperature
gures, coupled to known location
differences. Record high temperatures
provide an indication of system
performance when climatic condition
reaches these levels.
Beyond the damaging temperature
affects on photovoltaic module Vmp
voltage levels, voltage drop in PV
conductors under such conditions also
need to be calculated and evaluated,
beyond normal temperatures. The
inverter only uses (knows) the Vmp
voltage at the inverter, not at the
PV modules.
Increasing grid voltages also puts a
constraint on the minimum Vmp
voltage at the DC input stage.
1.4-35
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
091
To ensure the full MPPT range without
power-clipping (reduced power
output), prudent PV system designs
shall consider the PV arrays Vmp
voltage drop to the point of the
inverter connection, ambient
temperatures and the PV system
installation types effects on Vmp,
solar module miss-match and
tolerance variations, degradation of
solar modules over time (solar system
life), etc. Typical Vmp design values,
based upon known and expected
conditions are 510% over the
minimum MPPT tracking voltage.
Reference NEC 2011 Section 690,
Solar Photovoltaic Systems.
Emergency Power
Most areas have requirements
for emergency and standby power
systems. The National Electrical Code
does not specically call for any
emergency or standby power, but
does have requirements for those
systems when they are legally
mandated and classed as emergency
(Article 700), legally required standby
(Article 701) by municipal, state,
federal or other codes, or by any
governmental agency having jurisdic-
tion. Optional standby systems, not
legally required, are also covered in
the NEC (Article 702).
Emergency systems are intended to
supply power and illumination essen-
tial for safety to human life, when the
normal supply fails. NEC requirements
are stringent, requiring periodic testing
under load and automatic transfer to
emergency power supply on loss of
normal supply. See Figure 1.4-23.
All wiring from emergency source to
emergency loads must be kept separate
from all other wiring and equipment,
in its own distribution and raceway
system, except in transfer equipment
enclosures and similar locations. The
most common power source for large
emergency loads is an engine-generator
set, but the NEC also permits the
emergency supply (subject to local code
requirements) to be storage batteries,
uninterruptible power supplies, a
separate emergency service, or a
connection to the service ahead of the
normal service disconnecting means.
Unit equipment for emergency illumi-
nation, with a rechargeable battery,
a charger to keep it at full capacity
when normal power is on, one or more
lamps, and a relay to connect the
battery to the lamps on loss of normal
power, is also permitted. Because
of the critical nature of emergency
power, ground fault protection is not
required. It is considered preferable
to risk arcing damage, rather than to
disconnect he emergency supply com-
pletely. For emergency power, ground
fault alarm is required by NEC 700.7(D)
to indicate a ground fault in solidly
grounded wye emergency systems
of more than 150V to ground and
circuit-protective devices rated 1000A
or more.
Legally required standby systems, as
required by the governmental agency
having jurisdiction, are intended to
supply power to selected loads, other
than those classed as emergency
systems, on loss of normal power.
These are usually loads not essential
to human safety, but loss of which
could create hazards or hamper
rescue or re-ghting operations.
Figure 1.4-23. Typical Emergency Power System
To Normal
Distribution
Circuits
Optional Remote PC
with Software
N
LP1
ATS4
BP1 LP2 BP2 LP3 BP3 LP4 BP4
EDP1 EDP2 EDP3 EDP4
ATS3 ATS2 ATS1
E N E N E N E
To Emergency
Circuits
D1 D2 D3 D4
52G1 52G2 52G3 52G4
G1 G2 G3 G4
Main
Service
HMI
Touchscreen
Revenue
Metering
Utility
Source
Paralleling Switchgear
with Distribution
Typical Application: Three engine generator sets serve the load, plus one additional engine
generator set for redundancy to achieve N+1 level of performance. Open or Closed transition is available.
1.4-36
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
092
NEC requirements are similar to those
for emergency systems, except that
wiring may occupy the same distribu-
tion and raceway system as the
normal wiring if desired. Optional
standby systems are those not legally
required, and are intended to protect
private business or property where
life safety does not depend on
performance of the system. Optional
systems can be treated as part of the
normal building wiring system. Both
legally required and optional standby
systems should be installed in such
a manner that they will be fully avail-
able on loss of normal power. It is
preferable to isolate these systems
as much as possible, even though not
required by code.
Where the emergency or standby
source, such as an engine generator
or separate service, has capacity to
supply the entire system, the transfer
scheme can be either a full-capacity
automatic transfer switch, or, less
costly but equally effective, normal
and emergency main circuit breakers,
electrically interlocked such that on
failure of the normal supply the
emergency supply is connected to the
load. However, if the emergency or
standby source does not have capacity
for the full load, as is usually the
case, such a scheme would require
automatic disconnection of the
nonessential loads before transfer.
Simpler and more economical in
such a case is a separate emergency
bus, supplied through an automatic
transfer switch, to feed all critical
loads. The transfer switch connects
this bus to the normal supply, in
normal operation. On failure of the
normal supply, the engine-generator
is started, and when it is up to speed
the automatic switch transfers the
emergency loads to this source. On
return of the normal source, manual or
automatic retransfer of the emergency
loads can take place.
Peak Shaving
Many installations now have
emergency or standby generators.
In the past, they were required for
hospitals and similar locations, but
not common in ofce buildings or
shopping centers. However, many
costly and unfortunate experiences
during utility blackouts in recent years
have led to the more frequent installa-
tion of engine generators in commer-
cial and institutional systems for safety
and for supplying important loads.
Industrial plants, especially in process
industries, usually have some form
of alternate power source to prevent
extremely costly shutdowns. These
standby generating systems are
critical when needed, but they are
needed only infrequently. They
represent a large capital investment.
To be sure that their power will be
available when required, they should
be tested periodically under load.
The cost of electric energy has risen
to new high levels in recent years, and
utilities bill on the basis not only of
power consumed, but also on the
basis of peak demand over a small
interval. As a result, a new use for
in-house generating capacity has
developed. Utilities measure demand
charges on the basis of the maximum
demand for electricity in any given
specic period (typically 15 or 30
minutes) during the month. Some
utilities have a demand ratchet clause
that will continue demand charges on
a given peak demand for a full year,
unless a higher peak results in even
higher charges. One large load, coming
on at a peak time, can create higher
electric demand charges for a year.
Obviously, reducing the peak demand
can result in considerable savings in
the cost of electrical energy. For those
installations with engine generators
for emergency use, modern control
systems (computers or programmable
controllers) can monitor the peak
demand, and start the engine-generator
to supply part of the demand as it
approaches a preset peak value. The
engine-generator must be selected
to withstand the required duty cycle.
The simplest of these schemes trans-
fer specic loads to the generator.
More complex schemes operate the
generator in parallel with the normal
utility supply. The savings in demand
charges can reduce the cost of owning
the emergency generator equipment.
In some instances, utilities with little
reserve capacity have helped nance
the cost of some larger customer-
owned generating equipment. In
return, the customer agrees to take
some or all of his load off the utility
system and on to his own generator at
the request of the utility (with varying
limitations) when the utility load
approaches capacity. In some cases,
the customers generator is paralleled
with the utility to help supply the peak
utility loads, with the utility buying the
supplied power. Some utilities have
been able to delay large capital expen-
ditures for additional generating
capacity by such arrangements.
It is important that the electrical sys-
tem designer providing a substantial
source of emergency and standby
power investigate the possibility of
using it for peak shaving, and even
of partial utility company nancing.
Frequently, substantial savings in
power costs can be realized for a
small additional outlay in distribution
and control equipment.
Peak shaving equipment operating in
parallel with the utility are subject to the
comments made under cogeneration
as to separation from the utility under
fault conditions.
Sound Levels
Sound Levels of Electrical Equipment
for Ofces, Hospitals, Schools and
Similar Buildings
Insurance underwriters and building
owners desire and require that the
electrical apparatus be installed
for maximum safety and the least
interference with the normal use of
the property. Architects should take
particular care with the designs for
hospitals, schools and similar build-
ings to keep the sound perception of
such equipment as motors, blowers
and transformers to a minimum.
Even though transformers are
relatively quiet, resonant conditions
may exist near the equipment, which
will amplify their normal 120 Hz hum.
Therefore, it is important that consid-
eration be given to the reduction of
amplitude and to the absorption of
energy at this frequency. This problem
begins in the designing stages of the
equipment and the building. There are
two points worthy of consideration: 1)
What sound levels are desired in the
normally occupied rooms of this build-
ing? 2) To effect this, what sound level
in the equipment room and what type
of associated acoustical treatment
will give the most economical
installation overall?
A relatively high sound level in the
equipment room does not indicate
an abnormal condition within the
apparatus. However, absorption may
be necessary if sound originating in
an unoccupied equipment room is
objectionable outside the room.
Furthermore, added absorption
material usually is desirable if
there is a build-up of sound
due to reections.
1.4-37
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
093
Some reduction or attenuation takes
place through building walls, the
remainder may be reected in various
directions, resulting in a build-up or
apparent higher levels, especially if
resonance occurs because of room
dimensions or material characteristics.
Area Consideration
In determining permissible sound lev-
els within a building, it is necessary to
consider how the rooms are to be used
and what levels may be objectionable
to occupants of the building. The
ambient sound level values given in
Table 1.4-10 are representative average
values and may be used as a guide in
determining suitable building levels.
Decrease in sound level varies at an
approximate rate of 6 dB for each
doubling of the distance from the
source of sound to the listener. For
example, if the level 6 ft (1.8m) from
a transformer is 50 dB, the level at a
distance of 12 ft (3.7m) would be 44 dB
and at 24 ft (7.3m) the level decreases
to 38 dB, etc. However, this rule applies
only to equipment in large areas
equivalent to an out-of-door installation,
with no nearby reecting surfaces.
Table 1.4-10. Typical Sound Levels
Transformer Sound Levels
Transformers emit a continuous
120 Hz hum with harmonics when
connected to 60 Hz circuits. The
fundamental frequency is the hum
that annoys people primarily because
of its continuous nature. For purposes
of reference, sound measuring
instruments convert the different
frequencies to 1000 Hz and a 40 dB
level. Transformer sound levels based
on NEMA publication TR-1 are listed
in Table 1.4-11.
Description Average
Decibel
Level (dB)
Radio, recording and TV studios
Theatres and music rooms
Hospitals, auditoriums and churches
2530
3035
3540
Classrooms and lecture rooms
Apartments and hotels
Private ofces and conference rooms
3540
3545
4045
Stores
Residence (radio, TV off)
and small ofces
Medium ofce (3 to 10 desks)
4555
53
58
Residence (radio, TV on)
Large store (5 or more clerks)
Factory ofce
60
61
61
Large ofce
Average factory
Average street
64
70
80
Table 1.4-11. Maximum Average Sound LevelsDecibels
Because values given in Table 1.4-11
are in general higher than those given
in Table 1.4-10, the difference must be
attenuated by distance and by proper
use of materials in the design of the
building. An observer may believe
that a transformer is noisy because
the level in the room where it is
located is high. Two transformers of
the same sound output in the same
room increase the sound level in the
room approximately 3 dB, and three
transformers by about 5 dB, etc.
Sounds due to structure-transmitted
vibrations originating from the trans-
former are lowered by mounting the
transformers on vibration dampeners
or isolators. There are a number of
different sound vibration isolating
materials that may be used with
good results. Dry-type power trans-
formers are often built with an isolator
mounted between the transformer
support and case members. The
natural period of the core and coil
structure when mounted on vibration
dampeners is about 10% of the funda-
mental frequency. The reduction in the
transmitted vibration is approximately
98%. If the oor or beams beneath
the transformer are light and exible,
the isolator must be softer or have
improved characteristics in order to
keep the transmitted vibrations to a
minimum. (Enclosure covers and
ventilating louvers are often improp-
erly tightened or gasketed and
produce unnecessary noise.) The
building structure will assist the
dampeners if the transformer is
mounted above heavy oor members
or if mounted on a heavy oor slab.
Positioning of the transformer in
relation to walls and other reecting
surfaces has a great effect on reected
noise and resonances. Often, placing
the transformer at an angle to the wall,
rather than parallel to it, will reduce
noise. Electrical connections to a
substation transformer should
be made with exible braid or
conductors; connections to an
individually mounted transformer
should be in exible conduit.
kVA Liquid-Filled Transformers Dry-Type Transformers
Self-Cooled
Rating (OA)
Forced-Air
Cooled Rating (FA)
Self-Cooled
Rating (AA)
Forced-Air
Cooled Rating (FA)
300
500
750
55
56
58
67
67
58
60
64
67
67
67
1000
1500
2000
58
60
61
67
67
67
64
65
66
67
68
69
2500
3000
3750
62
63
64
67
67
67
68
68
70
71
71
73
5000
6000
7500
65
66
67
67
68
69
71
72
73
73
74
75
10,000 68 70 76
1.4-38
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01094
1.5-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
IEEE Protective Relay Numbers
095
Table 1.5-1. Selected IEEE Device Numbers for Switchgear Apparatus
Device
Number
Function Denition Typical
Uses
2 Time-delay starting or closing relay A device that functions to give a desired amount
of time delay before or after any point of operation
in a switching sequence or protective relay system,
except as specically provided by device functions
48, 62 and 79 described later.
Used for providing a time-delay for
re-transfer back to the normal source
in an automatic transfer scheme.
6 Starting circuit breaker A device whose principal function is to connect
a machine to its source of starting voltage.
19 Starting to running transition timer A device that operates to initiate or cause the
automatic transfer of a machine from the starting
to the running power connection.
Used to transfer a reduced voltage
starter from starting to running.
21 Distance relay A device that functions when the circuit
admittance, impedance or reactance increases or
decreases beyond predetermined limits.
23 Temperature control device A device that functions to raise or to lower the

temperature of a machine or other apparatus, or
of any medium, when its temperature falls below
or rises above, a predetermined level.
Used as a thermostat to control
space heaters in outdoor equipment.
24 Volts per hertz relay A device that operates when the ratio of voltage
to frequency is above a preset value or is below
a different preset value. The relay may have any
combination of instantaneous or time delayed
characteristics.
25 Synchronizing or synchronism check device A device that operates when two AC circuits are
within the desired limits of frequency, phase angle
or voltage, to permit or cause the paralleling of
these two circuits.
In a closed transition breaker
transfer, a 25 relay is used to ensure
two-sources are synchronized before
paralleling. Eaton FP-5000/EDR-5000
feeder protective relays.
27 Undervoltage relay A device which functions on a given value of
undervoltage.
Used to initiate an automatic transfer
when a primary source of power is lost.
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/MP-4000/
EDR-5000/EDR-4000 protective relays.
30 Annunciator relay A non-automatically reset device that gives a
number of separate visual indications upon the
functioning of protective devices, and which may
also be arranged to perform a lockout function.
Used to remotely indicate that a
protective relay has functioned, or
that a circuit breaker has tripped.
Typically, a mechanical drop type
annunciator panel is used.
32 Directional power relay A relay that functions on a desired value of power
ow in a given direction, or upon reverse power
resulting from arc back in the anode or cathode
circuits of a power rectier.
Used to prevent reverse power from
feeding an upstream fault. Often
used when primary backup generation
is used in a facility. Eaton FP-5000/
EDR-5000 protective relays.
33 Position switch A device that makes or breaks contact when the
main device or piece of apparatus, which has no
device function number, reaches a given point.
Used to indicate the position of a
drawout circuit breaker (TOC switch).
34 Master sequence device A device such as a motor-operated multi-contact
switch, or the equivalent, or a programmable
device, that establishes or determines the operating
sequence of the major devices in equipment
during starting and stopping, or during sequential
switching operations.
37 Undercurrent or underpower relay A relay that functions when the current or power
ow decreases below a predetermined value.
Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000
motor protective relays.
38 Bearing protective device A device that functions on excessive bearing
temperature, or on other abnormal mechanical
conditions, such as undue wear, which may
eventually result in excessive bearing temperature.
Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000 motor
protective relays.
40 Field relay A device that functions on a given or abnormally
high or low value or failure of machine eld current,
or on an excessive value of the reactive component
of armature current in an AC machine indicating
abnormally high or low eld excitation.
41 Field circuit breaker A device that functions to apply, or to remove,

the eld excitation of a machine.
42 Running circuit breaker A device whose function is to connect a machine

to its source of running or operating voltage.
This function may also be used for a device, such
as a contactor, that is used in series with a circuit
breaker or other fault-protecting means, primarily
for frequent opening and closing of the circuit.
1.5-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
096
Table 1.5-1. Selected IEEE Device Numbers for Switchgear Apparatus (Continued)
Device
Number
Uses
43 Manual transfer or selector device A manually operated device that transfers control
or potential circuits in order to modify the plan of
operation of the associated equipment or of some
of the associated devices.
44 Unit sequence starting relay A device that functions to start the next available
unit in multiple-unit equipment upon the failure or
non-availability of the normally preceding unit.
46 Reverse-phase, or phase balance,

current relay
A relay that functions when the polyphase
currents are of reverse-phase sequence, or when
the polyphase currents are unbalanced or contain
the negative phase-sequence components above
a given amount.
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000/
EDR-4000 feeder protective relays and
MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000 motor
protective relays.
47 Phase-sequence voltage relay A relay that functions upon a predetermined
value of polyphase voltage in the desired phase
sequence.
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000/
EDR-4000 feeder protective relays
and MP-3000/MP-4000 motor
protective relays.
48 Incomplete sequence relay A relay that generally returns the equipment to the
normal, or off, position and locks it out of the
normal starting, or operating or stopping sequence
is not properly completed within a predetermined
amount of time. If the device is used for alarm
purposes only, it should preferably be designated
as 48A (alarm).
49 Machine, or transformer, thermal relay A relay that functions when the temperature of a
machine armature, or other load carrying winding
or element of a machine, or the temperature
of a power rectier or power transformer
(including a power rectier transformer) exceeds
a predetermined value.
Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000/
ETR-4000 motor protective relays.
50 Instantaneous overcurrent,
or rate-of-rise relay
A relay that functions instantaneously on an
excessive value of current, or an excessive rate of
current rise, thus indicating a fault in the apparatus
of the circuit being protected.
Used for tripping a circuit breaker
instantaneously during a high-level
short circuit. Can trip on phase-
phase (50), phase-neutral (50N),
phase-ground (50G) faults.
Eaton Digitrip 3000, FP-5000/
FP-4000/EDR-5000/EDR-4000/
EDR-3000 protective relays,
MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000/
51 AC time overcurrent relay A relay with either a denite or inverse time
characteristic that functions when the current in an
AC circuit exceeds a predetermined value.
Used for tripping a circuit breaker
after a time delay during a sustained
overcurrent. Used for tripping a
circuit breaker instantaneously
during a high-level short circuit.
Can trip on phase (51), neutral (51N)
or ground (51G) overcurrents.
Eaton Digitrip 3000, FP-5000/
FP-4000/EDR-5000/EDR-4000/
EDR-3000 protective relays,
MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000/
52 AC circuit breaker A device that is used to close and interrupt an
AC power circuit under normal conditions or to
interrupt this circuit under fault or emergency
conditions.
A term applied typically to medium
voltage circuit breakers, or low
voltage power circuit breakers.
Eaton VCP-W vacuum circuit
breaker, magnum DS low voltage
power circuit breaker
53 Exciter or DC generator relay A device that forces the DC machine eld excitation
to build up during starting or that functions when
the machine voltage has built up to a given value.
55 Power factor relay A relay that operates when the power factor
in an AC circuit rises above or below a
predetermined value.
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000
feeder protective relays and MP-4000
motor protective relay.
56 Field application relay A device that automatically controls the application
of the eld excitation to an AC motor at some
predetermined point in the slip cycle.
59 Overvoltage relay A relay that functions on a given value of

overvoltage.
Used to trip a circuit breaker,
protecting downstream equipment
from sustained overvoltages.
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000
feeder protective relays and MP-4000
motor protective relay.
1.5-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
097
Device
Number
Uses
60 Voltage or current balance relay A relay that operates on a given difference in
voltage, or current input or output of two circuits.
62 Time-delay stopping or opening relay A time-delay relay that serves in conjunction with
the device that initiates the shutdown, stopping
or opening operation in an automatic sequence.
Used in conjunction with a 27 device
to delay tripping of a circuit breaker
during a brief loss of primary voltage,
to prevent nuisance tripping.
63 Pressure switch A switch that operates on given values or on a
given rate of change of pressure.
Used to protect a transformer during
a rapid pressure rise during a short
circuit. This device will typically act
to open the protective devices above
and below the transformer. Typically
used with a 63-X auxiliary relay to
trip the circuit breaker.
64 Ground protective relay A relay that functions on a failure of the insulation
of a machine, transformer or of other apparatus to
ground, or on ashover of a DC machine to ground.
Used to detect and act on a ground-
fault condition. In a pulsing high
resistance grounding system, a 64
device will initiate the alarm.
65 Governor A device consisting of an assembly of uid,
electrical or mechanical control equipment used for
regulating the ow of water, steam or other media
to the prime mover for such purposes as starting,
holding speed or load, or stopping.
66 Notching or jogging device A device that functions to allow only a specied

number of operations of a given device, or
equipment, or a specied number of successive
operations within a given time of each other. It also
functions to energize a circuit periodically or for
fractions of specied time intervals, or that is used
to permit intermittent acceleration or jogging of a
machine at low speeds for mechanical positioning.
Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000
motor protective relays.
67 AC directional overcurrent relay A relay that functions on a desired value of AC
overcurrent owing in a predetermined direction.
Eaton FP-5000/EDR-5000 feeder
protective relays.
69 Permissive control device A device that is generally a two-position manually
operated switch that in one position permits the
closing of a circuit breaker, or the placing of
equipment into operation, and in the other position
prevents the circuit breaker to the equipment from
being operated.
Used as a remote-local switch for
circuit breaker control.
71 Level switch A switch that operates on given values, or on a
given rate of change of level.
Used to indicate a low liquid level within
a transformer tank in order to save
transformers from loss-of-insulation
failure. An alarm contact is available
as a standard option on a liquid level
gauge. It is set to close before an unsafe
condition actually occurs.
72 DC circuit breaker A device that is used to close and interrupt a
DC power circuit under normal conditions or to
interrupt this circuit under fault or emergency
conditions.
73 Load-resistor contactor A device that is used to shunt or insert a step of

load limiting, shifting or indicating resistance in
a power circuit; to switch a space heater in circuit;
or to switch a light or regenerative load resistor
of a power rectier or other machine in and out
of circuit.
74 Alarm relay A device other than an annunciator, as covered

under device number 30, which is used to operate,
or to operate in connection with, a visible or
audible alarm.
78 Phase-angle measuring relay A device that functions at a predetermined phase

angle between two voltages, between two currents,
or between voltage and current.
79 AC reclosing relay A relay that controls the automatic closing and

locking out of an AC circuit interrupter.
Used to automatically reclose a
circuit breaker after a trip, assuming
the fault has been cleared after the
power was removed from the circuit.
The recloser will lock-out after a
predetermined amount of failed
attempts to reclose.
1.5-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
098
Device
Number
Uses
81 Frequency relay A relay that functions on a predetermined value of
frequencyeither under or over, or on normal
system frequencyor rate of change frequency.
Used to trip a generator circuit
breaker in the event the frequency
drifts above or below a given value.
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000/
EDR-4000 feeder protective
relays and MP-4000 motor
protective relay.
83 Automatic selective control or transfer relay A relay that operates to select automatically
between certain sources or conditions in
equipment, or performs a transfer operation
automatically.
Used to transfer control power
sources in a double-ended
switchgear lineup.
85 Carrier or pilot-wire relay A device that is operated or restrained by a signal
transmitted or received via any communications
media used for relaying.
86 Locking-out relay An electrically operated hand, or electrically, reset

relay that functions to shut down and hold an
equipment out of service on the occurrence of
abnormal conditions.
Used in conjunction with protective
relays to lock-out a circuit breaker
(or multiple circuit breakers) after
a trip. Typically required to be
manually reset by an operator before
the breaker can be reclosed.
87 Differential protective relay A protective relay that functions on a percentage or
phase angle or other quantitative difference of two
currents or of some other electrical quantities.
Used to protect static equipment,
such as cable, bus or transformers,
by measuring the current differential
between two points. Typically the
upstream and/or downstream circuit
breaker will be incorporated into the
zone of protection. Eaton FP-5000
feeder protective relay (87B) and
MD-3000 protective relay.
90 Regulating device A device that functions to regulate a quantity or
quantities, such as voltage, current, power, speed,
frequency, temperature and load, at a certain value
or between certain (generally close) limits for
machines, tie lines or other apparatus.
91 Voltage directional relay A device that operates when the voltage across an
open circuit breaker or contactor exceeds a given
value in a given direction.
94 Tripping or trip-free relay A relay that functions to trip a circuit breaker,

contactor or equipment, or to permit immediate
tripping by other devices, or to prevent immediate
reclosure of a circuit interrupter, in case it should
open automatically even though its closing circuit
is maintained closed.

1.5-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
Suggested IEEE Designations for Sufx Letters
099
Suggested IEEE Designations
for Sufx Letters
Auxiliary Devices
These letters denote separate auxiliary
devices, such as the following:
C Closing relay/contactor
CL Auxiliary relay, closed
(energized when main device
is in closed position)
CS Control switch
D Down position switch relay
L Lowering relay
O Opening relay/contactor
OP Auxiliary relay, open
(energized when main device
is in open position)
PB Push button
R Raising relay
U UP position switch relay
X Auxiliary relay
Y Auxiliary relay
Z Auxiliary relay
Actuating Quantities
These letters indicate the condition or
electrical quantity to which the device
responds, or the medium in which it is
located, such as the following:
A Amperes/alternating
C Current
F Frequency/fault
I0 Zero sequence current
I-, I2 Negative sequence current
I+, I1 Positive sequence current
P Power/pressure
PF Power factor
S Speed
T Temperature
V Voltage/volts/vacuum
VAR Reactive power
VB Vibration
W Watts
Main Device
The following letters denote the main
device to which the numbered device
is applied or is related:
A Alarm/auxiliary power
AC Alternating current
BP Bypass
BT Bus tie
C Capacitor
DC Direct current
E Exciter
F Feeder/eld
G Generator/ground
M Motor/metering
MOC Mechanism operated contact
S Synchronizing/secondary
T Transformer
TOC Truck-operated contacts
Main Device Parts
These letters denote parts of the
main device, except auxiliary contacts,
position switches, limit switches and
torque limit switches:
C Coil/condenser/capacitor
CC Closing coil/closing contactor
HC Holding coil
M Operating motor
OC Opening contactor
S Solenoid
SI Seal-in
T Target
TC Trip coil
Other Sufx Letters
The following letters cover all other
distinguishing features, characteris-
tics or conditions not specically
described in Auxiliary Devices through
Main Device Parts, which serve to
describe the use of the device in the
equipment, such as:
A Automatic
BF Breaker failure
C Close
D Decelerating/down
E Emergency
F Failure/forward
HS High speed
L Local/lower
M Manual
O Open
OFF Off
ON On
R Raise/reclosing/remote/reverse
T Test/trip
TDC Time-delay closing contact
TDDO Time delayed relay coil
drop-out
TDO Time-delay opening contact
TDPU Time delayed relay coil pickup
THD Total harmonic distortion
1.5-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
Codes and Standards
100
Codes and Standards
The National Electrical Code (NEC),
NFPA Standard No. 70, is the most
prevalent electrical code in the United
States. The NEC, which is revised every
three years, has no legal standing of
its own, until it is adopted as law by
a jurisdiction, which may be a city,
county or state. Most jurisdictions
adopt the NEC in its entirety; some
adopt it with variations, usually more
rigid, to suit local conditions and
requirements. A few large cities, such
as New York and Chicago, have their
own electrical codes, basically similar
to the NEC. The designer must deter-
mine which code applies in the area
of a specic project.
The Occupational Safety and Health
Act (OSHA) of 1970 sets uniform
national requirements for safety in the
workplaceanywhere that people are
employed. Originally OSHA adopted
the 1971 NEC as rules for electrical
safety. As the NEC was amended every
three years, the involved process for
modifying a federal law such as OSHA
made it impossible for the act to adopt
each new code revision. To avoid this
problem, the OSHA administration
in 1981 adopted its own code, a con-
densed version of the NEC containing
only those provisions considered
related to occupational safety. OSHA
was amended to adopt this code,
based on NFPA Standard 70E, Part 1,
which is now federal law.
The NEC is a minimum safety
standard. Efcient and adequate
design usually requires not just
meeting, but often exceeding NEC
requirements to provide an effective,
reliable, economical electrical system.
Many equipment standards have been
established by the National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
and the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI). Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) has standards that
equipment must meet before UL will
list or label it. Most jurisdictions and
OSHA require that where equipment
listed as safe by a recognized labora-
tory is available, unlisted equipment
may not be used. UL is by far the most
widely accepted national laboratory,
although Factory Mutual Insurance
Company lists some equipment, and
a number of other testing laboratories
have been recognized and accepted.
The Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers (IEEE) publishes a number
of books (the color book series) on
recommended practices for the design
of industrial buildings, commercial
buildings, emergency power systems,
grounding, and the like. Most of these
IEEE standards have been adopted as
ANSI standards. They are excellent
guides, although they are not in any
way mandatory.
A design engineer should conform
to all applicable codes, and require
equipment to be listed by UL or
another recognized testing laboratory
wherever possible, and to meet
ANSI or NEMA standards. ANSI/IEEE
recommended practices should
be followed to a great extent. In
many cases, standards should be
exceeded to get a system of the
quality required. The design goal
should be a safe, efcient, long-
lasting, exible and economical
Professional Organizations
American National Standards Institute
(ANSI)
Headquarters:
1819 L Street, NW
6th Floor
Washington, DC 20036
202-293-8020
Operations:
25 West 43rd Street
4th Floor
New York, NY 10036
212-642-4900
www.ansi.org
Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers (IEEE)
Headquarters:
3 Park Avenue
17th Floor
New York, NY 10016-5997
212-419-7900
Operations:
445 Hoes Lane
Piscataway, NJ 08854-1331
732-981-0060
www.ieee.org
International Association of Electrical
Inspectors (IAEI)
901 Waterfall Way
Suite 602
Richardson, TX 75080-7702
972-235-1455
www.iaei.org
National Electrical Manufacturers
Association (NEMA)
1300 North 17th Street
Suite 1847
Rosslyn, VA 22209
703-841-3200
www.nema.org
National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA)
1 Battery March Park
Quincy, MA 02169-7471
617-770-3000
www.nfpa.org
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
333 Pngsten Road
Northbrook, IL 60062-2096
847-272-8800
www.ul.com
International Code Council (ICC)
5203 Leesburg Pike
Suite 600
Falls Church, VA 22041
1-888-422-7233
www.iccsafe.org
The American Institute of Architects (AIA)
1735 New York Avenue, NW
Washington, DC 20006-5292
202-626-7300
www.aia.org
1.5-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
Motor Protective Device Data
101
Motor Protection
Consistent with the 2011 NEC
430.6(A)(1) circuit breaker, HMCP and
fuse rating selections are based on
full load currents for induction motors
running at speeds normal for belted
motors and motors with normal
torque characteristics using data taken
from NEC Table 430.250 (three-phase).
Actual motor nameplate ratings shall
be used for selecting motor running
overload protection. Motors built
special for low speeds, high torque
characteristics, special starting
conditions and applications will
require other considerations as
dened in the application section
of the NEC.
These additional considerations may
require the use of a higher rated HMCP,
or at least one with higher magnetic
pickup settings.
Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse
ampere rating selections are in
line with maximum rules given in
NEC 430.52 and Table 430.250. Based
on known characteristics of Eaton type
breakers, specic units are recom-
mended. The current ratings are no
more than the maximum limits set by
the NEC rules for motors with code
letters F to V or without code letters.
Motors with lower code letters will
require further considerations.
In general, these selections were
based on:
1. Ambientoutside enclosure not
more than 40C (104F).
2. Motor startinginfrequent
starting, stopping or reversing.
3. Motor accelerating time
10 seconds or less.
4. Locked rotormaximum 6 times
motor FLA.
Type HMCP motor circuit protector
may not set at more than 1300% of
the motor full-load current to comply
with NEC 430.52. (Except for NEMA
Design B energy high-efciency
motors that can be set up to 1700%.)
Circuit breaker selections are based
on types with standard interrupting
ratings. Higher interrupting rating types
may be required to satisfy specic
system application requirements.
For motor full load currents of
208V and 200V, increase the
corresponding 230V motor values
by 10 and 15% respectively.
Table 1.5-2. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP), Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection Guide
Horsepower Full Load
Amperes
(NEC) FLA
Fuse Size NEC 430.52
Maximum
Amperes
Recommended Eaton
Circuit
Breaker
Motor Circuit
Protector Type HMCP
Time Delay Non-Time Delay Amperes Amperes Adj. Range
230V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
3.6
5.2
6.8
9.6
10
10
15
20
15
20
25
30
15
15
15
20
7
15
15
30
2170
45150
45150
90300
5
7-1/2
10
15
15.2
22
28
42
30
40
50
80
50
70
90
150
30
50
60
90
30
50
50
70
90300
150500
150500
210700
20
25
30
40
54
68
80
104
100
125
150
200
175
225
250
350
100
125
150
150
100
150
150
150
3001000
4501500
4501500
7502500
50
60
75
100
130
154
192
248
250
300
350
450
400
500
600
800
200
225
300
400
150
250
400
400
7502500
12502500
20004000
20004000
125
150
200
312
360
480
600
700
1000
1000
1200
1600
500
600
700
600
600
600
18006000
18006000
18006000
460V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.8
2.6
3.4
4.8
6
6
6
10
6
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
7
7
7
15
2170
2170
2170
45150
5
7-1/2
10
15
7.6
11
14
21
15
20
25
40
25
35
45
70
15
25
35
45
15
30
30
50
45150
90300
90300
150500
20
25
30
40
27
34
40
52
50
60
70
100
90
110
125
175
50
70
70
100
50
70
100
100
150500
210700
3001000
3001000
50
60
75
100
65
77
96
124
125
150
175
225
200
150
300
400
110
125
150
175
150
150
150
150
4501500
7502500
7502500
7502500
125
150
200
156
180
240
300
350
450
500
600
800
225
250
350
250
400
400
12502500
20004000
20004000
575V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.4
2.1
2.7
3.9
3
6
6
10
6
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
3
7
7
7
930
2170
2170
2170
5
7-1/2
10
15
6.1
9
11
17
15
20
20
30
20
30
35
60
15
20
25
40
15
15
30
30
45150
45150
90300
90300
20
25
30
40
22
27
32
41
40
50
60
80
70
90
100
125
50
60
60
80
50
50
50
100
150500
150500
150500
3001000
50
60
75
100
52
62
77
99
100
110
150
175
175
200
250
300
100
125
150
175
100
150
150
150
3001000
7502500
7502500
7502500
125
150
200
125
144
192
225
300
350
400
450
600
200
225
300
250
250
400
12502500
12502500
20004000
1.5-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
Motor Protective Device Data
102
Table 1.5-3. 60 Hz, Recommended Protective Setting for Induction Motors
Consult fuse manufacturers catalog for smaller fuse ratings.
Types are for minimum interrupting capacity breakers. Ensure that the fault duty does not exceed breakers I.C.
hp Full Load
Amperes
(NEC) FLA
Minimum Wire Size
75C Copper Ampacity
at 125% FLA
Minimum Conduit Size,
Inches (mm)
Maximum Amperes
Recommended Eaton:
Circuit
Breaker
Amperes
Motor Circuit
Protector THW THWN
XHHN
Time
Delay
Non-Time
Delay
Size Amperes Amperes Adjustable Range
115V, Single-Phase
3/4
1
1-1/2
13.8
16
20
14
14
12
20
20
30
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
25
30
35
45
50
60
30
35
40
Two-pole device
not available
2
3
5
7-1/2
24
34
56
80
10
8
4
3
30
50
85
100
0.50 (12.7)
0.75 (19.1)
1.00 (25.4)
1.00 (25.4)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.75 (19.1)
1.00 (25.4)
45
60
100
150
80
110
175
250
50
70
100
150
230V, Single-Phase
3/4
1
1-1/2
6.9
8
10
14
14
14
20
20
20
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
15
15
20
25
25
30
15
20
25
Two-pole device
not available
2
3
5
7-1/2
12
17
28
40
14
12
10
8
20
30
50
50
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.75 (19.1)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
25
30
50
70
40
60
90
125
30
40
60
80
1.5-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
Chart of Short Circuit Currents for Transformers
103
Table 1.5-4. Secondary Short-Circuit Current of Typical Power Transformers
Short-circuit capacity values shown correspond to kVA and impedances shown in this table. For impedances other than these, short-circuit currents
are inversely proportional to impedance.
The motors short-circuit current contributions are computed on the basis of motor characteristics that will give four times normal current.
For 208V, 50% motor load is assumed while for other voltages 100% motor load is assumed. For other percentages, the motor short-circuit
current will be in direct proportion.
Trans-
former
Rating
Three-
Phase
kVA and
Impedance
Percent
Maximum
Short-
Circuit
kVA
Available
from
Primary
System
208V, Three-Phase 240V, Three-Phase 480V, Three-Phase 600V, Three-Phase
Rated
Load
Contin-
uous
Current,
Amps
rms Symmetrical Amps
Rated
Load
Contin-
uous
Current,
Amps
Rated
Load
Contin-
uous
Current,
Amps
Rated
Load
Contin-
uous
Current,
Amps
Trans-
former
Alone
50%
Motor
Load
Com-
bined
Trans-
former
Alone
100%
Motor
Load
Com-
bined
Trans-
former
Alone
100%
Motor
Load
Com-
bined
Trans-
former
Alone
100%
Motor
Load
Com-
bined
300
5%
50,000
100,000
150,000
834
834
834
14,900
15,700
16,000
1700
1700
1700
16,600
17,400
17,700
722
722
722
12,900
13,600
13,900
2900
2900
2900
15,800
16,500
16,800
361
361
361
6400
6800
6900
1400
1400
1400
7800
8200
8300
289
289
289
5200
5500
5600
1200
1200
1200
6400
6700
6800
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
834
834
834
16,300
16,500
16,700
1700
1700
1700
18,000
18,200
18,400
722
722
722
14,100
14,300
14,400
2900
2900
2900
17,000
17,200
17,300
361
361
361
7000
7100
7200
1400
1400
1400
8400
8500
8600
289
289
289
5600
5700
5800
1200
1200
1200
6800
6900
7000
500
5%
50,000
100,000
150,000
1388
1388
1388
21,300
25,200
26,000
2800
2800
2800
25,900
28,000
28,800
1203
1203
1203
20,000
21,900
22,500
4800
4800
4800
24,800
26,700
27,300
601
601
601
10,000
10,900
11,300
2400
2400
2400
12,400
13,300
13,700
481
481
481
8000
8700
9000
1900
1900
1900
9900
10,600
10,900
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
1388
1388
1388
26,700
27,200
27,800
2800
2800
2800
29,500
30,000
30,600
1203
1203
1203
23,100
23,600
24,100
4800
4800
4800
27,900
28,400
28,900
601
601
601
11,600
11,800
12,000
2400
2400
2400
14,000
14,200
14,400
481
481
481
9300
9400
9600
1900
1900
1900
11,200
11,300
11,500
750
5.75%
50,000
100,000
150,000
2080
2080
2080
28,700
32,000
33,300
4200
4200
4200
32,900
36,200
37,500
1804
1804
1804
24,900
27,800
28,900
7200
7200
7200
32,100
35,000
36,100
902
902
902
12,400
13,900
14,400
3600
3600
3600
16,000
17,500
18,000
722
722
722
10,000
11,100
11,600
2900
2900
2900
12,900
14,000
14,500
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
2080
2080
2080
34,400
35,200
36,200
4200
4200
4200
38,600
39,400
40,400
1804
1804
1804
29,800
30,600
31,400
7200
7200
7200
37,000
37,800
38,600
902
902
902
14,900
15,300
15,700
3600
3600
3600
18,500
18,900
19,300
722
722
722
11,900
12,200
12,600
2900
2900
2900
14,800
15,100
15,500
1000
5.75%
50,000
100,000
150,000
2776
2776
2776
35,900
41,200
43,300
5600
5600
5600
41,500
46,800
48,900
2406
2406
2406
31,000
35,600
37,500
9800
9800
9800
40,600
45,200
47,100
1203
1203
1203
15,500
17,800
18,700
4800
4800
4800
20,300
22,600
23,500
962
962
962
12,400
14,300
15,000
3900
3900
3900
16,300
18,200
18,900
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
2776
2776
2776
45,200
46,700
48,300
5600
5600
5600
50,800
52,300
53,900
2406
2406
2406
39,100
40,400
41,800
9800
9800
9800
48,700
50,000
51,400
1203
1203
1203
19,600
20,200
20,900
4800
4800
4800
24,400
25,000
25,700
962
962
962
15,600
16,200
16,700
3900
3900
3900
19,500
20,100
20,600
1500
5.75%
50,000
100,000
150,000
4164
4164
4164
47,600
57,500
61,800
8300
8300
8300
55,900
65,800
70,100
3609
3609
3609
41,200
49,800
53,500
14,400
14,400
14,400
55,600
64,200
57,900
1804
1804
1804
20,600
24,900
26,700
7200
7200
7200
27,800
32,100
33,900
1444
1444
1444
16,500
20,000
21,400
5800
5800
5800
22,300
25,800
27,200
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
4164
4164
4164
65,600
68,800
72,500
8300
8300
8300
73,900
77,100
80,800
3609
3609
3609
56,800
59,600
62,800
14,400
14,400
14,400
71,200
74,000
77,200
1804
1804
1804
28,400
29,800
31,400
7200
7200
7200
35,600
37,000
38,600
1444
1444
1444
22,700
23,900
25,100
5800
5800
5800
28,500
29,700
30,900
2000
5.75%
50,000
100,000
150,000
2406
2406
2406
24,700
31,000
34,000
9600
9600
9600
34,300
40,600
43,600
1924
1924
1924
19,700
24,800
27,200
7800
7800
7800
27,500
32,600
35,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
2406
2406
2406
36,700
39,100
41,800
9600
9600
9600
46,300
48,700
51,400
1924
1924
1924
29,400
31,300
33,500
7800
7800
7800
37,200
39,100
41,300
2500
5.75%
50,000
100,000
150,000
3008
3008
3008
28,000
36,500
40,500
12,000
12,000
12,000
40,000
48,500
52,500
2405
2405
2405
22,400
29,200
32,400
9600
9600
9600
32,000
38,800
42,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
3008
3008
3008
44,600
48,100
52,300
12,000
12,000
12,000
56,600
60,100
64,300
2405
2405
2405
35,600
38,500
41,800
9600
9600
9600
45,200
48,100
51,400
3000
5.75%
50,000
100,000
150,000
3609
3609
3609
30,700
41,200
46,600
14,000
14,000
14,000
44,700
55,200
60,600
2886
2886
2886
24,600
33,000
37,300
11,500
11,500
11,500
36,100
44,500
48,800
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
3609
3609
3609
51,900
56,800
62,800
14,000
14,000
14,000
65,900
70,800
76,800
2886
2886
2886
41,500
45,500
50,200
11,500
11,500
11,500
53,000
57,000
61,700
3750
5.75%
50,000
100,000
150,000
4511
4511
4511
34,000
47,500
54,700
18,000
18,000
18,000
52,000
65,500
72,700
3608
3608
3608
27,200
38,000
43,700
14,400
14,400
14,400
41,600
52,400
58,100
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
4511
4511
4511
62,200
69,400
78,500
18,000
18,000
18,000
80,200
87,400
96,500
3608
3608
3608
49,800
55,500
62,800
14,400
14,400
14,400
64,200
69,900
77,200
1.5-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
Transformer Full Load Amperes
104
Table 1.5-5. Transformer Full-Load Current, Three-Phase, Self-Cooled Ratings
Voltage, Line-to-Line
kVA 208 240 480 600 2400 4160 7200 12,000 12,470 13,200 13,800 22,900 34,400
30
45
75
83.3
125
208
72.2
108
180
36.1
54.1
90.2
28.9
43.3
72.2
7.22
10.8
18.0
4.16
6.25
10.4
2.41
3.61
6.01
1.44
2.17
3.61
1.39
2.08
3.47
1.31
1.97
3.28
1.26
1.88
3.14
0.75
1.13
1.89
0.50
0.76
1.26
112-1/2
150
225
312
416
625
271
361
541
135
180
271
108
144
217
27.1
36.1
54.1
15.6
20.8
31.2
9.02
12.0
18.0
5.41
7.22
10.8
5.21
6.94
10.4
4.92
6.56
9.84
4.71
6.28
9.41
2.84
3.78
5.67
1.89
2.52
3.78
300
500
750
833
1388
2082
722
1203
1804
361
601
902
289
481
722
72.2
120
180
41.6
69.4
104
24.1
40.1
60.1
14.4
24.1
36.1
13.9
23.1
34.7
13.1
21.9
32.8
12.6
20.9
31.4
7.56
12.6
18.9
5.04
8.39
12.6
1000
1500
2000
2776
4164
2406
3608
4811
1203
1804
2406
962
1443
1925
241
361
481
139
208
278
80.2
120
160
48.1
72.2
96.2
46.3
69.4
92.6
43.7
65.6
87.5
41.8
62.8
83.7
25.2
37.8
50.4
16.8
25.2
33.6
2500
3000
3750
3007
3609
4511
2406
2887
3608
601
722
902
347
416
520
200
241
301
120
144
180
116
139
174
109
131
164
105
126
157
63.0
75.6
94.5
42.0
50.4
62.9
5000
7500
10,000
4811
1203
1804
2406
694
1041
1388
401
601
802
241
361
481
231
347
463
219
328
437
209
314
418
126
189
252
83.9
126
168
1.5-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
Impedances Data
105
Approximate Impedance Data
Table 1.5-6. Typical Impedances
Three-Phase Transformers Liquid-Filled
Values are typical. For guaranteed values,
refer to transformer manufacturer.
Table 1.5-7. 15 kV Class Primary
Oil Liquid-Filled Substation Transformers
Table 1.5-8. 15 kV Class Primary
Dry-Type Substation Transformers
kVA Liquid-Filled
Network Padmount
37.5
45
50
75
112.5
150
3.4
3.2
2.4
225
300
500
5.00
5.00
3.3
3.4
4.6
750
1000
1500
5.00
5.00
7.00
5.75
5.75
5.75
2000
2500
3000
7.00
7.00
5.75
5.75
6.50
3750
5000
6.50
6.50
kVA %Z %R %X X/R
65C Rise
112.5
150
225
5.00
5.00
5.00
1.71
1.88
1.84
4.70
4.63
4.65
2.75
2.47
2.52
300
500
750
5.00
5.00
5.75
1.35
1.50
1.41
4.81
4.77
5.57
3.57
3.18
3.96
1000
1500
2000
5.75
5.75
5.75
1.33
1.12
0.93
5.59
5.64
5.67
4.21
5.04
6.10
2500 5.75 0.86 5.69 6.61
kVA %Z %R %X X/R
150C Rise
300
500
750
4.50
5.75
5.75
2.87
2.66
2.47
3.47
5.10
5.19
1.21
1.92
2.11
1000
1500
2000
5.75
5.75
5.75
2.16
1.87
1.93
5.33
5.44
5.42
2.47
2.90
2.81
2500 5.75 1.74 5.48 3.15
80C Rise
300
500
750
4.50
5.75
5.75
1.93
1.44
1.28
4.06
5.57
5.61
2.10
3.87
4.38
1000
1500
2000
5.75
5.75
5.75
0.93
0.87
0.66
5.67
5.68
5.71
6.10
6.51
8.72
2500 5.75 0.56 5.72 10.22
Table 1.5-9. 600V Primary Class Three-Phase
NEMA TP-1 Energy-Efcient Dry-Type
Distribution Transformers, Aluminum Wound
Note: Values are typical. Measurements at
temperature rise +20C.
Table 1.5-10. 600V Primary Class Three-Phase
NEMA TP-1 Energy-Efcient Dry-Type
Distribution Transformers, Copper Wound
Note: Values are typical. Measurements at
temperature rise +20C.
Table 1.5-11. 600V Primary Class
NEMA Type TP-1 Dry-Type Transformers
kVA %Z %R %X X/R
150C Rise Aluminum
15
30
45
4.8
4.6
5.1
4.6
3.5
3.8
1.4
3.0
3.4
0.30
0.86
0.91
75
112.5
150
5.3
6.0
5.3
3.5
2.9
3.0
4.0
5.2
4.4
1.14
1.79
1.50
225
300
500
5.1
7.6
7.2
2.6
2.5
1.7
4.4
7.2
7.0
1.68
2.88
4.20
750 8.0 1.5 7.9 5.42
115C Rise Aluminum
15
30
45
4.4
4.8
4.6
4.3
4.4
2.8
1.2
1.8
3.7
0.27
0.41
1.35
75
112.5
150
5.9
3.1
5.2
2.8
2.5
2.2
5.1
1.9
4.7
1.82
0.79
2.16
225
300
500
6.2
5.4
6.6
2.0
2.0
1.1
5.8
4.9
6.5
2.93
2.44
6.09
80C Rise Aluminum
15
30
45
3.5
3.4
3.3
2.6
2.4
1.6
2.3
2.5
2.9
0.89
1.02
1.76
75
112.5
150
4.3
4.1
4.7
1.9
1.8
1.4
3.9
3.7
4.5
2.05
2.04
3.22
225
300
500
5.6
6.1
5.4
1.4
1.4
0.8
5.4
5.9
5.3
3.77
4.18
6.57
kVA %Z %R %X X/R
150C Rise Copper
15
30
45
4.8
5.2
4.6
4.0
3.1
3.5
2.6
4.1
3.0
0.65
1.33
0.86
75
112.5
150
4.3
5.1
4.3
3.4
2.9
2.5
2.5
4.2
3.5
0.72
1.44
1.39
225
300
500
7.4
5.5
6.8
2.9
2.4
1.4
6.8
4.9
6.7
2.32
2.04
4.86
750 8.2 0.8 8.1 10.13
115C Rise Copper
15
30
45
4.8
4.6
4.4
3.8
3.0
3.1
2.9
3.5
3.1
0.76
1.19
0.99
75
112.5
150
4.7
5.0
4.4
2.7
2.3
1.9
3.9
4.5
4.0
1.43
1.98
2.09
225
300
500
8.1
5.2
6.8
2.6
1.7
1.3
7.7
4.9
6.6
2.99
2.80
5.16
80C Rise Copper
15
30
45
2.1
3.0
3.9
1.7
2.0
2.5
1.3
2.1
3.1
0.75
1.05
1.25
75
112.5
150
4.3
3.3
3.7
2.0
1.8
1.8
3.8
2.8
3.2
1.93
1.60
1.78
225
300
5.4
6.1
1.5
1.2
5.2
6.0
3.60
5.07
kVA Temperature Rise Impedance
300
300
300
80
115
150
3.16 at 100C
3.03 at 135C
7.06 at 170C
500
500
115
150
5.97 at 135C
6.04 at 170C
750
750
115
150
7.21 at 135C
No test
1.5-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
Transformer Losses
106
Transformer Loss Data
See product sections for data.
Transformer Losses at Reduced Loads
Information on losses based on actual
transformer test data can be obtained
from the manufacturer. Transformer
manufacturers provide no load watt
losses and total watt losses in accor-
dance with ANSI standards. The
calculated difference between the
no load losses and the total losses
are typically described as the load
losses. Although transformer coils
are manufactured with either aluminum
or copper conductors, the industry
has sometimes referred to these load
losses as the copper losses.
Transformer losses for various
loading can be estimated in the
following manner. The no load watt
losses of the transformer are due to
magnetization and are present
whenever the transformer is
energized. The load watt losses are
the difference between the no load
watt losses and the full load watt
losses. The load watt losses are
proportional to I
2
R and can be
estimated to vary with the transformer
load by the square of the load current.
For example, the approximate watts
loss data for a 1000 kVA oil-lled
substation transformer is shown in
the table as having 1800 watts no
load losses and 15,100 watts full load
losses, so the load losses are approxi-
mately 13,300 watts (15,1001800). The
transformer losses can be calculated
for various loads as follows.
At 0% load:
1800 watts
At 50% load:
1800 watts + (13,300)(0.5)
2
=
1800 watts + 3325 watts = 5125 watts
At 100% load:
1800 watts + 13,300 watts = 15,100 watts
At 110% load:
1800 watts + (13,300)(1.1)
2
=
1800 watts + 16,093 watts = 17,893 watts
Because transformer losses vary
between designs and manufacturers,
additional losses such as from
cooling fans can be ignored for
these approximations.
Note: 1 watthour = 3.413 Btu.
1.5-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
Power Equipment Losses and Enclosures/Knockout Dimensions
107
Power Equipment Losses
Table 1.5-12. Power Equipment Losses
Note: The information provided on power
equipment losses is generic data intended
to be used for sizing of HVAC equipment.
Equipment Watts
Loss
Medium Voltage Switchgear (Indoor, 5 and 15 kV)
1200A breaker
2000A breaker
3000A breaker
4000A breaker
600
1400
2100
3700
600A unfused switch
1200A unfused switch
100A CL fuses
500
750
840
Medium Voltage Starters (Indoor, 5 kV)
400A starter FVNR
800A starter FVNR
600A fused switch
1200A fused switch
600
1000
500
800
Low Voltage Switchgear (Indoor, 480V)
800A breaker
1600A breaker
2000A breaker
400
1000
1500
3200A breaker
4000A breaker
5000A breaker
2400
3000
4700
Fuse limiters800A CB
200
500
750
Fuse truck3200A CB
Fuse truck4000A CB
3600
4500
Structures3200A
Structures4000A
Structures5000A
4000
5000
7000
High resistance grounding 1200
Panelboards (Indoor, 480V)
225A, 42 circuit 300
Low Voltage Busway (Indoor, Copper, 480V)
800A
1200A
1350A
44 per foot
60 per foot
66 per foot
1600A
2000A
2500A
72 per foot
91 per foot
103 per foot
3200A
4000A
5000A
144 per foot
182 per foot
203 per foot
Motor Control Centers (Indoor, 480V)
NEMA Size 1 starter
NEMA Size 2 starter
NEMA Size 3 starter
39
56
92
NEMA Size 4 starter
NEMA Size 5 starter
Structures
124
244
200
Adjustable Frequency Drives (Indoor, 480V)
Adjustable frequency drives > 96%
efciency
Enclosures
The following are reproduced from NEMA 250.
Table 1.5-13. Comparison of Specic Applications of Enclosures for Indoor Nonhazardous Locations
These enclosures may be ventilated.
These bers and ying are nonhazardous materials and are not considered the Class III type
ignitable bers or combustible yings. For Class III type ignitable bers or combustible yings,
see the National Electrical Code, Article 500.
Table 1.5-14. Comparison of Specic Applications of Enclosures for Outdoor Nonhazardous Locations
These enclosures may be ventilated.
External operating mechanisms are not required to be operable when the enclosure is ice covered.
External operating mechanisms are operable when the enclosure is ice covered.
Table 1.5-15. Comparison of Specic Applications of Enclosures for Indoor Hazardous Locations
For Class III type ignitable bers or combustible yings, see the National Electrical Code, Article 500.
Due to the characteristics of the gas, vapor or dust, a product suitable for one class or group may
not be suitable for another class or group unless so marked on the product.
Note: If the installation is outdoors and/or additional protection is required by Tables 1.5-13 and
1.5-14, a combination-type enclosure is required.
Provides a Degree of Protection Against the
Following Environmental Conditions
Enclosure Type
1 2 4 4X 5 6 6P 12 12K 13
Incidental contact with the enclosed equipment
Falling dirt
Falling liquids and light splashing
Circulating dust, lint, bers and yings

Settling airborne dust, lint, bers and yings
Hosedown and splashing water
Oil and coolant seepage

Oil or coolant spraying and splashing
Corrosive agents

Occasional temporary submersion

Occasional prolonged submersion

Provides a Degree of Protection Against the

Following Environmental Conditions
Enclosure Type
3 3R 3S 4 4X 6 6P
Incidental contact with the enclosed equipment
Rain, snow and sleet
Sleet
Windblown dust
Hosedown
Corrosive agents

Occasional temporary submersion

Occasional prolonged submersion

Provides a Degree of Protection Against

Atmospheres Typically Containing
(For Complete Listing, See NFPA 497M)
Class Enclosure Types
7 and 8, Class I Groups
Enclosure Type
9, Class II Groups
A B C D E F G 10
Acetylene
Hydrogen, manufactured gas
diethyl ether, ethylene, cyclopropane
I
I
I
Gasoline, hexane, butane, naphtha, propane,

acetone, toluene, isoprene
Metal dust
Carbon black, coal dust, coke dust
I
II
II
Flour, starch, grain dust

Fibers, yings
Methane with or without coal dust
II
III
MSHA
1.5-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
Conductor Resistance, Reactance, Impedance
108
Average Characteristics of
600V Conductors
Ohms per 1000 ft (305m)
The tables below are average charac-
teristics based on data from IEEE
Standard 141-1993. Values from
different sources vary because of
operating temperatures, wire
stranding, insulation materials
and thicknesses, overall diameters,
random lay of multiple conductors
in conduit, conductor spacing, and
other divergences in materials, test
conditions and calculation methods.
These tables are for 600V 5 kV and
15 kV conductors, at an average
temperature of 75C. Other parameters
are listed in the notes. For medium
voltage cables, differences among
manufacturers are considerably
greater because of the wider variations
in insulation materials and thick-
nesses, shielding, jacketing, overall
diameters, and the like. Therefore,
data for medium voltage cables should
be obtained from the manufacturer
of the cable to be used.
Application Notes
Resistance and reactance are
phase-to-neutral values, based on
60 Hz AC, three-phase, four-wire
distribution, in ohms per 100 ft
(30m) of circuit length (not total
conductor lengths)
Based upon conductivity of 100%
for copper, 61% for aluminum
Based on conductor temperatures
of 75C. Reactance values will
have negligible variation with
temperature. Resistance of both
copper and aluminum conductors
will be approximately 5% lower
at 60C or 5% higher at 90C.
Data shown in tables may be
used without signicant error
between 60 and 90C
For interlocked armored cable,
use magnetic conduit data for
steel armor and non-magnetic
conduit data for aluminum armor
For busway impedance data, see

Tab 21 of this catalog
For PF (power factor) values less
than 1.0, the effective impedance Z
e

is calculated from
For copper cable data, resistance
based on tinned copper at 60 Hz;
600V and 5 kV nonshielded cable
based on varnished cambric insula-
tion; 5 kV shielded and 15 kV cable
based on neoprene insulation
For aluminum cable data, cable is
cross-linked polyethylene insulated
Table 1.5-16. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Copper Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 ft (305m) at 75C (a) Three Single Conductors
Note: More tables on Page 1.5-15.
Z X
2
R
2
+ =
Z
e
R PF X sin (arc cos PF) + =
Wire Size,
AWG or
kcmil
In Magnetic Duct In Non-Magnetic Duct
600V and 5 kV Non-Shielded 5 kV Shielded and 15 kV 600V and 5 kV Non-Shielded 5 kV Shielded and 15 kV
R X Z R X Z R X Z R X Z
8
8 (solid)
6
6 (solid)
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.0754
0.0754
0.0685
0.0685
0.814
0.790
0.515
0.501
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.0860
0.0860
0.0796
0.0796
0.816
0.791
0.516
0.502
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.0603
0.0603
0.0548
0.0548
0.813
0.788
0.513
0.499
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.0688
0.0688
0.0636
0.0636
0.814
0.789
0.514
0.500
4
4 (solid)
2
1
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.0632
0.0632
0.0585
0.0570
0.327
0.318
0.210
0.170
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.0742
0.0742
0.0685
0.0675
0.329
0.321
0.214
0.174
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.0506
0.0506
0.0467
0.0456
0.325
0.316
0.207
0.166
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.0594
0.0594
0.0547
0.0540
0.326
0.318
0.209
0.169
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
0.128
0.102
0.0805
0.0640
0.0540
0.0533
0.0519
0.0497
0.139
0.115
0.0958
0.0810
0.128
0.103
0.0814
0.0650
0.0635
0.0630
0.0605
0.0583
0.143
0.121
0.101
0.0929
0.127
0.101
0.0766
0.0633
0.0432
0.0426
0.0415
0.0398
0.134
0.110
0.0871
0.0748
0.128
0.102
0.0805
0.0640
0.0507
0.0504
0.0484
0.0466
0.138
0.114
0.0939
0.0792
250
300
350
400
0.0552
0.0464
0.0378
0.0356
0.0495
0.0493
0.0491
0.0490
0.0742
0.0677
0.0617
0.0606
0.0557
0.0473
0.0386
0.0362
0.0570
0.0564
0.0562
0.0548
0.0797
0.0736
0.0681
0.0657
0.0541
0.0451
0.0368
0.0342
0.0396
0.0394
0.0393
0.0392
0.0670
0.0599
0.0536
0.0520
0.0547
0.0460
0.0375
0.0348
0.0456
0.0451
0.0450
0.0438
0.0712
0.0644
0.0586
0.0559
450
500
600
750
0.0322
0.0294
0.0257
0.0216
0.0480
0.0466
0.0463
0.0495
0.0578
0.0551
0.0530
0.0495
0.0328
0.0300
0.0264
0.0223
0.0538
0.0526
0.0516
0.0497
0.0630
0.0505
0.0580
0.0545
0.0304
0.0276
0.0237
0.0194
0.0384
0.0373
0.0371
0.0356
0.0490
0.0464
0.0440
0.0405
0.0312
0.0284
0.0246
0.0203
0.0430
0.0421
0.0412
0.0396
0.0531
0.0508
0.0479
0.0445
1.5-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
Conductor Resistance, Reactance, Impedance
109
Table 1.5-17. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Copper Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 ft (305m) at 75C (b) Three Conductor Cable
Table 1.5-18. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Aluminum Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 Ft (305m) at 90C (a) Three Single Conductors
Table 1.5-19. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Aluminum Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 ft (30m) at 90C (b) Three Conductor Cable
Wire Size,
AWG or
kcmil
In Magnetic Duct and Steel Interlocked Armor In Non-Magnetic Duct and Aluminum Interlocked Armor
8
8 (solid)
6
6 (solid)
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.0577
0.0577
0.0525
0.0525
0.813
0.788
0.513
0.499
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.0658
0.0658
0.0610
0.0610
0.814
0.789
0.514
0.500
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.0503
0.0503
0.0457
0.0457
0.812
0.787
0.512
0.498
0.811
0.786
0.510
0.496
0.0574
0.0574
0.0531
0.0531
0.813
0.788
0.513
0.499
4
4 (solid)
2
1
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.0483
0.0483
0.0448
0.0436
0.325
0.316
0.207
0.166
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.0568
0.0508
0.0524
0.0516
0.326
0.317
0.209
0.168
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.0422
0.0422
0.0390
0.0380
0.324
0.315
0.206
0.164
0.321
0.312
0.202
0.160
0.0495
0.0495
0.0457
0.0450
0.325
0.316
0.207
0.166
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
0.128
0.102
0.0805
0.0640
0.0414
0.0407
0.0397
0.0381
0.135
0.110
0.0898
0.0745
0.128
0.103
0.0814
0.0650
0.0486
0.0482
0.0463
0.0446
0.137
0.114
0.0936
0.0788
0.127
0.101
0.0766
0.0633
0.0360
0.0355
0.0346
0.0332
0.132
0.107
0.0841
0.0715
0.128
0.102
0.0805
0.0640
0.0423
0.0420
0.0403
0.0389
0.135
0.110
0.090
0.0749
250
300
350
400
0.0552
0.0464
0.0378
0.0356
0.0379
0.0377
0.0373
0.0371
0.0670
0.0598
0.0539
0.0514
0.0557
0.0473
0.0386
0.0362
0.0436
0.0431
0.0427
0.0415
0.0707
0.0640
0.0576
0.0551
0.0541
0.0451
0.0368
0.0342
0.0330
0.0329
0.0328
0.0327
0.0634
0.0559
0.0492
0.0475
0.0547
0.0460
0.0375
0.0348
0.0380
0.0376
0.0375
0.0366
0.0666
0.0596
0.0530
0.0505
450
500
600
750
0.0322
0.0294
0.0257
0.0216
0.0361
0.0349
0.0343
0.0326
0.0484
0.0456
0.0429
0.0391
0.0328
0.0300
0.0264
0.0223
0.0404
0.0394
0.0382
0.0364
0.0520
0.0495
0.0464
0.0427
0.0304
0.0276
0.0237
0.0197
0.0320
0.0311
0.0309
0.0297
0.0441
0.0416
0.0389
0.0355
0.0312
0.0284
0.0246
0.0203
0.0359
0.0351
0.0344
0.0332
0.0476
0.0453
0.0422
0.0389
Wire Size,
AWG or
kcmil
In Magnetic Duct In Non-Magnetic Duct
6
4
2
1
0.847
0.532
0.335
0.265
0.053
0.050
0.046
0.048
0.849
0.534
0.338
0.269
0.532
0.335
0.265
0.068
0.063
0.059
0.536
0.341
0.271
0.847
0.532
0.335
0.265
0.042
0.040
0.037
0.035
0.848
0.534
0.337
0.267
0.532
0.335
0.265
0.054
0.050
0.047
0.535
0.339
0.269
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
0.210
0.167
0.133
0.106
0.043
0.041
0.040
0.039
0.214
0.172
0.139
0.113
0.210
0.167
0.132
0.105
0.056
0.055
0.053
0.051
0.217
0.176
0.142
0.117
0.210
0.167
0.133
0.105
0.034
0.033
0.037
0.031
0.213
0.170
0.137
0.109
0.210
0.167
0.132
0.105
0.045
0.044
0.042
0.041
0.215
0.173
0.139
0.113
250
300
350
400
0.0896
0.0750
0.0644
0.0568
0.0384
0.0375
0.0369
0.0364
0.0975
0.0839
0.0742
0.0675
0.0892
0.0746
0.0640
0.0563
0.0495
0.0479
0.0468
0.0459
0.102
0.0887
0.0793
0.0726
0.0894
0.0746
0.0640
0.0563
0.0307
0.0300
0.0245
0.0291
0.0945
0.0804
0.0705
0.0634
0.0891
0.0744
0.0638
0.0560
0.0396
0.0383
0.0374
0.0367
0.0975
0.0837
0.0740
0.0700
500
600
700
750
1000
0.0459
0.0388
0.0338
0.0318
0.0252
0.0355
0.0359
0.0350
0.0341
0.0341
0.0580
0.0529
0.0487
0.0466
0.0424
0.0453
0.0381
0.0332
0.0310
0.0243
0.0444
0.0431
0.0423
0.0419
0.0414
0.0634
0.0575
0.0538
0.0521
0.0480
0.0453
0.0381
0.0330
0.0309
0.0239
0.0284
0.0287
0.0280
0.0273
0.0273
0.0535
0.0477
0.0433
0.0412
0.0363
0.0450
0.0377
0.0326
0.0304
0.0234
0.0355
0.0345
0.0338
0.0335
0.0331
0.0573
0.0511
0.0470
0.0452
0.0405
Wire Size,
AWG or
kcmil
In Magnetic Duct and Steel Interlocked Armor In Non-Magnetic Duct and Aluminum Interlocked Armor
6
4
2
1
0.847
0.532
0.335
0.265
0.053
0.050
0.046
0.048
0.849
0.534
0.338
0.269
0.335
0.265
0.056
0.053
0.340
0.270
0.847
0.532
0.335
0.265
0.042
0.040
0.037
0.035
0.848
0.534
0.337
0.267
0.335
0.265
0.045
0.042
0.338
0.268
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
0.210
0.167
0.133
0.106
0.043
0.041
0.040
0.039
0.214
0.172
0.139
0.113
0.210
0.167
0.133
0.105
0.050
0.049
0.048
0.045
0.216
0.174
0.141
0.114
0.210
0.167
0.133
0.105
0.034
0.033
0.037
0.031
0.213
0.170
0.137
0.109
0.210
0.167
0.132
0.105
0.040
0.039
0.038
0.036
0.214
0.171
0.138
0.111
250
300
350
400
0.0896
0.0750
0.0644
0.0568
0.0384
0.0375
0.0369
0.0364
0.0975
0.0839
0.0742
0.0675
0.0895
0.0748
0.0643
0.0564
0.0436
0.0424
0.0418
0.0411
0.100
0.0860
0.0767
0.0700
0.0894
0.0746
0.0640
0.0563
0.0307
0.0300
0.0245
0.0291
0.0945
0.0804
0.0705
0.0634
0.0893
0.0745
0.0640
0.0561
0.0349
0.0340
0.0334
0.0329
0.0959
0.0819
0.0722
0.0650
500
600
700
750
1000
0.0459
0.0388
0.0338
0.0318
0.0252
0.0355
0.0359
0.0350
0.0341
0.0341
0.0580
0.0529
0.0487
0.0466
0.0424
0.0457
0.0386
0.0335
0.0315
0.0248
0.0399
0.0390
0.0381
0.0379
0.0368
0.0607
0.0549
0.0507
0.0493
0.0444
0.0453
0.0381
0.0330
0.0309
0.0239
0.0284
0.0287
0.0280
0.0273
0.0273
0.0535
0.0477
0.0433
0.0412
0.0363
0.0452
0.0380
0.0328
0.0307
0.0237
0.0319
0.0312
0.0305
0.0303
0.0294
0.0553
0.0492
0.0448
0.0431
0.0378
1.5-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
Conductor Ampacities
110
Current Carrying Capacities of Copper and Aluminum and Copper-Clad Aluminum Conductors
From National Electrical Code (NEC), 2011 Edition (NFPA 70-2011)
Table 1.5-20. Allowable Ampacities of Insulated Conductors Rated 02000V, 60 to 90C (140 to 194F).
Not more than three current-carrying conductors in raceway, cable or earth (directly buried), based on ambient temperature of 30C (86F).
See NEC Section 240.4 (D).
Note: For complete details of using Table 1.5-20, see NEC Article 310 in its entirety.
Table 1.5-21. Correction Factors From NFPA 70-2011 (See Table 310.15 [B][2][a])
Size Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 310.15 [B][16]) Size
AWG or
kcmil
60C (140F) 75C (167F) 90C (194F) 60C (140F) 75C (167F) 90C (194F) AWG or
kcmil
Types Types
TW, UF RHW, THHW,
THW, THWN,
XHHW, USE, ZW
TBS, SA, SIS,
FEP, FEPB, MI,
RHH, RHW-2,
THHN, THHW,
THW-2, THWN-2,
USE-2, XHH,
XHHW, XHHW-2,
ZW-2
TW, UF RHW, THHW,
THW, THWN,
XHHW, USE
TBS, SA, SIS,
THHN, THHW,
THW-2, THWN-2,
RHH, RHW-2,
USE-2, XHH,
XHHW, XHHW-2,
ZW-2
Copper Aluminum or Copper-Clad Aluminum
18
16
14
15
20
14
18
25
12
10
8
20
30
40
25
35
50
30
40
55
20
25
30
20
30
40
25
35
45
12
10
8
6
4
3
55
70
85
65
85
100
75
95
110
40
55
65
50
65
75
60
75
85
6
4
3
2
1
1/0
95
110
125
115
130
150
130
150
170
75
85
100
90
100
120
100
115
135
2
1
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
145
165
195
175
200
230
195
225
260
115
130
150
135
155
180
150
175
205
2/0
3/0
4/0
250
300
350
215
240
260
255
285
310
290
320
350
170
190
210
205
230
250
230
255
280
250
300
350
400
500
600
280
320
355
335
380
420
380
430
475
225
260
285
270
310
340
305
350
385
400
500
600
700
750
800
385
400
410
460
475
490
520
535
555
310
320
330
375
385
395
420
435
450
700
750
800
900
1000
1250
435
455
495
520
545
590
585
615
665
355
375
405
425
445
485
480
500
545
900
1000
1250
1500
1750
2000
520
545
560
625
650
665
705
735
750
435
455
470
520
545
560
585
615
630
1500
1750
2000
Ambient
Temperature C
For ambient temperatures other than 30C (86F), multiply the allowable ampacities shown
above by the appropriate factor shown below.
Ambient
Temperature F
2125
2630
3135
1.08
1.00
0.91
1.05
1.00
0.94
1.04
1.00
0.96
1.08
1.00
0.91
1.05
1.00
0.94
1.04
1.00
0.96
07077
07886
08795
3640
4145
4650
0.82
0.71
0.58
0.88
0.82
0.75
0.91
0.87
0.82
0.82
0.71
0.58
0.88
0.82
0.75
0.91
0.87
0.82
096104
105113
114122
5155
5660
6170
0.41
0.67
0.58
0.33
0.76
0.71
0.58
0.41
0.67
0.58
0.33
0.76
0.71
0.58
123131
132140
141158
7180 0.41 0.41 159176
1.5-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
111
Ampacities for Conductors
Rated 02000V (Excerpted
from NFPA 70-2011, 310.15)
Note: Fine Print Note (FPN) was changed
to Informational Note in the 2011 NEC.
(A) General.
(1) Tables or Engineering Supervision.
Ampacities for conductors shall
be permitted to be determined by
tables as provided in 310.15(B) or
under engineering supervision,
as provided in 310.15(C).
Note: Informational Note No. 1: Ampacities
provided by this section do not take voltage
drop into consideration. See 210.19(A),
Informational Note No. 4, for branch circuits
and 215.2(A), Informational No. 2, for feeders.
Note: Informational Note No. 2: For the
allowable ampacities of Type MTW wire,
see Table 13.5.1 in NFPA 79-2007, Electrical
Standard for Industrial Machinery.
(2) Selection of Ampacity. Where
more than one ampacity applies
for a given circuit length, the
lowest value shall be used.
Exception: Where two different
ampacities apply to adjacent
portions of a circuit, the higher
ampacity shall be permitted to
be used beyond the point of
transition, a distance equal to 10 ft
(3.0m) or 10 percent of the circuit
length gured at the higher
ampacity, whichever is less.
Note: Informational Note: See 110.14(C) for
conductor temperature limitations due to
termination provisions.
(B) Tables. Ampacities for conductors
rated 02000V shall be as specied
in the Allowable Ampacity
Table 310.15(B)(16) through
Table 310.15(B)(19), and
Ampacity Table 310.15(B)(20) and
Table 310.15(B)(21) as modied
by 310.15(B)(1) through (B)(7).
Note: Informational Note: Table
310.15(B)(16) through Table 310.15(B)(19)
are application tables for use in determining
conductor sizes on loads calculated in
accordance with Article 220. Allowable
ampacities result from consideration of one
or more of the following:
(1) Temperature compatibility with
connected equipment, especially
the connection points.
(2) Coordination with circuit and
system overcurrent protection.
(3) Compliance with the requirements
of product listings or certications.
See 110.3(B).
(4) Preservation of the safety benets
of established industry practices
and standardized procedures.
(1) General. For explanation of type
letters used in tables and for
recognized sizes of conductors for
the various conductor insulations,
see Table 310.104(A) and Table
310.104(B). For installation
requirements, see 310.1 through
310.15(A)(3) and the various
articles of this Code. For exible
cords, see Table 400.4, Table
400.5(A)(1) and Table 400.5(A)(2).
(3) Adjustment Factors.
(a) More Than Three Current-
Carrying Conductors in a Raceway
or Cable. Where the number of
current-carrying conductors in a
raceway or cable exceeds three, or
where single conductors or multi-
conductor cables are installed
without maintaining spacing for
a continuous length longer than
24.00-inch (600 mm) and are not
installed in raceways, the allowable
ampacity of each conductor shall
be reduced as shown in Table
310.15(B)(3)(a). Each current-carrying
conductor of a paralleled set of
conductors shall be counted as a
current-carrying conductor.
Note: Informational Note No. 1: See Annex
B, Table B.310.15(B)(2)(11), for adjustment
factors for more than three current-carrying
conductors in a raceway or cable with
load diversity.
Note: Informational Note No. 2: See 366.23(A)
for adjustment factors for conductors in
sheet metal auxiliary gutters and 376.22(B)
for adjustment factors for conductors in
metal wireways.
(1) Where conductors are installed in
cable trays, the provisions of
392.80 shall apply.
(2) Adjustment factors shall not apply
to conductors in raceways having
a length not exceeding 24.00-inch
(600 mm).
(3) Adjustment factors shall not apply
to underground conductors enter-
ing or leaving an outdoor trench
if those conductors have physical
protection in the form of rigid
metal conduit, intermediate metal
conduit, rigid polyvinyl chloride
conduit (PVC), or reinforced
thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC)
having a length not exceeding
10 ft (3.05m), and if the number of
conductors does not exceed four.
(4) Adjustment factors shall not
apply to Type AC cable or to
Type MC cable under the following
conditions:
a. The cables do not have an overall
outer jacket.
b. Each cable has not more than three
current-carrying conductors.
c. The conductors are 12 AWG copper.
d. Not more than 20 current-carrying
conductors are installed without
maintaining spacing, are stacked,
or are supported onbridle rings.
(5) An adjustment factor of 60 percent
shall be applied to Type AC cable or
Type MC cable under the following
conditions:
a. The cables do not have an overall
outer jacket.
b. The number of current carrying
conductors exceeds 20.
c. The cables are stacked or bundled
longer that 24.00-inch (600 mm)
without spacing being maintained.
(b) More Than One Conduit, Tube,
or Raceway. Spacing between
conduits, tubing, or raceways
shall be maintained.
(c) Circular Raceways Exposed to
Sunlight on Rooftops.
Where conductors or cables are
installed in circular raceways exposed
to direct sunlight on or above rooftops,
the adjustments shown in Table 1.5-22
shall be added to the outdoor
temperature to determine the
applicable ambient temperature
for application of the correction
factors in Table 310.15(B)(2)(a) or
Table 310.15(B)(2)(b).
Note: Informational Note: One source for
the average ambient temperatures in various
locations is the ASHRAE Handbook
Fundamentals.
Table 1.5-22. NEC (2011) Table 310.15(B)(3)(c)
Ambient Temperature Adjustment for Circular
Raceways Exposed to Sunlight On or
Above Rooftops
Distance Above Roof to
Bottom of Conduit
Temperature
Adder F (C)
00.51-inch (013.0 mm) 60 (33)
Above 0.51-inch (13.0 mm)
3.54-inch (90.0 mm)
40 (22)
11.81-inch (300.0 mm)
30 (17)
36.00-inch (900.0 mm)
25 (14)
1.5-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
112
(4) Bare or Covered Conductors.
Where bare or covered conductors
are installed with insulated
conductors, the temperature
rating of the bare or covered
conductor shall be equal to the
lowest temperature rating of the
insulated conductors for the
purpose of determining ampacity.
(5) Neutral Conductor.
(a) A neutral conductor that carries
only the unbalanced current from
other conductors of the same
circuit shall not be required to
be counted when applying the
provisions of 310.15(B)(3)(a).
(b) In a three-wire circuit consisting
of two phase conductors and the
neutral conductor of a four-wire,
three-phase, wye-connected
system, a common conductor
carries approximately the same
current as the line-to-neutral load
currents of the other conductors
and shall be counted when applying
the provisions of 310.15(B)(3)(a).
(c) On a four-wire, three-phase wye
circuit where the major portion of
the load consists of nonlinear
loads, harmonic currents are
present in the neutral conductor;
the neutral conductor shall there-
fore be considered a current-
carrying conductor.
(6) Grounding or Bonding Conductor.
A grounding or bonding conductor
shall not be counted when applying
the provisions of 310.15(B)(3)(a).
1.5-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
Formulas and Terms
113
Table 1.5-23. Formulas for Determining Amperes, hp, kW and kVA
For two-phase, three-wire circuits, the current in the common conductor is times that in either of the two other conductors.
Note: Units of measurement and denitions for E (volts), I (amperes), and other abbreviations are given below under Common Electrical Terms.
To
Find
Direct
Current
Alternating Current
Single-Phase Two-PhaseFour-Wire Three-Phase
Amperes (l) when
horsepower is known
Amperes (l) when
kilowatts is known
Amperes (l) when
kva is known
Kilowatts
kVA
Horsepower (output)
hp 746
E % eff
hp 746
E % eff pf
hp 746
2 E % eff pf
hp 746
3 E % eff pf
kW 1000
E
kW 1000
E pf
kW 1000
2 E pf
kW 1000
3 E % pf
kVA 1000
E
kVA 1000
2 E
kVA 1000
3 E
I E
1000
l E pf
1000
l E 2 pf
1000
l E 3 pf
1000
I E
1000
I E 2
1000
I E 3
1000
I E % eff
746
I E % eff pf
746
I E 2 % eff pf
746
I E 3 % eff pf
746
2
Common Electrical Terms
Ampere (l) = unit of current or rate of ow of electricity
Volt (E) = unit of electromotive force
Ohm (R) = unit of resistance
Ohms law: I = (DC or 100% pf)
Megohm = 1,000,000 ohms
Volt Amperes (VA) = unit of apparent power
= (single-phase)
=
Kilovolt Amperes (kVA) = 1000 volt-amperes
Watt (W) = unit of true power
=
= 0.00134 hp
Kilowatt (kW) = 1000 watts
Power Factor (pf) = ratio of true to apparent power
=
Watthour (Wh) = unit of electrical work
= 1 watt for 1 hour
= 3.413 Btu
= 2655 ft-lbs
Kilowatt-hour (kWh) = 1000 watthours
Horsepower (hp) = measure of time rate of doing work
= equivalent of raising 33,000 lbs 1 ft in 1 minute
= 746 watts
Demand Factor = ratio of maximum demand to the total connected load
Diversity Factor = ratio of the sum of individual maximum demands of
the various subdivisions of a system to the maximum
demand of the whole system
Load Factor = ratio of the average load over a designated period
of time to the peak load occurring in that period
E
R
E l
E l 3
VA pf
W
VA
--------
kW
kVA
------------
How to Compute Power Factor
1. 1. From watthour meter.
Watts = rpm of disc x 60 x Kh
Where Kh is meter constant
printed on face or nameplate
of meter.
If metering transformers are used,
above must be multiplied by the
transformer ratios.
2. Directly from wattmeter reading.
Where:
Volts = line-to-line voltage as
measured by voltmeter.
Amperes = current measured in
line wire (not neutral) by ammeter.
Table 1.5-24. Temperature Conversion
1 Inch = 2.54 centimeters
1 Kilogram = 2.20 lbs
1 Square Inch = 1,273,200 circular mills
1 Circular Mill = 0.785 square mil
1 Btu = 778 ft lbs
= 252 calories
1 Year = 8760 hours
(F to C) C = 5/9 (F32)
(C to F) F = 9/5(C)+32
C 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20
F 5 14 23 32 41 50 59 68
C 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
F 77 86 95 104 113 122 131 140
C 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
F 149 158 167 176 185 194 203 212
Determining Watts pf
Watts
Volts Amperes
---------------------------------------------- =
1.5-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
Seismic Requirements
114
General
In the 1980s, Eaton embarked on a
comprehensive program centered
around designing and building
electrical distribution and control
equipment capable of meeting and
exceeding the seismic load require-
ments of the Uniform Building Code
(UBC) and California Building Code
(CBC). These codes emphasize build-
ing design requirements. Electrical
equipment and distribution system
components are considered attach-
ments to the building. The entire
program has been updated to show
compliance with the 2009 International
Building Code (IBC) and the 2010 CBC
seismic requirements. A cooperative
effort with the equipment user, the
building designer and the equipment
installer ensures that the equipment
is correctly anchored such that it can
withstand the effects of an earthquake.
Eatons electrical distribution and
control equipment has been tested
and seismically proven for require-
ments exceeding the IBC and CBC.
Over 100 different assemblies
representing essentially all product
lines have been successfully tested
and veried to seismic levels higher
than the maximum seismic require-
ments specied in the IBC and CBC.
The equipment maintained structural
integrity and demonstrated the ability
to function immediately after the
seismic tests. A technical paper,
Earthquake Requirements and Eaton
Distribution and Control Equipment
Seismic Capabilities (SA12501SE),
provides a detailed explanation
of the applicable seismic codes
and Eatons equipment qualication
program. The paper may be found
at www.eaton.com/seismic. Type
in SA12501SE in the document
search eld.
Figure 1.5-1. Typical Earthquake Ground Motion Map for the United States
International Building Code (IBC)
On December 9, 1994, the International
Code Council (ICC) was established
as a nonprot organization dedicated
to developing a single set of compre-
hensive and coordinated codes. The
ICC foundersthe Building Ofcials
and Code Administrators (BOCA), the
International Conference of Building
Ofcials (ICBO), and the Southern
Building Code Congress International
(SBCCI)created the ICC in response
to technical disparities among the
three nationally recognized model
codes now in use in the U.S. The
ICC offers a single, complete set of
construction codes without regional
limitationsthe International
Building Code.
Uniform Building Code (UBC)
1997 was the nal year in which the
UBC was published. It has since been
replaced by the IBC.
California Building Code
The 2001 CBC was based upon the
1997 UBC. In August of 2006, it was
repealed by the California Building
Standards Commission (CBSC) and
replaced by the 2007 CBC, California
Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24,
Part 2 and used the 2006 IBC as the
basis for the code. The 2010 CBC
is based upon the 2009 IBC, with
amendments as deemed appropriate
by the CBSC. Eatons seismic
qualication program fully envelopes
the requirements of the 2010 CBC.
Process
According to Chapter 16 of the 2009
IBC, structure design, the seismic
requirements of electrical equipment
in buildings may be computed in two
steps. The rst step is to determine
the maximum ground motion to be
considered at the site. The second step
is to evaluate the equipment mounting
and attachments inside the building
or structure. These are then evaluated
to determine appropriate seismic test
requirements. The ground motion,
seismic requirements of the equipment,
and the seismic response spectrum
requirements are discussed on
Page 1.5-22, see Figure 1.5-3.
1.5-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
115
Ground Motion
According to the code, the rst and
most important step in the process
is to determine the maximum
considered earthquake spectral
response acceleration at short
periods of 0.2 seconds (S
S
) and at
a period of 1.0 second (S
1
). These
values are determined from a set
of 24 spectral acceleration maps
(Figure 1.5-1) and include numerous
contour lines indicating the severity
of the earthquake requirements at a
particular location in the country.
The spectral acceleration maps
indicate low to moderate seismic
requirements for the entire country,
with the exception of two particular
areas; the West Coast and the Midwest
(the New Madrid area). The seismic
requirements at the New Madrid area
are approximately 30% higher than the
maximum requirements of the West
Coast. The maps also suggest that the
high seismic requirements in both
regions, West Coast and Midwest,
quickly decrease as one moves away
from the fault area. Therefore, the high
requirements are only limited to a
relatively narrow strip along the fault
lines. Just a few miles away from this
strip, only a small percentage of the
maximum requirements are indicated.
Assuming the worse condition, which
is a site directly located near a fault,
the maximum considered earthquake
spectral response acceleration at short
periods of 0.2 seconds (S
S
) is equal to
285% gravity and at 1.0 second period
(S
1
) is 124% gravity. These numbers
are the maximum numbers for the
entire country except for the New
Madrid area. These particular sites are
on the border of California and Mexico
(S
1
) and in Northern California (S
S
).
To help understand the 2009 IBC (and
2010 CBC) seismic parameters for a
specic building location, the link to
the US Geological Society is extremely
helpful: http://earthquake.usgs.gov/
research/hazmaps/design/
Download the le Java Ground
Motion Parameter Calculatorand
save it to your hard drive, then run the
executable that was downloaded.
The program will allow one to enter
the latitude and longitude of a
location. (One must be connected
to the Internet to run this application,
even after downloading the program.)
The IBC (CBC) seismic parameters for
that location will then be displayed.
If the latitude and longitude of the
building location is not known,
another convenient Web site is
available that will provide this
information based upon a street
address: http://geocoder.us/
To determine the maximum consid-
ered earthquake ground motion for
most site classes (A through D), the
code introduces site coefcients,
which when applied against the
location-specic site class, produces
the adjusted maximum considered
earthquake spectral response
acceleration for the required site.
The site coefcients are dened as
F
a
at 0.2 seconds short period and
F
V
at 1.0 second period. From the
tables in the code, the highest adjust-
ing factor for S
S
is equal to 1.0 and the
highest adjusting factor for S
1
is 1.50.
As a result, the adjusted maximum
considered earthquake spectral
response for 0.2 second short period
(S
MS
) and at 1.0 second (S
M1
), adjusted
for site class effects, are determined
from the following equations:
S
MS
= F
a
S
S
= 1.0 x 2.85g = 2.85g
S
M1
= F
v
S
1
= 1.5 x 1.24g = 1.86g
ASCE 7 (American Society of Civil
Engineers), Section 11.4, provides a
plot of the nal shape of the design
response spectra of the seismic
ground motion. The plot is shown in
Figure 1.5-2. ASCE 7 is referenced
throughout the IBC as the source for
numerous structural design criteria.
The design spectral acceleration curve
can now be computed. The peak spec-
tral acceleration (S
DS
) and the spectral
acceleration at 1.0 second (S
D1
) may
now be computed from the following
formulas in the code:
S
DS
= 2/3 x S
MS
= 2/3 x 2.85g = 1.90g
S
D1
= 2/3 x S
M1
= 2/3 x 1.8g = 1.24g
S
DS
, the peak spectral acceleration,
extends between the values of T
0
and
T
S
. T
0
and T
S
are dened in the codes
as follows:
T
0
= 0.2 S
D1
/S
DS
= 0.2 x 1.24/1.90 =
0.131 seconds (7.63 Hz)
T
S
= S
D1
/S
DS
= 1.24/1.90 =
0.653 seconds (1.53 Hz)
According to the IBC and ASCE 7, the
spectral acceleration (S
a
) at periods
less than 1.45 seconds may be com-
puted by using the following formula:
S
a
= S
DS
(0.6 T/T
0
+ 0.4)
Where T is the period where S
a
is
being calculated:
Therefore, the acceleration at
0.0417 seconds (24 Hz), for example,
is equal to:
S
a
= 1.90 (0.6 (0.0417/0.131) + 0.4) = 1.12g
The acceleration at 0.03 seconds
(33 Hz) is equal to:
S
a
= 1.90 (0.6 (0.03/0.131) + 0.4) = 1.02g
At zero period (innite frequency),
T = 0.0, the acceleration (ZPA) is
equal to:
S
a
= 1.90 (0.6 (0.0/0.131) + 0.4) =
0.76g (ZPA)
The acceleration to frequency
relationship in the frequency range
of 1.0 Hz to T
S
is stated equal to:
S
a
= S
D1
/T
Where S
a
is the acceleration at the
T period.
At 1.0 Hz (T=1.0) this equation yields
the following acceleration:
S
a
= 1.24/1 = 1.24g
Figure 1.5-2. Design Response Spectrum
S
p
e
c
t
u
r
a
l

R
e
s
p
o
n
s
e

A
c
c
e
l
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

S
a
(
g
)
SDS
SD1
T0 TS TL 1.0
Period T (sec)
Sa =
S
a =
SD1
T
SD1
T
L
T
2
1.5-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
116
Testing has demonstrated that the
lowest dominant natural frequency of
Eatons electrical equipment is above
3.2 Hz. This indicates that testing at
1.24g at 1 Hz is not necessary. In
addition, having the low end of the
spectra higher than realistically
required forces the shake table to
move at extremely high displacements
to meet the spectral acceleration at
the low frequencies.
Testing to accommodate the low end
of the spectra using this acceleration
component can result in testing to a
factor 2 to 3 times greater than that
realistically required.
Through testing experience and data
analysis, the seismic acceleration at
1.0 Hz is taken equal to 0.7g, which
will ensure that the seismic levels are
achieved well below 3.2 Hz. This yields
a more vigorous test over a wider
range of seismic intensities.
In developing the seismic requirements
above, it is important to recognize
the following:
T
0
and T
S
are dependent on S
MS
and
S
D1
. If S
D1
is small relative to S
MS
then
T
0
and T
S
will be smaller and the
associated frequencies will shift
higher. The opposite is also true.
This must be realized in developing
the complete required response
spectrum (RRS). Therefore, it is not
adequate to stop the peak spectral
acceleration at 7.63 Hz. There are other
contour line combinations that will
produce higher T
0
. To account for this
variation it is almost impossible to
consider all combinations. However,
a study of the spectral acceleration
maps indicates that all variations with
high magnitude of contour lines could
very well be enveloped by a factor
of 1.5. Therefore, T
0
is recomputed
as follows:
T
0
= 0.2 S
D1
/(S
DS
x 1.5) = 0.2 x 1.24/
(1.90 x 1.5) = 0.087 seconds (11.49 Hz)
Eaton ensures maximum certication
by requiring peak acceleration during
testing to extend to 12 Hz.
It can be seen that Eaton has elected to
develop generic seismic requirements
that envelop two criteria:
The highest possible spectral peak
accelerations and ZPA
The maximum frequency range
required for many different sites
This completes the ground motion
design response spectrum. The
spectral accelerations are equal to
0.76g at ZPA, or 33 Hz, and increases
linearly to a peak acceleration of 1.90g
at 0.09 seconds (or 11.49 Hz) and stays
constant to 0.653 seconds (1.53 Hz),
then gradually decreases to 1.24g at
1 second (or 1.0 Hz). This curve is
Figure 1.5-3. Design Response Spectrum
ASCE 7 Section 13.3Seismic
Demands on Non-Structural
Components
ASCE 7 Paragraph 13.3.1 (IBC Section
1621.1.4) provides a formula for
computing the seismic requirements
of electrical and mechanical equipment
inside a building or a structure. The
formula is designed for evaluating the
equipment attachment to the equip-
ment foundations. The seismic loads
are dened as:
F
p
= 0.4 a
p
S
DS
W
p
(1 + 2 Z/h)/(R
p
/I
p
)
Where:
F
p
= Seismic design force imposed
at the components center of gravity
(C.G.) and distributed relative to
component mass distribution.
a
p
= Component amplication factor
that varies from 1.00 to 2.50.
S
DS
= Ground level spectral
acceleration, short period.
W
p
= Component operating weight.
R
p
= Component response modica-
tion factor that for electrical equipment
varies from 2.5 to 6.0.
I
p
= Component importance factor that
is either 1.0 or 1.5.
Z = Highest point of equipment in a
building relative to grade elevation.
h = Average roof height of building
relative to grade elevation.
The following parameters produce the
maximum required force:
Z is taken equal to h (equipment
on roof)
I
p
is taken equal to 1.5
a
p
R
p
S
DS
is equal to 1.90g as indicated
in the previous section
The acceleration (F
p
/W
p
) at the C.G.
of the equipment is then computed
equal to:
Acceleration = F
p
/W
p
= 0.4 x 2.5 x
1.90g (1 + 2) / (2.5/1.5) = 3.42g
1
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1.0
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 60 80 100
Frequency Hz
A
c
c
e
l
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

(
g

p
e
a
k
)Test Response Spectrum
(TRS)
Spectrum Dip Not Important
Because Frequency is Not an
Equipment Natural Frequency
Zero Period
Acceleration = Maximum
Table Test Motion
Zero Period
Acceleration = Maximum
Floor Motion
Required Response Spectrum
(RRS)
1.5-23
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
117
For equipment on (or below) grade,
the acceleration at the equipment C.G.
is then computed equal to:
Acceleration = F
p
/W
p
= 0.4 x 2.5 x
1.90g (1 + 0) / (2.5 /1.5) = 1.14g
It is impractical to attempt to measure
the actual acceleration of the C.G. of a
piece of equipment under seismic test.
The seismic response at the middle of
base mounted equipment close to its
C.G. is at least 50% higher than the
oor input at the equipment natural
frequency. The base accelerations
associated with the accelerations of
F
P
/W
P
at the C.G. of the equipment
could then be computed as 3.42 /1.5
= 2.28g. It is the equipment base input
acceleration that is measured and
documented during seismic testing
and is the acceleration value shown
on Eatons seismic certicates.
Final Combined Requirements
To better compare all seismic levels
and determine the nal envelope
seismic requirements, the 2010 CBC,
2009 IBC for California, and 2009 IBC
for New Madrid area seismic require-
ments are plotted in Figure 1.5-4. All
curves are plotted at 5% damping. An
envelopment of the seismic levels in
the frequency range of 3.2 Hz to 100 Hz
is also shown. This level is taken as
Eatons generic seismic test require-
ments for all certications. Eaton
performed additional seismic test runs
on the equipment at approximately
120% of the generic enveloping seismic
requirements (see Figure 1.5-5). Eaton
has established this methodology to
provide additional margin to accom-
modate potential changes with the
spectral maps, thus eliminating the
need for additional testing.
Figure 1.5-4. Required Response Spectrum Curve
Figure 1.5-5. Eaton Test Required Response Spectrum Curve
A
c
c
e
l
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

(
g
)
0.1
1
10
1 10 100
Frequency (Hz)
Eaton Seismic
IBC 2009 New Madrid IBC 2009/CBC 2010
A
c
c
e
l
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

(
g
)
0.1
1
10
1 10 100
Frequency (Hz)
Eaton 100% Seismic Envelope
Eaton 120% Seismic Envelope
1.5-24
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
118
Product Specic Test Summaries
Table 1.5-25. Distribution Equipment
Tested and Seismically Proven Against
Requirements within IBC 2009
Note: See www.eaton.com/seismic for
current seismic certicates.
Eaton Equipment
Low voltage metal-enclosed switchgear
DS II
Magnum DS
High resistance ground
Panelboards
Pow-R-Line C 1a, 1a-LX, 2a, 2a-LX, 3a, 3E, 4,
5P, F-16 and Pow-R-Command
Switchboards
Instant Pow-R-Line 5P
Integrated facilities Pow-R-Line C
Multimeter Pow-R-Line i
MCC
Advantage
IT.
FlashGard
Series 2100
Freedom 2100
Low voltage busway
Pow-R-Way
and associated ttings

Pow-R-Way III
and associated ttings

Dry type transformers
Mini powercenters
EP, EPT, DS-3, DT-3
Transfer switches
Automatic transfer switch equipment
Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)
Battery modules
UPSs
Enclosed control safety switches
General-duty
Heavy-duty
Elevator control module
Medium voltage switchgear
Type VacClad-W Type MMVS
MEF Type MVS/MEB
MV bus
Metal-enclosed non-segregated phase bus
Network protectors
Type CM-22
Type CMD
Medium voltage control
AMPGARD
SC9000 drives
Substation transformers
Dry-type
Liquid type
Unitized dry-type power centers
Figure 1.5-6. Sample Seismic Certicate
y
1.5-25
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01
Reference Data
119
Additional Design and
Installation Considerations
When installing electrical distribution
and control equipment, consideration
must be given as to how the methods
employed will affect seismic forces
imposed on the equipment, equipment
mounting surface, and conduits
entering the equipment.
Eaton recommends that when specify-
ing a brand of electrical distribution
and control equipment, the designer
references the installation manuals of
that manufacturer to ascertain that the
requirements can be met through the
design and construction process.
For Eaton electrical distribution and
control products, the seismic installa-
tion guides for essentially all product
lines can be found at our Web site:
http://www.eaton.com/seismic.
Electrical designers must work closely
with the structural or civil engineers
for a seismic qualied installation.
Consideration must be given to the
type of material providing anchorage
for the electrical equipment.
If steel, factors such as thickness or
gauge, attachment via bolts or welding,
and the size and type of hardware
must be considered.
If concrete, the depth, the PSI, the type
of re-enforcing bars used, as well as
the diameter and embedment of
anchorage all must be considered.
The designer must also give consider-
ation if the equipment will be secured
to the wall, versus stand-alone or free-
standing, which requires the equip-
ment to withstand the highest level of
seismic forces. Top cable entry should
be avoided for large enclosures, as
accommodation for cable/conduit
exibility will need to be designed
into the system.
For a manufacturer to simply state
Seismic Certied or Seismic
Qualied does not tell the designer
if the equipment is appropriate for
the intended installation.
Note: Eaton recommends that designers
conrm with the manufacturer if the
seismic certication supplied with the
equipment is based on:
1. ACTUAL shaker table test as
required by the IBC and CBC.
2. The seismic certicate and test
data clearly state if the equipment
was tested as free-standing
anchored at the bottom of the
equipment to the shaker table.
3. Structure attached, that is,
anchored at the center of gravity
(C.G.) or at the TOP of the equip-
ment to a simulated wall on the
shaker table.
Stand-Alone or Free-Standing Equipment
If stand-alone or free-standing, then
this may require that additional width
space be allowed at each end of the
equipment for additional seismic
bracing supplied by the manufacturer.
Additional thought must be given to
the clearances around the equipment
to rigid structural edices. Space must
be allowed for the differing motions of
the equipment and the structure, so
that they do not collide during a seis-
mic event and damage one another.
Note: If the equipment is installed as stand-
alone or free-standing, with additional
seismic bracing at each end and not
attached to the structure as tested, and yet,
it is tted tightly against a structural wall,
then this would be an incorrect installation
for the application of the seismic certicate.
Furthermore, if conduits are to be
installed overhead into the equipment,
does the design call for exible conduits
of sufcient length to allow for the
conicting motion of the equipment
and the structure during a seismic event
so as to not damage the conductors
contained therein, and the terminations
points within the equipment.
Structure Attached Equipment
The designer must work closely
with the structural engineer if the
equipment is to be attached to the
structure to ascertain that the internal
wall re-enforcement of the structure,
type of anchor, and depth of embed-
ment is sufcient to secure the
equipment so that the equipment,
conduits and structure move at or
near the same frequency.
1.5-26
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 01120


September 2011

Contents

Power Management Connectivity & Monitoring
2.0-1

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

02

001

P
o
w
e
r

M
a
n
a
g
e
m
e
n
t
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
v
i
t
y

&

M
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g

Overview

Power Xpert

Architecture Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.0-2
Power Xpert Network Connectivity

Power Xpert Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1-1

Power Xpert Gateway 200E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1-1

Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1-6

Ethernet-Enabled Power Quality & Energy (PQ&E)IQ Meters . . . .

2.1-18

Ethernet-Enabled Circuit Breaker Trip Units and Protective Relays. .

2.1-19

Ethernet-Enabled Motor Control Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1-21

IPONI Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1-23

Breaker Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1-24

I/O Devices Digital Input Module (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1-25

Addressable Relay

II

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1-26
Power Xpert Ethernet Switches

Power Xpert Ethernet Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2-1

Copper Ethernet Cable Wiring Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2-2

Fiber Optic Cable Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2-3
X-Slot Connectivity Options

Power Xpert Gateway Power Distribution Products (PDP) Card. . . . .

2.3-1

Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3-3
Monitoring Software

Power Xpert Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4-1

Power Xpert Software Optional Modules/Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4-4

Foreseer

Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4-20

Power Xpert Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4-20
Power Management Systems & Products for Third-Party Integration

Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5-1

RS-485 PONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5-1

DPONI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5-1

MINT

II

RS-232 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5-2

mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5-3

PMINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5-4
Specications

See Eatons

Product Specication Guide

, available on CD or on the Web.
CSI Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010

Section 16901 & Section 26 27 13.11 &
Section 16911 Section 26 09 13.13

Addressable Relay

II

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16902, Section 26 29 05,
Paragraph 2.02.C Paragraph 2.02.C

BIM

II

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16901, Section 26 27 13.11 &
Paragraph 2.04.A Paragraph 2.04.A

SMLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16901, Section 26 27 13.11 &
Paragraph 2.04 Paragraph 2.04
2.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

02

Overview

002

Power Xpert Architecture
Introduction

Enabling Power
System Management

Eatons Power Xpert Architecture
(PXA) provides a complete hardware/
software solution to manage your
entire power system. Power Xpert
Architecture consists of Power
Xpert meters, gateways, switches
and software.
Power Xpert devices are devices that
can provide by themselves, or facilitate
for others, Ethernet network protocols
to communicate with your critical
infrastructure components. Power
Xpert devices provide the intelligent
hardware connectivity layer to allow
Web-enabled communications
throughout the power system.

Power Xpert Meters

Power Xpert Meters provide measure-
ment of the critical elements found in
power systems, including voltage,
power, current, transients, harmonics
or even time. Power Xpert Meters
provide Web-enabled communications
for use through a Web browser or with
the Power Xpert Software or third-
party monitoring systems.

Power Xpert Gateways

Power Xpert Gateways are capable
of Web-enabling electrical devices
contained in electrical gear via a
standard Web-browser on the Ethernet
network. Standard on-board Web
pages eliminate the need for any
customer programming or software.

Power Xpert Gateway
(X-Slot) Cards

Eatons Power Xpert Gateway Cards
(PXGX) for the UPS and PDP provide
Web-enabled, real-time monitoring
of your important infrastructure
equipment, including single- and
three-phase Eaton UPSs and Eaton
Power Distribution Units, Eaton
Remote Power Panels, Rack Power
Modules, and the Eaton Energy
Management System for power
quality status and fast response to
power-related events.


Eatons Power Xpert Ethernet
switches are ideal for extending
Ethernet networks in harsh, industrial
environments. Power Xpert Ethernet
switches provide communications
from the factory oor or facility
basement to the front end ofce.

Power Xpert Software

Power Xpert Software is a comprehen-
sive solution for system-level manage-
ment of your power infrastructure via
a Web-browser. Power Xpert Software
provides a clear picture of what is
happening at a component, device
and system level. Because no two
organizations needs are the same,
Power Xpert Software is available in
two editions.

Power Xpert Software Professional Edition

Geared toward end users, with built-in
support for Eaton power distribution
products such as switchgear, UPSs,
breakers, PDUs, RPPs, meters, relays,
VFDs and MCCs among others. Eaton
products connect with the software
directly via an Ethernet connection,
while legacy devices use a Power
Xpert Gateway to Web enable their
communications. A subset of third-party
meters and devices are supported as
standard via the gateway connection.

Power Xpert Software Enterprise Edition

Geared toward advanced power users,
system integrators and enterprises
with heterogeneous device spectrum
and system developers who can take
advantage of the included SNMP and
Modbus integration development
utilities.

Extensive support for third-party
devices via standard SNMP and
Modbus TCP protocols

Large variety of ready-made third-
party drop-in drivers

Foreseer Services

Foreseer Software and Engineering
Services provide the vendor with
independent, power and energy
infrastructure integration solutions
that help companies reduce energy
consumption and unplanned down-
time due to the failure of critical
power, environmental, safety or
security systems.

Power Xpert Reporting

Eatons Power Xpert Reporting works
in conjunction with Power Xpert
Software or Foreseer Services,
allowing a view past individual
measurements, trend graphs and
events. It consolidates complex
data from a multitude of devices
from around the globe into easy-to-
understand graphical reports.

Support for Existing
PowerNet Systems

Power Xpert Software is directly
compatible with existing PowerNet
systems v.3.32 and higher. All
communications hardware devices
such as MINT

II

can be connected to
Power Xpert Software through the
PowerNet server for conguration of
the INCOM communication devices.


2.0-3

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

02

Overview

003


Figure 2.0-1. Power Xpert System Overview

See Notes on

Page 2.0-4

.
Email
(SMTP)
Web Browser
(WAN)
Data
Export
(csv)
Data
Trending
Web Browser
(LAN)
HTTP
Internet
Waveform
Capture and Acquisition
3rd Party HMI
Software
Modbus TCP/IP NTP
Power Xpert
Meter
4000/6000/8000
BACnet/WS+
Motor Controls
Power Xpert
Gateway 600E Power Distribution
Power Xpert
Ethernet Switch
Power Xpert
Gateway 800E
IQ Analyzer
Meter w/PONI Card
IQ 250/250
Meters
IQ 130/140/150
Meters
Multi-
Port
Device
Server
Power Xpert
Gateway 400E
ATS
STS
PDU
GEN & CTRL
CRAC
Critical Power
Distribution & Cooling
Eaton
PDU
Freedom MCC
SVX9000
MVX9000
Drive
InsulGard
Relays
IQ DP-4000
Meter w/PONI Card
IQ 220/230
Meters
DT-1150
Trip Unit
Breaker Interface
Module w/PONI Card
OPTIM Trip Unit
MP-3000/4000
FP-4000/5000
Motor Protection
Relays
Power
Sentinel Meter
Energy
Sentinel Meter
EOLR
EOLR
EOLTR
EOLTR
LV Switchgear MV Switchgear MV Starter
Eaton
UPS
3rd Party Motor
Relays
3rd Party
Protective
Relays
3rd Party
PQ Meters
Ethernet Network
QC Port Network
INCOM Network
RS-485 Network
EOLR
EOLTR End of line termination resistor
End of line resistor
18
17
u
V
15
n
5 s j
k
l 2
5
14
13
21
12
6 t
7
8
9
10
11
r
5
m
3
i h
j 1
Network Time Server
a
b
c f d
e
g
Power
Xpert
Meter
2000
Power
Xpert
Ethernet
Switch
Power Xpert
Gateway 200E
s 4
IQ 35M IQ MESII 20 19
BACnet/IP
Eatons Assembled Equipment may include one or more of the
devices with communications shown in the above drawing.
EOLR
C440/441
Overload
Relay
16
Digtal Input
Module KYZ
Alarm Energy
o p
q
# Product Name Page Reference
1 Power Xpert Software 2.4-1
2 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 2.5-1, 3.1-1, 3.1-20
3 Power Xpert 6-Port Ethernet Switch 2.2-1
4 Power Xpert Gateway 200E 2.1-1
5 Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E 2.1-6
6 IQ Analyzer 3.3-1
7 Digitrip DT1150 6.0-12
8 Breaker Interface Module 2.1-24, 6.0-14, 20.1-17, 21.0-7, 26.1-27
9 OPTIM Trip Unit 21.0-5, 27.4-10
10 MP-3000/MP-4000/MD-3000
DT-3000/FP-4000/FP-5000
4.2-11, 4.2-17, 4.3-1
4.1-1, 4.1-11, 4.1-16
11 Energy/Power Sentinel 3.2-15, 24.0-42
12 IQ 130/140/150 Meters 2.1-18, 3.1-35, 20.1-17, 21.0-6, 25.5-14
13 IQ 250/260 Meters 2.1-18, 3.1-32, 20.1-16, 21.0-7, 25.5-14
14 InsulGard Relay 4.5-1, 5.3-1, 6.0-15, 7.3-4, 8.0-9, 41.4-11
15 SVX9000/MVX9000 Drive 29.1-33, 29.1-35, 29.1-37, 31.0-1, 31.4-1
16 Digital Input Module KYZ 2.1-25
17 Eaton PDU w/PXGX PDP Card 2.3-1
18 Eaton UPS w/PXGX UPS Card 2.3-3
19 IQ 35M 3.2-1
20 IQ MESII 3.2-10
21 C440/441 Overload Relay 4.2-1, 4.2-5
2.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

02

Overview

004

Power Xpert SystemNotes

a. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
(SMTP)Device events and
periodic log le attachments
are sent to users in the form of
an e-mail from the following
Power Xpert products: Foreseer
Services, Power Xpert Software,
Power Xpert Meters 2000/4000/
6000/8000, Power Xpert Gateway
600E, 800E and Power Xpert
Gateway UPS and PDP Cards.
b. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(HTTP)Web browser access is
available on the following Power
Xpert products: Foreseer Services,
Power Xpert Software, Power
Xpert Meters 4000/6000/8000,
Power Xpert Gateways and
Power Xpert Gateway UPS and
PDP Cards.
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
Secure (HTTPS)A secure
protocol allowing Web browser
access on the following Power
Xpert products: Power Xpert
Software, Power Xpert Meters
2000/4000/6000/8000, Power
Xpert Gateways and Power
Xpert Gateway Cards.
c. Network Time Server (NTP)
Network Time Protocol (Client-
side) is available on the following
Power Xpert products: Foreseer
Services, Power Xpert Software,
Power Xpert Meters 2000/4000/
6000/8000, Power Xpert Gateways
and Power Xpert Gateway UPS
and PDP Cards.
d. Modbus TCP/IPModbus TCP/IP
over Ethernet is available on the
following Power Xpert products:
Foreseer Services, Power Xpert
Software, Power Xpert Meters
2000/4000/6000/8000, Power
Xpert Gateways and Power Xpert
Gateway UPS and PDP Cards.
Modbus register maps
are available online at
www.eaton.com/powerxpert.
e. Data ExportData les consist of
metered data and event log infor-
mation that is exported from the
meter, gateway or software in the
form of a .csv (comma separated
variable) le. Supported products
are: Power Xpert Gateway
PXG 600E/800E, PXGXUPS,
PXGXPDP, Power Xpert Meter
2000/4000/6000/8000 and Power
Xpert Software.
f. BACnet/IPOver Ethernet is avail-
able on the following Power Xpert
products: Power XPert Gateways
(200E/400E/600E/800E) and Power
Xpert Gateway Cards (UPS, PDP).
g. Data TrendingViewing trended
data in a standard web browser
interface in the form of a graphed
line for one or more data points
is available for the following
products: Power Xpert Gateway
600E/800E, PXGXUPS, PXGXPDP,
Power Xpert Meter 2000/4000/
6000/8000 and Power Xpert
Software.
h. Waveform CaptureThe ability to
capture a waveform and/or export
the waveform as a standard
comtrade le format is available
on the following products: Power
Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000.
i. Waveform Acquisition and
ExportThe ability to acquire a
waveform from another device
that natively captures a waveform
internally and then export that
waveform in a standard comtrade
le format is supported by the
following devices: PXG 600E/800E
(provides data acquisition and
comtrade conversion for: IQ
Analyzer, DT1150 and FP-5000).

Note:

The Power Xpert Meters
4000/6000/8000 also export natively
captured waveforms as comtrade
le format.

j. Third-Party HMI Software Integra-
tionIs achieved through the
Modbus TCP/IP interface on all
Power Xpert devices. If PowerNet
software is used in the system,
then an OPC server is available.
k. Proprietary Serial Device Protocols
over EthernetThe ability to
communicate with third-party
equipment is achieved by rst
converting the physical serial
media to Ethernet by using a stan-
dard serial to Ethernet multiport
terminal server (see Note k.). Next,
a device driver library is required
to convert the proprietary protocol
to an Eaton internal standard to
allow the data to be integrated
within Eaton software. Products
that support this type of third-
party device integration are
Foreseer Services.
l. BACnet/WS+Is based upon the
protocol specication developed
by the ASHRAE standards group
as an Addendum c to Standard
135-2004.
Reference: [BACnetA Data
Communication Protocol for
Building Automation and Control
Networks. Public Review Draft,
ASHRAE Standard. BSR/ASHRAE
Addendum c to ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 135-2004. First Public
Review. Released: October 22,
2004. 32 pages. Copyright (c)
American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers, Inc. August 30, 2004.]
This draft shows proposed changes
to the current BACnet standard.

Note:

Eaton Corporation has extended
this protocol addendum with a (+) to signify
the addition of an event-driven behavior
to the existing polled data acquisition
model. This allows optimization in commu-
nications between Power Xpert devices and
Power Xpert Software.

m. Power Xpert Ethernet Switch
The Eaton Power Xpert Ethernet
switch provides connectivity
between Power Xpert devices on a
common subnetwork. The 6-port
version of the switch shown
provides six RJ-45 network ports.
As an option 1 or 2 of these ports
can be substituted to be ST-Type
ber connections.
n. Multiport Terminal ServerIs a
device that is used to add network
connectivity to serial devices.
These terminal servers offer 8
or 16 RS-232/485 serial ports to
connect a variety of serial devices
including meter devices, UPS,
PDU, static switch, automatic
transfer switch, generators,
computer room air conditioners,
and other commercial, industrial
or business automation equip-
ment. The serial ports use stan-
dard RJ-45 or DB-9 connectors for
convenient cabling, and optional
adapters are available as well.


2.0-5

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

02

Overview

005

o. Single-port Device ServerIs a
device that is used to add network
connectivity to a single serial
device. These device servers offer
a single RS-232/485 serial port to
connect a variety of serial devices
including meter devices, UPS,
PDU, static switch, automatic
transfer switch, generators,
computer room air conditioners,
and other commercial, industrial
or business automation equip-
ment. The serial ports use stan-
dard RJ-45 or DB-9 connectors for
convenient cabling, and optional
adapters are available as well.
p. PXG 600E/800E COM2 Port
Is used to communicate on a
Modbus RS-232/485 network or
on an Eaton QCPort (IT) bus. The
user may choose between a DB-9
or terminal strip connector to con-
nect up to 32, RS-45 serial devices.
q. PXG 600E/800E COM1 Port
Is used to communicate on a
Modbus RS-232/485 network or
on an Eaton QCPort (IT) bus.
A terminal strip connector is
provided for this interface. Up
to 32 devices may be connected
to this port.
r. PXG 600E/800E INCOM PortIs
used to communicate on an Eaton
INCOM device network only. Up
to 64 devices may be connected
to this port.
s. PXG 200E/400E PortsThe ports
on the PXG 200E/400E operate
the same as on the PXG 600A;
however, there is only one
RS-232/485 port to be used for
Modbus or QCPort.
t. PONI (Product Oriented Network
Interface)Is used to connect the
Breaker Interface Module (8) to an
INCOM network.
u. PXGXPDP CardIs used to
connect an Eaton PDU (Power
Distribution Unit) or RPP (Remote
Power Panel) to an Ethernet
network. Available interfaces are:
HTTP (Web) SNMP, SMTP (e-mail),
Modbus TCP/IP, BACnet/IP and
BACnet/WS+.
v. PXGXUPS CardIs used to con-
nect an Eaton UPS to an Ethernet
network. Available interfaces are:
HTTP (Web) SNMP, SMTP (e-mail),
Modbus TCP/IP, BACnet/IP and
BACnet/WS+.

Important Note

: When connecting
multiple Modbus RTU devices to either
a multiport terminal server or a Power
Xpert Gateway over an RS-485 daisy-
chain network, the baud rate, data
frame (stop bits, data bits and parity),
byte order (standard or reversed) and
physical wiring (two- or four-wire)
must be the same for all devices
connected.
2.0-6



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

02

006



2.1-1

September 2011

Power Management Systems & Products

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

02

Network Connectivity

Power Xpert Gateway 200E

007



General Description

The Power Xpert Gateway 200E
(PXG 200E) is designed to provide
a Web-enabled gateway to serially
communicating energy meters via a
standard Web browser. The PXG 200E
supports revenue grade single and
multipoint energy meters via Modbus
RTU and INCOM. Operates as a
cost-effective hardware solution
for better energy management; no
software required; can export data
for use in other new or existing
monitoring systems.
The PXG 200E allows you to:

Monitor energy usage patterns and
reveal opportunities for efciency
improvements

Remotely monitor real-time
conditions and prole 5-minute
interval trend logs, and export
data in csv format

Allocate energy costs to
departments or processes

Reduce peak demand surcharges

Reduce power factor penalties

Identify billing discrepancies

Allows user to daisy-chain multiple
Ethernet compatible downstream
devices via RJ-45 port (for specics,
see

Page 2.1-5

,

Figure 2.1-5

)

Connect to downstream devices
via a Web browser, Modbus
master or SNMP client separately
or concurrently

Fixed List of supported devices (no ability
to add new product support via EDS
upload); however, new supported devices
will be added during rmware updates.

IQ 35M

IQ Energy Sentinel

IQ 130

IQ 140

IQ 150

IQ 220/230

IQ 220M/230M

IQ 250

IQ 260

IQ MES

II

DIM KYZ (WAGES)

EI NEXUS 1200 Series

PM710

Power Xpert Gateway Screenshots

Home Page
Bus Page
Device Page
2.1-2


www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
008
Table 2.1-1. PXG 200E Features
Expected availability 4Q11.

Table 2.1-2. Supported Devices
Features PXG 200E
Total number of supported devices 64
Maximum number of INCOM devices supported 64
Maximum number of Modbus devices supported 32
Protocols supported on downstream devices: (INCOM and Modbus RTU) Yes
Number of downstream communication ports 2
Number of downstream protocols supported simultaneously 2
USB port for conguration Yes
Two RJ-45 Ethernet ports10/100Base-T Yes
Modbus TCP/IP protocols supported Yes
SNMP client access v.1 Yes
INCOM slave action commands supported Yes
INCOM date and time settings supported Yes
Modbus write commands supported from Modbus master Yes
Device summary screens per main, bus and device Yes
Event notication via the Web interface Yes
Secure Ethernet communicationsSSL encryption Yes
Secure communication ports via access control/trusted host list Yes
IPv4 support Yes
Save and restore conguration le Yes
Interval loggingcsv le format, downloadable to Excel Yes
Ability to upload additional or modied EDS les No
Device waveform access and storageCOMTRADE le format No
Set user-dened events No
Trend graph displayed Yes
Data loggingcsv le format, downloadable to Excel No
Event loggingcsv le format, downloadable to Excel No
E-mail notication on events and threshold alarms No
Custom summary Web page creation No
Ability to create custom events No
Supports SAM3Z energy meters No
BACnet/IP support
Yes
Supported Devices HTTP Web
Services
MB TCP INCOM
Pass-Thru
SNMP File
Export csv
Modbus
Pass-Thru
BACnet/IP
Protocol Device Type Device Name
INCOM I/O DIM KYZ (WAGES)
INCOM Meter IQ MESII
INCOM Meter IQ 220/230
INCOM Meter IQ Energy Sentinel
Modbus Meter IQ 130
Modbus Meter IQ 140
Modbus Meter IQ 150
Modbus Meter IQ 220M/230M
Modbus Meter IQ 250
Modbus Meter IQ 260
Modbus Meter EI NEXUS 1200 Series
Modbus Meter IQ 35M
The Eaton Power Xpert Gateway 200E
Includes:
The Power Xpert Gateway module
Mounting provisions and required
hardware for panel and DIN rail
mounting
CD-ROM: contains the user manual,
Modbus register maps, USB driver
and other associated les
Figure 2.1-1. Power Xpert Gateway with DIN
Rail Mounting (Brackets Included)
2.1-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Dimensions
009
Power Xpert GatewayDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 2.1-2. Power Xpert Gateway 200E
Figure 2.1-3. Power Xpert Gateway 200E with Standard Panel Mounting (Brackets Included)
Figure 2.1-4. Power Xpert Gateway 200E
24 Vdc
Input Power
COM 1 Port:
RS-485 Connection
for up to 32 Modbus
RTU Devices
INCOM Port:
RS-485 Connection
for up to 64 INCOM
Devices
RJ-45
Connection
to the LAN
USB Connection
for Local
Conguration
Capability
Power and Trafc
Indicator Lights
RJ-45
Connection
to the Other
Ethernet Devices
0.56
(14.2)
1.12
(28.5)
2.00
(50.8)
0.19 (6)
(4.8)
0.56
(14.2)
1.60
(40.6)
0.25
(6.4)
0.24
(6.1)
Front
8.75
(222.3)
10.25
(260.4)
10.75
(273.1)
0.60
(15.2)
4.30
(109.2)
8.75
(222.3)
2.1-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Technical Data and Specications
010
Table 2.1-3. PXG 200E Part Numbers
Memory
Flash: 1 GB
RAM: 128 MB
Communication Ports
Network port: two 10/100Base-T
RJ-45 connector
Conguration port: one USB port
Serial ports PXG 200E
One RS-485 port for connection to
INCOM devices
One RS-485 port for connection
to Modbus RTU devices
Network Protocols Supported
Modbus TCP/IP: supports data
access from Modbus TCP clients
Web server: supports data access
from Web browsers (HTTP and
HTTPS)
DHCP: supports automatic IP
address assignments, if enabled
SNMP: supports common network
management tools
NTP: supports time synchronization
via a network time server for PXG
synchronization
SMTP: supports mail server for
e-mail notication
BACnet/IP: supports data access
from BACnet/IP clients
Note: BACnet/IP support expected 4Q11.
Serial Protocols Supported
INCOM
Modbus RTU
Supported Devices
Refer to www.eaton.com/pxg for
most current list. Call for information
on additional devices.
Web Browsers Recommended
IE 6.0 or higher
Mozilla Firefox 2.0 or higher
Google Chrome: Future
Note: Future; see www.eaton.com/pxg for
most recent specications.
Number of Devices Supported
PXG 200E
64 total with INCOM Port + COM 1
port not to exceed 64. Port
limitations are as follows:
INCOM port: up to 64 INCOM
devices
COM 1 port: up to 32 Modbus
devices
Description Style
Number
Catalog
Number
Power supply24 Vdc
Mounting bracket kit
103008420-5591
ELC-PS02
66B2146G01
PXG200E
ELC-PS02
PXGACC01
Power Input
Input voltage, nominal: 24 Vdc; 0.8A
Input voltage range: 20% Nominal
Power Consumption
8 watts maximum
Operating Temperature
32 to 140F (0 to 60C)
Ambient Storage Temperature
40 to 185F (40 to 85C)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% noncondensing at 50C
Size (H x D x L) in Inches (mm)
2.10 x 4.50 x 8.90 (53.3 x 114.3 x 226.1)
Weight
1.5 lbs
Regulatory and Standards Compliance
UL
508, Standard for Programma-

ble Controller Equipment
FCC, Class A, Part 15, Subpart B,
Sections 15.107b and 15.109b
EN55022: 1994 Class A, Information
Technology Equipment
EN 61000-6-2:2001 Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Party 6-2:
Immunity for Industrial Environments
Note: Features and specications listed in
this document are subject to change with-
out notice and represent the maximum
capabilities of the product with all options
installed. Although every attempt has been
made to ensure the accuracy of information
contained within, Eaton makes no represen-
tation about the completeness, correctness
or accuracy and assumes no responsibility
for any errors or omissions. Features and
functionality may vary depending on
selected options.
2.1-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
011
PXG-E Daisy Chain Application
The PXG-E allows for units to be
connected together through two RJ-45
10/100 connectors on the front of the
PXG-E series of products. This
arrangement is a pass-through of
Ethernet communications allowing a
single network drop to connect up to
ve Ethernet communicating devices.
The maximum length of a copper
cable run should not exceed
295 ft (90m) total.
Note: In this conguration, if any of the
PXG-E units go ofine or lose power, the
communication to the downstream Ethernet
devices will lose connection to the LAN.
Figure 2.1-5. PXG-E Daisy Chain Application
Ethernet LAN
LAN Connection
295 ft (90m)
PXM2000
2.1-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
012
Power Xpert Gateway
400E/600E/800E
Power Xpert Gateways 400E, 600E and
800E are typically installed in an electrical
assemblya motor control center, low/
medium voltage switchgear or switchboard
to consolidate data available from
components such as trip units, meters,
motor controllers and protective relays.
General Description
Power Xpert Gateways 400E, 600E and
800E (PXG 400E/600E/800E) provide a
cost-effective method to easily Web-
enable Eaton and third-party products.
The PXG 400E/600E/800E series offers
improved performance over the
previously offered series, logging
in the PXG 600E/800E, daisy chaining
capabilities (Page 2.1-8, Figure 2.1-8)
and design enhancements including a
new processor and additional RAM and
Flash memory.
The gateway consists of an embedded
Web server that allows the user to
connect to Eaton products such as
breakers, meters and relays found in
MCCs, LV and MV switchgear and
switchboardsto name a fewthat
communicate via Eaton protocols
INCOM and QCPort, in addition to third-
party products that communicate via
Modbus RTU. The Gateway provides
the central connection point for the
power metering/monitoring/protective
devices, allowing their parameters to
be monitored via the Web.
The PXG 400E/600E/800E provide data
communications to Eatons Power
Xpert Software to facilitate centralizing
and gathering data for long-term data
archival, analysis and trending features.
The PXG 400E/600E/800E are
compatible with and facilitate
integration with many third-party
building and factory automation
systems via Modbus TCP and
Web services.
Note: Enclosed solution available. Contact
your Eaton sales ofce for more details.
The PXG 600E/800E allow you to enable
pre-selected parameters to be trended
for each supported device. Selecting
the trend symbol will generate a real-
time graph for that parameter and can
be viewed for the past 24 hours, seven
days, 30 days or all past history.
The PXG 600E/800E also offer direct
e-mail notications to up to 10 users.
Select from event notications, data
logs, interval log, event logs and
heartbeat e-mails.
The PXG 800E brings this communica-
tion hardware-only solution closer
to those requirements that have
previously only been met by a
software package. The PXG 800E
includes all the functionality of the
PXG 600E. Additional features include:
Creation of custom summary Web
pages on the user interface
Ability to create custom events from
existing device parameters or events
Ability to communicate wirelessly
with the SAM3Z submetering
system
In the PXG 400E/600E/800E, informa-
tion is presented in organized, user-
friendly Web pages and includes, but
is not limited to, the following:
Device status
Comm status
Voltage
Current
Power
Power factor
Energy
Power quality
Temperature
I/O states
Downstream devices on the Power
Xpert Gateways often report key
operating status information that
warrants immediate attention. The
PXG identies a set of key status
values for each device and generates
Events in response to changes in
these status values. An example of a
device event is an overcurrent trip on a
circuit breaker.
In addition to displaying events on its
home page, the PXG reports events to
monitoring software such as Power
Xpert Software. These events will then
be integrated with those from across
the power system, providing unied
enterprise level event management.
Home Page
Bus Page
Device Page
Trending Page (PXG 600E/800E Only)
2.1-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
013
Table 2.1-4. Features of the PXG-E Product Offering
Expected availability 4Q11.

Figure 2.1-6. Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E
Features PXG 400E PXG 600E PXG 800E
Total number of supported devices 64 96 96
Maximum number of INCOM devices supported 64 64 64
Protocols supported on downstream devices: (INCOM,
Modbus RTU and QCPort)
Yes Yes Yes
Number of downstream communication ports 2 3 3
Number of downstream protocols supported simultaneously 2 3 3
USB port for conguration Yes Yes Yes
Two RJ-45 Ethernet ports10/100Base-T Yes Yes Yes
Modbus TCP/IP protocols supported Yes Yes Yes
SNMP client access v.1 Yes Yes Yes
INCOM slave action commands supported Yes Yes Yes
INCOM date and time settings supported Yes Yes Yes
Modbus write commands supported from Modbus master Yes Yes Yes
Device summary screens per main, bus and device Yes Yes Yes
Event notication via the Web interface Yes Yes Yes
Secure Ethernet communicationsSSL encryption Yes Yes Yes
Secure communication ports via access control/trusted host list Yes Yes Yes
IPv4 support Yes Yes Yes
Ability to upload additional or modied EDS les Yes Yes Yes
Save and restore conguration le Yes Yes Yes
Device waveform access and storageCOMTRADE le format No Yes Yes
Set user-dened events No Yes Yes
Trend graph displayed No Yes Yes
Data loggingcsv le format, downloadable to Excel No Yes Yes
Interval loggingcsv le format, downloadable to Excel No Yes Yes
Event loggingcsv le format, downloadable to Excel No Yes Yes
E-mail notication on events and threshold alarms No Yes Yes
Custom summary Web page creation No No Yes
Ability to create custom events No No Yes
Supports SAM3Z energy meters No No Yes
BACnet/IP protocol supported

24 Vdc
Input Power
COM 1 Port:
RS-485 Connection for
up to Either (32) QCPort
or Modbus RTU Devices
INCOM Port:
RS-485 Connection
for up to 64 INCOM
Devices
RJ-45
Connection
to the LAN
USB Connection
for Local
Conguration
Capability
Power and Trafc
Indicator Lights
Wireless antenna available only with
800E for communication to SAM3Z device
RJ-45
Connection
to the Other
Ethernet Devices
PXG 600E or 800E
Data and Link
Indicator Lights:
Available only
with 800E
COM 2 Port:
Either RS-485
or RS-232
Connection
for up to Either
(32) QCPort or
Modbus RTU
Devices
The Eaton Power Xpert Gateway Includes:
The Power Xpert Gateway module
Mounting provisions and required
hardware for panel and DIN rail
mounting
CD-ROM: contains the user manual,
Modbus register maps, USB driver
and other associated les
Figure 2.1-7. Power Xpert Gateway with DIN
Rail Mounting (Brackets Included)
2.1-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Technical Specications
014
PXG-E Daisy Chain Application
The PXG-E allows for units to be
connected together through two RJ-45
10/100 connectors on the front of the
PXG-E series of products. This
arrangement is a pass-through of
Ethernet communications allowing a
single network drop to connect up to
ve Ethernet communicating devices.
The maximum length of a copper
cable run should not exceed
295 ft (90m) total.
Note: In this conguration, if any of the
PXG-E units go ofine or lose power, the
communication to the downstream Ethernet
devices will lose connection to the LAN.
Figure 2.1-8. PXG-E Daisy Chain Application
Ethernet LAN
LAN Connection
295 ft (90m)
PXM2000
2.1-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Connectivity Matrix
015
Table 2.1-5. Data Acquisition and Integration Table For Supported Devices
Required IPONI for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.
Required a WPONI for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.

Note:
Supported Devices
Device Type Device Name
PXG 400E/600E/800E PXG 600E/800E Only
H
T
T
P

(
W
e
b

B
r
o
w
s
e
r
)
W
e
b

S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s

(
P
o
w
e
r

X
p
e
r
t

S
o
f
t
w
a
r
e
)
M
o
d
b
u
s

T
C
P

(
B
M
S

a
n
d

S
C
A
D
A
)
P
a
s
s
-
t
h
r
o
u
g
h

I
N
C
O
M

(
P
o
w
e
r
N
e
t
)
P
a
s
s
-
t
h
r
o
u
g
h

Q
C
P
o
r
t

(
C
H
S
t
u
d
i
o
)
S
N
M
P

(
N
M
S
)
B
A
C
n
e
t
/
I
P
S
M
T
P

(
E
-
m
a
i
l

C
l
i
e
n
t
)
F
i
l
e

E
x
p
o
r
t

(
D
a
t
a

F
i
l
e

F
o
r
m
a
t
)
F
i
l
e

E
x
p
o
r
t

(
W
a
v
e
f
o
r
m

F
i
l
e

E
x
p
o
r
t
)
INCOM
Drive Accutrol 400
Drive AF97
I/O Universal RTD
I/O DIM
I/O DIM KYZ
Meter IQ DP-4000

Meter IQ Energy Sentinel
Meter IQ 220/IQ 320
Meter IQ 230/IQ 330
Meter IQ Analyzer (6000/6200)

Meter IQ Analyzer (6400/6600)

Meter IQ Data

Meter IQ Data Plus

Meter IQ Data Plus II

Meter Power Manager
Meter IQ Power Sentinel
Meter point IQ MES II
Protective Digitrip 3000
Protective FP-6000
Protective FP-5000
Protective FP-4000
Protective MP-3000

Protective MP-4000

Protective Digitrip 520MC
Protective NRX520
Protective IQ 500
Protective MPCV Relay
Protective Digitrip 1150/DT1150V
Protective Digitrip MV
Protective Digitrip OPTIM 1050
Starter Advantage

Starter Advantage ACM

Subnetwork master AEM II

Subnetwork master BIM II

Subnetwork master CMU

Subnetwork master IQ CED II

Subnetwork master IQ MES II
Transfer switch ATC-400

Transfer switch ATC-600

Transfer Switch ATC-800

Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com/pxg for latest up-to-date details on connectivity.
2.1-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Connectivity Matrix
016
Table 2.1-5. Data Acquisition and Integration Table For Supported Devices (Continued)
Requires a QSNAP for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.

Note:
Note: Additional supported devices will be available via rmware updates. Contact your local Eaton sales ofce for help with
devices not currently listed in Table 2.1-5.
Supported Devices
Device Type Device Name
PXG 400E/600E/800E PXG 600E/800E Only
H
T
T
P

(
W
e
b

B
r
o
w
s
e
r
)
W
e
b

S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s

(
P
o
w
e
r

X
p
e
r
t

S
o
f
t
w
a
r
e
)
M
o
d
b
u
s

T
C
P

(
B
M
S

a
n
d

S
C
A
D
A
)
P
a
s
s
-
t
h
r
o
u
g
h

I
N
C
O
M

(
P
o
w
e
r
N
e
t
)
P
a
s
s
-
t
h
r
o
u
g
h

Q
C
P
o
r
t

(
C
H
S
t
u
d
i
o
)
S
N
M
P

(
N
M
S
)
B
A
C
n
e
t
/
I
P
S
M
T
P

(
E
-
m
a
i
l

C
l
i
e
n
t
)
F
i
l
e

E
x
p
o
r
t

(
D
a
t
a

F
i
l
e

F
o
r
m
a
t
)
F
i
l
e

E
x
p
o
r
t

(
W
a
v
e
f
o
r
m

F
i
l
e

E
x
p
o
r
t
)
Modbus
Drive MVX9000
Drive SVX9000
Insulation monitor InsulGard
Meter IQ 130
Meter IQ 140
Meter IQ 150
Meter IQ 220M/230M
Meter IQ 250
Meter IQ 260
Meter IQ 35M
Meter Nexus 1262
Meter SQD CM3000 Series
Meter SQD CM4000 Series
Meter SQD PM710
Meter SQD PM850
Meter PML 7350
Meter PML 7550
Meter PML 7650
Meter PM3
Protective GE 369 Motor Relay
Protective GE 469 Motor Relay
Protective FP-4000/FP-5000
Protective FP-6000
Overload relay C441
Temp monitor Qualitrol 118
Temp monitor TC-50
Temp monitor TC-100
Transformer differential relay ABB TPU 2000
QCPort
I/O D77A-AI16
I/O D77A-AI8
I/O D77A-DI16
I/O D77A-DI8
Starter IT. S811 (MV811)
Starter IT. Starter

Starter IT. Starter QSNAP

Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com/pxg for latest up-to-date details on connectivity.
2.1-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Product Selection
017
The table below represents many of the parameters displayed on the Web page for a given device; however, it is not exhaustive.
For the complete list of parameters display, per device, refer to the Device Data Map le at http://www.eaton.com/pxg.
Table 2.1-6. Web UI Device Parameters Displayed via Power Xpert Gateway
Units IQ Meters Circuit Breaker Trip Units Protective Relays
I
Q

D
a
t
a

P
l
u
s

I
I
I
Q

D
a
t
a

P
l
u
s
I
Q

D
a
t
a
I
Q

A
n
a
l
y
z
e
r

6
0
0
0
/
6
2
0
0
I
Q

A
n
a
l
y
z
e
r

6
4
0
0
/
6
6
0
0
I
Q

D
P
-
4
0
0
0

I
Q

2
2
0
/
3
2
0
I
Q

2
3
0
/
3
3
0
I
Q

2
3
0
/
3
3
0
M
I
Q

2
5
0
I
Q

2
6
0
I
Q

P
o
w
e
r

S
e
n
t
i
n
e
l
I
Q

E
n
e
r
g
y

S
e
n
t
i
n
e
l
I
Q

M
E
S
I
I
I
Q

1
3
0
I
Q

1
4
0
I
Q

1
5
0
I
Q

3
5
M
P
o
w
e
r

M
a
n
a
g
e
r
D
i
g
i
t
r
i
p

1
1
5
0
D
i
g
i
t
r
i
p

5
2
0
M
C
D
i
g
i
t
r
i
p

R
M
S

9
1
0
D
i
g
i
t
r
i
p

R
M
S

8
1
0
D
i
g
i
t
r
i
p

O
P
T
I
M

1
0
5
0
D
i
g
i
t
r
i
p

O
P
T
I
M

5
5
0
D
i
g
i
t
r
i
p

O
P
T
I
M

7
5
0
D
i
g
i
t
r
i
p

M
V
D
i
g
i
t
r
i
p

3
0
0
0
D
i
g
i
t
r
i
p

3
2
0
0
I
Q

5
0
0
M
P
V
C
V

R
e
l
a
y
F
P
-
4
0
0
0
F
P
-
5
0
0
0
M
P
-
3
0
0
0

M
P
-
4
0
0
0
F
P
-
6
0
0
0
E
D
R
-
3
0
0
0
Voltage
Average V
Voltage (line-line) V
Voltage (line-neutral) V
Current
Average A
Phase A
Ground A
Neutral A
Peak A
Demand A
Power
Apparent VA
Reactive VAR
Real W
Power Factor
Apparent PF
Displacement PF
Energy
Real Wh
Forward Wh
Reverse Wh
Apparent Vah
Reactive VARh
Leading VARh
Lagging VARh
Power Quality
THD %
Current THD %
Voltage THD %
Frequency Hz
Waveform capture N/A
Temperature
Ambient C
Auxiliary C
Load bearing C
Motor bearing C
Winding C
Phase (L, C, R) C
Terminal block C
Input Status
Number of inputs 2 2
Status/cause of trip
Thermal memory
Pole temperature
Winding temp.
Fan status
Alarm/trip relay
2.1-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Product Selection
018
Table 2.1-6. Web UI Device Parameters Displayed via Power Xpert Gateway (Continued)
Note:
Units Insulation
Monitor
Motor Starters
& VFDs
Transfer
Switches
I/O Third-Party Devices
I
n
s
u
l
G
a
r
d
A
c
c
u
t
r
o
l

4
0
0
A
F
9
7
A
d
v
a
n
t
a
g
e

S
t
a
r
t
e
r
s

I
T
.

S
8
1
1
I
T
.

S
t
a
r
t
e
r
s
/
Q
S
N
A
P
C
4
4
1

O
v
e
r
l
o
a
d

R
e
l
a
y
S
V
X

&

M
V
X

D
r
i
v
e
s
A
T
C
-
4
0
0
A
C
T
-
6
0
0
A
C
T
-
8
0
0
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

I
n
p
u
t

M
o
d
u
l
e
D
7
7
A
-
A
I
1
6
D
7
7
A
-
A
I
8
D
7
7
A
-
D
I
1
6
D
7
7
A
-
D
I
8
D
I
M

K
Y
Z
U
n
i
v
e
r
s
a
l

R
T
D
S
Q
D

C
M

3
0
0
0

S
e
r
i
e
s
S
Q
D

C
M

4
0
0
0

S
e
r
i
e
s
S
Q
D

P
M

7
1
0
S
Q
D

P
M

8
5
0
P
M
L

7
3
5
0
P
M
L

7
5
5
0
P
M
L

7
6
5
0
G
E

3
6
9

M
o
t
o
r

R
e
l
a
y
G
E

4
6
9

M
o
t
o
r

R
e
l
a
y
A
B
B

T
P
U

2
0
0
0
Q
u
a
l
i
t
r
o
l

1
1
8
N
e
x
u
s

1
2
6
2
/
1
2
7
2
P
M
3
T
C
-
5
0
T
C
-
1
0
0
Voltage
Average V
Voltage (line-line) V
Voltage (line-neutral) V
Current
Average A
Phase A
Ground A
Neutral A
Peak A
Demand A
Power
Apparent VA
Reactive VAR
Real W
Power Factor
Apparent PF
Displacement PF
Energy
Real Wh
Forward Wh
Reverse Wh
Apparent Vah
Reactive VARh
Leading VARh
Lagging VARh
Power Quality
THD %
Current THD %
Voltage THD %
Frequency Hz
Waveform capture N/A
Temperature
Ambient C
Auxiliary C
Load bearing C
Motor bearing C
Winding C
Phase (L, C, R) C
Terminal block C
Input Status
Number of inputs 8 16 8 16 8 4 8 2
Status/cause of trip
Thermal memory
Pole temperature
Winding temp.
Fan status
Alarm/trip relay
Partial discharge
intensity (PDI)
Information subject to change without notice. Visit www.eaton.com for latest information.
2.1-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Dimensions
019
Power Xpert GatewayDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 2.1-9. Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E with Standard Panel Mounting (Brackets Included)
Figure 2.1-10. Power Xpert Gateway 400E/600E/800E
0.56
(14.2)
1.12
(28.5)
2.00
(50.8)
0.19 (6)
(4.8)
0.56
(14.2)
1.60
(40.6)
0.25
(6.4)
0.24
(6.1)
Front
8.75
(222.3)
10.25
(260.4)
10.75
(273.1)
0.60
(15.2)
4.30
(109.2)
8.75
(222.3)
2.1-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
020
Table 2.1-7. PXG Part Numbers
Memory
Flash: 1 GB400E/600E
2 GB800E
RAM: 128 MB
Communication Ports
Network port: two 10/100Base-T
RJ-45 connectors
Conguration port: one USB port
Serial ports PXG 400E
One dedicated RS-485 port for
connection to INCOM devices
to either QCPort or Modbus RTU
devices
Serial ports PXG 600E/800E
One dedicated RS-485 port for
connection to INCOM devices
devices
One RS-485 or RS-232 (software
selectable) port for connection
devices
Network Protocols Supported
Modbus TCP/IP: supports data
access from Modbus TCP clients
Web server: supports data access
from Web browsers (HTTP and
HTTPS)
DHCP: supports automatic IP
address assignments, if enabled
SNMP: supports common network
management tools
NTP: supports time synchronization
via a network time server for PXG
synchronization
SMTP: supports mail server for
e-mail notication
BACnet/IP: supports data access
from BACnet/IP clients
Note: BACnet/IP support expected 4Q11.
Serial Protocols Supported
INCOM
QCPort
Modbus RTU
Supported Devices
Refer to www.eaton.com/pxg for
most current list. Call for information
on additional devices.
Web Browsers Recommended
IE 6.0 or higher
Mozilla Firefox 2.0 or higher
Google Chrome (future)
Number of Devices Supported
PXG 400E
port not to exceed 64. Port
limitations are as follows:
devices
COM 1 port: up to 32 QCPort or
Modbus RTU devices
PXG 600E/800E
port + COM 2 PORT not to exceed
96. Port limitations are as follows:
devices
COM 1 port: up to 32 QCPort
or Modbus RTU devices
COM 2 port: up to 32 QCPort
or Modbus RTU devices
COM 3 port: the SAM3Z
energy meter is the only
supported device
Note: PXG 800Eup to 96 total devices.
Description Style
Number
Catalog
Number
103008421-5591
103008422-5591
103008423-5591
PXG400E
PXG600E
PXG800E
Wireless energy meter for PXG 800E
Wireless repeater module for SAM3Z
Power supply24 Vdc
Mounting bracket kit
P-103000007-591
P-103000008-591
ELC-PS02
66B2146G01
SAM3Z
EZR
ELC-PS02
PXGACC01
Power Input
Input voltage, nominal: 24 Vdc; 0.8A
Input voltage range: 20% Nominal
Power Consumption
8 watts maximum
32 to 140F (0 to 60C)
Ambient Storage Temperature
40 to 185F (40 to 85C)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95% noncondensing at 50C
Size (H x D x L) in Inches (mm)
2.10 x 4.50 x 8.90 (53.3 x 114.3 x 226.1)
Weight
1.5 lbs
Regulatory and Standards Compliance
UL 508, Standard for Programmable
Controller Equipment
FCC, Class A, Part 15, Subpart B,
Sections 15.107b and 15.109b
EN55022: 1994 Class A, Information
Technology Equipment
EN 61000-6-2:2001 Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Party 6-2:
Immunity for Industrial Environments
Note: Features and specications listed in
this document are subject to change with-
out notice and represent the maximum
capabilities of the product with all options
installed. Although every attempt has been
made to ensure the accuracy of information
contained within, Eaton makes no represen-
tation about the completeness, correctness
or accuracy and assumes no responsibility
for any errors or omissions. Features and
functionality may vary depending on
selected options.
2.1-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Wiring Guidelines
021
General Wiring GuidelinesRS-485 Network
Table 2.1-8. RS-485 Wiring GuideThree Terminal Devices
Transceiver (XCVR) Common Connected to:

I = Isolated
NI = Non Isolated
E = Earth Ground
Center terminal on Insulgard (marked with Ground symbol) is for shield splicing only and is
electrically oating.
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 is directly compatible with Ethernet networks and does
not need a Power Xpert Gateway. See Tab 3 for more details.
When communicating over RS-485
networks to Eaton products, the
following general wiring guidelines
should be used.
Rule 1: Cable Selection
Twisted Shielded Pair (TSP)
Note cables specically designed
for RS-485 applications are highly
recommended. The RS-485 bus is a
length of twisted shielded pair (TSP)
that includes a third conductor (used
for the common wire), a braided shield
accompanied by a drain wire, and
nominal impedance of 120 ohms.
Belden Wire and Cable Company
Part Number 3106A or equivalent
Rule 2: Cable Intermixing
Any cable in the Belden 3106A family
can be intermixed with each other in
the Modbus network.
Note: For ber optic wiring guidelines, see
Pages 2.2-2 and 2.2-3.
Rule 3: System Topology, Size and Capacity
Strict daisy chain must be adhered
to. A strict daisy chain conguration
is one where the transmission line
connects from one RS-485 receiver
to the next. The transmission line
appears as one continuous line to
the RS-485 driver
Maximum 32 devices
Line termination: maximum cable
lengths of 4000 ft (1219m); longer
bus lengths will slow the data rate
Rule 4: Cable Splicing
The prime goal is to create a secure
electrical connection while minimizing
exposure to electrical transients.
Ferrules are used to dress cable ends.
Most devices have built-in terminal
blocks which can be used for splicing.
Additionally, terminal blocks should
be used when splicing elsewhere in
the gear or facility to ensure a secure
electrical connection.
Device Name A
( Wire)
B
(+ Wire)
Common
Wire
XCVR
Common
Data
Bias
IQ 230M 12 (MOD2) 11 (MOD1) 10 (INCOM 3) I 26V None
IQ 250 ()
Older Models
are Marked
B ()
(+)
Older Models
are Marked
A () or A(+)
SH I None
IQ 260 ()
Older Models
are Marked
B ()
(+)
Older Models
are Marked
A () or A (+)
SH I None
IQ 330M 12 (MOD2) 11 (MOD1) 10 (INCOM 3) I 26V None
InsulGard
B A None Floating None

Bushing Gard
(InsulGard G3
)
B A None Floating None
Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000
Data A
750B-S
Data B
750B-S
Shield
(COM)
I 300V 750 Ohm
Switch Sel
Power Xpert Gateways A() B(+) COM I
Rule 5: Cable Shielding
The cable shielding and outer jacket
should not be stripped back beyond
1.50 inches (38 mm). Three-pole
terminal blocks are used to ensure
a continuous metallic shield ground
path. To ensure a secure electrical
connection when daisy chaining
devices that have built-in two-pole
terminal blocks, mechanically crimp
sleeves onto the two shield path
drain wires.
Rule 6: Cable Grounding
Ground the communication network at
only one point in the network, prefera-
bly by terminating the drain wire
to ground at the EOL node (same
location as the EOLR). A solid earth
ground is accomplished by connecting
the shield ground paths drain wire to
a #14 AWG or larger multi-stranded
wire that has an impedance path of 1
ohm or less to a known earth ground.
Note: The building electrical ground may
not be effective since it may travel through
many connections and considerable
distances before reaching earth ground.
In such cases a new ground path will be
required since the effectiveness of this
shield earth ground connection will affect
the integrity of data transferred over
the cable.
Rule 7: Cable Termination
End of Line Resistors (EOLR) are
necessary to maintain signal strength
and minimize reections. EOLR must
match the impedance of the TSP.
Two EOLR are needed and should be
located at both ends of the RS-485 bus.
If there is only one device connected to
the Modbus master, it is considered
the last device in the network and
should be terminated with a 120 ohm
1/4 watt terminating resistor.
Rule 8: Device Addressing
Each device must have a unique
slave address
No two devices on the same
RS-485 network can have the same
slave address
Ethernet Cable Specications
For complete specications, refer to
the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet specication.
2.1-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Wiring Guidelines
022
INCOM Network
INCOM was specically designed with
the intention of delivering a compre-
hensive and powerful energy manage-
ment solution for use in electrical
distribution environments while ensur-
ing affordability, exibility, simplicity
and noise immunity. An INCOM net-
work installed per the following rules
will allow the user to fully realize all of
the above advantages. (Refer to Eaton
document TD17513 for specic system
layout recommendations and details.)
Rule 1: Cable Selection
Twisted Shielded Pair
Approved cable types:
Any of the cables in the Belden 9463
family
Quabbin 6205
CommScope 9022
Manhattan Electric M4154
IMPCABLEa 600V rated cable
custom designed for INCOM
Style # 2A95705G01
Rule 2: Cable Intermixing
Due to impedance differences
between IMPCABLE and the Belden
9463 family, the main cable run(s)
should be entirely for the 9463 family
OR IMPCABLE: do not alternate
between these types. The cable
used for taps can be different from
the main run.
Rule 3: System Topology, Size and Capacity
Supports Daisy Chain, Star and Multi-
Level Network Segment Topologies.
(Note: Star Segment Topology is
not recommended for new designs).
See Figure 2.1-10. Surge protection is
required for FSK networks that leave
a building at the egress/ingress of
the building.
Supports distances up to 10,000 ft
(3048m) per segment when
designed within the specications of
this guideline
Supports up to 1000 devices on a
single network segment
Supports sub-network master
devices and associated sub-networks
Supports 1200 or 9600 baud rate.
Attenuation:
Total system capacity: 25 dB
Attenuation per device: 0.01 dB
Attenuation for approved
wire types (see Tables 2.1-9
and 2.1-10)
Table 2.1-9. Cable Attenuation
Table 2.1-10. Attenuation at Star
Denitions:
Daisy chain: point-to-point
wiring between devices or
clusters of devices
Star: single point with a number
of long lines emanating from it
Long line: >200-ft (61m)
wire run
Simple tap: <200-ft (61m)
connection to cluster of devices
Rule 4: Cable Splicing
The goal is to create a secure electrical
connection while minimizing exposure
to electrical transients. Ferrules are
used to dress cable ends in order to
avoid problems associated with frayed
and loose wires. Besides facilitating
cable installation, subsequent data line
troubleshooting and downtime are
minimized. Most INCOM devices have
built in three pole terminal blocks for
data lines and shield. For older INCOM
devices that have only two terminals,
shield continuity must be ensured by
other means. Additional terminal
strips should be used when splicing
elsewhere in the electrical enclosure
or facility to ensure secure electrical
connections. All devices, End of
Line Termination Resistors, and
Taps should be wired in parallel
across the cable.
Rule 5: Cable Shielding
The cable shielding and outer jacket
should not be stripped back beyond
1.50 inches (38 mm). Terminal blocks
are used at tap points to ensure a
continuous metallic shield ground
path. To ensure a secure electrical
connection when daisy-chaining
INCOM devices that have built-in
two pole terminal blocks, use crimp
sleeves to join the two shield drain
wires. The cable shield ground path
for a main network and sub-network
must not be joined. Each should
have a separate connection to earth
ground reference.
Rule 6: Cable Grounding
The shield should be continuous
across a network segment and con-
nected to the buildings electrical sys-
tem grounding electrode conductor.
The 2005 NEC provides the following
guidance on grounding communica-
tion cables:
1. When a communication cable
enters a building, a primary
protector is required and must be
grounded as described in section
800 IV. Specically, paragraphs
800.93 and 800.100 dene ground-
ing requirements for the primary
protector.
2. Grounding systems are generally
covered by Section 250 III. The
grounding electrode conductor is
specically covered by paragraphs
250.62, 250.64, 250.66, 250.68 and
250.70.
3. Bonding requirements between
communication systems and
the power distribution system is
specied by Paragraph 250.94.
A solid earth ground is accomplished
by connecting the shield ground paths
drain wire to a #14 AWG or larger
multi-stranded wire that has an imped-
ance path of 1 ohm or less to the build-
ings grounding electrode conductor.
Rule 7: Cable Termination
Each network segment requires a min-
imum of two End of Line Termination
Resistors (EOLTRs). The EOLTRs
maintain signal strength and minimize
reections. The EOLTRs should be 1/2
watt 100 ohm non-inductive resistors,
such as carbon composition or metal
lm. Wire-wound resistors are not
acceptable. Taps on network segments
should not be terminated. Some
INCOM devices have the EOLTR
permanently installed and must be
located at the end of a main run.
Other INCOM devices have an EOLTR
that can be switched to optionally
terminate the network segment at the
device. Care must be exercised when
installing devices containing termina-
tion resistors that the switches are
set appropriately. A minimum of two,
up to a maximum of ve EOLTRs must
be installed on each network segment
as dictated by network topology.
Rule 8: Device Address
In order to avoid the possibility of
devices in a main network having the
same addresses as those in subnet-
works, set main network device
addresses at 100 or higher excluding
addresses 901 to 908.
Cable
Type
Attenuation/
1000 ft (305m)
IMPCABLE
Belden 9463 family
1.6 dB
2.0 dB
Number of
Long Lines
Attenuation
3
4
5
3.5 dB
6 dB
8 dB
2.1-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Wiring Guidelines
023
Figure 2.1-11. Daisy-Chain Segment Topology
Tap
Device 10
Device 9 Device 8
Device 5
Device 4
Device 3
Device 2 Device 1
Main Run
Tap
EOLTR
EOLTR
Device 7
Device 6
INCOM
Master
Note: Device 1 may be a PC with
internal CONI Card, a SubNetwork
Master (BIM, LDISP), an INCOM MINT
(RS-232 MINTII, Ethernet MINT, Mod-
bus RS-485 MINT), an INCOM Gateway
(NetLink, Power Xpert Gateway).
2.1-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
IQ Meters
024
Ethernet-Enabled Power
Quality & Energy (PQ&E)
IQ Meters
IQ Digital Panel Meters
General Description
The Power Xpert Gateway 400E
supports a total of 64 devices. The
Power Xpert Gateway 600E and 800E
support up to 96 total devices, with a
limit of 64 INCOM devices.
When designing a system using gate-
ways, it is important to consider not
only the number of devices that will
communicate through a PXG 400E/
600E/800E, but also the quantity of
monitored parameters of each of its
supported downstream devices.
For example, the number of the
monitored parameters in the FP-5000
protective relay is 274, the maximum
number of parameters per PXG 400E/
600E/800E is 8000. Dividing 8000 by 274
tells you that the maximum number of
FP-5000s you can have downstream
on a single PXG 400E/600E/800E is 28.
Please contact your local Eaton sales
ofce for a maximum number of
downstream devices based on your
monitored parameter requirements.
Equipment
Note: For detailed equipment information,
refer to Tab 3.
IQ 35M meterModbus RS-485
IQ MES IIINCOM
IQ 130/140/150 meters
IQ 250/260 metersModbus RS-485
IQ 220/230 metersINCOM
IQ DP-4000/4100 metersINCOM
IQ Energy Sentinel/Power Sentinel
metersINCOM
IQ Central Energy Display IIINCOM
Options
PXG 400EUp to 64 IQ meters may
be connected for Web browser access
and INCOM translation for Power
Xpert Software and Foreseer Services
PXG 600E/800EUp to 96 IQ meters
may be connected for Web browser
access, data logging, alarm notica-
tion, control commands, and INCOM
translation for Power Xpert Software
and Foreseer Services
Communication Interfaces
Modbus RTU (RS-485) or INCOM
(downstream)
Modbus TCP/IP (with PXG)
HTTP (with PXG)
XML/SOAP (with PXG)
SMTP (with PXG 600E/800E)
SNMP (with PXG 600E/800E)
Metering/Monitoring Applications
Real-time viewing of power/energy
readings (PXG)
View trended power/energy
readings (PXG 600E/800E)
User-dened events (PXG 600E/800E)
E-mail notication (PXG 600E/800E)
Installation Applications
Low voltage switchgear
Low voltage motor control centers
Medium voltage motor starters
Communications Applications
Building Management System
(BMS)
Energy Management Systems
Network Management Systems (NMS)
HMI
Foreseer Services
Figure 2.1-12. PXG Ethernet-Enabled IQ Meter Applications
Note: Many other devices supported. See complete supported device list at www.eaton.com/pxg.
IQ 250/260
IQ Analyzer
3
rd
Party Meter
3
rd
Party
Meter
eolr
3
rd
Party
Meter
3
rd
Party
Meter
IQ 250/260
IQ 250/260
IQ Analyzer
3
rd
Party Meter
Ethernet Network
QCPort Network
INCOM Network
RS-485 Network
eolr = End of line resistor
eoltr = End of line terminator
resistor
eoltr
eolr eolr
eoltr
PXG 600E
and
PXG 800E
2.1-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Trip Units and Protective Relays
025
Ethernet-Enabled Circuit
Breaker Trip Units and
Protective Relays
Electronic Trip Units
General Description
Up to a combination of 64 INCOM trip
units and protective relays may be
connected to a single Power Xpert
Gateway (PXG) and deployed in
various power distribution and
motor control applications and made
accessible to an Ethernet network
using the PXG.
Equipment
Digitrip 3000/3200
FP-4000/5000/6000
MP-3000/4000
Digitrip 520MC
IQ 500
MPCV Relay
Digitrip 1150/DT1150V
Digitrip 810/910
Digitrip MV
Digitrip OPTIM 1050/750/550
BIM II (Breaker Interface Module)
Options
PXG 400EUp to 64 IQ meters may
be connected for Web browser
access and INCOM translation for
tion, control commands, and INCOM
Note: Both PXG 400E/600E support a
maximum of 64 INCOM devices while
not to exceed the total PXG device limit.
PXG 400E64 Total
PXG 600E/800E96 Total
Modbus RTU (RS-485) or INCOM
downstream
HTTP (with PXG) (with ECC)
HTTPS (with PXG)
XML/SOAP (with PXG)
readings (PXG)
(BMS)
HMI
Network Management Systems
(NMS)
Foreseer Services
Viewing an Eaton FP-5000 Protective Relay
through the Power Xpert Gateway
Figure 2.1-13. Power Xpert Gateway Trip Unit and Relay Application
Note: When using Modbus RTU over an RS-485 communications network, the data rate, data
protocol (data bit, stop bit and parity) and wiring topology (two-wire or four-wire) must be the
same for each of the devices.
Note: Many other devices supported. See complete supported device list at www.eaton.com/pxg.
eolr

24 Vdc
Power Supply Required
3
rd
Party
Motor Relay
3
rd
Party
Motor Relay
3
rd
Party
Portective
Relay
eoltr
3
rd
Party
Motor Relay
3
rd
Party
Motor Relay
3
rd
Party
Motor Relay
3
rd
Party
Motor Relay
eolr eolr
eoltr
3
rd
Party
Portective
Relay
3
rd
Party
Portective
Relay
FP4000
FP5000
DT3000
BIM II
1150/DT1150
Optim 1050
FP4000
FP5000
DT3000
BIM II
1150/DT1150
OPTIM 1050
Ethernet Network
QCPort Network
INCOM Network
RS-485 Network
eolr = End of line resistor
eoltr = End of line termination resistor

PXG 600E and PXG 800E
2.1-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
026
Figure 2.1-14. Typical Ethernet-Enabled Unit Substation With Switchboard Secondary
Medium Voltage
Fused Switch
Step Down
Unit Substation Transformer
Low Voltage
Secondary Distribution Switchboard
Modbus RS-485 Belden Wiring and
Conduit from Switchboard to
Transformer Temperature Controller
by Installing Contractor.
All CAT5e or CAT6 Wiring,
Connectors and Conduit to Additional
Ethernet Devices if Required
(i.e., PXM in Medium Voltage Switch)
Optional Connection Via 62.5
Micron Duplex Multimode Fiber
Pair With ST Connectors to
Facility Power Monitoring System.
all Fiber Optic Wiring, Connectors and
Conduit by Installing Contractor.
CAT5e or CAT6 Connection to
Facility Power Monitoring Network.
All Wiring, Connectors and Conduit
Typical Optional
PXM6000
Meter Inputs
Eaton Magnum
Breaker 520MC
or 1150 Trip Unit
Eaton Digitrip OPTIM
1050 or 550 Trip Unit
Eaton TC-100
Transformer
Temperature
Control
Typical Optional
PXM6000
Meter Inputs
Eaton PXES6P Network Switch
Eaton PX600 Gateway
Thru-Door RJ-45 Port
Eaton Series G LG 600A
Frame Breaker with
PM3L3630C02V48M Meter Module
Eaton Series C K 400A
Frame Breaker with
PM3K3630C02V48M
Meter Module
Eaton Series C F 225A
Frame Breaker with
PM3K3225CO2V48M
Meter Module
(End of Line
Terminating Resistor)
(Daisy Chain to other
INCOM Trip Units or
PM3 Meter Modules)
Typical Eaton
Internal Wiring
Medium Voltage
Fused Switch
Step Down
Unit Substation Transformer
Low Voltage
Secondary Distribution Switchboard
Switch Closed Contact
Switch Open Contact
Switch Blown Fuse Contact
Trans Hi Temp Alarm
SPD Alarm Contact
Trans Fans On Contact
2.1-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Ethernet-Enabled Motor Control Center
027
Ethernet-Enabled
Motor Control Center
Electronic Motor Overload Relays, Soft
Starters and Variable Frequency Drives
General Description
Eaton Variable Frequency Drives may
be connected to a single Power Xpert
Gateway (PXG) 400E (not to exceed
64 total) or Power Xpert Gateway
600E/800E (not to exceed 96 total)
deployed in various low-voltage motor
control center applications and made
accessible to an Ethernet network.
Equipment
S811 Soft Starter
SVX9000/MVX9000 variable
frequency drives
C441 Overload Relay
Options
PXG 400EUp to 64 IQ meters
access and INCOM translation for
tion, control commands and INCOM
Note: Both PXG 400/600 support a
maximum of 64 INCOM devices while
not to exceed the total PXG device limit.
PXG 400E64 total
PXG 600E/800E96 total
Modbus RTU (RS-485) or
INCOM (FSK)
HTTP (with PXG)
HTTPS (with PXG)
XML/SOAP (with PXG)
readings (PXG)
(BMS)
(NMS)
HMI
Foreseer Services
2.1-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
028
Figure 2.1-15. Typical Ethernet-Enabled Motor Control Center
All CAT5e or CAT6 Wiring, Connectors and Conduit to
Additional Ethernet Devices if Required (i.e., Other Ethernet
Communicating MCCs) by Installing Contractor.
Optional Connection Via 62.5 Micron Duplex Multimode Fiber Pair
with ST Connectors to Facility Power Monitoring System.
All Fiber Optic Wiring, Connectors and Conduit by Installing Contractor.
CAT5e or CAT6 Connection to Facility Power Monitoring Network.
All Wiring, Connectors and Conduit by Installing Contractor.
Eaton Motor Insight
C441 Overload Relay
Eaton Motor Insight
C441 Overload Relay
Eaton Motor Insight
C441 Overload Relay
Eaton Motor Insight
C441 Overload Relay
Eaton Motor Insight
C441 Overload Relay
Eaton Motor Insight
C441 Overload Relay
Thru-Door RJ-45 Port
XP702 Industrial PC
with Touch Screen
10.40 Inch Touch Screen
Eaton PXES6P Network Switch
Eaton PX600
Gateway
Eaton IQ 260
Meter
Eaton SVX9000
Variable Frequency
Drive
1050 or 550 Trip Unit Eaton Digitrip OPTIM
Eaton IQ 260
Meter
Eaton SVX9000
Variable Frequency
Drive
(End of Line
Terminating
Resistor)
(End of Line
Terminating
Resistor)
2.1-23
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
IPONI Communication Modules
029
IPONI Communication
Modules
Metered Parameters/
Communications
An IPONI enables communication of
the metered parameters and set points
consistent with those of the device to
which it is attached.
Physical Characteristics
Each IPONI attaches to its associated
product. No other mounting or enclo-
sure is required. When mounted to the
back of the meter or relay or other
communicating device, the IPONI gets
its power from the device to which it is
attached. The connection to the device
is via a 9-Pin connector.
Certications/Listings
IPONI: UL/cUL
Communications
The IPONI enables communications
over a twisted shielded pair INCOM
device network. Wiring communica-
tions to these devices adhere to the
Wiring Guidelines (see Pages 2.1-15
and 2.1-17).
IPONI Communication Module
Supported Devices
IQ Analyzer (1.06)
IQ DP-4000
Automatic Transfer Control (ATC)
BIMII
MP-3000
MP-4000
Catalog Information
Table 2.1-11. PONI Communication Modules
Description Catalog
Number
INCOM PONI IPONI
2.1-24
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Breaker Interface Module (BIMII)
030
General Description
Eatons Breaker Interface Module is a
panel-mounted device which performs
the following functions:
Monitors and displays parameters
(right) from any combination of
Digitrip RMS 810, 910, Digitrip 1150
when set up to communicate as
a 910 and Digitrip OPTIM Trip
Units, Energy Sentinels and Power
Sentinels, supporting as many as
50 of these devices up to 10,000 ft
(3048m) away
Communicates the information
from these protective and energy
monitoring devices over an Eaton
INCOM network
Continuously monitors breakers
recording and time stamping trip
events along with approximate fault
currents. Events are logged into
non-volatile RAM
Parameters Displayed
Phase current
Energy
Present demand watts
Peak demand watts
Average demand current
Cause and magnitude of trip
Trip history
% Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
for each phase
% Harmonic Content for each phase
(1st27th harmonic)
Custom circuit description
Note: The Breaker Interface Module
displays only a portion of the information
it receives from the Digitrip RMS 910
and Power Sentinels. The balance of the
information (such as waveform analysis
and power factor) can be passed through
the unit to a master computer, where it
can be viewed.
Features and Functions
Communications
A PONI card can be easily eld-
mounted to the back of the Breaker
Interface Module, enabling the unit
to pass the information from its
subnetwork to a remote master
control unit up to 10,000 ft (3048m)
away. No reprogramming of the unit
is required when the IPONI is added.
The Breaker Interface Module can
be mounted directly on the assembly
or at a remote location and can be
used to access, congure and display
information from OPTIM trip units.
An operator can use the Breaker
Interface Module to:
Complete initial system setup:
Select system frequency
(50/60 Hz)
Set password
Congure the system:
Change time-current set points
for Digitrip OPTIM breakers
Select protection options
Select alarm levels
Display information:
Breaker information
Time-current set points
Metered values
Trip event information
Test trip unit performance:
Phase and ground
Trip/no trip
Expanded energy monitoring:
Set addresses for group energy
monitoring
Group energy readings
Local and remote indication:
Remote indication/alarming
Breaker status LED indication
Expanded communications.
Communicate with:
OPTIM Trip Units
Digitrip RMS 810 and 910
Digitrip 1150, 1150+ and 520MC
IQ Energy Sentinels
IQ Power Sentinel
A total of 50 devices
Password Protection
A user-dened password is included
for added security when changing
settings or performing breaker tests.
Non-Volatile Memory
The programmed functions, addresses
and circuit descriptions are stored in
non-volatile memory.
External Power
A 24 Vdc supply is required for
the BIMII. (No external power supply
is required for the PONI Card.) A 120
or 240 Vac supply is required for
the BIMPS.
Rear Access Area
All wiring connections to the breaker
interface module are made at the
chassis rear and include:
Relay connection for alarm
condition, high load condition,
peak exceed for device or group,
and watthour pulse
Initiator
24 Vdc inputBIMII
120 or 240 Vac inputBIMPSII
DIP switches for selecting an
operating mode
Three-contact connector with
subnetwork
Connector for PONI card for remote
communications local display units
Power Requirement
15 VA maximum
Input Voltage
24 Vdc 5%BIMII
120 or 240 Vac 10%BIMPSII
0 to 70C (32 to 158F)
Humidity
5% to 95% R.H. (noncondensing)
Alarm Contact Ratings
10 A at 277 Vac (resistive)
10 A at 30 Vdc (resistive)
1/3 hp at 125, 250 Vac
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
6.72 H x 10.25 W x 2.60 D
(170.7 H x 260.4 W x 66.0 D)
6.72 H x 10.25 W x 3.85 D
(170.7 H x 260.4 W x 97.8 D)
(with communications card)
Table 2.1-12. Catalog Information
Description Catalog
Number
Breaker interface module
Breaker interface module
power supply
BIMII
BIMPSII
2.1-25
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Digital Input Module (DIM)
031
I/O Devices Digital Input
Module (DIM)
Digital Input Module (DIM)
General Description
Eatons Digital Input Module is a
device that interfaces with up to four
standard utility (electric, gas, water)
meters or monitors eight digital
inputs. It translates KYZ pulses from
meters into a register count that is
maintained and compiled within the
DIM module in non-volatile memory.
The pulse count can be accessed from
the DIM module remotely using
Eatons Power Management Software
including the energy billing application.
The DIM can also be used to
monitor eight digital inputs from
switch closures.
Height: 4.25 inches (107.9 mm)
Width: 3.54 inches (90.0 mm)
Depth: 3.50 inches (88.9 mm)
(does include DIN rail)
10 LED status indicators, 100 ohm
termination DIP switch, address
selector switches
DIN rail mounting
Reads four separate KYZ equipped
utility meters
Pulse counts stored in non-volatile
memory
Each channel independently
monitors KYZ counts, pulse counts,
or digital indications
Monitors a maximum of eight
individual digital inputs
Input channels are isolated
Isolated 24 Vdc power is provided
on the I/O connector
LED indicators on the input channels
indicate when the unit is counting
Standards and Certications
UL 873
CE mark (48 Vdc operation)
FCC Part 15, Class A
IEC 1000-4-x
CISPR 22, Class A
IEC 1000-4-2; 1995, Electro Static
Discharge
IEC 1000-4-3; 1995, Radiated
RFImmunity.
IEC 1000-4-6; 1996, Conducted
RFImmunity
FCC Part 15 Class A (10 meters)
Radiated Emissions
CISPR 22, Class A (30 meters);
1991, Radiated Emissions
CISPR 22, Class A; 1991, Conducted
Emissions (PowerPort)
Figure 2.1-16. KYZ Input Module
Frequency Range
50/60 Hz
Power
85 to 138 Vac (120 Vac nominal)
50/60 Hz; 100 mA
48128 Vdc (48 Vdc nominal);
100 mA
Brownout operation at 50% and 80%
of nominal ac and dc ratings
Power input is provided from a
limited source, isolated from the
mains by double isolation
Power for all inputs is supplied
from an internal, isolated 24 Vdc
power source
Table 2.1-13. Specications
Mounting Information
The DIM module is designed to be
DIN rail mountable. DIN rail must
be 1/3 inches H x 1-3/8 inches W
(8.5 mm H x 34.9 mm W).
Communications
The DIM is a fully compatible Power
Management Software communicating
device with built-in INCOM communi-
cations. The DIM comes complete with
a 3-pin connector to receive the
shielded twisted pair conductor.
All wiring must be complete as per
Instruction Leaet TD17513, wiring
specication base rules.
Table 2.1-14. Ordering Information
Description Rating
Operating temperature 20 to 60C
Storage temperature 20 to 70C
Operating humidity 5 to 90% maximum
noncondensing
Altitude 10,000 ft (3048m)
Environment Indoor use only
Transient overvoltage Category 2
Pollution 1
Equipment Class 1
Description Catalog
Number
Digital input module DIM
2.1-26
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Addressable Relay II
032
General Description
Eatons Addressable Relay II is
designed for use where information
or control of non-communicating
devices is required remotely. The
relays communicate INCOM Frequency
Shift Key (FSK) on the Power Manage-
ment Software system. Devices are
assigned a 3-digit address to uniquely
identify them on the daisy-chained
twisted shielded pair network.
The Addressable Relay II is a Form C
relay with output contact ratings as
shown in the specications table. The
Addressable Relay II may be powered by
48120 Vac or 48125 Vdc through termi-
nals 11 and 12 of the terminal block. dc
polarity is not signicant. The operating
temperature range of the Addressable
Relay II is 0 to 70C.
Each Addressable Relay II includes
two status indicating circuits (IN1 and
IN2) that can be used to transmit the
contact status of devices external to
the Addressable Relay II. A typical
installation using these report-back
inputs to the Power Management
Software system is shown in the wiring
example. Terminals 4 and 5 connect to
the status input 1 circuit, and terminals
6 and 7 connect to the status input
2 circuit. These status indicating
circuits operate with input voltages
of 48120 Vac or 48125 Vdc circuits.
The Addressable Relay II includes a
feature called the communications
watchdog. The communications
watchdog monitors communications
between the Addressable Relay II and
the computer control station. If com-
munications are lost, the communica-
tions watchdog will reset the relay
to the de-energized (OFF) state.
The Addressable Relay II must be
updated every 10 seconds when the
communications watchdog is enabled
or else communications are assumed
to be lost. The communications watch-
dog is enabled when DIP switch 3
is set to the ON position. When the
communications watchdog is not
enabled, the relay will remain in the
state set by the last command issued.
See Figure 2.1-17 for DIP switch
conguration.
Enables remote control of non-
communication capable devices
on the Power Management
Software system
Monitors two digital status inputs
on the Power Management
Software system
Monitored Parameters
Output relay energized/de-energized
Input relay 1 status
Input relay 2 status
Breaker status open/closed
Protective relay status normal/tripped
Communications
Built-in INCOM communications for
monitoring in a Power Management
Software system
Figure 2.1-17. DIP Switch Functions
Figure 2.1-18. Typical Addressable Relay II Wiring Diagram
Note: The Power Xpert Gateway does not support the Addressable Relay II.
Description Catalog
Number
Addressable relay ARII
O
1
2
3
N
O
O
O
OFF ON
Baud Rate 9600 1200
Relay Pulse Disabled Enabled
Communications Watchdog Disabled Enabled
Breaker
Status
51
Trip
INCOM
Network
6
8
9
11
Input 1
Input 2
Power
INCOM
Communications
Addressable Relay
F
L
T1
OL
M1
L1
T2
OL
M2
L2
T3
OL
M3
L3
Power Bus
2
Communication and
Controlled Output Relay
12
7
5
3
1
Off
Auto
OL
OL
MA
M
Hand
Cpt
2.2-1
September 2011
Sheet 02
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Power Xpert Systems and Network System Expansion
033
Power Xpert Ethernet
Switches
Convenient Network Expansion
General Description
Eatons Power Xpert Ethernet switches
are ideal for extending Ethernet
networks via CAT5 wiring or ber
in harsh, industrial environments.
Built with high-grade components
and constructed using special thermal
techniques, PXE switches can with-
stand the unpredictable conditions
of such environments.
Features
Simultaneous, full-duplex, high-
speed communication on all ports
no network performance bottlenecks
Hardened for factory oorideal
for both industrial or data center
applications
Unmanaged, plug-and-play
implementationno software or
additional hardware required for
conguration
Seamlessly integrates into Eatons
Power Xpert Architecturequality
and reliability of Eaton guaranteed
Mounting options include stand-
alone panel-mounting, DIN rail
mounting, or 19-inch standard
rack mounting
PXE 6-Port Switch10/100 Mb with
Optional 100 Mb Fiber
This compact switch provides
six Ethernet ports, with exible
congurations. The base models
have one of three options:
Two 100 Mb ber and four 10/100
copper ports
One ber and ve copper ports
Six copper ports
PXE 4-Port Switch10/100 Mb
For smaller applications requiring
fewer connection points and no ber,
the 4-port Power Xpert Ethernet switch
is a versatile option. It provides edge
access Ethernet ports in a convenient
and compact package.
Table 2.2-1. Power Xpert Ethernet Switches
Table 2.2-2. Accessories
Table 2.2-3. Operating Environment
Table 2.2-4. Network Standards
Table 2.2-5. Agency Approvals and Standards Compliance
Table 2.2-6. Power Consumption
Table 2.2-7. Packaging
Table 2.2-8. Mounting Note: These specications are subject to
change without notice and represent the
maximum capabilities of the product with
all options installed. This is not a complete
feature list. Features and functionality may
vary depending on selected options and
product model. Please refer to the technical
data sheet and user manual for detailed
specications. Please see www.eaton.com/
powerxpert for latest information.
Description Catalog
Number
4 port Ethernet switchcopper only
6 port Ethernet switchcopper only
PXES4P24V
PXES6P24V
6 port Ethernet switch5 copper/1 ber (ST connector)
6 port Ethernet switch4 copper/2 ber (ST connector)
PXES6P24V1ST
PXES6P24V2ST
Description Catalog
Number
Power supply (preferred)100240 Vac input
DIN rail mount with screw24 Vdc output terminals
ELC-PS02
Power supply (alternate)120 Vac input
Wall plug-in type with 6 ft. cord12 Vdc output
PXESPS12V
DIN rail mounting bracket PXESDINRL
19-inch rack mount tray PXESTRAY
Description Specications
Ambient temperature ratings 25 to 60C long-term per independent agency tests (UL),
or 40 to 85C short-term per IEC type tests
Storage temperature 40 to 185F (40C to 85C)
Cold start to 20C
Ambient relative humidity 5%95% (noncondensing)
Altitude 200 to 50,000 ft (60 to 15,000m)
MTBF > 15 years
Description
Ethernet IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u; IEEE 802.1p, 100Base-TX, 10Base-T, 100Base-FX
Description
UL listed (UL60950), cUL, CE, emissions meet FCC Part 15, Class A
Description
7.0 watts typical9 watts maximum
Enclosure Robust sheet metal (steel)
Dimensions of PXES4P series
Weight of PXES4P series
3.50 in H x 3.00 in W x 1.00 in D (8.9 cm x 7.6 cm x 2.5 cm)
8.6 oz. (243g)
Dimensions of PXES6P series
Weight of PXES6P series
3.60 in H x 3.00 in W x 1.70 in D (9.2 cm x 7.6 cm x 4.3 cm)
13 oz. (370g)
Cooling method Case used as a heat sink
Metal panel mounting clips
DIN rail mounting
19-inch rack mount
Included
Optional
Optional
2.2-2
September 2011
Sheet 02
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Application Information
034
Copper Ethernet Cable
Wiring Guidelines
The following information can be used
as a guide when designing an Ethernet
system using copper Ethernet cable.
Cables should not be routed near
equipment that generates strong
electric or magnetic elds such
as motors, drive controllers, arc
welders and conduit
Ethernet cable insulation has a
voltage rating of 300 Vac. Use of
barriers, cable trays or high voltage
sheathing with STP Ethernet cable
may be required in installations with
cables carrying voltages greater
than 300 Vac. This may also be
necessary in order to comply with
UL requirements. In installations
where the cable cannot be physically
separated from the power cables
(where a physical barrier is not
practical) ber optic cable should
be used
When crossing power conductors
with Ethernet cable, cross at right
angles
Shielded twisted pair (STP) Ethernet
cable should be specied for use in
high noise environments. Shielded
shrouded connectors must be used
and the shield must be connected at
both ends of the wire. The mating
plug must have a shielded shroud
that is terminated to ground at both
ends. Where there is a possibility of
a difference in ground potential
(common mode) voltages between
the two terminated ends, ber optic
cable is recommended
When using conduit or a metal
cable tray, each section of the
conduit or tray must be bonded
to each adjacent section and the
conduit or tray needs to be bonded
to earth ground. Do not allow the
shields to touch the conduit or metal
tray at any point
Only shielded (STP) Ethernet cables
should be placed into metal conduit.
Some UTP cables may not function
properly when installed in conduit,
as the metal conduit can affect the
electrical properties of an unshielded
cable. Consult the cable manufac-
turer when installing UTP cables
in conduit
As a general rule for noise protec-
tion, Ethernet Cable should maintain
a minimum distance of 3 inches
(8 cm) from electric power conduc-
tors for up to 100V and 1 inch
(3 cm) for each additional 100V up to
400V. STP cable is recommended
For Ethernet cable run within
conduit but near conductors with
potentially noisy power conductors
carrying currents of greater than
20A or voltages greater than 400V,
maintain the following distances.
STP cable is required
Conductors of less than
20A = 3 inches
Conductors of 20A or more
and up to 100 kVA = 6 inches
Conductors greater than
100 kVA = 12 inches
For Ethernet cable run near
conductors with potentially noisy
power conductors carrying currents
of greater than 20A or voltages
greater than 400V, maintain the
following distances. STP cable is
recommended
Conductors of less than
20A = 6 inches
Conductors of 20 A or more
and up to 100 kVA = 12 inches
Conductors greater than
100 kVA = 24 inches
Route Ethernet cable at least 5 ft
(1.5m) from sources of rf/microwave
radiation. STP cable is required
Do not cascade more than four
Ethernet repeaters (router, switch or
hub) within a network segment
Environmentally sealed connectors
should be specied for cables used
in outdoor installations
Avoid pinching the cable when using
cable ties
Total distance between an Ethernet
transmitter and receiver at the end
points of the network should not
exceed 328 ft (100m)
Total distance from a patch panel to
a wall jack (using solid cable) shall
not exceed 295 ft (90m). Splices are
not permitted
Patch cords used as cross-connect
jumpers in a patch panel should not
exceed 20 ft (6m)
Patch cords from a wall jack to the
work area PC (or device) shall not
exceed 16 ft (5m)
Ethernet cable used in harsh
environments must be selected to
withstand the following conditions:
vibration, air born contaminants,
chemicals, temperature, electro-
magnetic interference, combustible
atmospheres and local regulatory
standards such as UL and NEMA
Ethernet connectors used in harsh
environments must be robust
enough to withstand vibration,
multiple connection cycles, tempera-
ture changes, and provide a proper
seal to protect against moisture,
dust/dirt and chemical attack
Different cable media support differ-
ent bandwidth capabilities. When
installing cable in a network, care
should be taken to install the cable
that will ll current network loading
requirements and future expansion
needs. In general, ber optic cable
can support the greatest bandwidth
(upward of 25,000 gigabits) and UTP
has the lowest. CAT5e cabling
is designed to operate a bit rates up
to 1000 Mb and CAT6 cable up to
2000 Mb
Operating your cable at maximum
speed reduces the distance between
network segments. Check with your
cable supplier for specications
regarding segment distance vs.
speed
Cable with 5% impedance mismatch
or return loss of 27 to 32 dB is
recommended. Ethernet cable
impedance can vary by as much
as 15% (85 to 115 ohms). Average
Ethernet cable with 15% impedance
variation can have up to 10 dB addi-
tional return loss. This discontinuity
is referred to as return loss, since
it causes some of the signal to be
reected back down the cable
instead of propagating forward. It
is measured in decibels or ratio of
transmitted versus reected signal
Fiber Optic Technology
The use of ber optics in telecommu-
nications and wide area networking
has been common for many years,
but more recently ber optics have
become increasingly prevalent in
industrial data communications sys-
tems as well. High data rate capabili-
ties, noise rejection and electrical
isolation are just a few of the impor-
tant characteristics that make ber
optic technology ideal for use in
industrial and commercial systems.
Although often used for point-to-point
connections, ber optic links are being
used to extend the distance limitations
of RS-232, RS-422/485 and Ethernet
systems while ensuring high data
rates and minimizing electrical
interference.
2.2-3
September 2011
Sheet 02
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
035
Conventional electrical data signals
are converted into a modulated light
beam, introduced into the ber and
transported via a very small diameter
glass or plastic ber to a receiver that
converts the light back into electrical
signals.
Optical bers allow data signals to
propagate through them by ensuring
that the light signal enters the ber at
an angle greater than the critical angle
of the interface between two types of
glass. Optical ber is actually made
up of three parts. The center core is
composed of very pure glass. Core
dimensions are usually in the range
of 50125 um for multi-mode cables
and 89 um for single-mode cables.
The surrounding glass, called clad-
ding, is a slightly less pure glass.
The diameter of the core and cladding
together is in the range of 125440 um.
Surrounding the cladding is a protec-
tive layer of exible silicone called
the sheath.
Fiber Optic Cable
Wiring Guidelines
The following information can be used
as a guide when designing an Ethernet
system using ber optic Ethernet
cable:
Select a ber cable that is suited for
the application, e.g., outdoor, aerial,
duct, intra-building, risers, general
building and plenum applications
Fiber optic cable is useful in
applications where the environment
is combustible, electrically noisy,
the cable must be bundles with high
voltage wires or where common
mode voltages may exist between
the earth ground points of the
terminating connectors
Fiber optic cable is available in
various operating temperature
ranges. Care should be taken to
match the temperature rating of
the ber to the environment it will
be exposed to. The temperature
specication for ber may be
narrower than copper cable. Consult
the cable manufacturer for tempera-
ture specications of your cable type
Sealed ber connectors are available
for use in harsh environments to
prevent contamination from enter-
ing the connector and ber. The type
of seal required will be application
dependant and can vary from dust-
and moisture-proof to water-tight
Mixing ber cable types is not
permitted. The same core
dimensions and mode must be
used within cable segments
Care should be taken when
purchasing connectors to include
strain relief, which reduces
mechanical strain (vibration) within
the cable, as well as the connector.
Strain relief also provides support
to the cable to ensure proper bend
radius at the connector
Single-mode ber is used for
long distance transmission of
up to 120 km. Distance may vary
depending on speed and type of
converter used
Multi-mode graded-index ber cable
is used for communication over
shorter distances of up to 2 km
Fiber cable is composed of glass
and is not well suited for applica-
tions requiring tight bend radiuses.
Cable radius dimensions vary per
manufacturer. If the manufacturer
does not provide a bend radius, a
typical rule of thumb is a radius not
less than 15x the cable diameter
Fiber cable to connector termina-
tions can be performed in the eld
using special equipment. This
method is not recommended
Tier One testing is recommended
when diagnosing system irregu-
larities and should be performed
in all new installations
Tier Two testing is recommended
to certify that a system complies
with standards set forth by the
owner/installer
2.2-4
September 2011
Sheet 02
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
036
2.3-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Power Xpert Gateway PDP Card
037
Power Xpert Gateway
PDP CardPower
Distribution Unit
General Description
The Power Xpert Gateway Power
Distribution Products Card (PXGX
PDP) provides Web-enabled, real-time
monitoring of Powerware Power
Distribution Units (PDUs), Rack Power
Modules (RPM) and Powerware
Remote Power Panels (RPPs) through
standard on-board Web pages, Power
Xpert Software or third-party software.
An integral part of the Power Xpert
Architecture, which provides end-to-
end PowerChain solutions, the
PXGXPDP provides a central point to
connect distribution products to an
Ethernet network.
Information is presented in organized,
user-friendly Web pages and include
the following:
PDU system identication
Graphic panel layouts
Voltage
Current
Frequency
Energy
Power
THD (current and voltage)
Features
Web-enabled monitoring of power
quality data down to the branch
circuit leveldata can be viewed
from any location with a Web
browser
Congure and edit the EMS
remotely via the Web interface
supports remote conguration,
including naming, alarm and
warning set points, and percentages
Data and event logging with time
stampaccurate logging for power
quality analysis
Modbus TCP/IP and SNMP support
open communication protocol
facilitates integration with standard
building management systems and
network management systems
Customized e-mail messaging for
events notication, including data
and event logs and periodic heart-
beat e-mailsdirect alarm and
event notication to the appropriate
person(s) in the organization
Easy integration into existing
Ethernet infrastructureminimize
installation cost
Securely access and view informa-
tionpassword authentication is
required at two levels. The card
also supports secure Web-based
communication via SSL
Generate Modbus register maps on
the yall of the data specic to the
system is immediately available and
can be generated with one click of
the mouse
Save and Restore settings
Conguring a large PDU with EMS
can take time. Once the effort is
complete, the conguration can be
saved for later use. It also allows the
user to duplicate panel identical
congurations in minimal time
Supports the environmental
monitoring probetemperature,
humidity and contact status can
be viewed though the Web page

PDU or RPP System Summary Page

PDU or RPP Panel Page
EMP Page
2.3-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
038
Table 2.3-1. The Power Xpert Gateway PDP Card Kit
Note: Features and specications listed in this document are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of
the software and products with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on
selected options.
Local conguration Cable
Quick Start guide
Ordering Information
Catalog number PXGXPDP
Style number 103008064-5591
Description Power Xpert Gateway PDP Card for use with Powerware PDUs/RPPs/RPMs/PDRs/EMS-UGK
Devices Supported
Eaton Power Distribution Units with X-Slot compatibility
Eaton Remote Power Panels with X-Slot compatibility
Eaton Rack Power Modules with X-Slot compatibility
Eaton Power Distribution Rack with X-Slot compatibility
Eaton Energy Management System with X-Slot compatibility
Communication Ports
Ethernet ports Two RJ-45 ports: supports 10/100Base-T for daisy chaining via integrated Ethernet switch
Serial ports One USB port: supports local conguration and one RJ485 for optional connection to an Environmental
Monitoring Probe (EMP)
Communication Protocols Supported
Web server Supports data access from Web browsers (HTTP and HTTPS)
Modbus TCP/IP Supports data access from Modbus TCP clients
SNMP Supports common network management tools
SMTP Supports e-mail notication
NTP Supports time synchronization via an NTP server for card and PDU synchronization
DHCP Supports automatic IP address assignments, if enabled
BACNET IP Supports data access from BACnet/IP clients
Supported MIBs
Eaton PDU MIB
Eaton EMP MIB
Eaton alarms and traps MIB
RFC 4133 entity MIB
RFC 4268 entity state MIB
RFC 4268 entity state MIB Part II
RFC 1213 MIB II
Web Browsers Supported
IE, 7 and 8
Mozilla Firefox, 2.0 and higher
Google Chrome
Dimensions 12 cm x 11.4 cm x 3.9 cm (4.70 in x 4.50 in x 1.50 in)
Weight 200g (7.0 oz)
Environmental Specications
Ambient operating 0 to +40C (32 to 104F)
Relative humidity 10 to 80%, noncondensing
Altitude 10,000 ft
Enclosure rating Indoor use only
Mounting Conguration
X-Slot form factor ts directly into PDU/RPP/RPM chassis/PDR/EMS-UGK
Power Supply
Nominal input voltage 12 Vdc, unregulated (provided by PDU/RPP)
Input voltage range 825 Vdc, unregulated
Power Consumption
3.5 watts
Regulatory/Standards Compliance
CISPR 22, Class A
ROHS Compliant
Telecom conducted via EU standard EN 55022:1988+A1:2000+A2:2003, Class A/EN55022:1988+A1:2000+A2:2003
2.3-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Power Xpert Gateway Series 2000 Card
039
Power Xpert Gateway UPS
CardUninterruptible
Power Supplies
Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card
General Description
The Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card
(PXGX UPS) provides Web-enabled,
real-time monitoring of Powerware
Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS)
through standard on-board Web
pages, Power Xpert Software or third-
party software.
An integral part of the Power Xpert
Architecture, which provides end-to-
end PowerChain solutions, the PXGX
UPS provides a central point to
connect distribution products to an
Ethernet network.
Information is presented in organized,
user-friendly Web pages and include
the following:
UPS system identication
Voltage
Current
Frequency
Energy
Output Power
Powerfull load %
Battery information
History and maintenance
Run time remaining
Voltage
% battery left
Features
Web-enabled monitoring of power
quality datadata can be viewed
from any location with a Web
browser
Data, event and system logging with
time stampaccurate logging for
power quality analysis
Modbus TCP/IP and SNMP
supportopen communication
protocol facilitates integration with
standard building management
systems and network management
systems
Intelligent e-mail communications
two options for alarm and event
e-mail notication, individual
e-mails for each alarm or event, or
collective notication, providing the
same information with a drastically
reduced number of e-mails
Easy integration into existing
Ethernet infrastructureminimize
installation cost
Securely access and view informa-
tionpassword authentication is
required at two levels. The card also
supports secure Web-based
communication via SSL
Generate Modbus register maps on
the yall of the data specic to the
UPS is immediately available and
can be generated with one click of
the mouse
Save and Restore settingsonce the
conguration effort is complete, it
can be saved for later use
Supports the environmental
monitoring probetemperature,
humidity and contact status can be
viewed through the Web page
Two independent, redundant
Ethernet portsdesigned to
support high reliability systems

UPS Summary Page

Alarm Summary Page

NetWatch Conguration Page
2.3-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
040
Table 2.3-2. The Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card Kit
Note: Features and specications listed in this document are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of
the software and products with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on
selected options.
Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card
Local conguration cable
Quick start guide
Catalog number PXGXUPS
Style number 103007974-5591
Description Power Xpert Gateway UPS Card for use with Powerware UPSs
Devices Supported
Eaton uninterruptible power supplies with X-Slot compatibility; these include the Eaton 9155, 9315, 9355, 9330, 9390, 9395, BladeUPS
Communication Ports
Ethernet ports Two RJ-45 ports: supports 10/100Base-T for daisy-chaining
Serial ports One USB port: supports local conguration and one RJ485 for optional connection to an Environmental Monitoring Probe (EMP)
Web server Supports data access from Web browsers (HTTP and HTTPS)
Modbus TCP/IP Supports data access from Modbus TCP clients
SNMP Supports common network management tools
SMTP Supports e-mail notication
NTP Supports time synchronization via an NTP server for card and UPS synchronization
DHCP Supports automatic IP address assignments, if enabled
BACnet/IP Supports data access from BACnet/IP
IP v4 and v6 IP v4 and v6 compatibility
Supported MIBs
Eaton Power MIB
RFC 1628 UPS MIB
Eaton EMP MIB
Eaton alarms and traps MIB
RFC 4133 entity MIB
RFC 4268 entity State MIB; RFC 4268 entity state MIB Part 2
RFC 1213 MIB II
Web Browsers Supported
IE, 7 and 8
Mozilla Firefox, 2.0 and higher
Google Chrome
Dimensions 12 cm x 11.4 cm x 3.9 cm (4.70 in x 4.50 in x 1.50 in)
Weight 200g (7.0 oz)
Ambient operating 0 to +40C (32 to 104F)
Relative humidity 10 to 80%, noncondensing
Altitude 10,000 ft
Enclosure rating Indoor use only
Mounting Conguration
X-Slot form factor ts directly into UPS chassis
Power Supply
Nominal input voltage 12 Vdc, unregulated (provided by UPS)
Input voltage range 825 Vdc, unregulated
Power Consumption
3.5 watts
Regulatory/Standards Compliance
CISPR 22, Class A
ROHS Compliant
Telecom conducted
via EU standard
EN 55022:1988+A1:2000+A2:2003, Class A/EN55022:1988+A1:2000+A2:2003
2.4-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
041
Power Xpert

Software
General Description
Power Xpert Software aggregates
the information arriving from different
types of device families via various
communication methods. Its unique
Web-based design, alarm bubble-up
and advanced trend and waveform
analysis tools help you to quickly turn
your attention to the most important
events and to identify reliability issues
and cost-saving opportunities. The
standard custom graphic package, the
Layout Manager, with an icon library
and standard vertical templates,
allows you to import and mimic your
physical environment and gauges.
Open protocol support makes Power
Xpert Software compatible with
most newer generation third-party
equipment. Older legacy, proprietary
protocols are supported by Power
Xpert Gateways (see Page 2.1-1),
and custom software drop-in drivers
made available by Eaton. Power Xpert
Software is the rst power system
software of this caliber to put all these
powerful features at your ngertips.
Product Selection Guide
Geared toward end users, with
built-in support for Eaton power
distribution products such as
switchgear, UPSs, breakers, PDUs,
RPPs, meters, relays, VFDs and
MCCs, among others
Eaton products connect with the
software directly via an Ethernet
connection, while legacy devices
use a Power Xpert Gateway to
Web-enable their communications
A subset of third-party meters and
devices are supported as standard
via the gateway connection
Geared toward advanced power
users, system integrators and
enterprises with heterogeneous
device spectrum and system
developers who can take advantage
of the included SNMP and Modbus
integration development utilities
Extensive support for third-party
devices via standard SNMP and
Modbus TCP protocols
Large variety of ready made,
optional third-party drop in
drivers available
Key Features
Connects to your existing network
Data trending and graphing for
detailed information for trouble-
shooting, problem prevention and
costs savings
Web-based views that allow access
to critical information from any
location via a Web browser
A modular, scalable architecture that
allows the addition of capabilities
and devices as the power system
expands
Alarm conditions bubble up through
the system to allow personnel to
identify which device is in alarm
and where it is located
All the functionality of Eatons
PowerNet software suite
Connectivity to a wide range of
Eaton and third-party devices. For a
full list of compatible devices, refer
to the hardware compatibility list
found at www.eaton.com/pxs
Power Xpert Software Layout Manager
The Power Xpert Software Layout
Manager module provides the user a
library of powerful design tools and
standard templates for the creation
of custom HumanMachine Interface
(HMI) graphical layouts. Objects can
be easily animated, various gauges
can be selected, and custom bitmaps
can be imported with little effort.
Table 2.4-1. Power Xpert Software Edition Features
Note: For complete listing of Foreseer class hardware compatibility, visit the Foreseer Web site
at www.eaton.com/foreseer.
Feature Sets Power Xpert Software
Professional Edition
Enterprise Edition
Server module
Trend viewer module
Layout manager module
Quality manager module
Eaton device support (switchgear, UPSs, breakers,
ePDUs, meters, relays, VDFs, MCCs, etc.)

Power Xpert Gateway third-party device support
SNMP connector
Modbus connector
Optional third-party driver support
Custom third-party device driver support
2.4-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
042
Table 2.4-2. Power Xpert Software General Features
Features
General
Web browser user interface
Web-based monitoring capabilities
Downloadable software version updates
Event Notication
Event notication via e-mail notication
Event Notication via pagers, text message or third-party interfaces
Alarm state management
Event indicator displayed without Web page active
Alarm/event searching and ltering
Waveform attached to applicable power event
Web browser based waveform viewing
Alarm capabilities based on device driven events
Analysis and Trending
Graphic trend viewer
Chart or data option selection
Multiple trends display
Multiple axis support
View multiple variables (i.e., Ia, Ib, Ic, Vab, Vbc, etc.) for a single waveform
Standard COMTRADE le format support
Customizable trend viewer look and feel
Fixed or custom time frames
Trend analysis capabilities
Data export
Custom Graphics and Layouts
Custom graphics development via Web browser
Four user view example templates included as standard
iFrame capability
Browser portal widget support
Streaming media support
Graphic object library included as standard
ISO standard electrical picture objects available
Graphic les import capability
Graphic object animation capability
Gauge object library support
External Web Links support
Alarm bubble-up support through several page layers
Trend object support
UPS Shutdown
File saving during shutdown
Automatic, orderly and sequential shutdown
Parallel redundant UPS shutdown capability
Security and Administration
Windows authentication security
Two tier secure system access support
SSL
Secure Web browser access (support for HTTPS)
Time Synchronization
Time synchronization support for connected devices with 1 millisecond time resolution
Export and Integration
Extended Excel spreadsheet support
SQL database query support
Logs
System log
Error log
Service
Eaton help desk services (1-877-ETN-CARE)
Turnkey startup service
System Backup
Power Xpert Software system backup
Documentation and Training Videos
System Administrators Guide
Power Xpert Software Users Guide
Layout Manager Guide
Quick Start Guide
Power Xpert Software introduction and training video
Power Xpert Reporting introduction and training video
2.4-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
043
Analyzing Power Quality
Electrical power quality is becoming
ever more important with the
continuing increase of nonlinear
loads in industrial and commercial
facilities. Voltage or frequency
variances can disrupt many industrial
processes, resulting in costly down-
time and equipment losses. Power
Xpert Software provides historical
proles, or records of events for
internal and utility verication, as well
as real-time information that allows
the user to isolate the source, magni-
tude, time and direction of power qual-
ity problems, including the following:
Voltage Disturbances
The most common power quality
problem, voltage sags and swells,
occurs because of utility supply
variations, system faults or the
concurrent starting of large
motor loads
Harmonics
Harmonic distortion appears on
the distribution system because of
variable frequency drives and other
non-sinusoidal loads where AC/DC
conversion is present (UPS systems,
computer power supplies, etc.)
Power Factor
The ability to monitor power factor
throughout the facility ensures
delivery of power at optimal
efciency, allows 100% usage of
transformers and prevents costly
power factor penalties
Managing Energy Costs
Energy management is essential for
an industrial or commercial facility.
Electricity costs account for between 10
and 30% of total facility operating costs.
Despite being often considered over-
head, energy costs are manageable.
Manage When Energy is Used
Manage your energy costs by
accurately measuring and quantifying
energy patterns and usage within
the facility.
Track Use Patterns
Efciently schedule processes
during non-peak usage times by
being able to identify where and
when energy is being consumed.
Verify the effectiveness of energy
reduction methods
Purchase Energy
Make informed energy purchasing
decisions by comparing how the
rate structures offered by various
suppliers impact your bottom-line
Allocate Energy Costs
Establish accountability and enable
incentives for energy conservation
by accurately allocating usage and
costs to each process or department
Verify Energy Bill
Conrm the accuracy of your energy
bill using the detailed data supplied
by Power Xpert Software
Track and Schedule Maintenance
Coordination problems can be
identied by overlaying coordination
curves of active devices identifying
problems before an unnecessary
outage occurs. Maintenance schedules
can be created on real-time mechanical
and electrical equipment usage
avoiding unnecessary preventive
maintenance. Equipment beneting
from usage-based maintenance can
have maintenance alarms initiated
based on equipment lifetime
deteriorators rather than simply
time schedules.
Figure 2.4-1. Typical Power Xpert Software System
Web Browser
or Client
Computer Server
2.4-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
044
Problem Avoidance and
Troubleshooting
Operators receive alerts to potential
problems before they occur, such as
a breaker timing out to trip. Loads
can be shed or switched to alternate
sources to prevent critical upstream
breakers from unnecessarily tripping
on an overload condition. Crucial
electrical distribution information is
instantaneously available to identify
which breaker has tripped along with
the cause and magnitude of the
problem. Event sequence information
narrows the list of possible causes to
a trip. Immediate identication of
problems can shorten downtime
from hours to minutes saving
production losses.
Increased Productivity
Increased productivity by eliminating
the need for time-consuming data
collection. Personnel are freed to
perform actual maintenance functions
that keep facilities operating. Historical
archive records and software tools
provide simple-to-use tools for collect-
ing energy data for internal and tenant
energy billing without manual meter
reading or monthly bill calculating.
Load proles are immediately avail-
able for analysis when considering
expansion. Spare capacity on existing
feeders can be identied through
historical load proling avoiding trips
due to seasonal peaks. Correct deter-
mination of transformer spare capacity
can help avoid unnecessary substation
purchases. Double-ended substations
designed for redundancy can have
their ability to carry loads through a
single transformers outage veried.
Power Xpert
Software Modules
Power Xpert Software GUI
Views/Templates
Power Xpert Software Graphic View
The Power Xpert Software Graphic
View device template provides a
standard layout for displaying Eaton
device-specic measurements and
data. Graphic templates are built
into the software for standard Eaton
devices. Viewing the most vital
parameters along with self-explaining
legends and one-line diagrams is
available at a glance. Device-specic
information is gathered at the bottom
of the screen, including a product
picture, location, system contact,
maintenance schedule and asset
serial number.
Each device category has its own
template presenting pertinent
information and metrics that are
customized for that device type (UPS,
PDU, meter, VDF, MCC and the like).
You will be able to review a short list of
the latest events time-stamped to the
millisecond, the picture of the device,
and its model information including
name, location, contact and serial
number. At any point, you can create
a custom user view of any device with
various gauges, custom icons and
imported graphics that change color
(greenyellowred) depending on
event status.
Power Xpert Software List View
The Power Xpert Software List View
device template is provided as a
standard layout for all devices,
including third-party systems. The
List View is available for any device
integrated into Power Xpert Software,
including third-party products.
Typically it arranges product attributes
into logical categories and displays
them in a spreadsheet format, includ-
ing continuously updated values and
eld labels. The List View presents all
measurements and data in a spread-
sheet format that can be easily viewed
and acted upon.
2.4-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
045
Layout Manager
Layout Manager lets you model actual
physical representations in a virtual
replica of your real-world power system.
Build complete power system
diagrams
Large library of symbols and icons
Create building groups that
mirror your physical facilities or
organization structure
Create drill-down Web pages and
folder structure to display your data
the way you want to see it
Alarm bubble-up ensures alarm
events to raise to the top level
through the folder structure
Industry-Specic Templates
Plant Floor Example User View
Data Center
Hospital/Campus User View Examples
Switchgear One-Line Layout Manager
Power Xpert Software has sample
graphic layout templates that you
can use and modify for various
applications and environments. At
Eaton, we understand that mimicking
the real world is often the best way of
keeping your system easy to use and
simple to monitor. Included sample
templates consist of a typical plant
industrial layout, data center, hospital
(health care) environment and a
generic geographical layout applica-
tion. All of the templates have typical
devices integrated into them and, with
the included Layout Manager utility,
you can customize them to t your
unique needs.
Trend Viewer
Trend Viewer
The Trend Viewer gives quick insight
into understanding power system
device measurement trends. Prevent-
ing system overloads, planning future
capacity and preventing expensive
downtime can be achieved with this
tool. The Power Xpert Software Trend
Viewer offers a multitude of sophisti-
cated trending capabilities. Viewable
charts are quickly plotted with
Microsofts SilverLight technology.
Device measurement attributes
and other parameters can be easily
selected from either the List View or
the Custom User View. Trend graphs
can be presented in various chart
formats one at a time, or you can
view multiple charts at the same time.
Single and multiple trends can be
shown at the same time using xed
or custom time frames. Results can
be easily exported to a Microsoft

Excel
spreadsheet.
2.4-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
046
Quality Manager
The standard Quality Manager,
invoked directly from the event log,
provides a tool for detailed waveform
analysis. Determining and comparing
waveform signatures provides a
wealth of information on electrical
phenomena, allowing you to take
necessary protective action to prevent
or protect against further occurrences.
Quality Manager allows you to zoom
in and out of waveforms, to sample
individual parts of a waveform in
great detail, and to provide accurate
measurement information per points
of sampling versus time scaleall the
way up to the millisecond time resolu-
tion. In addition, this module can open
third-party and individual COMTRADE
standard les for examination.
Spot trends faster with easy-to-read
graphical displays of real-time
information
Monitor for voltage disturbances,
voltage variances, and more
Analyze complex waveforms
See trends for historical data
Waveform Analysis Quality Manager
Installation with
Deployment Utility
All key setup requirements are
automatically validated. If any of
the prerequisites are not met or are
incorrectly congured, the deployment
utility will alert you to resolve the
situation. The best part of using the
deployment utility is that it has a
button you can click to x the
discovered problem.
Easy Installation with Deployment Utility
Power Xpert Modbus
TCP/IP Connector
Connects to and retrieves data
from devices using Modbus
TCP/IP protocol
Modbus connector provides
interfaces to devices from many
non-Eaton manufacturers that
communicate via industry-standard
Modbus TCP/IP
Requires user conguration and
installation of the tool
Note: Available with Enterprise edition.
Power Xpert SNMP Connector
Connects to and retrieves data from
devices using SNMP protocol
SNMP connector provides
interfaces to non-Eaton devices that
communicate via SNMP protocol
Industry-standard SNMP support
Flexible compiler to process
MIB les
Requires user conguration and
installation of the tool
Note: Available with Enterprise edition.
2.4-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
047
Integrated PowerNet Support
PowerNet (available on the Power
Xpert Software DVD)
General Description
The features of Eatons PowerNet
software suite are available as a
standard part of Power Xpert
Software. PowerNet is a family of
software applications, client/ server
conguration, that help provide a
window into an electrical distribution
system. Existing PowerNet systems
can be easily integrated with Power
Xpert Software.
PowerNet Features
Connectivity bundle
Communication to 1000 INCOM
devices
Auto learn of all INCOM
connected devices for
maximum usability
Security conguration
Trending/logging congurations
Device set point editing/printing/
viewing
MSDE/SQL data storage
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
server
OLE for Process Control (OPC)
server
Modbus RTU Gateway to
data from Eaton INCOM
communicating devices
Power quality bundle
Viewing of captured waveforms
Up to eight cycles of actual
waveform
Zoomed-in view of high-speed
waveform samples
Spectrum chart showing
frequency content and
magnitude (Fourier analysis)
CBEMA/ITIC representation
of events
Top down access to specic
Waveform events from event
lists and CBEMA/ITIC curves
Trip curve display for coordina-
tion and selectivity needs
Log-log coordination curve
plottedon-screen for trip units
and motor protective relays with
the click of a button
Online modication of trip curve
pickups and time delays; instant
verication of coordination with
an updated trip curve
Automatic scale adjustment
based on device pickup level
Addition or removal of trip curves
directly from the display screen
Color-coded curves tied to the
device description for added
clarity
Overlay multiple curves
View motor start proles next to
motor protection relay trip curve
PowerNet Digitrip Screen Viewed
in Power Xpert Software
Table 2.4-3. PowerNet WaveformCaptured Waveforms
Captured
Waveform
Eaton Device
IQ
Analyzer
Digitrip MPCV
Relay
910 1150 OPTIM 1050
Currents
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neutral
Ground
Voltages
Line-Line
Line-Neutral

Ground-Neutral
Transformer
2.4-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
048
Power Xpert Reporting Software
Figure 2.4-2. Power Xpert Reporting
Architectural Overview
Power Xpert Reporting brings the
power system information together
to compare and contrast. Power Xpert
Reporting provides a standard set
of reports, including:
Data Center Efciency Report:
A summary of data center
infrastructure efciency and power
usage effectiveness, including such
information as temperature and
humidity, and energy consumption
Data Center Efciency Report
Greenhouse Gas Report: Captures
the six offensive greenhouse gasses:
carbon dioxide, sulfur dioxide,
nitrogen oxide, mercury, methane
and nitrous oxide broken down by
selected locations within a facility
Greenhouse Gas Report
Utilities Report: Captures
consumption of water, air, gas,
electricity and steam (WAGES)
Utilities Report
Capacity Summary Report: The
summary of top- and bottom-loaded
circuits, as well as loading details
for each circuit according to user-
dened date/time range and facility
hierarchy location
Capacity Summary Report
Foreseer
Software
(one or more
instances)
Third-Party Devices, Non-Power Xpert Devices
Power Xpert
Software
(one or more
instances)
Device
Aggregators
(PowerNet,
Gateways)
Power Xpert
Devices
(Meters,
Gateways,
Other)
4CR Data
Acquisition
Engine
2.4-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
049
Branch Circuit Monitoring Report:
Determine branch circuit loading
levels at a glance with color-coded
graphics indicating loading status
against capacity. Redundant sources
can be reviewed, as well as single
source loads
Branch Circuit Monitoring Report
Energy Summary Report: The
summary of consumption (kWh)
and demand (kW) for a user-
dened date/time range and
facility hierarchy location
Energy Summary Report
Energy Cost Allocation Report: The
total energy bill dollar value or a cost
per kWh across a facility hierarchy
for a user-dened date/time range
Energy Cost Allocation Report
Power Quality Report: The
distribution and trend for amps,
volts and THD according to user-
dened date/time ranges and
Power Quality Report
2.4-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
050
Event Summary Report: Provides a
Pareto chart of events according to
user-dened date/time ranges and
Event Summary Report
Joint Commission Report: Standard
Joint Commission Compliant Report
supports hospital power test
requirements. It checks events, key
metrics of generators and automatic
transfer switches (ATS) during
generator testing at user-dened
date/time ranges and facility
hierarchy location
Joint Commission Report
Service Offerings
Available Power Xpert Startup
Service Packs
At Eaton, we want to make it as easy
and non-disruptive as possible to
implement our Power Xpert products.
Eaton offers several startup service
packs from partial help to full turnkey
solution implementation.
All services are performed by
authorized Eaton Electrical Services
& Systems group personnel.
Startup Service Packs Include
the Following Services
Startup scope determination
Eaton services will help you evaluate
your service needs and check that
the service pack you have selected
has appropriate coverage for your
circumstances
Pre-installation checkup
Eaton services will contact you to
go through the pre-installation
checklist, which ensures efcient,
prime quality installation and
conguration services
Installation and conguration
Eaton services will install Power
Xpert Software and congure it
for operation with your equipment
according to startup scope
determination. Conguration
may also include creating custom
graphic layouts if necessary
and required
System test
Eaton services will test the Power
Xpert Software for operability and
will validate communications with
key components
Optional hands-on training
If required, Eaton services can
provide hands-on training for
Power Xpert Software, using the
software on-site or using simulated
demo systems
Table 2.4-4. Selecting the Appropriate Service Pack
Available and valid in continental United States only.
Typical number of Eaton devices that can be congured in the Power Xpert Software during the
course of the selected Startup Service Pack.
We strongly recommend a review of the latest Hardware Capability List at www.eaton.com/pxs.
Please call the Technical Resource Center for custom Startup Service at 800-809-2772, option 4, 1
for a price quote.
Note: The number of devices that can be congured during the course of a selected Start
Pack can vary depending on the devices installation readiness levels. Maximum numbers
indicated require full conguration readiness levels dened in the Power Xpert Startup
Services Checklist document in the services brochure at www.eaton.com/pxs.
Startup Service Product Number of Eaton Devices to be Integrated
<15
1530
3175
>75
Non-Eaton
Devices
Power Xpert 1 Day

Power Xpert 2 Day
Power Xpert 5 Day
Customer Fixed Price Quote

2.4-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
051
Table 2.4-5. Technical Specications
Table 2.4-6. Power Xpert Software
Power Xpert Startup
Service Pack Guidelines
Description
1 day 8 hrs, on-site, MF 8:00 a.m. 5:00 p.m.
2 day 16 hrs, on-site, two consecutive days, MF 8:00 a.m. 5:00 p.m.
5 day 5-day 40 hrs, on-site, ve consecutive days, MF 8:00 a.m. 5:00 p.m.
Additional services Can be purchased at Eaton prevailing time and service time material rates or xed price quote can be provided.
Call 1-800-809-2772 option 4, 1.
After hours service If required during night shift or weekend, additional service costs will apply and a purchase order must be received
for the premium time prior to scheduling the service.
Customer
required training
Any required safety training will be charged at the required training service hours purchased. Any expenses required
or safety training (i.e., drug testing payments) will be an extra charge.
Customer Requirements
IP addresses IP addresses are required for the serving computer, certain communicating devices and certain device interfaces. Static IP
addresses including subnet mask and default gateway must be provided prior to scheduling service.
Connections The system must be fully wired and connected prior to commencing service. This includes any network drops for any
TCP/IP devices and actual device wiring (i.e., INCOM or Modbus networks).
Device compatibility We strongly recommend that you review Eatons full Hardware Compatibility List available at www.eaton.com/pxs.
Travel
Travel costs The pricing includes both travel and lodging in the continental United States.
Selling policy
Eaton selling policy Eaton Selling Policy 5-000 applies to all Power Xpert Policy Startup Service Pack sales.
Validity and restrictions
Availability Eaton Power Xpert Startup Service Packs are available and valid in the continental United States only.
Validity Valid for 12 months after date of purchase.
Scheduling Recommended to schedule a service appointment within the rst three months of purchase.
Advance notice A minimum of three weeks advance notice is required prior to requested service date.
Description Catalog
Number
Power Xpert Software Professional Edition w/ 1-day startup
PXS-PRO
PXS-PRON1S
PXS-PRON2S
Power Xpert Software Professional Edition and Power Xpert Reporting
PXS-PRON5S
PXS-PRONPXR
Power Xpert Software Enterprise Edition w/ 1-day startup
PXS-ENT
PXS-ENTN1S
PXS-ENTN2S
PXS-ENTN5S
Power Xpert Reportingsingle source DB connection
Power Xpert Reportingup to 2 source DB connections
PXR
PXR-2DB
PXR-5DB
PXR-10DB
PXR-25DB
PXR-50DB
Service Packs
Power Xpert 1-day startup Service Pack
PX-1S
PX-2S
PX-5S
2.4-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
052
Hardware Requirements
Power Xpert Software (PXS) requires a
server-class machine with the follow-
ing minimum hardware specications:
Table 2.4-7. Hardware Specications
You may wish to add the following
hardware as well:
Local printer
Sound card (if sounds are assigned
to specic alarm conditions)
Modem (for remote alarm notica-
tion to machines not available via
your network)
Software Requirements
Supported operating systems
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2
(Standard or Enterprise) 32-bit
edition
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
(32-bit) with Service Pack 3, 32-bit
Windows Server 2008 (Standard
or Enterprise), 32-bit or 64-bit
Windows Server 2008 R2 (Server
or Enterprise), 32-bit or 64-bit
Windows 7 Professional, Ultimate
or Enterprise editions, either 32-bit
or 64-bit
Software components
IIS 5.0 or higher (must be
installed prior to installing PXS;
for Windows 7 and Windows Server
2008, this is installed automatically)
Microsoft Internet Explorer
7.0
or 8.0
Third-Party Software Installed
The following Microsoft software
is also installed during the
PXS installation.
.NET Framework 3.5 SP1
Windows Installer 4.5
C++ Runtime Library 2008
Microsoft Data Access 2.8
SQL Server 2008 Express SP2
SQL Server 2005 Express
Management Studio SP2
Hardware Specication
Processor 2.8 GHz, dual-core processor
Memory 2 GB allocated for PXS
(allocate 3 GB of memory
to a virtual machine session
running PXS)
Disk space
required for
application
The PXS application
itself requires 190 MB
of disk storage
Disk space
required for
database
A typical database will grow
to 2 GB within a year. If you
have a large number of
devices, reserve additional
storage space
Video
resolution
1280 by 1024 pixels
or higher
Removable
media
DVD RO drive
2.4-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
053
Table 2.4-8. Power Xpert Software (PXS) Hardware Compatibility List (HWCL)

These specications are subject to change without notice and represent typical congurations that may require additional connectivity products in
conjunction with Power Xpert Software. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options and product model, and depending on the
communication methods being used and rmware versions, some device-specic parameters may not get always passed through to the software.
Please refer to the Technical Data Sheets and User Manuals for detailed specications and parameter availability. Please refer to the Hardware
Compatibility List posted at www.eaton.com/pxs for latest version and details.
Note: For updated list, see www.eaton.com/pxs.
Device Communication
Protocol
Supported
Directly in
Power Xpert
Software
Supported
via PowerNet
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Foreseer
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
200E
Supported
via Power
Xpert 400E/
600E/800E
Gateway
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
PDP/1000
Card
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
UPS/2000
Card
Supported via
ConnectUPS
SNMP/Web
Card
Eaton UPSs
5115 UPS SNMP
5125 UPS SNMP
5130 UPS SNMP
9120 UPS SNMP
9120 UPS XCP/BCM
9125 UPS SNMP
9125 UPS XCP/BCM
9130 UPS SNMP
9135 UPS SNMP
9140 UPS SNMP
9150 HV
single-phase UPS
XCP/BCM
9150 HV
three-phase UPS
XCP/BCM
9150 LV UPS XCP/BCM
9155
two-phase UPS
BACnetWS+
9155
three-phase UPS
BACnetWS+
9155
three-phase UPS
SNMP
9155 UPS BACnetWS+
9155 UPS SNMP
9170 Plus
two-phase UPS
XCP/BCM
9170 Plus
single-phase UPS
XCP/BCM
9305 UPS XCP/BCM
9305 UPS UCII
9305 UPS SNMP
9305 UPS XCP/BCM/UCII
9315 50500 UPS XCP/BCM
9315 50500 UPS SNMP
9315 750 UPS XCP/BCM
9315 750 UPS SNMP
9315 SBM SNMP
9315 SBM
with MBP
BACnetWS+
9315 SBM
without MBP
BACnetWS+
9315 UPM
with Bypass
BACnetWS+
9315 UPM
without bypass
BACnetWS+
9320 UPS XCP/BCM
9330 UPS SNMP
9330 UPS XCP/BCM
9335 UPS SNMP
9335 UPS XCP/BCM
9340 UPS XCP/BCM
2.4-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
054
Table 2.4-8. Power Xpert Software (PXS) Hardware Compatibility List (HWCL) (Continued)

Protocol
Supported
Directly in
Power Xpert
Software
Supported
via PowerNet
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Foreseer
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
200E
Supported
via Power
Xpert 400E/
600E/800E
Gateway
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
PDP/1000
Card
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
UPS/2000
Card
Supported via
ConnectUPS
SNMP/Web
Card
Eaton UPSs (Continued)
9355 UPS BACnetWS+
9390 2-module SNMP
9390 3-module SNMP
9390 4-module SNMP
9390 UPS SNMP
9390 UPS BACnetWS+
9395 2-module SNMP
9395 3-module SNMP
9395 4-module SNMP
9395 5-module SNMP
9395 6-module SNMP
9395 7-Module SNMP
9395 8-Module SNMP
9395 distributed
parallel with SBM
BACnetWS+
9395 distributed
parallel without
SBM
BACnetWS+
9395 UPS BACnetWS+
9395 UPS SNMP
BladeUPS SNMP
BladeUPS
2-module
SNMP
BladeUPS
3-module
SNMP
BladeUPS
4-module
SNMP
BladeUPS
5-module
SNMP
BladeUPS
6-module
SNMP
BladeUPS
module
SNMP
Ferrups SNMP
IPM BP III
UPS, BCM
XCP/BCM
IPM BP IV BCM XCP/BCM
IPM BP Plus UPS XCP/BCM
IPM BPII UPS,
P-Record
single-phase
XCP/BCM
IPM BPII UPS,
P-Record
three-phase
XCP/BCM
Plus 1836 UPS XCP/BCM
Prestige UPS SNMP
Prestige UPS XCP/BCM
2.4-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
055

Protocol
Supported
Directly in
Power Xpert
Software
Supported
via PowerNet
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Foreseer
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
200E
Supported
via Power
Xpert 400E/
600E/800E
Gateway
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
PDP/1000
Card
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
UPS/2000
Card
Supported via
ConnectUPS
SNMP/Web
Card
Eaton Power Distribution Equipment
EMS-PDR BACnetWS+
EMS-PDU BACnetWS+
EMS-RPM BACnetWS+
EMS-RPP BACnetWS+
ePDU MI red
display 208V 30A
(630, L6-30)
SNMP
ePDU MI red
display 208V 60A
(IEC 309-60 1P)
SNMP
ePDU MI red
display all 120V
(5-xx, L5-xx),
ePDU MI red
display 208V 20A
(620, L6-20)
SNMP
ePDU MI red
display split-phase 20A
(L14-20), ePDU
MI red display
split-phase 30A
(L14-30)
SNMP
Monitored ePDU
blue display
SNMP
Monitored ePDU
red display
three-phase
SNMP
PDU panel,
PDU subfeed,
EMS panel,
EMS subfeed
BACnetWS+
Switched ePDU
16 outlets
single-phase
SNMP
Switched ePDU
24 outlets
single-phase
SNMP
Switched ePDU
24 outlets
three-phase
SNMP
Switched ePDU
8 outlets
single-phase
SNMP
2.4-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
056

Protocol
Supported
Directly in
Power Xpert
Software
Supported
via PowerNet
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Foreseer
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
200E
Supported
via Power
Xpert 400E/
600E/800E
Gateway
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
PDP/1000
Card
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
UPS/2000
Card
Supported via
ConnectUPS
SNMP/Web
Card
Eaton Meters
IQ Analyzer
6000/6200
INCOM
IQ Analyzer
6400/6600
INCOM
IQ Data,
IQ Generator
INCOM
IQ DataPlus,
IQ DataPlus II,
IQ DataPlus II
Goldstar,
IQ DataPlus II HV
INCOM
IQ DP-4000 INCOM
IQ Multipoint ES INCOM
IQ Multipoint ESII INCOM
IQ Power Sentinel INCOM
IQ Sentinel, univ.
w/external CTs,
univ. multiple
well-head,
univ. single
well-head
INCOM
IQ 130 Modbus RTU
IQ 140 Modbus RTU
IQ 150 Modbus RTU
IQ 200/IQ 300,
IQ 220/320,
IQ 230/IQ 330
INCOM IQ 220/230
IQ 230M/IQ 330M
(three-wire)
Modbus RTU
IQ 230M/IQ 330M
(four-wire)
Modbus RTU
IQ 250 Modbus RTU
IQ 260 Modbus RTU
IQ 7000 INCOM
Meter point INCOM
Power Manager,
Power Manager,
w/inp. trans.
INCOM
Power Xpert
Meter 2250
BACnetWS+
Power Xpert
Meter 2260
BACnetWS+
Power Xpert
Meter 2270
BACnetWS+
Power Xpert
Meter 4000
BACnetWS+
Power Xpert
Meter 6000
BACnetWS+
Power Xpert
Meter 8000
BACnetWS+
2.4-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
057

Supported by Power Xpert Enterprise Edition.

Protocol
Supported
Directly in
Power Xpert
Software
Supported
via PowerNet
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Foreseer
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
200E
Supported
via Power
Xpert 400E/
600E/800E
Gateway
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
PDP/1000
Card
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
UPS/2000
Card
Supported via
ConnectUPS
SNMP/Web
Card
Eaton Circuit Protection Products
ARMS IDM INCOM/Modbus
C441
overload relay
INCOM/Modbus
Digitrip 520MC INCOM/Modbus
Digitrip 700/800 INCOM/Modbus
Digitrip 810 INCOM/Modbus
Digitrip 910 INCOM/Modbus
Digitrip MV,
Digitrip 3000,
Digitrip 3200
INCOM/Modbus
Digitrip
OPTIM 1050
INCOM/Modbus
Digitrip
OPTIM 550,
Digitrip OPTIM 750
INCOM/Modbus
DT1150/DT1150V/
Navy
INCOM/Modbus
EDR-3000 INCOM/Modbus
EDR-4000 INCOM/Modbus
ETR-4000 INCOM/Modbus
FP-4000/FP-5000 INCOM/Modbus
FP-6000 INCOM/Modbus
IQ 500
overload relay
INCOM/Modbus
MMCO relay INCOM/Modbus
MP-3000,
MP-4000
INCOM/Modbus
MPCV relay INCOM/Modbus
Series NRX 1150 INCOM/Modbus
Series NRX 519 INCOM/Modbus
Series NRX 520M INCOM/Modbus
Eaton DC Systems
SC200 system
controller
SNMP
Eaton Sub-Network Master
AEM, AEMII INCOM/Modbus
AIM INCOM/Modbus
BIM/BIMII INCOM/Modbus
CMU INCOM/Modbus
IQ 1000 INCOM/Modbus
IQ 1000II,
IQ 1000II Goldstar
INCOM/Modbus
IQ CED, IQ CED II INCOM/Modbus
WCMU INCOM/Modbus
Eaton Transfer Switch
ATC-400 INCOM/Modbus
2.4-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
058

Supported by Power Xpert Enterprise Edition.

Protocol
Supported
Directly in
Power Xpert
Software
Supported
via PowerNet
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Foreseer
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
200E
Supported
via Power
Xpert 400E/
600E/800E
Gateway
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
PDP/1000
Card
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
UPS/2000
Card
Supported via
ConnectUPS
SNMP/Web
Card
Eaton Starters
ACM/Advantage INCOM
Advantage INCOM
IQ 500
overload relay
INCOM
IT. Starter S811
(MV811)
QCport
IT. Starter QSnap QCport
IT. Starter with
cover controls
QCport
D77A-AI16 QCport
D77A-DI16 QCport
D77A-DI8 QCport
Eaton Drives
Accutrol 400 INCOM/Modbus
AF97 INCOM/Modbus
MVX9000 Modbus RTU
SVX9000 Modbus RTU
Eaton I/O
DIM INCOM/Modbus
D77A-AI16 QCport
D77A-AI8 QCport
D77A-DI16 QCport
D77A-DI18 QCport
Foreseer DAT SNMP
Universal RTD INCOM/Modbus
Environmental Monitoring
EMP Communications
Card

Qualitrol 118 INCOM/Modbus
Wireless
temperature
sensor
802.11g
Integration Tools
LanSafe
SNMP agent
SNMP
Third-party
custom device
driver support
Various
Third-party
Modbus TCP
compatible
devices
Modbus TCP
Third-party SNMP
compatible devices
SNMP
2.4-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
059

Protocol
Supported
Directly in
Power Xpert
Software
Supported
via PowerNet
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Foreseer
Server (Built
into PXS)
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
200E
Supported
via Power
Xpert 400E/
600E/800E
Gateway
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
PDP/1000
Card
Supported
via Power
Xpert
Gateway
UPS/2000
Card
Supported via
ConnectUPS
SNMP/Web
Card
Miscellaneous
Addressable relay,
addressable
relay inv.
INCOM/Modbus
Alarm relay INCOM/Modbus
Breaker controller INCOM/Modbus
InsulGard
insulation monitor
Modbus
IQ Transfer
Switch II
INCOM/Modbus
Pow-R-Command INCOM/Modbus
Wireless
current sensor
INCOM/Modbus
Third-Party Device Support
ABB TPU 2000 Modbus
GE 369
motor relay
Modbus
GE 469
motor relay
Modbus
EI Nexus
1262/1272
Modbus
PML 7350
meter series
Modbus
PML 7550
meter series
Modbus
PML 7650
meter series
Modbus
Power Xpert
Gateway third-
party device
support
Modbus
Square D CM3000
meter series
Modbus
Square D CM4000/4250
meter series
Modbus
Square D PM710
meter series
Modbus
Square D
PM810/820/850/870
meter series
Modbus
2.4-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
Foreseer Services
060
Foreseer
Services
Foreseer Software and Engineering
Services (Foreseer Services) provide
vendor independent, power and
energy infrastructure integration
solutions that help companies reduce
energy consumption and unplanned
downtime due to the failure of critical
power, environmental, safety or
security systems.
Turnkey software and connectivity
solutions are coupled with state-of-
the-art project management, systems
design, third-party device integration,
testing and custom application devel-
opment to develop a comprehensive
monitoring solution to meet your
custom needs.
Foreseer Services is delivered in four
categories, each offering a multitude
of unique value-add services that
you can discuss with your Eaton
sales professional.
Design services
Installation services
Commissioning services
Follow-up services
Hardware services
Software services
Foreseer services is fully distributable
to allow different monitoring capabili-
ties to be deployed at different sites
allowing you to purchase only what is
needed. Many competitive systems
offer a one-size-ts all type approach
where you end up paying for more
capacity than is needed. With Foreseer
Services, you pay only for what you
need, when you need it.
Four Scalable Solutions
Foreseer Software Services is available
in four classes, capable of handling
15,000 to 256,000 data streams
(channels), so you can be assured
of the best t for various integration
environments, and the right solution
at the right price.
Foreseer Services Categories
Foreseer Services has three
general categories:
Foreseer Software Services
Foreseer Project Management
Services
Foreseer Engineering Services
Foreseer Software Services
Unique Features
Four scalable solutions
Four classes, capable of handling
15,000 to 256,000 data streams
(channels).
Software (up to 15,000 channels)
Foreseer M-Class server software
(up to 25,000 channels)
Foreseer R-Class server software (up
to 100,000 channels)
Foreseer S-Class server software
(up to 256,000 channels)
Redundant, Worldwide Coverage
The inclusion of one or more extra
Foreseer servers provides the highest
possible levels of system reliability. In
the unlikely event that one Foreseer
server fails then the remaining servers
can carry the load of the power
monitoring system.
With the Manager of Managers (MOM)
software option, data from one server
can be monitored alongside data
from other servers, enabling you to
aggregate multiple Foreseer sites into
a single system.
Data Gathering, 24/7
A proactive algorithm gathers data
24/7, enabling you to sample data
points from thousands of devices,
every second.
User-Dened Formulas
Information from multiple sources
and systems can be inserted into user
dened formulas, providing knowl-
edge for informed decision making.
Extensive Device Driver Library
Foreseer Software Services enables
the full-scale integration of third-party
products. A device library of over
600 drivers has been developed. For a
full list of compatible devices, see the
Foreseer services/hardware compati-
bility list at www.eaton.com/foreseer.
Trend Analysis
High performance analysis and
forecasting tools assess equipment
performance specications including
cause analysis, impact analysis,
capacity planning, preventive mainte-
nance assessments and trending.
Custom User Interfaces
Custom, mimic graphics, dashboards,
and 3D renderings.
Web Browser AccessUnlimited Seats
Web browser access enables easy
system access. Multiple users can
access Foreseer software without the
need for additional client seat licenses.
Alarm Notications
For each channel being monitored,
you can assign up to four alarm
thresholdsfrom routine maintenance
alerts to system failureplus handling
instructions and escalation procedures
for each.
Foreseer Project Management Services
Each Foreseer integration project can
be customized. See Figure 2.4-3 for an
overview of project ow.
Figure 2.4-3. Foreseer Project Management Services
2.4-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
Foreseer Services
061
Foreseer Engineering Services
Design Services
After extensive assessment of your
requirements and the existing device
and facility infrastructure, the Foreseer
design services team congures your
system, complete with a bill of materi-
als and recommendations unique to
your needs. Specication development,
drawings and detailed documentation
for your project is part of this step.
Third-party device support and
communication interface planning is
critical, including driver development
and enhancement, if necessary. User
interfaces are designed with default
views to meet your specications.
Installation Services
Installation services team members
are with you from project initiation to
handing over the Foreseer system
when work is complete. Tasks include:
Startup needs, testing and
customization
Drawings and custom graphic
layout development
Customized device gauge graphics
and status indicators
Third-party software integration
Custom software and application
development
Setup and conguration of
reporting packages and basic
Foreseer training
Commissioning Services
Commissioning services consist of
overall and tiered systems testing
and full point-to-point system
commissioning options.
Follow-up Services
Our follow-up services team handles
all issues related to connectivity,
device installation, conguration and
customization, hardware integration,
third-party system setup, congura-
tion and testing. Technical support
and customized service contracts
with scheduled site visits are also
available with advanced Foreseer
system training.
Custom Foreseer Services
Applications
Data Center Efciency
Eaton Powerware UPS-Primary View
Calculates DCiE and PUE
Use Foreseer Software Services
Power Xpert Reporting option to
automatically calculate Data Center
Infrastructure Efciency (DCiE) and
Power Usage Effectiveness (PUE).
These industry-standard efciency
metrics help IT managers to under-
stand and to track how efciently
their data center is running and
how effective improvement efforts
have been.
Energy Cost Allocation
Fair Share Utility Cost Distribution
Foreseer Software provides energy
usage by individual circuit so each
device can be a part of the energy
management strategy. It even
allocates electrical cost to individual
and branch circuits, which can then
be assigned to individual users of a
department or device.
Power Density
Pinpoint Hot Spots in Your Data Center
Power density is a critical measure-
ment as racks proliferate and expand
from TCP/IP networks and servers and
other elements of the infrastructure
are placed into smaller areas. Foreseer
Software manages power density by
device, for a single rack, oor or an
entire building, allowing identication
of overloaded racks and incorrect
power drains due to device failure.
Growth Planning
Power Capacity View
The Power Capacity View provides an
at-a-glance simple analysis of the data
centers electrical capacity. Normal,
cautionary and alarm events are
triggered automatically, both online
and remotely once a threshold has
been reached. Mapping the data
centers capacity is critical for power,
cooling and redundancy planning.
With Foreseer Software projection
graphing capability, data center
managers can easily predict when
they are going to hit a capacity
threshold going into the future and
can prepare accordingly.
Plan with the Electrical Capacity
Planning Tool
Demand on devices grows as
organizations expand. While average
demand may not be a concern, peak
demand is. Foreseer software tracks
the kW and kVA over time, immedi-
ately informs of peak levels, and
projects future demands based on
past usage. Assisting in planning for
electrical upgrades and/or changes to
the power system to support changing
load patterns.
2.4-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
Foreseer Services
062
Load Balancing
Prevent Unbalanced Loads
Improper load balancing contributes
to harmonic distortion. Foreseer
software tracks load levels by phase,
giving instant notication when
extreme imbalances begin to occur,
and providing the knowledge to take
the necessary steps to re-distribute the
load. Foreseer software visually illus-
trates the load balance of a device or
system in real-time, while showing
what the balanced model should be.
You see the current state, the worst-
case scenario and the proper load.
Figure 2.4-4. Data Center/Co-Location DeviceThe typical Data Center/Co-Location device mixture includes a large variety of power distribution,
cooling, environmental monitoring, lighting, safety and security, backup and emergency power systems that have been purchased over a long
period of time. Foreseer Services integrates all of these systems into a simple, single software monitoring package. Support for metering and
energy measurement, including greenhouse gas monitoring, are requirements that need to be taken into consideration as well as, for example,
Building Management System integration.
2.4-23
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
Foreseer Services
063
A/C Control Client Software
AC Control-Zone Assignment
Take Control of Your Environment
The Foreseer software A/C interface
offers comprehensive monitoring and
optional lead/lag control for Air Flow,
Data Aire and Liebert System 3 air
conditioning units. Lead/lag control
and scheduling is viewable via a
Web-browser and is controllable
with the proper user authority.
Maintenance Scheduler
Maintenance Scheduler
Eliminate the Hassles
The Foreseer software maintenance
scheduler offers the ability to preset
scheduled (weekly or periodic)
maintenance windows within the
system to disarm selected devices
on which maintenance will be
performed. Disarming the devices
allows continued monitoring and
archiving during the maintenance
period while disabling alarms and
preventing unnecessary notication
of personnel.
Foreseer Services
Available Options
Eatons Power Xpert Reporting works
in conjunction with Foreseer Software
allowing a view past individual
measurements, trend graphs and
events. It consolidates complex data
from a multitude of devices from
around the globe into easy-to-under-
stand graphical reports. It provides a
standard set of reports for the most
common report requests. Simply
choose from 10 ready-to-go report
templates. Power Xpert Reporting can
be set to run the report automatically
and send you new, updated reports via
e-mail at predened intervals.
Manager of Managers (MOM)
Provides a powerful means to
integrate data from multiple locations
where each location is running its own
Foreseer software server. This unique
feature provides a scalable system
where the total number of integrated
points on the centralized MOM server
can be as large as 256,000 points.
Sequence of Events Recorder
Enables breaker status monitoring
capability at a time stamping
resolution of 1 millisecond. During
a critical or catastrophic event,
sequence of event information
is captured by the recorder for
retrospective analysis and root
cause issue mitigation.
Secure Web Server (https)
Provides an encrypted means to
protect all data that is viewed via a
standard Web browser on the Internet
or intranet. Using the OpenSSL
package from the Internet, Foreseer
software is able to provide 128 bit
encryption between the Foreseer
Software and the Web browser.
Both registered certicates from
a third-party provider or self-signed
certicates are allowed to be used
with this option.
Redundancy
Safeguards valuable information.
The inclusion of one or more extra
Foreseer software servers provides
the highest levels of system reliability.
In the event that one Foreseer
software server fails, the remaining
servers carry the load of the power
monitoring system.
Data Acquisition Engine (DAE)
Designed specically for geographi-
cally or physically removed sites
where local IT expertise may not
exist. The data acquisition engine (see
Page 2.4-24 for details) automatically
collects and sends data from critical
infrastructure devices, and communi-
cates that data back to the Foreseer
software server. Using local process-
ing and the shared bandwidth of an
IP network, the DAE reduces the cost
required to transmit data to the central
server. The DAE also continues to
operate independently and generate
alarms even if the connection to
the central server is unavailable,
increasing the overall availability
of the management system.
Data Acquisition Terminal (DAT)
Easily integrates monitored
equipment and sensors located in
small, networked remote sites. The
DAT (see Page 2.4-24 for details)
employs standard Modbus communi-
cations to relay information to either
a Foreseer software server or a data
acquisition engine over a TCP/IP
network. Data is packaged in
sequential Modbus registers to
enable optimum scan times without
impacting network bandwidth.
Universal Input Enclosure
Provides network connectivity for
analog and contact input information
along with device server capability.
Each enclosure contains from one to
ve input modules with pluggable
connectors used for power and
input wiring, enabling cost-efcient
monitoring of equipment in small,
remote facilities.
2.4-24
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
Monitoring Software
Foreseer Class Hardware Options
064
To further expand the reach of
Foreseer Services, two hardware
devices are offered.
The Foreseer data acquisition engine
is designed specically for geographi-
cally or physically removed Foreseer
class sites where local IT expertise
may not exist.
The Foreseer data acquisition
terminal easily integrates monitored
small, networked remote sites.
For complete listing of Foreseer
class hardware compatibility,
visit the Foreseer Web site at
www.eaton.com/foreseer.
Designed specically for geographi-
cally or physically removed sites
where local IT expertise may not exist.
The data acquisition engine automati-
cally collects and sends data from
critical infrastructure devices, such as
UPS, generator and power distribution
units, and communicates that data, as
well as status and alarms, back to the
centrally located Foreseer server.
Using local processing and using the
shared bandwidth of an IP network,
the DAE reduces the cost required to
transmit data to the central server.
The DAE can also continues to operate
independently and generate alarms
even if the connection to the central
server is unavailable, increasing
the overall availability of the
management system.
DAE Technical Specications
External power input: 115/230 Vac
in, 5 Vdc 8A out, optional48 Vdc
Ethernet: dual 10/100Base-T
Ethernet ports
Communications ports: four RS-232/
422/485 and four USB ports
Dimensions in inches (H x W x D):
3.50 x 17.00 x 11.00, 19.00-inch rack-
mount with removable anges
Environment: 32 to 104F
(0 to 40C), 0% to 90%
noncondensing RH
Monitoring: 3072 channels,
maximum of 1536 analog
Easily integrates monitored
small, networked remote sites. The
DAT employs standard Modbus
communications to relay information
to either a Foreseer server or a data
acquisition engine over a TCP/IP
network. Data is packaged in
sequential Modbus registers to
enable optimum scan times without
impacting network bandwidth.
DAT Technical Specications
External power input: 100/240 Vac,
47/63 Hz,1A (0.5A at 240) optional
48 Vdc
Ethernet: 10Base-T, status and
activity LEDs
Communications: Modbus RTU
via UDP using TCP/IP Port 7010
or Modbus TCP
Dimensions in inches (H x W x D):
1.75 x 19.00 x 4.63
Weight: 3 lbs
Environment: 4 to 185F
(20 to 85C), 0% to 90%
noncondensing RH
Discrete inputs: 16 channels
congure as dry contact
Relay outputs: 16 channels, SPDT
conguration, contacts rated at
500 mA, 125 Vac
Analog inputs: eight channels of
12-bit A/D up to 16 digital inputs
2.5-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
for Third-Party Integration
Power Xpert Gateway and PONI Communication Modules
065
Power Xpert Gateway
400E/600E/800E
Power Xpert Gateway
The Power Xpert Gateways 400E, 600E
and 800E work on an open communi-
cation architecture. They connect both
Eaton and third-party electrical equip-
ment communicating through INCOM,
QCPort and Modbus RTU.
Modbus TCP/IP supports integration
with third-party monitoring solutions.
For example, the gateways send
information to a Kepware OPC
server, which then allows the data
from downstream devices to integrate
with third-party HMI and Building
Management systems.
Ethernet TCP support uses your
existing network infrastructure,
reducing costs.
For detailed information on the Power
Xpert Gateways, please see Page 2.2-1.
For detailed information on
compatible devices, refer to
www.eaton.com/pxg.
RS-485 PONI
The RS-485 Product Operated Network
Interface card, or MPONI card, enables
Modbus communication capability to
various Eaton products. Each MPONI
contains two rotary address switches
to uniquely identify each device on the
network and a baud rate DIP switch. A
5-pin connector is provided for wiring
to the RS-485 network.
Various baud rates are available for
networking exibility, and onboard
LEDs indicate operation, error and
communication status. The MPONI is
applied where a device network exists
connected by a dedicated shielded
twisted pair conductor. Modbus RS-
485 allows a single device or multiple
units in a daisy-chain conguration to
communicate with another local or
remote device and may extend up to
4000 ft (1219m) without a repeater.
The MPONI comes with mounting
hardware and attaches to the back
of its associated device.
Note: Please see IL for detailed register
support information for each supported
product. Not all device functionality is
supported with the RS-485 PONI over the
Modbus protocol.
DPONI
The DeviceNet Product Operated
Network Interface (DPONI) enables
communication between a DeviceNet
network master station and a host
device in a master/slave format over
a DeviceNet network. The DPONI is
compatible with the MP-3000 and
MP-4000. The DPONI is powered
both by the host product to which
it is attached and by the DeviceNet
network.
The DPONI uses opto-couplers to
isolate the two power systems. The
DPONI communicates at 125, 250 or
500 Kbps selected via a front panel DIP
switch. All products on the DeviceNet
network must be set at the same
communication rate. The DPONI has a
bi-color network/module status LED
that functions in accordance with the
DeviceNet specication. An additional
monocolor LED ashes while the
DPONI is receiving a message from
the host device.
Figure 2.5-1. RS-485 PONI
Figure 2.5-2. DPONI
Network
Connection
(Green Phoenix
Connection)
Recommended
18 gauge twisted pair IMPCABLE or
20 gauge Belden 9463 class
Address
Selector
Switches
Function
Selector
Switch
IQ Host
Device
Connection
LED
STATUS
RX
TX
RS-485
NETWORK
1 = A
2 = G
3 = COMMON
4 = SHIELD
5 = CHASSIS
RS-485
P roduct
O perated
N etwork
I nterface
LED
DEVICE
MOUNTING
T
R
DeviceNet
Network
Connection
(5 point plug)
Earth
GND
DeviceNet Status
Data
Code
INCOM
Status
IQ Host Device
Connection
2.5-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
MINTII RS-232 Converter
066
General Description
Applications
Converts a network of power manage-
ment software devices to ASCII RS-232
format for access through a serial port
of a PC, laptop, or Programmable
Logic Controller (PLC).
Displayed Parameters
Eatons MINTII provides access to
all parameters monitored over a
system monitoring system such as
Power Xpert Software or Foreseer
Services
Supports INCOM networks up to
8500 ft (2590m) in distance and
device counts up to 1000
Suitable for panel mounting or
desktop use
120 Vac power cord included for
plug-in to standard duplex receptacle
Temperature: 0 to 60C
Humidity: 095%
Power: 120V
Speed: 1200, 2400 and 9600 baud
(INCOM), 19.2K baud (RS-232)
Communications: INCOM, RS-232
Product Selection
Table 2.5-1. MINTII RS-232 Converter
Master INCOM Network Translator II
The Master INCOM Network
Translator II (MINTII) converts the
twisted shielded pair network of
INCOM devices to an RS-232 signal.
This signal can be accessed by PLCs,
computer serial ports and building
management system serial interface
cards. The MINTII is also often
applied as an interface to standard
line drivers and converters to allow
communication through dedicated
telephone lines, dial-up modems,
ber-optic line drivers, radio
frequency or wireless modems.
Figure 2.5-3. MINTII Connection Diagram for Use with a PC
Description Catalog
Number
Master INCOM
Network Translator II
MINTII
Twisted Pair
INCOM Network
9-Pin Female to
25-Pin Male
Straight-Through
RS-232 Cable
9-Pin
PC Comport
PC MINTII

2.5-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
mMINT
067
mMINT
mMINT Module
General Description
The mMINT (Modbus Master INCOM
Network Translator) Module is an
Eaton accessory product that will
provide communication between a
Modbus RTU network and an INCOM
(INdustrial COMmunications) network
(see Figure 2.5-4). This module is
transparent to the Modbus network.
It communicates to a master on the
Modbus network using the Modbus
RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) protocol.
It communicates to slave devices on
the INCOM network using the IMPACC
(Integrated Monitoring, Protection,
and Control Communication) proto-
col. The catalog number of this
product is mMINT.
Features
The mMINT module is a slave
device on the Modbus network and
as such requires a master that will
exchange register objects with the
mMINT module.
Handles generic pass-through com-
mands (Modbus/INCOM/Modbus)
Capable of passing Modbus register
objects from Eatons existing prod-
ucts and newer PnP (Plug-n-Play)
products to a Modbus RTU master
Data in IEEE Floating Point format
and xed point
Modbus RTU communications
data transfer rates of 1200, 9600
or 19200 baud with one start bit,
eight data bits, no parity, and either
one or two stop bits
Up to 32 products connected to
INCOM network port (246 unique
addresses maximum)
Flashing Status LED to indicate an
active module
LED indicators for INCOM transmit
and receive communications
exchanges
LED indicators for Modbus RS-485
transmit and receive communica-
tions exchanges
Input power for the module from
either 120 Vac or 24125 Vdc
DIN rail mount package
0 to 60C ambient operation
Module Mounting
When mounting the mMINT, verify
that an 11 mm H x 28 mm W DIN rail
is used and that it is within an
enclosed space.
Simplied Wiring Rules
INCOM Network
The following simplied rules apply
to a given system consisting of a
single daisy-chained main cable link
between master and slave devices
(see Figure 2.5-4). For more complex
considerations including star congu-
rations, please refer to the IMPACC
wiring specication T.D. 17513.
Figure 2.5-4. mMINT in a Communications
Network
Recommended INCOM cable styles
are Belden 9463 or C-H style
2A957805G01
The maximum system capacity is
10,000 feet of communications cable
and 32 slave devices on the INCOM
network under the mMINT
Non-terminated taps, up to 200 feet in
length, off the main link are permitted,
but add to the total cable length
Make sure that there is twisted-pair
wire that is recommended for
IMPACC network use. Use shielded
twisted-pair wire to connect each
slave to the INCOM network,
daisy-chain style. The polarity of
the twisted pair is not important
Modbus RS-485 Network
The following simplied rules apply to
a given system consisting of a cable
link between master and slave devices
(see Figure 2.5-5). For more complex
congurations, please refer to stan-
dard Modbus RTU wiring specication
rules for the RS-485 network.
The recommended Modbus cable
has twisted-pair wires (24 AWG
stranded 7x32 conductors with PVC
insulation) having an aluminum/
mylar foil shield with drain wire
The maximum system capacity
is 4000 feet of communications
cable and 247 devices on the
Modbus RTU network
Make sure that there is twisted-
pair wire that is recommended
for Modbus RTU network use.
Use shielded twisted-pair wire to
connect each slave to the Modbus
RTU network, daisy-chain style.
The polarity of the twisted pair is
critically important
Figure 2.5-5. mMINT Module Dimensions
Burden
24 Vac/dc 3 VA
Safety Standards
UL
CSA
CE mark
Communications Speed
INCOM: 1200, 9600 baud
N2 Bus: 9600 baud
Modbus RTU Serial Network
(Slave)
Modbus
mMINT
(Master)
Modbus
Master
INCOM Network
INCOM
Slaves
J1 J2
J3
4.25
(108.0)
RS-485
Modbus
3.54
(89.9)
24125 Vdc
120 Vac
Shield INCOM
A B COM SHD
2.5-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 02
PMINR
068
PMINT
PMINT Module
General Description
The PMINT (PROFIBUS DPMaster
INCOM network translator) module is
an Eaton accessory product that will
provide communications between a
PROFIBUS DP network master and an
INCOM (INdustrial COMmunications)
based Digitrip Magnum 520MC
or 1150 trip unit. The module is
transparent to the PROFIBUS network
master. It communicates to a master
on the PROFIBUS network using
the PROFIBUS-DP-V0 protocol. It
communicates to a slave Magnum
trip unit device on INCOM.
Features
The PMINT module is a slave device
on the PROFIBUS network and as such
requires a PROFIBUS master that will
interrogate the PMINT module.
The PMINT uses the VPC3+C Pro-
Chip integrated circuit, providing
PROFIBUS communications support
with automatic recognition of data
transfer rates up to 12 Mbits/s
Flashing Status LED to indicate an
active module
LED indicators for PROFIBUS
SYSFAULT and BUSFAULT
LED indicators for INCOM transmit
and receive communications
exchanges
Input power for the module from
either 100240 Vac or 24150 Vdc
DIN rail mount package
40 to 85C ambient operation
INCOM Connection
INCOM communications is based on
a master-slave protocol. The PMINT
is a master on the INCOM connection
and continually obtains data from the
attached trip unit. Reference material
pertaining to INCOM can be obtained
from http://www.eaton.com, then
search on 17384.
IL17384Part A: INCOM
Communications Standard
IL17384Part C: Protective Relays
and Trip Units
The following simplied rules apply
to a given system consisting of an
INCOM master and the slave trip unit.
Recommended INCOM cable styles
are Belden 3073F or Eaton style
2A957805G01
A 100 ohm terminating resistor is
required across the INCOM carrier
signal pair at the trip unit
The maximum system capacity
is 8000 feet of communications
cable on an INCOM network under
the PMINT
Make sure that there is twisted pair
wire that is recommended for INCOM
network use. Use shielded twisted pair
wire to connect between the PMINT
and the INCOM communications
based trip unit. The polarity of the
twisted pair is not important.
PROFIBUS DP RS-485 Network
Reference material pertaining to
PROFIBUS can be obtained from the
http://PROFIBUS.com Web site. Refer
to the PROFIBUS DP standard for
transmission using copper cables
(RS-485). A 9-pin D-SUB connector
interface is provided.


September 2011

Contents

3.0-1

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

03

001

A
d
v
a
n
c
e
d

a
n
d
E
l
e
c
t
r
o
n
i
c

M
e
t
e
r
i
n
g


General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.0-2

Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.0-3
Eaton Advanced Meters

Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1-1

Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1-20

Power Xpert Energy Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1-31

IQ 250/260 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1-32

IQ 130/140/150 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1-35
Eaton Submeter Overview

IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2-1

IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter

II

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2-10

IQ Energy Sentinel and Power Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2-15

Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Power Monitoring and
Metering Module (PM3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2-21
Eaton Electronic Meters

IQ Analyzer 6000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3-1
Accessories

IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4-1

Panel Mounting Adapter Kit for IQ 100/200 Series
and PXM 2000 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4-1

Sub-Network Master Local Display (SMLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4-2

Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4-3

Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4-5
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010


Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . .

Paragraph 2.02.A Paragraph 2.02.A

Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series . . . . .

Paragraph 2.02.B Paragraph 2.02.B

IQ 250/260 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Paragraph 2.02.E Paragraph 2.02.E

IQ 100 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Paragraph 2.02.D Paragraph 2.02.D

IQ Power Sentinel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Paragraph 2.02.F Paragraph 2.02.F

IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Paragraph 2.02.G Paragraph 2.02.G

IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter

II

. . . .

Paragraph 2.02.H Paragraph 2.02.H

IQ 35M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Paragraph 2.02.I Paragraph 2.02.I

Breaker Power Monitoring and
Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Paragraph 2.02.J Paragraph 2.02.J
Metering Products Family
3.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

03

Overview

General Description

002

General Description

Eatons metering products provide
solutions needed to monitor and
manage all aspects of an electrical
When seeking greater reliability,
increased productivity and signicant
cost savings to remain competitive
in todays market, Eatons metering
products t the bill. These innovative
meters and communications systems,
along with Power Management
software, make it possible to success-
fully take control of the electrical

Power Xpert

Meters

Power Xpert Meters are the bench-
mark for intelligent Web-enabled top-
quality metering devices for the power
chain. Power Xpert Meters provide
measurement of the critical elements
found in the power chain whether that
be voltage, power, current, transients,
harmonics or even time. Power
Xpert Meters provide Web-enabled
high denition communications
for use with the Power Xpert Software.
All Power Xpert Meters provide a
standard communications protocol for
easy integration into other systems.

Greater Reliability

Eaton metering products permit
receiving an early warning of potential
problems, eliminate unnecessary
trips, isolate faults to ensure minimum
downtime and shed or equalize loads
while a problem is being corrected.

Increased Productivity

Equipment downtime resulting from
voltage or frequency variations can be
very costly to an operation. Monitoring
power quality with Eatons metering
products throughout the electrical
distribution system provides data to
identify, isolate and correct problems
quickly and efciently.

Metering Products Family

Reduced Energy and Operating Costs

When we think about meters and
power quality, the common thread
throughout the basket of solutions is
information. Collecting, monitoring,
and managing data from the electrical
distribution system can help reduce
costs for those facilities prepared to
dene and analyze present electrical
energy usage levels and patterns.
Data provided by Eaton metering
products comprise the data for
verifying utility bills for energy
management and lowering operating
costs. Deregulation in some geograph-
ical locations permits energy users to
select a utility provider and negotiate
rate structures. For large users with
heavy utility bills this may be an
incentive to verify the utility bill,
identify an opportunity for savings,
negotiate a better utility rate, and apply
the savings directly to the bottom line.
Users are also empowered to decrease
energy consumption, thereby lowering
peak demand charges and decreasing
operating costs.
When an Eaton meter is used with
Eaton trip units and relays incorporat-
ing built-in metering capabilities, the
entire electrical distribution system
can be cost-effectively managed.
Eaton is an industry leader offering
a complete integrated solution to over-
see your entire electrical distribution
system. As a global manufacturer of
low and medium voltage electrical
distribution system equipment and
components, Eaton is an experienced
innovator of Metering Products that
incorporate leading-edge technology.
These innovations result from
our scientic and engineering
expertise, physical resources and
the ongoing R&D programs at our
four technology centers.


3.0-3

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

03

Overview

Selection Chart

003

Table 3.0-1. Metering Selection ChartDimensions in Inches (mm)

Under typical operating conditions.

PXM 2260 only.

PXM 2270 only.

IQ 260 only.

Individual values reported to 85th harmonic;
anti-alias ltering prevents higher frequencies
from distorting readings (see IEC 61000-4-7).

PXM6000 only.

PXM8000 only.

End of 2011check factory for availability.

The auxiliary voltage option adds three
additional voltage input channels to
Power Xpert Meters.

At computer only.

Dimensions in mm =
224.0 H x 208.8 W x 170.7 D.

Dimensions in mm =
229.1 H x 198.1 W x 63.2 D.

Using <10 VA meter sourced 24V power.

Legend:

PG = Programmable
FS = Full scale
RV = Read value
Auxiliary Voltage
(Optional) = Provides three additional
voltage inputs to the
meter: Va2, Vb2, Vc2.
Interharmonics = Power Xpert Meter
6000/8000 supported.

Device Name
Accessories
See Page 3.1-18
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series IQ 250/260 Series
Section Page Number 3.1-1 3.1-20 3.1-32

Electrical Parameters

Volts
Amperes
Current range (% of nominal)
0.1% of reading + 0.02% FS
0.00520A (400%)
0.1% of reading
0.1% of reading
0.1200%
0.1% of reading
0.1% of reading
0.1200%
Watts
VARs
VA
0.1% of reading + 0.0025% FS
0.1% of reading + 0.0025% FS
0.1% of reading + 0.0025% FS
0.2% of reading
0.2% of reading
0.2% of reading
0.2% of reading
0.2% of reading
0.2% of reading
PF-apparent
PF-displacement
Frequency
0.1%
0.1%
0.01 Hz
0.2% of reading
0.03 Hz
0.2% of reading
0.03 Hz
THD-voltage
THD-current
Watthours
127th
127th
0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class

40th

40th

40th

40th

VAR-hours
VA-hours
Ampere-demand


Watt-demand
VAR-demand
VA-demand



Revenue accuracy
Individual ampere harmonics
Individual voltage harmonics

85th

85th

ANSI C12.20 (0.2%)
40th

40th

ANSI C12.20 (0.2%)
Interharmonics Yes

Minimum and/or Maximum Values

Volts
Current
Power
L-L, L-N, N-G, VAUX L-L
A, B, C, N, G
Watt, VAR, VA
L-L, L-N
A, B, C, N
Watt, VAR, VA
L-L, L-N
A, B, C
Watt, VAR, VA
Power factor
Frequency
THD
Apparent/displacement
Hertz
Amperes/volts (L-L, L-N, AUX L-L)
Apparent
Hertz
Amperes/volts

Apparent
Hertz
Amperes/volts

Demand values
Trend analysis
Event logging
Disturbance recording
kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes
2/4

/8

GB
2/4

/8

GB
2/4

/8

GB
60 cycles per event
256/512

/768

MB
100,000 alarms/events with timestamp

Yes

Yes

Other Features

Storage 2/4

/8

GB 256/512

/768

MB
PG output relays
PG analog outputs
Discrete contact inputs
Analog inputs
5 maximum
Optional (2) Form C, 5 A or (4) Form A, 120 mA

Optional (4) 420 mA or (4) 01 mA
Optional (2) or (4)
Optional (2) Form C, 5 A or (4) Form A, 120 mA

Optional (4) 420 mA or (4) 01 mA
Optional (2) or (4)
Synch-input kW utility Via status input Via end of interval pulse with
optional digital inputs
Via end of interval pulse with
optional digital inputs
Auxiliary voltage

Yes
kWh pulse initiator
Waveform display
Waveform capture
Frequency distribution display
Yes
Local/computer
Yes
Yes

Yes

Yes
Display type
Display lines/character
Display character height
LCD
Graphic (320 x 240 pixels)
5.5 mm H x 4 mm W
Red LED
3 lines, 4 characters
0.56 (14.2) H
Red LED
0.56 (14.2) H
Communications Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII,
Network: Modbus TCP, Ethernet TCP/IP,
HTTP, SNMP, SMTP, FTP
Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0
Network: Modbus TCP, Ethernet TCP/IP,
HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, SMTP
Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0
Network: Modbus TCP via
Power Xpert Gateway
Setup conguration Via Web browser/display Via Web browser/display Via conguration software/display
Dimensions
Operating temperature range
Meter (8.82 H x 8.22 W x 6.72 D)

Display (9.02 H x 7.80 W x 2.49 D)

20 to 60C display unit
20 to 70C meter base unit

Refer to IM02601001E
(see

Page 3.1-26

)
20 to 70C
Refer to IB02601006E
(see

Page 3.1-34

)
20 to 70C
3.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

03

Overview

Selection Chart

004

Table 3.0-1. Metering Selection ChartDimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)

From 3300% of FS.

At unity power factory and 5300% of FS.

At a power factor < 0.5 and 5300% of FS.

At computer only.

Relays programmable to operate on any
measured function.

Optional.

Power Xpert Meters.

An IPONI is required.

IQ 230M only.

Legend:

PG = Programmable
FS = Full scale
RV = Read value
Auxiliary Voltage

Device Name
Accessories
See Page 3.1-18
IQ Analyzer 6000 Series IQ DP-4000 Series IQ 230 Series
Section Page Number 3.3-1


Volts
Amperes
0.2% FS

0.2% FS

3800%
0.3% FS
0.3% FS
10250%
0.5% FS
0.5% FS
1200%
Watts
VARs
VA
0.4% FS, 6 reading

0.4% FS, 6 reading

0.4% FS, 6 reading

0.6% FS
0.6% FS
0.6% FS
1.0% FS
1.0% FS
1.0% FS
PF-apparent
PF-displacement
Frequency
0.8% FS

0.8% FS

0.04%

or 0.01 Hz
1.0% FS
1.0% FS
0.17% FS
2.0% FS
2.0% FS
0.1% Hz
THD-voltage
THD-current
Watthours
50th
50th
0.5% reading

31st
31st
0.6% FS
1.0% per ANSI C12

VAR-hours
VA-hours
Ampere-demand
1% reading

0.5% reading

0.2% FS

0.6% FS
0.6% FS
0.3%
1.0% per ANSI C12
1.0% per ANSI C12
0.5% per ANSI C12
Watt-demand
VAR-demand
VA-demand
0.4% FS

0.4% FS

0.4% FS

0.6%
0.6%
0.6%
1.0% per ANSI C12
1.0% per ANSI C12
1.0% per ANSI C12
Revenue accuracy
ANSI C12.20 (0.5%)
50th
50th
ANSI C12.1 (1%)
Interharmonics


Volts
Current
Power
L-L, L-N
A, B, C, N, G
Watt, VAR, VA
L-L, L-N
A, B, C
Watt, VAR, VA
L-L, L-N
A, B, C
Watt, VAR, VA
Power factor
Frequency
THD
Hertz
Amperes/volts
Hertz
Amperes/volts
Hertz
Demand values
Trend analysis
Event logging
All
Time/date
504 events w/timestamp
10 waveform events
All
2 Alarms

All

Other Features

Storage 90 kB 15 Parameters
PG output relays
PG analog outputs
Analog inputs
(4) 10A Form C

(4) 010/420 mA
(3) +30 Vdc Differential
(1) 020/420 mA
(3) 10A Form C

(1) kW Demand

(2) 100 mA Form A
(2) +30 Vdc differential

(1) 420 mA
Synch-input kW Utility At device or via communications At device or via communications

Via communications only
Auxiliary voltage

kWh pulse initiator
Waveform display
Waveform capture
Yes
Local
/computer
Yes
Local
/computer
Yes
Yes
Display type
Graphic LCD with LED backlight
Up to 7 Lines
7 Segment LED
1 line, 7 characters
1 line
Backlit LCD
1.60 (40.6) H x 0.09 (2.3) W
Communications Serial: INCOM
Network: via Power Xpert Gateway
Serial: INCOM
Serial: INCOM, Modbus RTU

Setup conguration Via conguration software/display Via conguration software/display Via conguration software/display
Dimensions
6.70 (170.2) W x 10.30
(261.6) H x 5.40 (137.2) D
20 to 70C
6.70 (170.2) W x 10.30
(261.6) H x 5.40 (137.2) D
20 to 70C
Refer to TD.17.06.T.E.
(see Page 3.2-14)
0 to 50C
3.0-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Overview
Selection Chart
005
IQ 140/150.
IQ 150 only.
At computer only.

Power Xpert Meters.
Optional.
End of 2011check factory for availability.

Legend: PG = Programmable
FS = Full scale
RV = Read value
Auxiliary Voltage
Device Name
Accessories
See Page 3.1-18
IQ 130/140/150 Series IQ 35M IQ Multipoint
Energy Submeter II
Section Page Number 3.1-35 3.2-1 3.2-10
Volts
Amperes
0.25% of reading
0.25% of reading
0.1200%
0.4% +0.015% per C deviation from 25C
0.4% (5100%), 0.8%(15%) +0.015% per C from 25C
1120%
0.5% FS
Watts
VARs
VA
0.5% of reading
0.5% of reading
0.5% of reading
0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S

2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2
Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs
1.0% FS
PF-apparent
PF-displacement
Frequency
0.5% of reading
0.03 Hz
Calculated: watts/VAs

0.02 Hz
THD-voltage
THD-current
Watthours
1.0% per ANSI C12

VAR-hours
VA-hours
Ampere-demand
2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2
Watt-demand
VAR-demand
VA-demand

2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2
Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs
1.0% per ANSI C12
Revenue accuracy
ANSI C12.20 (0.5%)

ANSI C12.1 (1%)
Interharmonics
Volts
Current
Power
L-L, L-N
A, B, C
Watt, VAR, VA
Power factor
Frequency
THD
Apparent
Hertz
Apparent (low alert)

Hertz (out of range alert)

Demand values
Trend analysis
Event logging
kW, kVAR, kVA; maximum kW, kVAR, kVA
Logging on demand interval or Modbus command

Other Features
Storage 10 registers (16 bit) by 5760 entries each
(115 kB)
PG output relays
PG analog outputs
Analog inputs
Synch-input kW utility Optional demand synchronization via modbus Via communications only
Auxiliary voltage

kWh pulse initiator
Waveform display
Waveform capture
Display type
Red LED
0.56 (14.2) H
Backlit LCD
2 lines by 5 characters each (full alphanumeric top row)
7.5 mm
Communications Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII
Network: Modbus TCP via Power Xpert

Gateway, Modbus TCP onboard
Serial: Modbus RTU
, BACnet
Network: Modbus TCP via Power Xpert Gateway

Serial: INCOM
Setup conguration Via conguration software/display Via display/conguration software Via conguration software
Dimensions
Refer to IM02601003E (see Page 3.1-37)
20 to 70C
Refer to IM02601005E (see Page 3.2-4)
Meter: 30 to 70C
Display: 10 to 50C
Refer to TD02601004E (see Page 3.2-13)
25 to 70C
3.0-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Overview
Selection Chart
006
IQ Power Sentinel only.
At computer only.

Power Xpert Meters.
Contact factory for availability.

Legend: PG = Programmable
FS = Full scale
RV = Read value
Auxiliary Voltage
Device Name
Accessories
See Page 3.1-18
Power Monitoring/
Metering Module (PM3)
IQ Energy/
Power Sentinel
Section Page Number 3.2-21 3.2-15
Volts
Amperes
0.5% of reading
0.5% of reading
0.5% FS
0.5% FS
Watts
VARs
VA
1.0% of reading
1.0% of reading
1.0% of reading
1.0% FS
1.0% FS
1.0% FS
PF-apparent
PF-displacement
Frequency
2.0% of reading
0.1 Hz
2.0% FS
2.0% FS
0.1% FS
THD-voltage
THD-current
Watthours
1.0% per ANSI C12.1
1.0% FS
VAR-hours
VA-hours
Ampere-demand
1.0% of reading
1.0% of reading
Watt-demand
VAR-demand
VA-demand
1.0% FS
Revenue accuracy
1.0% per ANSI C12.1
Interharmonics
Volts
Current
Power
Power factor
Frequency
THD
Demand values
Trend analysis
Event logging
Other Features
Storage
PG output relays
PG analog outputs
Analog inputs
Circuit breaker status
Synch-input kW utility Via communications only

Auxiliary voltage

kWh pulse initiator
Waveform display
Waveform capture
Display type
Communications Serial: INCOM, Modbus RTU

Serial: INCOM
Setup conguration Via conguration software
Dimensions
Refer to IL01219085E
25 to 70C
Refer to TD.17.07.T.E. (see Page 3.2-20)
25 to 70C
3.1-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series
007
Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000 Series
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
Series Display and Meter Base
General Description
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/
8000 Series monitors the critical
aspects of an electrical distribution
system. This premier power quality
metering instrument is simple to use,
powerful, scalable and highly exible.
8000 offers a new level of intuitive user
interface design, presenting critical
electrical distribution system
information in simple-to-navigate
and easy-to-understand information
architecture. The Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000 Graphic Display
visualizes the information from up to
16 meter modules. The embedded
Web server displays complex power
quality data using standard Internet
browsers and allows for device
conguration from the browser.
Both the local graphic display and the
embedded Web server present real
time, historical and event information
in a browser-style graphical format
to help the user interpret key circuit
information, such as:
Current loading
Voltage and power levels
Power factor
energy usage
I/O status
Power quality measurements
Harmonic plots
Disturbance and transient
waveforms
ITIC disturbance summary screen
8000 Series Graphic Display uses a
simple twist and click navigation
control dial to easily navigate the
menus and drill down into increasing
levels of important detail. A back
key enhances the browser-like
navigation of the graphic display.
The Web server provides the energy
and demand readings required to help
manage the cost of energy. It also
provides critical information regard-
ing power quality, such as harmonic
distortion, icker, crest factor, K-Factor
and more.
Note: Features and functionality may vary
depending on the meter model and options
being used. Review the Features and
Benets chart in Table 3.1-2 for details.
Application Description
Identify Power Quality Problems to Help:
Identify harmonics, sags, swells
and transients damaging or
disrupting sensitive, mission-
critical IT equipment
Boost IT equipments service life
to the maximum
Analyze sequence of events up to
1 millisecond time resolution
Protect motors from damage
Preserve the integrity of processes
and batches
Prevent blown capacitor bank fuses
Protect transformers and conductors
from overheating
Detect and Record High-Speed
Transients to Help:
Avoid equipment damage and
disruption
Identify equipment malfunction
Monitor Circuit Loading to Help:
Avoid overloads and nuisance
overload trips
Maximize equipment utilization
Manage emergency overloads
Manage Energy Utilization to Help:
Reduce peak demand charges
and power factor penalties
Identify excessive energy
consumption
Metered/Monitored Parameters
Note: See Table 3.1-2.
Volts: L-L, L-N, Avg. L-L, Avg. L-N, N-G
Phase neutral and ground currents
Power: real, reactive and apparent
Frequency
Power factor: apparent and
displacement
Energy
Demand
% THD
Minimum and maximum values
Harmonics
Flicker
Individual harmonics
Interharmonics
% TDD
ITIC events plot, duration, magnitude
Energy comparisons
Demand comparisons
Event calendar
Event timeline and sequence
Number of 9s of availability
Phasors
Sequence components
Crest factor
K-Factor
PQ index
Accuracy
Currents: 0.05% reading + 0.025%FS
Voltage: 0.1% reading + 0.025% FS
Energy, and demand power:
0.2% in accordance with ANSI C12.20
Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Power factor:
0.10% at Unity PF
0.30% at 0.5 PF
3.1-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
008
Communications
Multiple communications ports including:
Standard
RS-485 remote display port
RS-485 Modbus RTU Slave port
RJ-45 10/100Base-T Local Conguration
Port (local browser connection)
Optional
Selectable 100FX or 10/100Base-T
Ethernet network port
RS-485 Modbus RTU Selectable
Master/Slave port
Graphic Display
Note: Display ports restrict access to up
to 16 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
meter modules located on the display
RS-485 network.
RS-485 meter display network port
RJ-45 10/100Base-T for access to
Local Display Power Xpert network
Modbus RTU
Modbus TCP
Ethernet TCP/IP
HTML
NTP (Network Time Protocol)
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol)
COMTRADE
Figure 3.1-1. RS-485 Network
1. When using Modbus RTU over an
RS-485 communications network,
the data rate, data protocol (data
bit, stop bit and parity) and wiring
topology (two-wire or four-wire)
must be the same for each of
the devices.
2. Connections should be made
using communication/control
shielded cable equivalent to
Belden cable p/n 9463.
Figure 3.1-2. Ethernet Network
1. Optional Ethernet Communica-
tions Card must be ordered with
the meter.
2. Available Ethernet connections
are: 10Base-T and ST ber.
Power Xpert Meter in
Modbus RTU Slave Mode
PLC
Modbus Master
eolr
Power Xpert Meter Standard Web Browser
Power Xpert
Ethernet Switch
Two-Piece Design
meter module
Graphic Display 320 x 240 pixel
backlight LCD remote graphics
display (supports up to 16 Power
Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
meter modules)
Display/Meter Mounting Options
Remotely mount the display up to
2000 ft (1210m) away from 1 to 16
Power Xpert Meter modules
Mount the display and Power Xpert
Meter module on opposite sides of a
panel. 15 additional meter bases can
be remotely mounted
Meter Base Unit Characteristics
including optional wall mounting
brackets
NEMA rating: NEMA 1, IP3
Display Unit Characteristics
Depth:
1.45 inches (36.8 mm) behind
panel surface
1.04 (26.3 mm) projection in
front of panel surface
NEMA rating: NEMA 12, IP42 front
of panel rating
Safety: EN61010-1, UL/cUL 61010-1
Accuracy: IEC/EN60687 0.2 class,
ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
EMC: FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
EN55011 Class A
Measurement Canada
approval pending
Immunity IEC 61326
CE Mark
3.1-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
009
Ease-of-UsePower Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000 Graphic Display
(Option)
8000 display features a large easy-to-
read white backlit graphic LCD. The
information presented by the display
is organized into an information
architecture that is easy-to-navigate
and organized for simplicity. Screen
navigation is accomplished using a
navigation control dial and a back
button. The user simply twists the
knob on the navigation control dial to
move between menu selections and
drill down links on the screen. When
the selection is highlighted, pressing
the dial makes the selection.
Information is displayed from a single
meter or an RS-485 daisychain of up to
16 meters. The display features a rich
set of screens including real-time data,
trend plots, waveform views and an
ITIC Plot. The graphic display allows
basic device setup and password
protected resets. An audible alarm
is available to annunciate
alarm conditions.
Embedded Web Server
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
embedded Web server offers Eaton
customers a new level of accessibility
to the critical information required to
manage their electrical distribution
system. The Web server includes
real-time circuit information in both
numeric and graphical visual formats
to help monitor circuit parameters such
as current loading, voltage and power
levels, power factor, THD, Flicker and
more. The Web server also provides
energy and demand readings with
graphic usage plots to help analyze
energy usage patterns. Energy
readings include kWh, kVARh,
delivered and received and kVAh
with time of use and RTP displays.
The interval energy usage plot
includes the ability to do week-to-
week and month-to-month energy
consumption graphical comparisons
for benchmarking purposes.
Both the Power Xpert Meter 4000/
6000/8000 embedded Web server
and the local graphic display support
graphical trend charts of key circuit
measurements such as current,
voltage, power and energy. The trend
chart supports a zoom feature that
allows the user to view data over a
short period of 16 hours up to 4 years.
The trend chart includes zoom in/out
buttons and a horizontal slider bar
control to manage scrolling forward
and backward through the data. Trend
charts of basic readings include
minimum, maximum and average
readings. Trend charts of interval by
interval energy data also display
peak demand.
Note: For remote access and networking
capabilities such as connecting to a LAN/
WAN, use the optional Communications
Expansion Card (CEC).
Sag/Swell/Transient Capture
and Recording
60 cycles of waveform are oversampled
at 4096 samples per cycle (Power Xpert
Meter 4000/6000), ltered through anti-
aliasing and recorded at 512 samples
per cycle and post event data. The
Power Xpert Meter 8000 samples at
a rate of 100,000 samples per cycle.
Embedded Web server supports
viewing of triggered waveforms one
channel at a time and includes the
ability to zoom and to scroll horizontally
using a slider bar.
The Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000
Series have precongured (600V and
below) trigger settings for sags, swells
and transients, and do not require
additional setup by the user. Wave-
forms are stored in non-volatile ash
memory using an industry standard
COMTRADE format. Waveforms
can be automatically sent out as
COMTRADE attachments to an e-mail
following an event, or can be retrieved
from an FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
directory structure in the Power Xpert
meter modules memory.
Historical Trend Logging
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
records historical data for graphical
viewing from the Local display or the
embedded Web server. Graphical
views of historical data support
pan and zoom. 145 standard metering
parameters are logged as part of the
standard meter functionality including
min./max. and average for each
parameter. The averages are calculated
over the interval period. The minimum
and maximum readings are based on
200 ms calculations.
Storage capacity for standard trend
plots includes all of the following
intervals:
Every 5 minutes for 48 hours (2 days)
Every 15 minutes for 192 hours
(8 days)
Every hour for 28 days (4 weeks)
Every 8 hours for 56 weeks
Every week for 44 months
Note: Trend plot data can be easily exported
to third-party applications, such as Microsoft
Excel in csv-le format.
In addition, metered parameters are
automatically stored on the built-in
FTP Servers, where they can be easily
copied and imported into third-party
applications for benchmarking and
analysis. Logs on the FTP Server
include the min./max. and average
for 145 standard metering parameters
at 5-minute intervals.
Storage capacity for trend data:
63 days of 5-minute interval trend
data. Capacity=18,144 intervals.
3.1-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
010
Energy Prole Data
8000 records Real and Reactive energy
forward, reverse, net and absolute
sum, as well as Apparent energy
(kVAH). Up to eight status inputs can
be congured as energy accumulators
for counting KYZ pulse inputs (option).
These readings are stored over a
congurable interval from 1 to
60 minutes, as well as in daily and
weekly totals.
With the optional LAN/WAN Ethernet
Communication Expansion Card, users
can easily congure the meters to
send periodic e-mails at user-dened
intervals of energy consumption and
power demand. E-mails contain
a summary of readings per rate
structures and also have the actual
measurements attached to the e-mails
body as a CSV le in a ZIP container.
In addition, metered parameters are
automatically stored on the built-in FTP
Server, where they can be easily copied
and imported into third-party applica-
tions for benchmarking and analysis.
Logs on the FTP Server include energy
consumption logs, one for every month
in CSV le format, trended measure-
ment logs also in CSV le format and
waveform captures in COMTRADE
le format.
Storage capacity for energy prole data:
62 days of 15 minute interval
energy and pulse interval data
(Fixed interval capacity = 5952
intervals. Congurable intervals
from 1 to 60 min)
372 days of 1 day accumulated
208 weeks of 1 week accumulated
Energy and Demand Comparisons
Energy and demand usage patterns can
be analyzed with the month-to-month,
week-to-week comparison chart built
into the meter. Raw data can be
exported with the Save Table option
to other applications, such as Excel,
for further analysis and graphing.
Power Xpert Meter Proler
Free Download
The Power Xpert Meter Proler is a
free energy-management software
download, compatible with the Power
Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000, allowing
a comparison of expected or baseline
energy consumption patterns to actual
usage, and agging areas of concern
using deviations from modeled energy
patterns. These deviations point to
targets as they hunt for energy
consumption offenders in their facility.
By applying pattern analysis
techniques and intelligently
using color and shape to convey
the results, the Power Xpert Meter
Proler provides the user an easy-to-
understand visualization of energy
usage, thus offering information for
proactive energy management.
Calendar Usage View
Features and Benets
Develops a baseline of energy
demand for management analysis
Easily identies periods of high
energy demand at-a-glance by day,
week and month
Allows for a daily, weekly, monthly
comparison of energy usage
compared to baseline
Allows for detailed comparison
of multi days energy usage
Offers multi views of energy usage
and baseline comparisons to quickly
identify anomalies
Daily Detailed Energy Usage View
Multi-Day Detail Comparison View
The Proler uses the previous 9 weeks
of data for the energy use baseline, but
you can manually add more values to
the baseline.
The Power Xpert Meter Proler is also
a predictor: It can predict what energy
consumption would be expected later
in a day. The Real-Time view generates
a baseline from the last two months
and makes a prediction of the future
load. The view represents the current
day (today), and shows three graphs:
the baseline for the day, the historical
data (up to present) and the predicted
future data. Instantaneous data is
retrieved and averaged to keep the
graphs up-to-date. The averaged
values are shown as shapes at the
current time: Instantaneous, 1-minute
average and 15-minute average.
In addition, users can add the data
from two different Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000s into one calendar
view. The proler will mathematically
combine the two loads into a totalized
view. It is also possible to change the
percentage contribution of each meter,
as well as subtract a portion of one
meter from another.
To download the tool, go to
www.eaton.com/pxm and click on
the link for the Power Xpert Meter
Proler. Registration will be required
to download.
3.1-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
011
Eaton Power Xpert Energy
ViewerFree Download
The Power Xpert Energy Viewer (PXEV)
provides the means to develop an
energy usage baseline for energy
management programs, comparing
interval logged data points. It is a free
Web download for compatible Eaton
product home pages. This tool allows
easy interpretation of the data collected
by compatible devices via graphical
charts, graphs and reports without
having to export the available .csv le
into Microsoft
Excel
or another tool.
See Page 3.1-31 for more information.
Comparison Summary
Event Triggers
8000 supports ve types of
congurable event triggers:
Out of limits (4000/6000/8000)
Demand overload (4000/6000/8000)
Sub-cycle disturbance
(4000/6000/8000)
ITIC (6000/8000)
Fast transient (8000)
These triggers permit pickup, reset
and pickup delay to be congured
by the user. When a trigger occurs,
actions include Performance Monitoring
(#9s analysis), Capturing Waveform,
Capture Parameters, Send E-mail and
Operate a Relay Output. The Graphic
Display ashes an LED to annunciate
the alarm condition. An audible alarm
is also available.
Trigger options include:
Out of limits: over 100 triggers
Demand overload: 10 triggers
ITIC: eight triggers
Fast transient: dV/dT and absolute
per phase
Sub-cycle disturbancedV/dT
and absolute
Event Logging
8000 local graphic display or the
embedded Web server both allow the
user to view a list of triggered events
along with any captured parameters,
event details, and triggered wave-
forms. In addition, a separate event
log includes a variety of activities
including acknowledged triggers,
new min. and max. events, and system
operations such as resets. The size
of the event log is virtually unlimited
based only on the memory
option selected.
E-mail Notication
With the optional LAN/WAN Ethernet
Communication Expansion Card
attached to the Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000, the users can easily
congure the meters to send periodic
e-mails at user-dened intervals for
energy consumption and power
demand. E-mails contain a summary
of readings per rate structures and
also have the actual measurements
attached to the e-mails body as a CSV
le in a ZIP container. Prompt alarm
e-mails can also be sent for any event
condition either standard in the meter
or ones set up by the user based on
thresholds, dV/dt triggers or IO status
changes with the optional IO Card.
Alarm e-mails can be congured to
have the COMTRADE waveform
capture attached to the e-mails body.
Periodic E-mail Message
ITIC Analysis Plot
The Power Xpert Meter graphic
display (option) and Web server
(option) include a graphic representa-
tion of the ITIC plot (Power Xpert
Meter 6000/8000) with counts of
disturbances and transients that
have occurred. The ITIC plot organizes
events into eight distinct disturbance
zones corresponding to severity and
a 9th zone for transients. A pass/fail
count is displayed to indicate how
many events are outside the ITIC
limits. Clicking on any counter in the
ITIC Web page will link the user to the
event view and display all triggered
events in the selected zone. This
makes it simple to view disturbance
waveforms associated with the
ITIC plot.
A separate ITIC graph is available to
review individual ITIC events. This
graph will show the user the event hit
position on the graph and the event
duration and magnitude.
Inputs and Outputs
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 is
available with an optional digital I/O
card that includes:
Eight digital inputsself sourced
24 Vdc
Three relay outputs5A max.
continuous, 240 Vac max.,
30 Vdc max.
Two solid-state outputs80 mA
max. continuous, 30 Vdc max.
Each of the eight inputs are interrupt
driven, allowing for 1 ms accuracy
of digital events time stamps
(1 ms accuracy requires local NTP
TimeServer). Inputs can also be
congured for demand synch, and
pulse counting. Inputs selected for
pulse counting can be scaled. Interval
by interval pulse recordings are
maintained in prole memory and
can be displayed graphically.
Outputs can be used for KYZ, or
alarm annunciation.
3.1-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
012
Ratings
Application to 500 kV, no PTs to 600V
CT ratios selectable from standard
120/600 Vac line
CT inputs accept 5A secondary
Power supply: standard 120/240 Vac
or 110/250 Vdc
Storage Capacity
Table 3.1-1. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Estimated Memory and Storage Capacity with 2/4/8 GB Memory Capacity
The typical and severe power quality event occurrences are estimates and may vary depending on the electrical environment.
Memory is not allocated by event category; memory is used rst come, rst served.
Model Memory Event File Size
(KB)
Occurrence
Per Month
Memory
Usage (MB)
Months of Capacity
with 8 GB Memory
Typical Severe Typical Severe Typical Severe

PXM4000 2 GB Subcycle disturbance 1260 10 60 12.3 73.8 166 28
PXM6000 4 GB ITIC event 1260 5 20 6.2 24.6 666 166
Subcycle disturbance 1260 10 60 12.3 73.8 333 55
ITIC + subcycle disturbance Total---> 15 80 18.5 98.4 222 42
PXM8000 8 GB ITIC event 1260 5 20 6.2 24.6 1332 333
Subcycle disturbance 1260 10 60 12.3 73.8 666 111
Transients 2048 3 30 6.0 60.0 1365 137
ITIC + subcycle disturbance + transients Total---> 18 110 24.5 158.4 335 52
3.1-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
013
Power Xpert Meter 4000
Harmonics
Disturbance capture
Low frequency transient detection
and capture
Standard power quality index
2 GB data logging
Harmonics, including individual
harmonics
Flicker calculations
ITIC performance curve
Event calendar view
Events timeline view
Sequence of events waveform plot
Enhanced power quality index
4 GB data logging
Impulsive transient capture at 6 MHz
100,000 samples per cycle
Premium power quality index
8 GB data logging
Table 3.1-2. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000Features and Benets
Delta-Sigma A/D oversampling rate.

Note: These specications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options
installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options, rmware version and
product model. Please refer to the technical data sheet and user manual for detailed specications.
Feature Power Xpert Meter Benet
4000 6000 8000
General
Embedded Web server Use a standard Web browser to monitor and manage the meter
over the network, Internet.
TOU metering support Time of usage can be set up to support four different schedules.
Firmware ash update support Enables you to ash the meter with the latest rmware updates.
Self-learning capability
(characterizes normal per circuit)
The meter can automatically adjust to the environment and alarm
only when real events occur.
Power, Energy and Demand
Voltage, current: per phase minimum, maximum, average,
trend graph analysis, export, print
Review voltage and current trends, export, print and analyze
parameters right on the meter or external software.
Energy and demand plot comparisons month-to-month,
week-to-week
Plot two months or two weeks for vivid energy or demand
comparison.
Power: power factor, apparent, real, reactive, frequency Review power usage and power factor and avoid potential
PF penalties.
Energy, demand: forward, reverse, net, sum, TOU, prole,
previous month comparison, graph analysis, export, print
Keep track of your energy usage, compare time of usage
and usage against previous month, identify peaks to conserve
energy usage.
Power Quality Analysis
Statistical analysis (minimum, maximum, average) Review statistical trends, identify past and future problem areas.
Sag and swell monitoring, management and recording Capture electrical sags and swells and analyze the waveforms.
Symmetrical components: zero, negative, positive Analyze possibly unbalanced three-phase power systems.
Low frequency transient detection and capture Capture lower frequency transient waveforms for retrospective
analysis or e-mailing.
Sampling rate, maximum samples/cycle 4096
4096
100,000 Extremely high sampling rate will effectively capture

impulsive transients.
Number of Nines uptime data (e.g., 6 nines=99.9999%) Review uptime availability per cent.
K-factor Review the ratio of eddy current losses, e.g., when driving
non-linear and linear loads.
Crest factor Review the peak-to-average ratio of the waveform.
Security
Secure 5 level user access privileges Dene appropriate security access level per user.
3.1-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
014
Table 3.1-2. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000Features and Benets (Continued)
When used with third-party device and I/O option.

4000 6000 8000
Communications and I/O
Modbus TCP Easy integration with standard protocol to power management
and other software.
Modbus RTU Integrate meters to existing Modbus networks, daisy chain several
(116) meters together.
HTML Communicate to the meter over the Internet via standard Web
browser.
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Communicate with the meter via Simple Network Protocol; hook to
existing NMS system.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) Send e-mail messages via standard Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) Access, copy, paste, cut waveform capture les on the meter with
an FTP Client.
NTP (Network Time Protocol) Network Time Protocol support enables the meter to synchronize
time over the network up to the 1 millisecond resolution.
COMTRADE, open IEEE standard le format for
waveform capture export
Import waveform captures in standard IEEE (C37.111-1999)
COMTRADE le format to third-party software.
Trend measurements CSV le export Easily export trend measurements to third-party applications, e.g.,
Microsoft Excel in standard CSV le format.
I/O (eight digital inputs, three relay outputs,
two solid-state KYZ outputs)
The Power Xpert Meter I/O Card is extremely exible and can be
used in a large variety of different applications. Digital inputs and
relay outputs can be programmed to interact during various
conditions dened by the user. Various third-party devices, such as
alarm, pulse meters, trip units, sensors can be easily integrated to
the Power Xpert Meter. Triggers and events can be tied to the
meters standard functions such as, e.g., e-mail, logs and trends.
Time Synchronization
NTP time synchronization up to 1 millisecond accuracy Network Time Protocol support enables the meter to synchronize
time over the network up to the 1 millisecond resolution
GPS time synchronization up to 1 millisecond accuracy
The GPS option allows the meter to synchronize time over the GPS
satellite positioning system up to the 1 millisecond resolution
Logs
Trend logging Log trend information for easy statistical analysis.
Load prole Review the load prole graph to get a better understanding of
your electrical load versus time.
Event logging Log events for retrospective event analysis.
Memory and Storage
Standard memory, GB 2 4 8 Store large amounts of waveform captures and events for
historical analysis.
Harmonics
Harmonic levels 127 127 127 Provides extremely fast, high resolution D/A conversion.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Review the total harmonic distortion level directly on the meter.
Delta-Sigma D/A conversion technology Provides extremely fast, high resolution D/A conversion.
Harmonics over-sampling (4096 samples per cycle) Over-sampling enables the usage of Anti-Aliasing technology,
increasing accuracy.
Anti-alias ltering Technology to remove out-of-band signal components resulting
in more accurate data.
Individual harmonics Review individual harmonic levels directly on the meter.
Total Demand Distortion (TDD) Identify harmful harmonics in, e.g., lightly loaded variable-speed
drive environments where THD may be high but not relative.
Interharmonics Interharmonics allow you to see what is going on between the
integer multiples of the fundamental. Zoom in on the harmonics
trend graph and review frequency content every 5 Hz instead of
every 60 Hz.
3.1-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
015
Table 3.1-2. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000Features and Benets (Continued)
4000 6000 8000
Highlights
Subcycle disturbance capturing Capture fast voltage changes/low frequency transient
(e.g., capacitor switching transient).
dV/dt triggers for subcycle oscillatory transients Detect and record a large magnitude oscillation transient
resulting in equipment damage.
Absolute threshold and dV/dt triggering Detect and record if a surge suppressor is necessary.
Power quality indexstandard
(includes dv/dt count, %TDDi and %THDv)
Complex power quality data put into simple graphic format.
Power quality indexenhanced (includes standard
index plus Sag level, swell level and icker)
Complex power quality data put into simple graphic format
(includes ITIC events and icker calculations).
Flicker calculations Detect and quantify low frequency rms voltage variations
causing incandescent lighting icker.
Automatic trigger setting Trigger thresholds are automatically set according to ITIC
(CBEMA) standard, no need to gure this out by yourself.
Automatic event severity analysis Automatically analyze the severity of the event with the ITIC
(CBEMA) performance curve plot, see where the event actually hit.
Event severity counters An ITIC (CBEMA) event counter keeps track of the number
of all sags, swells and transients.
ITIC (Information Technology Industry Council), previously
CBEMA performance curve
ITIC (Information Technology Industry Council), previously
CBEMA performance curve for easy power problem evaluation.
Custom ITIC (CBEMA) plot with individual event magnitude
and duration
Review custom ITIC (CBEMA) plots of individual events
showing you the actual magnitude, duration and hit are in
a simple graphical representation.
Event calendar view The Events Timeline calendar view provides instant insight to the
frequency of power events and helps detect reoccurring problems.
Events timeline view View and understand the sequence of events that have
occurred during a period of time.
Sequence of events and events plot on waveform Plot color-coded events on a captured waveform to gain
insight into the sequence of events cycle per cycle.
Power quality indexpremium (includes enhanced
index plus counts of impulsive transients)
Complex power quality data put into simple graphic format
(includes ITIC events and icker calculations).
High-Speed Transient Capture and Detection
6 MHz capture of impulsive transients Capture impulsive transients by taking six samples every
millionth of a second.
Transient capture duration: ~20 ms/6M Hz ~120 ms/1 MHz Record and analyze transients during a longer timeframe.
Waveform recorded at 100,000 samples per cycle High-speed ensures impulsive transients are correctly
captured (fast rise time).
Three-phase voltage and neutral-to-ground fast
transient capture
Capture impulsive transients on all four channels.
3.1-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
016
Graphic Display (Option) Features
A menu-driven graphical display
with information organized into a
user-friendly information architecture.
The Homepage (see below) offers:
Graphical level indicator based on
a statistical analysis for three-phase
line-to-line and line-to-neutral
voltage and per phase currents
to quickly indicate out of normal
readings
Large easy-to-read average L-L
voltage average phase currents
and system frequency can be
highlighted and selected using
the navigation control dial to drill
down for additional detail
Menu selections for meter, power,
quality, events and setup are shown
for ease of navigation into display for
more detail, or basic device setup
Homepage
Highlighting a eld such as the
avg. current value and pressing the
navigation control dial brings up a
detail screen like the one below.
Current Summary
Highlighting an individual reading
on the detail summary level screen
and selecting it drills down to a level
including links to min./max., historical
trend plots, triggers, harmonic spectral
data, and waveform viewing.
Selecting the trend plot for a given
parameter displays a historical graph
of the selected parameter over the last
16 hours. The zoom buttons change
the time scale to one of several data
views based on historical averages
with min./max. The Pan button allows
scrolling within the selected view.
Trend Plot
Waveforms can be displayed for
currents and voltages. The waveforms
can be viewed on demand for steady-
state conditions. Triggered waveforms
can also be displayed to view sag/
swell or transient data.
Waveform Viewer
Harmonic Spectrum
The harmonic spectral plot displays
both harmonics and interharmonics
up to the 85th order. A detailed table
also includes individual magnitudes
and angles of current and voltage
harmonics, as well as a harmonic
power calculation at each frequency.
Ethernet Settings
Ethernet and other settings can be
input or veried via the Power Xpert
LCD Display.
Note: Some of the other settings are
specic only to the Web Browser GUI.
ITIC Plot (Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000)
The Power Xpert Meter classies
disturbances and summarizes the
results graphically using the ITIC plot.
The number of ITIC sags and swells
are indicated for each of nine severity
levels. A pass/fail summary is shown
to indicate how many events are
outside the ITIC pass zone.
3.1-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
017
Power Xpert Meter
Graphic Display (Option) Screens
Meter Top Level Screen
V-LL avg, V-LN avg, IA, IB, IC, Iavg, Freq.
Meter Detail Screens
Per phase detail L-L, L-N, Symmetrical
Comp, Aux. Channels, Min./Max. with
date/time of occurrence, Trend Plots,
Triggers, Phasors.
Power Top Level Screen
Three-Phase Power Factor, kWHr,
kWd, Real-Time kW, kVAR, kVA,
Load Prole Link.
Power Detail Screens
Per phase detail, kVA, kVAR, kW, Min./
Max. with date/time of occurrence,
Trend Plots, Triggers.
Quality Top Level Screen
10 min. and 24 hr. PQIndex, THDI,
THDV, K-Factor, Crest Factor, Flicker
Pst, %9s of Reliability.
Quality Detail Screens
Per phase detail L-L, L-N,V aux,
Odd, Even, Interharmonics, Present,
Min/Max, Trend Plots, Harmonic
spectrum plots, waveform plots.
Events Top Level Screen
Active/Acknowledged Event list, Trig-
ger List, System Log, ITIC Curve Link.
Event Detail Screens
Event List, Condition, Acknowledge
Button, Trigger Date/Time, Trigger
description.
Setup Top Level Screen
View setup, Edit setup, Login, Logout.
Setup Detail Screens
Quick Setup, Trigger setup,
Detail setting.
Web Browser Views
Web Browser Homepage (Note: 4000
does not include icker, ITIC)
embedded Web server offers Eaton
customers a new level of accessibility
to the critical information required to
manage the electrical distribution
system. The embedded Web server
includes real time circuit information
in both numeric and graphical formats
to help monitor circuit parameters
such as current loading, voltage and
power levels, power factor.
The Web server also provides the
energy and demand readings required
to help manage the cost of energy.
Readings include kWh, kVARh,
delivered and received and kVAh with
time-of-use and separate status input
controlled energy accumulation to
account for energy during special times
such as rate alert periods or stand-by
generator times of operation.
The Web server also includes critical
information regarding Power Quality
such as harmonic distortion, icker
(Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000), crest
factor, K-Factor and more.
Steady-State Waveform
The Web server allows the user
to view waveforms of the voltage
and current to spot power quality
problems such as notching.
Events Timeline
(Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000)
View and understand the sequence
of events that have occurred during a
period of time. Plot color-coded events
on captured waveforms to gain insight
into the sequence of events from
one single cycle to the next one. This
provides the user an excellent vantage
point to review and compare multiple
events at an unprecedented resolution.
Harmonic Spectral Plot
both harmonics and interharmonics
up to the 85th order. A detailed table
also includes individual magnitudes
and angles of current and voltage
harmonics, as well as a harmonic
power calculation at each frequency.
Even, odd and total THD are displayed
for diagnostic purposes. In addition,
the Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000
provides interharmonics, which
allow users to see what is going on
between the integer multiples of
the fundamental.
3.1-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
018

Historical Trend Plot
Graphical Trending of Data
8000 embedded Web server supports
graphical trend charts of key circuit
measurements such as current,
voltage, power and energy. The trend
chart supports a zoom feature that
allows the user to view data over a
short period of 16 hours or a longer
period of 48 months. The trend chart
has a horizontal slider bar control to
manage scrolling forward and back-
ward through the data. Trend charts
of basic readings include minimum,
maximum and average readings.
Trend charts of energy data also
display demand values.
Energy Comparison
Energy usage patterns can be effort-
lessly analyzed with the month-to-
month, week-to-week comparison
chart. Raw data can be easily exported
with the Save Table option to other
applications such as Excel for further
analysis or graphing (rmware
version 12.x.x and higher only).
Note: All data logging for trend plotting is
automatically precongured in the Power
Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000. In addition,
the 6000 and 8000 Series Meters have
sag, swell and transient triggers built-in
according to the ITIC (CBEMA) standard.
Demand Comparison
Demand comparison compares power
consumption day-to-day, month-to-
month or week-to-week. Power Xpert
Meters can set to measure demand at
1 to 60 minute intervals. Both sliding
and xed interval windows are
supported for maximum exibility.
Disturbance Recording
Sag/Swell Recording
60 cycles of waveform are recorded
at 256 samples per cycle including
30 cycles of pre and post trigger data.
8000 embedded Web server supports
viewing of triggered waveforms one
channel at a time including the ability
to zoom and to scroll horizontally
using a slider bar. Waveforms are
stored in Power Xpert Meter 4000/
6000/8000 non-volatile ash memory
using an industry standard Comtrade
format. Waveforms can be automati-
cally sent out by e-mail following an
event, or can be retrieved from an
FTP directory structure in the meter
modules memory.
ITIC Analysis Plot (Power Xpert 6000/8000)
The ITIC Web page includes counters to
track the occurrence of disturbances and
a pass/fail summary. In addition, select-
ing any disturbance counter links to a
detailed event view of the disturbances
in that ITIC category. Disturbance wave-
forms can be viewed from the browser.
Events Calendar
(Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000)
The Events Timeline calendar view
provides instant insight to the
frequency of power events and
helps detect reoccurring problems.
Color-coded events can be ltered
to detect specic issues.
Web Server Device Conguration
Special software is not required to
congure a Power Xpert Meter 4000/
6000/8000. The embedded Web server
includes comprehensive device
setup capability.
3.1-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
019
PQ Index
Figure 3.1-3. PQ Index
A statistical analysis comparing the
last 10 minute and 24 hour periods
Power Quality to the historical norm
for the circuit.
The PQ Index score results in a
Power Quality rating of Normal,
Caution and Alert for the period.
Flicker (EN61000-4-15; Power Xpert
Meter 6000/8000)
Figure 3.1-4. Flicker
Flicker values for Perceptibility,
PST and PLT are calculated based
on EN61000-4-15 guidelines.
Power at a Glance
Figure 3.1-5. Power at a Glance
Easily Upgrade Your Power Xpert
Meter 4000 to a 6000
Eaton understands that our customers
needs change over time. Thats why
weve developed meters that can grow
with you. Once a Power Xpert Meter
4000 is purchased, you have the
ability to upgrade to a Power Xpert
Meter 6000, with no intervention from
Eaton, when needed. All the features
of the Power Xpert Meter 4000 that
you have been using and depend on
remain, however, once updated, all the
additional features of the Power Xpert
Meter 6000 are available. The self-
upgrade is available on Eatons Web
site. Youll need a credit card, your
Power Xpert Meter 4000 serial number
and date code (you will be presented
with this information if you are using
the upgrade link directly from your
Power Xpert Meter) and your e-mail
address. Once you have completed
the purchase, we will send you your
new license key information via
e-mail that will allow you to complete
the upgrade.
High-speed triggering of wave-
forms based on events such as
breaker trips or static transfers
Demand interval timing taken
from a master utility meter end
of interval pulse
Status inputs are self sourced provid-
ing a nominal 24 Vdc (2030 Vdc)
across the circuit.
Names can be congured for each
input for ease of use.
Relay Outputs
The optional PXIO-B card includes
three 5 A form C relay outputs rated
for 240 Vac or 30 Vdc. These outputs
can be used for applications such as:
Alarm annunciation
KYZ pulse output
Alarm outputs can be driven from
triggers based on metering values.
Output modes include:
Normalrelay energized during
alarm condition
Latchedrelay energized by
event trigger, de-energized
by acknowledgement
Timedrelay energized by
event trigger, maintained for a
programmed interval
Auxiliary Voltage Option
The optional auxiliary voltage
selection allows for sensing of
another input voltage such as a
transformer or UPS and secondary
voltage from transformer or UPS
output. This option permits waveform
or harmonic comparisons across
these devices.
Discrete Contact Inputs
The optional PXIO-B expansion
card offers eight digital inputs that
are useful for a variety of applications
such as:
Status indication with time
stamping of transitions
(1 ms precision)
Pulse Counting of KYZ or other
utility pulses such as air, water
or gas
3.1-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
020
Communications Expansion
Card (CEC)
The optional CEC Card offers
two Ethernet connection options,
10/100Base-T and a ber-optic port
that can be used for the following
applications:
Monitoring, managing and congur-
ing the meter remotely using a
standard Web Browser interface
like Microsoft Internet Explorer
Alarm notications via e-mail, SMTP
Enabling access to the meters
FTP server (energy, trend and
waveform logs)
Providing Modbus TCP/IP or RTU
communications to BMS systems
Providing SNMP communications
to NMS systems
Synchronizing with an NTP server
for 1ms timestamping resolution
Asset management via SNMP to
Updating rmware on the meter
Figure 3.1-6. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Module Layout
I/O Card (option)
Digital inputs 1-8.
Solid-state outputs 1-2.
Relay outputs 1-3.

CT and Voltage Connections
CT input connections.
Standard three-phase voltage phase inputs.
Auxiliary channel voltage inputs (option).

Communication Expansion Card (LAN/WAN Ethernet Networking) (option)
100FX ST-type Ethernet (multi-mode).
10/100Base-T Ethernet.
RS-485 (two-wire w/shield)24V accessory power (Com 2).
RS-232 (Tx Rx) Modbus RTU (Com 3).

Standard Features
Local RJ-45 cong. port (non-networkable Ethernet).
RS-485 (two-wire w/shield) Modbus RTU (Com 1).
Meter mounting brackets.
Sealable mode switch cover.
Control power (100240 Vac and 110250 Vdc) (20%).
Display RS-485 network port (up to 15 meters)24V accessory power (Com 0).
Meter base address.
Com reset button.

3.1-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
021
Figure 3.1-7. Three-Phase Three-Wire Delta (Up to 600V)
Note: Based upon the voltage rating, you may need a control power transformer for the control power.
Figure 3.1-8. Three-Phase Three-Wire Delta (Above 600V)
Voltage Inputs
V1 V2 V3 V4 VR
Disconnect
Switch
Disconnect
Switch
Breaker
(+) L
() N
1
2
3
Control
Power
L3
L2
L1
L
o
a
d
L
i
n
e
Shorting
Block
Protective
Earth /
Chassis
Ground
Current Inputs
5 4 3 2 1
52 51 42 41 32 31 22 21 12 11
P
S
I
-
120/240 AC
110/250 DC
Voltage Inputs
V1 V2 V3 V4 VR
Disconnect
Switch
Disconnect
Switch
Breaker
(+) L
() N
1
2
3
L3
L2
L1
L
o
a
d
L
i
n
e
Shorting
Block
Protective
Earth /
Chassis
Ground
Current Inputs
5 4 3 2 1
52 51 42 41 32 31 22 21 12 11
P
S
I
-
Control
Power
120/240 AC
110/250 DC
3.1-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
022
Figure 3.1-9. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Multimeter Graphic Display (PXD-MMG)
Sold Separately, Supports up to 16 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Modules
Figure 3.1-10. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Module
Turn to
Highlight
BACK
Push to
Select
Hold in for
Help
PowerXpert EVENTS
DO NOT HIPOT / DIELECTRIC TEST

THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE
FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: 1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND
2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY
CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.

10/100 T
Li
nk
TX
D
R
X
DG3 -
Power Com 0
3
SH
1 2 3 4
SH C
O
M
24
+
DG2-
1 2
D
B
D
A
DG1-
Display Link 24 Vdc Input
Customer Satisfaction for Technical Support

www.eaton.com
1-800-809-2772 or 1-414-449-7100
E18555
G.O.#: XXXXXXXXXX
Catalog#: PX8054A1CB
Model#: PX8000
Serial#: 000042
Style#: 65D8054G010
Power Supply: 24 VDC (+/ -20%)
SELV, 8WMAX.
MADE IN CANADA
Date Code: C050131
Rev: 1
Oper Temp: -20 TO 60C
4.00 Ref.
(101.6)
3.00 Ref.
(76.2)
3.00 Ref.
(76.2)
1.45
(36.8)
1.50
(38.1)
5X #8 32 Thread
Thread Depth 0.31
7.22
(183.5)
7.80
(198.0)
9.02
(229.0)
0.57
(14.5)
7.22
(183.5)
7.76 Ref.
(197.1)
1.04
(26.3)
0.46
(11.6)
8.20 (208.3) 0.42 (10.7)
(8.6)
9.56 (242.8)
3.1-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
023
Power Xpert Meters Conguration and Wiring Examples
Figure 3.1-11. Display Link
Figure 3.1-12. Modbus RTU (RS-485)Non-Web Enabled
Figure 3.1-13. Web EnabledBrowser and Modbus TCP
Figure 3.1-14. Web EnabledAdvanced System Functionality
Figure 3.1-15. AccessoriesI/O Card (Option)
Figure 3.1-16. IT Conguration ExamplesAccessories
I/O Card (Option)
Display Link (RS-485)
Up to 16 Meters can be Daisy-Chained to a
Single Power Xpert Meter LCD Display
Up
to 16
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Master
Up
to 16
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Master
Up
to 16
Modbus TCP
Master
Web
Browser
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Modbus RTU
(RS-485) Master
Modbus TCP
Master
Web
Browser
Power Xpert
Software
Alarm
Flow Meter
(Pulse Count)
Eight programmable digital inputs
Two solid-state programmable outputs
Three relay programmable outputs
Trip and Sequence
of Events
Rack Monitoring
Open Door/Tamper Switch
Smoke Alarm
Alarm
Water Leak and
Vibration Sensors
Rack Monitoring
Open Door/
Tamper Switch
Eight programmable digital inputs
Two solid-state programmable outputs
Three relay programmable outputs
3.1-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
024
To order a Power Xpert Meter 4000/
6000/8000, the catalog number should
be determined using the chart shown
in Table 3.1-3. The chart illustrates how
to include the desired factory options
as part of a catalog number. Option
cards that are selected at time of order
entry will be installed at the factory.
Option cards are also eld installable
for eld upgrades.
If a display is required, it should be
ordered separately. The Multi-Meter
Graphic Display is capable of display-
ing data from an RS-485 daisychain of
up to 16 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/
8000 meter modules over a distance
of up to 2000 ft. Power Xpert meter
modules include panel mounting
brackets. The Multi-Meter Graphic
Display is designed to mount sepa-
rately. If back-to-back meter to display
panel mounting is desired, a mounting
bracket kit is available (PX-PMBA).
Example 1: PXM8251A1BB
(PXM 8000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr,
Com. Exp. and I/O Cards)
Example 2: PXM6251A1BA
(PXM 6000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr,
Com. Exp. Card)
Table 3.1-3. Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Meter Catalog Numbering System
Table 3.1-4. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Accessories
Applicable to PXM4000 Meters only. Upgrade package to be eld loaded by customer.

Provides enhanced PXM6000 functionality in an existing PXM4000 Meter, including ITIC
and calendar functions.
Note: Communication cable (standard Modbus RTU) is not included in the package for
meter module connection.
Description Catalog
Number
Digital I/O Card: eight digital input, two solid-state output, three relay output
Communication expansion card for LAN/WAN Ethernet networking:
100FX ber-optic, 10/100T, RS-485, RS-232
Graphic display module
PXMIO-B
PXMCE-B
PXD-MMG
Panel-mounting bracket assembly for back-to-back meter to graphic display mounting
Panel-mounting bracket assembly for retrotting a graphic display to an
IQ Analyzer cutout
Panel-mounting bracket assembly for reduced graphic display rear clearance
PX-PMBA
PX-PMBB
PX-PMBC
Power Xpert Meter 4000 to 6000 license upgrade key
PXM-4KUPG
PXM 8 0 5 1 A 1 B B
Model Series
4 = 4000 (standard
power quality), 2 GB
6 = 6000 (enhanced
power quality), 4 GB
8 = 8000 (premium PQ w/
transient capture), 8 GB
Power Supply Configuration
1 = Standard 100240 Vac or
110250 Vdc power supply
Card Slot 1 Configuration
1 = Standard communications module
with RS-485
A = No card option
B = Communication expansion card
for LAN/WAN Ethernet
networking w/10/100Base-T,
100F, RS-485, RS-232 Ports
A = No card option
B = I/O option card
(eight digital inputs,
two solid-state outputs,
three relay outputs)
Voltage Input Configuration
0 = Standard (V
1
, V
2
, V
3
, V
4
)
2 = Standard plus auxiliary
(V
6
, V
7
, V
8
)
Example 1: PXM8251A1BB (PXM 8000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr, Com. Exp. and I/O Cards)
Example 2: PXM6251A1BA (PXM 6000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr, Com. Exp. Card)
Technical Data
Environmental Conditions
Operating temperature:
Meter: 20 to +70C
Display: 20 to 60C operating
Storage temperature: 40 to 85C
Operating humidity:
595% condensing
Device weight: 7.1 lbsmeter
2.1 lbsdisplay
Meter and back of display are
pollution degree 2
Elevation to 6562 ft (2000m)
Current Inputs (Each Channel)
Conversion: 4096 samples per cycle
delta-sigma converter digitally ltered
down to 512 samples per cycle
CT Input: 4096 rms samples
per cycle delta-sigma converter
digitally ltered down to 512
samples per cycle for anti-aliasing
Burden: less than 10 milliohms
Overload withstand: 500A for
1 second, non-repeating
Range: 0.00520A continuous
Accuracy: 0.05% or reading plus
0.01% of full scale (from 50 milliamps
to 20A)
Voltage Inputs (Each Channel)
Conversion: 4096 rms samples
per cycle delta-sigma converter
digitally ltered down to 512
samples per cycle for anti-aliasing
PT input: 120500,000V primary
Input range: 600V L-L, 347 L-N
direct connect
Nominal full scale: 1000V rms
Input impedance: 2 mega ohms
Frequency Range
4763 Hz
Harmonic Response (Voltage, Current)
127th harmonic
Accuracy
IEC 687 0.2 Class
Discrete Inputs
Self sourced: 24 Vdc
Relay Output Contacts
5A maximum, 240 Vac maximum,
30 Vdc maximum
Lifetime: 1,000,000 no load operations
100,000 under rated voltage and load
Solid-State Outputs
Maximum load: 100 milliamps
Max. voltage: 30V (externally sourced)
Control Power Input
Input range AC: 100240 Vac (20%)
Frequency range: 4763 Hz
Input range DC: 110250 Vdc 20%
Burden 50 VA
Ride-through: 15s
3.1-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
025
Ethernet-Ready Power
Quality & Energy (PQ&E)
Power Xpert Meters
General Description
One or more Ethernet-ready PQ&E
Power Xpert Meters may be deployed
in various power distribution and
motor control applications.
Equipment
Options
Ethernet Expansion CardCEC
(recommended one per meter)
Local display (one per 16 meters)
Modbus RTU (RS-485) (standard)
Display link (RS-485) (standard)
Modbus TCP/IP (with CEC)
HTTP (with CEC)
FTP (with CEC)
SMTP (with CEC)
SNMP (with CEC)
XML/SOAP (with CEC)
Identify power quality problems,
view waveforms, monitor circuit
loading, and manage energy
use via standard Web browser
(PXM4000/6000/8000)
View ITIC plots, Enhanced Power
Quality Index (PQI), and event/
calendar view via Web browser
(PXM6000/8000)
Detect and record high-speed
transients (PXM8000)
(BMS)
HMI
Foreseer Software
Layout Diagrams
Figure 3.1-17. Power Xpert Meter Used in a Modbus RS-485 Network Application
Figure 3.1-18. Power Xpert Meter Used in an Ethernet Network Application
Modbus Master
Modbus RS-458 Network
eolr
Power Xpert
Software
Building
Management
System
Web
Browser
Network
Time Server
XML/SOAP Modbus TCP/IP HTTP NTP
Ethernet
Network
3.1-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series
026
Power Xpert Meter
2000 Series
General Description
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series
power quality instrument monitors the
most critical aspects of an electrical
distribution system. This premier
power quality metering instrument
uses the latest in advanced technology
to make it simple to use, powerful,
scalable and highly exible. The Power
Xpert Meter 2000 offers the same level
of intuitive user interface design as the
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000,
presenting critical electrical distribu-
tion system information in a simple
to navigate and easy-to-understand
information architecture.
The embedded Web server displays
comprehensive power quality data
using standard Internet browsers and
allows for device conguration from
the browser. The embedded Web
server presents real time, historical,
and event information in a browser-
style graphical format to help the user
interpret information such as current
loading, voltage and power levels,
power factor, energy usage, I/O status,
power quality measurements, as well
as harmonic plots. The embedded
Web server also offers a waveform
view to visualize steady-state harmonic
content that is critical for power
quality analysis. Expected at the end
of 2011 is the ability to record wave-
forms. Contact factory for availability.
manage the cost of energy.
and batches
Protect transformers and conductors
from overheating
overload trips
Maximize equipment utilization
Manage Energy Utilization to Help:
Reduce peak demand charges
and power factor penalties
consumption
Note: See Table 3.1-7.
Volts: L-L, L-N, Avg. L-L, Avg. L-N
Phase and neutral currents
Power: real, reactive and apparent
Frequency
Power factor: apparent
Energy: real, forward, reverse, sum
Demand: peak with date and time
% THD
Minimum and maximum values
Harmonics
Individual harmonics
Demand comparisons
Phasors
Accuracy
Note: Under typical operating conditions.
Currents: 0.1% reading
Voltage: 0.1% reading
Energy, and demand power:
0.2% in accordance with ANSI C12.20
Frequency: 0.03 hertz
Power factor: 0.2% reading
Communications
Multiple communications ports including:
Standard
10/100Base-T Ethernet network port
Modbus RTU
Modbus TCP
Ethernet TCP/IP
HTTP, HTTPS
NTP (Network Time Protocol)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol)
SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol) v1, v3
DNP 3.0
Power Xpert Meter 2000 with
integral display
Power Xpert Meter 2000 transducer
only (no display) meter module
NEMA rating: NEMA 12, IP42 front
of panel rating
Meter with Integral Display
Dimensions
Depth:
3.96 inches (100.5 mm) behind
panel surface
1.01 (25.6 mm) projection in
front of panel surface
UL/cUL Electrical and Electronic
Measuring and Test Equipment 22CZ
Accuracy: IEC/EN60687 0.2 class,
ANSI C62.41 Burst
CE Mark
3.1-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
027
Embedded Web Server
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 embed-
ded Web server offers Eaton customers
a new level of accessibility to the critical
information required to manage their
electrical distribution system. The Web
server includes real-time information
in both numeric and graphical visual
formats to help monitor parameters
such as current loading, voltage and
power levels, power factor, THD, and
more. The Web server also provides
energy and demand readings with
graphic usage plots to help analyze
energy usage patterns. Energy read-
ings include kWh, kVARh, delivered
and received and kVAh with time.
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 embed-
ded Web server supports graphical
trend charts of key measurements
such as current, voltage, power and
energy. The trend chart supports a
zoom feature that allows the user
to view data over predened ranges
from as little as 16 hours to as much
as 4 years. The trend chart includes
zoom in/out buttons and a horizontal
slider bar control to manage scrolling
forward and backward through the
data. Trend charts of basic readings
include minimum, maximum and
average readings. Trend charts of
interval by interval energy data also
display peak demand.
Waveform Display
60 cycles of waveform are sampled
at 400 samples per cycle. The Power
Xpert Meter 2000 embedded Web
server offers a view of a single-cycle
waveform to visualize steady-state
harmonic content. Waveforms are
presented via a Web browser. By
clicking refresh, the waveform is
updated to that period in time.
Waveform Recording
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 can record
waveforms at up to 512 samples per
cycle. Expected at the end of 2011.
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 records
historical data for graphical viewing
from the embedded Web server.
Graphical views of historical data
support pan and zoom. Over 100
standard metering parameters are
logged as part of the standard meter
functionality including min./max. and
average for each parameter. The
averages are calculated over the
interval period.
Energy Prole Data
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 records
Real and Reactive energy forward,
reverse, net and absolute sum, as
well as Apparent energy (kVAH).
These readings are stored on a xed
5 minute interval. Up to 4 status inputs
can be congured as energy accumu-
lators for counting KYZ pulse inputs.
Demand Comparisons
Demand usage patterns can be
analyzed with the month-to-month,
week-to-week comparison chart
built into the meter. Raw data can be
exported as a .csv le with the Save
Table option to other applications for
further analysis and graphing.
Event Triggers
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 has two
levels of congurable event triggers:
On-board meter limits (PXM 2260
and PXM 2270 only)
On-board gateway card limits
The on-board meter limits can be set
for any measured parameter, for up to
16 limits. If either of the 16 limits are
exceeded, an alarm condition will be
present and illuminate one of the LEDs
on the meter faceplate. The on-board
meter out of limits can also be used to
energize a relay output, if so equipped.
The on board gateway limits can
trigger an alarm off of any measured
parameter on any of the PXM 2000
model series. These triggers permit
pickup, reset and pickup delay to be
congured by the user.
Event Logging
The Power Xpert Meter 2000
embedded Web server allows the
user to view a list of triggered events.
In addition, a separate system log
records system operations such
as resets.
E-mail
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 contains
the ability to send e-mails based on
an event that has been triggered
or cleared along with the option to
send an event or data log le. The
Power Xpert Meter 2000 also has the
ability to send a congurable periodic
e-mail with meter information.
Inputs and Outputs
Power Xpert Meter 2000 is available
with a standard KYZ output. The
base meter also includes two
expansion slots for plug-in cards.
See Figure 3.1-19 on Page 3.1-23 for
details. The Power Xpert Meter 2000
embedded Web server card takes up
one of these option slots, leaving an
additional slot that can be populated
by one of the following I/O cards.
Two relay outputs/two status inputs
Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs
Four analog outputs 01 mA
Inputs can also be congured for
demand synch and pulse counting.
Inputs selected for pulse counting
can be scaled. Accumulated pulse
recordings are maintained in prole
memory. Outputs can be used for
alarm annunciation.
Ratings
Application to any PT ratio, no PTs
required to 600 Vac
CT ratios to any CT ratio
CT inputs available as 5 or 1A
secondary
Separate Source Control Power
Input:
90265 Vac or 100370 Vdc
Low voltage 1860 Vdc
Displayed Information
Monitored information is available
locally through the display, the
Web browser or system power
management software
True rms values through
40th harmonic
ANSI C12.20 Class 0.2% revenue
metering specication
3.1-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
028
Web Browser Views
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Web Browser
Power Xpert Meter 2000s embedded
Web server offers Eaton customers a
new level of accessibility to the critical
information required to manage the
electrical distribution system. The
embedded Web server includes real
time circuit information in both numeric
and graphical formats to help monitor
parameters such as current loading,
voltage and power levels and power
factor. The Web server also provides
the energy and demand readings
required to help manage the cost of
energy. Readings include kWh, kVARh,
delivered and received and kVAh.
The Web server also includes critical
information regarding Power Quality
such as harmonic distortion.
Real-Time Visualization of Harmonic Content
The Web server offers a waveform
view to visualize steady-state harmonic
content of the voltage and current to
spot power quality problems.
Harmonic Spectral Plot
harmonics up to the 40th order. A
detailed table also includes individual
magnitudes and angles of current and
voltage harmonics, at each frequency.
Individual and total THD are displayed
for diagnostic purposes.

Historical Trend Plot
Graphical Trending of Data
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 embedded
Web server supports graphical trend
charts of key circuit measurements such
as current, voltage, power and energy.
The trend chart supports a zoom feature
that allows the user to view data over
a short period of 16 hours or a longer
period of 48 months. The trend chart
has a horizontal slider bar control to
manage scrolling forward and back-
ward through the data. Trend charts
of basic readings include minimum,
maximum and average readings.
Trend charts of energy data also
display demand values.
Energy Demand Prole
Energy Managers can view load
prole data compared against the peak
demand. The plot allows comparison
of present and past months usage.
Web Server Device Conguration
Special software is not required
to congure a Power Xpert Meter
2000. The embedded Web server
includes a comprehensive device
conguration engine.
The optional I/O expansion cards
offers two or four digital inputs that
are useful for a variety of applications
such as:
Pulse Counting of KYZ or other utility
pulses such as air, water or gas
Demand interval timing taken
from a master utility meter end
of interval pulse
Names can be congured for each
input for ease of use.
3.1-23
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
029
Relay Outputs
The optional I/O card includes two 5A
Form C relay outputs rated for 240 Vac
or 30 Vdc or 4 Form A solid-state
outputs. These outputs can be used
for applications such as
Alarm annunciation
KYZ pulse output
Alarm outputs can be driven from
triggers based on metering values.
Analog Outputs
The optional IO card includes either
four 420 mA outputs or 01 mA
outputs. These outputs can be used
for applications such as:
Input to BMS or PLC systems
for tracking a measured meter
parameter
Standard Communications Card
The standard communications card
provides one Ethernet connection
and 10/100Base-T port (copper only)
that can be used for the following
applications:
Monitoring, managing and congur-
ing the meter remotely using a
standard Web Browser interface
Alarm notications via e-mail, SMTP
Providing Modbus TCP/IP or RTU
communications to BMS systems
Providing SNMP communications
to NMS systems
Synchronizing with an NTP server
Asset management
Updating rmware on the meter
Figure 3.1-19. PXM 2000 Rear View
Power supply inputs
System voltage inputs
NEMA 12 gasket
RS-485
KYZ out
Meter gateway card
I/O slot
3.1-24
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
030
Figure 3.1-20. Service: Wye or Delta, Four-Wire with No PTs, Two or Three CTs
Figure 3.1-21. Service: Delta, 3-Wire with No PTs, 2 CTs
GND
L (+)
N ()
VRef
A
B
C
HI
LO
Ic
HI
LO
Ib
HI
LO
Ia
A B C
A B C
Control
Power
Supply
N
N
GND
L (+)
N ()
VRef
A
B
x
HI
LO
Ic
HI
LO
Ib
HI
LO
Ia
A B C
A B C
Power
Supply
N
N
C
B A
C
B
A
90265 Vac
100370 Vdc
Optional 1860 Vdc
GND
L (+)
N ()
VRef
A
B
C
HI
LO
Ic
HI
LO
Ib
HI
LO
Ia
A B C
A B C
Control
Power
Supply
C
B A
or
C
B A
Not Connected to Meter
90265 Vac
100370 Vdc
Optional 1860 Vdc
3.1-25
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
031
Power Xpert Meters Conguration and Wiring Examples
Figure 3.1-22. Web EnabledAdvanced System Functionality
Figure 3.1-23. AccessoriesI/O Cards (Option)
Figure 3.1-24. IT Conguration ExamplesAccessories
I/O Cards (Option)
Modbus RTU
(RS-485)
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Master
Modbus TCP
Master
Web
Browser
Power Xpert
Software
Connections:
= Ethernet
= Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Alarm
Flow Meter
(Pulse Count)
Two relay programmable outputs/two programmable inputs
Four KYZ pulses/four programmable inputs
Four programmable analog outputs
Trip and Sequence
of Events
Rack Monitoring
Open Door/
Tamper Switch
Smoke Alarm
Alarm
Water Leak &
Vibration Sensors
Rack Monitoring
Open Door/
Tamper Switch
Two relay programmable outputs/two programmable inputs
Four KYZ pulses/two programmable inputs
Four programmable analog outputs
3.1-26
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
032
PXM 2000 Dimensions
Figure 3.1-25. PXM 2000 Display
Front View
Figure 3.1-26. PXM 2000 Meter/Display
Side View
Figure 3.1-27. PXM 2000 Transducer Only
Side View
Figure 3.1-28. PXM 2000 Rear View Figure 3.1-29. ANSI Mounting Panel Cutout Figure 3.1-30. DIN Mounting Cutout
4.85
(123.2)
4.85
(123.2)
5.02
(127.5)
0.95
(24.0)
3.25
(82.6)
0.08
(2.0)
0.77
(19.6)
4.85
(123.2)
0.91
(23.1)
3.25
(82.6)
0.77
(19.6)
3.54
(89.9)
3.54
(89.9)
4.0
(101.6)
3.38
(85.9)
1.69
(42.9)
4 x .02
(0.5)
3.62
(92.0)
3.62
(92.0)
3.1-27
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
033
To order a Power Xpert Meter 2000,
the catalog number should be
determined using the chart shown
in Table 3.1-5. The chart illustrates
how to include the desired factory
options as part of a catalog number.
Option cards that are selected at time
of order entry will be installed at the
factory. Option cards are also eld
installable for future upgrades.
Power Xpert Meter modules include
panel mounting brackets.
Example 1: PXM2270MA65145
(PXM 2270 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A,
90265 Vac/Vdc W/4AO).
Example 2: PXM2250MA65105
(PXM 2250 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A,
90265 Vac/Vdc).
Table 3.1-5. Power Xpert Meter 2000 Catalog Numbering System
Refer to Table 3.1-7 for model-specic features.
Expected at the end of 2011. Contact factory for availability.

Table 3.1-6. Power Xpert 2000 Meter Accessories
Description Catalog
Number
Panel-mounting bracket assembly for retrotting a PXM 2000 to an
IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ data cutout
IQ250-PMAK
PXM 2000 gateway card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000 PXM2000-GCK
PXM 2250 M A 6 5 1 0 5
Frequency
5 = 50 Hz system
6 = 60 Hz system
I/O Slot 2
5 = Gateway card
I/O Slot 1
0 = None
1 = Two relay outputs/two status inputs
2 = Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs
3 = Four analog outputs: 01 mA
4 = Four analog outputs: 420 mA
Model Series
2250 = Energy meter

2260 = Power quality meter
2270 = Power quality plus meter
2280 = Power quality plus with
up to 64 samples/cycle
waveform recording
meter
2290 = Power quality plus with

up to 512 samples/cycle
recording meter
Example 1: PXM2270MA65145 (PXM 2270 meter/display 60 Hz, 5A, 90265 Vac/Vdc W/4AO)
Example 2: PXM2250MA65105 (PXM 2250 meter/display 60 Hz, 5A, 90265 Vac/Vdc)
Current Input
1 = 1A secondary
5 = 5A secondary
Power Supply
1 = 90265 Vac/Vdc
4 = 2460 Vdc
Meter Type
M = Meter (with integral
display)
T = Transducer only
(no display)
3.1-28
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
034
Technical Data
PXM 2000 Series Electronic Power
Meter Technical Information
Current Inputs
Class 10: 5A nominal, 10A maximum
Class 2: 1A nominal, 2A maximum
Fault current withstand:
100A for 10 seconds
300A for 3 seconds
500A for 1 second
Continuous current withstand:
20A for screw terminated or pass-
through connections
Programmable current: full scale
to any CT ratio
Burden: 0.005 VA per phase
maximum at 11A
Pickup current: 0.1% of nominal
Class 10: 5 mA
Class 2: 1 mA
Connections:
Pass-through wire gauge
dimension: 0.177 inches (4.5 mm)
Quick connect: 0.25-inch
(6.35 mm) male tab
Voltage Inputs
Range:
Line-to-neutral 20576 Vac
Line-to-line 0721 Vac
Programmable voltage range:
full scale to any PT ratio
Supported systems:
3 element wye, 2.5 element wye
2 element delta, four-wire delta
systems
Input impedance: 1 meg ohm/phase
Burden: 0.36 VA/phase maximum
at 600V; 0.014 VA at 120V
Connection: 7-pin 0.400-inch
pluggable terminal block,
AWG #1226 (0.1293.31 mm
2
)
Isolation
All inputs and outputs are galvani-
cally isolated to 2500V
Environmental Ratings
Operating temperature: 20 to 70C
Operating humidity: to 95% RH
noncondensing
Faceplate rating:
NEMA 12
Mounting gasket included
Sensing Method
Voltage, current: true rms
Power: sampling at over 400
samples per cycle on all channels
Harmonics Resolution: 40th order
Update Rate
Watts, VAR and VA: 100 msec at
60 Hz
All other parameters: 1 second
at 60 Hz
Power Supply
AC/DC voltage option: 90265 Vac
at 50/60 Hz or 100370 Vdc,
universal AC/DC supply
Low voltage DC voltage option:
1860 Vdc
Burden: 10 VA maximum
Serial Communications Format
Connection type: RS-485
(through back plate)
Com port baud rate: 9600
57,600 bauds
Com port address: 01247
Data format: 8-bit, no parity
Protocols: Modbus ASCII, RTU
or DNP 3.0
Network Communications Format
Connection type: RJ-45
10/100Base-T Ethernet Network port
Protocols: Ethernet TCP/IP,
Modbus TCP, HTTP, HTTPS, NTP,
SMTP, SNMP
KYZ Pulse
Contacts: 1 Form A
On resistance, maximum: 35 ohms
Peak switching voltage: 350 Vdc
Continuous load current: 120 mA
Peak load current: 350 mA (10 ms)
Off-state leakage current at 350 Vdc:
1 uA
Opto-isolation: 3750 Vac
Dimensions and Shipping
Weight: 2 lbs (0.91 kg)
Basic unit: H 5.00 x W 4.90 x L 5.00
inches (H 127.0 x W 124.5 x
L 127.0 mm)
PXM 2000 Series: mounts in
3.62-inch (92.0 mm) DIN and
ANSI C39.1 round cut-outs
Shipping container dimensions:
6.00-inch (152.4 mm) cube
Tolerance: 0.1 inches (2.54 mm).
Compliance
IEC/EN60687: 0.2% accuracy
ANSI C12.20: 0.2% accuracy
ANSI C62.41: burst
UL/cUL: Electrical & Electronic
Measuring & Test Equipment 22CZ
CE
3.1-29
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
035
Measures basic meter parameters
256 MB for data logging
Ethernet
On-board gateway card
limits/alarms
Features of PXM 2250 plus:
Harmonics
On-board meter hardware limits to
activate optional relay outputs
Visual indication of limits exceeded
at meter face
Features of PXM 2260 plus:
Harmonics, including individual
Waveform view to visualize
steady-state harmonic content
Expected at the end of 2011. Contact
factory for availability.
Features of 2270 plus:
Up to 64 samples per cycle for
waveform recording
Features of 2270 plus:
Up to 512 samples per cycle for
waveform recording
Table 3.1-7. Power Xpert Meters 2250/2260/2270Features and Benets

2250 2260 2270 2280
2290
General
Embedded Web Server Use a standard Web browser to monitor and
manage the meter over the network, Internet.
Firmware ash update support Enables you to ash the meter with the
latest rmware updates.
Voltage, current: per phase minimum, maximum,
average, trend graph analysis, export, print
Review voltage and current trends, export, print
and analyze parameters right on the meter or
external software.
Demand plot comparisons month-to-month,
week-to-week
Plot two months or two weeks for vivid
demand comparison.
Power, apparent, real, reactive, power factor Review power usage and power factor and
avoid potential PF penalties.
Energy, demand: forward, reverse, net, sum,
TOU, prole, export, print
Keep track of your energy usage, identify peaks
to conserve energy usage.
Statistical analysis (minimum, maximum, average) Review statistical trends, identify past and
future problem areas.
Sampling rate, maximum samples/cycle 400 400 400 400 400 High sampling rate resulting in high accuracy.
Security
Secure two level user access privileges Dene appropriate security access level per user.
Communications
Modbus TCP Easy integration with standard protocol to power
management and other software.
Modbus RTU Integrate meters to existing Modbus networks,
daisy chain several (132) meters together.
HTTP, HTTPS Communicate to the meter over the Internet
via standard Web browser.
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Communicate with the meter via Simple Network
Protocol; hook to existing NMS system.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) Send e-mail messages via standard Simple
Mail Transfer Protocol.
NTP (Network Time Protocol) Network Time Protocol support enables the
meter to synchronize time over the network.
DNP 3.0 Easy integration with serial DNP networks.
Trend measurements CSV le export Easily export trend measurements to third-party
applications, in standard CSV le format.
3.1-30
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
036
Table 3.1-7. Power Xpert Meters 2250/2260/2270Features and Benets (Continued)

2250 2260 2270 2280
2290
Logs
Trend logging Log trend information for easy statistical analysis.
Load prole Review the load prole graph to get a better understanding of
your electrical load versus time.
Event logging Log events for retrospective event analysis.
Memory and Storage
Standard memory, MB 256 512 768 768 768 Store trend data and events for historical analysis.
Harmonics
Harmonic levels 40th 40th 40th 40th Allows you to identify potential harmful harmonics.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Review the total harmonic distortion level directly on the meter.
Individual harmonics Provides simple metric for power quality viewable from the
embedded Web server.
Waveform
Waveform display Waveform view on a PC to visualize steady-state harmonic content
through embedded Web server to identify power quality issues.
Waveform recording 64 512 Ability to record waveforms up to specied samples/cycle.
I/O
I/O
Two relay outputs/two status inputs
Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs
Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt The Power Xpert Meter 2000 I/O Cards are extremely exible and
can be used in a large variety of different applications. Digital
inputs and relay outputs can be programmed to interact during
various conditions dened by the user. Various third-party devices,
such as alarms, pulse meters, trip units and sensors, can be easily
integrated to the Power Xpert Meter 2000. Triggers and events can
be tied to the meters standard functions such as e-mail, logs and
trends. Analog outputs can be programmed to output meter
parameters to BMS or PLC systems.
3.1-31
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Power Xpert Energy Viewer
037
Power Xpert Energy Viewer
General Description
The Power Xpert Energy Viewer (PXEV)
provides the means to develop an
energy usage baseline for energy
management programs, comparing
interval logged data points. It is a free
Web download for compatible Eaton
product home pages. This tool allows
easy interpretation of the data collected
by compatible devices via graphical
charts, graphs and reports without
having to export the available .csv le
into Microsoft Excel or another tool.
The PXEV is a versatile tool suited
for a wide range of customer
applications. Two basic examples
are presented below.
Schools and Dormitories
An excellent application for the PXEV
is a Schools and/or Dormitory
scenario where each elementary
school in a school district or college
dorm (building) on a campus has a
three-phase main meter. The PXEV
could be used to graphically compare
each building, thus determining which
is the most energy efcient.
Monitoring Secondary Transformers
PXEV users can monitor the secondary
of three-phase transformers (kVA) to
compare transformer loading over
time. This determines the unused,
available capacity when expansion
projects are planned and engineers
need to determine if additional power
transformers need to be purchased/
installed. In the case where more
transformers are not necessary
to carry the expansion load, the
information from the PXEV can
assist in providing signicant
monetary savings.
Features
Quickly add an Eaton device
specied above using its IP address
Compare two devices energy usage
Compare last month to the
current month
Develop an energy baseline
Customize/specify values from
the source:
Invert values
Magnitude
Resolution
Interpolation
Customize data range for
summary data
The nal report consists of four tabs.
The rst tab, the Power tab, shows the
statistics on the raw power data. The
Day, Week and Month tabs show the
statistics for energy, calculated by
integrating the power over the
corresponding interval duration.
Users can select up to four different
devices for energy comparison.
Compatible Devices
Power Xpert Meter 2000 series
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/
8000 series
Power Xpert Gateway 600A
(connected devices that capture watt
and kWh values, i.e., IQ 100 series)
Power Xpert Gateway PDP card
Power Xpert Gateway
Series 1000 card
Summary Report: Select the different tabs to view the appropriate energy values. The
Power tab shows kW or MW power on a 15-minute demand window (normal setting
on our devices). The Day/Week/Month tabs show kWh or MWh for those time periods.
Comparison Summary: Users can select up to four different
devices for energy comparison. This graphic shows two devices.
3.1-32
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ 250/260 Series
038
IQ 250/260 Series Electronic
Power Meters
IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meter
General Description
The IQ 250 and IQ 260 meters provide
capabilities you would not normally
expect in affordable, ultra-compact
meters, such as fast sampling rate
and accurate metering for a full
range of power attributes. Providing
the rst line of defense against costly
power problems, Eatons IQ 250 and
IQ 260 electronic power meters can
perform the work of an entire wall
of legacy metering equipment using
todays technology.
When space is at a premium, yet you
need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, the IQ 250/
260 series t the bill. These meters are
ideal for electrical equipment assem-
blies, machine control panels, such as
panelboard and switchboard mains and
feeders, low voltage metal-enclosed
switchgear feeders and motor control
centers. Requiring far less space than
other meters with similar functionality,
IQ 250/260 series t into a standard
ANSI or IEC cutout on a panelboard or
other electrical equipment, and there-
fore t easily into retrot applications.
Utility and commercial metering
Substations, industrial facilities,
power generation sites and campuses
Submetering
Load studies and voltage recording
Analog meter replacement
Features and Benets
Measure and display real-time
information about critical power
parameters with a sampling rate
of 400 samples per cycle
Monitor power utilization and quality
with ANSI C12.20 accuracy (0.2%)
Verify meter accuracy with KYZ test
pulse self-certication capabilities
Standard Modbus RTU
communications
Available as transducer only or
with display
Field upgradeable to a Power Xpert
Meter 2000
Integrate into Eatons Power Xpert
Architecture for a holistic system-
level view
On-board data logging (Expected
at the end of 2011. Contact factory
for availability.)
Additional Features
Table 3.1-8. Features of IQ 250 and IQ 260 Electronic Power Meters
Digital Out with IQ 250 requires external command.
Requires external power supply.

Features IQ 250 IQ 260
Instrumentation
Current, per phase
Current demand
Calculated neutral current
Voltage, per phase (L-L, L-N)
Frequency
Real, reactive and apparent power, total and per phase (kW, kVAR, kVA)
Real, reactive and apparent energy, total and per phase (kWh, kVARh, kVAh)
Real, reactive and apparent power demand
Power factor, total and per phase
Min./max. readings, I, V, PF, F, THD (IQ 260), kW, kVAR, kVA
Demand Methods
Block interval (sliding, xed)
Communications
RS-485
KYZ output
Modbus RTU
Modbus ASCII
DNP 3.0
I/O
Two digital in/two digital out
Opt. Opt.
Four digital in/four KYZ out Opt. Opt.
Four analog output (420 mA)
Opt. Opt.
Four analog output (01 mA) Opt. Opt.
Data Logging
On-board data logging
Opt. Opt.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) voltage and current per phase
Alarming
Set point driven alarm
3.1-33
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ 250/260 Series
039
Table 3.1-9. IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meter Technical Information
Current Inputs
Class 105 Amp. nominal, 10A max.
Class 2 1A nominal, 2A max.
Fault current withstand
100A for:
300A for:
500A for:
10 seconds
3 seconds
1 second
Continuous current withstand 20A for screw terminated
or pass-through connections
Programmable current Full scale to any CT ratio
Burden 0.005 VA per phase max.
at 11A
Pickup current
Class 10
Class 2
0.1% of nominal
5 mA
1 mA
Connections
Pass-through wire gauge dimension
Quick connect
0.177 inches (4.5 mm)
0.25-inch male tab
Voltage Inputs
Range
Line-to-neutral
Line-to-line
20576 Vac
0721 Vac
Programmable voltage range Full scale to any PT ratio
Supported systems 3 element wye, 2.5 element
wye, 2 element delta, four-wire
delta systems
Input impedance 1 Meg Ohm/Phase
Burden 0.36 VA/Phase Max. at 600V;
0.014 VA at 120 Volts
Connection 7-pin 0.400-inch Pluggable
Terminal Block, AWG #1226
(0.1293.31 mm
2
)
Isolation
All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500V
Operating temperature 20C to +70C
Storage temperature 20 to +70C
Operating humidity To 95% RH noncondensing
Faceplate rating NEMA 12
mounting gasket included
Sensing Method
Voltage, current True rms
Power Sampling at over 400 samples
per cycle on all channels
Harmonics resolution 40th order
Update Rate
Watts, Var and VA 100 msec at 60 Hz
All other parameters 1 second at 60 Hz
Power Supply
AC/DC voltage option 90265 Vac at 50/60 Hz or
100370 Vdc, universal
AC/DC supply
DC voltage option 1860 Vdc
Burden 10 VA max.
Standard Communications Format
Connection type RS-485 (through back plate)
Com port baud rate 960057,600 bauds
Com port address 01247
Data format 8-bit, no parity
Protocols Modbus ASCII, RTU or DNP 3.0
KYZ Pulse
Contacts 1 Form A
On resistance, max. 35 Ohms
Peak switching voltage 350 Vdc
Continuous load current 120 mA
Peak load current 350 mA (10 ms)
Off-state leakage current at 350 Vdc 1 uA
Opto-isolation 3750 Vac
Weight 2 lbs
Basic unit H 5.00 x W 4.90 x L 5.00 inches
IQ 250/260 Mounts in 92 mm DIN and ANSI
C39.1 round cut-outs
Shipping container dimensions 6.00-inch cube
Tolerance 0.1 inches (2.54 mm)
Compliance
IEC 687 0.2% accuracy
ANSI C12.20 0.2% accuracy
ANSI C62.41 Burst
UL/cUL Electrical and electronic
measuring and test
equipment 22CZ
CE Meets EU safety, health and
environmental requirements
3.1-34
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ 250/260 Series
040
IQ 250/260 Meter Dimensions
Figure 3.1-31. IQ 250/260 Meter DimensionsFace and Side Views
Table 3.1-10. IQ 250/260 Meter Catalog Numbering System

Table 3.1-11. IQ 250/260 Meter Accessories
Description Catalog
Number
Panel mounting adapter for retrotting an IQ 250/260 to an
IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data cutout
IQ250-PMAK
PXM 2000 Gateway card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000 PXM2000-GCK
IQ 250/260M Side IQ 250/260T Side IQ 250/260 Face
IQ 250 M A 6 5 1 1 0
Model Series
250 = Power
260 = Power quality
Frequency
5 = 50 Hz system
6 = 60 Hz system
I/O Slot 2
0 = None
1 = Two relay outputs/
two status inputs
2 = Four KYZ pulses/
four status inputs
3 = Four analog
outputs: 01 mA
4 = Four analog
outputs: 420 mA
Power Supply
1 = 90265 Vac/Vdc
4 = 2448 Vdc
Current Input
1 = 1A secondary
5 = 5A secondary
Meter Type
M = Meter (with
integral display)
T = Transducer only
(no display)
I/O Slot 1
0 = None
1 = Two relay outputs/
two status inputs
2 = Four KYZ pulses/
four status inputs
3 = Four analog
outputs: 01 mA
4 = Four analog
outputs: 420 mA
Data Logging
A = None
L = On-board
data logging
Expandable I/O Componentry

3.1-35
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ 130/140/150 Series
041
IQ 130/140/150 Electronic
Power Meters
IQ 100 Electronic Power Meter
General Description
The IQ 100 meter family provides
expect in affordable, compact
meters, such as fast sampling rate
and accurate metering for a full range
of power attributes. Providing the
rst line of defense against costly
power problems, Eatons IQ 100 series
electronic power meters can perform
the work of an entire wall of legacy
metering equipment utilizing
todays technology.
When space is at a premium, yet
you need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, the
IQ 100 series ts the bill. These meters
are ideal for electrical equipment
assemblies, machine control panels,
such as panelboard and switchboard
mains and feeders, low voltage
metal-enclosed switchgear feeders
and motor control centers. Requiring
far less space than other meters with
similar functionality, IQ 100 series
meters t into a standard ANSI or
IEC cutout on a panelboard or other
electrical equipment, and therefore
t easily into retrot applications.
power generation sites and campuses
Submetering
Features and Benets
Monitor power utilization and
quality with ANSI C12.20
accuracy (0.5%)
Optional Modbus RTU
communications
with display
Designed to accommodate
upgrades
Integrate into Eatons Power
Xpert Architecture for a holistic
system-level view
Additional Features
Table 3.1-12. Features of IQ 100 Electronic Power Meters

Features IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150
Instrumentation
Current, per phase
Current demand
Min./max. readings, I, V
Min./max. readings, I, V, PF, F, W, VAR, VA
Frequency
Power
Real, reactive and apparent power, total (W, VAR, VA)
Power factor, total
Real, reactive and apparent power demand
Demand Methods
Block interval (sliding, xed)
Energy
Real, reactive and apparent energy, total (Wh, VAR, VAh)
Communications
RS-485, Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, KYZ output Opt. Opt. Opt.
RJ45, Modbus TCP, KYZ output
Opt. Opt. Opt.

3.1-36
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ 130/140/150 Series
042
Table 3.1-13. IQ 100 Electronic Power Meter Technical Information
Current Inputs
Class 10 5A nominal, 10A maximum
Class 2 1A nominal, 2A maximum
Fault Current Withstand
100A for:
300A for:
500A for:
10 seconds
3 seconds
1 second
Continuous current withstand 20A for screw terminated or
pass-through connections
Programmable current Full scale to any CT ratio
Burden 0.005 VA per phase max.
at 11A
Pickup current 0.1% of nominal
Class 10 5 mA
Class 2 1 mA
Connections
Pass-through wire gauge dimension
Quick connect
0.177 inches (4.5 mm)
0.25-inch male tab
Voltage Inputs
Range
Line-to-neutral
Line-to-line
20576 Vac
0721 Vac
Programmable voltage range Full scale to any PT ratio
Supported systems 3 element wye, 2.5 element
wye, 2 element delta, four-wire
delta systems
Input impedance 1 megohm/phase
Burden 0.36 VA/phase max. at 600V;
0.014 VA at 120V
Connection 7-pin 0.400-inch pluggable
terminal block, AWG #1226
(0.1293.31 mm
2
)
Isolation
All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500V
Operating temperature 20 to +70C
Operating humidity To 95% RH noncondensing
Faceplate rating NEMA 12 water-resistant
mounting gasket Included
Sensing Method
Voltage, current True rms
Power Sampling at over 400 samples
per cycle on all channels
Update Rate
Watts, VAR and VA 100 msec at 60 Hz
All other parameters 1 second at 60 Hz
Power Supply
AC/DC voltage option 90265 Vac at 50/60 Hz or
100370 Vdc, universal
AC/DC supply
DC voltage option 1860 Vdc
Burden 10 VA maximum
Optional Communications Format
Connection type RS-485 or RJ45
(through back plate)
Com. port baud rate 960057,600 bauds
Com. port address 01247
Data format 8-bit, no parity
Protocols Modbus ASCII, RTU, TCP
Optional KYZ Pulse
Contacts 1 Form A
On resistance, maximum 35 Ohms
Peak switching voltage 350 Vdc
Continuous load current 350 mA (10 ms)
Off-state leakage current at 350 Vdc 1 uA
Opto-isolation 3750 Vac
Weight 2 lbs
Basic unit H 5.00 x W 4.90 x L 5.00 inches
IQ 100 Mounts in 92 mm DIN and ANSI
C39.1 round cut-outs
Shipping container dimensions 6.00-inch cube
Tolerance 0.10 inches (2.54 mm)
Compliance
IEC 687 0.5% accuracy
ANSI C12.20 0.5% accuracy
ANSI C62.41 Burst
UL/cUL/CE Electrical and electronic
measuring and test
equipment 22CZ
3.1-37
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ 130/140/150 Series
043
IQ 100 Meter Dimensions
Figure 3.1-32. IQ 100 Meter DimensionsFront and Side Views
Table 3.1-14. IQ 100 Meter Catalog Numbering System

Table 3.1-15. IQ 100 Meter Accessories
Description Catalog
Number
Panel mounting adapter for retrotting an IQ 100 to an
IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data cutout
IQ250-PMAK
IQ 100M Side View IQ 100T Side View IQ 100M Front View
IQ 150 M A 6 5 1 1
Model Series
130 = Volts/amps
140 = Power
150 = Energy
Frequency
5 = 50 Hz system
6 = 60 Hz system
Power Supply
1 = 90265 Vac/Vdc
4 = 2448 Vac
Current Input
1 = 1A secondary
5 = 5A secondary
Meter Type
M = Meter (with
integral display)
T = Transducer only
(no display)
Communication
0 = None
1 = Modbus RTU
and KYZ pulse
2 = Modbus TCP
and KYZ
pulse
IQ 100T Transducer Only

3.1-38
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03044
3.2-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ 35M
045
IQ 35M
IQ 35M
General Description
The Eaton IQ 35M Meter is a DIN rail
meter that combines exceptional
performance and easy installation
to deliver a cost-effective solution
for energy and power monitoring
applications, as well as submetering
applications. All models include pulse
output and phase alarms for true
versatility in all situations. The
Modbus output options offer
added exibility for conguration
and data analysis.
The IQ 35M allows you to:
Verify energy bills
Make informed load shifting
and shedding decisions
Fairly and accurately allocate
energy costs to users
Identify wasteful practices
Decrease unnecessary usage
Produce an energy prole
Secure the optimum utility
rate structure
Commercial submetering
Energy management
Industrial monitoring
Cost allocation
IQ 35M mounted and wired in
Eaton panelboard. Closeup photo
showing IQ 35M panelboard
integration and deadfront cover.
Note: Please refer to Tab 22 for
panelboard information.
Features and Benets
DIN rail or surface mounted
watthour meter with demand
Affordable, lightweight and compact
meter providing watthours energy
information
Included backlit LCD display for
local reading
Power and energy readings
kW
kWh
Peak demand available
Monitors
Watts, watthours, watt demand
Volts, amperes
PF, frequency
VARs, VA
Available data logging capability
Serial communications optional
(Modbus-RTU)
Revenue grade, ANSI C12.20 0.5%
accuracy, IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S
User-enabled password protection
On-board diagnostics
Bi-directional metering (expected
at the end of 2011; contact factory
for availability)
Optional BACnet serial communica-
tion (expected at the end of 2011;
contact factory for availability)
IQ 35M in optional NEMA 4X enclosure.
Enclosure shipped loose for eld
mounting of meter. Enclosure only
model number: IQ35M-ENC.
3.2-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ 35M
046
Product Selection
Table 3.2-1. Catalog Number Selection
Expected at the end of 2011. Contact factory

for availability.
Accessories
NEMA 4 enclosure
Fuse kits
DIN rail
Replacement mounting clips
CTssolid and split core
Voltage input
UL: 90V (L-N) to 600V (L-L)
CE: 90V (L-N) to 300V (L-L)
Current input
Scaling: 532,767A
Input range: 00.333V or
01V (selectable)
Control power
UL: 90V (L-N) to 600V (L-L)
CE: 90V (L-N) to 300V (L-L)
Accuracy
Real power and energy
0.5% (ANSI C12.20, IEC 62053-22
Class 0.5S)
Outputs
IQ35MAx1 thru 3:
Real energy pulse: NO static;
alarm contacts: NC static
IQ35MAx1
Reactive energy pulse 30 Vac/dc
IQ35MAx2, IQ35MAx3
RS-485 two-wire Modbus RTU
Mechanical
Mounting
DIN rail or 3-point screwmount
Environmental
Meter: 30 to 70C (22 to 158F)
Display: 10 to 50C (14 to 122F)
Storage temperature range
Meter: 40 to 85C (40 to 185F)
Display: 10 to 60C (14 to 140F)
Humidity range
<95% RH noncondensing
Data Outputs
kW, kWh: Total
Current: Three-phase average and
per phase
Voltage: Three-phase average, per
phase, and line-line and line-neutral
Power: Real, reactive and apparent;
Three-phase total and per phase
Power factor: Three-phase average
and per phase
Frequency
Power demand: most recent
and peak
Demand conguration: xed,
rolling block and external sync
Data logging (IQ35MAx3)
10 congurable data buffers;
Congurable demand subinterval
(when set at a 15-minute interval,
buffers store data for 60 days)
Trending requires communication
network to retrieve data
IQ35M A 1 1
Meter Series
Enclosure Type
1 = Standard energy
2 = Four quadrant energy

Output Option
1 = Pulse output only
2 = Pulse output + Modbus
3 = Pulse output + Modbus +
data logging
5 = Pulse inputs + BACnet +
data logging

3.2-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ 35M
047
Figure 3.2-1. IQ 35M Product Diagram
Figure 3.2-2. IQ 35M Advanced Communication
3.2-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ 35M
048
Figure 3.2-3. IQ 35M Mechanical Installation
Dimensions
Figure 3.2-4. Dimensional Drawing
Figure 3.2-5. DIN Rail Conguration
Figure 3.2-6. Wall Mount Conguration
3.2-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ 35M
049
IQ 35M Current Transducers
Low Current Ranges
5600A
General Description
Solid- and split-core AC current
transducers have different hole
sizes and current ratings to suit any
application. The solid-core models
are ideal for new construction projects.
Split-core models are perfect for
retrots. Output is xed at the industry
standard of 00.333 Vac.
Data logging
Recording
Power monitoring
Energy management
Alternative energy monitoring
Cost allocation
Features
High accuracy: 1% at 10% to 130%
of rated current
00.333 Vac standard output
Solid-core models have a rugged
epoxy encapsulated construction,
giving it outstanding durability
Split-core models have interleaving
joints for reliability with a self-
locking mechanism and no
exposed metal; a safe design
UR
CE
RoHS
Inputs
Accuracy: 1% at 10% to 130%
of rated current
Outputs
At rated current: 0.333 Vac
Environmental
Operating temperature range:
10 to 55C (14 to 131F)
Storage temperature range:
40 to 70C (40 to 158F)
Lead Length
8-foot twisted pair
Figure 3.2-7. IQ 35M-SO Solid Core
CT Dimensions
Figure 3.2-8. IQ 35M-SO Split-Core
CT Dimensions
Table 3.2-2. IQ 35MDimensions in Inches (mm)
Description A B C D E Model Number
Solid Core
IQ 35M CT, 5A:0.33 Vac,
0.30 inch
0.30
(8.0)
1.70
(44.0)
0.75
(19.0)
IQ35M-SO-30-5
IQ 35M CT, 20A:0.33 Vac,
0.30 inch
0.30
(8.0)
1.70
(44.0)
0.75
(19.0)
IQ35M-SO-030-20
IQ 35M CT, 50A:0.33 Vac,
0.50 inch
0.50
(13.0)
1.90
(49.0)
0.75
(19.0)
IQ35M-SO-050-50
IQ 35M CT, 50A:0.33 Vac,
0.75 inch
0.75
(19.0)
2.10
(54.0)
0.75
(19.0)
IQ35M-SO-075-50
IQ 35M CT, 100A:0.33 Vac,
1.25 inch
1.25
(32.0)
2.70
(69.0)
0.80
(21.0)
IQ35M-SO-125-100
IQ 35M CT, 200A:0.33 Vac,
1.25 inch
1.25
(32.0)
2.70
(69.0)
0.80
(21.0)
IQ35M-SO-125-200
IQ 35M CT, 250A:0.33 Vac,
1.25 inch
1.25
(32.0)
2.70
(69.0)
0.80
(21.0)
IQ35M-SO-125-250
IQ 35M CT, 300A:0.33 Vac,
1.25 inch
1.25
(32.0)
2.70
(69.0)
0.80
(21.0)
IQ35M-SO-125-300
IQ 35M CT, 400A:0.33 Vac,
1.25 Inch
1.25
(32.0)
2.70
(69.0)
0.80
(21.0)
IQ35M-SO-125-400
Split Core
IQ 35M CT, 5A:0.33 Vac,
0.75 inch
2.00
(51.0)
2.10
(54.0)
0.61
(16.0)
0.75
(20.0)
0.75
(20.0)
IQ35M-SP-075-5
IQ 35M CT, 30A:0.33 Vac,
0.75 inch
2.00
(51.0)
2.10
(54.0)
0.61
(16.0)
0.75
(20.0)
0.75
(20.0)
IQ35M-SP-075-30
IQ 35M CT, 50A:0.33 Vac,
0.75 inch
2.00
(51.0)
2.10
(54.0)
0.61
(16.0)
0.75
(20.0)
0.75
(20.0)
IQ35M-SP-075-50
IQ 35M CT, 100A:0.33 Vac,
0.75 inch
2.00
(51.0)
2.10
(54.0)
0.61
(16.0)
0.75
(20.0)
0.75
(20.0)
IQ35M-SP-075-100
IQ 35M CT, 200A:0.33 Vac,
0.75 inch
2.00
(51.0)
2.10
(54.0)
0.61
(16.0)
0.75
(20.0)
0.75
(20.0)
IQ35M-SP-075-200
IQ 35M CT, 250A:0.33 Vac,
1.25 inch
3.25
(83.0)
3.35
(86.0)
1.00
(26.0)
1.25
(32.0)
1.25
(32.0)
IQ35M-SP-125-250
IQ 35M CT, 300A:0.33 Vac,
1.25 inch
3.25
(83.0)
3.35
(86.0)
1.00
(26.0)
1.25
(32.0)
1.25
(32.0)
IQ35M-SP-125-300
IQ 35M CT, 400A:0.33 Vac,
1.25 inch
3.25
(83.0)
3.35
(86.0)
1.00
(26.0)
1.25
(32.0)
1.25
(32.0)
IQ35M-SP-125-400
IQ 35M CT, 600A:0.33 Vac,
1.25 inch
3.25
(83.0)
3.35
(86.0)
1.00
(26.0)
1.25
(32.0)
1.25
(32.0)
IQ35M-SP-125-600
3.2-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ 35M
050
IQ 35M Current Transducers
High Current Ranges
8002400A
General Description
The IQ 35M split-core current
transducers, high current ranges,
provide a safe 00.333 Vac output for
use with the IQ 35M energy meter.
Data logging
Recording
Power monitoring
Energy management
Alternative energy monitoring
Cost allocation
Features
High accuracy: 1% of reading from
10% to 100% of rated current
00.333V output
UR
CE
Inputs
Frequency range: 50/60 Hz
Accuracy: 1% of reading from
10% to 100% of the rated current
of the CTs
Outputs
At rated current: 0.333
Mechanical
Installation category: Cat II or Cat III
Environmental
15 to 60C (5 to 140F)
Storage temperature range:
40 to 70C (40 to 158F)
Humidity range:
095% noncondensing
Lead Length
6-foot twisted pair
Figure 3.2-9. IQ 35M-SP-25X
Table 3.2-3. IQ 35MDimensions in Inches (mm)
Description A B C D E F Model Number
Split Core
IQ 35M CT,
800A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch
4.90
(125.0)
2.90
(73.0)
2.50
(62.0)
1.20
(30.0)
5.20
(132.0)
5.90
(151.0)
IQ35M-SP-253-800
IQ 35M CT,
1000A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch
4.90
(125.0)
5.50
(139.0)
2.50
(62.0)
1.20
(30.0)
7.90
(201.0)
6.00
(151.0)
IQ35M-SP-255-1000
IQ 35M CT,
1200A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch
4.90
(125.0)
5.50
(139.0)
2.50
(62.0)
1.20
(30.0)
7.90
(201.0)
6.00
(151.0)
IQ35M-SP-255-1200
IQ 35M CT,
1600A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch
4.90
(125.0)
5.50
(139.0)
2.50
(62.0)
1.20
(30.0)
7.90
(201.0)
6.00
(151.0)
IQ35M-SP-255-1600
IQ 35M CT,
2000A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch
4.90
(125.0)
5.50
(139.0)
2.50
(62.0)
1.20
(30.0)
7.90
(201.0)
6.00
(151.0)
IQ35M-SP-255-2000
IQ 35M CT,
2400A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch
4.90
(125.0)
5.50
(139.0)
2.50
(62.0)
1.20
(30.0)
7.90
(201.0)
6.00
(151.0)
IQ35M-SP-255-2400
3.2-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ 35M
051
Supported System Types
The IQ 35M power meters have a
number of different possible system
wiring congurations (see wiring
diagrams on Page 3.2-8). To congure
the meter, set the System Type via the
User Interface or Modbus register 130
(if so equipped). The System Type tells
the meter which of its current and
voltage inputs are valid, which are to
be ignored, and whether neutral is
connected. Setting the correct System
Type prevents unwanted energy
accumulation on unused inputs,
selects the formula to calculate the
Theoretical Maximum System Power,
and determines which phase loss
algorithm is to be used. The phase
loss algorithm is congured as a
percent of the Line-to-Line System
Voltage (except when in System
Type 10) and also calculates the
expected Line to Neutral voltages
for system types that have Neutral
(12 and 40).
Table 3.2-4. Supported System Types
Table 3.2-5. Wiring
Note: IQ 35MA1x models are not polarity sensitive. No need to observe polarity when wiring.
IQ 35MA2x models are polarity sensitive. Observe correct polarity when wiring.
Number
of Wires
CTs Voltage Connections System Type Phase Loss Measurements Wiring
Diagram
Figure
Number
Qty ID Qty ID Type Modbus
Register 130
User Interface:
SETUP>S SYS
VLL VLN Balance
Single-Phase Wiring
2
2
3
1
1
2
A
A
A, B
2
2
3
A, N
A, B
A, B, N
L-N
L-L
L-L with N
10
11
12
1L + 1n
2L
2L + 1n
AB
AB
AN
AN, BN AN-BN
3.2-10
3.2-11
3.2-12
Three-Phase Wiring
3 3 A, B, C 3 A, B, C Delta 31 3L AB, BC, CA AB-BC-CA 3.2-13
4 3 A, B, C 4 A, B, C, N Grounded
wye
40 3L + 1n AB, BC, CA AN, BN, CN AN-BN-CN
and AB-BC-CA
3.2-14
3.2-15
Symbol Description
Voltage disconnect switch
Fuse (installer is responsible for ensuring compliance with local
requirements. No fuses are included with the device.)
Earth ground
Current transducer
Potential transformer
Protection containing a voltage disconnect switch with a fuse or
disconnect circuit breaker. The protection device must be rated for
the available short-circuit current at the connection point.
S2
S1
3.2-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ 35M
052
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 3.2-10. Single-Phase Line-to-Neutral Two-Wire System, 1 CT
Figure 3.2-11. Single-Phase Line-to-Line Two-Wire System, 1 CT
Figure 3.2-12. Single-Phase Direct Voltage Connection, 2 CTs
Figure 3.2-13. Three-Phase, Three-Wire, 3 CTs, No PT
Figure 3.2-14. Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye Direct Voltage Connection,
3 CTs
Figure 3.2-15. Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye Connection, 3 CTs, 3 PTs
X2
X1
A
B
C
N
+
A
B
C
Use System Type 10 (1L + ln)
L1 N
White
Black
X2
X1
A
B
C
N
+
A
B
C
Use System Type 11 (2L)
L1 L2
White
Black
X2
X1
X2
X1
A
B
C
N
+
A
B
C
L1 L2 N
White
Black
White
Black
X2
X1
A
B
C
N
A
B
C
X2
X1
X2
X1
+
Use System Type 31 (3L)

L1 L2 L3
White
Black
White
Black
White
Black
L1 L2 L3 N
X2
X1
A
B
C
N
A
B
C
X2
X1
X2
X1
+
White
Black
White
Black
White
Black
Black
Black
White
Black
L1 L2 L3 N
X2
X1
A
B
C
N
A
B
C
X2
X1
X2
X1
+
White
White
3.2-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ 35M
053
Control Power
Figure 3.2-16. Direct Connect Control Power (Line-to-Line)
Line-to-Line from 90 Vac to 600 Vac (UL) (520 Vac CE). In
UL installations, the lines may be oating (i.e., a delta). If
any lines are tied to an earth (i.e., a corner grounded delta),
see the Line-to-Neutral installation limits. In CE installations,
the lines must be neutral (earth) referenced at less than
300 Vac L-N.
Figure 3.2-17. Direct Connect Control Power (Line-to-Neutral)
Line-to-Neutral from 90 Vac to 347 Vac (UL) or 300 Vac (CE).
Figure 3.2-18. Direct Connect Control Power (DC)
DC control power from 125 Vdc to 300 Vdc (UL and CE max.).
Figure 3.2-19. Control Power Transformer (CPT) Connection
The Control Power Transformer may be wired L-N or L-L.
Output to meet meter input requirements
Fuse Recommendations
Keep the fuses close to the power source (obey local
and national code requirements).
For selecting fuses and circuit breakers, use the
following criteria:
Current interrupt capacity should be selected based
on the installation category and the fault current capability
Overcurrent protection should be selected with
a time delay
The voltage rating should be sufcient for the input
voltage applied
Provide overcurrent protection and disconnecting means
to protect the wiring. For DC installations, the installer
must provide external circuit protection (suggested: 0.5A,
time delay fuses)
The earth connection is required for electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) and is not a protective earth ground
L1 L2 L3
1 2 G
L1 L2 L3 N
1 2 G
1 2 G
L1 L2 L3 N
1 2 G
3.2-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II
054
Submeter IILow Cost
Multipoint Meter
Eatons IQ Multipoint Energy
Submeter II is a revenue class
electronic submetering device that
can be mounted in switchboards.
When mounted in a switchboard,
the IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II
provides customers with an integrated
power distribution and energy meter-
ing solution that saves space, reduces
installation labor and lowers total cost.
General Description
The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II
provides a cost-effective solution for
residential or commercial metering
installations. Typical installations
include:
High-rise buildings
Government institutions
Universities and campuses
Ofce buildings
Medical facilities
Apartment and condominium
complexes
Airports
Shopping malls
Industrial parks
Mixed-use facilities
provides cost-effective and space saving
energy submetering for a wide variety of
applications. The IQ Multipoint Energy
Submeter II is ideally suited for energy
metering of multi-tenant buildings. It can
also be used to monitor energy to any
load up to 600 volts for energy billing or
cost allocation. Built-in communication
capabilities enable an IQ Multipoint
Energy Submeter II to be networked to
a local PC or via modem to a remote
master PC or energy service provider.
is ideal for multi-tenant applications
in which property managers are
interested in measuring tenant energy
usage for the purposes of monthly
energy cost allocation. As such, its
customers include apartment com-
plex owners, ofce owners, tenant
building managers, and meter reading
companies. The IQ Multipoint Energy
Submeter II can measure any of
the following number of circuits:
16 single-phase, two-wire
(single-pole)
Eight single-phase, three-wire
(two-pole)
Five three-phase, four-wire
(three-pole)
Any of the circuits listed can be mixed
provided the total number of Current
Sensors does not exceed 16. The meter
provides instantaneous (kW), demand
and cumulative (kWh) measurements
for each load. The unit also provides
interval energy data logging, time of
use energy registers, coincident peak
demand storage and scheduled remote
meter reading data in non-volatile
memory. Bus voltage is also measured.
uses highly accurate Current Sensors to
monitor each load. Current Sensors can
be provided in a number of ratings and
are supplied with integral cable and
plug-in connector. All Current Sensors
are self-protecting in the event of an
open circuit condition under load. The
automatically detects the rating of
each Current Sensor that is connected.
is UL listed as a Class 1 device.
Features
Multipoint electrical energy metering
Built-in communication interface
Flexible metering conguration
Monitors single-phase and three-
phase loads from 120600 Vac in
three voltage ranges
Monitors power in watts and energy in
watthours for up to 16 current sensors
Very low-prole design, less than
1.50 inches (38.1 mm) in height
Energy values stored in non-volatile
memory
Stores extensive energy prole data
for each metering point. Can be
used to identify coincidental peak
demand contribution
Space-saving stacking design allows
two units to be mounted together
Supports Time-of-Use energy
monitoring
Demand interval adjustable from
5 to 60 minutes
Measures bus voltage
Front panel LEDs provide status of
unit and communication activity
Meets rigid ANSI C12.1 and IEC
61036 accuracy specications for
revenue meters
UL listed under UL 8N83
Current sensors are UL-recognized
components
Can be directly mounted in a
UL-approved switchboard
Communication Capabilities
With the IQ Multipoint Energy
Submeter IIs built-in communication
capabilities, remote meter reading
and monitoring functions can be
integrated into both new and
retrot applications.
Eaton INCOM communications.
Software Compatibility
is fully compatible with the Eaton
PowerNet software platform includ-
ing the E-Bill cost allocation software
can be used as part of an electrical
energy monitoring and billing system
can be remotely monitored via
Eatons FetchIT software package
is compatible with third-party soft-
ware platforms and interface devices
For additional information on Power
Xpert Power Management Software,
E-Bill and FetchIT software, see Tab 2
Power Management Systems Software.
Conguration
is fully congurable using Power Xpert
or free PowerPort conguration
software
PowerPort can be downloaded
free from either the Internet or the
Eaton intranet
Each IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II
can be congured for up to 16
metering points in any combination
of single-phase and three-phase
metering points
PowerPort is used to assign current
sensors to metering points
Either PowerPort or Power Xpert
software can be used to congure
the built-in data logs for energy
proling
Both Power Xpert software and
PowerPort can be used to set up
the Time-of-Use energy registers
and the automatic meter reading
schedule
3.2-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
055
Wiring
The Current Sensor cable is rated
600 volts and is recognized by UL
as Class 1 wiring
IMPCABLE used for INCOM commu-
nication between devices is rated
600 volts and is recognized by UL
as Class 1 wiring
Consult TD17513 Wiring Specica-
tion Base Rules for detailed
information on proper installation
and termination of INCOM
communications network cable
Easy to Install
Approved by UL for mounting
inside switchboards
Stacking design allows two units to
be mounted in a switchboard using
less that 8.00 inches (203.2 mm) of
vertical space
For retrot applications, the
can be mounted in an external
auxiliary enclosure
Quick-connect terminals for Current
Sensors, INCOM communications
and bus voltages make wiring the
unit quick and easy
UL listed under le number E166079
CSA approved
Complies with UL 991 radiated
susceptibility requirements
Third-party tested for ANSI C12.1
(1%) accuracy
Complies with FCC emission
standard Part 15, Subpart B
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter IICurrent Sensor
Voltages
Three models are available, each
covering a specic voltage range.
Model 1120/240/208V:
120V single-phase
120/240V single-phase
120/208V three-phase Y
Model 2277/480V:
277V single-phase
Model 3347/600V:
347V single-phase
Current Sensors
050A
070A
0125A
0200A
0400A
05A for use with an external
current transformer with 5A
secondary. (ANSI C12 Class 10)
(Catalog number: CS005)
Metering Accuracy
meets the rigid ANSI C12.1 and IEC
610361.0% metering accuracy
requirements.
<2% error at 1% of full scale
<1% error at 1.5% of full scale
<1% error at 90% to 110% of rated
voltage
<1% error at 57 and 63 Hz
<2% error at 0.5 lagging PF
Environmental
Operating temperature:
20 to +50C
Humidity: 0% to 95%
Power
There are three power supply
options:
120 Vac, 57 to 63 Hz, 6 VA
277 Vac, 57 to 63 Hz, 6 VA
347 Vac, 47 to 63 Hz, 6 VA
3.2-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Intelligent Electronic Metering Equipment
056
EMC
Compliant with FCC rules and
regulations, Part 15, Subpart B,
Class B equipment
Compliant with UL 991 radiated
susceptibility requirements
Communications
INCOM communication network
supports up to 1,000 devices up to
distances of 10,000 ft (3048m)
INCOM communication speed of
9600 bps
Energy Value Storage
50A current sensor:
214,748,364 kWh
70A current sensor:
300,647,710 kWh
125A current sensor:
536,870,912 kWh
858,993,459 kWh
1,717,986,916 kWh
5A external CT sensor:
8,589,934 x CT primary rating in kWh
Product Feature Overview
offers low-cost metering of kW and
kWh for multiple tenants of residential
and commercial ofce buildings for
one- to three-phase voltage loads not
exceeding 347/600V. The IQ Multipoint
Energy Submeter II contains INCOM
networking to chain together multiple
meters in locations throughout the
facility. See Figure 3.2-20 for a typical
apartment building layout.
Key Features
Reduced Equipment Space: The
consumes 80% less wall space
compared to glass bulb meters
that must be individually or group
mounted independent of the
loadcenter. By installing the meter
in the loadcenter and providing
Current Sensors to each load within
the switchboard, less real estate is
occupied, not only in the ground oor,
but at individual tenant oor spaces.
A typical integrated distribution
and metering solution using the
uses 45% less wall space than
separately mounted submeters.
Figure 3.2-20. Typical Building Installation
Reduced Wiring and Cost: Because
Current Sensors are provided with
pre-wired leads and connectors for
each load in the switchboard, there is
60% less eld wiring to be performed
on site, greatly reducing cost, time and
potential for errors in the eld.
High Accuracy: ANSI and IEC revenue-
grade accuracy for each metering
point permits the facility owner to
charge each tenant condently.
Communications Capability: INCOM
communications is built into each
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II for
chaining them together on a robust,
eld-proven, communications
architecture. INCOM can be used to
communicate to the complete line
of Eatons metering products and is
also useful for those projects requiring
local communications to Power
Xpert Software.
In addition, Table 3.2-7 lists several
Gateway products to enable communi-
cations to RS-232 Ethernet or RS-485
with Modbus protocol.
Time-of-Use Metering: The IQ
Multipoint Energy Submeter II will
keep track of four different utility
rates for four changes of rate seasons
with separate weekday, weekend and
holiday rates. The Time-of-Use logging
supports eight rate changes per day
and also stores the peak demand
for each rate period. All Time-of-Use
information is stored in non-volatile
memory.
Automatic Meter Reading: The IQ
Multipoint Energy Submeter II can be
congured for easy remote reading by
saving just the needed energy infor-
mation in a separate memory location.
This location can be set up to save
all of the necessary energy data for a
periodic monthly read with a set day
of the month and time of that day.
Additionally, the user can program
up to six specic dates and times to
save meter readings. The IQ Multipoint
Energy Submeter II then stores the
total energy and peak demand for
each Time-of-Use rate for each meter
point so that all of this information
can be effortlessly downloaded to a
remote system. The IQ Multipoint
Energy Submeter II saves all of this
data for up to 13 months in non-
volatile memory.
Swiltchboards with one
or more IQ Multipoint
Energy Submeter II
Optional Local
Display Module
Modem
Remote Billing
OR
Local PC
3.2-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
057
Product Selection
The IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II, Current Sensors and
other accessories can be ordered from Eaton distributors.
Refer to the following catalog numbers when ordering.
Table 3.2-6. IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II Products
Note: Total sensor lead length must not exceed 20 ft (6m).
Support products for the IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II
include the Digital Input Module (DIM), the Local Display
Module, IMPCABLE and a number of communications
converters, as described in Table 3.2-7.
Table 3.2-7. IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II Support Products
All of the gateway products in Table 3.2-7 above can
support the conversion of multiple IQ Multipoint Energy
Submeter II meters to another communication network. The
MINT II can support up to 1000 units. The mMINT supports
up to 32 units. The PXG400 and PXG600A can support up to
64 units (sum of meter modules and current sensors).
The Digital Input Module (DIM) can be used to totalize pulse
outputs from water meters, gas meters, steam meters or
even old electrical meters with KYZ pulse outputs. The DIM
can then be connected to the same INCOM network as the
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II and this information can
then be used in Power Management software packages.
Mounting Dimensions
Figure 3.2-21. Single UnitFront View
Figure 3.2-22. Single UnitSide View
Figure 3.2-23. Single UnitTop View
Product
Description
Catalog
Number
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II 120V with INCOM
IQMESIIN1
IQMESIIN2
IQMESIIN3
Current Sensor5A, quantity 3
CS005
CS050
CS070
CS125
Current Sensor Extension4 ft (1.2m), quantity 6
CS200
CS400
CSET04
CSET08
CSET16
Product
Description
Catalog
Number
INCOM communication cable, 1000 ft (305m),
600V insulation
IMPCABLE
Subnetwork master local display allows local access
to energy information (120 Vac)
LDISP120
Subnetwork master local display allows local access
to energy information (24 Vac/Vdc)
LDISP24
INCOM to RS-232 Communication Gateway MINTII
Power Xpert Gateway 200E PXG200E
Power Xpert 600E (data logging and e-mail) PXG600E
INCOM to RS-485 Communication Gateway
with Modbus Protocol
MMINT
Digital Input Modulesupports four pulse Inputs
or eight status Inputs
DIM
1.25
(31.8)
REF
0.19
(4.8)
REF
7.56
(192.0)
REF
8x
0.201
0.28
(7.1)
REF
10.97
(278.6)
REF
0.22
(5.6)
REF
7.50
(190.5)
REF
11.25 (285.8) REF
8.74 (222.0) REF
.0478 THK.
7.94
(201.7)
REF
11.87
(301.5)
1.49
(37.8)
REF
REF
3.2-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
058
Mounting Dimensions (Continued)
Figure 3.2-24. Double UnitFront View
Figure 3.2-25. Double UnitSide View
Figure 3.2-26. Double UnitTop View
Figure 3.2-27. Current Sensor Dimensions
Table 3.2-8. Current Sensor Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1.25
(31.8)
0.19
(4.8)
7.56
(192.0)
0.201 x8
0.28
(7.1)
10.97
(278.6)
0.22
(5.6)
7.50
(190.5)
11.25
(285.8)
8.74
(222.0)
R.19 x4
0.0478 THK.
7.94
(201.7)
Sensor H W T ID L
CS005
CS050
CS070
2.28 (57.9)
1.55 (39.4)
2.10 (53.4)
2.60 (66.0)
1.18 (30.0)
1.73 (44.0)
0.60 (15.2)
0.50 (12.7)
0.58 (14.7)
N/A
0.32 (8.1)
0.55 (14.0)
56.00 (1422.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
CS125
CS200
CS400
2.10 (53.4)
3.06 (77.7)
4.33 (110.0)
1.73 (44.0)
2.69 (68.3)
3.42 (86.9)
0.58 (14.7)
0.75 (19.1)
1.08 (27.4)
0.55 (14.0)
1.25 (31.8)
1.50 (38.1)
45.00 (1143.0)
45.00 (1143.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
11.90
(302.3)
2.99
(75.9)
1.49
(37.8)
3.2-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ Energy and Power Sentinel
059
IQ Energy Sentinel and
Power Sentinel
IQ Sentinel
IQ Sentinels
IQ Sentinels are microprocessor-
based submeters, designed to monitor
power, energy, currents, voltages,
power factor, frequency, apparent
power and reactive power. They
represent an alternative to installing
separate wattmeters, watthour meters,
watt demand meters, ammeters,
voltmeters, and more.
IQ Sentinels are available with two
different capabilities:
The Energy Sentinel version that
monitors watts, watthour and
watt demand
The Power Sentinel version that
monitors watts, watthour, watt
demand, currents, voltages, power
factor, frequency, apparent power
and reactive power
Key advantages include unmatched
savings in space, lower installation
costs, and the capability to communi-
cate data readings in a variety of ways.
IQ Sentinels with built-in CTs and
communications have the added
benet of greater overall system
accuracy. Conventional metering often
is less accurate since external CTs and
separate transducers may each have
inaccuracies of 1% or more.
Table 3.2-9. IQ Energy and Power Sentinel Features
Note: The Power Sentinel is available only in the Universal Mount version with internal CTs.
IQ Energy Sentinel
Features
IQ Power Sentinel
Features
IQ Sentinel
Benets
Monitors (accuracy stated full scale)
Kilowatts 1.0%
Kilowatts demand 1.0%
Kilowatt hour 1.0%
Built-in CTs version up to 400A or external CTs
version up to 4000A
Breaker, panel or DIN rail mounted
Powered directly off the line
Built-in communication capability
Address set by DIP switches
Communication at 9600 baud
Noise immune INCOM protocol
Choice of operator interfaces
Subnetwork master local display
Breaker Interface Module (BIM)
Power Management Energy Billing software
Power Management software
UL and CSA listed
Monitors (accuracy stated full scale)
AC line current (each phase) 0.5%
AC line-to-line voltage 0.5%
AC line-to-neutral voltages 0.5%
Watts (each phase and total) 1.0%
VARs (each phase and total) 1.0%
VA (each phase and total) 1.0%
Apparent power factor
(each phase and total) 0.5%
Displacement power factor
(each phase and total) 0.5%
Demand (total watts) 1.0%
Frequency 0.5%
Watthours 1.0%
Built-in CTs version up to 400A
Panel or DIN rail mounted
Powered directly off the line
Built-in communication capability
Address set by DIP switches
Communication at 9600 baud
Noise immune INCOM protocol
Choice of operator interfaces
Subnetwork master local display
Power Management Energy Billing software
Power Management software
UL and CSA listed
CE mark
One device replaces multiple meters
and/or transducers
Improved system accuracy
Savings in product cost
Savings in space
Savings in installation cost
No external power source is needed
Permits remote monitoring and
interconnection with programmable logic
controllers and building management systems.
For more information, see section on Power
Management Software Systems
Designed to interface directly with Power
Management Software Energy Billing software
Flexibilitydisplays what is needed where
it is needed
Power Management Software
3.2-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
060
IQ Sentinels (Continued)
Eatons IQ Sentinels provide a unique
cost-effective method to implement
energy submetering at lower levels
in the distribution system.
The ability to monitor power distribution
systems down to the machine or process
level at an industrial facility has become
essential to provide key benets such as
to verify the accuracy of the utility bill,
identify and track energy usage to the
loads that consume it, develop a facility
energy prole to establish a baseline,
allocate energy costs to create account-
ability and so on.
An optional door-mounted interface,
the Subnetwork Master Local Display,
is available to display the energy
parameters monitored by the
IQ Sentinels.
Submetering application examples
for the IQ Sentinels include energy
demand monitoring, product cost
analysis, process machine tool
efciency and productivity improve-
ment, and energy-cost allocation
or tenant billing for commercial,
industrial, recreational and
residential facilities.
Note: For customer-billing applications,
consult local utility for metering
requirements.
Commercial applications include
energy-cost allocation within conven-
tion halls, ofce buildings, shopping
malls, hospitals, warehouses and
storage facilities.
Industrial applications include depart-
mental billing and process/assembly
line energy cost analysis. IQ Energy
Sentinels may be substituted for watt
transducers when monitoring machine
tool and equipment performance
within plants.
Recreational facilities include sports
arenas, camping grounds, trailer parks
and marinas.
The IQ Sentinel may be applied
on three-phase (three- or four-wire),
as well as single-phase (three-wire)
systems.
IQ Sentinels may be applied on either
50 or 60 Hz systems.
The IQ Energy Sentinel is available
in three different package versions:
breaker mounted, universal breaker
with internal CTs, and universal
breaker with external CTs.
Designed for mounting on Series C

circuit breakers used in Eaton assem-
blies such as:
Pow-R-Line four panelboards
feeder circuits
Power-R-Line C switchboards
feeder circuits
Motor control centers and
enclosed control with circuit
breaker disconnectsstarter
or feeder circuits
Enclosed motor control
Enclosed circuit breakers
Pow-R-Way III
Bus Plugs with

circuit breaker disconnects
Breaker Mount Applications
New Equipment
F-Frame Breaker with IQ Sentinel
Retrotting
The space-saving design characteris-
tics of the breaker mount IQ Energy
Sentinels allow them to be added to
existing Eaton circuit breakers at any
time...often with no additional space
or modications required.
Or they may be installed when
upgrading from older circuit
breakers...often with no additional
space or modications required.
Universal Mount with Internal CTs
Universal Mount Applications
The universal mount IQ Energy Sentinel
with internal CTs includes integral 400A
CTs and may be applied on loads up to
400A. The universal mount IQ Energy
Sentinels with internal CTs may be
used wherever breaker mounting is
not feasible or possible.
The universal mount IQ Energy Sentinel
with provisions for external CTs may be
applied on loads up to 4000A. They are
usually used for monitoring loads larger
than 400A, on power cable sizes larger
than 500 kcmil or on circuits containing
more than one conductor per phase.
IQ Power Sentinel
Like the IQ Energy Sentinel, the
IQ Power Sentinel is a highly accurate
microprocessor-based submeter
designed to monitor power and energy.
In addition to watts, watthour, and
watt-demand, the IQ power sentinel
monitors current, voltage, reactive
power (VARs), apparent power (VA),
power factor and frequency. The IQ
Power Sentinel offers an accurate
and economic alternative to separate
meters and transducers.
The IQ Power Sentinel is only available
in the universal mount with internal CTs
up to 400A.
3.2-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
061
Eaton Breaker Mount
Eatons breaker mount IQ Energy Sentinel installs in less
than 10 minutes on the load side of a Eaton Series C
F-Frame (150A), J-Frame (250A), or K-Frame (400A) circuit
breakers.
Note: The Power Sentinel is available only in the Universal Mount
version with internal CTs.
Energy Sentinel Features
Universal Mount with Internal CTs(UI)
The Universal Mount IQ Energy Sentinel with internal CTs
may be panel-mounted or DIN rail mounted on disconnects
or other circuits up to 400A. A pull-apart terminal block is
provided on the device for connection of the system voltage
reference wiring.
Note: Only the Universal Mount with Internal CTs is available in
both IQ Power Sentinel and IQ Energy Sentinel versions. The location
of the ground/neutral connection differs on Breaker Mount IQ Energy
Sentinels from the location of the ground/neutral connection on
Universal Mount IQ Sentinels. Incorrect wiring to the ground/
neutral and communications connections may result in accuracy
and communication errors.
Universal Mount for External CTs(UE)
The Universal Mount IQ Energy Sentinel for external CTs
may be panel-mounted or DIN rail mounted on circuits
up to 4000A.
A pull-apart terminal block is provided on the device for
connection of the system voltage reference wiring as well as
another terminal block for connection to the users existing
5A secondary CTs that may range in standard ratios from
25:5 up to 4000:5.
Note: If the device will be disconnected without interruption of the
monitored load, the use of a CT shorting block is advised.
Energy and Power Sentinel Features
DIP Switch
Address
Communications
Connections
Ground/Neutral
Connection
Voltage
Tangs Transmit
LED
Communications
Connections
Communications
Shield
Connection
Voltage Terminal Block
Ground/Neutral
Connection
Communications
Connections
Communications
Shield
Connection
Voltage Terminal Block
Ground/Neutral
Connection
CT
Terminal
Block
3.2-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
062
Table 3.2-10. Energy Sentinel
40C (standard) maximum for Series C

circuit breakers.
Acceptable for Universal IQ Energy

Sentinels only.
System Voltage Considerations
(Application Note)
The Ground (GND) terminal of
the IQ Energy Sentinel should be
connected to the ground bus or other
non-current- carrying ground with
600V rated wire to ensure accuracy.
Current Input
Current Range: 1% to 125% of current rating
Burden: 1 VA
Voltage Input
Voltage Range: 20% of voltage rating
Frequency
50 or 60 Hz
Power Factor Range
All (1 to +1)
Communications
Protocol: INCOM
Speed: 9600 baud
Compatibility: Power Management Software
compatible
(13 to 158F)
(40 to 185F)
Operating humidity: 5% to 95%
relative humidity
noncondensing
Dimensions D x W x H in Inches (mm)
F 3.20 x 4.12 x 1.30 (81.3 x 104.6 x 33.0);
CT window size
0.59 (15.0)
J 4.04 x 4.12 x 1.28 (102.6 x 104.6 x 32.5);
CT window size
0.77 (19.6)
K 4.04 x 5.31 x 1.25 (102.6 x 134.9 x 31.8);
CT window size
0.96 (24.4)
UI 4.36 x 5.31 x 3.00 (110.7 x 134.9 x 76.2);
hole clearance 1.17 (29.7)
UE 4.36 x 5.31 x 3.00 (110.7 x 134.9 x 76.2)
Weight in Lbs (kg):
F 0.65 (0.30)
J 0.69 (0.31)
K 0.87 (0.39)
UI 1.10 (0.50)
UE 1.10 (0.50)
Other Specications
UL File No. E64983
CSA File No. LR106359-1
Table 3.2-11. Power Sentinel
Figure 3.2-28. Acceptable System Congurations
Nominal Full Scale Current
400A
Dimensions D x W x H (inches)
4.36 x 5.31 x 3.00 (110.7 x 134.9 x 76.2)
Current Accuracy Range
1%125% of full scale
Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
1.10 lbs (0.50 kg)
Current Overload Capability
250% of full scale
Environment
Indoor use only
Power Factors
All
Maximum Operating Altitude
2000 meters
Nominal Operating Line-to-Line Voltages
G01 208 G03 480
G02 400 G04 600
Operating Temperatures
25 to 70C 13 to 158F
Maximum Operating Voltage Fluctuation
G01 20% G03 10%
G02 10% G04 10%
Storage Temperatures
40 to 85C 40 to 185F
Maximum Power Consumption
G01 2 VA G03 5 VA
G02 5 VA G04 6 VA
Maximum Relative Humidity
80% for temperatures up to 31C decreasing
linearly to 50% at 70C
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Transient Overvoltage Category
Overvoltage Category III
Communication
Protocol: INCOM
Speed: 9600 Baud
Compatibility: Power Xpert Power Management
software compatible
Pollution Degree
2 (IEC 664)
UL File Number
E185559
Phase A
Phase C
Phase A
Phase C
Neutral
Three-Phase Star,
Four-Wire, Earthed
Neutral.
Three-Phase Star,
Four-Wire, Non-
Earthed Neutral.
Single-Phase,
Three-Wire, Earthed
Mid-Point (Connect
to A and C Phases).
Two-Phase Star,
Three-Wire, Earthed
Neutral (Connect to
A and C Phases).
Three-Phase Star,
Three-Wire
Three-Phase Star,
Three-Wire, Earthed
Neutral Point.
Three-Phase Delta,
Three-Wire
Three-Phase Open
Delta, Four-Wire,
Earthed Junction.
Note: Acceptable for Universal IQ Energy Sentinels only.
3.2-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
063
Table 3.2-12. IQ Energy Sentinels Catalog Information
Table 3.2-13. IQ Power Sentinels Catalog Information
Table 3.2-14. Terminal, Cable and Wiring Guidelines
Description Voltage RatingVac Current Rating
Maximum Amperes
Catalog
Number
For F-Frame breakers
120/240, 240, 208Y/120
220/380, 230/400, 240/415
480, 480Y/277
600, 600Y/347
150
150
150
150
IQESF208
IQESF400
IQESF480
IQESF600
For J-Frame breakers
120/240, 240, 208Y/120
220/380, 230/400, 240/415
480, 480Y/277
600, 600Y/347
250
250
250
250
IQESJ208
IQESJ400
IQESJ480
IQESJ600
For K-Frame breakers
120/240, 240, 208Y/120
220/380, 230/400, 240/415
480, 480Y/277
600, 600Y/347
400
400
400
400
IQESK208
IQESK400
IQESK480
IQESK600
Universal with internal CTs
120/240, 240, 208Y/120
220/380, 230/400, 240/415
480, 480Y/277
600, 600Y/347
400
400
400
400
IQESUI208
IQESUI400
IQESUI480
IQESUI600
Universal for external CTs
120/240, 240, 208Y/120
220/380, 230/400, 240/415
480, 480Y/277
600, 600Y/347
4000
4000
4000
4000
IQESUE208
IQESUE400
IQESUE480
IQESUE600
Description Voltage RatingVac Current Rating
Maximum Amperes
Catalog
Number
120/240, 240, 208Y/120
220/380, 230/400, 240/415
480, 480Y/277
600, 600Y/347
400
400
400
400
IQPSUI208
IQPSUI400
IQPSUI480
IQPSUI600
Sentinel Eaton
Series C Terminal
Wire Size
Single Conductor
F-Frame
J-Frame
K-Frame
624B100G02, G17, G18, G19
T250KB, TA250KB
T350K, TA350KB
#141/0, #44/0, #44/01, #141/0 AWG
#4350 kcmil
#250500 kcmil
System voltage reference wiring
Current transformer wiring
Ground reference wiring
Communications wiring
#250500 kcmil
#24#10 AWG
#12 AWG (maximum)
#22#12 AWG (minimum 600V rated)
Eaton IMPCABLE or Belden 9463 family
3.2-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
064
Figure 3.2-29. IQ Sentinel
Radius
1.17
(29.7)
Diameter
0.25
(6.4)
Typical
0.25
(6.4)
Typical
0.25
(6.4)
Typical
1.10
(27.9)
1.25
(31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
1.28
(32.5)
0.75
(19.1)
1.30
(33.0)
1.17
(29.7)
Typical
1.17
(29.7)
Typical
0.96
(24.4)
4.04
(102.6)
1.72
(43.7)
1.72
(43.7)
2.66
(67.5)
5.31
(134.9)
0.77
(19.6)
0.90
(22.9)
Typical
1.38
(34.9)
1.38
(34.9)
2.06
(52.3)
4.12
(104.6)
0.59
(15.0)
1.38
(34.9)
4.04
(102.6)
3.20
(81.3)
1.38
(34.9)
1.38
(34.9)
2.06
(52.3)
4.12
(104.6)
1.80
(45.7)
1.71
(43.4)
1.80
(45.7)
0.14
(3.6)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
2.60
(66.0)
1.36
(34.5)
1.36
(34.5)
5.31
(134.9)
1.72
(43.7)
2.66
(67.5)
4.36
(110.7)
1.72
(43.7)
Radius
1.80
(45.7)
1.71
(43.4)
1.80
(45.7)
0.14
(3.6)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
2.60
(66.0)
1.36
(34.5)
1.36
(34.5)
5.31
(134.9)
4.36
(110.7)
F-Frame Energy Sentinels J-Frame Energy Sentinels K-Frame Energy Sentinels
Universal with Internal CTs
Energy and Power Sentinels
Universal with External CTs
Energy and Power Sentinels
3.2-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Power Monitoring and Metering Module
065
Molded-Case Circuit
and Metering Module (PM3)
Power Monitoring/Metering Module (PM3)
General Description
The Power Monitoring and Metering
Module (PM3) is a UL-listed add-on
communications module that
mounts directly to the load side
of three-pole molded-case circuit
breakers, similar to an earth leakage
module. The PM3 adds revenue
accurate power metering and breaker
status monitoring to new and/or
existing Series C and Series G
breakers. Regardless of the type of trip
unit (thermal-magnetic or electronic),
the PM3 can be applied in applications
where power metering, circuit breaker
monitoring and/or communications
is essential. The PM3 is extremely
exible and can be used in main
breaker or feeder breaker applications.
The automatic voltage sensing
means that the same PM3 module
can be used on 208, 240 or 480 Vac
applications. It can also be installed
in reverse-feed and reverse-phasing
(CBA) applications.
The PM3 provides the following
metering, monitoring and
communications functions:
Metering
Phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic, Iavg)
Phase-to-phase voltages
(Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vavg)
Phase-to-neutral voltages
(Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vavg)
Real power (kW)total and
per phase
Reactive power (kVAR)total and
per phase
Apparent power (kVA)total and
per phase
Power factortotal and per phase
Real energy (WHr)forward,
reverse and net
Reactive Energy (VARHr)forward,
reverse and net
Apparent energy (VAHr)forward,
reverse and net
Accuracy
Voltage and amperage: 0.5% of
reading
Watts, VARs, VA: 1% of reading
Energy: 1% per ANSI C12.1
Revenue Grade Accuracy:
ANSI C12.1
Monitoring
Breaker status
Open/close statusthru breaker

auxiliary contact
Tripped statusthru breaker bell
alarm contact
Unit healthashing status LED
when module is powered
Breaker must include auxiliary contact

and bell alarm contact accessory.
Communications
INCOM and Modbus RTU
communications
Shielded-twisted pair
communications
Daisy-chaining of multiple units
Web-based communications
available through a Power
Xpert Gateway
TX and RX communication
diagnostic LEDs
Contact Eaton for availability.

Metering Module
Control Power
The PM3 is powered directly from the
circuit breaker voltage for applications
480 Vac and below. External control
power is not required for these
applications. However, an auxiliary
24 Vdc external power input is
included for applications requiring
communications capability even when
the breaker circuit is de-energized.
Note: For 600V applications, external 24 Vdc
auxiliary power is required.
Product Selection
Table 3.2-15. PM3 Product Selection
Contact Eaton for Modbus RTU availability.

Breaker
Frame
Line
Voltage
Power
Supply
Communications
Catalog
Number
Series C, F-Frame
(225A Frame)
208, 240, 480 Integrated or 24 Vdc
auxiliary power
INCOM PM3F3225C02V48M
208, 240,
480, 600
24 Vdc auxiliary
power required
Series G, J-Frame
(250A Frame)
auxiliary power
INCOM PM3J3250C02V48M
208, 240,
480, 600
24 Vdc auxiliary
power required
Series C, K-Frame
(400A Frame)
auxiliary power
required
INCOM PM3L3630C02V48M
208, 240,
480, 600
24 Vdc auxiliary
power required
Series G, L-Frame
(600A Frame)
auxiliary power
208, 240,
480, 600
24 Vdc auxiliary
power required
3.2-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03066
3.3-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
IQ Analyzer6000 Series
067
IQ Analyzer 6000 Series
6400 Series without Wave-
form Display, 6600 Series
with Waveform Display
General Description
Applications
Monitoring of over 150 electrical
parameters
Power quality management
Energy management
rms sensing
Phase, neutral and ground currents
Volts: L-L, L-N, Avg. L-L, Avg.
L-N, N-G
Power: real, reactive, apparent
(system and per phase)
Frequency
Power factor: apparent and
displacement (system and
per phase)
Energy and demand (forward,
reverse, net) real, reactive apparent
at four different utility rates
Individual current and voltage
harmonics: magnitude, phase angle
% THD: current and voltage
Waveform capture
Minimum/maximum values
Event logging/disturbance
recording
ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5% revenue
metering accuracy, ANSI C12.16,
IEC687 Class 0.5%
Accuracy
Currents and voltages: 0.20%
Power, energy and demand: 0.40%
Frequency: 0.01 Hz
Power factor: 0.80%
Accuracy maintained from
3%800% of full scale and from
0.50 to 1.00 to +0.50 power factor
IQ Analyzer 6600 Series
Communications
Optional interface capability to
computer network for data collection,
storage and/or printout via the
Eaton Power Management software.
Graphical reverse-mode LCD display
with LED backlight
Up to seven lines of information
without PONI, 5.83 inches (148.1 mm)
with PONI
Membrane faceplate NEMA 3R
and 12 rated
Listings/Certications
UL listed, File E62791, NKCR
File E185559 (CE versions)
cUL listed #1010.1 C22.2
CE mark EN61010-1 EN50082-2
Measurement Canada Electricity
Meter AE-0782
CSA approved
Features
IQ AnalyzerComprehensive
Electrical Distribution Monitoring
The IQ Analyzer is a complete solution
to monitor and manage all aspects of
Its high-performance metering exceeds
ANSI C12.16 (0.5%) specication for
revenue meters and meets ANSI C12.20
Class 0.5%, provides quality true rms
readings through the 50th harmonic,
accurately measures nonsinusoidal
waveforms up to a 3.0 crest factor,
and displays even and odd multiples
of the fundamental current and voltage
through the 50th harmonic. Both
magnitude and phase angle of the
harmonics are displayed.
Note: For denition of power quality terms,
see Page 3.3-7.
The unique operator interface, which
includes a reverse-mode LCD display,
easy-to-use Meter Menu screens and
detailed Analysis screens, is designed
to allow a wealth of real-time and
recorded information to be accessed
easily by an operator. All program-
ming can be accomplished through
the faceplate or the communications
port. The comprehensive online Help
feature provides useful information
on device operation, programming
and troubleshooting.
3.3-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
068
Disturbance Information
With the communications option and
Eatons Power Management software
and Waveform Display software, a
Waveform Analysis will construct
waveforms of up to 56 cycles of all
currents and voltages (including neutral
and ground) to help troubleshoot
undervoltage/sag and overvoltage/swell
conditions. (See CBEMA Trend Logging
section.) By programming a reset
threshold, the duration of the voltage
disturbance can also be indicated.
The IQ Analyzer 6600 series with
Graphic Waveform Display offers the
ability to view the captured waveform
right at the device. The 6600 series also
offers the ability to detect and capture
sub-cycle voltage disturbances.
Extensive Harmonic Distortion Analysis
Current and voltage distortion data
are displayed at the device and are
accessible through the communications
port. This includes % THD, K-Factor,
crest factor, CBEMA factor, and both
magnitudes and phase angles of all
harmonics through the 50th. A snap-
shot sample of this information may be
activated by user commands, discrete
inputs or programmable thresholds
to capture distortion data during
conditions of real interest. To help
eliminate nuisance alarms, harmonic
distortion information can be captured
and relay outputs activated when THD
exceeds a programmable percentage
of fundamental or a programmable
magnitude (e.g., amperes) threshold.
Time-of-Use Metering
The IQ Analyzer offers the ability to
store energy usage data for time of
use revenue metering. It can be
programmed for any combination
of weekday, Saturday, Sunday,
22 holidays, 8 seasons, 32 schedules,
and 10 time periods per schedule.
The IQ Analyzer will keep track of the
following parameters for four different
utility rates:
Watthours
Varhours
VA-hours
Current demand
Watt demand
VA demand
VAR demand
The IQ Analyzer is equipped with
on-board logging capability, which
includes the ability to log a total of
24 parameters with intervals ranging
from 0.13 seconds (every 8 cycles)
to twice a week (5040 minutes).
The trending function can begin
immediately or can be triggered
upon receipt of a discrete input into
the IQ Analyzer. On-board logging
provides a cost-effective means of
distributed data storage, where real-
time communications may not be
feasible or for applications where
data storage redundancy is desired.
Four trend data logs are stored in
non-volatile memory aboard the
IQ Analyzer and can be retrieved
at the display or via communications
for viewing using Eaton software.
Up to 24 parameters with storage
capacity for up to 90,000 data points
Up to 234 days of data can be stored
when recording a parameter every
15 minutes
Trends 1, 2 and 3 can save data on
a discrete contact input
Trend 4 can save data on a power
quality or meter event
Minimum and maximum recording
(min./max. three-phase average
current, max. IG, min./max. three-
phase average VLL and VLN,
max. VNG, max. system watts,
vars and VA, min./max. apparent
and displacement PF). Using this
feature, minimum and maximums
reached during each trend interval
are recorded
ITIC (formally CBEMA) Trend Logging
The IQ Analyzer can be congured
to store the necessary data so that
PowerNet can display a sag or swell
voltage event on the industry standard
ITIC (formerly CBEMA) curve for
predictive maintenance and trouble-
shooting. This application uses the
IQ Analyzer waveform capture
for high-speed events along with
historical trend logging for longer term
voltage disturbances. Once this data
is uploaded to a PC running the Power
Management Software Event Viewer,
the information is analyzed, displayed
and stored. Automatic uploading
of ITIC events can be selected in
PowerNet. A three-phase event will be
correctly displayed as a single point
on the ITIC curve.
Event Logging
The IQ Analyzer will store in non-
volatile memory the time and reason
for last 504 events. These events can
be viewed from the graphical display
or accessed via communications. In
addition to all of the meter events listed
in the Event Conditions paragraph on
Page 3.3-4, the following events are
entered into the event log.
Time and date of:
Alarms
Meter power up
All resets
All setting changes
Communications established or lost
Event logging is another powerful
troubleshooting tool within the
IQ Analyzer.
Extensive I/O and
Communications Capability
One analog and three digital inputs
are provided to interface with sensors
and transducers. Three analog outputs
and four relay contacts are furnished
to share data with PLCs and control
systems and to actuate alarms and
control relays. Terminals are captive
clamp type and nger safe. With the
communications option, the device
can be remotely monitored, controlled
and programmed.
Ratings
Application to 500 kV, no PTs to 600V
CT ratios selectable from 5: 5A
to 10,000: 5A
Standard 120/600 Vac line
Three-phase power supply module,
100600 Vac
Separate source power supply
module available, 100240 Vac
or 100250 Vdc
DC only separate source power
module also available, 2448 Vdc
3.3-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
069
Displayed Information Features
All information is accessible at the
device or through the communica-
tions port via Eatons Power
Management Software
Quality true rms readings through
50th harmonic
Complies with the accuracy
portion of ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5%
revenue metering specication
Accurate readings for nonsinusoidal
waveforms with up to 3.0 crest factor
Screens display auto ranging units,
kilo units, mega units as needed
10-digit energy readings
Displays multiple parameters at the
same time
Programmable custom screens
Meter Menu Screens
Meter Menu
Examples of Meter Menu
Custom Screen
Custom Screen
The IQ Analyzer allows a user to
view commonly used parameters
by scrolling through its LED indicator
Meter Menu.
Meter Menu Displayed Information
Current:
Phases A, B, C, average
Neutral
Ground (separate CT)
Voltage:
Phases A-B, B-C, C-A, average
Phases A-N, B-N, C-N, average
Neutral-ground
Power:
Real (watts)
Reactive (vars)
Apparent (VA)
Phases A, B, C and system
Energy (forward, reverse and net):
Real (kWh)
Reactive (kvarh) apparent
(kVAh)no reverse or net
Frequency, time and date
Demand:
System current (amperes)
Systems real power (kW)
System reactive power (kVAR)
System apparent power (kVA)
Power factor:
Displacement
Apparent
% THD current:
Phases A, B, C, N
% THD voltage:
Phases A-B, B-C, C-A
Phases A-N, B-N, C-N
K-Factor
ITIC (CBEMA) derating factor
(displayed as Z)
Crest factor
Discrete input and output status
Analog input reading
CustomUser may program four
screens to show any combination
of seven Meter Menu parameters
per screen
Harmonic Analysis Screens
Harmonic Spectrum Available
with Model 6600
Minimum and Maximum Values
Current:
Phases A, B, C, N, G
Voltage:
Phases A-N, B-N, C-N, N-G
Power:
Real (watts)
Reactive (vars)
Apparent (VA)
Power factor:
Apparent
Displacement
(three-phase and system)
Frequency.
THD (amperes, volts, and %):
Current (phases A, B, C, N)
Voltage (phases A-B, B-C, C-A,
A-N, B-N, C-N)
All minimum/maximum values may
be reset via reset pushbutton on
faceplate, discrete input or com-
munications command. Values are
updated at least once every 16 line
cycles.
The F3 function key accesses the
Harmonic Analysis screens. Two
cycles of data sampled at 128
samples/cycle are simultaneously
recorded for:
Current:
Phases A, B, C, N, G
Voltage:
Phases A-N, B-N, C-N
Neutral to ground
Magnitudes (or % of fundamental)
of odd and even multiples of the
fundamental from 2nd50th are
displayed. The phase angle associated
with each multiple of the fundamental
is also displayed.
3.3-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
070
Event/Alarm Analysis Screens
Example of Event Analysis Screens
Waveform Screen Available
with Model 6600
Pressing the F2 function key accesses
the Event Analysis screens. These
display the following data for up to
ten event/alarm conditions:
Description, date, and time of
event/alarm with 10 millisecond
resolution
Current, voltages, power readings,
demand readings, frequency and
% THD at time of event/alarm
Current and voltage distortion
information available on Harmonic
Analysis screens
Event data is stored in non-volatile
memory. If a reset threshold is pro-
grammed, the duration of the event
(e.g., undervoltage) is also displayed.
With Eatons PowerNet communica-
tions option and Series III software,
waveforms and harmonic proles
may be displayed on a PC.
Event Conditions
Events may be triggered by up to
seven of any of the following
conditions:
Voltage Disturbances
Undervoltage/sagany VL-L, VL-N
(40%100%)
Note: 60% minimum for self-powered unit.
Overvoltage/swellany VL-L, VL-N
(100%750%)
If zero time delay is programmed, any
disturbance lasting two cycles (less if
magnitude is sufcient to effect rms
readings) will trigger a voltage
disturbance event/alarm.
Sub-cycle transient capture/excess
dv/dt on VA-N, VB-N, VC-N
Note: 6600 Series only.
Sub-cycle voltage interruption
on VA-N, VB-N, VC-N
Note: 6600 Series only.
Maximum Threshold Exceeded
Currentsphases A, B, C, neutral
and ground
Voltageneutral to ground
System powerwatts, VA, VARs
System power factordisplacement
and apparent
Demand
Currentsphase A, B, C and AVG
System powerwatts, VARs, VA
Frequency
% THD or magnitude total
harmonic distortion
Currents
Phases A, B, C, neutral
Voltage
VA-N, VB-N, VC-N, VA-B, VB-C,
VC-A
Minimum Threshold Exceeded
Currentsphases A, B, C
System powerwatts, vars, VA
System power factor
displacement and apparent
Frequency
Voltage Phase Unbalance
Voltage L-L, L-N
Current Phase Unbalance
CurrentPhases A, B, C
Discrete Input Energized
Input 1, 2, 3
All trigger conditions have program-
mable time delays from 0.1 to
60 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
Demand Recording
Peak Demands are date and time
stamped for:
Current phases A, B, C, average
System power:
Real (watts)
Reactive (VARs)
Apparent (VA)
Input/Output
Extensive input/output capability
is standard on the IQ Analyzer.
In addition to monitoring three-phase
currents and voltages, separate inputs
are provided for both ground and
neutral currents. Voltage of neutral-to-
ground is also monitored to indicate
the presence of harmonics and
potential downstream grounding
problems. Analog and digital I/O
provide interfaces for transducers,
relays, PLCs and control systems.
Current Inputs
Five ampere secondary CT
connections for:
Phases A, B, C
Ground
Neutral
Separate ground and neutral
CT inputs
CT range 5:5 to 10,000:5
(any integer)
Voltage Inputs
Phases A, B, C (from 120 Vac
500 kV AC)
120/240 Vac control power input
standardnot required with
optional line power module
Separate ground-to-neutral
voltage reference
PT range 120:120 to 500,000:120
(any integer)
External 120V secondary PTs are
required above 600 Vac, optional
from 120600 Vac.
3.3-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
071
Three dry contact discrete inputs may
be programmed by the user to:
Trigger Event Analysisthe
information described in Event
Analysis Screens, including
Harmonic Analysis information, can
be recorded when external devices
trip or change state by wiring their
auxiliary contacts into these inputs
Act as a synch.-pulse input to
synchronize power demand
windows with utility provided
synch pulse
Actuate a relay output
Reset relay output, peak demands,
Trend Analysis records and Event
Analysis records
With communications option,
provide remote status indication
on Eatons network
Status of input contacts is displayed in
the Meter Menu Custom screen.
Relay Output Contacts
Four Form C NO/NC relay contacts may
be independently programmed to:
Act as a kWh, kvarh or kVAh pulse
initiator output
Actuate on one or more event
conditionsincluding discrete input
and Eaton Power Management
Software command (through
communications port)
Reverse sequence alarm
Each Relay may be set for Auto
or Manual Reset with 030 minute
release delay (one second incre-
ments). Relays are Form C NO/NC.
Relay(s) programmed to actuate
on undervoltage also have a
programmable 030 minute delay
on power-up for transfer applications.
Figure 3.3-1. IQ AnalyzerRear View
Current Transformer
Connections
Earth Ground
Analog Input
Common
Analog
Outputs
Remote
Inputs
Field Replaceable
Fuse
Communication
Connection
Power
Module
Connection
Separate
Source
Power Supply
Chassis Ground
Relay #1
Relay #2
Relay #3
Relay #4
System
Voltage
Connections
Analog Input and Outputs
One analog input and four analog
outputs may be congured as 020
or 420 mA. The analog input is
displayed at the device as a percent-
age and is accessible through the
communications port. The analog
input provides an interface with gas
ow meters, temperature transducers
or other analog devices.
The analog outputs may be
programmed to reect any of
the following:
Currentphases A, B, C, average,
N, G
VoltageL-L, L-N, N-G
Power:
Real (watts)
Reactive (VARs)
Apparent (VA)
% THD:
Current (phases A, B, C, N)
Voltage (L-L, L-N)
Frequencysystem
Power factor:
System displacement PF
System apparent PF
3.3-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
072
IQ Analyzer Wiring Diagram
Figure 3.3-2. Sample Wiring Diagram for a Three-Phase, Four-Wire System
H1G
H2G
H1N
H2N
H1C
H2C
H1B
H2B
H1A
H2A
Line Load
4 CT
3 CT
2 CT
IQ Analyzer
Analog I/O
Outputs
1 2 3
Control Power
Separate Source Power Supply Module
(Also Available with Control Power Derived from Monitored Line)
(See Label for
120 Vac/125 Vdc Connections)
1 2 3 4
(-)
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Relay No. 1 Relay No. 2 Relay No. 3 Relay No. 4
Analog
Input
Earth
Ground
1 CT
5 CT
Wye
Connection
Optional
Ground
Current
1 2 3
13 14
(+) (-)
15 16
(+) (-)
17 18
(+)
N
L3
L2
L1
A
B
C
Neutral
Terminal
A B C
Fuse
Fuse
Ground
4
Three-Phase, Four-Wire (Above 600V)
External Potential Transformers and Current Transformers
Note: External PTs Not
Required Under 600V
3.3-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
073
Denition of Power Quality Terms
Figure 3.3-3. Denition of Power Quality Terms
Displacement Power Factor =
= Fundamental (60 Hz) watts to
(60 Hz) VA.
A ratio of fundamental (60 Hz)
real power to apparent power.
Apparent Power Factor =
= Total rms watts to VA.
A ratio of total real power
(including harmonic
component) to apparent power.
K-Factor =
A derating factor that is
related to the sum of the
squares of harmonic currents
times the squares of their
harmonic numbers (multiples
of the fundamental).
CBEMA Factor =
A transformer harmonic
derating factor (THDF) dened
as a pure sine waves crest
factor (1.4141) divided by the
measured crest factor.
Crest Factor =
Ratio of peak current to rms
current.
W
W
2
Var
2
+
---------------------------
W
VA
-------
h
n
2
I
n
I
1
---

2
I
n
I
1
---

2
---------------------
2
CF
------
2 I
rms
I
Peak
------------------ =
I
Peak
I
rms
-----------
Figure 3.3-4. Dimensions and Cutout
Figure 3.3-5. Drilling Pattern Figure 3.3-6. Drilling Pattern for
Flange Mounting
6.72
(170.7)
10.25
(260.4)
Program Help
Down
Up
Normal
Event
Relay
Program
IQ Analyzer
F1
Previous s
Level
F2 F3 F4 Home
Current
Voltage
Power (Watts)
Power (Vars)
Power (VA) VV
Energy
Demand
Power Factor
Frequency
% THD
Distortion Factor
Custom
Reset
.06 RAD
4 Places 2.23
4.45
6.68
8.90
2.53
5.06
2.69
5.38
.218 DIA
10 Places
9.38
4.69
10.41
(264.4
8.11
(206.0)
4.06
(103.1)
.213
(5.4)
Typ. for 8 11.03
(280.2)
10.09
(256.3)
5.52
(140.2) .94
(23.9)
7.41
(188.2)
C
L
C
L
3.3-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
074
Table 3.3-1. Input/Output Information
Table 3.3-2. Control Power Input
When directly wired to 480 Vac, IQ Analyzer can ride through a continuous sag that is 20% of rated voltage.
Fuses
Self-powered units with IQMSSPM have 0.75A, 600V Bus
Type KTK-R-3/4 fuses (three required)
Separate source dual voltage units with IQMSSPM have a
single 0.20 (5.0) x 0.79 (20.0) 0.25A fuse
Separate source DC units with IQMDCPM do not have
user-replaceable fuses
Accuracy (in percent full scale)
Accuracy from 3300% of full scale and from 0.5. to 1.00 to 0.5 power factor.
Current and voltage: 0.20%
Power, energy, and demand: 0.40%
Frequency: 0.04%
Power factor: 0.80%
THD: 1.00%
Specic current accuracies:
0.20% of full scale to 200% of full scale and 150% crest factor
0.40% of reading for currents to 800% of full scale
Power and energy: start recording with an average of 3 mA secondary current
relative
humidity
Device weight: 5.8 lbs (2.6 kg)
Current Inputs (each channel)
Conversion: True rms, 32 sample/cycle (all samples used
in all rms calculations)
CT input: 5A secondary (any integer 5:5 to 10,000:5)
Burden: 0.05 VA
Overload withstand: 40A AC continuous, 300A AC 1 second
Range: 8 x CT continuous
Accuracy: 0.1% of CT primary rating, 0.2% of reading
above 150% of rating, sinusoidal (see accuracy
below for non-sinusoidal specications)
Input impedance: 0.002 ohm
Discrete Inputs (dry contact)
+30 Vdc differential across each discrete input pair of terminals.
Minimum pulse width: 1.6 msec
Optically isolated inputs to protect IQ Analyzer circuitry.
Analog Outputs (4)
0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA into maximum 750 ohm load. Accuracy: 1%.
Analog Input (1)
0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA into 200 ohm load. Accuracy: 1%.
Voltage Inputs (each channel)
Conversion: True rms, 32 samples/cycle (all samples used
in all rms calculations)
PT Input: Direct or any integer 120:120 to 500,000:120
Range: 30 to 660 Vac (separate source and DC source)
Nominal Full Scale: 100600 Vac
Burden: 21 VA (self-powered only)
Overload Withstand: 635 Vac, continuous
700 Vac, 1 second
Input Impedance: 1 megohm
Relay Output Contacts (4)
Form C dry contact: 10A at
120/240 Vac (resistive)
10A at 30 Vdc (resistive)
30A make (50 ms)
at 240 Vac/240 Vdc
Minimum pulse width: Four cycles (68 ms)
Withstand Rating: 1000 Vac, 1 minute across contacts 5000 Vac
(contacts to coil, 1 minute) 10,000 Vac
(contacts to coil, surge voltage)
Frequency Range
2066 Hz fundamental (up to 50th harmonic)
Relay Response Time
(excluding programmed time delays):
2 line cycles for discrete input, Power Xpert Software command
(communications port)
45 line cycles for voltage disturbance, voltage unbalance
910 line cycles for all others
Harmonic Response (voltages, currents)
50th harmonic
Description Separate Source Self-Powered
DC Source
Input range, AC
Frequency range
110240 Vac 10%
4566 Hz
110600 Vac 10%
4566 Hz
N/A
N/A
Input range, DC
Burden
110250 Vdc 10%
21 VA
N/A
21 VA
2448 Vdc 20%
21 VA
3.3-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
075
Table 3.3-3. Catalog Information
Use three-phase power module if meter electronics are to be powered from the three-phase line voltage of 600V and below. Use separate source
power module if the meter electronics is to be powered from a separate 110240 Vac or 110250 Vdc source. Use 2448 Vdc power module if only
2448 Vdc is available to power electronics.
Separate power modules can be ordered if an active meter needs to have the existing power supply changed to a different voltage.
Description Catalog
Number
IQ Analyzer, separate source power module
IQ Analyzer, 2448 Vdc power module
IQ Analyzer, three-phase power module
IQA6410
IQA6420
IQA6430
IQ Analyzer, separate source power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage disturbance capture
IQ Analyzer, 2448 Vdc power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage disturbance capture
IQ Analyzer, three-phase power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage disturbance capture
IQA6610
IQA6620
IQA6630
IQ Flange, to provide extra clearance when mounting

36.00-inch (914.4 mm) extension cable for remote mounting of power module
45.00-inch (1143.0 mm) extension cable for remote mounting of power module
IQFLANGE
IQACABLE
IQA45CABLE
2448 Vdc separate source power module

100240 Vac and 100250 Vdc separate source power module
Three-phase, self-powered power module
IQMDCPM
IQMSSPM
IQM3PPM
INCOM communication module IPONI
RS-485 communication module with Modbus protocol MPONI

3.3-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03076
3.4-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Accessories
IQ Flange/Panel Mounting Adapter Kit
077
IQ Flange
IQ Flange
Retrot Applications
For applications where extra door-
mounting space is required, a ange-
mounting unit is available. The IQ
Flange provides an extra 2.50 inches
(63.5 mm) of clearance for the device.
For use with the following products:
IQ Analyzer
IQ DP-4000
MP-3000
DT-3000
Product Selection
Figure 3.4-1. Typical IQ Flange
Drilling Pattern
for IQ 100/200 Series and
PXM 2000 Meters
The ange adapter plate can be
installed as follows:
1. Remove the old meter from the
panel or door. Many IQ metering
products use the typical IQ
drilling pattern shown in
Figure 3.4-2 for mounting
2. Install the ange adapter plate.
Mount it from the rear using the
six screws provided in the kit. The
ange adapter plate screw hole
pattern shown in Figure 3.4-2
should match the typical IQ
drilling pattern. If not, perform
the next step
3. Drill six holes in the panel or the
door to mount the ange adapter
plate. Follow the typical IQ drilling
pattern. You need only the top,
center and bottom sets of holes
4. Install the new IQ 100/200 Series
or PXM2000 meter in the ange
adapter plate. Secure it from
behind with four at washers,
lock washers and nuts provided
with the meter
Product Selection
Dimensions
Figure 3.4-2. Flange Adapter Plate
Screw Hole Pattern
Description Catalog
Number
IQ Flange IQFLANGE
4.69
(119.1)
9.38
(238.3)
2.23
(56.6)
4.45
(113.0)
6.68
(169.7)
8.90
(226.1)
0.218 (5.5) DIA
10 Places
2.53
(64.3)
5.06
(128.5)
0.06 (1.5) RAD
4 Places
2.69
(68.3)
5.38
(136.7)
Description Catalog
Number
Panel mounting adapter kit
IQ 100/200 and PXM 2000 Series
adapter kit to IQ Analyzer/
IQ DP-4000/IQ Data
IQ250-PMAK
6.72
(170.7)
5.38
(136.7)
4.45
(113.0)
10.25
(260.4)
4.45
(113.0)
3.4-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Accessories
Sub-Network Master Local Display
078
Sub-Network Master
Local Display (SMLD)
Sub-Network Master Local Display
General Description
Eatons sub-network master local
display (SMLD) is an electronic
submetering device that provides
users the ability to view information
from sub-network connected devices
locally at switchgear, switchboards,
panelboards, motor control centers
and control panels, nearby or
thousands of feet away. The SMLD has
a built-in LCD display with navigations
for conguring, as well as monitoring.
Auto-learn capabilities complete the
conguration requirements, enabling
customization by use of user-dened
descriptions, as well as adding and
deleting meters.
The SMLD can be operated standalone
or in parallel with the new FetchIT
software application or the Power Xpert
complete energy monitoring system
solution software.
Acquire and display data (no control)
from up to 100 devices that can
communicate on Eatons INCOM
network, used in the PowerNet
monitoring system
Features, Benets and Functions
Auto-learn connected devices
Conguration stored in
non-volatile memory
Host communications arbitration
algorithm enables seamless
integration into existing
communication networks
Functions standalone or networked
Following devices are supported:
IQ 210/220/230
IQ Energy Sentinel (F, J, K Frames)
Universal Internal Energy Sentinel
Universal External Energy Sentinel
IQ Power Sentinel
Digitrip OPTIM 1050L
Keypad functions:
Menu
Scroll up
Scroll down
Enter
Backlit LCD, 4-line x 20 character
Safety standardsUL 61010B-1
EMC Susceptibility Standards
IEC 1000-4-3, 1995 Radiated
RF Immunity
EMC Emissions StandardsFCC
Part 15, Class B Radiated Emissions
Product Selection
Frequency Range
50/60 Hz
Power
Power consumption: 200 mA
(maximum) at 24 Vac, 24 Vdc
Power connector rating: 24 Vac or
24 Vdc at 1A
Power source: 120 Vac or 24 Vdc,
UL Class 2 or CSA Class III SELV
transformer in accordance with C22.2
No. 1010-1. The voltage range is 18
to 24 Vac or Vdc, 200 mA (maximum)
Ratings
Operating humidity: 5 to 90%
maximum noncondensing
Altitude: 10,000 feet (3048m)
Environment: indoor use only
Mounting Information
4.37 H x 4.37 W x 1.50 D inches
(111.0 H x 111.0 W x 38.1 D mm)
Door mount or panel mount
Communications
INCOM Frequency Shift Key (FSK)
network compatible 9600 baud
Non-intrusive arbitration algorithm
Passive monitoring automatically
enabled by arbitration algorithm
while host PC is communicating
Master on INCOM network upon
data request from front panel if host
PC is not communicating
Addresses for sub-network devices
can be 001044 hex (1255 decimals)
Dimensions
Approximate dimensions
in inches (mm)
Table 3.4-4. Meter Base Unit
Note: DIN (92 mm x 92 mm) access cutout.
Figure 3.4-3. Typical Use Diagram of SMLD
Description Catalog
Number
Local display (120 Vac)
Local display (24 Vac or Vdc)
LDISP120
LDISP24
Width Height Depth
4.37 (111.0) 4.37 (111.0) 1.50 (38.1)
Digitrip
OPTIM 1050C
IQ
ES or
PS
IQ 210/220/230
Computer
with Power
Management
Software
SMLD
Multiple Units as Required
3.4-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Accessories
Enclosed Meters
079
Enclosed Meters
Enclosed Meters
General Description
Designed for Eatons IQ 100 (130/140/
150), IQ 250/260 and Power Xpert
Meter 2000 series, Eatons Enclosed
Meter offers mounting and installation
exibility, especially in retrot
applications where no metering
compartment or mounting space
is available in the existing electrical
distribution equipment or where
installation time is a premium. Factory
designed and wired, Eatons Enclosed
Meter offers savings in labor and
installation costs because input
current and voltage wiring as well
as I/O wiring is pre-wired to terminal
blocks inside the enclosure. To
ensure safety, Eatons Enclosed
Meter includes a primary fusible
disconnect for line voltage that can be
turned off during meter maintenance.
For applications with line voltages
above 265 Vac, an optional control
power transformer is supplied in the
enclosure. Control voltage can also be
supplied via a separate source that is
wired to the eld installation terminal
block. CT inputs for the meter are
wired directly to shorting terminal
blocks for easy eld installation.
Factory Wired
The meters are factory pre-wired to
ensure safety and to reduce eld wiring
time and errors. The enclosure includes
an internally mounted door interlocked
fusible disconnect switch as well as
an appropriately sized control power
transformer that is connected to
the load side of the disconnect. All
CT connections from the meter are
internally wired to shorting terminal
blocks. The meters I/O inputs are also
conveniently pre-wired to terminal
blocks. The entire assembly carries
a UL 508A and cUL certication.
NEMA Rating Offered
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4X
Standalone, enclosed meters
are ideal for new metering
applications where no metering
existed previously, retrot
installations or where ease
of installation is required
Service entrance applications
where energy supplier verication
monitoring is desired
Features and Benets
Saves installation time and cost
One part number to order; no need
to worry that any part has been
left out
Pick the meter you need as it
is designed to t various Eaton
power and energy meters, at
varying price points
Table 3.4-5. Catalog Number Selection
NEMA 12 Front View, Door Open
NEMA 3R Open and Folded Out
Enclosure
- = Enclosure
Meter Type
PXM2250MA65105
PXM2250MA65115
PXM2250MA65145
PXM2260MA65105
PXM2260MA65115
PXM2260MA65145
PXM2270MA65105
PXM2270MA65115
PXM2270MA65145
IQ250MA65100
IQ250MA65110
IQ250MA65114
IQ260MA65100
IQ260MA65110
IQ260MA65114
IQ150MA6511
PXM2250MA65105 - 2 B
NEMA Rating
2 = NEMA 12
3 = NEMA 3R
4 = NEMA 4X
CPT Option
A = No CPT
B = Control power
transformer
Pre-Wired Control
Power, Voltage
and CT Inputs
Pre-Wired
Fusible Disconnect
Pre-Wired Neutral,
Ground and Input/Output
Terminal Blocks
Pre-Wired Current
Transformer Shorting
Terminal Block
3.4-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Accessories
Enclosed Meters
080
Table 3.4-6. Enclosed Meters
Note: Specications are subject to change without notice and
represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all
options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features
and functionality may vary depending on selected options,
rmware version and product model. Please refer to the technical
data sheet and User Manual for detailed specications.
Figure 3.4-4. Enclosed MetersApproximate Dimensions
Description Specication
Enclosure
rating
NEMA 12, 3R, 4X
Enclosure
operating
temperature
20 to +40C
Note: Temperature range of meter is 20 to 70C.
If applied outside, proper precautions should be
taken to avoid exceeding the maximum and
minimum temperature ratings of the meter.
Dimensions NEMA 12
(8.00 inches wide x 16.12 inches high x 8.36 inches deep)
NEMA 3R/4X
(8.00 inches wide x 16.12 inches high x 9.75 inches deep)
Meters IQ 250/260, PXM 2000 and IQ 130/140/150 models
Control
voltage
Up to 265Vno CPT required
Greater than 265VCPT required
Separate source controlno CPT required
Basic
model
Fusible disconnectprimary voltage
6-point shorting block
Ground terminal block
Neutral terminal block
8-point terminal block for input/output
modules for IQ 250/260 and PXM 2000
Wiring Wired for three-phase four-wire applications. Three-
phase three-wire applications will need to change the
wiring for both the voltage and current per the wiring
diagram in the meter instruction manual.
Certications UL 508A and cUL
Source
control
No separate source control voltage required for
applications below 265 Vac
Rating 600V rated power voltage terminal block and wiring
Pre-wire Pre-wired current transformer shorting terminal
block, neutral, ground, voltage, control power,
fusible disconnect, and input/output terminal blocks
Latch Padlocking latch provision
Optional
features
Control power transformer50 VA control
power supply for meter where monitored
voltage is above 265 Vac
7.41
(188.2)
8.36
(212.3)
8.91
(226.3)
9.09
(230.9)
8.00
(203.2)
5.00
(127.0)
1.50
(38.1)
0.56
(14.2)
15.06
(382.5)
16.12
(409.4)
8.00
(203.2)
5.00
(127.0)
1.50
(38.1)
15.06
(382.5)
16.12
(409.4)
0.280 TYP. 4x
9.75
(247.7)
This Drip
Cap on N3R
Family Only
3.4-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Accessories
Current Transformers
081
General Description
Eatons low voltage current transformers
are available in both solid core and split
core designs. Engineered for electronic
metering applications, all solid core
designs and selected split core designs
offer ANSI metering quality accuracy.
The solid core designs also meet ANSI
C57.13 relay accuracy requirements
including over-ranging capabilities. The
current transformer offering has a 5A
secondary at the rated primary current.
Split core CTs are specically designed
to be installed around primary conduc-
tors without disconnecting wires or
breaking the circuit to be monitored.
These current transformers are perfect
solutions for energy management
applications and are manufactured
for installation ease.
For new construction and retrot
applications where no current
transformer exists, Eaton offers a
complete selection of low voltage
(up to 600V) current transformers.
These current transformers can be
used in commercial grade applications
such as control panels and panel-
boards. Additionally, they can be
used for most industrial metering and
relaying applications in switchboards,
switchgear and motor control centers.
Note: Not for use with IQ 35M or IQ MESII.
Product Selection
Table 3.4-7. Solid Core ANSI Metering Accuracy
Table 3.4-8. Split Core ANSI Metering Accuracy
Table 3.4-9. Split Core Current Transformers
Primary
Current
Rating
ANSI B0.1
Metering
Class
at 60 Hz
(Accuracy
in %)
Window
Size in
Inches (mm)
Diameter
Catalog
Number
300
400
500
600
750
800
1000
1200
0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-301
S050-401
S050-501
S050-601
S050-751
S050-801
S050-102
S050-122
50
100
150
200
1.2
0.6
0.3
0.3
1.25 (31.8) S060-500
S060-101
S060-151
S060-201
400
500
600
750
800
1000
1200
0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-401
S080-501
S080-601
S080-751
S080-801
S080-102
S080-122
500
600
750
800
1000
1200
1500
1600
2000
2500
3000
0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-501
S090-601
S090-751
S090-801
S090-102
S090-122
S090-152
S090-162
S090-202
S090-252
S090-302
600
750
800
1000
1200
1500
1600
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-601
S025-751
S025-801
S025-102
S025-122
S025-152
S025-162
S025-202
S025-252
S025-302
S025-352
S025-402
25
50
0.3 Wound
Primary
W190-025
W190-050
Primary
Current
Rating
ANSI B0.1
Metering
Class
at 60 Hz
(Accuracy
in %)
Window
Size in
Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
400
500
600
800
1000
1200
1500
1600
2000
2.4
2.4
2.4
1.2
1.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
2.00 x 5.50
(50.8 x 139.7)
M000-401
M000-501
M000-601
M000-801
M000-102
M000-122
M000-152
M000-162
M000-202
600
750
800
1000
1200
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4.8
4.8
2.4
2.4
1.2
1.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.3
4.10 x 7.10
(104.1 x 180.3)
M050-601
M050-751
M050-801
M050-102
M050-122
M050-152
M050-202
M050-252
M050-302
M050-352
M050-402
Primary
Current
Rating
Accuracy
at 60 Hz
(in %)
Window
Size in
Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
100
150
200
300
400
5.0
5.0
4.0
2.0
2.0
0.80 x 1.95
(20.3 x 49.5)
M030-101
M030-151
M030-201
M030-301
M030-401
100
150
200
300
400
5.0
4.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.42 x 1.53
(36.1 x 38.9)
M040-101
M040-151
M040-201
M040-301
M040-401
200
300
400
500
600
750
800
1000
1200
1.0 2.60 x 2.75
(66.0 x 69.9)
M060-201
M060-301
M060-401
M060-501
M060-601
M060-751
M060-801
M060-102
M060-122
500
600
800
1000
1200
1500
1600
2000
2500
3000
1.0 2.60 x 6.25
(66.0 x 158.8)
M080-501
M080-601
M080-801
M080-102
M080-122
M080-152
M080-162
M080-202
M080-252
M080-302
3.4-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Accessories
082
Figure 3.4-5. S050Approximate Dimensions
H
1
X
1
L
A
B
E
L
(4) Open Slots 0.22 x 0.34
(5.6 x 8.6)
2.23
(56.6)
1.67
(42.4)
1.10
(27.9)
2.75
(69.9)
3.53
(90.0)
3.00
(76.2)
0.44
(11.2)
3.70
(94.0)
1.88
(47.8)
0.31
(7.9)
2.25
(57.2)
1.56 Dia.
(39.6)
H1
X1
(2) Holes 0.20 (5.1) Diameter Approximate weight: 1 lb
H1
X1
0.88
(22.4)
3.62
(91.9)
(2) 0.28 x 0.50 Slots
(7.1 x 12.7)
2.88
(73.2)
3.10
(78.7)
4.00
(101.6)
5.25
(133.4)
H
1
X
1
0.44 (11.2)
4.00
(101.6)
1.95
(49.5)
See Tables
(2) Slots
0.28 x 0.50
(7.1 x 12.7)
Approximate weight: 5.25 lbs
3.4-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Accessories
083
(8) Open Slots
0.47 x 0.22 (11.9 x 5.6)
5.73 (145.5)
4.85 (123.2)
3.81 (96.8)
2.19
(55.6)
H
1
X
1
L
A
B
E
L
2.91
(73.9)
1.15
(29.2)
0.44
(11.2)
5.73
(145.5)
2.84
(72.1)
4.70
(119.4)
0.51
(13.0)
3.25 (82.6) Dia. H1
X1
0.42 (10.7) Dia.
(4) Holes
1.09
(27.7)
0.55
(14.0)
Approximate weight: 2.5 lbs
H
1
X
1
0
L
A
B
E
L
5.92 (150.4)
4.85 (123.2)
3.81 (96.8)
1.15
(29.2)
2.91
(73.9)
3.50
(88.9)
6.17
(156.7)
X1
4.25 (108.0) Dia. H1
0.42
(10.7)
4.86 (123.4)
2.97
(75.4)
(4) 0.28 x 0.63 (7.1 x 16.0) Slots
(8) Open Slots 0.47 x 0.22 (11.9 x 5.6)
2.19
(55.6)
Approximate weight: 3 lbs
3.4-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Accessories
084
Figure 3.4-10. W190Approximate Dimensions
H
1
X
1
0
L
A
B
E
L
4.10
(104.1)
1.28
(32.5)
6.37
(161.8)
2.98
(75.7)
0.56
(14.2)
8.50
(215.9)
0.75
(19.1)
0.44
(11.2)
8.50
(215.9)
6.31
(160.3)
H1
6.75
(171.5)
4.25
(108.0)
0.88
(22.4)
6.75 (171.5)
(4) 0.56 (14.2)
Diameter Holes
(4) Slots 0.44 x 1.00
(11.2 x 25.4)
H2 X2
0.38
(9.7)
0.50
(12.7)
2.75 (69.9)
(4) Closed Slots
0.21 x 0.50 (5.3 x 12.7)
(4) Open Slots
0.44 x 0.50 (11.2 x 12.7)
3.25
(82.6)
2.19
(55.6)
4.69
(119.1)
4.12
(104.6)
LABEL
3.50
(88.9)
4.50
(114.3)
0.75
(19.1)
0.44
(11.2)
4.88
(124.0)
(2) Mounting Holes
0.38 (9.7) Diameter
3.48 (88.4)
H1 X1
L
A
B
E
L
H
1
X
2
X
1
3.4-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Accessories
085
Figure 3.4-11. M000Approximate Dimensions
H
1
X
1

X
2
T
h
i
s

E
n
d
R
e
m
o
v
a
b
l
e
2.00
(50.8)
This End
Removable
L
A
B
E
L
4.25 (108.0)
5.50
(139.7)
H1
X1 X2
3.50 (88.9)
0.38
(9.7)
1.13
(28.7)
(2) 0.19 (4.8) Diameter Holes
7.75
(196.9)
Approximate
weight: 1.5 lbs
0.75
(19.1)
(4) 0.31 (7.9) Dia. Holes
This End Removable
LABEL
4.10
(104.1)
H1
X1
1.63
(41.4)
0.44
(11.2)
L
A
B
E
L
T
h
i
s

E
n
d

R
e
m
o
v
a
b
l
e
H
1
7.10
(180.3)
10.00
(254.0)
10.90
(276.9)
6.40
(162.6)
7.30
(185.4)
3.4-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 03
Accessories
086
Figure 3.4-15. M060Approximate Dimensions Figure 3.4-16. M080Approximate Dimensions
1.42
(36.1)
1.20
(30.5)
3.38 (85.9)
1.53
(38.9)
4.12
(104.6)
3.52
(89.4)
4.78
(121.4)
2.50
(63.5)
X2
H1
L
A
B
E
L
X1
Terminal Arrangement for
Ratios 100:5 through 200:5
L
A
B
E
L
X
2
H
1
H
1
H
1
H1
H1
2.75 (69.9)
2.70 (68.6)
5.80 (147.3)
1.75
(44.5)
X1 - WHITE
X2 - BLACK
6.05 (153.7)
L
A
B
E
L
H1
H1
6.25 (158.8)
9.25 (235.0)
2.60 (66.0)
6.05 (153.7)
1.75
(44.5)
X1 - WHITE
X2 - BLACK


September 2011

Contents

Protective and Predictive Relays
4.0-1

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

04

001

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
v
e

a
n
d
P
r
e
d
i
c
t
i
v
e

R
e
l
a
y
s


Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.0-2

Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1-1

Digitrip 3000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1-1

Dual-Source Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1-6

Digitrip 3000Drawout Case Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1-8

FP-4000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1-11


4.1-16


4.1-21

EDR-3000 Distribution Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1-27

EDR-4000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1-31

EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1-38

Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2-1

Freedom Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2-1

C440/

XT

Electronic Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2-1

C441 Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2-5

MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2-11

MP-4000 Motor Protection Relay with Voltage Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2-17

EMR-3000 Motor Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2-22

EMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2-29

Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2-37

Differential Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3-1

MD-3000 Motor Differential Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3-1

DP-300 Current Differential Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3-3

Transformer Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3-6

ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3-6

Generator Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3-12

EGR-4000 Generator Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3-12

Voltage Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4-1

VR-300 Multifunctional Voltage Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4-1

Transformer Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4-4

TC-100 Transformer Temperature Controller
for Dry-Type Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4-4
InsulGard Predictive Maintenance


4.5-1

Technical Data and Specications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5-4

General Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5-5

Switchgear Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5-5

Motor Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5-6

Generator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5-8

Connection Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5-10
Specications

See Eatons



CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2010
Digitrip 3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.A

FP-4000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.B

FP-5000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.C

FP-6000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.D

MP-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.02.E

MP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.02.F

MD-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.02.G

DP-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.K

VR-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.H

EDR-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.E

EDR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.F

EDR-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.G

EMR-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.02.C

EMR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.02.D

ETR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.L

EGR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16903, Paragraph 2.04.I

Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16901, Paragraph 2.04.A

InsulGard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sections 16950A, 16950C, 16950D
Paragraph 2.03.A
4.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

04

Selection Guide

General Description

002

Selection Chart

Table 4.0-1. Selection Chart

The 50 and 51 protective functions can be controlled for reverse, forward or both directional protection.

The 50N, 51N, 50G and 51G protective functions can be controlled for reverse, forward or both directional protection.

87B using zone selective interlocking.

Device Name Feeder Protection
Description IEEE
Device
Number
DT-3000 FP-4000 FP-5000 FP-6000 EDR-3000 EDR-4000 EDR-5000
Page Number Page 4.1-1 Page 4.1-11 Page 4.1-16 Page 4.1-21 Page 4.1-27 Page 4.1-31 Page 4.1-38

Protection Functions

Phase inst. OC 50

Phase TOC 51

Ground inst. OC (measured) 50G

Ground TOC (measured) 51G

Phase directional control

67

Ground directional control

67N

Phase voltage restrained OC 51VR

No. of curves (ANSI/IEC/thermal) 11 10 10 10 11 11 11
Zone interlocking

Thermal overload 49

Locked rotor 49S/51

Jam/stall 51R

Undervoltage 27

Current unbalance 46

Negative sequence voltage 47

Power factor 55

Overvoltage 59

Frequency (over/under) 81

Vector surge 78V

Rate of change 81R

Forward/reverse VARs 32V

Differential 87

Forward/reverse power 32

Sync check 25

Reclosing 79

Loss of potential block LOP

Cold load pickup

Breaker failure 50BF

2

nd

harmonic restrain
5

th

harmonic restrain
4

th

harmonic restrain
Ground differential 87GD
Generator unbalance 46G
Loss of excitation 40
Volts/hertz 24
100% stator ground fault 27TN/59N


4.0-3

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

04

Selection Guide

General Description

003

Table 4.0-1. Selection Chart (Continued)

Description IEEE
Device
Number

Control Functions

Remote open/close

Programmable I/O

Programmable logic control

Multiple settings groups 4 4 4 4 4 4
Number of starts limit
Starts per hour
Time between starts
Emergency override
Reduced voltage starting
Trip lock out 86

Metering Functions

Amperes

Ampere demand

Volts

Phase angle
(current and voltage)

Positive, negative
and zero sequence

Watts

Watt demand

Watthour

VARs

VAR demand

VAR-hour

VA
VA demand
VA-hour
Frequency
Trending (load prole)
Minimum/maximum recording
Monitoring Functions
Trip circuit monitor
Breaker wear
Failure to trip
Oscillography
Sequence of events
Trip target data
Clock
Number of starts
Acceleration time
RTD temperature
Hottest RTD
4.0-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Selection Guide
General Description
004
Description IEEE
Device
Number
Communications
Local human machine interface
Remote communication port
RS-232
RS-485
Ethernet copper
Frequency shift key
Addressable protocols
INCOM
Modbus-RTU
Modbus-TCP
IEC-61850
Construction
Panel-mount case
Drawout Optional Optional Optional Removable
terminals
Removable
terminals
Removable
terminals
Operating temperature range 3055C 40 60C 4060C 4060C 4060C 4060C 4060C
Power supply options 120240 Vac 48125 Vac/Vdc 48125 Vac/Vdc 48125 Vac/Vdc 19300 Vdc 19300 Vdc 19300 Vdc
24250 Vdc 100240 Vac/Vdc 100240 Vac/Vdc 100240 Vac/Vdc 40250 Vac 40250 Vac 40250 Vac
AC current inputs
AC voltage inputs
Wye PTs
Delta/open delta PTs
Binary inputs
Alarm outputs 2 Form C 2 Form C 2 Form C 2 Form C 1 Form C 1 Form C 1 Form C
Trip outputs 2 5 5 5 3 10
Analog outputs
Analog inputs
Local display
LEDs (local targets)
Standards
ANSI
IEC
UL
CE DT-3030 only
CSA
4.0-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Selection Guide
General Description
005
Depends on the catalog number ordered.

Device Name Motor Protection
Description IEEE
Device
Number
C306
Bimetallic OLR
C440/XT
Solid-State OLR
C441
Solid-State OLR
Page Number Page 4.2-1 Page 4.2-1 Page 4.2-5
Motor Protection
Thermal overload protection 49 Bi-metallic Microprocessor-based Microprocessor-based
Trip class
10 or 20
Selectable via heater packs
10A, 10, 20, 30

Selectable via DIP switches
530
Selectable via user interface
Adjustable FLA
Adjustable via dial
(range approx.1.6:1)
Adjustable via dial

(range 5:1)
Adjustable via user interface

(range 9:1 and 18:1)
Locked rotor/stall current 49S/51
Phase losscurrent 46 Selectable on/off (90% setting) Selectable on/off (60% setting)
Phase imbalance 46 Selectable on/off (50% setting) Adjustable (030% setting), off
Ground fault 51N Fixed at 50% of FLA setting Programmable threshold,
and alarm or trip mode
Jam/current level protection 50 Instantaneous and adjustable
Phase reversal 47
Load Protection
Undercurrent
Low power (kW)
High power (kW)
Voltage Protection
Overvoltage 59
Undervoltage 27
Voltage imbalance 47
Voltage phase loss 47
Power-up delay
Control Functions
Manual reset
Automatic reset
Electronic remote reset
Network command reset
Output Contacts
NO contacts 1 1 B600 1 B300 (Form A or Form C)
NC contacts 1 1 B600 1 B300 (Form B or Form C)
Ground fault shunt relay
1 B300 (Form A)
Independently programmable contacts
Control Power
Self (line) powered
Separate 24 Vdc supply
Separate 120 Vac supply
Metering Functions (via Local Display)
Amperes
Individual phase
Average
Current imbalance %
Voltage
Individual phase
Average
Voltage imbalance %
4.0-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Selection Guide
General Description
006
Description IEEE
Device
Number
C306
Bimetallic OLR
C440/XT
Solid-State OLR
C441
Solid-State OLR
Metering Functions (via Local Display) (continued)
Kilowatts
Power factor
Trip status
Diagnostics (10 fault queue)
Overload indication
Thermal capacity
Frequency
Run hours
Ground fault current
Monitoring Functions (via Communications)
Overload indication
Operating LED
Trip status
Congured settings
Thermal memory (time until reset)
Thermal capacity
Frequency
Motor starts
Motor run hours
Power motor kW
Power factor
Current
Individual Phase I rms
Average Phase I rms
Current imbalance %
Voltage
Individual Phase V rms
Average Phase V rms
Voltage imbalance %
Fault Indication
Overload
Phase loss
Phase imbalance
Ground fault
Phase reversal
Jam/stall/current level
Undercurrent
Low power
High power
Voltage imbalance
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
4.0-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Selection Guide
General Description
007
Description IEEE
Device
Number
C306
Bimetallic OLR
C440/XT
Solid-State OLR
C441
Solid-State OLR
Communications
Modbus RTU RS-485
Modbus RTU with I/O
DeviceNet with I/O
PROFIBUS with I/O
EtherNet/IP with I/O
Modbus TCP with I/O
Mounting
Panel mounting
Contactor mounting
DIN rail mounting
Optional remote mounted display
Standards
UL
CSA
CE
NEMA
IEC
RoHS
4.0-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Selection Guide
General Description
008
The 50 and 51 protective functions can be controlled for reverse, forward or both directional protection.
The 50N, 51N, 50G and 51G protective functions can be controlled for reverse, forward or both directional protection.
87B using zone selective interlocking.
87M or 87G (motor or generator differential).
87M, 87T or 87G (motor, transformer or generator differential).
87T (transformer differential).

Device Name Motor
Protection
Differential
Protection
Transformer
Protection
Generator
Protection
Voltage
Protection
Description IEEE
Device
Number
MP-3000 MP-4000 EMR-3000 EMR-4000 MD-3000 DP-300 ETR-4000 EGR-4000 VR-300
Page Number Page 4.2-11 Page 4.2-17 Page 4.2-22 Page 4.2-29 Page 4.3-1 Page 4.3-3 Page 4.3-6 Page 4.3-12 Page 4.4-1
Phase inst. OC 50
Phase TOC 51
Ground inst. OC
(measured)
50G
Ground TOC
(measured)
51G
Phase directional
control
67
Ground directional
control
67N
Phase voltage
restrained OC
51VR
No. of curves
(ANSI/IEC/thermal)
11 11 11 11
Zone interlocking
Thermal overload 49
Locked rotor 49S/51
Jam/stall 51R
Undervoltage 27
Current unbalance 46
Negative sequence
voltage
47
Power factor 55
Overvoltage 59
Frequency (over/under) 81
Vector surge 78V
Rate of change 81R
Forward/reverse VARs 32V
Differential 87
Forward/reverse power 32
Sync check 25
Reclosing 79
Loss of potential block LOP
Cold load pickup
Breaker failure 50BF
2
nd
harmonic restrain
5
th
harmonic restrain
4
th
harmonic restrain
Ground differential 87GD
Generator unbalance 46G
Loss of excitation 40
Volts/hertz 24
100% stator ground
fault
27TN/
59N

4.0-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Selection Guide
General Description
009
Differential and restrain current only.

Device Name Motor
Protection
Differential
Protection
Transformer
Protection
Generator
Protection
Voltage
Protection
Description IEEE
Device
Number
Control Functions
Remote open/close (Trip only)
Programmable I/O
Programmable
logic control

Multiple settings
groups
4 4 4 4
Number of starts limit
Starts per hour
Time between starts
Emergency override
Reduced voltage
starting

Trip lock out 86
Metering Functions
Amperes

Ampere demand
Volts
Phase angle
(current and voltage)
Current only
Positive, negative and
zero sequence

Watts
Watt demand
Watthour
VARs
VAR demand
VAR-hour
VA
VA demand
VA-hour
Frequency
Trending (load prole)
Minimum/maximum
recording
Max. only
Trip circuit monitor
Breaker wear
Failure to trip
Oscillography
Sequence of events
Trip target data
Clock
Number of starts
Acceleration time
RTD temperature
Hottest RTD
4.0-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Selection Guide
General Description
010
Device Name Motor
Protection
Differential
Protection
Transformer
Protection
Generator
Protection
Voltage
Protection
Description IEEE
Device
Number
Communications
Local human
machine interface

Remote
communication port
RS-232
RS-485
Ethernet copper
Frequency
shift key
Optional Optional
Addressable
protocols

INCOM
Modbus-RTU
Modbus-TCP
IEC-61850
Construction
Panel-mount case
Drawout Optional Optional Removable
terminals
Removable
terminals
Optional Removable
terminals
Removable
terminals
Operating
temperature range
20 to 60C 20 to 60C 40 to 60C 40 to 60C 30 to 55C 20 to 70C 40 to 60C 40 to 60C 20 to 70C
Power supply
options
120240 Vac 120240 Vac 19300 Vdc 19300 Vdc 120240
Vac
40250 Vac 19300 Vdc 19300 Vdc 40250 Vac
40250 Vac 40250 Vac 24250 Vdc 90250 Vdc 40250 Vac 40250 Vac 90250 Vdc
AC current inputs
AC voltage inputs
Wye PTs
Delta/open
delta PTs

Binary inputs
Alarm outputs 1 Form C 1 Form C 1 Form C 1 Form C 2 Form C 1 NO 1 Form C 1 Form C 1 Form C
Trip outputs 3
Analog outputs
Analog inputs
Local display
LEDs (local targets)
Standards
ANSI
IEC
UL
CE
CSA
4.1-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
General DescriptionDigitrip 3000
011
Digitrip 3000
Feeder Protection Relay
Digitrip 3000 Front View
General Description
Eatons Digitrip
3000 protective relay

is a multi-function, microprocessor-
based overcurrent relay designed for
both ANSI and IEC applications. It is
a panel-mounted, self-contained unit
that operates from either AC or DC
control power. The Digitrip 3000 is
available in an optional quick-release
drawout case for panel-ush mounting.
For AC control power applications,
an optional Dual-Source Power
Supply (DSPS) is recommended. See
Page 4.1-6 for details. The Digitrip 3000
design provides true rms sensing of
each phase and ground current. Only
one unit is required for each three-
phase circuit. Current monitoring
and operator selectable protective
functions are integral to each relay.
The Digitrip 3000 relay operates
from the 5A secondary output of
standard current transformers.
Current transformer ratio information
is quickly programmed into the
unit via settings. This enables the
relay to display metered current in
primary amperes.
The Digitrip 3000 features a user-
friendly operator panel to monitor,
program and test the relay. Operating
parameters and troubleshooting
information are displayed in the two
highly visible display windows. In
addition, all data and information can
be communicated to a host computer
equipped with the appropriate
software. A Communication Trip
and Communication Close control
command can also be initiated by a
host computer with an authorized
access code.
Features
General
ANSI or IEC applications
User-friendly front panel
Non-volatile memory
View settings any time
Set CT ratios
Metered currents in
primary amperes
Individual phase targeting of fault
Integral test mode (phase
and ground)
Program and test mode
security access cover with
meter seal provision
Continuous internal circuitry
self-testing
Programmable lockout/self reset
after trip
Relay failure alarm contact
Trip alarm contact
Optional Dual-Source Power
Supply (DSPS), see Page 4.1-6
Optional quick-release drawout
case, see Page 4.1-8
Table 4.1-1. Catalog Numbers
Digitrip 3000 Rear View
Description Catalog
Number
Digitrip 3000 DT3000
Digitrip 3000 drawout relay DT3001
Digitrip 3000 drawout
inner chassis
DT3001-IC
Digitrip 3000 drawout outer case DT3001-OC
Digitrip 3000 with 120 Vac
dual-source power supply
DT3010
Digitrip 3000 with 240 Vac
dual-source power supply
DT3020
Digitrip 3000 with 24/48 Vdc
power supply and CE mark
DT3030
Digitrip 3000 with 24/48 Vdc
power supply and CE mark in
drawout case
DT3031
DIP Switches
Terminal
Block 1
Current
Transformer
Connections
Terminal
Block 2
Communication
Connection
Terminal Block 2-1
Terminal Block 2-2
4.1-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
012
System Protection
True rms sensing of each phase and
ground current
Selectable curve shapes: ANSI, IEC
or thermal curves
Phase overcurrent protection per
time-current curve
Independent ground fault protection
per time-current curve
Time overcurrent reset time delay
Ground element capable of
residual, zero sequence or
external source connections
Instantaneous phase and ground OC
Short delay phase and ground OC
Selectable true making current
release (discriminator)
Congurable trip outputs
Zone selective interlocking (phase
and ground) for bus protection and
reduced arc ash energy
Information and Data Delivery
Displays individual phase currents
Displays ground current
Displays magnitude and phase of
current causing trip
Displays peak demand current
for each phase and ground since
last reset
Displays current transformer ratio
Indicates cause of trip (time or
instantaneous)
Data/information transmission
Provides breaker Open or Close
status to a remote location via
Eatons PowerNet
General
The Digitrip 3000 microprocessor-
based relay provides reliable
three-phase and ground overcurrent
protection for all voltage levels. It can
be used for any application where
instantaneous and/or time overcur-
rent protection is required. It is most
commonly used as primary feeder
circuit protection, as in Figure 4.1-1.
Figure 4.1-1. Primary Feeder Protection
50 51
50N 51N CB
52
Digitrip
3000
Load
The Digitrip 3000 may be applied
as the transformer primary protection
or as backup to the differential
protection, as in Figure 4.1-2.
Figure 4.1-2. Transformer Protection
The Digitrip 3000 may be connected
to the secondary side of a delta-wye
grounded transformer with the ground
element connected to a separate CT
in the neutral connection of the trans-
former. With this connection, a lower
CT ratio and a pickup setting can be
used to provide more sensitive
ground fault protection especially
for resistance grounded systems
(see Figure 4.1-3).
Figure 4.1-3. Transformer Secondary
Protection with Ground CT Connection
The Digitrip 3000 relay has special
provisions for connection in a Zone
Interlocking Scheme that can be used
for bus protection or to improve
protection coordination in a tight or
close system. Zone interlocking is
described in more detail on Page 4.1-4.
Time Overcurrent Reset
The Digitrip 3000 includes time delay
reset characteristic for the time over-
current functions. This improves the
overcurrent protection response to
arcing fault conditions. The current
during an arcing fault may vary above
and below the pickup level. The time
above pickup will accumulate until
trip occurs.
The Digitrip 3000 provides complete
three-phase and ground protection
with separate elements and settings.
The relay can be used with CT ratios
from 5/5 to 5000/5. The CT ratio can
be set independently for phase and
ground, allowing the ground element
to be connected in either the residual or
the separate ground CT conguration
as in Figure 4.1-4 and Figure 4.1-5.
Figure 4.1-4. Residual Ground Connections
Figure 4.1-5. Separate Zero Sequence
Ground CT Connections
50 51
50N 51N
CB
Digitrip
3000
50G 51G
50 51
Digitrip
3000
Resistor
CB
a
b
c
GND
Digitrip
3000 CB-52
A1 A2
B1 B2
C1 C2
G1 G2
50/51
50N/51N 51N
CB-52
a
c
GND
Digitrip
3000
A1 A2
B2
C1 C2
G1 G2
50/51
50G/51G
4.1-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
013
The phase and ground overcurrent
characteristics are dened by six
parameters.
Curve shape
Overcurrent pickup
Time multiplier or dial
Short delay pickup
Short delay time
Instantaneous pickup
Figure 4.1-6. Phase or Ground
Overcurrent Characteristics
Phase Curve Shape
The Digitrip 3000 includes the thermal,
ANSI and IEC family of curves, which
make it easy to coordinate with any
conventional protection scheme. The
user can select Moderately Inverse,
Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse or
Denite Time characteristics. The
thermal curves It, I
2
t, I
4
t and at
slopes can also be selected.
Phase Time Overcurrent Protection
Time overcurrent (overload and fault)
protection is dened by the current
pickup setting and time multiplier.
Phase Short Time Protection
Short time (fault) protection responds
to short-circuit conditions. It is similar
to the Phase Long Time Protection in
that current and time settings are
offered. It differs, however, in two
ways: (1) NONE is a Short Delay
Pickup setting that, if selected,
will disable the Phase Short Time
Protection, and (2) a slope selection
is not available for the time line.
Instantaneous Protection
Instantaneous (short-circuit)
protection reacts to high level
fault currents. If NONE is selected
for the instantaneous setting, the
instantaneous trip function is disabled
and a true making current release
(discriminator) function is provided.
If selected, the discriminator is
functional for 10 cycles and will trip
the breaker instantaneously, if the
fault current is above 11 times (I
n
).
The ground fault protection function
is a composite of the ground:
Ground curve shape
Time overcurrent and pickup
time settings
Short delay current and time
settings
Instantaneous setting
A NONE setting selection disables
that characteristic of the ground
fault protection.
Figure 4.1-7. Digitrip 3000 Selective Curve Types
CURRENT
T
I
M
E
CURRENT
T
I
M
E
(Curve Shape)
(Short Delay)
(Instantaneous)
FLAT
I
4
t
I
2
t
It
Thermal Curves
CURRENT
T
I
M
E
(Curve Shape)
(Short Delay)
EXTREME
ANSI Curves
(Instantaneous)
VERY
MOD
CURRENT
T
I
M
E
(Curve Shape)
(Short Delay)
IEC-A
IEC Curves
(Instantaneous)
IEC-B
IEC-D IEC-C
4.1-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
014
Figure 4.1-8. Sample Zone Selective Interlocking System
(Phase and Ground)
Zone selective interlocking is a protec-
tion function to minimize equipment
damage resulting from a phase fault or
a ground fault in an area where long
time and/or short time delay is in use.
When the Ground Zone Interlocking
feature is used, an immediate trip
is initiated when the fault is in the
breakers zone of protection, and no
restraining signal received regardless
of its preset time delay. When the
Phase Zone Interlocking feature is
used, the time overcurrent and short
delay phase elements work as follows.
The short delay phase element will
initiate an immediate trip when the
fault is in the breakers zone of protec-
tion, and no restraining signal received
regardless of its preset time delay. The
time overcurrent phase element will
initiate an immediate trip when the
fault is in the breakers zone of protec-
tion, and no restraining signal received
regardless of its preset time delay only
when the current being sensed by the
Digitrip 3000 exceeds 300% (3 x I
n
) of
the current transformer rating.
Upstream Digitrip 3000 protected
breakers are restrained from tripping
immediately by an interlocking signal
from the downstream Digitrip 3000
relay. This interlocking signal requires
only a pair of wires from the down-
stream breaker to the upstream breaker.
It provides standard coordinated trip-
ping when the fault is located outside
the zone of protection.
In the sample zone interlocking system
shown above, circuit breakers A, B and
C are equipped with Digitrip 3000
overcurrent relays.
Fault Location Zone 3
Note: For the phase time overcurrent
element, the current sensed by the Digitrip
3000 must exceed 300% (3 x I
n
) for the
zone selective interlocking to initiate an
immediate trip signal.
If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 3, the
Digitrip 3000 of Downstream Breaker C
senses the fault and sends a restrain-
ing signal to the upstream Digitrip
3000 of Feeder Breaker B. Having
received this signal, the Digitrip 3000
of Feeder Breaker B withholds its
trip command. As a result, only
Downstream Breaker C is tripped.
n
) for the
If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 2,
the Digitrip 3000 of Feeder Breaker B
senses the fault and sends a restraining
signal to the upstream Digitrip 3000 of
Main Breaker A.
The Digitrip 3000 of the Downstream
Breaker C does not see this fault
because it is situated on the down-
stream side of the fault. As a result, the
Digitrip 3000 of Downstream Breaker C
does not send a restraining signal to
the Digitrip 3000 of Feeder Breaker B.
Because it did not receive a restraining
signal from the Digitrip 3000 of
Downstream Breaker C, the Digitrip
3000 of Feeder Breaker B identies that
the fault is in Zone 2 and immediately
trips Feeder Breaker B, regardless of
its time setting.
n
) for the
If a fault occurs in Zone 1, no
restraining signal is received by
the Digitrip of Main Breaker A. As a
result, Main Breaker A is immediately
tripped by its Digitrip overcurrent
relay, regardless of its time setting.
Main
Breaker
A
Feeder
Breaker
B
Downstream
Breaker
C
Interlocking
Wire
LOAD
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Digitrip
3000 A
Digitrip
3000 B
Digitrip
3000 C
4.1-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
Technical DataDigitrip 3000
015
Figure 4.1-9. Digitrip 3000 Fixed MountDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 4.1-10. Digitrip 3000 Typical Schematic and Wiring Diagram
rms Amperes
High Load
Curve
Pickup (xln)
Pickup (xln)
Time
Ground
In=5A (Secondary) or CT (Primary)
Instantaneous
Pickup (xln)
Select
Reset
View
Settings
Save
Settings
Select
Settings
Select
Tests
Test
Program
Test TT
Lower
Raise
Amp Demand
IA
IB
IC
Operational
Communications
Trip
Time Overcurrent
Short Delay
Settings/Test Ti me/Trip Cause
Program
Program
Test
Test
Digitrip 3000
Phase IG
5.13
(130.3)
0.50
(12.7) 1.05
6.7
0.62
(15.7)
3.02
(76.7)
0.29
(7.4)
10.25
(260.3)
9.31
(236.5)
5.25
(133.4)
( 7.6)
0.38
(9.7)
4.66
(118.4)
Typical
1.87
(47.5)
3.74
(95.0)
TTermi nal
Block
0.51
(13.1)
2.67
(67.8)
6.72
(170.7)
3.36
(85.3)
4.1-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
General DescriptionDual-Source Power Supply
016
Digitrip 3000 Relay with Dual-Source Power Supply
Digitrip 3000 with Dual-Source Power Supply
General Description
Eatons Digitrip 3000 with Dual-Source
Power Supply (DSPS) is a micro-
processor-based feeder overcurrent
protective relay designed for AC
auxiliary power applications. The
DSPS versions, Digitrip 3010 and
Digitrip 3020, include an integral
power supply module that:
Powers the relay from nominal
120 Vac, 50/60 Hz (Digitrip 3010
model) or 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
(Digitrip 3020 model) auxiliary
power, which is normally connected
and available
Operates solely from the main
current transformers (CTs) during
a fault if the normally connected
auxiliary AC voltage is not available,
like an electromechanical relay or an
electronic self-powered relay
The transition from external
auxiliary AC power to current power
is smooth with no time delay
The CT powering capability is critical
for tripping if the AC auxiliary supply
or its fuses fail prior to the fault; or if
the fault itself collapses, the supply
voltage at the critical moment when
tripping is needed.
The Digitrip 3000 with Dual-Source
Power Supply design offers signicant
performance and reliability benets
over the electromechanical or self-
powered relays. It provides a full-time
metering display, remote communica-
tions and self-monitoring functions.
In addition, there is no calibration
required. The burden is lower than
most electromechanical and solid-state
self-powered relays.
The Digitrip 3000 with DSPS provides
long-term, robust, maintenance-free
performance, which cant be achieved
with an energy-storing uninterruptible
power supply (UPS). The DSPS will
operate anytime there is a fault even
after an extended power outage.
Functional Description
The Dual-Source Power Supply
contains one AC voltage transformer
and three AC current transformers.
The AC voltage transformer is used to
supply nominal AC control power to
the unit. The current transformers are
used to power the unit from the line
current. Normally, the unit will operate
from the AC auxiliary power. Because
this voltage is usually obtained from
the system containing the circuit that
the relay is protecting, a fault on the
protected line could cause the AC
voltage to drop below an acceptable
operating level. Below approximately
70V for Digitrip 3010 or 140V for
Digitrip 3020, the DSPS switches over
to current powering. All three current
transformer secondaries are con-
nected in series to supply this power.
The DSPS will supply enough power
to operate the Digitrip 3000 over-
current relay in the tripped state with
currents greater than 1.8 per unit rated
secondary current, or 9A, in a single-
phase. The DSPS will operate with
three-phase currents in a tripped state
with currents greater than 1.2 per unit
or 6A rated secondary current.
Note: There will be no effect to the Digitrip
3000 relay trip time accuracy when the
Dual-Source Power Supply switches from
normal AC voltage to fault-current power.
4.1-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
Technical DataDual-Source Power Supply
017
Figure 4.1-11. Digitrip 3010/3020 Dual-Source Power SupplyDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 4.1-12. Digitrip 3010/3020 Typical Schematic and Wiring Diagram
Digitrip 3000
6.72
(170.7)
10.25
(260.3)
5.45
(138.4)
6.03
(153.2)
0.51
(13.0)
0.62
(15.7)
0.50
(12.7)
1.05
(26.7)
5.74
(145.8)
3.74
(95.0)
9.31
(236.5)
AC Input
100-120 Vac, 50/60Hz
Digitrip 8010 Protective Relay
with Dual-Source Power Supply
Terminal TT
Block
S/N000217
PP 0
4D13125G01
4.1-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
General DescriptionDrawout Case
018
Digitrip 3000
Drawout Case Option
Digitrip 3000 Drawout Relay
General Description
The quick-release Drawout Case
option permits easy removal and
replacement of the protective unit
without disruption of the wiring.
The CT circuits are self-shorting
with make-before-break operation
on removal. All voltage inputs,
discrete inputs and contact outputs
are disconnected while maintaining
security against false tripping.
The terminal blocks feature a two-
stage disconnect operation. Removal
of the Eatons Digitrip 3000 Inner
Chassis will disconnect the trip circuits
and short the CT secondaries before
the unit control power is disconnected.
Upon insertion of the Inner Chassis,
the control power connections are
made before the trip circuits are
activated. This feature provides
added security against false tripping.
Figure 4.1-13. Rear View of Digitrip 3000 Drawout Outer CaseTerminal Layout
9.51
(241.6)
5.23
(132.8)
Hole for Viewing INCOM
Communications Activity LED
4.1-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
Technical DataDrawout Case
019
Figure 4.1-14. Digitrip 3000 Drawout Relay Typical Schematic and Wiring Diagram
4.1-10



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

04

Feeder Protection

Technical DataDigitrip 3000

020

Standards, Certications and Ratings

Table 4.1-2. Digitrip 3000 Specications

Refer to Burden Curves for Digitrip 3010/3020.

For Ground Pickup < 0.2pu; Time Tolerance 15%.
Current Inputs
CTs: 5A secondary
CT burden: <0.004 ohm
<0.1 VA at rated current (5A)

I
n
: 5A (secondary) or CT (primary)
Momentary: 100 x I
n
for 1 second
CT (Primary) Settings Available
Phase and ground: 5/10/25/50/75/100/
150/200/250/200/
250/300/400/500/
600/630/800/1000/
1200/1250/1500/
1600/2000/2400/
2500/3000/3200/
4000/5000
Input Voltage
DT-30XX
Nominal: 22 to 250 Vdc
120 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz
Operating range: 28 to 280 Vdc
90 to 254 Vac 50/60 Hz
Power consumption:
DT 3010 3020 3030
Nominal: 120 Vac 240 Vac 24/48 Vdc
operating
range: 70 140
132 Vac 264 Vac
Power
consumption: 15 VA 15 VA
Trip and Communications Close
Output Contacts
Make 30A for 0.25 seconds
0.25A break at 250 Vdc
5A break at 120/240 Vac
Meets ANSI C37.90, paragraph 6.7
Environment
Operating temperature: 30C to +55C
Relative humidity
(noncondensing)
Storage temperature: 40C to +70C
Auxiliary Alarm Contacts
5A continuous
5A break at 120/240 Vac
Tests
Dielectric strength: Current inputs:
3000 Vac for 1 minute
phase to phase
Seismic test: Meets requirements
for UBC
and California
Building Code Zone 4
ZPA = 3.5
Standards: ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1,
C37.90.2
IEC 255
UL 1053
Phase and Ground Time-Current Curves
Thermal: It (moderately inverse)
I
2
t (very inverse)
I
4
t (extremely inverse)
FLAT (denite time)
ANSI: (per ANSI
C37.112, 1996) Moderately inverse
Very inverse
Extremely inverse
IEC: (per IEC
255-3, 1989) IEC-A (moderately
inverse)
IEC-B (very inverse)
IEC-C (extremely inverse)
IEC-D (denite time)
Phase Overcurrent Pickup Ranges
Inverse time
overcurrent setting: (0.2 to 2.2) x
I
n
(28 settings)
Short delay setting: (1 to 11) x I
n
,
None (25 settings)
Instantaneous setting: (1 to 25) x I
n
,
None (30 settings)
Ground Overcurrent Pickup Ranges
Inverse time
Overcurrent setting: 0.1 to 2.0) x I
n
,
None (26 settings)
Short delay setting: (1 to 11) x I
n
,
None (25 settings)
Instantaneous setting: (1 to 25) x I
n
,
None (30 settings)
Time Delay Settings
Inverse time
overcurrent
time multiplier: It, I
2
t, I
4
t
Curve: 0.2 to 40 (47 settings)
FLAT: 0.2 to 2 (21 settings)
ANSI (all): 0.1 to 5.0
(50 settings)
IEC (all): 0.025 to 1.00
(40 settings)
Short delay time: 0.05 to 1.5 sec (22 settings)
Current Monitoring
True rms sensing: Three-phase and ground
Display accuracy: 1% of full scale [l
n
]
from 0.04 x l
n
to 1 x I
n
2% of full scale [l
n
]
from 1 x l
n
to 2 x I
n
Ampere demand: Average demand over
5 minute sampling window
High load: 85% of inverse time
overcurrent setting
Timing Accuracy
Inverse time
overcurrent time: 10% at >1.5 x pickup
Short delay time: 50 ms
Standards: ANSI C37.90
IEC 255
UL 1053
Communications
PowerNet
compatible: Built-in INCOM
Baud rate: 1200 or 9600 baud
24 48 125 250 120 240
Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc Vac
10W 10W 10W 10W 10 VA 18 VA
4.1-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
General DescriptionFP-4000
021
FP-4000
FP-4000 Relay
General Description
Eatons FP-4000 feeder protection relay
is a multi-functional, microprocessor-
based relay for feeder circuits of all
voltage levels. It may be used as
primary protection for main, feeder
and tie circuit breaker applications
and transformers, and as backup
protection for high voltage lines and
differential protection.
The FP-4000 feeder protection relay
provides complete current and voltage
protection and metering. The relay has
four current inputs rated for 5A or 1A
and four voltage inputs. Three of the
voltage inputs are to be connected to
the three-phase power voltage for
voltage protection and for metering.
They can be connected in wye-ground,
delta or open delta conguration.
The fourth voltage is for independent
single-phase undervoltage/overvoltage
protection.
The multiple settings groups can be
used for arc ash mitigation when
an alternate settings group, set to
have instantaneous elements only, is
activated using a selector switch and
the programmable I/O in the FP-4000.
An integral keypad and display is
provided for direct user programming
and for retrieval of data. LEDs provide
quick indication of relay status. A front
port is provided for direct computer
connection. An INCOM communica-
tion port on the back of the relay is
standard for local area networking.
Optional communication ports and
protocols are available.
includes programmable logic functions.
Six gates and timers may be dened
and arranged for customized applica-
tions. Flash memory is used for the
programming and all settings are
stored in nonvolatile memory. The
relay allows for four preprogrammed
setting groups that can be activated
through software or contact input.
has a mass memory for data storage
and a real-time clock with 1 ms time
resolution. The relay will log 100
sequence of event records, detailed
trip logs, minimum/maximum values,
load proles, breaker wear information
and oscillography data.
has eight programmable binary inputs,
ve normally opened heavy-duty
outputs and one Form C signal relay.
Features
Protection
Phase overcurrent:
Two-stage instantaneous with
timers (50P-1 and 50P-2)
Inverse time overcurrent (51P-1)
10 standard curves
Instantaneous or time delay reset
Two independent ground over-
current elements (one measured-IX
and one calculated IR):
Two-stage instantaneous
with timers (50X-1 and 50X-2)
(50R-1, 50R-2)
Inverse time overcurrent (51X, 51R)
10 standard curves
Breaker failure (50BF)
Phase unbalance negative sequence
overcurrent (46)
Phase voltage unbalance and
sequence protection (47)
Under/overvoltage (27/59)
Under/overfrequency (81U/81O)
Power factor (55)
Zone interlocking for bus
protection (87B)
Metering
Amperes: positive, negative and
zero sequence
Ampere demand
Volts: positive, negative and
zero sequence
Phase angles
Volt-amperes and VA demand
Watts and kW demand
kWh (forward, reverse, net)
VARs and kVAR demand
kVARh (lead, leg and net)
Power factor
Frequency
% THD V and I
Magnitude THD V and I
Trending (load prole over time)
Monitoring
Trip coil monitor
Close coil monitor
Breaker wear (accumulated
interrupted current)
Oscillography (up to 16 events)
Fault data logs (up to 16 events)
Sequence of events report
(up to 100 events)
Clock (1 ms time stamping)
Communication
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
Local communication port
Remote communication port:
FSK
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
INCOM
Modbus
Conguration software
Control Functions
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable logic gates and timers
Multiple setting groups
Bus transfer logic
Table 4.1-3. Catalog Numbering Selection
FP4 2 01 - 0 1
Current Range
2 = 5A
3 = 1A
Packaging
1 = Fixed case
Control Voltage
0 = 48125 Vac/dc
1 = 100240 Vac/dc
Communications
0 = INCOM
1 = Modbus
4.1-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
022
Eatons FP-4000 feeder protection
relay has been designed for maximum
user exibility and simplicity. The
base relay includes all the standard
current and voltage protection and
metering functions.
provides complete three-phase and
ground overcurrent protection. There are
two independent ground overcurrent
elements. The rst ground element X
uses the independently measured ground
(or neutral) current from a separate
current-sensing input. The second ground
element R uses a calculated 3I
o
current
obtained from the sum of the three-phase
currents. This calculated current could
be used for either the neutral or ground
current in a three-phase, four-wire system.
Each of the phase and ground over-
current elements provides three
protection functions. Each element
contains an inverse-time overcurrent
(51) function and two instantaneous
overcurrent (50) functions with
adjustable timers.
Inverse-Time Characteristics
There are 10 user-selectable inverse-
time overcurrent curve characteristics.
The user can select from the ANSI,
IEC or thermal curve families and
can select instantaneous or time delay
reset characteristics.
Breaker Failure
includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF)
function that can be initiated from
either an internal or an external trip
signal. This is an independent element
that can be used to operate a lockout
relay or to trip an upstream breaker.
The timer must be longer than the
breaker operating time and the
protective function reset times.
Voltage Protection
has four voltage-input circuits. There
is a three-phase set designated as
Main Voltage (M) and a single-phase
voltage circuit designated as Auxiliary
Voltage (A). Both include undervoltage
(27) and overvoltage (59) protection.
The three-phase voltage protection
can be set to operate on a single-
phase, two out of three phases, or all
three-phase logic. The Main VTs also
provide phase voltage unbalance/
reversal (47 negative sequence)
protection. Each element has an
independent threshold set point
and an adjustable time delay.
Flexible Phase Rotation
can be applied on either an A-B-C or
an A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting
permits correct operation and indica-
tion of the actual system conguration.
Frequency Protection
The FP-4000 relay provides under/over
frequency (81U/81O) protection on the
Main VT inputs. Each element has an
independent threshold set point and
adjustable time delay.
Metering
provides complete and accurate
metering of the voltages, currents,
frequency, power, power factor and
energy. Information is available on the
individual phase magnitude, angles
and the symmetrical component
values of positive, negative and zero
sequence current and voltage.
includes a programmable demand
feature and stores the maximum
demand of current, kW, kVAR and
kVA since last reset. The demand is
user-congurable for xed or sliding
window, the time interval is adjustable
and the demand interval can be
synchronized to a demand pulse.
Energy usage direction and net values
are given for kWh, kVARh and kVAh.
The relay monitors, logs and time
stamps minimum and maximum
values for current, voltage, watts,
VARs, VA, power factor and frequency.
has metered set points that can be
used to activate an output for an
alarm, control or trip function.
For example, you might want to close
a contact to insert a capacitor bank
if the power factor is less than 0.9
lagging or provide an alarm if the
demand is greater than a preset value.
PowerPort and PowerNet Protection Overview Screen
4.1-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
023
Loading Prole
The FP-4000 feeder protection
relay has memory available to store
metered data on a predetermined
interval. The log holds data from
1024 time sample intervals. This
information can be retrieved and
plotted with a PC to show the loading
prole of a given circuit over a period
of time. For example, if the time
interval is set for 15 minutes, then the
relay will store a metered data prole
over an approximate 10-day period.
Sequence of Events Records
records a maximum of 100 events
associated with the relay. An event
is classied as a change of state as
detected by the relay. These include
relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact
closure, alarms, setting changes and
self-diagnostic failures. Each event
is date and time stamped to a 1 ms
resolution. The events are stored in
an FIFO in chronological order.
Trip Log
The FP-4000 feeder protection relay will
store a maximum of 16 trip records in
an FIFO trip log. Each trip record will
be date and time stamped to a 1 ms
resolution and reference an event
number associated with oscillographic
and sequence of event data. The trip log
record will include information on the
type of fault, protection elements that
operated, fault location, and currents
and voltages at the time of the fault.
Waveform Capture
provides oscillography-recording
capabilities. The relay will record all
voltage and current signals along with
the binary signals of pickup, trip, logic
and contact closures. The FP-4000
relay can record 16 records of 16
cycles of data. Fewer records of longer
duration can be selected and recorded.
The waveform capture is initiated by
a trip, pickup, external contact, front
panel interface or through the remote
communications port.
Programmable Logic
provides six logic gates and timers
that the user can customize for special
or unique applications. Each gate can
be assigned a logic function of either
AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate
can have a maximum of four input
signals and each input signal can be
required to be a NOT. Input signals
can be external inputs received via
the binary inputs or internal values
associated with the protection, alarm
or metering set points. Each gate
has a unique output assignment
and designation that can be used
as the input to another gate. There
are six independent timers that
have adjustable pickup and dropout
delay settings.
Integral User Interface
The front panel user interface has a
4.00 x 20.00-inch (101.6 x 508.0 mm)
alphanumeric vacuum uorescent
display for wide angle viewing in all
light conditions. LEDs provide quick
and easy visual display of power on,
mode of operation, alarm and trip
indication. Pushbuttons are provided
for operation mode selection, scrolling
through data and settings. A security
door restricts access to the program
and test modes. In addition, the relay
settings and test functions can be
password protected.
4.1-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
024
Figure 4.1-15. FP-4000 Relay Typical One-Line Diagram
Programmable I/O
provides ve heavy-duty, trip-rated,
normally open contacts and two
Form C auxiliary contacts. Two trip
rated contacts are tted with a circuit
continuity feature for monitoring the
trip or close circuits. One Form C
contact is dedicated to the relay failure
alarm function and is operated in a
normally energized (failsafe) mode.
There are eight user-congurable
discrete inputs that accept a dry
contact. Each input and output is
user-programmable for maximum
application exibility.
Communication Software
Eaton provides two types of communi-
cation software. The rst is PowerPort.
It runs on a PC or laptop for easy access
to a single relay to change set points
or conguration, and to view metered
values and stored data. PowerPort is
free and can be downloaded from the
Eaton Web site at www.eaton.com.
The second package is PowerNet.
PowerNet is a power management
software package that is designed
for continuous, remote monitoring
of many devices. It provides all the
functionality of PowerPort plus
additional functions such as billing,
trending and graphics. Contact your
local Eaton representative for more
information on PowerNet software.
Transview
Transview is a COMTRADE le viewer
that is required in addition to the
PowerNet waveform client to view
FP-4000 waveforms. Users can view
individual voltage and current wave-
forms, as well as phasers and digital
input/output and internal protection
functions such as undervoltage and
current unbalance.
CB
Phase
CTs (3)
Optional
Zero
Sequence
CT
Optional
VT (1)
Load
59
A1
59
A2
27
A1
27
A2
50
X1
50
X2
50
X3
51X
FP-4000
Trip
Coil
Monitor
50
P1
50
P2
50
P3
51P
50
BF
461 462 55A 55D
Main VTs
(2) or (3)
CALC
31o = IR
51R
50
R1
50
R2
50
R3
59
M1
59
M2
27
M1
27
M2
471
472
81
U1
81
U2
81
O1
81
O2
METERING
V, I, F, PF,
W, VARS, VA
Energy
Demand
Min./Max.
%THD
Phasors
Data Logger
Waveform
SER
Fault Records
4.1-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
Technical DataFP-4000
025
Table 4.1-4. FP-4000 Specications
Compliance
UL Recognized, File # E154862
UL 1053 (1994) Recognized
ANSI C37.90 (1989)
EN 55011 (1991)
EN 61000-6-2 (1999)
Metering Accuracy (Continued)
Input signal
Frequency necessary
for accurate operation: 60 Hz nominal,
5763 Hz (5%)
50 Hz nominal,
4753 Hz (5%)
Clock accuracy: Free running 1
Minute/month at 25C
Clock automatically updated by PowerNet host when
present.
Discrete Inputs
Number of contact inputs: 8
Rating: 48 Vdc wetting voltage
provided with internal
ground only
Output Contacts
Number of
output contacts: Five Form A and Two Form C
Emission Tests
EN 55011 (1991): Group 1 Class A
(CISPR-11, Class A)
FCC 47 CFR Chapter 1: Part 15 Subpart b Class A Rating of Output Contacts
Momentary: Make 30A AC/DC for 0.25 seconds
Break 0.25A at 250 Vdc (resistive)
Break 5A at 120 Vac
Continuous: 5A at 120 Vac
5A at 30 Vdc
Protective Functions
Phase and Ground Overcurrent Protection (50/51)
Inverse time over-
current characteristics
51, 51N, 51G: Moderate, very, extremely,
IECA, IECB, IECC, It, I
2
t, I
4
t, at
Inverse time over-
current pick-up ranges
51, 51N, 51G: 0.1 to 4.0 per unit in 0.01 steps
Inverse time over-
current multipliers
51, 51N, 51G: 0.05 to 10.0 in 0.01 steps
Inverse time delay
range 51, 51N, 51G: 0 to 9999 cycles in
1 cycle steps
Instantaneous over-
current pickup ranges
Pick-up accuracy 50/51: 1% (at 0.12 per unit)
time accuracy
51, 51N, 51G: 3% or 30 ms
Voltage Unbalance (47)
Threshold (minimum voltage) 1 to 100V in 1V steps.
% V2/V1: 4 to 40% in 1% Steps
Time delay: 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps
Current Unbalance (46)
Threshold (minimum current) 0.1 to 20.0 per unit
in 0.01 steps.
% I2/I1: 4 to 40% in 1% steps
Under/Overvoltage Protection (27/59)
Pickup range: 10 to 150V in 1V steps
Under/Overfrequency Protection (81U/810)
Pickup range: 45 to 65 Hz in 0.01 Hz steps
Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)
Pickup range: 0.1 to 5.0 per unit in 0.01 steps
Power Factor (55)
Trigger/Reset
Threshold: 0.5 lag to 0.5 lead in 0.01 steps
Time delay: 0 to 1000 seconds in 1 second steps
Immunity Tests
ANSI C37.90.1 (1989): Surge withstand capability
ANSI C37.90.2 (1995): EMI immunity to 35 V/m
EN 61000-4-2 (1995): ESD rating of 8 kV
EN 61000-4-3 (1997): Radiated EM eld at 10 V/m
EN 61000-4-4 (1995): Fast transient burst at 2 kV
EN 61000-4-5 (1995): Surge immunity test
EN 61000-4-6 (1996): Conducted RF at 10 V/m
EN 61000-4-11 (1994): Voltage dips and variations
Logic and Control Functions
Six programmable logic gates for AND, OR,
NAND, NOR operation
Two latching (ip/op) gates
Six timer gates provide on/off delays
Control Power
Control voltage: 48125 Vac/dc
100240 Vac/dc
Operating voltage: 55264 Vac
38300 Vdc
Interruption
ride-through time: 20 cycle interruption of
nominal AC supply
Power consumption: 20 VA maximum
INCOM Communications
Baud rate: 9600 xed
Maximum distance: 10,000 feet (3048m)
Protocol: INCOM
RS-485 Communication, Rear Panel
Baud rate: 9.2k, 9.6k
Protocol: Modbus RTU
Current Inputs
Nominal (I
n
): 1A or 5A
CT rating: 2 x I
n
continuous
50 x I
n
for 1 second
CT burdens: < 0.25 VA at 5A (nominal)
< 0.05 VA at 1A (nominal)
RS-232 Communication, Front Panel
Baud rate: 38.4k, 19.2k, 9.6k
Connector standard 9-pin subminiature,
three-wire protocol: INCOM
Operating temperature: 40C to +60C (40F to
+140F) product tested
to +85C
Storage temperature: 40C to +85C (40F to
+185F)
Humidity: 5% to 95%
relative humidity
(noncondensing)
Altitude: 0 to 6350 feet
(0 to 2500m) above
mean sea level
Voltage Inputs
Nominal: 120 Vac
Operating range: 69150 Vac
Burden: <0.015 at 120 Vac
1 megaohm
Metering Accuracy
Phase current: 0.5% or 0.025A from
0.02 to 20.0 per unit fully
offset current waveform
Ground current: 0.5% of full scale (I
n
)
from 0.02 to 2.0 per unit
fully offset current
waveform
Phase voltage: 0.5% or 0.2V from
0160 Vac
Frequency
measurement
accuracy: 0.02 Hz
Phase angle: 1
Power metering
accuracy: 1.5%
Metering accuracy
temperature range: 0C to 50C
Temperature range: 5% for operation below
0C and above 50C
Dimensions
Behind Panel
In Front of Panel
Height: 10.15 inches (257.9mm)
Weight
9.0 lbs (4.1 kg)
4.1-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
026
FP-5000
FP-5000 Relay
General Description
based relay for feeder circuits of
all voltage levels. It may be used as
primary protection for main, feeder
and tie circuit breaker applications,
transformers and as backup
protection for high voltage lines
and differential protection.
provides complete current and voltage
protection and metering in a single,
compact drawout case. The relay has
four current inputs rated for 5A or 1A
voltage inputs are to be connected to
the three-phase power voltage for
They can be connected in wye-ground,
delta or open delta conguration. The
fourth voltage is for independent
single-phase undervoltage/overvoltage
protection.
used for arc ash mitigation when an
alternate settings group, set to have
instantaneous elements only, is
and retrieval of data. LEDs provide
quick indication of relay status.
A front port is provided for direct
computer connection. An INCOM
communication port on the back of
the relay is standard for local area
networking. Optional communication
ports and protocols are available.
includes programmable logic
functions. Six gates and timers may be
dened and arranged for customized
applications. Flash memory is used for
the programming and all settings are
trip logs, minimum/maximum
values, load proles, breaker wear
information and oscillography data.
has eight programmable binary
inputs, ve normally opened heavy-
duty outputs and one Form C signal
relay. It can be powered from 48 Vdc to
125 Vdc or 120 Vac to auxiliary power.
Features
Protection
Phase overcurrent (forward, reverse
or both):
Two Inverse time overcurrent
(51P-1 and 51P-2)
Directional current (67)
10 standard curves
Voltage restrained time overcur-
rent (51VR)
Two independent ground directional
overcurrent elements (one mea-
sured-IX and one calculated IR):
Two-stage instantaneous
with timers (50X-1 and 50X-2)
(50R-1, 50R-2)
Ground directional polarizing (67N)
3 V
o
, I
pol
, negative sequence
10 standard curves
overcurrent (46)
Reverse/forward power (32-1, 32-2)
Sync check (25)
Power factor (55)
protection (87B)
Metering
zero sequence
Ampere demand
zero sequence
Phase angles
Watts and kW demand
Power factor
Frequency
% THD V and I
Monitoring
Trip coil monitor
Close coil monitor
(up to 100 events)
Communication
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
FSK
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
INCOM
Modbus
Control Functions
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable logic gates and timers
Bus transfer logic
Cold load pickup
Loss of potential (PT blown fuses)
4.1-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
027
Table 4.1-5. Catalog Numbering Selection
Eatons FP-5000 feeder protection
base relay includes all the standard
current and voltage protection, and
metering functions.
Directional Overcurrent Protection
ground directional overcurrent
protection. There are two independent
ground overcurrent elements. The
rst ground element X uses the
independently measured ground
current-sensing input. The second
ground element R uses a calculated
3I
o
current obtained from the sum
of the three-phase currents. This
calculated current could be used for
either the neutral or ground current
in a three-phase, four-wire system.
adjustable timers.
Phase direction is a function used to
supervise all phase current elements
(50, 51). A quadrature voltage is
compared to a corresponding phase
current to establish the direction of
the fault. This function is selectable
to operate in the forward, reverse or
both directions.
Ground direction is used to supervise
ground current elements and is
accomplished by using ground,
negative sequence or residual
currents supervised by zero or positive
sequence voltages or ground current.
This function is selectable to operate
in forward, reverse or both directions.
Voltage Restrained Overcurrent
Voltage restraint reduces the over-
current pickup level (51P-2). This
modication of the pickup overcurrent
level is compared to the correspond-
ing phase input voltage. The FP-5000
uses the simple linear model below to
determine the effective pickup value.
Figure 4.1-16. Voltage Restraint Coil
Pickup Characteristics
Sync Check
The sync check function is provided
for double-ended power source
applications. The sync check monitors
voltage magnitude, phase angle and
slip frequency between the bus and
line. It also incorporates breaker close
time, dead bus dead line, dead bus live
line and live bus live line features.
Reverse Power
Reverse power provides control for
power owing through a feeder. There
are two elements to be congured:
operate in forward or reverse; or,
under or over power conditions.
Reverse power is typically applied to
generator or motor applications while
under power is generally applied to
load or generation loss.
FP5 2 00 - 0 1
Current Range
2 = 5A
3 = 1A
Packaging
0 = Drawout
1 = Fixed case
Control Voltage
0 = 48125 Vac/dc
1 = 100240 Vac/dc
Communications
0 = INCOM
1 = Modbus
Pickup %
100 %
25 %
IEC or thermal curve families and
Breaker Failure
either an internal or external trip signal.
This is an independent element that
can be used to operate a lockout relay
or trip an upstream breaker. The timer
must be longer than the breaker
operating time and the protective
function reset times.
Voltage Protection
can be applied on either an A-B-C or
A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting
4.1-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
028
Metering
frequency, power, power factor and
energy. Information is available on the
demand of current, kW, kVAR and
kVA since last reset. The demand is
user-congurable for xed or sliding
alarm, control or trip function. For
example, you might want to close a
contact to insert a capacitor bank if the
power factor is less than 0.9 lagging
or provide an alarm if the demand is
greater than a preset value.
Loading Prole
relay has memory available to store
interval. The log holds data from
1024 time sample intervals. This
information can be retrieved and
plotted with a PC to show the loading
prole of a given circuit over a period
of time. For example, if the time
interval is set for 15 minutes, then the
relay will store a metered data prole
over an approximate 10-day period.
Trip Log
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay will
resolution and reference an event
number associated with oscillographic
and sequence of event data. The trip log
record will include information on the
type of fault, protection elements that
Waveform Capture
Programmable Logic
are six independent timers that
have adjustable pickup and dropout
delay settings.
4 x 20-inch (101.6 x 508.0 mm) alpha-
numeric vacuum uorescent display
for wide angle viewing in all light
conditions. LEDs provide quick and
easy visual display of power on,
indication. Pushbuttons are provided
for operation mode selection, scrolling
through data and settings. A security
door restricts access to the program
and test modes. In addition, the relay
password protected.
FP-5000 Set Point Overview
4.1-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
029
Programmable I/O
continuity feature for monitoring the
trip or close circuits. One Form C
Eaton provides two types of
communication software. The rst
is PowerPort. It runs on a PC or laptop
for easy access to a single relay to
change set points or conguration and
to view metered values and stored
data. PowerPort is free and can be
downloaded from the Eaton Web site
at www.eaton.com.
The second package is PowerNet.
PowerNet is a power management
software package that is designed for
continuous, remote monitoring of
many devices. It provides all the
functionality of PowerPort plus
information on PowerNet software.
Transview
Transview is a COMTRADE le viewer
that is required in addition to the
PowerNet waveform client to view
FP-5000 waveforms. Users can view
individual voltage and current wave-
forms, as well as phasers and digital
input/output and internal protection
functions such as undervoltage and
current unbalance.
Metering
FP-5000
Load
V, I, F, PF,
W, VARS, VA
Energy
Demand
Min./Max.
% THD
Phasors
Data Logger
Waveform
SER
Fault Records
4.1-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
030
Compliance
UL Recognized, File # E154862
ANSI C37.90 (1989)
EN 55011 (1991)
EN 61000-6-2 (1999)
Metering Accuracy (Continued)
Input signal
frequency necessary
for accurate operation: 60 Hz nominal,
5763 Hz (5%)
50 Hz nominal,
4753 Hz (5%)
Clock accuracy: Free running 1
Minute/month at 25C
Clock automatically updated by PowerNet host when
present.
Discrete Inputs
Number of contact inputs: 8
Rating: 48 Vdc wetting voltage
provided with internal
ground only
Output Contacts
Number of
output contacts: Five Form A and Two Form C
Emission Tests
(CISPR-11, Class A)
FCC 47 CFR Chapter 1: Part 15 Subpart b Class A Rating of Output Contacts
Break 5A at 120 Vac
Continuous: 5A at 120 Vac
5A at 30 Vdc
Phase and Ground Overcurrent Protection (50/51)
Inverse time over-
current characteristics
51, 51N, 51G: Moderate, very, extremely,
2
t, I
4
t, Flat
Inverse time over-
Inverse time over-
current multipliers
51, 51N, 51G: 0.05 to 10.0 in 0.01 steps
Inverse time delay
range 51, 51N, 51G: 0 to 9999 cycles in
1 cycle steps
Instantaneous over-
Pickup accuracy 50/51: 1% (at 0.12 per unit)
Time accuracy
51, 51N, 51G: 3% or 30 ms
Directional 67, 67N, 67G: Reverse overcurrentsame
data as above for reverse
Threshold (Minimum Voltage) 1 to 100V
in 1V steps.
% V2/V1: 4 to 40% in 1% steps
Threshold (minimum current) 0.1 to 20.0 per unit
in 0.01 steps.
% I2/I1: 4 to 40% in 1% steps
Pickup range: 10 to 150V in 1 volt steps
Under/Overfrequency Protection (81U/810)
Power Protection (32)
Forward/reverse over/under
Pickup accuracy: 1.0%
Trip time accuracy: 0 to 12 cycles or
0.1% whichever is greater
Sync Check (25)
Phase angle: 1 to 60
Slip frequency: 0.1 to 2 Hz
Voltage differential: 1 to 100V
Breaker close time: 0 to 9999 cycles
Power Factor (55)
Trigger/reset
threshold: 0.5 lag to 0.5 lead in 0.01 steps
Immunity Tests
NAND, NOR operation
Control Power
Control voltage: 48250 Vdc
100240 Vac
Operating voltage: 55264 Vac
38300 Vdc
Interruption
ride-through time: 20 cycle interruption of
nominal AC supply
Baud rate: 9600 xed
Protocol: INCOM
Current Inputs
Nominal (I
n
): 1A or 5A
CT rating: 2 x I
n
continuous
50 x I
n
for 1 second
Baud rate: 38.4k, 19.2k, 9.6k
Connector standard nine-pin subminiature,
three-wire protocol: INCOM
Operating temperature: 40C to +60C
(40F to +140F)
product tested to +85C
(40F to +185F)
Humidity: 5% to 95%
Relative humidity
(noncondensing)
Altitude: 0 to 6350 feet
(0 to 2500m) above
mean sea level
Voltage Inputs
Nominal: 120 Vac
Operating range: 69150 Vac
Burden: <0.015 at 120 Vac
1 megaohm
Metering Accuracy
Phase current: 0.5% or 0.025A from
0.02 to 20.0 per unit fully
offset current waveform
Ground current: 0.5% of full scale (I
n
)
from 0.02 to 2.0 per unit
fully offset current
waveform
Phase voltage: 0.5% or 0.2V from
0160 Vac
Frequency
measurement
Accuracy: 0.02 Hz
Phase angle: 1
Power metering
accuracy: 1.5%
Metering accuracy
temperature range: 0C to 50C
Temperature range: 5% for operation below
0C and above 50C
Dimensions
Behind Panel
In Front of Panel
Height: 11.34 Inches (288.0 mm)
Width: 7.72 Inches (196.1 mm)
Depth: 0.80 Inches (20.3 mm)
Weight
12.5 lbs (5.7 kg)
4.1-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
031
FP-6000
FP-6000 Relay
General Description
based relay for feeder circuits of all
voltage levels. It may be used as a
reclosing relay; primary protection on
feeders, mains and tie circuit breaker
applications; or as backup protection
for transformers, high voltage lines
and differential protection.
provides complete current, voltage
and power protection and metering in
a single, compact drawout case. The
relay has four current inputs rated 5A
or 1A and four voltage inputs. Three of
the voltage inputs are to be connected
to the three-phase power voltage for
They can be connected in wye-ground
or open delta conguration. The fourth
voltage is for independent single-phase
undervoltage/overvoltage protection.
The FP-6000 is the only relay in its
class that offers a exible yet simple
reclosing protection. Its compact
design makes it ideal for pole-
mounted recloser controls.
used for arc ash mitigation when an
instantaneous elements only, is
and retrieval of data. LEDs provide
quick indication of relay status.
computer connection. An INCOM
communication port on the back of
the relay is standard for local area
networking. Optional communication
ports and protocols are available.
relay includes programmable logic
functions. Six gates and timers may be
dened and arranged for customized
applications. Programmable logic
control functions make the FP-6000
relay ideally suited for main-tie-main
and main 1/main 2 transfer schemes.
Flash memory is used for the
load proles, breaker wear informa-
tion and oscillography data.
has eight programmable binary
inputs, ve normally opened heavy-
duty outputs and one Form C signal
relay. It can be powered from 48 Vdc
to 250 Vdc or 120 Vac to 240 Vac
auxiliary power.
Features
Protection
Phase overcurrent (forward, reverse
or both):
Two Inverse time overcurrent
(51P-1 and 51P-2)
Directional current (67)
10 standard curves
Voltage restrained time
overcurrent (51VR)
Two independent ground directional
overcurrent elements (one measured-
IX and one calculated IR):
timers (50X-1 and 50X-2)
(50R-1, 50R-2)
Ground directional polarizing (67N)
3 Vo, Ipol, negative sequence
10 standard curves
overcurrent (46)
Reverse/forward power
(32-1, 32-2, 32-3)
Reverse/forward VARs
(32V-1, 32V-2, 32V-3)
Thermal Protection (49DT, 49MT,
49DA, 49MA)
Sync check (25)
Power factor (55)
protection (87B)
Metering
zero sequence
Ampere demand
zero sequence
Phase angles
Watts and kW demand
Power factor
Frequency
% THD V and I
RTD temperatures
Monitoring
Trip coil monitor
Close coil monitor
(up to 100 events)
Communication
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
FSK
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
INCOM
Modbus
4.1-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
032
Table 4.1-7. FP-6000 Catalog Numbering Selection
Control Functions
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable logic gates
and timers
Bus transfer logic
Cold load pickup
Loss of potential (PT blown fuses)
Autoreclose function (79)
Auto zone coordination
has been designed for maximum user
exibility and simplicity. The base
relay includes all of the standard
current and voltage protection and
metering functions.
ground directional overcurrent
protection. There are two independent
rst ground element X uses the
current-sensing input. The second
ground element R uses a calculated
3Io current obtained from the sum
of the three-phase currents. This
either the neutral or ground current
in a three-phase, four-wire system.
adjustable timers.
(50, 51). A quadrature voltage is com-
pared to a corresponding phase current
to establish the direction of the fault.
This function is selectable to operate in
the forward, reverse or both directions.
currents supervised by zero or positive
current pickup level (51P-2). This
modication of the pickup overcurrent
level is compared to the correspond-
ing phase input voltage. The FP-6000
uses the simple linear model below to
Sync Check
Reverse Power
are three elements to be congured:
FP6 2 00 - 0 1
Current Range
2 = 5A
3 = 1A
Packaging
0 = Drawout
Control Voltage
0 = 48125 Vac/dc
1 = 100240 Vac/dc
Communications
Protocol
0 = INCOM
1 = Modbus RTU
Pickup %
100 %
25 %
Reverse VARs
Reverse VARs can be used to detect loss
of excitation in synchronous machines.
There are three elements to be cong-
ured: operate in forward or reverse; or,
under or over VARs conditions.
Thermal Protection
The FP-6000 has a ber optic port
to communicate to URTD, which is
offered separately and is able to
provide 11 direct temperature
measurements. With URTD connected
to the relay, the FP-6000 is able to
provide fan control, and temperature-
related overload alarm, and trip
functions. Each RTD can be assigned
to some dedicated spots, such as
windings, rotor bearing, load bearing,
top oil and user-dened spots.
The user can select from the ANSI, IEC
or thermal curve families and can select
instantaneous or time delay reset
characteristics.
Breaker Failure
or to trip an upstream breaker. The
timer must be longer than the breaker
Voltage Protection
The FP-6000 feeder protection relay can
be applied on either an A-B-C or A-C-B
phase rotation. A user setting permits
correct operation and indication of the
actual system conguration.
4.1-23
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
033
Autoreclosing Logic
The FP-6000 provides a four shot-
recloser scheme. Autoreclosing is
normally used by the utilities in their
distribution and transmission lines,
but it can be used in commercial and
industrial applications with long over-
head lines. Nearly 85% of the faults that
occur on overhead lines are transient
in nature. Tripping of a circuit breaker
normally clears a transient fault and
reclosing of the circuit breaker restores
power back to the circuit.
Metering
frequency, power, power factor,
energy and RTD temperatures.
Information is available on the
demand of current, kW, kVAR and kVA
since last reset. The demand is user
congurable for xed or sliding
alarm, control or trip function. For
example, you might want to close a
contact to insert a capacitor bank if the
power factor is less than 0.9 lagging or
provide an alarm if the demand is
greater than a preset value.
Loading Prole
has memory available to store
interval. The log holds data from 1024
time sample intervals. This informa-
tion can be retrieved and plotted with
a PC to show the loading prole of a
given circuit over a period of time.
For example, if the time interval is
set for 15 minutes, then the relay will
store a metered data prole over an
approximate 10-day period.
Trip Log
will store a maximum of 16 trip
records in an FIFO trip log. Each trip
record will be date and time stamped
to a 1 ms resolution and reference
an event number associated with
oscillographic and sequence of event
data. The trip log record will include
information on the type of fault,
protection elements that operated,
fault location and currents and
voltages at the time of the fault.
Waveform Capture
Programmable Logic
are six independent timers that have
adjustable pickup and dropout
delay settings.
4 x 20-inch (101.6 x 508.0 mm) alpha-
numeric vacuum uorescent display
for wide angle viewing in all light
conditions. LEDs provide quick and
easy visual display of power on, mode
of operation, alarm and trip indication.
Pushbuttons are provided for opera-
tion mode selection, scrolling through
data and settings. A security door
restricts access to the program and
test modes. In addition, the relay
password protected.
FP-6000 Set Point Overview
4.1-24
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
034
Programmable I/O
continuity feature for monitoring
the trip or close circuits. One Form C
communication software. The rst is
PowerPort. It runs on a PC or a laptop
change set points or conguration,
and to view metered values and stored
data. PowerPort is free and can be
at www.eaton.com.
The second package is Power Xpert
Software. Power Xpert Software is
a power management software
package that is designed for continu-
ous, remote monitoring of many
devices. It provides all the functionality
of PowerPort plus additional functions
such as billing, trending and graphics.
Contact your local Eaton representa-
tive for more information on Power
Xpert Software.
Metering
FP-6000
Load
V, I, F, PF,
W, VARS, VA
Energy
Demand
Min./Max.
% THD
Phasors
Data Logger
Waveform
SER
Fault Records
32V
-1
32V
-2
32V
-3
42M
79 49D
4.1-25
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
035
Compliance
UL Recognized, File # E154862 (FP6200-00 5A CT
model only)
ANSI C37.90 (1989)
EN 55011 (1991)
EN 61000-6-2 (1999)
Principal Parameters
Range Accuracy
Current (amperes) Ia, Ib, Ic, Ir, Ix 0.02 to 20 per unit at < 2 + CT rating: 0.5% of CT rating
at > 2 + CT rating: 0.5% of reading
Sequence currents 0.02 to 20 per unit 1% of nominal
Main voltage 0 to 160V 0.5% of nominal 0.2V
Sequence voltages 0 to 160V 1% of nominal
Auxiliary voltage 0 to 250V 1% of nominal
Phase angle for I and V 0 to 360 1 at nominal voltage
System frequency 45 to 65 Hz 0.02 Hz
Ampere demand 0.02 to 20 per unit 0.5%
Watt demand 0 to 4000 MW 1.0% FS for PF = unity
1.5% FS for PF = 0.5 to 0.5
Watts 0 to 4000 MW
Watthours 0 to 999.999 MWh
VAR demand 0 to 4000 MVAR 1.5% FS for PF = 0.5 to 0.5
VARs 0 to 4000 MVAR

VAR-hours 0 to 999.999 MVARh
VA demand 0 to 4000 MVA 1% FS
VA 0 to 4000 MVA
VA-hours 0 to 999,999 MVAh
Apparent power factor 1 to +1 0.02 for load currents above 20% rated
Displacement power factor 1 to +1 0.02 for load currents above 20% rated
Total harmonic distortion 0 to 9999 1%
Other metering accuracy 1%
FS (full scale) = 3 x CT rating x nominal L-N voltage.

Emission Tests
(CISPR-11, Class A)
FCC 47 CFR Chapter 1: Part 15 Subpart b Class A
Immunity Tests
EN 61000-4-8: Power frequency magnetic
eld immunity
Control Power
Control voltage: 48125 Vdc
100120 Vac
100250 Vdc
100240 Vac
Operating voltage: 38150 Vdc
55132 Vac
80308 Vdc
55264 Vac
Interruption
ride-through time: 83 ms at 120V, 60 Hz AC
250 ms at 110 Vdc/
300 ms at Vac
22 VA maximum
Phase and Ground Overcurrent Protection
Inverse characteristics: Moderate, very, extremely,
2
t, I
4
t, at
TOC (51) pickup range: 0.02 to 4.0 per unit in 0.01 steps
Time multipliers: 0.05 to 10.0 in 0.01 steps
IOC (50) pickup range: 0.1 to 20.0 per unit in 0.01 steps
Pickup accuracy: 1% (at 0.1 to 2 per unit)
Time accuracy: 3% or 30 ms
Directional (67, 67N, 67G): forward, reverse or both
Threshold
(minimum voltage): 1 to 100V in 1 volt steps
% V2/V1: 2 to 40% in 1% steps
Threshold
(minimum current): 0.1 to 20.0 per unit in 0.01 steps
% I2/I1: 2 to 40% in 1% steps
Pickup range: 10 to 150V in 1 volt steps
Neutral Voltage Protection (59N)
Source: calculated, measure
Criterion: phasor, rms
Pickup range: 5 to 250V in 1V steps
Under/Overfrequency Protection (81U/O)
Power Factor (55)
Trigger/reset
threshold: 0.5 to 1 lag; 0.5 to 0.99 lead in 0.01 steps
Protective Functions (continued)
Power Protection (32)
Direction: forward/reverse
Criterion: over/under
Pickup range: 0.02 to 4 pu
Note: 1pu = 3 x CT secondary rating x VT
secondary rating for wye; the square root of
3 x VT secondary rating x CT secondary rating
for open delta.
Trip time accuracy: 0 to 2 cycles or 0.1%,
whichever is greater
VAR Protection (32V)
Direction: forward/reverse
Criterion: over/under
Pickup range: 0.02 to 4 pu
Note: 1pu = 3 x CT secondary rating x VT
secondary rating for wye; the square root of
3 x VT secondary rating x CT secondary rating
for open delta.
Trip time accuracy: 0 to 2 cycles or 0.1%,
whichever is greater
Thermal Protection (49)
Pickup range: 0 to 199C or 0 to 390F
Time delay: 0.1 to 3500 seg
Sync Check (25)
Phase angle: 1 to 60
Slip frequency: 0.1 to 2 Hz
Voltage differential: 1 to 100V
Breaker close time: 0 to 9999 cycles
Current Inputs
CT ratings: 2 x I
n
at 5A continuous
3 x I
n
at 1A continuous
80 x I
n
at 5A for 1 second
100 x I
n
at 1A for 1 second
Voltage Inputs
Nominal: 0120 Vac line to common
Operating range: 0144 Vac (+20%)
Line to common
Burden: 1 megaohm input
Metering Accuracy
Input Signal Frequency
Necessary for Accurate
Operation: 60 Hz nominal,
5763 Hz (5%)
50 Hz nominal,
4753 Hz (5%)
Frequency measuring
accuracy: 0.02 Hz
Clock accuracy: Free running 1 minute/
month at 25C (77F)
Automatically updated by
PowerNet host when
present
Discrete Inputs
Number of
contact inputs: 8
Rating: 48 Vdc wetting voltage provided
with internal ground only
Output Contacts
Number of
contact inputs: 5 Form A and 2 Form C
4.1-26
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
036
Standards, Certications and Ratings (Continued)
Table 4.1-8. FP-6000 Specications (Continued)
Rating of Output Contacts
Break 5A at 120/240 Vac
Continuous: 5A at 120/240 Vac
5A at 30 Vdc
Operating
temperature: 40C to +60C
(40F to +140F)
Storage
temperature: 40C to +85C
(40F to +185F)
Humidity: 5% to 95% relative humidity
(noncondensing)
Altitude: 0 to 6350 feet (0 to 2500m)
Above Mean Sea Level
NAND, NOR operation
Baud rate: 9600 xed
Protocol: INCOM
Dimensions
Behind Panel
In Front of Panel
Weight
12.5 lbs (5.7 kg)
Baud rate: 38.4k, 19.2k, 9.6k
Connector standard: 9-pin subminiature, 3-wire
Protocol: INCOM
4.1-27
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
General DescriptionEDR-3000
037
EDR-3000
Distribution Relay
EDR-3000 Relay
General Description
The EDR-3000 protective relay is a
multifunction, microprocessor-based
overcurrent relay designed for both
ANSI and IEC applications. It is a
panel-mounted, self-contained unit
that operates from either AC or DC
control power. The EDR-3000 design
provides true rms and fundamental
sensing of each phase and ground
current. Only one unit is required for
each three-phase circuit.
Current monitoring and operator
selectable protective functions are
integral to each relay. The EDR-3000
relay operates from the 5A or 1A
secondary output of standard
current transformers. Current
transformer ratio information is
quickly programmed into the unit
via settings. This enables the relay to
display metered current in primary
amperes, secondary amperes or per
unit values. The EDR-3000 features
a user-friendly operations panel to
monitor and to program the relay.
Operating parameters and trouble-
shooting information are displayed in
the 128 x 64 LCD display. In addition,
all data and information can be
communicated to a host computer
equipped with PowerPort-E.
A Communication Trip and
Communication Close control
command can also be initiated by
a host computer.
General
The EDR-3000 microprocessor-based
relay provides reliable three-phase
and ground overcurrent protection
for all voltage levels. It can be used for
any application where instantaneous
and/or time overcurrent protection is
required. It is most commonly used
as primary feeder circuit protection, as
in Figure 4.1-20.
Figure 4.1-20. Primary Feeder
Circuit Protection
The EDR-3000 may be applied as the
transformer primary protection or as
backup to the differential protection,
as in Figure 4.1-21.
Figure 4.1-21. Transformer
The EDR-3000 may be connected to
the secondary side of a delta-wye
grounded transformer with the ground
element connected to a separate CT in
the neutral connection of the trans-
former. With this connection, a lower
CT ratio and a pickup setting can be
used to provide more sensitive
ground fault protection especially for
resistance grounded systems (see
Figure 4.1-22).
Figure 4.1-22. Transformer Secondary
Protection with Neutral CT Connection
The EDR-3000 relay has special
provisions for connection in a zone
interlocking scheme that can be used
for bus protection or to improve
protection coordination in a tight or
close system. Zone interlocking is
described in the following sections. In
addition, the EDR-3000 has multiple
setting groups that can be used to
reduce arc ash hazard with
instantaneous elements.
50 51
50G 51G
CB
52
EDR-3000
Load
50 51
50G 51G
CB
EDR-3000
50G 51G
50 51
EDR-3000
Resistor
CB
4.1-28
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
038
The EDR-3000 provides complete
three-phase and ground protection
with separate elements and settings.
The relay can be used with CT ratios
from 1 to 50,000 for 1A models and
1 to 10,000 for 5A models. The CT ratio
can be set independently for phase
and ground, allowing the ground
element to be connected in either the
residual or the separate ground CT
conguration, as in Figure 4.1-23
and 4.1-24.
Figure 4.1-23. Residual Ground Connection
Figure 4.1-24. Separate Zero Sequence
Ground CT Connection
(Phase and Ground)
Zone selective interlocking is a protec-
tion function to minimize equipment
damage resulting from a phase or a
ground fault in an area where long
time and/or short time delay is in use.
When the Ground Zone Interlocking
feature is used, an immediate trip
is initiated when the fault is in the
breakers zone of protection, regardless
of its preset time delay. When the
Phase Zone Interlocking feature is
used, the time overcurrent elements
work as follows. The instantaneous
phase element will initiate an immediate
trip when the fault is in the breakers
zone of protection, regardless of its
preset time delay. For the time over-
current phase element, the current
sensed by the EDR-3000 must exceed
1.5 times the pickup setting for the
immediate trip signal when the fault is
in the breaker's zone of protection.
Upstream EDR-3000 protected
breakers are restrained from tripping
immediately by an interlocking signal
from the downstream EDR-3000 relay.
This interlocking signal requires only
a pair of wires from the downstream
breaker to the upstream breaker.
It provides standard coordinated
tripping when the fault is located
outside the zone of protection. In
the sample zone interlocking system
shown in Figure 4.1-26, circuit
breakers A, B and C are equipped
with EDR-3000 overcurrent relays.
Table 4.1-9. Catalog Numbering Selection for EDR-3000 Distribution Relay Removable Terminals
Consult factory for the availability of eight digital inputs, six outputs, trip coil monitor, zone interlocking, IRIG-B and Modbus-TCP.
a
b
c
GND
EDR-3000
CB-52
2 3
5 6
8 9
12 11
50N/51N
50/51
CB-52
a
b
c
GND
EDR-3000
2 3
5 6
8 9
11 12
50/51
50G/51G
EDR-3000 A 0 B A 1
Hardware Option 1
A = Four digital inputs, four
outputs, removable terminals
B = Eight digital inputs, six
outputs, removable terminals,
trip coil monitor
C = Four digital inputs, four

zone interlocking
and
IRIG-B
Hardware Option 2
0 = Phase current 5A/1A,
ground current 5A/1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
Communication
Options
B = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485)
I = Modbus-TCP
(RJ-45)
Mounting Options
0 = Standard mount
1 = Projection
panel mount
Conformal Coating
Options
A = None
B = Conformal coated
circuit boards
4.1-29
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
039
If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 3,
the EDR-3000 of downstream breaker
C senses the fault and sends a restrain-
ing signal to the upstream EDR-3000 of
feeder breaker B. Having received this
signal, the EDR-3000 of feeder breaker
B withholds its trip command. As a
result, only downstream breaker C
is tripped.
If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 2, the
EDR-3000 of feeder breaker B senses
the fault and sends a restraining signal
to the upstream EDR-3000 of main
breaker A. The EDR-3000 of the down-
stream breaker C does not see this
fault because it is situated on the
downstream side of the fault. As a
result, the EDR-3000 of downstream
breaker C does not send a restraining
signal to the EDR-3000 of feeder
breaker B. Because it did not receive a
restraining signal from the EDR-3000 of
downstream breaker C, the EDR-3000
of feeder breaker B identies that the
fault is in Zone 2 and immediately
trips feeder breaker B, regardless of
its time setting.
If a fault occurs in Zone 1, no restraining
signal is received by the Digitrip of
main breaker A. As a result, main
breaker A is immediately tripped by its
EDR-3000 overcurrent relay, regardless
of its time setting.
Note: For the time overcurrent phase
element, the current sensed by the
EDR-3000 must exceed 1.5 times the pickup
setting for the zone selective interlocking
to initiate an immediate trip signal when the
fault is in the breakers zone of protection.
Figure 4.1-25. Drilling Pattern
Figure 4.1-26. Sample Zone Selective Interlocking System
3.94
(100.0)
C
L
CC
4.94
(125.5)
5.38
(136.7)
C
L
CC
Cutout t
B Holes for
Projection
Panel Mount
A Holes for
Standard
Panel Mount
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
3.62
(91.8)
3.05
(77.6)
6.30
(160.0)
4.88
(124.0)
4x 0.19
(4.8)
4.1-30
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
Technical Data and SpecicationsEDR-3000
040
Table 4.1-10. EDR-3000 Specications
Voltage Supply
Aux. voltage: 19300 Vdc/40250 Vac
Buffer time in case
of supply failure: 50 ms at minimal aux.
voltage communication is
permitted to be interrupted
Max. permissible making current:
18A peak value for <0.25 ms
12A peak value for <1 ms
The voltage supply must be protected b a fuse of:
2.5A time-lag miniature fuse 5.0 x 20.0 mm
(approx. 0.20 in. x 0.08 in) according to IEC 60127
(approx. 0.25 in. x 1.25 in) according to UL 248-14
Digital Inputs
Max. input voltage: 300 Vdc/270 Vac
Input current: <4 mA
Reaction time: <20 ms
Fallback time: <30 ms (safe state of the
digital inputs)
4 Switching thresholds: Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc,
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
230 Vac/dc
Un = 24 Vdc
Switching threshold 1 ON: Min. 19.2 Vdc
Switching threshold 1 OFF: Max. 9.6 Vdc
Un = 48V/60 Vdc
Un = 110/120 Vac/dc
Switching threshold 3 ON: Min. 88.0 Vdc/88.0 Vac
Switching threshold 3 OFF: Max. 44.0 Vdc/44.0 Vac
Un = 230/240 Vac/dc
Switching threshold 4 ON: Min. 184 Vdc/184 Vac
Switching threshold 4 OFF: Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac
Terminals: Screw-type terminal
Front Interface RS-232
Baud rates: 115,200 Baud
Handshake: RTS and CTS
Connection: Nine-pole D-Sub plug
RS-485
Master/slave: Slave
Connection: Six screw-clamping terminals
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
(terminating resistors internal)
Climatic Environmental Conditions
Storage temperature: 25C up to +70C
(13F to +158F)
Operating temperature: 20C up to +60C
(4F to +140F)
Permissible humidity
at Ann. average: <75% rel.
(on 56d up to 95% rel.)
Permissible
installation altitude: <2000m (6561.67 ft)
above sea level
If 4000m (13,123.35 ft)
altitude applies, a changed
classication of the
operating and test voltages
may be necessary.
Power Consumption
Power supply range: 19300 Vdc: 6W idle mode/
8W max. power
40250 Vac: 6W idle mode/
8W max. power
(for frequencies of 4070 Hz)
Power consumption: Phase current inputs
at I
n
= 1A burden = 0.15 mVA
at I
n
Ground current input: at I
n
at I
n
Binary Output Relays
Continuous current: 5A AC/DC
Switch-on current: 25A AC/DC for 4s
Max. breaking current: 5A AC up to 125V AC
5A DC up to 50V (resistive)
0.2A DC at 300V
Max. switching voltage: 250 Vac/300 Vdc
Switching capacity: 2000 VA
Contact type: 1 changeover contact
Terminals: Screw-type terminals
4.1-31
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
041
EDR-4000
Distribution Protection Relay
EDR-4000 Distribution Protection Relay
General Description
Eatons EDR-4000 distribution
protection relay is a multi-functional,
microprocessor-based relay for feeder
circuits of all voltage levels. It may be
used as a primary protection on
and differential protection. The relay
is most commonly used on medium
voltage switchgear applications.
The EDR-4000 feeder protection relay
provides complete current, voltage,
frequency protection and metering in
a single, compact case. The relay has
four current inputs rated for either 5A
voltage is for independent single-
phase undervoltage/overvoltage
protection, or ground protection for
an ungrounded system.
The Maintenance Mode password
protected soft key, can be used for
arc ash mitigation to change to an
instantaneous elements only. The
multiple setting groups can also be
changed, via communications or a
digital input.
and retrieval of data without the need
of a computer. 14 programmable
LEDs provide quick indication of
relay status.
computer connection. An RS-485
communication port on the back is
standard for local area networking
using Modbus-RTU. An optional
Ethernet port and protocols
are available.
The EDR-4000 distribution protection
functions*. Logic gates and timers
may be dened and arranged for
customized applications. Programma-
ble logic control functions make the
EDR-4000 relay ideally suited for
main-tie-main and main 1/main 2
transfer schemes. Flash memory is
used for the programming and all
settings are stored in nonvolatile
memory. The relay allows for four
preprogrammed setting groups that
can be activated through software or
contact input.
through software, the display or a
contact input.
relay has a mass memory for data
storage and a real-time clock with
1 ms time resolution. The relay will
log 300 sequence of event records,
20 detailed trip logs, minimum/
maximum values, load proles,
breaker wear information and
oscillography data.
The EDR-4000 has eight programmable
binary inputs, two normally opened and
eight Form C heavy-duty outputs and
one Form C signal alarm relay. It can
be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or
40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
Features
Protection
Phase overcurrent elements:
Three instantaneous elements
with timers (50P[1], 50P[2]
and 50P[3])
Three inverse time overcurrent
elements (51P[1], 51P[2]
and 51P[3])
11 standard curves
51P[2] and 51P[3] can be
voltage restrained
Ground overcurrent elements:
Two instantaneous measured
elements with timers (50X[1]
and 50X[2])
Two instantaneous calculated
elements with timers (50R[1]
and 50R[2])
Two inverse time overcurrent
measured elements (51X[1]
and 51X[2])
calculated elements (51R[1]
and 51R[2])
11 standard curves
overcurrent (46[1], 46[2])
sequence protection (47[1], 47[2])
Main three-phase under/overvoltage
(27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
Auxiliary single-phase under/
overvoltage (27A[1], 27A[2],
59A[1], 59A[2])
Ground fault overvoltage relay
(59N[1], 59N[2])
Six frequency elements that can be
assigned to: overfrequency, under-
frequency, rate of change or vector
surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4],
81[5], 81[6])
Apparent and displacement
power factor (55A[1], 55A[2],
55D[1], 55D[2])
protection (87B)
Switch onto fault protection
Cold load pickup
protection (87B)
Metering
zero sequence
Ampere demand
zero sequence
Phase angles
Watts and kW demand
Power factor
Frequency
% THD V and I
4.1-32
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Distribution Protection
042
Monitoring
Trip coil monitor
Breaker wear primary and secondary
(accumulated interrupted current)
Oscillography (6000 cycles total)
(up to 300 events)
Communication
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
IRIG-B
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
Modbus-RTU
Modbus-TCP (optional)
Control Functions
Breaker open/close
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable Logic
Programmable LEDs
Cold load pickup
CT supervision
Consult factory for the availability of sensitive ground and large display.
EDR-4000 A 0 B A 1
Hardware Option 1
A = Eight digital inputs, 11 outputs,
removable terminals, zone
interlocking
B = Eight digital inputs, 11 outputs,
removable terminals,
zone interlocking and
large display
Hardware Option 2
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
sensitive ground
current 0.5A/0.1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
Communication
Options
B = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485)
1 = Modbus-RTU +
Modbus-TCP
Mounting Options
0 = Standard mount
1 = Projection
panel mount
Conformal Coating
Options
A = None
circuit boards
4.1-33
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
043
Protection and Control Functions
protection relay has been designed
for maximum user exibility and
simplicity. The base relay includes all
the standard current and voltage
protection and metering functions.
relay provides complete three-phase
and ground overcurrent protection.
There are eight independent ground
overcurrent elements. The ground
elements X use the independently
measured ground (or neutral) current
from a separate current-sensing input.
The ground elements R use a
calculated 3Io residual current
obtained from the sum of the three-
phase currents. This calculated current
could be used for either the neutral
or ground current in a three-phase,
four-wire system. Each of the phase
and ground overcurrent elements
can be selected to operate based on
fundamental or rms current.
current pickup level (51P[2] and
51P[3]). This modication of the
pickup overcurrent level is compared
to the corresponding phase input
voltage. The EDR-4000 uses the simple
linear model below to determine the
effective pickup value.
IEC or thermal curve families, and can
select instantaneous or time delay
Breaker Failure
relay includes a breaker failure (50BF,
62BF) function that can be initiated
from either an internal or an external
trip signal. This is an independent
element that can be used to operate
a lockout relay or to trip an upstream
breaker. The timer must be longer
than the breaker operating time and
the protective function reset times.
Voltage Protection
relay has four voltage-input circuits.
There is a three-phase set designated
as Main Voltage (M) and a single-
phase voltage circuit designated as
Auxiliary Voltage (A). Both include
undervoltage (27) and overvoltage (59)
protection. The three-phase voltage
protection can be set to operate on a
single-phase, two out of three phases,
or all three-phase logic. The Main VTs
also provide phase voltage unbalance/
Ground Voltage Protection
In high impedance grounded systems,
ground fault protection is provided by
the detection of zero sequence voltage
(3Vo) in the neutral of the transformer
by an overvoltage element (59N)
connected to the secondary of the
distribution grounding transformer,
or in the secondary of a wye-broken
delta transformer used when the
neutral is not accessible or in delta
system. In the EDR-4000, we can
measure this zero sequence voltage
through the 4th voltage input; the 59N
element has to be desensitized for 3rd
harmonic voltages that can be present
in the system under normal operation.
relay can be applied on either an A-B-C
or A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting
permits correct operation and indication
of the actual system conguration.
The EDR-4000 relay provides six
frequency elements than can be
used to detect under/over frequency,
rate of change, and a vector surge
(decoupling of two systems) protec-
tion on the Main VT inputs. Each
element has an independent threshold
set point and adjustable time delay.
Maintenance Mode
The Maintenance Mode can improve
safety by providing a simple and
reliable method to reduce fault clear-
ing time and lower incident energy
levels at energized panels. The
Maintenance Mode allows the user
to switch to more sensitive settings
via a password protected soft key,
communication or via a digital Input
while maintenance work is being
performed at an energized panel
or device. The more sensitive
settings provide greater security for
maintenance personnel and helps to
reduce the possibility of injury.
Monitoring and Metering
The EDR-4000 protection relay records
a maximum of 300 events associated
with the relay. An event is classied as
a change of state as detected by the
relay. These include relay pickups,
dropouts, trips, contact closure,
alarms, setting changes and self-
diagnostic failures. Each event is date
and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution.
The events are stored in an FIFO log in
chronological order.
Trip Log
The EDR-4000 protection relay will
store a maximum of 20 trip records
in an FIFO trip log. Each trip record will
resolution. The trip log record will
include information on the type of
fault, protection elements that
Waveform Capture
The EDR-4000 transformer protection
relay provides oscillography-recording
measured signals along with the
binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and
contact closures. The ETR-4000 relay
can record up to 6000 cycles of data.
The number of records is proportional
to the size of each record; the maxi-
mum size per record is 600 cycles. The
waveform capture is initiated by up
to eight different triggers; it can also
be generated manually through the
display or via communications.
Pickup %
100 %
25 %
4.1-34
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
044
128 x 64 pixel LCD display with back-
ground illumination for wide angle
viewing in all light conditions. 17
programmable LEDs provide quick
and easy visual display of power
on, mode of operation, alarm and trip
indication. Soft keys are provided for
operation mode selection, scrolling
through data and settings. In addition,
the relay settings and test functions
are password protected.
Programmable I/O
relay provides heavy-duty, trip-rated,
two normally open and eight Form C
contacts. Two isolated inputs can be
used for monitoring the trip circuit.
One Form C contact is dedicated to
the relay failure alarm function and
is operated in a normally energized
(fail-safe) mode. There are eight
user-congurable discrete inputs that
accept a wet contact and can operate
through a wide range of power.
Each input and output is user-
programmable for maximum
Programmable Logic
relay provides logic gates and timers
has a unique output assignment and
designation that can be used as the
input to another gate. There are
24 independent timers that have
delay settings.
Figure 4.1-28. Typical One-Line Diagram
4.1-35
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
045
Figure 4.1-29. Typical Control Diagram
4.1-36
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
046
PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or a
laptop for easy access to a single relay
to change set points or conguration
data. PowerPort-E is free and can be
at www.eaton.com/pr.

Software. Power Xpert Software is a
power management software package
that is designed for continuous,
remote monitoring of many devices.
It provides additional functions such
as billing, trending and graphics.
Xpert Software.
Figure 4.1-30. PowerPort-E EDR-4000 Device Planning
4.1-37
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
047
Voltage Supply
(20%/+10%)
Buffer time in case
voltage interrupted
communication
is permitted
18A peak value for <0.25 ms
12A peak value for <1 ms
The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of:
Digital Inputs
digital inputs)
Switching thresholds: Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc,
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
230 Vac/dc
Un = 24 Vdc
Un = 48V/60 Vdc
Un = 110/120 Vac/dc
Un = 230/240 Vac/dc
Zone Interlocking
NOTICE: ONLY FOR ZONE INTERLOCK TRIPPING
OUTPUTS (ZONE INTERLOCK, SEMI-CONDUCTOR
OUTPUT): 5 Vdc, <2 mA FOR CONNECTION TO
ELECTRONIC INPUTS ONLY.
Zone out:
Output voltage (high): 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc
Output voltage (low): 0.0 to +0.5 Vdc
Zone in:
Nominal input voltage: +5 Vdc
Max. input voltage: +5.5 Vdc
Switching threshold ON: Min. 4.0 Vdc
Switching threshold OFF: Max. 1.5 Vdc
Galvanic isolation: 2.5 kV AC
(to ground and other IO)
Connection: Screw-type terminals
(twisted pair)
Power Consumption
Power
supply range: 24270 Vdc: 7W idle mode/
approx. 13W max. power
48230 Vac: 7 VA idle mode/
approx. 13 VA max. power
Power
consumption: Phase current inputs
at I
n
= 1A, S = 0.15 mVA
at I
n
= 5A, S = 0.15 mVA
Ground
current input: at I
n
= 1A, S = 0.35 mVA
at I
n
= 5A, S = 0.35 mVA
Relay Outputs
Max. make current: 25A AC/25A DC up to 30V for 4s
30A/230 Vac according to
ANSI IEEE Std. C37.90-2005
Max. breaking current: 5A AC up to 125 Vdc
0.3A DC at 300V
Contact type: Form C or normally open contact
RS-485
Master/slave: Slave
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
(22F to +158F)
(4F to +140F)
Permissible
above sea level
If 4000m (13,123.35 ft)
altitude applies a changed
classication of the
may be necessary.
4.1-38
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
048
EDR-5000
Distribution Protection Relay
EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay
General Description
microprocessor-based relay for feeder
circuits of all voltage levels. It may
be used as a primary protection on
and differential protection. The relay
is most commonly used on medium
voltage switchgear applications.
relay provides complete current,
voltage and frequency protection, and
metering in a single, compact case.
The relay has four current inputs rated
for either 5A or 1A and four voltage
inputs. Three of the voltage inputs are
to be connected to the three-phase
power voltage for voltage protection
and for metering. They can be
connected in wye-ground or open
delta conguration. The fourth voltage
is for independent single-phase
undervoltage/overvoltage protection,
or ground protection for an
ungrounded system.
digital input.
relay status.
are available.
functions. Logic gates and timers may
be dened and arranged for custom-
ized applications. Programmable logic
control functions make the EDR-5000
relay ideally suited for main-tie-main
and main 1/main 2 transfer schemes.
programming, and all settings are
contact input.
relay has mass memory for data
log 300 sequence of event records,
oscillography data.
The EDR-5000 has eight programmable
binary inputs, two normally opened and
eight Form C heavy-duty outputs and
one Form C signal alarm relay. It can
be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or
40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
Features
Protection
and 50P[3])
and 51P[3])
11 standard curves
Voltage restraint (51P[2]
and 51P[3])
Directional control (all elements)
and 50X[2])
and 50R[2])
and 51X[2])
and 51R[2])
11 standard curves
(27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
59A[1], 59A[2])
(59N[1], 59N[2])
surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4],
81[5], 81[6])
55D[1], 55D[2])
Forward and reverse watts
(32[1], 32[2])
Forward and reverse VARs
(32V[1], 32V[2])
Sync check (25)
Autoreclosing (79)
protection (87B)
Cold load pickup
4.1-39
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
049
Metering
zero sequence
Ampere demand
zero sequence
Phase angles
Watts and kW demand
Power factor
Frequency
% THD V and I
Sync values
Monitoring
Trip coil monitor
(up to 300 events)
Communication
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
IRIG-B
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
Modbus-RTU
Control Functions
Breaker open/close
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable logic
Programmable LEDs
Cold load pickup
CT supervision
Consult factory for the availability of sensitive ground and large display.
EDR-5000 A 0 B A 1
Hardware Option 1
A = Eight digital inputs, 11 outputs,
interlocking
interlocking and large
display
Hardware Option 2
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
sensitive ground
current 0.5A/0.1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
Communication
Options
B = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485)
H = IEC-61850
(Goose)
1 = Modbus-RTU +
Modbus-TCP
Mounting Options
0 = Standard mount
1 = Projection
panel mount
Conformal Coating
Options
A = None
circuit boards
4.1-40
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
050
The Eatons EDR-5000 distribution
simplicity. The base relay includes
all the standard current and voltage
protection and metering functions.
and ground directional overcurrent
protection. There are eight indepen-
dent ground overcurrent elements.
The ground elements X use the
current-sensing input. The ground
elements R uses a calculated 3Io
residual current obtained from the
sum of the three-phase currents. This
either the neutral or ground current in
a three-phase, four-wire system. Each
of the phase and ground overcurrent
elements can be selected to operate
based on fundamental or rms current.
(50, 51). A quadrature voltage is com-
pared to a corresponding phase current
to establish the direction of the fault.
This function is selectable to operate in
the forward, reverse or both directions.
negative sequence or residual currents
supervised by zero, negative or positive
current pickup level (51P[2], 51P[3]).
This modication of the pickup
overcurrent level is compared to the
corresponding phase input voltage.
The EDR-5000 uses the simple linear
model below to determine the
effective pickup value.
Sync Check
the line. It also incorporates breaker
close time, dead bus dead line,
dead bus live line, and live bus live
line features.
Reverse Power
are three elements to be congured:
Reverse VARs
Reverse VARs can be used to detect
loss of excitation in synchronous
machines. There are three elements
to be congured: operate in forward
or reverse; or, under or over
VARs conditions.
IEC or thermal curve families, and can
select instantaneous or time delay
Breaker Failure
from either an internal or external trip
Voltage Protection
independent threshold set point
and adjustable time delay.
Ground Voltage Protection
In high impedance grounded systems,
ground fault protection is provided by
the detection of zero sequence voltage
(3Vo) in the neutral of the transformer
by an overvoltage element (59N)
connected to the secondary of the
distribution grounding transformer,
or in the secondary of a wye-broken
delta transformer used when the
neutral is not accessible or in delta
system. In the EDR-5000, we can
measure this zero sequence voltage
through the 4th voltage input; the 59N
element has to be desensitized for 3rd
harmonic voltages that can be present
in the system under normal operation.
relay can be applied on either an A-B-C
or A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting
The EDR-5000 relay provides six
frequency elements than can be
used to detect under/over frequency,
rate of change, and a vector surge
(decoupling of two systems) protec-
tion on the Main VT inputs. Each
set point and adjustable time delay.
Autoreclosing Logic
The EDR-5000 provides a six shot-
recloser scheme. Autoreclosing is
normally used by the utilities in their
distribution and transmission lines,
but it can be used in commercial
and industrial applications with long
overhead lines. Nearly 85% of the
faults that occur on overhead lines
are transient in nature. Tripping of a
circuit breaker normally clears a
transient fault and reclosing of the
circuit breaker restores power back
to the circuit.
Maintenance Mode
reliable method to reduce fault
clearing time and lower incident
energy levels at energized panels.
The Maintenance Mode allows the
user to switch to more sensitive
settings via a password protected
soft key, communication or via a
digital input while maintenance work
is being performed at an energized
panel or device. The more sensitive
maintenance personnel and help to
Pickup %
100 %
25 %
4.1-41
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
051
The EDR-5000 protection relay records
with the relay. An event is classied as
a change of state as detected by the
relay. These include relay pickups,
The events are stored in an FIFO log
in chronological order.
Trip Log
The EDR-5000 protection relay will
in an FIFO trip log. Each trip record
will be date and time stamped to a
1 ms resolution. The trip log record
will include information on the type
of fault, protection elements that
operated, fault location and currents
Waveform Capture
measured signals along with the binary
signals of pickup, trip, logic and contact
closures. The EDR-5000 relay can
record up to 6000 cycles of data. The
number of records is proportional to
the size of each record; the maximum
size per record is 600 cycles. The
The front panel user interface has
a 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with
background illumination for wide
angle viewing in all light conditions.
17 programmable LEDs provide quick
Load Proling/Trending
The EDR-5000 relay automatically
records selected quantities into non-
volatile memory every 5, 10, 15, 30 or
60 minutes, depending on the trending
report setting.
Programmable I/O
two normally open and eight Form C
used for monitoring the trip circuit.
the relay failure alarm function and is
operated in a normally energized
(failsafe) mode. There are eight
user-congurable discrete inputs
that accept a wet contact and can
operate through a wide range of
power. Each input and output is
Programmable Logic
are 24 independent timers that have
delay settings.
Figure 4.1-32. Visual Logic Editor
4.1-42
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
052
4.1-43
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
053
is PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or
Contact your local Eaton representative
for more information on Power Xpert
Software.
Figure 4.1-35. PowerPort-E EDR-5000 Device Planning
4.1-44
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Feeder Protection
054
Voltage Supply
(20%/+10%)
Buffer time in case
voltage interrupted
communication
is permitted
18A peak value for 0.25 ms
12A peak value for 1 ms
Digital Inputs
digital inputs)
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
230 Vac/dc
Un = 24 Vdc
Un = 48V/60 Vdc
Un = 110/120 Vac/dc
Un = 230/240 Vac/dc
Zone Interlocking
Zone out:
Zone in:
(twisted pair)
Power Consumption
Power
Power
at I
n
= 1A, S = 0.15 mVA
at I
n
= 5A, S = 0.15 mVA
Ground
current input: at I
n
= 1A, S = 0.35 mVA
at I
n
= 5A, S = 0.35 mVA
Relay Outputs
0.3A DC at 300V
RS-485
Master/slave: Slave
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
(22F to +158F)
(4F to +140F)
Permissible
above sea level
If 4000m (13,123.35 ft)
classication of the
may be necessary.
4.2-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
General DescriptionOverload Relays
055
Freedom Overload Relays
32A OverloadC306DN3B
General Description
C306 Overload Relays are designed for
use with CE or CN non-reversing and
reversing contactors. Four sizes are
available for overload protection up
to 144A.
Features
Selectable manual or automatic
reset operation
Interchangeable heater packs
adjustable 24%to match motor FLA
and calibrated for use with 1.0 and
1.15 service factor motors. Heater
packs for 32A overload relay will
mount in 75A overload relay
useful in derating applications
such as jogging
Class 10 or 20 heater packs
Load lugs built into relay base
Bimetallic, ambient compensated
operated. Trip free mechanism
Electrically isolated NO-NC
contacts (pull RESET button to test).
(Electrical ratings see tables in
Volume 5Motor Control and
Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 33,
Section 33.1)
Overload trip indication
Shrouded or ngerproof
terminals to reduce possibility
of electrical shock
Meets UL 508 single-phasing
requirements
UL listed, CSA certied, NEMA
compliance and CE mark
Reference
Refer to Volume 5Motor Control
and Protection, CA08100006E,
Tab 33, Section 33.1 for additional
product information.
C440/XT Electronic
Overload Relay
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay
General Description
Eatons electronic overload relay (EOL)
is the most compact, high-featured,
economical product in its class.
Designed on a global platform, the
new EOL covers the entire power
control spectrum including NEMA,
IEC and DP contactors. The NEMA and
DP versions are offered with the C440
designation while the IEC offering has
the XT designation. The electronic
design provides reliable, accurate
and value driven protection and
communications capabilities in a
single compact device. It is the exible
choice for any application requiring
easy-to-use, reliable protection.
Eaton has a long history of innovations
and product development in motor
control and protection, including both
traditional NEMA, as well as IEC
control. It was from this experience
that the C440 was developed,
delivering new solutions to meet
todays demands.
C440 is a self-powered electronic over-
load relay available up to 100A as a
self contained unit. With external CTs,
C440 can protect motor up to 1500 FLA.
Available add-on accessories include
remote reset capability and communi-
cation modules with I/O for DeviceNet,
PROFIBUS, and Modbus.
Features and Benets
Features
Reliable, accurate, electronic
motor protection
Easy to select, install and maintain
Compact size
Flexible, intelligent design
Global product offering
available with NEMA, IEC and
DP power control
Size/Range
Broad FLA range (0.331500A)
Selectable trip class (10A, 10, 20, 30)
Direct mounting to NEMA, IEC and
DP contactors
Most compact electronic overload in
its class
Motor Control
Two B600 alarm (NO) and fault
(NC) contacts
Test/Trip button
Motor Protection
Thermal overload
Phase loss
Selectable (ON/OFF)
phase imbalance
Selectable (ON/OFF) ground fault
User Interface
Large FLA selection dial
Trip status indicator
Operating mode LED
DIP switch selectable trip class,
phase imbalance and ground fault
Selectable Auto/Manual reset
Feature Options
Remote reset
120 Vac
24 Vac
24 Vdc
Tamper-proof cover
Communications modules
Modbus RTU RS-485
DeviceNet with I/O
PROFIBUS with I/O
Modbus RTU with I/O (Q4 2010)
Ethernet IP (planned)
4.2-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
General DescriptionOverload Relays
056
Benets
Reliability and Improved Uptime
C440 provides the users with
peace of mind knowing that their
assets are protected with the
highest level of motor protection
and communication capability in
its class
Extends the life of plant assets
with selectable motor protection
features such as trip class, phase
imbalance and ground fault
Protects against unnecessary
downtime by discovering changes
in your system (line/load) with
remote monitoring capabilities
Status LED provides
added assurance that valuable
assets are protected by indicating
the overload operational status
Flexibility
Available with NEMA, IEC and
DP contactors
Improves return on investment by
reducing inventory carrying costs
with wide FLA adjustment (5:1) and
selectable trip class
Design incorporates built-in ground
fault protection thus eliminating the
need for separate CTs and modules
Flexible communication with
optional I/O enables easy integra-
tion into plant management
systems for remote monitoring
and control
Available as an open component
and in enclosed control and motor
control center assemblies
Monitoring Capabilities
Individual phase currents rms
Average three-phase current rms
Thermal memory
Fault indication (overload, phase
loss, phase imbalance, ground fault)
Safety
IP 20 rated terminal blocks
Available in Eatons industry leading
FlashGard MCCs
Tested to the highest industry
standards such as UL, CSA, CE
and IEC
RoHS compliant
UL
CSA

CE
NEMA
IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660
ISO 13849-1 (EN954-1)
RoHS
ATEX directive 94/9/EC
Equipment Group 2, Category 2
Table 4.2-1. Electronic Overload Education
Description Denition Cause Effect if not Protected C440/XT Protection
Motor Protection
Thermal overload Overload is a condition in
which current draw exceeds
115% of the full load
amperage rating for
an inductive motor.
An increase in the load or
torque that is being driven
by the motor.
A low voltage supply to the
motor causes the current to
go high to maintain the
power needed.
A poor power factor causing
above normal current draw.
Increase in current draw
leads to heat and insulation
breakdown, which can cause
system failure.
Increase in current can increase
power consumption and waste
valuable energy.
Thermal trip behavior is dened
by UL, CSA and IEC standards.
Trip class is settable from 10A,
10, 20, 30
Ground fault A line to ground fault. A current leakage path to ground. An undetected ground fault can
burn through multiple insulation
windings, ultimately leading to
motor failure, not to mention risk
to equipment or personnel
Fixed protective setting that
takes the starter ofine if ground
fault current exceeds 50% of the
FLA dial setting, i.e., if the FLA
dial is set to 12A, the overload
relay will trip if the ground
current exceeds 6A.
Imbalanced
phases (voltage
and current)
Uneven voltage or current
between phases in a three-
phase system.
When a three-phase load is
powered with a poor quality
line, the voltage per phase
may be imbalanced.
Imbalanced voltage causes large
imbalanced currents and as a
result this can lead to motor
stator windings being over-
loaded, causing excessive
heating, reduced motor efciency
and reduced insulation life.
takes the starter ofine if a
phase drops below 50% of
the other two phases.
Phase loss
current (single-
phasing)
One of the three-phase
voltages is not present.
Multiple causes, loose wire,
improper wiring, grounded
phase, open fuse, etc.
Single-phasing can lead to
unwanted motor vibrations in
addition to the results of imbal-
anced phases as listed above.
4.2-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
Product SelectionOverload Relays
057
Modbus Communication Module
The Modbus module combined
with an expansion module and a
communication adapter provide
Modbus communication capability
to the C440 electronic overload relay.
Features and Benets
The Modbus communication
module is capable of baud rates
up to 115K
The Modbus address and baud rate
conguration can be easily changed
using the HMi user interface
Modbus address and baud rate are
set via convenient DIP switches;
LEDs are provided to display
Modbus trafc
Conguration with common
Modbus conguration tools
Terminals
Unique locking mechanism
provides for easy removal of
the terminal block with the eld
wiring installed
Each terminal is marked for ease
of wiring and troubleshooting
Selectable I/O assemblies
4IN/2OUT
Signal types include
24 Vdc I/O and
120 Vac I/O
Each I/O module is optically
isolated between the eld I/O and
the network adapter to protect the
I/O and communication circuits
from possible damage due to
transients and ground loops
Input Module features a user-
denable input debounce, which
limits the effects of transients and
electrical noise
Output Module supports a user-
denable safe state for loss of
communication; hold last state,
ON or OFF
DeviceNet Communication Modules
The DeviceNet Communication Module
provides monitoring and control for
the C440 overload relay from a single
DeviceNet node. These modules also
offer convenient I/O in two voltage
options, 24 Vdc and 120 Vac.
DeviceNet Communication Module
Features and Benets
Communication to DeviceNet uses
only one DeviceNet MAC ID
Conguration
DeviceNet MAC ID and Baud
rate are set via convenient DIP
switches with an option to set
from the network
Advanced conguration available
using common DeviceNet tools
Terminals
wiring installed
4IN/2OUT
24 Vdc I/O and
120 Vac I/O
electrical noise
ON or OFF
Combined status LED
PROFIBUS Communication Modules
The PROFIBUS module combined
with an expansion module and a
communication adapter provide
Modbus communication capability
to the C440 electronic overload relay.
PROFIBUS Communication Module
Features and Benets
The PROFIBUS communication
up to 12 Mb
PROFIBUS address is set via
convenient DIP switches; LEDs are
provided to display PROFIBUS status
Intuitive conguration with common
PROFIBUS conguration tools
Terminals
wiring installed
4IN/2OUT
24 Vdc I/O and
120 Vac I/O
electrical noise
ON or OFF
4.2-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
058
Table 4.2-2. Electronic Overload Relays up to 1500A
45 mm 55 mm
Electrical Ratings
Operating voltage (three-phase) and frequency 690 Vac (60/50 Hz) 690 Vac (60/50 Hz)
FLA Range
0.331.65A
15A
420A
945A
20100A
Use with Contactors
XT IEC frames B, C, D F, G
Freedom NEMA sizes 00, 0, 1, 2 3
Trip Class
10A, 10, 20, 30
Selectable
10A, 10, 20, 30
Selectable
Motor Protection
Thermal overload setting 1.05 x FLA: does not trip
1.15 x FLA: overload trip
1.05 x FLA: does not trip
1.15 x FLA: overload trip
Feature
Phase loss Fixed threshold 50% Fixed threshold 50%
Phase imbalance (selectable: enable/disable) Fixed threshold 50% Fixed threshold 50%
Ground fault (selectable: enable/disable) 50% of FLA dial setting
>150% = 2 sec
>250% = 1 sec
50% of FLA dial setting
>150% = 2 sec
>250% = 1 sec
Reset Manual/automatic Manual/automatic
Indicators
Trip status Orange ag Orange ag
Mode LED One ash: Overload operating properly
Two ashes: Current is above FLA dial setting
pending trip
One ash: Overload operating properly
Two ashes: Current is above FLA dial setting
pending trip
Options
Remote reset Yes Yes
Reset bar Yes Yes
Communication expansion module Yes Yes
Communication adapter Yes Yes
Capacity
Load terminals
Terminal capacity 1210 AWG (46 mm
2
)
86 AWG (616 mm
2
)
61 AWG (1650 mm
2
)
Tightening torque 2025 lb-in (2.32.8 Nm)
2530 lb-in (2.83.4 Nm)
2530 lb-in (2.83.4 Nm)
Input, auxiliary contact and remote reset terminals
Terminal capacity 2 x (1812) AWG 2 x (1812) AWG
Tightening torque 5.3 lb-in (0.81.2 Nm) 5.3 lb-in (0.81.2 Nm)
Voltages
Insulation voltage U
i
(three-phase) 690 Vac 690 Vac
i
(control) 500 Vac 500 Vac
Rated impulse withstand voltage 6000 Vac 6000 Vac
Overvoltage category/pollution degree III/3 III/3
4.2-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
059
C441 Motor Insight Overload
and Monitoring Relay
General Description
Eatons C441 Motor Insight
, the
rst product in the Intelligent Power
Control Solutions family, is a highly
congurable motor, load and line
protection device with power
monitoring, diagnostics and exible
communications allowing the
customer to save energy, optimize
their maintenance schedules and
congure greater system protection,
thus reducing overall costs
and downtime.
C441 Motor Insight is available in either
a line-powered or 120 Vac control
powered design, capable of monitoring
voltages up to 660 Vac. Each of these
units is available in a 19A or a
590A FLA model. With external CTs,
Motor Insight can protect motors up
to 540A FLA. Available add-on
accessories include communication
modules for Modbus
, DeviceNet
and PROFIBUS
, all with I/O options.

For ease-of-use and operator safety,
C441 Motor Insight offers a remote
display that mounts easily with two
30 mm knockouts.
Features and Benets
Features
Size/Range
Broad FLA range of 1540A
Selectable trip class (530)
Four operating voltage options
Line-powered from 240 Vac,
480 Vac, 600 Vac
Control-powered from 120 Vac
Motor Control
Two output relays
One B300 Form C fault relay and
one B300 ground fault shunt relay
Other relay congurations are
available, including one Form A
and one Form B SPST (fault
and auxiliary relays), allowing
programmable isolated relay
behavior and unique voltages
One external remote reset terminal
Motor Protection
Thermal overload
Jam protection
Current imbalance
Current phase loss
Ground fault
Phase reversal
Load Protection
Undercurrent
Low power (kW)
High power (kW)
Line Protection
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Voltage imbalance
Voltage phase loss
Currentaverage and phase rms
Voltageaverage and phase rms
Powermotor kW
Power factor
Frequency
Thermal capacity
Run hours
Current imbalance %
Voltage imbalance %
Motor starts
Motor run hours
Options
Type 1, 12 remote display
Type 3R remote display kit
Communication modules
Modbus
Modbus with I/O
DeviceNet with I/O
PROFIBUS with I/O
Modbus TCP with I/O (contact
product line)
Ethernet IP (contact product line)
Benets
Advanced diagnostics allows for
quick and accurate identication
of the root source of a motor,
pump or power quality fault;
reducing trouble-shooting time and
the loss of productivity, reducing
repeat faults due to misdiagnosis,
and increasing process output
and protability
Provides superior protection
of motors and pumps before
catastrophic failure occurs
Increases protability with greater
process uptime and throughput,
reduced costs per repair, reduced
energy consumption and extended
equipment life
Adjustments to overload congura-
tion can be made at any time
Safety
IP20 rated terminal blocks
Terminal blocks are set back
from the display to reduce
operator shock hazard
Remote display (optional) does not
require that the operator open the
panel to congure the device
Flexibility
Offered in a variety of
congurations
External snap-on modules
provide support for multiple
communications protocols
Advanced power, voltage and
current monitoring capabilities
Communications modules and
remote display can be used
simultaneously
Highly congurable fault and reset
characteristics for numerous
applications
Fully programmable isolated fault
and auxiliary relays
Ease of Use
Bright LED display with easy-to-
understand setting and references
Powered from line voltage or
120 Vac control power
Remote display powered from
base unit
Full word descriptions and units on
user interface
cULus listed NKCR, NKCR7, 508
UL 1053 applicable sections for
ground fault detection
CSA certied (Class 3211-02)
CE
NEMA
IEC EN 60947-4-1
RoHS
4.2-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
060
Table 4.2-3. Advanced Overload Education
Description Denition Source Result C441 Motor Insight
Protection
Motor Protection
Thermal overload Overload is a condition in which
current draw to a motor exceeds
115% of the full load amperage
rating over a period of time for
an inductive motor.
An increase in the load or
torque that is being driven by
the motor.
A low voltage supply to the
motor would cause the current
to go high to maintain the
power needed.
A poor power factor would
cause above normal current
draw.
Increase in current draw.
Current leads to heat and
insulation breakdown, which
can cause system failure.
Additionally, an increase in
current can increase power
consumption and waste
valuable energy.
Thermal trip behavior is dened
by UL, CSA and IEC standards.
Trip class is settable from
530 by 1
Provides power factor monitor-
ing and low voltage protection
features.
Jam Jam is similar to thermal
overload in that it is a current
draw on the motor above
normal operating conditions.
Mechanical stall, interference,
jam or seizure of the motor or
motor load.
The motor attempts to drive the
load, which has more resistive
force due to the mechanical
interference. In order to drive
the load, the motor draws an
abnormal amount of current,
which can lead to insulation
breakdown and system failure.
Provides a congurable Jam
setting that is active during
motor run state to avoid
nuisance trips.
Trip Threshold 150400%
of FLA.
Trip Delay 120 seconds.
Ground fault A line to ground fault. A current leakage path
to ground.
An undetected ground fault
can burn through multiple
insulation windings, ultimately
leading to motor failure.
Motor Insight has ground fault
protection capability down to
0.15 amps estimated from the
existing three-phase CTs using
the residual current method.
That is, the three-phase current
signals should sum to zero
unless a ground fault (GF)
condition is present. In the case
of a GF, Motor Insight can alarm,
trip the starter, or trip an alterna-
tive relay that can be used to
shunt trip a breaker or light up a
warning light. GF current can
also be monitored in real-time
through the advanced monitor-
ing capabilities.
Note: GF settable thresholds
vary with motor FLA. 0.15A may
not be available in all cases.
Imbalanced phases
(voltage and current)
Uneven voltage or currents
between phases in a three-
phase system.
When a three-phase load is
powered with a poor quality
line, the voltage per phase may
be imbalanced.
Imbalanced voltage causes
large imbalanced currents and
as a result this can lead to motor
stator windings being over-
loaded, causing excessive heat-
ing, reduced motor efciency
and reduced insulation life.
Provides two protection settings
that address this problem. The
user can choose to set current
imbalance thresholds or voltage
imbalance thresholds, each
of which can trip the starter.
Additionally, both of these may
be monitored through Motor
Insights advanced monitoring
capabilities, allowing the
customer to notice in real-time
when and where a condition
is present.
Phase losscurrent
(single-phasing)
One of the three-phase current
is not present.
Multiple causes, loose wire,
improper wiring, grounded
phase, open fuse, etc.
Single-phasing can lead to
unwanted motor vibrations in
addition to the results of imbal-
anced phases as listed above.
Phase rotation
(phase-reversal)
Improper wiring, leading to
phases being connected to the
motor improperly.
A miswired motor. Inadvertent
phase-reversal by the utility.
Phase-reversal can cause
unwanted directional rotation of
a motor. In the event that the
load attached to the motor can
only be driven in one direction,
the result could be signicant
mechanical failure and/or injury
to an operator.
Congurable phase protection,
allowing the user to dene the
phase sequencing intended for
that application. If no phase
sequence is required, the user
has the ability to disable this
feature.
Frequency variance When line frequency
is inconsistent.
Malfunctioning alternator speed
regulator, or poor line quality
caused by an overload of a
supply powered by individual
sources.
Variations in frequency can
cause increases in losses,
decreasing the efciency of
the motor. In addition, this can
result in interference with
synchronous devices.
Advanced monitoring
capabilities allow the user to
monitor frequency in real-time.
4.2-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
061
Table 4.2-3. Advanced Overload Education (Continued)
Description Denition Source Result C441 Motor Insight
Protection
Load Protection
Undercurrent or
low power
Average rms current provided
to the motor falls below normal
operating conditions.
Undercurrent is usually
associated with a portion of
the users load disappearing.
Examples of this would be a
broken belt, a dry-pump (low
suction head) or a dead-headed
centrifugal pump.
If undercurrent goes
undetected, a mechanical
failure can and has occurred.
In the case of a pump, running
a pump dry or running a pump
in a dead-headed condition
can cause excessive heating,
damaging expensive seals
and breaking down desired
uid properties.
Motor Insight has two protec-
tion settings to detect this:
undercurrent and low power.
Low power is a more consistent
way of ensuring detection as
power is linear with motor load,
where as current is not. An
unloaded motor may draw 50%
of its rated current, but the
power draw will be less than
10% of rated power due to a low
power factor.
High power The motor load is drawing more
power than it should at normal
This is typical of batch process-
ing applications where several
ingredients ow into a mixer.
When a substances consistency
changes and viscosity increases
from what is expected, the
motor may use more power to
blend the mixture. Out-of-toler-
ance conditions can be detected
using the High Power and Low
Power settings.
If a high-power fault goes
undetected, the result may
be a batch of material that
does not meet specication.
Monitors the three-phase real
power. If the real power value
is estimated above the set
threshold for the set length
of time, a fault is detected and
the overload will trip the starter.
Additionally, power can be
monitored in real-time.
Line Protection
Overvoltage When the line voltage to the
motor exceeds the specied
rating.
Poor line quality. An overvoltage condition leads
to a lower than rated current
draw and a poor power factor.
A trip limit of 110% of rated
voltage is recommended.
Overvoltage can also lead to
exceeding insulation ratings.
Monitors the maximum rms
value of the three-phase
voltages. If the rms value rises
above the set threshold for
the set length of time, a fault
is detected and the overload
can trip the starter or send
and display an alarm of the
condition. All line-related faults
have an alarm-no-trip mode.
Undervoltage When the line voltage to the
motor is below the specied
rating.
Poor line quality. An undervoltage condition
leads to excessive current draw.
This increases the heating of
the motor windings and can
shorten insulation life. A trip
limit set to 90% of rated voltage
is recommended.
Monitors the minimum rms
value of the three-phase
voltages. If the rms value
drops below the set threshold
for the set length of time, a fault
is detected and the overload
can trip the starter or send
and display an alarm of the
condition. All line-related faults
have an alarm-no-trip mode.
Power-up delay Allows for starting motors and
loads in a deliberate fashion.
When there is a power failure,
or power cycle, multiple loads
come online simultaneously.
Multiple loads starting
simultaneously can cause
sags affecting the operation
of devices that may prevent
successful startup.
If power is lost to a motor
driving a pump, it may be
necessary to delay a restart to
allow the pump to come to a
complete stop to prevent start-
ing a motor during backspin.
Congurable to delay closing
the fault relay on power-up.
For each Motor Insight control-
ling a motor, a different setting
can be programmed, helping to
maintain the integrity of your
line power.
4.2-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
062
Accessories
The C441 Motor Insight Modbus
Communication Module is a side-
mounted device providing Modbus
communication capability to the
C441 Motor Insight overload relay.
The Modbus Communication Module
with I/O provides communication,
monitoring and control for the
Features and Benets
The Modbus communication
up to 115K
The Modbus address and baud
rate conguration can be easily
changed using the Motor Insight
user interface (C441M only)
Modbus address and baud rate
are set via convenient DIP switches
(C441N and C441P); LEDs are
provided to display Modbus trafc
Conguration with common
Modbus conguration tools
Terminals
wiring installed
4IN/2OUT
24 Vdc I/O and
120 Vac I/O
electrical noise
ON or OFF
Table 4.2-4. Modbus Communication Module
DeviceNet Communication Modules
The DeviceNet Communication
Module provides monitoring and
control for the Motor Insight overload
relay from a single DeviceNet node.
These modules also offer convenient
I/O in two voltage options, 24 Vdc and
120 Vac.
Features and Benets
Communication to DeviceNet uses
only one DeviceNet MAC ID
Conguration
DeviceNet MAC ID and Baud
rate are set via convenient DIP
switches with an option to set
from the network
Advanced conguration available
using common DeviceNet tools
Terminals
wiring installed
4IN/2OUT
24 Vdc I/O and
120 Vac I/O
electrical noise
ON or OFF
Combined status LED
Table 4.2-5. DeviceNet Modules
Description I/O Catalog
Number
Modbus Module
Modbus Communication Module None C441M
Modbus with I/O Module
Modbus Communication Module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441N
Modbus Communication Module 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc C441P
Number
DeviceNet Module
DeviceNet Communication Module 120 Vac C441K
DeviceNet Communication Module 24 Vdc C441L
4.2-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
063
PROFIBUS Communication Module
The C441 Motor Insight PROFIBUS
Communication Module is a side-
mounted device providing PROFIBUS
communication capability to the
The PROFIBUS Communication
Module with I/O provides communica-
tion, monitoring and control for the
Features and Benets
The PROFIBUS communication
up to 12 Mb
PROFIBUS address is set via
convenient DIP switches (C441Q
and C441S); LEDs are provided to
display PROFIBUS status
Intuitive conguration with common
PROFIBUS conguration tools
Terminals
wiring installed
4IN/2OUT
24 Vdc I/O and
120 Vac I/O
electrical noise
ON or OFF
Table 4.2-6. PROFIBUS Communication Module
Number
PROFIBUS with I/O
Module
PROFIBUS Communication Module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441S
PROFIBUS Communication Module 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc C441Q
4.2-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
064
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 4.2-1. C441 Motor Insight Conversion Plate
Figure 4.2-2. Applicable for C441CTKIT150, C441CTKIT300
and C441CTKIT600
0.30
(7.6)
3.30
(83.8)
0.20
(5.1)
3.10
(78.7)
3.60
(91.4)
2.70
(68.6)
0.40
(10.2)
4.00
(101.6)
2.30
(58.4)
0.20
(5.1)
0.20
(5.1)
3.90
(99.1)
3.00
(76.2)
1.67
(42.4)
2.23
(56.6)
1.09
(27.7)
(4) Open Slots
0.22 x 0.34 (5.6 x 8.6)
3.65
(92.7)
0.44
(11.2)
1.88
(47.8)
0.31
(7.9)
Label
X1
H1 1.56 Dia.
Quantity
Three per Assembly
(2) Holes
0.20 Dia.
2.25
(57.8)
3.53
(89.7)
2.75
(69.9)
4.2-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
General DescriptionMP-3000
065
MP-3000
Motor Protection Relay
MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay
General Description
Eatons MP-3000 motor protection
relay is a multi-functional micropro-
cessor-based protective relay for the
protection of any size motor at all
voltage levels. It is most commonly
applied on medium voltage starters
and on critical or larger motors. The
MP-3000 relay is a current only device
that provides complete and reliable
motor protection, monitoring and
starting control functions.
The MP-3000 motor protection relay
is available in either a xed mount,
semi-ush case or in a semi-ush quick-
release drawout case. Both housings
are compact and t a standard IQ cutout.
The optional quick-release drawout
case features two-stage contact
disconnection and self-shorting CT
circuit terminals. A spare self-shorting
terminal pair is available for use as
relay removal alarm or for continuous
motor operation (non-failsafe mode)
on relay removal. The optional
communication module is externally
mounted on the xed mount case
and internally mounted in the
drawout case.
has three phase and one ground current
inputs. Both a 5A and 1A version are
available. The ground protection and
metering functions can be used with
either a zero sequence ground CT or
from the residual connection of the
phase CTs. The zero sequence ground
CT provides greater ground fault
sensitivity than the residual connection.
The relay is programmable for 60 Hz
or 50 Hz operation.
has two discrete inputs, four Form C
(1NO and 1NC) contacts and one
4 to 20 mA analog output. The relay
provides maximum user exibility to
congure the I/O. All inputs and out-
puts (except for the trip output) are
user-programmable. In addition, the
relay has 10 LEDs for the indication of
protection on, program mode, monitor
mode, view setting mode, history
mode, log mode, trip, alarm, auxiliary
1 and auxiliary 2 operation. A test page
in the program mode provides display
indication of the discrete input states
and testing of the output relays, target
LEDs and analog circuit.
A user-friendly operator interface and
display provides quick access to the
settings, monitored values, motor
history and operational logs. Large
LED alphanumeric character display
provides easy viewing from any angle
in any light. Simple keypad operation
provides quick and easy navigation
through all settings and stored data.
The program mode and emergency
override buttons are access restricted
via a latched cover which can be sealed
if required. An integrated help function
provides an online description display of
functions, abbreviations and operations.
Optimum Motor Protection
has been designed for maximum
motor operation and protection. It
permits running the motor as close
to its design limits while protecting
it against excessive heating and
damaging overload conditions. The
MP-3000 eld proven protection
algorithms were developed based
on motor designs and operating
parameters for optimum operation
and protection while minimizing
nuisance tripping.
uses a protection algorithm and
measurement technique based
on proven positive and negative
(unbalance) sequence current
sampling and true rms calculations.
Features
General
Self diagnostics
User-friendly interface
Large LED display
Built-in help program
Built-in test mode
LED mode and target indication
Remote communications
Programmable discrete inputs
Programmable outputs
Protection
I
2
t overload protection (49/51)
Locked rotor (49S/51)
Ultimate trip current (51)
Negative sequence phase
unbalance (46)
Instantaneous overcurrent (50)
Ground fault protection (50G)
RTD trip and alarm with URTD
module (49/38)
Underload trip (37)
Starts per time (66)
Jam or stall (51R)
Auto or manual reset (86)
Failsafe or non-failsafe trip modes
Alarming
Ground fault
I
2
t overload
Jam/stall
Underload
Phase unbalance
Control
Transition for reduced voltage starts:
Transition on current level
Transition on time
Transition on current level or time
and time
Incomplete sequence monitoring
Permits number of cold starts
Limits number of starts per time
Time between starts
Anti-backspin time delay
Mechanical load shedding
Zero speed switch for long
acceleration motors
Motor stop input for synchronous
motor applications
Remote trip input
Differential trip input
Emergency override
4.2-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
066
Motor currents:
Average current (I ave)
Individual phase and ground
current in primary amperes
% of full load
% phase unbalance
RTD temperatures:
Individual winding
Motor bearing
Load
Auxiliary temperatures
Motor conditions:
% of I
2
t thermal bucket
Time before start
Remaining starts allowed
Oldest start time
History
Motor history:
Operational counter
Run time
Highest starting and running
currents
Highest % phase unbalance
Maximum winding, bearing and
load RTD temperatures
Number of emergency overrides
Trip history (number of trips):
Ground faults
Overloads
Instantaneous overcurrent
JAM
Underload
Phase unbalance
RTDs
Phase reversal
Incomplete sequence
Remote, differential
Communication
Starts exceeded
Time between starts
Transition
Alarms history (number of alarms):
Ground faults
Overloads
JAM
Underload
Phase unbalance
RTDs
Starts exceeded
Total history (record which cannot
be reset):
Total trips
Run time
Operations count
Logging
Log book (chronological list of
last 100 events with date and
time stamp)
Event log (detailed information of
last 20 trips and alarms with date
and time stamp)
Start log (data on most recent four
starts with date and time stamp)
User Interface
has a user-friendly interface that
makes it easy to retrieve important
information or make setting changes.
LEDs provide visual indication of
display and keypad mode. The push-
buttons are clearly labeled and quickly
access the desired information.
provides protection against motor
overloads, short circuits and abnormal
I
2
t Overload
Motor overloads are typically limited
by the rotor thermal capabilities but
the measuring quantities are from the
stator. This requires accurate measure-
ments and good motor thermal
models to provide reliable protection.
uses a eld proven measurement and
motor thermal protection model. The
relay samples the current waveforms
36 times per cycle providing accurate
measurements of the positive and
negative sequence currents. The
negative sequence component of
current causes greater heating effect
on the rotor and has a greater impact
on the thermal model in the relay.
This same algorithm has been used
to protect thousands of motors
since 1984.
overload protection is easy to set and
apply. Simply input motor nameplate
information and CT ratios and the
characteristic is automatically set.
When using the MP-3000 motor
protection relay, it is recommended
that the ratio of CT primary rating
to the motor full load amperes
(CT Pri/Motor FLA) is selected to
fall between 0.25 and 1.5. The
thermal model adapts its tripping
characteristics if RTDs are connected.
Instantaneous Overcurrent
provides an instantaneous phase
overcurrent function to trip the motor
for high fault current levels. This
function can be disabled and has an
adjustable time delay on starting to
avoid nuisance tripping on inrush.
Phase Unbalance Protection
Motor supply circuits are often fed
through fuses and can be run with a
single-phase fuse blown. The motor
may still see three-phase voltage but
will only have current on two phases,
referred to as single-phasing the
motor. The MP-3000 motor protection
relay measures the current unbalance
and can be used to alarm or trip the
motor before damage occurs. Pickup,
start and run timers and a separate
alarm setting are provided.
A separate circuit measures
ground fault current. A ground CT
is recommended for more sensitive
protection against winding fault
ground. The relay ground circuit
can be connected residually from
the three-phase CTs. The ground fault
protection has pickup and time delay
set points or can be disabled.
4.2-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
067
JAM Protection
The user-selectable JAM function
protects motors that are running
against a sudden mechanical jam
or stall condition. The common
application is on motors used on
crushers, chippers or conveyors. It
detects an increase of motor current
to a level above full load. Pickup, start
and run timers and a separate alarm
setting are provided.
Figure 4.2-3. MP-3000
Motor Protection Relay Functions
Underload Protection
The user-selectable underload
function is used to detect the loss
of load on the motor. Coupling failure
is a common cause for loss of load.
Pickup, start and run timers and a
separate alarm setting are provided.
Reduced Voltage Starting
Eatons MP-3000 motor protection relay
provides a transition and incomplete
sequence function for reduced voltage
starting. The user can select to transition
based on the current level or on time.
Anti-Backspin
For certain applications, for example,
pumping uid up a pipe, the motor
may be driven backward for a period
of time after it stops. The MP-3000
relay provides an anti-backspin timer
to prevent starting the motor while it
is spinning in the reverse direction.
The timer begins counting from the
moment a stop is declared by the relay.
Start Control Timers
Motors typically have limits to the
number of cold starts, hot starts, starts
per time period and time between
starts that are permitted without
damage. The MP-3000 motor protec-
tion relay incorporates these timers
to prevent starting the motor beyond
its capabilities.
Load Shedding
provides a mechanical load shedding
feature that can be used to control an
upstream process. The load shedding
function closes a contact on an over-
load condition to control an upstream
process from adding more load until
the overload condition is gone.
Emergency Override
has a user-programmable feature that
will let the operator reset the start
control timers and thermal overload
bucket. This function is intended for
use in emergency conditions only and
may result in motor damage or failure.
Long Acceleration Motors
Large motors with high inertia loads
may experience starting currents that
exceed the locked rotor current and
time. The MP-3000 motor protection
relay has logic and provisions for a
zero speed switch input to differentiate
between a stall and start condition. If
the motor is spinning then the relay
will not trip on the normal locked rotor
time allowing the motor to start.
Remote/Differential Trip
One of the binary inputs can be
programmed to accept a contact input
from a separate differential relay, such
as the MD-3000 or other device to trip
the motor. This provides local and
remote target information and uses
the trip contacts of the MP-3000 motor
protection relay. It will also record and
log the motor information at the time
of the trip.
Motor Starting Prole Time/Current Chart
Motor Starting Prole
The MP-3000 relay records the average
current of the motor for the last two
starts. This information is available
over the communications port. The
motor current can then be plotted
and compared to the motor overload
protection curve. Available in
PowerPort or the PowerNet Event
Viewer Client.
Motor
MP-3000
49/51 Overload I
2
T
49S/51 Locked Rotor
51R Jam/Stall
37 Loss of Load/
Underload
46 Phase Loss/
Unbalance
50 Phase Inst. OC
50G Ground Inst. OC
66 Starts per time
period
URT
11 RTDs
Fiber Optic Link
4.2-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
Product DescriptionMP-3000
068
Product Selection
Table 4.2-7. MP-3000
Figure 4.2-4. MP-3000 Wiring
Description Catalog
Number
MP-3000 drawout, 5A with RS-232
MP-3000 drawout, INCOM, 5A with RS-232
MP-3000 drawout, Modbus, 5A with RS-232
MP3011
MP3012
MP3013
MP-3000 drawout, DeviceNet, 5A with RS-232
MP3014
MP3111
MP3112
MP-3000 xed case, 5A with RS-232
MP3113
MP3114
MP3010
MP-3000 xed case, INCOM, 5A with RS-232
MP-3000 xed case, Modbus, 5A with RS-232
MP-3000 xed case, DeviceNet, 5A with RS-232
MP3010-INCOM
MP3010MODBUS
MP3010DEVICEN
MP3110
MP3110-INCOM
MP3110MODBUS
MP-3000 xed case, INCOM, 5A with RS-232, URTD
MP-3000 xed case, Modbus, 5A with RS-232, URTD
MP3110DEVICEN
MP3010VPI
MP3010VPM
MP-3000 xed case, DeviceNet, 5A with RS-232, URTD
MP3010VPD
MP3110VPI
MP3110VPM
MP3110VPD
2
A
H
2
B
H
1
C
H
2
C
G
1
G
2
MP-3000
Back View
with Jumper
Connection
CPT
Primary
Fuses
Secondary
Fuses
5
Ground
Ground
Non-Current
Carrying Ground
M
M
M
Main
Fuse
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
A
B
C
Gnd.
T1
T2
T3
X1 X2
CTs TT
GFCT
To Motor
or Load Device
Under Control
ac Supply
To MP-3000
4 7
11 12
STAR TT T
STOP
M
Alarm
18 19
Alarm Contacts
Auxiliary Trip Contacts
15 16
Aux. Trip
Trip Contacts
Additional
Control
M
4.2-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
Technical DataMP-3000
069
Figure 4.2-5. MP-3000 Drawout Typical CT Circuits and Motor Control Wiring
30 29
15 16
58
60
56
54
52
50
46
48
44
42
CPT
Primary
Fuses
Secondary
Fuses
60
ac Supply
to MP-3000
17 19
Additional
Control
56 54
M
START
STOP
M
Non-current
Carrying Ground
Alarm
51 53
Alarm Contacts
Auxiliary Trip Contacts
48 46
Aux. Trip
M
M
M
Main
Fuse
L3
L1
L2
L3
C
Trip Contacts
T1
T2
T3
X1 X2
CTs
GFCT
To Motor
or
Load Device
Under Control
30 29
Contacts
Ground
A
B
C
21 23 25 22 24 26 27 28
Back View of Drawout
Residual Ground Connection
Residual Ground Connection
See Below for
6
28
Ground
nd
Ground
4.2-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
070
Table 4.2-8. MP-3000 Specications
Control Power
Nominal rating: 120 Vac or 240 Vac
(+10%, 25%)
Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz
Power use: 20 VA maximum
URTD: 6 VA maximum
IPONI: 1 VA maximum
Operating
range: 120 Vac: 90132 Vac
240 Vac: 180264 Vac
Ride through
time: 30 cycles at
nominal Vac
Current Inputs
Nominal (I
n
): 1A or 5A
CT rating: 2 x I
n
continuous
40 x I
n
for 1 second
Phase burden: VA at I
n
Ground burden: VA at I
n
Saturation: x I
n
Metering Accuracy
Phase current: 1% of I
n
(5%100%)
Ground current: 1.5% of I
n
(0%55%)
Discrete Inputs
Number of
inputs: 2 Programmable
Rating: 1.2 VA at 120 Vac
Maximum OFF = 36 Vac
Minimum ON = 86 Vac
Output Contacts
Number of
outputs: 4 Form C, Programmable
Momentary: Make 30A AC/DC
for 0.25 second
(Resistive) Break 0.25A at 250 Vdc
5A at 30 Vdc
Analog Output
Rating: 4 to 20 mA
Programmable
Maximum load: 1K ohm
Accuracy: 1%
Motor Overload Protection (I
2
t)
Full load
amperes: 10 to 3000A
Locked rotor
current: 300% to 1200% FLA
Locked rotor
time: 1 to 120 seconds
Ultimate trip 85% to
current: 150% FLA
Phase CT ratio: 10 to 4000: I
n
Ground CT ratio: 10 to 4000: I
n
Timing accuracy: 2.5% or 30 ms
For I > 1.1x U.T.C.
Trip Setting Range
Ground fault (GF): Off, 2% to 55% CT ratio
GF Start and run
time delay: 2 to 60 cycles
Timer accuracy: 20 ms
Instantaneous O.C.: Off, 300% to 1600% FLA
IOC start time
delay: 0 to 60 cycles
JAM trip: Off, 100% to 1200% FLA
Underload trip: Off, 1% to 90% FLA
Phase unbalance
trip: Off, 4% to 40%
I
neg
/I
pos
0 to 1200

seconds
JAM, Underload and Phase Unbalance
Time Delay
Start delay timers: 0 to 120 seconds
Run delay timers: 0 to 240 seconds
Timer accuracy: 0.5% +100 ms
Alarm Setting Range
Ground fault: Off, 2% to 75%
CT ratio
Overload I
2
t: Off, 60% to 99% I
2
t
JAM: Off, 100% to 1200%
FLA
Underload: Off, 1% to 90% FLA
Phase unbalance: Off, 4% to 40%
I
neg
/I
pos

Run delay timers: 0 to 240 seconds
Logging
Log book: 100 events
Log event: 20 trips and alarms
Log start: Last 4 starts
Start prole: Last start
(communication only)
History records: Motor, trips, alarms and
permanent records
Start Control Functions
Starts per time: Off, 1 to 10 starts
Time for starts
per time: Off, 1 to 240 minutes
Time between
starts: Off, 1 to 240 minutes
Number of
cold starts: 1 to 5 starts
Motor transition
Time for transition: 0 to 1200 seconds
Inc. sequence
timer: Off, 1 to 240 seconds
Long acceleration
Anti-backspin
timer: Off, 1 to 3600 minutes
Clock
Accuracy: 1 minute/month at 25C
Communications
DPONI
Type: 5-wire
Baud rate: 500K, 250K, 125K, Auto
Protocol: DeviceNet
Functions: Read/write set points
Read metered values
Read trip/alarms
Read events/history
View starting prole
IPONI
Type: 2-wire, FSK
Protocol: INCOM
Read metered values
Read trip/alarms
Read events/history
View starting prole
MPONI
Type: 5-wire, 485
Read metered values
Read trip/alarms
Read events/history
View starting prole
Operating: Temperature: 20C to +60C
Storage: Temperature: 45C to +85C
Humidity: 0% to 95% (noncondensing)
Height: 10.25 (260.4)
Width: 6.72 (170.7)
Depth: 3.70 (94.0)
Weight: 7 lbs (3 kg)
UL Recognized
File Number E154862
UL 1053
ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2
CSA
4.2-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
071
Relay with Voltage Inputs
MP-4000 Motor Protection Relay
General Description
Eatons MP-4000 motor protection
relay is a multi-functional micro-
processor-based protective relay for
the protection of any size motor at all
applied on medium voltage starters
and on critical or larger motors. The
MP-4000 relay provides complete and
reliable motor protection, monitoring
and starting control functions.
is available in either a xed mount,
semi-ush case or in a semi-ush
quick-release drawout case.
The optional quick-release drawout
case features two-stage contact
disconnection and self-shorting CT
circuit terminals. A spare self-shorting
terminal pair is available for use as
relay removal alarm or for continuous
motor operation (non-failsafe mode)
on relay removal. The optional
communication module is externally
mounted on the xed mount case
and internally mounted in the
drawout case.
has three phase and one ground
current inputs. The MP-4000 also has
three voltage inputs. Both a 5A and
1A version are available. The ground
protection and metering functions can
be used with either a zero sequence
ground CT or from the residual
connection of the phase CTs. The
zero sequence ground CT provides
greater ground fault sensitivity than
the residual connection. The relay
is programmable for 60 Hz or
50 Hz operation.
has two discrete inputs, four Form C
(1NO and 1NC) contacts and one 4 to
20 mA analog output. The relay
provides maximum user exibility
to congure the I/O. All inputs and
outputs (except for the trip output) are
user-programmable. In addition, the
relay has 10 LEDs for the indication of
protection on, program mode, monitor
mode, view setting mode, history
mode, log mode, trip, alarm, auxiliary
1 and auxiliary 2 operation. A test page
in the program mode provides display
indication of the discrete input states
and testing of the output relays,
target LEDs and analog circuit.
A user-friendly operator interface and
display provides quick access to the
settings, monitored values, motor
history and operational logs. Large
LED alphanumeric character display
provides easy viewing from any angle
in any light. Simple keypad operation
provides quick and easy navigation
through all settings and stored data.
The program mode and emergency
override buttons are access restricted
via a latched cover which can be
sealed if required. An integrated
help function provides an online
description display of functions,
abbreviations and operations.
Optimum Motor Protection
has been designed for maximum
permits running the motor as close
to its design limits while protecting
it against excessive heating and
MP-4000 eld proven protection
nuisance tripping.
The MP-4000 motor protection
relay uses a protection algorithm
and measurement technique based
(unbalance) sequence current
sampling and true rms calculations.
Features
General
Self diagnostics
User-friendly interface
Large LED display
Built-in help program
Built-in test mode
LED mode and target indication
Remote communications
Programmable discrete inputs
Programmable outputs
Protection
I
2
t overload protection (49/51)
Locked rotor (49S/51)
Ultimate trip current (51)
Undervoltage (27)
Overvoltage (59)
Under power (32)
Negative sequence phase
unbalance (46)
Negative sequence voltage
unbalance (47)
Instantaneous overcurrent (50)
Ground fault protection (50G)
RTD trip and alarm with URTD
module (49/38)
Underload trip (37)
Power factor (55)
Starts per time (66)
Jam or stall (51R)
Auto or manual reset (86)
Failsafe or non-failsafe trip modes
Alarming
Ground fault
I
2
t overload
Jam/stall
Underload
Phase unbalance
Voltage unbalance
4.2-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
072
Control
Transition for reduced voltage starts:
Transition on time
Transition on current level or time
and time
Incomplete sequence monitoring
Permits number of cold starts
Limits number of starts per time
Time between starts
acceleration motors
Motor stop input for synchronous
motor applications
Remote trip input
Emergency override
Metering
RTD temperatures:
Individual winding
Motor bearing
Load
Auxiliary temperatures
Motor conditions:
% of I
2
t thermal bucket
Time before start
Remaining starts allowed
Oldest start time
History
Motor history:
Operational counter
Run time
currents
Highest % current unbalance
Highest % voltage unbalance
voltages
Maximum winding, bearing and
load RTD temperatures
Number of emergency overrides
Trip history (number of trips):
Ground faults
Overloads
Instantaneous overcurrent
JAM
Underload
Phase unbalance
Voltage unbalance
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
Under power
Power factor
RTDs
Phase reversal
Incomplete sequence
Remote, differential
Communication
Starts exceeded
Time between starts
Transition
Alarms history (number of alarms):
Ground faults
Overloads
JAM
Underload
Current unbalance
Voltage unbalance
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
Under power
Power factor
RTDs
Starts exceeded
Total history (record which cannot
be reset):
Total trips
Run time
Operations count
Logging
Log book (chronological list of
last 100 events with date and
time stamp)
Event log (detailed information of
last 20 trips and alarms with date
and time stamp)
Start log (data on most recent four
starts with date and time stamp)
4.2-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
Product SelectionMP-4000
073
User Interface
has a user-friendly interface that
makes it easy to retrieve important
information or make setting changes.
LEDs provide visual indication of
display and keypad mode. The push-
buttons are clearly labeled and quickly
access the desired information.
provides protection against motor
overloads, short circuits and abnormal
I
2
t Overload
Motor overloads are typically limited
by the rotor thermal capabilities
but the measuring quantities are
from the stator. This requires
accurate measurements and good
motor thermal models to provide
reliable protection.
uses a eld-proven measurement and
motor thermal protection model. The
relay samples the current waveforms
36 times per cycle providing accurate
measurements of the positive and
negative sequence currents. The
negative sequence component of
current causes greater heating effect
This same algorithm has been used
to protect thousands of motors
since 1984.
overload protection is easy to set and
apply. Simply input motor nameplate
information and CT ratios and the
characteristic is automatically set.
When using the MP-4000 motor
protection relay, it is recommended
(CT Pri/Motor FLA) is selected to fall
between 0.25 and 1.5. The thermal
model adapts its tripping characteris-
tics if RTDs are connected.
provides an instantaneous phase over-
current function to trip the motor for
high fault current levels. This function
can be disabled and has an adjustable
time delay on starting to avoid
nuisance tripping on inrush.
Product Selection
Table 4.2-9. MP-4000 Ordering Information
Description Catalog
Number
MP4011
MP4012
MP4013
MP4014
MP4111
MP4112
MP4113
MP4114
MP4010
MP4010INCOM
MP4010MODBUS
MP4010DEVICEN
MP4110
MP4110INCOM
MP4110MODBUS
MP4110DEVICEN
MP4010VPI
MP4010VPM
MP4010VPD
MP4110VPI
MP4110VPM
MP4110VPD
4.2-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
074
Current Unbalance Protection
single-phase fuse blown. The motor
may still see three-phase voltage but
will only have current on two phases,
referred to as single-phasing the
motor. The MP-4000 motor protection
relay measures the current unbalance
and can be used to alarm or trip the
motor before damage occurs. Pickup,
start and run timers and a separate
alarm setting are provided.
Voltage Unbalance Protection
The MP-4000 will calculate negative
sequence voltage from three-phase
voltages. The presence of negative
sequence voltage identies either
a phase unbalance or reverse
phase rotation condition. The
MP-4000 provides both alarm and
trip functionality.
A separate circuit measures ground
fault current. A ground CT is recom-
mended for more sensitive protection
against winding fault ground. The
relay ground circuit can be connected
residually from the three-phase CTs.
The ground fault protection has
pickup and time delay set points or
can be disabled.
The MP-4000 provides over/under
protection on the Main VT inputs.
Each element has an independent
threshold and time delay.
Voltage Protection
The MP-4000 voltage protection can
be used to generate a trip or alarm if
the voltage exceeds (overvoltage 59)
a specied threshold for a specic
time delay or drops below (under-
voltage 27) a specied threshold for a
specied time delay. Voltage elements
can act on one, two or three phases.
Power Factor
The power factor function in the
MP-4000 can be used for many
applications. For a synchronous motor,
it can be used to indicate eld loss.
The power factor protection can
generate a trip or alarm when
the power factor falls between
specied thresholds.
JAM Protection
The user-selectable JAM function
against a sudden mechanical jam or
stall condition. The common applica-
tion is on motors used on crushers,
chippers or conveyors. It detects an
increase of motor current to a level
above full load. Pickup, start and run
timers and a separate alarm setting
are provided.
Pickup, start and run timers and a
separate alarm setting are provided.
Eatons MP-4000 motor protection relay
starting. The user can select to transition
based on the current level or on time.
Anti-Backspin
For certain applications, for example,
pumping uid up a pipe, the motor
may be driven backward for a period
of time after it stops. The MP-4000
relay provides an anti-backspin timer
to prevent starting the motor while it
is spinning in the reverse direction.
The timer begins counting from the
moment a stop is declared by the relay.
number of cold starts, hot starts, starts
per time period and time between
starts that are permitted without
damage. The MP-4000 motor protec-
tion relay incorporates these timers
to prevent starting the motor beyond
its capabilities.
Load Shedding
upstream process. The load shedding
Emergency Override
control timers and thermal overload
use in emergency conditions only and
may result in motor damage or failure.
Large motors with high inertia loads
may experience starting currents that
time. The MP-4000 motor protection
the motor is spinning then the relay
One of the binary inputs can be pro-
grammed to accept a contact input
from a separate differential relay, such
as the MD-3000, or other device to trip
the motor. This provides local and
remote target information and uses
the trip contacts of the MP-4000 motor
protection relay. It will also record
and log the motor information at the
time of the trip.
Motor Starting Prole Time/Current Chart
Motor Starting Prole
The MP-4000 relay records the average
current of the motor for the last two
starts. This information is available
over the communications port. The
motor current can then be plotted
and compared to the motor overload
protection curve. Available in
PowerPort or the PowerNet Event
Viewer Client.
4.2-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
075
Table 4.2-10. MP-4000 Specications
Control Power
Nominal rating: 120 Vac or 240 Vac
(+10%, 25%)
Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz
Power use: 20 VA maximum
URTD: 6 VA maximum
IPONI: 1 VA maximum
Operating
range: 120 Vac: 90132 Vac
240 Vac:180264 Vac
Ride through
time: 30 cycles at
nominal Vac
Current Inputs
Nominal (I
n
): 1A or 5A
CT rating: 2 x I
n
continuous
40 x I
n
for 1 second
Phase burden: VA at I
n
Ground burden: VA at I
n
Saturation: x I
n
Voltage Inputs
Nominal rating: 120 Vac
Operating range: 69 to 150 Vac
Burden: 2 VA
Metering Accuracy
Phase current: 1% of I
n
(5%100%)
Ground current: 1.5% of I
n
(0%55%)
Discrete Inputs
Number of
Inputs: 2 Programmable
Rating: 1.2 VA at 120 Vac
Maximum OFF = 36 Vac
Minimum ON = 86 Vac
Output Contacts
Number of
outputs: 4 Form C,
Programmable
Momentary: Make 30A AC/DC
for 0.25 second
(Resistive) Break 0.25A at 250 Vdc
5A at 30 Vdc
Analog Output
Rating: 4 to 20 mA
Programmable
Maximum load: 1K ohm
Accuracy: 1%
Motor Overload Protection (I
2
t)
Full load
amperes: 10 to 3000A
Locked rotor
Locked rotor
time: 1 to 120 seconds
Ultimate trip 85% to
current: 150% FLA
Phase CT ratio: 10 to 4000: I
n
Ground CT ratio: 10 to 4000: I
n
Timing accuracy: 2.5% or 30 ms
For I > 1.1x U.T.C.
Trip Setting Range
Ground fault (GF): Off, 2% to 55% CT Ratio
GF Start and run
time delay: 2 to 60 cycles
Instantaneous O.C.: Off, 300% to 1600% FLA
IOC Start time
delay: 0 to 60 cycles
JAM trip: Off, 100% to 1200% FLA
Underload trip: Off, 1% to 90% FLA
Current unbalance
trip: Off, 4% to 40%
I
neg
/I
pos
0 to1200

seconds
Voltage unbalance (47)
Threshold: OFF, 1 to 100V
% V2/V1: 4% to 40%
Time delay: 0 to 1200 seconds
Pickup range: OFF, 10 to 150V
Pickup range: Off, 15 to 60 Hz
Power protection (32)
Threshold: OFF, 0.06 to 0.90 *FLA *VT
Power factor (55)
Threshold: OFF, 0.05 to 0.99
JAM, Underload and Phase Unbalance
Time Delay
Start Delay timers: 0 to 120 seconds
Run Delay timers: 0 to 240 seconds
Timer accuracy: 0.5% + 100 ms
Alarm Setting Range
Ground fault: Off, 2% to 75%
CT Ratio
Overload I
2
t: Off, 60% to 99% I
2
t
JAM: Off, 100% to 1200%
FLA
Underload: Off, 1% to 90% FLA
Phase unbalance: Off, 4% to 40%
I
neg
/I
pos

Run Delay timers: 0 to 240 seconds
Logging
Log book: 100 events
Log event: 20 trips and alarms
Log start: Last 4 starts
Start prole: Last start
(communication only)
History records: Motor, trips, alarms and
permanent records
Start Control Functions
Starts per time: Off, 1 to 10 starts
Time for starts
per time: Off, 1 to 240 minutes
Time between starts: Off, 1 to 240 minutes
No. of cold starts: 1 to 5 starts
Motor transition
Time for transition: 0 to 1200 seconds
Inc. sequence timer: Off, 1 to 240 seconds
Long acceleration
Anti-Backspin Timer: Off, 1 to 3600 minutes
Clock
Accuracy: 1 minute/month at 25C
Communications
DPONI
Type: 5-wire
Baud rate: 500K, 250K, 125K, Auto
Protocol: DeviceNet
Read metered values
Read trip/alarms
Read events/history
View starting prole
IPONI
Type: 2-wire, FSK
Protocol: INCOM
Read metered values
Read trip/alarms
Read events/history
View starting prole
MPONI
Type: 5-wire, 485
Read metered values
Read trip/alarms
Read events/history
View starting prole
Operating: Temperature: 20C to +60C
Storage: Temperature: 45C to +85C
Humidity: 0% to 95% (noncondensing)
Height: 10.25 (260.4)
Width: 6.72 (170.7)
Depth: 3.70 (94.0)
Weight: 7 lbs (3 kg)
UL Recognized
File Number E154862
UL 1053
ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2
CSA
4.2-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
General DescriptionEMR-3000
076
EMR-3000
EMR-3000
General Description
Eatons EMR-3000 motor protection
relay is a multifunctional micro-
applied on medium voltage or larger
motors. The MP-3000 relay is a current
only device that provides complete
and reliable motor protection, moni-
toring and starting control functions.
The EMR-3000 motor protection relay
has removable terminal blocks, and it
has Modbus-RTU communications as
standard; and an optional Ethernet
port for Modbus-TCP communications.
has three-phase and one ground
current inputs. It can be used with
either 5A or 1A CTs. The ground
protection can be used with either
a zero sequence ground CT or from
the residual connection of the phase
CTs. The zero sequence ground
CT provides greater ground fault
sensitivity than the residual connec-
tion. The unit is user programmable
for 60 Hz or 50 Hz operation.
digital input. Flash memory is used
for the programming and all settings
are stored in nonvolatile memory.
relay status.
Ethernet port and protocols are
available.
has mass memory for data storage
sequence of event records, 20 detailed
load proles, the ve latest start
proles, motor trending, breaker wear
information and oscillography data.
has four discrete inputs and one ber
optic input, one Form C and two NO
programmable contacts, and one
Form C healthy contact. It also has
an optional 420 mA analog output
or zone interlocking card. The relay
to congure the I/O. All inputs and
outputs (except the healthy output)
are user-programmable. The unit also
counts with a test mode to force out-
puts and simulate currents, to facilitate
the commissioning of the unit. It can
be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc
or 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
Microprocessor-based protection
with monitoring and control for
medium voltage motors
Integral test function reduces
maintenance time and expense
Zone selective interlocking
improves coordination and tripping
time, and saves money compared to
a traditional bus differential scheme
Reduce troubleshooting time and
maintenance costsTrip and event
recording in non-volatile memory
provides detailed information for
analysis and system restoration.
6000 cycles of waveform capture
aids in post fault analysis (viewable
using PowerPort-E software)
Minimum replacement time
Removable terminal blocks ideal
in industrial environments
Front RS-232 port and PowerPort-E
software provides local computer
access and user-friendly windows
based interface for relay settings,
conguration and data retrieval
Breaker open/close from relay face-
plate or remotely via communications
Fast and easy troubleshooting,
improved maintenance procedures
and increased device security.
Provides detailed traceability for
system conguration changes
Relays self-diagnostics and
reporting improves uptime and
troubleshooting
Breaker trip circuit monitoring
improves the reliability of the
breaker operation
Features
Protection
Thermal protection (49/51)
Locked rotor protection (49S/51)
Two instantaneous elements with
timers (50P[1], 50P[2] and 50P[3])
and 51P[3])
11 standard curves
and 50X[2])
and 50R[2])
and 51X[2])
and 51R[2])
11 standard curves
Jam or Stall protection (50J[1]
and 50J[2])
overcurrent (46[1] and 46[2])
Underload protection (37[1],
37[2], 37[3])
Temperature protection with
optional URTD (49/38)
Stars per hour (66)
Lockout protection (86)
protection (87B)
4.2-23
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
077
Metering
zero sequence
Ampere demand
Phase angles
Frequency
% THD I
Magnitude THD I
Phase angles
Temperature with remote
URTD module
Monitoring
Trip coil monitor
Sequence of events report (up to
300 events)
Motor history
Records the last ve motor start
proles
Motor start trending
CT supervision
Communication
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
IRIG-B
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
Modbus-RTU
Control Functions
Transition for reduced voltage starts
Incomplete sequence delay
Permits numbers of cold starts
Limits numbers of starts per hour
acceleration motors
Motor stop inputs
Remote trip input
Emergency override
Breaker/Contactor open-close/
stop-start
Remote open-close (stop-start)
Programmable I/O
Programmable LEDs
permits running the motor close to
its design limits while protecting it
against excessive heating and
EMR-3000 eld-proven protection
nuisance tripping. The EMR-3000
motor protection relay uses a
protection algorithm and measure-
ment technique based on proven
positive and negative (unbalance)
sequence current sampling and true
rms calculations.
Intel-I-Trip (I
2
t) Overload Protection
The EMR-3000 motor relay features
the exclusive Eaton Intel-I-Trip
intelligent overload protection system.
Intel-I-Trip develops custom overload
curves simply from motor nameplate
data. Intel-I-Trip protects motors from
potentially damaging overload and
abnormal operating conditions.
The Intel-I-Trip intelligent overload
protection feature uses eld-proven
measurement techniques and a
motor thermal protection model.
The EMR-3000 motor relays unique
measurement technique samples the
current waveforms 36 times per cycle,
providing accurate measurements of
the positive and negative sequence
currents. The negative sequence
current causes a greater heating effect
Intel-I-Trip uses these measurements
in its motor model to safely protect the
motor against the heating effects of
these currents.
The motor thermal model is analogous
to a bucket that is being lled and
drained at the same time. The ll rate
is dependent on the motor currents
and the drain is based on motor design
principles. The size of the bucket is
equivalent to the thermal capacity
associated with the mass of the motor.
Intel-I-Trip integrates these rates and
will issue a trip when the thermal
capacity is lled.
Intel-I-Trip features adaptive trip
characteristics that adjust the trip
times based on measured motor
temperature when RTDs are used.
overcurrent function to trip the motor
for high fault current levels and to
save the fuses. This function can be
disabled and has an adjustable time
delay on starting to avoid nuisance
tripping on inrush.
through fuses and can be run with
a single-phase fuse blown, referred
to as single-phasing the motor. The
EMR-3000 motor protection relay
measures the current unbalance and
can be used to alarm or trip the motor
before damage occurs. Pickup, start
and run timers, and a second element
for alarm purposes are provided.
A separate measuring circuit is used
to measure ground current. A ground
CT is recommended for more sensitive
protection against winding insulation
breakdown to ground. The relay
ground circuit can be connected
The ground fault protection has pickup
and time delay set points or can
be disabled.
Jam Protection
The user-selectable Jam function
and run timers and a second element
Pickup, start and run timers, and a
second element for alarm purposes
are provided.
starting. The user can select to
transition based on the current
level and/or on time.
4.2-24
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
078
Antibackspin
The stop function is programmable
from 220%. For certain applications,
such as pumping a uid up a pipe,
the motor may be driven backward for
a period of time after it stops. The
EMR-3000 relay provides an antiback-
spin timer to prevent starting the
motor while it is spinning in the
reverse direction. The timer begins
counting from the moment a stop is
declared by the relay.
number of cold starts, starts per hour
period, or time between starts that
are permitted without damage. The
incorporates these timers to
prevent starting the motor beyond
its capabilities.
Load Shedding
upstream process. The load-shedding
Emergency Override
inhibitor timers and thermal overload
use in emergency conditions only,
and it may result in motor damage
or failure.
Large motors with a high inertia may
experience starting currents that
time. The EMR-3000 motor protection
the motor is spinning, then the relay
will not trip on the normal locked
rotortime allowing the motor to start.
The digital inputs can be programmed
to accept a contact input from a
separate differential relay or other
device to trip the motor. This provides
local and remote target information
and uses the trip contacts of the
EMR-3000 motor protection relay.
It will also record and log the motor
information at the time of the trip.
Breaker Failure or Stuck Contactor
or trip an upstream breaker. The timer
The EMR-3000 motor protection
relay can be applied on either an
A-B-C or A-C-B phase rotation. A
user setting permits correct operation
and indication of the actual system
conguration.
Maintenance Mode
clearing time and lower incident
settings via a password protected soft
key, communication or via a digital
Input while maintenance work is being
performed at an energized panel or
device. The more sensitive settings
provide greater security for mainte-
nance personnel and help to reduce
the possibility of injury.
The EMR-3000 protection relay records
with the relay. An event is classied
as a change of state as detected by
the relay. These include relay pickups,
The events are stored in a FIFO in
Trip Log
The EMR-3000 protection relay will
in a FIFO trip log. Each trip record will
include information on the type
of fault, protection elements that oper-
ated, fault location, and currents and
voltages at the time of the fault.
Waveform Capture
contact closures. The EMR-3000 relay
mum size per record is 600 cycles.
up to eight different triggers; it can
also be generated manually through
the display or via communications.
viewing in all light conditions. Seven
Starting Proles
The EMR-3000 records the average
current versus time for the last ve
starting cycles. This information is
available via the communications
port through PowerPort-E.
Motor Statistics
For each motor start, the EMR-300
stores a motor start report and adds
this data to the motor statistics buffer.
With the motor statistics you can track
motor start data for the past 18 30-day
periods. For each 30-day interval, the
relay records the following information:
The date the interval began
The total number of starts in
the interval
The averages of the following
quantities:
Motor start time
Start % rotor thermal
capacity used
Maximum start current
4.2-25
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
079
The EMR-3000 relay automatically
report setting.
Programmable I/O
provides heavy-duty, trip rated, 2NO
and one Form C contacts. One isolated
inputs can be used for monitoring
the trip circuit. One Form C contact
is dedicated to the relay failure alarm
function and is operated in a normally
energized (failsafe) mode. There are 4
eight user-congurable discrete inputs
4.2-26
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
080
PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or laptop
change set points or conguration
Xpert Software.
Figure 4.2-8. PowerPort-E EMR-3000 Device Planning
4.2-27
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
081
Table 4.2-11. Catalog Numbering Selection for EMR-3000 Motor Relay Removable Terminals
Consult factory for the availability of sensitive ground.

EMR-3000 A 0 B A 1
Hardware Option 1
A = Four digital inputs, four
one 420 mA analog output,
URTD interface, IRIG-B
small display
B = Four digital inputs, four
zone interlocking, URTD
interface, IRIG-B, small display
Hardware Option 2
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
sensitive ground
current, 0.5A/0.1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
Communication
Options
B = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485)
I = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485) +
Modbus-TCP
(RJ-45)
Mounting Options
0 = Standard mount
1 = Projection
panel mount
Conformal Coating
Options
A = None
circuit boards
4.2-28
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
Technical Data and SpecicationsEMR-3000
082
Table 4.2-12. EMR-3000 Specications
Voltage Supply
Buffer time in case
voltage communication is
permitted to be interrupted
Digital Inputs
digital inputs)
4 switching thresholds: Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc,
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
230 Vac/dc
Un = 24 Vdc
Un = 48V/60 Vdc
Un = 110/120 Vac/dc
Un = 230/240 Vac/dc
RS-485
Master/slave: Slave
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
Fiber Optic
Master/slave: Slave
Connection: ST-plug
Power Consumption
Power
8W max. power
40250 Vac: 6W idle mode/
8W max. power
Power
at I
n
at I
n
Ground
current input: at I
n
at I
n
URTD-Interface
Connection: Versatile link
Storage temperature: 25C up to +70C
(13F to 158F)
(4F to 140F)
Permissible
above sea level
If 4000m (13,123.35 ft)
classication of the
may be necessary.
Binary Output Relays
Max. make current: 25A AC/25A DC for 4s
0.2A DC at 300V
Contact type: 1 changeover contact
4.2-29
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
083
EMR-4000
EMR-4000
General Description
relay is a multifunctional micro-
applied on medium voltage or larger
motors. The EMR-4000 relay is a
current and voltage device that
provides complete and reliable
motor protection, monitoring,
diagnostics, metering and starting
control functions.
has removable terminal blocks, and it
has Modbus-RTU communications as
standard; and an optional Ethernet
port for Modbus-TCP communications
or IEC-61850.
provides complete current, voltage
and frequency protection in a single
compact case. The relay has four
current inputs rated for either 5A or 1A
voltage inputs are to be connected
voltage is for independent single-
phase undervoltage/overvoltage
protection. The unit is user program-
mable for 60 Hz or 50 Hz operation.
protected soft key can be used for
digital input. Flash memory is used
for the programming and all settings
are stored in nonvolatile memory.
relay status.
are available.
functions. Logic gates and timers
may be dened and arranged for
customized applications. With the
programmable logic control functions
you can simplify the complexity of
your starting schemes by eliminating
timers and auxiliary relays. Flash
memory is used for the programming
and all settings are stored in non-
volatile memory. The relay allows for
four preprogrammed setting groups
that can be activated through software
or contact input.
has mass memory for data storage
load proles, the ve latest start
proles, motor trending, breaker/
contactor wear information and
oscillography data.
has eight discrete inputs, one ber
optic input, two Form C and 2NO
output programmable contacts, and
one Form C healthy contact. It also
has four 420 mA analog outputs and
one zone interlocking card. The relay
to congure the I/O. All inputs and to
outputs (except the healthy output)
are user-programmable. The unit
also counts with a test mode to force
outputs and simulate currents, to
facilitate the commissioning of the
unit. It can be powered from 19 Vdc
to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac to 250 Vac
auxiliary power.
4.2-30
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
General DescriptionEMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay
084
Features
Protection
Locked rotor protection (49S/51)
Two instantaneous elements with
timers (50P[1], 50P[2] and 50P[3])
and 51P[3])
11 standard curves
and 50X[2])
and 50R[2])
and 51X[2])
and 51R[2])
11 standard curves
Jam or Stall protection (50J[1]
and 50J[2])
overcurrent (46[1] and 46[2])
Underload protection (37[1],
37[2], 37[3])
Temperature protection with
optional URTD (49/38)
Stars per hour (66)
(27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
59A[1], 59A[2])
surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4],
81[5], 81[6])
Apparent and displacement power
factor (55A[1], 55A[2], 55D[1], 55D[2])
Forward and reverse watts (32[1],
32[2], 32[3])
Forward and reverse VARs (32V[1],
32V[2], 32V[3])
Lockout protection (86)
protection (87B)
Metering
zero sequence
zero sequence
Phase angles
Watts and kW demand
Power factor
Frequency
% THD V and I
URTD module
Monitoring
Trip coil monitor
Sequence of events report (up to
300 events)
Motor history
Records the last ve motor
start proles
Motor start trending
CT supervision
VT supervision
Diagnostic
Broken rotor bar (Beta version)
Communication
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
IRIG-B
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
Modbus-RTU (optional)
IEC-61850 (optional)
Control Functions
Transition for reduced voltage starts
Incomplete sequence delay
Permits numbers of cold starts
Limits numbers of starts per hour
acceleration motors
Motor stop inputs
Remote trip input
Emergency override
Breaker/contactor open-close/
stop-start
Remote open-close (stop-start)
Programmable I/O
Programmable LEDs
Programmable logic
4.2-31
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
General DescriptionEMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay
085
Table 4.2-13. Catalog Numbering Selection for EMR-4000 Motor Relay Removable Terminals
Consult factory for the availability of sensitive ground, large display and IEC-61850.
permits running the motor close to its
design limits while protecting it against
excessive heating and damaging
overload conditions. The EMR-4000
eld-proven protection algorithms
were developed based on motor
designs and operating parameters for
optimum operation and protection
while minimizing nuisance tripping.
relay uses a protection algorithm
and measurement technique based
(unbalance) sequence current sampling
and true rms calculations.
Intel-I-Trip (I
2
t) Overload Protection
The EMR-4000 motor relay features
the exclusive Eaton Intel-I-Trip
intelligent overload protection
system. Intel-I-Trip develops custom
overload curves simply from motor
nameplate data. Intel-I-Trip protects
motors from potentially damaging
overload and abnormal operating
conditions. The Intel-I-Trip intelligent
overload protection feature uses eld
proven measurement techniques and
a motor thermal protection model.
The EMR-4000 motor relays unique
measurement technique samples the
current waveforms 36 times per cycle,
providing accurate measurements
of the positive and negative sequence
currents. The negative sequence
current causes a greater heating effect
Intel-I-Trip uses these measurements
in its motor model to safely protect the
motor against the heating effects of
these currents.
The motor thermal model is analogous
to a bucket that is being lled and
drained at the same time. The ll rate
is dependent on the motor currents
and the drain is based on motor
design principles. The size of the
bucket is equivalent to the thermal
capacity associated with the mass of
the motor. Intel-I-Trip integrates these
rates and will issue a trip when the
thermal capacity is lled.
Intel-I-Trip features adaptive trip
characteristics that adjust the trip
times based on measured motor
temperature when RTDs are used.
overcurrent function to trip the
motor for high fault current levels
and to save the fuses. This function
can be disabled and has an adjustable
time delay on starting to avoid
nuisance tripping on inrush.
single-phase fuse blown, referred
to as single-phasing the motor. The
measures the current and voltage
unbalance and either can be used to
alarm or trip the motor before damage
occurs. The EMR-4000 has two voltage
and two current unbalance elements.
Pickup, start and run timers are
provided for each element.
A separate measuring circuit is used
to measure ground current. A ground
CT is recommended for more sensitive
protection against winding insulation
breakdown to ground. The relay
ground circuit can be connected
The ground fault protection has
pickup and time delay set points
or can be disabled.
Jam Protection
The user-selectable jam function
and run timers, and a second element
Underload/Underpower Protection
The user-selectable underload/
underpower function is used to detect
the loss of load on the motor. Coupling
failure is a common cause for loss of
load. Whenever possible, it is better to
use underpower to detect loss of load.
Three power elements and two under-
load elements are provided in the
relay for tripping and alarm purposes.
Pickup, start and run timers are
provided for each element.
The frequency elements provide the
ability to detect when the motor is
operating at off-nominal frequencies
that can do damage to the process
or, to signal to upstream protections
or controls to implement load
shedding actions.
EMR-4000 A 0 B A 1
Hardware Option 1
A = Eight digital inputs, ve
interface, IRIG-B, large
display
Hardware Option 2
ground current 5A1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
sensitive ground
current, 0.5A/0.1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
Communication
Options
B = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485)
H = IEC-61850
I = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485) +
Modbus-TCP
(RJ-45)
Mounting Options
0 = Standard mount
1 = Projection
panel mount
Conformal Coating
Options
A = None
circuit boards
4.2-32
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
086
Power Factor Protection
This protection is used in synchronous
motors applications to detect out-of-
synchronism conditions.
Undervoltage/Overvoltage Protection
Use the voltage protective functions
to detect abnormal system voltage
conditions that are potentially
hazardous to the motor.
provides a transition and an incom-
plete sequence function for reduced
voltage starting. The user can select
to transition based on the current
level and/or on time.
Antibackspin
The stop function is programmable
from 220%. For certain applications,
such as pumping a uid up a pipe,
the motor may be driven backward
for a period of time after it stops.
The EMR-4000 relay provides an
antibackspin timer to prevent starting
the motor while it is spinning in the
reverse direction. The timer begins
counting from the moment a stop is
declared by the relay.
number of cold starts, starts per hour
period or time between starts that
are permitted without damage.
relay incorporates these timers to
prevent starting the motor beyond
its capabilities.
Load Shedding
upstream process. The load-shedding
Emergency Override
relay has a user-programmable
feature that will let the operator
reset the start inhibitor timers and
thermal overload bucket. This function
is intended for use in emergency
conditions only, and it may result in
motor damage or failure.
Large motors with a high inertia may
experience starting currents that
time. The EMR-4000 motor protection
the motor is spinning, then the relay
The digital inputs can be programmed
to accept a contact input from a
separate differential relay or other
device to trip the motor. This provides
local and remote target information
and uses the trip contacts of the
EMR-4000 motor protection relay. It
will also record and log the motor
information at the time of the trip.
Breaker Failure or Stuck Contactor
either an internal or external trip
relay or trip an upstream breaker. The
timer must be longer than the breaker
A-B-C or A-C-B phase rotation.
A user setting permits correct
operation and indication of the
Maintenance Mode
clearing time and to lower incident
settings via a password protected
digital Input while maintenance work
Diagnostic Features
Broken Rotor Bar (Beta Version)
The EMR-4000 provides advanced
motor diagnostics including a broken
rotor bar detection function. The
broken rotor bar detection is a
condition maintenance function that
continuously monitors the motors
health while in operation. The
advanced Motor Current Signature
Analysis (MCSA) continuously
analyzes the motor current signature
and based on preset algorithms it will
determine when a broken rotor bar is
present in the motor.
The broken rotor bar function will
provide early detection of any rotor
problems and advise maintenance
personnel of the impending issue,
allowing for predictive maintenance
of the motor and for prevention of
catastrophic motor failures.
By providing early indication of
potential rotor problems, serious
system issues such as: reduced
starting torque, overloads, torque
and speed oscillation and bearing
wear can be avoided. With the
advanced broken rotor bar detection
system, advanced warning of
impending problems reduces
catastrophic failures, maximizing
motor life and system uptime.
The EMR-4000 protection relay records
The events are stored in a FIFO in
Trip Log
The EMR-4000 protection relay will
a FIFO trip log. Each trip record will
operated, fault location and currents
4.2-33
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
087
Waveform Capture
capabilities. The relay will record
all measured signals along with the
contact closures. The EMR-4000 relay
viewing in all light conditions. Seven
operating mode selection, scrolling
Starting Proles
The EMR-4000 records the average
current versus time for the last ve
starting cycles. This information is
available via the communications
port through PowerPort-E.
Motor Statistics
For each motor start, the EMR-3000
stores a motor start report and adds
this data to the motor statistics buffer.
With the motor statistics you can
track motor start data for the past
18 30-day periods. For each 30-day
interval, the relay records the
following information:
The date the interval began
The total number of starts in
the interval
The averages of the following
quantities:
Motor start time
Start % rotor thermal
capacity used
Maximum start current
The EMR-4000 relay automatically
records selected quantities into
non-volatile memory every 5, 10, 15,
30 or 60 minutes, depending on the
trending report setting.
Programmable I/O
2NO and one Form C contacts.
One isolated input can be used for
monitoring the trip circuit. One Form C
There are 4 eight user-congurable
discrete inputs that accept a wet
contact and can operate through a
wide range of power. Each input
and output is user-programmable
for maximum application exibility.
Programmable Logic
provides logic gates and timers that
the user can customize for special or
unique applications. Each gate can
or metering set points. Each gate has
a unique output assignment and
delay settings.
4.2-34
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
088
4.2-35
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
089
is PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or a
Xpert Software.
Figure 4.2-12. PowerPort-E EMR-4000 Device Planning
4.2-36
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
Technical Data and SpecicationsEMR-4000
090
Table 4.2-14. EMR-4000 Specications
Voltage Supply
(20%/+10%)
Buffer time in case
voltage interrupted
communication
is permitted
Digital Inputs
digital inputs)
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
230 Vac/dc
Un = 24 Vdc
Un = 48V/60 Vdc
Un = 110/120 Vac/dc
Un = 230/240 Vac/dc
Zone Interlocking
Zone out:
Zone in:
(twisted pair)
Power Consumption
Power
Power
at I
n
= 1A, S = 0.15 mVA
at I
n
= 5A, S = 0.15 mVA
Ground
current input: at I
n
= 1A, S = 0.35 mVA
at I
n
= 5A, S = 0.35 mVA
Relay Outputs
0.3A DC at 300V
RS-485
Master/slave: Slave
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
Fiber Optic
Master/slave: Slave
Connection: ST-plug
URTD-Interface
(22F to +158F)
(4F to +140F)
Permissible
above sea level
If 4000m (13,123.35 ft)
classication of the
may be necessary.
4.2-37
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
General DescriptionUniversal RTD
091
Universal RTD Module
General Description
Monitors as a stand-alone device or
in conjunction with the MP-3000,
MP-4000, FP-6000, ETR-4000,
EMR-3000, EMR-4000 and EGR-4000
protection relays.
Eatons Universal RTD Module is an
electronic resistance temperature
detector designed to monitor as a
stand-alone device or in conjunction
with the protective relays. The
Universal RTD Module can be used
to monitor, for example, transformer
temperature and relay that informa-
tion back to a remote computer or
programmable controller. When used
in conjunction with the motor relays,
the Universal RTD Module enhances
the units motor protection ability. In
addition to the FP-6000, ETR-4000,
EMR-3000, EMR-4000 and EGR-4000,
the Universal RTD Module can be used
with the older motor relays such as
IQ-1000 II, MP-3000 and MP-4000.
The Universal RTD Module can be
used to monitor as many as 12 RTD
inputsfour groups consisting of six
motor windings, two motor bearings,
two load bearings and two auxiliary.
The Universal RTD Module can be
programmed to accept any of the
following types of RTD inputs: 10 ohm
copper, 100 ohm platinum, and 100
and 120 ohm nickel.
The Universal RTD Module transmits
information using a ber optic link,
with a maximum distance of
400 feet (122m).
Height: 7.67 (194.8)
Width: 4.32 (109.7)
Depth: 2.00 (50.8)
Communications
Communications to the Power Xpert
Software are enabled through Power
Xpert Gateway and Modbus-RTU port
built into the module.
Figure 4.2-13. MP-3000 and URTD Wiring
Description Catalog
Number
48250 AC/DC
URTDI-01
2448 Vdc
URTDII-02
AC A
ACN
Control Power
Transformer
Noon-current
Carrying Ground arrying Ground
Data
Strobe
Universal
RTD Module
MP-3000
Customer Remote
Input Contacts
or Pushbuttons
Optical Fiber for URTD
Communications
to MP-3000
(Preferred Method)
25
24
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
9
10
Shield
n
Data
Strobe
23
22
20
19
17
18
16
11
12
13
15
14
H
A
H
1
B
H
1
C
H
2
B
H
2
C
G
2
G
1
120 Vac H3
120 Vac
4.2-38
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Motor Protection
Technical DataUniversal RTD
092
Figure 4.2-14. MP-3000 URTD MountingDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 4.2-15. MP-3000 Drawout Typical AC Supply and URTD Wiring
ACN
MB1
AUX1
120
AC
MB2
LB1
LB2
GND
J3
27
29
31
33
35
20
21
22
23
24
25
U
N
IV
E
R
S
A
L
R
T
D
M
O
D
U
L
E
S
T
Y
L
E
N
U
M
B
E
R
2
D
7
8
5
5
9
1A49102H19 1A49102H19
6.26
(159.0)
5.07
(128.8)
RTD Module
Mounting
Bracket
1
2
4
-4/20
OUTPUT
2
5
+4/20
OUTPUT
A
U
X
2
7
4
3
2
SOURCE
V
A
C

A
U
T
O

S
E
L
E
C
T
VV
DISCRETE
COMMON
DISCRETE
1
DISCRETE
IN 2
1
0
9
8
with PONI and RTD Module
22 21
30 29
26
28 27
25
24 23
18
20 19
17
14
16 15
13
12 11
52 51
59 60
57
55
58
56
53 54
49
47
50
48
45
43
46
44
41 42
Strobe
Data
Common
Shield
AC
ACN
120VAC J3
Control Power
Transformer
Non-current
Carrying Ground
Common
Data
Strobe
120V AC
Universal
RTD Module
Customer Remote
Input Contacts
Or Pushbuttons
Optical Fiber for URTD
Communications to MP-3000
(Preferred Method)
RTD Inputs: (Requires URTD Module)
Sensor types: 10 ohm copper
100 ohm nickel
120 ohm nickel
100 ohm platinum
URTD Module Communications
Interface: Fiber optic
Fiber optic
cable: Type HFBR-PNS005
4.3-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Differential Protection
General DescriptionMD-3000
093
MD-3000 Motor
Differential Relay
MD-3000 Differential Relay
General Description
Eatons MD-3000 Protective Relay
is a microprocessor-based sensitive
three-phase instantaneous OC relay
designed for both ANSI and IEC
applications. The MD-3000 is suitable
for use as a motor or generator self-
balancing differential protection relay.
The MD-3000 Relay operates from
the 5A secondary output of standard
current transformers. Current
transformer ratio information is
quickly programmed into the unit
via settings. The MD-3000 features
a user-friendly operator panel to
monitor, program and test the relay.
Operating parameters and trouble-
shooting information are displayed
in the two display windows.
The MD-3000 microprocessor-based
relay provides reliable instantaneous
trip protection for all voltage levels.
It is most commonly used as a motor
differential protection relay.
Features
ANSI and IEC applications
Phase differential metering
Monitoring and reporting of
magnitude and phase of current
causing trip
Relay failure alarm contact
Trip alarm contact
User-friendly front panel
Non-volatile memory
View settings any time
Set CT ratios
Integral test mode
Program and test mode
security access cover with
meter seal provision
Continuous internal circuitry
self-testing
Programmable lockout/self reset
after trip
System Protection
Instantaneous sensitive phase
overcurrent trip
Information and Data Delivery
Displays current transformer ratio
Data/information transmission
Wiring Diagram
Figure 4.3-1. Self-Balancing
Description Catalog
Number
Fixed case
Drawout
MD3000
MD3001
87
X
4.3-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Technical DataMD-3000
094
Figure 4.3-2. MD-3000Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 4.3-3. MD-3000 Wiring Diagram
MD 3000
Motor/Generator
Differential
7.72
(196.1)
3.86
(98.0)
5.67
(144.0)
11.34
(288.0)
1.51
(38.4)
Test
Test
Select
Tests
Lower
Raise
Select
Settings
Save
Settings
Test
Program
Program
Test
Settings/Test Time/Trip Cause
I =5A (Secondary) n
Time
Differential
Pickup In
Operational
RMS Amperes
Reset
0.80
(20.3)
5.33
(135.4)
S/N000000
W000000
66D0000G00
REV. 0
Built by FEC
Tested by GLK
6.89
(175.0)
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
11
13
15
17
19
12
14
16
18
20
Power Supply
Input
(+)
(-)
A2
B2
C2
A1
B1
C1
Unused
Unused Unused
Unused
Current Input
21
23
27
29
22
24
26
28
30
25
Select
View
Settings
Program
A DIF
B DIF
C DIF
MD 3001 Motor Differential
Drawout Case
Power Supply Input:
Term. 17/19
AC 120-240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
DC 48-250 Vdc
Caution - Refer to
Instruction Leaflet
5.23
(132.8)
2.61
(66.3)
11
13
15
17
19
12
14
16
18
20
41
43
45
47
49
42
44
46
48
50
21
23
25
27
29
22
24
26
28
30
51
53
55
57
52
54
56
58
4.75
(120.7)
9.51
(241.6)
11 12 41 42
43 44
45 46
47 48
49 50
51 52
53 54
55 56
57 58
59 60
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
Enclosure Rear View
Trip Alarm
Differential
Trip
Equip Gnd
Chassis Gnd
For The DT3031 To Be "CE Compliant",
The Power Supply Input Fuse Must Be
Rated At A Maximum Of 0.25 AMPS.
AC/DC
Supply
CS
C
CS
T
TB2
14
TB2
15
Differential
Trip
52a
52a
TC
A
A
B
B
B1
B2
C
C
C1
C2
52
A1
A2
CT
4.3-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
General DescriptionDP-300
095
DP-300 Current Differential
Protection Relay
DP-300
General Description
The DP-300 offers a three-phase current
differential protection for generators,
motors and two winding transformers.
The current owing in the individual
conductors is measured by means of
current transformers installed on both
sides of the protection zone. These
transformers form the limits of the
protection zone. By means of freely
congurable relays, the unit will
indicate if any of the adjusted fault
current limits have been exceeded.
The unit counts with a slope character-
istic to prevent operation due to CT
ratio mismatches, CT ratio errors,
CT saturation, and errors because of
tap changes.
For transformer applications, the unit
has 2nd and 5th harmonic restraints to
prevent misoperation in case of inrush
currents caused for energization or
over excitation of the transformer.
When used in transformer applications,
the DP-300 allows change to the phase
shift of the transformer, without having
to change the connection of the exter-
nal CTs, via selecting the vector group
in the display. The different nominal
currents of the high and low voltage
side of the transformer, as well as the
transformer ratio, may be congured.
Every measuring point may be set
separately. These features permit the
DP-300 to be universal in its applications.
The DP-300 permits design
simplication of the switchgear
cabinet, facilitates the commissioning,
ensures the operation of the system,
is user friendly, and increases the
availability of the system.
Figure 4.3-4. Protected Area PrincipleFault A Outside = No Alarm, Fault B Inside = Alarm
Features
True rms 6 x current measurement,
three-phase system on both sides of
the protected zone
Secondary current transformer
output available as: /1A or /5A
Congurable trip set points for:
Differential current (Id)
Restrain current (Is)
Congurable delays
Four alarm relays
Three discrete inputs (for blocking,
acknowledgment and conguration)
Two-line LC display
Congurable transformer ratio
Congurable vector group
Transformer inrush detection/
suppression
Individual conguration of the
nominal current for the high- and
low-voltage side of the transformer
Congurable transformer ratio
separated for currents of high- and
low-voltage side of the transformer
Typical Nameplate
Figure 4.3-5. Typical DP-300 Nameplate
A) B)
Schematic Circuit Diagrams (Single-Phase Version):
A) Fault Outside the Protection Area
B) Fault Inside the Protection Area
I
a
or or
I
b
I
L
I
a
or or
I
b
I
L
4.3-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Technical DataDP-300
096
Technical Data
Table 4.3-2. DP-300 Specications
Measurements, CurrentsIsolated
Measured currents (nominal value IN) 5A
Measuring frequency 40.0 to 70.0 Hz
Accuracy Class 1
Linear measuring range 5.0 x I
n
Maximum power consumption per path < 0.15 VA
Rated short-time current (1s) 30.0 x I
n
Ambient Conditions
Voltage supply 90 to 250 Vac/Vdc
Intrinsic consumption Maximum 10 VA
Ambient temperature storage 30 to +80C (22 to +176F)
Operational 20 to +70C (4 to +158F)
Ambient humidity 95%, noncondensing
Maximum altitude 6562 ft (2000m)
Degree of pollution 2
Digital InputsIsolated
Input range (V
cont, digital input
) Nominal voltage 18 to 250 Vac/dc
Input resistance Approximately 68K ohms
Relay OutputsIsolated
Contact material AgCdO
Resistive load (GP) (V
cont, relay output
) AC: 2.00 Aac at 250 Vac
DC: 2.00 Adc at 24 Vdc, 0.36 Adc at 125 Vdc, 0.18 Adc at 250 Vdc
Inductive load (PD) (V
cont, relay output
) AC: B300
DC: 1.00 Adc at 24 Vdc, 0.22 Adc at 125 Vdc, 0.10 Adc at 250 Vdc
Operating time Minimum 100 ms
Differential current Minimum 10%
Housing
Type APRANORM DIN 43 700
Dimensions (W x H x D) 5.67 x 3.78 x 5.20 inches (144 x 96 x 132 mm)
Front panel cutout (W x H) 5.43 [+0.039] x 3.63 [=0.031] inches (138 [+1.0] x 92 [+0.8] mm)
Terminals Screw-type, terminals depending on connector, 0.00388 in.
2
(2.5 mm
2
) or 0.00620 in.
2
(4.0 mm
2
)
Recommended tightening torque [0.00388 in.
2
] 4.43 in./lbs/[0.00620 in.
2
] 5.3 in./lbs ([2.5 mm
2
] 0.5 Nm/[4.0 mm
2
] 0.6 Nm)
Use 60/75C (140/167F) copper wire only
Use Class 1 wire only (or equivalent)
Weight Approximately 2.2 lbs (1000g)
Housing Protection
Protection system IP42 from front with correct mounting
IP54 from front with gasket
Gasket: P/N 8923-1038)
IP20 from back
Front foil Insulating surface
EMC-Test (CE) Tested according to applicable EN guidelines
Listings CE marking; UL listing for ordinary locations, UL/cUL listed, ordinary locations, File No.: E231544
Additional approvals IEEE C37.90.1 and C37.90.2
4.3-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Technical DataDP-300
097
Wiring Diagram
Figure 4.3-6. DP-300 Wiring Diagram
DP-300
Block Differential Protection
Possible Protected Objects:
M G
N
PE
L (90 to 250 Vac/dc)
Current IL1 Transducer Set 2
Relay 1
Relay 2
Relay 3
Ready for Operation
N/C
Relay 4
Common
N/C
Configuration Off
Acknowledgement
Blocking
Subject to Technical Modifications. L
1
L
2
L
3
T
r
a
n
s
d
u
c
e
r

S
e
t

1

(
H
i
g
h

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

S
i
d
e
)
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

O
b
j
e
c
t
T
r
a
n
s
d
u
c
e
r

S
e
t

2

(
L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

S
i
d
e
)
T
h
e

T
r
a
n
s
d
u
c
e
r

R
a
t
i
o

i
s

A
d
j
u
s
t
a
b
l
e

i
n

t
h
e

D
i
s
p
l
a
y
.
T
h
e

T
r
a
n
s
d
u
c
e
r

R
a
t
i
o

i
s

A
d
j
u
s
t
a
b
l
e

i
n

t
h
e

D
i
s
p
l
a
y
.
2
5

2
6

2
7

2
8

2
9

3
0
3
5

3
6

3
3

3
4

3
1

3
2
D
P
-
3
0
0

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

R
e
l
a
y
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1
0

1
1

1
2
1
5

1
6

1
7

1
8

1
9
8
3

8
1

7
9
4.3-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Transformer Protection
General DescriptionETR-4000
098
Protection Relay
ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay
General Description
Eatons ETR-4000 transformer
microprocessor-based relay for two
winding transformers of all voltage
levels. The ETR-4000 provides phase
and ground percentage restrained
differential protection using a variable
dual slope characteristic with phase,
negative, residual and neutral
overcurrent elements for backup
protection. It can also be used to
provide restrained differential protec-
tion to large motors and generators.
The ETR-4000 has eight current inputs
rated for either 5A or 1A to monitor
both sides of the transformers. The
CTs can be connected in wye in both
sides of the transformer; the relay
automatically compensates for the
connection of the transformer and
for CT mismatch errors.
protected soft key can be used for
instantaneous elements only.
of a computer. 14 programmable LEDs
provide quick indication of relay status.
are available.
contact input.
The ETR-4000 transformer protection
relay has a mass memory for data
log 300 sequence of events records,
oscillography data.
The ETR-4000 has eight programmable
binary inputs, four normally opened
and four Form C heavy-duty outputs
and one Form C signal alarm relay. It
can be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc
Features
Protection
Dual-slope percentage restrained
current differential with magnetizing
inrush and overexcitation
blocking (87R)
Unrestrained current
differential (87H)
Restricted ground fault/Ground
Differential (87GD)
Phase overcurrent (elements
can be assigned to either side
of the transformer):
Four instantaneous elements
with timers (50P[1], 50P[2], 50P[3]
and 50P[4])
Four inverse time overcurrent
elements (51P[1], 51P[2], 51P[3]
and 51P[4])
11 standard curves
Inrush blocking
Negative sequence phase overcur-
rent (elements can be assigned to
either side of the transformer):
elements (51Q[1] and 51Q[2])
11 standard curves
Ground overcurrent (elements
can be assigned to either side
of the transformer):
and 50X[2])
and 50R[2])
and 51X[2])
and 51R[2])
11 standard curves
Two breaker failure elements
(50BF[1] and 50BF[2])
Phase transformer overload
protection (49)
protection (87B)
Metering
zero sequence
Ampere demand
Current phase angles
% THD I
Magnitude THD I
RTD temperatures
Monitoring
Trip coil monitor for both primary
and secondary breakers
Breaker wear primary and
secondary (accumulated
(up to 300 events)
Communication
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
IRIG-B
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
Modbus-RTU
Control Functions
Breaker open/close both breakers
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable LEDs
Cold load pickup
CT supervision
4.3-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
099
Table 4.3-3. Catalog Numbering Selection for ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay Removable Terminals
Consult factory for the availability of sensitive ground, four inputs/ve outputs and eight inputs/ve outputs.
Eatons ETR-4000 transformer
simplicity. The ETR-4000 is suitable
for application on small, medium
and large two-winding power trans-
formers. Multiple current inputs are
used to provide primary protection,
control and backup protection of
transformers, including current
differential, restricted ground
differential and overcurrent protection.
Dual-Slope Percent Differential Protection
The primary protective element for
transformer protection is the percent
differential element, which compares
the current entering the primary
and leaving the secondary of the
transformer. The ETR-4000 has built
in compensation for the turns-ratio
and the phase shift of the transformer,
so its not necessary to compensate
for the transformer connection by the
connection of the CTs.
The current differential element looks
at the vector difference between the
current entering and leaving the zone
of protection. If the difference exceeds
a pre-determined amount, the element
will operate.
The operating characteristic of the
percent differential element is a dual-
slope characteristic to accommodate
for CT saturation and CT errors.
Dual-Slope Operating Characteristics
Harmonic Restraints
There are certain conditions like
energizing one side of the transformer
with the other side de-energized
(inrush currents) or the paralleling
of two transformers (sympathetic
currents) that can create false
differential currents. These differential
currents if not recognized can cause
a false trip; in the case of inrush
conditions or sympathetic currents,
the differential current is characterized
by a heavy content of 2nd and 4th
harmonic currents. The percentage
differential element is desensitized
either permanently (stationary
conditions) or temporarily (transient
conditions), whenever the 2nd or
4th harmonic exceed the value
programmed into the relay.
Another condition that can create a
false differential current is a sudden
change of voltage or frequency that
can put the transformer in a over-
excitation state. In this case there
is high content of 5th harmonic
currents. The percentage differential
element is also desensitized when
the 5th harmonic content exceeds
a predened value.
Harmonic Restraints
Unrestrained Differential
An unrestrained differential element
is provided for fast tripping on heavy
internal faults to limit catastrophic
damage to the transformer and to
minimize risks to the remainder of
the power system.
ETR-4000 A 0 B A 1
Hardware Option 1
A = Eight digital inputs, nine
two zone interlocking, URTD
B = Four digital inputs, ve
IRIG-B, small display
C = Eight digital inputs, ve

one zone interlocking, IRIG-B,
small display
Hardware Option 2
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
sensitive ground
current 0.5A/0.1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
Communication
Options
B = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485)
1 = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485) +
Modbus-TCP
(RJ-45)
Mounting Options
0 = Standard mount
1 = Projection
panel mount
Conformal Coating
Options
A = None
circuit boards
4.3-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
100
Restricted Ground Fault
Ground differential protection is
applied to transformers having
impedance grounded wye windings.
It is intended to provide sensitive
ground fault detection for low magni-
tude fault currents, which would not
be detected by the main percent
differential element.
Restricted Ground Fault
Overcurrent Elements
The ETR-4000 can be used to provide
backup for transformer and adjacent
power system equipment. Instanta-
neous overcurrent elements can be
used for fast clearing of severe internal
or external (through) faults.
Time overcurrent protection elements
per winding allow coordinating with
the adjacent protection zones and
acting as a backup protection. There
are 11 user-selectable inverse-time
overcurrent curve characteristics. The
user can select from the ANSI, IEC or
thermal curve families, and can select
instantaneous or time delay reset
characteristics.
Negative Sequence Overcurrent
Because this element does not respond
to balanced load or three-phase faults,
the negative-sequence overcurrent
element may provide the desired over-
current protection. This is particularly
applicable to delta-wye grounded
transformers where only 58% of the
secondary p.u. phase-to-ground fault
current appears in any one primary
phase conductor. Backup protection
can be particularly difcult when
the wye is impedance grounded.
A negative-sequence element can be
used in the primary supply to the
transformer and can be set as
sensitively as required to protect for
secondary phase-to-ground or phase-
to-phase faults. This element should
be set to coordinate with the low-side
phase and ground relays for phase-
to-ground and phase-to-phase faults.
The negative sequence element
must also be set higher than the
negative-sequence current due to
unbalanced loads.
Breaker Failure
relay includes two breaker failure
(50BF, 62BF) elements that can be
initiated from either an internal or
external trip signal. These are
independent elements that can be
used to operate a lockout relay or
trip an upstream breaker. The timer
Maintenance Mode
settings via a password-protected
digital Input while maintenance work
The ETR-4000 protection relay records
The events are stored in an FIFO in
Trip Log
The ETR-4000 protection relay will
in an FIFO trip log. Each trip record will
Waveform Capture
contact closures. The ETR-4000 relay
waveform capture is initiated by up to
eight different triggers; it can also
viewing in all light conditions. 17
4.3-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
101
Figure 4.3-7. ETR-4000 Device Planning
4.3-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
102
Figure 4.3-8. ETR-4000 Typical One-Line Diagram
Programmable I/O
four normally open and four Form C
used for monitoring the trip circuits.
(failsafe) mode. There are eight user-
congurable discrete inputs that
accept a wet contact and can operate
through a wide range of power.
Each input and output is user-
programmable for maximum
that is designed for continuous, remote
monitoring of many devices. It provides
information on Power Xpert Software.
4.3-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Technical Data and SpecicationsETR-4000
103
Table 4.3-4. ETR-4000 Specications
Voltage Supply
(20%/+10%)
Buffer time in case
of supply failure: > = 50 ms at minimal aux.
voltage interrupted
communication
is permitted
Digital Inputs
digital inputs)
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
230 Vac/dc
Un = 24 Vdc
Un = 48V/60 Vdc
Un = 110/120 Vac/dc
Un = 230/240 Vac/dc
Zone Interlocking
Zone out:
Zone in:
(twisted pair)
Power Consumption
Power
Power
at I
n
= 1A, S = 0.15 mVA
at I
n
= 5A, S = 0.15 mVA
Ground
current input: at I
n
= 1A, S = 0.35 mVA
at I
n
= 5A, S = 0.35 mVA
Relay Outputs
0.3A DC at 300V
RS-485
Master/slave: Slave
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
Fiber Optic
Master/slave: Slave
Connection: ST-plug
URTD-Interface
(22F to +158F)
(4F to +140F)
Permissible
above sea level
If 4000m (13,123.35 ft)
classication of the
may be necessary.
4.3-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
General DescriptionEGR-4000
104
EGR-4000 Generator
Protection Relay
EGR-4000 Generator Protection Relay
General Description
Eatons EGR-4000 generator protection
relay is a multi-functional, micro-
processor-based relay for small to
medium sized generators. It may
be used as a primary or backup
protection in standby generators,
and cogeneration applications.
The EGR-4000 generator protection
relay provides voltage controlled,
voltage restrained, and standard
directional three-phase overcurrent
protection, as well as directional
phase-residual and independent
ground overcurrent protection and
breaker failure. Three-phase over-/
undervoltage, voltage unbalance,
current unbalance, over/under and
rate-of-change frequency, vector
surge, power factor, directional VARs,
directional power, loss of excitation,
overexcitation and sync check
functions are standard functions.
The EGR-4000 generator relay
provides all required protection,
control, monitoring and metering for
small and medium sized generators in
a single, compact case. The relay has
four current inputs rated for either 5A
voltage is for independent single-phase
undervoltage/overvoltage protection,
or 100% ground protection for a high
resistance grounded generator.
digital input.
of a computer. 14 programmable LEDs
provide quick indication of relay status.
and an Ethernet port in the back are
optional for local area networking.
Optional Modbus-RTU, Modbus-TCP
or IEC-61850 protocols are supported.
functions. Logic gates and timers may
be dened and arranged for custom-
ized applications. Programmable logic
control functions make the EGR-4000
very exible. Flash memory is used for
the programming and all settings are
stored in nonvolatile memory.
relay has mass memory for data
storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms
time resolution. The relay will log 300
load proles, breaker wear information
and oscillography data.
The EGR-4000 has eight programmable
binary inputs, two analog inputs, two
analog outputs, two normally opened
and two Form C heavy-duty outputs,
and one Form C signal alarm relay. It
can be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc
Features
Protection
and 50P[3])
and 51P[3])
11 standard curves
Voltage restraint (51P[2]
and 51P[3])
and 50X[2])
and 50R[2])
and 51X[2])
and 51R[2])
11 standard curves
(27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
59A[1], 59A[2])
(59N[1], 59N[2])
surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4],
81[5], 81[6])
55D[1], 55D[2])
Forward and reverse watts (32[1],
32[2], 32[3])
Forward and reverse VARs (32V[1],
32V[2], 32V[3])
Overexcitation, volts-per-hertz
(24[1], 24[2])
64S, 100% stator ground fault
(27TN/ 59N)
Generator unbalance (46G[1], 46G[2])
Loss of excitation (40[1],40[2])
Sync check (25)
Lockout (86)
Loss of potential-LOP
protection (87B)
Cold load pickup
4.3-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
105
Metering
Generator hours of operation
zero sequence
Ampere demand
zero sequence
Phase angles
Watts and kW demand
Power factor
Frequency
% THD V and I
Sync values
URTD module
Monitoring
Trip coil monitor
Breaker wear
(up to 300 events)
Communication
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
IRIG-B
RS-232
RS-485
Protocols:
Modbus-RTU (optional)
IEC-61850 (optional)
Control Functions
Breaker open/close
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable Logic
Programmable LEDs
Cold load pickup
CT supervision
Table 4.3-5. Catalog Numbering Selection for EGR-4000 Generator Relay Removable Terminals
EGR-4000 A 0 B A 1
Hardware Option 1
A = Eight digital inputs,
ve outputs, 2AI +2AO,
zone interlocking,
URTD interface
Hardware Option 2
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
sensitive ground
current 0.5A/0.1A,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
Communication
Options
B = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485)
H = IEC-61850 (Goose)
I = Modbus-RTU +
Modbus-TCP
Mounting Options
0 = Standard mount
1 = Projection
panel mount
Conformal Coating
Options
A = None
circuit boards
4.3-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
106
Eatons EGR-4000 generator protection
EGR-4000 provides comprehensive
protection, metering and monitoring
of small to medium sized synchronous
or induction generators operating at
50 or 60 Hz. The base relay includes all
the standard protection and metering
functions. Protection features found
in the EGR-4000 include:
The EGR-4000 generation protection
and ground directional overcurrent
protection. There are 14 independent
ground elements X use the
current-sensing input. The ground
elements R use a calculated 3Io
residual current obtained from the
sum of the three-phase currents. This
either the neutral or ground current in
a three-phase, four-wire system. Each
of the phase and ground overcurrent
elements can be selected to operate
based on fundamental or rms current.
currents supervised by zero, negative
or positive sequence voltages or
ground current. This function is
selectable to operate in forward,
reverse or both directions.
(50, 51). A quadrature voltage is
compared to a corresponding phase
current to establish the direction of
the fault. This function is selectable
to operate in the forward, reverse or
both directions.
negative sequence or residual currents
supervised by zero, negative or positive
current pickup level (51P[2], 51P[3]),
to protect the distribution system
components against excessive
damage and to prevent the generator
and its auxiliaries from exceeding their
thermal limitations. This modication
of the pickup overcurrent level is
compared to the corresponding phase
input voltage. The EGR-4000 uses
the simple linear model below to
Sync Check
Reverse Power
power owing through a generator.
There are three elements to be
congured, operate in forward or
reverse; or, under or over power
conditions. Reverse power is typically
applied to prevent generator motoring
that can cause damage to the prime
mover; while under power is generally
applied to load loss and to prevent
an overspeed condition that could
damage the prime mover.
Reverse VARs
Reverse VARs can be used to detect loss
of excitation in synchronous machines.
There are three elements to be cong-
ured: operate in forward or reverse;
or, under or over VARs conditions.
IEC or thermal curve families, and
Breaker Failure
from either an internal or external trip
Voltage Protection
an adjustable time delay.
Pickup %
100 %
25 %
4.3-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
107
100% Ground Stator Protection
In high impedance grounded
generators, ground fault protection
is provided by the detection of voltage
in the neutral of the generator by an
overvoltage element (59N) connected
to the secondary of the distribution
grounding transformer, this over-
voltage element has to be desensitized
for 3rd harmonic voltages normally
present in the generator. Under
normal conditions there is no voltage
across the secondary of the grounded
transformer; when one of the phases
goes to ground, voltage appears
across the resistor and the overvoltage
element operates, indicating a ground
conductor. However, the overvoltage
element technique described above
will protect around 90% to 95% of
the winding. The last 5% to 10% is
protected by detecting the decayed
of the 3rd harmonic voltage using an
undervoltage element (27TN) tuned
to the 3rd harmonic voltage. In the
EGR-4000 we can provide 100% stator
ground protection by measuring the
zero sequence voltage through the
4th voltage input, and by combining
the 59N and 27A elements. The 27A
element has to be programmed to
operate for 3rd harmonic zero
sequence voltages.
A-B-C or an A-C-B phase rotation.
A user setting permits correct
operation and indication of the
Operation of generators at off-nominal
frequencies can have extremely
detrimental effects on both the
generator itself and the associated
prime mover, in particular with steam
turbine generators operating below
normal frequency. The EGR-4000 relay
provides six frequency elements that
can be used to detect under/over
frequency, rate of change and a vector
surge (decoupling of two systems)
protection on the Main VT inputs. Each
set point and an adjustable time delay.
Negative Sequence Protection
Negative sequence overcurrent
protection prevents the generators
from rotor overheating damage.
Unbalanced loads, fault conditions
or open phasing will produce a
negative sequence current to ow. The
unbalanced currents induce double
system frequency currents in the rotor,
which quickly causes rotor overheat-
ing. Serious damage will occur to the
generator if the unbalance is allowed
to persist. The EGR-4000 provides
a negative sequence denite time
overcurrent element and a negative
sequence timed overcurrent tripping
element to ensure that the generator
stays within its short-time and
continuous negative sequence
current rated limits.
Overexcitation Protection
Generator overexcitation occurs when
the ratio of voltage versus frequency is
too high, and the rotor iron saturates
due to high ux density. High ux
density results in stray ux in
components not designed to carry it,
which in turn causes overheating and
can potentially damage the generator.
This protection is provided through a
Volts/Hertz function with a program-
mable inverse time characteristic.
Loss of Excitation
Loss of eld protection or loss of
excitation is used to avoid unstable
operation, potential loss of synchro-
nism and possible damage to
synchronous generators. When a
synchronous generator loses its
eld, the generator can continue
to generate power as an induction
generator, provided that it can obtain
its excitation from the other machines
on the system. During this condition,
the rotor will quickly overheat due to
the slip frequency currents induced in
it. Loss of excitation in one machine
could jeopardize the operation of other
machines beyond their capability and
also the stability of the entire system.
The EGR-4000 supports the two typical
distance relaying schemes used for
detecting the loss excitation. The
two schemes differ mainly in that
scheme 1 uses a negative offset mho
element and scheme 2 uses a positive
offset mho element with directional
unit supervision.
Maintenance Mode
safety by providing a simple and a
settings via a password-protected soft
key, communication or via a digital
input while maintenance work is being
performed at an energized panel or a
device. The more sensitive settings
provide greater security for mainte-
nance personnel and help to reduce
the possibility of injury.
4.3-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
108
Figure 4.3-10. Negative Sequence Protection
Figure 4.3-11. Loss of Excitation
4.3-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
109
relay records a maximum of 300
events associated with the relay. An
event is classied as a change of state
as detected by the relay. These include
self-diagnostic failures. Each event is
date and time stamped to a 1 ms
resolution. The events are stored
in an FIFO log in chronological order.
Trip Log
The EGR-4000 protection relay will
Waveform Capture
The EGR-4000 distribution protection
capabilities. The relay will record
all measured signals along with the
contact closures. The EGR-4000 relay
mum size per record is 600 cycles.
up to eight different triggers; it can
also be generated manually through
the display or via communications.
The front panel user interface has
a 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with
background illumination for wide
angle viewing in all light conditions.
17 programmable LEDs provide quick
The EGR-4000 relay automatically
report setting.
Programmable I/O
two normally open and two Form C
contacts. Two isolated inputs can
be used for monitoring the trip circuit.
(failsafe) mode. There are eight
user-congurable discrete inputs
The EGR-4000 also has two analog
inputs and two analog outputs.
The analog inputs are available for
providing protection and monitoring
of generator bearing vibration. The
analog inputs are eld programmable
to measure transducer signals that
operate over a range of 0 to 20 mA,
4 to 20 mA, or 1 to 10V. Two analog
outputs are available for signaling
the value of measured analog
quantities to external process control
devices such as PLCs. They can be
programmed to operate over a 0 to
20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, or 1 to 10V range.
The analog outputs can be congured
to signal a representation of most
analog quantities measured by the
EGR-4000 including current, voltages
and RTD temperature.
Programmable Logic
has a unique output assignment and
delay settings.
4.3-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
110
4.3-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
111
4.3-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
112
to change set points or conguration,
Xpert Software.
Figure 4.3-15. PowerPort-E EGR-5000 Device Planning
4.3-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Technical Data and SpecicationsEGR-4000
113
Table 4.3-6. EGR-4000 Specications
Voltage Supply
(20%/+10%)
Buffer time in case
voltage interrupted
communication
is permitted
Digital Inputs
digital inputs)
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
230 Vac/dc
Un = 24 Vdc
Un = 48V/60 Vdc
Un = 110/120 Vac/dc
Un = 230/240 Vac/dc
Zone Interlocking
Zone out:
Zone in:
(twisted pair)
Power Consumption
Power
Power
at I
n
= 1A, S = 0.15 mVA
at I
n
= 5A, S = 0.15 mVA
Ground
current input: at I
n
= 1A, S = 0.35 mVA
at I
n
= 5A, S = 0.35 mVA
Relay Outputs
0.3A DC at 300V
RS-485
Master/slave: Slave
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
Fiber Optic
Master/slave: Slave
Connection: ST-plug
URTD-Interface
(22F to +158F)
(4F to +140F)
Permissible
above sea level
If 4000m (13,123.35 ft)
classication of the
may be necessary.
4.3-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04114
4.4-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Voltage Protection Relay
General DescriptionVR-300
115
Voltage Relay
VR-300
General Description
The VR-300 is an industrial grade
protective relay that offers multiple
protective features in a single package,
ideal for stand-alone protection or for the
implementation of transfer schemes.
Using a digital processor to
measure true rms values enables
a high degree of measuring accuracy
regardless of harmonics, transients
or disturbing pulses.
The compact size and multiple
functions of the VR-300 help to
simplify switchgear design. The
digital display offers a user-friendly
interface to set up the unit as well
as to monitor the operation and
display any alarms.
Features
Over-/undervoltage monitoring
(59/27)
Over-/underfrequency monitoring
(81O/U)
Voltage asymmetry monitoring (47)
Sync-check (25)xed to relay 3
Zero voltage monitoring: dead
bus start functionality (close CB
to dead bus)
Two congurable relays
Discrete input for blocking of
protective functions or remote
acknowledgment
Typical Nameplate
Figure 4.4-1. Typical VR-300 Nameplate
4.4-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Technical DataVR-300
116
Technical Data
Table 4.4-1. VR-300 Specications
Table 4.4-2. Reference Conditions
Accuracy depending on the congured

transformer ratio.
Reference Conditions
The data apply to the following
reference conditions:
Input voltage = sinusoidal
rated voltage
Frequency = rated frequency 2%
Power supply = rated voltage 2%
Power factor cos = 1
Ambient temperature 23C 2K
Warm-up period = 20 minutes
Measuring Voltage
Standard (V
rated
) wye/delta 66/115 Vac
Maximum value Vph-ph maximum, (UL/cUL) Maximum 150 Vac
Rated Voltage V
ph-ground
50 Vac/2.5 kV
Rated surge voltage 2.5 kV
Measuring frequency 40.0 to 80.0 Hz
Accuracy Class 1
Linear measuring range 1.3 x Vrated
Input resistance 0.21M ohms
Maximum power consumption per path < 0.15W
Ambient Variables
Wide range power supply 90 to 250 Vac/Vdc
Intrinsic consumption Maximum 12 VA
Ambient temperature Storage: 30 to +80C (22 to +176F)
Operational: 20 to +70C (4 to +158F)
Ambient humidity 95%, noncondensing
Degree of pollution 2
Discrete InputsIsolated
Input range (Vcont, discrete input) Rated voltage 18 to 250 Vac/Vdc
Input resistance Approximately 68K ohms
Relay OutputsPotential Free
Contact material AgCdO
General purpose (GP) (V
cont, relay output
) AC: 2.00A AC at 250 Vac
DC: 2.00A DC at 24 Vdc, 0.22A DC at 125 Vdc, 0.10A DC at 250 Vdc
Pilot duty (PD) (V
cont, relay output
) AC: B300
DC: 1.00A DC at 24 Vdc, 0.22A DC at125 Vdc, 0.10A DC at 250 Vdc
Housing
Type APRANORM DIN 43 700
Dimensions (W x H x D) 3.78 x 2.84 x 5.20 in. (96 x 72 x 132 mm)
Front panel cutout (W x H) 3.62 [+0.03) x 2.68 [+0.03] in. (92 [+0.8] x 68 [+0.7] mm)
Wiring Screw-type, terminals 0.0039 in.
2
(2.5 mm
2
)
Recommended tightening torque 0.369 ft/lbs (0.5 Nm). Use 60/75C (140/167F) copper wire only.
Use Class 1 wire only (or equivalent)
Weight Approximately 2.14 lbs (800g)
Protection
Protection system IP42 from front with correct mounting
IP54 from front with gasket (gasket: P/N 8923-1036) IP20 from back
Front foil Insulating surface
EMC-test (CE) Tested according to applicable EN guidelines
Listings CE marking; UL listing for ordinary locations, UL/cUL listed, ordinary locations,
File No.: E231544
Additional approvals IEEE C37.90.1 and C37.90.2
Measuring
Value
Display
Range
Accuracy
Frequency
fL1, fL2, fL3 40.0 to 80.0 Hz 0.05 Hz
Voltage
VL1, VL2, VL3,
VL12, VL23, VL31
0 to 520,
0 to 65 kV
1%

4.4-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Technical DataVR-300
117
Wiring Diagram
Figure 4.4-2. VR-300 Wiring Diagram
The synchronizing voltage must be connected
3-phase if the measuring voltage is connected
3-phase (N not connected). If the measuring
voltage is connected 4-phase (L1, L2, L3, N),
the synchronizing voltage may be connected
2-phase (L1-L2). L3 is connected only for
compensation and is not measured.
0 Vdc
Blocking of protective functions
or remote acknowledgement.
Relay 1
(Ready for Operation)
Relay 2
Subject to Technical Modifications.
2
/
3
S
y
n
c
h
r
o
n
i
z
i
n
g

S
y
s
t
e
m

(
F
i
x
e
d
)

C
B
5
6
7
8
V
R
-
3
0
0

(
M
u
l
t
i
-
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

R
e
l
a
y
)
90 to 250 Vac/dc
Synchronizing Voltage L1
7
0
7
1
7
2
Measuring Voltage L1
(Measuring Voltage N)
1
2
3
4
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
Relay 3
(Fixed to synch-check
zero voltage configurable)
Measuring Voltage
3-Wire or
4-Wire System
S
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
e
d

S
y
s
t
e
m

(
V
a
r
i
a
b
l
e
)

3
/
4
3
/
4
Measuring Voltage: 100 Vac
The socket for the PC parameterization
is situated on the side of the unit. This is
where the DPC must be plugged in.
Not Measured.
4.4-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
General DescriptionTC-100
118
TC-100 Transformer
Temperature Controller for
Dry-Type Transformers
TC-100
General Description
The TC-100 Transformer Temperature
Controller monitors up to three venti-
lated dry-type transformer windings
and one ambient temperature. The
TC-100 operates relays by comparing
the highest winding temperature to
stored set point temperatures and
displays four thermocouple inputs,
as well as the stored maximum
temperature and its associated wind-
ing. The unit provides fans, alarm and
trip output relays. Up to two fans can
be controlled via the TC-100. Each fan
operating contact is fuse protected.
A yellow LED indicates that fans are
on. A fan exerciser turns the fans on
automatically at periodic intervals to
prevent fan motor seizing (on-time
and interval is programmable).
Form C contacts are provided for
notication of alarm conditions. A
red LED illuminates to indicate that the
alarm is actuated. An internal audible
alarm also sounds when the unit goes
into alarm condition. This audible
buzzer can be silenced without cancel-
ing the alarm. The alarm and trip relays
can be congured as a fail-safe relay
(normally energized when the unit is
powered up). For example, if the alarm
relay was congured as a fail-safe; if
supply control power to the TC-100 is
interrupted, the alarm relay changes
state for notication of this condition.
The alarm circuit is also used for
notication of an open or a missing
thermocouple. If a thermocouple were
to open, the alarm relay operates and
the corresponding channel will read -
on the LED display. It is important to
note that a failed thermocouple
will not cause the device to trip the
transformer ofine.
Form C contacts are provided to trip
the transformer ofine if any of the
winding temperatures exceed the trip
setting. A red LED indicates that the
trip relay has actuated.
A test function is provided to: test the
digital display and all of the LEDs;
simulate over-temperature conditions;
and check the internal temperature of
the monitor.
A 420 mA analog signal is provided
for remote indication or for use with
SCADA systems.
The TC-100 has built-in monitoring
functions and logging functions to
help you shed some light on the
unknowns of the operation of your
transformer. Temperature trending lets
you understand the hour of the day
that the transformer runs hotter, and
modify its loading to extend the life of
your transformer; logging information
lets you restore the operation of your
system faster, by letting you correlate
tripping and alarming events to the
overall conditions of your system;
and fan wear information can be
used to perform preventive mainte-
nance to increase the uptime in
your transformers.
Features and Benets
Control
Thermocouple inputs (E or K type
thermocouples)
Automatic correlation throughout
entire temperature range to
compensate for thermocouple
non-linearity
Programmable on and off set points
Alarm relay for remote monitoring
Trip relay for remote monitoring
Two fan power relays
Fan failure detection to start a
backup fan or alarm
Fan exerciser (cycle time and
duration) to reduce fan wear
Fans can be operated automatically
or manually
Metering
Average temperature
(all three windings)
Maximum instantaneous
temperature (all three windings)
Maximum temperature memory
per winding
Fans hours of operation
Winding 1, Winding 2, Winding 3
and ambient temperature
Monitoring
Trending
Fan failure
Fan wear
Alarm log
Trip log
Test mode
Detect failed sensors
Self-diagnostics
Communications
USB port in the front
Modbus-RTU communications
Programming and monitoring
software (the unit can be completely
programmed through the front of
the unit)
420 mA output for integration with
SCADA systems
Hardware
One trip relay (Form C)
One alarm relay (Form C)
Two power fan relays (1 NO each)
Two digital inputs
420 mA output for integration with
SCADA systems
Local Alarm 95 db
Available in semi-ush or hinge
panel-mounting versions
4.4-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Technical DataTC-100
119
Figure 4.4-3. TC-100 External Wiring Diagram
Figure 4.4-4. Programming and Monitoring Software
4.4-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Technical DataTC-100
120
Table 4.4-3. TC-100 Technical Specications
Table 4.4-4. Catalog Ordering Information for TC-100 Transformer
Temperature Controller for Dry-Type Transformers
Control Power
Nominal rating 120 Vac or 240 Vac (+10%, 25%)
Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Power use 15 VA maximum
Operating range 120 Vac: 90132 Vac
240 Vac:180264 Vac
Ride-through time 20 cycles at nominal Vac
Environmental
Relative humidity 0 to 90% (noncondensing)
Measurement Accuracy
Temperature 1C one count under normal conditions
2C one count under extreme conditions
Extreme conditions are:
Ambient temperature colder than 10C
Winding to unit temperature greater than 210C
Discrete Inputs
Number of inputs Two programmable
Rating 1.2 VA at 120 Vac
Max. OFF = 36 Vac
Min. ON = 86 Vac
(built in power source available)
Outputs
Output fans Two individually congurable SPST contacts rated 30A at 120/240 Vac, 1 hp at 120 Vac, 2 hp at
240 Vac for each contact
Output alarm One SPDT contact rated 10A at 120/240 Vac (resistive) congurable for normal or
fail-safe operations
Output alarm One SPDT contact rated 10A at 120/240 Vac (resistive) congurable for normal of
fail-safe operation
Remote analog output 420 mA into a load of up to 1000 ohms max. proportional to hottest winding temperature 1%
EMC
Immunity ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-2002 - Standard Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) tests for protective relays
and relay systems
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2-2004, standard withstand capability of relay systems to radiated electromagnetic
interference from transceivers
EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-8
EN 61000-4-11
ESD
RF Radiated immunity
EFT/Burst immunity
Surge immunity
RF conducted immunity
Power frequency magnetic eld immunity
Voltage variation immunity
Emissions EN 50011 CISPR-11, Class A
CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
Clock
Accuracy +/1 1 minute/month at 25C
Logging
Trend data 100 entries, logging interval programmable from 1 minute to 30 days
Alarm events Last 25 alarm events
Trip events Last 25 trip events
Description Catalog
Number
Barrier cabinet
Controller only (semi ush mounting) TC-100
Controller with barrier cabinet (hinge front panel)
TC-100-Barrier
TC-100
TC-101
4.5-1
September 2010
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
General DescriptionInsulGard
121
InsulGard
InsulGard
General Description
The InsulGard is a continuous
partial discharge monitor that can be
applied to a variety of medium voltage
electrical equipment rated 4 kV to
38 kV. It is commonly applied to
motors, generators, switchgear, bus
duct, unit substations and cable
systems. The InsulGard will monitor
the quality of insulation while the
equipment is in service under normal
operating conditions. Through moni-
toring, it can ascertain the relative
condition of insulation, the deteriora-
tion of which is the leading cause of
electrical failures.
The InsulGard system consists of
sensors and a monitor. The monitor
can be used as a stand-alone unit, or
it can be wired so that it can remotely
upload data to your system or to Eaton
diagnostics personnel for analysis.
While the sensors vary according to
application, they are all designed
to detect partial dischargesthe
foundation of the InsulGard technol-
ogy and one of the best predictors
of insulation breakdown.
The term partial discharge is a
common name for small electrical
discharges (arcs) that typically occur
within or between insulation materi-
alsusually across a void in the
insulation. Partial discharge is also
referred to as corona or surface track-
ing. The visible evidence of corona
presents itself as white, powdery
residue, typically found on the end
windings of motors or generators.
Surface-tracking damage appears as
tree-like, jagged lines, typically found
on switchgear and bus ducts. Surface
tracking stems from a contaminated
insulation surface, often started by
corona. The small arcing activity on
the surface of the insulation contrib-
utes to further burning, resulting in
additional stress points that promote
further deterioration. Both corona
and surface tracking are the primary
causes of insulation breakdown,
which can lead to full discharges and
electrical failures. It is important to
note that traditional methods of
detecting corona and surface-tracking
damage require taking equipment
ofine. It also requires disassembling
the equipmenta costly procedure.
Moreover, corona and surface tracking
damage have to be severe to be
visible. The InsulGard system allows
you to detect partial discharge while
the electrical system is energized. It
does so by detecting and analyzing the
radio signal frequencies emitted by the
partial discharges. More specically,
the InsulGard focuses on the 1 MHz to
20 MHz bandwidth range where the
majority of partial-discharge activity
can be detected. InsulGard allows
predictive analysis and maintenance
as opposed to preventive analysis and
time-based maintenance.
The detection of partial discharge on
equipment can indicate if a problem
exists. Even more useful is information
that can correlate the signal intensity
(measured in milliwatts) associated
with partial discharges to various
states of insulation degradation on
similar equipment. Eatons Predictive
Diagnostics Group has studied
numerous cases of partial discharge
on rotating equipment and switchgear.
The knowledge base accumulated has
allowed Eaton to develop guidelines
and parameters to help one determine
the seriousness (failure-time windows)
of the partial-discharge activity that
the equipment may be exhibiting.
Because it is a continuous, online
monitoring system, it is easy to
monitor conditions over time.
Eatons InsulGard is a stand-alone
microprocessor-controlled continuous
partial discharge monitoring device
for a wide range of medium voltage
power equipment. It is designed
to provide an alarm based on PD
characteristics at an early stage of
insulation degradation. It measures
partial discharges from up to 15
different partial discharge sensors
and stores the information in internal
memory, alarming users if any set
points are exceeded. InsulGard can
work with constant 50/60 Hz frequency
powered equipment, as well as with
variable frequency applications.
Various PD sensor types can be used,
depending on the application.
InsulGard has three auxiliary inputs
for PD data correlation to additional
parameters. One of the inputs is
designated for temperature, where
the other two are commonly used for
load, voltage or humidity depending
upon the application. InsulGard has
several interfaces that allow for easy
implementation into any alarm or
SCADA system:
Three C-form dry relay contacts
provide Yellow or Red alarm indica-
tion, and the Device Status relay
indicates any device malfunction
420 mA optically isolated output
can be congured to represent
Partial Discharge Intensity (PDI)
or maximum discharge magnitude
to any SCADA system
RS-485 optically isolated interface
based on Modbus RTU protocol
allows for remote device congura-
tion and data download. InsulGard
can be networked with an existing
Modbus, allowing for up to 231
addressable devices
Ethernet port, Web page, FTP or
Modbus TCP
Communication protocol includes
Modbus, proprietary binary and ASCII
text options allowing a software
programmer to build InsulGard into
a high-level software program using
simple text type commands. InsulGard
is supplied with database software
that allows for automated communica-
tion to a device or several devices
for data acquisition and analysis.
The software allows for either direct
network or dialup connection to a
device by a regular telephone landline
or a cellular connection.
4.5-2
September 2010
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
122
InsulGard has 15 signal inputs
(Ch1Ch15) for partial discharge
measurement and a noise input
dedicated for noise suppression
(Ch16). All 16 inputs have identical
conditioning circuits (CC) providing
signal isolation, transient suppression
and high-pass ltering of the input
signals. The frequency band of the
InsulGard is from 1 MHz to 20 MHz.
InsulGard acquires PD data in the form
of three dimensional phase-resolved
pulse height distribution (PRPHD)
PD pulse count as a function of pulse
magnitude and 60(50) Hz phase. It has
24 (15) phase windows and a magni-
tude dynamic range of about 70 dB,
divided in 21 magnitude windows.
The data can be stored in the internal
device memory in the form of three-
dimensional PRPHD matrixes and/or
in the brief form of integral quantities
derived from these matrixes. Each
record is accompanied by three
additional correlation parameters.
Before each measurement, InsulGard
performs self-calibration and self-test.
If any problem is detected, the status
relay dry contacts will open and an
appropriate message will appear on
the InsulGard display. Loss of power
will be indicated in the same way by
opening status relay contacts.
InsulGard measures signals from
signal inputs sequentially multiplexing
them to a single metering channel.
Each pulse from each sensor is
validated by the allowed pulse width.
In the case of non-compliance,
InsulGard will not count the pulse.
After each measurement, data from
all active signal channels will be
compared to alarm thresholds. If any
of the Yellow threshold limits are
exceeded, the Warning LED will be
turned on and the Warning relay dry
contacts will close. In the case of a
Red level achieved, InsulGard will
trigger additional measurement and,
if conrmed, an Alarm LED will be
turned on and the Alarm relay dry
contacts will close. If Red alarm is
detected, full measurement data will
be stored in the memory.
PD measurements can be performed
on a time schedule (up to 50 per day)
or in specied time intervals (from
1 minute to 23 hours 59 minutes).
Four measurements per day are
recommended.
Between scheduled measurements,
the High Alarm feature is enabled.
All signal sensors are connected to
a summation unit and further to a
separate High Alarm channel.
InsulGard continuously searches for
an appearance of high magnitude
pulses and pulse series. Magnitude
threshold and repetition in series are
congurable. If ve events of pulse
series were detected between the
scheduled measurements, InsulGard
will trigger a full PD measurement,
and display an alarm, if any.
Full PD measurement by InsulGard
involves a measurement of statistical
Phase Resolved Partial Discharge
Distribution (PRPDD) for every active
channel. After each measurement
for every active channel, InsulGard
calculates PDI, Maximum PD magni-
tude, PD pulse repetition rate, and
trend parameters (rate of PD parameter
change). The calculated parameters
are compared to alarm set points
and alarm status is determined. All
calculated and alarm status parameters
are stored in the internal memory for
each measurement. Additionally, three
auxiliary parameters (temperature,
% of full load current and operating
voltage or humidity) are assigned to
the measurement data. PRPDD can,
optionally, be stored in the internal
memory. There are two modes of PD
data storage Brief and Full.
Fullduring this mode PRPDD
is stored in the memory with the
mentioned above parameters for
each active channel and every
measurement.
Briefin order to save a memory,
PRPDD can be stored in the memory
several times a month. An operator
should set a number of days and a
measurement number at the current
day for storing PRPDD. During the
remaining measurements, InsulGard
will store the brief version of PD data.
InsulGard has two Megabytes of
internal ash memory for data storage
allowing for its standalone operation.
When the memory is lled, the device
starts replacing the oldest data with
the latest data. The rate of the memory
consumption depends upon a number
of active channels, frequency of
measurements, and frequency of
PRPDD storage. As an example, if all
15 channels are active for measure-
ments four times a day and PRPDD
are stored twice a month, the device
holds 17 months of the latest PD data
in its internal memory. All stored data
and settings can be accessed from
the keypad, or remotely from a PC.
4.5-3
September 2010
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
123
Alarms
InsulGard has two congurable alarms,
Red and Yellow, that connect to two
C-form relays. There are two groups of
parameters that can generate an alarm.
One is if an alarm set point is exceeded
(Partial Discharge Intensity (PDI) and its
trend or PD pulse magnitude and its
trend). One of two, PDI or Magnitude,
can be congured for alarm at one
time. The same parameter is cong-
ured for 420 mA interface output
automatically. 420 mA output provides
a signal with the slope of 10% of Red
Alarm Threshold per 1mAmp. That
means that Red alarm threshold
corresponds to 14 mA output.
Alarm set points for PDI are repre-
sented in terms of mW. Magnitude is
represented in terms of mV.
Trend is set in terms of times per year
for both PDI and Magnitude. Alarm on
trend is enabled after a training period
of 1/3 of the trend-sliding window.
Yellow and Red alarms operate differ-
ently. In the case of a Yellow alarm, it
will appear on the corresponding relay
as received. In the case of a Red alarm,
InsulGard will initiate an additional
measurement at the time of alarm,
and only if conrmed, will indicate the
alarm by relay. If the Red alarm is not
conrmed, the status of the alarm will
be set per the last measurement. If at
any measurement the alarm status will
be reduced, InsulGard will indicate the
reduced alarm status with both an
alarm LED reading and relay.
Alarm relays can operate in two
modes (congurable). Relays lock
in an alarm status received at the
last measurements, until the next
measurement. Or a relay can operate
for a limited congurable time and
then open the contacts. At the next
measurement, if an alarm status is
detected, relays will hold the alarm
contacts closed for the same time.
Trend
InsulGard calculates trend of a
parameter enabled for alarm. Trend
is normalized to the value of the
parameter change in times per year.
Trend has two alarm thresholds,
Yellow and Red, connected to alarm
relays and also to the alarm status LED
at the front panel of the device. Trend
is calculated as a linear approximation
of data over specied time interval
(default is 18 weeks). This 18-week
time window is sliding over time while
device monitors partial discharges.
Continuous Watch Feature
Between the scheduled measurements
the Continuous Watch feature (High
Alarm) is initiated. At this time all
signal sensors are summarized and
connected to the separate High Alarm
channel. InsulGard is continuously
watching for the events of high
magnitude pulses (congurable)
and their series. If ve series of such
events are detected, InsulGard starts
full PD measurement and, in the case
of Red alarm conrmation, InsulGard
indicates this alarm and stores full PD
data in the internal device memory.
Schedule
PD measurements can be performed
at specied times during a day or
time interval basis (congurable).
The device is shipped with time
basis schedule enabled and set to
record measurements four times a
day. This is sufcient for all common
applications.
If necessary, InsulGard can be set to
measure up to 50 times per day at
scheduled times or in specic time
intervals varying from 1 minute to
23 hours 59 minutes.
4.5-4
September 2010
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Technical DataInsulGard
124
Table 4.5-1. Power Source Specications
Applications HV and MV equipment (motors including VFD), switchgears, generators, bus
ducts, cable terminations, transformers, est.)
Mounting options In NEMA 4X enclosure. On the panel. Door (Flash) mount
Installation category II
Pollution degree 2
Temperature range 40C to +70C (+85C without enclosure)
Relative humidity 0%RH90%RH
Power source 115V / 230 Vac 10%
60 / 50 Hz
Power consumption of device (VA max) 15 VA
Fuse inside InsulGard case: 20 mm, 250 Vac, time lag 5TS type by BEL Inc. For 115 Vac5ST200-R (200 mA)
For 230 Vac5ST125-R (125 mA)
Input fuse on the panel (panel mount option): 20 mm, 250 Vac, Fast fuse 5MF
type by BEL Inc. (A maximum output current from outlet for 115 Vac3A)
5MF 3 R (3 A)
Display Graphic dot display, two lines
Keypad Four arrows and four functional keys
LEDs (normal, warning (Alarm 1) or Alarm (Alarm 2) conditions, memory and
setting modes
Five LEDs
Approximate Size (Length x Width x Height) and Weight
Main unit 9.20 x 7.00 x 2.50 inches (23.4 x 17.8 x 6.4 cm), 4.2 lb (1.9 kg)
Door-mount option (main unit with sensor interface board) 9.20 x 7.00 x 4.00 inches (23.4 x 17.8 x 10.2 cm), 4.6 lb (2.1 kg)
Panel-mount option 14.80 x 12.90 x 4.00 inches (37.6 x 32.8 x 10.2 cm), 10.3 lb (4.7 kg)
Enclosure (NEMA 4X) mount option 17.20 x 15.40 x 8.80 inches (43.7 x 39.0 x 22.3 cm), 21.6 lb (9.8 kg)
PD Measurement Parameters
PD channels 15
Noise channel 1
Continuous watch (high PD activity) channel 1
Basic type of data Phase-resolved PD distribution
PD channel dynamic range 68 dB
Number of magnitude windows (3.23 dB each) 21
Number of phase windows (15 each) 24
Power frequency at a monitored equipment 320 Hz, 20400 Hz
Synchronization type Internal and external
Maximum measured pulse repetition rate 367,300 pulses/second at 60 Hz
306,000 pulses/second at 50 Hz
Calculated parameters for each PD channel Partial discharge intensity (PDI) or maximum pulse magnitude (Q
max
),
Pulse repetition rate (pps), Trend
Alarming parameters PDI, Q
max
, Trend
Data record types Full/Brief
Internal data memory allows for up to 1000 days data storage at
four measurements per day
2 MB
Self-test and self-calibration At powering up and before every measurement
Setup Congurable from keypad and PC
Allowed RG-58 coaxial cable length to PD sensors Up to 150 ft (46m)
Auxiliary Inputs
Input specied for temperature measurement calibrated for 100 ohm platinum
RTD sensor
1
Analog inputs specied for current, voltage or humidity measurement 2
USB Host For future use
Interfaces
C-form dry-type relays for device status, warning (Alarm 1) and alarm (Alarm 2)
PD levels (fully congurable)
3
120 Vac/ 5A
28 Vdc/ 5A
For other ratings refer to the relay specication
420 mA isolated interface represents highest PDI or max. magnitude
as % of the alarm (Alarm 2) threshold
Slope is 1 mA per 10%
RS-485 interface optically isolated (231 addresses) Communication Protocol: Modbus RTU, binary, text commands
Ethernet Modbus-TCP, Web page, FTP
USB PC connection
USB host For future use
4.5-5
September 2010
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Product SelectionInsulGard
125
General Notes
The three basic InsulGard packages
are Switchgear Applications,
Motor Applications and Generator
Applications. At the beginning of
each section to follow are the basic
components typically found in each
type of application.
Switchgear Applications
Switchgear Applications have three
typical components: InsulGard
Switchgear Package, Coupling
Capacitor Sensors and RFCT Sensors.
lnsulGard Systems for Switchgear
Applications are sold as packages.
Packages provide greater value.
Standard Equipment with the
lnsulGard Switchgear Package is
shown in Table 4.5-3.
Table 4.5-2. Standard Equipment
Table 4.5-3. InsulGard Switchgear PackagesOrder PD Sensors Separately
Table 4.5-4. Communication Options
Table 4.5-5. Auxiliary (Dynamic) Sensors
Note: In switchgear applications, humidity and temperature sensors are installed in the same
switchgear cubicle (embedded) with the InsulGard.
Description Quantity
InsulGard 1
Humidity sensor mounted as specied 1
Temperature mounted as specied 1
RS-485 communication port 1
InsulGard software CD 1
Set of instruction manuals 1
Description Catalog
Number
Door-mount InsulGard for mounting onto indoor cabinet door cut-out, includes:
RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol
Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports
Embedded temperature and humidity sensors
InsulGard software CD and one set of instruction manuals
PD-IG-S-E0
Back-panel-mount (no enclosure) for installing InsulGard into an existing enclosure,
includes:
Embedded temperature and humidity sensors
InsulGard software CD and set of instruction manuals
PD-IG-S-E1
InsulGard in NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes:
External temperature and humidity sensors (PD-SR-TS, PD-SR-HS)
PD-IG-S-E2
Description Catalog
Number
RS-485-to-USB converteronly required if using RS-485 port for extended length,
remote connection to PC USB port
PD-USB
Advanced RS-232/485 industrial Modem TD-36485HV
(installed on back panel except for door-mounted IG it must be mounted separately)
PD-MODEM
Description Catalog
Number
Auxiliary Sensors for InsulGard, BushingGard
External temperature sensor for InsulGard (TS)
Supplied with default cable L = 65 feet
PD-SR-TS
External humidity sensor for InsulGard (HS)
PD-SR-HS
Load sensor for InsulGard: includes Current Transformer (CT), rated 5A,
with ID = 0.50 inches
Connect to secondary winding of the motor (or generator) current transformer
Note: Differential current transformer cant be used
PD-SR-CT
Split (Flex)Core CT rated 500A. Supplied with preinstalled PD-SR-CT.
Should be installed on a motor power supply cable for load measurement
if the motor/generator current transformer cant be used
(Order separately if required)
PD-SR-CTF
4.5-6
September 2010
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
126
Table 4.5-6. Coupling Capacitors Sensors
Note: The number of cubicles will determine the number of coupling capacitors required for
the project. One set of three coupling capacitors is required for every three vertical structures.
The catalog numbered set includes mounting kits, boots, cables and the like.
Table 4.5-7. RFCT Sensor
The number of RFCTs required
is determined by what cables the
customer wants to protect (to protect
secondary cables leaving the switch-
gear, incoming feeder cables to the
main breaker/switch, etc.). There will
be one RFCT per cubicle to protect
the cabling (even if there are multiple
cables per phase).
The length of cable or sensitivity
zone of protection depends upon the
type of cable, the number of splices,
and the number of taps. PLIC Type
Cable is protected up to maximum
of 1500 ft. EPR (rubber composition)
distances are shorter with protection
up to a maximum of 300 ft.
In gures shown below, the lnsulGard
is protecting the six vertical section
switchgear layout with the two sets of
coupling capacitors and is protecting
the feeder cables via the RFCTs installed
on the power cable shield. An exploded
view of the RFCT is also shown.
Typical Installation of RFCT Sensor
Description Catalog
Number
InsulGard Partial Discharge Sensors
IPDS-Integrated partial discharge sensor
Set of three 5 kV, 80 pF coupling capacitors with mounting kit
Supplied with default RG58 cable L = 65 feet
PD-SR-IPDS-5
PD-SR-IPDS-7
PD-SR-IPDS-15
PD-SR-IPDS-27
PD-SR-IPDS-38
Description Catalog
Number
0.75-inch diameter RFCT,
default cable length 65 feet
PD-SR-RFCT-075
Motor Applications
Generally, the Motor Application
components list consists of just the
InsulGard Package itself. In some
applications, the customer may
want to monitor the cable feeding
the motor. In those cases, one will
need to add the line item for the
appropriate RFCT.
InsulGard Systems for Motor
lnsulGard Motor Package is shown
in Table 4.5-8.
InsulGard 1
NEMA 4X enclosure 1
Set of three coupling capacitors 1
Coupling capacitor mounting kit
(cabling, hardware,
boots, connectors)
1
RTD module (six inputs) 1
External mount humidity sensor
(65 ft cable pigtail included)
1
Temperature sensor
(65 ft cable pigtail included)
1
lnsulGard software CD 1
4.5-7
September 2010
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
127
Table 4.5-9. InsulGard Motor Packages
Note: In most motor applications, the humidity and temperature sensors will be external to the InsulGard Enclosure (typically eld mounted in
cable termination compartment) and shipped with a 65 foot coaxial pigtail. Mounting in the same cubicle as the lnsulGard is not typical for
motor applications. Also please indicate if CT input is customer furnished or must be supplied and what type it is/should be.
Table 4.5-12. RFCT Sensor
Description Catalog
Number
InsulGard Motor Kits
Stator RTD number 8
Motor voltage 15 kV
For motors with Stator RTD number 9 order additional PD-SR-RTD-6
One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-X), X = kV, choose 5, 7 or 17
One RTD-6 sensor board PD-SR-RTD-6
Load sensor CT (PD-SR-CT)
PD-IG-M-E2-A1
One RTD-6 sensor board (PD-SR-RTD-6)
External humidity sensor (PD-SR-HS)
Cable for spare stator RTD for temp sensor input
PD-IG-M-E2-A2
Split core CT (PD-SR-CTF)
PD-IG-M-E2-A2-CTF
Description Catalog
Number
RS-485-to-USB converteronly required if using RS-485 port for extended length, remote connection to PC USB port PD-USB
Advanced RS-232/485 industrial Modem TD-36485HV
PD-MODEM
Description Catalog
Number
PD-SR-TS
PD-SR-HS
Load sensor for InsulGard: includes current transformer (CT), rated 5A, with ID = 0.50-inches
Note: Differential current transformer can't be used
PD-SR-CT
Split (ex)core CT rated 500A. Supplied with preinstalled PD-SR-CT.
Should be installed on a motor power supply cable for load measurement if the motor/generator current transformer can't be used
PD-SR-CTF
Description Catalog
Number
0.75-Inch diameter RFCT, default cable length 65 feet PD-SR-RFCT-075
4.5-8
September 2010
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
128
The length of cable or sensitivity
zone of protection depends upon the
type of cable, the number of splices,
and the number of taps. PLIC Type
Cable is protected up to maximum
of 1500 ft. EPR (rubber composition)
distances are shorter with protection
up to a maximum of 300 ft.
Generator Applications
Typically, the Generator Package
components list consists of the
InsulGard Package and occasionally
additional sets of coupling capacitors.
For part numbers of additional sets
of coupling capacitors, please see
Switchgear Applications Section on
Page 4.5-5.
lnsulGard Systems for Generator
lnsulGard Generator Package is
shown in Table 4.5-13.
Table 4.5-14. Generator Packages
InsulGard 1
NEMA 4X enclosure 1
Set of three coupling capacitors 1
Coupling capacitor mounting kit
(cabling, hardware,
boots, connectors)
1
RTD module (six inputs) 2
External mount humidity sensor (
65 cable pigtail included)
1
Temperature sensor
(65 cable pigtail included)
1
lnsulGard software CD 1
Description Catalog
Number
InsulGard Generator Kits (Air-Cooled)Voltage 27 kV
PD-IG-M-E2-A1
One RTD-6 sensor board (PD-SR-RTD-6)
PD-IG-M-E2-A2
InsulGard Generator Kits (Air-Cooled)Voltage 27 kV
One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-27)
Two RTD-6 sensor boards (PD-SR-RTD-6)
Auxiliary sensors set (PD-SR-A1)
PD-IG-GV-E2-A1
One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-27)
Auxiliary sensors set A2 (PD-SR-A2)
PD-IG-GV-E2-A2
InsulGard Generator Kit (Hydrogen-Cooled)Voltage 16 kV
InsulGard inside NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes:
PD-IG-HC-E2-A3
4.5-9
September 2010
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
129
Note: In most generator applications, the humidity and temperature sensors will be external to the InsulGard enclosure {typically eld
mounted in cable termination compartment} and shipped with a 65-foot coaxial pigtail. Mounting in the same cubicle as the lnsulGard is not
typical for generator applications. Also, please indicate if CT input is customer furnished or must be supplied and what type it is/should be.
Description Catalog
Number
RS-485-to-USB converteronly required if using RS485 port for extended length, remote connection to PC USB port PD-USB
Advanced RS232/485 industrial Modem TD-36485HV
PD-MODEM
Description Catalog
Number
PD-SR-TS
PD-SR-HS
Load sensor for InsulGard: includes current transformer (CT), rated 5A, with ID = 0.50-inches
Note: Differential current transformer cant be used
PD-SR-CT
Split (Flex) - Core CT rated 500A. Supplied with preinstalled PD-SR-CT.
Should be installed on a motor power supply cable for Load measurement if the
motor/generator current transformer cant be used
PD-SR-CTF
4.5-10
September 2010
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 04
Connection DiagramInsulGard
130
Connection Wiring Diagram
Figure 4.5-1. Typical Connection Diagram
Notes
1. Modem with Power Module are installed if ordered.
2. On motors, an unused RTD can be used as the temperature
sensor (wire colors in brackets relate only to TS sensor).
3. In switchgears current sensor (CT) is not used, and if
panel is installed without an enclosure, the temperature
(TS) and humidity (HS) sensors can be installed directly
on the panel. Use a left tting (hub) on the enclosure
for power supply cable and for the cables to the relays
(Alarm1&2, R3) and use a right hub for all signal cables.
4. Fuses: Miniature Fuses 5 x 20, 250 Vac, 195 Series by
Wickmann (DistributorDigiKey.com).
5. Fuse inside InsulGard for 120V application200 mA
(DigiKey Part NO: WK5034-ND), for 230 Vac application
80mA (DigiKey Part NO: WK5026-ND). Fuse on a panel:
1.0A (DigiKey Part NO: WK5048-ND).
6. Outlet is not installed for 230 Vac application.
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r

t
o

I
n
s
u
l
G
a
r
d
C
o
a
x

c
a
b
l
e
s

f
r
o
m

P
D

S
e
n
s
o
r
s

#
#
1
-
1
6

Ch1
Ch2
Ch4
Ch3
Ch5
Ch6
Ch8
Ch7
Ch9
Ch10
Ch12
Ch11
Ch13
Ch14
Ch16
(Noise)
Ch15
T
S
e
n
s
o
r

I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

B
o
a
r
d
RTD
CT
H%
S
+5
S
Ref
5
S1
S2
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
4
3
2
1
X1
X2
H% Ref
Sw
PC cable
to temporary
brought
laptop
I
n
s
u
l
G
a
r
d

C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r

t
o

I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

B
o
a
r
d
Ground Screw
on back cover
A
l
a
r
m
S
t
a
t
u
s
W
a
r
n
i
n
g
26
25
30
28
29
31
27
LINE
NEUTRAL
GROUND
+
4
-
2
0

m
A
A
l
a
r
m

2
G
L
N
P
o
w
e
r
-
+
5
G
B
A
R
S
-
4
8
5
R
3
3
1
2
4
7
5
6
8
11
9
10
12
15
13
14
16
19
17
18
20
23
21
22
24
WHITE
R
E
D
W
H
I
T
E
1
1
5

V
A
C
GREEN
ENCLOSURE,
PANEL
GROUND
DIN RAIL
GROUND
GREEN
Local
Port
RS485
3
1
2
RED
RJ-11
Phone
Cable
Modem TD-34
N
L
1
2
3
4
A
L
L

B
L
A
C
K
A L L
B L U E
GREEN
InsulGard Panel Wiring Diagram
IWD115-M
RTD-WHITE 1
RTD-BLACK 2
RTD-RED 3
LOAD-SIG-RED 4
LOAD-GND-BLACK 5
H%(GND)-WHITE 6
H%(+5V)-RED 7
H%(SIG)-BLACK 8
4-20mA- (+) 9
4-20mA- (-) 10
RS485-A(+) 11
RS485-B(-) 12
RS485-ISOGND 13
ALARM - NC 14
ALARM - COM 15
ALARM - NO 16
WARNING-NC 17
WARNING-COM 18
WARNING-N0 19
STATUS-NC 20
STATUS-COM 21
STATUS-NO 22
NOT/USED 23
NOT/USED 24 D
I
N
-
R
a
i
l

T
e
r
m
i
n
a
l

S
t
r
i
p
Cables
from:
RTD
Temperature
Sensor
CT-Load
sensor
Humidity
sensor
GR
L
N
W
H
I
T
E
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
FUSES:
On the Panel: Fast Acting 3.0A, 250 Vac, 5 x 20 mm, 191 Series by Wickman (DigiKey Part No: WK4714-ND).
R
E
D
B
L
A
C
K
A
l
a
r
m

1
Inside InsulGard for 115 Vac Application: Time-Lag 80 mA, 250 Vac, 5 x 20 mm, 195 Series by Wickmann (DigiKey.com, Part No: WK5026-ND)
G
R
E
E
N


5.0-A

September 2011

Medium Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

05

001

Medium Voltage Switchgear

Table 5.0-A. Medium Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide

Optional front access only designs available.

Available as an option.

CAG
Tab
Tab
Title
Voltage
Range
Switching
Device
Drawout
or Fixed
Front/Rear
Accessible
Compartmentalized Insulated
Bus
ANSI
Standards
Breaker Bus Cable
Area
VTs &
CPTs
5

VacClad-W Medium Voltage
Drawout Vacuum Breakers
4.7638 kV Vacuum
breaker
Drawout Front & rear
required

C37.20.2

6

Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
MEF Front-Access Medium
Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers
4.7615 kV Front only
required

C37.20.2 &
C37.20.3

7.1

MEB Medium Voltage Drawout
Vacuum Breakers
Front & rear
required

C37.20.3

7.2

MSB Medium Voltage Switch- and
Fixed-Mounted Vacuum Breakers
Switch &
vacuum
breaker
Fixed

8

MVS Medium Voltage
Load Interrupter Fusible Switch
4.7638 kV Fusible
switches

VacClad-W Metal-Clad Switchgear

MVS Load Interrupter Switchgear
MEB Metal-Enclosed Switchgear MSB Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
MEF Switchgear (515 kV)
5.0-B



CA08104001E
September 2011

Medium Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

05

002



September 2011

Contents
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage

5.0-1

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

05

001

M
e
t
a
l
-
C
l
a
d

S
w
i
t
c
h
g
e
a
r
V
a
c
C
l
a
d
-
W
M
e
d
i
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
D
r
a
w
o
u
t

V
a
c
u
u
m

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

Metal-Clad Vacuum Breaker SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage


5.1-1

5 and 15 kV Switchgear36.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1-4

5 kV Switchgear26.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1-8

27 kV Switchgear36.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1-9

38 kV Switchgear42.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1-10

Arc-Resistant Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2-1

Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring for Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3-1

Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4-1

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4-1

Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4-13

Standard Metal-Clad Switchgear Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4-15

Arc-Resistant Switchgear Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4-16

Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4-17

Control Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4-22

Control Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4-24

RelaysDevice Numbers, Type and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4-26

Main-Tie-Main Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4-29

Layout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5-1

5 and 15 kV (Standard Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5-1

27 kV (Standard Metal-Clad). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5-11

38 kV (Standard Metal-Clad). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5-15

5 and 15 kV (Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5-19

27 kV (Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5-30

38 kV (Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5-34

Arc Exhaust Chamber (Plenum) Room Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5-38
Transfer SwitchesMedium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Tab 12
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010

Section 16346 Sections 26 13 26
VacClad-W Metal-Clad Switchgear
5.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

05

002



5.1-1

September 2011

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

05


General Description

003


Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad
switchgear with Type VCP-W vacuum
breakers provides centralized control
and protection of medium voltage
power equipment and circuits in
industrial, commercial and utility
installations involving generators,
motors, feeder circuits, and transmis-
sion and distribution lines.
VacClad-W switchgear is available in
maximum voltage ratings from 4.76 kV
through 38 kV, and interrupting ratings
as shown below. VacClad-W offers a
total design concept of cell, breaker
and auxiliary equipment, which can be
assembled in various combinations to
satisfy user application requirements.
Two-high breaker arrangements
are standard up to 15 kV. One-high
arrangements can be furnished
when required.

Ratings

Maximum Voltages:

4.76 kV, 8.25 kV, 15 kV, 27 kV, 38 kV

Interrupting Ratings:

4.76 kV: Up to 63 kA

Continuous CurrentCircuit Breakers:

1200A, 2000A, 3000A (5 and 15 kV)
4000A Forced cooled (5 and 15 kV)
1200A, 2000A, (27 kV)
600A, 1200A, 1600A, 2000A,
2500A (38 kV)
3000A Forced cooled (38 kV)

Continuous CurrentMain Bus:

1200A, 2000A, 3000A (5 and 15 kV)
4000A (5 and 15 kV)
1200A, 2500A (27 kV)

1200A, 2000A, 2500A, 3000A (38 kV)

Note:

Continuous currents above 4000A,
contact Eaton.

Certications

UL and CSA listings are available

Typical Indoor Assembly with a Breaker Withdrawn on Rails
VCP-W Breaker Element

Advantages

Eatons Electrical Sector has been
manufacturing metal-clad switchgear
for over 50 years, and vacuum circuit
breakers for over 30 years. Tens of
thousands of Eaton vacuum

circuit
breakers, used in a wide variety of

applications, have been setting industry
performance standards for years.
With reliability as a fundamental goal,
Eaton engineers have simplied the
VacClad-W switchgear design to mini-
mize problems and gain trouble-free
performance. Special attention was

Cut-Away View of Vacuum Interrupter
(Enlarged to Show Detail)

given to material quality and maximum
possible use was made of components
proven over the years in Eaton
switchgear.
Maintenance requirements are
minimized by the use of enclosed
long-life vacuum interrupters. When
maintenance or inspection is required,
the component arrangements and
drawers allow easy access. VacClad-
Ws light weight simplies handling
and relocation of the breakers.
Fixed
Stem
Contacts
Bellows
Shield
Movable
Stem
Support Gasket Only
(Seal Formed by Bellows)
5.1-2



CA08104001E
September 2011

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

05


General Description

004

Standards

Eatons VacClad-W switchgear meets
or exceeds ANSI/ IEEE C37.20.2 and
NEMA

SG-5 as they apply to metal-
clad switchgear. The assemblies also
conform to Canadian standard CSA

-
C22.2 No. 31-04, and EEMAC G8-3.2.
Type VCP-W vacuum circuit breakers
meet or exceed all ANSI and IEEE
standards applicable to AC high
voltage circuit breakers rated on
symmetrical current basis.

Seismic Qualication

Refer to

Tab 1

for information on
seismic qualication for this and
other Eaton products.

Compartmentalization

Medium voltage metal-clad switchgear
equipment conforming to C37.20.2 is
a compartmentalized design, wherein
primary conductors are fully insulated
for the rated maximum voltage of the
assembly, and all major primary circuit
components are isolated from each
other by grounded metal barriers.
This type of construction minimizes
the likelihood of arcing faults within
the equipment and propagation of
fault between the compartments
containing major primary circuits.
The C37.20.2 metal-clad switchgear
equipment is designed to withstand
the effects of short-circuit current in
a bolted fault occurring immediately
downstream from the load terminals
of the switchgear. The bolted fault
capability is veried by short-time and
momentary short-circuit withstand
current testing on complete switchgear,
as well as by fault making (close and
latch) testing on the switching devices
as shown in

Figure 5.1-1

.

Figure 5.1-1. Metal-Clad Switchgear Short-
Circuit and Momentary Withstand Tests

The short-time current withstand
tests demonstrate electrical adequacy
of busses and connections against
physical damage while carrying the
short-circuit current for a given duration.
The momentary current withstand tests
demonstrate the mechanical adequacy
of the structure, busses and connec-
tions to withstand electro-magnetic
forces with no breakage of insulation.
It should be noted that design testing
of standard metal-clad switchgear does
not involve any internal arcing faults.

FeaturesVacuum Circuit Breaker

High power laboratory tests prove
VCP-W breakers are capable of 50 to
200 full fault current interruptions

V-Flex (stiff-exible) current transfer
from the vacuum interrupter
moving stem to the breaker primary
disconnecting contact is a non-
sliding/non-rolling design, which
eliminates maintenance required
with the sliding/rolling type transfer
arrangements. The V-Flex system
provides excellent electrical and
thermal transfer, and long vacuum
interrupter life.

Easy inspection and accessibility is
afforded by a front-mounted stored
energy operating mechanism. The
same basic mechanism is used on
all ratings, which requires a minimum
investment in spare parts

All VCP-W circuit breakers are hori-
zontal drawout design, which pro-
vides connect, test and disconnect
position. A latch secures the breaker
in the connected and disconnected/
test position. 5/15/27 kV breakers
can be fully withdrawn on extension
rails for inspection and maintenance
without the need for a separate lift-
ing device. 38 kV circuit breaker is
designed to roll directly on the oor

All breaker functions, indicators
and controls are grouped on an
easily accessible panel on front of
the breaker

Trip-free interlocks prevent moving
a closed circuit breaker into or out
of the connected position

Breaker cannot be electrically or
mechanically closed when in the
intermediate position

Closing springs automatically
discharge before moving the circuit
breaker into or out of the enclosure

Breaker frame remains grounded
during levering and in the
connected position

Coding plates are provided to ensure
only correct breaker rating can be
installed in cell

Quality Assurance Certicate is
included with each circuit breaker

Easy-to-see contact erosion indicator
is provided as standard on the
vacuum interrupter moving stem.
Only periodic visual inspection is
required to verify that the contacts
have not worn out

A simple visual means, T-cutout, is
provided to verify by simple visual
inspection that the loading springs
are applying proper pressure to the
contacts when the breaker is closed

Corona-free design increases circuit
breaker reliability and in-service life
by maintaining insulation integrity

Vacuum interrupters with copper-
chrome contacts provide superior
dielectric strength and very low
chop current

High-strength, high-impact, track-
resistant glass polyester on 5/15 kV
and cycloaliphatic epoxy on 27/38 kV
is used for primary insulation and
support as standard
Main Bus
BKR
Shorting Bar
(Bolted Fault)
3-Phase Test
Source
(Low Voltage)


5.1-3

September 2011

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

05


General Description

005

Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers
Type VCP-W Circuit BreakerFeatures
Fixed
Stem
Contacts
Bellows
Shield
Movable
Stem
Support Gasket Only
(Seal Formed by Bellows)
Cut-away View of Vacuum Interrupter
(Enlarged to Show Detail)
Breaker Main Contacts
Open/Closed Status
Vacuum Interrupter
Pole Unit
Front-Accessible Stored
Energy Mechanism
Breaker Operations
Counter
Manual Push-to-Close
& Open Pushbuttons
Manual Spring
Charging Port
Spring Charged/
Discharged Status
Type VCP-W 5/15 kV Circuit Breaker
Glass Polyester
Insulator
Epoxy
Insulator
Primary
Disconnect
Primary
Disconnect
Breaker Wheel
Pole Unit
Vacuum
Interrupter
Located
Inside this
Molded
Epoxy
Housing
Insulation
Shrouds
Alignment
Rollers
Type VCP-W 38 kV Circuit
BreakerFront View
BreakerSide View
BreakerRear View
Front-Accessible
Stored Energy
Mechanism
Behind this
Panel
Code Plates
Secondary Disconnect
Control Panel
(Breaker
Functions and
Indicators)
V-Flex System Contact Erosion Indicator
T-Cutout
5.1-4



CA08104001E
September 2011

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

05

Drawout Vacuum Breakers5 & 15 kV (36.00-Inch Wide)

General DescriptionSwitchgear

006

FeaturesSwitchgear
Assembly

VacClad is a Metal-Clad Design

Eatons VacClad switchgear is an inte-
grated assembly of drawout vacuum
circuit breakers, bus and control
devices coordinated electrically and
mechanically for medium voltage
circuit protection and control. The
metal-clad integrity provides maximum
circuit separation and safety.

All circuit breakers are equipped
with self-aligning and self-coupling
primary and secondary disconnect-
ing devices, and arranged with
a mechanism for moving it
physically between connected
and disconnected positions

All major primary components, such
as circuit breaker, voltage trans-
former, control power transformer,
and buses are completely enclosed
and grounded by metal barriers.
A metal barrier in front of the
circuit breaker and auxiliary drawer
ensures that, when in the connected
position, no live parts are exposed
by opening the compartment door

Automatic shutters cover primary
circuit elements when the remov-
able element is in the disconnected,
test or removed position

All primary bus conductors and
connections are insulated with
track-resistant uidized bed epoxy
coating for rated maximum voltage
of the assembly

Mechanical interlocks are provided
to maintain a proper and safe
operating sequence

Instruments, meters, relays, second-
ary control devices and their wiring
are isolated, where necessary, by
grounded metal barriers from all
primary circuit elements

VacClad is Corona Free

Corona emissions within the standard
VacClad switchgear assemblies have
been eliminated or reduced to very
low levels by special fabrication and
assembly techniques, such as round-
ing and bufng of all sharp copper
edges at the joints, employing star
washers for bolting metal barriers,
and using specially crafted standoff
insulators for primary bus supports.
By making switchgear assemblies
corona-free, Eaton has made its
standard switchgear more reliable.

Circuit Breaker Compartment

The mechanism for levering the
breaker is a unique cell mounted
design. It incorporates all the safety
interlocks to render the breaker
mechanically and electrically trip-
free during the levering procedure

A silver-plated copper ground
bus provided on the levering pan
assembly is engaged by a spring
loaded ground contact on the circuit
breaker to ensure that the circuit
breaker remains grounded through-
out its travel

Type VCP-W Metal-Clad Switchgear Assembly (5/15 kV Shown)

Front View
Circuit Breaker Compartment Shown with Shutters Opened for Illustration
MOC & TOC
Switch (Optional)
Under this Cover
Ground Bus
Levering Screw
Assembly
Code Plates
Automatic Steel Shutters
Secondary
Disconnect
Cell Studs
Front-Accessible CTs
Primary
Insulating Tubes


5.1-5

September 2011

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

05



007

(Continued)

Each circuit breaker compartment
is provided with steel shutters
(breaker driven) that automatically
rotate into position to cover the
insulating tubes and stationary cell
studs to prevent accidental contact
with live primary voltage, when
the breaker is withdrawn from the
connected position

Current transformers installed
over the primary insulating tubes,
located behind the steel shutters,
are front accessible. Up to four
standard accuracy current trans-
formers can be installed per phase.
Front accessibility permits adding
or changing the transformers when
the unit is de-energized without
breaking high voltage connections
and primary insulation

Code plates ensure that only correct
breaker rating can be installed in cell

Auxiliary Compartments

5/15 kV VacClad design permits up to
four auxiliary drawers in one vertical
unit (only two shown in the photo).
These drawers can be used for installing
voltage or control power transformers,
or primary fuses. Each drawer can also
be congured for use as a battery tray.

Each auxiliary drawer is a horizontal
drawout design that can be fully
withdrawn on extension rails similar
to the breaker, thus allowing front
access to auxiliary equipment
to permit easy testing and fuse
replacement

A safety shutter (operated by
the drawer) is included in each
auxiliary drawer compartment.
It automatically operates when
the auxiliary drawer is withdrawn
to protect workmen from accidental
contact with the stationary primary
contacts

Each auxiliary drawer can accom-
modate two voltage transformers,
connected line-to-line (open delta);
three voltage transformers, con-
nected line-to-ground; or single-
phase control power transformer up
to 15 kVA, 15 kV with their associated
primary fuses. Three-phase control
power transformer, or single-phase
transformers larger than 15 kVA
can be xed mounted within the
structure, with their primary fuses
installed in the auxiliary drawer

Control power transformer drawer
is mechanically interlocked with
the transformer secondary main
breaker that requires the main
breaker to be opened, so that
the primary circuit is disconnected
only under no-load when the drawer
is withdrawn

Grounding straps are provided
in each drawer to automatically
ground and discharge primary fuses
when the drawer is withdrawn


Drawout Auxiliaries
VT Drawer Shown Fully Withdrawn on Rails CPT Drawer Shown Fully Withdrawn on Rails
VT/CPT Compartment with VT/CPT Drawer RemovedInside View
VT Drawer
VT Secondary Fuses
CTP Drawer
CPT Secondary Breaker/
Drawer Interlock
CPT Secondary
Main Breaker
Extension Rail
2 or 3 VTs
VT Primary
Fuses
Extension
Rail
CPT Primary
Fuse
Extension
Rail
Primary
Taps
Secondary
Terminals
CPT, Single-Phase
up to 15 kVA
Primary Fuse
Grounding Straps
(Attached to
Cell Frame)
Glass Polyester
Shutter Barrier
Space Heater
(Optional for Indoor)
Secondary
Disconnect
Block
Drawer to Cell Frame
Ground Contact
5.1-6



CA08104001E
September 2011

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 05
008
Rear Compartments
Rear of each structure is segregated
into main bus and cable compart-
ments by grounded metal barriers,
as required for a given application.
Access to main bus and power cable
connections is provided from the rear
through removable bolted covers or
optional rear hinged doors. Cable
trough (chimney) is provided to segre-
gate upper and lower compartment
power cables as required.
All primary buses (main bus and
line and load runbacks) are 100%
conductivity copper, and insulated
for rated maximum voltage of the
assembly by ame retardant, track-
resistant uidized epoxy coating.
The bolted bus joints are silver- or
optionally tin-plated for positive
contact and low resistance, with
each joint insulated with easily
installed boots. Bus supports
between the adjacent units are
made of high-impact, high-strength,
track-resistant glass polyester at 5
and 15 kV, and cycloaliphatic epoxy
at 27 and 38 kV
Adequate space is available for
cable termination, bus duct connec-
tion, installation of zero sequence
current transformers, and surge
arresters. In two-high arrangement,
power cables for each circuit are
separated by metal barriers
A bare copper ground bus is pro-
vided in the rear of each structure,
which extend the entire length of
the switchgear
All control wiring is isolated
from primary circuit elements by
grounded metal-conduit or braided
metal jacket, with the exception of
short lengths of wire such as at
instrument transformer terminals
Rear View
Main Bus Details
Breaker Shown in the Connected Position
Breaker Shown in the Test/
Disconnected Position
Breaker Shown in the Fully
Withdrawn Position
Copper Bus, Insulated with
Fluidized Epoxy Coating
Cable Lugs (stress
cones not shown)
Customers
Power Cables
Metal Barrier Between
Upper and Lower
Compartment
Cable Barrier
(Chimney)
Pre-formed Insulating Boots
Around Bus Joints
Surge Arresters
(Optional)
Main Bus Support
Between Each
Adjacent Unit
Copper Bus,
Silver or
(Optional)
Tin Plated
Fluidized
Epoxy
Coating
5.1-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
009
Roll-on-the-Floor Breaker Option
Roll-on-the-Floor Switchgear Compartment
An optional direct roll-in breaker
designed for use in upper and lower
compartment of 5/15 kV indoor and
outdoor walk-in aisle switchgear is
available for all 5/15 kV VCP-W, VCP-
WC and VCP-WG circuit breakers.
Breaker is tted with special wheel kit,
and compartment interface is modied
to allow circuit breaker to be rolled
directly from the oor into the switch-
gear compartment, or from switchgear
compartment onto the oor without
a need for external lifting device
or dolly. The circuit breaker can be
supplied with all four xed wheels or
can be supplied with two swivel-type
wheels on the front and two xed
wheels on the rear. In 2-high
construction, the roll-on-the-oor
breaker option is available for breakers
in upper or lower compartments, how-
ever, removal of upper breaker
requires external lifter and lift pan,
which are optional accessories.
When using a 1200 or 2000A circuit
breaker in the lower compartment, the
compartment above the breaker can
be left blank or used of auxiliaries,
such as VTs or single-phase CPT, or
primary fuses for three-phase or larger
than 15 kVA single-phase CPTs. When
using 3000A circuit breaker in the
lower compartment, the compartment
above the breaker is left blank
for ventilation. The design is rated for
application in Seismic Zone 4 environ-
ment. It can also be supplied with
UL or CSA label for certain ratings.
Contact Eaton for ratings available
with UL/CSA label. The overall
dimensions of the 5/15 kV indoor and
outdoor walk-in aisle structures with
the roll-on-the-oor breaker option are
the same as the standard structures
that use standard non roll-on-the-oor
circuit breakers.
VCP-W Direct Roll-in Breaker with
Fixed Wheels
VCP-W Direct Roll-in Breaker with
Swivel Wheels on Front
5.1-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Drawout Vacuum Breakers5 kV (26.00-Inch Wide)
General Description
010
26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide
5 kV 250 MVA Switchgear
Fully Withdrawn Breaker
Automatic Shutters
Fused PT Drawer
This narrow width VacClad-W MV
Metal-Clad switchgear was designed
for use in instances where oor space
requirements would not allow the
industry standard 36.00-inch (914.4
mm) wide switchgear. Typical applica-
tions include not only new construc-
tion but also replacement switchgear
for installations previously equipped
with 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide air-
break devices. This line of switchgear
has also been used where 5 kV,
1200A, 250 MVA applications are
commonplace, such as generator
and control applications.
Ratings
The 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide
switchgear line is designed for use
with Eatons Type VCPW-ND Narrow
Design vacuum circuit breakers rated
4.76 kV, 60 kV BIL, 250 MVA, 1200A
maximum, with rated main bus of
1200 or 2000A. For installations requir-
ing 2000A main breakers with 1200A
feeders, lineups can be built with
standard 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide
main breaker cubicles and 26.00-inch
(660.4 mm) wide feeders.
Congurations
26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Standard Model
The 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide design
is exible. Available congurations
include breaker over breaker, one or two
auxiliary drawers over breaker, breaker
over one or two auxiliary drawers, or
up to four auxiliary drawers in one
vertical section. The standard height
and depth are 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm)
and 96.25-inch (2444.8 mm) respectively.
A breaker over auxiliary, or auxiliary
over breaker combination can be
supplied in reduced depth of 86.25-inch
(2190.8 mm). The depth of breaker
over breaker combination can also
be reduced to 86.25-inch (2190.8 mm)
if power cables for top breaker enter
from the top and the cables for bottom
breaker enter from the bottom.
The main bus location and connections
in the standard 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm)
high 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide design
are 100% compatible with standard
95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) high 36.00-inch
(914.4 mm) wide vertical sections. As a
result, additions to existing Eaton 5 kV,
250 MVA 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide
VCP-W installations can be simply and
rapidly performed without costly system
modications and transition sections.
Refer to Pages 5.5-7 and 5.5-8 for
available congurations, dimensions
and weights.
26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Low
Prole Model
In addition to the oor space saving
offered by the standard 26.00-inch
(660.4 mm) wide model, a further
saving in the height and depth of the
switchgear is also available. Where
height and depths are an issue, such as
an outdoor powerhouse or in a mobile
power container, the standard 95.00-
inch (2413.0 mm) high unit can be
reduced to an 80.00-inch high (2032.0
mm), 72.00-inch (1828.9 mm) deep low
prole model. Main bus rating avail-
able in the 80.00-inch (2032.0 mm) high
x 72.00-inch (1828.9 mm) deep low
prole model is limited to 1200A
maximum. It is not compatible in size
or location with standard 26.00-inch
(660.4 mm) wide or 36.00-inch (914.4
mm) wide, 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm)
high VCP-W units.
The low prole model is designed to
house breaker over auxiliary or auxil-
iary over breaker, or auxiliary over
auxiliary. In order to provide maxi-
mum vertical space for power cable
terminations, auxiliary over breaker
conguration should be used for
customers top entrance cables, and
breaker over auxiliary conguration
should be used for customers bottom
entrance cables. Auxiliary compart-
ments are designed to accommodate
one or two auxiliary drawers. That is,
up to four auxiliary drawers can be
installed in an auxiliary over auxiliary
conguration. A set of two line-to-line
or three line-to-ground connected
voltage transformers, or a single-phase
control power transformer up to 15 kVA
can be installed in each auxiliary
drawer. Because of the reduced depth,
control devices cannot be located
on breaker compartment door. All
control devices should be located
on the auxiliary compartment doors.
Refer to Pages 5.5-9 for available
congurations, dimensions and weights.
For all 26.00-inch (660.4 mm)
wide congurations, multifunction
microprocessor-based relays and
meters, such as Eatons Digitrip
3000
and IQ meters are recommended for
reduced panel space.
5.1-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
General Description
011
27 kV Metal-Clad Switchgear
Eatons 27 kV nominal metal-clad
switchgear is used for applications at
system voltages higher than 15 kV, up
to and including 27 kV. It is designed
for use with Type VCP-W, horizontal
drawout vacuum circuit breakers.
Ratings
Maximum rated voltage: 27 kV rms
Note: Eaton tested to 28.5 kV.
BIL withstand: 125 kV peak
Maximum symmetrical interrupting:
16 kA, 22 kA, 25 kA, 40 kA rms
Continuous current:
Circuit breakers1200A, 2000A
Switchgear main bus
One-high design: 1200A, 2000A
Two-high design: 1200A, 2000A,
2500A, 2700A
Features and Congurations
27 kV metal-clad switchgear design
is an extension of Eatons 5 and 15 kV
VacClad design. It has same footprint
and overall space envelop, and it
incorporates all features and
advantages of the 5 and 15 kV VacClad
design, with the exception of some
modications required for 27 kV
application.
Uses horizontal drawout type
VCP-W 125 kV BIL rated vacuum
circuit breakers
A cycloaliphatic epoxy insulation
material is used throughout the
switchgear housings and the circuit
breakers for phase-to-ground and
phase-to-phase primary bus sup-
ports. For decades, cycloaliphatic
epoxy insulation has demonstrated
its outstanding electrical and
mechanical characteristics in harsh
outdoor applications. The use of this
insulation system with the 27 kV
design ensures a comfortable margin
of safety at higher voltages
All primary bus conductors are insu-
lated for full 28.5 kV by uidized epoxy
coating. All buses are fabricated from
100% conductivity copper. Bus joints
are silver- or tin-plated as required, and
covered with pre-formed insulating
boots to maintain metal-clad integrity
Available congurations include:
auxiliary over breaker, and auxiliary
over auxiliary. Each auxiliary or breaker
requires one-half vertical space
Each auxiliary drawer can accommo-
date two voltage transformers con-
nected line-to-line, or three voltage
transformers connected line-to-
ground, which can be withdrawn for
easy maintenance and replacement
of primary fuses
When required by an application,
a single-phase control power trans-
former up to 37.5 kVA, or a three-phase
control power transformer up to
75 kVA can be xed mounted in the
front bottom compartment, with the
primary fuses in an auxiliary drawer
located in the upper compartment.
When the control power transformer is
located remotely from the switchgear,
but fed through primary fuses located
in the switchgear, the fuses are
installed in an auxiliary drawer. The
primary fuse drawer is key interlocked
with the control power transformer
secondary main breaker to ensure
that it is opened rst, and transformer
load is disconnected, before the fuse
drawer can be withdrawn
27 kV metal-clad switchgear is available
in general purpose, ventilated, indoor
or outdoor aisleless type enclosure
Two-high 27 kV arrangements with
breaker-over-breaker are available in
indoor type enclosure
Roll-on-the-oor congurations are
available
27 kV VCP-W Circuit BreakerSide View
27 kV SwitchgearFront View
27 kV SwitchgearRear View
Epoxy
Insulator
Primary
Disconnect
Draw-out
Auxiliary Drawer
Main Bus
Barrier
Surge Arresters
Epoxy Bus
Supports
Fluidized Epoxy Coated Cu Bus
Split Rear
Covers
5.1-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
General Description
012
38 kV Metal-Clad Switchgear
Eatons VacClad switchgear family is
designed for use in applications with
distribution voltages up to 38 kV maxi-
mum. Typical applications include not
only new construction but also replace-
ment for older air-break, minimum oil
or SF6 switchgear. The circuit breaker
and switchgear will meet industry
requirements for greater safety, quality,
superior reliability and minimal main-
tenance while providing higher insulation
levels in less space than other breaker
types, thus reducing overall switchgear
size for signicant space savings.
Ratings
Maximum rated voltage: 38 kV rms
BIL withstand: 150 and 170 kV peak
Maximum symmetrical interrupting
with K = 1: 16 kA, 25 kA, 31.5 kA,
40 kA rms, and 35 kA rms (21 kA
rating with K = 1.65)
Continuous current:
Circuit breakersup to 2500A
Switchgear main busup to 3000A
Features38 kV
Vacuum Circuit Breaker
Corona-free design increases circuit
breaker reliability and in-service life
by maintaining insulation integrity
Superior cycloaliphatic epoxy insu-
lationa void-free insulating mate-
rial with outstanding electrical and
mechanical characteristics, such as
track resistance, dielectric strength,
and fungus resistance, even in
harsh industrial environment
is used throughout the circuit
breaker as primary phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground insulation
Axial-magnetic, copper-chrome
contacts are used in 38 kV vacuum
interrupters to provide superior
dielectric strength, better perfor-
mance characteristics, and lower
chop current
High power laboratory tests prove
VCP-W breakers are capable of 50 to
200 full fault current interruptions
V-Flex (stiff-exible) current transfer
from the vacuum interrupter
moving stem to the breaker primary
disconnecting contact is a non-
sliding/non-rolling design, which
eliminates maintenance required
with the sliding/rolling type transfer
arrangements. The V-Flex system
provides excellent electrical and
thermal transfer, and long vacuum
interrupter life
Easy inspection and accessibility is
afforded by front mounted stored
energy operating mechanism. The
same basic mechanism is used on
all ratings, which requires a mini-
mum investment in spare parts
All 38 kV circuit breakers are horizontal
drawout design, which provide
connect, test and disconnect position.
A latch secures the breaker in the
connected and disconnected/test
position. The circuit breaker is
designed to roll directly on the oor
38 kV BreakerFully Withdrawn
38 kV BreakerRear View
Control
Compartment
Type VCP-W Roll-on
the Floor Drawout
Circuit Breaker
Breaker
Compartment
Door
Control Panel
(Breaker Functions
and Indicators)
Secondary
Contact Block
Lift/Pull Handle Code Plates
Guide Rails Ensure
Breaker/Cell Alignment
Contact Erosion
Indicator
Primary
Disconnect
Breaker
Wheel
Pole Unit
Vacuum Interrupter
Located Inside
this Molded
Epoxy Housing
Insulation Shrouds
Alignment Rollers
5.1-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
General Description38 kV Switchgear
013
Features38 kV Vacuum
Circuit Breaker (Continued)
All breaker controls and indicators
are functionally grouped on the
front control panel and include:
main contact status, closing spring
status, port for manual spring charg-
ing, close and trip button, and
mechanical operations counter
Clearly visible contact erosion
indicator on the front of the breaker
Trip-free interlocks prevent moving
a closed circuit breaker into or out
of the connected position
Breaker cannot be electrically or
mechanically closed when in the
intermediate position
Closing springs automatically
discharge before moving the circuit
breaker into or out of the enclosure
during levering and in the
connected position
Coding plates are provided to
ensure only correct breaker rating
can be installed in cell
38 kV SwitchgearCircuit Breaker
Compartment
Provision for
Padlocking Shutter
in Closed Position
Breaker Levering
Pan Assembly
TOC
Switch
MOC
Switch
Steel
Shutters
Features38 kV
Switchgear Assembly
Like the circuit breaker described
above, the 38 kV switchgear assembly
is a corona-free metal-clad design.
It incorporates many features and
advantages of 5, 15 and 27 kV VacClad
design, with additional modications
required for 38 kV application.
Industry-leading cycloaliphatic
epoxy supports are used for primary
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground
insulation throughout, providing
170 kV BIL and 80 kV (1 minute)
power frequency withstand capability
All primary bus conductors are
insulated for full 38 kV by uidized
epoxy coating. All buses are
fabricated from 100% conductivity
copper. Bus joints are silver- or
tin-plated as required, and covered
with Eatons pre-formed insulating
boots to maintain metal-clad integrity
38 kV SwitchgearControl Compartment
Breaker Levering Pan Assembly
Circuit breaker compartment is
designed to interface with Type
VCP-W 38 kV circuit breaker. It
includes oor-mounted breaker
pan assembly (levering assembly)
with all safety interlocks required by
the metal-clad design. Cell mounted
guide rails accurately guide the
breaker into the cell during levering,
and ensure correct alignment
of the circuit breaker primary
disconnects with the cell primary
contacts when breaker reaches
connected position
Coding plates are provided to
ensure only correct breaker rating
can be installed in the cell
Automatic steel shutters cover
cell primary contacts when circuit
breaker is withdrawn from its con-
nected position, to prevent persons
from accidentally touching the
stationary primary cell contacts.
Each shutter can be padlocked in
the closed or open position. It can
also be manually latched open as
required for maintenance
Breaker Compartment (Shutter Shown
Open for Illustration)
Control
Compartment
Control
Devices
Breaker Compartment
Ground
Bus
Secondary
Disconnect
Guide
Rail
Breaker Pan
Assembly
MOC Switch
Beneath this Cover
Code
Plates
Provision for
Padlocking
Racking
Screw and
Moving
Block
Assembly
Guide
Rail
Steel
Shutter
Stationary
Primary
Contacts
Shutter
Latch
(Manual)
Primary
Contact
Housing
Shutter
Latch
(Manual)
Steel
Shutter
5.1-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
014
Features38 kV Switchgear Assembly (Continued)
VT/CPT Primary Fuse Drawer (Shown with Door Open)
A separate control compartment is
provided for installation of protec-
tion, metering and control devices.
No devices are located on circuit
breaker compartment door
Rear of the switchgear is divided in
main bus and cable compartments,
isolated from each other by grounded
metal barriers. Sufcient space
is available for customers top or
bottom entry power cables. Bus duct
terminations can also be supplied.
A bare copper ground bus is
provided along the entire lineup,
with an extension in each cable
compartment for termination of
power cable shields
38 kV, 170 kV BIL Design
Line side current transformer bush-
ings are included as standard. Bus
side current transformer bushings
are only included when bus side
current transformers are supplied
Ring-type current transformers are
installed over bus or line side primary
insulating bushings as required.
They are accessible from the rear
of the unit. Maximum two sets of
standard accuracy or one set of high
accuracy current transformers can
be installed on the bus side; and
three sets of standard accuracy or
one set of standard, and one set of
high accuracy transformers can be
installed on the line side
Voltage and control power trans-
formers (VTs and CPTs), when
required, are stationary mounted
inside the cubicle, with their primary
fuses installed in a drawout auxil-
iary drawer
Each primary fuse drawer is provided
with a levering mechanism for
moving the drawer within its com-
partment between connected and
disconnected positions, with the
compartment door closed. The
levering mechanism is mechanically
interlocked with the compartment
door such that the door cannot be
opened, and access to the primary
fuses cannot be gained, until the
drawer is levered out to the discon-
nected position. A colored ag visible
through a small viewing window on
the compartment door indicates the
position of the drawer inside the
compartment as follows:
Red Colordrawer is in the fully
connected position
Green Colordrawer is in the fully
disconnected position
Orange Colordrawer is
in-between connected and
Also provided are grounding straps
to automatically discharge the fuses
as they are pulled from the fuse
holders
On VT fuse drawers, a cell switch
automatically disconnects the
secondary circuit before the primary
fuses are disconnected as the
drawer is withdrawn
On CPT fuse drawers, the compart-
ment door is key interlocked with
the CPT main secondary circuit
Levering Access
Hinged Door Door-Cell Interlock Assembly
Fuse Drawer Position
Indicator Viewing Window
VT/CPT Primary Fuse
Drawer Assembly
Fuse Pull-out Knobs
Levering Access
breaker such that the access to
the drawer levering mechanism is
blocked until the secondary main
breaker is opened
38 kV, 150 kV BIL Design
This design is similar to 38 kV, 170
kV BIL design described previously,
except main bus is oriented differ-
ently and the design is provided
with drawout VT with integral fuses,
and front accessible CTs. Each 38 kV
150 kV BIL indoor structure is 42.00-
inch (1066.8 mm) wide x 95.00-inch
(2413 mm) high x 124.36-inch
(3158.8 mm) deep. The 150 kV BIL
assembly uses the same 38 kV
circuit breakers as in 170 kV BIL
assemblies. The breakers are
interchangeable between the
two designs
Voltage transformers are equipped
with integral top-mounted primary
fuses and installed in an auxiliary
compartment. Two auxiliary com-
partments can be provided in one
vertical section. Each auxiliary com-
partment can be supplied with 1, 2
or 3 VTs, and can be connected to
bus or line, as required for a given
application. The VTs assembly is
located behind a xed bolted panel,
and provided with mechanism for
moving it between connected and
disconnected position. The VT
assembly is interlocked with the
xed bolted panel such that the
panel cannot be removed unless the
VTs are withdrawn to disconnected
position. A shutter assembly covers
the primary stabs when VTs are
withdrawn to disconnected position.
A mechanism is also provided to
automatically discharge VT primary
fuses as the VTs are withdrawn from
connected to disconnected position
Ring type current transformers
are installed over bus or line side
primary insulating bushings, located
behind the steel shutters, in the
breaker compartment. In this design,
the CTs are easily accessible from
the front, after removal of the circuit
breaker. The front accessibility
permits adding or changing the CTs
when the equipment is de-energized,
but without removal of high voltage
joints or primary insulation. The
design allows installations of two
sets of standard or one set of high
accuracy CTs on each side of the
circuit breaker
As of this update, the 38 kV, 150 kV
BIL design cannot be supplied for
applications that require a CPT, or
primary fuse drawer for a remote
CPT. Contact Eaton for availability
5.1-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
015
Features38 kV Switchgear Assembly (Continued)
38 kV Switchgear AssemblyRear View
Main Bus
Rear Compartment (Partial)
Enclosed Main
Bus Compartment
Bus SupportEpoxy
Customers Cable
Connections
Ground Bus
Bus SupportEpoxy
Fluidized Epoxy
Coated Bus
Cu Bus, Silver- or
Tin-Plated at Joints
Cycloaliphatic
Epoxy Support
Power Cable Lug
Removable Insulating
Boots at Bus Joints
Ring Type Current
Transformers
5.1-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05016
5.2-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Arc-Resistant Switchgear
General Description
017
Switchgear Medium Voltage
with Plenum Installed
Eaton has been manufacturing arc-
resistant metal-clad switchgear since
1990. Eaton was the rst major North
American manufacturer to design, test
and manufacture arc-resistant switch-
gear in accordance with EEMAC G14.1.
We now offer Type 2 and 2B arc-resis-
tant switchgear assemblies, designed
and tested in accordance with the IEEE
C37.20.7, with Type VCP-W drawout
vacuum circuit breakers.
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad arc-
resistant switchgear with Type VCP-W
vacuum circuit breakers can be
congured in various combinations
of breakers and auxiliaries to satisfy
users application requirements.
One-high and two-high arrangements
can be provided when required.
Accessibility Types
Arc-resistant switchgear performance
is dened by its accessibility type
in accordance with IEEE test guide
C37.20.7 as follows:
Type 1Switchgear with arc-resistant
designs or features at the freely
accessible front of the equipment only.
Type 2Switchgear with arc-resistant
designs or features at the freely acces-
sible exterior (front, back and sides) of
the equipment only. (Type 2 incorporates
Type 1.)
Type 2BSwitchgear with Type 2
accessibility plus arc-resistant in front
of the instrument/control compart-
ment with the instrument/control
compartment door opened. (Type 2B
incorporates Type 2.)
Eatons 5/15 kV switchgear is designed
and tested for IEEE Type 2B accessibility,
and 27 and 38 kV switchgear is designed
and tested to IEEE Type 2.
Arc-resistant features are intended to
provide an additional degree of protec-
tion to the personnel performing normal
operating duties in close proximity to
the equipment while the equipment
is operating under normal conditions.
The normal operating conditions for
proper application of arc-resistant
switchgear designs are as follows:
All doors and covers providing
access to high voltage components
are properly closed and latched
Pressure relief devices are free
to operate
The fault energy available to the
equipment does not exceed the
rating of the equipment (short-
circuit current and duration)
There are no obstructions around
the equipment that could direct the
arc fault products into an area
intended to be protected
The equipment is properly grounded
The user should also refer to docu-
ments such as NFPA 70E, for safety
training and safe work practices and
methods of evaluating safe work
distances from energized equipment
based on the potential ash hazard,
and use proper PPE when working on
or near energized equipment with the
door/cover opened or not properly
secured.
Standards
Switchgear Assembly
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad
arc-resistant switchgear meets or
exceeds the following standards
and test guides:
North American Documents
IEEE C37.20.2Standards for
IEEE C37.20.7Guide for Testing
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear for
Internal Arcing Faults
Canadian Documents
CSA C22.2 No. 31-04Switchgear
Assemblies
EEMAC G8-3.2Metal-Clad and
Station Type Cubicle Switchgear
EEMAC G14-1Procedure for
testing the resistance of metal-clad
switchgear under conditions of
arcing due to an internal fault.
The G14-1 was the rst North
American testing guide introduced
in 1987
Circuit Breakers
The Type VCP-W and VCP-WC vacuum
circuit breakers, used in VacClad-W
arc-resistant switchgear, meet or
exceed all ANSI and IEEE standards
applicable to AC high voltage circuit
breakers rated on symmetrical current
basis, including but not limited to:
C37.04, C37.06, and C37.09. Also avail-
able are type VCP-WG vacuum circuit
breakers conforming to IEEE standard
C37.013 for AC high voltage generator
circuit breakers.
Third-Party Certication
5 and 15 kV arc-resistant metal-clad
switchgear assemblies can be provided
with CSA (Canada or USA) or UL
(USA only) listing. Contact Eaton
for available ratings.
Switchgear
Arc-resistant metal-clad switchgear
also conforms to C37.20.2 and is tested
as such for short time and momentary
short-circuit withstand for through
bolted fault as noted on Page 5.1-2. In
addition, the enclosure is also tested in
accordance with IEEE guide C37.20.7
for withstand against the effects of
internal arcing faults as shown in
Figure 5.2-1.
Figure 5.2-1. Arc-Resistant Switchgear
Enclosure Internal Arcing Short-Circuit
Withstand Test
Internal arcing faults are those faults
occurring in air, phase-to-phase or
phase-to-ground, within the connes
of the switchgear enclosure. Arcing
faults can occur within a switchgear
compartment as a result of insulation
failure or human error. The arcing fault
produces a tremendous release of heat
energy at the point of the fault, which
heats and expands the air volume
Main
Bus
BKR
0.5 mm Dia. (24 AWG) Wire
Used to Initiate Arcing Fault
Three-Phase
Test Source
(High Voltage)
Ground
Bus
5.2-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
General Description
018
within the enclosure, and may decom-
pose or vaporize materials exposed to
an arc or involved in its path. The
effects of this type of fault vary
depending on enclosure volume, arc
duration, arc voltage, and available
short-circuit current. If the switchgear
is not designed and tested to with-
stand effects of internal arcing faults,
its parts could blow away along with
discharge of hot decomposed matter,
gaseous or particulate, causing injury
to personnel that may be present in its
vicinity. Arc-resistant switchgear is
designed to channel and control effects
of the arcing fault and its enclosure is
tested for withstand against such fault
in accordance with IEEE guide C37.20.7.
Medium Voltage Vacuum Circuit
Breaker Features and Ratings
VacClad-W metal-clad arc-resistant
switchgear is designed for use with
Eatons state-of-the-art medium volt-
age vacuum type VCP-W (standard
ANSI), VCP-WC (extra capability), and
VCP-WG (generator) circuit breakers.
Refer to Tables 5.4-1B, 5.4-2 and 5.4-3
for complete list of available ratings.
Arc-Resistant Enclosure and
Arc Exhaust
VacClad-W arc-resistant switchgear is
designed to withstand effects of inter-
nal arcing faults up to its rated arc
short-circuit current and duration. The
arc-withstand capability of the switch-
gear enclosure is achieved by use of
reinforced heavier gauge steel where
needed, smart latching of doors and
covers, and top-mounted built-in pres-
sure relief system. Following are stan-
dard design features built into each
arc-resistant switchgear assembly.
The formed steel compartment
design provides sealed joints under
fault conditions. This prevents smoke
and gas from escaping to other
compartments, a condition that can
occur with switchgear compartments
designed with conventional at
bolted panels
Integral, pressure release ap vents
mounted on top of each individual
vertical section provide for controlled
upward release of arc created over-
pressure, re, smoke, gases and
molten material out of the assembly
without affecting structural integrity,
and protect personnel who might
be present in the vicinity of the
switchgear
The structure roof, including the
pressure release ap vents, is drip
proof. The design is made strong such
that the roof can be walked-on
when the gear is completely de-
energized (for example, during
installation)
Since arc pressure is vented out
through the top of each individual
vertical section, the equipment
damage is conned to individual
structures, minimizing damage to
adjacent structures
The levering mechanism is mechan-
ically interlocked with the compart-
ment door such that the door cannot
be opened until the circuit breaker is
opened and levered out to the test/
disconnect position. This interlock-
ing ensures that the levering of the
circuit breaker into or out from the
connected position is done with
compartment door closed and
latched, with no exposure to
potential arc ash
Easy access and viewing ports are
provided on the door to allow oper-
ator to carry out all normal functions
with the door closed and latched,
with no exposure to potential arc
ash. Those functions include:
Breaker levering, manual charging
of closing springs, manual opening
and closing of the circuit breaker,
viewing of open/close status of
the breaker main contacts, viewing
of charged/discharged status of
the closing springs, viewing of
mechanical operations counter,
and breaker position
VacClad arc-resistant 5/15 and 38 kV
designs permit maximum of two auxil-
iary drawers in one vertical section.
The 27 kV design permits maximum of
only one auxiliary drawer per vertical
section.
Each auxiliary drawer is equipped
with cell-mounted levering mecha-
nism. The mechanism is mechanically
interlocked with its compartment
door such that the door cannot be
opened and access to auxiliary
drawer cannot be gained until the
drawer is rst levered out to the dis-
connected position. This interlocking
ensures that the levering of the
auxiliary drawer into or out from
the connected position is done with
compartment door closed and latched,
with no exposure to potential arc ash
A viewing window is provided on
the door and on front panel of the
drawer to allow viewing of the drawer
position and the primary fuses
In 5/15 kV designs, each auxiliary
drawer can also accommodate a
single-phase CPT rated up to 15 kVA,
with primary fuses, or the drawer
can also be congured as a fuse
drawer with two or three primary
fuses, and connected to a xed
mounted CPT (single-phase or
three-phase 45 kVA maximum) in
the rear of the structure
In 27 kV designs, an auxiliary drawer
can be congured as a fuse drawer
with two primary fuses and con-
nected to a xed-mounted CPT
(single-phase 25 kVA maximum)
in the rear of the structure
In 38 kV designs, fuse drawer can be
provided with two primary fuses
and connected to a xed-mounted
CPT (single-phase 25 kVA maximum)
in the rear of the structure. Please
note that in 38 kV designs, a fuse
drawer requires a full vertical
section, because it occupies the
same compartment space as
required for a circuit breaker
Control Compartments
The control compartment doors can
be opened to access control wiring
without having to de-energize the pri-
mary circuit. The control compartments
have been tested to provide arc-resistant
protection with its door opened under
normal operating condition. Please
note the control compartment door
should be opened only for access to
control wiring when needed, and
should remain closed at all other times.
Relay Box on Breaker Compartment
Door in 5/15 kV Switchgear
When needed for additional relays/
instruments/controls, a relay box
mounted on the breaker compartment
door provides ample space for individ-
ual breaker relaying and controls.
An access to control wiring or device
terminals that are enclosed within the
relay box does not require opening of
the circuit breaker compartment door.
Arc Exhaust Wall and Arc Exhaust
Chamber (Plenum)
Refer to Page 5.5-38.
5.2-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
General Description
019
5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear
Note: Application layouts and dimensionsrefer to Pages 5.5-19 to 5.5-29 and Pages 5.5-38 to 5.5-40.
Front ViewType VCP-W 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear
(Plenum Above the Switchgear Not shown)
5/15 kV Auxiliary
Over Auxiliary
5/15 kV Breaker
Over Breaker
Breaker Compartment Breaker Shown Fully
Withdrawn on
Extension Rails
VTs DrawerShown
Fully Withdrawn
Fuse DrawerShown
Fully Withdrawn
Rear View 5/15 kV VCP-W
Rear ViewBreaker Over
Breaker Cable Termination
Rear ViewBottom
Cable Compartment
Ground Bus
5.2-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
General Description
020
27 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear
Note: Application layouts and dimensionsrefer to Pages 5.5-30 to 5.5-33 and Pages 5.5-38 to 5.5-40.
Rear ViewTypical 27 kV
Breaker Cable Termination
Front View27 kV VCP-W Arc-Resistant Switchgear
(Plenum Above the Switchgear is Not Shown)
Typical 27 kV CellControls in Top,
Breaker in the Bottom
5.2-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
General Description
021
38 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear
Note: Application layouts and dimensionsrefer to Pages 5.5-34 to 5.5-40.
38 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Shown Without
Arc Plenum Above the Switchgear)
Circuit Breaker Compartment Circuit Breaker Compartment
Shown with Breaker Removed
Front ViewVT Over VT VT TraySide View
(Shown Removed)
Rear Assembly
Control
Compartment
VT Drawer
Main Bus
Cover
Primary Cable
Termination
Main Bus
(Shown
with Cover
Removed)
5.2-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05022
5.3-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Partial Discharge
General Description
023
Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring for Switchgear
Partial Discharge Equipment
Partial Discharge in Switchgear
Partial discharge is a common name for
various forms of electrical discharges
such as corona, surface tracking, and
discharges internal to the insulation.
It partially bridges the insulation
between the conductors. These
discharges are essentially small arcs
occurring in or on the surface of the
insulation system when voltage stress
exceeds a critical value. With time,
airborne particles, contaminants and
humidity lead to conditions that result
in partial discharges. Partial discharges
start at a low level and increase as
more insulation becomes deteriorated.
Examples of partial discharge in switch-
gear are surface tracking across bus
insulation, or discharges in the air gap
between the bus and a support, such
as where a bus passes through an
insulating window between the sections
of the switchgear. If partial discharge
process is not detected and corrected,
it can develop into a full-scale insulation
failure followed by an electrical fault.
Most switchgear ashover and bus
failures are a result of insulation
degradation caused by various forms
of partial discharges.
Sensing and Monitoring
Eatons Type VCP-W metal-clad switch-
gear (2.438 kV) is corona-free by design.
Corona emissions within the standard
VacClad switchgear assemblies have
been eliminated or reduced to very
low levels by special fabrication and
assembly techniques, such as rounding
and bufng of all sharp copper edges
at the joints, employing star washers
for bolting metal barriers, and using
specially crafted standoff insulators
for primary bus supports. By making
switchgear assemblies corona-free,
Eaton has made its standard switchgear
more reliable. However, as indicated
above, with time, airborne particles,
contaminants and humidity lead to
conditions that cause partial discharges
to develop in switchgear operating at
voltages 4000V and above. Type VCP-W
switchgear can be equipped with
factory-installed partial discharge
sensors and partial discharge sensing
relay for continuous monitoring of the
partial discharges under normal oper-
ation. Timely detection of insulation
degradation through increasing partial
discharges can identify potential prob-
lems so that corrective actions can be
planned and implemented long before
permanent deterioration develops.
Partial discharge detection can be the
foundation of an effective predictive
maintenance program. Trending of
partial discharge data over time allows
prediction of failures, which can be cor-
rected before catastrophic failure occurs.
The PD sensing and monitoring system
consists of Eatons InsulGard Relay
and PD sensors specically developed
for application in the switchgear to
work with the relay.
RFCT Sensor
InsulGard Relay
InsulGard Relay (PD Monitoring)
Partial discharges within the switch-
gear compartment are detected by
installation of a small donut type radio
frequency current transformer (RFCT)
sensor over oating stress shields of
the specially designed bus or line side
primary bushings. Partial discharges
in customers power cables (external
discharges) are detected by installa-
tion of the RFCT around ground
shields of the incoming or outgoing
power cables termination.
In 38 kV switchgear (refer to Figure 5.3-3),
one RFCT sensor is installed around
primary bushing stress shield in every
breaker compartment and supplied
as standard for measurement of dis-
charges internal to the switchgear com-
partment. Its output is wired to terminal
blocks in control compartment for easy
access for periodic eld measurements.
It can also be connected directly to
optional InsulGard relay for continuous
monitoring of partial discharges.
Because one RFCT sensor is included
in 38 kV breaker compartment, Eatons
38 kV switchgear is PD Sensing Ready
when received by the customer.
An additional RFCT sensor for each
incoming and outgoing power cable
circuits can be provided as an option for
measurement of external discharges.
In 5/15/27 kV switchgear (refer to
Figure 5.3-2), primary epoxy bushings
with stress shield and RFCT sensors
for measurement of internal as well
as external partial discharges are
all optional. InsulGard relay is also
optional. When specied, one set of
primary epoxy bushings (located on
bus side) with stress shield and associ-
ated RFCT sensor is provided at every
two vertical sections. An additional
RFCT sensor for each incoming and
outgoing power cable circuits can be
provided as required. The RFCT output
signals can be connected directly to
InsulGard relay for continuous moni-
toring of partial discharges or can be
used for periodic eld measurements.
5.3-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Partial Discharge
General DescriptionPartial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring
024
Figure 5.3-1. InsulGard Relay System
Figure 5.3-2. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections
(527 kV Switchgear)
Note: Use one set of epoxy bottles with ground stress shield on bus
side (either in the top or bottom compartment) at every two vertical
sections. Use standard bottles at all other locations.
Figure 5.3-3. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections
(38 kV Switchgear)
Input
Terminal
Block
InsulGard
Relay
Optional
Modem
Temp Sensor
Humidity Sensor
Output
Alarm
Status
120 Vac
Auxiliary
Power Signals (up to 15 Total) from
PD Sensors (Coupling Capacitors,
RFCT Sensor, RTD Input, etc.)
RFCT #1 detects partial discharges internal to switchgear
compartment.
RFCT #2 detects partial discharges in customers cables up
to 100 ft from switchgear.
compartment.
5.3-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Partial Discharge
025
Partial Discharge Sensors and Monitoring for Switchgear
Figure 5.3-4. How the Process WorksSensing and Data Collection
Figure 5.3-5. How the Process WorksData Analysis and Report (Sample)
Radio Frequency Current Sensor (RFCT)
PD Sensors
PD Sensors are Installed
in Switchgear Cubicle
PD Sensors
Epoxy Bottles with Stress Shield
Relatively high Partial Discharge levels indicate problems
in older non-uidized epoxy insulated MV bus. Problems
in cable terminations and in connected equipment can also
be revealed.
Pulse Repetition Rate (PPC)
5
4
3
2
1
0
C
u
b
1
C
u
b
2
C
u
b
3
C
u
b
4
C
u
b
5
C
u
b
6
C
u
b
7
C
u
b
8
C
u
b
9
C
u
b
1
1
C
u
b
1
2
C
u
b
1
3
C
u
b
1
4
C
u
b
1
5
C
u
b
1
6
5.3-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Communications and Supplemental Devices
General DescriptionCommunications, Protection and Supplemental Devices
026
Integrated Monitoring
Protection and Control
Communications System
Eatons Power Xpert
System Architec-
ture provides a fully scalable set of
hardware/software solutions that can
be applied in varying levels of sophisti-
cation depending upon a customers
needs. This new architecture permits
backward communication compatibility
to existing Eaton and other third-party
equipment, as well as expanded
functionality for new devices.
The Power Xpert System Architecture
uses embedded Web server technology
for ease of connectivity to Ethernet
Local and Wide Area Networks. The
architecture includes Eatons Power
Xpert Meter, Power Xpert Gateways
and Power Xpert Software. Eatons
selection matrix includes a number of
deployment levels, from Web browser
based monitoring of a single Power
Xpert Meter, through fully customized
monitoring of Eaton and third-party
devices in a multi-site environment.
Medium voltage VacClad-W switchgear
is ideally suited for Eatons unique
Power Xpert system incorporating
PowerNet devices.
Refer to Tab 2 for more information on
communication systems.
Protective Relays
A full scope of protective relays
designed to meet all application
requirements is available to
provide the utmost in system
and component protection. Refer
to Tab 4 for further information.
Supplemental Devices
Dummy Element (Dummy Breaker)
Dummy element is a drawout element
with primary disconnects similar to a
drawout circuit breaker, but consists
of solid copper conductors in place of
vacuum interrupters, and is designed
for manual racking. it is typically used
as drawout disconnect link in the
primary system for circuit isolation or
bypass. The device is insulated to suit
the voltage rating of the switchgear
and will carry required levels of short-
circuit current, but it is not rated for
any current interruption. It must be
key interlocked with all source devices
such that it can only be inserted into or
removed from its connected position
only after the primary circuit in which
it is to be applied is completely
de-energized.
Before using a dummy element, it is
recommended that each user develop
detailed operating procedure consis-
tent with safe operating practices.
Only qualied personnel should be
authorized to use the dummy element.
Ground and Test Device
The ground and test device is a drawout
element that may be inserted into a
metal-clad switchgear housing in
place of a circuit breaker to provide
access to the primary circuits to permit
the temporary connection of grounds
or testing equipment to the high-voltage
circuits. High potential testing of cable
or phase checking of circuits are typical
tests which may be performed. The
devices are insulated to suit the voltage
rating of the switchgear and will carry
required level of short-circuit current.
Before using ground and test devices,
it is recommended that each user develop
detailed operating procedures consis-
tent with safe operating practices. Only
qualied personnel should be authorized
to use ground and test devices.
Manual and electrical ground and test
devices are available, These devices
include six studs for connection to
primary circuits. On the manual device,
selection and grounding is accomplished
by cable or bus bars connection. On
electrical-type devices, grounding is
accomplished by an electrically
operated grounding switch.
Standard Accessories
One test jumper
One levering crank
One maintenance tool
One lifting yoke (527 kV)
One sets of rails (527 kV)
One turning handle (5th wheel, 38 kV)
Optional Accessories
Transport dolly (527 kV), (515 kV
arc-resistant)
Portable lifter (527 kV)
Test cabinet
Electrical levering device (538 kV)
Ramp for lower breaker (527 kV),
(515 kV arc-resistant)
Manual or electrical ground and
test device
Hi-pot tester
5/15 kV Manual Type G&T Device
5/15 kV Manual G&T Device shown
with Upper Terminals Grounded
5/15 kV Manual G&T Device shown
with Lower Terminals Grounded
5.4-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataStandard VCP-W Circuit Breakers
027
Discussion of changes in the
Rated Voltage Range Factor, K,
or K-factor in Circuit Breaker
Rating Structure
In 1997 and 2000 editions of ANSI
C37.06, under Table 1, preferred values
for the rated voltage range factor, K,
were set to 1.0 for all indoor circuit
breaker ratings. This was done because
interrupting capabilities of todays
vacuum circuit breakers are better
represented by K = 1.0. Unlike old
air-magnetic and oil circuit breakers,
todays vacuum breakers generally do
not require a reduction in interrupting
current, as the operating voltage is
raised to rated maximum voltage,
for example from 11.5 kV up to 15 kV.
The interrupting capability of vacuum
circuit breakers is essentially constant
over the entire range of operating
voltages, up to and including its rated
maximum voltage. The change was also
made as a step toward harmonizing
preferred ANSI ratings with the
preferred ratings of IEC standards. It
was further recognized that it is much
simpler to select and apply circuit
breakers rated on the basis of K = 1.0.
The change in the K value, however,
in no way affects the ratings and
capabilities of circuit breakers originally
tested and rated on the basis of K > 1
in the earlier editions of C37.06. Existing
circuit breakers, with ratings based on
K > 1.0, are still perfectly valid, meet
the latest editions of the standards,
and should be continued to be applied
as they have been in the past. The
original K > 1.0 ratings are neither
obsolete nor inferior to the new
K = 1.0 ratings; they are just different.
The new 1997 and 2000 editions of
ANSI standard C37.06 still include the
earlier K > 1 ratings as Table A1 and
A1A. The change from K > 1.0 to
K = 1.0 should be implemented by
manufacturers as they develop and
test new circuit breakers designs. The
change does not require, recommend
or suggest that manufactures re-rate
and re-test existing breakers to new
standard. And accordingly, Eaton
continues to offer both circuit breakers
rated on the traditional basis of K > 1.0
just as thousands of those breakers
have been applied for variety of circuit
switching applications worldwide, and
also as Eaton develops new breakers,
they are rated and tested to the new
K = 1 ratings. As a leader in vacuum
interruption technology, Eaton continues
to provide a wide choice of modern
vacuum circuit breakers so that the
user can select the most economical
circuit breaker that can satisfy their
circuit switching application.
Table 5.4-1A includes 5/15 kV circuit
breakers rated on the basis of
K = 1.0 in accordance with revised
ANSI standards
Table 5.4-1B includes capabilities of
traditional 5/15 kV circuit breakers
rated on the basis of K > 1.0
Table 5.4-1C includes 27/38 kV
circuit breakers rated on the basis
of K = 1.0
Table 5.4-2 includes circuit breaker
designs, rated on the basis of K = 1.0
with extra capabilities for those
applications whose requirements
go beyond what is usually
experienced in normal distribution
circuit applications
Table 5.4-3 includes circuit breakers
for special generator applications
5.4-2
September 2011
Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-W Medium Voltage
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
028
Table 5.4-1A. Available 5/15 kV VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards (Rated K = 1.0)
(Continued on next page)
All circuit breakers are tested at 60 Hz; however, they can also be applied at 50 Hz with no derating.
4000A fan-cooled rating is available for 3000A circuit breakers.
Because the voltage range factor K = 1, the short-time withstand current and the maximum symmetrical interrupting current are equal to the rated
symmetrical interrupting current.
Based on the standard DC time constant of 45 ms (corresponding to X/R of 17 for 60 Hz) and the minimum contact parting time as determined from
the minimum opening time plus the assumed minimum relay time of 1/2 cycle (8.33 ms for 60 Hz).
The asymmetrical interrupting current, I total, is given by (I

t
) = I x Sqrt (1 + 2 x %DC x %DC) kA rms asymmetrical total.
Duration of short-time current and maximum permissible tripping delay are both 2 seconds for all circuit breakers listed in this table, as required
in C37.04-1999, C37.06-2000 and C37.06-2009.
RRRV can also be calculated as = 1.137 x E

2
/T
2
.
These circuit breakers were tested to the preferred TRV ratings specied in C37.06-2000.
Identication Rated Values
Drawout Circuit
Breaker Type
M
a
x
i
m
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
V
)
P
o
w
e
r

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

Insulation Level
C
o
n
t
i
n
u
o
u
s

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

Short-Circuit Ratings (Reference C37.04-1999 and C37.06-2009 Except as Noted
)
P
o
w
e
r

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

W
i
t
h
s
t
a
n
d

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
1

m
i
n
.
)
L
i
g
h
t
n
i
n
g

I
m
p
u
l
s
e

W
i
t
h
s
t
a
n
d

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
1
.
2

x

5
0

s
)
S
y
m
m
e
t
r
i
c
a
l

I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

(
I
)

D
C

C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t

(
%

D
C
)

A
s
y
m
m
e
t
r
i
c
a
l

I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

(
I
t
)

C
l
o
s
i
n
g

a
n
d

L
a
t
c
h
i
n
g

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

(
2
.
6

x

I
)
S
h
o
r
t
-
T
i
m
e

W
i
t
h
s
t
a
n
d

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

Transient Recovery Voltage

Parameters are Based on TD-4
I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g

T
i
m
e
P
e
a
k

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
E
2
)

=

(
u
c
)
T
i
m
e

t
o

P
e
a
k

(
T
2

=

t
3

x

1
.
1
3
7
)
T
R
V

R
i
s
e

T
i
m
e

(
t
3
)
R
R
R
V

=

u
c
/
t
3

Units kV
rms
Hz kV
rms
kV
Peak
A
rms
kA
rms
sym
% kA rms
asym
Total
kA
Peak
rms kV
Peak
sec sec kV/
sec
ms Cycles
(60 Hz)
50 VCP-W 25 4.76 60 19 60 1200
2000
3000
25 50 31 65 25 8.2 50 44 0.19 50 3
50 VCP-W 40 4.76 60 19 60 1200
2000
3000
40 50 49 104 40 8.2 50 44 0.19 50 3
50 VCP-W 50 4.76 60 19 60 1200
2000
3000
50 44 59 130 50 8.2 50 44 0.19 50 3
50 VCP-W 63 4.76 60 19 60 1200
2000
3000
63 55 80 164 63 8.2 50 44 0.19 50 3
75 VCP-W 40 8.25 60 36 95 1200
2000
3000
40 50 49 104 40 14 59 52 0.27 50 3
75 VCP-W 50 8.25 60 36 95 1200
2000
3000
50 44 59 130 50 14 59 52 0.27 50 3
150 VCP-W 25 15 60 36 95 1200
25 50 31 65 25 28
75 66 0.42 50 3
2000
3000
25.7 0.39
150 VCP-W 40 15 60 36 95 1200
2000
3000
40 50 49 104 40 25.7 75 66 0.39 50 3
150 VCP-W 50 15 60 36 95 1200
2000
3000
50 44 59 130 50 25.7 75 66 0.39 50 3
150 VCP-W 63 15 60 36 95 1200
2000
3000
63 55 80 164 63 28
75 66 0.42 50 3
5.4-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
029
Table 5.4-1A. Available VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards (Rated K = 1.0)
(Continued)
Each operation consists of one closing plus one opening.
All 40 and 50 kA circuit breakers exceed required 5000 no-load operations; all 63 kA circuit breakers exceed the required 2000 no-load ANSI operations.
Identication Rated Values
Drawout
Circuit Breaker
Type
C
o
n
t
i
n
u
o
u
s

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

D
u
t
y
M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

E
n
d
u
r
a
n
c
e
Capacitance Current Switching Capability
(Reference C37.04a-2003, C37.06-2009 and C37.09a-2005)
Out-of-Phase
Switching
C
a
b
l
e
-
C
h
a
r
g
i
n
g

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
I
s
o
l
a
t
e
d

S
h
u
n
t

C
a
p
a
c
i
t
o
r

B
a
n
k

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
Back-to-Back Capacitor Switching
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
o
r

B
a
n
k

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

I
n
r
u
s
h

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
I
n
r
u
s
h

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

=

1
.
4
4

x

V
C
u
r
r
e
n
t

=

0
.
2
5

x

I
Units A
rms
Duty
Cycle
No-Load
Operations
Class A
rms
Class A
rms
Class A
rms
kA
Peak
kHz kV
rms
kA
rms
50 VCP-W 25 1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 310 C2 75630
751000
751600
C2 75630
751000
751600
6 0.8
0.5
0.3
7 6.3
50 VCP-W 40 1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 310 C2 75630
751000
751600
C2 75630
751000
751600
6 0.8
0.5
0.3
7 10
50 VCP-W 50 1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 310 C2 75630
751000
751600
C2 75630
751000
751600
6 0.8
0.5
0.3
7 12.5
50 VCP-W 63 1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 7.525 C2 75630
751000
751600
C2 75630
751000
751600
6 0.8
0.5
0.3
7 15.8
75 VCP-W 40 1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 7.525 C2 75630
751000
751600
C2 75630
751000
751600
6 0.8
0.5
0.3
12 10
75 VCP-W 50 1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 7.525 C2 75630
751000
751600
C2 75630
751000
751600
6 0.8
0.5
0.3
12 12.5
150 VCP-W 25 1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 7.525 C2
C2
C1
75630
751000
751600
C2
C2
C1
75630
751000
751600
6 0.8
0.5
0.3
22 6.3
150 VCP-W 40 1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 7.525 C2
C2
C1
75630
751000
751600
C2
C2
C1
75630
751000
751600
6 0.8
0.5
0.3
22 10
150 VCP-W 50 1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 7.525 C2
C2
C1
75630
751000
751600
C2
C2
C1
75630
751000
751600
6 0.8
0.5
0.3
22 12.5
150 VCP-W 63 1200
2000
3000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 7.525 C2 75630
751000
751600
C2 75630
751000
751600
6 0.8
0.5
0.3
22 15.8
5.4-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
030
Table 5.4-1B. Available 5/15 kV VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards (Rated K > 1)
For capacitor switching, refer to Tables 5.4-1A and 5.4-2.
5 and 15 kV circuit breakers are UL listed.
For three-phase and line-to-line faults, the symmetrical interrupting

capability at an operating voltage
I
sc
= (Rated Short-Circuit Current)
But not to exceed KI.
Single line-to-ground fault capability at an operating voltage
I
sc
= 1.15 (Rated Short-Circuit Current)
The above apply on predominately inductive or resistive three-phase
circuits with normal-frequency line-to-line recovery voltage equal
to the operating voltage.
4000A continuous rating is available for 5/15 kV. 3000A continuous

rating is available for 38 kV. Contact Eaton for details.
RRRV = 1.137
3-cycle rating available, refer to Tables 5.4-1A and 5.4-2.
Tripping may be delayed beyond the rated permissible tripping delay

at lower values of current in accordance with the following formula:
T (seconds) = Y
The aggregate tripping delay on all operations within any 30-minute
period must not exceed the time obtained from the above formula.
For reclosing service, there is No derating necessary for Eatons

VCP-W family of circuit breakers. R = 100%. Type VCP-W breaker can
perform the O-C-O per ANSI C37.09; O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO per IEC 56; and
some VCP-Ws have performed O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO; all
with no derating. Contact Eaton for special reclosing requirements.
For higher close and latch ratings, refer to Table 5.4-2.
Included for reference only.
Asymmetrical interrupting capability = S times symmetrical

interrupting capability, both at specied operating voltage.
Identication Rated Values Related Required Capabilities
A
s
y
m
m
e
t
r
y

F
a
c
t
o
r

f
o
r

V
C
P
-
W

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s
Circuit
Breaker Type
N
o
m
i
n
a
l

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

C
l
a
s
s
N
o
m
i
n
a
l

3
-
P
h
a
s
e

M
V
A

C
l
a
s
s
Voltage Insulation
Level
Current Rated Transient
Recovery Voltage
R
a
t
e
d

I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g

T
i
m
e
R
a
t
e
d

P
e
r
m
i
s
s
i
b
l
e

T
r
i
p
p
i
n
g

D
e
l
a
y
R
a
t
e
d

R
e
c
l
o
s
i
n
g

T
i
m
e
R
a
t
e
d
M
a
x
i
m
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

D
i
v
i
d
e
d

b
y

K
Current Values
R
a
t
e
d

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
R
a
t
e
d

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

R
a
n
g
e

F
a
c
t
o
r
P
o
w
e
r

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

W
i
t
h
s
t
a
n
d
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
1

m
i
n
.
)
L
i
g
h
t
n
i
n
g

I
m
p
u
l
s
e

W
i
t
h
s
t
a
n
d
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
1
.
2

x

5
0

s
)
R
a
t
e
d

C
o
n
t
i
n
u
o
u
s

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

a
t

6
0

H
z
R
a
t
e
d

S
h
o
r
t
-
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
(
a
t

R
a
t
e
d

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

k
V
)
R
a
t
e
d

C
r
e
s
t

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
R
a
t
e
d

T
i
m
e

t
o

C
r
e
s
t
R
a
t
e

o
f

R
i
s
e

o
f

R
e
c
o
v
e
r
y

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

Maximum
Sym.
Inter-
rupting
Capability
3-Second
Short-
Time
Current
Carrying
Capability
Closing and
Latching
Capability
(Momentary)
K Times Rated
Short-Circuit
Current
2.7 K
Times
Rated
Short-
Circuit
Current
1.6 K
Times
Rated
Short-
Circuit
Current
kV
Class
MVA
Class
V
kV
rms
K
kV
rms
kV
Crest
Amp
I
kA
rms
E2
kV
Crest
T2
S kV/S
Cycles
Y
Sec.
ms
V/K
kV
rms
KI
kA rms
KI
kA rms
2.7 KI
kA
Crest
1.6 KI
kA rms
asym.
S
50 VCP-WND
250
4.16 250 4.76 1.24 19 60 1200 29 8.9 50 0.2 5 2 300 3.85 36 36 97 58 1.2
50 VCP-W
250
4.16 250 4.76 1.24 19 60 1200
2000
3000
29 8.9 50 0.2 5 2 300 3.85 36 36 97 58 1.2
50 VCP-W
350
4.16 350 4.76 1.19 19 60 1200
2000
3000
41 8.9 50 0.2 5 2 300 4.0 49 49 132 78 1.2
75 VCP-W
500
7.2 500 8.25 1.25 36 95 1200
2000
3000
33 15.5 60 0.29 5 2 300 6.6 41 41 111 66 1.2
150 VCP-W
500
13.8 500 15 1.30 36 95 1200
2000
3000
18 28 75 0.42 5 2 300 11.5 23 23 62 37 1.2
150 VCP-W
750
13.8 750 15 1.30 36 95 1200
2000
3000
28 28 75 0.42 5 2 300 11.5 36 36 97 58 1.2
150 VCP-W
1000
13.8 1000 15 1.30 36 95 1200
2000
3000
37 28 75 0.42 5 2 300 11.5 48 48 130 77 1.2
V
V
o
V
V
o
E
2
T
2
-------
(K Times Rated Short-Circuit Current)
Short-Circuit Current Through Breaker ( )
2
5.4-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
031
Table 5.4-1C. Available 27/38 kV VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards
For capacitor switching, refer to Table 5.4-2.
27 and 38 kV breakers are not UL listed.
For three-phase and line-to-line faults, the symmetrical interrupting

capability at an operating voltage
I
sc
Single line-to-ground fault capability at an operating voltage
I
sc
The above apply on predominately inductive or resistive three-phase
circuits with normal-frequency line-to-line recovery voltage equal
to the operating voltage.
4000A continuous rating is available for 5/15 kV. 3000A continuous

rating is available for 38 kV. Contact Eaton for details.
RRRV = 1.137
3-cycle rating available, refer to Table 5.4-2.
Tripping may be delayed beyond the rated permissible tripping delay

at lower values of current in accordance with the following formula:
T (seconds) = Y
The aggregate tripping delay on all operations within any 30-minute
period must not exceed the time obtained from the above formula.
For reclosing service, there is No derating necessary for Eatons

VCP-W family of circuit breakers. R = 100%. Type VCP-W breaker can
perform the O-C-O per ANSI C37.09; O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO per IEC 56; and
some VCP-Ws have performed O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO; all
with no derating. Contact Eaton for special reclosing requirements.
For higher close and latch ratings, refer to Table 5.4-2.
Asymmetrical interrupting capability = S times symmetrical

interrupting capability, both at specied operating voltage.
ANSI standard requires 150 kV BIL. All 38 kV ratings are tested to

170 kV BIL.
Type 380 VCP-W 40 circuit breaker is not rated for rapid reclosing.
A
s
y
m
m
e
t
r
y

F
a
c
t
o
r

f
o
r

V
C
P
-
W

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s
Circuit
Breaker
Type
N
o
m
i
n
a
l

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

C
l
a
s
s
N
o
m
i
n
a
l

3
-
P
h
a
s
e

M
V
A

C
l
a
s
s
Voltage Insulation
Level
Current Rated Transient
Recovery Voltage
R
a
t
e
d

I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g

T
i
m
e
R
a
t
e
d

P
e
r
m
i
s
s
i
b
l
e

T
r
i
p
p
i
n
g

D
e
l
a
y
R
a
t
e
d

R
e
c
l
o
s
i
n
g

T
i
m
e
R
a
t
e
d

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

D
i
v
i
d
e
d

b
y

K
Current Values
R
a
t
e
d

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
R
a
t
e
d

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

R
a
n
g
e

F
a
c
t
o
r
P
o
w
e
r

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

W
i
t
h
s
t
a
n
d
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
1

m
i
n
.
)
L
i
g
h
t
n
i
n
g

I
m
p
u
l
s
e

W
i
t
h
s
t
a
n
d
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
1
.
2

x

5
0

s
)
R
a
t
e
d

C
o
n
t
i
n
u
o
u
s

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

a
t

6
0

H
z
R
a
t
e
d

S
h
o
r
t
-
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
(
a
t

R
a
t
e
d

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

k
V
)
R
a
t
e
d

C
r
e
s
t

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
R
a
t
e
d

T
i
m
e

t
o

C
r
e
s
t
R
a
t
e

o
f

R
i
s
e

o
f

R
e
c
o
v
e
r
y

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

Maximum
Sym.
Inter-
rupting
Capability
3-Second
Short-
Time
Current
Carrying
Capability
Closing and
Latching
Capability
(Momentary)
K Times Rated
Short-Circuit
Current
2.7 K
Times
Rated
Short-
Circuit
Current
1.6 K
Times
Rated
Short-
Circuit
Current
kV
Class
MVA
Class
V
kV
rms
K
kV
rms
kV
Crest
Amp
I
kA
rms
E2
kV
Crest
T2
S kV/S
Cycles
Y
Sec.
ms
V/K
kV
rms
KI
kA rms
KI
kA rms
2.7 KI
kA
Crest
1.6 KI
kA rms
asym.
S
270 VCP-W
750
27 27 1.0 60 125 1200
2000
16 51 105 0.55 5 2 300 27 16 16 43 26 1.2
270 VCP-W
1000
27 27 1.0 60 125 1200
2000
22 51 105 0.55 5 2 300 27 22 22 60 35 1.2
270 VCP-W
1250
27 27 1.0 60 125 1200
2000
25 51 105 0.55 5 2 300 27 25 25 68 40 1.2
270 VCP-W
40
27 27 1.0 60 125 1200
2000
40 51 105 0.55 5 2 300 27 40 40 108 64 1.2
380 VCP-W
16
34.5 38 1.0 80 170
1200
2000
16 71 125 0.64 5 2 300 38 16 16 43 26 1.2
380 VCP-W
21
34.5 38 1.65 80 170
1200
2000
21 71 125 0.64 5 2 300 23 35 35 95 56 1.2
380 VCP-W
25
34.5 38 1.0 80 170
1200
2000
25 71 125 0.64 5 2 300 38 25 25 68 40 1.2
380 VCP-W
32
34.5 38 1.0 80 170
1200
2000
2500
31.5 71 125 0.64 5 2 300 38 31.5 31.5 85 51 1.2
380 VCP-W
40
34.5 38 1.0 80 170
1200
2000
2500
40 71 125 0.64 5 2

38 40 40 108 64 1.2
V
V
o
V
V
o
E
2
T
2
-------
(K Times Rated Short-Circuit Current)
Short-Circuit Current Through Breaker ( )
2
5.4-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataExtra Capability VCP-WC Circuit Breakers
032
Industry Leader VCP-WC
Introducing the VCP-WC extra capabil-
ity medium voltage drawout circuit
breaker. Designed to provide all the
industry-leading features expected of
the VCP-W, plus extra capabilities for
those application requirements that go
beyond what is usually experienced.
The performance enhancement fea-
tures of the VCP-WC make it an ideal
choice for capacitor switching duty,
high altitude applications, transformer
secondary fault protection, locations
with concentrations of rotating
machinery or high operating endur-
ance requirements, just to mention a
few. Consider these capability
enhancements:
Denite purpose capacitor switching
Higher close and latch
Faster rate of rise of recovery voltage
Higher short-circuit current
Higher mechanical endurance
Higher insulation level
Higher voltage ratings with K=1
3-cycle interrupting time
Higher switching life
Designed and tested to ANSI
standards and higher
WR xed retrot conguration
available
Vacuum Circuit Breaker Design
Leadership
Eaton is a world leader in vacuum
interrupter and vacuum circuit breaker
technology, offering VCP-WC with
extra capabilities without sacricing
the proven features already standard
with other VCP-W circuit breakers.
Features such as:
Vacuum interrupters with
copper-chrome contacts
V-Flex non-sliding current
transfer system
Visible contact erosion indicators
Visible contact wipe indicators
Front, functionally grouped controls
and indicators
Glass-polyester (5/15 kV), or epoxy
insulation (27/38 kV)
Front, vertically mounted stored
energy mechanism
Drawout on extension rails
Integrally mounted wheels
Quality Assurance Certicate
The Type VCP-WC Breakers are not
Interchangeable with Standard VCP-W
Breakers. They are Equipped with Different
Code Plates and Taller Front Panels.
Table 5.4-2. Extra Capability Type VCP-WC Ratings (Symmetrical Current Basis), Rated K = 1
Note: Refer to Page 5.4-7 for footnotes.
Identication Rated Values Mechanical
Endurance
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Voltage Insulation
Level
C
o
n
t
i
n
u
o
u
s

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

a
t

6
0

H
z
Current
I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g

T
i
m
e

Maximum
Permissible
Tripping
Delay
Rate of
Rise of
Recovery
Voltage
(RRRV)
Capacitor Switching Ratings

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
V
)
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

R
a
n
g
e

F
a
c
t
o
r

Short-Circuit Current General
Purpose
Denite Purpose
P
o
w
e
r

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

W
i
t
h
s
t
a
n
d
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
1

m
i
n
.
)
L
i
g
h
t
n
i
n
g

I
m
p
u
l
s
e

W
i
t
h
s
t
a
n
d
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
1
.
2

x

5
0

s
)
S
y
m
.

I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g

a
t

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
I
s
c
)
%

D
C

C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t

(
I
d
c
)
A
s
y
m
.

I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g

(
I
t
)
C
l
o
s
i
n
g

a
n
d

L
a
t
c
h
i
n
g
C
a
p
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
S
h
o
r
t
-
T
i
m
e

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
f
o
r

3

S
e
c
o
n
d
s

Back-to-Back
Capacitor Switching Isolated
Shunt
Capacitor
Bank
Current
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
o
r

B
a
n
k
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
I
n
r
u
s
h

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
I
n
r
u
s
h

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
kV
rms
K kV
rms
kV
Peak
A
rms
kA rms
Total
% kA
rms
kA
Peak
kA
rms
ms Seconds kV/s A rms A rms kA
Peak
kHz No-Load
Operations
50 VCP-W 25C 5.95 1 24 75 1200
2000
3000
25 50
75
75
31
36
36
97 25 50 2.0 0.9
0.9
0.8
400 & 630
1000
250
400 & 630
1000

20 & 20
18

6.5 & 5.5
2.7

10,000
10,000
5,000
50 VCP-W 40C 5.95 1 24 75 1200
2000
3000
40 75 58 139 40 50 2.0 0.9

0.9
0.8
630
1000
250
630
1000

15
18

3.5
2.7

10,000
10,000
5,000
50 VCP-W 50C 5.95 1 24 75 1200
2000
3000
50 57
57
52
64
64
62
139 50 50 2.0 0.9
0.9
0.8
630
1000
250
630
1000

15
18

3.5
2.7

10,000
10,000
5,000
50 VCP-W 63C 5.95 1 24 75 1200
2000
3000
63 62 83 175 63 50 2.0 1.1 250 200, 1600
200, 1600
200, 1600
7.7
7.7
7.7
465
465
465
10,000
10,000
10,000
75 VCP-W 50C 10.3 1 42 95 1200
2000
3000
50 57
57
52
64
64
62
139 50 50 2.0 0.9
0.9
0.8
630
1000
250
630
1000

15
18

3.5
2.7

10,000
10,000
5,000
150 VCP-W 25C 17.5 1 42 95 1200
2000
3000
25 50
75
75
31
36
36
97
25 50 2.0 0.9
0.9
0.8
400 & 600
1000
250
400 & 600
1000

20 & 20
18

6.5 & 5.5
2.7

10,000
10,000
5,000
150 VCP-W 40C 17.5 1 42 95 1200
2000
3000
40 75 58 139 40 50 2.0 0.9

0.9
0.8
630
1000
250
630
1000

15
18

3.5
2.7

10,000
10,000
5,000
150 VCP-W 50C 17.5 1 42 95 1200
2000
3000
50 57
57
52
64
64
62
139 50 50 2.0 0.9
0.9
0.8
630
1000
250
630
1000

15
18

3.5
2.7

10,000
10,000
5,000
150 VCP-W 63C 15 1 42 95 1200
2000
3000
63 62 83 175 63 50 2.0 1.1 250 200, 1600
200, 1600
200, 1600
7.7
7.7
7.7
465
465
465
10,000
10,000
10,000
5.4-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataExtra Capability VCP-WC Circuit Breakers
033
Table 5.4-2. VCP-WC Ratings (Symmetrical Current Basis), Rated K = 1 (Continued)
Except as noted.
3 cycles.
Contact Eaton for higher RRRV or for more information.
4000A FC rating available.
Breaker tested to 2700A single bank switching for momentary load (thermal derating must consider harmonic content of current waveform).
Breaker tested to 1270A back to back switching for momentary load (thermal derating must consider harmonic content of current waveform).
C37.04.a-2003 Class C2 at 15 kV.
Close and Latch Current for 1200A Type 150 VCP-W 25C is proven at 15 kV. For sealed interrupters at high altitudes, switching voltage is not derated.
Capacitor Switching Ratings are proven at 15 kV. For sealed interrupters at high altitudes, switching voltage is not derated.
2.5 seconds.
1.6 second.
1 second.
2000A FC to 3000A.
2500A FC to 3000A.
Contact Eaton for capacitor switching ratings.

Note: 38 kV, 2500A and 3000A WC breakers are not rated for rapid reclosing.
Identication Rated Values Mechanical
Endurance
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Voltage Insulation
Level
C
o
n
t
i
n
u
o
u
s

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

a
t

6
0

H
z
Current
I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g

T
i
m
e

Maximum
Permissible
Tripping
Delay
Rate of
Rise of
Recovery
Voltage
(RRRV)
Capacitor Switching Ratings

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
V
)
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

R
a
n
g
e

F
a
c
t
o
r
Short-Circuit Current General Purpose Denite Purpose
P
o
w
e
r

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

W
i
t
h
s
t
a
n
d
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
1

m
i
n
.
)
L
i
g
h
t
n
i
n
g

I
m
p
u
l
s
e

W
i
t
h
s
t
a
n
d
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
1
.
2

x

5
0

s
)
S
y
m
.

I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g

a
t

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
I
s
c
)
%

D
C

C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t

(
I
d
c
)
A
s
y
m
.

I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g

(
I
t
)
C
l
o
s
i
n
g

a
n
d

L
a
t
c
h
i
n
g
C
a
p
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
S
h
o
r
t
-
T
i
m
e

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
f
o
r

3

S
e
c
o
n
d
s

Back-to-Back
Capacitor Switching
Cable
Charging
Current
Isolated
Shunt
Capacitor
Bank
Current
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
o
r

B
a
n
k
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
I
n
r
u
s
h

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
I
n
r
u
s
h

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
kV
rms
K kV
rms
kV
Peak
A
rms
kA
rms
Total
% kA
rms
kA
Peak
kA
rms
ms Seconds kV/s A rms A rms A rms kA
Peak
kHz No-Load
Operations
270 VCP-W 25C 27 1 60 125 1200
1600
25 75 36 85 25
50 2.0 1.1 400 400 20 4.2 5,000

270 VCP-W 32C 27 1 60 125 1200
1600
31.5 55 40 100 31.5
50 2.0 1.1 400 400 20 4.2 5,000

270 VCP-W 40C 27 1 60 125 1200
1600
40 50 49 112 40
50 2.0 1.1 400 400 20 4.2 5,000

380 VCP-W 16C 38 1 80 170 1200
2000
16 75 23.3 50 16 50 2.0 0.7
1.3
50
50
250
250 & 1000
250
250 & 1000
20
20 & 20
4.4
5 & 5
10,000
380 VCP-W 25C 38 1 80 170 1200
2000
25 65 34.0 75 25 50 2.0 0.7
1.3
50
50
250
250 & 1000
250
250 & 1000
20
20 & 20
4.4
5 & 5
10,000
380 VCP-W 32C 38 1 80 170 1200
2000
2500
3000FC
33.1 57 42.5 91 31.5 50 2.0 0.7

1.3
0.7
1.3
50
50
50
50
250
250 & 1000
250 & 1000

250
250 & 1000
250 & 1000

20
20 & 20
20 & 20
4.4
5 & 5
5 & 5
10,000
380 VCP-W 40C 38 1 80 170 1200
2000
2500
3000FC
40 63 53.5 107 40 50 2.0 0.7 50

50
50
50
10,000
5.4-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataType VCP-WG and VCP-WRG Generator Circuit Breakers
034
Type VCP-WG Generator
Circuit Breakers
VCP-WG Breaker (Front View)
VCP-WG Breaker (Rear View)
Why generator circuit breakers?
Specially rated generator breakers
typically should be used on
generator applications 10,000 kW
and above
A generator circuit breaker, properly
rated and tested to the appropriate
industry standard, can protect the
generator from damage, or even
complete failure, that could occur
when feeding a faulted transformer,
and also can protect the trans-
former, in the event that a fault
should occur in the generator
Generator circuits have unique
characteristics that require specially
designed and tested circuit breakers.
The IEEE
developed the special

industry standard C37.013 and amend-
ment C37.013a-2007 to address these
characteristics. Eaton Corporation has
dedicated years of research, design,
enhancement and testing to create
Eatons family of generator breakers.
The VCP-WG (drawout) and VCP-WRG
(xed) circuit breakers meet, and even
exceed, the rigorous service duty
requirements for generator circuit
applications as dened by IEEE.
Eatons VCP-WG and VCP-WRG
generator breakers are available in
two frame sizes. The 29.00-inch frame
(29.00 inches wide with front cover on)
has ratings up to 15 kV, 63 kA and
3000A (4000A with forced-air cooling).
The 31.00-inch frame (31.00 inches
wide with front cover on) has ratings
up to 15 kV, 75 kA and 4000A (5000A
with forced-air cooling). The 31.00-
inch frame is also available in a xed
version with ratings up to 15 kV,
75 kA and 6000A (7000A with forced-
air cooling).
Count on Eatons innovative technology
to handle high continuous AC current
and voltage, then safely switch
through extreme out-of-phase voltages
and high-stress asymmetrical currents
using clean and green vacuum inter-
ruption without fail for over 10,000
normal operations.
Eatons VCP-WG generator circuit
breakers meet the strict service duty
requirements set forth by IEEE for gen-
erator circuit applications, including:
Generator circuit conguration
High continuous current levels
Unique fault current conditions
Transformer-fed faults
Generator-fed faults
Unique voltage conditions
Very fast RRRV
Out-of-phase switching
Generator Circuit Conguration
The transformer and generator can
be in close proximity to the circuit
breaker. See Figure 5.4-1. Applications
with high continuous current levels
require connections with large con-
ductors of very low impedance. This
construction causes unique fault cur-
rent and voltage conditions as shown
in Figure 5.4-2.
Figure 5.4-1. Generator Circuit Application
High Continuous Current Levels
Generator circuit breakers must be
able to handle high continuous current
levels without overheating. VCP-WG
drawout circuit breakers are designed
to reliably operate up to 4000A with
natural air convection cooling, and up
to 5000A with suitable enclosure fan
cooling during overload conditions.
VCP-WRG xed circuit breakers are
designed to reliably operate up to
6000A with natural air convection
cooling and up to 7000A with suitable
enclosure fan cooling during overload
conditions.
Unique Fault Current Conditions
System-source (aka, transformer-fed)
faults (see Figure 5.4-1, fault location
a) can be extremely high. The full
energy of the power system feeds the
fault, and the low impedance of the
fault current path does very little to
limit the fault current. Eatons type
VCP-WG Generator Circuit Breakers
are ideal for interrupting such high
fault currents because they have
demonstrated high interruption
ratings up to 75 kA, with high DC fault
content up to 75%, as proven by high
power laboratory tests.
Generator-source (aka, generator-fed)
faults, see Figure 5.4-1, fault location
b) can cause a severe condition
called Delayed Current Zero, see
Figure 5.4-2). The high ratio of induc-
tive reactance to resistance (X/R ratio)
of the system can cause the DC com-
ponent of the fault current to exceed
100%. The asymmetrical fault current
peak becomes high enough and its
decay becomes slow enough that
the natural current zero is delayed
for several cycles. The circuit breaker
experiences longer arcing time and
more electrical, thermal and mechani-
cal stress during the interruption. The
IEEE standard requires verication that
the circuit breaker can interrupt under
these severe conditions. Eatons
VCP-WG generator circuit breakers
have demonstrated their ability to
interrupt three-phase fault current
levels up to 135% DC content under
delayed current zero conditions.
Generator
~
a b
Generator
Circuit Breaker
Step-up
Transformer
High Voltage
Circuit Breaker
5.4-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
035
Unique Voltage Conditions
Generator circuits typically produce very
fast rates of rise of recovery voltage
(RRRV) due to the high natural frequency
and low impedance and very low stray
capacitance. VCP-WG generator circuit
breakers are designed to interrupt fault
current levels with very fast RRRV in
accordance with IEEE standard C37.013
and C37.013a. VCP-WG generator circuit
breakers have a distinct ability to perform
under out-of-phase conditions when
the generator and power system
voltages are not in sync. The voltages
across the open contacts can be as
high as twice the rated line-to-ground
voltage of the system. The IEEE standard
requires demonstration by test that the
generator circuit breaker can switch
under specied out-of-phase conditions.
Versatility in Application
Eatons generator vacuum circuit
breakers are available in drawout
(VCP-WG) or xed (VCP-WRG) cong-
urations to provide for superior perfor-
mance and versatility. Many industrial
and commercial power systems now
include small generators as a local
source of power. New applications are
arising as a result of the de-regulation
of the utility industry, and the con-
struction of smaller packaged power
plants. Eatons generator breakers
interrupt large short-circuit currents
in a small three-pole package.
Typical applications include:
Electric utilities: fossil, hydro and
wind power
Packaged power plants
Industrial companies using
combined cycle/combustion
turbine plants
Government and military
Commercial institutions
Petrochemical and process
industries
Forestry, pulp and paper
Mining, exploration and marine
The VCP-WG is the worlds generator
circuit breaker for reliable and robust
power generation protection.
Figure 5.4-2. Generator-Fed Faults Can Experience Delayed Current Zero, Where the High Inductance
to Resistance Ratio of the System Can Cause the DC Component of the Fault Current to Exceed 100%
Figure 5.4-3. Type VCP-WG (Drawout) and Type VCP-WRG (Fixed) Circuit Breakers
Current
pu
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
8
6
4
2
0
-2
-4
-6
C
o
n
t
a
c
t

P
a
r
t
i
n
g
I
dc
29-Inch Frame Drawout VCP-WG 29-Inch Frame Fixed VCP-WRG
10.00
(254.0)
29.00
(736.6)
10.00
(254.0)
30.00
(762.0)
24.60
(624.8)
24.60
(624.8)
10.00
(254.0)
29.00
(736.6)
10.00
(254.0)
26.60
(675.6)
31.20
(792.5)
31.40
(797.6)
31-Inch Frame Drawout VCP-WG 31-Inch Frame Fixed VCP-WRG
26.80*
(680.7)
24.60
(624.8)
39.60
(1005.8)
30.00
(762.0)
10.00
(254.0)
30.60
(777.2)
39.30
(998.2)
*6000 A has a depth of 28.50 (723.9)
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
30.60
(777.2)
10.00
(254.0)
5.4-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
036
5 kV Class Generator Circuit Breaker Ratings
Table 5.4-3. Generator Circuit Breaker Types: VCP-WG (DrawoutDO) / VCP-WRG (FixedFIX)
Ratings achieved using forced-air cooling by blowers in the enclosure.
TRV capacitors are required if RRRV is >0.5 kV/s; or T2 is <65 s.

Note: Rated frequency: 60 Hz.
Note: Standard operating duty: CO - 30 m - CO.
Note: Relevant Standard: IEEE standards C37.013-1997 and C37.013a-2007.
Note: Test certicates available.
Description Units Short-Circuit Current (Isc)
50 kA 63 kA 75 kA
Maximum Voltage (V): 5 kV
Frame in Inches (mm)
(see Figure 5.4-3 on Page 5.4-9)
29.00
(736.6)
29.00
(736.6)
31.00
(787.4)
31.00
(787.4)
29.00
(736.6)
29.00
(736.6)
31.00
(787.4)
31.00
(787.4)
31.00
(787.4)
31.00
(787.4)
Ratings Assigned DO FIX DO FIX DO FIX DO FIX DO FIX
Continuous Current A rms 1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000

1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
4000
4000
4000
5000
4000
5000
6000
4000

4000
4000
5000
4000
5000
6000
4000
5000
4000
5000
6000
6300
7000
6300
7000
6300
7000
Dielectric Strength
Power frequency withstand voltage
Lightning impulse withstand voltage
kV rms
kV peak
19
60
19
60
19
60
19
60
19
60
19
60
19
60
19
60
19
60
19
60
Interrupting Time ms 50 50 83 83 50 50 83 83 83 83
Closing Time ms 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47
Asymmetrical current interrupting capability
Ref: Minimum opening time
Short-time current carrying capability
Duration of short-time current
kA rms
% DC
ms
kA rms
sec
50
75
30
50
3
50
75
30
50
3
50
75
54
50
2.3
50
75
54
50
2.3
63
75
30
63
3
63
75
30
63
3
63
75
54
63
1.4
63
75
54
63
1.4
75
63
54
75
1
75
63
54
75
1
Closing and Latching Capability kA peak 137 137 137 137 173 173 173 173 206 206
First Generator-Source Symmetrical
Current Interrupting Capability kA rms 25 25 25 25 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 40 40
First Generator-Source Asymmetrical
Current Interrupting Capability % DC 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130
Second Generator-Source Symmetrical
Current Interrupting Capability kA rms 31.5 31.5 40 40 40 40 50 50
Second Generator-Source Asymmetrical
Current Interrupting Capability % DC 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
Prospective TRVRate of Rise of Recovery
Voltage (RRRV)
Transient recovery voltagePeak (E2 = 1.84 x V)
kV / s
kV peak
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
3.0
9.2
Transient recovery voltageTime to Peak

(T2 = 0.62 x V) s 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1
3.1
Load Current Switching Endurance Capability Operations 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
No-Load Mechanical Endurance Capability Operations 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Out-of-Phase Current Switching Capability kA 25 25 25 25 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 37.5 37.5
90 out-of-phase power frequency recovery
voltage ( = 1.5 x sqrt(2/3) x V) kV rms 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1
90 out-of-phase inherent TRV
Rate of Rise of Recovery Voltage (RRRV) kV / s 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3
Transient recovery voltagePeak (E2 = 2.6 x V) kV peak 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
(T2 = 0.89 x V) s 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
5.4-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
037
15 kV Class Generator Circuit Breaker Ratings
Table 5.4-4. Generator Circuit Breaker Types: VCP-WG (DrawoutDO) / VCP-WRG (FixedFIX) (Continued)
Ratings achieved using forced-air cooling by blowers in the enclosure.
TRV capacitors are required if RRRV is >0.5 kV/s; or T2 is <65 s.

Note: Rated frequency: 60 Hz.
Note: Standard operating duty: CO - 30 m - CO.
Note: Relevant Standard: IEEE standards C37.013-1997 and C37.013a-2007.
Note: Test certicates available.
Description Units Short-Circuit Current (Isc)
50 kA 63 kA 75 kA
Maximum Voltage (V): 15 kV
Frame in Inches (mm)
(see Figure 5.4-3 on Page 5.4-9)
29.00
(736.6)
29.00
(736.6)
31.00
(787.4)
31.00
(787.4)
29.00
(736.6)
29.00
(736.6)
31.00
(787.4)
31.00
(787.4)
31.00
(787.4)
31.00
(787.4)
Ratings Assigned DO FIX DO FIX DO FIX DO FIX DO FIX
Continuous Current A rms 1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000

1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
4000
4000
4000
5000
4000
5000
6000
4000

4000
4000
5000
4000
5000
6000
4000
5000
4000
5000
6000
6300
7000
6300
7000
6300
7000
Dielectric Strength
Power frequency withstand voltage
Lightning impulse withstand voltage
kV rms
kV peak
36
95
36
95
36
95
36
95
36
95
36
95
36
95
36
95
36
95
36
95
Interrupting Time ms 50 50 83 83 50 50 83 83 83 83
Closing Time ms 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47
Asymmetrical current interrupting capability
Ref: Minimum opening time
Short-time current carrying capability
Duration of short-time current
kA rms
% DC
ms
kA rms
s
50
75
30
50
3
50
75
30
50
3
50
75
54
50
2.3
50
75
54
50
2.3
63
75
30
63
3
63
75
30
63
3
63
75
54
63
1.4
63
75
54
63
1.4
75
63
54
75
1
75
63
54
75
1
Closing and Latching Capability kA peak 137 137 137 137 173 173 173 173 206 206
First Generator-Source Symmetrical
Current Interrupting Capability kA rms 25 25 25 25 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 40 40
First Generator-Source Asymmetrical
Current Interrupting Capability % DC 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130
Second Generator-Source Symmetrical
Current Interrupting Capability kA rms 31.5 31.5 40 40 40 40 50 50
Second Generator-Source Asymmetrical
Current Interrupting Capability % DC 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
Prospective TRVRate of Rise of Recovery
Voltage (RRRV)
Transient recovery voltagePeak (E2 = 1.84 x V)
kV / s
kV peak
3.4
27.6
3.4
27.6
3.4
27.6
3.4
27.6
3.4
27.6
3.4
27.6
3.4
27.6
3.4
27.6
3.4
30.9
3.4
30.9

(T2 = 0.62 x V) s 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.3
9.3
Load Current Switching Endurance Capability Operations 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
No-Load Mechanical Endurance Capability Operations 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Out-of-Phase Current Switching Capability kA 25 25 25 25 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 37.5 37.5
90 out-of-phase power frequency recovery
voltage ( = 1.5 x sqrt(2/3) x V) kV rms 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4
90 out-of-phase inherent TRV
Rate of Rise of Recovery Voltage (RRRV) kV / s 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3
Transient recovery voltagePeak (E2 = 2.6 x V) kV peak 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39
(T2 = 0.89 x V) s 13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4
5.4-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataCircuit Breakers
038
Type VCP-W Circuit Breaker Operating Times
The closing time (initiation of close
signal to contact make) and opening
time (initiation of the trip signal to con-
tact break) are shown in Table 5.4-5.
Figure 5.4-4 below shows the sequence
of events in the course of circuit inter-
ruption, along with applicable VCP-W
circuit breaker timings.
Table 5.4-5. Closing Time and Opening Time
Figure 5.4-4. Sequence of Events and Circuit Breaker Operating Times
Times shown are based on 60 Hz.
% DC component capability (and asymmetry factor S) depend on the minimum contact parting time.
The % DC component capability is 50% (S factor 1.2) for all VCP-W circuit breakers.
Figure 5.4-5. Typical Transfer Times
Fast Sequential Transfer
Times shown are based on 60 Hz.

Rated
Control Voltage
Breaker
Rating
Closing Time
Milliseconds
Opening Time Milliseconds
Standard 5-Cycle Breaker Optional 3-Cycle Breaker
48V, 125V, 250 Vdc All 4560 3045 3038
120V, 240 Vac All 4560
120V or 240 Vac capacitor trip All 2641 2638
Optionalundervoltage trip release 48V, 125V, 250 Vdc All 3045 3045
Clearing Time
Interrupting Time
Contact Parting Time
Tripping Delay Time Opening Time
Shunt Trip
Operating Time
Mechanism
Operating Time
Protective Relay
Operating Time
Auxiliary Relay
Operating Time
Standard: 83 ms (5 Cycle)
Optional Available: 50 ms (3 Cycle)
Maximum Contact Parting Time = 38 ms (2-1/4 Cycle) Based on Minimum Tripping
Delay Equal to 8 ms (1/2 Cycle)
8 ms (1/2 Cycle) Minimum Delay
2 sec = (120 Cycle) Maximum Delay
3045 ms for 5 Cycle VCP-W
3038 ms for 3 Cycle VCP-W
Arcing Time
517 ms
Short-
Circuit
Begins
Rated Control
Voltage Energizes
Trip Coil
Last
Pole
Clears
Main
Contacts
Parts
52-1 Opening Time

Trip 52-1
Control
Supply
Source #1
52-1
Close 52-2
Source #2
Transfer
Initiate
52-1
b
Load
52-2
Standard
b Contact
Transfer
Initiate
Signal
0 10
Dead Time (With Arcing)
90
52-1
Makes
50 30
38 ms
20
7
ms
Arcing
Time
12 ms
40
47 ms
70 60 80 Time (ms) 100
+
52-2 Closing Time
52 ms
Dead Bus Time (No Arcing)
59 ms
Total Transfer Time
Approx. 100 ms
5.4-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataCircuit Breakers and Switchgear
039
Application Quick Check
See Table 5.4-7 for application of circuit
breakers in a radial system supplied
from a single-source transformer.
Short-circuit duty was determined using
E/X amperes and 1.0 multiplying factor
for X/R ratios in the range of 15 to 40.
Usual Service Conditions
Usual service conditions for operation
of metal-clad switchgear are as follows:
Altitude does not exceed 3300 feet
(1000m)
Ambient temperature within
the limits of 30C and +40C
(22F and +104F)
The effect of solar radiation is not
signicant
Applications Above 3300 Feet (1006m)
The rated one-minute power frequency
withstand voltage, the impulse withstand
voltage, the continuous current rating
and the maximum voltage rating must
be multiplied by the appropriate cor-
rection factor in Table 5.4-9 to obtain
modied ratings that must equal or
exceed the application requirements.
Note: Intermediate values may be obtained
by interpolation.
Applications Above or Below 40C Ambient
Refer to ANSI C37.20.2, Section 8.4
for load current-carrying capabilities
under various conditions of ambient
temperature and load.
Applications at Frequencies Less Than 60 Hz
Rated Short-Circuit Current
Based on series of actual tests performed
on Type VCP-W circuit breakers and
analysis of these test data and physics
of vacuum interrupters, it has been
found that the current interruption
limit for Type VCP-W circuit breakers
is proportional to the square root of
the frequency. Table 5.4-6 provides
derating factors, which must be applied
to breaker interrupting current at
various frequencies.
Table 5.4-6. Derating Factors
Interrupting Current
Derating Factors
50 Hz 25 Hz 16 Hz 12 Hz
None 0.65 0.52 0.45
Rated Short-Time and
Close and Latch Currents
No derating is required for short time
and close and latch current at lower
frequency.
Rated Continuous Current
Because the effective resistance of
circuit conductors is less at lower
frequency, continuous current through
the circuit can be increased somewhat.
Table 5.4-8 provides nominal current
rating for VCP-W breakers when
operated at frequencies below 60 Hz.
Table 5.4-7. Radial System Application Information
Also includes 50VCPW-ND250.
Transformer impedance 6.5% or more. All other transformer impedances are 5.5% or more.
Table 5.4-8. Current Ratings
Power Frequency and Impulse Withstand
Voltage Ratings
No derating is required for lower
frequency.
CTs, VTs, Relays and Instruments
Application at frequency other than
rated frequency must be veried for
each device on an individual basis.
Table 5.4-9. Altitude Derating Factors
Source
Transformer
MVA Rating
Operating Voltage
kV
Motor Load 2.4 4.16 6.6 12 13.8 27
100% 0%
Up to
5
Up to
7.5
50 VCP-W
250
(36 kA)
50 VCP-W
250
(33.2 kA)
150 VCP-W
500
(23 kA)
150 VCP-W
500
(22.5 kA)
150 VCP-W
500
(19.6 kA)
270 VCP-W
750
(16 kA)
7.5
10
10
10
50 VCP-W
350
(49 kA)
10 12
12 15 50 VCP-W
350
(46.9 kA)
75 VCP-W
500
(41.3 kA)
15 20
20
150 VCP-W
750
(35 kA)
150 VCP-W
750
(30.4 kA)
25
30
Breaker type and
symmetrical interrupting capability
at the operating voltage
50
150 VCP-W
1000
(46.3 kA)
150 VCP-W
1000
(40.2 kA)
270 VCP-W
1000
(22 kA)
25 50
30 270 VCP-W
1250
(25 kA)
Rated Continuous
Current at 60 Hz
Nominal Current at
Frequency Below 60 Hz
50 Hz 25 Hz 16 Hz 12 Hz
1200A
2000A
3000A
1243
2075
3119
1410
2374
3597
1519
2573
3923
1589
2703
4139
Altitude Above
Sea Level in
Feet (m)
Altitude Correction Factor to
be Applied to:
Voltage Rated
Continuous
Current
3300 (1006)
(and Below) 1.0 1.0
4000 (1219)
5000 (1524)
6000 (1829)
0.98
0.95
0.92
0.995
0.991
0.987
6600 (2012)
7000 (2137)
8000 (2438)
0.91
0.89
0.86
0.985
0.98
0.97
9000 (2743)
10,000 (3048)
12,000 (3658)
0.83
0.80
0.75
0.965
0.96
0.95
13,200 (4023)
14,000 (4267)
16,000 (4877)
0.72
0.70
0.65
0.94
0.935
0.925
16,400 (5000)
18,000 (5486)
20,000 (6096)
0.64
0.61
0.56
0.92
0.91
0.90
5.4-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataSwitchgear
040
Unusual Service Conditions
Applications of metal-clad switchgear
at other than usual altitude or temper-
ature, or where solar radiation is sig-
nicant, require special consideration.
Other unusual service conditions that
may affect design and application
include:
Exposure to salt air, hot or humid
climate, excessive dust, dripping
water, falling dirt, or other similar
conditions
Unusual transportation or storage
conditions
Switchgear assemblies when used
as the service disconnecting means
Installations accessible to the
general public
Exposure to seismic shock
Exposure to nuclear radiation
Load Current Switching
Table 5.4-10 showing number of
operations is a guide to normal main-
tenance for circuit breakers operated
under usual service conditions for most
repetitive duty applications including
isolated capacitor bank switching and
shunt reactor switching, but not for
arc furnace switching. The numbers
in the table are equal to or in excess
of those required by ANSI C37.06.
Maintenance shall consist of adjusting,
cleaning, lubricating, tightening, etc.,
as recommended by the circuit breaker
instruction book.
Continuous current switching assumes
opening and closing rated continuous
current at rated maximum voltage with
power factor between 80% leading and
80% lagging.
Inrush current switching ensures a
closing current equal to 600% of rated
continuous current at rated maximum
voltage with power factor of 30% lagging
or less, and an opening current equal
to rated continuous current at rated
maximum voltage with power factor
between 80% leading and
80% lagging.
In accordance with ANSI C37.06, if a
short-circuit operation occurs before
the completion of the listed switching
operations, maintenance is recom-
mended and possible functional part
replacement may be necessary,
depending on previous accumulated
duty, fault magnitude and expected
future operations.
Table 5.4-10. Breaker Operations Information
Each operation is comprised of one closing plus one opening.

Table 5.4-11. Heat Loss in Watts at Full Rating, at 60 Hz
Circuit Breaker Ratings Maximum Number of Operations
Rated
Maximum
Voltage
kV rms
Rated
Continuous
Current
Amperes
Rated
Short-Circuit
Current
kA rms, sym.
Between
Servicing
No-Load
Mechanical
Rated
Continuous
Current
Switching
Inrush
Current
Switching
4.76, 8.25, 15
4.76, 8.25, 15
4.76, 15
1200, 2000
3000
All
33 kA and below
All
37 kA and above
2000
1000
1000
10,000
5000
5000
10,000
5000
5000
750
400
400
27
38
All
All
All
All
500
250
2500
1500
2500
1500
100
100
Type of Switchgear
Assembly
Breaker
Rating
1200A 2000A 2500A 3000A 4000A Fan
Cooled
VCP-W
VCP-W
5, 15, and 27 kV
38 kV
600W
850W
1400W
1700W
2300W
2100W
3800W
3700W
Other Components
Each CT, standard accuracy
Each CT, high accuracy
Each VT
50W
100W
60W
CPT single-phase, 25 kVA
CPT single-phase, 45 kVA
450W
892W
Space heatereach 250W
5.4-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataAssembly Ratings
041
Standard Metal-Clad
Switchgear Assembly Ratings
VacClad-W metal-clad switchgear is
available for application at voltages up
to 38 kV, 50 or 60 Hz. Refer to the table
below for complete list of available
ratings.
Table 5.4-12. Standard VCP-W (Non-Arc-Resistant) Metal-Clad Switchgear Ratings Per IEEE C37.20.2-1999
The switchgear assembly is designed for use with type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG circuit breakers. However, please note that certain VCP-WC
circuit breakers may have higher capabilities than required by ANSI standards. In such cases, switchgear assembly ratings as given in this table
will apply.
Switchgear assemblies can be supplied with UL/CSA label. Contact Eaton for availability.
Circuit breaker requires forced air cooling to carry 4000A at 4.76, 8.25 and 15 kV, and 3000A at 38 kV.
27 kV 2500A and 2700A main bus ratings are available in two-high design congurations only.
Please note that use of certain current transformers (for example, bar type CTs) and protective devices may limit the duration to a value less than
2 seconds.
These values exceed 2.6*K*I required by IEEE C37.20.2-1999 and ANSI C37.06-2000.
These values exceed 1.55*K*I required by IEEE C37.20.2-1999.
This is a standard IEEE C37.20.2 rating for 38 kV Class of switchgear.
170 kV LIWV (BIL) rating available as an option, except when a control power transformer is included.
Rated
Maximum
Voltage
(Ref.)
Rated
Voltage
Range
Factor
K
(Ref.)
Rated
Short-
Circuit
Current
I
Insulation Level Rated Main Bus
Continuous Current
Rated Short-Time
Short-Circuit
Current
Withstand
(2-Second)
Rated Momentary
Short-Circuit
Current Withstand
(10-Cycle) (167 ms)
Power
Frequency
Withstand
Voltage,
60 Hz,
1 Minute
Lightning
Impulse
Withstand
Voltage
[LIWV]
(BIL)
K*I
2.7 *K*I
1.6 *K* I
(Ref. only)
kV rms kA rms kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms Sym. kA Crest kA rms Asym.
4.76 1 25 19 60 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 25 68 40
1.24 29 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 36 97 58
1 40 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 40 108 64
1.19 41 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 49 132 78
1 50 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 50 135 80
1 63 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 63 170 101
8.25 1.25 33 36 95 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 41 111 66
1 50 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 50 135 80
15 1.3 18 36 95 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 23 62 37
1 25 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 25 68 40
1.3 28 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 36 97 58
1 40 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 40 108 64
1.3 37 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 48 130 77
1 50 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 50 135 80
1 63 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 63 170 101
27 1 16 60 125 1200, 2000, 2500, 2700 16 43 26
1 22 1200, 2000, 2500, 2700 22 60 35
1 25 1200, 2000, 2500, 2700 25 68 40
1 31.5 1200, 2000, 2500, 2700 31.5 85 51
1 40 1200, 2000, 2500, 2700 40 108 64
38 1 16 80 150
1200, 2000, 2500 16 43 26

1 25 1200, 2000, 2500 25 68 40
1 31.5 1200, 2000, 2500 31.5 85 51
1.65 23 1200, 2000, 2500 35 95 56
1 40 1200, 2000, 2500 40 108 64
38 1 16 80 170
1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 16 43 26

1 25 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 25 68 40
1 31.5 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 31.5 85 51
1.65 23 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 35 95 56
1 40 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 40 108 64
5.4-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataAssembly Ratings
042
Assembly Ratings
VacClad-W metal-clad arc-resistant
switchgear is available for application
at voltages up to 38 kV, 50 or 60 Hz.
Refer to the table below for complete
list of available ratings.
Table 5.4-13. VacClad-W Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad Switchgear
The switchgear assembly is designed for use with type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG circuit breakers. However, please note that certain VCP-WC
will apply.
Switchgear assemblies can be supplied with UL/CSA label. Contact Eaton for availability.
515 kV switchgear is supplied with a plenum. 2738 kV switchgear is supplied with arc wall. For plenum requirements at 27 and 38 kV, contact Eaton.
Maximum continuous current rating for circuit breaker that can be supplied at 38 kV is 2500A.
Please note that use of certain current transformers (for example, bar type CTs) and protective devices
may limit the duration to a value less than 2 seconds.
These values exceed 2.6*K*I required by IEEE C37.20.2-1999 and ANSI C37.06-2000.
These values exceed 1.55*K*I required by IEEE C37.20.2-1999.
27 kV arc-resistant switchgear can be supplied in one-high conguration only.

Rated
Maximum
Voltage
(Ref.)
Rated
Voltage
Range
Factor
K
(Ref.)
Rated
Short-
Circuit
Current
I
Ratings per IEEE C37.20.2-1999 Enclosure Internal Arc Withstand
Insulation Level Rated Main Bus
Continuous Current
Rated
Short-Time
Short-
Circuit
Current
Withstand
(2-Second)
Rated Momentary
Short-Circuit
Current Withstand
(10-Cycle) (167 ms)
Accessibility
Type
Rated Arc Short-
Circuit Withstand
Current
Rated Arc
Duration
Power
Frequency
Withstand
Voltage,
60 Hz,
1 Minute
Lightning
Impulse
Withstand
Voltage
[LIWV]
(BIL)
I
E
E
E

C
3
7
.
2
0
.
7
E
E
M
A
C

G
1
4
-
1
K*I
2.7 *K*I
1.6 *K* I
(Ref. only)
Isc 2.6*Isc
kV rms kA rms kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms
Sym.
kA Crest kA rms
Asym.
kA rms
Sym.
kA Peak Sec.
4.76 1 25 19 60 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 25 68 40 2B 25 65 0.5
1.24 29 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 36 97 58 2B 36 93.6 0.5
1 40 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 40 108 64 2B 40 104 0.5
1.19 41 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 49 132 78 2B 49 127.4 0.5
1 50 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 50 135 80 2B 50 130 0.5
1 63 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 63 170 101 2B 63 170 0.5
8.25 1.25 33 36 95 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 41 111 66 2B 41 106.6 0.5
1 50 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 50 135 80 2B 50 130 0.5
15 1.3 18 36 95 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 23 62 37 2B 23 59.8 0.5
1 25 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 25 68 40 2B 25 65 0.5
1.3 28 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 36 97 58 2B 36 93.6 0.5
1 40 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 40 108 64 2B 40 104 0.5
1.3 37 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 48 130 77 2B 48 124.8 0.5
1 50 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 50 135 80 2B 50 130 0.5
1 63 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 63 170 101 2B 63 170 0.5
27
1 16 60 125 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 16 43 26 2 B 16 41.6 0.5

1 22 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 22 60 35 2 B 22 57.2 0.5
1 25 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 25 68 40 2 B 25 65 0.5
1 31.5 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 31.5 85 51 2 B 31.5 81.9 0.5
1 40 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 40 108 64 2 B 40 104 0.5
38
1 16 80 150 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 16 43 26 2 B 16 41.6 0.5

1 25 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 25 68 40 2 B 25 65 0.5
1 31.5 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 31.5 85 51 2 B 31.5 81.9 0.5
1.65 23 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 35 95 56 2 B 35 91 0.5
1 40 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 40 108 64 2 B 40 104 0.5
5.4-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataSurge Protection
043
Surge Protection
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad switch-
gear is applied over a broad range of
circuits, and is one of the many types
of equipment in the total system. The
distribution system can be subject to
voltage transients caused by lighting
or switching surges.
Recognizing that distribution system
can be subject to voltage transients
caused by lighting or switching, the
industry has developed standards to
provide guidelines for surge protection
of electrical equipment. Those guide-
lines should be used in design and
protection of electrical distribution
systems independent of the circuit
breaker interrupting medium. The
industry standards are:
ANSI C62
Guides and Standards for Surge
Protection
IEEE 242Buff Book
IEEE Recommended Practice for
Protection and Coordination of
Systems
IEEE 141Red Book
Recommended Practice for
Electric Power Distribution for
Industrial Plants
IEEE C37.20.2
Standards for Metal-Clad Switchgear
Eatons medium voltage metal-clad
and metal-enclosed switchgear that
uses vacuum circuit breakers is applied
over a broad range of circuits. It is one
of the many types of equipment in the
total distribution system. Whenever a
switching device is opened or closed,
certain interactions of the power
system elements with the switching
device can cause high frequency voltage
transients in the system. Due to the
wide range of applications and variety
of ratings used for different elements
in the power systems, a given circuit
may or may not require surge protec-
tion. Therefore, Eaton does not include
surge protection as standard with its
metal-clad or metal-enclosed medium
voltage switchgear. The user exercises
the options as to the type and extent
of the surge protection necessary
depending on the individual circuit
characteristics and cost considerations.
The following are Eatons recommen-
dations for surge protection of medium
voltage equipment. Please note these
recommendations are valid when
using Eatons vacuum breakers only.
Surge Protection Recommendations:
Note: The abbreviation ZORC
used in the
text below refers to Surge Protection Device
manufactured by Strike Technology (Pty)
Ltd. An equivalent device offered by other
manufacturers, such as Type EHZ by ABB,
and Protec Z by Northern Technologies SA
can also be used.
1. For circuits exposed to lightning,
surge arresters should be applied
in line with Industry standard
practices.
2. Transformers
a. Close-Coupled to medium
Provide transients surge pro-
tection, such as Surge Arrester
in parallel with RC Snubber, or
ZORC
. The surge protection

device selected should be
located and connected at the
transformer primary terminals
or it can be located inside the
switchgear and connected on
the transformer side of the
primary breaker.
b. Cable-Connected to medium
Provide transient surge protec-
tion, such as Surge Arrester in
parallel with RC Snubber, or
ZORC for transformers con-
nected by cables with lengths
up to 75 feet. The surge protec-
tion device should be located
and connected at the trans-
former terminals. No surge
protection is needed for trans-
formers with lightning impulse
withstand ratings equal to that
of the switchgear and connected
to the switchgear by cables at
least 75 feet or longer. For
transformers with lower BIL,
provide surge arrester in parallel
with RC Snubber or ZORC.
RC Snubber and/or ZORC damp
internal transformer resonance:
The natural frequency of transformer
windings can under some circumstances
be excited to resonate. Transformer
windings in resonance can produce
elevated internal voltages that produce
insulation damage or failure. An RC
Snubber or a ZORC applied at the
transformer terminals as indicated
above can damp internal winding
resonance and prevent the production
of damaging elevated internal voltages.
This is typically required where rectiers,
UPS or similar electronic equipment is
on the transformer secondary.
3. Arc-Furnace Transformers
transformer terminals.
4. MotorsProvide Surge Arrester in
parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC
at the motor terminals. For those
motors using VFDs, surge protec-
tion should be applied and pre-
cede the VFD devices as well.
5. GeneratorsProvide station class
Surge Arrester in parallel with RC
Snubber, or ZORC at the generator
terminals.
6. Capacitor SwitchingNo surge
protection is required. Make sure
that the capacitors lightning
impulse withstand rating is equal
to that of the switchgear.
7. Shunt Reactor Switching
reactor terminals.
8. Motor Starting Reactors or Reduced
Voltage Auto-Transformers
reactor or RVAT terminals.
9. Switching Underground Cables
Surge protection not needed.
5.4-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
044
Types of Surge Protection Devices
Figure 5.4-6. Surge Protection Devices
Generally surge protective devices
should be located as closely as possible
to the circuit component(s) that require
protection from the transients, and
connected directly to the terminals of
the component with conductors that
are as short and at as possible to
minimize the inductance. It is also
important that surge protection devices
should be properly grounded for
effectively shunting high frequency
transients to ground.
Surge Arresters
The modern metal-oxide surge
arresters are recommended because
this latest advance in arrester design
ensures better performance and high
reliability of surge protection schemes.
Manufacturers technical data must
be consulted for correct application
of a given type of surge arrester.
Notice that published arrester MCOV
(Maximum Continuous Operating
Voltage) ratings are based on 40 or
45C ambient temperature. In general,
the following guidelines are recom-
mended for arrester selections, when
installed inside Eatons medium
voltage switchgear:
A. Solidly Grounded Systems:
equal to 1.05 x V
LL
/(1.732 x T),
where V
LL
is nominal line-to-line
service voltage, 1.05 factor allows
for +5% voltage variation above
the nominal voltage according
to ANSI C84.1, and T is derating
factor to allow for operation at
55C switchgear ambient, which
should be obtained from the
arrester manufacturer for the type
of arrester under consideration.
Typical values of T are: 0.946 to 1.0.
B. Low Resistant Grounded Systems
(systems grounded through
resistor rated for 10 seconds):
Arrester 10-second MCOV capability
at 60C, which is obtained from
manufacturers data, should be
equal to 1.05 x V
LL
, where V
LL
is
nominal line-to-line service voltage,
and 1.05 factor allows for +5%
voltage variation above the
nominal voltage.
C. Ungrounded or Systems
Grounded through impedance
other than 10-second resistor:
equal to 1.05 x V
LL
/T, where V
LL

and T are as dened above.
Refer to Table 5.4-14 for recommended
ratings for metal-oxide surge arresters
that are sized in accordance with the
above guidelines, when located in
Eatons switchgear.
Surge Capacitors
Metal-oxide surge arresters limit the
magnitude of prospective surge over-
voltage, but are ineffective in control-
ling its rate of rise. Specially designed
surge capacitors with low internal
inductance are used to limit the rate of
rise of this surge overvoltage to protect
turn-to-turn insulation. Recommended
values for surge capacitors are: 0.5 f
on 5 and 7.5 kV, 0.25 f on 15 kV, and
0.13 f on systems operating at 24 kV
and higher.
RC Snubber
A RC Snubber device consists of a
non-inductive resistor R sized to match
surge impedance of the load cables,
typically 20 to 30 ohms, and connected
in series with a Surge Capacitor C. The
Surge Capacitor is typically sized to be
0.15 to 0.25 microfarad. Under normal
operating conditions, impedance of
the capacitor is very high, effectively
isolating the resistor R from the
system at normal power frequencies,
and minimizing heat dissipation during
normal operation. Under high frequency
transient conditions, the capacitor
offers very low impedance, thus effec-
tively inserting the resistor R in the
power system as cable terminating
resistor, thus minimizing reection of
bling of the traveling wave. The RC
Snubber provides protection against
high frequency transients by absorb-
ing and damping and the transients.
Please note RC Snubber is most effec-
tive in mitigating fast-rising transient
voltages, and in attenuating reections
and resonances before they have a
chance to build up, but does not limit
the peak magnitude of the transient.
Therefore, the RC Snubber alone may
not provide adequate protection. To
limit peak magnitude of the transient,
application of surge arrester should
also be considered.
ZORC
A ZORC device consists of parallel
combination of Resistor (R) and Zinc
Oxide Voltage Suppressor (ZnO), con-
nected in series with a Surge Capacitor.
The resistor R is sized to match surge
impedance of the load cables, typically
20 to 30 ohms. The ZnO is a gapless
metal-oxide non-linear arrester, set
to trigger at 1 to 2 PU voltage, where
1 PU = 1.412*(V
L-L
/1.732). The Surge
Capacitor is typically sized to be 0.15
to 0.25 microfarad. As with RC Snubber,
under normal operating conditions,
impedance of the capacitor is very
high, effectively isolating the resistor
R and ZnO from the system at normal
power frequencies, and minimizing
heat dissipation during normal opera-
tion. Under high frequency transient
conditions, the capacitor offers very
low impedance, thus effectively
inserting the resistor R and ZnO in
the power system as cable terminating
network, thus minimizing reection of
bling of the traveling wave. The ZnO
element limits the peak voltage magni-
tudes. The combined effects of R, ZnO,
and Capacitor of the ZORC device
provides optimum protection against
high frequency transients by absorbing,
damping, and by limiting the peak
amplitude of the voltage wave-fronts.
Please note that the ZORC is not a
lightning protection device. If lightning
can occur or be induced in the electrical
system, a properly rated and applied
surge arrester must precede the ZORC.
5.4-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
045
Surge Protection Summary
Minimum protection: Surge Arrester
for protection from high overvoltage
peaks, or Surge Capacitor for protec-
tion from fast-rising transient. Please
note that the surge arresters or surge
capacitor alone may not provide ade-
quate surge protection from escalating
voltages caused by circuit resonance.
Note that when applying surge capaci-
tors on both sides of a circuit breaker,
surge capacitor on one side of the
breaker must be RC Snubber or ZORC,
to mitigate possible virtual current
chopping.
Good protection: Surge Arrester in
parallel with Surge Capacitor for pro-
tection from high overvoltage peaks
and fast rising transient. This option
may not provide adequate surge
protection from escalating voltages
caused by circuit resonance. When
applying surge capacitors on both sides
of a circuit breaker, surge capacitor on
one side of the breaker must be RC
Snubber or ZORC, to mitigate possible
virtual current chopping.
Better protection: RC Snubber in paral-
lel with Surge Arrester for protection
from high frequency transients and
voltage peaks.
Best protection: ZORC, plus proper
surge arrester preceding ZORC where
needed for protection against lightning.
ZORC provides protection from high
frequency voltage transients and limits
peak magnitude of the transient to
1 to 2 PU (see ZORC description on
Page 5.4-18 for more detail). Surge
arrester provides protection from
higher voltage peaks resulting from
lightning surges.
Table 5.4-14. Surge Arrester SelectionsRecommended Ratings
Service
Voltage
Line-to-Line
kV
Solidly
Grounded System
Low Resistance
Grounded System
High Resistance or
Ungrounded System
Solidly
Grounded System
Low Resistance
Grounded System
High Resistance or
Ungrounded System
2.30
2.40
3.30
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
4.00
4.16
4.76
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
4.80
6.60
6.90
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.20
8.32
8.40
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
11.00
11.50
12.00
9
9
10
7.65
7.65
8.40
9
10
10
7.65
8.40
8.40
15
18
18
12.70
15.30
15.30
9
9
10
7.65
7.65
8.40
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
15
18
18
12.70
15.30
15.30
12.47
13.20
13.80
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
12
12
12
10.20
10.20
10.20
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
12
12
15
10.20
10.20
12.70
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
14.40
18.00
20.78
12
15
18
10.20
12.70
15.30
12
15
18
10.20
12.70
15.30
21
27
30
17.00
22.00
24.40
12
15
18
10.20
12.70
15.30
15
18
21
12.70
15.30
17.00
21
27
30
17.00
22.00
24.40
22.00
22.86
23.00
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
18
21
21
15.30
17.00
17.00
30
24.40
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
21
24
24
17.00
19.50
19.50
30
36
36
24.40
29.00
29.00
24.94
25.80
26.40
21
21
21
17.00
17.00
17.00
24
24
24
19.50
19.50
19.50
21
21
21
17.00
17.00
17.00
24
24
27
19.50
19.50
22.00
36
36
39
29.00
29.00
31.50
33.00
34.50
38.00
27
30
30
22.00
24.40
24.40
30
30
24.40
24.40
27
30
30
22.00
24.40
24.40
36
36
36
29.00
29.00
29.00
45
48
36.50
39.00
5.4-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataSurge Protection and Instrument Transformers
046
Instrument Transformers
Instrument transformers are used
to protect personnel and secondary
devices from high voltage, and permit
use of reasonable insulation levels for
relays, meters and instruments. The
secondaries of standard instrument
transformers are rated at 5A and/or
120V, 60 Hz.
Voltage Transformers
Selection of the ratio for voltage
transformers is seldom a question
since the primary rating should be
equal to or higher than the system
line-to-line voltage. The number of
potential transformers per set and
their connection is determined by the
type of system and the relaying and
metering required.
When two VTs are used, they are
typically connected L-L, and provide
phase-to-phase voltages, (Vab, Vbc,
Vca) for metering and relaying.
When three VTs are used, they are
connected line-to-ground, and pro-
vide phase-to-phase (Vab, Vbc, Vca),
as well as phase-to-ground (Va, Vb, Vc)
voltages for metering and relaying.
If metering or relaying application
requires phase-to-ground voltages,
use three VTs, each connected L-G.
If not, use of two VTs connected L-L
is sufcient.
For ground detection, three VTs
connected in Line-to-ground/broken-
delta are used.
A single VT, when used, can be
connected line-to-line (it will provide
line-to-line output, for example Vab
or Vbc or Vca), or line-to-ground (it
will provide line-to-ground output, for
example Va or Vb or Vc). Generally,
a single VT is used to derive voltage
signal for synchronizing or Over
Voltage/Under Voltage function.
The current transformer ratio is gener-
ally selected so that the maximum load
current will read about 70% full scale
on a standard 5A coil ammeter. There-
fore, the current transformer primary
rating should be 140150% of the
maximum load current.
Maximum system fault current can
sometimes inuence the current
transformer ratio selection because
the connected secondary devices
have published one-second ratings.
The zero-sequence current trans-
former is used for sensitive ground
fault relaying or self-balancing primary
current type machine differential
protection. The zero-sequence current
transformer is available with a nomi-
nal ratio of 50/5 or 100/5 and available
opening size for power cables of
7.25 inches (184.2 mm). Special
zero-sequence transformers with
larger windows are also available.
The minimum number of current
transformers for circuit relaying and
instruments is three current transform-
ers, one for each phase or two-phase
connected current transformers and one
zero-sequence current transformer.
Separate sets of current transformers
are required for differential relays.
The minimum pickup of a ground
relay in the residual of three-phase
connected current transformers is
primarily determined by the current
transformer ratio. The relay pickup
can be reduced by adding one residual
connected auxiliary current trans-
former. This connection is very desir-
able on main incoming and tie circuits
of low resistance grounded circuits.
When utilizing the MP-3000 Motor
Protective Relay, it is recommended
(CTprim/Motor FLA) is selected to
fall between 0.5 to 1.5.
Standard accuracy current transform-
ers are normally more than adequate
for most standard applications of
microprocessor-based protective
relays and meters. See Table 5.4-17
for CT accuracy information.
Table 5.4-15. Standard Voltage Transformer Ratio Information
Rating-Volts 2400 4200 4800 7200 8400 10800 12000 14400 15600 18000 21000 24000 27000 36000
Ratio 20-1 35-1 40-1 60-1 70-1 90-1 100-1 120-1 130-1 150-1 175-1 200-1 225-1 300-1
5.4-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataInstrument Transformers
047
Table 5.4-16. Standard Voltage Transformer, 60 Hz Accuracy Information
For solidly grounded 4160V system only or any type 2400V system.
For solidly grounded system only.

Note: LL = Line-to-line connection. LG = Line-to-ground connection.
Table 5.4-17. Current Transformers, 55C Ambient
Not listed in C37.20.2.

Note: Maximum number of CTsTwo sets of standard accuracy or one set of high accuracy CTs can be installed in the breaker compartment on
each side of the circuit breaker.
Switchgear Voltage TransformerANSI Accuracy
kV
Class
kV
BIL
Maximum Number
Per Set and Connection
Standard
Ratios
Burdens at 120 Volts Burdens at 69.3 Volts Thermal Rating
55C Connection
Volt-Ampere
W, X, Y Z M ZZ W, X Y M Z
5 60 2LL
or 3LG
20,
35,
40
0.3 1.2 0.3 LL
LG
LG
700
400
700
7.5
and
15
95 2LL
or 3LG
35, 40,
60, 70,
100, 120
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 1.2 LL
LG
LG
1000
550
1000
27 125 2LL
or 3LG
90, 100,
120, 130,
150, 175,
200, 225
0.3 0.3 0.3 1.2 0.3 0.3 0.3 1.2 LL
LG
LG
1000
550
1000
38 170 2LL
or 3LG
175, 300 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 LL
LG
LG
1000
550
1000
CT Ratio
(MR = Multi-Ratio)
Metering Accuracy Classication Relaying Accuracy Classication
At 60 Hz
Standard Burden
B 0.1
At 60 Hz
Standard Burden
B 0.5
At 60 Hz
Standard Burden
B 1.8
Minimum Accuracy
Required per IEEE
C37.20.2
Standard Accuracy
Supplied in VCP-W
Switchgear
Optional High Accuracy
Available in VCP-W
Switchgear
50:5
75:5
100:5
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.4
2.4
C10
C10
C10
C10
C20
C20
150:5
200:5
250:5
0.6
0.6
0.6
2.4
2.4
2.4
C20
C20
C20
C20
C20
C50
C50
C50
300:5
400:5
500:5
0.6
0.3
0.3
2.4
1.2
0.3
2.4
2.4
2.4
C20
C50
C20
C50
C50
C100
C100
C100
600:5
800:5
1000:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
2.4
1.2
0.3
C50
C50
C100
C100
C100
C200
C200
C200
1200:5
1500:5
2000:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
C100
C100
C100
C200
C200
C200
C400
C400
C400
2500:5
3000:5
4000:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
C100
C100
C200
C200
C200
C400
C400
C400
600:5 MR
1200:5 MR
2000:5 MR
3000:5 MR
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
2.4
0.3
0.3
0.3
C100
C200
C200
C200
C200
C400
C400
C400
50:5 zero sequence
100:5 zero sequence
C10
C20
5.4-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataControl Equipment
048
Control Equipment
Circuit Breaker Control
Eatons VCP-W circuit breaker has a
motor charged spring type stored
energy closing mechanism. Closing
the breaker charges accelerating
springs. Protective relays or the
control switch will energize a shunt
trip coil to release the accelerating
springs and open the breaker. This
requires a reliable source of control
power for the breaker to function as
a protective device. Typical AC and DC
control schematics for type VCP-W
circuit breakers are shown on
Pages 5.4-24 and 5.4-25.
For AC control, a capacitor trip device
is used with each circuit breaker shunt
trip to ensure that energy will be
available for tripping during fault
conditions. A control power transformer
is required on the source side of each
incoming line breaker. Closing bus tie
or bus sectionalizing breakers will
require automatic transfer of control
power. This control power transformer
may also supply other AC auxiliary
power requirements for the switchgear.
For DC control, it would require a DC
control battery, battery charger and
an AC auxiliary power source for the
battery charger. The battery provides a
very reliable DC control source, since it
is isolated from the AC power system
by the battery charger. However, the
battery will require periodic routine
maintenance and battery capacity is
reduced by low ambient temperature.
Any economic comparison of AC
and DC control for switchgear should
consider that the AC capacitor trip is
a static device with negligible mainte-
nance and long life, while the DC
battery will require maintenance and
replacement at some time in the future.
Relays
Microprocessor-based or solid-state
relays would generally require DC
power or reliable uninterruptible AC
supply for their logic circuits.
Auxiliary Switches
Optional circuit breaker and cell auxiliary
switches are available where needed
for interlocking or control of auxiliary
devices. Typical applications and
operation are described in Figure 5.4-7
and Table 5.4-18.
Breaker auxiliary switches and MOC
switches are used for breaker open/
close status and interlocking.
Auxiliary contacts available for controls
or external use from auxiliary switch
located on the circuit breaker are typi-
cally limited in number by the breaker
control requirements as follows:
Breakers with AC control voltage:
1NO and 3NC
Breakers with DC control voltage:
2NO and 3NC
When additional auxiliary contacts
are needed, following options are
available:
5/15/27 kV Breakers: Each breaker
compartment can be provided with
up to three Mechanism Operated
Cell (MOC) switches, each with
5NO and 4NC contacts. The MOC
switches are rotary switches,
mounted in the cell, and operated
by a plunger on the breaker. Two
types of MOC switches can be
providedMOC that operates with
breaker in connected position only,
or MOC that operates with breaker
in connected, as well as test position
38 kV Breakers: Each 38 kV breaker
can be provided with an additional
breaker mounted auxiliary switch,
with 5 NO and 5 NC contacts
Another optional switch available is
called TOCTruck Operated Switch.
This switch is mounted in the cell and
operates when the circuit breaker is
levered into or out of the operating
position. This switch changes its state
when breaker is moved from test to
connected position and vice versa. The
TOC provides 4NO and 5NC contacts.
Auxiliary switch contacts are primarily
used to provide interlocking in control
circuits, switch indicating lights,
auxiliary relays or other small loads.
Suitability for switching remote
auxiliary devices, such as motor
heaters or solenoids, may be checked
with the interrupting capacity listed in
Table 5.4-18. Where higher interrupting
capacities are required, an interposing
contactor should be specied.
Figure 5.4-7. Breaker Auxiliary Switch Operating Times
Table 5.4-18. Auxiliary Switch Contacts Interrupting Capacities
Type
Auxiliary
Switch
Continuous
Current
Amperes
Control Circuit Voltage
120 Vac 240 Vac 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc
Non-inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes
Breaker Auxiliary Switch
TOC Switch
MOC Switch
20
20
20
15
15
15
10
10
10
16
16
16
10
10
10
5
5
5
Inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes
TOC Switch
MOC Switch
20
20
20
15
15
15
10
10
10
16
16
16
10
10
10
5
5
5
Initiation of
Close Signal
Signal:
Initiation of
Trip Signal
Closed
Open
Opening Time
45 ms If Interrupting Time = 83 ms

b
a
t
-9 ms to -3 ms
t 3 ms
Closing Time
t = 45 60 ms
VCP-W
Circuit Breaker
Main Contacts
Breaker Auxiliary
Switch
a Contact
C
T
Closed
Open ee
Closed
Open
Breaker
Switch
b Contact
t
+4 ms to +10 ms
b
a Makes
t 3 ms
5.4-23
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataControl Equipment
049
Table 5.4-19. VCP-W Breaker Stored Energy Mechanism Control Power Requirements
Table 5.4-20. Control Power TransformersSingle-Phase, 60 Hz
Line-to-line connection only available. Refer to Eaton for other voltages and kVA ratings.
150 kV BIL.
Rated
Control
Voltage
Spring Charging Motor Close or Trip
Amperes
UV Trip
mA
Maximum
Voltage Range Indicating
Light
Amperes
Inrush
Amperes
Run
Amperes
Average Run
Time, Sec.
Close Trip
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
36.0
16.0
9.2
9
4
2
6
6
6
16
7
4
200
80
40
3856
100140
200280
2856
70140
140280
0.02
0.02
0.02
120 Vac
240 Vac
16.0
9.2
4
2
6
6
6
3
104127
208254
104127
208254
0.02
0.02
Taps Secondary
Volts
kVA kV
Class
+7-1/2% Rated 7-1/2%
2580
4470
5160
2400
4160
4800
2220
3850
4400
240/120
240/120
240/120
5, 10, 15
5, 10, 15
5, 10, 15
5
5
5
7740
9030
13405
7200
8400
12470
6680
7770
11535
240/120
240/120
240/120
5, 10, 15
5, 10, 15
5, 10, 15
15
15
15
14190
14835
24725
37088
13200
13800
23000
34500
12210
12765
21275
31913
240/120
240/120
240/120
240/120
5, 10, 15
5, 10, 15
5, 10, 15
15, 25
15
15
27
38
5.4-24
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataControl Schematics
050
Figure 5.4-8. Typical 5/15/27 kV VCP-W DC and AC Control Schematics
Operation: LS1
aa
LS1
bb
LS2
aa
LS2
bb
LC = Open until mechanism is reset.
PS1 = Open in all except between Test and Connected positions.
PS2 = Closed in all except between Test and Connected positions.
Legend: CS
C
CS
T
Y = Anti Pump Relay
SR= Spring Release Coil (Coil)
M = Spring Charge Motor
ST = Shunt Trip
PR = Protective Relay
= Secondary Disconnect
>
>
= Breaker Control SwitchClose
= Breaker Control SwitchTrip
= Open until springs are fully charged.
= Closed until springs are fully charged.
D
C

S
o
u
r
c
e
N
(-)
P
(+)
1 2
24
LS1
3
4
M
bb
PS2
bb
4
Y
LC
Y
6
Y
7
bb aa
b
SR
5
1
3
1
4
b
GL
19
6
9
1
0
1
a
a
TION
7
18
8
17
9
16
10
15
5
1
5
2
5
3
5
4
5
5
5
6
5
7
5
8
3
22
6
1
6
2
CS
C
RL
CS
T
_51N ON ION TIO TIO TIO TIO TTTT _ S_ S_ S_ TRCS TRCS_T AT AT AT AT AT AT AT AT AT AT AT AT AT TCSS TCSSL TCSSL TCSSL
PR
WL
13
12
9
A
1
0
A
2
a
a
51N ON ON TIO TIO TIO TIO S_ TRCS TRCS_ TCSSL TTT T ATI AT AT ATI AT AT LOCAT LOCATI LOCAT LOCAT LOCATI LOCAT LOCAT
11
9
U
V
UV
ST
Options
Not Available when Second
Trip Coil Option is Chosen
ANSI Standard VCP-W Breaker DC Control Schematic
ST
A
C

S
o
u
r
c
e
1 2
LS1
3
4
M
bb
PS2
bb
4
Y
Y
6
Y
7
bb aa 1
SR
5
1
3
1
4
b
GL
16
9
5
5
5
6
a
RL
6
1
0
1
a
a
AC
AC ()
CS
C
T
PR
WL
(+)
2
1
7
18
8
17
10
15
5
1
5
2
5
3
5
4
5
7
5
8
3
22
6
1
6
2
13
12
9
A
2
a
a
TION O_51N ON ON TIO TI TIO TI TTI TI TI _ S_ TRCS_ CS_ TCSSL TTT T ATI AT AT ATI AT AT LOCAT LOCATI LOCAT LOCAT LOCATI LOCAT LOCAT
14
11
9
U
V
1
0
U
V
UV
TION O 51N ON ON TIO TIO TIO TIO S_ TRCS TRCS_ TCSS TTT AT ATI AT AT ATI AT AT LOCAT LOCATI LOCAT LOCAT LOCATI LOCAT LOCAT
ST
Options
Not Available when Second
Trip Coil Option is Chosen
ST
UV
9
U
V
1
0
U
V
For AC UV
Trip Only
ANSI Standard VCP-W Breaker AC Control Schematic
Spring
Charged
Indicating
Light
Spring
Charged
Indicating
Light
5.4-25
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataControl Schematics
051
Figure 5.4-9. Typical 38 kV VCP-W DC and AC Control Schematics
N
(-)
P
(+)
24
3
3
A
4
M
PS2
bb
4
21
LS2 Y
LC
Y
6
Y
7
aa
b
SR
20
5
1
3
1
4
b
19
6
9
1
0
a
TION
7
18
8
17
9
5
3
5
5
5
6
5
7
5
8
3
22
6
1
6
2
TION LOCAT
CS
C
CS
T
51N ON TION TIO ATIO ATIO ATIO TRCS TRCS TCSSLT AT AT AT AT AT AT LOCAT LOCAT LOCAT LOCAT LOCAT LOCAT LOCAT
PR
13
12
9
A
1
0
A
2
a
14
11
9
U
V
1
0
U
V
UV
51N ON ON TIO TI TIO TI S_ TRCS TRCS_ TCSSL TTT T ATI AT AT ATI AT AT LOCAT LOCATI LOCAT LOCAT LOCATI LOCAT LOCAT
ST
Spring
Charged
Indicating
Light
ST
U1
U24
U2
U23
U3
U22
U4
U21 U24
U5
U20
U6
U19
U7
U18
U8 U9 U10
U15
This a Contact from
Second Trip Coil Option
is Chosen and Make the
Appropriate Connections
Breaker DC Control Schematic
1 2
24
LS1
3
3
A
4
M
PS2
bb
4
PS Y
6
Y SR
20
5
1
3
1
4
b
16
9
5
5
5
6
a
19
6
9
1
a
a
AC
AC (-)
CAP TRIP DEV
CS
C
PR
(+)
2
1
7
18
8
17
10
15
5
1
5
2
5
3
5
7
3
22 TION LOCAT
9
U
V
1
0
U
V
UV
TION O_51N ON TION TIO ATIO ATIO ATIO T AT AT AT __ TRCS_ TRCS_ TCSSAT AT AT AT AT AT AT LOCAT LOCAT LOCAT LOCAT LOCAT LOCAT LOCAT
ST
UV
9
U
V
1
0
U
V
For AC UV
Trip Only
Breaker AC Control Schematic
12
9
A
2
a
a
ST
This Contact from
Second Trip Coil Option
is Chosen and Make the
Appropriate Connections
U1 U2 U3
U22
U4
U21 U24
U5
U20
U6
U19
U7
U18
U8
U17
U9
U16
U10
U15
OPTIONS
OPTIONS
D
C

S
o
u
r
c
e
GL RL WL
GL RL WL Spring
Charged
Indicating
Light
A
C

S
o
u
r
c
e
Operation: LS1
aa
LS1
bb
LS2
aa
LS2
bb
LC = Open until mechanism is reset.
PS1 = Open in all except between Test and Connected positions.
PS2 = Closed in all except between Test and Connected positions.
Legend: CS
C
CS
T
Y = Anti Pump Relay
SR= Spring Release Coil (Coil)
M = Spring Charge Motor
ST = Shunt Trip
PR = Protective Relay
= Secondary Disconnect
>
>
= Breaker Control SwitchClose
= Breaker Control SwitchTrip
5.4-26
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Technical DataRelaysDevice Numbers, Type and Function
052
Figure 5.4-10. Protective RelaysFeeder Circuit
Figure 5.4-11. Protective RelaysInduction Motors Below 1500 hp
Minimum Adequate Protection
Figure 5.4-12. Protective RelaysTransformer Feeder
Figure 5.4-13. Protective RelaysInduction Motors Above 1500 hp and
Synchronous Motors
Phase CT Rating = 200% Feeder Full Load
EDR-3000 = Eaton Distribution Relay
Alternate to 50/51N
Bus
50/5
1
1
3
52
50/51
50/51N
50/51G
EDR-3000
Bus
50/5
1
3
52
49
50
51
46
86
51G
EMR-3000
M
1
1
2
27/
47
27/
47X
VR-300
Phase CT Rating = 150% Full Load
EMR-3000 = Eaton Motor Relay
27/47Undervoltage, Phase Sequence, and Unbalanced Voltage Relay
VR-300 (One Per Bus)
27/47xAuxiliary Relay for Multi-motor System
Bus
50/5
1
1
N
ETR-4000
50/51
50N/51N
50N/51N
50/51
87T
50/51G
87GD
50/51G
3Y
3Y
52
52
86
63
ETR-4000 = Eaton Transformer Relay
87TTransformer Differential Relay (Above 5 MVA)
86GD = Ground Differential Relay (Above 5 MVA and
Low Resistance Grounded)
86Lockout Relay
63Sudden Pressure Relay (Liquid Above 5 MVA)
Alternate to 50/51N
U
R
T
D
52
87
M
87
Bus
RTD
3
A
49
50
51
46
50G
51G
EMR-4000
3
3
1
86
2
37
38
66
2/19
74
86
B
86
A
3
B
NEUT
50/5
1
27/47
55
MD-3000
1
DP-300
APreferred Scheme (MD-3000 = Self-Balancing Differential Scheme)
BAlternate Scheme (DP-300 = Restrained Differential Scheme)
EMR-4000 = Eaton Motor Relay
87Motor Differential Relay
86Lockout Relay
55Loss of Synchronism (Synchronous Motors Only)
URTDUniversal RTD Interface Module
5.4-27
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
053
EDR-4000 RelayTypical One-Line Diagrams
Figure 5.4-14. EDR-4000 Eaton Distribution RelayTypical Main or Feeder Breaker Application Diagram
Can be set for Forward, Reverse or Both directions.
Can be Set for Underfreq, Overfreq, Rate of Change or Vector Change.
5.4-28
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
054
EDR-5000 RelayTypical One-Line Diagrams
Figure 5.4-15. EDR-5000 Eaton Distribution RelayTypical Main or Feeder Breaker Application Diagram
Can be set for Forward, Reverse or Both directions.
Can be Set for Underfreq, Overfreq, Rate of Change or Vector Change.

Refer to Tab 4 for details on Eatons relays. Refer to Tab 3 for details on Eatons available metering.
5.4-29
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Typical Standard Metal-Clad Switchgear Application Layouts, 515 kV
055
Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangements (Standard Metal-Clad)
Note: Arrangements shown in Figures 5.4-165.4-18 can be provided in 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide, 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) high,
96.25-inch (2444.8 mm) deep structures with 50VCPWND, 1200A circuit breakers.
Note: R = Multi-function relay, M = Multi-function meter.
Figure 5.4-16. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs and Line CPTs
5 or 15 kV VCP-W Switchgear, 1200 or 2000A Mains and Tie, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures
Figure 5.4-17. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs, but without Line CPTsPreferred Arrangement
Line VTs
Bus 2
CTs
R M
Source 2 Feeder
52-M2
1200 or
2000A
CTs
R M
1200A
Feeder
CTs
R M
1200A
Bus VTs Bus VTs
Feeder
CTs
R M
1200A
52-T
1200 or
2000A
Line CPT
1-ph, 15 kVA max.
Line VTs
Bus 1
CTs
R M
Source 1
52-M1
1200 or
2000A
Line CPT
1-ph, 15 kVA max.
Line VTs
Bus 2
CTs
Source 2 Feeder
52-M2
1200 or
2000A
CTs
R M
1200A
Bus VTs Bus VTs
Feeder
CTs
R M
1200A
52-T
1200 or
2000 A
Line VTs
Bus 1
CTs
R M
Source 1
52-M1
1200 or
2000A
R M
5.4-30
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
056
Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangements (Continued)
Note: R = Multi-function relay, M = Multi-function meter
Figure 5.4-18. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs, but without Line CPTsAlternate Arrangement
Figure 5.4-19. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs, and Line CPTs
5 or 15 kV VCP-W Switchgear, 3000A Mains and Tie, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures
M R M R
M R M R
Feeder
CTs
1200A
1200A
CTs
Feeder
CTs
52-M2
1200 or
2000A
52-T
1200 or
2000A
CTs CTs
CTs
Feeder
Feeder
52-M1
1200 or
2000A
1200A
1200A
Source 1 Source 2
Line VTs
Line VTs
Bus VTs
Bus VTs
Bus 2 Bus 1
M R M R
CTs
52-M2
3000A
52-T
3000A
Source 2
Bus VTs
Bus VTs
Bus 2 Bus 1
M R
CTs
52-M1
3000A
Source 1
M R
Line VTs Line VTs
Line CPT
1-ph, 15 kVA max.
Line CPT
1-ph, 15 kVA max.
5.4-31
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
057
Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangements (Continued)
Note: R = Multi-function relay, M = Multi-function meter
Figure 5.4-20. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs
5 or 15 kV VCP-W Switchgear, 3000A Mains and Tie, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures
This arrangement can be supplied with cooling fans to allow 4000A continuous.
Medium Voltage High Resistance
Grounding System
Refer to Tab 36, Section 36.1, for
complete product description, single-
line diagram, layout and dimensions
of medium voltage high resistance
grounding system.
M
R
52-M1
3000 A
52-T
3000 A
Bus VTs
Bus 2 Bus 1
M
R
52-M2
3000 A
Bus VTs
(Optional
Fans)
(Optional
Fans)
(Optional
Fans)
Line VTs Line VTs
Source 1 Source 2

5.4-32
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05058
5.5-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Layout Dimensions5 and 15 kV, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures (Standard Metal-Clad)
059
Layout Dimensions5 and 15 kVDimensions in Inches (mm)
Typical Units
Figure 5.5-1. 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide
Typical Breaker/Breaker Vertical Section
Typical Auxiliary/Breaker Vertical Section
Typical Auxiliary/Auxiliary Vertical Section
Tie Breaker Bus Transition
Requirements
Figure 5.5-4. Tie Breaker Bus Transition
Requirements
Breakers cannot be located in bus transition

compartment.
Available Congurations
Figure 5.5-5. Available Congurations
For 4000A force cooled application,

refer to Eaton.
This conguration is available for indoor

and outdoor walk-in designs only.
Dimensions for estimating purposes only.

1200 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
Auxiliary
Vented
Auxiliary
Compartment
(Non-Drawout)
Vent Area
1200 Ampere
Breaker
1200 Ampere
Breaker
1200 Ampere
Breaker
2000 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
Auxiliary
Drawout
Auxiliary
2000 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
Auxiliary
1200 Ampere
Breaker
2000 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
Auxiliary
2000 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
Auxiliary
1200 Ampere
Breaker
3000 Ampere
Breaker
3000 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
Auxiliary
5.5-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
060
Typical Weights in Lbs (kg)
Table 5.5-1. Assemblies (Less Breakers. See Table 5.5-2 for Breakers.)
See Table 5.5-2 for breakers.

Table 5.5-2. Breaker Weights in Lbs (kg)
Impact weight = 1.5 times static weight.

Figure 5.5-6. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle Single Row
Figure 5.5-7. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle Double Row
Type of
Vertical Section
Main Bus
Rating Amperes
Indoor Aisleless Sheltered-Aisle Including Aisle
Single Row Double Row
B/B 1200
2000
3000
4000
2400 (1090)
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
2700 (1226)
3200 (1453)
3300 (1500)
3400 (1545)
3500 (1590)
4200 (1907)
4300 (1952)
4400 (1998)
4500 (2045)
7200 (3269)
7400 (3360)
7600 (3450)
7700 (3500)
B/A
or
A/B
1200
2000
3000
4000
2300 (1044)
2400 (1090)
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
2900 (1317)
3000 (1362)
3100 (1407)
3200 (1453)
4100 (1861)
4200 (1907)
4300 (1952)
4400 (1998)
7000 (3178)
7200 (3269)
7400 (3360)
7500 (3409)
A/A 1200
2000
3000
4000
2000 (908)
2100 (953)
2200 (999)
2300 (1046)
2600 (1180)
2700 (1226)
2800 (1271)
2900 (1317)
3800 (1725)
3900 (1771)
4000 (1816)
4100 (1861)
6400 (2906)
6600 (2996)
6800 (3087)
6900 (3136)
Type of
Breaker
Current Rating, Amperes
1200 2000 3000
Approximate Weight, Lbs (kg), Static
50 VCP-W 250, 40C, 25, 40

50 VCP-W 350, 50C, 50
50 VCP-W 500, 63C, 63
350 (159)
460 (209)
575 (261)
410 (186)
490 (222)
575 (261)
525 (238)
525 (238)
575 (261)
75 VCP-W 500, 50C, 50
150 VCP-W 500, 25C, 25
150 VCP-W 750, 40C, 40
375 (170)
350 (159)
350 (159)
410 (186)
410 (186)
410 (186)
525 (238)
525 (238)
525 (238)
150 VCP-W 1000, 50C, 50
150 VCP-W 1500, 63C, 63
460 (209)
575 (261)
490 (222)
575 (261)
525 (238)
575 (261)
Figure 5.5-8. Indoor
Figure 5.5-9. Outdoor Aisleless
Dimensions and weights for estimating
purposes only.
5.5-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
061
Dimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)
Figure 5.5-10. Top View of Typical Indoor
Breaker and Auxiliary Structures
Primary conduit locations for top

or bottom entry.
Figure 5.5-11. Base Plan of a Typical Indoor
Breaker or Auxiliary Structure
Primary conduit locations for top or

bottom entry.
Recommended minimum clearance to rear

of VacClad-W: 36.00 inches (914.4 mm).
Floor steel, if used, must not exceed 3.25

inches (82.6 mm) under VacClad-W.
Anchor locations: indoor0.50-inch

(12.7 mm) bolts or weld, outdoor0.50-inch
(12.7 mm) bolts.
Station ground connection provision.
Secondary conduit space: Allmaximum

of 1.00-inch (25.4 mm) projection.
Minimum clearance to LH side of

VacClad-W: 32.00 inches (812.8 mm).
Finished foundation surface shall be level

within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches
(914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back, and
diagonally, as measured by a laser level.
Minimum clearance to front of VacClad-W:

70.00 inches (1778.0 mm).
Floor steel if used, must not exceed this

dimension under VacClad-W.
Figure 5.5-12. Primary Conduit Locations for
Top or Bottom Entry
Changes to 8.25 (209.6 mm) if optional

hinged rear doors are required.
Figure 5.5-13. Maximum Hinged
Panel Equipment
Note: The gure above shows that the
arrangement of components differs
between upper and lower panels. The gure
may also be used to select custom arrange-
ments of hinged panel components. Also,
the use of multi-purpose solid-state relays
such as Eatons Digitrip 3000 (same size as
7) will signicantly reduce consumption of
panel space.
3.00
(76.2)
23.00
(584.2)
3.00 (76.2)
2.00
(50.8)
6.00
(152.4)
(4) Knockouts
for Top Secondar TT y
Conduit Entry
2.00
(50.8)
3.00
(76.2)
Front
7.00
(177.8)
32.00 (812.8)
3.38
5 56 5.56
(141.2)
0.56
(14.2)
3.00
(76.2)
23.00
(584.2)
32.00
(812.8)
3.00 (76.2)
(514.4)
0.25 (6.4) Member
9
6
.
2
5

(
2
4
4
4
.
8
)
9.00
(228.6)
2.00
(50.8)
34 25 34.25
(870.0)
6
0
.
8
8

(
1
5
4
6
.
4
)
4
4
.
5
0

(
1
1
3
0
.
3
)
0.56 (14.2)
34.25
(870.0)
2.00
(50.8)
Front

11.25 (285.8)
Two Conduits
Four Conduits
7.00 (177.8)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 7
2 2 2 7
4
4
4
3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3
6 5 5
6 5 5
Upper
Hinged
Panel
Lower
Hinged
Panel
1-Large Relay
Case
2-Small Relay
Case
3-Instrument
4-Test Switch
5-Switch
6-Lock-out
Relay or
Switch
7-IQ Metering
Unit
5.5-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
062
Figure 5.5-14. 5/15 kV Switchgear Outdoor Aisleless Base Plan (Typical Details)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Location for station
ground connection.
1
2
Attach switchgear to
foundation using one
of the two holes.
Use 5/8" Grade 5 or
better bolt. Torque
to 150 ft.-lbs.
(Total of 4 mounting
bolts per vertical
section, one at each
corner.)
Power cable entrance
space. Refer to shop
order base plan drawing
for conduit locations.
Conduit projection not
to exceed 8.00 inches (203.2 mm).
3
Secondary control wiring
conduit entrance space.
Conduit stub ups not to
project more than 7.00 inches (177.8 mm).
4
4.50 (114.3)
View X-X
70.00 (1778)
Minimum Recommended Clearance
Front of Switchgear
6.00 (152.4)
0.12
(3.0)
36.00 (914.4)
0.25
(6.4)
0.56 (14.2)
7.12
(180.8)
8.00 (203.2)
20.50
(520.7)
21.25 (539.8)
(3.0)
90.69 (2303.5)
36.00 (914.4)
4.38 (111.3)
Channel
Locations
4
Outdoor
End Wall
Outdoor
End Wall
Optional
Rear Door
1
2
7 GA Steel
Mounting Clip
Supplied by Eaton
3.00 (76.2)
0.56 (14.2)
101.25 (2571.8)
36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4)
4.50 (114.3)
90.27 (2292.8)
X
X
3
3
2
10.56 (268.2)
2.00 (50.8)
7.67 (194.8)
2.00 (50.8)
Grade Level
11.50 (292.1)
3.31 (84.1)
90.27 (2292.8)
7.12 (180.8)
C
L
CC
Attach to the Switchgear
Channels Using Supplied Hardware
6.00
(152.4)
1.00 (25.4)
(101.6)
2.00 (50.8)
5/8" Bolt & HDWE
Supplied by Customer
Attach to the Floor at One of the Two Hole
Locations Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt or
Better Torque to 150 Ft.-Lbs.
View A
2.00 (50.8)
6.00
(152.4)
2
Mounting Clip Details
4.50
0.63 (16.0)
6.00 (152.4)
3.00
(76.2)
4.25
(108.0)
4.00 (101.6)
4.88 (124.0)
4.50 (114.3)
0.75 (19.1)
4.50 (114.3)
2.75 (69.8)
4.50 (114.3)
2.75 (69.8)
within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36 inches
5
5.5-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
063
Figure 5.5-15. 5/15 kV Switchgear Outdoor Sheltered Aisle Base Plan (Typical Details)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
C
h
a
n
n
e
l
L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
Aisle
L
O
C
A
T
I
O
N
S
C
H
A
N
N
E
L
38.00 (965.2) 36.00 (914.4)
Outdoor
End Wall
Outdoor
End Wall
38.00 (965.2)
90.69 (2303.5)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
6.00 (152.4)
90.27
(2292.8)
68.96
(1751.6)
4.00
(101.6)
0.10
(2.5)
0.10
(2.5)
0.75
(19.1)
11.50
(292.1)
0.70
(17.8)
3.88 (98.5)
3.38 (85.9)
11.40
(289.6)
11.50
(292.1)
167.23
(4247.6)
4.88 (124.0)
Channels Using Supplied Hardware
Attach to the Floor at
One of the Two Hole Locations
Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt or
Better Torque to 150 Ft.-Lbs.
36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4)
ground connection.
1
5
Attach switchgear to
of the two holes.
Use 5/8" Grade 5 or
better bolt. Torque
to 150 ft.-lbs.
bolts per vertical
corner.)
Conduit projection
not to exceed
8.00 inches (203.2 mm).
3
Secondary control wiring
conduit entrance space.
Conduit stub ups not to
project more than
7.00 inches (177.8 mm).
4
Front of Switchgear
Optional
Rear Door
2
36.00 (914.0)
3
3
1
2
7 GA Steel
Mounting Clip
Supplied by Eaton
L
C
LL
7.00 (177.8)
11.50 (292.1)
20.50
(520.7)
21.25 (539.8)
8.00 (203.2)
4.38 (111.3)
7.12
(180.8)
7.12 (180.8)
0.56 (14.2)
3.00 (76.2)
4
3.00 (76.2)
0.56 (14.2)
0.12 (3.0)
0
(50.8)
4.50
(114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
Removable
Covers
4.00 (101.6)
3.00 (76.2)
5
Mounting Angle Details
2
Typical
View X-X
X
2.75
(69.8)
3.75
(95.3)
6.50 (165.1)
1.25
(31.8)
0.63 (16.0)
6.00
(152.4)
(101.6)
1.00 (25.4)
3.00
(76.2)
6.00
(152.4)
View
5/8" Bolt & HDWE
Supplied by
Customer
X SEE ENLARGED
VIEWA
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
4.50
(114.3)
Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt
or Better Torque to 150 Ft.-Lbs.
4.25
6.00 (152.4) 4.50 (114.3)
0.75 (19.1)
4.50
(114.3)
2.75 (69.8)
4.50 (114.3)
2.75 (69.8)
Finished foundation
surface shall be level within
0.06-inch (1.5 mm)
in 36 inches (914.4 mm)
left-to-right, front-to-back,
and diagonally, as measured
by a laser level.
5
5.5-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
064
Figure 5.5-16. 5/15 kV Switchgear Outdoor Common Aisle Base Plan (Typical Details)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4.50 (114.3)
261.50
(6642.1)
3.00 (76.2)
Removable
Covers
C
h
a
n
n
e
l
L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
90.27
(2292.8)
4.00 (101.6)
4.50 (114.3)
00
(50.8)
C
h
a
n
n
e
l
L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
C
h
a
n
n
e
l
2.00
(50.8)
ground connection
typical each end unit.
1 5 Attach switchgear to
of the two holes.
Use 5/8" Grade 5 or
better bolt. Torque
to 150 ft. lbs.
bolts per vertical
corner.)
order base plan drawing
Conduit projection
not to exceed
8.00 inches (203.2 mm).
3 Secondary control wiring conduit
entrance space. Conduit stub ups
not to project more than
7.00 inches (177.8 mm).
4 2
11.50 (292.1)
LL
3
3
1
2
7 GA Steel
Mounting Clip
Supplied by Eaton
5
2
4
4
Outdoor
End Wall
Outdoor
End Wall
Aisle
3.75
(95.3)
Minimum
Recommended
Clearance
Minimum
Recommended
Clearance
X
X
View X-X
Mounting Angle Details
Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt or
Better Torque to 150 Ft. Lbs.
Channels Using
Supplied Hardware
36.00
(914.4)
Optional
Rear Door
Note:
First install both
rows of switchgear
then install aisle
parts per drawing. (Later)
11.50
(292.1)
4.00 (101.6)
0.12 (3.0)
0.75
(19.1)
11.50
3.00 (76.2)
0.56 (14.2)
0.56 (14.2)
3.00 (76.2)
90.27
(2292.8)
68.96
(1751.6)
4.00 (101.6)
6.00 (152.4)
3.88 (98.5)
3.38 (85.8)
90.69 (2303.5)
36.00
(914.4)
20.50
(520.7)
7.12 (180.8)
7.12 (180.8)
4.00
3.00
(76.2)
21.25 (539.8)
8.00 (203.2)
6.00
(152.4)
4.00 (101.6)
6.00
(152.4)
4.88 (124.0)
(146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
6.50
(165.1)
0.12
(3.0)
36.00
(914.4)
38.00
(965.2)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
38.00
(965.2)
(292.1)
Finished foundation
surface shall be level
within 0.06-inch
(1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches
(914.4 mm) left-to-right,
front-to-back, and
diagonally, as measured
by a laser level.
6
5.5-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Layout Dimensions5 kV, 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide, Indoor Only (Standard Metal-Clad)
065
Layout Dimensions5 kVDimensions in Inches (mm)
Typical UnitsIndoor
Typical Breaker/Breaker Vertical Section
Typical Auxiliary/Auxiliary Vertical Section
Requirements
Requirements

compartment.
Typical Weights
Table 5.5-3. Switchgear Assembly
(Less Breaker)
Table 5.5-4. Circuit Breaker
Breaker impact weight = 1.5 x static weight.
Type of
Vertical
Section
Main Bus
Rating,
Amperes
Weight
Lbs (kg)
B/B 1200
2000
2000 (908)
2200 (999)
B/A or A/B 1200
2000
1700 (772)
1900 (863)
A/A 1200
2000
1600 (726)
1800 (817)
Type of
Circuit
Breaker
Current
Rating,
Amperes
Weight
Lbs (kg)
(Static)
50 VCPW-ND-250 1200 345 (157)
1200 Ampere
Breaker
1200 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
Auxiliary
1200 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
Auxiliary
Drawout
Auxiliary
Drawout
Auxiliary
1200 Ampere
Breaker
5.5-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Layout Dimensions5 kV, 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide, Indoor Only (Standard Metal-Clad)
066
Primary conduit locations for top

or bottom entry.

bottom entry.


Anchor locations: indoor0.50-inch (12.7 mm)

bolts or weld, outdoor0.50-inch (12.7 mm)
bolts.




70.00 inches (1778.0 mm).

Top or Bottom Entry
Changes to 8.25 (209.6 mm) if optional

hinged rear doors are required.
Panel Equipment
such as Eatons Digitrip 3000 (same size
as 7) will signicantly reduce consumption
of panel space.
3.00
(76.2)
23.00
(584.2)
3.00 (76.2)
2.00
(50.8)
6.00
(152.4)
(4) Knockouts
Conduit Entry
2.00
(50.8)
3.00
(76.2)
Front
7.00
(177.8)
22.00 (558.8)
3.38
5 56 5.56
(141.2)
0.56
(14.2)
3.00
(76.2)
23.00
(584.2)
22.00
(558.8)
3.00 (76.2)
(514.4)
0.25 (6.4) Member
9
6
.
2
5

(
2
4
4
4
.
8
)
9.00
(228.6)
2.00
(50.8)
24 25 24.25
(619.9)
6
0
.
8
8

(
1
5
4
6
.
4
)
4
4
.
5
0

(
1
1
3
0
.
3
)
0.56 (14.2)
24.25
(619.9)
2.00
(50.8)
Front

11.25 (285.8)
Two Conduits
Four Conduits
7.00 (177.8)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
1 2
1
2 7
2 2
7
4
4
3 3
3 3
6 5
6 5
Upper
Hinged
Panel
Lower
Hinged
Panel
1-Large Relay
Case
2-Small Relay
Case
3-Instrument
4-Test Switch
5-Switch
6-Lock-out
Relay or
Switch
7-IQ Metering
Unit
5.5-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Layout DimensionsSpecial Design5 kV, Low Prole 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad)
067
Figure 5.5-26. 5 kV, 1200A, 250 MVA VCP-W ND Low Prole 26.00-Inch
(660.4 mm) Wide Indoor Unit, Blank/Breaker
Depth can be reduced to 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm) if power cables

enter from top.
(660.4 mm) Wide Indoor Unit, Breaker/Blank
Depth can be reduced to 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm) if power cables

enter from below.
(660.4 mm) Wide Indoor Unit, Auxiliary/Breaker
Depth can be reduced to 72.00 inch (1831.7 mm) if power cables enter
from top.
Figure 5.5-29. Tie Breaker Bus Transition Requirements
Figure 5.5-30. Available Congurations (Front View)
Relays or control devices cannot be mounted on the circuit breaker

or auxiliary compartment door.
Typical Weights
Table 5.5-5. Switchgear Assembly (Less Breaker)
Table 5.5-6. Circuit Breaker
Breaker impact weight = 1.5 x static weight.

36.00
(914.4)
80.00
(2032.0)
80.00
(2032.0)
521
LL
(1)
SCD
0H7
Pad
R
T
H
36.00
(914.4)
80.00
(2032.0)
80.00
(2032.0)
521
SCD
0H7
Pad
R
T
H
VTX
(2)
36.00
(914.4)
80.00
(2032.0)
80.00
(2032.0)
521
LP
(2)
SCD
0H7
Pad
R
T
H
RTH
Vertical Section
Type
Main Bus Rating,
Amperes
Weight
Lbs (kg)
B/A or A/B 1200
2000
1500 (682)
1700 (772)
A/A 1200
2000
1400 (636)
1600 (726)
Circuit Breaker
Type
Current Rating,
Amperes
Weight (Static)
Lbs (kg)
50 VCPW-ND-250 1200 345 (157)
Blank
1200 Ampere
ND Breaker
1200 Ampere
ND Breaker
Blank
1200 Ampere
ND Breaker
Auxiliary or
Blank
Auxiliary or
Blank
Auxiliary or
Blank
Auxiliary or
Blank
1200 Ampere
ND Breaker
5.5-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Layout DimensionsSpecial Design5/15 kV, Low Prole 36.00-Inch (9.14.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad)
068
Figure 5.5-31. 36.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide VCP-W Low Prole Indoor Unit
Other depths possible depending on cable entry direction and VT/CPT

connections. Contact Eaton.
Figure 5.5-32. Tie Breaker Bus Transition Requirements
Figure 5.5-33. Available Congurations (Front View)
Typical Weights
Table 5.5-7. Assemblies (Less Breakers, See Table 5.5-2 for Breakers)
36.00
(914.4)
86.25
(2190.8)
80.00
(2032.0)
Blank
VT or CPT
C
T
C
T
C
T
C
T
Breaker
HTR
BYZ(1)
VT Cables
Either/Or
SC
Access for
VT Cables
Vertical Section
Type
Main Bus Rating,
Amperes
Indoor Structure
Lbs (kg)
B/B 1200
2000
3000
2200 (999)
2300 (1044)
2400 (1090)
B/A or A/B 1200
2000
3000
2100 (953)
2200 (999)
2300 (1044)
A/A 1200
2000
3000
1800 (818)
1900 (864)
2000 (908)
VCP-W
Breaker
1200 or
2000 A
Blank
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
Auxiliary Auxiliary
VCP-W
Breaker
1200, 2000
or 3000 A
5.5-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Layout Dimensions27 kV, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad), One-High Design
069
Layout Dimensions27 kV One-High DesignDimensions in Inches (mm)
Typical Units
Figure 5.5-34. Indoor
36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Typical
Auxiliary/Breaker Vertical Section
Figure 5.5-35. Outdoor Aisleless
Figure 5.5-36. Indoor Auxiliaries
36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Typical
Auxiliary/Auxiliary Vertical Section
Table 5.5-8. Assemblies (Less Breakers)
Breaker impact = 1.5 x breaker weight.

Type of
Vertical
Section
Main Bus
Rating
Amperes
Indoor Outdoor
Aisleless
A/B 1200
2000
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
3400 (1545)
3500 (1591)
A/A 1200
2000
2200 (999)
2300 (1045)
2800 (1271)
2900 (1317)
Type of
Breaker
Current Rating,
Amperes
1200 2000
270 VCP-W 750
270 VCP-W 1000
415 (188)
415 (188)
475 (216)
475 (216)
270 VCP-W 1250, 25C
270 VCP-W 40, 40C
415 (188)
415 (188)
475 (216)
475 (216)
Drawout
VTs TT
1200 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
VTs TT
2000 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
VTs TT
Drawout
VTs TT
Drawout
Fuses
Fixed
CPT
5.5-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Layout Dimensions27 kV, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad), One-High Design
070

bottom entry.

bottom entry.

Floor steel, if used, must not exceed

3.25 inches (82.6 mm) under VacClad-W.

(12.7 mm) bolts or weld, outdoor
0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts.




72.00 inches (1828.8 mm).

Note: Outdoor Aisleless Base Plan
27 kV switchgear outdoor Aisleless base
plan details are same as 5/15 kV outdoor
Aisleless switchgear. Refer to Figure 5.5-14.
Top or Bottom Entry
Changes to 8.25 inches (209.6 mm) if

optional hinged rear doors are required.
Panel Equipment
device 7) will signicantly reduce
consumption of panel space.
23.00
(584.2)
32.00 (812.8)
3.00 (76.2)
(2) Knockouts
Conduit Entry
8 50 8.50
(215.9) (215 9)
2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8)
3 00 3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
Front
3.88 (98.6)
3.88
(98.6)
5.56
(141.2)
0.56
(14.2)
3.00
(76.2)
23.00
(584.2)
32.00 (812.8)
3.00 (76.2)
15.50
(393.7)
9
6
.
2
5

(
2
4
4
4
.
8
)
9.00 (228.6)

2.00 (50.8)
34.25
(870.0)
5
9
.
3
1

(
1
5
0
6
.
5
)
3
4

(
8
6
3
.
6
)
0.56 (14.2)
2.00 (50.8)
34.25
(870.0)
Front
0.25 (6.35) Member
11.25 (285.8)
Two Conduits
Four Conduits
7.00 (177.8)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
1 1 1 2 1 1
2 2 2 7 2 2
4
4
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
6 5 5
Upper
Hinged
Panel
Lower
Hinged
Panel
1-Large Relay
Case
2-Small Relay
3-Instrument
t
Relay or
7-IQ Metering
Unit
No devices on the
breaker compartment
door.
5.5-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Layout Dimensions27 kV Two-High Design
071
Layout Dimensions27 kV Two-High Design
Typical UnitsIndoor
Figure 5.5-42. Indoor 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm)

Wide Typical Breaker-over-Breaker
Vertical Section
For 1-high arrangement (1 breaker per cell),

depth may be reduced to 108.64 inches
(2759.5 mm).
Typical Auxiliary-over-Breaker
Vertical Section

Available Main Bus Ratings for 27 kV two-high design are 1200A, 2000A, 2500A or 2700A.
Bus connected, maximum 4A fuses. CPT is installed remote from the switchgear.
Fuses are bus or line connected. CPT is installed in front bottom, on drawout frame.
Maximum CPT size is single-phase 37.5 kVA or three-phase 45 kVA.
Bus or Line connected, maximum 4A fuses. CPT is installed remote from the switchgear.
Blank 1200 Ampere
Breaker
1200 Ampere
Breaker
1200 Ampere
Breaker
Drawout
VTs TT
Drawout
VTs
Blank
Drawout
VTs
Drawout
VTs
Drawout
VTs
CPT Primary
Fuse Drawer
1200 Ampere
or
2000 Ampere
Breaker
1200 Ampere
or
2000 Ampere
Breaker
CPT Primary
Fuse Drawer
CPT Primary
Fuse Drawer
CPT Primary
Fuse Drawer
1200 Ampere
or
2000 Ampere
Breaker
1200 Ampere
or
2000 Ampere
Breaker
Blank Drawout
VTs TT
CPT
Blank
Blank Blank
H
100.00
(2540.0)
36.00
(914.4)
H
100.00
(2540.0)

Requirements
Requirements

compartment.
Typical Weights
Refer to Table 5.5-9 for breaker weights.

Type of
Vertical
Section
Main Bus
Rating,
Amperes
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Aux/Bkr 1200
2000
2500
2700
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
2600 (1180)
2700 (1227)
Aux/Aux 1200
2000
2500
2700
2200 (1000)
2300 (1046)
2300 (1046)
2400 (1091)
Bkr/Bkr 1200
2000
2500
2700
2700 (1227)
2800 (1273)
2800 (1273)
2900 (1318)
5.5-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Typical Floor Plan27 kV Two-High, Indoor
072
Typical Floor Plan27 kV Two-High, Indoor
Figure 5.5-46. Typical Floor Plan27 kV Two-High, Indoor
10.96
(278.4)
10
36.00
(914.4)
Front
0.59
(15.0)
0.59
(15.0)
1.32
(33.5)
2
7.00
(177.8)
8
36.00
(914.4)
Min.
Bus
Compt.
118.64
(3013.5)
Line
Compt.
5
32.00
(812.8)
Rear
48.00
(1219.2)
9.00
(228.6)
0.88
(22.4)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
1
1
9
10
6
3.00
(76.2)
72.00
(1828.8)
Min.
3
7
10
9
7.38
(187.5)
1
65.97
(1675.6)
6
8
7
5
4
3
2
A
A
3.00
(76.2)
4.25
(108.0)
7.80
(198.1)
1.00
(25.4)
1
1
1
2
22.25
(565.2)

Breaker
Compt.
Control
Compt.
Section A-A
Knockouts for 1.38" (35.1)
or 1.75 (44.5) Conduits
Top Entry Secondary Control
Anchor locations for 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts SAE
Grade 5 or better, (6) places in each vertical section.
Secondary control wiring conduit openings, conduit
projection must not exceed 1.00 inch (25.4 mm).
Minimum front clearance when using
Eatons portable lifter.
Minimum left-hinged panel clearance.
Recommended minimum rear clearance.
Finished foundation surface shall be level within
0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm)
left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally,
as measured by a laser level.
4.25 inches (108.0 mm) maximum dimension under
the front of the switchgear must not be exceeded
to avoid interference with secondary conduits.
Primary (H.V.) conduit projection must not exceed
2.00 inches (50.8 mm). See shop order base plan
Customer's ground provisions, provided as shown
by symbol on shop order sectional side views.
5.00 inches (127.0 mm) minimum foundation
supports for attaching switchgear.
32.00
(812.8)
Min.
4
32.00
(812.8)
2.00
(50.8)
0.88
(22.4)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
36.00
(914.4)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
5.5-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Layout Dimensions38 kV, 42.00-Inch (1066.8 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad), 170 kV BIL Design
073
Layout Dimensions38 kV, 170 kV BIL Design
Typical Units
Figure 5.5-47. IndoorTypical Breaker, Vertical Section, Bottom Cable Exit
Bus side CT bushings are not provided if there are no bus side CTs.
Figure 5.5-48. IndoorTypical Auxiliary/Auxiliary
Figure 5.5-49. IndoorTypical Bus Tie Breaker, Vertical Section
Bus side CT bushings are not provided if there are no bus side CTs.

Type of
Vertical
Section
Main Bus
Rating
Amperes
Indoor
Breaker 1200
2000
2500
3000
3300 (1500)
3400 (1545)
3555 (1616)
3555 (1616)
Auxiliary 1200
2000
2500
3000
3200 (1453)
3300 (1500)
3455 (1570)
3455 (1570)
Type of
Breaker
Current Rating, Amperes
1200 2000
380 VCP-W-16, 16C
380 VCP-W-25, 25C
1080 (490)
1080 (490)
1140 (518)
1140 (518)
380 VCP-W-32, 32C
380 VCP-W-21
1080 (490)
1080 (490)
1140 (518)
1140 (518)
380 VCP-W-40, 40C 1080 (490)
1080 (490)
1140 (518)
1140 (518)
5.5-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Layout Dimensions38 kV, 42.00-Inch (1066.8 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad), 170 kV BIL Design
074

bottom entry.
Figure 5.5-51. Maximum Hinged Panel
Equipment
arrangement of components. The gure
device 7) will signicantly reduce
consumption of panel space.
Breaker and Auxiliary Structure

bottom entry.



(12.7 mm) bolts or weld, outdoor0.50-inch
(12.7 mm) bolts.




84.00 inches (2133.6 mm).
Top or Bottom Entry


16.00 (406.4)
34.50 (876.3)
4.15 (105.4)
3.50 (88.9)
7.550 (190.5)
Top Secondary TT
Conduit Space
3.75 (95.3)
2.20 (55.9)
3.00 (76.2)
3.38 (85.9)
Front
Control
Compt.
Door
Breaker
Compt.
Door
1-Large Relay
Case
3-Instrument
4-Test Switch TT
5-
6-Lock-out
Relay or
Switch
7-IQ Metering
Unit
No devices on the
breaker compartment
door.
1 1 1
7
3
4
4 5 5 5 6
1.48
(37.6)
16.00
(406.4)
34.50 (876.3)
1
2
8
.
7
5

(
3
2
7
0
.
3
)
12.00 (304.8)
39.60
(1005.8)
6
1
.
6
2

(
1
5
6
5
.
2
)
6
5
.
8
5

(
1
6
7
2
.
6
)
3.00 (76.2)
3.75 (95.3)
7.50 (190.5)
15.38 (390.7)
30.90
(784.4)
4.15
(105.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
39.60
(1005.8)
Front
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
Four Conduits
9.00 (228.6)
A
12.00 (304.8)
Three Conduits
T
Single Conduit
C A
B B
A = 13.75 (349.3)
B = 4.50 (114.3)
C = 5.50 (139.7)
7.00 (177.8)
9.00 (228.6)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
9.00 (228.6)
wo Conduits
5.5-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
075
Typical Units
Figure 5.5-54. IndoorTypical Breaker, Main or Feeder
Figure 5.5-55. Typical Auxiliary-over-Auxiliary
Figure 5.5-56. Typical Bus Tie Breaker

Type of
Vertical
Section
Main Bus
Rating
Amperes
Indoor
Breaker 1200
2000
2500
3100 (1409)
3200 (1455)
3355 (1525)
Auxiliary 1200
2000
2500
3000 (1364)
3100 (1409)
3355 (1525)
5.5-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
076
Layout Dimensions38 kV, 150 kV BIL DesignDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 5.5-57. IndoorTypical Indoor Base Plan
1
30.88
(784.4)
7.50
(190.5)
73.24
(1860.3)
124.36
(3158.7)
U
n
f
i
n
i
s
h
e
d

F
o
u
n
d
a
t
i
o
n

U
n
d
e
r

S
w
i
t
c
h
g
e
a
r
3.54
(89.9)
Min.
84.00
(2133.6)
Front
3
7B
42.00
(1066.8)
4
38.00
(965.2)
Min.
1.75
(44.4)
3.00
(76.2)
15.38
(390.7)
1.23
(31.3)
1.94
(49.3)
7.50
(190.5)
3.00
(76.2)
42.00
(1066.8)
Alternate Secondary Conduit
Location Top Entrance
Min.
42.00
(1066.8)
68.48
(1739.4)
8.69
(220.7)
39.60
(1005.8)
2.00
(50.8)
2
9
34.50
(876.3) 16.00
(406.4)
1.16
(29.5)
2.00
(50.8)
Line
Compt.
Bus
Compt.
1
3.75
(95.2)
8
10
3.75
(95.2)
7A
5
Rear
Door
Floor Plate
1.00
(25.4)
Breaker
Compt.
Max.
3.00
(76.2)
Max.
3.00
(76.2)
Suggested locations for
0.500-13 bolts or welding.
Secondary conduit location bottom
entrance. Conduit projection must
not exceed 1.00 inch (25.4 mm).
Recommended minimum clearance
on all sidesfollow local regulations.
Minimum left-hinged panel clearance.
Recommended minimum real
clearancefollow local regulations.
Finished foundation surface shall be
level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm)
in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right,
front-to-back, and diagonally, as
measured by a laser level.
Floor steel if used, must not exceed
this dimension under switchgear.
Finished foundation (within
0.08-inch (2.0 mm) clearance) must
extend under switchgear minimum
1.50 inches (38.1 mm) to maximum
3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
Primary (H.V.) conduit projection
must not exceed 2.00 inches (50.8 mm).
See shop order base plan for conduit
locations.
Customers ground provisions
provided as shown by symbol on
shop order sectional side views.
4.00 inches (101.6 mm) minimum
channel supplied by customer.
6
7A
8
7B
7A
6
5
4
1
3
2
9
10
5.5-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts5 and 15 kV
077
Typical Application Layouts
Figure 5.5-58. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts5 and 15 kV
Notes:
1. Maximum number of CTs: Two
accuracy CTs can be installed on
2. Bottom entry is standard for all
power cables. In breaker over
breaker arrangement, maximum
number of cables is limited to
two per phase for each breaker.
3. All lineups shown can be provided
in mirrored conguration.
4. Refer to Figure 5.5-61 to 5.5-66 for
dimensions.
5.5-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
078
Notes:
dimensions.
5.5-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
079
Typical Application Layouts (Continued)
Notes:
dimensions.
5.5-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Congurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV
080
Figure 5.5-61. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Congurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV
Arc exhaust
plenum
Control
Control
Compartment
1200A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
1200A
(with relay
box)
1200A
(with relay
box)
1200A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
1200A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
1200A
(with relay
box)
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
(no relays)
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
(no relays)
Dynamic Vent
2000A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
(no relays)
Dynamic Vent
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
(no relays)
Dynamic Vent
2000A
(with relay
box)
1200A
(with relay
box)
Dynamic Vent
1200A
(with relay
box)
2000A
(with relay
box)
Dynamic Vent
20000A
(with relay
box)
2000A
(with relay
box)
32.00
(812.8)
95.00
(2413.0)
32.00
(812.8)
95.00
(2413.0)
36.00
(914.14)
Notes:
1 = Please note that the only control space available for relays and LV devices for this configuration
is the relay box located on the breaker compartment door.
2 = Maximum current through a 2000A breaker in this location must be limited to 1750A.
3 = This configuration requires use of a 4000A main bus.
4 = Maximum current through each 2000A breaker in this configuration must be limited to 1750A each.
(Notes 1, 2) (Notes 1, 2) (Notes 1, 2, 3) (Notes 1, 2, 3) (Notes 1, 3, 4)
Compartment
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
Breaker
Control
Compartment Breaker
Control
Compartment
Breaker
Breaker Breaker
Breaker Breaker
Breaker
Breaker
2000A
(with relay
box)
Breaker
5.5-23
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Congurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV
081
Figure 5.5-61. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Congurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV (Continued)
Dynamic Vent
32.00
(812.8)
95.00
(2413.0)
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
(no relays)
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
(no relays)
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
(no relays)
Arc exhaust
plenum
2000/3000A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
Dynamic Vent
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
(no relays)
Blank or
Transistion
to Ampgard
Blank or
Auxiliary
2000/3000A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
Dynamic Vent
3000A FC
Breaker
(with relay
box)
Dynamic Vent
3000A
Breaker
(with relay
box)
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
(no relays)
Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
(no relays)
Fan
Dynamic Vent
3000A FC
Breaker
(with relay
box)
Fan
Dynamic Vent
4000A FC
Breaker
(with relay
box)
Fans located
inside this
compartment
32.00
(812.8)
95.00
(2413.0)
36.00
(914.14)
Notes:
1 = Please note that the only control space available for relays and LV devices for this configuration
is the relay box located on the breaker compartment door.
6 = Maximum current allowed through a 3000A circuit breaker in this configuration is 3000A
with fans running, and 2500A when fans are not running.
7 = Maximum current allowed through a 3000A circuit breaker in this configuration is 4000A
with fans running, and 2500A when fans are not running.
(Notes 2, 5) (Notes 1, 5) (Notes 1, 6) (Note 6) (Note 7)
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
5.5-24
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Side Views)5 and 15 kV
082
Typical Sectional Side Views
Figure 5.5-62. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Side Views)5 and 15 kV
5.5-25
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
083
Typical Sectional Side Views (Continued)
5.5-26
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
084
Typical Sectional Side Views (Continued)
5.5-27
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearWeights5 and 15 kV
085
5/15 kV Arc-Resistant SwitchgearTypical Weights
Add weights of end-wall to left and right end structures as follows:

350 Lbs (159.1 kg) for 97.50-inch (2476.5) D structures.
Add plenum weight as follows:

300 Lbs (136.4 kg) to left and right end structures.
200 Lbs (91.0 kg) to each intermediate structures.
Add arc duct assembly weight as follows:

200.00 Lbs (91.0 kg) for standard 51.00-inch (1295.4 mm) arc exhaust duct assembly.
30.00 Lbs (14.0 kg) per foot for additional arc duct.
Type of
Vertical Section
Main Bus
Rating
Indoor Structure
36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) W
97.50-Inch (2476.5 mm) D
Indoor Structure
36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) W
109.50-Inch (2781.3 mm) D
Indoor Structure
36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) W
121.50-Inch (3086.1 mm) D
Amperes Lbs (kg) Lbs (kg) Lbs (kg)
Breaker/breaker 1200
2000
3000
4000
2800 (1271)
2900 (1317)
3000 (1362)
3100 (1407)
3025 (1374)
3175 (1441)
3275 (1487)
3375 (1532)
3175 (1441)
3375 (1532)
3475 (1578)
3575 (1623)
Blank/breaker or
breaker/blank
1200
2000
3000
4000
2700 (1226)
2800 (1271)
2900 (1317)
3000 (1362)
2900 (1317)
3125 (1419)
3150 (1430)
3275 (1487)
3125 (1419)
3175 (1441)
3325 (1510)
3475 (1578)
Auxiliary/breaker or
breaker/auxiliary
1200
2000
3000
4000
2650 (1203)
2750 (1248)
2850 (1294)
2950 (1339)
2850 (1294)
2975 (1351)
3100 (1407)
3225 (1464)
2975 (1351)
3225 (1464)
3275 (1487)
3450 (1566)
Auxiliary/auxiliary 1200
2000
3000
4000
2600 (1180)
2700 (1226)
2800 (1271)
2900 (1317)
2800 (1271)
2925 (1328)
3050 (1385)
3175 (1441)
2925 (1328)
3175 (1441)
3225 (1464)
3375 (1532)
Blank/auxiliary or
auxiliary/blank
1200
2000
3000
4000
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
2700 (1226)
2800 (1271)
2700 (1226)
2825 (1283)
2950 (1339)
3075 (1396)
2825 (1283)
2975 (1351)
3125 (1419)
3275 (1487)
Blank/blank 1200
2000
3000
4000
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
2700 (1226)
2800 (1271)
2700 (1226)
2825 (1283)
2950 (1339)
3075 (1396)
2825 (1283)
2975 (1351)
3125 (1419)
3275 (1487)
5.5-28
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
086
Typical Top Plan
Figure 5.5-65. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear, Top Entry CablesTypical Conduit Entrance Locations5 and 15 kV
Note: For switchgear with enclosure arc ratings of up to 41 kA rms symmetrical,
minimum two vertical sections and one arc duct exit are required.
For switchgear with enclosure arc ratings of 50 kA rms symmetrical or higher,
minimum three vertical sections and two arc duct exits are required.
36.00
(914.4)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
1.25
(31.8)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
7.00
(177.8)
6.00
(152.4)
9.00
(228.6)
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
81.00
(2057.4)
Plenum
15.25
(387.4)
VS #1 VS #2 VS #3
Top View
Front
108.00
(2743.2)
6.00
(152.4)
9.00
(228.6)
6.00
(152.4)
6.00
(152.4)
7.00
(177.8)
7.00
(177.8)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
End Wall
1.50
(38.1)
End Wall
5.5-29
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan5 and 15 kV
087
Typical Floor Plan
Figure 5.5-66. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan5 and 15 kV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7A
7B
8
9
10
11
Suggested locations for 0.50-inch
(12.7 mm) bolts or welding.
Secondary control wiring conduit
openings, conduit projection must not
exceed 1.00 inch (25.4 mm).
Minimum front clearance when using
Eatons portable lifter.
Minimum left-hinged panel
clearance.
Recommended minimum rear
clearance.
level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in
36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right,
Floor steel, if used, must not exceed
this dimension under the switchgear.
Finished foundation (within 0.06-inch
[1.5 mm] clearance) must extend
under the switchgear a minimum of
1.50 inches (38.1 mm) to a maximum
of 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
must not exceed 2.00 inches
(50.8 mm). See shop order base
plan for conduit locations.
Customers ground provisions
provided as shown by symbol on the
shop orders sectional side views.
4.00 inches (101.6 mm) minimum
Foundation under the switchgear
must be at least 3.00 inches
(76.2 mm) thick.
5.5-30
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts27 kV
088
Figure 5.5-67. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts27 kV
Notes:
power cables, maximum four
per phase.
dimensions.
4. 27 kV arc-resistant switchgear can
be supplied in one-high design
conguration only.
5.5-31
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Congurations (Front Views)27 kV
089
Available Congurations (Continued)
Figure 5.5-68. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Congurations (Front Views)27 kV
Please note that an additional 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) clearance is required above
the arc wall for arc exhaust.

No Relays No Relays No Relays
40.00
(1016.0)
90.37
(225.0)
42.00
(1067.0)
Type of
Vertical
Section
Main Bus
Rating
Amperes
Indoor
Structure
Control/breaker 1200
2000
2700 (1226)
2800 (1271)
Control/auxiliary 1200
2000
2400 (1090)
2500 (1135)
5.5-32
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)27 kV
090
Typical Sectional Side ViewsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 5.5-69. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)27 kV
40.00
(1016.0)
90.37
(2295.0)
40.00
(1016.0)
90.37
(2295.0)
40.00
(1016.0)
90.37
(2295.0)
40.00
(1016.0)
90.37
(2295.0)
108.63
(2759.0)
108.63
(2759.0)
108.63
(2759.0)
108.63
(2759.0)
5.5-33
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan27 kV
091
Typical Floor PlanDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 5.5-70. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan27 kV
2
3
4
5
6
50.38
(1280)
1.00
(25)
38.00
(965.2)
Min.
4
72.00
(1829)
Min.
Front
3
2
14.00
(356)
6.00
(152)
42.00
(1066.8) Min.
5.50
(140)
5
4.00
(102)
42.00
(1067)
30.00
(762)
7
1B
Rear
1.00
(25)
4.00
(102)
6.00
(152)
3.00
(76)
1.38
(35)
108.62
(2759)
4.75
(121)
1.00
(25)
6.00
(152)
3.25
(83)
3.00
(76)
1.12
(29)
Bottom cable entrance.
Secondary control
wiring conduit openings,
location bottom entrance
(optional; only by special order).
Minimum front clearance.
Minimum left clearance.
Recommended minimum
rear clearance.
Finished foundation surface shall
be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm)
102 mm base channel. 7
Standard Secondary Conduit
1B
5.5-34
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts38 kV
092
Figure 5.5-71. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts38 kV
Notes:
1. Maximum # of CTS:
Bus Side
2 sets of standard or
1 set of high accuracy
Line/Cable side
3 sets of standard or
1 set of standard and
1 set of high accuracy
2. CT mounting bushings
on bus side are provided
only when bus side CTs
are included.
3. Bottom entry is standard f
or all power cables. Contact
Eaton if top entry is required.
4. Refer to Figure 5.5-72 to 5.5-74
for dimensions.
5.5-35
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Congurations (Front Views)38 kV
093
Figure 5.5-72. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts (Front Views)38 kV
Please note that an additional 48.00-inch

(1219.2 mm) clearance is required above
the arc wall for arc exhaust.

40.00
(1016.0)
100.00
(2540.0)
42.00
(1067.0)
Type of
Vertical
Section
Main Bus
Rating
Amperes
Indoor
Structure
Breaker cell 1200
2000
2500
3000
3500 (1589)
3700 (1680)
4000 (1816)
4000 (1816)
Auxiliary cell 1200
2000
2500
3000
3000 (1362)
3200 (1453)
3500 (1589)
3500 (1589)
5.5-36
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)38 kV
094
Typical SectionalDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 5.5-73. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)38 kV
40.00
(1016.0)
100.00
(2540.0)
129.75
(3296.0)
40.00
(1016.0)
100.00
(2540.0)
129.75
(3296.0)
5.5-37
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan38 kV
095
Typical Floor PlanDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 5.5-74. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan38 kV
Alternate Secondary Conduit
2
3
Front
Rear
4
Suggested locations for 0.50-Inch
(12.7 mm) bolts or welding.
Secondary control wiring conduit
openings, conduit projection must
not exceed 1.00 inch (25.4 mm).
Minimum front clearance.
Minimum left-hinged
panel clearance.
Recommended minimum
rear clearance.
level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm)
Floor steel if used, must not exceed
dimension under switchgear.
must not exceed 2.00 inches (50.8 mm).
See shop order base plan
Customers ground provisions,
provided as shown by symbol on
shop order sectional side views.
5
6
7A
7B
8
9
5
7B
7B
6
3
Line
Compt
Bus
Compt
Breaker
Compt
4.00-inch (101.6 mm) minimum
3.00
(7.6)
Max.
Finished foundation
(within 0.06-inch [1.5 mm] clearance)
must extend under switchgear
minimum 1.50 inches (38.1 mm)
to a maximum 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
U
n
f
i
n
i
s
h
e
d

F
o
u
n
d
a
t
i
o
n

U
n
d
e
r

S
w
i
t
c
h
g
e
a
r
38.00
(965.2)
Min.
42.00
(106.7)
1.50
(38.1)
129.75
(329.5)
1.70
(43.2)
3.00
(76.2)
16.38
[41.6]
7.50
(19.0)
4
84.00
(213.4)
Min.
7A
1.16
(2.9)
61.62
(156.5)
14.63
(37.2)
9
31.88
(81.0)
10
10
1
2
34.50
(87.6)
3.75
(9.5)
3.75
(9.5)
4.15
(10.5)
16.00
(40.6)
3.00
(7.6)
7.50
(19.1)
3.38
(8.6)
2.20
(5.6)
42.00
(106.7)
2.00
(5.1)
39.58
(100.5)
42.00
(1066.8)
Min.
1
2.00
(5.1)
.88
(22.3)
8
40.24
(102.2)
3.00
(7.6)
Max.
1
10
5.5-38
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearArc Exhaust Wall and Plenum
096
Arc Exhaust Wallfor 27 and 38 kV Switchgear
Figure 5.5-75. Arc Exhaust Wall Above the Switchgear
Arc Exhaust Chamber (Plenum) with Arc Duct Exit
for 5 and 15 kV Switchgear
Figure 5.5-76. Arc Exhaust Chamber (Plenum) with Arc Duct Exit Above the Switchgear
Arc Exhaust wall Figure 5.5-75 is sup-
plied as standard for all 27/38 kV arc-
resistant switchgear. The arc exhaust
wall must be eld installed above the
switchgear. Note minimum 48.00-inch
(1219.2 mm) ceiling clearance is
required above the arc exhaust wall
for proper venting of the arc exhaust.
All 5/15 kV arc-resistant switchgear is
provided with arc exhaust chamber
(plenum). It is also installed in the
eld. When using arc exhaust chamber,
minimum ceiling clearance required
above the arc exhaust chamber (plenum)
is equal to that needed for eld
installation of the chamber. Eaton
recommends minimum 18.00-inch
(457.2 mm). Refer to Figures 5.5-77
and 5.5-78 for typical arc exhaust
chamber (plenum) and arc duct exit
arrangements for arc-resistant switch-
gear installed inside an electrical room
and inside an outdoor house.
Note: APPLICABLE TO ALL ARC-RESISTANT
SWITCHGEAR:
For switchgear with enclosure arc
ratings of up to 41 kA rms symmetrical,
minimum two vertical sections and
one arc duct exit is required.
For switchgear with enclosure arc
rating of 50 kA rms symmetrical or
higher, minimum three vertical
sections and two arc duct exits are
required.
5.5-39
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearExhaust Layout
097
Typical LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 5.5-77. Typical Layout of 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear Inside Electrical Room and Outside Minimum Exhaust Area
81.00
(2057.4)
32.00
(812.8)
95.00
(2413.0)
Switchgear
Front
1.25
(31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
95.00
(2413.0)
Side View
Typical 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear
1090.50
(2781.3)
Arc Exhaust
Chamber (Plenum)

Front
Top View
Typical 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear Lineup
End Piece
(arc exhaust)
Arc Duct
Arc Exhaust Chamber
(plenum above
the switchgear)
Arc Plenum with Arc Duct Exit
(Partial View)

Wall Flashing Around
the Duct by Others
Duct Cross Section
24.00 (609.6) x 24.00 (609.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
Minimum
Wall
= Up to 24.00 (610.0)
Arc Exhaust Caution!
When equipment is energized
and operating, all personnel
stay clear of fenced area
below the arc exhaust
release point.
De-energize the equipment
prior to entering the fenced
area or prior to opening any
switchgear rear doors.
48.00
(1219.2)
Minimum
Arc Duct Collar
Rear
5.5-40
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 05
Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearExhaust Layout
098
Typical Layout (Continued)
Figure 5.5-78. Typical Layout of 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear Inside an Outdoor House (Electrocenter)
Arc Exhaust Caution!
When equipment is
energized and operating,
all personnel stay clear
of fenced area below the
arc exhaust release point.
De-energize the equipment
prior to entering the fenced
area prior to opening any
switchgear rear doors.
Minimum Recommended
Clearance Above the Plenum = 18.00 (457.2)
Arc Duct Exit Piece
with Hinged Flap Assembly
Customers
Power Cables
From Below
Simplified Side View
(not to scale)
Switchgear
Height
Arc-Resistant
Switchgear
Arc Exhaust Plenum
32.00
(812.8)
Outdoor House
Front
Simplified Top View
(not to scale)
Fenced Area with Access Gate
Min.
72.00
(1829.0)
Min.
48.00
(1219.2)
Seismic Applications = 6.00 (152.4)
Non-Seismic Applications can be Less than
6.00 (152.4) or as Required by the House Design
House Wall with Doors for
Access to Rear of the Switchgear
For the layout shown, doors on the house
wall (not shown) provide access to rear of
the switchgear. For rear access to switchgear
from within the house, minimum 36.00 (914.4)
clearance is required behind the switchgear.


September 2011

Contents

Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEF Front-Access Medium Voltage

6.0-1

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

06


001

M
e
t
a
l
-
E
n
c
l
o
s
e
d

S
w
i
t
c
h
g
e
a
r
M
E
F

F
r
o
n
t
-
A
c
c
e
s
s

M
e
d
i
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
D
r
a
w
o
u
t

V
a
c
u
u
m

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s



6.0-2

Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.0-19

Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.0-31
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010

Section 16347A Section 26 13 19.11
MEF Switchgear (515 kV)
Note: Viewing windows shown
in the photo are illustration only.
6.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

06


General Description

002

Medium Voltage
Drawout Breaker

Eatons newest Type MEF metal-
enclosed front-accessible switchgear
with Type VCP-T/VCP-TL drawout
vacuum circuit breakers provide
centralized control and protection of
medium voltage power equipment and
circuits in industrial and commercial
installations involving:

Transformer primary switching

Transformer secondary main

General purpose feeder circuit

Bus tie circuit

Generator Main

Across-the-line starting of medium
voltage motors

Automatic transfer switching
using main-main or main-tie-main
congurations

Harmonic lter bank switching

Any combination of above
applications
Type MEF metal-enclosed switchgear
is designed for application at voltages
up to 15 kV. It is a modularized design
that can be assembled in various com-
binations to satisfy user application
requirements. The switchgear can be
supplied with one-high or two-high
breaker arrangements. Type MEF
switchgear is a front-accessible
design, suitable for installation
against the wall.

For metal-clad, rear-access switchgear
design, refer to Tab 5, type VCP-W
switchgear.

Standards

MEF metal-enclosed switchgear
is designed to meet requirements
of C37.20.3, IEEE standard for metal-
enclosed switchgear. Drawout circuit
breakers and auxiliary drawers are
designed to meet requirements
of C37.20.2, IEEE standard for
metal-clad switchgear.
MEF also meets Canadian Standard,
CSA

C22.2 No. 31-04.
Type VCP-T/VCP-TL vacuum circuit
breakers used in MEF switchgear meet
or exceed ANSI and IEEE standards
applicable to AC high voltage circuit
breakers rated on symmetrical current
basis; C37.04, C37.06, C37.09.

Third-Party Certications

UL

CSA

MEF SwitchgearIndoor Unit
VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit Breaker

Seismic Qualication

Refer to

Tab 1

for information on

VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit Breaker with
Integral Protective Relay
VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit BreakerSide View

Ratings

Rated maximum voltage:
4.76 kV, 15 kV

Rated main bus continuous current:
1200A, 2000A

Circuit breaker ratings: continuous
current 600, 1200, 2000A

Rated short-circuit current:
16, 20, 25, 32 and 40 kA

Refer to

Table 6.0-3

and

Table 6.0-4

for more details


6.0-3

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

06


General DescriptionVCP-T/VCP-TL Vacuum Circuit Breaker

003

Advantages

Reduced footprint

Front-access design

Maintenance-free bus joints

Full benets of switching and
interrupting capabilities of
vacuum breakers

Integral relaying and metering by
use of breaker mounted protection
that allows full short-circuit and
overload coordination with
upstream devices

External control power is not
required when using integral
protection

Optional external relays and meters

MEF lls the application gap
between metal-enclosed fusible
load interrupter and metal-clad
breaker switchgear designs

Breakers shipped installed in
the switchgear; no mismatch or
misplaced circuit breakers at site
and reduced installation cost

FeaturesVCP-T/VCP-TL Vacuum
Circuit Breaker

Vacuum circuit breakers provide
high duty cycle, fast interruption,
reduced maintenance, and are
environmentally friendly

Very compact and lightweight circuit
breaker rated to 15 kV; weighs only
250440 lbs (114200 kg)

Fully horizontal drawout feature
with connect, test and disconnect
positions provides ease of operation
and interchangeability. Levering-in
(racking) system is an integral part
of the breaker

All circuit breaker functions, indica-
tors and controls are grouped on an
easily accessible panel on front of
the circuit breaker

Levering interlock prevents the
breaker from being racked out when
in connected position and closed

Trip-free interlock prevents breaker
from closing, manually or electri-
cally, while it is being levered or
when in an intermediate position

Secondary control connector inter-
lock prevents breaker being moved
into the connected position if the
breaker control wiring connector is
not correctly engaged with its com-
partment control wiring connector.
Interlocking also prevents discon-
nection of circuit breaker control
wiring connector, manually or auto-
matically, while the circuit breaker is
in the connected position and in any
position between the connected and
the test/disconnected

throughout its travel and in the
connected position

Choice of manually or electrically
operated circuit breakers

Integral spring charging handle

Choice of breaker mounted protec-
tion for automatic short-circuit and
overload protection without a need
for external control power

Can also be used with external
relays when equipped with
optional shunt trip and external
control power

Easy-to-see contact erosion indica-
tor is provided on the moving stem
of the breaker. Only visual inspec-
tion is required to verify that the
contacts have not worn out

Easy-to-see contact wipe indicator is
provided for verication by simple
visual inspection that the loading
springs are applying proper
pressure to the contacts when
the circuit breaker is closed

One auxiliary switch (5a, 5b)
included as standard on all breakers
for breaker contact status


VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit Breaker Fully Withdrawn on Extension Pan
6.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

06


General DescriptionVCP-T/VCP-TL Vacuum Circuit Breaker

004

Choice of Breakers

VCP-T/VCP-TC Breakers

VCP-T/VCP-TC Breaker

ANSI rateddrawout

Equipped with stored energy spring operating
mechanism

5/15 kV, 600/1200/2000A

25 kA and 40 kA rms symmetrical

K = 1

Rated interrupting time = 3 cycle

Operating mechanism = 10,000 operations

Vacuum interrupters = 30,000 operations

VCP-T Breaker

VCP-TL/VCP-TLC Breakers

VCP-TL/VCP-TLC Breaker

ANSI rateddrawout

Equipped with linear magnetic actuator operating
mechanism

5/15 kV, 600/1200A

25 kA rms symmetrical

K = 1

Rated interrupting time = 3 cycle

Operating mechanism = 100,000 operations

Vacuum interrupters = 30,000 operations

VCP-TL Breaker

Magnetic Actuator

Capacitor

Controller

Power Supply

Notes:

1. Type VCP-TC and VCP-TLC are optional designs with capacitor
switching capabilities. See

Table 6.0-5

on

Page 6.0-19

.
2. VCP-TL/VCP-TLC breakers are designed such that in event of
control power loss, internal capacitors provide sufcient energy
to perform an electrical open operation up to 48 hours after the
loss of control power.

Secondary Wiring

Through-the-Window
Accessories

Electric Charging Motor

Manual Charging Handle

Contact Status (Open-Close)

Spring Status (Charged-
Discharged)

Manual OFF Pushbutton

Manual ON Pushbutton

Operations Counter

5A/5B Auxiliary Switch

Opening Spring

OFF Key Lock Location

Motor Cutoff Switch

(Optional)

Cradle with Levering
Mechanism

Shock Bolt Handle

Shock Bolt

Packing Screw Lock Plate

Levering Drive Nut

Push/Pull Handle



6.0-5

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

06


General DescriptionMEF Switchgear

005

FeaturesMEF Switchgear
Assembly

Type MEF is metal-enclosed front-
accessible switchgear with many
metal-clad features.

Drawout circuit breaker and
auxiliary (VT, CPT) compartments
with automatic shutters to prevent
accidental contact with high voltage
circuits when breaker/auxiliary
is removed

No high voltage connections or
circuits are exposed by opening
of circuit breaker, VT or CPT
compartment door

All drawout elements are provided
with mechanical interlocks for
proper operating sequence under
normal operating conditions as
described in IEEE C37.20.2
All low voltage control wiring,
devices and control compartments
are isolated from high voltage
circuits
MEF Switchgear is Compact
Breaker and auxiliary cells are
26.00-inch wide, 61.50-inch deep,
92.00-inch tall (660.6 mm wide,
1562.1 mm deep, 2336.8 mm tall)
Cable pull sections are
19.00 inches wide, 61.50 inches deep,
92.00 inches tall (482.6 mm wide,
1562.1 mm deep, 2336.8 mm tall)
Reduced front aisle space for
breaker withdrawal saves overall
oor space
Shipping groups can be moved
in place by forklift, or overhead
lifting means
MEF Switchgear is Modular
Available congurations include:
Breaker over auxiliary
Breaker over breaker
Auxiliary over auxiliary
Pull sections with various cable
entry combinations
MEF Switchgear is Front Accessible
Allows primary cable connections
from the front of the switchgear
All drawout elements (breaker,
VT, CPT) are front accessible after
opening their compartment door
All eld connections required at
shipping splits are accessible and
made from the front
No rear access space is required.
The switchgear can be installed
against the wall
All non-accessible primary
bus joints and connections are
maintenance-freedo not require
inspection or re-torque
MEF SwitchgearIndoor Unit
Control
Compartment
VT Drawer
CPT Drawer
MEF SwitchgearBreaker Over Breaker
and Adjacent Pull Section
MEF Switchgear
Single Breaker with
Cables Out the Bottom
Control
Compartment
6.0-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
006
Each circuit breaker compartment
is provided with steel shutters
(breaker driven) that automatically
rotate into position to cover station-
ary cell studs to prevent contact
with high voltage circuit when the
breaker is moved from connected to
disconnected position. Provisions
for padlocking the shutters open
or closed is included as standard
Rejection interlock pins prevent
insertion of the circuit breaker if the
circuit breaker and structure ratings
are not compatible
A silver-plated copper ground
bus keeps the breaker grounded
throughout its travel and in its
connected position
Breaker in Connected Position
Circuit Breaker in Connected
Position Indicator

Steel
Shutters
Provision
for Padlock
Shutters
Cell
Stabs
Panel Space
for LV
Control
Devices
VCP-T Circuit Breaker Compartment
(Shutters Shown Open for Illustration)
VCP-T Circuit Breaker Compartment
6.0-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
007
MEF switchgear permits use of up to
four auxiliary drawers in one vertical
unit. Those drawers can be used for
installation of voltage or control power
transformers.
Each drawer can be fully withdrawn
on extension rails, thus allowing
easy access to VT, CPT and their
primary fuses
Safety shutter protects against acci-
dental contact with primary stabs
when the drawer is withdrawn
A VT drawer can accommodate
two VTs, each connected line-to-line
(open delta), or three VTs, each
connected line-to-ground
A CPT drawer can accommodate
a maximum of single-phase,
5 kVA CPT
Mechanical interlock is included
on CPT drawer that requires CPT
secondary breaker to be opened
prior to withdrawing the drawer to
ensure that the primary circuit can
only be disconnected under no-load
Primary fuses are automatically
grounded as the drawer is
withdrawn from connected to
Primary Shutter
CPT Withdrawn on Extension Rails Auxiliary Drawer Compartment
Secondary Disconnect
Extension
Rail
Primary
Fuses
Drawout VT and CPT
VT Drawer
CPT Drawer
Interlock
CPT Secondary
Main Breaker
Extension
Rail
6.0-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
008
Cable Pull Sections
MEF Cable Pull Section Adjacent
to 2-High Breaker Cell
Cable pull sections are included
as required to allow top or bottom
primary cable terminations from
the front of the switchgear. Current
sensors for use with breaker mounted
integral protective relay, or current
transformers for use with door
mounted external relays are mounted
in the primary circuits in the pull
sections. Pull sections are also used
as needed for bus transition and
bus connections to other equipment.
Pull section is metal-enclosed.
Pull Section Close-Up View CT/Sensor Mounting
Pull Section Close-Up View Cable Termination and Zero Sequence CT/Sensor
CT/Sensor
Primary Bushings
Single-Phase
Current Sensors
Three-Phase CT
CT/Sensor
Secondary Wires
Customers Cable
Terminal Pads
Surge Arresters
Zero Sequence
Sensor
Zero Sequence
CT
6.0-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
009
Bus Compartments
Top ViewMain Bus Access
Type MEF switchgear is completely front accessible,
designed to be installed against a wall. Access necessary
for customers primary cable terminations, joining of bus
joints (main bus and ground bus) at shipping splits, and
terminations of customers control wires are provided from
the front of the switchgear. Main bus is accessible from
the top front of the switchgear. All bus bars are insulated
throughout by epoxy coating using Eatons uidized bed
process, and covered with PVC boots at joints. All joints
are silver-plated. All bus joints that are not accessible are
bolted with special hardware to eliminate need for future
inspection or re-torque. Minimum 24.00-inch (609.6 mm)
clearance to ceiling is recommended for main bus access.
Rear View (Shown with Rear Covers Removed for Illustration Purposes)
Main Bus
Joint with
PVC Boot
Main Bus
Main Bus
Support
Risers to
Main Bus
Copper Ground Bus
(Accessible in Pull Section)
Run Backs to Pull Section
Breaker Cell
Primary Insulators
Pull Section
Breaker Over Breaker Cell
6.0-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
General Description
010
Protection and Metering
Type MEF switchgear with VCP-T/
VCP-TL circuit breakers can be sup-
plied with integral breaker mounted
protective relays for overload and
short-circuit protection and metering.
The integral relays are self-powered
from specially designed and tested
current sensors. MEF switchgear can
be supplied with external relays and
meters connected to current trans-
formers and powered from an external
auxiliary power.
Integral Protection and Metering
Type VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breakers
can be equipped with Eatons Type
Digitrip 520V/520MCV or Digitrip
1150V protection relays
The Digitrip 520V/520MCV is used
for basic overcurrent protection
The Digitrip 520MCV relay includes
an Arcash Reduction Maintenance
System (ARMS) feature that may
be activated at the breaker or from
remote. When activated, the ARMS
feature lowers the available arc
ash energy at the connected down-
stream device by faster clearing of
the downstream fault
The Digitrip 1150V is used for
advanced current and voltage
protections, and metering and
communication functions. ARMS
feature is included on 1150V relay
as standard
The 520V/520MCV and 1150V
relays are designed and tested to
work with Eatons Type V current
sensors only
The power required to operate the
protective relays basic overcurrent
protection functions is provided by
secondary output from the current
sensors once the three-phase primary
current through the circuit breaker
exceeds approximately 10 to 12%
of the current sensor rating or single-
phase primary current exceeds
approximately 30% of the current
sensor rating.
The relay continuously analyzes
secondary current signals from the
current sensors and when preset cur-
rent levels and time delay settings are
exceeded, sends and a trip signal to
the trip actuator of the circuit breaker.
The trip actuator causes tripping of
the circuit breaker by providing the
required mechanical force for tripping.
The trip actuator is automatically reset
each time the circuit breaker opens.
The current sensors, protective relay
and circuit breaker are fully tested
as a system for time-overcurrent
response over the entire current
range up to the interrupting rating
of the circuit breaker.
An optional Overcurrent Trip Switch
(OTS) with one latching type Form C
contact can be provided to indicate
tripping of the circuit breaker by the
action of an integral protective relay.
Rating Plug
A rating plug matched to phase cur-
rent sensor rating is installed on all
integral protective relays. The rating
plug and phase current sensors dene
maximum continuous current rating
(I
n
) of the circuit breaker. The rating
plug and phase current sensors also
determine the maximum instanta-
neous setting.
If the rating plug is removed from
the protective relay, the circuit breaker
will trip if it is carrying current. See
Page 6.0-25 for available phase current
sensors and rating plugs.
6.0-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
General Description
011
Digitrip 520V/520MCV
The Digitrip 520V/520MCV integral
protective relay is used when basic
three-phase (50/51) and ground (50/
51N or 50/51G) overcurrent protection
is required. It does not contain provi-
sions for communication. The relay is
a microprocessor-based device that
operates from secondary output of
current sensors and provides true rms
sensing of each phase and ground,
and is suitable for application at either
50 or 60 Hz systems. The sensing
current for ground protection can be
derived from residual connections of
the phase sensors or from an optional
Type-V zero sequence current sensor.
The relay does not require external
control power for its protection
functions and can be applied with
Manually or Electrically Operated
circuit breakers.
The 520V/520MCV relay provides a
number of time-overcurrent response
curves and settings for phase, as well
as ground protection and coordination
with upstream or downstream
devices. It can also be zone interlocked
with other upstream or downstream
relays for faster selective tripping.
The 520MCV includes an Arcash
Reduction Maintenance System (ARMS)
feature when enabled, it reduces arc
ash incident energy during equip-
ment maintenance.
Digitrip Model 520MCV
Figure 6.0-1. VCP-T Vacuum Circuit Breaker Digitrip Model 520V
Table 6.0-1. Digitrip 520V Protection and Coordination
I
n
= Current Sensor/Rating Plug rating in amperes.
M1 = Maximum Setting based on I

n

= (12 x I
n
) for I
n
= 1600 and 2000A;
= (14 x I
n
) for all other values of I
n
st1 and st2 settings are based on I

n
I
n
st1 st2
100A 0.5 sec 0.5 sec
200400A 0.5 sec 1.0 sec
6002000A 1.0 sec 2.0 sec
I
2
t response is applicable to currents less than (8 x I
r
).
For currents greater than (8 x I
r
), the I
2
t response reverts to FLAT response.
When using phase residual connection scheme, I

n
is current sensor/rating plug rating in ampere.
When using zero sequence connection scheme, I
n
is zero sequence current sensor rating in ampere.
I
2
t response is applicable to currents less than (0.625 x I
n
).
For currents greater than (0.625 x I
n
), the I
2
IEEE
Device
Number
Protection
Function
Available Settings (50 or 60 Hz)
Phase Long Delay
51 Pickup setting (I
r
)
Time delay, I
2
t
Thermal memory
(0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0) times In
(2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24 seconds) at 6 times I
r
Enable/disable
Phase Short Delay
50T Pickup setting
Time delay, FLAT
Time delay, I
2
t
(1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10) times I

r
, M1
0.1,0.3,0.4, st1, st2 seconds
(0.1, 0.3, 0.5 seconds) at 8 times I
r
Phase Instantaneous
50 Pickup setting
(2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10) times I

n
, M1, OFF
Ground Fault
51/50G Pickup setting
Time delay, FLAT

Time delay, I
2
t
(0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.75) times I

n
, OFF
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 second
(0.1, 0.3, 0.5) at 0.625 times I
n
Phase short delay and ground fault Enable/disable
ARMS Mode Settings
Settings
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
Pickup
2.5 x rating plug amperes
6.0-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
General Description
012
Digitrip 1150V Integral Protective Relay
Figure 6.0-2. VCP-T Vacuum Circuit Breaker Digitrip Model 1150V
The Digitrip 1150V integral protective
relay is used for advanced current and
voltage protection, and metering and
communication.
The Arcash Reduction Maintenance
System (ARMS) feature is included on
1150V units as standard. When enabled,
it reduces arc ash incident energy
during equipment maintenance.
The relay is a microprocessor-based
device that operates from secondary
output of current sensors and external
voltage transformers, provides true
rms sensing of each phase and
ground, and is suitable for application
at either 50 or 60 Hz systems. The
sensing current for ground protection
can be derived from residual connec-
tions of the phase sensors or from
an optional Type-V zero sequence
current sensor.
The basic overcurrent protection func-
tions of this relay are self-powered
from the current owing in the sec-
ondary of the current sensors. It does
require external auxiliary power for its
voltage and frequency related protec-
tion and alarm functions, and metering
displays. The relay can be applied
with manually or electrically operated
circuit breakers.
The 1150V relay provides following
ANSI/IEEE protection functions:
51/50, 51/50N or 51/50G, 37, 46, 27,
59, 81U, 81O, 47 and 32.
The 1150V relay provides a number
of time-overcurrent response curves
and settings for phase, as well as
ground protection and coordination
with upstream or downstream
devices. It can also be zone interlocked
with other upstream or downstream
relays for faster and selective tripping.
In addition to display of metering
values as noted in Figure 6.0-2 above,
the relay provides data through
its front panel display to help plan
inspection and maintenance schedules
of the circuit breaker and the circuit
it is protecting. Those data include:
Total number of Close Operations
by circuit breaker since last reset
The last time the circuit breaker
was operated (Opened or Closed
or Tripped) with time and date
Total number of instantaneous and
short delay trip operations by the
circuit breaker since last reset
Total number of overloads (long
delay trips) and ground fault trips
since last reset
The 1150V relay is also suitable for
communication using the INCOM
communications system. All monitored
values, trip/alarm events, and captured
waveforms can be displayed on a
remote computer. Breakers can also be
opened/closed remotely with password
protection. Peripheral translator/gateway
devices are available to convert INCOM
to other protocols, such as Modbus

RTU, Modbus TCP, etc.
The relay has a built-in 24-character
alphanumeric LED display to allow
programming and viewing of settings,
menus, trip and alarm logs, and real time
metering data. Because the relay is
installed on the circuit breaker, the
breaker compartment door must be
opened for viewing or programming
of the relay functions. An optional
Breaker Interface Module can be used
for monitoring, viewing and program-
ming of multiple relays from an alter-
nate location, eliminating the need to
open circuit breaker compartment door.
Also available is wireless transceiver for
short-range infrared wireless communi-
cation between a hand-held Palm
personal data assistant (PDA) and the
Digitrip 1150V relays with compartment
doors closed.
6.0-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
General Description
013
Table 6.0-2. Digitrip 1150V Protection and Coordination
I
n
= Current Sensor/Rating Plug rating in amperes.
Thermal memory feature is available when using I

2
t or I
4
t curves only.
Maximum Setting is based on I

n
:
= (12 x I
n
) for I
n
= 1600 and 2000A;
= (14 x I
n
) for all other values of I
n
Upper limit of this setting is 0.5 for 100A sensor/rating plug, 1.0 for 200 to 400A sensor/rating
plug, and 2.0 for sensors/rating plugs rated above 600A.
I
2
t response is applicable to currents less than (8 x I
r
).
For currents greater than (8 x I
r
), the I
2
I
2
t response curve for phase short delay is only available when phase long delay response selected
is I
2
t.
When using phase residual connection scheme, I

n
is current sensor/rating plug rating in amperes.
When using zero sequence connection scheme, I
n
is zero sequence current sensor rating in amperes.
I
2
t response is applicable to currents less than (0.625 x I
n
). For currents greater than (0.625 x I
n
),
the I
2
IEEE
Device
Number
Protection
Function
Available Settings
(50 or 60 Hz)
Phase Long Delay
51 Pickup setting (I
r
)
Time delay, I
2
t
Time delay, I
4
t
IEEE moderately inverse
IEEE very inverse
IEEE extremely inverse
Thermal memory
(0.41.0, in steps of 0.05) times I
n
(224 seconds, in steps of 0.5) at 6 times I

r
(15 seconds, in steps of 0.5) at 6 times I
r
Time dials of 0.15.0, in steps of 0.1
Enable/disable
Phase Short Delay

50T Pickup setting
Time delay, FLAT
Time delay, I
2
t
(1.512 or 1.514, in steps of 0.5) times I
r
0.12 seconds, in steps of 0.05
(0.12 seconds, in steps of 0.05) at 8 times I

r
Phase Instantaneous
50 Pickup setting (212 or 214) times I
n
, OFF
Ground Fault
51/50G Pickup setting
Time delay, FLAT
Time delay, I
2
t
Thermal memory
(0.241.0, in steps of 0.01) times I
n
, OFF
0.10.5 seconds, in steps of 0.05.

(0.10.5 seconds, in steps of 0.05) at 0.625 times I
n

Yes
Phase short delay and ground fault Enable/disable
Phase Loss (Current Based)
37 Pickup
Time delay
75% current unbalance, OFF
130 seconds
Current Unbalance
46 Pickup
Time delay
525% current unbalance, OFF
0240 seconds
Undervoltage
27 Pickup
Time delay
45110% of phase-to-phase voltage, OFF
1250 seconds
Overvoltage
59 Pickup
Time delay
80135% of phase-to-phase voltage, OFF
1250 seconds
Underfrequency
81U Pickup50 Hz system
Pickup60 Hz system
Time delay
4852 Hz, in steps of 0.1, OFF
Overfrequency
81O Pickup50 Hz system
Pickup60 Hz system
Time delay
Voltage Unbalance
47 Pickup
Time delay
550% voltage unbalance, OFF
1250 seconds
Reverse Power
32 Pickup
Time delay
165000 kW
1250 seconds
ARMS Mode Available Trip
Current Settings
The 1150V unit provides the following
pick-up settings:
Metering, Power Quality and
Other Features
currents in rms amperes, real time
currents in rms amperes,
5-minute average
currents, maximum and minimum
since last reset
Line-to-line voltages
Forward/reverse kW, kW demand
and maximum kW demand
kVA, kVA demand and maximum
kVA demand
Watt and VA demand, maximum W
and VA demand
Forward/reverse kWh
kVAh
kVAh and kWh pulse initiate
Total harmonic distortion for
each phase current
Individual harmonic currents
up through 27th harmonic for
each phase
Power factor, minimum and
maximum
Frequency
Circuit breaker operations count
Programmable alarms
Programmable output contacts
(breaker close, alarm, trip)
Metering Accuracy
1% of full-scale (I
n
) for currents in
the range of 5100% of (I
n
)
3% of full-scale for voltages
(full scale is equal to phase-to-phase
voltage)
4% of full-scale for power and
energy readings
6.0-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
General Description
014
Breaker Interface Module II
The Breaker Interface Module is
a microprocessor-based operator
interface that can be locally mounted
on one of the switchgear compartment
doors or remote from the switchgear.
It is used for access, monitoring, dis-
play of parameters, and programming
of multiple Digitrip 1150V relays.
It communicates to the relays over
a subnetwork, with up to 50 relays.
The Breaker Interface Module can
also communicate using the INCOM
communications system via an
appropriate PONI (product operated
network interface) module. Peripheral
translator/gateway devices are available
to convert INCOM to other protocols,
such as Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP,
and so forth.
Wireless Transceiver
Wireless Transceiver
Eatons wireless transceiver module
(IRMINT) provides short-range infrared
(IR) wireless communication between
a hand-held Palm personal data
assistant (PDA) and the Digitrip
1150V relays. The wireless transceiver
module can be locally mounted on one
of the switchgear compartment doors
or remote from the switchgear. The
wireless transceiver communicates up
to 64 supported INCOM devices over
INCOM subnetwork. It communicates
with standard hand-held device with
Palm OS operating system through
infrared wireless link. From the hand-
held device, the user can perform
relays set point and data monitoring,
programming, data collection and
remote control functions, from a dis-
tance of up to 1 meter, without a need
to touch the switchgear equipment.
External Protection
and Metering
Type MEF switchgear with VCP-T circuit
breakers can be supplied with external
relays, such as Eatons EDR-3000,
EDR-5000 and EMR-3000, and meters
such as Eatons Power Xpert Meter
family. The external relays and meters
are typically installed on the circuit
breaker or control compartment doors
and connected into the secondary
circuits of conventional CTs and VTs.
External control power may be required
for correct operation of the external
relays depending on the type of
relays used.
Eatons EDR-3000 is a microprocessor-
based multifunction overcurrent
protection relay designed to provide
the following ANSI protection functions:
51/50, 51N/50N or 51G/50G.
EDR-3000 relays can be zone inter-
locked for faster selective tripping.
Refer to Tab 4 for more details of
EDR-3000.
Eatons EDR-5000 is a microprocessor-
based multifunction protection and
metering unit designed to provide the
following ANSI protection functions:
51/50, 51N/50N, 51G/50G, 50BF,
25, 32, 46, 67, 27, 59, 47, 78V, 81-O,
81-U, 86.
The EDR-5000 can be zone interlocked
for faster selective tripping. It can also
be used for automatic open or closed
transition transfer of three breaker
main-tie-main systems. Refer to Tab 4
for more details of the EDR-5000.
Eatons EMR-3000 is a microprocessor-
based motor protection relay designed
to provide the following ANSI protec-
tion functions:
49, 50, 51, 46, 50G, 51G, 37, 38, 66,
2/19, 74, 86.
Refer to Tab 4 for more details of the
EDR-3000.
Eatons Power Xpert and IQ include
microprocessor-based metering
and communication devices that
can be provided in MEF for use with
conventional CTs and VTs. Refer to
Tab 3 for further information on
these devices.
6.0-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
015
Partial Discharge
for Switchgear
Partial discharge is a common name for
various forms of electrical discharges
such as corona, surface tracking and
discharges internal to the insulation.
It partially bridges the insulation
between the conductors. These
discharges are essentially small arcs
occurring in or on the surface of the
insulation system when voltage stress
exceeds a critical value. With time,
airborne particles, contaminants and
humidity lead to conditions that result
in partial discharges. Partial discharges
start at a low level and increase as
more insulation becomes deteriorated.
Examples of partial discharge in
switchgear are surface tracking across
bus insulation, or discharges in the air
gap between the bus and a support,
such as where a bus passes through
an insulating window between the
sections of the switchgear. If partial
discharge process is not detected
and corrected, it can develop into a
full-scale insulation failure followed by
an electrical fault. Most switchgear
ashover and bus failures are a result
of insulation degradation caused by
various forms of partial discharges.
RFCT Sensor
InsulGard Relay
(PD Monitoring)
Eatons Type MEF metal-enclosed
switchgear (2.415 kV) is corona-free
by design. By making switchgear
assemblies corona-free, Eaton has made
its standard switchgear more reliable.
However, as indicated above, with
time, airborne particles, contaminants
and humidity lead to conditions that
cause partial discharges to develop in
switchgear operating at voltages 4000V
and above. Type MEF switchgear can
be equipped with factory-installed
partial discharge sensors and partial
discharge sensing relay for continuous
monitoring of the partial discharges
under normal operation. Timely detec-
tion of insulation degradation through
increasing partial discharges can iden-
tify potential problems so that correc-
tive actions can be planned and
implemented long before permanent
deterioration develops. Partial discharge
detection can be the foundation of an
effective predictive maintenance pro-
gram. Trending of partial discharge
data over time allows prediction of
failures, that can be corrected before
catastrophic failure occurs.
consists of Eatons InsulGard relay
work with the relay.
Partial discharges within the MEF
switchgear compartment are detected
by the installation of a small donut
type radio frequency current trans-
former (RFCT) sensor over oating
stress shields of the specially designed
CT/sensor primary bushings. Partial
discharges in the customers power
cables (external discharges) are
detected by the installation of the
RFCT around ground shields of the
incoming or outgoing power cables
termination.
Output signals from sensors (RFCTs)
are wired out to terminal blocks for
future or eld use, or connected to the
InsulGard relay. One InsulGard relay
can monitor up to 15 output signals,
including temperature and humidity.
The temperature and humidity sensors
are included with each InsulGard relay
system.
The relay continuously monitors the
switchgear primary system for partial
discharges and provides an alarm sig-
nal (contact closure) when high PD
level is detected. Data analysis and
diagnostics by Eaton engineers can
also be provided by remote communi-
cation with the InsulGard relay.
The sensors and InsulGard relay are
optional in MEF switchgear.
In 5/15 kV MEF switchgear (refer to
Figure 6.0-4), primary epoxy bushings
with stress shield and RFCT sensors
for measurement of internal, as well as
external partial discharges are all
optional. InsulGard relay is also
optional. When specied, one set of
CT/sensor primary bushings (located
on the line side) with stress shield and
associated RFCT sensor is provided in
every incoming and outgoing primary
circuit. An additional RFCT sensor for
each incoming and outgoing power
cable circuits can be provided as
required. The RFCT output signals
can be connected directly to InsulGard
relay for continuous monitoring of
partial discharges or can be used for
periodic eld measurements. One
InsulGard relay can monitor up to
15 output signals.
Input
Terminal TT
Block
InsulGard
Relay
Optional
Modem
Temp Sensor
Humidity Sensor
Output
Alarm
Status
120 Vac
Auxiliary
Power Signals (up to 15 Total) from TT
PD Sensors ( Capacitors,
, RTD Input, etc..)
6.0-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
016
Figure 6.0-4. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in MEF Switchgear (515 kV)
Note: Use one set of CT/sensor bushings for all incoming and outgoing primary circuits.
RFCT #1 detects partial discharges internal to switchgear compartment.
RFCT #2 detects partial discharges in customers cables up to 100 ft from switchgear.
6.0-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
General Description
017
Power XpertIntegrated
Monitoring Protection
and Control
Medium voltage MEF switchgear,
when equipped with Eaton relays such
as Digitrip 520MCV, Digitrip 1150V,
EDR-3000, EDR-5000, EMR-3000 and
the Power Xpert family of meters, is
ideally suited for Eatons Power Xpert
communications system. Power Xpert
uses the proven INCOM chip for
highly reliable, two-way communica-
tions (even in noisy industrial
environments) for subnetworks
within the switchgear. Data from these
relays and meters can be accessed
from a remote computer via Ethernet
or twisted-shielded pair. A Power
Xpert Gateway can provide Web
browser access to the devices, as well
as Modbus TCP communications to
Power Xpert Software or third-party
software packages. These devices
can also communicate to existing
PowerNet systems via twisted-
shielded pair or Ethernet. Refer
to Tab 2 for more information
on Power Xpert.
Levering Crank
Used for moving the breaker
between the disconnected/test
and connected position.
Breaker Extension Pan
Used for installing/removing the
breaker to/from its compartment.
Breaker Lifting Yoke
Used with the breaker for installation/
removal of the breaker onto/from the
breaker extension pan using optional
breaker lifter or other overhead
lifting means.
Test Jumper
Allows connection of breaker
secondary controls disconnect to cell
disconnect when the breaker is outside
its compartment.
VT/CPT Drawer Extension Rails
Allows withdrawal of VT/CPT auxiliary
drawer for inspection and access to
primary fuses and VT/CPT.
Breaker Lifting Device
Used for installing/removing
the breaker onto/from the Breaker
Extension Pan.
Manual Ground and Test Device
The ground and test device is a
drawout element that may be inserted
into a breaker compartment in place
of a circuit breaker to provide access
to the primary circuits to permit the
temporary connections of grounds
or testing equipment to the high
voltage circuits.
The device includes six terminals for
connections to primary circuits. Selec-
tion of upper or lower terminals for
grounding is accomplished manually
by cable connections before the device
is inserted into the desired breaker
compartment. The circuit selected for
grounding using this device must be
checked by some other means, prior
to insertion of the device into the com-
partment, to be sure it is de-energized.
High potential testing of cable or
phase checking of circuits are typical
tests that may be performed. The
device is insulated to suit voltage
rating of the switchgear and will
carry required levels of short-circuit
current, but it is not rated for any
current interruption.
Before using a ground and test device,
it is recommended that each user
develop detailed operating procedure
consistent with safe operating prac-
tices. Only qualied personnel should
be authorized to use the ground and
test device.
Dummy Element
Dummy element is a drawout element
with primary disconnects similar to
a drawout circuit breaker, but consists
of solid copper conductors in place of
vacuum interrupters, and is designed
for manual racking. It is typically used
as drawout disconnect link in the
primary system for circuit isolation
or bypass. The device is insulated
to suit the voltage rating of the switch-
gear and will carry required levels
of short-circuit current, but it is not
rated for any current interruption.
It must be key interlocked with all
source devices such that it can only
be inserted into or removed from
its connected position only after the
primary circuit that it is to be applied
is completely de-energized.
Before using a dummy element,
it is recommended that each user
develop detailed operating procedure
consistent with safe operating
practices. Only qualied personnel
should be authorized to use the
dummy element.
Functional Test Kit (for Testing of
Digitrip 520V and 1150V Relays)
Functional Test Kit is a hand-held
battery powered tester capable of
testing trip elements of 520V and
1150V protective relays. The test kit
allows testing of: Relay Power Up,
Instantaneous Trip, Short Delay Trip,
Long Delay Pickup and Trip, and
Ground Fault Trip, when applicable.
6.0-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
Application
018
MEF Switchgear with
Automatic Transfer Control
(ATC)
Application
Eatons MEF switchgear with an
automatic transfer control system
is an integrated assembly of drawout
VCP-T/VCP-TL breakers, sensing
devices and control components
available in 5 through 15 kV classes.
Automatic transfer control is typically
applied where the continuity of service
for critical loads from two power
sources in either a two-breaker
(one load) or three-breaker (two
loads) conguration is desired.
MEF switchgear with an automatic
transfer control system can meet most
automatic throwover requirements as
it has a wide variety of operational
sequences embodied in one standard
automatic transfer control system.
ATC Controller
Eatons ATC controller is equipped to
display history information either via
the front panel or over the PowerNet
power monitoring system. Source 1
and Source 2 Run Time, Available Time
and Connect Time are available, as
well as Load Energized Time, Number
of Transfers, and the Date, Time and
Reason for the last 16 transfers.
For communications capability, the
ATC controller can be equipped with
a PONI card that will allow the user to
communicate with the unit via
PowerNet software (see Tab 2).
All settings for purchased options can
be set from the faceplate of the unit or
downloaded over PowerNet. Software
allows for charting of key historical
data, as well as providing the capability
to monitor and control the transfer
switch from a remote location. See
Tab 2 for further information.
ATC Controller
Standard Features
Voltage sensing on both sources is
provided by the ATC controller
Lights to indicate status of switches,
sources, and so on
Interlocking to prevent paralleling of
sources via software
Control power for the automatic
transfer control system is derived
from the sensing voltage transformers
Manual override operation
Selectable closed with sync check or
open transition on return to normal
Programmable time delays on both
sources, OFF DELAY and ON DELAY
Single-source responsibility; all
basic components are manufactured
by Eaton
Optional Features
Lockout on phase and/or ground
overcurrents and/or internal bus faults
Typical Two-Breaker Automatic Transfer
Control Using ATC Controller
Eatons ATC controller continuously
monitors all three phases on both
sources for correct voltages. Should
the voltage of the normal source be
lost while the voltage of the alternate
source remains normal, the voltage
sensing function in the ATC controller
will change state starting the time
delay function. If the voltage of the
normal source is not restored by the
end of the time delay interval, the
normal breaker will open and the
alternate source breaker will close,
restoring power to the load.
Typical Three-Breaker
(Two Mains and Normally Open Tie)
The automatic transfer switchgear
assembly includes two main breakers
and one tie breaker, and an integrated
automatic transfer control system con-
taining sensing devices, low voltage
logic control and auxiliary equipment.
The transfer control system monitors
both sources for correct voltages.
An automatic-manual transfer selec-
tor switch is provided for selection of
manual or automatic operating mode.
In manual mode, all three breakers can
be manually operated. Interlocking is
provided in manual mode of operation to
prevent closing all three breakers at
the same time. In the automatic mode,
the basic sequence of operation based
upon two normally energized sources is
carried out as follows. Normal operation
is with the main breakers closed and
the tie breaker open. Upon detection
of an undervoltage(s) to the line side
of a main breaker, and after a eld-
adjustable time delay, that main breaker
opens and after an additional eld-
adjustable time delay, the tie breaker
closes to restore power to the affected
portion of the facility. Upon restoration
of voltage to the line side of the main
breaker, and after a eld-adjustable time
delay, the tie breaker opens and after a
eld-adjustable time delay, the opened
main breaker closes. An interlocking
is provided to prevent closing all
three breakers simultaneously in
manual mode.
6.0-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
Technical DataSwitchgear Assembly and Circuit Breakers
019
Technical Data
Table 6.0-3. MEF Switchgear Assembly Rated Per ANSI Standards
Table 6.0-4. Available Type VCP-T Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated Per ANSI Standards (C37.04, C37.09)
Rated interrupting time for all VCP-T circuit breakers is 3 Cycle (50 ms).
Operating duty for all VCP-T circuit breakers is O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO.

Table 6.0-5. Type VCP-TC Circuit Breakers (Tested for Capacitor Switching)
Type VCP-TC circuit breakers have same ratings as type VCP-T circuit breakers,
plus capacitor switching capabilities as follows:
Type 50 VCP-T32C, 50 VCP-T40C, 150 VCP-T32C and 150 VCP-T40C circuit breakers only.
Notes: Ratings of 250 and 1000A cover capacitor bank applications from 751000A.
Type VCP-TC breakers are considered denite purpose breakers per ANSI C37.04.
Rated
Maximum
Voltage
Insulation Level Rated
Main Bus
Continuous
Current
Rated Short-Time
Short-Circuit
Current Withstand
(2-Second)
Rated Momentary
Short-Circuit
Current Withstand
(10 Cycle)
Power Frequency
Withstand Voltage,
60 Hz, 1 Minute
Impulse
Withstand
Voltage (BIL)
I 2.6 * I 1.55 * I
(for Reference Only)
kV rms kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms Symmetrical kA Crest kA rms Asymmetrical
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
19
19
19
19
60
60
60
60
1200
2000
1200
2000
25
25
40
40
65
65
104
104
39
39
62
62
15
15
15
15
36
36
36
36
95
95
95
95
1200
2000
1200
2000
25
25
40
40
65
65
104
104
39
39
62
62
Circuit
Breaker
Type
R
a
t
e
d

M
a
x
i
m
u
m
V
o
l
t
a
g
e
Continuous
Current
Rated
Short-Circuit
Current
at Rated
Maximum
Voltage
R
a
t
e
d

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
R
a
n
g
e

F
a
c
t
o
r
Maximum
Symmetrical
Interrupting
& 2-Second
Short-Time
Current
Carrying
Capability
Closing and
Latching
Capability
(Momentary)
Cable
Charging
Breaking
Current
Three-Phase
MVA
at Rated
Maximum
Voltage (for
Reference
Only)
M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l

E
n
d
u
r
a
n
c
e
N
o

L
o
a
d

C
-
O

O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
Power
Frequency
Withstand
Voltage
60 Hz,
1 Minute
Impulse
Withstand
Voltage
(BIL)
1.2 x 50
microsec
V I K K * I 2.6 * K * I Amperes 1.732 * V * I
kV
rms
kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms
Symmetrical
kA rms
Symmetrical
kA Crest MVA
50VCP-T16
50VCP-T16
50VCP-T20
4.76
4.76
4.76
19
19
19
60
60
60
600
1200, 2000
600, 1200, 2000
16
16
20
1
1
1
16
16
20
42
42
52
25
25
25
130
130
165
20,000
10,000
10,000
50VCP-T25
50VCP-T32
50VCP-T40
4.76
4.76
4.76
19
19
19
60
60
60
600, 1200, 2000
600, 1200, 2000
600, 1200, 2000
25
31.5
40
1
1
1
25
31.5
40
65
82
104
25
25
25
210
260
330
10,000
10,000
10,000
150VCP-T16
150VCP-T20
150VCP-T25
15
15
15
36
36
36
95
95
95
600, 1200, 2000
600, 1200, 2000
600, 1200, 2000
16
20
25
1
1
1
16
20
25
42
52
65
25
25
25
420
520
650
10,000
10,000
10,000
150VCP-T32
150VCP-T40
15
15
36
36
95
95
600, 1200, 2000
600, 1200, 2000
31.5
40
1
1
31.5
40
82
104
25
25
830
1040
10,000
10,000
Cable
Charging
Grounded Capacitor Banks
Single Bank Back-to-Back
25A 250 and 1000A 250A with Inrush Current 4 kApk at 5.9 kHz and
1000A with Inrush Current 15 kApk at 25 kHz
6.0-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
Technical DataSwitchgear Assembly and Circuit Breakers
020
Technical Data
Table 6.0-6. Available Type VCP-TL Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated Per ANSI Standards (C37.04, C37.09)
Rated interrupting time for all VCP-TL circuit breakers is 3 Cycle (50 ms).
Operating duty for all VCP-TL circuit breakers is O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO.

Table 6.0-7. Type VCP-TLC Circuit Breakers (Tested for Capacitor Switching)
Type VCP-TLC circuit breakers have same ratings as type VCP-TL circuit breakers,
plus capacitor switching capabilities as follows:
Note: Ratings of 250 and 630A cover capacitor bank applications from 75 to 630A.
Note: Type VCP-TLC breakers are considered denite purpose breakers per ANSI C37.04.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
R
a
t
e
d

M
a
x
i
m
u
m
V
o
l
t
a
g
e
Continuous
Current
Rated
Short-Circuit
Current
at Rated
Maximum
Voltage
R
a
t
e
d

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
R
a
n
g
e

F
a
c
t
o
r
Maximum
Symmetrical
Interrupting
& 2-Second
Short-Time
Current
Carrying
Capability
Closing and
Latching
Capability
(Momentary)
Cable
Charging
Breaking
Current
Three-Phase
MVA
at Rated
Maximum
Voltage (for
Reference
Only)
Mechanical
Endurance
No Load C-O
Operations
Power
Frequency
Withstand
Voltage
60 Hz,
1 Minute
Impulse
Withstand
Voltage
(BIL)
1.2 x 50
microsec
V I K K * I 2.6 * K * I Amperes 1.732 * V * I
kV
rms
kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms
Symmetrical
kA rms
Symmetrical
kA Crest MVA Vacuum
Interrupter
Mechanism
50VCP-TL16
50VCP-TL20
50VCP-TL25
4.76
4.76
4.76
19
19
19
60
60
60
600, 1200
600, 1200
600, 1200
16
20
25
1
1
1
16
20
25
42
52
65
25
25
25
130
165
210
30,000
30,000
30,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
150VCP-TL16
150VCP-TL20
150VCP-TL25
15
15
15
36
36
36
95
95
95
600, 1200
600, 1200
600, 1200
16
20
25
1
1
1
16
20
25
42
52
65
25
25
25
420
520
650
30,000
30,000
30,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
Cable
Charging
25A 250 and 630A 250A with inrush current 15 kApk at 5 kHz and
630A with inrush current 15 kApk at 1.5 kHz
6.0-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
021
Type VCP-T Circuit Breaker Operating Times
The closing time (initiation of close signal to contact make) and opening time (initiation of the trip signal to contact break)
are shown in Table 6.0-8. Figure 6.0-5 below shows the sequence of events in the course of circuit interruption, along with
applicable VCP-T circuit breaker timings.
Table 6.0-8. Closing and Opening Times for Electrically Operated VCP-T Breakers, at Rated Control Voltage
For manually operated breakers with integral protective relay, refer to applicable relay time-current curves for clearing time.
Figure 6.0-5. Sequence of Events for VCP-T Circuit Breakers with Shunt Trip
Figure 6.0-6. Typical Transfer TimesFast Sequential TransferVCP-T Circuit Breakers
Rated
Control Voltage
Breaker
Rating
Closing Time
Milliseconds
Opening Time
Milliseconds
48V, 125V, 250 Vdc All 2840 1727

120V, 240 Vac All 2840
120V or 240 Vac capacitor trip All 1727
Optionalundervoltage trip release 48V, 125V, 250 Vdc All 4060
Clearing Time
Interrupting Time
Release (Tripping) Delay Time Opening Time
Shunt Trip
Operating Time
Mechanism
Operating Time
Protecting Relay
Operating Time
Auxiliary Relay
Operating Time
3 Cycles (50 ms)
(S-Factor Based on This)
(S = 1.2 For All VCP-T Breakers)
1/2 Cycle (8 ms) Minimum
2 Seconds Maximum
25 33 msec
Arcing Time
(5 17 msec)
Short-
Circuit
Begins
Rated Control
Voltage Energizes
Trip Coil
2 2.5 Cycles Based on
1/2 Cycle Tripping Delay
Last
Pole
Clears
Main
Contact
Parts
Opening Time
Trip 52-1
Control
Supply
Source #1
52-1
Close 52-2
Source #2
Transfer
Initiate
52-1
b
Load
52-2
52-2
Standard
b Contact
Transfer
Initiate
Signal
52-1
0
52-1 b Contact
Makes
29 ms
4
ms
Arcing
12 ms
29
Dead Time (No Arcing)
64 ms
Closing Time
60 ms
52 ms
Time (msec) 89
+
6.0-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
022
Type VCP-TL Circuit Breaker Operating Times
The closing time (initiation of close signal to contact make) and opening time (initiation of the trip signal to contact break)
are shown in Table 6.0-9. Figure 6.0-7 below shows the sequence of events in the course of circuit interruption, along with
applicable VCP-TL circuit breaker timings.
Table 6.0-9. Closing and Opening Times for Electrically Operated VCP-TL Breakers, at Rated Control Voltage, Typical
Figure 6.0-7. Sequence of Events for VCP-TL Circuit Breakers with Shunt Trip
Figure 6.0-8. Typical Transfer TimesFast Sequential TransferVCP-TL Circuit Breakers
Rated
Control Voltage
Breaker
Rating
Closing Time
Milliseconds
Opening Time
Milliseconds
3660 Vac, 3672 Vdc All 60 2533

100240 Vac, 100353 Vdc All 60 2533
Clearing Time
Interrupting Time
Release (Tripping) Delay Time Opening Time
Shunt Trip
Operating Time
Mechanism
Operating Time
Protecting Relay
Operating Time
Auxiliary Relay
Operating Time
3 Cycles (50 ms)
(S-Factor Based on This)
(S = 1.2 For All VCP-T Breakers)
1/2 Cycle (8 ms) Minimum
2 Seconds Maximum
25 33 msec
Arcing Time
(5 17 msec)
Short-
Circuit
Begins
Rated Control
Voltage Energizes
Trip Coil
2 2.5 Cycles Based on
1/2 Cycle Tripping Delay
Last
Pole
Clears
Main
Contact
Parts
Opening Time
Trip 52-1
Control
Supply
Source #1
52-1
Close 52-2
Source #2
Transfer
Initiate
52-1
b
Load
52-2
52-2
Standard
b Contact
Transfer
Initiate
Signal
52-1
0
52-1 b Contact
Makes
29 ms
4
ms
Arcing
12 ms
29
Dead Time (No Arcing)
64 ms
Closing Time
60 ms
52 ms
Time (msec) 89
+
6.0-23
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
Technical DataCircuit Breaker Control Power Requirements
023
Table 6.0-10. Shunt Trip Coil Ratings, VCP-T Breakers
These electrical accessories are optional for VCP-T circuit breaker,

and require external control power. Please specify each of these
accessories as required for the application.
Table 6.0-11. Spring Release Coil (Closing Coil) Ratings, VCP-T Breakers

Table 6.0-12. Undervoltage Release Coil Ratings, VCP-T Breakers

Table 6.0-13. Spring Charging Motor Ratings, VCP-T Breakers

Table 6.0-14. VCP-TL Circuit Breaker Control Power Requirements
Data provided are for charging of internal capacitors from a fully discharged state. In normal operation, the capacitors recharge in about 15 seconds
after each closing operation.
Rated
Control
Voltage
Operational
Voltage
Range
Inrush Power
Consumption
at Rated Voltage
Remark
Volts VA
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
1428
2856
77121
250
250
450
125 Vdc
220 Vdc
250 Vdc
70140
154242
140280
450
450
450
110 Vac
120 Vac
220 Vac
240 Vac
77121
104127
154242
208254
450
450
450
450
Capacitor Trip
Capacitor Trip
Capacitor Trip
Capacitor Trip
Rated
Control
Voltage
Operational
Voltage
Range
Inrush Power
Consumption
at Rated Voltage
Volts VA
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
2027
3856
94121
250
250
450
125 Vdc
220 Vdc
250 Vdc
100140
187242
200280
450
450
450
110 Vac
120 Vac
220 Vac
240 Vac
94121
104127
187242
208254
450
450
450
450
Rated
Control
Voltage
Operational
Voltage
Range
Dropout
Voltage Range
(3560%)
Inrush
Power
Consumption
Continuous Power
Consumption
at Rated Voltage
Volts Volts VA VA
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
2026
4153
94121
814
1729
3966
250
275
450
18
18
10
125 Vdc
220 Vdc
250 Vdc
106138
187242
213275
4475
77132
88150
450
450
450
10
10
10
110 Vac
120 Vac
220 Vac
240 Vac
94121
102132
187242
204264
3966
4272
77132
84144
450
450
400
400
10
10
10
10
Rated
Control
Voltage
Operational
Voltage
Range
Running
Current
Inrush
Current
Power
Consumption
at Rated Voltage
Spring
Charging
Time
Volts Ampere Ampere VA Seconds
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
2027
3856
94121
8
4
3
32
16
12
250
250
250
5
5
5
125 Vdc
220 Vdc
250 Vdc
100140
187242
200280
3
2
2
12
8
8
250
250
250
5
5
5
110 Vac
120 Vac
220 Vac
240 Vac
94121
104127
187242
208254
3
3
2
2
12
12
8
8
250
250
250
250
5
5
5
5
Rated
Control
Voltage
Electro-Magnetic Controller Internal Capacitors Charging
Minimum Close, Carry and Interrupting

Current Ratings Needed for External
Contacts
Maximum Inrush
Peak
Inrush Duration Charging Current
Peak
Maximum Charging
Duration
A ms A Sec. Close Contact Trip Contact
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
0.52
14
22
3.5
3.5
3.5
1
1
1
30
30
30
11 mA at 96 Vdc
11 mA at 96 Vdc
11 mA at 96 Vdc
4 mA at 96 Vdc
4 mA at 96 Vdc
4 mA at 96 Vdc
120 Vac
240 Vac
17
22
3.5
3.5
1
1
30
30
11 mA at 96 Vdc
11 mA at 96 Vdc
4 mA at 96 Vdc
4 mA at 96 Vdc
6.0-24
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
Technical DataCircuit Breaker Auxiliary and Other Switches
024
All VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breakers are
supplied with an auxiliary switch with
5NO and 5NC contacts. On Manually
Operated breakers, all 5NO and 5NC
contacts are available for customers
use. On Electrically Operated circuit
breakers, 1NO and 1NC contacts are
used for breaker status indicating
lights (red and green lights) and
remaining 4NO and 4NC contacts are
generally available for other control
functions or customers use.
The auxiliary switch is a heavy-duty,
double-break type switch with wipe
type contacts. The switch contact
ratings and operating times are given
in Table 6.0-15 and Figure 6.0-9.
MOC Switch
The mechanism operated cell (MOC)
switch is not available in MEF switch-
gear. When number of NO and NC
contacts available from the Breaker
Auxiliary Switch are not sufcient
for controls or customers use, an
auxiliary relay energized by one of the
available NO or NC contacts must be
used as needed. The use of auxiliary
relay requires external control power.
TOC Switch
The optional truck operated cell
(TOC) switch operates when the
circuit breaker is levered into or out
of the operating (connected) position.
In MEF TOC option includes two micro
switches, one for connected position,
and one for test/disconnected position,
each with 1 Form C contact. If addi-
tional contacts are required, auxiliary
relay must be used. The use of auxil-
iary relay requires external control
power. The TOC switch contact
ratings are given in Table 6.0-16.
Table 6.0-15. Breaker Auxiliary Switch Contact Ratings
Figure 6.0-9. Breaker Auxiliary Switch Operating Times, at Rated Control Voltage
Table 6.0-16. TOC Switch Contact Ratings
Continuous
Current in
Amperes
120 Vac 240 Vac 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc
Non-Inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes
20 15 10 16 16 10 5
20 15 10 16 16 10 5
Continuous
Current in
Amperes
120 Vac 240 Vac 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc
Non-Inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes
20 15 15 6 0.5 0.5 0.2
20 12.5 12.5 5 0.05 0.05 0.03
Initiation of
Close Signal
Signal: Initiation of
Shunt Trip Signal
Closed
Open
Time
t = 17 27 ms
t 3 ms
"a" Breaks 7 ms
Before "b" Makes
t +10 ms
to +4 ms

3 ms
"b" B k 6 "b" Breaks 6 ms
Before "a" Makes
t 3 ms
Time
t = 28 40 ms
VCP-T
Circuit Breaker
Main Contacts
Breaker Auxiliary
Switch
"a" Contact
Breaker Auxiliary
Switch
"b" Contact
C
T
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
6.0-25
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
Technical DataCurrent Sensors and Instrument Transformers
025
Phase Current Sensors
Eaton Type-V phase current sensors
are specically designed and tested to
function with Eatons 520V and 1150V
integral protective relays and the Type
VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breaker.
The phase current sensors are
installed in the primary circuit,
external to the circuit breaker, over a
set of specially designed insulated
bushings. The bushings and current
sensors are tested as an assembly
for the same impulse withstand (BIL)
rating as that of the switchgear in
which they are installed.
The power required to operate the
relays basic overcurrent protection
functions is provided by secondary
output from the current sensors once
the three-phase primary current
through the circuit breaker exceeds
approximately 10 to 12% of the current
sensor rating or single-phase primary
current exceeds approximately 30%
of the current sensor rating.
The current sensors are designed to
supply sensing and operating power
to Eatons 520V and 1150V integral
protective relays. They are not
suitable for use with any other
relays or meters.
Primary current rating of the current
sensors denes maximum continuous
current rating (I
n
) of the primary circuit
in which they are installed, regardless
of the circuit breaker frame rating.
For example, an 800A current sensor
installed in a primary circuit controlled
by 1200A rated circuit breaker, denes
800A as the maximum continuous
current that can be carried through
that circuit. The current sensors also
determine the maximum instantaneous
setting that can be set on the relays.
Phase Current Sensors and
Rating PlugsAvailable Ratings
100, 200, 250, 300, 400, 600,
630, 800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 1600
and 2000
Zero Sequence
Current Sensors
Eaton Type-V zero sequence current
sensors are specically designed and
tested to function with Eatons 520V
and 1150V integral protective relays
and type VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breaker.
The zero sequence sensor, as its name
implies, measures zero sequence
current (vector summation of phase
currents) and provides sensitive
method for ground fault sensing.
Refer to Table 6.0-17 for available
zero sequence sensors.
Table 6.0-17. Zero Sequence Current Sensors
Available Ratings
For use with 1150V relay only and with

auxiliary power to the relay.
Phase and Zero Sequence
Conventional current transformers
with 5A secondary are used when
using external relays. CTs used for
phase protection and metering are
installed over the specially designed
insulated bushings in the primary
circuit. Maximum of two sets of CTs, or
one set of CT and one set of current
sensor can be installed over those
insulated bushings. Ground fault
sensing, when used, can be accom-
plished by residual sensing of phase
currents, or by using an optional
zero sequence current transformer.
Refer to Table 6.0-18 for the available
current transformers and their
ratings and accuracies.
Table 6.0-18. Phase and Zero Sequence Current TransformersAvailable Ratings
This accuracy is less than IEEE C37.20.2.

Voltage Transformers
Voltage transformers supply voltage
signal proportional to primary circuit
voltage for relaying and metering.
Refer to Table 6.0-19 for available VT
ratings and accuracies.
When two VTs are used, they are
typically connected L-L, and provide
phase-to-phase voltages, (Vab, Vbc,
Vca) for metering and relaying.
When three VTs are used, they are
connected line-to-ground, and provide
phase-to-phase (Vab, Vbc, Vca), as well
as phase-to-ground (Va, Vb, Vc) voltages
for metering and relaying.
If metering or relaying application
requires phase-to-ground voltages,
use three VTs, each connected L-G.
If not, use of two VTs connected L-L
is sufcient.
For ground detection, three VTs
connected in line-to-ground/broken-
delta are used.
A single VT, when used, can be
connected line-to-line (it will provide
line-to-line output, for example Vab
or Vbc, or Vca), or line-to-ground (it
will provide line-to-ground output, for
example Va or Vb or Vc). Generally,
a single VT is used to derive voltage
signal for synchronizing or Over
Voltage/Under Voltage function.
Description Ratio
ID = 4.80 inch (121.9 mm) 50:1
(tap selectable),
ID = 4.80 inch (121.9 mm)
100/200:1
CT Ratio Metering Accuracy Classication at 60 Hz Relay
Class
Burden
B 0.1
Burden
B 0.2
Burden
B 0.5
Burden
B 0.9
Burden
B 1.8
50:5
100:5
200:5
1.2
0.6
0.6
2.4
0.6
0.6
1.2
0.6
2.4
1.2
4.8
2.4
C10
C20
250:5
300:5
400:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.3
0.3
1.2
0.6
0.3
1.2
1.2
0.6
C20
C20
C50
500:5
600:5
750:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
C50
C100
C100
800:5
1000:5
1200:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
C100
C100
C100
1500:5
1600:5
2000:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
C100
C100
C100
50:5 Zero sequence

100:5 Zero sequence
C10
C20
6.0-26
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
Technical DataCircuit Breaker Control, CPT and Surge Protection
026
Table 6.0-19. Voltage Transformers
Available Ratings
All voltage transformers are rated for meter-

ing accuracy of 0.3% at 10 VA burden, and
rated for thermal VA of 200 at 55 degrees C.
Circuit Breaker Control
VCP-T Circuit Breakers
Type VCP-T circuit breakers are
available as either Manually Operated
(MO) or Electrically Operated (EO).
All circuit breakers are equipped with
spring charging handle integral to the
circuit breaker, and push-to-close and
push-to-open pushbuttons.
Manually charging the closing springs
and then pressing the push-to-close
pushbutton accomplish closing of
the MO breaker. Closing of the breaker
charges the tripping springs. Manually
pressing the push-to-open pushbutton
accomplishes tripping of the MO
breaker. If the MO breaker is equipped
with integral protective relay, the relay
provides tripping impulse via trip
actuator to open the breaker, without a
need for external control power supply.
Electrically operated breakers are
equipped with electric motor for
spring charging, spring release coil
(close coil) and shunt trip coil. All
EO breakers can be manually operated
as described above. In order to
electrically operate the EO breakers,
external control power is required.
Also, when using microprocessor-
based or solid-state external relays,
external control power is required for
relay logic.
For AC control, a capacitor trip device
is used with each circuit breaker shunt
trip to ensure energy is available
for tripping during fault conditions.
When AC control power is derived
from within the switchgear, CPT
should be connected on line side of
the main breaker. For main-tie-main
lineups, CPT connected on source side
of each main with automatic transfer
control device on the secondary
should be used.
VCP-TL Circuit Breakers
All VCP-TL circuit breakers are
equipped with linear actuator
mechanism, comprising of: the linear
actuator, electro-magnetic controller
(EM controller), three closing
capacitors, and internal power supply
modules for the EM controller. An
AC or DC control supply (selected by
breaker style number) is required to
operate the linear actuator mechanism.
Internal power supply modules convert
input control voltage and supplies 96
Vdc for operation of the EM controller
and charging of capacitors. The linear
actuator mechanism is designed for
OCO duty cycle with control power
on. Initial charging of capacitors (from
fully discharged state) takes about
30 seconds. In normal operation with
control power connected, the capaci-
tors recharge in about 15 seconds
after each closing operation. All
circuit breakers include a standard
anti-pump feature.
Once the capacitors are charged,
circuit breaker can be closed and
opened through: the use of manual
ON and OFF pushbuttons mounted
on the breaker itself, control switch
mounted on the breaker compartment
door, or any external dry contacts.
In the event that control power is lost,
the circuit breaker is capable of per-
forming a manual or electrical OPEN
operation up to 48 hours after the loss
of control power. If the control power
loss lasts longer than 48 hours, the
circuit breaker can be opened using
the integral EMERGENCY OPEN handle
located on the front of the circuit
breaker, by grasping the handle
rmly and then pulling down.
Control Power Transformers
Control power transformer is used
for auxiliary power for space heaters,
light, receptacle and control of electri-
cally operated breakers when external
auxiliary power source is not available.
Control power transformer when used
for control of electrically operated
breakers should be connected on
source side of the main breaker so
that the control power is available
to close the main breaker. Refer to
Table 6.0-20 for available control
power transformer ratings in
MEF switchgear.
Table 6.0-20. Control Power Transformers
Available Ratings, Single-Phase, 60 Hz
Line-to-Line connection only available.

Surge Protection
Surge arresters and or surge capacitors
can be provided in MEF switchgear.
Refer to Tab 5 for surge protection
guidelines and recommended ratings.
Primary
Voltage
Ratio Secondary
Voltage
2400
4200
4800
20:1
35:1
40:1
120
120
120
7200
8400
12000
60:1
70:1
100:1
120
120
120
12480
13200
14400
104:1
110:1
120:1
120
120
120
Voltage kVA
Rating
BIL
kV
Primary Secondary
2400V
4000V
4160V
240/120V
240/120V
240/120V
5
5
5
60
60
60
4800V
6900V
7200V
240/120V
240/120V
240/120V
5
5
5
95
95
95
8320V
8400V
11500V
240/120V
240/120V
240/120V
5
5
5
95
95
95
12000V
12470V
13200V
240/120V
240/120V
240/120V
5
5
5
95
95
95
13800V
14400V
240/120V
240/120V
5
5
95
95
6.0-27
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
Technical Data
027
Typical Three-Line Diagrams, Integral Protection
Figure 6.0-10. Typical MEF Switchgear with Digitrip 520V Integral Protective Relay
Figure 6.0-11. Typical MEF Switchgear with Digitrip 1150V Integral Protective Relay
Digitrip 520V
Protection:
Short Time & Ground
Fault Zone Interlocking
51 50T 50 51G 50G
Digitrip 1150V
Protection:
Short Time & Ground
Fault Zone Interlocking
51 50T 50 51G 50G
37 46 27 59 32
47 74 81U 81O
Metering:
Iph, Ig, V, F, kW, kVA,
kvar, kWH, kvah, kW &
kVA Demand, % harm,
THD, Bkr Op Count,
Event Logs
6.0-28
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
Technical Data
028
Typical Three-Line Diagrams, External Protection
Figure 6.0-12. Typical MEF Switchgear with EDR-3000 Overcurrent Protective Relay
Figure 6.0-13. Typical MEF Switchgear with EDR-4000 Multi-Function Protective Relay
MV Supply
Ph 1 2 3
VCP-T/VCP-TL
Drawout Breaker
Note:
External Control Power
Required for Breaker
Control and EDR-3000.
CS
Auxiliary
Power (AC, DC)
EDR-3000
Phase and
Ground
Overcurrent
(1) Three-Phase
Current
Transformer
(1) BYZ
Zero Seq. CT
(optional)
Load
Ground Fault Sensing
via Phase Residual,
or Zero Sequence
MV Supply
Ph 1 2 3
VCP-T/VCP-TL
Drawout Breaker
Note:
External Control Power
Required for Breaker
Control and EDR-4000.
CS = Control Switch
CS
Auxiliary
Power (AC, DC)
EDR-4000
Multi-Function
Protection and
Metering
(1) Three-Phase
Current
Transformer
(1) BYZ
Zero Seq. CT
(optional)
Load
Ground Fault Sensing
via Phase Residual,
or Zero Sequence

3P-3A
VTs
(3-LG or 2-LL)
6.0-29
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
Technical Data
029
Electrically Operated BreakersControl Schemes
Figure 6.0-14. Typical AC Control CircuitVCP-T Breaker
Figure 6.0-15. Typical DC Control CircuitVCP-T Breaker
+
S
p
a
r
e
N
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

S
u
p
p
l
y
Ph
1
2
0

V
a
c
1P15A
B14 A26
B15 B12 A25 A23 B10 B21 A29 B19
A30 B20 B22
Capacitor
Trip
EAKER BRE
R
E
S
R
E
S
G R
B29 B23 B25 B27
B24 B28 B30
b a
A16
W
A28
A27
Spring
Charged
Indicating
Light
(Optional)
Close
Control
Trip TT
Protective
Relay
Trip TT
Coil
Motor
Circuit
a
a a a a b b b b
R
E
S
S
p
a
r
e
S
p
a
r
e
S
p
a
r
e
S
p
a
r
e
S
p
a
r
e
S
p
a
r
e
S
p
a
r
e
ac
COM C M
Close
Circuit
(Spring
Release Coil)
(+)
P
(-)
N
D
C

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

S
u
p
p
l
y
A26 B13
b a
A23 B12 A25
B11
A30 B20 B22
B10 A29 B19 B21
G R
B24 B26 B28 B30
B23 B25 B27 B29
2P15A
52
A16 B15
WWW
B14
A28
A27
Spring
Charged
Indicating
Light
(Optional)
Control
Switch
Close
Switch
Trip TT
Protective
Relay
Motor
Circuit
a
a a a a b b b b
Trip TT
Coil
S
p
a
r
e
S
p
a
r
e
S
p
a
r
e
S
p
a
r
e
S
p
a
r
e
S
p
a
r
e
S
p
a
r
e
S
p
a
r
e
R
E
S
R
E
S
R
E
S
Close
Circuit
(Spring
Release Coil)
6.0-30
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
Technical Data
030
Electrically Operated BreakersControl Schemes
Figure 6.0-16. Type VCP-TL Circuit BreakerTypical Control Circuit
2P15A (DC Control)
1P15A (AC Control)
(+) or Ph
R
e
s
R
e
s
G R
(-) or N
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

A
C

o
r

D
C

(
s
e
l
e
c
t
e
d

b
y

b
r
e
a
k
e
r

p
a
r
t

n
u
m
b
e
r
)
VCP-TL Breaker
A27 A29 B15 B12 B13 A25 B19 B21 B23 B25 B27 B29
A28 A30 B14 A26 B20 B22 B24 B26 B28 B30
B10 B11
52
b
52
a
52
b
52
a
52
b
52
a
52
b
52
a
Power
Supply
Local Bkr
Open PB
Local Bkr
Close PB
System
Healthy
Alarm Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare
(+)
CS
C
Remote
Close
CS
T
Relay
Trip
Remote
Trip
6.0-31
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
Layouts and Dimensions
031
MEF Switchgear Available Congurations
with Metering Compartment
Available MEF congurations are shown in Figure 6.0-17.
For other congurations, contact Eaton
If utility metering compartment is required, use MVS
or VCP-W (rear-access) switchgear
Shipping group maximum length = 104.00 inches
(2642.0 mm)
All units are 92.00 inches (2367.0 mm) tall, 61.50 inches
(1562.0 mm) deep
Main bus1200 or 2000A
2000A breakers1-high (one breaker/vertical section) only,
except as noted in Figure 6.0-17
600 and 1200A breakers can be stacked 2-high
(breaker/breaker)
Auxiliary shown can be either VTs (two or three) or
single-phase 5 kVA CPT
CTs or current sensors cannot be placed on main-bus side
of the breaker
CTs shown can be either one or two sets; or one set of
CT and one set of current sensors
Zero sequence CT shown can be replaced with
Zero sequence current sensor
Zero sequence CT and surge arresters shown are optional
Maximum number of cables per phase is limited as
shown in Table 6.0-21
Table 6.0-21. Maximum Number of Cables per Phase
Multiple cables per phase are based on the use of a maximum wire
size of 500 kcmil for each cable. One cable per phase is based on the
use of maximum wire size of 1000 kcmil.
When using a zero sequence sensor (for use with an integral protective
relay), the number of cables is limited to one per phase with a
maximum wire size of 750 kcmil.
Figure 6.0-17. MEF SwitchgearAvailable Congurations
Note: = No shipping split here.
Conguration Cable
Entry
Direction
Number of Power
Cables/Phase
26.00-Inch
(660.4 mm)
Wide Cell
Adjacent
19.00-Inch
(482.6 mm)
Wide Pull
Section
When
Using
Zero
Sequence
CT
Without
Zero
Sequence
CT or
Sensor
Breaker/blank None Bottom 4 4
Breaker/auxiliary Yes Bottom 4 4
Top 4 4
Breaker/breaker Yes Top/top 1 2
Bottom/bottom 1 2
Top/bottom 4 4
6.0-32
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
032
Note: Refer to Page 6.0-31 for notes.
Figure 6.0-17. MEF SwitchgearAvailable Congurations (Continued)
6.0-33
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
033
6.0-34
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
034
6.0-35
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
035
Front and Sectional Views
Figure 6.0-18. Typical 1-High Breaker Unit, Cables Out the Bottom
Figure 6.0-19. Typical Breaker/Auxiliary Unit and Pull Section, Cables Out Top or Bottom
Side View Front View
CT Bushing
V
92.00
(2337.7)
61.50
(1561.7)
26.00
(660.4)
B
3 SA
Zero Seq CT or
Current Sensor
3-PH CT
Cable
Pull Box
6001200A
Breaker
Compartment
Side ViewBreaker Cell Front View
19.00
(482.6)
Side ViewPull Section
Pull
Section
VTs
CT
Bushing
(3) SA
ontrol
6002000A
Breaker
Drawout
Main Bus Main Bus Access
(2337.7)
61.50
(1561.7)
26.00
(660.4)
61.50
(1561.7)
Zero Seq CT or
Current Sensor
6.0-36
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
036
Front and Side Views
Figure 6.0-20. Typical Breaker/Breaker Unit and Pull Section, Cables Out the Bottom
Figure 6.0-21. Typical Breaker/Breaker Unit and Pull Section, Cables Out the Top
VCP
(3) SA
VCP
Side ViewBreaker/Breaker Cell Front View
19.00
(482.6)
61.50
(1561.7)
26.00
(660.4)
61.50
(1561.7)
Zero Seq CT or
Current Sensor
ontrol
600 1200A
Breaker
Pull
Section
6001200A
Breaker
Compartment
(2337.7)
CT Bushing
(3) SA
B
V
VCP-T
Control
6001200A
Breaker
Compartment
Pull
Section
6001200A
Breaker
Compartment
Side ViewBreaker/Breaker Cell Front View
19.00
(482.6)
61.50
(1561.7)
26.00
(660.4)
61.50
(1561.7)
Main Bus Access
Zero Seq CT or
92.00
6.0-37
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
037
Front and Side Views
Figure 6.0-22. Typical Bus Tie Breaker Unit and Pull Section
Brea
VCP
s-2
Side ViewTie Breaker Front View
19.00
(482.6)
61.50
(1561.7)
26.00
(660.4)
61.50
(1561.7)
Pull
Section
ontrol
600 000
Breaker
Compartment
Drawout
Main Bus-1 Main Bus Access
92.00
(2337.7)
6.0-38
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
Layouts and DimensionsFloor Plan Details
038
MEF 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Unit
Figure 6.0-23. MEF 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Unit Floor Plan
Suggested locations for 0.50 inch bolts or welding.
Secondary control wiring conduit openings (top or bottom) conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
Minimum front clearance when using portable lifter. Local jurisdictions may require a larger distance.
Minimum clearance for door opening: door hinged on left A = 15, B = 6.
Primary cable entrance space, available only with 1-high breaker with cables from below.
Primary conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm). See shop order base plan for conduit location.
Minimum rear clearance, local jurisdictions may require a larger distance.
Finished foundations surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left to right, front-to-back and diagonally,
Location of station grounding lug.
Minimum clearance recommended on top of the switchgear for main bus access is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm).
Front
3
4
5
1
Rear
4
6
1
8
9.00
60.00
(1524.0)
22.25
(565.2)
4.00
(101.6)
8.38
(212.9)
30.25
(768.4)
18.00
(457.2)
60.00
(1524.0)
2.00
(50.8)
2.50
(63.5)
2.00
(50.8)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
8.50
(215.9)
26.00
(660.4)
9.80
(249.2)
1.25
(31.8)
2
12.00
(304.8)
7.00
(177.8)
1.25
(31.8)
B A
5.00
(127.0)
1.63
(41.4)
7
9
6.00
(152.4)
For
Seismic
1.75
(44.5)
60.00
(1524.0)
28.50
(723.9)
Load Bearing Surfaces
26.00
(660.4)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
1.25
(31.8)
6.0-39
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
Layouts and DimensionsFloor Plan Details
039
MEF 19.00-Inch (482.6 mm) Wide Pull Section
Figure 6.0-24. MEF 19.00-Inch (482.6 mm) Wide Pull Section Floor Plan
Suggested locations for 0.50 inch bolts or welding.
Secondary control wiring conduit openings (top or bottom) conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
Minimum front clearance when using portable lifter. Local jurisdictions may require a larger distance.
Minimum clearance for door opening: door hinged on left A = 15, B = 6.
Minimum rear clearance, local jurisdictions may require a larger distance.
Finished foundations surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left to right, front-to-back and diagonally,
Location of station grounding lug.
Primary cable entrance space (top or bottom entry). Primary conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
See shop order base plan for conduit location.
Minimum clearance recommended on top of the switchgear for main bus access is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm).
2
4
3
5
8
1
4
1
7
60.00
(1524.0)
22.25
(565.2)
4.00
(101.6)
8.38
(212.9)
30.25
(768.4)
60.00
(1524.0)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
9.81
(249.2)
1.25
(31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
5.00
(127.0)
2.00
(50.8)
Front
6.00
(152.4)
19.00
(482.6)
11.00
(279.4)
B A
Rear
7.00
(177.8)
1.63
(41.4)
6
9
6.00
(152.4)
For
Seismic
1.75
(44.5)
60.00
(1524.0)
28.50
(723.9)
Load Bearing Surfaces
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
1.25
(31.8)
19.00
(482.6)
6.0-40
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 06
040
Table 6.0-22. MEF Switchgear Units Less Circuit BreakersApproximate Weights
Table 6.0-23. VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit BreakersApproximate Weights
Note: Breaker impact weight = 1.5 x static weight.
Table 6.0-24. MEF Equipment Losses
Type of Structure Structure
Width
Inches (mm)
Structure Weight in Lbs (kg)
25 kA Switchgear 40 kA Switchgear
Main Bus Rating Main Bus Rating
1200A 2000A 1200A 2000A
6001200A Breaker over cable entry
6001200A Breaker over 6001200A breaker, with an adjacent pull section
6001200A Breaker over blank, with an adjacent pull section
26.00 (660.4)
45.00 (1143.0)
45.00 (1143.0)
1350 (614)
2000 (909)
1550 (706)
1500 (682)
2250 (1023)
1700 (773)
1560 (709)
2670 (1214)
1785 (811)
1710 (777)
2920 (1327)
1935 (880)
6001200A Breaker over auxiliary, with an adjacent pull section
2000A Breaker over blank, with an adjacent pull section
2000A Breaker over auxiliary, with an adjacent pull section
45.00 (1143.0)
45.00 (1143.0)
45.00 (1143.0)
2000 (909)
2150 (977)
2210 (1005)
2660 (1209)
2235 (1016)
2385 (1084)
2210 (1005)
2660 (1209)
1200A Stand-alone breaker, cable-in/cable-out, with an adjacent pull section
2000A Stand-alone breaker, cable-in/cable-out, with an adjacent pull section
Auxiliary over blank or blank over auxiliary
45.00 (1143.0)
45.00 (1143.0)
26.00 (660.4)
2000 (909)
1500 (682)
2150 (977)
2210 (1005)
1600 (727)
2235 (1016)
1500 (682)
2385 (1084)
2210 (1005)
1600 (727)
Auxiliary over auxiliary
Blank structure (with main bus only)
Transition section (for close coupling to MCC, liquid or dry transformer)
Blank pull section (with main bus only)
26.00 (660.4)
26.00 (660.4)
19.00 (482.6)
19.00 (482.6)
1900 (864)
1000 (455)
800 (364)
550 (250)
2000 (909)
1100 (500)
900 (409)
650 (295)
1900 (864)
1000 (455)
800 (364)
600 (273)
2000 (909)
1100 (500)
900 (409)
700 (318)
Circuit Breaker
Type
Continuous
Current Rating
Amperes
Static
Weight
in Lbs (kg)
50 VCP-T16, 50 VCP-T20, 50 VCP-T25
50 VCP-T32, 50 VCP-T40
150 VCP-T16, 150 VCP-T20, 150 VCP-T25
150 VCP-T32, 150 VCP-T40
1200
2000
1200
2000
250 (114)
440 (200)
250 (114)
440 (200)
50 VCP-TL16, 50 VCP-TL20, 50 VCP-TL25
150 VCP-TL16, 150 VCP-TL20, VCP-TL25
600
1200
600
2200
232 (105)
234 (106)
232 (105)
234 (106)
Equipment Watts Loss
600A breaker
1200A breaker
2000A breaker
400
600
1400


September 2011

Contents
Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEB & MSB Medium Voltage

7.0-1

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

07

Vacuum Breakers

001

M
e
t
a
l
-
E
n
c
l
o
s
e
d

S
w
i
t
c
h
g
e
a
r
M
E
B

&

M
S
B

M
e
d
i
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
V
a
c
u
u
m

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

Metal-Enclosed Switchgear MEB & MSB Medium Voltage Vacuum Breakers
Drawout-Mounted Breaker (MEB)

General Description and Seismic Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1-1

Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1-2

Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1-2

Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1-2

Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1-3

Breaker Control Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1-3


7.1-4
Switch- and Fixed-Mounted Vacuum Breaker (MSB)


7.2-1

Seismic Qualication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2-2

Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2-3

Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2-3

Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2-4

Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2-4

Circuit Breaker Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2-5

Breaker Control Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2-5


7.2-6
Vacuum Breakers

Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3-1

Low Resistance Ground Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3-1

Single-Ended Substation Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3-1

Optional Accessories (MEB and MSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3-2

Surge Arresters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3-2

MEB and MSB Switchgear with Automatic Transfer Control . . . . . . . . . .

7.3-3

Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring for Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3-4
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
MEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


MSB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16347B Section 26 13 19.16
MEB
MVS
MVS
7.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

07

002



7.1-1

September 2011

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

07

Drawout Vacuum Breakers (MEB)

General Description

003

MEB Metal-Enclosed
Drawout Breaker

General Description

Eatons MEB (metal-enclosed breaker)
switchgear assembly consists of a
single-high drawout vacuum circuit
breaker (Type VCP-W) in a metal-
enclosed cabinet. This equipment has
been designed primarily where metal-
clad switchgear is not required and a
switch or switch and fuse combination
are not suitable. As primary protection
for single-ended substations, it can
eliminate the need for a secondary
main circuit breaker. It can also be
applied as the primary main device and
integrated with fused or unfused feeder
switches in an Eaton Type MVS load
interrupter switchgear assembly.
Two and three breaker automatic
transfer schemes are also available.

For drawout vacuum circuit breaker
metal-clad switchgear, Eaton Type
VacClad-W, see

Tab 5

.

metal-enclosed front access only,
Type MEF switchgear, see Tab 6

.
A Type MEB switchgear assembly is
classied as an overcurrent protective
device that provides increased system
protection and increased coordination
with upstream and downstream
devices where these benets cannot
be achieved with a switch and fuse
combination. Vacuum circuit breakers
provide the following features:

High interrupting capacity suitable
for use with ground fault equipment
and differential relay schemes

High duty cycle

Adjustable overcurrent protection

Expanded protective relay functions,
such as those provided in the
EDR-4000 (refer to

Tab 4

)

Three-phase tripping; no single
phasing on tripping

Maintainable

Long equipment life

Special applications, such as
capacitor switching, are possible
with breakers
Type MEB switchgear provides a mini-
mal footprint using vacuum breaker
technology. All protective devices and
metering are conveniently mounted
on the switchgear structure door.
Type VCP-W vacuum circuit breakers
have been designed with a V-Flex
current transfer system that provides
a unique non-sliding current transfer
arrangement, no maintenance,
excellent electrical and thermal transfer,
and long vacuum interrupter life.
Both indoor and outdoor non-walk-in
enclosures are available. Uses are
single or multiple circuits, transformer
primaries and mains for MVS
applications. Congurations with
an automatic transfer control system
can be easily accommodated. Drawout
vacuum breakers are ideal for high
duty cycle, as well as applications
requiring rapid return to service
after a load fault.
Type MEB switchgear is one product
of choice for ground fault interruption
when air interrupters alone would be
potentially hazardous if called on to
operate above their assigned interrupt-
ing ratings. Capacitor switching is easily
handled by MEB, avoiding the restrike
hazard presented by air switches.
Standardized designs cover most
common applications, while custom
designs are also available for unusual
requirements.
Type MEB vacuum switchgear meets
or exceeds the following industry
standards: ANSI/IEEE

C37.20.3,
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.4, ANSI C37.22,
ANSI C37.57, ANSI C37.58, NEMA

SG5, NEMA SG6, CSA

22.2 No. 31-04,
EEMAC G8-3.3. It is also CSA listable
for Canada and U.S. markets.
MEB circuit breaker sections are
easily mixed with MVS fused switch
sections in lineups. No bus transitions
are required between them except
where bus runs from top to bottom
locations, such as between main and
feeder sections.

Seismic Qualication

Refer to

Tab 1

for information on
7.1-2



CA08104001E
September 2011

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

07


General DescriptionTechnical Data

004

Construction

Current and voltage transformers
associated with protection devices
such as the EDR-3000 or EDR-4000
electronic overcurrent relays are
applied using the same ratings as
drawout metal-clad switchgear.
Metering and protective relay devices
are mounted on the single front
hinged door. The front door may be
opened at any time to provide access
to low voltage components and to the
front of the circuit breaker without
being exposed to high voltage.
The IQ family of electronic meters
is normally used when metering
functions are required.
The circuit breaker is racked into or out
of position, but can easily be drawn
out and removed from the enclosure
with grounded steel shutters, prevent-
ing accidental contact with primary
voltage connections. Routine mainte-
nance can be performed on the circuit
breaker mechanism in the enclosure.

MEB with Complete Access to Control
Switches, Overcurrent Relays and Meters,
as well as Breakers

Standard MEB insulators are NEMA
rated glass polyester or optional
epoxy. Control power is required.
The AC control power can be supplied
integrally if specied. The DC control
power, if required, must be furnished
by others.
If AC control power is used, a capacitor
trip device is provided as standard.
A Digitrip 3010 relay with dual source
power supply may be used for over-
current protection, thus eliminating
the need for an uninterruptible power
source for continuous fault current
protection.
Once the circuit breaker is closed
and the closing spring is recharged,
the breaker can open, close and
open without spring recharge.

The VCP-W vacuum circuit breaker is
easily accessible for routine inspection
and maintenance. User-friendly, front panel
controls and indicators are functionally
grouped together for easy operation.


Eatons MEB breaker can be furnished
with an Eaton Type EDR-3000 or
EDR-4000 relay to provide overcurrent
and fault protection. Optional zero

sequence 50/51G ground fault protection

is shown below. Refer to

Tab 4

for
more details.

Figure 7.1-1. Typical MEB Single-Section
One-Line Diagram

EDR-3000 Overcurrent Protective Relay
EDR-4000 Multifunction Protective Relay

Table 7.1-1. Protective Relays

See

Tab 4

for available relays, selection and
application details.
3-CTs
1-Zero Sequence CT
Vacuum
Breaker
EDR-3000 or
EDR-4000
52
50/51
50N/51N

Relay Type Protective Relay
IEEE Functions
Metering

EDR-3000 50/51; 50/51G Amperes
and
ampere
demand
EDR-4000 25, 27, 32, 46, 47,
50N/G, 51N/G,
50/51,50BF, 51V,
59, 67N, 67
Amps; volts;
pf, energy,
power; THD;
waveform


7.1-3

September 2011

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

07


Technical Data

005

Assembly Ratings

Table 7.1-2. MEB Assembly Main Bus Ratings

The switchgear assembly is designed for use with Type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG circuit breakers. However, please note that certain VCP-WC
will apply.

Table 7.1-3. Available Type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated per ANSI Standards

For detailed ratings of Type VCP-W circuit breakers, refer to

Tab 5

,

Table 5.4-1A

.

For detailed ratings of Type VCP-WC circuit breakers, refer to

Tab 5

,

Table 5.4-2

.

For detailed ratings of Type VCP-WG circuit breakers, refer to

Tab 5

,

Table 5.4-3

and

5.4-4

.

Please note certain Eaton breakers may have higher capabilities than required by ANSI standards. When these
breakers are applied in an MEB switchgear assembly, the assembly ratings as given in

Table 7.1-2

will apply.

Breaker Control Ratings


Rated Maximum
Volts kV
Rated
BIL kV
Rated Main Bus
Current Amperes
Rated Momentary
Current kA rms Asymmetrical
Rated Short-TIme (2 Seconds)
Current kA Symmetrical

4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
60
60
60
60
600
600
600
1200
40
61
80
40
25
38
50
25
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
60
60
60
60
60
1200
1200
1200
2000
2000
61
80
101
40
61
38
50
63
25
38
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
600
600
600
1200
1200
1200
1200
40
61
80
40
61
80
101
25
38
50
25
38
50
63

Circuit
Breaker
Type

Rated
Maximum
Voltage
Rated Voltage
Range Factor
Rated
Continuous
Current
Rated Short-Circuit
Current at Rated
Maximum Voltage
and 3-Second Short-Time Current
Carrying Capability
Closing and Latching
Capability (Momentary)
V K I K * I 2.6 * K * I 1.6 * K * I
kV rms Amperes kA rms Symmetrical kA rms Symmetrical kA Crest kA rms Asym

50 VCP-W 250
50 VCP-W 350
50 VCP-W 500
75 VCP-W 500
4.76
4.76
4.76
8.25
1.24
1.19
1.0
1.25
1200
1200
1200
1200
29
41
63
33
36
49
63
41
97
132
170
111
58
78
101
66
150 VCP-W 500
150 VCP-W 750
150 VCP-W 1000
150 VCP-W 1500
15
15
15
15
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.0
1200
1200
1200
1200
18
28
37
63
23
36
48
63
62
97
130
170
37
58
77
101
50 VCP-W 25
50 VCP-W 40
50 VCP-W 50
50 VCP-W 63
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1200
1200
1200
1200
25
40
50
63
25
40
50
63
65
104
130
164
40
64
80
100.8
75 VCP-W 50
150 VCP-W 25
150 VCP-W 40
150 VCP-W 50
8.25
15
15
15
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1200
1200
1200
1200
50
25
40
50
50
25
40
50
130
65
104
130
80
40
64
80
150 VCP-W 63
50 VCP-WG 50
50 VCP-WG 63
150 VCP-WG 50
150 VCP-WG 63
15
4.76
4.76
15
15
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
63
50
63
50
63
63
50
63
50
63
164
137
173
137
173
100.8
82
103
82
103

Rated Control
Voltage
Spring Charge Motor Close or
Trip Amperes
Voltage Range
Inrush Amperes Run Amperes Time Seconds Close Trip

48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
36.0
16.0
9.2
9.0
4.0
2.0
6
6
6
16
7
4
3856
100140
200280
2856
70140
140180
120 Vac
240 Vac
16.0
9.2
4.0
2.0
6
6
6
3
104127
208254
104127
208254
7.1-4



CA08104001E
September 2011

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

07


LayoutDimensions

006

Typical Arrangements5 kV and 15 kV

The sketches in this section represent
the most common arrangements.
Layouts shown are for rear-accessible
equipment. Front-accessible designs
are availablerefer to Eaton. See

Tab 8

for detailed layout information on load
interrupter switchgear. Many other
congurations and combinations are
available. Two voltage transformers
(xed or drawout) for metering or
one control transformer for AC breaker
control can be mounted in the struc-
tures shown. For control power above
1 kVA, additional space is required.
Depth of units will vary due to cable
entrance and exit requirements,
the addition of lightning arresters,
instrument transformers, special cable
terminators, and so on. Cables are
shown out top and bottom for layout
only. Top or bottom must be selected
for incoming and for outgoing cables.
Please note that rear access is required
for installation.
Cable sizing is based on

two

500 kcmil
XLP or EPR insulated

cables per phase

using preformed slip-on cable termina-
tion devices. For unit substation align-
ment details, see

Tabs 13

and

14

.

Figure 7.1-2. Layouts and Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Note:

PROvercurrent protective relay, typical functions50/51, 50/51N or 50/51G. Eaton EDR-3000 or EDR-4000.

Note:

ATCAutomatic Transfer Controller.

Dimensions in inches (mm). Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
52
70.00
(1778.0)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.6)
Outdoor
41.00 (1041.4)
Indoor
36.00 (914.4)
PR

Arrangement 1
Single Unit, Cable In and Out
Arrangement 2
Primary for Dry-Type Transformer
Arrangement 3
Primary for Liquid-Filled Transformer
Arrangement 4
Main Device with Feeders; Metering Section (Optional)
Arrangement 5
Two Breaker Auto TransferSingle Load
Arrangement 6
Three Breaker Auto TransferMain-Tie-Main Feeders
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.6)
36.00
(914.4)
80.00
(2032.0)
52
PR
20.00
(508.0)
52
36.00
(914.4)
70.00
(1778.0)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.6)
PR
70.00
(1778.0)
52
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.6)
36.00 48.00
(914.4 1219.2)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
PR
15.00
(381.0)
ATC
52 52
70.00
(1778.0)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.6)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
15.00
(381.0)
PR PR
52 52
70.00
(1778.0)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.6)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
15.00
(381.0)
PR PR
52


7.1-5

September 2011

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

07


LayoutDimensions

007

Figure 7.1-3. 5 and 15 kV MEB with Main Bus, Main Breaker and
Fixed Line or Bus VTs

Depth shown is based on the use of (2)-500 kcmil cables per phase.
For stand-alone cable in and cable out in the same section, minimum
80.00-inch (2032.0 mm) depth is required.

Note:

Drawout VTs are not available in MEB switchgear. Use Type
VCP-W or MEF designs.

Table 7.1-5. Approximate Weights in Lbs (kg)
Figure 7.1-4. 5 and 15 kV Roof Layouts and Floor Layouts

For cable in and cable out in same section, 80.00-inch (2032.0 mm)
depth is required.

Note:

A = Power cable to load, B = Power cable from source.

5 or 15 kV Class Indoor Outdoor

MEB section
MVS section (non-fused)
Fuses (three) add
Transition section
1600 (726)
1500 (681)
200 (91)
300 (136)
1900 (863)
1800 (817)
200 (91)
Roof for Outdoor Unit

Customer's Cable
Support (Locate at
Installation)
CT
Lug
VCPW
70.00
(1778.0)
VT
90.37
(2295.4)
Indoor
Height
95.46
(2424.7)
Outdoor
Height
Line or Bus
(Fixed)
1.25 (31.8)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
70.00
(1778.0)
1.25 (31.8)
Optional
Rear Door
70.00
(1778.0)
6.60 (167.6)
Optional
Rear Door
8.00 (203.2)
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
16.00 (406.4)
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
16.00 (406.4)
1.50 (38.1)
8.00 (203.2) A & B
A & B
Floor Layout
Rear Access Top or Bottom Entry and Exit
Roof Layout
7.1-6



CA08104001E
September 2011

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

07


LayoutDimensions

008

Figure 7.1-5. Typical Anchor Plan for MEB, Indoor or Outdoor

Locations for tie-down 0.65 (16.5 mm) diameter holes.
Four places. Customer provided bolts for anchoring
should be 0.5013 min. SAE Grade 5, (M12 x 1.75 min.
CL 10.9), and tightened to 75 ft-lbs (101.7 Nm).
Door swing equals unit width at 90.
The standard minimum clearances on side. 24.00 inches
(609.6 mm) may need to be added for passage from front
to rear. The authority having jurisdiction may require a
larger distance.
Clearance required for additional door swing to insert or
remove breaker, and for metering/relays on front of door.
Left hand side only. The authority having jurisdiction
may require a larger distance.
Minimum distance in front is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm)
for breaker insertion and removal. The authority having
jurisdiction may require a larger distance.
The standard minimum recommended distance is
30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for assemblies requiring rear
access for installation and maintenance. The authority
having jurisdiction may require a larger distance.
If optional rear door is supplied, the minimum is the
width of the widest vertical section plus 1.00 inch
(25.4 mm). The authority having jurisdiction may require
a larger distance.
Finished foundations surface shall be level within
0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-
right, front-to-back and diagonally, as measured by a
laser level.
2
7 6
5
1
2
Min.
3
4.25
(108.0)
5.00
(127.0)
Typ.
3
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
FRONT DOOR
Optional
Rear Door
4.25
(108.0)
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
1.25
(31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
4
18.00
(457.2)
Min.
2.95
(74.9)
7.2-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 07
Switch and Fixed Mounted Vacuum Breakers (MSB)
General Description
009
MSB Metal-Enclosed Switch
and Vacuum Breaker
General Description
Eatons assembly designated MSB
(metal-enclosed switch and breaker)
consists of a load interrupter switch
(Type MVS) in series with a vacuum
circuit breaker (Type VCP-TR for
515 kV) in a metal-enclosed cabinet.
This combination has been designed
primarily where a vacuum circuit
breaker is required for its higher
interrupting capacity and a switch is
required to provide a visible means
of disconnect. As primary protection
for single-ended substations, it can
eliminate the need for a secondary
main circuit breaker. It can also be
applied as the primary main device
and integrated with fused or unfused
feeder switches in a lineup of MVS
switchgear. Two and three breaker
automatic transfer schemes are
also available.
metal-enclosed switchgear, Type MEB,
see Page 7.1-1.
For drawout vacuum circuit
breaker metal-clad switchgear,
Type VacClad-W, see Tab 5.
metal-enclosed front access only,
Type MEF switchgear, see Tab 6.
With the vacuum circuit breaker,
Type MSB switchgear is classied as
an overcurrent protective device that
provides increased system protection
and increased coordination with
upstream and downstream devices
where these benets cannot be
achieved with a switch and fuse
combination. Vacuum circuit breakers
provide the following features:
High interrupting capacity suitable
for use with ground fault equipment
and differential relay schemes
Load Break Switch providing
visible means of disconnect
without opening the door
High duty cycle
Adjustable overcurrent protection
Expanded protective relay functions,
such as those provided in the
EDR-4000 (refer to Tab 4)
Three-phase tripping; no single
phasing on tripping
Maintainable
Long equipment life
Special applications, such as
capacitor switching, are possible
with breakers
Eaton Type MSB switchgear
provides a small footprint using
vacuum breaker technology where the
breaker rating does not exceed 1200A
continuous and the interrupting ratings
shown. All protective devices and
metering are conveniently mounted
on the switchgear structure door.
The VCP-TR vacuum breaker is a fully
rated two-step stored energy circuit
breaker with an open-close-open
duty cycle. It is rated for 25 or 40 kA
interrupting ratings at all voltages
from 4.76 to 15 kV and has a front
access mechanism. Type VCP-TR
circuit breakers can be supplied with
integral trip unit for phase and ground
overcurrent protection.
The vacuum circuit breakers have
been designed with a ex current
transfer system that provides a unique
non-sliding current transfer arrange-
ment, no maintenance, excellent
electrical and thermal transfer, and
long vacuum interrupter life.
Visible disconnect means is ensured
by the load break air interrupter switch
and viewing window. Both indoor and
outdoor non-walk-in enclosures are
available. Applications are single
units, lineups and transformer primary
applications. Congurations with an
can be easily accommodated. Fixed
vacuum breakers are ideal for high
duty cycle, as well as applications
requiring rapid return to service after
a load fault.
Type MSB switchgear is the product
of choice for ground fault interruption
when air interrupters alone would be
potentially hazardous if called on to
operate above their assigned ratings.
Capacitor switching is easily handled
by MSB avoiding the restrike hazard
presented by air switches.
Standardized designs cover most
common applications while custom
designs are also available for unusual
requirements.
Type MSB vacuum switchgear
meets or exceeds the following
industry standards:
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.4
ANSI C37.22
ANSI C37.57
ANSI C37.58
NEMA SG5
NEMA SG6
CSA 22.2 No. 31
EEMAC G8-3.3
CSA listable for Canada and
U.S. markets
Refer to MVS Tab 8. MVS switch
sections are easily mixed with MSB
sections in lineups. No bus transitions
are required between them except
where bus runs from top to bottom
locations, such as between main and
feeder sections.
7.2-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 07
General Description
010
Seismic Qualication
Refer to Tab 1 for information on
5/15 kV MSB Assembly
7.2-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 07
011
Construction
Eatons Type MSB switchgear uses the
same proven enclosure and air switch
mechanism as MVS switchgear. It
differs in the addition of the xed-
mounted Eaton VCP-TR (515 kV)
vacuum breaker in place of fuses.
Current and voltage transformers
associated with protection devices
such as the EDR-3000 or EDR-4000
electronic protective relays are applied
using the same ratings as drawout
metal-clad switchgear. Integral over-
current protective devices with the
Arcash Reduction Maintenance
System mode switch, such as
DT 520MCV and DT 1150V, are also
available. Devices are mounted on the
single front-hinged door. The front door
may be opened at any time to provide
access to low voltage components and
the front of the circuit breaker without
being exposed to high voltage.
Eatons IQ family of electronic meters
is normally used when metering
functions are required.
The circuit breaker is bolted into
position, but can be unbolted and
removed from the enclosure. Routine
maintenance can be performed on
the circuit breaker mechanism in
the enclosure.
Standard switch insulators are NEMA
rated glass polyester or optional
epoxy. Control power will be required
as detailed below. The AC can be
supplied integrally if specied. The
DC control power, if required, must
be furnished by others.
If AC control power is used, a capacitor
trip device is provided.
Once the circuit breaker is closed and
the closing spring is recharged, the
breaker can open, close and open
without spring recharge.
MSB with Control Switches,
Digitrip 3000 Overcurrent Relay
with Optional Metering Shown
EDR-3000 Overcurrent Protective Relay
EDR-4000 Multifunction Protective Relay
Digitrip 520MCV
Digitrip 1150V
7.2-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 07
Technical Data
012
Eatons MSB breaker can be furnished with an Eaton Type
EDR-3000 or EDR-4000 relay to provide overcurrent and fault
protection. Optional zero sequence 50/51G ground fault
protection is shown below. Refer to Tab 4 for more details.
Figure 7.2-1. Typical MSB Single-Section One-Line Diagram
Figure 7.2-2. Typical MSB One-Line Diagram with DT 520MCV
Figure 7.2-3. Typical MSB One-Line Diagram with DT 1150V
Table 7.2-1. Integral Protective Relays
See Tab 6, Pages 6.0-10, 6.0-11 and 6.0-12 for details.

Table 7.2-2. Protective Relays
See Tab 4 available relays selection and application details.

Assembly Ratings
Table 7.2-3. MSB Switchgear Assembly Ratings
Figure 7.2-4. Transformer Primary Breaker with Secondary Bus
Surge protection device, such as RC snubber, ZORC, EHZ or

Protec Z is highly recommended for transformer protection. Refer to
Tab 5, Page 5.4-17 to Page 5.4-19 for Eatons recommendations for
surge protection.
3-CTs
1-Zero Sequence CT
Vacuum
Breaker
MVS Load
Break
Switch
EDR-3000 or
EDR-4000
52
50/51
50N/51N
TA
Phase Current
Sensors
MVS
Switch
EM
(if TRL
bkr)
52
VCP-TR or -TRL
Circuit Breaker
Optional Ground
Current Sensor
Integral Trip Unit
DT 520MCV
TA = Trip Actuator
EM = Electromagnetic
Linear Actuator
RP = Rating Plug
RP
TA
Phase Current
Sensors
MVS
Switch
EM
(if TRL
bkr)
52
VCP-TR or -TRL
Circuit Breaker
Optional Ground
Current Sensor
TA = Trip Actuator
Linear Actuator
RP = Rating Plug
RP
VYs
2 L-L or 3 L-G
Integral Trip Unit
DT 1150V
IEEE Functions
Metering
DT 520MCV 50, 50T, 51, 50G, 51G Amperes
DT 1150V 50, 50T, 51, 51G, 50G, 37, 46,
27, 59, 32, 47, 74, 81U, 81-0
Amperes, voltage, VA,
VAR, Watt, Wh, VAh, THD
IEEE Functions
Metering
EDR-3000 50/51; 50/51G Amperes and
ampere demand
EDR-4000 25, 27, 32, 46, 47, 50N/G,
51N/G, 50/51, 50BF, 51VR,
59, 67N, 67
Amps; volts; pf,
energy, power; THD;
waveform
Rated
Maximum
Volts kV
Rated
BIL
kV
Rated
Main Bus
Current
Amperes
Rated
Momentary
Current kA rms
Asymmetrical
Rated Short-TIme
(2 Seconds)
Current kA
Symmetrical
4.76
4.76
60
60
600, 1200, 2000
600, 1200, 2000
40
64
25
40
15
15
95
95
600, 1200
600, 1200
40
64
25
40
TA
ST
CTs
MVS
Switch
EM
(if TRL
bkr)
52
VCP-TR or -TRL
Circuit Breaker
Substation
Transformer
TA = Trip Actuator
Linear Actuator
RP = Rating Plug
ST = Shunt Trip Coil
RP
VTs 2 L-L or 3 L-G
Integral Trip Unit
DT 520MCV or
DT 1150V
R
Current
Sensors
LV Switchgear Main Bus
Max Length = 50 Feet
R = Relay
DT-3010
Required if Using
DT-1150V
Primary Source

7.2-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 07
Technical Data
013
Circuit Breaker Ratings
Type MSB assemblies can be supplied with Type VCP-TR or
VCP-TRC (stored energy operator) or with Type VCP-TRL or
VCP-TRLC (electromagnetic linear actuator operator) circuit
breakers. Type VCP-TRC and VCP-TRLC circuit breakers are
identical to VCP-TR and VCP-TRL breakers except they
are rated for additional capacitor switching capability as
indicated in Table 7.2-5.
Table 7.2-4. Available Type VCP-TR and VCP-TRL Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated per ANSI Standards
Rated interrupting time for all VCP-T circuit breakers is 3 cycle (50 ms).
Operating duty for all VCP-T circuit breakers is O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO.

Table 7.2-5. Available Type VCP-TRC Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated
per ANSI Standards (Denite Purpose, Tested for Capacitor Switching)
Type VCP-TRC (stored energy operator) circuit breakers have same
ratings as Type VCP-TR breakers, plus additional capacitor switching
capabilities as follows.
Breaker Control Ratings
Table 7.2-6. Breaker Stored Energy Mechanism Control Power
Requirements
Inrush current is 4 times running amperes.

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Rated
Maximum
Voltage
Continuous
Current
Rated
Short-
Circuit
Current
at Rated
Maximum
Voltage
Rated
Voltage
Range
Factor
Maximum
Symmetrical
Interrupting
& 2-Second
Short-Time
Current
Carrying
Capability
Closing
and
Latching
Capability
(Momentary)
Cable
Charging
Breaking
Current
Three-Phase
MVA
at Rated
Maximum
Voltage
(for
Reference
Only)
Mechanical Endurance
No Load C-O Operations
Power
Frequency
Withstand
Voltage
60 Hz,
1 Minute
Impulse
Withstand
Voltage
(BIL)
1.2 x 50
microsec
V I K K * I 2.6 * K * I 1.732
* V * I
kV rms kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms
sym
kA rms sym kA Crest Amperes MVA Vacuum
Interrupter
Mechanism
50VCP-TR25
50VCP-TRL25
50VCP-TR40
4.76
4.76
4.76
19
19
19
60
60
60
600, 1200
600, 1200
600, 1200
25
25
40
1
1
1
25
25
40
65
65
104
25
25
25
210
210
330
30,000
30,000
30,000
10,000
100,000
10,000
150VCP-TR25
150VCP-TRL25
150VCP-TR40
15
15
15
36
36
36
95
95
95
600, 1200
600, 1200
600, 1200
25
25
40
1
1
1
25
25
40
65
65
104
25
25
25
650
650
1040
30,000
30,000
30,000
10,000
100,000
10,000
Circuit
Breaker Type
Cable
Charging
VCP-TRC
(40 kA ratings)
25A 250 and 1000A 250A with inrush current
of 4 kA peak at 5.9 kHz and
1000A with inrush current
of 15 kA peak at 25 kHz
Rated
Control
Voltage
Spring Charge Motor
Close or Trip
Amperes
Voltage Range
Run
Amperes
Time
Seconds
Close Trip
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
4.0
3.0
2.0
5
5
5
5.2
3.6
1.8
3856
100140
200280
2856
70140
140180
120 Vac
240 Vac
3.0
2.0
5
5
3.6
1.8
104127
208254
104127
208254
7.2-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 07
LayoutDimensions
014
Typical Arrangements5 kV and 15 kV
The sketches in this section represent
the most common switch arrange-
ments. Many other congurations and
combinations are available. Layouts
shown are for rear-accessible equip-
ment. Front-accessible designs are
availablerefer to Eaton.
Depth of units will vary due to cable
entrance and exit requirements,
instrument transformers, special
cable terminators, and so on.
Cables are shown out top and bottom
for layout only. Top or bottom must be
selected for incoming and for outgoing
cables. Cable sizing is based on two
500 kcmil XLP or EPR insulated cables
per phase using preformed slip-on
cable termination devices. Rear access
is required for installation. For unit
substation alignment details, see
Tabs 13 and 14.
Figure 7.2-5. Layouts and Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Width of metering compartment may vary depending on utility requirements.

Note: PROvercurrent protective relay, typical functions50/51, 50/51N or 50/51G. Eatons EDR-3000 or EDR-4000.
Dimensions in inches (mm). Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
62.00
(1574.8)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
Outdoor
41.00
(1041.4)
Indoor
36.00
(914.4)
52
PR
70.00
(1778.0)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
36.00
(914.4)
52
PR
62.00
(1574.8)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
36.00
(914.4)
20.00
(508.0)
52
PR
80.00
(2032.0)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
52
PR
62.00
(1574.8)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
36.00 - 48.00
(914.4 - 1219.2)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
15.00
(381.0)
36.00
(914.4)
52
PR
52
PR
62.00
(1574.8)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
36.00 - 48.00
(914.4 - 1219.2)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
52
PR
52
PR
52
PR
62.00
(1574.8)
ATC
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
15.00
(381.0)
52
PR
52
PR
ATC
52
PR
52 52
PR
62.00
(1574.8)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
15.00
(381.0)
36.00
(914.4)
15.00
(381.0)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
15.00
(381.0)
Arrangement 1
Single Unit,
Cable In and Out
Arrangement 2
Primary for Dry-Type
Transformer
Arrangement 3
Primary for Liquid Filled
Transformer
Arrangement 4
Duplex Arrangement
Source Selective
Arrangement 5
Main Device with Feeders; Metering Section (Optional)
Arrangement 6
Main Lugs with Feeders; Metering Section (Optional)
Arrangement 8
Three Breaker Auto TransferMain-Tie-Main with Feeders
Arrangement 7
Two Breaker Auto TransferSingle Load
7.2-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 07
LayoutDimensions
015
Figure 7.2-6. 5, 15 kV MSB with Main Bus
Minimum depth 70.00 inches (1778.0 mm) if two sets of CTs are required.
Figure 7.2-7. 5, 15 kV MSB without Main Bus
Minimum depth 80.00 inches (2032.0 mm) if two sets of CTs are required.
Figure 7.2-8. 5 kV and 15 kV Roof Layouts and Floor Layouts
Cable location B not available with main bus.

Note: A = Power cable to load, B = Power cable from source.
Note: For D dimension, refer to Page 7.1-4.
95.46
(2424.7)
Outdoor
Height
90.37
(2295.3)
Indoor
Height
Switch
Vacuum
Breaker
CT
VT
Roof for
Outdoor Unit
62.00
(1574.8)
95.46
(2424.7)
Outdoor
Height
90.37
(2295.3)
Indoor
Height
Switch
Roof for
Outdoor Unit
CT
Vacuum
Breaker
VT
VT cannot be located
here when using
40 kA breaker
Dimensions in inches (mm).

Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
A & B
D
1.25 (31.8)
Optional
Rear Door
36.00 (914.4)
6.60 (167.6)
A & B
D
1.25 (31.8)
Optional
Rear Door
36.00 (914.4)
8.00 (203.2)
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
16.00 (406.4)
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
16.00 (406.4)
1.50 (38.1)
8.00 (203.2)
Floor Layout
Rear Access Top or Bottom Entry and Exit
Roof Layout
7.2-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 07
LayoutDimensions
016
Figure 7.2-9. Typical Anchor Plan for MSB, Indoor or Outdoor
2
7 5
6
4
1
2
Min.
3
4.25
(108.0)
5.00
(127.0)
Typ.
3
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
FRONT DOOR
Optional
Rear Door
4.25
(108.0)
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
1.25
(31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
2.95
(74.9)
5 or 15 kV Class Indoor Outdoor
MSB section
MVS section (non-fused)
Fuses (three) add
Transition section
1700 (773)
1500 (681)
200 (91)
300 (136)
2000 (909)
1800 (817)
200 (91)

Locations for tie-down 0.65 inches
(16.5 mm) diameter holes for
four places. Customer provided
bolts for anchoring should be
0.5013 min. (M12 x 1.75 min.
CL 10.9) and tightened to 75 ft-lbs
(101.7 Nm).
Door swing equals unit width
at 90.
The standard minimum clearances
on side. 24.00 inches (609.6 mm)
may need to be added for passage
from front to rear. The authority
having jurisdiction may require a
larger distance.
Minimum clearance in front is the
width of the widest vertical section
plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The
authority having jurisdiction may
require a larger distance.
The standard minimum
recommended distance is
30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for
assemblies requiring rear access
for installation and maintenance.
The authority having jurisdiction
may require a larger distance.
For MVS only. If the application is
specically provided by contract as
not requiring rear access as stated
in 5, then the minimum
recommended distance is
6.00 inches (152.4 mm).
If optional rear door is supplied,
the minimum is the width of the
widest vertical section plus
1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The authority
having jurisdiction may require a
larger distance.
Finished foundations surface
shall be level within 0.06-inch
(1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches
(914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-
back and diagonally, as measured
by a laser level.
7.3-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 07
Vacuum Breakers
Application Examples
017
Application Examples
Low Resistance Ground Schemes
Medium voltage low resistance
ground schemes are typically used for
medium voltage 5 kV class systems
feeding 5 kV class motor loads. The
resistor affords both full selectivity in
tripping on ground faults, while limit-
ing ground fault magnitudes to low
values (typically 50400A). Reducing
the current levels to a faulted motor
greatly reduces the damage to the
motor and subsequent rewind and
repair costs.
System tripping during a ground fault
on the line side of the secondary main
breaker must be cleared by sending a
trip signal to the transformer primary
side protective device. Fusible switches
on the primary side of the step-down
transformer (typically rated 515 kV)
may not be used for this purpose. Any
ground fault sensed may escalate as
the switch is being signaled to trip
thereby exceeding its typical 600A
maximum current breaking capacity.
Eatons MEB and MSB breaker, being a
fully rated interrupting device, may be
tripped regardless of fault level up to
its interrupting rating (for example,
28 kA). Only this type of overcurrent
device or a metal-clad switchgear
drawout breaker may be safely used.
Single-Ended Substation Designs
In this conguration, the MEB or MSB
serves as both primary and secondary
protection for the transformer. Savings
in both oor space and cost result, due
to elimination of the secondary main
device. This scheme is only recom-
mended where cost and space prevent
the use of secondary main device.
Note: Two sets of current transformers are
used to protect against secondary ground
faults, overloads and short circuits, as well
as primary winding faults.
Figure 7.3-1. Low Resistance Ground Scheme (Phase and Primary Ground Fault Protection not Shown)
Figure 7.3-2. Single-Ended Unit Substations Using Primary Breaker Protection (MEB)
Figure 7.3-3. Single-Ended Unit Substations Using Primary Breaker Protection (MSB)
251G 151G
52-2
52-1
R
52-2
R
251G
Unprotected
Zone for
Ground
Fault
Protection
Complete Secondary Ground
Fault Protection Using WVB
for Primary Device
Incomplete Ground Fault Protection
Using Fusible Switch Primary
DeviceNOT RECOMMENDED
50/51
50N/51N
52
50/51
50N/51N
DT 520MCV
DT 1150V
EDR-3000
or EDR-4000
EDR-3000
or EDR-4000

50/51
50N/51N
50/51
50N/51N
52
EDR-3000
EDR-4000
DT 520MCV
DT 1150V
EDR-3000
EDR-4000
7.3-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 07
Vacuum Breakers
Optional Accessories (MEB and MSB)
018
Surge Arresters
IEEE Standard C62.11 for metal-oxide
surge arresters lists the maximum
rated ambient temperature as 40C.
The ambient temperature inside an
MEB and MSB switchgear vertical
section may exceed this temperature,
especially in outdoor applications
where solar radiation may produce
a signicant contribution to the
temperature. Table 7.3-1 lists the
recommended minimum duty cycle
voltage rating for various system
grounding methods based on switch-
gear temperatures not exceeding 55C.
Table 7.3-1. Suggested Minimum Ratings (kV) for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters Located in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
Note: MCOV = Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage.
Service
Voltage
Line-to-Line
kV
Solidly
Grounded System
Low Resistance
Grounded System
High Resistance or
Ungrounded System
Solidly
Grounded System
Low Resistance
Grounded System
High Resistance or
Ungrounded System
2.30
2.40
3.30
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
4.00
4.16
4.76
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
4.80
6.60
6.90
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.20
8.32
8.40
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
11.00
11.50
12.00
9
9
10
7.65
7.65
8.40
9
10
10
7.65
8.40
8.40
15
18
18
12.70
15.30
15.30
9
9
10
7.65
7.65
8.40
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
15
18
18
12.70
15.30
15.30
12.47
13.20
13.80
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
12
12
12
10.20
10.20
10.20
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
12
12
15
10.20
10.20
12.70
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
14.40 12 10.20 12 10.20 21 17.00 12 10.20 15 12.70 21 17.00
7.3-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 07
Vacuum Breakers
019
MEB and MSB Switchgear
with Automatic Transfer Control
Application
Eatons MEB and MSB switchgear with
an automatic transfer control system
is an integrated assembly of drawout
VCP-W breakers, sensing devices
and control components. Available
in 515 kV classes.
It is typically applied where the
continuity of service for critical loads
from two power sources in either
a two-breaker (one load) or three-
breaker (two loads) conguration
is desired.
MEB and MSB switchgear with an
can meet most automatic throwover
requirements as it has a wide variety
of operational sequences embodied
in one standard automatic transfer
control system.
Typical Two-Breaker Automatic Transfer
Using ATC Controller
sources for correct voltages. Should the
voltage of the normal source be lost
while the voltage of the alternate source
remains normal, the voltage sensing
function in the ATC controller will
change state starting the time delay
function. If the voltage of the normal
source is not restored by the end of the
time delay interval, the normal breaker
will open and the alternate source
breaker will close, restoring power to
the load.
ATC Controller
Reason for the last 16 transfers.
ATC controller can be equipped with
a PONI card that will allow the user
to communicate with the unit via
PowerNet software (see Tab 2). All
settings for purchased options can
be set from the faceplate of the unit or
downloaded over PowerNet. Software
data, as well as providing the capabil-
ity to monitor and control the transfer
switch from a remote location. See
Tab 2 for more information.
ATC Controller
Standard Features
sources, and so forth
by Eaton
Optional Features
Typical Three-Breaker
(Two Mains and Normally Open Tie)
The automatic transfer switchgear
assembly includes two main breakers
and one tie breaker, and an integrated
containing sensing devices, low
voltage logic control and auxiliary
equipment. The transfer control
system monitors both sources for
correct voltages. An automatic-manual
transfer selector switch is provided
for selection of manual or automatic
operating mode. In manual mode,
all three breakers can be manually
operated. Interlocking is provided in
manual mode of operation to prevent
closing all three breakers at the same
time. In the automatic mode, the basic
sequence of operation based upon two
normally energized sources is carried
out as follows. Normal operation is
with the main breakers closed and the
tie breaker open. Upon detection of
an undervoltage(s) to the line side
of a main breaker, and after a eld-
adjustable time delay, that main
breaker opens and after an additional
eld-adjustable time delay, the tie
breaker closes to restore power to the
affected portion of the facility. Upon
restoration of voltage to the line side
of the main breaker, and after a eld-
adjustable time delay, the tie breaker
opens and after a eld-adjustable time
delay, the opened main breaker closes.
Interlocking is provided to prevent
closing all three breakers simulta-
neously in manual mode.
7.3-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 07
Vacuum Breakers
020
Partial Discharge
for Switchgear
Partial discharge (PD) is a common
name for various forms of electrical
discharges such as corona, surface
tracking and discharges internal to
the insulation. It partially bridges the
insulation between the conductors.
These high-frequency discharges are
essentially small arcs occurring in or
on the surface of the insulation system
when voltage stress exceeds a critical
value. With time, airborne particles,
contaminants and humidity lead
to conditions that result in partial
discharges. Partial discharges start
at a low level and increase as more
insulation becomes deteriorated.
bus insulation, or discharges in the
air gap between the bus and a support,
sections of the switchgear. If partial
discharge process is not detected and
corrected, it can develop into a full-
scale insulation failure followed by an
electrical fault. Most switchgear ash-
over and bus failures are a result of
insulation degradation caused by
Coupling Capacitor
Type PD Sensor
RFCT Sensor
InsulGard Relay
(PD Monitoring)
Eatons Type MEB and MSB metal-
enclosed switchgear (2.415 kV) is
corona-free by design. By making
switchgear assemblies corona-free,
Eaton has made its standard switch-
gear more reliable. However, as
indicated above, with time, airborne
particles, contaminants and humidity
lead to conditions that cause partial
discharges to develop in switchgear
operating at voltages 4000V and
above. Type MEB and MSB switchgear
can be equipped with factory-installed
under normal operation. Timely
detection of insulation degradation
through increasing partial discharges
can identify potential problems so
that corrective actions can be
planned and implemented long
before permanent deterioration
develops. Partial discharge detection
can be the foundation of an effective
predictive maintenance program.
Trending of partial discharge data
over time allows prediction of failures,
which can be corrected before
The PD sensing and monitoring
system consists of Eatons InsulGard
relay and PD sensors specically
developed for application in the
switchgear to work with the relay.
Partial discharges within the MEB
by the installation of a small donut type
radio frequency current transformer
(RFCT) sensor over oating stress
shields of the specially designed bus
or line side primary bushings. Partial
discharge in the customers power
cables (external discharges) are
detected by the installation of the RFCT
around ground shields of the incoming
or outgoing power cables termination.
Partial discharges within the MSB
by installation of coupling capacitor
type sensor connected to the main
bus or on the load side of the feeder
breakers. Partial discharges in the
customers power cables (external
discharges) are detected by the
installation of the RFCT around ground
shields of the incoming or outgoing
power cables termination.
Output signals from sensors (coupling
capacitor and RFCT) are wired out to
terminal blocks for future or eld use,
or connected to the InsulGard relay.
One InsulGard relay can monitor up
to 15 output signals, and temperature
and humidity. The temperature and
humidity sensors are included with
each InsulGard relay system. The
relay continuously monitors the
switchgear primary system for partial
discharges and provides an alarm
signal (contact closure) when high
PD level is detected. Data analysis
and diagnostics performed by Eaton
engineers can also be provided by
remote communication with the
InsulGard relay.
optional in MEB and MSB switchgear.
Input
Terminal
Block
InsulGard
Relay
Optional
Modem
Temp Sensor
Humidity Sensor
Output
Alarm
Status
120 Vac
Auxiliary
Power Signals (up to 15 Total) from
PD Sensors (Coupling Capacitors,
RFCT Sensor, RTD Input, etc.)
7.3-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 07
Vacuum Breakers
021
Figure 7.3-5. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in
MEB Switchgear (515 kV)
Note: Use one set of epoxy bottles with ground stress shield on bus
side (either in the top or bottom compartment) at every two vertical
sections. Use standard bottles at all other locations.
Figure 7.3-6. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in MSB
Switchgear (515 kV)
Note: Use one set of PD sensing capacitors at every two vertical
sections, or portion thereof. Use one RFCT at each incoming/
outgoing cable circuit.
compartment.
compartment.
7.3-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 07022


September 2011

Contents

Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMVS Medium Voltage
8.0-1

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

08


001

M
e
t
a
l
-
E
n
c
l
o
s
e
d

S
w
i
t
c
h
g
e
a
r
M
V
S

M
e
d
i
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

L
o
a
d
I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
e
r

F
u
s
i
b
l
e

S
w
i
t
c
h

MVS Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Fusible Switch

MVS Load Interrupter Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.0-2

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.0-2

Duplex Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.0-5

Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.0-5

Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.0-6

Motor Operated MVS Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.0-7

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.0-7

Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.0-9

MVS Switchgear with Automatic Transfer Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.0-11

MVS Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.0-12

MVS Layout Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.0-15

Mini MVS Layout Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.0-25
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010

Sections 16361A, Sections 26 13 16.11,
16361B 26 13 16.13
MVS Load Interrupter Switchgear
8.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

08


General Description

002

MVS Load Interrupter
Switchgear

General Description

Eatons MVS Load Interrupter
Switchgear is an integrated assembly
of switches, bus and fuses that are
coordinated electrically and mechani-
cally for medium voltage circuit
protection. All major components are
manufactured by Eaton, establishing
one source of responsibility for the
equipments performance and ensuring
high standards in quality, coordination,
reliability and service.
A complete line of Eaton switches and
fuses is available, as follows:

5, 15, 27 and 38 kV voltage classes

600A continuous and load interrupt-
ing ratings, all voltage classes,
1200A continuous and load inter-
rupting for 5 and 15 kV classes

350A continuous and load
interrupting ratings for 5 kV and
15 kV classes for capacitive circuits

Non-fused or fused with current
limiting or boric acid-type fuses

Manual or motor operated

Indoor or outdoor non-walk-in
enclosures

Single switches and transformer
primary switches

Duplex loadbreak switch arrange-
ments for selection of alternate
feeds

Two-position, manual no-load
selector switches for selection of
alternate feeds (5 and 15 kV only)

Lineups with main bus

Standard arrangements with auto-
matic transfer control systems, two
sources feeding one load or two
sources feeding two loads on a split
bus with tie switch
Standard design congurations for:

NEMA

pads for cable lugs

Surge arresters

Instrument transformers

Control power transformers

IQ electronic metering

Eatons PowerNet

accessing
devices such as addressable relays
and PONI cards

Other auxiliary equipment

Outdoor Duplex with Customer Metering


Eatons Load Interrupter Type MVS
metal-enclosed switchgear provides
safe, reliable switching and fault
protection for medium voltage circuits
rated from 2.438 kV. The MVS switch
is ideal for applications where high
duty cycle operation is not needed.
MVS switchgear has the advantage of
low initial cost inherent in switch designs
while offering the characteristics most
vital to safety and coordination.
The MVS switchs quick-make, quick-
break mechanism provides full-load
current interrupting capability while
fuses provide accurate, permanently
calibrated short circuit detecting and
interrupting capabilities. Visibility of
actual blade position improves safety
by giving positive assurance of circuit
de-energization.

Standard MVS switchgear meets or
exceeds the following industry standards:

ANSI/IEEE

C37.20.3

ANSI/IEEE C37.20.4

ANSI C37.22

ANSI C37.57

ANSI C37.58

NEMA SG5

NEMA SG6

CSA

22.2 No. 31-04
(5/15 kV ratings only)

EEMAC G8-3.3

UL

listed (5/15 kV ratings only)

CSA/US listable (538 kV)
5 and 15 kV MVS switchgear assem-
blies are available as listed products
with

Underwriters Laboratories

and

Canadian Standards Association

for
most options. In addition, 27 and 38 kV
MVS switchgear assemblies are
available with CSA/US listing to
U.S. standards with a limited number
of options.
Load interrupter switches should not
be used to interrupt load currents
above their interrupting rating of 600
or 1200A, as they are not designed nor
tested for interrupting fault currents on
electrical systems. Optional fuses can
be provided for phase overcurrent
protection

. For ground

fault current
tripping, see MSB and MEB switchgear

Tab 7

. Refer to

Page 8.0-13

,

Table 8.0-6

for applicable fuse ratings.

Seismic Qualication

Refer to

Tab 1

for information on


8.0-3

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

08


General Description

003

Construction

Typical Switch with Front Door Open

Switch Mechanism

Quick-make, quick-break stored
energy operation.
The opening and closing of the
switch blades is done by the
operating spring. An operators
actions only charge and release
the operating spring.
The switch blades cannot be teased
to any intermediate positions.
During the closing operation, full
clearance between blades and
stationary contacts is maintained
until the switch mechanism goes
over toggle.
The switch mechanism has only
metal-to-metal linkageno chains
or cables are used.
Arc interruption takes place between
copper-tungsten tipped auxiliary
(icker) blade and arcing contacts
with a DE-ION

arc chute; no arcing
takes place between the main blades
and the stationary contacts to pro-
long the life of the main blades.
Blow-out forces cannot be transmit-
ted to the operating handle.

Provisions for Padlocking Door

Handle not visible in the photo.

Inspection Window

A large 8.00-inch x 16.00-inch
(203.2 x 406.4 mm) gasketed,
rectangular, high impact viewing
window permits full view of the
position of all three

switch blades
through the closed door.

Full Height Main Door

The door has a return ange and two
rotary latch-type handles to provide
latching members held in shear. It
closes over a projecting frame.

Foot-Operated Door Stop

Grounded Metal Safety Barrier

Prevents inadvertent contact with any
live part, yet allows full-view inspec-
tion of the switch blade position.

Door Interlock

Prevents the door of the enclosure
from being opened when the switch
is closed.

Switch Interlock

Prevents inadvertent closure of the
switch if the door of the enclosure
is open.

Switch with Hinged Screen Barrier Open

High Quality Insulation

Bus and switch insulators, switch
drive rod barriers between phases,
and barriers between outer phases
and the housing, are of high
strength, non-hygroscopic, track-
resistant glass polyester as standard.
Optional switch, fuse and main bus
epoxy insulation system is available.

Red-Green Switch
Position Indicators

Provisions for Padlocking
Switch Open or Closed

Provisions for Door and
Switch Key Interlocks

The Operating Handle

It is conveniently located behind
a small access door giving the
structure a smooth homogeneous
appearance and discourages casual
contact by unauthorized personnel.

Switchgear Assembly
Rating Nameplate

Switch Operating Compartment Door Open
8.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

08


General Description

004

Switch Mechanism

The quick-make, quick-break mecha-
nism uses a heavy-duty coil spring
that provides powerful opening and
closing action. To close the switch,
the handle is inserted into the spring
charging cam, then rotated upward
through an angle of 120 degrees. This
action charges the operating spring,
and as the mechanism is forced past
toggle, the stored energy of the spring
is released and transferred to the main
shaft that snaps the switch closed.
As a result of the over-toggle action,
the blades are moved independently
of the operator. It is impossible to
tease the switch into any intermediate
position.
To open the switch, the handle is
inserted into the spring charging
cam and rotated downward through
120 degrees resulting in charging of
the operating spring, then releasing its
stored energy in similar sequence.

Quick-Break DE-ION Arc Interruption

With the switch closed, both main and
auxiliary (icker) blades are closed,
and all of the current ows through the
main blades. The icker blades are in
the closed position in the arc chutes,
but are past the arcing contacts and
thus carry no current.
As the main blades open, current is
transferred momentarily to the icker
blades, which are held in the arc chutes
by high pressure contact ngers. There
is no arcing at the main blades.
When the main blades reach a pre-
determined angle of opening, a stop
post on the main blades prevents further
angular movement between the main
and icker blades. This starts the icker
blades out of the high pressure contacts
in the arc chutes and as contacts are
broken, the icker blades are snapped
into position by their torsion springs.
The heat of the arc, meanwhile,
releases a blast of de-ionizing gas
from the gas-generating material of
the arc chute. This combination of
quick-break and DE-ION action quickly
extinguishes the arc and the circuit
is safely de-energized.
A non-fused switch has the ability
to close and latch four times when
rated 40 kA fault close, and one time
when rated 61 kA fault close, and
continue to carry rated current thus
adding a large margin of integrity to
the electrical system.
The 5/15 kV switch designs have also
demonstrated the ability to surpass
the number of ANSI C37.22 required
loadbreak current operations by no
less than 200%.

Figure 8.0-1. Switch Operation
Both Blades Disengaged Main, Flicker Blades
Engaged
Main Blades Disengaged,
Flicker Blade Engaged

Bus Insulation System

All bus runs are supported using a high
strength and high creep, nned sup-
port providing in excess of 12.00 inches
(304.8 mm) for 5/15 kV and 24.00 inches
(609.6 mm) for 27/38 kV, of creep
distance between phases and ground.
The molded high track-resistant ns
are constructed as standard of Aramid
nylon or optional Cycloaliphatic epoxy.

Signicantly superior bus bracing
than standoff type A20 insulators

Signicantly increased creep
distance phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground

Improved endurance from fault
incidents

Minimizes bus system failures due
to tracking

Eliminates additional ground
planes in the switchgear for bus
supporting systems

Bus Support


8.0-5

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

08


General Description

005

Duplex Switch Conguration

Two MVS load interrupter switch
sections can be used to provide cost-
effective source selectivity with a
common load side bus feeding one
load, fused or nonfused. Key interlocks
are a standard feature provided to per-
mit only one switch to be closed at one
time and prevent opening any switch
door unless both switches are open.

Figure 8.0-2. Typical Duplex Switch
Conguration with One K1 Key
Two-Position, No-Load Selector Switch

Eatons MVS load interrupter switch
can be used to provide the most cost-
effective source selectivity in a single
compact structure with a two-position
Type MVS non-loadbreak selector
switch in series with the load break
MVS switch. This selector switch is
mechanically interlocked such that
operation can be performed only when
the load interrupter switch is in the
open position. Also, neither the MVS
switch nor the main door can be
closed without the selector switch
being positively locked in one of the
two feeder positions.

Figure 8.0-3. Typical Two-Position Selector
Switch for Bottom Cable Entrance
Figure 8.0-4. Typical Selector Switch
CongurationDimensions in Inches (mm)
Loadbreak Switch with Grounding Jaw

The loadbreak switch can be supplied
with optional grounding jaws for auto-
matic grounding of the load circuit.
When the switch is opened, the switch
main blades engage grounding jaws to
ground the load circuit. This feature

cannot

be used in a duplex switch
conguration. The ground jaw option
is available at 538 kV. It is meant for
applying a static ground, and is not
rated for carrying fault currents.

Figure 8.0-5. Typical Feeder Switch with
Optional Grounding Jaw (538 kV)
Figure 8.0-6. Typical Section View of Feeder
Switch with Optional Grounding Jaws
K1 K1
K1 K1
Door Door
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
95.40
(2423.2)
62.00
(1574.8)
Non
Load
Break
Selector
Switch
Load
Break
Switch
Mechanical
Interlock
36.00
(914.4)
1.3620
90.37
(2295.0)
31.60
(803.0)
2.19
(56.0)
62.00
(1575.0)
Grounding
Jaw
SA
SW
Line
FU
Load
8.0-6



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

08


General Description

006
Mini-MVS (26-Inch Wide)
Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly
W = 26.00 inches (660.4 mm)
H = 66.00 inches (1676.4 mm)
D = 27.25 inches (692.2 mm)
Eatons Mini-MVS switchgear
assembly is rated 200A, 4.76 kV. The
medium voltage Mini-MVS switch-
gear assembly is for use in power
distribution, transformer primary
connections and isolation applications
requiring a stand-alone assembly,
cable in/cable out terminations and
manual operation.
The Mini-MVS switchgear assembly
is seismically qualied. The assembly
is listed by UL or CSA. The switch is
available fused or non-fused. There is
an option for an outdoor enclosure.
Several built-in interlocks and safety
features are provided.
Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly
Standard Features
Seismically qualied
Manually operated switch
Door-to-switch safety interlocking
Auxiliary switch, one Form C contact
Viewing window for switch position
Provisions for padlocking the switch
in the OPEN position
Provision for padlocking the two
door handles closed
Spare fuse rack
Grounded metal screen barrier in
front of the switch
Cycloalaphatic epoxy insulators
Line, load and ground cable lugs
for #6 solid-4/0 stranded cable
Aluminum or copper
Key interlock provisions
ListedUL/CSA
Optional Features
Enclosed typeindoor or outdoor
Outdoor enclosure includes
space heater
Note: If the application requires a heater for
condensation, an outdoor enclosure should
be selected
Fused or unfused switch
If fused, Eatons Type CLE current
limiting fuses from 10E amperes
to 200E amperes are supplied
Distribution type surge arresters,
3 or 6 kV
Spare fuses
8.0-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
General Description
007
Motor Operated
MVS Switches
Application
Eatons MVS Pow-R-Drive motor
operator makes possible the safety,
convenience and coordination inherent
in remote switch operation.
Motor Operated MVS Switch
Description
A MVS Pow-R-Drive motor operated
switch is a standard, manually
operated switch in combination with a
heavy-duty electric motor-driven linear
actuator that charges the spring. The
linear actuator is located in a separate
isolated low voltage compartment.
During electrical operation, it smoothly
and quietly extends or retracts the
proper distance to cause the switch
mechanism to operate.
Standard motor operators are
mounted in the switch enclosure.
This eliminates the separate motor
compartment conserving oor space.
Manual Operation Override
Manual Operation
To operate manually, loosen the
holding screw that keeps the pin
connecting the linear actuator to the
mechanism in place. Remove this pin.
Remove the clevis pin on the support
of the bottom of the linear actuator.
Unplug the cord from the disconnect-
ing terminal block as the actuator is
removed and set the actuator aside.
The switch can now be operated
manually with the removable handle.
Key Interlock to Lock Switch Open
A keyed lock is standard to lock the
switch in the open position only.
This lock not only locks the switch in
the open position, but also breaks the
electrical motor contacts integral to
the lock and permits the key to be
removed. With the key, the operator
can then open the lock on the switch
door. This scheme gives positive
assurance that the switch is open and
cannot be closed with the door open.
8.0-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
General Description
008
Electronic Metering and
Communications Apparatus
MVS switchgear assemblies can
be equipped with Eatons family of
Power Xpert
and IQ Electronic Meters

to monitor a power circuits electrical
quantities within the capabilities of
each device. See Tab 3 for further
information on these devices. MVS
switchgear assemblies can also be
equipped to interface with Eatons
PowerNet integrated monitoring and
control communications system with
communication (PONI) accessories,
addressable relays, etc. See Tab 2 for
further information.
Electronic Metering
Power Xpert Meter
PXM 4000/6000/8000
Other Meters:
IQ 160/260
Refer to Tab 3.
Outdoor Enclosures
Weatherproong complying with the
requirements of NEMA 3R and IEEE
standard C37.20.3 is available for MVS
switchgear assemblies. The weather-
proong consists of sloped roof
panels that are joined together with
caps. Doors and rear covers are fully
gasketed. Externally accessible
louvered ltered covers, top and
bottom, front and rear, are provided
for ventilation. At least one 250 watt
heater is provided in each vertical
section. Power for the heaters may
be supplied from an external source,
or an optional integral control power
transformer may be specied to
provide power for the heaters.
Outdoor Enclosure
8.0-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
009
Partial Discharge
for Switchgear
Partial discharge (PD) is a common
name for various forms of electrical
discharges such as corona, surface
tracking, and discharges internal to
the insulation. It partially bridges the
insulation between the conductors.
These high frequency discharges are
essentially small arcs occurring in or
on the surface of the insulation system
when voltage stress exceeds a critical
value. With time, airborne particles,
contaminants and humidity lead
to conditions that result in partial
discharges. Partial discharges start
at a low level and increase as more
insulation becomes deteriorated.
bus insulation, or discharges in the
air gap between the bus and a support,
sections of the switchgear. If a partial
discharge process is not detected
and corrected, it can develop into a
full-scale insulation failure followed
by an electrical fault. Most switchgear
ashover and bus failures are a result
of insulation degradation caused by
Coupling Capacitor
Type PD Sensor
RFCT Sensor
InsulGard Relay
(PD Monitoring)
Eatons Type MVS metal-enclosed
switchgear (2.427 kV) is corona-free
by design. By making switchgear
assemblies corona-free, Eaton has made
its standard switchgear more reliable.
However, as indicated above, with
time, airborne particles, contaminants
and humidity lead to conditions that
cause partial discharges to develop in
switchgear operating at voltages 4000V
and above. Type MVS switchgear can
be equipped with factory-installed
under normal operation. Timely
detection of insulation degradation
through increasing partial discharges
can identify potential problems so that
corrective actions can be planned and
implemented long before permanent
deterioration develops. Partial discharge
detection can be the foundation of
an effective predictive maintenance
program. Trending of partial discharge
data over time allows prediction of
failures, which can be corrected before
consists of Eatons InsulGard
relay
work with the relay. There are two
types of PD sensors used in the switch-
gear: the rst sensor is a coupling
capacitor type sensor developed for
use with 5, 15 and 27 kV switchgear.
The coupling capacitor sensor detects
partial discharges within the switchgear
cubicle and/or adjacent cubicles, and
is typically installed on the load side
of the feeder switches or on the main
bus. The second sensor is a small
donut type radio frequency current
transformer (RFCT). It is designed for
installation around ground shields
of customers incoming or outgoing
power cables. It detects partial dis-
charges in customers power cables
and external electrical noise.
Typically one set of coupling capacitor
sensors is used at every two cubicles.
One RFCT sensor is used for each
incoming and outgoing power cable
circuit.
Output signals from sensors (coupling
capacitor and RFCT) are wired out to
terminal blocks for future or eld use,
or connected to the InsulGard relay.
One InsulGard relay can monitor up
to 15 output signals, and temperature
and humidity. The temperature and
humidity sensors are included with
each InsulGard relay system. The relay
continuously monitors the switchgear
primary system for partial discharges
and provides an alarm signal (contact
closure) when high PD level is detected.
Data analysis and diagnostics by Eaton
engineers can also be provided by
remote communication with the
InsulGard relay.
optional in MVS switchgear.
Input
Terminal TT
Block
InsulGard
Relay
Optional
Modem
Temp Sensor
Humidity Sensor
Output
Alarm
Status
120 Vac
Auxiliary
Power Signals (up to 15 Total) from TT
PD Sensors ( Capacitors,
, RTD Input, etc..)
8.0-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
010
Figure 8.0-8. How the Process WorksSensing and Data Collection
Figure 8.0-9. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in
MVS Switchgear (527 kV)
Note: Use one set of PD sensing capacitors at every two vertical
sections, or portion thereof. Use one RFCT at each incoming/
outgoing cable circuit.
Radio Frequency Current Sensor (RFCT)
Coupling Capacitor
PD Sensors
Coupling Capacitor detects partial discharges internal to
switchgear compartment.
RFCT detects partial discharges in customers cables up to 100 ft
from switchgear.
8.0-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
Application
011
MVS Switchgear with Automatic Transfer Control
Two-Switch Automatic Transfer
Application
Eatons MVS switchgear with an
is an integrated assembly of motor
operated MVS switches, sensing
devices and control components.
Available in 538 kV classes.
It is typically applied where the
continuity of service for critical loads
from two power sources in either a
two-switch (one load) or three-switch
(two loads) conguration is desired.
MVS switchgear with an automatic
transfer control system can meet most
automatic throwover requirements as
it has a wide variety of operational
sequences embodied in one standard
automatic transfer control system.
Please note that the duty cycle of
load interrupter switches is limited
by ANSI Standard C37.22. Refer to
Table 8.0-4 for maximum number of
switching operations allowed. If the
number of switching operations is
expected to exceed the maximum
allowed, then load interrupter
switches should not be used. Use
circuit breakers (refer to Type MSB,
MEB, MEF or VCP-W switchgear
designs).
Typical Two-Switch Automatic Transfer
Using ATC Controller
sources for correct voltages. Should
the voltage of the normal source be
lost while the voltage of the alternate
source remains normal, the voltage
sensing function in the ATC controller
will change state starting the time
delay function. If the voltage of
the normal source is not restored by
the end of the time delay interval,
the normal switch will open and the
alternate source switch will close,
restoring power to the load.
ATC Controller
Reason for the Last 16 Transfers.
For communications capability, the ATC
controller can be equipped with a PONI
card, which will allow the user to com-
municate with the unit via PowerNet
software (see Tab 2). All settings for
purchased options can be set from the
faceplate of the unit or downloaded over
PowerNet. Software allows for charting
of key historical data as well as providing
the capability to monitor and control the
transfer switch from a remote location.
See Tab 2 for further information.
ATC Controller
Standard Features
sources, etc.
by Eaton
Key interlocking of operating
system and doors where required
to provide operator safety
Optional Features
Blown fuse overcurrent lockout
8.0-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
Technical Data
012
Technical Data
Test Data
All Eatons MVS switch ratings have
been thoroughly tested in recognized
high power laboratories with certied
inspectors from both UL and CSA
organizations. Tests were performed
to substantiate all published ratings in
accordance with ANSI, IEEE, CSA and
NEMA standards.
The testing program included tests of:
Basic impulse levels
Momentary withstand
Short-time withstand
Fault closing
Load interrupting at various loads,
various power factors
Mechanical life tests
Temperature rise test
These tests veried not only the per-
formance of the switch and integrated
switch-fuse assembly, but also the
suitability of the enclosure venting,
rigidity and bus spacing.
The mechanical life test subjected the
MVS switch to a number of no load
cycles greater than the requirements
tabulated in ANSI C37.22 standards.
There were no moving or current
carrying part failures as a result.
The Fault Close and Load Interrupting
test demonstrated signicant
improved performance above ANSI/
IEEE standards. See Tables 8.0-3 and
8.0-4 for results.
Table 8.0-1. Switch Ratings (Non-Fused)
Table 8.0-2. Switchgear Assembly Ratings
Table 8.0-3. MVS Switch Duty Cycle for Full Load Operations
Table 8.0-4. MVS Switch Duty Cycle for Fault Close OperationsNon-Fused
Table 8.0-5. Mini-MVS Ratings, rms Values
100% to 80% power factor lagging.

Not applicable for fused units.
Rated
Maximum
kV
Impulse
Withstand
kV
Cont. and
Load-Break
Amperes
Fault-Close &
Momentary Amperes
kA rms Asym. (10 Cycles)
Rated Short-Time
Current (2 sec.)
kA rms Sym.
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
60
60
60
60
600
600
1200
1200
40
61
40
61
25
38
25
38
15
15
15
15
95
95
95
95
600
600
1200
1200
40
61
40
61
25
38
25
38
27
27
125
125
600
600
40
64
25
40
38 150 600 40 25
Rated
Maximum
Volts kV
Rated
BIL
kV
Rated Main
Bus Current
Amperes
Rated Momentary
Current
kA rms Asym.
Rated Short-Time
Current (2 sec.)
kA rms Sym.
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
6001200
6001200
6001200
1200
2000
2000
2000
40
61
80
101
61
80
101
25
38
50
63
38
50
63
15
15
15
15
95
95
95
95
6001200
6001200
6001200
1200
40
61
80
101
25
38
50
63
27
27
125
125
6001200
6001200
40
64
25
40
38 150 6001200 40 25
Rated
Maximum
kV
Switch Load
Interrupting
Ampere Rating
ANSI Required
Number of Load
Interrupting Operations
Eaton MVS Switch Number
of UL Tested Load Break
Operations
4.76
4.76
15
15
27
38
600
1200
600
1200
600
600
50
20
30
10
10
5
60
50
60
50
10
5
Rated
Maximum
kV
Switch Fault
Close Ampere
Rating
ANSI Required
Number of Fault
Close Operations
Eaton MVS Switch Number
of UL Tested Fault Close
Operations
5 and 15
5 and 15
40
61
1
1
4
1
27
27
38
40
61
40
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description Unfused Fused
Input voltage, maximum
Impulse withstand voltage (BIL)
Low frequency voltage
Frequency
4.76 kV
60 kV
19 kV
60 Hz
4.76 kV
60 kV
19 kV
60 Hz
Continuous current, maximum
Load current interrupting rating
Magnetizing interrupting current

200A
200A
4A
200A
200A
4A
Short-time current symmetrical for 2 seconds
Momentary current, asymmetrical
Fault close current, asymmetrical
12.5 kA
20 kA
20 kA
101 kA
101 kA
8.0-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
Technical Data
013
Table 8.0-6. Primary Fuses, Standard Ratings and Fused Switch Fault Close Rating
When RBA expulsion fuses are used, and two ratings appear, the lower rating applies when the lower-rated switch (15 kV, 40 kA fault close, 25 kA
short-time current) versus the higher rating that applies when the higher-rated switch (15 kV, 61 kA fault close, 38 kA short-time) is used.
UL and CSA listed integrated rating with an Eaton BHLE or BHCL fuse.
UL and CSA listed integrated rating with Cooper NX fuse.

Note: For additional fuse data, refer to fuse documents in Tab 9.
Type
Fuse
Switchgear Rated
Maximum Voltage, kV
Fuse Rated Continuous
Current Range, Amperes
Rated Interrupting
Capacity kA Symmetrical
Fused Switch Fault-Close

Rating, kA Asymmetrical rms
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-400
RBA-800
RBA-800
BHLE
CLE600/750
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
4.76
10200
10200
0.5400
0.5400
0.5720
10450
600750
19
25
37.5
25
37.5
63
40
26.5
40
60
40
60
101
64
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-400
RBA-800
RBA-800
HRBA-400
HRBA-800
BHLE
BHCL
15
15
15
15
15
14.4
14.4
15
15
10200
0.5400
0.5400
0.5720
0.5720
0.5400
0.5720
10250
300
14.4
25
29.4
25
29.4
34.8
34.8
63
63
23
40
47
40
47
55.7
55.7
101
101
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
Cooper NX
25.8
25.8
25.8
27
10200
0.5300
0.5540
0.5100
10.5
21
21
35
16.8
33.6
33.6
56
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
GE EJO-1
38
38
38
38
10200
0.5300
0.5540
2080
6.9
16.8
16.8
12.5
11
26.8
26.8
20
Cooper NX 38 20100 35 56
8.0-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
Technical Data
014
Surge Protection
IEEE standard C62.11 for Metal Oxide
Surge Arresters lists the maximum
rated ambient temperature as 40C.
The ambient temperature inside
an Eaton MVS switchgear vertical
section may exceed this temperature,
especially in outdoor applications
where solar radiation may produce
a signicant contribution to the
temperature. Table 8.0-7 lists the
recommended minimum duty cycle
voltage rating for various system
grounding methods. Surge arrester
rating is based upon the ambient air
temperature in the switchgear vertical
section not exceeding 55C.
Table 8.0-7. Suggested Minimum Ratings (kV) for Metal Oxide Surge Arresters Located in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
Note: MCOV = Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage.
Service
Voltage
Line-to-Line
kV
Solidly
Grounded System
Low Resistance
Grounded System
High Resistance or
Ungrounded System
Solidly
Grounded System
Low Resistance
Grounded System
High Resistance or
Ungrounded System
2.30
2.40
3.30
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
3
3
2.55
2.55
2.55
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
4.00
4.16
4.76
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
3
6
6
2.55
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
4.80
6.60
6.90
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
6
6
6
5.10
5.10
5.10
6
6
9
5.10
5.10
7.65
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.20
8.32
8.40
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
6
9
9
5.10
7.65
7.65
9
9
9
7.65
7.65
7.65
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
11.00
11.50
12.00
9
9
10
7.65
7.65
8.40
9
10
10
7.65
8.40
8.40
15
18
18
12.70
15.30
15.30
9
9
10
7.65
7.65
8.40
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
15
18
18
12.70
15.30
15.30
12.47
13.20
13.80
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
12
12
12
10.20
10.20
10.20
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
10
12
12
8.40
10.20
10.20
12
12
15
10.20
10.20
12.70
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
14.40
18.00
20.78
12
15
18
10.20
12.70
15.30
12
15
18
10.20
12.70
15.30
21
27
30
17.00
22.00
24.40
12
15
18
10.20
12.70
15.30
15
18
21
12.70
15.30
17.00
21
27
30
17.00
22.00
24.40
22.00
22.86
23.00
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
18
21
21
15.30
17.00
17.00
30
24.40
18
18
18
15.30
15.30
15.30
21
24
24
17.00
19.50
19.50
30
36
36
24.40
29.00
29.00
24.94
25.80
26.40
21
21
21
17.00
17.00
17.00
24
24
24
19.50
19.50
19.50
21
21
21
17.00
17.00
17.00
24
24
27
19.50
19.50
22.00
36
36
39
29.00
29.00
31.50
33.00
34.50
38.00
27
30
30
22.00
24.40
24.40
30
30
24.40
24.40
27
30
30
22.00
24.40
24.40
36
36
36
29.00
29.00
29.00
45
48
36.50
39.00

8.0-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
LayoutsDimensions
015
Typical Arrangements5 and 15 kV
The drawings in this section represent
are availablerefer to Eaton. Many
other congurations and combinations
are available. Two voltage transformers
for customer metering and one control
transformer for auxiliary power can
be mounted in the structures shown.
For control power transformer larger
than 1 kVA, additional space is
required. Depth of units will vary due
to cable entrance and exit require-
ments, the addition of lightning arrest-
ers, instrument transformers, special
cable terminators, etc. Disconnect
fuses may require wider sections.
cables. Structure depth is based on
two 500 kcm XLP or EPR insulated
cables per phase using preformed
slip-on cable termination devices.
Refer to note below for minimum
required depth when more than two
cables per phase are used. For unit
Tabs 13 and 14.
Figure 8.0-10. 5 and 15 kV Typical ArrangementsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Mini-MVS switch unit in 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide, 27.25-inch (692.2 mm) deep and 66.00-inch (1676.4 mm) tall enclosure can be provided
for 5 kV, 200A.
Note: Width for Utility Metering Structures may vary.
Note: ATC = Automatic Transfer Controller (see Page 8.0-11). M = Motor Operator.
Note: Minimum depth of MVS unit: Up to two 500 kcm per phase: 55.00 inches (1397.0 mm) or 62.00 inches (1574.8 mm) deep; three or four 500 kcm
per phase: 70.00 inches (1778.0 mm) deep, ve or six 500 kcm per phase: 80.00 inches (2032.0 mm) deep.
62.00
(1574.8)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
34.9449.25
(887.51251.0)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
36.00
(914.4)
55.25
(1403.4)
36.00
(914.4)
20.00
(508.0)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
55.25
(1403.4)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
36.00 48.00
(914.4 1219.2)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4) 15.00
(381.0)
55.28
(1404.1)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
36.00 48.00
(914.4 1219.2)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Arrangement 1
Single Unit
Cable In and Out
Arrangement 2
Transformer
Arrangement 4
Primary for Liquid
Filled Transformer
Arrangement 5
Duplex Arrangement
Source Selective
Arrangement 3
Selector Switch
36.00
(914.4)
Top
70.00
(1778.0)
Bottom
62.00
(1574.8)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
Entry
Arrangement 6
Main Incoming Metering Section (optional)
with Main Switch and Feeders
Arrangement 7
Main Incoming Metering Section (optional)
with Main Lugs Only Feeders
ATC
M M
62.00
(1574.8)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4) 15.00
(381.0)
ATC
M M M
55.28
(1404.1)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4) 15.00
(381.0)
15.00
(381.0)
15.00
(381.0)
Arrangement 8
Two Switch Auto TransferSingle Load
Arrangement 9
Three Switch Auto TransferMainTieMain with Feeders
55.25
(1403.4)
Outdoor
41.00 (1041.4)
Indoor
36.00 (914.4)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7)
8.0-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
LayoutsDimensions
016
Typical Arrangements27 and 38 kV
are availablerefer to Eaton. Many
for metering and one control transformer
for auxiliary power can be mounted
in the structures shown. For control
power above 1 kVA, additional space is
required. Depth of units will vary due
to cable entrance and exit requirements,
instrument transformers, special cable
terminators, etc. Cables are shown out
top and bottom for layout only. Top or
bottom must be selected for incoming
and for outgoing cables. Cable sizing
is based on two 500 kcmil XLP or
EPR insulated cables per phase using
preformed slip-on cable termination
devices. For unit substation alignment
details, see Tabs 13 and 14.
Figure 8.0-11. 27 and 38 kV Typical ArrangementsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: Width for Utility Metering Structures may vary.
Note: ATC = Automatic Transfer Controller (see Page 8.0-11). M = Motor Operator.
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00-60.00
(1219.0-1524.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
70.00
(1778.0)
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
RBA
Fuses
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses
48.00-60.00
(1219.0-1524.0) 30.00
(762.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
70.00
(1778.0)
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
RBA
Fuses
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
RBA
or S&C
Fuses
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses
80.00
(2032)
48.00
(1219.0)
70.00
(1778.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
Outdoor
35.00 (889.0)
Indoor
30.00 (762.0)
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
RBA
or S&C
Fuses
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses

100.00
(2540.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
RBA
or S&C
Fuses
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses
Arrangement 1
Single Unit
Cable In and Out
Arrangement 2
Transformer
Arrangement 3
Primary for Liquid-Filled
Transformer
Arrangement 4
Duplex Arrangement
Source Selective
Arrangement 5
Main Device with FeedersMetering Section (optional)
Arrangement 6
Main Lugs with FeedersMetering Section (optional)
ATC
M M
100.00
(2540.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0) 30.00
(762.0)
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
RBA
Fuses
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses
ATC
M M M
80.00
(2032.0)
48.00
(1219.0) 30.00
(762.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0) 30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
RBA
Fuses
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses
Arrangement 7
Two Switch Auto TransferSingle Load
Arrangement 8
Three Switch Auto TransferMain Tie Main with Feeders
Outdoor
53.00 (1346.2)
Indoor
48.00 (1219.0)
Outdoor
135.00
(3429.0)
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
Indoor
101.50
(2578.0)
RBA
or S&C
Fuses
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses

80.00
(2032)
8.0-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
LayoutsDimensions
017
Typical ArrangementsMVS Connecting to Other Switchgear
are availablesee Page 8.0-22. Many
for metering and one control transformer
for auxiliary power can be mounted in
the structures shown. For control power
transformer larger than1 kVA, additional
space is required. Depth of units will
vary due to cable entrance and exit
requirements, the addition of lightning
arresters, instrument transformers,
special cable terminators, etc. Discon-
nect fuses may require wider sections.
cables. Cable sizing is based on two
500 kcmil XLP or EPR insulated cables
per phase using preformed slip-on
cable termination devices. For unit
Tabs 13 and 14.
Figure 8.0-12. Connections to AMPGARD
MCC (7.2 kV Maximum) and to VCPW Switchgear (15 kV Maximum)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Front View
Plan View
(Vac-Clad Main Bus Location Only)
95.50
(2425.7)
80.00
(2032.0)
36.00
(914.4)
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
Feeder
Switch
MVS
Switchgear
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
F
e
e
d
e
r
S
w
i
t
c
h
F
e
e
d
e
r
S
w
i
t
c
h
A) DepthSection adjacent MVA, 80.00 inches (2032).
B) Depth addition MVS sections 55.30 inches (1404.6).
C) 2000A bus maximum.
Front View
Plan View
90.40
(2296.2)
94.37
(2397.0)
36.00
(914.4)
96.25
(2444.8)
4.60
(116.8)
Feeder
Switch
MVS
Switchgear
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
VCP-W
Medium
Voltage
Switchgear
F
e
e
d
e
r
S
w
i
t
c
h
F
e
e
d
e
r
S
w
i
t
c
h
A) Depth 84.00 (2133.6) or 94.00 (2387.6) inches to rear align with MVA.
B) Cable exit rear only, top or bottom.
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
90.40
(2296.2)
55.30
(1404.6)
20.00
(508.0)
36.00
(914.4)
30.00
(762.0)
1.25
(31.8)
20.00
(508.0)
92.00
(2336.8)
Plan View
Main
Switch
Sw SS i chg ar Medium
Voltage
Starters
Sw SS itchg
Starters
AMPGARD D
Medium
Voltage
Starters
Main
Switch
92.00
(2336.8)
55.30
(1404.6)
36.00
(914.4)
30.00
(762.0)
1.25
(31.8)
Front View
Plan View
Feeder
Switch
AMPGARD
Medium
Voltage
Starters
F
e
e
d
e
r
S
w
i
t
c
h
62.00
(1574.8)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
26.00 or 19.00
(660.4 or 482.6)
Plan View
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Sw SS itchgear
92.00
(2336.8)
26.00 or 19.00
(660.4 or 482.6)
Front View
36.00
(914.4)
F
e
e
d
e
r
S
w
i
t
c
h
ggeaar
SS itc geeaar
Arrangement 1
Indoor Top Cable to MV MCC
Arrangement 2
Indoor Bottom Cable to MV MCC
Arrangement 4Indoor to Metal-Clad Switchgear Arrangement 5Outdoor Only to Metal-Clad Switchgear
Arrangement 3Indoor MVS
Close-coupled to MEF Switchgear
8.0-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
LayoutsDimensions, 5 and 15 kV Switch
018
Figure 8.0-13. Front Access Feeder CircuitFused or Unfused
Figure 8.0-14. Rear Access Feeder CircuitFused or Unfused
Figure 8.0-15. Rear Access Feeder Circuit With Bus Connected CPT
Table 8.0-8. Front Access
Table 8.0-9. Rear Access
Fuse
Switch
Main Bus
Load
95.46
(2425.0)
Outdoor
90.37
(2295.0)
Indoor
31.60
(803.0)
2.19
(56.0)
Depth
See Table 8.0-8
95.46
(2425.0)
Outdoor
2.19
(56.0) 34.15
(867.0)
1.36
(35.0)
Depth
90.37
(2295.0)
Indoor
Fuse
Switch
Main Bus
Load
Load
See Table 8.0-9
No. of Cables per Phase
(Based on 500 kcmil)
Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm)
5 kV 15 kV
1 or 2 out bottom 34.94 (887.5) 34.94 (887.5)
1 or 2 out top 49.25 (1250.0) 49.25 (1250.0)
5 kV 15 kV
3 or 4 top or bottom 62.00 (1574.8) 70.00 (1778.0)
5 or 6 top or bottom 70.00 (1778.0) 80.00 (2032.0)
5 kV 15 kV
1 or 2 out bottom 62.00 (1574.8) 62.00 (1574.8)
H1,2
Taps
X1-4
Fuse
Switch
Main Bus
Load
95.46
(2425.0)
Outdoor
90.37
(2295.0)
Indoor
31.60
(803.0)
Depth
2.19
(56.0)
1.36
(35.0)
515 kVA
CPT
(Single
Phase)
See Table 8.0-10
8.0-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
019
Figure 8.0-16. Rear Access Feeder Circuit With Bus Connected CPT
Figure 8.0-17. Rear Access Cable In/Cable Out With Main Bus
Figure 8.0-18. Rear Access Cable In/Cable Out With Main Bus
95.46
(2425.0)
Outdoor
31.60
(803.0)
2.19
(56.0)
1.36
(35.0)
Depth
90.37
(2295.0)
Indoor
H1,2
Taps
X1-4
Fuse
Switch
Main Bus
Load
515 kVA
CPT
(Single-
Phase)
See Table 8.0-11
95.46
(2425.0)
Outdoor
31.60
(803.0)
2.19
(56.0)
Switch
Lug
Fuse
Load
90.37
(2295.0)
Indoor
1.36
(35.0)
Depth
Main Bus
See Table 8.0-12
5 kV 15 kV
1 or 2 out top 70.00 (1778.0) 70.00 (1778.0)
5 kV 15 kV
1 or 2 top or bottom 55.25 (1403.3) 62.00 (1574.8)
5 kV 15 kV
3 or 4 top in/bottom out 62.00 (1574.8) 70.00 (1778.0)
5 or 6 top in/bottom out 70.00 (1778.0) 80.00 (2032.0)
Fuse
Switch
Main Bus
Load
Line
95.46
(2425.0)
Outdoor
90.37
(2295.0)
Indoor
2.19
(56.0)
Depth
34.15
(867.0)
40.22
(1022.0)
See Table 8.0-13
8.0-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
020
Figure 8.0-19. Rear Access Indoor, Cable In/Cable Out
Table 8.0-14. Rear Access, Cable ExitTop or Bottom
Figure 8.0-20. Rear Access Outdoor, Cable In/Cable Out
5 kV 15 kV
1 or 2 top in bottom out 34.94 (887.5) 34.94 (887.5)
1 or 2 top in top out 49.25 (1250.0) 49.25 (1250.0)
Fuse
Switch
Line
Load
20.00
(508.0)
110.37
(2803.0)
Indoor
18.00
(457.0)
31.60
(803.0)
Depth
See Table 8.0-14
Fuse
Switch
Line
Load
115.46
(2933.0)
Outdoor
31.60
(803.0)
Depth
See Table 8.0-14
8.0-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
021
Figure 8.0-21. Rear Access, Cable ExitTop or Bottom
Note A: Low height dimensions are for non-fused, manually
operated switch only. For all motor operated switches and all
fused switches, tall height dimensions apply.
Table 8.0-15. Rear Access, Cable ExitTop or Bottom
Figure 8.0-22. Rear Access, Cable Entry and ExitTop or Bottom
Note A: Low height dimensions are for non-fused, manually
operated switch only. For all motor operated switches and all
fused switches, tall height dimensions apply.
Table 8.0-16. Rear Access, Cable Entry and ExitTop or Bottom
27 kV 38 kV
1 or 2 80.00 (2032.0) 80.00 (2032.0)
135.00
(3429.0)
Outdoor
Tall Height
110.00
(2794.0)
Outdoor
Low Height
Note (A)
Depth
Front
127.00
(3225.8)
Indoor
Tall Height
101.50
(2578.1)
Indoor
Low Height
Note (A)
Fuse
Switch
See Table 8.0-15
27 kV 38 kV
1 or 2 80.00 (2032.0) 80.00 (2032.0)
135.00
(3429.0)
Outdoor
Tall Height
110.00
(2794.0)
Outdoor
Low Height
Note (A)
Depth
Front
127.00
(3225.8)
Indoor
Tall Height
101.50
(2578.1)
Indoor
Low Height
Note (A)
Fuse
Switch
See Table 8.0-16
8.0-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
LayoutsDimensions
022
Cable location not available with top main bus.
When high continuous current fusing or instrumentation is required, consult the Eaton factory for guidance.
Note: A = Power Cable to Load. B = Power Cable from Source. See Figures 8.0-10 and 8.0-13 through 8.0-20 as applicable for dimension D
on Pages 8.0-15 and 8.0-19 through 8.0-20.
When high continuous current fusing or instrumentation is required, consult the Eaton factory for guidance.
Note: A = Power Cable to Load. B = Power Cable from Source. See Figures 8.0-11 and 8.0-21 through 8.0-22 as applicable for dimension D
on Pages 8.0-16 and 8.0-21.
36.00 (914.4) 6.00 (914.4
A & B
6.60 (167.6)
A & B
56.00 (1422.4)
A
B
B
10
A
10 16
10 16
A
10 10 16
A
10
D
D
D D
D D
A
Optional
Rear Door
8.00 (203.2)
Optional
Rear Door
16 10 10
Front Front Front
Front Front
1.25 (31.8)
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
16.00 (406.4)
1.50 (38.1)
8.00 (203.2)
36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4
1.25 (31.8)
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
16.00 (406.4)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
16.00 (406.4)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
1.50 (38.1)
19.00 (482.6)
8.00 (203.2)
1.50 (38.1)
33.00 (838.2) 0 (83
13.00 (330.2)
16.00 (406.4)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
6.00 (152.4)
16.00 (406.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
20.00 (508.0)
Front Only Access Bottom Entry,
Top or Bottom Exit
Roof Layout
Floor Layout
Roof Layout
Floor Layout
Roof Layout
Floor Layout
48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2
A A & B
A & B
A
.2) 78.00 (1981
A
D D D
D
D D
16
8
B
16 16
8.00 (203.2)
1.25 (31.8)
Optional
Rear Door
Optional
Rear Door
Front Front Front
Front Front
16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
1.50 (38.1)
8.00 (203.2)
16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
8.00 (203.2)
6.60 (167.6)
8.00 (203.2)
48.00 (1219.2) 0 (12 48.00 (1219.2 48.00 (1219.2) 0 (12 48.00 (1219.2
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
1.50 (38.1)
8.00 (203.2)
16.00 (406.4)
48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2
8.00 (203.2)
46.00 (1168.4)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
8.00 (203.2)
30.00 (762.0)
59.00 (1498.6) 59.00 (1498.6
16.00 (406.4)
2) 78.00 (1981.
1.50 (38.1)
11.00 (279.4)
8.00 (203.2)
15.00 (381.0)
16.00 (406.4)
6.60 (167.6)
6.00 (152.4)
16.00 (406.4)
Rear Access Top
or Bottom Exit
Rear Access Top or Bottom
Entry and Exit
Front Only Access Bottom
Entry, Top or Bottom Exit
Roof Layout
Floor Layout
Roof Layout
Floor Layout
Roof Layout
Floor Layout
8.0-23
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
LayoutsDimensions
023
.
Figure 8.0-25. Typical Anchor Plan515 kV Indoor or Outdoor
Locations for tie-down 0.65 (16.5) diameter holes in four
places. Customer provided bolts for anchoring should
be 0.5013 min. SAE Grade 5 (M12 x 1.75 CL 10.9) and
tightened to 75 ft-lbs. (101.7 Nm).
Door swing equals unit width at 90.
The standard minimum clearances on side. 24.00 inches
(609.6 mm) may need to be added for passage from
front to rear. The authority having jurisdiction may
Minimum clearances in front is the width of the widest
vertical section plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The authority
having jurisdiction may require a larger distance.
The standard minimum recommended distance is 30.00
inches (762.0 mm) for assemblies requiring rear access
for installation and maintenance. The authority having
jurisdiction may require a larger distance.
For MVS only. If the application is specically provided
by contract as not requiring rear access as stated in 5,
then the minimum recommended distance is 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm).
If optional rear door is supplied, the minimum is
the width of the widest vertical section plus 1.00 inch
(25.4 mm). The authority having jurisdiction may require
a larger distance.
0.06 inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm)
left-to-right, front-to-back and diagonally, as measured
by a laser level.
Table 8.0-17. Approximate Weights in Lbs. (kg)
2
5 7
6
4
1
2
Min.
3
5.00
(127.0)
Typ.
3
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
FRONT DOOR
Optional
Rear Door
4.25
(108.0)
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
1.25
(31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
4.25
(108.0)
2.95
(74.9)
Dimensions in Inches (mm).
Switch
Description
Indoor Outdoor
5 or 15 kV Class
Non-fused switch
Fuses (3), add
Indoor transition
1500 (681)
200 (91)
300 (136)
1800 (817)
200 (91)
Outdoor throat 500 (227)

8.0-24
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
LayoutsDimensions
024
Figure 8.0-26. Typical Anchor Plan2738 kV Outdoor
Typical location for four (two front, two back) Eaton
supplied tie down clips for all 2738 kV. Customer
provided bolts for anchoring should be 0.5013 min.
SAE Grade 5 M12 x 1.75 min. CL 10.9 or stronger, and
tightened to 75 ft-lbs.
Door swing equals vertical section width at 90.
Minimum clearance on side. 24.00 inches (609.6 mm)
may need to be added for passage from front to rear.
Local jurisdictions may require a larger clearance.
Minimum clearance in front is the width of the widest
vertical section plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm), but not less
than that required by the NEC
. Local jurisdictions may

Minimum clearance in rear is 30.00 inches (762.0 mm).
If rear doors are supplied, the minimum clearance is the
width of the widest vertical section equipped with a rear
door plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). Local jurisdictions may
require a larger clearance.
0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm)
left-to-right, front-to-back and diagonally, as
Locations for 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) anchor bolts.
Figure 8.0-27. Typical Anchor Plan2738 kV Indoor
4.50
(114.3)
Typ.
FRONT
Min.
1.25 (31.8)
Optional
Rear
Door
0.44
(11.2)
Typ.
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
0.44
(11.2)
Typ.
1.25
(31.8)
Typ.
1
1
2
3
5
4
3
Dimensions in Inches (mm).
Switch
Description
Indoor Outdoor
27 or 38 kV Class
Non-fused switch
Fuses (3), add
Indoor transition
2000 (908)
300 (136)
1100 (499)
2400 (1090)
300 (136)
Outdoor throat
Motor operator adder
400 (182)
1200 (545)
400 (182)
2 Min.
5
4
7
2
Min.
3
2.12
(53.8)
Typ.
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
1.28
(32.5)
Typ.
5.81
(147.6)
Typ.
5.81
(147.6)
Typ.
3
FRONT DOOR
Optional
Rear Door
6.00
(152.4)
Min.
1.28
(32.5)
Typ.
8.0-25
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08
LayoutsDimensions
025
Mini-MVS Switch
(5 kV, 200A Only)
Dimensions and Weights
Maximum weight of switch assembly
is 550 lbs (250 kg).
Figure 8.0-28. Front View and
Conduit Entrance
Lifting Plates
Floor Plan
2.12
(53.8)
15.00
(381.0)
4.11
(104.4)
Front
26.00
(660.4)
Top View
4.11
(104.4)
27.25
(692.2)
Entrance/Exit
2.12
(53.8)
3.37
(85.6)
4.11
(104.4)
Front
26.00
(660.4)
4.11
(104.4)
Entrance/Exit
Area Bottom
27.25
(692.2)
Viewing
Window
66.25
(1682.8)
26.00
(660.4)
Front View
Figure 8.0-29. Front and Side View of Non-Fused Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly
Cable Size #62/0, 1/Phase.

Figure 8.0-30. Front and Side View of Fused CLE Mini-MVS Switch Assembly
Cable Size #62/0, 1/Phase.

Note: The Mini-MVS unit is designed for front access only or as front and rear access. Cable
terminations are accessible from the front. The unit can be placed against the wall, with a
minimum 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) clearance. For rear access applications, a minimum 30.00-inch
(762.0) clearance is recommended. Check for additional NEC code clearance requirements.
Arrester
Option
12.69
(322.3)
17.38
(441.5)
Line
Lug
Cable
Routing
Area
Load
Lug
16.38
(416.1)
53.56
(1360.4)
29.50
(749.3)
27.25
(692.2)
Ground
Lug
Front View w/o Door and
Screen Barrier Non-Fused Switch
Side Section View Non-Fused Switch
6.00
(152.4)
Arrester
Option
12.69
(322.3)
17.38
(441.5)
Line
Lug
Cable
Routing
Area
53.56
(1360.4)
11.50
(292.1)
16.25
(412.8)
Load
Lug
Ground
Lug
27.25
(692.2)
Side Section View CLE Fused Switch
Front View w/o Door and
Screen Barrier CLE Fused Switch
6.00
(152.4)
8.0-26
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 08026


September 2011

Contents

FusesMedium Voltage
9.0-1

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

09

001

F
u
s
e
s
M
e
d
i
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

FusesMedium Voltage


9.0-2

Current Limiting Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.0-4

Expulsion Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.0-6

Technical Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.0-7
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010

Section 16362 Section 26 18 16
9.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011

FusesMedium Voltage

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

09

002

General Description

Medium Voltage Fuses

Eatons entry in the power fuse
business began over 75 years ago
under Westinghouse

Electric. In 1935,
Westinghouse introduced the medium
voltage boric acid expulsion fuse
followed by the medium voltage
current limiting fuse. Even today,
medium voltage fuses continue to use
the core Westinghouse technology.
Eaton continues to build on the
Westinghouse technology legacy by
engineering higher performance,
cost-effective power fuse products.
Eaton medium voltage fuses are
manufactured and tested to the
requirements of the ANSI C37.4X
series of standards.
Eaton is the only North American
manufacturer of both current limiting
and expulsion medium voltage power
fuses. A full range of general purpose,
backup and boric acid fuses is
available for distribution and power
applications.
All Eaton medium voltage fuses are
thoroughly tested and conform to
ANSI specications. Some motor
starter fuses are UR

recognized, and
both current limiting and expulsion
fuses have been approved in UL

rated switchgear.
Current limiting and expulsion fuses
can be used to meet any overcurrent
protection need. At any point along
the medium voltage electrical
distribution system, Eaton has a
fuse to satisfy your overcurrent
protection needs.
The following fuse terminology will
assist in understanding and selecting
the correct fuse. The following is a
brief overview of those terms.

Power vs. Distribution

The differentiation is intended to
indicate the test conditions and where
fuses are normally applied in a power
system, based on specic requirements
for generating sources, substations
and distribution lines. Each class has
its own unique set of voltage, current
and construction requirements
(see ANSI C37.42, .46 and .47).

Low vs. Medium vs. High Voltage

While fuses are dened in the ANSI
standards as either low or high voltage,
Eatons Electrical Sector has elected to
name their fuses to correspond with
the equipment in which they are
installed. Therefore, per ANSI C84,
fuses are named as follows:

Low Voltage

1000V and below

Medium Voltage

Greater than
100069,000V

High Voltage

Greater than
69,000V

Expulsion vs. Current Limiting

Expulsion Fuse

: An expulsion fuse is
a vented fuse in which the expulsion
effect of the gases produced by inter-
nal arcing, either alone or aided by
other mechanisms, results in current
interruption.
An expulsion fuse is not current
limiting and as a result limits the dura-
tion of a fault on the electrical system,
not the magnitude.

Current Limiting Fuse:

A current limit-
ing fuse is a fuse that, when its current
responsive element is melted by a cur-
rent within the fuses specied current
limiting range, abruptly introduces
a high resistance to reduce current
magnitude and duration, resulting in
subsequent current interruption.

Table 9.0-1. General Fuse Comparison

Expulsion Current
Limiting

Vented
Electromechanical
Interrupts at current zero,
limits fault
current duration
Generally higher voltage
ratings
Different time/current
characteristics
Sealed
Static
Limits fault current
magnitude and
duration
Generally higher
interrupting ratings
Different time/
current
characteristics


9.0-3

September 2011

FusesMedium Voltage

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

09

003

Table 9.0-2. Eaton Medium Voltage Fuse Family
Table 9.0-3. Application Guide
Table 9.0-4. Power Fuse Ampere Characteristic Ratings

Current Limiting Expulsion

HLE: Helical conguration current limiting, E-rated
CLE: Current limiting, E-rated
CLS: Current limiting starter (motor starter)
HCL: Current limiting, clip-mount, E-rated
CX: Current limiting, C-rated
CLPT: Current limiting, E-rated
RBA: Rellable, boric acid
RDB: Rellable, dropout, boric acid
DBU: Dropout, boric acid, indoor/outdoor S&C equivalent

Type Fuse
Voltage
Range (kV)
Fuse
Ampere
Rating
Fuse Maximum
Interrupting
Rating (kA Sym.)
Class Use
Indoor/Outdoor
Applied in:

Current Limiting

CLE 2.415.5 10E1350A 65 General purpose
indoor/outdoor
Fused switches, feeder circuit sectionalizing, power transformers,
dip poles, substation capacitor banks.
CLPT 2.438 0.25E10E 80 General purpose
indoor
Potential transformers. BAL-1 mountings and clips
are no longer available.
CLS 2.48.3 2R44R 50 Backup distribution
indoor
AMPGARD

and non-AMPGARD motor starters. HCLS version is the
same as the CLS except hermetically sealed for hazardous locations.
CX/CXI
CXN
4.315.5 3.5C300C 50 General purpose
distribution indoor
Pad mounted distribution transformers, Substation service transformers,
and fused switches. Direct substitution for McGraws NX fuse.
HCL 2.415.5 10A900A 63 General purpose
distribution indoor
HLE 2.415.5 10E450E 65 General purpose
indoor/outdoor

Expulsion Fuses

RBA 2.438 0.5E720E 37.5 Boric acid power
indoor
Fused switches, feeder circuit sectionalizing, and power transformers.
RDB 2.438 0.5E720E 37.5 Boric acid power
outdoor
Feeder circuit sectionalizing, power transformers, substation
service transformers, dip poles, potential transformers,
and substation capacitor banks. Outdoor version of the RBA.
DBU 4.438 5E200E,
3K200K
50 Boric acid power
indoor/outdoor
Feeder circuit sectionalizing, fused switches, power transformers,
substation service transformers, dip poles, and potential transformers.
Direct equivalent for S&Cs SMU-20 fuse units.

Rating Denition

E Fuses rated 100E or below will melt in 300 seconds at some current value between 2.0 and 2.4 times the E number.
Fuses rated above 100E will melt in 600 seconds at some current value between 2.2 and 2.64 times the E number.
R The fuse will melt in 15 to 35 seconds when the current equals 100 times the R number.
C The fuse will melt in 1000 seconds at some current value between 1.7 and 2.4 times the C number.
A Class A fuses have parameters that do not fall within the C, E, or R denitions above.
X Meet C37.40 temperature requirements, but not the E rating.
9.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011

FusesMedium Voltage

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

09

004


Current Limiting Fuse Types

There are three current limiting fuse
types: backup, general purpose and
full range. It is important that the user
have an understanding of these deni-
tions to ensure proper application of
the fuse (

Figure 9.0-1).

Backup Fuse:

A fuse capable of inter-
rupting all currents from the rated
maximum interrupting current down
to the rated minimum interrupting
current.
Backup fuses are normally used for
protection of motor starters and are
always used in series with another
interrupting device capable of inter-
rupting currents below the fuses rated
minimum interrupting current.

General Purpose Fuse:

A fuse capable
of interrupting all currents from the
rated maximum interrupting current
down to the current that causes
melting of the fusible element in no
less than one hour.
General purpose fuses are typically
used to protect feeders and
components such as transformers.

Full Range Fuse

: A fuse capable of
interrupting all currents from the rated
maximum interrupting rating down to
the minimum continuous current that
causes melting of the fusible element,
with the fuse applied at the maximum
ambient temperature specied by the
manufacturer.
Current limiting fuses are constructed
with pure silver fuse elements, high
purity silica sand ller, and a glass
resin outer casing.
A high fault current melts the silver
element almost instantly and loses
energy to the surrounding sand. The
sand melts and forms fulgurite, a
glass-like substance. The arc voltage
rapidly increases to nearly three times
the fuse voltage rating and forces the
current to zero.
Low fault current melts a solder drop
on the silver fuse element that, in turn,
melts the silver. The element burns
back until there is a sufcient internal
gap to interrupt the current. This is
known as the M-effect.
Eaton offers current limiting fuses in
two basic types: backup and general
purpose. Backup fuses are applied in
series with another circuit protective
device, such as a contactor or an
expulsion fuse, to interrupt high fault
currents beyond the other devices
range. General purpose fuses are
designed to interrupt low fault
currents that cause them to melt
in one hour or less.

Figure 9.0-1. Current Limiting Types Protection Range
C
u
r
r
e
n
t

L
i
m
i
t
i
n
g

T
y
p
e
i max.
interrupting current
i min.
interrupting current
rated maximum
rated minimum
i hr. rr current causing element
melting in 1 hour
i
any current melting

element with no time
limit
Backup
General Purpose
i hr.
i min.
i max.
Full Range
i

Multi-Range Fuses

CLE and HLE fuses are also available in
user-selectable multi-range versions
1040A, 50125A and 150200A.

Disconnect End Fittings and
Disconnect Live Parts

Accessories

A wide assortment of mountings, live
parts and end ttings are available to
facilitate power fuse installation.

Mountings

Mountings include a base, porcelain
or glass polyester insulators, and
live parts. They help enable the fuse
to be safely attached to the gear.
Mountings can be either disconnect
or non-disconnect.

Live Parts

Live parts attach the fuse to the
insulators and are considered part
of the mounting. All parts above the
insulators are live parts.


9.0-5

September 2011

FusesMedium Voltage

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

09

005


Table 9.0-5. CLE, HLE, HCL and CLS Fuses
Table 9.0-6. CLPT, CX, CLT and DSL Fuses

Description Family
CLE HLE HCL CLS

General

Class General purpose General purpose General purpose Backup
Use Power Power Power Power
Maximum kV 2.7515.5 5.515.5 5.515.5 2.415.5
Maximum kA 63 63 63 50
Rating 10E1350A 10E450A 10E900E 2R44R
Mounting Clip Clip, bolt-on, hookeye Clip lock, bolt-on Clip, bolt-on, hookeye
Indicator Standard Standard Standard Standard
Approvals IEEE, ANSI IEEE, ANSI IEEE, ANSI UL

, IEEE, ANSI

Applications

Feeder circuits

Motor starters

PTs and CTs
LV breakers
Substation service
Transformers

Capacitor banks

Fused switches

Description Family
CLPT CX CLT DSL

General

Class General General General Back-up
Use Power/distribution Distribution Distribution Power
Maximum kV 5.538 4.315.5 2.7515 600V
Maximum kA 80 50 25 200
Rating 0.25E 10E 3.5C300C 5150 1005000
Mounting Clip Clip Stud bolt-on Bolt-on
Indicator Optional None None None
Approvals IEEE, ANSI IEEE, ANSI IEEE, ANSI UL

Applications

Feeder circuits
Motor starters
PTs and CTs

LV breakers

Substation service

Transformers

Capacitor banks
Fused switches
9.0-6



CA08104001E
September 2011

FusesMedium Voltage

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

09

006

Expulsion Fuses

RBA
E-Rated Rellable
Boric Acid
RDB
E-Rated Rellable Outdoor
Dropout Boric Acid
DBU
Dropout Boric Acidfor Use Indoors,
Inside Switchgear or Outdoors

Eatons expulsion fuses use boric acid
as the interrupting medium. Under a
fault condition, arc heat decomposes
the boric acid into water vapor. The
water vapor blast deionizes the arc
path preventing arc re-ignition after
a natural current zero.
Type RBA indoor expulsion fuses
must be tted with a discharge lter
or condenser that moderates the
discharge exhaust. The discharge
lter limits the exhaust to a small
and relatively inert amount of gas
and lowers the noise level without
affecting the fuse interrupting rating.
Steam discharge, that can effect the
interrupting, is fully restricted by
the condenser.
Type RDB outdoor dropout fuses
include an ejector spring that forces
the arcing rod through the top of the
fuse. The arcing rod strikes a latch on
the mounting that forces the fuse to
swing outward through a 180 arc into
the dropout position.
Rell units can be eld installed into
RBA and RDB expulsion fuses. Once
the operated unit has been removed,
the separately purchased unit can be
easily installed into the fuse holder.
Type DBU fuse units are designed
for new and aftermarket utility
applications. End ttings are available,
in both indoor and outdoor versions,
as well as live parts and mountings.
Mufers conne the arc within the
fuse and substantially reduce the noise
and exhaust when the fuse interrupts.

Accessories

The following accessories are available
for expulsion fuses:

Mountings

Mountings include a base, porcelain
or glass polyester insulators, and live
parts. They help enable the fuse to be
safely attached to the gear. Mountings
can be either disconnect, non-disconnect
or dropout. Non-disconnect mountings
are available in either bolt-on or clamp-
type arrangements. Fuses may be
vertical or underhung.

Live Parts

Live parts attach the fuse to the
insulators and are considered part
of the mounting. All parts above the
insulators are live parts.

End Fittings

End ttings are metal parts that
attach to each end of the fuse at
the ferrules. They are used only on
disconnect fuses or when converting
a non-disconnect to a disconnect fuse.


9.0-7

September 2011

FusesMedium Voltage

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

09

Technical Ratings

007

Technical Ratings

Table 9.0-7. Transformer Primary Fuse Application

Maximum transformer kVA ratings are based on ratios of maximum fuse current rating to transformer full load current (I
F
/I
T
) as listed.
For a 55C rise liquid-lled transformer, use the kVA rating for 65C rise (55C rating x 1.12). For suggested minimum fuse applications,
see

Tables 9.0-9

,

9.0-10

and

9.0-11

.

The type RBA interrupting ratings shown are those of the discharge lter type, in which the noise is minimized and deionization of
expulsion gases is assured.

These applications are subject to
modication when specic factors
such as transformer characteristics,
other protective devices, coordination
requirements and load variations may
indicate a different I

F

/I

T

ratio.

Caution:

Primary fuses must not be
relied upon for clearing secondary
ground faults.

System
Voltage
Fuse
Type
Maximum Transformer kVA

Fuse Family/Characteristics
Self-Cooled Forced
Air
Type Current
Range
Maximum
kV
Interrupting
Rating Amperes
(Symmetrical)

2400 Current
limiting
742
1336
2228
4010
742
890
866
1560
2600
4676
866
1039
CLE
CLE
CLE-750
CLE-750
CXN
CXN
10250
300450
600750
10001350
60250
300
5.5 63,000
63,000
40,000
31,500
50,000
50,000
8.3
Expulsion 600
1190
2140
695
1385
2500
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
450720
3200
8.3 19,000
37,500
37,500
14,000
17.1
4160 Current
limiting
1287
2317
3862
6952
1286
1545
1502
2703
4506
8111
1501
1802
CLE/HLE
CLE/HLE
CLE-750
CLE-750
CXN
CXN
10250
300450
600750
10001350
60250
300
5.5 63,000
63,000
40,000
31,500
50,000
50,000
8.3
Expulsion 1030
2055
3700
1200
2400
4320
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
450720
3200
8.3 19,000
37,500
37,500
14,000
17.1
4800 Current
limiting
1483
2671
4451
8013
1483
1780
1731
3116
5193
9348
1731
2077
CLE/HLE
CLE/HLE
CLE-750
CLE-750
CXN
CXN
10250
300450
600750
10001350
60250
300
5.5 63,000
63,000
40,000
31,500
50,000
50,000
8.3
Expulsion 1190
2375
4280
1385
2775
5000
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
480720
3200
8.3 19,000
37,500
37,500
14,000
6900 Current
limiting
1536
2987
2134
2560
1792
3485
2490
2987
CLE/HLE
CLE
CXN
CXN
10175
200350
60250
300
8.3 50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
Expulsion 1705
3415
6150
2000
3985
7170
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
450720
3200
8.3 19,000
37,500
37,500
14,000
7200 Current
limiting
222
890
1603
3117
2226
2672
259
1039
1870
3637
2598
3117
CLE/HLE
CLE/HLE
CLE/HLE
CLE
CXN
CXN
1025
30100
125180
200350
60250
300
8.3 50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
Expulsion 1785
3565
6420
2080
4160
7500
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
450720
3200
8. 19,000
37,500
37,500
14,000
17.1
9.0-8



CA08104001E
September 2011

FusesMedium Voltage

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

09

Technical Ratings

008

Technical Ratings (Continued)

Table 9.0-7. Transformer Primary Fuse Application (Continued)

Maximum transformer kVA ratings are based on ratios of maximum fuse current rating to transformer full load current (I
F
/I
T
) as listed.
For a 55C rise liquid-lled transformer, use the kVA rating for 65C rise (55C rating x 1.12). For suggested minimum fuse applications,
see

Tables 9.0-9

,

9.0-10

and

9.0-11

.

The type RBA interrupting ratings shown are those of the discharge lter type, in which the noise is minimized and deionization of
expulsion gases is ensured.

These applications are subject to
modication when specic factors
such as transformer characteristics,
other protective devices, coordination
requirements and load variations may
indicate a different I

F

/I

T

ratio.

Caution:

Primary fuses must not be
ground faults.

Table 9.0-8. Selection of Minimum Primary Fuse for Transformer Protection

System
Voltage
Fuse
Type
Maximum Transformer kVA

Fuse Family/Characteristics
Self-Cooled Forced
Air
Type Current
Range
Maximum
kV
Interrupting
Rating Amperes
(Symmetrical)

12,000 Current
limiting
371
1484
2226
4452
1484
2597
432
1731
2597
5195
1731
3030
CLE
HLE
CLE
HLE
CXN
CXN
10150
10125
175300
150250
45100
120175
15.5 63,000
63,000
63,000
63,000
50,000
50,000
Expulsion 2970
5945
3465
6930
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
450720
10200
15.5 14,400
29,400
29,400
14,000
13,200 Current
limiting
408
1632
2449
4898
1632
2857
476
1905
2857
5715
1905
3333
CLE
HLE
CLE
HLE
CXN
CXN
10150
10125
175300
150250
45100
120175
15.5 63,000
63,000
63,000
63,000
50,000
50,000
Expulsion 3265
6530
3810
7620
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
450720
7150
15.5 14,400
29,400
29,400
14,000
13,800 Current
limiting
426
1707
2560
5121
1707
5855
497
1991
2987
5975
1991
3485
CLE
HLE
CLE
HLE
CXN
CXN
10150
10125
175300
150250
45100
120175
15.5 63,000
63,000
63,000
63,000
50,000
50,000
Expulsion 3415
6830
3415
3985
7970
3985
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-17
10200
5400
450720
7150
15.5
17.1
14,400
29,400
29,400
14,000
23,000 Expulsion 5690
8535
5690
6635
9950
6635
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-27
10200
5300
450540
3200
25.5
27.0
10,500
21,000
21,000
12,500
34,500 Expulsion 8535
12800
8535
9950
14925
9950
RBA-200
RBA-400
RBA-800
DBU-38
10200
5300
450540
3200
38.0 6,900
16,800
16,800
10,000

Instructions:

Multiply the transformer primary full load current
(FLA) times the multiplier shown in the table to determine
suggested minimum size fuse. Use fan-cooled primary FLA
with forced air transformer multiplier. See

Tables 9.0-9

thru

9.0-11

for suggested minimum fuse size.
For self-cooled
transformers
For forced air
transformers
Type CLE current limiting fuses
Type RBA, DBU expulsion type fuses
All ratings 1.4 x FLA
of XFMR
1.2 x FLA
of XFMR


9.0-9

September 2011

FusesMedium Voltage

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

09

Technical Ratings

009

Interrupting Ratings of Fuses

Modern fuses are rated in amperes
rms symmetrical. They also have a
listed asymmetrical rms rating, which
is 1.6 x the symmetrical rating.
Refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.48 for fuse
interrupting duty guidelines.

Calculation of the fuse required
interrupting rating:

Step 1

Convert the fault from
the utility to percent or per unit on
a convenient voltage and kVA base.

Step 2

Collect the X and R data of all
the other circuit elements and convert
to percent or per unit on a convenient
kVA and voltage base same as that
used in

Step 1

. Use the substransient
X and R for all generators and motors.

Step 3

Construct the sequence
networks using reactances and
connect properly for the type of fault
under consideration and reduce to a
single equivalent reactance.

Step 4

Same as above except using
resistances (omit if a symmetrically
rated fuse is to be selected).

Step 5

Calculate the E/X
I
value,
where E is the prefault value of the
voltage at the point of fault normally
assumed 1.0 in pu. For three-phase
faults E/X
I
is the fault current to be
used in determining the required
interrupting capability of the fuse.
Note: It is not necessary to calculate
a single phase-to-phase fault current. This
current is very nearly /2 x three-phase
fault. The line-to-ground fault may exceed
the three-phase fault for fuses located in
generating stations with solidly grounded
neutral generators, or in delta-wye trans-
formers with the wye solidly grounded,
where the sum of the positive and negative
sequence impedances on the high voltage
side (delta) is smaller than the impedance of
the transformer.
For single line-to-ground fault;
X
I
= X
I
(+) + X
I
(-) + X
I
(0)
Step 6Select a fuse with a published
interrupting rating exceeding the
calculated fault current.
Table 9.0-10 should be used where
older asymmetrically rated fuses
are involved.
The voltage rating of power fuses
used on three-phase systems should
equal or exceed the maximum line-
to-line voltage rating of the system.
Current limiting fuses for three-phase
systems should normally be applied
so that the fuse voltage rating is equal
to or less than 1.41 x nominal system
voltage. However, the insulation
levels on 2.4 kV systems normally
allow 4.3 or 5.5 kV rated fuses to
be used.
Table 9.0-9. Suggested Minimum Current Limiting Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Transformer ApplicationsE-Rated Fuses
Note: Fuse ratings represent the fuse that will withstand transformer inrush (12 x FLC for 0.1 second and 25 x FLC for 0.01 second) and be able
to handle temporary overloads (133% of FLC, 150% for 15.5 kV).
3
I
f
E
X
I
----- 3 =
System
Nominal kV
2.4 4.16 4.8 7.2 12.0 13.2 13.8 14.4
Fuses Maxi-
mum kV
2.75 5.5 5.5 8.3 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5
Transformer
kVA Rating
Self-Cooled
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
112.5
150
225
27.1
36.1
54.1
50E
65E
80E
15.6
20.8
31.2
25E
30E
50E
13.5
18.0
27.1
20E
25E
50E
9.0
12.0
18.0
15E
20E
25E
5.4
7.2
10.8
10E
15E
15E
4.9
6.6
9.8
10E
10E
15E
4.7
6.3
9.4
10E
10E
15E
4.5
6.0
9.0
10E
10E
15E
300
500
750
72.2
120.3
180.4
125E
200E
300E
41.6
69.4
104.1
80E
125E
150E
36.1
60.1
90.2
65E
100E
150E
24.1
40.1
60.1
40E
65E
100E
14.4
24.1
36.1
20E
50E
65E
13.1
21.9
32.8
20E
30E
65E
12.6
20.9
31.4
20E
30E
65E
12.0
20.0
30.1
20E
30E
65E
1000
1500
2000
240.6
360.8
481.1
350E
600E
750E
138.8
208.2
277.6
200E
300E
400E
120.3
180.4
240.6
175E
250E
350E
80.2
120.3
160.4
125E
175E
250E
48.1
72.2
96.2
80E
100E
150E
43.7
65.6
87.5
80E
100E
125E
41.8
62.8
83.7
80E
100E
150E
40.1
60.1
80.2
80E
100E
125E
2500
3000
3750
601.4
721.7
902.1
1100E
1100E
1350E
347.0
416.4
520.4
600E
600E
750E
300.7
360.8
451.1
450E
600E
750E
200.5
240.6
300.7
300E
350E
120.3
144.3
180.4
200E
250E
250E
109.3
131.2
164.0
175E
200E
250E
104.6
125.5
156.9
175E
200E
250E
100.2
120.3
150.4
175E
200E
250E
5000
7500
10,000
1202.8
1804.2
2405.6
693.9
1040.9
1387.9
1100E
601.4
902.1
1202.8
1100E
1350E
400.9
601.4
801.9
240.6
360.8
481.1
218.7
328.0
437.4
300E
209.2
313.8
418.4
300E
200.5
300.7
400.9
300E
9.0-10
September 2011
FusesMedium Voltage
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 09
Technical Ratings
010
Table 9.0-10. Suggested Minimum RBA Expulsion Fuse Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Transformer ApplicationsE-Rated Fuses
Two 300E-ampere fuse rell units in parallel with 10% derating.

Table 9.0-11. Suggested Minimum RBA Expulsion Fuse Ratings for Self-Cooled 25.838 kV Transformer Applications

System
Nominal kV
2.4 4.16 4.8 7.2 12.0 13.2 13.8 14.4
Fuses Maxi-
mum kV
2.75 5.5 5.5 8.3 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5
Transformer
kVA Rating
Self-Cooled
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
112.5
150
225
27.1
36.1
54.1
40E
50E
80E
15.6
20.8
31.2
25E
30E
50E
13.5
18.0
27.1
20E
25E
40E
9.0
12.0
18.0
15E
20E
25E
5.4
7.2
10.8
10E
10E
15E
4.9
6.6
9.8
10E
10E
15E
4.7
6.3
9.4
10E
10E
15E
4.5
6.0
9.0
10E
10E
15E
300
500
750
72.2
120.3
180.4
100E
175E
250E
41.6
69.4
104.1
65E
100E
150E
36.1
60.1
90.2
50E
80E
125E
24.1
40.1
60.1
40E
65E
80E
14.4
24.1
36.1
20E
40E
50E
13.1
21.9
32.8
20E
30E
50E
12.6
20.9
31.4
20E
30E
50E
12.0
20.0
30.1
20E
30E
50E
1000
1500
2000
240.6
360.8
481.1
400E
450E
720E
138.8
208.2
277.6
200E
300E
400E
120.3
180.4
240.6
175E
250E
350E
80.2
120.3
160.4
125E
175E
250E
48.1
72.2
96.2
65E
100E
150E
43.7
65.6
87.5
65E
100E
125E
41.8
62.8
83.7
65E
100E
125E
40.1
60.1
80.2
65E
80E
125E
2500
3000
3750
601.4
721.7
902.1
347.0
416.4
520.4
540E
720E
720E
300.7
360.8
451.1
400E
540E
720E
200.5
240.6
300.7
300E
350E
400E
120.3
144.3
180.4
175E
200E
250E
109.3
131.2
164.0
150E
175E
250E
104.6
125.5
156.9
150E
175E
250E
100.2
120.3
150.4
150E
175E
200E
5000
7500
10,000
1202.8
1804.2
2405.6
693.9
1040.9
1387.9
601.4
902.1
1202.8
400.9
601.4
801.9
540E
240.6
360.8
481.1
400E
540E
720E
218.7
328.0
437.4
300E
450E
720E
209.2
313.8
418.4
300E
450E
720E
200.5
300.7
400.9
300E
450E
540E
System
Nominal kV
22.9 23.9 24.9 34.5
Fuses
Maximum kV
25.8 25.8 24.8
Transformer kVA
Rating Self-Cooled
Full Load
Current Amps
Fuse Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current Amps
Fuse Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current Amps
Fuse Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current Amps
Fuse Rating
Amps E
750
1000
1500
18.9
25.2
37.8
30E
40E
65E
18.1
24.2
36.2
25E
40E
50E
17.4
23.2
34.8
25E
40E
50E
12.6
16.7
25.1
20E
25E
40E
2000
2500
3000
50.4
63.0
75.6
80E
100E
125E
48.3
60.4
72.5
65E
100E
100E
46.4
58.0
69.6
65E
80E
100E
33.5
41.8
50.2
50E
65E
80E
3750
5000
7500
10,000
94.5
126.1
189.1
252.1
150E
175E
300E
450E
90.6
120.8
181.2
241.6
125E
175E
250E
450E
87.0
115.9
173.9
231.9
125E
175E
250E
450E
62.8
83.7
125.5
167.3
100E
125E
175E
250E
9.0-11
September 2011
FusesMedium Voltage
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 09
Technical Ratings
011
Table 9.0-12. Suggested Minimum DBU Expulsion Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Power Transformer Applications
Table 9.0-13. Suggested Minimum DBU Expulsion Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Power Transformer Applications
Table 9.0-14. Type DBU Expulsion Fuses, Boric Acid, Indoor/Outdoor
Note: Used on overhead distribution transformers, substation equipment, industrial transformer installations, and radial distribution circuits.
System
Nominal kV
2.4 4.2 4.8 7.2 12.0 13.2 13.8 14.4
Fuses Maxi-
mum kV
17.1 17.1 17.1 17.1 17.1 17.1 17.1 17.1
Transformer
kVA Rating
Self-Cooled
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Three-Phase Transformers
112.5
150
225
27
36
54
40E
50E
80E
16
21
31
25E
30E
50E
14
18
27
20E
25E
40E
9
12
18
15E
20E
25E
5
7
11
10E
10E
15E
5
7
10
7E
10E
15E
5
6
9
7E
10E
15E
5
6
9
7E
10E
15E
300
500
750
72
120
180
100E
200E
42
69
104
65E
100E
150E
36
60
90
50E
100E
125E
24
40
60
40E
65E
100E
14
24
36
20E
40E
50E
13
22
33
20E
30E
50E
13
21
31
20E
30E
50E
12
20
30
20E
30E
50E
1000
1500
2000
241
361
481
139
208
278
200E
120
180
241
200E
80
120
160
125E
200E
48
72
96
80E
100E
150E
44
66
87
65E
100E
125E
42
63
84
65E
100E
125E
40
60
80
65E
65E
125E
2500 601 347 301 200 120 200E 109 150E 105 150E 100 150E
System
Nominal kV
22.9 23.9 24.9 34.5
Fuses Maxi-
mum kV
27.0 27.0 27.0 38.0
Transformer
kVA Rating
Self-Cooled
Full Load
Current Amps
Fuse Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current Amps
Fuse Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current Amps
Fuse Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current Amps
Fuse Rating
Amps E
750
1000
1500
19
25
38
30E
40E
65E
18
24
36
25E
40E
50E
17
23
34
25E
40E
50E
13
17
25
20E
25E
40E
2000
2500
3750
50
63
95
80E
100E
150E
48
60
91
80E
100E
150E
46
58
87
65E
80E
125E
33
42
63
50E
65E
100E
Maximum
Design kV
Current Rating
Amperes
Interrupting Rating
rms (kA Symmetrical)
17.1 3K, 6K, 8K, 10K, 12K, 15K, 20K, 25K, 30K, 40K, 50K, 65K, 80K, 100K, 140K, 200K,
5E, 7E, 10E, 13E, 15E, 20E, 25E, 30E, 40E, 50E, 65E, 80E, 100E, 125E, 150E, 175E, 200E,
15SE, 20SE, 25SE, 30SE, 40SE, 50SE, 65SE, 80SE, 100SE, 125SE, 150SE, 175SE, 200SE
14
27 3K, 6K, 8K, 10K, 12K, 15K, 20K, 25K, 30K, 40K, 50K, 65K, 80K, 100K, 140K, 200K,
12.5
38 3K, 6K, 8K, 10K, 12K, 15K, 20K, 25K, 30K, 40K, 50K, 65K, 80K, 100K, 140K, 200K,
10outdoor
8.5indoor with mufer
For additional information, see:
Volume 4, CA08100005E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab 26
9.0-12
September 2011
FusesMedium Voltage
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 09012


September 2011

Contents

Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage
10.0-1

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

10

001

M
o
t
o
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

(
A
M
P
G
A
R
D
)
M
e
d
i
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

Motor Starters
General Description

Application and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-1

Personnel Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-1

Mechanical Non-Loadbreak Isolating Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-2

400A, 7.2 kV Vacuum ContactorBolt-in, Type SL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-3

400A, 7.2 kV Vacuum ContactorStab-in, Type SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-4

Current Limiting Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-4

Isolated Low Voltage Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-5

Bus and Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-6

Reduced Voltage StartersMechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-7

Reduced Voltage StartersSolid-State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-8

Synchronous Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-10

Incoming Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-11

Potential Transformers and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-11

Type LBS Loadbreak Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-11

Main Breaker AMPGARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-12
Technical Data

Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-14

LBS Loadbreak Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-17

Type SL, 400A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-17

Type SJ, 800A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-18

Type SL, 250A, 15 kV Vacuum Contactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-19

Main Breaker Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-20

Contactor-Fuse Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-21

Protection Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-22

Starter Fuse Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-23
Layout Dimensions

Full Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-24

Primary Reactor, Reduced Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-27

Autotransformer, Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-29

Synchronous Brush Type Mark

V

Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-30

Solid-State Reduced Voltage AMPGARD MV4S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-32

Incoming Line Switch/PT Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-35

Tie Switch Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-37

Arc-Resistant Starter Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-38

Main Breaker AMPGARD Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1-39
General Description

Application and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2-1

AMPGARD SC 9000 Fully Integrated AE-Frame AFD . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2-2

Synchronous Transfer Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2-13

15 kV Input Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2-15

Integrated VCPW Main Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2-16

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2-17

Personnel Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2-19

Component Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2-20

Optional Output Filters and Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2-23

Technical Data and Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2-24
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
AMPGARD Motor Starters. . . . . . . . . .


SC 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

10

002



10.1-1

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

10

Motor Starters

General Description

003

AMPGARD Motor
Control Assembly

AMPGARD Motor Control Assembly

General Description

Eatons AMPGARD

medium voltage
metal-enclosed control family
provides control and protection
of medium voltage motors and
equipment rated 230013,800V
nominal/15,000V maximum.


AMPGARD control has a complete
metal-enclosed offering:

Full and reduced voltage starting of
medium voltage motors up to 8000 hp

Main breaker metal-enclosed
switchgear, a smaller footprint,
single integrated assembly direct
coupled to the AMPGARD control

Integral LBS loadbreak switches
available as main, tie or feeder.
The LBS can be supplied as fused
or un-fused

Adjustable frequency drives
(SC 9000) up to 4160V, 6000 hp


Personnel safety

: Positive mechanical
isolating switch with visible discon-
nect completely grounds and isolates
the starter from the line connectors
with a mechanically driven isolating
shutter, leaving no exposed high
voltage. Medium voltage door is
mechanically locked closed with
the disconnect; low voltage section
has separate door and is segregated
from the medium voltage section.

Ease of installation:

Current limiting
fuses, contactor assembly and
isolating switch assembly are easily
removed from the enclosure; line
and load terminals are completely
accessible from the front.

Ease of maintenance:

All components
are front accessible, facilitating routine
inspection and/or parts replacement.

The low voltage compartment
is painted white as standard to
maximize serviceability.

Simplicity of design:

Component-
to-component design eliminates half
of the electrical connections.
Time-proven contactor technology:
Three vacuum contactor ratings are
used, 400A and 800A 7.2 kV and 250A
15 kV. 400A 7.2 kV contactors are avail-
able as stab-in or bolt-in design. 800A
7.2 kV and 250A 15 kV contactors are
available as stab-in design only.

High degree of isolation:

Main bus is
located in separate compartment on
top of lineup. Vertical bus is barriered
in rear of starter and auxiliary com-
partments. Load cables are isolated
from adjacent starter in two-high sec-
tions. A vertical low voltage wireway
is provided for isolation of customer
control wiring. The low voltage control
compartment is isolated from medium
voltage by steel barriers.
Starter catalog types are available for
the following applications:

Squirrel cage, full voltage
(reversing and non-reversing)

Squirrel cage, primary reactor

Squirrel cage, autotransformer

Solid-state reduced voltage

Synchronous full voltage

Synchronous primary reactor

Synchronous auto-transformer
(reversing and non-reversing)

Two-speed, two winding

Two-speed, one winding

Enclosures

AMPGARD products are available in
NEMA

1 general purpose enclosures
as standard. NEMA 12 (dust tight),
NEMA 3R (outdoor) and arc-resistant
enclosures are available options for
most products. Contact the factory for
exceptions. Enclosure type affects the
maximum continuous current rating
of the starters in the enclosure. Refer
to

Table 10.1-4

on

Page 10.1-17

for

specic ratings for each enclosure type.

Arc-Resistant AMPGARD

When specied, AMPGARD is available
in special arc-resistant construction.
Two ratings are available, 30 kA and
50 kA. Both designs have been tested
and veried to meet the requirements of
IEEE C37.20.7 for Type 2B construction.
Type 2B construction is dened as
arc-resistant at front, back and sides
of the enclosure with the low voltage
compartment door open. Most types
of 400A and 800A starters, as well as
24-inch (610 mm) wide incoming cable
sections are available in arc-resistant
construction. A common plenum design
to close couple to Eaton arc-resistant
switchgear is also available. Consult
factory for ratings on this design. Main
breaker AMPGARD, SC 9000 AFD, LBS
load break switches are not available
in arc-resistant construction. Due to
the specic nature of arc-resistant
testing, no modications may be made
to the enclosure while maintaining the
arc-resistant rating. Consult Eaton for
more details.

Personnel Safety Features

One of the most important consider-
ations in designing the AMPGARD
starter was personnel safety. The
result is an extensive system of
interlocks and other safety features.

Interlocks

Interlocking on AMPGARD starters
includes:

Isolating switch mechanism locks
the medium voltage door closed
when the switch is in the ON position

Provision for optional key interlocks

When door is open, interlock prevents
operating handle from being moved
inadvertently to ON position

When contactor is energized, isolating

switch cannot be opened or closed
2-High FVNR MV4S
SSRV
AMPGARD SC 9000 4160V, 2500 hp AFD AMPGARD Main Breaker
10.1-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

10

Motor Starters

General Description

004

Other Safety Features

AMPGARD starters include many
additional features designed to
protect operating personnel. These
features include:

Provision for a padlock on
the isolating switch handle in
OFF position

Shutter barrier between line
terminals and isolation switch
stabs is mechanically driven

Distinctive marking on back of
switch assembly appears when
shutter barrier is in position and
starter is completely isolated from
the line

Grounding clips provide a positive
grounding of the starter and main
fuses when the isolating switch
is opened

High and low voltage circuits are
compartmentalized and isolated
from each other

The drawout isolation switch is
easily removed by loosening two
bolts in the back of the switch.
The shutter remains in place
when the switch is withdrawn
A remote operator for the starter
isolation switch is an available option.
The AMPGARD Remote Operator (ARO)
enables users to open or close the
switch through the use of a pushbutton
station operated up to 30 feet away
from the starter. Users can mount the
ARO on the front of the starter, plug it
into any available 120 Vac source, then
easily operate the isolation switch from
outside the starter arc ash boundary.

AMPGARD Remote Operator

Mechanical Non-Loadbreak
Isolating Switch

JMT-400/800A Isolation Switch
Front View
JMT-400/800A Isolation Switch
Rear View

Isolation Switch

Eatons Type JMT-4/8 and JMT-15 are
each a drawout, lightweight, three-pole,
manually operated isolating switch
mounted in the top of the starter
enclosure. They may be easily
removed by loosening two bolts in the
rear of the switch. The JMT-4 is rated
400A continuous while the JMT-8 is
rated 800A continuous. The JMT-15
is rated 250A continuous at 15 kV. All
isolation switches have a mechanical
life rating of 10,000 operations.
The component-to-component circuitry
concept includes the mountings for
the current limiting fuses as part of the
isolating switch.

Features

A positive mechanical interlock
between the isolating switch handle
mechanism and contactor prevents
the isolating switch from being
opened when the contactor is closed
or from being closed if the contactor
is closed.
An operating lever in the isolating
switch handle mechanism is designed
to shear off if the operator uses
too much force in trying to open the
non-loadbreak isolating switch when
the contactor is closed. This feature
ensures that the operator cannot open
the switch with the main contactor
closed, even if excessive force is
used on the operating handle.
To operate the isolating switch, the
operating handle is moved through
a 180 vertical arc from the ON to the
OFF position. In the ON position, an
operator on the back of the handle
housing extends through a bracket on
the rear of the starter high voltage
door, preventing the door from being
opened with the switch closed. When
the high voltage door is open, a door
interlock prevents the handle from
being inadvertently returned to the
ON position.
When the operating handle is moved
from ON to OFF, copper stabs are
withdrawn from incoming line ngers.
As the stabs withdraw, they are
visible above the top of the fuses
when viewed from the front, and
simultaneously grounded. As the
ngers are withdrawn, a spring-driven
isolating shutter moves across the
back barrier to prevent front access
to the line connections. As the
shutter slides into position, distinctive
markings appear on the back barrier,
making it easier to check the position
of the shutter.
Isolation Switch Auxiliary Contacts
Optional Blown Fuse
Indicator Contacts
Switch Operating
Arm
Control Plug
Line Side Access Panel
(Removable From Front)
Line Side Connections
Switch Handle
Open
Switch Handle
Closed


10.1-3

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

10

Motor Starters

General Description

005

400A, 7.2 kV Vacuum
Contactor, Type SL

400A Bolt-in Contactor
7200 Volt Maximum

General Description

Eatons Type SL Vacuum Contactors
were designed and engineered
specically for use in AMPGARD
starters. 7.2 kV SL 400A Vacuum
Contactors are self-supporting,
compact, drawout, three-pole, DC
magnet closed contactors. To permit
application matching of the starter to
the motor rating, the SL Contactor is
available in 400A standard and high
interrupting ratings.
SL Contactors are available in the
standard bolt-in conguration and
optional stab-in design. Either bolt-in
or stab-in designs can be supplied in a
two-high conguration, with a starter
maximum of 400 full load amperes. The
total NEMA 1 structure rating cannot
exceed 720A for a combination of
two starters. Refer to

Table 10.1-4

on

Page 10.1-17

for other ratings.

Design

Eaton Vacuum Contactors are highly
versatile, low-chop contactors that have
been designed to meet all applicable
NEMA standards and are UL
recog-
nized components. The contactors
accommodate mechanical interlocks
that function with the starter isolation
switch and with other contactors.
These interlocks provide unmatched
safety and service protection.
The contactors consist of a molded
frame with moving armature, magnet
and vacuum interrupters. The contac-
tor is easily positioned into the starter
and long-life vacuum interrupters
provide many operations with a
minimal maintenance program. The
SL operating coils are energized by a
control board that provides a pulse-
width-modulated DC output. Control
voltages and contactor dropout times
are programmed using a DIP switch
located on the control board. The
control board is mounted in a
protected cavity in the molded
contactor frame to prevent inadvertent
access to the voltage and dropout
DIP switch. Four auxiliary contacts
(2NO, 2NC) are supplied with each
contactor and are wired to terminal
blocks on the starter control panel.
The vacuum interrupters employ
special main contact materials that
exhibit a low chop current plus other
specially engineered characteristics
that minimize switching surges. Surge
protection is therefore not required
due to the use of the vacuum contac-
tor. Surge protection may be required
for other reasons such as the high
probability of lightning strike, etc.
Maintenance
Reduced maintenance is one of the
outstanding features of Eatons
Vacuum Contactor line. The special
contact material in the vacuum
interrupters provides long life even
under severe operating conditions.
The main coils operate with a very
low temperature rise to maximize
insulation life. Steel bearings on
the main shaft provide long, trouble-
free operation.
A simple go/no-go gauge is used for
checking contact wear. Wear can be
checked without removing the contactor
from the starter. The vacuum contactor
is much lighter than previous generation
airbreak or vacuum contactors, which
allows for easier insertion and removal
from the starter structure.
Contactor Control Board
DIP Switch on Contactor Control Board
10.1-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
General Description
006
400A Stab-in Contactor
7200V Maximum
400A, 7.2 kV Bolt-in
The bolt-in version of the SL Contactor
is supplied as standard for those
applications requiring a 400A contactor.
The contactor is mounted on wheels
and rolls into the AMPGARD structure
on steel rails. Bolted bus bars connect
the contactor line and load terminals
to the power components in the starter
cell. A three-phase current transformer,
three-phase potential transformer and
ground fault current transformer are
mounted in the cell when required.
A plug on the side of the contactor
connects the contactor to the low
voltage control panel.
The contactor is easily withdrawn from
the structure by removing the six bolts
securing the contactor line and load
terminals, and the pin connecting
the isolating switch interlock arm.
The contactor can be removed from
the starter without disconnecting
any medium voltage cables.
400A, 7.2 kV Stab-in
A stab-in version of the SL Contactor
is an available option. The stab-in
contactor is mounted on wheels
and rolls into the AMPGARD structure.
Contactor line and load ngers engage
cell-mounted stabs as the contactor
is inserted into the starter cell. The
contactor is held in position by a bolt
and bracket combination. It can be
easily withdrawn from the starter
cell by removing the bolt holding
the contactor against the bracket
and disconnecting the isolation
switch interlock. The contactor can
be removed from the starter without
disconnecting any medium voltage
cables.
400A Stab-in Contactor 7200V
Maximum with Mechanical Interlock
800A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactors
The 800A SL Contactor is available in
a one-high conguration and is rated
at 720A enclosed. The 800A contactor
is available with a stab-in type
connection only. The 800A contactor
is mounted on wheels and has similar
features to the stab-in 400A contactor.
800A Vacuum Break Contactor
7200V Maximum Stab-in with Wheels,
and Line and Load Fingers
250A, 15 kV Stab-in Contactor
The 250A 15 kV SL Contactor is
available in a one-high conguration
and is rated at 250A enclosed. The
250A contactor is available with a
stab-in type connection only. The 250A
contactor is mounted on wheels and
has similar features to the 800A 7.2 kV
contactor. While the contactor is
rated at 250A enclosed, the maximum
starter current is 200 full load amperes
due to the maximum available
fuse size.
250A Stab-in Contactor
15 kV Maximum
7.2 kV AMPGARD starters use Eatons
Type CLS power fuses with special
time/current characteristics for motor
service. Type CLE or Type HLE power
fuses are applied with the 15 kV starter
or when the 7.2 kV starter is used to
feed a transformer. The fuse is coordi-
nated with the contactor and overload
relay characteristics to provide maxi-
mum motor/transformer utilization
and protection. The standard mounting
method for power fuses is bolted with
an option for fuse clips in the 400A
starter. 800A 7.2 kV and 250A 15 kV
fuses are supplied as bolted only.
Interruption is accomplished without
expulsion of gases, noise or moving
parts. Type CLS/CLE/HLE fuses are
mounted in a vertical position to ensure
maximum rating reliability, proper
operation and to eliminate the possibil-
ity of dust and dirt collecting, resulting
in a deterioration of dielectric proper-
ties. When a fault has been cleared, a
plastic indicator in the top of the fuse,
normally depressed, pops up to give
visible blown fuse indication. This
indicator also operates the optional
blown fuse mechanism (available
with bolted 7.2 kV fuses only) on the
isolation switch that gives a contact
closure to allow use in the starter
control circuit.
The control circuit primary fuses are
also current limiting.
Blown fuses may be removed and
replaced without removing or drawing
out the contactor.
Mechanical Interlock with
Isolation Switch
Roll-out
Wheels
Self-Aligning
Contactor Line
and Load Fingers
10.1-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
General Description
007
Standard Fuse Mounting is Bolted with Optional Clip Mounting
Blown Fuse Indicating Device
Isolated Low Voltage Control
The low voltage door has four cutouts as standard.
AMPGARD 400A Starter Door Closed
View of Isolation Switch Through Viewing Window
AMPGARD 400A StarterMedium Voltage Door Open
The device panel, MP-3000 and MP-4000 motor protective
relays all t in this same size low voltage door cutout. The
low voltage control panel is behind the low voltage door and
is completely isolated from the medium voltage compart-
ment. A standard viewing window allows visual verication
of the isolation switch status before attempting to open the
medium voltage door. The medium voltage door is locked
closed whenever the isolation switch is closed.
AMPGARD 400A StarterLow Voltage Door Open
CLS Clip Fuse CLS Bolted Fuse
Blown Fuse
Indicator
Operating Arm
Fuse Fault
Indicator
Low Voltage
Access Door
MD-3000 Differential
Relay (When Specied)
Indicating Lights
Start/Stop Pushbutton
(When Specied)
1/4 Turn Door Latch
Top and Bottom
Motor Protective Relay
(When Specied)
Distinctive Markings on Isolation Switch
Shutter Indicate Shutter is Closed and
Switch is Open
Standard Isolation Switch
Viewing Window
Vertical Control
Wireway
Bolted
Main Fuses
Customer
Terminal Blocks
for Remote
Control
Connections
Horizontal
Wireway
Motor Load Connections
(Accepts 2-Hole Lugs
as Standard)
Control Power Transformer
(750 VA Standard, up to
4 kVA Available)
Standard Isolation
Switch Viewing
Window
Isolation Switch
Operating Handle
(Mechanism Locks
Medium Voltage
Door When Switch
is Closed)
Medium Voltage
Access Door
Predrilled Holes for Additional
Control Devices
Interposing Control Relay
DIN Rail Mounted
10.1-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
General Description
008
Bus and Optional Features
Bus Compartment Top View 3000A Main Horizontal Bus
Main Bus
When starters are grouped together
in a lineup, a typical option is the
main bus. The AMPGARD main bus
is mounted in its own 12-inch (305 mm)
high top-mounted enclosure, which
isolates it from the starter. The connec-
tion from the main bus to the starter is
done with rigid vertical bus. Insulated
barriers are provided for separate top
entry of power and control cables.
The main bus is top, side and front
accessible, which allows for ease of
maintenance or extension of lineup
without disassembling the starters.
Main bus is available for 1000, 1200,
2000 and 3000A. Main bus is uninsu-
lated as standard. Fully insulated bus
is an available option for up to 7.2 kV
starters and is standard on 15 kV
starters. Bus may be supplied with
either tin or silver plating. Crossover
bus, busway entry, and pull boxes
are not available for the 3000A design
(3000A bus duct provisions are available
with the Main Breaker AMPGARD,
see Page 10.1-12).
The standard bus short circuit rating
is 50 kA per NEMA standards and is
based on the let-through current of the
largest fuse used in any starter. An
optional 50 kA, 2-second bus rating is
available for customers that require a
higher rating for the main bus.
Vertical Bus
Vertical bus is located behind a xed
barrier in the rear of the enclosure.
It is fully insulated as standard, with
plating to match that of the main bus.
Other Optional Features
AMPGARD starters are available
with a variety of accessories and
modications to satisfy a wide range
of application requirements. Some
of the broad areas covered include:
Bus and cable entrance enclosures
Transformers
Power factor correction capacitors
Operators and pilot devices
Instruments and meters
Control relays and timers
Solid-state or selected electro-
mechanical protection devices
Medium Voltage Conduit Area
(Upper Starter)
Insulated Barriers to Separate
Motor Load Cables from Main Bus
Low Voltage
Conduit Area
Phase C
Bus Splice
Plates
Vertical
Bus Drops
Phase B
Phase A
Medium Voltage Conduit
Area (Lower Starter)
Vertical Bus, Rear View (2-High 400A)
UL, CSA and IEC Certication
AMPGARD starters are designed,
assembled and tested to meet all
applicable standards:
NEMA/ANSI ICS3
EEMAC E14-1
UL 347
CSA
C22.2 No. 14
The major components, i.e., contactor,
isolating switch, fuses, EMR-3000 and
EMR-4000 are UL recognized.
UL or CSA labeling of a specic starter
requires review to ensure that all
requested modications and auxiliary
devices meet the appropriate
standards. Refer to factory when
specied. AMPGARD starters meet the
requirements of IEC standards 60694,
60298 and 60470.
Seismic Qualication
10.1-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
General Description
009
Reduced Voltage Starters
General Description
Eaton offers traditional electrome-
chanical reduced voltage starters in
addition to reduced voltage solid-state
starters. Unless otherwise specied,
reactors and autotransformers are
NEMA medium duty rated. They are
designed for three 30-second starts
per hour. Heavy-duty reactors and
transformers can be supplied when
specied. Locked rotor current must
be specied when ordering reduced
voltage starters to ensure that the
reactors or autotransformers are
properly sized.
Reduced Voltage Reactor Starter
Reactor Starter
Table 10.1-1. Type 502 Reactor Starting
Characteristics
Factory set on 65% tap.

Advantages
Reduces starting currents
Least costly reduced voltage
starting method
Disadvantages
Large footprint: 1-1/2 structures
at 400A
Bump on transition to full voltage
Not as efcient as autotransformer
Due to reduced torque during
starting, motor must typically be
unloaded during the start sequence
Sequence of Operation
Main contactor (M) closes
Current ows through reactor
reducing voltage to motor (based
on tap setting)
When motor current reaches
~125%, the run contactor (R) closes
providing full voltage to the motor
Reduced Voltage
Autotransformer Starter
Auto Transformer Starter
Table 10.1-2. Type 602 Auto-transformer
Starting Characteristics

Advantages
Produces the most torque per
incoming line ampere of any
reduced voltage starting method
Less costly than RVSS
Disadvantages
Large footprint: 1-1/2 structures
at 400A
More costly than reactor
Bump on transition to full voltage
Due to reduced torque during
starting, motor must typically be
unloaded during the start sequence
Note: Care should be taken when selecting
the motor for reduced voltage starting to
ensure that there is sufcient torque to
accelerate the load at reduced voltage.
Motors that do not fully accelerate at
reduced voltage will generate high voltages
at transition that can damage the autotrans-
former and void the factory warranty.
Sequence of Operation
Shorting contactor (S) closes
Main contactor (M) closes
Current ows through autotrans-
former reducing voltage to motor
(based on tap setting)
When motor current reaches ~125%,
the shorting contactor (S) opens and
the run contactor (R) closes provid-
ing full voltage to the motor
Note: Because the motor is never
disconnected from the supply voltage,
the starting is closed transition.
Starter
Type
%
Motor
Voltage
%
Motor
Current
%
Line
Current
%
Torque
80% tap
65% tap
50% tap
80
65
50
80
65
50
80
65
50
64
42
25
Starter
Type
%
Motor
Voltage
%
Motor
Current
%
Line
Current
%
Torque
80% tap
65% tap
50% tap
80
65
50
80
65
50
67
45
28
64
42
25
10.1-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
General Description
010
Solid-State Reduced Voltage
AMPGARD MV4S
Eaton offers reduced voltage solid-
state soft starters in 400A and 720A
congurations. Horsepower ratings
are available through 5000 hp. The
400A AMPGARD soft starter requires
one full height structure with a full
voltage starter in the upper compart-
ment bus connected to a soft start truck
assembly in the lower compartment.
The 720A soft starter requires two
full height structures (total 72 inches
(1829 mm) wide). The soft start
components are xed mounted in the
720A starter. Both soft starters include
internal fault protection and built-in
basic motor protection. The standard
assembly includes an EMR-3000 motor
relay for advanced motor protection.
Why is Solid-State Reduced
Voltage Soft Starting Desirable?
Eliminate shock to your mechanical
components
Avoid coupling and shaft damage
Prevent rotor and winding failure
Stop drive belt squeal and breakage
Prevent water hammer in pipes
Soft stop the pump motors
Reduce pressure so valves close gently
Avoid the surge wave
Reduce peak starting currents
Reduce voltage drop on motor start
Ratings
23004160 Vac grounded systems
60 kV BIL impulse rating
Horsepower: to 5000 hp
Refer to Table 10.1-19 on Page 10.1-32
for more detailed ratings information.
The AMPGARD solid-state soft starter
is recommended for application only
on power systems that are solidly
grounded or resistance grounded.
Ungrounded systems are not
recommended.
Industry Standards
The AMPGARD solid-state starter is
designed and built to meet all applicable
industry standards. The 400A starter is
available as a UL listed assembly.
NEMA ICS3
UL 347
CSA
EEMAC E14-1
Manufactured in an ISO
9001
and ISO 14001 certied facility
The soft start controller provides
a number of selectable starting
characteristics as standard:
Kick Start
Provides an initial boost of current to
overcome motor and system inertia.
Ramp Start
Operator sets the initial starting
voltage and ramp time. Factory
setting for starting voltage is 20%.
Range is 0 to 100%. Factory setting
for starting time is 10 seconds. Range
is 0 to 120 seconds.
Current Limit
Limits the maximum starting current.
Used in long start time applications
and motor protection applications.
Factory setting is 350% of motor FLA.
Range is 200 to 600%.
Solid-State Soft Stop
Provides a slow decrease in output
voltage. Extends the stopping time of
the motor. Typically used with pumps.
AMPGARD 400A Soft Starter
Main Starter
Cubicle
Motor
Protection
Relay
Soft Starter
LV Control
Compartment
Drawout
SCR Truck
(Located
Behind
MV Door)
Load CablesNormal
Load CablesMoved for Full Voltage Starter
10.1-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
General Description
011
MV4S Keypad and Display
Application with Capacitors
Capacitors of any kind may not be
connected to the load of the solid-state
starter. When power factor correction
capacitors are required, the capacitors
are connected ahead of the RVSS truck
and are switched with a separate
capacitor contactor. If multiple starters
with capacitors are supplied in the
same lineup, all capacitors are
switched off while the solid-state
starter ramps. At the completion of
the ramp cycle, the capacitors for
all energized starters are sequenced
back on. Long cable runs may create
enough capacitance to be of concern.
Capacitance connected to the starter
motor connections must not exceed
0.3 ufd.
400A MV4S Roll-out Truck
Design
Soft start components and bypass
contactor are mounted in a easy-
to-remove roll-out truck assembly.
Maintenance can be performed with
the truck on a bench away from the
starter cubicle.
720A MV4S with Doors Open
How It Works
1. At the time of start, the bypass
contactor is open and all current
passes through the SCRs that
ramp the voltage per the pre-
programmed starter settings.
2. After start is complete, the run
contactor closes, taking the SCRs
out of the circuit.
3. The SCRs are on for only a short
time therefore no MCC venting or
cooling is required.
4. When a stop command is
received, the SCRs can be
programmed to ramp down,
providing a soft stop.
10.1-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
General Description
012
Synchronous Motor Control,
Basic or Enhanced, with
Mark V Controller
AMPGARD synchronous starters are
available for Brush-type and Brushless
Motors, in Basic and Enhanced versions.
Both Basic and Enhanced Brush-type
designs feature the AMPGARD exclusive
Soft-sync that minimizes mechanical
shock as the motor is synchronized.
Eaton Factory Authorized Start-up
Service is required with all Enhanced
Synchronous Starters.
Basic Brush-type
The Basic Brush-type starter includes
a three-phase exciter to generate DC
rotor current up to 200A plus a control
board that determines the proper
time to apply the DC eld while also
providing basic protection, including:
Locked rotor protection
Incomplete sequence
Failure to synchronize
Blown fuse protection
Pullout protection
Field loss protection
The protective features are displayed
on an Eaton GP02 interface module.
Stator protection is provided by
an EMR-3000 solid-state motor
protection relay.
AMPGARD Synchronous Starter
Basic Display with Trip Indication
Enhanced Brush-type
The Enhanced Brush-type starter
includes all features of the Basic
starter plus premium protection,
metering and communications.
Features include:
Power factor regulation/
VAR regulation
Auto-loading
Field forcing
Enhanced metering
Event recorder
Communications with Modbus

TCP/Modbus RTU, Serial Interface
(RS-232)
The standard enhanced display is an
Eaton GP04 interface module. An
Eaton PanelMate is available as a
high-end display.
Basic Brushless
The Basic Brushless starter includes
a three-phase DC power supply to
generate exciter eld current up to
10A plus a control board that provides
basic protection. A solid-state motor
protective relay is supplied for pullout
protection. Output voltage is adjust-
able from 62125 Vdc.
Stator protection is provided by
an EMR-4000 solid-state motor
protection relay.
Enhanced Brushless
The Enhanced Brushless starter
includes all features of the Basic
starter plus premium protection,
metering and communications.
Features include:
Power factor regulation
Auto-loading
Enhanced metering
Event recorder
Communications with Modbus
TCP/Modbus RTU, Serial Interface
(RS-232)
The standard enhanced display is
an Eaton GP04 interface module.
An Eaton PanelMate
is available as
a high-end display.
10.1-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
General Description
013
Incoming Line
Depending on the size and number
of incoming cables, an incoming line
enclosure may be necessary. Different
designs are available for incoming
power for top or bottom entry.
When incoming line metering is
specied, an additional 24-inch
(610 mm) wide metering structure
is typically supplied.
Typical 24-Inch (610 mm) Wide
Incoming Line Structure
Incoming Line Connection Options
Cable: Maximum of six per phase,
750 kcmil maximum, top or
bottom entry
Bus Duct: Top only, 1200, 2000 or
3000A. Standard Eaton three-wire
designs only
Transformer Throat: Must be the
standard design used by Eaton
Potential Transformers,
Control Power Transformer
Disconnect and Fuses
Bus connected (7.2 kV max.) potential
transformers and/or control power
transformers are mounted in a
20-inch (508 mm) high assembly that
includes a disconnect and primary fuses.
The assembly can be mounted in a
24-inch (610 mm) or 36-inch (914 mm)
wide structure.
Potential Transformers, Control
Power Transformer and Fuses
Mounted in a Disconnect Assembly,
Height 20 Inches (508 mm)
Type LBS Loadbreak Switch
For application needs with loads
rated 600 or 1200A at 23006600V,
AMPGARD is available with the Type
LBS loadbreak switch. The LBS is xed
mounted and will t in one-half of a
standard 80-inch (2032 mm) high,
36-inch (914 mm) wide vertical structure.
Power fuses up to 450E amperes
can be mounted within the half-high
structure. 600E or 750E fuses require
an additional half-structure, 1100E
or 1350E fuses require an additional
full structure. Lineups supplied with
unfused LBS switches or with switches
that use fuses greater than 450A
cannot be rated for 50 kAIC. Refer to
Table 10.1-5 on Page 10.1-17 for addi-
tional ratings information. Mechanical
interlocks are incorporated so that the
door cannot be opened when the switch
is on, and when the door is open the
switch cannot be closed. A safety
screen is supplied behind the switch
door. The Type LBS switch can be
supplied with two Form C electrical
interlocks.
Type LBS Loadbreak Switch Shown
in Upper or Lower Half of 36-Inch
(914 mm) Wide Structure, Height
40 Inches (1016 mm)
Type LBS Loadbreak Switch Shown
with Safety Screen Removed
Bus for
Top or
Bottom
Entry
Incoming
Power
10.1-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
General Description
014
Main Breaker AMPGARD
Main Breaker AMPGARD
General Description
Eatons Main Breaker AMPGARD
(MBA) is a fully integrated metal-
enclosed medium voltage Type VCP-W
Drawout Vacuum Circuit Breaker that
is bus connected (close-coupled) to
AMPGARD Medium Voltage Starters
in a single integrated assembly.
Note: MBA sections are 100 inches
(2540 mm) high.
Main Breaker AMPGARD (7.2 kV max.)
is suitable for service entrance. Utility
metering sections are not available.
Main Breaker AMPGARD is designed
and built to meet the following
standards where applicable:
NEMA ICS-1 and NEMA ICS-3, Part 2
ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3
UL 347 and UL 869A
CSA C22.2, No. 31 and No.14
EEMAC G8.2 and E14.1
Listing/Certication
UL listing and CSA certication is
available, depending on the specic
bill of material.
Ratings
23006600 Vac systems
(7200 Vac maximum), three-phase
60 kV BIL impulse withstand rating
ANSI interrupting ratings250,
350 and 500 MVA. 500 MVA rating
available for 6600V systems only
Continuous current1200, 2000
and 3000A
Main Breaker AMPGARDDoors Open
Requires Less Floor Space
Only 60 inches (1524 mm) deep,
the integrated MBA design provides
a bus system that directly connects
to AMPGARD motor starters, elimi-
nating space-consuming transition
sections. The reduced oor space
requirements yield signicant cost
savings, particularly when installa-
tion in a prefabricated electrical
house is required
Back-to-back starters provide for
an increase in the number of
starters without an increase in
oor space
Front/Side Accessible
Connections
All connections requiring main-
tenance are front or side accessible
Rear access space is not required
An MBA (excluding back-to-back
design) can be installed ush
against the wall
Circuit Breaker Rating Chart
Table 10.1-3. ANSI Standards
Type VCP-W Circuit Breakers Rated on
Symmetrical Current Rating Basis
Note: See Page 10.1-20 for complete ratings.
A
N
S
I
I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g
R
a
t
i
n
g
N
o
m
i
n
a
l
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

C
l
a
s
s
I
m
p
u
l
s
e
W
i
t
h
s
t
a
n
d
R
a
t
i
n
g
S
h
o
r
t
-
C
i
r
c
u
i
t
C
u
r
r
e
n
t

a
t

R
a
t
e
d

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

k
V
C
o
n
t
i
n
u
o
u
s
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
a
t

6
0

H
z
MVA kV kV Peak kA rms Amperes
250 4.16 60 kV BIL 29 at
4760V
1200
2000
3000
350 4.16 60 kV BIL 41 at
4760V
1200
2000
3000
500 7.2 60 kV BIL 33 at
8250V
1200
2000
3000
10.1-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
General Description
015
Microprocessor-Based Relays
Eatons protective relays provide
programmable circuit protection,
information and operator conducted
testing. Refer to Tab 4 for more
information.
Metering
IQ and Power Xpert
meters are
available for multi-function metering.
Refer to Tab 3.
Communications
Eatons Power Xpert Architecture
communications provides for monitor-
ing and controlling complete electrical
distribution systems of those parts of
a system selected by the operator.
Refer to Tab 2.
Enclosures
The MBA is available in NEMA/
EEMAC 1, NEMA/EEMAC 1G/1A,
and NEMA/EEMAC 12 enclosures.
AMPGARD 2-High Structure Bus Connected
to Main Breaker Section
Low Voltage Equipment Cell Compartment
for Metering and Protection Devices
Side Panel Removed to Show Incoming
Cable Connections
10.1-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Technical Data
016
Technical Data
Typical Wiring Diagram for Full Voltage FVNR Starter
Figure 10.1-1. Induction Motor Across-the-Line Starter, Vacuum Contactor with Optional EMR-3000 Motor Protection and
IQ Metering, Start-Stop Pushbuttons, and Red and Green Indicating Lights
4160 Vac
60 Hz
C
H2
H1
V2
V3
PF1
GND
V2
SF2
1Amp
GFCT
GND
MP
G
Ground
MX
MP
3
50
MX
1
2
5
Coil
Controller
4
3
+
(BLK)
-
1 2
COIL
DC
M
MA
11
Set Point
System
Trip Mode 1
MP
G
Ground
URTD
DP
DP
IQ DP-4130
Ground
CG
750
8
*
P1
1A
Ma
Stop
Stop
Start
Start
*
M7
Ma
M5
Mb
RIL Run Off
8
C13
C12
M M M
1T1 1T2 1T3
L1 L2
ISW
L3
Ground
Main
Fuse
A
B
C
X1
X2
X1
X2
X1
1CT
GND
C3
Motor
T1 T2 T3
X2
X1
5 9
4
77
H2C
H1C H2A
H1A
H2B H1B
IQ DP-
4130
B
AAA
Neutral
X2
X1
CPT
1 Amp
PF1
ACN
Test Power
Cust. 120 V
Rcpt.
Cust.
120 V
1 Plug
Amp SF1
X1
12
Ground
(X2)
(X1)
(X2)
(X1)
G2
G1
3000
1B
H1A H2A
H2B
1C
25
24
10.1-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Technical Data
017
Typical Wiring Diagram for Reduced Voltage Autotransformer RVAT Starter
Figure 10.1-2. Induction Motor Reduced Voltage Autotransformer Starter, Vacuum Contactor with Optional EMR-3000 Motor Protection and
IQ Metering, Start-Stop Pushbuttons, and Red and Green Indicating Lights
L1 L2
Fuse
ISW
L3
Ground
Main
A
B
C
Hz
Vac
60
4160
3
S
A
1
S
A
G
r
o
u
n
d
S
L
0
T
2
Autotransformer
M M M
MOTOR
T1 T2 T3
G
Set MP3000 Set Point
"START" to the
Following; TRNC(100),
TRNT (Max 30 Sec),
and TRN(I).
MP
50
MP
RX
SX
R3 S5
52
51
M
P
MA RA SA
P1
RX MX
1
2
SX
2 2
R
6
5
-
(
B
L
K
)
(
W
H
T
)
+
1 M
DC DC
-
+
1 C
O
I
L

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
1
-
(
B
L
K
)
5
6
SB
SA
11
Set Point Sys
TP Mode 1
MP
CPT
VA
AMP
750
1
1
A
C
N
R
C
P
T
C
u
s
t
C
u
s
t
1 PLUG
120V
1
2
0

V
S
F
1
8
STOP
START M4
2
3
1A
M7 M5
M7
RUN
O
F
F
R4
Ground
P
T
1 AMP
SF2
V11
M
P
D
P
C21
C22
C23
G
r
o
u
n
d
C3
C2
C1
1CT
G
r
o
u
VC
VA
VB
X2
X1
X2
X1
H3
H2
H1
X
1
X
2
X
2
X
1
9 4
(DISCRETE
IN 2)
INC. SEQ.
G
2
E
M
R
-
3
0
0
0
H1A
H2A
H2B
H2C C
H1C
25
24
10.1-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Technical Data
018
Typical Wiring Diagram for Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter
Figure 10.1-3. Induction Motor Reduced Voltage Solid-State Starter, Vacuum Contactor with EMR-3000 Motor Protection, Local and Remote
Start-Stop Pushbuttons, and Local and Remote Red and Green Indicating Lights
3
50
T
B
3
-1
0
T
B
3
-1
1
62
54
T
B
8
-7
S N
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
1
A1
S N
S N
T
B
4
-1
T
B
4
-3
CIB
T
B
1
-1
T
B
1
-9
*
*
PNL PNL AED
CR
62
70
50
1
1
1
1A
2
3
CR
TCB
TCB
TRPX
Bypass
Coil
Start Start
Stop
Stop
TRPX
R
e
s
e
t
RVSS
Fault
Ring
Transformers
Continued
at Right
EZ Relay
Timing Head .1-30SEC
NO/NC
L1 L2
GND
A
B
HZ
VAC
60
4160
BA
BX
T
B
8
-9
A1
CR
G
SS2
4
55
H2
H1
CPT
VA
PF1
X1
X2
VA
VB
2K 3
1
IS1
IS3
ISW
GND
ISW
IS2
1
12
CUST
120V
120V
SF1
15
1
MX
69
5 9 4 7 MP GND
TCB SS2
2
TCB
1 RCPT
AMP
1
P
lu
g
Test Power
Main Coil
ISW
L3
C
Main
Fuse
M M M
D
E
F
VC
VB
VA
CUST
ACN RCPT
1
6
5
-
+
+
-
M
2
1
6
5
-
+
+
-
B
2
2
1
MP
V11
J2-7
MCB
V11
A
MB
12
BB
V1
1
YEL
(White)
(Black)
Mode1
(B
la
c
k
)
(W
h
ite
)
DC DC
Coil Coil
1 2
C
o
il C
o
n
tro
lle
r
(Black)
(White)
(B
la
c
k
)
(W
h
ite
)
C
o
il C
o
n
tro
lle
r
DC DC
Coil Coil
1 2
AMP
SF2
T
B
2
-1
T
B
2
-2
MCB
51
TRIP
12
13
MP
BA
BX
52
X2
X1
WIL MX
67
SS2
1
MA
TRPX
Mode 2
Time Between
Starts Timer
(AUX5 Failsafe)
RVSS
Fault
See MP
Programming
Notes
12
GND
V11
V31
MP4000
GND
G
V2
V13
J2-4
J2-1
V2
V13
X2
X1
H2
H1
H1
H2 X2
X1
PT
C
B
NEU
MP
V3
V2
BLK
GRY
B
B
1T2
1T3
D
E
F
1T1
S
C
R
A
S
S
Y
S
C
R
A
S
S
Y
S
C
R
A
S
S
Y
B
400 AMP
Pole ASSY
GF21
GF11
G1
G2
EMR-3000
MP
GND
X2
X1 GF1
GF2
GFCT
G
C11
C21
C31
C12
C22
C32 1
TB3
2
1 2
1 2
CIB
TB2
TB1
C13
C23
C33
1CT
C31
C21
GND
EMR-3000
H1B
H1A H2A
H2B
H2C H1C
25
24
MP
CG
Blue Black
Red
C11
C1 C2 C3
Green
White
CG
SCTB
CG1 CG1
Continued
fromLower
Left
M5 M3
Mb Ma
B3
M4
M5 M3
M2
X2
X1
RIL
X2
X1
GIL
B3
B2
Ba
MAX
X2
X1
1RIL Run Off Bypass
1
T
B
2
-5
T
B
2
-6
CPU
T
B
1
-6
T
B
1
-8
64
63
66
65
*
TX
TCB
S
ta
r
t/S
to
p
R
e
s
e
t
R
V
S
S
R
e
s
e
t
CR
T
B
2
-1
T
B
2
-2
SS2
3
68
TCB
E
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y
B
y
p
a
s
s
12
T3 T1 T2
Motor
MP
T
B
8
-5
T
B
8
-6
Ba
MAX MAX
20
MAX
21
25
24
23
22
30
31
MAX
26
27
B7
B6
71
72
TCB TRPX AUX 3
F
a
u
lt S
ta
tu
s
In
d
ic
a
to
r

fo
r
C
u
s
to
m
e
r
s
u
s
e
R
V
S
S
B
y
p
a
s
s
In
p
u
t
C
o
n
ta
c
to
r
S
ta
tu
s
In
d
ic
a
to
r
s
fo
r

C
u
s
to
m
e
r
s
U
s
e
SS2
X 1
2 X
3 X
4 X
Position
Normal Bypass Cont
Softstart Bypass
AMP
AUX 2
Capacitors (Power Factor or Surge)
Must not be Connected to the Load Side
of the RVSS Starter. If Capacitors are
Supplied in the Motor Terminal Box,
They Must be Removed.
= Circuit Board Input
= Circuit Board Dry Output
= Circuit Board Wetted Output
= Remote Device
= Internal Term. Blk(s)
= Term. Blk. for Customer Conn.
= TX Type Light
Reduced Voltage 400A MVS4 Starter
MP4000 Programming Notes:
MP4000 Must be Programmed for AUX2 Relay Output to Trip on:
Ground Fault, Instantaneous Overcurrent and Differential (if used).
These Trip Conditions Will Result in the Immediate Opening of the
Main Contactor (Uncontrolled Shutdown)
All Other Trip Functions Will Operate the Trip Output and Allow the
Softstart Module to Open the Circuit (Controlled Shutdown)
Refer to MP4000 Manual IB02602002E, Pages 4-12 Through 4-13,
Setpoints 10-2, 10-15 and 10-19.
10.1-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Technical Data
019
Table 10.1-4. Starter Maximum Continuous Current Ratings
Limited acceleration time and locked rotor current. Contact Eaton for details.
LBS Loadbreak Switch
Table 10.1-5. LBS Switch Ratings
1200A rating is for NEMA 1 enclosure with vented covers. NEMA 3R/12 rating is 1000A.
Type SL, 400A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactor/Starter Ratings
Table 10.1-6. Type SL 400A Vacuum Contactor Ratings
Time stated in cycles on 60 Hz base.

Starter Class Enclosure Type
NEMA 1 NEMA 12/NEMA 3R Arc Resistant
Two-high with 400A 7.2 kV contactors 360 top 330 top 320 top
360 bottom 330 bottom 320 bottom
Two-high with 400A 7.2 kV contactorsalternate 320 top 230 top 210 top
400 bottom
370 bottom 350 bottom

One-high with 800A 7.2 kV contactor 720 650 600
One-high with 250A 15 kV contactor 200 200 N/A
Description Continuous
Amperes
Load-Break
Amperes
Fault Close Rating,
kA Asymmetrical
System Fault Rating,
kA Symmetrical
600A unfused switch
1200A unfused switch
600
1200
600
1200
40
61
25
38
600A fused switch, 450E maximum fuse
450
450
600
1200
80
80
50
50
600
750
600
1200
64
64
40
40
1200A fused switch, 1350E maximum fuse 1200
1200 49 31
Rated Utilization Voltage 2200 to 2500V 3000 to 3600V 3800 to 4800V 6000 to 7200V
Interrupting rating
(With 400A high interrupting contactor)
NEMA unfused (E1)
NEMA fused (E2)
8.5 kA
50 kA
8.5 kA
50 kA
8.5 kA
50 kA
8.5 kA
50 kA
Application table
Induction motor
Synchronous motor (0.8 PF)
(1.0 PF)
Transformer
Capacitor three-phase
200 MVA at 2400V
1750 hp
1750 hp
2000 hp
1500 kVA
1200 kVAR
285 MVA at 3300V
2250 hp
2250 hp
2500 hp
2000 kVA
1650 kVAR
400 MVA at 4600V
3000 hp
3000 hp
3500 hp
2500 kVA
2100 kVAR
570 MVA at 6600V
4500 hp
4500 hp
5500 hp
4000 kVA
3300 kVAR
Maximum Insulation Voltage: 7200V
Maximum interrupting current
(3 operations)
Rated current
IEC make-break capability-AC4
Make
Break
Short-time current
30 seconds
1 second
8.7 milliseconds (0.5 cycle)
Standard service altitude

Optional service altitudes
Mechanical life
Electrical life
BIL
Dielectric strength (60 Hz)
Closing time
(Energization to contact touch)
Opening time
8500A (High interrupting)
4500A (Standard interrupting)
400A enclosed
4000A
3200A
2400A
6000A
63 kA Peak
1000 to +2000 meters
3500 to 1001 meters
+2001 to +5000 meters
2.5 million operations
300,000 operations
60 kV (1.2 x 50 microseconds)
20 kV (1 minute)
80 milliseconds
30 to 330 milliseconds (selectable)
Arcing time
Pickup voltage
Dropout voltage
Control voltages
AC
DC
Control circuit burden
Closing (AC)/(DC)
Holding (AC)/(DC)
Auxiliary contact rating
Voltage (maximum)
Continuous current
Making capacity (AC)
Making capacity (DC)
Breaking capacity (AC)
Breaking capacity (DC)
Latch (when specied)
Mechanical life
Trip voltages (DC)
Trip voltages (AC)
Minimum trip voltage
Trip burden
24 Vdc
125 Vdc
110/120 Vac
Trip time
Weight
12 milliseconds (3/4 cycle) or less
80% rated coil voltage
110/120/220/240 (50/60 Hz)
125
100V125V, 1 kVA/200V250V, 1.8 kVA
100V125V, 40 VA/200V250V, 50 VA
600V
10A
7200 VA
125 VA
720 VA
125 VA
250,000 operations
24/125V
110/120V
400 VA
400 VA
400 VA
30 milliseconds
60 lbs (27 kg) (stab-in/bolt-in)
10.1-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Technical Data
020
Type SJ, 800A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactor/Starter Ratings
Table 10.1-7. Type SJ 800A Vacuum Contactor Ratings
Description SJ 25V830 SJ 33V830 SJ 50V830 SJ 72V830
Rated utilization voltage 22002500V 30003300V 38005000V 60007200V
Interrupting rating
NEMA unfused (E1)
NEMA fused (E2)
NEMA fused (E2)
12.5 kA
200 MVA at 2300V
50 kA
12.5 kA
285 MVA at 3300V
50 kA
12.5 kA
408 MVA at 4600V
50 kA
12.5 kA
570 MVA at 6600V
50 kA
Interrupting rating
Induction motor
Synchronous motor (0.8 PF)
(1.0 PF)
Transformer
Capacitor three-phase
3000 hp
3000 hp
3500 hp
2500 kVA
2400 kVAR
4000 hp
4000 hp
5000 hp
3500 kVA
3200 kVAR
5000 hp
5000 hp
6000 hp
4500 kVA
4000 kVAR
8000 hp
8000 hp
10,000 hp
6000 kVA
4800 kVAR
Maximum Insulation Voltage: 7200V
Maximum interrupting current
(three operations)
Rated current
IEC make-break capability-AC4 class 3
Make
Break
Short time current
30 seconds
1 second
8.75 milliseconds (0.5 cycle)
Mechanical life
Electrical life
BIL
Dielectric strength (60 Hz)
Closing time (energization to contact touch)
Opening time
12,500A
720A enclosed
800A open
8000A
6400A
4320A
10,800A
86 kA peak
1 million operations
250,000 operations
At rated current
60 kV (1.2 x 50 microseconds)
18.2 kV (1 minute)
80 milliseconds
130 milliseconds
Arcing time
Pickup voltage
Dropout voltage
Control voltages (AC)/(DC)
Control circuit burden (rated volt)
Closing (AC)/(DC)
Holding (AC)/(DC)
Auxiliary contact rating (L-64)
Voltage (maximum)
Continuous current
Mechanical life
Trip voltages (DC)
Trip voltages (AC)
Tripping voltage
Tripping burden
24 Vdc
48 Vdc and 96 Vdc
110 Vac and 220 Vac
Weight
12 milliseconds (3/4 cycle) or less
110/120/220/240V (50/60 Hz)
125 Vdc
2600 VA
80 VA
600V
10A
7200 VA
200 VA
720 VA
200 VA
250,000 operations
24/48/96V
110/220V (50/60 Hz)
1200 VA
400 VA
500 VA
95 lbs (43 kg)
10.1-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Technical Data
021
Type SL, 250A, 15 kV Vacuum Contactor/Starter Ratings
Table 10.1-8. Type SL 15 kV Vacuum Contactor Ratings
Table 10.1-9. Type SL 15 kV Vacuum Contactor Specications
Description SL12V230 SL15V230
Utilization voltage 10,00011,000V 12,40013,800V
Interrupting rating
EI (unfused)
E2 (fused)
E2 (fused)
5 kA
950 MVA at 11,000V
50 kA
5 kA
1190 MVA at 13,800V
50 kA
Induction motor 4000 hp (200 FLA) 5000 hp (200 FLA)
Synchronous motor (0.8 PF) 4000 hp 5000 hp
Synchronous motor (1.0 PF) 4500 hp 5500 hp
Transformer 3800 kVA at 11 kV 4750 kVA at 13.8 kV
BIL 75 kV 95 kV (with arrestors)
Specication Rating
Maximum voltage 15,000V
Maximum interrupting 5000A
Current (three operations)
Rated current 250A enclosed
250A open
IEC make-break capability AC3make 2500
AC3break 2000
Short-time current
30 seconds
1 second
8.75 milliseconds
1500A
3750A
25 kA peak
Mechanical life 250,000 operations
Electrical life 250,000 operations
Dielectric strength (60 Hz) 36 kV (1 minute)
Closing time 80 milliseconds
Opening time 130 to 330 milliseconds (selectable)
Weight 95 lbs (43 kg)
Arcing time 12 milliseconds (3/4 cycle) or less
Pickup voltage 80% rated coil voltage
Dropout voltage 60% rated coil voltage
Control voltages
(AC)
(DC)
110/120/220/240V (50/60 Hz)
125V
Control circuit burden (rated voltage)
Closing
Holding
2600 VA
80 VA
Auxiliary contact ratings
Voltage (maximum)
Continuous current
600V
10A
7200 VA
200 VA
720 VA
200 VA
Mechanical life
Trip voltages (DC)
Trip voltages (AC)
Tripping voltage
Tripping burden
24 Vdc
48 Vdc and 96 Vdc
110 Vac and 220 Vac
250,000 operations
24/48/96V
110/220V (50/60 Hz)
1200 VA
400 VA
500 VA
Weight 95 lbs (43 kg)
10.1-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Technical Data
022
Main Breaker Ratings
Table 10.1-10. Available VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards
For reclosing service, there is No Derating necessary for Eatons type VCP-W family of circuit breakers. R = 100%. Type VCP-W breaker can perform
the O-C-O per ANSI C37.09; O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO per IEC 56; and some VCP-Ws have performed O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO; all with no derating.
Contact Eaton for special reclosing requirements.
For three-phase and line-to-line faults, the symmetrical interrupting capability at an operating voltage, V
o
Single line-to-ground fault capability at an operating voltage, V
o
The above apply on predominately inductive or resistive three-phase circuits with normal-frequency line-to-line recovery voltage equal to the
operating voltage.
4000A continuous rating is available for 5/15 kV. Contact Eaton for details.
3-cycle rating available.
Tripping may be delayed beyond the rated permissible tripping delay at lower values of current in accordance with the following formula:
T (seconds) =Y
The aggregate tripping delay on all operations within any 30-minute period must not exceed the time obtained from the above formula.
Asymmetrical interrupting capability = S times symmetrical interrupting capability, both at specied operating voltage.
Non-standard breakers with high momentary rating available for special applications.
Note: Contact Eaton for capacitor switching, low inductive switching, and cable charging ratings.
A
s
y
m
m
e
t
r
y

F
a
c
t
o
r
f
o
r

V
C
P
-
W

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s
Circuit
Breaker
Type
N
o
m
i
n
a
l
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

C
l
a
s
s
N
o
m
i
n
a
l

T
h
r
e
e
-
P
h
a
s
e
M
V
A

C
l
a
s
s
Voltage Insulation Level Current Rated
Transient
Recovery
Voltage
R
a
t
e
d

I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g

T
i
m
e
R
a
t
e
d

P
e
r
m
i
s
s
i
b
l
e
T
r
i
p
p
i
n
g

D
e
l
a
y
R
a
t
e
d

R
e
c
l
o
s
i
n
g

T
i
m
e
R
a
t
e
d

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
D
i
v
i
d
e
d

B
y

K
Current Values
R
a
t
e
d
M
a
x
i
m
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
R
a
t
e
d

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
R
a
n
g
e

F
a
c
t
o
r
Rated Withstand
Test Voltage
R
a
t
e
d

C
o
n
t
i
n
u
o
u
s

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

a
t

6
0

H
z
R
a
t
e
d

S
h
o
r
t
-
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
(
a
t

R
a
t
e
d

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

k
V
)
R
a
t
e
d

C
r
e
s
t

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
R
a
t
e
d

T
i
m
e

t
o

C
r
e
s
t
M
a
x
i
m
u
m

S
y
m
.
I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g
C
a
p
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
3
-
S
e
c
o
n
d

S
h
o
r
t
-
T
i
m
e
C
u
r
r
e
n
t

C
a
r
r
y
i
n
g

C
a
p
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
Closing and
Latching
Capability
(Momentary)
N
o
r
m
a
l
F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
1
.
2

x

5
0
s
e
c
.

I
m
p
u
l
s
e
K Times Rated
Short-Circuit
Current
KI
1
.
6

K

T
i
m
e
s

R
a
t
e
d

S
h
o
r
t
-
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
1
.
6

K

T
i
m
e
s

R
a
t
e
d

S
h
o
r
t
-
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
kV
Class
MVA
Class
V
kV rms
K
kV
rms
kV
Crest
Amps
I
kA
rms
E2
kV
Crest
T2
mS
Cycles
Y
Sec
Cycles V/K
kV rms
kA
rms
kA
rms
kA
Crest
kA rms
Assy.
S
50
VCP-W
250
4.16 250 4.76 1.24 19 60 1200
2000
3000
29 8.9 50 5 2 30 3.85 36 36 97
132
58
78
1.2
50
VCP-W
350
4.16 350 4.76 1.19 19 60 1200
2000
3000
41 8.9 50 5 2 30 4.0 49 49 132 78 1.2
75
VCP-W
500
7.2 500 8.25 1.25 36 95 1200
2000
3000
33 15.5 60 5 2 30 6.6 41 41 111 66 1.2
Rated
Control
Voltage
Spring Charge Motor UV Trip mA
(Maximum)
Voltage Range Indicating
Light
Amperes
Run
Amperes
Time
(Seconds)
Close or Trip
Amperes
Close Trip
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
9.0
4.0
2.0
6
6
6
16
7
4
200
80
40
3856
100140
200280
2856
70140
140280
0.35
0.35
0.35
120 Vac
240 Vac
4.0
2.0
6
6
6
3
104127
208254
104127
208254
0.35
0.35
V
V
o
V
V
o
(K Times Rated Short-Circuit current)
Short-Circuit Current Through Breaker
[ ]
2
10.1-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Technical Data
023
Contactor-Fuse Coordination
The AMGARD starter provides
ensured coordination between its
fuses, contactor, current transformers,
protective relays, and the motor it
is controlling.
One of the most critical coordination
issues is between the contactor and
the starter fuses. The fuses must
interrupt faults greater than the
interrupting rating of the contactor.
The AMPGARD 400A high interrupting
contactor (SL400A-HI) has an 8-cycle
dropout time factory setting as
standard and will interrupt at 8500A.
The maximum size fuse used with an
SL400A-HI contactor is a 450-24R. By
comparing the fuse curve with the
contactor rating, it can be observed
that for faults greater than 8500A, the
fuse will open before the contactor.
With faults less than 8500A, the
contactor may clear the fault before
the fuse blows, depending on the
settings of the protective relays. Refer
to Figure 10.1-4 for an illustration of
AMPGARD coordination.
Other vacuum contactors available
today may have lower interrupting
ratings than the AMPGARD Type SL
vacuum contactors. Dropout times
also vary, and may be as short as two
cycles on other starter designs. Lower
interrupting ratings and shorter drop-
out times can result in fault current
levels where the contactor may be
required to interrupt a fault greater
than its rating. This can result
in equipment failure. Refer to
Figure 10.1-5 for an illustration of
an improperly coordinated starter.
AMPGARD starters also ensure
coordination between other starter
components. The current transformers
and protective relays are selected to
work properly with each other, and
to protect the motor. Protective relays
like Eatons EMR-3000 provide optimal
motor protection, while also rapidly
opening the contactor during fault
conditions. This rapid opening signal
cannot open the contactor in less than
its set dropout time, but it will take
the motor off-line in the shortest
possible time. This will help minimize
mechanical damage to the motor and
may prevent the starter fuses from
blowing by allowing the contactor to
clear the fault (only if the fault is less
than the contactor interrupting rating).
AMPGARD starters use 400A standard
interrupting contactors (SL400-SI)
when the contactor is not required
to coordinate with the starter main
fuse. An example of this application
is the run contactor of a reduced
voltage starter.
Figure 10.1-4. Proper Contactor Fuse Coordination Found in AMPGARD Starter
Figure 10.1-5. Contactor Fuses that are not Properly Coordinated
Contactor
Interrupting Rating
24R Fuse
Curve
Contactor
Dropout
Current
T
i
m
e
Contactor
Interrupting Rating
24R Fuse
Curve
Contactor
Dropout
Current
T
i
m
e
Fault Current Range
where Contactor can
Attempt to Open on a Fault
Greater than its Rating
10.1-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Technical Data
024
Protection Considerations
Coordinated with the motors
characteristics, the protective devices
in the AMPGARD starter provide
motor protection from overload to
full system capacity faults.
AMPGARD starters are supplied with
an adjustable thermal overload relay
as standard.
Multi-function solid-state motor
protection relays are a common
option on AMPGARD starters. The
EMR-3000 is typically provided when
a multi-function relay is specied.
The EMR-3000 provides many types of
protection including overload, locked
rotor, ground fault and phase loss/
phase unbalance. The EMR-3000 also
provides start control logic to protect
the motor against excessive starting.
The relay may be applied to either
across-the-line or reduced voltage
starters. On reduced voltage starters,
the EMR-3000 can control the
transition from reduced to full voltage,
offering the greatest protection for the
motor and starter. An optional RTD
module can be supplied for motors
with built-in RTDs. The EMR-4000 can
be supplied when voltage monitoring
and protection are required.
Eatons MD-3000 can be supplied when
motor differential protection is required.
EMR-3000 Motor Protective Relay
InsulGard relays are an available
option on AMPGARD starters. The
InsulGard provides early warning of
increasing partial discharge levels in
the starting equipment, cables and
motor. This early warning will help the
user to better schedule maintenance
and avoid unplanned downtime.
Figure 10.1-6. Full Range Coordinated Protection Between Current Limiting Type CLS Fuses,
Vacuum Contactor and Motor Protection Relay
Ultimate Trip
Curve Programmed to
Follow Specific Motor
Damage Curve Providing
Maximum Motor
Utilization
Controller Maximum
Interrupting Rating
Instantaneous
Overcurrent
Full Load Amps
Motor Starting Curve
24R Fuse
Contactor Dropout
Asymmetrical
Offset Compensation
Contactor Interrupting
Capacity
Current
T
i
m
e

I
n

S
e
c
o
n
d
s
10.1-23
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Technical Data
025
Starter Fuse Information
Table 10.1-12. Fuse Coordination Recommendations
Specic motor acceleration time and locked rotor current must be reviewed to ensure
24R fuse has sufcient capacity for start cycle.
Minimum FLA Maximum FLA Fuse Rating CT Ratio
7.2 kV/400A Contactor
10.0
23.0
31.2
42.0
22.9
31.1
41.9
46.7
70-2R
70-2R
100-3R
100-3R
25:5
50:5
50:5
75:5
46.8
63.0
74.8
83.0
62.9
74.7
82.9
93.5
130-4R
150-5R
170-6R
170-6R
75:5
100:5
100:5
150:5
93.6
124.0
137.1
166.0
123.9
137.0
165.9
187.0
200-9R
200-9R
230-12R
230-12R
150:5
200:5
200:5
300:5
187.1
247.0
329.0
360.1
246.9
328.9
360.0
400.0
390-18R
450-24R
450-24R
450-24R
300:5
400:5
600:5
600:5
7.2 kV/800A Contactor
200.0
250.1
330.1
500.0
650.1
250.0
330.0
499.0
650.1
720.0
450-24R
450-24R
650-36R
800-44R
800-44R
300:5
400:5
600:5
800:5
1000:5
10.1-24
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
026
Layout Dimensions
Full Voltage Squirrel Cage Starters
Catalog S210 Non-Reversing
Catalog S310 Reversing
Equipment Details
Mounted in the Medium Voltage Section
Three incoming line connectors
Drawout three-pole gang-operated
line isolating switch assembly with
isolating shutter, external operating
handle interlocked to prevent open-
ing the medium voltage compartment
door until the isolating switch is
open and grounded
Vertically mounted current limiting
power fuses with pop-up blown fuse
indicators
One magnetic three-pole vacuum
contactor with DC operating coils
and mechanical interlock to prevent
opening the isolating switch when
contactor is closed
One control power transformer
(115V secondary)
Two CPT primary current
limiting fuses
Four electrical interlocks
(2NO, 2NC)
Three current transformers
Reversing Starter
One additional magnetic three-pole
vacuum contactor (duplicate of above),
both contactors are mechanically and
electrically interlocked.
Mounted in the Low Voltage Compartment
Control panel with:
One EMR-3000 motor
protection relay
One interposing control relay
Set of control circuit terminal blocks
One control circuit secondary fuse
One run-test circuit
Specications
Table 10.1-13. Starter Selection InformationDimensions in Inches (mm)
Horsepower based on NEMA standard design B motor at 1800 rpm.
When horizontal bus is added, height becomes 92.00 inches (2336.8 mm).
At higher hp rating, maximum acceleration time is 3.5 seconds.
At higher hp rating, maximum acceleration time is 6 seconds.
Maximum current for two starters in a single structure is 720A.
May be applied on 6900V systems where maximum voltage does not exceed 7200V.
Figure 10.1-7. Starter Arrangements
Horsepower
Volts
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
A
m
p
e
r
e

R
a
t
i
n
g
(
E
n
c
l
o
s
e
d
)
S
t
a
r
t
e
r
I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g
R
a
t
i
n
g
(
k
V
A
)
E
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t
A
r
r
a
n
g
e
m
e
n
t
N
u
m
b
e
r
Dimensions
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
S
t
a
r
t
e
r

S
p
a
c
e
sWeight
Lbs (kg)
Height
Width Depth
22002400V Non-Reversing
700/800
1500/1750
3000
2300
2300
2300
400
400
720
200,000
200,000
200,000
1
1
2
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
36 (914)
36 (914)
36 (914)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
1
0
1350 (613)
1350 (613)
1700 (772)
22002400V Reversing
700/800
1500/1750
3000
2300
2300
2300
400
400
720
200,000
200,000
200,000
3
3
4
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
36 (914)
36 (914)
36 (914)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
0
0
0
1800 (817)
1800 (817)
2400 (1090)
1250/1500
2500/3000
5500
4600
4600
4600
400
400
720
400,000
400,000
400,000
1
1
2
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
36 (914)
36 (914)
36 (914)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
1
0
1350 (613)
1350 (613)
1700 (772)
40004800V Reversing
1250/1500
2500/3000
5500
4600
4600
4600
400
400
720
400,000
400,000
400,000
3
3
4
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
36 (914)
36 (914)
36 (914)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
0
0
0
1800 (817)
1800 (817)
2400 (1090)
6600V Non-Reversing
2000/2250
4000/4500
8000
6600
6600
6600
400
400
720
570,000
570,000
570,000
1
1
2
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
36 (914)
36 (914)
36 (914)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
1
0
1500 (681)
1500 (681)
1800 (817)
6600V Reversing
2000/2250
4000/4500
8000
6600
6600
6600
400
400
720
570,000
570,000
570,000
3
3
4
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
36 (914)
36 (914)
36 (914)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
0
0
0
1800 (817)
1800 (817)
2400 (1090)
M
M
M
RVS
M
RVS
Arrangement 1 Arrangement 4 Arrangement 3 Arrangement 2
10.1-25
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
027
Figure 10.1-8. Arrangement 1 Detail (Full Voltage 400A)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
Figure 10.1-9. Arrangement 2 Detail (Full Voltage 800A)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
Gnd
Side View
Bus
Ph
Main
c a
Ph
b

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
1200 Amp - 4.00" X 1/Ph
1200A Main Bus

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
Note A
Note C1
Note C
Note B
Note D
Note T
Top View
Floor Plan
Main Bus
Front View
Detail A
in Starter
on Rear Wall Load Panel W ll L d P
Load Terms
T1 T3
Load Term
Detail A
Note L
Load Term
Detail A
Note L
4.38
(111)
36.00
(914)
3.50
(89)
5.81
(148)
62.00
(1575)
22.00
(559)
5.81
(148)
7.39
(188)
12.00
(305)
30.00
(762)
1.50 (38)
2.00 (51)
5.50 (140)
3.00 (76)
6.00 (152)
6.00 (152)
3.00 (76)
9.25 (235)
5.50 (140)
6.80 (173)
4.63 (118)
9.32 (237)
1.25
(32)
13.50
(343)
36.00
(914)
36.00
(914)
4.50
(114)
1.18
(30)
(35)
(51)
2.00
(51)
2.00
(51)
3.00
(76)
80.00
(2032)
61.00
(1549)
21.00
(533)
7.39
(188)
1.45
22.85
(580)
30.00
(762)
30.00
(762)
28.00
(711)
1.00
(25)
4.50
(114)
13.75
(349)
(58)
2.50
(64)
27.00
(686)
21.67
(550)
4.38
(111)
For seismic installations,
mount a minimum of
6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
from wall.
12.00
(305)
80.00
(2032)
31.75
(806)
7.39
(188)
1.45
(37)
22.85
(580)
29.00
(737)
5.81
(148)
30.00
(762)
2.00
(51)
2.00
(51)
27.00
(686)
1.25
(32)
13.50
(343)
1.50
(38)
30.00
(762)
(237)
3.00
(76)
1.36
(35)
36.00
(914)
30.00
(762)
28.00
(711)
21.67
(550)
1.00
(25)
36.00
(914)
2.50
(64)
13.75
2.31
(59)
4.63 (118)
6.00 (152)
5.50 (140)
5.50 (140)
6.80 (173)
4.50 (114)
4.50 (114)
3.00 (76)
1.00 (25)
1.18 (30)
Side View
Bus
Ph
Main
c a
L
o
w

V
o
lt
a
g
e
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
800A Starter
Note A
Note G
Note G
Note D
Note E
Top View
Floor Plan
Main Bus
T3
Load Term
on Rear Wall Load Panel
in Starter
Detail A
Note L
Detail A
Load Term
4.3
(109)
4.3
(109)
Front View
36.00
(914)
3.50
(89)
mount a minimum of
6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
from wall.
10.1-26
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
028
Figure 10.1-10. Arrangement 1 Detail (Full Voltage 15 kV)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
1
UNIT 1D
2
UNIT 2D
Main
Bus
PH
C B
PH
A
PH
Side View
30.00
(762.0)
22.85
(580.4)
Ground
Bus
1.45
(36.8)
L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
Load Term
Detail A
Note L
5.50
(139.7)
6.70 (170.2)
2.00 (50.8)
1.25
(31.8)
1.50
(38.1)
13.50
(342.9)
9.32
(236.7)
Top View
3.00
(76.2)
Elevation View
1 2
Top Plan View
Shipping Section 1
1500 Lbs
24.00
(609.6)
36.00
(914.4)
60.00
(1524.0)
Base Plan View
Shipping Section 1
1500 Lbs
24.00
(609.6)
36.00
(914.4)
60.00
(1524.0)
0.90
(22.9)
3.50
(88.9)
Main
Bus
PH
C B
PH
A
PH
Structure #1
Structure #2
Side View
Floor Plan Note D
30.00
(762.0)
22.85
(580.3)
Ground
Bus
62.00
(1574.8)
1.45
(36.8)
80.00
(2031.9)
12.00
(304.8)
2.00
(50.8)
15.00
(381.0)
4.50
(114.3)
1.00
(25.4)
28.00
(711.3) 30.00
(762.0)
1.00
(25.4)
19.00
(482.6)
4.50
(114.3)
24.00
(609.6)
Note F
Note A
22.00
(558.8)
Top View
24.00
(609.6)
Main
Bus
Note F
27.50
(698.5)
30.00
(762.0)
Continuation of Bus
from Adjacent Structure
1.50 (38.1)
11.50 (292.1)
1.25
(31.8)
5.50
(139.7)
6.70 (170.2)
3.50
(88.9)
59.00
(1498.6)
80.00
(2032.0)
12.00
(304.8)
0.90
(22.9)
5.81
(147.5)
56.43
(1433.3)
1.85
(47.0)
7.39
(187.7)
T3 T2 T1
Load Term
Detail A
4.38 (111.3)
Arranged Horizontally
on Rear Wall Load
Panel in Starter
2.92 (74.2)
4.38 (111.3)
LH Side
Sheet
9.25
(235.0)
1.00
(25.4)
2.50
(63.5)
2.00
(50.8)
1.00
(25.4)
13.75
(349.3)
Note E
2.00
(50.8) 4.50
(114.3)
Floor Plan Note D
4.50
(114.3)
27.00
(685.9)
28.00
(711.3) 30.00
(762.0)
Note A
21.67
(550.5)
2.31
(58.7)
Note G
3.00
(76.2)
6.00
(152.4)
36.00
(914.4)
30.00
(762.0)
36.00
(914.4)
Main Bus
2.00 (50.8)
Note G
Note E
1.18
(30.0)
6.00
(152.4)
1.36
(34.5)
10.1-27
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
029
Primary Reactor, Reduced
Voltage Starters
One drawout three-pole gang-
operated line isolation switch
assembly with isolating shutter,
external operating handle interlocked
to prevent opening the medium
voltage compartment door until the
isolating switch is open and grounded
One vertically mounted current
limiting power fuse with pop-up
blown fuse indicators
opening the isolation switch when
the contactor is closed
(115V secondary)
Two CPT primary current limiting fuses
Four electrical interlocks (2NO, 2NC)
Reversing Starter
One additional magnetic contactor
(duplicate of above), both contactors
are mechanically and electrically
interlocked.
One control panel with:
One EMR-3000 motor
protection relay
Two interposing relays
One set of control circuit
terminal blocks
Reduced Voltage Structure
run contactor with DC operating coil
and electrical interlocks
One medium-duty starting reactor
with 506580% taps
Table 10.1-14. Type 502 Reactor

Starter
Type
%
Motor
Voltage
%
Motor
Current
%
Line
Current
%
Torque
80% tap
65% tap
50% tap
80
65
50
80
65
50
80
65
50
64
42
25
Specications
At higher hp rating maximum acceleration time is 3.5 seconds.
At higher hp rating maximum acceleration time is 6 seconds.

Horsepower
Volts
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
A
m
p
e
r
e

R
a
t
i
n
g
(
E
n
c
l
o
s
e
d
)
S
t
a
r
t
e
r
I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g
R
a
t
i
n
g

(
k
V
A
)
E
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t
A
r
r
a
n
g
e
m
e
n
t

N
u
m
b
e
r
Dimensions Weight
Lbs (kg)
Height
Width Depth
700/800
1500/1750
3000
2300
2300
2300
400
400
720
200,000
200,000
200,000
1
1
2
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
2800 (1271)
2800 (1271)
4000 (1816)
22002400V Reversing
700/800
1500/1750
3000
2300
2300
2300
400
400
720
200,000
200,000
200,000
3
3
4
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
3250 (1476)
3250 (1476)
4650 (2111)
1250/1500
2500/3000
5500
4600
4600
4600
400
400
720
400,000
400,000
400,000
1
1
2
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
2800 (1271)
2800 (1271)
4000 (1816)
40004800V Reversing
1250/1500
2500/3000
5500
4600
4600
4600
400
400
720
400,000
400,000
400,000
3
3
4
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
3250 (1476)
3250 (1476)
4650 (2111)
6600V Non-Reversing
2000/2250
4000/4500
8000
6600
6600
6600
400
400
720
570,000
570,000
570,000
1
1
2
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
3300 (1498)
3300 (1498)
4650 (2111)
6600V Reversing
2000/2250
4000/4500
8000
6600
6600
6600
400
400
720
570,000
570,000
570,000
3
3
4
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
3250 (1476)
3250 (1476)
4650 (2111)
Reactor
Run
Contactor
M
M
Run
Contactor
Reactor
Reversing
Contactor
M
Run
Contactor
Reactor
Reversing
Contactor
Run
Contactor
Reactor
10.1-28
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
030
Figure 10.1-12. Arrangement 1 Detail (Reduced Voltage, 400A)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
Floor Plan
Note A
Bus
Gnd
Side View
Load Term
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
Front View
RVNR 400A Starter w/Main Bus 1200A
Note G
Note D
Note G
Load Term
Note L1
Main Bus
b
Ph
a c
Main
Ph
Bus
1200 Amp - 4.00" X 1/Ph p /
61.00
(1549)
3.50
(89)
12.00
(305)
7.39
80.00
(2032)
61.00
(1549)
22.00
(559)
1.45
(37)
22.85
(580)
30.00
(762)
2.50
(64)
2.00
(51)
2.00
(51)
13.50
(343) 1.25
(32) 1.50
(38) ( )
1.70
(43)
2.88
(73)
27.00
(686)
4.50
(114)
28.00
(711)
21.67
(550)
1.00
(25)
28.00
(711)
4.63
(118)
13.75
(349) ( )
4.50
(114)
4.50
36.00
(914)
36.00
(914)
36.00
(914)
27.00 (686)
5.50 (140)
5.50 (140) 2.00 (51)
36.00 (914)
1.00 (25)
1.00 (25)
1.00 (25)
6.00 (152)
2.31 (59)
3.00 (76)
30.00
(762)
30.00
(762)
9.32
(237)
5.81
(148)
2.92 (74)
4.38 (111)
4.38 (111)
mount a minimum of
6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
from wall.
10.1-29
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
031
Reduced Voltage
Autotransformer Starters
assembly with isolating shutter,
external operating handle interlocked
to prevent opening the medium
voltage compartment door until
the isolating switch is open and
grounded
Three vertically mounted current
limiting power fuses with pop-up
(115V secondary)
Two CPT primary current limiting fuses
Reversing Starter
(duplicate of above), both contactors are
mechanically and electrically interlocked.
One EMR-3000 motor
protection relay
Three interposing relays
terminal blocks
Reduced Voltage Structure(s)
run contactor with DC operating coil
and electrically and mechanically
interlocked with the starting contactor
One magnetic two-pole vacuum
start contactor with DC operating
coil and electrical and mechanical
interlocks
One medium-duty starting auto-
transformer with 506580% taps
Three distribution class lightning
arresters for high voltage stress pro-
tection on the transformer zero tap
Table 10.1-16. Type 602 Auto-transformer

Specications
At higher hp rating, maximum acceleration time is 3.5 seconds.
At higher hp rating, maximum acceleration time is 6 seconds.

Starter
Type
%
Motor
Voltage
%
Motor
Current
%
Line
Current
%
Torque
80% tap
65% tap
50% tap
80
65
50
80
65
50
67
45
28
64
42
25
Horsepower
Volts
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
A
m
p
e
r
e

R
a
t
i
n
g
(
E
n
c
l
o
s
e
d
)
S
t
a
r
t
e
r
I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g
R
a
t
i
n
g

(
k
V
A
)
E
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t
A
r
r
a
n
g
e
m
e
n
t

N
u
m
b
e
r
Dimensions
N
u
m
b
e
r

o
f
S
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e
s
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Height
Width Depth
700/800
1500/1750
3000
2300
2300
2300
400
400
720
200,000
200,000
200,000
1
1
2
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
108 (2743)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
2
2
3
3100 (1407)
3100 (1407)
4800 (2179)
22002400V Reversing
700/800
1500/1750
3000
2300
2300
2300
400
400
720
200,000
200,000
200,000
3
3
4
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
108 (2743)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
2
2
3
3650 (1657)
3650 (1657)
5650 (2565)
1250/1500
2500/3000
5500
4600
4600
4600
400
400
720
400,000
400,000
400,000
1
1
2
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
108 (2743)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
2
2
3
3100 (1407)
3100 (1407)
4800 (2179)
40004800V Reversing
1250/1500
2500/3000
5500
4600
4600
4600
400
400
720
400,000
400,000
400,000
3
3
4
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
108 (2743)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
2
2
3
3650 (1657)
3650 (1657)
5650 (2565)
6600V Non-Reversing
2000/2250
4000/4500
8000
6600
6600
6600
400
400
720
570,000
570,000
570,000
1
1
2
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
108 (2743)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
2
2
3
3100 (1407)
3100 (1407)
4800 (2179)
6600V Reversing
2000/2250
4000/4500
8000
6600
6600
6600
400
400
720
570,000
570,000
570,000
3
3
4
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
108 (2743)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
3
3
4
3650 (1657)
3650 (1657)
5650 (2565)
Auto
Trans-
former
Short
Run
M
Auto
Trans-
former
Short
Run
M
Auto
Trans-
former
Rev
Short
Run
M
Auto
Trans-
former
Rev
Short
Run
M
10.1-30
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
032
Full Voltage Synchronous Starters
Brush Type Mark V Controller
assembly with isolating shutter.
External operating handle inter-
locked to prevent opening the
medium voltage compartment
open and grounded
Three vertically mounted current
limiting power fuses with pop-up
(115V secondary)
limiting fuses
Reversing Starter
(duplicate of above), both contactors
are mechanically and electrically
interlocked.
One EMR-3000 motor
protection relay
One interposing relay
terminal blocks
Mounted in the Upper Compartment
or Auxiliary Structure
One brush-type solid-state Mark V eld
panel with:
Mounted on door:
One AC line ammeter, panel type
One DC eld ammeter, panel type
One exciter eld potentiometer
One set of externally ventilated
heatsinks
One graphic display
Mounted on inside compartment:
One step-down exciter
transformer three-phase
One SCR power supply panel
One synchronous control board
MOV surge protection
One three-phase CT
One ELC controller
One set of control circuit blocks
Three primary fuses
Three secondary fuses
Mounted on top of starter:
One starting and eld discharge
resistor
Starting and discharge resistors are mounted on top, add 13.00 inches (330.2 mm) to the height.
At higher hp rating maximum acceleration time is 3.5 seconds.
At higher hp rating maximum acceleration time is 6 seconds.

When the eld panel requirement exceeds 88A at 125 Vdc or 44A at 250 Vdc, an auxiliary structure
36.00 inches (914.4 mm) wide is required.
Mounting location of exciter transformer when eld panel requirement exceeds 88A at 125 Vdc or
44A at 250 Vdc. Otherwise compartment is blank.
Horsepower
at 0.8 PF
Horsepower
at 1.0 PF
Volts
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
A
m
p
e
r
e

R
a
t
i
n
g
(
E
n
c
l
o
s
e
d
)
S
t
a
r
t
e
r
I
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
i
n
g
R
a
t
i
n
g

(
k
V
A
)
E
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t
A
r
r
a
n
g
e
m
e
n
t
N
u
m
b
e
r
Dimensions Weight
Lbs (kg)
Height
Width Depth
700/800
1500/1750
3000
900/1000
1750/2000
3500
2300
2300
2300
400
400
720
200,000
200,000
200,000
1
1
2
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
36 (914)
36 (914)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
1500 (681)
1500 (681)
2350 (1067)
22002400V Reversing
700/800
1500/1750
3000
900/1000
1750/2000
3500
2300
2300
2300
400
400
720
200,000
200,000
200,000
3
3
4
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
2100 (953)
2100 (953)
2900 (1317)
1250/1500
2500/3000
5500
1500/1750
3000/3500
6000
4600
4600
4600
400
400
720
400,000
400,000
400,000
1
1
2
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
36 (914)
36 (914)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
1550 (704)
1550 (704)
2350 (1067)
40004800V Reversing
1250/1500
2500/3000
5500
1500/1750
3000/3500
6000
4600
4600
4600
400
400
720
400,000
400,000
400,000
3
3
4
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
2100 (953)
2100 (953)
2900 (1317)
6600V Non-Reversing
2000/2250
4000/4500
8000
2500/2750
5000/5500
10,000
7200
7200
7200
400
400
720
570,000
570,000
570,000
1
1
2
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
36 (914)
36 (914)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
1700 (772)
1700 (772)
2500 (1135)
6600V Reversing
2000/2250
4000/4500
8000
2500/2750
5000/5500
10,000
7200
7200
7200
400
400
720
570,000
570,000
570,000
3
3
4
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
80 (2032)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
30 (762)
30 (762)
30 (762)
2100 (953)
2100 (953)
2900 (1317)
3
6
7
Field
Panel
M
3
7
Field
Panel
Rev
M
3
7
Field
Panel
Rev
M
3
7
Field
Panel
M
10.1-31
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
033
Figure 10.1-15. Arrangement 1 Detail (400A, Synchronous)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
12.00
(305)
80.00
(2032)
22.00
(559)
1.45
(37)
7.39
(188)
21.00
(533)
22.85
(580)
30.00
(762)
2.00
(51)
27.00
(686)
4.50
(114)
21.67
(550)
28.00
(711)
30.00
(762)
2.31
(59)
1.00
(
(25)
5.81
(148)
5.50
5.50
6.80
2.00 (51)
3.00 (76)
6.00 (152)
1.00 (25)
13.50
(343)
1.50
(38) 12.25
(311)
25.0
(635)
3.50
(90)
36.00
(914)
3.00
(76)
1.18
(30)
2.50
(64)
4.13
(105)
36.00
(914)
36.00
(914)
4.50
(114)
2.00
(51)
1.25 (32)
30.00
4.38 (111)
4.38 (111)
(140)
(173)
(762)
Bus
Gnd
Side View
Bus
Ph
Main
c a
Load Term
T3 T2 T1
Ph
b
Load Term
L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
Front View
1000 Amp - 3.00" X 1/Ph p /
1000A Main Bus
Note A
Note G
Note G
Note E
Note D
Note E
Top View
Floor Plan
Main Bus
Synchronous Starter
Detail A
Note L
On Rear Wall Load Panel W ll L d P
in Starter
Detail A
D
C

F
i
e
l
d
C
o
n
n
'
s

M
T
D
o
n

r
h

S
i
d
e
Starting &
Discharge res.
mount a minimum of
6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
from wall.
10.1-32
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
034
Reduced Voltage Solid-State Soft
Starter AMPGARD MV4S Starters
Equipment Details
Mounted in the Medium Voltage Sections
Drawout three-pole gang-operated
line isolating switch assembly with
isolating shutter, external operating
handle interlocked to prevent open-
ing the medium voltage compartment
open and grounded
Vertically mounted current limiting
power fuses with pop-up blown
fuse indicators
opening the isolating switch when
contactor is closed
(115V secondary)
limiting fuses
Withdrawable SCR truck with fully
rated vacuum bypass contactor
Control panel with:
One EMR-3000 motor
protection relay
One interposing control relay
Set of control circuit terminal blocks
Mounted in Lower Door Compartment
Soft start control module with
Modbus and RS-232 interface for
remote communications
User interface module with 2 x 20
character LCD display, 12 LEDs,
and eight pushbuttons
Based on maximum acceleration time of 30 seconds.
Includes horizontal bus.
Does not include incoming line provisions.

Volts Horsepower
SCR/Contactor
Ampere Rating
Starter Interrupting
Rating (AIC)
Dimensions Add. Starter
Spaces
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Height
Width
Depth
2300
2300
1500
3000
400
720
50,000
50,000
92.00 (2336.8)
92.00 (2336.8)
36.00 (914.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
0
0
2000 (908)
4000 (1816)
3300
3300
1800
3600
400
720
50,000
50,000
92.00 (2336.8)
92.00 (2336.8)
36.00 (914.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
0
0
2000 (908)
4000 (1816)
4160
4160
2500
5000
400
720
50,000
50,000
92.00 (2336.8)
92.00 (2336.8)
36.00 (914.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
0
0
2000 (908)
4000 (1816)
10.1-33
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
035
Figure 10.1-16. Arrangement Detail (400A Solid-State Reduced Voltage)See Table 10.1-20 on Page 10.1-34 for Notes
POWER
RUN
ALARM
TRIP
36.00
(914.4)
12.00
(305.0)
9.32
1.50
(38.1)
Main Bus
Note: C1
2.00
(51.0)
2.00
(51.0)
2.00
(51.0)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
30.00
(762.0)
28.00
(711.2)
Note: A
Note: E
Note: G
1.36
(345.4)
1.18
(30.0)
4.10 (104.1)
10.00
(254.0)
2.50
(64.0)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
3.00 (76.2)
27.00
(686.0)
4.50
(114.3)
4.50
(114.3)
2.00 (51.0)
13.50
(343.0)
1.25
(32.0)
5.50
(140.0)
5.50
(140.0)
6.80
(173.0)
30.00
(762.0)
Note: E
7.39
(188.0) Ground
Bus
5.81
(148.0)
Ground
Bus
1.45
(36.8)
1.45
(36.8)
22.85
(580.4)
30.00
(762.0)
Side View Floor Plan
Top View
Load Term
Detail A
Note: L
Low
Voltage
Control
Low
Voltage
Control
80.00
(203.2)
61.00
(155.0)
62.00
(1575.0)
3.50
(89.0)
PH
A
PH
B
PH
Main
Bus
C
For seismic installations, mount a
minimum of 6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
from wall.
10.1-34
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
036
Table 10.1-20. Arrangement Detail Notes
Note Description
Cable Notes
1 Line connection is designed for maximum of one 4/0 cable.
2 Line connection is designed for maximum of two 500 kcmil.
3 Load connection is designed for maximum of one 350 kcmil or two 4/0.
4 Load connection is designed for maximum of one 750 kcmil or two 500 kcmil.
Arrangement Notes
A 0.875 dia. typical 4 holes. Mounting studs to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade.
B HV conduit space, load cables for two-high starters. Cables for lower starter enter in front half of conduit space, and cables for upper starter enter
in rear half.
B1 HV conduit space, line and load cables for bottom entry stand-alone starters. Line cables should enter in rear half of conduit space,
and load cables should enter in front half of conduit space.
C LV conduit space for two-high starters with bottom entry control conduit. Control wiring for upper starter should enter in left half of conduit space,
and lower starter control wiring should enter in right half of conduit space.
C1 LV conduit space for two-high starters with top entry control conduit. Control wiring for upper starter should enter in right half of conduit space,
and lower starter control wiring should enter in left half of conduit space.
D 90 door swing requires 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) wide structure, 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) for 18.00-inch (457.2 mm) wide
structure, 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) for 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide structure, 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide structure and
40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure.
E HV conduit space, load.
F HV conduit space, line only.
F1 HV conduit space, line only. Line cables to enter in rear half of conduit space only.
G LV conduit space only.
L Load terminations located on rear wall of starter mounted on a load panel. Terminations are arranged horizontally from left to right. T1, T2, T3
left to right at 4.38-inch (111.3 mm) centers.
L1 Load terminations located on rear wall of reduced voltage enclosure mounted on a load panel. Terminations are arranged horizontally
from left to right. T1, T2, T3 left to right at 4.38-inch (111.3 mm) centers.
T HV conduit space, load cables for two-high starters. Cables for lower starter enter in rear half of conduit space, and cables for upper starter enter
in front half.
X Steel bottom with removable lead plates.
Y Tolerances 0.0 inches +0.25 inches per structure.
Z Conduits to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) into structure.
10.1-35
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
037
Incoming Line Switch/PT LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 10.1-17. Incoming LBS, Bottom Entry up to 450A Fuse, Unfused with Metering Section
1
Unit 1B
Unit 1D
2
Unit 2C
Unit 2B
Unit 2D
60.00
(1,524)
Shipping Section 1 - 1750 Lbs
36.00
(914.4)
24.00
(609.6)
GND
BUS
1.45
(36.8)
Side View Structure 1
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
27.00
(685.8)
4.50
(114.3)
4.50
(114.3)
4.50
(114.3)
4.50
(114.3)
28.00
(711.2)
1.00
(25.4) 1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
Note F
36.0
(914.4)
Floor Plan Note D
19.00
(482.6)
34.00
(863.6)
59.00
(1,498.6)
Line
Term
24.00
(609.6)
7.75
(196.9) 0.90
(22.9)
0.90
(22.9)
12.00
(304.8)
3.50
(88.9)
PH
A
PH
B C
PH
BUS
MAIN
80.00
(2,032.0)
1.45
(36.8)
12.00
(304.8)
80.00
(2,032.0)
2.00 (50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
6.70
(170.2)
5.50
(139.7)
1.36
(34.5)
1.18
(30.0)
36.00
(914.4)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
6.00
(152.4)
Top View
Note C1
MAIN BUS
GND
BUS
15.00
(381.0)
28.00
(711.2)
24.00
(609.6)
24.00
(609.6)
21.00
(533.4)
1.50
(38.1)
MAIN BUS
19.00
(482.6)
PH
A
PH
B C
PH MAIN
BUS
6.70
(170.2)
5.50
(139.7)
9.32
(236.7)
22.00
(558.8)
5.81
(147.6)
3.50
(88.9)
30.00
(762.0)
22.85
(580.4)
22.85
(580.4)
1.25
(31.8)
5.50
(139.7)
Top View
Floor Plan Note D
10.1-36
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
038
Incoming Line Switch/PT LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 10.1-18. Incoming LBS, Bottom Entry, 600E/750E/1100E/1350E Fused with Metering Section
1
Unit 1D
2
Unit 2B
Unit 2D
3
Unit 3C
Unit 3B
Unit 3D
96.00
(2,438.4)
Shipping Section 1 - 3250 Lbs
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
24.00
(609.6)
15.00
(381.0)
24.00
(609.6)
24.00
(609.6)
Floor Plan Note D
Top View
21.00
(533.4)
1.50
(38.1)
MAIN BUS
1.25
(31.8)
9.32
(236.7)
22.00
(558.8)
5.81
(147.6)
59.00
(1,498.6)
Line
Term
24.00
(609.6)
7.75
(196.9)
NOTE C1
MAIN BUS
MAIN
BUS
PH
C B
PH
A
PH 12.00
(304.8)
80.00
(2,032.0)
3.50
(88.9)
22.85
(580.4)
30.00
(762.0)
1.45 (36.8)
GND
BUS
MAIN
BUS
PH
C B
PH
A
PH
12.00
(304.8)
80.00
(2,032.0)
3.50
(88.9)
22.85
(580.4)
30.00
(762.0)
1.45
(36.8)
GND
BUS
0.90
(22.9)
MAIN
BUS
PH
C B
PH
A
PH
12.00
(304.8)
80.00
(2,032.0)
3.50
(88.9)
1.45
(36.8)
GND
BUS 0.90
(22.9)
22.85
(580.4)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
Top View
36.00
(914.4)
33.00
(838.2)
MAIN BUS
2.00 (50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
6.70
(170.2)
30.00
(762.0)
1.25
(31.8)
5.50
(139.7)
9.32
(236.7)
1.50
(38.1)
Note F
Floor Plan Note D
19.00
(482.6)
34.00
4.50
(114.3)
28.00
(711.2)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
30.00
(762.0)
27.00
(685.8)
36.00
(914.4)
4.50
(114.3) 2.00
(50.8)
4.50
(114.3)
28.00
(711.2)
1.00
(25.4)
30.00
(762.0)
Note F
Floor Plan Note D
19.00
(482.6)
34.00
4.50
(114.3)
28.00
(711.2)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
30.00
(762.0)
27.00
(685.8)
36.00
(914.4)
4.50
(114.3) 2.00
(50.8)
19.00
(482.6)
1.00
(25.4)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
4.50
(114.3)
6.70 (170.2)
30.00
(762.0)
5.50 (139.7)
5.50 (139.7) 2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
3.00 (76.2)
Top View
6.00 (152.4)
1.18
(30.0)
1.36
(34.5)
36.00
(914.4)
3.00
(76.2)
6.70 (170.2)
30.00
(762.0)
5.50 (139.7)
5.50 (139.7)
5.50
(139.7)
10.1-37
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
039
Tie Switch LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 10.1-19. LBS Tie
1
Unit 1B
Unit 1D
Shipping Section 1 - 1200 lbs.
9.00
(228.6)
8.25
(209.6)
24.50
(622.3)
MAIN BUS
5.27
(133.9)
1.25
(31.8)
10.25
(260.4)
1.50
(38.1)
36.00
(914.4)
59.00
(1,498.6)
MAIN
BUS
PH
C B
PH
A
PH
12.00
(304.8)
80.00
(2,032.0)
3.50
(88.9)
22.85
(580.4)
30.00
(762.0)
1.45
(36.8)
0.90
(22.9)
1.45
(36.8) GND
BUS
2.00 (50.8)
6.70
(170.2)
30.00
(762.0)
5.50
(139.7)
Note C1
3.00 (76.2)
Top View
6.00 (152.4)
1.18
(30.0) 36.00
(914.4)
1.36
(34.5)
3.00
(76.2)
Floor Plan Note D
19.50
(495.3)
4.50
(114.3)
28.00
(711.2)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
30.00
(762.0)
27.00
(685.8)
36.00
(914.4)
4.50
(114.3)
2.00
(50.8)
GND
BUS
5.50
(139.7)
Side View
10.1-38
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
040
Arc-Resistant Starter LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 10.1-20. 50 kA Arc-Resistant, 24.00-Inch (609.6 mm) Incoming Cable Section and Two-High 400A Starter Section
21.00
(533.4)
80.00
(2032.0)
61.00
(1549.4)
27.39
(695.7)
MAIN
BUS
22.00
(558.8)
Load Term
Detail A
Note L
62.00
(1574.8)
Low Voltage
Control
BUS
GND
1.45
(36.8)
3.50
(88.9)
PH
A
PH
B C
PH
1.85
(47.0)
1.85
(47.0)
5.81
(147.6)
Rear
Sprt.
1.70
(43.2)
52.25
(1327.2)
Low Voltage
Conduit
Cable Chimney
through Plenum
GND
BUS
1.45
(36.8)
50.00
(1270.0)
51.00
(1295.4)
42.85
(1078.2)
123.62
(3139.9) Load Term
Detail A
Note L
27.39
(695.7)
50.00
(1270.0)
51.00
(1295.4)
Rear
Sprt.
PH
C B
PH
A
PH
BUS
MAIN
62.00
(1574.8)
42.85
(1078.2)
1.45
(36.8)
GND
BUS
3.50
(88.9)
0.90
(22.9)
1.70
(43.2)
Front
123.62
(3139.9)
52.25
(1327.2)
Cable Chimney
through Plenum
Unit 1D
1
Side Covers
2
Plenum Ships
Separately
Unit 2D
Unit 2B
24.00
(609.6)
36.00
(914.4)
60.00
(1524.0)
80.00
(2032.0)
Duct Ships
Separately
Flap Assy.
6.70
(170.2)
5.50
(139.7)
MAIN
BUS
Top View
24.00
(609.6)
Continuation of Bus from
Adjacent Structure
0.75
(19.1)
TYP
Note F
30.51
(775.0)
17.75
(450.9)
4.00
(101.6)
16.00
(406.4)
50.00
(1270.0)
52.25
(1327.2)
Bolting
Flange
51.00
(1295.4)
Rear Supports
Protrude 1.00"
from Rear Please
Consider Dimension
Before Locating
Equipment
5.50
(139.7)
50.00
(1270.0)
Floor Plan Note D
24.00
(609.6)
6.98
(177.3)
10.00
(254.0)
4.50
(114.3)
4.50
(114.3)
1.00
(25.4)
Note
F
15.00
(381.0)
Note A
Note X
28.00
(711.2)
30.00
(762.0)
25.23
(640.8)
19.82
(503.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Top View
Note C1
MAIN
BUS
2.00 (50.8)
1.63
(41.4)
1.24
(31.5)
5.38
(136.7)
3.38
(85.9)
8.68
(220.5)
20.06
(509.5)
1.13
(28.7)
13.60
(345.4)
50.00
(1270.0)
51.00
(1295.4)
6.70
(170.2)
5.50
(139.7)
52.25
(1327.2)
Bolting
Flange
Note B
5.50
(139.7)
Rear Supports
Protrude 1.00"
from Rear Please
Consider Dimension
Before Locating
Equipment
4.50
(114.3)
13.75
(349.3)
1.00
(25.4)
Note B
3.00
(76.2)
27.00
(685.8)
22.09
(561.1)
2.00
(50.8)
2.50
(63.5)
6.00
(152.4)
Note X
Note A
2.31
(58.7)
21.67
(550.4)
Note C
Floor Plan Note D
51.00
(1295.4)
4.63
(117.6)
9.25
(235.0)
36.00
(914.4)
50.00
(1270.0)
At
Floor
Level
4.50
(114.3)
1.00
(25.4)
28.00
(711.2)
30.00
(762.0)
Rear Supports
Protrude 1.00"
from Rear Please
Consider Dimension
Before Locating
Equipment
Notes:
For non-seismic installations, mount a
minimum of 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) from wall.
For seismic installations, mount a minimum
of 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) from wall.
10.1-39
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
041
Main Breaker AMPGARD LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 10.1-21. AMPGARD Main Breaker and Two-High 400A Starter Section
1
Unit 1F
Unit 1C
Unit 1B
2
52
Unit 2F
Unit 2C
3 4
Unit 4B
Unit 4D
102.00
(2590.8)
Shipping Section 1 7900 lbs.
26.00
(660.4)
26.00
(660.4)
26.00
(660.4)
26.00
(660.4)
26.00
(660.4)
26.00
(660.4)
4.00
(101.6)
Front
30.00
(762.0)
Aux. Compt.
Door
(Note D)
Vented
Compartment
Note A
Note G
1.63
(41.4)
6.25
(158.8)
2.00
(50.8)
6.00
(152.4)
LV Conduit
Area
HV Conduit
Area
HV Conduit
Area
1.50
(38.1)
5.00
(127.0)
5.00
(127.0)
16.00
(660.4)
2.75
(69.9)
11.25
(285.8)
40.00
(1016.0)
6.00
(152.4)
2.00
(50.8)
22.00
(558.8)
22.00
(558.8)
11.88
(301.8)
14.00
(355.6)
Access
Panels
PH C
PH B
PH A
11.50
(292.1)
17.00
(431.8)
Low Voltage
Compartment
Main Breaker
Compartment
A B C
MAIN PH PH PH
BUS
GND
BUS
Disc SW
(if reqd.)
31.12
(790.4)
11.00
(279.4)
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1,524)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
31.12
(790.4)
57.00
(1447.8)
Upper Compt.
Door
(Note D)
1.25
(31.8)
11.00
(279.4)
Floor Plan
Top View
Front
MAIN BUS
Front
Lefthand Side View Incoming Cable
Termination Compartment
Incoming
Cable
Termination
Customer
Terminal
Block
14.87
(377.7)
39.63
(1006.6)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
Low
Voltage
Wireway
BUS
PH PH PH
MAIN
C B A
Low Voltage Wireway
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
90.00
(2286.0)
10.00
(254.0)
11.50
(292.1)
6.50
(165.1) 6.50
(165.1)
6.50
(165.1)
GND
BUS
24.62
(625.3)
24.62
(625.3)
Front
High Voltage
Access
Removable
Barrier
51.20
(1300.5)
Customer
Terminal
Block
17.00
(431.8)
29.55
(750.6)
20.64
(524.3)
GND
36.63
(930.4)
Line Termination
Mounted on RH Side
1L1 1L2 1L3
Incoming Cable
Terminal Adapter
1.25 (31.8)
3.00 (76.2)
4.75 (120.6)
6.00 (152.4)
0.00 (0.00)
0.00
(0.00)
5.00
(127.0)
3.00
(76.2)
1.00
(25.4)
0.56 dia. (TYP)
Note C
Note B
3.00
(76.2)
9.25
(235.0)
4.63
(117.6)
Note C1
Note T
4.63
(117.6)
13.50
(342.9)
1.50
(38.1) 1.25
(1.8)
21.67
(550.4) 1.00
(25.4)
2.31
(58.7)
13.75
(349.3)
6.00
(152.4)
2.50
(63.5)
1.00
(25.4)
Note A
9.32
(236.7)
MAIN BUS
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
90.00
(2286.0)
10.00
(254.0)
21.00
(533.4)
80.00
(2032.0)
61.00
(1549.4)
7.39
(187.7)
7.39
(187.7)
MAIN
BUS
22.00
(558.8)
22.00
(558.8)
30.00
(762.0)
Load Term
Detail A
Note L
62.00
(1574.8)
Low
Voltage
Control
BUS
GND
1.45
(36.8)
3.50
(88.9)
12.00
(304.8)
PH
A
PH
B C
PH
1.85
(47.0)
1.85
(47.0)
5.81
(147.6)
5.81
(147.6)
BUS
GND
1.45
(36.8)
Side View
Top View
6.70
(170.2)
30.00
(762.0)
5.50
(139.7)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
3.00
(76.2) 6.00
(152.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
3.00
(76.2)
1.18
(30.0)
1.36
(34.5)
Floor Plan
Note D
27.00
(685.8)
2.00
(50.8)
4.50
(114.3)
4.50
(114.3)
28.00
(711.2)
30.00
(762.0)
Disc SW
(if reqd.)
Front View Incoming Cable
Termination Compartment
Righthand Side View
Main Breaker Compartment
Load Term
Detail A
Note L
51.20
(1300.5)
5.50
(139.7)
2.00
(50.8)
10.1-40
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Motor Starters
Layout Dimensions
042
Incoming Line/PT LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 10.1-22. 24.00-Inch (609.6 mm) Incoming Cable Section with 24.00-Inch (609.6 mm) Metering Section (for Right End of Lineup)
1
Unit 1C
Unit 1B
Unit 1D
2
Un it 2D
48.00
(1219.2)
Shipping Section 1 - 850 lbs.
24.00
(609.6)
BUS
GND
1.45
(36.8)
30.00
(762.0)
22.85
(580.4)
15.00
(381.0)
4.50
(114.3)
28.00
(711.2)
1.00
(25.4)
30.00
(762.0)
1.00
(25.4)
2.00
(50.8)
24.00
(609.6)
Floor Plan Note D
Top View
24.00
(609.6)
21.00
(533.4)
1.50
(38.1)
MAIN BUS
4.50
(114.3)
19.00
(482.6)
12.00
3.50
PH
A
PH
B C
PH Main
Bus
80.00
2.00
(50.8)
6.70
(170.2)
5.50
(139.7)
1.25
(31.6)
30.00
(762.0)
9.32
(236.7)
2.00
(50.8)
22.00
(558.8)
30.00
5.81
0.90
80.00
(2032.0)
MAIN
BUS
PH
C B
PH
A
PH
3.50
(88.9)
12.00
(304.8)
BUS
GND
1.45
(36.8)
22.85
(580.4)
62.00
(1574.8)
0.90
(22.9)
Top View
Note F
11.50
(292.1)
1.50
(38.1)
24.00
(609.6)
27.50
(698.5)
Continuation of
Bus From Adjacent
Structure
1.25
(31.8)
MAIN BUS
5.50
(139.7)
6.70
(170.9)
30.00
(762.0)
Note A
4.50
(114.3)
24.00
(609.6)
19.00
15.00 4.50
Note F
28.00
1.00
22.00
(558.8)
30.00
1.00
2.00
Floor Plan Note D
(304.8)
(88.9)
(2032.0)
(22.9)
(147.6)
(762)
24.00
(609.6)
(50.8)
(711.2)
(762.0)
(25.4)
(482.6)
(25.4)
(381) (114.3)
30.00
(762.0)
5.50
(139.7)
5.50
(139.7)
10.2-1
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
General Description
043
AMPGARD SC 9000
Adjustable Frequency Drive
AMPGARD SC 9000
General Description
Eatons AMPGARD SC 9000 medium
voltage adjustable frequency drive
(AFD) family provides precise control
and protection of medium voltage
motors and equipment rated 2400V,
3300V and 4160V nominal.
AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD has a
complete offering:
Precise control of medium voltage
motors up to 6000 hp
A smaller footprint, 24-pulse front
end, and integrated assembly direct
coupled through a common power
bus to the entire AMPGARD product
family as Integrated Control-Gear
Fully integrated package with
isolation switch, main contactor,
multi-pulse isolation transformer,
rectier and inverter
Personnel safety: Positive mechanical
isolating switch with visible discon-
nect completely grounds and isolates
the AFD from the line power with a
mechanically driven isolating shutter,
leaving no exposed high voltage.
Medium voltage door is mechanically
key locked closed with the isolation
switch; low voltage section has a
separate door and is segregated
from the medium voltage section.
Ease of installation: Current limiting
fuses, contactor assembly, inverter
assembly, and isolating switch
assembly are easily removed from the
enclosure; line and load terminals are
completely accessible from the front.
Ease of maintenance: All components
are front accessible, facilitating routine
inspection and/or parts replacement.
The low Mean Time To Repair (MTTR)
means a time and cost savings.
Smallest industry footprint: The
SC 9000s specialized design and high
density packaging makes it the small-
est footprint per hp in the industry as a
fully integrated drive. This size benet
ensures installations in space limited
electrical rooms, eliminates the need
for additional cable and conduit instal-
lations, and in some cases, eliminates
the need for additional feeders
required by our competitors.
Clean and quiet: The SC 9000s inte-
grated 24-pulse converter coupled
to a 3-level inverter topology results
in minimum component usage and
ensures compliance with IEEE 519
no matter what the power source is.
Heat pipe technology improves cooling
efciency and allows the SC 9000 to
run at a 75 dB noise level or less,
making it the quietest drive in the
industry. Output lters are required
for non-inverter duty motors with
cable lengths greater than 100 feet
and for inverter duty motors with
cable lengths greater than 300 feet.
See Table 10.2-2 on Page 10.2-22
for detailed output lter application
recommendations. Noise pollution is
minimized with the quiet operation.
Easy AMPGARD integration: Available
as a fully integrated drive, the SC 9000
can be supplied as a stand-alone drive
or directly connected to other AMPGARD
products in a conguration known as
Integrated Control-Gear. This integrated
solution aligns the SC 9000 with a host
of other motor control products, such
as motor starters, load break switches
and main breakers all connected via a
common bus.
Protection through technology: The
encapsulated roll-out inverter employs
an insulation system, which reduces
the potential of environmental
contamination. This modular inverter
design coupled with a spare inverter
option reduces MTTR and results in
maximum uptime.
10.2-2
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Frame Size and Rating
044
AMPGARD SC 9000 Fully Integrated Frame A AFD
(3001150 hp at 4160V)
(300700 hp at 3300V)
(300500 hp at 2400V)
Type SL
Vacuum
Contactor
Assembly
24-Pulse
Isolation
Transformer
Type HLE Current
Limiting Fuses
Isolating Switch
Encapsulated
Roll-Out
Inverter
(in the Rear)
24-Pulse
Rectier
Bridge
DC Link
Pre-Charge
Circuit
Top Entry Control
Conduit Area
Top Entry
HV Conduit
Area
Bottom Entry HV
Conduit Area
Bottom Entry Control
Conduit Area
Line and
Load Cable
Termination
10.2-3
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Layout Dimensions
045
Layout DimensionsFrame A AFD
(3001150 hp at 4160V)
(300700 hp at 3300V)
(300500 hp at 2400V)
Figure 10.2-1. AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD Frame A Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
65.00 (1651.0)
Top View
7.00
(177.8)
F
E
G E
5.50
(139.7
50.00
(1270.0)
23.33
(592.6)
2.00
(50.8)
36.38
(924.1)
Line Terminals Pullbox
Main Bus
5.00
(127.0)
1.60
(40.6)
7.00
(177.8)
7.00
(177.8)
2.00
(50.8)
27.27
(692.7)
Detail Notes:
A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. mounting studs to extend
a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade.
D - 90 door swing requires:
12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure,
24.00 inches (609.6 mm) for 24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure,
30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for 30.00 inch (762.0 mm) wide drive structure,
32.50 inches (825.5 mm) for 65.00 inch (1651.0 mm) wide drive structure.
E - HV conduit space, load.
F - HV conduit space, line only.
G - LV conduit space only.
J - Load terminals located on left-hand side of enclosure.
Y - Tolerances: 0.0 inches (0.0 mm) +0.25 inches (6.35 mm) per structure.
Z - Conduits to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) into structure.
Shipping Section 2
Approx. Weight 6225 lbs (2826 kg)
65.00 (1651.0)
Unit 1D
3 4
1 2
CTB
Window
1
K3
K2
K1
K1
K2
Optional Redundant Blower
MP4000
5
Elevation
View
User
Interface
80.00
(2032.0
12.00
(304.8)
3.50
(88.9)
PH
A
PH
B C
PH
0.90
(22.9)
62.00
(1574.8)
1.85
(47.0)
4.13
(104.9)
18.50
(469.9)
9.00
(228.6)
6.00 (152.4)
62.00
(1574.8)
12.81
(325.4)
2.50
(63.5)
16.90
(429.3)
7.50 (190.5)
24.00
(609.6)
22.49
(571.2)
Right Side View
BUS
MAIN
L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
Optional Redundant Blower
W V U
L3
L2
L1
Line Term
Note J

Recommend
24.00 Inch
(609.6 mm) Clearance
for Blower Removal

Ground Bus
49.00
(1244.6)
3.25
(82.6)
Line Term
Note J
2.50
(63.5)
7.50 (190.5)
2.38
(60.5)
12.75
(323.9)
60.00 Inches (1524.0 mm)
Clear in Front of Drive Unit
for Removal of Drive Inverter
F
E G
Note D
Floor Plan
Note A
Front
29.50
(749.3)
7.00
(177.8)
3.00
(76.2)
60.00
(1524.0)
32.50
(825.5)
1.50
(38.1)
5.00
(127.0)
38.63
(981.2)
4.00
(101.6)
1.38
(35.1)
2.80
(71.1)
21.81
(554.0)
29.80
(756.9)
43.63
(1108.2)
2.69
(68.3)
59.00 (1498.6)
29.30
(744.2)
59.00 (1498.6)
32.50
(825.5)
4.00
(101.6)
2.50
(63.5)
Main Bus End
1200A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph

0.63
(16.0)
C
L

0.562 Dia.
Hole
2.00
(50.8)
Ground Bus End
600A 0.25 x 2.00
3.63 Inches (92.2 mm)
from Each Side of the Structure

Main Bus End
2000A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph

0.50
(12.7)
0.75 (19.1)
0.437 x 0.688 Slot
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
Main Bus End
1000A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph

0.75 (19.1)
0.25
(6.4)
0.25
(6.4)
0.75 (19.1)
0.75 (19.1)
0.437 x 0.688 Slot
0.437 x 0.688 Slot
0.75 (19.1)
0.25
(6.4)
4.00
(101.6)
2.50
(63.5)
0.75 (19.1)
0.50
(12.7)
0.25
(6.4)
10.2-4
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
046
AMPGARD SC 9000 Fully Integrated Frame B AFD
(10002000 hp at 4160V)
(8001500 hp at 3300V)
(6001000 hp at 2400V)
Type SL
Vacuum
Contactor
Assembly
Type HLE Current
Limiting Fuses
Isolating Switch
Encapsulated
Roll-Out
Inverter
Bottom Entry HV
Conduit Area
Conduit Area
Top Entry HV
Conduit Area
Top Entry Control
Conduit Area
Line and
Load Cable
Termination
24-Pulse
Isolation
Transformer
(in the rear)
24-Pulse
Rectier
Bridge
DC Link
Pre-Charge
Circuit
10.2-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Layout Dimensions
047
Layout DimensionsFrame B AFD
(10002000 hp at 4160V)
(8001500 hp at 3300V)
(6001000 hp at 2400V)
Figure 10.2-2. AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD Frame B Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
PH
A
PH
B C
PH
Bus
Main
Shipping
Section 2
Approx. Weight
900 lbs (409 kg)
Shipping Section 1
Approx. Weight
8025 lbs (3643 kg)
PH
A
PH
B C
PH
24.00
(609.6)
3.50
(88.9)
12.20
(309.9)
19.90
(505.5)
60.00
(1524.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
33.50
(850.9)
33.50
(850.9)
30.00
(762.0)
36.00
(914.4)
12.00
(304.8)
6.00
(152.4)
2.80
(71.1)
3.50
(88.9)
3.50
(88.9)
43.00
(1092.2)
43.00
(1092.2)
31.00
(787.4)
2.50
(63.5)
4.75
(120.7)
4.75
(120.7)
2.40
(61.0)
59.00 (1498.6)
65.00 (1651.0) 30.00 (762.0)
50.00
(1270.0)
49.00
(1244.6)
22.49
(571.2)
2.86
(72.6)
0.90
(22.9)
4.13
(104.9)
64.80
(1645.9)
66.00
(1676.4)
80.00
(2032.0)
65.00 (1651.0)
30.00
(762.0)
1.25
(31.8)
7.00
(177.8)
50.00
(1270.0)
50.00
(1270.0)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
1.25
(31.8)
5.00 (127.0)
2.00
(50.8)
28.50
(723.9)
39.27
(997.5)
12.27
(311.7)
5.50
(139.7)
2.00
(50.8)
12.27
(311.7)
5.50
(139.7)
36.00 (914.4)
Optional
6.00
(152.4)
2.80 (71.1)
50.00
(1270.0)
31.88
(809.8)
12.27
(311.7)
5.50
(139.7)
Right Side View
Top View
Main Bus
Ground
Bus
F
G
F
E G

Floor Plan
Note D
Front
Redundant
Blowers
W V U
Load Term
Note J
L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
Unit 1D
2
Unit 2D
Inverter
7
3 4
1 2
CTB
WINDOW
K1
K1
K2
K3
K2 K3
8
MP4000
1
Main Bus
60.00 Inches (1524.0 mm)
Clear in Front of Drive
Unit for Removal of
Drive Inverter
60.00 Inches (1524.0 mm)
Clear in Front of Drive
Unit for Removal of
Drive Inverter

Top View

Optional Redundant Blowers
Main
Bus
Approx. 120.00 Inches
(3048.0 mm) Tall
Redundant
Blowers
Main Bus
Top View
Front
Note A
E
E
Recommend 24.00 Inch
for Blower Removal
Optional With
Redundant
Blowers
Optional With
Redundant Blowers
Converter
Floor Plan
Note D
Floor Plan
Note D
Note A
Note A
2.50
(63.5) Front
25.00
(635.0)
3.00
(76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
Detail Notes:
A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. Mounting studs to
extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm)
above grade.
D - 90door swing requires: 12.00 inches (304.8 mm)
for 12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure,
18.00 inches (457.2 mm) for 18.00 inch (457.2 mm)
wide structure, 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) for
24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure,
wide drive structure, 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for
36.00 inch (914.4 mm) wide structure,
wide structure, 32.50 inches (825.5 mm) for
65.00 inch (1651.0 mm) wide drive structure.
G - LV conduit space only. .
J - 30.00 inch (762.0 mm) inverter load terminals
located on left side of converter.
36.00 inch (914.4 mm) inverter load terminals
located on right side of inverter.
Y - Tolerances: 0.00 inches (0.0 mm)
+0.25 inches (6.35 mm) per structure.
Z - Conduits to extend a maximum of
2.00 inches (50.8 mm) into structure.

Main Bus End
1200A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph

Main Bus End
1000A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph

C
L

Ground Bus End
600A 0.25 x 2.00
3.63 Inches (92.2 mm)
from Each Side of the Structure

Main Bus End
2000A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph

0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75 (19.1)
0.75 (19.1)
3.00
(76.2)
0.25
(6.4)
1.50
(38.1)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75 (19.1)
4.00
(101.6)
2.50
(63.5)
0.75 (19.1)
0.50
(12.7)
0.25
(6.4)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.63
(16.0)
0.562 Dia.
Hole 2.00
(50.8)
0.50
(12.7)
0.25
(6.4)
0.25
(6.4)
4.00
(101.6)
2.50
(63.5)
0.75 (19.1)
0.75 (19.1)
30.00
(762.0)
7.00
(177.8)
38.30
(972.8)
44.20
(1122.7)
36.80
(934.7)
7.00
(177.8)
1.58 (40.1)
1.85
(47.0)
12.00
(304.8)
4.38
(111.3)
4.38
(111.3)
12.00 (304.8)
3.50
(88.9)
28.50
(723.9)
15.50
(393.7)
12.00
(304.8)
10.2-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
048
AMPGARD SC 9000 Fully Integrated Frame C AFD
(22503000 hp at 4160V)
(17502000 hp at 3300V)
(12501750 hp at 2400V)
Note: See Page 10.2-7 for dimensional details.
Type SL
Vacuum
Contactor
Assembly
24-Pulse
Isolation
Transformer
Type HLE Current
Limiting Fuses
Isolating Switch
Encapsulated
Roll-Out
Inverter
DC Link
Pre-Charge Circuit
Top Entry HV
Conduit Area
Top Entry Control
Conduit Area
24-Pulse
Rectier Bridge
Bottom Entry HV
Conduit Area
Conduit Area
Line and
Load Cable
Termination
10.2-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Layout Dimensions
049
Layout DimensionsFrame C AFD
(22503000 hp at 4160V)
(17502000 hp at 3300V)
(12501750 hp at 2400V)
Figure 10.2-3. AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD Frame C Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
5.50
(139.7)
26.70
(678.2)
2.00 (50.8)
5.00
(127.0)
12.23
(310.6)
2.38
(60.5)
3.70
(94.0)
50.00
(1270.0)
2.75
(69.9)
12.00
(304.8)
6.00
(152.4)
16.00
(406.4)

5.75
(146.1)
29.25
(743.0) 16.00
(406.4)
7.00
(177.8)
36.00
(914.4)
50.00
(1270.0)
3.70
(94.0)
7.00
(177.8)
7.00
(177.8)
2.00
(50.8)
50.00
(1270.0)
31.88
(809.8)
5.50
(139.7)
Top View
Main Bus
F
E G
Main Bus
Top View
Top View
E
F
E
65.00 (1651.0)
30.00
(762.0)
Optional 36.00 (914.4)
12.27
(311.7)
3.50
(88.9)
PH
A
PH
B C
PH
0.90
(22.9)
BUS
MAIN
1.85
(47.0)
Shipping
Section 3
30.00 (762.0)
Optional 36.00 (914.4)
Approx. Weight
900 lbs (409 kg)
Shipping Section 2
65.00 (1651.0)
Approx. Weight
9800 lbs (4449 kg)
18.50
(469.9)
24.00
(609.6)
2.86
(72.6)
22.49
(571.2)
50.00
(1270.0)
12.00
(304.8)
80.00
(2032.0)
Right Side View
Unit 2D
2
Unit 3D
Inverter
K4
1
WINDOW
CTB
7
K2 K3
Converter
2 1
4 3
5
Unit 1D
1
Main
Disconnect
K1
K2
K3
K4
K1
WINDOW
CTB1
L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
Redundant
Blowers
Recommend
24.00 (609.6) Clearance
for Blower Removal
Ground
Bus

Shipping
Section 1
36.00 (914.4)
Approx. Weight
1550 lbs (704 kg)
Optional
36.00 (914.4)
3.50
(88.9)
25.00
(635.0)

2.75 (69.9)
5.75
(146.1)
4.00
(101.6)
3.50 (88.9)
43.00
(1092.2)
8.00
(203.2)
59.00 (1498.6)
9.50
(241.3)
35.00
(889.0)
5.00 (127.0)
2.50 (63.5)
12.00
(304.8)
2.80
(71.1)
6.00
(152.4)
60.00
(1524.0)
30.00
(762.0)
7.00
(177.8)
29.00
(736.6)
29.25
(743.0) 16.00
(406.4)
16.00
(406.4)
36.00
(914.4)
32.50
(825.5)
32.50
(825.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
43.00
(1092.2)
7.00
(177.8)
60.00 Inches
(1524.0 mm)
Clear in
Front of Unit
for Removal
of Inverter
Floor Plan
Note D
Front
Note A
E
F
G
E
Note A
Front
Front

Note A
2.50
(63.5)
0.63
(16.0)
CL
0.562 Dia.
Hole
2.00
(50.8)

Ground Bus End
600A 0.25 x 2.00
3.63 Inches from
Each Side of the Structure

0.25
(6.4)
0.50
(12.7)

Main Bus End
2000A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph
0.437 x 0.688
Slot 0.75
(19.1)
0.25
(6.4)
0.50
(12.7)
4.00
(101.6)
0.75
(19.1)
2.50
(63.5)
Main Bus End
1200A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph

0.25
(6.4)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot 0.75
(19.1)
4.00
(101.6)
0.75
(19.1)
2.50
(63.5)
Main Bus End
1000A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph

0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.25
(6.4)
0.75
(19.1)
3.00
(76.2)
0.75
(19.1)
1.50
(38.1)
Detail Notes:
A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. mounting studs to extend
a maximum of 2.00 inches: (50.8 mm) above grade.
D - 90 door swing requires: 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure,
30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for 30.00 inch (762.0 mm) wide drive structure,
36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for 36.00 inch (914.4 mm) wide structure, 40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00 inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure.
J - Load terminals located on right side of inverter.
Optionload terminals located on left side of converter.
10.2-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
050
AMPGARD SC 9000 Fully Integrated Frame D AFD (Single Inverter)
(20002500 hp at 2400V)
Type SL
Vacuum
Contactor
Assembly
Load Cable
Termination
Type HLE
Current
Limiting
Fuses
Isolating Switch
Encapsulated
Roll-Out
Inverter
DC Link
Pre-charge Circuit
Top Entry HV
Conduit Area
Top Entry Control
Conduit Area
24-Pulse
Rectier Bridge
Bottom Entry HV
Conduit Area
Conduit Area
24-Pulse
Isolation
Transformer
(in the rear)
Bottom Load
Conduit Area
Top Load
Conduit Area
10.2-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Layout Dimensions
051
Layout DimensionsFrame D AFD (Single Inverter)
(20002500 hp at 2400V)
Figure 10.2-4. AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD Frame D (Single Inverter) Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Shipping
Section 1
40.00 (1016.0)
Approx. Wt.
2560 lbs (1162 kg)
36.00
(914.4)
76.00
(1930.4)
6.19
(157.2)
1.38
(35.1)
Shipping Section 2
76.00 (1930.4)
Approx. Wt.
16,500 lbs (7491 kg)

Shipping
Section 3
36.00 (914.4)
Approx. Wt.
3775 lbs (1714 kg)
36.00
(914.4)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
36.00
(914.4)
5.00
(127.0)
50.00
(1270.0)
5.50
(139.7)
12.32
(312.9)
76.00
(1930.4)
3.00
(76.2)
2.00 (50.8)
50.00
(1270.0)
40.75
(1035.1)
5.50
(139.7)
12.32
(312.9)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
Main Bus
36.00
(914.4)
12.00
(304.8) 6.00
(152.4)
50.00
(1270.0)
31.88
(809.8)
5.50
(139.7)
12.32
(312.9)
6.00
(152.4)
2.80
(71.1)
12.00
(304.8)
43.00
(1092.2)
3.50
(88.9)
36.00
(914.4)
31.00
(787.4)
3.00 (76.2)
50.00
(1270.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
39.00
(990.6)
1.85
(47.0)
2.75
(69.9)
43.25
(1098.6)
4.15
(105.4
5.00
(127.0)
25.00
(635.0)
25.00
(635.0)
13.00
(330.2)
3.00
(76.2)
6.00 (152.4)
41.42
(1052.1)
30.00
(762.0)
1 2
WINDOW
CTB
2 1
4 3
7
8
K11
K12
K11
K13
K14

Main
Disconnect
Isolation Transformer
and Converter
CTB1
CTB2
K13 K12
K44
Unit 2D
Unit 1D
Main Bus
G

G
60.00 Inches (1524.0 mm)
Clear in Front of Unit for
Removal of Inverter

E
E
3
UNIT 3D
Inverter
K14
Front
38.00
(965.2)
38.00
(965.2)
Front
Detail Notes:
A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. mounting studs to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade.
D - 90 door swing requires: 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for 12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure,
J - Load terminals located on right-hand side of enclosure.

24.00
(609.6)
80.00
(2032.0)
12.00
(304.8)
3.50
(88.9)
0.90
(22.9)
2.86
(72.6)
50.00
(1270.0)
49.00
(1244.6)
38.25
(971.6)
L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
Right Side View
PH
A
PH
B C
PH
BUS
MAIN
For Blower Removal
Ground
Bus
1.85
(47.0)
Note A
41.38
(1051.1)
41.33
(1049.8)
23.00
(584.2)
3.50
(88.9)
12.00
(304.8)
5.00
(127.0)
7.00
(177.8)
18.00
(457.2)
14.00
(355.6)
3.00
(76.2)
6.00
(152.4)
19.63
(498.6)
F
Front
36.00
(914.4)
8.88
(225.6)
1.50
(38.1)
Note A
29.00
(736.6)
CL

Ground Bus End
600A 0.25 x 2.00
3.63 Inches (92.2 mm) from
Each Side of the structure
0.63
(16.0)
0.562 Dia.
Hole
2.00
(50.8)
0.50
(12.7)
0.25
(6.4)
Main Bus End
1200A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph

0.25
(6.4)
0.75 (19.1)
0.75
(19.1)
4.00
(101.6)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
2.50
(63.5)
Main Bus End
2000A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph

0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75
(19.1)
0.50
(12.7)
0.25
(6.4)
4.00
(101.6)
0.75
(19.1)
2.50
(63.5)
Main Bus End
1000A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph

0.25
(6.4)
0.75
(19.1)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75 (19.1)
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
10.2-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
052
AMPGARD SC 9000 Fully Integrated Frame D AFD (Parallel Inverters)
(32504500 hp at 4160V)
(22503000 hp at 3300V)
Type SL
Vacuum
Contactor
Assembly
Load Cable
Termination
Type HLE
Current
Limiting
Fuses
Isolating Switch
Dual
Encapsulated
Roll-Out Inverters
DC Link
Pre-Charge
Circuit
Top Load
Conduit Area
Top Entry Control
Conduit Area
24-Pulse
Rectier
Bridge
Bottom Entry
Control
Conduit Area
24-Pulse
Isolation
Transformer
(in the rear)
Bottom Load
Conduit Area
Secondary
Blower
Balancing
Reactor
10.2-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Layout Dimensions
053
Layout DimensionsFrame D AFD (Parallel Inverters)
(32504500 hp at 4160V)
(22503000 hp at 3300V)
Figure 10.2-5. AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD Frame D (Parallel Inverters) Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
76.00
(1930.4)
3.00
(76.2)
6.19
(157.2)
1.38
(35.1)
50.00
(1270.0)
40.75
(1035.1)
5.50
(139.7)
12.32
(312.9)
2.00 (50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
86.00
(2184.4)
50.00
(1270.0)
30.88
(784.4) 5.50
(139.7)
12.32
(312.9)
14.00
(355.6)
2.11
(53.6)
7.00
(177.8)
2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8)
24.00
(609.6)
1.85
(47.0)
0.90
(22.9)
50.00
(1270.0)
38.25
(971.6)
5.00
(127.0)
Ground
Bus
3.26
(82.8)
50.00
(1270.0)
22.75
(577.9)
Ground
Bus
0.90
(22.9)
30.36
(771.1)
4.38
(111.3)
68.00
(1727.2)
49.00
(1244.6)
49.00
(1244.6)
L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
Right Side View
PH
A
PH
B C
PH
BUS
MAIN
for Blower Removal
G
E
W V U
Load Term
Note J
80.00
(2032.0)
12.00
(304.8)
3.50
(88.9)
PH
A
PH
B C
PH
BUS
MAIN
80.00
(2032.0)
12.00
(304.8)
3.50
(88.9)
20.50
(520.7)
Detail Notes:
A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. Mounting studs to extend a maximum
of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade.
D - 90 door swing requires: 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) for
12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure,
Main Bus End
1000A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph

CL
1 2
WINDOW
CTB
2 1
4 3
7
8
K11
K12
K11
K13
Inverter-2
K14

Main
Disconnect
Isolation Transformer
and Converter
CTB1
CTB2
K13 K12
K44
Unit 2D
Unit 1D
3
Inverter-1
K15 K14
K15
K44
K16
K17
Unit 3D
Shipping
Section 1
40.00 (1016.0)
Approx. Weight
2560 lbs (1162 kg)
36.00
(914.4)
76.00
(1930.4)
Shipping Section 2
76.00 (1930.4)
Approx. Weight
16,500 lbs (7491 kg)

Shipping Section 3
86.00 (2184.4)
Approx. Weight
6800 lbs (3087 kg)
86.00
(2184.4)
38.00
(965.2)
38.00
(965.2)
3.00 (76.2)
50.00
(1270.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
Front 39.00
(990.6)
5.00
(127.0)
13.00
(330.2)
25.00
(635.0)
25.00
(635.0)
4.15
(105.4)
1.85
(47.0)
2.75
(69.9)
43.25
(1098.6)
G
Note A
F
41.38
(1051.1)
41.33
(1049.8)
23.00
(584.2)
3.50
(88.9)
12.00
(304.8)
5.00
(127.0)
7.00
(177.8)
18.00
(457.2)
14.00
(355.6)
3.00
(76.2)
6.00 (152.4)
19.63
(498.6)
Front
36.00
(914.4)
8.88
(225.6)
1.50
(38.1)
Note A
29.00
(736.6)
3.00
(76.2)
5.00
(127.0)
2.00
(50.8)
6.75
(171.5)
14.00
(355.6)
39.00
(990.6)
31.00
(787.4)
3.00
(76.2)
5.00
(127.0)
2.63
(66.8)
31.13
(790.7)
48.12
(1222.2) 15.50
(393.7)
E
Front
Note A
32.50
(825.5)
42.50
(1079.5)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot

0.75 (19.1)
0.25
(6.4)
0.75
(19.1)
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
0.25
(6.4)
Main Bus End
1200A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph
0.75 (19.1)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot 0.75
(19.1)
4.00
(101.6)
2.50
(63.5)
Main Bus End
2000A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75 (19.1)
0.75
(19.1)
4.00
(101.6)
2.50
(63.5)
0.50
(12.7)
0.25
(6.4)

Ground Bus End
600A 0.25 x 2.00
3.63 Inches from Each
Side of the Structure
0.63
(16.0)
0.562 Dia.
Hole
2.00
(50.8)
0.50
(12.7)
0.25
(6.4)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
36.00
(914.4)
5.00
(127.0)
50.00
(1270.0)
5.50
(139.7)
12.32
(312.9)
3.00
(76.2)
6.00 (152.4)
41.42
(1052.1)
Main Bus
10.2-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Frame Size and RatingLayout Dimensions
054
Layout DimensionsFrame E AFD
(50006000 hp at 4160V)
(32504000 hp at 3300V)
Figure 10.2-6. AMPGARD Frame EDimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 10.2-1. AMPGARD Frame EDimensions in Inches (mm)
3300V, 50 Hz.
Output
Voltage
Motor Cabinet Size Redundant Blower
FLA hp Width Height Depth Height
3300
4160
520640
620713
32504000
50006000
222.00 (5638.8)
222.00 (5638.8)
92.00 (2336.8)
92.00 (2336.8)
50.00 (1270.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
12.10 (307.3)
12.10 (307.3)
1
2 3
Window
1 2
3 4
8
Redundant Blowers
K1
Main Disconnect
CTB1
Unit 1D
Isolation
Transformer
and
Converter
Recommend 24.00 Inch (609.6 mm) Clearance
for Blower Removal Typical TT All Units
24.00
(609.6)
92.00
(2336.8)
All Units
80.00
(2032.0)
All Units
CTB2
K2 K3 K4 K5
K3
K1
CTB
Inverter-1 Inverter-2
K6
K4
K33
7
Shipping Section 1
Approx. Weight
(2560 lbs)
36.00
(914.4)
Shipping Section 2
Approx. Weight
(19,500 lbs)
100.00
(2540.0)
Shipping Section 3
Approx. Weight
(6800 lbs)
86.00
(2184.4)
10.2-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Adjustable Frequency Drives Synchronous Transfer Systems
General Description
055
Synchronous Transfer Control with AMPGARD SC 9000
Synchronous Transfer Control System
General Description
The sequence of operation outlined is
of an Adjustable Frequency Drive/Pro-
grammable Logic Controller (AFD/PLC)
synchronous transfer control system.
Included in this system is an AFD per
system, a PLC per system, a bypass
contactor and a motor select contactor
per motor. The AFD output contactor
feeding the AFD bus is an option and
is illustrated for this example.
The basic principle is to adjust the AFD
output voltage, frequency and phase
to match the utility. By matching these
parameters, the system can transfer the
motor to the utility in a bump-less
manner. The AFD and PLC system is
programmed to follow these general
commands.
Start/Stop
Sync Up/Sync Down
Once the system bus is energized, the
AFD and Feeder Bus are energized.
See Figure 10.2-7.
Figure 10.2-7. AFD and Feeder Bus Energized
The Start command will start the
synchronous transfer process. First
the PLC will close the appropriate
motor select contactor and then start
the AFD. The AFD will operate at a
preset speed or a reference speed.
See Figure 10.2-8.
Figure 10.2-8. Synchronous Transfer Process
When the motor is required to transfer
to the utility line, the PLC will send
the Sync Up command to the AFD. The
AFD will adjust the output to match
the line voltage, frequency and phase
angle. Once synchronization is locked,
the bypass and motor select contactor
are closed and opened such that
paralleling is minimized. The output
reactor dampens transient currents.
See Figure 10.2-9.
Figure 10.2-9. Voltage, Frequency and
Phase Angle Synchronization
The AFD is shut down and waits for
another Start command for the next
motor. The rst motor is running on
bypass. See Figure 10.2-10.
Figure 10.2-10. AFD Shut Down and Waiting
If the PLC receives a command to sync
down, the PLC will start the AFD and
close the motor select contactor; how-
ever, the AFD output contactor does
not close initially. See Figure 10.2-11.
Figure 10.2-11. PLC Receives Command to
Sync Down
The AFD output will adjust to match
the utility voltage, frequency and
phase. Once these parameters are
locked in, the AFD output contactor
will close and the bypass contactor
will open such that paralleling is mini-
mized. The output reactor will dampen
transient currents. See Figure 10.2-12.
Figure 10.2-12. AFD Adjusts to Match the
Utility Voltage, Frequency and Phase
The AFD will operate at a set speed
point or follow a reference speed.
See Figure 10.2-13.
Figure 10.2-13. AFD Operating Speed
These sequences can be commanded
for any of the motors (15) illustrated
and are not limited to just ve motors
in a system; however, only one motor
at a time can be on the AFD. Each
system can be congured to start any
number of motors, keeping in mind
equipment size and layout.
4160V, 60 Hz, Line
AFD Bus
4160V, 60 Hz, Line
AFD Bus
4160V, 60 Hz, Line
AFD Bus
4160V, 60 Hz, Line
AFD Bus
4160V, 60 Hz, Line
AFD Bus
4160V, 60 Hz, Line
AFD Bus
4160V, 60 Hz, Line
AFD Bus
10.2-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Adjustable Frequency Drives Synchronous Transfer Systems
Layout Dimensions
056
Layout DimensionsSynchronous Transfer Systems
Figure 10.2-14. AMPGARD SC 9000 Synchronous Transfer System with Five MV Starters (For Reference Only)
Unit
6B
Unit
6D
MS D
Unit 3D
Unit 3D
Drive Output
K4
K5
Unit
7B
Unit
7D
Unit
8B
Unit
8D
Unit
9B
Unit
9D
Unit
10B
Unit
10D
MS MS
BP
MS MS
Output Filter
Unit 5B
3 4 5
36.00
(914.4)
76.00
(1930.4)
Shipping Section 2
Approx. Weight
(4725 lbs)
72.00
(1828.8)
Shipping Section 3
Approx. Weight
(3600 lbs)
Trip PB
6
Unit 7D
7
A3 Motor Select
8
A4 Motor Select
9
Trip PB
10
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
Shipping Section 4
Approx. Weight
(4700 lbs)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
Shipping Section 5
Approx. Weight
(4700 lbs)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Unit 6B Unit 7B Unit 8B
A3 Motor Bypass
Door
Unit 9B
A4 Motor Bypass
Unit 10B
VFD Bus Main Bus
Output Filter
1
Unit 2D
K2 K3
CTB
Inverter
SC 9000
Shipping Section 1
Approx. Weight
(9325 lbs)
65.00
(1651.0)
2
36.00
(914.4)
Door Door Door Door
Mech Unlatch Mech Unlatch Mech Unlatch Mech Unlatch Mech Unlatch
4.00
(101.6)
65.00
(1651.0)
Unit 1D Unit 2D
24 Pulse
XFMR
Converter Inverter
Unit 5D
10.2-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Adjustable Frequency Drives 15 kV Input Voltage
Layout Dimensions
057
Layout Dimensions15 kV Input Voltage
Figure 10.2-15. AMPGARD SC 9000 Frame D 4160V with High Voltage Input
Adjustable Frequency Drives With High Voltage Input
The fully integrated AMPGARD SC 9000
can be designed to receive input
voltages from 2.4 to 13.8 kV, with
output voltages of 2400V, 3300V and
4160V, with 50 or 60 Hz available.
Voltages above 6.9 kV will require an
additional 72-inch (1828.8 mm) wide
structure to accommodate a 95 kV BIL
incoming line and a 15 kV input
contactor. Please consult the factory
for drive dimensions and incoming
line section requirements.
24.00
(609.6)
1
Unit 1D
2
Unit 2D
1 2
K1
Contactor Incoming Line
K2
K1
K3
K4
4 3
Inverter-1
Window
CTB
2 1
4 3
7
8
Inverter-2 Isolation Transformer Converter
Redundant Blowers
CTB2
K6 K5 K3 K2
K5
K4
K6
Unit 4D Unit 3D

MP4000
Recommend 24.00 inch
for Blower Removal
TypicalAll Units

0.75
(19.1)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
Main Bus End
1000A
0.25 x 3.00 1/ph

C
L
Detail Notes:
A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. Mounting studs to extend a maximum
of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade.
12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure, 18.00 inches (457.2 mm)
for 18.00 inch (457.2 mm) wide structure, 24.00 inches (609.6 mm)
for 24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure, 30.00 inches (762.0 mm)
for 30.00 inch (762.0 mm) wide drive structure,
40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00 inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure.
J - Load terminals located on right side of inverter.
Optionload terminals located on left side of converter.

Shipping Section 1
Approx. Weight (4500 lbs)
36.00
(914.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
36.00
(914.4)
Shipping Section 2
Approx. Weight (17,925 lbs)
100.00
(2540.0)
Shipping Section 3
Approx. Weight (6800 lbs)
86.00
(2184.4)
0.25
(6.4)
3.00
(76.2)
0.75
(19.1)
1.50
(38.1)

0.75
(19.1)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
Main Bus End
1200A
0.25 x 4.00 1/ph

0.25
(6.4)
4.00
(101.6)
0.75
(19.1)
2.50
(63.5)

0.75
(19.1)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
Main Bus End
2000A
0.25 x 4.00 2/ph

0.25
(6.4)
4.00
(101.6)
0.75
(19.1)
2.50
(63.5)
0.50
(12.7)
Ground Bus End
600A 0.25 x 2.00
3.63 Inches (92.2 mm) from
Each Side of the Structure

0.63
(16.0)
0.25
(6.4)
2.00
(50.8)
0.50
(12.7)
0.562 Dia.
Hole
Kirk Key Interlock
Description
K1 Drive must be off. Main contactor must be open,
ISW must be open to release K1. K1 is released
when K2, K3, K4 are returned to transfer block.
K2, K3 Can only be released by K1. K2, K3 are used to open
the converter doors on Unit 7D.
K4 Can only be released by K1. K4 is used to open the
second transfer block on Unit 8D.
K5, K6 Can only be released by K4. K5, K6 are used to open
the inverter doors on Unit 8D.
10.2-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Adjustable Frequency Drives Integrated VCPW Main Breaker
Layout Dimensions
058
Layout DimensionsIntegrated VCPW Main Breaker
Figure 10.2-16. AMPGARD Integrated Control-Gear with Main Breaker Dimensions(See Page 10.1-6 for Information on Main Bus. Refer to Eaton
for Larger hp Layouts and Detailed Assembly Dimensions.)
Note: For exact conduit locations and descriptions, please see Page 10.2-5.
201.00 (5105.4)
Overall
3 4
1 2
Ctb
Window
Unit 4D
4
Window
5
Unit 5D
Inverter
8
3
S
p
a
c
e
r
5
6
4 3
1
1 2
MP3000
Unit 7D
Unit 7D
7
S
p
a
c
e
r
Sw
Cs
Fp4000 1 2
Unit 2C
Unit 2B
Unit 2F
2
Unit 1B
Unit 1C
Unit 1F
1
Frame B SC 9000 Medium Voltage Drive
Main Breaker, Output Contactor with Bypass
Converter
Loc/rem
Reset Local
Enter
Start
Stop
Fault Remote
Floor Plan
Top View
Elevation View
Approx. Weight
1800 lbs (817 kg)
30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
65.00 (1651.0)
26.00
(660.4)
4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
30.00
(762.0)
50.00
(1270.0)
61.12
(1552.4)
Shipping
Section 3
40.00 (1016.0)
Approx. Weight
900 lbs (409 kg)
Shipping
Section 3
30.00 (762.0)
Approx. Weight
8025 lbs (3643 kg)
Shipping
Section 2
65.00 (1651.0)
Approx. Weight
8025 lbs (3643 kg)
Shipping
Section 2
66.00 (1676.4)
Main Breaker
Note: See Page 10.1-25 for details.
Note: See Page 10.1-15 and Page 10.1-26 for details.
10.2-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Adjustable Frequency Drives Technical Data
Technical Data
059
Typical Schematic
Figure 10.2-17. Typical Schematic for AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD
S
L
O
W
B
L
O
W
6
A
M
P
1
H
1
1
H
2
13
M
A
I
N
B
L
O
W
E
R
S
1
H
3
M
S
1
5
246
1
H
3
1
1
H
2
1
1
H
1
1
M
B
1
M
O
V
1
-3
B
R
N
B
L
U
B
L
K
P
9
/J9
12
IO
1
7
-1-2
X
1
1
X
2
1
X
3
1
FB-2
FB-3
FB-1
G
N
D
G
R
N
P
H
A
S
E
H
3
3
H
2
2
H
1
1
5 4 3
X
3
1
X
2
1
X
1
1
M
O
V
1
3
-1
5
5
5
K C
P
T
X
2
X
1
P
F
1
A
M
PV
A
H
1
H
2
X
3
X
2
X
0
X
0
X
0
H
3
H
1
H
3
H
2
H
1
H
2
X
1
T
2
C
M
A
IN
F
U
S
E
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
O
R
M
A
IN
MMM
A
B
L
1
L
2
IS
W
L
3
G
N
D
H
Z
V
A
C
6
0
4
1
6
0
1
L
1
1
L
2
1
L
3
IS
O
L
A
T
IO
N
S
W
IT
C
H
I
N
T
E
G
R
A
T
E
D

S
C
9
0
0
0

A
F
D
I
N
T
E
G
R
A
T
E
D

S
C
9
0
0
0

A
F
D
4
1
6
0
/1
2
0
V
U V W
G
G
N
D
2
L
A
1
L
A
3
L
A
C O N T R O L
2
4
P
U
L
S
E
IN
T
E
G
R
A
T
E
D

C O N V E R T E R
IN
P
U
T
IS
O
L
A
T
IO
N
I N V E R T E R
N
E
G
N
E
U
T
P
O
S
S
E
E
A
S
M
V
N
E
W
A
S
0
4
F
O
R
D
E
T
A
IL
S
R S T
G
N
D
5
K
V
A
2
L
1
2
L
2
2
L
3
T R A N S F O R M E R
T
1
2
4
P
R
IN
V
G
N
D
X
0
U V W
2
L
1
2
L
2
2
L
3
H
1
H
2
H
3
D
M
C
R
M
P
2
M
P
3
D
R
IV
E
M
O
T
O
R
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
R
A
C
K
G
N
D
T
O
D
R
IV
E

O
U
T
P
U
T

C
O
N
T
A
C
T
O
R
4
X
A
M
P
1
C
B
4
5
3
X
2
X
SU
P
P
5
X
3
0
A
M
P
S
F
3
X
2
S
F
4
1
B
R
C
P
T
G
N
D
1
2
X
1
5
A
M
P
S
F
4
1
P
L
U
G
1
2
0
V
1
5
A
M
P
S
F
1
3
X
IO
1
8
IS
W
2
1
3
4
6 5
E
P
C
P
X
6
5
P
X
1
2
D
C
B
U
S
P
R
E
C
H
A
R
G
E
2
2
2
1
3
2
3
1
IS
O
A
1
S
P
A
R
E
M
A
IN
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
O
R
"R
U
N
" C
O
N
T
A
C
T
S
IO
9
IO
8
IO
9
A
U
X
6
A
U
X
4
A
U
X
5P
R
O
G
R
A
M
M
A
B
L
E
D
R
IV
E
A
U
X
IL
IA
R
Y
C
O
N
T
A
C
T
S
IO
8
A
U
X
3
S
M
P
D
R
IV
E
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
M
P
D
R
IV
E
IN
P
U
T
IS
W
X
IS
W
X
IS
2
IS
W
IS
1
X
1
X
2
IS
W
X
IS
W
X
1
R
C
P
T
IS
6
IS
4
5
X
X
2
5
X
1
X
M
A
X
4
9
M
A
X
M
A
X
5
0
5
5
5
4
5
3
5
6
M
A
X
5
2
5
1
4
1
4
0
4
2
3
8
3
7
3
9
3
2
3
1
3
3
3
2
3
1
3
3
1
1
1
3
2
7
/4
7
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
4
2
3
2
4
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
4
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
V
C
V
B
V
A
V
C
V
B
V
A
V
B
V
A
X
3
1
X
2
1
X
1
1
X
2
X
1
T
X
T
Y
P
E
L
IG
H
T
C
U
S
T
O
M
E
R
C
O
N
N
.
IN
T
E
R
N
A
L
T
E
R
M
. B
L
K
(
S
)

T
E
R
M
. B
L
K
. F
O
R
R
E
M
O
T
E
D
E
V
IC
E
= = = =
*
T
X
D
IN
5
L
o
u
t-
L
o
u
t+
D
IN
6
1
9
1
8
1
7
C
M
B
1
6
1
5
D
IN
4
-D
IN
6
C
O
M
M
O
N
D
X
6
BC A
2
4
V
o
u
t
D
IN
4
D
IN
3
D
IN
2
+
1
0
V
U
in
+
2
4
V
o
u
t
5
L
in
-
1
2
1
3
1
4
G
N
D
1
1
1
0
C
M
A
9 8
D
IN
1
67
G
N
D
A
9
4 3
L
in
+
G
N
D
2 1
C
F
O
R
W
A
R
D
S
T
A
R
T
/S
T
O
P
F
A
U
L
T
R
E
S
E
T
D
IN
1
-D
IN
3
C
O
M
M
O
N
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
V
O
L
T
A
G
E
O
U
T
P
U
T

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
V
O
L
T
A
G
E
O
U
T
P
U
T
I/O
G
R
O
U
N
D
I/O
G
R
O
U
N
D
X
3
D
I/O
G
R
O
U
N
D
O
P
T
I
O
N

C
A
R
D
C
X
2
B A D
X
1
B A
E
X
T
E
R
N
A
L
F
A
U
L
T
R
U
N
E
N
A
B
L
E
J
O
G
G
IN
G
S
P
E
E
D
S
E
L
E
C
T
IO
N
R
E
M
O
T
E
M
O
D
E
(0
-1
0
V
D
C
) A
N
A
L
O
G
IN
P
U
T
R
E
F
E
R
E
N
C
E
O
U
T
P
U
T
I/O
G
R
O
U
N
D
(0
-2
0
m
A
) A
N
A
L
O
G
IN
P
U
T
A
N
A
L
O
G
O
U
T
P
U
T
C
O
M
M
O
N
O
P
T

A
9
IS
W
X
S
L
O
T

A
10.2-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Adjustable Frequency Drives Technical Data
Technical Data
060
Figure 10.2-18. Typical Schematic for 24-Pulse Transformer, Rectier and Inverter
G
N
D
T
1
(N
E
G
)
(N
E
U
T
)
(P
O
S
)
2
4
P
R
D 1
D 2
D 3
F
1
F
2
F
3
F
6
F
5
F
4
F
9
F
8
F
7
F
1
2
F
1
1
F
1
0
D
IS
C
H
A
R
G
E
R
E
S
IS
T
O
R
S
2
4
P
U
L
S
E
R
E
C
T
IF
IE
R
D 6
D 5
D 4
D 9
D 8
D 7
D 1 2
D 1 1
D 1 0
R
3
R
4
R
2
R
1
(-)
N
(+
)
4
5
0
A
M
P
T
Y
P
IC
A
L
D
C

L
I
N
K
1
R
1
1
S
1
1
T
1
2
R
1
2
T
1
2
S
1
3
R
1
3
T
1
3
S
1
4
R
1
4
T
1
4
S
1
D
1
-6
D
7
-1
2
P
O
S
N
E
U
T
N
E
G
W V U
W
1
C
T
V
1
C
T
U
1
C
T
R E D
W H I T E
B L A C K
+
M
-
B L A C K
M
W H I T E
R E D
-
+
+
-
R E D
W H I T E
M
B L A C K
W V U
W
P
L D
D
5
U
P
U
V
P
U
V
P
L
U
P
L
D
D
1
D
D
3
C
2
C
1
I
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
Q
1
Q
5
Q
2
Q
6
Q
1
0
5
7
9
CGE
4
6
8
W
P
U
Q
9
E G C
8
6
4 5
7
9
E G C
8
6
4 5
7
9
E G C
8
6
4 5
7
9
9
7
54
6
8
CGE
9
7
54
6
8
CGE
Q
4
Q
8
U
N
L
V
N
L
E G C
8
6
4 5
7
9
E G C
8
6
4 5
7
9
D
D
6
D
D
4
D
D
2
U
N
U
V
N
U
Q
7
Q
3
9
7
54
6
8
CGE
9
7
54
6
8
CGE
Q
1
2
Q
1
1
W
N
L
9
7
54
6
8
CGE
W
N
U
E G C
8
6
4 5
7
9
J
8
1
2
P
H
A
S
E
J
6
1
2
P
H
A
S
E
P
H
A
S
E
2
1
J
4
W
I
G
B
T
V
C
1
, C
2

P
A
R
T
O
F
IN
V
E
R
T
E
R
B
O
L
T
E
D
IN
P
L
A
C
E

2
L
2
2
L
1
2
L
3
H
3
H
2
H
1
A
T
IN
C
O
M
IN
G
F
IL
T
E
R
R
T
D
IO
1
2
[A
]
R
T
D
IIO
1
2
[B
]
R
D
T
O
R
T
D
R
T
D
I - A
M
B
IE
N
T
IN
S
ID
E
A
B
O
V
E
T
R
A
N
S
F
O
R
M
E
R
R
T
D
O
- A
M
B
IE
N
T
O
U
T
S
ID
E
R
T
D
T
- T
E
M
P
E
R
A
T
U
R
E
R
T
D
R
T
D
T
IO
1
3
[A
]
O
N
T
O
P
O
F
X
F
M
R
H
0
R
T
D
R
T
D
5
R
T
D
R
T
D
6
R
T
D
R
T
D
7
P
O
S
P
F
3
2
A
M
P
N
E
G
D
C
B
U
S
- E
L
E
C
T
R
IC

E
P
C
N
E
G
A
T
IV
E
V
T
N
P
O
S
IT
IV
E
V
T
P
(-
)
N
(+
)
T
S
T
S
L
E
M
V
O
L
T
A
G
E
S
E
N
S
O
R
S
-H
T
+
H
T
-H
T
+
H
T
+
1
5
-V
c
0
V
M +
1
5
0
V
-V
c
M
BWR BBBWR
G
N
D
G
N
D
1 2 43 65 2 4
D
M
C
R
M
A
S
T
E
R
IN
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
C
A
R
D
R
E
D
B
L
K
R
E
D
B
L
K
R
E
D
B
L
K
U
R
T
D
V
R
T
D
W
R
T
D
U
R
T
D
V
R
T
D
W
R
T
D
M P 1M P 2
78
0
v
0
v
+
1
5
V
N
V
T
P
+
1
5
V
-1
5
V
-1
5
V
N
V
T
N
R
6
R
5
D
M
C
R
M
P
3
M
A
S
T
E
R
IN
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
C
A
R
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
V
W
U
R E D
G R N
B L K
R E D
G R N
B L K
R E D
G R N
B L K
G
N
D
G
N
D
G
N
D
R
1
T
1
R
1
S
2
T
2
R
2
S
3
T
3
R
3
T
4
S
4
R
4
9 4 3 6 5 8 7 2 11
0
S
L
A
V
E
IN
T
E
R
F
A
C
E
C
A
R
D
S
P
1
2
4
P
U
L
S
E
R
E
C
T
IF
IE
R
I
N
V
D
M
C
R
P
F
4
2
A
M
P
A
S
S
E
M
B
L
Y
P
R
E
-
C
H
A
R
G
E
P
R
E
-
C
H
A
R
G
E
IO
1
3
[B
]
IO
1
4
[A
]
IO
1
4
[B
]
+
2
2
.
5
-
7
.
5
+
7
.
5
-
2
2
.
5
IO
1
1
B L K
W H T
R E D
B L K
B R N
B L U
A
IR
F
LO
W
S
E
N
S
O
R

#
1
M
A
IN
P - J
A
F
1
M
B L K
W H T
R E D
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
1
4
2
4
1
4
1
3 1
1
2
1
2
3
2
4
1
1
1
2
1
42
1
2
3
2
4
1
1
1
4
1
2
12 2 1 2 1
T
X

T
Y
P
E

L
I
G
H
T
C
U
S
T
O
M
E
R

C
O
N
N
.
I
N
T
E
R
N
A
L
T
E
R
M
.

B
L
K
(
S
)

T
E
R
M
.

B
L
K
.

F
O
R
R
E
M
O
T
E

D
E
V
I
C
E

=

=

=
=
*
T
X
10.2-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Adjustable Frequency Drives Personnel Safety Features
General Description
061
Personnel Safety Features
Interlocks
Interlocking on AMPGARD SC 9000
AFD includes:
Isolating switch mechanism locks
the medium voltage door closed
when the switch is in the ON
position
Standard key interlocks on all
medium voltage doors
When door is open, interlock
prevents operating handle from
being moved inadvertently to
ON position
When contactor is energized,
isolating switch cannot be opened
or closed
Additional Safety Features
Provision for a padlock on the isolat-
ing switch handle in OFF position
Shutter barrier between line termi-
nals and isolation switch stabs is
mechanically driven
Distinctive marking on back of
switch assembly appears when
shutter barrier is in position and
starter is completely isolated from
the line
Grounding clips provide a positive
grounding of the SC 9000 AFD and
main fuses when the isolating
switch is opened
High and low voltage circuits are
compartmentalized and isolated
from each other
The drawout isolation switch is eas-
ily removed by loosening two bolts
in the back of the switch. The shutter
remains in place when the switch is
withdrawn
Grounding device is provided for
shorting the DC bus to ground
before entering the medium voltage
compartments
See Page 10.1-2 for details on the
Mechanical Non-Loadbreak Isolating
Switch.
Shutter Mechanism and Finger Barrier Isolation of Incoming Line Bus
(Shown with Removable Portion of Isolation Switch Removed)
Isolation Switch
Operating Shaft
Mechanical
Interlock with
Contactor
Isolation Switch
Door Locking
Mechanism
Removable Cover Allows
Access to Bolted Line Side
Connections
Shutter Operated by Stab
Motion when Isolation
Switch is in Position
Distinctive Marking
when Shutter is in
Closed Position
Motion of Shutter
10.2-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Adjustable Frequency Drives Component Details
General Description
062
Modular Roll-in/Roll-out
Stab-in Three-Phase Inverter
Plug-n-Play 2500 hp Three-Phase Inverter
General Description
The roll-out three-phase inverter
module employs an insulation and
buswork system to obtain the highest
power density rating in the market.
Heat pipe technology is used to
cool the active power components
in the inverter.
Figure 10.2-19. Heat Pipe Thermal
Management System
This method of heat removal from
the inverter is up to 10 times more
efcient than traditional air-cooling
methods, resulting in less required
airow for quieter and more efcient
operation. The thermal management
system has been subjected to temper-
atures of 50C to model cold weather
transport without the rupture of any
heat pipes. It is also important to note
that thermal management performance
was unaffected by the extreme
cold storage.
Figure 10.2-20. Heat Pipe Construction
This cooling methodology and the
encapsulation of the medium voltage
components result in a harsh-environ-
ment inverter that protects the active
power devices and circuit boards from
the environment and airborne contam-
inants eliminating potential causes of
failures. The encapsulation system
also protects other components from
ying debris and collateral damage in
the event of a device failure.
In the event of a failure, the modular
roll-in/roll-out design of the inverter
will minimize downtime. In traditional
medium voltage drives, only the device
that fails is replaced. This can result in
future downtime due to latent failures
of other devices that were damaged in
the original incident. The SC 9000 uses
an inverter replacement system that
minimizes mean-time-to-repair (MTTR)
and is designed exclusively for the
purposes of inverter module exchange.
The system removes the existing
inverter safely and effectively and then
allows for the insertion of a replace-
ment inverter that is on-site or shipped
from the factory where spare inverters
are stocked.
Inverter Replacement System
10.2-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
General Description
063
Type SL Vacuum Contactor
Stab-in with Wheels, Fuses,
and Line and Load Fingers
400A Stab-In Contactor
and Fuse Assembly
General Description
400A Vacuum Contactors
A stab-in version of the SL Contactor
is standard. The stab-in contactor is
mounted on wheels and rolls into the
AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD structure.
Contactor line and load ngers engage
cell-mounted stabs as the contactor
is inserted into the SC 9000 AFD
incoming cell. The contactor is held
in position by a bolt and bracket com-
bination. It can be easily withdrawn
from the SC 9000 AFD incoming cell
by removing the bolt holding the
contactor against the bracket and
disconnecting the isolation switch
interlock. The contactor can be
removed from the SC 9000 AFD
after disconnecting the medium
voltage cables going to the control
transformer.
800A Vacuum Contactors
The 800A SL Contactor is available in
the SC 9000 Frame D AFD and
is rated at 720A enclosed.
The 800A contactor is also stab-in. The
800A contactor is mounted on wheels
and has similar features to the stab-in
400A contactor.
Stab-In Contactor Mechanical
Interlock and Fingers
AMPGARD SC 9000 AFDs use Eatons
Type HLE power fuses with special
time/current characteristics. The fuse
is coordinated with the contactor to
provide maximum motor/transformer
utilization and protection. The standard
mounting method for power fuses is
bolted onto the contactor assembly.
Interruption is accomplished without
expulsion of gases, noise or moving
parts. Type HLE fuses are mounted in
a horizontal position. When a fault has
been cleared, a plastic indicator in the
front of the fuse, normally depressed,
pops up to give visible blown fuse
indication.
The control circuit primary fuses are
also current limiting.
Blown Fuse Indicating Device
See Page 10.1-4 for detailed informa-
tion on current limiting fuses.
See Page 10.1-21 for detailed informa-
tion on contactor-fuse coordination.
Isolated Low Voltage Control
The low voltage door has four cutouts
as standard.
AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD Low Voltage
Door Closed
The Device Panel and optional Eaton
MP Series Motor Protection Relays t
in the same size low voltage door cut-
out. The standard SC 9000 keypad can
be removed for plug-in of a laptop via
a serial connection. A standard view-
ing window allows visual verication
of the AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD status.
The low voltage control panel is
behind the low voltage door and is
completely isolated from the medium
voltage compartment. The medium
voltage door is locked closed and
interlocked with the isolation switch.
Mechanical
Interlock with
Isolation Switch
Roll-Out
Wheels
Self-Aligning
Contactor Line
and Load
Fingers
Fuse Fault
Indicator
SC 9000
Keypad
Control Rack
Viewing Window
Indicating
Lights and
Pushbuttons
External Motor
Protection Relay
(optional)
1/4 Turn Door
Latch Top and
Bottom
10.2-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
General Description
064
Pre-Charge Circuit
SC 9000 Pre-Charge Circuit
Unlike other pre-charge methods, the
innovative pre-charge circuit in the
AMPGARD SC 9000 protects the trans-
former, rectier and DC bus components
from high in-rush currents. The design
uses the control power circuit for DC
link capacitor charging. This feature
eliminates the risk of component
or transformer failure during the
pre-charge cycle and lengthens the
life of the affected components.
UL and CSA Certication
AMPGARD SC 9000 AFDs are
designed, assembled and tested to
meet all applicable standards: NEMA
ICS6, NEMA ICS7, IEEE 519, IEEE 1100,
UL 347 and CSA C22.2. The major
components (contactor, isolating
switch, fuses, transformer and inverter
active devices) are UL recognized.
UL or CSA labeling of a specic AFD
requires review to ensure that all
requested modications and auxiliary
devices meet the appropriate standards.
Refer to factory when specied.
Seismic Qualication
SC 9000 Options
Integrated Control-Gear Under One Main
Bus Options
AMPGARD main/feeder breaker
MEF main/feeder breaker
VCPW main/feeder breaker
Incoming line section
Load break switches
Output contactor
Full voltage non-reversing
contactor bypass
Reduced voltage solid-state bypass
Reduced voltage auto-
transformer bypass
Reduced voltage primary
reactor bypass
Full voltage non-reversing
contactor additional starters
Reduced voltage solid-state
additional starters
Reduced voltage auto-transformer
additional starters
Synchronous starters
Classic AMPGARD transition
Enclosure Options
NEMA 1 Gasketed is standard and
the only enclosure option at this time.
If an outdoor installation is required,
Eaton can supply the AFDs and other
electrical equipment in a modular
building called an Integrated Power
Assembly (see Tab 38).
Monitoring and Protection Options
Powerware UPS control power
backup (see Tab 33, Section 33.2)
Eaton MP-3000 motor protection relay
with RTDs (see Tab 4, Section 4.2)
Eaton MP-4000 motor protection relay
with RTDs (see Tab 4, Section 4.2)
Eaton Power Xpert meters
(see Tab 3)
Eaton EMR-4000 motor protection
relays with RTDs
Eaton EMR-5000 motor protection
relays with RTDs
Redundant fans with automatic
switchover
Communications Options
Johnson Controls N2
Modbus TCP
Modbus
PROFIBUS
DP
DeviceNet
BACnet
CANopen
LonWorks
EtherNet/IP
Output Filters
Drive output lters are recommended
for longer cable lengths between the
drive and motor.
Table 10.2-2. Recommended Output
Filter Application
See Page 10.2-23 for dimensional
details.
Motor Type Motor Lead Length (ft)
dv/dt Filter Sine Filter
Non-inverter
duty rated
Over 100 ft Over 500 ft
Inverter
duty rated
Over 300 ft Over 1000 ft
10.2-23
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Adjustable Frequency Drives Optional Output Filters and Reactors
Layout Dimensions
065
Layout Dimensions
Figure 10.2-21. AMPGARD SC 9000 AFD Output Filter Maximum Dimensions and Incoming Line LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
50.00
(1270.0)
12.27
(311.7)
23.80
(604.5)
5.50
(139.7)
36.00
(914.4)
31.38
(797.1)
2.74
(69.6)
12.00
(304.8)
6.00
(152.4)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
40.00
(1016.0)
50.00
(1270.0)
23.33
(592.6)
32.47
(824.7)
26.67
(677.4)
2.63
(66.8)
7.00
(177.8)
5.50
(139.7)
50.00
(1270.0)
49.00
(1244.6)
22.85
(580.4)
80.00
(2032.0)
12.00
(304.8)
3.50
(88.9)
46.88
(1190.8)
0.90
(22.9)
4.38
(111.3)
6.75
(171.5)
2.50
(63.5)
31.00
(787.4)
22.00
(558.8)
26.63
(676.4)
14.00
(355.6)
2
Unit 2D
Output Reactor
K16
W V U
Load Term
Note J

E
E
Ground Bus

PH
A
PH
B C
PH
BUS
MAIN
1
Unit 1D
K4
6
Top View
E
Top View
Sine Filter DVDT Filter
Sine Filter DVDT Filter
1.45
(36.8)
Front
2.50
(63.5)
35.00
(889.0)
Front
2.25
(57.2)
7.00
(177.8)
Contactor/Output Filter
Shipping Section 1
1875 lbs (851 kg)
Detail Notes:
A - 0.875 dia. typ. 4 holes. Mounting studs to extend
a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) above grade.
12.00 inch (304.8 mm) wide structure, 18.00 inches (457.2 mm)
for 18.00 inch (457.2 mm) wide structure,
structure, 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for 36.00 inch (914.4 mm)
wide structure, 40.00 inches (1016.0 mm) for 40.00 inch (1016.0 mm)
wide structure, 32.50 inches (825.5 mm) for 65.00 inch (1651.0 mm)
wide drive structure.
Y - Tolerances: 0.00 inches (0.0 mm) +0.25 inches (6.35 mm)
per structure.
Z - Conduits to extend a maximum of 2.00 inches (50.8 mm)
into structure.
36.00
(914.4)
Note A
43.00
(1092.2)
3.00
(76.2)
2.40
(61.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
Note A
40.00
(1016.0)
Main Bus End
1000A 0.25 x 3.00 1/ph

0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75 (19.1)
0.25
(6.4)
0.75
(19.1)
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
Main Bus End
1200A 0.25 x 4.00 1/ph

0.25
(6.4)
0.75
(19.1)
4.00
(101.6)
2.50
(63.5)
0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75 (19.1)
C
L

Ground Bus End
600A 0.25 x 2.00
3.63 Inches from Each Side
of the Structure

0.562 Dia.
Hole
0.63
(16.0) 0.25
(6.4)
2.00
(50.8)
0.50
(12.7)
Main Bus End
2000A 0.25 x 4.00 2/ph

0.437 x 0.688
Slot
0.75 (19.1)
0.25
(6.4)
0.75
(19.1)
4.00
(101.6)
2.50
(63.5)
0.50
(12.7)
21.50
(546.1)
36.00
(914.4)
Shipping Section 2
2560 lbs (1162 kg)
40.00
(1016.0)
Varies for sine (depends on option), 46.88 (1190.8) standard, dv/dt 57.88 (1470.2).
10.92 (277.4) sine.
9.00 for dv/dt.
10.2-24
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Adjustable Frequency Drives Technical Data and Ratings
Technical Data
066
Technical Data
Table 10.2-3. Design Specications
Reects conservative estimate. Actual amounts may vary.

Description NEMA IEC
Power rating 3006000 hp 1504313 kW
Motor type Induction and synchronous Induction
Input voltage rating 2400V15 kV 2400/3300/4160V
Input voltage tolerance 10% of nominal 10% of nominal
Power loss ride-through 5 cycles (Std.) 5 cycles (std.)
Input protection Metal oxide varistor Metal oxide varistor
Input frequency 50/60 Hz, 5% 60 Hz, 5%
Input power circuit protection Contactor/fuses Contactor/fuses
Input impedance device Isolation transformer Isolation transformer
Output voltage 02400V
03300V
04160V
02400V
04160V
Inverter design PWM PWM
Inverter switch IGBT IGBT
Enclosure NEMA 1 IP20
Ambient temperature 0 to 40C 0 to 40C
Storage and transport temperature 40 to 70C 40 to 70C
Relative humidity 95% noncondensing 95% noncondensing
Altitude (without derating) 03300 ft 01000 m
Seismic 2006 IBC 2006 IBC
Standards UL, IEEE, CSA IEC
Cooling Air-cooling advanced heat pipe technology Air-cooling advanced heat pipe technology
Average watts loss
25 watts/hp 2527 watts/hp

Input power factor >0.96 >0.96
Number of inverter IGBTs IGBTs IGBTs
2400V 12 12
3300V 12 12
4160V 12 12
IGBT PIV rating PIV PIV
2400V 3300V 3300V
3300V 6500V 6500V
4160V 6500V 6500V
Rectier designs 24-pulse PWM 24-pulse PWM
Rectier switch Diode Diode
Rectier switch failure mode Non-rupture, non-arc Non-rupture, non-arc
Rectier switch cooling Air-cooled Air-cooled
Output waveform to motor Sinusoidal current/voltage Sinusoidal current/voltage
Speed regulation 0.1% without tach feedback 0.1% without tach feedback
Output frequency range 1120 Hz 1120 Hz
Service duty rating Standard Standard
Typical efciency 9798% 9798%
Noise level <75 dB (A) <75 dB (A)
Flying start capability Yes Yes
10.2-25
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10
Adjustable Frequency Drives Technical Data and Ratings
Technical Data
067
Frame Size VT/CT Reference Chart
Table 10.2-4. SC 9000 Frame A
See Page 10.2-3 and Figure 10.2-1
Requires second blower conguration.

Table 10.2-5. SC 9000 Frame B
Table 10.2-6. SC 9000 Frame C
Requires second blower conguration.

Table 10.2-7. SC 9000 Frame D
See Pages 10.2-9 and 10.2-11 and Figures 10.2-4 and 10.2-5
Table 10.2-8. SC 9000 Frame E
See Figure 10.2-6
VT = Variable Torque (110% overload for 1 minute every
10 minutes)
CT = Constant Torque (150% overload for 1 minute every
10 minutes)
2400/60 Hz VT 3300/50 Hz VT 4160/60 Hz VT
FLA hp FLA hp FLA hp
69
80
91
300
350
400
48
56
64
300
350
400
38
44
51
300
350
400
103
114
450
500
72
80
96
450
500
600
57
63
76
450
500
600
112
700
89
101
114
700
800
900
124
132
1000
1150
2400/60 Hz CT 3300/50 Hz CT 4160/60 Hz CT

69
80
300
350
48
56
64
300
350
400
38
44
51
300
350
400
72
80
450
500
57
63
76
450
500
600
2400/60 Hz VT 3300/50 Hz VT 4160/60 Hz VT
134
156
178
600
700
800
128
144
160
800
900
1000
124
155
186
1000
1250
1500
201
223
900
1000
200
240
1250
1500
217
248
1750
2000
2400/60 Hz CT 3300/50 Hz CT 4160/60 Hz CT
91
103
114
400
450
500
96
112
128
600
700
800
89
101
114
700
800
900
134
156
600
700
144
160
900
1000
124
155
1000
1250
2400/60 Hz VT 3300/50 Hz VT 4160/60 Hz VT
279
335
390
1250
1500
1750
280
320
1750
2000
279
310
341
372
2250
2500
2750
3000
2400/60 Hz CT 3300/50 Hz CT 4160/60 Hz CT

178
201
223
279
800
900
1000
1250
200
1250
186
217
248
1500
1750
2000
2400/60 Hz VT 3300/50 Hz VT 4160/60 Hz VT

448
504
561
2000
2250
2500
360
400
440
2250
2500
2750
403
434
461
3250
3500
3750
480
3000
493
527
558
4000
4250
4500
2400/60 Hz CT 3300/50 Hz CT 4160/60 Hz CT
335
390
448
1500
1750
2000
240
280
320
1500
1750
2000
279
310
341
2250
2500
2750
372
403
3000
3250
2400/60 Hz VT 3300/50 Hz VT 4160/60 Hz VT
520
560
600
3250
3500
3750
589
620
651
4750
5000
5250
640
4000
682
713
744
5500
5750
6000
2400/60 Hz CT 3300/50 Hz CT 4160/60 Hz CT
360
400
2250
2500
434
461
493
3500
3750
4000
10.2-26
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 10068


September 2011

Contents

11.0-1

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

11

001

B
u
s
w
a
y
M
e
d
i
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e


General Description. . . . . . . . .

11.0-2

Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.0-2

Withstand Ratings. . . . . .

11.0-2

Technical Data and
Specications . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.0-3

Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . .

11.0-3

Dimensional Data . . . . . . . .

11.0-4

General Description. . . . . . . . .

11.0-8

Collar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.0-8

Splice Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.0-8

Boot Connection. . . . . . . . .

11.0-8

Construction . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.0-9

Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.0-9

Non-Segregated Phase
Feeder Bus . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.0-10

Vertical Feeder . . . . . . . . . .

11.0-11

Dust-Proof Construction . .

11.0-11

Space Heaters . . . . . . . . . .

11.0-11

Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.0-11

Traditional Elbows . . . . . .

11.0-12

Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.0-13

Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.0-14

Switchgear Flanges . . . . .

11.0-15

End Cable Tap Box . . . . . .

11.0-16

Phase Transposition . . . . .

11.0-16

Expansion Joints. . . . . . . .

11.0-17

Bushing Box Termination.

11.0-17

Transformer Termination .

11.0-18

Sealing Ring . . . . . . . . . . .

11.0-18

Vapor/Fire Barriers . . . . . .

11.0-19

Column Supports . . . . . . .

11.0-20

Horizontal Hanger . . . . . . .

11.0-21

Wall/Floor Flange . . . . . . .

11.0-22

Installation Diagrams . . . .

11.0-23

Field Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.0-24
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Metal-Enclosed Bus Medium Voltage. . . . . .

Typical 0.6/5/15 kV Bus Run Section
11.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

11

General Description

002

Straight Section
Downward Elbow

General Description

Eatons non-segregated phase bus
runs are designed for use on circuits
whose importance requires greater
reliability than power cables provide.
Typical of such applications are the
connections from transformers to
switchgear assemblies in unit substa-
tions, connections from switchgear
assemblies to rotating apparatus, and
tie connections between switchgear
assemblies.
Non-segregated phase bus is an
assembly of bus conductors with
associated connections, joints and
insulating supports conned within
a metal enclosure without interphase
barriers. The conductors are ade-
quately separated and insulated from
each other and grounded by insulating
bus supports. Each conductor for
2400V service and above is insulated
with a uidized bed epoxy coating
throughout, which reduces the possi-
bility of corona and electrical tracking.

Standards

The metal-enclosed non-segregated
phase bus runs are designed for 600V,
5 kV, 15 kV, 27 kV and 38 kV service in
accordance with ANSI C37.23. Available
ratings are shown in

Table 11.0-1

.

Temperature Rise

The bus will be capable of carrying
rated current continuously without
exceeding a conductor temperature
rise of 65C above an outside ambient
temperature of 40C, as required by
ANSI Standard C37.23.

Test

The design of non-segregated bus
runs has been tested per ANSI C37.23.
Certication of momentary current
testing, impulse testing and heat rise
are available upon request.

Predictive Diagnostics

Partial discharge sensing and
monitoring is available as an option
for medium voltage applications. Refer
to

Tab 4

,

Pages 4.5-1

through

4.5-8

.

Seismic Qualication

Refer to

Tab 1

for information on

Withstand Ratings

The metal-enclosed non-segregated
phase bus runs are designed to with-
stand electrical and mechanical forces
generated by momentary (10 cycle)
and short-time (2 second) short-circuit
currents in accordance with the latest
ANSI/IEEE

Standard C37.23. For 600V
application, 4-cycle momentary current
withstand rating up to 158 kA peak (98.8
kA rms asymmetrical) is also available.
Refer to

Table 11.0-1

for available
short-circuit ratings.

Third-Party Certication

Certain bus ratings can be supplied
with CSA

listing. Refer to

Tables 11.0-1

11.0-4

for availability
of CSA listing.

Figure 11.0-1. System Congurations
Optional
Ground Bus
Optional
Ground Bus
Optional
Ground Bus
Optional
Ground Bus
Optional
Ground Bus
Optional
Ground Bus
Three-Phase, Three-Wire
12003200A
600V 515 kV
40005000A
600V 515 kV
Three-Phase, Four-Wire
40005000A
600V 515 kV
12002000A
27 kV
12002000A
38 kV
12003200A
600V 515 kV


11.0-3

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

11

003


Electrical Data

Table 11.0-1. Available Non-Segregated Bus Ratings per ANSI/IEEE Standard C37.23-1987

Refer to

Tables 11.0-2

,

11.0-3

and

11.0-4

for available CSA and UL

listings.

This is a value calculated from 2-second short-circuit withstand current rating based on relationship l

2

t = constant.

Rated Maximum
Voltage kV rms
Rated Power
Frequency Hz
Power Frequency
Withstand 1 min.
Dry, kV rms
Impulse Withstand
(1.2 x 50 microsec)
kV Peak
Rated
Continuous
Current
Amperes
Rated Short-Time
Short-Circuit
Withstand Current
(kA rms Symmetrical)
Rated Momentary
Short-Circuit
Withstand Current
2 Sec. 1 Sec.

10 Cycle
kA Peak kA rms Asym.

0.635 60 2.2 10 1200
2000
3000
3200
4000
5000
50 69 132 78
0.635 60 2.2 10 1200
2000
3000
3200
63 89 170 100.8
4.76 60 19 60 1200
2000
3000
3200
4000
5000
50 132 78
4.76 60 19 60 1200
2000
3000
3200
63 170 100.8
8.25 60 36 95 1200
2000
3000
3200
4000
5000
50 132 78
8.25 60 36 95 1200
2000
3000
3200
63 170 100.8
15 60 36 95 1200
2000
3000
3200
4000
5000
50 130 78
15 60 36 95 1200
2000
3000
3200
63 170 100.8
27 60 60 125 1200
2000
40 108 64
38 60 80 170 1200
2000
40 104 64
11.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

11

004

Dimensional Data

Figure 11.0-2. Medium Voltage Non-Segregated Phase BusStandard Congurations
Table 11.0-2. Bus Duct Rated 49 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Seconds

All phase conductors above 635V are fully insulated with epoxy insulation for the rated maximum voltage. Epoxy insulation is available at 600V as
an option.

Optional poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy bracing supports are available. Consult factory.

Add 3 lbs to the weights shown when using poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy support bracing.

Note:

For dimensions in mm, multiply inches by 25.4.

Wire Voltage
kV

Ampere
Rating
Layout
No.
Width Height Conductor
Centerline
Conductor
Size
Phase-Phase
Conductor
Spacing
Bracing
Supports

Optional
Ground
Bus
Average
Weight
Per Foot

Standards
Listing

Aluminum Enclosures

3 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
1
1
1
20.00
20.00
20.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 3
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
38
47
68
CSA
CSA
CSA
3 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
3200
4000
5000
1
2
2
20.00
35.75
35.75
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 6
(2) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
68
101
118
CSA
CSA
4 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
4
4
4
26.00
26.00
26.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 3
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
48
60
88
CSA
CSA
4 0.635/5/15
0.635
3200
4000
4
5
26.00
35.75
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 6
5.38
4.00
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
88
127

Steel Enclosures (Steel, Stainless Steel and Galvanized Steel)

3 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
1
1
1
20.00
20.00
20.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 3
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
58
67
106
CSA
CSA
3 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
3200
4000
5000
1
2
3
20.00
35.75
35.75
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
106
154
154
4 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
4
4
4
26.00
26.00
26.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 3
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
72
84
124
CSA
CSA
4 0.635/5/15
0.635
3200
4000
4
5
26.00
35.75
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 8
5.38
4.00
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
124
188
Bus
Optional
Ground Bus
Layout 1
C
W
H
1 2 3
Bus
Layout 2
1 1 2 2 3 3
Bus
Layout 3
1 2 1 3 3 2
C
L H
C
L
Optional
Ground Bus
Optional
Ground Bus
C
C
L
W
C
L
W
H
C
L
C
C
L


11.0-5

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

11

005

Dimensional Data (Continued)

Figure 11.0-3. Medium Voltage Non-Segregated Phase BusStandard Congurations
Table 11.0-3. Bus Duct Rated 63 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Seconds

All phase conductors above 635V are fully insulated with epoxy insulation for the rated maximum voltage. Epoxy insulation is available at 600V as
an option.

Optional poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy bracing supports are available. Consult factory.

Add 3 lbs to the weights shown when using poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy support bracing.

Note:


Wire Voltage
kV

Ampere
Rating
Layout
No.
Width Height Conductor
Centerline
Conductor
Size
Phase-Phase
Conductor
Spacing
Bracing
Supports

Ground
Bus
Average
Weight
Per Foot

Standards
Listing

Aluminum Enclosures

3 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
1
1
1
20.00
20.00
20.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
48
48
78
CSA
CSA
CSA
3 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
3200
4000
5000
1
2
2
20.00
35.75
35.75
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 6
(2) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
78
105
121
4 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
4
4
4
26.00
26.00
26.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
61
61
101
4 0.635/5/15
0.635
3200
4000
4
5
26.00
35.75
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 6
5.38
4.00
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
101
128

Steel Enclosures (Steel, Stainless Steel and Galvanized Steel)

3 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
1
1
1
20.00
20.00
20.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
68
68
89
3 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
3200
4000
5000
1
2
3
20.00
35.75
35.75
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 6
(2) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
89
134
160
4 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
4
4
4
26.00
26.00
26.00
17.38
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.38 x 6
(1) 0.50 x 8
5.38
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
85
85
115
4 0.635/5/15
0.635
3200
4000
4
5
26.00
35.75
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.50 x 8
(2) 0.50 x 6
5.38
4.00
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
115
188
Optional
Ground Bus
W
Bus
Layout 4
1 2 3 N
Bus
Layout 5
1 1 2 2 3 3 N N
C
C
L
Optional
Ground Bus
C
L
H
C
C
L
W
C
L
H
11.0-6



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

11

006


Figure 11.0-4. Dimensional Data for 27 kV/38 kV Non-Segregated Phase BusStandard Congurations
Table 11.0-4. Dimensional Data for 27 kV Bus Rated up to 108 kA Peak Momentary, 40 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Second

All bus bars for applications above 600V are fully insulated with uidized epoxy coating for the rated maximum voltage.

Check with Eaton for availability.

Add 3 lbs to the weights shown when using poly/porcelain or epoxy insulating supports in place of glass polyester.

Glass polyester.

Polyester/porcelain.

Epoxy.

Note:


Table 11.0-5. Dimensional Data for 38 kV Bus Rated up to 104 kA Peak Momentary, 40 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Second

All bus bars for applications above 600V are fully insulated with uidized epoxy coating for the rated maximum voltage.

Check with Eaton for availability.

Add 3 lbs to the weights shown when using poly/porcelain or epoxy insulating supports in place of glass polyester.

Note:


Wire
Type
Rated
Maximum
Voltage
kV

Rated
Cont.
Current
Amperes
Layout
No.
Enclosure
Material
Enclosure
Size (Inches)
# of Bars
Ph and
Size, Cu
(Inches)

Ph-Ph
Bus
Spacing
(Inches)
Insulating
Supports
Optional
Ground
Bus, Cu
(Inches)
Approx.
Average
Weight
per Foot (Lbs)

Listing
Standard Optional W H C Standard Optional

CSA UL

3 27
27
1200
2000
8
8
Aluminum
Aluminum
30.00
30.00
21.13
21.13
10.00
10.00
(1) 0.25 x 4
(1) 0.50 x 4
7.00
7.00

0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
37
49
Yes
Yes
No
No
3 27
27
1200
2000
8
8
Steel
Steel
30.00
30.00
21.13
21.13
10.00
10.00
(1) 0.25 x 4
(1) 0.50 x 4
7.00
7.00

0.25 x 2.00
0.25 x 2.00
37
49
Yes
Yes
No
No

Wire
Type
Rated
Maximum
Voltage
kV

Rated
Cont.
Current
Amperes
Layout
No.
Enclosure
Material
Enclosure
Size (Inches)
# of Bars
Ph and
Size, Cu
(Inches)
Ph-Ph
Bus
Spacing
(Inches)
Insulating
Supports
Optional
Ground
Bus, Cu
(Inches)
Approx.
Average
Weight
per Foot (Lbs)

Listing
Standard Optional W H C Standard Optional

CSA UL

3 38
38
1200
2000
9
10
Aluminum
Aluminum
40.25
40.25
21.50
21.50
11.00
11.00
(1) 0.25 x 4
(1) 0.38 x 4
10.50
10.50
Epoxy
Epoxy
0.25 x 3.00
0.25 x 3.00
61
89
Yes
Yes
No
No
3 38
38
1200
2000
9
10
Steel
Steel
40.25
40.25
21.50
21.50
11.00
11.00
(1) 0.25 x 4
(1) 0.38 x 4
10.50
10.50
Epoxy
Epoxy
0.25 x 3.00
0.25 x 3.00
88
116
No
No
No
No
Ground Bus
Layout 8
Layout 9
1 2 3
Ground Bus
1 2 3
Layout 10
Ground Bus
1 2 3
W
Bus
C
C
L H
H H
C
L
C
L
Bus
D
C
L
W W
Bus
D
C
L
C
L


11.0-7

September 2011

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11007
Table 11.0-6. Non-Segregated Phase Bus Electrical Properties and Watt Loss Data
Note: For dimensions in mm, multiply inches by 25.4.
Wire
Type
Rated Max.
Voltage
Cont.
Rated
Current
Conductor (Copper) Enclosure Electrical Properties
ohm/Ph/ft F/PH/FT
#/ph Thick Width Phase Arrang. Material Size DC 60 Hz Cap to Grd
kV Amperes Inch Inch W x H (Inches) R 20C R X
L
Z = R+JX
L
Cg
3 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
3200
1
1
1
1
0.50
0.38
0.50
0.50
3.00
6.00
8.00
8.00
1-2-3
1-2-3
1-2-3
1-2-3
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
20.00 x 17.38
20.00 x 17.38
20.00 x 17.38
20.00 x 17.38
5.5
3.7
2.1
2.1
7.1
4.7
2.7
2.7
49.8
37.0
31.1
31.1
50.3
37.3
31.3
31.3
2.2
4.4
5.9
5.9
3 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
4000
5000
1200
2000
2
2
1
1
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.38
6.00
8.00
3.00
6.00
1-1-2-2-3-3
1-1-2-2-3-3
1-2-3
1-2-3
Aluminum
Aluminum
Steel
Steel
35.75 x 17.38
35.75 x 17.38
20.00 x 17.38
20.00 x 17.38
1.4
1.0
5.5
3.7
1.8
1.3
7.1
4.7
35.6
32.9
49.8
37.0
35.6
32.9
50.3
37.3
5.9
7.8
2.2
4.4
3 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
3000
3200
4000
5000
1
1
2
2
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
1-2-3
1-2-3
1-1-2-2-3-3
1-2-3-1-2-3
Steel
Steel
Steel
Steel
20.00 x 17.38
20.00 x 17.38
35.75 x 17.38
35.75 x 17.38
2.1
2.1
1.0
1.0
2.7
2.7
1.3
1.3
31.1
31.1
32.9
14.6
31.3
31.3
32.9
14.6
5.9
5.9
7.8
7.4
4 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
3000
3200
1
1
1
1
0.50
0.38
0.50
0.50
3.00
6.00
8.00
8.00
1-2-3-N
1-2-3-N
1-2-3-N
1-2-3-N
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
26.00 x 17.38
26.00 x 17.38
26.00 x 17.38
26.00 x 17.38
5.5
3.7
2.1
2.1
7.1
4.7
2.7
2.7
49.8
37.0
31.1
31.1
50.3
37.3
31.3
31.3
1.5
3.1
4.1
4.1
4 0.635
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
4000
1200
2000
2
1
1
0.50
0.50
0.38
6.00
3.00
6.00
1-1-2-2-3-3-N-N
1-2-3-N
1-2-3-N
Aluminum
Steel
Steel
35.75 x 17.38
26.00 x 17.38
26.00 x 17.38
1.4
5.5
3.7
1.8
7.1
4.7
35.6
49.8
37.0
35.6
50.3
37.3
4.9
1.5
3.1
4 0.635/5/15
0.635
0.635
3000
3200
4000
1
1
2
0.50
0.50
0.50
8.00
8.00
8.00
1-2-3-N
1-2-3-N
1-1-2-2-3-3-N-N
Steel
Steel
Steel
26.00 x 17.38
26.00 x 17.38
35.75 x 17.38
2.1
2.1
1.0
2.7
2.7
1.3
41.1
41.1
32.9
41.2
41.2
32.9
4.1
4.1
6.6
3 27
27
27
27
1200
2000
1200
2000
1
1
1
1
0.25
0.50
0.25
0.50
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
1-2-3
1-2-3
1-2-3
1-2-3
Aluminum
Aluminum
Steel
Steel
30.00 x 21.00
30.00 x 21.00
30.00 x 21.00
30.00 x 21.00
8.3
4.1
8.3
4.1
10.6
5.3
10.6
5.3
51.6
24.8
51.6
24.8
52.7
25.4
52.7
25.4
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
3 38
38
38
38
1200
2000
1200
2000
1
2
1
2
0.25
0.38
0.25
0.38
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
1-2-3
1-2-3
1-2-3
1-2-3
Aluminum
Aluminum
Steel
Steel
40.25 x 21.50
40.25 x 21.50
40.25 x 21.50
40.25 x 21.50
8.3
4.1
8.3
4.1
10.6
5.3
10.6
5.3
61.3
59.0
61.3
59.0
62.3
59.2
62.3
59.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
11.0-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11008
General Description
Collar
Collars (see Figure 11.0-5) are U-shaped
metal pieces used for enclosure-to-
enclosure connections.
Splice Joint
Conductors are silver-plated for
maximum conductivity (tin plating
is optional). Bus runs rated 3200A
(aluminum enclosure) or 2000A (steel
enclosure) and below use one conduc-
tor per phase, while the higher ratings
use two conductors per phase. Adjacent
sections are electrically bonded together
by means of plated copper splice
plates to provide electrical continuity.
All splice joints (see Figure 11.0-6)
should be torqued 50 ft/lbs.
Boot Connection
Bus joints are insulated with a ame-
retardant PVC boot, easily removable
for joint inspection (see Figure 11.0-7).
Figure 11.0-5. Enclosure Section Joint Collar
Figure 11.0-6. Typical Splice Plate Connection
Figure 11.0-7. Boot Assembly (for Insulated Bus Only)
Note: Numbers indicate
bolt tightening sequence.
0.312 18 x 0.875
(7.9 x 22.2)
Hex Steel Bolt
0.312 (7.9) Weather Seal
Washer (Steel)
Weather Seal
Washer NEOP.
(Outdoor Only)
Collar
0.125 TK x 0.75
(3.2 x 19.05) Wide
Gasket on Inside of Collar
(Outdoor Only)
Tinnerman Nut
Insulated Bus
Splice Plate
0.500 (12.7) Pyramidal Washer
0.500 (12.7) 13 Hex Nut
Splice Plate
0.500 (12.7) Washer
0.50 13 x 2.0 (12.7 x 50.8)
Hex Bolt
Splice Plates
PVC Boot
Phase Conductors
Nylon Ties
11.0-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11009
Construction
Enclosures are fabricated from 11-gauge
aluminum, and are welded for maxi-
mum rigidity (see Figure 11.0-8).
Removable covers are secured with bolts
for ease of access when making joints
and subsequent and periodic inspection.
(Steel housings are also available.)
Enclosures are painted with baked-on
epoxy powder coat paint system result-
ing in a very durable nish with uniform
thickness and gloss. This cosmetically
pleasing nish minimizes the risk of
problems in harsh environments. The
standard color is ANSI-61 light gray.
Special paint colors are available
upon request.
Flexible joints are supplied in all
straight bus runs at approximately
50 feet (15.2m) intervals to allow for the
expected expansion when the conduc-
tors are energized and are carrying
rated current.
A variety of terminations is available to
accommodate most termination
requirements. Bus runs can be termi-
nated with exible shunts, potheads,
porcelain bushings or conductor stub
ends for connections to riser bars in
switchgear assemblies.
Phase Conductors
All conductors are 98% conductivity
copper bars. Bus joints are made by
solidly bolting the bus bars together
with splice plates on each side
(see Figure 11.0-9). All joint surfaces
are silver-plated or tin-plated to ensure
maximum conductivity through the
joint. After bolting, each standard joint
is covered by a preformed, ame-
retardant insulating boot, providing full
insulation for bus conductors (5 kV and
above). These boots are easily remov-
able for inspection of the joints at any
future time. The copper bus bars are
mounted on supports of track-resistant,
ame-retardant glass polyester. If boots
are not available for connection, taping
the joint will be required.
For ex connectors, nish connections
with insulating tape (furnished).
The following procedures should be
followed for taping joints.
1. Clean area of dirt and foreign
matter as specied under cleaning
procedures.
2. Apply at least 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) of
ller over the sharp edges of the
conductor, splice plates, hardware
or ex connectors. Smooth out and
blend the contour so that tape may
be easily applied.
3. Apply 3.00-inch (76.2 mm) insulat-
ing tape, lapping and layering
(1 layer up to 5 kV) (2 layers for 5 kV
to 15 kV). Tape must overlap pre-
insulation by 1.50 inches (38.1 mm).
Should a tape roll expire, start a
new roll by overlapping any
previous end by 1/2-turn.
Ground Conductor (Optional)
For all ratings except 170 kA peak rated
bus, a separate, continuous 0.25 x 2.00
inch (6.4 x 50.8 mm) bare copper
ground bus, bolted and running along
the entire length is available. For 170 kA
peak rated bus runs, a continuous
0.25 x 3.00 inch (6.4 x 76.2 mm) bare
copper ground bus running along
the entire length is provided when
required.
In the 170 kA peak rated bus, ground
pads are welded at each end of the
enclosure. Copper ground links are
provided (regardless of provisions of
ground bus) to ensure a continuous
ground path throughout the run.
Neutral Conductor (Optional)
Fully rated, isolated and insulated
neutral conductor can be provided
when specied.
Figure 11.0-8. Housing Assembly
Figure 11.0-9. Taping Instructions
Transformer
Main Bus
Pre-Insulation
Bare Conductor
Flex Conne
Transformer
Spade
1.00-inch (25.4 mm)
Insulating Tape
to Secure Joint
Filler
1.50 (38.1)
Minimum
Overlap
3.00-inch (76.2 mm)
Insulating Tape
to Pad Filler
11.0-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11010
Non-Segregated Phase Feeder Bus
Straight sections of feeder bus can be
supplied in any length, at 1/8-inch
(3.2 mm) increments, from a 14.00-
inch (355.6 mm) minimum to an 8-foot
(2m) maximum. Figure 11.0-10 illus-
trates the conguration of feeder bus
and the conductors locations. Collars
are used for all horizontal enclosure-
to-enclosure connections.
Figure 11.0-10. Non-Segregated Phase Feeder Bus
35.75
(908.5)
20.00
(508.0)
35.75
(908.5)
F
Top View
p View
3-Wire 1200 2000 and 3000 Amperes
p View 5.38
(136.7)
26.00
(660.4)
5.38
(136.7)
5.38
(136.7)
4.00
(101.6)
9.25
(235.0)
17.38
(441.5)
8.13
(206.5)
11.0-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11011
Vertical Feeder
Vertical feeder enclosures (see
Figure 11.0-11) are designed in
standard lengths of 24.00 inches
(609.6 mm) through 56.00 inches
(1422.4 mm) in 1.00-inch (25.4 mm)
increments. All vertical enclosures
are supplied with external (turned-out)
anges for enclosure-to-enclosure
connections.
Dust-Proof Construction
Both vertical and horizontal sections of
feeder bus can be supplied with dust-
proof construction in any length, at
1/8-inch (3.18 mm) increments, from
14.00 inches (355.6 mm) to an 8-foot
(2.4m) maximum. Figure 11.0-10
illustrates the conguration of feeder
bus and the conductors locations.
Removable gasket at covers are
secured with bolts for ease of access
when making joints and subsequent
and periodic inspection. External and
internal anges are used for all dust-
proof enclosure-to-enclosure connec-
tions. Gasket material is to be placed
between internal and external anges
during installation.
Space Heaters
Space heaters are provided on outdoor
bus duct runs for use with customer-
supplied 120 or 240 Vac power supply
at 250 watts for both. Consult the
factory for additional heater ratings.
Heaters come pre-wired using #14
shielded pair cable with a terminal
block ready to accept customer-
supplied power. The heaters are contin-
uously energized or may be thermostat
controlled. There is one heater pro-
vided every 8 ft (2.4m) as standard.
Fittings
There is a tting to meet every applica-
tion need: anges, elbows, offsets,
tees, cable tap boxes, transformer
connections and expansion joints.
These ttings, along with standard and
minimum dimensions, are described
on the following pages.
The relationship of ttings to straight
lengths (forward, rearward, upward
and downward) is illustrated in
Figure 11.0-12.
When making eld measurements and
layouts, it should be remembered that
the dimensions are given from the
centerline of the non-segregated bus
bar, not the centerline of the housing.
Figure 11.0-11 and Figure 11.0-12
show the differences in center line in
relationship to the housing.
Figure 11.0-11. Vertical Feeder
Figure 11.0-12. Horizontal Feeder
Duct Width
16.25
(412.8)
8.13
(206.5)
F
8.13
206.5)
17.38
(441.5)
Downward
Forward
Upward Rearward
11.0-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11012
Traditional Elbows
Elbows are used to make 90-degree changes in the direction
of bus runs. The four types that are available are forward,
rearward, upward and downward.
Table 11.0-7. Elbow Dimensions
Note: All dimensions are to the centerline of the non-segregated bus bar.
Figure 11.0-13. Upward Elbow
Figure 11.0-14. Downward Elbow
Figure 11.0-15. Rearward Elbow
Figure 11.0-16. Forward Elbow
Amperes Wire
Type
Enclosure
Material
Upward Downward Rearward Forward
A B A B A B A B

1200
2000
3000
3
3
3
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
3000
3200
3200
3
3
3
Steel
Aluminum
Steel
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
21.00 (736.6)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (736.6)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
4000
5000
1200
3
3
4
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum/steel
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
29.00 (736.6)
29.00 (736.6)
24.00 (609.6)
29.00 (736.6)
29.00 (736.6)
24.00 (609.6)
29.00 (736.6)
29.00 (736.6)
24.00 (609.6)
29.00 (736.6)
29.00 (736.6)
24.00 (609.6)
2000
3000
3000
4
4
4
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum
Steel
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
3200
3200
4000
4
4
4
Aluminum
Steel
Aluminum/steel
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
29.00 (736.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
29.00 (736.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
29.00 (736.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
29.00 (736.6)
A
B
B
A
A
B
A B
11.0-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11013
Offsets
An offset is used to avoid obstacles and to conform to building
structure. It is two elbows fabricated into a single tting for
use where space restrictions prohibit the use of a standard 90-
degree elbow. The minimum lengths are listed in Table 11.0-8.
Table 11.0-8. Offset Dimensions
Figure 11.0-17. Upward Offset
Figure 11.0-18. Downward Offset
Figure 11.0-19. Rearward Offset
Figure 11.0-20. Forward Offset
Amperes Wire
Type
Enclosure
Material
Upward Downward Rearward Forward
A A A A

1200
2000
3000
3
3
3
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
3000
3200
3200
3
3
3
Steel
Aluminum
Steel
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
4000
5000
1200
3
3
4
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum/steel
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
29.00 (736.6)
29.00 (736.6)
24.00 (609.6)
29.00 (736.6)
29.00 (736.6)
24.00 (609.6)
2000
3000
3000
4
4
4
Aluminum/steel
Aluminum
Steel
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
3200
3200
4000
4
4
4
Aluminum
Steel
Aluminum/steel
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
19.25 (489.0)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
29.00 (736.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
29.00 (736.6)
27.38
(695.5)
8.13
(206.5)
10.00
(254.0)
Minimum
A
A
Bus
9.25
(235.0)
C
L
A
A
3.50 (88.9)
Minimum
Offset
27.38
(695.5)
8.13
(206.5)
Bus
C
L
A
A
9.25
(235.0)
10.00
(254.0)
Minimum
A
A
3.50 (88.9)
Minimum
Offset
11.0-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11014
Tees
Tees are used to branch-off a bus run. The four types
available are forward, rearward, upward and downward.
Figure 11.0-21. Downward
Figure 11.0-22. Upward
Figure 11.0-23. Forward
Figure 11.0-24. Rearward
F
19.25
(489.0)
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
17.00
(431.8)
19.25
(489.0)
19.25
(489.0)
17.38
(441.5)
36.00
(914.4)
F
29.00
(736.6)
29.00
(736.6)
36.00
(914.4)
17.38
(441.5)
29.00
(736.6)
29.00
(736.6)
F
11.0-15
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11015
Switchgear Flanges
Switchgear termination enclosures connect non-segregated
phase bus to medium voltage switchgear, medium voltage
motor control centers, and low voltage switchgear, switch-
boards or motor control centers. Each enclosure is designed
to coordinate with opening, drilling and bus extension detail
supplied on the switchgear equipment by the switchgear
supplier. Standard switchgear termination enclosures
include external (turned out) ange for connections to
switchgear equipment for medium voltage applications,
and internal (turned in) ange for low voltage applications.
All anges will match switchgear roof sheet coordinations.
Table 11.0-9. Flange
Figure 11.0-25. Low Voltage Switchgear Flange (Internal Flange)
Figure 11.0-26. Medium Voltage Switchgear Flange (External Flange)
Amperes Wire
Type
Enclosure 49 kA 63 kA
A B A B
1200 3 Aluminum/steel 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
3000 3 Aluminum 19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
3000 3 Steel 19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
3200 3 Aluminum 19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
3200 3 Steel 19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
4000 3 Aluminum 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
4000 3 Steel 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
5000 3 Aluminum 19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
5000 3 Steel 19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
3000 4 Aluminum 19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
3000 4 Steel 19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
3200 4 Aluminum 19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
3200 4 Steel 19.25
(489.0)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
4000 4 Aluminum 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
4000 4 Steel 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
"A"
0.312-18 x 0.875
(7.9 x 22.2)
Stl. Hex Bolt
0.312 (7.9)
Flat Washer
0.125 Tk. x 1.25
(3.2 x 31.8)
Wide Gasket
0.312 (7.9)
Flat Washer
0.312 (7.9)
Lockwasher
0.312-18 (7.9)
Stl. Hex Nut
"B"
Internal Flange
0.312-18 x 1.25
(7.9 x 31.8)
Stl. Hex Bolt
0.312 (7.9)
Weatherseal
Washer (Stl.)
0.312 (7.9)
Weatherseal
Washer (Neop.)
0.125 Tk. x 1.25
(3.2 x 31.8)
Wide Gasket
0.312 (7.9)
Weatherseal
Washer (Neop.)
0.312 (7.9)
Weatherseal
Washer (Stl.)
0.312-18 (7.9)
Stl. Hex Nut
"A"
"B"
External Flange
11.0-16
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11016
End Cable Tap Box
End cable tap boxes (see
Figure 11.0-27) are applied to feed a
run of bus duct with cable and conduit.
The enclosure is designed to accom-
modate specied size and number of
cables per phase. Conductors are
separated and provided with the
required number of cable lugs per
phase, and necessary space for cable
termination. The enclosure is provided
with removable access covers as
necessary for access to power cable
terminations.
Phase Transposition
Phase transposition is normally
provided within the switchgear equip-
ment. However, when required, it can
be provided within the bus run system
to align phasing of terminal equipment
at two ends.
All dimensions are to the centerline
of the non-segregated bus bar.
Figure 11.0-27. End Cable Tap Box
Figure 11.0-28. Phase Transposition
Accessible
Top Covers
Main Bus
Optional
Ground Bus
Cable Lugs
Accessible
Bottom Covers
48.00
(1219.2)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
47.00
(1193.8)
11.00
(279.4)
C
L
Accessible
Cover
62.00
(1574.8)
40.00
(1016.0)
11.00
(279.4)
11.00
(279.4)
17.38
(441.5)
Accessible
Cover
Accessible
Cover
Accessible
Cover
Main Bus
11.0-17
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11017
Expansion Joints
An expansion joint is a special bus and
housing tting provided in long runs
to accommodate thermal expansion of
bus conductors with respect to steel or
aluminum housing, when carrying
rated continuous current. The tting
consists of two pieces of housing,
each with one ange end. The anged
ends are separated by a 1.00-inch
(25.4 mm) gap. A sealing ring assem-
bly is then installed over the bolted
anges (see Page 11.0-18). Flexible
copper braids of required ampacity
connect bus conductors within the
expansion tting. An expansion joint
is normally provided for every 50 feet
(15m) of straight run. However, within
those 50 feet (15m), if the bus run
contains elbows or exible termina-
tion, such as transformer throat, the
expansion joint may be omitted.
The enclosure is bolted together for
shipping, but the four bolts should be
removed after installation.
Bushing Box Termination
This is used to connect bus duct to an
outside source such as a power station
or when the customer wants to con-
nect cable that is located outdoors.
The enclosure is designed to accom-
modate bushing sizes of 12003000A
with voltages up to a maximum of
15 kV (see Figure 11.0-30).
The conductors are separated and
provided with ex connectors on the
internal portion. The enclosure will be
furnished with heaters and removable
access covers for maintenance.
Figure 11.0-29. Expansion Joint
Figure 11.0-30. Bushing Box
Steel Sealing Frame
Flat .312 (7.9) Washer
0.312 (7.9) 18 x "A" + 1 Hex
Steel Bolt
Flat 0.312 (7.9) Std. Washers
to Space Flanges as
Required
Flat 0.312 (7.9) Washer
0.125 x 3.00 Gasket
(3.2 x 76.2)
0.312 (7.9) Split Steel Lockwasher
0.312 (7.9) 18 Hex Steel Nut
Hardware to be
Removed After
Installation
Standard 1.00 (25.4)
"A"
Bolting Detail
(4) Places
Flat 0.312 (7.9) Steel Washer
0.312 (7.9) Steel Split Lockwasher
0.312 18 x 1.00 Hex
(7.9 x 25.4) Steel Bolt
Tinnerman
Nut
Bottom Section
24.00
(609.6)
Bushings
24.00
(609.6)
38.00
(965.2)
Flex Connectors
Main
Bus Bar
24.00
(609.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
49.00
(1244.6)
36.00
(914.4)
11.0-18
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11018
Transformer Termination
This is a special enclosure designed
to match the transformer throat. It
includes a matching ange and
required number of exible copper
braids for connections to transformer
bushing terminal pads. The trans-
former termination enclosure ange
is provided with or without drilling
as required for a given transformer.
A sealing ring kit is included for
eld installation around the ange
connection (see Figure 11.0-31).
Sealing Ring
A sealing ring kit is provided for place-
ment around enclosure-to-enclosure
ange connections in an expansion
tting, and for placement around bus
run ange and transformer or
generator ange interface (see Figure
11.0-32). The sealing ring provides a
weatherproof seal around such joints.
The kit consists of three pieces: a
U-shaped metal piece fabricated by
welding together three members,
a separate bottom piece and a
U-shaped gasket. The sealing ring kit
is installed in the eld by the customer.
First, the U-shaped gasket is placed
upside down around ange-to-ange
interface. Then the U-shaped metal
piece is placed over the gasket bolted
to the bottom piece to provide a
weatherproof seal around the
enclosure.
Figure 11.0-31. Transformer Termination
Figure 11.0-32. Sealing Ring
"C"
"A"
29.50
(749.3)
"B"
9.50
(241.3)
Flex
Connectors
Access
Cover
Heater
Box
Support
Bracket
"E" "E"
5.50 (139.7)
"D"
A = Floor to Centerline of Transformer Flange
B = Flange Height
C = Flange Width
D = Pending Location of Transformer Spade
E = Dimensions Between Transformer Spades
Steel Sealing Frame
0.125 x 3.00 Gasket
(3.2 x 76.2)
Standard 0.50 (12.7) (See Bus Run Layout
Drawing for Actual Dimension.)
"A"
Bottom Section
0.312 (7.9) Weatherseal Washer (Steel)
0.312 (7.9) Steel Split Lockwasher
0.312 18 x 1.00 Hex Steel Bolt
(7.9 x 25.4)
11.0-19
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11019
Vapor Barriers
Vapor barriers are two pieces of
0.75-inch (19.1 mm) thick glass
polyester that are sealed with silicone
sealant. The vapor barrier is used to
seal construction openings and
penetrations through oor slabs,
walls and other building partitions
and assembles against the passage
of moisture.
Fire Barriers
Fire barriers consist of desired re-
rated barrier sandwiched between
two vapor barriers. Used to seal con-
struction openings and penetrations
through oor slabs, walls and other
re-rated building partitions and
assemblies against the passage of
ame, noxious gas, smoke and water.
Restore re-rated construction to
original integrity.
Table 11.0-10. Suggested Guide for Designing
Minimum Penetration Thickness for
Designated Fire Ratingsin Inches (mm)
Note: Data extracted from results of several
large scale E-l 19-76 re test of different
Dow Corning silicone RTV foam penetration
seal systems in both oor and wall test
structures.
Description Fire Rating
1-Hour
Fire Test
2-Hour
Fire Test
3-Hour
Fire Test

Thickness of
Dow Corning
RTV Foam
4.00
(101.6)
8.00
(203.2)
12.00
(304.8)
Figure 11.0-33. 1-Hour Fire Barrier
Fire
Foam
1.12
(28.4)
1.12
(28.4)
6.50
(165.1)
Vapor
Barrier
5.38
(136.7)
8.13
(206.5)
5.38
(136.7)
4.00
(101.6)
Fire
Foam
1.12
(28.4)
1.12
(28.4)
11.00
(279.4)
Vapor
Barrier
5.38
(136.7)
8.13
(206.5)
5.38
(136.7)
8.00
(203.2)
Fire
Foam
1.12
(28.4)
1.12
(28.4)
15.00
(381.0)
Vapor
Barrier
5.38
(136.7)
8.13
(206.5)
5.38
(136.7)
12.00
(304.8)
11.0-20
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11020
Column Supports
Outdoor bus runs are normally sup-
ported by a single structural column
with a crossbeam, which is bolted to
brackets provided on the bus housing.
Special conditions may require a dif-
ferent design. The customer furnishes
the columns, beams and foundation
hardware for the support columns.
Only the brackets are included with
the bus run. Column supports should
be placed every 8 to 10 feet (2.4 to
3.0m), at transformer throats and at
transitions where the run turns vertical
for more than 3 feet (0.91m).
Figure 11.0-36. Column Support at Transformer
5.50
(139.7)
1.50
(38.1)
1.50
(38.1)
2.00
(50.8)
1.50
(38.1)
1.50
(38.1)
6.00
(152.4)
0.656 Dia.
(2) ea. side
Figure 11.0-37. Column Support at Joint
Figure 11.0-38. Beam Drilling
Figure 11.0-39. Base Plate Detail
Hardware
Splice
Plate
Collar
Boot
Enclosure
Of
Bus
Ground Bus
Of
Bus
Ground Bus Link
H-Beam By
Customer
See Figure 11.0-38
for Piercing Support Angle
5.50
(139.7)
C
L
C
L
1.75
(44.5)
1.75
(44.5)
1.75
(44.5)
1.75
(44.5)
0.503 (12.8) Dia.
(4)
Plate By Customer
Welded to I-Beam
Recommended Plate
6 x 6 x 1/2 TK
6.00
(152.4)
6.00
(152.4)
C
L
C
L
C
L
C
L
4.50
(114.3)
6.00
(152.4)
4.50
(114.3)
4.50
(114.3)
6.00
(152.4)
6.00
(152.4)
4.50
(114.3)
6.00
(152.4)
0.75 (19.1)
6 15.5
0.75 (19.1) Tk
Plate
0.875 (22.2) Dia.
(4)
11.0-21
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11021
Horizontal Hanger
The indoor bus run is attached to exist-
ing building structure through the use of
5/8-inch (15.9) diameter hanger rod
assembly (see Figure 11.0-40). Exact
placement to be determined by installer.
Hanger rods and associated support
material to be supplied by the customer
or contractor.
Figure 11.0-40. Horizontal Hanger Assembly
Figure 11.0-41. Typical Bus Duct Components
A
A = 20.00, 26.00, 35.75
(508.0, 660.4, 908.1)
Width of Enclosure
Threaded Rod
0.625 Dia. (15.9)
Threaded Rod Extends
to Roof Hangers
17.38
(441.5)
2.25
(57.2)
1.50
(38.1)
0.75
(19.1)
2.25
(57.2)
1.50
(38.1)
0.75
(19.1)
Unistrut
Unistrut
Threaded Rod
0.625 Dia. (15.9)
Hanger- Supplied
By Customer
0.625 (15.9) Nut
Lockwasher
Flatwasher
(6) Locations
Minimum
Distance
6.00
(152.4)
Minimum
Distance
6.00
(152.4)
Horizonta
Hange
Brackets
T-Beams
by Customer
Enclosure to
Enclosure Flange
Hardware
Enclosure to
Switchgear Hardware
Colla
Upward Elbow
Sealing
Ring
Transformer
Downward
Elbow
Downward
Expansion Joint
Horizontal Tee
Floor Flange
al Feeder
End Cable Tap Box
Bushing Box
Thru Wall
Interna
Switchgea
Flange
Phase Transposition
Horizontal Feeder
External
Switchgear
Flange
Hanger
Angles
Collar
11.0-22
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11022
Wall/Floor Flange
Wall/oor ange ttings are provided
when a bus run passes through a wall
or oor. The wall/oor ange assem-
bly is a sliding design. It consists of a
U-shaped piece fabricated with two
lips. The assembly is installed in the
wall opening by the purchaser. The
bus run is installed through the wall/
oor ange assembly by sliding
through it.
Figure 11.0-42. Wall Opening
Table 11.0-11. Wall/Floor Opening Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Enclosure Width A B C
20.00 (508.0) 7.25 (184.2) 21.00 (533.4) 10.50 (266.7)
26.00 (660.4) 7.25 (184.2) 21.00 (533.4) 10.50 (266.7)
35.75 (908.1) 8.00 (203.2) 36.75 (933.5) 18.38 (466.9)
A A A A
C C
Wall
THK
0.438 (11.1) Dia.
Holes In Wall Frame
0.375 (9.5)-16 Tap
By Purchaser
Wall
Frame
18.38
(466.8)
8.00
(203.2)
8.00
(203.2)
3.00
(76.2)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00 (25.4)
Wall Opening l Ope O
BB
8.63
(219.2)
9.75
(247.7)
Figure 11.0-43. Wall Flange
11.0-23
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11023
Installation Diagrams
Figure 11.0-44. Typical Bus Run (Switchgear-to-Switchgear)
Figure 11.0-45. Typical Bus Run (Switchgear-to-Transformer)
Internal
Switchgear
Flange
External
Switchgear
Flange
Horizontal
Hanger
Horizontal
Feeder
Collar
Horizontal
Hanger
Switchgear
Internal
Switchgear
Flange
Horizontal Feeder
Wall Enclosure
all Flange
Brackets
T-Beam Support
by Customer
Enclosure
to Enclosure
Flange
Hardware
Collar
Sealing
Ring
Transformer
Enclosure
Downward
Elbow
11.0-24
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 11024
Field Fit
A eld t section of bus is typically an
elbow or a short length of feeder that
is intentionally left out of a run for later
shipment. It is most often a mutually
agreed upon section between the
customer and the plant. The purpose
of the program is to effectively man-
age the dimensional uncertainties that
may be involved in a bus layout.
The example shown in Figure 11.0-46
identies the eld t piece as a straight
length.
Upon release of the order, this item is
kept on hold for eld measurement.
The contractor installs the bus duct
and is then able to obtain an exact
dimension for the nal eld t piece.
The measurement should be made
from edge of the housing 1 to the
edge of the housing 2.
The contractor can fax the dimensions
directly to the factory on the Final Field
Fit Fax Release form, which is packed
with the original shipment.
The eld t section will ship within 5 to
10 working days from the receipt of
the release fax. This program has been
successful for many years and it pro-
vides assurance of an exact t the rst
time. It allows bus duct to be released
when certain dimensions are not yet
determined. It also eliminates the costly
delays that can occur when sections
have to be remade and shipped due to
last minute job site changes. In turn,
this allows installations to begin early
and projects can be completed on time.
Figure 11.0-46. Final Field Fit
FF
Hold FF for Final Fit.
Customer to Furnish
Dimensions.
FF
1
Field Measure
Dimension A
2
3
4
5
Final
Field
Fit
Equipment
Switchgear
Edge of
Housing
Edge of Housing
1
2
Edge of Housing
Edge of Housing
1
A
2


September 2011

Contents

12.0-1

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

12

001

T
r
a
n
s
f
e
r

S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s
M
e
d
i
u
m

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

Medium Voltage Vacuum Breaker Transfer Switches


12.0-2

Automatic Transfer Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.0-4

Protection and Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.0-4

Auxiliary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.0-5

Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.0-6


12.0-8
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Medium Voltage Vacuum Breaker
Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Medium Voltage Transfer Switch
12.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

12


General Description

002

Reliability and Control with
Vacuum Technology and
Microprocessor-Based Logic

Medium Voltage Vacuum
Breaker Transfer Switch

Eatons Electrical Sector is an
innovator of low and medium voltage
manual transfer switches and has
expanded these capabilities into
medium voltage automatic transfer
switches (MV ATS) that combine
proven vacuum technology and
microprocessor-based logic.

Why Use Vacuum Circuit Breakers
Instead of Load Interrupter
Switches for Automatic Transfer?

Vacuum circuit breakers are suitable
for multiple switching (500010,000
or even more) operations between
sources involved in automatic
transfer system. Duty cycle of load
interrupter switch is limited (5 to 50
operations) by ANSI C37.22

Vacuum circuit breakers are rated for
both load current switching as well
as interrupting fault currents, where
as the load interrupter switches are
rated for load current switching only

Vacuum circuit breakers allow use of
various relay schemes (for example,
phase and ground overcurrent,
under and overvoltage, under and
overfrequency, directional overcur-
rent, directional power, differential,
etc.) for protection and coordination
as desired for a given application.
Relaying schemes are either not
possible or very limited when using
load interrupter switches

Drawout circuit breakers are easily
maintainable

Metal-Clad

Compartmentalized with drawout
circuit breaker switches (CBS). The
metal-clad assembly and all compo-
nents are designed, manufactured
and tested in accordance with the
latest applicable standards of NEMA

SG-4 and SG-5, and but not limited
to IEEE C37.20.2. UL

and CSA

listings are available.
The MV ATS style is perfect for any
emergency or backup system and
suitable for service entrance use. It
provides reliable automatic transfer
to standby power when:

The normal power source fails

Peak shaving is used

The power source is unreliable

Backup power is mandated by code
or local regulations
Eaton manufactures all MV ATS basic
components and provides one year full
warranty, eliminating problems that
can arise with multiple warranties for a
single piece of equipment. Assembly
and manufacturing is completed in
ISO

certied facilities.

Seismic Qualied

Eatons medium voltage circuit
breaker transfer switch assemblies
are seismically tested or qualied by
analysis based on actual testing done
on similar equipment, to exceed the
requirements based upon the
following 2009 IBC parameters:

Site Classication D (Also covers
Site Classication A, B and C):

F

a

= 1.0 (and higher for lower
values of S

S

)

F

v

= 1.5 (and higher for lower val-
ues of S

1

)

Spectral Response Accelerations:

S

S

= 285%g, and S

1

= 124%g

S

MS

= 2.85g, S

M1

= 1.86g

S

DS

= 2.51g, S

D1

= 1.24g

Eatons test criteria:


Peak front-to-back and side-to-
side spectral accelerations in the
frequency range of 312 Hz plot-
ted at 5% damping are greater
than 2.51g (S

DS

). The vertical
capabilities are at least 2/3 that
of the horizontal. These levels
exceed the required 2009 UBC
seismic levels for the entire
continental United States with
the exception of areas near the
New Madrid fault zone

Standard Control Features

Lights:

Normal position

Emergency position

Normal source available

Emergency source available

Undervoltage/overvoltage,
underfrequency/over

frequency

sensing on Source 1

Undervoltage/overvoltage,
underfrequency/over

frequency

sensing on Source 2

Six timers:

TDNE = Time Delay Normal
to Emergency

TDEN = Time Delay Emergency
to Normal

TDES = Time Delay Engine Start

TDEC = Time Delay Engine
Cooldown

TDEF = Time Delay Emergency
Failure

TDN = Time Delay Neutral

Programmable engine test mode
and test run timer

Source-1 availableone Form C
contact

Source-2 availableone Form C
contact

Communication capability via
PowerNet

Real-time clock and date

Phase reversal on Source 2

Phase reversal on Source 1

Go to Emergency feature

Preferred source selector for use on
systems comprised of utility/utility
or utility/generator

Overcurrent lockout feature

Plant Exerciser with fail-safe feature

Automatic or manual
pushbutton re-transfer selection

PT ratio set points

Closed Transition with Default to
In-Phase Transition with Default to
Time Delay Neutral (for closed
transition switches only)

Additional Options

Overcurrent protection:

Normal

Emergency

Eatons Power Xpert

and IQ metering: normal and
emergency


12.0-3

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

12


General Description

003

Eaton IQ Analyzer metering: normal
and emergency

Space heater

Closed transition with sync check

Partial discharge InsulGard

relay

Communications:

INCOM

Modbus RTU

Modbus TCP/IP (Ethernet)

Circuit Breaker Switches

Switching is provided by Eatons
VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers in
ANSI voltages of 5 kV, 15 kV, 27 kV
and 38 kV.
Circuit breaker switches (CBS) are
horizontal drawout types up to 27 kV.
The 38 kV CBS is a roll-on-the-oor
design and rolls directly in and out of
the bottom compartment.
The CBS includes ve major compo-
nents: vacuum interrupter pole units,
stored energy mechanism, push rod
assembly, primary disconnecting con-
tacts, and removable glass polyester
insulating barriers.

Vacuum Interrupters

Each CBS includes three vacuum
interrupters, separately mounted in
a self-contained, self-aligning pole
unit that is easily removed. A direct
reading contact erosion indicator
is clearly visible when the CBS is
withdrawn from the compartment.
Each vacuum interrupter pole unit is
mounted on glass polyester supports
for 5 kV and 15 kV ratings and epoxy
supports for 27 kV and 38 kV ratings.
The unique, nonsliding current
transfer system from the movable
vacuum interrupter stem to the CBS
consists of a series of tin-plated, high
conductivity copper leaf conductors.
The conductors are swaged onto the
movable vacuum interrupter stem
and provide:

Improved current ow because the
multi-point contact offers very low
electrical resistance

No required maintenance because
the current transfer from the
movable stem to the CBS primary
conductor is a nonsliding and
nonrolling design

Longer vacuum interrupter life

Operation

Operation is by a motor-charged
stored energy spring mechanism
charged by a universal electric motor,
or a manual levering tool in an emer-
gency. The stored energy mechanism
is a true mechanically and electrically
trip-free design, meaning that while
holding a mechanical trip command,
the breaker contacts will not close or
touch while receiving an electrical or
mechanical close command.
Each CBS is electrically operated by
these control voltages: 120 Vac close
and ac capacitor trip, or 48 Vdc, 125
Vdc or 250 Vdc. AC control voltage is
derived from potential transformers
connected in the line side of each CBS.
The DC control voltage is provided by
the user.
Controls and indicators are functionally
grouped on the front control panel and
include: closing spring status, close
and trip button, operation counter,
contact status indicators and a T
handle latch (located at the bottom of
the control panel). Each CBS includes
a control switch, and red and green
lights to indicate the CBS contact
position.

Contacts

Primary disconnects are silver-plated
copper. Secondary contacts are silver-
plated and automatically engage in
the CBS operating position. They can
be manually engaged in the CBS
test position.

Safety

Double deadfront shields isolate the
operator from high voltage when the
CBS is energized. The CBS can be
connected or disconnected with the
compartment door closed by a
manually operated levering device.
Safety interlocks provide for the
mechanism to be held mechanically
trip-free during racking. Closing
springs will discharge automatically
when the CBS is being withdrawn.

Maintenance

The stored energy mechanism and
control components are easily accessi-
ble and can be inspected by removing
the front panel. Minor maintenance
when required, such as lubricating the
mechanism and accessing the control
components, is simplied.

Operation Sequence

T

ransfer is initiated by Eatons

ATC
controller microprocessor-based logic
door mounted device.
Two ATC controller models, Open or
Closed Transition, are available.
Both models are identical except that
the closed transition ATC controller
will not initiate the transfer until both
power sources are synchronized in
voltage, frequency and phase angle.
If a power source is lost, the closed
transition ATC controller will operate
in the open mode.
ATC controller capabilities include:

Continuous monitoring of all three
phases of all loads and voltage on
the source and bus

Generator testing under load

Simplied, custom programming
on the faceplate keypad to meet
specic user requirements. There
are no DIP switches to set

Visual status indications of both
sources and the load.

Easy-to-use:

At-a-glance overview of the MV
ATS status and parameters and
key diagnostic data

Real-time values for volts and
frequency can be viewed on the
LED display plus the power
source in use

Displays historical information
including Source 1 and Source 2
run time, available time, and
connected time, load energized
time, number of transfers, and the
date, time and reason for the last
16 transfers

ATC-600 Open Transition Transfer

When the system is operating from the
normal source, the ATC-600 controller
indicates real-time values for volts
and frequency on the front panel LED
display with an indication of the power
source in use. The ATC-600 controller
continuously monitors either single-
phase or three-phase voltages for
Source 1, Source 2 and the load. The
ATC-600 controller allows system con-
guration selection for Source 1/
Source 2 as Utility/Generator, or Dual
Generator, or Dual Utility.
When Source 1 voltage or frequency
is detected to be below user-
programmed set points, transfer to
Source 2 is initiated. The transfer
occurs when Source 2 voltage and
frequency are detected to be within
programmed parameters.
While the load is connected to Source 2,
the ATC-600 controller continues to
monitor Source 1. When Source 1
voltage and frequency return to within
programmed parameters of Source 1,

and after a programmed time delay, load

transfer back to Source 1 is initiated.
The load transfer back to Source 1 is
open type because the Source 2 circuit
breaker switch is opened rst after
which the Source 1 circuit breaker
switch is closed.
12.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 12
General Descriptions
004
ATC Controller
ATC-800
ATC-800 Closed Transition Transfer
When the system is operating from
the normal source, Eatons ATC-800
controller indicates real-time values for
volts and frequency on the front panel
LED display with an indication of the
power source in use. The ATC-800
controller continuously monitors either
single-phase or three-phase voltages
for Source 1, Source 2 and the load.
The ATC-800 controller allows system
conguration selection for Source 1/
Source 2 as Utility/Generator, or Dual
Generator, or Dual Utility.
The ATC-800 controller provides for
selection of closed transition enabled
or disabled.
When enabled, it is possible for load
to be transferred from Source 1 to
Source 2 without interruption of power
to the load when both sources are
available. The source paralleling
during load transfer is less than
100 milliseconds.
When disabled, the two sources
cannot operate in parallel.
When Source 1 voltage or frequency
is detected to be below the user-
programmed set points, transfer to
Source 2 is initiated. The transfer
occurs when Source 2 voltage and
frequency are detected to be within
the programmed parameters.
While the load is connected to Source
2, the ATC-800 controller continues to
monitor Source 1. When Source 1
frequency and voltage return to within
programmed limits of Source 1, and
after a programmed time delay, the
load is transferred back to Source 1.
When the closed transition mode is
enabled, Source 1 is closed rst, then
Source 2 is opened without power
interruption to the load. When in the
disabled mode, Source 2 is opened
rst and then Source 1 is closed.
Note: See Page 12.0-6 for ATC controller
programming selections and ratings.
Bus and Bus Insulation
Bus
The main bus is copper. A set of either
1200A or 2000A main bus is provided
with provisions for future extension.
Bolted bus connections are silver-
plated for positive contact and low
resistance. Each joint is insulated
with easily installed boots. The bus
is braced to withstand fault currents
equal to the close and latch rating of
the circuit breakers. All bus, bus sup-
ports and connections will withstand
stresses produced by currents equal
to the momentary ratings of the circuit
breakers.
Temperature rise of the bus and con-
nections conforms to ANSI standards
and is documented by factory testing.
The copper ground bus extends the
entire length of the MV ATS. An
optional fully rated neutral bus
(insulated or noninsulated) extends
the entire length of the MV ATS.
Bus Insulation
The main bus is insulated with epoxy,
applied in the uidized bed process.
When applied in this process, the
epoxy is nonhygroscopic, inert, and
track, mold and fungus resistant.
Thermal and electrical performance
is enhanced because the epoxy is
bonded directly to the bus bar conduc-
tor, eliminating the air gap between
insulation and conductor. Heat transfer
is greatly improved, resulting in the
bus system running cooler. No air
gap exists for insulation damage or
corona discharge.
The main bus supports are glass
polyester for 5 kV and 15 kV ratings
(except 63 kA rating) and cyclo-
aliphatic epoxy for 27 kV and 38 kV
ratings. The main bus supports for
63 kA ratings are porcelain.
Terminations and
Secondary Wiring
Eatons MV ATS includes terminal
blocks for secondary wire terminations
plus an inventory of spare terminal
connections. One control circuit
cutout device is provided in each
CBS housing.
Secondary wire is #14 AWG, Type SIS
rated 600 Vac, 90C. The wires termi-
nate on terminal blocks, identied on
marker strips numbered in agreement
with the connection diagrams.
Incoming line and feeder cable lugs
are provided.
Protective Relays
Customer-requested protective relays
can be provided and installed in the
MV ATS. Refer to Tab 4.
Partial Discharge Sensing
and Monitoring
Refer to Tab 5, Section 5.3 for details
of partial discharge sensing and
monitoring option.
Metering
Customer-requested metering can
be provided. Associated instrument
transformers are included.
Current transformers are provided and
wired to shorting-type terminal blocks.
Potential transformers are provided
including primary and secondary
fuses with disconnecting means
for metering.
A choice of Eaton microprocessor-
based metering is available, such as
IQ Series or Power Xpert. Refer to
Tab 2.
Enclosure Construction
Metal-clad integrity provides maxi-
mum circuit separation and safety
through isolated grounded metal
compartments, complete isolation of
all conductors, and no live parts are
exposed when a door is opened.
Communications
When the ATC controller is provided
with an Eaton IPONI communication
network interface, an MV ATS can be
included on a PowerNet communica-
tions network, providing for remote
monitoring and control using a PC.
Outdoor Enclosures
Two outdoor enclosure styles are
available.
Aisleless, mounted on an integral
base frame with a weatherproof
enclosure for eld assembly. A
weatherproof door is provided
on the circuit breaker switch
drawout side
Sheltered aisle mounted on an inte-
gral base frame with a weatherproof
enclosure for eld assembly. The
enclosure is extended on the circuit
breaker switch drawout side to form
an operating and/or maintenance
aisle with sufcient space to permit
interchange of circuit breaker
12.0-5
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 12
General Description
005
switches. A weatherproof door with
an inside quick release latch mecha-
nism is located at each end of the
inside, even when locked from the
outside. Interior lights, light switches,
and duplex ground fault receptacles
are provided in the aisle.
Each vertical section is provided with
tubular-type space heaters operated at
half voltage for long life. 500V or 250V
rated heaters are used at 240V or 120V
respectively. Power is furnished from
a control power transformer mounted
in the MV ATS.
As an option, heaters can be wired
to provide temporary heating during
storage.
Auxiliary Equipment
Voltage and Control Power Transformers
Voltage transformers are drawout-
drawer mounted for ratings up
to 27 kV.
Control power transformers up
to 15 kV, 15 kVA, single-phase are
drawout-drawer mounted.
Voltage transformers for 38 kV rating
and control power transformers for
27 kV and 38 kV ratings are x mounted
with primary fuses in drawout doors.
Up to three voltage transformers can
be mounted in a drawer.
Drawers are in enclosed auxiliary
compartments and can be withdrawn
on rails for easy inspection, testing
and fuse replacement. When a
drawer is withdrawn, the fuses
are automatically disconnected,
grounded, and primary bus stabs
isolated by glass polyester shutters.
A mechanical interlock is provided so
that the secondary circuit breaker must
be open before the control power
transformer drawer or control power
transformer primary fuse drawer can
be withdrawn.
Ring-type current transformers are
provided with thermal and mechanical
ratings coordinated with the circuit
breakers. Current transformer accuracy
meets ANSI standards.
Standard current transformer location
on the bus side and line side of the
5 kV, 15 kV and 27 kV CBS units
provide front accessibility so that
adding or changing transformers can
be accomplished when an Eatons MV
ATS is de-energized without breaking
the high voltage connections and
primary insulation.
Shorting terminal blocks are provided
on each current transformer secondary.
Nameplates
External engraved nameplates are
screw mounted on the face of each
MV ATS assembly for each main
and feeder circuit. Nameplates are
laminated plastic with black 0.2-inch
(5.1 mm) high characters on a white
background.
A master nameplate includes MV
ATS designation, voltage and ampere
ratings, short circuit rating, manufac-
turers name, and shop order number.
Internal engraved nameplates are
screw mounted within the MV ATS
to identify control components such
as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons
and switches.
Finish
Standard nish, inside and out, is
a thermosetting, polyester powder
paint (ANSI 61 gray) applied electro-
statically to all metal parts (steel and
aluminum) that are rst precleaned
and phosphatized.
This nish provides excellent mechan-
ical strength and scratch resistance,
resists chalking caused by the suns
ultraviolet rays, and meets the salt
spray requirements of ASTM B-117.
Accessories
Provided for testing, inspection,
maintenance and operation.
Maintenance tool for manually
charging the circuit breaker closing
spring and manually operating
the shutter
Levering crank for moving the
circuit breaker between test and
connected positions
Test jumper for electrically operat-
ing the circuit breaker while out of
the compartment
Lifting yoke for lifting the circuit
breaker on or off compartment rails
Note: For 5 kV, 15 kV and 27 kV circuit
breakers.
Rail extensions and rail clamps.
breakers.
Portable lifting device for lifting the
circuit breaker on or off the rails
breakers.
Ramp for rolling a circuit breaker
directly onto the oor from the
lower compartment
breakers.
Test cabinet for testing electrically
operated circuit breakers outside
housing
Dockable transport dolly for
moving a circuit breaker outside
of the cabinet
breakers.
Electrical levering device.
Factory Testing
Circuit Breaker Switch Element
Alignment test with master
cell to verify all interfaces and
interchangeability
Circuit breaker operated over a
range of minimum to maximum
control voltage
One-minute dielectric test
Circuit Breaker Switch Housing
Alignment test with master circuit
breaker to verify interfaces
One-minute dielectric test on
primary and secondary circuits
Operational sequence test to
verify operation of wiring, relays
and other devices
Final inspection and quality check
Three certied copies of the factory
test reports are provided.
Test Witnessing
As an option, all factory tests can
be witnessed by the customer or
customer representative.
Installation
Complete installation, startup, testing
and long-term maintenance is avail-
able from Eatons Electrical Services
& Systems (EESS).
12.0-6
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 12
Technical Data
006
Table 12.0-1. ATC Controller Programming Selections
Optional parameters.
Table 12.0-2. ATC Controller Ratings
Optional.
Parameters Set Points ATC Controller
Open Transition Closed Transition
Time delay normal to emergency
Time delay emergency to normal
Time delay engine cool-off
0 to 1800 seconds
0 to 1800 seconds
0 to 1800 seconds
Time delay engine start

Time delay neutral
0 to 120 seconds
0 to 120 Seconds or based on load voltage decay
(10 to 30% of nominal voltage)
Closed
Closed transition frequency differential
Closed transition voltage deviation
Enabled or disabled
0.0 to 0.3 Hz
1 to 5% (voltage)
Single-phase
In-phase frequency differential
Synchronized time
Enabled or disabled
0.0 to 3.0 Hz
1 to 60 minutes
Load sequencing
Pretransfer
Signal device
0 to 10 devices
0 to 20 seconds
(Up to 10 devices)
Plant exerciser
Preferred source selector
Sensing
System selection
Load or no load transfer (selectable)
Source 1 or source 2 or none
Three-phase or single-phase
Utility/generator or utility/utility or generator/generator
Input control power range 65 Vac rms to 160 Vac rms, 50/60 Hz
Voltage measurements of: Source 1 V
AB
Source 1 V
BC
Source 1 V
CA
Source 2 V
AB
Source 2 V
BC
Source 2 V
CA
Load V
AB
Load V
BC
Load V
CA
Voltage measurement range
Voltage measurement accuracy
Frequency measurement for:
0 to 790 Vac rms, 50/60 Hz
2% of nominal range
Source 1 and source 2
Frequency measurement range
Frequency measurement accuracy
Undervoltage sensing
40 Hz to 60 Hz
0.1 Hz
Source 1 and source 2
Undervoltage dropout range
Overvoltage dropout range
Underfrequency dropout range
Overfrequency dropout range
50 to 90% of nominal range

105 to 120% of nominal voltage
90 to 100% of nominal frequency
100 to 120% of nominal frequency
Contact Outputs
Two Form A contacts for generator start 5A, 250 Vac
5A, 30 Vdc
Four Form A contacts for control functions 10A, 250 Vac
10A, 30 Vdc
Form C contacts for control functions 10A, 250 Vac
10A, 30 Vdc
Front Panel Indications
Mode
Automatic
Test
Program
Blinking LED indicates automatic operation
Illuminated LED indicates unit is in the test mode
Illuminated LED indicates unit is in the program mode
Blinking LED indicates the user is viewing set points in the program mode
LED Lights
Source 1 available: amber
Source 1 connected: green
Source 1 preferred: red
Load energized: red
Source 2 available: amber
Source 2 connected: green
Source 2 preferred: red
LED Display
History information
Set points
Real-time clock
Environmental Temperature Range

Operation
Storage
20C to +70C
30C to +85C
12.0-7
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 12
Technical Data
007
Drawout Vacuum Circuit Breakers
Refer to Tables 5.4-1B, 5.4-2 and 5.4-3
in Tab 5, Section 5.4 for available
VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG
circuit breakers.
Please note maximum available
continuous current is limited to 2000A
for medium voltage transfer switch.
Typical One-Line Diagram
Figure 12.0-1. Typical MV ATS One-Line DiagramUsing Vacuum Breakers
__ kVA
1-Phase CPT
Other Loads
(3) CTs
____ :5 ____ :5
(2 or 3) VTs
VCP-W
Circuit Breaker
Breaker #1
Control Power
(When Required)
Digitrip
3010
(Dual Powered)
IQ Analyzer Meter
(Optional) or
IQ DP-4000 Meter
(Optional)
Surge
Arresters
(Optional)
Normal Power
(Source #1)
____ A, __ MVA
52-1
ATC Controller
GFCI Receptacle
When
Required
Lights
Heaters
____ Ampere Main Bus
(3) CTs
(2 or 3) VTs
VCP-W
Circuit Breaker
Breaker #2
Control Power
(When Required)
Digitrip
3010
(Dual Powered)
IQ Analyzer Meter
(Optional) or
IQ DP-4000 Meter
(Optional)
Surge
Arresters
(Optional)
Emergency Power
(Source #2)
____ A, __ MVA
52-2
To Load
Cable Lugs Cable Lugs
Cable Lugs
12.0-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 12
Layout Dimensions
008
Layout Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 12.0-2. Indoor 5 kV or 15 kV, 1200A Main Breakers
Circuit breakers are packaged and shipped separately.
Indoor 5 kV, 1200A, 250 MVA rating is available in narrow design with
overall width of 52.00 inches (1320.8 mm).
Table 12.0-3. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
Figure 12.0-3. Outdoor Aisleless 5 kV or 15 kV, 1200A Main Breakers

Table 12.0-4. Minimum Recommended Clearances in Inches (mm)
Equipment
Type
Switchgear
Assembly
Circuit
Breaker
Indoor 4400 (1998) 350575 (159261)
Outdoor aisleless 5600 (2542) 350575 (159261)
18.50
(469.9)
Top
Breaker
Bottom
Breaker
Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
7.00
(177.8)
Power Cable Entrance
C
L
Load
Cables
C
L
96.25
(2444.8)
72.00
(1828.8)
Main
Breaker
(1200 A)
Main
Breaker
(1200 A)
Line VTs
Bus CPT
(Optional)
Line VTs
Shipping Group
95.00
(2413.0)
Floor Plan
Front Elevation
Equipment
Type
Front Side Rear
Indoor 70.00 (1778.0) 32.00 (812.8) 36.00 (914.4)
Outdoor aisleless 70.00 (1778.0) 32.00 (812.8) 36.00 (914.4)
Main
Breaker
(1200 A)
Main
Breaker
(1200 A)
Line VTs
Bus CPT
(Optional)
Line VTs
Shipping Group
115.00
(2921.0)
Top
Breaker
Bottom
Breaker
Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
C
L
Load
Cables
C
L
72.00
(1828.8)
101.25
(2571.8)
Floor Plan
Front Elevation
12.0-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 12
Layout Dimensions
009
Figure 12.0-4. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle 5 kV or 15 kV, 1200A Main Breakers

Table 12.0-5. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) Table 12.0-6. Minimum Recommended Clearances in Inches (mm)
Top
Breaker
Bottom
Breaker
Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
C
L
Load
Cables
C
L
72.00
(1828.8)
169.38
(4302.3)
38.00
(965.2)
38.00
(965.2)
Aisle
72.00
(1828.8)
Main
Breaker
(1200 A)
Main
Breaker
(1200 A)
Line VTs
Bus CPT
(Optional)
Line VTs
Shipping Group
120.00
(3048.0)
Floor Plan
Front Elevation
Equipment
Type
Switchgear
Assembly
Circuit
Breaker
Outdoor sheltered aisle 8000 (3632) 350575 (159261)
Equipment
Type
Front Side Rear
Outdoor sheltered aisle N/A 38.00 (965.2) 36.00 (914.4)
12.0-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 12
Layout Dimensions
010
Figure 12.0-5. Indoor 5 kV or 15 kV, 2000A Main Breakers

Figure 12.0-6. Outdoor Aisleless 5 kV or 15 kV, 2000A Main Breakers

Equipment
Type
Switchgear
Assembly
Circuit
Breaker
Indoor 6900 (3133) 410575 (186261)
Outdoor aisleless 8700 (3950) 410575 (186261)
Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
7.00
(177.7)
C
L
Load
Cables
C
L
108.00
(2743.2)
C
L
96.25
(2444.8)
Main
Breaker
(2000 A)
Main
Breaker
(2000 A)
Line VTs Line VTs
Bus CPT
(Optional)
Shipping Group
95.00
(2413.0)
Floor Plan
Front Elevation
Equipment
Type
Front Side Rear
Indoor 70.00 (1778.0) 32.00 (812.8) 36.00 (914.4)
Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
C
L
Load
Cables
C
L
108.00
(2743.2)
C
L
101.25
(2571.8)
Main
Breaker
(2000 A)
Main
Breaker
(2000 A)
Line VTs Line VTs
Bus CPT
(Optional)
Shipping Group
115.00
(2921.0)
Floor Plan
Front Elevation
12.0-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 12
Layout Dimensions
011
Figure 12.0-7. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle 5 kV or 15 kV, 2000A Main Breakers
Aisles shipped separately.

Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
Aisle

C
L
Load
Cables
C
L
108.00
(2743.2)
C
L
169.38
(4302.3)
72.00
(1828.8)
38.00
(965.2)
38.00
(965.2)
Main
Breaker
(2000 A)
Main
Breaker
(2000 A)
Line VTs Line VTs
Bus CPT
(Optional)
Shipping Group
120.00
(3048.0)
Floor Plan
Front Elevation
Equipment
Type
Switchgear
Assembly
Circuit
Breaker
Outdoor sheltered aisle 12,300 (5584) 410575 (186261)
Equipment
Type
Front Side Rear
Outdoor sheltered aisle N/A 38.00 (965.2) 36.00 (914.4)
12.0-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 12
Layout Dimensions
012
Figure 12.0-8. Indoor 27 kV, 1200 or 2000A Main Breakers

Figure 12.0-9. Outdoor Aisleless 27 kV, 1200 or 2000A Main Breakers

Equipment
Type
Switchgear
Assembly
Circuit
Breaker
Indoor 1200A
Indoor 2000A
7100 (3223)
7400 (3360)
415 (188) each
475 (216) each
Outdoor aisleless 1200A
Outdoor aisleless 2000A
8900 (4041)
9200 (4177)
415 (188) each
475 (216) each
Main
Breaker
(1200 or 2000 A)
Main
Breaker
(1200 or 2000 A)
Line VTs Line VTs
Bus CPT
(Optional)
Shipping Group
95.00
(2413.0)
Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
7.00
(177.7)
C
L
Load
Cables
C
L
108.00
(2743.2)
C
L
96.25
(2444.8)
Floor Plan
Front Elevation
Equipment
Type
Front Side Rear
Indoor 70.00 (1778.0) 32.00 (812.8) 36.00 (914.4)
Main
Breaker
(1200 or 2000 A)
Main
Breaker
(1200 or 2000 A)
Line VTs Line VTs
Bus CPT
(Optional)
Shipping Group
115.00
(2921.0)
Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
C
L
Load
Cables
C
L
108.00
(2743.2)
C
L
101.25
(2571.8)
Floor Plan
Front Elevation
12.0-13
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 12
Layout Dimensions
013
Figure 12.0-10. Indoor 38 kV, 1200 or 2000A Main Breakers
Each superstructure is shipped separately.

Secondary
Control Wires
Entrance
7.00
(177.8)
126.00
(3200.4)
128.75
(3270.3)
Load
Cables
C
L
C
L
C
L
84.00
(2133.6)
Shipping Group
42.00
(1066.8)
Shipping Group
100.00
(2540.0)
30.00
(762.0)
Superstructure
Line VTs
&
VT Fuses
Line VTs
&
VT Fuses
Control
Compartment
Main
Breaker
(1200 or 2000 A)
Main
Breaker
(1200 or 2000 A)
Control
Compartment
Control
Compartment
CPT Fuses
(Optional)
Bus CPT
(Optional)
Floor Plan Front Elevation
Equipment
Type
Switchgear
Assembly
Circuit
Breaker
Indoor 1200A
Indoor 2000A
7400 (3360)
7700 (3496)
1080 (490) each
1140 (518) each
Equipment
Type
Front Side Rear
Indoor 84.00 (2133.6) 38.00 (965.2) 42.00 (1066.8)
12.0-14
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 12014


13.0-A

September 2011

Medium Voltage Transformer Selector Guide

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

13

Transformer Product SelectorLiquid-Filled Types

001

Table 13.0-1A. Transformer Product Selector

Transformer Maximum Voltage Available
kVA
CAG
Tab
Types Application
Considerations
Primary Secondary

Unit Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled

Primary Unit
Substation

(Steps down
utility service
voltage)
69 kV 34.5 kV 500 kVA
20 MVA

13 Mineral Oil

Typical outdoor
installation.

Silicone

Applied where
ammability is a concern.

Vegetable Oil

Specied
where ammability and
clean-up are a concern.
Transformer is part of a close-coupled
assembly that includes both primary
and secondary equipment.
High short-circuit strength.
Sealed tank design is impervious to
the environment.

Secondary
Unit Substation

(Provides
secondary
system voltage)
34.5 kV 600V 300 kVA
3750 kVA

14

Pad-Mounted TransformerLiquid-Filled

34.5 kV 5 kV 45 kVA
5 MVA

17 Mineral Oil

Typical outdoor
installation.

Silicone

Applied where

Vegetable Oil

Specied
Stand-alone unit servicing under-
ground distribution loads such as
shopping centers, schools, industrial
and institutional facilities.
Tamper-resistant compartmentaliza-
tion allows unit to be installed in
open access applications.

Network Transformer (Spot Networks)Liquid-Filled

Secondary
Spot Network

34.5 kV 480V 500 kVA
3000 kVA

18 Mineral Oil

Typical outdoor
installation.

Silicone

Applied where

Vegetable Oil

Specied
Network transformers are part of
a commercial spot network system
where multiple transformer units feed
large potential loads in parallel, such
as four 2500 kVA units feeding 480/277
volt loads. Liquid network transformers
have uid-lled primary mag-break
integral switch and network protectors
eld-mounted on the secondary ange
with safety interlocks.
Installations are usually indoors,
and multiple primary circuits and
sources that can be paralleled must
exist upstream, usually supplied by
the utility. Government buildings with
high levels of loads at the utilization
voltage merit these systems.
The loads are not adversely affected
by one primary circuit outage, and
may not be affected by two being
down in four transformer spot
network systems.

Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled

69 kV 34.5 kV 750 kVA
20 MVA

16 Mineral Oil

Typical
outdoor installation.

Silicone

Applied where

Vegetable Oil

Specied
Stand-alone unit servicing under-
ground distribution loads such as
shopping centers, schools, industrial
and institutional facilities.
Tamper-resistant compartmentaliza-
tion allows unit to be installed in
open access applications.
13.0-B



CA08104001E
September 2011

Medium Voltage Transformer Selector Guide

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

13

Transformer Product SelectorDry Types

002

Table 13.0-1A. Transformer Product Selector (Continued)

kVA
CAG
Tab
Types Application
Considerations
Primary Secondary

Unit Substation TransformerDry-Type

Primary Unit
Substation

(Steps down utility
service voltage)
34.5 kV 15 kV 500 kVA
10 MVA

13 VPI

Vacuum pressure
impregnation with polyester
resin. Used in commercial
construction and industrial
application.

VPE

Vacuum Pressure
Encapsulated with silicon resin.
Applied where MIL-1-24092
spec is required (salt-spray
application).

Cast Coil

Uses the electrical
and mechanical strength
of epoxy to provide higher
levels of performance and
environmental protection in
high moisture, dust-laden
and chemical environments.
Windings are hermetically
sealed in epoxy.

Resibloc

Coils insulated
with epoxy and reinforced
with roving glass ber. Highly
resistant to short-circuit forces,
severe climate conditions and
cycling loads.
Transformer is part of a
close-coupled assembly
that includes both primary
Explosion resistant, re
resistant and nonpolluting
to the environment.

Secondary
Unit Substation

(Provides second-
ary system voltage)
34.5 kV 600V 112.5 kVA
3750 kVA

14

Network Transformer (Spot Networks)Dry-Type

Secondary
Spot Network

34.5 kV 480V 500 kVA
3000 kVA

18 VPI

Vacuum pressure
impregnation with polyester
resin. Used in commercial
application.

VPE

Vacuum Pressure
application).

Cast Coil

Uses the electrical
and mechanical strength
of epoxy to provide higher
levels of performance and
environmental protection in
high moisture, dust-laden
and chemical environments.
Windings are hermetically
sealed in epoxy.

Resibloc

Coils insulated
cycling loads.
Network transformers are
part of a commercial spot
network system where multiple
transformer units feed large
potential loads in parallel, such
as four 2500 kVA units feeding
480/277 volt loads. Dry-type
network transformers do
not have an integral switch.
Network protectors are eld
mounted on the secondary
ange, or assembly mounted
in switchgear sections.
Installations are usually
indoors, and multiple primary
circuits and sources that can be
paralleled must exist upstream,
usually supplied by the utility.
Government buildings with
high levels of loads at the
utilization voltage merit
these systems.
The loads are not adversely
affected by one primary
circuit outage, and may not be
affected by two being down
in four transformer spot
network systems.


September 2011

Contents

Primary Unit Substations Secondary 1000V & Above
13.0-1

Sheet

13

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

001

P
r
i
m
a
r
y

U
n
i
t

S
u
b
s
t
a
t
i
o
n
s
S
e
c
o
n
d
a
r
y

1
0
0
0
V

&

A
b
o
v
e

Primary Liquid-Type Substations


13.0-2


13.0-4
Primary Dry-Type Substations


13.0-9


13.0-10
Dry/Liquid-Type Transformers

Technical Data

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0-13
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010

Primary Unit Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled
13.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

13

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21


General Description

002

General Description

Denition

A primary unit substation is a
close-coupled assembly consisting
of enclosed primary high voltage
equipment, three-phase power
transformer and enclosed secondary
medium voltage equipment. The
following electrical ratings are typical:

Primary voltage: 6.969 kV

Transformer kVA: 50020,000 kVA

Secondary voltage: 2.4 kV34.5 kV
A primary unit substation is dened in
the following standards:

NEMA

Standard No. 201-1982

IEEE

Standard No. 100-1977
Primary unit substations are used to
step down utility distribution voltages
to in-plant distribution voltages.
Primary unit substation transformers
are designed, manufactured and
tested in accordance with applicable
IEEE standards.

Advantages

As a result of locating power
transformers and their close-coupled
equipment as close as possible to
the areas of load concentration, the
secondary distribution cables or
busways are kept to minimum lengths.
This concept has obvious advantages
such as:

Reduced power losses

Improved voltage regulation

Improved service continuity

Reduced exposure to faults

Increased exibility

Minimum installation cost

Efcient space utilization
Additional advantages of Eatons
unit substations in this unied
approach are:

Single-source responsibility

Complete electrical and mechanical
control over coordination of the
three close-coupled sections

Availability of all switchgear
types as secondaries gives
broad application exibility

Modern design

Composite assembly retains proven
safety and integrity of each of its
three major parts

Primary Unit Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled

Easier to Specify

Standardization through IEEE
standards results in proven designs
with complete accessory equipment
and features.

Highest Short-Circuit Strength

Highly researched and thoroughly
tested designs provide the short-circuit
strength necessary to withstand the
repeated large short-circuit currents
that are available in modern systems.

Easier Handling and Reduced
Maintenance

Compact designs reduce the cost of
rigging and hauling and require smaller
installation space. Straight-forward
design and simplied accessories
reduce maintenance costs.

Ratings Available

kVAThree-Phase:

6.969 kV (350 kV BIL and below)

50020,000 kVA

Frequency:

60 Hz or 50 Hz

Transformer Fluids:

Mineral oil

Silicone uid

Environmentally friendly uid

Note:

For additional information
about insulating uids, see

Tab 14

,

Pages 14.0-3

14.0-8

.

Primary and Secondary Equipment:

Air terminal chamber (ATC)

Load interrupter switchgear,
Type MVS

Metal-enclosed circuit breaker switch-
gear, Types MEB, MEF and MSB

Metal-clad circuit breaker
switchgear, Type VacClad-W

MV motor control assemblies,
Type AMPGARD

Cover-mounted bushings (liquid
transformer only)

Medium voltage busway

Note:

For additional information about
transformer applications and types of
insulating uids, see

Tab 14

.


13.0-3

September 2011


Sheet

13

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21


General Description

003

Standard Features
Liquid-Filled Transformer

Coverwelded to tank

Cooling tubes (radiators)

Note:

Radiator position and number of
radiators will vary based upon design.

Bolted handhole on cover

Automatic resealing mechanical
pressure relief device

HV bushing, three total, located in
ANSI Segment 2

LV bushing, four total (wye
connected), located in ANSI
Segment 4

Note:

HV and LV bushings may be cover
mounted or left/right orientation may be
reversed.

Z-bar ange

Lifting loopstwo for lifting
cover only

Lifting hooksfour for lifting
complete unit

Jacking provisions on tank or base

Ground padtwo total

Drain valvefor combination
lower lter press connection and
complete drain with sampler

Base (may be at or formed)

Control cabinet for alarm lead
termination

Diagram instruction nameplate
with warning nameplate

De-energized tap changer with
padlock provisions

Liquid temperature indicator with
maximum indicating hand

Upper valve for upper lter press
connection

Magnetic liquid level gauge

Vacuum pressure gauge with air
test and Sealedaire

valve

Figure 13.0-1. Liquid-Filled Primary Unit Substation Transformer with Wall-Mounted HV
and LV Bushings
H3
H2
H1
X0
X3
X2
X1
Top View
Front View
13.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

13

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21


Layout Dimensions

004

Layout Dimensions

Figure 13.0-2. Outdoor Liquid-Filled Primary Unit SubstationsPlan View

Radiator position and number of radiators will vary based on design.

Table 13.0-1. Outdoor Dimension References

Four-wire connections are not available with MVC equipment.

For three-phase, four-wire, D
1F
and D
2F
are 30.25.

1R
and D
2R
are 14.5.

Contact Eaton.

This product is not available for this voltage and conguration.

Equipment Dimensions Reference

Transformer
MVC
MVS
ME
MC
W, D
W
S
, D
S
W
P
, D
P
, W
S
, D
S
W
P
, D
P
, W
S
, D
S
W
P
, D
P
, W
S
, D
S

Pages 13.0-6

through

13.0-8
Tab 10, Pages 10.1-24 through 10.1-40

Transition Section or Throat and other Reference Dimensions

Primary or Secondary
Equipment
Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Four-Wire

D
1F
D
1R
W
1
D
2F
D
2R

5 kV MVC

12 21
5 kV
or
15 kV
MVS
ME
MC
25.25

25.25

16.5

20
20
16
25.25

25.25

16.5

27 kV MVS
ME
MC

35
35
38 kV MVS
ME

MC

35
Transition Section or Throat
D
Secondary
Equipment
D
2F
D
2R
D
S
D
1F
D
1R
D
P
Primary
Equipment
Transformer
Center Line
W W
1
W
1
W
P
W
S
Front

Legend:

MVC = Medium Voltage Motor Control,
Type AMPGARD
MVS = Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed
Switches, Type MVS
ME = Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed
Breakers, Type MEB, MEF, MSB
MC = Medium Voltage Metal-Clad Breaker
Assemblies, Type VacClad-W


13.0-5

September 2011


Sheet

13

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
005
Substation with Air Terminal Chamber (ATC)
UtilizationLiquid-Filled Transformer
A substation using one or two Air
Terminal Chambers (ATCs) is different
from a substation using close-coupling
on both the primary and secondary
sides. An ATC uses a cable connection
on either the primary side, secondary
side or both, and is placed between
the transformer and the remotely
mounted primary or secondary
equipment.
Figure 13.0-3. Liquid-Filled Indoor/Outdoor Using Air Terminal ChambersTop View

Table 13.0-2. Primary or Secondary ATC or Transition SectionDimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: Minimum ATC widths by kVA are listed in the table above. The width of any ATC can be
expanded to allow for the installation of additional conduits. When calculating the area of the
conduit opening, allow for a 2.00-inch (50.8 mm) lip around the entire perimeter of the ATC.
Voltage Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Three-Phase, Four-Wire
kV W
1
D
P
W
2
D
S
5 or 15
27
38
22.00 (558.8)
25.00 (635.0)
35.00 (889.0)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
22.00 (558.8)
25.00 (635.0)
35.00 (889.0)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)

Transformer

A
i
r

T
e
r
m
i
n
a
l

C
h
a
m
b
e
r
C
L
D
S
D
TX
W
TX W
1
D
P
of Transformer
A
i
r

T
e
r
m
i
n
a
l

C
h
a
m
b
e
r
W
2
13.0-6
September 2011
Sheet 13
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
006
For special 55C rise units, bus duct throats and air terminal
chambers, see Notes 2 through 6 at bottom of page for
dimensions that should be added to the table dimensions.
Table 13.0-3. 65C Rise, Oil-Filled
HV 6900D, 75 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
Notes: 1. Dimensions are APPROXIMATE. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION.
2. For 55C units, add 5.00 inches (127.0 mm) to W
dimension and 10 in (254.0 mm) to D dimension.
3. Add 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) to W dimension for each
bus duct throat.
15 kV air terminal chamber.
34.5 kV air terminal chamber.
HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 12470Y, 95 BIL
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
500
750
1000
4520 (2050)
4750 (2155)
5590 (2536)
120 (454)
150 (568)
170 (644)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
56 (1422.4)
56 (1422.4)
59 (1498.6)
56 (1442.4)
56 (1442.4)
59 (1498.6)
1500
2000
2500
7380 (3348)
8890 (4032)
10,060 (4563)
210 (795)
240 (908)
260 (984)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
67 (1701.8)
70 (1778.0)
70 (1778.0)
67 (1701.8)
70 (1778.0)
70 (1778.0)
3000
3750
5000
11,110 (5039)
13,200 (5987)
18,020 (8174)
290 (1098)
340 (1287)
620 (2347)
95 (2413.0)
95 (2413.0)
113 (2870.2)
70 (1778.0)
73 (1854.2)
74 (1879.6)
70 (1778.0)
73 (1854.2)
74 (1879.6)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
4840 (2195)
5720 (2595)
7370 (3343)
160 (606)
180 (681)
210 (795)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
56 (1422.4)
59 (1498.6)
65 (1651.0)
79 (2006.6)
78 (1981.2)
92 (2336.8)
2000
2500
3000
8760 (3973)
9940 (4509)
11,650 (5284)
230 (871)
260 (984)
350 (1325)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
95 (2413.0)
68 (1727.2)
68 (1727.2)
70 (1778.0)
114 (2895.6)
125 (3175.0)
127 (3225.8)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
13,330 (6046)
16,640 (7548)
30,300 (13,744)
34,830 (15,799)
390 (1476)
480 (1817)
1220 (4618)
1230 (4656)
95 (2413.0)
95 (2413.0)
114 (2895.6)
114 (2895.6)
72 (1828.8)
75 (1905.0)
113 (2870.2)
118 (2997.2)
127 (3225.8)
131 (3327.4)
138 (3505.2)
139 (3530.6)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
5120 (2322)
5980 (2712)
7280 (3302)
170 (644)
180 (681)
210 (795)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
57 (1447.8)
62 (1574.8)
63 (1600.2)
79 (2006.6)
81 (2057.4)
100 (2540.0)
2000
2500
3000
8700 (3946)
10,290 (4667)
11,860 (5380)
230 (871)
270 (1022)
320 (1211)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
95 (2413.0)
65 (1651.0)
70 (1778.0)
73 (1854.2)
108 (2743.2)
114 (2895.6)
127 (3225.8)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
13,410 (6083)
17,030 (7725)
29,720 (13,481)
35,790 (16,234)
360 (1363)
520 (1968)
1140 (4315)
1310 (4959)
95 (2413.0)
99 (2514.6)
109 (2768.6)
116 (2946.4)
73 (1854.2)
75 (1905.0)
113 (2870.2)
117 (2971.8)
129 (3276.6)
131 (3327.4)
140 (3556.0)
143 (3632.2)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
5650 (2563)
6400 (2903)
8020 (3638)
220 (833)
220 (833)
250 (946)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
59 (1498.6)
61 (1549.4)
64 (1625.6)
81 (2057.4)
87 (2209.8)
101 (2565.4)
2000
2500
3000
9500 (4309)
10,550 (4785)
12,000 (5443)
280 (1060)
300 (1136)
330 (1249)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
95 (2413.0)
68 (1727.2)
70 (1778.0)
73 (1854.2)
101 (2565.4)
107 (2717.8)
127 (3225.8)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
14,350 (6509)
19,110 (8668)
30,880 (14,007)
39,080 (17,726)
450 (1703)
700 (2650)
1210 (4580)
1600 (6057)
95 (2413.0)
117 (2971.8)
117 (2971.8)
124 (3149.6)
73 (1854.2)
74 (1879.6)
102 (2590.8)
106 (2692.4)
128 (3251.2)
129 (3276.6)
140 (3556.0)
145 (3683.0)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
5660 (2567)
6640 (3012)
8000 (3629)
210 (795)
230 (871)
250 (946)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
58 (1473.2)
62 (1574.8)
64 (1625.6)
83 (2108.2)
87 (2209.8)
107 (2717.8)
2000
2500
3000
9350 (4241)
10,860 (4926)
12,400 (5625)
290 (1098)
310 (1173)
340 (1287)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
95 (2413.0)
66 (1676.4)
71 (1803.4)
73 (1854.2)
107 (2717.8)
107 (2717.8)
130 (3302.0)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
14,500 (6577)
19,510 (8850)
30,270 (13,730)
38,140 (17,300)
430 (1628)
720 (2725)
1120 (4240)
1500 (5678)
95 (2413.0)
118 (2997.2)
118 (2997.2)
124 (3149.6)
74 (1879.6)
74 (1879.6)
101 (2565.4)
105 (2667.0)
130 (3302.0)
132 (3352.8)
143 (3632.2)
146 (3708.4)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
6630 (3007)
7510 (3406)
9040 (4100)
250 (946)
280 (1060)
290 (1098)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
65 (1657.0)
66 (1676.4)
69 (1752.6)
64 (1625.6)
78 (1981.2)
88 (2235.2)
2000
2500
3000
10,110 (4586)
11,670 (5788)
12,760 (5793)
290 (1098)
330 (1249)
350 (1325)
92 (2336.8)
92 (2336.8)
95 (2413.0)
70 (1778.0)
73 (1854.2)
74 (1879.6)
96 (2438.4)
106 (2692.4)
130 (3302.0)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
15,280 (6931)
19,370 (8786)
30,850 (13,993)
38,320 (17,382)
440 (1666)
650 (2461)
1180 (4467)
1450 (5489)
95 (2413.0)
107 (2717.8)
114 (2895.6)
122 (3098.8)
75 (1905.0)
76 (1930.4)
100 (2540.0)
104 (2641.6)
133 (3378.2)
136 (3454.4)
139 (3530.6)
143 (3632.2)
13.0-7
September 2011
Sheet 13
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
007
HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 13800Y, 95 BIL
dimension and 10 inches (254.0 mm) to D dimension.
bus duct throat.
Table 13.0-12. 65C Rise,
Silicone/Environmentally Friendly Fluid
HV 6900D, 75 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
7000 (3175)
7720 (3502)
9880 (4481)
330 (1249)
350 (1325)
380 (1438)
115 (2921.0)
115 (2921.0)
115 (2921.0)
67 (1701.8)
67 (1701.8)
69 (1752.6)
66 (1676.4)
79 (2006.6)
98 (2489.2)
2000
2500
3000
11,300 (5126)
12,880 (5842)
13,760 (6241)
410 (1552)
450 (1703)
460 (1741)
115 (2921.0)
115 (2921.0)
115 (2921.0)
71 (1803.4)
71 (1803.4)
72 (1828.8)
112 (2844.8)
122 (3098.8)
130 (3302.0)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
16,030 (7271)
19,780 (8972)
30,270 (13,730)
39,290 (17,822)
520 (1968)
660 (2498)
1070 (4050)
1480 (5602)
115 (2921.0)
117 (2971.8)
129 (3276.6)
136 (3454.4)
85 (2159.0)
100 (2540.0)
124 (3149.6)
127 (3225.8)
136 (3454.4)
138 (3505.2)
138 (3505.2)
140 (3556.0)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
7230 (3279)
8040 (3647)
9920 (4500)
340 (1287)
360 (1363)
390 (1476)
115 (2921.0)
115 (2921.0)
115 (2921.0)
68 (1727.2)
68 (1727.2)
69 (1752.6)
67 (1701.8)
80 (2032.0)
94 (2387.6)
2000
2500
3000
11,700 (5307)
13,120 (5351)
14,400 (6532)
430 (1628)
460 (1741)
500 (1893)
115 (2921.0)
115 (2921.0)
115 (2921.0)
71 (1803.4)
73 (1854.2)
76 (1930.4)
116 (2946.4)
124 (3149.6)
128 (3251.2)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
16,210 (7353)
20,490 (9294)
31,470 (14,275)
36,390 (16,506)
540 (2044)
740 (2801)
1190 (4505)
1190 (4505)
115 (2921.0)
124 (3149.6)
133 (3378.2)
132 (3352.8)
77 (1955.8)
95 (2413.0)
122 (3098.8)
125 (3175.0)
136 (3454.4)
139 (3530.6)
140 (3556.0)
145 (3683.0)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
9110 (4132)
9370 (4250)
10,760 (4881)
410 (1552)
390 (1476)
410 (1552)
115 (2921.0)
115 (2921.0)
115 (2921.0)
72 (1828.8)
72 (1828.8)
72 (1828.8)
63 (1600.2)
70 (1778.0)
93 (2362.2)
2000
2500
3000
12,210 (5538)
13,600 (6169)
14,990 (6799)
450 (1703)
470 (1779)
510 (1931)
115 (2921.0)
115 (2921.0)
115 (2921.0)
72 (1828.8)
74 (1879.6)
77 (1955.8)
108 (2743.2)
109 (2768.6)
125 (3175.0)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
16,590 (7585)
20,480 (9290)
32,220 (14,615)
38,460 (17,445)
540 (2044)
710 (2688)
1050 (3975)
1350 (5110)
115 (2921.0)
122 (3098.8)
125 (3175.0)
135 (3429.0)
77 (1955.8)
94 (2387.6)
123 (3124.2)
124 (3149.6)
137 (3479.8)
138 (3505.2)
139 (3530.6)
148 (3759.2)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
4930 (2236)
5940 (2694)
7690 (3488)
160 (606)
180 (681)
220 (833)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
48 (1219.2)
52 (1320.8)
59 (1498.6)
76 (1930.4)
92 (2336.8)
95 (2413.0)
2000
2500
3000
9270 (4205)
10,630 (4822)
12,280 (5570)
250 (946)
280 (1060)
340 (1287)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
62 (1574.8)
62 (1574.8)
63 (1600.2)
107 (2717.8)
112 (2844.8)
121 (3073.4)
3750
5000
14,540 (8446)
18,620 (8453)
380 (1438)
580 (2196)
87 (2209.8)
98 (2489.2)
67 (1701.8)
68 (1727.2)
122 (3098.8)
123 (3124.2)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
5010 (2272)
6090 (2762)
7730 (3506)
160 (606)
180 (681)
220 (833)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
48 (1219.2)
53 (1346.2)
55 (1397.0)
79 (2006.6)
82 (2082.8)
116 (2946.4)
2000
2500
3000
9270 (4205)
10,510 (4767)
12,100 (5488)
250 (946)
270 (1022)
310 (1173)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
59 (1498.6)
61 (1549.4)
65 (1651.0)
118 (2997.2)
119 (3022.6)
119 (3022.6)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
14,380 (6523)
18,490 (8387)
32,180 (14,597)
46,580 (21,128)
390 (1476)
560 (2120)
1020 (3861)
1760 (6662)
87 (2209.8)
97 (2463.8)
98 (2489.2)
119 (3022.6)
65 (1651.0)
68 (1727.2)
112 (2844.8)
120 (3048.0)
121 (3073.4)
122 (3098.8)
131 (3327.4)
131 (3327.4)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
5340 (2422)
6120 (2776)
7660 (3475)
180 (681)
190 (719)
220 (833)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
49 (1244.6)
51 (1295.4)
56 (1422.4)
79 (2006.6)
82 (2082.8)
116 (2946.4)
2000
2500
3000
9080 (4119)
11,180 (5071)
12,470 (5656)
250 (946)
290 (1098)
310 (1173)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
59 (1498.6)
64 (1625.6)
66 (1676.4)
118 (2997.2)
119 (3022.6)
115 (2921.0)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
14,590 (6618)
18,330 (8314)
31,330 (14,211)
39,050 (17,713)
360 (1363)
540 (2044)
970 (3672)
1230 (4656)
87 (2209.8)
93 (2362.2)
98 (2489.2)
101 (2565.4)
68 (1727.2)
68 (1727.2)
111 (2819.4)
114 (2895.6)
121 (3073.4)
122 (3098.8)
131 (3327.4)
131 (3327.4)
13.0-8
September 2011
Sheet 13
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
008
HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 12470Y, 95 BIL
dimension and 10 in (254.0 mm) to D dimension.
bus duct throat.
HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 13800Y, 95 BIL
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
5970 (2708)
6820 (3093)
8710 (3951)
230 (871)
240 (908)
280 (1060)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
52 (1320.8)
54 (1371.6)
57 (1447.8)
73 (1854.2)
91 (2311.4)
95 (2413.0)
2000
2500
3000
10,140 (4599)
11,890 (5393)
13,480 (6114)
310 (1173)
338 (1279)
380 (1438)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
58 (1473.2)
62 (1574.8)
66 (1676.4)
110 (2794.0)
121 (3073.4)
124 (3149.6)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
15,820 (7176)
19,250 (8732)
32,700 (14,832)
50,160 (22,752)
440 (1666)
540 (2044)
1090 (4126)
2200 (8328)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
100 (2540.0)
120 (3048.0)
68 (1727.2)
70 (1778.0)
99 (2514.6)
118 (2997.2)
125 (3175.0)
129 (3276.6)
133 (3378.2)
133 (3378.2)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
6090 (2762)
7110 (3225)
8630 (3918)
230 (871)
250 (946)
280 (1060)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
52 (1320.8)
55 (1397.0)
56 (1422.4)
75 (1905.0)
91 (2311.4)
102 (2590.8)
2000
2500
3000
10,050 (4559)
12,170 (5520)
13,600 (6169)
310 (1173)
350 (1325)
380 (1438)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
58 (1473.2)
63 (1600.2)
66 (1676.4)
107 (2717.8)
114 (2895.6)
116 (2946.4)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
15,300 (6940)
19,350 (8777)
32,590 (14,783)
40,250 (18,257)
420 (1590)
580 (2196)
1040 (3937)
1370 (5186)
87 (2209.8)
89 (2260.6)
94 (2387.6)
109 (2768.6)
68 (1727.2)
70 (1778.0)
98 (2489.2)
102 (2590.8)
126 (3200.4)
129 (3276.6)
134 (3403.6)
137 (3479.8)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
6930 (3143)
7920 (3592)
9370 (4250)
360 (1363)
300 (1136)
310 (1173)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
56 (1422.4)
58 (1473.2)
59 (1498.6)
66 (1676.4)
72 (1828.8)
90 (2286.0)
2000
2500
3000
11,240 (5098)
12,760 (5788)
14,260 (6468)
330 (1249)
370 (1401)
390 (1476)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
87 (2209.8)
62 (1574.8)
66 (1676.4)
69 (1752.6)
104 (2641.6)
110 (2794.0)
111 (2819.4)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
15,910 (7217)
19,830 (8995)
33,990 (15,418)
39,610 (17,967)
420 (1590)
530 (2006)
1100 (4164)
1280 (4845)
87 (2209.8)
89 (2209.8)
94 (2387.6)
109 (2768.6)
69 (1752.6)
71 (1803.4)
97 (2463.8)
99 (2514.6)
122 (3098.8)
130 (3302.0)
139 (3530.6)
139 (3530.6)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
7600 (3447)
8460 (3837)
10,740 (4872)
370 (1401)
390 (1476)
420 (1590)
107 (2717.8)
107 (2717.8)
107 (2717.8)
60 (1524.0)
60 (1524.0)
62 (1574.8)
68 (1727.2)
84 (2133.6)
107 (2717.8)
2000
2500
3000
12,260 (5561)
13,760 (6241)
15,020 (6813)
460 (1741)
490 (1855)
520 (1968)
107 (2717.8)
107 (2717.8)
107 (2717.8)
64 (1625.6)
64 (1625.6)
66 (1676.4)
115 (2921.0)
121 (3073.4)
121 (3073.4)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
16,950 (7688)
20,270 (9194)
33,980 (15,413)
42,340 (19,205)
570 (2158)
650 (2461)
1200 (4542)
1440 (5451)
107 (2717.8)
109 (2768.6)
120 (3048.0)
129 (3276.6)
78 (1981.2)
92 (2336.8)
117 (2971.8)
150 (3810.0)
129 (3276.6)
132 (3352.8)
136 (3454.4)
136 (3454.4)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
7930 (3597)
8840 (4010)
10,710 (4858)
380 (1438)
400 (1514)
440 (1666)
107 (2717.8)
107 (2717.8)
107 (2717.8)
61 (1549.4)
61 (1549.4)
62 (1574.8)
68 (1727.2)
81 (2057.4)
95 (2413.0)
2000
2500
3000
12,530 (5684)
13,920 (6314)
15,620 (7085)
470 (1779)
500 (1893)
560 (2120)
107 (2717.8)
107 (2717.8)
107 (2717.8)
64 (1625.6)
66 (1676.4)
69 (1752.6)
117 (2971.8)
117 (2971.8)
127 (3225.8)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
17,580 (7974)
20,980 (9516)
32,460 (14,724)
40,320 (18,289)
610 (2309)
680 (2574)
1080 (4088)
1360 (5148)
107 (2717.8)
108 (2743.2)
119 (3022.6)
129 (3276.6)
71 (1803.4)
84 (2133.6)
116 (2946.4)
119 (3022.6)
127 (3225.8)
132 (3352.8)
135 (3429.0)
135 (3429.0)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
9270 (4205)
9900 (4491)
11,620 (5271)
400 (1514)
420 (1590)
460 (1741)
107 (2717.8)
107 (2717.8)
107 (2717.8)
65 (1651.0)
65 (1651.0)
65 (1651.0)
55 (1397.0)
67 (1701.8)
96 (2438.4)
2000
2500
3000
13,160 (5969)
14,580 (6613)
16,090 (7298)
500 (1893)
530 (2006)
560 (2120)
107 (2717.8)
107 (2717.8)
107 (2717.8)
65 (1651.0)
67 (1701.8)
69 (1752.6)
117 (2971.8)
117 (2971.8)
123 (3124.2)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
17,930 (9711)
21,410 (9720)
32,060 (14,542)
41,850 (18,983)
600 (2271)
680 (2574)
1010 (3823)
1330 (5035)
108 (2743.2)
110 (2794.0)
114 (2895.6)
122 (3098.8)
77 (1955.8)
77 (1955.8)
116 (2946.4)
148 (3759.2)
130 (3302.0)
131 (3327.4)
132 (3352.8)
116 (2946.4)
13.0-9
September 2011
Sheet 13
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General Description
009
General Description
VPI
Aluminum windingscopper
optional
Step-lap mitered core
220C insulation system150C
average temperature rise
Vacuum pressure impregnated in
polyester resin
Four full-capacity taps on HV
winding rated 2-1/2% 2-FCAN
2-FCBN on units with voltage
above 601V
NEMA 1 heavy-gauge ventilated
enclosure with removable panels
front and rear
ANSI 61 gray paint electrostatically
applied using dry powder
Vibration isolation pads between
core and coil and enclosure
Base equipped with jacking pads
and designed for rolling or skidding
enclosure in any direction
Provisions for lifting core and
coil assembly
Diagrammatic aluminum nameplate
100% QC impulse test
Short-circuit design verication
VPE
optional
Vacuum pressure encapsulated
silicone resin
above 601V
front and rear
coil assembly
Short-circuit design verication
Dry-Type Unit Substation Transformer
Cast Coil
Windings cast in a mold. HV coils
vacuum cast in epoxy in a metal
mold. LV coils encapsulated/
pressure-injected in epoxy for
600V and below
optional
above 601V
front and rear
coil assembly
Partial discharge-free (less than
20 pc at 120% rated voltage)
RESIBLOC
High voltage windings cast in epoxy
reinforced by berglass rovings
Copper high voltage, aluminum low
voltage windings
above 601V
front and rear
coil assembly
Partial discharge-free (less than
20 pc at 120% rated voltage)
13.0-10
September 2011
Sheet 13
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
010
Layout Dimensions
Figure 13.0-4. Indoor VPI/VPE/Cast/RESIBLOC Primary Unit SubstationsPlan View
Table 13.0-21. Indoor Dimension References
Front to rear centerline aligns with centerline of the transformer.
Four-wire connections are not available with MVC equipment.

Note: Surge arresters as discussed in Tabs 7 and 8 can be located in the primary of
Note: Dimensions are APPROXIMATE.
Equipment Dimensions Reference
Transformer
MVC
MVS
ME
MC
W, D
W
S
, D
S
W
P,
D
P,
W
S,
D
S
W
P,
D
P,
W
S
, D
S
W
P,
D
P,
W
S
, D
S
Page 13.0-12
Transition Section Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Primary or Secondary
Equipment
W
1
5 kV 15 kV 27 kV 38 kV
MVC
MVS
ME
MC
7.5
0
20
18
0
20
18
30
30
36
30
30
42
D
P
Primary
Equipment
Front
T
r
a
n
s
i
t
i
o
n

S
e
c
t
i
o
n
Secondary
Equipment
Transformer
W
1
W
1
T
r
a
n
s
i
t
i
o
n

S
e
c
t
i
o
n
D
W
P
W W
S
D
S
Legend:
Type AMPGARD
Switches, Type MVS
13.0-11
September 2011
Sheet 13
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
011
Substation with Air Terminal
Chamber (ATC) Utilization
Dry-Type Transformer
A substation using one or two air
terminal chambers (ATCs) is different
from a substation using close-coupling
on both the primary and secondary
sides. An ATC uses a cable connection
on either the primary side, secondary
side or both, and is placed between
the transformer and the remotely
mounted primary or secondary
equipment.
Figure 13.0-5. Dry-Type Indoor Using Air Terminal ChambersTop View
Transformer dimensions are shown on the following page in Table 13.0-23.
ATC depths shall match transformer depth, for any kVA of interest. See Table 13.0-23.
Table 13.0-22. Primary or Secondary ATC or Transition SectionDimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: Minimum ATC widths by kVA are listed in the table above. The width of any ATC can be
expanded to allow for the installation of additional conduits. When calculating the area of the
conduit opening, allow for a 3.00-inch (76.2 mm) lip around the entire perimeter of the ATC.
Voltage Three-Phase, Three-Wire or
ATC Widths ATC Depths
kV W
1
W
2
D
5 or 15
27
38
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
D
TX
D
TX
D
TX
Transformer
D
D
TX
W
TX
W
1
D
Front
W
2

A
i
r

T
e
r
m
i
n
a
l

C
h
a
m
b
e
r
A
i
r

T
e
r
m
i
n
a
l

C
h
a
m
b
e
r
13.0-12
September 2011
Sheet 13
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
012
Table 13.0-23. VPI/VPE/Cast/RESIBLOC Ventilated Dry-TypeDimensions in Inches (mm)
Aluminum Windings, Standard Design and Losses, Delta-Wye
VPI/VPE = 150C Rise, Cast/RESIBLOC = 80C Rise
Notes: 1. Add 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) to width dimension for each 15 kV air terminal chamber.
2. Add 30.00 inches (762.0 mm) to width dimension for each 25 kV air terminal chamber.
3. Add 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) to width dimension for each 38 kV air terminal chamber.
4. Dimensions are APPROXIMATE. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION.
kVA HV (kV) HV BIL Height Width Depth Weight in Lbs (kg)
VPI/VPE Cast/RESIBLOC
5 kV Secondary
2000 15
27
38
95
125
150
102 (2590.8)
112 (2844.8)
130 (3302.0)
120 (3048.0)
130 (3302.0)
148 (3759.2)
68 (1727.2)
72 (1828.8)
78 (1981.2)
11,000 (4994)
13,000 (5902)
13,500 (6129)
14,000 (6356)
16,000 (7264)
18,000 (8172)
2500 15
27
38
95
125
150
112 (2844.8)
130 (3302.0)
138 (3505.2)
124 (3149.6)
140 (3556.0)
150 (3810.0)
68 (1727.2)
78 (1981.2)
78 (1981.2)
13,500 (6129)
15,000 (6810)
15,500 (7037)
17,000 (7718)
19,000 (8626)
21,000 (9534)
3000 15
27
38
95
125
150
120 (3048.0)
130 (3302.0)
138 (3505.2)
130 (3302.0)
140 (3556.0)
150 (3810.0)
72 (1828.8)
78 (1981.2)
78 (1981.2)
16,500 (7491)
18,500 (8399)
19,500 (8853)
22,000 (9988)
24,000 (10,896)
26,000 (11,804)
5000 15
27
38
95
125
150
130 (3302.0)
138 (3505.2)
140 (3556.0)
140 (3556.0)
148 (3759.2)
150 (3810.0)
78 (1981.2)
78 (1981.2)
82 (2082.8)
22,000 (9988)
23,000 (10,442)
24,000 (10,896)
31,000 (14,074)
33,000 (14,982)
35,000 (15,890)
7500 15
27
38
95
125
150
140 (3556.0)
140 (3556.0)
140 (3556.0)
150 (3810.0)
150 (3810.0)
154 (3911.6)
78 (1981.2)
84 (2133.6)
88 (2235.2)
24,500 (11,123)
26,000 (11,804)
27,000 (12,258)
48,000 (21,792)
50,000 (22,700)
52,000 (23,608)
10000 15
27
38
95
125
150
140 (3556.0)
140 (3556.0)
148 (3759.2)
160 (4064.0)
160 (4064.0)
160 (4064.0)
78 (1981.2)
84 (2133.6)
90 (2286.0)
29,000 (13,166)
30,000 (13,620)
31,000 (14,074)
62,000 (28,148)
64,000 (29,056)
66,000 (29,964)
15 kV Secondary
2000 27
38
125
150
102 (2590.8)
112 (2844.8)
120 (3048.0)
130 (3302.0)
72 (1828.8)
72 (1828.8)
12,000 (5448)
13,500 (6129)
18,000 (8172)
20,000 (9080)
2500 27
38
125
150
112 (2844.8)
120 (3048.0)
140 (3556.0)
140 (3556.0)
78 (1981.2)
78 (1981.2)
14,000 (6356)
14,500 (6583)
21,000 (9534)
23,000 (10,442)
3000 27
38
125
150
120 (3048.0)
124 (3149.6)
148 (3759.2)
150 (3810.0)
78 (1981.2)
82 (2082.8)
15,500 (7037)
16,000 (7264)
26,000 (11,804)
28,000 (12,712)
5000 27
38
125
150
124 (3149.6)
130 (3302.0)
150 (3810.0)
154 (3911.6)
88 (2235.2)
88 (2235.2)
17,500 (7945)
19,000 (8626)
35,000 (15,890)
37,000 (16,798)
7500 27
38
125
150
140 (3556.0)
140 (3556.0)
154 (3911.6)
160 (4064.0)
88 (2235.2)
90 (2286.0)
20,500 (9307)
22,500 (10,215)
52,000 (23,608)
54,000 (24,516)
10000 27
38
125
150
148 (3759.2)
148 (3759.2)
160 (4064.0)
160 (4064.0)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
23,500 (10,669)
25,000 (11,350)
66,000 (29,964)
68,000 (30,872)
13.0-13
September 2011
Sheet 13
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
013
ANSI Segment Identication
for HV and LV Bushings/
Terminations on Dry and
Liquid Transformers
The plan view below shows the ANSI
segments used to identify the location
of both the HV and LV bushings.
Figure 13.0-6. Front (Nameplate, Gauges, etc.)
HV: Segment 2 is standard for
wall-mounted bushings
(optional Segment 4)
Segment 3 is standard for
cover-mounted bushings
LV: Segment 4 wall-mounted is
standard (optional Segment 2)
Note: See Tab 9 for fuse selections.
Segment 1
Segment 2
Segment 3
Segment 4
Table 13.0-24. Dry-Type Transformer Rating Table112 to 10,000 kVA
First BIL rating given below is standard. Others shown are optional.
Table 13.0-25. Liquid Transformer Rating Table500 to 10,000 kVA
First BIL rating given below is standard. Others shown are optional.
Transformers will have a minimum 98% efciency for all ratings
(maximum 2% losses).
Table 13.0-26. Standard Sound LevelsDecibels (per ANSI TR-1)
Table 13.0-27. Standard Impedances (Percent)
6.75% is also available as an option.

Primary/Secondary
BIL kV
Maximum Voltage (kV)

20/30/45
30/45/60/75/95
45/60/75/95
60/75/95/110/125
2.5
5.0
8.7
15.0
110/125
125
150
25.0
27.0
34.5
Primary Secondary
BIL kV
Voltage Range BIL kV Voltage Range

95/110
95/110
125/150
125/150
125/150
125/150
150/200
150/200
150/200
150/200
250
350
12000D, 12470D, 13200D, 13800D
12000D, 12470D, 13200D, 13800D
22900D
22900D
22900D
22900D
34400D, 34500D
34400D, 34500D
34400D, 34500D
34400D, 34500D
46000
69000
45
60
45
60
75
95
45
60
75
95
2400Y, 2400D, 2520D
4160Y, 4160D, 4360Y, 4800D, 5040D
2400Y, 2400D, 2520D
4160Y, 4160D, 4360Y, 4800D
6900D, 7200D, 7560D, 8320D, 8720D
12000D, 12470Y, 12600D, 13090Y,
13200Y, 13200D, 13800Y, 14400D
2400Y, 2400D, 2520D
4160Y, 4160D, 4360Y, 4800D, 5040D
6900D, 7200D, 7560D 8320Y, 8720D
12000D, 12470Y, 12600D, 13090Y,
13200Y, 13200D, 13800Y, 14400D
kVA Liquid-Filled Transformers Vent Dry-Type and Cast Coil Transformers
OA FA AA FA
500
750
1000
56
58
58
67
67
67
60
64
64
67
67
67
1500
2000
2500
60
61
62
67
67
67
65
66
68
68
69
71
3000
3750
5000
63
64
65
67
67
67
68
70
71
71
73
73
6000
7500
10000
66
67
68
68
69
70
72
73
74
75
76
HV kV BIL
Class
Low Voltage
Below 2400V
Low Voltage
2400V and Above
45150
200
250
350
5.75
7.25
7.75
6.50
7.00
7.50
8.00
13.0-14
September 2011
Sheet 13
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
014
Table 13.0-28. Liquid Filled 15 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise
Note: Losses offered are typical only, not guaranteed. Losses based
on aluminum windings. Losses based on LV rating 25 kV.
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
and 55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1795
2277
3193
10,085
12,741
17,352
11,880
15,018
20,545
4320
5460
7530
2000
2500
3000
4045
4833
5364
21,031
23,776
23,823
25,076
28,609
29,187
9300
10,780
11,320
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6424
8152
11,458
14,565
28,273
35,345
48,205
59,352
34,697
43,497
59,663
73,917
13,490
16,990
23,510
29,400
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
and20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1777
2254
3161
9984
12,613
17,178
11,761
14,867
20,339
4270
5410
7460
2000
2500
3000
4004
4784
4310
20,820
23,538
23,584
24,824
28,322
27,894
9210
10,670
10,210
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6359
8070
11,343
14,419
27,990
34,991
47,722
58,758
34,349
43,061
59,065
73,177
13,360
16,820
23,270
29,110
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1812
2299
3224
10,183
12,865
17,521
11,995
15,164
20,745
4360
5520
7600
2000
2500
3000
4084
4879
4396
21,236
24,008
24,055
25,320
28,887
28,451
9390
10,880
10,410
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6486
8231
11,569
14,707
28,549
35,690
48,676
59,933
35,035
43,921
60,245
74,640
13,620
17,150
23,740
29,690
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
200 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1902
2413
3385
10,692
13,508
18,397
12,594
15,921
21,782
4580
5790
7980
2000
2500
3000
4288
5122
4615
22,298
25,208
25,257
26,586
30,330
29,872
9860
11,420
10,930
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6810
8642
12,147
15,442
29,976
37,474
51,109
62,929
36,786
46,116
63,256
78,371
14,300
18,010
24,920
31,170
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
and 20CNL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1947
2470
3464
10,942
13,823
18,826
12,889
16,293
22,290
4680
5930
8170
2000
2500
3000
4388
5243
5819
22,818
25,796
25,847
27,206
31,039
31,666
10,090
11,690
12,280
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6970
8844
12,431
15,803
30,676
38,349
52,302
64,396
37,646
47,193
64,733
80,199
14,640
18,430
25,510
31,900
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1928
2445
3429
10,832
13,685
18,638
12,760
16,130
22,067
4640
5870
8090
2000
2500
3000
4344
5190
4676
22,589
25,538
25,584
26,933
30,728
30,260
9990
11,570
11,070
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6899
8755
12,307
15,644
30,369
37,965
51,778
63,752
37,268
46,720
64,085
79,396
14,490
18,250
25,250
31,580
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1966
2494
3498
11,048
13,958
19,010
13,014
16,452
22,508
4730
5980
8250
2000
2500
3000
4431
5293
4769
23,041
26,048
26,099
27,472
31,341
30,868
10,190
11,810
11,290
3750
5000
7500
10,000
7037
8930
12,552
15,957
30,875
38,735
52,813
65,027
37,912
47,665
65,365
80,984
14,760
18,610
25,760
32,210
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at1 00%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
200 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
2063
2618
3672
11,600
14,656
19,960
13,663
17,274
23,632
4960
6280
8660
2000
2500
3000
4652
5557
5007
24,193
27,350
27,403
28,845
32,907
32,410
10,700
12,390
11,860
3750
5000
7500
10,000
7388
9376
13,179
16,754
32,523
40,659
55,453
68,277
39,911
50,035
68,632
85,031
15,520
19,540
27,040
33,820
13.0-15
September 2011
Sheet 13
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
015
Table 13.0-36. Biotemp Filled 15 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1774
2258
3188
9587
11,942
15,734
11,361
14,200
18,922
4170
5240
7120
2000
2500
3000
4069
4900
5299
18,298
19,638
21,758
22,367
24,538
27,057
8640
9810
10,740
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6350
8085
11,495
14,824
24,962
30,018
39,066
46,694
31,312
38,103
50,561
61,518
12,590
15,590
21,260
26,500
kVA No load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1756
2235
3156
9491
11,822
15,576
11,247
14,057
18,732
4130
5190
7050
2000
2500
3000
4028
4851
5246
18,115
19,441
21,540
22,143
24,292
26,786
8560
9710
10,630
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6286
8004
11,380
14,675
24,712
29,717
38,675
46,227
30,998
37,721
50,055
60,902
12,460
15,430
21,050
26,230
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1791
2279
3219
9680
12,058
15,887
11,471
14,337
19,106
4210
5290
7190
2000
2500
3000
4108
4948
5350
18,477
19,829
21,970
22,585
24,777
27,320
8730
9910
10,840
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6411
8164
11,607
14,968
25,206
30,311
39,448
47,150
31,617
38,475
51,055
62,118
12,710
15,740
21,470
26,760
kVA No load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
200 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1880
2392
3379
10,164
12,660
16,681
12,044
15,052
20,060
4420
5560
7550
2000
2500
3000
4313
5195
5617
19,400
20,820
23,068
23,713
26,015
28,685
9160
10,400
11,380
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6731
8572
12,187
15,716
26,466
31,826
41,420
49,507
33,197
40,398
53,607
65,223
13,350
16,530
22,450
28,090
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1924
2449
3458
10,401
12,957
17,071
12,325
15,406
20,529
4520
5690
7730
2000
2500
3000
4414
5316
5749
19,853
21,307
23,607
24,267
26,623
29,356
9380
10,970
11,650
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6889
8772
12,472
16,084
27,083
32,569
42,386
50,662
33,972
41,341
54,858
66,746
13,660
16,910
23,070
28,750
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1905
2424
3424
10,297
12,826
16,899
12,202
15,250
20,323
4480
5630
7650
2000
2500
3000
4370
5263
5691
19,654
21,093
23,370
24,024
26,356
29,061
9280
10,540
11,530
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6820
8684
12,347
15,922
26,812
32,242
41,962
50,156
33,632
40,926
54,309
66,078
13,520
16,740
22,840
28,460
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
and 55C LL ref. temp
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1943
2472
3492
10,502
13,082
17,237
12,445
15,554
20,729
4570
5740
7800
2000
2500
3000
4457
5368
5804
20,047
21,514
23,837
24,504
26,882
29,641
9470
10,750
11,760
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6955
8857
12,593
16,240
27,348
32,887
42,801
51,157
34,303
41,744
55,394
67,397
13,790
17,080
23,290
29,030
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp. (Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
200 kV HV BIL Total
Losses at 50% Load
per DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
2039
2595
3666
11,027
13,736
18,098
13,066
16,331
21,764
4800
6030
8190
2000
2500
3000
4679
5636
6094
21,049
22,589
25,028
25,728
28,225
31,122
9940
11,280
12,350
3750
5000
7500
10,000
7303
9300
13,222
17,051
28,715
34,531
44,940
53,715
36,018
43,831
58,162
70,766
14,480
17,930
24,460
30,480
13.0-16
September 2011
Sheet 13
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
016
Table 13.0-44. Typical Losses for Dry-Type Transformers (Watts)
kVA Rating VPI/VPE Cast Coil/RESIBLOC
No Load Loss Load Loss Total Loss No Load Loss Load Loss Total Loss
2000
2500
3000
7000
8500
10,000
30,000
32,500
37,500
37,000
41,000
47,500
6500
8000
9000
18,000
20,000
25,000
24,500
28,000
34,000
5000
7500
10,000
14,500
17,000
23,500
40,000
45,000
55,000
54,500
62,000
78,500
13,500
20,000
22,500
30,000
40,000
50,000
43,500
60,000
72,500


September 2011

Contents

Secondary Unit SubstationsSecondary Below 1000V
14.0-1

Sheet

14

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

001

S
e
c
o
n
d
a
r
y

U
n
i
t

S
u
b
s
t
a
t
i
o
n
s
S
e
c
o
n
d
a
r
y

B
e
l
o
w

1
0
0
0
V

Transformer Fluids and NEC Compliance

Transformer Product Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-2

Transformer Cooling Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-3

Transformer Fluids Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-4

National Electrical Code (NFPA 70 NEC) Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-5
Product Overview

DOE 2010 Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-9

Types of Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-10

Cable Terminal Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-11

Type MVS Load Interrupter Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-11

Type MSB Metal-Enclosed Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-11

Liquid-Filled Substation Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-12

VPI/VPE Dry-Type Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-14

RESIBLOC Epoxy Cast Resin Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-16

Cast Coil Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-18

Integrated Unit SubstationOptional Conguration. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-20

Magnum DS Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-21

DS

II

Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-21

Magnum SB Switchboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-22

Pow-R-Line C Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-22
Layout Dimensions

Composite Floor Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-23

Substation with Air Terminal Chamber (ATC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-28

Primary Switching Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-30

Transformers and Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-31

Outdoor Secondary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-39
Technical Data

Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-41

Primary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-42

Secondary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.0-47
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010

MVS Primary Switch and DSII Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
14.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

14

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21


Product Selection

002

Transformer Product Selector

Table 14.0-1. Transformer Product Selector

kVA
CAG
Tab
Types Application
Considerations
Primary Secondary

Unit Substation TransformerDry-Type

Secondary
Unit Substation

(provides second-
ary system voltage)
34.5 kV 600V 112.5 kVA
3750 kVA

14 VPI

Vacuum pressure impreg-
nation with polyester resin.
Used in commercial
application.

VPE

Vacuum Pressure
application).

Cast Coil

Uses the electrical
and mechanical strength of
epoxy to provide higher levels
of performance and environ-
mental protection in high mois-
ture, dust-laden and chemical
environments. Windings are
hermetically sealed in epoxy.

Resibloc

Coils insulated
cycling loads.
Transformer is part of a
close-coupled assembly
that includes both primary
Explosion-resistant, re-
resistant and nonpolluting
to the environment.

Unit Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled

Secondary
Unit Substation

(provides second-
ary system voltage)
34.5 kV 600V 300 kVA
3750 kVA

14 Mineral Oil

Typical outdoor
installation.

Silicone

Applied where

Environmentally Friendly
Fluids

Specied where
ammability and clean-up
are a concern.
Transformer is part of a close-
coupled assembly that includes
both primary and secondary
equipment.
High short-circuit strength.
Sealed tank design is
impervious to the environment.


14.0-3

September 2011


Sheet

14

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21


Cooling Classes

003

Cooling Classes
of Transformers

The cooling classes of transformers
have recently changed, and are
explained in

Table 14.0-2.

The IEEE

transformer cooling designations were
changed to become consistent with
the IEC standards (IEC 60076-2: 1998).
The new classications are described
in IEEE C57.12.00-2000.
The new cooling designations have
four-letter descriptions that describe
the type of oil, how the oil is internally
circulated, what is used to cool the oil,
and how the oil is externally cooled.
For example: ONAN

Table 14.0-2. IEEE Transformer Cooling Classes
Table 14.0-3. Cooling Classes Comparisons,
Past/Present Designations
O N A N
First Letter
Internal Cooling Medium
In Contact With Windings
O = Mineral oil or other fluid with
fire point 300C
K = Insulating liquid with fire point
>300C
L = Insulating liquid with no
measurable fire point
Second Letter
Circulation Mechanism for
Internal Cooling Medium
N = Natural convection flow through cooling
equipment and in windings.
F = Forced circulation through cooling
equipment (i.e., cooling pumps) and
natural convection flow in windings.
D = Forced circulation through cooling
equipment, directed from the cooling
equipment into at least the main windings.
Third Letter
External Cooling Medium
A = Air
W = Water
Fourth Letter
Circulation Mechanism for
External Cooling Medium
N = Natural convection
F = Forced circulation
fans (air cooling) or pumps
(water cooling)

Designations
Previous Present

OA
FA
OA/FA/FA
ONAN
ONAF
ONAN/ONAF/ONAF
OA/FA/FOA
OA/FOA
OA/FOA/FOA
ONAN/ONAF/OFAF
ONAN/ODAF
ONAN/ODAF/ODAF
FOA
FOW
FOA
FOW
OFAF
OFWF
ODAF
ODWF
14.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

14

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21


Fluids Comparison

004

Transformer Fluids Comparison

Table 14.0-4. Fluid Advantages and Disadvantages
Table 14.0-5. Fluid Properties Comparison

Advantages Disadvantages

Mineral Oil

Low transformer cost

Good dielectric performance

Low maintenance cost

Good heat dissipation

Good cold climate performance

Preventative maintenanceDGA historical data available

Higher installation cost

Vaults required for indoor installations per code low re point160C

<30% Biodegradability

Silicone Fluid

Low heat release

Reduced smoke

Low ame

Self extinguishing


Low toxicity

Moderate viscosity

High stability

Non-biodegradable

Not suitable for use with internal Bay-O-Net fuses

Transformer cost

Disposal cost

Viton gaskets required

Retrol applications

High transformer cost

High moisture absorption

Environmentally Friendly Fluids

High re point360C

High ash point343C

Compatible with mineral oil

Excellent retrol uid (compatible with oil up to a 10% mixture)

Excellent dielectric performance

97% biodegradable

Renewable resource

Greater tolerance to moisture

Transformer cost (lower than silicone uid)

Pour point (15 to 25C) transformer energized with full load with
top oil temperature at 50C with no problemsno crystals formed
at 68C

Property Mineral
Oil
Silicone
Fluid
Fluids

Specic gravity
Flash point C
Fire point C
0.91
145
160
0.96
300
330
0.91
343
360
Viscosity (cSt.) 100C
40C
0C
3
12
76
16
38
90
10
45
300
Pour point C
Dielectric strength, kV
Dissipation factor (%) 25C
-40
30
0.05
-55
4.3
0.01
1525
49
0.0250.05
Permittivity
Resistivity
Oxidation inhibitor
Biodegradability
2.2
10

13

Optional
<30%
2.7
10

14

No
0%
3.1
10

13

Required
97%


14.0-5

September 2011


Sheet

14

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21


NEC Requirements

005

NEC Requirement Guidelines
for the Installation of
Listed Less-Flammable
Liquid-Filled Transformers

NEC (NFPA) Recognition

These guidelines focus on the
requirements of Article 450.23 of
the National Electrical Code

(NEC

)
for the installation of less-ammable
liquid-insulated transformers. Less
ammable liquids are used in trans-
formers where an extra margin of
re safety is important. Typical appli-
cations include installations indoors,
on rooftops, near buildings, bush
and forest re prone areas, and in
pedestrian trafc areas.
Less-ammable liquids, also known as
high re point liquids, are transformer
dielectric coolants that have a mini-
mum re point of 300C. Commonly
used re-resistant uids include dime-
thysiloxane, and ester-based uids.
Two Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratories (NRTL); Underwriters
Laboratories (UL

) and FM approvals
(FM) currently list less-ammable
liquids. They also list less-ammable
liquid-lled transformers.
Less-ammable liquid-lled trans-
formers were formally recognized by
the NEC for indoor installation in 1978.
In 1990, the NEC integrated specic
less-ammable transformer require-
ments for outdoor installations for
Article 450.23, in effect recognizing
less-ammable transformers as
inherently safer than conventional
oil-lled transformers. Less-ammable
transformers, long recognized as an
additional safeguard for indoor instal-
lations, are becoming increasingly
recognized for outdoor applications
as well.

General NEC Requirements

The requirements and options for the
different types of indoor and outdoor
installations are outlined in

Table 14.0-6

.
These guidelines also summarize the
UL classication and FM approvals
installation requirements for less-
ammable uids referred to as
listing requirements in NEC 450.23.
In cases where the transformer instal-
lation presents a re hazard, one or
more of the following safeguards shall
be applied according to the degree of
hazard involved:
1. Space requirements
2. Fire-resistant barriers
3. Automatic re suppression systems
4. Enclosures that conne the oil
of a ruptured transformer tank
NEC Article 450.28, modication of
transformers, requires that when
modications are made to transformers
in existing installations that change the
transformer type, the transformers must
be marked to show the type of insulating
liquid installed and the installations must
comply with current requirements of
the NEC. Examples of changes include
replacing a complete transformer (retro-
tting) or replacement of the liquid only
(retrolling). Askarel (PCB) and conven-
tional mineral oil-lled transformers
are frequently retrotted or retrolled
using less-ammable liquids. NEC
110.34 sets minimum clear work space
dimensions around transformers.

Indoor installations using less-ammable

liquid-insulated transformers must
comply with NEC Article 450.23, which
denes the requirements for three
types of indoor transformer installa-
tions as detailed in

Table 14.0-6

:

Non-combustible building with no
combustible materials stored in area

Combustible building or
combustibles stored in area

Rating greater than 35 kV
The installation of less-ammable liquid-
insulated transformers indoors without
a vault in a Type I or II non-combustible
building where no combustible
materials are stored requires that:
A liquid connement area be provided
The transformer be lled with a
listed less-ammable insulating
liquid with a minimum 300C
re point
The installation comply with the
listing requirements of the liquid
in the transformer
If the installation cannot meet the
liquid listing requirement, it must
be provided with an automatic re
extinguishing system and a liquid
containment or the transformer must
be installed in a vault complying with
NEC 450, Part III, transformer vaults.
Article 450.26 may be followed in
lieu of any requirements listed in
Article 450.23. Exceptions to vault
requirements listed in NEC 450.26 are
also valid for less-ammable uid-
lled installations. Construction
requirements for vaults are detailed
in Part III of Article 450.
Article 450.42 in Part III, transformer
vaults, allows an exception to the
3-hour vault requirement permitting
a 1-hour rated re-resistant rated room
if equipped with an automatic extin-
guishing system.
The installation of less-ammable
liquid-insulated transformers indoors
without a vault in Type I or II non-com-
bustible building where no combusti-
ble materials are stored required that:
A liquid containment area be
provided
The transformer be lled with a
listed less-ammable insulating
liquid with a minimum 300C
re point
The installation comply with the
listing requirements of the liquid
in the transformer
If the installation cannot meet the
liquid listing requirements or one
or more of the exceptions listed in NEC
450.26, the installation must either
be provided with an automatic re
extinguishing system and a liquid
connement area or the transformer
must be installed in a vault, per
NEC 450, Part III.
Article 450.42 in Part III, Transformer
Vaults, allows an exception to the
3-hour vault requirement permitting a
1-hour rated re-resistant rated room
if equipped with an automatic spray
extinguishing system.
If the installation does not comply
with one or more of the exceptions
listed in 450.26, the transformer must
be installed in a vault complying with
NEC 450, Part III transformer vaults.
Article 450.23. Exceptions to vault
requirements listed in Article 450.26
may be followed in lieu of any
requirements listed in NEC 450.26
would also be valid for less-ammable
uid-lled transformer installations.
Construction requirements for vaults
are detailed in Part III of Article 450.
14.0-6
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
NEC Requirements
006
Table 14.0-6. NEC Article 450.23 Requirements
Optionalno additional safeguards are required if one or more Exceptions 1-6 of Article 450.26, oil-insulated transformers installed indoors apply.
Refer to NFPA 220-1999 for denition of non-combustible Type I and II building construction.
Fine print note, Article 450.23, (B) (1) states: Installations adjacent to combustible material, re escapes, or door and window openings may
require additional safeguards such as those listed in Article 450.27.
Installation
Type
NEC
Requirements
Indoor Installations
Transformer rated 35 kV, installed in a non-combustible building
with no combustible materials stored in area.
Both liquid connement, and either of the following listing requirements
:
FM approvals
Both liquid connement and auto extinguishment
Vault per NEC 450, Part III
Transformer rated 35 kV, installed in a combustible building or in a
building with combustible materials stored in area.
Both liquid connement and auto extinguishment
Vault per NEC 450, Part III

Transformer rated >35 kV Vault per NEC 450, Part III
Outdoor Installations
Non-combustible building
and no combustible materials stored

in area.
Either of the following listing requirements
:
FM approvals
Combustible building
or combustible materials stored

in area.
In accordance with NEC Article 450.27, oil insulated transformers installed
outdoors, i.e., space separation, re barriers or water spray systems.
14.0-7
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
NEC Requirements
007
Listing OptionA
Underwriters Laboratories Requirements
The UL classication of less-
ammable liquids per the NEC Article
450.23 for three-phase 4510,000 kVA
transformers requires:
Transformers be equipped with
tanks capable of withstanding
12 psig minimum without rupture
Transformers be equipped with
pressure relief devices with mini-
mum pressure relief capacity per
the UL classication marking
Transformer primaries be protected
with overcurrent protection options
per the UL classication marking
Listing OptionB
Factory Mutual Requirements
The indoor installation requirements
according to factory mutual loss pre-
vention data (LPD) 5-4/14-8, January
1997, revised January 2001, consist
of requirements for all transformer
and uid types. Specic requirements
for less-ammable liquid-insulated
transformers are included. Refer to
Section 2.2.1.2 of FM LPD for special
installation requirements for network
transformers.
General transformer requirements are
as follows:
Minimum 3 ft (0.9m) clearance from
building walls
Liquid containment provisions
Room re-resistance rating based
on uid and transformer type
Room ventilation, if necessary,
to prevent non-thermal damage
Smoke detection with alarm in the
electrical room
formers must comply with one of
the following:
Be FM approved or equivalent
Be located in a room with a 1-hour
re-resistance rating
Have automatic sprinklers above the
transformer and 20 ft beyond with a
discharge density of 0.20 gpm/sq ft
FM Approved Transformer
formers rated 510,000 kVA must be
equipped with specic design and
protection features to be FM approved
or equivalent. Key characteristics
of this protection system are re
properties of the liquid, the ability
to mechanically withstand pressure
generated by a low-level electrical
fault and the ability of electrical protec-
tion to clear a fault before tank rupture.
According to FM approval Standard
3990, the key protection features
are as listed below. Refer to the FM
standard for complete requirements:
The transformer tank rupture
strength shall be a minimum of
15 psi for rectangular and 20 psi
for cylindrical tanks. All transformer
tanks shall be designed to withstand
a pressure of 7 psi without
permanent distortion
The transformer tank shall be pro-
vided with a pressure relief device
to vent internal over-pressures. The
device must be capable of venting a
minimum specied ow rate, based
on the kVA as noted in Table 14.0-7
Section 2.3.3 of the FM approval
Standard 3990. Proper pressure
venting coordinated with proper
tank pressure withstand rating has
proven highly effective in prevent-
ing tank rupture from overpressure
due to internal fault currents below
the trip rating of primary circuit
current limiting fuses
The unit is lled with an FM
approval less-ammable uid
to reduce the probability of ignition
to the liquid. Less-ammable
uids, also known as high re point
or re-resistant liquids, are dielectric
coolants that have a minimum
re point of 300C (572F) per the
ASTM D92 Cleveland Open Cup
test method
Note: For a listing of FM-approved
less-ammable uids, refer to Factory
Mutual Research Approval Guide P7825.
The primary circuit shall have
overcurrent protection that limits
the let-through current (I
2
t) to a
specied maximum value as listed
in Table 14.0-8 and in Section 2.3.5
of the FM approval Standard 3990.
Current-limiting fusing and its
functional equivalents are designed
to interrupt a high current internal
fault before the tank withstand
pressure level is reached. If protec-
tion is designed to vent gas during
operation, such as with expulsion
fuses, this protection shall be
located outside the transformer
tank. Certain exceptions apply
and permit expulsion fusing to
be mounted in the tank if in series
and properly coordinated with
current limiting fusing
The transformer shall have an
additional nameplate with the FM
approval mark with the following
data: tank pressure rating, fuse
part number, pressure relief device
part number, and requirements
particular to the type of installation
14.0-8
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
NEC Requirements
008
Listing OptionB (Continued)
Factory Mutual Requirements
For grounded wye secondary wind-
ings of 150V or more and rated at
1000 or more nominal amperes, a
notication tag shall be provided by
the manufacturer, secured to the
low voltage neutral bushing, advis-
ing that the transformer installation
requires ground fault relay protec-
tion prior to energization (if not
installed at time of manufacturing)
Indoor units greater than 500 kVA
and outdoor units greater than
2500 kVA shall be equipped with
alarm contacts on the pressure
relief device and a rapid-rise relay
Three-phase pad-mounted and
substation transformers shall be
equipped with an oil level gauge.
Additionally, all transformers rated
750 kVA or higher shall be equipped
with a liquid temperature indicator
and pressure-vacuum gauge
Transformers shall be capable
of passing basic lightning impulse
insulation level (BIL) testing at a
minimum tilt of 1.5 from vertical
Table 14.0-7. FM Pressure Relief Device
Required Ratings
Note: For kVA ratings not listed, use next
highest rating in table.
Table 14.0-8. FM Maximum I
2
t Let-Through
Required Ratings
Note: For kVA ratings not listed, use next
lowest rating in table.
kVA Rating Flow Rate
SCFM at 15PSI
(103 kPa)
Three-
Phase
Single-
Phase
112.5
150
300
37.5
50
100
35
50
100
1000
2000
10,000
333
667
3333
350
700
5000
kVA Rating Current
Limiting
Fusing
Other
Protection
Three-
Phase
Single-
Phase
45
75
15
25
500,000
500,000
700,000
800,000
112.5
150
225
37.5
50
75
550,000
600,000
650,000
900,000
1,000,000
1,200,000
300
500
750
100
167
250
750,000
900,000
1,100,000
1,400,000
1,900,000
2,200,000
1000
1500
2000
333
500
667
1,250,000
1,500,000
1,750,000
3,400,000
4,500,000
6,000,000
2500
3000
3750
833
1000
1250
2,000,000
2,250,000
2,500,000
7,500,000
9,000,000
11,000,000
5000
7500
10,000
1667
2500
3333
3,000,000
3,000,000
3,000,000
14,000,000
14,000,000
14,000,000
14.0-9
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Product Overview
DOE Requirements
009
DOE 2010 Requirements
This information details the minimum efciencies required
of power transformers rated 2500 kVA and below, as dened
by the Department of Energy (DOE) Federal Regulation for
Distribution Transformers.
This federal regulation requires all transformers rated
2500 kVA and below with a primary voltage of 35,000V and
below, and a low voltage of 600V and below to meet the
minimum efciency levels as stated below. This regulation
affects all transformers in scope manufactured as of
January 1, 2010. This regulation affects all transformers
installed in the U.S., regardless of domestic or foreign
manufacturing.
Table 14.0-9. High Voltage 35 kV and Below. Low Voltage 600V and
Below. Copper Conductor Windings. Losses in Watts. Three-Phase
Distribution Transformers
Losses offered are typical only, not guaranteed.
Units must typically meet the new DOE efciency guideline levels with
noted losses complying with such.
Dry-Type Unit Substation Transformers
Liquid-Filled <34.5 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load
and 85C
(Watts)
6050 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and 55C
LL Ref. Temp. and
20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
165
220
320
700
1000
1450
865
1220
1770
413
562
696
225
300
500
450
500
750
2200
2600
3600
2650
3100
4350
942
1164
1889
750
1000
1500
1300
1500
1900
5600
7000
9500
6900
8500
11,400
2567
3221
4375
2000
2500
3000
2600
2750
3800
12,000
15,000
16,000
14,600
17,750
19,800
5429
6408
N/A
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
135C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load
and 85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% load and 55C
LL Ref. Temp. and
20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
200
300
375
900
1000
1400
1100
1300
1775
413
562
696
225
300
500
450
500
900
2200
3000
4300
2650
3500
5200
942
1164
1889
750
1000
1500
1000
1500
1900
6000
7000
10,500
7000
8500
12,400
2567
3221
4375
2000
2500
3000
2600
2800
4000
12,500
15,500
18,000
15,100
18,300
22,000
5429
6408
N/A
VPI, 15 kV Primary 150C Temp. Rise
kVA No
Load
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
170C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
170C
(Watts)
4695 kV BIL
Total Losses at
75% Load and
75C Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
300
500
750
1250
1500
2000
4500
8500
10,000
5750
10,000
12,000
2022
2960
3980
1000
1500
2000
2500
3500
4250
13,000
17,000
21,000
15,500
20,500
25,250
4898
6659
8268
2500
3000
3750
5000
9000
11,000
24,000
33,500
35,000
29,000
42,500
46,000
9700
N/A
N/A
5000
7500
10,000
13,000
18,500
23,500
40,000
45,000
55,000
53,000
63,500
78,500
N/A
N/A
N/A
Cast, 15 kV Primary 115C Temp. Rise
kVA No
Load
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
135C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
135C
(Watts)
4695 kV BIL
Total Losses at
75% Load and
75C Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
300
500
750
1250
1500
2500
4000
8000
9000
5250
9500
11,500
2022
2960
3980
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
12,500
16,000
19,000
15,500
20,000
24,000
4898
6659
8268
2500
3000
3750
5500
9000
11,000
20,000
26,000
29,000
25,500
35,000
40,000
9700
N/A
N/A
5000
7500
10,000
13,500
20,000
22,500
30,000
35,000
45,000
43,500
55,000
67,500
N/A
N/A
N/A
14.0-10
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Product Overview
General Description
010
General Description
Denition
A secondary unit substation is a
close-coupled assembly consisting
of enclosed primary high voltage
equipment, three-phase power trans-
formers, and enclosed secondary low
voltage equipment. The following
electrical ratings are typical:
Primary voltage: 2.438 kV
Transformer kVA: 3003750
Secondary voltage: 208, 240, 480
or 600V (maximum)
A secondary unit substation is dened
in the following standards:
NEMA
Standard No. 210

IEEE Standard No. 100
Advantages
As a result of locating power trans-
formers and their close-coupled
secondary switchboards as close as
possible to the areas of load concen-
tration, the secondary distribution
cables or busways are kept to
minimum lengths. This concept
has obvious advantages such as:
Reduced power losses
Improved voltage regulation
Improved service continuity
Reduced exposure to low voltage
faults
Increased exibility
Minimum installation cost
Efcient space usage
Additional advantages of Eatons
unit substations in this unied
approach are:
Single-source responsibility
Complete electrical and mechanical
control over coordination of the
three close-coupled sections
Availability of all switchboard and
switchgear types gives broad
application exibility
Modern design
Composite assembly retains proven
safety and integrity of each of its
three major parts
Types of Distribution Systems
Simple Radial
Figure 14.0-1. Simple Radial
Simple and less costly
Easy to coordinate
No idle parts
Primary Selective
Figure 14.0-2. Primary Selective Radial
Similar to simple radial with added
advantage of a second primary
incoming cable circuit. By switching
to a second circuit, duration of outage
from cable failure is limited.
Secondary Selective
Figure 14.0-3. Secondary Selective
Normally operated as two electrically
independent unit substations, with bus
tie breaker (T) open, and with approxi-
mately half of the total load on each
bus. In case of failure of either primary
incoming circuit, only one bus is
affected, and service can be promptly
restored by opening main breaker (M)
on the dead bus and closing tie breaker
(T). This operation can be made auto-
matic, with duration of outage on
either bus limited to a few seconds.
Because the transformers are not
paralleled, secondary fault currents
and breaker applications are similar to
those on radial unit substations. Service
continuity and substation capacity can
be further improved by substituting
selector type primary switches as in B.
Loop Selective
Figure 14.0-4. Loop Selective
This conguration is based upon a string
of substations being fed from two
sources. The power cables from the rst
source terminate at a loop switch in
the substation primary switchgear
assembly, down the switchgear bus to
another loop switch in the same
switchgear assembly, then back out to
another loop switch in a different
substation. The loop cabling system is
continued through every unit substation
until the cable connects to the second
source. Typically, the path from one
substation to another is broken by an
open switch in one of the substations.
The philosophy is if there is a failure
somewhere, or it is desired to perform
maintenance to cable or a switchgear
assembly, it may be isolated by opening
the appropriate switches in the loop, thus
restoring service to the other substations.
Spot Network (See Tab 18)
Figure 14.0-5. Spot Network
The transformers are parallel on the
secondary sides through network
protectors. In case of primary voltage
failure, the associated protector auto-
matically opens. The other protector
remains closed, and there is no dead
time on the bus, even momentarily.
When primary voltage is restored, the
protector automatically checks for
synchronism and recloses.
Secondary voltage regulation is
improved by paralleled transformers.
Secondary fault capability is increased
by paralleled transformers and the
feeder breakers must be selected
accordingly. Primary switches are
usually selector or duplex type so
that transformers may be transferred
to alternate live sources.
Primary
Switch Transformer
Low-Voltage
Main
Feeders

Duplex
MVS

Selector
MVS

M T

M
MVS

14.0-11
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Product Overview
General Description
011
Cable Terminal Compartment,
Air Filled, No Disconnect
Air Terminal Compartment
Air terminal chamber is furnished when
connecting cables only to the trans-
former, such as in the case when the
primary circuit protection or disconnect
switch is remotely located from the unit
substation. The standard air terminal
chamber is a oor-standing, metal-
enclosure mechanically and electrically
connected to the transformer primary,
and includes the following equipment:
Clamp-type terminals and bus-
connectors, if required, for making
the connection from the bushings to
the customer-furnished incoming
cables
Undrilled entrance plate for top or
bottom entry of customer cables
Cutout and hardware for bolting
to transformer Z-Bar ange
Gasket for installation between
terminal chamber and Z-Bar
ange connection for outdoor
designs only
Removable end panel for access
to chamber
Load Interrupter Switchgear,
Type MVS, Unfused or Fused
Type MVS Fused Switch
Secondary unit substations requiring a
primary disconnect are furnished with
Eatons Type MVS metal-enclosed load
interrupter switchgear assemblies. Each
assembly consists of one (or more)
gang-operated MVS switch(es) with
full air load break characteristics. With
power fuses incorporated into the
assembly, the MVS switchgear provides
short circuit protection for the trans-
former as well. MVS switchgear is
furnished as the standard high side
disconnecting equipment for all
secondary unit substations, both
dry-types and liquid-lled types.
Ratings
See Technical Data Page 14.0-43 for
standard ratings. For additional
details, see MVS Tab 8.
MVS Switchgear Features
Quick-make, quick-break stored
energy manual or optional
electrically operated mechanism
Removable operating handle
conveniently and attractively stored
DE-ION
arc interruption
Positive position indication
Standard insulated cable connections
to transformer (voltage rating 15 kV
maximum) for fused switches
Available with current limiting fuses
or expulsion fuses, or unfused
Proven reliability
UL
or CSA
listing is available as
an option
Figure 14.0-6. MVS Switch Arrangements
Switch Arrangements
In addition to the single, two-position
switch for simple ON-OFF operation
from a single primary feeder, other
standard arrangements are available
for use with primary selective power
centers involving two primary alter-
nate sources. These arrangements
are shown above.
Assembly, Type MSB
MVS switchgear, when provided
with a xed-mounted medium voltage
vacuum circuit breaker instead of
fuses, is termed Type MSB metal-
enclosed switchgear. Use of the
medium voltage circuit breaker in
conjunction with protective relaying
provides a signicantly higher level
of protection for the transformer and
low voltage switchboard/switchgear
than that attainable with fuses. Typical
protection relaying functions are:
Overcurrent and ground fault
protection
Transformer differential
Rate of rise relay on liquid-lled
transformer
On single-ended substations, deleting
the secondary main circuit breaker might
be possible as the medium voltage
circuit breaker and the protective relays
would serve the same purpose. In some
critical applications, it may still be
necessary to apply overcurrent relaying
on the secondary of the transformer to
trip the medium voltage circuit breaker
rather than relying solely on the primary
Other Available Primary Incoming
Line Equipment
Medium voltage metal-clad switchgear.
See Tab 5.
2 Position Duplex
Loop
Selector
14.0-12
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Product Overview
General Description
012
Liquid-Filled Substation
Transformers
Eatons liquid-lled substation trans-
formers are custom-designed power
transformers suitable for both indoor
and outdoor applications.
The transformers are of the sealed
tank design and suitable for use
in coordinated unit substation in
most any type of application and
environment. Typical applications
of liquid-lled transformers are:
Utility substations
Pulp and paper mills
Steel mills
Chemical plants/reneries
General industry
Commercial buildings
Benets
Custom-design exibility to meet
special customer needs and
applications
Computerized loss-evaluated
designs for specic customer
load and evaluation criteria
Standard Features and Accessories
Available in higher kVA ratings
High short-circuit strength
IEEE short-time overload capability
Aluminum or copper windings
Impervious to the environment
through sealed design
Lowest rst cost and comparable
cost of ownership to cast/dry designs
Available as mineral oil-lled or
with less-ammable liquids, such
as silicone or environmentally
friendly uids
Design and Technology
Liquid-lled transformers are custom
designed and manufactured. Coils are
of the rectangular design with Insuldur
layer insulation. Primary windings are
comprised of strap conductors, either
aluminum or copper. Secondary
windings are either full height sheet
conductors or strap conductor depen-
dent on the voltage and kVA rating.
The turn-to-turn insulation is coated
with a diamond pattern of B-stage
epoxy adhesive, which cures during
processing to form a high-strength
bond. This bond restrains the wind-
ings during operation and under
short-circuit stresses.
Liquid-lled transformers are suitable
for use up to 65C average rise over
a maximum ambient temperature of
40C, not to exceed 30C average for
any 24-hour period. The transformer
may be specied as 55C rise, in which
case the transformer has a self-cooled
(OA) overload capability of 112%
without loss of life.
Material used for cores is non-aging,
cold rolled, high permeability, grain-
oriented silicone steel. Cores are rigidly
braced to reduce sound levels and
losses in the nished product.
The core and coil assembly is immersed
in either mineral oil, silicone or
environmentally friendly uids
and is contained in a sealed tank.
Flat, tubular or panel radiators are
mounted on the front and back of the
tank. The liquid circulates through the
tank and radiators by means of natural
convection, and effectively cools the
core and coil assembly.
Liquid-Filled Substation Transformer
Padlockable
No Load Tap Changer
Lifting Hooks and Loops
Pressure Vacuum Gauge
Stainless Steel
Diagrammatic
Nameplate
High Voltage
Cast Resin Bushing
(Not Visible)
Mechanical Relief Device
(Optional)
Welded Tank Cover
Dial Type Thermometer
Magnetic Liquid Level
Gauge (Not Visible)
Low Voltage Sealed
Cast Resin Bushing
LV and HV
Z-Bar Flanges for
Connection to Incoming
Line Section and
Switchgear Section
Provision for Forced Air Cooling
is Standard on Transformers
750 kVA and Above
Upper Filter
Press Connection
(Not Visible)
1.00-Inch Drain Valve with
0.38-inch (9.6 mm) Sampler
NEMA Ground Pad
Base
14.0-13
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Product Overview
General Description
013
Liquid-Filled Substation
Transformers (Continued)
Accessories
Standard accessories include:
De-energized padlockable manual
tap changer
Liquid level gauge
Dial type thermometer
Drain valve
Lifting hooks
Jacking pads
Ground pad
Diagrammatic nameplate
Bolted handhole
Provisions for rolling and skidding
ANSI 61 paint nish
Optional Features
Rapid pressure rise relay with
seal in
Pressure relief device
Pressure vacuum gauge
Upper lter press cap
Dial hot spot indicator
Alarm contacts on gauges
Control power transformer,
single-phase 480120/240V
55C average rise
Non-standard ambient temperature
(30C average/24-hour 40C
maximum is standard)
Non-standard altitude (up to
3300 ft (1006m) is standard)
Non-standard BIL level
Fan cooling package
Lightning arresters
Low loss design (loss evaluation)
Special sound level
Wye-wye connected windings
Tank undercoating
Copper windings/bussing
Containment pan with drain valve
UL listed
FM (factory mutual) certied
Future fan provisions (on units
7502500 kVA)
Core ground strap
Neutral grounding resistor
Factory Tests
The following tests are standard:
Induced potential
Applied potential
Resistance measurement
Ratio test
Polarity and phase relationship test
No load loss
Exciting current at rated voltage
Impedance and load loss
Regulation, calculated from test
results
Mechanical leak test
Special Tests
The following tests can be provided
at additional cost:
Temperature rise
ANSI impulse
Sound level
Corona (partial discharge)
Witness
Insulation resistance and power
factor test
Short circuit
Zero-phase sequence impedance
14.0-14
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Product Overview
General Description
014
VPI/VPE Dry-Type
Transformers
Eatons VPI and VPE transformers
are custom-designed dry-type power
transformers, which give environmen-
tal protection, for both indoor and
outdoor applications. The transform-
ers are explosion-resistant, re-
resistant, non-polluting to the
environment, and ideally suitable for
use in coordinated unit substations.
Typical applications of VPI/VPE
transformers are:
Schools, hospitals, shopping centers
High-rise buildings
Industrial environments
Benets
applications
designs for specic customer load
and evaluation criteria
Environmental protection
Low maintenance
High short-circuit strength
Available in NEMA 1, 2 and
3R enclosures
Economical
Ratings
112.53750 kVA
Primary voltages: 600V35 kV
Primary BIL: up to 150 kV
Secondary voltages: 120V15 kV
Secondary BIL: up to 75 kV
Temperature rise: 80/115/150C
Dry-Type Substation Transformer
The dry-type transformers are custom
designed and manufactured with coils
insulated with 220C Class H Nomex
,
insulation system. Environmental
protection is provided by vacuum
pressure impregnation with polyester
resin (VPI). Enhanced environmental
protection is available through the use
of silicone resin encapsulation (VPE).
The VPE process provides 4-cycle
enhanced environmental protection.
The entire core and coil assembly is
vacuum pressure encapsulated with
a silicone resin per MIL-1-24092. Both
systems are superior to the conven-
tional dry-type technology known as
Dip and Bake. Both resin types, and
Nomex, insulation system are 220C
Class H rated. Transformers with Class
H insulation are suitable for use up to
150C average rise over a maximum
ambient temperature of 40C, not to
exceed 30C average for any 24-hour
period. Other temperature rise options
are 80C and 115C, which allow the
transformer to be overloaded up to
150C rise.
Taps are provided on the central section
of the HV coil face. Taps are accessed by
removing enclosure panels, and taps are
changed by moving the exible bolted
links from one connecting point to the
other. To simplify these changes, the
connection points are clearly identied.
oriented silicone steel. Cores are con-
structed with step lap mitered joints and
are rigidly braced to reduce sound levels
and losses in the nished product.
To reduce the transfer of noise to the
case, the core is mounted on neoprene
rubber vibration dampeners. The core
is electrically grounded by means of
a exible ground braid.
The enclosure has removable panels
for access to taps and for core and coil
inspection. The complete case can be
removed and knocked down to reduce
size and weight for rigging into tight
locations.
Ventilation
Louvers
Fan Control/
Winding
Temperature
Indicator
Removable
Panel
Fan Motor and Blades
Core-Coil
Assembly
14.0-15
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Product Overview
General Description
015
VPI/VPE Dry-Type
Transformers (Continued)
Accessories
Jacking pads
Ground pad
Provisions for rolling
Ventilation grilles
Core ground strap
Primary reconnectable taps
Future fan provisions on units
over 500 kVA
Core ground strap
ANSI 61 paint nish
NEMA 1 enclosure
Optional Features
Copper windings/bussing
(aluminum is standard)
VPE silicone resin vacuum pressure
impregnation and encapsulation
Fan cooling package, complete with
digital winding temperature
80C or 115C rise (150C rise is
standard)
NEMA 3R enclosure
Aluminum or copper ground bus
Lightning arresters
Special sound level
UL label
Tests
Induced potential
Applied potential
Ratio test
No load loss at rated voltage
Quality control impulse
Special Tests
The following tests can be provided at
additional cost:
Temperature rise
ANSI impulse
Sound level
Witness
14.0-16
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Product Overview
General Description
016
RESIBLOC
Epoxy Cast
Resin Transformers
RESIBLOC Substation Transformer
Eatons RESIBLOC cast resin transform-
ers are premium, custom-designed,
dry-type power transformers that offer
longer life, higher BIL levels, superior
mechanical and short-circuit strength,
as well as superior protection against
high moisture, metallic dust-laden and
harsh chemical environments.
RESIBLOC cast resin transformer may
be applied indoors as well as outdoors.
The transformers are explosion-
resistant, re-resistant, non-polluting
to the environment and ideally suitable
for use in a coordinated unit substation.
Typical applications of RESIBLOC cast
resin transformers are:
Steel mills
High-rise buildings/rooftop units
Cement mills and mining operations
Chemical plants
Water-slide installations, sand and
salt spray
Rail transportation systems
Benets
applications
Environmental immunity, unlimited
storage
Practically maintenance free
Highest possible short-circuit
strength
Ultimate withstand to thermal and
mechanical stresses
ANSI short-time overload capability
Copper windings
Available in NEMA 1, 2, 3R
enclosures
Low losses and longest life for
greatest economy of ownership
Ratings
112.53750 kVA
Primary voltages: 2300V34.5 kV
Temperature rise: 80C
The RESIBLOC epoxy cast resin
transformers are custom-designed and
manufactured with coils insulated with
epoxy and reinforced with glass ber.
Low Voltage Windings
Transformer low voltage windings
with an insulation class of 1.2 kV (600V)
and below, are wound using sheet
conductors that allow free current
distribution within the axial width of
the coil and that eliminate the axial
forces developed in other types of
windings under short-circuit condi-
tions. The impregnated insulation
bonds the sheet conductors together
to form a solid winding block for
internal mechanical strength. During
assembly, each low voltage winding
is blocked radially against the core
for additional short-circuit integrity.
High Voltage Windings
Transformer high voltage windings,
insulation class 2.5 kV (2400V) and
above, are wound using the exclusive
RESIBLOC cast resin construction,
which is reinforced with a licensed
glass roving technique. This ber
roving technique was originally
developed for production of synthetic
cylindrical components, such as
containers, which are subject to
high mechanical loads. The use of
the glass ber roving technique in
the manufacture of RESIBLOC
transformers provides mechanical,
thermal and short-circuit strength
that is unequaled. The high coils
are coaxially mounted over the low
voltage windings on the core legs.
Epoxy
The epoxy used in RESIBLOC is a
bisphenol A-based resin that is
halogen-free to ensure that no harmful
decomposition products are formed in
the event of a re. In addition, epoxy
is one of the best non-hygroscopic
materials available for insulation, and
is highly resistive to chemicals and
harsh industrial environments.
Temperature Rise
RESIBLOC cast transformers use
155C class insulation and are typically
specied for 80C average rise over
a maximum ambient temperature
of 40C, not to exceed 30C average
for any 24-hour period.
Taps
Taps are provided on the central
section of the HV coil face. Taps are
accessed by removing enclosure pan-
els, and taps are changed by moving
the exible bolted links from one
connecting point to the other. To
simplify these changes, the connection
points are clearly identied.
Core
oriented silicone steel. Cores are con-
structed with strap lap mitered joints
and are rigidly braced to reduce sound
levels and losses in the nished product.
and associated core clamps and struc-
tural parts are electrically grounded to
prevent an induced voltage buildup.
Enclosure
for access to taps and for core and coil
inspection. The complete case can be
removed and knocked down to reduce
size and weight for rigging into tight
locations.
Accessories
Jacking pads
Ground pad
Ventilation grilles
Core ground strap
over 500 kVA
Reconnectable primary taps
ANSI 61 paint nish
NEMA 1 enclosure
14.0-17
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Product Overview
General Description
017
RESIBLOC Epoxy Cast
Resin Transformers (Continued)
Optional Features
NEMA 3R enclosure
Lightning arresters
Special sound level
Tests
Induced potential
Applied potential
Ratio test
Polarity and phase relationship test.
No load loss
Partial discharge test (for coils rated
1.2 kV and higher)
Special Tests
at additional cost:
Temperature rise
ANSI impulse
Sound level
Witness
14.0-18
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Product Overview
General Description
018
Eatons cast coil transformers are
premium, custom-designed, dry-type
power transformers, which offer longer
life, higher BIL levels, superior short-
circuit strength and superior protection
against high moisture, metallic dust-
laden and harsh chemical environments.
Cast coil transformers may be applied
indoors as well as outdoors.
The transformers are explosion resis-
tant, re resistant, non-polluting to the
environment and ideally suitable for
use in coordinated unit substations.
Typical applications of cast coil
transformers are:
Steel mills
High-rise buildings/rooftop units
Cement mills and mining operations
Chemical plants
Water-side installations, sand and
salt spray
Rail transportation systems
Benets
applications
Environmental immunity,
unlimited storage
Practically maintenance free
Highest possible short-circuit
strength
Available in NEMA 1, 2 and
3R enclosures
Low losses and longest life for
greatest economy of ownership
Ultimate impulse withstand
Moisture and chemical resistant
Ratings
112.53750 kVA
Primary voltage: 2300V46 kV
Temperature rise: 80/100/115C
Cast Coil Substation Transformer
The cast coil transformers are custom-
designed and manufactured with coils
insulated with materials such as glass
mat and DuPont
Nomex. The epoxy

used in the casting process has the
lowest temperature tolerance and
limits the insulation system to 185C.
The thickness of the epoxy is carefully
engineered to provide maximum
strength and environmental protection
and yet minimize the temperature
differential through the core thickness
in order to limit destructive stresses.
HV and LV coils are separately
manufactured and mounted coaxially
on the core legs with blocks to hold
them rmly, yet permit expansion and
contraction. HV windings are wound
with one or more strands of rectangular
wire, into disc or drum development,
and placed into molds. They are
dried and vacuum poured or cast, to
eliminate moisture and voids in the
sealing process. Low voltage windings
are hermetically sealed in epoxy using
one of two processes. The windings
can also be designed with air ducts for
improved cooling performance. The
rst method used to seal low voltage
windings is the pre-impregnated
insulation process. This process
consists of winding the sheet
conductor(s) in parallel with an epoxy
pre-impregnated sheet of insulation.
After the winding process is completed,
the coil is baked to dry the moisture
from the winding and to cure the epoxy
pre-impregnated insulation. The curing
process binds the coil together to form
a solid winding block. The ends of the
coil are then sealed with epoxy for
added protection. The second process
is to cast the low voltage winding in a
mold. Windings with operating voltage
less than 600V are cast using a pressure
injection process. Winding with operat-
ing voltages greater than 600V are
processed using the same techniques
employed for the high voltage wind-
ings. Cast transformers use 185C class
insulation and are typically specied for
80C average rise over a maximum
ambient temperature of 40C, not to
exceed 30C average for any 24-hour
period. Other temperature rise options
are 100C or 115C.
Taps are provided on the central section
of the HV coil face. Taps are accessed
by removing enclosure panels, and
taps are changed by moving the exi-
ble bolted links from one connecting
point to the other. To simplify these
changes, the connection points are
clearly identied.
oriented silicone steel, cores are con-
structed with strap lap mitered joints
and are rigidly braced to reduce sound
levels and losses in the nished product.
and associated core clamps and struc-
tural parts are electrically grounded to
prevent an induced voltage buildup.
for access to taps, and for core and coil
inspection. The complete case can
be removed and knocked down to
reduce size and weight for rigging
into tight locations.
Ventilation
Louvers
Fan Control/
Winding
Temperature
Indicator
Removable
Panel
LV Bus
Core-Coil
Assembly
HV Bus
Fan Motors
and Blades
14.0-19
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Product Overview
General Description
019
(Continued)
Accessories
Jacking pads
Ground pad
Ventilation grilles
Core ground strap
over 500 kVA
Reconnectable primary taps
ANSI 61 paint nish
NEMA 1 enclosure
Optional Features
Copper windings
Full cast secondary
100C or 115C rise (80C rise is
standard)
(30C average/24-hour, 40C
Non-standard BIL levels
NEMA 3R enclosure
Lightning arresters
Special sound level
UL listing
Tests
Induced potential
Applied potential
Ratio test
No load loss
Partial discharge test (for coils rated
1.2 kV and higher)
Special Tests
at additional cost:
Temperature rise
ANSI impulse
Sound level
Witness
14.0-20
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Product Overview
General Description
020
Integrated Unit Substation
Optional Conguration
Integrated Unit Substation
When electrical room space is limited
or when additional electrical system
capacity is required for renovation of
an existing building, unit substation
dimensions can create layout
challenges for electrical designers
and engineers. The solution to these
problems is Eatons IUSintegrated
unit substation.
By combining transformer primary
and secondary protective devices in
a single section, Eatons IUS offers
a signicant oorspace reduction
compared to other substation designs.
The IUS uses a 5 or 15 kV class
VCP-T drawout vacuum breaker for
transformer primary protection,
integrated with a 600V Magnum DS
drawout air circuit breaker for
transformer secondary protection.
Both breakers are in a single UL

listed structure.
The integrated unit substation
addresses issues that matter to
building owners, electrical contractors
and engineers, including:
Reduction in installation time
Fewer structures
Reduction in delivery time
Reduction in overall oor space
Reduction in overall installed costs
Reduction in material handling and
rigging requirements
Product Offering
Up to 15 kV, 1200A primary
(VCP-T breaker up to 25 kAIC)
Up to 600V, 6000A secondary

(Magnum DS breaker up to
100 kAIC)
Main structure is 24.00 inches
(609.6 mm) wide x 91.00 inches
(2311.4 mm) deep
Standard coordination available
to Eaton dry-type or cast-coil
substation transformers
For main breaker applications 4000A or

above, a separate 44.00 inch (1117.6 mm)
structure is required beside the main
24.00 inch (609.6 mm) structure.
Features
Shorter approval drawing
lead-times
Fewer control wiring
interconnections
Improved transformer access
transformer is not sandwiched
between primary and secondary
equipment
Reduction of arc-ash hazard by
incorporating VCP-T primary
breaker with Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System trip unit
IUS Standards
The integrated unit substation
primary/secondary breaker section
is UL listed. The IUS complies with
ANSI C37.20.1 and ANSI C37.51 for
the low voltage compartment, and
ANSI C37.20.3 for the medium
voltage compartment.
Low voltage power switchgear
distribution sections are UL 1558 listed
and comply with ANSI C37.20.1.
Transformer sections are UL 1562
listed and comply with ANSI C37.30.
14.0-21
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Product Overview
General Description
021
Magnum DS Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed
Switchgear
See Tab 20 for complete description and layout information.
Magnum DS
Construction Details
10,000A main bus capacity
Front-access enclosures available for use in front-access
substations, allowing the substation to be placed up
against a wall
All devices individually mounted and compartmentalized
Sections ush front and rear
Drawout construction
Designed for mounting away from the wall
Main DevicesIndividually Compartmentalized
Eatons Magnum DS power circuit breakers with integral
microprocessor-based Digitrip RMS trip units and
stored energy manual or electrical operating mechanism,
8006000A
Feeder DevicesIndividually Compartmentalized
Magnum DS power circuit breakers with integral
8006000A
DSII Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed
Switchgear
Contact Eaton for complete description and layout information.
DSII
6000A main bus capacity
Front and rear accessible
All devices individually mounted and compartmentalized
Sections ush front and rear
All units are drawout construction
Designed for mounting away from wall
Main DevicesIndividually Compartmentalized
Eaton DSII power circuit breakers with integral
8005000A, drawout mounted
DSLII power circuit breakerssame as DSII except
equipped with current limiters for 200 kA fault current
application, 8004000A, drawout mounted
Feeder DevicesIndividually Compartmentalized
DSII power circuit breakers with integral microprocessor-
based Digitrip RMS trip units and stored energy manual
or electrical operating mechanism, 8005000A, drawout
cell mounted
Eaton DSLII power circuit breakerssame as DSII except
equipped with current limiters for 200 kA fault current
application, 8004000A, drawout mounted
14.0-22
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Product Overview
General Description
022
Magnum SB Switchboards
Magnum SB
6000A main bus maximum
Rear accessmain and distribution sections
Drawout feeder devices individually compartmentalized
Designed for mounting with code clearance to a wall
Main DevicesIndividually Mounted
Insulated-case circuit breaker, Magnum SB, 8006000A,
drawout, per UL 1066
Feeder DevicesIndividually Mounted
Insulated-case circuit breaker, Magnum SB, 8004000A,
drawout per UL 1066
Pow-R-Line C Switchboards
Pow-R-Line C
Front and rear accessmain section front and/or
side accessible
Feeder devices panel mounted
Sections rear aligned, or front and rear aligned
Not designed for mounting against a wall, self-supporting
and requires code clearance at the rear
Main DevicesIndividually Mounted
Molded case circuit breaker, 4002500A, xed or drawout
Air power circuit breaker, Magnum DS, 8006000A, xed
or drawout
Air power circuit breaker with current limiting fuses, DSL,
8005000A
Bolted pressure switch, 8005000A, xed
Fusible switches, 4001200A, xed
Feeder DevicesGroup Mounted
Molded-case circuit breaker, 151200A
Fusible switches, 301200A
Feeder DevicesIndividually Mounted
Air power circuit breaker, Magnum DS, 8005000A
Bolted pressure switches, 8005000A, xed
Molded-case circuit breaker, 16002500A
14.0-23
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Indoor Liquid-Filled
023
Indoor Composite Floor PlanLiquid-Filled Transformer
Figure 14.0-7. Liquid-Filled, IndoorTop View

1F
is 30.25.
Contact Eaton.
Table 14.0-14. Secondary Equipment Dimension ReferencesDimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 14.0-13. Primary Equipment Dimension References Legend:
Type AMPGARD
Switches, Type MVS
Primary
Equipment
Dimensions Reference
Page(s)
Transformer
MVS
ME
MC
W
TX
, D
TX
W
P
, D
P
W
P
, D
P
W
P
, D
P
Page 14.0-31
Page 14.0-30
Page 14.0-30
Tab 5
Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) or Transition SectionDimensions in Inches (mm)
Voltage
kV
Primary
Equipment
Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Three-Phase Four-Wire
W
1
D
1F
5 or 15 MVS
ME
MC
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
18.00 (457.2)
25.25 (641.3)
25.25 (641.3)
42.50 (1079.5)
27 MVS
MC
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
38 MVS
MC
30.00 (762.0)
42.00 (1066.8)
Secondary Equipment
Rear
Primary Equipment Transformer
of Transformer
Transition
Section
Transition
Section
C
L
CC
D
S
W
S
D
TX
W
TX
W
P
W
1
D
P
Front
D
1F
W
2
D
2R
D
2F
Secondary
Equipment
W
2
D
2F
D
2R
For W
S
, D
S
Dimensions
Tab-Page
Magnum DS and SB switchgear (rear access) 22.00 (558.8) 45.00 (1143.0) 20.1-25
Pow-R-Line C switchboard (front access)
Pow-R-Line C switchboard (rear access)
Pow-R-Line i switchboard (rear access)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
21.1 (All)
21.2 (All)
21.3 (All)
14.0-24
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Outdoor Liquid-Filled
024
Outdoor Composite Floor PlanLiquid-Filled Transformer
Figure 14.0-8. Liquid-Filled, Outdoor EnclosureTop View

1F
is 30.25 inches (768.4 mm).

1R
is 14.50 inches (368.3 mm).
Contact Eaton.
Type AMPGARD
Switches, Type MVS
Primary
Equipment
Page(s)
Transformer
MVS
ME
MC
W
TX
, D
TX
W
P
, D
P
W
P
, D
P
W
P
, D
P
Page 14.0-31
Page 14.0-30
Page 14.0-30
Tab 5
Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) or Transition Section/ThroatDimensions in Inches (mm)
Voltage
kV
Primary
Equipment
Three-Phase, Three-Wire or Three-Phase Four-Wire
W
1
D
1F
D
1R
5 or 15 MVS
ME
MC
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
16.00 (406.4)
25.25 (641.3)
25.25 (641.3)
16.50 (419.1)
27 MVS
MC
35.00 (889.0)
38 MVS
MC
35.00 (889.0)
Secondary
Equipment
W
2
D
2R
For W
S
, D
S
Dimensions
Tab-Page
Magnum DS and SB switchgear 38.50 (977.9) 27.00 (685.8) 20.1-25, 14.0-39
25.00 (635.0)
25.00 (635.0)
25.00 (635.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
25.00 (635.0)
21.1 (All)
21.2 (All)
21.3 (All)
Secondary Equipment
P
r
i
m
a
r
y

E
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t

Transformer

T
r
a
n
s
i
t
i
o
n

S
e
c
t
i
o
n
/
T
h
r
o
a
t
C
L
D
S
W
S
D
TX
W
TX
W
P
W
1
D
P
D
1F
D
1R
of Transformer

T
r
a
n
s
i
t
i
o
n
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
/
T
h
r
o
a
t
W
2
Door
Swing
D
2
R
Walk-in Aisle (if used)
14.0-25
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Indoor IUS
025
Indoor IUS Composite Floor Plan
Figure 14.0-9. IUS with Liquid-Filled or Dry-Type TransformerTop View
Notes:
The IUS houses both the primary (MV) and secondary (LV) equipment breaker.
Primary (MV) equipment is housed in the bottom portion of the IUS Structure.
Secondary (LV) equipment is housed in the top portion of the IUS Structure.
A VCP-T (MV) breaker is used between the primary equipment and transformer.
See Tab 5 for additional information on the VCP-T breaker.
A Magnum-DS (LV) breaker is used between the transformer and secondary equipment.
See Tab 26 for additional information on the Magnum DS breaker.
The IUS/Transformer is a front-aligned substation.
Table 14.0-17. IUS (Primary & Secondary) Equipment Dimension References Legend:
IUS= Integrated Unit Substation
TX = Transformer
LV = Low Voltage
Primary and Secondary
Equipment
Page(s)
Transformer
IUS
W
TX
, D
TX
W
IUS
, D
IUS
Pages 14.0-36 and 14.0-38
Page 14.0-20
Transformer IUS Secondary Equipment D
S
D
TX
Front
DD
S IUS
W
IUS
WW W
S
W
TX
WW
14.0-26
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Indoor Dry-Type
026
Indoor Composite Floor PlanDry-Type Transformer
Figure 14.0-10. Ventilated Dry-Type, RESIBLOC and Cast Coil, IndoorTop View
Table 14.0-18. Primary Equipment Dimension References
Primary
Equipment
Page(s)
Transformer
MVS
ME
MC
W
TX
, D
TX
W
P
, D
P
W
P
, D
P
W
P
, D
P
Pages 14.0-35 and 14.0-37
Page 14.0-30
Page 14.0-30
Tab 5
Secondary
Equipment
For W
S
, D
S
Dimensions
Tab-Page
Magnum DS and SB switchgear (rear access) 20.1-25
Magnum DS and SB switchgear (front access) 20.1-31
21.1 (All)
21.2 (All)
21.3 (All)
Secondary Equipment Primary Equipment Transformer
Transition
Section
Transition
Section
D
S
W
S
D
TX
W
TX
W
P
W
1
D
P
Front
W
2
Legend:
Type AMPGARD
Switches, Type MVS
14.0-27
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Outdoor Dry-Type
027
Outdoor Composite Floor PlanDry-Type Transformer
Figure 14.0-11. Ventilated Dry-Type, RESIBLOC and Cast Coil, OutdoorTop View
Contact Eaton.
Type AMPGARD
Switches, Type MVS
Primary
Equipment
Page(s)
Transformer
MVS
ME
MC
W
TX
, D
TX
W
P
, D
P
W
P
, D
P
W
P
, D
P
Pages 14.0-35 and 14.0-37
Page 14.0-30
Page 14.0-30
Tab 5
Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) or Transition Section/ThroatDimensions in Inches (mm)
Primary
Equipment
W
1
5 kV 15 kV 27 kV 38 kV
MVS
ME
MC
5.00 (127.0)
20.00 (508.0)
16.00 (406.4)
5.00 (127.0)
20.00 (508.0)
16.00 (406.4)
N/A
N/A
Secondary
Equipment
W
2
For W
S
, D
S
Dimensions
Tab-Page
Magnum DS and SB switchgear 38.50 (977.9) 20.1-25
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
21.1 (All)
21.2 (All)
21.3 (All)
Secondary Equipment
P
r
i
m
a
r
y

E
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t
Transformer
T
r
a
n
s
i
t
i
o
n

S
e
c
t
i
o
TT
n
T
r
a
n
s
i
t
i
o
n

S
e
c
t
i
o
n
D
S
W
S
D
TX
W
TX
W
P
W
1
D
P
Front
W
2
14.0-28
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
028
Substation with Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) UsageLiquid-Filled Transformer
A substation using one or two air terminal chambers (ATCs) is different from a substation using close-coupling on both the
primary and secondary sides. An ATC uses a cable connection on either the primary side, secondary side or both, and is
placed between the transformer and the remotely mounted primary or secondary equipment.
Figure 14.0-12. Liquid-Filled Indoor/Outdoor Using Air Terminal ChambersTop View

Table 14.0-22. Primary ATC or Transition Section
Note: Minimum ATC widths by kVA are listed in the table above.
The width of any ATC can be expanded to allow for the installation
of additional conduits. When calculating the area of the conduit
opening, allow for a 2.00-inch (50.8 mm) lip around the entire
perimeter of the ATC.
Table 14.0-23. Secondary ATC or Transition Section
Transformer
A
i
r
T
e
r
m
i
n
a
l

C
h
a
m
b
e
r
TT
C
L
CC
DD
S
D
TX
DD
W
TX W
1
DD
P
DD
1F
DD
1R
DD
of Transformer
A
i
r
T
e
r
m
i
n
a
l

C
h
a
m
b
e
r
m
i
n
a
l

C
h
TT
W
2
WW
DD
2
R
kV W
1
D
P
5 or 15
27
38
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
D
TX
D
TX
D
TX
Voltage W
2
D
S
V
All 18.00 (457.2) D
TX
14.0-29
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
029
Substation with Air Terminal Chamber (ATC) UsageDry-Type Transformer
A substation using one or two air terminal chambers (ATCs) is different from a substation using close-coupling on both the
primary and secondary sides. An ATC using a cable connection on either the primary side, secondary side or both, and is
placed between the transformer and the remotely mounted primary or secondary equipment.
Figure 14.0-13. Dry-Type Indoor/Outdoor Using Air Terminal ChambersTop View
Protective collars are only used on outdoor designs.

Table 14.0-24. Primary ATC or Transition Section
Table 14.0-25. Secondary ATC or Transition Section
Transformer
T
r
a
n
s
i
t
i
o
n

S
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
r
a
n
s
i
t
i
o
n

S
e
c
t
i
o
n
D
S
D
TX
W
TX
W
1
D
P
Front
W
2

kV W
1
D
P
5 or 15
27
38
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
D
TX
D
TX
D
TX
Voltage W
2
D
S
V
All 18.00 (457.2) D
TX
14.0-30
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Primary Switching Equipment
030
Primary Switching EquipmentType MVS/MSB Switchgear
Figure 14.0-14. Primary Equipment Floor Plan
Table 14.0-26. Primary Switching EquipmentType MVS Switchgear
A transition section is required when any MVS switchgear assembly is connected to a liquid-lled transformer and when any MSB switchgear
assembly is connected to any kind of transformer. When a 5 or 15 kV MVS switchgear assembly is connected to a dry-type or cast coil transformer,
no transition section is required when installed indoors, but a 5.00-inch (127.0 mm) throat is required when installed outdoors.
Where disconnect fuses are used, add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to section width, 5 and 15 kV only.
When height of 101.50 inches (2578.1 mm) is used with fuses identied in footnote
, the depth increases to 100.00 inches (2540.0 mm).
Height is 101.50 inches (2578.1 mm) for 27 kV MVS switchgear without fuses or with Cooper type NX fuses, and 38 kV MVS switchgear without
fuses or with GE type EJO-1 fuses.
Height is 110.00 inches (2794.0 mm) for 27 kV MVS switchgear without fuses or with Cooper type NX fuses, and 38 kV MVS switchgear without
fuses or with GE type EJO-1 fuses.
Can be 62.00 inches (1574.8 mm) deep if incoming cable enters from below.
Table 14.0-27. Primary Switching EquipmentType MSB Switchgear
A transition section is required when any MVS switchgear assembly is connected to a liquid-lled transformer and when any MSB switchgear
assembly is connected to any kind of transformer. When a 5 or 15 kV MVS switchgear assembly is connected to a dry-type or cast coil transformer,
no transition section is required when installed indoors, but a 5.00-inch (127.0 mm) throat is required when installed outdoors.
Conguration
of Switch(es)
Rated
Maximum
Voltage,
kV
Fault
Close kV
Asym.
Maximum
WP
D
P
Height
(Indoor)
Height (Outdoor
Non-Walk-in)
W
C
C
C
Three-Wire Four-Wire
Single
switch
5
15
27
38
64
64
60
30
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
55.30 (1404.6)
55.30 (1404.6)
80.00 (2032.0)
80.00 (2032.0)
62.00 (1574.8)
62.00 (1574.8)
80.00 (2032.0)
80.00 (2032.0)
90.40 (2296.2)
90.40 (2296.2)
127.00 (3225.8)
127.00 (3225.8)
95.50 (2425.7)
95.50 (2425.7)
135.00 (3429.0)
135.00 (3429.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
Duplex
(two)
switches
5
15
27
38
64
64
60
30
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
96.00 (2438.4)
96.00 (2438.4)
62.00 (1574.8)
62.00 (1574.8)
100.00 (2540.0)
100.00 (2540.0)
62.00 (1574.8)
62.00 (1574.8)
100.00 (2540.0)
100.00 (2540.0)
90.40 (2296.2)
90.40 (2296.2)
127.00 (3225.8)
127.00 (3225.8)
95.50 (2425.7)
95.50 (2425.7)
135.00 (3429.0)
135.00 (3429.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
Selector
switch
5
15
64
64
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
62.00 (1574.8)
70.00 (1778.0)
62.00 (1574.8)
70.00 (1778.0)
90.40 (2296.2)
90.40 (2296.2)
95.50 (2425.7)
95.50 (2425.7)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
Sectional-
izing
loop feed
switches
5
15
27
38
64
64
60
30
108.00 (2743.2)
108.00 (2743.2)
144.00 (3657.6)
144.00 (3657.6)
55.30 (1404.6)
55.30 (1404.6)
80.00 (2032.0)
80.00 (2032.0)
62.00 (1574.8)
62.00 (1574.8)
80.00 (2032.0)
80.00 (2032.0)
90.40 (2296.2)
90.40 (2296.2)
127.00 (3225.8)
127.00 (3225.8)
95.50 (2425.7)
95.50 (2425.7)
135.00 (3429.0)
135.00 (3429.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
Conguration
of Switch(es)
and Vacuum Breaker
Rated
Maximum
Voltage, kV
Fault Close
kV Asym.
Maximum
WP
D
P
Height
(Indoor)
Height (Outdoor
Non-Walk-in)
W
C
C
C
Single 5
15
64
64
42.00 (1066.8)
42.00 (1066.8)
70.00 (1778.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
90.40 (2296.2)
90.40 (2296.2)
95.50 (2425.7)
95.50 (2425.7)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
Duplex 5
15
64
64
78.00 (1981.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
70.00 (1778.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
90.40 (2296.2)
90.40 (2296.2)
95.50 (2425.7)
95.50 (2425.7)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
Sectionalizing
loop feed
switches
5
15
64
64
114.00 (2895.6)
114.00 (2895.6)
70.00 (1778.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
90.40 (2296.2)
90.40 (2296.2)
95.50 (2425.7)
95.50 (2425.7)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
52
52
52
Single or Selector
Plan View
Duplex
Plan View
Sectionalized Loop Feed
Plan View
6.6 (167.6)
W
P W
P
W
P
C
C
W
C
W
C
C
C
W
C
W
C
W
C
W
C
C
C
W
C
W
C
W
C
W
C
D
P
6.6 (167.6)
6.6
(167.6)
Description Indoor Outdoor
5 or 15 kV Class
MSB section
MVS section
(non-fused)
Fuses (3) add
Transition section
Outdoor throat
1600 (726)
1500 (681)
200 (91)
300 (136)
1900 (863)
1800 (817)
200 (91)
1200 (544)
25.8 or 38 kV Class
MVS section
(non-fused)
Fuses (3) add
Transition section
Outdoor throat
2000 (908)
300 (136)
1100 (499)
2400 (1090)
300 (136)
1200 (544)
14.0-31
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Transformers
031
Liquid-Filled Transformers
Table 14.0-29. Oil-Filled Standard Design, 60 Hz, HV Delta, LV at 600V Class (30 kV BIL) Indoor or Outdoor Application
Figure 14.0-15. Liquid-Filled, Indoor and Outdoor
= 55.00 inches (1397.0 mm) for all ratings through 15 kV primary,

600V secondary.
kVA HV, kV HV BIL, kV Dimensions in Inches (mm) Weight
Lbs (kg)
Liquid
Gallons (Liters)
H
TX
W
TX
D
TX
Oil-Filled 65C Rise
300 5 or 15 60 or 95 73.00 (1854.2) 53.00 (1346.2) 38.20 (970.3) 6100 (2767) 480 (1817)
500 5 or 15 60 or 95 73.00 (1854.2) 57.00 (1447.8) 47.00 (1193.8) 7400 (3357) 517 (1957)
750 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
9300 (4218)
9301 (4219)
9302 (4219)
575 (2177)
1000 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
11,000 (4990)
11,000 (4990)
11,000 (4990)
600 (2271)
1500 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
12,700 (5761)
12,700 (5761)
12,700 (5761)
640 (2423)
2000 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
650 (2461)
2500 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
17,250 (7825)
17,250 (7825)
17,250 (7825)
650 (2461)
3000 25
35
125
150
85.00 (2159.0)
85.00 (2159.0)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
17,850 (8097)
17,850 (8097)
680 (2574)
3750 25
35
125
150
85.00 (2159.0)
100.00 (2540.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
76.00 (1930.4)
115.00 (2921.0)
118.00 (2997.2)
16,800 (7627)
18,000 (8165)
900 (3407)
Oil-Filled 55/65C Rise
300 5 or 15 60 or 95 73.00 (1854.2) 53.00 (1346.2) 50.50 (1282.7) 6100 (2767) 480 (1817)
500 5 or 15 60 or 95 73.00 (1854.2) 57.00 (1447.8) 52.20 (1333.5) 7400 (3357) 517 (1957)
750 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
9300 (4218)
9301 (4219)
9302 (4219)
575 (2177)
1000 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
11,000 (4990)
11,000 (4990)
11,000 (4990)
600 (2271)
1500 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
12,700 (5761)
12,700 (5761)
12,700 (5761)
640 (2423)
2000 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
670 (2536)
2500 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
96.60 (2453.6)
96.60 (2453.6)
96.60 (2453.6)
17,500 (7938)
17,500 (7938)
17,500 (7938)
700 (2650)
3000 25
35
125
150
85.00 (2159.0)
85.00 (2159.0)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
96.60 (2453.6)
96.60 (2453.6)
17,850 (8097)
17,850 (8097)
700 (2650)
3750 25
35
125
150
85.00 (2159.0)
100.00 (2540.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
78.00 (1981.2)
122.00 (3098.8)
135.00 (3429.0)
16,800 (7620)
18,000 (8165)
900 (3407)
Plan Elevation
H
TX
W
TX
D
TX
C
L
of Bushing C
L
14.0-32
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Transformers
032
Designates units must typically meet the new DOE efciency guideline
levels with noted losses complying with such.
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load
and 85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and 55C
LL Ref. Temp. and
20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
175
250
300
960
1250
1630
1135
1500
1930
413
562
696
225
300
500
330
520
730
2500
2600
4900
2830
3120
5630
942
1164
1889
750
1000
1500
1100
1500
1900
6200
6700
10,000
7300
8200
11,900
2567
3221
4375
2000
2500
3000
2600
2800
3800
12,000
15,000
16,000
14,600
17,800
19,800
5429
6408
N/A
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load
and 85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% load and 55C
LL Ref. Temp. and
20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
190
260
320
950
1300
1600
1140
1560
1920
413
562
696
225
300
500
400
500
700
2300
3000
5000
2700
3500
5700
942
1164
1889
750
1000
1500
1000
1300
1900
6500
8500
10,500
7500
9800
12,400
2567
3221
4375
2000
2500
3000
2100
2700
4000
14,500
15,500
18,000
16,600
18,200
22,000
5429
6408
N/A
14.0-33
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Transformers
033
Environmentally Friendly Fluid Filled Units
Table 14.0-32. Liquid-Filled Standard Design, 60 Hz, HV Delta, LV at 600V Class (30 kV BIL) Indoor or Outdoor Application
Figure 14.0-16. Liquid-Filled, Indoor and Outdoor
= 55.00 inches (1397.0 mm) for all ratings through 15 kV primary,

600V secondary.
kVA HV, kV HV BIL, kV Dimensions in Inches (mm) Weight
Lbs (kg)
Liquid
Gallons (Liters)
H
TX
W
TX
D
TX
Liquid-Filled 65C Rise
300 5 or 15 60 or 95 73.00 (1854.2) 53.00 (1346.2) 38.20 (970.3) 6100 (2767) 480 (1817)
500 5 or 15 60 or 95 73.00 (1854.2) 57.00 (1447.8) 47.00 (1193.8) 7400 (3357) 517 (1957)
750 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
9300 (4218)
9301 (4219)
9302 (4219)
575 (2177)
1000 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
50.50 (1282.7)
11,000 (4990)
11,000 (4990)
11,000 (4990)
600 (2271)
1500 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
12,700 (5761)
12,700 (5761)
12,700 (5761)
640 (2423)
2000 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
650 (2461)
2500 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
17,250 (7825)
17,250 (7825)
17,250 (7825)
650 (2461)
3000 25
35
125
150
85.00 (2159.0)
85.00 (2159.0)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
71.20 (1808.5)
96.60 (2453.6)
17,850 (8097)
17,850 (8097)
680 (2574)
3750 25
35
125
150
85.00 (2159.0)
100.00 (2540.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
76.00 (1930.4)
115.00 (2921.0)
118.00 (2997.2)
16,800 (7620)
18,000 (8165)
900 (3407)
Liquid-Filled 55/65C Rise
300 5 or 15 60 or 95 73.00 (1854.2) 53.00 (1346.2) 50.50 (1282.7) 6100 (2767) 480 (1817)
500 5 or 15 60 or 95 73.00 (1854.2) 57.00 (1447.8) 52.50 (1333.5) 7400 (3357) 517 (1957)
750 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
9300 (4218)
9301 (4219)
9302 (4219)
575 (2177)
1000 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
63.60 (1615.4)
11,500 (5216)
11,500 (5216)
11,500 (5216)
600 (2271)
1500 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
63.60 (1615.4)
71.20 (1808.5)
71.20 (1808.5)
13,500 (6124)
13,500 (6124)
13,500 (6124)
640 (2423)
2000 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
71.20 (1808.5)
96.60 (2453.6)
96.60 (2453.6)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
15,200 (6895)
670 (2536)
2500 5 or 15
25
35
60 or 95
125
150
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
96.60 (2453.6)
96.60 (2453.6)
96.60 (2453.6)
17,500 (7938)
17,500 (7938)
17,500 (7938)
700 (2650)
3000 25
35
125
150
85.00 (2159.0)
85.00 (2159.0)
76.00 (1930.4)
76.00 (1930.4)
96.60 (2453.6)
96.60 (2453.6)
18,000 (8165)
18,000 (8165)
700 (2650)
3750 25
35
125
150
85.00 (2159.0)
100.00 (2540.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
78.00 (1981.2)
122.00 (3098.8)
135.00 (3429.0)
16,800 (7620)
18,000 (8165)
900 (3407)
Plan Elevation
H
TX
W
TX
D
TX
C
L
of Bushing C
L
14.0-34
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Transformers
034
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load
and 85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and 55C
LL Ref. Temp. and
20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
175
250
300
960
1250
1630
1135
1500
1930
413
562
696
225
300
500
330
520
730
2500
2600
4900
2830
3120
5630
942
1164
1889
750
1000
1500
1100
1500
1900
6200
6700
10,000
7300
8200
11,900
2567
3221
4375
2000
2500
3000
2600
2800
3800
12,000
15,000
16,000
14,600
17,800
19,800
5429
6408
N/A
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load
and 85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% load and 55C
LL Ref. Temp. and
20C NL Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
190
260
320
950
1300
1600
1140
1560
1920
413
562
696
225
300
500
400
500
700
2300
3000
5000
2700
3500
5700
942
1164
1889
750
1000
1500
1000
1300
1900
6500
8500
10,500
7500
9800
12,400
2567
3221
4375
2000
2500
3000
2100
2700
4000
14,500
15,500
18,000
16,600
18,200
22,000
5429
6408
N/A
14.0-35
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Transformers
035
VPI and VPE Ventilated Dry-TypeStandard Unit Substation
Table 14.0-35. Aluminum Windings, Standard Design, Delta-Wye, 60 Hz, Indoor, 600 Volt LV Class at 10 kV BIL, Indoor
Dimensions based on MVS primary coordination and Magnum DS secondary coordination. For outdoor base construction, add 12.00 inches
(304.8 mm) to height and 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width and depth. Roof overhangs 8.50 inches (215.9 mm) front and rear.
30 kV BIL is standard for 5 kV class; 60 kV BIL is available as an option. 60 kV BIL is standard for 15 kV class; 95 kV BIL is available as an option.
Note: Smaller dimensions/weights may be available, refer to Eaton.
Figure 14.0-17. Indoor Ventilated Enclosure (NEMA 1 Construction)
Table 14.0-36. High Voltage 15 kV and Below. Low Voltage 600 V and
kVA HV,
kV
HV
BIL,
kV
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Weight

Lbs (kg)
kVA HV,
kV
HV
BIL,
kV
Weight
Lbs (kg)
H
TX
W
TX
D
TX
H
TX
W
TX
D
TX
150C Rise 80 or 115C Rise
300 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
102.00 (2590.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
3200 (1453)
3600 (1634)
4000 (1816)
4500 (2043)
300 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
102.00 (2590.8)
84.00 (2133.6)
84.00 (2133.6)
96.00 (2438.4)
108.00 (2743.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
4000 (1816)
5000 (2270)
6000 (2724)
6500 (2951)
500 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
102.00 (2590.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
102.00 (2590.8)
102.00 (2590.8)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
4400 (1998)
4600 (2088)
5000 (2270)
5500 (2497)
500 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
102.00 (2590.8)
84.00 (2133.6)
84.00 (2133.6)
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
5200 (2361)
5800 (2633)
7000 (3178)
7500 (3405)
750 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
102.00 (2590.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
108.00 (2743.2)
108.00 (2743.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
5500 (2497)
6200 (2815)
6500 (2951)
7000 (3178)
750 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
102.00 (2590.8)
84.00 (2133.6)
84.00 (2133.6)
114.00 (2895.6)
114.00 (2895.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
6200 (2815)
7000 (3178)
8000 (3632)
8500 (3859)
1000 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
112.00 (2844.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
84.00 (2133.6)
84.00 (2133.6)
114.00 (2895.6)
114.00 (2895.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
6300 (2860)
7400 (3360)
7500 (3405)
8000 (3632)
1000 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
112.00 (2844.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
120.00 (3048.0)
120.00 (3048.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
7800 (3541)
8750 (3972)
9500 (4313)
10,000 (4540)
1500 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0)
96.00 (2286.0)
112.00 (2844.8)
120.00 (3048.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
120.00 (3048.0)
120.00 (3048.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
8200 (3723)
9300 (4222)
10,000 (4540)
10,500 (4767)
1500 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
120.00 (3048.0)
120.00 (3048.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
9500 (4313)
10,500 (4767)
11,000 (4994)
11,500 (5221)
2000 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
120.00 (3048.0)
120.00 (3048.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
126.00 (3200.4)
126.00 (3200.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
9400 (4268)
10,500 (4767)
12,000 (5448)
12,500 (5675)
2000 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
120.00 (3048.0)
120.00 (3048.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
126.00 (3200.4)
126.00 (3200.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12,000 (5448)
13,000 (5902)
13,200 (5993)
13,500 (6129)
2500 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
120.00 (3048.0)
120.00 (3048.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
132.00 (3352.8)
132.00 (3352.8)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
11,700 (5312)
13,000 (5002)
14,500 (6583)
15,000 (6810)
2500 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
130.00 (3302.0)
130.00 (3302.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
132.00 (3352.8)
138.00 (3505.2)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
15,000 (6810)
15,800 (7173)
16,000 (7264)
16,500 (7491)
3000 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
120.00 (3048.0)
120.00 (3048.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
138.00 (3505.2)
144.00 (3657.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
15,000 (6810)
16,000 (7264)
18,000 (8172)
19,000 (8626)
3000 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
130.00 (3302.0)
140.00 (3556.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
114.00 (2895.6)
138.00 (3505.2)
144.00 (3657.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
17,000 (7718)
18,000 (8172)
20,000 (9080)
22,000 (9988)
3750 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
120.00 (3048.0)
120.00 (3048.0)
108.00 (2743.2)
114.00 (2895.6)
144.00 (3657.6)
150.00 (3810.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
16,000 (7264)
17,000 (7718)
19,000 (8626)
21,000 (9534)
3750 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
130.00 (3302.0)
140.00 (3556.0)
114.00 (2895.6)
120.00 (3048.0)
150.00 (3810.0)
150.00 (3810.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
18,000 (8172)
19,000 (8626)
22,000 (9988)
24,000 (10,896)
W
TX
D
TX
H
TX
VPI, 15 kV Primary 150C Temp. Rise
kVA No
Load
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
170C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
170C
(Watts)
4695 kV BIL
Total Losses at
75% Load and
75C Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
300
500
750
1250
1500
2000
4500
8500
10,000
5750
10,000
12,000
2022
2960
3980
1000
1500
2000
2500
3500
4250
13,000
17,000
21,000
15,500
20,500
25,250
4898
6659
8268
2500
3000
3750
5000
9000
11,000
24,000
33,500
35,000
29,000
42,500
46,000
9700
N/A
N/A
14.0-36
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Transformers
036
VPI and VPE Ventilated Dry-TypeIntegrated Unit Substation (IUS)
Table 14.0-37. Aluminum/Copper Windings, Standard Design, Delta-Wye, 60 Hz, Indoor, 600V LV Class at 10 kV BIL, Indoor
kVA HV, kV HV
BIL, kV
2
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Weight Lbs (kg)
H
TX
W
TX
D
TX
Aluminum
Core and Coil
Aluminum
Total
Copper
Core and Coil
Copper
Total
150C Rise
1000 5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
52.00 (1320.8)
60.00 (1524.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
4900 (2225)
6500 (2951)
5900 (2679)
7500 (3405)
5900 (2679)
6800 (3087)
6900 (3133)
7800 (3541)
1500 5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
6700 (3042)
8000 (3632)
7700 (3496)
9000 (4086)
8200 (3723)
8800 (3995)
9200 (4177)
9800 (4449)
2000 5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
8500 (3859)
9700 (4404)
9500 (4313)
11,000 (4994)
8900 (4041)
10,800 (4903)
9900 (4495)
12,100 (5493)
2500 5
15
60
95
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
9600 (4358)
11,800 (5357)
10,700 (4858)
13,200 (5993)
10,900 (4949)
12,400 (5630)
12,000 (5448)
13,800 (6265)
3000 5
15
60
95
102.00 (2590.8)
102.00 (2590.8)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
12,500 (5675)
13,700 (6220)
13,700 (6220)
15,200 (6901)
13,300 (6038)
14,500 (6583)
14,500 (6583)
16,000 (7264)
3750 5
15
60
95
102.00 (2590.8)
102.00 (2590.8)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
108.00 (2743.2)
108.00 (2743.2)
15,400 (6992)
15,000 (6810)
16,800 (7627)
16,500 (7491)
15,400 (6992)
19,800 (8989)
16,800 (7627)
21,300 (9670)
80C Rise
1000 5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
6600 (2996)
7100 (3223)
7600 (3450)
8200 (3723)
7900 (3587)
7800 (4212)
8900 (4041)
8900 (4041)
1500 5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
96.00 (2438.4)
8700 (3950)
9400 (4268)
9700 (4404)
10,500 (4767)
10,000 (4540)
11,400 (5176)
11,000 (4994)
12,500 (5675)
2000 5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
96.00 (2438.4)
112.00 (2844.8)
11,500 (5221)
11,900 (5403)
12,700 (5766)
13,400 (6084)
12,300 (5584)
15,800 (7173)
13,500 (6129)
17,300 (7854)
2500 5
15
60
95
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
56.00 (1422.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
108.00 (2743.2)
112.00 (2844.8)
12,600 (5720)
13,900 (6311)
13,900 (6311)
15,500 (7037)
14,500 (6583)
17,500 (7945)
15,800 (7173)
19,100 (8671)
3000 5
15
60
95
102.00 (2590.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
56.00 (1422.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
114.00 (2895.6)
118.00 (2997.2)
15,500 (7037)
15,400 (6992)
16,900 (7673)
17,300 (7854)
16,300 (7400)
20,000 (9080)
17,700 (8036)
21,900 (9943)
3750 5
15
60
95
108.00 (2743.2)
112.00 (2844.8)
56.00 (1422.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
114.00 (2895.6)
118.00 (2997.2)
18,000 (8172)
20,000 (9080)
19,500 (8853)
21,900 (9943)
22,000 (9988)
24,000 (10,896)
23,500 (10,669)
25,900 (11,759)
W
TX
D
TX
H
TX
Dimensions and weights for estimating purposes only.
14.0-37
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Transformers
037
Cast Coil and RESIBLOC Dry-TypeStandard Unit Substation
Table 14.0-38. Standard Windings, Standard Design, Delta-Wye, 60 Hz, Indoor, 600V LV Class at 10 kV BIL, Indoor
Dimensions based on MVS primary coordination and Magnum DS secondary coordination. For outdoor base construction, add 12.00 inches
(304.8 mm) to height and 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width and depth. Roof overhangs 8.50 inches (215.9 mm) front and rear.
30 kV BIL is standard for 5 kV class; 60 kV BIL is available as an option. 60 kV BIL is standard for 15 kV class; 95 kV BIL is available as an option.
Dry-Type Unit Substation Transformers.
kVA HV,
kV
HV
BIL,
kV

Lbs (kg)
kVA HV,
kV
HV
BIL,
kV
Weight
Lbs (kg)
H
TX
W
TX
D
TX
H
TX
W
TX
D
TX
80C Rise 100C Rise or 115C Rise
300 5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
78.00 (1981.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
4000 (1816)
4400 (1998)
300 5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
78.00 (1981.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
3900 (1771)
4200 (1907)
500 5
15
27
60
95
125
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
10.002 (2590.8)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
5900 (2679)
7100 (3223)
7500 (3405)
500 5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
6000 (2724)
6200 (2815)
750 5
15
27
60
95
125
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
84.00 (2133.6)
84.00 (2133.6)
108.00 (2743.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
7400 (3360)
7900 (3587)
8400 (3814)
750 5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
84.00 (2133.6)
84.00 (2133.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
7500 (3405)
7900 (3587)
1000 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
102.00 (2590.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
108.00 (2743.2)
114.00 (2895.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
8700 (3950)
8800 (3995)
9000 (4086)
11,300 (5130)
1000 5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
8400 (3814)
8500 (3859)
1500 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
96.00 (2438.4)
96.00 (2438.4)
120.00 (3048.0)
126.00 (3200.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
11,000 (4994)
11,400 (5176)
11,700 (5312)
13,000 (5902)
1500 5
15
60
95
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
96.00 (2438.4)
96.00 (2438.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
10,200 (4631)
10,800 (4903)
2000 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
120.00 (3048.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
126.00 (3200.4)
132.00 (3352.8)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
13,600 (6174)
14,000 (6356)
14,000 (6356)
18,000 (8172)
2000 5
15
60
95
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
12,400 (5630)
13,000 (5902)
2500 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
120.00 (3048.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
138.00 (3505.2)
144.00 (3657.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
16,900 (7673)
16,600 (7536)
16,000 (7264)
21,200 (9625)
2500 5
15
60
95
102.00 (2590.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
15,200 (6901)
14,700 (6674)
3000 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
120.00 (3048.0)
124.00 (3149.6)
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
144.00 (3657.6)
150.00 (3810.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
22,500 (10,215)
23,500 (10,669)
24,000 (10,896)
24,000 (10,896)
3000 5
15
60
95
102.00 (2590.8)
112.00 (2844.8)
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
66.00 (1676.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
20,000 (9080)
21,000 (9534)
3750 5
15
27
38
60
95
125
150
102.00 (2590.8)
120.00 (3048.0)
120.00 (3048.0)
124.00 (3149.6)
126.00 (3200.4)
126.00 (3200.4)
144.00 (3657.6)
150.00 (3810.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
24,000 (10,896)
25,000 (11,350)
26,000 (11,804)
27,000 (12,258)
3750 5
15
60
95
102.00 (2590.8)
120.00 (3048.0)
126.00 (3200.4)
126.00 (3200.4)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
23,000 (10,442)
26,000 (11,804)
W
TX
D
TX
H
TX
Cast, 15 kV Primary 115C Temp. Rise
kVA No
Load
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
135C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
135C
(Watts)
4695 kV BIL
Total Losses at
75% Load and
75C Ref. Temp.
per DOE (Watts)
300
500
750
1250
1500
2500
4000
8000
9000
5250
9500
11,500
2022
2960
3980
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
12,500
16,000
19,000
15,500
20,000
24,000
4898
6659
8268
2500
3000
3750
5500
9000
11,000
20,000
26,000
29,000
25,500
35,000
40,000
9700
N/A
N/A
5000
7500
10,000
13,500
20,000
22,500
30,000
35,000
45,000
43,500
55,000
67,500
N/A
N/A
N/A
14.0-38
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Transformers
038
Cast Coil Dry-TypeIntegrated Unit Substation (IUS)
Table 14.0-40. Aluminum/Copper Windings, Standard Design, Delta-Wye, 60 Hz, Indoor, 600 Volt LV Class at 10 kV BIL, Indoor
kVA HV, kV HV
BIL, kV
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Weight Lbs (kg)
H
TX
W
TX
D
TX
Aluminum
Core and Coil
Aluminum
Total
Copper
Core and Coil
Copper
Total
115C Rise
1000
1500
2000
15
15
15
95
95
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
96.00 (2438.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
7800 (3541)
9600 (4358)
11,400 (5176)
8800 (3995)
10,700 (4858)
12,600 (5720)
8000 (3632)
11,200 (5085)
12,900 (5857)
9000 (4086)
12,300 (5584)
14,100 (6401)
2500
3000
3750
15
15
15
95
95
95
96.00 (2438.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
114.00 (2895.6)
114.00 (2895.6)
114.00 (2895.6)
14,000 (6356)
16,400 (7446)
20,000 (9080)
15,400 (6992)
17,900 (8127)
21,700 (9852)
15,500 (7037)
18,200 (8263)
22,000 (9988)
16,900 (7673)
19,200 (8717)
23,700 (10,760)
80C Rise
1000
1500
2000
15
15
15
95
95
95
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
114.00 (2895.6)
118.00 (2997.2)
8300 (3768)
10,200 (4631)
13,500 (6129)
9400 (4268)
11,400 (5176)
15,100 (6855)
8900 (4041)
16,300 (7400)
16,900 (7673)
10,000 (4540)
17,500 (7945)
18,500 (8399)
2500
3000
3750
15
15
15
95
95
95
102.00 (2590.8)
108.00 (2743.2)
108.00 (2743.2)
64.00 (1625.6)
64.00 (1625.6)
64.00 (1625.6)
124.00 (3149.6)
124.00 (3149.6)
124.00 (3149.6)
16,000 (7264)
18,000 (8172)
23,300 (10,578)
17,800 (8081)
19,900 (9035)
25,200 (11,441)
19,800 (8989)
21,000 (9534)
25,000 (11,350)
21,600 (9806)
22,900 (10,397)
26,900 (12,213)
W
TX
D
TX
H
TX
14.0-39
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Outdoor Secondary Equipment
039
Figure 14.0-21. Outdoor Walk-in Enclosure Magnum DS Switchgear and Magnum SB SwitchboardsDimensions in Inches (mm)
46.63 inches (1184.4 mm) = 55.00-inch (1397.0 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box).
52.63 inches (1336.8 mm) = 61.00-inch (1549.4 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box).
18.70 inches (475.0 mm) = 44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box.
0.50-inch (12.7 mm) hardware recommended in all tie down locations.

Weights of Outdoor Structures
(without breakers)
Weight-
Structure Lbs (kg)
End trims (one set per lineup) 1500 (681)
22-inch (558.8 mm) wide breaker structure 2600 (1180)
22-inch (558.8 mm) wide auxiliary structure 2300 (1044)
22-inch (558.8 mm) wide transition structure 2500 (1135)
38-inch (965.2 mm) wide utility structure 2700 (1226)
Transformer throat 150 (68)
9255C25
25.00
(635.0)
30.81
Opening
(782.6)
2.50
(63.5)
12.13
(308.1)
3.21
(81.5)
40.94
Opening
(1039.9)
Foundation
Tie Down
(for Seismic Only)
Lifting Angle
3.06
(77.7)
18.94
Opening
(481.1)
3.06
(77.7)
3.06
(77.7)
26.94
Opening
(684.3)
Maximum
Opening
45.66
(1159.8)
25.00
(635.0)
5.03
(127.8)
2.00
(50.8)
22.00
Unit
(558.8)
44.00
Unit
(1117.6)
30.00
Unit
(762.0)
3.93
(99.8)
1.50
(38.1)
4.25 x 3.50
(108.0 x 88.9)
47.83
(1214.9) Bottom
Conduit
Space
4.25 x 3.50
(108.0 x 88.9)
Control Wire
Opening
Maximum
Opening
Maximum
Opening
Control Wire
Opening
C
C
'B'
Structure
Width
14.07
(357.4)
15.68
(398.3)
1.05
(26.7)
A
Rear of Base
Roof
1.05
(26.7)
44.99
(1142.8)
50.00
(1270.0)
25.00
(635.0)
24.99
(634.8)
38.99
(990.4)
32.99
(838.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
30.00
(762.0)
38.00
(965.2)
22.00
(558.8)
15.00
(381.0)
19.00
(482.6)
1.05
(26.7)
Bus Duct
Chimney
& Cover
B
A
16.99
(431.6)
Structure
Width
22.00
(558.8)
'B'
11.00
(279.4)
'C'
25.25
(641.4)
109.13
to Floor
(2771.9)
Rear of
Inner Structure
B
'C'
1.05
(26.7)
C
C
119.98
Overall Depth
(3047.5)
117.08
(Base)
(2973.8)
26.00
(660.4)
Bus Opening
(from Base)
2.30
(58.4)
105.06
(2668.5)
109.13
(2771.9)
15.68
(398.3)
A
*51.79
(1315.5)
See Section A-A Above for
Bus Duct Orientation Info.
4.00
(101.6)
111.48
Overall
Height
(2831.6)
33.45
(Door Width)
(849.6)
30.21
(Opening
Width)
(767.3)
5.75
(146.1)
5.75
(146.1)
0.61
(15.5)
A
1.00
(25.4)
28.59
(From Base)
(726.2)
C
C
C
29.97
(761.2)
26.57
(674.9)
33.45
Door Swing
(849.6)
36.00
(914.4)
Switchgear Throat
(Shipped Disassembled)
O.S. of
Outdoor
End Sheet
21.50
(546.1)
1.00
(25.4)
Throat
Opening
& TXF
16.96
(430.8)
14.50
(368.30)
42.00
(Aisle Width)
(1066.8)
72.00
(Switchgear
Depth)
(1828.8)
See
Top View
Above
39.66
(1007.4)
33.45
Door Swing
(849.6)
Front of
Outdoor
Base
22-inch Width = 21.40 (543.56) to Rear Frame
'A'
'A'
Outdoor
Roof
Sheet
41.38
(1051.1)
21.50
(546.1)
38.50
(977.9)
19.70
(500.4)
Switchgear
Throat
(Shipped
Disassembled)
Transition Box
(Shipped Attached)
45.00
(1143.0)
1.00
(25.4)
(Overall Shipping Width)
Unit Widths
5.00
(127.0)
30.00
(762.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
22.00
(558.8)
16.00
(406.4)
8.00
(203.2)
Floor Plan
Section B-B
Top View A
Section A-A
Side View
Top View
Front View
14.0-40
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Outdoor Secondary Equipment
040
EnclosuresPow-R-Line C
Figure 14.0-22. Front or Rear AccessNon-Walk-in with Flat RoofDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 14.0-23. Front AccessNon-Walk-in with Sloped RoofDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 14.0-24. Rear AccessNon-Walk-in with Sloped RoofDimensions in Inches (mm)
Enclosure Depth
Swbd. Struc.
Depth
Front of
er PRL C Inne
Structure
44.00
(1117.6)
22.00
(558.8)
20.00
(508.0)
2 13 2.13
(54.0) (54 0)
4.50
(114.3) 1 25 1.25
(31.8) 31 8)
Structure
Width
20-inch
(508.0)
Transition
Structure Width
A
To
Floor
5.00
(127.0)
90.70
(2303.8) 2303.8
(54.6) 2.15
17.37
(441.2)
12.81
(325.4)
Enclosure Depth
Swbd. Struc.
Depth
Front of
PRL C Inner
Structure
44.00
(1117.6)
22.00
(558.8)
20.00
(508.0)
2.13
(54.0)
4.5 (114.3)
2.25
(57.2)
Structure
Width
A
To
Floor
5.00
(127.0)
92.95
(2360.9)
0.13 (3.2)
End Trim
20-inch
(508.0)
Transition
0.13 (3.2)
End Trim
12.81
(325.4)
Enclosure Depth
Swbd. Struc.
Depth
44.00
(1117.6)
22.00
(558.8)
25.00
(635.0)
2.13
(54.0)
4.50
(114.3)
2.31 (58.7)
Structure
Width
A
to
Floor
5.00
(127.0)
92.95
(2360.9)
0.125 (3.2)
End Trim
Rear of
PRL C Inner
Structure
Front of
PRL C Inner
Structure
96.25
(2444.8)
4.19
(106.3)
Top of
Bus Duct
Chimney Cap
Rear of
Enclosure
20.5
(520.7)
20-inch
(508.0)
Transition
Table 14.0-41. Enclosure

Standard busway entry/exit location,

36.00-inch (914.4 mm) deep minimum.
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure always

required when throat connecting to other
equipment. Standard transformer throat
connection, 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) deep
structure only.
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure always

required when throat connecting to other
equipment. Standard transformer throat
connection, 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) deep
structure minimum.
Standard transformer throat connection,

48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) deep only.
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure
always required when throat connecting
to other equipment.
Non-walk-in dimension12.81 inches

(325.4 mm).
Standard busway entry/exit location.

Switchboard
Indoor Structure
Depth
Non-Walk-in
Enclosure
Depth
48.00 (1219.2) 61.00 (1549.4)
Dimension A
02500 kVA transformer 55.00 (1397.0)
25015000 kVA transformer 61.00 (1549.4)
Switchboard
Indoor Structure
Depth
Non-Walk-in
Enclosure
Depth
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
61.00 (1549.4)
67.00 (1701.8)
79.00 (2006.6)
Dimension A
02500 kVA transformer 55.00 (1397.0)
25015000 kVA transformer 61.00 (1549.4)
Switchboard
Indoor Structure
Depth
Non-Walk-in
Enclosure
Depth
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
65.00 (1651.0)
71.00 (1803.4)
83.00 (2108.2)
Dimension A
02500 kVA transformer 55.00 (1397.0)
25015000 kVA transformer 61.00 (1549.4)
14.0-41
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
Transformers
041
Note: Arrester rating is based on a 55C maximum ambient temperature in the enclosure.
Table 14.0-45. Transformer Primary Fuse Applications
Table 14.0-44. Suggested Minimum Ratings (kV) for Metal Oxide Surge Arresters Located in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
System
Grounding
Nominal System Line-to-Line Voltage (kV)
2.4 4.16 4.8 7.2 12.0 12.47 13.2 13.8 14.4 22.9 24.9 34.5
Solidly grounded
system
3 6 6 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 24 30
Low resistance
grounded system
3 6 6 6 12 12 12 12 12 21 24 30
High resistance
or ungrounded system
6 6 9 12 18 18 21 21 24 36 39 54
Rated Maximum
System Voltage, kV
Fuse
Type
Type
Nomenclature
Amperes Symmetrical
Interrupting Rating
2.75 Current limiting CLE (striker pin type)
CLE-750
CXN
63,000
40,000
50,000
Expulsion RBA200
RBA400/RBA800
19,000
37,500
CLE-750
CXN
63,000
40,000
50,000
Expulsion RBA200
RBA400/RBA800
19,000
37,500
CXN
63,000
50,000
Expulsion RBA200
RBA400/RBA800
19,000
37,500
14.4 Expulsion HRBA400/HRBA800 34,800
CXN
63,000
50,000
Expulsion RBA200
RBA400/RBA800
14,400
29,400
25.8 Expulsion RBA200
RBA400/RBA800
10,500
21,000
38 Expulsion RBA200
RBA400/RBA800
6,900
16,800
To nd the suggested minimum fuse size
for transformer:
1. Calculate the transformers base
full load current rating by dividing
the transformer base kVA by the
nominal transformer voltage, then
dividing this result by 1.732.
2. Multiply the result of Step 1 by
1.4 to determine the theoretical
minimum recommended fuse
continuous current rating.
3. Find the closest available fuse
continuous current rating that is
equal to or greater than this value.
This is the suggested minimum
recommended fuse size for the
transformers base kVA rating.
If the transformer has a fan rating,
perform two calculations: 1.) self-
cooled (as above), and 2.) fan-cooled,
however in the later calculation, use
the fan full load amperes and use
a 1.2 multiplier instead of 1.4, as
directed above. Select the fuse rating
for each of the applications by select-
ing a fuse value equal to or greater
than the calculated ampere values.
Usually, fan-cooled transformers
require a higher rated primary fuse,
and the higher rated fuse from the
calculations should be selected.
However, it is possible that the fuse
selection process yields the same
fuse rating for self-cooled and fan-
cooled units; when that occurs,
higher rated fuses are not required
for fan-cooled units.
These application guidelines are
subject to modication when specic
factors such as transformer character-
istics, other protective devices,
coordination requirements and load
variations may indicate a different
ratio of fuse ampere rating to
transformer full load current rating.
Caution: Primary fuses must not be
ground faults.
14.0-42
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
Primary Equipment
042
Table 14.0-46. Suggested Current Limiting Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Transformer Applications
(Check Compliance of Fuses to FM Requirements if Installation Must Comply with FM)
Fuse ratings represent the smallest fuse possible that will withstand transformer inrush (12 x FLA for 0.1 second and 25 x FLA for .01 second)
and be able to handle temporary overloads (133% of FLA).
Table 14.0-47. Suggested Minimum RBA Expulsion Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Power Transformer Applications
Fuse ratings represent the smallest fuse possible that will withstand transformer inrush (12XFLA for 0.1 second and 25XFLA for .01 second) and be
able to handle temporary overloads (133% of FLA).
Two 300 E-Ampere fuse rells used in parallel with 10% derating factor.
Table 14.0-48. Suggested Minimum RBA Expulsion Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 25.838.0 kV Power Transformer Applications
System
Nominal kV
2.4 4.16 4.8 7.2 12.0 13.2 13.8 14.4 Per-
cent
Impe-
dance
(% Z)
Fuses Max-
imum kV
2.75 5.5 5.5 8.3 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5
Transformer
kVA Rating
Self-Cooled
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
112.5
150
225
27.1
36.1
54.1
40E
50E
80E
15.6
20.8
31.2
25E
30E
50E
13.5
18.0
27.1
20E
25E
50E
9.0
12.0
18.0
15E
20E
25E
5.4
7.2
10.8
10E
10E
15E
4.9
6.6
9.8
10E
10E
15E
4.7
6.3
9.4
10E
10E
15E
4.5
6.0
9.0
10E
10E
15E
2.25
3.0
3.0
300
500
750
72.2
120.3
180.4
100E
175E
250E
41.6
69.4
104.1
80E
125E
150E
36.1
60.1
90.2
65E
100E
150E
24.1
40.1
60.1
40E
65E
100E
14.4
24.1
36.1
20E
40E
65E
13.1
21.9
32.8
20E
30E
65E
12.6
20.9
31.4
20E
30E
65E
12.0
20.0
30.1
20E
30E
65E
5.0
5.0
5.75
1000
1500
2000
240.6
360.8
481.1
350E
600E
750E
138.8
208.2
277.6
200E
300E
400E
120.3
180.4
240.6
175E
250E
350E
80.2
120.3
160.4
125E
175E
250E
48.1
72.2
96.2
80E
100E
150E
43.7
65.6
87.5
80E
100E
125E
41.8
62.8
83.7
80E
100E
125E
40.1
60.1
80.2
80E
100E
125E
5.75
5.75
5.75
2500 601.4 1100E
347.0 600E 300.7 400E 200.5 300E 120.3 175E 109.3 150E 104.6 150E 100.2 150E 5.75
System
Nominal kV
2.4 4.16 4.8 7.2 12.0 13.2 13.8 14.4 Per-
cent
Impe-
dance
(% Z)
Fuses Max-
imum kV
8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5
Transformer
kVA Rating
Self-Cooled
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full
Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
112.5
150
225
27
36
54
40E
50E
80E
16
21
31
25E
30E
50E
14
18
27
20E
25E
40E
9
12
18
15E
20E
25E
5
7
11
10E
10E
15E
5
7
10
7E
10E
15E
5
6
9
7E
10E
15E
5
6
9
7E
10E
15E
2.25
3.0
3.0
300
500
750
72
120
180
100E
200E
250E
42
69
104
65E
100E
150E
36
60
90
50E
100E
125E
24
40
60
40E
65E
100E
14
24
36
20E
40E
50E
13
22
33
20E
30E
50E
13
21
31
20E
30E
50E
12
20
30
20E
30E
50E
5.0
5.0
5.75
1000
1500
2000
241
361
481
400E
540E
720E
139
208
278
200E
300E
400E
120
180
241
200E
250E
400E
80
120
160
125E
200E
250E
48
72
96
80E
100E
150E
44
66
87
65E
100E
125E
42
63
84
65E
100E
125E
40
60
80
65E
65E
125E
5.75
5.75
5.75
2500
3750
601
347
540E
301
450E
200
300E
120
180
200E
250E
109
164
150E
250E
105
157
150E
250E
100
150
150E
250E
5.75
System Nominal kV 22.9 23.9 24.9 34.5

Fuses Maximum kV 25.8 25.8 25.8 38.0
Transformer
kVA Rating
Self-Cooled
Full Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
Full Load
Current
Amps
Fuse
Rating
Amps E
750
1000
1500
19
25
38
30E
40E
65E
18
24
36
25E
40E
50E
17
23
34
25E
40E
50E
13
17
25
20E
25E
40E
2000
2500
3750
50
63
95
80E
100E
150E
48
60
91
80E
100E
150E
46
58
87
65E
80E
125E
33
42
63
50E
65E
100E
14.0-43
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
Primary Equipment
043
Table 14.0-49. Type MVS Primary Switch, Standard Ratings
Table 14.0-50. Available Vacuum Breaker Ratings, MSB Switchgear
Inrush current is four times running amperes.

Rated
Maximum
Voltage, kV
Impulse
Withstand,
kV (BIL)
Rated Current
Continuous and
Load Break, Amperes
Rated Fault-Close
and Momentary
Current, kA Asym.
5
5
5
60
60
60
600
600
1200
40
64
40
5
15
15
60
95
95
1200
600
1200
64
40
40
15
15
27
95
95
125
600
1200
600
64
64
40
27
38
125
150
600
600
64
40
Rated Control
Voltage
Spring Charge Motor
Close or Trip
Amperes
Voltage Range
Run Amperes Time Seconds Close Trip
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
4.0
3.0
2.0
5
5
5
5.2
3.6
1.8
3856
100140
200280
2856
70140
140180
120 Vac
240 Vac
3.0
2.0
5
5
3.6
1.8
104127
208254
104127
208254
Transformer Technical Data
Transformer Standards
Dimensions and weights as listed in
the tables are based on the following:
Standard base kVA ratings:
30050075010001500
2000250030003750
Three-phase, 60 Hz, two windings
Standard temperature rise
(see tables) above ambient air
temperature of 40C (104F)
maximum and 30C (86F)
average in any 24-hour period
Maximum altitude of 3300 ft
(1006m) above sea level for full
rating
Standard high-voltages:
2400416048006900720012000
1247013200138002080022900
34500, delta connected only
Standard high-voltage taps:
Two approximately 2-1/2% full
capacity above and two below
rated voltage
Standard low voltages (no taps):
208Y/120 (1000 kVA maximum)
240 delta (1000 kVA maximum)
480 delta (all ratings)
480Y/277 (all ratings)
Note: 600Y and 600 delta also available.
Aluminum winding conductors
No series-parallel or delta-wye
terminal boards
Standard accessories and losses
Standard surface preparation, nish
processes, materials and colors
Standard tests in accordance with
IEEE standard test code (see below)
HV and LV basic impulse levels (BIL),
impedance and sound levels in line
with the following tables
IEEE Standard Tests
Resistance measurements
Ratio tests
Polarity and phase relation
No-load loss
Exciting current
Applied potential test
Induced potential test
14.0-44
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
Transformers
044
Table 14.0-51. Liquid-Filled Transformer Continuous kVA for Different Base Temperature Rise Ratings
Table 14.0-52. Dry-Type (Conventional VPE and VPI) Transformer Continuous kVA for Different Base Temperature Rise Ratings
Table 14.0-53. Dry-Type Cast Coil, Dura-Cast, and RESIBLOC Transformer Continuous kVA for Different Base Temperature Rise Ratings
Temperature Rise, C,
Base Rating, OA
Transformer Base, kVA Continuous kVA Multiplier
65C OA 55C FA 65C FA
55 Below 2500
2500 and larger
1.120
1.120
1.150
1.250
1.290
1.400
65 Below 2500
2500 and larger
1.000
1.000
N/A
N/A
1.150
1.250
Base Rating, AA
Continuous kVA Multiplier
80C AA 115C AA 150C AA 80C FA 115C FA 150C FA
80
115
150
1.000
N/A
N/A
1.150
1.00
N/A
1.330
1.150
N/A
1.330
N/A
N/A
1.500
1.330
N/A
1.800
1.500
1.330
Base Rating, AA
Type Continuous kVA Multiplier
80C AA 100C AA 115C AA 80C FA 100C FA 115C FA
80
100
115
Cast Coil or
Dura-Cast
1.000
N/A
N/A
1.120
1.000
N/A
1.170
1.050
1.000
1.330
N/A
N/A
1.450
1.330
N/A
1.500
1.380
1.330
80 RESIBLOC 1.000 N/A N/A 1.330 N/A N/A
14.0-45
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
Transformers
045
Table 14.0-54. Secondary Short-Circuit Capacity of Typical Power Transformers
Short-circuit capacity values shown correspond to kVA and impedances shown in this table. For impedances other than these, short-circuit
currents are inversely proportional to impedance.
The motors short-circuit current contributions are computed on the basis of motor characteristics that will give four times normal current.
For 208V, 50% motor load is assumed while for other voltages 100% motor load is assumed. For other percentages, the motor short-circuit
current will be in direct proportion.
Trans-
former
Rating
Three-
Phase
kVA
and
Impe-
dance
%
Maximum
Short-
Circuit
kVA
Available
from
Primary
System
208V, Three-Phase 240V, Three-Phase 480V, Three-Phase 600V, Three-Phase
Rated
Load
Contin-
uous
Current,
Amps
rms (Symmetrical
Amperes)
Rated
Load
Contin-
uous
Current,
Amps
rms (Symmetrical
Amperes)
Rated
Load
Contin-
uous
Current,
Amps
rms (Symmetrical
Amperes)
Rated
Load
Contin-
uous
Current,
Amps
rms (Symmetrical
Amperes)
Trans-
former
Alone
50%
Motor
Load
Com-
bined
Trans-
former
Alone
100%
Motor
Load
Com-
bined
Trans-
former
Alone
100%
Motor
Load
Com-
bined
Trans-
former
Alone
100%
Motor
Load
Com-
bined
300
5%
50,000
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
834 14,900
15,700
16,000
16,300
16,500
16,700
1700 16,600
17,400
17,700
18,000
18,200
18,400
722 12,90
13,60
13,90
14,10
14,300
14,400
2900 15,800
16,500
16,800
17,000
17,200
17,300
361 6,400
6,800
6,900
7,000
7,100
7,200
1400 7,800
8,200
8,300
8,400
8,500
8,600
289 5,200
5,500
5,600
5,600
5,700
5,800
1200 6,400
6,700
6,800
6,800
6,900
7,000
500
5%
50,000
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
1388 21,300
25,200
26,000
26,700
27,200
27,800
2800 25,900
28,000
28,800
29,500
30,000
30,600
1203 20,000
21,900
22,500
23,100
23,600
24,100
4800 24,800
26,700
27,300
27,900
28,400
28,900
601 10,000
10,900
11,300
11,600
11,800
12,000
2400 12,400
13,300
13,700
14,000
14,200
14,400
481 8,000
8,700
9,000
9,300
9,400
9,600
1900 9,900
10,600
10,900
11,200
11,300
11,500
750
5.75%
50,000
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
2080 28,700
32,000
33,300
34,400
35,200
36,200
4200 32,900
36,200
37,500
38,600
39,400
40,400
1804 24,900
27,800
28,900
29,800
30,600
31,400
7200 32,100
35,000
36,100
37,000
37,800
38,600
902 12,400
13,900
14,400
14,900
15,300
15,700
3600 16,000
17,500
18,000
18,500
18,900
19,300
722 10,000
11,100
11,600
11,900
12,200
12,600
2900 12,900
14,000
14,500
14,800
15,100
15,500
1000
5.75%
50,000
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
2776 35,900
41,200
43,300
45,200
46,700
48,300
5600 41,500
46,800
48,900
50,800
52,300
53,900
2406 31,000
35,600
37,500
39,100
40,400
41,800
6900 40,600
45,200
47,100
48,700
50,000
51,400
1203 15,500
17,800
18,700
19,600
20,200
20,900
4800 20,300
22,600
23,500
24,400
25,000
25,700
962 12,400
14,300
15,000
15,600
16,200
16,700
3900 16,300
18,200
18,900
19,500
20,100
20,600
1500
5.75%
50,000
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited
4164 47,600
57,500
61,800
65,600
68,800
72,500
8300 55,900
65,800
70,100
73,900
77,100
80,800
3609 41,200
49,800
53,500
56,800
59,600
62,800
14,400 55,600
64,200
57,900
71,200
74,000
77,200
1804 20,600
24,900
26,700
28,400
29,800
31,400
7200 27,800
32,100
33,900
35,600
37,000
38,600
1444 16,500
20,000
21,400
22,700
23,900
25,100
5800 22,300
25,800
27,200
28,500
29,700
30,900
2000
5.75%
50,000
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited

2406 24,700
31,000
34,000
36,700
39,100
41,800
9600 34,300
40,600
43,600
46,300
48,700
51,400
1924 19,700
24,800
27,200
29,400
31,300
33,500
7800 27,500
32,600
35,000
37,200
39,100
41,300
2500
5.75%
50,000
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited

3008 28,000
36,500
40,500
44,600
48,100
52,300
12,000 40,000
48,500
52,500
56,600
60,100
64,300
2405 22,400
29,200
32,400
35,600
38,500
41,800
9600 32,000
38,800
42,000
45,200
48,100
51,400
3000
5.75%
50,000
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited

3609 30,700
41,200
46,600
51,900
56,800
62,800
14,000 44,700
55,200
60,600
65,900
70,800
76,800
2886 24,600
33,000
37,300
41,500
45,500
50,200
11,500 36,100
44,500
48,800
53,000
57,000
61,700
3750
5.75%
50,000
100,000
150,000
250,000
500,000
Unlimited

4511 34,000
47,500
54,700
62,200
69,400
78,500
18,000 52,000
65,500
72,700
80,200
87,400
96,500
3608 27,200
38,000
43,700
49,800
55,500
62,800
14,400 41,600
52,400
58,100
64,200
69,900
77,200
14.0-46
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
Transformers
046
Table 14.0-55. IEEE Standard Insulation LevelskV BIL
600V maximum.
Note: Increased BIL option is available.
Table 14.0-56. Standard Guaranteed Sound LevelsDecibels
Table 14.0-57. Impedances (7-12% Tolerance)
Optional impedance values are available up to 8.0%.

Contact Eaton for more information.
Table 14.0-58. Transformer kVA Ratings, Three-Phase
In addition to their self-cooled (AA or OA) kVA ratings,
Eatons standard secondary unit substation transformers
of liquid-lled and ventilated dry-types are designed for
continuous operation at the following supplementary
self-cooled and fan-cooled (FA) kVA ratings:
Liquid-Filled
Ventilated Dry-Type
Cast Coil
High-
Voltage
Rating
Transformer
Liquid-Filled Ventilated Dry Cast Coil
HV LV
HV LV
HV LV
2400
4160
4800
45
60
60
30
30
30
20
30
30
10
10
10
20
30
30
10
10
10
6900
7200
12,000
75
75
95
30
30
30
45
45
60
10
10
10
45
45
60
10
10
10
12,470
13,200
13,800
95
95
95
30
30
30
60
60
60
10
10
10
60
60
60
10
10
10
22,900
34,400
125
150
30
30
110
150
10
10
110
150
10
10
Maximum
Base kVA
(Self-Cooled)
Liquid-Filled
Transformer
Ventilated Dry and Cast
Coil Transformer
OA FA AA FA
300
500
750
55
56
58
67
67
55
60
64
67
67
67
1000
1500
2000
58
60
61
67
67
67
64
65
66
67
68
69
2500
3000
3750
62
63
64
67
67
67
68
68
70
71
71
73
kVA Liquid-Filled
Transformer
Ventilated Dry and Cast
Coil Transformer
300
500
750
5.0%
5.0%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
1000
1500
2000
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
2500
3000
3750
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
5.75%
65C Rise 55/65C Rise
OA FA OA 55C OA 65C FA 55C FA 65C
300
500
750
N/A
N/A
862
300
500
750
336
560
840
N/A
N/A
862
N/A
N/A
966
1000
1500
2000
1150
1725
2300
1000
1500
2000
1120
1680
2240
1150
1725
2300
1288
1932
2576
2500
3000
3750
3125
3750
4690
2500
3000
3750
2800
3360
4200
3125
3750
4690
3500
4200
5250
150C Rise 115/150C Rise
AA FA AA 115C AA 150C FA 150C
300
500
750
400
667
1000
300
500
750
345
575
863
460
767
1151
1000
1500
2000
1333
2000
2667
1000
1500
2000
1150
1725
2300
1533
2300
3067
2500 3333 2500 2875 3833
80/115C Rise 80/150C Rise
AA 80C AA 115C FA 115C AA 80C AA 150C FA 150C
300
500
750
345
575
863
460
767
1151
300
500
750
405
675
1012
538
898
1346
1000
1500
2000
1150
1725
2300
1533
2300
3067
1000
1500
2000
1350
2025
2700
1795
2693
3591
2500
3000
3750
2875
3450
4313
3833
4580
5391
2500
3000
3750
3375
4050
5063
4489
5400
6329
80/115C Rise
AA 80C AA 115C FA 115C
300
500
750
345
575
862
460
765
1150
1000
1500
2000
1150
1725
2300
1530
2300
3066
2500
3000
3750
2875
3450
4312
3833
4588
5391
14.0-47
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
Secondary Equipment
047
Secondary Equipment
For information on secondary
equipment for use in unit substations,
refer to the following tabs of the
Consulting Application Guide:
Tab 20Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed
Drawout Switchgear
Tab 21Low Voltage
Switchboards
Tab 26Power Circuit Breakers
and Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers
Tab 27Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
and Enclosures
14.0-48
September 2011
Sheet 14
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
048


September 2011

Contents

15.0-1

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

15

001

U
n
i
t
i
z
e
d

P
o
w
e
r
C
e
n
t
e
r
s


General Description and Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.0-2

Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.0-2

Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.0-2

Third-Party Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.0-3


15.0-3

Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.0-4

LayoutDimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.0-5
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010

Unitized Power Center
15.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

15

General Description

002


Unitized Power Center

General Description
and Application

Eatons unitized dry-type power
centers are self-contained metal-
enclosed unit substations especially
designed to supply and distribute low
voltage power from medium voltage
lines in modern commercial and
industrial systems. They are ideal
where considerations of equipment
size, accessibility, maintainability,
ease of installation, and overall
economy are uppermost.
Due to the inherent compactness of
unitized power centers, they are easily
and conveniently applied in multiples
throughout a distribution system at
physical locations close to centers of
load concentration. The distribution
voltage is thus stepped down to the
utilization voltage only at or near
the areas of demand with kVA
being allocated as required for
new construction or renovation in
existing buildings. The application
of unitized power centers in this
manner results in several advantages
not available with conventional
secondary unit substations.

Ratings

Three-phase kVA:

112.51000

Primary voltages:

2.4 kV Class with 20 kV BIL, 60 Hz

5 kV Class with 30 kV BIL, 60 Hz

15 kV Class with 60 kV BIL, 60 Hz

MV power system grounding
solid or low resistance grounded
(

100A) only. UPC product is not
to be used on high-resistance or
ungrounded MV power systems

Transformer windings:

Primary connectionsthree-wire
delta only

Copper or aluminum

Type AA, ventilated dry-type

NEMA

Class 220C insulation

80, 115, 150C rise. When
transformer must meet require-
ments of Federal 10CFR-431K,
the 750 and 1000 kVA units are
only available in 150C rise

Type FA (forced air) available,
increases kVA ratings by 33%

Primary taps at 95%, 97.5%,
100%, 102.5%, 105% of rated
primary voltage

Secondary voltages:

208Y/120V, four-wire

240V, three-wire

480Y/277V, four-wire

480V, three-wire

575/380V, four-wire

Advantages

Moving into place is facilitated
by the rugged channel base
construction and lifting eyes
included with each assembly

All standard unitized power centers
are especially designed to minimum
dimensions consistent with safety
and reliability

Standard unitized power centers
are front-only accessible, making
against-the-wall installations
possibleminimum of 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm) from wall for seismic
applications, 2.00 inches (50.8 mm)
for non-seismic

Future load growth is easily accom-
modated by the addition of unitized
power centers to the system without
affecting the units serving the
original load areas

Losses in the medium voltage
portion of the distribution system
are lower, resulting in a continuous
operating savings

Secondary output voltage may be
adjusted at each unitized power
center to compensate for unusual
load conditions without affecting
the voltage setting of other appa-
ratus in the system

Trouble is more quickly isolated
with individual units located at or
near their served loads

Primary power is purchased from
the utility at the lower primary
power rates, resulting in operational
cost savings throughout the life of
the equipment

Overall installed cost is lower
because of the cost benets of
medium voltage distribution cable
as compared to low voltage cable
or busway

IQ Energy Sentinel devices can be
provided on each feeder circuit to
interface with an Eaton PowerNet
system to monitor and display
electrical energy (kWH). See

Tab 3

for more information

The IQ family of electronic meters
can be provided to monitor the
parameters unique to each type of
device. With a PONI accessory, each
of these devices can be connected
to an Eaton PowerNet power
monitoring system. See

Tab 2

for
more information


15.0-3

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

15


003

Advantages (continued)
Third-Party Listing

The UPC is UL listed.

Seismic Qualication

Refer to

Tab 1

for information on

Technical Data

Table 15.0-1. Primary Disconnect Switch RatingsType MVS Load Interrupter

UL listing available with fused switch only.

Table 15.0-2. Primary Fuse Ampere Rating
Current Limiting Eaton Type HCL, 63,000A
Symmetrical Interrupting Rating
Table 15.0-3. Unit WeightsLbs (kg)

Single primary, LV distribution in front of the
transformer.

Single primary. Separate LV switchboard
close coupled to transformer.

Table 15.0-4. Unitized Power Center,
Circuit Breaker Interrupting Ratings

Not panel mounted, supplied only in added
auxiliary distribution section.

Rated
Maximum
Voltage
kV rms
Impulse
Withstand
Voltage
kV peak
Continuous
and Load
Break
Current
Ampere
Short-Time
Short-Circuit
Withstand
Current
(2 second)
kA, rms sym
Non-Fused Switch
Fault Close and
Momentary
Rating (10 cycles)
kA, rms Asym
Fused Switch
Fault Close
Rating
kA, rms Asym

4.76
4.76
60
60
600
600
25
38
40
61
101
101
15
15
95
95
600
600
25
38
40
61
101
101

kVA Primary Fuse Ampere Rating at, kV
2.4 4.16 4.8 7.2 12.0 13.2 13.8

112.5
150
225
300
500
750
1000
45
50
75
100
200
25
35
45
60
100
150
200
18
25
40
50
80
120
175
15
18
25
35
60
85
125
7
10
15
20
40
60
75
7
10
15
20
30
45
60
7
10
15
18
30
45
60

kVA Weight in Lbs (kg)

112.5

150

225

300

500

750

4097 (1858)
4317 (1958)
4744 (2152)
5247 (2380)
5659 (2567)
6721 (3049)
1000

10834 (4924)

Breaker
Type
Range of
Rated
Continuous
Current,
Amperes
Rated Maximum
Interrupting
Capability, kA Sym.
240V 480V

EDB
EDS
ED
100225
100225
100225
22
42
65
EDH
EDC
EHD
100225
70225
15100
100
200
18
14
FDB
FD
HFD
15150
15225
15225
18
65
100
14
35
65
FDC
JD
HJD
15225
70250
70250
200
65
100
100
35
65
JDC
DK
KD
70250
250400
100400
200
65
65
100
35
HKD
KDC
LGE
100400
100400
250600
100
200
65
65
100
35
LGH
LD
HLD
250600
300600
300600
100
65
100
65
35
65
LDC
MDL
HMDL
300600
400800
400800
200
65
100
100
50
65
ND
HND
NDC
6001200
6001200
6001200
65
100
200
50
65
100
RD

RDC

8002500
8002500
125
200
65
100
15.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

15

Technical Data

004

Table 15.0-5. Ventilated Dry-Type Transformer Standard Ratings

Refer to

Table 15.0-6

for available temperature rise, fan and secondary voltage options.

Short circuit currents assume unlimited utility source, and do not include motor contributions.

Maximum load/output is limited to 1200A due to chassis limitation.

Maximum load/output is limited to 3000A (cross bus limitation).

Note:

All units are three-phase, 60 Hz, 150C rise, 220C insulation system.

kVA Impedance
%
kV
Class

Primary
Volts
LIWV
(BIL)
Primary
Taps
Wye
Secondary
Volts
Self-Cooled Fan Cooled (Optional) Transformer Maximum
Short-Circuit Amperes
rms Symmetrical

Secondary Full
Load Amperes
kVA Secondary Full
Load Amperes
208V 480V 208V 480V 208V 480V

112.5
150
225
300
500
750
1000
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
5.5
5.5
5 2400,
4160
or
4800
20 kV,
30 kV,
or
30 kV
22-1/2% 208Y/120
or
480Y/277
312
416
625
833
1389
2082
2776
135
180
271
361
601
902
1203
150
200
300
400
667
1000
1333
416
555
833
1110
1200

2776
3000

180
241
361
481
802
1203
1604
11566
11896
14194
15840
24136
36205
48274
5012
5155
6151
6561
10459
15689
20918
112.5
150
225
300
500
750
1000
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
5.5
5.5
15 7200,
12470
13200
or
13800
30 kV,
60 kV,
60 kV
or
60 kV
22-1/2% 208Y/120
or
480Y/277
312
416
625
833
1389
2082
2776
135
180
271
361
601
902
1203
150
200
300
400
667
1000
1333
416
555
833
1110
1200

2776
3000

180
241
361
481
802
1203
1604
6245
8327
12491
15140
24136
36205
48274
2706
3608
5413
6561
10459
15689
20918


15.0-5

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

15

LayoutDimensions

005


MV switch will be fused or non-
fused. UL listing available with
fused switch only

MV fuse class: current limiting,
Eaton Type HCL only

Primary surge protection shown is
optional. Surge arresters, snubber
pack or both can be provided

Use separate LV switchboard if:

LV distribution chassis required
is >1200A

LV chassis-mounted devices
will consume more than 36X
of available chassis space

Bottom or top entry incoming high
voltage cable size and quantity is
limited to 250 kcmil, two per phase

Vent screens, lters, door gaskets
or space heaters are not available
in this product

FA rating (33% increase in kVA)
is optional

Available transformer options
see

Table 15.0-6

Table 15.0-6. Available Transformer Options

Available secondary voltages: 208/120V wye (four-wire), 240V delta (three-wire), 480/277V wye
(four-wire), 480V delta (three-wire) and 575/380V wye (four-wire).

33% increased kVA capacity with fans.

At 208 or 240V secondary, maximum load (output) is limited to 1200A due to chassis limitation.

33% increased kVA capacity with fans, except for 1000 kVA transformer using 208V secondary,
maximum load/output is limited to 3000A (cross bus limitation).

Transformer Section
48-Inch Wide With LV Distribution in Front
Transformer Section
48-Inch Wide With Separate LV Distribution
Trans.
kVA
Temp.
Rise C
Optional
Fan

Secondary
Voltage
Trans.
kVA
Temp.
Rise C
Optional
Fan

Secondary
Voltage

112.5
150
225
80, 115, 150
80, 115, 150
80, 115, 150
Yes
Yes
Yes
All
All
All
112.5
150
225
80, 115, 150
80, 115, 150
80, 115, 150
Yes
Yes
Yes
All
All
All
300
500
80, 115, 150
150
Yes
Yes

All
All

300 80, 115, 150 Yes All

Transformer Section
60-Inch Wide With LV Distribution in Front
Transformer Section
60-Inch Wide With Separate LV Distribution
Trans.
kVA
Temp.
Rise C
Optional
Fan

Secondary
Voltage
Trans.
kVA
Temp.
Rise C
Optional
Fan

Secondary
Voltage

500
500
750
80, 115
150
150
Yes
Yes
Yes
480V, 600V
All
480V, 600V
500
750
1000
80, 115
150
150
Yes
Yes
Yes
All
All
All
15.0-6



CA08104001E
September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

15

LayoutDimensions

006


Figure 15.0-1. Single Primary, LV Distribution in Front of the Transformer
HV Left
100.00
(2540.0)
HV Right
Top or Bottom Entry Top or Bottom Entry
Fan (optional)
Vent
85.00
(2159.0)
80.00
(2032.0)
2/ph
Max.
Power
Transformer
36.00
(914.4)
48.00
(1219.2)
60.00
(1524.0)
or
One Line/Front Elevation One Line/Front Elevation
T
o

L
V

D
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n
C
h
a
s
s
i
s
Fan (optional)
Vent
2/ph
Max.
Power
Transformer
T
o

L
V

D
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n
C
h
a
s
s
i
s
Power
Transformer
Primary
Switch
LV Distribution Chassis
Power
Transformer
Primary
Switch
Front
Foot Print
Front
Foot Print
36.64
(930.7)
37.82
(960.6)
Note: These UPCs are shipped fully assembled,
except 5.00-inch (127.0 mm) top vent
or 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) fan and vent
assembly, which are shipped separately.


15.0-7

September 2011


i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet

15
LayoutDimensions
007
Figure 15.0-2. Single Primary, Separate LV Distribution Switchboard Close-Coupled to Transformer
HV Left
100.00
(2540.0)
HV Right
Fan (optional)
Vent
90.00
(2286.0)
85.00
(2159.0)
80.00
(2032.0)
2/ph
Max.
Power
Transformer
36.00
(914.4)
48.00
(1219.2)
60.00
(1524.0)
or 36.00
(914.4)
45.00
(1143.0)
or
To LV Distribution
Close-Coupled
Switchboard
To LV Distribution
Close-Coupled
Switchboard
Fan (optional)
Vent
2/ph
Max.
Power
Transformer
Power
Transformer
Primary
Switch
Power
Transformer
Primary
Switch
LV Switchboard LV Switchboard
Front
Foot Print
Front
Foot Print
36.64
(930.7)
37.82
(960.6)
36.00
(914.4)
= Shipping Split
Note: In addition to shipping splits
shown, 5.00-inch (127.0 mm) top vent
assembly are also shipped separately.
15.0-8
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 15
LayoutDimensions
008
Figure 15.0-3. Duplex Primary, LV Distribution in Front of the Transformer
HV Left
100.00
(2540.0)
HV Right
Fan (optional)
Vent
85.00
(2159.0)
80.00
(2032.0)
2/ph
Max.
2/ph
Max.
Power
Transformer
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
48.00
(1219.2)
60.00
(1524.0)
or
T
o

L
V

D
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n
C
h
a
s
s
i
s
Fan (optional)
Vent
2/ph
Max.
2/ph
Max.
Power
Transformer
T
o

L
V

D
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n
C
h
a
s
s
i
s
Power
Transformer
Primary
Switch
Primary
Switch
Power
Transformer
Primary
Switch
Primary
Switch
Front
Foot Print
Front
Foot Print
36.64
(930.7)
37.82
(960.6)
= Shipping Split
15.0-9
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 15
LayoutDimensions
009
Figure 15.0-4. Duplex Primary, Separate LV Distribution Switchboard Close-Coupled to Transformer
100.00
(2540.0)
Top or Bottom Entry
Fan (optional)
Vent
90.00
(2286.0) 80.00
(2032.0)
2/ph
Max.
2/ph
Max.
Power
Transformer
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
48.00
(1219.2)
60.00
(1524.0)
or 36.00
(914.4)
45.00
(1143.0)
or
One Line/Front Elevation
To LV
Distribution
Close-Coupled
Switchboard
Power
Transformer
Primary
Switch
Primary
Switch
LV
Switchboard
Front
Foot Print
36.00
(914.4)
37.82
(960.6)
= Shipping Split
85.00
(2159.0)
36.64
(930.7)
HV Right
Top or Bottom Entry
Fan (optional)
Vent
2/ph
Max.
2/ph
Max.
Power
Transformer
One Line/Front Elevation
To LV
Distribution
Close-Coupled
Switchboard
Power
Transformer
Primary
Switch
Primary
Switch
LV
Switchboard
Front
Foot Print
15.0-10
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 15
LayoutDimensions
010
Figure 15.0-5. Distribution Panel Layout Mounted in Front of Transformer up to 1200A Panel-Mounted Main and Feeder Devices
100% rated main and feeder electronic trip breakers are available rated 4001200A. 90C wire rated at 75C ampacity must be used.
May be used as a main device.

Note: For main devices or main bus 1200A and below. Feeder devices mounted in front of transformer.
Note: For auxiliary switchboard section layoutadjacent to transformer, refer to Figure 15.0-7 for switchboard section information.
Note: Neutral conductor is always gutter mounted.
6X
4X
3X
2X
36X 36X
Space for
Main and Feeder
Molded Case
Circuit
Breakers
Transformer
Ventilating Opening
2- or
3-Pole
LD, LDB, HLD, LDC, MDL LG
HMDL, ND, HND, NDC

2-Pole 2-Pole
3-Pole 3-Pole ED, EDH,
FD, FDB,
FDC, HFD,
JD, JDB,
HJD, JDC
DK, KD, KDB, HKD, KDC
2- or
3-Pole
FD, FDB,
JD, JDB,
HJD, JDC
ED, EDH,
EDC, EHD,
FD, FDB,
ED, EDH,
EDC, EHD,
FD, FDB,
FDC, HFD
Molded Case Circuit BreakerLayout
See Table 15.0-2 for Ampere Ratings

Secondary Distribution Panelboard
Maximum Panel HeightX Unit
15.0-11
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 15
LayoutDimensions
011
Figure 15.0-6. Base Plan ViewHV Left, LV Distribution
in Front of the Transformer
Minimum recommended clearance on each side and rear = 2.00 inches

(51.0 mm) for non-seismic applications, 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) for
seismic applications. Local jurisdictions may require more.
Minimum recommended clearance in the front = 36.00 inches

(863.6 mm). Local jurisdictions may require more.
Note: Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06 inches
(1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back
and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. Refer to actual
order drawings for power cable conduit entrance locations.
Figure 15.0-7. Base Plan ViewHV Left, LV Switchboard
Close-coupled to Transformer on the Right
Minimum recommended clearance on each side and rear = 2.00 inches

(51.0 mm) for non-seismic applications, 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) for
seismic applications. Local jurisdictions may require more.
Minimum recommended clearance in the front = 36.00 inches

(863.6 mm). Local jurisdictions may require more.
Note: Finished foundation surface shall be level within 0.06 inches
(1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back
and diagonally, as measured by a laser level. Refer to actual order
drawings for power cable conduit entrance locations.
Power
Transformer
Primary
Switch
Front
Power
Transformer
LV
Switchboard
Primary
Switch
Front
3 3
4
3
15.0-12
September 2011
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sheet 15012


September 2011

Contents

16.0-1

Sheet

16

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

001

S
u
b
s
t
a
t
i
o
n
T
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r
s



16.0-2

Denition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.0-2

Rectangular Core and Coil Process Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.0-3

Fluid Preservation Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.0-4

Transformer Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.0-4

Quality Assurance Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.0-4

Optional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.0-4

Standards Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.0-4

Seismic Qualication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.0-4

Standard FeaturesLiquid-Filled Transformer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.0-7

Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.0-8


16.0-12
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010

Section 16322A Section 26 12 13
Substation TransformerLiquid-Filled
16.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

16

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

General Description

002


Substation Transformers Feature Cover-
Mounted Primary and Secondary Bushings
and Can Be Provided with Load (LTC)
Changers

Denition

A substation transformer is typically
a standalone unit located at the
front end of a campus, industrial site
or large commercial project. The
substation transformer is used to
step down the utility service voltage.
Eatons substation transformers
use a rectangular core and coil design
that is a distinguishing characteristic
of Eaton small power liquid-lled
transformers. This proven design
provides excellent mechanical
strength, dependability and space-
saving economy needed for utility,
industrial and commercial applications.
With most ratings, a choice of uids
including mineral oil (typically speci-
ed for outdoor applications), silicone
(ammability concerns) and environ-
mentally friendly uids (ammability
concerns or anywhere that an insulat-
ing uid spill could require expensive
cleanup procedures).

Note:


Tab 14

.

Product Scope

75030,000 kVA

Primary voltages: through 69 kV

Secondary voltages: through 34.5 kV

Available Fluids

Mineral oil

Silicone

Environmentally friendly uids

Substation Benets/Advantages

Rectangular core/coil design:

Minimal size: space saving

Minimal weight: energy saving

Insuldur

layer insulation system for
thermal upgrade and mechanical
strength

DuraBIL

turn insulationsuperior
adhesion, abrasion resistance and
thermal stability

High efciency with the best
combination of initial cost and
low operating cost

Sealedaire

preservation system
sealed gas blanket over uid in tank

Core and Coil Assembly

Core and Coil Items

Tap leads

Tap changer

High voltage leads

Low voltage bus

Low voltage bushing connection

Flexible bus

Phase coil

High voltage lead

Core ground (removable)

Step-lap core

Side braces and support tie

Bottom support

Inner phase barrier insulation


16.0-3

September 2011


Sheet

16

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

General Description

003

Rectangular Core and
Coil Process Design

The rectangular design offers excellent
mechanical strength that has been
proven through years of service and
in special testing.
Mechanical strength is achieved
through the use of a unique six-piece
supporting structure. This supporting
structure is assembled in a pressure
jig around the core and coils, and arc
welded to form a rigid structure.
The top and bottom pieces exert a
clamping action on the yokes of the core
to hold the laminations rmly in place
and more importantly, to achieve opti-
mum sound attenuation by using a pre-
calculated pressure. Welding holds this
preload for a permanently quiet core.
Steel end plates are pressed into position
and welded to the top and bottom pieces
to form a permanent framing. The thick-
ness of the end plate is calculated for
each design. The end plates calculated
thickness provides the beam strength
required to minimize the tendency of
the wide, at part of the outside coils
to round out during fault conditions.

Core

Step-Lap Mitered Core Joints are Used
for Efciency and Noise Reduction

The rectangular core is a series of
laminations made from high-quality,
grain-oriented silicon steel.
The stacked core provides a superior
ux path by using a step-lap mitered
core joint. The effective way in which
the core is supported, as well as the
efcient step-lap joint, have resulted in:

Decreases in exciting current
up to 40%

Reductions in sound levels up to 3 dB

Reductions in no load loss up to 10%
The rectangular-shaped core efciently
lls the correspondingly shaped opening
in the coil with a minimum of unused
space. The short yoke between the core
legs reduces the external path of the
ux between active core leg material,
resulting in an increase in efciency. The
rectangular shape of the core allows for
more uniform and rigid support that
prevents the shift of laminations and
improves sound level characteristics.

Coil

The Core Efciently Fills the
Similar Shape Opening in the
Coil to Minimize Unused Space

Eaton coils feature aluminum or cop-
per conductors in both high and low
voltage windings. The low voltage
winding is accomplished on a constant
tension machine and consists of a full-
width or part-coil sheet conductor
extending the full height of the coil.
The advantage of the low voltage
sheet is a continuous cross-section
of conductor that allows the electrical
centers of high and low voltage
windings to easily align themselves,
virtually eliminating the vertical
component of short-circuit force.
The high voltage windings use wire
conductors and are wound directly
over the low voltage winding on a
constant tension traversing machine.
The high voltage conductors are
typically insulated with the DuraBIL

turn insulation.

Turn Insulation

DuraBIL Turn Insulation

Traditional crepe paper or Nomex

tape is used in some design consider-
ations. However, DuraBIL, which is a
tough, exible and inert turn insulation,
is used in most designs. It reduces the
most prevalent cause of transformer
failure: deterioration of turn insulation.
DuraBIL is a single layer of epoxy
powder deposited electrostatically
and baked on the wire conductor.
The process is closely controlled and
monitored to ensure a continuous,
uniform coating. The result is a
compact turn insulation with superior
characteristics, including adhesion,
exibility, abrasion resistance, and
thermal and chemical stability.
DuraBIL will not degrade and contami-

nate the transformer uid with moisture.

Beyond the chemical attributes, DuraBIL
maintains dimensional stability and
the coils structural integrity.

Insuldur Insulation

Insuldur insulation thermally
upgraded craft paper is typically used
for layer and high to low insulation.
The Insuldur system of chemical stabi-
lizers thermally upgrades cellulose
insulating materials to permit a 12%
higher load capacity. Insuldur can be
used with all uids offered with Eaton
small power transformers.
Chemical stabilizers retard insulation
breakdown under elevated temperature
conditions. Additionally, dimensional
changes in the insulating materials are
minimized to ensure a tighter structure.
The result is greater strength and
coil integrity throughout the life of
the transformer.
The Insuldur system allows a unit rated
at 55C rise to be operated at a 10C
higher temperature, with a 12% increase
in kVA capacity. Generous oil ducts
extend the height of the coil to provide
cooling in the winding. The staggered,
diamond epoxy bonds help to ensure
free oil ow through the winding.

Tank Construction

The transformer tank is designed to
withstand a pressure 25% greater than
the maximum operating pressure.
The carbon-steel plate used to form
the tank is reinforced with external
side wall braces, and tank seams are
continuously welded.
Each cooler assembly is individually
welded and receives a pressurized
check for leaks prior to assembly on the
tank. After the coolers are attached to
the tank, the completed tank assembly
is leak-tested before shipment.
16.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

16

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

General Description

004

Mical Low Frequency Heating
Insulation Drying Process

The insulation is dried in its own
tank and is never exposed to the
atmosphere once it dries

The windings are heated uniformly,
so the insulation deep in the coils
reaches a temperature that pro-
motes moisture removal during
the vacuum cycle

The moisture level of the air in the
vacuum exhaust is monitored con-
stantly to ensure that the insulation
is dry when the process is completed

Fluid Preservation Systems

Sealedaire Standard on Units
>2500 kVA or

250 kV BIL

The Sealedaire preservation system
uses a sealed gas space above the uid
that prevents breathing under normal
conditions. An automatic pressure-
vacuum relief valve assembly is
factory-set to keep internal pressure
within the limits of 6.5 pounds per
square inch pressure or vacuum.

Intertaire Optional

The Intertaire Fluid Preservation
System prevents oxygen and moisture
from being drawn into the transformer
tank when vacuum conditions exist.
This system consists of a nitrogen
cylinder and necessary controls to
maintain positive nitrogen pressure
in the gas space.

Conservator Optional

The Conservator, or Expansion-Tank
System, seals the uid from the
atmosphere in the main tank by using
an auxiliary tank partially lled with
transformer uid and connected to
the main tank by piping. The system
allows the transformer tank to remain
full, despite expansion or contraction
of the uid due to temperature changes.

Transformer Fluids

Mineral Oil

Mineral oil is primarily used in
outdoor applications.
Eaton offers transformers designed
with less ammable uidssilicone,
Envirotemp FR3 and BIOTEMPthat
can be used to meet the National
Electrical Code

450.23 for indoor
applications.

Silicone

Silicone is a less ammable dielectric
coolant for transformer applications
and features heat stability, material
compatibility, low ammability and
low toxicity. Silicones high re point
of 340C qualies it as a less ammable
uid, which is UL

listed and factory
mutual approved for indoor and out-
door use. Its a good choice in areas
where potential re hazards exist
and special re-suppressant systems
are installed.

BIOTEMP/Envirotemp FR3

BIOTEMP/Envirotemp FR3 is a new,
fully biodegradable, environmentally
friendly dielectric uid. In a 21-day
period, BIOTEMP/Envirotemp FR3 has
been tested to be 97% biodegradable.
BIOTEMP/Envirotemp FR3 is Factory
Mutual approved and UL listed.
BIOTEMP/Envirotemp FR3 is suitable
for application indoors and in areas of
heightened environmental sensitivity
where any insulating uid spill could
require expensive clean-up procedures.

Quality Assurance Testing

The following tests are made on
all transformers unless noted as an
exception. The numbers shown do not
necessarily indicate the sequence in
which the tests will be made. All tests
will be made in accordance with the
latest revision of IEEE C57.12.90 Test
Code for Transformers.
1. Resistance measurements of all
windings on the rated tap and on
the tap extremes on one unit of a
given rating on a multiple unit order.
2. Ratio Tests on the rated voltage
connection and all tap connections.
3. Polarity and Phase-relation Tests.
4. No-load loss at rated voltage.
5. Excitation current at rated voltage.
6. Impedance and load loss at rated
current on the rated voltage con-
nection of each unit and on the tap
extremes on one unit of a given
rating on a multiple unit order.
7. Applied Potential Tests.
8. Induced Potential Test.
9. Mechanical Leak Test.

Optional Tests

The following additional tests can be
made on any substation transformer.
All tests are made in accordance with
the latest revision of IEEE Standard
Test Code C57.12.90.
1. IEEE Impulse Test.
2. Quality Control Impulse Test.
3. IEEE Front-of-Wave Impulse Test.
4. Temperature Test.
5. Sound Test.
6. Octave Band Sound Test.
7. Insulation Resistance (Meggar) Test.
8. Corona (Partial Discharge) or Radio
Inuence Voltage (RIV) Tests.
9. Short-Circuit Test.
10. Short-Circuit Capability Calcula-
tions in lieu of Short-Circuit Test.
11. Insulation Power Factor Test.
12. Zero-Phase Sequence
Impedance Test.
13. Seismic Test.
14. Quality Assurance Documentation.
15. Witness or Inspection.

Standards Compliance

IEEE C57.12.00

IEEE C57.12.90

ISO

9001

CSA

-C88

Substation transformers have
successfully passed IEEE short-
circuit tests

Substation transformers are
manufactured in an ISO 9001
certied factory

Seismic Qualication

Refer to

Tab 1

for information on


16.0-5

September 2011


Sheet

16

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

General Description

005

General Description

Self-cooled power rating (kVA):
75020,000

Primary voltage (kV): Up through 69
Secondary voltage (kV): Up to 34.5

Available uids:
Oil, silicone, BIOTEMP and
Envirotemp FR3

Load tap changers: 2500 kVA
and larger

Standard Electrical Features

Two windings, without
reconnectable windings

Four high voltage winding full-
capacity taps with a total tap
range of 10%

Standard impedance as shown
in chart

Frequency of 60 Hz

Sound levels as shown in chart

Standard BIL levels as shown in chart

Excitation limits dened by IEEE
C57.12.00-1980:

Unit will deliver rated kVA at 5%
above rated secondary voltage
without exceeding the limiting
temperature rise provided the
load power factor is 80% or
higher and the frequency is
at least 95% of rated value

Unit can be energized at 10%
above rated secondary voltage
at no-load without exceeding
the limiting temperature rise

65C average temperature rise

Optional Electrical Features

Series multiple windings
Delta-wye connectionchanging
the internal connections on the HV
or LV windings (three-phase only)
Nonstandard HV taps and tap range
Nonstandard phase relationship
Low-loss, high-efciency designs
Frequency other than 60 Hz
Special impedances
Design to withstand IEEE front-of-
wave impulse test
Special sound level
Special BIL level
Over excitation
55C/65C average temperature rise
Special ambient temperatures
Operation at altitudes above
3300 ft (1000m)
Motor-starting duty or dedicated
motor loads
Standard Electromechanical
Features
Aluminum windings
Tap changer for de-energized
operation with the handle brought
out through the tank wall
Rubber-jacketed multi-conductor
control wiring
Optional Electromechanical
Features
Copper windings
Tap changer mechanical key
interlock
Provisions only for tap changer
mechanical key interlock
Flexible conduit for control wiring
Rigid conduit for control wiring
Special control wiring size or
insulation
Core ground lead brought to test
point located inside tank adjacent
to bolted handhole
Electrostatic shields
Internally-mounted bushing
current transformer
Standard Tank Features
Corrosion-resistant steel hardware
Lifting hooks for complete unit
Lifting loops for tank cover
Welded main tank cover
Welded handhole on cover, or
bolted handhole when access
to tank interior is required
Tank grounding provisions
Transformer base that permits
rolling in directions parallel to
the base center line
Provisions for jacking
Optional Tank Features
Special hardware
Bolted handhole
Bolted manhole
Ground connector and pad
Skid mounting
Standard Gauges and Fittings
Magnetic liquid-level gauge with
alarm contacts
Dial-type thermometer with
alarm contacts
Pressure-vacuum gauge:
Units rated 200 kV BIL and below
Units rated 2500 kVA and below
Pressure-vacuum gauge with
alarm contacts
Pressure-relief device (no alarm
contacts):
Silicone lled
Oil lled
Pressure-relief device with
alarm contacts
Rapid pressure rise relay
Dial hot-spot indicator
Shock indicator for shipment
Audible alarm
RTD coil for use with remote
temperature indicator
Optional Gauges and Fittings
Magnetic liquid-level gauge with
alarm contacts
Dial-type thermometer with
alarm contacts
Pressure-vacuum gauge
(no alarm contactsprimary units
+/<2500 only)
Pressure-vacuum gauge with
alarm contacts
Pressure-relief device (no alarm
contacts):
Silicone lled (excluding primary
units >2500)
Oil lled (excluding primary
units >2500)
Pressure-relief device with
alarm contacts
Rapid pressure rise relay
Dial hot-spot indicator
Remote winding temperature
indicator
Shock indicator for shipment
Audible alarm
Top lter-press connection-valve
Optional Cooling System
Tank design pressure: 15 psig
Fluid preservation system:
Sealedaire on units 2500 kVA
Intertaire
Conservator
Coolers:
Removable coolers
Panel coolers
Provisions only for future fans (FFA)
excluding secondary units >500 kVA
Complete forced air cooling
systems (FA):
15% added capacity units rated
2500 kVA
25% added capacity units rated
>2500 kVA
16.0-6
September 2011
Sheet 16
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General Description
006
Standard Tank Finish
Special paint color
Paint system process:
Standard system: 5 mils
total thickness
System I: zinc chromate epoxy
primer and intermediate coat, oven
cure, air spray aliaphatic polyure-
thane, ambient cure, 57 mils
System II: zinc-rich primer, epoxy
coat, oven cure and air dry, 7 mils
minimum (only available with
panel coolers)
Optional Tank Finish
Special paint color
Paint system process:
Standard system: 5 mils
total thickness
System I: zinc chromate epoxy
primer and intermediate coat, oven
cure, air spray aliaphatic polyure-
thane, ambient cure, 57 mils
System II: zinc-rich primer,
epoxy coat, oven cure and air dry,
7 mils minimum (only available
with panel coolers)
Tank undercoating
Standard High and
Low Voltage Components
Bushings: cover-mounted
porcelain with copper conductor
Optional High and
Low Voltage Components
Bushings:
Special cover-mounted
porcelain bushings
Extra creep bushings
Transformer-breaker-
interchangeable (TBI) bushings
Bushing terminal connectors
Cover-mounted bus duct throat
HV and LV surge arresters
External fuses (HV only)
Special Options
Operation in hazardous locations
(qualication of externally attached
equipment such as wiring, conduit,
fans, cabinets, alarm contacts
and relays)
Receptacle or light in control cabinet
Space heater with thermostat in
control cabinet
Reusable gaskets on bushings,
handhole and devices
Special dimensions
16.0-7
September 2011
Sheet 16
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General Description
007
Standard Features
Liquid-Filled Transformer
Coverwelded to tank
Cooling tubes (radiators)
Note: Radiator position and number of
radiators will vary based upon design.
Bolted handhole on cover
Automatic resealing mechanical
HV bushing, three total, located in
ANSI Segment 2
LV bushing, four total (wye
connected), located in ANSI
Segment 4
Note: HV and LV bushings may be cover
mounted or left/right orientation may be
reversed.
Lifting loopstwo for lifting
cover only
Lifting hooksfour for lifting
complete unit
Jacking provisions on tank or base
Ground padtwo total
Drain valvefor combination
lower lter press connection and
complete drain with sampler
Base (may be at or formed)
Control cabinet for alarm lead
termination
Diagram instruction nameplate
with warning nameplate
De-energized tap changer with
padlock provisions
Liquid temperature indicator with
maximum indicating hand
Upper valve for upper lter press
connection
Magnetic liquid level gauge
Vacuum pressure gauge with air
test and Sealedaire valve
Figure 16.0-1. Liquid-Filled Primary Unit Substation Transformer with Wall-Mounted
High Voltage and Low Voltage Bushings
Note: See Pages 16.0-12 through 16.0-14 for dimensions and weights.
W
(Flange to Flange)
H
H3
H2
H1
D
X0
X3
X2
X1
Top View
Front View
16.0-8
September 2011
Sheet 16
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
008
Table 16.0-1. Standard Sound Levels
Table 16.0-2. Standard Basic Impulse Levels
Table 16.0-3. Standard Impedances (Percent)

Self-Cooled (OA)
Equivalent Two-Winding (kVA)
NEMA
Average DB-OA
NEMA
Average DB-FA
60017500
750110,000
10,00112,000
67
68
69
69
70
71
12,00115,000
15,00120,000
70
71
72
73
kV
Class
Introduced Test
180 Hz7200 Cycles
kV
BIL
Applied Test
60 Hz-kV
1.2
2.5
5.0
Twice
Normal
Voltage
45
60
75
10
15
19
8.7
15.0
25.0 (Ground Y only)
95
110
125
26
34
40
25.0
34.5 (Ground Y only)
34.5
150
150
200
50
50
70
46.0
69.0
350
250
95
140
HV kV BIL
Class
Low Voltage
Below 2400V
Low Voltage
2400V and Above
45150
200
250
350
5.75
7.25
7.75
6.50
7.00
7.50
8.00
ANSI Segment Identication
for HV and LV Bushings
The plan view, below, shows the ANSI
segments used to identify the location
of both the HV and LV bushings.
Figure 16.0-2. Front (Nameplate, Gauges, etc.)
HV: Segment 2 is standard for
wall-mounted bushings
(optional Segment 4).
Segment 3 is standard for
cover-mounted bushings.
LV: Segment 4 wall-mounted is
standard (optional Segment 2).
Segment 1
(Front)
Segment 2
Segment 3
Segment 4
16.0-9
September 2011
Sheet 16
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
009
on aluminum windings. Losses based on LV rating of 25 kV.
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1777
2254
3161
9984
12,613
17,178
11,761
14,867
20,339
4270
5410
7460
2000
2500
3000
4004
4784
4310
20,820
23,538
23,584
24,824
28,322
27,894
9210
10,670
10,210
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6359
8070
11,343
14,419
27,990
34,991
47,722
58,758
34,349
43,061
59,065
73,177
13,360
16,820
23,270
29,110
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1795
2277
3193
10,085
12,741
17,352
11,880
15,018
20,545
4320
5460
7530
2000
2500
3000
4045
4833
5364
21,031
23,776
23,823
25,076
28,609
29,187
9300
10,780
11,320
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6424
8152
11,458
14,565
28,273
35,345
48,205
59,352
34,697
43,497
59,663
73,917
13,490
16,990
23,510
29,400
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1812
2299
3224
10,183
12,865
17,521
11,995
15,164
20,745
4360
5520
7600
2000
2500
3000
4084
4879
4396
21,236
24,008
24,055
25,320
28,887
28,451
9390
10,880
10,410
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6486
8231
11,569
14,707
28,549
35,690
48,676
59,933
35,035
43,921
60,245
74,640
13,620
17,150
23,740
29,690
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses at
100% Load and
85C (Watts)
200 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1902
2413
3385
10,692
13,508
18,397
12,594
15,921
21,782
4580
5790
7980
2000
2500
3000
4288
5122
4615
22,298
25,208
25,257
26,586
30,330
29,872
9860
11,420
10,930
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6810
8642
12,147
15,442
29,976
37,474
51,109
62,929
36,786
46,116
63,256
78,371
14,300
18,010
24,920
31,170
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1928
2445
3429
10,832
13,685
18,638
12,760
16,130
22,067
4640
5870
8090
2000
2500
3000
4344
5190
4676
22,589
25,538
25,584
26,933
30,728
30,260
9990
11,570
11,070
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6899
8755
12,307
15,644
30,369
37,965
51,778
63,752
37,268
46,720
64,085
79,396
14,490
18,250
25,250
31,580
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1947
2470
3464
10,942
13,823
18,826
12,889
16,293
22,290
4680
5930
8170
2000
2500
3000
4388
5243
5819
22,818
25,796
25,847
27,206
31,039
31,666
10,090
11,690
12,280
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6970
8844
12,431
15,803
30,676
38,349
52,302
64,396
37,646
47,193
64,733
80,199
14,640
18,430
25,510
31,900
16.0-10
September 2011
Sheet 16
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
010
Table 16.0-12. Environmentally Friendly Fluid 5 kV Primary
55C Temp. Rise
55C Temp. Rise
55C Temp. Rise
55C Temp. Rise
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C (Watts)
150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1966
2494
3498
11,048
13,958
19,010
13,014
16,452
22,508
4730
5980
8250
2000
2500
3000
4431
5293
4769
23,041
26,048
26,099
27,472
31,341
30,868
10,190
11,810
11,290
3750
5000
7500
10,000
7037
8930
12,552
15,957
30,875
38,735
52,813
65,027
37,912
47,665
65,365
80,984
14,760
18,610
25,760
32,210
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C (Watts)
200 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
2063
2618
3672
11,600
14,656
19,960
13,663
17,274
23,632
4960
6280
8660
2000
2500
3000
4652
5557
5007
24,193
27,350
27,403
28,845
32,907
32,410
10,700
12,390
11,860
3750
5000
7500
10,000
7388
9376
13,179
16,754
32,523
40,659
55,453
68,277
39,911
50,035
68,632
85,031
15,520
19,540
27,040
33,820
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1756
2235
3156
9491
11,822
15,576
11,247
14,057
18,732
4130
5190
7050
2000
2500
3000
4028
4851
5246
18,115
19,441
21,540
22,143
24,292
26,786
8560
9710
10,630
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6286
8004
11,380
14,675
24,712
29,717
38,675
46,227
30,998
37,721
50,055
60,902
12,460
15,430
21,050
26,230
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1774
2258
3188
9587
11,942
15,734
11,361
14,200
18,922
4170
5240
7120
2000
2500
3000
4069
4900
5299
18,298
19,638
21,758
22,367
24,538
27,057
8640
9810
10,740
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6350
8085
11,495
14,824
24,962
30,018
39,066
46,694
31,312
38,103
50,561
61,518
12,590
15,590
21,260
26,500
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1791
2279
3219
9680
12,058
15,887
11,471
14,337
19,106
4210
5290
7190
2000
2500
3000
4108
4948
5350
18,477
19,829
21,970
22,585
24,777
27,320
8730
9910
10,840
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6411
8164
11,607
14,968
25,206
30,311
39,448
47,150
31,617
38,475
51,055
62,118
12,710
15,740
21,470
26,760
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
200 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1880
2392
3379
10,164
12,660
16,681
12,044
15,052
20,060
4420
5560
7550
2000
2500
3000
4313
5195
5617
19,400
20,820
23,068
23,713
26,015
28,685
9160
10,400
11,380
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6731
8572
12,187
15,716
26,466
31,826
41,420
49,507
33,197
40,398
53,607
65,223
13,350
16,530
22,450
28,090
16.0-11
September 2011
Sheet 16
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Technical Data
011
65C Temp. Rise
65C Temp. Rise
65C Temp. Rise
65C Temp. Rise
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C (Watts)
60 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1905
2424
3424
10,297
12,826
16,899
12,202
15,250
20,323
4480
5630
7650
2000
2500
3000
4370
5263
5691
19,654
21,093
23,370
24,024
26,356
29,061
9280
10,540
11,530
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6820
8684
12,347
15,922
26,812
32,242
41,962
50,156
33,632
40,926
54,309
66,078
13,520
16,740
22,840
28,460
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C (Watts)
95 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1924
2449
3458
10,401
12,957
17,071
12,325
15,406
20,529
4520
5690
7730
2000
2500
3000
4414
5316
5749
19,853
21,307
23,607
24,267
26,623
29,356
9380
10,970
11,650
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6889
8772
12,472
16,084
27,083
32,569
42,386
50,662
33,972
41,341
54,858
66,746
13,660
16,910
23,070
28,750
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss at
100% Load
and 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C (Watts)
150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
1943
2472
3492
10,502
13,082
17,237
12,445
15,554
20,729
4570
5740
7800
2000
2500
3000
4457
5368
5804
20,047
21,514
23,837
24,504
26,882
29,641
9470
10,750
11,760
3750
5000
7500
10,000
6955
8857
12,593
16,240
27,348
32,887
42,801
51,157
34,303
41,744
55,394
67,397
13,790
17,080
23,290
29,030
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C (Watts)
200 kV HV BIL
Total Losses
at 50% Load
and 55C LL
Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL
Ref. Temp. per
DOE (Watts)
750
1000
1500
2039
2595
3666
11,027
13,736
18,098
13,066
16,331
21,764
4800
6030
8190
2000
2500
3000
4679
5636
6094
21,049
22,589
25,028
25,728
28,225
31,122
9940
11,280
12,350
3750
5000
7500
10,000
7303
9300
13,222
17,051
28,715
34,531
44,940
53,715
36,018
43,831
58,162
70,766
14,480
17,930
24,460
30,480
16.0-12
September 2011
Sheet 16
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
012
chambers, see Notes at bottom of page for dimensions that
should be added to the table dimensions.
HV 6900D, 75 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
Notes: 1. Dimensions are APPROXIMATE. Refer to the transformers
outline drawing for actual dimensions for construction.
dimension and 10.00 inches (254.0 mm) to D dimension.
bus duct throat.
HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 12470Y, 95 BIL
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
500
750
1000
4520 (2050)
4750 (2155)
5590 (2536)
120 (454)
150 (568)
170 (644)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
56 (1422)
56 (1422)
59 (1499)
56 (1422)
56 (1422)
59 (1499)
1500
2000
2500
7380 (3348)
8890 (4032)
10,060 (4563)
210 (795)
240 (908)
260 (984)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
67 (1702)
70 (1778)
70 (1778)
67 (1702)
70 (1778)
70 (1778)
3000
3750
5000
11,110 (5039)
13,200 (5987)
18,020 (8174)
290 (1098)
340 (1287)
620 (2347)
95 (2413)
95 (2413)
113 (2870)
70 (1778)
73 (1854)
74 (1880)
70 (1778)
73 (1854)
74 (1880)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
4840 (2195)
5720 (2595)
7370 (3343)
160 (606)
180 (681)
210 (795)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
56 (1422)
59 (1499)
65 (1651)
79 (2007)
78 (1981)
92 (2337)
2000
2500
3000
8760 (3973)
9940 (4509)
11,650 (5284)
230 (871)
260 (984)
350 (1325)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
95 (2413)
68 (1727)
68 (1727)
70 (1778)
114 (2896)
125 (3175)
127 (3226)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
13,330 (6046)
16,640 (7548)
30,300 (13,744)
34,830 (15,799)
390 (1476)
480 (1817)
1220 (4618)
1230 (4656)
95 (2413)
95 (2413)
114 (2896)
114 (2896)
72 (1829)
75 (1905)
113 (2870)
118 (2997)
127 (3226)
131 (3327)
138 (3505)
139 (3531)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
5120 (2322)
5980 (2712)
7280 (3302)
170 (644)
180 (681)
210 (795)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
57 (1448)
62 (1575)
63 (1600)
79 (2007)
81 (2057)
100 (2540)
2000
2500
3000
8700 (3946)
10,290 (4667)
11,860 (5380)
230 (871)
270 (1022)
320 (1211)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
95 (2413)
65 (1651)
70 (1778)
73 (1854)
108 (2743)
114 (2896)
127 (3226)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
13,410 (6083)
17,030 (7725)
29,720 (13,481)
35,790 (16,234)
360 (1363)
520 (1968)
1140 (4315)
1310 (4959)
95 (2413)
99 (2515)
109 (2769)
116 (2946)
73 (1854)
75 (1905)
113 (2870)
117 (2972)
129 (3277)
131 (3327)
140 (3556)
143 (3632)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
5650 (2563)
6400 (2903)
8020 (3638)
220 (833)
220 (833)
250 (946)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
59 (1499)
61 (1549)
64 (1626)
81 (2057)
87 (2210)
101 (2565)
2000
2500
3000
9500 (4309)
10,550 (4785)
12,000 (5443)
280 (1060)
300 (1136)
330 (1249)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
95 (2413)
68 (1727)
70 (1778)
73 (1854)
101 (2565)
107 (2718)
127 (3226)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
14,350 (6509)
19,110 (8668)
30,880 (14,007)
39,080 (17,726)
450 (1703)
700 (2650)
1210 (4580)
1600 (6057)
95 (2413)
117 (2972)
117 (2972)
124 (3150)
73 (1854)
74 (1880)
102 (2591)
106 (2692)
128 (3251)
129 (3277)
140 (3556)
145 (3683)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
5660 (2567)
6640 (3012)
8000 (3629)
210 (795)
230 (871)
250 (946)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
58 (1473)
62 (1575)
64 (1626)
83 (2108)
87 (2210)
107 (2718)
2000
2500
3000
9350 (4241)
10,860 (4926)
12,400 (5625)
290 (1098)
310 (1173)
340 (1287)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
95 (2413)
66 (1676)
71 (1803)
73 (1854)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
130 (3302)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
14,500 (6577)
19,510 (8850)
30,270 (13,730)
38,140 (17,300)
430 (1628)
720 (2725)
1120 (4240)
1500 (5679)
95 (2413)
118 (2997)
118 (2997)
124 (3150)
74 (1880)
74 (1880)
101 (2565)
105 (2667)
130 (3302)
132 (3353)
143 (3632)
146 (3708)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
6630 (3007)
7510 (3406)
9040 (4100)
250 (946)
280 (1060)
290 (1098)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
65 (1651)
66 (1676)
69 (1753)
64 (1626)
78 (1981)
88 (2235)
2000
2500
3000
10,110 (4586)
11,670 (5293)
12,760 (5788)
290 (1098)
330 (1249)
350 (1325)
92 (2337)
92 (2337)
95 (2413)
70 (1778)
73 (1854)
74 (1880)
96 (2438)
106 (2692)
130 (3302)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
15,280 (6931)
19,370 (8786)
30,850 (13,993)
38,320 (17,382)
440 (1666)
650 (2461)
1180 (4467)
1450 (5489)
95 (2413)
107 (2718)
114 (2896)
122 (3099)
75 (1905)
76 (1930)
100 (2540)
104 (2642)
133 (3378)
136 (3454)
139 (3531)
143 (3632)
16.0-13
September 2011
Sheet 16
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
013
HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 13800Y, 95 BIL
bus duct throat.
HV 6900D, 75 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 13800D, 95 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
7000 (3175)
7720 (3502)
9880 (4481)
330 (1249)
350 (1325)
380 (1438)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
67 (1702)
67 (1702)
69 (1753)
66 (1676)
79 (2007)
98 (2489)
2000
2500
3000
11,300 (5126)
12,880 (5842)
13,760 (6241)
410 (1552)
450 (1703)
460 (1741)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
71 (1803)
71 (1803)
72 (1829)
112 (2845)
122 (3099)
130 (3302)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
16,030 (7271)
19,780 (8972)
30,270 (13,730)
39,290 (17,822)
520 (1968)
660 (2498)
1070 (4050)
1480 (5602)
115 (2921)
117 (2972)
129 (3277)
136 (3454)
85 (2159)
100 (2540)
124 (3150)
127 (3226)
136 (3454)
138 (3505)
138 (3505)
140 (3556)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
7230 (3279)
8040 (3647)
9920 (4500)
340 (1287)
360 (1363)
390 (1476)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
68 (1727)
68 (1727)
69 (1753)
67 (1702)
80 (2032)
94 (2388)
2000
2500
3000
11,700 (5307)
13,120 (5951)
14,400 (6532)
430 (1628)
460 (1741)
500 (1893)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
71 (1803)
73 (1854)
76 (1930)
116 (2946)
124 (3150)
128 (3251)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
16,210 (7353)
20,490 (9294)
31,470 (14,275)
36,390 (16,506)
540 (2044)
740 (2801)
1190 (4505)
1190 (4505)
115 (2921)
124 (3150)
133 (3378)
132 (3353)
77 (1956)
95 (2413)
122 (3099)
125 (3175)
136 (3454)
139 (3531)
140 (3556)
145 (3683)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
9110 (4132)
9370 (4250)
10,760 (4881)
410 (1552)
390 (1476)
410 (1552)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
72 (1829)
63 (1600)
70 (1778)
93 (2362)
2000
2500
3000
12,210 (5538)
13,600 (6169)
14,990 (6799)
450 (1703)
470 (1779)
510 (1931)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
115 (2921)
72 (1829)
74 (1880)
77 (1956)
108 (2743)
109 (2769)
125 (3175)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
16,590 (7525)
20,480 (9290)
32,220 (14,615)
38,460 (17,445)
540 (2044)
710 (2688)
1050 (3975)
1350 (5110)
115 (2921)
122 (3099)
125 (3175)
135 (3429)
77 (1956)
94 (2388)
123 (3124)
124 (3150)
137 (3480)
138 (3505)
139 (3531)
148 (3759)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
4930 (2236)
5940 (2694)
7690 (3488)
160 (606)
180 (681)
220 (833)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
48 (1219)
52 (1321)
59 (1499)
76 (1930)
92 (2337)
95 (2413)
2000
2500
3000
9270 (4205)
10,630 (4822)
12,280 (5570)
250 (946)
280 (1060)
340 (1287)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
62 (1575)
62 (1575)
63 (1600)
107 (2718)
112 (2845)
121 (3073)
3750
5000
14,540 (6595)
18,620 (8446)
380 (1438)
580 (2196)
87 (2210)
98 (2489)
67 (1702)
68 (1727)
122 (3099)
123 (3124)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
5010 (2272)
6090 (2762)
7730 (3506)
160 (606)
180 (681)
220 (833)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
48 (1219)
53 (1346)
55 (1397)
79 (2007)
82 (2083)
116 (2946)
2000
2500
3000
9270 (4205)
10,510 (4767)
12,100 (5488)
250 (946)
270 (1022)
310 (1173)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
59 (1499)
61 (1549)
65 (1651)
118 (2997)
119 (3023)
119 (3023)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
14,380 (6523)
18,490 (8387)
32,180 (14,597)
46,580 (21,128)
390 (1476)
560 (2120)
1020 (3861)
1760 (6662)
87 (2210)
97 (2464)
98 (2489)
119 (3023)
65 (1651)
68 (1727)
112 (2845)
120 (3048)
121 (3073)
122 (3099)
131 (3327)
131 (3327)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
5340 (2422)
6120 (2776)
7660 (3475)
180 (681)
190 (719)
220 (833)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
49 (1245)
51 (1295)
56 (1422)
79 (2007)
82 (2083)
116 (2946)
2000
2500
3000
9080 (4119)
11,180 (5071)
12,470 (5656)
250 (946)
290 (1098
310 (1173)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
59 (1499)
64 (1626)
66 (1676)
118 (2997)
119 (3023)
115 (2921)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
14,590 (6618)
18,330 (8314)
31,330 (14,211)
39,050 (17,713)
360 (1363)
540 (2044)
970 (3672)
1230 (4656)
87 (2210)
93 (2362)
98 (2489)
101 (2565)
68 (1727)
68 (1727)
111 (2819)
114 (2896)
121 (3073)
122 (3099)
131 (3327)
131 (3327)
16.0-14
September 2011
Sheet 16
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
014
HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
HV 22900D, 150 BIL
LV 12470Y, 95 BIL
bus duct throat.
HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 2400Y, 45 BIL
HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 4160Y, 60 BIL
HV 34400D, 200 BIL
LV 13800Y, 95 BIL
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
5970 (2708)
6820 (3093)
8710 (3951)
230 (871)
240 (908)
280 (1060)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
52 (1321)
54 (1372)
57 (1448)
73 (1854)
91 (2311)
95 (2413)
2000
2500
3000
10,140 (4599)
11,890 (5393)
13,480 (6114)
310 (1173)
338 (1279)
380 (1438)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
58 (1473)
62 (1575)
66 (1676)
110 (2794)
121 (3073)
124 (3150)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
15,820 (7176)
19,250 (8732)
32,700 (14,832)
50,160 (22,752)
440 (1666)
540 (2044)
1090 (4126)
2200 (8328)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
100 (2540)
120 (3048)
68 (1727)
70 (1778)
99 (2515)
118 (2997)
125 (3175)
129 (3277)
133 (3378)
133 (3378)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
6090 (2762)
7110 (3225)
8630 (3915)
230 (871)
250 (946)
280 (1060)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
52 (1321)
55 (1397)
56 (1422)
75 (1905)
91 (2311)
102 (2591)
2000
2500
3000
10,050 (4559)
12,170 (5520)
13,600 (6169)
310 (1173)
350 (1325)
380 (1438)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
58 (1473)
63 (1600)
66 (1676)
107 (2718)
114 (2896)
116 (2946)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
15,300 (6940)
19,350 (8777)
32,590 (14,783)
40,250 (18,257)
420 (1590)
580 (2196)
1040 (3937)
1370 (5186)
87 (2210)
89 (2261)
94 (2388)
109 (2769)
68 (1727)
70 (1778)
98 (2489)
102 (2591)
126 (3200)
129 (3277)
134 (3404)
137 (3480)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
6930 (3143)
7920 (3592)
9370 (4250)
360 (1363)
300 (1136)
310 (1173)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
56 (1422)
58 (1473)
59 (1499)
66 (1676)
72 (1829)
90 (2286)
2000
2500
3000
11,240 (5098)
12,760 (5788)
14,260 (6468)
330 (1249)
370 (1401)
390 (1476)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
87 (2210)
62 (1575)
66 (1676)
69 (1753)
104 (2642)
110 (2794)
111 (2819)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
15,910 (7217)
19,830 (8995)
33,990 (15,418)
39,610 (17,967)
420 (1590)
530 (2006)
1100 (4164)
1280 (4845)
87 (2210)
89 (2261)
94 (2388)
109 (2769)
69 (1753)
71 (1803)
97 (2464)
99 (2515)
122 (3099)
130 (3302)
139 (3531)
139 (3531)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
7600 (3447)
8460 (3837)
10,740 (4872)
370 (1401)
390 (1476)
420 (1590)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
60 (1524)
60 (1524)
62 (1575)
68 (1727)
84 (2134)
107 (2718)
2000
2500
3000
12,260 (5561)
13,760 (6241)
15,020 (6813)
460 (1741)
490 (1855)
520 (1968)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
64 (1626)
64 (1626)
66 (1676)
115 (2921)
121 (3073)
121 (3073)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
16,950 (7688)
20,270 (9194)
33,980 (15,413)
42,340 (19,205)
570 (2158)
650 (2461)
1200 (4542)
1440 (5451)
107 (2718)
109 (2769)
120 (3048)
129 (3277)
78 (1981)
92 (2337)
117 (2972)
150 (3810)
129 (3277)
132 (3353)
136 (3454)
136 (3454)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
7930 3597)
8840 (4010)
10,710 (4858)
380 (1438)
400 (1514)
440 (1666)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
61 (1549)
61 (1549)
62 (1575)
68 (1727)
81 (2057)
95 (2413)
2000
2500
3000
12,530 (5684)
13,920 (6314)
15,620 (7085)
470 (1779)
500 (1893)
560 (2120)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
64 (1626)
66 (1676)
69 (1753)
117 (2972)
117 (2972)
127 (3226)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
17,580 (7974)
20,980 (9516)
32,460 (14,724)
40,320 (18,289)
610 (2309)
680 (2574)
1080 (4088)
1360 (5148)
107 (2718)
108 (2743)
119 (3023)
129 (3277)
71 (1803)
84 (2134)
116 (2946)
119 (3023)
127 (3226)
132 (3353)
135 (3429)
135 (3429)
kVA
Rating
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters)
Liquid
Height Width Depth
750
1000
1500
9270 (4205)
9900 (4491)
11,620 (5271)
400 (1514)
420 (1590)
460 (1741)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
65 (1651)
65 (1651)
65 (1651)
55 (1397)
67 (1702)
96 (2438)
2000
2500
3000
13,160 (5969)
14,580 (6613)
16,090 (7298)
500 (1893)
530 (2006)
560 (2120)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
107 (2718)
65 (1651)
67 (1702)
69 (1753)
117 (2972)
117 (2972)
123 (3124)
3750
5000
7500
10,000
17,930 (8133)
21,410 (9711)
32,060 (14,542)
41,850 (18,983)
600 (2271)
680 (2574)
1010 (3823)
1330 (5035)
108 (2743)
110 (2794)
114 (2896)
122 (3099)
77 (1956)
77 (1956)
116 (2946)
148 (3759)
130 (3302)
131 (3327)
132 (3353)
116 (2946)


September 2011

Contents

17.0-1

Sheet

17

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

001

P
a
d
-
M
o
u
n
t
e
d
T
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r
s



17.0-2

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-2

Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-2

Industry Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-2

Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-2

Design Impedances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-2

Application Limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-2

Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-3

Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-3

Transformer Cooling Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-4

NEC Requirement Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-5

Seismic Qualication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-5

Primary Protection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-6

Primary Switching Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-8

Loadbreak Wells and Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-9

Primary Fuse Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-10

Layout Data 752500 kVA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-11

Technical Data 752500 kVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-12

Layout Dimensions 30005000 kVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-13

Technical Data 30005000 kVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.0-14
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010

Typical Pad-Mounted Transformer
17.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

17

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

General Description

002

Three-Phase

Typical Pad-Mounted Transformer

Introduction

Eatons three-phase pad-mounted
transformer is offered in a variety
of designs and congurations. The
following pages describe the standard
designs and the common options that
are available.
Some special designs and options
may require additional engineering,
factory coordination, unusual
application requirements or
special manufacturing needs.
Higher impedances limit secondary
fault currents such that coordination
with secondary low voltage molded-
case circuit breakers is usually
possible. (Low impedances are also
available if required for paralleling,
and so on.)
Standard color is pad-mounted green
[Munsell

Green (#7GY3.29/1.5)]. ANSI
#24, 61 and 70 are available as options.

Application

Liquid-lled, three-phase, commercial
pad-mounted distribution transformers
are designed for servicing such under-
ground distribution loads as shopping
centers, schools, institutions and
industrial plants. They are available
in both livefront and deadfront
construction, for radial or loop-feed
applications, with or without taps.

Industry Standards

Pad-mounted transformers meet
industry standards: IEEE

C57.12.00,
IEEE C57.12.34, IEEE C57.12.28, IEEE
C57.12.29, IEEE C57.12.70, IEEE
C57.12.80, IEEE C57.12.90, IEEE C57.91
and NEMA

.

Ratings

755000 kVA

High voltages (primary):
4160 Grd. Y/2400 2400

through through
34,500 Grd. Y/19,920 34,500

HV Taps: 22-1/2% above and below
normal, or 42-1/2% below normal

Standard BIL levels:

kV Class BIL (kV)

1.2 30
2.5 45
5.0 60
8.7 75
15.0 95
25.0 Grd. Y Only 125
25.0 150
34.5 Grd. Y Only 150
34.5 150

Low voltages (secondary).
All voltages through 5 kV class

UL labeling available

Factory Mutual labeling available

Design Impedances

Impedances are supplied to meet
IEEE C57.12.00 standards. Customer-
specied impedances are available.
(Subject to IEEE/ANSI 7.5%
impedance tolerance.)

Typical design impedances:

kVA %Z

75 4.00
112-1/2 4.00
150 4.00
225 4.00
300 5.00
500 5.00
750 5.75
1000 5.75
1500 5.75
2000 5.75
2500 5.75
3000 5.75
3750 5.75
5000 5.75

Note:

Subject to NEMA/IEEE 7.5%
impedance tolerance.

Note: Non-standard design impedance

may be obtained by contacting Eaton.

Application Limitations

The transformers described herein are
designed for the application conditions
normally encountered on electric power
distribution systems. As such, they are
suitable for use under the usual service
conditions described in IEEE Standard
C57.12.00 general requirements for
liquid-immersed distribution, power
and regulating transformers.
Consult Eaton for unusual service
conditions such as:

Abnormal environmental conditions

Unusual transient voltages present
on the source voltage

Frequent or planned through-
fault duty

Planned overloading unless in strict
accordance with the IEEE loading
guide (C57.91)

Motors whose horsepower rating
is greater than half the transformer
kVA rating

Unusual frequency of impact loading
may occur when supplying welding
apparatus, electric arc furnaces or
motors with cyclical loads

Loads involving abnormal harmonic
or DC current that may result
where appreciable load currents
are controlled by solid-state or
similar devices
These lists do not purport to cover
all unusual conditions and applicable
limitations. Other unusual service
conditions are described in IEEE
Standard C57.12.00.

Table 17.0-1. Temperature Guarantees

30C average ambient temperature of
cooling air not to exceed 40C maximum
over any 24-hour period.

Degree rise is the average winding
temperature rise by resistance.

A dual temperature rating of 55/65C adds
12% additional continuous capacity to the
base kVA rating of the transformer.

Note:

Altitudes not to exceed
3300 ft (1006m).

FluidsLiquid Dielectric

The choice of uid, mineral oil or
less ammable natural esther uid
(BIOTEMP

, Envirotemp FR3

) is
made based upon site conditions
and proximity to facility walls,
windows and ammable structures,
and environmentally sensitive areas.

Note:


Tab 14

.

Description Ambient

Rise

Standard
Optional
30C
30C
65C
55C


17.0-3

September 2011


Sheet

17

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

General Description

003

Standard Features

Four lifting hooks

Bolted-on terminal compartment
with removable front sill

Hinged, lift-off cabinet doors

Interlocked hex-head or penta-head
bolt padlock handle operates a cam
assembly that is part of the three-
point door latching mechanism
Hex-head or penta-head bolts
must be removed from the ange
formed on the steel high/low
barrier before the HV door can
be openednot shown
Removable neutral ground strap
not shown

Tank ground pads (1 in HV, 1 in LV)

Steel high/low voltage
compartment barrier

Nameplate

Fill plug and self-actuating

Externally operated no load
tap changer

Drain valve and sampling device

Options

Primary Termination

For livefront construction, exter-
nally clamped high voltage porce-
lain bushings double eye-bolt or
spade for cable (75225 kVA) or a
single eyebolt or spade for cable
(3001500 kVA). Spade bushings
are also offered

For deadfront construction, exter-
nally clamped high voltage epoxy
bushing wells for 200A loadbreak,
or 600A non-loadbreak inserts

Secondary Termination

NEMA spade terminals

Primary and Secondary Compartment Features
17.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

17

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

General Description

004

Transformer Cooling Classes

Table 17.0-2. Fluids Advantages and Disadvantages
Table 17.0-3. Fluid Properties Comparison

Advantages Disadvantages

Mineral Oil

Low transformer cost


Low maintenance cost

Good heat dissipation

Good cold climate performance

Preventative maintenanceDGA historical data available

Higher installation cost

Vaults required for indoor installations per code low re point160C

<30% biodegradability

Silicone Fluid

Low heat release

Reduced smoke

Low ame

Self extinguishing


Low toxicity

Moderate viscosity

High stability

Non-biodegradable

Not suitable for use with internal Bay-O-Net fuses

Transformer cost

Disposal cost

Viton gaskets required

Retrol applications

High transformer cost

High moisture absorption

Environmentally Friendly Fluids

High re point360C

High ash point343C

Compatible with mineral oil

Excellent retrol uid (compatible with oil up to a 10% mixture)

Excellent dielectric performance

97% biodegradable

Renewable resource

Greater tolerance to moisture
Transformer cost (lower than silicone uid)
Pour point (15 to 25C) transformer energized with full load with top
oil temperature at 50C with no problemsno crystals formed at 68C
Property Mineral
Oil
Silicone
Fluid
Fluids
Specic gravity
Flash point C
Fire point C
0.91
145
160
0.96
300
330
0.91
343
360
Viscosity (cSt.) 100C
40C
0C
3
12
76
16
38
90
10
45
300
Pour point C
Dielectric strength, kV
Dissipation factor (%) 25C
40
30
0.05
55
4.3
0.01
15 to 25
49
0.0250.05
Permittivity
Resistivity
Oxidation inhibitor
Biodegradability
2.2
10
13
Optional
<30%
2.7
10
14
No
0%
3.1
10
13
Required
97%
17.0-5
September 2011
Sheet 17
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General Description
005
NEC Requirement Guidelines
for the Installation of Listed
Less-Flammable Liquid-Filled
Transformers
NEC (NFPA) Recognition
These guidelines focus on the
requirements of Article 450.23 of
the National Electrical Code
(NEC
)
for the installation of less-ammable
liquid-insulated transformers. Less-
ammable liquids are used in
transformers where an extra margin
of re safety is important. Typical
applications include installations
indoors, on rooftops, near buildings,
bush and forest re prone areas and
in pedestrian trafc areas.
Less-ammable liquids, also known as
high re point liquids, are transformer
dielectric coolants that have a mini-
mum re point of 300C. Commonly
used re-resistant uids include
dimethysiloxane and ester-based
uids. Two Nationally Recognized
Testing Laboratories (NRTL);
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
and FM Approvals (FM) currently
list less-ammable liquids. They
also list less-ammable liquid-lled
transformers.
Less-ammable liquid-lled
transformers were formally recognized
by the NEC for indoor installation
in 1978. In 1990, the NEC integrated
specic less-ammable transformer
requirements for outdoor installations
for Article 450.23, in effect recognizing
less-ammable transformers as
inherently safer than conventional
oil-lled transformers. Less-ammable
transformers, long recognized as
an additional safeguard for indoor
installations, are becoming increas-
ingly recognized for outdoor
applications as well.
General NEC Requirements
The requirements and options for the
different types of outdoor installations
are outlined in Table 17.0-4. These
guidelines also summarize the UL
Classication and FM Approvals
installation requirements for less-
ammable uids referred to as
listing requirements in NEC 450.23.
In cases where the transformer
installation presents a re hazard, one
or more of the following safeguards
will be applied according to the degree
of hazard involved:
1. Space requirements.
2. Fire-resistant barriers.
3. Automatic re suppression
systems.
4. Enclosures that conne the oil
of a ruptured transformer tank.
NEC Article 450.28, Modication of
Transformers, requires that when
modications are made to transformers
in existing installations that change the
transformer type, the transformers
must be marked to show the type of
insulating liquid installed and the
installations must comply with current
requirements of the NEC. Examples of
changes include replacing a complete
transformer (retrotting) or replace-
ment of the liquid only (retrolling).
Askarel (PCB) and conventional mineral
oil-lled transformers are frequently
retrotted or retrolled using less-
ammable liquids. NEC 110.34
sets minimum clear work space
dimensions around transformers.
Seismic Qualication
Table 17.0-4. NEC Article 450.23 Requirements
Refer to NFPA 220-1999 for denition of non-combustible Type I and II building construction.
Fine Print Note, Article 450.23, (B) (1) states: Installations adjacent to combustible material, re
escapes, or door and window openings may require additional safeguards such as those listed in
Article 450.27.
Installation
Type
NEC
Requirements
Outdoor Installations
Non-combustible building
and no
combustible materials stored in area.
Either of the following listing requirements
:
FM approvals
Combustible building
or combustible
materials stored in area.
In accordance with NEC Article 450.27, oil-insulated
transformers installed outdoors, i.e., space
separation, re barriers or water spray systems.
17.0-6
September 2011
Sheet 17
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General Description
006
Primary Overcurrent
Protection Options
Primary protective devices are
applied to distribution transformers
in order to:
1. Prevent injury to personnel.
2. Prevent or minimize damage
to equipment.
3. Improve the continuity of service
by selectively controlling outages.
Factors that affect the protection
scheme are:
1. Industry standard.
2. Customers specication.
3. Customers system conguration
(available fault current, system
voltage, system connection,
and so on.)
4. Availability of equipment.
The rst consideration in determining
the ampere rating of a fuse is to verify
that the fuse in question is capable of
withstanding typical inrush currents
without element damage. When a
transformer is energized, it is exposed
to very large currents for very short
periods of time. These currents are
known as magnetizing inrush (or fuse
withstand) and cold load pickup,
and are a result of the transformers
magnetic circuit, the electrical system
conguration and the connected load.
The second consideration for selecting
the fuse ampere rating is the maxi-
mum load current the fuse is expected
to carry without damage. Transformer
fusing tables available from the
manufacturer normally list the range
of overload provided. If the longtime
minimum melt current for a particular
fuse size is known, it can be compared
to the transformer rated current to
determine the exact amount of
overload permitted. An ambient of
2540C is generally assumed for
application tables. Care should be
taken when fuses are applied in higher
ambient conditions, which will reduce
the amount of overload permitted. An
example of a high ambient condition
used frequently in distribution trans-
formers is that of current limiting fuses
in dry-well canisters. To accommodate
the overload and derating factors
referred to, the following ratios are
used on general-purpose CL fuses.
Nameplate current rating of fuse/
nameplate current rating of transformer
= 1.25 for enclosures surrounded by
air (EFD, clip mount, arc-strangler)
or = 1.35 for enclosures surrounded
by oil (canisters).
Derating factors are not applied to
expulsion or backup CL fuses because
high temperature has minimal effect
on their operation.
Finally, it is necessary to verify that the
fuse current rating under consider-
ation will, in fact, operate prior to the
transformer sustaining any perma-
nent thermal damage (conductor or
insulation burning or melting). This is
done by comparing the total clearing
characteristics of the fuse in question
with the IEEE (I
2
t) damage line.
It is important that the total clearing
characteristics of the device under
consideration lie to the left of the
damage line for all expected values
of fault current. Note that most fuse
characteristics will cross the damage
line at some point. It is important to
make this occur at the lowest possible
value of the current.
The interrupting rating of a device is a
measure of the maximum symmetrical
fault current at which the device can
successfully clear a fault condition
without excessive damage to itself,
the equipment it is protecting or
the surrounding environment.
It is extremely critical that the
interrupting rating of a device be
greater than the maximum available
symmetrical fault current. For devices
applied to the transformer primary,
the maximum fault current must be
supplied by the utility because this
value is dependent on the electrical
system conguration.
Protective Fuse Link
Internal, oil-immersed, expulsion type
Sized to operate only in the event of
a winding failure, isolating the trans-
former from the primary system
Interrupting rating is 3500A at 8.3 kV
Protective Fuse Link
Bay-O-Net-Type Fuse
Oil immersed, expulsion type
Drawout for fuse replacement
Hookstick operable, loadbreak design
Available with either overload-
sensing or fault sensing
3500 AIC at 8.3 kV, 1800 AIC
at 15.5 kV
Bay-O-Net fuse assemblies are used to
protect transformers and distribution
systems. They are designed for use in
pad-mounted or sub-surface distribu-
tion transformers lled with trans-
former oil or approved equivalent.
The assemblies combine the ease
of hotstick operation with the safety
of deadfront construction.
Removal of the fuse holder from the
assembly indicates that the apparatus
is electrically disconnected. It also
allows convenient fuse element
inspection and replacement. When
typical safety practices are followed,
the assemblies can be load-break
operated for working on the
transformer secondary; changing
distribution voltage with dual
voltage switches or tap changers;
or disconnecting the apparatus from
the line.
The optional Flapper Bay-O-Net
Assembly (available as sidewall-
mounted only) includes a apper valve
inside the housing, which closes when
the fuse holder is removed, thus
minimizing oil spillage.
Table 17.0-5. Bay-O-Net Fuse Electrical Ratings
With RTE Bay-O-Net fuse links only.
Except high ampere overload links, which

are rated at 2000A symmetrical.
Bay-O-Net-Type Fuse Assembly
kV
Rating
Specication
Electrical Ratings
150
50
BIL and full wave crest
60 Hz, AC, 1-minute withstand
Maximum Single-Phase Interrupting Ratings
8.3 3000A rms asymmetrical

cover mount
3500A rms symmetrical
sidewall mount
cover mount
sidewall mount

cover mount
sidewall mount
Load Break Ratings (Phase-to-Phase at 80% PF)
10.0
15.5
26.7
34.5
160A
150A
80A
50A
17.0-7
September 2011
Sheet 17
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General Description
007
Air immersed in drywell canister
Drawout for fuse replacement
Hookstick operable
Limits both the current magnitude
and energy associated with low
impedance faults
Effective in minimizing the probability
of tank rupture due to internal, high
energy, low impedance faults
Available fuse interrupting ratings of
25,00050,000A rms (symmetrical)
Maximum fuse ampere rating at
15 kV (250A fuses)
Partial Range Current Limiting Fuses
Oil immersed, internally block
mounted
Applied in series with an expulsion
type fuse (Bay-O-Net typesee above)
Protection against tank rupture
The current-limiting backup fuse
is used in series with low-current
primary protection devices such as
a Bay-O-Net fuse.
The fuses highly efcient current-limit-
ing section minimizes the effects of
high fault current stresses on equip-
ment and the distribution system. Its
minimum interrupting rating is coordi-
nated with that of a low current inter-
rupter to avoid undesirable low current
operation; yet its maximum interrupt-
ing rating will clear the highest fault
currents likely to occur. Higher continu-
ous current ratings can be achieved by
connecting two fuses in parallel.
The current-limiting fuse is used in
transformers to protect and isolate
faulted equipment. When connected
in series with a low current primary
protection device, the fuse becomes an
element of a two-part protection system
that gives a full range of fault protection.
Drawout Current Limiting Fuse Canister
Drawout Current Limiting Fuse
Loadbreak Assembly
Table 17.0-6. Current-Limiting Backup Fuse
Electrical Ratings and Characteristics
See Table 17.0-8 for fuses with ratings other

than 50,000 amperes rms symmetrical.
Fuse
Type
Maximum
Backup (partial range)
C rated
50,000A rms
symmetrical
This two-part system provides low

current protection with the replaceable
expulsion fuse and it adds the energy-
limiting protection of a current-limiting
fuse. Together, they coordinate easily
with upstream and downstream devices.
Table 17.0-7. Two- and Four-Position, Load Break, Sectionalizing Switch
Table 17.0-8. Current-Limiting Backup Fuse Interrupting Ratings
The 8.3 kV, 30100A ratings have been tested and approved for application at 9.9 kV.
The maximum interrupting capacity for the 65100A ratings at 9.9 kV is 18 kA.
Parallel fuses.
The 15.5 kV, 30125A and 250A ratings have been tested and approved for application at 17.2 kV.
The maximum interrupting rating for the 15.5 kV fuse, 30125A at 17.2 kV is 43 kA. For the 15 kV,
250A fuse at 17.2 kV, the maximum interrupting rating is 12 kA.
The maximum interrupting rating for the 23 kV fuse, 80165A, 300 and 330A, is 30 kA. For the
23 kV, 250A fuse, the maximum interrupting rating is 12 kA.
Ratings 200 Ampere 300 Ampere 600 Ampere
Voltage kV phasephase maximum
Voltage kV phaseground maximum
Impulse withstand kV
35
21.1
150
25
15.2
125
15
8.3
95
60 Hz 1-minute withstand kV
Continuous current
Loadbreak
50
200
200
40
300
300
34
600
600
Momentary, 10 Hz
2-second
3-shot make and latch ampere
10,000
10,000
6000
10,000
10,000
10,000
15,000
10,000
10,000
Continuous Ampere
Current Rating
Minimum Interrupting
(Amperes)
Minimum Melt I
2
t
(A
2
x s)
Maximum Clear I
2
t
(A
2
x s)
8.3 kV
30
40
50
100
125
165
1200
1800
4100
5800
8200
16,500
65
80
100
300
200
350
6200
9600
17,100
26,700
42,900
62,000
125
150
165
375
450
500
30,500
43,900
68,600
97,800
148,000
245,000
250
300
330
800
1000
1200
122,000
175,600
274,400
369,000
566,000
875,700
15.5 kV
30
40
50
100
150
200
1200
1800
4100
7600
11,000
23,000
65
80
100
350
250
350
6200
9600
17,100
33,000
52,900
93,800
125
150
165
400
450
30,500
43,900
125,700
162,300
250
300
330
800
1000
122,000
175,600
408,000
660,700
23 kV
30
40
50
125
200
325
1200
1800
4100
10,500
15,100
34,300
65
80
100
400
300
400
6200
9600
17,100
38,400
68,300
121,000
125
150
165
500
600
700
30,500
43,900
68,600
149,700
196,700
307,300
250
300
330
900
1200
1400
122,000
175,600
274,400
391,100
563,000
882,000
17.0-8
September 2011
Sheet 17
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General Description
008
Primary Switching Options
Eatons oil-immersed switches are
available for radial or loop-feed
system switching in three current
ratings. The three-phase gang-
operated switch has a spring-loaded
mechanism for loadbreak and latch
operation. The switch is mounted near
the core and coil assembly, for low cable
capacitance; and with simultaneous
three-phase switching, the possibility of
ferroresonance is reduced. Available in
ratings through 600A at 15 kV, 300A at
25 kV, and 200A at 35 kV.
Figure 17.0-1. Two-Position Switch
Figure 17.0-2. Four-Position Switch
(Loop Feed) T Blade
Deadfront Elbow Arrester
Surge Arresters
Eaton distribution class surge arrest-
ers are supplied on transformers when
specied. Transformers with livefront
conguration have mounting nuts
welded on the tank wall for arrester
mounting.
Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV)
Deadfront Arrester
Surge protection is available without
losing deadfront construction in the
cabinet. The Eaton type MOV arrester
is completely deadfront. It is compact,
and is usable wherever a loadbreak
elbow can be used.
The highly nonlinear characteristics
of the varistor elements provide more
precise and predictable operating
characteristics. The MOV arrester is
capable of withstanding temporary
overvoltages, so that ratings can be
reduced, providing improved margins
of protection.
Because it is fully shielded and dead-
front, it is mountable at any angle
and submersible. Its durable rubber
construction means there are no
fragile porcelain skirts to chip or crack.
The MOV arrester is available in
ratings from 3 kV to 27 kV.
Figure 17.0-3. Four-Position Switch
(Loop-Feed) V Blade
A
Source
Coil
A-Coil Open
A
Source
B Source
AB-Coil A-Coil
B-Coil Open and Loop through
Coil
A
B Source
AB-Coil A-Coil
B-Coil Open
Coil
Source
17.0-9
September 2011
Sheet 17
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General Description
009
Figure 17.0-4. 200A, 15 kV Class Loadbreak Elbow Connector
Figure 17.0-5. Bushing Well Insert Cutaway Illustrates Uncomplicated Nature of Current Path
1
7
.7
8-23. 11
M
M
LE215
B
100-.910
IN
INSULATION
High-quality peroxide-cured EPDM rubber formulated, mixed
and milled in-house for consistent and reliable field performance.
SEMI-CONDUCTIVE INSERT
High-quality peroxide-cured EPDM rubber
creates a smooth surface around the current
interchange to evenly distribute electrical
stress within the insulation.
PULLING EYE
Stainless steel
reinforced for
positive shotgun
stick switching
operations.
TEST POINT (OPTIONAL)
Corrosion-resistant, conductive
electrode provides consistent
capacitive voltage for application of
fault indicators and for determining
if the circuit is energized (cap not
shown).
LOADBREAK BAND
UV-resistant nylon band identifies
the elbow as three-phase loadbreak
rated and is field replaceable.
CONDUCTIVE INSERT ENDS
Encapsulated with insulating rubber. Reduces
cable extrusion and distortion that can be
caused by thermocycling. Mitigates the effects of
the electrical stresses along the cable to elbow
interface, greatly reducing the possibility of
interface tracking.
LOADBREAK PROBE
Tin-plated copper probe with arc-ablative
tip(arc follower) provides dependable load-
break switching characteristics.
COPPERTOP COMPRESSION CONNECTOR
Inertia-welded aluminum barrel and threaded copper
lug makes crimping easy and ensures a tight, reliable
electrical connection with loadbreak probe.
GROUNDING TABS
Molded into semi-conductive shield
for the attachment of a ground wire
to maintain deadfront safety.
SEMI-CONDUCTIVE SHIELD
High-quality peroxide-cured EPDM rubber provides protective
deadfront shield that meets requirements of IEEE Standard 592.
INSULATION
High-quality, peroxide-cured EPDM
rubber formulated, mixed and molded
in-house for consistent and reliable
field performance.
SHIELD HOUSING
Structural member of insert
providing mechanical strength
and uniform electrical shielding.
LATCH INDICATOR RING
Molded-in bright yellow ring eliminates elbow installation
guesswork by ensuring a quality connection.
ARC SNUFFER ASSEMBLY
Arc-ablative plastic produces
arc-extinguishing gas
during loadbreak switching
operations.
GROUNDING TABS
Three tabs molded into a semi-conductive
shield for the attachment of a ground wire
to maintain deadfront safety.
HEX BROACH
5/16 hex broach
permits consis-
tent installation
with torque tool.
THREADED BASE
3/8-16 UNC
Copper threads
provide connection
to bushing well
stud.
CONTACT HOLDER
Copper component transfers current from
piston-contact to bushing well stud.
SEMI-CONDUCTIVE SHIELD
High quality EPDM rubber provides protective deadfront
shield that meets requirements of IEEE Standard 592.
INTEGRAL PISTON-CONTACT
One-piece copper component
provides a multi-point, knurled
current transfer to the contact
holder. During a fault-close
switching operation, the piston
is forced quickly forward to
engage the elbows
loadbreak probe.
17.0-10
September 2011
Sheet 17
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General Description
010
Figure 17.0-6. Bay-O-Net Assembly with Isolation Link
Note: Isolation link is not required if the Bay-O-Net fuse is used in series with a backup energy limiting fuse.
Figure 17.0-7. Insertion of Bay-O-Net Into Cartridge
Figure 17.0-8. Assembly of Cartridge with Fuse Onto Inner Holder
Tank
Wall
Recommended Oil Level
Minimum Oil Level
Elbow
Connector
Underground
Cable
Isolation
Link
Upper
Contact Bottom
Contact
High
Voltage
Lead
Transformer
Primary
Winding
High Voltage
Bushing
1.25
(29.0)
Contact
Flare End
Bay-O-Net
Fuse Link
Tulip Tip End
Cartridge
Flare End of
Bay-O-Net Link
Cartridge
(a)
Tulip End of
Bay-O-Net Link
Inner Holder
(b)
End Plug
(c)
17.0-11
September 2011
Sheet 17
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
011
Figure 17.0-9. Pad-Mounted Transformer (752500 kVA)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 17.0-9. Standard Unit, Oil-Immersed 65C Rise, 752500 kVADimensions in Inches (mm)
kVA Transformer Dimensions Approximate
Weight Lbs (kg)
Gallons (Liters) of
Oil (Approximate)
Width (W) Depth (D) Height (H)
HV: 515 kV Radial Feed, Livefront
75
112
150
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
50.00 (1270.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
2280 (1034.2)
2400 (1088.6)
2700 (1224.7)
115 (435.3)
115 (435.3)
125 (473.2)
225
300
500
56.00 (1422.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
54.00 (1371.6)
58.00 (1473.2)
62.00 (1574.8)
58.00 (1473.2)
58.00 (1473.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
3350 (1519.5)
3650 (1655.6)
5200 (2358.7)
150 (567.8)
165 (624.6)
200 (757.1)
750
1000
1500
81.00 (2057.4)
84.00 (2133.6)
86.00 (2184.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
7200 (3265.9)
9000 (4082.3)
10,250 (4649.3)
360 (1362.7)
400 (1514.2)
440 (1665.6)
2000
2500
3000
92.00 (2336.8)
98.00 (2489.2)
102.00 (2590.8)
80.00 (2032.0)
82.00 (2082.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
77.00 (1955.8)
13,400 (6078.1)
15,000 (6803.9)
16,500 (7484.3)
550 (2082.0)
570 (2157.7)
625 (2365.9)
HV: 515 kV Radial Feed, Deadfront
75
112
150
62.00 (1574.8)
62.00 (1574.8)
62.00 (1574.8)
50.00 (1270.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
2350 (1065.9)
2450 (1111.3)
2700 (1224.7)
115 (435.3)
115 (435.3)
125 (473.2)
225
300
500
62.00 (1574.8)
62.00 (1574.8)
66.00 (1676.4)
54.00 (1371.6)
58.00 (1473.2)
62.00 (1574.8)
58.00 (1473.2)
58.00 (1473.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
3400 (1542.2)
3700 (1678.3)
5400 (2449.4)
150 (567.8)
165 (624.6)
200 (757.1)
750
1000
1500
81.00 (2057.4)
84.00 (2133.6)
86.00 (2184.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
7200 (3265.9)
9000 (4082.3)
10,250 (4649.3)
360 (1362.7)
400 (1514.2)
440 (1665.6)
2000
2500
3000
92.00 (2336.8)
98.00 (2489.2)
102.00 (2590.8)
80.00 (2032.0)
82.00 (2082.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
77.00 (1955.8)
13,400 (6078.1)
15,000 (6803.9)
16,500 (7484.3)
550 (2082.0)
570 (2157.7)
625 (2365.9)
HV: 515 kV Loop Feed, Livefront
75
112
150
65.00 (1651.0)
65.00 (1651.0)
65.00 (1651.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
50.00 (1270.0)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
56.00 (1422.4)
2400 (1088.6)
2500 (1134.0)
2800 (1270.1)
115 (435.3)
115 (435.3)
125 (473.2)
225
300
500
65.00 (1651.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
68.00 (1727.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
58.00 (1473.2)
62.00 (1574.8)
58.00 (1473.2)
58.00 (1473.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
3500 (1587.6)
3800 (1723.7)
5600 (2540.1)
150 (567.8)
165 (624.6)
200 (757.1)
750
1000
1500
82.00 (2082.8)
86.00 (2184.4)
88.00 (2235.2)
64.00 (1625.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
7200 (3265.9)
9000 (4082.3)
10,250 (4649.3)
360 (1362.7)
400 (1514.2)
440 (1665.6)
2000
2500
3000
92.00 (2336.8)
98.00 (2489.2)
102.00 (2590.8)
80.00 (2032.0)
82.00 (2082.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
77.00 (1955.8)
13,400 (6078.1)
15,000 (6803.9)
16,500 (7484.3)
550 (2082.0)
570 (2157.7)
625 (2365.9)
HV
Comp
LV
Comp
H
3.50
(88.9)
Min.
Conductor
Entry Area
4.00 (101.6)
Front View Side View Pad
D W
15.50
(393.7)
D + 4.00
(101.6)
42.00 (1066.8)
W + 4.00 (101.6)
Dimensional Variations
Height Variations
1. Add 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) to the
height when using bayonet fusing
on all kVA ratings.
height when using dry well canister
fusing on 75500 kVA ratings.
height when using dry well canister
fusing on 750 kVA rating only.
Depth Variations
4. Canister fuses require deeper
tanks on some transformer sizes.
a. Add 4.00 inches (101.6 mm) to
the depth of kVA ratings 75, 150
and 225.
b. Add 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) to
the depth of kVA rating 500.
5. Less ammable natural esther
uid requires deeper tanks on
some transformer ratings.
a. Add 2.00 inches (50.8 mm)
to the depth of kVA ratings
751500. Add 8.00 inches
(203.2 mm) to the depth of
kVA ratings 2000 and 2500.
Dimensions are approximate
not for construction.
17.0-12
September 2011
Sheet 17
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions/Technical Data
012
Table 17.0-9. Standard Unit, Oil-Immersed 65C Rise, 752500 kVADimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)
Technical Data
Table 17.0-10. Liquid Filled<34.5 kV Primary 55C Temp. Rise
Note: Losses offered are typical only, not guaranteed.
Table 17.0-11. Liquid Filled<34.5 kV Primary 65C Temp. Rise
Table 17.0-12. Environmentally Friendly Fluid<34.5 kV Primary
55C Temp. Rise
Table 17.0-13. Environmentally Friendly Fluid<34.5 kV Primary
65C Temp. Rise
kVA Transformer Dimensions Approximate
Weight Lbs (kg)
Gallons (Liters) of
Oil (Approximate)
Width (W) Depth (D) Height (H)
HV: 25 kV Radial Feed Deadfront
75150
225300
500
68.00 (1727.2)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
52.00 (1320.8)
54.00 (1371.6)
56.00 (1422.4)
55.00 (1397.0)
55.00 (1397.0)
55.00 (1397.0)
3500 (1587.6)
4500 (2041.2)
6000 (2721.6)
135 (511.0)
185 (700.3)
190 (719.2)
750
1000
1500
76.00 (1930.4)
80.00 (2032.0)
89.00 (2260.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
60.00 (1524.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
7200 (3265.9)
9000 (4082.3)
10,250 (4649.3)
360 (1362.7)
400 (1514.2)
440 (1665.6)
2000
2500
3000
92.00 (2336.8)
98.00 (2489.2)
102.00 (2590.8)
74.00 (1879.6)
82.00 (2082.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
75.00 (1905.0)
77.00 (1955.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
13,400 (6078.1)
15,000 (6803.9)
16,500 (7484.3)
550 (2082.0)
570 (2157.7)
625 (2365.9)
HV: 25 kV Loop Feed Deadfront
75150
225300
500
68.00 (1727.2)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
52.00 (1320.8)
54.00 (1371.6)
56.00 (1422.4)
55.00 (1397.0)
55.00 (1397.0)
55.00 (1397.0)
3500 (1587.6)
4500 (2041.2)
6000 (2721.6)
135 (511.0)
185 (700.3)
190 (719.2)
750
1000
1500
76.00 (1930.4)
80.00 (2032.0)
89.00 (2260.6)
69.00 (1752.6)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
60.00 (1524.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
7200 (3265.9)
9000 (4082.3)
10,250 (4649.3)
360 (1362.7)
400 (1514.2)
440 (1665.6)
2000
2500
3000
92.00 (2336.8)
98.00 (2489.2)
102.00 (2590.8)
74.00 (1879.6)
82.00 (2082.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
75.00 (1905.0)
77.00 (1955.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
13400 (6078.1)
15,000 (6803.9)
16,500 (7484.3)
550 (2082.0)
570 (2157.7)
625 (2365.9)
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
175
250
300
960
1250
1630
1135
1500
1930
413
562
696
225
300
500
330
520
730
2500
2600
4900
2830
3120
5630
942
1164
1889
750
1000
1500
1100
1500
1900
6200
6700
10,000
7300
8200
11,900
2567
3221
4375
2000
2500
3000
2600
2800
3800
12,000
15,000
16,000
14,600
17,800
19,800
5429
6408
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
190
260
320
950
1300
1600
1140
1560
1920
413
562
696
225
300
500
400
500
700
2300
3000
5000
2700
3500
5700
942
1164
1889
750
1000
1500
1000
1300
1900
6500
8500
10,500
7500
9800
12,400
2567
3221
4375
2000
2500
3000
2100
2700
4000
14,500
15,500
18,000
16,600
18,200
22,000
5429
6408
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
175
250
300
960
1250
1630
1135
1500
1930
413
562
696
225
300
500
330
520
730
2500
2600
4900
2830
3120
5630
942
1164
1889
750
1000
1500
1100
1500
1900
6200
6700
10,000
7300
8200
11,900
2567
3221
4375
2000
2500
3000
2600
2800
3800
12,000
15,000
16,000
14,600
17,800
19,800
5429
6408
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total
Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp per DOE (Watts)
75
112.5
150
190
260
320
950
1300
1600
1140
1560
1920
413
562
696
225
300
500
400
500
700
2300
3000
5000
2700
3500
5700
942
1164
1889
750
1000
1500
1000
1300
1900
6500
8500
10,500
7500
9800
12,400
2567
3221
4375
2000
2500
3000
2100
2700
4000
14,500
15,500
18,000
16,600
18,200
22,000
5429
6408

17.0-13
September 2011
Sheet 17
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
013
Figure 17.0-10. Pad-Mounted Transformer (30005000 kVA)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 17.0-14. Standard Unit, Oil-Immersed Rated 65C Rise, 30005000 kVADimensions in Inches (mm)
Standard compartment depth is 22.00 inches (558.8 mm) except 200 kV BIL has a depth of 30.00 inches (762.0 mm).
Depth may be altered by the addition of switching and fusing.
Extends under base of transformer only. Does not include rear coolers.
Standard low voltages are 480Y and 480 delta (through 3750 kVA only).
Low voltage above 3750 kVA must be 2400V or above.
kVA Transformer Pad Approximate
Weight Lbs (kg)
Gallons
(Liters) of Oil
A B C
D E
F
15 kV Class, Delta Connected HV-HV 95 kV BIL, LV 30 kV BIL
3000
3750
5000
76.00 (1930.4)
80.00 (2032.0)
78.00 (1981.2)
119.00 (3022.6)
82.00 (2082.8)
137.00 (3479.8)
100.00 (2540.0)
111.00 (2819.4)
108.00 (2743.2)
74.00 (1879.6)
79.00 (2006.6)
76.00 (1930.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
80.00 (2032.0)
58.00 (1473.2)
63.00 (1600.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
12,900 (5851)
20,000 (9072)
21,500 (9752)
385 (1457)
540 (2044)
565 (2139)
15 kV Class, Wye Connected HV-HV 95 kV BIL, LV 30 kV BIL
3000
3750
5000
74.00 (1879.6)
97.00 (2463.8)
91.00 (2311.4)
117.00 (2971.8)
81.00 (2057.4)
119.00 (3022.6)
102.00 (2590.8)
101.00 (2565.4)
108.00 (2743.2)
78.00 (1981.2)
81.00 (2057.4)
84.00 (2133.6)
74.00 (1879.6)
77.00 (1955.8)
80.00 (2032.0)
62.00 (1574.8)
65.00 (1651.0)
68.00 (1727.2)
15,000 (6804)
21,800 (9888)
22,000 (9979)
390 (1476)
550 (2082)
585 (2214)
3000
3750
5000
83.00 (2108.2)
96.00 (2438.4)
101.00 (2565.4)
84.00 (2133.6)
84.00 (2133.6)
101.00 (2565.4)
101.00 (2565.4)
98.00 (2489.2)
107.00 (2717.8)
86.00 (2184.4)
86.00 (2184.4)
84.00 (2133.6)
74.00 (1879.6)
78.00 (1981.2)
79.00 (2006.6)
70.00 (1778.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
68.00 (1727.2)
15,400 (6985)
20,100 (9117)
22,900 (10,387)
515 (1949)
650 (2461)
670 (2536)
3000
3750
5000
84.00 (2133.6)
93.00 (2362.2)
90.00 (2286.0
80.00 (2032.0)
85.00 (2159.0)
110.00 (2794.0)
102.00 (2590.8)
99.00 (2514.6)
108.00 (2743.2)
80.00 (2032.0)
84.00 (2133.6)
84.00 (2133.6)
74.00 (1879.6)
78.00 (1981.2)
80.00 (2032.0)
64.00 (1625.6)
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
16,300 (7394)
21,200 (9616)
23,100 (10,478)
450 (1703)
575 (2177)
605 (2290)
3000
3750
5000
86.00 (2184.4)
86.00 (2184.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
86.00 (2184.4)
82.00 (2082.8)
122.00 (3098.8)
101.00 (2565.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
106.00 (2692.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
82.00 (2082.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
62.00 (1574.8)
66.00 (1676.4)
67.00 (1701.8)
15,700 (7121)
19,800 (8981)
22,600 (10,251)
420 (1590)
525 (1987)
580 (2196)
3000
3750
5000
82.00 (2082.8)
91.00 (2311.4)
92.00 (2336.8)
86.00 (2184.4)
82.00 (2082.8)
122.00 (3098.8)
101.00 (2565.4)
102.00 (2590.8)
106.00 (2692.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
82.00 (2082.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
76.00 (1930.4)
78.00 (1981.2)
62.00 (1574.8)
66.00 (1676.4)
67.00 (1701.8)
15,700 (7121)
19,800 (8981)
22,600 (10,251)
420 (1590)
525 (1987)
580 (2196)
3000
3750
5000
84.00 (2133.6)
84.00 (2133.6)
92.00 (2336.8)
84.00 (2133.6)
84.00 (2133.6)
122.00 (3098.8)
100.00 (2540.0)
101.00 (2565.4)
106.00 (2692.4)
86.00 (2184.4)
86.00 (2184.4)
81.00 (2057.4)
74.00 (1879.6)
77.00 (1955.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
70.00 (1778.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
65.00 (1651.0)
15,400 (6985)
19,300 (8754)
20,500 (9299)
530 (2006)
630 (2385)
600 (2271)
3000
3750
5000
80.00 (2032.0)
86.00 (2184.4)
95.00 (2413.0)
84.00 (2133.6)
87.00 (2209.8)
105.00 (2667.0)
104.00 (2641.6)
107.00 (2717.8)
107.00 (2717.8)
86.00 (2184.4)
86.00 (2184.4)
85.00 (2159.0)
76.00 (1930.4)
79.00 (2006.6)
79.00 (2006.6)
70.00 (1778.0)
70.00 (1778.0)
69.00 (1752.6)
17,100 (7756)
20,600 (9344)
23,800 (10,795)
500 (1893)
560 (2120)
625 (2366)
3000
3750
5000
88.00 (2235.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
101.00 (2565.4)
104.00 (2641.6)
104.00 (2641.6)
102.00 (2590.8)
99.00 (2514.6)
104.00 (2641.6)
106.00 (2692.4)
107.00 (2717.8)
107.00 (2717.8)
107.00 (2717.8)
83.00 (2108.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
91.00 (2311.4)
91.00 (2311.4)
89.00 (2260.6)
19,800 (8981)
24,400 (11,068)
28,600 (12,973)
720 (2725)
840 (3180)
920 (3483)
Dimensions are approximatenot for construction.
C
B
H1 H2 H3 XOX1 X2 X3
A
X3 X2 X1 X0
H1 H2 H3
E
D
F
T
15.00
(381.0)
8.00
(203.2)
8.00
(203.2)
Front View Side View
Pad
17.0-14
September 2011
Sheet 17
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
014
Liquid Filled Technical Data
on aluminum windings. Losses based on LV rating 0.48 kV.
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
3000
3750
5000
5517
6521
8193
22,491
26,340
32,255
28,008
32,861
40,448
11,140
13,110
16,260
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
60 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
3000
3750
5000
5461
6455
8111
22,269
26,076
31,932
27,730
32,531
40,043
11,030
12,230
16,090
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
3000
3750
5000
5570
6584
8273
22,046
25,815
31,612
27,616
32,399
39,885
11,080
13,040
16,180
kVA No Load
at 75C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
75C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100% LOAD
and 85C
(Watts)
200 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
3000
3750
5000
5848
6913
8686
21,825
25,556
31,295
27,673
32,469
39,981
11,300
13,300
16,510
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
3000
3750
5000
5985
7075
8889
24,402
28,578
34,996
30,387
35,653
43,885
12,090
14,220
17,640
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
95 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
3000
3750
5000
5925
7003
8800
24,161
28,292
34,646
30,086
35,295
43,446
11,970
14,080
17,460
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
150 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
3000
3750
5000
6043
7143
8976
23,919
28,009
34,299
29,962
35,152
43,275
12,020
14,150
17,550
kVA No Load
at 85C
Ref. Temp.
(Watts)
Load Loss
at 100%
Load and
85C Ref.
Temp.
(Watts)
Total Losses
at 100%
Load and
85C
(Watts)
200 kV HV BIL
Total Losses at
50% Load and
55C LL Ref. Temp.
and 20C NL Ref.
Temp. per DOE
(Watts)
3000
3750
5000
6345
7500
9424
23,680
27,728
33,955
30,025
35,228
43,379
12,270
14,430
17,910


September 2011

Contents

18.0-1

Sheet

18

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

001

S
p
o
t

N
e
t
w
o
r
k
E
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t

Discussion

Spot Network Decision Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-2

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-3

Commercial Spot Network Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-5
Network Protector Equipment

Liquid-Type Network Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-16

Dry-Type Network Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-18

CM52 Network Protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-20

Protector NPL Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-24

MPCV Network Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-25

Communications Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-27

MPCV Network Relay Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-28

Communications Congurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-30

CM52 Protector Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-31

Network Disconnect Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-32

Network Transition Box to Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-33
Rating Selection

Spot Network Equipment Selector Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-34

Protector Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-36
Layout Dimensions

Liquid-Type Network Unit Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-37

Dry-Type Network Unit Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-38

Dry-Type Network Unit
Switchgear Mounted Protector Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.0-39
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010

CM52 Network Protector
18.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

18

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Discussion

Spot Network Decision Tree

002

Figure 18.0-1. Spot Network Decision Tree
Considering Spot Networks for
Electrical Distribution in a Facility?
Does the local utility
offer multiple circuits for
the metered utility service?
YES NO
Are the multiple incoming
circuits from the utility
in synchronization?
YES NO
Are the multiple circuits from the utility
the same voltage and frequency under
most operating conditions?
YES NO
How many circuits are available or routed to each major load areas of the facility?
One (1) Two (2) Three (3) Four (4)
Use Radial design at one
or more service voltages.
Use separate Radial
or Double-ended
Substations with Open
Transition Switching.
Spot Networks may be
possible, but without the
redundancy of multiple
primary circuits.
Spot Networks may be
possible, but without the
redundancy of multiple
primary circuits.
Two Transformer Spot
Networks are practical.
See Pages 18.0-34 through
18.0-36 for Application
information. If anticipated
load = X kVA, use two
network transformers
each rated X kVA.
Four Transformer Spot
load = Z kVA, use four
each rated Z/3 kVA.
Three Transformer Spot
load = Y kVA, use three
each rated Y/2 kVA.
Continuity of
Service Critical
Continuity of
Service NOT Critical


18.0-3

September 2011


Sheet

18

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Discussion

General Description

003

Description

Eatons Spot Network Systems are
designed to ensure service continuity
in 208/120V and 480/277V wye con-
nected secondary network systems.
These systems, in either grid or spot
network form, are commonly used in
areas of high load density such as
metropolitan and suburban business
districts or facilities.
Suburban loads were formerly almost
entirely residential and power outages
caused little more than personal
inconvenience. Now, the suburban
load includes not only shopping
plazas, industries and residences,
but such vital facilities as hospitals and
airports. For these and other critical
loads, power interruptions can have
serious consequences to public and
personal safety. Spot networks
provide superior reliability at these
important loads.
The need to supply increasing amounts
of power efciently, without increasing
equipment size, has resulted in a shift
from 208V to 480V wye systems. The
change to a higher utilization voltage
requires a commensurate change in
operating procedures because of the
difference in arcing characteristics at
480V compared to 208V. For example,
while an arc in a 208 volt system is
normally self-extinguishing, an arc
in a 480V system will usually burn
until it is interrupted by an over

current
device or until it totally consumes

the
arcing material.
Secondary network systems using
Eaton Network Protectors are among
the most dependable in use today.
In the event of a fault on a primary
system cable or transformer, the
protector opens due to reverse power
ow, thus isolating the fault from the
network bus and avoiding load power
disturbances. Loss of the primary
feeder will not result in service
outage at the load on the secondary
network. The other primary feeders
will continue carrying the load until
the faulted cable is repaired and
returned to service.
The network protector basically
consists of a special air power breaker,
a breaker operating mechanism, net-
work relay(s) and control equipment.
Units are available in both weather-
proof and submersible enclosures for
either separate or transformer throat
mounting. Switchgear mounting is
also possible.

Figure 18.0-2. Typical Conguration for Three Transformer Spot Network

Better Continuity of Service

The largest user of network systems
in the United States is Consolidated
Edison of New York. Historical data
developed by this utility illustrates that
outages are very rare (approximately
zero) on grid systems and that spot
network systems are ve times more
reliable than secondary selective
double-ended substation services.

Improved Regulation
Less Voltage Sagging

Each load is supplied from at least two
directions. Services supplied from a
transformer location have a minimum
of two paths of supply on utility
grids and spot networks, and can
be designed to have more. Abrupt
changes in loads, such as motor
starting, cause much less voltage
disturbance due to the multiple paths
for load current compared to simple
radial services. The voltage dip
resulting from a given starting
current may be 70% less in a network
system than in a radial system.

Less Transformer
Capacity Required

In normal operation, the loads along
the network service are divided among
the various network transformers in
such a way that the best possible
voltage conditions and lowest losses
are realized. Since all the services are
tied together, many more loads are
supplied from the same secondary
network source than in a simple
radial system. The peak loads on
the transformers are correspondingly
lower in the network system compared
to a radial system supplying the same
loads, because of the diversity in the
demand among the larger number of
circuits. Therefore, less transformer
capacity may be required in a network
system than in a radial system in the
same area, particularly if three or
more primary feeders supply the
network system.

System Operation

A short circuit on any one primary
feeder will cause all the network protec-
tors on that feeder to open on reverse
energy, provided the total power on
the three-phase feeder is in the reverse
direction. When the feeder cable is
repaired properly, the network protec-
tors on that feeder will automatically
reclose when the feeder circuit breaker
at the upstream switchgear is closed, if
correct voltage conditions exist at the
network transformer.
If the phases are reversed during the
cable repairs, the protectors will not
reclose automatically as long as the
network remains energized. Likewise,
if a voltage less than network voltage
is restored to the feeder, the network
protector on that feeder will not
reclose automatically. The unit could
be closed manually if the network
relay trip contact is not closed.
If a feeder from a networkable source
is to be connected to an energized
network, the incoming voltage must
be slightly higher than the network
voltage and in proper phase relation
with it. If a feeder is being connected
to a dead network, it is sufcient
to have the incoming voltage high
enough to operate the closing
mechanism.
Customer
Loads
Customer
Loads
Customer
Loads
NC NC
Tie Tie
Typical Feeder
To Other
Networks
Low Voltage
Switchgear
Drawout
Fuses
Primary Circuit
Network Transformer
Protector
Optional Main, 50/51
Relaying and/or
Network Disconnect
LV Feeder
18.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

18

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Discussion

General Description

004

Maintenance of primary feeder circuits
can be accomplished by opening
upstream switchgear primary devices
one at a time, thereby opening every
protector connected to a given primary
due to reverse magnetizing currents
owing through each protector served.
By opening the primary circuits one
at a time, the network loads are not
disturbed. Also, at times of light load,
the system can be economically
loaded by disconnecting some of the
primary circuits and operating the
transformers at more efcient levels.
Although the protectors are capable of
opening under reverse magnetizing
currents, the opening may be delayed
depending upon the time delay setting
of the network relay.
When the load increases on the net-
work, other primaries can be brought
into service by closing the feeder
breakers. The associated protectors
on the reactivated feeders will reclose
serving the network if the transformer
voltage is higher than the network
voltage by a certain minimum amount
and in the proper phase relation.
The network protector fuses provide
backup protection for clearing faults
on the primary feeder in the unlikely
event the protector fails to operate.
These melting alloy or partial range
current limiting fuses are located on
the load side of the protector, and
when removed, serve to isolate the
protector from the network.
Numerous protector models are avail-
able from Eaton and the best product
for the application is a function of the
type of system being designed: utility
grid (see

Figure 18.0-3

) or spot
network. Spot network systems
(see

Figure 18.0-2

) usually use the
CM52 type of protector, which has
important safety features not found on
earlier Eaton or competitor models.

Figure 18.0-3. Typical Conguration for Utility Grid Network

CM52 Protector Advantages

CM52 Protector

Exclusive Drawout Design

: With
positive safety interlocks, provides
maximum protection against contact
with energized components while
disconnecting the unit for test or
maintenance; ensures maximum
safety for operating personnel. All
main current carrying and mechanical
operating components are located
behind a deadfront panel which
minimizes the possibility of tools or
hands being inserted into an energized
protector. The drawout unit is operated
by a hand-cranked levering system,
which cannot be engaged unless the
circuit breaker is open and cannot be
disengaged unless the drawout unit
is either fully disconnected or fully
connected.

Modular Construction

: Simplies eld
maintenance and/or replacement of
components. Protectors can be quickly
put back into service reducing
maintenance time.

Spring Close Operating Mechanism:

Avoids partial closures. The CM52
spring close mechanisms will not
permit closing motion of the contacts
until the closing springs are fully
charged. Also provides close and
latch ratings on protectors.

Externally Mounted Silver-Sand Fuses

:
Operate with no contamination of the
protector, and will positively interrupt
fault current to disconnect the protec-
tor from the network bus in abnormal
fault situations.

Low Energy, Trip Actuator

: Provides
reliable tripping effort, even when
system voltage is not available, up to
four operations via remote tripping
before recharging is needed.

Close and Latch Ratings:

Ratings
comparable to air power breakers are
readily available since the mechanism
is spring charged, unlike motor
operated protectors which have
no close and latch ratings.

Increased Dielectric Strength

: CM52
units have passed a more stringent
dielectric test voltage of 5000 Vac
compared to the lower value of 2200V
required by ANSI standards.

Stored Energy Option

: The CM52 can
be provided wired for stored energy.
This option charges the closing springs
after a closure, resulting in a 5-cycle
close after a trip event. This is the
preferred conguration for 2-unit
spot networks.
Typical Network
Transformer
Grid
LOADS LOADS LOADS
LOADS LOADS LOADS
LOADS LOADS
Grid
Typical
Protector
Primary Feeder
Breaker
LOADS


18.0-5

September 2011


Sheet

18

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Discussion

Commercial Spot Network Design Considerations

005

Commercial Spot Network
Design Considerations

This section deals with the various
components which make up the
commercial spot network, either as a
double-ended substation or multiple
transformer substation. The intent of
the discussion is to give some basic
guidelines for the selection of Eaton
transformers and network protectors.
The major components that will be
discussed are:
1. Primary switches
2. Network transformer types
3. Network protectors
4. Spot network disconnects
5. Low voltage drawout switchgear
congurations
6. Typical spot network layouts
7. Use of current limiting fuses
8. Network device coordination

1. Medium Voltage Primary Switches

The incoming medium voltage feeder
may range from 4160V to 34.5 kV. Any
feeder which has a voltage higher than
34.5 kV should not be considered for
spot network service because the
cable charging capacitance begins to
affect the operation of the network
relay response. The primary feeder
enters into a switch compartment,
which can be liquid or air type. The
liquid type transformers usually use
a special three-position, liquid-lled,
non-loadbreak primary switch, which
has a special third position for ground-
ing the incoming feeder cable during
maintenance work on a primary
circuit. Dry-type transformers usually
use a two-position air switch, which
omits the third position. Grounding
the circuit becomes a manual
procedure, if needed, on dry-type
transformers.
The three positions of the liquid
type non-loadbreak switch on liquid
network transformers are:
1. Close
2. Open
3. Ground
These liquid switch designs use
electrical interlocks that prevent the
unintentional movement of the switch,
with either the network protector in
the Closed position or the medium
voltage feeder being energized.

Figure 18.0-4

shows the typical

Figure 18.0-4. Three-Position Primary Switch Interlock for Liquid Network Transformers

electrical connections for the interlock-
ing between the primary switch,
transformer and network protector.
Coil #1 and #2 are electrical interlocks
which prevent unsafe operation of the
primary mag-break switch. Coil #1
ensures that the protector must be
used to break load current before
operating the switch from closed to
open. Coil #2 ensures that the primary
cable must be deenergized before
operating the switch from closed
to ground. These interlocks are not
necessary on a two-position air switch
if it has loadbreak ratings.
Due to their common use, liquid type

network transformers are manufactured

with the three-position mag-break only
switch integral to the transformer. Dry-
type transformers use the commonly
available two-position air switch with
special icker blades which give the air
switch a loadbreak rating. The capability
of interrupting load currents can save
time by not having to deenergize the
feeder. The choice of switch type is thus
dictated by the type of transformer
selected for the spot network system.
Another consideration is the necessity
to provide primary overcurrent protec-
tion for each transformer, such as in the
form of power fuses. Upstream breakers
usually serve two, three or four trans-
formers on their circuit and thus have
the protective relays set at higher levels
dictated by the entire circuit load, which
sacrices individual transformer pro-
tection. See

Figure 18.0-13

later in this
section for a specic example of this
type of situation. When dry-type units
are used, one solution is to add power
fuses to the loadbreak switches.
However, this option is not easy
when liquid types are used unless air
switches are added ahead of the
integral type liquid switches. Eaton
recommends that no more than two
transformers be served by a single
upstream breaker and relay, unless
separate fused air switches are located
ahead of the transformers.

If fuses are used anywhere in the primary

circuit, the network protector relays
must be capable of tripping under
WATT-VAR conditions. New digital
type

network relays have the ability to
congure

their tripping characteristics
from WATT to WATT-VAR in the eld.
Older type protectors having electro-
mechanical relays should be updated
by retrotting with the newer relays.
If fuses are not present, the standard
WATT trip characteristic, which is
standard in the industry, is appropriate.
Each type of primary switch uses
unique terminations of the primary
cable. Liquid switches use a terminal
chamber which is lled in the eld
with a suitable compound to improve
the insulation strength of the cables.
Air switches use mechanical or
compression terminations with
stress cones.
Air switches require more oor space
than the integral liquid type of switch,
especially since the depth of the air
switch is made to match the depth of
the transformer. Transition sections
add to required oor space if hard bus
connections, not cable, are required.
Whereas the three-position liquid
switch dimensions are no greater
than 20.00 inches (508.0 mm) deep
off the end of the transformer and
30.00 inches (762.0 mm) in width
centered at the end of the unit.
Interlock logic can vary
thus both an A and B
auxiliary contact is
supplied.
a b
Primary Mag-
Break Switch
Network
Transformer
Open
Closed
Ground
Position
Protector Fuses
To Network
Coil #2 Interlock
Coil #1 Interlock
18.0-6



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

18

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Discussion


006

It is possible to use both types of
switches for liquid installations. Groups
of air switches can be mounted along a
wall to receive and distribute primary
circuit power to each transformer.
Individual power fuses can be
mounted within the air switches.
Dry-well mounting of current limiting
fuses in air canisters accessible from
the top or side walls of the transformer
is not recommended. The available
space will dictate much of the design
if sufcient space is not allocated for
electrical system equipment.
Primary switches accommodate the
three-phase conductors and never use a
neutral conductor. Most spot networks
use delta wound transformers, so there
is no need to deliver the neutral through
the primary switch. Any type cable can
be used, however the more modern
types are easier to handle than paper
lead insulated types which require
potheads for terminations within the
primary switch.

2. Network Transformer
Characteristics

After the primary switch, the power is
delivered to the primary windings of a
network type transformer. The design
may be liquid- or dry-type, with liquid
types being more popular from a
historical perspective, due to their
application in utility systems.
However, dry-type designs are now
available meeting the ANSI network
standards. Most applications within
commercial buildings desire dry-type
designs due to the desire to avoid the
re hazard associated with liquid
dielectrics. It is important to use
proper dry-type ratings which mimic
the overload characteristics of liquid
units, therefore dry types should be
rated for 80C rise and use Class H
20C total temperature insulation
materials in VPI designs or 185C in
cast coil designs. Fans are normally
employed to aid the air cooling during
periods of overloading, and which
occur during a single primary outage.
Secondary voltages are always 480V
wye or 208V wye. Also, 216V wye
is a common rating. Primaries are
always delta, such as 4160V, 13.2 kV,
13.8 kV, etc.
Transformer impedances should fall
within the standard ranges indicated
in

Table 18.0-1

, or else the usual
protector interrupting ratings may
become inadequate. If impedances
drop below these values, the maxi-
mum through-fault may exceed the
interrupting rating of the protector.
Also, the impedance values among
transformers in a spot network should
be as close in value to each other that
manufacturing tolerances will allow;
this helps reduce circulating currents
between transformers.

Table 18.0-1. Transformer Impedance

Notice that 3000 kVA is typically the
largest transformer that can be used
for network services, although Eaton
can go higher.
As an example, lets assume a two-
unit spot network using dry-type
transformers having 80C temperature
ratings. In this example we calculate
that the building load will not exceed
1495 kVA. Since we are designing the
service as a double-ended network
substation, either transformer must
be capable of carrying the full building
load of 1800A.
One choice is to select a 1500 kVA
transformer size which has a full load
rating of 1805 amperes. However, in
specifying transformers for network
services, the units can be undersized,
realizing that under most conditions
both units are available to supply
power to the network. When only one
is handling the entire load, it should be
considered an abnormal event that
should not continue indenitely.
For our load of 1495 kVA, a 1000 kVA
transformer will supply 1888 amperes
at 157% of nameplate rating, therefore
we would select a 80C rise 1000 kVA
dry-type unit operated at 115C with
fans (157% overload capability) and
a protector with a continuous rating
of 1875A.
In all spot network designs, the equip-
ment must be sized to handle the load
even though one primary, and thus one
transformer, is out of service (known
as a single contingency condition) for
some period of time. The basic design
constraint is that the load not exceed
the maximum thermal rating of the
remaining unit(s) during the time of
the single contingency. Protector ratings
recommended by vendors, as well as
protector circuitry, anticipate the loads
and are sized to handle the higher
currents, so the limiting factor is
the transformer.
One advantage of liquid designs is their
large thermal mass which enables them
to handle higher currents for a longer
period of time without the need for an
FA fan rating when compared to con-
ventional dry-type designs. When both
transformers are available, the 1000 kVA
units in our example will only be loaded
to 75% of their AA base rating.
The transformer winding conguration
will depend upon the primary service
available and the type of service needed
by utilization equipment comprising
the loads. For the most part, trans-
formers are DELTA-WYE, which permits
the lowest ground relay pickup value
for the primary feeder breaker. This
type of winding conguration also
eliminates any zero sequence current in
the primary feeder for load unbalances
in the secondary. At higher primary
voltages, 27 kV through 34.5 kV, some
use has been made of GROUNDED
WYE-GROUNDED WYE windings. The
advantage gained is the reduction of
overvoltages which can result if one
leg of the unit is de-energized. The
disadvantage is that the primary breaker
ground relay must be set much higher
because load unbalances and ground
faults in the secondary are reected by
zero sequence currents in the primary
circuit. See

Pages 18.0-16

and

18.0-18

for network transformer features.

3. Network Protector

The network protector can be provided
in a weather-proof NEMA

4 housing,
submersible or suitable for mounting
within a low voltage switchgear
assembly. Both the transformer side
(line) and network (load) connections
of the protector are bus bar which can
accommodate transformer ange con-
nections and loadside connections to
cable, busway or switchgear buswork.
Network protectors are special self-
contained air power breaker units
having a full complement of current,
potential and control transformers, as
well as relay functions to protect the
integrity of the low voltage network
bus. Normally, protectors do not have
any overcurrent protection in the
forward direction; if necessary, the
50/51 function can be achieved
through the use of remote mounted
protective devices.

Figure 18.0-5

illustrates a simplied
diagram of the various components
of the network protector.

Note:

The symbol for a protector is the air
breaker symbol with a dot in the middle.

kVA Size Recommended Z

3001000
15003000
5% or greater
7% or greater


18.0-7

September 2011


Sheet

18

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Discussion


007

Protectors have either rollout or
drawout mechanisms for easy mainte-
nance. Protectors having the drawout
mechanisms, such as the CM52 type,
are comparable to air power breakers
in terms of maintenance and stored
energy functions. The older rollout
units use manually disconnected fuses
and links which must be removed from
the energized network bus prior to
rolling the unit out of the cubicle for
inspection, testing and maintenance.
Details on protectors are reviewed later
in this section and the recommended
spot network equipment ratings for
two, three and four unit congurations
are shown in

Tables 18.0-9

through

18.0-12

that appear on

Pages 18.0-34

and

18.0-35

in this product section.
The protector load side contains a
network fuse, usually a partial range
current limiting type. The fuses are
present as back-up protection if the
protector fails to open properly. These
fuses are separately removable, but
do not drawout with the protector
mechanism. Commonly, the fuses are
located at the top of each protector.
The fact that the fuses are located on
the network side means that fuse
maintenance requires operators to
come into contact with live parts and
conductors which can deliver high
fault currents. A method of easily
disconnecting the secondary of the
protector from the network bus,
similar to the conguration of the
primary, is needed to isolate the
fuse and protector, thus the need
for a network disconnect.

4. Spot Network Disconnects

The multiple sources of power to the
network bus can create a safety con-
cern on the load side of each protector.
Obviously, each protector loadside is
energized from the network so long as
at least one transformer remains con-
nected. The use of a network discon-
nect can provide a degree of operator
safety by requiring that the disconnect
be used to disconnect the protector
loadside from the network before
allowing access to network fuses or
protector mechanism. Such a discon-
nect reduces the likelihood of contact-
ing live bus and forces operators to
follow a safe procedure prior to any
protector maintenance. Accidents
involving protectors can be traced
to the absence of such devices in
customers facilities and distribution
system designs. Eaton encourages
the use of network disconnect devices,
especially in facilities not having
dedicated maintenance staff. Many
forms of disconnect devices are avail-
able; the specic choice depends upon
several related factors such as protec-
tor mounting, use of main breakers,
protector type, etc. Three key choices
for network disconnect devices are
outlined below.

Types of Network Disconnects

Principally, the two types are main
air power circuit breakers within
switchgear assemblies and non-load-
break hookstick operated switches
mounted above the protectors in a
NEMA 1 cabinet.
Regardless of the type used, each
disconnect is interlocked with the
protector to ensure that the loadbreak
protector is used to break and make
the load currents. The protector
mechanism is rated for at least 10,000
operations before maintenance and
is the best device to interrupt normal
load currents. Protectors include an
operations counter to keep track of the
number of operations. The interlocks
may be keyed type or electrical control
wiring. Refer to

Figure 18.0-6

for a
typical one-line.

Main Breakers

Main air power breakers are the safest
option to use as a network disconnect,
however their interrupting rating
guarantees proper operation under
all conditions including fault currents.
Switchgear mounting of the main
breakers means that the disconnect
device is the same type of device as
all other overcurrent devices mounted
in the assembly, thereby requiring
common maintenance and operation
procedures. The mains can be key
interlocked with their respective pro-
tectors to ensure that the protectors
are opened rst, then the mains are
opened and racked to a disconnect
position prior to maintenance of the
protector or circuit devices.
Main breakers include overcurrent trip
units to provide individual overload
protection for each protector and
conductors. This protection is not a
normal function of the network relays
and augments protection generally
so long as the trip unit settings are
properly coordinated with the tie and
feeder devices. The trip unit protection
does not protect the incoming cable
against fault currents such as ground
faults or short circuit currents; the
sensors are not located at the lineside
of the protector circuit, rather they
are at the switchgear (load) side thus
giving only overload protection.
The key interlocking between main
air power breakers and network
protectors may be eliminated since
the main is a true interrupting device
usually rated at or above 65,000A
interrupting at 480V. When mains are
used as loadbreak devices on network
services, the opening of a main may
result in the opening of the respective
protector, however maintenance
procedures should always verify
protector operation.

Non-Loadbreak Disconnect

The network disconnect device for
mounting above the protector is the
non-loadbreak bolted pressure switch.
The device is hookstick operated from
the oor and provides a reliable
means of visibly disconnecting the
protector circuit from the loadside of
the protector. The switch is NEMA 1
cabinet mounted with double doors
and electrical interlocks to assure that
the protector is used to break the load
current. The door interlocks have a
defeatable procedure if qualied
personnel need to gain access under
load ow conditions. Key interlocking
with the protector is not necessary.
18.0-8



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

18

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Discussion


008

Figure 18.0-5. Typical Network Protector Schematic
Figure 18.0-6. Partial Spot Network One-Line Diagram

Recommended when no separate main breaker is used.

This product has become a standard
for Eaton and is manufactured in
the same plant as the protector for
improved assembly and product
coordination. Recent designs move
the NPL fuses on the protector into the
disconnect cabinet to ensure that fuses
have controlled access. Space exists
within the cabinet to mount separate
current transformers to provide inputs
for separate instantaneous and time
delay overcurrent relays which protect
the protector circuitry from point of
supply to the switchgear buswork. The
General Services Administration uses
this type of product on hundreds of
network units throughout the National
Capital Region and in other areas of the
country where networks are used.
The non-loadbreak design has been
chosen over the loadbreak for several
reasons. First, the loadbreak mecha-
nisms need regular maintenance and
should not be allowed to sit in a closed
position for years, then be called upon
to operate without failure. This type of
duty is exactly what is required of a
network disconnect. Additionally, the
operating mechanism of a loadbreak
design requires a lot of force, more
than an operator can safely deliver
from a ladder or step. Hookstick
operation from the oor is a safer
procedure. Refer to

Figure 18.0-7

for
typical section view of network units
using a network disconnect atop
the protector.
Potential Transformer (PTs)
PTs
Protector Fuses
Loadside
(Network)
Network
Protector
Lineside
(Transformer)
MPCV = Protector
Network
Relay
Transformer Control Txs.
480V 125V
208V
b
a
MPCV
Trip
MPCV Close
Ground
MPCV Phasing
Voltage
Motor
Trip
MPCV Trip
MPCV
Voltage
5 kV or 15 kV
Primary
208 o 0 Wye
Network
Transformer
Network
Protector
Fuses
Disconnect
Switch (Optional)
Main Breaker
NC
50/51 86
Tie Cont. Cont.
LV LL SWGR
3 Cts

Network transformer neutrals are
brought to the loadside area of the
disconnect for transitioning to the
protector circuit neutral for delivery
into the switchgear. The loadside of
the disconnect can accommodate
outgoing busway or cables as needed.
See

Page 18.0-32

for network
disconnect features.

50/51 Relaying for Protectors

Users who specify the non-loadbreak
disconnect can easily add the current
transformers for relaying at the load
side of the protector circuits and
provide superior fault and overload
protection for the incoming conduc-
tors between the protector and the
switchgear buswork. The relays are
usually mounted within the switchgear
and use a lockout feature to trip
and lockout the protector. Modern
microprocessor relays such as the
Eaton Digitrip

3000 can also be used
for the 50/51 protection to save costs
and mounting space.
The use of forward relaying on the
protector circuit needs to be coordi-
nated with the tie breakers to ensure
that the protector auxiliary 50/51
protective settings are not faster than
the tie settings. Coordination is
achieved when the ties are faster
acting than the 50/51 protector forward
overcurrent relays, and they usually
trip open rst due to the presence of
multiple transformer faults passing
through the ties. See

Figures 18.0-14

and

18.0-15

for more details. Also refer
to tables on

Pages 18.0-34

and

18.0-35

for details on the recommended tie
device ratings and settings.
The use of forward relaying current
transformers is recommended even
when the non-loadbreak disconnect
is not used, such as occurs when only
transition boxes are used at the top of
the protectors.

System Neutral Grounding

Regardless of the device selected as
the network disconnect, the XO trans-
former neutrals are not grounded at the
transformers. Rather they are brought
into the switchgear and grounded at
one and only one location. This cong-
uration allows the use of the ground
return method of ground fault protec-
tion whose zone of protection extends
from the secondary transformer wind-
ings to the outgoing air power breakers
in the switchgear. Other ground fault
detection methods are possible, but are
considerably more complicated to wire
and maintain and are without signi-
cant advantage or greater reliability.

18.0-9
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Discussion
009
5. Low Voltage Drawout
Switchgear Congurations
The most reliable and safe network bus
equipment is in the form of low voltage
drawout switchgear built per ANSI C37
standards. Unlike the UL
891
switchboard assemblies, low voltage
switchgear uses true 200,000A braced
buswork, 30 cycle short time ratings,
drawout stored energy air power circuit
breakers rated for 100% application,
for easier maintenanceall of which
provides superior performance
compared to xed mounted molded
case breakers in switchboard
construction. This is true regardless
of where the protector is mounted.
A typical switchgear installation of a
protector uses a low voltage switchgear
compartment which is 96.00 inches
(2438.4 mm) high x 44.00 inches
(1117.6 mm) wide x 66.0084.00 inches
(1676.42133.6 mm) deep. The use
of transition sections between the
protector and switchgear ensures that
sufcient space exists to route buswork
between the two compartments.
Refer to Figures 18.0-8 through 18.0-12
which illustrate typical plan views
and front elevations for double-ended
network substations and three trans-
former spot network designs. Figure
18.0-8 shows the bus conguration of
the two-unit spot network substation.
Note that there must be a separate
ground return neutral bus which has
only one point of connection to the
grounding conductor. This type
arrangement permits selective tripping
of the Tie, then the protector. For a
line-to-ground fault on Bus #1, the
86T lockout relay controlling the Tie
breaker will be operated rst when
GFR-T detects 1.0 per unit ground
current. After the Tie breaker is open,
the line-to-ground fault current is
sensed only by GFR-1, which will
actuate the 86-1 lockout to trip the
network protector NP #1.
For primary faults, the network relay
must be set such that it can respond
to both reverse magnetizing levels
of current as well as to any primary
circuit fault current. Since most
systems employ DELTA-WYE wind-
ings, primary faults will not be
detected by either GFR-T or the GFR
devices associated with the protectors,
since no zero sequence current will
ow. However, if GROUNDED WYE-
GROUNDED WYE transformers are
used, the relay coordination must be
such that the network relay responds
rst to primary feeder faults. This
permits the correct operation of the
protector under such conditions,
Figure 18.0-7. Typical Non-Loadbreak Network Disconnect Mounting Arrangement
because the GFR-T should not attempt
to trip the Tie open. Therefore, power
will be maintained on the low voltage
bus with the Tie breaker remaining
closed. See Figures 18.0-9 and 18.0-11
for layout arrangements for dry-type
and liquid-type spot networks
respectively.
Figure 18.0-10 shows the bus congu-
ration for a three-unit commercial spot
network. Again, the ground return
neutral bus is required which has only
one point of connection to the ground-
ing conductor. Selective tripping is
achieved in the same fashion as the
double-ended network substation with
GFR-T sensing ground current and
operating the 86T device which then
opens both Tie breakers. The ground
relays GFR-1, GFR-2 and GFR-3 will
only sense ground current after the
Tie 86 lockout is energized and the
Tie breakers are open. Interlocking
auxiliary contacts on the 86-T with the
GFR circuits guarantees this selective
tripping and ensures the user that
ground currents are accurately
measured. The ampacity of the ground
return neutral bus must meet the
minimum requirements of the neutral
bus. It is prudent to size the ground
return neutral bus the same size as
the phase bus, since the ground and
neutral carry fault currents during
abnormal events.
The space required by the ground
sensors and connecting buswork can
be accommodated easily in two-unit
spot networks. However, on three-
and four-unit systems, the extensive
structure-to-structure insulated
ground bus plus the normal phase,
neutral and ground buses can reduce
the usage of four breaker cells in the
switchgear to three. Vendor designs
vary on this issue. All four breaker
cells are available on two-unit, three-
unit, and four-unit systems from
Eaton, when Magnum DS switchgear
is used.
The ampacity of the phase and neutral
buswork must meet the gross demand
plus spare capacity for growth as
stipulated by the National Electrical
Code for the loads served. If each
transformer on a two-unit spot
network has been sized with 100%
redundancy, then each protector
and load buswork should be rated to
carry the entire load from one primary
feeder and one transformer. Three-
unit spot networks can reduce the
redundancy to 50% for the same
loads since two units remain in
service. Four-unit spot networks
may reduce the redundancy to 33%,
unless the loads need to be served
from two remaining services in which
case 100% redundancy is still required.
6. Typical Spot Network Layouts
The amount of space available for the
electric service will dictate the size and
quantity of the network units chosen
for a project. Double-ended substations,
especially dry-type designs, tend to be
arranged in a single lineup with the
primary feeders located at opposite
ends of the room. Refer to Figure 18.0-9
for an example of this type of arrange-
ment. The single lineup can be used if
space permits. One alternative is to
locate the transformers behind, or in
front of the switchgear, with intercon-
necting busway or cables.
Load Transition
Non-loadbreak
Disconnect
NEMA 1 Cabinet
Fuse Location
(Inside)
Network Protector
(CM52 Type)
Section View
Network
Transformer
Neutral
(XO Bushing
on Back)
Primary
Switch
Neutral Bus
18.0-10
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Discussion
010
Figure 18.0-8. One-Line for Two-Unit Spot Network
Protectors not fused.

Figure 18.0-9. Front View of Double-Ended Network Substation
Three or more transformer unit spot
networks cannot be arranged in one
lineup, therefore they use the remote
mounting of the transformers. Refer to
Figure 18.0-11 for an example of this
type of equipment layout. It is impor-
tant to remember which side or end of
equipment is used for normal operations
when designing a network layout. The
primary switches are operated from
the end as are the protectors. Switch-
gear needs both NEC clearances at the
front and the rear, due to the drawout
breakers and the rear accessible cable
compartments. Designers are encour-
aged to pay attention to the different
voltage levels present, both medium
and low voltage, and the required
working clearances given in the NEC
or local codes.
Equipment weights should also be
investigated to ensure that the structure
can support the network assemblies.
Means of egress and routes to remove
material if replacement becomes
necessary should be identied. Avoid
placing any network equipment against
any wall; the NEC clearances required
probably double if two means of egress
are not available. Structural columns
pose challenges, however they rarely
defeat network arrangements; avoid
switchgear door openings bumping
against columns before they are
fully opened.
The highest piece of equipment may
be the low voltage switchgear, which
is usually 96.00 inches (2438.4 mm)
in height, plus the 9.0010.00 inches
N.P. #1 N.P. #2
86-1 86-2
50/51 50/51
PH. A,B,C PH. A,B,C
NC
Tie
86-T
Feeder
Breakers
Feeder
Breakers
GFR-1
GFR-T
GFR-2
N N
GRN
(Ground
Return
Neutral)
Loads Loads
Ground Bus

2-Position
PRI SW.
(Fuse)
Transformer Network
Protector
FDR
FDR
FDR
FDR
FDR
FDR
FDR
FDR
FDR
FDR
FDR
FDR
FDR
FDR
FDR
FDR
Tie
Network
Protector
Transformer
2-Position
PRI SW.
(Fuse)
(228.6254.0 mm) required by a rail
mounted top of gear breaker lifter
device, or the network disconnect,
and must be accommodated. Liquid
transformer units have very high core
and coil untanking heights, which
precludes any chance of untanking the
core and coils in a normal building.
See Figures 18.0-32 through 18.0-34.
Regarding conductors, it is prudent to
remember that busway can enter or
exit a switchgear structure at only
one location. Room does not exist to
accommodate more than the rst run
of busway in a single section, unless
the rst connects at the top and the
second connects at the bottom.
A typical plan view for a three-unit spot
network is shown in Figure 18.0-11;
four-unit spot networks are similarly
designed. If it becomes necessary to
split the switchgear assembly, position
the splits at one side or the other of the
Tie devices. This approach simplies
the power connections of the neutral
and ground buses.
The number of network transformers
used in a typical spot network is
directly correlated with the number of
independent, yet networkable primary
feeders available. At least, that is a
general rule to follow, however the
secondary equipment can take many
congurations.
Eaton recommends using at least one
normally closed tie breaker in the low
voltage metal-enclosed switchgear for
the purpose of isolating ground faults,
and for maintenance of the assembly
(cleaning, torquing and testing).
Usually the number of normally closed
Tie breakers equals N-1, where N
equals the number of transformers
used in the spot network. However, for
some projects it may be desirable to
have a ring low voltage assembly
where the number of Tie breakers
equals N. In such a ring spot
network, a Tie busway or cable
connects the extreme left side bus
of the assembly to the extreme right
side bus, thus keeping the N-1 network
conguration even when one primary
or network transformer is down, or the
low voltage assembly bus is down for
maintenance or fault isolation.
Main breakers, when used, may be
positioned in switchgear that is one
integral lineup, or mounted in switch-
gear close-coupled to dry-type trans-
former/protector pairs which feed
power circuits to remote assemblies
having all Tie and Feeder breakers.
18.0-11
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Discussion
011
Historically, some users and designers
have recommended using low voltage
busway as the spot collector bus,
then feeding loads radially from the
collector bus. Eaton does not recom-
mend low voltage busway as the net-
work collector bus, since it has limited
short-time ratings and has higher
failure rates than the more robust low
voltage metal-enclosed switchgear. It
is certainly acceptable to use multiple
segments of busway to feed protector
circuits into the switchgear, where the
redundancy of busway circuits prevents
loss of power to loads for a single
busway fault or failure, and the available
fault currents are limited to levels that
can be delivered by one transformer,
not N transformers.
Control voltages for network protec-
tors are usually 120 Vac and derived
internally from the transformer sec-
ondary or within the protector itself,
thus protectors are self-contained
regarding control power. The low volt-
age switchgear assembly may be ac or
DC with AC control power being more
popular. The ac current control systems
use a control power transformer on
the incoming of each protector circuit
with a control power transfer system
on the secondaries of all control power
transformers to pick the rst live
source. The control power circuits are
always energized so long as at least
one protector is closed.
The addition of main meters for power
monitoring, overcurrent relays and
communication trip units generally
take very little space and can be
accommodated without adding space
if the switchgear layout rules and
standards are followed. It is possible
to monitor other non-switchgear
equipment by adding space for the
required number of communicating
addressable relays which monitor
remote contacts wired to the switch-
gear for status and alarming at a
remote power monitoring and
control system, such as transformer
temperature and pressure alarms.
7. Use of Current Limiting Fuses
Generally, this issue needs to be
addressed in the design stage of a
project, prior to specication writing.
Protectors are usually applied with
fuse limiters on the load side of each
protector, but there can be exceptions
to using the limiters.
The expected fault currents need to be
calculated for several locations, including
secondary windings of transformers,
network switchgear bus (both sides of
Figure 18.0-10. One-Line for Three-Unit Spot Network
Protectors are fused for three- and four-unit spot networks.
Fuse location.
Figure 18.0-11. Floor Plan for Three-Unit Spot Network System
Tie breakers), and at the load side of
feeder breakers. Network systems that
use air power breakers and deliver
more than 65,000A of fault current
should use feeder breakers such as
Eatons Magnum DS breakers rated
up to 100,000A.
Network protectors are normally
equipped with load side fuses
(usually partial range current limiting)
and serve as backup protection should
the protector fail to open on reverse
fault current conditions. Air power
breakers are now available with kAIC
ratings of 65, 85, 100 and 200 kAIC,
without fuses.
In two transformer spot networks,
one can argue that the protectors
do not need to be fused for any
application up to and including
3000 kVA transformers. The principal
logic is that the Tie can experience
only the fault current from one
transformer and that the Tie protective
trip settings provide faster acting
backup protection than the protector
fuses for reverse power conditions.
When protector fuses are used, the
system needs to be designed with
interlocking to ensure that the fuses
are not accessible unless the protector
and disconnect are opened.
N.P. #1 N.P. #2
86-1 86-2
50/51 50/51
PH. A,B,C
PH. A,B,C
NC
Tie
86-T
Feeder
Breakers
GFR-1
GFR-T
GFR-2
N N
Loads Loads
Ground Bus
NC
Tie
Loads
Feeder
Breakers
GRN
(Ground Return Neutral)
86-3
50/51
PH. A,B,C
N
GFR-3
N.P. #3
N
Feeder
Breakers

FDRS
Aux.
Sections
Tie FDRS Tie FDRS
Primary Switch
Network
Transformer
Network Protector
Busway or Cable
Low Voltage
Drawout
Switchgear
Aux.
Sections
Aux.
Sections
18.0-12
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Discussion
012
Figure 18.0-12. Floor Plan for Double-Ended Network Substation
Figure 18.0-13. Example of Two-Unit Spot Network Coordination Issues
8. Network Device Coordination
By way of example, we shall illustrate
the level of coordination possible in
a typical two-unit network system
as shown in Figure 18.0-13. In this
example, two networkable primary
sources are available and several
transformers are presumed to be fed
from each of the two primary circuits.
The upstream primary device is a
13.8 kV vacuum circuit breaker with
a complement of relaying.
The medium voltage switches are
fused air type. The switches have two
positions, open and closed, not three
positions. We recommend that the
primary switches use key interlocks
with protectors to ensure that the
protectors are used to break and make
load currents, although this interlock-
ing is not absolutely necessary since
the switches are loadbreak rated.
The lack of a ground position in the
primary switches does not impede the
normal operation of the network system;
Aux.
Sections
FDRS Tie FDRS
Network
Transformer
Network
Protector
Busway or
Cable Tray
Low Voltage
Drawout
Switchgear
Network
Protectorr
Network
Transformer
Aux.
Sections
Primary Medium
Voltage Devices
#1
Two Position
Fusible Primary
Switch
1000/1500 kVA
Dry Transformer
#2
AA/FA
1875A CMD
Non-Fused Protector
2000A
Tie
NC
50/51
Typical DS or DSL Feeders
To Other
Spot
Networks
65E
CLE Fuse
50/51
rather it makes grounding the primary
cable a manual procedure.
In this example, a two-unit network
with 1000/1500 kVA dry transformers
AA/FA, 80C rise are used. The
transformers are congured delta-wye
with 13.8 kV primary, a 480V wye
secondary, and the impedance of each
is within the range of 5.757.00%. Eaton
Type CM52 Network Protectors are
rated 1875A and are mounted within
low voltage switchgear structures. The
CM52 is a deadfront, drawout protector
whose operation is very similar to the
air power circuit breaker used through-
out the switchgear to distribute power
to the outgoing circuits. The network
relay used within the CM52 is the MPCV
type, a microprocessor-integrated
solid-state relay that allows for eld
programming the network characteris-
tics. All CM52 protectors are factory
wired for application of remote trip
and lockout functions, which will be
used in our example via the 86 lockout
relay and separate 50/51 protective relay.
The 50/51 relay will use 2000/5 ratio
current transformer inputs from current
transformers mounted on the load
side of each protector within a transi-
tion box. The 50/51 device may be a
solid-state relay, Digitrip 3000, due to
its broad range of eld programmable
settings. Thus, the protectors are used
as main overcurrent protective devices
as well as protectors. When transform-
ers are remote from the switchgear, the
current transformers must be located
within a transition box atop the protec-
tors. The current transformers may
be used for metering also, or if more
accurate metering at lower current
levels is desired then a second set may
be necessary in the switchgear with
multi-ratios to match the average
load demands.
The low voltage assembly uses Eaton
Magnum DS breakers for both Tie and
Feeder devices. The Tie breaker will be
an MDS-620, 2000A frame, 1600A trip,
electrically operated, drawout design,
incorporating the Digitrip 520 trip unit.
The feeder breakers are a mix of 800A
frame and 1600A frame to serve the
outgoing feeder circuits. The switch-
gear will panel mount the two 50/51
relays, which provide overcurrent
protection for the protectors.
In this example, the fault currents
are less than 65 kA; however, systems
having higher fault currents can be
accommodated using higher-rated
Magnum DS breakers.
18.0-13
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Discussion
013
General DiscussionCoordination Curves
The protective device settings for a
two-unit spot network are similar to
those used for a standard double-
ended substation. The goal is to serve
both continuity of service and protec-
tion equally. Settings should not favor
either one or the other, but rather should
keep loads served if at all possible
and minimize nuisance outages even
under serve fault conditions, including
ground fault events. Basically, settings
should be implemented which allow
the closest upstream device near a
fault to clear before other upstream
devices trip. Faults in a network have
more than one source, which is a major
difference compared to double-ended
substations with a normally open
Tie breaker.
In Figure 18.0-14, we plot the time-
current curves of the medium voltage
power fuses, whose main function is
to provide short circuit protection to
each transformer, the ANSI damage
curve typical for the transformers, the
50/51 relaying upstream from each
spot network, the Tie and Feeder
device trip curves, and the 50/51 relay-
ing used by each protector. We have
shown the primary 50/51 protective
relaying curves by postulating their
relative position as being to the right
of each damage curve and to the left of
primary cable damage curves, since
several transformers are served by
each primary service. In other words,
several vault locations exist in the facility.
Obviously, these primary relays cannot
protect each transformer individually,
nor is it desirable to do so since it is
better to isolate a simple faulted
transformer with a power fuse than
to open the entire primary circuit.
The following paragraphs detail the
protective device settings, discuss the
curves, and review the important issues.
ANSI Transformer Damage Curves
Two curves are plotted: both the 100%
and the 58% damage curves are shown
for the dry types in our example. These
curves are dened in ANSI Standard
141. The 58% curve reects the fact
that a one per unit secondary fault on
a grounded wye transformer creates
a 0.58 per unit fault in the primary
conductors when the primary windings
have a delta conguration.
Eaton CLE 65E Power Fuses
The selected current limiting fuse, 65E,
provides little if any overload protec-
tion for the transformer, however, it
does an acceptable job of supplying
NEC code mandated short circuit
protection for the 100% damage curve.
The fuse cannot provide protection
for the 58% curve and downsizing the
selected rating lower than 65E is likely
to result in nuisance fuse operation.
Each power fuse vendor has applica-
tion tables and charts to properly
select fuses for any application.
The fuse meets the NEC stipulated
protection, but lacks the exibility
of a relay with nearly continuous
adjustments. If superior protection
is desired, then a vacuum breaker
with 50/51 relaying should be used
in lieu of the fused primary switch.
Do not use 50/51 relaying on a load
interrupter switch.
Figure 18.0-14. Two-Transformer Spot Network Phase Overcurrent
Legend:
R Primary 50/51 RelayingTypical for These Transformers
T3 100% ANSI Damage/Withstand Curve for Transformer
T1 58% ANSI Damage/Withstand Curve
F Power Fuse 65E Rating
P Network Protector Relay 50/51(Both LTD = 40 Seconds and 6 Seconds Shown)
T Tie Breaker 1600AT MAG = 1 TX INRUSH
B Feeder Breaker 800AT 3MAG = 3 TX INRUSH
CURRENT (Amperes)
100
T
I
M
E
0.1
1.0
10
100
1000
0.01
1000 10000 100000
T3
MAG
3MAG
T1
B
T
P
F
T3
R
18.0-14
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Discussion
014
Protector RelayingEaton Digitrip 3000
Plus Ground Fault Relay (GFR)
Network relays do not have any form
of forward 50/51 (instantaneous and
time overcurrent) protection, there-
fore if it is desired it must be added
separately. An 86 lockout relay is
recommended for positive lockout
indication and reset operations. The
curve for the Digitrip 3000 is shown in
Figure 18.0-14 and depicts the settings
for this microprocessor-based solid-
state multi-phase relay. Using the
2000/5 ratio current transformers, the
settings are as follows:
Long Time Pickup
(LTPU) = 1.0 (2000A)
Long Time Delay I
2
t
(LTD) = 40 seconds
Short Time Pickup
(STPU) = 3 X (6000A)
Short Time Delay
(STD) = 0.3 seconds
Instantaneous
(INST) = 11 X (22000A)
Ground Fault Relay
(GFR) = 700A pickup
Ground Fault Relay
(GFR) = 0.58 seconds
(35 cycles)
It is very important that the protector
50/51 settings be slower than the Tie
breaker. The faster acting Tie is desired
for isolation of switchgear faults
between one side of the Tie and the
loadside of a protector without taking
the whole network down. The Tie
clears one transformers fault
contribution, while the unfaulted
side remains energized. The protector
experiencing the remaining fault
current will subsequently trip open,
thereby isolating one-half of the
network bus for repair.
Faults located in the transformer
secondary windings may open both
the Tie and the protector, depending
upon the magnitude of the event.
The protector should open rst upon
reverse power, since protectors
respond to reverse power in 7 cycles.
If the Tie also trips open, the Tie can be
reclosed to serve the entire load again
after locking out the protector on the
faulted transformer.
Note: The transformer is given superior
overload protection by the Digitrip 3000
compared to the level of protection given
by the power fuse. This is especially true
even in the overload region of the ANSI
damage curve.
Tie BreakerEaton MDS 2000A with
Digitrip LS Plus Ground Fault Relay
The settings shown in Figure 18.0-14
were developed using 2000/5 sensors
on the Tie breaker. The settings recom-
mended are:
Long Time Pickup
(LTPU) = 0.8 (1600A)
Long Time Delay I
2
t
(LTD) = 2 seconds
Short Time Pickup
(STPU) = 3 X (4800A)
Short Time Delay
(STD) = 0.2 seconds
Instantaneous
(INST) = Not used
Ground Fault Relay
(GFR) = 700A pickup
Ground Fault Relay
(GFR) = 0.58 seconds
(35 cycles)
See
Figure 18.0-15
These settings allow the Tie to act
quickly for abnormal current condi-
tions, yet also provide enough delay
to allow protectors to trip on reverse
current when protector operation is
the prudent rst course of action.
Also, larger feeder devices, such
as 1200A breakers (not shown in
Figure 18.0-14) will easily t to the
left and beneath the Tie curve. It is
important to set the Tie to operate
quicker than the protector 50/51
relaying. The faster Tie settings assure
that switchgear bus faults do not take
the entire service down (only half). In
our example, the Tie will only be called
upon to interrupt the fault current from
one transformer.
Typical FeederEaton MDS 800A with
Digitrip LSIG
The settings in Figure 18.0-14 were
generated using 800/5 sensors applied
on the feeder breakers. The Digitrip 520
trip unit settings are:
Long Time Pickup
(LTPU) = 1.0 (800A)
Long Time Delay
(LTD) = 2 seconds
Short Time Pickup
(STPU) = Not used
Short Time Delay
(STD) = Not used
Instantaneous
(INST) = 2 X (1600A)
Ground Fault Pickup
(GFPU) = F (500A)
Ground Fault Delay
(GFD) = 0.3 seconds
(18 cycles)
See
Figure 18.0-15
These settings provide for fast action
of feeder devices experiencing the
maximum fault duty of the switchgear
(fault current from two transformers).
Ground fault protection is recom-
mended for the feeder trip units; these
settings can be coordinated with the
two-stage ground fault detection
system (single point ground return
method) mentioned earlier in
Figure 18.0-8. Suggested ground
fault protective device settings are
illustrated in Figure 18.0-15, and the
settings are listed under the protector,
Tie breaker, and feeder device discus-
sion in this section.
18.0-15
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Discussion
015
Ground fault settings are established
essentially the same as a double-ended
substation using a single tee ground
point and ground return methodology.
Eatons MDS feeder breakers are set to
coordinate with downstream devices
so that downstream breakers experi-
encing a fault trip rst. The GFR relays
for the Tie and protectors are set
slightly higher in pickup and have a
longer delay than the ground fault for
the feeder devices. Protector and Tie
ground fault settings are usually set
at the same levels; coordination is
achieved by interlocking the two
stages so that the Tie stage operates
rst followed by the protector stage.
Ground current originating from faults
in the switchgear buswork or incoming
conductors is directly measured by
the GFR on the Tie, then by one of
the protectors after the Tie opens.
Subsequently, the GFR on the faulted
zone causes the protector experiencing
the fault to trip open thereby isolating
the fault completely. Downstream
ground faults are cleared by down-
stream circuit breakers or the DS feeder
breaker serving the faulted circuit.
Figure 18.0-15. Spot Network Ground Fault Protection
18.0-16
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Liquid-Type Network Transformers
016
Typical Liquid Network Transformer
Network transformers are available
with liquid immersed core and coil
assemblies, and use the liquid as the
principal insulation means for primary
and secondary windings. The uid
can be mineral oil, silicon or a biode-
gradable form of vegetable oil. Indoor
applications benet from using silicon
or the biodegradable vegetable oil
liquid dielectric. See the discussion
below for ABBs BioTemp uid.
The transformers are built to ANSI
C57.12.40 standards and have an
integral primary non-loadbreak three-
position switch having connected,
open and grounded positions. The
grounded position grounds the
incoming medium voltage feeder
that serves the transformer, and does
not ground the primary windings.
The primary switch is interlocked with
the associated network protector and
secondary transformer windings to
ensure that the switch is only used to
break or make magnetizing current.
Liquid network transformers have a
special low voltage ange for eld
mounting a network protector on the
secondary ange. The protector is best
mounted close to the secondary wind-
ings of the associated transformer
to minimize distance between the
windings and the protector contacts.
There are only two standard ANSI
ange congurations, smaller and
larger, and the user generally gets one
based upon the transformer kVA size.
It is possible to chose one over the
other, but the specier must be careful
in the selection and make certain
adequate load growth and redundancy
are built into the system when
choosing a small ange size for a
transformer that normally is supplied
with a large ange for a higher
ampacity protector. If the specier
stays with the Eaton recommenda-
tions for sizing protectors, the ange
size is properly chosen for every unit.
Liquid transformers are available with
an array of accessories, most of which
are listed on the next page with the
outline drawings of a typical liquid
network transformer. Alarm contacts
are usually wired to terminal boxes for
use on alarm schemes or monitoring.
Certain accessories allow for the sam-
pling of uids at regular maintenance
intervals for testing and analysis.
Table 18.0-2. Typical Properties of Insulating Fluids
Description BIOTEMP Mineral Oil H.T.H. Silicone
Electrical
Dielectric strength, kV (ASTM D877) 45 30 40 43
Physical
Viscosity, cST. 100C 10 3 11.5 16
(ASTM D445) 40C
0C
45
300
12
76
110
2200
38
90
Flash pt. C (ASTM D92) 330 145 285 300
Fire pt. C (ASTM D92) 360 160 308 330
Specic heat (cal/gr/C) (ASTM D2766) 0.47 0.43 0.45 0.36
Coefcient of expansion, /C (ASTM D1903) 6.88 x 10
4
7.55 x 10
4
7.30 x 10
4
1.04 x 10
3
Pour pt. C (ASTM D97) 15 to 25 40 24 55
Sp. gravity (ASTM D1298) 0.91 0.91 0.87 0.96
Color (ASTM D1500) <0.5 0.5 0.52.0 <0.5
Environmental
Biodegradation Rate (%) 21day CECL33 97.0 25.2 27.1 0.0
BioTemp Advantages
BIOTEMP
is a natural ester uid

made from renewable and biodegrad-
able vegetable-based oil. Below are
some of the environmental, re
safety and operational advantages
of using BIOTEMP.
Environmental Advantages
Even though secondary contain-
ment is still required, BIOTEMP
spills can be disposed through
normal means and not treated as
hazardous or toxic waste
BIOTEMP minimizes air pollution by
producing only carbon dioxide and
water during combustion
BIOTEMP also offers the potential
for relief from government
regulatory penalties, resulting
in less costly spill cleanups
Fire Safety Advantages
BIOTEMP offers greater risk
mitigation on collateral damage
from transformer explosion and
re, potentially lowering insurance
premiums
Active re suppression and barrier
walls can essentially be eliminated
with BIOTEMP when minimal
spacing is maintained
BIOTEMP can alternatively be
used safely indoors and in tighter
spaces outdoors typically without
additional re safety requirements
BIOTEMP is listed as a less
ammable dielectric uid by
Factory Mutual (FM Global) and
is classied as a less hazardous
dielectric medium in respect to
re hazard by Underwriters
Laboratories (UL)
Operational Advantages
BIOTEMP impregnated paper
experiences a much lower aging
rate compared to mineral oil
impregnated paper, leading to an
increase in the insulation system
lifetime (grid reliability)
BIOTEMP impregnated paper can
alternatively operate at a higher
hotspot temperature and attain the
same life expectancy as mineral oil
impregnated paper, increasing the
transformer peak load or overload
capacity (energy efciency)
18.0-17
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
017
Figure 18.0-16. Outline Drawing750 kVA, 55/65C Rise, 13,750 Delta to 480Y/277 Volts
25.30
(642.6)
67.00
(1701.8)
62.00
(1574.8)
14.80
(375.9)
29.60
(751.8)
1.50
(38.1)
XO
25.40
(645.2)
To Cab
To XO
Over
Tank
36.30 (922.0)
To Switch Entrance)
4.10
(104.1)
16.60
(421.6)
47.40
(1204.0)
Over
Switch
Entrance
3.90
(99.1)
23.70
(602.0)
23.70
(602.0)
53.40 (1356.4)
Base Length
75.4
(1915.2)
Shipping
Height
42.00
(1066.8)
Centerline
LV Throat
22.00
(558.8)
80.50 (2044.7)
Overall & Shipping Length
35.50
(901.7)
21.40
(543.6)
27.90
(708.7)
46.90
(1191.3)
Overall &
Shipping
Length
CL
Tank
X3
X2
X1
X0
2.50
(63.5)

Sealed TankBraced for 15 PSI (103 KPA)Color Network Black.

Base-Bar Type0.75 (19.0) x 1.50 (38.0).

Jacking Areas4 Total.
Lifting Hook for Lifting Complete Transformer.
Welded Cover with Gasket and Lifting Loops for Lifting Cover Only.
1.00 (25.4) Filling and Upper Filter Connection.
Bolted Manhole12.50 (318.0) x 12.50 (318.0) Opening with Cortite Gasket.
Relief DeviceOver a 7.00 (178.0) Handhole.
Cap with 2.00 (51.0) Square Head for Access to De-energized Tap Changer (with Key Interlock, Coordinated with HV Switch). Item
LV ThroatPer ANSI C57.12.40 Figure 3.
LV Bushing3 Total.

XO Bushing Style 8D11227G02Spade 1.75 (44.0) NEMA Drilled. 3.75 (95.0) Wide x 0.5 (13.0) Thick Spade.

1.00 (25.4) Drain Valve with Bronze Pipe Plug.

Ground Pads2-Hole NEMA Drilling02 Total.

Magnetic Liquid Level Gauge with Alarm Contacts.

Vacuum Pressure Gauge with Alarm Contact and Air Test Valve.

Liquid Temperature Gauge with Alarm Contacts.

Rapid Pressure Rise Relay.

Control Cabinetwith Undrilled Entrance Plate.

Bolted Manhole12.50 (318.0) x 12.50 (318.0) Opening
with Cortite Gasket.

H.V. 3-Position Magnetic Break Disconnect and Grounding

Switch Operating Mechanism with Provisions for Padlocking, with
Key Interlock. Locked in Open or Ground Positions, Coordinated
with Tap Changer. Item and Second Key Interlock. Locked in
Closed Position and Coordinated with Low Voltage Protector.

1.00 (25.4) Filling Coupling.

Magnetic Liquid Level Gauge.

Switch PositionsTop to Bottom, Ground, Closed, Open.

Switch Cover with 0.50 (13.2) 3 Taps for Jack Screws (Bolted on).

Terminal Chamber Cover with 0.50 (13.2) 3 Taps for Jack
Screws (Bolted on).

Nameplate and Warning Plate.

H.V. Terminal Chamber.

1.00 (25.4) Drain Coupling.

Terminal for #2 to 4/0 Cable Range3 Total.

Entrance 3 G & W Stuffing Boxes. Catalog Number RS33-G1, 4.50 (114.0) CL to CL.

0.50 (13.2) Air Test Fitting with Bronze Pipe Plug.

0.50 (13.2) Top Liquid Sampler with Bronze Pipe Plug.

0.25 (6.0) Fluid Level Plug.

Interlock Bushing.
.
Plan View
18.0-18
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Dry-Type Network Transformers
018
Typical Dry-Type Network Transformer
Network transformers are available
with dry-type core and coil assemblies,
and use special polyester resin or
cast epoxy as the principal insulation
means for primary and secondary
windings. The choice depends upon
the economics of the project. Indoor
applications benet from using dry-
type networks since no containment or
sampling of liquid dielectric is needed.
Eaton strongly recommends 80C rise
cast coil transformers for use in spot
network systems.
The transformers are built to ANSI
C57.12.57 standards and do not have
an integral primary switch, unless a
two-position switch is added in the
eld. The process of grounding the
incoming medium voltage feeder that
serves the transformer becomes a
manual process of adding grounding
cables. The two-position primary
switch is usually loadbreak rated and
is not interlocked with the associated
network protector and secondary
transformer windings.
Eaton can also supply close-coupled
primary switchgear with a two-breaker
(VCPW) transfer capability on the
primary of cast coil dry-type network
units. The proximity of vacuum break-
ers will mandate using RC snubbers
within the transformer.
Dry-type network transformers have
a special low voltage ange for eld
mounting a network protector on the
secondary ange. The protector is best
mounted close to the secondary wind-
ings of the associated transformer
to minimize distance between the
windings and the protector contacts.
There are only two standard ANSI
ange congurations, smaller and
larger, and the user generally gets one
based upon the transformer kVA size.
It is possible to chose one over the
other, but the specier must be careful
in the selection and make certain
adequate load growth and redundancy
are built into the system when
choosing a small ange size for a
transformer that normally is supplied
with a large ange for a higher
ampacity protector. If the specier
stays with the Eaton recommenda-
tions for sizing protectors, the ange
size is properly chosen for every unit.
Dry-type transformers can be close-
coupled to LV drawout switchgear with
protectors, tie and feeder devices all
switchgear mounted.
Dry-type network transformers are
available with an array of features,
most of which are listed on the next
page with the outline drawings of
a typical dry network transformer.
A transformer monitoring package
is usually included with temperature
readings, RTDs and Alarm contacts.
Most designs have knock-down
enclosures for ease in rigging a
unit into position through hallways
and doorways.
18.0-19
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
019
Figure 18.0-17. Outline Drawing1000/1500 kVA Cast Coil Network Transformer,
80C/100C Rise, 13,800 Delta to 480Y/277 Vac Wye
2.25
(57.2)
Ventilated Surface
Front and Back
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
1.25
(31.8)
3.38
(85.7)
5.44
(138.1) 77.00
(1955.8)
108.00
(2743.2)
TEMPERATURE
MONITOR OR
CUTOUT PROVIDED
NAMEPLATE
Total of Two
Jack Screws
0.5013 UN
8.38
(212.9)
12.88
(327.0)
9.50
(241.3)
67.63
(1717.7)
5.00
(127.0)
5.00
(127.0)
9.00
(228.6)
9.00
(228.6)
33.00
(838.2)
0.56 x 1.06
(14.2 x 20.6)
Slots
9.00
(228.6)
27.13
(689.0)
32.88
(835.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
X0
X3 X2 X1
66.00
(1676.4)
30.00
(762.0)
36.00
(914.4)
90.00
(2286.0)
17.13
(435.0)
1.50
(38.1)
0.56 x 1.06
(14.33 x 27.0)
Rects
3.00
(76.2)
1.88
(47.6)
1.13
(28.6)
8.00
(203.2)
8.00
(203.2)
8.88
(225.4)
51.00
(1295.4)
66.00
(1676.4)
H1 H2 H3
C
L
HV End View
LV End View
Front View
12.00
(304.8)
Characteristics
Enclosure: NEMA 2 (indoor
ventilated with drip-proof roof)
Finish: ANSI 61
Product type: Cast/Cast
kVA: 1000/1500
HV: 13,200
HV kV BIL: 95
LV: 480Y/277
LV kV BIL: 10
Taps: 12,540/12,870/13,200/
13,530/13,860
Impedance: 5%
Temperature rise: 80C
Cooling class: AA/FA
Hertz: 60
Phases: 3
LV windings: Cu
HV windings: Cu
Sound level: 64 dB
Approximate weight:
10,200/4627 lbs/kg
Provisions for mounting network
protector on the left end
Primary is cable connected to closed
coupled primary switchgear, such
as MVS
Accessories
Braced for seismic
ANSI 61
LV end sheets
Standard ventilation
Aluminum screens
Copper ground bus (0.25 x 2.00)
Neutral disconnect link
UL listing
Control panel
Control power supplied by ABB
Forced cooling
18.0-20
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Type CM52 Network Protectors
020
Typical Enclosed CM52 Network Protector
Quality Designed to be Smarter, Safer and Streamlined
The CM52 Network Protector provides the highest level
of reliability and service continuity available today. An
intelligent protective device, the CM52 Network Protector is
designed to handle ratings from 800 to 4500A, 216 to 600V.
This new network protector features an electrically operated,
composite case, spring closed air network circuit breaker
controlled by the MPCV network relay.
The CM52 meets or exceeds the standards in IEEE
C57.12.44.
This ensures a product with the highest performance
standard applicable to a network protector. A rst for
network protectors, the CM52 is setting a new standard
by being UL-qualied. This third party approval certies
the delivery of a quality product. A UL-qualied network
protector means easier code approval for quicker system
start-up and less approval time and costs in a non-utility
environment.
UL listed and labeled CM52 protectors are presently available
through 4500A. Contact Eaton and the protector product
line for more details on UL listed and labeled CM52 network
protectors.
CM52 Drawout
Network Protector Ratings
Several network protector models currently exist to satisfy
all location requirements. The new CM52 design covers all
of these ratings, giving you one type of protector to handle
all installation needs. The styles available include internal
or external fuse mountings and submersible or NEMA 4
enclosures throughout the current and voltage ratings.
Having parts and accessories common through all protector
ratings means lower maintenance and inventory costs. The
CM52 was also designed with higher interrupting and fault
close ratings than older protector models. This higher rating
allows for safer installations and better protection on a
network system.
Table 18.0-3. CM52 Ratings TableRatings through 480 Volts Wye
Continuous
Current
Rating
Interrupting
Rating
Close
and Latch
Rating
Suggested Transformer
Rating (kVA)
216V 480V
800
1200
1600/1875
42
42
42
35
35
35
225
300
500
500
750
1000
2000
2500/2825
3000
42
65
65
35
45
45
600
750
1000
1000
1500
2000
3500
4500
85
85
65
65
1000
1000
2000
2000
18.0-21
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
021
CM52 Secondary Contacts
Protector downtime is both frustrating
and costly. No mechanism adjust-
ments, few replacement parts, color-
coded wiring, diagnostics, and a
protected motor are key contributors
to the high-level service reliability
and reduced downtime of the CM52
Network Protector.
CM52 IDM
The CM52 is a low maintenance
network protector. It requires no
mechanism adjustments, is easier
to troubleshoot and has built-in
diagnostics. Maintenance time is no
longer needed for the adjustment of
protector contacts. Troubleshooting
is much easier with the CM52 through
color-coded wiring and a front
accessible test block. Diagnostics
are built into the Indicating Diagnostic
Module. The IDM replaces the
traditional manual adjustment of the
min. motor pick-up adjustable resistor
and offers diagnostic indicators for
available control voltage for the
motor, spring release and trip circuit.
With the new CM52, maintenance
becomes easier and protector down-
time decreases, saving money and
increasing reliability.
Much more manageable at less
than half the weight of older network
protectors, the protector is easier to
handle, resulting in less time in vaults,
and lower labor costs. A four-position,
drawout, deadfront circuit breaker
makes testing quick and safe, curbing
maintenance time and costs. The dead-
front provides worker safety, drastically
reducing the possibility of live electricity
accidents during inspection. A front
accessible 6-point test block provides
safe and easy connection of test
equipment during testing, phasing
and troubleshooting.
Quality was the focus through the
design to the manufacturing of the
new CM52 Network Protector. The
circuit breaker in the CM52 goes
through a 100-point testing procedure
in an ISO
9000 breaker specialty

plant. The quality design and testing
of the CM52 virtually eliminates the
need for later adjustments and
insures a reliable product.
The Intelligence of the
ProtectorMPCV Relay
Within the CM52 lies its intelligence,
the MPCV Network Relay. The
programmable MPCV Network
Relay brings the proven performance
of microprocessor-based technology
to the CM52 Network Protector.
This programmable relay offers
multiple selections to meet the
requirements of each network
protector installation. With the MPCV,
you can select between the traditional
straight-line master close curve and
modied circular close curve. Our
enhanced sequence-based algorithm
provides exceptional performance
and stability over a wide range of
temperatures and voltages in
comparison with a power-based
algorithm. Additionally, the anti-
pumping feature on the MPCV relay
protects the motor under damaging
system conditions.
Communications
The MPCV relay has built in communi-
cation capabilities for monitoring
and control of the network protector.
This allows users to access and
display information from the relay
including voltage, current, energy
usage, power quality, and last trip
details. Control of the protector is
possible from a remote location,
providing safer conditions and
quicker response time.
The relay can also communicate other
information about the network protec-
tors environment through standard
auxiliary inputs. Information such as
water or pressure loss inside the network
housing, or erratic internal enclosure
temperature will send an alert notifying
of problems in the vault.
The relay has the capability of
communicating information to a
Data Concentrator/Translator (DC/T)
over a shielded twisted pair of
communications wires. Information
is obtained through a utilitys SCADA
protocol and/or Eatons PowerNet
software program.
18.0-22
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Type CM52Features, Functions and Benets
022
Features, Functions
and Benets
1. Standardized Breaker Frames:
Only three basic breaker frames
of minimal physical size are used
throughout the CM52 to provide
different electrical ratings.
Table 18.0-4. CM52 Sizes
2. Light Weight Breaker Element:
A reduced breaker physical size
also results in a substantial weight
reduction compared to existing
Network Protector designs.
Table 18.0-5. CM52 Weights
3. 10 kV BIL (Basic Impulse Level):
Impulse testing is the application
of a high surge voltage on equip-
ment to simulate possible surges
caused by lightning. Although not
dened or required by IEEE/ANSI
C57.12.44, this test provides an
additional measure of safety and
performance to the design. (The
test was performed at 1.2us x 50
us wave shape on a 3 x 3 grid.)
4. Deadfront Drawout Breaker:
Protects the user from accessing
live circuits. Eaton offers the only
deadfront drawout breaker designs
in the Network Protector industry.
5. Improved Interrupting and Fault
Close (Close & Latch) Ratings:
Improved interrupting and fault
close ratings ensure that the
network protector will withstand
fault conditions and continue
to protect their associated
transformer.
Ampere
Rating
Breaker SizeInches (mm)
Width Height Depth
8002000
22503000
35004500
17.00 (431.8)
22.00 (558.8)
35.00 (889.0)
17.00
(431.8)
17.00
(431.8)
Ampere
Rating
Weight in Lbs (kg)
CM52 Breaker
Element
Comparable
Breaker
8002000 170 (77) 400 (182)
22503000 185 (84) 550650
(250295)
35004500 350 (159) 7001300
(318590)
Table 18.0-6. CM52 Ratings Comparison TableRating Tested at 600 Volts
Close & Latch ratings apply only to spring close and stored energy mechanisms.
6. Four Breaker Element
Drawout Positions:
a. ConnectedFully connected
to primary and secondary
connections. The door may be
open or closed in this position.
b. TestPrimary clusters are
disconnected, secondary
wiring disconnects are made.
Testing can be performed on
the unit at this point without
disturbing the power connec-
tions. The door may also
be opened or closed in this
position.
c. DisconnectedPrimary
clusters are disconnected,
secondary disconnects are
open. The door must be open
in this position.
d. Removable positionBreaker
element can be removed from
its rails. The door must be open
with the breaker element in
this position.
7. Standardized Modular Components:
The motor, shunt trip, spring
release coil, arc chutes, IDM,
auxiliary switches and multi-ratio
CTs are easily removable, and
main components are standard
across different ratings. This
allows reduced part inventories
and reduced training for shop
and eld crews.
Convenient Accessories
8. Low Maintenance: The breaker
has no adjustments required
over the life of the unit and fewer
replacement parts than traditional
units. A built-in wear gauge shows
the acceptable limit of contact wear,
making the breaker condition easier
to identify for service periods.
Easy Inspection
9. Sealed Motor Gear Box:
Charges closing spring in less
than 1-1/2 seconds.
10. Indicating Diagnostic Module (IDM):
Replaces the traditional Motor
Close Relay and adjustable resistor,
and offers diagnostic indicators
on available control voltage for
the motor, spring release and
trip actuator.
11. Front-Mounted Test Points: Easy
access test points located on the
front of the unit make for quick
test cable connections and avoid
requiring the operator to reach
into live voltage area.
Continuous
Current Rating
(Amperes)
Breaker
Element
Width
Inches (mm)
CM52 IEEE/ANSI
Interrupting
Rating (kA)
Close & Latch
Rating (kA)
Interrupting
Rating (kA)
Close & Latch
Rating (kA)
800
1200
1600/1875
2000
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
17.00 (431.8)
42
42
42
42
35
35
35
35
30
30
30
35
25
25
25
35
2500/2825
3000
22.00 (558.8)
22.00 (558.8)
65
65
45
45
60
60
40
40
3500
4500
35.00 (889.0)
35.00 (889.0)
85
85
65
65
60
60
40
40
18.0-23
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Type CM52Options and Standards and Certications
023
Test Block Access Cover
Test Block with Cover Removed
12. Universal Wired Breaker: Breakers
are wired all the same regardless
of system voltage. Breakers can
be interchanged between 216V
grids and 480V spots without
modications. Multi-Tap settings
for current transformers make
changing amperes easy for
maximum exibility and
inventory reduction.
13. Retrot Adapter Frames and
Bus Adapters: Allows replacing of
most older GE and Westinghouse
breakers in existing enclosures.
14. Color Coded Teon
Wire:
Red = Close Circuit
Green = Open Circuit
White = All Other
Yellow = Normally Open
Blue = Normally Closed
Black = Common
15. Sixty (60) Point Secondary Contact:
Allows quick wiring for additional
contacts, relays and other devices
in the breaker element. Connec-
tions are automatic for breaker
racking in and out.
16. Improved Submersible Enclosure
Design: Customer-Specied
Internal or External Fuse Mounting
and revised Hinging and Opening
hardware for easier door opening
and closing. The door has greater
than 90 opening capability.
Options
Arc Flash
VaultGard Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System Indicating
Diagnostic Module
The CM52 network protector is available
with the NPARMs module (Arcash
Reduction Maintenance System).
This device is internal to the network
protector and can be remotely activated
usually through a switch mounted at
the vault entrance or through commu-
nications. This will enable the Arcash
Reduction Maintenance System device
on all CM52s in a spot network. Once
activated, the NPARMs places the
protectors in a sensitive mode, sens-
ing both forward and reverse current
directions. This device will actuate in
34 ms and call for all CM52 breakers
to trip if a fault is sensed on an adjacent
network protector or collector bus. It
has been shown that this device limits
the total incident energy to less than
8 cal/cm
2
.
Remote Racking System
The CM52 network protector is also
available with an integral remote
racking system. The system remotely
racks the breaker off the energized
bus work while the door is still closed
to the test position either through
an external pendant or through
communications.
Remote Racking System
Meets or exceeds the standards in
IEEE C57.12.44
The CM52 network protector is UL
labeled and approved in the NEMA
housing at all ratings
Seismic Qualication
18.0-24
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
NPL Fuse
024
NPL Fuse
NPL Fuse
Eatons NPL fuse has been designed as
a nonexpulsion, silver-sand type fuse.
It is exclusively for use on the CM52
network protector. Each end terminal
is fabricated from high conductivity,
impact extruded copper. High quality
NEMA Grade G5 convolutely wound
glass melamine tubing is permanently
sealed to the terminal with RTV
Silastic to eliminate possible sand
leakage or moisture entry. The termi-
nals and tube are secured together
with stainless steel, high strength,
spirally wound pins. All fuses are tested
on an ultra-low resistance measuring
instrument capable of resolving one-
hundredth of a micro-ohm and
evaluated on the basis of statistical
probability techniques to ensure
uniformity.
Characteristics of the NPL fuse have
been especially tailored for coordina-
tion with the transformer safe-heating
curve and in consideration of the
protector interrupting rating. This
specially designed characteristic curve
is less inverse than the ordinary melt-
ing characteristic of a silver-sand fuse.
The curve is a function of the design
of the unique, silver element used in
its make-up.
The NPL fuse does not become current-
limiting within the interrupting rating
of the protector. The fuses have been
successfully tested in its epoxy
enclosure at a three-phase fault
condition of 150,000A at 600V. The
NPL fuse is not ampacity rated,
and does not provide overcurrent
protection per NEC Article 240.
Fusing a protector is necessary
for three- and four-spot network trans-
former spot networks.
Figure 18.0-18. Average Melting Curve of NPL Fuse
Table 18.0-7. CM52 Protector Limiter Selection
These are the recommended limiters for use on three and four transformer spot network systems.
The limiters are optional on two transformer systems.
Consult Eaton for DSL fuse curve and Bussmann for KRPC fuse curved.
Protector Current
Rating (A)
Limiter/Fuse
Style Number
Curve
Number
800
1200
16001875
140D318G04
140D318G05
140D318G01
1
2
3
2000
25002825
3000
140D318G07
140D318G02
140D318G06
4
5
3500
4000
4500
140D318G08
5980C01G03
KRPC6000
1 2 3 5
1000
10
9
7
6
.9
4
5
.5
.3
.2
100
90
30
20
500
300
200
1
0
,0
0
0
8
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
9
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
8
0
0
6
0
0
9
0
0
7
0
0
5
0
0
4
0
0
3
0
0
2
0
0
1
0
0
8
0
60 9
0
7
0
50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 5 6 4 3 1 2 .9 .8 .7 .5 .6
600
900
800
700
400
40
8
50
80
60
70
3
1
2
.8
.7
.6
.4
.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.05
.04
.03
.02
.01
1
0
,0
0
0
8
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
9
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
8
0
0
6
0
0
9
0
0
7
0
0
5
0
0
4
0
0
3
0
0
2
0
0
1
0
0
8
0 60 9
0
7
0 50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 5 6 4 3 1 2 .9 .8 .7 .5 .6
1000
10
9
7
6
.9
4
5
.5
.3
.2
100
90
30
20
500
300
200
600
900
800
700
400
40
8
50
80
60
70
3
1
2
.8
.7
.6
.4
.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.05
.04
.03
.02
.01
Scale x 1000 = Current in Amperes
S
c
a
l
e

x

1
0

=

S
e
c
o
n
d
s
4
18.0-25
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Type MPCV Network Protector Relay
025
Description
The microprocessor controlled network
relays were designed to replace the
Type CN-33 electromechanical master
relay, the Type CNJ electromechanical
phasing relay and the Type BN electro-
mechanical desensitizing relay. The
MPCV series relays use the same
voltage and current inputs as do the
electromechanical equivalent. They
|also continually monitor voltage across
an open breaker and current through
a closed breaker, and perform the
following functions.
The trip contact will close upon
balanced fault conditions if the
positive sequence power ow is
out of the network
The close contact will close if the
ensuing positive sequence power
will be into the network
The trip contact will close upon the
ow of reverse magnetizing current
of its associated transformer
The MPCV series relay will mount on
standard CM52 and existing CMD and
CM-22 network protectors utilizing the
present system of low voltage relay
mounting studs.
MPCV Network Relay
Exclusive Features
The MPCV relay is the only sequenced-
based network relay in the market.
The MPCV relay calculates the
fundamental frequency positive
sequence voltage and current phasors
to account mathematically for any
power system voltage unbalances.
Essentially, the MPCV relay extracts
the fundamental components of the
sampled voltage and current signals
using discrete Fourier Transform, then
the positive sequence components are
then calculated. The positive sequence
current phasors for each phase are
compared with the reverse trip
setting (RT in the setting menu) and
a determination to trip is made within
the relay. The sampling rate is 32
samples per power line cycle, and
the algorithm requires two successive
line cycles of data to initiate a trip
where the positive sequence currents
experienced by the MPCV relay exceed
the RT settings. The MPCV has the
following exclusive features:
Gull-Wing Trip to address high X/R
Network Transformers
Anti-pump algorithm
Protective remote close
Warning
The MPCV relays are designed to be
used on network protectors which
have been wired for 216Y/125V or
480Y/277V service using relay
potential transformers. This relay
is designed to operate at 125V (line
to ground). Do not attempt to apply
this relay on any other system voltage
or conguration.
MPCV Relay (Front View) for CM52 Protectors
Failure to follow these instructions
could result in severe personal injury,
death, and/or product or property
damage.
Functional Characteristics
All measurements in the relay are
made as net voltages and currents,
computed as the positive sequence
voltage and current (represented as
V1X or I1) and the negative sequence
voltage and current (represented as
V2X or I2). The network positive and
negative voltages sequence are
denoted V1N and V2N respectively.
The other important voltage is the
phasing voltage, which is the differ-
ence between the transformer and
network voltages, whose sequence
components are denoted V1P and V2P.
The V1N is dened as the reference
phasor for all phase measurements,
and the nominal phase-to-neutral
voltage (1 P.U.) is dened as 125 Vac
rms. From this, the basic functional
characteristics are graphically depicted
in Figures 18.0-19 through 18.0-22.
Trip Function
Figure 18.0-19 diagrams the current-
induced trip characteristics. The
positive sequence current I1 is multi-
plied by the cosine of the angle of its
phasor related to V1N. If the resulting
sign is negative, then reverse power-
ow is indicated. The trip level
(11COS) for this can be adjusted
from 0.05 to 5 percent of rated current.
The cosine multiplication operation
results in the straight line which is
perpendicular to the phasor.
Figure 18.0-19. Trip Characteristics
In a different fault condition, the
negative sequence network voltage
V2N will exceed 0.06 P.U., in which
case the trip curve is rotated 60
clockwise direction to the alternate
trip curve shown, with the same trip
level as set before (0.05 to 5 percent).
In either case, the trip is called for after
50 mS, or three line cycles, in a 60 Hz
system, of a fault condition.
The BN function can be initialized to
modify the characteristics and timing
of the reverse-current trip conditions.
This adds to the basic detection
requirements that the true rms value
of the reverse current exceeds some
settable threshold between 50% and
250% of the protector CT rating. When
the magnitude of the reverse current is
less than the settable threshold, a trip
will occur if the condition exists for
an adjustable time period of 0 to
5 minutes. The BN function is standard
on all MPCV relays.
18.0-26
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Type MPCV Network Protector Relay
026
Special Trip Characteristic
Gull-Wing Trip
For some applications, the straight-
line trip curve is not the optimum
performance setting to use. If the
transformers have high X/R ratios, then
the straight-line trip does not perform
as well as the enhanced Gull-Wing
trip characteristic, a feature that has
been in the MPCV relay since 2003.
Technically, the following circum-
stances benet from having the
enhanced Gull-Wing trip feature:
Under a three-phase fault with
the X/R ratio higher than 11.4, the
voltage to current angle is less than
95 degrees
Double line-ground faults on the pri-
mary of a delta-wye transformer with
blown protector fuse on one phase
Single line-ground fault on the
primary of grounded wye-grounded
wye transformer with blown protector
fuse on one phase
Close Characteristics
Figure 18.0-23 also diagrams the
voltage regions for close, oat and trip
operation when the protector is open.
Under extreme conditions when the
protector is open, a trip is called for
to prevent a dangerous manual close
operation. With the protector open
and the network and transformer
voltages normal and balanced,
positive sequence phasing voltage
(V1P) is measured. If V1P is in the
close region, the relay makes its close
contact. If V1P is not in the close
region, but is less than 0.06 P.U., then
the oat is called for, as this voltage
difference is not deemed dangerous
regardless of the phase relationships,
and manual close of the protector
would not exceed the breaker capacity.
If V1P is greater than 0.06 P.U. and
does not lie in the close region, then
trip is called for to prevent manual
closing. The relay also calls for trip
under all rolled and crossed phase
conditions, even when either the
transformer side or the network side
of the protector is de-energized.
The close contact will close only in
the quadrant dened by the two lines,
termed master and phasing. The phas-
ing line, emanating from 0, denes a
minimum phase angle of the phasing
voltage ahead of the network voltage
for closing, which is selectable at +5,
5, 15 or 25. The master line sets
a minimum difference between the
transformer and network voltage,
settable from 0.0008 to 0.02 P.U. at 0 (in
phase). This line exhibits a slope of 7.5.

Figure 18.0-20. Traditional Relay Trip Characteristic
Figure 18.0-21. Enhanced Gull-Wing Trip Characteristic
Protective Remote Close (PRC)
Feature
This feature helps address problems
with very lightly loaded network pro-
tectors. If a protector is opened and the
system is very lightly loaded, the users
had to manually close the protector
that had opened. The MPCV can be
sent a PRC communications close
command via any Eaton communication
option available. The PRC command
is not an unqualied close, rather the
MPCV relay relaxes its master line
setting to 75 mV and the command
closes the protector provided the
phase voltage angle is in the widen
close window. After closure, the MPCV
relay automatically readjusts the
master line setting back to the original
master line setting congured in
the relay.
90
RT
0
180
Non-Trip Region
270
Trip Region
5 Tilt
RT/Tan (5)
I
TYP. Forward
VN
IBackfeed
IHigh_Lag
90
RT
0
180
Non-Trip Region
270
Trip Region
5 Tilt
RT/Tan (5)
I
TYP. Forward
VN
IBackfeed
IHigh_Lag
Expanded 5 Gull-Wing
Trip Region
18.0-27
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Communications Capabilities
027
Figure 18.0-22. Circular Closing Curve
Note: If the phases are crossed on both
the transformer and the network side, V2P
could be very close to or equal to zero, but
the trip contact will close as V1N is less than
0.1 P.U. and V1P is less than 0.8 P.U.
The other closing curve characteristic
option available is the circular line
closing curve which maintains the
same value of phasing volts from
the 25 to +90 quadrants (refer to
Figure 18.0-22). The circular closing
curve permits the network protector
to close at lower loads while ensuring
the watt ow is into the network.
Any close conditions must exist for
500 ms before the close contact
will close.
Figure 18.0-23. Closing Characteristics
Straight Closing
If the network side is de-energized,
and the transformer side is energized,
the close contact will close, if V1N is
less than 0.1 P.U., and V2N is less than
0.06 P.U., and V1P exceeds 0.8 P.U.
Note that, as stated before, if V2P
Figure 18.0-24. PRCStraight Line Close
Figure 18.0-25. PRCCircle Close
exceeds 0.2 P.U., then the trip contact
will close, indicating crossed phases
on either the transformer side or the
network side.
Settings
All settings can be altered through a
digital programming pendant which
plugs into the unit while mounted on
the network protector breaker. When
not in use, the pendant may be stored
separate from any network protector
location, most conveniently with the
network protector test kit. While the
pendant is plugged in, actual trip and
close operations will be inhibited and
the amber oat light will ash. The
pendant has a display for the readout
of the set points and a keyboard to
set them.
Factory default settings are programmed
into each MPCV network relay, however,
each project and protector application
represents different voltage and
loading conditions, which can require
adjustment of the default settings to
other appropriate values. Experienced
service technicians must be used
when commissioning protectors, and
proper tools such as protector test sets
and programming pendants must be
used to start up protectors and maintain
the units.
Relay settings can also be implemented
via PowerNet software, which allows
for the full use of the communication
features of the MPCV network relay
as described on the following pages.
Non-Eaton communication protocols
may be able to interface with a sub-
network of MPCV relays through a data
concentrator and an independently
written and supplied driver.
90
~75 mV
0
180
270
Temporary (10 sec)
PRC Boundary
VPX
Straight Line Close Characteristic
25
PL
Close Region
ML
V
N
VP
PRC
PRC
Normal ML,
PL Re-close Settings
90
~75 mV
0
180
270
VPX
Circle Close Characteristic
25
PL1
Close Region
ML
V
N
VP
PL2
Temporary (10 sec)
PRC Boundary
PRC
PRC
Nornal ML, PL1,
PL2 Re-close Settings
18.0-28
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
MPCV Network Relay Communications
028
Control and Monitoring
Capabilities from MPCV
Network Relays
Proven PowerNet and Power Xpert

software, developed by Eaton, pro-
vides an operator with the capability to
control network protectors from a per-
sonal computer while simulta-
neously monitoring power quality and
operating conditions, providing this
information in real time.
PowerNet software is a user-friendly,
Microsoft

Windows
-based program
that allows the operator to point and
click through the screens. Standard
software screens are appropriate for
most applications but can be customized
to meet your individual requirements.
Power Xpert is a Web-based informa-
tion gathering system that uses only
Ethernet browsers and IP addresses to
display data. No custom or proprietary
vendor software is required.
Sample Set Point Screen
Monitoring
PowerNet and Power Xpert provides
energy management, operations and
equipment status information, and
offers the operator these capabilities:
Real-time information. The operator
commands an inquiry to each MPCV
Relay on the system which logs
current, voltage, power (watts,
vars and VA), energy, frequency,
demand, power factor, and total
harmonic distortion (THD). This
information is displayed on a
single screen
Also displayed on this screen is
network protector inside air temper-
ature. Additionally, from the same
screen, the operator can select to
view the last trip waveform or
review the MPCV Relay set points
Data printout. Real-time information
from all MPCV Relays on any one
feeder can be printed out to provide
a near instantaneous load ow of
the entire feeder
Internal environment of the net-
work protector enclosure. Water
inside the network housing and
upper copper bus temperatures.
Breaker status (open/closed)
Vault environment. Transformer
top oil temperature, water in the
network vault, re alarm, and
network enclosure pressure
Sample Monitoring Screen
Control
PowerNet provides multiple network
protectors controlled from a remote
location and allows the following
capabilities:
Close or trip the breaker relay
contacts. If the operator chooses to
have the breakers relay trip contact
make, the breaker opening can
be viewed on-screen and listed
currents will go to zero. A designed-
in safety feature prevents the
network protector from being closed
while the MPCV Relay trip contact is
made until the relay trip response
is removed
Relay set points. The operator can
review or change the operational set
points without using the hand-held
controlling pendant. Password
protected security helps prevent
accidental or improper usage
Alarming
Eaton software provides the operator
with these capabilities:
Receive an alarm in real time.
When an established parameter
of a monitoring function is reached
or exceeded, an alarm condition is
displayed immediately on the PC
screen, enabling the operator to:
Identify the vault or feeder in
question
Determine what alarm has been
triggered and at what location
Power Xpert is a Web-based
approach to communications
without proprietary vendor software
For more information, visit the
URLs below:
www.eaton.com/powerxpert
www.eaton.com/pxm
www.eaton.com/pxgx
www.eaton.com/pxs
www.eaton.com/pxr
18.0-29
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
MPCV Network Relay Communications
029
Other Communication Protocols
Eaton has introduced two new
communications options for the MPCV
relay, those being the VaultGard,
and the DNP MINT.
VaultGard
VaultGard
This device server can display up to
32 MPCV relays on one screen. The
protocol is Ethernet and/or DNP 3.0.
Devices can be connected in various
communication congurations, such as
hardwired LAN or wireless, including
short-range wireless from module
(100m), cellular modem and hot spot
zone connect ability.
The server is simple to connect and
requires no software, only Internet
Explorer. The system displays real
time voltage and current readings,
PF, watts, temperature, open/close
status, relay set points and MPCV relay
control-remote open and block open,
protective remote close (PRC). The
device can log up to 32 MPCV relay
data and provide MPCV reason
code outputs.
No software needed!wireless Wi-Fi
or hardware Ethernet connection
Object trending
Operations counter
Wireless control and calibration
color coded alarms
E-mail notication (with cellular,
hot spot or ethernet connection
conguration)
Automatically discovers connected
MPCVs
Reason code display
No new relay to purchase
128 bit security
Data logging
DNP 3.0, up and down link
DNP 3.0 RS-485
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet
DNP MINT Translator
DNP MINT Translator
The DNP MINT allows connection of
up to 16 devices, including MPCV
relays, DT810 and DT910 trip units,
DT OPTIM, DT 520MC, DT1150, DT3000,
DTMV, DT3200, DP-4000, DIM digital
input module, and addressable relays.
The output is DNP3.0 in RS-485.
The DNP MINT can be congured
either hardwired, ber optic, 900 MHz
radio, or cellular.
Up to 16 MPCVs or other devices
can be connected to one module
RS-485 uplink allows networking
multiple DNP MINTs
Toggle switch controlled
conguration mode
Class 0 polling and Class 1, 2, 3
events supported
Direct operate or select and operate
remote control
Can be hardwired or wirelessly
viewed
Simple twisted pair to MPCVs can
be run up to 10,000 feet
18.0-30
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Communications Congurations
030
Figure 18.0-26. Conguration #1Cellular with DNP
Figure 18.0-27. Conguration #2Wireless Sites/Digital Communication Links
Antenna
Serial DNP
Communications Enclosure
120 Vac
Multiple MPCVs!
Cellular
DNP-RTM
Power Supply
120 Vac12/48 Vdc
MPCV
Network
Protector 4
MPCV
Network
Protector 3
MPCV
Network
Protector 2
MPCV
Network
Protector 1
Twisted Pair INCOM Cable
VaultGard
Pocket PC
Fiber
or
Wireless RF
or
Ethernet
or
Cellular
Laptop or
PC
18.0-31
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CM52 Protector Schematic
031
Figure 18.0-28. Typical Schematic DiagramCM52 Network Protector 480Y/277V
Transformer
3-
DO Power
C B A
Network
TB-14
50
50
TS
A-9
51
TB-15
1
2
5
V
a
c
CPT
CLF
X4
X5
X2
L3
G1
X1
1
2
0
V
a
c
B-11
1
2
TA (-)
2C
1C
3C
0C
A-6
A-4
V
13C
5
11
15
11C
C
P
M
CL6 M1
T2
T1
B-1
B-2
T3
B-3
T3
T1
T2
17
C
12
T43
V
M
T42
P
7
T41
N2
N3
N1 A-1
TS
C
N43
13
V
Connector on Relay
N42
N41
M
18
P
6
AUXb
52b
Legend:
BF-2 = Anti-Close/Lockout Relay
CL = Close Coil/Spring Release
TS = Test Switch
LS1
MOT = Motor 120 Vac
= Network Relay
IDM = Indicating Diagnostic Module
Notes:
L1
IDM
J
1
-
4
A-13
T1
T3
Customer Auxiliary
Breaker Contacts
TB-16
D1a
TB-17
D1b
TB-18
D1c
N11
N12
N13
N1
N2
N3
T11
T13
G
T12
TB-20 TB-19
D2a
TB-21
D2c
30A
30A
30A
30A
30A
30A
G1
T3C
Remote
Trip
B-7 B-8 A-12
J2-1
Common
J2-2
Close
Enabled
J2-3
Motor
OK
J2-4
Coil
OK
J2-5
TA
OK
J1-2
M
o
to
r
M
o
n
ito
r
C
lo
s
e
O
u
tp
u
t
T
r
ip
In
p
u
t
A-14
A-15
CL1
CL5
TR1
TR2
1
3
BF1
L1
B-25
B-26
B-27
TB-28
2
4
A-11 A-10
TB-1
TB-2
A-8
B-4 B-5 B-29
TB-22
A-30
D3a
TB-23 TB-24
D3c
CL9
EL
TA = Trip Actuator
43 = Ext. handle Switch
52a = BKR Aux(Open When Breaker Is Open)
BF-1 = Close Relay
EL = Electrical Interlock
AUX b
Close
43
TA
3-CT
52 a
AUX a AUX b
52 b
AUX b
52 b 52 a
LS1
Trip
MPCV
BF2
BF1
52 a
AUX b
52 b
LS1
LS2
52a
A
S
A
A
S
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
1. Trip and Lockout Provisions: for remote trip, wire external N.O.
contact to position 2 block and position 1 block.
must not exceed 24 Vac/dc 1020 MA.
Electrical interlock manufactured after September of 2003.
See Note 2 N.C. Dry Contacts for Monitoring.
18.0-32
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Network Disconnect Cabinet
032
Network Disconnect Cabinet
Typical Network Disconnect
Neutral Connection Visible
Typical Network Disconnect
with Doors Open
Network disconnects are an important
safety item for spot network systems.
Many forms of disconnect are available,
including downstream main breakers
and non-loadbreak disconnects at the
top of the network protector. This page
describes the non-loadbreak product.
Network disconnect means on the load
side of each protector is necessary to
allow safe access to the protector and
protector fuses in the circuit. These
fuses are on the load side of the
protector and are still energized from
the downstream network when a given
protector is opened. Safe access to the
fuses requires some form of network
disconnect means, as outlined above.
Eaton recommends the use of a network
disconnect means for each protector on
all spot network systems. The choice is
up to the owner or designer based
upon costs and available space. The
non-loadbreak product from Eaton is a
hook-stick, gang operated mechanism.
The non-loadbreak design allows for
easier Open-Close operations from the
oor at the front of the unit compared
to loadbreak designs. The protector, not
the disconnect, is always used to break
and make load current. The mechanism
is behind electrically interlocked cabinet
doors, which when opened, trips open
the protector. Common ratings are
8004000A, 600 Vac and below.
The cabinet designs are NEMA 1 indoor
only. The protector has a ange at the
top which allows for the mounting
of the disconnect at the top of each
respective protector. In many cases, it is
possible to locate current transformers
within the network disconnect cabinet
to provide for forward 50/51 protection
(relays mounted remotely) on the
network circuits. These relays serve to
monitor the circuit and trip the network
protector when faults occur within the
power circuit feeding the downstream
spot network switchgear.
In some cases, it is possible to locate
the protector fuses within the cabinet.
Eaton designs, manufactures and tests
the non-loadbreak disconnects at the
same factory that makes the network
protectors, and the plant is ISO 9000
certied. Product electrical and dimen-
sional coordination is ensured between
the protectors and network disconnects
with Eaton. Due to the mounting location,
the network disconnects are seated at
high distances from the oor and suf-
cient vertical space must exist in the
electrical room to accommodate the
non-loadbreak product.
The load conductor cables or busway
are connected at the top of each network
disconnect. The drawings detailed on
this page depict a busway ange and
connection. When busway is used,
only two ange orientations are
preferred and those align the busway
phase conductors with the A, B, C left
to right orientation of the protector
phase conductors.
Figure 18.0-29. Typical 3000A Non-Loadbreak Disconnect Mounted on a Network Protector
0.50 All-thread rod must be used for hanging as permanent support from overhead.
Disconnect enclosure cabinet: interior and exterior surfaces receive ANSI-61 Cationic Epoxy
Electrocoat grey nish over phosphatized 12 gauge steel. The interior of main module is then
nished gloss white.
Three-point cover latching mechanism between the two hinged front covers.
Dimensions for the neutral connection from disconnect cabinet to X/O on transformer must be
supplied by contractor.
Current transformers mounted inside cubicle. CT ratio and class per customers specications.
Extension
Rail
Stored
Location
of Track
Ext.
Padlock Provision
on Hinged
Exterior Covers
Roll Out
Unit
Removable Cover
on Fuse Housing
1.75 (44.5) D
Lift Hole
Pow-R-Way Busway
(Flange Gasket Supplied by Busway)
See Busway Drawing
Inspection
Window
Four Lifting/
Drop Brackets
Welded to Each Corner
of Main Module
Hinged Exterior Doors
Cover Latch

Network
Protector
In. Pipe Plug (2)
C
L
Trans.
Throat
C
L
C
L
18.0-33
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Network Transition Box
033
Network Transition Box
Network transition boxes are used at
the top of protectors when the network
disconnect takes a form other than the
non-loadbreak disconnect explained
on the previous page. Two other forms
of disconnect are available, including
downstream main breakers and down-
stream fused drawout fuse trucks.
This page describes the transition
box product.
Network disconnect means on the
load side of each protector is neces-
sary to allow safe access to the protec-
tor and protector fuses in the circuit.
These fuses are on the load side of the
protector and are still energized from
the downstream network when a given
protector is opened. Safe access to the
fuses requires some form of network
disconnect means, as outlined above.
Eaton recommends the use of a
network disconnect means for each
protector on all spot network systems.
The decision to use a main breaker or
drawout fuse truck implies that the
protector circuit does not use the
non-loadbreak disconnect, perhaps
due to the lack of space at the top of
the protector. The downstream discon-
nect is usually key interlocked with the
network protector, especially when the
disconnect is the drawout fuse truck.
The area at the top of the protector
becomes a transition area to connect
to cables or busway. Common ratings
for transition boxes are 8004000A,
600 Vac and below.
The transition box designs are NEMA 1
indoor and NEMA 3R outdoor only.
The protector has a ange at the
top which allows for the mounting of
the transition box at the top of each
respective protector. In many cases it
is possible to locate current transform-
ers within the network transition to
provide for forward 50/51 protection
(relays mounted remotely) on the
network circuits. These relays serve
to monitor the circuit and trip the
network protector when faults occur
within the power circuit feeding the
downstream spot network switchgear.
Eaton designs, manufactures and tests
transition boxes the same factory that
makes the network protectors, and
the plant is ISO 9000 certied. Product
electrical and dimensional coordination
is ensured between the protectors and
transition boxes with Eaton.
The load conductor cables or busway
are connected at the top of each transi-
tion box. The drawings detailed on this
page depict a busway ange and con-
nection. When busway is used, several
ange orientations are preferred and
those align the busway phase conduc-
tors with the A, B, C left to right orienta-
tion of the protector phase conductors.
Figure 18.0-30. Typical 1875A Network Transition Box Mounted on a Network Protector
Eaton
Bus Flange
Current
Transformer
Network
Protector
Inspection
Window
Stored
Location of
Track Ext.
Extension
Rail
Roll Out Unit
NPL Type
Silver
Sand
Fuses
C
L
1.75 (44.5) D
Lift Hole
Bolt-on
Front Cover
Removable
Fuse Housing
Cover
Removable
Front Cover
1.00 (25.4) In. Pipe Plug (2)
C
L
Trans.
Throat
18.0-34
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Rating Selection
Spot Network Equipment Selector Guide
034
Selector Guide
Figure 18.0-31 illustrates the general
conguration of the network equip-
ment for Tables 18.0-9 through 18.0-12
equipment values. For three-unit spot
networks, the fourth transformer/pro-
tector pair and load L4 bus and load do
not exist. For 2-unit spot networks, the
third and fourth transformer/protector
pairs and load L3 and L4 buses
and loads do not exist. Tables 18.0-9
through 18.0-12 are developed for
systems anticipating only one primary
feeder outage, and secondary voltage
is 480 wye or 208 wye respectively.
Table 18.0-8. CM52 Protector Features
Strongly recommended for spot network

applications. Used optional pre-charge
energy mechanism on two transformer spot
networks.
NPL fuses can be mounted in epoxy

enclosures or network disconnect cabinets.
Features CM52
Continuous current
ratings in amperes
8004500A
Operating mechanism Spring close
Close and latch
rating available
Yes
Mechanism withdrawal Drawout
Mechanical life (no. ops) 10,000
Withdrawn construction Deadfront
Protector fuse type Silver- sand
NPL type
Fuse location External
Protector trip device Shunt trip

Dielectric test passed 2200V
UL label Yes
Figure 18.0-31. Spot Network Congurations
Table 18.0-9. Spot Network Equipment Ratings for Liquid Transformers
480V Secondaries Liquid Transformers (Including Oil and Silicone) OA 55C Rise
with 138% Short Time Capacity (Up to 24 Hours for Probable Sacrice of 1% Life)
Table 18.0-10. Spot Network Equipment Ratings for Dry Transformers
480V Secondaries Dry-Type Transformers (Including VPI, VPE and Cast Coil) AA/FA 80C Rise
with 150% Overload Capacity (Continuous when Fan Cooling is Active and Ambient is 30C)
Total Network
TX kVA Nominal
TL = Load kVA
(Maximum for
One PRI Outage)
TX = Network TX
kVA (55C Liquid)
NP = Protector
Ampacity
at 480V
LV Switchgear Tie
Breaker Frame/
Trip Amperes
Two-Unit Spot Network TL = L1+L2 and L3 = L4 = 0TX3 and TX4 are Absent
1000
1500
2000
690
1035
1380
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
800/800AT
1600/1200AT
1600/1600AT
3000
4000
5000
2070
2760
3450
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
3200/2200AT
4000/3200AT
4000/4000AT
Three-Unit Spot Network TL = L1+L2+L3 and L4 = 0TX4 is Absent
1500
2250
3000
1380
2070
2760
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
800/800AT
1600/1200AT
1600/1600AT
4500
6000
7500
4140
5520
6900
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
3200/2200AT
4000/3200AT
4000/4000AT
Four-Unit Spot Network TL = L1+L2+L3+L4All TXs are Present
2000
3000
4000
2070
3105
4140
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
800/800AT
1600/1200AT
1600/1600AT
6000
8000
10000
6210
8280
10350
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
3200/2200AT
4000/3200AT
4000/4000AT
Total Network
TX kVA Nominal
TL = Load kVA
(Maximum for
One PRI Outage)
TX = Network TX
kVA (80C Dry)
NP = Protector
Ampacity
at 480V
LV Switchgear Tie
Breaker Frame/
Trip Amperes
1000
1500
2000
750
1125
1500
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
1600/1000AT
1600/1400AT
2000/1600AT
3000
4000
5000
2250
3000
3750
1500
2000
2500
2825
3500
4500
3200/2600AT
4000/3200AT
4000/4000AT
1500
2250
3000
1500
2250
3000
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
1600/1000AT
1600/1400AT
2000/1600AT
4500
6000
7500
4500
6000
7500
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
3200/2600AT
4000/3200AT
4000/4000AT
2000
3000
4000
2250
3375
4500
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
1600/1000AT
1600/1400AT
2000/1600AT
6000
8000
10000
6750
9000
11250
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
3200/2600AT
4000/3200AT
4000/4000AT
LOADS
L1
LOADS
L2
LOADS
L3
LOADS
L4
TL = L1 + L2 + L3 + L4 = Total Network Load kVA
TX1
NP1
Tie
TX2
NP2
Tie
TX3
NP3
Tie
TX4
NP4
18.0-35
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Rating Selection
Spot Network Equipment Selector Guide
035
Table 18.0-11. Spot Network Equipment Ratings for Liquid Transformers216Y or 208Y Secondaries Liquid Transformers
(Including Oil and Silicone) OA 55C Rise with 138% Short Time Capacity (Up to 24 Hours for Probable Sacrice of 1% Life)
For the listed table Total Load values (TL) protector ratings are not available. However, protector ratings are available through 5000A, which will
support reduced TL (Total Load) values of 1871 kVA, 3742 kVA and 5613 kVA for 2-, 3-, and 4-unit spot networks, respectively at 216Y volt secondary
(4% less load values are supported if 208Y is the system voltage).
Note: NA indicates that spot networks are not available.
Table 18.0-12. Spot Network Equipment Ratings for Dry Transformers216Y or 208Y Secondaries Dry Transformers (Including VPI, VPE
and Cast Coil) AA/FA 80C Rise with 150% Overload Capacity (Continuous when Fan Cooling is Active and Ambient is 30C)
For the listed table Total Load values (TL) protector ratings are not available. However, protector ratings are available through 5000A, which will
support reduced TL (Total Load) values of 1871 kVA, 3742 kVA and 5613 kVA for 2-, 3-, and 4-unit spot networks, respectively at 216Y volt secondary
(4% less load values are supported if 208Y is the system voltage).
Note: NA indicates that spot networks are not available.
Total Network
TX kVA Nominal
TL = Load kVA (Maximum
for One PRI Outage)
TX = Network TX kVA
(55C Liquid)
NP = Protector
Ampacity at 216 or 208V
LV Switchgear Tie Breaker
Frame/Trip Amperes
1000
1500
2000
690
1035
1380
500
750
1000
2000
3000
4500
2000/1900AT
3200/2800AT
4000/4000AT
3000
4000
5000
2070
2760
3450
1500
2000
2500
N/A
N/A
5000/5000AT
N/A
N/A
1500
2250
3000
1380
2070
2760
500
750
1000
2000
3000
4500
2000/1900AT
3200/2800AT
4000/4000AT
4500
6000
7500
4140
5520
6900
1500
2000
2500
N/A
N/A
5000/5000AT
N/A
N/A
2000
3000
4000
2070
3105
4140
500
750
1000
2000
3000
4500
2000/1900AT
3200/2800AT
4000/4000AT
6000
8000
10000
6210
8280
10350
1500
2000
2500
N/A
N/A
5000/5000AT
N/A
N/A
Total Network
TX kVA Nominal
TL = Load kVA (Maximum
for One PRI Outage)
TX = Network TX kVA
(80C Dry)
NP = Protector
Ampacity at 216 or 208V
LV Switchgear Tie Breaker
Frame/Trip Amperes
1000
1500
2000
750
1125
1500
500
750
1000
2250
3500
4500
2000/1900AT
3200/3100AT
4000/4000AT
3000
4000
5000
2250
3000
3750
1500
2000
2500
N/A
N/A
5000/5000AT
N/A
N/A
1500
2250
3000
1500
2250
3000
500
750
1000
2250
3500
4500
2000/1900AT
3200/3100AT
4000/4000AT
4500
6000
7500
4500
6000
7500
1500
2000
2500
N/A
N/A
5000/5000AT
N/A
N/A
2000
3000
4000
2070
3105
4140
500
750
1000
2250
3500
4500
2000/1900AT
3200/3100AT
4000/4000AT
6000
8000
10000
6210
8280
10350
1500
2000
2500
N/A
N/A
5000/5000AT
N/A
N/A
18.0-36
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Rating Selection
Protector Application Information
036
Protector Application Information
Table 18.0-13. Transformer and Protector Combinations and Protector RatingsCM52 Protectors
The interrupting rating exceeds the available fault current from the transformer.
The short time rating of protectors without fuses equals the interrupting rating.
Note: Use this table and its equipment ratings when designing network systems where the protectors are rated lower or higher, as a
percentage of the full load amperes of the transformers, than those selected in the Tables 18.0-9 through 18.0-12. This table is also useful
when selecting equipment ratings for systems that anticipate more than one single primary outage, e.g., when two outages are expected
on a four-transformer spot network.
Network Transformer Network Protectors
Transformer
Nameplate
kVA Rating
Full Load Current
rms Amperes
Continuous
Current Rating
rms Amperes
Protector Rating
as % of Transformer
Full Load Current
Interrupting Rating in
rms Symmetrical
Amperes
Close and Latch Rating

in rms Symmetrical
Amperes
System Voltage = 216Y/125 or 208Y/120
225
300
500
600
800
1333
800
1200
1600
133
150
120
42,000
42,000
42,000
35,000
35,000
35,000
500
500
500
1333
1333
1333
1875
2000
2250
141
150
169
42,000
42,000
65,000
35,000
35,000
45,000
750
750
1000
2000
2000
2667
2500
2825
3000
125
141
112
65,000
65,000
65,000
45,000
45,000
45,000
1000
1000
2667
2667
3500
4500
131
169
85,000
85,000
65,000
65,000
System Voltage = 480Y/277
500
750
1000
600
900
1200
800
1200
1600
133
133
133
42,000
42,000
42,000
35,000
35,000
35,000
1000
1000
1000
1200
1200
1200
1875
2000
2250
158
167
188
42,000
42,000
65,000
35,000
35,000
45,000
1500
1500
2000
1800
1800
2400
2500
2825
3000
139
157
125
65,000
65,000
65,000
45,000
45,000
45,000
2000
2500
2500
2400
3000
3000
3500
4500
5000
145
150
167
85,000
85,000
85,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
18.0-37
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Liquid-Type Network Unit Dimensions
037
Dimensions
Figure 18.0-32. Liquid Network Unit Dimensions and Weights, Indoor Design
Note: Dimensions are approximate for silicone lled network transformers and are typical for the ratings indicated. Designs can be customized
to t into existing spaces in many instances, although at higher cost. Speciers are encouraged to consult Eaton to facilitate special existing
conditions.
Table 18.0-14. Liquid NetworkDimensions in Inches (mm)
Protector selected at 480V per Table 18.0-9 recommendations.
Consult Eaton for network disconnect information. If disconnect is remote from this location, then the transition box at top of protector is
30.0036.00 inches (762.0914.4 mm) above protector ange.
Table 18.0-15. Liquid NetworkWeights in Lb (kg)
Weights for transformers include the uid weight.
The number of gallons of liquid includes the uid inside the primary switch.
Network
Equipment
DimensionsRefer to Plan and Front View Figures Above
TX
kVA
NP

Amps
HT HP HL HN H WT WP W DN DD D
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
64 (1625.6)
67 (1701.8)
77 (1955.8)
49 (1244.6)
50 (1270.0)
54 (1371.6)
40 (1016.0)
43 (1092.2)
54 (1371.6)
52 (1320.8)
55 (1397.0)
66 (1676.4)
106 (2692.4)
109 (2768.6)
120 (3048.0)
50 (1270.0)
53 (1346.2)
56 (1422.4)
34 (863.6)
34 (863.6)
34 (863.6)
102 (2590.8)
105 (2667.0)
108 (2743.2)
32 (812.8)
32 (812.8)
32 (812.8)
34 (863.6)
34 (863.6)
34 (863.6)
42 (1066.8)
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
83 (2108.2)
90 (2286.0)
93 (2362.2)
57 (1447.8)
61 (1549.4)
63 (1600.2)
55 (1397.0)
65 (1651.0)
67 (1701.8)
69 (1752.6)
74 (1879.6)
90 (2286.0)
123 (3124.2)
62 (1574.8)
66 (1676.4)
68 (1727.2)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
42 (1066.8)
116 (2946.4)
122 (3098.8)
128 (3251.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
48 (1219.2)
34 (863.6)
55 (1397.0)
63 (1600.2)
68 (1727.2)
Network
Equipment
Weights in
Lbs (kg)
Liquid Gallons
(Liters)
TX
kVA
NP
Amps
Network TX
Protector NP Network Disconnect Network TX
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
7800 (3541)
10,600 (4812)
11,400 (5176)
850 (386)
850 (386)
850 (386)
250 (114)
300 (136)
350 (159)
220 (833)
250 (946)
320 (1211)
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
16,100 (7309)
21,000 (9534)
24,000 (10,896)
1200 (545)
1450 (658)
1500 (681)
400 (182)
500 (1893)
600 (2271)
700 (2650)
D
32
(812.0)
SW
18
(457.2)
WP
TX
Plan View
ND
NP
DN
DD
HP HL
NP
TX
SW HT
ND
HN
12
(304.8)
H
Front
Liquid
Transformer
Legend:
SW = Primary
TX = Network Transformer (Silicone filled)
NP = Network Protector
ND = Network Disconnect (Non-loadbreak)
Front View
WT
Neutral
W All dimensions are shown in Tables 18.0-14
and 18.0-15.
18.0-38
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Dry-Type Network Unit Dimensions
038
Figure 18.0-33. Dry-Type Network Unit Dimensions and Weights, Indoor Design
Note: Dimensions and weights are for standard VPI or VPE Dry-Type designs, 80C rise with fans with 150% continuous overload capacity and
aluminum windings. Copper windings add more weight. Primary voltage is 15 kV, 95 kV BIL insulation.
Table 18.0-16. Dry-Type NetworkDimensions in Inches (mm)
Dimensions for overall width include a bussed transition20.00 inches (508.0 mm) on the primary. This 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) section may be
eliminated by using cable connections to primary bushing in lieu of buswork.
Table 18.0-17. Dry-Type NetworkWeights in Lbs (kg)
Dimensions and weights are for standard VPI or VPE Dry-Type designs, 80C rise with fans with 150% continuous overload capacity and aluminum
windings. Copper windings add more weight. Primary voltage is 15 kV, 95 kV BIL insulation.
Protector stand carries the weight of the protector, since the dry-type end sheets do not have the strength to support the weight of the protector.
Consult Eaton for network disconnect information. If disconnect is remote from this location then the transition box at top of protector is
Legend:
SW= Primary
TX = Network Transformer (Silicone filled)
NP = Network Protector
ND = Network Disconnect (Non-loadbreak)
SW
TX
HP
HL
NP
TX SW
HT
ND
Front
Dry Type
Transformer
Plan View Front View
ND
NP
DD D
W
20
(508.0)
WT
DN
Front
HN
H
Front
Dry Type
Transformer
18 (457.2)
WP
Neutral
36
(914.4)
12
(304.8)
Network
Equipment
TX
kVA
NP

Amps
HT HP HL HN H WT WP W
DN DD D
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
102 (2590.8)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
56 (1422.4)
56 (1422.4)
56 (1422.4)
69 (1752.6)
69 (1752.6)
69 (1752.6)
123 (3124.2)
123 (3124.2)
123 (3124.2)
90 (2286.0)
102 (2590.8)
102 (2590.8)
34 (863.6)
34 (863.6)
34 (863.6)
180 (4572.0)
192 (4876.0)
192 (4876.0)
32 (812.8)
32 (812.8)
32 (812.8)
34 (863.6)
34 (863.6)
34 (863.6)
66 (1676.4)
66 (1676.4)
66 (1676.4)
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
102 (2590.8)
112 (2844.8)
120 (3048.0)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
60 (1524.0)
64 (1625.6)
66 (1676.4)
75 (1905.0)
81 (2057.4)
90 (2286.0)
129 (3276.6)
102 (2590.8)
124 (3149.6)
130 (3302.0)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
42 (1066.8)
194 (4927.6)
218 (5537.2)
226 (5740.4)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
48 (1219.2)
34 (863.6)
66 (1676.4)
66 (1676.4)
66 (1676.4)
Network
Equipment
Weights in
Lbs (kg)
TX
kVA
NP
Amps
Primary SW + Fuses Network TX
Protector NP + Stand
Network ND Disconnect
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
5600 (2542)
6700 (3042)
8450 (3836)
950 (431)
950 (431)
950 (431)
250 (114)
300 (136)
350 (159)
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
10,150 (4608)
13,150 (5970)
16,000 (7264)
1330 (604)
1550 (704)
1600 (726)
400 (182)

18.0-39
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
Dry-Type Network UnitSwitchgear Mounted Protector Dimensions
039
Figure 18.0-34. Dry-Type Network Unit Dimensions and Weights, Indoor Design with Switchgear Mounted Protector
Note: Dimensions and weights are for standard VPI or VPE Dry-Type designs, 80C rise with fans with 150% continuous overload capacity
and aluminum windings. Copper windings add more weight. Primary voltage is 15 kV, 95 kV BIL insulation.
Table 18.0-18. Dry-Type with Switchgear Mounted ProtectorDimensions in Inches (mm)
Primary transition section 20.00 inches (508.0 mm) in width may be eliminated by using cable interconnections. Elimination of transition reduces
width by 20.00 inches (508.0 mm).
Dimensions are approximate for low voltage switchgear construction. Close-coupling to switchgear structures with main and feeders will
require 72.0078.00 inch (1828.81981.2 mm) depth depending upon the type of feeders used, fused or nonfused. When switchgear is remote,
using cable or busway connections, the depth of the protector section can be reduced to 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm).
Table 18.0-19. Dry-Type with Switchgear Mounted ProtectorWeights in Lbs (kg)
Dimensions and weights are for standard VPI or VPE Dry-Type designs, 80C rise with fans with 150% continuous overload capacity and
aluminum windings. Copper windings add more weight. Primary voltage is 15 kV, 95 kV BIL insulation.
HP
NP
TX
SW
HT
Legend:
= Primary
TX etwork Transformer (Silicone filled)
r
ND
(1) Tr
s
(2) = Protector Structure May Be Close-Coupled To
Switchgear Without Transition
Front View
Dry Type TT
Transformer
(1)
HN
Switchgear
Mounted
(2)
H
To
Switchgear
DP
NP
TX
SW
Plan View
Dry Type TT
Transformer
-
Voltage
Switchgear
(2)
D
Front
W
WT
66
(1676.4)
36
(914.4)
20
(508.0)
(1)
Network
Equipment
TX
kVA
NP
Amps
HT HP HN H WT W
DP D
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
102 (2590.8)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
96 (2438.4)
96 (2438.4)
96 (2438.4)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
102 (2590.8)
102 (2590.8)
102 (2590.8)
102 (2590.8)
228 (5791.2)
228 (5791.2)
228 (5791.2)
66 (1676.4)
66 (1676.4)
66 (1676.4)
78 (1981.2)
78 (1981.2)
78 (1981.2)
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
102 (2590.8)
112 (2844.8)
112 (2844.8)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
90 (2286.0)
96 (2438.4)
96 (2438.4)
96 (2438.4)
102 (2590.8)
112 (2844.8)
112 (2844.8)
112 (2844.8)
112 (2844.8)
112 (2844.8)
238 (6045.2)
238 (6045.2)
238 (6045.2)
66 (1676.4)
66 (1676.4)
66 (1676.4)
78 (1981.2)
78 (1981.2)
84 (2133.6)
Network
Equipment
Weight in
Lbs (kg)
TX
kVA
NP
Amps
Primary SW
Including Power Fuses
Network Transformer
TX
Low Voltage Switchgear

and Protector NP
500
750
1000
1200
1600
1875
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
5600 (2542)
6700 (3042)
8450 (3836)
4000 (1816)
4000 (1816)
4000 (1816)
1500
2000
2500
2500
3500
4500
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
2000 (908)
10,150 (4608)
13,150 (5970)
15,600 (7082)
4400 (1998)
4600 (2088)
4600 (2088)
18.0-40
September 2011
Sheet 18
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
040


September 2011

Contents

Distribution Dry-Type TransformersLow Voltage
19.0-1

Sheet

19

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

001

D
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

D
r
y
-
T
y
p
e
T
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r
s
L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e


Glossary of Transformer Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.0-2

The Energy Policy Act of 2005. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.0-5

General Description/Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.1-1

Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.1-5

General Purpose Encapsulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.1-8

K-Factor Rated for Nonlinear Loads (KT Type) TP-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.1-11

Harmonic Mitigating (HMT Type) TP-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.1-12

NEMA TP-1 Energy Efcient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.1-16

Energy Efcient (CSL-3 Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.1-17

Motor Drive Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.1-18

Hazardous Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.1-19

MiniPower Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.1-20

FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.1-35
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Dry-Type Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16461 26 22 13

MiniPower Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16463 26 27 00.11
Further Information

Volume 2Commercial Distribution

2011, Tab 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CA08100003E
Eatons Family of Dry-Type Distribution Transformers
19.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

19

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Glossary

002

Glossary of Transformer Terms

Air cooled:

A transformer that is
cooled by the natural circulation of air
around, or through, the core and coils.

Ambient noise level:

The existing
or inherent sound level of the area
surrounding the transformer, prior to
energizing the transformer. Measured
in decibels.

Ambient temperature:

The temperature of the air surround-
ing the transformer into which the
heat of the transformer is dissipated.

Ampacity:

The current-carrying
capacity of an electrical conductor
under stated thermal conditions.
Expressed in amperes.

Ampere:

The practical unit
of electric current.

Attenuation:

A decrease in signal
power or voltage. Unit of measure
is dB.

Autotransformer:

A transformer in
which part of the winding is common
to both the primary and the secondary
circuits.

Banked:

Two or more single-phase
transformers wired together to supply
a three-phase load. Three single-phase
transformers can be banked together
to support a three-phase load. For
example, three 10 kVA single-phase
transformers banked together will
have a 30 kVA three-phase capacity.

BIL:

Basic impulse level. The ability of
a transformers insulation system to
withstand high voltage surges. All
Eaton 600V-class transformers have a
10 kV BIL rating.

BTU:

British thermal unit. In North
America, the term BTU is used
to describe the heat value (energy
content) of fuels, and also to describe
the power of heating and cooling
systems, such as furnaces, stoves,
barbecue grills and air conditioners.
When used as a unit of power, BTU
per hour (BTU/h) is understood,
though this is often abbreviated to
just BTU.

Buck-boost:

The name of a
standard, single-phase, two-winding
transformer application with the
low voltage secondary windings
connected as an autotransformer
for boosting (increasing) or bucking
(decreasing) voltages in small
amounts. Applications can either
be single-phase or three-phase.

CE:

Mark to indicate third-party
approved or self-certication to
specic requirements of the
European community.

Celsius (centigrade):

Metric
temperature measure.
F = (1.8 x C) + 32
C = (F-32) / 1.8

Center tap:

A reduced capacity tap
at the mid-point of a winding. The
center tap on three-phase delta-delta
transformers is called a lighting tap.
It provides 5% of the transformers kVA
for single-phase loads.

Certied tests:

Actual values taken
during production tests and certied
as applying to a given unit shipped on
a specic order. Certied tests are
serial numberspecic.

Common mode:

Electrical noise
or voltage uctuation that occurs
between all of the line leads and the
common ground, or between ground
and line or neutral.

Compensated transformer:

A transformer with a turns ratio
that provides a higher than nameplate
output (secondary) voltage at no load,
and nameplate output (secondary)
voltage at rated load. It is common
for small transformers (2 kVA and less)
to be compensated.

Conductor losses:

Losses (expressed
in watts) in a transformer that are
incidental to carrying a load: coil
resistance, stray loss due to stray
uxes in the windings, core clamps,
and the like, as well as circulating
currents (if any) in parallel windings.
Also called load losses.

Continuous duty rating:

The load that
a transformer can handle indenitely
without exceeding its specied
temperature rise.

Core losses:

Losses (expressed in
watts) caused by magnetization of
the core and its resistance to magnetic
ux. Also called no-load losses or
excitation losses. Core losses are
always present when the transformer
is energized.

CSA:

Canadian Standards
Association. The Canadian equivalent
of Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

CSL3:

Candidate Standard Level 3
(CSL3) design criteria developed by
the U.S. Department of Energy. This
term is used when considering the
maximum, practical efciency of a
transformer.

cUL:

Mark to indicate UL Certication
to specic CSA Standards.

Decibel (dB):

Unit of measure used to
express the magnitude of a change in
signal or sound level.

Delta connection:

A standard three-
phase connection with the ends of
each phase winding connected in
series to form a closed loop with each
phase 120 degrees from the other.
Sometimes referred to as three-wire.

Dielectric tests

: Tests that consist of
the application of a voltage higher
than the rated voltage for a specied
time for the purpose of determining
the adequacy against breakdowns of
insulating materials and spacings
under normal conditions.

Dry-type transformer:

A transformer
in which the core and coils are in a
gaseous or dry compound insulating
medium. A transformer that is cooled
by a medium other than a liquid,
normally by the circulation of air.

E3:

Eatons version of a CSL3
transformer.

Eddy currents:

The currents that are
induced in the body of a conducting
mass by the time variation of magnetic
ux or varying magnetic eld.

Efciency:

The ratio of the power
output from a transformer to the
total power input. Typically expressed
as a %.

Electrostatic shield:

Copper or other
conducting sheet placed between
primary and secondary windings,
and grounded to reduce electrical
interference and to provide additional
protection from line-to-line or line-to-
ground noise. Commonly referred to
as Faraday shield.

Encapsulated transformer:

A transformer with its coils either
dipped or cast in an epoxy resin or
other encapsulating substance.

Enclosure:

A surrounding case
or housing used to protect the
contained equipment against external
conditions and prevent personnel
from accidentally contacting live parts.


19.0-3

September 2011


Sheet

19

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Glossary

003

Environmentally preferable product:

A product that has a lesser or reduced
negative effect on human health and
the environment when compared to
competing products that serve the
same purpose. This comparison may
consider raw materials acquisition,
production, manufacturing, packaging,
distribution, reuse, operation,
maintenance and disposal of the
product. This term includes recyclable
products, recycled products and
reusable products.

EPACT:

The Energy Policy Act of
1992 (EPAct) is an important piece of
legislation for efciency because it
established minimum efciency levels
for dry-type distribution transformers
manufactured or imported after
December 2006. EPAct, which was
based on NEMA standards, dened
a number of terms, including what
constitutes an energy-efcient
transformer. The DOE issued a rule
that denes these transformers and
how manufacturers must comply. DOE
EPAct rule (PDF): Energy Efciency
Program for Certain Commercial
and Industrial Equipment: Test
Procedures, Labeling, and the
Certication Requirements for Electric
Motors. Final Rule. 10-CFR Part 431.

Excitation current:

No load current.
The current that ows in any winding
used to excite the transformer when
all other windings are open-circuited.
It is usually expressed in percent of the
rated current of a winding in which it is
measured. Also called magnetizing
current.

FCAN:

Full Capacity Above Nominal
taps. Designates the transformer will
deliver its rated kVA when connected
to a voltage source which is higher
than the rated primary voltage.

FCBN:

Full Capacity Below Nominal
taps. Designates the transformer will
deliver its rated kVA when connected
to a voltage source which is lower than
the rated primary voltage.

Frequency:

On AC circuits, designates
the number of times that polarity
alternates from positive to negative
and back again per second, such as
60 cycles per second. Typically
measured in Hertz (Hz).

Ground:

Connecting one side of
a circuit to the earth through low
resistance or low impedance paths
to help prevent transmitting electrical
shock to personnel.

Harmonic:

A sinusoidal waveform with
a frequency that is an integral multiple
of the fundamental frequency (60 Hz).
60 H

3

fundamental
120 H

3

2nd harmonic
180 H

3

3rd harmonic
240 H

3

4th harmonic

Harmonic distortion:

Nonlinear
distortion of a system characterized
by the appearance of harmonic
(non-sinusoidal) currents in the
output, when the input is sinusoidal.

Harmonic distortion, total (THD):

The
square root of the sum of the squares
of all harmonic currents present in
a load, excluding the fundamental
60 Hz current. Usually expressed as
a percent of the fundamental.

High voltage windings:

In a two-
winding transformer, the winding
intended to have the greater
voltage. Usually marked with
H designations.

HMT:

Harmonic Mitigating
Transformer (HMT) is better able to
handle the harmonic currents present
in todays electrical power system.
thereby increasing system capacity,
reducing distortion throughout a
facility, help to minimize downtime
and mysterious maintenance on
equipment, and return the longevity
of equipment life through reduced
operational energy losses, thereby
running cooler.

Hp:

Horsepower. The energy required
to raise 33,000 pounds a distance of
one foot in one minute. 1 hp is equal
to 746 watts, or 0.746 kW.

Hi pot:

A standard test on dry-type
transformers consisting of extra-high
potentials (voltages) connected to the
windings. Used to check the integrity
of insulation materials and clearances.

Hottest-spot temperature:

The highest
temperature inside the transformer
winding. Is greater than the measured
average temperature of the coil
conductors, when using the
resistance change method.

Hysteresis:

The tendency of a
magnetic substance to persist in
any state of magnetization.

Impedance:

The retarding forces
of current in an AC circuit; the
current-limiting characteristics
of a transformer. Symbol = Z

Inductance:

In electrical circuits, the
opposition to a change in the ow of
electrical current. Symbol = L

Inducted potential test:

A standard
dielectric test of transformer
insulation. Veries the integrity of
insulating materials and electrical
clearances.

Inrush current:

The initial high peak
of current that occurs in the rst few
cycles of energization, which can be
30 to 40 times the rated current.

Insulating transformer:

Another term
for an isolating transformer.

Insulation:

Material with a high
electrical resistance.

Insulation materials:

Those materials
used to insulate the transformers
electrical windings from each other
and ground.

Integral TVSS or SPD:

Major Standard
Change for Surge Protective Devices
(formerly known as Transient Voltage
Surge Suppressors). The primary
safety standard for transient voltage
surge suppressors (TVSS) has under-
gone major revisions in the past three
years with mandatory compliance by
manufacturers required by September
29, 2009. Even the name of the
standard has changed from UL
Standard for Safety for Transient
Voltage Surge Suppressors, UL 1449
to UL Standard for Safety for Surge
Protective Devices, UL 1449. This
means that TVSS listed to the UL 1449
2nd Edition standard will no longer
be able to be manufactured after
September 29, 2009. All Surge
Protective Devices must be designed,
tested, manufactured and listed to
the UL 1449 3rd Edition standard after
this date.

Isolating transformer:

A transformer
where the input (primary) windings
are not connected to the output
(secondary) windings (i.e., electrically
isolated).

K-factor:

A common industry term for
the amount of harmonics produced by
a given load. The larger the K-factor, the
more harmonics that are present. Also
used to dene a transformers ability
to withstand the additional heating
generated by harmonic currents.

kVA:

Kilovolt-ampere. Designates
the output that a transformer can
deliver for a specied time at a
rated secondary voltage and rated
frequency without exceeding the
specied temperature rise. When
multiplied by the power factor, will
give kilowatts or kW.
1000 VA = 1 kVA
19.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

19

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Glossary

004

Lamination:

Thin sheets of electrical
steel used to construct the core of a
transformer.

Limiting temperature:

The maximum
temperature at which a component
or material may be operated
continuously with no sacrice
in normal life expectancy.

Linear load:

A load where the current
waveform conforms to that of the
applied voltage, or a load where
a change in current is directly
proportional to a change in
applied voltage.

Live part:

Any component consisting
of an electrically conductive material
that can be energized under conditions
of normal use.

Load losses:

I

2

R losses in windings.
Also see conductor losses.

Low voltage winding:

In a two-
winding transformer, the winding
intended to have the lesser voltage.
Usually marked with X designations.

Mid-tap:

See center tap.

Noise level:

The relative intensity of
sound, measured in decibels (dB).
NEMA Standard ST-20 outlines the
maximum allowable noise level for

Nonlinear load:

A load where the
current waveform does not conform to
that of the applied voltage, or where a
change in current is not proportional
to a change in applied voltage.

Non-ventilated transformer:

A transformer where the core and
coil assembly is mounted inside
an enclosure with no openings for
ventilation. Also referred to as totally
enclosed non-ventilated (TENV).

No load losses:

Losses in a
transformer that is excited at rated
voltage and frequency but that is
not supplying a load. No load losses
include core losses, dielectric losses
and conductor losses in the winding
due to the exciting current. Also
referred to as excitation losses.

Overload capability:

Short-term
overload capacity is designed into
transformers as required by ANSI.
Continuous overload capacity is
not deliberately designed into a
transformer because the design
objective is to be within the allowed
winding temperature rise with
nameplate loading.

Percent IR (% resistance):

Voltage drop
due to resistance at rated current in
percent of rated voltage.

Percent IX (% reactance):

Voltage drop
due to reactance at rated current in
percent of rated voltage.

Percent IZ (% impedance):

Voltage
drop due to impedance at rated
current in percent of rated voltage.

Phase:

Type of AC electrical circuit;
usually single-phase two- or three-wire,
or three-phase three- or four-wire.

Polarity test:

A standard test
on transformers to determine
instantaneous direction of the
voltages in the primary compared
to the secondary.

Primary taps:

Taps added to the
primary (input) winding. See Tap.

Primary voltage:

The input circuit
voltage.

Power factor: The cosine of the phase
angle between a voltage and a current.
Ratio test: A standard test of
transformers to determine the ratio
of the input (primary) voltage to the
output (secondary) voltage.
Reactance: The effect of inductive
and capacitive components of a
circuit producing other than unity
power factor.
Reactor: A single winding device with
an air or iron core that produces a
specic amount of inductive reactance
into a circuit. Normally used to reduce
of control current.
Regulation: Usually expressed as
the percent change in output voltage
when the load goes from full load to
no load.
Scott T connection: Connection for
three-phase transformers. Instead of
using three sets of coils for a three-
phase load, the transformer uses only
two sets of coils.
Series/multiple winding: A winding
consisting of two or more sections that
can be connected for series operation
or multiple (parallel) operation. Also
called series-parallel winding.
Short circuit: A low resistance
connection, usually accidental,
across part of a circuit, resulting in
excessive current ow.
Sound levels: All transformers make
some sound mainly due to the
vibration generated in its core by
alternating ux. All Eaton general-
purpose dry-type distribution
transformers are designed with
sound levels lower than NEMA ST-20
maximum levels.
Star connection: Same as a wye
connection.
Step-down transformer: A transformer
where the input voltage is greater than
the output voltage.
Step-up transformer: A transformer
where the input voltage is less than
the output voltage.
T-T connection: See Scott T
connection.
Tap: A connection brought out of
a winding at some point between
its extremities, usually to permit
changing the voltage or current ratio.
Taps are typically used to compensate
for above or below rated input voltage,
in order to provide the rated output
voltage. See FCAN and FCBN.
Temperature class: The maximum
temperature that the insulation system
of a transformer can continuously
withstand. The common insulation
classes are 105, 150, 180 (also 185)
and 220.
Temperature rise: The increase over
ambient temperature of the windings
due to energizing and loading the
transformer.
Total losses: The sum of the no-load
losses and load losses.
Totally enclosed non-ventilated
enclosure: The core and coil assembly
is installed inside an enclosure
that has no ventilation to cool the
transformer. The transformer relies
on heat to radiate from the enclosure
for cooling.
Transformer tests: Per NEMA ST-20,
routine transformer production tests
are performed on each transformer
prior to shipment. These tests are:
Ratio tests on the rated voltage
connection; Polarity and Phase
Relation tests on the rated connection;
No-Load and Excitation Current tests
at rated voltage on the rated voltage
connection and Applied Potential and
Induced Potential tests. Special tests
include sound level testing.
19.0-5
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Glossary and The Energy Policy Act of 2005
005
Transverse mode: Electrical noise
or voltage disturbance that occurs
between phase and neutral, or from
spurious signals across metallic hot
line and the neutral conductor.
Turns ratio: The ratio of the number
of turns in the high voltage winding
to that in the low voltage winding.
Typical test data: Tests that were
performed on similar units that were
previously manufactured and tested.
UL (Underwriters Laboratories):
An independent safety testing
organization.
Universal taps: A combination of six
primary voltage taps consisting of 2 at
+2-1/2% FCAN and 4 at -2-1/2% FCBN.
Watt: A unit of electrical power when
the current in a circuit is one ampere
and the voltage is one volt.
Wye connection: A standard three-
wire transformer connection with
similar ends of single-phase coils
connected together. The common
point forms the electrical neutral point
and may be grounded. Also referred to
as three-phase four-wire. To obtain the
line-to-neutral voltage, divide the line
voltage by .
The Energy Policy Act of 2005
The Energy Policy Act of 2005 and the
resulting Federal Law 10 CFR Part 431
require that efciency of low voltage
dry-type distribution transformers
manufactured after January 1, 2007
shall be no less than the efciency
levels listed in Table 4-2 of NEMA
Standard TP-1-2002. Transformers
specically excluded for the scope of
this law include:
Transformers rated less than 15 kVA
Transformers with a primary or
secondary voltage greater than
600V
Transformers rated for operation at
other than 60 Hz
Transformers with a tap range
greater than 20%
Motor drive isolation transformers
Rectier transformers
Autotransformers
Transformers that supply
Uninterruptible Power Supplies
Special impedance transformers
Regulating transformers
Sealed and non-ventilated
transformers
Machine tool transformers
Welding transformers
Grounding transformers
Testing transformers
Repaired transformers
3 1.732 ( )
19.0-6
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
006
19.1-1
September 2011
Distribution Dry-Type Transformers
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Overview
General Description/Product Overview
007
Energy-Efcient
Transformers
NEMA TP-1 Energy-Efcient
Ventilated Transformer
Eatons family of energy-efcient
transformers meet NEMA TP-1
efciency requirements and federal
energy efciency laws mandated
by the Energy Policy Act of 2005.
Distribution transformers installed in
the United States are required to meet
these energy efciency requirements.
Energy-efcient transformers are
especially designed to have low no
load (core) losses. Minimum efciency
levels have been established for these
transformers when loaded at 35% of
their full load capacity. Available 600V.
Eaton offers a wide variety of energy-
efcient transformers, including 150C,
115C or 80C; general purpose or
K-factor rated; with aluminum or
copper windings. Eatons energy-
efcient transformers are manufac-
tured with a NEMA 2 enclosure
as standard, and are suitable for
installation outdoors when a NEMA 3R
weathershield kit is installed. Eatons
energy-efcient transformers use a
220C insulation system with 150C
temperature rise as standard.
Installation of energy-efcient
transformers may help facilities
earn points toward LEED
certication
from the U.S. Green Building Council.
Refer to Page 19.1-16 for additional
information.
K-Factor Rated Nonlinear
Transformers
Eaton K-Factor nonlinear transformers
are specically designed to withstand
the harmful overheating effects caused
by harmonics generated by nonlinear
(non-sinusoidal) loads. These loads
include computers, laser printers,
copiers and other ofce equipment,
as well as video monitors and other
electronic equipment. The core and
coils of K-Factor transformers are
especially designed to have reduced
induction levels, which result in a
reduction in stray losses. Oversized
(200% rated) neutrals and electrostatic
shielding are provided as standard on
K-Factor transformers. Eaton K-Factor
transformers are available in ratings
with a K-factor of 4, 13, 20, 30, 40 and
50. 600V-class single-phase models
are available to 167 kVA; three-phase
ratings to 1500 kVA. Eatons family of
K-Factor transformers are manufactured
with the same high-quality construction
features as our ventilated transformer
products, including NEMA 2 enclosures
and the 220C (Class R) insulation
system with 150C temperature rise
as standard.
information. Eaton K-Factor rated
transformers comply with NEMA
TP-1 standards.
Harmonic Mitigating
Transformers
Harmonic Mitigating
Eatons harmonic mitigating trans-
formers (HMTs) are specially designed
transformers that treat a wide variety
of harmonics. Also called phase-
shifting transformers, their low zero-
sequence impedance wye zig-zag
secondary windings prevent harmful
triplen (3rd, 9th, 15th, etc.) harmonic
currents from coupling into the primary
delta, where they can progress
upstream to the service entrance.
Multiple HMTs with a variety of phase-
shift congurations can be applied in
a coordinated scheme to target 5th,
7th, and higher order harmonics at
the common bus feeding all of the
transformers. HMTs are ideally suited
for installations rich in harmonic loads,
such as educational facilities (K-12
and universities), government,
commercial, medical and call-center
applications. HMTs are manufactured
with the same high-quality features
as Eatons ventilated transformers,
including NEMA 2 enclosures and the
220C (Class R) insulation system with
150C temperature rise as standard.
Additionally, Eatons HMTs are
manufactured with a 200% neutral
and electrostatic shield as standard.
information.
HMTs are available in four
congurations:
Type NON (0 phase-shift)
Type THR (30)
Type POS (+15)
Type NEG (15)
Available in three-phase ratings to
500 kVA and 600V. All Eaton HMTs
meet or exceed NEMA TP-1 efciency
levels, when operated under either
linear or nonlinear load proles Eaton
HMT transformers comply with NEMA
TP-1 standards.
19.1-2
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Overview
008
Motor Drive Isolation
Transformers
Eatons motor drive isolation trans-
formers are especially designed for
three-phase, SCR-controlled, variable-
speed motor drive load proles. Sized
by horsepower and common motor
voltages, motor drive isolation trans-
formers are braced to withstand the
mechanical stresses associated with
AC adjustable frequency drives or
DC drives. Available in three-phase
ventilated designs to 1500 hp and
600V. Epoxy encapsulated three-phase
designs are available to 20 hp. Motor
drive isolation transformers are
manufactured using the same high-
quality construction features as our
ventilated transformer products,
Epoxy encapsulated models have
NEMA 3R enclosures and 115C
temperature rise as standard. All Eaton
three-phase motor drive isolation
transformers include a normally
open dry contact temperature sensor
installed in the coils. This sensor can
be connected to provide advance alert
or warning of a potential overheating
of the transformer.
information.
Read the text on Page 19.0-5 on
the Energy Policy Act of 2005 before
specifying these units. These units are
exempt from NEMA TP-1 requirements.
Hazardous Location
Transformers
Hazardous Location Transformers
Eatons hazardous location
transformers are suitable for use in
environments classied by the 2002
and 2005 National Electrical Code

(NEC
) as Class I, Division 2, Group C

or D, as dened by NEC Article
501,when installed in compliance with
NEC-recommended procedures for
dry-type transformers rated 600V and
below. As dened by NEC Article 500,
Class I, Division 2 locations include
atmospheres that may contain
volatile or ignitable concentrations
of ammable liquids or gas vapors,
or locations adjacent to such
environments. Acetone, ammonia,
benzene, gasoline, methane, propane
and natural gas are examples of
such substances. Eatons hazardous
location transformers are of the
encapsulated design, and are available
up to 600V ratings. Single-phase
ratings 0.05 kVA through 37.5 kVA;
three-phase ratings to 75 kVA.
Hazardous location transformers use
a 180C insulation system with 115C
temperature rise. All Eaton hazardous
location transformers are provided
with explosion-proof connections.
information.
MiniPower Center
MiniPower Center
An Eaton minipower center replaces
three individual components:
Primary main breaker
Transformer
Distribution loadcenter.
The minipower center combines
all three into a single unit. All inter-
connecting wiring is performed at the
factory. Minipower centers are ideally
suited for applications where 120V
is required at a remote location.
Parking lots, workbenches and
temporary power on construction
sites are common applications for
minipower centers. Available in
single-phase and three-phase ratings
to 600V, 100A, and 30 kVA with
secondary loadcenters with
provisions for up to 24 single-pole
branch breakers. Available with
aluminum bus and plug-on branch
breakers, or with copper bus and
bolt-on branch breakers.
Minipower centers incorporate an
encapsulated transformer in their
construction, and are NEMA 3R
rated for outdoor applications.
information.
19.1-3
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Overview
009
Shielded Isolation
Transformers
Shielded Isolation Ventilated Transformer
Eatons shielded isolation transformers
are typically installed where sensitive
loads such as input circuits of
computers, medical equipment and
microprocessors require additional
protection from high-frequency
electrical disturbances. Shielded
isolation transformers include an
electrostatic shield (Faraday shield)
installed between the primary and
secondary windings. This shield is
grounded to the core of the transformer
to attenuate high-frequency electrical
disturbances in the load from being
transmitted to the line side of the
transformer. Shielded isolation
transformers are available in all
sizes and ratings of encapsulated and
ventilated transformers. By design,
all K Factor and harmonic mitigating
transformers include an electrostatic
shield as standard.
specifying these units.
Marine Duty
Transformers
Marine-Duty Ventilated Transformer
Eatons marine-duty transformers are
Type Approved by the American
Bureau of Shipping (ABS) for on-board
use in steel vessels (not for propulsion
systems or combat vessels). These
transformers are typically installed
below deck in electrical or mechanical
rooms where the ambient temperature
is greater than normal. Eatons marine-
duty transformers are especially
designed for operation in 50C
ambient locations. Marine-duty rated
transformers are manufactured
with copper windings as standard.
Encapsulated designs are available in
single-phase ratings 0.05 kVA through
37.5 kVA; three-phase designs 15 kVA
through 75 kVA. Ventilated designs are
available in single-phase ratings of
15 kVA through 100 kVA; three-phase
designs 15 kVA through 300 kVA.
Encapsulated and ventilated models
are available up to 600V ratings. The
standard temperature rise of Eatons
marine-duty transformers is 115C.
specifying these units.
Buck-Boost and Low Voltage
Lighting Transformers
Buck-Boost Transformers
Eatons buck-boost transformers are
ideally suited to applications where
the available voltage needs to be
slightly increased (boosted) or
decreased (bucked) to be used in
a specic application. When buck-
boost transformers are wired as
autotransformers, they can be used
to accomplish this bucking or boosting
of voltage. Buck-boost transformers
are single-phase encapsulated
transformers and are available in
three voltage combinations;
120 x 24012/24
120 x 24016/32
240 x 48024/48
...and are available in 0.05 kVA through
7.5 kVA. These transformers can also
be used at their nameplate voltages
for applications such as low voltage
interior or landscape lighting.
19.1-4
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Overview
010
CSL-3 Transformers
CSL-3 Transformer
Eaton CSL-3 transformers have the
highest efciencies and the lowest
losses of any type of unit. Copper or
aluminum windings are available in
15 kVA through 300 kVA ratings. Units
are available with temperature rise of
115 or 150C rise.
Eaton CSL-3 transformers are more
efcient than NEMA P-1 by 34%38%.
Using CSL-3 units lowers the carbon
footprint of a facility and assists with
LEED
certication.
information on CSL-3 transformers.
19.1-5
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General Purpose Ventilated Transformers
Description
011
General Construction
Features of General Purpose
(TP-1, K-Factor TP-1 and HMT
TP-1) Ventilated Transformers
Rated 600V and below
General Description
Eatons single-phase and three-phase
general purpose dry-type ventilated
transformers are of the two-winding
type, self-cooled, and are available in a
wide variety of primary and secondary
voltage combinations.
Eatons transformers are designed,
manufactured and tested in accordance
with all of the latest applicable ANSI,
NEMA and IEEE standards. All 600V
class ventilated transformers with
ratings through 1500 kVA are UL

listed and bear the UL label. Open
core and coil assemblies are UR
labeled products.
These transformers are designed for
continuous operation at rated kVA for
24 hours a day, 365 days a year, with
normal life expectancy as dened in
ANSI C57.96.
Insulation System
Industry standards classify insulation
systems and temperature rise as
shown below.
Table 19.1-1. Insulation System Classied
The design life of transformers having
different insulation systems is the
same; the lower temperature systems
are designed for the same life as the
higher temperature systems.
Eatons ventilated transformers,
regardless of their temperature rise,
are manufactured using a 220C
insulation system. Required
performance is obtained without
exceeding the insulation system
rating at rated temperature rise in
a 40C maximum ambient, with an
average ambient temperature of 30C
over a 24-hour period.
All insulation materials used are
ame-retardant and do not support
combustion as dened in ASTM
Standard Test Method D635.
Core and Coil Assemblies
The transformer core is constructed
using high-grade, non-aging, silicon
steel with high magnetic permeability,
and low hysteresis and eddy current
losses. Maximum magnetic ux
densities are substantially below
the saturation point. The transformer
core volume allows for efcient
transformer operation at 10% above
the nominal tap voltage. The core
laminations are tightly clamped and
compressed. Coils are wound of
electrical grade aluminum or copper,
and are of continuous wound
construction. The BIL (basic impulse
level) for all 600V-class windings is
10 kV. The core and coil assembly is
installed on vibration-absorbing pads.
Ventilated transformers with wye-
connected secondaries have the
neutral brought out to a separate XO
terminal or bus bar.
The core and coil assembly is
grounded to the transformer enclosure
by means of a visible exible copper
ground strap. The copper ground
strap is sized per the NEC to be a
grounding conductor.
Ambient
Temperature
+ Winding
Rise
+ Hot
Spot
= Temp.
Class
40C
40C
40C
80C
115C
150C
30C
30C
30C
150C
185C
220C
19.1-6
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Ventilated Transformers
Description
012
Taps
Primary taps are available on most
Eaton ventilated transformers to
allow compensation for source
voltage variations.
Winding Terminations
Primary and secondary windings are
terminated in the wiring compartment.
Encapsulated units have copper leads
or stabs brought out for connections.
Ventilated transformers have leads
brought out to aluminum or copper
pads that are pre-drilled to accept
Cu/Al lugs. Aluminum-wound trans-
formers have aluminum pads; copper-
wound transformers have copper
pads. Lugs are not supplied with Eaton
transformers; however, lug kits are
available as a eld-installed accessory.
Eaton recommends external cables be
rated 90C (sized at 75C ampacity) for
encapsulated designs and rated 75C
for ventilated designs.
Series-Multiple Windings
Series-multiple windings consist of
two similar coils in each winding that
can be connected in series or parallel
(multiple). Transformers with series-
multiple windings are designated with
an x or a / between the voltage
ratings, such as voltages of 240 x 480
or 120/240. If the series-multiple
winding is designated by an x,
the winding can be connected only
in series or parallel. With a /
designation, a mid-point also becomes
available in addition to the series or
parallel connection. As an example, a
240 x 480 winding can be connected
for either 240 (parallel) or 480 (series).
A 120/240 winding can be connected
for either 120 (parallel) or 240 (series),
or 240 with a 120 mid-point.
Enclosures
The transformer enclosure is made of
heavy-gauge steel and is nished using
a continuous process of degreasing,
cleaning and phosphatizing, followed
by electrostatic deposition of a thermo-
setting polyester powder coating and
subsequent baking. The coating color
is ANSI 61 and is UL recognized for
outdoor use. In compliance with
NEMA ST-20, Eatons ventilated
transformers are designed such that
the maximum temperature on the top
of the enclosure does not exceed 50C
rise above the ambient temperature.
For ventilated transformers, the enclo-
sure construction is ventilated, drip-
proof, NEMA 2, with lifting provisions.
All ventilation openings are protected
against falling dirt. Proper installation
of weathershields on ventilated trans-
formers makes the enclosure NEMA
3R rated and suitable for outdoor use.
To ensure proper ventilation and cool-
ing of the transformer, follow manu-
facturers recommended clearances
around ventilation openings.
Installation Clearances
Eatons transformers should be
installed with a minimum of 6 inches
of clearance around the transformer
enclosure to prevent accidental contact
with ammable or combustible mate-
rials. Most Eaton ventilated transform-
ers require a minimum of 6 inches of
clearance in front and in back of the
transformer to allow for proper airow
through the transformer. Care should
be taken to avoid restricting the
airow through the bottom of the
transformer.
Transformers should be located in
areas not accessible to the public.
Sound Levels
All transformers emit some audible
sound due mainly to the vibration
generated in their core by alternating
ux. NEMA ST-20 denes the
maximum average sound levels
for ventilated transformers.
Table 19.1-2. NEMA ST-20 and IEEE C57.12.01
Maximum Audible Sound Levels for 600V
Class Transformers (dB 40)
All Eaton ventilated transformers are
designed to have audible sound levels
lower than those required by NEMA
ST-20. However, consideration should
be given to the specic location of a
transformer and its installation to
minimize the potential for sound
transmission to surrounding
structures and sound reection.
Installation and ambient conditions
at a specic location can result in eld-
measured audible sound levels as
much as 15 dBA greater than those
levels measured in a sound-proof
chamber. The following installation
methods should be considered:
1. If possible, mount the transformer
away from corners of walls or
ceilings. For installations that
must be near a corner, use
sound-absorbing materials on
the walls and ceiling if necessary
to eliminate reection.
2. Provide a solid foundation for
mounting the transformer and
use vibration dampening mounts
if not already provided in the
transformer. Eatons ventilated
transformers contain a built-in
vibration dampening system to
minimize and isolate sound
transmission. However,
supplemental vibration
dampening mounts installed
between the oor and the
transformer may provide
additional sound dampening.
3. Make electrical connections to the
transformer using exible conduit.
4. Locate the transformer in an
area where audible sound is not
offensive to building inhabitants.
5. If a transformer is going to be
installed in a location where
the audible sound could be
objectionable, consider installing
a transformer specically
designed to have reduced
sound levels. Eaton offers
many transformers with a
sound reduction up to 5 dB
below NEMA ST-20 limits.
kVA Ventilated
Transformers
Encapsulated
Transformers
09
1050
51150
151300
40
45
50
55
45
50
55
57
301500
501700
7011000
10011500
60
62
64
65

19.1-7
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Ventilated Transformers
Description
013
Applicable Standards
600V-class ventilated transformers
are manufactured per the following
standards:
UL 1561
NEMA ST-20
ANSI C57.12.01
IEC 60726 for CE-marked ventilated
models
Seismic Qualication
Standard Production Tests
The following production tests are
performed as standard on all Eaton
transformers, prior to shipment:
1. Ratio tests at the rated voltage
connection and at all tap
connections.
2. Polarity and phase relation tests
on the rated voltage connection.
3. Applied potential tests.
4. Induced potential tests.
5. No-load and excitation current at
rated voltage on the rated voltage
connection.
Operation
Eatons ventilated transformers are
designed for continuous operation at
rated kVA for 24 hours a day, 365 days
a year, with normal life expectancy as
dened in ANSI C57.96.
Short-term overload capacity is
designed into transformers, as required
by ANSI. Ventilated transformers will
deliver 200% of nameplate load for
30 minutes; 150% of nameplate load
for 1 hour; and 125% of nameplate load
for 4 hours without being damaged,
provided that a constant 50% load
precedes and follows the overload.
Refer to ANSI C57.96-01.250 for
additional limitations.
Note: Continuous overload capacity is not
deliberately designed into transformers.
The design objective is to be within the
allowable winding temperature rise at
nameplate full load capacity.
However, because Eatons ventilated
transformers are manufactured using a
220C insulation system, 115C and
80C low temperature rise transformers
can be operated as 150C rise trans-
formers. The excess thermal capacity
of these low temperature rise trans-
formers allows a 115C transformer to
be operated as a 150C rise transformer
and overloaded by 15% of its name-
plate kVA without compromising
the normal life of the transformer.
Likewise, an 80C rise transformer
operated as a 150C rise transformer
is capable of a constant 30% overload
without compromising the normal life
expectancy of the transformer.
Table 19.1-3. Rated Line Amperes for kVA and Voltages of Single-Phase Transformers
Note: Line Current = (kVA x 1000)/Line Voltage.
Table 19.1-4. Rated Line Amperes for kVA and Voltages of Three-Phase Transformers
Note: Three-Phase Line Current = (kVA x 1000)/(Line Voltage x 1.732).
kVA
Rating
Rated Line Voltage
120 208 240 277 480 600 2400 4160 4800
1
1.5
2
3
8.3
12.5
16.7
25.0
4.8
7.2
9.6
14.4
4.2
6.3
8.3
12.5
3.6
5.4
7.2
10.8
2.1
3.1
4.2
6.3
1.7
2.5
3.3
5.0
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.3
0.2
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.6
5
7.5
10
15
41.7
62.5
83.3
125.0
24.0
36.6
48.1
72.1
20.8
31.3
41.7
62.5
18.0
27.1
36.1
54.2
10.4
15.6
20.8
31.3
8.3
12.5
16.7
25.0
2.1
3.1
4.2
6.3
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.6
1.0
1.6
2.1
3.1
25
37.5
50
75
208.3
312.5
416.7
625.0
120.2
180.3
240.4
360.6
104.2
156.3
208.3
312.5
90.3
135.4
180.5
270.8
52.1
78.1
104.2
156.3
41.7
62.5
83.3
125.0
10.4
15.6
20.8
31.3
6.0
9.0
12.0
18.0
5.2
7.8
10.4
15.6
100
167
250
333
500
833.3
1391.7
2083.3
2775.0
4166.7
480.8
802.9
1201.9
1601.0
2403.8
416.7
695.8
1041.7
1387.5
2083.3
361.0
602.9
902.5
1202.2
1805.1
208.3
347.9
520.8
693.8
1041.7
166.7
278.3
416.7
555.0
833.3
41.7
69.6
104.2
138.8
208.3
24.0
40.1
60.1
80.0
120.2
20.8
34.8
52.1
69.4
104.2
kVA
Rating
Rated Line Voltage
208 240 480 600 2400 4160 4800
3
6
9
8.3
16.7
25.0
7.2
14.4
21.6
3.6
7.2
10.8
2.9
5.8
8.7
0.7
1.4
2.2
0.4
0.8
1.3
0.4
0.7
1.1
15
30
45
41.6
83.3
125.0
36.1
72.2
108.4
18.0
36.1
54.2
14.4
28.9
43.3
3.6
7.2
10.9
2.1
4.2
6.3
1.8
3.6
5.4
75
112.5
150
208.2
312.5
416.3
180.4
271.6
360.8
90.2
135.3
180.4
72.2
108.2
144.3
18.0
27.1
36.1
10.4
15.6
20.8
9.0
13.5
18.0
225
300
500
625.0
832.7
1387.8
541.9
721.7
1202.8
270.7
360.8
601.4
216.5
288.7
481.1
54.2
72.2
120.3
31.3
41.6
69.4
27.1
36.1
60.1
750
1000
2081.9
2775.8
1804.3
2405.7
902.1
1202.9
721.7
962.3
180.4
240.6
104.1
138.8
90.2
120.3
19.1-8
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General Purpose Encapsulated Transformers
Description
014
General Construction
Features of General Purpose
Encapsulated Transformers
Rated 600V and Below
General Description
Eatons single-phase and three-phase
general purpose encapsulated dry-type
transformers are of the two-winding
type, self-cooled, and are available in a
wide variety of primary and secondary
voltage combinations.
Eatons transformers are designed,
manufactured and tested in accordance
with all of the latest applicable ANSI,
NEMA and IEEE standards. All 600V-
class encapsulated transformers with
ratings through 75 kVA are UL listed
and CSA certied, and bear the UL and
CSA labels.
These transformers are designed for
continuous operation at rated kVA for
24 hours a day, 365 days a year, with
normal life expectancy as dened in
ANSI C57.96.
Insulation Systems
Industry standards classify insulation
systems and temperature rise as
shown below.
Table 19.1-5. Insulation System Classication
The design life of transformers having
different insulation systems is the
same; the lower temperature systems
are designed for the same life as
the higher temperature systems.
Eatons encapsulated transformers are
manufactured using a 180C insulation
system. Required performance is
obtained without exceeding the
insulation system rating at rated
temperature rise in a 40C maximum
ambient, with an average ambient
temperature of 30C over a 24-hour
period.
All insulation materials are ame-
retardant and do not support
combustion as dened in ASTM
Standard Test Method D635.
Core and Coil Assemblies
The transformer core is constructed
using high-grade, non-aging, silicon
steel with high-magnetic permeability,
and low hysteresis and eddy current
losses. Maximum magnetic ux
densities are substantially below
the saturation point. The transformer
core volume allows for efcient
transformer operation at 10% above
the nominal tap voltage. The core
laminations are tightly clamped
and compressed. Coils are wound
of electrical grade aluminum or
copper, and are of continuous wound
construction. The BIL (basic impulse
level) for all 600V-class windings
is 10 kV. In encapsulated transformers,
the core and coil assembly is
completely encased in a proportioned
mixture of resin or epoxy, and
aggregate to provide a moisture-
proof, shock-resistant seal. The core
and coil encapsulation system is
designed to minimize the audible
sound level.
Ambient
Temperature
+
Winding
Rise
+
Hot
Spot
=
Temp.
Class
40C
40C
25C
40C
40C
55C
80C
135C
115C
150C
10C
30C
20C
30C
30C
105C
150C
180C
185C
220C
19.1-9
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Description
015
Taps
Primary taps are available on many
Eaton encapsulated transformers
to allow compensation for source
voltage variations.
Winding Terminations
Primary and secondary windings are
terminated in the wiring compartment.
Encapsulated units have copper leads
or stabs brought out for connections.
Ventilated transformers have leads
brought out to aluminum or copper
pads that are pre-drilled to accept
Cu/Al lugs. Aluminum-wound trans-
formers have aluminum pads; copper-
wound transformers have copper
pads. Lugs are not supplied with
Eatons transformers; however, lug
kits are available as a eld-installed
accessory. Eaton recommends exter-
nal cables be rated 90C (sized at 75C
ampacity) for encapsulated designs
and rated 75C for ventilated designs.
Series-Multiple Windings
Series-multiple windings consist
of two similar coils in each winding
that can be connected in series or
parallel (multiple). Transformers with
series-multiple windings are desig-
nated with an x or a / between the
voltage ratings, such as voltages of
240 x 480 or 120/240. If the series-
multiple winding is designated by an
x, the winding can be connected
only in series or parallel. With a /
designation, a mid-point also becomes
available in addition to the series or
parallel connection. As an example, a
240 x 480 winding can be connected
for either 240 (parallel) or 480 (series).
A 120/240 winding can be connected
for either 120 (parallel) or 240 (series),
or 240 with a 120 mid-point.
Enclosures
The transformer enclosure is made of
heavy-gauge steel and is nished using
a continuous process of degreasing,
cleaning and phosphatizing, followed
by electrostatic deposition of a thermo-
setting polyester powder coating and
subsequent baking. The coating color
is ANSI 61 and is UL recognized for
outdoor use. In compliance with
NEMA ST-20, Eatons transformers
are designed such that the maximum
temperature on the top of the enclosure
does not exceed 50C rise above the
ambient temperature.
For encapsulated transformers, the
enclosure construction is totally-
enclosed, non-ventilated NEMA 3R,
with lifting provisions.
Wall mounting brackets are provided
on many Eaton encapsulated trans-
formers. These mounting brackets
are designed to provide the proper
spacing between the mounting surface
and the transformer enclosure.
To ensure proper ventilation and
cooling of the transformer, follow
manufacturers recommended
clearances around encapsulated
transformers.
Sound Levels
All transformers emit some audible
sound due mainly to the vibration gen-
erated in their core by alternating ux.
NEMA ST-20 denes the maximum
average sound levels for ventilated
transformers, and IEEE C57.12.01
denes the maximum average sound
level for encapsulated transformers.
Table 19.1-6. NEMA ST-20 and IEEE C57.12.01
Maximum Audible Sound Levels for 600V
Class Transformers (dB 40)
All Eaton encapsulated transformers
are designed to have audible sound
levels lower than those required by
IEEE C57.12.01. However, consider-
ation should be given to the specic
location of a transformer and its
installation to minimize the potential
for sound transmission to surrounding
structures and sound reection.
Installation and ambient conditions at
a specic location can result in eld-
measured audible sound levels as
much as 15 dBA greater than those
levels measured in a sound-proof
chamber. The following installation
methods should be considered:
1. If possible, mount the transformer
away from corners of walls or
ceilings. For installations that
must be near a corner, use sound-
absorbing materials on the
walls and ceiling if necessary
to eliminate reection.
2. Provide a solid foundation for
mounting the transformer and
use vibration-dampening mounts
if not already provided in the
transformer. Eatons encapsulated
transformers use a special
encapsulation system to minimize
and isolate sound transmission.
However, supplemental vibration
dampening mounts installed
between the oor and the
transformer may provide for
3. Make electrical connections to the
transformer using exible conduit.
4. Locate the transformer in an
area where audible sound is not
offensive to building inhabitants.
5. If a transformer is going to be
installed in a location where the
audible sound could be objection-
able, consider installing a trans-
former specically designed to
have reduced sound levels. Eaton
offers many transformers with a
sound reduction up to 5 dB below
IEEE C57.12.01 limits.
kVA Ventilated
Transformers
Encapsulated
Transformers
09
1050
51150
151300
40
45
50
55
45
50
55
57
301500
501700
7011000
10011500
60
62
64
65
19.1-10
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Description
016
Applicable Standards
600V-class encapsulated transformers
are manufactured per the following
standards:
UL 5085 up to 15 kVA
UL 1561 15 kVA and larger
NEMA ST-20
ANSI C57.12.01
IEEE C57.12.01
IEC 61558 for single-phase
CE-marked models
CSA C22.2 No. 47-M90
Seismic Qualication
Standard Production Tests
The following production tests are
performed as standard on all Eaton
transformers, prior to shipment:
1. Ratio tests at the rated voltage
connection and at all tap connections.
2. Polarity and phase relation tests
on the rated voltage connection.
3. Applied potential tests.
4. Induced potential tests.
5. No-load and excitation current at
rated voltage on the rated voltage
connection.
Operation
Eatons encapsulated transformers are
designed for continuous operation at
rated kVA for 24 hours a day, 365 days
a year, with normal life expectancy as
dened in ANSI C57.96.
Short-term overload capacity is
designed into transformers, as required
by ANSI. Encapsulated transformers
will deliver 200% of nameplate load for
30 minutes; 150% of nameplate load
for 1 hour; and 125% of nameplate load
for 4 hours without being damaged,
provided that a constant 50% load
precedes and follows the overload.
Refer to ANSI C57.96-01.250 for
additional limitations.
Note: Continuous overload capacity is not
deliberately designed into transformers
because the design objective is to be within
the allowable winding temperature rise at
nameplate full load capacity.
Table 19.1-7. Rated Line Amperes for kVA and Voltages of Single-Phase Transformers
Note: Line Current = (kVA x 1000)/Line Voltage.
Table 19.1-8. Rated Line Amperes for kVA and Voltages of Three-Phase Transformers
Note: Three-Phase Line Current = (kVA x 1000)/(Line Voltage x 1.732).
kVA
Rating
Rated Line Voltage
120 208 240 277 480 600 2400 4160 4800
1
1.5
2
3
8.3
12.5
16.7
25.0
4.8
7.2
9.6
14.4
4.2
6.3
8.3
12.5
3.6
5.4
7.2
10.8
2.1
3.1
4.2
6.3
1.7
2.5
3.3
5.0
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.3
0.2
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.2
0.3
0.4
0 6
5
7.5
10
15
41.7
62.5
83.3
125.0
24.0
36.6
48.1
72.1
20.8
31.3
41.7
62.5
18.0
27.1
36.1
54.2
10.4
15.6
20.8
31.3
8.3
12.5
16.7
25.0
2.1
3.1
4.2
6.3
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.6
1.0
1.6
2.1
3.1
25
37.5
50
75
208.3
312.5
416.7
625.0
120.2
180.3
240.4
360.6
104.2
156.3
208.3
312.5
90.3
135.4
180.5
270.8
52.1
78.1
104.2
156.3
41.7
62.5
83.3
125.0
10.4
15.6
20.8
31.3
6.0
9.0
12.0
18.0
5.2
7.8
10.4
15.6
100
167
250
333
500
833.3
1391.7
2083.3
2775.0
4166.7
480.8
802.9
1201.9
1601.0
2403.8
416.7
695.8
1041.7
1387.5
2083.3
361.0
602.9
902.5
1202.2
1805.1
208.3
347.9
520.8
693.8
1041.7
166.7
278.3
416.7
555.0
833.3
41.7
69.6
104.2
138.8
208.3
24.0
40.1
60.1
80.0
120.2
20.8
34.8
52.1
69.4
104.2
kVA
Rating
Rated Line Voltage
208 240 480 600 2400 4160 4800
3
6
9
8.3
16.7
25.0
7.2
14.4
21.6
3.6
7.2
10.8
2.9
5.8
8.7
0.7
1.4
2.2
0.4
0.8
1.3
0.4
0.7
1.1
15
30
45
41.6
83.3
125.0
36.1
72.2
108.4
18.0
36.1
54.2
14.4
28.9
43.3
3.6
7.2
10.9
2.1
4.2
6.3
1.8
3.6
5.4
75
112.5
150
208.2
312.5
416.3
180.4
271.6
360.8
90.2
135.3
180.4
72.2
108.2
144.3
18.0
27.1
36.1
10.4
15.6
20.8
9.0
13.5
18.0
225
300
500
625.0
832.7
1387.8
541.9
721.7
1202.8
270.7
360.8
601.4
216.5
288.7
481.1
54.2
72.2
120.3
31.3
41.6
69.4
27.1
36.1
60.1
750
1000
2081.9
2775.8
1804.3
2405.7
902.1
1202.9
721.7
962.3
180.4
240.6
104.1
138.8
90.2
120.3
19.1-11
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
K-Factor Rated Nonlinear Transformers
Description
017
K-Factor Rated Nonlinear
Transformers Rated 600V
and Below
Applications
Eaton K-Factor transformers are
specically designed to withstand the
harmful overheating effects caused by
harmonics generated by nonlinear
(non-sinusoidal) loads. These loads
include computers, laser printers,
copiers and other ofce equipment,
as well as video monitors and other
electronic equipment. Eaton K-Factor
transformers are not simply over-sized
transformers. The core and coils of
our K-Factor transformers are specially
designed to have reduced induction
levels, which results in a reduction in
stray losses. Oversized (200% rated)
neutrals and electrostatic shielding are
typical features found in our K-Factor
transformers. Eaton K-Factor trans-
formers are manufactured with the
same high-quality construction features
as our other ventilated transformer
products, including NEMA 2 enclosures
as standard.
Technical Data
Available Ratings
Eaton K-Factor transformers are
available in a wide range of ratings
to meet specic voltage conversion
requirements. Eaton offers transformers
with K-factor ratings of 4, 13, 20, 30,
40 and 50.
kVA Capacity
Single-phase ventilated designs are
available in ratings from 15 kVA
through 167 kVA; three-phase ratings
15 kVA through 1500 kVA.
Insulation System and Temperature Rise
Ventilated transformers are manufac-
tured using a 220C insulation system
with 150C temperature rise as stan-
dard. Low temperature rise designs
(115C and 80C temperature rise)
are available as options.
Frequency
Most ventilated transformers are
designed to operate in 60 Hz systems.
50/60 Hz designs are available as an
option. Eatons ventilated transformers
can be designed to operate at a variety
of frequencies.
Winding Material
Aluminum conductor and terminations
are provided as standard on ventilated
transformers. Copper winding conduc-
tors and terminations are available as
an option.
Eatons ventilated transformers should
be installed with a minimum of
6.00 inches of clearance around the
transformer enclosure to prevent
accidental contact with ammable or
combustible materials. Most Eaton
ventilated transformers require a
minimum of 6.00 inches of clearance
in front and in back of the transformer
to allow for proper airow through the
transformer. Care should be taken to
avoid restricting the airow through
the bottom of the transformer. Trans-
formers should be located in areas not
accessible to the public.
Wiring Compartment
Eatons ventilated transformers have
wiring compartments sized to comply
with NEMA and NEC standards.
The K-factor
A common industry term for the
amount of harmonics produced by a
given load is the K-factor. The larger
the K-factor, the more harmonics are
present. Linear loads, for example,
have a K-factor of 1. Transformers may
carry a K-factor rating to dene the
transformers ability to withstand
the additional heating generated
by harmonic currents.
Calculating the K-factor
All nonlinear waveforms can be
broken down mathematically into
a fundamental frequency and its
harmonics. IEEE C57.110 establishes
a direct relationship between these
harmonics and transformer heating.
Underwriters Laboratories has
established a similar relationship, the
K-factor, which is derived by summing
the square of the percentage current at
a given harmonic level multiplied by
the square of the harmonic order.
K = (
I
h)
2
(h)
2
Ih = Percent Current at Harmonic h
h = Harmonic Order, i.e., 3rd, 5th, 7th
For example, a load that is 90% of the
fundamental, 30% of the third harmonic,
and 20% of the fth harmonic would
yield (.9)
2
(1)
2
+ (.3)
2
(3)
2
+ (.2)
2
(5)
2
or
a K-factor of 2.62. This load would
require a transformer with a K-factor
rating of 4.
Transformers that carry a K-factor
rating dene the transformers ability to
withstand a given harmonic load while
operating within the transformers
insulation class.
An analysis of harmonic loads and
a calculation of the K-factor must be
made to properly apply transformers
in any building or facility. Note that
the calculated K-factor is not constant
since nonlinear loads change
throughout the day as equipment and
lighting is turned off and on. These
harmonic loads also change over the
life of the building or facility as equip-
ment is added or removed.
Harmonic Currents
Harmonic currents are found in nonlin-
ear loads. These currents are generated
by various types of equipment including
switching mode power supplies that
abruptly switch current on and off during
each line cycle. Switching mode power
supplies or diode capacitor power
supplies convert AC line voltage to low
voltage DC. This process accomplished
by charging capacitors during each line
cycle with narrow pulses of current that
are time-coincident with line voltage
peaks. Examples of this equipment
include electronic ballasts for uorescent
lighting, personal computers, printers,
fax machines, electronic and medical
test equipment uninterruptible power
supplies and solid-state motor drives.
Note: Nonlinear is synonymous with the
term non-sinusoidal.
Figure 19.1-1. Harmonic Currents Found in Nonlinear Loads Cause Wave Shape Distortion and
Create Added Stresses on Transformers
19.1-12
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Harmonic Mitigating Transformers
Description
018
Harmonic Mitigating
and Below
Applications
formers (HMTs) are specially designed
transformers that treat a wide variety
of harmonics. Also called phase-
shifting transformers, their low zero-
sequence impedance wye zig-zag
secondary windings prevent harmful
triplen (3rd, 9th, 15th, etc.) harmonic
currents from coupling into the pri-
mary delta, where they can progress
upstream to the service entrance.
Multiple HMTs with a variety of phase-
shift congurations can be applied in
a coordinated scheme to target 5th,
7th and higher-order harmonics at the
common bus feeding all of the trans-
formers. HMTs are ideally suited for
installations rich in harmonic loads,
such as educational facilities (K12 and
universities), government, commercial,
medical and call-center applications.
HMTs are manufactured with the
same high-quality features as Eatons
ventilated transformers, including
NEMA 2 enclosures and the 220C
(Class R) insulation system with
Additionally, Eatons HMTs are
manufactured with a 200% neutral
and electrostatic shield as standard.
Eatons harmonic mitigating ventilated
transformers are designed primarily
for indoor installations. Ventilated
transformers have NEMA 2 enclosures
as standard, and are suitable for
installation outdoors when NEMA 3R
weathershield kits are installed.
Ventilated transformers are typically
oor-mounted on an elevated
housekeeping pad. When properly
supported, they are also suitable for
wall mounting or trapeze-mounting
from ceilings.
Technical Data
Available Ratings
formers are available in a wide range
of ratings to meet specic voltage
conversion requirements. Eatons
HMTs accept a three-phase three-wire
input and have a three-phase four-wire
(phases and neutral) output.
kVA Capacity
Three-phase ratings 15 kVA through
500 kVA.
formers are manufactured using a
temperature rise as standard. Low
temperature rise designs (115C and
80C temperature rise) are available as
options.
Frequency
formers are designed to operate in
60 Hz systems. 50/60 Hz designs are
available as an option. The transformers
can be designed to operate at a variety
of frequencies.
Winding Material
Copper conductor and terminations
are provided as standard on harmonic
mitigating transformers. Aluminum
winding conductors and terminations
are available as an option.
formers should be installed with a
minimum of 6.00 inches of clearance
around the transformer enclosure
to prevent accidental contact with
ammable or combustible materials.
Most Eaton ventilated transformers
require a minimum of 6.00 inches of
clearance in front and in back of the
transformer to allow for proper airow
through the transformer. Care should
be taken to avoid restricting the
airow through the bottom of the
transformer.
Wiring Compartment
Eatons ventilated transformers have
with NEMA and NEC standards.
Thermal Sensors
Harmonic mitigating transformers are
available with warning and/or alarm
thermal sensors imbedded in their coils.
Thermal sensors are normally open dry
contacts that can be wired to provide
a signal to remote locations to indicate
a potential heating problem within the
transformer coils. Contacts are rated
180C (warning) and 200C (alarm).
Application Considerations
Eaton offers harmonic mitigating
transformers with four different phase-
shift options:
Type NON (0 phase-shift)
Type POS (+15 phase-shift)
Type NEG (15 phase-shift)
Type THR (30 phase-shift)
To select the proper HMT, the
nonlinear load prole of a particular
application must be known.
Type NON (0) HMTs are ideally
suited for treating 3rd and other triplen
harmonics that are the signature of
single-phase nonlinear loads. This is
the most common application encoun-
tered. Type NON HMTs use electro-
magnetic ux cancellation to cancel
triplen harmonics. There, harmonics
are treated in the secondary windings
and prevented from coupling into the
primary delta windings, where they
may be transmitted upstream to the
service entrance location. Type NON
HMTs can be deployed singly to treat
triplen harmonics. As with most other
harmonic mitigating methods, the
closer the HMT can be installed to the
load, the greater the benet.
Type POS (+15) and Type NEG (15)
harmonic mitigating transformers are
typically used together in coordinated
pairs to treat 5th, 7th and other
harmonics that are generated by three-
phase nonlinear loads. 5th, 7th and
higher order harmonics pass through
the harmonic mitigating transformers,
to a point of common coupling; the
rst common electrical point that is
shared by the HMTs. At this common
point, balanced portions of the 5th,
7th, etc., harmonic currents are
canceled and prevented from owing
further upstream in the distribution
system. Type POS and Type NEG
HMTs have nearly identical electrical
characteristics, including zero-
sequence and positive-sequence
impedance and reactance. The more
closely matched the coordinated pairs
of transformers, the more thorough
the harmonic cancellation.
Coordinated pairs of Type NON and
Type THR transformers, as well as
coordinated pairs of Type NON, Type
THR, Type POS and Type NEG HMTs
provide treatment of 3rd and other
triplen harmonics within their
secondary windings. This cancellation
is achieved by virtue of their wye
zig-zag winding conguration.
19.1-13
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Description
019
As our world becomes even more
dependent on electrical and electronic
equipment, there is an increased
likelihood that operations will
experience the negative effects of
harmonic distortion. The productivity
and efciency gains achieved from
increasingly sophisticated pieces
of equipment have a drawback:
increased harmonic distortion in the
The difcult thing about harmonic
distortion is determining the source.
Once this task has been completed,
the solution can be easy. Harmonic
mitigating transformers (HMTs) are
one of the many possible solutions
to help eliminate these harmful
harmonics.
Figure 19.1-2. Typical Waveform of Single-Phase Devices
Figure 19.1-3. Composite Waveform
Figure 19.1-4. Components of a Nonlinear Waveform
60 Hz
fundamental
fundamental
7th
3rd
5th
What are Harmonics?
An understanding of how harmonics
are generated and what harmonics
really are is necessary in order to
understand how HMTs can provide
harmonic mitigation. Electronic equip-
ment requires DC voltage to operate.
Rectiers and capacitors are used to
convert AC voltage to DC voltage
within the equipment. These devices
are frequently referred to as switch
mode power supplies. As the capaci-
tors charge and discharge during this
conversion, the capacitor draws cur-
rent in pulses, not at a continuous rate.
This irregular current demand, as
depicted in Figure 19.1-2, distorts the
linear 60 Hz sine wave. As a result, these
types of loads are commonly referred
to as non-sinusoidal, or nonlinear.
As shown in Figures 19.1-3 and 19.1-4,
the waveform created by the nonlinear
source is actually the mathematical
sum of several sine waves, each with
a different frequency and magnitude.
Each of these individual waveforms is
called a harmonic, and is identied by
its frequency relative to the fundamental
frequency, 60 Hz. In other words, each
individual harmonic is identied by a
number, which is the number of com-
plete cycles the specic harmonic goes
through in a single 60 Hz cycle.
In Figure 19.1-4, the fundamental
frequency is 60 Hz. The fundamental
frequency is assigned the harmonic
number of 1, and is the benchmark for
all other harmonic numbering. The
fundamental, 60 Hz sine wave completes
60 full cycles in one second. The 3rd
harmonic completes three full cycles
in the time it takes the fundamental to
complete just one cycle, or 180 cycles
per second. Likewise, the 5th harmonic
completes ve full cycles in the time
it takes the fundamental harmonic to
complete a single cycle, which equates
to 300 cycles per second. Odd multiples
of the 3rd harmonic (3rd, 9th,15th,
21st, etc.) are commonly referred to
as triplen harmonics.
The proliferation of electronic equipment
(including computers, fax machines,
copiers, electronic ballasts, ofce
equipment, cash registers, slot machines,
electronic monitoring devices, video
games, medical diagnostic equipment
and the like) is what makes single-phase
devices the most common source of
harmonics. These devices generate a typ-
ical waveform shown in Figure 19.1-2,
and have a harmonic prole as shown
in Table 19.1-9. As one can see, the pre-
dominant harmonic is the 3rd harmonic.
Three-phase, nonlinear loads such as
drives, on the other hand, are typically
rich in 5th and 7th harmonics.
19.1-14
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Description
020
What Problems do
Harmonics Cause?
The distorted current waveform that is
created by nonlinear loads can cause
many problems in an electrical distri-
bution system. Depending upon the
severity of the harmonic distortion,
the negative effects of harmonics may
be tolerable, and the installation of
a K-factorrated transformer may be
an adequate solution. K-factorrated
transformers do not provide any
harmonic treatment. Rather, they are
designed to withstand the destructive
effects of the additional heat gener-
ated by harmonic currents in the
transformers windings.
In many instances, the harmful effects
of harmonics are too severe, and
simply tolerating them is not an
acceptable option. Harmonic currents
can cause excessive heating in distri-
bution transformers. This additional
heat not only reduces the life expect-
ancy of a transformer, it also reduces
the usable capacity of the transformer.
Another side effect is that the audible
noise of a transformer may be ampli-
ed when installed in a system that
contains harmonics.
An important characteristic of
harmonics is that they are transmitted
upstream from the load, to the trans-
formers secondary windings, through
the primary windings of the trans-
former, back to the service entrance,
and eventually to the utility lines.
Harmonic currents owing upstream
from nonlinear loads, through the
system impedance of cables and
transformers, create harmonic voltage
distortion. When linear loads, like
motors, are subjected to harmonic
voltage distortion, they will draw a
nonlinear harmonic current. As with
distribution transformers, harmonic
currents cause increased heating,
due to iron and copper losses, in
motors and generators. This increased
heating can reduce the life of the
motor, as well as the motors ef-
ciency. In electrical cables, harmonic
currents may also create increased
heating, which can lead to premature
aging of the electrical insulation.
Nuisance tripping of the circuit break-
ers protecting the cable may also
occur. Communications equipment
and data processing equipment are
especially susceptible to the harmful
effects of harmonics because they rely
on a nearly perfect sinusoidal input.
This equipment may malfunction, or
even fail, when installed in systems
that are rich in harmonics.
The costs associated with downtime
resulting from the malfunction or fail-
ure of electrical or electronic equip-
ment can be staggering. These costs
can easily surpass thousands, if not
millions, of dollars per hour in lost
production or lost productivity. In
addition to the well-dened costs
associated with the most catastrophic
of harmonic effects, there are many
less quantitative costs that are often
overlooked when evaluating the need
for harmonic mitigation. The increased
heating caused by harmonics in
cables, motors and transformers
increases the cooling requirements
in air-conditioned areas. The same
increases in heating result in increased
maintenance costs and more frequent
equipment replacement in order to
avoid failures that could shut down
a building for a period of time.
What do HMTs do?
HMTs are an economical solution in
the battle against the harmful effects
of harmonics. HMTs are passive
devices: they dont have any moving
parts and they are typically energized
24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365
days a year. This means that they are
always on the job treating harmon-
ics, regardless of the level of load they
are serving at a given point in time.
Whenever the HMT is energized, it will
provide harmonic treatment.
Harmonic mitigating transformers are
commonly referred to as phase-shift-
ing transformers. The HMT offering
from Eatons electrical business has
delta-connected primary windings
and wye zig-zag connected secondary
windings. The use of wye zig-zag sec-
ondary windings allows a transformer
to be designed in a wide variety of
different phase-shifts (30, 15,
0, +15). In standard delta-wye
transformers, including K-factorrated
transformers, triplen harmonics are
passed from the secondary windings
into the primary delta windings, where
they are trapped and circulate. In
HMTs, the electromagnetic ux
cancellation created by the wye zig-zag
winding conguration prevents 3rd
and other triplen harmonics from
being transmitted into the primary
delta winding. Harmonic treatment is
provided entirely by electromagnetic
ux cancellation; no lters, capacitors
or other such devices are used. It
is important to remember that the
harmonic currents still ow in the
secondary windings.
19.1-15
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Description
021
Benets of Installing HMTs
In addition to improved system
reliability and reduced maintenance
costs, HMTs also have excellent
energy-saving characteristics. With
the cost of electricity continuing to
increase around the world, there is
an ever-increasing interest in energy-
efcient products. In many facilities,
the cost of electricity is the second
largest expense, eclipsed only by
salaries and wages.
Transformers consume energy
even when they are lightly loaded or
not loaded at all. Signicant energy
savings may be attained if the no-load
losses of a transformer are reduced.
NEMA Standard TP-1 addresses
this issue by requiring high efciency
levels when a transformer is loaded at
35% of its full capacity. However, this
standard applies to linear load proles
only, and tests to validate compliance
with NEMA TP-1 are performed using
linear loads.
In actual applications, the growing
presence of electronic devices creates
nonlinear load proles. Nonlinear
loads cause the losses in distribution
transformers to increase, thereby
reducing their realized efciency.
Therefore, NEMA TP-1 efciency
compliance may not be a true indica-
tion of the efciency of a transformer
exposed to nonlinear loads. Though
a measure of linear load efciency,
Eatons family of HMTs meets the
efciency standards set forth in
NEMA Standard TP-1. Because HMTs
are intended to be installed in systems
that contain high levels of nonlinear
loads, Eatons family of HMTs is
designed to meet the NEMA TP-1
efciency levels when applied to
nonlinear load proles with 100%
harmonic distortion, across a broad
range of load levels, not just the
35% load level used in NEMA TP-1.
These energy savings are realized
over the entire life of the transformer.
Table 19.1-9. Typical Harmonic Prole of
Single-Phase Switched Mode Power Supply
The closer that an HMT can be located
to the load, the greater the benets
of harmonic treatment. Installation
of a large capacity HMT at the service
entrance of a large building would
certainly provide some harmonic treat-
ment. However, installation of several
smaller rated HMTs, perhaps one
or more on each oor of a building,
provides greater benets that will be
noticed throughout the facility. For this
reason, the most popular HMTs will be
rated 75 kVA and less. This comple-
ments the cost-efciencies that can be
gained by distributing higher voltages
through smaller cables to the point
where a safer, lower voltage is needed
to operate equipment.
When connecting the loads to
the transformer, it is important to
remember that the balanced portion
of the harmonic loads will be treated.
To achieve the maximum harmonic
treatment, when considering the
triplen harmonics that are treated in
the secondary windings, each phase
should be balanced, and the harmonic
prole of the loads should be as
similar as possible. When treating 5th,
7th and higher order harmonics by
using multiple transformers, the loads
should likewise have similar
harmonic proles, and the kVA and
impedance of the transformers should
be identical as well. For example,
two 75 kVA HMTs can be paired
with a single 150 kVA HMT to provide
maximum harmonic performance.
In instances where transformers of
unequal kVA are used in combination,
harmonic treatment is provided for
the lowest kVA load. For example, if,
instead of pairing two 75 kVA HMTs
with a single 150 kVA HMT, one would
pair two 45 kVA HMTs with a 150 kVA
HMT. Only 90 kVA (two times 45 kVA)
of the 150 kVA load would be treated
(if they were fully loaded). In
real-world situations, it is nearly
impossible to have perfectly matched
loads. However, the benets of
treating harmonics, even in situations
where the loads are unbalanced, are
a far superior option than to not treat
them at all.
Eaton HMT transformers comply with
NEMA TP-1 standards.
Harmonic Magnitude
1
3
5
7
1.000
0.810
0.606
0.370
9
11
13
15
0.157
0.024
0.063
0.079
19.1-16
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
NEMA TP-1 Energy-Efcient Transformers
Description
022
NEMA TP-1 Energy-Efcient
Transformers Rated
600V and Below
Applications
Eatons family of NEMA TP-1-2002,
ventilated transformers are another
option available to customers
interested in reducing their energy
consumption. These transformers
comply with all state and local
regulations that mandate installation
of energy-efcient distribution
transformers in new construction.
NEMA TP-1 transformers are typically
installed in commercial construction,
as well as in educational (K12 and
universities), government and
industrial facilities. NEMA TP-1
compliant transformers are especially
designed to have low no-load (core)
losses. Minimum efciency levels
have been established for these
transformers when loaded at 35% of
their full load capacity. NEMA TP-1
transformers are manufactured
using the same high-quality
construction features as Eatons
ventilated transformer products,
Ventilated transformers are typically
oor-mounted on an elevated house-
keeping pad. When properly supported,
they are also suitable for wall mounting
or trapeze-mounting from ceilings.
Technical Data
Available Ratings
As an Energy Star Partner, Eatons
brand offers a wide range of NEMA
TP-1 energy-efcient transformers to
meet specic voltage conversion
requirements.
kVA Capacity
Eatons NEMA TP-1 ventilated trans-
formers are available in the same
kVA ratings as single-phase and
three-phase general purpose venti-
lated transformers.
Eatons NEMA TP-1 energy-efcient
transformers are manufactured using
as standard. NEMA TP-1 transformers
are also available in either 115C or
80C temperature rise.
Frequency
Most NEMA TP-1 transformers are
designed to operate in 60 Hz systems.
50/60 Hz designs are available as an
option. Eatons transformers can be
designed to operate at a variety of
frequencies.
Winding Material
an option.
Eatons NEMA TP-1 transformers
require clearances that are identical to
those for general purpose ventilated
transformers.
Wiring Compartment
Eatons NEMA TP-1 energy-efcient
transformers have wiring compart-
ments sized to comply with NEMA
and NEC standards.
What is NEMA TP-1?
The Energy Act of 1992, H.R. 776
empowered the U.S. Department of
Energy (DOE) to set guidelines for
more efcient electrical devices that
would reduce the nations energy
consumption. In 1996, in conjunction
with the DOE, NEMA adopted a new
standard for efciencies of distribution
transformers: NEMA Standard
TP-1-1996. This standard set minimum
efciency levels for standard trans-
former kVA ratings. Prior studies had
shown that transformers in commer-
cial and industrial facilities are loaded
at an average of 35% of their name-
plate full-load capacity. The minimum
efciency levels included in NEMA
TP-1 for low voltage transformers
(600V and below) are based upon
this 35% loading, and at 75C ambient
temperature. The Environmental
Protection Agency adopted the
efciency levels set forth in NEMA
TP-1 as part of their Energy Star
program. The DOE, in conjunction
with NEMA, is continually looking
at the attainable efciency levels
for distribution transformers, and
revising them upward.
Since distribution transformers are
typically energized 24 hours a day,
seven days a week, 365 days a year,
the energy savings gained by installing
high-efciency transformers is realized
for the vast majority of a transformers
20-year or greater anticipated life.
The Energy Policy Act of 2005
The Energy Policy Act of 2005 and
the resulting Federal Law 10 CFR Part
431 require that efciency of low volt-
age dry-type distribution transformers
manufactured after January 1, 2007,
shall be no less than the efciency
levels listed in Table 4-2 of NEMA
Standard TP-1-2002. Transformers
specically excluded from the scope
of this law include: transformers rated
less than 15 kVA, transformers rated
greater than 600V, transformers rated
for operation at anything other than
60 Hz, transformers with a tap range
greater than 20%, drive transformers,
rectier transformers, autotransform-
ers, uninterruptible power supply
transformers, special impedance
transformers, regulating transform-
ers, sealed and nonventilated trans-
formers, machine tool transformers,
welding transformers, grounding
transformers and testing transformers.
Table 19.1-10. NEMA TP-1-2002
Efciency Levels
Tables of Energy Efciency
NEMA Class 1 Efciency Levels
Dry-Type Distribution Transformers
Low Voltage (600V and below)
Single-Phase Three-Phase
kVA Efciency kVA Efciency
15
25
37.5
97.7
98.0
98.2
15
30
45
97.0
97.5
97.7
50
75
100
98.3
98.5
98.6
75
112.5
150
98.0
98.2
98.3
167
250
333
98.7
98.8
98.9
225
300
500
750
1000
98.5
98.6
98.7
98.8
98.9
19.1-17
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Low Temperature Rise Transformers
Description
023
CSL-3 Transformers
Energy Policy Legislation
In an effort to increase energy
efciency within the U.S. electrical
system, effective January 1, 2007,
the federal government implemented
legislation found within EPACT 2005
standards to change manufacturing of
dry-type transformers such that they
had to meet the NEMA TP-1 energy
efciency levels. The foundation and
reasoning for this change was started
in a 2004 government study called,
10 CFR Part 430Energy Conservation
Program for Commercial and Industrial
Equipment: Energy Conservation Stan-
dards for Distribution Transformers;
Proposed Rule. This study laid the
foundations of ve different efciency
levels (Candidate Standard Levels
CSL) for a multitude of transformer
technologies. Whereas many trans-
former technologies (both dry and oil-
lled, low and medium voltage) were
discussed, the CSL-1 transformer
represents the least efciency level
of low voltage, dry-type transformers
listed. This energy efciency level is
at the same performance as NEMA
TP-1 transformers (the current
required efciency performance). The
CSL-2 through CSL-5 classications
represent increasingly higher perfor-
mance energy efciency levels (with
CSL-5 being the highest efciencies/
lowest losses). While CSL-5 is the most
efcient transformer in this classica-
tion shown, currently the material
costs necessary to meet those
efciencies are prohibitive in the
commercial market. The CSL-3
level has a signicant increase in
performance when compared with
NEMA TP-1 efciency levels.
The 10 CFR Part 430 standard was
an evolving standard. As more was
learned about possible transformer
efciencies, materials and perfor-
mance, the standard continued to
evolve until the 10 CFR Part 431
Energy Conservation Program for
Commercial Equipment: Distribution
Transformers Energy Conservation
Standards; Final Rule was published
in October 2007. This nal rule shows
improvements and renements made
as the standard matured, changing
CSL-3 minimum efciency levels from
an average of 28% lower losses than
NEMA TP-1 to an average of 32%.
Eaton Corporation is continuing to
provide cutting-edge efciencies and
performance to our customers looking
for that extra performance when
designing a LEED or green building.
CSL-3 Compliant Eaton Type E3
Features and Benets
480V to 208/120V standard
150 or 115C temperature
rise available
Copper windings and terminals
standard; aluminum not available
CSL-3 2007 Final Rule efciencies
levels
Increased efciencies help to gain
LEED points (because LEED only
incorporates regulated losses, the
comparison of No Load Losses
against standard NEMA TP-1
transformers can be used to
document energy savings)
30%40%less losses than NEMA
TP-1 transformers
No additional maintenance to main-
tain energy efciency and savings
K-13 ratedcan be used in areas
with a high concentration of non-
linear loads
25-year, pro-rated, warranty
Ultra-low excitation (no-load) losses
Available in three-phase ratings
from 15 to 300 kVA
Reduced heat output helps to
reduce cooling costs
Energy savings provides a return
on investment (ROI) energy
savings analysis
Environmentally friendly through
reduced pollution due to low
energy losses
200% rated neutral
Single electrostatic shield for
attenuation of common-mode and
transverse-mode noise
220C insulation system
Operating costs kept to a minimum
May be installed as a stand-alone
transformer, or included with an
Integrated Facility System (IFS)
Meet NEMA ST-20 audible sound
level standards
Enclosures are NEMA 2 drip-proof.
The addition of optional weather-
shields makes the enclosure
NEMA 3R rainproof
Table 19.1-11. Environmental Impact of E3 Transformers vs. Standard NEMA TP-1
Environmental impact data per nationalized
averages of utility pollution production
in 2004 published by the U.S. EPA eGrid
report in 2007. Transformer losses based on
35% loading of nameplate with linear load.
kVA Lbs of CO
2

Saved
Number of Men
(Average Weight 250 Lbs)
CO
2
Savings Equivalence
Pollution
Cleaning
15
30
45
608
991
1411
3.0
5.0
7.0
61
99
141
75
112.5
150
2007
2682
3513
10.0
13.4
17.6
201
269
352
225
300
4422
5520
22.1
27.6
443
553
19.1-18
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Motor Drive Isolation Transformers
Description
024
and Below
Applications
formers are especially designed for
three-phase SCR controlled, variable
speed motor drives load proles. Sized
by horsepower and common motor
voltages, motor drive isolation trans-
formers are braced to withstand the
mechanical stresses associated with
AC adjustable frequency drives or DC
drives. Two-winding drive isolation
transformers provide:
Electrical isolation between the
incoming line and the drive circuitry
Voltage conversion on input line to
standard drive input voltages
Help to minimize line disturbances
caused by SCR ring
Reduce short-circuit currents and
voltage line transients
Motor drive isolation transformers
are manufactured using the same
high-quality construction features as
our ventilated transformer products,
220C (Class R) insulation system as
standard. Epoxy encapsulated models
have NEMA 3R enclosures and 115C
temperature rise as standard. All Eaton
three-phase ventilated motor drive iso-
lation transformers include a normally
open dry contact temperature sensor
installed in the coils. This sensor can
be connected to provide advance alert
or warning of a potential overheating
of the transformer. Ventilated trans-
formers are typically oor-mounted on
an elevated housekeeping pad. When
properly supported, they are also
suitable for wall mounting or trapeze-
mounting from ceilings. Encapsulated
designs are typically wall-mounted
through 15 kVA; larger designs are
oor-mount.
Technical Data
Available Ratings
conversion requirements. Available
in three-phase ventilated designs to
1500 hp and 600V; epoxy encapsulated
three-phase designs are available
to 20 hp.
kVA Capacity
Eatons motor drive isolation encapsu-
lated and ventilated transformers are
available in the same kVA ratings as
general purpose encapsulated and
ventilated transformers.
Eatons motor drive isolation ventilated
transformers are manufactured using
temperature rise as standard. 115C or
80C temperature rise are available as
an option. Encapsulated designs use a
temperature rise as standard. 80C
temperature rise is available as an
option on encapsulated transformers.
Frequency
Most motor drive isolation transform-
ers are designed to operate in 60 Hz
systems. 50/60 Hz designs are available
as an option. Eatons transformers can
be designed to operate at a variety of
frequencies.
Winding Material
an option. For encapsulated designs,
most models rated 2 kVA and below
are constructed using copper wind-
ings; 3 kVA and larger designs have
aluminum windings as standard,
with copper windings available as
an option.
formers require clearances that are
identical to those for general purpose
transformers. Transformers should
be located in areas not accessible to
the public.
Wiring Compartment
formers have wiring compartments
sized to comply with NEMA and NEC
standards.
Thermal Sensors
formers are provided with thermal
sensors imbedded in their coils. The
thermal sensors have normally open
dry contacts that can be wired to
provide a signal to remote locations
to indicate a potential heating problem
within the transformer coils. Contacts
are rated for 180C.
19.1-19
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Hazardous Location Transformers
Description
025
Hazardous Location
and Below
Applications
Eatons hazardous location transform-
ers are suitable for use in environments
classied by the 2002 and 2005 National
Electrical Code (NEC) as Class I,
Division 2, Group C or D, as dened
by NEC Article 501, when installed in
compliance with NEC-recommended
procedures for dry-type transformers
rated 600V and below.
As dened by NEC Article 500,
Class I, Division 2 locations include
atmospheres that may contain volatile
or ignitable concentrations of amma-
ble liquids or gas vapors, or locations
adjacent to such environments.
Acetone, ammonia, benzene, gasoline,
methane, propane and natural gas
are examples of such substances.
Eatons hazardous location transform-
ers are of the encapsulated design,
and are available up to 600V ratings.
Single-phase ratings 0.05 37.5 kVA;
three-phase ratings to 75 kVA. Hazard-
ous location transformers use a 180C
insulation system with 115C tempera-
ture rise. All Eaton hazardous location
transformers are provided with explo-
sion-proof connections.
When provided in a Grade 304 or 316
stainless steel enclosure, Eatons
hazardous location transformers meet
the corrosion-resistance requirements
of a NEMA 3RX enclosure rating.
Hazardous location transformers can
be mounted in any position indoors,
and only in upright positions for
outdoor installations.
Technical Data
Available Ratings
Eatons hazardous location transformers
are available in the same ratings as
sand and resin encapsulated trans-
formers. Hazardous location trans-
of ratings to meet specic customer
requirements.
kVA Capacity
Single-phase designs are available
in ratings from 0.05 kVA through
37.5 kVA; three phase ratings 375 kVA.
are manufactured using a 180C insu-
lation system with 115C temperature
rise as standard. 80C temperature rise
is available as an option.
Frequency
Most hazardous location transformers
are designed to operate in 60 Hz
systems. 50/60 Hz designs are available
as an option. Eatons transformers can
be designed to operate at a variety
of frequencies.
Winding Material
Copper conductors and terminations
are provided as standard on Eatons
hazardous location transformers rated
2 kVA and less. Aluminum conductor
and terminations are provided as
standard on hazardous location
transformers rated 3 kVA and greater.
Copper winding conductors and
terminations are available as an option.
Eatons wall-mounted hazardous
location transformers have a specially
designed hanger bracket that spaces
the transformer an adequate distance
from the mounting surface.
Floor-mounted designs should
be installed with a minimum of
6.00 inches of clearance around the
transformer enclosure to prevent
accidental contact with ammable or
combustible materials.
Wiring Compartments
do not have a wiring compartment.
Transformers leads are brought out
through explosion-proof ttings.
Leads of adequate length to allow for
them to be terminated in appropriately
rated junction boxes. The explosion-
proof tting of wall-mount transformers
is located in the bottom portion of the
enclosure; oor-mount designs have
the ttings located in the top section of
the enclosure.
19.1-20
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Mini-Power Centers
Description
026
MiniPower Centers
Rated 600V and Below
Applications
An Eaton minipower center replaces
three individual components:
Primary main breaker
Transformer
Distribution loadcenter
...by combining all three into a single
unit. All interconnecting wiring is
performed at the factory. Minipower
centers are ideally suited for applica-
tions where 120V is required at a
remote location. Parking lots, work-
benches and temporary power on
construction sites are common
applications for minipower centers.
Available with aluminum bus and
plug-on branch breakers, or with
copper bus and bolt-on branch
breakers. Minipower centers
incorporate an encapsulated
transformer in their construction.
Primary main breakers are available
in a variety of interrupting ratings. The
NEMA 3R enclosure makes it ideally
suited for use in areas that contain
dust, moisture, corrosive fumes, metal
shavings and other airborne particles
that may cause damage to ventilated
transformers. When provided in a
Grade 316 stainless steel enclosure,
the Eaton minipower center meets
the corrosion-resistance requirements
of a NEMA 3RX enclosure rating.
Minipower centers can be mounted
in any position indoors, and in upright
positions only for outdoor installations.
Technical Data
Available Ratings
Eatons minipower centers are
available in single-phase and three-
phase ratings to 600V, 100A and
30 kVA with secondary loadcenters
with provisions for up to 24 single-
pole branch breakers. Minipower
centers are available in a wide range
conversion requirements.
kVA Capacity
Single-phase designs are available
in ratings from 3 kVA through 25 kVA;
three-phase ratings 15 kVA through
30 kVA.
Minipower centers are manufactured
using a 180C insulation system with
80C temperature rise is available as
an option.
Frequency
Most minipower centers are designed
to operate in 60 Hz systems. 50/60 Hz
designs are available as an option.
Eatons minipower centers can be
designed to operate at a variety of
frequencies.
Winding Material
are provided as standard on encapsu-
lated transformers rated 3 kVA and
greater. Copper winding conductors
and terminations are available as
an option. Copper windings are
standard in the all-copper model.
Eatons minipower centers are
designed to be wall-mounted. They
have a specially designed hanger
bracket that spaces the minipower
center an adequate distance from
the mounting surface.
Minipower centers should be located
in areas not accessible to the public.
Wiring Compartments
Eatons minipower centers have
with NEMA and NEC standards. Ample
conduit knockouts are provided to
offer ready access. The wiring
compartment of wall-mounted
transformers is located in the bottom
portion of the enclosure.
Primary Main Breakers
Minipower centers are provided with
primary main circuit breakers that
have an interrupting rating of 14 kAIC.
EHD primary main circuit breakers are
provided as standard on mini-power
centers with a 480V primary; 600V
designs have an FD primary main
breaker as standard. Primary main
circuit breakers with greater AIC
ratings are available as an option on
minipower centers with plug-on
secondary circuit breakers.
Optional primary main breakers are
FD (rate 25 kAIC at 480V; 18 kAIC
at 600V), HFD (65 kAIC at 480V;
25 kAIC at 600V) or FDC (100 kAIC
at 480V; 35 kAIC at 600V).
Branch Circuit Breakers
Eatons minipower centers are avail-
able with an aluminum bus loadcenter
interior that accepts 1.00-inch plug-on
branch circuit breakers Type BR family.
The all-copper minipower center
is constructed with a copper-wound
transformer and a copper bus loadcenter
interior that accepts 1.00-inch bolt-on
branch breakers Type BAB family.
19.1-21
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Single-Phase Transformers for Motors
Technical Data
027
Transformer Selection
How to Select Single-Phase Units
1. Determine the primary (source)
voltagethe voltage presently
available.
2. Determine the secondary (load)
voltagethe voltage needed at
the load.
3. Determine the kVA load:
If the load is dened in kVA, a
transformer can be selected from
the tabulated data.
If the load rating is given in
amperes, determine the load kVA
from the following chart. To deter-
mine kVA when volts and amperes
are known, use the formula:
kVA = Volts x Amperes
1000
If the load is an AC motor,
determine the minimum trans-
former kVA from Table 19.1-12
at the right.
Select a transformer rating
equal to or greater than the
load kVA.
4. Dene tap arrangements needed.
5. Dene temperature rise.
Table 19.1-12. Single-Phase AC Motors
Note: When motor service factor is greater than 1, increase full load amperes proportionally.
Example: If service factor is 1.15, increase ampere values by 15%.
If motors are started more than once per hour, increase minimum transformer kVA by 20%.
Table 19.1-13. Full Load Current in AmperesSingle-Phase Circuits
Table of standard transformer ratings used to power single-phase motors in Table 19.1-12.
Horsepower Full Load Amperes Minimum
Transformer kVA
115 Volts 208 Volts 220 Volts 230 Volts

1/6
1/4
1/3
4.4
5.8
7.2
2.4
3.2
4.0
2.3
3.0
3.8
2.2
2.9
3.6
0.53
0.70
0.87
1/2
3/4
1
9.8
13.8
16
5.4
7.6
8.8
5.1
7.2
8.4
4.9
6.9
8
1.18
1.66
1.92
1-1/2
2
3
20
24
34
11.0
13.2
18.7
10.4
12.5
17.8
10
12
17
2.40
2.88
4.10
5
7-1/2
10
56
80
100
30.8
44
55
29.3
42
52
28
40
50
6.72
9.6
12.0
kVA Voltage
120 208 220 240 277 480 600 2400 4160
0.25
0.50
0.75
2.0
4.2
6.3
1.2
2.4
3.6
1.1
2.3
3.4
1.0
2.1
3.1
0.9
1.8
2.7
0.5
1.0
1.6
0.4
0.8
1.3
0.10
0.21
0.31
0.06
0.12
0.18
1
1.5
2
8.3
12.5
16.7
4.8
7.2
9.6
4.5
6.8
9.1
4.2
6.2
8.3
3.6
5.4
7.2
2.1
3.1
4.2
1.7
2.5
3.3
0.42
0.63
0.83
0.24
0.36
0.48
3
5
7.5
25
41
62
14.4
24.0
36
13.6
22.7
34
12.5
20.8
31
10.8
18.0
27
6.2
10.4
15.6
5.0
8.3
12.5
1.2
2.1
3.1
0.72
1.2
1.8
10
15
25
83
125
208
48
72
120
45
68
114
41
62
104
36
54
90
20.8
31
52
16.7
25
41
4.2
6.2
10.4
2.4
3.6
6.0
37.5
50
75
312
416
625
180
240
360
170
227
341
156
208
312
135
180
270
78
104
156
62
83
125
15.6
20.8
31.3
9.0
12.0
18.0
100
167
833
1391
480
802
455
759
416
695
361
602
208
347
166
278
41.7
69.6
24.0
40.1
19.1-22
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Three-Phase Transformers for Motors
Technical Data
028
How to Select Three-Phase Units
1. Determine the primary (source)
voltagethe voltage presently
available.
2. Determine the secondary (load)
voltagethe voltage needed at
the load.
3. Determine the kVA load:
If the load is dened in kVA, a
transformer can be selected from
the tabulated data.
If the load rating is given in
amperes, determine the load kVA
from the following chart. To deter-
mine kVA when volts and amperes
are known, use the formula:
kVA = Volts x Amperes x 1.732
1000
If the load is an AC motor, deter-
mine the minimum transformer kVA
from Table 19.1-14 at the right.
Select a transformer rating
equal to or greater than the
load kVA.
4. Dene tap arrangements needed.
5. Dene temperature rise.
Using the above procedure, select
the transformer from the listings in
this catalog.
Table 19.1-14. Three-Phase AC Motors
If motors are started more than once per hour, increase minimum transformer kVA by 20%.
Note: When motor service factor is greater than 1, increase full load amperes proportionally.
Example: If service factor is 1.15, increase above ampere values by 15%.
Table 19.1-15. Full Load Current in AmperesThree-Phase Circuits
Horsepower Full Load Amperes Minimum
Transformer kVA
208 Volts 230 Volts 380 Volts 460 Volts 575 Volts
1/2
3/4
1
2.2
3.1
4.0
2.0
2.8
3.6
1.2
1.7
2.2
1.0
1.4
1.8
0.8
1.1
1.4
0.9
1.2
1.5
1-1/2
2
3
5.7
7.5
10.7
5.2
6.8
9.6
3.1
4.1
5.8
2.6
3.4
4.8
2.1
2.7
3.9
2.1
2.7
3.8
5
7-1/2
10
16.7
24
31
15.2
22
28
9.2
14
17
7.6
11
14
6.1
9
11
6.3
9.2
11.2
15
20
25
46
59
75
42
54
68
26
33
41
21
27
34
17
22
27
16.6
21.6
26.6
30
40
50
88
114
143
80
104
130
48
63
79
40
52
65
32
41
52
32.4
43.2
52
60
75
100
170
211
273
154
192
248
93
116
150
77
96
124
62
77
99
64
80
103
125
150
200
342
396
528
312
360
480
189
218
291
156
180
240
125
144
192
130
150
200
kVA Voltage
208 240 380 480 600 2400 4160
3
6
9
8.3
16.6
25
7.2
14.4
21.6
4.6
9.1
13.7
3.6
7.2
10.8
2.9
5.8
8.6
0.72
1.4
2.2
0.42
0.83
1.2
15
22.5
30
41.7
62.4
83.4
36.1
54.1
72.3
22.8
34.2
45.6
18.0
27.1
36.1
14.4
21.6
28.9
3.6
5.4
7.2
2.1
3.1
4.2
37.5
45
50
104
124
139
90.3
108
120
57.0
68.4
76
45.2
54.2
60.1
36.1
43.4
48.1
9.0
10.8
12.0
5.2
6.3
6.9
75
112.5
150
208
312
416
180
270
360
114
171
228
90
135
180
72
108
144
18.0
27.1
36.1
10.4
15.6
20.8
225
300
500
624
832
1387
541
721
1202
342
456
760
270
360
601
216
288
481
54.2
72.2
120
31.3
41.6
69.4
750
1000
2084
2779
1806
2408
1140
1519
903
1204
723
963
180
241
104
139
19.1-23
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
029
Table 19.1-16. Typical Data for Encapsulated 480V Class General-Purpose Dry-Type Transformers, Aluminum Wound
Typical values for aluminum windings. Refer to Pages 19.1-2619.1-28 for typical data for copper windings. Up-to-date design data is available at
www.eaton.com.
Actual impedance may vary 7.5%.
Type EPT transformers 315 kVA are T-T connected.

Note: Performance data is based upon 480V delta primary and a 208Y/120V secondary for three-phase transformers; 240 x 480V primary and a
120/240V secondary for single-phase transformers. All data is subject to future revision. Refer to Eaton for 5 kV class information. All data is
subject to future revision.
kVA Frame Weight Lbs Losses in Watts Efciency % Regulation % Impedance
Sound
Level dB
Al Cu No
Load
Total 1/4
Load
1/2
Load
3/4
Load
Full
Load
100%
P.F.
80%
P.F.
Min. Max.
Type EP 115C Rise Single-Phase
0.05
0.075
0.10
FR52
FR54
FR54
7
7
7
6
7
5
9
14
15
65.3
66.0
82.4
79.6
79.0
86.9
84.3
82.5
87.7
85.6
82.8
86.5
5.9
9.4
10.3
6.4
9.2
10.6
5.5
7.5
8.0
9.5
11.0
12.0
45
45
45
0.15
0.25
0.5
FR55
FR57P
FR57P
8
12
13
7
14
20
20
29
47
83.4
79.0
85.1
88.2
87.2
90.3
88.9
89.5
91.4
87.8
89.6
91.4
9.0
5.9
5.5
9.6
7.5
7.0
8.0
7.5
5.0
12.0
9.5
7.0
45
45
45
0.75
1
1.5
FR58AP
FR67P
FR67P
65
20
30
40
29
24
30
57
60
90
86.0
90.8
92.5
91.3
93.9
94.7
92.7
94.5
95.0
92.9
94.4
94.6
3.9
3.8
4.1
5.0
4.9
5.2
4.0
3.8
2.5
6.0
5.8
4.5
45
45
45
2
3
5
FR68P
FR176
FR177
113
40
69
120
30
61
104
100
135
215
94.2
92.0
91.8
95.7
95.0
95.0
95.8
95.7
95.8
95.4
95.7
95.9
3.6
2.5
2.3
4.7
3.5
3.3
3.3
2.5
2.0
5.3
4.1
4.6
45
45
45
7.5
10
15
FR178
FR179
FR180
123
193
216
133
208
235
129
153
209
250
295
435
93.2
93.9
94.4
96.0
96.3
96.6
96.7
97.0
97.1
95.9
97.2
97.2
1.5
1.5
1.6
2.4
2.5
2.8
2.4
2.0
1.6
3.4
3.3
3.6
45
50
50
25
37.5
FR182
FR300A
385
735
414
856
191
225
440
370
96.8
97.4
98.0
98.3
98.3
98.5
98.4
98.4
1.1
1.2
2.5
2.6
1.6
2.8
4.2
4.0
50
50
Type EPT 115C Rise Three-Phase
3
6
9
FR201
FR200
FR103
116
143
166
123
153
178
110
145
195
165
275
375
87.3
90.9
91.6
92.6
94.5
95.0
94.3
95.5
95.9
94.9
95.7
96.1
2.1
2.2
2.0
6.1
3.1
2.8
2.4
2.9
2.0
8.0
4.9
3.6
45
45
45
15
30
45
75
FR95
FR243
FR244
FR245
275
422
660
1275
300
504
745
1450
265
250
300
400
545
665
740
945
93.0
96.5
97.2
97.7
95.7
97.7
98.2
98.6
96.5
98.0
98.4
98.8
96.6
97.9
98.5
98.8
1.9
1.5
1.0
0.8
3.1
2.5
2.1
1.6
1.9
1.8
1.8
1.7
3.9
3.8
4.0
3.4
50
50
50
55
19.1-24
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
030
Table 19.1-17. Typical Data for 480V Class NEMA TP-1 Dry-Type Transformers, Aluminum Wound
www.eaton.com.

kVA Frame Weight Losses in Watts Efciency (T Rise +20) % Regulation % Imp.
T Rise
+20
X
T Rise
+20
R
T Rise
+20
Sound
Level dB
TP1
Efciency
Inrush
No
Load
Total at
Rise +20
25% 50% 75% Full
Load
100%
PF
80%
PF
Absolute
Max.
Practical
Max.
Type DS-3 150C Rise NEMA TP-1 Efcient Single-Phase
15
25
37.5
816
818
818
246
359
374
80
300
125
549
848
1314
97.6
97.7
98.1
97.6
98.1
97.8
97.2
97.9
97.2
96.6
97.5
96.6
2.0
1.4
2.2
2.9
2.7
4.6
4.3
3.5
5.8
3.0
2.8
4.8
3.1
2.2
3.2
45
45
45
97.70
98.00
98.20
737
1139
1066
245
379
355
50
75
100
167
819
820
821
814
555
740
841
1610
300
170
260
900
1668
2266
2543
3987
98.2
98.4
98.5
68.7
98.1
98.2
98.4
98.7
97.6
97.6
98.0
98.4
97.0
97.0
97.6
98.0
1.9
2.3
1.9
1.4
4.0
5.3
4.7
6.8
5.1
6.9
6.1
9.7
4.3
6.3
5.6
9.5
2.7
2.8
2.3
1.8
45
50
50
55
98.30
98.50
98.60
98.70
1585
2105
2834
1250
528
701
944
416
15
25
37.5
816
818
818
246
373
380
80
300
125
519
766
1182
97.8
97.7
98.2
97.8
98.1
98.4
97.3
98.0
98.1
96.8
97.7
97.8
2.1
1.4
2.0
3.1
2.8
3.1
3.9
3.3
4.1
2.6
2.8
2.9
2.9
1.9
2.8
45
45
45
97.70
98.00
98.20
773
1102
616
244
367
205
50
75
819
820
590
689
300
170
417
2356
98.4
98.5
98.3
98.2
97.9
97.6
97.4
97.0
1.8
2.7
4.1
5.6
5.2
6.9
5.2
6.3
0.2
2.9
45
50
98.30
98.50
1553
1717
511
572
15
25
37.5
818
818
819
360
370
565
115
120
150
269
580
834
97.4
97.8
98.1
98.3
98.2
98.4
98.4
98.0
98.1
98.4
97.8
97.8
0.8
1.5
1.5
1.7
3.2
3.3
2.0
3.9
4.1
1.8
3.4
3.6
1.0
1.8
1.8
45
45
45
97.70
98.00
98.20
1381
1046
1471
460
348
490
50
75
820
821
680
900
175
260
1014
1387
98.4
98.3
98.5
98.6
98.4
98.5
98.1
98.2
1.5
1.4
3.4
3.5
4.2
4.3
3.9
4.0
1.7
1.5
45
50
98.30
98.50
1733
2423
577
807
Type DT-3 150C Rise NEMA TP-1 Efcient
15
30
37.5
912B
912B
912B
204
291
381
95
165
210
778
1207
1428
96.6
97.2
97.5
96.7
97.3
97.5
96.0
96.9
97.0
95.1
96.2
96.4
4.8
3.7
3.5
4.0
5.6
5.5
4.8
4.6
4.5
1.4
3.0
3.1
4.6
3.5
3.2
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
382
479
484
127
159
161
45
50
75
912B
914D
914D
351
531
553
210
270
300
1911
1316
2917
97.5
97.7
97.9
97.4
98.1
97.7
96.7
97.9
97.0
96.0
97.5
96.3
3.8
2.2
3.6
6.3
4.0
6.6
5.1
3.2
5.3
3.4
2.4
4.0
3.8
2.1
3.5
45
45
50
97.70
98.00
98.00
564
999
561
188
333
187
112.5
150
225
916A
916A
917
793
913
1343
400
490
650
3693
4923
6476
98.0
98.2
98.4
98.0
98.0
98.2
97.5
97.5
97.8
96.9
96.9
97.2
3.2
3.2
2.8
7.5
6.5
6.3
6.0
5.3
5.1
5.2
4.4
4.4
2.9
3.0
2.6
50
50
55
98.20
98.30
98.50
1049
1518
2204
350
506
734
300
500
750
918A
919
920
1597
2590
3340
750
1400
1800
8239
9782
12,692
98.5
98.6
98.8
98.3
98.7
98.9
97.9
98.5
98.7
97.3
98.1
98.4
2.9
1.9
1.8
8.9
8.2
8.9
7.6
7.2
8.0
7.2
7.0
7.9
2.5
1.7
1.5
55
60
64
98.60
98.70
98.80
2097
3769
4521
699
1256
1507
15
30
45
912B
912B
912B
202
311
418
100
165
220
743
1492
1458
96.7
97.3
97.8
96.8
97.1
97.9
96.2
96.3
97.5
95.4
95.5
97.0
4.4
4.5
2.8
3.9
4.8
5.4
4.4
4.8
4.6
1.2
1.8
3.7
4.3
4.4
2.8
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
383
411
550
127
137
183
50
75
112.5
914D
914D
916A
556
581
829
270
300
440
1211
2415
3209
97.6
97.9
98.0
98.1
97.9
98.1
98.0
97.5
97.8
97.7
96.9
97.3
1.9
3.0
2.6
3.7
6.7
3.6
3.2
5.9
3.1
2.6
5.1
1.9
1.9
2.8
2.5
45
50
50
98.00
98.00
98.20
892
758
1301
297
252
433
150
225
300
916A
918A
923
996
1569
1908
530
720
830
3781
5205
6926
98.1
98.4
98.5
98.3
98.4
98.5
97.9
98.1
98.2
97.5
97.8
97.8
2.4
2.2
2.3
5.8
6.8
6.0
5.2
6.2
5.4
4.7
5.8
4.9
2.2
2.0
2.0
50
55
55
98.30
98.50
98.60
1534
1875
2678
511
631
872
500
750
920
922
3117
4884
1650
2000
6968
9335
98.5
98.9
98.9
99.1
98.8
99.0
98.7
98.8
1.2
1.3
6.6
8.7
6.6
9.0
6.5
8.9
1.1
1.0
60
64
98.70
98.80
3930
4458
1310
1486
15
30
45
912B
912B
914D
276
350
540
165
180
290
551
904
1027
96.7
97.3
97.7
97.4
97.8
98.2
97.2
97.6
98.2
96.8
97.2
97.9
3.4
2.5
1.7
3.9
3.9
3.5
3.5
3.4
3.3
2.3
2.5
2.9
2.6
2.4
1.6
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
358
337
953
119
112
317
75
112.5
150
916A
916A
917
810
944
1438
360
470
650
1782
2521
2760
97.8
98.2
98.2
98.2
98.4
98.6
98.0
98.2
98.5
97.7
97.9
98.3
0.3
1.9
1.5
3.5
4.4
4.8
4.3
4.1
4.7
3.9
3.7
4.5
1.9
1.8
1.4
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
1006
1554
1665
355
518
555
225
300
500
923
919
920
1746
2400
3418
830
1100
1800
4047
5338
5858
98.3
98.6
98.6
98.6
99.0
99.0
98.5
99.0
99.0
98.3
98.9
98.9
1.6
1.6
0.9
5.5
5.9
4.9
5.6
6.1
5.4
5.4
5.9
5.3
1.4
1.4
0.8
55
55
60
98.50
98.60
98.70
2003
2655
4462
667
885
1487
19.1-25
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
031
Table 19.1-18. Typical Data for 480V Class K-Rated, TP-1 Dry-Type Transformers, Aluminum Wound

www.eaton.com.

kVA Frame Weight Losses in Watts Efciency (T Rise +20) % Regulation % Imp.
T Rise
+20
X
T Rise
+20
R
T Rise
+20
Sound
Level dB
TP1
Efciency
Inrush
No
Load
Total at
Rise +20
25% 50% 75% Full
Load
100%
PF
80%
PF
Absolute
Max.
Practical
Max.
Type KT-4 150C Rise NEMA TP-1 Efcient
15
30
45
912B
912B
912B
206
311
400
100
165
220
883
1263
1554
96.7
97.2
97.7
96.5
97.3
97.7
95.6
96.7
97.3
94.6
96.0
96.7
5.5
3.9
3.2
5.2
7.4
5.9
5.5
6.0
4.8
1.8
4.8
3.8
5.2
3.7
3.0
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
375
453
710
125
151
236
75
112.5
150
914D
916A
916A
547
800
1010
300
440
530
2622
3525
4055
97.9
98.0
98.1
97.8
98.0
98.2
97.2
97.6
97.8
96.6
97.0
97.4
3.3
3.0
2.6
6.7
7.4
6.6
5.3
6.0
5.4
4.4
5.3
4.8
3.1
2.7
2.3
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
995
1082
1574
331
360
524
225
300
500
918A
919
920
1680
2122
3201
700
1100
1800
5879
5895
7054
98.3
98.4
98.5
98.3
98.6
98.9
97.9
98.4
98.8
97.5
98.1
98.7
2.6
1.9
1.3
7.6
6.8
5.9
6.3
5.9
5.4
5.9
5.7
5.2
2.3
1.6
1.1
55
55
60
98.50
98.60
98.70
1943
2863
4588
647
954
1529
15
30
45
912B
912B
912B
307
313
400
135
165
220
394
1344
1463
96.3
97.4
97.8
97.5
97.3
97.9
97.6
96.6
97.5
97.5
95.9
97.0
1.8
4.1
3.0
2.7
5.1
6.1
2.2
4.6
5.2
1.4
2.4
4.4
1.7
3.9
2.8
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
491
584
591
163
194
197
75
112.5
150
914D
916A
917
587
947
1243
285
470
560
2355
2910
4119
97.9
97.9
98.1
97.9
98.1
98.2
97.5
97.9
97.8
97.0
97.5
97.4
2.9
2.4
2.5
6.7
5.0
6.6
5.9
4.3
5.7
5.2
3.7
5.2
2.8
2.2
2.4
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
823
1447
1468
274
482
489
225
300
918A
919
1680
2480
700
1100
5413
5735
98.3
98.4
98.3
98.7
98.1
98.5
97.7
98.2
2.3
1.8
7.5
6.7
7.0
6.3
6.7
6.1
2.1
1.5
55
55
98.50
98.60
1719
2547
573
849
15
30
45
912B
912B
914D
378
365
550
165
188
285
416
877
1055
96.4
97.2
97.4
97.6
97.7
98.1
97.7
97.6
98.0
97.6
97.2
97.8
1.7
2.4
1.8
2.9
3.9
3.7
2.5
3.5
3.4
1.9
2.6
2.9
1.7
2.3
1.7
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
482
583
708
160
194
236
75
112.5
150
916A
917
918A
774
1380
1604
360
550
700
1784
1872
2728
97.8
97.9
98.0
98.2
98.5
98.5
98.0
98.5
98.5
97.7
98.4
98.3
2.0
1.3
1.4
4.7
4.2
4.4
4.5
4.2
4.5
4.0
4.1
4.3
1.9
1.2
1.4
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
986
1577
1880
328
525
626
225
300
919
919
2336
2689
850
1100
3728
4589
98.4
98.4
98.7
98.8
98.6
98.7
98.4
98.5
1.4
1.4
5.0
5.5
5.2
5.8
5.1
5.6
1.3
1.2
55
55
98.50
98.60
2647
2610
882
870
15
30
45
912B
912B
914D
271
365
545
165
198
280
604
977
1215
96.7
97.1
97.5
97.3
97.6
98.0
97.0
97.3
97.8
96.5
96.9
97.4
3.1
2.7
2.2
4.2
4.3
4.2
3.6
3.5
3.3
2.1
2.4
2.6
2.9
2.6
2.1
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
379
565
890
126
188
277
75
112.5
150
916A
916A
917
812
920
1221
360
490
530
2139
3059
4297
97.7
98.0
98.1
98.0
98.2
98.1
97.8
97.8
97.7
97.4
97.4
97.2
2.6
2.4
2.7
5.9
5.0
6.5
4.9
4.1
5.3
4.3
3.4
4.6
2.4
2.3
2.5
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
907
1513
1790
302
504
597
225
300
923
919
1960
2358
830
1100
4461
5931
98.3
98.4
98.6
98.6
98.3
98.4
98.0
98.2
1.9
1.9
6.6
7.2
6.1
6.3
5.9
6.0
1.6
1.6
55
55
98.50
98.60
1771
2543
590
847
15
30
45
912B
912B
914D
332
390
548
165
200
280
432
903
1187
96.6
97.3
97.5
97.6
97.8
98.1
97.6
97.6
98.0
97.4
97.2
97.7
1.9
2.5
2.2
3.2
4.4
2.8
3.6
3.0
2.2
2.8
2.3
1.8
2.3
2.0
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
409
420
836
136
120
278
75
112.5
150
916A
916A
918A
808
990
1600
360
540
650
1850
2373
2372
97.8
97.9
98.1
98.1
98.3
98.5
97.8
98.2
98.4
97.5
98.0
98.1
2.4
1.8
1.3
5.6
4.5
3.4
4.8
4.0
3.0
4.3
3.6
2.8
2.2
1.6
1.1
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
805
1303
1932
268
434
644
225
300
919
919
2306
3291
850
1100
4001
4583
98.3
98.4
98.7
98.8
98.6
98.7
98.3
98.5
1.6
1.3
4.9
6.2
5.1
6.3
4.9
6.2
1.4
1.2
55
55
98.50
98.60
2508
2851
836
950
15
30
45
912B
912B
914D
315
408
555
165
188
280
536
854
982
96.4
97.4
97.6
97.3
97.9
98.2
97.2
97.7
98.2
96.9
97.3
98.0
2.5
2.3
1.6
3.9
4.0
3.2
3.6
3.6
3.0
2.5
2.8
2.5
2.5
2.2
1.6
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
375
497
656
125
166
218
75
112.5
150
916A
917
918A
838
1367
1607
400
550
668
1289
1905
2474
97.8
97.9
98.2
98.4
98.5
98.6
98.5
98.5
98.6
98.4
98.4
98.4
1.3
1.3
1.4
3.0
4.2
4.6
2.9
4.4
4.7
2.6
4.2
4.5
1.2
1.2
1.2
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
1624
1171
1562
541
390
520
225
300
919
920
2582
3228
850
1100
3471
3978
98.3
98.3
98.7
98.8
98.7
98.8
98.5
98.7
1.3
1.1
5.1
4.2
6.3
4.5
6.2
4.3
1.2
1.0
55
55
98.50
98.60
2159
3255
719
1085
19.1-26
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
032
Table 19.1-19. Typical Data for 480V Class NEMA TP-1 Dry-Type Transformers, Copper Wound

Typical values for copper windings. Refer to Pages 19.1-2319.1-25 for typical data for aluminum windings. Up-to-date design data is available at
www.eaton.com.

kVA Frame Weight Losses in Watts Efciency (Trise +20) % Regulation %
Imp.
X R Sound
Level dB
TP1
Efciency
Inrush
No
Load
Total at
Rise +20
25% 50% 75% Full
Load
100%
PF
80%
PF
Absolute
Max.
Practical
Max.
15
25
37.5
816
818
818
270
406
453
80
115
125
605
732
1154
97.6
97.9
98.2
97.5
98.1
98.1
96.9
97.7
97.6
96.3
97.3
97.0
3.5
2.7
4.2
3.7
4.2
3.5
4.8
2.3
2.5
4.0
3.5
2.5
2.7
45
45
45
97.70
98.00
98.20
551
1379
1321
183
459
440
50
75
100
167
819
820
821
814
657
803
960
1665
160
175
250
570
1159
2259
2504
3094
98.3
98.5
98.6
98.7
98.4
98.3
98.4
98.8
98.1
97.7
98.0
98.6
97.7
97.1
97.5
98.3
2.0
2.8
2.3
1.5
3.3
4.8
4.3
6.3
3.8
6.5
5.5
9.0
3.8
5.8
5.0
8.8
2.0
2.8
2.3
1.5
45
50
50
50
98.30
98.50
98.60
98.70
1321
2133
2779
2865
440
711
926
955
15
25
37.5
816
818
818
264
420
450
80
110
125
437
603
1217
97.8
97.9
98.2
98.1
98.2
98.0
97.8
98.0
97.5
97.3
97.7
96.9
2.4
2.0
2.9
2.2
2.9
4.5
3.3
3.2
5.9
2.2
2.6
5.1
2.4
2.0
2.9
45
45
45
97.70
98.00
98.20
718
862
1300
239
287
433
50
75
819
820
703
793
300
175
1409
2178
98.4
98.5
98.4
98.3
98.0
97.8
97.6
97.2
2.2
2.7
3.8
4.7
4.7
6.2
4.1
5.6
2.2
2.7
50
98.30
98.50
1498
2107
499
702
15
25
37.5
818
818
819
407
430
685
115
300
300
293
679
729
97.3
97.9
98.1
98.2
98.4
98.6
98.3
98.3
98.6
98.2
98.1
98.5
1.2
1.5
1.1
1.7
2.6
2.2
1.8
3.0
2.6
1.4
2.6
2.3
1.2
1.5
1.1
45
45
45
97.70
98.00
98.20
375
494
617
125
164
205
50
75
820
821
799
1042
180
250
1013
1447
98.3
98.3
98.6
98.6
98.4
98.4
98.1
98.1
1.7
1.6
2.9
3.4
3.4
3.8
2.9
3.5
1.7
1.6
45
50
98.30
98.50
989
1015
329
338
15
30
37.5
912B
912B
912B
250
350
415
150
165
210
755
1100
1382
98.9
97.3
97.5
97.0
97.5
97.6
96.4
97.0
97.1
95.7
96.5
96.5
4.2
3.2
3.2
5.3
4.5
4.8
4.8
5.2
4.0
2.6
4.1
2.5
4.0
3.1
3.1
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
321
614
639
107
204
213
45
50
75
912B
914D
914D
416
647
643
215
270
320
1786
1220
2903
97.4
97.7
97.9
97.4
98.2
97.5
96.9
98.0
97.1
96.2
97.7
96.4
3.6
2.0
3.6
5.5
3.5
7.4
4.6
2.8
4.3
3.0
2.0
2.5
3.5
1.9
3.4
45
45
50
97.70
98.00
98.00
637
1072
1015
212
357
338
112.5
150
225
916A
916A
917
876
1064
1569
420
530
560
3699
4269
7124
97.9
98.1
98.4
97.9
98.2
98.1
97.4
97.8
97.5
96.8
97.3
97.0
3.0
2.7
3.2
6.7
5.3
8.7
5.1
4.3
7.4
4.2
3.5
6.8
2.9
2.5
2.9
50
50
55
98.20
98.30
98.50
1185
1752
2498
395
584
832
300
500
923
919
2050
3681
730
1400
7959
8292
98.4
98.8
98.3
98.9
97.9
98.7
97.4
98.4
2.6
1.6
6.7
7.4
5.5
6.8
4.9
6.7
2.4
1.4
55
60
98.60
98.70
2872
3839
964
1279
15
30
45
912B
912B
912B
256
337
446
95
180
215
669
1077
1625
97.7
97.7
97.7
97.8
97.8
97.7
97.3
97.3
97.2
96.7
96.8
96.6
4.0
3.0
3.2
5.4
6.2
5.2
4.8
4.6
4.4
2.9
3.5
3.1
3.8
3.0
3.1
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
229
433
658
76
144
219
50
75
112.5
914D
914D
916A
630
662
914
270
320
400
1213
2346
2953
97.8
97.9
98.1
98.2
98.0
98.2
98.0
97.6
97.9
97.7
97.0
97.4
2.0
2.8
2.5
3.5
5.4
5.7
3.0
4.7
5.0
2.3
3.9
4.5
1.9
2.7
2.3
45
50
50
98.00
98.00
98.20
960
842
1036
320
280
345
150
225
300
500
916A
917
923
919
1132
2036
2325
3681
530
650
830
1400
3364
6445
6038
7841
98.3
98.4
98.6
98.8
98.5
98.3
98.7
98.9
98.2
97.8
98.4
98.7
97.8
97.3
98.1
98.5
2.0
2.9
2.0
1.4
4.8
8.8
5.7
6.8
4.4
8.1
5.2
6.8
4.0
7.7
4.9
6.6
1.9
2.6
1.7
1.3
50
55
55
60
98.30
98.50
98.60
98.70
1605
1572
1860
4033
535
524
620
1344
15
30
45
912B
912B
912B
349
410
504
135
210
200
390
823
1308
96.6
97.3
97.9
97.7
97.9
98.0
97.7
97.7
97.7
97.6
97.4
97.2
1.8
2.1
2.5
2.4
3.4
4.5
2.1
3.0
3.9
1.3
2.1
3.1
1.7
2.0
2.5
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
449
493
473
150
164
158
75
112.5
150
916A
916A
917
818
1065
1410
370
440
650
1837
2409
3349
97.9
98.1
98.3
98.2
98.3
98.5
98.0
98.0
98.3
97.7
97.6
97.9
2.0
1.8
1.9
9.3
3.8
3.9
4.3
3.3
3.7
3.8
2.8
3.2
2.0
1.8
1.8
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
937
1754
1593
312
584
531
225
300
923
919
2030
3041
830
1100
4096
4646
98.4
98.5
98.7
98.8
98.5
98.7
98.3
98.5
1.6
1.4
5.4
5.6
5.4
6.1
5.2
6.0
1.5
1.2
55
55
98.50
98.60
2568
3753
856
1251
19.1-27
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
033
Table 19.1-20. Typical Data for 480V Class K-Rated, TP-1 Dry-Type Transformers, Copper Wound

www.eaton.com.

Imp.
X R Sound
Level dB
TP1
Efciency
Inrush
No
Load
Total at
Rise +20
25% 50% 75% Full
Load
100%
PF
80%
PF
Absolute
Max.
Practical
Max.
15
30
45
912B
912B
912B
251
326
479
100
165
220
635
1134
1505
96.8
97.4
97.6
97.1
97.5
97.8
96.6
97.1
97.3
96.0
96.5
96.8
3.7
3.5
3.0
5.0
5.3
5.6
4.2
4.3
5.0
2.1
2.9
4.1
3.6
3.2
2.9
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
265
504
670
88
168
223
75
112.5
150
914D
916A
916A
463
977
1212
300
440
540
2883
2952
3716
97.9
98.1
98.3
97.7
98.2
98.4
97.1
97.9
98.0
96.4
97.5
97.6
3.6
2.6
2.4
7.1
6.6
6.0
5.9
5.6
5.1
4.7
5.1
4.6
3.4
2.2
2.1
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
975
1031
1574
325
344
524
225
300
917
923
1815
2400
650
830
5420
6259
98.4
98.6
98.5
98.6
98.1
98.4
97.7
98.0
2.4
2.2
7.6
6.3
6.5
5.2
6.2
4.9
2.1
1.8
55
55
98.50
98.60
1694
2594
565
864
15
30
45
912B
912B
912B
256
341
526
95
165
220
702
1007
1200
96.7
97.4
97.9
96.9
97.6
98.1
96.3
97.3
97.9
95.6
96.8
97.5
4.2
3.0
2.3
5.7
4.8
5.0
5.0
4.2
4.1
2.9
3.1
3.5
4.0
2.8
2.2
45
45
50
97.00
97.50
97.70
279
466
633
93
155
211
75
112.5
150
914D
916A
917
759
1030
1631
300
470
650
1715
2735
3076
98.1
98.0
98.2
98.3
98.3
98.5
98.1
98.0
98.3
97.8
97.7
98.1
1.9
2.2
1.7
5.0
4.4
4.9
4.5
3.8
4.5
4.1
3.2
4.2
1.9
2.0
1.6
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
929
1171
1250
309
390
416
225
300
918A
923
1965
2337
690
830
4434
6127
98.5
98.6
98.6
98.7
98.4
98.4
98.1
98.0
1.9
2.0
5.6
5.2
5.3
4.7
5.0
4.3
1.7
1.8
55
55
98.50
98.60
1979
2187
659
729
15
30
45
912B
912B
914D
365
424
653
165
210
290
371
787
977
97.0
97.3
97.4
98.0
97.9
98.1
98.1
97.8
98.1
98.0
97.6
98.0
1.5
2.0
1.6
2.3
3.2
3.1
2.1
2.9
3.0
1.5
2.2
2.5
1.4
1.9
1.5
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
499
659
925
166
219
308
75
112.5
150
225
916A
916A
917
923
640
1264
1825
2096
350
560
650
890
1951
2009
2873
4449
97.8
98.2
98.5
98.3
98.1
98.7
98.7
98.6
97.8
98.6
98.5
98.4
97.5
98.4
98.2
98.1
2.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
5.2
4.3
6.1
6.5
4.9
4.2
6.4
6.6
4.4
4.0
6.3
6.4
2.1
1.3
1.5
1.6
50
50
50
55
98.00
98.20
98.30
98.50
854
1449
1288
2292
284
483
429
764
15
30
45
912B
912B
914D
346
390
623
165
190
235
461
908
1328
96.2
97.2
97.6
97.4
97.7
97.9
97.5
97.5
97.6
97.3
97.1
97.2
2.1
2.6
2.5
3.0
4.0
3.2
2.5
3.3
2.8
1.6
2.3
1.4
2.0
2.4
2.4
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
527
579
854
176
193
285
75
112.5
150
225
916A
916A
917
923
848
1080
1431
2129
370
455
600
830
2402
2991
3686
4250
97.7
98.0
98.2
98.4
97.9
98.2
98.3
98.6
97.5
97.9
98.1
98.4
97.0
97.4
97.7
98.2
2.8
2.4
2.3
2.0
5.7
4.3
5.1
6.3
4.5
3.5
4.2
5.4
3.6
2.7
3.7
5.1
2.7
2.3
2.1
1.5
50
50
50
55
98.00
98.20
98.30
98.50
1046
1180
1250
2771
348
393
416
923
15
30
45
912B
912B
914D
341
444
598
165
188
250
378
824
1476
96.6
97.1
97.4
97.8
97.8
97.7
97.9
97.6
97.4
97.9
97.3
96.9
1.5
2.2
2.8
2.4
3.6
4.6
2.1
3.1
4.0
1.6
2.2
2.9
1.4
2.1
2.7
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
472
620
939
157
206
313
75
112.5
150
225
916A
916A
917
923
894
1054
1399
2088
350
460
600
890
2128
2612
3185
4382
97.9
98.1
98.2
98.3
98.1
98.3
98.5
98.6
97.9
98.1
98.3
98.4
97.5
97.8
98.0
98.2
1.9
2.0
2.0
1.8
5.1
4.3
5.9
6.1
4.6
3.3
5.4
5.7
4.0
2.6
5.1
5.5
2.4
1.9
1.7
1.6
50
50
50
55
98.00
98.20
98.30
98.50
847
1375
1379
2490
282
458
460
830
15
30
45
912B
912B
914D
370
490
635
165
188
290
382
595
1189
96.7
97.4
97.4
97.8
98.2
97.9
97.9
98.2
97.8
97.8
98.1
97.5
1.5
1.4
2.1
2.4
3.0
3.9
2.2
2.8
3.5
1.6
2.5
2.8
1.4
1.4
2.0
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
472
592
736
157
197
245
75
112.5
150
225
916A
916A
918A
919
987
854
1807
4091
410
560
650
1200
1351
2039
3053
2364
97.7
98.1
98.0
98.2
98.9
98.6
98.4
98.9
98.4
98.5
98.3
99.1
98.3
98.3
98.0
99.1
1.4
1.4
1.7
0.6
2.8
4.2
4.3
2.7
2.6
4.3
4.0
2.9
2.3
4.1
3.7
2.8
1.3
1.3
1.6
0.5
50
50
50
55
98.00
98.20
98.30
98.50
1590
1374
1472
4321
530
458
490
1440
19.1-28
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
034
Table 19.1-21. Typical Data for 480V Class K-Rated and HMT, TP-1 and CSL-3 Dry-Type Transformers, Copper Wound

www.eaton.com.

Imp.
X R Sound
Level dB
Efciency Inrush
No
Load
Total at
Rise +20
25% 50% 75% Full
Load
100%
PF
80%
PF
Absolute
Max.
Practical
Max.
Type KT-13 115C Rise CSL-3 Efcient
15
30
45
912B
912B
915D
325
370
635
78
125
135
359
636
1076
97.6
98.1
98.5
98.1
98.4
98.5
98.0
98.3
98.1
97.7
98.0
97.7
2.0
1.7
2.2
3.7
2.7
4.1
3.2
2.3
3.5
2.6
1.6
2.8
1.9
1.7
2.1
45
45
45
98.00
98.30
98.50
307
779
617
102
260
206
75
112.5
150
915D
917
917
870
1526
1665
225
350
350
1529
1768
2419
98.5
98.6
97.8
98.6
98.8
98.9
98.4
98.7
98.7
98.0
98.5
98.4
1.9
1.3
1.5
4.9
3.5
4.5
4.4
3.1
4.2
4.1
2.8
3.9
1.7
1.3
1.4
50
50
50
98.60
98.80
98.90
993
2447
1976
331
816
659
225
300
918A
919
2094
3900
650
750
3650
3731
98.9
98.9
98.9
99.1
98.8
99.0
98.5
98.8
1.5
1.3
5.4
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.1
5.1
1.3
1.0
55
55
99.00
99.04
2686
2990
895
997
Type KT-9 115C Rise CSL-3 Efcient
15
30
45
912B
912B
915D
335
406
635
78
125
135
353
670
1075
97.4
98.0
98.6
98.0
98.3
98.5
98.0
98.1
98.2
97.7
97.8
97.7
2.0
1.9
2.3
3.7
2.7
4.1
3.2
2.4
3.5
2.6
1.5
2.8
1.8
1.8
2.1
45
45
45
98.00
98.30
98.50
287
780
603
96
260
201
75
112.5
150
225
915D
917
917
918A
870
1526
1665
2094
210
350
350
650
1551
1583
2463
3766
98.5
98.6
98.8
98.8
98.6
98.9
98.9
98.9
98.3
98.8
98.7
98.7
98.0
98.6
98.4
98.4
1.9
1.2
1.6
1.7
4.0
3.0
4.5
5.5
3.6
2.7
4.2
5.2
3.1
2.5
4.0
5.0
1.8
1.1
1.4
1.4
50
50
50
55
98.60
98.80
98.90
99.00
958
2480
1930
2778
319
827
643
926
Type NON HMT 115C Rise NEMA TP-1 Efcient
15
30
45
912B
912B
915D
362
430
627
80
100
170
527
1040
1368
97.6
98.3
98.3
97.7
98.0
98.2
97.3
97.4
97.7
96.7
96.7
97.2
3.2
3.2
2.8
5.9
6.2
6.0
5.1
5.4
5.2
4.2
4.4
4.4
3.0
3.1
2.7
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
75
112.5
150
916A
917
918A
926
1628
2001
250
400
500
2096
2515
2688
98.4
98.4
98.5
98.3
98.5
98.7
97.9
98.3
98.6
97.4
97.9
98.3
2.6
2.0
1.6
7.0
5.5
5.6
6.2
4.9
5.2
5.7
4.5
5.0
2.5
1.9
1.5
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
225
300
919X
919X
3596
3891
590
800
3310
4854
98.8
98.7
98.9
98.9
98.8
98.7
98.6
98.4
1.5
1.7
6.2
7.1
6.0
7.0
5.9
6.8
1.2
1.4
55
55
98.50
98.60
Type THR HMT 115C Rise NEMA TP-1 Efcient

15
30
45
912B
912B
915D
450
610
80
100
170
708
1409
1374
97.1
98.0
98.2
97.0
97.4
98.1
96.4
96.5
97.7
95.5
95.6
97.1
4.3
4.7
2.8
7.4
8.0
4.8
6.3
6.8
4.2
4.7
5.2
3.2
4.2
4.4
2.7
45
45
45
97.00
97.50
97.70
75
112.5
150
916A
917
918A
868
1643
250
400
500
2341
2685
3304
98.2
98.3
98.5
98.1
98.4
98.6
97.6
98.1
98.3
97.0
97.7
97.9
2.9
2.2
2.0
6.6
5.5
6.7
5.8
5.0
6.3
5.0
4.6
6.0
2.8
2.0
1.9
50
50
50
98.00
98.20
98.30
225
300
919X
919X
3370
3894
590
800
3712
4688
98.7
98.9
98.8
99.0
98.7
98.8
98.4
98.5
1.7
1.7
6.6
7.4
6.4
7.2
6.2
7.1
1.4
1.3
55
55
98.50
98.60

19.1-29
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Dimensions
035
DimensionsNEMA TP-1, K-Factor TP-1 and HMT TP-1 Types
Figure 19.1-5. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsVentilated Transformers, NEMA TP-1, K-Factor TP-1 and HMT TP-1 Types
Table 19.1-22. Ventilated TransformersApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Frame Drawing
Number
Dimensions
Height Width Length
FR816
FR818
FR819
1
1
2
31.30 (795.0)
37.59 (954.8)
42.03 (1067.6)
22.89 (581.4)
22.89 (581.4)
24.22 (615.2)
18.39 (467.2)
20.36 (517.10
23.84 (605.5)
FR820
FR814, FR814E
FR821
2
2
2
42.03 (1067.6)
62.91 (1597.9)
62.91 (1597.9)
24.22 (615.2)
29.97 (761.2)
29.97 (761.2)
23.84 (605.5)
33.97 (862.8)
33.97 (862.8)
FR912B
FR914D
FR915D
1
1
1
30.00 (762.0)
39.00 (990.6)
39.00 (990.6)
23.00 (584.2)
29.00 (736.6)
29.00 (736.6)
16.50 (419.1)
22.00 (558.8)
22.00 (558.8)
FR916A
FR917
FR918A
2
2
2
48.56 (1233.4)
56.17 (1426.7)
62.18 (1579.4)
28.22 (716.8)
31.44 (798.6)
31.44 (798.6)
23.42 (594.9)
24.67 (626.6)
30.68 (779.3)
FR923
FR919, FR919E, FR919X
FR920, FR920E, FR920X
FR922
2
3
3
3
57.54 (1461.5)
75.00 (1905.0)
75.00 (1905.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
36.69 (931.9)
44.20 (1122.7)
44.20 (1122.7)
69.26 (1759.2)
32.65 (829.3)
36.23 (920.2)
36.23 (920.2)
42.65 (1083.3)
Drawing 3
Drawing 2
Drawing 1
Front
Left
Top
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Outside
Width
Front
Left
Top
Outside
Width
Outside
Height
Outside
Length
Front
Left
Top
Outside
Width
Outside
Height
Outside
Length
19.1-30
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
DimensionsEncapsulated Type EP
036
Figure 19.1-6. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsEncapsulated Transformers (Type EP) Single-Phase
Table 19.1-23. Encapsulated Transformers (Type EP)Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Right
Top
Drawing 10
Top
Back
Right
Drawing 11
Top
B
a
c
k
Right
Drawing 6
Top
Right
Back
Drawing 7
Top
Right Back
Drawing 8
Top
Right Back
Drawing 9
Outside
Width
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Outside
Width
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Outside
Width
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Outside
Width
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Outside
Width
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Outside
Width
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Back
Frame Drawing
Number
Dimensions
Height Width Length
FR52
FR54
FR55
6
6
6
8.91 (226.3)
8.91 (226.3)
8.91 (226.3)
4.11 (104.4)
4.11 (104.4)
4.11 (104.4)
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
FR56
FR57
FR58A
7
7
7
8.97 (227.8)
8.97 (227.8)
11.28 (286.5)
4.87 (123.7)
4.87 (123.7)
5.99 (152.1)
4.06 (103.1)
4.91 (124.7)
5.75 (146.1)
FR59A
FR67
FR68
7
7
7
11.28 (286.5)
13.41 (340.6)
13.41 (340.6)
5.99 (152.1)
6.37 (161.8)
6.37 (161.8)
5.75 (146.1)
6.52 (165.6)
6.52 (165.6)
FR176
FR177
FR301
8
9
11
14.25 (361.9)
16.00 (406.4)
22.26 (565.4)
7.69 (195.3)
10.38 (263.7)
12.71 (322.8)
8.00 (203.2)
9.89 (251.2)
12.79 (324.9)
FR178
FR302
FR304
9
11
11
16.00 (406.4)
25.26 (641.6)
25.26 (641.6)
10.38 (263.7)
12.71 (322.8)
14.72 (373.9)
9.89 (251.2)
12.79 (324.9)
14.82 (376.4)
FR179
FR180
FR182
FR190
9
9
10
10
19.00 (482.6)
19.00 (482.6)
23.31 (592.1)
26.31 (668.3)
13.38 (339.9)
13.38 (339.9)
16.35 (415.3)
16.35 (415.3)
10.52 (267.2)
10.52 (267.2)
14.12 (358.6)
14.12 (358.6)
19.1-31
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
DimensionsEncapsulated Type EP
037
Figure 19.1-7. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsEncapsulated Transformers (Type EP) Single-Phase
Table 19.1-24. Encapsulated Transformers (Type EPT)Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Front Left
Top
Drawing 13
Front
Left
Top
Drawing 12
Top
Back
Right
Drawing 14
Outside
Width
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Outside
Width
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Outside
Width
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Frame Drawing
Number
Dimensions
Height Width Length
FR132
FR300A
FR57P
13
12
14
20.67 (525.0)
28.24 (717.3)
9.34 (237.2)
19.02 (483.1)
22.42 (569.5)
4.45 (113.0)
13.59 (345.2)
14.06 (357.1)
5.18 (131.6)
FR58AP
FR567P
FR568P
14
14
14
11.68 (296.7)
13.03 (330.9)
13.78 (350.0)
4.99 (126.7)
5.74 (145.8)
6.22 (158.0)
5.99 (152.1)
6.56 (166.6)
6.32 (160.5)
19.1-32
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
DimensionsEncapsulated Type EPT
038
Figure 19.1-8. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsEncapsulated Transformers (Type EPT) Three-Phase
Table 19.1-25. Encapsulated Transformers (Type EPT)Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Front
Drawing 15 Drawing 16 Drawing 17
Left
Front
Left
Top
Front
Left
Top
Outside
Width
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Outside
Length
Top
Outside
Width
Outside
Width
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Outside
Height
Frame Drawing
Number
Dimensions
Height Width Length
FR201
FR102
FR103
15
15
15
13.40 (340.4)
13.12 (333.2)
15.90 (403.9)
15.93 (404.6
19.59 (497.6)
16.93 (430.0)
8.26 (209.8)
7.09 (180.1)
10.01 (254.3)
FR200
FR97
FR95
15
15
15
15.90 (403.9)
15.19 (385.8)
17.38 (441.5)
16.93 (430.0)
25.68 (652.3)
20.00 (508.0)
10.01 (254.3)
8.38 (212.9)
10.52 (267.2)
FR243
FR96
FR244
FR245
16
15
16
17
17.38 (441.5)
16.19 (411.2)
28.15 (715.0)
32.06 (814.3)
20.00 (508.0)
29.68 (753.9)
26.58 (675.1)
30.29 (769.4)
10.52 (267.2)
9.42 (239.3)
14.66 (372.4)
15.68 (398.3)
19.1-33
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Dimensions
039
Figure 19.1-9. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsCSL-3 Transformers
Table 19.1-26. CSL-3 TransformersApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Front
Left
Top
Front
Left
Top
Outside
Width
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Outside
Width
Outside
Height
Outside
Length
Drawing 5
Drawing 4
Frame Drawing
Number
Dimensions
Height Width Length
912B
915D
917
4
4
4
30.00 (762.0)
39.18 (995.2)
56.18 (1427.0)
23.00 (584.2)
29.00 (736.6)
31.25 (793.8)
16.50 (419.1)
22.00 (558.8)
24.24 (615.7)
918A
919
5
5
62.18 (1579.4)
75.00 (1905.0)
31.25 (793.8)
44.46 (1129.3)
30.25 (768.4)
35.75 (908.1)
19.1-34
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Dimensions
040
Figure 19.1-10. Enclosure Dimensional DrawingsTotally Enclosed Nonventilated Transformers
Table 19.1-27. Totally Enclosed Nonventilated Transformers
See Eaton Catalog CA08100003E,
Electrical Sector Solutions Volume 2
Commercial Distribution, Tab 9 for
product information and frame
cross-reference data.
Frame Drawing
Number
Dimensions
Height Width Length
FR818N
FR819N
FR820N
26
27
27
37.59 (954.8)
42.03 (1067.6)
42.03 (1067.6)
22.89 (581.4)
24.22 (615.2)
24.22 (615.2)
20.36 (517.1)
23.84 (605.5)
23.84 (605.5)
FR814N
FR912BN
FR914DN
27
26
26
62.91 (1597.9)
30.00 (762.0)
39.18 (995.2)
29.97 (761.2)
23.00 (584.2)
29.00 (736.6)
33.97 (862.8)
16.50 (419.1)
22.00 (558.8)
FR915DN
FR916AN
FR917N
26
27
27
39.18 (995.2)
46.58 (1183.1)
56.18 (1427.0)
29.00 (736.6)
28.22 (716.8)
31.44 (798.6)
22.00 (558.8)
23.42 (594.9)
24.67 (626.8)
FR918AN
FR923N
FR919N
FR920N
27
27
28
28
62.18 (1579.4)
57.50 (1460.5)
75.00 (1905.0)
75.00 (1905.0)
31.44 (798.6)
36.69 (931.9)
44.21 (1122.9)
44.21 (1122.9)
30.68 (779.3)
32.65 (829.3)
36.23 (920.2)
36.23 (920.2)
Front
Left
Top
Front
Left
Top
Front
Left
Top
Outside
Width
Outside
Length
Outside
Height
Outside
Width
Outside
Width
Outside
Height
Outside
Height
Outside
Length
Outside
Length
Drawing 28
Drawing 27
Drawing 26
19.1-35
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
FAQ
Product Selection
041
Frequently Asked Questions
About Transformers
Can 60 Hz transformers be used at other frequencies?
Transformers rated for 60 Hz can be applied to circuits with
a higher frequency, as long as the nameplate voltages are
not exceeded. The higher the frequency that you apply to a
60 Hz transformer, the less voltage regulation you will have.
60 Hz transformers may be used at lower frequencies, but
only at reduced voltages corresponding to the reduction in
frequency. For example, a 480120V 60 Hz transformer
can carry rated kVA at 50 Hz but only when applied as a
400100V transformer (50/60 x 480 = 400).
Can single-phase transformers be used on a three-phase source?
Yes. Any single-phase transformer can be used on a three-
phase source by connecting the primary terminals of the
single-phase transformer to any two wires of a three-phase
system. It does not matter whether the three-phase source is
three-phase three-wire or three-phase four-wire. The output
of the transformer will be single-phase.
Can transformers be used to create three-phase power from a
single-phase system?
No. Single-phase transformers alone cannot be used to
create the phase-shifts required for a three-phase system.
Phase-shifting devices (reactors or capacitors) or phase
converters in conjunction with transformers are required
to change single-phase power to three-phase.
What considerations need to be taken into account when
operating transformers at high altitudes?
At altitudes greater than 3300 ft (1000m), the density of
the air is lesser than at lower elevations. This reduces the
ability of the air surrounding a transformer to cool it, so the
temperature rise of the transformer is increased. Therefore,
when a transformer is being installed at altitudes greater
than 3300 ft (1000m) above sea level, it is necessary to
derate the nameplate kVA by 0.3% for each 330 ft (100m)
in excess of 3300 feet.
What considerations need to be taken into account when
operating transformers where the ambient temperature is high?
Eatons dry-type transformers are designed in accordance
with ANSI standards to operate in areas where the average
maximum ambient temperature is 40C. For operation in
ambient temperatures above 40C, there are two options:
1. Order a custom-designed transformer made for the
specic application.
2. Derate the nameplate kVA of a standard transformer
by 8% for each 10C of ambient above 40C.
What is the normal life expectancy of a transformer?
When a transformer is operated under ANSI/IEEE basic loading
conditions (ANSI C57.96), the normal life expectancy of a trans-
former is 20 years. The ANSI/IEEE basic loading conditions are:
A. The transformer is continuously loaded at rated kVA
and rated voltages.
B. The average temperature of the ambient air during
any 24-hour period is equal to 30C and at no time
exceeds 40C.
C. The altitude where the transformer is installed does not
exceed 3300 ft (1000m).
What are Insulation Classes?
Insulation classes were originally used to distinguish
insulating materials operating at different temperatures.
In the past, letters were used for the different designations.
Recently, insulation system temperatures (C) have replaced
the letters designations.
Table 19.1-28. Insulation Classes
How do you know if the enclosure temperature is too hot?
UL and CSA standards strictly regulate the highest tempera-
ture that an enclosure can reach. For ventilated transformers,
the temperature of the enclosure should not increase by more
than 50C in a 40C ambient at full rated current. For encapsu-
lated transformers, the temperature of the enclosure should
not increase by more than 65C in a 25C ambient at full rated
current. This means that it is permissible for the temperature
of the enclosure to reach 90C (194F). Although this tempera-
ture is very warm to the touch, it is within the allowed stan-
dards. A thermometer should be used to measure enclosure
temperatures, not your hand.
Can transformers be reverse-connected (reverse-fed)?
Yes, with limitations. Eatons single-phase transformers
rated 3 kVA and larger can be reverse-connected without any
loss of kVA capacity or any adverse effects. Transformers
rated 2 kVA and below, because there is a turns ratio
compensation on the low voltage winding that adjusts
voltage between no load and full load conditions, should
not be reverse-fed.
Three-phase transformers with either delta-delta or delta-
wye congurations can also be reverse-connected for step-
up operation. When reverse-feeding a delta-wye connected
transformer, there are two important considerations to take
into account: (1) The neutral is not connected, only the
three-phase wires of the wye system are connected; and
(2) the ground strap between X0 and the enclosure must
be removed. Due to high inrush currents that may be
created in these applications, it is recommended that you
do not reverse-feed transformers rated more than 75 kVA.
The preferred solution is to purchase an Eaton step-up
transformer designed specically for your application.
Can transformers be connected in parallel?
Yes, with certain restrictions. For single-phase transformers
being connected in parallel, the voltages and impedances
of the transformers must be equal (impedances must be
within 7.5% of each other). For three-phase transformers,
the same restrictions apply as for single-phase transformers,
plus the phase shift of the transformers must be the same.
For example, a delta-wyeconnected transformer (30 phase
shift) must be connected in parallel with another delta-wye
connected transformer, not a delta-deltaconnected trans-
former (0 phase shift).
Previous
Designation
Insulation System
Rating (C)
Class A 105
Class B 150
Class F 180
Class H 220
Class R 220
19.1-36
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
FAQ
Product Selection
042
Why is the impedance of a transformer important?
The impedance of a transformer is important because it is
used to determine the interrupting rating and trip rating of
the circuit protection devices on the load side of the trans-
former. To calculate the maximum short-circuit current on
the load side of a transformer, use the following formula:
Full load current for single-phase circuits is:
and for three-phase circuits the full load current is:
Example: For a standard three-phase, 75 kVA transformer,
rated 480V delta primary and 208Y/120V secondary (catalog
number V48M28T75J) and impedance equal to 5.1%, the full
load current is:
The maximum short-circuit load current is:
The circuit breaker or fuse on the secondary side of this
transformer would have to have a minimum interrupting
capacity of 4083A at 208V. NEMA ST-20 (1992).
A similar transformer with lower impedance would require
a primary circuit breaker or fuse with a higher interrupting
capacity.
What clearances are required around transformers when they
are installed?
All dry-type transformers depend upon the circulation of
air for cooling; therefore, it is important that the ow of air
around a transformer not be impeded. UL 1561 requires that
there be no less than 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) clearance
between any side of a transformer with ventilation openings
and any wall or obstruction. In compliance with NEC 450-9,
Eatons ventilated transformers have a note on their name-
plates requiring a minimum of 6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
clearance from the ventilation openings and walls or other
obstructions. This clearance only addresses the ventilation
needs of the transformer. There may be additional local
codes and standards that affect installation clearances.
Transformers should not be mounted in such a manner that
one unit will contribute to the additional heating of another
unit, beyond allowable temperature limits, for example,
where two units are mounted on a wall one above the other.
How Can I Reduce Transformer Sound Levels?
All transformers emit some audible sound due mainly to
the vibration generated in their core by alternating ux.
NEMA ST-20 denes the maximum average sound levels
for ventilated transformers.
Table 19.1-29. NEMA ST-20 and IEEE C57.12.01 Maximum Audible
Sound Levels for 100V Class Transformers (dB 40)
All Eaton ventilated transformers are designed to have
audible sound levels lower than those required by NEMA
ST-20. However, consideration should be given to the
specic location of a transformer and its installation
to minimize the potential for sound transmission to
surrounding structures and sound reection. The
following installation methods should be considered:
1. If possible, mount the transformer away from corners
of walls or ceilings. For installations that must be near
a corner, use sound-absorbing materials on the walls
and ceiling if necessary to eliminate reection.
2. Provide a solid foundation for mounting the transformer
and use vibration dampening mounts if not already
provided in the transformer. Eatons ventilated trans-
formers contain a built-in vibration dampening system
to minimize and isolate sound transmission. However,
supplemental vibration dampening mounts installed
between the oor and the transformer may provide
3. Make electrical connections to the transformer using
exible conduit.
4. Locate the transformer in an area where audible sound
is not offensive to building inhabitants.
5. Install low sound transformers (up to 5 dB below
NEMA ST-20 sound limits).
Maximum Short-Circuit
Load Current (Amps)

Full Load Current (Amps)
Transformer Impedance
------------------------------------------------------------------- =
Nameplate Volt-Amps
Load (output) Voltage
-----------------------------------------------------------
Nameplate Volt-Amps
Load (output) Volts 3
--------------------------------------------------------------------
75,000 VA
208V x 1.732
--------------------------------- 208.2A =
208.2A
0.051
------------------- 4082.4A =
kVA Ventilated
Transformers
Encapsulated
Transformers
09
1050
51150
151300
40
45
50
55
45
50
55
301500
501700
7011000
10011500
60
62
64
65
57

19.1-37
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
FAQ
Product Selection
043
Why are CSL-3 transformers offered, and when should they
be used?
There is still a lot of confusion on the use of CSL-3
transformers. There currently is no legal requirement to use
CSL-3 transformers; however, their use provides the following
benets in the form of lower losses and operating costs,
lower carbon footprint and lower heat rejection, and lower
air-conditioning requirements in a project. Currently (circa
2010) within the U.S., the minimum efciency levels for low
voltage transformers legislated by Congress are equivalent
to TP-1/CSL-1. CSL-3 offers additional energy savings above
and beyond TP-1 based on 10 CFR Part 431Energy
Conservation Program for Commercial Equipment
Distribution Transformers Energy Conservation Standards;
Final Rule published October 2007.
CSL-3 transformers provide 3040% less losses than NEMA
TP-1 transformers. By using CSL-3 transformers, increased
efciencies can help to gain LEED point (because LEED only
incorporates regulated losses, the comparison of No Load
Losses against standard NEMA TP-1 transformers can be
used to document energy savings). It is recommended that
the design engineer understand the transformer application
within a project so that the cost savings and return can be
accurately determined. In addition, always make sure that
the CSL-3 performance data obtained from manufacturers
references a NEMA or DOE standard and is veried by a
third-party independent test lab verses manufacturer-
determined standards and self-certied documentation.
Eatons CSL-3 compliant transformers are Type E3, such
as 75 kVA, style number N48M28F75CUE3.
19.1-38
September 2011
Sheet 19
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
044


September 2011

Contents

Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchgearLow Voltage
20.0-1

Sheet

20

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

001

M
e
t
a
l
-
E
n
c
l
o
s
e
d

D
r
a
w
o
u
t
S
w
i
t
c
h
g
e
a
r
L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

Metal-Enclosed Drawout Switchgear
Low Voltage
Magnum DS

(For detailed information on Magnum
DS breakers, refer to

Tab 26

.)

General Description

Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.1-1

Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.1-2

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.1-3

Instrumentation/Metering . .

20.1-4

Accessories/Options. . . . . .

20.1-4

Magnum DS Front
Accessible Switchgear. . .

20.1-5

Magnum DS Arc-
Resistant Switchgear . . . .

20.1-6

Magnum DS Power
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . .

20.1-7

Magnum DS Switchgear
Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.1-9

Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System. . . .

20.1-10

Series NRX . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.1-13

Metering and
Monitoring Devices . . . . .

20.1-16
Technical Data

Voltage and Bus Ratings . .

20.1-18

Heat Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.1-18

Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.1-18

Breaker Ratings . . . . . . . . .

20.1-19

Breaker Control Voltages . . .

20.1-20

CT Metering Accuracies. . .

20.1-22

Voltage Transformers. . . . .

20.1-22


.

20.1-22
Layout Dimensions

Breaker Arrangements . . . .

20.1-25

Floor Plan/Conduit Area . . . .

20.1-34

Switchgear Section View . . .

20.1-36

Outdoor Enclosure . . . . . . .

20.1-39

Arc-Resistant
Layout Restrictions. . . . . .

20.1-41

Center of Gravity/Weights .

20.1-45
Specications

See Eatons

Product Specication
Guide,

available on CD or on the Web.
CSI Format:
1995 2010

Metal-Enclosed Drawout
SwitchgearLow Voltage and DSL

II

For DS/DS

II

or DSL/DSL

II

Switchgear,
please consult factory at 1-800-257-3278.

Specications

See Eatons

Product Specication
Guide

CSI Format:
1995 2010

20.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

20

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

002



20.1-1

September 2011


Sheet

20

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Magnum DS

General Description

003


Eatons Magnum DS power circuit
breaker switchgear is backed by
40 years of power circuit breaker and
switchgear development that have
set the industry standards for quality,
reliability, maintainability and
extended operating life, when it
comes to protecting and monitoring
low voltage electrical distribution
systems. Magnum DS switchgear is
designed to meet the changing needs
of our customers by providing:

Lower installation and
maintenance costs

Higher interrupting ratings and
withstand ratings

Better coordination capability

Increased tripping sensitivity

Enhanced safety measures

Higher quality, reliability and
maintainability

Communications and power
quality monitoring and
measuring capabilities

Flexible layouts that maximize
use of capital by minimizing
equipment footprint
Magnum DS switchgear can meet the
needs of general applications, service
entrances, harsh environments, multi-
ple source transfers, special grounding
systems and many others.
With a modern design, Magnum DS
metal-enclosed low voltage switchgear
and power circuit breakers provide:

100% rated, fully selective
protection

Integral microprocessor-based
breaker tripping systems

Two-step stored-energy breaker
closing

Standard 100 kA short-circuit
bus bracing

Optional 150 and 200 kA
short-circuit bus bracing

Optional metal barriers to isolate
the cable compartment from the
bus compartment

Both indoor and outdoor aisle and
aisleless enclosures

Full range of safety solutions
dealing with arc ash hazard
and operator error
Many other features for coordinated,
safe, convenient, trouble-free, and
economical control and protection of
low voltage distribution systems are
also provided.


Magnum DS breakers are designed to:

ANSI Standards C37.13, C37.16,
C37.17, C37.50

UL 1066
Magnum DS switchgear conforms to
the following standards:

CSA

C22.2, No. 31-M89

ANSI C37.20.1

ANSI C37.51

UL

Standard 1558 and UL
Standard 891

American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)

Built in an ISO

certied facility
Maximum ratings for Magnum DS
switchgear are 600 Vac, 10,000A
continuous cross bus and 200,000A
short-circuit capacity.

Seismic Qualication

Refer to

Tab 1

for information on

Structure Features

Standard nish

: Gray paint nish
(ANSI 61) using a modern, completely
automated and continuously moni-
tored electrostatic powder coating.
This continually monitored system
includes spray de-grease and clean,
spray rinse, iron phosphate spray
coating spray rinse, non-chemical seal,
oven drying, electrostatic powder
spray paint coating and oven curing.

Integral base

: The ruggedly formed
base greatly increases the rigidity of
the structure, reduces the possibility of
damage during the installation of the
equipment, and is suitable for rolling,
jacking and handling. A lifting angle
is permanently welded into the bus
compartment structure for increased
strength. The bottom frame structure
members are indented to allow the
insertion of a pry bar.

Heavy-duty door hinges

: Each
breaker door is mounted with hinge
pins. Removal of the door is easily
accomplished by just lifting the hinge
pin. This allows easy access to the
breaker internal compartment for
inspection and maintenance.

Rear cover/doors

: In Magnum DS
switchgear, standard rear bolted
covers are provided. They are split
into two sections to facilitate handling
during removal and installation.
Optional rear doors are also available.
20.1-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

20

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Magnum DS

General Description

004

Through-the-door design

: The
following functions may be performed
without the need to open the circuit
breaker doorlever the breaker
between positions, operate manual
charging system and view the spring
charge status ag, close and open
breaker, view and adjust trip unit and
read the breaker rating nameplate.

Through-the-Door Design

Cassette design

: The breaker cassette
supports the breaker in the cell, as well
as on the movable extension rails
when the breaker is placed into or
removed from the cell. The extension
rails allow the breaker to be drawn
out without having to de-energize the
entire switchgear lineup.

Accessibility

: When the door is open or
removed, each breaker compartment
provides front access to isolated,
vertical wireways, primary disconnects,
cell current transformers and other
breaker compartment accessories for
ease of eld wiring and trouble-
shooting eld connections.

Breaker Cell

Four-position drawout

: Breakers can
be in connected, test, disconnected or
removed position. The breaker can be
moved between the connected, test
and disconnected positions while the
compartment door is closed.

Closing spring automatic discharge

:
Mechanical interlocking automatically
discharges the closing springs when
the breaker is removed from its
compartment.

Optional safety shutters

: Positive
acting safety shutters that isolate the
breaker connections to the main bus
when the breaker is withdrawn from
the cell is an option offered for addi-
tional safety beyond our standard
design. They reduce the potential
of accidental contact with live bus.
Insulating covers (boots) are
furnished on live main stationary
disconnecting contacts in compart-
ments equipped for future breakers.

Breaker inspection

: When withdrawn
on the rails, breaker is completely
accessible for visual inspection; tilting is
not necessary. The rails are permanent
parts of every breaker compartment.

Interference interlocks

: Supplied on
breakers and in compartments where
the compartments are of the same
physical size. Interference interlocks
ensure an incorrect breaker cannot
be inserted.

Optional key interlock (switchgear
mounted)

: This mechanism holds the
breaker cell mechanically trip-free to
prevent electrical or manual closing.
Breaker can be stored in compartment,
and completely removed for mainte-
nance or for use as a spare without
disturbing the interlock. Modication
of the breaker is not required. An
additional single cylinder breaker
mounted key interlock is available
as an option.

Optional mechanical interlock

:
Available between adjacent breakers
to ensure the proper sequence of
operation between two circuit breakers
or a circuit breaker and a fuse truck.

Bus Features

Buses and connections

: Vertical
and cross bus ratings in Magnum DS
switchgear are based on a UL and
ANSI standard temperature rise of
65C above a maximum ambient air
temperature of 40C. As an option,
55C temp rise over a maximum
ambient air temp of 40C is available.

Bus ampacities

: Vertical and cross bus
ratings in Magnum DS are 2000, 3200,
4000 and 5000A. In addition, a 6000,
8000 and 10,000A cross bus rating is
available. Vertical section bus is sized
per main cross bus maximum rating
or by ANSI C37.20.1 Section 7.4.1.3.
Table 11 to a maximum of 5000A.

Bus bracing

: Unique vertical bus
conguration provides an optional
industry-leading short-circuit with-
stand rating of 200,000A. Standard
bracing is 100,000A. The U shaped
bar is the heart of the Magnum DS
vertical bus. This conguration
provides a much higher mechanical
strength. To further demonstrate
the strength and rigidity of this bus
system, it has been veried through
testing to withstand 85,000A short-
circuit for a full 60 cycles.

Silver plating

: Bolted, silver-plated
copper main buses are standard. The
plating is over the entire length of the
bar, not just at the joints. Optional
tin-plated copper buses are available.

Bus joints

: All joints are bolted and
secured with Belleville-type spring
washers for maximum joint integrity.
These washers reduce the potential of
joint hardware loosening during the
change of joint temperature associ-
ated with variations of the loads.
Optional maintenance-free hardware
is also available.

Full neutral

: For four-wire applications,
the neutral bus is rated 100% of main
bus rating as standard. Neutral ratings
up to a maximum of 10,000A are
available as an option. Additionally,
four-pole breakers can be used in
conjunction with four-wire systems.

Ground

: A ground bus is furnished
the full length of the switchgear
assembly and is tted with terminals
for purchasers connections.

Glass reinforced polyester and
Ultramid

standoff insulation system

:
Glass reinforced polyester has been
used on both low and medium voltage
switchgear for decades. By combining
this industry proven material with
Ultramid insulation, a total system
providing exceptional mechanical and
dielectric withstand strength, as well
as high resistance to heat, ame and
moisture, is produced. Substantial
testing to demonstrate accelerated
effects of heating and cooling on the
mechanical and dielectric properties
of this system prove it to provide
superior performance for decades
of trouble-free operation.


20.1-3

September 2011


Sheet

20

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Magnum DS

General Description

005

Optional conductor insulation
covering

: For applications requiring
additional bus protection in harsh
environments, Magnum DS switchgear
is designed for the addition of optional
conductor insulation covering, in
addition to providing full UL air
clearance without insulation. This
material is applied during the assembly
of the bus, and covers all vertical and
horizontal phase bus bars. Removable
boots provide access to section-to-
section bus joints for inspection and
maintenance purposes. This insulation
is not available for vertical sections
containing Series NRX breakers.

Optional Insulated Bus

Barriers

: Optional grounded metal
barriers isolate the main bus and
connections from the cable compart-
ment providing added safety to the
workers while reducing the potential
of objects falling into the bus compart-
ment. In addition, vertical barriers
between cable sections can be added
to reduce potential hazards. Barriers
are removable to give access to the
bus compartment for inspection and
maintenance. Barriers can be either
solid metal or vented for ease of
infrared scanning.

Optional Bus Compartment and
Vertical Section Barriers

Wiring Features

Cable compartment

: The cable
compartment gives ample room
for terminating the power cables.
Removable top roof sheets allow
for easy conduit hub installation.
The oor of the cable compartment
is open to allow cable entry from
underground duct banks. Optional
oor plates are available.
In addition to cable, Pow-R-Way

busway and nonsegregated bus duct
can be terminated in the compartment.

Lug pad

: The lugs are located on the
breaker run-backs to accommodate
lug orientations at a 45 angle to
reduce the bending radius of the cable
needed for making the connections,
thus reducing installation and mainte-
nance time. Mechanical setscrew type
lugs are standard. Optional NEMA
two-hole compression lugs are avail-
able as an option.

Control wireway

: An isolated
vertical wireway is provided for
routing of factory and eld wiring
in each switchgear section. Breaker
secondary terminal blocks are
mounted as standard above each
circuit breaker. The terminal blocks are
rated 30A, and will accept bare wire,
ring or spade terminals for wire size
ranges of #22#10. Extruded loops are
punched in side sheets of the vertical
wireway to allow securing of customer
control wiring without the use of
adhesive wire anchors.
Control circuits may be wired in all
cells without removing the circuit
breaker. In addition, power circuits
may be connected in the rear of the
switchgear at the same time control
circuits are being wired in the front
of the switchgear.
For applications involving excessive
wiring, or nonstandard terminal blocks,
terminal blocks are mounted on the
rear frame with the power cables
where they are readily accessible for
customers connections and inspection.
Control wire: Standard wire is Type
SIS insulated stranded copper, extra
exible No. 14 AWG minimum.
Control wire marking: Each wire
is imprinted with ink cured under ultra-
violet light for durability and for easy
identication by the user. The enhanced
solvent resistance and durability of the
aerospace grade UV cure ink has been
tested for severe environments. The
imprinting is made every 3.00 inches
(76.2 mm) along the length of the wire
to make eld troubleshooting easier.
The point of origin, wire designation
and point of destination are imprinted
in the following format: <origin zone/
wire name/destination zone>. Each
device has a uniquely designated
zone. < indicates the direction of
the wire origination and > indicates
the direction of the wire destination.
As an option, wire marking can be
made using sleeve type or heat
shrink sleeve type.
Control Wire Marking
Secondary terminal compartment:
There are 72 nger-safe secondary
connections for a standard frame
Magnum breaker, 60 for a narrow
frame Magnum breaker and 54 for
a Series NRX breaker. The customers
secondary terminal connections are
located at the front of the structure
behind a separate door providing
access to these connections without
the need to open the breaker
compartment door.
Short-circuiting terminal blocks:
One provided for each set of
instrumentation or relaying
application current transformers.
Shipping split connection: At each
shipping split, the control connections
are made with plug-in terminal blocks
rated 600V, 40A. The terminal blocks
mechanically interlock without remov-
ing the line or load connections. This
method of making the shipping split
control connections increases the
speed of installation and reduces the
potential of incorrect connections.
20.1-4
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
General Description
006
Instrumentation/Metering Features
Flexibility: Magnum DS switchgear
allows for a variety of metering options:
Analog switchboard type meters
such as ammeters, voltmeters,
watthour, power factor and so on
Electronic power metering such as
the Power Xpert, PX 2000, IQ 250/
260 and IQ Analyzer
Instrument door-mounted meters.
For feeder circuit instrumentation,
2% accuracy ammeters and
ammeter switches can be mounted
on the secondary contact compart-
ment door between the breaker
compartment doors. The ammeters
and switches are immediately
associated with denite breaker
circuits. Other devices, such as
control pushbuttons, breaker control
switches, indicating lights and test
switches can be mounted on these
panels, within space limitations
See Tabs 2, 3 and 4 for Metering and
Power Management products.
Voltage transformers: Voltage
transformers are rated 10 kV BIL,
and are protected by both primary
and secondary fuses. The primary
fuses are of the current limiting type.
Current transformers: Current
transformers for metering and instru-
mentation are mounted in the breaker
compartments and are front accessi-
ble. Secondary wiring between the
current transformer and the standard
shorting terminal block is color-coded
for ease of identication.
Control power transformers:
Control transformers are provided
when required for AC control of circuit
breakers, space heaters and/or trans-
former fans. Like voltage transformers,
they are protected by current limiting
primary fuses. Non-current limiting
fuses are used on the secondary side
to protect branch circuits.
Instrumentationdoor-mounted
secondary terminal compartment
door: Devices, such as control push-
buttons, indicating lights, switches
and analog meters can be mounted
on these panels, within space limita-
tions. The ammeters and switches are
immediately associated with denite
breaker circuits.
Devices Mounted on Secondary
Terminal Compartment Door
Instrument compartment door:
Devices, such as electronic power
metering and analog switchboard type
meters that do not t on the secondary
terminal compartment door, are
mounted on the instrument compart-
ment door or on a panel of a blank cell.
Power Xpert Meter Display
Accessories and Options Features
Switchgear accessories: Standard
accessories furnished with each
Magnum DS switchgear assembly
include:
One breaker levering crank
Insulating covers or boots
furnished on live main stationary
disconnecting contacts in compart-
ments equipped for future breakers
Removable cover to block opening
in the door when the breaker is
temporarily removed from its
compartment
Traveling type circuit breaker lifter,
rail-mounted on top of switchgear
Floor-running portable circuit
breaker lifter and transfer truck
with manual lifting mechanism. This
requires approximately 84.00 inches
(2133.6 mm) deep front aisle space
Test cabinet for electrically operated
breakers, with pushbuttons, control
cable and receptacle, for separate
mounting. Optional space heaters
to be placed in the bottom of the
breaker, cable and bus compart-
ments. Space heaters are provided
as standard in outdoor gear to
reduce condensation
Portable test kit (MTK2000) for
secondary injection testing and
verication of trip units. Uses
standard 120V, 15A, single-phase,
60 Hz supply, available from
any outlet. Allows for testing
of both Magnum DS and
Series NRX breakers
Remote racking device (MRR1000)
for both breaker racking and
operation (open/close) from a safe
distance. Mounts to any existing
Magnum DS breaker. Uses standard
120V, 15A, single-phase, 60 Hz
supply, available from any outlet
Optional Switchgear Mounted Lifter
MRR1000
20.1-5
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
General Description
007
Enhanced Switchgear Options
Infrared scanning windows for bus
thermal scans
White interior panels for ease
of visibility in instrument
compartments
Maintenance-free (Torque-&-Forget)
bus hardware
Lug booting that provides additional
protection against accidental
contact to live parts in the cable
compartment
Grounding balls and covers for
protecting maintenance personnel
downstream of switchgear feeder
breakers
Electronic remote control device
that allows for breaker to open
and close away from the front
of the switchgear
Grounding Balls and Covers
Remote Control Device
MTK2000 Trip Unit Test Kit
Magnum DS Front-
Accessible Switchgear
Magnum DS Front-Accessible Switchgear
42.00-Inch (1066.8 mm) Deep Enclosure
When oor space is limited, or room
constraints dictate that equipment
be mounted against a wall, why
compromise on switchgear design?
Eatons Magnum DS front-accessible
switchgear combines the robustness of
UL
1558 low voltage switchgear with

the exibility of UL 891 switchboard
design. The front-accessible switchgear
offering allows mounting against a
wall, or in other tight locations, where
a standard rear-accessible switchgear
lineup would not normally t. The three
divisions of rear-accessible switchgear
are redistributed into two vertical
sections, with the breaker and the bus
in one half and cable and bus in the
other half on the right-hand side. Both
sections can be easily accessed by
operators and maintenance personnel
from the front of the switchgear.
Product Offering
UL 1558
20008000A bus
8006000A breakers
100, 150 and 200 kA bus designs
600 Vac class
NEMA
1 indoor (corner section

available for layout exibility)
NEMA 3R outdoor, both aisle and
aisleless enclosures
CommercialOfce buildings, high
rise and convention centers
IndustrialAutomotive, petro-
chemical, pharmaceutical, pulp
and paper, utility and data centers
InstitutionalUniversities
and hospitals
GovernmentWater treatment,
federal buildings and municipalities
Critical Power OEMsGenerator
and UPS manufacturers
Features
Standard 42.00-inch (1066.8 mm)
switchgear depth
Up to 4-high breaker arrangement
Breaker sections are 18.00, 22.00,
24.00 or 44.00 inches (457.2, 558.8,
609.6 or 1117.6 mm) wide depend-
ing on breaker type and frame sizes
Cable compartments are 18.00, 22.00,
24.00, 30.00 or 44.00 inches (457.2,
558.8, 609.6, 762.0 or 1117.6 mm)
wide depending on cable or
conduit sizes
Substation arrangement, with close
coupling to dry-type or liquid-lled
transformers, where required
Benets
Improved uptimeHighest
withstand ratings in the industry
allow for levels of selective
coordination never seen before
Improved maintainability
Dedicated secondary terminals
with separate access door and
front accessible control wireway
Increased reliabilityModular
design allows for reduced parts
for both structures and breakers
Increased safetyEnhanced
performance suite of options
Reduced installation costsFirst
UL 1558 switchgear designed to be
placed against a wall, allowing for
reduced oor plan requirements
without sacricing design
20.1-6
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
General Description
008
Magnum DS Arc-
Resistant Switchgear
ArcGard Magnum DS Switchgear
Arc-resistant low voltage switchgear
is a new development in the Magnum
DS line that protects operating and
maintenance personnel from danger-
ous arcing faults by channeling the arc
energy out the top of the switchgear.
Arc faults, caused by human error
or insulation failure, can generate
thermal energy as high as 35,000F
and a blast equivalent to 20.7 lbs of
TNT. While arc-resistant gear does not
prevent these arcs from occurring, it
does safely redirect and contain these
arcs that do occur, regardless of the
originating location of the arc. ArcGard
Magnum DS switchgear has been
tested in all three compartments for a
full 0.5 seconds, passing ANSI Type 2
and Type 2B standards at 100 kA at
508V and 85 kA at 635V.
Accessibility Types
Arc-resistant switchgear performance
is dened by its accessibility type in
accordance with IEEE test guide
C37.20.7 as follows:
Type 1: Switchgear with arc-resistant
accessible front of the equipment only.
Type 2: Switchgear with arc-resistant
accessible exterior (front, back
and sides) of the equipment only.
(Type 2 incorporates Type 1.)
Type 2B: Switchgear with Type 2
accessibility plus arc-resistant in
front of the instrument/control
compartment with the instrument/
control compartment door opened.
(Type 2B incorporates Type 2.)
Normal Operating Conditions
Arc-resistant features are intended
to provide an additional degree of
protection to the personnel perform-
ing normal operating duties in close
proximity to the equipment while
the equipment is operating under
normal conditions.
The normal operating conditions for
proper application of arc-resistant
switchgear designs are as follows:
All doors and covers are properly
closed and latched
Pressure relief devices are free to
operate
The fault energy available to the
equipment does not exceed the
rating of the equipment (short-
circuit current and duration)
There are no obstructions around
the equipment that could direct the
arc fault products into an area
intended to be protected
The equipment is properly
grounded
The user should also refer to
documents such as NFPA 70E, for
safety training and safe work practices
and methods of evaluating safe work
distances from energized equipment
based on the potential ash hazard,
and use proper PPE when working
on or near energized equipment
with the door/cover opened or not
properly secured.
Product Offering
Arc-resistant switchgear comes
standard with:
Up to 100 kA short circuit at 508 Vac
maximum and 85 kA short circuit at
635 Vac maximum
Up to 10 kA horizontal main bus
continuous current
Up to 5 kA vertical bus
continuous current
Magnum DS power circuit
breaker frame ratings between
800A and 6000A
Up to four high breaker congura-
tion with no additional layout
restrictions (requires 10-foot
ceiling clearance)
Additional safety without
increasing the footprint of
regular Magnum DS switchgear
Standard Features
ANSI Type 2 arc-resistance: Type 2
arc-resistant switchgear regardless
of whether the arc originates the
breaker, bus or cable compartment
Stronger door and latch: The robust
doors are made of heavy 12 gauge
metal and secured with two-point
latches. One piece doors cover both
primary and secondary controls so
that the arc gasses cannot escape by
secondary contacts
Bellows and Two-Point Door Latch
Breaker bellows: Bellows surround
the breaker door, preventing arc
gasses from escaping around the
nose of the breaker while ensuring
easy racking of the breaker into the
Rear dynamic ap system: The
ventilation openings in the breaker
must be open during operation to
allow proper equipment ventilation,
but sealed off during an arc event.
The rear dynamic ap system uses
gravity to keep the aps open
during normal operating conditions
and the arc pressure wave to close
the aps during an arcing event. It
is a passively designed system so
there are no electrical or automated
parts that could break or fail
Rear Dynamic Flap System
20.1-7
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
General Description
009
Ventilation system: Each breaker
compartment is vented to allow
ionized gas to ow into the bus
compartment from any location
in the switchgear and out the
top of the switchgear through
the hinged aps
Bottom or top cable or bus
duct entry
Cable compartment oor plates
Optional Features
ANSI Type 2B arc-resistance
Plenum: The plenum is mounted
on top of arc-resistant gear to direct
dangerous arc gasses as they leave
the switchgear. The exit path can
either be a side or rear exit, with
a 4-foot blast zone around the exit
protection: Zone selective interlock-
ing capability is also available in
arc-resistant gear, allowing the
breaker closest to the fault to trip
without any preset time delay while
the remainder of the distribution
system remains online
System
Safety shutters
One piece hinged and bolted
rear panel
Insulated bus
Vented bus/cable compartment
barriers: Bus/cable compartment
barriers are only available vented to
allow ow of arc gasses in the case
of an arc event
Cable compartment
segregation barrier
UL 1558/UL 1066
ANSI C37.20.1, C37.13, C37.51
ANSI C37.20.7
CSA C22.2 No 31-04
Third-party UL witnessed
and certied
NFPA 70E
Magnum DS Power
Circuit Breakers
Eatons Type MDS power circuit
breakers constitute a complete,
modern and rugged line of low voltage
power circuit breakers using Eatons
DE-ION
principle of arc extinction.

The breaker family is distinguished
by its similarity of appearance
and operation frame to frame. All
frame sizes are either manually or
electrically operated. Refer to Tab 26
for detailed information on Magnum
DS low voltage power circuit breakers.
Breaker Features
Four Physical Frame Sizes
Narrow, standard, double narrow and
double to promote breaker application
in compact modular enclosures and to
improve enclosure density.
Contacts
Magnum DS has silver tungsten
moving contacts and silver graphite
stationary contacts. The contacts
provide a long-wearing, low-resistance
joint. The contacts are protected from
arcing damage even after repeated
interruptions by the heel-toe action,
which causes the integral arcing
contacts to mate before the main
contacts part. The arcing contacts
then part last, striking the arc away
from the main contacts.
The main contacts are of the butt type
and are composed of multiple ngers
to give many points of contact without
alignment being critical.
Magnum DS Breaker Contacts
(Arc Chutes Removed)
Stored-Energy Mechanism
A cam-type closing mechanism
closes the breaker. It receives its
energy from a spring that can be
charged by a manual handle on the
front of the breaker or by a universal
electric motor.
Release of the stored energy
is accomplished by manually
depressing a button on the front
of the breaker or electrically energizing
a releasing solenoid.
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit
Breakers have high withstand ratings
from 42 to100 kA to provide for maximum
system coordination and selectivity.
Magnum MDSL Current Limiting Power
Circuit Breakers have integral current
limiters to provide interrupting ratings
of 200 kA at 600 Vac.
Magnum MDSX Current Limiting Power
Circuit Breakers have fast opening
contacts to provide interrupting ratings
up to 200 kA at 480 Vac without fuses.
20.1-8
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
General Description
010
Arc Chute
There are three basic means of
extinguishing an arc: lengthening
the arc path; cooling by gas blast or
contraction; deionizing or physically
removing the conduction particles
from the arc path.
The DE-ION principle is incorporated
in all Magnum DS circuit breakers.
This makes possible faster arc
extinction for a given contact travel,
ensures positive interruption and
minimum contact burning.
Levering Mechanism
The worm gear levering mechanism
is self-contained on the breaker
drawout element and engages
slots in the breaker compartment.
A standard 3/8-inch (10 mm) drive
set is used to lever the breaker
between the connected, test and
disconnected positions.
Mechanical interlocking is arranged
so that levering cannot be accom-
plished unless the breaker is in the
opened position.
Protection During Levering Operation
When levering the breaker between
the connected, test and disconnected
positions, the operator is protected
from contact with live parts by the
breaker door.
True two-step stored energy closing:
Refers to the sequence required to
charge and close the breaker.
1. The breaker closing springs are
charged either through the
manual-charging handle or by
the optional charging motor.
The breaker is mechanically inter-
locked to prevent closing of the
breaker until the closing springs
are fully charged.
2. With the closing springs fully
charged, the breaker can then
be closed by pressing the manual
close pushbutton on the breaker,
or by the optional spring release
coil through a remote electrical
signal.
This means that the energy required
to open the breaker is always restored
following a closing operation.
Stored energy is energy held in
waiting, ready to open or close the
breaker within ve cycles or less.
The unique cam and spring design
provides necessary energy for a single
close-open sequence as well as the
energy for multiple charge-close
operations such as this possible
sequence: charge-close-recharge-
open-close-open.
The closing springs are interlocked
with the breaker racking mechanism
to ensure the closing springs are
discharged before the breaker can
be removed from the compartment.
Provisions for padlocking: All breakers
include provision for padlocking open
to prevent electrical or manual closing.
This padlocking can secure the breaker
in the connected, test or disconnected
position by preventing levering of the
breaker.
Ease of inspection and maintenance:
Magnum DS breakers are designed for
maximum accessibility and the utmost
ease of inspection and maintenance.
Manually operated breakers:
Manually operated breakers are
equipped with a manual charging
handle to charge the closing springs.
Manual closing and tripping pushbut-
tons are used to operate the breaker.
Remote closing and tripping can be
accomplished by installing optional
electric spring release and shunt trip
coils (see Tables 20.1-9 and 20.1-10 for
available control voltages, currents
and motor-operated spring charging
times). The breaker closing springs
must be charged manually, then
remote closing and tripping signals
can be sent to the breaker.
Electrically operated breakers:
Electrically operated breakers are
equipped with a spring charging
motor and electrically operated
spring release and shunt trip coils
(see Tables 20.1-9 and 20.1-10 for
available control voltages, currents
and motor-operated spring charging
times). The breaker manual charging
handle can be used to charge the
closing springs when power is not
available to the charging motor.
Optional Breaker Attachments
and Accessories
Shunt trip device (ST): Provides
for remote electrically controlled
breaker opening when energized
by a rated voltage input
Spring charge motor (MOT):
Charges the breaker closing springs
automatically, facilitating remote or
local closing. The motor assembly
includes its own cut-off switch that
changes state at the end of the
charging cycle. This contact can be
wired out for external indication
Spring release device (SR): Provides
breaker closing when its coils are
energized by a rated voltage input
Undervoltage release (UVR):
Trips the breaker when an existing
voltage signal is lost or falls below
an established threshold
Auxiliary switch: Up to 6a/6b
auxiliary individual dedicated
contacts are available for customer
use to indicate if the breaker is in
the OPEN or CLOSE position
Mechanical trip indicator ag:
The red trip indicator ag pops out
to provide local visual indication
when the Digitrip RMS trip unit
acts to trip the breaker on an over-
current condition. Available in two
options: an interlocked version that
mechanically locks out the breaker
until the indicator is manually reset
and a non-interlocked version for
indication only
Bell alarm/overcurrent trip switch
(OTS): Provides two Form C contacts
that change state when the Digitrip
RMS trip unit acts to trip the breaker.
The contacts are available for
external indication or customer
use and are manually reset by the
mechanical trip indicator
Padlockable pushbutton cover:
Permits padlocking hinged cover
plates to block access to the PUSH
ON and PUSH OFF buttons on the
breaker faceplate
Mechanical operations counter:
Records mechanical operations of
the breaker over its installed life
Key off lock provisions: Enables
mounting of a single cylinder Kirk
,
Castell or Ronis Key Lock to lock the
breaker in the OPEN position
Latch check switch: Provides one
Form C contact that changes state
when the breaker is ready to
close. Can be wired to the spring
release device for fast transfer
applications or wired for external
ready-to-close indication
20.1-9
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
General DescriptionElectronic Trip Units
011
Trip Units
Digitrip RMS trip unit. Eatons
Digitrip RMS trip units feature a
dependent curve that is depicted in
the nameplate by a blue shaded area
of the trip curve. The dependent curve
affords better protection exibility.
Additionally, all of the trip units have,
as standard, thermal memory, 50/60 Hz
operation and thermal self-protection
at 90C.
Digitrip RMS integral microprocessor-
based breaker overcurrent trip
systems: Provide maximum reliability
with true rms sensing as standard,
gives excellent repeatability and
requires minimum maintenance.
No external control source is
required for its protective functions.
Digitrip 1150+
Trip functions: Magnum DS trip units
provide the maximum in exibility and
are available in the following congu-
rations: LSI, LSIG, LSIA (ground fault
alarm only). In each case, either the
short delay or instantaneous (not both)
functions may be defeated. This
reduces the need for spare breaker
inventories and provides maximum
usage of interchangeable breakers.
Digitrip RMS 520: Enables the user
as many as nine phase and ground
current protection settings for maxi-
mum exibility in trip-curve shaping
and multi-unit coordination, and adds
zone selective interlocking.
Digitrip RMS 520M: Adds phase,
neutral and ground current metering
with a four-character LCD display
window with 2% current metering
accuracy and type LSIA alarm when
ground fault settings are exceeded.
Digitrip RMS 520MC: Adds communi-
cation of trip values and breaker status
(open, close and tripped). Adds
System (ARMS).
Digitrip RMS 1150+: Provides
programmability for more sophisti-
cated distribution systems. Adds
System (ARMS).
Increased protection and
coordination capabilities
Systems monitoring information
including power factor, voltage
current, harmonic distortion
values, and waveform capture
with a three-line, (eight characters
per line) LED display
Two programmable contacts for
customer use
Time stamping of trip events for
improved troubleshooting and
diagnostics
Accuracy of 1% on metered values
and 2% on energy and power
Systems diagnostic information
Web enabled or PowerNet
communications
Breaker health menu
Additional protection functions:
Undervoltage/overvoltage
Underfrequency/overfrequency
Voltage unbalance
Reverse power
Zone selective interlocking: The
Digitrip RMS zone selective interlocking
(ZSI) capability provides positive
system coordination without time
delays. ZSI allows the breaker closest
to the fault to trip without any preset
time delay. The breaker closest to the
fault trips rst, while the remainder
of the distribution system remains
online, thus avoiding unnecessary
and costly downtime.
20.1-10
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
General DescriptionElectronic Trip Units
012
Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System
System Maintenance Mode function
of the Digitrip 520MC and 1150+ can
reduce arc ash incident energy that is
generated on a fault condition. Eatons
System employs a separate, dedicated
analog trip circuit that eliminates
microprocessor latencies, resulting
in clearing times that are faster than
standard instantaneous tripping. This
provides superior arc ash reduction
to competing systems that simply
lower the standard instantaneous
pickup set point.
There are three ways to arm the
Maintenance Mode Arc Flash
Reduction setting. One method is
locally at the trip unit front panel. For
the 520MC, the 2-position switch in the
Maintenance Mode section of the trip
unit is used. Turning the switch to the
ON position will arm the setting. For
the 1150+, the local front keypad is
used to enable the Maintenance Mode
setting. The setting is located in the
SYSTEM submenu of programmable
settings (PGM SET).
For the second method of arming the
Maintenance Mode function, a remote
switch wired through the breaker
secondary contacts can remotely
arm the Maintenance Mode setting. A
high-quality gold-plated or palladium
contact is required in this application.
A third method to arm the mainte-
nance setting is via a communication
device. This can be accomplished
through a Power Xpert
Gateway.
A BIM (Breaker Interface Module),
Power Xpert software or PowerNet
system is another communication
method to arm the setting.
For Magnum DS breakers, the Arcash
Reduction Maintenance System setting
has ve unique settings (2.5, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0,
10.0 x I
n
). To adjust this setting, a rotary
switch on the trip unit face is provided
for the 520MC while the 1150+ trip unit
uses its local keypad. For the Series
NRX breakers, the Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System setting has a
constant setting of 5000A.
For all three arming methods, the
520MC provides a blue LED to conrm
the Maintenance Mode function is on.
In addition, there is also a normally
open breaker contact that allows the
user to wire in an external stacklight or
annunciator for remote indication. For
the 1150+, the message Maintenance
Mode Enabled will be shown on its
LED display. The 1150+ also has an
alarm relay that can be programmed
to track the Maintenance Mode state.
The Maintenance Mode function will
provide fast tripping even when the
regular Instantaneous is set to OFF.
The Instantaneous LED position is
also used to indicate a trip initiated
by the Maintenance Mode setting.
The 520MC LCD display, if powered,
will indicate with four dashes while
the 1150+ will display the message
Maintenance Mode Trip.
Arcash Reduction Maintenance System
System can be wired out to a separate
lockable switch/light combination
mounted on the switchgear for ease
of operation. Additionally, the switch
can be wired out to a remote station
for operation outside the arc ash
boundary of the switchgear, and the
alarm can be wired to an optional
beacon or audible device.
20.1-11
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Low Voltage Trip UnitSelection Data
013
Table 20.1-1. Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum DS and SB ANSI/UL Rated Power Circuit Breakers
Over and undervoltage alarm or trip, over

and underfrequency alarm or trip, voltage
unbalance alarm or trip, reverse power trip
and phase rotation alarm are included.
1200A maximum ground fault setting per

UL/NEC
Test set for secondary injection.

Legend: I
n
=Rating Plug and Sensor Rating.
I
r
=Long Delay Pickup setting.
Trip Unit Type Digitrip 520 Digitrip 520M Digitrip 520MC Digitrip 1150+
Ampere Range
Interrupting rating at 480V
rms sensing
2006000A
42200 kA
Yes
2006000A
42200 kA
Yes
2006000A
42200 kA
Yes
2006000A
42200 kA
Yes
Protection Ordering options
xed rating plug (I
n
)
overtemperature trip
LI, LSI, LSIG
Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA
Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA
Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA
Yes
Yes
Long
delay
protection
(L)
Long delay pickup
Long delay time I
2
t at 6 x I
r
Long delay time I
4
t

IEEE curves
0.41.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
No
No
0.41.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
No
No
0.41.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
No
No
0.41.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
15 seconds
Yes
Long Delay Thermal Memory
High Load Alarm
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
0.51.0 x (I
r
)
Short
delay
protection
(S)
Short delay pickup
Short delay time I
2
t at 8 x I
r

Short delay time at
Short delay time ZSI
2001000% x (I
r
) & M1
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
2001000% x (I
r
) & M1
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
2001000% x (I
r
) & M1
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
2001000% x (I
r
) & M1
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
Instanta-
neous
protection
(I)
making current release
off position
2001000% x (I
n
) & M1
Yes
LSI & LSIG
2001000% x (I
n
) & M1
Yes
Yes
2001000% x (I
n
) & M1
Yes
Yes
2001000% x (I
n
) & M1
Yes
Yes
Ground
fault
protection
(G)
Ground fault alarm

Ground fault pickup
Ground fault delay I
2
t at 0.625 x I
n
No
25100% x (I
n
)
100500 ms
Yes
25100% x (I
n
)
100500 ms
Yes
25100% x (I
n
)
100500 ms
Yes
24100% x (I
n
)
100500 ms
Ground fault delay at
Ground fault ZSI
Ground fault thermal memory
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
Disable ground fault protection No No No No
Neutral protection (N) Model LSI Model LSI Model LSI Model LSI
System Diagnostics
Cause of trip LEDs
Magnitude of trip information
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote signal contacts
Programmable contacts
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
System Monitoring
Digital display
Current (% ) full scale sensor
No
No
4-character LCD
Yes +/2%
4-character LCD
Yes +/2%
24-character LED
Yes +/1%
Voltage (%) L to L
Power and energy (%)
Apparent power kVA and demand
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes +/1%
Yes +/2%
Yes
Reactive power kvar
Power factor
Crest factor
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Power qualityharmonics
% THD, waveform capture
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
System Communications
Type
Power supply in breaker
No
N/A
No
Optional
INCOM/PowerNet
Standard
INCOM/PowerNet/TripLink
Standard
Additional Features
Trip log (three events)
Electronic operations counter
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Testing method
Waveform capture
Test set
No
Test set
No
Test set
No
Integral and test set
Yes
Breaker health monitor
Programmable relay functions
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
20.1-12
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
014
Table 20.1-2. Magnum DS Breakers Digitrip Adjustable Trip Settings
I
n
= Rating plug value
I
r
= Long delay pickup setting x I
n
I
2
t response
Time/Current
Characteristic
Pickup
Setting
Pickup
Point
Time Bands,
Seconds
Long delay 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7,
0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0
I
n
times long
delay setting
2, 4, 7, 10, 12,
15, 20, 24
Instantaneous Off, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8,
10, M1
I
n
times
instantaneous
setting
Short delay 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 6, 8,

10, M1
I
r
times short
delay setting
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
at response
0.1, 0.03, 0.05
Ground fault 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4,

0.5, 0.6, 0.75, 1.0
I
n
times ground
fault setting
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
(at response)
0.1, 0.3, 0.5

20.1-13
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Series NRXGeneral Description
015
Series NRX
Series NRX Breakers Have a Compact
But Powerful Size to Provide Interrupting
Ratings up to 65 kA at 480 Vac
General Description
The Series NRX provides the perfor-
mance of a power circuit breaker
65 kA interrupting at 480 Vacin the
compact size of a molded case breaker.
It offers the protection and features of
a power circuit breaker, along with
increased exibility at a portion of
the size.
All frame sizes are either electrically
or mechanically operated. The Series
NRX is tested to 20,000 mechanical
operations and 10,000 electrical
operationssignicantly higher than
industry standards, such as UL and
IEC, require or the capabilities of
equivalent products on the market.
Thus, your maintenance personnel
can do what needs to be done, instead
of spending valuable time inspecting
and maintaining the breakers in
the system.
In switchgear, its important that the
breaker be easily accessible during
scheduled equipment maintenance.
The design of the breaker and cassette
enables full use of the breaker handle
and cassette rails with a gloved hand,
allowing electricians to remain in the
appropriate PPE protective gear.
The breakers ergonomic design also
maximizes functionality. Individual
Series NRX breaker door will open in
a saloon or barn type of arrange-
ment so that personnel can access one
of the side-by-side breakers without
having to interact with the other. The
breakers handle allows the operator
to easily apply leverage across seven
complete strokes (with an average
of only 21 lbs of force) charging
the breaker quickly and easily, and
making it easier to cycle when needed
during commissioning or scheduled
maintenance. Series NRX breakers use
a true two-step stored energy mecha-
nism similar to Magnum DS breakers.
The reduced weight of the Series NRX
makes it easier to handle during start-
up and scheduled inspection. A three-
pole, fully populated drawout breaker
weighs only 54 lbs/24 kg.
The Series NRX enables twice as many
feeder breakers in a standard structure
for a reduction in overall assembly size
of up to 50%.
The small size, 10.00 inches (254.0 mm)
wide by 10.70 inches (271.8 mm) deep
by 14.20 inches (360.7 mm) high, of
the Series NRX allows for much higher
densities of power circuit breakers
in a structureup to eight breakers
in a 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide
structureand a 2.50-inch (63.5 mm)
customer wireway. This means that
two Series NRX breakers can be
mounted side-by-side in the same
space typically used for one
Magnum DS breaker.
The Series NRX breakers can also be
mixed and matched with Magnum DS
breakers, increasing layout exibility
and providing the ability to stack
feeder breakers around larger main
and tie breakers. See layout guide for
more details.
All optional Magnum DS breaker
attachments and accessories are also
available for the Series NRX breakers.
Series NRX accessories can be quickly
installed at the job site, without any
special tools. Each breaker comes
standard with an accessory tray; the
needed accessories simply plug and
lock into the tray.
The Series NRX uses one CT for the
breaker frame. This eliminates the
need to match CTs and rating plugs to
change the continuous current rating
of the breaker. For example, changing
from 1200 to 800A on previous breaker
designs required changing CT from
1200 to 800A and changing the rating
plug from 1200 to 800A. The Series
NRX breaker simplies this process
by only requiring changing the 1200A
rating plug to 800A. This is accom-
plished through the Series NRXs
Rogowski air core CT. The Rogowski
coil does not saturate like a traditional
ferrous core CT, allowing the CT to
be used across a broad current range
with greater accuracy. One sensor
accommodates 2001200A range.
A full range of trip units, ranging from
basic protection (LSI or LSIG) to meter-
ing, system diagnostics, protective
relay functions and communications,
complement the breaker offering.
Two of the trip unit models, the
Digitrip 520M and 1150, include
(optional) Eatons Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System, built to reduce
arc ash energy on a downstream
unit during system maintenance. Zone
selective interlocking is also available.
When communication capability
is required, the Series NRX breaker
has cassette-mounted modules,
eliminating the need for readdressing
replacement breakers. These DIN rail
mounted modules save space and
time during installation and are
available for eld mounting capability.
Modules for Modus and Eatons
INCOM system are available with
future releases for PROFIBUS and
Ethernet compatible with Eatons
Power Xpert Architecture protocols.
Refer to Tab 26 for more detailed
information on Series NRX breakers.
20.1-14
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
016
Table 20.1-3. Digitrip Trip Units for Series NRX ANSI/UL Rated Circuit Breakers
1200A maximum ground fault setting per UL/NEC.
Optional communications modules available: Ethernet (Web-browsing,

Modbus TCP/IP and SNMP), Modbus RTU, INCOM, PROFIBUS DP.

Legend: I
n
I
r
Trip Unit Type Digitrip 520 Digitrip 520M Digitrip 1150
Ampere range
rms sensing
2001600A
42 kA
Yes
2001600A
42 kA
Yes
2001600A
42 kA
Yes
Protection Styles
Fixed rating plug (I
n
)
Overtemperature trip
LI, LSI, LSIG
Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA, RLSI, RLSIG, RLSIA
Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA, RLSI, RLSIG,
RLSIA
Yes
Yes
Long delay
protection (L)
Long delay pickup
Long delay time I
2
t at 6 x I
r
Long delay time I
4
t

IEEE curves
0.51.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
No
No
0.51.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
No
No
0.51.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
15 seconds
Yes
Long delay thermal memory
High load alarm
Yes
No
Yes
Yes (LSI only)
Yes
0.51.0 x (I
r
)
Short delay
protection (S)
Short delay pickup
Short delay time I
2
t at 8 x I
r

Short delay time at
2001000% x (I
r
)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
2001000% x (I
r
)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
2001000% x (I
r
)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
Instantaneous
protection (I)
Making current release
Off position
2001200% x (I
n
)
Yes
LSI and LSIG
2001200% x (I
n
)
Yes
Yes
2001200% x (I
n
) and M1
Yes
Yes
Ground fault
protection (G)
Ground fault alarm

Ground fault pickup
2
t at .625 x I
n
No
25100% x (I
n
)
100500 ms
Yes
25100% x (I
n
)
100500 ms
Yes
24100% x (I
n
)
100500 ms
Ground fault ZSI
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
Yes
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
Yes
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
Yes
Disable ground fault protection No No No
Neutral protection (N) Yes Yes Yes
System Diagnostics
Cause-of-trip LEDs
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
System Monitoring
Digital display
Current (%)
No
No
4-character LCD
Yes 2% full scale
Color graphic LCD
Yes 1% of reading
Voltage (%) L to L
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes 1% of reading
Yes 2% of reading
Yes
Reactive power kVAR
Power factor
Crest factor
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Type
Power supply
No
N/A
Yes
+24 Vdc
Yes
+24 Vdc
Additional Features
Trip log
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Testing method
Waveform capture
Test set
No
Test set
No
Yes (current and voltage)
No
No
No
Yes (RLSI, RLSIG, RLSIA)
No
No
Yes
Yes
20.1-15
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
017
Table 20.1-4. Digitrip Adjustable Trip Settings for Series NRX Breakers
I
n
= Rating plug value
I
r
n
I
2
t response.
Time/Current
Characteristic
Pickup
Setting
Pickup
Point
Time Band,
Seconds
Long delay 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.75,
0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0
I
n
times
long delay setting
2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24
(at 6 times pickup value)
Instantaneous 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 I
n
times
instantaneous setting
Short delay 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10 I

r
times
short delay setting
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.05
(at response)
0.1, 0.3, 0.5
Ground fault 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4,

0.5, 0.6, 0.75, 1.0
(1200A maximum)
I
n
times
ground fault setting
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.05
(at response)
0.1, 0.3, 0.5
20.1-16
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
General DescriptionMetering and Monitoring Devices
018
Power Xpert
Incoming Line Power Meter
See Tab 3.
Power Xpert
General Description
8000 Series monitors the critical
aspects of an electrical distribution
system. This premier power quality
metering instrument is simple to use,
and is powerful, scalable and highly
exible. The Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000 offers a new level
of intuitive user interface design,
presenting critical electrical
distribution system information
in simple-to-navigate and easy-to-
understand information architecture.
8000 graphic display visualizes the
information from up to16 meter
modules. The embedded Web server
displays complex power quality data
the browser.
Both the local graphic display and the
embedded Web server present real
time, historical and event information
in a browser-style graphical format
to help the user interpret key circuit
information, such as:
Current loading
Voltage and power levels
Power factor
Energy usage
I/O status
Power quality measurements
Harmonic plots
Disturbance and transient
waveforms
ITIC disturbance summary screen
8000 graphic display uses a simple
twist and click navigation control
dial to easily navigate the menus and
to drill down into increasing levels
of important detail. A back key
enhances the browser-like navigation
of the graphic display.
manage the cost of energy. It also
provides critical information regard-
ing power quality, such as harmonic
distortion, icker, crest factor, K-Factor
and more. For detailed information,
refer to Tab 3.
General Description
The Power Xpert 2000 Series Meter
power quality instrument monitors the
most critical aspects of an electrical
distribution system. This premier
power quality metering instrument
uses the latest in advanced technology
to make it simple to use, and is
powerful, scalable and highly exible.
The Power Xpert 2000 offers the same
level of intuitive user interface design
as the Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000
Meter, presenting critical electrical
distribution system information in
a simple-to-navigate and easy-to-
understand information architecture.
The embedded Web server displays
comprehensive power quality data
the browser. The embedded Web
server presents real-time, historical
and event information in a browser-
style graphical format to help the user
interpret information such as current
loading, voltage and power levels,
power factor, energy usage, I/O status
and power quality measurements, as
well as harmonic plots. The embedded
Web server also offers a waveform
view to visualize steady-state
harmonic content, which is critical
for power quality analysis.
manage the cost of energy.
Applications
and batches
Protect transformers and
conductors from overheating
overload trips
Maximize equipment use
Manage Energy Use to Help:
Reduce peak demand charges and
power factor penalties
consumption
For more details, see Tab 3.
IQ 250/260
Incoming Line Metering
See Tab 3.
IQ 250/260
This microprocessor device provides
metering that meets ANSI C12.20
revenue metering accuracy, and has
capabilities such as fast sampling rate
and accurate metering for a full range
of power attributes. In addition, the IQ
250 and IQ 260 Meters are prepared
for the future. Built-in slots allow for
upgrades to capabilities yet to be
developed.
Comprehensive metering
High-end accuracy
Self-test capability to validate
accuracy
Large, easy-to-read display
Local or remote conguration
Industry-standard communication
protocols
Mix-and-match input/output options
Integration with Eatons
Field-upgradeable
20.1-17
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
General DescriptionMetering and Monitoring Devices
019
IQ 130/140/150
General Description
The IQ 100 meter family provides
expect in affordable, compact meters,
such as fast sampling rate and
accurate metering for a full range
of power attributes. Providing the
rst line of defense against costly
power problems, Eatons IQ 100 series
electronic power meters can perform
the work of an entire wall of legacy
metering equipment using todays
technology.
When space is at a premium, yet
you need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, the
IQ 100 series ts the bill. These meters
are ideal for electrical equipment
assemblies, machine control panels,
such as panelboard and switchboard
mains and feeders, low voltage metal-
enclosed switchgear feeders and
motor control centers. Requiring far
less space than other meters with
similar functionality, IQ 100 series
meters t into a standard ANSI or
IEC cutout on a panelboard or other
electrical equipment, and therefore
t easily into retrot applications.
Typical Applications
power generation sites and
campuses
Submetering
Features and Benets
Monitor power use and quality with
ANSI C12.20 accuracy (0.5%)
Optional Modbus RTU
communications
with display
Designed to accommodate
upgrades
Integrate into Eatons Power Xpert
Architecture for a holistic system
level view
For more information, refer to Tab 3.
Breaker Interface Module II (BIMII)
Local Subnetwork Display
See Tab 4.
The breaker interface module is a
panel-mounted device that performs
from Digitrip 1150+ circuit breaker
trip unit. Supports as many as 50
of these devices up to 10,000 ft
(3048m) away
Communicates the information from
these protective and energy moni-
toring devices over a PowerNet
network to a computer or PLC
Direct On/Off Control Capabilities
See Tab 2.
An industrial control relay with two
inputs to monitor the status of external
contacts and one output controllable
over the communication network.
The relay is AC/DC powered with
AC/DC contacts rated to directly
switch/monitor switchgear breakers,
motor starters, etc.
Features include:
Address assigned by setting three
hexadecimal switches
LEDs show when the relay is energized
and when it is sending reports
Two status inputs and a Form C
contact output
Built-in remote communications
capability within a PowerNet system
Selectable baud rate
Communications
For remote power monitoring and
software, see PowerNet Tab 2.
Low Voltage High
Resistance Grounding
See Tab 36 for more details.
C-HRG Wall-Mounted Unit
(Separately Mounted Resistors Not Shown)
Where continuity of service is a high
priority, high-resistance grounding can
add the safety of a grounded system
while minimizing the risk of service
interruptions due to grounds. The
concept is a simple one: provide a path
for ground current via a resistance that
limits the current magnitude, and
monitor to determine when an
abnormal condition exists.
This provides for maximum continuity
of service, because no tripping occurs
for the resistance limited ground fault.
HRG can be installed as stand-alone
equipment (as shown in photo) or can
be integrated into Magnum DS low
voltage switchgear.
20.1-18
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Technical Data
020
Ratings
Table 20.1-5. Voltage Ratings (AC)
Table 20.1-6. Available Bus Ratings
Table 20.1-7. Heat Loss Data
Estimated Heat Loss Per Breaker (Watts)
For lower than maximum load currents, watt

loss may be estimated by reducing the full
load loss by the following:
W
L
= (I
L
/I
FL
)
2
W
FL
Where:
W
L
= Load Watts
W
FL
= Full Load Watts
I
L
= Actual Load Current
I
FL
= Full Load Current
Contact Eaton.
Vertical section bus is sized per
main cross bus maximum rating or
by ANSI C37.20.1 Section 7.4.13 Table
11 to a maximum of 5000A. (4000A in
18.00-inch [457.2 mm] structure.)
Note: In addition to the available bus
bracings shown in Table 20.1-6, the bus
has been tested for short-circuit values
of 85,000A for a full 60 cycles.
Closing Times of Magnum DS
and Series NRX Breakers
5 cycles or less
System
Voltage
Maximum
Voltage
208/240
480
600
254
508
635
Cross Bus
Ampacity
Bus Bracing
kA
2000
3200
4000
100, 150, 200
5000
6000
8000
10,000
100, 150, 200
Breaker
Frame
Drawout
Mounting
Only
800
1600
2000
150
329
374
3200
4000
5000
6000
719
749
1000
Estimated Heat Loss Per Structure (Watts)
Loss is based on fully loaded vertical and

cross bus rating in a structure as given below.
Rating Vertical
Bus
Cross
Bus
2000
3200
4000
410
1623
1097
288
1163
1169
5000
6000
8000
10,000
1410
886
1265

20.1-19
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Technical Data
021
Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066
Magnum DS and Series NRX Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Family ANSI Rated for Switchgear Applications
Table 20.1-8. Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal
to the published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a
15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for
short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 second each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between
the two periods.
Magnum MDSL current limiting power circuit breaker with integral current limiters. Current limiter selected determines short-time and xed
instantaneous trip rating. Maximum voltage rating is 600 Vac.
Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts.
Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating.
Series NRX uses the same sensors for all trip settings. No changes to sensors required.
Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
Frame
Type
rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA
50/60 Hz
Short-Time
Withstand
Rating
Fixed Internal
Instantaneous
Trip
Available Current Sensor and
Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS
Trip Unit (Establishes Breaker
I
n
Rating)
Interrupting
at 254 Vac
Interrupting
at 508 Vac
Interrupting
at 635 Vac
800 MDN-408
MDN-508
MDN-608
MDN-C08
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
65
42
50
65
20
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800
MDS-408
MDS-608
MDS-808
MDS-C08
MDS-L08
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
42
65
85
100
200
42
65
85
100
200
42
65
85
100
200
42
65
85
85
85
NRX-408
NRX-508
NRX-608
Compact
Compact
Compact
85
85
85
42
50
65
35
35
35
42 kA at 254 Vac
42 kA at 508 Vac
35 kA at 635 Vac
200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 800
1600 MDN-416
MDN-516
MDN-616
MDN-C16
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
65
42
50
65
30
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600
MDS-616
MDS-816
MDS-C16
MDS-L16
MDS-X16
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200

65
85
85
30
85
30
2000 MDN-620
MDN-C20
Narrow
Narrow
65
100
65
100
65
65
65
35
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
MDS-620
MDS-820
MDS-C20
MDS-L20
MDS-X20
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200

65
85
85
30
85
30
3200 MDS-632
MDS-832
MDS-C32
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
85
85
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500,
3000, 3200
MDS-X32
Double 200 200
50 50
4000 MDS-840
MDS-C40
MDS-X40
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
85
100
200
85
100

85
100
50
50
2000, 2500, 3200, 4000
Standard Magnum DS
Narrow Magnum DS
Double Magnum DS
Series NRX
20.1-20
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Technical Data
022
Table 20.1-8. Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers (Continued)
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal
to the published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a
15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for
short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 second each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between
the two periods.
Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts.
Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure.

Table 20.1-9. Magnum Breaker Control Device Application GuideVdc
Table 20.1-10. Magnum Breaker Control Device Application GuideVac
Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
Frame
Type
rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA
50/60 Hz
Short-Time
Withstand
Rating
Fixed Internal
Instantaneous
Trip
Available Current Sensor & Rating
Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit
(Establishes Breaker I
n
Rating)
Interrupting
at 254 Vac
Interrupting
at 508 Vac
Interrupting
at 635 Vac
5000 MDS-850
MDS-C50
MDS-X50
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
85
100
200
85
100

85
100
50
50
2500, 3200, 4000, 5000
6000 MDS-C60
Double 100 100 100 100 3200, 4000, 5000, 6000

Breaker Control Device
Nominal Voltage
24 Vdc 32 Vdc 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc
Shunt Trip (ST)
Operational voltage range
Power consumption (inrush)
Opening time
Trip circuit 70110%
(Required for 35 ms)
Seconds
1726 Vdc
250 watts
35 ms
3453 Vdc
250 watts
35 ms
77138 Vdc
450 watts
35 ms
154275 Vdc
450 watts
35 ms
Spring Release (SR)
Closing time
Close circuit 70110%
Seconds
1726 Vdc
250 watts
40 ms
3453 Vdc
250 watts
40 ms
77138 Vdc
450 watts
40 ms
154275 Vdc
450 watts
40 ms
Spring Charge Motor (MOT)
Amps (running)
Amps (inrush)
Power consumption
Charging time
85110% voltage
Running % of
running seconds
2026 Vdc
12.0A
300%
300 watts
5 sec
4153 Vdc
5.0A
500%
250 watts
5 Sec
94138 Vdc
2.0A
600%
250 watts
5 Sec
187275 Vdc
1.0A
600%
250 watts
5 Sec
Undervoltage Release (UVR)
Drop-out voltage range
Power consumption (continuous)
Opening time
85110% voltage
3060% voltage
Required for 200 ms
Required for 400 ms
Seconds
2026 Vdc
714 Vdc
250 watts
18 watts
70 ms
2735 Vdc
1019 Vdc
275 watts
15 watts
70 ms
4153 Vdc
1429 Vdc
275 watts
18 watts
70 ms
94138 Vdc
3375 Vdc
450 watts
10 watts
70 ms
187275 Vdc
66150 Vdc
450 watts
10 watts
70 ms
Auxiliary Switches
Minimum load
Contact rating
Inductive load 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A 0.25A
Nominal Voltage
120 Vac 240 Vac 415 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac
Shunt Trip (ST)
Opening time
Trip circuit 70110%
Seconds
77140 Vac
450 VA
35 ms
146264 Vac
450 VA
35 ms

Spring Release (SR)
Closing time
Close circuit 70110%
Seconds
77140 Vac
450 VA
40 ms
146264 Vac
450 VA
40 ms

Amps (running)
Amps (inrush)
Power consumption
Charging time
85110% voltage
Running % of
running seconds
94140 Vac
2.0A
600%
250 VA
5 Sec
177264 Vac
1.0A
600%
250 VA
5 Sec

Opening time
85110% voltage
3060% voltage
Required for 200 ms
Required for 400 ms
Seconds
94140 Vac
3376 Vac
450 VA
10 VA
70 ms
177264 Vac
62144 Vac
400 VA
10 VA
70 ms
323457 Vac
114249 Vac
480 VA
10 VA
70 ms
408528 Vac
144288 Vac
400 VA
10 VA
70 ms
510660 Vac
180360 Vac
400 VA
10 VA
70 ms
Auxiliary Switches
Minimum load
Contact rating
Inductive load 10A 10A
20.1-21
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Technical Data
023
Table 20.1-11. Series NRX Breaker Control Device Application GuideVdc
Table 20.1-12. Series NRX Breaker Control Device Application GuideVac
Nominal Voltage
Shunt Trip (ST)
Opening time
Trip circuits 70110%
Seconds
1726 Vdc
500 VA
25 ms
3453 Vdc
530 VA
25 ms
77138 Vdc
540 VA
25 ms
154275 Vdc
515 VA
25 ms
Spring Release (SR)
Closing time
Seconds
1726 Vdc
500 VA
25 ms
3453 Vdc
530 VA
25 ms
77138 Vdc
540 VA
25 ms
154275 Vdc
515 VA
25 ms
Spring Release Motor (MOT)
Amperes (running)
Amperes (inrush)
Power consumption
Charging time
Running % of running
Seconds
2026 Vdc
5A
500%
150 VA
3 seconds
4153 Vdc
3A
500%
150 VA
3 seconds
94138 Vdc
1A
500%
150 VA
3 seconds
187275 Vdc
1A
1000%
280 VA
4 seconds
Opening time
3560% voltage
Required for 200 ms
Required for 400 ms
Seconds
2026 Vdc
814 Vdc
500 VA
5 VA
50 ms
2735 Vdc
1119 Vdc
620 VA
5 VA
50 ms
4153 Vdc
1729 Vdc
850 VA
5 VA
50 ms
94138 Vdc
4494 Vdc
890 VA
5 VA
50 ms
187275 Vdc
88132 Vdc
910 VA
5 VA
50 ms
Auxiliary Switches
Minimum load
Contact rating
Inductive load 0.5A 0.25A
Nominal Voltage
Shunt Trip (ST)
Opening time
Seconds
77140 Vac
540 VA
25 ms
146264 Vac
500 VA
25 ms

Spring Release (SR)
Closing time
Seconds
77140 Vac
540 VA
25 ms
146264 Vac
500 VA
25 ms

Spring Release Motor (MOT)
Amperes (running)
Amperes (inrush)
Power consumption
Charging time
Running % of running
Seconds
94140 Vac
2A
300%
280 VA
3 seconds
177264 Vac
1A
1000%
280 VA
4 seconds

Opening time
3560% voltage
Required for 200 ms
Required for 400 ms
Seconds
94138 Vac
4494 Vac
890 VA
5 VA
50 ms
177264 Vac
84125 Vac
910 VA
5 VA
50 ms
323457 Vac
145228 Vac
960 VA
5 VA
50 ms
408528 Vac
168288 Vac
800 VA
8 VA
50 ms
510660 Vac
210360 Vac
800 VA
12 VA
50 ms
Auxiliary Switches
Minimum load
Contact rating
Inductive load 10A
20.1-22
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Technical Data
024
Ratings
The narrow-band characteristic curve
allows close coordination with Digitrip
RMS tripping devices. Repeatability is
within 2%.
The maximum breaker current rating
for any breaker frame size is deter-
mined by the rating of the sensor used.
The breaker current rating for any
frame size can be changed by simply
changing the sensors and associated
rating plug, which are easily removed
from the breaker drawout element.
The wide range of long-delay pickup
makes one set of sensors more exible
on a wider range of loads. The Digitrip
RMS itself need not be changed when
the associated sensors and rating
plugs are changed.
Eatons Digitrip RMS can be supplied
in various combinations of four
independent, adjustable, overcurrent
protection functions:
Long delay (L)
Instantaneous (I)
Short delay (S)
Ground (G)
Ground alarm only (A)
Every Eaton Magnum DS trip unit
comes standard with LSI characteris-
tics. Optional ground (G) or ground
alarm (A) may also be provided.
These trip units also provide the
ability to defeat instantaneous to
provide LS protection only. In addition,
short delay protection may be set to
the maximum instantaneous level,
effectively disabling short delay
protection. Under no condition is it
possible to set the trip unit beyond
the capabilities of the circuit breaker.
Table 20.1-13. Metering Type Current Transformers
Table 20.1-14. Voltage Transformers Table 20.1-15. Control Power Transformers
ANSI Meter Accuracy Classication
Breaker Frame
Rating
Ratio Ratio B-0.1 B-0.2 B-0.5 B-0.9 B-1.8
800, 1600, 2000 100/5
150/5
200/5
100/1
150/1
200/1
2.4
1.2
1.2
2.4
2.4
2.4
250/5
300/5
400/5
250/1
300/1
400/1
0.6
0.6
0.3
1.2
0.6
0.6
2.4
1.2
1.2
2.4
1.2
500/5
600/5
750/5
500/1
600/1
750/1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.3
1.2
1.2
0.6
2.4
1.2
1.2
800/5
1000/5
1200/5
800/1
1000/1
1200/1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.2
0.6
0.6
1500/5
1600/5
2000/5
1500/1
1600/1
2000/1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.3
3200 1600/5
2000/5
2400/5
1600/1
2000/1
2400/1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.3
1.2
0.6
0.6
2500/5
3000/5
3200/5
2500/1
3000/1
3200/1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
3500/5
4000/5
3500/1
4000/1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
4000 4000/5 4000/1 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
5000 5000/5 5000/1 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
6000 6000/5 6000/1 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Current transformers with meter accuracy classications at higher burdens and/or suitable for relaying
are also available. They will be mounted in the rear cable connection compartment.
Insulation Class is 600V dielectric, 10 kV
full wave BIL. Accuracy Class is 0.6 for W and
1.2 for X burdens at 60 Hz. Thermal ratings
are 150 VA at 300C and 100 VA at 55C.
Primary and secondary fuses are mounted
on the face of the VT.
Available standard
ratios:
120:120
240:120
288:120
480:120
600:120
Insulation Class is 600V dielectric.
Primary and secondary fuses are mounted
on the face of the CPT. An optional primary
fuse cover is available. 0.5 kVA, 1 kVA, 3 kVA
and 5 kVA ratings are available as standard.
Available standard
ratios:
208:120/240
240:120/240
480:120/240
600:120/240
20.1-23
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Guide
025
Layout GuideMagnum DS Rear-Accessible Switchgear
Table 20.1-16. Layout Guide
Series NRX 65 kAIC maximum.

Rear-Accessible Switchgear
Breaker Type Ampacity Available Structure WidthsAllowable Breaker PlacementsInches (mm)
<=100 kAIC 200 kAIC 18.00 (457.2) 22.00 (558.8) 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 44.00 (117.6)
Narrow (MDN) 8002000
MDN4-
MDN5-
MDN6-
MDNC-
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB
MainB, C, D
FeederA, B, C, D
MainB, C, D
TieB, C
FeederA, B, C, D,
E, F, G, H
Standard (MDS) 8002000
MDS4-
MDS6-
MDS8-
MDSC-
8001600
MDSL-
MDSX-
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
MainB/F, C/G
TieB/F, C/G
FeederB/F, C/G, D/H
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
FeederA, B, C, D,
E, F, G, H
Standard (MDS) 3200
MDS6-
MDS8-
MDSC-
2000
MDSL-
MDSX-
FeederB, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
MainB/F, C/G
TieB/F, C/G
FeederB/F, C/G, D/H
FeederB, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
Feeder
contact Eaton
Standard (NRX)
8001200
NSS4-
NSS5-
NSS6-
FeederA, B, C,
D, E, F, G, H
Double (MDS) 40005000
MDS8-
MDSC-
32004000
MDSX-
FeederB/F, C/G, D/H
TieB/F, C/G
MainB/F, C/G, D/H
Double
w/fans (MDS)
6000
MDSC-
5000
MDSX-
FeederBC/FG, CD/GH
TieBC/FG, CD/GH
MainBC/FG, CD/GH
Instrument
compartment
(SPD, HRG,
metering, controls,
panelboard, etc.)
All positions All positions All positions All positions All positions
20.1-24
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Guide
026
Figure 20.1-1. Breaker Structures
Figure 20.1-2. Main-Tie-Main Typical LayoutsMDS Mains and Feeders
Notes: Breaker and cell utilization should keep load amperes below rating of MAIN due to vertical bus limitations.
Cable used in the conduit areas are limited to 75C ampacity values per the NEC for ampacity calculations.
Any cell not used as a feeder breaker may be a blank, or a feeder breaker provision for future breakers, or SPD surge.
18.00 (457.2) 22.00 (558.8)
30.00 (762.0) 44.00 (1117.6)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
A
B B
C C
D D
A
B
C
D
24.00 (609.6)
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
Metering
Main
MDS-632
3200A
SPD
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Tie
MDS-630
3200A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Main
MDS-632
3200A
Metering
SPD
A
B
C
D
22.00
(558.8)
18.00
(457.2)
22.00
(558.8)
22.00
(558.8)
18.00
(457.2)
Metering Metering SPD SPD
Feeder
MDS-608
800A
Feeder
MDS-608
800A
Feeder
MDS-608
800A
Feeder
MDS-608
800A
Feeder
MDS-608
800A
Feeder
MDS-608
800A
Feeder
MDS-608
800A
Main
MDS-840
4000A
Main
MDS-840
4000A
Tie
MDS-840
4000A
Feeder
MDS-616
1600A
Feeder
MDS-616
1600A
Feeder
MDS-616
1600A
Feeder
MDS-616
1600A
Feeder
MDS-616
1600A
Feeder
MDS-616
1600A
Feeder
MDS-608
800A
A/E
B/F
C/G
D/H
44.00
(1117.6)
44.00
(1117.6)
44.00
(1117.6)
Using Standard and Double Breakers Using Narrow and Standard Breakers
20.1-25
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Guide
027
Figure 20.1-3. Typical Structure and Breaker ArrangementsMagnum DS Mains, Ties, Feeders and Miscellaneous, 3200A and Below
A transition section is required if connecting to a non-standard dry-type transformer or auxiliary and metering devices are to be located in a transition
section, or there is a re pump breaker required, or there is a zero sequence ground fault required.
A maximum of two 3200A breakers are permitted per 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) width of switchgear, one of which must be a main or tie. A 3200A frame
breaker cannot be mounted in the same enclosure with a 4000A main or tie. For a 3200A frame breaker mounted in the same enclosure with a 5000A
main or tie, contact Eaton.
Contact Eaton for placement of 2000A frame breaker in this compartment.
A maximum of three 2000A breakers are 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) width of switchgear. If three are required, positions B, C and D must be used.
Any 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide compartment can be a blank or instrument compartment.
Transition or
Auxiliary
Utility
Compartment
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
A
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
A
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
A
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
A
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
B
Blank or
Instrument
B
Blank or
Instrument
B
Blank or
Instrument
B
38.00-Inch (965.2) or
50.00-Inch (1270.0)
Compartment
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Blank or
Instrument
C
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
D
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
D
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
D
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
D
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 1
38.00 or 50.00
(965.2 or 1270.0)
Arrangement
1a or 1b
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 2
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 3
30.00 (762.0)
Arrangement 4
30.00 (762.0)
Arrangement 5
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
A
Feeder
800
1600
A
Blank or
Instrument
A
Feeder
800
1600
2000
A
Feeder
800
1600
2000
A
Feeder
800
1600
2000
A
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
B
Tie
800
1600
2000
3200
B
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
B
Tie
800
1600
2000
3200
B
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
B
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
B
Tie
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Tie
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Tie
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Feeder
800
1600
2000
D
Blank or
Instrument
D
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
D
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
D
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
D
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
D
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 6
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 7
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 8
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 9
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 10
22.00 (558.8)
Arrangement 11
20.1-26
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Guide
028
Figure 20.1-3. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)Magnum DS Mains, 4000 and 5000ADimensions in Inches (mm)
If you have four-wire service and service entrance requirement, busway connection or cable connection, the bus or cables must enter from the top.
Service entrance option is not available with feeder breakers mounted in this structure.
If you have four-wire service and service entrance requirement, busway connection or cable connection, the bus or cables must enter from the bottom.
Busway or cable entrance must be from the top.
B and D position feeders must be reverse fed.
Any 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide compartment can be a blank or instrument compartment with the following exception: A 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm)
wide instrument compartment must be adjacent to another 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide compartment in the structure.
Blank or
Instrument
A
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
E
Blank or
Instrument
A
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
E
Feeder
800
1600
2000
A
Feeder
800
1600
2000
E
Main
4000
5000
Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
B F B F B F
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
Main
4000
5000
Main
4000
5000
C G C G C G
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
D
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
H
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
D
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
H
Blank or
instrument
D
Blank or
instrument
H
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 12
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 13
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 14
Blank or
Instrument
A
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
E
Blank or
Instrument
A
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
E
Feeder
800
1600
2000
A
Feeder
800
1600
2000
E
Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
Main
4000
5000
Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
B F B F B F
Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
Feeder
4000
5000
C G C G C G
Main
4000
5000
Main
4000
5000
Main
4000
5000
D H D H D H
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 15
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 16
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 17a
20.1-27
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Guide
029
Figure 20.1-3. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)Magnum DS Mains and Ties, 4000 and 5000ADimensions in Inches (mm)
Fixed-mounted main breakers are not permitted in the D position.
If you have four-wire service and service entrance requirement, busway connection or cable connection, the bus or cables must enter from the bottom.
If you have four-wire service and service entrance requirement, busway connection or cable connection, the bus or cables must enter from the top.
Busway or cable entrance must be from the top.
Any 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide compartment can be a blank or instrument compartment with the following exception: A 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide
instrument compartment must be adjacent to another 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide compartment in the structure.
Feeder
800
1600
2000
A
Feeder
800
1600
2000
E
Blank or
Instrument
A
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
E
Blank or
Instrument
A
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
E
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Main
4000
5000
Main
4000
5000
B F B F B F
Blank Blank
Tie
4000
5000
Tie
4000
5000
C G C G C G
Main
4000
5000
Main
4000
5000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
D H D H D H
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 17b
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 18
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 19
Feeder
800
1600
A
Feeder
800
1600
E
Feeder
800
1600
A
Feeder
800
1600
E
Feeder
800
1600
A
Feeder
800
1600
E
Tie
4000
5000
Tie
4000
5000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
B F B F B F
Main
4000
5000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
Tie
4000
5000
C G C G C G
Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
D H D H D H
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 20
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 21
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 22
20.1-28
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Guide
030
Figure 20.1-3. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)Magnum DS Ties and Feeders, 4000 and 5000ADimensions in Inches (mm)
B and D position feeders must be reverse fed.
Any 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide compartment can be a blank or instrument compartment with the following exception: A 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide
instrument compartment must be adjacent to another 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide compartment in the structure.
Feeder
800
1600
2000
A
Feeder
800
1600
2000
E
Feeder
800
1600
2000
A
Feeder
800
1600
2000
E
Feeder
800
1600
A
Feeder
800
1600
E
Tie
4000
5000
Feeder
4000
5000
Feeder
4000
5000
B F B F B F
Feeder
4000
5000
Tie
4000
5000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
C G C G C G
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
D H D H D H
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 23
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 24
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 25
Feeder
800
1600
A
Feeder
800
1600
E
Feeder
800
1600
A
Feeder
800
1600
E
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
B F B F
Feeder
4000
5000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
C G C G
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
800
1600
2000
Feeder
4000
5000
D H D H
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 26
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 27
20.1-29
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Guide
031
Figure 20.1-3. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)Magnum DS Mains and Ties, and Series NRX Feeder Breakers
Feeder
800
A
Feeder
800
E
Blank or
Instrument
A
Feeder
800
A
Feeder
800
E
Feeder
800
A
Feeder
800
E
Feeder
800
B
Feeder
800
F
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
B
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
B
Feeder
800
B
Feeder
800
F
Feeder
800
C
Feeder
800
G
Feeder
800
C
Feeder
800
G
Feeder
800
C
Feeder
800
G
Tie
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Feeder
800
D
Feeder
800
H
Feeder
800
D
Feeder
800
H
Feeder
800
D
Feeder
800
H
Feeder
800
D
Feeder
800
H
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 28
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 29
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 30
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 31
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
A
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
A
Blank or
Instrument
B
Blank or
Instrument
B
Main
800
1600
2000
3200
C
Feeder
800
C
Feeder
800
G
Feeder
800
D
Feeder
800
H
Feeder
800
D
Feeder
800
H
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 32
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 33
20.1-30
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 20.1-4. Group-Mounted Molded-Case
Circuit Breaker Switchboard
Note: Structures using molded-case
breakers for distribution will be UL 891
rated with 30-cycle bus bracing.
Figure 20.1-3. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)
Magnum DS Mains and Ties, 6000ADimensions in Inches (mm)
A maximum of two 3200A breakers are permitted per 22.00-inch (559 mm) width of switchgear,
one of which must be a main or tie. A 3200A frame breaker cannot be mounted in the same enclo-
sure with a 4000A main or tie. For a 3200A frame breaker mounted in the same enclosure with a
5000 or 6000A main or tie, contact Eaton.
When a top-of-gear breaker lifter is used, height is 99.00 inches (2514.6 mm) total.
Any 22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide compartment can be a blank or instrument compartment with
the following exception: 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide instrument compartment must be adjacent to
another 44.00-inch (1117.6) wide compartment in the structure.
Need a 44.00-inch wide section on both sides of the tie for layout to be correct.
Notes: Breaker and cell utilization should keep load amperes below rating of MAIN due to
vertical bus limitations. Cable used in the conduit areas are limited to 75C ampacity
values per the NEC for ampacity calculations. Any cell not used as a feeder breaker
may be a blank, or a feeder breaker provision for future breakers, or SPD surge.
Blank or
Instrument
A
Blank or
Instrument
E
9
2
.
0
0

(
2
3
3
6
.
8
)

Blank or
Instrument
A
Blank or
Instrument
E
9
6
.
0
0

(
2
4
3
8
.
4
)

Main or Tie
6000
Blank or
instrument
Blank or
Instrument
B F B F
Fan Compartment Main or Tie
6000
C G C G
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
Feeder
800
1600
2000
3200
Fan Compartment
D H D H
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 34
44.00 (1117.6)
Arrangement 35
Blank or
Instrument
Blank or
Instrument
12.00 (304.8)
Arrangement 36
Slider Control
Section
38.00
(965.2)
50.00
(1270.0)
or
See Tab 21,
Section 21.1
Figure 21.1-9
for MCCB
Circuit Breaker
Layout
Information.
Magnum DS
Layout Guide
032
20.1-31
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Guide
033
Layout GuideMagnum DS Front-Accessible Switchgear
Series NRX 65 kAIC maximum.

Figure 20.1-5. Front-Accessible Breaker Structures
18.00 (457.2), 22.00 (558.8), 24.00 (609.6), 30.00 (762.2), 44.00 (1117.6)
22.00 (558.8), 24.00 (609.6), 30.00 (762.2), 44.00 (1117.6)
24.00 (609.6), 30.00 (762.2), 44.00 (1117.6)

Notes: Cable section can ONLY be on the right.
Shipping splits are not allowed between breaker section and its cable section.
Shipping splits must be adjacent to a cable section.
Front-Accessible Switchgear
Breaker Type Frame Ampacity Available
150 kAIC
Breaker Section WidthsInches (mm)
18.00 + X (457.2 + X) 22.00 + X (558.8 + X) 24.00 + X (609.6 + X)

Narrow Magnum DS Frames
(MDN)
8002000
MDN4-
MDN5-
MDN6-
MDNC-
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB
MainB, C, D
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
Standard Magnum DS
Frame (MDS)
8003200
MDS4-
MDS6-
MDS8-
MDSC-
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
MainB/F
TieB/F or C/G
FeederB/F and C/G
Standard Series NRX
Frames (NRX)
8001200
NSS4-
NSS5-
NSS6-
FeederA, B, C, D,
E, F, G, H
Instrument compartment
(SPD, HRG, metering,
controls, panelboard, etc.)
All positions All positions All positions
Cable
Compartment
Cable
Compartment
18.00 (457.2) x x 22.00 (558.8)
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
Cable
Compartment
x 24.00 (609.6)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

20.1-32
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Guide
034
Figure 20.1-6. Combination Breaker/Cable Sections
Figure 20.1-7. Front-Accessible Standard and Narrow Breakers Main-Tie-Main Typical Layout
Figure 20.1-8. Main-Tie-Main Typical LayoutMDS Mains and Tie, NRX/MDS Feeders
Cable compartment must be at least as wide as the breaker compartment.
Cable sections must be on the right-hand side of the breaker sections when facing the front.
22.00 (558.8) 44.00 (1117.6)
Cable
Compartment
Top Entry
Main Breaker
Instrument
or SPD
Cable Compartment
Top Entry
Main Breaker 5 kA
Instrument
or SPD
Blank
44.00 (1117.6)
Cable Compartment
Top Entry
6 kA Main Breaker
Fans
22.00 (558.8) 44.00 (1117.6)
Instrument
or SPD
Instrument
or SPD
Main Breaker
Cable
Compartment
Bottom
Entry
Main Breaker 5 kA
Cable Compartment
Bottom Entry
Blank

Cable
Compartment
Main
MDS 632
3200A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Cable
Compartment
Metering Metering Metering
Tie
MDS 632
3200A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Feeder
MDN-608
800A
Cable
Compartment
Main
MDS 632
3200A
Cable
Compartment
22.00
(558.8)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
22.00
(558.8)
22.00
(558.8)
22.00
(558.8)
18.00
(457.2)
Blank
Blank
Cable
Compartment
Arrangement 9 Arrangement 10 Arrangement 11
24.00
(609.6)
44.00
(1117.6)
Instr. Instr.
SPD
Cable
Compartment
24.00
(609.6)
44.00
(1117.6)
Feeder
NRX
600A
Feeder
NRX
400A
Feeder
NRX
600A
SPD
Cable
Compartment
24.00
(609.6)
44.00
(1117.6)
Main MDS
3200A
A E
Instr. Instr.
A E
B F
Main MDS
3200A
B F
C G
Tie MDS
3200A
B F
C
D
Feeder
NRX
400A
D
Feeder
NRX
400A
D
G
Feeder
NRX
800A
Feeder
NRX
800A
A E
Feeder
NRX
800A
Feeder
NRX
800A
Feeder MDS
1600A
C G
20.1-33
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Guide
035
Figure 20.1-9. Typical Structure and Breaker ArrangementsSeries NRX and Magnum DS Breakers
Feeder
800
Cable
Compartment
Arrangement 1 Arrangement 2
24.00
(609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
Cable
Compartment
24.00
(609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
Cable
Compartment
24.00
(609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
Cable
Compartment
24.00
(609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
Cable
Compartment
24.00
(609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
A
Feeder
800
E
Instr.
A
Instr.
E
Feeder
800
B
Feeder
800
F
Main 800
1600 2000 3200
B F
Feeder
800
C
Feeder
800
G
Feeder
800
D
NRX
800
H
Feeder
800
A
Feeder
800
E
Feeder
800
B
Feeder
800
F
Tie 800
1600 2000 3200
C G
Feeder 800
1600 2000 3200
C G
Feeder
800
D
Feeder
800
H
Feeder
800
A
Feeder
800
E
Feeder
800
D
Feeder
800
H
Instr.
A
Instr.
E
Feeder
800
D
Feeder
800
H
Feeder
800
C
Feeder
800
G
Feeder
800
C
Feeder
800
G
Feeder
800
D
Feeder
800
H
Tie 800
1600 2000 3200
B F
Main 800
1600 2000 3200
B F
20.1-34
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Dimensions
036
Conduit Area LocationDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 20.1-10. Floor Plans and Available Conduit Space in Inches (mm)18.00, 22.00, 30.00, 44.00-Inch (457.2, 558.8, 762.0, 1117.6 mm) Wide
Rear-Access Structures
This dimension is reduced by 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) when vertical section is close coupled to a dry-type transformer due to secondary bus connections.
Note: See Table 20.1-18 for further dimensions.
Figure 20.1-11. Floor Plans and Available Conduit Space in Inches (mm)Front-Access Structures
Power
Conduit
Area
Top
Control
Conduit
Area
Bottom
Control
Conduit
Area
31.18
(792.0)
8.38
(212.9)
A
D
1.50
(38.1)
12.00
(304.8)
CC
16.00
(406.4)
3.00
(76.2)
1.38
(35.1)
3.00
(76.2)
1.03 (26.2)
3.60
(91.4)
Front
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
21.50
(546.1)
3.50 (88.9)
0.65
(16.5)
3.60
(91.4)
3.50
(88.9)
5.38
(136.7)
Contro
Top
l
Conduit
Area
3.60
(91.4)
3.00
(76.2)
6.00
(152.4)
16.00
(406.4)
16.00
(406.4)
16.00
(406.4)
1.50
(38.1)
3.00 (76.2)
6.00 (152.4)
3.00 (76.2)
1.03 (26.2)
3.60
(94.4)
3.50
(88.9)
4.25 (108.0)
0.65
(16.5)
21.50
(546.1)
W
4.63
(117.6)
Bottom
Control
Conduit
Area
Front
Provisions
for 0.50 (12.7)
Hardware
44-Inch
Ref: 4A37896
Power
Conduit
Area 1.50
(38.1)
Top
Control
Conduit
Area
3.00
(76.2)
31.18
(792.0)
3.38
(85.9)
A
D
1.50
(38.1)
12.00
(304.8)
CC
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
1.38
(35.1)
3.00
(76.2)
1.03 (26.2)
3.60
(91.4)
Front
W
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
21.50
(546.1)
3.50 (88.9)
0.65
(16.5)
3.60
(91.4)
3.50
(88.9)
5.38
(136.7)
Provision
for 0.50 (12.7)
Hardware
Bottom
Control
Conduit
Area
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)

Bus Bus
24.00
(609.6)
48.00
(1219.2)
24.00
(609.6)
20.50
(520.7)
40.20
(1021.1)
20.00
(508.0)
17.50
(444.5)
Breakers
Cable
Conduit
Area
Bus Bus
24.00
(609.6)
54.00
(1371.6)
30.00
(762.0)
26.50
(673.1)
Breakers
Cable
Conduit
Area
Front
Bus Bus
24.00
(609.6)
68.00
(1727.2)
44.00
(1117.6)
40.50
(1028.7)
Breakers
Cable
Conduit
Area
20.1-35
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Dimensions
037
Table 20.1-18. Rear-Access Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 20.1-19. Front-Access Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 20.1-20. Arc-Resistant Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Arc-resistant switchgears conduit space for bottom entry is the same as regular rear-accessible gear.
W D A CC Recommended Number of Conduits
3.50 Inch (88.9 mm) 4.00 Inch (101.6 mm)
18.00 (457.2) 54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
2
4
6
8
12
14
16
2
4
6
8
10
12
16
22.00 (558.8) 54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24.00 (609.6) 60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
9.08 (230.6)
15.08 (383.0)
21.08 (535.4)
27.08 (687.8)
33.08 (840.2)
39.08 (992.6)
5
9
12
15
18
21
5
8
12
15
18
21
30.00 (762.0) 54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
44.00 (1117.6) 54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
7
14
21
28
35
42
49
7
14
21
28
35
42
49
60.00 (1524.0) 54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
W CC Recommended Number of Conduits
3.00 Inch (76.2 mm) 3.50 Inch (88.9 mm) 4.00 Inch (101.6 mm)
18.00 (457.2)
22.00 (558.8)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
13.89 (352.8)
17.89 (454.4)
20.50 (520.7)
25.89 (657.6)
39.89 (1013.2)
12
15
22
6
8
8
12
18
6
8
8
11
17
W D A CC Recommended Number of Conduits for Top Entry
3.50 Inch (88.9 mm) 4.00 Inch (101.6 mm)

22.00 (558.8) 72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
14.80 (375.9)
20.80 (528.3)
26.80 (680.7)
34.80 (883.9)
8
10
14
18
6
9
13
15
30.00 (762.0) 72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
14.80 (375.9)
20.80 (528.3)
26.80 (680.7)
34.80 (883.9)
11
14
20
24
8
12
20
24
44.00 (1117.6) 72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
14.80 (375.9)
20.80 (528.3)
26.80 (680.7)
34.80 (883.9)
16
20
28
36
12
18
26
30
20.1-36
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Dimensions
038
Section ViewDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 20.1-12. Section View of a Typical Structure with Magnum DS BreakersDimensions in Inches (mm)
See Table 20.1-18, Page 20.1-35.
4.10 (104.1)
92.00
(2336.8)
D 25.63
(651.0)
99.00
(2514.6)
20.28
(515.1)
Ground
Bus
H
o
r
i
z
o
n
t
a
l

C
r
o
s
s

B
u
s

A
r
e
a
V
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

B
u
s

R
i
s
e
r

A
r
e
a
Lifting Plate
Metal-Enclosed Shipping
Split Terminal Blocks
Optional top-of-gear
Breaker Lifter
20.1-37
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Dimensions
039
Figure 20.1-13. Section View of a Typical Structure with Series NRX BreakersDimensions in Inches (mm)
99.00
(2515.0)
D

25.63
(651.0)

4.10
(104.0)
92.00
(2337.0)
20.28
(515.0)
H
o
r
i
z
o
n
t
a
l

C
r
o
s
s

B
u
s

A
r
e
a

H
o
r
i
z
o
n
t
a
l

C
r
o
s
s

B
u
s

A
r
e
a

V
e
r
t
i
c
a
l

B
u
s

R
i
s
e
r

A
r
e
a
Lifting Plate
Metal-Enclosed Shipping
Split Terminal Blocks
Optional Top-of-Gear
Breaker Lifter
Ground Bus
20.1-38
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Dimensions
040
Figure 20.1-14. Front-Access Section ViewDimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: Top-mounted breaker lifting device available for bottom cable entry/exit only. For cables exiting the top of the switchgear,
a oor-mounted lifter must be used.
3.50
(88.9)
3.50
(88.9)
3.19
(81.0)
Encl. Width View A
Lifting Angle (View A)
8.81
(223.8)
30.8
(782.82) 6.02
(152.9)
4.10
(104.1)
800A
Runbacks Shown;
See Table A
for Other Sizes
22.00
(558.8)
22.00
(558.8)
22.00
(558.8)
92.00
(2336.8)
6.41
(162.8)
20.28
(515.1)
0.88
(22.2)
40.16
(1020.1)
16.55
(420.4)
Neutral
Taps
Table A. Bus Cross-Sections
Ampere Rating 800A 1200/1600A 2000A
Runback Cross-Section 3.50 x 0.25 2.50 x 0.38 4.50 x 0.50
20.1-39
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Dimensions
041
LayoutOutdoor Walk-in Switchgear
Figure 20.1-15. Outdoor Walk-in Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
46.63 (1184.4) = 55.00-inch (1397.0 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box); 52.63 (1336.8) = 61.00-inch (1549.4 mm) throat
(44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box).
18.70 (475.0) = 44.00-inch wide transition box.

Opening
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
25.31
(642.9)
2.50
(63.5)
17.13
(435.1)
4.00
(101.6)
(1039.9)
Opening
Foundation Tie Down
(for Seismic Only)
Lifting Angle
3.06
(77.7)
Opening
3.06
(77.7)
3.06
(77.7)
(684.3)
2.00
22.00
Unit
44.00
(1117.6)
Unit
30.00
(762.0)
Unit
3.93
(99.8)
1.50
(38.1)
48.87
(1241.3)
Bottom
Conduit
Space
3.50 x 3.50
(88.9 x 88.9)
Control Wire
Opening
3.50 x 3.50
(88.9 x 88.9)
45.66
(1159.8)
5.03
(127.8)
B
Structure
Width
16.81
(427.0
18.44
(468.4)
0.95
(24.1)
A
Rear of Base
Roof

0.95
(24.1)

45.35
(1151.9)
50.00
(1270.0)

25.00
(635.0)
25.35
(644.0)
39.35
(999.5)

33.35
(847.1)

44.00
(1117.6)

30.00
(762.0)
38.00
(965.2)
22.00
(558.8)

15.00
(381.0)
19.00
(482.6)

0.95
(24.1)
Bus Duct
Chimney & Cover
B
A
17.35
(440.7)

Structure
Width
22.00
(558.8)
B
11.00
(279.4)
C
25.52
(648.2)

109.03
(2769.4)
to Floor

Rear of
Inner
Structure
C 0.95
(24.1)
C
L
C
L
B
13.35
(339.1)
9.00
(228.6)
18.00
(457.2)
41.38
(1051.1)
22.00
(558.8)
37.50
(952.5)
Switchgear Throat
Transition Box
(Shipped Attached)
45.00
(1143.0)
Unit Widths
30.00
(762.0)
44.00
22.00
(558.8)
15.50
8.00
(203.2)
Transformer
Flange
5.00
(127.0)
26.97
(685.0)
42.00
(1066.8)
(Clear
Width)
20.74
(526.8) 30.89
(784.6)

36.00
(914.4)
Switchgear Throat
O.S. of Outdoor
End Sheet
22.00
(558.8)

Throat
Opening
& TXF

14.00
(355.6)

72.00
(1828.8)
Switchgear
Depth
See
Figure 1

18.00-Inch Width = 17.4 to Rear Frame (441.9)

A
A
Outdoor
Roof Sheet
C
L
Transformer
Flange
C
L
C
L

33.45
(849.6)
39.66
(1007.4)

33.45
(849.6)
Front of
Outdoor
Base
Door Swing
Door
Swing
30.21
(767.3)
(Opening
Width)
28.59
(From Base)
119.98
(3047.5)
Overall Depth
117.08
(2973.8)
(Base)
26.00
(660.4)
Bus Opening (From Base)
105.06
(2668.5)
109.03
(2769.4)
18.44
(468.4)
51.23
(1301.2)
See Figure 1 Above for
Bus Duct Orientation
4.00
(101.6)
111.48
(2831.6)
Overall
Height
2.00
(50.8)
CC
L
CCCC
CC
LL
CCCC
3.89
(98.8)
33.45
(849.6)
(Door
Width)
5.75
(146.1)
5.75
(146.1)
0.61
(15.5)
43.38
(1101.9)
(Aisle Width)
2.30
(without breakers)
Weight-
Structure Lbs (kg)
End Trims One set per lineup) 1500 (681)
18-inch (457.2) wide breaker structure 2500 (1135)
Reference Drawing: 9255C35
Floor Plan
Side View Top View
Front View
Top View
Section B-B
Section A-A
Figure 1
20.1-40
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Dimensions
042
LayoutOutdoor Non-Walk-in Switchgear
Figure 20.1-16. Outdoor Non-Walk-in Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
18.70 (475.0) = 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide transition box.
46.63 (1184.4) = 55.00-inch (1397.0) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box); 52.63 (1336.8) = 61.00-inch (1549.4 mm) throat
B
Structure
Width
16.85
(428.0
18.44
(468.4)
0.95
(24.1)
A
Rear of Base
Roof

0.95
(24.1)

45.35
(1151.9)
50.00
(1270.0)

25.00
(635.0)
25.35
(644.0)
39.35
(999.5)

33.35
(847.1)

44.00
(1117.6)

30.00
(762.0)
38.00
(965.2)
22.00
(558.8)

15.00
(381.0)
19.00
(482.6)

0.95
(24.1)
Bus Duct
Chimney & Cover
B
A
17.35
(440.7)

Structure
Width
22.00
(558.8)
B
11.00
(279.4)
C
25.52
(648.2)

109.03
(2769.4)
to Floor

Rear of
Inner
Structure
C
0.95
(24.1)
C
L
C
L
B
18.00
(457.2)
13.35
(339.1)
9.00
(228.6)
20.00
(508.0)
25.44
(646.2)
2.50
(63.5)
17.13
(435.1)
4.00
(101.6)
40.94
(1039.9)
Opening
Foundation Tie Down
(for Seismic Only)
Lifting Angle
3.06
(77.7)
18.94
Opening
3.06
(77.7)
3.06
(77.7)
(684.3)
20.00
(508.0)
2.00
(50.8)
22.00
Unit
44.00
(1117.6)
Unit
30.00
(762.0)
Unit
3.93
(99.8)
1.50
(38.1)
17.83
(452.9)
Bottom
Conduit
Space
3.50 x 3.50
(88.9 x 88.9)
Control Wire
Opening
20.10
(510.5)
30.23
(767.8)
26.97
(685.0)

36.00
(914.4)
Switchgear Throat
O.S. of Outdoor
End Sheet
22.00
(558.8)

Throat
Opening
& TXF

1.60
(40.6)
14.00
(355.6)

72.00
(1828.8)
Switchgear
Depth
See
Figure 1

7.51
(190.8)
Work Space


A
A
Outdoor
Roof Sheet
1.65
(41.9)
C
L
Transformer
Flange
C
L
C
L
Indoor Gear Rear of Base
Outdoor
Base
41.38
(1051.1)
22.00
(558.8)
37.50
(952.5)
Switchgear Throat
Transition Box
(Shipped Attached)
45.00
(1143.0)
Unit Widths
30.00
(762.0)
44.00
22.00
(558.8)
15.50
8.00
(203.2)
Transformer
Flange
28.58
88.02
(2235.7)
Overall Depth
86.04
(2185.4)
(Base)
26.00
(660.4)
105.08
(2669.0)
109.05
(2769.9)
18.44
(468.4)
51.23
(1301.2)
4.00
(101.6)
109.79
(2788.7)
Overall
Height
2.00
(50.8)
CC
L
CCCC
C
L
CC
3.89
(98.8)
(without breakers)
Weight-
Structure Lbs (kg)
End trims one set per lineup) 1500 (681)
Floor Plan
Top View
Section B-B
Section A-A
Figure 1
Side View Top View
Front View
20.1-41
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Guide
043
Arc-Resistant
Layout Restrictions
All Magnum rear-accessible layouts
(see Table 20.1-16) are available
in arc-resistant design with the
exceptions of the following:
1. Utility compartments as shown
in Figure 20.1-3 arrangement
1a or 1b.
2. 38.00-inch (965.2 mm) or
50.00-inch (1270.0 mm)
compartments as shown
in Figure 20.1-3 arrangement
1a or 1b.
3. 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) compart-
ments as shown in Figure 20.1-3,
arrangements 2833.
4. Slider control section as shown
in Figure 20.1-3, arrangement 36.
5. Group-mounted molded-case
circuit breaker switchboard as
6. MDN, MDSX, MDSL, MDDX, four-
pole and Series NRX breakers.
The following minimum dimensional
requirements also apply:
Requires an additional 10-foot ceiling

clearance with no overhead obstructions
(i.e., lights, conduits, smoke detectors, etc.).
Front access and outdoor/sprinkler
proof enclosures are not currently
available in arc-resistant gear.
Dimension Minimum in
Inches (mm)
Width (of entire structure) 66.00 (1676.4)
Depth 72.00 (1828.8)
Height (without plenum)
96.10 (2440.9)
Height (with plenum) 117.00 (2971.8)
Section width 22.00 (558.8)
Figure 20.1-17. Floor Plans and Available Conduit Space in Inches (mm)
Arc-Resistant Structure
36.00 inches (914.4 mm) is the recommended front clearance for breaker removal with
top-of-switchgear-mounted breaker lifter. If a portable breaker lifter is to be used, allow
at least 84.00 inches (2133.6 mm) of aisle space.
W
21.25
(539.8)
36.00
(914.4)
0.95
(24.1)
D
Plenum
and
Roof Flaps
CC
3.85 (97.8)
Dynamic
Flap Cage
Top Control
Conduit Area
A
Front
20.1-42
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Dimensions
044
PlenumDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 20.1-18. Arc-Resistant Switchgear Elevation View
Note: Refer to Table 20.1-20, Page 20.1-35 for complete dimensions.
A
26.10
(662.9)
91.90
(2334.3)
98.70
(2507.0)
117.10
(2974.3)
D
27.00
(685.8)
20.1-43
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Dimensions
045
Figure 20.1-19. Arc-Resistant Switchgear Exhaust Congurations
Note: Gear shown with rear covers.
72.00
(1828.8)
Deep
34.80 (883.9)
to Rear Frame
37.30 (947.4)
to Front of Door
23.7
(602.0)
REF
72.00
(1828.8)
Deep
15.20
(386.1)
23.70
(602.0)
Width
C
e
n
t
e
r

L
i
n
e

o
f
E
x
h
a
u
s
t

D
u
c
t
28.90
(734.1)
Rear Exit Will Cover Two
22.00-Inch (558.8 mm)
Wide Structures
Right-Hand Exit
Rear Right-Hand Exit
20.1-44
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Layout Dimensions
046
Figure 20.1-19. Arc-Resistant Switchgear Exhaust Congurations (Continued)
Note: Gear shown with rear covers.
72.00
(1828.8)
Deep
63.50
(1612.9)
40.00
(1016.0)
21.90
(556.3)
23.70
(602.0)
Width
C
e
n
t
e
r

L
i
n
e

o
f
E
x
h
a
u
s
t

D
u
c
t
10.00 (254.0) Minimum
Distance Before
Turning 90 or 45
72.00
(1828.8)
Deep
15.10
(383.5)
23.70
(602.0)
Width
C
e
n
t
e
r

L
i
n
e

o
f
E
x
h
a
u
s
t

D
u
c
t
28.90
(734.1)
Rear Exit Will Cover Two
22.00-Inch (558.8 mm)
Wide Structures
72.00
(1828.8)
Deep
Side Exit with 90 Elbow
Rear Left-Hand Exit
Non-Plenum/Exhaust Exit
20.1-45
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
Technical Data/Dimensions/Weights
047
Application
Center of Gravity
For seismic calculations, the following
dimensions should be used to locate
the center of gravity for Indoor
Magnum DS switchgear.
Table 20.1-21. Center of Gravity Location
Vertical Left-to-Right From the Front
60.00
(1524.0)
Center of
lineup
26.00
(660.4)
Table 20.1-22. Magnum DS Indoor Rear Switchgear Structure Approximate Weights
(Less Breakers)
Width in
Inches (mm)
Depth in
Inches (mm)
Approximate Weight
in Lbs (kg)
Breaker Structure
18.00, 22.00 and 24.00
(457.2, 558.8 and 609.6)
60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
1250 (568)
1300 (591)
1350 (614)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
1400 (639)
1450 (659)
1500 (682)
30.00 (762.0) 60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
1900 (864)
2000 (909)
2100 (955)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
2200 (1000)
2300 (1045)
2400 (1091)
44.00 (117.6) 60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
2500 (1136)
2600 (1182)
2700 (1227)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
2800 (1273)
2900 (1318)
3000 (1364)
60.00 (1524.0) 60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
3800 (1727)
4000 (1818)
4200 (1909)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
4400 (2000)
4600 (2091)
4800 (2182)
Auxiliary/Transition Structures
12.00 (304.8) 60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
475 (216)
500 (227)
525 (239)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
550 (250)
575 (261)
600 (273)
18.00, 22.00 and 24.00
(457.2, 558.8 and 609.6)
60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
950 (432)
1000 (455)
1050 (477)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
1100 (500)
1150 (523)
1200 (545)
30.00 (762.0) 60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
1700 (773)
1750 (795)
1800 (818)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
1850 (840)
1900 (864)
1950 (886)
Utility Structures
38.00 (965.2) 60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
1600 (726)
1625 (738)
1650 (749)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
1675 (760)
1700 (772)
1725 (783)
50.00 (1270.0) 60.00 (1542.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
1650 (749)
1675 (760)
1700 (772)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
1725 (783)
1750 (795)
1775 (806)
20.1-46
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
048
Table 20.1-23. Magnum DS Indoor Front Switchgear Structure
Approximate Weights (Less Breakers)
Table 20.1-24. Magnum DS and Series NRX Breaker Weights
Note: Impact weight equals 1.5 times breaker static weight.
Three-pole frame weight given; four-pole frame weight equals
1.33 times more.
Table 20.1-25. Magnum DS Arc-Resistant Switchgear Additional
Approximate Weights
Width in
Inches (mm)
Depth in
Inches (mm)
Approximate Weight
in Lbs (kg)
Breaker Structure
18.00, 22.00 and 24.00
(457.2, 558.8 and 609.6)
40.00 (1016.0) 1100 (500)
30.00 (762.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 1750 (795)
44.00 (1117.6) 40.00 (1016.0) 2200 (1000)
Cable Compartment
18.00, 22.00 and 24.00
(457.2, 558.8 and 609.6)
40.00 (1016.0) 800 (363)
30.00 (762.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 1550 (705)
44.00 (1117.6) 40.00 (1016.0) 1600 (727)
Breaker Drawout in Lbs (kg)
Compact
NRX 54 (24)
Narrow
MDN-408
MDN-508
MDN-608
130 (59)
130 (59)
130 (59)
MDN-C08
MDN-416
MDN-516
145 (66)
130 (59)
130 (59)
MDN-616
MDN-C16
MDN-620
MDN-C20
130 (59)
145 (66)
145 (66)
145 (66)
Standard
MDS-408
MDS-608
MDS-808
130 (59)
130 (59)
145 (66)
MDS-C08
MDS-X08
MDS-616
145 (66)
210 (95)
130 (59)
MDS-816
MDS-C16
MDS-X16
145 (66)
145 (66)
210 (95)
MDS-620
MDS-820
MDS-C20
145 (66)
145 (66)
145 (66)
MDS-X20
MDS-632
MDS-832
MDS-C32
210 (95)
175 (79)
175 (79)
175 (79)
Double Wide
MDS-X32
MDN-640
MDN-840
325 (148)
310 (141)
310 (141)
MDN-C40
MDS-840
MDS-C40
310 (141)
310 (141)
310 (141)
MDS-X40
MDD-X40
MDS-850
345 (157)
325 (148)
310 (141)
MDS-C50
MDS-X50
MDD-X50
310 (141)
345 (157)
325 (148)
MDS-C60
MDD-X60
310 (141)
325 (148)
Fused
MDS-L08
MDS-L16
MDS-L20
185 (84)
215 (98)
215 (98)
Arc-Resistant Component Approximate Weight (kg/Foot (m)
Plenum 34 (50.60)
Exhaust duct 38 (56.55)
20.1-47
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Magnum DS
049
Application
Standards
Magnum DS circuit breakers meet or
exceed all applicable requirements of
ANSI Standards C37.13, C37.17,
C37.50 and CSA.
System Voltage and Frequency
Magnum DS breakers are designed for
operation on AC systems only, 60 Hz
or 50 Hz, 635V maximum.
Continuous Current Ratings
Unlike transformers, generators and
motors, circuit breakers are maximum-
rated devices and have no built-in
temporary overload current ratings.
Consequently, it is vital that each
application take into consideration
the maximum anticipated current
demand, initial and future, including
temporary overloads.
The continuous rating of any Magnum
DS breaker is limited to the sensor
rating, or the frame size current rating,
whichever is the lesser. For instance,
an MDS-616 1600A frame breaker
with 800A sensors has a maximum
continuous rating of 800A, but the
same breaker with 1600A sensors
is limited to 1600A maximum.
All current ratings are based on a
maximum ambient air temperature
of 40C (104F).
Ambient Temperature
ing the enclosure should be within
the limits of: 30C (22F) to
+40C (+104F).
Altitude
The breakers are applicable at their
full voltage and current ratings up to
a maximum altitude of 6600 ft (2012m)
above sea level. When installed at
higher altitudes, the ratings are subject
to the following correction factors in
accordance with ANSI C37.20.1.
Table 20.1-26. Altitude Derating Factors
Unusual Environmental and
Operating Conditions
Special attention should be given
to applications subject to the
following conditions:
1. Damaging or hazardous fumes,
vapors, etc.
2. Excessive or abrasive dust.
For such conditions, it is generally
recommended that the switchgear
be installed in a clean, dry room,
with ltered and/or pressurized
clean air. This method permits the
use of standard indoor switchgear
and avoids the derating effect of
non-ventilated enclosures.
3. Salt spray, excessive moisture,
dripping, etc.
Drip shields in equipment rooms
and space heaters in indoor
weatherproof enclosures, may
be indicated, depending upon
the severity of the conditions.
4. Excessively high or low ambient
temperatures.
For ambient temperatures exceed-
ing 40C, and based on a standard
temperature rise of 65C, the con-
tinuous current ratings of breaker
frame sizes, and also buses, current
transformers, etc., will be subject
to a derating factor calculated
from the following formula:
Circuit breakers are not adversely
affected by very low outdoor
ambient temperatures, particularly
when energized and carrying
load currents. The standard
space heaters in weatherproof
switchgear will raise the
temperature slightly and
prevent condensation.
Electrical components such as
relays and instruments, however,
must be applied within the
manufacturers specied limits.
5. Exposure to seismic shock.
Magnum DS assemblies and
breakers have been certied for
applications through International
Building Code 2009 (IBC) and
California Building Code 2010
(CBC). Assembly modications
may be required, so such
conditions must be specied.
6. Abnormally high frequency
of operation.
In line with above, a lesser number
of operations between servicing,
and more frequent replacement
of parts, may be indicated.
Altitude Voltage
Correction
Current
Correction
Feet Meters
6600
7000
7500
2012
2134
2286
1000
0.989
0.976
1000
0.998
0.995
8000
8500
9000
2438
2591
2743
0.963
0.950
0.933
0.993
0.990
0.987
9500
10,000
10,500
2896
3048
3200
0.917
0.900
0.883
0,983
0.980
0.977
11,000
11,500
12,000
3353
3505
3658
0.867
0.850
0.833
0.973
0.970
0.967
12,500
13,000
3810
3962
0.817
0.800
0.963
0.960
105 TotalSpecial Ambient, C
105 Total40C Standard Ambient
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20.1-48
September 2011
Sheet 20
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
050


September 2011

Contents

21.0-1

Sheet

21

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

001

S
w
i
t
c
h
b
o
a
r
d
s
L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e



21.0-2

OPTIM Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.0-5

Metering Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.0-6

Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.0-8

Pow-R-Line C Front- or Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders

. . . . . . . . .

21.0-9

Pow-R-Line C Front-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.0-10

Pow-R-Line

i,

Compartmentalized Feeders

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.0-11

Circuit Breakers and Fusible Switch Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.0-14
Pow-R-Line C Front-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.1-1
Pow-R-Line C Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders and Pow-R-Line

i

. . . . .

21.2-1
Pow-R-Line

i

, Compartmentalized Feeders, Rear-Access

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.3-1
Outdoor Enclosures

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.4-1
Metal-Enclosed Drawout SwitchboardsLow Voltage

FeaturesGeneral

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.5-1

Magnum SB Breaker Ratings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.5-2

Layout and Breaker Weights

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.5-3
Integrated Facility System Switchboards

General Description

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.6-1

Layout Dimensions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.6-2
Generator Quick Connect Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.7-1
Roll-up Generator Termination Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.8-1
Multipoint Tenant Submetering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.9-1
Commercial Metering Switchboards

General Description

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.10-1

Layout Dimensions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.10-9
Instant Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.11-1
Specications:

See Eatons



CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Type 1 Pow-R-Line C Front-Access
Group-Mounted Feeders

. . . . . . . . . . . .


Pow-R-Line

i

Compartmentalized Feeders

. . . . . . . . .


Integrated Facility System
Switchboard

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Commercial Metering Switchboard

. . . . .


Instant Switchboards

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Power Distribution Units

. . . . . . . . . . . . .


Circuit Breakers and Fusible
SwitchesLV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



Switchboard

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16429G Section 26 24 13.33

Roll-up Generator Termination
Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16429E Section 26 24 13.31
21.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

21

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

General Description

002

and Denitions

Eatons Pow-R-Line

family of
distribution switchboards incorporates
new design concepts that t the
ever-increasing need for applications
on high short circuit systems, while
retaining maximum exibility, safety
and convenience throughout the line.

Front Access

Front-access switchboards align at
the rear, enabling them to be placed
against a wall (Type Pow-R-Line C
front accessible). If the main section
is deeper than others, due to physical
size of the main device, the necessary
offset in lineup will occur in front, and
the main section will be accessible
from the side as well as from the front.
Eaton also offers front accessible
switchboards that align at the front
and rear.

Rear Access

Rear-access switchboards align at the
front and the rear. Bus maintenance
and cable entry and exit require rear
access. There are two types of rear
accessible switchboards. Both types
use the same incoming utility and/or
main structures. The rst type uses
group-mounted feeder devices with
panel construction (Type Pow-R-Line C
rear accessible). The second type uses
individually compartmentalized feeder
devices with load side insulated bus
bar extensions (Type Pow-R-Line

i

).

Individually Mounted

Larger overcurrent protective devices
(OCPD) may be individually mounted.
In most cases, this means that the
OCPD is mounted vertically in the
switchboard and is connected via
bus bar. All insulated case circuit
breakers, power air circuit breakers
and bolted pressure contact switches
are individually mounted. Molded-
case circuit breakers 600A and above
may be individually mounted when
used as a main or as a feeder device
feeding other OCPD within a section
or adjacent sections.

Compartmentalized Feeder
and Branch Devices

Compartmentalized molded-case
circuit breakers and fusible switches
provide additional isolation.
Individually mounted molded-case
circuit breakers and fusible switches
through 1200A are available in a
compartmentalized, rear-access,
rear-connected switchboard. See
Pow-R-Line

i

switchboards in this
section for details.

Standard Switchboard Height

Standard Pow-R-Line switchboard
height is 90.00 inches (2286.0 mm).
Contact Eaton for special heights.

Group Mounting

Group-mounted circuit protective
devices are an assembly of units
mounted on a panelboard type
chassis. Units may be molded-
case breakers, fusible switches,
customer metering and surge
protective devices.
A main molded-case breaker or main
fusible switch, within the sizes listed for
panelboard design, can be included in
the panel-mounted assembly in lieu of
a separate, individually mounted unit.

Space Only for Future Devices
Group-Mounted Construction

Where space only for future circuit
protective devices is required, the
proper space and a blank ller plate
will be supplied. Connections and
mounting hardware are not included.

Provision for Future Devices

Where provisions for future circuit
protective devices are required,
space for the device, corresponding
vertical bus, device connectors and
the necessary mounting hardware
will be supplied.

Bus Bar System

Standard bus in the switchboards
is tin-plated aluminum. Copper,
silver-plated copper or tin-plated
copper are also available.
Main bus and sub-main buses
meet UL

and NEMA

standards for
temperature rise on all Pow-R-Line
switchboards. Special density rated
bus is available.

Overcurrent Devices

To properly select and size overcurrent
devices for use in a switchboard,
the allowable temperature rise must be
taken into account as to its effect
on the tripping characteristics of
the devices in question per UL 891.
Accordingly, the NEC

requires
overcurrent devices to be rated not less
than 125% of the continuous load they
are protecting. To comply with this, an
80% derating factor must be used with all
overcurrent devices such as molded-case
breakers and FDPW fusible switches
unless they are tested and listed for
application at 100% of the rating. All
Magnum type breakers and bolted
pressure switches are 100% rated.

Short-Circuit Rating

Standard bus and connectors on all
switchboards are rated for use on
systems capable of producing up to
65,000A rms symmetrical short-circuit
current at the incoming terminals.
Increased bus short-circuit ratings
equal to that of connected switchboard
devices, up to 200,000A rms symmetrical,
are available in most
Pow-R-Line C switchboards when
approved main devices are installed.
UL labeled switchboard sections are
marked with their applicable short-circuit
rating.
When air power circuit breakers are used
as feeder devices in a switchboard, these
devices may experience up to a 30-cycle
(1/2 second) delay if the instantaneous
setting is turned off. Eaton has qualied
our low voltage switchboards when air
power circuit breakers are used as
feeders (and mains) to 30 cycles. This
rating is not recognized under the UL 891
standard. However, Eaton has witness
tested the structure bussing with a
qualied National Recognized Testing
Laboratory (NRTL) at 30 cycles (1/2
second) up to 100 kAIC symmetrical.

Provision for Busway Entrance
and Exit

Busway connections to switchboard
sections include cutout and drilling in the
top of the switchboard with riser
connections from the switchboard device
or bus, up to the point where the bus
duct enters the switchboard. No
connections are furnished external to the
switchboard.

In all transactions involving busway
attached to switchboards, it is essential
that information regarding orientation of
the busway with respect to the front of
the switchboard be supplied to the
coordinating assembly plant.

On Pow-R-Line C switchboards, a
solid bus bar is used to connect the bus
duct to the individually mounted main
device, main or sub-main switchboard
bus, or vertical main bus of panel-
mounted circuit protective device
panels.

Busway fed by group-mounted
branch devices are cable connected.

Aluminum riser connections are
standard. Copper- or silver-plated
copper is available as an option.


21.0-3

September 2011


Sheet

21

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

General Description

003

Transitions

Transition structures are required
for connecting switchboards to the
secondary of power center
transformer (uid lled), motor
control centers, and for other special
switchboard congurations such
as L or U shaped lineups. In
some applications, an extra structure
complete with connections is required;
in others, where switchboard depth
and space permit, only the connection
conductors are required. Refer to
Eaton for these applications.

Auxiliary Structures

These are normally mounted adjacent
to service structures or distribution
structures, and used where incoming
service or feeder conductors require
additional space or facilities not
included in the standard switchboard,
such as:
1. Mounted adjacent to a top
connected service structure
and used as a cable pull structure
where service conductors are
brought in underground. Auxiliary
structures are the same depth and
height as the service structure, and
are wide enough to accommodate
the incoming cables.
2. Mounted adjacent to a service
structure and used as a bus
transition compartment for
running riser bus from the load-
side of the service structure up to
top outgoing bus duct connection
when distribution structures are
not required. Auxiliary structures
are the same depth and height as
service structures.
In addition to the above applications,
auxiliary structures may be mounted
adjacent to a distribution structure
and used as a structure for lighting
panel or other device that may be
cable-connected to a branch circuit
device in the distribution structure.
Dimensions are compatible with the
arrangements required.

Switchboards Used as
Service Equipment

Service equipment is the electrical
equipment that constitutes the main
control and means of power cutoff
the electric service (normally Power
Company supply) brought into the
building.
Where switchboards are to be used as
service equipment, certain NEC and
UL requirements apply that necessitate
modications not normally supplied in
switchboards.
The following is a summary of the
requirements that are pertinent to the
application of a switchboard for
service equipment:
A. A switchboard with main lugs
only (no main disconnect)
must be designed so that all
circuits in the switchboard can
be disconnected from the supply
source by the operation of no
more than six operating handles
(breaker or switch).
Switchboard equipped with main
disconnect devices are not subject
to the above six disconnect
limitation, as the entire board can
be de-energized with the main
disconnect device.
Ground fault protection of
equipment must be provided for
solidly grounded wye electrical
services of more than 150V to
ground, but not exceeding 600V
phase-to-phase for each service
disconnecting means rated 1000A
or more.
B. For testing purposes, means are
also required to disconnect the
switchboard neutral bus from the

grounded service neutral conductor

(single-phase, three-wire; and three-
phase, four-wire systems). To
comply with this requirement,
a removable link (solid bar) is
provided in the switchboard
neutral bus. This link is generally
located near the point where the
main feeders enter the switch-
board or in the area of the main
disconnect device where one
is provided.
To further comply with NEC and UL
requirements, a separate bonding strap
is connected from the neutral bus to the
switchboard frame. This bonding
connection is located on the line side of
the removable neutral link, maintaining
a service ground to the switchboard
frame when the test link is removed.
See

Figure 21.0-1

.

Figure 21.0-1. Neutral Link

UL labeling will clearly indicate service
equipment listed switchboards.
1 2 3 N
N
1
2
3
To Station
Ground
Neutral
Link
Bonding
Strap
Equipment
Ground Bus
Switchboard Frame
21.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

21

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

General Description

004

Requirements and Labeling

The basic requirement for obtaining a
UL label on a switchboard, is that all
the component devices (breakers,
switches, and so on) in the switchboard
assembly are UL listed. In addition,
the switchboard must comply with
all applicable provisions of UL 891.
Todays modern electrical systems
require that switchboards offer a wide
selection of electrical devices, many
of which do not fall within the scope
of UL listed devices. Therefore, the
conditions under which a switchboard
may be labeled are limited.
Listed below are several important
guidelines for consideration when a
UL label is specied:
1. UL nameplates, where applicable,
are supplied for each vertical
structure rather than one common
nameplate for the complete
switchboard lineup. Where all
of the component devices in the
switchboard are UL listed and all
applicable provisions of UL 891
are met, each of the switchboard
sections may be labeled.
2. Individual vertical structures of
a switchboard may be labeled
where they comply with UL
requirements, although other
vertical structures in the same
switchboard lineup may not
meet the UL standards, and will
not be labeled.
3. All Pow-R-Line C switchboards
are UL labeled when all mounted
devices are UL listed.

Alternate Power
Source Capabilities

Multiple solutions are available to
accommodate alternate power sources
available. Due to the large number of
customer and system requirements,
details are not provided in this guide.
Eaton offers solutions that include
main-main conguration and main-
tie-main congurations. Automatic
transfer equipment, including
UL 1008 listed transfer switches
and other automatic transfer
schemes, are available.

Automatic Transfer Equipment

For continuity of service, automatic
transfer equipment between two
incoming sources may be required.
This equipment transfers the load
upon failure of the normal (or preferred)
source to the standby (or alternate)
source. Upon restoration of the normal
source, the load is automatically
transferred back to it. To accomplish
this, electrically operated main
protective devices (and bus tie devices,
if required) must be employed.
Additional relays also are required
to detect source voltage failure
and to transfer control

power, when
required. A manual selector

switch
is usually provided to select the
mode of operationautomatic or
manual transfer.

Seismic Qualication

Refer to

Tab 1

for information on


21.0-5

September 2011


Sheet

21

i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

General DescriptionOPTIM Trip Units

005

Digitrip OPTIM

Description

Digitrip OPTIM is a programmable
communicating microprocessor-
based low voltage electronic trip unit
system for Eaton molded-case circuit
breakers. Digitrip OPTIM trip units
are available in two models: Digitrip
OPTIM 550 and Digitrip OPTIM 1050.
Digitrip OPTIM trip units are fully
programmable and can be applied as
a stand-alone breaker with a hand-held
Digitrip OPTIMizer programmer for
conguring the trip unit, displaying
information and testing. In addition,
OPTIM can be applied as a low voltage
assembly with a panel mounted Breaker
Interface Module (BIM

II

) to congure,
display and test. Alternatively,
OPTIM can be applied as part of a
fully integrated PowerNet system.
(See

Section 2

.)

Features

Fully programmable. rms sensing
trip unit

Available in K, L, N, R breakers

Available in 80% and 100% rated
breakers

Available in LSI, LSIG or LSIA
congurations

Note:

LSIA has ground fault alarm only.

Available in two models OPTIM 550
and OPTIM 1050

Ten function time-current curve
shaping options, including a new I

4

t
Long Delay Time or slope

Short delay and ground delay Zone
Selective Interlocking (ZSI)

Additional programmable
protection features including
thermal memory and discriminator
functions

Advanced warning systems including

high load alarm, ground fault alarm

Full system diagnostics capability

System monitoring features
including:

Load current

Power and energy

Power factor


Line-to-line voltage

PowerNet communications saves
individual wiring of breakers

Digitrip OPTIMizer

Hand-Held Programmer

The Digitrip OPTIMizer hand-held
programmer accesses, displays and
congures information from OPTIM
trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into
the front of the trip unit and is
powered by a 9V battery, or an
auxiliary power module.
An operator can use the OPTIMizer to:


Select breaker address

(50/60 Hz)
Set system baud rate
Set system password
Congure the system:
Select alarm levels
Breaker information
Metered values
Phase and ground
Trip/no trip
21.0-6
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General DescriptionMetering Devices
006
Power Xpert
Meters 2000
Power Xpert Meters 2000
The Power Xpert 2250 Meter
This meter provides all the core
functions for monitoring power
consumption and power quality,
Ethernet connectivity and onboard
gateway card limits. This unit uses
D/A technology to sample circuits at
400 samples per cycle for extremely
accurate measurement of power factor
and energy consumption. In addition,
the meter has 256 MB for logging
meter data.
This meter adds the ability to monitor
total harmonic distortion and the
ability to set onboard meter limits. The
meter also will illuminate LEDs on the
faceplate, indicating that a limit has
been exceeded and provides 512 MB
for data logging.
This meter adds the ability to monitor
individual harmonics and visualize
waveforms on your desktop using the
embedded Web server and raises the
storage to 768 MB for data logging.
Meter series benets include:
Fully understand your facilitys
power quality
Detailed event information; pinpoint
the root causes of problemsor
prevent them from occurring
Measure, trend and analyze power
via information through onboard
Web and comma separated values
(CSV) exporting capabilities
Up to 768 MB of storage; typically
15 years of storage capability
depending on the meter model
and frequency of events
8000 series is an Internet-enabled
(including a built-in Web server),
power quality and energy meter
with comprehensive power
and energy measurement, and
integrated quality analysis. These
meters allow you to use a standard
Web browser to surf the meter
and visualize a waveform and
analyze trends
Accurate detection of fast transients
Early warning of impending
problems
At-a-glance view of power quality
Reduces power monitoring cost
Supports continuous, non-
disruptive monitoring
Accessible via the Ethernet
Uses industry-standard
communication protocols
IQ 130/140/150
IQ 130/140/150
Providing the rst line of defense
against costly power problems,
Eatons IQ 100 electronic power meters
can perform the work of an entire wall
of legacy metering equipment using
todays technology.
24-bit AD converters that sample at
more than 400 samples per cycle
Meet ANSI C12.20 standards for
accuracy of 0.5 percent
Condently used for primary
revenue metering and submetering
applications
Direct-reading metered values such
as watts, watt demand, watthours,
voltage amperes (VA), VA-hours,
VARs, VARhours and power factor
Also available in Eaton's enclosed
meter product
21.0-7
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General DescriptionMetering Devices
007
IQ 250/260
IQ 250/260
The IQ 250 and IQ 260 electronic
meters provide capabilities you
wouldnt normally expect in an
affordable, ultra-compact meter
such as fast sampling rate and
accurate metering for a full range of
power attributes. Built-in slots allow
for future upgrades.
Comprehensive metering
High-end accuracy
Self-test capability to validate
accuracy
Large, easy-to-read display
Industry-standard communication
protocols
Mix-and-match input/output options
Integration with Eatons Power
Xpert
Architecture
Field-upgradeable
Note: For full technical information,
see Tab 3.
For information on other available
power meters, visit www.eaton.com/
meters.
(BIMII)
The Breaker Interface Module II is a
panel-mounted device that performs
from any combination of Digitrip
RMS 810, 910 and 1150 Digitrip
OPTIM 550 and 1050 trip units,
F/J/K Frame Energy Sentinels,
and Universal Energy Sentinels,
supporting as many as 50 of
these devices up to 10,000 feet
(2540m) away
Communicates the information
from these protective and energy
monitoring devices over your
network
Note: For full technical information,
see Tab 2.
21.0-8
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General DescriptionSurge Protective Devices (SPD)
008
Power Xpert Gateway
Power Xpert Gateway
Eatons Power Xpert Gateway
(PXG) bridges the IT and facilities
management worlds by bringing
disparate panelboards, switchboards
and other power equipment onto
the network. The PXG takes the
complexity out of connecting power
equipment to the network. The Web-
enabled PXG is an out-of-the-box
device that can support up to 96
devices, translate most industrial
communication protocols, and offer
user-selectable events and real-time
trending. It also features e-mail
notication of events, waveform
capture and data/event loggingall
with no special software. Adding basic
meters or the utilitys meter, the PXG
assists in tracking energy usage. The
PXG recognizes the interdependence
of IT systems and power systems,
and delivers what organizations need
to bring these worlds together for
seamless, end-to-end system reliability.
The PXG consolidates data available
breakers, meters, motor controllers
and protective relays, and presents
the information in a variety of ways
(a Web browser being the most widely
used method). The PXG is a stand-
alone solution. As needs change and
grow, the PXG can be integrated
through Power Xpert Software into a
broader solution that encompasses
other intelligent hardware and can
integrate with third-party network
management systems (NMS) or
building management systems (BMS)
for system-wide monitoring and
reporting of power and IT.
For detailed information, please refer
to Tab 2.
Integrated Surge Protective Devices
Integrated Surge
Protective Devices
Eaton integrates our industry-leading
surge protective devices (SPD) in to
switchboards. Lead length is kept
to a minimum to maximize SPD
performance. SPD units are available
with ratings up through 400k, and
are UL listed and labeled to UL 1449
3rd Edition.
All switchboards with integrated
SPD units are connected to a lineside
overcurrent protective device for
disconnecting means. When applied
on the lineside of a service entrance
main, the disconnecting means does
not count as a service disconnect
per National Electrical Code
Article 230.71[A].
For complete SPD product description,
application and ratings, refer to Tab 34.
21.0-9
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General DescriptionPow-R-Line C, Front- or Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders
009
Meets NEMA Standard PB-2 and UL 891.
Front accessiblemain sections
front- and/or side-access
Front- and rear-access; main
sections front- and/or side-access
Feeder devices group-mounted
Sections rear-aligned or front- and
rear-aligned
Main Devices,
Molded-case circuit breakers,
4002500A, xed-mounted
Insulated-case circuit breakers,
Magnum SB, 8005000A, xed
and drawout
Air power circuit breakers,
Magnum DS, 8005000A,
xed or drawout
Air power circuit breakers with
current limiting fuses, Magnum
DSL, 8005000A
Bolted pressure switches,
8005000A, xed
Feeder Devices, Group-Mounted
151200A
Feeder Devices,
8002500A, xed
Insulated-case circuit breakers,
Magnum SB, 8005000A, xed
and drawout
DS and Magnum DS, 8004000A,
xed and drawout
8001600A, xed
Selective Coordination
Selectively coordinated systems
dictated by code and customer
mandates may be achieved with
Eaton switchboards to either 0.1 or
0.01 seconds as mandated by codes
and/or customers. Refer to Tab 1,
Section 1.4 for additional details.
Note: For selection and layout guidelines,
please reference Page 21.1-1.
Pow-R-Line C Switchboard
For a complete product
specication in CSI format,
see Eatons Product
Specication Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16429
21.0-10
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General DescriptionPow-R-Line C, Front-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders
010
Features
Eatons circuit breaker ratings up to
200 kAIC
Trip units that integrate Eatons
System reduces potential arc
ash available
Integral ground fault protection
available in electronic trip units
from 155000A
Electronic trip units that integrate
zone selective interlocking
capabilities available in molded-
case, insulated-case and air power
circuit breaker
Available with circuit breakers and
fusible switches on the same chassis
The Single Chassis Design
Provides Device Flexibility
UL listed and labeled. Meets NEC
and NEMA standards
Eaton microprocessor-based
metering devices are standard when
metering is specied. Conventional
metering is available. IQ and Power
Xpert devices can provide a
communications capability.
See Tab 3
Optional integral surge protective
device (SPD) is available in
Pow-R-Line C switchboards,
when specied. See Tab 34
Aluminum, copper or silver-plated
copper bus
A full range of device modications
is available
Available in NEMA Type 1 and 3R
enclosures, UL listed
Modications
Ground fault protection on mains
and distribution devices
Coordination with other Eaton
divisions for busway and
transformer connections
Type 1 Pow-R-Line C Features
Customer metering.
Utility metering compartment.
Surge protective device.
Main breaker (Magnum SB).
Cable pull and termination space.
Table 21.0-1. Pow-R-Line C Group-Mounted Switchboards
Voltage: 240480600 Vac, 250 Vdc
Mains: 4006000A
5000A bolted pressure switches are not UL listed.
Third-party witness tested at 30 cycles.
Main Device
Type
Amperes Short-Circuit
Symmetrical Rating (kA)
Molded-case circuit breakers
Insulated-case circuit breakers, Magnum SB
Air power circuit breakers, Magnum DS
Air power circuit breakers with CL fuses, DSL
4002500
8005000
8005000
14200
30100
200
Bolted pressure switches
Fusible switches
Main lugs only
8005000
4001200
4006000
200
200
Rating determined by
overcurrent protective
device
Feeder Device
Type
Amperes Short-Circuit
Rating (kA)
Molded-case circuit breakers
Fusible switches
Stackedmain with branch devices
151200
301200
4002500
10200
200
18200
Magnum SB up to two high
Magnum DS up to two high
8002000
8002000
30100
30100
21.0-11
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General DescriptionPow-R-Line i, Rear-Access, Compartmentalized Feeders
011
Pow-R-Line
i Switchboards
Meets NEMA Standard PB-2 and
UL 891.
Front and rear accessible
main and distribution sections
Feeder devices individually
compartmentalized
Sections front and rear aligned
Designed for mounting with code
clearance to a wall
Main Devices,
Molded case circuit breakers,
4002500A, xed or drawout
Insulated case circuit breakers,
Magnum SB, 8004000A
Air power circuit breakers, Magnum
DS, 8004000A, xed or drawout
Air power circuit breakers with
current limiting fuses, Magnum
DSL, 8004000A
8004000A, xed
Feeder Devices
Molded case circuit breakers,
151200A are compartmentalized
Molded case circuit breakers above
1200A are not compartmentalized
Insulated case circuit breakers,
Magnum SB, 8004000A
Magnum DS, 8002000A
8002500A
Trip units that integrate Eatons
System to reduce potential arc ash
Integral ground fault protection
available in electronic trip units
from 155000A
Electronic trip units that integrate
zone selective interlocking
capabilities available in molded-
case, insulated-case and air power
circuit breaker
Note: For selection and layout guidelines,
please reference Page 21.3-1.
Pow-R-Line i Switchboard
For a complete product
specication in CSI format,
see Eatons Product
Specication Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16428
21.0-12
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
012
Pow-R-Line i Construction Features
Distribution SectionFront View
Glass polyester circuit breaker compartment.
Insulated copper load side runbacks.
Full length barrier isolating the cable compartment.
Horizontal cross bus.
Tandem mounted circuit breakers through 400A.
Isolating bus compartment.
Distribution SectionRear View
Available zero sequence ground fault.
Angled neutral connections.
A, B, C phase connections.
Anti-turn lugs.
Movable cable support.
Generous conduit space.

21.0-13
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
013
Pow-R-Line i Switchboards...
Greater Flexibility and
Increased Safety Features
Eatons Pow-R-Line i Switchboards
are engineered in a new
compartmentalized design for
applications where a greater degree
of safety is required. A wide variety
of congurations is possible, including
utility metering, customer metering,
main devices, branch devices,
accessories and enclosures.
Signicant safety features include:
Individual compartments for branch
devicesglass polyester for circuit
breakers and steel for fusible
switches. These compartments
help eliminate possible contact
with the main bus and reduce fault
propagation
Three-section construction with each
section barriered from the other
Device section. Each device is
mounted in its own compartment
Bus bar section. Contains both
horizontal and vertical buses
Rear cable compartment.
Completely isolated from the
bus bars
Insulated copper runback. Power
is taken from the protective device
by the insulated copper runback
through a standard full height
glass polyester barrier to the rear
cable compartment. This design
virtually eliminates the possibility
of accidental contact with the
main buses during installation
or maintenance
A Wide Selection of Main
and Branch Devices
Main devices are available from
4004000A and can include molded
case circuit breakers, Magnum SB
and DS breakers, and fusible switches
or bolted pressure switches. Main
buses are rated up to 4000A.
Ground fault test panels can be mounted in
compartments with the circuit breakers for
convenience and space savings.
Branch circuit breakers range from
1501200A frames. Branch fusible
switches are available from
1001200A frames.
Short-circuit ratings up to 200,000A
are UL listed.
Pow-R-Line i switchboards are UL listed
and meet all applicable requirements
of NEMA and NEC. They are rear-
accessible and front- and rear-aligned.
The Magnum DS breaker includes the
Digitrip RMS trip unit that provides
circuit protection, information and testing
functions, and true rms sensing.
Pow-R-Line i switchboards can help to
provide for future distribution system
requirements by including empty
compartments for branch circuit breakers
and fusible switches. (Circuit breaker
provisions shown.)
Space-Saving Ground Fault
Test Panels
Pow-R-Line i switchboards can
accommodate either integral or
zero sequence types of ground
fault protection. Depending on the
specic application, a test panel can
be mounted in the circuit breaker
compartment, which may eliminate
the need for an auxiliary structure.
Provisions for the Future
Future expansion provisions include
line side connectors, load side
runbacks, terminals, and glass
polyester compartments and covers
(for circuit breakers).
Customer Metering
Eaton microprocessor-based
metering devices are standard
when customer metering is specied.
Conventional metering is available.
IQ and Power Xpert devices can
provide communications capabilities.
See Tab 3.
21.0-14
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Technical Data
014
Table 21.0-2. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. I.T. is

interchangeable trip unit.
Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of

three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
100% rated.
Not available in Pow-R-Line i switchboards.
For use on DC systems only.
Individually, vertically mounted.

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Cont.
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No. of
Poles
Voltage Trip
Type
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes

AC DC AC Ratings Volts DC Ratings Volts
120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 125/250 600
EDB
EDS
100225
100225
2, 3
2, 3
240
240
125
125
N.I.T.

22,000
42,000
10,000
10,000
ED
EDH
EDC
100225
100225
100225
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
240
240
240
125
125
125
N.I.T.

65,000
100,000
200,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
EHD
EHD
HFDDC
15100
15100
15150
1
2, 3
2, 3
277
480
125
250
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.

18,000
14,000
14,000
10,000
42,000
10,000
42,000
35,000
FDB
FDB
15225
15225
2, 3
4
600
600
250
250
N.I.T.
18,000
18,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
10,000
10,000
FD, FDE
FD, FDE
FD, FDE
15225
15225
15225
1
2, 3
4
277
600
600
125
250
250
N.I.T.
65,000
65,000
35,000
35,000
35,000
18,000
18,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
HFD, HFDE
HFD, HFDE
HFD, HFDE
15225
15225
15225
1
2, 3
4
277
600
600
125
250
250
N.I.T.
100,000
100,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
25,000
25,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
FDC, FDCE
FDC, FDCE
15225
15225
2, 3
4
600
600
250
250
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
35,000
35,000
22,000
22,000
JD
HJD
JDC
HJDDC
70250
70250
70250
70250
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
600
250
250
250
600
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
65,000
100,000
200,000
35,000
65,000
100,000
18,000
25,000
35,000
42,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
35,000
DK 250400 2, 3 240 250 N.I.T. 65,000 10,000
KD
CKD
HKD
CHKD
KDC
HKDDC
LHH
NHH
70400
70400
70400
70400
70400
100400
125400
150350
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
3
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
250
600
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
35,000
35,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
65,000
65,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
35,000
50,000
35,000
35,000
42,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
42,000
35,000
LGE
LGH
LGC
LGU
300600
300600
250600
250600
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
65,000
100,000
200,000
200,000
35,000
65,000
100,000
150,000
25,000
35,000
50,000
65,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
50,000
LD
CLD
HLD
CHLD
LDC
CLDC
HLDDC
300600
300600
300600
300600
300600
300600
300600
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
600
600
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
250
250
600
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
200,000
200,000
35,000
35,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
35,000
50,000
50,000
42,000
22,000
22,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
42,000
35,000
MDL
CMDL
HMDL
CHMDL
HMDLDC
400800
400800
400800
400800
300800
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
600
600
600
600
250
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
I.T.
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
50,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
35,000
42,000
22,000
22,000
25,000
25,000
42,000
35,000
ND
CND
HND
600120
6001200
6001200
2, 3
3
2, 3
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
65,000
65,000
100,000
50,000
50,000
65,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
CNDC
NDC
CHND
NBDC
6001200
6001200
6001200
7001200
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
600
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
I.T.
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
65,000
50,000
50,000
35,000
42,000
42,000
50,000
RD 1600
CRD 1600
RD 2000
8001600
8001600
10002000
3
3
3
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
125,000
125,000
125,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
RD 2500
CRD 2000
RDC 1600
10002500
10002000
8001600
3
3
3
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
200,000
125,000
200,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
50,000
50,000
65,000
CRDC 1600
RDC 2000
RDC 2500
8001600
10002000
10002500
3
3
3
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
CRDC 2000
PBDC
10002000
16002000
3
2, 3
600
600
N.I.T.
I.T.
200,000
100,000
65,000
42,000
65,000
65,000
21.0-15
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
015
Table 21.0-3. Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker Interrupting Ratings
Fixed internal instantaneous trip set at approximately 18 x I

n
symmetrical.
Table 21.0-4. Magnum DS Power Breaker Interrupting Ratings
Also ratings without instantaneous trip.

Table 21.0-5. Current Limit-R Current Limiting Circuit BreakersNon-Fused Type
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit.
Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
Not dened in W-C-375b.

Table 21.0-6. TRI-PAC Current Limiting Circuit BreakersFused Type
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Frame
Amperes
Trip Unit Current
Sensor and Rating
Plug Ranges
Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes (000)
Interrupting Ratings
208/240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac
SBS-608
SBS-C08
SBS-612
800
800
1200
200800
200800
2001200
65
100
65
65
100
65
65
85
65
SBS-C12
SBS-616
SBS-C16
1200
1600
1600
2001200
2001600
2001600
100
65
100
100
65
100
85
65
85
SBS-620
SBS-C20
SBS-625
2000
2000
2500
2002000
2002000
2002500
65
100
65
65
100
65
65
85
65
SBS-C25
SBS-630
SBS-C30
2500
3000
3000
2002500
2003000
2003000
100
65
100
100
65
100
85
65
85
SBS-840
SBS-C40
SBS-850
SBS-C50
4000
4000
5000
5000
20004000
20004000
25005000
25005000
65
100
65
100
65
100
65
100
65
85
65
85
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Frame
Amperes
Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes (000)
Interrupting Ratings Short-Time Rating
208/240V 480V 600V 208/240V 480V 600V

MDS-408
MDS-608
MDS-808
800
800
800
42
65
85
42
65
85
42
65
85
42
65
85
42
65
85
42
65
85
MDS-C08
MDS-616
MDS-816
800
1600
1600
100
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
85
65
85
85
65
85
85
65
85
MDS-C16
MDS-620
MDS-820
1600
2000
2000
100
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
85
65
85
85
65
85
85
65
85
MDS-C20
MDS-632
MDS-832
2000
3000
3000
100
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
85
65
85
85
65
85
85
65
85
MDS-C32
MDS-840
MDS-C40
3000
4000
4000
100
130
130
100
85
100
100
85
100
85
85
100
85
85
100
85
85
100
MDS-850
MDS-C50
4000
5000
130
130
85
100
85
100
85
100
85
100
85
100
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Cont.
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No. of
Poles
Voltage Trip
Type
Federal
Spec.
W-C-375b
AC DC AC Ratings Volts DC
120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 125/250

FCL
LCL
15100
125400
2, 3
2, 3
480
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
150,000
200,000
100,000
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Cont.
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No. of
Poles
Voltage Trip
Type
Federal
Spec.
W-C-375b
120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 125/250

FB
LA
15100
70400
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
250
250
N.I.T.
I.T.
16a, 16b, 17a, 26a
16a, 16b, 17a, 26a
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
NB
PB
300800
6001600
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
16b, 17a, 26a
17a, 26a
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
21.0-16
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
016
Table 21.0-7. Electrical Characteristics of Fusible Switches
5000A bolted pressure contact switch is not UL listed.

Table 21.0-8. Standard Switchboard Terminals Standard Main Breaker,
Branch Breaker, Main Switch or Branch Switch Terminals
100% rated breaker.

Note: All terminal sizes are based on wire ampacities corresponding
to those shown in NEC Table 310-16 under the 75C insulation
columns (75C wire). The use of smaller size (in circular mills),
regardless of insulation temperature rating is not permitted
without voiding UL labels on devices and equipment.
Note: For other terminals available on some ratings of molded
case circuit breakers and fusible switches, refer to Tab 27.
Cable Ranges for Standard Secondary
Device Terminals
Wire and cable terminals supplied on switchboard mounted
devices for making up incoming or outgoing cable
connections are of the mechanical screw clamp pressure
type. All standard terminals are suitable for use with either
aluminum or copper cable except as noted in the table.
Panel mounted devices use the standard terminal provided
with that device.
Table 21.0-9. Fusible Switches
Table 21.0-10. Standard Mechanical Incoming Terminal Ranges
for Main Lugs Only and Main Devices Including Circuit Breakers
and Fusible Devices
Table 21.0-11. Range Taking Compression Main Terminals
Compression terminations will take a range of conductors and include

500, 600, 700 and 750 kcmil.
Device
Type
System
Voltage
Ampere
Rating
Interrupting Capacities kA
Symmetrical Amperes
Fusible
switch
240
or
600
30600
3001200
30600
800, 1200
200 kAIC with Class R Fuses
200 kAIC with Class T Fuses
200 kAIC with Class R and J Fuses
200 kAIC with Class L Fuses
Bolted
pressure
switch
240
or
480
800, 1200, 1600
2000, 2500, 3000,
4000, 5000

Type
Breaker
Ampere
Rating
Wire Size
Ranges
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC 100225 # 4#4/0 or
# 6300 kcmil
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE,
HFDE, FDCE
15100
125225
#14#1/0
# 4#4/0 or #6300 kcmil
FCL 15100 #14#1/0
JD, HJD, JDC 70250 # 4350 kcmil
DK 250350
400
(1) 25500 kcmil
(2) 3/0250 kcmil or
(1) 3/0500 kcmil
KD, HKD, KDC, CKD
, CHKD
100225
250350
400
(1) #3350 kcmil
(1) 250500 kcmil
(2) 3/0250 kcmil
(1) 3/0500 kcmil
LGE, LGH, LD, HLD, LDC, CLD
,
CHLD
, CLDC
,
LHH, LGC, LGU
NHH
300500
600
150350
(2) 250350 kcmil
(2) 400500 kcmil
(1) #2600 kcmil
MDL, CMDL
, HMDL, CHMDL 400600

700800
(2) #1500 kcmil
(3) 3/0400 kcmil
(2) 500750 kcmil
ND, HND, NDC, CND
, CHND
,
CNDC
6001000
1200
(3) 3/0400 kcmil
(4) 4/0500 kcmil
LCL 125225
250400
(1) #6350 kcmil
(1) #4250 kcmil and
(1) 3/0600 kcmil
FB-P 15100 #141/0
LA-P 70225
250400
(1) #6350 kcmil
(1) #4250 kcmil and
(1) 3/0600 kcmil
NB-P 350700
800
(2) #1500 kcmil
(3) 3/0400 kcmil
Ampere Rating Wire Size Ranges
30, 60, 100
200
#141/0
#4300 kcmil
400 250750 kcmil or
(2) 3/0250 kcmil
600 (2) #4600 kcmil or
(4) 3/0250 kcmil
800 (3) 250750 kcmil or
(6) 3/0250 kcmil
1200 (4) 250750 kcmil or
(8) 3/0250 kcmil
Ampere Rating Cable Range
400
600
800
(2) #2500 kcmil
(2) #2500 kcmil
(3) #2500 kcmil
1000
1200
1600
(4) #2500 kcmil
(4) #2500 kcmil
(5) #2500 kcmil
2000
2500
3000
(6) #2500 kcmil
(7) #2500 kcmil
(10) #2500 kcmil
Main
Ampere
Number of Conductors and Wire Range Per Phase
Aluminum Conductors Copper Conductors
1200
1600
2000
2500
(4) 500750 kcmil
(5) 500750 kcmil
(6) 500750 kcmil
(7) 500750 kcmil
(3) 500750 kcmil
(4) 500750 kcmil
(4) 500750 kcmil
(6) 500750 kcmil
3000
4000
5000
(8) 500750 kcmil
(11) 500750 kcmil
(13) 500750 kcmil
(7) 500750 kcmil
(9) 500750 kcmil
(11) 500750 kcmil
21.1-1
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Pow-R-Line C
Layout and Dimensions
017
Layout Guide for Pow-R-Line C,
Front-Access, Group-
Mounted Feeders
PRLC SwitchboardFront-Access
Drawings
Drawings and data on the following
pages reect dimensions for worst
case switchboard designs. Smaller
switchboard dimensions may be
available. Both preliminary and as-
built approval drawings are available
from Eaton. These drawings reect
the actual switchboard congured,
and include height, width and
depth dimensions.
Building Information Model
In addition, a building information
model (BIM) 3D compatible drawing
is available for all congured to
order switchboards.
A BIM is a three-dimensional digital
representation of a facilitys physical
and functional characteristics. It serves
as a shared knowledge resource for
information about a facility and forms
a reliable basis for decisions
throughout its life-cycle.
Eaton offers 3D BIM compatible
models to support a variety of
MEP software, including Autodesk
AutoCAD MEP, Revit MEP and
NavisWorks, Bentley Building
Electrical Systems, Graphisoft
ArchiCAD MEP Modeler, Nemetschek
N.A. VectorWorks, and others.
Table 21.1-1. Front-Access Group-Mounted Feeders Pow-R-Line C
Because utility compartment dimensions are the minimum required by utility, check no metering
main device widths and use the larger width of either the main device or utility metering
compartment.
Feeders are individually mounted, not compartmentalized.

Table 21.1-2. Rear-Access Group-Mounted Feeders Pow-R-Line C
compartment.

Table 21.1-3. Rear-Access Compartmentalized Feeders Pow-R-Line i
compartment.

Steps Description Page
Step 1
Layout incoming main section (with or without main device) as follows:

Special Utility Metering Compartment
West Coast Utility Metering Compartment
Standard NEMA
Utility Metering Compartment

Customer Only Metering Compartment
No Metering Compartment
21.1-2
21.1-6
21.1-8
21.1-9
21.1-9
Step 2 Layout Feeder Devices
in Distribution Sections
Pow-R-Line C
Group-Mounted Type
Individually Mounted Type
Outdoor Enclosures
21.1-11
21.1-14
21.4-1
Step 3 Technical data, e.g., interrupting ratings, terminal size. 21.0-14
Step 4 Specication Data For a complete product specication in CSI format, see Eatons
Product Specication Guide, Section 16429.
Step 1

Standard NEMA

21.2-3
21.2-5
21.2-7
21.2-8
21.2-8
Pow-R-Line C
Group-Mounted Type
Outdoor Enclosures
21.2-10
21.1-14
21.4-1
Step 1

Standard NEMA

21.2-3
21.2-5
21.2-7
21.2-8
21.2-8
Pow-R-Line C
Compartmentalized Type
Outdoor Enclosures
21.3-1
21.1-14
21.4-1
21.1-2
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Switchboard Layout Data
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Front-Access
018
Incoming Utility Compartments and/or Main Devices
Figure 21.1-1. Incoming Utility CompartmentDimensions in Inches (mm)
Cold Sequence: 3000 or 4000A main device must be mounted in separate structure. Refer to Page 21.1-9, Layouts 1 and 2 in Figure 21.1-5.
The utility compartment will then be housed in the second structure. Branch devices or customer metering can then be mounted in remaining
half of utility compartment structure.
Clear area assumes no oor channels used under bottom frame.

Table 21.1-4. Dimensions for Figure 21.1-1 LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
For BG&E, the utility compartment is mounted in the bottom for Layout 1 and top for Layout 2. For bottom feed (Layout 1); up to 2500A, the main is
mounted in top. For 3000 and 4000A bottom feed, the main is in a separate structure. For top feed (Layout 2), maximum amperes is 4000A and the
main is mounted in the bottom.
For special applications approved by the utility.
Dimensions are the same as standard NEMA utility compartments, refer to Figure 21.1-4.
Only required for 750 kcmil incoming cables.

Note: W or D of structure is determined by the dimensions of the utility compartment or main devicewhichever is greater.
For main device dimensions, see Figure 21.1-5. N/A = Not Applicable.
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Metering
Sequence
Front-Access
Layout 1 Layout 2 Layout 3 Layout 4 Top-
Mounted
Pull Box
Pull
Section
Width (W) Depth (D) Depth (D) Depth (D) Depth (D) Height (H) Width (W1)
Atlantic City Electric Hot Bottom Top
800
1200
16002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
BGE (Baltimore Gas and Electric)
Hot
800
12002500
30004000
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)/
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
NSTAR (Boston Edison, Cambridge
Electric, Commonwealth Electric)
Cold
8001600
20002500
30004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
N/A
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
N/A
CH Energy Group
(Central Hudson Gas and Electric)
Hot
/Cold

N/A

Central Vermont Public Service Hot

N/A

Cinergy/CG&E
(Cincinnati Gas and Electric)
Hot Bottom Top
800
1000
12002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Exelon/ComEd
(Commonwealth Edison)
Hot Bottom Top
4001000
12002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
12 (304.8)
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
W or W1
Clear
Area
2.50
(63.5)
D
Blank
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
W
D
Blank
Pull
Section
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
W
D
Pull
Section
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Main
W
D
W1
H Pull Box
Pull
Section
Main
2500
Amp
Max.
W
D
W1
H Pull Box
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
Layout 1 Layout 2 Layout 3 Layout 4 (Cold Sequence)
Floor Plan
Layouts 1, 3 and 4
Pull Section Only
Bottom Feed Top Feed Bottom or Top Feed Bottom or Top Feed
21.1-3
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Front-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders
019
Table 21.1-4. Dimensions for Figure 21.1-1 LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)
Dimensions are the same as standard NEMA utility compartments, refer to Page 21.1-8.
For main device dimensions, see Page 21.1-9. N/A = Not Applicable.
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Metering
Sequence
Front-Access
Layout 1 Layout 2 Layout 3 Layout 4 Top-Mounted
Pull Box
Pull
Section
Connecticut Light and Power
(Northeast Utilities)
Hot
/Cold
8001200
16002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
N/A
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
ConEdison
(Consolidated Edison)
Hot Bottom Top
800 (Spec. 298)
12001600 (Spec. 298)
12002000 (Spec. 377)
25004000 (Spec. 377)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
12 (304.8)
Fig. 3
12 (304.8)
Fig. 3
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
26 (48D)
30 (48D)
DTE Energy (Detroit Edison) Hot Bottom Top
800
12002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Florida Power and Light Hot

N/A

Georgia Power Co. Hot

N/A

IPL (Indianapolis Power Co.) Hot/Cold
Bottom Top
800
12002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
12 (304.8)
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
26 (660.4)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Jersey Central Power (First Energy) Hot
/Cold Bottom Top

800
12002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
N/A
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Kansas City Power and Light Hot

N/A

LIPA (Long Island Power Authority) Hot Bottom Top
800
12002000
25004000
38 (965.2)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
LG&E Energy
(Louisville Gas and Electric)
Hot Bottom Top
800
12002000
25003000
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
12 (304.8)
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Madison Gas and Electric Cold Bottom Top
8001200
16002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
12 (304.8)
18 (457.2)
18 (457.2)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Massachusetts Electric
(National Grid)
Hot Bottom Top
800
12002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Metropolitan Edison (First Energy) Hot

N/A

Monongahela Power Hot

N/A

Naperville Hot

N/A

Narragansett (National Grid) Hot Bottom Top
800
12002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
21.1-4
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Front -Access
020
Figure 21.1-2. Incoming Utility Compartment and/or Main DevicesDimensions in Inches (mm)
The utility compartment will then be housed in the second structure. Branch devices or customer metering can then be mounted in remaining half of
utility compartment structure.

For limiter lugs or more than six (6) mechanical lugs per phase, use Layout 3.
For limiter lugs or more than six (6) mechanical lugs per phase, a 12-inch (304.8 mm) pull box is required.
For bottom incoming, front accessible applications only, 45-inch (1143.0 mm) wide pull section required.
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Metering
Sequence
Front-Access
Pull Box
Pull
Section
New York State
Electric and Gas
Cold Bottom Top
8001200
16002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
12 (304.8)
18 (457.2)
18 (457.2)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Niagara Mohawk
(National Grid)
Cold Bottom Top
8001200
16002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
N/A
18 (457.2)
18 (457.2)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Northeast Utilities Hot
/Cold Bottom Top

8001200
16002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
XCEL
(Northern States Power)
Hot
/Cold Bottom Top

8001200
16002000
25003000
4000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Omaha Public Power Hot Bottom Top
12002000
25004000
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Orange and Rockland Hot

N/A

PPL (Pennsylvania Power
and Light)
Hot Bottom Top
8004000 480Y/277 V
8004000 208Y/120 V
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
Layout 1 Layout 2 Layout 3 Layout 4
(Cold Sequence)
W or W1
Clear
Area
D
Blank
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
W
D
Blank
Pull
Section
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
W
D
Pull
Section
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Main
W
D
W1
H Pull Box
Pull
Section
Main
2500A
Max.
W
D
W1
H Pull Box
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
Floor Plan
Layouts 1, 3 and 4
Pull Section Only
21.1-5
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
021
Dimensions are the same as standard NEMA utility compartments, refer

to Page 21.1-8.
Only required for 750 kcmil incoming cables.

Note: W or D of structure is determined by the dimensions of
the utility compartment or main devicewhichever is greater.
Note: The following utilities have standardized on the National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) utility metering
compartment standard. Refer to Page 21.1-8 for specic sizing
and requirements.
American Electric Power, Central Hudson Gas and Electric, Central
Vermont, Consumers Power Company, Delmarva Power and Light,
Georgia Power Company, Kansas City Power and Light, Orange And
Rockland, Philadelphia Electric Company, Allegheny Power, Toledo
Edison, Union Electric, Columbus Southern Power, Pennsylvania
Electric Co. and Southern Maryland Electric Coop.
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Metering
Sequence
Front-Access
Pull Box
Pull
Section
Exelon/PECO
(Philadelphia Electric Company)
Hot

N/A N/A

8002000
25004000
8002500
4000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
PEPCO
(Potomac Electric Power Co.)
Hot Bottom Top
8002000
25004000
8003000
4000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
XCEL Energy of Colorado Hot Bottom Top
8001200
16002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
PSEG
(Public Service Electric and Gas)
Hot Bottom Top
800
12002000
2500
30004000
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
Public Service of New Hampshire Hot/Cold

N/A

First Energy Toledo Edison Cold

N/A

Ameren
(Union Electric)
Hot
8004000

N/A

Dominion
(Virginia Power Company)
Hot Bottom Top
800
1200
16002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
18 (457.2)
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
We Energies
(Wisconsin Electric Power Co.)
Hot Bottom Top
800
1200
16003000
4000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
18 (457.2)
18 (457.2)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Alliant Energy
(Wisconsin Power and Light)
Hot Bottom Top
800
12002000
25003000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
12 (304.8)
18 (457.2)
18 (457.2)
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Wisconsin Public Service Corp. Hot Bottom Top
10004000 45 (1143.0) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
21.1-6
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
022
Main StructuresIncoming West Coast Utility Compartments and/or Main Devices
Figure 21.1-3. West Coast Utility Compartment LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Refer to Eaton.
For main device dimensions, see Page 21.1-9. N/R = Not Required.
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Front-Access
Layout 1 Layout 2 (Top Feed)
Top-Mounted Pull Box
(Bottom Feed)
Pull Section
Width (W) Depth (D) Width (W) Depth (D) Height (H) Width (W1)
West Coast Utilities
E.U.S.E.R.C.
400800
1000
1200
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
N/R
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
1600
2000
2500
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
3000
4000
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
Southern California Edison (S.C.E.)
400
600800
1000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
N/R
N/R
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
1200
1600
2000
38 (965.2)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
2500
3000
4000
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
Los Angeles Department of Water and Power (L.A.D.W.P.)
400
600800
1000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
1200
1600
2000
38 (965.2)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
2500
3000
4000
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
W
Clear
Area
Blank
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
W
D
Pull
Section
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Main
W
D
W1
H Pull Box
W1
Clear
Area
W
D
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
Bottom Feed Bottom or Top Feed
Layout 1 Layout 2
Floor Plan
Layout 1
Floor Plan
Layout 2
21.1-7
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
023
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Front-Access
(Bottom Feed)
Pull Section
Pacic Gas and Electric (P.G. and E.)
400800
1000
1200
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
N/R
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
1600
2000
2500
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
3000
4000
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
San Diego Gas and Electric (S.D.G. and E.)
400800
1000
1200
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
16002000 (Copper)
1600 (Aluminum)
2000 (Aluminum)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
2500
3000
4000
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
54 (1371.6)
21.1-8
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
024
Main StructureIncoming Standard (NEMA) Utility Compartments and/or Main Device
Figure 21.1-4. NEMA Utility Compartment LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Rigid bus extension into Pull Section is required above 2000A.
IQ meter mounted to disconnect door as an alternate location. (When K, L, M, N and R xed-mounted frames and xed-mounted power
circuit breakers are used.)
Table 21.1-7. Main Device Structure Size for Figure 21.1-4 Layouts
Dimensions for estimating purposes only. For metric conversion: inches x 25.4 = mm.
W1
Clear
Area
D
W
Clear
Area
D
Optional GFP
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Main
W
D
Optional GFP
Main
W
D
Optional
Customer
Metering
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
Optional GFP
Pull
Section
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Main
W
D
90.00
(2286.0)
Optional GFP
Main
W
D
W1
Optional
Customer
Metering
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
Pull
Section

2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
90.00
(2286.0)
W1
Bottom Entrance Top Entrance Bottom Entrance Top Entrance
Floor Plan,
Pull Section
Hot Sequence Utility Cold Sequence Utility
Top Plan,
Main Section
Note: Dimensions for Figure 21.1-4.
Note: Refer to Pages 21.1-2 to 21.1-4
for dimensions on special utility CT
compartments.
Main
Device
Max.
Amp.
Rating
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
Pull
Section
Width
(W1)
Fixed-Mounted Devices
Molded-Case Breakers
Available with Optional Integral GFP
KD, HKD, KDC
LGS, LGH,
LGC, LGU
LD, HLD, LDC
MDL, HMDL
ND, HND, NDC
400
600
600
800
1200
36
36
36
36
36
30
30
30
30
30
20
20
20
20
26
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
1600
2000
2500
36
36
36
30
30
30
26
26
26
100% Rated Molded-Case Breakers
CKD, CHKD
CLD, HCLD,
CLDC
400
600
36
36
30
30
20
20
CMDL, CHMDL
CND, CHND,
CNDC
800
1200
36
36
30
30
20
20
CRD, CRDC
CRD, CRDC
1600
2000
36
36
30
30
26
26
TRI-PAC Fuse Type Current Limiting Breakers
LA-P
NB-P
PB-P
400
800
1600
36
36
36
30
30
30
20
20
26
Note: See Pages 21.1-11 to 21.1-13 for layout
of distribution sections. See Pages 21.4-1 and
21.4-2 for outdoor rainproof enclosures. Top-
mounted pull boxes are available with heights
of 12.00, 18.00, 24.00 and 30.00 inches
(304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
Main
Device
Max.
Amp.
Rating
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
Pull
Section
Width
(W1)
100% Rated Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers
Magnum SB 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
26
26
26
30
30
100% Rated Power Circuit Breakers

Magnum DS 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
26
26
26
30
30
Fusible Switches
400
600
800
1200
400
600
800
1200
36
36
36
36
30
30
30
30
20
20
20
26
100% Rated Electric Trip Bolted Pressure Switches
Available with Optional GFP
CBC-800
CBC-1200
CBC-1600
CBC-2000
CBC-2500
CBC-3000
CBC-4000
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
36
36
36
36
45
45
45
30
30
30
30
36
36
36
20
26
26
26
30
30
30
CBC-5000
5000

Not UL listed.
Refer to Eaton.
Main
Device
Max.
Amp.
Rating
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
Pull
Section
Width
(W1)
100% Rated Manual Bolted Pressure Switches
Not Available with Ground Fault Protection
QA-800
QA-1200
QA-1600
QA-2000
QA-2500
QA-3000
QA-4000
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
36
36
36
36
45
45
45
30
30
30
30
36
36
36
20
26
26
26
30
30
30
QA-5000
5000 Refer to Eaton

Drawout-Mounted Devices
Magnum SB 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
26
26
26
30
30

Magnum DS 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
48
48
48
48
54
66
26
26
26
30
30

21.1-9
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Front-Access, Group-Mounted Top Feed
025
Incoming StructureWith Customer Metering and/or Main Device
Figure 21.1-5. Main Structure LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Customer metering with IQ meter requires 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) minimum width.
Not available with bottom fed TRI-PAC breaker.

Clear Area
W
Clear
Area
D
Optional GFP
Main
W
D
Optional
Customer
Metering
4000A
Max.
Optional GFP
2500A
Max.
22X
Dist.
Classis
Main

24.00 (609.6)
Min.
Optional GFP
2500A
Max.
36.00
(914.4)
Min.
Pull
Section
22X
Dist.
Classis
Main

Optional GFP
Main
W
D
Optional
Customer
Metering
90.00
(2286.0)
Optional GFP
Main
W
D
Optional
Customer
Metering
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
12.00
(304.8)
24.00 (609.6)
Min.
36.00
(914.4)
Min.
Top Entrance Top-

Mounted Main with
Distribution Chassis
Bottom Entrance
Mid-Mounted Main
Load Cross Bus
Top Entrance
Bottom-Mounted
Main Load Cross Bus
Bottom Entrance Top-
Mounted Main with
Top or Bottom
Entry Mid-Mounted
Main Cable Exit
Floor or Top Plan Floor Plan
Layouts 3 & 4
Layout 5
(Fixed-Mounted
Devices Only)
Layouts 1 & 2
Ampere
Rating
Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
Width Height
Pull Section
Minimum
Dimensions
400800
12002000
2500
20 (508.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Top Pull Box

Minimum
Dimensions
400800
12002000
2500
12 (304.8)
18 (457.2)
24 (609.6)
of distribution sections. See Pages 21.4-1
and 21.4-2 for outdoor rainproof enclosures.
Note: Top-mounted pull boxes are available
with heights of 12.00, 18.00, 24.00 and 30.00
inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
Main
Device
Max.
Amp.
Rating
Width (W) Depth
(D)
Zero
Seq.
GFP
No GFP
or With
Integral
GFP
KD, HKD, KDC
LGS, LGH,
LGC, LGU
LD, HLD, LDC
MDL, HMDL
ND, HND, NDC
400
600
600
600
800
1200
30
36
36
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
24
20
20
24
24
24
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
1600
2000
2500
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CKD, CHKD
CLD, HCLD,
CLDC
400
600
600
30
30
30
26
26
26
18
18
18
CMDL, CHML
CND, CHND,
CNDC
800
1200
1200
30
30
30
26
26
26
18
18
18
CRD, CRDC
CRD, CRDC
1600
2000
30
30
26
26
30
30
LA-P
NB-P
PB-P
400
800
1600
30
30
30
26
26
26
18
18
24
Note: Dimensions for Layouts 1, 2 and 5
shown above. Dimensions for Layouts 3 and
4use larger allowable dimension of main
(shown above) or distribution mounted
devices (see Pages 21.1-9 to 21.1-14).
Main
Device
Max.
Amp.
Rating
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
Magnum SB 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
Magnum DS 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
36
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
Fusible Switches
400
600
800
1200
400
600
800
1200
30
30
30
30
18
18
18
18
CBC-800
CBC-1200
CBC-1600
CBC-2000
CBC-2500
CBC-3000
CBC-4000
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
36
36
36
36
45
45
45
30
30
30
30
36
36
36
CBC-5000
5000

Bottom feed switch structure depth per

Figure 1 is 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) minimum.
Not UL listed.
Refer to Eaton.
Main
Device
Max.
Amp.
Rating
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
QA-800
QA-1200
QA-1600
QA-2000
QA-2500
QA-3000
QA-4000
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
30
30
30
30
36
45
45
30
30
30
30
30
36
36
QA-5000 5000

Magnum SB 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
Magnum DS 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
36
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
21.1-10
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Front-Access, Individually Mounted
026
Individually Mounted Distribution Devices
Figure 21.1-6. Individually Mounted Distribution Layouts
Clear area assumes no oor channels used under front or rear frame members.
Note: Individually mounted distribution devices are not compartmentalized.
Table 21.1-9. Stacked Individually Mounted Distribution Structure
Sizes for Figure 21.1-6 Layout 1 OnlyDimensions in Inches (mm)
Structure size to be determined by device requiring the largest

structure width and depth.
Magnum DS Power circuit breakers used as feeder devices have been

qualied by Eaton and third-party witness tested for 30-cycle with-
stand. 30-cycle withstand is not recognized by UL 891.
Table 21.1-10. Top Feeder with Group-Mounted Distribution Chassis
Note: Top-mounted pull boxes are available with heights of 12.00,
18.00, 24.00 and 30.00 inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
D
W
Optional GFP
W
(Front)
D
CC
Clear Area
D
W
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
Optional GFP
2500A
Max.
22X
Dist.
Classis
Feeder

24.00 (609.6)
Min.
36.00
(914.4)
Min.
Floor Plan
Layout 2 Layout 1
Note: Switchboards designed using these distribution structures require front access for cable terminations.
Top-Mounted Feeder with
Feeder
Device
Max.
Amp.
Rating
Zero Sequence
GFP
No GFP or with
Integral GFP
Minimum
Cable
Space
CC
Minimum Minimum
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
1600
2000
2500
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
100% Rated Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers Available
Magnum
SB
800
1600
2000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
100% Rated Power Circuit Breaker
Magnum
DS
800
1600
2000
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
CBC-800
CBC-1200
CBC-1600
CBC-2000
CBC-2500
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
54 (1371.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
QA-800
QA-1200
QA-1600
QA-2000
QA-2500
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
Feeder
Device
Maximum
Ampere Rating
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
RD, RDC
Magnum SB
Magnum DS
Manually Operated Bolted
Pressure Contact Switch
2500
2500
2500
2500
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
21.1-11
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
027
Distribution SectionsGroup-Mounted Devices
Figure 21.1-7. Distribution Section LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
For panels rated above 2000A, minimum depth is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm).
Busway connection can be either incoming service or exiting load from a feeder breaker. Increased depth will be required.
Main Lug Distribution Sizing
Most switchboard layouts feed the
distribution section(s) from adjacent
main breaker sections; however, a
single distribution section may have
a set of incoming main lugs only.
Main lugs may be positioned in
two ways.
1. Main lugs on distribution panel
using space requirements in
Table 21.1-11.
2. With a bussed auxiliary structure for
incoming cable per Figure 21.1-8.
Table 21.1-11. Main Lug Only Space
RequirementsDimensions in Inches (mm)
For compression lugs, use #250750 kcmil

lug dimensions.
Dimensions shown are for top entry on 38X

Chassis only. For bottom entry, use 50X
Chassis space requirements.
Figure 21.1-8. Section Plan View
For 30004000A: Incoming cable or
busway enters top or bottom of pull
section, terminating in cross bus
extension. For pull section dimensions,
refer to Page 21.1-8.
90.00
(2286.0)
24.00 (609.6)
36, 45
(914.4, 1143.0)
22X
Device
Space
Optional
Customer
Metering
or
Blank
18.00 (457.2)
38X
Vertical
Panel
Space
for
Devices
Busway
Connection
50X
Vertical
Panel
Space
for
Devices
D
ClearArea
W
(Front)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
90.00
(2286.0)
36, 45
(914.4, 1143.0)
18.00 (457.2)
90.00
(2286.0)
36, 45
(914.4, 1143.0)
Note: See Distribution Layout Guides for structure width and for feeder device X requirements on Pages 21.1-12 and 21.1-13.
Layout 1
Maximum 2000 Amperes
CT Compartment
Combination Section
Layout 2
Busway Connection
Layout 3
Full Distribution Section
Floor Plan
Amperes Lug
Range
(kcmil)
X Space Required
50X
Chassis
38X
Chassis
400 &
600
2#2500
2#250750
10 (254.0)
16 (406.4)
10 (254.0)
10 (254.0)
800 3#2500
3#250750
10 (254.0)
16 (406.4)
10 (254.0)
10 (254.0)
1200 4#2500
4#250750
12 (304.8)
16 (406.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
1600 5#2500
5#250750
12 (304.8)
16 (406.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
2000 6#2500
6#250750
12 (304.8)
16 (406.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
Wall
Cross Bus
PNLBD PNLBD

Incoming
Conduits
W W
18.00
(457.2)
Pull
Section
Top Section View
21.1-12
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
028
Distribution Layout GuideMolded-Case Breakers
Figure 21.1-9. Circuit Breaker X Space RequirementsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Preferred location of SPD is mounted at the top of rst distribution section. See Tab 34 for further information.
100% rated breakers.
For use on direct current (DC) systems only.

Note: For breaker interrupting rating and terminal data, see Tab 26.
3
6
-
i
n
c
h

(
9
1
4
.
4
m
m
)

4
W
i
d
e
S
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e
1X
2X
1P 1P
2P 2P
3P 3P
2P 2P
3P 3P
2 or 3 r P
Filler
Surge P ive evice
2 or 3 r P
2 or P
L
o
a
d
2 or 3 r P 2 or 3 r P
2 or 3 r P 2 or 3 r P
2 or 3 r P
2 or 3 r P
2 or 3 r P 2 or 3 r P
2 or 3 r P
Break m y b use as ain.
4
5
-
i
n
c
h

(
1
1
4
3
.
0

m
m
)
W
i
d
e

S
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e
1X
11X
3X
2X
3X
3X
4X 44
6X
3X
3X
6X
6X
4X 44
6X
Customer
Meter ng
Ear r kage
7X
or
10X
4X 44
Frame
Maximum
Amperes
600
1200
400
225
250
400
400
100
250
800
1200
Breaker to Fusible
Transition, All Widths
400 kA
EHD
FDB, FD, HFD, FD
HFDDC
C, FDE, HFDE, FDCE,
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH,
EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE
JD, HJD, JDC, HJDDC
DK, KD, HKD, LHH
KDC, CKD , CHKD , HKDDC
LD, HLD, LDC,
CLD , CHLD , CLDC
FB-P
JD, HJD, JDC
NHH, LA-P
MDL, HMDL,
CMDL , CHMDL
ND, HND,
NDC
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC
NB-P
CND , CHND , CNDC
Customer Metering
ELKD, ELHKD, ELKDC
100
150
400
800
2 or 3 r P 4X 44 600 LGE, LGH, LGC, LGU
, HLDDC
, HMDLDC
, NBDC ,
1X = 1-3/8 inches
(34.9 mm)
21.1-13
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
029
Distribution Layout GuideFusible Switches
Figure 21.1-10. Fusible Switch X Space RequirementsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Preferred location of SPD is mounted at the top of rst distribution section. See Tab 34 for further information.
Twin 200A switches requires the use of J or T fuses at 480V.

Note: Ground fault applications for 800 and 1200A switches require a shunt trip.
Fusible to Breaker
100A
250V Max.
100A
250V Max.
60A 60A
30A 30A
100 A
200A
Main or Branch
100A 100A
400A
Branch
600A
Branch
400A
Main or Branch
800A
Branch Only
600A
Main or Branch
1200A
Branch Only
200A 200A
1X
4X
4X
4X
5X
6X
5X
9X
11X
6X
9X
11X
11X
15X (16X with Shunt Trip)
(16X with Shunt Trip)

(SPD)
Customer Metering 11X Customer Metering
Surge Protective Device (SPD)
7X up to 200 kA
10X at 250400 kA
7X
or
10X
Fusible switch may be used as horizontally main.
400 and 600A horizontally mounted feeder switches in 36- or 45-inch (914.4 or 1143.0 mm) wide structure.
400 and 600A horizontally mounted main switches only in 45-inch (1143.0 mm) wide structure.
3
6
-
i
n
c
h

(
9
1
4
.
4

m
m
)

w
i
d
e

S
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e
4
5
-
i
n
c
h

(
1
1
4
3
.
0

m
m
)

w
i
d
e

S
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e

1X = 1-3/8 inches
(34.9 mm)
21.1-14
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
030
Individually Mounted Feeder Devices
Figure 21.1-11. Individually Mounted Feeder LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
Verify acceptance with code authorities.
Clearance from walls (on boards that are not rear accessible) should be a minimum of 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) for indoor boards.
For boards used in outdoor or wet locations the clearance should be no less than 6.00 inches (152.4 mm).
Note: Top-mounted pull boxes are available with heights of 12.00, 18.00, 24.00 and 30.00 inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
Table 21.1-12. Dimensions for Figure 21.1-11 LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
Feeder
Device
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
Zero Sequence GFP No GFP or with Integral GFP
Minimum Minimum
Width (W) Depth (D) Width (W) Depth (D)
CBC-800
CBC-1200
CBC-1600
800
1200
1600
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
QA-800
QA-1200
QA-1600
800
1200
1600
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
D
W
Optional GFP
36.00
(914.4)
Rear of Switchboard
Clear
Area
Clear
Area
3.00
(76.2)
19.50
(495.3)
3.00
(76.2)
8.50
(215.9)
12.00
(304.8)
12.00
(304.8)
51.00
(1295.4)
Layout 1
Floor Plan
21.2-1
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders and Pow-R-Line i
031
Incoming Utility Compartments and/or Main Devices
Figure 21.2-1. Utility Compartment LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Refer to Eaton.
For BG&E, the utility compartment is mounted in the bottom for Layout 1 and top for Layout 2. For bottom feed (Layout 1); up to 2500A, the main is
mounted in top. For 3000 and 4000A bottom feed, the main is in a separate structure. For top feed (Layout 2), maximum amperes is 4000A and the
main is mounted in the bottom.
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Metering
Sequence
Rear-Access
Width (W) Depth (D) Depth (D) Depth (D) CC Depth (D) CC
Atlantic City Electric Hot
800
1200
16002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
BGE (Baltimore Gas and Electric)
Hot
800
12002500
30004000
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)/
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)/
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)/
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
NSTAR (Boston Edison, Cambridge

Electric, Commonwealth Electric)
Cold
8001600
20002500
30004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
CH Energy Group
(Central Hudson Gas and Electric)
Hot
/Cold

N/A
Central Vermont Public Service Hot

N/A N/A
Cinergy/CG&E
(Cincinnati Gas and Electric)
Hot
800
1000
12002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Exelon/ComEd
(Commonwealth Edison)
Hot
4001000
12002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A

W
Clear
Area
D
Blank
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
W
D
Blank
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
W
D
Main
W
D
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Main
2500
Amp
Max.
W
D
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
W
CC
Clear Area
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
Cold Sequence)
Floor Plan
Layouts 3 and 4
Floor Plan
Layout 1
Note: Switchboards designed using these main structures require rear access for cable terminations. Refer to NEC Article 110-26 for requirements.
21.2-2
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Rear-Access and Pow-R-Line i Feeders
032
Refer to Eaton.
For main device dimension, see Page 21.2-8. N/A = Not Applicable.
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Metering
Sequence
Rear-Access
Connecticut Light and Power
(Northeast Utilities)
Hot
/Cold
8001200
16002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
N/A
N/A
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
ConEdison
(Consolidated Edison)
Hot
800 (Spec. 298)
12001600 (Spec. 298)
12002000 (Spec. 377)
25004000 (Spec. 377)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
DTE Energy (Detroit Edison) Hot

800
12002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Florida Power and Light Hot

N/A
Georgia Power Co. Hot

N/A
IPL (Indianapolis Power Co.) Hot/Cold
800
12002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
Jersey Central Power (First Energy) Hot
/Cold
800
12002000
25004000
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
Kansas City Power and Light Hot

N/A
LIPA (Long Island Power Authority) Hot
8001000
12002000
25004000
38 (965.2)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
LG&E Energy
(Louisville Gas and Electric)
Hot
800
12002000
25003000
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Madison Gas and Electric Cold

8001200
16002000
25003000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
Massachusetts Electric
(National Grid)
Hot
800
12002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Metropolitan Edison (First Energy) Hot

N/A
Monongahela Power Hot 45 (1143.0) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2) 48 (1219.2)

N/A
Naperville Hot

N/A
Narragansett (National Grid) Hot
800
12002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A

21.2-3
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
033
Incoming Utility Compartments and/or Main Devices (Continued)
Figure 21.2-2. Utility Compartment LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Refer to Eaton.
For limiter lugs or more than six mechanical lugs per phase, a separate pull section is required.
For limiter lugs or more than six mechanical lugs per phase, a 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) pull box is required.
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Metering
Sequence
Rear-Access
New York State Electric and Gas Cold
8001200
16002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
Niagara Mohawk (National Grid) Cold

8001200
16002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
Northeast Utilities Hot
/Cold
8001200
16002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)/
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
XCEL (Northern States Power) Hot

8001200
16002000
25003000
4000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Omaha Public Power Hot

12002000
25004000
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
Orange and Rockland Hot

N/A
PPL (Pennsylvania Power and Light) Hot
8004000
45 (1143.0) 48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
54 (1371.6) 6 (152.4) N/A

Exelon/PECO
(Philadelphia Electric Company)
Hot

N/A
(Cold Sequence)
Blank
W
D
Blank
W
D
Main
W
D
Main
2500
Amp
Max.
W
D
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
W
Clear
Area
D
W
CC
Clear Area
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
Floor Plan
Layout 1
Floor Plan
Layouts 3 and 4
21.2-4
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
034

Note: The following utilities have standardized on the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) utility metering compartment
standard. Refer to Page 21.1-8 for specic sizing and requirements. American Electric Power, Central Hudson Gas and Electric, Central Vermont,
Consumers Power Company, Delmarva Power and Light, Georgia Power Company, Kansas City Power And Light, Orange and Rockland,
Philadelphia Electric Company, Allegheny Power, Toledo Edison, Union Electric, Columbus Southern Power, Pennsylvania Electric Co. and
Southern Maryland Electric Coop.
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Metering
Sequence
Rear-Access
PEPCO
(Potomac Electric Power Company)
Hot
8002000
25004000
8003000
4000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
XCEL Energy of Colorado Hot

800
12002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
PSEG
(Public Service Electric and Gas)
Hot
800
12002000
2500
30004000
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Public Service of New Hampshire Hot/Cold

N/A
First Energy Toledo Edison Cold

N/A
Ameren
(Union Electric)
Hot
8004000

N/A N/A
Dominion
(Virginia Power Company)
Hot
800
1200
16002000
25004000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

We Energies
(Wisconsin Electric Power Co.)
Hot
800
1200
16003000
4000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
6 (152.4)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Alliant Energy
(Wisconsin Power and Light)
Hot
800
12002000
25003000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Wisconsin Public Service Corp. Hot

10004000 45 (1143.0) 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) N/A N/A
21.2-5
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
035
Incoming West Coast Utility CT Compartments and/or Main Devices
Figure 21.2-3. West Coast Utility LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Refer to Eaton.
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Front- and Rear-Access
(Bottom Feed)
Pull Section
E.U.S.E.R.C.
400800
1000
1200
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
N/R
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
1600
2000
2500
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
3000
4000
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
Southern California Edison (S.C.E.)
400
600800
1000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
N/R
N/R
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
1200
1600
2000
38 (965.2)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
2500
3000
4000
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
Los Angeles Department of Water and Power (L.A.D.W.P.)
400
600800
1000
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
1200
1600
2000
38 (965.2)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
2500
3000
4000
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
W
Clear
Area
Blank
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
W
D
Pull
Section
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Main
W
D
W1
H Pull Box
W1
Clear
Area
W
D
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
Bottom Feed Bottom or Top Feed
Layout 1 Layout 2
Floor Plan
Layout 1
Floor Plan
Layout 2
21.2-6
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
036
Power Company
Compartments
Ampere Ratings
Front- and Rear-Access
(Bottom Feed)
Pull Section
Pacic Gas and Electric (P.G. and E.)
400800
1000
1200
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
N/R
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
1600
2000
2500
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
3000
4000
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
51 (1295.4)
San Diego Gas and Electric (S.D.G. and E.)
400800
1000
1200
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
38 (965.2)
24 (609.6)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
1600
2000
2500
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
38 (965.2)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
51 (1295.4)
3000
4000
38 (965.2)
51 (1295.4)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
51 (1295.4)
54 (1371.6)
21.2-7
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
037
Incoming Standard (NEMA) Utility CT Compartment and/or Main Device
Figure 21.2-4. NEMA Utility Compartment LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
IQ meter can be mounted to disconnect door as an alternate location for molded case circuit breakers and xed-mounted power circuit breakers.
Cold Sequence Utility Hot Sequence Utility
Optional GFP
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Main
W
D
Optional GFP
Utility
Compartment
Hot Sequence
Main
W
D
Optional GFP
Main
W
D
Optional GFP
W
D
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
Utility
Compartment
Cold
Sequence
Main
W
(Front)
D
Clear Area
CC
Optional
Customer
Metering
Optional
Customer
Metering
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
90.00
(2286.0)
90.00
(2286.0)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
Top Entrance Bottom Entrance Floor Plan Top Feed Bottom Feed
Note: Refer to Pages 21.1-14 to 21.6-6
for dimensions on special utility CT
compartments.
Main
Device
Max.
Amp.
Rating
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
Min.
Cable
Space
CC
Molded-Case Breakers Available
With Optional Integral GFP
KD, HKD, KDC
LGS, LGH,
LGC, LGU
LD, HLD, LDC
MDL, HMDL
400
600
600
800
36
36
36
36
36
30
36
36
6
20
6
6
ND, HND,
NDC
RD, RDC
1200
1600
2000
36
36
36
36
48
48
6
12
12
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
2500
3000
36
45
48
48
12
12
CKD, CHKD
CLD, HCLD,
CLDC
400
600
600
36
36
36
36
36
36
6
6
6
CMDL, CHMDL
CND, CHND,
CNDC
800
1200
1200
36
36
36
36
36
36
6
6
6
CRD, CRDC
CRD, CRDC
1600
2000
36
36
48
48
12
12
LA-P
NB-P
PB-P
400
800
1600
36
36
36
36
36
36
6
6
12
inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
Main
Device
Max.
Amp.
Rating
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
Min.
Cable
Space
CC
Magnum SB 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
26
26
26
30
30

Magnum DS 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
48
48
48
54/66
54/66
66
12
12
12
12/18
12/18
18
Fusible Switches
400
600
800
1200
400
600
800
1200
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
6
6
6
6
CBC-800
CBC-1200
CBC-1600
CBC-2000
CBC-2500
CBC-3000
CBC-4000
CBC-5000
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
36
48
48
48
6
6
6
6
12
12
12
Refer to Eaton
Refer to Eaton.
Not UL listed.
Main
Device
Max.
Amp.
Rating
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
Min.
Cable
Space
CC
QA-800
QA-1200
QA-1600
QA-2000
QA-2500
QA-3000
QA-4000
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
36
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
36
48
48
48
6
6
6
6
12
12
12
QA-5000
5000 Refer to Eaton

Magnum SB 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
26
26
26
30
30

Magnum DS 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
54
54
54
66
66
66
6
6
6
18
21.2-8
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
038
Main StructureWith Customer Metering and/or Main Device
Figure 21.2-5. Main Section LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Customer metering with IQ Meter requires

30.00-inch (762.0 mm) minimum width.
Not available with bottom fed TRI-PAC

breaker.
Clear area assumes no oor channels used

under front or rear frame members.
Optional G, F, P
Main
W
D
Optional
Customer
Metering
4000A
Max.
Optional GFP
Main
W
D
90.00
(2286.0)
Optional GFP
Main
W
D
D
Clear Area
CC
W
(Front)
48 (1219.2)
Min.
36 (914.4)
Min.
Optional GFP
Main
2500A
Max.
Feeder
Device
2500A Max.

D
22X
Dist.
Classis
Optional GFP
Main
2500A
Max.

2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
36 (914.4)
Min.
Optional
Customer
Metering
Optional
Customer
Metering
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
Top or Bottom
Entrance Top Mounted
Main Bottom
Mounted Feeder
Top Entrance
Bottom Mounted
Main Load
Cross Bus
Bottom Entrance
Bottom Mounted
Main Load
Cross Bus
Top or Bottom
Entrance Top
Mounted Main with
Top or Bottom
Entrance
Mid Mounted
Main Cable Exit
Floor Plan
Layout 1 Layout 2 Layout 3 Layout 4 Layout 5
Main
Device
Max
Amp
Rat-
ing
Min. Width
(W)
Min.
Depth
(D)
Min.
Cable
Space
CC
Zero
Seq.
GFP
Inte-
gral
GFP
or W/
No
GFP
KD, HKD,
KDC
LGS, LGH,
LGC, LGU
400
600
30
36
26 30
30
12
20
LD, HLD,
LDC
LGS, LGH,
LGC, LGU
600
600
30
36
26 30
30
12
20
MDL, HMDL 800 30 26 30 12
ND, HND,
NDC
1200 30 26 30 12
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
1600
2000
2500
30
30
30
26
26
26
48
48
48
18
18
18
CKD, CHKD 400 30 26 30 12
CLD, HCLD,
CLDC
600 30 26 30 12
CMDL,
CHMDL
800 30 26 30 12
CND, CHND,
CNDC
1200 30 26 48 12
CRD, CRDC
CRD, CRDC
1600
2000
30
30
26
26
48
48
18
18
LA-P
NB-P
PB-P
400
800
1600
30
30
30
26
26
26
30
30
36
12
12
18
inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
Main
Device
Max.
Amp.
Rating
Min.
Width
(W)
Min.
Depth
(D)
Min.
Cable
Space
CC
Magnum SB 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
26
26
26
30
30

Magnum DS 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
36
45
45
48
48
48
54
54
66
12
12
12
12
12
Fusible Switches
400
600
800
1200
400
600
800
1200
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
12
12
12
12
CBC-800
CBC-1200
CBC-1600
CBC-2000
CBC-2500
CBC-3000
CBC-4000
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
36
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
36
48
48
48
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
CBC-5000
5000 Refer to Eaton
Refer to Eaton.
Bottom feed switch structure is 48.00 inches

(1219.2 mm) minimum.
Not UL listed.
Main
Device
Max.
Amp.
Rating
Min.
Width
(W)
Min.
Depth
(D)
Min.
Cable
Space
CC
QA-800
QA-1200
QA-1600
QA-2000
QA-2500
QA-3000
QA-4000
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
30
30
30
30
36
45
45
36
36
36
36
48
48
48
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
QA-5000
5000 Refer to Eaton

Magnum SB 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
36
36
36
48
48
48
26
26
26
30
30

Magnum DS 800
1600
2000
3000
4000
5000
36
36
36
45
45
45
54
54
54
66
54
12
12
12
18
12

21.2-9
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
039
Individually Mounted Feeder Devices
Figure 21.2-6. Individually Mounted Feeder LayoutsDimensions in Inches (mm)
When using top-mounted (bottom feed) inverted bolted switches, verify acceptance with code authorities.
For Layout 2, width will be 36.00 or 45.00 inches (914.4 or 1143.0 mm) depending on size of panel mounting devices. Refer to Page 21.2-10.
Table 21.2-5. Stacked Distribution Structure Sizes for Figure 21.2-6
Layouts 1 and 2Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Structure size determined by device requiring largest width and depth.
Magnum DS power circuit breakers used as feeder devices have

been qualied by Eaton and third-party witness tested for 30-cycle
withstand. 30-cycle withstand is not recognized by UL 891.
Table 21.2-6. Stacked Distribution Structure Sizes for Figure 21.2-6
Layout 3 OnlyDimensions in Inches (mm)
Magnum DS power circuit breakers used as feeder devices have

been qualied by Eaton and third-party witness tested for 30-cycle
withstand. 30-cycle withstand is not recognized by UL 891.
Note: See Pages 21.2-10 to 21.2-12 for layout of distribution sections.
See Pages 21.4-1 and 21.4-2 for outdoor rainproof enclosures.
Note: Top-mounted pull boxes are available with heights of
12, 18, 24 and 30 inches (304.8, 457.2, 609.6 and 762.0 mm).
D
36, 45
(914.4, 1143.0)
22X
Panel
Space
Optional GFP
D
W
Optional GFP
D
W
W
(Front)
D
CC
Clear Area
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
Layout 1 Layout 2 Layout 3
Floor Plan
Note: Switchboards designed using these distribution structures require rear access for cable terminations. Refer to NEC Article 110-26 for requirements.
Feeder
Device
Max.
Amp.
Rating
Zero Sequence GFP No GFP or with
Integral GFP
Minimum
Cable
Space
CC
Minimum Minimum
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
RD, RDC
1600
2000
2500
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
54 (1371.6)
26 (660.4)
26 (660.4)
26 (660.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
100% Rated Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers Available
Magnum
SB
800
1600
2000
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
26 (660.4)
26 (660.4)
26 (660.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
Magnum
DS
800
1600
2000
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
26 (660.4)
26 (660.4)
26 (660.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
CBC-800
CBC-1200
CBC-1600
CBC-2000
CBC-2500
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
54 (1371.6)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
45 (1143.0)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
QA-800
QA-1200
QA-1600
QA-2000
QA-2500
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
48 (1219.2)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
12 (304.8)
Feeder
Device
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
No GFP or with
Integral GFP
Minimum
Cable
Space
CC
Minimum
Width
(W)
Depth
(D)
100% Rated Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker
Magnum SB 800 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
Magnum DS
800 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)

QA-800 800 30 (762.0) 48 (1219.2) 12 (304.8)
21.2-10
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
040
Distribution SectionsGroup-Mounted Devices
Figure 21.2-7. Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
Busway connection can be either incoming service to structure or exiting load from a feeder breaker. Increased depth will be required.
For panels rated above 2000A, minimum depth is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm).

Main Lug Distribution Sizing
Main lugs are accessible from the rear
of switchboard and do not require any
panel space. See Figure 21.2-8 below.
Figure 21.2-8. Section Floor Plan
For 30004000A: Incoming cable or
busway enters top or bottom (rear) of
any section.
24.00 (609.6)
22X
Device
Space
Optional
Customer
Metering
or
Blank
38X
Vertical
Panel
Space
for
Devices
Busway
Connection
90.00
(2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
36, 45
(914.4, 1143.0)
50X
Vertical
Panel
Space
for
Devices
D
ClearArea
W
(Front)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
90.00
(2286.0)
90.00
(2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
36, 45
(914.4, 1143.0)
36, 45
(914.4, 1143.0)
See Distribution Layout Guides for structure width and for feeder device X requirements on Pages 21.2-11 and 21.2-12.
Layout 1
Maximum 2000 Amperes
CT Compartment
Combination Section
Layout 2
Busway Connection
Layout 3
Full Distribution Section
Floor Plan
Cross
Bus
PNLBD
Incoming
Conduits
W W
PNLBD
PNLBD
D
W
Top Section
View
21.2-11
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders
041
Distribution Layout GuideMolded-Case Breakers
Figure 21.2-9. Circuit Breaker X Space RequirementDimensions in Inches (mm)
Preferred location of SPD is mounted at top of rst distribution section.
100% rated breakers.
For use on direct current (DC) systems only.

Note: For breaker interrupting ratings and terminal data, see Tab 26.
3
6
-
i
n
c
h

(
9
1
4
.
4
m
m
)

4
W
i
d
e
S
t
r
t
u
r
e
1X
2X
1P 1P
2P 2P
3P 3P
2P 2P
3P 3P
2 or 3 r P
Filler
Surge P ive evice
2 or 3 r P
2 or P
L
o
a
d
2 or 3 r P 2 or 3 r P
2 or 3 r P 2 or 3 r P
2 or 3 r P
2 or 3 r P
2 or 3 r P 2 or 3 r P
2 or 3 r P
Break m y b use as ain.
4
5
-
i
n
c
h

(
1
1
4
3
.
0

m
m
)
W
i
d
e

S
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e
1X
11X
3X
2X
3X
3X
6X
3X
3X
6X
6X
4X 44
6X
Customer
Meter ng
7X
or
10X
4X 44
Frame
Maximum
Amperes
600
1200
400
225
250
400
100
250
800
1200
Breaker to Fusible
7X through 200 kA
400 kA
EHD
FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE,
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH,
EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE
JD, HJD, JDC, HJDDC
DK, KD, HKD, LHH
KDC, CKD , CHKD , HKDDC
LD, HLD, LDC,
CLD , CHLD , CLDC
FB-P
JD, HJD, JDC
LA-P, NHH
MDL, HMDL,
CMDL , CHMDL
ND, HND,
NDC
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC
NB-P
CND , CHND , CNDC
Customer Metering
100
150
400
800
2 or 3 r P 4X 44 600 LGE, LGH, LGC, LGU
, HLDDC
, HMDLDC
, NBDC ,
HFDDC
1X = 1-3/8 inches
(39.4 mm)
21.2-12
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C, Rear-Access, Group-Mounted Feeders
042
Figure 21.2-10. Fusible Switch X Space RequirementDimensions in Inches (mm)
Preferred location of SPD is mounted at top of rst distribution section. See Tab 34 for more information.
Twin 200A switches requires the use of J or T fuses at 480V.

Note: Ground fault applications for 800 and 1200A switches require a shunt trip.
Fusible to Breaker
100A
250V Max.
100A
250V Max.
60A 60A
30A 30A
100 A
200A
Main or Branch
100A 100A
400A
Branch
600A
Branch
400A
Main or Branch
800A
Branch Only
600A
Main or Branch
1200A
Branch Only
200A 200A
1X
4X
4X
4X
5X
6X
5X
9X
11X
6X
9X
11X
11X
15X (16X with Shunt Trip)

(SPD)
Customer Metering 11X Customer Metering
7X up to 200 kA
10X at 250400 kA
7X
or
10X
Fusible switch may be used as horizontally main.
400 and 600A horizontally mounted feeder switches in 36- or 45-inch (914.4 or 1143.0 mm) wide structure.
400 and 600A horizontally mounted main switches only in 45-inch (1143.0 mm) wide structure.
3
6
-
i
n
c
h

(
9
1
4
.
4

m
m
)

w
i
d
e

S
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e
4
5
-
i
n
c
h

(
1
1
4
3
.
0

m
m
)

w
i
d
e

S
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e

1X = 1-3/8 inches
(39.4 mm)
21.3-1
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line i, Rear-Access, Compartmentalized Feeders
043
Distribution Layout GuideCircuit Breakers
Figure 21.3-1. Individually Compartmentalized Feeder Layout 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Section 50X Structure Only (4000A Maximum)
Unused bus space to be located in Zone A when possible.
For breakers with OPTIM trip units, the compartment height is 8X.
A Zone
225A FD Family (T win Only)
250A JD Family
OR
400A KD Family
OR
6001200A LD, MDL, ND
Families
Zone A
25X
16X
9X
50X
Zone B
B Zone Limited
Due to Cross Bus
Zone C
B Zone
6001200A
LD, MDL, ND
Families
C Zone
225A FD Family (T win Only)
250A JD Family
OR
400A KD Family
OR
6001200A LD, MDL, ND
Families
X Space Determines Amount of
Breakers Allowed in Zone
Frame Types can be Mixed within
Zones Specified
2P OR 3P
L
O
A
D
L
I
N
E
4X
FD, HFD, FDC (225A Twin Only)
JD, HJD, JDC (Twin and Single)
2P OR 3P
L
O
A
D
L
I
N
E
5X
KD, HKD, KDC
400A (Twin and Single)
Zero Sequence Ground Fault Compartmentalized
2P OR 3P
L
O
A
D
L
I
N
E
7X
8X
(OPTIM)
LD, HLD, LDC, LCL, LA-P, MDL, HMDL, ND, HND,
NDC, NB-P 6001200A (Single Only)
21.3-2
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line i, Rear-Access, Compartmentalized Feeders
044
Figure 21.3-2. Individually Compartmentalized Feeder Layout 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Section 50X Structure Only (4000A Maximum)
Unused bus space to be located in Zone A when possible.

Zone A 25X
16X
9X
50X
Zone B
B Zone Limited
Due to Cross Bus
Zone C
A Zone
1001200A Fusible Switch
B Zone
C Zone
X Space Determines
Amount of Switches
Allowed in Zone
Switch Types can be Mixed
within Zones Specified
200A
Branch
6X
240V, 600V, 250 Vdc
Fusible Switch
400A
Branch
9X
240V, 600V, 250 Vdc
Fusible Switch
600/800A
Branch
11X
240V, 600V
Fusible Switch
1200A
Branch
15X
240V, 600V
Fusible Switch
100A
Branch
5X
240V, 600V, 250 Vdc
Fusible Switch
21.4-1
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Outdoor Enclosures
045
Non-Walk-in with Flat Roof
Figure 21.4-1 Front-AccessNon-Walk-In with Flat RoofDimensions in Inches (mm)
Standard busway entry/exit location, 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) deep minimum.
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure always required when throat connecting to other equipment. Standard transformer throat connection,
48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) deep structure only.
Table 21.4-1. Switchboard DepthsDimensions in Inches (mm) Table 21.4-2. Transformer Throat LocationDimensions in Inches (mm)
Enclosure Depth
Switchboard Structure
Depth
Front of
PRL C Inner
Structure
44.00
(1117.6)
22.00
(558.8)
20.00
(508.0)
2.13
(54.0)
4.5
(114.3)
1.25
(31.8)
Structure
Width
A
to
Floor
5.00
(127.0)
90.7
(2303.8)
2.15
(54.6)
12.81
(325.4)
17.37
(441.2)
20.00
(508.0)
Transition
Structure Width
Switchboard Indoor
Structure Depth
Non-Walk-in
Enclosure Depth
24 (609.6)not available for transformer connection
48 (1219.2)minimum for transformer connection
37 (939.8)
43 (1092.2)
49 (1244.6)
61 (1549.4)
Transformer Dimension A
02500 kVA
25015000 kVA
55 (1397.0)
61 (1549.4)
21.4-2
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Outdoor Enclosures
046
Non-Walk-in with Sloped Roof
Figure 21.4-2. Front-AccessNon-Walk-In with Sloped RoofDimensions in Inches (mm)
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure always required when throat connecting to other equipment. Standard transformer throat connection,
48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) deep structure minimum.
Table 21.4-3. Switchboard DepthsDimensions in Inches (mm) Table 21.4-4. Transformer Throat LocationDimensions in Inches (mm)
0.13
(3.2)
End Trim
Enclosure Depth
Switchboard Structure
Depth
Front of
PRL C Inner
Structure
44.00
(1117.6)
Structure
Width
A
to
Floor

20.00
(508.0)
5.00
(127.0)
12.81
(325.4)
2.13
(54.0)
4.50
(114.3)
22.00
(558.8)
92.95
(2360.8)
2.25
(57.2)
20.00
(508.0)
Transition
Structure Width
0.13
(3.2)
End Trim
Switchboard Indoor
Structure Depth
Non-Walk-in
Enclosure Depth
48 (1219.2)minimum for transformer connection
54 (1371.6)
66 (1676.4)
37 (939.8)
43 (1092.2)
49 (1244.6)
61 (1549.4)
67 (1701.8)
79 (2006.6)
Transformer Dimension A
02500 kVA
25015000 kVA
55 (1397.0)
61 (1549.4)
21.5-1
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Metal-Enclosed DrawoutMagnum SB
General Description
047
Drawout Magnum SB
Switchboard
Eatons drawout Magnum SB
switchboard has been designed
for the power user that desires the
congurations and features of low
voltage switchgear, but does not
require the full selectivity and robust-
ness that low voltage metal-enclosed
switchgear provides.
The drawout Magnum SB switchboard
is designed and built using many of
the same techniques and parts of the
Magnum DS switchgear platform.
The design has been optimized for
the differences between the UL 891
standard and the more rigorous
UL 1558 standard.
Refer to Tab 20, Section 20.1 Magnum
DS switchgear structure features,
ratings and layout guides. Differences
in these ratings are covered on
the following pages.
Magnum SB is a low voltage insulated-
case circuit breaker family designed
for the performance and economic
requirements of UL 891 switchboards.
Magnum SB insulated-case circuit
breakers have interruption ratings
up to 100 kA at 635 Vac with
continuous current ratings up
to 6000A
breakers have lighter-duty short
time withstand ratings and xed
internal instantaneous trips on most
ratings, which is characteristic of
UL 489 molded-case breakers com-
monly used in UL 891 switchboards.
This provides for greater economy
and excellent coordination and
selectivity for most commercial
applications
Fixed internal instantaneous trips
on all SB insulated-case circuit
breakers rated 3200A and below will
provide an extra safety factor by
reducing the energy let-through to
downstream circuits at the maxi-
mum instantaneous trip point and
facilitate feeder circuit breaker
protection in UL 891 switchboards
with 3-cycle bus bracing
Magnum SBSE current limiting
power circuit breakers have 150 kA
interrupting ratings at 480 Vac with
continuous current ratings up to
5000A. The short-time withstand
rating is 30 kA for standard frame
and 50 kA for double frame breakers
Magnum SB Switchboard
Magnum SB breakers meet or exceed
the applicable ANSI, NEMA, UL and
CSA standards, including:
ANSI C37.13 (low voltage AC
power circuit breakers used in
enclosures)
ANSI C37.16 (preferred ratings,
related requirements and
application recommendations for
low voltage power circuit breakers
and AC power circuit breakers)
ANSI C37.17 (trip devices for AC
and general purpose DC low voltage
power circuit breakers)
ANSI C37.50 (test procedures
for low voltage AC power circuit
breakers used in enclosures)
UL 1066 (standard for low voltage
AC and DC power circuit breakers
used in enclosures)
Drawout Magnum SB switchboards
conform to the following standards:
CSA
UL Standard 891
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)
Built in an ISO
certied facility
Maximum ratings for Magnum SB
switchboards are 600 Vac, 10,000A
continuous cross bus and 200 kA
short-circuit capacity.
21.5-2
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Technical Data
048
Magnum SB Switchboard Class UL 1066 Insulated-Case
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker Family UL Rated for Switchboard Applications
Table 21.5-1. Magnum SB Switchboard Class Insulated Case Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker

equipped with integral Digitrip RMS Trip
Unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic
breakers are equal to the published short-
time withstand rating. These interruption
ratings are based on the standard duty
cycle consisting of an open operation,
a 15-second interval and a close-open
operation, in succession, with delayed
tripping in case of short-delay devices.
The standard duty cycle for short-time rat-
ings consists of maintaining the rated cur-
rent for two periods of 1/2 seconds each,
with a 15-second interval of zero current
between the two periods.
Fixed internal instantaneous trip set at

approximately 18 x I
n
symmetrical will be
phased into the product.
Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for

product rating.
Magnum SBSE Current Limiting Power

Circuit Breaker with fast opening contacts.
Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled

enclosure.
Note: Magnum SB is UL 1066 listed.
Frame
Amperes
Breaker Type
Catalog
Position 16
Frame
Type
rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz

Rating Plugs for Digitrip
RMS Trip Unit (Establishes
Breaker I
n
Rating)
Interrupting
at 254 Vac
Interrupting
at 508 Vac
Interrupting
at 635 Vac
Short-Time
Withstand Rating
Fixed Internal
Instantaneous Trip
800 SBN-508
SBN-608
SBN-C08
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
50
65
100
50
65
100
35
42
65
20
20
20
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800
SBS-608
SBS-C08
SBS-E08
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
100
200
65
100
150
65
85
20
20
30
30
1200 SBN-512
SBN-612
SBN-C12
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
50
65
100
50
65
100
35
42
65
25
25
25
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200
SBS-612
SBS-C12
SBS-E12
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
100
200
65
100
150
65
85
25
25
30
30
1600 SBN-516
SBN-616
SBN-C16
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
50
65
100
50
65
100
35
42
65
30
30
30
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600
SBS-616
SBS-C16
SBS-E16
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
100
200
65
100
150
65
85
30
30
30
30
2000 SBN-620
SBN-C20
Narrow
Narrow
65
100
65
100
65
65
35
35
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
SBS-620
SBS-C20
SBS-E20
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
100
200
65
100
150
65
85
35
35
30
30
2500 SBS-625
SBS-C25
Standard
Standard
65
100
65
100
65
85
45
45
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500
SBS-E25
Double 200 150

50 50
3000 SBS-630
SBS-C30
Standard
Standard
65
100
65
100
65
85
50
50
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3000
SBS-E30
Double 200 150

50 50
4000 SBS-840
SBS-C40
SBS-E40
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
85
100
150
85
100
85
100
50
50
2000, 2500, 3000, 4000
5000 SBS-850
SBS-C50
SBS-E50
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
85
100
150
85
100
85
100
50
50
2500, 3000, 4000, 5000
6000 SBS-C60
Double 100 100 100 100 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000

21.5-3
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Guide
049
Layout GuideDrawout Magnum SB Rear-Access Switchboard
Figure 21.5-2. Main-Tie-Main Typical Layouts
Rear-Connected Switchgear
Breaker Type Ampacity Available Structure WidthsAllowable Breaker PlacementsInches (mm)
<=100 kAIC 150 kAIC 18 (457.2) 22 (558.8) 30 (762.0) 44 (117.6)
Narrow (SBN) 8002000
SBN5-
SBN6-
SBNC-
FeederA, B,
C, D
TieB
MainB, C, D
FeederA, B, C, D
MainB, C, D
TieB, C
FeederA, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H
Standard (SBS) 8002000
SBS6-
SBSC-
8001600
SBSE
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB or C
MainB, C, D
FeederA, B, C, D,
E, F, G, H
SBS6-
SBSC-
2000
SBSE
FeederB, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
Feeder B, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D
Feedercontact Eaton
Double (SBS) 40005000
SBS8-
SBSC-
32004000
SBSE
FeederB/F or C/G or D/H
TieB/F, C/G
MainB/F, C/G, D/H
Double w/ Fans (SBS) 6000
SBSC-
5000
SBSE
FeederBC/FG or CD/GH
TieBC/FG, CD/GH
MainBC/FG, CD/GH
Instrument compartment (SPD, HRG,
metering, controls, panelboard, etc.)
All positions All positions All positions All positions
18 22 30 44
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A A
B B
C C
D D
A
B
C
D
Metering
Main
SBS-630
3000A
SPD
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Tie
SBS-630
3000A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Main
SBS-630
3000A
Metering
SPD
A
B
C
D
22 18 22 22 18
Metering Metering SPD SPD
Feeder
SBS-608
800A
Feeder
SBS-608
800A
Feeder
SBS-608
800A
Feeder
SBS-608
800A
Feeder
SBS-608
800A
Feeder
SBS-608
800A
Feeder
SBS-608
800A
Main
MBS-840
4000A
Main
SBS-840
4000A
Tie
MBS-840
4000A
Feeder
SBS-616
1600A
Feeder
SBS-616
1600A
Feeder
SBS-616
1600A
Feeder
SBS-616
1600A
Feeder
SBS-616
1600A
Feeder
SBS-616
1600A
Feeder
SBS-608
800A
A/E
B/F
C/G
D/H
44 44 44
Using Narrow and Standard Breakers Using Standard and Double Breakers
21.5-4
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Guide
050
Layout GuideDrawout Magnum SB Front-Access Switchboard
Figure 21.5-4. Front-Access Main Sections
Front-Connected Switchgear
Breaker Type Ampacity Available
<=100 kAIC
Structure WidthsInches (mm)
18 + X (457.2 + X) 22 + X (558.8 + X) 44 + X (1117.6 + X)

Narrow (SBN) 8002000
SBN5-
SBN6-
SBNC-
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB
MainB, C, D
FeederA, B, C, D
TieB, C
MainB, C, D

SBS6-
SBSC-
FeederB
TieB
MainB
Double (SBS) 40005000

SBS8-
SBSC-
FeederB/F
TieB/F
MainB/F
Double w/ Fans (SBS) 6000
SBSC-
FeederBC/EF
TieBC/EF
Main BC/EF
Instrument compartment (SPD, HRG,
metering, controls, panelboard, etc.)
All positions All positions All positions
Cable
Compartment
Cable
Compartment
Cable
Compartment
18 "x" "x" "x" 22 44
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A A
B B
C C
D D
Note:
18" Breaker Sections:
Cable Compartment can
ONLY be on the right.
22" and 44" Breaker Sections:
Cable Compartment can
be on the right or left.
Shipping splits are not allowed
between 18" Breaker structure
and its cable compartment.
Shipping splits must be
adjacent to a cable compartment.
22 (558.8) 44 (1117.6)
Cable
Compartment
Top Entry
Main Breaker
Instrument
or SPD
Cable Compartment
Top Entry
Main Breaker 5 kA
Instrument
or SPD
Blank
44 (1117.6)
Cable Compartment
Top Entry
6 kA Main Breaker
Fans
22 (558.8) 44 (1117.6)
Instrument
or SPD
Instrument
or SPD
Main Breaker
Cable
Compartment
Bottom
Entry
Main Breaker 5 kA
Cable Compartment
Bottom Entry
Blank
21.5-5
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Guide
051
Figure 21.5-5. Standard and Narrow BreakersTypical Main-Tie-Main Layout
Magnum SB Rear-Accessible Switchboard with NRX Feeders
Figure 21.5-6. Typical Structure and Breaker Arrangements (Continued)Magnum SB Mains and Ties, and Series NRX Feeder Breakers
Feeder
1200
A
Feeder
1200
E
Blank or
Instrument
A
Feeder
800
A
Feeder
800
E
Feeder
1200
A
Feeder
1200
E
Feeder
1200
B
Feeder
1200
F
Main
800
1600
2000
3000
B
Main
800
1600
2000
3000
B
Feeder
1200
B
Feeder
1200
F
Feeder
1200
C
Feeder
1200
G
Feeder
1200
C
Feeder
1200
G
Feeder
1200
C
Feeder
1200
G
Tie
800
1600
2000
3000
C
Feeder
1200
D
Feeder
1200
H
Feeder
1200
D
Feeder
1200
H
Feeder
1200
D
Feeder
1200
H
Feeder
1200
D
Feeder
1200
H
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 28
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 29
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 30
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 31
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
A
Blank or
Instrument
or SPD
A
Blank or
Instrument
B
Blank or
Instrument
B
Main
800
1600
2000
3000
C
Feeder
1200
C
Feeder
1200
G
Feeder
1200
D
Feeder
1200
H
Feeder
1200
D
Feeder
1200
H
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 32
24.00 (609.6)
Arrangement 33
Cable
Compart-
ment
Main
SBS-630
3000A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Cable
Compart-
ment
Metering
Tie
SBS-630
3000A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Feeder
SBN-608
800A
Cable
Compart-
ment
Main
SBS-630
3000A
Cable
Compart-
ment
22 22 18 18 22 22 22 18
21.5-6
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Guide
052
Layout GuideMagnum SB Front-Accessible Switchboard with NRX Feeders
Figure 21.5-7. Typical Structure and Breaker ArrangementsSeries NRX and Magnum SB Breakers
Figure 21.5-8. Floor Plans and Available Conduit Space in Inches (mm)Front-Access Structures

Cable
Compartment
Arrangement 1 Arrangement 2
24.00
(609.6)
24.
30. 7
44.00 ( 17.6) 77
Cable
Compartment
24.00
(609.6)
0
0 7
44.0 11 7.6) 77
Cable
Compartment
24.00
(609.6)
24.
44.0 17.6) 77
Cable
Compartment
24.00
(609.6)
24.
44.0 7.6) 77
Cable
Compartment
24.00
(609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
44.0 11 7.6) 77
A
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
E
Instr.
A
Instr.
E
B F
Main 800
1600 2000 3000
B F
C G
D
NRX
1200
H
A E
B F
Tie 800
1600 2000 3000
C G
Feeder 800
1600 2000 3000
C G
D H
A E
D H
Instr.
A
Instr.
E
D H
C G
C G
D H
Tie 800
1600 2000 3000
B F
Main 800
1600 2000 3000
B F
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
eeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Feeder
1200
Bus Bus
24.00
(609.6)
48.00
(1219.2)
24.00
(609.6)
20.50
(520.7)
40.20
(1021.1)
20.00
(508.0)
17.50
(444.5)
Breakers
Cable
Conduit
Area
Bus Bus
24.00
(609.6)
54.00
(1371.6)
30.00
(762.0)
26.50
(673.1)
Breakers
Cable
Conduit
Area
Front
Bus Bus
24.00
(609.6)
68.00
(1727.2)
44.00
(1117.6)
40.50
(1028.7)
Breakers
Cable
Conduit
Area
21.5-7
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
053
Table 21.5-4. Magnum SB Breaker WeightsLbs (kg)
Note: Manually or electrically operated. For approximate impact weight, add 50% of
breaker weight.
Breaker Drawout
SBN-800
SBN-1600
SBN-2000
110 (50)
SBS-800
SBS-1600
SBS-2000
145 (66)
SBSE-800
SBSE-1600
SBSE-2000
190 (86)
SBS-2500, SBS-3000 175 (80)
SBS-4000
SBS-5000
SBS-6000
310 (141)
SBSE-3000
SBSE-4000
SBSE-5000
340 (154)
Figure 21.5-9. Group-Mounted Molded-Case
Circuit Breaker Switchboard
When a top-of-gear breaker lifter is used,

height is 99.00 inches (2514.6 mm) total.
Note: Structures using molded-case
breakers for distribution will be UL 891
rated with 30-cycle bus bracing.
9
6
.
0
0

(
2
4
3
8
.
4
)

38.00
(965.2)
50.00
(1270.0)
or
See Section 21.1
Figure 21.1-9
for MCCB Circuit
Breaker Layout
Information.
21.5-8
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
054
Layout
Figure 21.5-10. Floor Plans and Available Conduit Space in Inches (mm)18.00, 22.00, 30.00, 44.00-Inch (457.2, 558.8, 762.0, 1117.6 mm) Wide
Rear-Access Structures
This dimension is reduced by 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) when vertical section is close coupled to a dry-type transformer due to secondary bus connections.
Figure 21.5-11. Front- Access Structures
Power
Conduit
Area
Top
Control
Conduit
Area
Bottom
Control
Conduit
Area
31.18
(792.0)
8.38
(212.9)
A
D
1.50
(38.1)
12.00
(304.8)
CC
16.00
(406.4)
3.00
(76.2)
1.38
(35.1)
3.00
(76.2)
1.03 (26.2)
3.60
(91.4)
Front
FC
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
21.50
(546.1)
3.50 (88.9)
0.65
(16.5)
3.60
(91.4)
3.50
(88.9)
5.38
(136.7)
Contro
Top
l
Conduit
Area

3.60
(91.4)
3.00
(76.2)
6.00
(152.4)
16.00
(406.4)
16.00
(406.4)
16.00
(406.4)
1.50
(38.1)
3.00 (76.2)
6.00 (152.4)
3.00 (76.2)
1.03 (26.2)
3.60
(94.4)
3.50
(88.9)
4.25 (108.0)
0.65
(16.5)
21.50
(546.1)
44.00
(1117.6)
FC
4.63
(117.6)
Bottom
Control
Conduit
Area
Front
Provisions
for 0.50 (12.7)
Hardware
44-Inch
Ref: 4A37896
Power
Conduit
Area 1.50
(38.1)
Top
Control
Conduit
Area
3.00
(76.2)
31.18
(792.0)
3.38
(85.9)
A
D
1.50
(38.1)
12.00
(304.8)
CC
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
1.38
(35.1)
3.00
(76.2)
1.03 (26.2)
3.60
(91.4)
Front FC
W
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
21.50
(546.1)
3.50 (88.9)
0.65
(16.5)
3.60
(91.4)
3.50
(88.9)
5.38
(136.7)
Provision
for 0.50 (12.7)
Hardware
Bottom
Control
Conduit
Area

CC
17.52
(445.0)
40.20
(1021.0)
18.73
(475.7)
W
Control
Conduit
Areas
2.75 (70.0) 0.65
(16.5)
3.50
(88.9)
5.42
(138.0)
21.5-9
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
055
Table 21.5-5. Rear-Access Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 21.5-6. Front-Access Structure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
W D A CC Recommended Number
3.50 Inch (88.9 mm) 4.00 Inch (101.6 mm)
18.00 (457.2) 54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
2
4
6
8
12
14
16
2
4
6
8
10
12
16
22.00 (558.8) 54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24.00 (609.6) 60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
9.08 (230.6)
15.08 (383.0)
21.08 (535.4)
27.08 (687.8)
33.08 (840.2)
39.08 (992.6)
5
9
12
15
18
21
5
8
12
15
18
21
30.00 (762.0) 54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
44.00 (1117.6) 54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
7
14
21
28
35
42
49
7
14
21
28
35
42
49
60.00 (1524.0) 54.00 (1371.6)
60.00 (1524.0)
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
78.00 (1981.2)
84.00 (2133.6)
90.00 (2286.0)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
54.00 (1371.6)
7.30 (185.4)
13.30 (337.8)
19.30 (490.2)
25.30 (642.6)
31.30 (795.0)
37.30 (947.4)
43.30 (1099.8)
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
W CC Recommended Number
3.50 Inch (88.9 mm) 4.00 Inch (101.6 mm)
18.00 (457.2)
22.00 (558.8)
30.00 (762.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
13.89 (352.8)
17.89 454.4)
25.89 (657.6)
39.89 (1013.2)
6
8
11
16
6
8
11
16
21.5-10
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
056
LayoutOutdoor Walk-in Switchboard
Figure 21.5-12. Outdoor Walk-in Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
46.63 (1184.4) = 55.00-inch (1397.0 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box); 52.63 (1336.8) = 61.00-inch (1549.4 mm) throat

Opening
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
25.31
(642.9)
2.50
(63.5)
17.13
(435.1)
4.00
(101.6)
(1039.9)
Opening
Foundation Tie Down
(for Seismic Only)
Lifting Angle
3.06
(77.7)
Opening
3.06
(77.7)
3.06
(77.7)
(684.3)
2.00
22.00
Unit
44.00
(1117.6)
Unit
30.00
(762.0)
Unit
3.93
(99.8)
1.50
(38.1)
48.87
(1241.3)
Bottom
Conduit
Space
3.50 x 3.50
(88.9 x 88.9)
Control Wire
Opening
3.50 x 3.50
(88.9 x 88.9)
45.66
(1159.8)
5.03
(127.8)
B
Structure
Width
16.81
(427.0
18.44
(468.4)
0.95
(24.1)
A
Rear of Base
Roof

0.95
(24.1)

45.35
(1151.9)
50.00
(1270.0)

25.00
(635.0)
25.35
(644.0)
39.35
(999.5)

33.35
(847.1)

44.00
(1117.6)

30.00
(762.0)
38.00
(965.2)
22.00
(558.8)

15.00
(381.0)
19.00
(482.6)

0.95
(24.1)
Bus Duct
Chimney & Cover
B
A
17.35
(440.7)

Structure
Width
22.00
(558.8)
B
11.00
(279.4)
C
25.52
(648.2)

109.03
(2769.4)
to Floor

Rear of
Inner
Structure
C 0.95
(24.1)
C
L
C
L
B
13.35
(339.1)
9.00
(228.6)
18.00
(457.2)
41.38
(1051.1)
22.00
(558.8)
37.50
(952.5)
Switchgear Throat
Transition Box
(Shipped Attached)
45.00
(1143.0)
Unit Widths
30.00
(762.0)
44.00
22.00
(558.8)
15.50
8.00
(203.2)
Transformer
Flange
5.00
(127.0)
42.00
(1066.8)
(Clear
Width)
(784.6)
36.00
(914.4)
Switchgear Throat
O.S. of Outdoor
End Sheet
22.00
Throat
Opening
& TXF
14.00
(355.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
Switchgear
Depth
See
Figure 1
22" Width = 21.4 to Rear Frame (543.6)
A

Outdoor
Roof Sheet
C
L
CC
Transformer
Flange
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
33.45
(849.6) 39.66
(1007.4)
33.45
(849.6)
Front of
Outdoor
Base
Door Swing
Door
Swing
30.21
(767.3)
(Opening
Width)
28.59
(From Base)
119.98
(3047.5)
Overall Depth
117.08
(2973.8)
(Base)
26.00
(660.4)
105.06
(2668.5)
109.03
(2769.4)
18.44
(468.4)
51.23
(1301.2)
Bus Duct Orientation
4.00
(101.6)
111.48
(2831.6)
Overall
Height
2.00
(50.8)
CC
L
CCCC
CC
LL
CCCC
3.89
(98.8)
33.45
(849.6)
(Door
Width)
5.75
(146.1)
5.75
(146.1)
0.61
(15.5)
43.38
(1101.9)
(Aisle Width)
2.30
(without breakers)
Weight
Structure Lbs (kg)
18.00-inch (457.2) wide breaker structure 2500 (1135)
22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide breaker structure 2600 (1180)
22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide auxiliary structure 2300 (1044)
22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide transition structure 2300 (1044)
38.00-inch (965.2 mm) wide utility structure 2700 (1226)
Floor Plan
Side View Top View
Front View
Top View
Section B-B
Section A-A
Figure 1
21.5-11
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
057
LayoutOutdoor Non-Walk-in Switchboard
Figure 21.5-13. Outdoor Non-Walk-in Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: 46.63 (1184.4) = 55.00-inch (1397.0 mm) throat (44.00-inch [1117.6 mm] wide transition box); 52.63 (1336.8) = 61.00-inch (1549.4 mm) throat
B
Structure
Width
16.85
(428.0
18.44
(468.4)
0.95
(24.1)
A
Rear of Base
Roof

0.95
(24.1)

45.35
(1151.9)
50.00
(1270.0)

25.00
(635.0)
25.35
(644.0)
39.35
(999.5)

33.35
(847.1)

44.00
(1117.6)

30.00
(762.0)
38.00
(965.2)
22.00
(558.8)

15.00
(381.0)
19.00
(482.6)

0.95
(24.1)
Bus Duct
Chimney & Cover
B
A
17.35
(440.7)

Structure
Width
22.00
(558.8)
B
11.00
(279.4)
C
25.52
(648.2)

109.03
(2769.4)
to Floor

Rear of
Inner
Structure
C 0.95
(24.1)
C
L
C
L
B
18.00
(457.2)
13.35
(339.1)
9.00
(228.6)
20.00
(508.0)
25.44
(646.2)
2.50
(63.5)
17.13
(435.1)
4.00
(101.6)
40.94
(1039.9)
Opening
Foundation Tie Down
(for Seismic Only)
Lifting Angle
3.06
(77.7)
18.94
Opening
3.06
(77.7)
3.06
(77.7)
(684.3)
20.00
(508.0)
2.00
(50.8)
22.00
Unit
44.00
(1117.6)
Unit
30.00
(762.0)
Unit
3.93
(99.8)
1.50
(38.1)
17.83
(452.9)
Bottom
Conduit
Space
3.50 x 3.50
(88.9 x 88.9)
Control Wire
Opening
20.10
30.23
(767.8)
26.97
(685.0)
36.00
(914.4)
Switchgear Throat
O.S. of Outdoor
End Sheet
(558.8)
Throat
Opening
& TXF
1.60
(355.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
Switchgear
Depth
See
Figure 1
7.51
(190.8)
Work Space
A

Outdoor
Roof Sheet
1.65
C
L
CC
Transformer
Flange
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
Indoor Gear Rear of Base
Outdoor
Base
41.38
(1051.1)
22.00
(558.8)
37.50
(952.5)
Switchgear Throat
Transition Box
(Shipped Attached)
45.00
(1143.0)
Unit Widths
30.00
(762.0)
44.00
22.00
(558.8)
15.50
8.00
(203.2)
Transformer
Flange
28.58
88.02
(2235.7)
Overall Depth
86.04
(2185.4)
(Base)
26.00
(660.4)
105.08
(2669.0)
109.05
(2769.9)
18.44
(468.4)
51.23
(1301.2)
4.00
(101.6)
109.79
(2788.7)
Overall
Height
2.00
(50.8)
CC
L
CCCC
C
L
CC
3.89
(98.8)
(without breakers)
Weight
Structure Lbs (kg)
22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide auxiliary structure 2300 (1044)
22.00-inch (558.8 mm) wide transition structure 2300 (1044)
Floor Plan
Top View
Section B-B
Section A-A
Figure 1
Side View Top View
Front View
21.5-12
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
058
21.6-1
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General Description
059
Switchboards
General Description
Eatons Integrated Facility System
Switchboard product is a simple
concept. This technology integrates
standard panelboards, dry-type
distribution transformers, contactors
and other electrical equipment
into free-standing, front-access
switchboards.
Switchboard Benets
Space savings up to 50% or more
Factory wired and pre-tested
Assembled and ready to install
Signicantly reduces installation
time and materials
Signicantly reduces materials
associated with panel installation
Frees up additional space at no
charge to the owner
Installed cost is typically less than
with traditional products
Sustainability and LEED
compliant
Available Options
Automatic transfer switches
UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supplies)
SPD (surge protective devices)
HVAC control
Lighting control
Power factor correction
Metering
Customer metering
Lighting power reduction products
Standards
Meets NEMA Standard PB-2 and
UL 891
Used with Type 1 Pow-R-Line C
switchboard sections
Select main, branch feeder,
customer and utility metering
from Section 21.1
Factory wired panelboards and
dry-type distribution transformers
meet NEMA Standard PB-2, UL 891
and the National Electrical Code
Switchboard Sections and Selection
From the following pages select the
appropriate section Type
Select from panelboards, blank steel
backpans and dry-type distribution
transformers by cell
Layout IFS sections near standard
distribution sections
Indicate on drawings and one-line
diagrams the connections from
feeder devices to the appropriate cell
Figure 21.6-1. Traditional Electrical RoomPlan View
Figure 21.6-2. IFS Electrical RoomPlan View
Figure 21.6-3. Optimized IFS LayoutFront View
Panel L1 Panel L2
Panel P3 Panel P2 Panel P1 Telephone
Main
Switchboard
Transformer
Telephone
Switchboard Solution
IFS
Switchboard
Utility
Metering
Section
Main RD
Breaker
Customer
Metering,
SPD
Feeder
Breaker
Section
Dry-Type
Dist.
X-Former
P1
P2
P3 L1
L2
21.6-2
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
060
Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section Layout
Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent section(s) to panelboards.
Standard features include lockable trim doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
Figure 21.6-4. Type 1 and 2 Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 21.6-1. IFS Type 1 Allowable Congurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Pow-R-line 3E available. Contact Eaton for details.
42 branch circuits maximum.
Bus density, compression main lugs through 225A, copper main lugs, copper bus, silver-plated copper bus, tin-plated copper bus, ground bar circuit
breaker handle lockoff devices, increased bus rating, nameplates, 200% rated neutral through 225A, permanent circuit numbers, directory frames,
Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs to panel immediately above or below, switch neutral breakers, service entrance
label and surge protective device (SPD).
If panel sizing main is 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) or less, the panel will t in a half section. If it is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), you must use a full section.
If it is 60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton for structure dimensions.
Optional hinged panelboard door available on 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide structures.
Panel
Cell
Panelboard
Type
Reference
Catalog
Section
Maximum
Voltage
Rating AC
Main
Device
Type
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes
Branch
Circuits
Ampere
Range
Allowable
Panelboard
Modications
Width Dimensions (W) Depth Dimensions (D) Section
Height
Standard Optional Standard Optional
IFS Type 1 Section
A
or
B
Pow-R-Line 1a
27 240 MLO 400 15100

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 225 20 (508.0) 26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Pow-R-Line 2a
27 480Y/277 MLO 400 15100

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 225 20 (508.0) 26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Pow-R-Command
28 240
480Y/277
MLO 225 15100

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
W
D
90.00
(2286.0)
Panelboard
Cell A
Panelboard
Cell B
W
D
90.00
(2286.0)
Panelboard
Cell C
D
W
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
12.00
(304.8)
Conduit Area
IFS Type 1 Section IFS Type 2 Section
Floor Plan
Type 1 and 2 Sections
21.6-3
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
061
Table 21.6-1. IFS Type 2 Allowable Congurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)
Pow-R-Line 3E available. Contact Eaton for details.
Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs to panel immediately above or below, switch neutral breakers, service
equipment label and surge protective device (SPD).
If panel sizing with non-interchange main is 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) or less, the panel will t in a half section. If it is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), you
must use a full section. If it is 60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton for cell height.
Panel
Cell
Panelboard
Type
Reference
Catalog
Section
Maximum
Voltage
Rating AC
Main
Device
Type
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes
Branch
Circuits
Ampere
Range
Allowable
Panelboard
Modications
Height
IFS Type 2 Section
C
Pow-R-Line 1a
27 240 Breaker 400 15100

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Pow-R-Line 2a
27 480Y/277 Breaker 400 15100

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Pow-R-Command
28 480Y/277 MLO 400 15100

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 225
Pow-R-Line 3a 27 480Y/277 MLO 600 15225

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 600
MLO 800 15225

30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
21.6-4
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
062
Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard and transformer integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent sections.
Table 21.6-2. IFS Type 3 and 4 Allowable Congurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Pow-R-Line 3E panelboard available. Contact Eaton for details.
Possible uses: HVAC, dimming and contactors. Contact Eaton for details.
Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs to panel immediately above or below, switch neutral breakers, service
equipment label and surge protective device (SPD).
If panel sizing is 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) or less, the panel will t in a half section. If it is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), you must use a full section. If it is
60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton for cell height.
Optional hinged panelboard door available on 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide structures.
Galvanized steel backpan provided for customer specied equipment. Contact Eaton for requirements and details.
Panel
Cell
Panelboard
Type
Reference
Catalog
Section
Maximum
Voltage
Rating AC
Main
Device
Type
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes
Branch
Circuits
Ampere
Range
Allowable
Panelboard
Modications
Height
IFS Type 3 Section
D
or
E
Pow-R-Line 1a
27 240 MLO 400 15100

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 225 20 (508.0) 26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Pow-R-Line 2a
27 480Y/277 MLO 400 15100

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 225 20 (508.0) 26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
Blank Steel
Backpan
None

20 (508.0) 30 (762.0) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
IFS Type 4 Section
F Blank Steel
Backpan
None

20 (508.0) 26 (660.4)
30 (762.0)
18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
W
D
90.00
(2286.0)
Cell D
Cell E
W
D
90.00
(2286.0)
Cell F
D
W
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
12.00
(304.8)
Conduit Area
D
W
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2) 3.00
(76.2)
Conduit Area
Floor Plan
Floor Plan
Type 4 Sections with Blank Steel Backpan Only
21.6-5
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
063
Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard and transformer integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent sections.
Table 21.6-3. IFS Type 5 Allowable Congurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs to panel immediately above or below, switch neutral breakers, hinged
panelboard door on 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide sections, service entrance label and surge protective device (SPD).
Note: Select one Panelboard Type or one Blank Steel Backpan and either one Transformer or one Blank Space per Cell.
Table 21.6-4. IFS Type 5 and 6 General Purpose Dry-Type Distribution TransformersDimensions in Inches (mm)
Copper windings, 115C, 80C, K-Factor, low sound are available options but may change dimensions.
Either one F-Frame or K-Frame circuit breaker can be included in any transformer section to be used as a disconnect.
Contact Eaton for other Temperature Rise Transformers and Specials.

Note: 480:208Y/120 Vac three-phase or 480:120/240 Vac single-phase.
Panel
Cell
Panelboard
Type
Reference
Catalog
Section
Maximum
Voltage
Rating AC
Main
Device
Type
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes
Branch
Circuits
Ampere
Range
Allowable
Panelboard
Modications
Height
IFS Type 5 Section
G
Pow-R-Line 1a
27 240 MLO 400 15100

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 225
Pow-R-Line 2a
27 480Y/277 MLO 400 15100

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 225
Blank Steel
Backpan
None

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Pow-R-
Command
28 240,
480Y/277
MLO 225 15100

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
24 (609.6) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Panel
Cell
Panelboard
Type
Reference
Catalog
Section
Temper-
ature
Rise
Windings kVA
Range
Full Cap Taps Allowable
Modications
Width
Dimensions (W)
Depth
Dimensions (D)
Section
Height
FCAN FCBN Standard Optional Standard Optional
IFS Type 5 Section
H
DT-3
Transformer
TP1, 480:
208Y/
120 Vac
19 150C
Only
Aluminum 1545 42.5% 22.5%

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
75 42.5% 22.5%

30 (762.0) N/A
112.5 42.5% 22.5%

36 (914.4) N/A 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 90 (2286.0)
150 42.5% 22.5%

36 (914.4) N/A 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 90 (2286.0)
Blank Steel
Backpan
None

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
IFS Type 6 Section
I
DT-3
Transformer
TP1, 480:
208Y/
120 Vac
19 150C
Aluminum 225 42.5% 22.5%

36 (914.4) N/A 30 (762.0) N/A 90 (2286.0)
300 42.5% 22.5%

45 (1143.0) N/A 36 (914.4)
W
D
90.00
(2286.0)
Cell I
D
W
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2) 3.00
(76.2)
W
D
90.00
(2286.0)
Cell G
Cell H
IFS Type 5 Section
Floor Plan Type 5 Section
with Blank Space in Cell H
No Bottom Entry Conduit
Space with Transformer
in Cell H or I (Type 5 or 6)
IFS Type 6 Section
21.6-6
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
064
Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent section(s) to Panelboard Cell J.
Distribution Chassis in Cell K may be eld wired or wired from an adjacent section. Standard features include lockable trim
doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
Table 21.6-5. IFS Type 7 and 8 Sections Allowable Congurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs, switch neutral breakers, hinged panelboard door on 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide
sections, service entrance label and surge protective device (SPD).
If panel sizing main is 48.00 inches (1219.2 mm) or less, the panel will t in a half section. If it is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), you must use a full section.
If it is 60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton to see if it will t.
Reference Page 21.1-11 for selection criteria.
Pow-R-Line 3E available. Contact Eaton for details.

Panel
Cell
Panelboard
Type
Reference
Catalog
Section
Maximum
Voltage
Rating AC
Main
Device
Type
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes
Branch
Circuits
Ampere
Range
Allowable
Panelboard
Modications
Height
IFS Types 7 and 8 Sections
J
Pow-R-Line 1a
27 240 MLO 400 15100

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 225
Pow-R-Line 2a
27 480Y/277 MLO 400 15100

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 225
Pow-R-
Command
28 240,
480Y/277
MLO 225 15100

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
K Pow-R-Line C
Switchboard
Chassis
480Y/277 MLO 800 15600

26 (660.4) 36 (914.4)
30 (762.0)
18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 600
MLO or
Breaker
1200 15600

36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
W
D
90.00 90.00
(2286.0) 286.0
Cell J
W
D
90.00 90.00
(2286.0) 286.0
Cell J
22X
Distribution
Chassis
Cell K
22X
Distribution
Chassis
Cell K
D
W
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
12.00
(304.8)
Conduit Area
Floor Plan
21.6-7
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
065
Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent section(s). Standard features include
lockable trim doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
Figure 21.6-8. Type 9 Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 21.6-6. IFS Type 9 Section Panelboard Over Dry-Type Transformer (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs, switch neutral breakers.
Table 21.6-7. IFS Type 9 Section General Purpose Dry-Type Distribution TransformersDimensions in Inches (mm)
Contact Eaton for other Temperature Rise Transformers and Specials.
Copper windings, 115C, 80C, K-Factor, and low sound TP-1 are available options but may change dimensions.
Panel
Cell
Panelboard
Type
Reference
Catalog
Section
Maximum
Voltage
Rating AC
Main
Device
Type
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes
Branch
Circuits
Ampere
Range
Allowable
Panelboard
Modications
Height
IFS Type 9 Section
L
Pow-R-Line 1a
27 240 MLO 225 15100

36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 400 45 (1143.0)
Pow-R-Line 2a
27 480Y/277 MLO 225 15100

36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 400 45 (1143.0)
Pow-R-
Command
27 240,
480Y/277
MLO 225 15100

26 (660.4) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Panel
Cell
Transformer
Type
Reference
Catalog
Section
Temper-
ature
Rise
Windings kVA
Range
Full Cap Taps Allowable
Modications
Height
FCAN FCBN Standard Optional Standard Optional
IFS Type 9 Section
M DT-3
Transformer
TP-1
480: 208Y/
120 Vac
19 150C
Only
Aluminum 1575 42.5% 22.5%

36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
112.5 42.5% 22.5%

36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 90 (2286.0)
Cell
L
D
W
Cell
L
Cell M
IFS Type 9 Section
Floor Plan Type 9 Section
There is no Bottom Entry
Conduit Space with
Transformer in Cell M
21.6-8
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
066
Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent section(s) to Panelboard Cell J.
Distribution Chassis in Cell K may be eld wired or wired from an adjacent section. Standard features include lockable trim
doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
Table 21.6-8. IFS Type 10 and 11 Sections Allowable Congurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Pow-R-Line 3E available. Contact Eaton when applicable.
Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs, switch neutral breakers, hinged trim, service entrance label and surge
protective device (SPD).
60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton to see if it will t.
See Page Page 21.1-11 reference information in Tab 21.

Panel
Cell
Panelboard
Type
Reference
Catalog
Section
Maximum
Voltage
Rating AC
Main
Device
Type
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes
Branch
Circuits
Ampere
Range
Allowable
Panelboard
Modications
Height
IFS Types 10 and 11 Sections
N
Pow-R-Line 1a
27 240 MLO 400 15100

45 (1143.0) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 225 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0)
Pow-R-Line 2a
27 480Y/277 MLO 400 15100

45 (1143.0) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 225 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0)
Pow-R-
Command
28 240,
480Y/277
MLO 225 15100

45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
O Pow-R-Line C
Switchboard
Chassis
480Y/277 MLO 800 15600

36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 600
MLO or
Breaker
1200 15600

36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
W
D
90.00
(2286.0)
W
D
90.00
(2286.0)
22X
Distribution
Chassis
Cell O
22X
Distribution
Chassis
Cell O
D
W
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
12.00
(304.8)
Conduit Area
Cell
N
Cell
N
Cell
N
Cell
N
Floor Plan
21.6-9
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout Dimensions
067
Eatons Pow-R-Line panelboard integrationfactory wired from feeder device in adjacent section(s). Standard features include
lockable trim doors and factory-mounted overcurrent devices.
Figure 21.6-10. Type 12 Integrated Facility System Switchboards Distribution Section LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 21.6-9. IFS Type 12 Section Allowable Congurations (Select One Panelboard Type per Panelboard Cell)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Pow-R-Line 3E available. Reference Section 27. Contact Eaton when applicable.
Panduit type loadside wireway, shunt trip breakers, through-feed lugs, switch neutral breakers, hinged trim, service entrance label and surge
protective device (SPD).
60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), contact Eaton for structure dimensions.
If any single-phase is selected as 400A or PRC, section minimum width is 45.00 inches (1143.0 mm).
Panel
Cell
Panelboard
Type
Reference
Catalog
Section
Maximum
Voltage
Rating AC
Main
Device
Type
Maximum
Main
Rating
Amperes
Branch
Circuits
Ampere
Range
Allowable
Panelboard
Modications
Height
IFS Types 12 Section
P
Pow-R-Line 1a
27 240 MLO 400 15100

45 (1143.0) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 225 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0)
Pow-R-Line 2a
27 480Y/277 MLO 400 15100

45 (1143.0) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Breaker 225 36 (914.4) 45 (1143.0)
Pow-R-
Command
28 240,
480Y/277
MLO 225 15100

45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 18 (457.2) 13 (330.2)
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
36 (914.4)
90 (2286.0)
Cell
P
Cell
P
Cell
P
Cell
P
D
W
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
12.00
(304.8)
Conduit Area
IFS Type 12 Section
Floor Plan
Type 12 Section
21.6-10
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
068
21.7-1
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Generator Quick Connect Switchboard
General Description
069
Switchboard
Switchboard Section
General Description
Eatons Generator Quick Connect
switchboard is an engineered
switchboard assembly designed to
allow easy and quick connection of
a standby generator to your facilitys
service entrance switchboard.
Through inclusion of cam-type
receptacles, standard mechanical
lugs, a dedicated generator service
disconnect and a key interlock transfer
scheme, a facility can quickly be
switched to generator power. By
including the Generator Quick Connect
switchboard, a facility can be on
backup power without waiting on
the utility to disconnect service.
Product Benets
Decrease utility dependency:
In power outages, especially those
that are widespread, the utility
company may take hours before
they are available to disconnect
service from a facility. By use of
the Generator Quick Connect
switchboard, a facility is equipped
with a means that allows switching
between utility feed and a generator
feed, without waiting for the utility
to disconnect service
Decrease chance of spoilage:
For those facilities that house
perishable goods that require
controlled environmental conditions
such as refrigeration, prolonged
power outages can cost hundreds
of thousands of dollars in spoilage.
By use of the Generator Quick
Connect switchboard, a facility
ensures that they can be back on
sustained power before spoilage
occurs, and without the necessity
of calling in expensive specialty
equipment. In addition to direct loss
of product, the result of spoilage can
have a negative affect on a facilitys
insurance, which can result in
additional long-term costs
Decrease chance of lost revenue:
Without a constant supply of
electricity, a facilitys revenue
generation capability grinds to a
halt. By use of the Generator Quick
Connect switchboard, a facilitys
operations can be sustained and
downtime can be reduced
Decrease chance of liability:
Among the risks to a facility during
a power outage is the injury of
patrons due to loss of lighting. By
use of the Generator Quick Connect
switchboard, a facilitys lighting
can be sustained, allowing for the
safety of patrons
Decrease chance of loss
and damage: During a sustained
power outage, a facility may
become susceptible to loss due to
theft, damage and other malicious
acts. By use of the Generator Quick
Connect Switchboard, a facility can
better protect itself from these
losses and damages.
Quick and readily available
connection: In facilities that are not
equipped for a backup generator,
connection can demand eld
modication of existing switchboard
structures, and/or even modication
of the facilitys physical structure.
By use of the Generator Quick
Connect Switchboard, the time
required for these connections
can be greatly reduced.
Construction Specications
Eatons Generator Quick Connect
switchboard is built to UL 891 listed
Pow-R-Line C switchboard standards.
As such, the sizing rules of standard
switchboards apply, and all
modications for Pow-R-Line C
switchboards are available.
For sizing information and available
modications, consult Eaton.
21.7-2
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Generator Quick Connect Switchboard
General Description
070
As the Generator Quick Connect
switchboard is based on the brand
Pow-R-Line C switchboard, it can
be applied in both new and retrot
applications.
Signicant Components
and Assemblies
The Generator Quick Connect
switchboard is based on the
Pow-R-Line C switchboard construction.
However, as part of the larger assembly,
there are several sub-assemblies that
provide greater function and benet
to facilities. These components are
described in the following and are
illustrated in the photos to the right.
Generator disconnect: The
generator service disconnect is a
UL listed circuit breaker with a key
interlock in combination with one
mounted on the main service
disconnect. It can include ground
fault protection, shunt trips, alarms,
single-phase protection and
auxiliary contacts
Cam-type receptacle sub-assembly:
This sub-assembly is designed to
work with the quick connects that
are commonly found on portable
generator cables. This sub-assembly
additionally includes color coding to
industry standards for proper and
easy phase identication, assuming
proper installation
Permanent operation instructions:
Afxed to each Generator Quick
Connect switchboard is a set of
simple instructions for operation.
With these instructions, any
generator technicians can
operate the mechanisms included
in the assembly
Standard mechanical lugs:
In addition to the cam-type
receptacles, a set of standard
mechanical lugs is provided with
the Generator Quick Connect
switchboard to allow an alternate
method of connecting generator
cables
Bus connection sub-assembly:
All connection methods described
previously are connected together
using only factory stamped and bent
bus. Bus connection, as opposed to
cable, provides a more robust and
smaller construction
Table 21.7-1. Generator Quick Connect Dimensions and kW Ratings (Rated up to 480V)
65 kAIC standard bus bracing.
Type 3R enclosures shall be equipped with a 13.00-inch (330.2 mm) front structure extension.
Calculated using the following: kW (max.) = [(V*A*1.73*PF)/1000]*(Breaker Rating) with PF

(power factor) equalling 0.8.
For applications above 3000A, contact Eaton.

Signicant Components an Assemblies (Typical)
Ampere
Rating
Number of
Structures
Dimensions in Inches (mm) kW (Max.) Rating
80% Rated
Generator
Disconnect
Breaker
100% Rated
Generator
Disconnect
Breaker
Depth
Structure
Width
Total
Width
480V 208V 480V 208V
400 1 30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
213 92 266 115
600 1 30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
319 138 399 173
800 1 30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
425 184 531 230
1200 1 30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
638 276 797 345
1600 1 30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
850 368 1063 461
2000 1 30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
1063 461 1329 576
2500 2 30.00
(762.0)
30.00 & 30.00
(762.0 & 762.0)
60.00
(1524.0)
1329 576 1661 720
3000 2 30.00
(762.0)
30.00 & 30.00
(914.4 & 914.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
N/A N/A 1993 864
Cam-Type Receptacle Sub-Assembly
Typical (1200A) Generator
Quick Connect Switchboard
21.8-1
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General Description
071
Construction and
Eatons Roll-Up Generator Termination
Boxes (RUGTB) are designed as an
intermediate termination cabinet
between a temporary, portable, roll-up
generator and the facility being served
by the portable generator. The RUGTB
is designed for permanent installation
and is secured to a concrete pad
with bolts.
The RUGTB includes line terminations
for the temporary connection of the
portable generator and permanent
connections on the load side to the
secondary disconnect in the facility
which is interlocked with the main
overcurrent device in a manner that
ensures that only one, either the
service main or the generator main,
can be energized at any one time.
The conductors and conduits must
be sized and suitable for carrying the
load ratings marked on the equipment
per the National Electrical Code.
Standards and Ratings
UL 1773termination boxes
600 Vac maximum
Ampere ratings: 800, 1200, 1600,
2000 and 2500
Assembly short-circuit rating:
35,000A rms symmetrical
Marked Suitable for use on the line
side of service equipment per UL 1773
Standard Features
Type 3R enclosure standard
Line and load side mechanical alloy
set screw lugs
Hinged bottom trap door for line
conductors
36.00-inch (914.4 mm) width
[45.00 inches (1143.0 mm) wide
with 2 hole compression lugs]
Optional Features
Compression lugs (line and load)
1 hole Anderson
2 hole Burndy (requires
45.00-inch (1143.0 mm)
wide enclosure)
Compression lug provisions line
and load [0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolt,
1.75-inch (44.5 mm) spacing]
Optional 45.00-inch (1143.0 mm)
width
Enclosure
The enclosure is free-standing with
feet on the bottom providing access to
the cable connections for temporary
roll-up generator terminations. The
enclosure is made from code gauge
steel and suitable for either outdoor or
indoor installation (Type 3R construc-
tion). The enclosure is powder coat
painted ANSI 61 grey. Each enclosure
houses line and load phase and neutral
connections. Access is provided at the
bottom of the enclosure for both the
temporary connections to the roll-up
generator and permanent connections
to the facilitys generator overcurrent
disconnecting means. The permanent
connection section at the bottom of
the enclosure contains a xed mount-
ing plate. The temporary generator
connection to the RUGTB contains a
cover that allows the enclosure to be
sealed once the temporary connections
have been removed.
The enclosure uses feet that raise
the termination compartment off the
nished grade by 18 inches. Enclosure
feet have provisions for anchoring.
Anchor bolts used to secure the RUGTB
shall be encased in a concrete pad by
the installer in a manner that is suitable
as a permanent base for the RUGTB.
A template for anchor bolt installation
is available from the manufacturer.
The enclosure contains a sturdy,
lockable, hinged door for access to the
termination compartment by qualied
personnel as described in NFPA 70E
and the National Electrical Code.
Feeder conductor entry is provided in
the bottom of the enclosure for the line
side (generator). Removable bottom
plate for connections to the line side
(connection from the generator) is
available on either the right or left side
and must be specied on order. The
permanent load connections (feeding
generator disconnect inside the facility)
may exit the enclosure either from the
bottom or the back of the enclosure.
RUGTB Free-Standing Enclosure
21.8-2
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General Description
072
Technical Data
Figure 21.8-1. Bottom View Left Line (Generator) Connection
Figure 21.8-2. Front Bus Arrangement
Table 21.8-1. Roll-Up Generator Termination Box Available Lugs
Provisions only. Compression/crimp lugs supplied by installer.

Note: Wire bending space provided based on the Roll-up
Generator Termination Box size and number of conductors and
meets requirements of UL and the National Electrical Code.
Terminations
All Roll-up Generator Termination Boxes contain a
termination/lug landing for three phases and neutral suitable
for copper or aluminum conductors. Mechanical box lugs
are supplied standard. The number and size of mechanical
box lug connectors are determined by the ampacity of
the RUGTB ordered. Optional lug offering includes a
compression lug pad (compression lugs supplied by others).
Ampere
Rating
Available Line and Load Connections
Select One Line and One Load by Ampacity
Al/Cu Mechanical Lugs
800 (3) 4/0500 kcmil or
(2) 3/0750 kcmil
1200 (4) 4/0500 kcmil or
(3) 3/0750 kcmil
1600 (5) 4/0500 kcmil or
(4) 3/0750 kcmil
2000 (6) 4/0500 kcmil or
(5) 3/0750 kcmil
2500 (8) 4/0500 kcmil or
(7) 3/0750 kcmil
2 Hole Cu Only Compression Lugs Brundy OnlyFactory Installed
800 (3) 350 kcmil or
(3) 400 kcmil
1200 (4) 500 kcmil or
(4) 600 kcmil or
(3) 750 kcmil
1600 (6) 500 kcmil or
(5) 600 kcmil or
(5) 750 kcmil
2000 (7) 500 kcmil or
(6) 600 kcmil or
(6) 750 kcmil
2500 (9) 500 kcmil or
(8) 600 kcmil or
(7) 750 kcmil
1 Hole Compression Provisions Only (Lugs Supplied by Others)
800 3provisions / phase
2 Hole Compression Provisions Only (Lugs Supplied by Others)
21.9-1
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Multipoint Tenant Submetering
PRC7000/7500 Tenant Submetering
073
PRC7000/7500Tenant
Submetering
PRC7000 Tenant Submetering
General Description
Allocation of energy consumption in a
residential or commercial application
is a tremendous task for a property
owner, management rm or electrical
energy manager. To assist in allocation
or direct billing of consumed energy,
use Eatons PRC7000 or PRC7500 low
cost solutions. The PRC7000/PRC7500
provides a cost-effective energy
tabulation system for residential or
commercial metering installations.
These installations can include:
High rise buildings
Universities and campuses
Ofce buildings
Apartment and condominium
complexes
Shopping malls
Airports
System commissioning is required
and priced separately
When the need for accurate
information of consumed energy for
monthly invoicing statements, use
Eatons Tenant Billing solution. Using
Tenant Billing for Utility Allocation
maximizes revenue by effectively
measuring, allocating and recovering
utility expenditures. The Tenant Billing
solution can interface with a third-
party utility allocation service. The
Tenant Billing solution offers to:
Purchase energy at bulk rates while
charging consumer rates
Capitalize on naturally variable
tenant loads by purchasing energy
at lower coinciding load
Capture and allocate common area
maintenance cost
Promote tenant retention with
accurate and defensible billing
Eliminate subsidization of other
tenants
Product Benets
Factory-wired system
Saves oor space
Lower installed cost
Network compatible
Tenant billing
Create revenueallows purchases
of bulk rate energy and charge
consumer rates to tenants
UL listed
PRC7000Tenant Submetering
PRC7000Tenant Submetering Using the Power-R-Line C Switchboard 50X Chassis
with Eatons Multipoint Energy Submeter II Meter and Current Sensors
Local display and network capable
devices are available as optional
components.
See Tab 3, Section 3.1 Metering for
more information.
Factory Assembled and Wired Meters
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter (IQMES II)
PRC7000CTs are
Factory-Mounted and
Wired to Meter (Cable
Shown is Customer
Installed)
21.9-2
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
074
PRC7500Tenant Submetering Using the Power-R-Line C Switchboard 50X Chassis
with Quadlogics MiniCloset-5 Meter and Current Transformers
Figure 21.9-1. Typical System Layout for PRC7500 with Multiple Tenant Location
Factory Assembled and Wired Meters
Quadlogic Meter
PRC7500CTs are Factory-Mounted
and Wired to Meter (Cable Shown is
Customer Installed)
Meter Meter
QLC QLC
Meter Meter
QLC QLC
Meter Meter
QLC QLC
Meter
QLC
Utility Transformer
Switch 3 Switch 2 Switch 1
QLC
Disconnect
Device
Scan Transponder
M
Utility
Master
Meter
Utility Service
Utility Transformer
Note:
1) There should be no more than one transformer between the
Scan Transponder and the Quadlogic Meter.
2) Voltage connection wires to the Scan Transponder should
be at least 12 AWG.
3) Voltage connection run between the Scan Transponder and
the voltage tap should be under 20 feet (6.1m).
4) If the disconnect switch is fused, use only FAST ACTING FUSES.
The MiniCloset-5 has a display
incorporated into the meter. A shorting
terminal block is provided to connect
between the MiniCloset-5 and the
Current Transformers. An optional
component for collecting data from
the MiniCloset-5 meters is the Scan
Transponder-5 (mounted separately)
(13.50 H x 8.50 W x 4.50 D in inches)
(342.9 H x 215.9 W x 114.3 D in mm).
21.9-3
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
PRC7000/7500 Tenant Submetering
075
Layout Guide
Figure 21.9-2. PRC7000/7500 Layout Guide for Current Sensor and Current Transformer SizingStandard Pow-R-Line C Switchboard
Construction Applies
Note: For all other breaker frames and
amperages, consult factory for X
space sizing.
Note: Consult Section 21.1 for Pow-R-Line C
structure conguration.
Table 21.9-1. PRC7000 and PRC7500 Breaker Frames
PRC7000
4X 2P
5X 3P
6X 2P
8X 3P
6X 2P
8X 3P
6X 2P
8X 3P
5X
4X
3X
2X
15X
PRC7500
6X 2P
8X 3P
6X 2P
8X 3P
6X 2P
8X 3P
5X
4X
3X
2X
15X
3X
Bucket for Meter(s)
Maximum (3) MESII Meters
EHD (100A Max.)
FDB (150A Max.)
FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE
(225A Frame)
ED, EDH, EDC,
EDB, EDS (225A Frame)
Trip Range (150200A)
JD, HJD, JDC (250A Frame)
DK, KDB, KD (400A Frame)
HKD, KDC (400A)
Bucket for Meter(s)
Maximum (2) MC-5 Meters
EHD (100A Max.)
FDB (150A Max.)
(225A Frame)
ED, EDH, EDC,
EDB, EDS (225A Frame)
DK, KDB, KD (400A Frame)
HKD, KDC (400A) L
i
n
e
L
i
n
e
L
i
n
e
L
o
a
d
L
o
a
d
L
o
a
d
L
u
g
s
2- or 3-Pole
2- & 3-Pole 2- & 3-Pole
2- or 3-Pole
2- or 3-Pole
3-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
2-Pole
PRC7000
Multipoint Energy Submeter II
or
PRC7500
Mimi-Closet 5
Reference Table 21.1-7 for
Main Lugs Only and
Table 21.1-11 for Main Breakers
Breaker
Type
Amperes Poles PRC7000 PRC7500
X Space X Space
EHD
EHD
100
100
2
3
2X
3X
2X
3X
FDB, FD, HFD, FDC
FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE, FDCE
150
150
2
3
2X
3X
4X
5X
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE,
FDCE
225
225
2
3
4X
5X
4X
5X
DK, KD, HKD, KDC
DK, KD, HKD, KDC
400
400
2
3
6X
8X
6X
8X
21.9-4
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
076
21.10-1
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General DescriptionPow-R-Line C Types WWCMS (EUSERC Only) and WCMS
077
Construction and Application
Considerations
Eatons Pow-R-Line C commercial
metering switchboards incorporate
design concepts to t the needs for
reliable multiple circuit distribution
and metering in commercial
applications while retaining
maximum standardization, safety
and convenience.
Type WWCMS metering switchboards
provide incoming service and tenant
metering arrangements that comply
with EUSERC utility requirements.
Type WCMS metering switchboards
meet the standard requirements
for service and tenant metering
arrangements for all utility locations
other than EUSERC service areas.
Type WCMS may be either hot or
cold sequenced.
Enclosure
The commercial metering
switchboards are made up of
one or more sections bolted together
to form a 90.00-inch (2286.0 mm)
high, freestanding, front-access
grounded enclosure. Each section
uses conventional distribution
switchboard construction consisting
of formed vertical posts and angle
cross members for a rigid self-
supporting framework to support the
bussing, devices and covers. Code
gauge steel covers for the rear, side
and front are formed and sectionalized
for easy removal and handling. Covers
on all unmetered compartments are
provided with sealing screws or studs.
All exterior surfaces are nished inside
and out with a durable powder coat
ANSI 61 light gray nish over a rust
resistant primer.
The switchboards are available
in NEMA Type 1 construction for
indoor use or NEMA Type 3R for
outdoor applications.
Bus Bar System
The standard main bus in the service
section and the horizontal cross bus
is tin-plated aluminum with ratings
from 4004000A. Both copper and
silver-plated copper bus are available
as options.
Main bus and sub-main buses meet UL
and NEMA standards for temperature
rise on all metering switchboards.
Special bus densities can be provided
to meet specic needs.
Utility Approved Termination Compartment
Service and cross buses are supported
by high-strength glass-reinforced
polyester insulating supports. Splice
connections between sections are
easily made with bus tie links.
Ground bus is provided as standard on
all switchboards.
Standard bus and connectors on all
switchboards are rated for use on
systems capable of producing up to
65,000A rms symmetrical short-circuit
current at the incoming terminals.
Increased bus short-circuit ratings
equal to that of the connected
switchboard devices, up to 200,000A
rms symmetrical, are available in all
Pow-R-Line C switchboards. UL labeled
switchboard sections are marked with
their applicable short-circuit rating,
taking into account the short-circuit
capability of the power source to which
they are to be connected.
Transitions
Transition structures are required for
special switchboard congurations
such as L or U shaped lineups. In
some applications, an extra structure
complete with connections is required;
in others, where switchboard depth
and space permit, only the connection
conductors are required. (Refer to
factory for these applications.)
Auxiliary Structures
These are normally mounted adjacent
to service structures or distribution
structures and used where incoming
service or feeder conductors require
additional space or facilities not
included in the standard switchboard,
such as the following two applications.
1. Mounted adjacent to a top-
connected service structure and
used as a cable pull structure
where service conductors are
brought underground. Auxiliary
structures are the same depth and
height as the service structure and
are wide enough to accommodate
the incoming cables.
2. Mounted adjacent to a service
structure and used as a bus transi-
tion compartment for running riser
bus from the line side of the service
structure up to a top incoming
busway connection. Auxiliary
structures are the same depth
and height as service structures.
Busway connections to
switchboard sections include
cutout and drilling in the top of the
switchboard with riser connections
from the switchboard device or
bus, up to the point where the
busway enters the switchboard.
In addition to the above applications,
auxiliary structures may be mounted
adjacent to a distribution structure and
used to route feeder cables out the top
of the lineup.
21.10-2
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
078
Switchboards Used as Service Equipment
Service equipment is the electrical
equipment that constitutes the main
control and means of power cutoff
for the electric service (normally
power company supply) brought
into the building.
Where switchboards are to be used
as service equipment, certain NEC
and UL requirements apply that
necessitate modications not normally
supplied in switchboards.
Following is a summary of the
requirements that are pertinent to
the ordering of a switchboard for
service equipment:
A. A switchboard with main lugs
only (no main disconnect) must be
designed so that all circuits in the
switchboard can be disconnected
from the supply source by the
operation of no more than six oper-
ating handles (breaker or switch).
Switchboard equipped with main
disconnect devices are not sub-
ject to the above six disconnect
limitation, as the entire board can
be de-energized with the main
disconnect device.
Ground fault protection of equip-
ment shall be provided for solidly
grounded wye electrical services
of more than 150V to ground, but
not exceeding 600V phase-to-
phase for each service disconnect-
ing means rated 1000A or more.
B. For testing purposes, means are
also required to disconnect the
switchboard neutral bus from the
ground service neutral conductor
(single-phase three-wire, three-
phase four-wire systems). To
comply with this requirement, a
removable link (solid bar) is pro-
vided in the switchboard neutral
bus. This link is generally located
near the point where the main
feeders enter the switchboard or
in the area of the main disconnect
device where one is provided.
To further comply with NEC and
UL requirements, a separate
bonding strap is connected from
the neutral bus to the switchboard
frame. This bonding connection
is located on the line side of the
removable neutral link, maintain-
ing a service ground to the switch-
board frame when the test link
is removed.
Where switchboards are to be used for
service equipment, it should be clearly
indicated in requests for quotations,
and noted on the order.
Requirements and Labeling
The basic requirement for obtaining
an Underwriters Laboratories label
on a switchboard, is that all the
compartment devices (breakers,
switches, and the like) in the
switchboard assembly are UL listed.
In addition, the switchboard must
comply with all applicable provisions
of UL 891.
Todays modern electrical systems
require that switchboards offer a wide
selection of electrical devices, many
of which do not fall within the scope
of UL listed devices. Therefore, the
conditions under which a switchboard
may be labeled are limited.
Listed below are several important
guidelines for consideration when
an Underwriters Laboratories label
is specied:
1. Underwriters Laboratories
nameplates, where applicable,
are supplied for each vertical
structure rather than one common
nameplate for the complete
switchboard lineup. Where all
of the component devices in the
switchboard are UL listed and all
applicable provisions UL 891 are
met, each of the vertical structures
that make up the switchboard may
be labeled.
2. Individual vertical structures of
a switchboard may be labeled
where they comply with Under-
writers Laboratories requirements
although other vertical structures
in the same switchboard lineup
may not meet the UL standards,
and will not be labeled.
3. All Pow-R-Line C metering
switchboards are UL labeled if all
mounted devices are UL listed.
Incoming Service
The incoming service section is
similar in design and arrangement to
standard distribution switchboards.
The incoming service can be located on
either end of the lineup or in the center.
Main lugs only (4004000A) can be
provided with an appropriate pull
section for cable entry and termination.
A variety of main service protective
devices are also available. The standard
devices include insulated-case circuit
breakers up to 4000A, molded-case
circuit breakers (4002500A), fusible
switches (4001200A) and bolted
pressure switches (8004000A).
Ground fault protection is available
to meet code requirements and a
service entrance label can be provided
when specied. Service sections can
also include power company main
service metering provisions, if
required, and user instrumentation
or monitoring devices.
Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers rated 800A and below
have thermal-magnetic trip devices
with optional electronic trip units.
Breakers 1200A and larger have
electronic trip units as standard.
Optional electronic trip units are
available rated 800A, offering
increased short-time function
adjustability and integral ground
fault protection.
21.10-3
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General DescriptionPow-R-Line C Type WWCMS (EUSERC Only)
079
Fusible Switches
These switches incorporate a quick-
make, quick-break mechanism housed
in individual enclosures. The switches
rated 4001200A are provided in single
unit construction and applied as
individually mounted main devices.
Shunt trips are available for use
with ground fault protection.
Switches rated 400 and 600A are
designed for use with Class R fuses.
They can be provided with either
Class J or T fuse provisions. The
800 and 1200A units have provisions
for Class L fuses.
Bolted Pressure Switches
Bolted pressure switches use a quick-
acting stored energy mechanism with
bolted pressure force on the contacts
in the closed position.
Available in ratings of 8004000A,
the switches can be provided as a
manually operated device or with an
electric trip mechanism for use with
ground fault protection equipment.
All bolted pressure switches have
provisions for Class L current limiting
fuses. The units are 100% rated
devices.
Tenant Metering Sections
Type WWCMS for EUSERC
Service Areas
Tenant metering sections provide
arrangements for grouping individual
tenant feeder circuits rated 200A or
less. Each circuit consists of a utility
approved meter socket and an
appropriate disconnect device.
These sections contain chassis
mounted, factory assembled and
wired meter sockets and disconnects
arranged for hot sequence metering
(meter socket ahead of the tenant
disconnect). The switchboards are
shipped ready for connection of the
tenant feeder cables and installation
of the utility furnished watthour meter.
Sealable covers are provided to
comply with utility standard
requirements.
The WWCMS hot sequence metering
sections are constructed for bottom
exit of the tenant feeder cables. If
top exit of the cables is required, an
optional rear barrier wireway can be
provided in the back of the metering
section or a load side cable pull
section can be added to the lineup.
Meter Socket
The meter socket is a ring type device
rated 200A continuous for self-
contained metering applications. The
assembly includes a bypass test block
in a fully bussed combination to meet
EUSERC standard requirements.
Disconnect
Tenant disconnects can be molded-
case circuit breakers, fusible pullout
devices (for Class T fuses) or fusible
switches arranged for Class R fusing.
Short-circuit ratings of the disconnect/
meter socket assembly are established
based on UL peak let-through currents
using self-contained meter sockets.
Circuits Over 200A
Requirements for tenant metered
circuits over 200A can be met using
separate sections with appropriate
disconnect devices installed below
a current transformer/metering
compartment. The metering
compartment constructed to EUSERC
standards provides mounting
provisions for the utility-furnished
current transformers that can be
connected to a transformer rated
meter socket provided on the sealable
compartment door.
Single disconnects can include
molded-case circuit breakers, fusible
switches or bolted pressure switches.
For multiple feeder applications,
a 22X distribution chassis with break-
ers or fusible switches can
be provided in combination with
the metering compartment. The stan-
dard arrangement is for hot sequence
metering.
Meter Socket Sealable Cover Arrangement
Assembly Includes Meter Socket and Test Block per
EUSERC Requirements Prewired to Tenant Disconnect
21.10-4
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General DescriptionPow-R-Line C Type WCMS (Non-EUSERC)
080
Tenant Metering Sections
Type WCMS
Tenant metering sections provide
arrangements for grouping individual
tenant feeder circuits rated 200A or
less. Each circuit consists of a utility-
approved meter socket and an
appropriate disconnect device.
These sections contain factory
assembled and wired meter sockets
and disconnects that can be arranged
for hot sequence metering (meter
socket ahead of the tenant disconnect)
or cold sequence metering (disconnect
ahead of the meter socket). The
switchboards are shipped ready for
connection of the tenant feeder cables
and installation of the utility-furnished
watthour meter.
The WCMS metering sections are
constructed for bottom exit of the
tenant feeder cables. If top exit of the
cables is required, an optional rear
barriered wireway can be provided in
the back of the metering section or a
load side cable pull section can be
added to the lineup.
Meter Socket
The meter socket is a ringless type
device rated 200A continuous for self-
contained metering applications. All
sockets include a manual lever bypass
device. The standard meter socket is
the heavy-duty Type HQ series. Type
HB sockets are also available.
Each meter socket is provided with
an individual screwless cover that
includes a sealing bracket with
provisions for barrel locks, sealing
wire or sealing bands. Individual
internal barriers are provided around
each socket.
Disconnect
Tenant disconnects can be molded-
case circuit breakers, fusible pullout
devices (for Class T fuses) or fusible
switches arranged for Class R fusing.
Short-circuit ratings of the disconnect/
meter socket assembly are established
based on UL peak let-through currents
using self-contained meter sockets.
Circuits Over 200A
Requirements for tenant metered
circuits over 200A can be met using
separate sections with appropriate
disconnect devices installed in
combination with a current
transformer/metering compartment.
The utility-approved metering
compartment provides mounting
provisions for the utility or owner-
furnished current transformers that
can be connected to a transformer
rated meter socket. The socket can
optionally be provided on the
switchboard or can be furnished and
installed separately by others. Single
disconnects can include molded-case
circuit breakers, fusible switches or
bolted pressure switches, and can be
arranged for hot or cold sequence
metering. For multiple feeder
applications, a 22X distribution chassis
with breakers or fusible switches can
be provided in combination with the
metering compartment. The standard
arrangement for multiple feeders is for
hot sequence metering.
Two types of 400A self-contained
meter sockets are available. A single
circuit 400A (320A continuous) rated
self-contained meter socket with
manual lever bypass is available
with either a breaker or fusible switch
tenant main. Also available is a 400A
continuous rated self-contained meter
socket without bypass, which uses
either a breaker or fusible switch
tenant main.
Barriered Socket Construction
with Manual Lever Bypass
Typical 200A 7 Jaw Sockets with Manual Lever Bypass Connected
to Circuit Breaker Disconnects in Hot Sequence Arrangement
21.10-5
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
081
Disconnect Selection and Ratings
Main and Large Feeder Disconnects
Table 21.10-2. Bolted Pressure Switches
Table 21.10-3. Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit BreakerMain
Meter Section Tenant Main Disconnects
Short-circuit rating based on peak let-through of 30,000A using

self-contained meter sockets per UL 414. Standard device short-
circuit rating applies when used with transformer rated sockets.
For use with 400A self-contained socket in single section construction

for Type WCMS lineups only.
Table 21.10-6. Fusible Pullout Devices
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Rating
rms Symmetrical Amperes
240V 480V
400 KD 65,000 35,000
HKD 100,000 65,000
KDC 200,000 100,000
600 LGE 65,000 35,000
LGH 100,000 65,000
LD 65,000 35,000
HLD 100,000 65,000
LDC, LGC 200,000 100,000
800 MDL 65,000 50,000
8001200 ND 65,000 35,000
HND 100,000 65,000
NDC 200,000 100,000
16002500 RD 125,000 65,000
Switch
Rating
Ampere
Fuse
UL
Class
Description Interrupting Rating
8004000 L Current
Limiting
200,000
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Rating
240V 480V
800
1600
2000
SB
SB
SB
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
3000
4000
SB
SB
65,000
130,000
65,000
85,000
Switch
Rating
Ampere
Fuse
UL
Class
400600 R Current
Limiting
200,000
J 200,000
8001200 L 200,000
Maximum
Voltage
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type

240 50100 EHD 18,000
FD, FDE 25,000
HFD, HFDE 65,000
125200 ED 65,000
400 KDC
50,000
480Y/277 70100 EHD 14,000
70200 HFD, HFDE 35,000
FDC 50,000
400 KDC
25,000
Switch
Rating
Ampere
Fuse
UL
Class
100 or 200 T Current
Limiting
200,000
Switch
Rating
Ampere
Fuse
UL
Class
100 or 200 R Current
Limiting
200,000
21.10-6
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
082
Wire and Cable Terminals
Optional Rear Barriered Wireway for Tenant
Metering Sections Provides Access for
Top Exit of Tenant Feeder Circuits
Standard Switchboard Terminals
Wire and cable terminals supplied
on switchboard mounted devices for
making up incoming or outgoing cable
connections are of the mechanical
screw clamp pressure type.
All standard terminals are suitable for
use with either aluminum or copper
cable except as noted in the table.
Panel-mounted devices use the
terminal provided as standard for
and furnished with that device.
All terminal sizes are based on wire
ampacities corresponding to those
shown in NEC Table 310.16 under the
75C insulation columns (75C wire).
The use of smaller size (in circular
mills) regardless of insulation
temperature rating is not permitted
without voiding UL labels on devices
and equipment.
Table 21.10-8. Standard Incoming
Terminals (MLO)

ampacities corresponding to those shown
in NEC Table 310.16 under the 75C
insulation columns (75C wire). The use of
smaller size (in circular mils) regardless of
insulation temperature rating is not permit-
ted without voiding UL labels on devices
and equipment.

and equipment.
Table 21.10-10. Magnum SB Insulated-Case
Circuit Breakers

and equipment.
Table 21.10-11. Bolted Pressure Switches

and equipment.

ampacities corresponding to those shown in
NEC Table 310.16 under the 75C insulation
columns (75C wire). The use of smaller size
(in circular mils) regardless of insulation
temperature rating is not permitted without
voiding UL labels on devices and equipment.
Ampere
Rating
Wire
Range
400
600
800
(2) #2-500 kcmil
(2) #2-500 kcmil
(3) #2-500 kcmil
1200
1600
2000
(4) #2-500 kcmil
(5) #2-500 kcmil
(6) #2-500 kcmil
2500
3000
4000
(7) #2-500 kcmil
(8) #2-500 kcmil
(11) #2-500 kcmil
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Wire
Range
EDB, EDS, ED,

EDH, EDC
125-225 #4-4/0 or
#6-300 kcmil
EHD, FDB, FDE
FD, HFD, HFDE
FDC, FDCE
15-100
125-225
#14-1/0
#4-4/0 or
#6-300 kcmil
KD, KDB,
HKD, KDC
100-225
250-350
400
(1) #3-350 kcmil
(1) 250-500 kcmil
(2) 3/0-250 kcmil
or
(1) 3/0-500 kcmil
LGE, LGH, LD,
HLD, LDC, LGC
300-500
600
(2) 250-300 kcmil
(2) 400-500 kcmil
MDL 400-600
700-800
(2) #1-500 kcmil
(2) 3/0-400 kcmil
ND, HND,
NDC
800-1000
1200
(3) 3/0-400 kcmil
(4) 4/0-500 kcmil
RD 1600
2000
2500
(5) #2-500 kcmil
(6) #2-500 kcmil
(7) #2-500 kcmil
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Wire
Range
SB
SB
SB
800
1600
2000
(3) #2-500 kcmil
(5) #2-500 kcmil
(6) #2-500 kcmil
SB
SB
3000
4000
(8) #2-500 kcmil
(11) #2-500 kcmil
Ampere
Rating
Wire
Range
800
1200
1600
(3) #2-500 kcmil
(4) #2-500 kcmil
(5) #2-500 kcmil
2000
2500
3000
(6) #2-500 kcmil
(7) #2-500 kcmil
(8) #2-500 kcmil
4000 (11) #2-500 kcmil
Ampere
Rating
Wire
Range
30
60
100
#4-#1/0
#4-#1/0
#4-#1/0
200
400
600
#4-300 kcmil
#4-600 kcmil
(2) #4-600 kcmil
800
1200
(3) #4-600 kcmil
(4) #4-600 kcmil
21.10-7
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
083
Main Switchboard SectionLayout and Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: All sections are standard 90.00 inches
(2286.0 mm) high. Add 13.00 inches
(330.2 mm) to depth shown for NEMA
Type 3R outdoor enclosure.
Table 21.10-13. Bussed Pull Sections
(With Lug Landings)
If used with a main service section, depth

will match the main device section.
Note: For main lug only applications.
Figure 21.10-1. Typical Conduit Area
Figures 21.10-2, 21.10-3 and 21.10-4
Table 21.10-14. Main Fusible Switch Service Sections
Table 21.10-15. Main Circuit Breaker Service Sections
Main Ampere
Rating
Figure 21.10-2
W D
400
600
800
30 (762.0) 24 (609.6)
1200 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6)
1600
2000
45 (1143.0) 30 (762.0)
2500
3000
51 (1295.4) 30 (762.0)
4000 51 (1295.4) 48 (1219.2)
W
D
3.00
(76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
Switch
Type
Ampere
Rating
Figure 21.10-3 Figure 21.10-4
W D W1 W D
Fusible
Switch
400
600
800
36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0)
1200 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
Bolted
Pressure
Switch
800 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
1200 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
1600
2000
45 (1143.0) 30 (762.0) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
2500
3000
51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 51 (1295.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
4000 51 (1295.4) 45 (1143.0) 48 (1219.2)
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Figure 21.10-3 Figure 21.10-4
W D W1 W D
KD, HKD,
KDC
400 30 (762.0) 24 (609.6) 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0) 24 (609.6)
LGE, LGH,
LGC, LD,
HLD, LDC
600
MDL, ND 800
ND, HND,
NDC
1200 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
RD 1600
2000
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
30 (762.0)
30 (762.0)
45 (1143.0)
45 (1143.0)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
36 (914.4)
2500 51 (1295.4) 30 (762.0) 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
Magnum SB 3000 51 (1295.4) 36 (914.4) 51 (1295.4) 45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
4000 51 (1295.4) 48 (1219.2) 51 (1295.4) 45 (1143.0) 48 (1219.2)
Figure 21.10-2. Main Lugs OnlyTop or
Bottom Feed
Figure 21.10-3. Main Device (Breaker or
Switch)Bottom Feed
Switch)Top or Bottom Feed
W
D
W
D
W
D
W1
21.10-8
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
084
Tenant Meter and Disconnect Sections200A Maximum Circuit
Hot sequence metering sections
incorporating 200A (maximum)
continuous rated self-contained meter
sockets with test bypass/disconnect
block in combination with tenant main
disconnect device.
Standard arrangement provides for
bottom exit of cables. Top exit of
cables will require addition of load
side pull section or rear barriered
wireway for each metering section.
Figure 21.10-5. Tenant Meter and Disconnect Congurations
Depth will match main device section.
3.00-inch (76.2 mm) additional clearance required by utility for clearance between meter and door posts for outdoor designs.
Double door without center post available for two sections side-by-side.
Figure 21.10-6. Typical Conduit Area Figure 21.10-7. Load Side Pull Section with
Barriered Cross Bus
Depth will match main device section.

Figure 21.10-8. Rear Barriered Wireway
Metering Section Side View
Figure 21.10-9. Outdoor Floor Plans
Circuit Breaker or Fusible Pullout Disconnects Fusible Switch Disconnects
20.00 (508.0)
Indoor

26.00 (660.4)
Outdoor
3 Circuits
Maximum
32.00 (812.8)
Indoor
36.00 (914.4)
Outdoor
6 Circuits
Maximum
20.00 (508.0)
Indoor

26.00 (660.4)
Outdoor
2 Circuits Maximum 100A
1 Circuit Maximum 200A
32.00 (812.8)
Indoor
36.00 (914.4)
Outdoor
36.00 (914.4)
Indoor
36.00 (914.4)
Outdoor
4 Circuits Maximum
(3) 200A Circuits Maximum and
(1) 100A Circuit Maximum
W
D
3.00
(76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
Barriered
Cross Bus
Tenant
Feeder
Cables
20.00
(508.0)

Barrier
Tenant
Feeder
Cables
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
21.10-9
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C Type WWCMS (EUSERC Only)
085
Main Switchboard SectionLayout and Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: All sections are standard 90.00 inches
(330.2 mm) to depth shown for NEMA
Type 3R outdoor enclosure.
Table 21.10-16. Bussed Pull Sections
If used with a main service section, depth

will match the main device section.
Note: For main lug only applications and
installations requiring separate incoming
pull section (top or bottom feed).
Table 21.10-17. Main Fusible Switch
Service Sections
Table 21.10-18. Main Circuit Breaker
Service Sections
Figure 21.10-10. Main Lug Only
Top or Bottom Feed
Switch)Top Feed
Switch)Bottom Feed
Figures 21.10-10, 21.10-11 and 21.10-12
Main Ampere
Rating
Figure 21.10-10
W D
800 or Less 20 (508.0) 30 (762.0)

12004000 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0)
Switch
Type
Ampere
Rating
Figure 21.10-11
or 21.10-12
W D
Fusible
switch
400
600
800
1200
30 (762.0) 30 (762.0)
Bolted
pressure
switch
800 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0)
1200
1600
2000
36 (914.4) 36 (914.4)
2500
3000
4000
45 (1143.0) 36 (914.4)
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Figure 21.10-11
or 21.10-12
W D
KD, HKD,
KDC
400 30 (762.0) 30 (762.0)
LGE, LGH,
LD, HLD,
LDC, LGC
600
MDL, ND,
HND, NDC
800
1200
RD 1600
2000
2500
W
D
W
D
W
D
W
D
3.00
(76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
21.10-10
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C Type WCMS (Non-EUSERC)
086
Tenant Meter and Disconnect Sections
All sections are standard 90.00 inches
(2286.0 mm) high. Hot or cold sequence
metering sections incorporating 200A
(maximum) continuous rated self-
contained meter sockets (ringless type
with manual bypass) in combination
with tenant main disconnect device.
Standard arrangement provides for
bottom exit of cables. Alternate cable
exit will require addition of load side
pull section or rear barriered wireway
for each section.
Figure 21.10-14. Circuit Breaker or Fusible Pullout Tenant Disconnects
Standard depth is 30.00 inches (762.0 mm).

Figure 21.10-15. Fusible Switch Tenant Disconnects

Figures 21.10-17, 21.10-18 and 21.10-19
For 400A applications, select either
400A (320A continuous) with manual
lever bypass or the 400A continuous
rated meter socket with 400A frame
Type KDC circuit breaker.
Can be arranged for hot sequence
metering with bottom cable exit or
cold sequence metering with top cable
exit. Alternate cable exit will require
addition of load side pull section
or rear barriered wireway. See
Figures 21.10-19 and 21.10-20.
20.00
(508.0)
32.00
(812.8)
38.00
(965.2)
3 Circuits
Maximum
6 Circuits
Maximum
7 Circuits MaximumFusible Pullout
8 Circuits MaximumBreaker
4 Circuits Maximum 200A 2 Circuits Maximum 100A
1 Circuit Maximum 200A

20.00
(508.0)
32.00
(812.8)
38.00
(965.2)
W
D
3.00
(76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
Figure 21.10-17. Load Side Pull Section
with Barriered Cross Bus

Figure 21.10-18. Rear Barriered Wireway
Metering Section Side View
Figure 21.10-19. 400A Tenant Section
with Self-Contained Metering (Breaker)
Depth will match metering sections.

Figure 21.10-20. 400A Tenant Section with
Self-Contained Metering (Fusible Switch)
Depth will match metering sections.

20.00
(508.0)
Barriered
Cross Bus
Tenant
Feeder
Cables
Barrier
Tenant
Feeder
Cables
20.00
(508.0)

1 Circuit
26.00
(660.4)

1 Circuit
21.10-11
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Layout DimensionsPow-R-Line C Types WWCMS (EUSERC Only) and WCMS
087
All sections are standard 90.00 inches
(330.2 mm) to depths shown for
NEMA Type 3R outdoor enclosure.
Add 9.00 inches (228.6 mm) for
NEMA Type 3R on single section
36.00 inches (914.4 mm) wide only.
Tenant Sections Arranged for
Transformer-Rated Metering
Includes utility-approved metering
compartment with provisions for
mounting current transformers for
metering circuits rated 400A and above.
Disconnect device can be either a
single fusible switch or circuit breaker
arranged for hot or cold sequence.
A 22X chassis for installation of
multiple disconnects on one metered
circuit is also available for hot
sequence metering.
Standard cable exit is at the bottom.
For top cable exit, add wireway barrier.
Figure 21.10-21. Multiple Disconnects
(22X ChassisSee Figures Below)
Depth (D) will match depth of main

device section.
Note: Refer to panel layout guides.
Figure 21.10-22. 22X Chassis Layout Guide
Fusible Switches
Switchboard SectionLayout and Dimensions
W
Single
Disconnect
or
22X Chassis
30A 30A
60A
100A
240V Max.
100A
240V Max.
100A
200A
100A 100A
400A Branch
600A Branch
200A 200A
800A Branch
1200A Branch
3
6

i
n
c
h

(

9
1
4
.
4

m
m
)

W
i
d
e
S
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e
4
5

i
n
c
h
(
1
1
4
3
.
0

m
m
)

W
i
d
e
S
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e
4X
4X
4X
5X
6X
5X
9X
11X
6X
11X
16X
Table 21.10-19. Single Tenant Disconnect Service SectionsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Depth (D) will match depth of main device section.
Also requires 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide pull section.

Figure 21.10-23. Typical Conduit AreasBottom Cable Exit
Figure 21.10-24. 22X Chassis Layout GuideCircuit Breakers, 1X = 1.38 inches (34.9 mm)
Type
Disconnect
Ampere
Rating
Type WWCMS (EUSERC) Type WCMS
W D
W D
Fusible SwitchDisconnect
Fusible
switch
400
600
800
36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0)
1200 38 (965.2) 30 (762.0)
Bolted
pressure
switch
800 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0)

1200
1600
38 (965.2) 30 (762.0)
Circuit BreakerDisconnect
KD, HKD, KDC 400 36 (914.4) 24 (609.6) 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0)
LD, HLD, LDC 600
MDL, ND 800
ND, HND, NDC
1200 36 (914.4) 30 (762.0)

RD
1600
W
D
3.00
(76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
Single Disconnect
W
D
12.00
(304.8)
22X Chassis
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
1P 1P
2P 2P
2P 2P
3P 3P
3P 3P
2 or 3P
2 or 3P
2 or 3P
2 or 3P
2 or 3P 2 or 3P
3
6

i
n
c
h
e
s

(
9
1
4
.
4

m
m
)

W
i
d
e

S
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e
1X
2X
3X
3X
3X
4X
6X
6X
2X
3X
225
225
250
400
600
250
800
1200
EHD,
FDB, FD, FDE
HFD, FDC, HFDE, FDCE
EDB, EDS,
ED, EDH, EDC
JD, HJD,
JDC
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC
LD, HLD,
LDC
JD, HJD,
JDC
MDL
ND, HND,
NDC
Maximum
Amperes Frame
4X 600 LGE, LGH, LGC 2 or 3P
21.10-12
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
088
21.11-1
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General DescriptionPow-R-Line C Instant Switchboards Meet EUSERC Requirements
089
General Description
Eatons Instant Switchboards are
designed as distributor-stocked units
to provide fast delivery to match the
needs of the construction market.
Suitable for use as service entrance
equipment, they combine utility
metering provisions with a fused main
switch in a single compact section that
can also include a distribution panel
for feeder and branch circuit breakers.
Typical applications for these versatile
switchboards include small ofce
buildings and factories, stores, super-
markets and shopping centers.
Construction
These switchboards are available in
either indoor or outdoor enclosures
manufactured of code gauge steel with
a durable light gray nish. All units are
completely enclosed with front, rear
and side covers. Outdoor units include
a front hinged door.
The service section includes:
Main lugs mounted at the top
(two #4600 kcmil per phase)
for overhead feed or for use with
underground pull section
A metering and CT compartment
with bussing for utility bar type CTs
and two 15.00-inch (381.0 mm) high
meter compartment doorsone with
meter socket provision, one blank
A 400 or 600A T-fused main switch
or 800A main circuit breaker with
either load lugs (same as main lugs)
or with connections to a factory-
installed distribution panel
Underground pull sections are avail-
able with lug landing kits, providing
studs for incoming cables per EUSERC
requirements and two #4600 kcmil
lugs per phase for cable connection to
the service section.
Distribution panels can be included
for 240 Vac maximum (single-phase,
three-wire, or three-phase, four-wire)
or for 480Y/277 Vac (three-phase, four-
wire). The 240V panels have provisions
for four two-pole or three-pole, 225A
frame circuit breakers; and 24 poles
of 100A frame circuit breakers. The
480Y/277V panel has provisions for
four two-pole or three-pole 225A
frame circuit breakers; and 24 poles
of 100A frame circuit breakers.
Distribution panel for 800A 240 Vac
or 480Y/277 Vac can be included with
provisions for six two- or three-pole,
225A frame circuit breakers.
For applications that require the load
circuit conductors to exit at the top, a
loadside wireway compartment is avail-
able that bolts to the service section.
Standards
Instant Switchboards are UL 891
listed and comply with all applicable
industry standards.
These switchboards meet EUSERC
requirements.
Service Ratings
240 Vac, single-phase, three-wire, or
three-phase, four-wire
480Y/277 Vac, three-phase, four-wire
Interrupting Ratings (Series Rating)
65,000 rms symmetrical amperes at
240 Vac, with 400 and 600A fusible
switch mains using 65,000 AIC ED
225A frame or 10,000 AIC BAB 100A
frame branch breakers
65,000 rms symmetrical amperes
at 480Y/277 Vac, with 400 and 600A
fusible switch mains using 35,000
AIC FD 225A frame or 14,000 AIC
GHB 100A frame branch breakers
35,000 rms symmetrical at
480Y/277 Vac fully rated using
800A main circuit breaker with
FD 225A frame branch breakers
Dimensions
Indoor: 32.00 x 90.00 x 14.00 inches
(812.8 x 2286.0 x 355.6 mm)
Outdoor: 38.00 x 90.00 x 26.00 inches
(965.2 x 2286.0 x660.4 mm)
Table 21.11-1. Instant Switchboards
Not for use on 480V three-phase three-wire delta systems.

Note: Standard switchboards include two 15.00-inch (381.0) high meter compartment doors:
one with single meter socket provision and one blank. For other arrangements, use accessories.
Type 1 Indoor Type 3R Outdoor
Service Main Ampere
Rating
Catalog Number
NEMA 1Indoor NEMA 3ROutdoor
240 Vac MaximumMain Fused Switch Only
Single-phase, 3W 400
600
MSB423
MSB623
RMSB423
RMSB623
Three-phase, 4W 400
600
MSB424
MSB624
RMSB424
RMSB624
240 Vac MaximumMain Fused Switch with Distribution Panel
Single-phase, 3W 400
600
MSBP423
MSBP623
RMSBP423
RMSBP623
Three-phase, 4W 400
600
MSBP424
MSBP624
RMSBP424
RMSBP624
240 Vac MaximumMain Circuit Breaker Only
Three-phase, 4W 800 MSB824 RMSB824
240 Vac MaximumMain Circuit Breaker Only with Distribution Panel
Three-phase, 4W 800 MSBP824 RMSBP824
480Y/277 Vac
Main Fused Switch Only

Three-phase, 4W 400
600
MSB444
MSB644
RMSB444
RMSB644
480Y/277 Vac
Main Fused Switch with Distribution Panel

Three-phase, 4W 400
600
MSBP444
MSBP644
RMSBP444
RMSBP644
480Y/277 Vac Maximum
Main Circuit Breaker Only

Three-phase, 4W 800 MSB844 RMSB844
480Y/277 Vac Maximum
Main Circuit Breaker Only with Distribution Panel

Three-phase, 4W 800 MSBP844 RMSBP844
21.11-2
September 2011
Sheet 21
i
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
General DescriptionPow-R-Line C Instant Switchboards Meet EUSERC Requirements
090
Table 21.11-2. Meter Compartment Doors
(Meter Sockets Not Included)
Table 21.11-3. Meter Sockets
For Field Installation (order separately)
Table 21.11-4. Loadside Wireway
Same Depth as Switchboard
Table 21.11-5. Underground Pull Sections
Note: Same depth as switchboard with
provisions for lug landing kit.
Note: If pull section is to be installed
separate from service section, add side
closer plates. Cat No. UGCP.
Table 21.11-6. Lug Landing Kits for
Underground Pull Sections
Table 21.11-7. Distribution Breakers
Door Size
Inches (mm)
Drilling Catalog
Number
15.00 H x 32.00 W
(381.0 x 812.2)
Blank
1 socket
MD150
MD151
30.00 H x 32.00 W
(762.0 x 812.2)
Blank
2 socket
MD300
MD302
Number
of Jaws
Catalog
Number
4
5
6
M4
M5
M6
8
13
15
M8
M13
M15
Section
Width
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
NEMA 1
Indoor
NEMA 3R
Outdoor
12.00 (304.8) LSS12W RLSS12W
Section
Width
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
NEMA 1
Indoor
NEMA 3R
Outdoor
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
UG24W
UG30W
RUG24W
RUG30W
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
Service Catalog
Number
400 Single-phase, 3W
Three-phase, 4W
LL4003
LL4004
800 Single-phase, 3W
Three-phase, 4W
LL8003
LL8004
Ampere
Rating
Type
Breaker
Poles
1P 2P 3P
240 Vac
1560
70100
125225
BAB
BAB
ED
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
480Y/277 Vac
15100
70225
GHB
FD
X
X
X
X
X


September 2011

Contents

Panelboards
22.0-1

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet

22

001

P
a
n
e
l
b
o
a
r
d
s

Panelboards
Overview

Panelboard Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.0-3

General Construction Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.0-3

Application Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.0-4

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.0-7

Series Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.0-10
Pow-R-Line

1a

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.1-1
Pow-R-Line 2a

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.2-1
Pow-R-Line 3a

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.3-1
Pow-R-Line 3E

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.3-5
Pow-R-Line 4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.4-1
Pow-R-Line 5P

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.5-1
Pow-R-Line Column Type

Pow-R-Line 1a-LX Column Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.6-1

Pow-R-Line 2a-LX Column Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.6-4
Retrot Panelboards

Pow-R-Line 1R Retrot Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.7-1

Pow-R-Line 2R Retrot Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.7-3
Pow-R-Line 1aF

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.7-5
Pow-R-Line 2aF

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.7-7
Elevator Control Panelboard

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.7-9
Panelboard Modications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7-10
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010

Pow-R-Line 2a
22.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011

Panelboards

Sheet

22

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Overview

General DescriptionPow-R-Line

002

Pow-R-Line 1a, 2a and 3a, and 3E

Robust design using Eaton
circuit breakers

Increased ratings (with Series
Rated main circuit breakers)
provide higher short-circuit ratings

Pow-R-Line 3a can accommodate
branch breakers dual-mounted
through 150A and single-mounted
through 225A

Pow-R-Line 3E panelboards
accommodate branch-mounted
breakers up to 125A

Lock and Door opening mechanism
includes a positive slide catch and
right- or left-hand installation

Surface or ush trims

UL

tested and listed. Meets NEC

and NEMA

standards

Special Use Pow-R-Line
Panelboards

Pow-R-Line 1a-LX and Pow-R-Line
2a-LX column panelboards are
designed to t within the structural
I-beam of a facility and offer branch
circuits up to 100A

Pow-R-Line 1aF and Pow-R-Line
2aF fusible lighting panelboards
were developed for ultra high fault
currents and for use in selective
coordination applications and
test circuits

Pow-R-Line 1R and Pow-R-Line 2R
Retrot Panelboards are the only
panelboards in the market listed for
use in retrot applications in other
manufacturers existing back boxes

Elevator control panelboards
integrate electrical protection
and controls for elevators and
meet stringent code requirements
in a single, cost-effective package

Pow-R-Line 4B and 4F
Power Panels

Pow-R-Line 4B panelboard uses
circuit breakers

Pow-R-Line 4F panelboard uses
fusible switches

A single chassis accommodates
both circuit breakers and
fusible switches

Main and neutral are located at the
same ends to provide additional
space for branch devices

Three-piece trim facilitates
installation

Will accommodate circuit breakers
to provide higher ratings in a
standard chassis and increased
series ratings

UL tested and approved. Meets
NEC and NEMA standards

Pow-R-Line 1a, 3a 3E and Column
Pow-R-Line 1aF and 2aF
Pow-R-Line 1R and 2R

Pow-R-Line 5P Power Panels

Plug-on main and branch devices

Main and branch ratings
through 1200A

30.00-inch (762.0 mm) wide
enclosure for single-row bus
(800A maximum)

48.00-inch (1219.0 mm) wide
enclosure for double-row bus

UL tested and listed. Meets NEC
and NEMA standards

\

Pow-R-Line 4B Pow-R-Line 4F
Pow-R-Line 5P


22.0-3

September 2011

Panelboards

Sheet

22

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Overview


003

Table 22.0-1. Panelboard Selection Guide

Available with surge protective device (SPD).

General Construction Features

Eatons assembled panelboards
are designed for sequence phase
connection of branch circuit devices.
This allows complete exibility of
circuit arrangement (single-, two- or
three-poles) to allow balance of the
electrical load on each phase.
Sturdy, rigid chassis assembly ensures
accurate alignment of interior with
panel front; prevents exing and
minimizes possibility of loosening
or damage to current carrying parts
during and after installation.
Four point in-and-out adjustment
of panel interior is provided to meet
critical depth dimensions on ush
installations. This compensates
for possible misalignment of box
at installation.
Main lugs are mechanical solderless
type and approved for copper and
aluminum conductors.

Enclosures

Boxes are code-gauge galvanized steel
except for column type panelboards,
which include a painted box nished in
ANSI-61 light gray to match the trim.
Standard panelboard cabinets are
designed for indoor use. Alternate
types are available for outdoor and
special purpose applications.
All enclosures are furnished in
accordance with UL standards and
include wiring gutters with proper wire
bending space. Special cabinets can
be provided at an additional charge.
The box dimensions shown are inside
dimensions. For outside dimensions,
add 0.25-inch (6.4 mm).

Standard panelboard boxes are supplied
without knockouts (blank endwalls).

EZ Trim

The EZ box and EZ trim are provided
standard for Pow-R-Line

1a and
Pow-R-Line 2a lighting panelboards,
as well as Pow-R-Line 3a and Pow-R-
Line 3E mid-range panelboards.

EZ Trim Provides Standard Door-in-Door
Construction With No Exposed Hardware
or Sharp Ridges. No Tools are Required
for Installation.

The trims for lighting and appliance
branch circuit panelboards and small
power distribution panelboards
include a door with rounded corners
and concealed hinges. A ush-type
latch and lock assembly is included.
All locks are keyed alike. These trims
are available in both surface and ush
mounted designs.
Fronts for power distribution panel-
boards use a unique breaker front
cover design in which each device has
a dedicated bolt-on steel cover. The
individual covers form a single dead-
front for the panelboard that is used
in conjunction with two wiring gutter
covers to complete the trim. A door
is not nished as part of the standard
offering on these panelboards but can
be provided, for an additional charge,
using a deeper than standard box.

Combination AFCI Circuit Breakers

Eatons 125 Vac AFCI single- and two-
pole, 15 and 20A bolt-on breakers in
panelboards meet Article 210.12 of the
NEC. See the NEC code for denitions
and details.

Panelboard
Type
Page
Reference
Device
Type
Maximum
Voltage Rating
Maximum Main
Rating, Amperes
Branch Circuits
Ampere Range
Short-Circuit Current Ratings
rms Symmetrical Amperes, ac
AC DC Main Lugs Only Main Device Fully Rated
(kA)
Series Rated
(kA)

Pow-R-Line 1a

22.1-1

Breaker 240 400 400 15100 1022 22200
Pow-R-Line 2a

22.2-1

Breaker 240
480Y/277
250 400
400
400
400
15100
15100
65
14
65200
22150
Pow-R-Line 3a

22.3-1

Breaker 240
480
600
250 800
800
800
600
600
600
15225
15225
15225
10200
14100
1435
22200
22150
Pow-R-Line 3E

22.3-5

Breaker 480 250 600 600 15125 3565 35100
Pow-R-Line 4B

22.4-1

Breaker 240
480
600
600 1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
151200
151200
151200
10200
14200
14200
22200
22150
Pow-R-Line 4F

22.4-7

Fusible switch 240
600
250 1200
1200
1200
1200
301200
301200
100200
100200
Pow-R-Line 5P

22.5-1

Breaker 240
480
600
250 1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
151200
151200
151200
10200
14200
14200
22200
22150
Pow-R-Line 1aF

22.7-5

Fusible switch 240 400 400 1530 200 200
Pow-R-Line 2aF

22.7-7

Fusible switch 480Y/277 400 400 1530 200 200
Pow-R-Line 1a-LX

22.6-1

Breaker 240 225 225 15-30 1022 18200
Pow-R-Line 2a-LX

22.6-4

Breaker 480Y/277 125/250 225 225 1530 14 25150
Pow-R-Line 1R

22.7-1

Breaker 240 225 225 15100 1022 22100
Pow-R-Line 2R

22.7-3

Breaker 480Y/277 225 225 15100 14 22150
Elevator control
panelboard

22.7-9

Fusible 480 800 800 15200 10200 14100
22.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011

Panelboards

Sheet

22

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Overview


004


Standards

All Eatons panelboards are designed to
meet the following applicable industry
standards, except where noted:
1. Underwriters Laboratories
a. Panelboards: UL 67
b. Cabinets, boxes and trims:
UL 50

Note:

Only panelboards containing UL
listed devices can be UL labeled.

2. National Electrical Code
3. NEMA Standards: PB 1
4. Federal Specication W-P-115c
Circuit breakerType I Class 1
Fusible switchType II Class 1

Panelboard Selection Factors

In selecting a panelboard, the follow-
ing factors must be considered:
a. Service (voltage and frequency).
b. Interrupting capacity (fully or
series rated).
c. Ampere rating of main.
d. Ampere ratings of branches.
e. Installation environment.
f. Codes and standards
mandates.

Panelboard Short-Circuit Rating

The short-circuit rating of Eatons
assembled panelboards are
test veried by, and listed with,
Underwriters Laboratories. Generally,
these ratings are that of the lowest
interrupting rated device in the panel.
Certain exceptions to this rule exist
where branch devices have been
UL tested in combination with
specic main devices having a
higher interrupting rating. Where
these dened main breaker and
branch breaker combinations are
used, the

series short-circuit rating

of the assembled panelboard will be
the same as the series tested rating
of the approved rated main breaker.
Available main and branch breaker
combinations are tabulated on

Page 22.0-10

through

Page 22.0-20

.
All combinations shown are UL
tested and listed.
These series ratings apply to panels
having main devices, or main lug
only panelboards fed remotely by the
device listed in the series ratings chart
as the main, for which UL listed tests
were conducted.


Please refer to Molded-Case Circuit
Breakers,

Tab 27

, for detailed
information on overcurrent protective
device combinations for use on
selectively coordinated systems.

Service Entrance Equipment

NEC Articles 230.F and G, and UL,
require that:
a. Panels used as service entrance
equipment must be located
near the point where the supply
conductors enter the building.
b. A panelboard having main lugs
only shall have a maximum
of six service disconnects to
de-energize the entire panel-
board from the supply
conductors. Where more
than six disconnects are
required, a main service
disconnect must be provided.
c. Must include connector
for bonding and grounding
neutral conductor.
d. A service-entrance-type UL
label must be factory installed.
e. Ground fault protection of
equipment shall be provided
for solidly grounded wye
electrical services of more
than 150V to ground, but not
exceeding 600V phase-to-
phase for each service
disconnecting means rated
1000A or more.
Service entrance panels must be
identied as such on the order entry
to the manufacturing location.

Column Type Panelboards

The same general code restrictions
apply as for standard width panels
except where trough extensions
are used.

Multi-Section Panelboards

When more than 42 overcurrent
protective devices are required, two
or more separate enclosures may be
required. Separate fronts for each
box are standard.

Interconnecting Multi-Section
Panelboards

When a panelboard, for connection to
one feeder, must be furnished in more
than one section (box), each section
must be furnished with main bus and
terminals of the same rating, unless a
main overcurrent device is provided in
each section.
Sub-feed or through-feed provisions
must also be added to provide connec-
tion capability to the second section.

Note:

Sub-feed or through-feed lugs
cannot be used on any panelboard that
is not protected by a single main over-
current device either in the panelboard or
immediately upstream, i.e., service entrance
panelboards with main lugs only using the
six disconnect rule.

Sub-Feed Lugs (Figure 22.0-1)

Sub-feed lugs are one means of
interconnecting multi-section panels.
The sub-feed (second set of) lugs are
mounted directly beside the main lugs.
These are required in each section
except the last panel in the lineup.
The feeder cables are brought into
the wiring gutter of the rst section
and connected to the main lugs.
Another set of the same size cables
are connected to the sub-feed lugs
(Section 1) and are carried over to the
main lugs of the adjacent panel. Cross
connection cables are not furnished by
Eaton. Sub-feed lugs are only available
on main lug only panels.

Note:

Sub-feed lugs may not be used on
main lug only (six disconnect rule) service
entrance panels.

Figure 22.0-1. Sub-Feed Lugs
Box Box
Conduit
Neutral
P
a
n
e
l
Neutral
P
a
n
e
l
Section 1 Section 2


22.0-5

September 2011

Panelboards

Sheet

22

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Overview


005

(Continued)

Through-Feed Lugs (Figure 22.0-2)

Through-feed lugs are another
method to interconnect multi-section
panelboards. The incoming feeder
cables are connected to the main
lugs or main breaker at the bottom of
panel (Section 1). Another set of lugs
(through-feed) are located at the
opposite end of the main bus. The
interconnecting cables are connected
to the through-feed lugs in Section 1
and are carried over to the main
lugs in Section 2. The connection
arrangement could be reversed, i.e.,
main lugs at top; through-feed lugs
at bottom end of panel. Cross cables
are not furnished by Eaton.

Note:

Through-feed lugs may not be used
on main lug only (six disconnect rule)
service entrance panels.

Figure 22.0-2. Through-Feed Lugs
Multiple Section Panelboard
Flush Mounted

Shown below is the standard method
for ush mounting multiple section
lighting and distribution panelboards
using standard ush trims.

Figure 22.0-3. Multiple Section Panelboard
Flush MountedDimensions in Inches (mm)
Branch Circuit Loading for Lighting Panels

The size of mains and branches should
be selected based on the following:
a. Lighting circuits: NEC Article
210, 215, 220 and 240.
b. Distribution circuits, actual or
continuous loads: NEC Article
384.16.
c. Motor circuits: NEC Article 430.
d. Diversity factor.
e. Provision for future loading.


National Electrical Code Article 408
states a panelboard shall be protected
by an overcurrent protective device
having a rating not greater than that
of the panelboard. The overcurrent
protective device shall be located
within or at any point on the supply
side of the panelboard.
Exceptions to Article 408 selectively
apply. Refer to the National Electrical
Code Article 408 for specics.


Ground fault protection (GFP) may
be added to most panelboards using
Eatons integral molded-case circuit
breaker GFP and included feeder
devices on power panelboards and
mains on all panelboards.


Eatons Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System is available
on many molded-case circuit
breakers from 70A to air power
circuit breakers at 5000A. Recognized
by the 2011 National Electrical Code
and the National Electrical Safety
Code (NFPA 70E), the Arcash
Reduction Maintenance System
allows breakers to trip quickly thus
signicantly reducing the available
arc ash potential.

Ambient Temperatures

The primary function of an overcurrent
device is to protect the conductor and
its insulation against overheating. In
selecting the size of the devices and
conductors, consideration should be
given to the ambient temperature
surrounding the conductors within and
external to the panelboard. Cumulative
heating within the panelboard may
cause premature operation of the
overcurrent protective devices.
UL test procedures are based, in part,
on 80% loading of panelboard branch
circuit devices. Article 408 of the NEC
limits the loading of overcurrent devices
in panelboards to 80% of rating where
in normal operation the load will
continue for three hours or more.
Further derating may be required,
depending on such factors as ambient
temperature, duty cycle, frequency
or altitude.

Exception:

There is one exception
to this rule in both UL and NEC. It
applies to assemblies and overcurrent
devices that have been approved
for continuous duty at 100% of its
rating. This exception is covered in
NEC 210.20 (a). Also see

Tab 27

of
this application guide for additional
information.
Section 1 Section 2
Box Box
Conduit
Neutral
P
a
n
e
l
P
a
n
e
l
Neutral
Main Lugs
Thru-
Feed
Lugs
Main
Lugs
Cross Cables
s
Contractor to Mount Boxes
1-1/2-inch (38.1 mm) Apart to
Allow for 3/4-inch (19.1 mm)
Extension on Both Flush Trims
Two Section
Panelboard
(Flush Mounting)
Flush Trim Extends 3/4-inch
(19.1 mm) Beyond Outside
of Box on All Four Sides
Outside Edge of Box
Trim
Wall Wall
Trim Trim
Conduit Nipple for Cross Wiring by Contractor
.75
(19.1)
1.5
(38.1)
Top Section
View
.75
(19.1) .75
(19.1)
.75
(19.1)
.75
(19.1)
.75
(19.1)
.75
(19.1)
.75
(19.1) .75
(19.1)
.75
(19.1)
22.0-6
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Overview
006
(Continued)
Special Conditions
Standard panelboards, assembled
with standard components, are
adequate for most applications.
However, special consideration
should be given to those required
for application under special
conditions such as:
a. Excessive vibration or shock.
b. Frequencies above 60 cycles.
c. Altitudes above 6600 ft (2012m).
d. Damp environment (possible
fungus growth).
e. Compliance with federal, state
and municipal electrical codes
and standards.
Seismic Qualication
Harmonic Currents
Standard panelboard neutrals are
rated for 100% of the panelboard
current. However, because harmonic
currents can cause overheated
neutrals, an option is provided for
neutrals to be rated at 200% (1200A
maximum neutral for 600A main bus)
of the panelboard phase current.
Panelboards with the 200% rated
neutral are UL listed as suitable for
use with nonlinear loads.
Prior to specifying the 200% rated
neutral, Eaton recommends a harmonic
survey be conducted of the distribution
system, be it new or existing.
Surge Protective Devices (SPD)
The quality of power feeding sensitive
electronic loads is critical to the reliable
operation of any facility. In modern
ofces, hospitals and manufacturing
facilities, the most frequent causes
of microprocessor-based equipment
downtime and damage are voltage
transients and electrical noise.
Electrical loads and microprocessor-
based equipment are highly susceptible
to both high and low energy transients.
High energy transients include lightning
induced surges and power company
switching. These high energy transients
can destroy components instantly.
More frequently the electrical system
experiences low energy transients and
high frequency noise.
The effects of continual low energy
transients and high frequency
noise can cause erratic equipment
performance or sudden failure of
electronic circuit board components.
Eaton can provide protective and
diagnostic systems integral to panel-
boards. The SPD is integrated into
the panelboards using a zero lead
length direct busbar connection.
Integral disconnect is used on all
Pow-R-Line 4 panels.
Eaton SPDs May be Integrated
into Most Panelboards
The SPD protects sensitive electronic
equipment from the damaging effects
of high and low energy transients.
For complete product description and
available ratings, refer to Tab 34.
Compact Panelboard Meter
Most Eaton panelboards can integrate
a compact meter for reading the
panelboard power and energy usage.
Eaton's IQ 35M has ANSI 12.20 0.5%
accuracy, a bright backlit LCD display,
real energy pulse output, phase
loss alarm and optional RS-485
communication capability.
Closeup of IQM 35 With Deadfront
22.0-7
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Overview
Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line
007
Table 22.0-2. Electrical Characteristics of Circuit Breakers
DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
DC rated single-pole, 1570A only.
Rating 480Y/277 Vac maximum.
Available with integral ground fault protection.
100% rated breaker.
DC rating not available with Digitrip 310.

Circuit Breaker Ratings UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (kA rms Symmetrical)
Type Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Volts
AC
AC Rating, Volts DC Rating, Volts
120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250

BAB, HQP 1570
15100
1
2
120
120/240
10
10
BAB-H, HQP-H 15100 2, 3 240 10

BABRP, BABRSP 1530
1530
1
2
120
120/240
10
10
QBGF, QPGF,
QBGFEP
1550
1550
1
2
120
120/240
10
10
QBAF, QBAG 1520

1520
1
2
120
120/240
10
10
QBHW, QPHW 1570

15100
1
2
120
120/240
22
22
QBHW-H, QPHW-H 15100 2, 3 240 22

QBHGF, QPHGF,
QBHGFEP
1530
1530
1
2
120
120/240
22
22
QBHAF, QBHAG 1520

1520
1
2
120
120/240
22
22
GHB 15100
15100
1
2, 3
277
480Y/277
65
65
14
14
14
14
GHQ 1520 1 277 65 14
HGHB 1530 1 277 65 25
GHBGFEP 1560 1 277 14
GHQRSP 1520
1520
1
2
277
480Y/277
65
65
14
14
14
GHBS 1530
1530
1
2
277
480Y/277
65
65
14
14
14
EGB 15125
15125
1
2, 3
277
480
35
35
35
18
18
10
10
EGS 15125
15125
1
2, 3
277
480
100
100
35
35
35
35
EGH 15125
15125
1
2, 3
277
480
200
200
65
65
42
42
EHD 15100
15100
1
2, 3
277
480
18
14
14
10
10
FDB 15150 2, 3 600 18 14 14 10
FD, FDE 15150
15225
1
2, 3
277
600
65
35
35
18
10
10
EDB
EDS
ED
DK
100225
100225
100225
250400
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
240
240
240
240
22
42
65
65
10
10
10
10
JD
KD
, CKD
LHH
NHH
LGE
LD
, CLD
MDL
, CMDL
ND
, CND
70250
100400
150400
150350
250600
300600
300800
4001200
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
3
3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
480
600
600
600
600
600
65
65
100
100
65
65
65
65
35
35
65
65
35
35
50
50
18
25
35
35
18
25
25
25
10
10
42
22
22
22
High Interrupting Capacity Circuit Breakers

HFD, HFDE 15150
15225
1
2, 3
277
600
100
65
65
25
10
22
EDH
HJD
HKD
, CHKD
100225
70250
100400
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
240
600
600
100
100
100
65
65
25
35
10
22
22
LGH
HLD
, CHLD
HMDL
, CHMDL
HND
, CHND
250600
300600
300800
4001200
3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
600
600
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
65
35
35
35
35
22
25
25
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

FDC, FDCE
EDC
JDC
15225
100225
70250
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
240
600
200
200
200
100
100
35
35
10
22
22
KDC
LGC
LGU
LDC
, CLDC
NDC
, CNDC
100400
250600
250600
300600
4001200
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
600
600
600
200
200
200
200
200
100
100
150
100
100
65
50
65
50
65
22
42
50
25
22.0-8
September 2011
Panelboards
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 22
Overview
008
Table 22.0-2. Electrical Characteristics of Circuit Breakers (Continued)
100k based on NEMA test procedure.
Non-interrupting trip type.
Interrupting trip type.

Circuit Breaker Ratings UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (kA rms Symmetrical)
Type Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Voltage AC Rating, Volts DC Rating, Volts
AC DC 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 600

Current Limit-R
Circuit Breakers
FCL
LCL
15100
125400
2, 3
2, 3
480
480
200
200
150
200
TRI-PAC

FB-P
LA-P
NB-P
15100
70400
300800
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
600
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Direct Current (DC) Rated Breakers

HFDDC
HJDDC
HKDDC
15150
70250
100400
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
600
42
42
42
42
42
42
35
35
35
HLDDC
HMDLDC
NBDC
300600
300800
7001200
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
600
42
42
42
42
42
42
35
35
35
22.0-9
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Overview
009
Terminal Wire Ranges, Pressure-Type Al/Cu Terminals Except as Noted
Where copper-aluminum terminals are supplied on designated panelboard types, best results are obtained if a suitable joint
compound is applied when aluminum conductors are used.
Table 22.0-3. Standard Main Lug Terminals
Refer to Table 22.5-3 on Page 22.5-2.

Note: Optional 750 kcmil mechanical screw-type terminals are available upon request. Panelboard dimensions may be affected. Refer to Eaton.
Table 22.0-4. Standard Main Breaker and Branch Breaker Terminals
100% rated breaker.

Note: For other terminals available on some ratings of molded-case
circuit breakers, refer to Tab 27.
Note: All terminal sizes are based on wire ampacities corresponding
to those shown in NEC Table 310.16 under 75C insulation columns
(75C wire). The use of smaller size (in circular mills), regardless of
insulation temperature rating is not permitted without voiding UL
labels on devices and equipment.
Table 22.0-4. Standard Main Breaker and Branch
Breaker Terminals (Continued)
100% rated breaker.

Table 22.0-5. Fusible Switch Terminals
Panel
Type
Wire Size Ranges for Ampere Capacity
100A 225A 250A 400A 600A 800A 1200A
Pow-R-Line 1a, 1aF, 1R
Pow-R-Line 2a, 2aF, 2R
Pow-R-Line 3a
#121/0
#121/0
#121/0
#6300 kcmil
#6300 kcmil
#6350 kcmil
(2) #2500 kcmil
(2) #2500 kcmil
(2) #2500 kcmil
(2) #2500 kcmil
(3) #2500 kcmil
Pow-R-Line 3E #62/0 #6350 kcmil (2) 4/0500 kcmil (2) 4/0500 kcmil
Pow-R-Line 4
Pow-R-Line 5P
Pow-R-Command
#121/0
#6300 kcmil
#2500 kcmil
(2) #2500 kcmil
(2) #2500 kcmil

(2) #2500 kcmil
(3) #2500 kcmil
(4) #2500 kcmil
Breaker Type Ampere Rating Wire Size Ranges

BAB, HQP 1570
90100
#14#4
#8#1/0
QBHW, QPHW 1570
90100
#14#4
#8#1/0
EDB, EDS, ED,
EDH, EDC
100225 #4#4/0 or
#6300 kcmil
EGB, EGS, EGH 15125 #143/0
EHD, FDB, FD,
HFD, FDC, FDE, HFDE,
FDCE
15100
125225
175225
#14#1/0
#4#4/0
#6#350
FCL
GHB
15100
15100
#14#1/0
#14#1/0
GHQ
HGHB
GHQRSP
GHBS
1520
1530
1520
1530
#14#1/0
#14#1/0
#14#4
#14#1/0
JD, JDB, HJD, JDC 70250 #4350 kcmil
DK 250350
400
250500 kcmil
(2) 3/0250 kcmil
or (1) 3/0500 kcmil
NHH
KD, KDB,
HKD, KDC,
CKD
, CHKD
150350
100225
250350
400
#2600 kcmil
(1) #3350 kcmil
(1) 250500 kcmil
(2) 3/0250 kcmil
(1) 3/0500 kcmil
Breaker Type Ampere Rating Wire Size Ranges
LGE, LGH, LHH,
LGC, LGU
250400
500600
(1) #2500 kcmil
(2) #2500 kcmil
LD, HLD, LDC, CLD
,
CHLD
, CLDC
300500
600
(2) 250350 kcmil
(2) 400500 kcmil
MDL, HMDL,
CMDL
, CHMDL
400600
700800
(2) #1500 kcmil
(3) 3/0400 kcmil
(2) 500750 kcmil
ND, HND, NDC, CND
,
CHND
, CNDC
6001000
1200
(3) 3/0400 kcmil
(4) 4/0500 kcmil
LCL 125225
250400
(1) #6350 kcmil
(1) #4250 kcmil
and (1) 3/0600 kcmil
FB-P 15100 #141/0
LA-P 70225
250400
#6350 kcmil
(1) #4250 kcmil
and (1) 3/0600 kcmil
NB-P 350700
800
(2) #1500 kcmil
(3) 3/0400 kcmil
Ampere Rating Wire Size Ranges
30, 60, 100
200
#141/0
#4300 kcmil
400 250750 kcmil or
(2) 3/0250 kcmil
600 (2) #4600 kcmil or
(4) 3/0250 kcmil
800 (3) 250750 kcmil or
(6) 3/0250 kcmil
1200 (4) 250750 kcmil or
(8) 3/0250 kcmil
22.0-10
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Overview
Technical Data and SpecicationsSeries Ratings
010
Series Rated Combinations
UL permits panelboards to be labeled
with a short-circuit rating of up to
200,000A symmetrical where UL listed
combinations of main and branch circuits
are used.
These combinations consist of main
breakers or fusible devices connected
ahead of, and in series with approved
conventional devices.
Two arrangements are acceptable and
comply with UL standards for panel-
boards. The main circuit breaker may
be installed in the panel as a main
device (Figure 22.0-4), or it may be
mounted remote (Figure 22.0-5) from
the panel. In either case, the approved
main and branch combinations must
be followed. These arrangements are
acceptable and are UL listed having been
tested in accordance with UL standards.
From the tables on Page 22.0-12
through Page 22.0-20, specic
combinations of main devices
(upstream) and branch devices
(downstream), series connected and
electrically adjacent in the system,
may be selected to qualify the
assembled panelboard for the
short-circuit ratings shown. Series
ratings apply only to those Eaton
breakers listed and published.
Do not use Classied breakers.
Figure 22.0-4. Main Device
Figure 22.0-5. Mounted Remote
Industry standards and the NEC
require protection of the entire
electrical distribution system from
damage due to short-circuit faults.
Article 230.205 of the NEC states that
service equipment shall be suitable
for the short-circuit current available
at its supply terminals. The entire
distribution system is required to meet
this standard. Series rated systems
have become an effective method
of meeting these requirements.
There are three protection systems
used to protect low voltage power
distribution equipment. They are:
Fully rated protection
Fully rated, selectively
coordinated protection
Series rated protection
Fully Rated ProtectionWhere all
overcurrent devices are rated for the
full prospective short-circuit current
at their line side terminals throughout
the system.
Selectively Coordinated Protection
A fully rated system where the
overcurrent device closest to the
fault will open rst, thus isolating
the faulty circuit.
Series Rated ProtectionA short-
circuit interrupting rating assigned to
a combination of two or more over-
current protective devices that are
connected in series and in which the
rating of the downstream device(s)
in the combination is less than the
series rating.
Series ratings are also known in
the industry as integrated ratings,
series combination ratings and
series connected ratings.
UL Issues
In a series rated system, all of the
overcurrent devices in series in the
protective scheme must have been
tested and listed by Underwriters
Laboratories for series combination
use in the system.
All Eatons series ratings are in
full compliance with all applicable
requirements of the latest editions
of UL 489, 891 and 67.
The UL Recognized Component
Directory (the Yellow Book) contains
breaker manufacturers series con-
nected listings. These are intended
ONLY as a guideline for use by others
who are responsible for their own
testing, labeling and listing. Therefore,
the UL Recognized Component
Directory cannot be used to interpret
series connected ratings in assembled
equipment. The assembled equip-
ment must also be UL tested for
series ratings.
Code Issues
The fault current contribution of
motors connected between series
rated breakers must be considered.
Article 240.86 in the NEC states that for
series ratings, the sum of the motor
full-load currents cannot exceed 1%
of the interrupting rating of the lower
rated circuit breaker. The actual fault
current contribution from induction
motors is about four times their
full-load current (impedance value of
25%). For example, if the downstream
branch circuit breakers used in a series
rated combination have an interrupt-
ing rating of 14,000A rms symmetrical
for a 480V system, the maximum
allowable motor contribution to that
panel from the branch circuit breakers
is 140A (1%). For typical induction
motors, this is equivalent to a total
horsepower at 480V of approximately
115 horsepower.
Requirements of the NEC (NFPA-70)
for series ratings may be met by
equipment marked with ratings
adequate for the available fault
current at the point of application
in the electrical system. Eaton
panelboards and switchboards
are marked consistent with NEC
Article 240.83.
Additionally, Article 110.22 requires
eld marking on equipment where
series ratings are used. This label
is supplied standard with all Eaton
panelboards and switchboards.
NEC Required Caution Label
Note: The NEC requires the installer to
properly apply and complete this label.
Label(s) must be placed on all equipment
where series ratings are used.
UL Labeled
Upstream
Overcurrent
Device
UL Labeled
Conventional
Branch
Breakers
Neutral
UL Labeled
Remote Upstream
Overcurrent
Device
UL Labeled
Conventional
Branch
Breakers
Main
Lugs
Neutral
22.0-11
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Overview
011
Fuse Application Considerations
Fuses can be used instead of circuit
breakers in fully rated, selectively
coordinated and series connected
protection systems. See the tables
on Page 22.0-17 through Page 22.0-18
for fuse breaker data applied to series
connected designs.
Dont apply fuses using the up-
over-down method, which has
been recommended by some fuse
manufacturers for sizing a current-
limiting fuse that protects a down-
stream molded-case circuit breaker
with a specied rms symmetrical
interrupting rating. The method
can lead to erroneous and unsafe
conclusions, and should not be used.
Example: Assume a specic type of
current-limiting fuse rated 2000A. Then
using the gure below:
1. Draw a vertical line from the
prospective short-circuit current of
200 kA to intersect the typical peak
let-through curve at A.
2. Draw a horizontal line left from
Point A to intersect the
prospective peak curve at B.
3. Drop a vertical line from B
to intersect the horizontal axis
and read the recommended rating,
65 kA rms, concluding that a
circuit breaker with a 65 kA
interrupting capacity will be
protected by a specied 2000A
current-limiting fuse.
This conclusion is wrong when the
downstream service has a blow-open
contact assembly, as does a molded-
case circuit breaker or similar device.
The reason: The up-over-down
method ignores dynamic impedance
(the inherent current-limiting of the
downstream molded-case circuit
breaker). Such impedance is
developed directly by the forces
of the let-through current created
when the contacts are blown open.
For proper application of current-
limiting fuses, always refer to
recommendations by the manufac-
turer of the circuit breaker, which
are based on actual test data.
Figure 22.0-6. Old Up-Over-Down Chart
Applying Series Ratings
The following is provided to use
the series rating tables on the
following pages.
Step 1. Determine the available sys-
tem voltage and fault current.
Step 2. Select the appropriate table
using the system voltage.
Step 3. Use the appropriate Series
Equipment Rating column
equal to, or greater than,
the available fault current,
to determine the allowable
combinations of main
(upstream) and branch (down-
stream) overcurrent devices.
Main devices are shown in
bold/shaded areas. Respective
branch breakers are shown
directly below their associated
main device. If a rating is not
initially found in a column, rst
look to the columns to the right
for higher Series Equipment
Ratings within the same
table. If still not found, use
ratings from table of a higher
system voltage (higher
numbered tables).
Example 1:
240V, three-phase, three-wire, AC
system with available fault current of
37,438A. Main (upstream) device is
a three-pole, 150A, FD breaker. The
branch (downstream) breakers are
two- and three-pole, 20, 30 and 60A,
240V, BAB breakers.
1. Go to the 240V table (Table 22.0-7).
2. Look down under the 42 kA
column. This rating is not shown.
3. Look to the columns to the right.
This rating is shown under the 65 kA
column, and therefore is valid.
Example 2:
480Y/277V, three-phase, four-wire, AC
62,097A. Main (upstream) device is a
three-pole, 250A, HJD breaker. The
two- and three-pole, 60, 70 and 100A
FDB breakers.
1. Go to the 480Y/277V table
(Table 22.0-10).
2. Look down under the 65 kA
column. This rating is not shown.
3. Look to the columns to the right.
This rating is still not shown.
4. Look at the table with the next
higher system voltage (480V,
Table 22.0-11).
5. This rating is shown under the 65 kA
column, and therefore is valid.
Example 3:
208Y/120V, three-phase, four-wire, AC
56,438A. Main (upstream) device is
a three-pole, 225A, ED breaker. The
single-pole, 20A BAB (120/240V), and
two- and three-pole, 70A BAB (240V).
1. Go to the 240V table (Table 22.0-7).
2. Look under the 65 kA column.
This rating is shown under the
65 kA column, and therefore is
valid for the two- and three-pole
(240V) breakers.
3. Look at the 120/240V table
(Table 22.0-6) for the single-pole
(120/240V) rating.
4. Look under the 65 kA column.
This rating is shown under the
65 kA column, and therefore
is valid for the single-pole
(120/240V) breakers.
Asymmetrical
Prospective
Peak Curve
at 15%
Power Factor
2000 Ampere
Current-limiter
Fuse Curve
B A
150,000
460,000
65,000 200,000
Prospective Short-circuit rms Amperes
Do Not Use This Method
P
r
o
s
p
e
c
t
i
v
e

P
e
a
k

L
e
t
-
t
h
r
o
u
g
h

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

i
n

A
m
p
e
r
e
s
22.0-12
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Overview
012
Other Applications of Series Ratings
Series ratings can also be applied
under the following guidelines:
Any FULLY RATED breaker can be
applied upstream, downstream, or in
the middle of, any of the series ratings
stated in the tables.
Any series rating stated in the tables
may have additional branch breakers
of the EXACT SAME TYPE further
downstream in that rating.
COMBINING SERIES RATINGS is
allowed under certain conditions.
Main and branch series ratings may
be combined if:
Breakers A, B and C are in series
respectively from main to branch.
Breakers A and B series rate together,
breakers A and C series rate at the
same interrupting rating level (or
higher), it is allowable to use A, B and
C together at the A-B series rating.
It is improper to combine series
ratings under the following condition:
Breakers A, B and C are in series
respectively from main to branch.
Breakers A and B series rate together,
breakers B and C series rate at the
same interrupting rating level (or
higher), it is NOT allowable to use A,
B and C together at the A-B or B-C
series rating. However, combining
multiple overcurrent devices as in
this example, can be accomplished if
all devices in the series combination
have been tested together and listed
in triple rating Table 22.0-19.
Main devices shown centered at top
in shaded area, respective branch
devices shown directly below.
Table 22.0-6. 120/240 VacBreaker/Breaker Series Ratings
Main devices are shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
Main
Breaker
Maximum
Amperes
Series Equipment RatingkA Symmetrical
18 22 42 65 100 200
100 EHD QBHW GB, GHB FB-P FCL
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QBAF
QBAG
QPHW BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
QBHW
QPHW
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
QBHW
QPHW
EHD
FD
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
QBHW
QPHW
GB, GHB
GHQ
EHD
FD
HFD
BA, BAB
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
125 EGH
GHQ, GHB
150 FDB
BA, BAB
HQP
QBGF
QBAF
QBAG
200 LA-P
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
EHD
FD
225 EDB EDS ED, FD, FDE EDH, EDC HFD, HFDE FDC FDC
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBHGF
QPHGF
QBHW
QPHW
QBAF
QBAG
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBHGF
QPHGF
QBHW
QPHW
QBAF
QBAG
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
QBHW
QBHGF
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
BA, BAB
HQP
QBGF
QBAF
QBAG
QBHW
QPHW
QBHGF
GB, GHB
GHQ, GHQRSP
EHD, EGS
FD
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
GB, GHB
GHQ
GHQRSP
EHD
FD
HFD
EGS
EGH
22.0-13
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Overview
013
Table 22.0-6. 120/240 VacBreaker/Breaker Series Ratings (Continued)
Not valid with CHKD.

Main
Breaker
Maximum
Amperes
18 22 42 65 100 200
250 JD, JDB HJD JDC HJD JDC JDC
BA (1570A)
BAB (1570A)
HQP (1570A)
QBHW
QPHW
EHD
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
GB, GHB
EHD
FD
EGS
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
GB, GHB
EHD
FD
HFD
EGS
EGH
400 DK, KD DK, KD HKD, CHKD DK, KD KDC HKD KDC KDC LCL
KDB KDB, CKD BA (1570A)
BAB (1570A)
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP (1570A)
QBHW
QPHW
KDB BA (1570A)
BAB (1570A)
HQP (1570A)
CHKD QBHW
QPHW
GB, GHB
EHD
FD
HFD
EGS
EGH
BA, BAB
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
QBHW
QPHW
GB, GHB
EHD
FD
HFD
BA, BAB
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP
QBGF
QPGF
QBAF
QBAG
BA (1570A)
BAB (1570A)
BABRP
BABRSP
HQP (1570A)
QBHW
QPHW
CKD GB, GHB
EHD
FD
EGS
EHD
600 CHLD, HLD
EHD
800 HMDL
EHD
1200 HND
EHD
22.0-14
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Overview
014
Table 22.0-7. 240 VacBreaker/BreakerSeries Ratings
For single- and two-pole 120/240V rated breakers (BA, BAB, HQP, QBHW, QPHW), see Table 22.0-6.
Main
Breaker
Maximum
Amperes
18 22 42 65 100 200
100 EHD QBHW_H GB, GHB FB-P FCL
BAB_H
HQP_H
QPHW_H BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
BAB_H
HQP_H
EHD
FDB
FD
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
EHD
FD, FDE
FDB
HFD, HFDE
BAB_H
HQP_H
150 FDB
BAB_H
HQP_H
200 LA-P
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
EHD
FDB
FD
JD, JDB
225 EDB EDS ED FD, FDE EDH, EDC HFD, HFDE FDC FDC
HQP_H
BAB_H
QBHW
QPHW
HQP_H
BAB_H
QBHW
QPHW
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
EHD (1570A)
FDB
BAB_H
HQP_H
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
250 JD, JDB HJD HJD JDC JDC
BAB_H (1570A)
HQP_H (1570A)
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
EHD
FDB
BAB_H (1570A)
HQP_H (1570A)
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
EHD
FD
FDB
ED
JD, JDB
EGS
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
EHD
FD, FDE
FDB
HFD, EDB, EDS
ED, HFDE
EDH
JD, JDB
HJD, EGS, EGH
22.0-15
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Overview
015
Table 22.0-8. 240 VacBreaker/BreakerSeries Ratings
Valid on two- and three-pole breakers only. Not valid for single-pole.
Not valid with CHKD.

Main
Breaker
Maximum
Amperes
65 100 200
400 DK, KD, KDB HKD, CHKD KDC KDC LCL
CKD
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
EHD
FDB
FD, EDB, EDS
ED
JD, JDB
DK, KD, KDB
EGS
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, EDB, EDS, HFDE
ED
EDH
JD, JDB
HJD
DK, KD, KDB
HKD
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB, GHB
EHD
FDB
FD, HFD, EDB, EDS
ED, FDE, HFDE
EDH
JD, JDB
HJD
DK, KD, KDB
HKD
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
EHD
FDB
500 NB-P
JD, JDB
KD, KDB, DK
CKD
600 HLD, HLDB, CHLD LDC
GB
, GHB
FD, EDB, EDS

ED, EHD
JD, JDB
KD, KDB, DK, CKD
LD, LDB
EDB, EDS, ED
EDH
800 NB-P HMDL
KD, KDB, DK EHD
FD
1200 HND, CHND NDC
EDB, EDS, ED
EHD
EDB, EDS, ED
EDH
2500 RD RDC
EDB, EDS, ED EDB, EDS, ED
EDH
22.0-16
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Overview
016
Series Rated Combinations (Continued)
Main devices shown in shaded area, respective branch devices shown directly below.
Table 22.0-9. 277 VacBreaker/Breaker Series Ratings
All ratings in this table apply to single-pole branch breakers only. For two- and three-pole branch breakers, see other tables.
Table 22.0-10. 480Y/277 VacBreaker/Breaker Series Ratings
All ratings in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers only. For single-pole branch breakers, see Table 22.0-9.
Main
Breaker
Maximum
Amperes
22 25 35 65 100 150
100 FCL
GHB
GHQ, GHQRSP
EHD
FD
HFD
125 EGS EGH
GHQ, GHB GHQ, GHB
225 FD, FDE HFD, HFDE FDC
GHB
GHQ
GHQRSP
GHB, GHQRSP
GHQ
EHD
FD
GHB
EHD
FD
HFD
250 JD, JDB JD, JDB HJD LCL JDC
GHB GHB (1550A) GHB (1550A)
EHD
FD
GHBS GHB
EHD
FD
HFD
400 KD, KDB HKD KD, KDB HKD, CHKD KDC LCL
CKD CHKD CKD GHB (1550A)
EHD
FD
GHB (1550A)
EHD
FD
HFD
GHB
EHD
FD
HFD
GHB GHB GHB (1550A)
EHD
FD
Main
Breaker
Maximum
Amperes
22 25 35 65 100 150
100 FCL
GHB, GHQRSP
125 EGS EGH
GHB GHB
GHB, GHQRSP GHB, GHQRSP GHB
250 JD, JDB JD, JDB HJD JDC
GHB GHB (1550A) GHB (1550A) GHB
400 KD, KDB HKD, CHKD KD, KDB HKD, CHKD KDC LCL
CKD GHB CKD GHB (1550A) GHB (1550A) GHB
GHB GHB (1550A)
22.0-17
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Overview
017
All ratings in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers only. Not valid for single-pole branch breakers.
Not valid with HFDE.

Main
Breaker
Maximum
Amperes
25 35 65 100 150
100 FB-P FCL
EHD
FDB
FD
HFD
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
200 LA-P
EHD
FDB
FD
HFD
JD, JDB
HJD
EHD
FDB
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
EGS
EHD, EGS, EGH

FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
250 JD, JDB HJD JDC LCL
EHD
FDB
EHD
FDB
FD
JD, JDB
EGS
EHD, EGS, EGH
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
JD, JDB
HJD
FDE, HFDE
400 KD, KDB HKD KDC LA-P LCL
EHD
FDB
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
JD, JDB
KD, KDB
EGS
EHD, EGS, EGH
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
JD, JDB
HJD
KD, KDB
HKD
JD, JDB
HJD
KD, KDB
HKD
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
JD, JDB
HJD
KD, KDB
HKD
500 NB-P
JD, JDB
HJD
KD, KDB
HKD
600 LD, LDB HLD, HLDB
CLD CHLD
JD, JDB FD, FDE
JD, JDB
KD, KDB
LD, LDB
22.0-18
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Overview
018
Main fuse class shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below.
All ratings in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers only. Not valid for single-pole branch breakers.
Table 22.0-13. 120/240 VacFuse/Breaker Series Ratings
Main
Breaker
Maximum
Amperes
18 25 35 42 50 100
225 FD HFD FDC
FDB FDB
FD
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
250 JD, JDB HJD JDC LCL
FDB FDB
FD
JD, JDB
FDB
FD
HFD
JD, JDB
HJD
FDE, HFDE
400 KD, KDB HKD, CHKD KDC KDC LCL
CKD FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
JD, JDB
HJD
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
JD, JDB
HJD
KD, KDB
HKD
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
JD, JDB
HJD
JDC
KD, KDB
HKD
KDC
FDB
FD
JD, JDB
600 LD, LDB HLD, HLDB
CLD CHLD
FD
JD, JDB
KD, KDB
LD, LDB
Main
Fuse
Maximum
Amperes
100 200
100 R
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
GB
GHB
200 R J T
GB
GHB
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
400 J T J T
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
BA, BAB
HQP
QBHW
QPHW
GB
GHB
GB
GHB
22.0-19
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Overview
019
Table 22.0-14. 240 VacFuse/Breaker Series Ratings
Valid on two- and three-pole breakers only. See Table 22.0-13 for single-pole.
Table 22.0-15. 277 Vac Fuse/Breaker Series Ratings
Main fuse class are shown centered at top, in shaded area. Respective branch devices shown directly below. All ratings
in this table apply to single-pole branch breakers only. For two- and three-pole branch breakers, consult other tables.
Main
Fuse
Maximum
Amperes
100 200
100 R
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB
GHB
200 R J T R
GB
GHB
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB
GHB
400 J T J T
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
BAB_H
HQP_H
QBHW_H
QPHW_H
GB
GHB
GB
GHB
600 L
EHD
FDB
FD, FDE
ED
JD, JDB
DK, KD, KDB
Main
Fuse
Maximum
Amperes
65 100 200
100 J T R
GHBS
GHQ
GHQRSP
GHBS
GHQ
GHQRSP
GHB
200 J T J T R
GHBS
GHQ
GHQRSP
GHBS
GHQ
GHQRSP
EHD
FD
HFD
EHD
FD
HFD
GHB
400 J T
GHB GHB
22.0-20
September 2011
Panelboards
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 22
Overview
020
Table 22.0-16. 480Y/277 VacFuse/Breaker Series Ratings
Main fuse class shown centered at top, in shaded area.
Respective branch devices shown directly below. All ratings
in this table apply to two- and three-pole branch breakers
only. For single-pole branch breakers, see Table 22.0-15.
only. Not valid for single-pole branch breakers.
only. Not valid for single-pole branch breakers.
Table 22.0-19. Triple Series Ratings
Valid on two- and three-pole breakers only. Not valid for single-pole.
Main
Fuse
Maximum
Amperes
65 100 200
100 J T R
GHBS GHBS GHB
200 J T R
GHBS GHBS GHB
400 J T
GHB GHB
600 J T
EHD
FD, FDE
HFD
FDC
HFDE
GHB
EHD
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
JD
HJD
JDC
Main
Fuse
Maximum
Amperes
100 200
100 R
EHD
200 J T
EHD
FD
HFD
FDC
EHD
FD
HFD
FDC
Main
Fuse
Maximum
Amperes
100 200
100 R
FD
HFD
FDC
200 J T R
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
JD
HJD
JDC
400 J T R
JD
HJD
JDC
JD
HJD
JDC
KD
HKD
KDC
600 J T
KD
HKD
KDC
KD
HKD
KDC
Main Fuse
Class and
Maximum
Amperes
Tenant Main
Type
Branch
Type
System
Voltage
Short-
Circuit
Series
Rating
(kA, Sym.)
L-6000 DK, KD, KDB GB, GHB, EHD
240 100
L-6000 DK, KD, KDB GB, GHB 120/240 100
L-6000 DK, KD, KDB FD
, FDB 240 100

L-6000 DK, KD, KDB JD, JDB 240 100
L-6000 JD, JDB GB, GHB 240 100
L-6000 JD, JDB GB, GHB 120/240 100
L-6000 FD GB, GHB 240 100
L-6000 FD GB, GHB 120/240 100
L-6000 FD, FDB BAB_H, HQP_H
QBHW_H, QPHW_H
240 100
L-6000 FD, FDB BA, BAB
HQP (1570A)
120/240 100
L-6000 EHD BAB_H, HQP_H 240 100
L-6000 EHD BA, BAB, HQP 120/240 100
22.1-1
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 1a
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 1a
021
Pow-R-Line 1a
Pow-R-Line 1a
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 Vac maximum
Main Lugs
100400A
Main Breakers
100400A
Branch Breakers
15100A
(Bolt-on or plug-on chassis)
Short-Circuit Current Ratings (Symmetrical)
240 Vac: 10 kA and 22 kA fully rated
240 Vac: 22200 kA series rated
Service
Three-phase, four-wire 208Y/120V
and 240/120V delta
Single-phase, three-wire 120/240V
Single-phase, two-wire 120V
Three-phase, three-wire
208 and 240V
Suitable for service entrance
applications when specied.
Mains
For available mains, refer
to Table 22.1-1.
Main breakers, 100A, Types BAB and
QBH are horizontally mounted, same
as branch breakers. All other main
breakers are vertically mounted.
Branch Circuits
For available branch devices, refer
to Table 22.1-2.
Main Lugs Only
The short-circuit rating of the MLO
assembled panelboard will be fully
rated based upon the lowest rated
branch device or may be series rated
with an approved upstream device.
Main lugs only ampere ratings:
100, 225 and 400.
Main Circuit Breakers
The short-circuit rating shown is that
of the main breaker only. The short-
circuit rating of the assembled
panelboard is the rating of the lowest
fully rated main or branch device
or the rating of an approved series
rated combination.
Table 22.1-1. Main Circuit Breakers
Table 22.1-2. Branch Circuit Breakers
HID (High Intensity Discharge) rated breaker.
Switching neutral breaker. Single-pole device requires two-pole space, two-pole device requires
three-pole space.
Solenoid operated breaker.
50A is two-pole only.
Arc fault breaker.

Refer to series rating tables beginning
on Page 22.0-12 for the approved
series rated combinations available
for the branch circuit breakers listed
in Table 22.1-2.
Breaker
Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
Interrupting
Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
at 240 Vac
100
100
100
BAB
QBHW
EHD
10
22
18
150 FDB 18
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC, FDCE
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
65
100
200
22
42
65
100
200
250
250
250
JD
HJD
JDC
65
100
200
400
400
400
400
DK
KD
HKD
KDC
65
65
100
200
400 LHH 100
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical)
120 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac
BAB, HQP
BAB, HQP
BAB, HQP
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
10
10
10
BAB-D
, HQP-D
BAB-C
, HQP-B
BABRP
BABRSP
1560
1530
1530
1530
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
QBGF, QBGFEP,
QPGF, QPGFEP
QBCAF
1550
1550
1520
1, 2
1, 2
1
10
10
10
10
10
10
QBHW
QBHW
QBHW
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
22
22
22
QBHGF, QBGFEP
QPHGF, QPHGFEP
QBHCAF
1530
1530
1520
1, 2
1, 2
1
22
22
22
22
22
22
22.1-2
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 1a
Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 1a
022
Bussing
100400A: Tin-plated aluminum
is standard, copper is available
as an option.
Boxes
Boxes are made from code-gauge
galvanized steel.
Blank ends are supplied as standard,
knockouts are available upon request.
EZ Trim
Trims are made from code-gauge steel
and painted ANSI 61 gray.
All panelboards have door-in-door
as standard with multi-point
catch and lock, and concealed
mounting hardware.
Modications
Table 22.1-3. Sub-Feed Lugs (Main Lugs Only)
Table 22.1-4. Through-Feed Lugs
Table 22.1-5. Sub-Feed Breakers
(One Per Panel)
Shunt Trips
Shunt trips are available on breakers.
BAB, HQP, QBHW and QPHW require
one additional pole space for shunt
trip, i.e., single-pole is two-pole size,
two-pole is three-pole size and three-
pole is four-pole size.
Ground Bar
Standard bolted in box. Aluminum
is standard, copper is available as
an option.
Enclosures
Types 1, 12, 3R, 4 and 4X.
Integrated onto panelboard chassis.
Box Sizing and Selection
Box size for all Type 1 panelboards
are available from Table 22.1-6.
Instructions
1. Select the rating and type of mains
required.
2. Count total number of branch
circuit poles (including spaces)
required in the panelboard. Do not
count main breaker poles. Convert
two- or three-pole branch breakers
to single-poles, i.e., three-pole
breaker, count as three poles.
Note: For horizontal mounted mains
(BAB Type), use main lug table, include
space in branch section for mains.
3. Using correct table, type of mains
and ampere rating per Step 1, nd
total number of poles.
Note: Where total number of poles (Step 2)
fall between number in table, use the next
higher number.
4. Read box size across columns to
the right.
Top and Bottom Gutters (Minimum)
5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Side Gutters
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide box:
6.50 inches (165.1 mm).
Ampere Rating Panel Height
Addition
100
225
0 Inches (0 mm)
0 Inches (0 mm)
Ampere Rating Information
100
225
400
See Table 22.1-6
See Table 22.1-6
See Table 22.1-6
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
at 240V
150 FDB 18
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
FD
HFD
FDC
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
65
100
200
22
42
65
100
200
250
250
250
JD
HJD
JDC
65
100
200
400
400
400
400
DK
KD
HKD
KDC
65
65
100
200
22.1-3
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 1a
023
Table 22.1-6. Type 1 PanelboardsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Greater than 42 branch circuit panelboards are available for jurisdiction governed by the 2008 National Electrical Code.
Smaller panelboard box sizes are available if required. Contact Eaton for application information.
Add 8.00 inches (203.2 mm) for SPD.
28.00-inch (711.2) optional width is available for panelboards with high circuit counts.
For horizontal mounted mains (BAB Type), use main lug table, include space in branch
section for mains.
JD, HJD, JDC is same space requirement as 400A DK, HKD, KDC.
Ampere Rating
of Mains
Main Breaker Type
Mounting Position
Maximum Number
of Branch Circuits
Including Provisions
Box Dimensions
Height Width Depth

100A
100A
Main lugs or main breaker

EHD, FDB, FD, FDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
100A

with 100A through-feed lugs
or sub-feed breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
225A
225A

EDB, EDS, ED
EDH, EDC
Vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
225A

with 225A or 100A sub-feed
lugs or breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDE
FDC, EDB, EDS, HFDE, FDCE
ED, EDH, EDC
Vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
400A
400A
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC, LHH
Vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
400A
with 225A or 100A sub-feed
lugs or breaker
DK, KD, HKD
KDC, LHH
Vertical
Mains 18
30
42
48
54
60
72
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
EHD, FDB, FD
HFD, FDC
EDB, EDS, ED
EDH, EDC
Vertical
Sub-feed
breakers
22.1-4
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
024
22.2-1
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 2a
025
Pow-R-Line 2a
Pow-R-Line 2a
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage:
240 Vac maximum
480Y/277 Vac maximum
Note: PRL2a panelboards are suitable for
use on three-phase, three-wire applications
when derived from a three-phase, four-wire
480Y/277 Vac service where the neutral is
not brought to the panelboard. For three-
phase, three-wire 480 Vac Delta services use
a PRL3a panelboard.
250 Vdc maximum
Main Lugs:
100400A
Main Breakers:
100400A
Branch Breakers:
15100A (bolt-on)
240 Vac: 65 kA fully rated
480Y/277 Vac: 14 kA fully rated
480Y/277 Vac: 22150 kA series rated
250 Vdc: 10 kA and 14 kA fully rated
Service
and 240/120 V Delta and 480Y/277V
Three-phase, three-wire 208
and 240V
Two-wire 125 Vdc
Two-wire 250 Vdc
Mains
For available mains, refer to Table 22.2-1.
The GHB main breaker is horizontally
mounted, same as branch breakers.
All other main breakers are vertically
mounted.
Branch Circuits
For available branch devices, refer to
Table 22.2-2.
Main Lugs Only
100, 225 and 400.
of the main breaker only. The short
circuit rating of the assembled panel-
board is the rating of the lowest fully
rated main or branch device or the
rating of an approved series rated
combination.
For use on 480Y/277 Vac systems only.


series rated combinations available for
the branch circuit breakers listed in
Table 22.2-2.
Breaker Frame
(Amperes)
Breaker
Type
240 Vac 480Y/277 Vac 125/250 Vdc
100
100
GHB
EHD
65
18
14
14
14
10
150 FDB 18 14 10
225
225
225
225
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC, FDCE
ED
65
100
200
65
35
65
100
10
22
22
250
250
250
250
250
EDH
EDC
JD
HJD
JDC
100
200
65
100
200
35
65
100
10
22
22
400
400
400
400
400
DK
KD
HKD
LHH
KDC
65
65
100
100
200
35
65
65
100
10
10
22
22
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
120 Vac 240 Vac 277 Vac 480Y/277 Vac 125/250 Vdc
GHB
GHB
GHQ
15100
15100
1520
1
2, 3
1
65
65
65
14
14
14
14
14
HGHB
GHQRSP
GHBGFEP
1530
1520
1560
1
1, 2
1
65
65
65
25
14
14
14
22.2-2
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 2a
Technical DataPow-R-Line 2a
026
Technical Data
Bussing
100400A: Tin-plated aluminum is
standard, copper is available
as an option.
Boxes
galvanized steel.
EZ Trim
All panelboards have door-in-door as
standard with multi-point catch and
lock, and concealed mounting
hardware.
Modications
Table 22.2-5. Sub-Feed Breakers
(One Per Panel)
Amperes Panel Height
Addition
100
225
0 Inches (0 mm)
0 Inches (0 mm)
Amperes Information
100
225
400
See Table 22.2-6
See Table 22.2-6
See Table 22.2-6
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
240V 480Y/277V
150 FDB 18 14
225
225
225
FD
HFD
FDC
65
100
200
35
65
100
225
225
225
ED
EDH
EDC
65
100
200
250
250
250
JD
HJD
JDC
65
100
200
35
65
100
400
400
400
KD
HKD
KDC
65
100
200
35
65
100
Shunt Trips
GHB breakers with shunt trips require
three-pole frame.
Ground Bar
is standard. Copper is available as
an option.
Enclosures
Types 1, 12, 3R, 4/4X.
Box size for all Type 1 panelboards are
available from Table 22.2-6.
Instructions
1. Using description on the required
panelboard, select the rating and
type of mains required.
required in the panelboard. Do
not count main breaker poles.
Convert two- or three-pole branch
breakers to single-poles. i.e.,
three-pole breaker, count as
three poles.
(GHB Type), use main lug table, include
higher number.
the right.
Top and Bottom Gutters (minimum)
5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Side Gutters
5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
22.2-3
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 2a
Technical DataPow-R-Line 2a
027
For horizontal mounted mains (GHB Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section
for mains.
JD, HJD, JDC is same space requirements as 400A DK, HKD, KDC.
Ampere
Rating
of Mains
Main Breaker Type
Mounting
Position
Maximum
Number
of Branch
Circuits
Including
Provisions
Box Dimensions
Height Width Depth

100A Panelboards
100A
Main lugs or
main breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
100A

or sub-feed breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE,
Vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
225A Panelboards
225A
Main lugs or
main breaker
ED, EDH, EDC, FDE
FD, HFD, FDC, HFDE, FDCE
vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
225A

with 225 or 100A through-feed
lugs or sub-feed breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE,
ED, EDH, EDC
vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
400A Panelboards
400A
Main lugs or
main breaker
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC, LHH
vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
400A
Main lugs or main
breaker with 225 or
100A through-feed lugs
or sub-feed breaker
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC, LHH
Vertical
Main 18
30
42
48
54
60
72
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
EHD, FDB, FD,
HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
vertical
Sub-feed
breaker
22.2-4
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
028
22.3-1
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 3a
029
Pow-R-Line 3a
Pow-R-Line 3a
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 Vac maximum
480 Vac maximum
600 Vac maximum
250 Vdc maximum
Main Lugs
100800A
Main Breakers
100600A
Branches
240 Vac 15225A
480 Vac 15225A
600 Vac 15225A (bolt-on)
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical)
250 Vdc: 1022 kA fully rated
Service
Three-phase, four-wire 208Y/120V,
240/120V delta and 480Y/277V
Three-phase, three-wire 240, 480
and 600V
Two-wire 125 Vdc
Two-wire 250 Vdc
Mains
Main breakers, 100, 150 and 225A,
Types EHD, FD, FDE, FDB, HFD, HFDE
and FDC may be horizontally mounted,
same as branch breakers. All other
main breakers are vertically mounted.
Branch Circuits
to Table 22.3-2.
Main Lugs Only
100, 250, 400, 600 and 800.
rated main or branch device, or the
combination.
100,000 AIC based on NEMA test procedure.
100% rated breaker. Requires copper bus. Not available in Type 12, 4 or 4X enclosure.
Breaker Frame
(Amperes)
Breaker
Type
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc
100
100
100
EHD
FCL
FB-P
18
200
200
14
150
200
200
10
150 FDB 18 14 14 10
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC, FDCE
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
65
100
200
22
42
65
100
200
35
65
100
18
25
35
10
22
22
250
250
250
JD
HJD
JDC
65
100
200
35
65
100
18
25
35
10
22
22
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
DK
KD
HKD
LHH
KDC
LCL
LA-P
65
65
100
100
200
200
200
35
65
65
100
200
200
25
35
65
200
10
10
22
22
600
600
400
400
600
600
600
600
600
600
LGE
LGH
LGC
LGU
LD
HLD
LDC
CLD
CHLD
CLDC
65
100
200
200
65
100
200
65
100
200
35
65
100
150
35
65
100
35
65
100
18
35
50
65
25
35
50
25
35
50
22
22
42
50
22
25
25
22
25
25
22.3-2
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 3a
030
in Table 22.3-2.
three-pole space.
Arc fault breaker.
Single-pole breaker rated 277 Vac.

Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) Volts
120
Vac
120/240
Vac
240
Vac
480
Vac
600
Vac
125
Vdc
250
Vdc
BAB
BAB
BAB
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
10
10
10
BAB-D
BAB-C
BABRP
BABRSP
1560
1530
1530
1530
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
QBGF, QBGFEP
QBCAF
1550
1520
1, 2
1
10
10
10
10
QBHW
QBHW
QBHW
QBHGF, QBHGFEP
QBHCAF
1570
15100
15100
1550
1520
1
2
2, 3
1, 2
1
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
GHB
GHB
15100
15100
1
2, 3
65
65
14
14
14
14
GHQ
1520 1 65 14
HGHB
1530 1 65 25
GHBGFEP
GHQRSP
1560
1520
1
1, 2
65
65
65
65
14
14
14
EHD
EHD
15100
15100
1
2, 3
14
18
14
14
10
10
FDB 15150 2, 3 18 14 14 10
FD
FD, FDE
15100
15225
1
2, 3
65
65
35
35
18
10
10
HFD
HFD, HFDE
15100
15225
1
2, 3
65
100
65
65
25
10
22
FDC, FDCE 15225 2, 3 200 100 35 22
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
100225
100225
100225
100225
100225
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
22
42
65
100
200
10
10
10
10
10

22.3-3
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 3a
031
Bussing
Tin-plated aluminum is standard,
copper is available as an option.
Density rated bus is also available
as an option.
Boxes
galvanized steel.
EZ Trim
mounting hardware.
Modications
Note: Sub-feed breakers and through-feed
lugs cannot be supplied in the same panel.
Table 22.3-5. Sub-Feed Breakers (One Per Panel)
Note: Sub-feed breakers and through-feed
lugs cannot be supplied in the same panel.
Note: Twin mounted J-Frame sub-feed
breakers are available. Requires 20X panel
height addition.
Ampere Rating Added Panel Height
100
250
0X
1X
Ampere Rating Added Panel Height
100
250
400
600
2X
5X
8X
8X
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type
Interrupting
Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
Added
Panel
Height
240 V 480 V
225/250
225/250
225/250
JD
HJD
JDC
65
100
200
35
65
100
14X
400
400
400
KD
HKD
KDC
65
100
200
35
65
100
15X
600
600
600
LD
HLD
LDC
65
100
200
35
65
100
17X
Shunt Trips
BAB and QBHW require one additional
pole space for shunt trip, i.e., single-
pole is two-pole size, two-pole is
three-pole size and three-pole is
four-pole size. GHB breakers with
shunt trip require three-pole frame.
Remote Control Switches
ASCO 920 can be bus connected
and mounted in panel for main or
sub-main (split-bus) applications.
Time Clocks
Time clocks are mounted at the top or
bottom of the panel, either in extended
end gutters or in a separate enclosure
under a separate door.
Ground Bar
an option.
Enclosures
Types 12, 3R, 4/4X.
Note: Type 12, 3R, 4/4X enclosures are
not available for 800A applications.
All mains: 5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Side Gutters (Minimum)
4.00 inches (101.6 mm).
Table 22.3-6. Type 1 Box SizesDimensions in Inches (mm)
Maximum
Panel Height
X Units
Box Dimensions
Height Width Depth
100400A
14X
23X
31X
40X
53X
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
600800A
23X
31X
40X
53X
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
22.3-4
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 3a
032
Panel Layout Instructions
1. Select:
a. Required mains (lugs or
breaker).
b. Neutral where required.
c. Branch circuits as required.
2. Layout panel as shown in
Table 22.3-7, using appropriate
X dimensions.
3. Using total X units (panel height)
nd box height in inches from
Table 22.3-6. (When total X units
come out to an uneven number,
use next highest number, i.e., if
total X comes out 25X, use 31X.)
Table 22.3-7. Layout Example
GHB, GHQ and HGHB breakers cannot be mixed on same connector as BAB, QBHW.
Sizing shown is for 100% rated neutral with

mechanical lugs. For 200% rated neutral with mechanical lugs, add 3X. For special lug arrange-
ments, contact Eaton.
Maximum of six breakers per panel.
Add 5X for 200 kA maximum SPD.
Horizontally mounted 15225A main

breakers EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, may be furnished as branch breaker construction. Branch
breakers single-, two- or three-pole as required, may be located opposite these main breakers
(150A maximum).
FB-P and LA-P top mounting only.
LCL, LA-P main breaker requires 6.50 inch (165.1 mm) deep box.
Poles
3X-6
5X-12
8X-18
10X-24
13X-30
15X-36
18X-42
BAB
QBGF
QBHW
QBHGF
QBGFEP
QBCAF
GHB
GHQ
HGHB
QBHGF
QBHCAF
GHBGFEP
GHQRSP
Multiple selections
may be used on panel.

Single-pole Single-pole 1X
2X
3X
EHD
FDB
FD,FDE (150A
HFD, HFDE maximum)
FDC
Two-pole Two-pole
Single-pole Three-pole
Two-pole
Neutral selection
5X 100, 250A
8X 400, 600, 800A
Two- and three-pole 3X, EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, FDE, EDC
, FD, HFD, FDC, HFDE

(225A maximum)
Main lug section 2X 100A
5X 250A
8X 400, 600A
14X800A
Surge protective device

Main breaker
section
Horizontal
mounting
2X two-pole
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC
, EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC

3X three-pole
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDE, FDC
, HFDE, EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC

Vertically
mounted
7X EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, FDE, HFDE
9X FCL, FB-P
14X JD, HJD, JDC

15X DK, KD, HKD, KDC, LHH
17X LD, HLD, LDC, CLD, CHLD, CLDC
18X LGE, LGH, LGC, LGU
21X LCL
, LA-P

22.3-5
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 3E
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 3E
033
Pow-R-Line 3E
Pow-R-Line 3E
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 Vac maximum
480 Vac maximum
250 Vdc maximum
Main Lugs
100600A
Main Breakers
100600A
Branches
240 Vac 15125A
480 Vac 15125A
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical)
480 Vac:1865 kA fully rated
Service
240/120V delta and 480Y/277V
240 and 480V
Two-wire 125 Vdc
Two-wire 250 Vdc
Mains
Main breakers, 100, 150 and 225A,
Types EG, EHD, FD, FDE, FDB, HFD,
HFDE and FDC may be horizontally
mounted, same as branch breakers.
All other main breakers are vertically
mounted.
Branch Circuits
to Table 22.3-9.
Main Lugs Only
100, 250, 400 and 600.
panelboard is the rating of the
lowest fully rated main or branch
device, or the rating of an approved
series rated combination.
Horizontally/branch mounted.
Applicable to single-pole devices only.

in Table 22.3-9.
Breaker Frame
(Amperes)
Breaker
Type
240 Vac 480 Vac 250 Vdc
125
125
125
EGB
EGS
EGH
35
100
200
18
35
65
10
35
42
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
22
42
65
100
200
65
100
200
35
65
100
10
22
22
400
400
400
400
400
DK
KD
HKD
LHH
KDC
65
65
100
100
200
35
65
65
100
10
22
22
600
600
LGE
LGH
65
100
35
65
22
22
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
120 Vac
240 Vac 277 Vac
480 Vac 250 Vdc

EGB
EGS
EGH
15125
15125
15125
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3
35
100
200
35
100
200
18
35
65
18
35
65
10
35
42
22.3-6
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 3E
Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 3E
034
Bussing
as an option.
Boxes
galvanized steel.
EZ Trim
mounting hardware.
Modications
Table 22.3-10. Through-Feed Lugs,
Sub-Feed Lugs (Main Lug Panels Only)
and Sub-Feed Breakers (One Per Panel)
Shunt Trips
Shunt trips are available on two- and
three-pole breakers.
Ground Bar
an option.
Enclosures
Types 1, 12, 3R, 4/4X.
For complete product description
and available ratings, refer to Tab 34.
Instructions
breakers to single-poles, i.e.,
three poles.
(GHB Type), use main lug table, include
higher number.
the right.
5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Side Gutters
5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
All Table 22.3-11
22.3-7
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 2a
Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 3E
035
For horizontal mounted mains (EG Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section for mains.
Ampere Rating
of Mains
Main Breaker Type
Mounting Position
Maximum Number
of Branch Circuits
Box Dimensions
Height Width Depth

125A Panelboards
125A

EHD, FDB, FD, FDE
HFD, FDC, HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
125A

or sub-feed breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE,
HFD, FDC, HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
225A Panelboards
225A
ED, EDH, EDC, FDE
FD, HFD, FDC, HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
225A
Main lugs or main breaker with
225 or 100A through-feed lugs
or sub-feed breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE,
HFD, FDC, HFDE
ED, EDH, EDC
Vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
400A Panelboards
400A
DK, KD, LHH
HKD, KDC
Vertical
18
30
42
48
54
60
72
84
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
400A
Main lugs or main breaker with
225 or 100A through-feed lugs
or sub-feed breaker
DK, KD, LHH
HKD, KDC
Vertical
Main 18
30
42
48
54
60
72
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
EHD, FDB, FD,
HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
Vertical
Sub-feed
breaker
600A Panelboards
600A
LGS, LGH, LGC
Vertical
30
42
48
54
60
72
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
22.3-8
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
036
22.4-1
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 4
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 4
037
Pow-R-Line 4
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240V, 480V or 600 Vac maximum
600 Vdc maximum
Main Lugs
2501200A
Main Breakers
2501200A
Main Switches
2001200A
Branches (Bolt-On)
Breakers 151200A
Fusible switches 301200A
Service
240/120V delta and 480Y/277V
Three-phase, three-wire 120, 240,
480 and 600V
Two-wire 125 Vdc
Two-wire 250 Vdc
Two-wire 600 Vdc
PRL4B
Circuit Breaker
Panelboard
PRL4F
Fusible
Panelboard
Bussing
2501200A tin-plated aluminum is
standard, copper is available as an
option. Density rated bus is also
available as an option.
Main Lugs Only
250, 400, 600, 800 and 1200.
fully rated main or branch device, or
the rating of an approved series rated
combination.
Table 22.4-1. Main Circuit BreakersType PRL4B
100% rated circuit breaker.

Breaker Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc 600 Vdc
250
250
250
250
250
JD
HJD
JDC
LCL
HJDDC
65
100
200
200
35
65
100
200
18
25
35
10
22
22
42
35
350
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
NHH
DK
KD
CKD
LHH
HKD
CHKD
KDC
LCL
LA-P
HKDDC
100
65
65
65
100
100
100
200
200
200
65
35
35
65
65
65
100
200
200
35
25
25
35
35
35
65
200
10
10
10
42
22
22
22
42
65
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
LGE
LGH
LGC
LGU
LD
CLD
HLD
CHLD
LDC
CLDC
HLDDC
65
100
200
200
65
65
100
100
200
200
35
65
100
150
35
35
65
65
100
100
18
35
50
65
25
25
35
35
50
50
22
22
42
50
22
22
25
25
25
25
42
35
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
800
MDL
CMDL
HMDL
CHMDL
ND
CND
HND
CHND
NDC
CNDC
NB-P
HMDLDC
65
65
100
100
65
65
100
100
200
200
200
50
50
65
65
50
50
65
65
100
100
200
25
25
35
35
25
25
35
35
65
65
200
22
22
25
25
42
35
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
ND
CND
HND
CHND
NDC
CNDC
NBDC
65
65
100
100
200
200
50
50
65
65
100
100
25
25
35
35
65
65
42
50
22.4-2
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 4
Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 4
038
Main Fusible Switches
of the main switch only. The short-
boards is the rating of the lowest fully
combination. (Fuses are not included.)
400 and 600A switches with shunt trip
will be rated 100 kA.
Note: Circuit breaker panelboards
are designated PRL4B. Fusible Switch
panelboards are designated PRL4F.
Table 22.4-2. Main Fusible Switches
Single-pole breaker rated 277 Vac.
At 480V, use on 480Y/277 Vac system only.
Three-pole only.
100% rated breaker. Requires copper bus.

K- and N-Frame breakers require density
rated copper bus. Not available in Type 12,
4 and 4X enclosures.
Switch
Rating
Amperes
Fuse
Class
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
240 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc
Switches Rated 240 Vac, 250 Vdc
200
400
600
800
1200
R, T
R, T
R, T
L
L
200
200
200
200
200
10
10
Switches Rated 600 Vac

200
400
600
800
1200
R, J, T
R, J, T
R, J, T
L
L
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
120 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 600 Vdc
BAB
BAB
BAB
QBGF, QBGFEP
1570
15100
15100
1550
1
2
2, 3
1, 2
10
10
10
10
10
QBHW
QBHW
QBHW
QBHGF, QBHGFEP
1570
15100
15100
1530
1
2
2, 3
1, 2
22
22
22
22
22
GHB
GHB
15100
15100
1
2, 3
65
65
14
14
14
14
GHQ
1520 1 65 14
HGHB
1530 1 65 25
GHBGFEP 1560 1 65
EHD
EHD
15100
15100
1
2, 3
14
18
14
14
10
10
FDB 15150 2, 3 18 14 14 10
FD
FD, FDE
15100
15225
1
2, 3
65
65
35
35
18
10
10
HFD
HFD, HFDE
HFDDC
15100
15225
15150
1
2, 3
2,3
65
100
65
65
25
10
42
22
42
35
FDC, FDCE 15225 2, 3 200 100 35 22
FB-P 15100 2, 3 200 200 200

EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
100225
100225
100225
100225
100225
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
22
42
65
100
200
10
10
10
10
10
JD
HJD
JDC
HJDDC
LCL
70250
70250
70250
70250
125250
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
65
100
200
200
35
65
100
200
18
25
35
42
10
22
22
42
35
NHH
DK
KD
CKD
HKD
LHH
CHKD
KDC
150350
250400
100400
100400
100400
125400
100400
100400
3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2, 3
100
65
65
100
100
100
100
200
65
35
65
65
65
65
100
35
25
35
35
35
35
65
10
10
22
22
42
22
22
HKDDC
LCL
LA-P
100400
200400
125400
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
200
200
200
200
200
42
42
35

22.4-3
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 4
Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 4
039
Table 22.4-3. Branch Circuit Breakers (Continued)
100% rated breaker. Requires copper bus. K- and N-Frame breakers require density rated copper bus. Not available in Type 12, 4 and 4X enclosures.

Table 22.4-4. Branch Fusible Switches (Fuses are not included)
Note: Twin branch switches of different ampere ratings are available,
i.e., 30/60, 30/100, 60/100.
Circuit Breaker Trip Units
Circuit breakers will have thermal-magnetic trip units with
the following exceptions:
100% rated breakers and all N-Frame breakers have
Digitrip RMS 310 solid-state trip units as standard
K-, L- and M-Frame three-pole circuit breakers are option-
ally available with the Digitrip RMS 310 solid-state trip unit
The trip function options for the Digitrip RMS 310 include
LS and LSI. Main circuit breakers can also include the LSG
and LSIG integral ground fault trip functions
Digitrip OPTIM trip units are not available in panelboard
construction
Refer to the series rating tables beginning on Page 22.0-12
for the approved series rated combinations available for
the branch circuit breakers listed in Table 22.4-3.
Modications
Enclosures
Types 12, 3R, 4/4X.
Ground Bar
Standard bolted in box with (3) #6300 kcmil terminals.
Aluminum is standard, copper is available as an option.
Trims
Trim with door is available as an option for Type 1 enclosures.
Integrated onto panelboard chassis. For complete product
description and available ratings, refer to Tab 34.
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
120 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 600 Vdc
LGE
LGH
LGC
LGU
LD
CLD
HLD
CHLD
LDC
CLDC
HLDDC
250600
250600
250600
250600
300600
300600
300600
300600
300600
300600
300600
3
3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
65
100
200
200
65
65
100
100
200
200
35
65
100
150
35
35
65
65
100
100
18
35
50
65
25
25
35
35
50
50
42
22
22
42
50
22
22
25
25
25
25
42
35
MDL
CMDL
HMDL
CHMDL
HMDLDC
300800
300800
300800
300800
300800
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
65
65
100
100
50
50
65
65
25
25
35
35
42
22
22
25
25
42
35
ND
CND
HND
CHND
NDC
CNDC
400800
400800
400800
400800
400800
400800
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
65
65
100
100
200
200
35
35
65
65
100
100
25
25
35
35
65
65
NB-P
NBDC
400800
7001200
2, 3
2, 3
200
200
200
42
42
50
ND
CND
HND
CHND
NDC
CNDC
6001200
6001200
6001200
6001200
6001200
6001200
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
2, 3
3
65
65
100
100
200
200
35
35
65
65
100
100
25
25
35
35
65
65
Switch
Rating
Amperes
Mounting Fuse
Class
240V 600V 250 Vdc
Switches Rated 240 Vac, 250 Vdc
30/30
60/60
100/100
200/200
100
200
400
600
800
1200
Twin
Twin
Twin
Twin
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
R
R
R
R, T
R
R, T
R, T
R, T
L
L
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Switches Rated 600 Vac

30/30
60/60
100/100
200/200
100
200
400
600
800
1200
Twin
Twin
Twin
Twin
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
R, J
R, J
R, J
J, T
R, J
R, J, T
R, J, T
R, J, T
L
L
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
22.4-4
September 2011
Panelboards
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 22
Pow-R-Line 4
Panelboard Layout and DimensionsPow-R-Line 4B
040
Main Lug (MLO), Main Breaker, Neutral, Through-Feed (TFL) and Sub-Feed Lug (SFL) X Space Requirements
(For compression lugs, or other congurations not shown, refer to Eaton.)
= Blank means no bus under cover to meet NEC cable bending space.
Figure 22.4-1. X Space RequirementsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Sub-feed lugs are available 250600A. For 600A use 1200A X space.
Sub-feed lugs are available 250600A. For 600A use 1200A X space.
Through
Feed Lugs
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
10X
MLO, SFL
Branch
Devices
MLO, TFL
10X
7X
3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W
Through
Feed Lugs
3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W
12X
MLO
Branch
Devices
MLO, TFL
12X
7X
2X Blank
250A, 400A,
600A & 800A
7X
Branch
Devices
3Ph 4W
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
Main
Breaker
Main
Breaker
16X
3Ph 3W 3Ph 4W
3Ph 3W
88A Vertically Mtd.
MDS Main Breaker
only, in 24" wide
box. Available with
38X and 50X Panel
Height only
3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W
Blank
7X
2X
Branch
Devices
Main
Breaker
Blank
Branch
Devices
Main
Breaker
2X
2X Blank
(36 In. Minimum
Width)
1200A
250A , 400A ,
600A & 800A
(36 In. Minimum
Width)
1200A
-
-
250A , 400A ,
600A and 800A
800A Vertically Mtd.
MDL Main Breaker
only, in 24.00-inch
(609.6 mm) wide
box. Available with
38X and 50X Panel
Height only.
Through-
Feed Lugs
36.00-inch
(914.4 mm)
Minimum
Width
Standard Main Lug, Through-Feed and
Sub-Feed Lugs
(500 kcmil Maximum)

Main Breaker with Neutral (when required)
(500 kcmil Maximum)
36-inch
(914.4 mm)
Minimum
Width
Through-
Feed Lugs
19X
250A, 400A,
600A and 800A
1200A 1200 A
MLO, SFL
20X
Branch
Devices
Through
Feed Lugs Blank
3Ph 4W
(36 In. Minimum
Width)
1200A
250A , 400A ,
600A & 800A
(36 In. Minimum
Width)
1200A
3X
20X
9X
Branch
Devices
13X
9X
13X
9X
15X
5X
15X
11X
20X
5X
20X
11X
Through
Feed Lugs
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
Blank
Branch
Devices
Blank
Branch
Devices
Blank
Through
Feed Lugs
Branch
Devices
3Ph 3W
3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W
MLO, TFL
MLO MLO, TFL
Branch
Devices
250A
, 400A
,
600A
and 800A
Through-
Feed Lugs
Through-
Feed Lugs
3X
Optional Main Lugs, Through-Feed and
Sub-Feed Lugs
(750 kcmil Maximum)

36.00-inch
(914.4 mm)
Minimum
Width
36.00-inch
(914.4 mm)
Minimum
Width
Through-
Feed Lugs
Through-
Feed Lugs
1200A 1200A
22.4-5
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 4
041
Breaker (PRL4B) Type Distribution
Panelboards 600 Vac, 250 Vdc
Panelboard Layout and Dimensions
To determine the dimensions of a
given panelboard enclosure, make
a layout sketch by tting together
the main branch and lug modules
according to the appropriate tables in
the layout guide. Assign X units to
each module as shown and obtain a
total X number.
The height of the enclosure is related
to the total X units in the layout as
shown in Figure 22.4-3. Three standard
box heights are available to accommo-
date any and all layout arrangements.
X unit totals that do not exactly
match those in Table 22.4-5 must be
rounded off to the next higher standard
(26X, 38X, 50X).
When a calculated X total for a panel
exceeds 50X, the panel must be split
into two or more separate sections
with X space for through-feed lugs
gured in for all but one section. If a
neutral is required, a separate neutral
bar and appropriate X space must
be included in each section.
Layout Example
1 PRL4B panelboard, 480Y/277V,
three-phase, four-wire, 65 kA,
800A, main lug, consisting of:
12 20A/single-pole HFD
2 250A/three-pole HJD
1 400A/three-pole HKD
Note: For SPD unit, add 7X up to 200 kA and
10X for SPD above 200 kA.
1. From layout guide, total X
height of panel = 26X, (which is a
design standard and no rounding
off is necessary).
2. From Table 22.4-5, enclosure
height for 26X panel = 57.00 inches
(1447.8 mm).
3. Width = 24.00 inches (609.6 mm)
directly from layout guide.
4. Total enclosure depth = 11.30
inches (287.0 mm)standard
for all PRL4 panelboards.
20A/1P 20A/1P 1X
20A/1P 20A/1P 1X
20A/1P 20A/1P 1X
20A/1P 20A/1P 1X
20A/1P 20A/1P 1X
20A/1P 20A/1P 1X
250A/3P 3X
250A/3P 3X
400A/3P 4X
Main Lugs 800A 10X
Neutral
TOTAL = 26X
22.4-6
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 4
042
Table 22.4-5. Standard Panelboard and Box
Box depth is 10.40 inches (264.2 mm),

cover adds 0.90 inches (22.9 mm) for overall
enclosure depth of 11.30 inches (287.0 mm).
800A maximum bus size in

24.00 inches (609.6 mm) wide box.
Note: Flush trims available on PRL4B panels
with Door-in-Door enclosure only.
10.62 inches (269.9 mm)
Side Gutters (Minimum)
5.00 inches (127.0 mm)
6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
8.00 inches (203.2 mm)
Panel
Height
Box
Height
Box
Width
Box
Depth
26X
38X
50X
57.00 (1447.8)
73.50 (1866.9)
90.00 (2286.0)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
10.40 (264.2)
10.40 (264.2)
10.40 (264.2)
38X
50X
73.50 (1866.9)
90.00 (2286.0)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
10.40 (264.2)
10.40 (264.2)
38X
50X
73.50 (1866.9)
90.00 (2286.0)
44.00 (1117.6)
44.00 (1117.6)
10.40 (264.2)
10.40 (264.2)
Figure 22.4-3. Layout for Branch and Horizontally Mounted Main Devices
BAB and QBHW breakers with shunt trips require one additional pole space, i.e., single-pole
is two-pole size, two-pole is three-pole size, and three-pole is four-pole size.
If panel contains only BAB or QBHW branch breakers, use a PRL1a panelboard.
GHB, HGHB or GHQ breakers cannot be mixed on same subchassis as BAB, QBHW.
If panel contains only GHB, HGHB or GHQ branch breakers, use a PRL2a panelboard.
When only one single-pole breaker of the group is required on either side of chassis,
the single-pole breaker space required changes from 1X to 2X.
Minimum 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide box is required if optional #6300 kcmil lug is required.
MDL main breaker in 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide box, refer to Figure 22.4-1.
Optional 750 kcmil terminal requires 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box.
Note: See Page 22.4-4 for MLO or Neutral and Vertically Mounted Mains space requirements.
Breaker To Fusible Transition, All Widths
3X
3X
6X
6X
4X
6X
1X
12X
20X
1X
2X
3X
2X
6X
3X
3X
4X
Filler
Sub Panel
400A Maximum Bus Rating
1P 1P
2P 2P
3P 3P
2P 2P
3P 3P
2 or 3P
2 or 3P
2 or 3P
L
o
a
d
2 or 3P 2 or 3P
2 or 3P 2 or 3P
2 or 3P
2 or 3P
2 or 3P 2 or 3P
2 or 3P
EHD,
FDB, FD, FDE, HFDE
HFD, FDC, FDCE
18
Poles
100A
Max.
DK, KD, HKD,
KDC
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC
JD, HJD, JDC, HJDDC
250A
Max.
400A
Max.
DK, KD, HKD, KDC, LHH,
CKD, CHKD, HKDDC
600A
Max.
LD, HLD, CLD, CHLD, LDC, HLDDC
SPD
(7X through 200 kA)
(10X through 400 kA)
100A
Max.
FCL, FB-P, HFDDC
250A
Max.
JD, HJD, JDC
400A
Max.
LCL, LA-P, NHH
MDL, HMDL, HMDLDC
CMDL, CHMDL
ND, HND, NDC
400A
Max.
800A
Max.
NB-P
4
4
-
I
n
c
h

(
1
1
1
7
.
6

m
m
)

W
i
d
e

B
o
x
2
4
.
0
0
-
I
n
c
h

(
6
0
9
.
6

m
m
)

W
i
d
e

B
o
x
3
6
.
0
0
-
I
n
c
h

(
9
1
4
.
4

m
m
)

W
i
d
e

B
o
x
1200A
Max.
CND, CHND, CNDC, NBDC
42
Poles
3P
L
o
a
d4X
600A
Max.
7X
10X
LGE, LGH, LGC, LGU
Breaker may be used as main.
22.4-7
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 4
Panelboard Layout and DimensionsPow-R-Line 4F
043
Main Lug (MLO), Main Switch, Neutral Through-Feed Lug (TFL) and Sub-Feed Lug (SFL) X Space Requirements
(For other congurations refer to Eaton.)
= Blank means no bus under cover to meet NEC cable bending space.
Sub-feed lugs are available 250600A, for 600A use 1200A X space.
800 and 1200A mains available only in vertical mounting.

Sub-feed lugs are available 250600A, for 600A use 1200A X space.
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
10X
MLO, SFL
Branch
Devices
MLO, TFL
10X
7X
3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W
Through-
Feed Lugs
3Ph 4W, 3Ph 3W
12X
MLO
Branch
Devices
MLO, TFL
12X
7X
2X Blank
200A, 400A,
600A
7X
Branch
Devices
3Ph 4W
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
Main
Switch
Main
Switch
22X
3Ph 3W 3Ph 4W
3Ph 3W
400A and 600A
Vertically Mounted
Main Switch.
36.00- (914.4 mm)
or 44.00-inch
(1117.6 mm)
Wide Box.
36.00- (914.4 mm)
or 44.00-inch
(1117.6 mm)
Wide Box.
3Ph 4W
800A 25X
1200A 26X
7X
Branch
Devices
800A ,
1200A
1200A 800A and 1200A
Vertically Mounted
Main Switch.
7X
250A
, 400A
,
600A
and 800A
Standard Main Lugs, Through-Feed Lugs
and Sub-Feed Lugs (500 kcmil Maximum)
Main Switch with Neutral (when required)
(500 kcmil Maximum)
MLO, SFL
20X
Branch
Devices
Through-
Feed Lugs Blank
3Ph 4W
1200A
36.00-inch
(914.4 mm)
Minimum
Width
1200A
3X
20X
9X
Branch
Devices
13X
3X
13X
9X
15X
5X
15X
11X
20X
5X
20X
11X
Through-
Feed Lugs
Branch
Devices
Branch
Devices
Blank
Branch
Devices
Blank
Branch
Devices
Blank
Through-
Feed Lugs
Branch
Devices
3Ph 3W
3Ph 4W 3Ph 3W
MLO, TFL
MLO MLO, TFL
250A, 400A,
600A and 800A
Through-
Feed Lugs
Branch
Devices
250 A
, 400 A
,
600 A
& 800 A
Optional Main Lugs, Through-Feed and Sub-Feed Lugs
(750 kcmil Maximum)
22.4-8
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 4
044
Fusible (PRL4F) Type Distribution
Panelboards 600 Vac, 250 Vdc
Panel Layout and Dimensions
To determine the dimensions of a
given panelboard enclosure, make
a layout sketch by tting together
the main branch and lug modules
according to the appropriate tables
in the layout guide. Assign X units
to each module as shown and obtain
a total X number.
The height of the enclosure is related
to the total X units in the layout as
shown in Figure 22.4-6. Three standard
box heights are available to accommo-
date any and all layout arrangements.
X unit totals that do not exactly
match those in Table 22.4-6 must
be rounded off to the next higher
standard (38X, 50X).
When a calculated X total for a panel
exceeds 50X, the panel must be split
into two or more separate sections
with X space for through-feed lugs
gured in for all but one section. If a
neutral is required, a separate neutral
bar and appropriate X space must
be included in each section.
Layout Example
1 PRL4F, three-phase, four-wire,
208Y/120V complete with
400A main switch and the
following branches:
1 200A/three-pole
2 100A/three-pole
2 30A/three-pole
Panel to have short-circuit rating of
100,000A symmetrical.
Note: In the above example, if a horizontally
mounted 400A main switch was used, the
enclosure size would be: 73.50 inches H x
44.00 inches W x 11.30 inches D (1866.9 mm
H x 1117.6 mm W x 287.0 mm D).
1. From layout guide,
X height of panel = 43X.
2. Rounded off to next higher
standard = 50X.
3. From Table 22.4-6, enclosure
height for 50X panel =
90.00 inches (2286.0 mm).
4. Width = 36.00 inches (914.4 mm)
because no switch in the assembly
requires a 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm)
wide enclosure.
5. Total enclosure depth =
11.30 inches (287.0 mm)
standard for all PRL4 panelboards.
Cabinet Specications
Boxes: Code-gauge commercial
galvanized sheet steel (no knockouts).
400A Neutral 7X
30A/three-pole 30A/three-pole 4X
100A/three-pole 100A/three-pole 4X
200A/three-pole 6X
400A three-pole
main switch (vertically mounted)
22X
Total = 43X
22.4-9
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 4
045
Table 22.4-6. Standard Panel and Box
Box depth is 10.40 inches (264.2 mm), cover

adds 0.90 inches (22.9 mm) for overall
enclosure depth of 11.30 inches (287.0 mm).
Note: Flush trims are available on PRL4F
panels with door-in-door enclosure only.
10.63 inches (269.9 mm)
Side Gutters (minimum)
36.00-inch (914.4) wide box:
200A maximum
8.00 inches (203.2 mm)
4001200A maximum
6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
200A maximum
10.00 inches (254.0 mm)
4001200A maximum
8.00 inches (203.2 mm)
Panel
Height
Box
Height
Box
Width
Box
Depth
38X 73.50
(1866.9)
36.00
(914.4)
10.40
(264.2)
50X 90.00
(2286.0)
36.00
(914.4)
10.40
(264.2)
38X 73.50
(1866.9)
44
(1117.6)
10.40
(264.2)
50X 90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
10.40
(264.2)
Figure 22.4-6. Branch and Horizontally Mounted Main Fusible Switch Layout
Note: See Page 22.4-7 for MLO or neutral and vertically mounted main space requirements.
600A
Main or Branch
800A
Branch
Fusible to Breaker
1200A
Branch
4
4
.
0
0
-
i
n
c
h

(
1
1
1
7
.
6

m
m
)

W
i
d
e

B
o
x
1X
11X
11X
6X
4X
4X
4X
5X
15X
400A
Main or Branch
200A 200A
600A Branch
400A Branch
100A 100A
200A
Main or Branch
100A
100A
250V Max.
100A
250V Max.
60A 60A
30A 30A
9X
11X
9X
6X
3
6
.
0
0
-
i
n
c
h

(
9
1
4
.
4

m
m
)

W
i
d
e

B
o
x
Surge Protective
Device (SPD)
5X
7X
10X
(7X for SPD 200 kA and below)
(10X for SPD above 250 kA)
Fusible switch may be used as horizontal main.
400 and 600A horizontally mounted feeder switches in 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) or
44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box. 400 and 600A horizontally mounted main switches
only in 44.00-inch (1117.6 mm) wide box.
For vertically mounted main switch see Page 22.4-4 for sizing.
22.4-10
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
046
22.5-1
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 5P
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 5P
047
Pow-R-Line 5P
PRL5P Panelboard
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240V, 480V or 600 Vac maximum
250 Vdc maximum
Mains (Plug-On)
Main lugs: 4001200A
Main breakers: 4001200A
Branches (Plug-On)
Breakers 151200A
Service
240/120V delta and 480Y/277V
Three-phase, three-wire 120, 240,
480 and 600V
Two-wire 125 Vdc
Two-wire 250 Vdc
Bussing
4001200A tin-plated
aluminum is standard, copper
is available as an option
Main Lugs Only
400, 600, 800 and 1200.
combination.
Table 22.5-1. Main Circuit BreakersType PRL5P
Available with ground fault protection.

Circuit Breaker Units
Breaker adapter units use Eatons
Series C
molded-case circuit
breakers. They are available from
151200A at 600 Vac maximum.
A wide range of integrally mounted
breaker accessories are available.
Refer to the series rating tables
beginning on Page 22.0-12 for the
approved series rated combinations
available for the branch circuit
breakers listed in Table 22.5-2.
600A Pow-R-Line 5P Series C
L-Frame Breaker
400A Pow-R-Line 5P Series C
K-Frame Breaker
Dual-Mounted Pow-R-Line 5P 225A
Series C F-Frame Breaker
Breaker Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
240V 480V 600V 250 Vdc
400
400
400
400
DK
KD
HKD
KDC
65
65
100
200
35
65
100
25
35
65
10
10
22
22
600
600
600
LD
HLD
LDC
65
100
200
35
65
100
25
35
50
22
25
25
800
800
800
800
800
MDL
HMDL
ND
HND
NDC
65
100
65
100
200
50
65
50
65
100
25
35
25
35
50
22
25
1200
1200
1200
ND
HND
NDC
65
100
200
50
65
100
25
35
65
22.5-2
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 5P
Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 5P
048
Table 22.5-3. Main Lug and Sub-Feed Lug Unit
1200A Pow-R-Line 5P Main Lug Unit
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
120 Vac 240 Vac 277 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 125 Vdc 250 Vdc
Single-Pole Breakers in Single Adapter Units
EHD
FD
HFD
1560
1560
1560
1
1
1
14
35
65
14
35
65
10
10
10
Two- and Three-Pole Breakers in Single Adapter Units

EHD
FD
HFD
FDC
15100
15225
15225
15225
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
18
65
100
200
14
35
65
100

18
25
35
10
10
22
22
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
100225
100225
100225
100225
100225
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
22
42
65
100
200
10
10
10
10
10
JD
HJD
JDC
70250
70250
70250
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
65
100
200
35
65
100
18
25
35
10
22
22
DK
KD
HKD
KDC
250400
100400
100400
100400
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
65
65
100
200
35
65
100
25
35
65
10
10
22
22
LD
HLD
LDC
300600
300600
300600
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
65
100
200
35
65
100
25
35
50
22
25
25
MDL
HMDL
300800
300800
2, 3
2, 3
65
100
50
65
25
35
22
25
ND
HND
NDC
400800
400800
400800
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
65
100
200
35
65
100
25
35
65
ND
HND
NDC
6001200
6001200
6001200
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
65
100
200
35
65
100
25
35
65
Ampere
Rating
X
Space
Mechanical Lug Size and
Number Al/Cu Rated
Single Bus Connection
400
600
800
8X
8X
8X
(1) 1/0500 kcmil or (2) 1/0250 kcmil
(2) #4500 kcmil
(2) #2500 kcmil or (3) #2400 kcmil
Double Bus Connection
4001200 7X (4) #4750 kcmil
Table 22.5-4. PRL5P Box Sizes and Maximum Component Unit Ampere RatingDimensions in Inches (mm)
Deduct X space for main breaker or lugs from the total available X spaces listed above.
Bus Chassis
Type
Total X
Space
Box Dimension Maximum Ampere Rating of Plug-on Components

Width Height Main Lugs Branch Lugs Main Breaker Branch Breaker
Single-Row Bus 24X
32X
40X
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
64.00 (1625.6)
75.00 (1905.0)
86.00 (2184.0)
800 600 800 600
Double-Row Bus 24X
32X
40X
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
64.00 (1625.6)
75.00 (1905.0)
86.00 (2184.0)
1200 1200 1200 1200
Dual Breaker Adapters
Any two breakers listed below may
be mounted on the same 2X or 3X
dual breaker adapter. Dual breaker
adapters may be in single- or double-
row chassis. Dual breaker adapters can
NOT be mounted across from another
in a double-row chassis.
Table 22.5-5. Dual Breaker Adapters
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
EDB, EDS, ED
EDH
EDC
100225
100225
100225
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
EHD 15100 2, 3
FD
HFD
FDC
15225
15225
15225
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
22.5-3
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 5P
Panelboard Layout and DimensionsPow-R-Line 5P
049
Chassis LayoutX Unit Layout of Circuit Breaker and Lug UnitsX = 1.38-Inch (34.9 mm)
Figure 22.5-1. Panel Layout and DimensionsPow-R-Line 5P
If used as a main device, must be mounted at the neutral end of panel.
Fixed bus covers are required for unused spaces if NEC six-circuit disconnect rule is to be met.
Blank wireway llers are required opposite any dual breaker unit.
Note: EDB and EDS breakers mount same as ED shown in Figure 22.5-1 above.
6X
Two-Pole
EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC
Three-Pole
EHD, FD, HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
Two-Pole
EHD, FD, HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
Two-Pole
EHD, FD, HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
Blank Wireway
Three-Pole
EHD, FD, HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
Three-Pole
EHD, FD, HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
Filler Plate
Two- or Three-Pole
JD, HJD, JDC
Two- or Three-Pole
DK, KD, HKD, KDC
Filler Plate
NeutralNo X Space Required
Top or Bottom
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
EHD, FD, HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
Blank Wireway
Two-Pole
EHD, FD, HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
Two-Pole
EHD, FD, HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
Blank Wireway
Two- or Three-Pole
LD, HLD, LDC
800A MDL, HMDL
Main or Branch
800A ND, HND, NDC
Main or Branch
1200A ND, HND, NDC
Main or Branch
Main Lug or Sub-feed Lug Kit
1200A Maximum
2X
3X
2X
2X
3X
4X
3X
3X
6X
6X
6X
7X
2X
3X
2X
2X
3X
4X
6X
6X
6X
7X
10.00
(254.0)
48.00
(1219.2)
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
2X
2X
3X
3X
3X
1X-6X
6X
4X
6X
8X
NeutralNo X Space Required
Top or Bottom
Two-Pole
Two-Pole
EHD, FD, HFD, FDC, ED,
EDH, EDC
Two-Pole
EDH, EDC
Three-Pole
EDH, EDC
Three-Pole
EDH, EDC
Three-Pole
EHD, FD, HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
Two- or Three-Pole
JD, HJD, JDC
Bus Cover
Two- or Three-Pole
DK, KD, HKD, KDC
Main or Branch
Two- or Three-Pole
LD, HLD, LDC
Main or Branch
800A MDL, HMDL
Main Only
Main Lug or Sub-feed Lug Kit
800A Maximum
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
7.00
(177.8)
30.00
(762.0)
Single-Bus Interior in
30.00-Inch (762.0 mm) Wide Enclosure
Double-Bus Interior Mounted in
48.00-Inch (1219.2 mm) Wide Enclosure
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
22.5-4
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
050
22.6-1
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Column Type
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 1a-LX Column Type
051
Pow-R-Line 1a-LX
Pow-R-Line 1a-LX Column Type
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 Vac maximum
Main Lugs
100 and 225A
Main Breakers
100 and 225A
Branch Breakers
15100A (bolt-on)
Service
and 240/120V delta
208 and 240V
Mains
to Table 22.6-1.
QBHW are horizontally mounted,
same as branch breakers. All other
main breakers are vertically mounted.
Branch Circuits
to Table 22.6-2.
Main Lugs Only
100 and 225.
rated combination.
three-pole space.
Arc fault breaker.

in Table 22.6-2.
Breaker Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical) at 240 Vac
100
100
100
BAB
QBHW
EHD
10
22
18
150
150
150
150
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
18
65
100
200
225
225
225
225
225
EDB
EDS
ED, FD
EDH, HFD
EDC, FDC
22
42
65
100
200
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
120 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac
BAB
BAB
BAB
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
10
10
10
BAB-D
BAB-C
BABRP
BABRSP
1560
1530
1530
1530
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
QBGF
QBGFEP
QBCAF
1550
1550
1520
1, 2
1, 2
1
10
10
10
10
10
10
QBHW
QBHW
QBHW
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
22
22
22
QBHGF
QBGFEP
QBHCAF
1530
1530
1520
1, 2
1, 2
1
22
22
22
22
22
22
22.6-2
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Column Type
Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 1a-LX Column Type
052
Bussing
100225A: copper is standard.
Boxes
Boxes are made from code-gauge steel.
Blank ends are supplied as standard.
Trims
Doors have three-point catch and lock.
Neutral Bars
When column type panels are
furnished with trough extensions
and pull box, the neutral bar will
be placed in the pull box unless
otherwise specied.
When troughs and pull box are not
furnished, the neutral bar will be
located on the panel at the same
end as the main.
Cabinets
Boxes and trims are code-gauge steel.
ANSI-61 light gray painted nish.
Boxes are furnished without knockouts.
Standard depth is 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm). Standard width is
8.63 inches (219.1 mm).
Top and Bottom Gutters
4.50 inches (114.3 mm) minimum.
Left Side Gutter
Pull Box
Pull box is furnished without knockouts.
Modications
Shunt Trips
Shunt trips are available on BAB,
QBHW and FDB breakers. BAB and
QBHW require one additional pole
space for shunt trip, i.e., single-pole is
two-pole size, two-pole is three-pole
size and three-pole is four-pole size.
Ground Bar
an option.
Assembled Circuit Breaker Panelboards
Box size, box and trim catalog numbers
for standard column type panelboards
listed are available from Table 22.6-4.
Instructions
1. Using description of the required
type of main required.
a. 100A panelboards
Table 22.6-4.
b. 225A panelboards
Table 22.6-4.
circuit poles, including provisions,
required in the panelboard.
Do not count main breaker poles.
breakers to single poles, i.e.,
three poles.
Determine sub-feed breaker or
through-feed lug requirements.
3. Select the panelboard main
ampere rating from Table 22.6-4.
4. Panelboard Type from rst
column, main breaker Frame and
Designation, if applicable from
second column, and sub-feed
breaker Frame and Designation, if
applicable, from the third column.
5. From Step 2, determine the num-
ber of branch circuits in Column 4.
6. Read box size numbers across
columns to the right. All panels
are surface mounted.
Ampere
Rating
Space
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
at 240V
150
150
150
150
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
18
65
100
200
225
225
225
225
225
EDB
EDS
ED, FD, FDE
EDH, HFD, HFDE
EDC, FDC
22
42
65
100
200
22.6-3
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Column Type
053
Table 22.6-4. PanelboardsDimensions in Inches (mm)
For horizontal mounted mains (BAB Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section for mains.
Figure 22.6-1. Trough Extension
Trough Extension
When extension troughs are used,
the NEC requires that the number
of conductors in wireways shall not
contain more than 30 conductors
at any cross section, unless the
conductors are for signal circuits
or are control conductors between
a motor and its starter and used
only for starting duty. The sum of the
cross-sectional areas of all contained
conductors at any cross section of
a wireway shall not exceed 20% of
the interior cross-sectional area
of the wireway.
The derating factors specied in
the NEC shall not be applicable to the
30 current-carrying conductors at 20%
ll specied above.
Panelboard
Types
Main Breaker Types
Mounting:
(H) = Horizontal
(V) = Vertical
Sub-Feed
Breaker Types
Vertical Mounting
Maximum Number
of Branch Circuits
Box Dimensions
Height Width Depth
100A
Main breaker BAB, QBHW (H)
27
39
69.00 (1752.6)
81.00 (2057.4)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
Main lugs or
main breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE,
HFD (V), HFDE
30
42
69.00 (1752.6)
81.00 (2057.4)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
with 100A through-feed
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EHD,
FD, FDE, HFD, HFDE
30
42
78.00 (1981.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
225A
Main lugs or
main breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE, ED, EDH (V)
30
42
69.00 (1752.6)
81.00 (2057.4)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
with 225A through-feed
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EHD,
FD, FDE, HFD, HFDE
30
42
78.00 (1981.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00
(152.4)
Additional
Extensions
(If Required)
H
Box
Height
6.00
(152.4)
16.00
(406.4)
12.00 .0
(304.8) 04
8.63
(219.1)
22.6-4
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Column Type
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 2a-LX Column Type
054
Pow-R-Line 2a-LX
Pow-R-Line 2a-LX Column Type
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 Vac
Note: PRL2a panelboards are suitable
for use on three-phase, three-wire appli-
cations when derived from a three-phase,
four-wire 480Y/277 Vac service where the
neutral is not brought to the panelboard.
For three-phase, three-wire 480 Vac delta
services, use a PRL3a panelboard.
250 Vdc maximum
Main Lugs
100 and 225A
Main Breakers
100 and 225A
Branch Breakers
15100A
480Y/277 Vac: 22150 kA series rated
250 Vdc: 10 kA and 14 kA fully rated
Service
and 240/120V delta and 480Y/277V
208 and 240V
Two-wire 125 Vdc
Two-wire 250 Vdc
Mains
Type GHB main breakers are hori-
zontally mounted, same as branch
breakers. All other main breakers
are vertically mounted.
Branch Circuits
to Table 22.6-6.
Main Lugs Only
100 and 225.
rated combination.

in Table 22.6-6.
Breaker
Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
240 Vac 480Y/277 Vac 125/250 Vdc
100
100
GHB
EHD
65
18
14
14
14
10
150
150
150
150
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC, FDCE
18
65
100
200
14
35
65
100
10
10
22
22
225
225
225
225
225
225
ED
FD, FDE
EDH
HFD, HFDE
EDC
FDC
65
65
100
100
200
200
35
65
100
10
10
10
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number of
Poles
120 Vac 240 Vac 277 Vac 480Y/277 Vac 125/250 Vdc
GHB
GHB
GHQ
15100
15100
1520
1
2, 3
1
65
65
65
14
14
14
14
14
HGHB
GHQRSP
GHBS
1530
1520
1530
1
1, 2
1, 2
65
65
65
65
65
25
14
14
14
14

22.6-5
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Column Type
055
Bussing
100225A: copper is standard.
Boxes
Boxes are made from code-gauge steel.
Blank ends are supplied as standard.
Trims
Doors have three-point catch and lock.
Neutral Bars
When column type panels are furnished
with trough extensions and pull box,
the neutral bar will be placed in the
pull box unless otherwise specied.
When troughs and pull box are not
furnished, the neutral bar will be located
on the panel at the same end as the main.
Cabinets
Boxes and trims are code-gauge steel.
ANSI-61 light gray painted nish.
Boxes are furnished without knockouts.
Standard depth is 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm). Standard width is
8.63 inches (219.1 mm).
Top and Bottom Gutters
Left Side Gutter
Pull Box
Pull box is furnished without knockouts.
Modications
Shunt Trips
Shunt trips are available on GHB, FDB
and FD breakers. GHB breakers with
shunt trips require three-pole frame.
Ground Bar
an option.
Assembled Circuit Breaker Panelboards
Box size, box and trim catalog
numbers for standard column type
panelboards listed are available
from Table 22.6-8.
Instructions
1. Using description of the required
type of main required.
a. 100A panelboardsTable 22.6-8.
b. 225A panelboardsTable 22.6-8.
circuit poles, including provisions,
required in the panelboard. Do not
count main breaker poles. Convert
two- or three-pole branch breakers
to single poles, i.e., three-pole
breaker, count as three poles.
Determine sub-feed breaker or
through-feed lug requirements.
3. Select the panelboard main
ampere rating from Table 22.6-8.
4. Panelboard type from rst
column, main breaker frame and
designation, if applicable from
second column, and sub-feed
breaker frame and designation, if
applicable, from the third column.
5. From Step 2, determine the number
of branch circuits in Column 4.
6. Read box size numbers across
columns to the right. All panels
are surface mounted.
Ampere
Rating
Space
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
240V 480V
150
150
150
150
FDB
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
18
65
100
200
14
35
65
100
225
225
225
225
225
225
ED
FD, FDE
EDH
HFD, HFDE
EDC
FDC
65
65
100
100
200
200
35
65
100
22.6-6
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Column Type
056
Table 22.6-8. PanelboardsDimensions in Inches (mm)
For horizontal mounted mains (BAB Type), use main lug table, include space in branch section for mains.
Figure 22.6-2. Trough Extension
Trough Extension
When extension troughs are used,
the NEC requires that the number
of conductors in wireways shall not
contain more than 30 conductors
at any cross section, unless the
conductors are for signal circuits
or are control conductors between
a motor and its starter and used only
for starting duty. The sum of the
cross-sectional areas of all contained
conductors at any cross section of
a wireway shall not exceed 20% of
the interior cross-sectional area of
the wireway.
The derating factors specied in
the NEC shall not be applicable to the
30 current-carrying conductors at 20%
ll specied above.
Panelboard
Types
Main Breaker Types
Mounting:
(H) = Horizontal
(V) = Vertical
Sub-Feed
Breaker Types
Vertical Mounting
Maximum Number
of Branch Circuits
Box Dimensions
Height Width Depth

100A
Main breaker GHB
(H)
27
39
69.00 (1752.6)
81.00 (2057.4)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
Main lugs or
main breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE, FDCE
(V)
30
42
69.00 (1752.6)
81.00 (2057.4)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
or sub-feed breaker
FD, FDE, HFD, HFDE,
FDC, FDCE
30
42
78.00 (1981.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
225A
Main lugs or
main breaker
EHD, FDB, FD, FDE,
HFD, HFDE
(V)
30
42
69.00 (1752.6)
81.00 (2057.4)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
or sub-feed breaker
FD, FDE
FDE, HFD, HFDE, FDC
30
42
78.00 (1981.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
8.63 (219.1)
8.63 (219.1)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00
(152.4)
Additional
Extensions
(If Required)
H
Box
Height
6.00
(152.4)
16.00
(406.4)
12.00 .0
(304.8) 04
8.63
(219.1)
22.7-1
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 1R
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 1R
057
Pow-R-Line 1R Retrot
Panelboard
Pow-R-Line 1R
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 Vac maximum
Main Lugs
100400A
Main Breakers
100225A
Branch Breakers
15100A (bolt-on chassis)
Service
and 240/120V delta
208 and 240V
Mains
to Table 22.7-1.
QBH are horizontally mounted, same
as branch breakers. All other main
breakers are vertically mounted.
Branch Circuits
to Table 22.7-2.
Eaton offers a factory-assembled
panelboard interior and trim designed
to bolt directly into an existing enclosure.
Custom-built panelboard interiors
and trims can be provided to retrot
most any manufacturers existing
panelboard enclosure.
The panelboards are listed and are
marked with both the Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) and Canadian
Standards Association (CSA) labels.
Why Retrot?
Upgrade protective device
Replacing old, obsolete circuit
breakers with new
Providing additional circuits for
load growth
Accommodating system change
and additions
Adding ground fault circuit
interrupters
Immediate Benets
Installation time is dramatically
reduced
Disruption of existing power
service is minimal
Less cleanup and wall repair because
there is no need to cut and break
concrete or nished wall surface
Main Lugs Only
branch device, or may be series rated
100 and 225.
fully rated main or branch device,
rated combination.
three-pole space.
Arc fault breaker.

in Table 22.7-2.
Breaker
Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
at 240V
100
100
100
BAB
QBHW
EHD
10
22
18
150 FDB 18
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
225
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
65
100
200
22
42
65
100
200
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
120V 120/240V 240V
BAB
BAB
BAB
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
10
10
10
BAB-D
BAB-C
BABRP
BABRSP
1560
1530
1530
1530
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
QBGF, QBGFEP
QBCAF
1550
1520
1, 2
1
10
10
10
10
QBHW
QBHW
QBHW
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
22
22
22
QBHGF, QBGFEP
QBHCAF
1530
1520
1, 2
1
22
22
22
22
22.7-2
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 1R
Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 1R
058
Bussing
as an option.
Boxes
Fits existing box depths from
4.50 (114.3 mm) to 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm) deep.
Optional mounting brackets are
available if existing enclosure
exceeds 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) deep.
Boxes shallower than standard may
require special collar adapters.
Trims
Pow-R-Line 1R
The trim and door is designed to
attach directly to the panelboard
deadfront assembly so that there
is no external trim-fastening
hardware required.
The interior backpan or optional
mounting plates are fastened directly
to the back of the existing enclosure
using the hardware provided.
Neutral and Ground Bus
Integrally mounted Neutral
assembly
Ground bar and bonding
conductor included
Neutral and Ground convertible
from left-right
Insulated/Isolated ground bus is
available as an option
Aluminum is standard, copper is
Application Guidelines
The following dimensions and data
are necessary for production of a
panelboard to t an existing box:
Existing Flush-Mounted Box
Height dimension H
Width dimension W
Depth dimension D
Flange width dimension F
If box is not ush with plaster line,
dimension E
Existing Surface-Mounted Box
Height dimension H
Width dimension W
Depth dimension D
Flange width dimension may be
F or FF as appropriate:
Flange width dimension FF
Stud Locations
In most applications, the existing
mounting hardware in the enclosure
may be removed, but in some areas,
the backpan may need to be attached
using a minimum of one existing
mounting stud to meet local code
requirements for grounding.
Conrm with your local electrical
code authority having jurisdiction.
Stud location dimensions:
A _______, B _______ and C _______.
Figure 22.7-1. Existing Interior Mounting Studs
Figure 22.7-2. Existing Box Top View
Table 22.7-3. Minimum Enclosure Sizing
Stud
Locations Front View
B
C A
H
W
Plaster Line
Top View (Flush Mounted)
Top View (Surface Mounted)
E
F
D
FF
D
Ampere
Rating
Number of
Circuits
Main Device
Type
Minimum Enclosure Dimensions Inches (mm)
Height Width Depth
Main Lug Only
100 18
30
42
MLO 21.00 (533.4)
27.00 (685.8)
34.00 (863.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
225 18
30
42
MLO 21.00 (533.4)
27.00 (685.8)
34.00 (863.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
400 18
30
42
MLO 21.00 (533.4)
27.00 (685.8)
34.00 (863.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
Main Breaker
100 18
30
42
BAB, QBHW 21.00 (533.4)
27.00 (685.8)
34.00 (863.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
18
30
42
EHD, ED, EDH,
FDB, FD, HFD
EDB, EDC, EDS
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
225 18
30
42
ED, EDH, EDB, EDS,
EDC, FD, HFD, FDC
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
22.7-3
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 2R
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 2R
059
Pow-R-Line 2R Retrot
Panelboard
Pow-R-Line 2R
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 Vac
Main Lugs
100225A
Main Breakers
100225A
Branch Breakers
15100A (bolt-on chassis)
Service
Three-phase, four-wire 480Y/277 Vac
Three-phase, four-wire 208Y/120 Vac
and 240/120 Vac delta
Single-phase, three-wire 120/240 Vac
Single-phase, two-wire 120 Vac
Three-phase, three-wire 208 and 240 Vac
Mains
to Table 22.7-4.
Main breakers, 100A, Type GHB is
horizontally mounted, same as branch
breakers. All other main breakers are
vertically mounted.
Branch Circuits
to Table 22.7-5.
Eaton offers a factory-assembled
panelboard interior and trim designed
to bolt directly into an existing enclosure.
Custom-built panelboard interiors
and trims can be provided to retrot
most any manufacturers existing
panelboard enclosure.
Why Retrot?
Upgrade protective device
Replacing old, obsolete circuit
breakers with new
Providing additional circuits for
load growth
Accommodating system change
and additions
Adding ground fault circuit
interrupters
Immediate Benets
Installation time is dramatically
reduced
Disruption of existing power
service is minimal
Less cleanup and wall repair because
there is no need to cut and break
concrete or nished wall surface
Main Lugs Only
branch device, or may be series rated
100 and 225.
fully rated main or branch device,
rated combination.
GHB breaker with 30ma equipment ground fault protection.

in Table 22.7-5.
Breaker
Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
240 Vac 480Y/277 Vac
100
150
225
GHB
FDB
FDB
65
18
65
14
14
35
225
225
HFD
FDC
100
200
65
100
Breaker
Type
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
120 Vac 240 Vac 277 Vac 480Y/277 Vac
GHQ
GHB
GHB
1520
15100
15100
1
1
2, 3
65
65
65
14
14
14
GHB-HID
GHBGFEP
HGHB
1520
1560
1530
1
1
1
65
65
65
14
14
25
22.7-4
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 2R
Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 2R
060
Bussing
as an option.
Boxes
Fits existing box depths from
4.50 (114.3 mm) to 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm) deep.
Optional mounting brackets are
available if existing enclosure
exceeds 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) deep.
Boxes shallower than standard may
require special collar adapters.
Trims
Pow-R-Line 2R
The trim and door is designed to
attach directly to the panelboard
deadfront assembly so that there
is no external trim-fastening
hardware required.
The interior backpan or optional
mounting plates are fastened directly
to the back of the existing enclosure
using the hardware provided.
Neutral and Ground Bus
Integrally mounted Neutral
assembly
Ground bar and bonding
conductor included
Neutral and Ground convertible
from left-right
Insulated/Isolated ground bus is
Aluminum is standard, copper is
Application Guidelines
The following dimensions and data
are necessary for production of a
panelboard to t an existing box:
Existing Flush-Mounted Box
Height dimension H
Width dimension W
Depth dimension D
If box is not ush with plaster line,
dimension E
Existing Surface-Mounted Box
Height dimension H
Width dimension W
Depth dimension D
Flange width dimension may be
F or FF as appropriate:
Flange width dimension FF
Stud Locations
In most applications, the existing
mounting hardware in the enclosure
may be removed, but in some areas,
the backpan may need to be attached
using a minimum of one existing
mounting stud to meet local code
requirements for grounding.
Conrm with your local electrical
code authority having jurisdiction.
Stud location dimensions:
A _______, B _______ and C _______.
Figure 22.7-3. Existing Interior Mounting Studs
Figure 22.7-4. Existing Box Top View
Table 22.7-6. Minimum Enclosure Sizing
Stud
Locations Front View
B
C A
H
W
Plaster Line
Top View (Flush Mounted)
Top View (Surface Mounted)
E
F
D
FF
D
Ampere
Rating
Number of
Circuits
Main Device
Type
Minimum Enclosure Dimensions Inches (mm)
Height Width Depth
Main Lug Only
100 18
30
42
MLO 21.00 (533.4)
27.00 (685.8)
34.00 (863.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
225 18
30
42
MLO 21.00 (533.4)
27.00 (685.8)
34.00 (863.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
Main Breaker
100 18
30
42
GHB 21.00 (533.4)
27.00 (685.8)
34.00 (863.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
18
30
42
FDB, FD,
HFD, FDC
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
225 18
30
42
FD, HFD, FDC 30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
22.7-5
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 1aF
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 1aF
061
Pow-R-Line 1aF
Pow-R-Line 1aF
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 Vac maximum
Main Lugs
100400A
Main Breakers
100400A
Branch Devices
30A
Hybrid breaker and fuse
Class CC fuses, 30A maximum
Service
and 240/120V delta
208 and 240V
Mains
to Table 22.7-7.
Main breakers are vertically mounted.
Branch Circuits
to Table 22.7-8.
For use on high fault current systems
requiring lighting panels, selectively
coordinated systems and laboratories
and testing stations where overcurrent
protection below 15A is required.
Main Lugs Only
rated based upon the upstream device.
100, 225 and 400.
of the main breaker only. The short
combination
Table 22.7-8. Branch Overcurrent Devices
Hybrid breaker/fuse (Class CC) branch
device
Class CC fuses are required, 30A maxi-

mum. Fuses are not supplied by Eaton.
Breaker
Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
Interrupting
Rating
(kA
Symmetrical)
at 240 Vac
100
100
100
EDB
EDS
ED
22
42
65
100
100
100
FD
FDE
EDH
65
65
100
100
100
HFD
HFDE
100
100
225
225
225
EDB
EDS
ED
22
42
65
225
225
225
FD
FDE
EDH
65
65
100
225
225
HFD
HFDE
100
100
400
400
400
DK
KD
HKD
42
65
100
400
400
KDC
LHH
200
200
Ampere
Rating
Interrupting
Rating
Breaker Type
30 200 Hybrid
22.7-6
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 1aF
Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 1aF
062
Bussing
as an option.
Boxes
galvanized steel.
Trim
and painted ANSI 61 gray Type YS.
Modications
Ground Bar
an option.
Enclosures
Type 1.
100
225
400
See Table 22.7-14
See Table 22.7-14
See Table 22.7-14
Box size for all Type 1 panelboards
are available from Table 22.7-10.
Instructions
1. Select the rating and type of
mains required.
higher number.
the right.
5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Side Gutters
6.50 inches (165.1 mm).
Ampere
Rating
of Mains
Main Breaker
Type
Mounting
Position
Maximum
Number
of Branch
Circuits
Including
Provisions
Box Dimensions
Height Width Depth
100A
100A
Main lugs or
main breaker
EHD, FDB, FD,
FDE, HFD, FDC,
HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
100A
Main lugs or main
breaker with 100A
through-feed lugs
EHD, FDB, FD,
FDE, HFD, FDC,
HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
225A
225A
Main lugs or
main breaker
EDB, EDS, ED,
EDH, EDC,
FD, HFD, FDC,
FDE, HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
225A
Main lugs or
main breaker
with 225 or 100A
through-feed lugs
EHD, FDB, FD,
HFD, FDE
FDC, EDB, EDS,
HFDE
ED, EDH, EDC
Vertical
18
30
42
48
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
400A
400A
Main lugs or
main breaker
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC, LHH
Vertical
18
30
42
48
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
22.7-7
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 2aF
General DescriptionPow-R-Line 2aF
063
Pow-R-Line 2aF
Pow-R-Line 2aF
General Description
Panelboard Ratings
Voltage
240 Vac
Main Lugs
100400A
Main Breakers
100400A
Branch Devices
30A (bolt-on)
Hybrid breaker and fuse
Class CC fuses, 30A maximum
Service
For use on high fault current systems
requiring lighting panels, selectively
coordinated systems and laboratories
and testing stations where overcurrent
protection below 15A is required.
Mains
to Table 22.7-11.
Branch Circuits
to Table 22.7-12.
Main Lugs Only
100, 225 and 400.
rated combination.
Table 22.7-12. Branch Overcurrent Devices
Hybrid breaker/fuse (Class CC) branch
device
Class CC fuses are required, 30A maxi-

mum. Fuses are not supplied by Eaton.
Breaker
Frame
Amperes
Breaker
Type
Interrupting
Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
at 480Y/277 Vac
100
100
100
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC
35
65
100
225
225
225
FD, FDE
HFD, HFDE
FDC, HFDE
35
65
100
400
400
400
400
KD
HKD
KDC
LHH
35
65
100
100
Ampere
Rating
Interrupting
Rating
Breaker
Type
30 200 Hybrid
22.7-8
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Line 2aF
Technical Data and SpecicationsPow-R-Line 2aF
064
Bussing
100400A: Tin-plated aluminum is
standard, copper is available
as an option.
Boxes
galvanized steel.
Trim
and painted ANSI 61 gray, Type YS.
Modications
Ground Bar
an option.
Enclosures
Type 1.
100
225
400
See Table 22.7-14
See Table 22.7-14
See Table 22.7-14
Instructions
higher number.
the right.
5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Side Gutters
5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Table 22.7-14. Type 1 Panelboards Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Ampere
Rating
of Mains
Main Breaker Type
Mounting
Position
Maximum
Number
of Branch
Circuits
Including
Provisions
Box Dimensions
Height Width Depth
100A Panelboards
100A
Main lugs or
main breaker
FDB, FD, FDE
HFD, FDC, HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
100A
Main lugs or main
breaker with 100A
through-feed lugs
FDB, FD, FDE
HFD, FDC, HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
225A Panelboards
225A
Main lugs or
main breaker
FD, HFD, FDC, FDE,
HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
225A
Main lugs or main
breaker with 100A
through-feed lugs
FDB, FD, FDE
HFD, FDC, HFDE
Vertical
18
30
42
48
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
400A Panelboards
400A
Main lugs or
main breaker
DK, KD,
HKD, KDC, LHH
Vertical
18
30
42
48
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
400A
Main lugs or main
breaker with 100A
through-feed lugs
DK, KD,
LHH
HKD, KDC
Vertical
Main 18
30
42
48
60.00 (1524.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
90.00 (2286.0)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
28.00 (711.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
22.7-9
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General DescriptionElevator Control Panelboard
065
General Description
Ratings
240 Vac and 600 Vac
Three-phase, three-wire and
three-phase, four-wire
200 kA short-circuit current ratings
Main Lugs Only
800A maximum
Branch Devices
30200A, 240 Vac and 600 Vac fused
switch to feed the elevator
Elevator Controls Standard Features
Factory wired from switch
to controls
200 kA rms short-circuit
current rating
120 Vac shunt trip
Ground termination
Branch fusible switch
Class J fuse clips on switch
(fuses not included)
100 VA Control Power Transformer
(CPT) with 120 Vac secondary
CPT primary and secondary fusing
Selection of primary CPT voltages
Fire safety interface relay with
user-selected coil voltage
Fire alarm voltage monitoring relay
Keyed test switch
ON pilot light; user selects color
Standards
The Elevator Control Panelboard
meets and is listed to the following
standards:
UL 67 listed panelboard
UL 50 listed enclosure
UL 98 listed fusible elevator
control fusible switches
Options
Integrated Surge Protective Device
(SPD) 100400 kA
Specialized control to meet
local codes
The Elevator Control Panelboard
is designed to replace multiple
components provided in elevator
control rooms, thus consolidating
and standardizing this area. With the
ability to control up to four elevators
in a common shaft, the Elevator
Control Panelboard offers the needed
controls in a space-saving design
while allowing access by the various
trades involved with the installation.
Not only does the Elevator Control
Panelboard provide electrical feeds, it
also contains necessary components
for the control of the elevator and the
re alarm system.
Codes
The Elevator Control Panelboard is
designed to meet the following codes:
NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code)
NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm Code)
ANSI/ASME A17.1 (Safety Code
for Elevators and Escalators)
NFPA 13 (Installation of
Sprinkler Systems)
Eatons Elevator Control Panelboard
has superior selective coordination
properties. When paired with the
appropriate upstream fusing, the
elevator control panelboard can
selectively coordinate with higher
fault current levels. All fuses must
be of the same manufacturer. Consult
the specic fuse manufacturers data
for selective coordination values.
Surge Protective Devices (SPD) may
be integrated into all Elevator Control
Panelboards. Because most installa-
tion calls for SPDs, integrating an
Eaton SPD ensures proper installation
and signicantly limits destructive
let-through beyond all size-mounted
solutions. Please see Section 36 for
more information.
Table 22.7-15. Elevator Feeder Devices
Table 22.7-16. Box Sizing and SelectionDimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: Dimensions reect NEMA Type 1 enclosures.
All boxes are 11.31 inches (287.3 mm) deep.
Ampere
Rating
Fuse Class Short-Circuit Current Rating (kAIC Symmetrical)
240 Vac 600 Vac
30
60
Class J
Class J
200
200
200
200
100
200
Class J
Class J
200
200
200
200
Ampere
Rating
Number of
Elevators
Dimensions
Without SPD With SPD
Width Height Width Height
400
400
400
2
3
4
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
57.00 (1447.8)
57.00 (1447.8)
57.00 (1447.8)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
600
600
600
2
3
4
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
57.00 (1447.8)
57.00 (1447.8)
57.00 (1447.8)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
800
800
3
4
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
73.00 (1854.2)
73.00 (1854.2)
22.7-10
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modications
General DescriptionTypes PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modications
066
Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and
Column Modications
Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column
Modications Selection Guide
Table 22.7-17. ModicationsAlphabetical Index
Modication Available on Panelboard Types
PRL1a PRL2a PRL3a PRL3E PRL4B PRL4F Column Type
Ambient compensating breakers No No Yes No Yes No
Bus density Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cabinetsspecial: Types 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Complete assembly Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Compression type lugs, mains only Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Concealed trim clamps (LT trim) Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No
Conduit covers Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Copper lugs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Copper main bus Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Standard
Directory framemetal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Doors, special Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Electronic trip units No No No Yes Yes No
Fungus-proof Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground bar Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground fault protection (zero sequence) No No No No Yes Yes No
Handle lockoff device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Std. Yes
Hinges, special (LT trim) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Increased dimensions Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No
Increased panel bus rating Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No
Interiors to t existing boxes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Locks, special (LT trim) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Metering devices No No No Yes Yes Yes No
Molded-case switches Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Nameplates engraved Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
22.7-11
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Types PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modications
General DescriptionTypes PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 and Column Modications
067
Table 22.7-17. ModicationsAlphabetical Index (Continued)
Modication Available on Panelboard Types
PRL1a PRL2a PRL3a PRL3E PRL4B PRL4F Column Type
Neutral rated 200% Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Painting and special coating Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Permanent circuit numbers Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Remote control switches (ASCO 920) No No Yes Yes No No No
Service entrance Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Shunt trips Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Split bus or meter loop No No Yes No No No No
Sub-feed breakers Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes
Sub-feed lugs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Sub-metering, IQ Energy Sentinel No No No No Yes No No
Surge protective device (SPD) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Tamperproof screws (LT trim) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Terminals, copper only for breakers Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Through-feed lugs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Time clock space only Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Touchup paint Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
22.7-12
September 2011
Panelboards
Sheet 22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
068


February 2012

Contents

Lighting Control SystemsPow-R-Command
23.0-1

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet

23

001

L
i
g
h
t
i
n
g

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

S
y
s
t
e
m
s
P
o
w
-
R
-
C
o
m
m
a
n
d


General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.0-2

Pow-R-Command Family. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.0-2

Pow-R-Command Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.0-3
Pow-R-Command 5000


23.1-1
Pow-R-Command 2000


23.2-1

System Congurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.2-2
Pow-R-Command 1000


23.3-1


23.3-2
Pow-R-Command 750


23.4-1


23.4-2
Pow-R-Command 100


23.5-1


23.5-2
Pow-R-Command 25


23.6-1


23.6-1

Building Automation Systems (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.6-2
Pow-R-Command 2000/1000/75

Panel Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

See Tab 22 Panelboards
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Pow-R-Command 750 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16147D Section 26 24 16.11

Pow-R-Command 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Pow-R-Command 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 16147F Section 26 24 16.16
Pow-R-Command Family
23.0-2



CA08104001E
February 2012


22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet

23


General Information

002


Eatons Pow-R-Command family
of lighting control panelboards is
designed to meet the lighting control
needs for buildings of all sizes and
complexity. The system incorporates
microprocessor-based distributed
intelligence within a traditional panel-
board, simplifying wiring in the eld.
The system can be networked over
customers LAN or directly interfaced
to the Internet, allowing for password
protected Web access. The panelboard
design allows the Pow-R-Command
lighting control system to meet short-
circuit ratings, as required by the

(NEC

).

Lighting Control Overview

Traditional lighting control employs
lighting contactors or relay panels
to turn groups of lighting on or off.
Input devices are typically time clocks,
photo cells, wall switches, or, in more
sophisticated applications, contact
inputs from a building automation
system (BAS). Pow-R-Command is
a lighting control panelboard with
remote controllable circuit breakers.
These controllable circuit breakers
perform a dual function:
1. They provide the overcurrent and
overload protection for the circuit.
2. They perform the same function
as relays and contactors in tradi-
tional lighting control systems,
opening and closing the circuit
in response to a remote signal.


Short-Circuit Protection

: In the past,
contactors or relay panels were
mounted close to the lighting load
and short-circuit ratings were not a
major concern. Today, most of the
lighting control devices are located in
electrical rooms, often adjacent to the
panelboards that feed them. These
devices are subjected to short-circuit
conditions almost as high as those of
the electrical distribution equipment.
The current version of the National
Electrical Code now requires that these
lighting control devices carry a short-
circuit rating (Article 110.10). Although
some traditional lighting control
components are available with short-
circuit ratings, these ratings are limited
and may require upstream fusing.

A lighting control panelboard makes
meeting the requirements of NEC
110.10 as simple as specifying the
short-circuit rating of the panelboard.
Flexibility

: Lighting control panel-
boards allow simple and inexpensive
changes during startup. Contactor and
relay panels often require rewiring
to make changes in the eld.

Choices

: Eatons lighting control
panelboards offer varying levels of
exibility, from six zones per panel
with the Pow-R-Command 25,
up to 250 zones per panel with
the Pow-R-Command 2000 and
PC Central software.

Space

: Lighting control panelboards
eliminate contactor panels and/or relay
panels, freeing up valuable wall space.
Pow-R-Command panels are the same
width as standard panelboards.

Retrot Applications

: Retrotting
traditional lighting control methods
into an existing electrical distribution
system often requires extensive
rewiring and unwanted downtime.
In most cases, a Pow-R-Command
panel interior can be installed into
an existing panelboard back box,
and the cables can be re-terminated
on the new circuit breakers, with
minimal downtime.

Installation Considerations

Simplicity

: Lighting control panelboards

are as easy to install as standard
panelboards. There are no additional
components to install.

Labor

: Because contactors and relays
are eliminated, the labor associated
with installing them and the additional
cables and conduit associated with
them is eliminated.

Startup

: Startup for the
Pow-R-Command panelboards
is straightforward. The PRC25
requires no startup. It is prewired at
the factory. The PRC100 is provided
with factory startup assistance for
trouble-free installation. The PRC750
is provided with an LCD display and
keypad for on-site programming.
The PRC1000 and PRC2000 are
programmed over the network.
They have an optional display
available for local interface.

Operational Considerations

Failure Modes

: If a lighting contactor or

relay fails to operate due to a mechanical

or control system failure, it is very
difcult to control the lights manually.
Often, it is necessary to hardwire
around the device on a temporary basis.
With a lighting control panelboard
system, the circuit breaker can be

manually switched on or off as necessary

until the system is back in operation.

Flexibility

: In many cases, the lighting
control scheme may change over the
life of the facility. With traditional light-
ing control methods, changes require
major rewiring and facility downtime.

Breaker control schemes can be changed

within the lighting control panelboard,
often with a simple modication
through software.

Seismic Qualication

Refer to

Tab 1

for information on


23.0-3

February 2012


22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet

23


Selection Guide

003

Pow-R-Command 2000 (PRC2000)

Eatons PRC2000 is a microprocessor-
based programmable lighting control
system that can be used to control
all of the lighting in your industrial
facilities, high-rise ofce buildings
and airports. Being on the cutting edge
of technology, the Pow-R-Command
2000 is an IP-based device with an
embedded Web server. Capable of
being used in both standalone and
networkable applications, the
PRC2000 can incorporate both
standard branch-mounted breakers
and controllable thermal-magnetic
breakers for tailored control. The
System Controller also includes load
override, holiday scheduling, one-shot
or event schedules, off warning to
tenants, memory loss protection,
hardware diagnostics and real-time
clock for optimal energy management
functions. The PRC2000 also incorpo-
rates the ability to communicate with
networked devices over the Building
Automation and Control Network
(BACnet) protocol. BACnet is an
industry standard protocol and
provides increased exibility in
component and device selection for
the control system. Consult your local
Eaton representative for availability
of additional protocols.


based programmable lighting control
system. With ratings from 100400A,
the PRC1000 can be used as a stand-
alone panelboard or networked as a
system. The panelboard uses both
branch mounted standard breakers
through 100A, and controllable
thermal-magnetic breakers controlled
by the Pow-R-Command 1000 System
Controller. The System Controller
also includes load override, holiday
scheduling, one-shot or event
schedules, off warning to tenants,
memory loss protection, hardware
diagnostics and real-time clock
for optimal energy management
functions. The PRC1000 system
contains networkable intelligence
and provides automated switching
of branch circuit breakers.

Pow-R-Command 750

Designed for standalone applications,
Eatons PRC750 is a premier micro-
processor-based lighting control
system that can be used to control
all of the lighting in your industrial
facilities, high-rise ofce buildings
and airports. A single PRC750 panel
can be connected to a maximum of
three expansion panels for the ability
to control up to a total of 168 Smart
Breakers. The PRC750 also boasts
load override, holiday scheduling,
memory loss protection, astronomical
time clocks and scheduling, 16 switch
inputs, and alarm and message
log features.

Pow-R-Command 100 (JCI-100)

Eatons PRC100 panelboard

system
offers the broadest range of energy
control in the industry using stand-
alone PRC100 panelboards or
a network of PRC100 panelboards.
The PRC100 system is ideal for large,
medium and small facilities with lighting
control systems that require frequent
changes, networkable panelboards,
remote access, or all of the above.


Eatons PRC25 panelboard replaces
contactors and relay panels in lighting
control and other load switching
systems. It is the most basic and cost-
effective way to remotely control loads.
The PRC25 is ideal for any building
that requires a xed lighting control
scheme with a low installed cost.
The PRC25 can be controlled by an
external time clock, building manage-
ment system, low-voltage switches
or photocell.

Table 23.0-1. Pow-R-Command Selection Guide

Each rail drives up to 21 breakers. Rails can be distributed individually over a total of eight panels (maximum SLAN wire length of 150 feet).

Controller PRC25 PRC100 PRC750 PRC1000 PRC2000

Required Eaton startup and integration No Yes No Yes Yes

Inputs

Low-voltage switch 6 4 8 8 8
Universal (switch or analog) 0 8 8 8 8
Digital switch network No No No Yes Yes
Optional switch input expander 0 48 0 48 48
Total inputs 6 64 16 64 64

Outputs

Outputs digital (maximum controllable zones) 6 4 16 75 75
Analog 0 4 0 4 4
Universal I/O module No Yes No Yes Yes
Telephone override No Yes No Yes Yes
Data logging No Yes No Yes Yes
Remote access No Yes No Yes Yes
Power supply for external devices N/a Yes Yes Yes Yes
Maximum number of loads (breaker/relay) 42 42 168 168 168
Number of satellite panels 0 0 7

Manual override Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
23.0-4



CA08104001E
February 2012


22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet

23


Selection Guide

004

Table 23.0-1. Pow-R-Command Selection Guide (Continued)

250 additional schedules with optional Network Interface Box NIB.

16 additional holidays with optional Network Interface Box NIB.

Ethernet TCP/IP access with optional terminal server.

Controller PRC25 PRC100 PRC750 PRC1000 PRC2000

Outputs (Continued)

Dimming No Yes No Yes Yes
Maximum number of dimming ballasts 0 160 0 160 160
Daylight harvesting (using dimming ballasts) No Yes No Yes Yes
Daylight switching (on/off circuit switching) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Time clock No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Time schedules No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Scheduling zones N/A 75 75 75/250

75/250

On/off periods per schedule N/A 50 50 50 50
Holidays N/A 30 30 30/16

30/16

Blink notice No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Maximum override time (hrs) N/A 24 24 24 24
RS-232 port No No No No No
RS-485 port No Yes No Yes Yes
Ethernet port No No No No Yes
Ethernet via external Gateway No Yes No Yes Yes
Input/output matrix across controllers No Yes No Yes Yes
Input/output matrix within controller No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Local LCD/LED display No No Yes Option Option
Local LED status indicators Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Non-volatile program memory No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Battery backup for program memory N/A 10 years 10 years 10 years 10 years
Clock memory backup N/A 10 years 10 years 10 years 10 years
Flash rmware memory N/A No Yes Yes Yes

Protocols

Modbus

ASCII/RTU N/A Yes No No No
Modbus TCP N/A No No No No
Johnson Controls

N2 N/A Yes No No No
BACnet N/A Yes No Yes Yes
LonWorks

N/A No No No No
SOAP/XML N/A Yes No Yes Yes
OPC N/A Yes No Yes Yes

Browser Access

TCP/IP external device N/A Yes No Yes Yes

Built-in Web Server

TCP/IP N/A No N/A Yes

Yes
BACnet/IP server N/A No N/A N/A Yes

Standards

UL

916 energy management equipment Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
California Title 24 Yes Yes Yes Yes
NEC 110.10 Yes Yes Yes Yes
UL 67 panelboards Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
CSA

C22.2 #29 panelboards Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Baud rate N/A 9.6k 9.6k 9.6k 9.6k
Maximum controllers/network N/A 120 1 1800 1800
Password protected No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Mounting

Three-pole breaker housing No No No No No
External bracket mount available Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes


23.1-1

February 2012


22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Sheet

23

Pow-R-Command 5000

General Description

005

Pow-R-Command 5000

Pow-R-Command 5000 Controller

General Description

Eatons Pow-R-Command 5000
(PRC5000) is a microprocessor-based
building automation and energy-
management system capable of
controlling energy and demand using
remotely located unitary controllers.
The system performs the functions of
scheduling equipment, demand limiting,
duty cycling, monitoring, reporting,
trend logging and implementing
control strategies.

Features and Benets

Modular hardware with exible
user congurations

Non-volatile storage of all database
and control information

Clock and calendar with battery
backup

Two multidrop RS-485 LANs

Up to 15 individual unitary LANs
coordinated through a single
PRC5000, two of these may be
wired directly to the PRC5000; the
rest are connected via the facilitys
Ethernet LAN

Up to 120 universal unitary
controllers per LAN to control
many different types of systems:
HVAC, pumps, conveyors, etc.

Ethernet port for easy access to
remote unitary LANs over existing
Ethernet LAN wiring

RS-232 serial connection for local
terminal or modem

Automatic fail-safe mode

250 schedules, 250 programming
monitors and 50 control structures

Supports remote rmware upgrades

Optimum START/STOP, equipment
scheduling

Trend collection

Maintenance and security
alarm messages

Terminal interface with screen
editor data entry

Load shedding, demand limiting
energy management, four meters

Reports alarms or messages of
adverse conditions by e-mail or
pager over modem or network

Automatic communications
between remote sites and the
central system with automatic
logon and password exchange

Components

Linux

-based operating system for
secure operations, communicating
TCP/IP via the Web

Integrated Web-server serves
up canned or custom Web pages
stored directly on the controller.
These pages can be viewed using
any standard Web-browser and
provides the interface for monitor-
ing and controlling the system.
Canned and custom Web pages
then can be viewed with a standard
Internet browser

Monitor the building and manually
control by Web page interface

Universal Unitary Controllers

User congurable to control
pumps, fans, compressors,
conveyors, dampers, etc.

Accept inputs from pushbutton
stations, thermostats, photo
sensors, KYZ meter pulses and
many other device outputs

Addressable with unique address

Up to 120 UUC per RS-485
network

Basic model (UUC-0) has four
direct digital inputs (linked
with four pulse counters), eight
analog inputs, three analog
outputs and two thermostat ports

The cost-efcient UUC-4, has four
digital outputs (TRIAC or relay)
each with an LED status light
and analog/universal inputs
(no dedicated digital inputs),
and one thermostat port

The multi-functional UUC-8 can
be ordered with four congura-
tion options (TRIAC or relay
output options as well as power
options). Eight digital outputs,
12 digital inputs, LED status
indication of all digital outputs
and inputs, eight analog/universal
inputs, three analog outputs, two
thermostat inputs and LED status
lights for controller power and
LAN receive/send data

U-LAN, the unitary controller LAN
operates at 9600 baud on a pair
of wires using standard RS-485
drivers, up to 4000 feet on a single
twisted-shielded cable. RS-485
repeaters should be used for when
more than 4000 feet is required
23.1-2
February 2012
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 23006
23.2-1
February 2012
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 23
Pow-R-Command 2000
General Description
007
Pow-R-Command 2000
Pow-R-Command 2000 Panelboard
General Description
Eatons Pow-R-Command 2000 is a
microprocessor-based programmable
lighting control system with an
embedded Web server and BACnet
native capability. The PRC2000 can be
used as a standalone panelboard or
networked as a system.
Features
Optional LCD display and keypad
Web pages
Memory loss protection
Power failure/brownout recovery
Astronomical real-time clock
PC Central control software
Time scheduling
Holiday scheduling
Digital and analog I/O
Input to output switch matrix
Messages/alarms
Daylight optimization
Switch Override Controller (SOC)
Telephone Override Controller (TOC)
Digital switch network
Components
Controller includes embedded
Web server
Intelligent power switching
equipment
LCD programming display
and keypad
Application Specic Controllers
(ASCs)
PC Central control software
Technical support
Web site
E-mail
Telephone
Intelligent Power
Switching Equipment
Pow-R-Command 2000 panelboards are
offered from 100 to 400A in main lug
and main breaker congurations.
Available voltages are 120/240, 208Y/
120 and 480Y/277, single-phase and
three-phase. The panelboard uses both
branch-mounted standard breakers
through 100A, and controllable thermal-
magnetic breakers up to 30A that are
controlled by the Pow-R-Command
2000 System Controller. The panels
are available in column width. The
Pow-R-Command 2000 controllers
provide the ability to directly operate up
to eight breaker control busses. Such a
capability allows a single controller to
directly operate up to 168 GHQRSP and
BABRSP controllable circuit breakers,
with individual control and status
feedback of each controllable breaker.
The System Controller also includes
one-shot or event schedules, off
warning to tenants by blinking lights,
memory loss protection, power failure/
brownout protection, hardware
diagnostics, a real-time clock and
16 dry contact switch inputs. Up to
100 digital switches can be connected.
Equipment within the Pow-R-Command
2000 system may be networked. Up to
120 panelboards may be networked
over an ethernet cable without the need
for a personal computer in the system.
The Pow-R-Command 2000 panelboard
is listed UL 67 for panelboards and
UL 916 for energy management
equipment.
BACnet Protocol
The PRC2000 unit is capable for
integration within BACnet native
control networks. BACnet is a
communications protocol widely
used in building automation and
controls and adds even more exibility
to the control system. Consult
your local Eaton representative for
additional network protocols.
23.2-2
February 2012
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 23
Pow-R-Command 2000
System Congurations
008
System Congurations
PRC2000 Network Architecture
Containing an embedded Web server,
each Pow-R-Command 2000 system is
programmed with a unique IP address
for communication via any standard
Internet browser. Web access is
standard with the PRC2000. Eight
21-circuit control busses congured
as needed throughout PRL1A and 2A
panels. The PRC2000 directly inter-
faces to a BACnet Client Workstation.
Breaker Control Busses (BCB)
Every Pow-R-Command Expansion
Panelboard can be congured with the
left and/or right breaker control busses
installed. When using a PRC EP panel
with one BCB, the remote controlled
breakers are placed on the side
with the control bus. Standard and
controlled breakers can be distributed
anywhere in the panel as needed.
Figure 23.2-1 PRC2000 Breaker Control Busses
5th Floor
4th Floor
3rd Floor
2nd Floor
Ground
Remote
Access
Thru
VPN
PC with
Internet
Browser
PRC
EP
1
BCB
PRC
EP
1
BCB
PRC
EP
2
BCB
PRC
EP
2
BCB
PRC
2000
2
BCB
Customer LAN
CAT 5
PRC
EP
1
BCB
PRC
EP
1
BCB
PRC
EP
2
BCB
PRC
2000
2
BCB
Each Pow-R-Command 2000 Typical for
8 Breaker Control Busses Each with 21 Breakers
#416 AWG (alpha 1064 or equivalent).
CAT 5E or 6 for digital switch network.

23.3-1
February 2012
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 23
Pow-R-Command 1000
General Description
009
Pow-R-Command 1000
General Description
lighting control system. The PRC1000
can be used as a standalone panelboard
or networked as a system.
Features
LCD display and keypad
Control software
Time scheduling
Holiday scheduling
Messages/alarms
Components
equipment
and keypad
(ASCs)
Software and support
Integration components
Intelligent Power
Switching Equipment
one-shot or event schedules, off warning
to tenants by blinking lights, memory
loss protection, power failure/brown-
out protection, hardware diagnostics,
a real-time clock and 16 dry contact
switch inputs.
over a shielded twisted pair network
cable without the need for a personal
computer in the system.
The Pow-R-Command 1000
panelboard is listed UL 67 for
panelboards and UL 916 for energy
management equipment.
23.3-2
February 2012
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 23
Pow-R-Command 1000
System Congurations
010
System Congurations
PRC1000 Application
Customizable extension panels allow
for combinations of both regular and
remote controllable breakers for
individualized solutions as shown
in this riser diagram. Eatons
Pow-R-Command 1000 Controller can
support up to eight breaker control
busses contained within four standard
panelboards or split between a
maximum of eight. When connected to
the buildings Internet, all master and
expansion panels can be controlled.
Figure 23.3-1. PRC1000 Breaker Control Busses
5th Floor
4th Floor
3rd Floor
2nd Floor
Ground
Remote
Access
Thru
Modem
or VPN-
Ethernet
PC
with
Software
PRC
EP
1
BCB
PRC
EP
1
BCB
PRC
EP
2
BCB
PRC
EP
2
BCB
PRC
EP
2
BCB
PRC
EP
2
BCB
PRC
EP
2
BCB
PRC
1000 Network
Interface
RS-485 Belden
3105A or Equivalent
PRC
1000
2
BCB
Each Pow-R-Command 1000
8 Breaker Control Busses Each with 21 Breakers
#416 AWG (alpha 1064 or equivalent).
CAT 5E or 6 for digital switch network.

23.4-1
February 2012
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 23
Pow-R-Command 750
General Description
011
Pow-R-Command 750
General Description
lighting control system. The Pow-R-
Command 750 can be used as a
standalone panel, or the user has
the option to connect up to three
expansion panels to the 750 creating
its own standalone subnetwork.
Features
Time scheduling
Holiday scheduling
Messages/alarms
Daylight control (via photocell)
Components
equipment
and keypad
Intelligent Power
Switching Equipment
loss protection, power failure/brownout
protection, hardware diagnostics,
switch inputs.
equipment.
23.4-2
February 2012
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 23
Pow-R-Command 750
System Congurations
012
System Congurations
Pow-R-Command 750
Designed for standalone applications,
based lighting control system that
can be used to control the lighting in
your industrial facilities, high-rise
ofce buildings and airports. A single
PRC750 panel can be connected to a
maximum of three expansion panels
for the ability to control up to a total
of 168 Smart Breakers. The PRC750
also includes load override, holiday
scheduling, memory loss protection,
astronomical time clocks and
scheduling, 16 switch inputs, and
alarm and message log features.
Figure 23.4-1. PRC750 Standalone System Architecture
5th Floor
4th Floor
3rd Floor
2nd Floor
Ground
PRC
EP
1
PRC
EP
1
PRC
EP
2
PRC
EP
2
PRC
750
Programming via local LCD
No Start-up required by factory
#416 AWG (alpha 1064 or equivalent)

23.5-1
February 2012
Lightning Control SystemsPow-R-Command
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 23
Pow-R-Command 100
General Description
013
Pow-R-Command 100
PRC100 Exterior View
General Description
lighting control system. The PRC100
can be used as a standalone panelboard
or networked as a system.
Features
Control software
Time scheduling
Holiday scheduling
Message/alarms
Components
equipment
(ASCs)
Software and support
Intelligent Power
Switching Equipment
through 225A, and controllable
thermal-magnetic breakers which are
controlled by the Pow-R-Command 100
System Controller through an integral
communications bus housed in the
panelboard. This integral low voltage
control bus connects to the System
Controller and allows the individual
control and status feedback of each
controllable breaker.
loss protection, power failure/brown-
out protection, hardware diagnostics,
switch inputs.
over a shielded twisted pair network
cable without the need for a personal
computer in the system.
equipment.
23.5-2
February 2012
Lightning Control SystemsPow-R-Command
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 23
Pow-R-Command 100
System Congurations
014
Figure 23.5-1. Typical Building Lighting Control SystemNetworked
Typical New Lighting
Control System
Eatons Pow-R-Command 100
panelboards shown above each have
a System Controller for the basic
lighting control functions.
The Pow-R-Command EC panelboards
shown contain additional chassis
space for a switch override controller.
As shown, the central personal
computer (PC) is optional because
each panelboard is a standalone
operating lighting control system
with basic lighting control functions.
The PC may be used for programming
changes; downloading software;
scheduling, viewing system status
and conguration, etc.
Legend
PRC100 = Standard Pow-R-
Command 100 Panel
PRC100-EC = Pow-R-Command 100
with Expansion Chassis
USC = Universal System
Controller Board
PC = Personal Computer
NIB = Network Interface Box
SOC = Switch Override
Controller
USC
Keyboard
Typical
System
Controller
USC USC
PRC100-EC PRC100 PRC100
SOC
3 ASCs
Maximum
Option
Expansion
Network
Control
Cabinet
PRC100-EC PRC100
USC USC USC
Typical branches:
Up to 42 controllable circuits.
Chassis mounted controllable
breakers can be mixed with
standard non-controllable
branch breakers.
PRC100-EC
PRC100 PRC100 PRC100
Main Network Cable
(Twisted Pair)
USC USC USC
NIB
PC
RS-232
Cable
120 Vac
Optional
Computer/
Software
Remote
Input
SOC
Photocell
Switch
or LV Switch
Controllable Breakers
or Standard Breakers
(Typical)
Monitor
Standard
Panelboard with
Controllable and
Standard Breakers
Pigtail
Cable
SOC
SOC
USC
Control
Cabinet
Optional Networked PCsAccess to Graphics Program via DDE
Central PC/DDE Server
Serial
Switching Box
RS-232/Serial Cable
Standard Analog
Modem
Analog Phone Line
23.6-1
February 2012
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 23
Pow-R-Command 25
General Description
015
Pow-R-Command 25
General Description
Eatons Pow-R-Command 25 is
designed to replace lighting control
systems involving multi-pole lighting
contactors and relay panels. The
Pow-R-Command 25 uses controllable
circuit breakers in a panelboard that
are grouped into zones and switched
by a dry or control signal contact from
an external source. The controllable
breakers are pre-wired at the factory
in up to six customer-designated
zones with up to 16 breakers per zone.
Note: Refer to factory for zoning restrictions.
Components
equipment
Maintained-to-momentary
board (MTM)
Intelligent Power
Switching Equipment
and main breaker congurations. Avail-
able voltages are 120/240, 480Y/277 Vac
and 208Y/120, single-phase and three-
phase. The panelboard uses both
through 100A and controllable thermal-
magnetic breakers that are controlled
by the MTM.
provides the ability to group up to
42 remotely operated controllable
breakers into six individual zones.
Each zone is designed to be switched
by a dry or control signal contact
from an external device. Each
Pow-R-Command 25 panelboard has
an integral zoning board where the
zone designations are pre-wired at the
factory and linked to specic contact
inputs. Limited changes may be made
to zone designations in the eld
through wiring changes.
equipment.
System Congurations
Figure 23.6-1. Typical Electrically Held Contactor Control System
Figure 23.6-2. Typical Pow-R-Command 25 Panelboard System
23.6-2
February 2012
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sheet 23
Pow-R-Command
Operational Description
016
Building Automation
Systems (BAS)
Integration
The Pow-R-Command lighting control
system can be integrated with Building
Automation Systems via the following
optional components:
Native Modbus
Controller. The
Native Modbus Controller takes
the place of the PRC100 System
Controller. The Native Modbus
Controller is designed as a slave
Modbus node
JCI100 Controller. The JCI100
Controller is designed to take
the place of the PRC100 System
Controller. The JCI Controller is
designed specically for use in a
Johnson Controls Metasys network.
The JCI100 communicates using
JCIs N2 protocol and is treated as an
addressed slave node on an N2 bus
OPC Server. The PRC OPC Server is
a software addition onto a PRC100
or 1000 system. It is designed as an
interface between the PRC system
and an OPC server/client
SOAP Server. The PRC SOAP Server
is a PRC100 system network add-on.
The PRC SOAP Server is designed
as an interface between a PRC100 or
1000 system and a SOAP client
BACnet Server. The PRC BACnet
Server is a PRC system network
add-on. The BACnet Server is
designed to interface between the
PRC100 or 1000 system and a BAS
provider using the BACnet protocol
PRC2000 Web-enabled BACnet
Controller. The PRC2000 BACnet
Controller provides direct
interface via the Web to a
BACnet BAS system
Refer to the factory for further infor-
mation on applying these interfaces.
System Interface Equipment
Computer
The System Interface Equipment
Provides Windows
-based
programming and monitoring
screens. The personal computer
functions as the central point for
data manipulation and program-
ming of the system. It communicates
with the system through a network
interface device that is connected
to the system through a twisted
pair network
The personal computer is not a
required component of a PRC100
network but is a useful tool for
centralized access and backup of
system controllers
An optional hand-held programmer
provides the capability to communi-
cate directly with the PRC100
system when maintenance of the
panel is required. The hand-held
programmer connects directly to
the PRC100 controllers RS-485
board maintenance port using
the supplied cable
Lighting Management Software
Software
The Lighting Management Software
Provides programming for the
following equipment:
Power switching equipment
Application-specic controllers
The Lighting Management Software
provides fully interactive easy-to-use
software screens for the following
functions:
System Setup
System Management
Controller Access and Modication
Data Logging and Backup
Remote Monitoring
The programming screens provide
access to all the capabilities that
exist in the power switching and
application-specic controllers
Additional software components
can be purchased that will allow for
the creation and use of custom
graphic screens and/or Web access
to a PRC100 system
Network components provide
exibility in establishing a PRC100
network. The network can consist of
either a pure twisted shielded net-
work or a combination of a twisted
shielded network and Ethernet.
Ethernet networks are accomplished
using the PRC100 Ethernet Server
To connect to a PRC100 network via
a PC, modem or remote LAN/WAN
connection, a Network Access Device
is required. There are two types of
Network Access Devices offered. The
rst is a Network Interface Box, which
allows connection via an RS-232 port.
The second is an Ethernet Server,
which is used for connection
via Ethernet
Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAT.73.01.T.E


September 2011

Contents

BuswayPow-R-Way

III

Low Voltage
24.0-1

Sheet

24

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

001

B
u
s
w
a
y
P
o
w
-
R
-
W
a
y

I
I
I

L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

BuswayPow-R-Way

III

Low Voltage


24.0-2

Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-2


24.0-2

Construction Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-3

Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-8

Physical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-11

Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-15

Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-16

Flanges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-19

Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-21

Tees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-23

Crosses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-24

Tap Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-25

Weatherheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-27

Expansion Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-28

Phase Transpositions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-28

Transformer Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-29

Transformer Throat Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-30

Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-31

Meter Center Power Takeoff Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-32

Busway Connected Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-34

Pow-R-Way

III

Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-35

Wall/Floor/Roof Flanges and End Closures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-36

Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-37

Plug-in Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-39

Surge Protective Device (SPD) Plug-in Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-41

Power Takeoffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-44

Receptacle Plug-in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-45

Plug-in Device Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-46

Plug-in Device Physical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-48

Construction Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-50

Installation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-51

Final Field Fit Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.0-52
Pow-R-Flex


24.1-1

Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.1-3

Physical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.1-4
100-Ampere Busway


24.2-1

Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.2-1

Plug-in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.2-8

Receptacle Plug-in Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.2-8

Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.2-9
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010

Pow-R-Way III Busway Installation
24.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011

BuswayPow-R-Way

III

Low Voltage

Sheet

24

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

General Description

002

General Description

Eatons Pow-R-Way

III

is a 600V, totally enclosed, non-
ventilated, sandwich bus design available with copper
bus bars in ratings from 2255000A or with aluminum
bus bars from 2254000A. Pow-R-Way

III

is available in
outdoor feeder, indoor feeder, indoor plug-in and indoor
sprinkler-proof congurations. All four types can be used
interchangeably without adapters or special splice plates
provided they are of the same current and system rating.
The short-circuit withstand ratings for plug-in busway are
equal to those of indoor and outdoor feeder busway.

Standards

Pow-R-Way

III

meets the requirements of NEMA

,
UL

857, CSA

C22.2 No. 27-94, IEEE

, ANSI, IEC, CE
and is manufactured in an ISO

9001 certied facility.

IEC Standards

Pow-R-Way

III

busway is self certied for all ratings
and KEMA certied on select ratings to conform to the
following IEC Standards: EN 60439-1:1999+A1:2004,
EN 60439-2:2000-03, EN 60529.

KEMA Certication

Pow-R-Way

III

busway has been certied by KEMA for the
following IEC 439-2 subclauses:

Seismic Qualication

Refer to

Tab 1

for information on seismic qualication for this
and other Eaton products.

Figure 24.0-1. Pow-R-Way

III

Joint Design
Figure 24.0-2. Conductor Congurations
Table 24.0-1. Pow-R-Way Designations, See Figure 24.0-2

100% ground consists of the 50% integral housing ground combined with
a 50% internal ground bus.

Table 24.0-2. IEC 439-2 Type Tests
Table 24.0-3. IEC 60529 IP Ratings

Note:

Outdoor feeder and sprinkler-proof plug-in busway joints
require eld-applied calk to meet above listed IP ratings.

Table 24.0-4. IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection
3-Phase, 3-Wire
with Housing Ground
3WH
A
B
C
3-Phase, 4-Wire
with Housing Ground
and 100% Neutral 4WH
A
B
C
N
3-Phase, 4-Wire
with Housing Ground
and 200% Neutral 4WNH
A
B
C
N
3-Phase, 3-Wire
with 50% Internal or
Isolated Ground Bus
3WG or 3WI
G
A
B
C
3-Phase, 4-Wire
Isolated Ground
Bus and 100% Neutral
4WG or 4WI
G
A
B
C
N
3-Phase, 4-Wire
Isolated Ground
Bus and 200% Neutral
4WNG or 4WNI
G
A
B
C
N

Available Conductor Including Grounding
Congurations and Neutral Options

3WG
3WI
3WH
3WHG
Three-phase, three-wire, 50% internal ground
Three-phase, three-wire, 50% isolated internal ground
Three-phase, three-wire, 50% integral housing ground
Three-phase, three-wire, 100% ground

4WG
4WI
4WH
4WHG
Three-phase, four-wire, 50% internal ground, 100% neutral
Three-phase, four-wire, 50% isolated internal ground, 100% neutral
Three-phase, four-wire, 50% integral housing ground, 100% neutral
Three-phase, four-wire, 100% ground

, 100% neutral
4WNG
4WNI
4WNH
4WNHG
Three-phase, four-wire, 50% internal ground, 200% neutral
Three-phase, four-wire, isolated internal ground, 200% neutral
Three-phase, four-wire, 50% integral housing ground, 200% neutral
Three-phase, four-wire, 100% ground

, 200% neutral

IEC 439-2
Subclause
Description

8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
Verication of temperature rise limits
Verication of dielectric properties
Verication of short-circuit strength
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.7
Verication of effectiveness of protective circuit
Verication of clearances and creepage distances
Verication of degree of protection
8.2.9
8.2.10
8.2.12
Verication of electrical characteristics
Verication of structural strength
Verication of crushing resistance
8.2.13
8.2.14
Verication of resistance of insulating materials to
abnormal heat
Verication of resistance of ame propagation

IEC 529
IP Rating
Busway
Type

IP2X
IP40
IP54
Pow-R-Way

III

plug-in busway; plug-in outlet protects
against access to live parts
Pow-R-Way

III

indoor plug-in and feeder busway
Pow-R-Way

III

sprinkler-proof plug-in busway
IP55
IP66
Pow-R-Way

III

outdoor feeder busway
Pow-R-Way

III

severe outdoor feeder busway

IEC 529
IP Rating
Description

IP40 Protection against access to hazardous parts with a wire
or solid foreign object 1 mm diameter. No protection
against water.
and dust shall not penetrate in quantity to interfere with
satisfactory operation or impair safety. Protects against
splashing water.
water jets.
powerful water jets.


24.0-3

September 2011

BuswayPow-R-Way

III

Low Voltage

Sheet

24

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43


003

Conductor/Insulation System

Construction Details, See Figure 24.0-3

Bus bars are fabricated from high strength, 98% conductivity
copper or 55% conductivity aluminum. The joint edge of each
busway conductor bar is beveled while the Pow-R-Bridge
conductor bars have full rounded edges. This makes for a
smooth and easy connection between the busway and
Pow-R-Bridge joint. The phase and neutral bars are insulated
with Class B 130C epoxy insulation. The epoxy powder is
applied by an automated uidized bed process to ensure
uniform thickness. The epoxy powder is applied over the full
length of the preheated bar except for the joint and plug-in
contact surfaces. After the powder has been fused to the bus
bar, the bars enter an oven to cure. This process ensures that
all of the epoxy powder cross links and hardens to the bus bar.
Fluidized bed applied epoxy provides resistance to water
absorption and chemical erosion. Epoxy has outstanding
heat transfer characteristics and is ideally suited for sandwich
bus applications. The uniform thickness and smooth surface
provided by epoxy ensures that the insulation will have no
cavities or voids and also provides excellent edge coverage
to the bars. Epoxy has excellent dielectric strength, is ame
retardant and resists impacts that other Class B insulating
material could not withstand.
Bus bars for plug-in applications have full-sized welded
conductor tabs at the contact location points of the plug-in
outlet. The tabs are of the same thickness as the conductor
bars. The plug-in conductor tabs extend into the plug-in
outlet, maintaining a true sandwich design throughout the
entire busway length.
The result is improved heat dissipation, better bracing and
elimination of the need to separate, or are, the conductor
bars at the plug-in opening. Maintaining a true sandwich
design also eliminates potential pathways for the
propagation of ame, smoke and gas through the busway
housing, commonly referred to as the chimney effect.
Silver-plating is applied to all joint and contact surfaces after
the uidized bed epoxy is applied. Aluminum bus bars are
silver-plated by the Alstan

88C process. Copper bus bars are
plated with silver by a ashing process. The silver-plating of
the conductor tabs provides an extremely durable contact
surface for the spring loaded connections of bus plug stab
assemblies.

Housing Details, See Figure 24.0-3

Pow-R-Way

III

is constructed with a rugged two-piece
extruded aluminum housing. There are no seams or welds
across the top or bottom sides of the housing. The housing
is bolted along the bottom sides below the bus bars with high
tensile strength zinc-plated hardware. No fastening bolts or
screws penetrate the housing or enter the bus bar package.
Pow-R-Way

III

achieves the highest 6-cycle short-circuit
withstand ratings available in the industry today. The non-
magnetic, all-aluminum housing provides for excellent heat
dissipation and a signicant reduction in reactance and
magnetic ux leakage as compared to a steel or steel and
aluminum combination housing. The integrity and strength
of the housing ensures speciers and users of a safe and
durable installation over a broad spectrum of industrial and
commercial applications.
A protective nish of ANSI 61, epoxy powder paint is applied
by an automated electrostatic process.

Integral Ground

The two-piece, extruded aluminum housing is designed,
manufactured and UL listed as a 50% integral ground path
(integral earth) and is fully fault rated. The system ground
continuity is maintained through each joint by the ground
path end blocks, ground path plates and joint covers. The
aluminum joint covers are furnished with ground path
contact surfaces on the inside of each end. When the covers
are installed, the contact surfaces are bolted directly to the
ground path end blocks with four 3/8-16 1/2-inch (12.7 mm)
hex bolts per cover.
A highly visible label is furnished on each joint cover to alert
the installer that the covers must be properly installed to
maintain the ground path. The result is a 50% ground path
that ensures ground continuity with very low resistance
characteristics.

Internal Ground Option

Pow-R-Way

III

offers a 50% ground bus (copper or aluminum)
that is internal to the busway.

Isolated Ground Option

To meet the growing demand for grounding isolation,
Pow-R-Way

III

offers a 50% isolated ground bus that is
insulated and internal to the busway. This option is available
for application to operations with heavy microprocessor-
based loads or large computer installations where
grounding isolation is essential.

Figure 24.0-3. Housing Assembly
24.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011

BuswayPow-R-Way

III

Low Voltage

Sheet

24

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43


004

200% Neutral Option, See Figure 24.0-4

Pow-R-Way

III

offers a fully rated, 200% neutral bus option for
busway fed distribution systems with nonlinear loads. The
additional neutral capacity prevents the overheating caused
by zero sequence harmonic currents. The Pow-R-Way

III

200% neutral is manufactured with a single 0.50-inch
(12.7 mm) thick bus bar, which receives the same silver-plating
and Class B, 130C Epoxy insulation as the phase bars.
Power System Harmonics are generated by various types of
nonlinear loads. A sinusoidal voltage applied to a nonlinear
load will result in a non-sinusoidal current and waveform
distortion. Loads that are switched or pulsed, such as
rectiers, thyristors and switch-mode power supplies,
are nonlinear. With the proliferation of electronics into
industrial, commercial and institutional applications,
nonlinear loads have become a signicant and critical
component of most modern distribution and control
systems. Examples of nonlinear loads are personal
computers, UPS systems, variable frequency motor
controllers, electronic lighting ballasts, fax and copying
machines, medical test equipment and many other
microprocessor-based apparatus.
Nonlinear load currents typically are extremely high in
harmonic content. The harmonics create numerous problems
in electrical systems and equipment. Some harmonics are
negative sequence with 120 phase displacement (this means
the phase rotation is ACB instead of ABC). Positive sequence
harmonics have 120 phase displacement, but are of the same
rotation as the distribution system. Certain nonlinear loads
cause odd triplen harmonics which are zero sequence with
no phase displacement.
Balancing the phase load currents in a three-phase, four-
wire system will normally reduce neutral currents to zero
if load currents have an undistorted sinusoidal waveform.
However, because zero sequence harmonics are additive
and will not cancel each other in the neutral, the neutral
current can be as high as 1.73 times the phase current, even
with the phase currents perfectly balanced. This can result in
overheated neutrals and lead to deterioration of equipment
performance and a shortened equipment life cycle.
The Computer and Business Equipment Manufacturers
Association (CBEMA) recommends that neutrals be
oversized to at least 173% of the ampacity of the phase
conductors to prevent problems. Pow-R-Way

III

offers a fully
rated, 200% neutral bus option for busway fed distribution
systems with non-sinusoidal loads. The additional neutral
capacity prevents the overheating caused by high harmonic
neutral currents.

Figure 24.0-4. 200% Neutral Cross Section
UL Fire Stop System

Pow-R-Way

III

busway may be used in UL listed through-
penetration re stop systems. Systems applicable to busway
(i.e., system number C-AJ-6002) are listed in the UL Fire
Resistance Directory under Through-Penetration Fire Stop
Systems and have met the ASTEM E814 (UL 1479) criteria.
For typical installations shown in Figure 24.0-5, the installing
contractor uses mineral wool batt and re stop sealant. In
riser applications, the system is used in combination with
Pow-R-Way III vertical spring hangers and a oor ange. In
horizontal applications, the system is used in combination with
two wall anges, one on each side of the wall, and sealant.
Note: This information is provided as a guideline for typical re stop
systems. Consult the re stop system sealant manufacturer for the
UL le number and specic product information.
Figure 24.0-5. Typical Installations of Pow-R-Way III in
Fire Stop Systems
Top
Pow-R-Way III, Three-Phase Four-Wire
with Housing Ground and 200% Neutral
A
B
C
N
Floor Flange
12 Ga Steel
Mounting Support
(by Others)
Vertical
Hanger
T
Floor
Firestop Material
Suggest 3m, Specified
Technologies, or Equivalent
Manufacturer Fire Stop Products
UL 1479 Listed
Floor Flange (Optional)
UL Listed Pow-R-Way III
Busway
24.0-5
September 2011
BuswayPow-R-Way IIILow Voltage
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
005
Pow-R-Bridge, See Figure 24.0-6
Pow-R-Way III joint connections are made with the
Pow-R-Bridge joint package, which is installed on each
section of busway prior to shipment. A double-headed,
torque-indicating bolt is provided to ensure that proper
installation torque is achieved. Fall-away instruction tags
are furnished on the torque-indicating bolt heads to allow
for visual inspection from a distance. When the proper
torque value is achieved, the top bolt head will shear off and
allow the tag to fall to the oor. Any joint that is improperly
torqued will retain the highly visible (caution yellow) tag at
the bolt head.
The Pow-R-Bridge can provide an adjustment of 0.50 inch
(12.7 mm) at each joint. Over adjustment is prevented by
the joint covers, which will only allow a 0.50-inch (12.7 mm)
adjustment to be made and by stopping lances on the
conductor bars of the Pow-R-Bridge. The non-rotating design
of the Pow-R-Bridge maintains its conguration integrity
when it has been removed from a section of busway. The
conductors and insulators will not displace or swivel,
making reinstallation of the Pow-R-Bridge quick and easy.
Outdoor Pow-R-Bridge, See Figure 24.0-7
Joint connections for outdoor feeder busway are made with
a weatherized version of the Pow-R-Bridge joint. Aluminum
water barriers, 1/16-inch (1.6 mm) thick, are provided across
the T and T opposite sides of both joint ends on each
section of outdoor busway. Closed cell, neoprene gaskets
are applied to the top of each water barrier and to the inside
of the aluminum side access covers. The aluminum side
access covers overlap the top and bottom access covers and
bolt directly onto the end blocks. The outdoor Pow-R-Bridge
has the same 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) adjustability and features
as the indoor unit and is UL listed.
Table 24.0-5. Busway Pow-R-Bridge Joint Dimensions
Figure 24.0-6. Indoor Bridge Joint Features
Figure 24.0-7. Outdoor Bridge Joint Features
Figure 24.0-8. Pow-R-Bridge Joint
Ampere Rating Figure 24.0-8
Congurations
Width Length
UL 857 IEC 439 Inches (mm) Inches (mm)
Copper
225
400
600
225
400
630
A
A
A
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
800
1000
1200
1000
1200
1400
A
A
A
4.50 (114.3)
5.12 (130.0)
5.62 (142.8)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
1350
1600
2000
1550
1800
2250
A
A
A
6.12 (155.4)
7.12 (180.9)
8.38 (212.9)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
2500
3200
4000
5000
3000
3800
4500
5800
B
C
C
D
10.88 (276.4)
15.88 (403.4)
18.38 (466.9)
23.41 (594.6)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
Aluminum
225
400
600
A
A
A
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
800
1000
1200
A
A
A
5.62 (142.8)
6.12 (155.4)
7.12 (180.9)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
1350
1600
2000
A
B
B
8.38 (212.9)
9.12 (231.6)
10.88 (276.4)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
2500
3200
4000
C
D
D
18.38 (466.9)
19.88 (505.0)
23.41 (594.6)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
7.38 (187.5)
Bridge Joint
Pressure Plate
(Top & Bottom)
Double-headed
Torque-Indicating
Bolt (Bottom)
Belleville
Washer
Ground Path Plate
Bridge Joint
Retainer Screw
Ground Path
End Block
130 Epoxy
Insulation
on Bars
.375-16 flg.
Head Hex Bolt
(4 per Cover)
Joint Cover
Ground
Path Label
Captive Nut
Retainer
Ground Path
End Block
High Strength
Glass Polyester
Insulators
Ground
Path Contact
Surface
1/4-20 flg.
Head Hex Bolt
(4 per cover)
Ground
Path Contact
Surface
Gasketed
Rear Joint
Cover
Closed Cell
Neoprene Gasket
Water Barrier
End Block
Double-Headed
Joint Torque Bolt
Bridge Joint Retainer Screw
Belleville
Washer
p & Bottom) )
Captive Nut
Retainer
Pow-R-Bridge Joint
Water Barrier
Ground Path
End Block
orque Bolt
Access Opening
Drain
Hole Plug
Ground
Path Label
Gasketed
Front Joint
Cover
Gasketed Top
Access Cover
Drain
Hole Plug
Gasketed Torque
Bolt Access Cap
(Top & Bottom)
Gasketed
Cover Plate
Gasketed Bottom
Access Cover
Gasketed
Cover Plate
(L)
C
L
C
L
W
L
W/2
L/2
Figure D
AL 3200 and 4000 Ampere
CU 5000 Ampere
C
L
C
L
W
L
W/2
L/2
Figure C
AL 2500 Ampere
CU 3200 and 4000 Ampere
C
L
C
L
W
L
W/2
L/2
Figure A
AL 225 1350 Ampere
CU 225 2000 Ampere
C
L
C
L
W
L
W/2
L/2
Figure B
AL 1600 and 2000 Ampere
CU 2500 Ampere
24.0-6
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
006
Pow-R-Way III Feeder Busway, See Figure 24.0-9 and Table 24.0-6
2255000A copper
2254000A aluminum
Straight sections of feeder busway can be supplied in any
length, at 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) increments, from a 16.00-inch
(406.4 mm) minimum to a 10-foot (3048 mm) maximum.
Figure 24.0-9 illustrates the conguration of feeder busway
and Pow-R-Bridge for the available ampere ratings. See
Table 24.0-6 below for reference to the proper conguration.
Table 24.0-6. Feeder Busway Conguration
Each section will include one, factory installed, Pow-R-Bridge
mounted to the left end of the busway (with the T to
the top, when viewing the bus from the F side). Each
Pow-R-Bridge will have a T label that must always
match the T orientation of the busway.
Figure 24.0-9. Feeder Busway
Conguration
UL 857 IEC 439
Cu Al Cu
225
400
600
225
400
600
225
400
630
A
A
A
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
1000
1200
1400
A
A
A
1350
1600
2000
1350
1550
1800
2250
A
A
A
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
B
B
C
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
C
D
D
16.00 Minimum
(406.4)
Configuration A Top View
1 Bar Per Phase
Configuration B Top View
1 Bar Per Phase
Configuration C Top View
2 Bars Per Phase
Configuration D Top View
2 Bars Per Phase
T
F
C
L
CC C
L
CC
F
T
T
F
C
L
CC C
L
CC
F
T
T
F
C
L
CC C
L
CC
F
T
T
F
C
L
CC C
L
CC
F
T
T
F
C
L
CC C
L
CC
Front View
24.0-7
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
007
Pow-R-Way III Plug-in Busway, See Figure 24.0-10 and
Tables 24.0-7 and 24.0-8
2255000A copper
2254000A aluminum
Straight sections of plug-in busway are made only in
24.00-inch (609.6 mm) incremental lengths with a
maximum length of 10 feet (3m). Figure 24.0-10 depicts
the conguration of plug-in busway and Pow-R-Bridge
for the available ampere ratings. See Table 24.0-7 below
for reference to the proper conguration.
Table 24.0-7. Conguration
Table 24.0-8 below illustrates the quantity of plug-in
openings per side that are available per standard section.
Table 24.0-8. Number of Plug-in Openings
Each section will include one, factory installed, Pow-R-Bridge
mounted to the left end of the busway (with the T label
to the top, when viewing the bus from the F side). Each
Pow-R-Bridge will have a T label that must always match
the T orientation of the busway.
Plug-in Outlet
The plug-in outlet and cover are made from a durable, high
strength, polycarbonate material that is rated as Class B,
130C, insulation. The plug-in cover is designed to protect
the contact surfaces and prevent the entry of dirt, dust or
moisture. The cover has a positive screw close feature that
prohibits the opening of the cover without the use of a tool.
The cover is also utility leadlock sealable.
As a countermeasure to the effects of thermal expansion
and mechanical vibration, the plug-in outlet is secured to the
busway housing with high tensile strength locking hardware.
Figure 24.0-10. Plug-In Busway
Figure 24.0-11. Plug-In Outlet Cover
Conguration
UL 857 IEC 439
Cu Al Cu
225
400
600
225
400
630
225
400
630
A
A
A
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
1000
1200
1400
A
A
A
1350
1600
2000
1350
1550
1800
2250
A
A
A
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
B
B
C
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
C
D
D
Duct Length Number of Plug-In Openings
Inches mm Front Back
24.00
48.00
72.00
609.6
1219.2
1828.8
1
2
3
1
2
3
96.00
120.00
2438.4
3048.0
4
5
4
5
12.00
(304.8) (609.6)
12.00
(304.8)
1 Bar Per Phase
F F
F F
C
L
CC C
L
CC
CC
LL
CCCC CC
LL
CCCC
T T
12.00
(304.8) (609.6)
12.00
(304.8)
1 Bar Per Phase
Configuration C Top View
2 Bars Per Phase
Configuration D Top View
2 Bars Per Phase
C
L
CC CC CC C
L
CC
12.00
(304.8) (609.6)
12.00
(304.8)
C
L
CC C
L
CC
CC
L
CCCC CC
L
CCCC
F F
12.00
(304.8) (609.6)
12.00
(304.8)
12.00
(304.8)
24.00 Spacing
(609.6)
12.00
(304.8)
F F
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C C
Front View
T T
Cover Can Be Hinged
on Either Side
High Strength
Polycarbonate
Class B 130C
Positive
Screw Close
Feature
Fingersafe
Plug-in
Opening
Leadlock
Sealable
Hinge
Pins
A
C
N
B
G
24.0-8
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Electrical Data
008
Electrical Data
Table 24.0-9. Short-Circuit Rating
Table 24.0-10. Resistance, Reactance and ImpedanceAluminum
Table 24.0-11. Resistance, Reactance and ImpedanceCopper
Table 24.0-12. Resistance Values for Integral Housing Ground (Only)
Milliohms Per 100 Feet (30.5m)
Derating Chart for Higher Ambient Temperatures
Pow-R-Way III busway may be operated continuously at its
assigned ratings without exceeding the maximum hot spot
temperature rise of 55C, provided the ambient temperature
does not exceed 55C. For higher ambient temperatures,
the ratings should be reduced by applying the appropriate
multiplier shown in the following chart.
Table 24.0-13. Higher Ambient Temperature Multipliers
UL 857
Ampere
Rating
6-Cycle rms Symmetrical
Maximum Class L Fuse
Needed to Achieve
6-Cycle rms Series Rating
Plug-In Feeder 100 kA 200 kA
Aluminum
225
400
600
85,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
2000
2000
2000
1200
1200
1200
800
1000
1200
100,000
100,000
125,000
100,000
100,000
125,000
2500
2500
2500
1350
1600
2000
150,000
150,000
150,000
150,000
150,000
150,000
4000
4000
4000
2500
3200
4000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
Copper
225
400
600
85,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
2000
2000
2000
1600
1600
1600
800
1000
1200
85,000
100,000
100,000
85,000
100,000
100,000
2000
1600
3000
3000
1350
1600
2000
100,000
125,000
150,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
3000
3000
4000
2500
3200
4000
5000
150,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
150,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
4000
Milliohms per 100 feet (30.5m)

Line-to-Neutral Aluminum Plug-in and Feeder Busway
UL 857
Ampere Rating
Resistance
R
Reactance
X
Impedance
Z
225
400
600
4.38
4.38
4.38
1.17
1.17
1.17
4.54
4.54
4.54
800
1000
1200
2.67
2.29
1.76
0.99
0.84
0.64
2.84
2.44
1.87
1350
1600
2000
1.39
1.25
1.01
0.49
0.43
0.34
1.47
1.32
1.07
2500
3200
4000
0.71
0.62
0.50
0.27
0.24
0.19
0.76
0.67
0.54
Milliohms per 100 feet (30.5m)
Line-to-Neutral Copper Plug-in and Feeder Busway
UL 857
Ampere Rating
Resistance
R
Reactance
X
Impedance
Z
225
400
600
2.30
2.30
2.30
1.20
1.20
1.20
2.59
2.59
2.59
800
1000
1200
2.30
1.67
1.39
1.20
0.95
0.78
2.59
1.93
1.60
1350
1600
2000
1.20
0.94
0.76
0.66
0.50
0.39
1.37
1.07
0.85
2500
3200
4000
5000
0.55
0.47
0.38
0.27
0.26
0.31
0.24
0.16
0.61
0.57
0.45
0.32
UL 857
Ampere Rating
Aluminum Phase
Conductors
Copper Phase
Conductors
225
400
600
1.04
1.04
1.04
1.04
1.04
1.04
800
1000
1200
0.95
0.92
0.85
1.04
0.99
0.95
1350
1600
2000
0.72
0.68
0.61
0.92
0.85
0.72
2500
3200
4000
5000
0.36
0.34
0.30
0.61
0.43
0.36
0.30
Ambient
Temperature C
Multiplier
55
60
65
1.00
0.95
0.90
70
75
80
85
0.85
0.80
0.74
0.68
24.0-9
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Electrical Data
009
Line-to-Line Voltage Drop
The table below gives average three-phase voltage drop
per m) at rated current and varying power factor. Line-to-
neutral voltage drop is obtained by multiplying the line
value by 0.577.
Table 24.0-14. Line-to-Line Voltage Drop
Notes:
Voltage Drop = 3 I (R cos + X sin ) Volts/100 ft (30.5m)concentrated load, where cos = power factor.
For plug-in distributed loads, divide the voltage drop by 2. See IEEE Standard 141-13-8.3.
Actual voltage drop for loads less than full rated current and different lengths may be calculated by multiplying the values from
Table 24.0-14 by (actual/rated current) x (actual length/100 ft [30.5m]).
UL 857
Ampere Rating
Percent Power Factor
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Copper
225
400
600
0.47
0.83
1.25
0.55
0.97
1.47
0.62
1.10
1.67
0.68
1.23
1.87
0.75
1.34
2.05
0.80
1.44
2.21
0.85
1.53
2.35
0.89
1.60
2.47
0.91
1.65
2.54
0.92
1.65
2.56
0.80
1.45
2.26
800
1000
1200
1.66
1.64
1.61
1.97
1.93
1.90
2.26
2.19
2.16
2.53
2.43
2.41
2.79
2.66
2.64
3.03
2.88
2.85
3.24
3.06
3.03
3.40
3.19
3.17
3.52
3.29
3.27
3.57
3.31
3.29
3.18
2.90
2.90
1350
1600
2000
1.54
1.39
1.34
1.81
1.65
1.60
2.07
1.89
1.84
2.31
2.11
2.07
2.53
2.32
2.28
2.74
2.52
2.48
2.92
2.68
2.65
3.06
2.82
2.79
3.16
2.91
2.89
3.18
2.95
2.93
2.81
2.62
2.62
2500
3200
4000
5000
1.15
1.61
1.67
1.43
1.39
1.85
1.92
1.66
1.61
2.07
2.16
1.88
1.82
2.27
2.38
2.08
2.01
2.46
2.58
2.27
2.20
2.63
2.76
2.44
2.36
2.76
2.91
2.58
2.49
2.86
3.02
2.69
2.59
2.92
3.08
2.76
2.64
2.89
3.07
2.76
2.39
2.46
2.62
2.39
Aluminum
225
400
600
0.46
0.81
1.21
0.61
1.09
1.66
0.76
1.36
2.10
0.90
1.62
2.52
1.03
1.87
2.93
1.17
2.11
3.33
1.29
2.34
3.70
1.40
2.55
4.04
1.50
2.74
4.35
1.58
2.88
4.61
1.54
2.81
4.55
800
1000
1200
1.37
1.45
1.33
1.73
1.84
1.69
2.08
2.21
2.03
2.41
2.57
2.36
2.73
2.91
2.68
3.03
3.24
2.98
3.31
3.54
3.25
3.55
3.80
3.50
3.76
4.03
3.70
3.90
4.18
3.85
3.69
3.98
3.65
1350
1600
2000
1.15
1.20
1.18
1.47
1.55
1.25
1.78
1.87
1.86
2.07
2.19
2.18
2.36
2.49
2.48
2.62
2.78
2.78
2.87
3.04
3.05
3.09
3.28
3.29
3.28
3.48
3.51
3.41
3.63
3.66
3.25
3.46
3.51
2500
3200
4000
1.19
1.26
1.31
1.49
1.58
1.66
1.78
1.88
1.99
2.05
2.17
2.30
2.32
2.45
2.61
2.57
2.71
2.89
2.80
2.96
3.16
2.99
3.16
3.39
3.16
3.34
3.59
3.27
3.46
3.72
3.07
3.25
3.52
24.0-10
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Electrical Data
010
IEC Electrical Data
Table 24.0-15. IEC 439-2 RatingsCopper
Table 24.0-16. Line-to-Line Voltage Drop (MV Per Meter)Copper
Notes:
For plug-in distributed loads, divide the voltage drop by 2.
Actual voltage drop for loads less than full rated current and
different lengths may be calculated by multiplying the values from
Table 24.0-16 by (actual/rated current) x (actual length/100 ft [30.5m]).
Housing Ground vs. Internal Ground
Eatons Pow-R-Way III busway offers a variety of grounding
options. Two of which are 50% integral housing ground and
50% internal ground.
The 50% internal ground option has a separate ground
conductor internal to the housing, which is rated 50% of
the phase conductor.
The integral housing ground is where the extruded aluminum
housing is used as the ground path and no internal ground
conductor is provided. The housing is UL listed as a 50%
integral ground path. This type of ground path is as
effective of a ground conductor as an internal ground bar.
Table 24.0-17 shows a cross-sectional comparison between
the aluminum housing and internal ground bar. The integral
housing ground provides a larger ground path, which is over
100% of the cross-sectional area of the phase conductors.
Figure 24.0-12 illustrates the difference between the two
grounding options.
Table 24.0-17. Housing Ground vs. Internal Ground Comparison
Figure 24.0-12. Housing Ground vs. Internal Ground
IEC 439
Ampere
Rating
1-Second rms
Symmetrical Short-
Circuit Rating
Micro-Ohms Per Meter
Resistance
R
Reactance
X
Impedance
Z
225
400
630
35,000
35,000
35,000
80.80
80.80
80.80
27.00
27.00
27.00
85.20
85.20
85.20
800
1000
1200
35,000
35,000
55,000
80.80
80.80
63.40
27.00
27.00
22.30
85.20
85.20
67.20
1400
1550
1800
65,000
70,000
80,000
50.80
39.70
29.40
22.60
26.90
22.90
55.60
48.00
37.30
2250
3000
3800
85,000
100,000
120,000
26.20
17.80
13.90
11.60
9.12
10.30
28.80
20.00
17.30
4500
5800
120,000
120,000
13.10
9.11
7.05
5.00
14.90
10.40
IEC 439
Ampere
Rating
Percent Power Factor
50 60 70 80 90 100
225
400
630
26.23
47.21
72.46
27.87
50.16
77.05
29.18
52.46
80.98
29.84
54.10
83.28
30.16
54.10
83.97
26.23
47.54
74.10
800
1000
1200
99.34
94.43
94.43
106.23
100.59
100.59
111.48
104.59
104.59
115.41
107.87
107.87
117.05
108.52
108.52
104.26
95.08
95.08
1400
1550
1800
93.44
89.84
82.62
99.34
95.74
87.87
103.93
100.33
92.46
107.21
103.74
95.41
107.87
104.26
96.72
95.08
92.13
85.90
2250
3000
3800
81.31
72.13
86.23
86.89
77.38
90.49
91.74
81.64
93.77
94.75
84.92
95.74
96.07
86.56
94.75
85.90
78.36
80.66
4500
5800
90.49
80.00
95.41
84.59
99.21
88.20
100.98
90.62
100.66
90.49
85.90
78.36
Ampere
Rating
Bar Size
In Inches
Bar Per
Phase
Cross-Sectional
Area (sq-in)
UL 857 IEC 439 Internal
Ground
Housing
Ground
Cu Al Cu
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
0.125 x 1.63
0.125 x 1.63
0.125 x 1.63
1
1
1
0.20
0.20
0.20
2.37
2.48
2.48
800
1000
1200
630
800
1000
1200
1200
0.125 x 1.63
0.125 x 2.25
0.125 x 2.75
1
1
1
0.20
0.28
0.34
2.48
2.54
2.69
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1600
2250
0.125 x 3.25
0.125 x 4.25
0.125 x 5.50
1
1
1
0.41
0.53
0.69
2.83
3.11
3.46
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3200
0.125 x 6.25
0.125 x 8.00
0.125 x 4.25
1
1
2
0.78
1.00
1.06
3.68
4.17
6.22
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
0.125 x 5.50
0.125 x 6.25
0.125 x 8.00
2
2
2
1.38
1.56
2.00
6.92
7.36
8.34
Integral Housing Ground
Internal Ground Bar
24.0-11
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
011
Physical Data
DimensionsBus Bar and Housing
Table 24.0-18. Three-Wire with No Neutral
100% ground available with same dimensions that use 50% internal ground and 50% internal housing ground.
Refer to Figure 24.0-13 on Page 24.0-12 for conguration A and B.

Table 24.0-19. Four-Wire with 100% Neutral
100% ground available with same dimensions that use 50% internal ground and 50% internal housing ground.
Refer to Figure 24.0-13 on Page 24.0-12 for conguration A and B.

Ampere Rating Phase Bar Size
(Depth and Width)
Inches (mm)
Bar
Per
Phase
Conductor Conguration and Housing Size (Width x Height) Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439 50% Integral
Housing Ground 3WH
50% Internal
Ground Bus 3WHG
50% Internal
Isolated Ground 3WI
Figure 24.0-15
Conguration
Cu Al Cu
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
1
1
1
4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)
4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)
4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)
4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)
4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)
4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)
4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)
4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)
4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)
A
A
A
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
0.25 x 2.25 (6.4 x 57.2)
0.25 x 2.75 (6.4 x 69.9)
1
1
1
4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)
5.38 x 4.38 (136.7 x 111.3)
5.88 x 4.38 (149.3 x 111.3)
4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)
5.38 x 4.50 (136.7 x 114.3)
5.88 x 4.50 (149.3 x 114.3)
4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)
5.38 x 4.55 (136.7 x 115.6)
5.88 x 4.55 (149.3 x 115.6)
A
A
A
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
0.25 x 3.25 (6.4 x 82.6)
0.25 x 4.25 (6.4 x 108.0)
0.25 x 5.50 (6.4 x 139.7)
1
1
1
6.38 x 4.38 (162.1 x 111.3)
7.38 x 4.38 (187.5 x 111.3)
8.64 x 4.38 (219.5 x 111.3)
6.38 x 4.50 (162.1 x 114.3)
7.38 x 4.50 (187.5 x 114.3)
8.64 x 4.50 (219.5 x 114.3)
6.38 x 4.55 (162.1 x 115.6)
7.38 x 4.55 (187.5 x 115.6)
8.64 x 4.55 (219.5 x 115.6)
A
A
A
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
0.25 x 6.25 (6.4 x 158.8)
0.25 x 8.00 (6.4 x 203.2)
0.25 x 4.25 (6.4 x 108.0)
1
1
2
9.40 x 4.38 (238.8 x 111.3)
11.17 x 4.38 (283.7 x 111.3)
16.14 x 4.38 (410.0 x 111.3)
9.40 x 4.50 (238.8 x 114.3)
11.17 x 4.50 (283.7 x 114.3)
16.14 x 4.50 (410.0 x 114.3)
9.40 x 4.55 (238.8 x 115.6)
11.17 x 4.55 (283.7 x 115.6)
16.14 x 4.55 (410.0 x 115.6)
A
A
B
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
0.25 x 5.50 (6.4 x 139.7)
0.25 x 6.25 (6.4 x 158.8)
0.25 x 8.00 (6.4 x 203.2)
2
2
2
18.64 x 4.38 (473.5 x 111.3)
20.16 x 4.38 (512.1 x 111.3)
23.70 x 4.38 (602.0 x 111.3)
18.64 x 4.50 (473.5 x 114.3)
20.16 x 4.50 (512.1 x 114.3)
23.70 x 4.50 (602.0 x 114.3)
18.64 x 4.55 (473.5 x 115.6)
20.16 x 4.55 (512.1 x 115.6)
23.70 x 4.55 (602.0 x 115.6)
B
B
B
Ampere Rating Phase Bar Size
(Depth and Width)
Inches (mm)
Bar
Per
Phase
Housing Ground 4WH
50% Internal
Ground Bus 4WHG
50% Internal
Isolated Ground 4WI
Figure 24.0-15
Conguration
Cu Al Cu
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
1
1
1
4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)
4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)
4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)
4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)
4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)
4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)
4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)
4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)
4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)
A
A
A
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
0.25 x 2.25 (6.4 x 57.2)
0.25 x 2.75 (6.4 x 69.9)
1
1
1
4.75 x 4.38 (120.7 x 111.3)
5.38 x 4.38 (136.7 x 111.3)
5.88 x 4.38 (149.3 x 111.3)
4.75 x 4.50 (120.7 x 114.3)
5.38 x 4.50 (136.7 x 114.3)
5.88 x 4.50 (149.3 x 114.3)
4.75 x 4.55 (120.7 x 115.6)
5.38 x 4.55 (136.7 x 115.6)
5.88 x 4.55 (149.3 x 115.6)
A
A
A
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
0.25 x 3.25 (6.4 x 82.6)
0.25 x 4.25 (6.4 x 108.0)
0.25 x 5.50 (6.4 x 139.7)
1
1
1
6.38 x 4.38 (162.1 x 111.3)
7.38 x 4.38 (187.5 x 111.3)
8.64 x 4.38 (219.5 x 111.3)
6.38 x 4.50 (162.1 x 114.3)
7.38 x 4.50 (187.5 x 114.3)
8.64 x 4.50 (219.5 x 114.3)
6.38 x 4.55 (162.1 x 115.6)
7.38 x 4.55 (187.5 x 115.6)
8.64 x 4.55 (219.5 x 115.6)
A
A
A
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
0.25 x 6.25 (6.4 x 158.8)
0.25 x 8.00 (6.4 x 203.2)
0.25 x 4.25 (6.4 x 108.0)
1
1
2
9.40 x 4.38 (238.8 x 111.3)
11.17 x 4.38 (283.7 x 111.3)
16.14 x 4.38 (410.0 x 111.3)
9.40 x 4.50 (238.8 x 114.3)
11.17 x 4.50 (283.7 x 114.3)
16.14 x 4.50 (410.0 x 114.3)
9.40 x 4.55 (238.8 x 115.6)
11.17 x 4.55 (283.7 x 115.6)
16.14 x 4.55 (410.0 x 115.6)
A
A
B
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
0.25 x 5.50 (6.4 x 139.7)
0.25 x 6.25 (6.4 x 158.8)
0.25 x 8.00 (6.4 x 203.2)
2
2
2
18.64 x 4.38 (473.5 x 111.3)
20.16 x 4.38 (512.1 x 111.3)
23.70 x 4.38 (602.0 x 111.3)
18.64 x 4.50 (473.5 x 114.3)
20.16 x 4.50 (512.1 x 114.3)
23.70 x 4.50 (602.0 x 114.3)
18.64 x 4.55 (473.5 x 115.6)
20.16 x 4.55 (512.1 x 115.6)
23.70 x 4.55 (602.0 x 115.6)
B
B
B
24.0-12
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
012
DimensionsBus Bar and Housing (Continued)
Table 24.0-20. Four-Wire with 200% Neutral
Neutral bar is 0.5 (12.7) x Width shown.
100% ground available with same dimensions that use 50% internal ground and 50% integral housing ground.
Refer to Figure 24.0-13 for Conguration A and B.

Figure 24.0-13. Pow-R-Way III Cross-Section Dimensions
Ampere Rating Phase Bar Size (Depth
and Width)
Inches (mm)
Bar
Per
Phase
Housing Ground 4WH
50% Internal
Ground Bus 4WHG
50% Internal
Isolated Ground 4WI
Figure 24.0-15
Conguration
Cu Al Cu
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
1
1
1
4.75 x 4.92 (120.7 x 125.0)
4.75 x 4.92 (120.7 x 125.0)
4.75 x 4.92 (120.7 x 125.0)
4.75 x 5.05 (120.7 x 128.2)
4.75 x 5.05 (120.7 x 128.2)
4.75 x 5.05 (120.7 x 128.2)
4.75 x 5.10 (120.7 x 129.5)
4.75 x 5.10 (120.7 x 129.5)
4.75 x 5.10 (120.7 x 129.5)
A
A
A
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
0.25 x 1.62 (6.4 x 41.1)
0.25 x 2.25 (6.4 x 57.2)
0.25 x 2.75 (6.4 x 69.9)
1
1
1
4.75 x 4.92 (120.7 x 125.0)
5.38 x 4.92 (136.7 x 125.0)
5.88 x 4.92 (149.3 x 125.0)
4.75 x 5.05 (120.7 x 128.2)
5.38 x 5.05 (136.7 x 128.2)
5.88 x 5.05 (149.3 x 128.2)
4.75 x 5.10 (120.7 x 129.5)
5.38 x 5.10 (136.7 x 129.5)
5.88 x 5.10 (149.3 x 129.5)
A
A
A
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
0.25 x 3.25 (6.4 x 82.6)
0.25 x 4.25 (6.4 x 108.0)
0.25 x 5.50 (6.4 x 139.7)
1
1
1
6.38 x 4.92 (162.1 x 125.0)
7.38 x 4.92 (187.5 x 125.0)
8.64 x 4.92 (219.5 x 125.0)
6.38 x 5.05 (162.1 x 128.2)
7.38 x 5.05 (187.5 x 128.2)
8.64 x 5.05 (219.5 x 128.2)
6.38 x 5.10 (162.1 x 129.5)
7.38 x 5.10 (187.5 x 129.5)
8.64 x 5.10 (219.5 x 129.5)
A
A
A
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
0.25 x 6.25 (6.4 x 158.8)
0.25 x 8.00 (6.4 x 203.2)
0.25 x 4.25 (6.4 x 108.0)
1
1
2
9.40 x 4.92 (238.8 x 125.0)
11.17 x 4.92 (283.7 x 125.0)
16.14 x 4.92 (410.0 x 125.0)
9.40 x 5.05 (238.8 x 128.2)
11.17 x 5.05 (283.7 x 128.2)
16.14 x 5.05 (410.0 x 128.2)
9.40 x 5.10 (238.8 x 129.5)
11.17 x 5.10 (283.7 x 129.5)
16.14 x 5.10 (410.0 x 129.5)
A
A
B
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
0.25 x 5.50 (6.4 x 139.7)
0.25 x 6.25 (6.4 x 158.8)
0.25 x 8.00 (6.4 x 203.2)
2
2
2
18.64 x 4.92 (473.5 x 125.0)
20.16 x 4.92 (512.1 x 125.0)
23.70 x 4.92 (602.0 x 125.0)
18.64 x 5.05 (473.5 x 128.2)
20.16 x 5.05 (512.1 x 128.2)
23.70 x 5.05 (602.0 x 128.2)
18.64 x 5.10 (473.5 x 129.5)
20.16 x 5.10 (512.1 x 129.5)
23.70 x 5.10 (602.0 x 129.5)
B
B
B
225 to 2000 Ampere Aluminum
225 to 2500 Ampere Copper
2500 to 4000 Ampere Aluminum
3200 to 5000 Ampere Copper
Width
Height
Configuration A
Width
Height
Configuration B
A
B
CC
N
A
B
C
N
A
B
CC
N
24.0-13
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
013
Weights
Table 24.0-21. Weight (lb ft) and Current Density (Amperes/in
2
)
Table 24.0-22. Weight (kg/M) and Current Density (Amperes/cm
2
)
Ampere
Rating
Current Density
Amperes/In
2
WeightIncluding Integral Housing Ground
(lb ft)
UL 857 IEC 439 UL 857 IEC 439 Three-Wire Four-Wire
100% Neutral
Four-Wire
200% Neutral
Add for Internal
Ground
Cu Al Cu Cu Al Cu Cu Al Cu Al Cu Al Cu Al
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
554
985
1477
554
985
554
985
1477
8
8
8
5
5
10
10
10
6
6
11
11
11
7
7
0.78
0.78
0.78
0.23
0.23
800
1000
1200
600
1000
800
1000
1200
1400
1969
1778
1745
1477
1164
2469
2133
2036
8
10
12
5
6
10
12
15
6
7
11
14
17
7
8
0.78
1.08
1.33
0.23
0.40
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
1662
1506
1455
1231
1129
982
1908
1694
1636
14
17
23
7
8
11
17
21
28
8
10
12
20
25
33
9
11
13
1.57
2.05
2.66
0.47
0.62
0.80
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
1250
1505
1024
1000
1500
1788
29
34
12
14
36
42
13
16
42
49
15
18
3.87
4.11
0.91
1.17
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
1455
1250
909
960
1000
1636
1450
45
63
21
23
28
56
72
24
26
32
66
85
27
29
36
5.32
7.74
1.61
1.83
2.35
Ampere
Rating
Current Density
Amperes/cm
2
WeightIncluding Integral Housing Ground
(kg/m)
UL 857 IEC 439 UL 857 IEC 439 Three-Wire Four-Wire
100% Neutral
Four-Wire
200% Neutral
Add for Internal
Ground
Cu Al Cu Cu Al Cu Cu Al Cu Al Cu Al Cu Al
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
86
153
229
86
153
86
153
229
12
12
12
7
7
15
15
15
9
9
17
17
17
11
11
1.17
1.17
1.17
0.35
0.35
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
305
276
270
229
180
380
328
313
12
15
18
7
9
15
18
22
9
11
17
21
26
11
12
1.17
1.62
1.98
0.35
0.60
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
258
233
226
191
175
152
293
260
233
21
25
34
11
12
16
25
32
42
12
15
18
30
37
49
14
16
20
2.34
3.06
3.96
0.71
0.92
1.20
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
194
233
159
155
231
275
43
51
18
21
54
63
20
24
63
73
22
27
5.76
6.12
1.36
1.75
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
226
194
140
149
155
252
223
67
94
32
34
42
83
108
36
39
48
98
126
40
43
54
7.92
11.53
2.40
2.73
3.50
24.0-14
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
014
Table 24.0-23. Ampere Ratings Needed to be at or Below 1000A/sq-in Density
Application Note
The above table is meant to help the user and specier
select the higher busway ratings to meet the performance
specication of a current density value no higher than 1000A
per square inch. The current density values of our standard
busway offerings based upon temperature rise are listed
in the 5th and 8th columns of the table. These ratings are
UL listed and labeled, and safe to apply. However, certain
jurisdictions or applications require a better margin of
safety, and choose to use a 1000A/sq-in density standard.
When the lower than standard densities are required, such as
1000A/sq-in, then the only option is to oversize the busway
from the standard bar sizes and ampacity ratings. Oversizing
provides more bus bar material in cross-sectional area, and
results in lower current densities and lower temperature rises
for a given value of load current.
By example, take the case of 1600A copper busway.
The standard product uses a bar size of 0.25 in x 4.25 in
(1.0625 sq-in area) and which results in 1506A/sq-in density
(calculated by 1600A/1.0625 sq-in = 1506A/sq-in), as listed in
the table. If a project or application using bus runs expected
to carry 1600A of load current stipulated that the current
densities experienced by the busway should be no greater
than 1000A/sq-in, then oversizing to busway bars used in
the standard 2500A rating using 0.25 inch x 8 inch bars
(2.0 sq-in area) yields a current density of 1600A/2.0 sq-in
800A/sq-in for the 1600A of load current.
Why not just oversize to 2000A busway? The 2000A bar size
is 0.25 in x 5.50 in or 1.375 sq-in Computing the new density
yields 1600A/1.375 sq-in = 1164A/sq-in which is higher than
the desired value of no greater density than 1000A/sq-in.
Therefore, the table provides a quick method of determining
the ampacity of busway required to meet current density
values no greater than 1000A/sq-in for given values of load
current. The most important columns of data are the 1st, 7th
and 10th.
Eaton warrants that the Pow-R-Way III product will perform
as intended regardless of the method of selection, either
temperature rise only or current density. Eaton encourages
speciers who use current density as the criteria for
busway selection to select and specify the busway ratings
recommended in the above table under the Adjusted Rating
column, and not rely upon the contractors or bidders to
resolve the matter in the later stages of a project. If sizing
busway is strictly based upon current density, do not specify
or use the standard ampacity values based upon the UL and
NEMA temperature rise standard on Contract Drawings.
Ampere Rating Bar Size Cu Al
UL 857 Standard
Density
1000A/sq-in
Density
Adjusted
Rating
Standard
Density
1000A/sq-in
Density
Adjusted
Rating
Cu Al
225
400
600
225
400
1.62
1.62
1.62
556
988
1481
556
988
873
None
None
1200
556
988
556
988
None
None
800
1000
1200
600
800
1.62
2.25
2.75
1975
1778
1745
985
941
873
1350
1600
2000
1481
1164
873
985
800
1000
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
3.25
4.25
5.50
1662
1506
1455
982
800
1000
2000
2500
2500
1231
1129
982
941
873
864
1200
1350
1600
2500
3200
1600
2000
6.25
8.00
2.00 x 4.25
1250
1506
909
800
4000
5000
1024
1000
800
1000
2000
None
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
2.00 x 5.50
2.00 x 6.25
2.00 x 8.00
1455
1250
1000
N/A
5000
N/A
909
1024
1000
909
800
1000
None
4000
None
24.0-15
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
015
Fittings
There is a tting to meet every application need: anges,
elbows, offsets, tees, cable tap boxes, weatherheads,
transformer connections, power take-off sections, reducers,
adapter cubicles, expansion joints and end closures.
These ttings, along with standard and minimum
dimensions, are described on the following pages.
When making eld measurements and layouts, it should
be remembered that the dimensions are given from the
centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge.
The relationship of ttings to straight lengths (forward,
rearward, upward and downward) is illustrated in
Figure 24.0-14.
All straight lengths and ttings are marked with a T
label and an F label. The T and F locations will also
be noted on the construction, or the as-built, drawings
furnished. When installing the busway, the T and F
markings of each section must match. Failure to do so
will result in an improper installation with the phase bars
out of sequence.
Figure 24.0-14. T and F Orientation for Fittings
Figure 24.0-15. Typical Busway Components
Rearward
Upward
Forward
Downward
90 Phase
Transposition
Upward/Downward
Corner Joint
Forward/Rearward
Corner Joint
Forward/
Rearward
Tee
Center Cable
Tap Box
Weatherhead
Expansion
Joint
180 Phase
Transposition
Transformer
Throat
Upward/
Downward
Elbow
Protected
Reducer
Floor Flange
Plug-in
Bus
Bolt-on
Unit
End Closer
In-Line
Power
Take-Off
Built-in
Power
Take-Off
Plug-in
Unit
Wall
Flange
Offset
Upward/
Downward
Tee
S
w
itc
h
b
o
a
r
d
S
w
itc
h
b
o
a
r
d
T
ra
n
s
fo
rm
e
r
End Cable Tap Box
O
u
t
d
o
o
r
I
n
d
o
o
r
24.0-16
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
016
Traditional Indoor and Outdoor Elbows (Figure 24.0-16)
Elbows are used to make 90 changes in the direction of
busway runs. The four types that are available are forward,
rearward, upward and downward. See minimum leg lengths
listed for each type in Table 24.0-24 and Table 24.0-25.
All dimensions are to the centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge.
Figure 24.0-16. Traditional Elbows
Corner Joint Elbows (Figure 24.0-17)
The Pow-R-Way III Corner Joint Elbow can be installed in
areas where a traditional 90 turn could never have been
accomplished before.
Pow-R-Way III Corner Joint Elbows can solve any serious
pathway problem and contribute to successful layouts with
minimal space requirements.
All dimensions are to the centerline of the Corner
Joint Connection.
Figure 24.0-17. Corner Joint Elbows (For Indoor Applications Only)
Table 24.0-24. Forward and Rearward Elbows
Table 24.0-25. Upward and Downward Elbows
Table 24.0-26. Forward/Rearward Corner Joints
X
C
L
CC C
L
CC
X
Forward Downward
X
X
Upward
X
X
Rearward
C
L
CC
X
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC C
L
CC
C
L
CC
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
X
C
L
CC Upward
X
C
L
CC
Y
Forward
C
L
CC C
L
CC
C
L
CC
X
C
L
CC Y
Rearward
C
L
CC C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
Y
Downward
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
Y
CCLL CCC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
X
Ampere Rating Minimum Leg Lengths (X)
Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439
Cu Al Cu
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.50 (342.9)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
13.50 (342.9)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
15.00 (381.0)
16.00 (406.4)
18.50 (469.9)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
19.50 (495.3)
20.50 (520.7)
22.50 (571.5)
Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439
Cu Al Cu Upward Downward
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1550
1550
1800
2250
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
12.00 (304.8)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
Ampere Rating Dimensions
Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439
Cu Al Cu (X) (Y)
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
0.94 (23.9)
0.94 (23.9)
0.94 (23.9)
5.38 (136.7)
5.38 (136.7)
5.38 (136.7)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
0.94 (23.9)
1.25 (31.8)
1.50 (38.1)
5.38 (136.7)
5.69 (144.5)
5.94 (150.9)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
1.75 (44.5)
2.25 (57.2)
2.88 (73.2)
6.19 (157.2)
6.69 (169.9)
7.31 (185.7)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
3.25 (82.6)
4.12 (104.7)
6.64 (168.7)
7.70 (195.6)
8.57 (217.7)
11.07 (281.2)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
7.89 (200.4)
8.65 (219.7)
10.42 (264.7)
12.32 (312.9)
13.08 (332.2)
14.85 (377.2)
24.0-17
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
017
Table 24.0-27. Upward/Downward Corner Joints
Ampere Rating Dimensions in Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439 Housing Ground Internal Ground Isolated Ground
Cu Al Cu (X) (Y) (X) (Y) (X) (Y)
Three-Wire
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.70 (119.6)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.35 (110.5)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
4.41 (112.0)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
5.27 (133.9)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
4.43 (112.5)
Four-Wire (100%)
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
4.71 (119.6)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
4.77 (121.2)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.07 (128.8)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.28 (134.1)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
5.09 (129.3)
Four-Wire (200%)
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
4.98 (126.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.10 (129.5)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.04 (128.0)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.17 (131.3)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.55 (141.0)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
5.19 (131.8)
24.0-18
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
018
Special Angle Elbows
Special angle elbows are traditional elbows that allow the
direction of the busway runs to change at angles greater
than 90 degrees. They allow easy routing through non-
traditional corridors. The four types offered are forward,
rearward, upward and downward. See minimum leg lengths
for each type listed in Table 24.0-28 and Table 24.0-29.
Table 24.0-28. Forward and Rearward Elbows
Table 24.0-29. Upward and Downward Elbows
Figure 24.0-18. Special Angle Elbows
Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439
Cu Al Cu
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.50 (342.9)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
13.50 (342.9)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
15.00 (381.0)
16.00 (406.4)
18.50 (469.9)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
19.50 (495.3)
20.50 (520.7)
22.50 (571.5)
Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439
Cu Al Cu Upward Downward
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
12.00 (304.8)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
Forward
Rearward
Upward
Downward
24.0-19
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
019
Standard and Flush Flanges (Figure 24.0-19)
Flanges provide a direct connection to low voltage switchgear,
switchboards, motor control centers and other apparatus.
Cutout dimensions and drilling plans are provided with
the customer drawings and it is the responsibility of the
switchgear manufacturer to provide the opening, ange
drillings, connecting hardware and bus risers in their
equipment. For proper coordination between busway and
other equipment, detailed drawings, including switchgear
orientation, must accompany the order. A standard ange
can be supplied to the left or right of a section, as required.
A ush ange is used when the busway must lay close to the
top of a switchboard. The edge of the busway is 1.25 inches
(31.8 mm) from the top of the switchboard.
Table 24.0-30. Switchboard Flanges
Vault Flanges
Vault anges are used to enter a utility vault for termination
to the utility transformer. Each vault ange is custom
designed to meet each specic utility specication. Vault
anges may look similar to those shown in Figure 24.0-20.
Please consult the factory for specic dimensions based
upon utility specications.
Figure 24.0-19. Flanges
Figure 24.0-20. Vault Flanges
Ampere Rating Flush Flange
Min. Leg Length
Standard Flange
Min. Leg Length
UL 857 IEC 439
Cu Al Cu (X) Inches (mm) (X) Inches (mm)
225
400
600
225
400
600
225
400
630
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
800
1000
1200
800
1000
1200
1000
1200
1400
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
1350
1600
2000
1350
1600
2000
1550
1800
2250
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2500
3200
4000
2500
3200
4000
3000
3800
4500
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
15.00 (381.0)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
5000 5800 15.00 (381.0) 12.00 (304.8)
F
T
T
15.00
(381.0) (Minimum)
1.25
(31.8)
Bridge
C
L
12.00
(304.8) (Minimum)
Standard Flange Left
Flush Flange
C
L
1.00
(25.4)
A
B
N
C
B
A
G
C
24.0-20
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
020
Elbow Flanges (Figure 24.0-21)
An Elbow Flange is a combination of a standard elbow
and a standard ange fabricated into a single tting. Elbow
Flanges are typically used when the minimum leg lengths
for either the standard elbow or standard ange cannot be
maintained. Minimum leg lengths are listed in Table 24.0-31
and Table 24.0-32.
Table 24.0-31. Forward and Rearward Elbow Flanges
Table 24.0-32. Upward and Downward Elbow Flanges
Figure 24.0-21. Elbow Flanges
Ampere Rating Minimum Dimensions
Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439
Cu Al Cu Joint Leg, (X) Joint Leg, (Y)
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.50 (342.9)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
9.25 (235.0)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
13.50 (342.9)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
9.25 (235.0)
9.75 (247.7)
10.25 (260.4)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
15.00 (381.0)
16.00 (406.4)
18.50 (469.9)
10.75 (273.1)
11.75 (298.5)
14.00 (355.6)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
19.50 (495.3)
20.50 (520.7)
22.50 (571.5)
15.25 (387.4)
16.00 (406.4)
17.75 (450.9)
Inches (mm)
UL
857
IEC
439 Joint Leg, (X) Flange Leg, (Y)
Cu Al Cu Up Down Up Down
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
12.00 (304.8)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
5.75 (146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
7.75 (196.9)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
7.75 (196.9)
7.75 (196.9)
7.75 (196.9)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
8.75 (222.3)
Y
Forward Elbow
Right Flange
X
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
Y
Upward Elbow
Right Flange
X
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
Y
X
Rearward Elbow
Right Flange
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
Y
Downward Elbow
Right Flange
X
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
24.0-21
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
021
Offsets (Figure 24.0-22)
An Offset is used to avoid obstacles and to conform to the
buildings structure. It is two elbows fabricated into a single
tting for use where space restrictions prohibit the use of
two standard 90 elbows. The minimum leg lengths are listed
in Table 24.0-33 and Table 24.0-34.
Table 24.0-33. Forward and Rearward Offsets
Table 24.0-34. Upward and Downward Offsets
Figure 24.0-22. Offsets
Ampere Rating Minimum Dimensions (Y)
Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439
Cu Al Cu
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.50 (342.9)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
13.50 (342.9)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
15.00 (381.0)
16.00 (406.4)
18.50 (469.9)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
19.50 (495.3)
20.50 (520.7)
22.50 (571.5)
Inches (mm)
UL
857
IEC
439 Upward Downward
Cu Al Cu (Y) (Z) (Y) (Z)
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
12.00 (304.8)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
12.00 (304.8)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
3.00
(Minimum)
Y
Forward
C
L
CC
Y
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
Y
Downward
3.00
(76.2)
(Minimum)
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
Z
Y
Y
3.00
(76.2)
(Minimum)
Rearward
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
Z
Upward
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
Y
3.00
(76.2)
(Minimum)
24.0-22
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
022
Combination Offsets
Combination offsets are used to conform to the buildings
structure and change direction, utilizing a small amount
of space. They are two different oriented elbows fabricated
into a single tting. Forward or rearward directions are
determined by the T and F locations. Please refer
to Page 24.0-16. Minimum leg lengths are listed in
Table 24.0-24 and Table 24.0-25.
Table 24.0-35. Combination Offsets
Figure 24.0-23. Combination Offsets
Ampere Rating Dimensions in Inches (mm)
UL
857
IEC 439 X Y Three-Wire/
Four-Wire
Four-Wire
200% N
Cu Al Cu Z Z
Upward/Forward/Rearward
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.50 (342.9)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.50 (190.5)
7.00 (177.8)
7.50 (190.5)
7.50 (190.5)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
13.50 (342.9)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
7.50 (190.5)
8.00 (203.2)
9.00 (228.6)
8.00 (203.2)
8.50 (215.9)
9.00 (228.6)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
10.00 (254.0)
10.00 (254.0)
12.00 (304.8)
15.00 (381.0)
16.00 (406.4)
18.50 (469.9)
9.00 (228.6)
10.00 (254.0)
12.50 (317.5)
9.50 (241.3)
10.50 (266.7)
13.00 (330.2)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
19.50 (495.3)
20.50 (520.7)
22.50 (571.5)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
16.50 (419.1)
14.00 (355.6)
15.00 (381.0)
16.50 (419.1)
Downward/Forward/Rearward
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.50 (342.9)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.50 (190.5)
7.00 (177.8)
7.50 (190.5)
7.50 (190.5)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.50 (342.9)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
7.50 (190.5)
8.00 (203.2)
9.00 (228.6)
8.00 (203.2)
8.50 (215.9)
9.00 (228.6)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
15.00 (381.0)
16.00 (406.4)
18.50 (469.9)
9.00 (228.6)
10.00 (254.0)
12.50 (317.5)
9.50 (241.3)
10.50 (266.7)
13.00 (330.2)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
19.50 (495.3)
20.50 (520.7)
22.50 (571.5)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
16.50 (419.1)
14.00 (355.6)
15.00 (381.0)
16.50 (419.1)
X
Z
Y
T
T
Y
FF
T
T
T
F X
F Z
FFF
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
L
C
LL
X
T
Z
FFFF
F
X
FFFFFF
FFFFF
Z
T
T
F
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
Upward/Forward/Rearward
Downward/Forward/Rearward
24.0-23
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
023
Tees (Figure 24.0-24)
A tee is a busway tting suitable for connection in three
directions. The minimum leg lengths are shown in
Table 24.0-36 and Table 24.0-37.
Table 24.0-36. Forward and Rearward Tees
Table 24.0-37. Upward and Downward Tees
Figure 24.0-24. Tees
Ampere Rating Minimum Leg Dimensions
Inches (mm)
UL
857
IEC
439
Cu Al Cu (X) A (Y) B C
225 225 225 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2)
400 400 400 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2)
600 630 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2)
800 600 1000 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2)
1000 1200 13.00 (330.2) 13.00 (330.2)
1200 800 1400 13.50 (342.9) 13.50 (342.9)
1350 1000 1550 13.50 (342.9) 13.50 (342.9)
1600 1200 1800 14.00 (355.6) 14.00 (355.6)
2000 1350 2250 14.50 (368.3) 14.50 (368.3)
1600 15.00 (381.0) 15.00 (381.0)
2500 2000 3000 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4)
3200 3800 27.25 (692.2) 8.00 (203.2) 26.38 (670.1) 19.39 (492.5) 21.12 (536.4)
4000 2500 4500 28.50 (723.9) 8.00 (203.2) 27.62 (701.6) 21.88 (555.8) 23.63 (600.2)
3200 29.25 (743.0) 8.00 (203.2) 28.38 (720.9) 23.41 (594.6) 25.12 (638.0)
5000 4000 5800 31.00 (787.4) 8.00 (203.2) 30.12 (765.1) 26.94 (684.3) 28.63 (727.2)
Inches (mm)
UL
857
IEC
439
Cu Al Cu (X) A (Y) B C
225 225 225 21.25 (539.8) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 5.00 (127.0) 9.25 (235.0)
400 400 400 21.25 (539.8) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 5.00 (127.0) 9.25 (235.0)
600 630 21.25 (539.8) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 5.00 (127.0) 9.25 (235.0)
800 600 1000 21.25 (539.8) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 5.00 (127.0) 9.25 (235.0)
1000 1200 21.88 (555.8) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 5.62 (142.7) 10.50 (266.7)
1200 800 1400 22.38 (568.5) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 6.12 (155.4) 11.50 (292.1)
1350 1000 1550 22.88 (581.2) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 6.62 (168.1) 12.50 (317.5)
1600 1200 1800 23.88 (606.6) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 7.62 (193.5) 14.50 (368.3)
2000 1350 2250 25.12 (638.1) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 8.65 (219.7) 17.00 (431.8)
1600 25.88 (657.4) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 9.65 (245.1) 18.50 (470.0)
2500 2000 3000 27.62 (701.6) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 11.42 (290.1) 22.00 (558.8)
3200 3800 23.88 (606.6) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 16.38 (416.1) 14.50 (368.3)
4000 2500 4500 25.12 (638.1) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 18.65 (473.7) 17.00 (473.7)
3200 25.88 (637.4) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 20.41 (518.4) 18.50 (470.0)
5000 4000 5800 27.62 (701.6) 12.25 (311.2) 25.50 (647.7) 23.94 (608.1) 22.00 (558.8)
Forward
Rearward
Upward
Downward
X
X
Y
X
X
Y
X
X
Y
X
Y
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
B
C
A
B
C
A
24.0-24
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
024
Crosses (Figure 24.0-25)
A cross is a busway tting suitable for connection in four
directions. It is applied when a bus run must branch off in
three directions, all in the same plane.
Table 24.0-38. Forward and Rearward Crosses
Table 24.0-39. Upward and Downward Crosses
Figure 24.0-25. Crosses
Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439
Cu Al Cu (X) (Y)
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.50 (342.9)
13.00 (330.2)
13.00 (330.2)
13.50 (342.9)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
13.50 (342.9)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
13.50 (342.9)
14.00 (355.6)
14.50 (368.3)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
15.00 (381.0)
16.00 (406.4)
21.70 (551.2)
15.00 (381.0)
16.00 (406.4)
21.70 (551.2)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
22.94 (582.7)
23.71 (602.2)
25.09 (637.3)
22.94 (582.7)
23.71 (602.2)
25.09 (637.3)
Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439
Cu Al Cu (X) (Y)
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
21.25 (539.8)
21.25 (539.8)
21.25 (539.8)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
21.25 (539.8)
21.88 (555.8)
22.38 (568.5)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
22.88 (581.2)
23.88 (606.6)
25.12 (638.1)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
25.88 (657.4)
27.62 (701.6)
23.88 (606.6)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
25.12 (638.1)
25.88 (637.4)
27.62 (701.6)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
25.50 (647.7)
Forward Rearward
Upward Downward
24.0-25
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
025
End Cable Tap Box (Figure 24.0-26)
End cable tap boxes are used to feed a run of busway with
cable and conduit or where loads served by busway are
connected without the need for overcurrent protection. For
indoor applications, the T side, side opposite T and the
end panel are removable for access to the lugs. For outdoor
applications, these panels are gasketed to prevent moisture
from entering. In addition, the outdoor end cable tap
boxes are provided with removable gasketed side access
panels located on the F and side opposite F for more
accessibility to the lugs. Removable side access panels
are available on indoor cable tap boxes upon request.
Dimension D: For mechanical lugs = 21.34 inches (542.0 mm).

For compression lugs = 19.44 inches (493.8 mm).
200% neutral.
Table 24.0-40. End Cable Tap Box Dimension
For compression lugs, factory provides provisions only.
All dimensions shown in Figure 24.0-26 remain constant regardless of system wiring conguration.
Denotes quantity of terminals per ground bus.
Denotes quantity of terminals per phase and 100% neutral bus.
Denotes quantity of terminals per 200% neutral bus option.

T Side
Removable
Indoor
12.00
(304.8)
Side Opposite T
Removable Indoor
17.50
(444.5)
(381.0)
Gasketed
Access Cover
on Front and
Back of Box
for Outdoor
Tap Boxes
Standard
32.50
(825.5)
30.00
(762.0)
38.00
(965.2)
Min.
of
Du
LL
L
C
LL
A
(Minimum) ) (
Copper
Dimensions
Aluminum
Dimensions
Quantity of Mechanical Terminals, Range
One #4 (20 mm
2
)600 kcmil (300 mm
2
)
Two 1/0 (50 mm
2
)250 kcmil (120 mm
2
)
Ampere Rating Dimension (A)

Inches (mm)
Ampere Rating Dimension (A)

Inches (mm)
Copper Aluminum
UL 857 IEC 439 UL 857 G
225 225 12.00 (304.8) 225 12.00 (304.8) 1 2 4 1 2 4

400 400 12.00 (304.8) 400 12.00 (304.8) 1 2 4 1 2 4
600 630 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 1 2 4
800 1000 12.00 (304.8) 600 12.00 (304.8) 2 3 5 1 2 4
1000 1200 12.00 (304.8) 12.00 (304.8) 2 3 6
1200 1400 12.00 (304.8) 800 12.00 (304.8) 2 4 8 2 3 5
1350 1550 12.00 (304.8) 1000 12.00 (304.8) 2 4 8 2 3 6
1600 1800 20.50 (520.7) 1200 12.00 (304.8) 3 5 9 2 4 8
2000 2250 20.50 (520.7) 1350 20.50 (520.7) 3 6 12 2 4 8
1600 24.50 (622.3) 3 5 9
2500 3000 24.50 (622.3) 2000 24.50 (622.3) 4 8 16 3 6 12
3200 3800 30.50 (774.5) 5 9 18
4000 4500 45.00 (1143.0) 2500 30.50 (774.5) 6 12 24 4 8 16
3200 30.50 (774.5) 5 9 18
5000 5800 45.00 (1143.0) 4000 45.00 (1143.0) 7 15 30 6 12 24
24.0-26
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
026
Center Cable Tap Box (Figure 24.0-27)
Center cable tap boxes are used to center feed a run of
busway with cable and conduit or where loads served by
the busway are connected without the need for overcurrent
protection. For indoor applications, the T side, side
opposite T and the end panel are removable for access
to the lugs. For outdoor applications, these panels are
gasketed to prevent moisture from entering. In addition,
the outdoor center cable tap boxes are provided with
removable gasketed access panels located on the front
and back for more accessibility to the lugs.
Table 24.0-41. Center Tap Box DetailsDimension C
Figure 24.0-27. Center Cable Tap Box
Dimension D: For mechanical lugs = 21.34 inches (542.0 mm).

For compression lugs = 19.25 inches (489.0 mm).
200% neutral.
Table 24.0-42. Center Tap Box DetailsDimensions A and B
All dimensions shown in Figure 24.0-27 remain constant regardless of system wiring conguration.

Dimension C in Inches (mm)
Copper
2251350A 16002000A 2500A 3200A 40005000A
3.63 (92.2) 4.75 (120.7) 6.00 (152.4) 10.75 (273.1) 12.25 (311.2)
Aluminum
2251000A 12001350A 16002000A 25003200A 4000A
3.63 (92.2) 4.75 (120.7) 6.00 (152.4) 10.75 (273.1) 12.25 (311.2)
17.50
Side Opposite T
Removable Indoor
15.00
(381.0)
Gasketed Access Cover
on Front and Back of Box
for Outdoor Tap Boxes Only
f Box
12.00
(304.8)
T Side
Removable
Indoor
C
End
Removable
Indoor
Dimension is
the Minimum
Gutter Space
30.00
(762.0)
32.50
(825.5)
A
B
D
(Minimum) )
Ampere
Rating
Dimensions
Inches (mm)
Ampere
Rating
Dimensions
Inches (mm)
One #4 (20 mm
2
)600 kcmil (300 mm
2
)
Two 1/0 (50 mm
2
)250 kcmil (120 mm
2
)
UL 857 IEC 439 UL 857 Copper Aluminum

Cu Cu (A)
(B)
Al (A)
(B)
225 225 16.50 (419.1) 40.00 (1016.0) 225 16.50 (419.1) 40.00 (1016.0) 1 2 4 1 2 4
400 400 16.50 (419.1) 40.00 (1016.0) 400 16.50 (419.1) 40.00 (1016.0) 1 2 4 1 2 4
600 630 16.50 (419.1) 40.00 (1016.0) 16.50 (419.1) 40.00 (1016.0) 1 2 4
800 1000 16.50 (419.1) 40.00 (1016.0) 600 16.50 (419.1) 40.00 (1016.0) 2 3 5 1 2 4
1000 1200 16.50 (419.1) 40.00 (1016.0) 16.50 (419.1) 40.00 (1016.0) 2 3 6
1200 1400 16.50 (419.1) 40.00 (1016.0) 800 16.50 (419.1) 40.00 (1016.0) 2 4 8 2 3 5
1350 1550 16.50 (419.1) 40.00 (1016.0) 1000 16.50 (419.1) 40.00 (1016.0) 2 4 8 2 3 6
1600 1800 20.50 (520.7) 42.50 (1079.5) 1200 20.50 (520.7) 42.50 (1079.5) 3 5 9 2 4 8
2000 2250 20.50 (520.7) 42.50 (1079.5) 1350 20.50 (520.7) 42.50 (1079.5) 3 6 12 2 4 8
1600 24.50 (622.3) 45.00 (1143.0) 3 5 9
2500 3000 24.50 (622.3) 45.00 (1143.0) 2000 24.50 (622.3) 45.00 (1143.0) 4 8 16 3 6 12
3200 3800 30.38 (774.5) 58.00 (1473.2) 5 9 18
4000 4500 45.00 (1143.0) 60.50 (1536.7) 2500 30.38 (771.7) 58.00 (1473.0) 6 12 24 4 8 16
3200 30.38 (771.7) 58.00 (1473.0) 5 9 18
5000 5800 45.00 (1143.0) 60.50 (1536.7) 4000 45.00 (1143.0) 60.50 (1536.7) 7 15 30 6 12 24
24.0-27
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
027
Weatherheads (Figure 24.0-28)
Weatherheads are used for service entrance connections
to busway. The side opposite of T is removable for access
to the lugs.
Figure 24.0-28. Weatherhead Details
Table 24.0-43. Weatherhead Details
200% neutral.

CC
L
CC
12.00
(304.8)
17.50
(444.5)
(381.0)
Removable
Barrier
of
Busway
Compression and
Mechanical Lugs
24.00
(609.6)
41.00
(1041.4)
of Box
A
C
L
CC
C
L
CC
1.00
(25.4)
(Minimum) M
Ampere
Rating
Copper
Minimum
Dimension (A)
Aluminum
Minimum
Dimension (A)
One #4 (20 mm
2
)600 kcmil (300 mm
2
)
Two 1/0 (50 mm
2
)250 kcmil (120 mm
2
)
UL 857 IEC 439 Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Copper Aluminum

Cu Al Cu G
225 225 225 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 1 2 4 1 2 4

400 400 400 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 1 2 4 1 2 4
600 630 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 1 2 4
800 600 1000 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 2 3 5 1 2 4
1000 1200 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 2 3 6
1200 800 1400 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 2 4 8 2 3 5
1350 1000 1550 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 2 4 8 2 3 6
1600 1200 1800 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 3 5 9 2 4 8
2000 1350 2250 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 3 6 12 2 4 8
1600 16.50 (419.1) 16.50 (419.1) 3 5 9
2500 2000 3000 30.00 (762.0) 16.50 (419.1) 4 8 16 3 6 12
3200 3800 30.00 (762.0) 30.00 (762.0) 5 9 18
4000 2500 4500 40.00 (1016.0) 30.00 (762.0) 6 12 24 4 8 16
3200 40.00 (1016.0) 30.00 (762.0) 5 9 18
5000 4000 5800 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 7 15 30 6 12 24
24.0-28
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
028
Expansion Joints (Figure 24.0-29)
Expansion joints accommodate the expansion and
contraction of bus bars with respect to the enclosure.
They compensate for the difference in the coefcient of
expansion of the aluminum housing and the copper or
aluminum bus bars. Expansion joints must be used
wherever a run of busway crosses an expansion joint
of a building. They should also be installed in the center
of extremely long straight runs of busway; one every
300 feet (91m) for copper or one every 225 feet (68m)
for aluminum. The use of expansion joints should be
engineered for individual installations. Minimum
dimensions are shown in Table 24.0-44.
Table 24.0-44. Expansion Joints
Dimension remains as shown regardless of system conguration.

Figure 24.0-29. Expansion Joints
Phase Transpositions (Figure 24.0-30 and Figure 24.0-31)
Phase transposition ttings are used in applications where
a phase rotation is needed due to a change in phasing from
the source equipment to the load equipment. Both 90 and
180 rotations are possible. In each case, all conductors
are rotated.
Figure 24.0-30. 180 TranspositionDimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 24.0-31. 90 TranspositionDimensions in Inches (mm)
Ampere Rating Dimensions (A)
Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439

Cu Al Cu
225 225 225 12.00 (304.8)
400 400 400 12.00 (304.8)
600 600 630 12.00 (304.8)
800 800 1000 12.00 (304.8)
1000 1000 1200 12.00 (304.8)
1200 1200 1400 12.00 (304.8)
1350 1350 1550 16.50 (419.1)
1600 1600 1800 16.50 (419.1)
2000 2250 16.50 (419.1)
2500 2000 3000 20.50 (520.7)
3200 3800 20.50 (520.7)
4000 2500 4500 24.50 (622.3)
3200 24.50 (622.3)
5000 4000 5800 30.25 (768.4)
49.00
(1244.6)
(Minimum)
25.00
(635.0)
12.00
(304.8) (Minimum)
29.69
(754.1)
of Duct
of
Box
C
L
C
L
C
L
C
L
A
T
F
24.0-29
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
029
Single-Phase Transformer Taps (Figure 24.0-32)
Single-phase transformer taps arrangements are used for
connections to three single-phase transformers. The bus
extensions do not include drilling or lugs (see Figure 24.0-2
on Page 24.0-2 for wiring conguration designations).
Figure 24.0-32. Three Single-Phase Transformer Taps
Table 24.0-45. Single-Phase Transformer Taps
Includes ground tap.

Three-Phase Transformer Taps (Figure 24.0-33)
Three-phase transformer taps are used when making
connections to a three-phase transformer. The bus
extensions do not include drilling or lugs.
Figure 24.0-33. Three-Phase Transformer Taps
Table 24.0-46. (A) Minimum Dimensions
Table 24.0-47. (B) Minimum Dimensions
Table 24.0-48. (C) Minimum Dimensions
Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439

Cu Al Cu (X) (Y)
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
4.00 (101.6)
4.50 (114.3)
5.00 (127.0)
7.00 (177.8)
9.75 (247.7)
10.75 (273.1)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
5.50 (139.7)
6.50 (165.1)
7.75 (196.9)
11.75 (298.5)
13.75 (349.3)
16.25 (412.8)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
8.50 (215.9)
10.25 (260.4)
6.50 (165.1)
17.50 (444.5)
21.25 (539.8)
13.75 (349.3)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
7.75 (196.9)
8.50 (215.9)
10.25 (260.4)
16.25 (412.8)
17.50 (444.5)
21.25 (539.8)
8.50 + y
(215.9) + y
8.50 + X
(215.9) + X
8.50 + X
(215.9) + X
8.50 + X
(215.9) + X
17.00 + 2X
(431.8) + 2X
17.00 + 2X
(431.8) + 2X
8.50 + X
(215.9) + X
8.50 + X
(215.9) + X
Pow-R-
Bridge
Ground when
Required
C Phase
or Neutral
A Phase or
Neutral
B Phase
or Neutral
Taps
C
L
C
L
Pow-R-
Bridge
C
L
Pow-R-
Bridge
C
L
Pow-R-
Bridge
C
L
Taps
C
L
Taps
C
L
Wire
Designation
3W/
3WH
3WG/
3WHG/
3WI
4W/
4WH
4WG/4WHG/4WI/
4WNG/4WNHG/4WNI
Inches 16.50 16.50 19.50 19.50
mm 419.1 419.1 495.3 495.3
Wire
Designation
3W/
3WH
3WG/
3WHG/
3WI
4W/
4WH
4WG/4WHG/4WI/
4WNG/4WNHG/4WNI
Inches 6.25 12.12 9.25 15.12
mm 158.8 307.8 235.0 384.0
Wire
Designation
50% Housing
Ground
50% Integral Ground
and 100% Ground
Inches 3.00 6.00
mm 76.2 152.4
6.00
(152.4) 7.50
(190.5)
N
C
B
A
G
6.00
(152.4)
C
6.00
(152.4)
6.00
(152.4)
A
Taps B
15.00
(381.1)
(2/0)
Support Pad
(1/0)
C
C
24.0-30
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
030
Transformer Throat Connections (Figure 24.0-34 and Figure 24.0-35)
A transformer throat is used when making connections
to a liquid-lled substation transformer. All transformer
throat connections include exible connectors between the
transformer low voltage spades and Pow-R-Way III bus bars.
For transformers with drilled anges, the busway will bolt
to the transformer throat instead of using a sealing ring.
Figure 24.0-34. Transformer Throat
Table 24.0-49. Transformer Throat Connections
Figure 24.0-35. Transformer Throat Connection Detail
Transformer
Transformer
Throat
Sealing Ring
Transformer Throat
Transformer
Sealing Ring
Front
Edge of
Transformer
Throat
Edge of
Transformer
Throat
1.75 (44.5) Plus
1/2 Duct Width
9.50
(241.3)
Front
T
L
C
A
A
L
C
Ampere Rating Bars Per
Phase
Minimum Dimensions
UL 857 IEC 439 (A) Inches (mm)
Aluminum
2251350
16002000
25004000
2251550
16002000
25004000
1
1
2
26.00 (660.4)
28.50 (723.9)
31.50 (800.1)
Copper
2252000
2500
32005000
2252500
25003000
32005800
1
1
2
26.00 (660.4)
28.50 (723.9)
31.50 (800.1)
x
x
x
x
x
x
Bushing
Edge of
Throat
Collar
Indicate Number
of Holes,
Diameter of
Holes, and
Spacing
Between Holes
Top of Transformer
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Transformer
Tank Wall
X Number and
Diameter of Holes
X Thickness
Front
LV Throat
LV Spades
Side View of Transformer
LV Spade Detail
x x x
C
L
CC
24.0-31
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
031
Transformer Flange Connections (Figure 24.0-36 and Figure 24.0-37)
Transformer ange connections are used when making a
connection to a dry-type substation transformer. Transformer
ange connections include exible connectors between the
transformer low voltage spades and the Pow-R-Way III
ange bus bars. Hardware is supplied to bolt the ange
plate to the transformer enclosure.
Figure 24.0-36. Transformer Flange Connections
Figure 24.0-37. Transformer Flange Connection Detail
Protected Reducers (Figure 24.0-38)
Protected reducers are used to reduce the ampacity of
busway using either a circuit breaker or a fused, non-
automatic circuit breaker overprotection device. Both serve
as a disconnecting means. The line side of the cubicle is
connected to the higher rated busway and the load side
is connected to the lower (reduced) rated busway.
Figure 24.0-38. Circuit Breaker or Fused Reducer
Table 24.0-50. Circuit Breaker and Fused Reducer Dimensions
Non-Protected Reducers (Figure 24.0-39)
Non-protected reducers are used to reduce the ampacity of
the busway without overcurrent devices. Per NEC Section
364.11, for industrial applications, no overcurrent protection
is required where the busway is reduced in size, provided
the length of the smaller busway does not extend more than
50 feet (15.2m) and has a current rating of at least one-third
of the rst upstream overcurrent device.
Figure 24.0-39. Non-Fused Reducer
LL
C
LL
C
LL
CC
20.00
(508.0)
Flexible
Braid
X
X
X
X
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Transformer
Tank Wall
X Number and
Diameter of Holes
X Thickness
LV Spade Detail
Front View of Transformer
LV Spades
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Side View of Transformer
Circuit Breaker Reducer Fusible Switch Reducer
Breaker
Amperes
A B X Fuse
Rating
A B X
Inches (mm) Inches (mm)
225 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
34.00
(863.6)
225 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
42.25
(1073.2)
400 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
34.00
(863.6)
400 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
54.00
(1371.6)
600 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
34.00
(863.6)
600 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
60.00
(1524.0)
800 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
42.25
(1073.2)
800 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
60.00
(1524.0)
1000 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
42.25
(1073.2)
1000 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
60.00
(1524.0)
1200 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
42.25
(1073.2)
1200 18.25
(463.6)
18.00
(457.2)
60.00
(1524.0)
1600 26.25
(666.8)
20.00
(508.0)
48.00
(1219.2)

2000 26.25
(666.8)
20.00
(508.0)
48.00
(1219.2)

2500 26.25
(666.8)
20.00
(508.0)
48.00
(1219.2)

12.00
(304.8)
(Minimum)
Pow-R-Bridge
12.00
(304.8)
(Minimum)
X
B
A
Circuit Breaker
or Fused Reducer
C
C
06.4)
(Mini
0
406.4
(Min
24.0-32
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
032
Meter Center Power Takeoffs
Meter center power takeoffs (PTO) are designed to tap
power off the busway and feed tenant meter stacks in high-
rise applications. There are two types of power takeoffs,
bridge joint and in-line. Both devices are UL listed.
Bridge Joint PTO
The bridge joint PTO shown in Figure 24.0-40 mounts to
the right or left side of the busway at a joint between two
sections of busway. The bridge joint PTO comes with a main
circuit breaker or main fusible switch. Bridge joint PTOs
should be ordered with the meter stacks through the Eaton
Lincoln, IL facility.
The height of the busway bridge joint must be coordinated to
meet local utility/code requirements for minimum/maximum
meter socket heights. All dimensions shown are for reference
only showing a typical installation.
Figure 24.0-40. Bridge Joint PTO
In-Line PTO
The in-line PTO shown in Figure 24.0-41 is built integral with
the busway, having the busway pass through the device.
This space-saving design reduces the horizontal wall space
by up to 24.00 inches (609.6 mm). With this device there is
no need to install a separate main device; saving installation
time and money. This device is available with a main circuit
breaker, main fusible switch or no main device. In-line PTOs
should be ordered with the busway through the Eaton
Greenwood, SC facility.
The height of the rst busway joint up through the oor
must be coordinated to meet local utility/code requirements
for minimum/maximum meter socket heights not to exceed
a minimum height of 16.00 inches (406.4 mm) above the
oor. Meter stack may be placed to the left, right or both
sides of the main device. All dimensions shown are for
reference only showing a typical installation.
Note: If 5-high 200A meter stacks are used, it is recommended to
increase the bridge joint height from 20.00 inches (508.0m) to
22.0024.00 inches (558.8609.6 mm). Attention must be given to
the minimum/maximum heights of the meter sockets.
Figure 24.0-41. In-Line PTO
125 A Meter Stock
Wall
Floor
12.26
(311.4)
35.90
(911.9)
18.00
(457.2)
70.00
(1778.0)
12.61
(320.3)
12.45
(316.2)
5.81
(147.6)
20.00
(508.0)
Meter
Center
Front
Horizontal
Cross Bus
Bridge
Joint
17.17
(436.1)
30.06
(763.5)
37.76
(959.1)
25.00
(635.0)
8.55
(217.2)
Vertical
Busway
In-Line PTO
Wall
200 A
Stack
125 A
Stack
70.00
(177.8)
67.34
(1710.4)
Floor
12.45
(316.2)
12.39
(314.7)
30.88
(784.35)
25.00
(635.0)
20.00
(508.4)
20.00
(508.4)
.50
(12.7)
.61
(15.5)
13.51
(343.2)
1.93
(49.0)
8.55 (217.2)
12.26
(311.4)
24.0-33
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
033
In-Line Power Takeoff
Main Circuit Breaker PTO
The in-line main circuit breaker PTO shown in Figure 24.0-42
is available with trip ratings from 300A up to 1200A; using L,
M and N frame circuit breakers. This device is indoor rated
and may be weatherized upon request. See Table 24.0-51 for
dimensions and ratings.
Main Fusible Switch PTO
The in-line main fusible switch PTO shown in Figure 24.0-43
is available with 400, 600 and 800A switches; using Class T
fuses. This device is indoor rated only. The switch handle is
mounted in front, eliminating interference with the meter
sockets and the need for spacers between the main device
and meter stack. It comes with a hinged door, giving easy
access to the fuses mounted below the main switch. See
Table 24.0-51 for dimensions and ratings.
Unprotected PTO
The in-line PTO with no main device shown in Figure 24.0-44
comes with 1200A horizontal cross bus as standard. This
device is intended for use with six meter sockets or less,
or as local code permits. See Table 24.0-51 for dimensions
and ratings.
Table 24.0-51. In-Line PTO Dimensions and Ratings
Class T fuses only.
Rating of horizontal cross bus.

Device Short-Circuit
Rating (kAIC)
(A) Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 Bar
Per Phase
2 Bar
Per Phase
Main Circuit Breaker
LD
HLD
MDL
65
100
65
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
33.00 (838.2)
33.00 (838.2)
33.00 (838.2)
HMDL
ND
HND
100
65
100
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
33.00 (838.2)
33.00 (838.2)
33.00 (838.2)
Main Fusible Switch
400A
600A
800A
200
200
200
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
33.00 (838.2)
33.00 (838.2)
33.00 (838.2)
No Main Device
1200A
100 20.00 (508.0) 33.00 (838.2)

Figure 24.0-42. Main Breaker Figure 24.0-43. Main Fusible Switch Figure 24.0-44. Unprotected PTO
Bridge Joint
12.00
(304.8)
A
20.00
(508.0)
30.00
(762.0)
C
2.00
(50.8)
Bridge Joint
12.00
(304.8)
A
20.00
(508.0)
30.00
(762.0)
C
5.00
(127.0)
12.00
(304.8)
A
15.00
(381.0)
30.00
(762.0)
Bridge Joint
C
L
24.0-34
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
034
Busway-Connected Panelboards
Pow-R-Way III busway-connected panelboards save space
and installation time by eliminating the need to install a bus
plug and cable over to a panelboard. This special enclosure
plugs directly on to vertical busway and accepts Eaton PRL1a,
PRL2a and PRL3a main circuit breaker panelboard interiors.
The enclosure also accepts 28.00-inch wide standard and EZ
trims. The panels can be top or bottom fed, and can mount
on either side of the busway. Each panel is UL 857 listed.
Note: These panels are not seismic rated.
Busway-connected panelboards are sold and shipped
through the Eaton regional satellite plants and coordinated
with the Eaton busway plant in Greenwood, SC. See
Figure 24.0-45.
Panelboard Spring Hangers
This specialized spring hanger shown in Figure 24.0-46,
allows the panel to be anchored and supported directly to
a wall, and uniquely allows the panel to oat with the riser
busway. Panelboard spring hangers are sold separately as
a busway accessory. Hardware is included to mount the
spring hangers to the panelboard enclosure.
Table 24.0-52. Panelboard Enclosure Detail
Figure 24.0-45. Busway-Connected Panelboard Detail
Figure 24.0-46. Panelboard Spring Hangers
MCB
Frame
Maximum
Box Size
MCB
Height
Busway
Joint
Height
Box
Height
Off Floor
Minimum
Floor-Ceiling
Height
Dimension in
Inches (mm)
Dimension in Inches (mm)
A B C D
PRL1a & 2a Main Circuit Breaker
F 40.00
(1016.0)
72.00
(1828.8)
23.00
(584.2)
47.00
(1193.8)
103.00
(2616.2)
F 52.00
(1320.8)
72.00
(1828.8)
23.00
(584.2)
35.00
(889.0)
103.00
(2616.2)
F 64.00
(1625.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
23.00
(584.2)
23.00
(584.2)
103.00
(2616.2)
J 76.00
(1930.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
33.00
(838.2)
21.00
(533.4)
113.00
(2870.2)
K (500) 94.00
(2387.6)
74.00
(1879.6)
34.00
(863.6)
4.00
(101.6)
114.00
(2895.6)
K (750) 94.00
(2387.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
36.00
(914.4)
6.00
(152.4)
116.00
(2946.4)
PRL3a Main Circuit Breaker
F (4/0) 76.00
(1930.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
23.00
(584.2)
11.00
(279.4)
103.00
(2616.2)
FCL 76.00
(1930.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
23.00
(584.2)
11.00
(279.4)
103.00
(2616.2)
FB 76.00
(1930.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
23.00
(584.2)
11.00
(279.4)
103.00
(2616.2)
J 76.00
(1930.4)
72.00
(1828.8)
23.00
(584.2)
11.00
(279.4)
103.00
(2616.2)
K (500) 94.00
(2387.6)
74.00
(1879.6)
34.00
(863.6)
4.00
(101.6)
114.00
(2895.6)
K (750) 94.00
(2387.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
36.00
(914.4)
6.00
(152.4)
116.00
(2946.4)
L 94.00
(2387.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
34.00
(863.6)
4.00
(101.6)
114.00
(2895.6)
LCL 94.00
(2387.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
38.00
(965.2)
8.00
(203.2)
118.00
(2997.2)
LA 94.00
(2387.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
34.00
(863.6)
4.00
(101.6)
114.00
(2895.6)
LG 94.00
(2387.6)
72.00
(1828.8)
36.00
(914.4)
6.00
(152.4)
116.00
(2946.4)
Edge of Busway
to Wall
Top Conduit
Space Top View
Third Plug-In Opening
Up From Lower Joint
A
B
C
Front View
2.37
(60.2)
6.00
(152.4)
28.00
(711.2)
24.0-35
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
035
Pow-R-Way III Adapters (Figure 24.0-47 and
Figure 24.0-48)
A complete line of adapters are available to enable the
user to add to existing old-line Westinghouse or obsolete
bus runs with the Pow-R-Way III design. The specic
Westinghouse product lines are Low Impedance Busway,
Current Limiting Busway, Pow-R-Way and Pow-R-Way II.
The obsolete designs are CP2, CP3 and CP4 Safetybus.
See Table 24.0-53.
The adapters allow the incorporation of present day
technologies, available in Pow-R-Way III plug-in units, into
existing busway systems. State-of-the-art features such as
energy monitoring, transient voltage surge suppression and
coordination/communication capabilities can all be added to
existing distribution systems without having to upgrade and
replace entire runs of busway. See Table 24.0-53.
Special adapters to competitive busway products are
also available. Please contact the Greenwood factory
for information.
Table 24.0-53. Available Pow-R-Way III Adapters
Figure 24.0-47. Pow-R-Way III to Pow-R-Way Adapter
Figure 24.0-48. Pow-R-Way III to CP Adapter
Busway
Types
Brand Minimum Adapter
Length in Inches (mm)
Low impedance busway Westinghouse 60.00 (1524.0)
Low impedance
plug-in busway
Westinghouse 60.00 (1524.0)
Pow-R-Way busway Westinghouse/
Cutler-Hammer
36.00 (914.4)
Pow-R-Way II busway Westinghouse/
Cutler-Hammer
36.00 (914.4)
CP2 Safetybus Cutler-Hammer 36.00 (914.4)
Competitive busway Contact factory 36.00 (914.4)
POWRWAY III
Adapter
Existing
POWRWAY
POWRWAY III Existing
CP Busway
Adapter
24.0-36
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
036
Wall/Floor Flanges (Figure 24.0-49)
Wall and oor anges are used to t around the busway
and close off the opening made to allow the bus run to pass
through a oor or wall. Wall and oor anges are for cosmetic
purposes only and do not provide any type of vapor or
re barrier.
Roof Flange (Figure 24.0-50)
A roof ange should always be used when outdoor busway
penetrates a roof.
End Closures (Figure 24.0-51)
End closures terminate a bus run and can be used to close
either the right or left end (see Figure 24.0-2 on Page 24.0-2
for wiring conductor congurations).
Table 24.0-54. End Closures
Table 24.0-55. Dimensions
Note: End closure extends 0.44 inches (11.2 mm) beyond the center-
line of the removed Pow-R-Bridge.
Figure 24.0-49. Wall/Floor Flange
Figure 24.0-50. Roof Flange
Figure 24.0-51. End Closure with Pow-R-Bridge Removed
Ampere Rating Dimensions (A)
in Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439
Cu Al Cu
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
5.13 (130.3)
5.13 (130.3)
5.13 (130.3)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
5.13 (130.3)
5.75 (146.1)
6.25 (158.8)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
6.75 (171.5)
7.77 (197.4)
9.02 (229.1)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
9.78 (248.4)
11.55 (293.4)
16.52 (419.6)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
19.02 (482.9)
20.54 (521.7)
24.08 (611.6)
Description Dimensions (B)
in Inches (mm)
3WH, 3WG, 3WHG, 3WI, 4WH, 4WG, 4WHG, 4WI 5.00 (127.0)
4WNH, 4WNG, 4WNI, 4WNHG 5.50 (139.7)
Busway
Width
Busway
Height
Wall
Wall/Floor
Flange
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
Roof
Maximum Roof Slope
with Standard Flange is
2.00 (50.8) per Foot
(304.8 mm)
2.50
(63.5)
(All 4 Sides)
of Joint
C
L
10.25 (minimum)
(260.3)
7.00
(177.8)
2.00 (Rec.)
(50.8)
C
L
Bell
Flange
Roof Flange
6.25 (158.8)
Indoor
7.38 (187.5)
Outdoor
A
B
.44 (11.2)
C
L
CC
24.0-37
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
037
Horizontal Hangers
One hanger is provided for every 10 feet (3.0m) of
horizontally mounted busway. The type of hanger supplied
is determined by the specic mounting requirements of
the busway. (For hook hangers and angle hangers, see
Figure 24.0-52 and Figure 24.0-53.)
Drop rods 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) diameter are not included
and must be furnished by the installer. Drop rods 3/4-inch
(19.1 mm) diameter are required for seismic applications.
Figure 24.0-52. Hook HangersNon-Seismic Only
Table 24.0-56. Flatwise Hook Hanger
Table 24.0-57. Edgewise Hook Hanger
Table 24.0-58. Flatwise Angle Hanger Table 24.0-59. Edgewise Angle Hanger
Note: Angle hangers must be used for seismic applications.
Figure 24.0-53. Angle Hangers
1 Bar Per Phase Only
Flatwise Edgewise
Duct
Width
Duct
Width
Duct
Height
A
C
B
Ampere Rating Dimension in Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439 Duct Width (A) (B) (C)
Cu Al Cu
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
5.12 (130.0)
5.12 (130.0)
5.12 (130.0)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
4.75 (120.7)
5.38 (136.7)
5.88 (149.4)
5.12 (130.0)
5.75 (146.1)
6.25 (158.8)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
6.38 (162.1)
7.38 (187.5)
8.64 (219.5)
6.75 (171.5)
7.75 (196.9)
9.03 (229.4)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
2500
1600
2000
3000
9.40 (238.8)
11.17 (283.7)
9.78 (248.4)
11.58 (294.1)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
Conductor
Conguration
Duct Height Duct Width (A) (B)
3WH/4WH/3WG/3WHG/4WG/4WHG
3WI/4WI
4.384.56 (111.2115.8)
4.384.56 (111.2115.8)
4.756.38 (120.7162.1)
7.3811.17 (187.4283.7)
8.40 (213.3)
13.19 (335.0)
4.81 (122.2)
4.81 (122.2)
4WNH/4WNG
4WNHG/4WNI
4.925.10 (125.0129.5)
4.925.10 (125.0129.5)
4.756.38 (120.7162.1)
7.3811.17 (187.4283.7)
8.40 (213.3)
13.19 (335.0)
5.35 (135.9)
5.35 (135.9)
Ampere Rating Conductor Dimension in Inches (mm)
UL 857 IEC 439 Bars Per
Phase
Busway
Width
(A)
Cu Al Cu
225
400
600
225
400
225
400
630
1
1
1
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
4.75 (120.7)
9.00 (228.6)
9.00 (228.6)
9.00 (228.6)
800
1000
1200
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1
1
1
4.75 (120.7)
5.38 (136.7)
5.88 (149.4)
9.00 (228.6)
9.63 (244.6)
10.12 (257.0)
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1550
1800
2250
1
1
1
6.38 (162.1)
7.38 (187.5)
8.64 (219.5)
10.63 (270.0)
11.63 (295.4)
12.88 (327.2)
2500
3200
1600
2000
3000
3800
1
1
2
9.40 (238.8)
11.17 (283.7)
16.14 (410.0)
13.62 (345.9)
15.44 (392.2)
20.39 (517.9)
4000
5000
2500
3200
4000
4500
5800
2
2
2
18.64 (473.5)
20.16 (512.1)
23.70 (602.0)
22.88 (581.2)
24.39 (619.5)
28.00 (711.2)
Conductor
Conguration
Duct Height (A)
3WH/4WH/3WG/3WHG/
4WG/4WHG/3WI/4WI
4.384.56 (111.2115.8) 9.00 (228.6)
4WNH/4WNG/4WNHG/4WNI 4.925.10 (125.0129.5) 9.36 (237.7)
Flatwise
.7
(19
A
.75 75 Edgewise
2 Bars Per Phase
A
.75
1 Bar Per Phase
A
.75
24.0-38
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Physical Data
038
Vertical Hangers (Figure 24.0-54 and Figure 24.0-55)
When busway is to be installed vertically, a spring
suspension type vertical hanger should be used.
Vertical hangers are not provided unless specied.
This unique hanger equalizes the weight of vertically
mounted busway along all supports. A vertical hanger
must be used on each oor and at the end of the bus run
on the last oor.
The maximum span permitted by UL on vertical hangers is
16 feet (4.9m). Intermediate hangers are required for oor
heights exceeding 16 feet (4.9m).
Table 24.0-60. Edgewise Vertical Hangers (F and F-Opposite Sides)
Table 24.0-61. Flatwise Vertical Hangers (T and T-Opposite Sides)
Figure 24.0-54. Typical Installation
Figure 24.0-55. Vertical Hangers
Conductor
Conguration
Busway
Height
Hangers on F and F
Opposite Sides
Inches (mm) (A) Inches (mm) Figure 24.0-55
Conguration
3WH/4WH 4.38 (111.3) 4.72 (119.9) A
3WG/3WHG/4WG/
4WHG
4.50 (114.3) 4.91 (124.7) A
3WI/4WI 4.56 (115.8) 4.91 (124.7) A
4WHN 4.92 (125.0) 5.25 (133.4) A
4WNG/4WNHG 5.05 (128.3) 5.44 (138.2) A
4WNI 5.10 (129.6) 5.44 (138.2) A
Ampere Rating Busway
Width
Hangers on T and T
Opposite Sides
UL 857 IEC 439
Cu Al Cu Inches (mm) (A) Inches (mm) Figure 24.0-55
Conguration
225 225 225 4.75 (120.7) 4.62 (117.3) B
400 400 400 4.75 (120.7) 4.62 (117.3) B
600 630 4.75 (120.7) 4.62 (117.3) B
800 600 1000 4.75 (120.7) 4.62 (117.3) B
1000 1200 5.38 (136.7) 5.25 (133.4) B
1200 800 1400 5.88 (149.4) 5.75 (146.1) B
1350 1000 1550 6.38 (162.1) 6.25 (158.8) B
1600 1200 1800 7.38 (187.5) 7.25 (184.2) B
2000 1350 2250 8.64 (219.5) 8.50 (215.9) B
1600 9.40 (238.8) 9.25 (235.0) C
2500 2000 3000 11.17 (283.7) 11.06 (280.9) C
3200 3800 16.14 (410.0) 16.00 (406.4) D
4000 2500 4500 18.64 (473.5) 18.50 (469.9) D
3200 20.16 (512.1) 20.06 (510.0) D
5000 4000 5800 23.70 (602.0) 23.59 (600.0) D
Edgewise
(1 Bar per Phase)
Flatwise
(1 Bar per Phase)
Flatwise
(2 Bar per Phase)
Configuration A
(1 Bar per Phase)
Configuration B
(1 Bar per Phase)
A
A A
Configuration C
(1 Bar per Phase)
Configuration D
(2 Bar per Phase)
A
24.0-39
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Plug-in Protective Devices
039
All Pow-R-Way III plug-in units are designed with the safety
of the installer and user as the key criteria. The following
features are standard for both fusible and circuit breaker
type plug-in units:
Pow-R-Way III bus plugs have extended ground and neutral
bars which bring the termination points down into the cable
entry area making for a safer, easier connection.
A barrier is provided over the line side connections from the
bus plug stab assembly to the fusible switch or circuit breaker.
The bus plug ground stab makes positive contact with the
busway ground (integral or internal) before the phase or
neutral stabs contact the bus bars.
A bus plug guide port is provided in the busway housing,
to the right of each plug-in outlet. A polarizing alignment pin
is located at the line side end of each bus plug enclosure.
The alignment pin must be inserted into the guide port for
proper installation. The plug-in unit and the busway are
interlocked to ensure that the device is in the OFF position
prior to installation or removal of the unit.
To ensure that the bus plug is seated onto the busway,
the clamping mechanism will draw the unit tight onto the
busway housing as the installer tightens the clamps.
Plug-in units have an interference bracket that prevents
the cover from being opened while the device is in the
ON position and to prevent accidental closing of the device
while the cover is open.
There are two locations available for eld positioning of the
bus plug operating handle. On vertical bus run applications,
the handle can be mounted on the side of the plug, and for
horizontal runs, the handle can be mounted on the (line side)
end of the unit. Bus plugs are shipped with the handle
mounted on the end as standard. Mounting positions are
illustrated in Figure 24.0-58.
When a plug-in unit is installed, the bus plug stab base
assembly engages a seating ridge provided on the plug-in
outlet. The stab base is drawn in to overlap the ridge and
form a tight seal against moisture and dust.
Figure 24.0-56. Plug-in Stab Details
Figure 24.0-57. Plug-in Outlet Details
Plug-in Device Mounting
The load end of a plug-in unit varies with the orientation
of the busway as determined by the F and T markings
(see Figure 24.0-58 below).
Figure 24.0-58. Plug-in Device Mounting
O
F
O
F O
N
O
F
D
A
N
G
Guide Pin
and Port
Clamp and Guide
OFF
ON
Finger-Safe
Barriers
T
F
Ground Stab
Guide Port
Outlet Seating Ridge Mounting Hardware
ON
OFF
Handle
Load
Load
Handle
ON
OFF
Load
Handle
ON
OFF
Load
Handle
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Load
Handle
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Load
Load
Load
Handle
Handle
Handle
T
F T F
TT
FF
T
FF
24.0-40
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
040
Plug-in Device Mounting (Continued)
Plug-in openings are spaced every 24.00 inches (609.9 mm)
starting 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) in from the centerline of
each bridge joint with a maximum of ve openings per
side of an individual section of busway. Figure 24.0-59 and
Figure 24.0-60 illustrate the number of plug-in openings
taken up by each style/size bus plug.
Figure 24.0-59. Fusible Plug-in Device Mounting
Each plug-in unit uses only one plug-in opening; however,
may cover up additional plug-in openings preventing use.
Figure 24.0-60. Breaker Plug-in Device Mounting
4
4
.1
9
"
P3F325 (400 A), P3F365 (400 A),
P33F236 (600 A), P3F366 (600 A),
P3F327 (800 A) and P3F367 (800 A)
(Occupies 3 Plug-in Openings)
1
7
.0
0
M
in
.
1
2
.0
0
"
2
4
.0
0
"
4
0
2
4
.0
0
"
2
4
.0
0
"
2
4
.0
0
"
1
2
.0
0
"
1
8
.1
2
"
o
f O
p
e
n
in
g
CL CC
1
9
.0
0
"
2
0
.7
5
"
Can't Use
P3F321(30 A), P3F361 (30 A),
P33F361H (30 A), P3F322 (60 A),
P3F362 (60 A), P3F362H (60 A)
P3F323(100 A), P3F363(100A)
and P3F363H (100 A)
(Occupies 1 Plug-in Opening)
P3F364H (200 A)
and P3F365H (400 A)
P3F324 (200 A)
and P3F364 (200 A)
10 ft.
Section
Shown
F T FF
Can't Use
o
f O
p
e
n
in
g
CL CC
CL CC
E
n
d
o
f C
la
m
p
o
f O
p
e
n
in
g
CL CC
E
n
d
o
f C
la
m
p
4
1
.3
1
"
P3B2D, P3BMD, P3BND and P3BLAP
1
2
.0
0
"
2
4
.0
0
"
4
0
2
4
.0
0
"
2
4
.0
0
"
2
4
.0
0
"
1
2
.0
0
"
1
6
.5
0
"
1
8
.6
2
"
2
9
.7
5
"
P3BFD
P3BJD
(Occupies 1 Plug-in
Opening)
P3BKD
(Occupies 2 Plug-in
Openings)
3
7
.2
5
"
P3BLCL
F
"
T
"
o
f O
p
e
n
in
g
Coo
L
o
f
o CCo
f
o
o
f O
p
e
n
in
g
CL CC
o
f O
p
e
n
in
g
CCL CC
E
n
d
o
f C
la
m
p
E
n
d
o
f C
la
m
pp
Section
Shown
o
f O
p
e
n
in
g
CL CC
CL CC
E
n
d
o
f C
la
m
p
E
n
d
o
f C
la
m
p
Can't Use e
24.0-41
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Surge Protective Device (SPD) Plug-in Devices
041
SPD Series (Figure 24.0-61)
The Pow-R-Way III plug-in device product offering includes
a surge protective device (SPD), which is ideal for busway
fed distribution systems. A transient voltage is a random,
high energy, short duration electrical anomaly. These high
energy surges can disrupt, damage or destroy sensitive
microprocessor-based equipment. Eaton has developed
the SPD family of products to ensure that quality power
is supplied to commercial, industrial, medical and
institutional facilities.
The SPD not only protects against externally created
impulse transients such as lightning, utility capacitor
switching and disturbances emitted by adjacent facilities,
but also provides needed protection against internal
transients. This type of transient is generated within a
facilitys own distribution system. Sources of internally
generated, or ringwave, transients are imaging, equipment,
variable frequency drives, lighting dimmers, arc welders,
and the switching on and off of electrical distribution
equipment. It is estimated that over 80% of surge
disturbances are actually caused by internal transients.
The SPD series also lters repetitive electrical line noise
(EMI/RFI), which is dened as any unwanted electrical
signal that produces undesirable effects in the circuits
of sensitive electronic equipment or disturbances that are
two times peak voltage. The suppression of AC transients
is accomplished through the use of Metal Oxide Varistors
(MOVs) that provide a low impedance path to divert surges
away from loads. Electrical line noise and ringing transients
are eliminated by adding ltering capacitors to the
suppression device.
Not all SPD units on the market have ltering capabilities.
The benets of combining SPD and ltering are reduced
MOV stress resulting in a longer life cycle, lower
let-through voltage, better noise attenuation levels
and increased reliability.
Without protection devices, electronic based loads and
microprocessors are not provided with the noise- and
disturbance-free power that they require. Because
microprocessors are now common in most facilities,
speciers must ensure that the AC power supply is properly
ltered. Signicant performance advantages are achieved
by integrating SPD lters into busway systems.
Because the SPD unit is directly connected to the busway,
it is able to minimize let-through voltage and isolate critical
loads that are fed from a protected busway run. Due to
the integrated design, the SPD bus plug saves the user-
needed wall space and greatly reduces the installed
project cost. The SPD bus plug is furnished with a breaker
disconnect. For catalog numbers and selection criteria,
see Table 24.0-62 below.
Figure 24.0-61. SPD Bus Plug
Table 24.0-62. SPD Bus Plugs Selection Chart
Note: Available for Pow-R-Way III plugs. This information is required for all quotations. This information should also be included at order entry
to ensure prompt processing of the order.
21.50
(546.1)
5.75
(146.1)
14.24
(361.7)
FixedDo Not Change
Surge Rating
(kA/Phase)
100
120
160
200
250
300
P3BSPD 250 480Y S C
Voltage Code Voltage Requirements
4W 120/208 230/400 277/480 347/600
3W 240V 400V 480V 600V
Three-phase
wye (four-wire
+ ground)
208Y 400Y 480Y 600Y
Three-phase
delta (three-
wire + ground)
240D 480D 600D
FixedDo Not
Change Option Code
1 = BasicDual-colored LED per phase to indicate protection
status of the N-G mode on units with a neutral wire, single-
colored LED to indicate the lack of a neutral wire connec-
tion on systems with a neutral wire.
S = StandardDual-colored LED per phase to indicate protec-
tion status of the N-G mode on units with a neutral wire,
single-colored LED to indicate the lack of a neutral wire
connection on systems with a neutral wire, audible alarm
with silence button, and Form C relay contact.
N = Standard + Surge CounterDual-colored LED per phase
to indicate protection status of the N-G mode on units
with a neutral wire, single-colored LED to indicate the lack
of a neutral wire connection on systems with a neutral
wire, audible alarm with silence button, Form C relay
contact, EMI/RFI filtering providing up to 50 dB of noise
attenuation from 10 kHz to 100 MHz, and surge counter
with reset button.
24.0-42
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
042
IQ Energy Sentinel Bus Plugs (Figure 24.0-62)
The IQ Energy Sentinel is a UL listed microprocessor-based
metering module capable of communicating energy usage
and demand values over the PowerNet power monitoring
network. These innovative submetering devices are
designed to mount directly to Series C
molded-case
breakers through 400A and are available for universal
mounting through 2500A.
It offers a centralized alternative to individually mounted
wattmeters, watthour meters and watt-demand meters.
Key advantages include unmatched savings in space, lower
installation costs, and the capability to communicate data
readings in a variety of ways. IQ Energy Sentinels with built-
in CTs and communication capability have the added benet
of overall system accuracy. The Energy Sentinel mounts on
the load side of Eaton F, J and K frame breakers within the
bus plug enclosure. The Energy Sentinel is also available
for fusible plug-in units, which use external CTs within the
plug-in enclosure.
Submetering application examples for the Energy Sentinel
include energy monitoring and demand management,
energy cost analysis/allocation and tenant or
interdepartmental billing.
To accomplish the communication system, the customer
must provide a twisted pair communication cable in
0.50-inch (12.7 mm) conduit connecting the IQ Energy
Sentinel to a Breaker Interface Module or a customer PC
to display and collect the information.
The IQ Energy Sentinel offers the user full energy
monitoring capability in a compact, cost-effective
module ideally suited to busway application.
Figure 24.0-62. IQ Energy Sentinel Bus Plug
Ground Detector/Neutralizer Bus Plug (Figure 24.0-63)
In rare cases, bus bars in a busway system pick up static
electricity. In order to discharge this potential, a neutralizer
and ground detector bus plug is available. The unit has three
18,000 ohm resistors connected between the bus bars and
the ground. Static electricity is discharged through these
resistors. A neon lamp is wired in series with the bus bar
and part of the resistor, and burns continuously. If there is a
ground anywhere on the system of a lower resistance than
the path through the lamp, the lamp will go out, indicating
that there is a short in the system.
Figure 24.0-63. Ground Detector/Neutralizer Bus Plug
Combination Starter Bus Plugs (see Figure 24.0-64)
Eatons Freedom and Advantage motor starters are
included in the Pow-R-Way III bus plug product offering.
Freedom Motor Starters offer state-of-the-art features that
ensure greater value, exibility and performance in the
toughest commercial and industrial applications.
Advantage motor starters have features including a solid-
state, heaterless overload relay with built-in ground fault
protection. Advantage also features communication
capabilities and an on-board microprocessor that controls
the contactor magnet to eliminate burnout in low voltage
or varying control circuit conditions.
Plug-in combination starters or contactors are mounted
in enclosures identical to the circuit breaker and fusible
switch type bus plugs including the clamp and guides,
safety interlocks and guide pin. They are available from
size 0 through 5 with a circuit breaker, motor circuit protector
or fusible disconnect. Contact Eaton for specic application
and outline dimensions.
Figure 24.0-64. Freedom/Advantage Bus Plug
Cover
(Cutaway) 18,000 Ohm
Resistors (3)
Ground
Indicating
Lamp (3)
Ground
Connection
Advantage
Starter
24.0-43
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
043
Digitrip OPTIM Bus Plugs (Figure 24.0-65)
Digitrip OPTIM is a new programmable, communicating,
microprocessor-based electronic trip unit system for Eatons
Series C circuit breakers. OPTIM is available for Pow-R-Way
III bus plugs on K-Frame (125400A), L-Frame (70600A)
and N-Frame (4001200A) circuit breakers. Digitrip OPTIM
provides an electrical distribution system with superior
programmable protection, coordination and a state-of-
the-art advanced warning capability along with system
diagnostics, monitoring and communications. Digitrip
OPTIM is available in two trip unit types: OPTIM 550 and
OPTIM 1050.
Unique Digitrip OPTIM features can provide: Time current
settings with more increments that permit the user to
optimize system protection and coordination, improved
accuracy gives more selectivity and closer sensitivity in
providing coordination, programmable short delay and/or
instantaneous curve tripping options, selectable thermal
memory, as well as selectable sure start discriminator
protection features. Increased system security is provided
by the addition of a programmable password protection.
For improved system coordination, I
4
t long delay time
slope has been added to the traditional nine LSIG curve
shaping options. Short delay and ground delay zone
selective interlocking have also been added, down to a
70A circuit breaker.
The following Advance Warning options are also available:
A programmable high load phase and neutral alarm,
adjustable between 50% and 100% of I
r
(LDPU setting), will
signal an impending trip condition. An adjustable ground
fault alarm that will alert the user of a ground fault condition
without the breaker. Energy alarming can be performed
(such as peak demand exceeded) to reduce energy costs
with OPTIM 1050 via PowerNet. Total Harmonic Distortion
(THD) alarming detects changes in power quality with
OPTIM 1050 via PowerNet.
Digitrip OPTIM provides a complete selection of system
diagnostic capabilities including: four cause-of-trip LEDs
are mounted on the front of the trip unit to improve
troubleshooting capabilities. They are complemented by
trip event information that is stored in memory after a trip
condition, remote breaker status indication is provided by
auxiliary and alarm switches. The Breaker Interface Module
(BIM) provides trip indication information on the front of the
unit or via relay contacts to a remote location.
Digitrip OPTIM has an extensive menu of monitoring
capabilities including load monitoring, power factor
(OPTIM 1050), power and energy (OPTIM 1050) power
quality-current harmonics.
OPTIM trip units are PowerNet compatible and can be
included in the unique tripping PowerNet communications
system. Contact Eaton for specic applications and
outline dimensions.
Figure 24.0-65. OPTIM Bus Plug
24.0-44
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Power Takeoff
044
Power Takeoff Sections
Power takeoff sections are used to tap up to 1200A of power
off of the busway. A power takeoff section must be used
when power in excess of the current carrying capabilities
of the plug-in stabs (800A) is required. A bolt-on fusible
switch or circuit breaker unit can then be bolted to the
power takeoff.
Bridge Joint Power Takeoff (Figure 24.0-66)
A bridge joint power takeoff is a special connection that
allows for the attachment of a bolt-on unit at the bridge joint.
The bridge joint power takeoff and a bolt-on unit can be
used to tap off power where plug-in busway is not available.
Figure 24.0-66. Bridge Power Takeoff
Built-in Power Takeoff (Figure 24.0-67)
A built-in power takeoff is a special piece of feeder busway
that allows for the attachment of a bolt-on unit. Built-in
power takeoffs are used where space restrictions dictate
that the wide dimensions of the busway be at against the
wall, ceiling or other obstruction. In this application, power
takeoffs and bolt-on units are used instead of plug-in units.
Figure 24.0-67. Built-in Power Takeoff
Plug-in Cable Tap Boxes (Figure 24.0-68)
Plug-in cable tap boxes are used to feed the busway run, or
where equipment served by the busway is connected without
overcurrent protection. Plug-in cable tap boxes plug into any
Pow-R-Way III busway (2255000A) plug in opening.
Figure 24.0-68. Plug-in Cable Tap Box
Table 24.0-63. Plug-in Cable Tap Box Details
Load
Line
D A N G E R
D A N G E R
P.T.O.
Bolt-on Circuit Breaker
Unit or Fusible Switch
Pow-R-Bridge
C
L
17.00
(431.8)
(Minimum)
6.94
(176.3)
9.00
(228.6)
15.00
(381.0)
17.00
(431.8)
(Minimum)
15.00
(381.0)
6.94
(176.3)
9.00
(228.6)
Pow-R-Bridge Pow-R-Bridge
P.T.O.
Edgewise Mounted
Single Bar
Per Phase Only
Flatwise Mounted
Available in Single and
Double Bars Per Phase
P.T.O.
C
L
F
T
C
L
C
L
C
L
Top
Removable
C
Load End
B
A
D
Wiring
Gutter
3.81
(96.8)
Stab. C
L
CC
Ampere
Rating
Dimension Compression
Conn./Phase and N
Mechanical
Lugs/Phase and N
Catalog
Number
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Inches (mm) English Metric English Metric
200 19.50 (495.3) 15.50 (393.7) 7.12 (180.8) 7.50 (190.5) (1) (1) P3PTB200C
200 19.50 (495.3) 15.50 (393.7) 7.12 (180.8) 7.50 (190.5) (1) #4350 kcmil (1) 21.2177 mm
2
P3PTB200M
400 26.25 (666.7) 21.00 (533.4) 10.00 (254.0) 7.50 (190.5) (1) (1) P3PTB400C
400 26.25 (666.7) 21.00 (533.4) 10.00 (254.0) 7.50 (190.5) (1) 250750 kcmil
or (2) 3/0250 kcmil
(1) 127380 mm
2

or (2) 85.0127 mm
2
P3PTB400M
600 30.00 (762.0) 24.75 (628.6) 10.50 (266.7) 12.80 (325.1) (2) (2) P3PTB600C
600 30.00 (762.0) 24.75 (628.6) 10.50 (266.7) 12.80 (325.1) (2) 250750 kcmil
or (4) 3/0250 kcmil
(1) 127380 mm
2
or (4) 85.0127 mm
2
P3PTB600M
800 30.00 (762.0) 24.75 (628.6) 10.50 (266.7) 12.80 (325.1) (3) (3) P3PTB800C
800 30.00 (762.0) 24.75 (628.6) 10.50 (266.7) 12.80 (325.1) (3) 250750 kcmil
or (6) 3/0250 kcmil
(3) 127380 mm
2
or (6) 85.0127 mm
2
P3PTB800M
24.0-45
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Receptacle Plug-in Units
045
Eatons unique receptacle plug-in unit design makes them
the most exible receptacle units in the industry. Pow-R-Way
III receptacle plug-in units come fully assembled and
wired, reducing installation time, and are built to order.
They are CSA and UL 857 listed and come in ve different
congurations.
Fused Duplex Receptacle Unit
The fused duplex receptacle plug-in unit, shown in
Figure 24.0-69, allows for quick standard receptacle power at
any plug-in location along the busway. Each unit comes with
either two NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacles (catalog number:
P3FD62FD62F) or two NEMA L5-15R duplex receptacles
(catalog number: P3FD61FD61F). Each duplex receptacle is
rated and fuse protected at 15 or 20A and is 120V, single-
phase, three-wire.
Figure 24.0-69. Duplex Receptacle Plug
Single Receptacle Unit
The single receptacle plug-in unit, shown in Figure 24.0-70,
is congured to order and uses Type CH single- or two-pole
plug-in circuit breakers. One receptacle comes with each
unit that can be straight blade or twist-lock, rated from
1550A. Each receptacle can also be xed mounted to the
front of the enclosure or cord mounted from the bottom of
the enclosure (not as shown). Cord lengths are 115 feet in
1-foot increments. Consult NEC Sections 368, 400 and 645
for cord drop applications.
Figure 24.0-70. Single Receptacle Plug
Quad Receptacle Unit
The quad receptacle plug-in unit, shown in Figure 24.0-71,
is congured to order and uses Type CH single-, two- and
three-pole plug-in circuit breakers. Each unit comes with
24 NEMA congured receptacles in any combination of
straight blade and twist-lock and three-, four- and ve-wire,
rated 1550A. Each receptacle can be xed mounted to the
front of the enclosure or cord mounted from the bottom of
the enclosure (not as shown). Cord lengths are 115 feet in
1-foot increments. Consult NEC Sections 368, 400 and 645
Figure 24.0-71. Quad Receptacle Plug
24.0-46
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Plug-in Device Electrical Data
046
Table 24.0-64. Circuit Breakers
100% rated breakers are not available for use in bus plugs.
Contact product line for guidance.
Table 24.0-65. Branch Devices Earth Leakage Ground Fault
Circuit Breakers
(Adjustable pickup from 30 mA to 30A)
Table 24.0-65. Branch Devices Earth Leakage Ground Fault Circuit
Breakers, continued)
(Adjustable pickup from 30 mA to 30A)
Table 24.0-66. Integrally Fused, Current Limiting Circuit Breaker
Table 24.0-67. Breaker Unit Catalog Numbering System
Figure 24.0-72. Typical Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit
Notes:
Please call Greenwood Low Voltage Busway department
for help in assigning a catalog number for a specic application.
Do not leave spaces between characters. Example: P3BFD3225N;
IBPKD3400N.
All plug-in units come fully assembled.
Ampere
Rating
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) Breaker
Type
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac
1560
70100
1560
18
18
18
14
14
14
14
EHD
EHD
FDB
70100
110150
1560
18
18
65
14
14
25
14
14
18
FDB
FDB
FD
70100
110150
175225
65
65
65
25
25
25
18
18
18
FD
FD
FD
1560
70100
110150
100
100
100
65
65
65
25
25
25
HFD
HFD
HFD
175225
1560
70100
100
200
200
65
100
100
25
35
35
HFD
FDC
FDC
110225
15100
100225
200
200
65
100
150
35
FDC
FCL
ED
100225
100225
70225
100
200
65
35
18
EDH
EDC
JD, JDB
250
70225
250
65
100
100
35
65
65
18
25
25
JD, JDB
HJD
HJD
70225
250
125250
200
200
200
100
100
200
35
35
JDC
JDC
LCL
250400
100400
100400
65
65
100
35
65
25
35
DK
KD, KDB
HKD
100400
200400
300600
200
200
65
100
200
35
50
25
KDC
LCL
LD, LDB
300600
300600
400800
100
200
65
65
100
50
35
50
25
HLD
LDC
MDL
400800
400800
400800
100
65
100
65
50
65
35
25
35
HMDL
ND
HND
400800
6001200
200
65
100
50
50
25
NDC
ND
6001200 100 65 35 HND
6001200 200 100 50 NDC
Ampere
Rating
kAIC (Symmetrical) Breaker
Type
480 Vac
3560
70100
110150
25
25
25
ELFD
ELFD
ELFD
3560
70100
110150
65
65
65
ELHFD
ELHFD
ELHFD
3560
70100
110150
100
100
100
ELFDC
ELFDC
ELFDC
Ampere
Rating
kAIC (Symmetrical) Breaker
Type
480 Vac
100250
100250
100250
35
65
100
ELJD
ELHJD
ELJDC
200400
200400
200400
35
65
100
ELKD
ELHKD
ELKDC
Ampere
Rating
Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical) Breaker
Type
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac
15100
125225
250400
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
FB-P
LA-P
LA-P
400600
700800
200
200
200
200
200
200
NB-P
NB-P
P3B HFD 3 015 G N
Bus Style
P3B = PRWIII
IBP = PRW
BP = Old line
Breaker Frame
(Ex. FD, JDC,
KDB)
3-Pole Only
Trip Rating
(Ex. 015, 060,
150, 400)
Ground Option
G = 50% internal
I = Isolated ground
(PRWIII only)
Neutral Option
N = 100% neutral
N2 = 200% neutral
(PRWIII only)
ZN = Low Z
(old line only)
Busway Interlock
Operating Handle
Line Side
Barrier
Guide
Pin
Neutral Bar
and Terminal
Ground Bar
and Terminal
24.0-47
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
047
Table 24.0-68. Fusible Switch Horsepower and Short-Circuit Rating
(Based on Fuse Class)
Table 24.0-69. Fusible Unit Catalog Numbering System
Figure 24.0-73. Typical Fusible Plug-In Unit
NoteS:
H clips are standard for ITAP and TAP unless specied by adding
R in catalog number. R clips are standard for P3F.
Please call Greenwood Low Voltage Busway department for help in
assigning a catalog number for a specic application.
Do not leave spaces between characters. Example: P3F362RN;
ITAP361N.
All plug-in units come fully assembled.
Ampere
Rating
NEC
Standard
Maximum Maximum Symmetrical
rms at Fuse Class
240V
30
60
100
3
7.5
15
7.5
15
30
200 kAR
200 kAR
200 kAR
200
400
600
25
50
75
60
125
200
200 kAR
200 kAR
200 kAR
800 100 250 200 kAL
480V
30
60
100
5
15
25
15
30
60
200 kAR
200 kAR
200 kAR
200
400
600
50
100
150
125
250
400
200 kAR
200 kAR
200 kAJ
800 200 500 200 kAL
600V
30
60
100
7.5
15
30
20
50
75
200 kAR
200 kAR
200 kAR
200
400
600
60
125
200
150
350
500
200 kAR
200 kAJ
200 kAJ
800 250 500 200 kAL
P3F 3 6 4 R G N
Bus Style
P3F = PRWIII
ITAP = PRW
TAP = Old Line
Three-Pole
Only
Voltage
6 = 600V
2 = 240V
Fuse Clips
H, J or R 600A
T or L for 800A
Ground Option
G = 50%
I = Isolated
PRWIII only)
Ampere
1 = 30
2 = 60
3 = 100
4 = 200
5 = 400
6 = 600
7 = 800
Neutral Options
N = 100%
N2 = 200% (PRWIII only)
ZN = Low Z (old line
only)
Ground Bar
& Terminal
Guide
Pin
Operating Handle
Busway
Interlock
Neutral Bar
& Terminal
24.0-48
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Plug-in Device Physical Data
048
Figure 24.0-74. Bus Plugs
Table 24.0-70. Plug-in Units
Plug-in Opening
and B
Handle
Plug-in
Opening
O F F
O N
E
D
A
C
B
F
C
L
C
L
C
L
Guide Pin
Clamp
and Guide
OFF
ON
O
F
F O
N
Plug-In
Unit
Maximum
Amperes
Maximum
AC Volts
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Mechanical Terminal Approx.
Weights
Lbs (kg)
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) Wire Range Per Phase (mm
2
)
Circuit Breaker Plug-in Units
P3BFD
(E- & F-Frame breakers)
225 600 21.20
(538.5)
12.36
(314.0)
5.43
(138.0)
6.25
(158.8)
4.00
(101.6)
6.06
(153.7)
100A(1) #141/0 (2.550)
150A(1) #44/0 (2595)
25
(11.3)
P3BJD
(J-Frame breakers)
250 600 23.26
(590.8)
12.36
(314.0)
6.97
(177.0)
10.44
(265.2)
4.00
(101.6)
6.06
(153.7)
250A(1) #14350 kcmil (25185)
225A(1) 3350 kcmil (35185)
47
(21.3)
P3BKD
(K-Frame breakers)
400 600 34.41
(874.0)
13.29
(337.6)
7.79
(197.9)
12.56
(319.0)
4.00
(101.6)
6.64
(168.7)
350A(1) 250500 kcmil (120240)
400A(2) 3/0250 kcmil (45120)
53
(24.0)
P3BLD
(L-Frame breakers)
600 600 41.91
(1064.5)
19.65
(499.1)
10.15
(257.8)
17.38
(441.5)
4.00
(101.6)
9.83
(249.7)
400A(1) 4/0600 kcmil (120300)
600A(2) 400500 kcmil (185240)
75
(34.0)
P3BMDL
(MDL-Frame breakers)
800 600 45.89
(1165.6)
19.65
(499.1)
10.15
(257.8)
17.38
(441.5)
4.00
(101.6)
9.83
(249.7)
600A(2) #1500 kcmil (50240)
800A(2) 500750 kcmil (300400)
136
(61.7)
P3BND
(N-Fame breakers)
800 600 45.98
(1167.9)
19.65
(499.1)
10.15
(257.8)
17.38
(441.5)
4.00
(101.6)
9.83
(249.7)
700A(2) # 1500 kcmil (50240)
800A(3) 3/0400 kcmil (95185)
138
(62.6)
P3BLAP
(TRI-PAC)
400 600 45.89
(1165.6)
19.65
(499.1)
10.15
(257.8)
13.80
(350.5)
4.00
(101.6)
9.83
(249.7)
225A(1) #6350 kcmil (16185)
400A(1) #4250 kcmil and
(1) 3/0600 kcmil (25120 and 95300)
96
(43.5)
P3BLCL 400 600 41.86
(1063.2)
19.65
(499.1)
10.15
(257.8)
13.80
(350.5)
4.00
(101.6)
9.83
(249.7)
(1) #4250 kcmil (25120) and
(1) 3/0600 kcmil (95300)
88
(39.9)
24.0-49
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
049
Table 24.0-70. Plug-in Units (Continued)
Plug-In
Unit
Maximum
Amperes
Maximum
AC Volts
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Mechanical Terminal Approx.
Weights
Lbs (kg)
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) Wire Range Per Phase (mm
2
)
Fusible Plug-in Units
P3F321RH
P3F321RV
30 240 12.64
(321.1)
15.66
(397.8)
13.92
(353.6)
12.64
(321.1)
8.46
(214.9)
4.30
(109.2)
3.90
(99.1)
8.26
(209.8)
6.72
(170.7)
Cu(1) #14#3, (2.535)
Al(1) #12#2 (3.235)
22
(10.0)
P3F361RH
P3F361RV
600 12.64
(321.1)
15.66
(397.8)
13.92
(353.6)
12.64
(321.1)
8.46
(214.9)
4.30
(109.2)
3.90
(99.1)
8.26
(209.8)
6.72
(170.7)
P3F322RH
P3F322RV
60 240 12.64
(321.1)
15.66
(397.8)
13.92
(353.6)
12.64
(321.1)
8.46
(214.9)
4.30
(109.2)
3.90
(99.1)
8.26
(209.8)
6.72
(170.7)
Cu(1) #14#3, (2.535)
Al(1) #12#2 (3.238)
24
(10.9)
P3F362RH
P3F362RV
600 12.64
(321.1)
15.66
(397.8)
13.92
(353.6)
12.64
(321.1)
8.46
(214.9)
4.30
(109.2)
3.90
(99.1)
8.26
(209.8)
6.72
(170.7)
Cu(1) #141/0, (2.550)
Al(1) #121/0 (3.250)
24
(10.9)
P3F323RH
P3F323RV
100 240 14.83
(376.7)
19.85
(504.2)
17.92
(455.2)
12.76
(324.1)
8.37
(212.6)
4.30
(109.2)
3.90
(99.1)
13.62
(345.9)
6.84
(427.7)
Cu(1) #141/0, (2.550)
Al(1) #121/0 (3.250)
(1) # 4250 kcmil Cu/Al (25120)
24
(10.9)
P3F363RH
P3F363RV
600 14.83
(376.7)
19.85
(504.2)
17.92
(455.2)
12.76
(324.1)
8.37
(212.6)
4.30
(109.2)
3.90
(99.1)
13.62
(345.9)
6.84
(427.7)
P3F324RH
P3F324RV
200 240 23.86
(606.0)
17.24
(437.9)
15.29
(388.4)
8.52
(216.4)
5.71
(145.0)
6.80
(172.7)
3.90
(99.1)
3.83
(97.3)
8.26
(209.8)
(1) # 4250 kcmil Cu/Al (25120)
(1) #4600 kcmil Cu/Al (25300)
or (2) 250 kcmil (120)
47
(21.3)
P3F364RH
P3F364RV
600 23.86
(606.0)
17.24
(437.9)
15.29
(388.4)
8.52
(216.4)
5.71
(145.0)
6.80
(172.7)
3.90
(99.1)
3.83
(97.3)
8.26
(209.8)
P3F325R and
P3F365R
400 240
600
48.85
(1240.8)
21.22
(539.0)
10.07
(255.8)
12.67
(321.8)
4.00
(101.6)
10.69
(271.5)
(1) 250750 kcmil Cu/Al (127380)
(2) 3/0250 kcmil Cu/Al (85127)
77
(34.9)
P3F365H 400 600 23.59
(599.2)
21.22
(539.0)
21.00
(533.4)
12.67
(321.8)
4.00
(101.6)
10.69
(271.5)
(1) 250750 kcmil Cu/Al (127380)
(2) 3/0250 kcmil Cu/Al (85127)
81
(36.7)
P3F326R and
P3F366R
600 240
600
48.90
(1242.1)
26.31
(668.3)
10.59
(270.0)
14.26
(362.2)
4.00
(101.6)
13.16
(334.3)
(2) #2600 kcmil Cu/Al (35300)
(3) #4600 kcmil Cu/Al (25300)
82
(37.1)
P3F327R and
P3F367R
800 240
600
48.90
(1242.1)
26.31
(668.3)
10.59
(270.0)
14.26
(362.2)
4.00
(101.6)
13.16
(334.3)
(3) #4600 kcmil Cu/Al (25300) 108
(49.0)
24.0-50
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Construction Drawing
050
Construction Drawing
Figure 24.0-75. Sample Installation Drawing
After the approval process and prior to shipment of the
busway from the factory, the installer will receive a set of
construction drawings. A sample is illustrated in Figure 24.0-
75 above. The drawings will contain a complete layout of the
entire installation and a bill of material that includes:
1. The item number of each section which can be correlated
with the drawing.
2. A description of each section.
3. The style number or shop order number of each section.
4. The quantity of each section or style number required.
5. The height, width and weight (per foot) of each
ampere rating.
6. Location of the T and F markings on the busway.
7. Flange reference drawings.
8. Switchgear locations and orientation.
9. Wall and oor locations.
10. The length of each section.
11. The location of any sections that have been designated
as Field Fit pieces (see Page 24.0-52).
The installer should review this drawing prior to and during
the installation process. Please note that plug-in units are
generally not shown on a construction drawing. The installer
will also receive installation instruction leaets and operation
and maintenance manuals with the drawings.
48.00
(1219.2)
2500 A 30 4W
Same Elevation
See Drawing
BVC1012 Line 5
See Drawing
BVC1004 Line 15
A08
8.00
(203.2)
A10
6.00
(152.4)
Plug-In Unit
All Floors
1600 A 30 4W
2 of
6 .00 5/8
2.00
1.00
Outdoor
Duct
Indoor
Duct
F
111.44
(2830.6)
0.45
(11.4)
96.00
(2438.4)
30.00
(762.0)
120.0
(3048.0)
30.00
(762.0)
120.0
(3048.0) 6.00
(152.4)
150.0
(3810.0)
150.0
(3810.0)
30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
15.00
(381.0)
18.00
(457.2)
35.00
(889.0)
293.00
(7442.2)
240.00
(6096.0)
29.00
(736.6)
15.00
(381.1)
25.63
(651.0)
24.00
(609.6)
52.00
(1320.0)
36.00
(914.4)
12.00
(304.8)
39.00
(990.6)
44.00
(1117.6)
25.00
(635.0)
17.00
(431.8)
6.00
(152.4)
4.38
(111.3)
G
A
B
C
N
16.14
(409.9)
2 .25 x 4.25 (6.35 x 108.0) Copper/Phase
2 .25 x 4.25 (6.35 x 108.0) Copper/Neutral
Duct Weight = 42 Lbs./Ft.
Color = ANSI 61 Gray
Indoor/Outdoor
3200 Ampere, 3-Phase Copper, 227/480 Volts
4-Wire, Housing Ground, 100% Neutral
4.38
(111.3)
G
A
B
C
N
7.38
(187.5)
1 .25 x 4.25 (6.35 x 108.0) Copper/Phase
1 .25 x 4.25 (6.35 x 108.0) Copper/Neutral
Duct Weight = 21 Lbs./Ft.
Color = ANSI 61 Gray
Indoor/Outdoor
1600 Ampere, 3-Phase Copper, 227/480 Volts
4-Wire, Housing Ground, 100% Neutral
A07
A01
A02
A03
A04
A06
A09
A11
A12
A13
A12
A12
A12
A14
A15
Style No.
Item Description or S.O. No. Req.
A01 XFMR Throat LVB01234 U01 1
A02 Elbow LVB01234 A02 1
A03 Wall Flange BVC0299G11 1
A04 Elbow Flange LVB01234 A04 1
A05 Hanger BVD0301G12 2
A06 Flange Elbow LVB01234 A06 1
A08 29.0 Inches (736.6 mm) Length LVB01234 A08 1
A09 120.0 Feet (3048.0mm) Length LVB01234 A09 2
Style No.
Item Description or S.O. No. Req.
A11 Floor Flange BVD0299G06 3
A12 30 Inches (726.0mm) Length LVB01234 A12 3
A13 120.0 Feet (3048.0 mm) Length LVB01234 A13 2
A14 96.0 Feet (2438.4 mm) Length LVB01234 A14 1
A15 End Closer BVD0156G08 1
24.0-51
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Installation Data
051
Installation Data
Hoisting and Positioning Busway
Pow-R-Way III is manufactured with two sets of lifting
eyes at the ends of each piece to facilitate the hoisting
and positioning of the busway during installation. Refer
to Figure 24.0-76 for location of lifting eyes.
Figure 24.0-76. Hoisting Riser and Horizontal Busway
Busway Joint Assembly
When connecting sections of busway the following
guidelines must be followed:
1. Carefully read NEMA publication BUI.1 provided with
the busway before installing equipment.
2. Contact surfaces must be kept clean and free of all
contaminants.
3. Align the (factory installed) Pow-R-Bridge end of the
piece being positioned with the non-bridge joint end of
the adjacent section. Conrm that the T and F labels
of both sections are in the same plane. Failure to do so
will result in an improper installation with the phase bars
of the connected sections out of sequence. Then, slide
the two sections together until the bus bars of the non-
bridge section contact the stopping lances of the bridge
joint conductor bars of the section being positioned.
Figure 24.0-77 illustrates examples of incorrect and correct
connections. Obviously, the installation is incorrect if
the bridge joint is missing, but the busway will also be
improperly installed if the T label of the bridge joint is
not in the same plane as the T label of the busway.
Figure 24.0-77. Bridge Joint Installation
Torque Indicating Bolt (Figure 24.0-78)
The torque indicating bolt is a double-headed bolt designed
to ensure that proper installation torque is achieved. Fall-
away instruction labels are provided between the upper and
lower bolt heads. A standard wrench with a (minimum)
14.00-inch (355.6 mm) handle should be used to complete
the joint installation. Torque should be applied to the upper
head only and as when the proper value is achieved. This
bolt head will shear off allowing the tag to fall to the oor.
Any joint that is improperly torqued will retain the highly
visible tag and should be retightened. The lower bolt head
remains intact for future maintenance and a label is provided
on the bridge joint with the proper torque requirements.
Figure 24.0-78. Torque Indicating Bolt
Note: For maintenance or relocation torque from 55 to 65 ft lbs using
a torque wrench.
Incorrect Joint Assembly:
No Pow-R-Bridge
Incorrect Joint Assembly:
T and F Labels Misaligned
Correct Joint Assembly
Torque Indicating Bolt
After Installation
Yellow
Instruction
Label
For initial installation, tighten
until outer head shears off.
Use a 14-inch (355.6 mm) or
longer wrench.
Torque Indicating Bolt
as Shipped
24.0-52
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Final Field Fit Program
052
Final Field Fit Program
A eld t section of busway is typically an elbow or a short
length of feeder that is intentionally left out of a run for later
shipment. It is most often a mutually agreed upon section
between the customer and the plant. The purpose of
the program is to effectively manage the dimensional
uncertainties that may be involved in a busway layout.
The example shown in Figure 24.0-79 identies the eld t
piece as item F01, a straight length.
Upon release of the order, this item is kept on hold for eld
measurement. The contractor installs the busway (Items A01
through A04) and is then able to obtain an exact dimension
for the nal eld t piece, Item F01. The measurement
should be made from the edge of the housing of A01 to
the edge of the housing A02.
The contractor can fax the dimensions directly to the factory
on the Final Field Fit Fax Release form, which is packed with
the original shipment. The eld t section will ship within
5 to 10 working days from the receipt of the release fax.
Offset ttings or more than four eld ts released at the
same time will ship within 15 working days. This program
has been successful for many years and it provides the
assurance of an exact t the rst time. It allows for busway
runs to be released when certain dimensions are not yet
determined. It also eliminates the costly delays that can
occur when sections have to be remade and shipped due
to last-minute job site changes. In turn, this allows for
installations to begin early and projects can be completed
on time.
The Final Field Fit Fax Release form is customized to each
order and is shipped to the job site with the busway. The
eld t items shown on the form will match the F items
shown on the as-built drawings provided. The sheet is faxed
from the job site directly to the product engineer at the factory.
Figure 24.0-79. Final Field Fit Program
Field Measure
Dimension A
Hold F01 for Final Fit.
Customer to Furnish
Dimensions.
Customer Faxes A Dimension
for F01
Final Fit Piece Shipped within
5 to 10 Working Days (Elbow or
Feeder Length)
A02
A01
F01
A03
A04
F01 Switchgear #1
Front
A
A
24.00
(609.6)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
24.00
(609.6)
36.00
(914.4)
24.00
(609.6) T
F
T
F
24.1-1
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
General Description
053
Pow-R-Flex
Low-Ampere Busway
Pow-R-Flex Low-Ampere Busway
General Description
Eatons Pow-R-Flex low-ampere
busway is the latest design in a family
of innovative busway products and
is the newest in the industry. The
Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway is
an excellent solution for distributing
power throughout facilities, providing
the exibility to easily use the
electrical system power where and
when it is needed. The Pow-R-Flex
low-ampere busway is practical for
manufacturing and assembly facilities,
machine shops, school and private
laboratories, warehouse facilities,
and data centers, and will reduce
installation time and costs.
The Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway
is a maximum 600V design that uses
the latest in extrusion construction,
providing appealing aesthetics
without compromising heavy-duty
performance.
The design consists of an extruded,
all-aluminum housing with silver-
plated copper or aluminum
conductors. Copper conductors
offer ratings from 225600A, and
aluminum conductors offer ratings
from 150400A. The Pow-R-Flex low-
ampere busway comes in feeder
type and plug-in type with a full
line of complementary ttings and
accessories. Feeder and plug-in
busways can be used interchangeably
without adapters or special splice
plates. Each section is joined using
a Pow-R-Bridge joint-compression
tting. The Pow-R-Flex low-ampere
busway comes in two color options:
ANSI 61 gray or black.
Standards
meets the requirements of NEMA,
ANSI, UL

857, and CSA
-C22.2 and is
manufactured in an ISO
9001-certied
facility. The feeder, plug-in, ttings and
accessories are designed to withstand
the short-circuit ratings listed for each
ampere rating.
The Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway is
a three-phase design available in three-
wire and four-wire congurations with
integral housing, internal and isolated
internal ground options. Oversized
neutral ratings are available on select
current ratings. See Table 24.1-5.
Seismic Qualication
Conductor Details
Pow-R-Flex bus bars are fabricated
from high-strength 100% to over 200%
neutral capacity on select current
ratings. The phase and neutral
conductors are silver-plated along
the entire length of the bus bars.
Aluminum bars are silver-plated by the
Alstan 88C process, and copper bars
are silver-plated through a ashing
process. The ground bar for the
internal ground option is not plated.
The internal conductors are separated
from one another using an air
insulation gap between phases,
ground and housing. The conductors
are supported and braced with a
durable, high-strength polycarbonate
support block that has a Class B 130C
insulation rating. The support blocks
provide superior fault current bracing.
For a Pow-R-Flex type plug-in busway,
there are no special provisions for
plug-in unit connections. Each plug-in
unit clamps directly onto each phase
and neutral conductor. A support block
is used at each plug-in provision,
providing additional bracing and
support around the plug-in unit
provision. This provides a more
robust, reliable and safe plug-in
unit connection.
The neutral conductor is made
from the same material as the phase
conductors and is the same physical
size, providing 100% to 200% neutral
capacity on select current ratings. See
Table 24.1-5 for neutral capacity by
ampere rating.
Figure 24.1-1. Conductor Congurations
Note: Single-phase congurations are also
available. Contact your local Eaton sales
representative for additional information.
Three-Wire Housing
Ground Assembly
Three-Wire Internal
Ground Assembly
Four-Wire Housing
Ground Assembly
Four-Wire Internal
Ground Assembly
C
B
A
C
B
A
G
N
C
B
A
N
C
B
A
G
24.1-2
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
General Description
054
Ground Options
Integral grounduses the extruded
aluminum housing as the ground/
earth path. It has been designed,
manufactured and UL listed as a
50% integral ground/earth path and is
fully fault rated. The system ground
continuity is maintained through each
joint by the aluminum joint covers.
The joint covers are furnished with
ground/earth path contact surfaces
on the inside of each cover. When
installed, the contact surfaces are
bolted directly to the busway ground/
earth path. A highly visible label is
furnished on each joint cover to alert
the installer that the covers must be
properly installed to maintain the
ground/earth path. The result is a
50% ground/earth path with very
low resistance characteristics.
Internal grounduses a copper
ground/earth conductor that is internal
to the busway and is UL listed as a 50%
ground/earth path. The internal ground/
earth continuity is maintained through
the Pow-R-Bridge joint in the same
fashion as each phase conductor.
Isolated internal grounduses the
50% internal ground/earth conductor;
however, it has been isolated from
the busway housing throughout the
busway system and is UL listed as a
50% isolated ground/earth path.
Housing Details
is constructed with a heavy-duty
U-shaped aluminum extruded base
housing. The front covers are also
made from extruded aluminum. The
U-shaped base and front cover
incorporate a unique hinge design
to lock in the front covers on the top
side. The bottom sides are fastened
in place. This maintains short-circuit
strength, provides clean lines, and
adds to the aesthetic look and feel of
the product.
The non-magnetic, all-aluminum
housing provides for excellent heat
dissipation and a signicant reduction
in reactance and magnetic ux
leakage, as compared to steel, or
steel and aluminum combination
housings. The integrity and strength
of the housing ensures speciers and
users of a safe and durable installation
over a broad spectrum of applications.
A protective nish is applied by an
electrostatic process. There are two
color options: ANSI 61 gray or black.
Pow-R-Bridge
Pow-R-Flex joint connections are
made with the Pow-R-Bridge joint
package, which is installed on each
section of busway prior to shipment.
A double-headed, torque-indicating
bolt is provided to ensure that the
proper installation torque is achieved.
Fall-away instruction tags are
furnished on the torque-indicating bolt
heads to allow for visual inspection
from a distance. When the proper
torque value is achieved, the top bolt
head will shear off and allow the tag
to fall to the oor. Any joint that is
improperly torqued will retain the
highly visible (caution yellow) tag
at the bolt head.
The Pow-R-Bridge can provide an
adjustment of 0.50-inch (12.7 mm)
at each joint. Overadjustment is
prevented by the joint covers,
which will only allow a 0.50-inch
(12.0 mm) adjustment to be made.
The nonrotating design of the
Pow-R-Bridge maintains its
conguration integrity when it has
been removed from a section of
busway. The conductors, insulator
plates, and insulators will not displace
or swivel, making reinstallation of
the Pow-R-Bridge quick and easy.
Pow-R-Flex Feeder Busway
150400A aluminum
225600A copper
Straight sections of feeder busway can
be supplied in any length, at 0.50-inch
(12.7 mm) increments, from 24.00
inches (609.6 mm) minimum to
120.00 inches (3048.0 mm) maximum.
Each feeder section will include one
factory-installed Pow-R-Bridge on the
left end of the busway when viewing
the front of the busway. For added
safety and reliability, there are no
openings or access covers along the
entire length of each feeder section.
Pow-R-Flex Plug-In Busway
150400A aluminum
225600A copper
Straight sections of plug-in busway
can be supplied in only 24.00-inch
(609.6 mm) increments from
24.00 inches (609.6 mm) minimum,
with a maximum of 120.00 inches
(3048.0 mm).
For a Pow-R-Flex type plug-in busway,
a plug-in/tap-off provision cover is
used. This cover hinges into the
housing in the same manner as the
extruded front covers and is made
from the same durable, high-strength
polycarbonate material as the support
blocks, which are rated as Class B
130C insulation. The plug-in provision
cover incorporates a shutter design
that prevents incidental contact with
the conductors inside the busway.
The shutter has a positive screw close
feature that prohibits the shutter from
being operated and opened without
the use of a tool. Once the screw is
removed, it is mechanically operated
by the plug-in unit when a plug-in unit
is being inserted onto the busway.
This shutter design puts safety rst
and is IP2X nger safe. One plug-in/
tap-off provision cover is provided
every 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) along
a plug-in busway section. Each feeder
section will include one factory-
installed Pow-R-Bridge on the left
end of the busway when viewing the
front of the busway.
Table 24.1-1. Number of Plug-In Openings
Figure 24.1-2. Feeder Busway
Figure 24.1-3. Plug-in Busway
Duct Length
Inches (mm)
Number of
Plug-In Provisions
24.00 (609.6)
48.00 (1219.2)
72.00 (1828.8)
96.00 (2438.4)
120.00 (3048.0)
1
3
5
7
9
24.1-3
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Electrical Data
055
Electrical Data
Table 24.1-2. Short-Circuit RatingsThree-Cycle rms Symmetrical
Table 24.1-3. Resistance, Reactance and Impedance Milliohms per
100 Feet (30.5m) Line-to-Neutral, Plug-in and Feeder Busway
Table 24.1-4. Ground Resistance Values Milliohms per 100 Feet (30.5m)
Table 24.1-5. Oversized Neutral Ratings
Table 24.1-6. Voltage Drop Volts per 100 Feet (30.5m) Line-to-Neutral,
60 Hz at Rated Current (Varying Power Factors)
Notes:
Values shown in Table 24.1-6 are based upon concentrated
loads. For plug-in distributed loads, divide the values by 2.
See IEEE
141-13-8.3.
For line-to-neutral voltage drop, multiply the values from Table 24.1-6
by 0.577.
For other than rated current, multiply the values from Table 24.1-6 by
actual current/rated current.
For total voltage drop, multiply voltage drop by actual length/
100 ft (30.5m).
Ampere
Rating
Plug-In Short-Circuit
Rating
Feeder Short-Circuit
Rating
Aluminum
150
225
300
400
22,000
35,000
35,000
42,000
22,000
35,000
35,000
42,000
Copper
225
400
500
600
22,000
35,000
42,000
42,000
22,000
35,000
42,000
42,000
Ampere
Rating
Resistance
R
Reactance
X
Impedance
Z
Aluminum
150
225
300
400
9.93
3.44
3.44
2.41
4.56
2.92
2.92
2.50
10.90
4.57
4.57
3.46
Copper
225
400
500
600
5.30
1.85
1.32
1.32
4.24
2.96
2.51
2.51
6.87
3.53
2.75
2.75
Ampere Rating Integral R Internal R
Aluminum
150
225
300
400
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.55
2.86
2.86
2.86
2.86
Copper
225
400
500
600
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.55
1.44
1.44
1.44
1.44
Ampere
Rating
Neutral Size
D x W Inches (mm)
Neutral
Rating
Aluminum
150
225
300
400
0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)
0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)
0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)
0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)
250%
150%
150%
150%
Copper
225
400
500
600
0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)
0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)
0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)
0.28 x 1.75 (7.1 x 44.5)
250%
150%
100%
100%
Ampere
Rating
100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 50%
Aluminum
150
225
300
400
2.58
1.34
1.79
1.67
2.84
1.70
2.27
2.26
2.77
1.76
2.34
2.37
2.65
1.75
2.33
2.41
2.50
1.71
2.29
2.39
2.32
1.66
2.21
2.33
Copper
225
400
500
600
2.07
1.28
1.14
1.37
2.58
2.05
1.98
2.37
2.64
2.26
2.22
2.66
2.63
2.36
2.35
2.82
2.56
2.41
2.42
2.91
2.46
2.42
2.45
2.94
24.1-4
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Physical Data
056
Physical Data
Table 24.1-7. Physical DimensionsWidth x Height in Inches (mm)
Table 24.1-8. Weight (lb ft)/Current Density (A/in^2)
Table 24.1-9. Weight (kg/m)/Current Density (A/cm^2)
Ampere
Rating
Phase
Conductor
Ground
Conductor
Housing
Enclosure
Aluminum
150 0.28 x 0.50
(7.1 x 12.7)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
225 0.28 x 1.25
(7.1 x 31.8)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
300 0.28 x 1.25
(7.1 x 31.8)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
400 0.28 x 1.75
(7.1 x 44.5)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
Copper
225 0.28 x 0.50
(7.1 x 12.7)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
400 0.28 x 1.25
(7.1 x 31.8)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
500 0.28 x 1.75
(7.1 x 44.5)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
600 0.28 x 1.75
(7.1 x 44.5)
0.20 x 1.75
(5.1 x 44.5)
3.55 x 8.29
(90.2 x 210.6)
Ampere
Rating
Current
Density
Weight
Three-Wire
Weight
Four-Wire
Add for
Ground
Add for
Oversized Neutral
Aluminum
150
225
300
400
1067
640
610
813
6.45
7.10
7.55
7.55
6.60
7.50
8.10
8.10
0.41
0.41
0.41
0.41
0.40
0.15
0.15
Copper
225
400
500
600
1618
1151
1027
1233
7.50
9.80
11.45
11.45
8.00
11.05
13.25
13.25
1.30
1.30
1.30
1.30
1.30
0.82
Ampere
Rating
Current
Density
Weight
Three-Wire
Weight
Four-Wire
Add for
Ground
Add for
Oversized Neutral
Aluminum
150
225
300
400
165
99
132
126
9.60
10.57
11.24
11.24
9.82
11.16
12.05
12.05
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.61
0.60
0.22
0.22
Copper
225
400
500
600
251
178
159
191
11.16
14.58
17.04
17.04
11.91
16.44
19.72
19.72
1.93
1.93
1.93
1.93
1.93
0.82
Figure 24.1-4. Conductor Dimensions

3.60
(91.4)
8.30
(210.8)
0.50
(12.7)
3.60
(91.4)
8.30
(210.8)
1.25
(31.7)
3.60
(91.4)
8.30
(210.8)
1.75
(44.4)
24.1-5
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Physical Data
057
Fittings
There are various ttings allowing the
Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway to
meet every application need: anges,
elbows, offsets, tees, cable tap boxes,
adapters, expansion joints, phase
transpositions and end closures.
These ttings, along with standard and
minimum dimensions, are described
on the following pages.
the dimensions are given from the
centerline of the busway and the
Pow-R-Bridge.
The relationship of ttings to straight
lengths (forward, rearward, upward
and downward) is illustrated in
Figure 24.1-5.
All straight lengths and ttings are
marked with an F label. The F
marks the front of the busway and will
be noted on the construction or the
as-built drawings provided by Eaton.
Phasingthe phasing is indicated by
the location of the F label. When
facing the front of the busway, the
phasing is N-C-B-A-G top to bottom.
See Figure 24.1-6.
When installing Pow-R-Flex low-
ampere busway, the F labels on
the front of the busway must be
aligned. Failure to do so will result
in an improper installation with the
phase bars out of sequence.
Figure 24.1-5. Busway Orientation
Figure 24.1-6. Busway Phase Sequence
Traditional Elbows
Elbows are used to make 90-degree
changes in the direction of the busway
layouts. There are four types of elbows
available: forward, rearward, upward
and downward, allowing the busway
layout to turn in any direction.
Figure 24.1-7 shows the standard/
minimum leg lengths for each
type of elbow for all ratings and
congurations. Nonstandard lengths
are also available.
All dimensions shown are to the
centerline of the Pow-R-Bridge and
centerline of the busway.
Figure 24.1-7. Traditional Elbows
Rearward
Downward
Upward
Forward
Forward
Downward
Rearward
Upward
24.1-6
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Physical Data
058
Standard Flanges
Flanges provide for a direct connection to low voltage
switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers
and other electrical equipment. Cutout dimensions and drilling
plans are provided with the customer installation drawings,
and it is the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer to
provide the opening, ange drillings, connecting hardware
and bus risers in their electrical equipment. For proper
coordination between the busway and other equipment,
detailed drawings, including equipment orientation, must
accompany the order prior to release and manufacture.
Figure 24.1-9 shows the standard/minimum ange
length and phase-to-phase dimensions for all ratings and
congurations. Nonstandard lengths and phase-to-phase
dimensions are also available.
All dimensions shown are to the centerline of the
Pow-R-Bridge measured from the top of the ange plate.
Figure 24.1-8. Flange Cutout Detail
Figure 24.1-9. Standard Flanges
4.05
(102.9)
0.28
(7.1)
1.50
(38.1)
0.50 (12.7)
0.75
(19.0)
3.50
(88.9)
3.50
(88.9)
3.50
(88.9)
3.50
(88.9)
0.89 (22.6)
15.78
(400.8)
C
L
1.05
(26.7)
1.50
(38.1)
4.50
(114.3)
4.50
(114.3)
4.50
(114.3)
1.60
(40.6)
N
C
B
A
G
24.1-7
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Physical Data
059
Offsets
An offset is used to allow the busway layout, avoid any
obstacles and to conform to the buildings structure. It is two
elbows fabricated into a single tting for use where space
restrictions prohibit the use of two traditional elbows.
There are four types of offsets available: forward, rearward,
upward and downward, allowing the busway layout to offset
in any direction.
Figure 24.1-10 shows the standard/minimum leg lengths
for each type of offset for all ratings and congurations.
Nonstandard lengths are also available.
All dimensions shown are to the centerline of the
Pow-R-Bridge and centerline of the busway.
Figure 24.1-10. Offsets
Upward
Rearward
Downward
Forward
24.1-8
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Physical Data
060
Cable Tap Boxes
There are two types of cable tap boxes: end and center. End
cable tap boxes are used to feed power to a run of busway
with cable and conduit or where loads served by busway
are connected without the need of overcurrent protection.
Center cable tap boxes are used to center feed a run of
busway with cable and conduit or where loads served by
the busway are connected without the need of overcurrent
protection.
The front and back covers are removable, improving the
ease of cable termination. Top and bottom access plates are
removable, allowing easy access to the lugs with tools. See
Figure 24.1-12 and Figure 24.1-13. There are two mechanical
lugs provided: per phase and one lug for the ground.
Terminal conductor range is as follows:
Phase and neutral: (1) #4350 kcmil
Ground: (1) #81/0
Figure 24.1-12 shows the standard/minimum stub
lengths for each type of cable tap box for all ratings and
congurations. Nonstandard lengths and enclosure sizes
are also available.
All dimensions shown are to the centerline of the Pow-R-
Bridge measured from the edge of the box enclosure.
Figure 24.1-11. Center Cable Tap Box
Figure 24.1-13. End Cable Tap Box Detail View
Figure 24.1-14. Mechanical Lug Access
Figure 24.1-15. End Cable Tap Box With IQ Power Meter
24.1-9
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Physical Data
061
Expansion Joints
Expansion joints accommodate the expansion and
contraction of bus bars with respect to the enclosure.
They accommodate for the difference in the coefcient
of expansion of the aluminum housing and copper or
aluminum bus bar conductors. Expansion joints must be
used whenever a run of busway crosses an expansion joint
of a building. They should also be installed in the center of an
extremely long straight run of busway; one every 300 feet
(91m) for copper and one every 225 feet (68m) for aluminum.
Usage per footage recommendations are based upon full-
load ampere ratings. The use of expansion joints should
be engineered for specic applications and installations.
Minimum dimensions are shown in Figure 24.1-16.
Figure 24.1-16. Expansion Joint
Phase Transpositions
Phase transposition ttings are used in applications where
a phase rotation is needed due to a change in phasing from
the source equipment to the load equipment. They may also
be used to correct plug-in unit orientation when the busway
comes out of proper orientation for plug-in units due to
the routing of the busway. There are two types of phase
transpositions: 90 degree and 180 degree. In both types,
all conductors are transposed. See Figure 24.1-17 and
Figure 24.1-18 for minimum dimensions.
Figure 24.1-17. 90-Degree Phase Transposition
Figure 24.1-18. 180-Degree Phase Transposition
24.1-10
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Physical Data
062
VaporFire Barriers
Vaporre barriers hold a two-hour re rating and are used
to seal the busway internally for penetrations through walls,
oors, and other re-rated penetrations, preventing the
passage of ame, noxious gas, smoke and moisture. See
Figure 24.1-19 for minimum dimensions.
Figure 24.1-19. VaporFire Barrier
Tees (Horizontal)
Tee ttings allow for busway connection in three different
horizontal directions. Pow-R-Flex tee ttings consist of
special joint covers with instructions on how to place the
bridge joint. The through connections connect to the short
sides of the bridge joint, and the change connections
connect to the long side of the bridge joint.
Figure 24.1-20. Horizontal Tees
Accessories
End Closures
End closures terminate a bus run and can be used to cap
off either the left or right end of a section of busway. End
closures enclose and prevent incidental contact with live
conductors. An end closure adds 0.25 inches to the overall
length of the busway run. See Figure 24.1-21.
Figure 24.1-21. End Closure
24.1-11
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Physical Data
063
Wall Flanges
Wall anges t around the busway and are designed to
close off the wall gap opening around the busway, made to
allow the busway to pass through a wall. Wall anges are
primarily for cosmetic purposes and do not provide any type
of vapor or re barrier. See Figure 24.1-22.
The recommended cutout opening in a wall for the busway
should be 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) greater than the busway
dimensions or A x B.
Type C Wallmount Hanger
The Type C wallmount hanger provides a means to
mount the Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway to a wall, beam,
pedestal or other xed structure. The Type C brackets are
installed prior to installing the busway. Each hanger comes
with the hardware to mount the hanger to the busway. One
hanger should be used every 10 feet (3m), and the busway
span between hangers should not exceed 10 feet (3m).
See Figure 24.1-23.
Figure 24.1-23. Type C Wallmount Hanger
Type L Wallmount Hanger
The Type L wallmount hanger provides a means to mount
the Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway ush against a wall. The
Type L brackets are sold as a two-piece hanger set and come
See Figure 24.1-24.
Figure 24.1-24. Type L Wallmount Hanger
24.1-12
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Physical Data
064
Horizontal HangerSingle
Horizontal hangers provide a means to attach a single
0.50-inch (12.7 mm) threaded drop rod to the busway,
suspending the busway from above. Each hanger comes
See Figure 24.1-25.
Figure 24.1-25. Single Hanger
Horizontal HangerBack-to-Back
The back-to-back horizontal hanger allows two busway runs
to be mounted back-to-back and suspended from above,
using a single 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) threaded drop rod. Each
hanger comes with the hardware to mount the hanger to the
busway. One hanger should be used every 10 feet (3m),
and the busway span between hangers should not exceed
10 feet (3m). See Figure 24.1-26.
Figure 24.1-26. Back-to-Back Hanger
Sway Braces
Sway brace brackets provide a provision to brace the
busway run at a 45-degree angle, restricting the suspended
busway from swinging. There are two types of sway brace
brackets: single and back-to-back. Each sway brace comes
with the hardware to mount the brace to the busway.
See Figure 24.1-27.
Figure 24.1-27. Sway Braces
24.1-13
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Physical Data
065
Busway Power Monitoring
Eatons family of IQ electronic power
meters is available to monitor each
run of busway. Each power meter is
attached to the end cable tap box and
comes installed, ready for use. The
installing contractor will need to wire
the CTs to the meter. CTs are included
with the power meter.
Each power meter comes with a highly
visible LED display, showing metered
values for each phase with its three-
line display. This display is very easy
to read, even if installed at a height or
distance. Using the keypad and menus
on the local display, users can display
a variety of electrical system values or
program the meter. Metered data may
also be transmitted and congured
remotely, depending upon the
selected meter and options selected.
IQ Meter (Front) IQ Power Meter (Rear)
Table 24.1-10. IQ Electronic Power Meters
Features IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 IQ 250 IQ 260 PXM2000
Current, per phase
Current demand
Min./max. readings (I, V)
Min./max. readings (I, V, PF, F, W, VAR, VA)
Frequency
Real, reactive, apparent power, total (W, VAR, VA)
Power factor, total
Real, reactive, apparent power demand
Real, reactive, apparent energy, total (Wh, VAR, Vah)
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), per phase (V, I) Opt
Set point driven alarm Opt
I/O (Digital in/digital out, analog out, KYZ out) Opt Opt Opt
Logging, trend, event
Embeded Web server
Firmware ash update
Waveform display
RS-485 Opt Opt Opt
Modbus RTU Opt Opt Opt
Modbus ASCII Opt Opt Opt
KYZ output Opt Opt Opt
DNP 3.0
HTTP, HTTPS
SNMP
SMTP
NTP
24.1-14
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Physical Data
066
Plug-In Unit Overcurrent Protective Devices
A variety of plug-in units have been designed for
the Pow-R-Flex low-ampere busway to meet multiple
applications and a variety of installation conditions.
Plug-in unit devices provide easy and exible access
to a buildings electrical power system, while providing
safe overcurrent protection to equipment and wiring.
All Pow-R-Flex plug-in units are designed with the safety of
the installer and user as the key criteria. The following safety
features are standard for all fusible and molded-case circuit
breaker plug-in units:
Each plug-in unit ground stab makes positive contact with
the busway ground (integral or internal) before the phase
or neutral stabs contact the bus bars
Plug-in unit molded guide tabs are provided in the stab
support base. These ensure proper phase alignment and
open the busway outlet shutter mechanism
Each plug-in unit has an interface bracket, which prevents
the unit from being installed onto or removed from the
busway, while the device is in the on/closed position
Each plug-in unit has a door interlock, preventing the
front cover from being opened while the device is in
the on/closed position and preventing accidental closing
of the device while the front cover is open
Line-side barriers are provided over the line-side
terminal to help prevent accidental contact with
line-side connections
When the plug-in unit is installed, the stab-base assembly
on the plug-in unit is recessed into the busway outlet
cover to help seal against moisture and dust
Each plug-in unit has mounting anges, which help
protect the stab-base assembly and have captive
hardware that bolt the unit securely to the busway
Figure 24.1-28. Plug-In Stab Assembly Details
Figure 24.1-29. Plug-In Outlet Details
Plug-in cable tap boxes
Plug-in cable tap boxes are used to back feed power to a
run-off busway, or where equipment served by the busway
is connected without overcurrent protection. Plug-in cable
tap boxes t into any plug-in provision on a plug-in type
busway. See Figure 24.1-30.
Table 24.1-11. Plug-In Cable Tap Box Details
Figure 24.1-30. Plug-In Cable Tap Box
Table 24.1-12. Plug-In Cable Tap Box Dimensions
Figure 24.1-31. Plug-In Cable Tap Box Details
Catalog
Number
Ampere
Rating
Mechanical
Lugs (Standard)
Mechanical
Lugs (Metric)
LAPTB100MG
LAPTB100MGN
LAPTB200MG
LAPTB200MGN
100
100
200
200
Catalog Number A B C D
LAPTB100MG
LAPTB100MGN
LAPTB200MG
LAPTB200MGN
C
Neutral
Stab Base
Gutter
Space
Ground
24.1-15
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Physical Data
067
Figure 24.1-32. Plug-In Device Mounting
Circuit Breaker Plug-In Units
Circuit breaker plug-in units are stock and come with the
circuit breaker fully installed, ready for installation and
termination. All units are three-phase with three-pole
Eaton Series C
molded-case circuit breakers.

Table 24.1-13. Circuit Breaker Interrupting Ratings (kA Symmetrical)
Note: 100%-rated circuit breakers are not for use in plug-in units.
Table 24.1-14. Breaker Unit Selection Chart
Figure 24.1-33. Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit Dimensions
Table 24.1-15. Breaker Plug-In Unit Dimensions
Table 24.1-16. Breaker Plug-In Unit Physical Data
Figure 24.1-34. Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit Details
Ampere
Rating
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Breaker
Frame
15225
15100
15150
15225
65
18
18
65
14
14
35
14
18
ED
EHD
FDB
FD
15225
70250
70250
70250
100
65
65
100
65
35
35
65
25
18
18
25
HFD
JDB
JD
HJD
Neutral Option
N = 100%
N2 = Oversized
Ground Option
G = Internal
I = Isolated
LAB FDB 3100 G N
Bus Style
LAB = Low ampere
Breaker Frame
(Ex. FD, JDB)
Trip Rating
(Ex. 3015, 3225)
Plug-In
Unit
Max.
Amperes
Max.
Voltage
A B C D E
LABFD
(F-Frame)
225 600 18.00
(457.2)
10.80
(274.3)
8.17
(207.5)
5.97
(151.6)
4.80
(121.9)
LABJD
(J-Frame)
250 600 18.56
(471.4)
10.80
(274.3)
9.08
(230.6)
5.97
(151.6)
4.61
(117.1)
Plug-In
Unit
Mechanical
Terminals
Approximate
Weight lbs
LABFD
(F-Frame)
Cu/Al-(1)#44/0 25
LABJD
(J-Frame)
Cu/Al-(1)#14350 kcmil 40
Neutral
Ground
Breaker
24.1-16
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Physical Data
068
Fusible Switch Plug-In Units
Fusible switch plug-in units are stock and come fully
assembled with the switch assembly and fuse mounting
base ready for installation and termination. All fusible switch
plug-in units come standard with Class R fuse clips and can
be eld modied for use with Class H and J fuses. Fuses are
not included. Instructions for fuse base modications are
shown on the data label mounted on the inside of the
plug-in unit door.
Table 24.1-17. Fusible Switch Horsepower and Interrupting Rating
(kA Symmetrical)
Table 24.1-18. Fusible Unit Selection Chart
Figure 24.1-35. Fusible Switch Plug-In Unit Dimensions
Table 24.1-19. Fusible Switch Plug-In Unit Dimensions
Table 24.1-20. Fusible Plug-In Unit Physical Data
Figure 24.1-36. Fusible Switch Plug-In Unit Details
Ampere
Rating
Voltage NEC
Standard
Eaton
Maximum
Fault
Current
30
60
100
200
240
240
240
240
3
7.5
15
25
3
7.5
15
25
50
50
50
50
30
60
100
200
480
480
480
480
5
15
25
50
15
30
60
125
50
50
50
50
30
60
100
200
600
600
600
600
7.5
15
30
60
20
50
75
150
50
50
50
50
Neutral Option
N = 100%
N2 = Oversized
Ground
G = Integral/internal
I = Internal/isolated
LA 3 6 4 R G N
Bus Style
LA = Low ampere
Three-pole only
Voltage
6 = 600V
2 = 200V
Amperes
1 = 30
2 = 60
3 = 100
4 = 200
Fuse Clips
H, J or R
Plug-In
Unit
Max.
Amperes
Max.
Voltage
A B C D E
LAF321R
LAF361R
LAF322R
LAF362R
30
30
60
60
240
600
240
600
LAF323R
LAF363R
LAF324R
LAF364R
100
100
200
200
240
600
240
600
Plug-In
Unit
Mechanical
Terminals
Approximate
Weight lbs
LAF321R Cu-(1)#14#3
Al-(1)#12#2
25
LAF361R Cu-(1)#14#3
Al-(1)#12#2
25
LAF322R Cu-(1)#141/0
Al-(1)#121/0
35
LAF362R Cu-(1)#141/0
Al-(1)#121/0
35
LAF323R Cu-(1)#141/0
Al-(1)#121/0
35
LAF363R Cu-(1)#4250 kcmil
Al-(1)#4250 kcmil
35
LAF324R Cu-(1)#4250
Al-(1)#4250
45
LAF364R Cu-(1)#4250
Al-(1)#4250
45
24.1-17
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Physical Data
069
Surge Protective Device Plug-in Units
The Pow-R-Flex plug-in device product offering includes
surge protective devices (SPD), which are ideal for busway-
fed distribution systems. A transient voltage is a random
high-energy, short-duration electrical anomaly. These high-
energy surges can disrupt, damage, or destroy sensitive
microprocessor-based equipment. Eaton has developed
the SPD series of products to ensure that quality power is
supplied to commercial, industrial, medical, institutional
and data-center facilities.
The SPD device not only protects against externally created
impulse transients, such as lightning, utility capacitor
switching and disturbances emitted by adjacent facilities, but
also provides needed protection against internal transients.
This type of transient is generated within a facilitys own
distribution system. Sources of internally generated or ring-
wave transients are imaging equipment, variable-frequency
drives, lighting dimmers, arc welders, and the switching on
and off of electrical distribution equipment.
The SPDs also offer units that lter repetitive electrical line
noise (EMI/RFI), which is dened as any unwanted electrical
signal that produces undesirable effects in the circuits of
sensitive electronic equipment or disturbances that are two
times peak voltage. The suppression of AC transients is
accomplished through the use of thermally protected metal-
oxide varisters (MOVs), which provide a low-impedance
path to divert surges away from loads. Electrical line noise
and ringing transients are eliminated by adding ltering
capacitors to the suppression device.
The benets of combining SPDs and ltering are reduced
MOV stress (resulting in a longer life cycle), lower let-
through voltage, better noise attenuation levels and
increased reliability.
Because the SPD units are directly connected to the busway,
they are able to minimize let-through voltage and isolate
critical loads, which are fed from a protected busway run. Due
to the integrated design, the SPD plug-in units save the user
wall space and greatly reduce the installed project cost. The
SPD plug-in units are furnished with a breaker disconnect. For
catalog numbers and selection criteria, see Table 24.1-21.
Figure 24.1-37. SPD Plug-In Unit
Table 24.1-21. SPD Plug-In Unit Selection Chart
FixedDo Not
Change
Option Code
1 = BasicDual-colored LED per phase to indicate protection status of the
N-G mode on units with a neutral wire, single-colored LED to indicate
the lack of a neutral wire connection on systems with a neutral wire.
S = StandardDual-colored LED per phase to indicate protection status of
the N-G mode on units with a neutral wire, single-colored LED to indi-
cate the lack of a neutral wire connection on systems with a neutral
wire, audible alarm with silence button, and Form C relay contact.
N = Standard + Surge CounterDual-colored LED per phase to indicate
protection status of the N-G mode on units with a neutral wire, single-
colored LED to indicate the lack of a neutral wire connection on sys-
tems with a neutral wire, audible alarm with silence button, Form C
relay contact, EMI/RFI filtering providing up to 50 dB of noise attenua-
tion from 10 kHz to 100 MHz, and surge counter with reset button.
Surge Rating
(kA/Phase)
50
80
100
120
160
200
250
300
400
LABSPD 250 480Y 2 C
Voltage Code
208Y = 208Y/120V (four-wire + ground)
240D = 240 Delta (three-wire + ground)
480D = 240 Delta (three-wire + ground)
600D = 240 Delta (four-wire + ground)
FixedDo Not
Change
24.1-18
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Plug-In Unit Devices
070
Eatons unique receptacle plug-in unit design makes them
the most exible receptacle units in the industry. Pow-R-Flex
receptacle plug-in units come fully assembled and wired,
reducing installation time. Each unit is built to order, based
upon receptacle type and rating combinations. Additionally,
each individual unit has been optimally phased balanced
and are also optimally phased balanced for the entire run,
based upon the combination of receptacle plug-in units on
the run. This eliminates the need to manually phase balance
during installation. They are UL 857 and CSA listed, and
come in seven different styles with two different breaker
options, using standard NEMA receptacle congurations.
Table 24.1-22. Maximum 240V Plug-In Units
Table 24.1-23. Maximum 400/480/600V Plug-In Units
Note: For receptacle options, see receptacle selection chart.
Table 24.1-24. Receptacle Unit Physical Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 24.1-25. Receptacle Unit Short-Circuit Withstand Rating
(rms Symmetrical)
25 kAIC is available for single-phase connectors at 240V.

NEMA Receptacle Congurations
Table 24.1-26. Straight-Blade Receptacles
Available in a duplex conguration.

Table 24.1-27. Twist-Lock Receptacles
Available in a duplex conguration.
California standard receptacles.

Table 24.1-28. Pin and Sleeve Receptacles (UL and IEC 309)
Note: For other receptacle options, contact the factory. 480/277V receptacles may be applied at 400/230V.
Plug-In
Unit Type
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
Maximum
Ampere
Rating/Circuit
Number
of Circuits
Receptacle
Mounting
Single 60 60 1 Fixed/cord
Double 120 60 2 Fixed/cord
Quad 120 60 4 Fixed/cord
Plug-In
Unit Type
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
Maximum
Ampere
Rating/Circuit
Number
of Circuits
Receptacle
Mounting
Single 60 60 1 Cord
Double 120 60 2 Cord
Quad 240 60 4 Cord
Plug-In
Unit Type
Voltage Width Height Depth
Single 240
400
480
8.50 (215.9)
8.50 (215.9)
8.50 (215.9)
11.50 (292.1)
11.50 (292.1)
11.50 (292.1)
6.50 (165.1)
6.50 (165.1)
6.50 (165.1)
Double 240
400
480
8.50 (215.9)
11.00 (279.4)
11.00 (279.4)
12.25 (311.2)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
6.50 (165.1)
6.50 (165.1)
6.50 (165.1)
Quad 240
400
480
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
10.00 (254.0)
11.50 (292.1)
11.50 (292.1)
5.50 (139.7)
7.25 (184.2)
7.25 (184.2)
Plug-In
Unit Type
Breaker
Type
240V 400V 480V
Single CH
FD
10,000A
22,000A
10,000A
10,000A
10,000A
10,000A
Double CH
FD
10,000A
22,000A
10,000A
10,000A
10,000A
10,000A
Quad CH
FD
10,000A
22,000A
10,000A
10,000A
10,000A
10,000A
Phase Voltage Conguration 15A 20A 30A 50A 60A
Single-phase 125V
250V
277V
Two-pole, three-wire, grounded
515R
615R
715R
520R
620R
720R
530R
630R
650R
Three-phase 250V Three-pole, four-wire, grounded 1515R 1520R 1530R 1550R 1560R
Single-phase 125V
250V
277V
L515R
L615R
L7-15R
L520R
L620R
L720R
L530R
L630R
L730R
CS6360
CS8264
Three-phase 250V
208/120V
480/277V
Three-pole, four-wire, grounded
Three-pole, ve-wire, grounded
L1520R
L2120R
L2220R
L1530R
L2130R
L2230R
CS8364

Single-phase 125V
250V
277V
P5-20C
P6-20C
P7-20C
P5-30C
P6-30C
P7-30C
P5-60C
P6-60C
P7-60C
Three-phase 250V
208/120V
480/277V
Three-pole, four-wire, grounded
P15-20C
P21-20C
P22-20C
P15-30C
P21-30C
P22-30C
P15-60C
P2160C
P2260C
24.1-19
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
071
Fused Duplex Receptacle Unit
The fused duplex receptacle unit
shown in Figure 24.1-38 allows for
quick standard receptacle power at
any plug-in location along the busway
run. There are two options. The
LAFD62FD62F comes with two
NEMA 5-20R, 20A duplex standard
receptacles. The LAFU61FU61F comes
with two NEMA L5-15R duplex twist-
lock receptacles. Each unit is fused
protected at 20 and 15A and is 120V
single-phase, three-wire.
Figure 24.1-38. Fused Duplex Receptacle Unit
Single Receptacle Unit (240V max.)
The single receptacle unit shown in
Figure 24.1-39 is congured to order
based upon the receptacle type and
rating. These units are three- phase
and can service single- or three-phase
loads, 120V, 240V and 208/120V. They
use Type CH plug-in (10 kAIC), single-
pole, two-pole or three-pole breakers.
Each unit comes with one receptacle,
with the breaker sized per the
receptacle rating. Each receptacle can
be xed mounted to the front of the
enclosure or cable mounted to a cord
drop coming out of the bottom of the
enclosure. See Figure 24.1-40. Cord
drop lengths may be 115 feet in 1-foot
increments. Consult NEC
Sections
368, 400 and 645 for cord drop
applications.
Figure 24.1-39. Single Receptacle Unit
(Fixed Mounted)
Figure 24.1-40. Single Receptacle Unit
(Cord Mounted)
Double Receptacle Unit (240V max.)
The double receptacle unit shown in
based upon each receptacle type and
rating. These units are three-phase
Each unit comes with up to two
receptacles, with each breaker sized
per the receptacle rating. Each
receptacle can be xed mounted to
the front of the enclosure or cable
mounted to a cord drop coming out
of the bottom of the enclosure. See
Figure 24.1-42. Cord drop lengths
may be 115 feet in 1-foot increments.
Consult NEC Sections 368, 400 and 645
Figure 24.1-41. 240V, Double Receptacle Unit
(Fixed Mounted)
Figure 24.1-42. 240V, Double Receptacle Unit
(Cord Mounted)
24.1-20
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
072
Quad Receptacle Unit (240V max.)
The quad receptacle unit shown in
based upon each receptacle type and
Each unit comes with up to four
receptacles, with each breaker
sized per the receptacle rating. Each
receptacle can be xed mounted to
the front of the enclosure or cable
Figure 24.1-43. 240V, Quad Receptacle Unit
(Fixed Mounted)
(Cord Mounted)
Single Receptacle Unit (600V max.)
The single receptacle unit shown in
loads up to 600V maximum (120V,
240V, 400V, 480V, 600V, 208Y/120V,
400/230V, 480/277V, 600/347V). Type
F-Frame bolt-on molded-case circuit
breakers are used in single-pole, two-
pole or three-pole congurations. Each
unit comes with one receptacle, with
the breaker sized per the receptacle
rating. Each receptacle is cable
Figure 24.1-45. 600V, Single Receptacle Unit
Double Receptacle Unit (600V max.)
The double receptacle unit shown in
240V, 400V, 480V, 600V, 208Y/120V,
400/230V, 480/277V, 600/347V). Type
pole or three-pole congurations.
Each unit comes with two receptacles,
with the breakers sized per the
receptacle rating. Each receptacle is
cable mounted to a cord drop coming
out of the bottom of the enclosure.
See Figure 24.1-46. Cord drop lengths
Figure 24.1-46. 600V Double Receptacle Unit
24.1-21
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
073
Quad Receptacle Units (600V max.)
The quad receptacle unit shown in
240V, 400V, 480V, 600V, 208Y/120V,
400/230V, 480/277V, 600/347V). Type
pole or three-pole congurations. Each
unit comes with up to four receptacles,
with the breakers sized per the
receptacle rating. Each receptacle is
cable mounted to a cord drop coming
out of the bottom of the enclosure.
See Figure 24.1-47. Cord drop lengths
24.1-22
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Pow-R-Flex
Installation Drawing Information
074
Installation Drawing Information
Figure 24.1-48. Sample Installation Drawing
After the layout approval process,
installation drawings will be provided
just prior to shipment of the busway
from the factory. A sample is illustrated
in Figure 24.1-48. The drawings
will contain a complete layout of the
entire busway installation and a bill of
material that includes the following:
1. The item number of each section,
which can be correlated with the
layout drawing.
2. A description of each section.
3. The style number of each section,
which can be correlated to the
nameplate information on
each section.
4. The quantity of each style
number required.
5. The height, width and weight
(per foot) of each ampere rating.
6. Location of F markings on
the busway.
7. Fitting reference drawings.
8. Electrical equipment/switchgear
locations and orientation.
9. Wall and oor locations.
10. The length of each section.
The installer should review the
installation drawings prior to and
during the installation process.
Please note that plug-in units are
generally not shown on the installation
drawings. The installer will also
receive installation instruction leaets,
and operation and maintenance
manuals with the drawings.
A07
2.00
(0.6m)
2.00
(0.6m)
2.00
(0 6m)
2.00
14 00
2.00
(0.6m)
2.00
(0.6m)
Req.
1
1
3
2
8
2
1
Style #
Or S.O. #
LVB01234-A01
LVB01234-A02
LVB01234-A03
BVD0892G11
BVD1274G12
LVB01234-A07
BVD7156G08
24.2-1
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
100-Ampere Busway
General Description
075
100A Busway
100A Busway
General Description
Eatons 100A busway is an excellent
solution for supplying multiple small
blocks of power for any normal
commercial and industrial power
system. 100A busway is practical for
small shops, laboratories, classrooms
and light manufacturing. The exibility
of 100A busway will reduce cost by
reducing installation time compared
to cable and conduit installations.
Eaton 100A busway consists of a
durable steel housing and silver-plated
copper rods for maximum use and
efciency. The complete product
offering consists of straight sections
of plug-in busway, ttings, accessories
and plug-in units. 100A busway can
be used for three-phase 600V systems
and single-phase 240V systems.
Standards
Eaton 100A busway meets the
requirements of NEMA
, UL
857,
ANSI and IEEE, and is manufactured
in an ISO
9001 certied facility. The

busway is designed for 100A capacity
and is available for single-phase three-
wire, three-phase three-wire, and
three-phase four-wire applications.
A 50% internal copper ground bar is
provided as standard. The short-circuit
withstand rating is14 kAIC at 3 cycles.
Construction
Enclosure
The busway housing is made of
20 gauge steel and is painted ANSI 61
gray using a powder coat paint
process. The enclosure includes
10 plug-in outlets per 10 foot (3m)
length (ve per side). Each plug-in
outlet provides complete polarization
of the plug-in outlet, ensuring proper
phasing, see Figure 24.2-1. All plug-in
outlets are usable at the same time.
The plug-in outlet is enclosed by a
removable steel knockout cover.
Replacement covers are available
for outlets no longer being used.
Conductors
Electrical conductors are round silver-
plated copper rods 9/32 in diameter.
The conductors are enclosed between
two steel housings that are riveted
together in a solid assembly. See
Figure 24.2-2 for cross sectional detail.
Conductor joints are made by means
of boltless pressure clips, which
require no assembly or adjustment
by the installer. The busway is not
dependent upon the cover screws
of the enclosure for maintaining the
proper mechanical pressure to
ensure a good low resistance joint
between electrical conductors of
adjacent sections.
The conductors are rmly supported
by molded insulators on alternate
sides of the busway. Insulators are
the type through which it is possible
to fully isolate the stabs, as well as
afford extra protection in the event
of stresses due to fault. Insulators are
spaced to allow mounting of the
plug-in units opposite to each other
without interference.
Figure 24.2-1. Polarizing Plug Outlet
Figure 24.2-2. Typical Joint Detail
Neutral
C Phase
B Phase
A Phase
5.00
(127.0)
4.00
(101.6)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
24.2-2
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
100-Ampere Busway
General Description
076
Joint Connections
100A joints are designed for quick and
easy assembly by simply snapping on
section of busway to another and then
securing them by running up the
captive cover screws.
Electrical connection is made by
special high-pressure spring clips
that rmly engage the conductors.
The enclosure connection is made
with a scarf lap type joint secured by
captive cover screws. See typical joint
detail in Figure 24.2-3.
Table 24.2-1. Plug-In Outlets
Table 24.2-2. Line-to-Line Voltage Drop
The table below gives line-to-line
voltage drop at rated current and
varying power factors.
Straight Length
Feet (m)
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Number
of Outlets
10 (3.0)
5 (1.5)
3 (0.9)
29.50 (13.4)
14.75 (6.7)
8.85 (4.0)
10
6
4
2 (0.6)
1 (0.3)
5.90 (2.7)
3.75 (1.7)
2
2
Percent
Power Factor
Voltage
Drop
0
10
20
30
0.35
0.56
0.77
0.98
40
50
60
70
1.19
1.39
1.59
1.79
80
90
100
2.00
2.20
2.50
Figure 24.2-3. Cross-Sectional Detail
Outlet Cover
Enclosure
Insulator
Enclosure
Bus Rod
24.2-3
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
100-Ampere Busway
Construction
077
Straight Lengths
100A busway comes in lengths of
10 feet, 5 feet, 3 feet, 2 feet and 1 foot
(3m, 1.5m, 0.9m, 0.6m and 0.3m) with
plug-in outlets included in all lengths.
Table 24.2-1 shows the total plug-in
outlets for each length. All plug-in
outlets may be used simultaneously.
Plug-in outlets are made usable
by the removal of a steel knockout
cover. Replacement outlet covers are
available for covering exposed outlets
when a plug-in unit is relocated.
Figure 24.2-4. Typical Straight Length Detail
18.00
(457.2)
9.00
(228.6)
21.00
(533.4)
6.00
(152.4)
6.00
(152.4)
9.00
(228.6)
22.50
(571.5)
22.50
(571.5)
9.00
(228.6)
26.25
(666.8)
26.25
(666.8)
26.25
(666.8)
26.25
(666.8)
6.00
(152.4)
6.00
(152.4)
7.19
(182.6)
4.81
(122.2)
24.2-4
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
100-Ampere Busway
Construction
078
Fittings
There are three basic ttings to meet
every application need. These include
elbows, tees and cable tap boxes and
are described in the following pages.
dimensions of ttings are given from
the centerline of the busway.
Fittings in relationship to straight
lengths are described as upward,
downward, forward and rearward.
This relationship is shown in
Figure 24.2-5.
Elbows
Elbows are used to make 90 degree
changes in the direction/routing of
the busway runs. There are four
types available with each leg of the
elbow being 10 inches (254 mm) long,
measured from the centerline of the
busway to the centerline of the joint.
See Figure 24.2-6.
Figure 24.2-5. Fitting Relationship
Figure 24.2-6. Elbows
Downward
Forward
Rearward
Upward
10.00
(254.0)
Downward Elbow
10.00
(254.0)
Joint C
L
Joint C
L
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
Forward Elbow
Joint C
L
Joint C
L
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
Joint C
L
Joint C
L
Upward Elbow
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
Rearward Elbow
Joint C
L
Joint C
L
24.2-5
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
100-Ampere Busway
Construction
079
Tees
Tees are busway ttings used for
making T connections to the busway.
The four standard tees are: upward,
downward, forward and rearward.
Each leg of a tee is 10 inches (254 mm)
long, measured from the centerline
of the busway to the centerline of
the joint.
Figure 24.2-7. Tees
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
Downward Tee
Joint C
L
Joint C
L
Joint C
L
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
Forward Tee
Joint C
L
Joint C
L
Joint C
L
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
Rearward Tee
Joint C
L
Joint C
L
Joint C
L
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
10.00
(254.0)
Upward Tee
Joint C
L
Joint C
L
24.2-6
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
100-Ampere Busway
Construction
080
Cable Tap Boxes
The standard end cable tap box
mounts at either the left or the right
end of a busway straight length.
Knockouts are provided sized at 1.25,
1.50 and 2.00 inches (31.8, 38.1 and
50.8 mm). The center cable tap box
allows busway to be attached to the
right and left of the tap box. Knockout
conguration is the same as the end
cable tap box. Also available is a
plug-in cable tap box with stabs for
mounting at a plug-in outlet anywhere
along the busway run. Knockouts are
provided sized at 0.75, 1.00, 1.25, 1.50
and 2.00 inches (19.1, 25.4, 31.8, 38.1
and 50.8 mm). All tap boxes are rated
100A and include lugs for accepting
either copper or aluminum cable.
Figure 24.2-8. Cable Tap Boxes
2.63
(66.8)
10.19
(258.8)
4.13
(104.9)
7.50
(190.5)
5.38
(136.7)
End Cable Tap Box
5.69
(144.5)
6.06
(154.0)
4.13
(104.9)
Neutral
Plug-in Cable Tap Box
6.00
(152.4)
6.00
(152.4)
12.00
(304.8)
Center Cable Tap Box
24.2-7
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
100-Ampere Busway
Construction
081
End Closer
End closers are used for closing off the
end of a busway run. An end closer
will end at 4 inches (101.6 mm) to the
length of the busway run, measured
from the centerline of the joint to the
end of the end closer.
Wall Flange
Wall anges are used to t around
the busway and close off the opening
made to allow the busway run to pass
through the wall. Wall anges are
for cosmetic purposes only and, by
themselves, do not provide any type
of vapor or re barrier. Wall openings
should be cut 0.50 inch (0.5 mm) wider
and taller than the busway.
Hangers
Hangers are included with the busway;
one for each 10-foot (3m) length of
the busway run. The busway is
suitable for supporting on 10-foot (3m)
centers when mounted edgewise.
The edgewise hanger easily slips
over the busway rmly holding the
busway on edge. The C clamp
hanger is used for wall mounting
or sway bracing. Customer supplied
angle iron must be used in conjunction
with the C clamp.
Figure 24.2-9. End Closer
Figure 24.2-11. Hangers
4.00
(101.6)
Joint C
L
7.25
(184.2)
3.75
(95.3)
3.75
(95.3)
7.25
(184.2)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
6.00
(152.4)
Edgewise Hanger
Wall Hanger
0.75
(19.1)
5.44
(138.2)
Angle Iron
24.2-8
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
100-Ampere Busway
Plug-In Devices
082
Plug-in Devices
Plug-in devices plug in through the insulated outlets of the
busway enclosure and stab onto the busway conductors.
They are available with both fusible and circuit breaker
overcurrent protection. Grounds for all plug-in devices are
ordered and shipped separately.
Fusible Plug-in Units
Fusible plug-in units are available in 240V and 600V service
ratings. Both offer 30, 60 and 100 ampere current ratings
with provisions for Class H fuses. See Figure 24.2-12.
Circuit Breaker Plug-in Units
Circuit breaker plug-in units are available with provisions
for HQP circuit breakers rated 240V, 10100A, and FD circuit
breakers rated 600V, 15100A. Enclosures have provisions
to accept any combination of single-, two- and three-pole
circuit breakers up to three poles. An external operating
handle is available for hook stick or chain operation.
See Figure 24.2-13.
The receptacle plug-in unit includes provisions for three
HQP or FD frame circuit breaker poles and provisions for
up to three conventional single gang outlets and blank
covers to ll unused spaces. The receptacle plug-in unit
does not come with circuit breakers, outlets or wiring.
See Figure 24.2-14.
Figure 24.2-12. Fusible Plug-In Unit
Figure 24.2-13. Circuit Breaker Plug-In Unit
Figure 24.2-14. Receptacle Plug-In Units
8.69
(221.0)
4.69
(119.1)
22.25
(565.2)
FAN363
5.69
(144.5)
PINQP
7.63
(193.8)
3.13
(79.5)
Neutral
5.69
(144.5)
PINFD
4.00
(101.6)
15.13
(384.3)
Neutral
3.13
(79.5)
5.69
(144.5)
13.25
(336.6)
LCNQP
8.00
(203.2)
LCNFD
15.38
(390.7)
3.69
(93.7)
24.2-9
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
100-Ampere Busway
Product Selection
083
Product Selection
Table 24.2-3. 100A BuswayCopper (Includes 50% Internal Ground Bar)
Table 24.2-4. Cable Tap Boxes
Table 24.2-5. Accessories
Table 24.2-6. Fusible Plug-In Units
Table 24.2-7. Circuit Breaker Plug-In Units
Description Three-Phase, Three-Wire
600V Max.
FN 277/480V
Single-Phase, Three-Wire
120/240V
Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Straight LengthsFeet (m)
10 (3)
5 (1.5)
3 (0.9)
2 (0.6)
1 (0.3)
CST13G
CST135G
CST133G
CST132G
CST131G
CST14G
CST145G
CST143G
CST142G
CST141G
CST13NG
CST13N5G
CST13N3G
CST13N2G
CST13N1G
Elbows
Forward
Rearward
Upward
Downward
CFE13G
CRE13G
CUE13G
CDE13G
CFE14G
CRE14G
CUE14G
CDE14G
CFE13NG
CRE13NG
CUE13NG
CDE13NG
Tees
Forward
Rearward
Upward
Downward
CFT13G
CRT13G
CUT13G
CDT13G
CFT14G
CRT14G
CUT14G
CDT14G
CFT13NG
CRT13NG
CUT13NG
CDT13NG
Description Three-Wire or Four-Wire Ground (If Required)
Catalog Number Catalog Number
Plug-in
End
Center
PIB14
EB14
CBIB14G
PIGS100
GL100
(Included)
Description Catalog Number
End closer
Outlet cover
Edgwise hanger
C clamp hanger
Slip-on wall ange
EC1
OC1
EH1
FH1
WF1
Ampere
Rating
Voltage
Rating
Fusible Enclosure Ground (If Required)
30
60
100
240
240
240
FAN321
FAN322
FAN323
PIGS100
PIGS100
PIGS100
30
60
100
600
600
600
FAN361
FAN362
FAN363
PIGS100
PIGS100
PIGS100
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Frame
Circuit Breaker
Enclosure
Receptacle
Enclosure
Ground
(If Required)
External Handle (Required
for Hook-Stick Operation)
Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1550
15100
QUICKLAG HQP
FD, EHD, FDB
PINQP
PINFD
LCNQP
LCNFD
PIGS100
PIGS100
HMQP
HMFD
24.2-10
September 2011
Sheet 24
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
084


September 2011

Contents

Transfer Switches
25.0-1

Sheet

25

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

001

T
r
a
n
s
f
e
r

S
w
i
t
c
h
e
s

Transfer Switches
Transfer Switch Equipment

Transfer SwitchGeneral Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.0-2

Transfer SwitchApplication Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.0-4

ATC Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.0-6
Contactor-Based Designs

Automatic Open Transition, 401200A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.1-1

Automatic Closed Transition, 401200A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.1-4

Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 401200A, Dual Drawout . . . . . . .

25.1-7

Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 401200A, Fixed Bypass . . . . . . . .

25.1-12
Breaker-Based Designs

Molded-Case SwitchesManual Wallmount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.2-1

Molded-Case SwitchesNon-Automatic Wallmount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.2-4

Molded-Case SwitchesAutomatic Wallmount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.2-7
Magnum-Based Designs

Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.3-1

Magnum Drawout Transfer Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.3-3

Magnum Fixed-Mount Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.3-3

Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.3-10
ATC Controllers

Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.4-1

ATC-100 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.4-5

ATC-300 Controller and ATC-300+ Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.4-7

ATC-600 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.4-9

ATC-800 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.4-12
Standard and Optional Features

Standard and Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.5-1

Feature Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.5-13

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.5-18

Appendix AkW Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.5-19
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Breaker-Based Transfer Switches. . . . . . . .


Contractor-Based Transfer Switches . . . . .

Section 16496G Section 26 36 23.23

Manual and Non-Auto Transfer Switches .

Section 16496C Section 26 36 23.15

Maintenance Bypass Transfer Switches . .

Automatic Transfer Switch Family
25.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011

Transfer Switches

Sheet

25

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43


Automatic Transfer SwitchesGeneral Description

002


Automatic Transfer Switch Family

General Description

Eatons automatic transfer switches
are reliable, rugged, versatile and
compact assemblies for transferring
essential loads and electrical
distribution systems from one
power source to another.
Transfer switches are normally
supplied in stand-alone enclosures.
Eaton has the capability to integrate
transfer switches into other Eaton
distribution assemblies. See the
following table for a list of
integrated solutions.

Table 25.0-1. Product Description

Note:

For information on Transfer
Switch Panels, refer to CA08100002E,
Residential & Light Commercial Catalog,
Volume 1, Tab 3.

Design Description

A transfer switch is a critical compo-
nent of any emergency or standby
power system. When the normal
(preferred) source of power is lost, a
transfer switch quickly and safely shifts
the load circuit from the normal source
of power to the emergency (alternate)
source of power. This permits critical
loads to continue running with minimal
or no outage. After the normal source
of power has been restored, the
retransfer process returns the load
circuit to the normal power source.
The three basic components of a
typical transfer switch are:
1. Power switching device to shift
the load circuits to and from the
power source.
2. Transfer Logic Controller to
monitor the condition of the power
sources and provide the control
signals to the power switching
device and initiate the back
generator startup.
3. Control power source to
supply operational power to the
controller and switching device.
All Eaton transfer switches are
designed to meet the requirements set
forth by UL 1008 and are 100% rated
switches. Eaton builds contactor-
based design switches, molded-case
switch (or breaker-based) design
switches, and Magnum power-case
switch design switches.

UL 1008 Endurance Testing

The importance of specifying a
UL 1008 transfer switch can be seen
in

Table 25.0-2

. When specifying any
UL 1008 transfer switch, you can be
assured that the switch has met
and passed the following
endurance testing.

UL 1008 Life Expectancy

Transfer switch applications typically
require a plant exerciser once a week
or once a month.

Table 25.0-3

demon-
strates the life expectancy operating
the UL 1008 switch once a week for the
life of the switch.

Table 25.0-2. UL 1008 Endurance Testing
Table 25.0-3. UL 1008 Life Expectancy
UtilityGenerator

Transfer switches are traditionally
applied between a utility and a
generator set for emergency and
standby power systems.

Figure 25.0-1. Standard Application
UtilityGenerator
GeneratorGenerator

Transfer switches are sometimes
applied between two generator sets
for prime power use, often in remote
installations. In such applications,
source power is periodically alternated
between the generator sets to equally
share run-time.

Figure 25.0-2. Standard Application
GeneratorGenerator

Product
Type
Tab
Reference

Magnum DS switchgear
Pow-R-Line switchboards
Motor control centers
Panelboards

20
21
29
22

ATS
Rating
(Amperes)
Rate of
Operation
Per Minute
With
Current
Without
Current
Total

0300
301400
401800
1
1
1
6000
4000
2000
1000
6000
4000
3000
8011600
16014000
0.5
0.25
1500
1000
1500
2000
3000
3000

ATS
Rating
(Amperes)
Minimum
Operations
Per Year
Life
Expectancy
in Years
With
Current
Applied
Life
Expectancy
in Years
Without
Current
Applied

0300
301400
401800
52
52
52
115
76
38
115
76
57
8011600
16014000
52
52
28
19
57
57
Service
Disconnect
Utility G
Generator
Breaker
Load
ATS
G
Generator
Breaker
G
Generator
Breaker
Load
ATS


25.0-3

September 2011

Transfer Switches

Sheet

25

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43



003

Transfer Switch Types

Although an automatic transfer is the
most common type of transfer, transfer
switches have the following types.

Switch Types

Manual transfer

This type of transfer
is a non-automatic transfer switch
manually initiated and manually
operated. There is no motor operator
or solenoid to initiate the transfer. The
operator needs to open the enclosure
door and operate the manual handle.
Manual transfer is available only on a
breaker-based design. Service entrance
ratings are not available on manual
transfer breaker-based designs.

Non-automatic transfer

This type
of transfer is manually initiated, but
electrically operated via the solenoid in
a contactor-based design and the motor
operator in a breaker-based design.

Automatic transfer

This type of
transfer takes place automatically
per the programmable settings in
the ATS controller. The ATS controller
senses source availability and when
the programmed conditions are met,
initiates a command to start the
transfer including the generator start
command (when transferring from
a utility to a generator source). An
automatic transfer switch can be
congured to perform a utility-to-
utility transfer or a generator-to-
generator transfer (provided the
ATS controller has this capability).

Bypass isolation transfer switch

This type of transfer switch includes

an automatic transfer switch and
also includes the bypass switch that
allows the capability to transfer the
load to the bypass switch without
interrupting the power.

Maintenance bypass transfer switch

A maintenance bypass transfer switch

is a manually (manually initiated and
electrically operated) initiated transfer
switch used for specic applications
for a UPS.

Soft load transfer switch

This is
an automatic closed transition
transfer switch with active control
of the generator voltage and governor
frequency from the transfer
switch controller.

Mounting Type

Fixed-mount switch

Most transfer
switches use a xed-mounted power
device. For contactor-based designs
and breaker-based designs, the
transfer switch contactor or molded-
case switch is a xed-mounted design.
Individual switching devices may not
be removed from the circuit without
breaking hard connections to bus bars.

Drawout mount switch

Both
contactor-based and Magnum-based
transfer switches have optional drawout
capability. Magnum ATSs have
optional drawout of both Source 1 and
Source 2 Magnum power case switch
or breaker. Bypass isolation switches
have drawout ATS switches. In addition
the bypass isolation contactor design
has an optional dual drawout design.
Magnum bypass isolation transfer
switches are supplied as standard with
drawout of all the power-case switches.

Transition Type

Open transition

This is a break-
before-make transfer. There is a
denite break in power as the load
s taken off one source and connected
to the other source.

Open in-phase transition

This is a
break-before-make transfer. There
is a denite break in power as the load
is taken off one source and connected
to the other source. The ATS controller
allows the transfer only when the
phase difference between the two
sources is near zero. The two position
transfer switch is closed on Source 1
or closed on Source 2.

Delayed transition

This is a break-
before-make or open transition that
also has a center off or neutral
position with a programmable time
delay setting for the neutral position.
The three position transfer switch is
either closed on Source 1, closed on
Source 2, or in a center off, neutral
position (not closed on either source).

Delayed transition with load voltage
decay

This is a delayed transition
with the optional feature to delay in
the neutral position to point where
the load voltage decays to a
programmable voltage level. When
the load voltage level reaches the
programmable set point, the transfer
from the neutral position initiates.

Closed transition

This is a make-
before-break transfer. Both sources
are connected to the load for less than
100ms before the break occurs. The
two power sources have to be in
synchronism and be good sources
for the transfer to take place. These
programmable settings for relative
phase angle difference, frequency
and voltage difference are made in
the ATS controller.

Soft load transition

This is a closed
transition type transfer with the soft
load ATS controller having the ability
to take active control of the generator
voltage and frequency. This control is
used to synchronize the generator
source to the utility source.

Table 25.0-4. Transition Types

Transition Contactor-Based Breaker-Based Magnum-Based
Two Position Three Position

Open Yes Yes Yes Yes
Open in-phase Yes No No Yes
Delayed time delay neutral No Yes Yes Yes
Delayed load voltage decay No Yes Yes Yes
Closed Yes Yes No Yes
Soft load No No No Yes
25.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011

Transfer Switches

Sheet

25

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43



004

Installation Types

Emergency

A system legally required
and classied as emergency by
municipal, state, federal or other
governmental agencies. Automatically
transfers from the normal source to the
emergency source and cannot exceed
10 seconds and occurs automatically.
Meets the requirements of NEC
(NFPA-70 Article 700).

Legally required

Legally required
systems are those that are so classied
by municipal, state, federal or other
governmental agencies. Automatically
supply power to selected loads, other
than those already classied as
emergency. The transfer from normal
power to the emergency power
cannot exceed 60 seconds and
occurs automatically.

Optional

Generally, supplied to
selected loads either automatically
or manually. There is no time limit
associated with the transfer.
Article 702.2 is the only article that
allows manual transfer switches.


Service Entrance Rated Transfer Switches

Eaton provides UL 1008 service
entrance rated transfer switches using
the breaker-based designs or the
Magnum power-case switch designs.
Modifying the molded-case switch in
the transfer switch by adding trip units
and optional ground fault, along with
adding the service entrance option
eliminates the need for separate
upstream disconnect devices and their
respective power interconnections.
This means the automatic transfer
switch (ATS) is installed directly at
the point of service entrance, saving
valuable space and cost.

Built-in Protection

All Eaton molded-case switches are
self protected, such that under
extreme fault conditions, the switch
will open before destroying itself.
This feature allows Eaton to offer
Maintenance-Free Contacts on
the molded-case transfer switch.
The molded-case switches have
instantaneous magnetic trip units
installed in each switch. These trips
are not accessible once installed by
the factory to eliminate eld tapering.
The trips are set to a minimum of
12 to 15 times the rated current of the
molded-case device, well above any
coordination set points. This means
they will not interfere with the normal
operation of the distribution system.

Figure 25.0-3. Service Entrance Rated Transfer Switches
Figure 25.0-4. Built-in Protection

Magnetic Trip 12 x frame rating.
Generator
Breaker
G
Load
Service
Disconnect
ATS
Utility Service
G
Generator
Breaker
Load
ATS
Service
Disconnect
Utility Service
Typical Transfer Switch Installation
Transfer Switch Installation Rated
For Service Entrance
400 FLA x 1.25 = 500A Breaker
Compare 400A ATS and 500A LD Breaker
Time
(Min.)
5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Breaker Ok
Breaker Trips
ATS Ok
ATS Trips

500A
HLD Breaker
Current x 1000
Misconception: Breaker
Type Switches Susceptible
to Nuisance Tripping.
Example: 400A ATS With 500A T/M Breaker
Reality: Upstream Breaker
Will Trip Before ATS MCS
Trips When Overcurrent
is <7200A
400A ATS


25.0-5

September 2011

Transfer Switches

Sheet

25

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43



005

Separately Derived and Non-Separately
Derived Systems (Switching the Neutral)

Separately derived systems are
discussed in Article 250.20(D) of the
NEC. The code says that a separately
derived system is where the alternate
source is provided with a grounded
conductor (neutral) that is not solidly
interconnected with the service
supplied grounded conductor
(neutral). The NEC does not mandate
the need for creating a separately
derived system, but does provide
guidance on how it is done. Basically
the ATS will switch the neutral (four-
pole ATS) to keep the two systems
totally isolated. This may be done to
allow Ground Fault Sensing to work
properly, but a separately derived
system may be created for other
reasons left up to the engineer. If
the desire is to bond the generator
neutral to ground at the generator,
then a separately derived system is
being created, and the neutral in the
four-pole ATS must be switched.
Both the Eaton breaker-based and
contactor-based type ATS in all ratings
are available with an optional switched
neutral. This can be done for either
single-phase (three-pole) or three-
phase (four-pole) applications. The
switched neutral pole is fully rated,
meaning it has Withstand, Interrupt
and Closing ratings identical to the
power contacts. The neutral pole is
operated on a common shaft with
the power contacts, thereby ensuring
simultaneous opening and closing
of the neutral. Eaton provides a fully
rated switched neutral or fourth pole.

Figure 25.0-5. Separately Derived System
Figure 25.0-6. Non-Separately Derived System
Short-Time Ratings

The Eaton Magnum ATS is UL listed
with a UL 1008 short-time rating. This is
a true withstand rating, with a viability
temperature rise test performed at
the end of the short-circuit fault per
UL 1008. The short-time rating has
three components: voltage, current
and time. These are published in the
literature on the ATS, and the individual
rating components cannot be exceeded.
(In other words, it is not acceptable
to allow double the current rating for
half the time.) The components are
absolute, and the ATS must be applied
downstream from a breaker that will not
allow those ratings to be exceeded.
Eaton has had short-time ratings on
ATS products since 2002.

Surge Protection

Eaton can supply, and in fact, highly
recommends the use of an SPD
(surge protective device) on Service
Equipment Rated transfer Switches.
The SPDs

should only

be applied on
the utility side of the ATS and should
be ordered for the correct system
voltage on which they are to be used.
SPDs are rated in kA, which is simply a
longevity measure. The kA rating on
an SPD has nothing to do with avail-
able fault current. Eaton recommends
that for services 800A and above,
a minimum 250 kA rated SPD be
supplied. For applications below 800A,
a 160 kA device is suggested. Of
course there are other factors that may
affect the decision as to the rating, and
as always, the nal decision is up to
the engineer. And remember that an
SPD is a transient/surge protective
device; it is NOT an overvoltage
protective device. An overvoltage
condition (such as the backup
generator overvoltage) will damage
the SPD.

Breaker-Based Versus
Contactor-Based Considerations

Eaton builds both molded-case switch
(breaker-based) designs up to 1000A
and contactor-based designs up to
1200A. Both designs are 100% rated
designs, have the UL 1008 approval
and carry the UL 1008 label. Application
considerations may favor one design
over the other.
Low amperage applications requiring
a high withstand rating are more
readily met with the breaker-based
design. The breaker-based design
meets 65 kA withstand ratings for
many of the sizes. Applications
requiring a service entrance rating are
more readily met with a breaker-based
design. An overcurrent trip is added
to the molded-case switch without
increasing the footprint and the entire
SE rated switch is UL 1008 approved.
The Eaton breaker-based

designs are
inherently delayed transition

type and
this transition type is more suited to
highly inductive loads, dual utility
applications, and where older AFDs
may be used downstream.
Contactor-based designs tend to have
a smaller footprint due to less moving
parts and a smaller power contactor.
Contactor-based ATSs can be applied
for those applications not requiring a
higher withstand rating. Applications
requiring open in-phase transfer are
more suited to two-position contactor-

based designs. A two-position contactor-

based design will operate with a shorter
dead bus time than a comparable
breaker-based design. This shorter dead
bus time enables the ATS controller to
perform the open in-phase transfer. In
applications where delayed transition
is required, a three-position contactor-
based design may be used.


Selective coordination of emergency
and legally required systems may
involve intentional delay of breakers
upstream of the ATS. In these
applications, the ATS withstand may
require short-time ratings. Eatons
Magnum ATS is rated for 85 kAIC
up to 30 cycles.
Service
Equipment
G
N
Equipment
Grounding
Conductor
N
Load
Three-Pole
Transfer
Switch
Separately
Derived
System
Bonding
Jumper
Grounding
Electrode
Conductor
Grounding
Electrode
Nearby
N
N
Service
Equipment
G
N
Equipment
Grounding
Conductor
N
Two-Pole Transfer
Switch
Not a Separately
Derived System
N
Load N
25.0-6



CA08104001E
September 2011

Transfer Switches

Sheet

25

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43


Selection Guide

006

Transfer Switch Selection Guide

Table 25.0-5. Transfer Switch Product FamilyContactor-Based Design

Up to 400A only.

Description Switch Type Transition Type Controller
Type
Mounting
Type
Voltage Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Open Delayed Closed

Contactor-based transfer
switch design
See

Page 25.1-1

Automatic
non-automatic

ATC-100

ATC-300
ATC-800
Fixed 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
40
80
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4X
NEMA 12
Contactor-based transfer
switch design
See

Page 25.1-4

Automatic

ATC-800 Fixed 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
40
80
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
Contactor-based bypass
isolation transfer
switch design
See

Page 25.1-7

Automatic
bypass isolation

ATC-300
ATC-800
Drawout 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
Contactor-based bypass
isolation transfer
switch design
See

Page 25.1-12

Automatic
bypass isolation

ATC-300
ATC-800
Fixed 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R


25.0-7

September 2011

Transfer Switches

Sheet

25

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43


Selection Guide

007

Table 25.0-6. Transfer Switch Product FamilyBreaker-Based Design

Up to 400A only.

Type
Mounting
Type
Voltage Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Open Delayed Closed
Molded-case
switch-based design
See Page 25.2-1
Manual No
controller
Fixed 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
30
70
100
150
225
300
400
600
800
1000
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
Molded-case
switch-based design
See Page 25.2-4
Non-automatic No
controller
Fixed 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
30
70
100
150
225
300
400
600
800
1000
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
Molded-case
switch-based design
See Page 25.2-7
Automatic ATC-100
ATC-300
ATC-800
Fixed 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
30
70
100
150
225
300
400
600
800
1000
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
Maintenance bypass
See Page 25.1-8
Manual No
controller
Fixed 480
480/277
240
240/120
208/120
100
150
225
300
400
600
800
1000
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
25.0-8
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Product Selection
008
Table 25.0-7. Transfer Switch Product FamilyMagnum-Based Design
Drawout only.
Up to 3200A.
Type
Mounting
Type
Voltage Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Open Delayed Closed
Power-case switch
Magnum-based design
See Page 25.3-1
Automatic ATC-600
ATC-800
Fixed or
drawout
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
200
300
400
600
800
1000
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1-
behind
NEMA 1-
thru
NEMA 3R
Power-case switch
Magnum-based design
See Page 25.3-1
Non-automatic No
controller
Fixed or
drawout
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
200
300
400
600
800
1000
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
3200
4000

5000
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1-
behind
NEMA 1-
thru
NEMA 3R
Power-case switch Magnum-
bypass isolation based design
See Page 25.3-10
Automatic
bypass isolation
ATC-600
ATC-800
Drawout 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
200
300
400
600
800
1000
1200
1600
2000
2500
3200
4000
5000
2, 3, 4 NEMA 1-
behind
NEMA 1-
thru
NEMA 3R
25.1-1
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Contactor-Based Design
Automatic Open Transition, 401200AGeneral Description
009
Automatic Open Transition,
401200A
Contactor-Based ATS
with ATC-300+ Controller
General Description
The automatic open transition
contactor-based transfer switch
is the most basic design that will
provide a fully functioning automatic
transfer switch.
The power switching operation of
Eatons contactor-based transfer
switches may be separated into the
following key categories of:
Open in-phase transitionbreak-
before-make operation using an
in-phase monitor for source
synchronization
Open delayed transitionbreak-
before-make operation using a
programmable time delay (true
neutral position)
The open in-phase transition uses a
two-position mechanism and the open
delayed transition uses a three-position
mechanism. The mechanism used to
operate the Eaton electrical contactor
is a momentarily energized solenoid
consisting of a stationary core and a
moving core that is magnetically
driven by an electrical coil.
The mechanism can be electrically and
mechanically operated. The design is
such that the mechanism is inherently
interlocked so that the device cannot
be closed on the Source 1 and Source 2
at the same time under any circum-
stances. When switching from Source
1 to Source 2, or Source 2 to Source 1,
the mechanism will only allow a break-
before-make operation.
These contactor-based designs
can be applied with the ATC-100
controller up to 400A. The ATC-300
controller can be applied for applica-
tions 401200A. Applications needing
communication capability require the
ATC-800 controller.
An automatic open transition transfer
switch may be used for those applica-
tions where emergency backup power
is required, but a momentary loss of
power is acceptable on the retransfer
from emergency to normal.
Features
Standard Features
with ATC-300 Controller
Auxiliary relay contacts:
Source 1 present 2NO and 2NC
Switch position indication contacts:
Source 1 position 1NO and 1NC
Source 1 and Source 2 sensing:
Undervoltage/underfrequency
Overvoltage/overfrequency
Three-phase rotation protection
Three-phase voltage unbalance
Pretransfer signal contacts 1NO/1NC
(with three-position mechanism)
Go to emergency (Source 2)
Seven eld-programmable
time delays
LCD-based display for programming,
system diagnostics and Help
message display
Mimic diagram with source avail-
able and connected LED indication
Time-stamped history log
System TEST pushbutton
Programmable plant exerciser
OFF, daily, 7-, 14-, 28-day interval
selectable run time 0600 minutes
no load/load with fail-safe
Optional Features
Available surge suppression device
for power/controller, engine start
circuit, phone and cable connections
Space heater with thermostat
Ammeterload side
Power quality metering
Steel cover for controller
Open in-phase transition or time
delay neutral transition
ATC-100 controller available
ATC-800 controller available
Commercial Design Highlights
UL 1008 front access
High withstand and closing ratings
Compact design
25.1-2
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Contactor-Based Design
Automatic Transition, 401200ATechnical Data
010
Technical Data
Table 25.1-1. UL 1008 Withstand and Close-On Ratings (kA)
Table 25.1-2. UL 1008 Ratings
1200A ATS with ATC-300+ Controller
200A ATS with ATC-300+ Controller
Typical Contactor-Based ATS 100400A
UL 1008
Ampere
Rating
480V 480V 600V 600V Rating When Used with Upstream Fuse
Any
Breaker
Specic
Breaker
Any
Breaker
Specic
Breaker
Rating
(kA)
Test
Voltage
Fuse
Type
Maximum Fuse
Amperes
40
80
100
10
10
10
30
30
30
10
10
10
22
22
22
100
100
100
480
480
480
RK5
RK5
RK5
200
200
200
150
200
225
10
10
30
30
30
50
22
22
50
35
35
65
100
100
200
600
600
600
RK5
RK5
RK5
400
400
600
260
400
600
30
30
50
50
50
65
50
50
50
65
65
65
200
200
200
600
600
600
RK5
RK5
L, R, J, T
600
600
1600
800
1000
1200
50
50
50
65
65
65
50
50
50
65
65
65
200
200
200
600
600
600
L, R, J, T
L, R, J, T
L, R, J, T
1600
1600
1600
Mounting
Type
Voltage Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Fixed 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
40
80
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
NEMA 12
NEMA 4X
Manual Operating
Mechanism
Neutral
Connections
Voltage
Selection
and
Transformer
Panel
Normal
Power Source
Power
Panel
Load Lugs
Emergency
Power
Source
Logic
Panel
Transfer
Mechanism
25.1-3
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Automatic Transition, 401200ADimensions
011
DimensionsApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Wallmount.
Floor standingheight dimension includes the bottom bracket.

Figure 25.1-1. Automatic, Non-Automatic 6001200A Outline NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R
Table 25.1-3. Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 401200A Open Transition (See Figure 25.1-1 and Figure 25.1-2)
Ampere
Rating
Enclosure Bolt Pattern Standard Terminals
A (Height) B (Width) C (Depth) G (Horizontal) H (Vertical) Load Side, Normal
and Standby Source
Neutral
Connection
Weight in
Lbs (kg)
40100 at 480V
38.68 (982.5) 18.31 (465.1) 13.34 (338.8) 10.25 (260.4) 37.38 (949.5) (1) #142/0 (1) #141/0 164 (74)
40100 at 600V
38.68 (982.5) 18.31 (465.1) 13.34 (338.8) 10.25 (260.4) 37.38 (949.5) (1) #142/0 (1) #141/0 164 (74)
150200 at 480V
38.68 (982.5) 18.31 (465.1) 13.34 (338.8) 10.25 (260.4) 37.38 (949.5) (1) #6300 kcmil (3) 1/0250 kcmil 164 (74)
150200 at 600V
48.74 (1237.9) 18.81 (477.8) 13.84 (351.5) 13.00 (330.2) 51.10 (1298.0) (1) #6300 kcmil (3) 1/0250 kcmil 260 (118)
225400 at 480V
48.74 (1237.9) 18.81 (477.8) 13.84 (351.5) 13.00 (330.2) 51.10 (1298.0) (2) #3/0250 kcmil (6) 250500 kcmil 260 (118)
6001200 at 480V
79.41 (2017.0) 25.25 (641.4)

three-pole
22.46 (570.5) 18.25 (463.6) N/A (4) 1/0750 kcmil (12) 1/0750 kcmil 600 (272)
2251200 at 600V
79.41 (2017.0) 29.19 (741.4) 22.46 (570.5) 22.19 (563.6) N/A (4) 1/0750 kcmil (12) 1/0750 kcmil 600 (272)
three-pole
650 (295)
four-pole
10.37
(263.4)
3.94
(100.0)
43.23
(1098.1)
13.29
(337.6)
9.60
(43.9)
25.69
(652.5)
28.09
(713.5)
55.12
(1400.0)
3.68
(93.5)
13.13
(333.5)
13.13
(333.5)
6.11
(155.2)
7.75
(196.8)
68.59
(1742.2)
A
B
G
C
Load
C
A
3.94
(100.0)
Emergency
Neutral
Normal
Figure 25.1-2. Automatic, Non-Automatic
Up to 400A Wallmount Outline NEMA1 and
NEMA 3R
B
G
A
H
C
Top of
Lugs on
Power Panel
25.1-4
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Automatic Transition, 401200AGeneral Description
012
Automatic Closed Transition,
401200A
Contactor-Based ATS
General Description
Eatons closed transition contactor-
based automatic transfer switch
(CTC8) is designed to avoid intentional
interruption of power when both
sources of power are available by
momentarily paralleling both sources.
The ATC-800 is a comprehensive,
multi-function, microprocessor-
based controller, offering extensive
monitoring, status reporting and
transfer control operation.
The make-before-break contact
sequence coupled with Eatons ATC-800
provides a transfer switch that is useful
in critical standby power applications
available from 40 to 1200A.
A transfer switch designed for closed
transition has make-before-break
contacts that require the normal and
alternate sources to be synchronized.
The source contacts on Eatons CTC8
will parallel for 100 ms or less. The
ATC-800 provides all-phase undervolt-
age, underfrequency, and overvoltage
and overfrequency protection as a
standard. Consult with the local utility
company for permission and to verify
the protection requirements as each
utility may have different rules regard-
ing closed transition applications.
Protective relays may be available
as an option upon request.
Closed transition controls
The CTC8 accomplishes the closed
transition transfer by monitoring
the voltage and frequency set point
conditions of both power sources.
Once the set point conditions are met,
the ATC-800 controller will start the
closed transition synchronization timer
(TSCT). The TSCT is adjustable from
160 minutes in duration. This duration
is the time during which the ATC-800
controller will monitor the phase
angles to anticipate when they will be
within 8 electrical degrees. The closed
transition scheme is anticipatory,
allowing the close contacts signal to
be initiated before the sources are
exactly in phase. If the TSCT times
out and the transfer switch has not
reached synchronization, the transfer
switch will remain connected to the
current power source and a failure
to transfer alarm will be displayed.
The transfer switch can also be
equipped with an optional open
transition transfer method for
situations where synchronization
is not possible, but a transfer is
required. One of the following
transition features can be selected:
Closed transition only
Closed transition with default to
load voltage decay
Closed transition with default to
time delay neutral
Features
Standard Features
time delays
message display
Mimic diagram with source available
and connected LED indication
OFF, daily, 7-day interval selectable
run time 0600 minutes no load/load
with fail-safe
Multi-Tap transformer
Optional Features
Available surge suppression device
for power/controller, engine start
circuit, phone and cable connections
Ammeterload side
Steel cover for controller
(with three-position mechanism)
Commercial Design Highlights
UL 1008 front access
Compact design
25.1-5
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Automatic Transition, 401200ATechnical Data
013
Technical Data
Typical Contactor-Based ATC-800 Controller
UL 1008
Ampere
Rating
Any
Breaker
Specic
Breaker
Any
Breaker
Specic
Breaker
Rating
(kA)
Test
Voltage
Fuse
Type
Maximum Fuse
Amperes
40
80
100
10
10
10
30
30
30
10
10
10
22
22
22
100
100
100
480
480
480
RK5
RK5
RK5
200
200
200
150
200
225
10
10
30
30
30
50
22
22
50
35
35
65
100
100
200
600
600
600
RK5
RK5
RK5
400
400
600
260
400
600
30
30
50
50
50
65
50
50
50
65
65
65
200
200
200
600
600
600
RK5
RK5
L, R, J, T
600
600
1600
800
1000
1200
50
50
50
65
65
65
50
50
50
65
65
65
200
200
200
600
600
600
L, R, J, T
L, R, J, T
L, R, J, T
1600
1600
1600
Multi-Tap
Transformer
Normal
Power Source
Load Lugs Emergency
Power Source
Controller
Mounting
Type
Voltage Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Fixed 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
40
80
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
NEMA 12
25.1-6
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Automatic Transition, 401200ADimensions
014
Table 25.1-6. Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 401200A Closed Transition (See Figure 25.1-3 and Figure 25.1-4)
For NEMA 3R, add 14.60-inch (370.8 mm) to depth.

Figure 25.1-3. Automatic Up to 400A Wallmount
For switched neutral applications, connect to terminals marked NN,

EN and LN. Neutral assembly will not be provided.
Transformer pack is not included with 240/120V, single-phase or

208/120V, three-phase systems.
Figure 25.1-4. Automatic 6001200AWallmount
Ampere
Rating
Enclosure Bolt Pattern Standard Terminals
A (Height) B (Width) C (Depth) G (Horizontal) H (Vertical) Load Side, Normal
and Standby Source
Neutral
Connection
Weight in
Lbs (kg)
40100 at 480V
40100 at 600V
52.74 (1339.6)
52.74 (1339.6)
25.00 (635.0)
25.00 (635.0)
17.18 (436.4)
17.18 (436.4)
10.25 (260.4)
10.25 (260.4)
37.38 (949.5)
37.38 (949.5)
(1) #142/0
(1) #6250 kcmil
(3) #142/0
(3) #141/0
190 (86)
210 (95)
150200 at 480V
150200 at 600V
52.74 (1339.6)
71.02 (1803.9)
25.00 (635.0)
31.11 (790.2)
17.18 (436.4)
14.72 (373.9)
10.25 (260.4)
13.00 (330.2)
37.38 (949.5)
47.84 (1215.1)
(1) #6250 kcmil
(2) 3/0250 kcmil
(3) 1/0250 kcmil
(6) 250500 kcmil
210 (95)
420 (191)
225400 at 480V
2251200 at 600V
6001200 at 480V
71.02 (1803.9)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
31.11 (790.2)
46.00 (1168.4)
46.00 (1168.4)
14.72 (373.9)
32.00 (812.8)
32.00 (812.8)
13.00 (330.2)
N/A
N/A
47.84 (1215.1)
N/A
N/A
(2) 3/0250 kcmil
(4) 1/0750 cu/al
(4) 1/0750 cu/al
(6) 250500 kcmil
(12) 1/0750 kcmil
(12) 1/0750 kcmil
420 (191)
800 (363)
800 (363)
G
4.50
(114.3)
A
B
49.00
(1244.6)
C
18.60
(472.4)
41.96
(1065.8)
Load
Power
Emerg.
Power
(with right side removed)
2.64
(67.1)
TYP
C
A
(with left side removed)
15.66
(397.8)
19.19
(487.4)
Load Power
Cable Connections
Emergency
Power Cable
Connections
Normal Power
Cable Connections
Neutral Cable
Connections
B
Transformer
3.94
(100.1)
TYP
11.20
(284.5)
23.00
(584.2)
25.40
(645.2)
68.99
(1752.3)
63.74
(1619.0)
25.1-7
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200A, Dual DrawoutGeneral Description
015
Bypass Isolation Transfer
Switches, 1001200A,
Dual Drawout
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch
General Description
A bypass isolation transfer switch may
be used to provide emergency power
to life safety and other critical loads
where maintenance of the main
transfer switch, without interruption
of power to the load, is either desirable
or required.
The bypass isolation transfer switch
may be provided with either open or
closed transition type.
neutral position)
Closed transitionmake-before-
break operation that requires the
normal and alternate sources to
be synchronized
Eatons automatic transfer switch
is designed to provide unmatched
performance, reliability and versatility
for critical standby power applications.
The switches can be equipped with
the ATC-300 or ATC-800 controllers
to match your application needs.
Features
Industrial Design Highlights
Front access is a standard feature on
all ratings
Entry:
Top, bottom or both
Isolated compartments
Improved safety:
Isolated compartments with
barriers
Single motion rack-out with
doors closed
Ability to test power switching
elements during drawout process
Dual ATS capabilitybypass
contactor can be controlled by the
ATS controller in the bypass
mode of operation
Installation exibility:
Field entry/exit locations can
be modied in the eld
Interchangeable drawout
contactors
Field-selectable multi-tap trans-
former panel permits operation on
a wide range of system voltages
Dual drawout
Standard Features
Drawout cassette design on both
ATS and bypass
No service interruption in bypass
to the same source
Source available contacts:
Switch position contacts:
(ATC-300 only)
Three-phase voltage unbalance/
loss (ATC-300 only)
Pretransfer signal contacts 1NO
and 1NC (open transition only)
Go to Source 2 (EMERGENCY)
Field-programmable time delays:
Time delay engine start:
01200 seconds
Time delay normal to emergency:
01800 seconds
Time delay emergency to normal:
01800 seconds
Time delay engine cooldown:
01800 seconds
Time delay emergency failure:
06 seconds
menu display
Optional Features
Available surge protection device
(SPD) for power/controller, engine
start circuit, phone and cable
connections
Automatic transfer operation with
selectable (via programming) non-
automatic or automatic retransfer
with fail-safe
Digital multi-function power
quality metering
Stainless steel cover for controller
Load sequencing contacts
25.1-8
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200A, Dual DrawoutFeatures
016
Bypass Isolation Switch Features
Front Access
Front access is a standard feature.
Source 1 (NORMAL) Source and Load
connections are set up as standard top
entry and Source 2 (EMERGENCY)
Source connections as bottom entry.
These connections are located in their
own separate compartments. These
connections can be relocated in the
eld if necessary.
Multi-Tap Transformer
The industry-exclusive multi-tap
system voltage selector allows the
transfer switch to be applied on most
system voltages by proper insertion
of the selector plug.
Drawout Contactors
The ATS and the bypass drawout
cassette power contactor designs are
identical and interchangeable. This
standard feature allows the user the
ability to withdraw, maintain or swap
contactor assemblies, providing
redundancy of ATS and bypass
functions from one contactor
assembly to the other.
Improved Safety
The unique Eaton design includes
separation between control and power
components. The ATS and bypass
isolation contactors are mounted in
separate compartments with protective
barriers between them. This design
prevents the possibility of contact with
the rear-mounted power connections
to the contactors. In addition, the top
and bottom entry have separate
compartment doors.
Ease of Maintenance
Transfer to the bypass power contactor
is easily initiated and controlled via
door-mounted controls. Once the
transfer to the bypass contactor is
complete, the ATS contactor is easily
racked out with the compartment door
closed. The ATS contactor may then be
tested in the racked out position.
Ease of Transfer
The Eaton design allows the operator
to make a quick and simple transfer
from the ATS power contactor to the
bypass contactor by initiating the
electrically operated transfer via a
two-position switch. Door-mounted
indicating lights conrm that a
successful transfer has taken place.
Dual ATS Capability
The controller on conventional bypass
isolation switches only controls the ATS
contactor. The Eaton design allows the
switch controller to remain active in
both the ATS and bypass modes, thus
providing control to either contactor.
This ability of the controller to remain
active and control the bypass isolation
contactor provides N+1 redundancy
of a second fully functioning ATS, a
feature unique to Eaton.
Bypass Isolation Switch Components
Drawout
Bypass
Contactor
Separate Doors for
ATS and Bypass
Compartments
with Quick Connect Plug
Drawout ATS Contactor
Completely Removed
Source 2 (EMERGENCY)
Connections
Source 1 (NORMAL)
Connections
Load Connections
Front Access
for Top or
Bottom Entry;
Terminals can
be Relocated
in the Field
25.1-9
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200A, Dual DrawoutTechnical Data
017
Technical Data
Figure 25.1-5. Bypass Isolation Diagram
UL
1008 listed
CSA
C22.2 No. 178 certied

UL 1008
Ampere
Rating
Any
Breaker
Specic
Breaker
Any
Breaker
Specic
Breaker
Rating
(kA)
Test
Voltage
Fuse
Type
Maximum Fuse
Amperes
100
150
200
30
30
30
50
50
50
10
22
22
35
35
35
100
100
100
480
600
600
RK5
RK5
RK5
200
400
400
225
260
400
30
30
30
50
50
50
42
42
42
65
65
65
200
200
200
600
600
600
RK5
RK5
RK5
600
600
600
600
800
1000
1200
50
50
50
50
65
65
65
65
50
50
50
50
65
65
65
65
200
200
200
200
600
600
600
600
L, R, J, T
L, R, J, T
L, R, J, T
L, R, J, T
1600
1600
1600
1600
Load
Bypass
ATS
(3) (4)
(1) (2)
Source 1
(NORMAL)
Available
Shown as Normal Operation
Source 2
(EMERGENCY)
Available
Bypass
Source 1
(NORMAL)
ATS
Source 1
(NORMAL)
ATS
Source 2
(EMERGENCY)
Bypass
Source 2
(EMERGENCY)
ATS
Locked In
Door Open
ATS Isolated
(Flashing: ATS Removed)
Mounting
Type
Voltage Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Drawout 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
25.1-10
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 100400A, Dual DrawoutDimensions
018
Figure 25.1-6. Bypass Isolation-Based Drawing NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R
Table 25.1-9. Isolation-Based Transfer Switch 100400A
For NEMA 3R, add 15.50 inches (393.7 mm) to depth.

C-Frame Fixed Bypass Enclosure Standard Terminals Weight
Lbs (kg)
Switch Rating
Amperes
Height Width Depth
Line Side (Normal

and Emergency)
Load Neutral
100200 at 480 Vac
225400 at 480 Vac
100200 at 600 Vac
78.07 (1983.0)
78.07 (1983.0)
78.07 (1983.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
29.30 (744.2)
29.30 (744.2)
29.30 (744.2)
(1) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(4) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(1) #6350 Cu/Al
(1) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(4) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(1) #6350 Cu/Al
(3) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(12) 3/0-750 Cu/Al
(3) #6350 Cu/Al
625 NEMA 1
626 NEMA 1
627 NEMA 1

Cable Compartment
(640.1)
8.37
(212.6)
12.00
(304.8)
24.05
(610.9)
2.98
(75.7)
18.28
(464.3)
5.23 (132.8)
2.40
(61.0)
25.20
55.15
(1400.8)
28.74
(730.0)
Normal Power
Cable Connections
Load Cable
Connections
Emergency Power
Cable Connections
C B
A
Note: Source 1,
Source 2 and load
connections can be
relocated in the eld.
25.1-11
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 6001200A, Dual DrawoutDimensions
019
Figure 25.1-7. Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Design NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R
Table 25.1-10. Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 6001200A 480 Vac, 2251200A 600 Vac
NEMA 3R dimensionsa front 15.50-inch (393.7 mm) front extension section is added for NEMA 3R.
Switch Rating
Amperes
Enclosure Standard Terminals Weight
Lbs (kg)
Height Width Depth Line Side (Normal
and Emergency)
Load Neutral
6001200 at 480 Vac
6001200 at 480 Vac
2251200 at 600 Vac
2251200 at 600 Vac
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
46.00 (1168.4)
32.00 (812.8)
47.50 (1026.5)
32.00 (812.8)
47.50 (1206.5)
(4) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(4) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(4) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(4) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(12) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(12) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(4) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(4) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(3) #142/0 Cu/Al
(3) #142/0 Cu/Al
(12) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(12) 3/0750 Cu/Al
1800 (817) NEMA 1
1850 (840) NEMA 3R
1800 NEMA 1
1850 NEMA 3R
CG
36.80
(934.7)
CG
Plan View Top View
65.13
(1654.3)
28.97
(735.8)
Side View (With Right Side Removed)
Cable Entry
Top & Bottom
2.97
(75.4)
2.71
(68.8)
Load
Connections
Source 1
Normal
Connections
40.00
(1016.0)
18.50
(470.0)
90.08
(2288.0)
Source 2
Emergency
Connections
Neutral
Connections
Front View
18.50
(470.0)
2.00
(50.8)
17.86
(453.6)
34.05
(864.9)
14.35
(364.5)
FRONT
Note: Source 1, Source 2 and load
connections can be relocated from
top to bottom in the eld.
25.1-12
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200A, Fixed BypassGeneral Description
020
Bypass Isolation Transfer
Switches, 1001200A,
Fixed Bypass
General Description
A bypass isolation transfer switch may
be used to provide emergency power
to life safety and other critical loads
where maintenance of the main
transfer switch, without interruption
of power to the load, is either desirable
or required.
The bypass isolation transfer switch
may be provided with either open or
closed transition type.
neutral position)
Closed transitionmake-before-
break operation that requires the
normal and alternate sources to
be synchronized
Eatons automatic transfer switch
is designed to provide unmatched
performance, reliability and versatility
for critical standby power applications.
The switches can be equipped with the
ATC-300 or ATC-800 controllers to
match your application needs.
Features
Front access is a standard feature on
all ratings
Entry:
Must be all top or all bottom
Improved safety:
with barriers
Single motion rack-out with
doors closed
Optional dual ATS capability
bypass contactor can be
controlled by the ATS controller
in the bypass mode of operation
Installation exibility:
Entry/exit locations are either
all top or all bottomfactory
congurable only
Interchangeable drawout
ATS contactor
Field-selectable multi-tap transformer
panel permits operation on a wide
range of system voltages
Fixed-mount bypass contactor
Standard Features
Drawout cassette design on ATS
and xed-mount on bypass
No service interruption in bypass to
the same source
Source available contacts:
Switch position contacts:
(ATC-300 only)
Three-phase voltage unbalance/
loss (ATC-300 only)
Pretransfer signal
contacts 1NO and 1NC
(open transition only)
Go to Source 2 (EMERGENCY)
Field-programmable
time delays:
Time delay engine start:
01200 seconds
Time delay normal to emergency:
01800 seconds
Time delay emergency to normal:
01800 seconds
Time delay engine cooldown:
01800 seconds
Time delay emergency failure:
06 seconds
menu display
(ATC-300 only)
Optional Features
Available surge protection device
(SPD) for power/controller, engine
start circuit, phone and cable
connections
Automatic transfer operation
with selectable (via programming)
non-automatic or automatic
retransfer with fail-safe
Digital multi-function power
quality metering
Dual ATS
25.1-13
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200A, Fixed BypassFeatures
021
Bypass Isolation Switch Features
Front Access
Front access is a standard feature.
Source 1 (NORMAL), Source 2
(EMERGENCY) and Load connections
are set up as either all top or all bottom
entry. These connections are located in
their own separate compartments.
The industry-exclusive multi-tap
system voltage selector allows the
system voltages by proper insertion
of the selector plug.
Drawout ATS and Fixed-Mounted Bypass
The ATS is designed as a drawout with
the contactor mounted in a cassette
with wheels. This allows the user the
ability to withdraw, maintain, inspect
and re-insert the ATS.
The bypass contactor is designed
as a xed-mounted design in its own
separate compartment.
Improved Safety
The unique Eaton design includes
separation between control and power
components. The ATS and bypass
isolation contactors are mounted in
separate compartments with protec-
tive barriers between them. This
design prevents the possibility of
contact with the rear-mounted power
connections to the contactors. In
addition, the top and bottom entry
have separate compartment doors.
Ease of Maintenance
Transfer to the bypass power contactor
is easily initiated and controlled via
door-mounted controls. Once the
transfer to the bypass contactor is
complete, the ATS contactor is easily
racked out with the compartment door
closed. The ATS contactor may then
be tested in the isolated position.
Ease of Transfer
The Eaton design allows the operator
to make a quick and simple transfer
from the ATS power contactor to the
bypass contactor by initiating the
electrically operated transfer via a
two-position switch. Door-mounted
indicating lights conrm that a
successful transfer has taken place.
Optional Dual ATS Capability
The controller on conventional bypass
isolation switches only controls the
ATS contactor. The Eaton design
allows the switch controller to remain
active in both the ATS and bypass
modes, thus providing control to either
contactor. This ability of the controller
to remain active and control the
bypass isolation contactor provides
N+1 redundancy of a second fully
functioning ATS, a feature unique
to Eaton.
Bypass IsolationFixed Bypass Components
Fixed-Mounted
Bypass
Contactor
Separate Doors
for ATS and
Bypass
Compartments
Drawout ATS
Contactor
Completely
Removed
Front Access for
Either All Top or
All Bottom Entry
25.1-14
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 1001200A, Fixed BypassTechnical Data
022
Technical Data
Figure 25.1-8. Bypass Isolation
UL 1008
Ampere
Rating
Any
Breaker
Specic
Breaker
Any
Breaker
Specic
Breaker
Rating
(kA)
Test
Voltage
Fuse
Type
Maximum Fuse
Amperes
100
150
200
30
30
30
50
50
50
22
22
22
35
35
35
100
100
100
480
600
600
RK5
RK5
RK5
200
400
400
225
260
400
30
30
30
50
50
50
42
42
42
65
65
65
200
200
200
600
600
600
RK5
RK5
RK5
600
600
600
600
800
1000
1200
50
50
50
50
65
65
65
65
50
50
50
50
65
65
65
65
200
200
200
200
600
600
600
600
L, R, J, T
L, R, J, T
L, R, J, T
L, R, J, T
1600
1600
1600
1600
Load
Bypass
ATS
(3) (4)
(1) (2)
Source 1
(NORMAL)
Available
Shown as Normal Operation
Source 2
(EMERGENCY)
Available
Bypass
Source 1
(NORMAL)
ATS
Source 1
(NORMAL)
ATS
Source 2
(EMERGENCY)
Bypass
Source 2
(EMERGENCY)
ATS
Locked In
Door Open
ATS Isolated
(Flashing: ATS Removed)
Mounting
Type
Voltage Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Fixed 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
100
150
200
225
260
400
600
800
1000
1200
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
25.1-15
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 100400A, Fixed BypassDimensions
023
Figure 25.1-9. Bypass Isolation-Based Design NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R
Table 25.1-13. Isolation-Based Transfer Switch 100400A
For NEMA 3R, add 15.48 inches (393.2 mm) to depth.

C-Frame
Fixed Bypass
Enclosure Bolt Pattern Standard Terminals Weight in
Lbs (kg)
Switch
Ampere Rating
Height Width Depth
G
(Horizontal)
H
(Vertical)
Line Side
(Normal)
Load Neutral
100200
at 480/600V
78.07
(1983.0)
30.00
(762.0)
29.30
(744.2)
N/A N/A (1) #6350 Cu/Al (1) #6350 Cu/Al (3) #6350 Cu/Al 625 (284)
225400
at 480V
78.07
(1983.0)
30.00
(762.0)
29.30
(744.2)
N/A N/A (1) 3/0750 Cu/Al (1) 3/0750 Cu/Al (1) 3/0750 Cu/Al 625 (284)
Cable Compartment
Source 1 Normal
Connections
Electrical Panel Not
Shown for Clarity
Load
Connections
Source 2 Emergency
Connections
Note: Source 1 Normal, Source 2 Emergency
and load connections are NOT factory or field
reconfigurable. Sufficient wireway and bending
space is available to come in from either direction.
13.22
(335.8)
6.15
(156.2)
5.23 (132.8)
24.05
(610.9)
2.98
(75.7)
25.20
(640.1)
2.40
(61.0)
18.28
(464.3)
55.15
(1400.8)
28.74
(730.0)
C B
A
25.1-16
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Bypass Isolation Transfer Switches, 4001200A, Fixed BypassDimensions
024
Figure 25.1-10. Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Design NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R
Table 25.1-14. Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 1001200A
NEMA 3R dimensions. If seismic mounting brackets are required, then the width will be 46.00 inches (1168.4 mm).
Switch Ampere
Rating
Enclosure Standard Terminals Weight in
Lbs (kg)
Height Width Depth Line Side (Normal) Load Neutral
100200
100200
4001200
4001200
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
28.99 (736.3)
44.47 (1129.5)
28.99 (736.3)
44.47 (1129.5)
(1) #6250 Cu/Al
(1) #6250 Cu/Al
(2) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(2) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(1) #6250 Cu/Al
(1) #6250 Cu/Al
(2) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(2) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(3) #6250 Cu/Al
(3) #6250 Cu/Al
(12) 3/0750 Cu/Al
(12) 3/0750 Cu/Al
1750 (795) NEMA 1
1850 (840) NEMA 3R
1800 (817) NEMA 1
1850 (840) NEMA 3R
36.80
(934.7)
14.61
(371.1)
34.04
(864.6)
28.99
(736.3)
65.47
(1662.9)
Cable Entry
Top
Source 1
Normal
Connections
Top View
Plan View
40.00
(1016.0)
28.99
(736.3)
2.40
(61.0)
2.00
(50.8)
3.24
(82.3)

90.00
(2286.0)
9.24
(234.7)
5.22
(132.6)
35.20
(894.1)
18.28
(464.3)
40.00
(1016.0)
Source 2
Emergency
Connections
Load Connections
Note: S1 Normal,
S2 Emergency and load
connections must be either
ALL Top or ALL Bottom and
are NOT field reconfigurable.
2.40
(61.0)
25.2-1
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Molded-Case SwitchesManual WallmountGeneral Description
025
Molded-Case Switches
Manual Wallmount
Manual Switch with Door Closed
Must Open Door to Engage the
Manual Handle
General Description
Eatons wallmount manually operated
transfer switches are designed for a
variety of standby power applications
for critical loads. In the event of a
primary power source interruption,
the user can manually transfer the
load circuits to the standby power
source. Once primary power has
been restored, the user can manually
transfer the load circuits back to
the primary power source.
Manual transfer switches cover appli-
cations ranging from 30 to 1000A
through 600 Vac for standard manual
congurations and open transition.
Manual transfer switches may be
applied for those application where
a manually initiated and manually
operated transfer is suitable. The front
door of the switch must be opened
to operate the manual handle. The
design comes standard with a dead-
front design, allowing safe manual
transfer under load. Applications
requiring the manual operation to
be initiated without opening the
door need to select a non-automatic
transfer switch. Should an application
require a service entrance rating, then
a non-automatic or automatic design
needs to be selected.
Features and Benets
Features
Molded-case switch power
contact assemblies
Positive mechanical interlocking
Permanently afxed manual
operating handle
Benets
High withstand, totally enclosed
for maximum arc suppression and
isolation during power transfer
Optional trip units offer system
overcurrent protection
Prevents the paralleling of two
sources of power
Permits safe and convenient
manual transfer of power
Complies with UL 1008 and
UL 489 standards
Meets American Bureau of
Shipping (ABS) approval
Seismic Qualication
25.2-2
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Molded-Case SwitchesManual WallmountTechnical Data
026
Technical Data
Table 25.2-1. Wallmount Transfer Switch Standard Terminal Data for
Power Cable Connections
All terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. For alternate

terminal sizes, contact Eaton.
Manual Switch with Door Open
Manually Initiated and Manually Operated
Note: If a service entrance rating is required, then a non-automatic
type switch must be selected. Service entrance ratings are not
available on a manual transfer switch.
Table 25.2-2. Transfer Switch RatingsSystems Coordination
InformationWithstand, Closing and Interrupting Ratings
For maximum breaker ratings in circuits when the transfer switch

is evaluated as a Motor Branch Circuit Conductor, refer to NEC
Section 430.25 for sizing.
Class RK5 fuse with 100 kA rating.
Four-pole units rated 35 kA.

Table 25.2-3. Wallmount Transfer Switch Ratings
Manual Transfer Switch
Shown without Deadfront
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Frame
Line Side (Normal
and Standby
Source)
Load
Connection
Neutral
Connection
30100
150225
225300
HFD
HFD
HKD
(1) #141/0
(1) #6300
(1) #3350
(1) #141/0
(1) #6300
(1) #6350
(3) #141/0
(3) #4300
(3) #4350
400 HLD (1) 4/0600 (2) #1500 (6) 250350
600
600
600 (four-pole)
HLD
HMDL
NB
(1) 3/0350
(2) #1500
(3) 3/0400
(2) #1500
(2) #1500
(3) 3/0400
(6) 250350
(12) 4/0500
(3) 3/0400
800
800
1000
HMDL
HNB
HNB
(3) 3/0400
(4) 4/0500
(4) 4/0500
(3) 3/0400
(4) 4/0500
(4) 4/0500
(12) 4/0500
(12) 4/0500
(12) 4/0500
Manual Handle
Deadfront
Standard UL 1008 3-CycleHorizontal and Vertical Industrial
ATS
Ampere
Rating
Any Breaker Rating Ratings When Used With Upstream
Fuse (kA)
240V 480V 600V Maximum
Fuse Rating
Fuse
Type
600V
30
70
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
25
25
25
200
200
200
J,T
J,T
J,T
200
200
200
150
200
225
100
100
100
65
65
65
25
25
25
400
400
400
J,T
J,T
J,T
200
200
200
300
400
600
100
100
100
65
65
65
25
25
25
400
600
800/1200
J,T
J,T
J,T
200
200
100/200
800
1000
65
65
50
50
25
25
1200/1600
1600
L
L
100/200
200
Mounting
Type
Voltage Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Fixed 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
30
70
100
150
225
300
400
600
800
1000
1200
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
25.2-3
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Molded-Case SwitchesManual WallmountDimensions
027
Dimensions
Approximate dimensions in inches (mm). For Table 25.2-4Table 25.2-6, refer to Figure 25.2-1 and Figure 25.2-2.
Table 25.2-4. 301000A Type MTVX
Suitable for Cu or Al wire. Consult the factory for other available terminal sizes.
Alternate line terminals.

Note: Dimensions are approximate and should not be used for construction purposes.
Table 25.2-5. 30150A Type MTHXFD Manual
Figure 25.2-1. Dimensions
Table 25.2-6. Power Panel and Transformer Panel
Switch
Type
Enclosure Gutter Space Bolt Pattern Standard Terminals
Weight
Lbs (kg)
A B C D E F G H
Height Width Depth Width Depth Bending Horizontal Vertical Line Load Neutral
HKD (150225A) 48.00
(1219.2)
20.81
(528.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.59
(269.0)
11.00
(279.4)
45.50
(1155.7)
(1) #3350 (1) #6350 (3) #4350 305 (138)
HKD (300A) 56.00
(1422.4)
20.81
(528.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
13.59
(345.2)
11.00
(279.4)
53.50
(1358.9)
(1) #3350 (1) #6350 (3) #4350 395 (179)
HLD (400A) 64.00
(1625.6)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.54
(267.7)
16.00
(406.4)
61.48
(1561.6)
(1) 4/0600 (2) #1500 (6) 250350 395 (179)
HLD (400A)
53.00
(1346.2)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
11.85
(301.0)
16.00
(406.4)
50.48
(1282.2)
(2) 3/0350 (2) #1500 (6) 250350 395 (179)
HLD (600A) 64.00
(1625.6)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.54
(267.7)
16.00
(406.4)
61.48
(1561.6)
(2) 3/0350 (2) #1500 (12) 4/0500 395 (179)
HLD (600A)
64.00
(1625.6)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.54
(267.7)
16.00
(406.4)
61.48
(1561.6)
(2) 400500 (2) #1500 (12) 4/0500 395 (179)
HMDL (600A) 76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
17.73
(450.3)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
(2) #1500 (2) #1500 (12) 4/0500 510 (232)
HMDL (800A) 76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
17.73
(450.3)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
(3) 3/0400 (3) 3/0400 (12) 4/0500 510 (232)
NB (8001000A) 76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
17.58
(446.5)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
(4) 4/0500 (4) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500 540 (245)
Dimensions Weight
Lbs (kg)
A B C D E F G H
22.88
(581.2)
13.13
(333.5)
22.74
(577.6)
22.62
(574.5)
24.50
(622.3)
9.78
(248.4)
10.28
(261.1)
32.31
(820.7)
143
(65)
A
B
5.00
(127.0)
E
C
D
H
1.25
(31.8)
F G
1.75
(44.5)
2.00 (50.8)
Latch Open
0.75 (19.1)
Latch Closed

Power Panel Type Height Width Depth
Power Panel
HFD
HKD
HLD
11.00 (279.4)
24.50 (622.3)
26.00 (660.4)
17.00 (431.8)
11.88 (301.8)
16.88 (428.8)
6.81 (173.0)
17.50 (444.5)
17.50 (444.5)
HMDL
NB
36.25 (920.8)
36.25 (920.8)
16.88 (428.8)
16.88 (428.8)
17.50 (444.5)
19.00 (482.6)
Transformer Panel
HFD
HKD, HLD, HMDL and NB
22.00 (558.8)
28.63 (727.2)
16.50 (419.1)
8.25 (209.6)
6.50 (165.1)
5.50 (139.7)
Logic
Panel
D
E
Power
Panel
Transformer
Panel
Gutter
Space
B
G
A
H
C
F
Top of Lugs on
Power Panel
Front View Side View Top View
25.2-4
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Molded-Case SwitchesNon-Automatic WallmountGeneral Description
028
Non-Automatic Wallmount
Non-Automatic Wallmount
General Description
Eatons wallmount non-automatic
transfer switches are designed for a
variety of standby power applications
for critical loads.
In the event of a primary power source
interruption, the user can manually
transfer the load circuits to the standby
power source through the use of an
external pushbutton. Once primary
power has been restored, the user can
manually transfer the load circuits back
to the primary power source through
the use of an external pushbutton.
Non-automatic transfer switches cover
applications ranging from 30 to 1000A
through 600 Vac for manual congura-
tions, open transition, standard or
service entrance.
Non-automatic transfer switches are
manually initiated, but electrically
operated designs. Front door-mounted
controls allow the operator to initiate
the transfer. Overcurrent trips may be
added to the design for either or both
the normal and emergency source.
Service entrance ratings are available.
Features and Benets
Features
Molded-case switch power
contact assemblies
Positive mechanical and electrical
interlocking
Permanently afxed manual
operating handle
Pushbutton operation
Benets
High withstand, totally enclosed
for maximum arc suppression and
isolation during power transfer
Optional trip units offer system
overcurrent protection
Prevents the paralleling of two
sources of power
Permits safe and convenient
manual transfer of power under
load via external pushbutton
initiated operation
Complies with UL 1008 and
UL 489 standards
Meets American Bureau of
Shipping (ABS) approval
Seismic Qualication
25.2-5
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Molded-Case SwitchesNon-Automatic WallmountTechnical Data
029
Technical Data
Table 25.2-7. Wallmount Transfer Switch Standard Terminal Data for
All terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. For alternate

terminal sizes, contact Eaton.
Non-Automatic Switch with Doors Closed
Note: Optional service entrance rating shown for this photo.
Non-Automatic Transfer Switch
Device panel shows controls to initiate the manual transfer
and control indicating lights. In addition, an optional service
entrance rating may be specied. Keyed switch is mounted
on the device panel.
Table 25.2-8. Transfer Switch RatingsSystems Coordination
InformationWithstand, Closing and Interrupting Ratings
For maximum breaker ratings in circuits when the transfer switch

is evaluated as a Motor Branch Circuit Conductor, refer to NEC
Section 430.25 for sizing.
Class RK5 fuse with 100 kA rating.
Four-pole units rated 35 kA.

Table 25.2-9. Non-Automatic Wallmount Transfer Switch Ratings
Switch
Ampere Rating
Breaker
Frame
Line Side (Normal
and Standby
Source)
Load
Connection
Neutral
Connection
30100
150225
225300
HFD
HFD
HKD
(1) #141/0
(1) #6300
(1) #3350
(1) #141/0
(1) #6300
(1) #6350
(3) #141/0
(3) #4300
(3) #4350
400
600
600
HLD
HLD
HMDL
(1) 4/0600
(1) 3/0350
(2) #1500
(2) #1500
(2) #1500
(2) #1500
(6) 250350
(6) 250350
(12) 4/0500
600 (four-pole)
800
800
NB
HMDL
HNB
(3) 3/0400
(3) 3/0400
(4) 4/0500
(3) 3/0400
(3) 3/0400
(4) 4/0500
(3) 3/0400
(12) 4/0500
(12) 4/0500
1000 HNB (4) 4/0500 (4) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500
Device Panel
Control Switch,
Service Entrance
Keyed Switch and
Indication Lights
Service Entrance
Label (Optional)
Standard UL 1008 Three-CycleHorizontal and Vertical Industrial
ATS
Ampere
Rating
Any Breaker Rating Ratings When Used with Upstream
Fuse (kA)
240V 480V 600V Maximum
Fuse Rating
Fuse
Type
600V
30
70
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
25
25
25
200
200
200
J, T
J, T
J, T
200
200
200
150
200
225
100
100
100
65
65
65
25
25
25
400
400
400
J, T
J, T
J, T
200
200
200
300
400
600
100
100
100
65
65
65
25
25
25
400
600
800/1200
J, T
J, T
J, T
200
200
100/200
800
1000
65
65
50
50
25
25
1200/1600
1600
L
L
100/200
200
Mounting
Type
Voltage Current
Amperes
No. of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Fixed 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
30
70
100
150
225
300
400
600
800
1000
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
25.2-6
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Molded-Case SwitchesNon-Automatic WallmountDimensions
030
Table 25.2-10. 301000A Types NTHE, NTVE (See Figure 25.2-3)
Suitable for Cu or Al wire. Consult the factory for other available terminal sizes.
NTHE with multi-tap voltage selection panel.
Alternate line terminals.

Table 25.2-11. Power Panel and Transformer Panel
Switch
Type
Weight
Lbs (kg)
A B C D E F G H
Height Width Depth Width Depth Bending Horizontal Vertical Line Load Neutral
HFD (30100A)
47.74
(1213.0)
20.81
(528.6)
17.22
(437.0)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
6.22
(157.9)
10.75
(273.0)
45.24
(1049.1)
(1) #141/0 (1) #141/0 (3) #141/0 227
(103)
HFD (150A)
47.74
(1213.0)
20.81
(528.6)
17.22
(437.0)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
6.22
(157.9)
10.75
(273.0)
45.24
(1049.1)
(1) #6300 (1) #6300 (3) #4300 227
(103)
HKD (150225A) 48.00
(1219.2)
20.81
(528.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.59
(269.0)
11.00
(279.4)
45.50
(1155.7)
(1) #3350 (1) #6350 (3) #4350 305
(138)
HKD (300A) 56.00
(1422.4)
20.81
(528.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
13.59
(345.2)
11.00
(279.4)
53.50
(1358.9)
(1) #3350 (1) #6350 (3) #4350 395
(179)
HLD (400A) 64.00
(1625.6)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.54
(267.7)
16.00
(406.4)
61.48
(1561.6)
(1) 4/0600 (2) #1500 (6) 250350 395
(179)
HLD (400A)
53.00
(1346.2)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
11.85
(301.0)
16.00
(406.4)
50.48
(1282.2)
(2) 3/0350 (2) #1500 (6) 250350 395
(179)
HLD (600A) 64.00
(1625.6)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.54
(267.7)
16.00
(406.4)
61.48
(1561.6)
(2) 3/0350 (2) #1500 (12) 4/0500 395
(179)
HLD (600A)
64.00
(1625.6)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.54
(267.7)
16.00
(406.4)
61.48
(1561.6)
(2) 400500 (2) #1500 (12) 4/0500 395
(179)
HMDL (600A) 76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
17.73
(450.3)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
(2) #1500 (2) #1500 (12) 4/0500 510
(232)
HMDL (800A) 76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
17.73
(450.3)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
(3) 3/0400 (3) 3/0400 (12) 4/0500 510
(232)
NB (8001000A) 76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
17.58
(446.5)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
(4) 4/0500 (4) 4/0500 (12) 4/0500 540
(245)
B
G
A
H
C
F
Top of Lugs
on Power Panel
Transformer
Panel
Logic
Panel
D
E
Power
Panel
Gutter
Space
Power
Panel Type
Height Width Depth
Power Panel
HFD
HKD
HLD
11.00 (279.4)
24.50 (622.3)
26.00 (660.4)
17.00 (431.8)
11.88 (301.8)
16.88 (428.8)
6.81 (173.0)
17.50 (444.5)
17.50 (444.5)
HMDL
NB
36.25 (920.8)
36.25 (920.8)
16.88 (428.8)
16.88 (428.8)
17.50 (444.5)
19.00 (482.6)
Transformer Panel
HFD
HKD, HLD, HMDL and NB
22.00 (558.8)
28.63 (727.2)
16.50 (419.1)
8.25 (209.6)
6.50 (165.1)
5.50 (139.7)
25.2-7
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Molded-Case SwitchesAutomatic WallmountGeneral Description
031
Automatic Wallmount
Automatic Wallmount Transfer Switch
General Description
Eatons wallmount transfer switches
are designed for a variety of standby
power applications for critical loads.
They provide exibility, reliability and
value in a compact package. In the
event of a primary power source
interruption, a transfer switch provides
an effective means to transfer the load
circuits to an alternate power source
while reducing the possibility of injury
or property damage.
Wallmount transfer switches meet
or exceed all industry standards for
endurance, reliability and performance.
These breaker-based designs can be
applied with the ATC-100 (up to 400A),
ATC-300+ or ATC-600 controllers.
Suitable for emergency and standby
systems (all loads).
Double-throw, mechanically
interlocked transfer mechanism
Standard Features
Three-phase voltage
unbalance/loss
time delays
LCD-based display for program-
ming, system diagnostic and Help
message display
Safe manual operation under full
load with permanently afxed
operating handle
Optional Features
Suitable for use as service equipment
in the standard enclosure size
Available SPD for power/controller,
engine start circuit, phone and cable
connections
Integrated distribution panels
Integral overcurrent protection
Not available on contactor
transfer switch
Ammeterload side
Seismic Qualication
25.2-8
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Molded-Case SwitchesAutomatic WallmountFeatures
032
Basic Components of Automatic Transfer Switches
Eatons Superior Design Transfer
Switch Characteristics
Unmatched Performance and Versatility
Eatons family of wallmount transfer
switches offers unmatched perfor-
mance, versatility and value for power
switching applications. At the heart of
these designs is Eatons molded-case
switch, designed specically to meet
UL 1008.
Superior Main Contact Structure
All Eaton wallmount transfer switches
meet or exceed the standards set
forth in UL 1008 and UL 489. No other
transfer switch manufacturer has
met the rigid testing requirements
of this combination of standards.
Completely enclosed contacts add
a measure of safety and reliability.
It also ensures the integrity of the
contact assemblies and minimizes
the need for periodic maintenance of
the contacts, reducing downtime.
Fast, Powerful and Safe Power
Switching Mechanism
The power panel uses a unidirectional
gear motor mechanism. The power
panel can be operated manually under
a full load.
Molded-Case Switch Features
True four-pole switched
neutral availability
Totally enclosed contact assembly
Molded-Case Switch
Optional Integral Overcurrent
Protection Capability
For service entrance and other
applications, trip units can be integrated
into the power switching section.
This eliminates the need for separate
upstream protective devices, saving
cost and space.
Optional Thermal-Magnetic
or Electronic Trip Units
Source 1 and Load
Power Switching Panel
(With Deadfront Cover Installed)
Permanently Afxed Manual
Transfer Handle Provides Safe
Manual Transfer Under Full Load
Source 2 Power Cable Connections
Automatic Transfer
Controller (ATC-300+)
Monitors Power Sources
Initiates Power Transfers
Service Disconnect Switch
(Keyed) (Service Equipment
Rated Switches Only)
Transformer Panel
Steps Line Power Down
to 120 Vac for Logic and
Electrical Operator
Available Multi-Tap
Voltage Selector
(See Page 25.2-9 for
additional details.)
Space Heater (Optional)
Customer Control
Connections
Surge Suppression
Device (Optional)
Control Service Disconnect
(Service Equipment
Rated Switches Only)
25.2-9
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Molded-Case SwitchesAutomatic WallmountFeatures
033
Mechanical Interlock
Wallmount transfer switches feature
a rear-mounted, fail-safe mechanical
interlock to prevent paralleling of
sources. This is, in addition to
software interlocking and the
interlocking inherently provided
by the transfer mechanism.
Triple Interlocks
Load Bus Assembly
The load bus can be oriented for
either top or bottom access. Top
entry is standard.
Load Bus
Multi-Tap Voltage Selector
Eatons industry-exclusive Multi-Tap
system voltage selector allows our
system voltages just by proper insertion
of the selector plug. Available in two
congurations: Worldwide Multi-Tap
with 600, 480, 415, 380, 240, 220 and
208 Vac, single- and three-phase,
50 and 60 Hz taps. North American
Multi-Tap with 600, 480, 240, 208
and 120 Vac, single- and three-phase,
60 Hz taps.
Load
Bus
Ease of Maintenance
Keyed quick-disconnect plugs are
provided for easy and complete
isolation of the control circuitry.
Maintenance can be performed on
the logic independent from the power
sections and still allow the user to
manually transfer power under full
load conditions.
Logic Disconnect Plugs
North American Voltage Selector
North American multi-tap transformer
comes with 600, 480, 240, 208 and
120 Vac, single- and three-phase, and
60 Hz taps, which are all eld select-
able. Simply remove the steel cover
and move the appropriate blue ag
terminal to the desired voltage. All
switches are shipped with the blue
ag in the 600V position.
Transformer Panel Location
Transformer Panel Opened
Typical (2251000A) Vertical Design Transfer Switch Equipment
Transformer
Panel
Transformer Panel
Allows for Easy
Field Changes to
Voltage Congurations
Load Lugs (Top Entry)
Neutral
Connections
Manual
Operating Handle
Indicator Wheel
Transfer
Mechanism
Motor Brake Board
Power Panel
Emergency Power Source
Molded-Case Switch
Voltage Selection
Panel (Domestic)
Service
Disconnect
Normal Power
Source Molded-
Case Switch
25.2-10
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Breaker-Based Transfer Switches, Molded-CaseTechnical Data
034
They are listed under Underwriters
Laboratories UL 1008 Standard for
transfer switch equipment and are
optionally available as suitable
for emergency and standby
systems as dened in NFPA 99
for health care facilities.
UL 1008 listed
CSA C22.2 No. 178 certied
Technical Data
Electrical Ratings
Molded-case and circuit breaker
301000A
Two-, three- or four-pole
Up to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
NEMA 1, 3R, 12, open
Molded-Case Transfer Switch and Circuit Breaker
For 600, 800 and 1000A ratings, single- through four-pole units are rated 35 kA.
Table 25.2-13. Wallmount Transfer Switch Standard Terminal Data for Power Cable Connections
All terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. For alternate terminal sizes,
contact Eaton.
Switch
Ampere
Rating
UL 1008 3-Cycle Any Breaker Rating Ratings When Used with Upstream Fuse
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Maximum
Fuse Rating
Fuse
Type
600 Vac
30100
150
225
100
100
100
65
65
65
25
25
25
200
400
400
J, T
J, T
J, T
200
200
200
300
400
600
100
100
100
65
65
65
25
25
25
400
600
1200
J, T
J, T
J, T
200
200
200
800
1000
65
65
50
50
25
25
1600
1600
L
L
200
200
Switch
Ampere Rating
Breaker
Frame
Line Side (Normal and
Standby Source)
Load
Connection
Neutral
Connection
30100
150225
150225
HFD
HFD
HKD
(1) #141/0
(1) #6300
(1) #3350
(1) #141/0
(1) #6300
(1) #6350
(3) #141/0
(3) #4300
(3) #4350
225300
400
600
HKD
HLD
HLD
(1) #3350
(1) 4/0600
(1) 3/0350
(1) #6350
(2) #1500
(2) #1500
(3) #4350
(6) 250350
(6) 250350
600
600 (four-pole)
800
HMDL
NB
HMDL
(2) #1500
(3) 3/0400
(3) 3/0400
(2) #1500
(3) 3/0400
(3) 3/0400
(12) 4/0500
(3) 3/0400
(12) 4/0500
800
1000
HNB
HNB
(4) 4/0500
(4) 4/0500
(4) 4/0500
(4) 4/0500
(12) 4/0500
(12) 4/0500
Mounting
Type
Voltage Current
Amperes
Number of
Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Fixed 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
30
70
100
150
225
300
400
600
800
1000
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
25.2-11
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Breaker-Based Transfer Switches, Molded-CaseDimensions
035
Figure 25.2-4. Dimension Views
Table 25.2-15. Breaker-Based and Molded-Case Transfer Switches
Suitable with copper only.
240/120V, single-phase, three-wire or 208V, three-phase, four-wire systems only.
With multi-tap voltage selection panel.

Switch
Rating
Amperes
Switch
Type
Weight
Lbs (kg)
A B C D E G H Line Side (Normal Load and
Standby Source) Connection
Neutral
Connection
Height Width Depth Width Depth Horizontal Vertical
Molded-Case
30100 HFD
47.74
(1213.0)
20.81
(528.6)
17.22
(437.0)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.75
(273.0)
46.44
(1180.0)
232
(105)
150225 HFD
47.74
(1213.0)
20.81
(528.6)
17.22
(437.0)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.75
(273.0)
46.44
(1180.0)
232
(105)
30100 HFD
47.74
(1213.0)
20.81
(528.6)
17.22
(437.0)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.75
(273.0)
46.44
(1180.0)
240
(190)
150 HFD
47.74
(1213.0)
20.81
(528.6)
17.22
(437.0)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.75
(273.0)
46.44
(1180.0)
240
(190)
150225 HFD
35.61
(904.0)
20.06
(509.5)
13.34
(339.0)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
10.75
(273.0)
34.31
(904.0)
150
(68)
150225 HKD 56.00
(1422.4)
20.81
(528.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
11.00
(279.4)
45.50
(1155.7)
305
(134)
300 HKD 53.00
(1346.2)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
11.00
(279.4)
53.50
(1358.9)
295
(134)
400 HLD 53.00
(1346.0)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
16.00
(406.4)
51.50
(1308.0)
425
(193)
600 HLD
64.00
(1625.6)
25.81
(655.6)
18.40
(467.4)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
16.00
(406.4)
62.50
(1588.0)
475
(214)
600 HMDL 76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
480
(218)
800 HMDL
76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
510
(232)
8001000 HNB 76.74
(1949.2)
25.81
(655.6)
19.50
(495.3)
8.00
(203.2)
4.00
(101.6)
16.00
(406.4)
75.15
(1908.8)
540
(245)
Logic
Panel
D
E
Power
Panel
Transformer
Panel
Gutter
Space
B
G
A
H
C
F
Top of Lugs on
Power Panel
Front View Side View Top View
25.2-12
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
036
25.3-1
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer SwitchesGeneral Description
037
Floor-Standing Magnum
Transfer Switches
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switch
General Description
Eatons Magnum transfer switches
are designed for a variety of standby
power applications for critical and
noncritical loads. They monitor both
Source 1 (Normal) and Source 2
(Emergency) power sources. In the
event of a Source 1 power interrup-
tion, these switches will automatically
transfer the load circuits to the Source 2
power source. Once Source 1 power
source has been restored, the process
is automatically reversed.
The Magnum family of transfer
switches covers applications ranging
from 200 to 5000A through 600 Vac.
Some of the applications are: auto-
matic or non-automatic congura-
tions, open or closed transition and
standard or rated suitable for use as
service entrance. They are designed
for applications where total system
coordination must be accomplished
while achieving a high level of withstand,
interrupting and closing performance.
Drawout construction is available
for applications, such as critical life-
support systems, where preventive
maintenance, inspection and testing
must be accomplished while maintain-
ing continuity of power to the load.
Freestanding
Magnum insulated case devices
Fastest switching times available
(<3 cycles)
High withstand ratings
Full 60-cycle short-time withstand
capability
Safe manual transfer under load
Multi-tap voltage selection plug
Integral service entrance capability
capability
Drawout capability
Programmable microprocessor
controller with keypad entry and
display
Communications capable
Durable powder-coated steel
enclosures
UL 489 and UL 1008 listed. 4000 and
5000A available as UL 891 only
100 kA standard withstand ratings
85 kA, 30 cycle, extended
withstand ratings
Electrically operated
True four-pole switched neutral
availability
Totally enclosed contact assembly
Note: Stored energy mechanism for
manual operation.
Eaton Magnum transfer switches
meet or exceed all industry
standards for endurance, reliability
and performance. They are listed
under Underwriters Laboratories
UL 1008 Standard for transfer switch
equipment. With certain options,
they also comply with Source 2
and standby system requirements
as dened in NFPA 99 for health
care facilities.
UL 1008standard for safety for
automatic transfer switches 4000
and 5000A available as UL 891 only
UL 489standard for circuit breakers
and molded case switches
CSA 22.2-178Canadian transfer
switch standard
NEC articlescode sections 517,
700, 701, 702applicable switch
equipment
NFPA 110Source 2 and Standby
Power Systems
NFPA 99health care facilities
EGSA 100Sstandard for transfer
switches
NEMA ICS10Standard for transfer
switch equipment
ISO
9000International
Organization for Standardization
IBCInternational Building
Code 2006
BOCABuilding Ofcials Code
Administrators
25.3-2
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
038
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switch
Ambient temperature range:
40 to 40C (40 to 104F)
20 to 70C (4 to 158F)
Operating humidity: up to 90%
Relative humidity (noncondensing)
Magnum Drawout Transfer Switch
2005000A
Two-, three-, four-pole
(except units 3200A and
higher only three- or four-pole)
120600 Vac
100,000A withstand/closing/
interrupting at 480 Vac
Short-time withstand85,000 for
30 cycles
Magnum Fixed-Mount Transfer Switch
2003200A
Two-, three-, four-pole

(except units 3200A and higher
only three- and four-pole)
120600 Vac
100,000A withstand/closing/
interrupting at 480 Vac
Short-time withstand85,000 for
30 cycles
4000 and 5000A ratings are drawout.

Transfer Switch Withstand Ratings
Table 25.3-1. Systems Coordination InformationWithstand, Closing and Interrupting Ratings
Tested in accordance with UL 1008.
Eaton drawout Magnum transfer
switch will coordinate with a power
switching device short-time rating.
Contact factory for details.
Table 25.3-2. Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switch Mounting
Rating When Used with
Upstream Circuit Breaker
Ratings Used for Coordination
with Upstream Breakers
with Short-Time Rating
Transfer Switch
Ampere Rating
3 Cycle
600V (kA)
30 Cycle
600V (kA)
800
1000
1200
100
100
100
85
85
85
1600
2000
2500
100
100
100
85
85
85
3200
4000
5000
100
100
100
85
85
85
Mounting
Type
Voltage Current
Amperes
Number
of Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Fixed
Drawout
600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
200
300
400
600
1000
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
2, 3, 4 Open
NEMA 1 behind
NEMA 1 thru
NEMA 3R
25.3-3
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
039
Magnum Drawout
Transfer Switch
2000A, Four-Pole,
NEMA 1 Enclosed,
Through-the-Door Design
Drawout construction with switch
position indicator
Completely interchangeable power
switching devices
Available in NEMA Type 1 and
3R enclosures
Rear, side and top cable access
Magnum Fixed-Mount
Transfer Switch
2000A, Three-Pole, Fixed Design,
NEMA Behind-the-Door Enclosure
Fixed-mount construction
Available in NEMA Type 1 and
3R enclosures
Rear, side and top cable access
Deadfront construction
Front access only requires an
additional wireway to be added
Magnum-Based Transfer Switches
Source 2 Connections
Load Connections
Source 1 Connections
Neutral Connections
Neutral
Assembly
Side View of Magnum
Side or Rear Access Required
(Half-High Side Panels and
Back Panels are Not Shown)
25.3-4
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer SwitchesFeatures
040
Basic Switch Components of Drawout Magnum Automatic Transfer Switches
The open transition type Magnum
Transfer Switches feature both
mechanical (cable) and electrical
interlocking to prevent paralleling
of sources.
Mechanical Cable Interlock
Allows the transfer switch to be readily
applied on most system voltages
worldwide by connecting to the proper
terminals. Available system voltages
include 120, 208, 220, 230, 240, 380,
401, 415, 480, or 600 Vac, 50 or 60 Hz.
Voltage Selection Terminals
Ease of Maintenance
Keyed quick-disconnect plugs are
provided for easy and complete
isolation of the control circuitry.
Maintenance can be performed on
the logic independent from the power
sections and still allow the user to
manually transfer power under full
load conditions.
Logic Disconnect Plugs
Power Panel
Performs Power Transfer Between Source 1 and Source 2
Using Magnum Power-Case Switches or Circuit Breakers
Electrical Operator
Pushbutton
Side-to-Side
Ledge
Side-to-Side
Ledge
Contact Wear
Indicator
Contacts Closed
and in Good
Condition
Contact Wear
Indicator
Contacts Closed
and Wear
is Indicated
Contact Wear
Inspection
Area (Ledge
Not Visible
Under Contacts)
Contact Wear
Inspection Area
(Ledge Now
Becoming Visible
Under Contacts)
25.3-5
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer SwitchesFeatures
041
Logic
Application Versatility
Whether the application calls for
open or closed transition, Eaton has
the right logic controller for the task.
ATC-600/800 controllers have set a
new standard for transfer switch
technology featuring:
Microprocessor-based logic
Digital display
Field set point programmability
Transfer history
PowerNet Communications
capability
Voltmeter and frequency meter
True rms voltage sensing
Mimic BUS/LED display
Load voltage decay delayed
transition capability
In-phase monitor capability
Field upgrade capability
Automatic Transfer Open Transition
Open transition type Magnum transfer
switches use the Eaton programmable
ATC-600 microprocessor-based
logic controller.
Refer to Technical Data TD.15A.05.T.E
Open Transition ATC-600 for
Automatic Transfer Switches for
additional information.
ATC-600
Automatic Transfer Closed Transition
Closed transition applications feature
the ATC-800 Closed Transition logic
controller.
Refer to Technical Data TD.15A.09.T.E
Closed Transition ATC-800 for
Automatic Transfer Switches for
additional information.
ATC-800 Closed Transition
Unmatched Performance and Versatility
The Eaton family of Magnum transfer
switches offers unmatched performance,
versatility and value for standby power
applications. At the heart of these
designs is the Magnum switch with
the following features:
Superior Main Contact Structure
All Eaton Magnum transfer switches
meet or exceed the standards set
forth in UL 1008 and UL 489 with high
withstand, totally enclosed Magnum
switches. No other transfer switch
manufacturer has met the rigid testing
requirements of this combination
of standards. Completely enclosed
contacts add a measure of safety
and reliability. They also ensures the
integrity of the contact assemblies
and minimizes the need for periodic
maintenance of the contacts, reducing
downtime and maintenance time.
Fast, Powerful and Safe
Switching Mechanism
The mechanism uses a high speed
than 3-cycle stored energy switching
mechanism. This mechanism can be
operated manually under a full load.
Ease of Coordination and Application
Short-Time Withstand
The use of electronic trips has allowed
performance curve shaping to
facilitate proper system coordination.
The most signicant is the short
time rated trip unit.
These trip settings may be set for
what are considered extremely high
currents for much longer durations
than the three-cycle withstand test
required under UL 1008. To facilitate
improved coordination, Eaton Magnum
transfer switches have been tested and
are provided with 30-cycle, extended
withstand ratings.
Magnum Power-Case Switch
Optional Integral Overcurrent
Protection Capability
Optional Digitrip
TM
Magnum Trip Unit
Service Entrance
For service entrance and other applica-
tions, Digitrip solid-state trip units can
be integrated into the power switching
section. This eliminates the need for
separate upstream protective devices,
saving cost and space. Available with
various combinations of long, short
time, instantaneous, ground fault
protection and communications.
25.3-6
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer SwitchesDimensions
042
Dimensions
Approximate dimensions in inches (mm).
Table 25.3-3. Magnum Fixed-Mount Transfer Switches
At 4000 and 5000A, the standard design is drawout.

See drawout dimensions.
Figure 25.3-1. 2003200A Fixed-Mount NEMA 1
Figure 25.3-2. 2003200A Fixed-Mount NEMA 3R
Ampere
Rating
Number
of
Poles
A
Height
B
Width
C
Depth
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
NEMA 1 Enclosed Fixed-Mount Transfer Switch
2002000 2 90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
48.00
(1219.2)
1050
(477)
2002000 3 90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
48.00
(1219.2)
1050
(477)
2002000 4 90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
48.00
(1219.2)
1250
(568)
25003200 2 90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
48.00
(1219.2)
1900
(863)
25003200 3 90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
48.00
(1219.2)
1900
(863)
25003200 4 90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
48.00
(1219.2)
2000
(910)
4000

5000

NEMA 3R Enclosed Fixed-Mount Transfer Switch
2002000 2 90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
63.00
(1600.2)
1600
(726)
2002000 3 90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
63.00
(1600.2)
1600
(726)
2002000 4 90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
63.00
(1600.2)
1600
(726)
25003200 2 90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
63.00
(1600.2)
2400
(1090)
25003200 3 90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
63.00
(1600.2)
2400
(1090)
25003200 4 90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
63.00
(1600.2)
2400
(1090)
25003200 4 90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
63.00
(1600.2)
2400
(1090)
4000

5000

A
B C
A
B C

25.3-7
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
043
Table 25.3-4. Magnum Drawout Transfer Switches
Figure 25.3-3. 2003200A Drawout NEMA 1
Figure 25.3-4. 2003200A Drawout NEMA 3R
Ampere
Rating
Number
of
Poles
A
Height
B
Width
C
Depth
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
NEMA 1 Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch
2002000 2 90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
60.00
(1524.0)
1600
(727)
2002000 3 90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
60.00
(1524.0)
1600
(727)
2002000 4 90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
60.00
(1524.0)
1900
(864)
25003200 2 90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
2500
(1136)
25003200 3 90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
2500
(1136)
25003200 4 90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
2800
(1273)
NEMA 3R Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch
2002000 2 90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
75.00
(1905.0)
2100
(953)
2002000 3 90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
75.00
(1905.0)
2100
(953)
2002000 4 90.00
(2286.0)
32.00
(812.8)
75.00
(1905.0)
2400
(1090)
25003200 2 90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
3000
(1362)
25003200 3 90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
3000
(1362)
25003200 4 90.00
(2286.0)
44.00
(1117.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
3000
(1362)
A
B C
A
B C

25.3-8
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
044
Figure 25.3-5. Magnum 40005000A UnitsDrawout NEMA 1
The typical Magnum ATS at 4000 and 5000A ratings will include one cubicle with the Source 1 and Source 2 power-case switches or breakers.
A second cubicle called a wireway is most likely required unless bus is used for the connections per Connection Type table above. Cable connections
to the wireway cubicle can be made from the top or bottom. The wireway cubicle will have removable panels on the front, and cable connections may
be made from the top or the bottom. Cable connections to the power-case switch or breaker cubicle are made from the back. The wireway width is
32.00 inches (812.8 mm).
Seismic mounting adds 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) width to each side or additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width.
Consult factory.
Fr
B
D
Front View Without Covers
Right Side
C
A
Wireway Cubicle ATS AA Cubicle
urce 1
ormal)
urce 2
mergency)
SP
Norm
Lugs
Loa
Lug
1
NEMA 1
NEMA
32.00 (812.8) 54.00 (1371.6)
Source 1
(Normal)
Source 2
(Emergency)
Load
SP = Shipping Split.
Table 25.3-5. Connection Type (40005000A Only)
Table 25.3-6. Magnum Drawout Transfer Switches
Connection Type Wireway
Required
Line Emergency Load

Cable
Bus
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Bus
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Bus
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Bus
No
No
No
No
Ampere
Rating
No.
of
Poles
A
Height
B
Width
C
Width
D
Depth
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
4000 3 or 4 90.00
(2286.0)
86.00
(2184.4)
92.00
(2336.8)
68.00
(1727.2)
5000 3 or 4 90.00
(2286.0)
86.00
(2184.4)
92.00
(2336.8)
68.00
(1727.2)

25.3-9
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
045
Figure 25.3-6. Magnum 40005000A UnitsNEMA 3R
The typical Magnum ATS at 4000 and 5000A ratings will include one cubicle with the Source 1 and Source 2 power-case switches or breakers.
A second cubicle called a wireway is most likely required unless bus is used for the connections per Connection Type table above. Cable connections
to the wireway cubicle can be made from the top or bottom. The wireway cubicle will have removable panels on the front, and cable connections may
be made from the top or the bottom. Cable connections to the power-case switch or breaker cubicle are made from the back. The wireway width is
32.00 inches (812.8 mm).
Seismic mounting adds 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) width to each side or additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width.
Consult factory.
Front View NEMA 3R With Cover
A
Wireway Cubicle ATS Cubicle
SP
B
Front View Without Covers
C
Source 1
(Normal)
Source 2
(Emergency)
Emergency Lugs
Located in Rear of Cubicle
Normal
Lugs
Load
Lugs
32.00 (812.8) 54.00 (1371.6)
D
Right Side View
Source 1
Load
Source 2
Table 25.3-7.
Table 25.3-8.
Required
Line Emergency Load

Cable
Bus
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Bus
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Bus
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Bus
No
No
No
No
Ampere
Rating
No.
of
Poles
A
Height
B
Width
C
Width
D
Depth
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
4000 3 or 4 90.00
(2286.0)
86.00
(2184.4)
92.00
(2336.8)
82.35
(2091.7)
5000 3 or 4 90.00
(2286.0)
86.00
(2184.4)
92.00
(2336.8)
82.35
(2091.7)
25.3-10
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
046
Bypass Isolation
Transfer Switch
General Description
A bypass isolation switch uses
loadbreak isolation and bypass
transfer power contacts. Thus, should
voltage be lost on the line to which
the ATS is connected, and should
a manual bypass be required to the
other line, this can be accomplished
safely and quickly as described
below. With contactor designs using
non-loadbreak isolation and bypass
switches, manual bypass to the other
line is hindered by mechanical or
electrical safety interlocking.
The bypass isolation switch is
designed for applications where
maintenance, inspection and testing
must be performed while maintaining
continuous power to the load. This
is typically required in critical life-
support systems and standby power
situations calling for safe system
maintenance with no power
disruptions. Such a design allows
for the quick removal of the different
switching devices for inspection,
maintenance or replacement.
Eatons transfer switch is a rugged,
compact design using Magnum power
switches or Magnum power circuit
breakers to transfer essential loads
from one power source to another.
Open transition switching devices are
interlocked to prevent both switching
devices from being closed at the same
time. The versatile design, in addition
to standard transfer functions, offers
an optional integral thermal and
short-circuit protection in either or
both switching devices.
The switching devices are in a compact
vertical arrangement. The logic can
be easily disconnected from the
switching device without disturbing
critical connections. The enclosure
is free standing, and by using the
specially supplied cleats, the switch
is seismic approved (Option 42). The
terminals are mounted in the rear of
the switch, permitting rear, top, bottom
or side cable or bus bar entrance.
The switching devices have a high
withstand rating. The high-speed,
stored-energy switching mechanism
guarantees a transfer time of less than
three cycles.
Reliable microprocessor logic
Designed to safely withstand fault
currents
Eliminates need for complex
interlocks
Most versatile bypass isolation
transfer switch available
Eaton drawout cassette design
Overcurrent protection available
No loadbreak when bypassing to
the same source
Drawout capabilities on both ATS
and bypass portions
Compact design
Power switching devices completely
interchangeable between ATS and
bypass portions
Seismic Qualication
25.3-11
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer SwitchesTechnical Data
047
Technical Data
Magnum Bypass Isolation Front View
NEMA 1 Through-the-Door
Front Access Option 54A is Available on All
Magnum Designs NEMA 1 Behind the Door
Table 25.3-9. Floor-Standing Magnum Transfer Switch Mounting
Table 25.3-10. Withstand Ratings

Tested in accordance with UL 1008.
Eaton drawout Magnum transfer switch will coordinate

with a power switching device short-time rating.
Contact factory for details.

Figure 25.3-7. Typical Bypass Isolation Switch Schematic
Mounting
Type
Voltage Current
Amperes
Number
of Poles
NEMA
Enclosure
Drawout 600
600/347
480
480/277
480/240
415/240
380/220
240
240/120
220
220/127
208/120
120
200
300
400
600
1000
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
3200
4000
5000
2, 3, 4 NEMA 1-
Behind
NEMA 1-
Thru
NEMA 3R
Rating When Used with
Upstream Circuit Breaker
Ratings Used for Coordination
with Upstream Breakers
with Short-Time Rating
Transfer Switch
Ampere Rating
3-Cycle
600V (kA)
30-Cycle
600V (kA)
200
1000
1200
100
100
100
85
85
85
1600
2000
2500
100
100
100
85
85
85
3200
4000
5000
100
100
100
85
85
85
SOURCE 1
SOURCE 1
SOURCE 1
SOURCE 1
BYPASS
SOURCE 1
SOURCE 1
SOURCE 1
AVAILABLE
SOURCE 2
ISOLATED
ISOLATED
POSITION
SOURCE 2
POSITION
SOURCE 2
AVAILABLE
SOURCE 2
SOURCE 2
SOURCE 2
INCOMING
ATS
BYPASS
BYPASS
ATS
LOAD
SOURCE 2
BYPASS
INCOMING
A
A
25.3-12
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
048
Dimensions
Table 25.3-11. Magnum Bypass Isolation Drawout Transfer Switches
Figure 25.3-8. 2003200A Drawout NEMA 1
Figure 25.3-9. 2003200A Drawout NEMA 3R
Ampere
Rating
Number
of
Poles
A
Height
B
Width
C
Depth
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
NEMA 1 Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch
2002000 2 90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
3100
(1409)
2002000 3 90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
3100
(1409)
2002000 4 90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
3700
(1682)
25003200 2 90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
4700
(2136)
25003200 3 90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
4700
(2136)
25003200 4 90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
60.00
(1524.0)
5500
(2500)
NEMA 3R Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch
2002000 2 90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
3700
(1682)
2002000 3 90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
3700
(1682)
2002000 4 90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
4300
(1955)
25003200 2 90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
5300
(2410)
25003200 3 90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
5300
(2410)
25003200 4 90.00
(2286.0)
64.00
(1625.6)
75.00
(1905.0)
6000
(2730)
C
A
B
C
A
B
25.3-13
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
049
Figure 25.3-10. Magnum 40005000A UnitsNEMA 1
Note: The 4000 and 5000A bypass isolation ATS will include two cubicles for the Source 1 and Source 2 Normal and the Bypass power-case
switch. An additional cubicle called a wireway is provided for the Normal and Load connections. The wireway cubicle will have removable
panels on the front, and cable connections may be made from the top or the bottom. Cable connections for Emergency are made in the rear.
The wireway width is 32.00 inches (812.8 mm).
Table 25.3-12. NEMA 1 Magnum Drawout Transfer Switches
Seismic mounting adds 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) width to each side or
additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width.
Consult factory.
Source 2 Emergency Lugs
Load
Lugs
Source 1
Normal
Lugs
A
54.00
(1371.8)
54.00
(1371.8)
32.00
(872.8)
D
Normal
ATS
Breaker
Normal
Bypass
Breaker
Emergency
ATS
Breaker
Emergency
Bypass
Breaker
Wireway
Cubicle
SP SP
C
B
Note: Seismic mounting
brackets add 3.00 inches (76.2)
width to each side or an
additional 6.00 inches (152.4)
to total width.
Top View
Front View
Right Side View
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
A
Height
B
Width
C
Width
D
Depth
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
4000 3 or 4 90.00
(2286.0)
140.00
(3556.0)
146.00
(3708.4)
68.00
(1727.2)
5000 3 or 4 90.00
(2286.0)
140.00
(3556.0)
146.00
(3708.4)
68.00
(1727.2)
25.3-14
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
050
Figure 25.3-11. Magnum 40005000A UnitsNEMA 3R
Note: The 4000 and 5000A bypass isolation ATS will include two cubicles for the Source 1 and Source 2 Normal and the Bypass power-case
switch. An additional cubicle called a wireway is provided for the Normal and Load connections. The wireway cubicle will have removable
panels on the front, and cable connections may be made from the top or the bottom. Cable connections for Emergency are made in the rear.
The wireway width is 32.00 inches (812.8 mm).
Table 25.3-13. NEMA 3R Magnum Drawout Transfer Switches
Seismic mounting adds 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) width to each side or
additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to width.
Consult factory.
Table 25.3-14. Connection Type (40005000A Only)
A wireway is required in accordance with the following table for 4000

and 5000A ratings.
Load
Lugs
Normal
ATS
Breaker
Normal
Bypass
Breaker
Emergency
ATS
Emergency
Bypass
Wireway
Cubicle
SP
Top TT
Front View
Right Side View
Source 2
Emergency Lugs
Source 1
Normal
Lugs
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
A
Height
B
Width
C
Width
D
Depth
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
4000 3 or 4 90.00
(2286.0)
140.00
(3556.0)
146.00
(3708.4)
82.35
(2091.7)
5000 3 or 4 90.00
(2286.0)
140.00
(3556.0)
146.00
(3708.4)
82.35
(2091.7)

Line Emergency Load
Cable
Bus
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Bus
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Bus
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Cable
Bus
Bus
Bus
No
No
No
No
25.4-1
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
051
Table 25.4-1. ATC Controller Feature Selection Chart
Feature Description ATC-100 ATC-300+ ATC-600 ATC-800
Transition
Open transition Standard Standard Standard Standard
Closed transition Not available Not available Not available Standard
Timers
Time delay normal to emergency (TDNE) Standard Standard Standard Standard
Time delay engine start (TDES) Standard Standard Standard Standard
Time delay emergency to normal (TDEN) Standard Standard Standard Standard
Time delay engine cooldown (TDEC) Standard Standard Standard Standard
Time delay emergency fail (TDEF) Standard Standard Standard Standard
Engine/Generator Exerciser
Plant exerciser (PE) with fail-safe SelectableOFF, 7-, 14-,
28-day interval xed
run time 15 minutes no
load/load with fail-safe
ProgrammableOFF,
daily, 7-, 14-, 28-day
interval selectable run
time 0600 minutes no
ProgrammableOFF,
daily, 7-day interval
selectable run time
0600 minutes no
ProgrammableOFF,
daily, 7-day interval
selectable run time
0600 minutes no
Source 1 Sensing
All-phase undervoltage and underfrequency
protection
Standard Standard Standard Standard
All-phase overvoltage and overfrequency
protection
Three-phase rotation sensing Not available Standard Standard Standard
Three-phase voltage unbalance/loss Not available Standard Optional Optional
Source 2 Sensing
All-phase undervoltage and underfrequency
protection
All-phase overvoltage and overfrequency
protection
Three-phase rotation sensing Not available Standard Standard Standard
Three-phase voltage unbalance Not available Standard Optional Optional
25.4-2
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
052
Table 25.4-1. ATC Controller Feature Selection Chart (Continued)
ATC-300s supplied prior to September 2011 did not have this optional feature.
Feature Description ATC-100 ATC-300+ ATC-600 ATC-800
Manual Controls
Test operators Standard Standard Standard Standard
Four-position test selector switch (FPSS) Not available Not available Optional Optional
Time delay bypass pushbutton Standard Standard Standard Standard
Maintenance selector switch (MSS) Not available Optional Optional Optional
Automatic/manual operation selector switch Not available Optional Optional Optional
Automatic transfer or automatic transfer with
non-automatic retransfer operation
Not available Optional
Optional Optional
Indications/and Status Display
Source 1 connected/Source 2 connected Standard Standard Standard Standard
Source 1 present/Source 2 present Standard Standard Standard Standard
Source 1 tripped/Source 2 tripped Standard Standard Standard Standard
Customer Outputs
Source 1/Source 2 present contacts Not available Optional 2NO and 2NC Optional 2NO and 2NC Optional 2NO and 2NC
Source 1/Source 2 present contacts Not available Optional 2NO and 2NC Optional 2NO and 2NC Optional 2NO and 2NC
Source 1 available/Source 2 available contacts Not available Optional 2NO and 2NC Optional 2NO and 2NC Optional 2NO and 2NC
Switch Position Indication Contact
Source 1 position indication contact Not available 2NO and 2NC 2NO and 2NC 2NO and 2NC
Source 1 position indication contact Not available 2NO and 2NC 2NO and 2NC 2NO and 2NC
Pretransfer signal contacts Not available Standard 1NO and 1NC Optional Optional
Customer Inputs
Go to emergency (Source 2) Not available Standard Standard Standard
Load shed Not available Optional
Optional Optional
Transfer Mode Open Transition
Time delay neutral Not available Optional Optional Optional
In-phase monitoring Standard Optional Optional Optional
Load voltage decay Not available Optional Optional Optional
Transfer Mode Closed Transition
Time delay neutral Not available Not available Not available Optional
In-phase monitoring Not available Not available Not available Optional
Load voltage decay Not available Not available Not available Optional
Service Entrance Rating
Source 1, Source 2 or both and with and
without ground fault protection
Not available Optional Optional Optional
Stainless Steel Cover
SS lockable cover for controller Not available Optional Optional Optional
25.4-3
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
053
Table 25.4-2. ATC Controller Specication Selection Chart
Note: Features are order specic. Not all features are supplied as standard.
Specication Description ATC-100 ATC-300+ ATC-600 ATC-800
Programming Selections
Time delay normal to emergency 3 seconds (xed) 01800 seconds 01800 seconds 01800 seconds
Time delay emergency to normal 5 minutes (xed) 01800 seconds 01800 seconds 01800 seconds
Time delay engine cooldown 5 minutes (xed) 01800 seconds 01800 seconds 01800 seconds
Time delay engine start 3 seconds (xed) 0120 seconds 0120 seconds 0120 seconds
Time delay neutral N/A 0120 seconds 0120 seconds or based
on load voltage decay
of 2%30% of nominal
0120 seconds or based
on load voltage decay
of 2%30% of nominal
Time delay Source 2 fail N/A 06 seconds 06 seconds 06 seconds
Time delay voltage unbalance N/A 1030 seconds N/A N/A
Voltage unbalance three-phase N/A 0 or 1 (1 = enabled)
% of unbalanced voltage dropout N/A 5% to 20% (DO) dropout
2% to 3% (PU)
N/A N/A
Phase reversal three-phase N/A OFF, ABC, CBA N/A N/A
In-phase N/A 0 or 1 (1 = enabled) Enabled or disabled Enabled or disabled
Load sequencing N/A N/A Up to 10 devices
(via sub-network)
Up to 10 devices
(via sub-network)
Pretransfer signal N/A 1120 seconds
(Form C contact)
0120 seconds
(up to 10 devices via
sub-network)
0120 seconds
(up to 10 devices via
sub-network)
Plant exerciser Selectable day, off, 7-, 14-,
28-day interval, 15 minutes
run time, no load
Programmableoff, daily
or 7-, 14-, 28-day intervals,
0600 minutes, load or no load
Programmabledisabled
or 7-day interval, 0600
minutes, load or no load
Programmabledisabled
or 7-day interval, 0600
minutes, load or no load
Preferred source selection N/A N/A Source 1 or 2 or none Source 1 or 2 or none
Commitment to transfer in TDNE N/A N/A Enabled or disabled Enabled or disabled
Retransfer mode N/A Automatic or manual
Automatic or manual Automatic or manual

Auto daylight savings time
adjustment
N/A 0 or 1 (1 = enabled)
System selection Utility/generator Utility/generator
or dual utility
Utility/generator or dual
utility or dual generator
Utility/generator or dual
utility or dual generator
Additional information PA01600002E TD01602006E TD.15A.05.T.E. TD.15A.05.T.E.
25.4-4
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
054
Table 25.4-2. ATC Controller Specication Selection Chart (Continued)
Note: Features are order specic. Not all features are supplied as standard.
Specication Description ATC-100 ATC-300+ ATC-600 ATC-800
Voltage Specications
System application voltage Up to 480 Vac Up to 600 Vac Up to 600 Vac Up to 600 Vac
Voltage measurements of: Source 1 and 2 Source 1 and 2
V
AB
, V
BC
and V
CA
Source 1, 2 and load
V
AB
, V
BC
and V
CA
Source 1, 2 and load
V
AB
, V
BC
and V
CA
Voltage measurement range 120480 Vac 0790 Vac rms 0790 Vac rms 0790 Vac rms
Operating power 95145 Vac 65145 Vac 65145 Vac 65145 Vac
Frequency Specications
Frequency measurements of: Source 2 Source 1 and 2 Source 1 and 2 Source 1 and 2
Frequency measurement range 5060 Hz 4070 Hz 4070 Hz 4070 Hz
Operating temperature range 20 to +70C 20 to +70C 20 to +70C 20 to +70C
Storage temperature range 30 to +85C 30 to +85C 30 to +85C 30 to +85C
Operating humidity 0 to 95% relative humidity
(noncondensing)
0 to 95% relative humidity
(noncondensing)
(noncondensing)
(noncondensing)
Operating environment Resistant to ammonia,
methane, nitrogen, hydro-
gen and hydrocarbons
Resistant to ammonia,
Front Panel Indication
Mimic diagram with
LED indication
Unit status. Source 1 and 2
available and connected
(ve total)
Unit status. Source 1 and 2
available and connected
(ve total)
Automatic, test and
program mode. Source 1
and 2 available, connected
and preferred. Load
energized (10 total)
Automatic, test and
program mode. Source 1
and 2 available, connected
and preferred. Load
energized (10 total)
Main display N/A LCD-based display LED display LED display
Display language N/A English, French, Spanish English English
Communications capable N/A Modbus 485
PONI/INCOM PONI/INCOM
Enclosure compatibility NEMA 1 and 3R NEMA 1, 12, 3R and 4X
UV-resistant faceplate
NEMA 1, 12, 3R and 4X
NEMA 1, 12, 3R and 4X
Operating environmental range Operation 20 to +70C
Storage 30 to +85C
Humidity 0 to 95% relative
(noncondensing)
Operation 20 to +70C
Storage 30 to +85C
(noncondensing)
Storage 30 to +85C
(noncondensing)
Storage 30 to +85C
(noncondensing)
25.4-5
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
ATC-100 ControllerGeneral Description
055
ATC-100 Controller
ATC-100 Controller
General Description
The ATC-100 Controller is a compre-
hensive, multifunction, microprocessor-
based ATS controller. It is a compact,
self-contained, panel-mounted device
designed to replace traditional relay
and solid-state logic panels.
The ATC-100 Controller provides both
xed and jumper-selectable settings
to allow for a range of applications.
It operates from all system voltages
between 120 and 480 Vac, single-phase
and three-phase, at 50 or 60 Hz. In
addition, a period of no control power
operation is provided.
The ATC-100 Controller monitors the
condition of the three-phase line-to-
line voltage and frequency of both the
utility and generator power sources.
It can also be set up for single-phase
operation. The ATC-100 controller
provides the necessary intelligence
to ensure that the transfer switch
operates properly through a series of
sensing and timing functions.
The ATC-100 controller can be used
with both the breaker-based design
and the contactor-based design.
See Table 25.4-4 for ranges and
factory settings.
Standard Features
Controller settings via jumpers
located at the rear of the unit
SelectableOFF, daily, 7-, 14-, 28-day
interval xed run time 15 minutes
Monitor utility and generator power
source voltages and generator
power source frequency
Provide undervoltage protection
of the utility and generator
power sources
Provide underfrequency and over-
frequency protection of the utility
and generator power source
Permit easy customer setup
Permit system testing
Provide faceplate source status
indications
UL listed component
IEC 61000-4-2, 61000-4-3, 61000-4-4,
61000-4-5, 61000-4-6, 61000-4-11
CISPR 11, Class B
FCC Part 15, Class B
25.4-6
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
ATC-100 ControllerTechnical Data
056
Technical Data
Table 25.4-3. ATC-100 Controller Specications
Table 25.4-4. Adjustable Features with Range and Factory Default
Input control voltage 95 to 145 Vac 50/60 Hz
Voltage measurements of Utility V
AB
Generator V
AB
Utility V
BC
Generator V
BC
Utility V
CA
Generator V
CA
Voltage measurement range 0 to 575 Vac rms (50/60 Hz)
Voltage measurement accuracy 1% of full scale
Frequency measurements of Generator
Frequency measurement range 40 Hz to 70 Hz
Frequency measurement accuracy 0.3 Hz over the measurement range
Operating temperature range 20 to +70C (4 to +158F)
Storage temperature range 0 to +85C (22 to +185F)
Operating humidity 0 to 95% relative humidity (noncondensing)
Operating environment Resistant to ammonia, methane, nitrogen, hydrogen and hydrocarbons
Generator start relay 5A, 1/6 hp at 250 Vac
5A at 30 Vdc with a 150W maximum load
K1, K2 relays 10A, 13 hp at 250 Vac
10A at 30 Vdc
Enclosure compatibility NEMA 1, NEMA 3R and NEMA 12
UV-resistant ATC-100 faceplate
Set Point Fixed/
Adjustable
Description Range Factory Default
Breakers Contactors
TDES Fixed Time delay engine start 3 seconds 3 seconds 3 seconds
TDNE Jumper-selectable Time delay normal to
emergency
2 or 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds
TDEN Fixed Time delay emergency to
normal
5 minutes 5 minutes 5 minutes
TDEC Fixed Time delay engine cool-off 1 minute 1 minute 1 minute
NOM FREQ Jumper-selectable Nominal frequency 50 or 60 Hz As ordered As ordered
NOM VOLTS Jumper-selectable Nominal voltage 120, 208, 220, 230, 240, 380 and 480V As ordered As ordered
S1 UV DROP Fixed Utility undervoltage
dropout
80% of NOMV 80% of NOMV
in volts
80% of NOMV
in volts
S2 UV DROP Fixed Generator undervoltage
dropout
in volts
80% of NOMV
in volts
S1 UV PICK Fixed Utility undervoltage
pickup
in volts
90% of NOMV
in volts
S2 UV PICK Fixed Generator undervoltage
pickup
in volts
90% of NOMV
in volts
S2 UF DROP Fixed Utility underfrequency
dropout
90% of NOMF 90% of NOMF
in hertz
90% of NOMF
in hertz
S2 UF PICK Fixed Generator underfrequency
pickup
95% of NOMF 95% of NOMF
in hertz
95% of NOMF
in hertz
S2 OF DROP Jumper-selectable Generator overfrequency
dropout
Off or 115% of NOMF (contactor) Off 115%
S2 OF PICK Jumper-selectable Generator overfrequency
pickup
Off or 110% of NOMF Off 110%
Generator test Jumper-selectable Generator test programming 7-, 14- or 28-day 7-day 7-day
Test mode Jumper-selectable Test mode Off, No Load, Load Off Off
TER Fixed Engine run test time 15 minutes 15 minutes 15 minutes
PHASES Jumper-selectable Three-phase or single-phase 1 or 3 As ordered As ordered
TDEF Fixed Time delay emergency
fail timer
6 seconds 6 seconds 6 seconds
TDN Jumper-selectable Time delay neutral Disabled (0 seconds) or enabled
(2 seconds)
Enabled
(2 seconds)
Enabled
(2 seconds)
25.4-7
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
ATC-300+ ControllerGeneral Description
057
ATC-300 Controller and
ATC-300+ Controller
ATC-300 Controller
General Description
Transfer switches are equipped
with the high-performance ATC-300+
digital transfer controller, receive
rock-solid monitoring, status report-
ing and transfer control operation.
Its superior design and robust
construction make the ATC-300+
the industry benchmark for critical
and distributed power systems.
The ATC-300+ will supersede the
ATC-300 controller for units supplied
after September 2011. The ATC-300+
will have the same form and t as the
ATC-300. Size and mounting dimen-
sions are identical. In addition, the
ATC-300+ will have additional optional
capability for manual retransfer,
Source 2 emergency inhibit and RS-485
Modbus communication capability.
Eatons ATC-300+ controller-based
automatic transfer switch is designed
to provide unmatched performance,
reliability and versatility for critical
standby power applications.
Standard Features
Source-2 emergency inhibit contact
Seven eld-programmable time
delays
system diagnostic and Help
message display
Optional Features
Suitable for use as service equipment
in the standard enclosure size when
used with breaker-based design
transfer switches
Available UL 1449 3rd Edition
compliant surge protection devices
Integrated distribution panels
available when used with breaker-
based design transfer switches
Ammeterload side
Manual retransfer selector switch
Source 2 inhibit
Manual retransfer
RS-485 communication capability
UL listed component
Meets UL 1008
Meets intent of UL 991
Meets IEC 1000-4-2, 1000-4-3,
1000-4-4, 1000-4-5, 1000-4-6, 1000-4-11
Meets CISPR 11, Class A
Complies with FCC Part 15, Class A
25.4-8
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
058
Technical Data
Table 25.4-5. ATC-300+ Controller Specications
The following set points are programmable if the corresponding feature is programmed.
Table 25.4-6. ATC-300+ Programming Features/Set Points
Complete list of programming selections found in IB01602009E.

Input control voltage 65145 Vac 50/60 Hz
Voltage measurements of Source 1 V
AB
Source 1 V
BC
Source 1 V
CA
Source 2 V
AB
Source 2 V
BC
Source 2 V
CA
Voltage measurement range 0790 Vac rms (50/60 Hz)
Voltage measurement accuracy 2% of nominal input voltage
Frequency measurement for Source 1 and Source 2
Frequency measurement range 4070 Hz
Frequency measurement accuracy 0.3 Hz
Undervoltage dropout range
Breaker/switch style ATS
Contactor style ATS
5097% of the nominal system voltage
Undervoltage pickup range (Dropout +2%) to 99% of the nominal system voltage
Contactor style ATS
Overvoltage pickup range 103% to (dropout 2%) of the nominal system voltage
Underfrequency dropout range 9097% of the nominal system frequency
Underfrequency pickup range (Dropout +1 Hz) to 99% of the nominal system frequency
Contactor style ATS
103 to 110% of the nominal system frequency
103 to 105% of the nominal system frequency
Overfrequency pickup range 101% to (dropout 1 Hz) of the nominal system frequency
Operating temperature range 20 to +70C (4 to +158F)
Storage temperature range 0 to +85C (22 to +185F)
Operating humidity 095% relative humidity (noncondensing)
Operating environment Resistant to ammonia, methane, nitrogen, hydrogen and hydrocarbons
Generator start relay 5A, 1/6 hp at 250 Vac/5A at 30 Vdc with a 150W maximum load
K1, K2, pretransfer, alarm relays, K3, K4 10A, 13 hp at 250 Vac/10A at 30 Vdc
Enclosure compatibility NEMA 1, NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 UV-resistant ATC-300 faceplate
Set Point Set Point Units Description Range Factory
Default
TDES Minutes: seconds Time delay engine start 0120 seconds 0:03
TDNE Minutes: seconds Time delay normal to emergency 01800 seconds 0:00
TDEN Minutes: seconds Time delay emergency to normal 01800 seconds 5:00
TDEC Minutes: seconds Time delay engine cool-off 01800 seconds 5:00
TDN Minutes: seconds Time delay neutral 0120 seconds 0:00
PLANT EXER Days Plant exerciser programming Off, daily, 7-day, 14-day or 28 day Off
TEST MODE Test Mode 0, 1 or 2 (0 = no load engine test, 1 = load engine test, 2 =disabled) 0
TER Hours: minutes Engine run test time 0600 min 5:00
TPRE Minutes: seconds Pre-transfer delay timer 0120 sec 0:00
PHASES Three-phase or single-phase 1 or 3 As ordered
VOLT UNBAL Volts Voltage unbalanced 0 or 1 (1 = enabled) 1
UNBAL DROP % Percent Percent for unbalanced voltage
dropout
520% of phase voltage unbalance 20%
UNBAL PICK % Percent Percent for unbalanced voltage
pickup
Dropout minus (UNBAL DROP % 2) to 3% 10%
UNBAL DELAY Seconds Unbalanced delay timer 1030 0:20
TDEF Seconds Time delay emergency fail timer 06 sec 6
PHASE REV Phase reversal OFF, ABC or CBA OFF
25.4-9
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
059
ATC-600 Controller
ATC-600 Controller
General Description
Eatons ATC-600 is a microprocessor-
based logic controller to be used with
transfer switches. This device is door-
mounted and provides the operator
with an at-a-glance overview of switch
status and parameters, as well as key
diagnostic data. Real-time values for
volts and frequency can be viewed via
the front panel LED display, along with
an indication of the power source
currently in use.
The ATC-600 continuously monitors
either single-phase or three-phase
voltages for Source 1, Source 2 and
the load. When the Source 1 voltage or
frequency is detected to be below the
customer-programmed set points,
transfer to Source 2 is initiated. When
the Source 2 voltage and frequency are
detected to be within the programmed
parameters, the transfer occurs.
While the load is connected to Source 2,
the ATC-600 continues to monitor
Source 1. As soon as the Source 1
voltage and frequency return to within
the programmed limits, and after a
programmed time delay, a retransfer
back to Source 1 is initiated.
The ATC-600 uses microprocessor
technology to provide the operator with
a vast array of selections. Depending
on the application, the user can
customize the ATC-600 to meet the
particular application. A summary
of several key selections is listed in
Table 25.4-4.
The ATC-600 is equipped to display
history information either via the front
panel or over PowerNet. Source 1
and Source 2 run time, available time,
and connect time are available, as
well as Load energized time, number
of transfers, and the date, time and
reason for the last 16 transfers.
ATC-600 can be equipped with a
PONI card that will allow the user
to communicate with the unit via
Series III software. All settings for
purchased options can be set from the
faceplate of the unit or downloaded
over PowerNet. Series III software
data, as well as providing the capabil-
ity to monitor and control the transfer
switch from a remote location.
For further information on PowerNet
products and software, see Eatons
Volume 3Power Distribution and
Control Assemblies, CA08100004E,
Tab 22.
UL listed component
25.4-10
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
060
Technical Data
Table 25.4-7. ATC-600 Controller Specications
Optional features.
Input control power range 65 Vac rms to 160 Vac rms (50/60 Hz)
Voltage measurements of Source 1 V
AB
Source 1 V
BC
Source 1 V
CA
Source 2 V
AB
Source 2 V
BC
Source 2 V
CA
Load V
AB
Load V
BC
Load V
CA
Voltage measurement range 0 to 790 Vac rms (50/60 Hz)
Voltage measurement accuracy 2% of nominal input voltage
Frequency measurement for Source 1 and Source 2
Frequency measurement range 40 Hz to 80 Hz
Frequency measurement accuracy 0.1 Hz
Undervoltage sensing Source 1 and Source 2
Undervoltage dropout range 5090% of nominal voltage
105120% of nominal voltage

Underfrequency dropout range
90100% of nominal frequency

100120% of nominal frequency

Contact Outputs
Two Form A contacts for generator start
Four Form A contacts for control functions
Three Form C contacts for control functions
5A 250 Vac; 5A 30 Vdc
10A 250 Vac; 10A 30 Vdc
10A 250 Vac; 10A 30 Vdc
Communications output over PowerNet (optional) PONI (Product-Operated Network Interface)
Front Panel Indications
Automatic mode
Test mode
Program mode
Blinking LED indicates automatic operation
LED illuminated indicating the unit is in the TEST mode
LED illuminated indicating the unit is in the program mode blinking LED indicates user is viewing
set points in program mode
LED lights to indicate Source 1 available (amber), Source 2 available (amber),
Source 1 connected (green), Source 2 connected (red),
Source 1 preferred (red), Source 2 preferred (red), load energized (red)
LED display to indicate History information
Set points
Real-time clock
Operating temperature range Operation: 20C to +70C/Storage: 30C to +85C
25.4-11
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
ATC-600 ControllerTechnical Ratings and Data
061
All ATC-600 programmable features
and associated set point possibilities
with any required explanations are
presented below. Remember, only
features originally ordered and
factory programmed will appear
in the display.
Note: Changing the system nominal voltage
or frequency set points will automatically
change all the pickup and dropout settings
to new default values.
Table 25.4-8. ATC-600 Programming Features/Set Points

Complete list of programming selections found in IB ATS-1005.
Set to order specic value.

Programmable
Feature Display
Display Explanation Set Point Range Factory Default Measure
Value
TDES Time delay engine start timer 0120 seconds 0:03 Minutes: seconds
TDNE Time delay normal to emergency timer 01800 seconds 0:00 Minutes: seconds
TDEN Time delay emergency to normal timer 01800 seconds 5:00 Minutes: seconds
TDEC Time delay engine cool down timer 01800 seconds 5:00 Minutes: seconds
TDN Time delay neutral timer 0120 seconds 0:00 Minutes: seconds
PRF SRC Preferred source None
1 = source 1
0 = source 2
1
EXER Plant exerciser enabled or disabled 0 = disabled
1 = enabled
1
MANTR Re-transfer mode 0 = automatic
1 = PB return
0
CTDNE Commitment to transfer in TDNE 0 = not committed
1 = committed
0
TMODE Engine test with/without load transfer 0 = no load transfer
1 = load transfer
2 = disable test pattern
1
TPRE Pre-transfer sub-network time delay 100 seconds 0:01 Minutes: seconds
PHASE Number of system phases 1 or 3
3
TSEQ Time delay load sequencing 1120 seconds 0:10 Minutes: seconds
IPHASE In-phase transition enabled or disabled 1 = enabled
0 = disabled
0
IPFD In-phase transition frequency difference (Hertz) 0.03.0 Hz 1.0 Hertz
SYNC Closed/in-phase transition synchronization timer 160 minutes 5 Minutes
TDEF Time delay engine failure 060 seconds 6 Seconds
25.4-12
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
062
ATC-800 Controller
ATC-800 Controller
General Description
Eatons ATC-800 is a microprocessor-
based logic controller to be used with
transfer switches. This device is door-
mounted and provides the operator
with an at-a-glance overview of switch
status and parameters, as well as key
diagnostic data. Real-time values for
volts and frequency can be viewed
via the front panel LED display, along
with an indication of the power source
currently in use.
The ATC-800 is a programmable,
microprocessor-based monitoring
device designed for use in Eaton closed
transition transfer switches and for open
transition contactor-based designs.
For closed transition applications, the
user may avoid intentional interrup-
tion of power when both sources of
power are available. This make-before-
break mode of operation is useful
during testing of the engine generator
under load and where a predetermined
transfer to the generator is desired.
Source paralleling duration is limited
to less than 100 msec.
Passive Closed Transition
The closed transition mode of operation
requires that both power sources be
synchronized in voltage, frequency and
phase angle within prescribed limits.
Eatons ATC-800 uses a technique that
involves waiting for synchronization
of the two sources without actively
controlling the generators voltage or
frequency. The mode of operation is
anticipatory in that the switch close
command is initiated before the
sources are exactly in phase. Using the
phase angle and frequency difference
between the two sources, a calculation
is made to predict when both sources
would be in phase. The response time
of the switch is then factored in to
determine when the switch close signal
should be given to ensure optimal
closure of the two sources in phase.
Eatons closed transition ATC-800 must
be selected with one of three feature
sets: 47C, 47D or 47E (47D, 47F, 47G on
contactor-based designs. The difference
between these three feature sets is the
action taken by the closed transition
ATC-800 if it is determined that the two
sources will not achieve synchronization.
If feature set 47C is selected, failure
to synchronize results in the switch
reverting to an Open Transition mode
of operation with low voltage decay.
If feature set 47E is selected, then
failure to synchronize results in the
switch reverting to time delay neutral.
However, if feature set 47D is selected,
failure to synchronize will result in the
ATC-800 refusing to transfer to Source 2
and an alarm signal being activated.
In neither case will there be a parallel-
ing of sources if synchronization is
not achieved.
The generator used with a closed
transition transfer switch must be
equipped with an isynchronous
governor
When paralleling sources, fault
current contributions from both
sources should be considered in
the system design
Closed Transition (make-before-break)
technology causes paralleling
with the Source 1. It is the users
responsibility to comply with any
requirements regarding protective
relaying. Protective relaying is not
supplied with the standard transfer
switch, but is available as an option
25.4-13
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
ATC-800 ControllerFeatures, Benets and Functions
063
Switch Application SectionEaton
Closed Transition (ATC-800) Features
The closed transition ATC-800 is a
door-mounted, totally enclosed device
that is customer accessible from the
transfer switch front panel.
Data access and programming
operations are performed using the
ATC-800 Transfers touch-sensitive
function buttons in conjunction with
an easy-to-read, illuminated, alpha-
numeric LED display. Both the function
buttons and the display window are
part of the devices front panel. A built-
in Help button provides user assistance
in the form of message displays.
The ATC-800 is communications ready
and compatible with all Eaton IQ devices
as well as Eatons Power Xpert

system-wide monitoring software.
This permits monitoring of several
transfer switches, locally or remotely,
from a single point.
Additional Features
Source paralleling duration is
limited to 100 msec or less
True rms three-phase voltage sens-
ing on normal, Source 2 and Load
Frequency sensing on normal and
Source 2
Programmable set points stored in
nonvolatile memory
PowerNet communication to personal
computer either on site or remote
Historical data on most recent trans-
fers (up to 16 events) viewable at
switch. Unlimited history storage
(remote) available when used with
PowerNet software
Wide range of user-selectable
option combinations
Load sequencing
Engine start contacts
Engine test switch with user-
selectable test mode and fail-safe
Alarm contact (multiple alarm
functions available)
Pretransfer signal
Heartbeat monitor (ashing green
Automatic light signies that the
ATC-800 is operating properly)
Instrumentation:
Voltmeter (accuracy 1%)
Reads line-to-line on Sources 1
and 2 and Load
Frequency meter (4080 Hz,
accuracy 0.1 Hz)
Source available time
(both sources)
Source connected time
(both sources)
Source run time
ATC-800 Programming
Button Functions
Three buttons provide easy access to
all commonly used ATC-800 functions.
When the preferred source is connected
and the ATS is operating normally, the
automatic indicator light will be ashing
and the display window will be blank.
Using the Display Select button, the
operator can step through each of the
six display families:
Source 1
Source 2
Load
History
Time/date
Set points
Note: Stepping through the various display
modes does not alter preset values or
otherwise affect operation of the ATS.
Once the desired display family is
selected, the user may press the Step
button to cycle through specic
parameters or metered values shown
in the display window.
Initial Programming
Factory programming will load all
customer-specied functions and
presets. At the customers request,
Eaton will add, delete or adjust
optional features.
Customer Programming
Customers may reprogram set points
and other parameters to match their
application, using the program switch
located on the rear of the unit. Once the
programming mode has been activated
and the program light is ashing, the
user may access set point settings by
pressing the Display Select button
until the set points LED is illuminated.
Values for individual set points may
then be altered by pressing the Increase
or Decrease buttons. Once a parameter
has been reset, the user advances to
the next set point by pressing the
Step button.
While the ATC-800 is in the program
mode, the device continues to operate
in accordance with the previously
programmed set points and
parameters. The unit is never ofine,
and preset values do not change until
programming has been completed.
Once reprogramming is complete, the
user may return the program switch to
the run position. At this point, all new
values are stored in the ATC-800 non-
volatile memory, and the unit returns
to Automatic mode.
Denitions
Closed transition: Closed transition is
a feature that will temporarily parallel
two live sources in a make-before-break
scheme when performing a transfer.
The ATC-800 will close the switching
devices for both sources, paralleling
both sources, for a maximum time of
100 milliseconds after the sources
are synchronized.
Open transition/in-phase monitor:
In-phase monitor is a feature that will
allow a transfer between two sources
only when the phase difference between
the two sources is near zero. This is an
open transition transfer that prevents
inrush currents from exceeding normal
starting currents in the case where
motor loads are being transferred.
Open transition/delayed with load
voltage decay: Load voltage decay
transfer is a feature that, after opening
the switch for the original source, holds
in the neutral position until the voltage
on the load is less than 30% of rated
voltage. This is an open transition that
prevents inrush currents from exceeding
normal starting currents in the case
where motor loads are being transferred.
25.4-14
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
064
Closed Transition ATC-800 Front Panel Display and Button Functions
Test
Indicator light is
on when unit is
in Test mode.
Automatic
LED indicates that the ATS is
operating normally and is in
the Automatic mode.
Program
LED indicates unit is in Programming
mode. (This mode is activated using
the Program switch located on the
rear of the unit.)
History
By pressing the Display Select button
to light the History LED and the Step
button to rotate through available
data, historical or cumulative values
for Available Time (Both Sources),
Connected Time (Both Sources),
Number of Transfers and Date/Time
Reason for last 16 transfers are
displayed.
Help
Pressing the Help button in any
function mode will bring up display
messages, explanations and
prompts to assist the operator.
Step Button
Shows multiple
variables under
each display select
function.
Increase/Decrease
A detailed explanation of these
buttons can be found in the
Operation section.
Set Points
Selecting this LED permits the user
to display existing programmed
values.
Display Select
Source 1
Source 2
Load
History
Time/Date
Set Points
Button is discussed
in Operation section.
Engine Test Buttons
Pressing this button twice
initiates an engine test.
Time/Date
Displays real-time clock. Clock can
be easily set in this mode using the
Increase and Decrease buttons.
LED Display
Unit will provide LED readout
showing actual metered values
for Voltage, Frequency and
Condition (including Normal,
Undervoltage, Overvoltage, etc.)
Source 1, Source 2, and Load
Colored LED lights show status
of both Sources and Load.
25.4-15
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
065
Operation
The ATC-800 operates in the following
modes to meet most load management
applications:
Loss of normal power
Open transition to
alternate source
Normal power restored
Closed transition back to
normal source
Peak shave (remote or local)
closed transition to and from
alternate source
Test (user selectable)
Load transferclosed transition
to and from alternate source
No-load transferstarts alternate
power source and allows to run
unloaded. No transfer takes place
Programming and Options
Closed Transition Operation Modes
Feature Set 47C Closed/In-Phase/Load
Voltage Decay
ATC-800 controllers equipped with
Feature Set 47C execute the following
sequence of operations upon receipt
of a request for transfer: the controller
waits (for a preselected time frame)
for synchronization of voltage and
frequency. If achieved, a closed
transition transfer occurs. Failure to
synchronize results in the controller
defaulting to an in-phase monitor,
open transition mode of operation.
If the two sources fail to achieve
frequency synchronization within the
user-selectable range, the controller
defaults to an open transition using a
load voltage decay delayed transition.
Figure 25.4-1. Feature Set 47C Schematic
Table 25.4-9. Closed Transition/In-Phase Standard Features
Request for Transfer
Alternate
Source
Available?
Sources
Synchronized
<Tmax
Both Sources
Still Available
Sources
Synchronized
<Tmax
Source 1 Open
<100 msec?
Close Source 2
Open Source 1
Detect Source 2 Closed
Good
Open Source 2
Alarm
Open Source 1
Close Source 2
Open Source 1
Load Voltage Decay
Close Source 2
End End End
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Open Transition/
In-phase Monitor
Closed
Transition
Open
Transit
Delayed
Standard
Features
Customer
Adjustments
Closed transition frequency difference (Hz)
Closed transition voltage difference (V)
In-phase transition frequency difference (Hz)
0.0 to 0.3 Hz
15%
0.00.3 Hz
Closed transition synchronization timer
In-phase transition synchronization timer
160 minutes
160 minutes
25.4-16
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
ATC Controllers
066
In-Phase Transfer
Feature Set 47D Closed Only
Feature Set 47D only transfer to an
alternate source when both sources
are synchronized. For synchronization
to occur, both voltage and frequency
differentials must fall within the user-
selectable ranges. If synchronization
does not occur (within a preselected
amount of time), the controller will
maintain load connection to the
current power source and initiate
an alarm.
Closed Transition With Default to
In-Phase Transition With Default to
Time Delay Neutral
Provides a closed transition transfer
as the primary transfer mode. In the
event Source 1 and Source 2 fail to
synchronize within the permitted
voltage difference, frequency
difference, phase angle difference
and time, then the controller defaults
to the In-phase transition with default
to time delay neutral operation as
described in Features 32D and 32A.
Adjustable frequency difference 0.0
0.3 Hz. Adjustable voltage difference
15% volts. Adjustable synchroniza-
tion time allowance 160 minutes.
Feature Set 47F Closed/Load Voltage Decay
Feature Set 47F will perform a closed
transition when both sources are
synchronized in frequency, phase and
voltage. Failure to synchronize will
result in an open transition Time Delay
Load Voltage Decay transfer. Time
Delay Load Voltage Decay uses the
load voltage measurements to sense
back EMF that is generated when the
transfer switch is in the Neutral position.
It provides a delay in transfer in either
direction if an unacceptable level is
sensed as established by a customer
programmed level. The transfer will not
take place until the back EMF decays
below the acceptable programmed
level. This feature has a separate setting
of enabling or disabling the operation.
If disabled, the transfer switch will not
delay in the Neutral position and will
transfer between the sources as fast as
possible. This feature is not available
with the Time Delay Neutral Optional
Feature 32A.
Figure 25.4-2. Feature Set 47D Schematic
Table 25.4-10. Closed Transition Standard Features
Feature Set 47G Closed/Time Delay Neutral
transition transfer when both sources
are synchronized in frequency, phase
and voltage. Failure to synchronize will
Neutral transfer. Time Delay Neutral
provides a time delay in the transfer
switch neutral position when both
sources are open. This delay takes
place when the load is transferred in
either direction to prevent excessive
in-rush currents due to out-of-phase
switching of large motor loads.
Request for Transfer
Alternate
Source
Available?
Sources
Synchronized
<Tmax
Source 1 Open
<100 msec?
Close Source 2
Open Source 1
Detect Source 2 Closed
Good
Open Source 2
Alarm
Alarm
End End
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Closed
Transition
Standard
Features
Customer
Adjustments
Closed transition frequency difference (Hz)
Closed transition voltage difference
Closed transition synchronization timer
0.00.3 Hz
15%
160 minutes
25.5-1
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Contactor-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features
067
Table 25.5-1. Contactor-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features
Note: S = Standard, O = Optional
Feature
Number
Description Open Transition Closed
Transition
RLC1 ATC1 ATC3 ATC8 BIC3 BIC8 CBC8
Residential
Contactor
Switch
ATC-100
Controller
Contactor
Switch
ATC-100
Controller
40400A
Only
Contactor
Switch
ATC-300
Controller
401200A
Contactor
Switch
ATC-800
Controller
Open
Transition
Bypass
Isolation
Contactor
Switch
Open
Transition
ATC-300
Controller
Bypass
Isolation
Contactor
Switch
Open
Transition
ATC-800
Controller
Bypass
Isolation
Contactor
Switch
Closed
Transition
ATC-800
Controller
1
1a
Timers
Time delay normal to emergency (TDNE)
Fixed 2 seconds or 15 seconds
S S
Adjustable 01800 seconds S S S S S
2 Time delay engine start (TDES)
Fixed 3 seconds
S S
3 Time delay emergency to normal (TDEN)
Fixed 1 minute
S S
4 Time delay engine cooldown (TDEC)
Fixed 5 minutes
S S
5 Emergency (S2) source sensing
5H Phase reversal S O S O O
5J All-phase undervoltage/underfrequency S S S S S S S
5K All-phase overvoltage/overfrequency S S S S S
5L All-phase voltage unbalance
and phase loss
S O S
5N All-phase overfrequency S S
6
6B
System or engine test
System test pushbutton S S S S S S S
6D Maintained 2-position test switch
6H Maintained 4-position test switch O O O
7 Time delay emergency fail (TDEF)
Fixed 6 seconds
S S
7a Time delay emergency fail (TDEF)
Adjustable 06 seconds)
S S S S S
8
8C
Pushbutton bypass
Bypass TDEN S S S S S
8D Bypass TDNE S S S S S
9
9B
Maintenance selector switch
Electrical operator isolator switch O O O O O
10
10B
Utility to utility or utility to generator S S S
10D Generator to generator S S S

12C
Indicating lights
Normal (S1) source connected S S S S S S S
12D Emergency (S2) source connected S S S S S S S
12G Normal (S1) source available S S S S S S S
12H Emergency (S2) source available S S S S S S S
14
14C
Auxiliary relay contacts
Normal (S1) source available 4 Form C O O O O
25.5-2
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
068
Table 25.5-1. Contactor-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features (Continued)
Feature
Number
Transition
Residential
Contactor
Switch
ATC-100
Controller
Contactor
Switch
ATC-100
Controller
40400A
Only
Contactor
Switch
ATC-300
Controller
401200A
Contactor
Switch
ATC-800
Controller
Open
Transition
Bypass
Isolation
Contactor
Switch
Open
Transition
ATC-300
Controller
Bypass
Isolation
Contactor
Switch
Open
Transition
ATC-800
Controller
Bypass
Isolation
Contactor
Switch
Closed
Transition
ATC-800
Controller
14D Emergency (S2) source available 4 Form C O O O O
14E Normal (S1) source available 1 Form C S
14F Emergency (S2) source available 1 Form C S
14G Normal (S1) source available 2 Form C S S S S S
14H Emergency (S2) source available 2 Form C S S S S S
15
15E
Position contacts
Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C S S S S S S
15F Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C S S S S S S
15G Position indicating contact normal (3 Form C) O O O O O O
15H Position indicating contact emergency
(3 Form C)
O O O O O O
15M Source 2 load shed contacts 4 Form C
(must order as a separate eld-installed kit)
O
16S Service equipment /overcurrent
protection (S1)
O
18 Metering O O O O O O
IQ 130 O O O O O O
IQ 140 O O O O O O
IQ 150 O O O O O O
IQ 250 O O O O O O
IQ 260 O O O O O O
PXM 2250 O O O O O O
18W Analog ammeter one per phase O O O O O O
21A Non-standard terminals
23
23A
Plant exerciser
Selectabledisabled/7-, 14-, 28-day interval,
FIXED 15 minutes, load/no load, with fail-safe
S S
23J Selectabledisabled/7 day interval,
0600 minutes, load/no load, with fail-safe
S S S
23K Selectabledisabled/7-, 14-, 28-day interval,
S S
23L 24-hour, 7-day, 365-day programmable
programmable plant exciser
O O O O O
26
26D
Normal (S1) source sensing
Go to emergency (S2) input S S S S S
26H Phase reversal protection S O S O O
26J All-phase undervoltage/underfrequency S S S S S
26K All-phase overvoltage/overfrequency S S S S S
26L Three-phase voltage unbalance/phase loss S O S O O
26M Allows operation with generator with
utility sensing (option available only through
a eld-installed kit)
O O
26P All-phase undervoltage S S
25.5-3
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
069
Select 16S for service entrance rating on RLC1.

Feature
Number
Transition
Residential
Contactor
Switch
ATC-100
Controller
Contactor
Switch
ATC-100
Controller
40400A
Only
Contactor
Switch
ATC-300
Controller
401200A
Contactor
Switch
ATC-800
Controller
Open
Transition
Bypass
Isolation
Contactor
Switch
Open
Transition
ATC-300
Controller
Bypass
Isolation
Contactor
Switch
Open
Transition
ATC-800
Controller
Bypass
Isolation
Contactor
Switch
Closed
Transition
ATC-800
Controller
29
29D
Alternative transfer modes of operation
Dual ATS bypass isolation O S S
29G Selector switch for automatic or
non-automatic operation (switch must
be labeled as non-automatic)
O O O O O
29J Automatic transfer operation with selectable
(via programming) automatic or non-
automatic retransfer operation with fail-safe
O O O O
32
32A
Delayed transfer operation modes
Time delay neutral adjustable 0120 seconds
(available on 3-position contactors)
S S S S
32B Load voltage decay adjustable
(available on 3-position contactors)
O O
32C 230% nominal voltage
In-phase monitor defaults to load voltage decay

32D In-phase monitor defaults to time
delay neutral

32E Delay transition timer adjustable 360 seconds
32F In-phase monitor (2-position contactors only) S S S
32G Time delay neutral xed 0 or 2 seconds
(available on 3-position contactors and
breaker-based design)

34
34A
Logic extender cable
48.00 inches (1219.0 mm)
34C 96.00 inches (2438.0 mm)
34E 144.00 inches (365.08 mm)
35A Pretransfer Sig-l contacts 1 Form C S O S O
36 Load shed from emergency S S S
37 Go to isolated position (not SE rated)
O
38
38A
Stainless steel device covers
SS cover for device plate or service equipment O
38B Disconnect SS cover for controller O O O O O O
41
41A
100 watts O O O O O O
41E 375 watts O O
42 Seismic IBC, UBC S S S S S S S
45
45A
Load sequencing contacts (1) O O O
45B Load sequencing contacts (2) O O O
45C Load sequencing contacts (3) O O O
45D Load sequencing contacts (4) O O O
45E Load sequencing contacts (5) O O O
45F Load sequencing contacts (6) O O O
45G Load sequencing contacts (7) O O O
45H Load sequencing contacts (8) O O O
25.5-4
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
070
Feature
Number
Transition
Residential
Contactor
Switch
ATC-100
Controller
Contactor
Switch
ATC-100
Controller
40400A
Only
Contactor
Switch
ATC-300
Controller
401200A
Contactor
Switch
ATC-800
Controller
Open
Transition
Bypass
Isolation
Contactor
Switch
Open
Transition
ATC-300
Controller
Bypass
Isolation
Contactor
Switch
Open
Transition
ATC-800
Controller
Bypass
Isolation
Contactor
Switch
Closed
Transition
ATC-800
Controller
45I Load sequencing contacts (9) O O O
45J Load sequencing contacts (10) O O O
47
47C
Closed transition operation-l modes
(user must specify mode)
Closed transition in-phase with default
to load voltage decay
O
47D Closed transition S
47E Closed transition in-phase with defaults
to time delay neutral
O
48
48A
Communications
IPONI module (INCOM communications) O O O
48D Ethernet communication 10Base-T only
(PXG400 Gateway)
O O
48F EPONI module (10Base-T and 10Base-FL)
MPONI module (MODBUS)
O O O O
48R Remote annunciator O O O
48RAC Remote annunciator with control O O O O O
49B Sensing isolation transformer O O
49C Multi-tap voltage transformer
(at 240, 208 and 120 Vac not included) S S S S S S
51 Surge protection device O O O O O O
51D1 50 kA CVX surge device source 1 O O O O O O
51F1 100 kA CVX surge device source 1 O O O O O O
80A Emergency (S2) inhibit contact O S S S
25.5-5
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Breaker-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features
071
Table 25.5-2. Breaker-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features
Feature
Number
Description Open Transition
ATV1
ATH1
ATV3
ATH3
ATVI
ATH
NTHE
NTVE
MTHX
MTVX
Light
Commercial
Molded
Case Switch
ATC-100
Controller
Molded
Case Switch
ATC-300
Controller
Molded
Case Device
ATC-600
Controller
Molded
Case Switch
Non-Automatic
Transfer
Switch
Molded
Case Switch
Manual
Transfer
Switch
1
1a
Timers
S
Adjustable 01800 seconds S S
Fixed 3 seconds
S
3 Time delay normal to emergency (TDNE)
Fixed 1 minute
S
Fixed 5 minutes
S
5
5H
Emergency (S2) source sensing
Phase reversal S O
5J All-phase undervoltage/underfrequency S S S
5K All-phase overvoltage/overfrequency S S
5L All-phase voltage unbalance and phase loss S
5N All-phase overfrequency S
6
6B
System test pushbutton S S S
6D Maintained 2-position test switch O
6H Maintained 4-position test switch O
Fixed 6 seconds
S
S S
8
8C
Pushbutton bypass
Bypass TDEN
S S
8D Bypass TDNE S S
9
9B
Electrical operator isolator switch O O
S
10
10B
Utility to utility or utility to generator
10D Generator to generator S

12C
Indicating lights
Normal (S1) source connected S S S S
12D Emergency (S2) source connected S S S S
12G Normal (S1) source available S S S S
12H Emergency (S2) source available S S S S
12L Normal (S1) source tripped (requires Feature 16) O O O
12M Emergency (S2) source tripped (requires Feature 16) O O O
14
14C
Normal (S1) source available 4 Form C O S O
14D Emergency (S2) source available 4 Form C O S O
14E Normal (S1) source available 1 Form C
14F Emergency (S2) source available 1 Form C
14G Normal (S1) source available 2 Form C S S O
14H Emergency (S2) source available 2 Form C S S O
25.5-6
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
072
Table 25.5-2. Breaker-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features (Continued)
Feature
Number
ATV1
ATH1
ATV3
ATH3
ATVI
ATH
NTHE
NTVE
MTHX
MTVX
Light
Commercial
Molded
Case Switch
ATC-100
Controller
Molded
Case Switch
ATC-300
Controller
Molded
Case Device
ATC-600
Controller
Molded
Case Switch
Non-Automatic
Transfer
Switch
Molded
Case Switch
Manual
Transfer
Switch
15
15E
Position contacts
Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C S S S
15F Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C S S S
15G Position indicating contact normal (3 Form C) O O O O
15H Position indicating contact emergency
(3 Form C)
O O O O
16
16N
Normal (S1) switch only O O O O
16E Emergency (S2) switch only O O O O
16B Normal (S1) and emergency (S2) switches O O O O
16S Service equipment /overcurrent protection (S1)
18 Metering O O O O O
IQ 130 O O O O O
IQ 140 O O O O O
IQ 150 O O O O O
IQ 250 O O O O O
IQ 260 O O O O O
PXM 2250 O O O O O
PXM 2260 O O O O O
PXM 2270 O O O O O
18W Analog ammeter one per phase O O O O O
20A Rear bus connections O O O O
21A Non-standard terminals O O O O O
23
23A
Plant exerciser
Selectabledisabled/7-, 14-, 28-day interval,
FIXED 15 minutes, load/no load, with fail-safe
S
23J Selectabledisabled/7 day interval,
S
23K Selectabledisabled/7-, 14-, 28-day interval,
S
O O
26
26D
Go to emergency (S2) input S S
26H Phase reversal protection S O
26J All-phase undervoltage/underfrequency S S
26K All-phase overvoltage/overfrequency S S
26L Three-phase voltage unbalance/phase loss S
26M Allows operation with generator with utility sensing
(option available only through a eld-installed kit)
O
26P All-phase undervoltage S
29
29G
Selector switch for automatic or non-automatic
operation (switch must be labeled as non-automatic)
O O
(via programming) automatic or non-automatic
retransfer operation with fail-safe
O O
25.5-7
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
073
Ground fault protection is required for service disconnects rated 1000A or more if the electrical service is
a solidly grounded wye system of more than 150V to ground but not exceeding 600V phase to phase.
Feature
Number
ATV1
ATH1
ATV3
ATH3
ATVI
ATH
NTHE
NTVE
MTHX
MTVX
Light
Commercial
Molded
Case Switch
ATC-100
Controller
Molded
Case Switch
ATC-300
Controller
Molded
Case Device
ATC-600
Controller
Molded
Case Switch
Non-Automatic
Transfer
Switch
Molded
Case Switch
Manual
Transfer
Switch
32
32A
S S
32B Load voltage decay adjustable O
32E Delay transition timer adjustable 360 seconds S
32G Time delay neutral xed 0 or 2 seconds (available
on 3-position contactors and breaker-based design)
S
34
34A
Logic extender cable
48.00 inches (1219.0 mm) O O
34C 96.00 inches (2438.0 mm) O O
34E 144.00 inches (3658.0 mm) O O
35A Pretransfer Sig-l contacts 1 Form C S O
36 Load shed from emergency S
37 Go to isolated position (not SE rated) O O O
37A Without ground fault protection
Rated as suitable for use as service equipment

(requires 16B or 16N or 16E or 16S)
O O O
37B With ground fault protection
Rated as suitable for use as service equipment
(requires 16B or 16N or 16E or 16S)
O O O
38
38A
SS cover for device plate or service
equipment disconnect
O O O
38B SS cover for controller O O O O
39
39A
Distribution panel (for 240/120V, AT3 switches only)
225A with (2) 200A feeders O
39B 300A with (3) 200A feeders O
39C 400A with (4) 200A feeders O
41
41A
100 watts O O O O O
41E 375 watts
42 Seismic IBC, UBC S S S S S
25.5-8
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
074
Feature
Number
ATV1
ATH1
ATV3
ATH3
ATVI
ATH
NTHE
NTVE
MTHX
MTVX
Light
Commercial
Molded
Case Switch
ATC-100
Controller
Molded
Case Switch
ATC-300
Controller
Molded
Case Device
ATC-600
Controller
Molded
Case Switch
Non-Automatic
Transfer
Switch
Molded
Case Switch
Manual
Transfer
Switch
45
45A
Load sequencing contacts (1) O
45B Load sequencing contacts (2) O
45C Load sequencing contacts (3) O
45D Load sequencing contacts (4) O
45E Load sequencing contacts (5) O
45F Load sequencing contacts (6) O
45G Load sequencing contacts (7) O
45H Load sequencing contacts (8) O
45I Load sequencing contacts (9) O
45J Load sequencing contacts (10) O
48
48A
Communications
IPONI module (INCOM communications) O
(PXG400 Gateway)
O
MPONI module (MODBUS)
O
48R Remote annunciator O
48RAC Remote annunciator with control O O
49B Sensing isolation transformer O O O
51
51D1
Surge protection device
(listed rating is per phase)
50 kAclipper device connected to Source 1 O O O O
51E1 80 kAclipper device connected to Source 1 O O O O
51F1 100 kAclipper device connected to Source 1 O O O O
51G1 50 kACHSP device connected to Source 1
(240/120 Vac single-phase only)
O O O
51H1 75 kACHSP device connected to Source 1
(240/120 Vac single-phase only)
O O O
51J4 Telephone/modem/DSL (four lines total) O O O O
51K4 Cable TV/satellite cable/cable modem (two lines total) O O O O
51M4A 12 Vdc generator start circuit protection O O O O
51M4B 24 Vdc generator start circuit protection O O O O
51NA1 100 kA surge device w/Advisor Source1 O O O O
25.5-9
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Magnum-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features
075
Table 25.5-3. Magnum-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features
Feature
Number
Description Open Transition Closed Transition
ATVIMG NTVEMG BIVIMG CTVIMG CBVIMG
Magnum
Fixed and
Drawout
Mount
ATC-600
Controller
Magnum
Fixed and
Drawout
Mount
Non-Automatic
Transfer
Bypass
Isolation
Magnum
Drawout
ATC-600
Controller
Magnum
Fixed and
Drawout
Mount
ATC-800
Closed
Transition
Bypass
Isolation
Drawout
ATC-800
Closed
Transition
1
1a
Timers

Adjustable 01800 seconds S S S S
Fixed 3 seconds

3 Time delay emergency to normal (TDEN)
Fixed 1 minute

Fixed 5 minutes

5
5H
Emergency (S2) source sensing
Phase reversal O O O O
5J All-phase undervoltage/underfrequency S S S S
5K All-phase overvoltage/overfrequency S S S S
6
6B
System test pushbutton S S S S
6H Maintained 4-position test switch O O O O
Fixed 6 seconds

S S S S
8
8C
Pushbutton bypass
Bypass TDEN S S S S
8D Bypass TDNE S S S S
9
9B
Electrical operator isolator switch O O O O
10
10B
Utility to utility or utility to generator S S S S
10D Generator to generator S S S S

12C
Indicating lights
Normal (S1) source connected S S S S S
12D Emergency (S2) source connected S S S S S
12G Normal (S1) source available S S S S S
12H Emergency (S2) source available S S S S S
12L Normal (S1) source tripped (requires Feature 16) O O O O O
12M Emergency (S2) source tripped (requires Feature 16) O O O O O
14
14C
Normal (S1) source available 4 Form C O O O O O
14D Emergency (S2) source available 4 Form C O O O O O
14E Normal (S1) source available 1 Form C S S S S
14F Emergency (S2) source available 1 Form C S S S S
14G Normal (S1) source available 2 Form C O
14H Emergency (S2) source available 2 Form C O
15
15E
Position contacts
Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C S S S S
15F Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C S S S S
25.5-10
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
076
Table 25.5-3. Magnum-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features (Continued)
Feature
Number
Magnum
Fixed and
Drawout
Mount
ATC-600
Controller
Magnum
Fixed and
Drawout
Mount
Non-Automatic
Transfer
Bypass
Isolation
Magnum
Drawout
ATC-600
Controller
Magnum
Fixed and
Drawout
Mount
ATC-800
Closed
Transition
Bypass
Isolation
Drawout
ATC-800
Closed
Transition
16
16N
Normal (S1) switch only O O O O O
16E Emergency (S2) switch only O O O O O
16B Normal (S1) and emergency (S2) switches O O O O O
18 Metering O O O O O
IQ 130 O O O O O
IQ 140 O O O O O
IQ 150 O O O O O
IQ 250 O O O O O
IQ 260 O O O O O
PXM 2250 O O O O O
PXM 2260 O O O O O
PXM 2270 O O O O O
PX 4000 O O O O O
PX 6000 O O O O O
PX 8000 O O O O O
20A Rear bus connections O O O O O
21A Non-standard terminals O O O O O
22 Ground bus with provisions to attach to neutral S S S S S
22A 18-conductor ground bus 500 or 750 kcmil O O O O O
22B 30-conductor ground bus 500 or 750 kcmil O O O O O
22C Special ground barcontact factory O O O O O
23
23J
Plant exerciser
Selectabledisabled/7 day interval,
S S S S
O O O
26
26D
Go to emergency (S2) input S S S S
26H Phase reversal protection O O O O
26J All-phase undervoltage/underfrequency S S S S
26K All-phase overvoltage/overfrequency S S S S
29
29G
Selector switch for automatic or
non-automatic operation (switch
must be labeled as non-automatic)
O O O O
(via programming) automatic or non-automatic
retransfer operation with fail-safe
O O O O
32
32A
S S
32B Load voltage decay adjustable O O
32C 230% nominal voltage
In-phase monitor defaults to load voltage decay
O O
32D In-phase monitor defaults to time delay neutral O O
34F 100.00 inches (2540.0 mm) open Magnum only O O
35A Pretransfer Sig-l contacts 1 Form C O O
36 Load shed from emergency O O O O
25.5-11
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
077
Table 25.5-3. Magnum-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features (Continued)
Ground fault protection is required for service disconnects rated 1000A or more if the electrical service is a solidly grounded wye system of more than
150V to ground but not exceeding 600V phase to phase.
Feature
Number
Magnum
Fixed and
Drawout
Mount
ATC-600
Controller
Magnum
Fixed and
Drawout
Mount
Non-Automatic
Transfer
Bypass
Isolation
Magnum
Drawout
ATC-600
Controller
Magnum
Fixed and
Drawout
Mount
ATC-800
Closed
Transition
Bypass
Isolation
Drawout
ATC-800
Closed
Transition
37 Go to isolated position (not SE rated) O O O O
37A Rated as suitable for use as service
equipment (requires 16B or 16N or 16E)
Without ground fault protection
O O O O O
37B Rated as suitable for use as service
equipment (requires 16B or 16N or 16E)
With ground fault protection
O O O O O
38
38A
SS cover for device plate or service
equipment disconnect
O O O O O
38B SS cover for controller O O O O O
41
41E
375 watts O O O O O
42 Seismic IBC, UBC S S S S S
45
45A
Load sequencing contacts (1) O O O O
45B Load sequencing contacts (2) O O O O
45C Load sequencing contacts (3) O O O O
45D Load sequencing contacts (4) O O O O
45E Load sequencing contacts (5) O O O O
45F Load sequencing contacts (6) O O O O
45G Load sequencing contacts (7) O O O O
45H Load sequencing contacts (8) O O O O
45I Load sequencing contacts (9) O O O O
45J Load sequencing contacts (10) O O O O
47
47C
Closed transition operation-l modes
(user must specify mode)
Closed transition in-phase with default
to load voltage decay
O O
47D Closed transition O O
47E Closed transition in-phase with defaults
to time delay neutral
O O
48
48A
Communications
IPONI module (INCOM communications) O O O O
(PXG-400 Gateway)
O O O O
MPONI module (Modbus)
O O O O
48R Remote annunciator O O O O
48RAC Remote annunciator with control O O O O
49a Sensing isolation transformer Magnum O O
25.5-12
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
078
Table 25-5-3. Magnum-BasedAutomatic Transfer Switch Features (Continued)
Feature
Number
Magnum
Fixed and
Drawout
Mount
ATC-600
Controller
Magnum
Fixed and
Drawout
Mount
Non-Automatic
Transfer
Bypass
Isolation
Magnum
Drawout
ATC-600
Controller
Magnum
Fixed and
Drawout
Mount
ATC-800
Closed
Transition
Bypass
Isolation
Drawout
ATC-800
Closed
Transition
51S1B 50 kA SPD standard source 1 O O O O O
51S1C 50 kA SPD standard with surge counter source 1 O O O O O
51SC8 Remote display panel cable (8 feet standard) O O O O O
51SC12 Remote display panel cable (12 feet) O O O O O
51SC4 Remote display panel cable (4 feet) O O O O O
54a Front-access cabinet (Magnum design only) O O O O O
55b Source 1 bottom mounting O O O O
57a Magnum breaker lift device (1) O O O O O
57b Magnum breaker lift device (2) O O O O O
58a Shutterless cassette S S S S S
58b Shuttered casette O O O O O
59a Silver-plated bus S S S S S
59b Tin-plated bus O O O O O
80A Emergency (S2) inhibit contact O O O O
81A General alarm indicator contact O O O O
25.5-13
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Automatic Transfer Switch Features
079
Feature Description
Timers
1. Time Delay Normal to Emergency
(TDNE)
Provides a time delay to allow for the
generator to warm up before transfer-
ring the load to the emergency source.
Timing begins only after the Emergency
Source becomes available and is
deemed good based on the program-
mable voltage and frequency set
points in the controller.
2. Time Delay Engine Start (TDES)
Provides a time delay before initiating
the generator start cycle. This is to
account for momentary power outages
or voltage uctuations of the normal
source. Provides a Form C contact to
the generator starter circuit.
3. Time Delay Emergency to Normal
(TDEN)
Provides a time delay of the retransfer
operation to permit stabilization of the
normal source. Timing begins only
after the normal source becomes avail-
able and is deemed good based on the
programmable voltage and frequency
set points in the controller. This function
is fail-safe protected.
4. Time Delay Engine Cooldown
(TDEC)
Provides a time delay before initiating
the generator stop cycle after the
retransfer operation. This allows the
generator to cool down by running
unloaded. Timing begins on completion
of the retransfer cycle.
Source 2 Sensing
5. Source 2Monitoring and Protection
Provides monitoring and protection
based on the Source 2 voltage and/or
frequency set points. All Feature 5
monitoring and protection functions
are fail-safe operations.
5J. All-Phase Undervoltage/
Underfrequency Protection
Provides undervoltage/underfrequency
monitoring and protection based
on programmable set points in
the controller.
5K. All-Phase Overvoltage/
Overfrequency Protection
Provides overvoltage/overfrequency
monitoring and protection based
on programmable set points in
the controller.
5H. Three-Phase Rotation Protection
Provides three-phase reversal sensing
in order to protect against transferring
to an out-of-phase source. The controller
will treat the opposite source as
unavailable if the sources are out of
phase, based on programmable set
5L. Three-Phase Voltage Unbalance/
Phase Loss
Provides phase loss detection
from blown fuses on the Source 2
supply circuit.
6B. Test Operators
Automatic transfer switches are
provided with a controller faceplate
test pushbutton that simulates a loss
of the Source 1 as standard. All
programmed time delays (TDNE,
TDEN, etc.) will be performed as
part of the test. Engine run time of
the test is equal to the plant exerciser
programmed set point. All tests are
fail-safe protected.
6H. 4-Position Test Selector Switch
(FPSS)
Provides a door-mounted 4-position,
maintained contact selector switch
marked Auto, Test, Engine Start,
and Off. The FPSS is fail-safe pro-
tected, except for the Off Position.
Transfer switch operation is determined
by the switch position. Transfer switch
operations are as follows:
AutoAutomatic operation mode.
TestA load test is performed until
the switch is moved to another position.
Engine StartA no-load test is
performed until the switch is moved
to another position.
OffThe automatic transfer controller
and engine start contact are disabled.
A white pilot light is provided to indicate
that the FPSS is in the Off position.
7. Time Delay Emergency Fail (TDEF)
Provides a time delay that prevents
a connected emergency source from
being declared unavailable based
on the customers set points. This is
to account for momentary generator
uctuations. If the Source 2 remains
in a failed state, then 0.5 second after
the TDEF timer expires the transfer
switch will proceed with the pro-
grammed sequence for retransfer if
Source 1 is available. This time delay
is only implemented when Source 2 is
a generator.
Note: This feature is also enabled when
large loads cause generator output to drop
below customer set points.
8. Time Delay Bypass Pushbutton
Provides a momentary contact push-
button to bypass the TDNE (Feature 1)
and/or TDEN (Feature 3) time delays.
The Time Delay Bypass Pushbutton
contact, when closed, will reduce any
or all of the programmed time delay to
zero. Must be executed when TDNE or
TDEN timer is displayed on the controller.
8C. Bypass Time Delay Emergency to
Normal (TDEN)
8D. Bypass Time Delay Normal to
Emergency (TDNE)
9B. Maintenance Selector Switch
(MSS)
Provides a 2-position, maintained
contact selector switch marked
Operate and Disable. When
the MSS is placed in the Disable
position, the controller logic will be
disconnected from the transfer motor
circuit. The MSS is placed in the
Operate position for normal
automatic operation.
10. Preferred Source Selector
Provides a means to designate either
Source 1 or Source 2 as the Preferred
source. The Preferred source is the
source that the transfer switch will
connect the load to if it is available.
Note: This is a programmable software
feature not an actual switch.
10B. Preferred Source Selector
Provides a programmable source
selector for use on systems comprised
of dual utility or utility and engine/
generator power sources.
10D. Preferred Source Selector
Provides a programmable source
selector for use on systems comprised
of dual engine/generator power
sources. (Dual engine starting circuits
are provided.)
12C. Source 1Load Connected
Provides a green indication that
indicates the load is connected to
Source 1 when lit.
12D. Source 2Load Connected
Provides a red indication that indicates
the load is connected to Source 2
when lit.
25.5-14
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
080
Feature Description (Continued)
12G. Source 1Present
Provides a white or amber indication
Depending on the Controller that
Source 1 has power; however, this
does not indicate whether Source 1
is acceptable.
12H. Source 2Present
Provides an amber indication that
Source 2 has power; however, this
does not indicate whether Source 2
is acceptable.
Overcurrent Trip Indication
Available only with integral overcurrent
protection (Feature 16) (shown on
automatic transfer controller display).
12L. Source 1 Trip Indication
The automatic transfer controller
display will read Lockout if the
Source 1 circuit breaker is in the
tripped position.
12M. Source 2 Trip Indication
The automatic transfer controller
display will read Lockout if the
Source 2 circuit breaker is in the
tripped position.
14. Relay Auxiliary Contacts
14C. Source 1 Present
Provides 4 Form C relay auxiliary
contacts. The relay is energized when
Source 1 is present.
14D. Source 2 Present
14E. Source 1 Available
contact. The relay is energized when
Source 1 is available and within the
controllers programmable set points.
14F. Source 2 Available
contact. The relay is energized when
Source 2 is available and within the
controllers programmable set points.
14G. Source 1 Present
14H. Source 2 Present
15. Switch Position Indication Contact
Provides a contact that indicates if
the power switching device is in the
open or closed position.
15E. Source 1 Position Indication
Contact
Provides 1 Form C contact that
indicates the position of the Source 1
power switching device.
15F. Source 2 Position Indication
Contact
Provides 1 Form C contact that
indicates the position of the Source 2
power switching device.
15M. Source 2 Load Shed Contacts
Provides 4 Form C contacts to initiate
a load circuit disconnect while on
Source 2. This gives the user the
capability of selectively choosing not
to run certain loads while on Source 2.
16B. Integral Overcurrent Protection on
Both Power Source Switching Devices
Provides integral overcurrent protection
on both Source 1 and Source 2 power
switching devices.
16E. Integral Overcurrent Protection on
the Source 2 Power Switching Device
on the Source 2 power switching device.
16N. Integral Overcurrent Protection on
on the Source 1 power switching device.
16S. External Overcurrent Protection on
Provides overcurrent protection on the
Source 1 power switching device.
18. Metering
The ATS controller provides voltage
and frequency readings. If additional
metering functions are required, Eaton
offers a series of digital meters that
may be added to the ATS. The meter
type can provide simple current and
voltage readings or more capable
meters providing Power, Demand
and energy readings.
Available with an optional communi-
cations interface. (See Feature 48
Communications for available
communication modules.)
Feature 18 metering options include
all required external devices (CTs, etc.)
for a fully functioning metering system.
IQ 130/140/150
IQ 130
This digital meter provides basic current
and voltage per phase (L-L, L-N) and
min./max. readings (I, V). Optional
communication RS-485, Modbus RTU.
IQ 140
In addition to basic current and
voltage, will provide frequency, power
measurements real, reactive and
apparent power, total (W, VAR, VA).
Optional communication RS-485,
Modbus RTU.
IQ 150
In addition to basic current/voltage/
frequency and power readings, will
provide Energy Real reactive and
apparent (Wh, VAR, Vah). Optional
communication RS-485, Modbus RTU.
IQ 250/260
IQ 250
This digital meter provides current per
phase and current demand, voltage
(L-L, L-N) and frequency. Power, energy
and demand readings. Real, reactive
and apparent power and energy,
power factor. RS-485 communications,
Modbus RTU or ASCII. Optional I/O
slots available.
IQ 260
In addition to all of the features of
the IQ 250, power quality analysis is
available with THD voltage and current
per phase.
Power Xpert 2000
Provides either a Power Xpert PXM
2250, PXM 2260 or PXM 2270 meter.
Power Xpert 4000, 6000, 8000
Provides one of the Power Xpert Meters
with or without graphic displays.
18W. Ammeter Side Metering
Provides an ammeter for monitoring
the load side circuit.
20A. Rear Bus Provisions
Provides Source 1, Source 2 and
Load Circuit rear accessible bus stabs
with provision for bus bar connection.
Eaton transfer switches are provided
with either front or rear (dependant
on switch type) connected solderless
screw-type terminals for power cable
connection as standard.
25.5-15
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
081
21A. Optional Power Cable
Connection Terminals
Eaton transfer switches are provided
as standard with Source 1, Source 2
and load circuit solderless screw-type
terminals for power cable connection.
Alternate terminal wire sizes, and
compression lug provisions may be
available dependant on transfer switch
type and ampere rating.
Plant Exerciser
23A. Plant Exerciser With Fail-Safe
Provides a means for automatic testing
of the engine generator set or standby
power system. All programmed time
delays in the controller will be performed
during plant exerciser operations.
Programmable set points for test
intervals are start time, either disabled,
daily, 7, 14 or 28 days.
15-minute xed engine test time.
Test may be performed with or without
load transfer. Test may be manually
cancelled during the operation. This
function is fail-safe protected.
23J. Plant Exerciser (PE) With Fail-Safe
Provides a means for automatic
testing of the engine generator
set or standby power system. All
programmed time delays in the
controller will be performed during
the plant exerciser operation.
interval are start time, either disabled
or 7 days, and engine test time.
a load transfer. Test may be manually
cancelled during the operation. This is
a fail-safe operation.
23K. Plant Exerciser With Fail-Safe
Provides a means for automatic testing
of the engine generator set or standby
power system. All programmed time
delays in the controller will be performed
during plant exerciser operations.
intervals are start time, either disabled,
daily, 7, 14 or 28 days, engine test time.
load transfer. Test may be manually
cancelled during the operation. This
function is fail-safe protected.
26D. Go to Emergency (Source 2)
Provides the capability for an external
contact closure to initiate a transfer
to the Source 2 power source. This
includes starting the generator, per-
forming the programmed time delays
and the transfer operation. Retransfer
will occur when the external contact is
opened. This is a fail-safe function.
Source 1 Sensing
26. Source 1Monitoring and
Protection
Provides Source 1 monitoring and
protection functions. If Source 1 fails,
then the automatic transfer controller
will begin the sequence of operations
necessary to transfer the load to
Source 2. All Feature 26 monitoring
and protection functions are fail-safe
operations.
26H. Three-Phase Rotation Protection
Provides three-phase reversal sensing
in order to protect against transferring
to an out-of-phase source. The controller
will treat the opposite source as
unavailable if the sources are out of
phase, based on programmable set
26J. All-Phase Undervoltage/
Underfrequency Protection
Provides all-phase undervoltage/
underfrequency monitoring and
protection based on programmable
set points in the controller.
26K. All-Phase Overvoltage/
Overfrequency Protection
Provides all-phase overvoltage/
overfrequency monitoring and
protection based on programmable
set points in the controller.
26L. Three-Phase Voltage Unbalance/
Phase Loss
Provides phase loss detection from
blown fuses on the Source 1.
26M. Generator Utility Sensing
Allows for the switch to operate with
generators that have internal utility
sensing. This option comes as a kit
that needs to be eld installed.
26N. All-Phase Undervoltage Protection
Provides undervoltage protection for
Source 1 (ATC-100 Controller only).
29. Transfer Operation Modes
Provides standard or optional transfer
modes, mode selection devices
and operational methods for
transfer switches.
29J. Automatic Transfer or Automatic
Transfer With Non-Automatic
Retransfer Operation
Provides a eld-selectable program-
mable set point that permits the transfer
switch to operate in one of the following
two transfer modes (A or B):
A. Fully automatic operation.
B. Automatic engine/generator startup
and automatic transfer operation
from Source 1 to Source 2. Manual
pushbutton operation is required
to initiate the retransfer operation
and engine/generator shutdown.
The pushbutton for manual
retransfer operation is included.
This is fail-safe protected.
29G. Automatic/Manual Operation
With Selector Switch
Provides 2-position selector switch
(labeled Auto/manual) that permits
selection of the automatic or manual
transfer. When in the Auto position,
the transfer switch operates with fully
automatic transfer, retransfer and
generator startup and shutdown
operations. When in the Manual
position, manual operation is
required to initiate the generator
startup or retransfer with generator
shutdown operations.
Note: Transfer switches with Feature 29
must be labeled as non-automatic transfer
switch equipment.
32. Delayed Transition Transfer Modes
for Open Transition Transfer Switches
Provides delayed transition transfer
modes for an open transition transfer
switch. Often used in systems with
inductive loads, a delayed transition
transfer switch may prevent or reduce
inrush currents due to out-of-phase
switching of inductive loads.
32A. Time Delay Neutral
Provides a time delay in the neutral
position during the transfer and
retransfer operations during which
both Source 1 and Source 2 are
disconnected from the load circuit.
This allows inductive loads time to
reach a safe voltage and eliminate
back EMF. The time delay is program-
mable and is the same for both
transfer and retransfer operations.
This is a passive feature that requires
the consulting engineer/installer to
determine the settings based on
how the user will operate the facility.
Adjustable 0120 seconds.
25.5-16
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
082
32B. Load Voltage Decay
Provides load voltage measurement
to sense back EMF that is generated
when the transfer switch is the neutral
position. It provides a delay in transfer
in either direction if an unacceptable
level is sensed as established by a
programmed set point. This is an
active feature that adapts to how
the facility is operating in order to
minimize neutral position wait time,
but ensure safety. Adjustable 230%
of nominal voltage.
32C. In-Phase Transition With Default
to Load Voltage Decay
Provides in-phase transition, which is
a feature that will permit a transfer
or retransfer between two available
sources that have a phase angle differ-
ence near zero. The in-phase transition
feature includes permissible frequency
difference and synchronization time
set points. In the event Source 1 and
Source 2 fail to synchronize within the
permitted frequency difference and
time, then the controller defaults to
the load voltage decay operation as
described in Feature 32B. Adjustable
frequency difference 0.03.0 Hz.
Adjustable synchronization time
allowance 160 minutes.
32D. In-Phase Transition With Default
to Time Delay Neutral
Provides in-phase transition, which is
a feature that will permit a transfer or
retransfer only between two available
sources that have a phase angle differ-
ence near zero. The in-phase transition
feature includes permissible frequency
difference and synchronization time
set points. In the event Source 1 and
Source 2 fail to synchronize within the
permitted frequency difference and
the time delay neutral operation as
described in Feature 32A. Adjustable
32E. Delayed Transition
The transfer and re-transfer operations
during which both Source 1 and
Source 2 are disconnected from the
load circuit. The time delay is program-
mable and the same for both transfer
and re-transfer operation. Adjustable
360 seconds.
32F. In-Phase Transition
Provides in-phase transition, this
feature will permit a transfer or
retransfer between two available
sources that have a phase angle
difference of 8 degrees or less. The
in-phase transition feature includes
permissible frequency difference and
synchronization time set points. In the
frequency difference and time, the
Alarm relay will energize and Failed
to Sync will be displayed on Line 1
of the controller. After resetting the
alarm, another in-phase transition may
be attempted or a non-synchronized
transfer may be initiated by failing the
connected source. The adjustable
frequency difference is 0.0 to 3.0 Hz.
If the synchronization does not occur
within a specied amount of time, the
Alarm relay will energize and the
failure will be logged into the transfer
history as either Sync Fail - Freq
or Sync Fail - Phase depending on
whether the frequency difference or
the phase difference was excessive.
32G. Time Delay Neutral
This feature provides a time delay in
the neutral position during the transfer
and retransfer operations during
which both the utility source and the
generator source are disconnected
from the load circuit. TDN cannot be
implemented on a transfer switch
using a 2-position contactor.
Jumper selectable at disable
(0 seconds) or enable (2 seconds).
Logic Extender Cable
34A. 48 Inches (1219 mm)
Provides logic extension cable
with connectors.
34C. 96 Inches (2438 mm)
with connectors.
34E. 144 Inches (3658 mm)
with connectors.
34F. 100 Inches (2540 mm)
Provides logic extension only for
open Magnum ATS.
35A. Pretransfer Signal With
1 Form C Contact
Provides a signal prior to the
transferring of the load. Will not
transfer until the programmable delay
set point in the controller is reached.
If both sources are not available, this
option will ignore the time delay set
in the controller.
36. Load Shed From Emergency
Provides the capability for an external
NC contact to initiate a load circuit
disconnection from the Source 2 power
source. If the load circuit is connected
to Source 2 and the contact is opened,
then a retransfer to Source 1 is
completed if Source 1 is available.
If Source 1 is not available, then the
transfer switch will transfer to neutral.
If the load circuit is connected to
Source 1 and the contact is open,
then a transfer Source 2 is prohibited.
37. Service Equipment Rated
Transfer Switch
Provides the label suitable for use as
service equipment and the features
necessary to meet the requirements for
the label. Includes service disconnect
with visible indication and neutral
assembly with removable |link.
Feature 16B or 16N must be selected
separately.
37A. Service Equipment Rated
Transfer Switch Without Ground
Fault Protection
Provides service equipment rating for
an application that does not require
ground fault protection.
37B. Service Equipment Rated Transfer
Switch With Ground Fault Protection
Provides service equipment rating for
an application that requires ground
fault protection.
38. Steel Cover
Provides protection for a device panel
as option 38a and protection for the
controller as option 38b.
39. Distribution Panel
The distribution panel feature uses
a panelboard design with bolt-on
circuit breakers type EHD. Bolt-on
breakers are designed to hold up
to the changes in temperature and
humidity that an industrial application
calls for. (240/120 Vac single-phase
systems only.)
39A. 225A With (2) 200A Feeders
39B. 300A With (3) 200A Feeders
39C. 400A With (4) 200A Feeders
25.5-17
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
083
41. Space Heater With Thermostat
Provides a space heater and adjustable
thermostat. External control power is
not required. Availability is dependent
on transfer switch type.
41A. Space Heater With Thermostat
100 Watt
Provides 100-watt space heater with
an adjustable thermostat.
41E. Space Heater With Thermostat
375 Watt
Provides 375-watt space heater with
an adjustable thermostat.
42. Seismic Qualication
45. Load Sequencing Capability
Provides the capability for sequential
closure of up to 10 addressable relays
after a transfer. Each addressable relay
provides (1) Form C contact. A single
adjustable time delay between each
of the relay closures is provided.
Operates via a sub-network. Adjustable
1120 seconds.
45A. Load Sequencing Contact
Provides (1) addressable relay.
45B. Load Sequencing Contact
Provides (2) addressable relays.
45C. Load Sequencing Contact
45D. Load Sequencing Contact
45E. Load Sequencing Contact
45F. Load Sequencing Contact
45G. Load Sequencing Contact
45H. Load Sequencing Contact
45I. Load Sequencing Contact
45J. Load Sequencing Contact
47. Transfer Modes for Closed
Transition Transfer Switches
Provides available transition transfer
modes for a closed transition transfer
switch. Closed transition is a make
before break transfer and retransfer
scheme that will parallel (a maximum
of 100 ms) Source 1 and Source 2
providing a seamless transfer when
both sources are available. The closed
transition feature includes permissible
voltage difference frequency difference
and synchronization time allowance
set points. The phase angle difference
between the two sources must be near
zero for a permitted transfer. These
are all programmable set points in
the controller.
47C. Closed Transition With Default
to In-Phase Transition With Default to
Load Voltage Decay
voltage difference, frequency difference,
phase angle difference and time, then
the controller defaults to the in-phase
transition with default to load voltage
decay operations as described in
Feature 32C and 32B. Adjustable
Adjustable voltage difference 15%
volts. Adjustable synchronization time
47D. Closed Transition
Provides a closed transition transfer as
the primary transfer mode. Only under
a fail-safe condition (i.e., loss of the
connected source) will the controller
transfer to the alternate source using
the load voltage decay operation as
described in Feature 32B32B. Adjust-
able frequency difference 0.00.3 Hz.
Adjustable voltage difference 15% V.
47E. Closed Transition With Default to
In-Phase Transition With Default to
Time Delay Neutral
voltage difference, frequency differ-
ence, phase angle difference and
the in-phase transition with default
to time delay neutral operation
as described in Features 32D and
32A32B32A. Adjustable frequency
difference 0.00.3 Hz. Adjustable
voltage difference 15 percent volts.
47F. Closed/Load Voltage Decay
transition when both sources are
synchronized in frequency, phase and
voltage. Failure to synchronize will
Load Voltage Decay transfer. Time
Delay Load Voltage Decay uses the
load voltage measurements to sense
back EMF that is generated when the
transfer switch is in the Neutral position.
It provides a delay in transfer in either
direction if an unacceptable level is
sensed as established by a customer
programmed level. The transfer will not
take place until the back EMF decays
below the acceptable programmed
level. This feature has a separate setting
of enabling or disabling the operation.
If disabled, the transfer switch will not
delay in the Neutral position and will
transfer between the sources as fast as
possible. This feature is not available
with the Time Delay Neutral Optional
Feature 32A.
47G. Closed/Time Delay Neutral
transition transfer when both sources
are synchronized in frequency, phase
and voltage. Failure to synchronize will
Neutral transfer. Time Delay Neutral
provides a time delay in the transfer
switch neutral position when both
sources are open. This delay takes
place when the load is transferred in
either direction to prevent excessive
in-rush currents due to out-of-phase
switching of large motor loads.
48. Communication Modules
Provides communications modules for
the ATC-300, ATC-600 and ATC-800
transfer switch controllers.
48A. INCOM
Communication (IPONI) Provides
Eatons proprietary INCOM protocol
communications modules.
48D. Ethernet
Communication (PXG400 Gateway)
Translates Modbus RTU, QCPort or
INCOM to Modbus TCP. The PXG400
Gateway includes embedded Web
server monitoring of up to 64 connected
devices. (Includes the IPONI with the
ATC-600 and ATC-800 controllers.)
25.5-18
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
084
48F. Modbus
Communication (MPONI)
Provides Modbus RTU protocol via
communications module.
48R. Remote Annunciator
Provides remote monitoring of source
availability, source position and test
status for the ATC-600 and ATC-800
controllers. Operates via the controller
sub-network.
48RAC. Remote Annunciator
with Control
Provides remote monitoring and
control via a color touch screen
display for the ATC-300, ATC-600 and
ATC-800 controllers. Operates using
Modbus protocol (MPONI required for
the ATC-600 and 800).
Option 51. Surge Protection Device
Two types of surge protection devices
are used in Eaton automatic transfer
switches. Both types meet the require-
ments for UL 1449 3rd Edition for
surge suppression devices and are
CE marked. The type CVX is used on
Eaton wallmount ATS designs and
the Eaton type SPD are used on
oor-standing designs.
CVX
The CVX device features a Thermally
Protected Metal Oxide Varistor
technology and comes with high
intensity LED phase status indicators.
SPD
The SPD features a Thermally Protected
Metal Oxide Varistor technology. It
comes with dual-colored protection
status indicators for each phase and
for neutral-ground protection mode.
It comes with an audible alarm with
silence button and a Form C contact.
An optional SPD with surge counter
feature package is available. This
provides six-digit surge counter with
reset button.
51S1B. 50 kASPD standard source 1
51S1C. 50 kASPD standard with
surge counter source 1
51SC8. Remote display panel (8 feet
standard)
51SC12. Remote display panel (12 feet)
51SC4. Remote display panel (4 feet)
54. Front Access
54A. Front access cabinet available for
all Magnum products. This option will
add an additional pull section mounted
on the side of the switch.
59a. Silver-Plated Bus
Silver-plated bus is a standard feature
for all Magnum-based designs.
59b. Tin-Plated Bus
Tin-plated bus is available as an option
for Magnum-based designs.
Glossary
With respect to their use in this
document and as they relate to switch
operation, the following terminology
is dened:
AvailableA source is dened as
available when it is within its under-
voltage/overvoltage/underfrequency/
overfrequency (if applicable) set point
ranges for the nominal voltage and
frequency setting.
Fail-safeA feature that prevents
disconnection from the only available
source and will also force a transfer
or retransfer operation to the only
available source.
RetransferRetransfer is dened as
a change of the load connection from
the secondary to primary source.
Source 1is the primary source
or normal source or normal power
source or normal. (Except when
Source 2 has been designated the
Preferred Source.)
Source 2is the secondary source
or emergency source or emergency
power source or emergency or standby
or backup source. (Except when
Source 2 has been designated the
Preferred Source.)
Source 1Failed or failsSource 1
is dened as failed when it is outside
of its undervoltage or overvoltage or
underfrequency or overfrequency
(if applicable) set point ranges for the
nominal voltage and frequency setting.
Source 2Failed or failsSource 2 is
dened as failed when it is outside
of its undervoltage or overvoltage or
under-frequency or overfrequency
(if applicable) set point ranges for the
nominal voltage and frequency setting
for a time exceeding 0.5 seconds after
the time delay emergency fail (TDEF)
time delay expires.
TransferTransfer is dened as a
change of the load connection from
the primary to secondary source
except when specically used as
Transfer to Neutral.
Transfer to NeutralTransfer to
Neutral is dened as when the load
circuits are disconnected from both
Source 1 and Source 2.
25.5-19
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
kW Conversion Chart
085
Appendix AkW Conversion Chart
Table 25.5-4. kW to Ampere Conversion Chart
At 0.8 power factor.

Three-Phase Ampere Table at Common Line-to-Line Voltage
kW
200V 208V 220V 230V 240V 380V 400V 415V 460V 480V 600V
5.0 18 17 16 16 15 9 9 9 8 8 6
7.5 27 26 25 24 23 14 13 13 12 11 9
10.0 36 34 33 31 30 19 18 17 16 15 12
15.0 54 52 49 47 45 28 27 26 24 23 18
20.0 72 69 66 63 60 38 36 35 31 30 24
25.0 90 87 82 78 75 47 45 43 39 38 30
30.0 108 104 98 94 90 57 54 52 47 45 36
40.0 144 139 131 126 120 76 72 70 63 60 48
50.0 180 173 164 157 150 95 90 87 78 75 60
60.0 217 208 197 188 180 114 108 104 94 90 72
75.0 271 260 246 235 226 142 135 130 118 113 90
80.0 289 278 262 251 241 152 144 139 126 120 96
100.0 361 347 328 314 301 190 180 174 157 150 120
125.0 451 434 410 392 376 237 226 217 196 188 150
150.0 541 520 492 471 451 285 271 261 235 226 180
175.0 631 607 574 549 526 332 316 304 275 263 210
200.0 722 694 656 628 601 380 361 348 314 301 241
250.0 902 867 820 784 752 475 451 435 392 376 301
300.0 1083 1041 984 941 902 570 541 522 471 451 361
350.0 1263 1214 1148 1098 1052 665 631 609 549 526 421
400.0 1443 1388 1312 1255 1203 760 722 696 628 601 481
500.0 1804 1735 1640 1569 1504 950 902 870 784 752 601
600.0 2165 2082 1968 1883 1804 1140 1083 1043 941 902 722
700.0 2526 2429 2296 2197 2105 1329 1263 1217 1098 1052 842
800.0 2887 2776 2624 2510 2406 1519 1443 1391 1255 1203 962
900.0 3248 3123 2952 2824 2706 1709 1624 1565 1412 1353 1083
1000.0 3609 3470 3280 3138 3007 1899 1804 1739 1569 1503 1203
25.5-20
September 2011
Transfer Switches
Sheet 25
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
086


September 2011

Contents
Power Circuit Breakers & Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers

26.0-1

Sheet

26

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

001

P
o
w
e
r

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

&
I
n
s
u
l
a
t
e
d
-
C
a
s
e

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s


Breaker Type Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.0-2
Magnum Product Family

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.1-1

Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.1-5

Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.1-12

Breaker-Mounted Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.1-14

Trip Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.1-15

Technical and Application Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.1-21

Accessories and Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.1-27
Series NRX Product Family

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.2-1

Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.2-1

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.2-2

Trip Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.2-4

Communications Adapter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.2-5
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Power Circuit Breakers
Magnum DS and Series NRX
Power Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Insulated Case Circuit Breakers
Magnum SB and Series NRX

. . . . . . . .



. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Low Voltage Circuit Breakers
26.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

26

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Breaker Type Comparison

002

Summary of Differences Between Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers,
Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers and Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

There are two main classications
of low voltage circuit breakers
molded-case circuit breakers and low
voltage power circuit breakers. All
UL

, NEMA

and ANSI standards are
for molded-case circuit breakers and
low voltage power circuit breakers.
The industry recognizes three types of
circuit breakersmolded-case circuit
breakers (MCCB), insulated-case circuit
breakers (ICCB) and low voltage power
circuit breakers LVPCB). Insulated-case
circuit breakers are designed to meet
the standards for molded-case circuit
breakers.
Low voltage power circuit breakers
comply with the following standards:

ANSI Std. C37.16Preferred Ratings

ANSI Std. C37.17Trip Devices for
LVPCB

ANSI Std. C37.50Test Procedures

IEEE

Std. C37.13LVPCB Used in
Enclosures

UL 1066LVPCB
Molded-case circuit breakers and
insulated-case circuit breakers typically
comply with the following standards:

UL 489MCCB

UL 489Molded-Case Switches
(MCS)

NEMA AB1MCCB and MCS

NEMA AB3MCCB Application

Table 26.0-1. Breaker Type Comparison Chart

Description LVPCB
(Type Magnum DS and Series NRX)
ICCB
(Type Magnum SB and Series NRX)
MCCB
(QUICKLAG

/Series C

/Series G

)

Select trip
short-time rating
Selective trip over full range of fault
currents up to interrupting rating
(high short-time ratings)
Selective trip over partial range of fault
currents within the interrupting rating
(medium short-time ratings). Typically
up to 35 kA
Selective trip over a smaller range of fault
currents within the interrupting rating (low
short-time ratings). Typically 1013 times
the frame size
Operator type Types of operators: mechanically
operated and electrically operated
two-step stored energy
Types of operators: mechanically
Types of operators: mechanically operated
over-center toggle or motor operator
Closing speed 5-cycle closing for electrically
operated devices
5-cycle closing for electrically
operated devices
Greater than 5-cycle closing for electrically
operated devices
Mounting Available in drawout construction
permitting racking to a distinct test
position and removal for maintenance
Available in drawout construction
Typically xed-mounted but large
frame sizes may be available in drawout
construction
Interrupting rating Interrupting duty at 635 Vac:
42100 kA and current limiting
with or without fuses up to 200 kA
Interrupting duty at 508 Vac:
35 150 kA
22100 kA without fuses and up to
200 kA with integral fuses or for current-
limiting type
Current limiting Special current limiting types available
Special current limiting types available
without fuses up to 150 kA
Current limiting available with and without
fuses up to 200 kA
Relative cost Higher Medium Low
Available
frame sizes
Small number of frame sizes available.
Typical 8006000A
Typical 8006000A
Large number of frame sizes available.
Typical 1002500A
Maintenance Extensive maintenance possible on all
frame sizes
Limited maintenance possible on larger
frame sizes
Very limited maintenance possible on larger
frame sizes
Enclosure types Used in enclosures, MCCs,
switchboards and switchgear
Used in enclosures, MCCs
and switchboards
Used in enclosures, panelboards,
switchboards, MCCs and control panels
Series ratings Not available in series ratings Not available in series ratings Available in series ratings
Enclosed rating 100% continuous current rated in
its enclosure
80% continuous-current rated, unless
specically stated to be rated 100% in
an enclosure
an enclosure
Standards ANSI/IEEE C37
UL 1066
NEMA AB1/AB3
UL 489 or UL 1066
NEMA AB1/AB3
UL 489


26.1-1

September 2011


Sheet

26

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Low Voltage Power/Insulated-Case Circuit BreakersMagnum DS and SB

003

Magnum Low Voltage
for Global Application

Magnum low voltage power circuit
breakers enable comprehensive
solutions to meet and exceed the
unique and wide-ranging require-
ments of todays global power
distribution systems. This powerful
circuit breaker offering is designed
for ultimate custom conguration and
application exibility, with the needs
of the power distribution equipment
user and the electrical equipment
manufacturer in mind.

Standards

Magnum DS circuit breakers meet
or exceed all applicable requirements
of ANSI Standards C37.13, C37.17,
C37.50 and CSA.
See

Tab 20

for ANSI/UL 1558
low voltage drawout switchgear
application considerations, including
system voltage and frequency,
continuous current ratings, ambient
temperature, altitude, and other
unusual environmental and
See

Tab 21

for UL 891 switchboard
application considerations,
ratings and layouts.

Three Product Families

Magnum consists of three product families; each provides specic rating
features and approvals to optimize performance when applied in power
distribution equipment and custom enclosures:

Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
for ANSI/UL 1558 Rated Switchgear Applications

Up to 635 Vac

2006000A continuous

42200 kA interrupting

Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Family
ANSI Rated for Switchgear Applications

Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers
for UL 891 Switchboard Applications

Up to 635 Vac

2006000A continuous

50150 kA interrupting

Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker Family
UL Rated for Switchboard Applications

Magnum IEC Rated Air Circuit Breakers
for IEC Rated Switchboard Applications

Up to 690 Vac

2006300A continuous

40105 kA I

cu

/I

cs

Magnum IEC Rated Low Voltage Air Circuit Breaker
Family for IEC Switchboard Applications

For more information on Magnum IEC
air circuit breakers, please visit

www.eaton.com/electrical

.
26.1-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

26

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43


004

All Magnum Breaker Types
Features, Benets
and Functions

Interruption ratings up to 200 kA

with current limiting performance
and low current let-through to
reduce damaging energy to down-
stream equipment at high fault
levels or with high short-time
ratings for increased selectivity

Short-time ratings up to 100 kA

to maximize system coordination
and selectivity

Four physical frame sizes

(narrow, standard, double
narrow and double) to promote
breaker application in compact
modular enclosures

Continuous current ratings from
8006000A

with 100% rating at 40C
and no derating on most ratings
up to 50C in a properly sized and
ventilated enclosure

Fixed breaker mounting
congurations

with horizontal
and optional vertical and front
connected terminal connections

Drawout breaker mounting
congurations

with cassette
and optional safety shutters

Three- and four-pole breaker
congurations

Through-the-door design

for
human interface with the breaker
compartment door closed

Two-step stored energy mechanism

for manually and electrically
operated breakers

Digitrip RMS Trip Unit family
protection

with four models each
providing increasing levels of
protection and feature options
for coordination, information
and diagnostics:

Microprocessor-based rms sensing

Basic to programmable over-
current protection and alarms

Local display for information,
status and diagnostics

Ampere, voltage and
power metering

Power quality, harmonics
and waveform capture

Communications with translators
to common protocols

Zone selective interlocking for
improved coordination

Integral Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System

Breaker health monitoring

Field-installable accessories

(UL listed) common across the
breaker frames and designed to
be easily installed in the eld to
service or modify the breaker at
the point of use

Secondary terminal contacts

mounted at the top front of the
breaker and away from the primary
voltage areas for improved safety
and access. Finger-safe terminal
blocks accommodate ring-tongue or
spade type terminals as standard

Through-the-Door Design for Human Interface
with the Breaker Compartment Door Closed
High Technology Microprocessor-Based Digitrip RMS 1150+ Trip Units
are Available with Advanced Features Like Programmable Overcurrent
Settings, Power Metering, Power Quality and Communications


26.1-3

September 2011


Sheet

26

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43


005

Breaker Features on
Front Cover

The controls and indicators are
functionally grouped on the breaker
faceplate to optimize the human
interface, visibility and ease of use.
For maximum safety, a modern,
through-the-door design permits
access to the breaker levering system,
trip unit, controls and indicators with
the door closed.

Mechanical trip ag pop-out
indicator (optional)red
Interlocked indicator requiring
manual reset is also available

Accessory viewing windows for:

Shunt Trip Attachment (STA)

Spring Release device (SR)

device or second STA

Digitrip RMS trip unit (Model 520M
shown) protected by clear cover

Contact status indicators:

OPENgreen

CLOSEDred

Spring status indicators:

Chargedyellow

Dischargedwhite

Push OFF (open) pushbuttonred

Push ON (close) pushbuttongreen

Manual spring charging handle
for manually charging the stored
energy springs

Mechanical operations
counter (optional)

Key off lock (optional)

Padlockable levering device
shutter for drawout breakers

Color-coded position indicator
for drawout breakers:

CONNECTred

TESTyellow

DISCONNECTgreen

Magnum DS Drawout Breaker
Accessory Viewing Windows Visibly
Conrm the Breaker Shunt Trip,
Spring Release, UVR Installation
and Their Control Voltage Rating
Through-the-Door Design for Human
Interface with the Breaker Compartment
Door Closed, for Example, Manually
Charging the Stored Energy Springs
Drawout Breaker Levering Can be
Accomplished with the Compartment
Door Closed without the Need for a
Special Levering Tool

26.1-4
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
006
Breaker Internal Features
Magnum circuit breakers are designed
for ease of access for inspection,
modication and maintenance at the
point of use. The breaker front cover
is easily removed with four captive
bolts, revealing the modular internal
breaker features.
Secondary terminal points for

internal standardized breaker
wiring connections
Breaker accessory mounting deck

with three positions for mounting:
Shunt Trip Attachment (STA)
Spring Release device (SR)
device or second STA
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit

(Model 1150+ shown)
Spring charging motor (optional)

for electrically charging the stored
energy springs
Manual spring charging handle

for manually charging the stored
energy springs
Padlockable levering device

shutter for drawout breakers
Color-coded position indicator for

drawout breakers:
CONNECTred
TESTyellow
DISCONNECTgreen
Secondary contact blocks for

connection to external cell
control wiring
Removable arc chute covers for easy

access to breaker main contacts
Primary nger cluster disconnect-

ing contacts for drawout breaker
are mounted on the breaker
element for ease of access for
inspection and maintenance
Note: Some competitors mount the primary
nger clusters inside the cell, requiring
shutdown of the switchgear for inspection
and maintenance.
Current sensor viewing windows

to view and conrm breaker
sensor rating
Rigid frame housing (thermoset

composite resin) providing
increased strength and durability
Magnum Drawout Breaker Front View with Front Cover Removed
Showing Easy Access to the Breaker Internal Devices
Magnum Drawout Breaker Rear View Showing Primary Disconnecting
Finger Clusters Mounted on the Breaker for Ease of Inspection

26.1-5
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
007
Magnum DS Low Voltage
Magnum DS is a true UL 1066 listed
low voltage power circuit breaker
family, designed for the highest
performance requirements of
switchgear and specialty
enclosure applications.
Magnum DS low voltage power
circuit breakers have short-time
withstand and interruption ratings
up to 100 kA at 635 Vac with
continuous current ratings up
to 6000A to maximize system
coordination and selectivity
Magnum MDDX non-current
limiting PCBs have 200 kA
interrupting ratings and up to
100 kA short-time rating at 508 Vac
with continuous current ratings up
to 6000A
Magnum MDSX current limiting
power circuit breakers (fuseless)
have 200 kA interrupting ratings
and 3050 kA short-time ratings
at 480 Vac with continuous current
ratings up to 5000A
Magnum MDSL current limiting
power circuit breakers with integral
current limiters (fuses) have 200 kA
interrupting ratings at 600 Vac
with continuous current ratings
up to 2000A
UL and ANSI Test
Certications
Magnum DS meets or exceeds the
applicable ANSI, NEMA, UL and CSA

standards, including:
ANSI C37.13 (low voltage AC power
circuit breakers used in enclosures)
related requirements, and
used in enclosures)
NEMA SG3 (this standard adopts
ANSI C37.16 in its entirety)
Comprehensive
Enclosure Solutions
Magnum DS has proven performance
in Eaton manufactured switchgear
and switchboards with the following
test certications:
UL 1558 (Magnum DS low voltage
metal-enclosed switchgear)
UL 891 (Pow-R-Line
C low
voltage switchboards)
UL 1008 standard for transfer
switch equipment
UL, CSA 22.2.31 low voltage
assemblies
Approvals
UL listed: Magnum DS breaker
UL File No. E52096 and cassette
UL File No. E204565
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
Type Listed Certicate Number
04-HS422844A-DUB
Magnum DS, MDSX and MDSL Circuit Breakers
Magnum DS low voltage power circuit
breakers have high withstand ratings
from 42 to 100 kA to provide for maximum
system coordination and selectivity.
Magnum MDSX current limiting power
circuit breakers have fast opening
contacts to provide interrupting ratings
up to 200 kA at 508 Vac without fuses.
Magnum MDSL current limiting power
circuit breakers have integral current
limiters to provide interrupting ratings
of 200 kA at 600 Vac.
26.1-6
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
008
Selecting the Optimal Magnum Solution for System Coordination,
Interruption Performance and Arc Flash Reduction
Table 26.1-1. System Application Considerations
Magnum MDS, MDN and MDDX
High Short-Time Current Rating
Breakers for Maximum Coordination
Magnum MDS and MDDX breakers
are designed to hold in and carry
their rated short-time current up to
0.5 seconds, the maximum trip unit
short-time delay setting. System
coordination is maximized when the
instantaneous trip unit settings are
either turned off or set high enough to
facilitate coordination with other load
side protective devices in the circuit.
Energy let-through and arc ash energy
to the downstream circuit can be
signicantly reduced by employing
instantaneous trip unit settings, as well
as ground fault and zone interlocking.
However, the desire to reduce arc
ash may have to be balanced with the
necessity to maintain system coordina-
tion and continuity. This is especially
true at the low fault levels characteristic
of arcing faults, because the trip unit
instantaneous trip setting may have to
be set as low as the minimum setting,
which could cause lack of coordination.
The integral Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System trip unit option
can be employed to optimize arc ash
reduction during system startup and
maintenance operations.
Magnum MDSX Fuseless
Interruption Up to 200 kA Current
Limiting Performance
Magnum MDSX breakers provide new
fuseless technology with interruption
ratings up to 200 kA at 508 Vac. The
interruption performance is current
limiting when the fault currents
exceeds the short-time current rating.
The self-protecting fast-opening
reverse-loop contacts quickly open,
clearing the fault in approximately
1/4 cycle, reducing energy let-through
and arc ash energy.
Below their short-time current rating,
MDSX breakers coordinate like standard
MDS breakers. Arc ash levels to the
downstream circuit can be reduced by
employing the trip unit instantaneous
settings as well as ground fault, zone
interlocking and Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System features.
MDSX breakers have the same compact
footprint as standard MDS breakers.
MDSX improves overall operating
system continuity, convenience and life
cycle costs by eliminating fuse trucks,
blown limiter change outs, replacement
limiter inventories and the higher
operating watts loss associated
with fuses.
Magnum MDSL Interruption Up to
200 kA with Integral Current Limiters
Magnum MDSL breakers with integral
current limiters provide interruption
ratings up to 200 kA at 600 Vac. MDSL
is especially effective in reducing
energy let-through and arc ash at the
highest fault currents and those that
fall within the current limiting range
of the current limiter. Interruption is
clean and efcient with most of the arc
display contained within the current
limiter. A wide array of current limiter
ratings are available for selection and
application with the breaker current
sensor ratings and trip unit settings
to provide for system coordination.
When fault currents fall below the
current limiting range of the limiter,
energy let-through and arc ash
energy will increase. In this range, a
lower rated current limiter may be
applied, but considerations must be
given to nuisance blowing of the
limiter and system coordination.
MDSL breakers can also employ trip
unit instantaneous settings as well as
ground fault, zone interlocking and
System features to reduce arc ash
levels. Physically, they are 6.00 inches
(152.4 mm) deeper than standard
construction Magnum breakers.
Magnum Breaker Type Short-Time
Current (See
Table 26.1-2)
System
Coordination
Interruption Arc Flash Energy Operating System
Convenience and
Life Time Cost
MDS and MDDX
High short-time
currentLS trip
functions with trip unit
instantaneous off
Up to 65 kA
(narrow frame)
Up to 85 kA
(standard frame)
Up to 100 kA
(double narrow
and double frame)
Up to 100 kA Up to 100 kA
at 635 Vac
MDS/MDN
Up to 200 kA
at 508 Vac
MDDX
Highest energy Inspect, reset and
close after interruption
MDSX
Current limitingfast
opening reverse loop
contacts with trip unit
instantaneous off
30 kA
(standard frame)
50 kA
(double frame)
Up to the rated
short-time
current
Based on trip
unit settings
200 kA
at 508 Vac
Lower energy at
fault levels in current
limiting range above
short-time current rating
Inspect, reset and
close after interruption
MDSL
Current limiting
integral current
limiters with trip unit
instantaneous off
Based on current
limiter selected
Based on current
limiter selected
and trip unit
settings
Up to 200 kA
at 600 Vac
Lower energy at fault levels
in the current limiting range
of current limiter
Blown limiters require
replacement and inventory
Operating watts loss
is higher than fuse-less
breakers
All Magnum breakers
with trip unit instantaneous on
Per Magnum
breaker type
applied
Trip unit instanta-
neous settings
affect system
coordination and
continuity
Per Magnum
breaker type
applied
May be reduced by
employing trip unit:
Ground fault settings,
zone selective interlocking,
Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System
Per Magnum breaker
type applied
26.1-7
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
009
Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066
Magnum DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Family ANSI Rated for Switchgear Applications
Table 26.1-2. Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the
published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second inter-
val and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists
of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods.
Magnum MDSX fuseless current limiting power circuit breakers with fast opening contacts. See Table 26.1-1 on Page 26.1-6 for peak let-through chart.

Frame
Amperes
Breaker Type
Catalog
Number
Frame
Type
Available Current Sensor

and Rating Plugs for Digitrip
Breaker I
n
Rating)
Interrupting
at 254 Vac
Interrupting
at 508 Vac
Interrupting
at 635 Vac
Short-Time
Withstand
Rating
Fixed Internal
Instantaneous
Trip
800 MDN-408
MDN-508
MDN-608
MDN-C08
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
65
42
50
65
20
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800
MDS-408
MDS-608
MDS-808
MDS-C08
MDS-L08
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
42
65
85
100
200
42
65
85
100
200
42
65
85
100
200
42
65
85
85
85
1200 MDN-412
MDN-512
MDN-612
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
42
50
65
42
50
65
42
50
65
42
50
65
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,

1000, 1200
MDS-412
MDS-512
MDS-612
MDS-812
MDS-C12
MDS-X12
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
42
50
65
85
100
200
42
50
65
85
100
200
42
50
65
85
100
65
42
50
65
85
85
30
1600 MDN-416
MDN-516
MDN-616
MDN-C16
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
100
42
50
65
65
42
50
65
30
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600
MDS-616
MDS-816
MDS-C16
MDS-L16
MDS-X16
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200
65
85
85
30
85
30
2000 MDN-620
MDN-C20
Narrow
Narrow
65
100
65
100
65
65
65
35
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
MDS-620
MDS-820
MDS-C20
MDS-L20
MDS-X20
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200
200
65
85
100
200
65
85
85
30
85
30
26.1-8
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
010
Table 26.1-2. Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers (Continued)
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the
published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second inter-
val and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists
of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods.
Magnum MDSX fuseless current limiting power circuit breakers with fast opening contacts. See Table 26.1-1 on Page 26.1-6 for peak let-through chart.

Frame
Amperes
Breaker Type
Catalog
Number
Frame
Type
Available Current Sensor

and Rating Plugs for Digitrip
Breaker I
n
Rating)
Interrupting
at 254 Vac
Interrupting
at 508 Vac
Interrupting
at 635 Vac
Short-Time
Withstand
Rating
Fixed Internal
Instantaneous
Trip
3200 MDS-632
MDS-832
MDS-C32
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
85
85
85
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500,
3000, 3200
MDS-X32
Double 200 200

50 50
4000 MDN-640
MDN-840
MDN-C40
Double narrow
Double narrow
Double narrow
65
85
100
65
85
100
65
65
65
65
85
100
2000, 2500, 3200, 4000

MDS-840
MDS-C40
MDS-X40
MDD-X40
Double
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
200
85
100
200
200
85
100
100
85
100
50
100
50
5000 MDS-850
MDS-C50
MDS-X50
MDD-X50
Double
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
200
85
100
200
200
85
100
100
85
100
50
100
50
2500, 3200, 4000, 5000

6000 MDS-C60
MDD-X60
Double
Double
100
200
100
200
100
100
100
100
3200, 4000, 5000, 6000

2500, 3200, 4000, 5000
26.1-9
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
011
Magnum MDSX
Fuseless Current Limiting
Magnum MDSX
Magnum MDSX Current Limiting
Power Circuit Breakers have fast
opening contacts to provide
interrupting ratings up to 200 kA
at 508 Vac without fuses. The
interruption performance is current
limiting when the fault currents exceed
the short-time current rating. The self-
protecting fast opening reverse loop
contacts quickly open, clearing the
fault in approximately 1/4 cycle,
reducing energy let-through and arc
ash energy. Below their short-time
current rating, MDSX breakers
coordinate like standard MDS breakers.
Arc ash levels to the downstream
circuit can be reduced by employing
the trip unit instantaneous settings as
well as ground fault, zone interlocking,
and Arcash Reduction Maintenance
System features. MDSX breakers
have the same compact footprint as
standard MDS breakers. MDSX
improves overall operating system
continuity, convenience and life cycle
costs by eliminating fuse trucks, blown
limiter change outs, replacement
limiter inventories and the higher
operating watts loss associated
with fuses.
Figure 26.1-1. Magnum Let-Through Data
1000
100
10
10,000 100,000
I
p
e
a
k

(
k
A
)
M
a
g
n
u
m

L
e
t
-
T
h
r
o
u
g
h

D
a
t
a
I
p
e
a
k
1,000,000
Asymmetrical
Available Peak 15%
PF
MDS-X50 5000A
MDS-X40 4000A
MDS-X32 3200A
MDS-X20 2000A
MDS-X16 1600A
MDS-X12 1200A
Available Fault Circuit Current (Amperes)
26.1-10
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
012
Magnum MDSL
Fused Current Limiting
The following curves illustrate the ratings,
melting time-current characteristics
and current limiting, or let-through
characteristics, of limiters for Magnum
low voltage power circuit breakers.
The let-through current for a given
limiter application is readily determined
by extending a vertical line from the
applicable maximum available sym-
metrical fault amperes at the bottom
margin to the characteristic line for
the particular limiter, and from this
intersection extending a horizontal line
to the left margin and reading the peak
current. The withstand rating of any
circuit elements protected by the
limiters should be at least equal to
this peak current.
It will be noted that the let-through
current increases with the limiter size
or ampere rating; in other words, the
maximum current limiting effect is
obtained with the smallest size. This
effect is to be expected, because the
resistance decreases as the rating
increases. If the vertical line from the
bottom margin as described in the
previous paragraph does not intersect
the limiter characteristic line, the avail-
able system fault current is below the
threshold current of that limiter, and
it will offer no current limiting effect.
The current limiting principle is
illustrated below:
l
a
= The Available Peak Fault Current
t
m
= The Melting Time
I
p
= The Peak Let-Through Current
t
a
= The Arcing Time
t
c
= The Total Interrupting (Clearing)
Time
Figure 26.1-2. Current Limiting
Limiter Selection
The selection of a suitable limiter
rating for a given application is
generally governed by a choice of
the following types of protection:
A. Maximum protection of down-
stream components. Type MDSL
breakers are often used for this
purpose even when the maxi-
mum available fault currents are
within the interrupting rating
of the corresponding unfused
Magnum breakers.
B. Protection of the circuit breaker only.
Case A would tend to use the smallest
available limiter; Case B the largest.
When downstream protection is
required, the selection is usually
a compromise, because certain small
limiters cannot be coordinated with
the breaker to avoid nuisance blowing
on overloads or small and moderate
short circuits.
Minimum, recommended and
maximum limiter sizes for Magnum
MDSL breakers are given in the
table below.
Table 26.1-3. Magnum MDSL Ratings
Table 26.1-4. Magnum MDSL Sensor/Rating Plug vs.Current Limiter Selection
Select the current limiter based on the Magnum breaker frame and current sensor and rating plug as shown.
Refer to MDSL current limiter curves for let-through and time characteristics.
The recommended ratings shown as shaded provide for reduced current let-through and breaker coordination within the trip unit settings.
Selection of current limiters below the recommended ratings shown provides lower current let-through; however, trip unit settings must be
considered to avoid nuisance operation.
Ia
Ip
tc
tm ta
Frame Available Sensor/
Rating Plug (Amperes)
Catalog
Number
800 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800 MDSL08
1600 200, 250, 300, 400, 600,
800, 1000, 1200, 1600
MDSL16
2000 1600, 2000 MDSL20
Sensor and
Rating Plug I
n
MDSL Current Limiter Selection Chart
200 MA250 MA300 MA400 MA600
MA800 MB1200 MB1600 MB2000 MD2500 MD3000

250 MA400 MA600 MA800
MB1200 MB1600 MB2000 MD2500 MD3000

300 MA400 MA600 MA800
MB1200 MB1600 MB2000 MD2500 MD3000

400 MA600 MA800 MB1200
MB1600 MB2000 MD2500 MD3000

600 MA800 MB1200 MB1600 MB2000
MD2500 MD3000
800 MB1200 MB1600 MB2000 MD2500
MD3000
1000 MB1600 MB2000 MD2500
MD3000
1200 MB2000 MD2500
MD3000
1600 MD3000
2000 MD3000

26.1-11
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
013
Figure 26.1-3. Type Magnum DSL Limiters, Peak Let-Through
Current Characteristics
Figure 26.1-4. Type Magnum DSL Limiters Average Melting
Time-Current Characteristics
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
.9
.8
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.05
.04
.03
.02
1
0
0
2
0
0
3
0
0
4
0
0
5
0
0
6
0
0
7
0
0
8
0
0
9
0
0
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
9
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
9
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
P
e
a
k

I
n
s
t
a
n
t
a
n
e
o
u
s

L
e
t
-
T
h
r
o
u
g
h

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

i
n

K
i
l
o

A
m
p
e
r
e
s

X

1
0
MD3000
MD2500
MD2000
MD1600
MD1200
MA800
MA600
MA400
MA300
MA250
Available Current, rms Symmetrical Amperes x 10
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
.9
.8
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.09
.08
.07
.06
.05
.04
.03
.02
.01
1 2 3 4

6 7 8 910 2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
0
8
0
9
0
1
0
0
2
0
0
3
0
0
4
0
0
5
0
0
6
0
0
7
0
0
8
0
0
9
0
0
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
9
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
5
T
i
m
e

i
n

S
e
c
o
n
d
s
MA250
MA300
MA400
MA500
MA800
MB1200
MB1600
MB2000
MB2500
MB3000
Current in Amperes x 100
26.1-12
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers
014
Magnum SB
Low Voltage Insulated-Case
Circuit Breakers
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated-Case
Circuit Breakers are Designed for the
Performance and Economic Requirements
of UL 891 Switchboards
Typical Magnum SB Low Voltage
Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker Nameplate
Magnum SB is a low voltage insulated-
case circuit breaker family designed
for the performance and economic
requirements of UL 891 switchboards.
breakers have Interruption ratings
up to 100 kA at 635 Vac with contin-
uous current ratings up to 6000A
breakers have lighter-duty short-
time current ratings and xed
internal instantaneous trips on
most ratings, which is characteristic
of UL 489 molded-case breakers
commonly used in UL 891 switch-
boards. This provides for greater
economy and excellent coordination
and selectivity for most commercial
applications
Fixed internal instantaneous trips
are included on all SB insulated-case
circuit breakers rated 3200A and
below to provide an extra safety
factor by reducing the energy let-
through to downstream circuits at
the maximum instantaneous trip
point and to facilitate feeder circuit
breaker protection in UL 891 switch-
boards with 3-cycle bus bracing
Magnum SBSE current limiting
power circuit breakers have 150 kA
interrupting ratings at 480 Vac with
continuous current ratings up to
5000A. The short-time current rating
is 30 kA for standard frame and
50 kA for double frame breakers
UL and ANSI Test Certications
Magnum SB meets or exceeds the
applicable ANSI, NEMA, UL and CSA
standards, including:
ANSI C37.13 (low voltage AC power
circuit breakers used in enclosures)
related requirements, and
used in enclosures)
NEMA SG3 (this standard adopts
ANSI C37.16 in its entirety)
Comprehensive
Enclosure Solutions
Magnum SB has proven performance
in Eaton manufactured switchboards
with the following test certications:
UL 891 (Drawout Magnum SB
and Pow-R-Line C low voltage
switchboards)
UL, CSA 22.2.31 low voltage
assemblies
Approvals
UL listed: Magnum SB breaker
UL File E52096 and cassette
UL File E204565
26.1-13
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Magnum SB Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers
015
Magnum SB Switchboard Class Insulated-Case
Magnum SB Low Voltage Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker Family UL Rated for Switchboard Applications
Table 26.1-5. Magnum SB Switchboard Class Insulated-Case Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers
Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are
equal to the published short-time withstand rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation,
a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for
short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between
the two periods.
Magnum SBSE Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker with fast opening contacts.

Note: Magnum SB is UL 1066 listed.
Frame
Amperes
Breaker Type
Catalog
Number
Frame
Type

Rating Plugs for Digitrip
Breaker I
n
Rating)
Interrupting
at 254 Vac
Interrupting
at 508 Vac
Interrupting
at 635 Vac
Short-Time
Withstand Rating
Fixed Internal
Instantaneous Trip
800 SBN-508
SBN-608
SBN-C08
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
50
65
100
50
65
100
35
42
65
20
20
20
18 x I
n
18 x I
n
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800
SBS-608
SBS-C08
Standard
Standard
65
100
65
100
65
85
20
20
18 x I
n
18 x I
n
1200 SBN-512
SBN-612
SBN-C12
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
50
65
100
50
65
100
35
42
65
25
25
25
18 x I
n
18 x I
n
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200
SBS-612
SBS-C12
SBS-E12
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
100
200
65
100
150
65
85
25
25
30
18 x I
n
18 x I
n
30
1600 SBN-516
SBN-616
SBN-C16
Narrow
Narrow
Narrow
50
65
100
50
65
100
35
42
65
30
30
30
18 x I
n
18 x I
n
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600
SBS-616
SBS-C16
SBS-E16
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
100
200
65
100
150
65
85
30
30
30
18 x I
n
18 x I
n
30
2000 SBN-620
SBN-C20
Narrow
Narrow
65
100
65
100
65
65
35
35
18 x I
n
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
SBS-620
SBS-C20
SBS-E20
Standard
Standard
Standard
65
100
200
65
100
150
65
85
35
35
30
18 x I
n
18 x I
n
30
2500 SBS-625
SBS-C25
Standard
Standard
65
100
65
100
65
85
45
45
18 x I
n
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500
SBS-E25
Double 200 150

50 50
3000 SBS-630
SBS-C30
Standard
Standard
65
100
65
100
65
85
50
50
18 x I
n
18 x I
n
200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3000
SBS-E30
Double 200 150

50 50
4000 SBS-840
SBS-C40
SBS-E40
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
85
100
150
85
100
85
100
50
18 x I
n
18 x I
n
50
2000, 2500, 3000, 4000
5000 SBS-850
SBS-C50
SBS-E50
Double
Double
Double
85
100
200
85
100
150
85
100
85
100
50
18 x I
n
18 x I
n
50
2500, 3000, 4000, 5000
6000 SBS-C60
Double 100 100 100 100 18 x I

n
3000, 4000, 5000, 6000
26.1-14
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Breaker-Mounted Options
Magnum DS and SB Breaker-Mounted Options
016
Breaker-Mounted Options
Magnum breakers are available with
a comprehensive array of factory-
installed breaker options to enable
congured-to-order solutions for
specied customer requirements.
Field option kits are available to
provide easy service, modication
and customization of the breaker at
the point of use.
Shunt trip device (ST). Provides
breaker opening when energized
by a rated voltage input
Spring charge motor (MOT).
Charges the breaker closing springs
automatically, facilitating remote or
local closing. The motor assembly
includes its own cut-off switch
that changes state at the end of the
charging cycle. This contact can be
wired out for external indication
Spring release device (SR).
Provides for remote electrically
controlled breaker closing when
its coils are energized by a rated
voltage input
Undervoltage release (UVR).
Trips the breaker when an existing
voltage signal is lost or falls
below an established threshold
Auxiliary switch. Up to 6a/6b
auxiliary individual dedicated
contacts are available for customer
use to indicate if the breaker is in
the OPEN or CLOSE position
Mechanical trip indicator ag
.
The red trip indicator ag pops out
to provide local visual indication
when the Digitrip RMS trip unit
acts to trip the breaker on an
overcurrent condition. Available
in two options: an interlocked
version that mechanically
locks out the breaker until the
indicator is manually reset and
a non-interlocked version for
indication only
Bell alarm/overcurrent trip switch

(OTS). Provides two Form C con-
tacts that change state when the
Digitrip RMS trip unit acts to trip the
breaker. The contacts are available
for external indication or customer
use and are manually reset by the
mechanical trip indicator
Padlockable pushbutton cover.
Permits padlocking hinged cover
plates to block access to the PUSH
ON and PUSH OFF buttons on the
breaker faceplate
Mechanical operations counter.
Records mechanical operations of
the breaker over its installed life
Key off lock provisions. Enables
mounting of a single cylinder Kirk
,
Castell or Ronis Key Lock to lock the
breaker in the OPEN position
Latch check switch. Provides one
Form C contact that changes state
when the breaker is ready to close.
Can be wired to the spring release
device for fast transfer applications
or wired for external ready-to-close
indication
Shunt Trip, Spring Release and
Undervoltage Release Device
Installed on Accessory Deck
Auxiliary Switches Come in Modular 2a/2b
Contact Stages Providing up to 6a/6b
Dedicated Contacts
Mechanical Trip Indicator with
Bell Alarm (OTS) Switches Mounted
For the Digitrip RMS 1150+ trip unit, other

protective functions, if programmed, will
cause the OTS and mechanical trip indicator
ag to operate.
26.1-15
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Microprocessor Trip Units
General DescriptionMagnum DS and SB Trip Units
017
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit Family
for Magnum Circuit Breakers
The Magnum family of Digitrip RMS
trip units consists of four trip unit
models, each providing increasing
levels of features and options to
enable the ultimate selection to
match application requirements for
protection, coordination, information,
diagnostics and communication:
Digitrip RMS 520
Digitrip RMS 520M
Digitrip RMS 520MC
Digitrip RMS 1150+
Common Trip Unit Features
A summary of the important features
common to all Magnum trip units is
as follows:
Microprocessor-based true
rms sensing
Discrete rotary or programmable
settings
Unit status LED (green)
Cause of trip LEDs (red)
Battery check LED (green)
Reset/battery test pushbutton
Thermal memory
Over-temperature protective trip
Zone selective interlocking (ZSI)
provisions
Rating plug receptacle
Backup battery for cause of
trip LEDs
Test kit receptacle with cover
Plug-in mounting for easy
replacement
Clear plastic cover (sealable)
Digitrip RMS trip units are highly
accurate microprocessor-based
protective devices that use a sampling
algorithm to compute true rms values
for precise system coordination and
metering. The trip unit is completely
self-contained and requires no
external control power to perform
its overcurrent protective functions
because the power to operate the
trip unit is derived from the primary
current passing through the current
sensors. When the trip unit is operat-
ing, the green unit status LED begins
to blink like a heartbeat to visibly
conrm the microprocessor is
powered up.
The trip unit overcurrent protective
pickup settings are a function of the
breaker In rating, which is established
by the rating plug and current sensors.
When preset conditions are exceeded,
the trip unit initiates a trip signal to
the trip actuator, tripping the circuit
breaker. Red cause-of-trip LEDs light
up to indicate the cause of trip,
powered by a easily replaceable
backup battery located behind the
rating plug. The LED will ash to
save power, until the trip unit reset
button is depressed.
All trip units include three important
self-protecting safety features that are
provided as standard:
Making Current Release (MCR):
employs a fast-acting analog instanta-
neous trip that prevents the breaker
from closing and latching on a fault
when the peak current exceeds 25 x
the breaker I
n
rating. This reduces arc
ash energy during breaker closing for
faults within the self-protecting range.
The MCR is enabled for the rst two
cycles following the circuit breaker
closing operation and thereafter,
depending on the type of Magnum
breaker applied, becomes inactive.
Over-Temperature Protective Trip:
automatically trips the breaker when
the temperature inside the trip unit
exceeds 85C, which indicates that
there are signicantly higher
temperatures within enclosure.
Thermal Memory: provides over-
temperature protection on load circuits
against effects of repeated overload
conditions. This feature is defeatable
for special applications such as
welding and primary injection testing.
Trip Units
Eatons electrical sector introduced the
rst microprocessor-based trip unit
and has advanced the technology
into a new family of UL and CSA
listed Digitrip RMS electronic and
programmable trip units designed
and engineered exclusively for
Magnum DS breakers.
Digitrip RMS 520 enables the
user as many as nine phase and
ground current protection settings
for maximum exibility in trip-
curve shaping and multi-unit
coordination, and adds ground
current protection settings
Digitrip RMS 520M adds phase,
neutral and ground current
metering with a four-character
LCD display window
Digitrip RMS 520MC adds
communication of current values
and breaker status (open, closed,
tripped), and Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System for arc ash
reduction
Programmable Trip Units
Digitrip RMS 1150+ provides
programmability for more
sophisticated distribution systems
Increased protection and
coordination capabilities
Systems monitoring information
including power factor, voltage,
current, harmonic distortion
values and waveform capture
with a bright three-line, (eight
characters per line) LED display
Two programmable contacts for
customer use
Time and date stamping of trip
events for improved trouble-
shooting and diagnostics
Accuracy of 1% on current and
voltage values and 2% on energy
and power
Systems diagnostic information
and breaker health menu
Communications
System for arc ash reduction
Magnum 520MC Trip Unit with
System, Four-Digit LCD Display and
Ampere-Based Communications
26.1-16
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
018
Magnum 1150+ Trip Unit with Arcash
Reduction Maintenance System, 24-Digit
LED Display, Programmable Protection,
Alarms and Relaying, Power Metering,
Power Quality and Alarms, Waveform
Capture, Communications and Breaker
Health Monitoring
Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System
System Maintenance Mode function
of the Digitrip 520MC and 1150+ can
reduce arc ash incident energy that
is generated on a fault condition. This
is accomplished by an analog trip
circuit that, when armed, provides a
fast-acting response to the fault. This
is separate from the normal system
protection setting of instantaneous.
Eatons Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System employs a
separate, dedicated analog trip
circuit that eliminates microprocessor
latencies, resulting in clearing times
that are faster than standard instanta-
neous tripping. This provides superior
arc ash reduction to competitors
systems that simply lower the standard
instantaneous pickup set point.
There are three ways to arm the
Maintenance Mode Arcash
Reduction Maintenance System
setting. One method is locally at the
trip unit front panel. For the 520MC, the
two-position switch in the Maintenance
Mode section of the trip unit is used.
Turning the switch to the ON position
will arm the setting. For the 1150+, the
local front keypad is used to enable the
Maintenance Mode setting. The setting
is located in the SYSTEM submenu of
programmable settings (PGM SET).
For the second method of arming the
Maintenance Mode function, a remote
switch wired through the breaker
secondary contacts can remotely
arm the Maintenace Mode setting. A
high-quality gold-plated or palladium
contact is required in this application.
A third method to arm the
Maintenance Mode setting is via
a communication device. There is
a conrmation screen that veries
the arming. A BIM (Breaker Interface
Module) or Power Xpert
system
are communication methods to arm
the setting.
System setting has ve unique settings
(2.5, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0 x I
n
). To adjust this
setting, a rotary switch on the trip unit
face is provided for the 520MC while the
1150+ trip unit uses its local keypad.
For all three arming methods, the
520MC provides a blue LED to conrm
the Maintenance Mode function is on.
In addition, there is also a normally
open breaker contact that allows the
user to wire in an external stacklight or
annunciator for remote indication. For
the 1150+, the message Maintenance
Mode Enabled will be shown on its
LED display. The 1150+ also has an
alarm relay that can be programmed
to track the Maintenance Mode state.
The maintenance mode function will
provide fast tripping even when the
regular Instantaneous is set to OFF.
The instantaneous LED position is
also used to indicate a trip initiated
by the Maintenance Mode setting.
The 520MC LCD display, if powered,
will indicate with four dashes while
the 1150+ will display the message
Maintenance Mode Trip.
Figure 26.1-5. Arcash Reduction Maintenance SystemTypical Time Current Curve with
Maintenance Mode
Time
Current
0 10 2.5 to 10
Times In
40 msec
Maintenance
Mode
Total Clearing Time
40 msec
Optional
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
Total Clearing Time
60 to 75 msec
LDT @ 6X Ir
Typical 2 to 20 Sec
SDPV = 2 to 10 Times Ir
SDT
Typical 0.1, 0.2,
0.3, 0.4, 0.5 Sec
LDPU
Typical In x 0.4 to 1.0
Typical at 480V, 60 Hz
In = Rating Plug/Sensor Rating
Ir n
60 to 75 msec
Maintenance Mode
26.1-17
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
019
Figure 26.1-6. Maintenance Mode Wiring Digitrip 520MC
Control
Voltage
4
5
L
Remote
Indicator
(BlueLight)
Communication wiring to BIM,
MODBUS MINT or Power Xpert
computer. This can activate
Maintenance Mode if desired.
Remote Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System Switch
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance
System Switch
Alternate Customer
Wiring (Partial)
Magnum Breaker (with MM wiring)
7
7
3
6 1
3
1
2
B7 A12
B7 A12
A15 A14 A9
A10 B1 B2
The Digitrip 520MC (Cat 5ARMxxx) can locally be placed in Maintenance Mode via a two-position switch located on the trip unit. The function can
also be armed via a remote switch as shown. In addition, the function can be activated via communications. A blue LED on the Digitrip veries
the Digitrip is in Maintenance Mode.
The recommended selector switch for this low voltage application is Eaton part number 10250T1333-2E, which includes a contact block rated for
logic level and corrosive use.
The maximum length of this wiring to remote Arcash Reduction Maintenance System switch (or alternate relay contact) is 9.78 ft (3m). Use
#20 AWG wire or larger.
Control voltage is 120 Vac or 230 Vac or 2448 Vdc or 125 Vdc. Check Magnum circuit breaker front cover for trip unit power requirements.
A remote stack light, annunciator panel or other remote indication device can be connected to verify that the Digitrip is in Maintenance Mode.
Relay in (GF alarm/PS module) makes when in Maintenance Mode. Contact is rated 1A at 120 Vac or 0.5A at 230 Vac or 1A at 2448 Vdc and
0.35A at 125 Vdc.
The Digitrip 520MC can also be placed remotely in its Maintenance Mode via a general purpose relayice cube type with logic level contacts
activated by remote control switch. A recommended type is IDEC Relay RY22. Choose voltage as desired.
26.1-18
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
020
Digitrip 520 Trip Unit
Digitrip 520 Trip Unit with
Basic Overcurrent Protection
The Digitrip 520 is a simple basic
trip unit with three available types
of protection (LI, LSI and LSIG).
Up to nine rotary-type current and
time settings provide for maximum
exibility in curve-shaping and
multi-unit coordination.
The Instantaneous function (I)
includes an off position setting
when Short Time (S) protection is
provided to increase application
exibility in the eld
I
2
t time delay settings for better
curve shaping when Short Time (S)
and Ground Fault (G) protective
functions are selected
Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI)
provided when Short Time (S)
and/or Ground Fault (G) protective
functions are selected. ZSI provides
hard-wired positive system coordi-
nation, allowing the breaker closest
to the fault to trip rst, thus avoiding
unnecessary and costly system
downtime. ZSI is a useful method
to reduce arc ash
Digitrip 520M Trip Unit
Digitrip 520M Trip Unit with Four-Digit
LCD Display and Ampere-based Metering,
Alarms and System Diagnostics
The Digitrip 520M is available with
three types of protection (LSI, LSIG
and LSIA) and includes the following
added features:
Four-digit LCD display with a step
pushbutton to scroll through the
display data, including ampere-
based metering of phase, neutral
and ground currents, plus
operational and cause-of-trip
diagnostic information
When specied, the Power Relay
Module (PRM) is supplied to
perform the following features:
Power up the trip unit display
from an external customer
supplied source through the
breaker secondary contacts to
retain the cause-of-trip and
magnitude of trip information
Provide relay contact for remote
indication of overload (LSI) or
ground trip (LSIG) or ground
alarm (LSIA)
Type LSIA units alarm only when
ground fault settings are exceeded,
which is quite useful in critical
power applications
Plug receptacle for auxiliary power
module to power up the trip unit
display during bench testing remote
from the switchgear
Digitrip 520MC Trip Unit
Digitrip 520MC Trip Unit With
System, Four-Digit LCD Display
and Ampere-based Communications
The Digitrip 520MC is available in
three types of protection (LSI, LSIG
and LSIA) and includes the following
enhancements:
Communications of ampere-based
data, breaker status and cause-of-
trip information using the INCOM
communications system. Each trip
unit has a unique hexadecimal
address (001 to 999) set by rotary
switches. A red transmit LED is
provided to conrm communica-
tions activity. Peripheral translator
devices are available to convert
INCOM to other protocols like
Modbus, Ethernet and so on
System allows the operator to enable
a special trip unit maintenance
mode with a preset accelerated
instantaneous override trip that can
reduce arc ash energy up to 30%.
This accelerated tripping results
in total clearing times that are
faster than standard instantaneous
tripping. The arc ash reduction level
is preset at the trip unit using a ve-
position switch that facilitates the
maximum arc ash reduction setting
possible while avoiding nuisance
tripping. The Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System can be turned
on locally at the trip unit, remotely
using peripheral devices, or via
communications. A blue LED
provides local indication the trip unit
is in the Maintenance Mode. Remote
indication can be accomplished by
a dedicated trip unit contact for use
with a stack light or annunciator
panel, or via communications
26.1-19
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General DescriptionMagnum DS and SB Digitrip Trip Units
021
Digitrip 1150+ Trip Unit
Digitrip 1150+ Trip Unit
The Digitrip 1150+ trip unit is a highly
advanced programmable protective
device available in three types of
protection (LSI, LSIG and LSIA).
The following is a rst level summary
of the special features and options:
24-character LED digital display
easily visible from 50 feet and ideal
for dark equipment environments
Membrane type dust-resistant
keypad pushbuttons to facilitate
local unit programming, including
view functions (Up, Down, ESCape,
SELect and Reset), edit values
(Up, Down and Save) and
battery test
Programmable trip unit settings
and curves including I
2
t and I
4
t
curves, as well as IEEE moderately
inverse, very inverse and extremely
inverse curves
Voltage and power metering
Power quality monitoring and alarm
with THD and waveform capture
Health menuThe health menu
on the Digitrip 1150+ front panel will
provide information on the Magnum
circuit breakers health, as well as
a history of the circuit breaker and
circuit it is protecting. This data is
useful for planning maintenance
and inspection schedules. The type
of data includes the total number of
all instantaneous and short delay
trips seen by the circuit breaker. A
second counter shows the number
of overloads (LDT) and ground
faults (GFT) encountered while in
service. The OP count provides data
on the number of close operations
experienced by the circuit breaker.
The last time the circuit breaker was
operated (open or closed or tripped)
is viewable with time and date
displayed. Also included is the
maximum temperature in degrees
Centigrade as seen by the Digitrip
microprocessor CHip. The capture
of the data requires external
trip unit power. This data, once
captured, is stored in non-volatile
memory. These features are avail-
able for remote communications
Programmable alarm contacts or
trip contacts
including undervoltage, overvoltage,
underfrequency, overfrequency,
reverse power, voltage unbalance
and phase rotation
Communications of comprehensive
access to trip unit capabilities
including programmable settings,
breaker control, metering, alarm,
status, relaying and diagnostic
information. Peripheral translator
devices are available to convert
INCOM to other protocols like
Modbus, Ethernet and so on
Accessory bus for use with
peripheral digital relay modules
that can be programmed through
the trip unit keypad for additional
auxiliary and various alarm contacts
System allows the operator to enable
a special trip unit Maintenance
Mode with a preset accelerated
instantaneous override trip that can
reduce arc ash energy up to 30%.
This accelerated tripping results in
total clearing times that are faster
than standard instantaneous
tripping. The arc ash reduction
level is preset at the trip unit for the
maximum arc ash reduction setting
possible, while avoiding nuisance
tripping. The Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System can be turned
on locally at the trip unit, remotely
using peripheral devices, or via
communications. The display
provides local indication the trip unit
is in the Maintenance Mode. Remote
indication can be accomplished by
a dedicated trip unit contact for use
with a stack light or annunciator
panel, or via communications
26.1-20
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Selection GuideMagnum DS and SB Digitrip Trip Units
022
Table 26.1-6. Digitrip Trip Units for Magnum DS and SB ANSI/UL Rated Power Circuit Breakers
Over and undervoltage alarm or trip, over

and underfrequency alarm or trip, voltage
unbalance alarm or trip, reverse power trip,
and phase rotation alarm are included.
1200A maximum ground fault setting per

UL/NEC

Legend: I
n
I
r
Trip Unit Type Digitrip 520 Digitrip 520M Digitrip 520MC Digitrip 1150+
Ampere range
rms sensing
2006000A
42200 kA
Yes
2006000A
42200 kA
Yes
2006000A
42200 kA
Yes
2006000A
42200 kA
Yes
Protection Ordering options
n
)
LI, LSI, LSIG
Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA
Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA
Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA
Yes
Yes
Long
delay
protection
(L)
Long delay pickup
Long delay time I
2
t at 6 x I
r
Long delay time I
4
t

IEEE curves
0.41.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
No
No
0.41.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
No
No
0.41.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
No
No
0.41.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
15 seconds
Yes
High load alarm
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
0.51.0 x (I
r
)
Short
delay
protection
(S)
Short delay pickup
Short delay time I
2
t at 8 x I
r

Short delay time at
2001000% x (I
r
) and M1
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
2001000% x (I
r
) and M1
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
2001000% x (I
r
) and M1
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
2001000% x (I
r
) and M1
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes
Instanta-
neous
protection
(I)
Off position
2001000% x (I
n
) and M1
Yes
LSI and LSIG
2001000% x (I
n
) and M1
Yes
Yes
2001000% x (I
n
) and M1
Yes
Yes
2001000% x (I
n
) and M1
Yes
Yes
Ground
fault
protection
(G)
Ground fault alarm

Ground fault pickup
2
t at 0.625 x I
n
No
25100% x (I
n
)
100500 ms
Yes
25100% x (I
n
)
100500 ms
Yes
25100% x (I
n
)
100500 ms
Yes
24100% x (I
n
)
100500 ms
Ground fault ZSI
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
Disable ground fault protection No No No No
Neutral protection (N) Model LSI Model LSI Model LSI Model LSI
System Diagnostics
Cause-of-trip LEDs
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
System Monitoring
Digital display
Current (% ) full scale sensor
No
No
4-character LCD
Yes 2%
4-character LCD
Yes 2%
24-character LED
Yes 1%
Voltage (%) L to L
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes 1%
Yes 2%
Yes
Reactive power kVAR
Power factor
Crest factor
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Type
Power supply in breaker
No
N/A
No
Optional
INCOM
Standard
INCOM/TripLink
Standard
Additional Features
Trip log (three events)
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Testing method
Waveform capture
Test set
No
Test set
No
Test set
No
Yes
Protective relay functions
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes

26.1-21
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Technical and Application Data
023
Time-Current Curve Shaping
Figure 26.1-7. Time-Current Curve Shaping
Note: See selection guide charts for
availability of adjustments.
Long Delay (L)
1. Long Delay Pickup
Determines the continuous
ampere rating of the breaker.
2. Long Delay Time
Determines the amount of time
the breaker will carry a low level
overload before tripping.
a. I
2
t Response
I
2
t in: For coordination with other
circuit breakers with electronic
trip devices and for coordination
with thermal-magnetic
circuit breakers.
b. I
4
t Response
I
4
t in: For coordination with
fuses and upstream trans-
former damage curves.
Short Delay (S)
3. Short Delay Pickup
Determine or set the level of fault
current at which the short-time
trip delay countdown is actuated.
4. Short Delay
Sets the amount of time the breaker
will carry both a low level and high
fault currents before tripping.
a. Flat Response
I
2
t out: For coordination with
other circuit breakers with
electronic trip devices.
b. I
2
t Response
I
2
t in: For coordination with fuses
and thermal-magnetic breakers.
7B
7A
6
T
i
m
e
5
1
4B
4A
2A
2B
2
3
Current in Multiples
4
7
Instantaneous (I)
5. Instantaneous Pickup
Determines the level of fault
current that will actuate a trip with
no time delay.
Ground Fault (G)
6. Ground Fault Pickup
current at which the ground fault
7. Ground Fault Delay
the breaker will carry a ground
fault before tripping.
a. Flat Response
I
2
electronic ground fault settings.
b. I
2
t Response
I
2
zero sequence ground fault
relays, fuses and thermal-
magnetic breakers.
Feeder BreakersGeneral
Circuit breakers for feeder circuit
protection may be manually or
electrically operated, with long
and short delay or long delay and
instantaneous type trip devices,
and trip settings, as required for the
specic circuit and load requirements.
General purpose feeder breakers, such as
for lighting circuits, are usually equipped
with long delay and short delay trip
devices, with the long delay pickup set
for the maximum load demand in the
circuit. Where arcing fault protection
is required, add instantaneous trip
with setting as low as practicable
consistent with inrush requirements.
As an option, the Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System can be selected
for increased arc ash protection
during maintenance.
Motor Starting Feeder Breakers
These breakers are usually electrically
operated, with long delay, short
delay and instantaneous tripping
characteristics for motor running,
locked rotor and fault protection.
The breaker sensor rating should be
chosen so that the long delay pickup
can be set at 125% of motor full load
current for motors with a 1.15 service
factor, or at 115% for all other motors.
Contactors are recommended for this
application when circuit breaker duty
cycle is exceeded.
Repetitive Duty
Repetitive breaker opening and
closing, such as in frequent motor
starting and stopping, are covered
by ANSI standards C37.13 and C37.16.
These standards list the number
of operations between servicing
(adjusting, cleaning, lubrication,
tightening and so on) and the total
numbers of operations under
various conditions without requiring
replacement of parts, for the various
breaker frame sizes.
For motor starting duty, with closing
starting currents up to 600% and opening
running currents up to 100% of the
breaker frame size, at 80% power
factor or higher, the endurance or
total operations (not requiring parts
replacement) will be as follows:
800A Frame: 1400 operations
1600A Frame: 400 operations
The frequency of operation should not
exceed 20 starts in 10 minutes or 30 in
one hour.
Group Motor Feeder Breakers
Typical loads for such circuits are motor
control centers. The feeder breakers
may be either manually or electrically
operated as preferred, and are usually
equipped with long and short delay trip
protection only for coordination with
the individual motor circuit devices.
The minimum long delay pickup setting
should be 115% of the running current
of the largest motor in the group, plus
the sum of the running circuits of all
other motors.
26.1-22
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Technical and Application Data
024
Zone selective interlocking provides
positive system coordination by allowing
the breaker closest to the fault to trip
without any preset time delays. This is
achieved by setting up the distribution
system as shown in Figure 26.1-8.
The hardwired connection between
the trip units sends a restraining signal
upstream, allowing the breaker closest
to the fault to act instantaneously. Zone
selective interlocking also reduces
stress on the distribution system by
isolating faults without time delays.
By denition, a selectively coordinated
system is one where by adjusting trip
unit pickup and time delay settings, the
circuit breaker closest to the fault trips
rst. The upstream breaker serves two
functions: (1) backup protection to the
downstream breaker and (2) protection
of the conductors between the upstream
and downstream breakers. These
elements are provided for on Digitrip
trip units.
For faults that occur on the conductors
between the upstream and down-
stream breakers, it is ideally desirable
for the upstream breaker to trip
with no time delay. This is the
feature provided by zone selective
interlocking. Digitrip trip units include
this option.
Zone selective interlocking is a
communication signal between
trip units applied on upstream and
downstream breakers. Each trip unit
must be applied as if zone selective
interlocking were not employed, and
set for selective coordination.
During fault conditions, each trip unit
that senses the fault sends a restraining
signal to all upstream trip units. This
restraining signal results in causing the
upstream trip to continue timing as it
is set. In the absence of a restraining
signal, the trip unit trips the associated
breaker with no intentional time delay,
minimizing damage to the fault point.
This restraining signal is a very low
level. To minimize the potential for
induced noise, and provide a low
impedance interface between trip
units, twisted pair conductors are
used for interconnection.
Ground fault and short delay pickup
on Digitrip trip units have zone
selective interlocking.
Zone selective interlocking may be
applied as a type of bus differential
protection. It must be recognized;
however, that one must accept the
minimum pickup of the trip unit
for sensitivity.
It must also be recognized that not
all systems may be equipped with
zone selective interlocking. Systems
containing multiple sources, or where
the direction of power ow varies,
require special considerations, or may
not be suitable for this feature. Digitrip
zone interlocking has been tested with
up to three levels with up to 20 trip
units per level.
Figure 26.1-8. Zone Selective Interlocking
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Fault 1
Fault 2
Fault 3
Load
Breaker
Number 1
Breaker
Number 2
Breaker
Number 3
Ground Fault Setting:
300A Pickup
No Time Delay
Zone Selective
Interlocking Wiring
600A Pickup
0.3 Seconds Time Delay
1200A Pickup
Fault 1
There are no interlocking signals. The main breaker trip unit will initiate the
trip instantaneously.
Fault 2
The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate the trip instantaneously to clear the
fault; and Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 1 trip unit. The
Zone 1 trip unit will begin to time out, and in the event that the feeder breaker
in Zone 2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker in Zone 1 will clear the
fault in 0.5 seconds.
Fault 3
The branch breaker trip unit will initiate the trip instantaneously to clear the
fault; and Zone 3 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 2 trip unit; and
Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal to Zone 1.
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip units will begin to time out, and in the event that the
branch breaker in Zone 3 would not clear the fault, the feeder breaker in
Zone 2 will clear the fault in 0.3 seconds. Similarly, in the event that the feeder
breaker in Zone 2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker in Zone 1 will clear
the fault in 0.5 seconds.
26.1-23
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Magnum DS and SB
Technical Data
025
Table 26.1-7. Magnum DS and SB Breaker Control Device Application GuideVdc
Table 26.1-8. Magnum DS and SB Breaker Control Device Application GuideVac
Nominal Voltage
Shunt Trip (ST)
Opening time
Trip circuit
70110%
(required for 35 ms)
Seconds
1726 Vdc
250 watts
35 ms
3453 Vdc
250 watts
35 ms
77138 Vdc
450 watts
35 ms
154275 Vdc
450 watts
35 ms
Spring Release (SR)
Closing time
Close circuit
70110%
(required for 200 ms)
Seconds
1726 Vdc
250 watts
40 ms
3453 Vdc
250 watts
40 ms
77138 Vdc
450 watts
40 ms
154275 Vdc
450 watts
40 ms
Amps (running)
Amps (inrush)
Power consumption
Charging time
85110% voltage
Running
% of running
Seconds
2026 Vdc
12.0A
300%
300 watts
5 sec
4153 Vdc
5.0A
500%
250 watts
5 sec
94138 Vdc
2.0A
600%
250 watts
5 sec
187225 Vdc
1.0A
600%
250 watts
5 sec
Opening time
85110% voltage
3060% voltage
Required for 200 ms
Required for 400 ms
Seconds
2026 Vdc
714 Vdc
250 watts
18 watts
70 ms
2735 Vdc
1019 Vdc
275 watts
15 watts
70 ms
4153 Vdc
1429 Vdc
275 watts
18 watts
70 ms
94138 Vdc
3375 Vdc
450 watts
10 watts
70 ms
187275 Vdc
66150 Vdc
450 watts
10 watts
70 ms
Auxiliary Switches
Minimum load
Contact rating Inductive load 0.5A
0.5A 0.5A 0.25A

Nominal Voltage
Shunt Trip (ST)
Opening time
Trip circuit
70110%
Seconds
77140 Vac
450 VA
35 ms
146264 Vac
450 VA
35 ms

Spring Release (SR)
Closing time
Close circuit
70110%
Seconds
77140 Vac
450 VA
40 ms
146264 Vac
450 VA
40 ms

Amps (running)
Amps (inrush)
Power consumption
Charging time
85110% voltage
Running
% of running
Seconds
93140 Vac
2.0A
600%
250 VA
5 sec
177264 Vac
1.0A
600%
250 VA
5 sec

Opening time
85110% voltage
3060% voltage
Required for 200 ms
Required for 400 ms
Seconds
94140 Vac
3376 Vac
450 VA
10 VA
70 ms
177264 Vac
62144 Vac
400 VA
10 VA
70 ms
323457 Vac
114249 Vac
480 VA
10 VA
70 ms
408528 Vac
144288 Vac
400 VA
10 VA
70 ms
510660 Vac
180360 Vac
400 VA
10 VA
70 ms
Auxiliary Switches
Minimum load
Contact rating Inductive load 10A 10A

26.1-24
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Magnum DS and SB
Technical Data
026
Figure 26.1-9. Typical Magnum Breaker Control Circuit Diagram
Figure 26.1-10. Typical Magnum Secondary Terminal Block Connection Diagram
Control
Power
Close
B12
Lever
in Door
Switch
(Draw-
out Only)
L.S. b.
a.
a.
OTS 1*
OTS 2*
B15 B26
MDSEOBKR
B10 B24 A7
B13 B14 B27 B11 B25 A8
A1 A2 A3
A4 A5 A6
Open Open G R
SR
MOT
UVR ST
Legend:
LS Limit Switch for Closing Spring
MOT Motor for Spring Charging
ST Shunt Trip
SR Spring Release
UVR Undervoltage Release
OTS Overcurrent Trip Switch
Description of Operation:
1 Motor is energized through
LS contact.
2 Motor runs and charges closing
spring.
3 When closing spring is fully charged,
LS contacts change state.
4 Close contacts energize SR coil.
5 When breaker closes, b opens.
6 LS contacts change state and motor
recharges closing springs.
* Contacts shown for breaker open (not fully
charged), not tripped.
Dotted line denotes Magnum Breaker.

Continuous Duty Shunt Trip also available

that eliminates the requirement for the
a contact cutout switch.
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

ONO OC UVR ONOONO OC ONO UVR ALL ALC AL ICL
UVR ATR OTS OTS ATR
ATR ATR
INCOM
CLOSE
INPUT
A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30
MLSACN NO NC ACP NO NC NO NO NC NC NO NO NC NC
SPRING
CHARGE
STATUS
ACCESSARY
BUS
COMMUN-
ICATIONS
BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACTS
(SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION)
B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30
NO NC NO NO NO NO NC NC NC NO NC NC LCO LC LNC
BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACTS
(SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN OPEN POSITION)
LATCH
CHECK
SWITCH
CELL SWITCH CONTACTS
(SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN WITHDRAWN POSITION)
C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12
CNC CC CNOCNC CC CNO
CELL SWITCH CONTACTS
(SHOWN WITH BREAKER IN WITHDRAWN POSITION)
CNC CC CNOCNC CC CNO
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
INCOM NEG
POWER
INPUT
NEUTRAL
SENSOR
INPUT
SOURCE
GROUND
INPUT
ZONE
INTER-
LOCKING
SHUNT
TRIP
SPRING
RELEASE
MOTOR
COM IN OUT
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15
IP IN NPW N2 N1 SGF ZC ZI ZO ST ST SR SR
M M
26.1-25
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Magnum DS and SB
Application Data
027
Applications
Transformer Main
Secondary Breakers
Transformer secondary breakers are
required or recommended for one or
more of the following purposes:
1. To provide a one-step means
of removing all load from the
transformer.
2. To provide transformer overload
protection in the absence of an
individual primary breaker, and/or
when primary fuses are used.
3. To provide the fastest clearing of
a short circuit in the secondary
main bus.
4. To provide a local disconnecting
means, in the absence of a local
primary switch or breaker, for
maintenance purposes.
5. For automatic or manual transfer
of loads to alternate sources, as in
double-ended secondary selective
unit substations.
6. For simplifying key interlocking
with primary interrupter switches.
7. To satisfy NEC service entrance
requirements when more than
six feeder breakers are required.
Main secondary breakers must have
adequate interrupting and continuous
current ratings. They should be able
to carry continuously not only the
anticipated maximum continuous
output of the transformer, but also
any temporary overloads.
For a fully selective system,
instantaneous protection on main
breakers should be defeated, as they
typically cannot be coordinated with
downstream devices.
Maximum capabilities of transformers
of various types, can be found in Tab 14
It will be noted that the maximum rat-
ings will often require the substitution
of larger frame main breakers than
those listed in the tables. Even if a self-
cooled transformer only is considered,
it should be remembered that with
ratings of 750 kVA and higher, provision
for the future addition of cooling fans
is automatically included. It is recom-
mended that the main breaker have
sufcient capacity for the future
fan-cooled rating, plus an allowance
for overloads, if possible, particularly
because load growth cannot always
be predicted.
The same considerations should be
given to the main bus capacities and
main current transformer ratios.
Bus Sectionalizing (Tie) Breakers
The minimum recommended
continuous current rating of bus
sectionalizing or tie breakers, as used
in double-ended secondary selective
unit sub-stations, or for connecting
two single-ended substations, is one-
half that of the associated main break-
ers. It is common practice to select
the tie breaker of the next frame size
below that of the main breakers.
However, many users and engineers
prefer that the tie breaker be identical
to and interchangeable with the
main breakers, so that under normal
conditions it will be available as a
spare main breaker.
In general, the tie breaker, like the
main breaker, trip unit should have
its instantaneous tripping defeated.
Generator Breakers
In most applications where generators
are connected through breakers to
the secondary bus, they are used as
emergency standby sources only, and
are not synchronized or paralleled
with the unit substation transformers.
Under these conditions, the interrupt-
ing rating of the generator breaker will
be based solely on the generator kVA
and sub-transient reactance. This
reactance varies with the generator
type and rpm, from a minimum of
approximately 9% for a two-pole
3600 rpm turbine driven generator
to 15% or 20% or more for a medium
or slow speed engine type generator.
Thus the feeder breakers selected
for the unit substation will usually be
adequate for a standby generator of
the same kVA as the transformer.
Most generators have a 2-hour 25%
overload rating, and the generator
breaker must be adequate for this
overload current. Selective type long
and short delay trip protection only is
usually recommended for coordination
with the feeder breakers, with the long
delay elements set at 125% to 150% of
the maximum generator current rating
for generator protection.
In the case of two or more paralleled
generators, anti-motoring reverse power
relays (device 32) are recommended
for protection of the prime movers,
particularly piston type engines. For
larger generators requiring a Magnum
MDS-632 or larger, voltage-restraint
type overcurrent relays (device 51V)
are recommended.
26.1-26
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Magnum DS and SB
Application Data
028
Figure 26.1-11. Magnum DS Breaker Sensor Selection Guide for Resistance
Welding Applications
15000
10000
5000
2000
500
200
100
D
u
r
i
n
g
-
W
e
l
d

A
m
p
e
r
e
s

(
r
m
s
)
Sensor Rating,
Amperes
4
0
0
0
3
2
0
0
2
5
0
0
2
0
0
0
1
6
0
0
1
2
0
0
8
0
0
6
0
0
4
0
0
3
0
0
2
5
0
3 4 5 6 7 8 20 30 40 50 60 910
Percent Duty Cycle
1
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
2
0
0
Resistance Welding
The application of Eatons Magnum DS
circuit breakers to resistance welding
circuits is shown in Figure 26.1-11 of
the Sensor Selection Guide. Sensor
ratings only are given; the breaker
frame must be selected as required
for interrupting ratings.
The Magnum DS microprocessor-
based true rms sensing devices
have a thermal memory and are well
suited for this service. The thermal
memory functions prevent exceeding
the breaker and cable maximum
permissible thermal energy level. The
circuit also replicates time dissipation
of thermal energy.
The size of the thermal memory is
30 T (I
n
/ I
n
)
2
unit amperes
2
seconds. It
lls at a rate of (i
w
/ I
n
)
2
unit amperes
2

seconds/second, trips at 30T seconds,
and empties at the rate of (I
n
/ I
n
)
2
unit
amperes
2
seconds/second, where:
T = Long time delay setting in
seconds (range is 224 seconds)
i
w
= rms value of the welding
current in amperes
I
n
= Rating plug current value
in amperes
The memory is lled during the weld
and empties during the non-welding
period of the duty cycle.
These welding applications are based
on long delay and instantaneous trip
devices with the following settings.
The long time delay setting is based
on the weld amperes and duty cycle.
Instantaneous trip setting is two times
the average weld amperes (weld
amperes times percent duty cycle)
or higher.
Note: Making Current Release (MCR)
may prevent closing the breaker during
a welding cycle.
26.1-27
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Magnum DS and SB
Accessories and Peripheral Devices
029
Magnum Peripheral Devices
Modbus Translator Module (mMINT)
Modbus Translator Module
The mMINT (Modbus Master INCOM
Network Translator) is a DIN mounted
accessory that facilitates communica-
tion with a Modbus RTU Network and
as many as 32 Digitrip 520MC and
1150+ trip units or other INCOM
communications devices by passing
Modbus registers transparently
between the two networks.
Time Delay Undervoltage (TDUVR)
Time Delay Undervoltage
The Magnum time delay undervoltage
is a DIN mounted accessory device
applied in concert with a Magnum,
Series C
or Series G
breaker
mounted instantaneous UVR to
provide an adjustable time delay
ride-through on a temporary loss
of voltage. Selectable time delay
settings are 0.1, 0.5, 1 and 2 seconds.
Models are available for 120 Vac and
230 Vac applications.
BIM II
BIM II
The Breaker Interface Module (BIMII)
is a panel-mounted device that
provides a central monitor and display
for as many as 50 Magnum 520MC
and 1150+ trip units or other INCOM
communications devices. The BIMII
can be mounted directly on the
switchgear or may be located up to
10,000 feet away using twisted pair
shielded cable.
Other Protocol Translators
To facilitate diverse communications
from INCOM to other protocols, Eaton
offers a host of translator devices
including MINTII (RS-232), EtherNet
(Power Xpert Gateway), Modbus
(mMINT), PROFIBUS DP (PMINT) and
others. Contact Eaton for the status of
other communication technologies.
Digital Relay Accessory Module
(DRAM)
The DRAM is a DIN mounted
accessory device with four Form C
contacts that can be programmed by
the Digitrip 1150+ for indication of
any combination of the following
conditions: auxiliary switch, INST,
SDT, LDT, GndT, GFAlm, HLAlm,
DEADman and others using the trip
unit communications bus function.
26.1-28
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Magnum DS and SB
030
Figure 26.1-12. Digitrip Relay Accessory Module Diagram
A18 A17
1
2
3
4
Shield
Dedicated local network
for each Magnum Circuit Breaker
Magnum Circuit Breaker
Control
Voltage
100
(DRAM)
RLY 1 RLY2 RLY3 RLY4
(DRAM)
RLY 1 RLY2 RLY3 RLY4
5
L L
The Digitrip 1150 front panel is used to program the external module for any combination of the following: Aux Switch, Bell Alarm, INST, SDT,
LDT, GndT or GFAlm, HLAlm, DEADman, WATCHDOG, ALARM (the Alarm relay tracks the function of the Aux Relay A programming).
Each module has four relays. Each relay has a Form C contact with each having a rating of 10A max at 250 Vac. (Maximum of four DRAM Modules
per circuit breakertwo shown in illustration.)
Control voltage is 120 Vac 20% or 48125 Vdc.
Communication cable is C-H style 2A957805G01 or Belden 9463 cable.
Set switch up to insert 100 ohm terminating resistor on last relay of network.
26.1-29
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Magnum DS and SB
031
Accessories and
Peripheral Devices
Levering Tool
Levering Tool
Magnum drawout breakers are
designed for closed door manual
levering by use of a standard
3/8-inch (10 mm) drive set, which
is a commonly available tool. This
eliminates the need for a unique
levering device, which tends to get
lost if not properly stored.
Magnum Remote Racking Device
Magnum Breaker Remote Racking Device
Eatons MRR1000 remote racking
device provides a means of remotely
inserting or removing any drawout
circuit breaker in the Magnum DS
and SB family of air circuit breakers
(ACBs), to help mitigate arc ash
exposure. The MRR1000 permits the
operator to remotely open and close a
breaker from up to 25 feet away during
the rack-in or rack-out process, a
distance well beyond the arc ash
boundary for traditional LV switchgear.
120 Vac power supply (with plug)
Works with all breakers in the
Magnum family (MDS, MDN, SBS,
SBN and CM52 network protectors)
Locking xture mounts directly
to Magnum breaker escutcheon
25-foot umbilical cord between the
operator and the device
Hand-held pendant with OPEN/
CLOSE and IN/OUT pushbuttons,
with ENABLE button
Ready lights indicating power to the
unit and pendant
Safety interlock prevents operation
of unit until it is safely locked in place
Complete racking in 25 seconds
or less
Handles for ease of installation
Works on new and existing
Magnum breakers without the
need for any modications to
doors, breakers or structures
MRR1000 Connected to Magnum Breaker
Universal Remote Power Racking
System (Type RPR-2)
Remote Power Racking System
For maximum safety during drawout
breaker levering operations, the
universal remote power racking system
(RPR-2) can be employed on Magnum,
as well as other drawout low and
medium voltage power circuit breakers
that use rotation of a shaft for insertion
or removal. Remote control is accom-
plished by an operator pendant with
an INSERT and REMOVE pushbutton
station and a 25-foot connecting cable.
The RPR-2 requires 120 Vac, 15A power
from a common plug receptacle.
Status indication and selectable torque
limitation matched to the breaker
racking mechanism are also provided.
Lifting Yoke and
Floor Lifting Device
Magnum breakers include lifting ears
on each side to accept a lifting yoke
(or suitable sling) to facilitate lifting
using a skyhook from a top of gear
lifter, oor lifter or crane. Various
lifting yoke style numbers are
available for all Magnum frame
types in both three-pole and
four-pole congurations.
A roll-on-the-oor lifting device style
number 6727D63H20 is equipped with
a skyhook for use in conjunction
with a breaker lifting yoke or suitable
sling to lift the breaker from above.
Shelf-type roll-on-the-oor lifters can
also be used to lift the breaker from
underneath without a lifting yoke.
Floor Lifting Device
26.1-30
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Magnum DS and SB
032
Test Cabinet
The test cabinet is a separately
mounted device with open and close
pushbuttons that facilitates bench
testing of electrically operated
Magnum breakers. An input power
cord is provided for connection to a
120 Vac, 15A plug receptacle. The test
cabinet output power is matched to
the breaker control voltage(s) and
is connected to the breaker via a
cord that plugs into the breaker
secondary contacts.
Hand-Held Functional Test Kit
Hand-Held Test Kit
A secondary injection hand-held test
kit catalog number MTST120V or
MTST240V is available to functionally
test Magnum and Series G breakers
equipped with Digitrip trip units. The
kit includes test cords and faceplate
templates to match the breaker being
tested, and an auxiliary power module.
This test kit functionally conrms
proper operations at the minimum
trip unit settings.
Auxiliary Power Module
The auxiliary power module
catalog number PRTAAPM120V
or PRTAAPM240V plugs into the
receptacle located in the front of the
trip unit to power the display and/or
communications functions during
bench testing. An input power
cord is provided for connection to
a 120 Vac or 230 Vac source.
Secondary Injection Test Kit
A test kit style number MTK1000 is
available for secondary injection testing
of Magnum breakers with Digitrip trip
units. This test kit functionally conrms
proper operation at all trip unit settings.
Test reports can be downloaded to a PC
via a removable SD card.
TripLink
TripLink style number 5720B59G01
enables the downloading of the trip
unit protection settings and circuit
data from one Digitrip 1150+ trip unit
to another, which saves time during
startup and maintenance.
TripLink is a means of transferring
settings from one circuit breaker to
another. TripLink transfers all protec-
tion settings and time and date, and
the circuit breakers circuit data. The
transfer of these settings may be
useful for cloning a lineup of circuit
breakers, cloning a circuit breakers
settings for replacing the circuit
breaker with its clone for maintenance
purposes, or for making common
settings for a test program.
TripLink Transfer
26.2-1
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series NRX
General Description
033
Series NRX
Series NRX
General Description
Introducing the Series NRX low
voltage power circuit breakera major
breakthrough of minor proportions.
The Series NRX provides the
performance of a power circuit
breaker65 kA interrupting at
480 Vacin the compact size of a
molded-case breaker. It offers the
protection and features of a power
circuit breaker, along with increased
exibility at a portion of the size.
The Series NRX is tested to 20,000
mechanical operations and 10,000
electrical operationssignicantly
higher than industry standards,
such as UL and IEC, require or the
capabilities of equivalent products on
the market. Thus, your maintenance
personnel can do what needs to be
done, instead of spending valuable
time inspecting and maintaining the
breakers in the system.
In switchgear and switchboards, its
important that it be easily accessible
during schedule equipment mainte-
nance. The cassette design allows you
to inspect parts without removing the
cassette from the switchgear cell. The
design of the breaker and cassette
enables full use of the breaker handle
and cassette rails with a gloved hand,
allowing electricians to remain in the
appropriate PPE protective gear.
The breaker handles ergonomic
design also maximizes functionality
and leverage across seven complete
strokes (with an average of only 21 lbs
of force) charging the breaker quickly
and easily, and making it easier to
cycle when needed during commis-
sioning or scheduled maintenance.
In todays commercial, facilities, data
centers or manufacturing environ-
ment, available space for new and
retrot equipment is a precious
commodity. When building space
is at a premium, or when system
upgrading requires additional
functionality, equipment dimensions
can present a challenge. In fact,
studies have shown that space savings
can have a value of up to $4000 per
square meter depending on the
application. The compact size and
broad capabilities of the Series NRX
make it the right choice for applica-
tions where space savings is a priority.
The small size of the Series NRX,
coupled with a variety of connection
options, gives you the ability to ef-
ciently layout distribution equipment.
See Tab 20 for low voltage metal
enclosed drawout switchgear and
Tab 21 for low voltage switchboards.
The reduced weight of the Series NRX
makes it easier to handle during start-
up and scheduled inspection. A three-
pole, fully populated drawout breaker
weighs only 54 lbs/24 kg!
The Series NRX enables twice as many
feeder breakers in a standard structure
or a reduction in overall assembly size
of up to 50%.
The small size, 10.00 inches wide by
10.70 inches deep x 14.20 inches high,
of the Series NRX allows for much
higher densities of power circuit
breakers in a structureup to eight
breakers in a 24.00-inch wide structure.
Series NRX accessories can be quickly
installed at the job site, without any
special tools. Each breaker comes
standard with an accessory tray, the
needed accessories simply plug and
lock into the tray.
A full range of trip units, ranging from
basic protection (LSI or LSIG) to meter-
ing, system diagnostics, protective
relay functions and communications,
complement the breaker offering.
Two of the trip units models include
(optional) Eatons Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System, built to reduce
arc ash energy on a downstream unit
during system maintenance.
Multiple cable and bus connection
options enable quick and exible
integration. Options include cable
termination, front or rear bus
connection in both drawout and
xed-mounted styles. Tension clamp
secondary contact terminations allow
for quick connection of control wiring,
reducing wiring time and costs.
Technical Data
Table 26.2-1. UL 1066 Ratings Table 26.2-2. UL 489 Ratings
Table 26.2-3. IEC 60947-2 Ratings
Table 26.2-4. Circuit Breaker Dimensions in Inches (mm) and Weights in lbs (kg)
Description Rating
Continuous current rating (amps) 800
Short-Circuit Rating (kA)
254 Vac
508 Vac
635 Vac
85
65
42
Short-time withstand (kA) 42
Description Rating
Continuous current rating (amps) 800 1200
Short-Circuit Rating (kA)
240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
85
65
42
85
65
42
Short-time withstand (kA) 42 42
Description Rating
Continuous current rating (amps) 630 and 800 1000 and 1250 1600
Short-Circuit Rating (kA) Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
240/254 Vac
415/435 Vac
690/725 Vac
85
65
42
50
50
42
85
65
42
50
50
42
85
65
42
50
50
42
Short-time withstand = Icw (kA) 42 42 42 42 42 42
Description Height Width Depth Weight
Fixed
Three-pole
Four-pole
13.18 (334.8)
13.18 (334.8)
8.25 (209.6)
11.00 (279.4)
7.15 (181.6)
7.15 (181.6)
33.58 (15.23)
44.40 (20.14)
Drawout with Cassette
Three-pole
Four-pole
14.18 (360.2)
14.18 (360.2)
10.02 (254.5)
12.69 (322.3)
10.69 (271.5)
10.69 (271.5)
85.20 (38.65)
104.00 (47.17)
26.2-2
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series NRX
Technical Data
034
Table 26.2-5. Digitrip Adjustable Trip Settings
I
n
= Rating plug value
I
r
n
I
2
t response.
Table 26.2-6. Replacement Rating Plugs
Field installation rating plug on xed or drawout breakers.
IEC only (not UL listed).

Note: Rating plug must be selected based on breaker frame rating.
For time/current curves, please visit www.eaton.com/seriesnrx.
Accessories
Figure 26.2-1. Breaker and Accessories Figure 26.2-2. Cassette/Cradle Components
Table 26.2-7. Shunt Trip
Time/Current
Characteristic
Pickup
Setting
Pickup
Point
Time Band,
Seconds
Long delay 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.75,
0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0
I
n
times
long delay
setting
2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15,
20, 24 (at 6 times
pickup value)
Instantaneous 2, 3, 4, 6, 8,
10, 12
I
n
times
instantaneous
setting
Short delay 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6,

8, 10
I
r
times
short delay
setting
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
(at response)
0.1, 0.3, 0.5
Ground fault 0.25, 0.3, 0.35,

0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.75,
1.0 (1200A
maximum)
I
n
times
ground fault
setting
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
(at response)
0.1, 0.3, 0.5
I
n
of
Rating
Plug
Frame Size I
n
(maximum)
630800A
10001250A
1600A
Group A Group B Group C

Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
200
250
300
NA200T
NA250T
NA300T
400
500
600
NA400T
NA500T
NA600T
NB400T
NB500T
NB600T
630
800
1000
NA630T
NA800T
NB630T
NB800T
NB1000T
NC800T
NC1000T
1200
1250
1600
NB1200T
NB1250T
NC1200T
NC1250T
NC1600T
Auxiliary
Switches
1A/1B
ry
Tray
Electric
Operator
Spring Release with Latch Check
Switch/Ready to Close Switch
Overcurrent
Trip Switches
Trip Unit
UVR
Shunt Trip
Accessory Tray
Arc Hood
Terminals
Secondaries
Rails
Shutters
Ground
Clip
Rejection
Scheme
Control
Voltages
Frequency Operational Voltage
Range 70%110%
Inrush/Continuous
Power Consumption (VA)
Opening
Time (ms)
24
48
110127
DC
DC
560 Hz
1726
3453
77140
500/5
530/5
540/5
25
25
25
110125
208240
220250
DC
5060 Hz
DC
77138
146264
154275
540/5
500/5
515/5
25
25
25
26.2-3
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series NRX
Accessories
035
Table 26.2-8. UVR
Table 26.2-9. Spring Release
Table 26.2-10. Motor Operator
Table 26.2-11. Control Voltages and Currents
Table 26.2-12. OCT/OTS Table 26.2-13. Auxiliary Switch Table 26.2-14. Breaker Position/Continuity
Control
Voltages
Range 85%110%
Dropout Volts
35%60%
Inrush/Continuous
Power Consumption (VA)
Opening
Time (ms)
24
32
48
DC
DC
DC
2026
2735
4153
814
1119
1729
500/5
620/5
850/5
50
50
50
110127
110125
208240
5060 Hz
DC
5060 Hz
94140
94138
177264
4494
4494
84125
890/5
890/5
910/5
50
50
50
220250
380415
480
600
DC
AC
AC
AC
187275
323457
408528
510660
88132
145228
168288
210360
910/5
960/5
800/8
800/12
50
50
50
50
Control
Voltages
Range 70%110%
Inrush Power
Consumption (VA)
Closing
Time (ms)
24
48
110127
DC
DC
5060 Hz
1726
3453
77140
500
530
540
25
25
25
110125
208240
220250
DC
5060 Hz
DC
77138
146264
154275
540
500
515
25
25
25
Control
Voltages
Frequency Operational
Voltage Range
85%110%
Running
Current (A)
Typical Inrush
Current
Power
Consumption (VA)
Maximum
Charging
Time (sec)
24
48
110127
DC
DC
5060 Hz
2026
4153
94140
5
3
2
500%
500%
300%
150
150
280
3
3
3
110125
208240
220250
DC
5060 Hz
DC
94138
177264
187275
1
1
1
500%
1000%
1000%
150
280
280
3
4
4
Control Voltages 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 110125 Vdc 110127 Vac 220250 Vdc 208240 Vac
Current
Close current (inrush)
Shunt trip current (ST)(inrush/continuous)
Charge motor current(inrush/continuous)
21
21/0.2
TBD
11
11/0.1
TBD
5
5/0.04
5/1
5
5/0.04
6/2
2
2/0.02
10/1
2
2/0.02
10/1
Operating Voltage Rating
Close
Trip
Charge
1726
1726
2026
3453
3453
4153
77138
77138
94138
77140
77140
94140
154275
154275
187275
146264
146264
177264
Control
Voltages
Frequency Contact Rating
(Amperes)
250
125
250
5060 Hz
DC
DC
10
0.5
0.25
Control
Voltages
Frequency Contact Rating
(Amperes)
250
125
250
5060 Hz
DC
DC
10
0.5
0.25
Breaker
Position
Continuity
Between Red
and Black
Lead Pairs
Continuity
Between Blue
and Black
Lead Pairs
Open NO 45 and 43
46 and 47
51 and 49
52 and 53
Closed 44 and 43
48 and 47
50 and 49
54 and 53
NO
26.2-4
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series NRX
036
Table 26.2-15. Digitrip Trip Units for NRX ANSI/UL Rated Circuit Breakers
1200A maximum ground fault setting per UL/NEC.
Optional communications modules available: Ethernet (Web-browsing,

Modbus TCP/IP and SNMP), Modbus RTU, INCOM, PROFIBUS DP.
Legend: I
n
I
r
Trip Unit Type Digitrip 520 Digitrip 520M Digitrip 1150
Ampere range
rms sensing
2001600A
42 kA
Yes
2001600A
42 kA
Yes
2001600A
42 kA
Yes
Protection Styles
n
)
LI, LSI, LSIG
Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA, RLSI, RLSIG, RLSIA
Yes
Yes
LSI, LSIG, LSIA, RLSI, RLSIG,
RLSIA
Yes
Yes
Long delay
protection (L)
Long delay pickup
Long delay time I
2
t at 6 x I
r
Long delay time I
4
t

IEEE curves
0.51.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
No
No
0.51.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
No
No
0.51.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
15 seconds
Yes
High load alarm
Yes
No
Yes
Yes (LSI only)
Yes
0.51.0 x (I
r
)
Short delay
protection (S)
Short delay pickup
Short delay time I
2
t at 8 x I
r

Short delay time at
Short Delay Time ZSI
2001000% x (I
r
)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
2001000% x (I
r
)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
2001000% x (I
r
)
100500 ms
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
Instantaneous
protection (I)
Off position
2001200% x (I
n
)
Yes
LSI and LSIG
2001200% x (I
n
)
Yes
Yes
2001200% x (I
n
) and M1
Yes
Yes
Ground fault
protection (G)
Ground fault alarm

Ground fault pickup
2
t at .625 x I
n
No
25100% x (I
n
)
100500 ms
Yes
25100% x (I
n
)
100500 ms
Yes
24100% x (I
n
)
100500 ms
Ground fault ZSI
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
Yes
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
Yes
100500 ms
Yes (optional)
Yes
Disable ground fault protection No No No
Neutral protection (N) Yes Yes Yes
System Diagnostics
Cause-of-trip LEDs
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
System Monitoring
Digital display
Current (%)
No
No
4-character LCD
Yes 2% full scale
Color graphic LCD
Yes 1% of reading
Voltage (%) L to L
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes 1% of reading
Yes 2% of reading
Yes
Reactive power kVAR
Power factor
Crest factor
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Type
Power supply
No
N/A
Yes
+24 Vdc
Yes
+24 Vdc
Additional Features
Trip log
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Testing method
Waveform capture
Test set
No
Test set
No
Yes (current and voltage)
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
26.2-5
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series NRX
NRX Breaker Communications Adapter Modules
037
NRX Breaker Communications
Adapter Modules
Series NRX Communications
Adapter Module
General Description
The Series NRX Communication
Adapter Modules (CAMs) are DIN
mounted accessories that facilitate
communication with a variety of
different communications protocols:
Modbus Communication Adapter
Module (MCAM)Modbus RTU
INCOM Communication Adapter
Module (ICAM)INCOM
PROFIBUS Communication Adapter
Module (PCAM)PROFIBUS DP
Ethernet Communication Adapter
Module (ECAM)Web-enabled,
Modbus TCP/IP, SNMP and
Power Xpert Toolkit
The communication device may be
mounted in the Series NRX cassette
secondary terminal blocks or remote
mounted on a DIN rail.
Module/address is assigned to the
cassette/cell location. This elimi-
nates the need to do any reprogram-
ming when a replacement breaker is
installed in the existing location
Communication of Open, Close
and Trip status is via the CAM
module, not through the trip unit
24 Vdc control power
Use with Digitrip 520M or Digitrip
1150 NRX trip units
Communication Adapter Module Cassette
Mounted in Secondary Terminal Blocks
Communications Adapter
Module Front View)
MicroController LED (Status)
This indicator will be ashing green
whenever the module is powered
up and when the microprocessor is
executing instructions. When the
Series NRX communications adapter
module is connected to a Series NRX
trip unit for the rst time, this LED
will alternately ash red and green
to signal a learning process between
both units. This automatic process will
take approximately 15 seconds and
occurs only once during the initial
startup. The LED will also ash red
if the module is not connected to, or
unable to communicate.
Control Jumper
This jumper provides the user with a
means of enabling or disabling remote
communication control commands to
the Series NRX trip unit. With jumper
placed in the ENABLE position, remote
slave action commands, such as open
and close, can be acted upon. With the
jumper in the DISABLE position,
commands will not be accepted.
Source/Residual Ground Selection Jumper
This jumper selects the protection
conguration for Series NRX trip units
with ground fault protection or ground
fault alarm functionality. Consult
Series NRX trip unit instructions for
further information on ground sensing.
This jumper is not applicable and does
not function for non-ground fault style
trip units.
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 26.2-3. Communications Adapter
Modules in a Modbus RTU, INCOM or
PROFIBUS DP Network
Figure 26.2-4. Communications Control (SR and ST Wiring)
Status
LED
Jumper
Plugs for
Communication
Control
Jumper
Plug for
Source
Sensing
Communications
Network
CAM
1
CAM CAM
Optional
External
Contacts
CS (or PB)
Trip
CS (or PB)
Close
Control
Power
C
o
m
O
p
e
n
C
l
o
s
e
Communications
Module Series NRX Circuit Breaker
Wiring as shown for optional communication close or open capability.
Choose spring release coil voltage rating as desired if communications is required.
Choose shunt trip voltage rating to be the same as spring release voltage rating
if communication is required.
Control power voltage rating must match ST and SR coil voltage rating.
Close duration is two seconds on communication activation when comm. control is enabled.
26.2-6
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series NRX
038
Figure 26.2-5. Series NRX Modbus Communication with Digitrip 520M
+
24
5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
19 21 23 25 26 20 22 24
Digitrip 520M
Series NRX
Circuit
Breaker
Communications
Module
Comm
Control
Enable
Disable
Source
Enable
C
l
o
s
e
O
p
e
n
C
o
m
r
2
4
V
d
c
2
4
V
d
c
+
S
h
i
e
l
d
N
W
N
W
+
TB # TB #1
121 ohms
TB2-2
TB2-1
C
O
M
4
The Series NRX communication module is a separate device that snaps into the DIN rail starting at
location 19 through 26. (Removal of the four contact blocks is required.)
The trip unit AUX voltage is 24 Vdc 10% and should be sourced from a reliable service.
Ground the shield at the master device.
Set the jumper on the module to enable or disable the communications control as desired.
When the communications module is employed and source ground or zero sequence ground sensing
method is required, the ground fault function is enabled by this jumper.
Connectors are UL/CSA rated 300V, VDE rated 250V. Recommended: Weidmuller (BL 3.5/90/5BK)
Orientation: 90 lead exit, but other lead orientations are possible. Wire guage: # 18 AWG/0.82 mm.
The nal device in the daisy-chain conguration must have a 121ohms termination resistor installed
across terminals #1 and #2 on TB #2.

26.2-7
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series NRX
039
Figure 26.2-6. Series NRX INCOM Communication with Digitrip 520M
+
24 Vdc
5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
19 21 23 25 26 20 22 24
Digitrip 520M
Series NRX
Circuit
Breaker
Communications
Module
Comm
Control
Enable
Disable
Source
Ground
Enable
Disable
C
l
o
s
e
O
p
e
n
C
o
m
r
2
4
2
4
+
S
h
i
e
l
d
N
W
N
W
+
TB #2 TB #1
100 ohms
TB2-2
TB2-1
The Series NRX communication module is a separate device that snaps into the DIN rail starting at location
19 through 26. (Removal of the four contact blocks is required.)
The trip unit AUX voltage is 24 Vdc 10% and should be sourced from a reliable service.
INCOM communication cable is a two conductor with shield type wire in daisy chain conguration. The
recommended cable (Belden Blue Hose # 9643 or equivalent) has a twisted-pair of wires (# 20 AWG stranded
7 x 28 conductors with PVC insulation) having an aluminum/mylar foil shield with drain wire. The maximum
system capacity is 10,000 feet of communications cable and 1000 devices on the INCOM network. Make sure
that the twisted-pair wire is recommended for INCOM network use. Use shielded twisted-pair wire to connect
each slave to the INCOM network, daisy-chain style. The polarity of the twisted-pair is not important. Ground the
shield at the host computer (device).
Set the jumper on the module to enable or disable the communications control as desired.
When the communications module is employed and source ground or zero sequence ground sensing method
is required, the ground fault function is enabled by this jumper.
Connectors are UL/CSA rated 300V, VDE rated 250V. Recommended: Weidmuller (BL 3.5/90/5BK)
Orientation: 90 lead exit, but other lead orientations are possible. Wire gauge: # 18 AWG/0.82 mm.
The nal device in the daisy-chain conguration must have a 100 ohms termination resistor installed
across terminals #1 and #2 on TB #2.
26.2-8
September 2011
Sheet 26
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series NRX
Ethernet Communications Adapter Module
040
Ethernet Communications
Adapter Module
Series NRX Ethernet Communications
Adapter Module
General Description
The Series NRX Ethernet
communications adapter module
is an accessory that operates as a
communicating device in conjunction
with a compatible Series NRX trip
unit/breaker via an Ethernet network.
The catalog number of this product
is ECAM.
The Ethernet communications adapter
module provides Web-enabled
monitoring and control of the Series
NRX trip unit metering, logging, and
control functions using a standard web
browser. Features include display of
measured current, voltage, power,
energy and alarms; command,
event and data logging; conguration
of set point, alarm and logging
parameters; and control functions
such as open/close breaker.
In addition to Web server capability,
data communication is provided in
Modbus TCP/IP and SNMP protocols.
Additionally, the Series NRX Ethernet
Communications Adapter Module
provides data communications to the
Eaton Power Xpert Software as an
easy means of centralizing and
gathering data for long-term data
archival, analysis and trending.
Data View Summary
Trend Graph View


September 2011

Contents

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures
27.0-1

Sheet

27

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

001

M
o
l
d
e
d
-
C
a
s
e

C
i
r
c
u
i
t
B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

&

E
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e
s


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.0-2
Table of Contents

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.0-3
General Description

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.1-1
Special Function Circuit Breakers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-1
Application Data

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-1
Circuit Breaker Selection Data

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.4-1
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . .


Electronic Trip Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . .

27.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

27

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43


002

Summary of Differences Between Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers,
Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers and Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

There are two main classications of low voltage circuit
breakersmolded-case circuit breakers and low voltage
power circuit breakers. All UL

, NEMA

and ANSI standards
are for molded-case circuit breakers and low voltage
The industry recognizes three types of circuit breakers
molded-case circuit breakers (MCCB), insulated-case circuit
breakers (ICCB) and low voltage power circuit breakers
LVPCB). Insulated-case circuit breakers are designed to
meet the standards for molded-case circuit breakers.
Low voltage power circuit breakers comply with the
following standards:

ANSI Std. C37.16Preferred Ratings

ANSI Std. C37.17Trip Devices for LVPCB

ANSI Std. C37.50Test Procedures

IEEE

Std. C37.13LVPCB Used in Enclosures

UL 1066LVPCB
Molded-case circuit breakers and insulated-case circuit
breakers typically comply with the following standards:

UL 489MCCB

UL 489Molded-Case Switches (MCS)

NEMA AB1MCCB and MCS

NEMA AB3MCCB Application

Table 27.0-1. Breaker Type Comparison Chart

Description LVPCB
(Type Magnum DS and Series NRX)
ICCB
(Type Magnum SB and Series NRX)
MCCB
(QUICKLAG/Series C

/Series G

)

Select trip
short-time rating
Selective trip over full range of fault
currents up to interrupting rating
(high short-time ratings)
Selective trip over partial range of fault
currents within the interrupting rating
(medium short-time ratings). Typically
up to 35 kA
Selective trip over a smaller range of fault
currents within the interrupting rating (low
short-time ratings). Typically 1013 times
the frame size
Operator type Types of operators: mechanically
Types of operators: mechanically
Types of operators: mechanically operated
over-center toggle or motor operator
Closing speed 5-cycle closing for electrically
operated devices
5-cycle closing for electrically
operated devices
Greater than 5-cycle closing for electrically
operated devices
Mounting Available in drawout construction
Available in drawout construction
Typically xed-mounted but large frame
sizes may be available in drawout
construction
Interrupting rating Interrupting duty at 635 Vac:
42100 kA and current limiting with
or without fuses up to 200 kA
35 150 kA
22100 kA without fuses and up
to 200 kA with integral fuses or for
current-limiting type
Current limiting Special current limiting types available
Special current limiting types available
without fuses up to 150 kA
Current limiting available with and without
fuses up to 200 kA
Relative cost Higher Medium Low
Available
frame sizes
Typical 8006000A
Typical 8006000A
Large number of frame sizes available.
Typical 1002500A
Maintenance Extensive maintenance possible on all
frame sizes
Limited maintenance possible on larger
frame sizes
Very limited maintenance possible on larger
frame sizes
Enclosure types Used in enclosures, MCCs, switchboards
and switchgear
Used in enclosures, MCCs
and switchboards
Used in enclosures, panelboards,
switchboards, MCCs and control panels
Series ratings Not available in series ratings Not available in series ratings Available in series ratings
Enclosed rating 100% continuous current rated in
its enclosure
an enclosure
an enclosure
Standards ANSI/IEEE C37
UL 1066
NEMA AB1/AB3
UL 489 or UL 1066
NEMA AB1/AB3
UL 489


27.0-3

September 2011


Sheet

27

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43


003


Series G

Table of Contents

General Description

Circuit Breaker Components and Functions . . . . .

27.1-1

Electronic RMS Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.1-2

Accessories and Modications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.1-7

Molded-Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-1

Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-1

Current Limiting Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-3

100% Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-5

Series Rated Breaker Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-8

High Instantaneous Breakers for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-12

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-12

AFCI Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-13

DC Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-14

400 Hz Breaker Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-16

HID Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-19

Lighting Control Solenoid Operated Breakers . . .

27.2-19

SWD Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-19

HACR Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-19

Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-19

Mining Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-20

Naval/Marine Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-20

Welding Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.2-20
Application Data

Continuous Ampere Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-1

Circuit Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-1

Interrupting Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-1

Circuit Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-2

Number of Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-2

Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-2

Code Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-2

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-2

Feeder Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-2

Branch Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-2

Circuit Breakers Not hp Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-3

Motor Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-4

Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-6

Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-6

Slash Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-7

Cable Sizing/Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-8

Time Current Curve Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-9

Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-10

Breaker Selection Table100% Selective . . . .

27.3-14

Breaker Selection Table0.1 Sec Selective . .

27.3-22

Arc Flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-35

Arcash Reduction Maintenance System . . . . . . .

27.3-36

Unusual Environmental Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-37

Reverse-Feed Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.3-38

Overview Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.4-1

QUICKLAG

Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . .

27.4-1

Series G Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . .

27.4-4

Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . .

27.4-5

Current Limiting Industrial Circuit Breakers. . .

27.4-6

Industrial Circuit Breakers in Assemblies. . . . .

27.4-7

Electronic Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.4-8

Digitrip OPTIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.4-10

Individual Circuit Breaker Selection Data . . . . . . .

27.4-11

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . .

27.4-11

QUICKLAG Solenoid-Operated
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.4-13

Series G Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . .

27.4-19

Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . .

27.4-25

Series G Breaker Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.4-33

Series C Breaker Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.4-34

for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.4-35

Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.4-38

Motor Protector Circuit Breaker (MPCB). . . . . .

27.4-40

Power Monitoring and Metering
Module (PM3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.4-41

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.4-42

Current Limiting Modules and Breakers. . . . . .

27.4-43

Circuit Breaker Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27.4-48
27.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

27

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

004



27.1-1

September 2011


Sheet

27

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43


General Description

005

General Description

General Circuit
Breaker Information

Eatons molded-case circuit breakers
are designed to provide circuit
protection for low voltage distribution
systems. They are described by
NEMA as, . . . a device for closing
and interrupting a circuit between
separable

contacts under both normal
and abnormal conditions, and further-
more as, . . . a breaker assembled
as an integral unit in a supporting
and enclosing housing of insulating
material. The NEC
describes them
as, A device designed to open and
close a circuit by non-automatic
means, and to open the circuit
automatically on a predetermined
overload of current, without injury
to itself when properly applied within
its rating.
So designed, Eaton circuit breakers
protect conductors against overloads
and conductors and connected
apparatus, such as motors and
motor starters, against short circuits.
Circuit Breaker Components
and Functions
Being essentially high interrupting
capacity switches with repetitive
elements, Eaton circuit breakers
are comprised of three main
functional components. These are:
1. Trip elements (thermal-magnetic
or electronic)
2. Operating mechanism
3. Arc extinguishers
1. Trip Elements
The function of the trip element is to trip
the operating mechanism in the event
of a prolonged overload or short-circuit
current. To accomplish this, a thermal-
magnetic trip action is provided.
Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Eaton thermal-magnetic breakers are
general purpose devices suitable for
the majority of breaker applications
and are considered the industry stan-
dard. Available from 15800A, thermal-
magnetic breakers provide accurate
reliable overload and short-circuit
protection for conductors and
connected apparatus.
Thermal trip action is achieved
through the use of a bimetal heated by
the load current. On a sustained over-
load, the bimetal will deect, causing
the operating mechanism to trip.
Because bimetals are responsive to
the heat emitted by the current ow,
they allow a long-time delay on light
overloads, yet they have a fast
response on heavier overloads.
Magnetic trip action is achieved through
the use of an electromagnet in series
with the load current. This provides an
instantaneous tripping action when the
current reaches a predetermined value.
Front-adjustable magnetic trip elements
are supplied as standard on 250A frame
circuit breakers and above (except 100A
and 150A magnetic only breakers), all
other thermal-magnetic breakers have
non-adjustable magnetic trip elements.
Electronic RMS Trip Breakers
Eaton electronic trip breakers are
generally applied for applications
where high levels of system coordina-
tion are called for. Available from
202500A, todays electronic trip
breakers can provide superior
protection and coordination as well
as system alarms and diagnostics,
monitoring and communications.
Both the overload trip action and the
short-circuit trip action of breakers
with Digitrip electronic trip units
are achieved by the use of current
transformers and solid-state circuitry
that monitors the current and initiates
tripping through a ux shunt trip
when an overload or a short circuit
is present. All multiple-pole circuit
breakers have trip elements in each
pole and a common trip bar. An
abnormal circuit condition in any
one pole will cause all poles to open
simultaneously.
Electronic RMS trip breakers can
include trip features such as:
Adjustable long-time pickup
Adjustable short-time pickup
Adjustable long delay time
Adjustable short delay time
Adjustable instantaneous pickup
Adjustable ground fault pickup
Adjustable ground fault delay time
Communications
Trip unit adjustments are made by
setting switches on the front of the trip
unit or by programming the trip unit
electronically.
All electronic RMS trip breakers are
equipped with a manual push-to-trip
mechanism.
2. Operating Mechanism
The function of the operating mecha-
nism is to provide a means of opening
and closing the breaker contacts. All
mechanisms are of the quick-make,
quick-break type and are trip free.
Trip free mechanisms are designed
so that the contacts cannot be held
closed against an abnormal circuit
condition and are sometimes referred
to as an overcenter toggle mechanism.
In addition to indicating whether the
breaker is on or off, the operating
mechanism handle indicates when the
breaker is tripped by moving to a
position midway between the extremes.
This distinct trip point is particularly
advantageous where breakers are
grouped, as in panelboard applications,
because it clearly indicates the faulty
circuit. The operating mechanism
contains a positive on feature. In the
normal switching operation, the
handle of the circuit breaker will not
be capable of being left readily at or near
the off position when the main contacts
are closed.
3. Arc Extinguishers
The function of the DE-ION
arc
extinguisher is to conne, divide
and extinguish the arc drawn between
opening breaker contacts. It consists of
specially shaped steel grids isolated
from each other and supported by an
insulating housing. When the contacts
are opened, the arc drawn induces a
magnetic eld in the grids, which in
turn draws the arc from the contacts
and into the grids. The arc is thus split
into a series of smaller arcs and the
heat generated is quickly dissipated
through the metal. These two actions
result in a rapid removal of ions from
the arc, which hastens dielectric build-
up between the contacts and results in
rapid extinction of the arc.
27.1-2
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General DescriptionTrip Units
006
Electronic RMS Trip Unit
General
Eaton offers the most comprehensive
range of electronic trip units in the
industry for molded-case circuit
breakers. All electronic trip units are rms
sensing and can be applied from 70A up
through 2500A. Eaton offers electronic
trip units as standard for circuit breakers
rated above 800A, and offers electronic
trip units as optional for circuit breakers
70A up through 800A.
Digitrip electronic trip units are AC
devices that employ microprocessor-
based technology that provides a true
rms current sensing means for proper
correlation with thermal characteristics
of conductors and equipment. The
primary function of the Digitrip
electronic trip unit is to provide
circuit protection. This is achieved
by analyzing the secondary current
signals received from the circuit
breaker current sensors and initiating
trip signals to the circuit breaker shunt
trip when pre-set current levels and
time delay settings are exceeded. All
Eaton electronic trip units use a high
effective sampling rate to maintain
measurement accuracy, monitoring,
and protection with nonlinear loads
having harmonic content up to the
27th order.
Electronic trip units are applied to
distribution systems when high stan-
dards of protection and coordination
are called for. In addition, electronic
trip units can provide further enhanced
features such as alarming, diagnostics,
system monitoring and communications.
Eaton RMS sensing trip units fall into
two main categories:
Front adjustable trip units
(Digitrip RMS 310, 310+,
510, 610, 810 and 910)
Programmable trip units
(Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050)
Front-Adjustable Trip Units
Front-adjustable trip units are
electronic trip units that have up to
nine time-current setting options that
are set by switches mounted on the
front of the trip unit. The application
for front adjustable trip units would
be distribution systems that can be
coordinated within the range of
settings available and that do not
require sophisticated coordination
strategies to be applied down
through the distribution system to
small rated breakers.
Programmable Trip Units (OPTIM)
Programmable trip units are electronic
trip units that have up to 10 time-
current setting options that are
programmed electronically by the
use of a programming device. The
application for programmable
trip units would be high integrity
distribution systems that require
superior levels of system coordination
coupled with system alarming,
diagnostics and monitoring.
Rating Plugs
Rating plugs provide a means to
establish the breakers continuous
current rating. Rating plugs are color-
coded and interchangeable to make it
easy to match the correct rating plug
with the correct trip unit. The same
rating plug can be applied to both 50
and 60 Hz distribution systems. Some
rating plugs are xed and some have
an adjustable range of amperage
values for greater exibility. Digitrip
310, 510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units
can be supplied with either a xed or
adjustable rating plug. Digitrip 310+
trip units are equipped with adjustable
rating plugs. OPTIM style trip units are
furnished with xed rating plugs but
have a programmable Long Time
Pickup rating to allow application
over a range of amperage values.
Cause of Trip Indication
All OPTIM and Digitrip 510, 610, 810
and 910 trip units include Cause-of-
Trip indication LEDs. Breakers using
the RMS 310+ electronic trip unit
have the ability to output cause-of-trip
information through the test port. The
Cause-of-Trip LED module provides
trip information via LED indication.
The Digiview and Panelmount
Digiview can be installed in the
RMS 310+ test port to provide both
cause-of-trip information and phase
current through an LCD display.
Cause-of-Trip LED Module Digiview
27.1-3
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
007
Table 27.1-1. The Digitrip Family of Low Voltage Electronic Trip Units
Optional features.
Additional Protection Features
Discriminator/Making Current Release
Eatons Digitrip RMS electronic trip
units are designed and built with
safety and reliability in mind, both to
protect the user and the equipment, as
well as to make sure the trip functions
within its design parameters. By
providing a discriminator circuit to
Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810 and 910 trip
units, as well as to Digitrip OPTIM 550
and 1050 trip units that do not have
an instantaneous setting, the user is
protected should a faulted circuit exist.
The discriminator (or making current
releases as it is often called) is set at
11 times the rating plug ampere rating
and is enabled for approximately the
rst 10 cycles of current ow. Should
a fault condition exist, the breaker will
trip with no intentional time delay on
closing, protecting the user from a
potentially unsafe condition.
Instantaneous Override
In addition to a discriminator, an
instantaneous override is present in
all molded-case and insulated-case
circuit breakers to provide additional
protection for the breaker. The
instantaneous override is factory
set nominally just below the breaker
withstand rating.
Trip Unit Overtemperature
Digitrip electronic trip units can operate
reliably in ambient temperatures that
range from 20 to 85C. In the unlikely
event that temperatures exceed this
ambient, the trip unit has a built-in
overtemperature trip to protect the trip
unit should the temperature exceed
these design parameters.
Thermal Memory
Digitrip RMS and Digitrip OPTIM
electronic trip units incorporate
powered thermal memory, i.e., the
units remember recent overcurrent
events that may have initiated the trip
timing sequence, and then returned to
nominal levels, halting the sequence
prior to trip initiation. In the event that
the current levels again exceed the
pickup set point within a few cycles of
the original pickup, the units memory
recalls the previous near trip and
automatically imposes a shorter
delay time. In effect, the unit treats
multiple time-related events as a
single continuous event thereby
preventing system damage due to
cumulative overheating.
As a further enhancement, the trip
units incorporate an unpowered
thermal memory feature. In the event
that current levels cause the breaker
to trip and the breaker is immediately
reclosed, the trip unit remembers the
previous overcurrent trip and again
imposes a shorter delay time should
an additional overcurrent occur
before a sufcient cooldown period
has elapsed.
Thermal memory protects the
distribution system from cumulative
overheating caused by repeated over-
current conditions. OPTIM trip units
allow this to be turned ON or OFF.
System Alarms
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910
electronic trip units incorporate a
high load alarm capability. Set at 85%
of I
r
, the alarm will be initiated once
the load current exceeds 85% for
40 seconds. Once this occurs, the
HILD message will ash in the display
window and the power/relay module
will operate to send a remote signal.
Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units
also offer a high load alarm capability
but with more exibility. OPTIM trip
units have a high load alarm that can
be programmed to operate between
50% and 100% of I
r
.
Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units
incorporate a ground fault alarm
capability. Settings available for ground
fault alarm are the same as for ground
fault trip. Once a ground fault alarm
occurs, both local and remote signal
indication is available (OPTIM 550
is remote only).
RMS 310 RMS 310+ RMS 510 OPTIM 550 RMS 610 RMS 810 RMS 910 OPTIM 1050
rms sensing
5 functions
Front adjustable
rms sensing
6 functions
Front adjustable
Optional display
for diagnostics
and load
monitoring
Zone selective
interlocking
Optional
Arcash
Reduction
Maintenance
System
rms sensing
9 functions
Front adjustable
Zone selective
interlocking
Diagnostics
rms sensing
10 functions
Programmable
Load monitoring
Diagnostics
Zone selective
interlocking
Communications
rms sensing
9 functions
Front adjustable
Zone selective
interlocking
Load monitoring
Diagnostics
rms sensing
9 functions
Front adjustable
Zone selective
interlocking
Load monitoring
Diagnostics
Communications
Power and energy

monitoring
rms sensing
9 functions
Front adjustable
Zone selective
interlocking
Load monitoring
Diagnostics
Communications
Power and energy

monitoring
Harmonics
rms sensing
10 functions
Programmable
Zone selective
interlocking
Load monitoring
Diagnostics
Communications
Power and energy

monitoring
Harmonics
27.1-4
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
008
System Diagnostics
Whenever a circuit breaker trips, it is
normally imperative that the cause of
trip be determined quickly, the faulty
conditions rectied, and the breaker
put back into service. Digitrip RMS
510, 610, 810 and 910, and Digitrip
OPTIM electronic trip units incorporate
a complete package of systems
diagnostics to meet this challenge.
Four cause-of-trip LEDs are embedded
in the front of the trip unit case,
indicating that the cause-of-trip
was either a long delay, short delay,
instantaneous or ground fault. Remote
signal indication for cause of trip as
well as magnitude of trip information
is also available.
Breakers using the RMS 310+
electronic trip unit have the ability
to output cause-of-trip information
through the test port. The Cause-
of-Trip LED module provides trip
information via LED indication. The
Digiview and Panelmount Digiview
can be installed to provide both
cause-of-trip information and phase
current through an LCD display.
Systems Monitoring
Digitrip RMS and Digitrip OPTIM
electronic trip units offer a complete
menu of monitoring capability to
include current, power and energy,
power factor, power quality harmonics,
and other related parameters with a
high level of accuracy.
Digital Display
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 have
a large, easy-to-read four-digit alpha-
numeric display mounted on the trip
unit. The display is supported by LEDs
that indicate which parameter is being
displayed along with the unit the value
is displayed in, e.g., kA and so on.
Current Monitoring
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 trip units
are capable of monitoring currents
in individual phases (A, B, C) as well
as ground currents. Digitrip OPTIM
550 and 1050 trip units are capable
of monitoring currents in individual
phases (A, B, C) as well as neutral
and ground currents.
Values are displayed in the digital
display window in kA. Accuracy of the
current monitored values is 2% of full
scale sensor rating.
Breakers using the Digitrip 310+
electronic trip unit have the ability
to output phase current monitoring
information through the test port. The
Digiview or Panelmount Digiview can
be installed to provide phase current
through an LCD display.
For current and voltage monitoring
with 0.5% accuracy of reading that can
be used with thermal-magnetic or
electronic trip units, refer to the Power
Monitoring/Metering Module (PM3)
on Page 27.4-41.
Power and Energy Monitoring
For the trip unit to calculate true
power and energy values, a Potential
Transformer Module (PTM) is required.
This PTM is mounted internally
(R-Frame and larger) or externally
(N-Frame or smaller) to the breaker,
and provides voltage to the trip unit.
Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 trip units
are capable of monitoring peak power
demand, present power demand, and
reverse power ow in MW. Addition-
ally, both forward and reverse energy
consumption in MWh can be moni-
tored. Digitrip OPTIM 1050 trip units
can also monitor the same power and
energy parameters, but the units are
displayed in kW and kWh.
The accuracy of power monitored
values is 4% of full scale sensor/
frame rating.
The accuracy of energy monitored
values is 5% of full scale sensor/
frame rating.
Both the RMS 910 and OPTIM 1050
report power factor. Digitrip RMS 910
trip units have the additional capability
of monitoring line-to-line voltage.
For Real Power and Reactive Power
monitoring with ANSI C12.1 revenue
class accuracy that can be used with
thermal-magnetic or electronic trip
units, refer to the Power Monitoring/
Metering Module (PM3) on
Page 27.4-41.
Harmonics Monitoring
Digitrip RMS 910 and Digitrip OPTIM
1050 trip units are capable of monitor-
ing values of current harmonics.
Percentage of total harmonic content
can be monitored for each level of
harmonic content up to the 27th
harmonic. Additionally, a total
harmonic distortion (THD) value can
be calculated and displayed providing
the user with total system current
harmonic monitoring capability.
27.1-5
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
009
Time-Current Curve Shaping
Figure 27.1-1. Time-Current Curve Shaping
Note: See selection guide charts for
availability of adjustments.
Long Delay (L)
1. Long Delay Pickup
Determines the continuous
ampere rating of the breaker.
2. Long Delay Time
the breaker will carry a low level
overload before tripping.
a. I
2
t Response
I
2
t in: For coordination with other
circuit breakers with electronic
trip devices and for coordination
with thermal-magnetic
circuit breakers.
b. I
4
t Response
I
4
fuses and upstream trans-
former damage curves.
7B
7A
6
T
i
m
e
5
1
4B
4A
2A
2B
2
3
Current in Multiples
4
7
Short Delay (S)
3. Short Delay Pickup
Determines or sets the level
of fault current at which the
short-time trip delay countdown
is actuated.
4. Short Delay
Sets the amount of time the breaker
will carry both a low level and high
fault currents before tripping.
a. Flat Response
I
2
electronic trip devices.
b. I
2
t Response
I
2
fuses and thermal-magnetic
breakers.
Instantaneous (I)
5. Instantaneous Pickup
current that will actuate a trip
with no time delay.
Ground Fault (G)
6. Ground Fault Pickup
current at which the ground fault
7. Ground Fault Delay
the breaker will carry a ground
fault before tripping.
a. Flat Response
I
2
electronic ground fault settings.
b. I
2
t Response
I
2
zero sequence ground fault
relays, fuses and thermal-
magnetic breakers.
Curve Shaping
Eaton Digitrip RMS 310 trip units are
available with up to ve phase and
ground adjustments on the front of the
trip unit. Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units
are available with up to six phase and
ground adjustments on the front of the
trip unit. Selective system coordination
with both upstream and downstream
devices can be achieved to provide an
economic solution for less sophisticated
distribution systems.
For more sophisticated selective
coordination systems Digitrip RMS
510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units are
available with up to nine curve shaping
choices via switches on the front of
the unit. Curve shaping exibility is
provided by dependent long and short
delay adjustments that are based on
continuous amperes (I
r
) selection.
Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050 trip
units offer programmable curve
shaping via 10 curve shaping choices
that are programmed electronically
into the trip unit. OPTIM also offers
virtual innite settings to allow the
user to optimize coordination for a
selectively coordinated distribution
system. In addition, time-current set
points can be downloaded via a
communication system from a central
personal computer. Digitrip OPTIM is
normally applied to systems where
system integrity is very important.
27.1-6
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
010
Zone selective interlocking capabilities
are available with Digitrip RMS 310+
510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units as
well as Digitrip OPTIM 550 and
1050 trip units.
Note: Optional accessory on the OPTIM 550.
Zone selective interlocking provides
increased system protection and can
reduce arc ash risk by allowing the
breaker closest to the fault to trip
without any preset time delays. This is
achieved by setting up the distribution
system as shown in Figure 27.1-2.
The hardwired connection between
the trip units sends a restraining signal
upstream, allowing the breaker closest
to the fault to act instantaneously. Zone
selective interlocking reduces stress
on the distribution system and can
reduce arc ash risk by isolating faults
without time delays.
Figure 27.1-2. Zone Selective Interlocking
Fault 1
There are no interlocking signals.
The main breaker trip unit will initiate
the trip instantaneously.
Fault 2
The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate
the trip instantaneously to clear the
fault; and Zone 2 will send an inter-
locking signal to the Zone 1 trip unit.
The Zone 1 trip unit will begin to time
out, and in the event that the feeder
breaker in Zone 2 would not clear
the fault, the main breaker in Zone 1
will clear the fault in 0.5 seconds.
Fault 3
The branch breaker trip unit will initiate
the trip instantaneously to clear the
fault; and Zone 3 will send an interlock-
ing signal to the Zone 2 trip unit; and
Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal
to Zone 1.
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip units will
begin to time out, and in the event
that the branch breaker in Zone 3
would not clear the fault, the feeder
breaker in Zone 2 will clear the fault
in 0.3 seconds. Similarly, in the event
that the feeder breaker in Zone 2
would not clear the fault, the main
breaker in Zone 1 will clear the fault
in 0.5 seconds.
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Fault 1
Fault 2
Fault 3
Load
Breaker
Number 1
Breaker
Number 2
Breaker
Number 3
300A Pickup
No Time Delay
Zone Selective
Interlocking Wiring
600A Pickup
1200A Pickup
27.1-7
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Accessories and Modications
011
Internal Accessories
Note: For a complete listing of available
external accessories, see Volume 4Circuit
Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Section 25.
All internal accessories are of the
plug-in type and are listed for eld
installation under UL File E64983.
Internal accessories for sealed circuit
breakers are listed under UL File E7819
for factory installation only. The
available plug-in accessories include
the following:
Alarm (signal)/lockout switch
Auxiliary switch
Shunt trip
Low energy shunt trip
Undervoltage release mechanism
Typical Internal Plug-in Accessory Installed
in K-Frame Circuit Breaker
Different accessory wiring options are
available to satisfy most circuit breaker
mounting applications. The standard
wiring conguration is pigtail leads
exiting the rear of the base directly
behind the accessory. Optional
congurations include a terminal
block mounted on the same side of the
base as the accessory, leads exiting the
side of the base where the accessory
is mounted, and leads exiting the rear
of the base on the side opposite the
accessory. If accessory leads longer
than 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) are
required, side-mounted terminal
blocks should be used.
Alarm (Signal)/Lockout Switch
The alarm (signal)/lockout switch
monitors circuit breaker trip status and
provides remote signaling and inter-
locking capabilities when the circuit
breaker trips. For two-, three- and
four-pole circuit breakers, the alarm
(signal)/lockout switch consists of one
or two SPDT switches assembled to a
plug-in module mounted in retaining
slots in the top of the trip unit. The
SPDT switch contacts are identied as
make and break contacts. When the
circuit breaker trips, the make contact
closes and the break contact opens.
Alarm (Signal)/Lockout Switch
Auxiliary Switch
The auxiliary switch provides circuit
breaker contact status information
by monitoring the position of the
molded crossbar containing the
moving contact arms. The auxiliary
switch is used for remote signaling
and interlocking purposes, and
consists of one or two SPDT switches
assembled to a plug-in module
mounted in retaining slots in the top
of the trip unit. Each SPDT switch has
one a and one b contact. When
the circuit breaker contacts are open,
the a contact is open and the b
contact is closed.
Auxiliary Switch
Shunt Trip
The shunt trip provides remote controlled
tripping of the circuit breaker. The shunt
trip consists of an intermittent rated
solenoid with a tripping plunger and
a cutoff switch assembled to a plug-in
module. When required for ground
fault protection applications, certain
AC rated shunt trips are suitable for
operation at 55% of rated voltage.
Available in most AC and DC voltages.
Note: Approximate unlatching time
6 milliseconds. Approximate total
circuit breaker contact opening time
18 milliseconds. Endurance4000 electrical
operations plus 1000 mechanical opera-
tions. Supply voltages suitable for use with
Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included
with accessory kits.
Shunt Trip
OPTIM Communications Kit
Eatons OPTIM Communications Kit
provides the option to eld install
PowerNet communications into a K-, L-
or N-Frame OPTIM 550 breaker. OPTIM
1050 trip units come equipped with
communications as standard.
OPTIM Communications Kit
Make
Break
a
b
ST
a
27.1-8
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Accessories and Modications
012
Low Energy Shunt Trip
Low energy shunt trip devices are
designed to operate from low energy
output signals from dedicated current
sensors typically applied in ground
fault protection schemes. However,
with a proper control voltage source,
they may be applied in place of
conventional trip devices for special
applications. Flux paths surrounding
permanent magnets used in the shunt
trip assembly hold a charged spring
poised in readiness to operate the
circuit breaker trip mechanism. When
a 100 microfarad capacitor charged to
28 Vdc is discharged through the shunt
trip coil, the resultant ux opposes the
permanent magnet ux eld, which
releases the stored energy in the
spring to trip the circuit breaker. As
the circuit breaker resets, the reset
arm is actuated by the circuit breaker
handle, resetting the shunt trip. The
plug-in module is mounted in retaining
slots in the top of the trip unit. Coil is
intermittent-rated only. Cutoff provisions
required in control circuit.
Low Energy Shunt Trip
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
The undervoltage release mechanism
monitors a voltage (typically a line
voltage) and trips the circuit breaker
when the voltage falls to between 70
and 35% of the solenoid coil rating.
Note: Undervoltage release mechanism
accessories are not designed for, and
should not be used as, circuit interlocks.
The undervoltage release mechanism
consists of a continuous rated
solenoid with a plunger and tripping
lever assembled to a plug-in module.
The tab on the tripping lever resets
the undervoltage release mechanism
when normal voltage has been
restored and the circuit breaker handle
is moved to the reset (OFF) position.
With no voltage applied to the under-
voltage release mechanism, the circuit
breaker contacts will not touch when a
closing operation is attempted.
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
External Accessories
Note: For a complete listing of available
external accessories, see Volume 4Circuit
Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Section 25.
Non-Padlockable Handle Block
The nonlockable handle block secures
the circuit breaker handle in either the
ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation
allows the circuit breaker to trip when
the handle block holds the circuit
breaker handle in the ON position.)
The device is positioned over the circuit
breaker handle and secured by a set-
screw to deter accidental operation
of the circuit breaker handle. (Field
installation only.)
Non-Padlockable Handle Block
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
The padlockable handle lock hasp
allows the handle to be locked in the
ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation
allows the circuit breaker to trip when
the handle lock holds the circuit breaker
handle in the ON position.) The hasp
mounts on the circuit breaker cover
within the trimline. The cover is
predrilled on both sides of the
operating handle so that the hasp
can be mounted on either side of the
handle. The hasp will accommodate
up to three padlocks with 1/4-inch
(6.4 mm) shackles. One per circuit
breaker. (Field installation only.)
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
Key Interlock Kit (Lock Not Included)
The key interlock is used to externally
lock the circuit breaker handle in the
OFF position. When the key interlock is
locked, an extended deadbolt blocks
movement of the circuit breaker
handle. Uniquely coded keys are
removable only with the deadbolt
extended. Each coded key controls a
group of circuit breakers for a given
specic customer installation.
The key interlock assembly consists
of a mounting kit and a purchaser
supplied deadbolt lock. The mounting
kit comprises a mounting plate, which
is secured to the circuit breaker cover
in either the left- or right-pole position;
key interlock mounting hardware; and
a wire seal. Specic mounting kits are
required for individual key interlock
types. (Field installation only.)
Key Interlock Kit
Padlockable Handle Block
The device is positioned in the cover
opening to prevent handle movement.
Will accommodate one 5/16-inch
(8.0 mm) padlock.
Padlockable Handle Block
ST
LE
UV
CA08104001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com/consultants
27.2-1
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
013
Eaton molded-case switches (MCS)
are UL 489 devices that dont have
thermal protection, but do have a self-
protecting high-magnetic trip setting.
Molded-case switches are applied
when a compact high-capacity
disconnect device is necessary.
Accessories that can be installed in
molded-case circuit breakers are also
available for molded-case switches.
The most common application for a
molded-case switch would be as a
main disconnect for a panelboard
or a loadcenter. Available from 100 to
2500A, molded-case switches provide
a compact high-capacity disconnect
device along with the added benets
of a molded-case circuit breaker
without the thermal protection.
It provides no overcurrent protection,
overload or low level fault. The MCS
is equipped with a high instantaneous
magnetic xed trip unit. The xed
magnetic trip is factory preset to
interrupt high fault currents at or
above its preset level. MCS is self
protecting within its withstand rating.
See Table 27.2-1.
Motor Circuit Protectors
Application exibility of Eaton motor
circuit protectors (Type GMCP/HMCP/
HMCPE) is enhanced by the higher
interrupting ratings and current limiting
characteristics designed into the line.
These devices are available from
31200A in 63, 100, 150, 250, 400, 600,
800 and 1200A frame sizes.
The motor circuit protectors are
designed for application in individual
motor circuits in combination motor
starter units. Motor circuit protectors
operate on the magnetic principle with
a current sensing element in each pole
to provide short-circuit protection.
The motor circuit protector design
permits the most effective protection
possible against low-level faults while
offering circuit breaker convenience,
quick-make quick-break action,
deadfront safety and prevention
of single phasing.
The GMCP and HMCPE are 480V
devices rated between 3100A. The
HMCP is a 600V device available in ve
frames and rated between 31200A.
The MCP is designed to comply with
the applicable requirements of
Underwriters Laboratories Standard
UL 489, Canadian Standards
Association Standard C22.2 No. 5,
and International Electrotechnical
Commission Recommendations
IEC 157-1.
An innovative design of internal
components allows higher MCP-starter
combination interrupting ratings.
The MCP is marked to permit proper
electrical application within the
assigned equipment ratings.
The MCP is a recognized component
(UL File E7819) and complies with the
applicable requirements of Underwriters
Laboratories Standard UL 489. It is also
designed to comply with the applicable
requirements of Canadian Standards
Association Standard C22.2 No. 5,
and International Electrotechnical
Commission Recommendations
IEC 157-1. The interrupting rating
is dened on the assembled
equipment nameplate.
Table 27.2-1. Molded-Case Switch Short-Circuit Current Ratings at 60 Hz Only
(Maximum Fault Current at Which Device can be Applied in kAIC)
MCS
Frame
Ampere
Rating
Short-Circuit Current Rating
240V 480V 600V 250 Vdc
GD
EHD
FD
100
100
150
65
18
65
22
14
35
18
10
10
10
HFD
JD
HJD
150
250
250
100
65
100
65
35
65
25
18
25
22
10
22
DK
KD
HKD
400
400
400
65
65
100
35
65
25
35
10
10
22
LD
HLD
MDL
600
600
800
65
100
65
35
65
50
25
35
25
22
25
22
HMDL
ND
HND
800
1200
1200
100
65
100
65
50
65
35
25
35
25
RD
EGK
JGK
2000
125
250
125
100
100
65
65
65
50
35
42
42
LGK
LGK
NGK
RGK
400
600
1200
2000
100
100
100
125
65
65
65
65
35
35
35
50
42
42
27.2-2
For more information visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Selection DataMotor Circuit Protectors
014
Motor Protection
In line with 2008 NEC 430.6(A)
circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse rating
selections are based on full load
currents for induction motors running
at speeds normal for belted motors
and motors with normal torque
characteristics using data taken from
NEC Table 430.250 (three-phase).
Actual motor nameplate ratings will
be used for selecting motor running
overload protection. Motors built
special for low speeds, high torque
characteristics, special starting
conditions and applications will
require other considerations as
of the NEC.
pickup settings.
Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse
ampere rating selections are in
line with maximum rules given in
NEC 430.52 and Table 430.250. Based
on known characteristics of Eaton
type breakers, specic units are
recommended. The current ratings
are no more than the maximum limits
set by the NEC rules for motors with
code letters F to V or without code
letters. Motors with lower code letters
will require further considerations.
based on:
1. AmbientOutside enclosure not
2. Motor startingInfrequent
3. Locked rotorMaximum 6 times
motor FLA.
4. Locked rotorMaximum 6 times
motor FLA.
may not be set more than 1300% of
with NEC 430.52 (except for NEMA
Design B energy efcient motors,
which can be set up to 1700%).
ratings. Higher interrupting rating
types may be required to satisfy
specic system application
requirements.
For motor full load currents of 208V
and 200V, increase the corresponding
230V motor values by 10 and 15%
respectively.
Amperes
(NEC) FLA
Maximum
Amperes
Recommended Eaton
Circuit
Breaker
Motor Circuit
Protector Type HMCP
230V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
3.6
5.2
6.8
9.6
10
10
15
20
15
20
25
30
15
15
15
20
7
15
15
30
2170
45150
45150
90300
5
7-1/2
10
15
15.2
22
28
42
30
40
50
80
50
70
90
150
30
50
60
90
30
50
50
70
90300
150500
150500
210700
20
25
30
40
54
68
80
104
100
125
150
200
175
225
250
350
100
125
150
150
100
150
150
150
3001000
4501500
4501500
7502500
50
60
75
100
130
154
192
248
250
300
350
450
400
500
600
800
200
225
300
400
150
250
400
400
7502500
12502500
20004000
20004000
125
150
200
312
360
480
600
700
1000
1000
1200
1600
500
600
700
600
600
600
18006000
18006000
18006000
460V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.8
2.6
3.4
4.8
6
6
6
10
6
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
7
7
7
15
2170
2170
2170
45150
5
7-1/2
10
15
7.6
11
14
21
15
20
25
40
25
35
45
70
15
25
35
45
15
30
30
50
45150
90300
90300
150500
20
25
30
40
27
34
40
52
50
60
70
100
90
110
125
175
50
70
70
100
50
70
100
100
150500
210700
3001000
3001000
50
60
75
100
65
77
96
124
125
150
175
225
200
150
300
400
110
125
150
175
150
150
150
150
4501500
7502500
7502500
7502500
125
150
200
156
180
240
300
350
450
500
600
800
225
250
350
250
400
400
12502500
20004000
20004000
575V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.4
2.1
2.7
3.9
3
6
6
10
6
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
3
7
7
7
930
2170
2170
2170
5
7-1/2
10
15
6.1
9
11
17
15
20
20
30
20
30
35
60
15
20
25
40
15
15
30
30
45150
45150
90300
90300
20
25
30
40
22
27
32
41
40
50
60
80
70
90
100
125
50
60
60
80
50
50
50
100
150500
150500
150500
3001000
50
60
75
100
52
62
77
99
100
110
150
175
175
200
250
300
100
125
150
175
100
150
150
150
3001000
7502500
7502500
7502500
125
150
200
125
144
192
225
300
350
400
450
600
200
225
300
250
250
400
12502500
12502500
20004000
27.2-3
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Selection DataCurrent Limiting Circuit Breakers
015
Eaton offers one of the most complete
lines of both fusible and non-fused
current limiting breakers, and add-on
current limiting modules in the
industry. The industrial breakers are
available in current limiting versions
with interrupting capacities up to
200 kA at 480V without fuses in the
same physical size as standard and
high interrupting capacity breakers.
Eaton also manufactures both fused
and non-fused current limiting devices
200 kA at 600 Vac. See Section 27.4 for
complete selection data for current
limiting circuit breakers and add-on
current limiting modules.
The current limiting breakers use a
reverse loop stationary contact. When
current is owing through the contacts
of these breakers, the positions of the
reverse loop and moving contact arm
induce opposing magnetic elds. The
resulting ux lines cause rapid contact
blow-apart under these conditions,
resulting in very high interrupting
capacities and provide current
limiting characteristics.
Current limiting breakers are available
from 152500A and have an interrupting
rating up to 200 kA at 480V. These
breakers are most commonly applied
when very high fault levels are avail-
able and in series rating applications
where the current limiting capability
of these breakers are used upstream
in series combinations.
Circuit breakers 600A and below that
are current limiting have frame catalog
numbers that end with the letter C.
For example, the F-Frame model that is
current limiting has a catalog number
FDC. In accordance with UL circuit
breaker marking requirements, the
nameplate on the breaker is also
labeled current limiting.
Current Limit-R BreakersNon-Fused
FCL Current Limit-R Breaker
The Current Limit-R
molded-case
circuit breaker was developed with
interrupting ratings up to 200,000A at
480 Vac to provide complete system
protection against faults, including:
1. Overloads, by using inverse time
current tripping characteristics.
2. Low-level short-circuits, by using
instantaneous and/or short-time
delay tripping characteristics.
3. High-level short-circuits, by using
ultra high-speed, blow-apart,
current limiting contacts.
Current Limit-R circuit breakers can
be used in series with Eaton standard
molded-case circuit breakers with
listed interrupting ratings as low as
10,000A in systems capable of deliver-
ing fault currents as high as 200,000A.
The excellent current limiting properties
of Current Limit-R breakers completely
protect all Eaton downstream series
circuit breakers applied within their
voltage ratings.
The high level current-limiting action is
achieved by the use of special design,
blow-apart contacts. The opening
speed of the contacts is amplied by
the repulsion force in the slot motor to
effectively separate the contacts under
high level fault conditions in less than
one millisecond. The rapid rise of arc
voltage introduces impedance into the
system, thus limiting the amount of the
otherwise available fault current.
Current Limit-R current limiting circuit
breakers incorporate all the advantages
and features of conventional molded-
case circuit breakers. They are available
in two- and three-pole versions in
two physical frame sizes and three
continuous current frame ratings.
Type FCL has a maximum continuous
current frame rating of 100A. It is
equipped with a conventional, non-
interchangeable, thermal-magnetic-
type trip unit with individual ampere
ratings. The Type LCL is available
with frames having maximum
continuous current ratings of either
250 or 400A. Overload and low level
short-circuit protection is provided by
a SELTRONIC electronic trip unit that
uses the individual rating plug concept
for determining the continuous
rating of the breaker. Rating plugs
are available with either xed or
adjustable ampere ratings.
27.2-4
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Selection DataCurrent Limiting Circuit Breakers
016
TRI-PAC Fused Current Limiting Breakers
LA TRI-PAC Breaker
The increase in demand for electrical
power in modern commercial and
industrial buildings has resulted in
electrical services becoming substan-
tially larger. In some low voltage
distribution systems, available short-
circuit currents can exceed 100,000
symmetrical rms amperes. Fault
currents of this intensity may exceed
the interrupting ratings of molded-case
breakers. As a result, larger expensive
circuit interrupting devices that could
withstand the thermal and magnetic
stresses associated with currents of
this value have had to be used. High
interrupting capacity current limiting
devices have been developed that
will restrict short-circuit current. If
applied correctly, they may be used in
conjunction with molded-case circuit
breakers to provide adequate and
economical protection.
The TRI-PAC
breaker was developed

for this application and so named
because it affords TRIple-PACkage
protection with (1) time delay thermal
trip, (2) instantaneous magnetic trip
and (3) current limiting protection,
combined and coordinated in a compact
and economical device. These protec-
tive actions are so coordinated that
overcurrents and low magnitude faults
are cleared by the thermal action;
normal short circuits are cleared by
the magnetic action; and abnormal
short circuits, above an established
value, are cleared by the current
limiting device. Thus, unless a severe
short-circuit occurs, the current limiter
is unaffected and its replacement is
held to a minimum.
TRI-PAC breakers are available in ratings
from 151600A and have a UL listed
interrupting capacity of 200,000A
at up to 600 Vac and also have an
interrupting capacity of 100,000A
at up to 250 Vdc.
The TRI-PAC breaker offers all of the
advantages of the economical molded-
case breaker and the current limiter
is retained, while the disadvantages
of separately mounted devices
are eliminated.
Add-on Current Limiting Modules
Current Limiting Add-On Modules
The current limiting breaker modules
use a reverse loop stationary contact
arm. When high short-circuit current is
owing through the contacts of these
modules, the positions of the reverse
loop and moving contact arm induce
opposing magnetic elds. The resulting
ux lines cause rapid contact blow-apart
under fault conditions, resulting in
very high interrupting capacities and
providing current limiting characteris-
tics. Current limiting breaker modules
in combination with select Series C
and Series G breakers, are available
with interrupting ratings up to 200 kA
at 600 Vac.
The combination of the current limit-
ing breaker or HMCP and the current
limiter module provides the following
system protection:
Overloads, by using inverse time
current tripping characteristics of
the molded-case circuit breaker
Low-level short circuits, by using
delay tripping characteristics of the
molded-case circuit breaker
High-level short circuits, by using
ultra-high-speed, blow-apart
contacts of the current limiting
module in series with the circuit
breaker contacts. The high-level
current limiting action is achieved
by the use of special design, blow-
apart contacts. The opening speed
of the contacts is amplifed by the
repulsion force in the slot motor and
reverse loop stationary contact arm
to effectively separate the contacts
under high-level fault conditions in
less than 1 millisecond. The rapid
rise of arc voltage introduces
impedance into the system, thus
limiting the amount of the otherwise
available fault current
27.2-5
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Information100% Rated Circuit Breakers
017
100% Rated Circuit Breakers
100% rated circuit breakers are tested
inside a minimum size enclosure to
UL 489 for application at 100% of the
breakers continuous current rating.
100% rated circuit breakers are equipped
with electronic trip units and applied
with 90C cable rated at 75C ampacity.
To apply 100% rated breakers in
switchboards and panelboards,
additional tests are required to meet
UL 67 and UL 891. Eaton molded-case
circuit breaker frames K-, L-, N-, MDL
and R-, 702000A, can be applied at
100% of their rated continuous current
as long as the breaker is installed in its
minimum size enclosure, including
ventilation. 100% rated breakers are
applied to distribution system to provide
installation cost savings. The amount
of savings that can be realized is
dependent on the application.
Figure 27.2-1. Breaker Nameplate
A 100% rated breaker receives its UL listing
based on tests conducted in a minimum
size enclosure with minimum ventilation
(if required) and minimum cable sizes,
as stated on this nameplate example.
The amount of protection designed
into a distribution system is often based
on economics. However, each project
should be furnished with a reliable
distribution system that delivers the
most effective protection possible for
each investment dollar.
Reliable and economic system design
can be usually achieved with Eatons
circuit breakers that are UL listed for
application at 100% of their ratings
instead of standard breakers that in
actual use are applied at 80% of their
frame ratings in an enclosure.
The concept between a system design
using standard breakers and that
using 100% rated breakers is
uncomplicatedbut there are no
shortcut methods for determining
which design (and devices) is the
best choice for a given system. Good
engineering practice requires a careful
system analysis beginning with the
lowest feeder and concluding with
the main device.
Also included in the system analysis
must be all present and future
factors that could affect the size
and/or quantity of the breakers and
associated hardware, such as switch-
board bus, busway, cable and conduit.
Other factors to consider are loads
(continuous and noncontinuous) and
system expansions and transformers
with provisions for forced air cooling.
The NEC
The rules and intent of the National
Electrical Code governing the use of
standard or 100% rated breakers must
be understood before recommending
or applying such devices.
Section 210.20(A) Continuous and
Noncontinuous Loads of the National
Electrical Code addresses differences
between applications of standard rated
breakers and 100% rated breakers.
(Signicant sections are in bold
face type.)
Figure 27.2-2. NEC Reference
Section 210.20(A) covers standard
breakers, and the exception 100%
rated breakers. NEC Section 210.20(A)
and the Section 210.20(A) exception
can be expressed by these formulas:
Standard 80% Rated Design
Noncontinuous Load +
125% of the Continuous Load
= Total Minimum Load
Special 100% Rated Design
Noncontinuous Load +
Continuous Load
= Total Minimum Load
The necessity for these NEC require-
ments results from circuit breaker
testing procedures.
A molded-case circuit breaker is
tested in open air to verify its name-
plate ampere rating. The nameplate
species a value of current the circuit
breaker is rated to carry continuously
without tripping within specic
operating temperature guidelines.
In most instances, a breaker is applied
in an enclosure and performance could
be adversely affected by slow heat
dissipation and temperature rise. These
factors must be considered regarding
the ability of the breaker to comply
with its nameplate ampere rating.
Testing Conditions and Operating Conditions
There are distinct differences between
these conditions that are addressed in
NEC Section 210.20(A) by introducing
an overcurrent device and associated
hardware sizing factor. The sizing
factor ensures reliable equipment
performance under realistic condi-
tions. Section 210.20(A) is the key to
making the best system design choice.
For feeders, Section 215.2(A)
addresses the rating of all overcurrent
devices that have been tested in open
air but are applied in an enclosure. The
thermal response of an overcurrent
device applied in an enclosure will
usually be faster than in open air,
thus dictating the 125% requirement.
The exception allows for properly tested
and listed overcurrent devices to be
applied at 100% of their nameplate rating.
Breaker
Nameplate
Example
100%
Application
enclosure
and
wire ampacity
requirements.
Where a feeder supplies continu-
ous loads or any combination of
continuous and noncontinuous
loads, the rating of the overcur-
rent device shall not be less than
the noncontinuous load plus
125% of the continuous load.
The minimum circuit conductor
size without the application of any
ampacity adjustment or correction
factors shall have an allowable
ampacity equal to or greater than
the noncontinuous load plus
Exception: Where the assembly
including the overcurrent devices
protecting the feeder(s) are listed
for operation at 100% of their
rating, neither the ampere rating
of the overcurrent device nor the
ampacity of the feeder conductors
shall be less than the sum of
the continuous load plus the
noncontinuous load.
Note: A continuous load as dened
by NEC Article 100 is a load where
the maximum current is expected to
continue for 3 hours or more.
27.2-6
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
018
There is a Difference Between 100% Rated
Breakers and 100% Rated Assemblies
Special attention should be given
to the word assembly in the NEC
Exception. Normally, an assembly
is listed for 100% operation only
after being successfully tested as
an assembly per UL requirements.
For an assembly to receive a 100%
rated UL listing, it must be tested
separately by UL project engineers.
Panelboards are tested to UL 67,
switchboards tested to UL 891.
Installing 100% rated breakers in
an assembly does not automatically
make it acceptable for a 100% rating.
Figure 27.2-3. Conductor Requirements
Table 27.2-3. The ApplicationThese Examples Illustrate the Cost Savings when the 100% Rated Approach is Used
Selection of either a 100% rated design or standard design must result from a system analysis beginning with the lowest feeder and concluding with
the systems main device. For these system examples, assume that all assembly testing has been successfully completed and either the 100% rated
design or standard design can be selected. Each system is hypothetical and either approach will meet safety requirements. Loads were arbitrarily
selected. The load table includes the calculations for minimum total loads in conformance with NEC Section 210.20(A).
Table 27.2-4. Standard 80% Rated Design
(Noncontinuous Load) + (125%) (Continuous Load) per NEC Section 210.20(A).
Nearest standard size, not less than calculated value.

The NEC allows
the breaker to be
rated at 100% of
its frame size in
an assembly,
provided that
90C wire is
applied at the
75C ampacity.
90C Wire
90C Wire
A visual comparison of breaker, bus and cable sizes in the Three-Phase Distribution System
examples (line diagrams) reveals how a 100% rated system design can provide cost savings.
Load Feeder #1 Feeder #2 Feeder #3 Main Description
Continuous 400A 800A 0 1200A Three-phase distribution
System line diagrams
Noncontinuous 200A 0 1000 1200A
Noncontinuous Load + 125% of the Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load Line Diagram
Description Feeder No. 1 Feeder No. 2 Feeder No. 3 Main
Calculation
per NEC
of minimum
total load
200 + (1.25) (400)

=700A
0 + (1.25) (800)
=1000A
600 + 0 = 600A 2250A
Breaker
frame (F)
trip (T)
rating
(F) (T)
800A
/700A
(F) (T)
1200A
/1000A
(F) (T)
600A/600A
(F) (T)
2500A
/2500A
Bus/cable
rating
800A
1000A 600A 2500A
2500A F
2500A T
800A F
700A T
1200A F
1000A T
600A F
600A T
2500A Bus
Pnlbd. 600A Bus MCC 800A Bus
2350 kcmil,
Cu per phase
2500 kcmil,
Cu per phase
3400 kcmil,
Cu per phase
1000A Busway
Feeder
#1
Feeder
#2
Feeder
#3
27.2-7
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
019
Table 27.2-5. Standard 100% Rated Design
(Noncontinuous Load) + (Continuous Load) per NEC Section 210.20(A) Exception.
Sum of all NEC calculated minimum feeder loads.

Table 27.2-6. The ResultSavings in Both Switchboard and Cable Costs
Table 27.2-7. Available 100% Rated Circuit Breakers
Thermal-magnetic LG requires venting 7.00 square inches above and 7.00 square inches below on the front face of enclosure.
Use with 9.00-inch (228.6 mm) tee connector.

Noncontinuous Load + Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load Line Diagram
Description Feeder No. 1 Feeder No. 2 Feeder No. 3 Main
Calculation
per NEC
of minimum
total load
200 + 400 = 600A 0 + 800 = 800A 600 + 0 = 600A 2000A
Breaker
frame (F)
trip (T)
rating
(F) (T)
600A/600A
(F) (T)
800A/800A
(F) (T)
600A/600A
(F) (T)
2000A/2000A
Bus/cable
rating
600A 800A 600A 2000A
Design Minimum Total Load
(Amperes)
Potential System
Savings
Standard 700 1000 600 2250 100% rated breaker systems
can potentially represent
signicant economic
advantages:
In lower rated and sized
breakers, less cable and
signicant reductions in
equipment oor and wall
space. These savings can be
realized when the results of
a systems analysis favor the
100% rated design approach.
100% rated 600 800 600 2000
Results The standard design
requires higher rated,
more expensive breaker
and bus. Although the
minimum total load is
700A, most breakers and
hardware are available
only in standard sizes
requiring even more
expensive nearest
standard size breakers
and hardware.
Dramatic economic
advantages are
achieved by using
the 100% rated
design. Substantial
savings result from
using an 800A
busway and signi-
cant savings are
also provided by
the smaller breaker
frame and cable size.
Calculations indicate
either approach
results in the same
size breaker and hard-
ware. A 100% rated
breaker would be
more expensive
although the nal
decision could rest
on whether or not
future load growth
is anticipated.
The 100% approach results
in the same frame size
breaker with a savings in
conductor material cost.
Additionally, Eaton offers a
2000A frame 100%-rated
breaker, which is less
expensive than the 2500A
frame 80%-rated.
Frames Rating
at 480V
Trip
Units
JG-Frame 50/100/250A
Minimum enclosure size
26.00 x 18.00 x 8.00 in (660.4 x 457.2 x 203.2 mm)
JGE-C 25 kA
JGS-C 35 kA
JGH-C 65 kA
JGC-C 100 kA
Thermal-magnetic, Digitrip 310+
K-Frame 125/250/400A
Minimum enclosure size
24.00 x 15.00 x 6.00 in (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm)
CKD 35 kA
CHKD 65 kA
Digitrip 310
LG-Frame
250/400/600A
Minimum enclosure size with ventilation
28.00 x 19.00 x 8.00 in (711.2 x 482.6 x 203.2 mm)
LGE-C 35 kA
LGS-C 50 kA
LGH-C 65 kA
Thermal-magnetic, Digitrip 310+
L-Frame 125/250/400/600A
24.00 x 15.00 x 6.00 in (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm)
CLD 35 kA
CHLD 65 kA
CLDC 100 kA
Digitrip 310, Digitrip OPTIM
M-Frame 800A
42.00 x 18.00 x 7.50 in (1066.8 x 457.2 x 190.5 mm)
CMDL 50 kA
CHMDL 65 kA
Digitrip 310
N-Frame 800/1200A
42.00 x 22.75 x 11.50 in (1066.8 x 577.9 x 292.1 mm)
CND 50 kA
CHND 65 kA
CNDC 100 kA
Digitrip 310, Digitrip OPTIM
R-Frame 1600/2000A
21.50 x 18.00 x 13.00 in (546.1 x 457.2 x 330.2 mm)
CRD 65 kA
CRDC 100 kA
Digitrip 310/510/610/810/910, Digitrip OPTIM
2000A F
2000A T
600A F
600A TT
800A F
800A TT
600A F
600A TT
2000A Bus
Pnlbd. 600A Bus MCC 600A Bus
2350 kcmil,
Cu per phase
2350 kcmil,
Cu per phase
2600 kcmil,
Cu per phase
800A Busway
Feeder
#1
Feeder
#2
Feeder
#3
27.2-8
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application InformationSeries Rated Systems
020
Series Rated Systems
Series rating is a short-circuit
interrupting rating assigned to a
combination of two or more over-
current devices connected in series.
The short-circuit interrupting rating
of the upstream device must be equal
to or greater than the available fault
current. Downstream breakers,
however, are not fully rated for the
systems available fault current. Series
combinations must be tested to
UL 489. Series ratings are applied to
distribution systems where short-
circuit coordination is not required.
The Eaton listing of available series
rating combinations are shown in the
applications section of this document.
Under most circumstances, selection
of a series rated system will reduce
initial cost and size, because down-
stream breakers are not fully rated
for the prospective short-circuit fault
current at their point of application.
The interrupting rating of the
upstream breaker must always be
equal to or greater than the available
fault current at its line terminals. In
addition, downstream breakers must
have been tested in combination with
the upstream breaker and shown to be
protected by the upstream breaker at
the assigned series rated interrupting
rating. The net result is that the system
can be assigned a series rated or
integrated rating higher than the
rating of the downstream breaker when
it is tested or applied alone. Design of
the system and selection of breakers is
based on short-circuit interruption test
specied and witnessed by UL.
Because of their blow-open design,
most molded-case circuit breakers are
current limiting to some degree. In a
series rated application and in the event
of a major fault, both upstream and
downstream breakers open, protecting
the lower-rated downstream devices
by limiting the let-through current.
To develop a series rated protective
system, it is suggested that the
design engineer, after completing
preliminary steps:
Dene available fault current at
the line side terminals of the
upstream breaker
Select an upstream breaker with an
interrupting rating equal to or greater
than the available fault current
Verify the series tested interrupting
ratings of the selected combination
of breakers by referring to the tables
in this section
Conrm, during installation, that the
correct breakers have been selected
by checking the nameplates appearing
on the end-use equipment
Evaluating the Protection Systems
Designed properly, series rated and
fully rated systems protect electrical
equipment with equal effectiveness.
But initial cost and continuity of service
can vary widely depending on the
inherent characteristics of the system,
and on the design philosophy adopted.
Fully Rated System
All breakers are rated for full fault
current at their point of application in
accordance with the National Electrical
Code. The continuity of service pro-
vided by the system is greater than a
series rated system.
Series Rated System
A series rated system is less costly
than a fully rated system. The
upstream breaker is always fully rated,
but the interrupting ratings of down-
stream breakers are normally lower.
Service continuity can be acceptable
after initial startup, because the lower-
level arcing faults most likely occur
after that time can be cleared by the
downstream breaker alone. However,
under high fault conditions, both the
upstream and downstream breakers
would open, eliminating service to
the affected portion of the system.
Therefore, it is not possible to achieve
selective coordination for all magni-
tudes of available fault current with
a series rated system.
National Electrical Code Requirements
Requirements of the National Electrical
Code for short-circuit ratings may now
be met by equipment that is marked
with ratings adequate for the available
fault current at their point of application
in the electrical system. Refer to the
current NEC for specic requirements.
General Discussion
Available Short-Circuit Current.
Service equipment must be suitable
for the short-circuit current available
at its supply terminal.
Approval. The conductors and equipment
required or permitted by the Code will
be acceptable only if approved. See
Examination of Equipment for Safety
and Examination, Identication,
Installation and Use of Equipment.
See denitions of Approved,
Identied, Labeled and Listed.
Examination, Identication, Installation
and Use of Equipment
1. Examination: in judging equip-
ment, considerations such as the
following should be evaluated.
a. Suitability for installation
and use in conformity with
the provisions of this Code.
Suitability of equipment use
may be identied by a descrip-
tion marked on or provided
with a product to identify the
suitability of the product for a
specic purpose, environment
or application. Suitability of
equipment may be evidenced
by listing or labeling.
b. Mechanical strength and
durability, including, for parts
designed to enclose and protect
other equipment, the adequacy
of the protection thus provided.
c. Wire-ending and
connection space.
d. Electrical insulation.
e. Heating effects under normal
conditions of use and also
under abnormal conditions
likely to arise in service.
f. Arcing effects.
g. Classication by type, size,
voltage, current capacity
and specic use.
h. Other factors that contribute to
the practical safeguarding of
persons using or likely to come
in contact with the equipment.
2. Installation and use: listed or
labeled equipment must be used
or installed in accordance with
any instructions included in the
listing or labeling.
Interrupting Rating
Equipment intended to break current at
fault levels must have an interrupting
rating sufcient for the system voltage
and the current that is available at the
terminals of the equipment. Equipment
intended to break current at other than
fault levels must have an interrupting
rating at system voltage sufcient for
the current that must be interrupted.
27.2-9
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application InformationSeries Rated System
021
Circuit Impedance and Other
Characteristics
The overcurrent protective devices,
the total impedance, the component
short-circuit withstanding ratings, and
other characteristics of the circuit to
be protected should be so selected
and coordinated as to permit the
circuit protective devices used to
clear a fault without the occurrence
of extensive damage to the electrical
components of the circuit. This fault
will be assumed to be either two or
more of the circuit conductors, or
between any circuit conductor and
the grounding conductor or enclosing
metal raceway.
Motor Contribution
The fault current contribution of
motors connected between series
rated breakers must be considered.
Article 240.86(C) in the 2005 edition of
the National Electrical Code states that
for series ratings the sum of the motor,
full-load currents cannot exceed 1%
of the interrupting rating of the lower-
rated circuit breaker. The actual fault
current contribution from induction
motors is about four times their full-
load current (impedance value of
25%). For example, if the downstream
branch circuit breakers used in a series
rated combination have an interrupting
rating of 14,000A rms symmetrical for a
480V system, the maximum full-load
current of motors connected to that
panel from the branch circuit breakers
is 140A (1%). For typical induction
motors, this is equivalent to a total
horsepower at 480V of approximately
115 horsepower.
Design/Test Considerations for Series
Coordinated Circuit Breakers
Test procedures for all Eaton molded-
case circuit breakers intended for
application in series connected
systems are in full compliance with
all applicable paragraphs of the latest
edition of UL 489.
Note: For further information, see IEEE
Standards 141, 242 and 446.
The entire system is tested because
such tests are the only way to correctly
verify the performance of overcurrent
devices under short-circuit conditions.
Calibration, interruption, trip-out
and dielectric withstand tests are
performed. Breakers in their as-
received condition are used for
the interrupting and intermediate
interrupting capability tests. If agree-
able to concerned parties, previously
tested samples may be used. The
interrupting rating of the line-side
circuit breaker is equal to or greater
than the maximum available fault
current on the distribution system at
its point of intended application.
Tests comply also with the intent of
the proposed revisions to applicable
IEC documents.
Tests are completed in a well-dened
sequence:
Interrupting tests
Intermediate interrupting tests
Trip-out tests
Dielectric voltage-withstand tests
Eatons Series C circuit breakers
intended for application in series rated
systems are subjected, in the following
sequence, to interrupting ability, inter-
mediate interrupting ability, trip-out,
and dielectric voltage-withstand tests.
During testing of the series rated circuit
breakers, each breaker is mounted in
the smallest enclosure in which it is
to be used; openings in the enclosure
do not exceed 10% of its total external
area, and there are no openings
directly opposite a vent in a circuit
breaker case. The two enclosures are
connected by a 12-inch (304.8 mm)
conduit of any diameter. Each lead
from test terminals to the line-side
breaker is less than 4 feet (1.2m) per
breaker, and each load shorting the
load-side breaker(s) is sized based on
the rating of the load-side breaker. The
combined length of the lead from the
line-side overcurrent protective device
of the load-side breaker and from the
load-side breaker to the shorting point,
is less than 4 feet (1.2m) per pole.
Exception: the breakers may be
mounted in the end-use equipment
that will contain them and is marked
for use with the series combination.
The load-side breaker is positioned
as close as possible to the line-side
breaker(s). Line and load leads are
less than 4 feet (1.2m).
A fuse is connected between the
enclosure and line terminal of the
pole least likely to arc to the enclosure,
or the neutral, if the breaker is rated
120/240 or 480Y/277 Vac. The connec-
tion to the load-side of the limiting
impedance is #10 AWG copper wire
less than 6 feet (1.8m) long. The fuse is
a 30A non-renewable type acceptable
for branch circuit protection; its voltage
rating is not less than the rating of the
device, and its interrupting rating is
not less than the available current.
1. Interrupting tests:
a. The test circuit is closed on
the series combination with
all breakers fully closed; and
b. The load-side breaker is closed
on the circuit while the line-side
breaker is fully closed.
Note: Random closing is used in all three-
phase tests. When the circuit is closed on
the combination, closing is controlled in
single-phase tests so that closing occurs
within 10 electrical degrees of the zero-point
of the supply voltage wave.
2. Intermediate interrupting tests at
the specied available current and
maximum voltage. Procedures
are identical to those described
in 1a and 1b (above) but at the
maximum current level that
causes the load-side breaker to
open, but not the line-side breaker.
If the line-side breaker is current-
limiting, the series combination
should be evaluated in the region
below its current-limiting thresh-
old. (There is no need for these
tests if the current is less than
the interrupting rating on the
load-side breaker.)
3. Trip-out tests of the load-side
breaker at 250% of the marked
ampere rating.
4. Dielectric voltage-withstand
tests verify that the breaker can
withstand, without breakdown,
a 60 (4862) Hz essentially
sinusoidal potential for 1 minute.
27.2-10
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application InformationSeries Connected Ratings
022
Series Connected Ratings:
Eaton Circuit Breakers
A wide range of breakers and combi-
nations in the Eaton line is available
that has been tested in accordance
with UL procedures for series
connected ratings: individually
enclosed breakers in series with main
lug panelboards, main breakers integral
with branch breakers in panelboards,
in switchboards, and in meter centers.
You can rely on the enclosed data
for applications with other undened
distribution equipment where series
application ratings can be an advantage.
Circuit breaker/circuit breaker series
rated combinations are listed by
Underwriters Laboratories in their
Component Directory (Yellow Book)
under Circuit BreakersSeries
Connected.
The series combinations shown in
the UL Yellow Book are UL recognized
component ratings only. Consult
the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly
combinations.
Specic series ratings tested combina-
tions in assemblies can be found in
Tab 22 for panelboards/switchboards.
Both circuit-breaker-to-circuit-breaker
and fuse-to-circuit-breaker upstream/
downstream series rating tables are
provided. The assemblies series
ratings tables are also on the Eaton
Web site (www.eaton.com). Search for
document 1C96944H02 Panelboard
and Switchboards Series Ratings
Information Manual.
Circuit Breaker Identication
Marking of all Eatons circuit breakers
is clear for easy identication of type,
rating and operating status. Name-
plates are color-coded for immediate
identication of rating, and a color-
coded bar identies the type and
interrupting rating at common
application voltages. Operating status is
indicated clearly by the position of the
handle and color-coded ags. On and
off positions are identied by English
words and international symbols.
Scientists and engineers at the Eaton
Testing Laboratory ensure that Eaton
circuit breakers are the most reliable
and develop new concepts and
improvements in breaker design.
Designs and reliability are veried,
and products are improved continu-
ously and qualied to meet UL, NEMA
and other standards. In addition,
engineers from any breaker or
panelboard manufacturer can work
along-side their peers from Eaton to
test their products in the lab.
The consolidated nameplate on all
breakers provides complete identica-
tion and rating information in a format
that is easy to read and understand.
The interrupting rating of the series
combination is never permitted to be
marked on the downstream breaker.
However, the series rating may be
marked on panelboards in which the
combination has been tested and
listed if:
The upstream breaker is installed in
the panelboard as a main breaker
The panelboard is a main-lug-only
type and is specically marked to
indicate the type and rating of the
upstream listed series tested breaker
that must be applied with the
panelboard
Marking of Panelboards
Marking of panelboards conforms to
the latest edition of UL 67. Markings
are clear and understandable, and
include the short-circuit rating in rms
amperes; maximum voltage rating for
each short-circuit rating; a statement
indicating that additional or replace-
ment devices shall be of the same type
and of equal or greater interrupting
capacity; and, when applicable, the
identity of combinations of integral
and branch circuit overcurrent devices
that are required when applying the
marked short-circuit current rating.
Fuses
Fuses can be used instead of circuit
breakers in fully rated, selectively
coordinated and series connected
protection systems. Specic series
ratings tested combinations in
assemblies can be found in Tab 22
for panelboards.
Dont apply fuses using the up-over-
down method that has been recom-
mended by some fuse manufacturers
for sizing a current-limiting fuse that
protects a downstream molded-case
circuit breaker with a specied rms
symmetrical interrupting rating. The
method can lead to erroneous and unsafe
conclusions, and should not be used.
Example: Assume a specic type of
current-limiting fuse rated 2000A.
Then using the following gure:
1. Draw a vertical line from the
prospective short-circuit current
of 200 kA to intersect the typical
peak let-through curve at A.
2. Draw a horizontal line left
from Point A to intersect the
prospective peak curve at B.
3. Drop a vertical line from B to
intersect the horizontal axis and
read the recommended rating,
65 kA rms, concluding that a circuit
breaker with a 65 kA interrupting
capacity will be protected by
a specied 2000A current-
limiting fuse.
This conclusion is wrong when the
downstream service has a blow-open
contact assembly, as does a molded-
case circuit breaker or similar device.
It may be valid when the current-
limiting fuse is sized to protect a
passive bus bar system.
The reason: The up-over-down method
ignores dynamic impedance (the inherent
current-limiting of the downstream
molded-case circuit breaker). Such
impedance is developed directly by the
forces of the let-through current created
when the contacts are blown open.
For proper application of current-
limiting fuses, always refer to recom-
mendations by the manufacturer of
the circuit breaker, which are based
on actual test data.
Figure 27.2-4. Up-Over-Down Misapplication
65,000 200,000
150,000
460,000
B A
Asymmetrical
Prospective
Peak Curve
at 15%
Power
Factor
2000A
Current
Limiter
Fuse Curve
Prospective Short-Circuit rms Amperes
P
r
o
s
p
e
c
t
i
v
e

P
e
a
k

L
e
t
-
T
h
r
o
u
g
h
C
u
r
r
e
n
t

i
n

A
m
p
e
r
e
s
Do Not Use This Method
Up-over-down method.
27.2-11
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application InformationSeries Connected Ratings
023
Series Ratings Selected Under
Engineering Supervision
The 2005 NEC introduced a new
provision allowing a licensed
professional engineer to select a
series combination of overcurrent
devices for existing installations. This
represents a major change from the
previous requirements that series
rated combinations must be proven
by actual testing, and witnessed and
listed by a third-party certication
agency. A calculated evaluation of
a series rated system is extremely
difcult, if not impossible, to
determine because of the dynamic
impedance of the downstream
breakers as described above.
Compatibility of devices could only
be determined if it is guaranteed that
the downstream device(s) do not even
begin to open during the complete
interruption time of the upstream
device. Another factor is that the let-
through current must not exceed the
interrupting rating of the downstream
device. These are just a couple of the
many difcult factors that must be
veried to ensure the safe application
of an engineered series rated
combination.
27.2-12
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
High Selective Coordination Breaker
024
High Instantaneous Breakers for
High Instantaneous Breaker
Eaton introduces the LHH thermal-
magnetic and NHH electronic trip
molded-case circuit breakers capable
of providing higher current levels of
selective coordination. These circuit
breakers are based on Eaton industry-
leading Series G L-Frame and
Series C N-Frame high performance
circuit breaker frames. The LHH and
NHH circuit breakers are available
with trip units having 125400A rating.
The LHH and NHH circuit breakers
incorporate a higher level of magnetic
pickup and electronic instantaneous
setting respectively, thus allowing
for higher current levels of selective
coordination. Standard molded-case
circuit breakers typically are furnished
with a magnetic pickup or electronic
instantaneous adjustment or instanta-
neous override set at 10 times (10X)
the trip rating. Eatons LHH and NHH
molded-case circuit breakers are
furnished with a higher level of
magnetic pickup (up to 26x) or
electronic instantaneous available
maximum settings. These higher
levels of magnetic pickup (up to 93x)
and electronic instantaneous values
in turn allow the system designer to
obtain selective coordination at fault
current levels up to these higher
ratings. This allows the line side LHH
or NHH circuit breakers to selectively
coordinate up to the values for avail-
able fault current values determined
at the load side circuit breaker. When
the line side and load side molded-
case circuit breaker trip ratings are
chosen to coordinate in the overload
range, they also can be selectively
coordinated in the fault range. For
overcurrents protected by circuit
breakers on the load side of the LHH
or NHH, only the effected load side
circuit breaker will open, while the
line side LHH and/or NHH circuit
breakers remain closed, thus provid-
ing continuity of power to the other
critical loads supplied by the LHH
and NHH circuit breakers. See
Page 27.3-15 for LHH and NHH
breaker selection data.
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
JG, LG MCCBs Shown with Ground
Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
Eaton earth leakage breakers offer
Class 1 ground fault protection and
improved ground fault coordination
capability. A Class 1 device can open
at high levels of fault current, while a
Class 2 device prevents opening
beyond the contact rating of its
interrupting device.
Earth leakage breakers are factory
supplied with a single sensor and
ground fault relay built-in. The ground
fault pick-up setting is adjustable
from 0.03 to 30A in eight steps, and
the ground fault time delay setting
is adjustable from instantaneous to
2.0 seconds. See Page 27.4-42 for
earth leakage circuit breaker
selection data.
27.2-13
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
AFCI Circuit Breakers
025
AFCI Circuit Breakers
An arc-fault circuit interrupter is a
device intended to provide protection
from the effects of arc faults by recog-
nizing characteristics unique to arcing
and by functioning to de-energize the
circuit when an arc fault is detected.
Eaton offers 120 Vac AFCI single-pole,
15 and 20A breakers, plug-in and
bolt-on, to meet Article 210.12 of
the 2008 NEC.
There are currently two types of AFCI
circuit breakers on the market today.
The types are clearly dened by
UL 1699. These are the branch feeder
Type AFCI and the Combination Type
AFCI. The dual-purpose AFCI is yet
another feature available on the
market that is achieved by simply
adding 5 mA personnel ground fault
protection to the existing AFCI.
The AFCI circuit breaker is the most
tested residential circuit breaker on
the market. In the case of series arc
detection, these arcs are detected
when equipment is operating thus
drawing current. Parallel arcs can
occur and are detected even if the
load is not operating. When thresholds
of monitoring are exceeded, the
electronics within this device work to
identify safe arcs from hazardous arcs.
There are a few sections in the NEC
that in some way reference the AFCI
technology. NEC Section 210.12 is the
heart of the requirement for the Arc
Fault Technology. The introduction
of the AFCI product to the National
Electrical Code occurred in 1999.
The verbiage of this code included a
start date of enforcement effective
January 1, 2002. The 2002 NEC made
a slight change to remove the word
receptacle to ensure that the AFCI
was to be applied on all circuits supply-
ing the bedroom and not just those
circuits supplying receptacle outlets.
The 2005 NEC introduced some
changes that include the introduction
of the combination type AFCI.
The combination type AFCI is now set
to begin its application as of January
1, 2008. Another change included the
location of the combination AFCI that
allows it to be within 6 feet of the
loadcenter with qualications.
The 2008 National Electrical Code
expanded the application of AFCI
outside of the bedroom circuits to
include family rooms, closets, parlors,
dens, hallways, sunrooms, living
rooms and dining rooms. The 6-foot
rule was also removed and further
claried the requirements around
using a receptacle combination type
AFCI were expanded upon.
Figure 27.2-5. AFCI Circuit Breaker
Table 27.2-8. NEC Specications
Latch Lever
Line Connection
Contacts Trip Mechanism
Pigtail
Connection to
Loadcenter
Load Neutral
Terminal
Load Terminal
AFCI Detection Circuit
AFCI Test Button
Article Description
210.4 Article 210Branch Circuits
Multiwire Branch Circuits
210.12 Article 210Branch Circuits
Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI)
440.65 Article 440Air-Conditioning and Refrigerating Equipment
Leakage-Current Detector-Interrupter (LCDI) and Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI)
550.25 Article 550Mobile Homes, Manufactured Homes, and Mobile Home Parks
Arc-Fault Interrupter Protection
27.2-14
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application InformationDC Circuit Breakers
026
DC Rated Breakers
Breakers are available for use with
ungrounded applications where all
three poles are connected in series,
and grounded applications where the
load is connected to the grounded
terminal, and the series connected
poles are on the non-grounded
terminal. Rated for up to 750 Vdc,
breakers are available from 15 to
2500A trip ranges with thermal-
magnetic trip units. Their compact
size and increased interrupting
performance give Eaton the most
complete range of DC breakers in
the industry.
DC Circuit Breakers
UL listed Eaton DC molded-case circuit
breakers are for use in general DC
circuits, battery supply circuits of UPS
systems, PV systems and Level 3
electric vehicle charging circuits. These
devices are an excellent alternative to
fuses because they are easier to install
and require less maintenance.
The various DC voltage ratings are
obtained by connecting one, two,
three or four poles in series as noted.
Connection diagrams are shown on the
breaker nameplate. The DC breakers
use the same internal and external
accessories as the standard breakers
for AC application. DC breakers up to
600 Vdc are UL 489 listed and exceed
the requirements of UL Supplement SC
for molded-case circuit breakers with
uninterruptible power supplies.
Molded-case circuit breakers for
transportation application requiring
750 Vdc are available 15150A with
42 kA interrupting capacity at 750 Vdc.
Breakers require four poles in series for
high fault current protection in 750 Vdc
application. For 750V applications with
low fault current requirements, contact
Eaton for three-pole frames and rating
details. 750V is not a UL rating.
Dimensions for DC breakers are
the same as the standard thermal-
magnetic equivalent.
DC molded-case circuit breakers use
standard thermal-magnetic trip units,
which are calibrated on AC circuits.
The use of standard trip units allows
for easy interchangeability and
inventory management when both
AC and DC systems are used. The
magnetic trip pickup on DC circuits
are, on average, 42% higher than AC.
Specic time current curves depicting
the values or tolerance band increase
for DC breakers are available. Refer
to publication TC01215003E for
curve information.
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Table 27.2-9. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
DC ratings apply to substantially non-

inductive circuits. Time constant per UL 489.
Minimum DC application voltage is 48 Vdc.
Single-pole in series.
Two poles in series.
Three poles in series.
Four poles in series. Not a UL listed

voltage rating.
Four-pole frame with two-pole connection

in parallel.
Table 27.2-10. DC Breaker DimensionsApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
DC Molded-Case Switches
Eatons DC molded-case switches
are used in applications requiring a
compact, high-capacity disconnect.
They are UL 489 listed and have
automatic high instantaneous current
protection. These devices do not
provide overload protection.
Table 27.2-11. DC Molded-Case Switches
Minimum DC application voltage is 48 Vdc.
Four-pole frame with two-pole connected in parallel.

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Frame Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical kA)
Volts DC
125
250
600
750
HFDDC 225 42 50 42 42
JGEDC
JGSDC
JGHDC
250
250
250
35
42
50
35
42
50
35
50
65
HJDDC
HKDDC
250
400
42
42
50
50
42
42
LGEDC
LGSDC
LGHDC
600
600
600
22
22
42
22
22
42
35
50
65
HLDDC
HLDDC
HMDLDC
600
1200
800
42
42
42
50
50
50
35
35
NBDC
PBDC
1200
2500
42
42
50
65
50
65
Frame Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth
HFDDC 1
2
3
4
1.38 (35.1)
2.75 (70.0)
4.13 (105.0)
5.50 (139.7)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
3.38 (86.0)
3.38 (86.0)
3.38 (86.0)
3.38 (86.0)
JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC 3 4.13 (105.0) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)
HJDDC
HKDDC
2, 3
2, 3
4.13 (105.0)
5.50 (139.7)
10.00 (254.0)
10.13 (257.3)
4.06 (103.1)
4.10 (104.1)
LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC 3 5.48 (139.2) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9)
HLDDC 2, 3
4
8.25 (209.6)
11.00 (279.4)
10.75 (273.1)
10.75 (273.1)
4.06 (103.1)
4.06 (103.1)
HMDLDC
NBDC
PBDC
2, 3
3
3
8.25 (209.6)
8.25 (209.6)
12.06 (306.3)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
22.06 (560.3)
4.06 (103.1)
5.50 (139.7)
9.06 (230.1)
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40C
Interrupting
Capacity (kA)
Poles in
Series
With Line and
Load Terminals
Catalog Number
Without Line and
Load Terminals
Catalog Number
600 Vdc Maximum
100
150
225
42
42
42
3
3
3
HFDDC3100KL
HFDDC3150KL
HFDDC3225KL
HFDDC3100KW
HFDDC3150KW
HFDDC3225KW
250
400
400
42
35
65
3
3
3
HJDDC3250K
HKDDC3400K
LGKDC3400KSG
HJDDC3250KW
HKDDC3400KW
LGKDC3400KSW
600
600
800
65
35
35
3
3
3
LGKDC3630KSG
HLDDC3600K
HMDLDC3800K
LGKDC3630KSW
HLDDC3600WK
HMDLDC3800WK
250 Vdc Maximum
1200 50

HLDDC21200K
HLDDC21200WK

27.2-15
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
027
Table 27.2-12. Typical DC System Applications
Wiring Diagrams
Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application
Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC.
For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal.
Figure 27.2-6. 250 Vdc Maximum
Two Poles in Series
Three Poles in Series
Four Poles in Series
Description 250 Vdc Maximum 600 Vdc Maximum 750 Vdc Maximum
Grounded Ungrounded Grounded Ungrounded Grounded Ungrounded
Switchgear batteries
Telecom
Solar photovoltaic
UPS battery systems
Traction/transportation systems
Electrical vehicle charging
DC motors
Load
(A)
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems,
or grounded systems that have one end of
load (A) connected to grounded terminal,
opposite poles in series connection.
Load
Suitable for use on ungrounded
systems only.
Load
(A)
Suitable for use on
ungrounded systems only.
Load
Load
(A)
Load
Suitable for use on ungrounded
systems only.
27.2-16
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Information400415 Hz
028
Application of Eaton Molded-
Case Circuit Breakers to
400415 Hz Systems
Eatons molded-case circuit breakers,
including breakers with electronic trip
units, can be applied for overcurrent
protection on 400415 Hz systems.
Commonly used to power computer
installations, 400415 Hz systems
are also employed in conjunction
with certain aircraft, military and other
specialty equipment.
This publication contains guidelines
to applying Eaton molded-case circuit
breakers on 400415 Hz systems.
Circuit Breaker Derating Required
Table 27.2-13 lists the maximum
continuous current carrying capacity
and Table 27.2-14 lists the interrupting
capacities at 400415 Hz of Eaton
molded-case circuit breakers. Due to
the increased resistance of the copper
sections resulting from the skin effect
produced by eddy currents at 400
415 Hz, circuit breakers in many cases
require derating.
The thermal derating on these devices
is based upon 100%, three-phase
application in open air in a maximum
of 40C (104F) with 4 feet (1.2m) of
the specied cable 75C (167F) of bus
at the line and load side. Additional
derating of not less than 20% will be
required if the circuit breaker is to be
used in an enclosure. Further derating
may be required if the enclosure
contains other heat generating
devices or if the ambient temperatures
exceed 40C.
Table 27.2-13. Continuous Current of 400 Hz Breakers
The calibration of these breakers and the tolerance percentages of the time-current curves are the
same as at 60 Hz.
Thermal-magnetic only.
FD and HFD only.

Breaker Frame
Series
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes at 60 Hz
400415 Hz Application
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Cable/
Bus Bar
(Per Phase)
Terminals
(Fixed Front)
Catalog or
Style Number
EG
15
20
25
15
20
25
1#12 Cu
1#12 Cu
1#12 Cu
3T125EF
3T125EF
3T125EF
30
35
40
30
35
40
1#10 Cu
1#10 Cu
1#8 Cu
3T125EF
3T125EF
3T125EF
45
50
60
45
50
60
1#8 Cu
1#6 Cu
1#6 Cu
3T125EF
3T125EF
3T125EF
80
90
100
70
80
90
1#4 Cu
1#2 Cu
1#1 Cu
3T125EF
3T125EF
3T125EF
110
125
100
110
1-1/0 Cu
1-1/0 Cu
3T125EF
3T125EF
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD 15
20
25
15
20
25
1#12 Cu
1#12 Cu
1#12 Cu
624B100G02
624B100G02
624B100G02
30
35
40
30
35
40
1#10 Cu
1#10 Cu
1#8 Cu
624B100G02
624B100G02
624B100G02
50
70
90
45
65
85
1#6 Cu
1#4 Cu
1#2 Cu
624B100G02
624B100G02
624B100G02
100
125
150
95
115
135
1#1 Cu
11/0 Cu
11/0 Cu
624B100G17
624B100G17
624B100G17
JG
70
90
100
60
80
90
1#4 Cu
1#2 Cu
1#1 Cu
T250FJ
T250FJ
T250FJ
125
150
175
100
125
150
11/0 Cu
11/0 Cu
12/0 Cu
T250FJ
T250FJ
T250FJ
200
200
225
250
160
175
200
200
13/0 Cu
14/0 Cu
14/0 Cu
1250 kcmil Cu
T250FJ
T250FJ
T250FJ
T250FJ
JDB, JD, HJD 70
90
100
60
80
90
1#4 Cu
1#2 Cu
1#1 Cu
T250KB
T250KB
T250KB
125
150
175
100
125
150
11/0 Cu
11/0 Cu
12/0 Cu
T250KB
T250KB
T250KB
200
225
250
160
200
200
13/0 Cu
14/0 Cu
1250 kcmil Cu
T250KB
T250KB
T250KB
27.2-17
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
029
Table 27.2-13. Continuous Current of 400 Hz Breakers (Continued)
The calibration of these breakers and the tolerance percentages of the time-current curves are the
same as at 60 Hz.
Thermal-magnetic only.
Breaker Frame
Series
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes at 60 Hz
400415 Hz Application
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Cable/
Bus Bar
(Per Phase)
Terminals
(Fixed Front)
Catalog or
Style Number
KDB, KD, HKD 125
150
175
100
125
150
11/0 Cu
11/0 Cu
12/0 Cu
T300K
T300K
T300K
200
225
250
160
180
200
13/0 Cu
14/0 Cu
1250 kcmil Cu
T300K
T300K
T300K
300
350
400
225
275
300
1350 kcmil Cu
1500 kcmil Cu
23/0 Cu
T300K
T350K
T400K
LG
250
300
350
200
250
275
1250 kcmil Cu
1350 kcmil Cu
1500 kcmil Cu
TA350LK
TA350LK
TA350LK
400
500
600
300
400
400
1500 kcmil Cu
2500 kcmil Cu
2500 kcmil Cu
TA350LK
3TA632LK
3TA632LK
LDB, LD, HLD 250
300
350
210
240
275
1250 kcmil Cu
1350 kcmil Cu
1500 kcmil Cu
T600LA
T600LA
T600LA
400
500
600
310
370
425
2250 kcmil Cu
2350 kcmil Cu
2500 kcmil Cu
T600LA
T600LA
T600LA
LD with Digitrip RMS 310 300
600
300
500
2250 kcmil Cu
2350 kcmil Cu
T401LA
T401LA
MDL with Digitrip RMS 310 400
500
600
340
405
470
23/0 Cu
2300 kcmil Cu
2350 kcmil Cu
T600MA1
T600MA1
T600MA1
700
800
355
400
24/0 Cu
2300 kcmil Cu
T800MA1
T800MA1
ND with Digitrip RMS 310 1200 700
750
850
3300 kcmil Cu
3350 kcmil Cu
4350 kcmil Cu
T1000NBI
T1000NBI
T1200NBI
RD with Digitrip RMS 310 2000 1500 41/2 x 4 Cu Rear connected
Cu T-bar
Cable and Bus Sizing
The cable and bus sizes to be used at
400415 Hz are not based on standard
National Electrical Code tables for 60 Hz
application. Larger cross sections are
necessary at 400415 Hz to avoid
exceeding component temperature
limits. All bus bars specied are based
upon mounting the bars in the vertical
plane to allow maximum air ow. All
bus bars are spaced at a minimum of
1/4-inch (6.35 mm) apart. Mounting of
bus bars in the horizontal plane will
necessitate additional drafting. Edgewise
orientation of the bus may change
the maximum ratings indicated. If
additional information is required
for other connections of cable or
bus, contact the Eaton Technical
Resource Center.
Interrupting Capacity
400415 Hz interrupting capacities of
the Eaton molded-case circuit breakers
are found in Table 27.2-14.
Application Recommendations
It is recommended that thermal
indicating devices such as tempi
plates be placed on the line and load
terminals or T-connectors of the center
pole. These are usually the hottest
terminals with a balanced load. A
maximum temperature of 90C (50C
over a maximum ambient of 40C)
would verify the maximum rating for
the particular application. Temperature
proles taken on these breakers can be
correlated to ensure that the hottest
points within the breaker are within
the required temperature limits. A
thermal cutoff switch can also be
used to actuate a shunt trip to open
the breaker if the thermal limits are
exceeded. Consult the Eaton Technical
Resource Center for further informa-
tion on special applications.
27.2-18
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
030
Table 27.2-14. Interrupting Capacities of 400 Hz Breakers
The above interrupting ratings are estimates based on the design parameters and operating
characteristics of each breaker as well as on the limited amount of test data thus far available
for circuit breakers applied to 400415 Hz systems.
Not UL listed.
Series G E-Frame is 600/347 Vac maximum.

Breaker Frame
Series
Estimated 400415 Hz Interrupting Capacities
(rms Symmetrical Amperes)

240V 480V 600V
Thermal-Magnetic
EGB
EGC
EGE
5000
40,000
7000
3600
20,000
5000
7000
3600
EGH
EGS
EHD
20,000
17,000
3600
13,000
7000
2800
5000
4400
FDB
FD, HFD
JDB, JD
3600
13,000
8000
2800
5000
7000
2800
3600
7000
JGC
JGE
JGH
40,000
13,000
20,000
20,000
5000
13,000
7000
3600
5000
JGS
HJD
KDB, KD, HKD
17,000
14,000
21,000
7000
10,000
11,000
3600
7000
8000
LDB, LD
LGC
LGE
14,000
40,000
13,000
10,000
20,000
7000
7000
10,000
3600
LGH
LGS
HLD
MD
20,000
17,000
21,000
14,000
13,000
10,000
11,000
10,000
7000
5000
8000
7000
KD, LD, MDL, ND
HLD, HMDL
14,000
21,000
10,000
11,000
7000
8000
HND
RD
21,000
40,000
16,000
33,000
8000
33,000
27.2-19
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Special Application Breakers
031
High-Intensity Discharge (HID)
Breakers
HID breakers are used to switch 120V
or 277V uorescent lighting circuits
or high-intensity discharge lighting
circuits. Per UL 489 Section 7.14, they
must be listed and marked HID.
HID breakers are tested for endurance
at 75% power factor. The contacts
and the spring of an HID breaker are
heavier duty to dissipate the increased
heat from greater current ow during
the HID ignition period. For listing
of available HID rated breakers,
see Table 27.2-15.
Lighting Control Solenoid
Operated Breakers
Eaton manufactures a wide array
of solenoid operated breakers for
lighting control applications. These
are available in both 120 and 277V
single-pole and two-pole congura-
tions. See individual circuit breaker
selection data, Table 27.4-12, for
more information.
For a full discussion of the use of these
breakers, see Tab 23 Lighting Control
SystemsPow-R-Command.
Switching Duty (SWD)
Rated Breakers
SWD breakers are rated 15 or 20A,
120 and 277V and intended to switch
uorescent lighting loads on a regular
basis and are marked SWD, per
UL 489 Section 7.9. SWD breakers
are endurance-tested at 100 % power
factor. Eatons single-pole 120 Vac
QUICKLAG line, as well as the GB, GC
and single-pole 277 Vac GHB, GHBS,
GHC, EHD Series C and EG Series G
breakers are tested, rated and marked
SWD. In addition, there are other
SWD rated circuit breakers available
(see Table 27.2-16).
Heating, Air Conditioning
and Refrigeration Circuit
Breakers (HACR)
Due to changes in the UL 489
standards, all circuit breakers meet
the requirements for HACR application.
NEMA AB-3 Standard, Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers and their Application
States, Section 430.53 of the NEC
permits the use of an inverse-time
circuit breaker as the branch circuit
protective device in multi-motor
and combination load installations,
commonly involved in heating, air
conditioning and refrigeration equip-
ment. Circuit breakers do not need to
be marked HACR in order to be used
in these applications unless the end
use still requires that marking.
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Engine generator circuit breakers are
designed specically for application
on diesel engine powered standby
generator systems where high
interrupting circuit breakers are
not required. Generator breakers are
equipped with a special trip unit that
provides standard overload protection
with low magnetic short-circuit protec-
tion to suit generator applications that
call for close short-circuit protection at
low interrupting ratings.
Eaton offers a family of engine
generator circuit breakers from
15 to 1200A that conform to UL 489,
CSA and IEC 947-2 standards.
Table 27.2-15. HID Rated Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Table 27.2-16. SWD Rated Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Table 27.2-17. HACR Rated Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Frame Poles Ampere
Rating
120/240V
Maximum
277/480V
Maximum
BAB-D 1, 2 1560
CH-HID 1, 2 1530
CHB-HID 1, 2 1530
GHBS 1, 2 1530
HQP-D 1, 2 1560
QC 1, 2 1560
GHQRSP 1, 2 1530
BABRP 1, 2 1530
BABRSP 1, 2 1530
BRRP 1, 2 1530
CLRP 1, 2 1530
Breaker
Family
Frame Mounting Poles Ampere
Rating
SWD at
120 Vac
SWD at
277 Vac
QUICKLAG
Series C
Series G
GHB, GHBS, GHC and EHD

EG
All
All
All
1
1
1, 2
15 and 20
15 and 20
15 and 20
Breaker
Family
Frame Mounting Poles Ampere
Rating
Up to
240 Vac
Up to
480 Vac
QUICKLAG Plug-on
Bolt-on
Cable-cable
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3, 4
15100
15100
10100
Series C
Series G
GD thru LD
EG thru LG
All
All
All
All
All
All
27.2-20
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Special Application Breakers
032
Mining Circuit Breakers
Eaton mining circuit breakers have a
tradition of proven dependability and
reliability in harsh mine environments,
consistently combining strength and
reliability with safe, efcient operation.
The mining breaker is available from
152500A and is designed for trailing
cable applications per MSHA 30 CFR
75. With interrupting ratings up to
25 kA at 1000/577 Vac and rms sensing
electronic trip unit, the mining breaker
can be applied to all mining circuit
breaker applications.
Mining breakers are available with a
full line of accessories.
NAVY MIL-SPEC Breakers
NAVY MIL-SPEC molded-case circuit
breakers provide both overload protec-
tion for conductors and short-circuit
protection for all circuit elements, such
as conductors, motors and starters.
They also serve as manual disconnect-
ing means, as well as circuit protectors.
These breakers range from 5 to 1600A
with interrupting ratings to 100,000A
rms asymmetrical. These breakers
are rated 500 Vac class for use in
traditional 450 Vac three-phase open
delta ungrounded naval distribution
systems. Smaller distribution panel
breakers are rated 125 Vac. 60 Hz and
400 Hz versions are available as well
as 125/250 Vdc ratings.
All Eaton NAVY breakers meet
applicable MIL-SPECS including:
MIL-C-17588/QPL17588 ALB-1 Breakers
MIL-DTL-17361/QPL17361
AQB Breakers
MIL-S-901 Shock
MIL-STD-167-1 Vibration
MIL-STD-461 EMI
ASTM D5948 Special
Molding Compounds
Marine Circuit Breakers
Eaton circuit breakers can be
supplied to meet the following
marine specications:
U.S. Coast Guard CFR
ABSAmerican Bureau of Shipping
IEEE 45
DNV
Lloyds
ABS / NVR
These specications generally
require molded-case circuit breakers
to be supplied with 50C ambient
ratings and plug-in adapter kits.
When plug-in adapter kits are used,
no terminals need to be supplied
(switchboard applications).
Circuit breakers can also be supplied
to meet UL 489 Supplement SA
(Marine usefor vessels over 65 feet
in length) and UL 489 Supplement
SB (Naval use).
Molded-Case Breakers for
Application on Resistance
Welding Circuits
Short-circuit protection for resistance
welding devices can be obtained by
properly applying instantaneous trip
molded-case circuit breakers.
Note: Instantaneous only breakers for weld-
ing application are intended for application
within the welding equipment not as feeder
breakers to welding machines.
These breakers permit normally high
welding currents, but trip instanta-
neously if a short-circuit develops.
These breakers include standard
molded-case circuit breaker features,
such as trip-free operation, deadfront
and single-phase protection. Because
the breakers are resettable after
tripping, replacement costs and
downtime are minimized.
Duty Cycle is based on the one minute
averaging time of the breaker, and can
be determined as follows:
During-weld amperes can be
obtained from the welder manufacturer,
or as follows:
Interrupting capacity of the breaker
should be within the maximum avail-
able at the point of application. Refer to
Eaton for additional application details.
Duty Cycle
Weld Time 100
Weld Time Off Time +
---------------------------------------------------------- =
During-weld
Amperes
During-weld
kVA
1000
Voltage
---------------------------------------------------- =
27.3-1
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
033
Continuous Ampere Rating
Molded-case circuit breakers are rated
in rms amperes at a specic ambient.
This ampere rating is the continuous
current that they will carry in the
ambient temperature for which they
are calibrated. Eaton thermal-magnetic
breakers are calibrated for an ambient
temperature 40C (104F) that is
the average temperature within an
enclosure; thus, they minimize the
need for derating. If the enclosure
ambient is known to exceed 40C, the
breaker used should either be especially
calibrated for that ambient, or be
derated accordingly.
In accordance with the National
Electrical Code, all circuit breakers
are derated to 80% for continuous
loads except electronic trip unit circuit
breakers that have been tested and
marked for 100% application.
The selection of a specic ampere
rating for a given application is depen-
dent upon the type of load and duty
cycle, and is governed by the National
Electrical Code. In general, the NEC
requires overcurrent protection at the
supply and at points where wire sizes
are reduced. It further states that the
conductors be protected in accordance
with their current carrying capacity,
but lists exceptions for applications
such as motor circuits where a larger
rating is often required to override
motor inrush currents.
Some test methods used in the eld
are often poor indicators of the condi-
tion of a circuit breaker. These tests are
used to minimize test cycle and setup
times. Test types range from contact
resistance measurements to millivolt
drop checks.
Contact resistance should not be
considered a reliable measure of a
breakers ability to carry rated current.
Contact resistance is usually measured
with low currents from a low voltage
supply owing through the contacts,
and the resistance value is heavily
dependent on transient contact
surface conditions. These transient
surface conditions can vary with
factors, such as the contact material,
the gaseous ambient and the current
level, and the resistance can markedly
decrease with the ow of rated
current. Observation of high contact
resistance should be considered only
as an indicator of the need for further
testing whenever circuit breakers are
being evaluated.
The millivolt drop procedure outlined
in NEMA Standards Publication AB4-
1996 Section 5.4 can be used to assess
the electrical integrity of connections
and contacts within a circuit breaker.
The IEEE
paper by John Shea and

John Bindas, Measuring Molded-
Case Circuit Breaker Resistance
Vol. CHMT-16, No. 2, March 1993,
is available as a guideline for more
reliable millivolt drop measurements.
Again, the millivolt drop can be
affected by contact surface conditions
that can change with breaker opera-
tion and arcing. Further, the millivolt
drop is only one factor in determining
the thermal loading of a breaker, and
the total system must be considered
prior to judging a breaker to be
unacceptable.
Proper thermal performance of a well
loaded circuit breaker is by far the best
indicator of a circuit breakers current
carrying capability, and a millivolt drop
test, performed at rated current, can
serve to indicate whether further
testing is required.
If the resistance and millivolt drop
test data raises concerns in regards to
breaker integrity, a proper thermal test
must be performed.
Circuit Voltage
Molded-case circuit breakers are rated
by voltage class and should be applied
only to system voltages within their
rating. The voltage rating is determined
by the maximum voltage that can be
applied across its terminals, the type
of distribution system and how the
breaker is applied in the system.
Circuit breakers listed for use at
120/240V may be applied on 120/240V
grounded systems. For applications on
240V ungrounded systems, apply only
circuit breakers rated 240V (with no
slash rating) or higher.
Circuit breakers rated 277/480V are
suitable for application on 277/480V
grounded wye systems and are not for
application on 480V ungrounded delta
systems. Apply circuit breakers rated
480V (with no slash rating) or higher
on 480V ungrounded delta systems.
UL 489 provides standards for testing
the individual poles of two- and three-
pole molded-case circuit breakers. The
test current is generally lower than the
interrupting rating of the molded-case
circuit breaker. This capability is
necessary for breakers applied on
corner-grounded delta systems where
single line-to-ground faults may be
interrupted by only a single pole of
a circuit breaker with full line-to-line
voltage across that single interrupting
pole. Molded-case circuit breakers
should not be used on circuits where
the available fault current exceeds
the level at which individual poles
were short-circuit tested at line-to-
line voltage.
Note: On all three-phase delta, grounded
B Phase applications, refer to Eaton.
Interrupting Ratings
Molded-case circuit breakers are avail-
able in various interrupting capacities.
Standard interrupting capacity breakers
are available in both industrial and
replacement circuit breaker lines.
These breakers have interrupting
capacities up to 35 kA at 480 Vac.
High interrupting capacity breakers are
similar to standard interrupting capacity
breakers, but the improved performance
makes these breakers suited for use in
todays network systems where higher
fault currents exist. These breakers have
interrupting capacities up to 65 kA at
480 Vac.
For applications that call for very high
interrupting ratings, current limiting
high interrupting capacity breakers
are available. These breakers offer true
current limiting characteristics in the
same physical frame size as the high
interrupting capacity version and have
interrupting capacities of 100, 150
and 200 kA at 480 Vac.
The maximum amount of fault current
supplied by a system can be calculated
at any point in that system. One rule
must be followed for applying the
correct circuit breaker.
The interrupting rating of the breaker
must be equal to or greater than the
amount of fault current that can be
delivered at that point in the system
where the breaker is applied.
The interrupting rating of the breaker
is the maximum amount of fault current
it can safely interrupt without damaging
itself. A breakers interrupting rating
always decreases as the voltage
increases. Interrupting rating is one of
the most critical factors in the breaker
selection process.
27.3-2
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
Application InformationCode Considerations
034
Circuit Frequency
The tripping characteristics of most
molded-case circuit breakers remain
virtually constant when applied to
frequencies of 50 and 60 Hz. On higher
frequency applications, molded-case
circuit breakers must usually be specially
calibrated and/or derated. The amount
of derating depends upon the frame
size and ampere rating, as well as the
current frequency. In general, the higher
the ampere rating in a given frame
size, the greater the derating required.
Thermal-magnetic molded-case
circuit breakers applied at frequencies
above 60 Hz could require that individ-
ual consideration be given to thermal
performance, magnetic performance
and interrupting capabilities.
Electronic trip units are usually
calibrated for 50/60 Hz, although
operation at higher frequencies is
achievable with the use of special
derating factors and specially sized
cable or bus.
Avoid making circuit breaker
performance assumptions on
applications above 60 Hz. Consult
Eaton for molded-case circuit
breakers above 60 Hz.
Number of Poles
The number of poles in the breaker is
determined by the type of distribution
system. A pole is required for each
hot conductor, but usually not for the
neutral conductor, except in certain
special applications.
In general, a single-pole breaker may
be used on grounded neutral systems
for single-phase applications and a
three-pole breaker on three-phase
applications. There are instances,
however, where two-pole breakers are
necessary on single-phase systems and
four-pole breakers on three-phase
systems to interrupt the neutral. Certain
DC voltage applications also use
special multi-pole congurations.
Molded-case circuit breakers use
internal residual ground fault
protection schemes or separate
earth leakage modules using zero
sequence sensing when optional
ground fault protection is required. For
more information on how the scheme
operates, see Tab 1, Figure 1.4-7 and
the associated explanation.
Code Considerations
Circuit Breaker Sizing
The following paragraphs outline
pertinent information from the NEC
according to the type of load and
duty cycle.
Service
A service includes the conductors and
equipment for delivering electrical
energy from the supply system to the
wiring system of the premises served.
NEC Article 230 contains the many
requirements for services of 600V
or less including the sizing, location
and overcurrent protection of
conductors, disconnect means,
permissible number of disconnects,
grounding of conductors and ground
fault protection requirements of
service equipment.
Feeder Circuits
A feeder is composed of the
conductors of a wiring system
between the service equipment
or the generator switchboard of
an isolated plant and the branch
circuit overcurrent device.
NEC Article 220: Where a feeder
supplies continuous loads or any
combination of continuous and non-
continuous loads, the rating of the
overcurrent device shall not be less
than the noncontinuous load plus
Exception: Where the assembly
including the overcurrent devices
protecting the feeder(s) are listed
for operation at 100% of their rating,
neither the ampere rating of the over-
current device nor the ampacity of the
feeder conductors shall be less than
the sum of the continuous load plus
the noncontinuous load.
Only breakers listed for 100% applica-
tion, and so labeled, can be applied
under the exception (for example,
type CKD). Breakers without 100%
application listing and label are applied
under (B) above, or at 80% of rating.
NEC Article 430: Breakers for feeders
having mixed loads; i.e., heating
(lighting and heat appliances) and
motors, should have ratings suitable
for carrying the heating loads plus the
capacity required by the motor loads.
NEC Article 430: Breakers for motor
feeders shall have a rating not greater
than the sum of the highest breaker
rating of any of its branches and the
full load currents of all other motors
served by the feeder.
Branch Circuits
A branch circuit is the portion of a wiring
system extending beyond the nal
overcurrent device protecting the circuit.
(1) Lighting Circuits (NEC Article 310)
These are protected in accordance
with the conductor ratings as given.
High wattage incandescent lamp loads
may result in abnormally high inrush
currents that must be taken into
account to avoid nuisance tripping.
The lamp manufacturer should be
consulted for data relative to the
inrush currents.
(2) Motor Circuits (NEC Article 430)
Breakers are primarily intended for the
protection of conductors, motor control
apparatus and motors against short
circuits and ground fault conditions.
On motor overloads, the motor over-
current device will open the circuit
before the correctly applied breaker.
Currents higher than the locked rotor
value will be interrupted by the breakers,
protecting the circuit from these heavy
fault currents. The breaker must not
trip on normal starting.
While breakers may be applied for motor
running overcurrent protection when
the requirements of Article 430 of the
NEC are met, these applications are
not recommended for Eatons breakers
and, therefore, this discussion is
conned to the use of a breaker
as a circuit protector.
For many applications, particularly
those where starting behavior of the
motor is unknown, the NEC maximum
rules are followed. Usually, lower
rated breakers can be used success-
fully. This is further discussed under
motor circuit application and motor
application tables.
Motor circuit application (NEC
Article 430): The breaker must have
a continuous rating of not less than
115% of the motor full load current.
Before applying a breaker, check to
determine the effect of any of the
following conditions: High ambient
temperature, heating within breaker
enclosure due to grouping of current
consuming devices, frequent
motor starting and lengthy motor
acceleration period.
27.3-3
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
035
Breaker rating or setting (NEC
Article 430): The motor branch circuit
overcurrent device must be capable
of capable of carrying the inrush current
of the motor. The required protection
should be considered as being
obtained when the overcurrent device
has a rating or setting not exceeding
the values given in Table 27.3-1,
reference NEC Article 430).
An instantaneous trip circuit breaker
(without time delay) should be used
only if adjustable and if part of a
combination controller having over-
current protection in each conductor
and the combination is especially
approved for the purpose. In the event
a breaker chosen on this basis still
does not allow motor starting, a higher
rating is permitted by the code. See
Exceptions listed with Table 27.3-1.
Due to the innite number of motor-
and-load combinations and because
comparable breakers of different
manufacture have different tripping
characteristics, NEC motor circuit
breaker rules are of a general nature
and are set up as maximum boundaries.
Protection is considered satisfactory if
the breaker rating does not exceed the
gure allowed by the NEC requirements.
Although Eaton breakers rated less than
the NEC maximum values may be
applied in most cases, many operating
engineers select breakers on the basis
of the NEC maximum rules simply
because consideration of other factors
is not usually necessary, or to ensure
motor starting when the starting
behavior of the motor is not known.
Tables 27.3-1 and 27.3-2 are adapted
from Article 430 of NEC.
When a certain motor is standard for
a given job, as on a volume-produced
machine tool, it is practical (and often
more economical) to select a breaker
for closer protection than one chosen
on the basis of NEC maximum rules.
Circuit Breaker Not Horsepower Rated
Unlike switches, circuit breakers are
not horsepower rated because they
are able to safely interrupt currents
far in excess of the locked rotor value
for any motor with which they may
be applied. This ability is recognized
in the NEC as stated in paragraph
430.109 and is proven by the
Underwriters Laboratories tests
described in UL bulletin number 489,
Standard for Branch Circuit and
Service Circuit Breakers.
For example, a breaker must pass
the UL overload test consisting of
breaking a current 600% of its ampere
ratings. As motor branch circuit
breaker ratings are usually 125 to
250% of motor full-load currents,
this test establishes the ability of the
breaker to more than interrupt locked
rotor currents. Following the overload
test and others, the breaker is called
upon to successfully clear its rated
short-circuit current that is a minimum
of 5000A. This also is many times
higher than motor locked rotor
current. Because by denition, a
circuit breaker is required to open
under abnormal conditions...without
injury to itself, the breaker must still
be in operating condition after the test.
27.3-4
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
036
Motor Branch Circuits
Table 27.3-1. Maximum Rating or Setting of Motor Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground Fault Protective DevicesNEC Table 430.52
For certain exceptions to the values specied, see Sections 430.52 through 430.54. The values given in the last column also cover the ratings of
nonadjustable inverse time types of circuit breakers that may be modied as in Section 430.52, Exceptions No. 1 and No. 2. Synchronous motors of
the low-torque, low-speed type (usually 450 rpm or lower), such as are used to drive reciprocating compressors, pumps and so on, that start unloaded,
do not require a fuse rating or circuit breaker setting in excess of 200% of full load current.
Table 27.3-2. Full-Load Current Three-Phase Alternating-Current MotorsNEC Table 430.250
The following values of full load currents are typical for motors running at speeds usual for belted motors and motors with normal torque
characteristics. The voltages listed are rated motor voltages. The currents listed will be permitted for system voltage ranges of 110 to 120, 220
to 240, 440 to 480, and 550 to 600V.
For 90% and 80% power factor, the above gures should be multiplied by 1.1 and 1.25 respectively.
Motor
Type
Percent of Full Load Current
Instantaneous
Trip Breaker
Inverse Time
Breaker
Single-phase motors
AC polyphase motors other than wound rotor squirrel cage:
Other than Design B energy efcient
Design B energy efcient
Synchronous
Wound rotor
Direct-current (constant voltage)
800
800
1100
800
800
250
250
250
250
250
150
150
Hp Induction Type Squirrel Cage and Wound-Rotor
Amperes
Synchronous Type Unity Power Factor
Amperes
115V 200V 208V 230V 460V 575V 2300V 230V 460V 575V 2300V
1/2
3/4
1
4.4
6.4
8.4
2.5
3.7
4.8
2.4
3.5
4.6
2.2
3.2
4.2
1.1
1.6
2.1
0.9
1.3
1.7
1-1/2
2
3
12.0
13.6
6.9
7.8
11.0
6.6
7.5
10.6
6.0
6.8
9.6
3.0
3.4
4.8
2.4
2.7
3.9
5
7-12
10
17.5
25.3
32.2
16.7
24.2
30.8
15.2
22
28
7.6
11
14
6.1
9
11
15
20
25
48.3
62.1
78.2
46.2
59.4
74.8
42
54
68
21
27
34
17
22
27
53
26
21
30
40
50
92
120
150
88
114
143
80
104
130
40
52
65
32
41
52
63
83
104
32
41
52
26
33
42
60
75
100
177
221
285
169
211
273
154
192
248
77
96
124
62
77
99
16
20
26
123
155
202
61
78
101
49
62
81
12
15
20
125
150
200
359
414
552
343
396
528
312
360
480
156
180
240
125
144
192
31
37
49
253
302
400
126
151
201
101
121
161
25
30
40
250
300
350
302
361
414
242
289
336
60
72
83
400
450
500
477
515
590
382
412
472
95
103
118

27.3-5
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
037
Motor Protection
In line with 2008 NEC 430.6(A1)
circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse rating
selections are based on full load
currents for induction motors running
at speeds normal for belted motors
and motors with normal torque
characteristics using data taken
from NEC Table 430.250 (three-
phase). Actual motor nameplate
ratings should be used for selecting
motor running overload protection.
Motors built special for low speeds,
high torque characteristics, special
starting conditions and applications
will require other considerations as
of the NEC.
pickup settings.
Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse ampere
rating selections are in line with
maximum rules given in NEC 430.52
and Table 430.250. Based on known
characteristics of Eaton breakers,
specic units are recommended. The
current ratings are no more than the
maximum limits set by the NEC rules
for motors with code letters F to V or
without code letters. Motors with
lower code letters will require further
considerations.
based on:
1. Ambientoutside enclosure not
2. Motor startinginfrequent
motor FLA.
motor FLA.
may not be set more than 1300% of
with NEC 430.52 (except for NEMA
Design B energy efcient motors
which can be set up to 1700%).
ratings. Higher interrupting rating types
may be required to satisfy specic
system application requirements.
For motor full load currents of 208V
and 200V, increase the corresponding
230V motor values by 10% and
15% respectively.
Amperes
(NEC) FLA
Maximum
Amperes
Recommended Eaton
Circuit
Breaker
Motor Circuit
Protector Type HMCP
230V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
3.6
5.2
6.8
9.6
10
10
15
20
15
20
25
30
15
15
15
20
7
15
15
30
2170
45150
45150
90300
5
7-1/2
10
15
15.2
22
28
42
30
40
50
80
50
70
90
150
30
50
60
90
30
50
50
70
90300
150500
150500
210700
20
25
30
40
54
68
80
104
100
125
150
200
175
225
250
350
100
125
150
150
100
150
150
150
3001000
4501500
4501500
7502500
50
60
75
100
130
154
192
248
250
300
350
450
400
500
600
800
200
225
300
400
150
250
400
400
7502500
12502500
20004000
20004000
125
150
200
312
360
480
600
700
1000
1000
1200
1600
500
600
700
600
600
600
18006000
18006000
18006000
460V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.8
2.6
3.4
4.8
6
6
6
10
6
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
7
7
7
15
2170
2170
2170
45150
5
7-1/2
10
15
7.6
11
14
21
15
20
25
40
25
35
45
70
15
25
35
45
15
30
30
50
45150
90300
90300
150500
20
25
30
40
27
34
40
52
50
60
70
100
90
110
125
175
50
70
70
100
50
70
100
100
150500
210700
3001000
3001000
50
60
75
100
65
77
96
124
125
150
175
225
200
150
300
400
110
125
150
175
150
150
150
150
4501500
7502500
7502500
7502500
125
150
200
156
180
240
300
350
450
500
600
800
225
250
350
250
400
400
12502500
20004000
20004000
575V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.4
2.1
2.7
3.9
3
6
6
10
6
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
3
7
7
7
930
2170
2170
2170
5
7-1/2
10
15
6.1
9
11
17
15
20
20
30
20
30
35
60
15
20
25
40
15
15
30
30
45150
45150
90300
90300
20
25
30
40
22
27
32
41
40
50
60
80
70
90
100
125
50
60
60
80
50
50
50
100
150500
150500
150500
3001000
50
60
75
100
52
62
77
99
100
110
150
175
175
200
250
300
100
125
150
175
100
150
150
150
3001000
7502500
7502500
7502500
125
150
200
125
144
192
225
300
350
400
450
600
200
225
300
250
250
400
12502500
12502500
20004000
27.3-6
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
038
Capacitor Protection (NEC Article 460)
In normal applications, breakers rated
about 150% of capacitor rated currents
are recommended. This factor allows
for switching surges, and possible
overcurrent due to overvoltage and
harmonic currents. Such selection
fully meets the NEC requirements
in 460.8 for a conductor and discon-
nect to be rated not less than 135%
capacitor rating. Where the operating
currents exceed 135% of rated current
due to harmonic components, service
conditions may require the selection of
a breaker with a higher current rating.
For application in ambients higher
than the rated ambient of the breaker,
the breaker derating table should be
checked to determine the rating of the
breaker required to meet the minimum
of 135% capacitor rating.
Circuit breakers and switches for use with
capacitor must have a current rating in
excess of rated capacitor current to pro-
vide for overcurrent from overvoltages
at fundamental frequency and harmonic
currents. The following percent of the
capacitor-rated current should be used:
Fused and unfused switches . . . 165%
Enclosed molded-case circuit breaker
(includes additional de-rating for
enclosures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150%
Air circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . 135%
Contactors:
Open type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135%
Enclosed type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150%
Refer to Tab 35 for specic sizing of
protective devices by kVAR rating.
(NEC Article 450) Primary
Each transformer 600V or less shall be
protected by an individual overcurrent
device on the primary side. Rated or
set at not more than 125% of the rated
primary current of the transformer.
Exception No. 1: Where the rated
primary currents of a transformer are
9A or more and 125% of this current
does not correspond to a standard
rating of a fuse or nonadjustable circuit
breaker, the next higher standard rating
described in Section 240 will be permit-
ted. Where the rated primary current is
less than 9A, an overcurrent device
rated or set at not more than 167% of
the primary current shall be permitted.
Where the rated primary current is less
than 2A, an overcurrent device rated
or set at not more than 300% will
be permitted.
Exception No. 2: An individual over-
current device will not be required
where the primary circuit overcurrent
device provides the protection specied
in this Section.
Exception No. 3: As provided in
(2) below.
(2) Primary and Secondary
A transformer 600V or less having an
overcurrent device on the secondary
side rated or set at not more than 125%
of the rated secondary current on the
transformer shall not be required to have
an individual overcurrent device on the
primary side if the primary feeder over-
current device is rated or set at a current
value not more than 250% of the rated
primary current of the transformer.
A transformer 600V or less, equipped
with coordinated thermal overload
protection by the manufacturer and
arranged to interrupt the primary
current, will not be required to have
an individual overcurrent device on
the primary side if the primary feeder
overcurrent device is rated or set at a
current value not more than six times
the rated current of the transformer
for transformers having more than
6% impedance and not more than
four times the rated current of the
transformer for transformers having
more than six but not more than
10% impedance.
Exception 4: Where the rated secondary
current of a transformer is 9A or more
and 125% of this current does not
correspond to a standard rating of a
fuse or nonadjustable circuit breaker, the
next higher standard rating described
in Section 240 will be permitted.
Where the rated secondary current is
less than 9A, an overcurrent device
rated or set at not more than 167%
of the rated secondary current shall
be permitted. Closer protection can
be provided by breakers having shunt
trips actuated by a temperature
sensing device imbedded in
transformer windings.
Table 27.3-4. Single-Phase Transformer Primary Protection When Secondary Protection Provided
Table 27.3-5. Single-Phase Transformer Secondary Protection When Primary Protection Provided
kVA 208V 240V 277V 480V 600V
FLA Breaker
Trip
FLA Breaker
Trip
FLA Breaker
Trip
FLA Breaker
Trip
FLA Breaker
Trip
2
3
5
10
14
24
20
30
50
8
13
21
20
30
50
7
11
18
15
20
40
5
6
10
10
15
20
4
5
8
10
20
7.5
10
15
36
48
72
70
100
150
31
42
63
60
80
125
27
36
54
50
70
100
16
21
31
30
40
60
13
17
25
30
40
50
25
37.5
50
120
180
240
225
350
450
104
156
208
200
300
400
90
135
181
175
250
350
52
78
104
100
150
200
42
63
83
100
150
150
75
100
167
361
481
803
700
1000
1600
313
417
696
600
800
1200
271
361
603
500
700
1200
156
208
348
300
400
700
125
167
278
250
350
600
250
333
500
1202
1601
2404
2000
3000
3200
1042
1388
2083
1600
2000
3000
903
1202
1805
1600
2000
2500
521
694
1042
800
1200
1600
417
555
833
800
800
1200
kVA 208V 240V 277V 480V
FLA Breaker
Trip
FLA Breaker
Trip
FLA Breaker
Trip
FLA Breaker
Trip
2
3
5
10
14
24
15
20
30
8
13
21
15
20
30
11
18
15
25
10
15
7.5
10
15
36
48
72
45
60
90
31
42
63
40
60
80
27
36
54
35
50
70
16
21
31
20
30
40
25
37.5
50
120
180
240
150
225
300
104
156
208
150
200
300
90
135
181
150
175
225
52
78
104
70
100
150
75
100
167
361
481
803
450
600
1000
313
417
696
400
600
900
271
361
603
350
450
800
156
208
348
200
300
450
250
333
500
1202
1601
2404
1600
2000
3000
1042
1388
2083
1400
1800
3000
903
1202
1805
1200
1600
2500
521
694
1042
700
900
1400
27.3-7
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
039
Table 27.3-6. Three-Phase Transformer Primary Protection When Secondary Protection Provided
Table 27.3-7. Three-Phase Transformer Secondary Protection When Primary Protection Provided
kVA 240V 480V 600V
FLA Breaker
Trip
FLA Breaker
Trip
FLA Breaker
Trip
3
6
9
7
14
22
15
30
40
7
11
15
25
6
9
15
20
15
30
37.5
36
72
90
70
150
200
18
36
45
40
70
90
14
29
36
30
60
70
45
50
75
108
120
180
200
225
350
54
60
90
110
125
200
43
48
72
90
100
150
112.5
150
225
271
361
541
500
700
1000
135
180
271
250
350
500
108
144
217
200
300
400
300
500
750
1000
722
1203
1804
2406
1000
2000
2500
4000
361
601
902
1203
600
800
1200
2000
289
481
722
962
500
700
1000
1600
kVA 208V 240V 480V 600V
FLA Breaker
Trip
FLA Breaker
Trip
FLA Breaker
Trip
FLA Breaker
Trip
3
6
9
8
17
25
10
20
35
7
14
22
10
20
30
7
11
10
15
10
15
30
37.5
42
83
104
60
110
150
36
72
90
45
100
125
18
36
45
25
45
60
14
29
36
20
40
50
45
50
75
125
139
208
175
175
300
108
120
180
150
175
225
54
60
90
70
80
125
43
48
72
60
60
90
112.5
150
225
312
416
652
400
600
800
271
361
541
350
500
700
135
180
271
175
225
350
108
144
217
150
200
300
300
500
750
1000
833
1388
2082
2776
1200
1800
3000
3500
722
1203
1804
2406
900
1500
2500
3000
361
601
902
1203
500
800
1200
1600
289
481
722
962
400
600
900
1200
Slash Ratings from 2008 NEC Article
240.85 Applications
A circuit breaker with a straight
voltage rating, such as 240 or 480V,
shall be permitted to be applied in a
circuit in which the nominal voltage
between any two conductors does not
exceed the circuit breakers voltage
rating. A two-pole circuit breaker shall
not be used for protecting a three-
phase, corner-grounded delta circuit
unless the circuit breaker is marked
13 to indicate such suitability.
A circuit breaker with a slash rating,
such as 120/240V or 480Y/277V, shall
be permitted to be applied in a solidly
grounded circuit where the nominal
voltage of any conductor to ground
does not exceed the lower of the two
values of the circuit breakers voltage
rating and the nominal voltage
between any two conductors does
not exceed the higher value of the
circuit breakers voltage rating.
FPN: Proper application of molded-
case circuit breakers on three-phase
systems, other than solidly grounded
wye, particularly on corner-grounded
delta systems, considers the circuit
breakers individual pole-interrupting
capability.
For corner-grounded delta systems
refer to Eaton for reduced interrupting
ratings of selected type two- and
three-pole breakers.
For center tapped delta applications
where there is a tap between A
and C (high B being the leg),
the following applies:
1. The voltage from the tapped
winding center point that is
grounded is 0.867 x line to
line voltage.
2. Any single-pole breaker connected
to B phase must have a voltage
rating equal to 0.867 x line to
line voltage.
3. Any two-pole breaker should have
a full voltage rating equal to or
above line to line voltage (slash
rating is not acceptable).
27.3-8
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
040
Cable Sizing/Selection
There is often much confusion about
the size and insulation ratings of cables
that are used with circuit breakers and
other types of electrical equipment
assemblies. Much of the confusion is
caused by not taking into consideration
the rating of the terminations of the
electrical equipment. When sizing and
selecting a cable, the designer must
consider the temperature rating of the
termination it will be landed on so that
the proper size and insulation rating
can be chosen.
Per UL 489, circuit breakers rated
125A or less shall be marked as
being suitable for 60C (140F)
only, 75C (167F) only or 60/75C
(140/167F) wire. All Eaton listed
breakers rated 125A and less are
marked 60/75C
Per UL 489, circuit breakers rated
over 125A shall be marked as being
suitable for 75C (167F). All Eaton
listed breakers rated over 125A are
marked 75C
It is important to note that the
termination rating of electrical
equipment is based on the entire
equipment assembly and not just the
rating of the lug termination itself.
The designer must review the equip-
ment labeling or installation guidelines
to determine the proper cable size and
insulation required, regardless of the
markings on the actual lugs. For
example, panelboards, switchboards,
motor control centers and so on. often
contain lugs that are marked 90C on
the lug itself, however, the assembly is
only rated for a 75C cable termination.
Therefore, only cables with a minimum
of 75C insulation and rated/derated per
its 75C ampacity rating can be used.
Note: All listed electrical distribution
equipment rated 600 Vac and less has
a maximum cable termination rating
of 75C (167F).
There are many different types of
conductors and Table 310.13(A)
of NEC 2008 can help provide an
understanding of conductors to use
for various eld-wired applications.
This table shows that insulation type
is a key aspect of a conductor that
impacts not only where it can be
installed but also the conductors rated
ampacity. Together with Tables 310.16
through 310.21, the cable ampacities
of various conductors with various
insulation types are presented to the
designer who must choose the appro-
priate conductor for the application.
When a designer is sizing cables for
termination on electrical distribution
equipment, they must ensure not
to exceed:
1. The temperature rating of the
equipment termination.
2. The insulation rating of the cable
at the full load ampacity of the
equipment.
The following are a couple simple
sizing examples to illustrate some of
the considerations for selecting and
sizing cables.
It should also be noted that many
terminals are suitable for use only
with copper wire. Where aluminum
or copper-clad aluminum wire is
used, the terminals must be marked
appropriately. The marking is usually
abbreviated as AL for aluminum,
CU for copper and AL-CU for a
terminal that can handle both.
Figure 27.3-1. Sizing Example 1
Figure 27.3-2. Sizing Example 2
Table 27.3-8. Sizing Example 1
Allowable
Ampacity
Properly
Sized
Explanation
#1/0 Cu Type TW (60C Insulation)
60C 125A Yes Meets the ampere requirement of the equipment without exceeding the
equipment terminal ratings
#1 Cu Type THHN (90C Insulation)
60C 110A No The 60C rating of #1 Cu is not sufcient for the 125A equipment
75C 130A Yes Meets the ampere requirement of the equipment without exceeding the
equipment terminal ratings
90C 150A No Cannot use 90C ratingexceeds the equipment terminal ratings
125A
Breaker Terminals
Rated 60/75C
150A
Breaker Terminals
Rated 75C
Table 27.3-9. Sizing Example 2
Allowable
Ampacity
Properly
Sized
Explanation
##3/0 Cu Type TW (60C Insulation)
60C 164A No Meets the ampere requirement of the equipment, but equipment terminal
temperature rating exceeds cable insulation temperature rating
#1 Cu Type THHN (90C Insulation)
1/0 Cu Type THHN (90C Insulation)
60C 125A No The 60C rating of 1/0 Cu is not sufcient for the 150A equipment
75C 150A Yes The 75C rating of 1/0 Cu is sufcient for the 150A equipment and
does not exceed equipment terminal ratings
27.3-9
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
Application InformationTrip Curves
041
Time-Current Trip Curve
Characteristics
Time-current trip curve characteristics
are available on the Eaton Web site.
The band curves shown for each
breaker type represent current tripping
limits for the breaker and are within
limits established by Underwriters
Laboratories. For a given current, at
rated ambient, a breaker will clear the
circuit automatically at some total time
within the two extreme values dened
by maximum and minimum curves.
For example, a single-pole, 15A
QUICKLAG would trip in no less than
10 seconds and in no more than
150 seconds on a 30A current.
Because of this allowed spread, users
should not specify exact tripping times.
The upper left portions of these curves
show the inverse time delay tripping
of the breakers due to thermal action.
The lower right segments for these
curves portray the magnetic tripping
action of the breakers. In the case of
the front-adjustable thermal-magnetic
breakers, the magnetic tripping
elements may be adjusted to trip at
values within a specic current range.
This adjustment is shown in the
respective characteristic tripping
curve. When these breakers leave the
factory, their magnetic trip elements
are set at the high side of their tripping
range. Adjustment downward may be
made to t the requirements of the
installation. Currents equal to or
greater than these magnetic settings
will cause instant tripping.
Curves can be family curves and are
suitable for most applications; for more
accurate applications, a detailed curve of
the particular type and ampere rating of
the breaker should be requested.
The total time taken by a breaker to
clear a fault consists of the mechanical
operating time plus the time of actual
current interruption. Characteristic
time/current curves show total clearing
times. Magnetic only breakers have
no time delay in tripping. The tripping
characteristics of these breakers are
similar to the right-hand portion of
the standard breakers, except with
the vertical lines extended to the top
of the curve.
Figure 27.3-3. Typical Time-Current Curves
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF CIRCUIT BREAKER RATING
INSTANTANEOUS
PORTION
.5 1 5 10 50 100 500 1000
.01
.05
.1
.5
1
5
10
50
100
500
1000
5000
10000
LONG TIME
PORTION
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
T
I
M
E
I
N
S
E
C
O
N
D
S
INSTANT TT ANEOUS TT
PICK-UP
LONG TIME DELAY AA
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF RA LL TING PLUG OR CURRENT SENSOR AA
.5 1 5 10 50 100 500 1000
.01
5000 10000
.05
.1
.5
1
5
10
50
100
500
1000
5000
10000
T
I
M
E
I
N
S
E
C
O
N
D
S
SHORT TIME
DELAY AA
SHORT TIME
PICK-UP
AMPERE RATING AA
OR
LONG TIME PICK-UP
.2 .3 .4 .6 .8 1 2 3 4 6 8
.2
.3
.4
.6
.8
1
.03
.04
.06
.08
.1
2
3
4
6
8
10
GROUND FAUL FF T LL
TIME DELAY AA
I
2
t RAMP
GROUND FAUL FF T LL
PICK-UP
T
I
M
E
I
N
S
E
C
O
N
D
S
I
2
t RAMP
TYPICAL TIME-CURRENT CURVE
ADJUSTMENTS FOR SOLID-STATE TRIP
UNIT WITH ADJUSTABLE GROUND FAULT
PICK-UP AND DELAY SETTINGS.
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF
FRAME OR SENSOR RATING.
Non-Adjustable Thermal-Magnetic
Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable
Phase and Ground Current Settings
27.3-10
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
Application InformationSelective Coordination
042
Design Issues
In the design of Elevator feeders,
Emergency systems, Legally Required
Standby systems and new Critical
Operations Power Systems (COPS),
todays engineer faces greater
difculty in meeting the NEC selective
coordination requirements. Whether
using breakers or fuses, the engineer
has to understand the nature of the
devices being selected, and properly
apply them, such that only the protec-
tive device nearest to the fault will open
to clear an overload/fault condition.
In order to properly design a selectively
coordinated system, the design
professional engineer must recognize
how the various low voltage (600V and
below) overcurrent protective devices,
such as molded-case circuit breakers
(MCCBs) and low voltage power
circuit breakers (LVPCBs) operate.
Following is a brief discussion of these
devices in relationship to selective
coordination. Each MCCB and LVPCB
must have a voltage rating and
interrupting capacity equal to or greater
than the system voltage and available
fault current at its point of application
in the electrical distribution system.
For MCCBs and LVPCBs in the low
level overload or low level fault
current range (typically below 10 times
the device rating) it is only necessary
to ensure that the minimum time
band of the upstream device does
not overlap the maximum time
band of the downstream device.
This information can be typically
determined from the published
time-current curves of the devices.
Figure 27.3-4. Example of 100% Selective Coordination of Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Overcurrent = Fault or Overload
Only This Overcurrent
Device 4 Opens for a
Fault or Overload at
D Locations
Only This Overcurrent
Device 3 Opens for a
Fault or Overload at
C Locations
4
D
3
C
Only This Overcurrent Device 2
Opens for a Fault or Overload
at B Locations
B
2
Only This Breaker 1
Opens for a Fault or
Overload at A Location
B A
1 Branch
Circuit
A
Light Ballast
or Motor
D D
C
27.3-11
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
043
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker
Interrupting and Short-Time Rating
IEEE Standard 1015 denes the inter-
rupting rating of the breaker as The
highest current at rated voltage that a
device is intended to interrupt under
standard test conditions. On the other
hand, IEEE Standard 1015 refers to the
short-time rating of the low voltage
circuit breaker as A rating applied to
a circuit breaker that, for reason of
system coordination, causes tripping
of the circuit breaker to be delayed
beyond the time when tripping would
be caused by an instantaneous
element. In other words, the devices
ability to stay closed and NOT open
the circuit immediately under fault
conditions. The short-time rating of
the breaker will be broken down into
two facets for ease of discussion:
1. Short-time current rating
The current carried by the circuit
breaker for a specied interval, or
the maximum current magnitude
under a fault condition for which
the circuit breaker can stay closed.
2. Short-time delay ratingAn
intentional time delay in the trip-
ping of a circuit breaker between
the overload and the instanta-
neous pickup setting. The maxi-
mum short-time delay is the
maximum amount of time the
breaker can keep its contacts
closed under the fault condition.
If two breakers are in series, to
obtain selective coordination, the
upstream breaker must have a
short-time current rating above
the actual fault current on the load
side of any downstream breaker.
In addition, the upstream breaker
has to have short-time delay
capability long enough to allow
the downstream breaker to open
and clear the fault condition.
It should be recognized that as the
short-time current rating and/or short-
time delay rating of the upstream
devices is increased, should a fault
occur on the line side of downstream
circuit breaker 1 and the load side
of upstream circuit breaker 2 the
amount of the arc ash energy allowed
to the fault condition generally will be
increased signicantly. This increased
arc ash energy reduces the safety
of operating and/or maintenance
personnel if they are present at the time
of the fault. The higher level of arc ash
energy also increases the potential for
major equipment damage, resulting in
res and extended downtime.
Molded-case circuit breakers are
manufactured and tested to the UL 489
standard. Molded-case circuit breakers
have over-center toggle mechanisms
and either a thermal-magnetic or
electronic trip unit. The thermal-
magnetic trip unit is such that the
magnetic pickup maximum setting is
approximately 10 times the trip rating.
The electronic trip unit is typically
furnished with a xed instantaneous
override of approximately 10 to
15 times the breaker frame rating, or
trip unit rating. Thus, for molded-case
circuit breakers with electronic trip
units, for any load side fault above
these levels, the breaker will open. The
exact magnitude of current that will
cause the molded-case circuit breaker
to open instantaneously will vary
by 1) circuit breaker manufacturer,
2) circuit breaker frame rating, 3) type
of trip unit, 4) type/vintage of molded-
case circuit breaker, 5) manufacturers
curve tolerances. It will be assumed
that the current magnitude needed to
open molded-case circuit breakers
with electronic trips instantaneously
is 13 times the frame ratingits
maximum xed instantaneous over-
ride. The manufacturers actual data
should be used to determine this
value. Typically for molded-case
circuit breakers, once the magnetic
pickup or xed instantaneous override
is exceeded, the opening time is 1 cycle
or less.
Although short-time ratings for
molded-case circuit breakers are not
covered in the IEEE Standard 1015 for
molded-case circuit breakers, some
molded-case circuit breakers are
equipped with electronic trip units
that have adjustable short delay
functions. However, they typically
also have either an adjustable
instantaneous trip (typically with
a maximum setting of 10 times trip
ampere) or a xed instantaneous
override (of 13 times the frame
ampere rating). When the electronic
trip is in the short-time pickup range
(below 13 times frame size), they can
typically be adjusted up to a maximum
short-time delay setting of approxi-
mately 18 cycles (300 ms).
Current Limiting
Per UL 489-1991, current limiting
circuit breakers have characteristics
that, when operating within their
current-limiting range, limit the let-
through l
2
t to a value less than the l
2
t
of a 1/2-cycle wave of the symmetrical
prospective current. Current limiting
circuit breakers achieve this by
opening their contacts very rapidly,
such that their l peak let-through
current is reduced to a value much
lower than the l peak current available
from the system at the molded-case
circuit breakers point of application.
Insulated-case circuit breakers are also
manufactured and tested to the UL 489
standard, however, they usually have
a two-step stored energy mechanism
and increased short-time ratings.
These breakers are typically available
in 800, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 4000
and 5000A frame sizes. Although they
may have high interrupting ratings,
the typical instantaneous override
values for insulated-case circuit
breakers are 25 kA to 35 kA for the
smaller frames and up to 85 kA for the
larger frames. Maximum short-time
delay capability is generally up to
30 cycles (0.5s).
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
are manufactured and tested to the
UL 1066 Standard and ANSI C37
standards and have a two-step stored
energy mechanism. Low voltage
power circuit breakers are typically
available in 800, 1600, 2000, 2500,
3000, 4000 and 5000A frame sizes.
However, even the smaller 800A frame
size is available with very high short-
time current ratings of approximately
85 kA to 100 kA. Low voltage power
circuit breakers are capable of keeping
their contacts closed for up to 30
cycles of fault current, at levels up
to their maximum short-time current
rating. Thus, low voltage power
circuit breakers can normally provide
selective coordination with relative
ease when in series with each other, or
when supplying downstream molded-
case circuit breakers or low voltage
27.3-12
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
044
Methods to Obtain 100%
There are various methods to obtain
selective coordination between over-
current protective devices, but the
end goal is to have all the line side
overcurrent protective devices in
series to wait until the overcurrent
protective device directly protecting
the circuit having the overcurrent
opens. This means that typically as
the devices progress upstream toward
the source, each device on the line
side of a downstream series device
must have a longer waiting time. The
only two exceptions to this general
rule would be:
1. Two protective devices of the
same trip or fuse rating directly
in series.
2. A transformer primary feeder
breaker and transformer
secondary main breaker.
For both of these exceptions, it would
not matter which overcurrent device
would open or if they both opened,
because the protected circuit would
be disconnected in either case.
Circuit Breaker Selection
1. Select Specic Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers
Selective coordination between
upstream molded-case circuit breakers
and downstream molded-case circuit
breakers requires special consideration.
There are various ways to obtain
selective coordination, some applicable
basic methods are as follows:
For molded-case circuit breakers
with thermal-magnetic trip units,
select a line-side breaker with a
magnetic trip (instantaneous
element) setting above the calculated
available fault current level at the
load side downstream breaker
For molded-case circuit breakers
with electronic trip units, select
a line side breaker that has an
adjustable instantaneous element
or xed instantaneous override
greater than the calculated available
fault current level at the load side
downstream breakers. In addition,
the line side breaker short-time
delay setting must be selected
to allow the load side breaker
adequate time to open and clear
the fault
2. Select Larger Line Side Molded-Case
Circuit Breaker
Select a line side breaker with a larger
frame size than would normally be
required when just considering the
load current requirements. Typically,
the larger the molded-case circuit
breaker frame size, the higher the
magnetic trip adjustment or xed
instantaneous override value.
General rule: The magnetic trip setting
or xed instantaneous override value
must be higher than the calculated
available fault current at load side
circuit breaker. However, the larger
the molded-case circuit breaker frame
size, typically the higher the associated
cost and arc ash energy on a fault
condition.
3. Select a Line Side Low Voltage
Power Circuit Breaker
Use the combination of upstream
and downstream molded-case circuit
breakers. The required combinations
will vary depending on the available
fault current. Most manufacturers
have low voltage power circuit
breakers available in two types.
Type 1: Low voltage power circuit
breakers with short-time current
ratings available up to 100 kA and
with interrupting ratings up to 100 kA.
Type 2: For fault currents above
100 kA, low voltage power circuit
breakers are available either as
combination low voltage power
circuit breakers with current limiters,
or as true current limiting versions
without current limiters. Both types
have interrupting ratings up to 200 kA,
but typically have reduced short-time
current ratings.
4. Select Both Line and Load Low Voltage
When usinng low voltage power
circuit breakers, because of the high
short-time current ratings available in
all frame sizes, and their maximum
30-cycle short-time delay rating, there
is generally no problem obtaining
selective coordination between line
and load side low voltage power
circuit breakers. However, the higher
the short delay setting, the higher
the level of available arc ash energy
should a fault occur directly on the
load side of a given low voltage power
circuit breaker.
Use Manufacturers Test Information
Circuit breaker manufacturers, such as
Eaton Corporation, provide selective
coordination tables between specic
line side circuit breakers and load
side circuit breakers, for various
maximum values of fault current.
(See Table 27.3-10 for 100% Selective
Breaker Combinations.) These tables
are based on circuit breaker test data.
It should be noted that in many cases,
the allowable fault current levels to
achieve selective coordination is
signicantly higher when using
the manufacturers specic test
information. This is attributed to the
high-speed performance of modern
molded-case circuit breakers that
in some cases are marked as being
current limiting: In addition, although
some molded-case circuit breakers
may not be formally marked as current
limiting, they still begin to open before
the rst 1/2-cycle peak, inserting arc
impedance into the circuit, and thus
still reduce the peak let-through
current (l
PI
) with resulting lower l
2
t
values. This current reduction by
the downstream breaker reduces
the current to a level below the
instantaneous override of the
upstream breaker, thus providing
selective coordination for higher
fault current levels.
It should be noted that the test circuit
used by manufacturers to conrm
selective coordination must be known
and reasonable. Eatons test circuit
is similar to the test circuit used by
UL 489. This test circuit allows for
4 feet of wire for the combination
of wire from the load side of the
upstream breaker through the down-
stream breaker to the point of the fault.
0.1 Second Selective Coordination
Some applications and jurisdictions
only mandate breaker selectivity for
time periods longer than 0.1 seconds.
This allows the designer greater
exibility to balance the affects of
arc ash risk, downtime risk, risk of
equipment damage and so on. with
selectivity. (See Table 27.3-11 for
0.1 Second Breaker Selectivity
Combinations.)
27.3-13
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
045
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker
Combinations
100% Selective Coordination
For 100% Selective Coordination
ApplicationsTable 27.3-10
The left side columns list the
amperages of the downstream
breaker grouped by the available
breaker frames. The next columns
on the right of the amperages indicate
the type of Pow-R-Line
panelboards
and/or switchboard that the given
downstream breaker is available in
and whether the breaker may be used
in that assembly as a main, feeder or
sub-feed breaker.
The top rows of the table list the
amperages of the upstream breaker
grouped by the available breaker
frames. The next row below indicates
the type of trip unit needed:
T/M = Thermal-Magnetic
ETU = Electronic Trip Unit
For ETUs, the next rows indicate the
specic type of Digitrip RMS trip unit
and/or OPTIM trip unit available.
The minimum trip/maximum trip
rows indicate the amperage range for
which the indicated selectivity is valid.
The next rows below the minimum/
maximum trip indicate the type of
Pow-R-Line panelboards and/or
switchboard that the given upstream
breaker is available in and whether the
breaker may be used in that assembly
as a main, feeder or sub-feed breaker.
The values at the intersection of a row
and column represent the maximum
fault current at which selective
coordination can be achieved
between the chosen downstream
and upstream circuit breakers.
Steps in Determining Selective
Coordination Between Line and
Load Side Circuit Breakers
1. Determine the maximum available
fault current from all sources, at
both the upstream and down-
stream breakers, by means of a
short-circuit study, appropriate
charts and/or formulas. Where
both upstream and downstream
breakers are connected to the
same bus, this will be the
same value.
2. Starting on the left at the top
and moving downward, select
the downstream Eaton breaker
that has adequate Interrupting
Capacity (IC), voltage rating and
continuous amperage rating
for the downstream breaker
application. If the required
interrupting rating, voltage rating
or amperage rating is not shown
in the table, continue downward
to the row for the next larger
breaker frame.
3. Move horizontally from the
selected downstream breaker
trip rating to the rst value of
symmetrical rms fault current
that meets or exceeds the
value of rms fault current at the
upstream breaker as determined
from Step 1.
4. Proceed upward to read the
possible upstream breaker
frame. Check the minimum
and maximum trip range indicated
to ensure it meets the required
upstream breaker trip rating.
If the trip rating meets the
requirements, this will be one of
the possible upstream breakers
that will selectively coordinate
with the downstream breaker.
If the indicated trip rating or
trip range does not meet the
requirements for the line side
breaker, repeat Step 3 and Step 4.
5. Once an upstream family of
circuit breakers is determined that
selectively coordinates, you can
nd the specic breaker within
that family that meets the required
interrupting capacity by checking
the breaker product overview
tables on Pages 27.4-4 through
27.4-6.
6. OptionalOnce the selective
combination of breakers is
determined, you can determine
the type of Pow-R-Line panelboard
or switchboard assembly that can
be used.
Note: If both the upstream and downstream
breakers are to be in the same assembly,
ensure that both devices are available in the
same type Pow-R-Line assembly.
Repeat the above steps for each pair of
breakers in the system to quickly and
easily select devices that will 100%
selectively coordinate.
27.3-14
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
Application Information100% Selective Coordination
046
Table 27.3-10. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) 100% Selective Coordination Combinations
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family EG F F F F F F J J J
Type Trip Unit T/M T/M T/M T/M ETU ETU ETU T/M T/M T/M
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310+ 310+ 310+
OPTIM Trip Unit
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) 125A 100A 150A 225A 15A 60A 100A 70A 150A 250A
Maximum Trip (Frame) 125A 100A 200A 225A 80A 160A 225A 125A 225A 250A
Pow-R-Line: Main 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 3a
Pow-R-Line: Branch 3E 3a, 4, Swbd 4, Swbd
Downstream Breaker Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed 1a, 2a, 3E 3a
Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard
Main Branch Sub-Feed
BR, BAB, HQP and QC (10 kA at 240 Vac) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1.2
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.0
1.0
0.7
2.1
2.1
2.1
4.0
3.4
3.4
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
3.4
2.5
2.5
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
1.8
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.3
2.3
BRH, QPHW, QBHW and QCHW (22 kA at 240 Vac) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1.2
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.0
1.0
0.7
2.1
2.1
2.1
4.0
3.4
3.4
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
3.4
2.5
2.5
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
1.8
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.3
2.3
GHB Family (65 kA at 240 Vac, 14 kA at 480Y/277 Vac)
20
30
50

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1.2
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
0.8
0.8
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.8
2.8
2.3
0.7
0.7
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.3
70
100
2a
2a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2.2
1.8
2.3
1.8
2.3
2.3
FCL Family Current Limiting (200 kA at 240 Vac, 150 kA at 480 Vac)
100 Swbd 1.8 1.6 1.8 2.3
EG Family (EGB, EGE, EGS, EGH)
15
30
50
3E
3E
3E
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
1.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.8
2.8
2.3
1.0
0.7
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.3
60
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
1.3
1.5
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.6
1.2
1.2
2.3
1.8
1.8
1.5
2.3
2.3
2.3
F Family (ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDB(150A), EHD(100A), FDE, HFDE, FDCE)
15
40
100
225

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.8
1.8
1.8
0.8
0.8
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.8
2.3
1.8
1.0
0.7
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.3

27.3-15
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
047
Table 27.3-10. MCCB 100% Selective Coordination Combinations (Continued)
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family EG F F F F F F J J J
Type Trip Unit T/M T/M T/M T/M ETU ETU ETU T/M T/M T/M
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310+ 310+ 310+
OPTIM Trip Unit
Pow-R-Line: Main 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E 3a
Pow-R-Line: Branch 3E 3a, 4, Swbd 4, Swbd
Downstream Breaker Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed 1a, 2a, 3E 3a
J Family (JDB, JD, HJD, JDC)
70
125
250
2a, 3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a
LCL 250 Family Current Limiting

125
200
250
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

200
300
400
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

K Family (KDB, KD, CKD, HKD, CHKD, KDC)
100
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
L Family (LDB, LD, CLD, HLD, CHLD, LDC, CLDC)

300
400
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
LG Family (LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC)

250
400
600
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
LG Current Limiting Family

400
600
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
LHH Family
150
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, S
4, S
4, S
N Family (ND, CND, HND, CHND, NDC, CNDC, NGS, NGH, NGC)
400
600
800
1200
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
NHH Family
350 4 4, Swbd
27.3-16
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
048
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family K K K K K K LD LD LD LD
Type Trip Unit T/M T/M T/M ETU ETU ETU T/M T/M T/M ETU
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310 310 310 310
OPTIM Trip Unit 550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
Minimum Trip
(Plug/Trip)
100A 200A 400A 70A 125A 200A 300A 400A 600A 200A (OPTIM)
300A (Digi)
Pow-R-Line: Main 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a,4,Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch 4, Swbd 4, Swbd
Downstream Breaker Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2.5
2.0
2.0
5.0
4.0
4.0
10
8.0
8.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
6.0
5.0
5.0
10
8.0
8.0
10
9.0
9.0
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1.2
1.2
3.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2.5
2.0
2.0
5.0
4.0
4.0
10
8.0
8.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
6.0
5.0
5.0
10
8.0
8.0
10
9.0
9.0
10
10
10
22
22
22
22
22
22
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1.2
1.2
3.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
22
22
22
22
22
22
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
20
30
50

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2.0
2.0
1.6
2.7
2.7
2.7
4.5
4.5
4.2
2.7
2.7
2.7
4.0
4.0
3.6
4.5
4.5
4.2
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
15
12
10
10
10
70
100
2a
2a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2.5
2.5
4.2
4.2
3.6
3.6
4.2
4.2
7.4
10
7.4
7.4
12
12
7.4
7.4
100 Swbd 2.8 5.0 6.0 6.5 10 10 10 10
15
30
50
3E
3E
3E
2.0
2.0
1.6
2.5
2.5
2.5
5.6
5.6
5.2
2.5
2.5
2.5
4.6
4.6
4.0
5.6
5.6
5.2
20
15
10
20
15
10
35
35
18
35
35
18
60
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
2.5
2.5
5.2
5.2
5.2
2.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
5.2
5.2
5.2
10
10
10
10
10
10
18
18
18
18
18
18
15
40
100
225

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
2.0
1.6
2.5
2.5
2.3
5.0
5.0
3.2
3.2
2.5
2.5
4.0
3.2
3.2
5.0
4.2
4.0
4.0
10
8.3
7.0
10
8.3
7.0
7.0
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
27.3-17
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
049
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family K K K K K K LD LD LD LD
Type Trip Unit T/M T/M T/M ETU ETU ETU T/M T/M T/M ETU
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
Minimum Trip
(Plug/Trip)
100A 200A 400A 70A 125A 200A 300A 400A 600A 200A (OPTIM)
300A (Digi)
Pow-R-Line: Main 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a,4,Swbd
70
125
250
2a, 3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a
2.0
3.2
3.2
3.2
2.5
2.5
4.0
3.7
3.5
6.0
6.0
8.0
7.0
7.0
12
12
10
12
12
10
125
200
250
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

3.7
3.2
2.5
4.2
3.7
4.2
4.2
3.2
17
17
17
17
17
17
200
300
400
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

3.2
3.2
3.2
17
17
17
17
17
17
100
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
2.0
3.5
3.2
2.5
4.2
3.7
4.2
4.2
3.7
10
10
10
10
10
10
300
400
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0

250
400
600
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0

400
600
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0
LHH Family
150
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
400
600
800
1200
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
NHH Family
350 4 4, Swbd
27.3-18
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
050
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family LHH LHH LHH LG LG LG LG NHH
Type Trip Unit T/M T/M T/M ETU ETU ETU T/M ETU
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310+ 310+ 310+ 310
OPTIM Trip Unit
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) 125A 175A 225A 100A 160A 250A 600A 150A
Maximum Trip (Frame) 150A 200A 400A 250A 400A 600A 600A 350A
Pow-R-Line: Main 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4
Pow-R-Line: Branch 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd
Downstream Breaker Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

10
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
9.0
9.0
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

5.3
5.3
5.3
10
10
10
10
10
10
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

4.3
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

10
7.5
7.5
22
22
22
22
22
22
10
9.0
9.0
14.4
14.4
14.4
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

5.3
5.3
5.3
22
22
22
22
22
22
7.5
7.5
7.5
14.4
14.4
12
22
22
18
22
22
22
22
22
22
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

4.3
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
12
12
12
12
18
18
18
18
22
22
22
22
22

20
30
50

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

3.2
3.2
3.2
7.6
7.6
7.6
14
14
14
4.0
4.0
3.6
7.4
7.4
7.4
10
10
10
12.7
12.7
10
14
14
14
70
100
2a
2a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

3.2
7.6
7.6
12.7
12.7
3.6
3.6
7.4
7.4
10
10
10
10
100 Swbd 10 30 6.0 10 10
15
30
50
3E
3E
3E
10
7.5
3.2
27
14
10
65
35
18
4.6
4.6
4.0
20
15
10
35
35
18
65
65
65
60
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3.2
10
10
10
18
18
18
4.0
4.0
4.0
10
10
10
18
18
18
10
65
15
40
100
225

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
7.5
3.2
14
10
10
22
16
14
12
4.0
3.2
3.2
10
8.3
7.0
7.0
12
12
12
12
10
65
65

27.3-19
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
051
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family LHH LHH LHH LG LG LG LG NHH
Type Trip Unit T/M T/M T/M ETU ETU ETU T/M ETU
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310+ 310+ 310+ 310
OPTIM Trip Unit
Maximum Trip (Frame) 150A 200A 400A 250A 400A 600A 600A 350A
Pow-R-Line: Main 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4
Pow-R-Line: Branch 4, Swbd 4, Swbd 4, Swbd
70
125
250
2a, 3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a
3.2
7.6
7.6
12.7
10
10
2.8
2.8
8.0
7.0
7.0
12
12
10
10

125
200
250
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

12.7
10
2.8
4.2
3.2
17
17
17

200
300
400
3q, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

10
3.2
15
15
15

100
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
5.0
10
10
3.5
4.2
3.7
10
10
10

300
400
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0

250
400
600
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0

400
600
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
LHH Family
150
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0
400
600
800
1200
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
NHH Family
350 4 4, Swbd
27.3-20
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
052
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family N N N N R R R R R R
Type Trip Unit ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310 310 310 310 310 310 310 310 310 310
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
Pow-R-Line: Main 4,
Swbd
4,
Swbd
4, Swbd
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
20
30
50

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
70
100
2a
2a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
100 Swbd 200/65 200/65 200/65 200/65 200/65 200/65 200/65 200/65 200/65 200/65
15
30
50
3E
3E
3E
65
65
42
65
65
42
65
65
42
65
65
42
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
60
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
42
35
35
42
35
35
42
35
35
42
35
35
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
F Family (ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDB [150A], EHD [100A], FDE, HFDE, FDCE)
15
40
100
225

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a,4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
50
42
35
30
50
42
35
30
50
42
35
30
50
42
35
30
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
27.3-21
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
053
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family N N N N R R R R R R
Type Trip Unit ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310 310 310 310 310 310 310 310 310 310
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
Pow-R-Line: Main 4,
Swbd
4,
Swbd
4, Swbd
70
125
250
2a, 3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a
35
30
30
35
30
30
35
30
30
35
30
30
35
30
30
35
30
30
65
65
50
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
125
200
250
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
200
300
400
3q, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
100
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
22
18
22
18
22
18
18
22
18
18
42
40
35
42
35
42
40
35
42
40
35
65
65
50
65
65
50
300
400
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
18
18
18
18
18
18
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
42
35
30
42
35
30
250
400
600
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
10
18
18
18
18
18
18
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
50
35
30
50
35
30
400
600
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
25
25
25
35
30
35
30
35
30
50
42
50
42
50
42
LHH Family
150
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
10
18
18
18
18
18
18
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
50
35
30
50
35
30
400
600
800
1200
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
12
12
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
22
22
22
18
25
25
25
18
NHH Family
350 4 4, Swbd 12 16 16 16 16 22 25
27.3-22
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
Application Information0.1 Sec Selective Coordination
054
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker
Combinations0.1 Second
For 0.1 Second Selective Coordination
ApplicationsTable 27.3-11
The left side columns list the
amperages of the downstream
breaker grouped by the available
breaker frames. The next columns on
the right of the amperages indicate the
type of Pow-R-Line panelboards and/
or switchboard that the given down-
stream breaker is available in and
whether the breaker may be used in
that assembly as a main, feeder or
sub-feed breaker.
The top rows of the table list the
amperages of the upstream breaker
grouped by the available breaker
frames. The next row below indicates
the type of trip unit needed:
T/M = Thermal-Magnetic
ETU = Electronic Trip Unit
For ETUs, the next rows indicate the
specic type of Digitrip RMS trip unit
and/or OPTIM trip unit available.
The minimum trip/maximum trip
rows indicate the amperage range for
which the indicated selectivity is valid.
The next rows below the minimum/
maximum trip indicate the type of
Pow-R-Line panelboards and/or
switchboard that the given upstream
breaker is available in and whether the
breaker may be used in that assembly
as a main, feeder or sub-feed breaker.
The letter T at the intersection
of a row and column indicates that
0.1 second selective coordination
can be achieve between the chosen
downstream and upstream circuit
breakers up to the maximum
interrupting rating of the
downstream breaker.
Steps in Determining 0.1 Second Selective
Coordination Between Line and Load Side
Circuit Breakers
1. Determine the maximum available
fault current from all sources, at
both the upstream and down-
stream breakers, by means of a
short-circuit study, appropriate
charts and/or formulas. Where
both line and load breakers are
connected to the same bus, this
will be the same value.
2. Starting on the left at the top and
moving downward, select the
downstream Eaton breaker
that has adequate Interrupting
Capacity (IC), voltage rating and
continuous amperage rating for the
downstream breaker application.
If the required interrupting rating,
voltage rating, or amperage rating
is not shown in the table, continue
downward to the row for the next
larger breaker frame.
3. Move horizontally from the
selected downstream breaker
trip rating to the rst column that
indicates T. (T indicates that
0.1 second selective coordination
can be achieved between the
chosen downstream and
upstream circuit breakers up to
the maximum interrupting rating
of the downstream breaker.)
4. Proceed upward to read the
possible upstream breaker
frame. Check the minimum
and maximum trip range indicated
to ensure it meets the required
upstream breaker trip rating.
If the trip rating meets the
requirements, this will be one of
the possible upstream breakers
that will selectively coordinate
with the downstream breaker. If
the indicated trip rating or trip
range does not meet the require-
ments for the line side breaker,
repeat Step 3 and Step 4.
5. Once an upstream family of
circuit breakers is determined that
selectively coordinates, you can
nd the specic breaker within
that family that meets the required
interrupting capacity by checking
the breaker product overview
tables on Pages 27.4-4 through
27.4-6.
6. OptionalOnce the selective
combination of breakers is
determined, you can determine
the type of Pow-R-Line panelboard
or switchboard assembly that can
be used.
Note: If both the upstream and downstream
breakers are to be in the same assembly,
ensure that both devices are available in the
same type Pow-R-Line assembly.
Repeat the above steps for each pair
of breakers in the system to quickly
and easily select devices that will
selectively coordinate to 0.1 seconds.
27.3-23
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
055
Table 27.3-11. MCCB 0.1 Second Selective Coordination Combinations
Note: T = Selectivity to 0.1 seconds is achieved with available fault current values up to the full AIC rating of the breaker.
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family EG F F F F F F F F F
Type Trip Unit T/M T/M T/M T/M ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310+ 310+ 310+ 310+ 310+ 310+
OPTIM Trip Unit
Maximum Trip (Frame) 125A 100A 150A 225A 160A 225A
Pow-R-Line: Main 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
Pow-R-Line: Branch 3E 3a, 4, Swbd
BR, BAB, HQP and QC (240 Vac, 10 kA) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
BRH, QPHW, QBHW and QCHW (240 Vac, 22 kA) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
20
30
60

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50
100
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
27.3-24
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
056
Table 27.3-11. MCCB 0.1 Second Selective Coordination Combinations (Continued)
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family EG F F F F F F F F F
Type Trip Unit T/M T/M T/M T/M ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310+ 310+ 310+ 310+ 310+ 310+
OPTIM Trip Unit
Maximum Trip (Frame) 125A 100A 150A 225A 160A 225A
Pow-R-Line: Main 3E 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
Pow-R-Line: Branch 3E 3a, 4, Swbd
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T

70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd


27.3-25
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
057
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family J J J K K K K K K K
Type Trip Unit T/M T/M T/M T/M T/M T/M ETU ETU ETU ETU
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
Maximum Trip (Frame)
Pow-R-Line: Main 3a 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
Downstream Breaker Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed 3a 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T

T
T
T
T
T
T
T

15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

20
30
60

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T

T
T
T
T
T
T

T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T

GD Family (65 kA at 240 Vac, 22 kA at 80 Vac)

15
40
50

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
40
100

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

T
T
T
T
15
40
50
100
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
27.3-26
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
058
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family J J J K K K K K K K
Type Trip Unit T/M T/M T/M T/M T/M T/M ETU ETU ETU ETU
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
Pow-R-Line: Main 3a 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
Downstream Breaker Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed 3a 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
J Family
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T

T
T
T

175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T
T

150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T

225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T

100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd


27.3-27
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
059
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family K K K K K L L L
Type Trip Unit ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU T/M T/M T/M
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310 310 310 310 310
OPTIM Trip Unit 550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050
Pow-R-Line: Main 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 4, Swbd
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
20
30
60

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
40
100

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50
100
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
27.3-28
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
060
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family K K K K K L L L
Type Trip Unit ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU T/M T/M T/M
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310 310 310 310 310
OPTIM Trip Unit 550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050
Pow-R-Line: Main 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 4, Swbd
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
J Family
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T

T

T
T
T
T
T
T
150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T

300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T
T
T
500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd


27.3-29
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
061
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family L L L LG LG LG LG N N
Type Trip Unit ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310 310 310 310+ 310+ 310+ 310+ 310(+) 310(+)
OPTIM Trip Unit 550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) 300A 400A 600A 250A 300A 400A 500A 400A 600A
Maximum Trip (Frame) 600A
Pow-R-Line: Main 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4, Swbd PRL4, Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch 4, Swbd 4, Swbd PRL4, Swbd
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
20
30
60

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
40
100

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50
100
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
27.3-30
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
062
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family L L L LG LG LG LG N N
Type Trip Unit ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310 310 310 310+ 310+ 310+ 310+ 310(+) 310(+)
OPTIM Trip Unit 550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) 300A 400A 600A 250A 300A 400A 500A 400A 600A
Pow-R-Line: Main 1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4 3a, 3E, 4, Swbd PRL4, Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch 4, Swbd 4, Swbd PRL4, Swbd
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
J Family
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T

T

500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd


27.3-31
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
063
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family N N R R R
Type Trip Unit ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310(+) 310(+) 310 310 310
OPTIM Trip Unit 550, 1050 550, 1050 510, 610, 810,
910, 1050
510, 610, 810,
910, 1050
510, 610, 810,
910, 1050
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) 800A 1000A 800A 1000A 1200A
Pow-R-Line: Main PRL4, Swbd Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch PRL4, Swbd Swbd
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
20
30
60

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
40
100

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50
100
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
27.3-32
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
064
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family N N R R R
Type Trip Unit ETU ETU ETU ETU ETU
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310(+) 310(+) 310 310 310
OPTIM Trip Unit 550, 1050 550, 1050 510, 610, 810,
910, 1050
510, 610, 810,
910, 1050
510, 610, 810,
910, 1050
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) 800A 1000A 800A 1000A 1200A
Pow-R-Line: Main PRL4, Swbd Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch PRL4, Swbd Swbd
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
J Family
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

27.3-33
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
065
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family R R R
Type Trip Unit ETU ETU ETU
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310 310 310
OPTIM Trip Unit 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) 1600A 2000A 2500A
Pow-R-Line: Main Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch Swbd
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
20
30
60

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
40
100

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50
100
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
27.3-34
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
066
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family R R R
Type Trip Unit ETU ETU ETU
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit 310 310 310
OPTIM Trip Unit 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050 510, 610, 810, 910, 1050
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) 1600A 2000A 2500A
Pow-R-Line: Main Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch Swbd
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
J Family
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
27.3-35
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
Application InformationArc Flash
067
Electric Arc Flash Hazards
There have been several recent codes
and standards regulations that relate
to the fundamental dangers of arc
ash energy. The following provides
a brief overview.
The NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical
Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces presents numerous
requirements for a wide range of
topics such as electrical equipment,
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE),
lockout/tagout practices and safety
training. Where it has been deter-
mined that work will be performed
within the ash protection boundary,
NFPA 70E requires an analysis to
determine and document the ash
hazard incident energy exposure
of a worker. This document also
contains some of the initial methods
developed in order to quantify the
incident energy.
The Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) is the govern-
mental enforcement agency whose
mission is to save lives, prevent
injuries and protect the health of
Americas workers. They refer to their
standard Code of Federal Regulations,
CFR 1910.333, Selection and Use
of Work Practices, which states
Safety-related work practices shall
be employed to prevent electric shock
or other injuries resulting from either
direct or indirect electrical contacts,
when work is performed near or on
equipment or circuits which are or
may be energized. This general
statement provides the basis for
OSHAs citing and insisting upon
compliance with the arc ash require-
ments contained in NFPA 70E.
The 2002 edition of the National
Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA 70,
contained the rst arc ash hazard
references by adding the following
new requirement as Article 110.16.
Flash Protection. Switchboards,
panelboards, industrial control
panels, and motor control centers that
are in other than dwelling occupancies
and are likely to require examination,
adjustment, servicing or maintenance
while energized, shall be eld marked
to warn qualied persons of potential
electric arc ash hazards. The marking
shall be located so as to be clearly
visible to qualied persons before
examination adjustment, servicing,
or maintenance of the equipment.
Figure 27.3-5. Electric Arc Flash Hazard
FPN No. 1: NFPA 70E-2000, Electrical
Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces, provides assistance in
determining severity of potential
exposure, planing safe work
practices, and selecting personal
protective equipment.
FPN No. 2: ANSI Z535.4-1998,
Product Safety Signs and Labels,
provides guidelines for the design of
safety signs and labels for application
to products.
There were numerous proposals
for the 2005 NEC that would expand
this requirement to indicate the
incident energy in calories per
square centimeter for a worker at a
distance of 18 in. Adoption of this
requirement would indicate the
need for a standardized method for
determining incident energy.
The IEEE 1584-2002, Guide for
Performing Arc Flash Calculations,
provides a method for the calculation
of incident energy and arc ash
protection boundaries. It presents
formulas for numerically quantifying
these values. The IEEE 1584 Guide
also includes an Excel spreadsheet
Arc Flash Hazard Calculator that
performs the actual calculations using
the formulas stated in the Guide.
The hazard analysis cited in NFPA 70E
requires calculations of the incident
energy available at a given location.
This energy is calculated in cal/cm
2

and, based on amount of energy avail-
able, a risk category is assigned, and
based on that risk category, certain
levels of PPE are required. These risk
categories are designed to limit worker
injuries to second degree burns that
occur at energy levels of 1.2 cal/cm
2
.
The calculations have two components:
1) magnitude fault current and
2) duration of the fault. The specics
of the formulas are beyond the scope
of this discussion, but several factors
included in the calculations need
understanding. Faster clearing times
signicantly reduce the incident
arc ash energy.
The third factor affecting arc ash
incident energy exposure to personnel
is the distance the person is from the
arc ash location.
3.50
(88.9)
DANGER
Wi l l cause severe
i nj ury or death.
Turn OFF ALL power
before opening. Follow
ALL requirements in
NFPA 70E for safe
work practices and for
Personal Protective
Equipment.
Note to installer: Apply label as required by 2002 NEC Art. 110.16.
If desired, additional labels may be purchased through your local
EATON representative.
ELECTRIC ARC FLASH HAZARD
2.75
(69.8)
3.25
(82.5)
0.50
(12.7)
27.3-36
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
Application InformationArc Flash
068
Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System
Selected models of Eatons molded-
case circuit breakers are available with
an Arcash Reduction Maintenance
System to provide reduced levels of
incident arc ash energy when put in
the Maintenance Mode.
System is available on Magnum power
circuit breakers, NRX power circuit
breakers and select Series G molded-
case circuit breakers. In Series G
molded-case breakers, the trip unit
combines Eatons Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System with the Digitrip
310+ electronic trip unit, allowing for
the ability to place the trip unit in
Maintenance Mode to reduce potential
arc ash energy. This is done by a
dedicated instantaneous sensing circuit
with settings of 2.5 and 4.0 times the
current rating of the trip unit. This
dedicated analog sensing circuit
delivers breaker clearing times that
are faster than instantaneous by
eliminating microprocessor processing
latencies. This provides superior
arc ash reduction to competitors
systems that simply lower the standard
instantaneous pickup set point.
When the Eaton Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System is enabled, the
resulting reduced arc ash energy
allows for reduced PPE, which
improves worker comfort and
mobility. With the Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System set at 2.5X or
4.0X, it reduces incident energy levels
to allow PPE Category 0 for currents of
2.5X or 4.0X the breaker ampere rating
or greater. The initial setting of each
System trip unit is determined by
completing a power system analysis,
to assess available fault current at the
circuit breaker. Based on that analysis,
the Maintenance Mode protection
settings are dened, achieving a
reduced level of arc ash energy.
The Maintenance Mode is then
activated by adjusting the trip units
instantaneous setting to desired
Maintenance Mode levels determined
by the power analysis.
Figure 27.3-6. Time Current Curve
Close-Up of LG Trip Unit
Series G MCCB Features
Available with ALSI and ALSIG
electronic trip unit
Dedicated analog trip circuit for
faster than instantaneous tripping
Superior arc ash reduction
over systems that simply lower
the standard instantaneous
pickup set point
Adjustable pickup settings
(2.5x, 4.0x)
Local or remote initiation
Maintenance Mode LED
0.5 1
1
10
10
100
100
1K
1K
10K
0.01 0.01
0.10 0.10
10 10
100 100
1000 1000
Current in Amperes
T
i
m
e

i
n

S
e
c
o
n
d
s
10K
1 1
480V Feeder
Magnum DS, RMS 520M
Trip 1600.0A
Plug 1600.0A
Setting Phase
LTPU (0.4-1.0 x P) 1 (1600A)
LTD (2-24 Sec.) 12
STPU (2-12 x LTPU) 6 (9600A)
STD (0.1-0.5 Sec.) 0.2 (l
2
t In)
INST (2-12 x P) M1 (12) (19,200A)
480V Feeder
ARMS
Trip 1600.0A
Plug 1600.0A
Settings ARMS
ARMS 2.5 (4000A)
Motor
700.0 hp
Eatons Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System Gives
Clearing Times That Are
Faster Than Instantaneous
27.3-37
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
Application InformationUnusual Environmental Conditions
069
Unusual Environmental Conditions
Trip Unit Temperatures
Eatons thermal-magnetic circuit
breakers are temperature sensitive.
At ambient temperatures below 40C
(104F), circuit breakers carry more
current than their continuous current
rating. Nuisance tripping is not a prob-
lem under these lower temperature
conditions, although consideration
should be given to closer protection
coordination to compensate for the
additional current carrying capability.
In addition, the actual mechanical
operation of the breaker could be
affected if the ambient temperature is
signicantly below the 40C standard.
For ambient temperatures above
40C, breakers will carry less current
than their continuous current rating.
This condition promotes nuisance
tripping and can create unacceptable
temperature conditions at the terminals.
Under this condition, the circuit breaker
should be recalibrated for the higher
ambient temperature.
Electronic trip units are insensitive to
ambient temperatures within a certain
temperature range. The temperature
range for most Eaton electronic trip
units is 20 to 55C (4 to 131F).
However, at very low ambient
temperatures, the mechanical parts
of the breaker could require special
treatment, such as the use of special
lubricants. If the ambient temperature
exceeds 40C signicantly, damage
to the electronic circuitry and other
components could result. Eaton
includes temperature protective
circuits in its designs to initiate a
tripping operation and provide
self-protection, should the internal
temperature rise to an unsafe level.
Circuit Breaker Temperatures
ing a circuit breaker is the ambient
temperature. In the mid-1960s, industry
standards were changed to make all
standard breakers calibrated to a 40C
ambient temperature. For any ambient
temperature application above or below
40C, it is recommended that the
breaker manufacturer be consulted as
to any possible re-rating, recalibration
or special procedures, before the
circuit breaker is selected and applied.
Table 27.3-12. Derating for Non-Compensated
Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Calibrated for 40C
Humidity/MoistureCorrosion
Molded-case circuit breakers are
suited for operation in 0 to 95% non-
condensing humidity environments. As
is the case with all electrical equipment,
application in a condition or environ-
ment above this humidity level should
be avoided. The ability of molded-case
circuit breakers to perform their protec-
tive function is negatively affected by
exposure to condensation or water,
as well as the minerals, particles and
contaminants that may be present in
them. Prolonged humidity exposure
and/or the presence of corrosive
elements can result in damage to key
operating components and/or severely
compromise the breakers operational
integrity. It may adversely impact
breaker contact condition and reduce the
insulation and dielectric properties of the
circuit breaker. In electronic trip circuit
breakers, functionality may be similarly
compromised by these conditions. To
prevent these effects, the breaker should
be protected by the proper NEMA rated
enclosure for its installation environ-
ment, and kept dry through the use of
space heaters in the enclosure. If such
operating conditions cannot be met,
special treatment of the circuit breaker
should be considered to minimize the
possibility of operational problems.
Most Eaton molded-case circuit breaker
cases are molded from glass polyester
that does not support the growth of
fungus. In addition, a special moisture-
and fungus-resisting treatment is
recommended for any parts that are
susceptible to the growth of fungus.
Altitude
Low voltage circuit breakers must be
progressively derated for voltage,
current carrying and interrupting rating
at altitudes above 6000 ft (1829m). The
thinner air at higher altitudes reduces
cooling and dielectric characteristics
compared to the denser air found at
lower altitudes. Refer to Eaton for
additional application details.
Shock/Vibration
Where high shock is an anticipated
condition, hi-shock Navy MIL-SPEC
type breakers are recommended.
Molded-case circuit breakers can be
supplied to meet the following marine
specications, several of which require
vibration testing: U.S. Coast Guard
CFR 46, ABSAmerican Bureau of
Shipping, IEEE 45, UL 489 Supplement
SA Marine, UL 489 Supplemental SB
Naval, ABS/NVR, Lloyds of London
and DNV. See Page 27.2-20 for
additional information on Navy
MIL-SPEC and marine circuit breakers.
Breaker Ampere
Rating at 40C
Ampere Rating
25C
(77F)
50C
(122F)
60C
(140F)
F-Frame/EG-Frame
15
20
25
17
22
32
13
18
21
11
16
18
30
35
40
33
41
45
27
32
34
24
27
29
50
60
70
55
66
77
46
56
65
42
52
60
90
100
125
150
99
110
137
165
84
94
116
138
78
87
105
125
GD-Frame
15
20
25
14
19
24
13
18
22
30
35
40
28
33
38
27
31
36
45
50
60
43
48
57
40
45
54
70
80
90
100
67
76
86
96
63
72
81
91
J-Frame/JG-Frame
70
90
100
79
102
115
63
81
89
55
71
76
125
150
175
140
171
200
114
134
156
102
116
134
200
225
250
230
252
281
178
205
227
153
183
201
K-Frame
100
125
150
121
145
188
90
116
132
79
106
111
175
200
225
210
243
255
159
180
212
141
157
198
250
300
350
400
294
364
412
471
230
270
322
368
208
236
291
333
L-Frame/LG-Frame
300
350
400
330
385
440
276
325
372
252
301
340
500
600
550
660
468
564
435
525
M-Frame
300
350
400
332
388
444
277
322
368
252
292
334
450
500
600
495
550
660
418
468
564
383
435
525
700
800
770
880
658
754
613
704
27.3-38
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
Application InformationReverse-Feed Applications
070
Reverse-Feed Application
of Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers may be applied in
panelboard, switchboard or motor
control center installations where
there may occasionally be multiple
sources of power, as shown in
Figure 27.3-7. For example, these
may be applications that require
high uptime and high reliability
requirements. For these require-
ments, permanent, xed mount or
portable electrical generator systems,
with an appropriate automatic transfer
switching system, are made available
to supplement the normal utility
power supply source. In other
instances, the second power source
may be from a so-called alternate
energy source, such as that derived
from solar photovoltaic or from wind
power electric systems. Similarly,
these alternate energy sources are
also typically connected as a supple-
ment to the normal utility power
sources. As electrical load demand
conditions change, the user may
switch between using power from the
normal utility source to the alternate
power source, and vice versa. When-
ever this switch in power source
occurs, the terminals of the circuit
breaker that the power is connected to
will have been reversed. This reversal
in the way that power is connected to
a circuit breaker is called reverse-
feed. Reverse-feed (or back feed)
refers to a way that the conductors
supplying current are connected to a
circuit breaker.
Figure 27.3-7. Circuit Breaker Fed from
Multiple Power Supply Sources
In other applications where there is a
single power source, circuit breakers
may be mounted in an electrical
enclosure where the cables from the
power source are fed to the bottom
of the enclosure. In this case, it may
be a matter of convenience for the
installation to simply connect the
power source conductors to the
terminals at the bottom of the
circuit breaker that are closest to the
incoming power supply conductors.
This connection of the power supply
source to the circuit breakers
bottom terminals will also result
in power being applied in a reverse-
feed manner.
There are different classications
and types of circuit breakers that
exist, and they should be carefully
considered when used in reverse-
feed applications described above.
Depending on the type of circuit
breaker, as listed below, reverse-
feeding of that circuit breaker
may or may not be suitable for
that application.
Circuit Breaker Classications
Low voltage circuit breakers fall into
two basic classications of design.
1. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
(MCCBs) per UL 489 Standard
2. Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
(LVPCBs) per UL 1066 Standard
Standards Requirements
UL 489Molded-Case Circuit Breakers,
Molded-Case Switches and Circuit
Breaker Enclosures
Per UL 489, there are clear test
performance and marking require-
ments for circuit breakers and
molded-case switches that are
UL listed as being suitable for
reverse-feed applications. UL 489
requires reverse-feed circuit breakers
to meet certain construction require-
ments, and to be tested and marked
accordingly, as follows:
1. Tested per UL 489,
Paragraph 7.1.1.18
2. Markings per UL 489,
Paragraph 9.1.1.13
Testing Requirements
Per UL 489, Paragraph 7.1.1.18: Except
for single-pole circuit breakers tested
singly, if a circuit breaker is not marked
Line and Load, one sample of
each set tested, or one additional
sample, shall be connected with the
line and load connections reversed
during the overload, endurance and
interrupting tests.
This UL test requirement species that
for circuit breakers and molded-case
switches to be UL Listed for reverse-
feed applications, samples shall be
tested with the line and load terminals
reverse-fed, as shown in Figure 27.3-8,
and that the test results shall be the
same as those of normally fed
circuit breakers.
Depending on the design congura-
tion and construction, the circuit
breaker may or may not be affected by
the application of power in a reverse-
feed connection during these tests.
Figure 27.3-8. Circuit Breaker Connections
for Reverse-Feed Testing per UL 489
52 NC
Bus #1
Load Load
Bus #2
NO
Utility #1
This Circuit Breaker May Be
Reverse-Fed Depending on
Its Connection to Either of the
Utility Power Sources
Utility #2
NC 52
52
52 52
Top Side
of Circuit
Breaker
Load
Connected to
Top Side of
Circuit Breaker

Power
Source
Circuit
Breaker
Load
Power
Source
Connected
to Bottom
Side of
Circuit Breaker

Bottom Side
of Circuit
Breaker
27.3-39
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
071
Marking Requirements
Per UL 489 Paragraph 9.1.1.13: Circuit
breakers shall be marked Line and
Load unless the construction and
test results are acceptable with the line
and load connections reversed.
This marking requirement species
that UL listed circuit breakers and
molded-case switches shall be marked
with the word Line on one end of
the circuit breaker and the word
Load on the other end, as shown
in Figure 27.3-9, if they are unable to
successfully meet the reverse-feed test
requirements per Paragraph 7.1.1.18
of UL 489. Conversely, a UL listed
circuit breaker does not have to be
marked with Line and Load if it
successfully meets the reveried test
requirements.
Figure 27.3-9. Circuit Breakers Showing
Line and Load Markings, per UL 489
MCCB General Rule
Cannot be reverse-fed:
When a UL listed molded-case
circuit breaker and a molded-case
switch (not shown) are marked
showing Line and Load, the
power supply conductors must be
connected to the end marked
Line. These devices cannot be
reverse-fed
Can be reverse-fed:
If Line and Load are not
marked on the UL listed molded-
case circuit breaker, the power
supply conductors may be
connected to either end. These
devices are suitable for reverse-
feed applications
UL 1066Low Voltage AC and DC Power
Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures
As part of the standard test programs
required by UL 1066 (referenced to
ANSI/IEEE C37.50-1989) for low
voltage power circuit breakers, tests
are conducted that, when successfully
completed, demonstrate that the
circuit breaker may be applied in a
reverse-feed conguration.
These are mandatory tests that
are done as part of the short-circuit
current tests per Table 3 in Sequence II
(Power-Operated Circuit Breaker
with Dual Trip Device) of ANSI/IEEE
C37.50-1989. As part of this sequence,
tests are to be performed with
opposite terminals energized.
During these specied sequences of
tests, the circuit breaker is energized
in a reverse-feed conguration, and
the satisfactory completion of these
tests demonstrates their ability to
be used in reverse-feed applications.
Therefore, all low voltage power
circuit breakers that are listed per
UL 1066 may be reverse-fed.
PCB General Rule
Can be reverse-fed:
that are listed per UL 1066 may be
reverse-fed
Special Application Considerations
Circuit Breakers With Integral
Ground-Fault Protection
Many of Eatons UL listed molded-case
and low voltage power circuit breakers
have design options and schemes
that allow for the detection and
interruption of unwanted ground-
fault currents. In these ground-fault
protection schemes, the means for
ground-fault detection are either
integral to the circuit breaker or
externally mounted.
The ground-fault detection means
commonly consist of current sensors
and control logic circuitry that may be
connected in various congurations
as follows:
1. Separate current sensors that
monitor each phase circuit and
the neutral circuit conductors, as
shown in Figure 27.3-10
2. One current sensor that monitors
all phases and the neutral circuit
conductors together (not shown)
3. One current sensor that monitors
the ground circuit conductor
(not shown)
The interruption of ground-fault
currents is done by the circuit breaker
opening all three-phase conductor
circuits at the same time, in response
to a trip signal from the ground-fault
detection means.
Therefore, whenever an unwanted
ground-fault condition exists, a UL
listed circuit breaker with ground-fault
protection will detect and interrupt the
ground-fault current ow.
27.3-40
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
072
Figure 27.3-10. Circuit Breaker with Integral Ground-Fault Protection
In reverse-feed applications, while the primary phase
currents and the ground currents have been interrupted
with the opening of the circuit breaker, voltage at the circuit
breakers terminals may or may not cause damage to the
components of the ground-fault protection system. If
components in the detection means or control logic circuitry
of the ground-fault (or the phase current) protection system
may be damaged by reverse-feed connections, then the
circuit breaker must be marked accordingly. In this case,
where the circuit breaker with ground-fault protection is not
suitable for reverse-feed applications, the circuit breakers
terminals are marked with Line and Load to indicate the
required terminal connection points for the power supply
source (Line) and the load (Load).
Conversely, there are Eaton circuit breaker design congura-
tions where the components in the ground-fault (or phase
current) protection system are unaffected by reverse-feed
connections, and are suitable for those applications. These
circuit breakers are not marked with Line and Load, to
indicate that they are suitable for reverse-feed connections
the power supply source may be connected to the terminals
at either end of the circuit breaker.
A circuit breaker with integral ground-fault protection may
be reverse fed if it is not marked with Line and Load.
The UL listed mark that is applied on this circuit breaker
with integral ground-fault protection indicates that it has
successfully met the UL test requirements for reverse-
feed applications.
General Rule
When a UL listed circuit breaker is marked showing
Line and Load, the power supply conductors must
be connected to the end marked Line. These devices
cannot be reverse-fed
Can be reverse-fed:
If Line and Load are not marked on the UL listed
circuit breaker, the power supply conductors may be
connected to either end. These devices are suitable for
reverse-feed applications
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers with External Ground-Fault/
Earth Leakage Accessories
There are ground-fault current detection schemes that
require sensitivity down to relatively low current levels,
typically as low as 30 mA. These products are called
ground-fault/earth leakage modules.
Figure 27.3-11. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers with
Earth Leakage Modules
Eatons molded-case circuit breakers are available with
UL listed ground-fault (earth leakage) modules that are
typically mounted external to the bottom end of the
circuit breaker, as shown in Figure 27.3-11. These modules
are self-contained with a current sensor and logic control
circuitry all located inside the product. Depending on the
design conguration and construction of these earth leakage
modules, some of these products may or may not be
suitable for reverse-feed applications. Each product is
marked with a label containing text that describes their
suitability for reverse-feed applications, as shown in
Figure 27.3-12 and Figure 27.3-13.
General Rule
When either a UL listed circuit breaker is marked showing
Line and Load, or the earth leakage module is
marked as unsuitable for reverse-feed, the power supply
conductors MUST be connected to the Line end of the
circuit breaker. These devices cannot be reverse-fed
Can be reverse-fed:
circuit breaker, and the earth leakage module is marked
as suitable for reverse-feed, the power supply conductors
may be connected to either end. These devices are
suitable for reverse-feed applications
Top Side of
Circuit Breaker
Neutral
Circuit
Conductor
Neutral Circuit
Current Sensor
Three-Phase
Current Sensors
Control Logic
Circuitry
Circuit
Breaker
Ground-Fault
Detection Means
Bottom Side of
Circuit Breaker
Electronic
Trip Unit
Load
Power
Source
27.3-41
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
073
Figure 27.3-12. Earth Leakage Module Suitable for
Reverse-Feed Applications
Figure 27.3-13. Earth Leakage Modules Not Suitable for
Reverse-Feed Applications
Note: The only acceptable combination of circuit breakers and earth
leakage modules that should be used in reverse-feed applications is
where BOTH 1) the circuit breaker is not marked Line and Load,
and 2) the earth leakage module is not marked Line and Load,
and not marked Do not reverse-feed.
Miniature Circuit Breakers with Integral Ground-Fault
and Arcing-Fault Protection
Eatons molded-case circuit breakers are available with UL
listed ground-fault current protection levels that are able to
detect and trip on ground-fault currents as low as 5 mA for
personnel protection, and at 30 mA for sensitive electrical
equipment. Eaton also has circuit breakers that provide
low-level 30 mA arcing-fault protection in residential
applications. The constructions of these circuit breakers
are typically in a single-pole or two-pole conguration, and
with continuous ampere ratings of 15100A. Due to their
relative small size and low continuous ampere ratings, these
types of molded-case circuit breakers are commonly called
miniature circuit breakers.
The 5 mA designs for personnel protection are known as
ground-fault circuit interrupters (GFCI)
The 30 mA designs for equipment protection are known
as ground-fault equipment protectors (GFEP)
The circuit breaker designs for arcing-fault protection are
known as arc-fault circuit interrupters (AFCI)
While the overall performance of the circuit breaker is
governed by UL 489 for molded-case circuit breakers, the
specic 5 mA personnel protection performance is per
UL 943 ground-fault circuit interrupters, and the specic
30 mA performance for sensitive electrical equipment is per
UL 1053, ground-fault sensing and relaying equipment. The
AFCI performance requirements are governed by UL 1699.
For these AFCI, GFCI and GFEP ground-fault protection
designs, when the circuit breaker is closed, the control
power for the groundfault control logic circuitry is typically
connected to the Load side of the circuit breaker. When-
ever a ground-fault condition occurs, the detection means
and control logic circuit will operate and cause the circuit
breakers main current-carrying contacts to open without
any intentional delay, and will interrupt the ow of the fault
current. This instantaneous trip minimizes electrical shock
hazards to personnel in GFCIs, and minimizes the ow of
potentially damaging currents to sensitive electrical equip-
ment in GFEP applications. In addition to the interruption of
the ground-fault current, the detection means and control
logic circuitry also rely on the main current-carrying contacts
to open and disconnect the currents that ow though the
detection and trip system.
27.3-42
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
074
If power is applied to the Line terminals, and the load is
connected to the Load terminals in a normal feed
conguration, whenever the circuit breaker trips and the
main current-carrying contacts open, the ground-fault
current is interrupted and control power is also
disconnected from the detection means and control
logic circuitry of the ground-fault system, as shown
in Figure 27.3-14.
Figure 27.3-14. Miniature AFCI, GFCI and GFEP Circuit Breaker
Connected in Normal Feed Conguration
When the circuit breaker trips and control power is
disconnected from the control logic circuitry, no further
current ows through the control logic circuitry to ground.
On the other hand, if power is applied to the Load
terminals, whenever the AFCI, GFCI, and GFEP circuit
breaker trips and the main current-carrying contacts open,
the ground-fault current is interrupted, but control power
continues to be applied to the ground-fault detection and
control logic circuit of the ground-fault system, as shown
in Figure 27.3-15. The presence of the control power will
cause current to continually ow through the control logic
circuitry. The effect of this continuous current may or
may not degrade the performance of the control logic
circuitry over time.
Figure 27.3-15. Miniature AFCI, GFCI and GFEP Circuit Breaker
Connected in Reverse-Feed Conguration
Depending on the design conguration, the ground-fault
detection means and control logic circuit of AFCI, GFCI,
and GFEP miniature circuit breakers may be affected by
this reverse-feed application. If the AFCI, GFCI and GFEP
circuit breaker is not able to be connected and applied in a
reverse-feed conguration, the terminals will be marked
Line and Load.
General Rule
When a UL listed circuit breaker is marked showing
Line and Load, the power supply conductors MUST
be connected to the end marked Line. These devices
cannot be reverse-fed
Can be reverse-fed:
circuit breaker, the power supply conductors may be
connected to either end. These devices are suitable to
be reverse-feed applications
Summary
Molded-case circuit breakers, UL listed per UL 489, have
specic test and marking requirements to demonstrate that
the circuit breaker is suitable for reverse-feed applications.
The capabilities of UL 1066 listed low voltage power circuit
breakers for reverse-feed applications are veried as part of
standard circuit breaker test sequences.
If a circuit breaker and molded-case switch are
marked Line and Load, it is not suitable for
reverse-feed applications
Only circuit breakers and molded-case switches
without Line and Load markings are suitable
for reverse-feed applications
Note: Warningfor all types of Eatons circuit breakers, do not
connect the power source to circuit breaker terminals marked Load.
Circuit Breaker
Contacts Open
Neutral
Circuit
Conductor
Ground-Fault
Detection Means and
Control Logic Circuitry
Control Power
Connection for Control
Logic Circuitry
Circuit
Breaker
No Voltage
Present
Bottom Side of
Circuit Breaker
Load Ground
Power
Source
Circuit Breaker
Contacts Open
Top Side of
Circuit Breaker
Ground-Fault
Detection Means and
Control Logic Circuitry
Control Power
Connection for Control
Logic Circuitry
Circuit
Breaker
Voltage Still
Present
Bottom Side of
Circuit Breaker
Load
Ground
Power
Source
27.3-43
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Application Data
075
Table 27.3-13. Reverse-Feed ApplicationsEatons Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Types Suitable for Reverse Feed Circuit Breaker Types Not Suitable for Reverse Feed
Thermal-Magnetic QUICKLAG and Residential Breakers GFCI, GFEP
BW, BWH, BWHH, CSR, CSH AFCI
CA, CAH, CC, CCH, CHH BABRP, BABSP, BRRP, CLRP
EB, EHB GHBS, GBHS, GHQRSP
FB, HFB, FB TRI-PAC KA, HKA
JA KB, HKB
JB LA, HLA
LBB, DA LB, HLB
LAB MA, HMA, MD
LC, HLC, etc. NB, HNB
MC, HMC, etc.; MDS PB
NC, HNC, etc. LA, NB, PB TRI-PACs
PC, PCC, PCCG, PCF, PCCF, etc. JD, HJD, JDC,
SPB KD, HKD, KDC, CKD, CHKD
FCL, LCL LD, HLD, LDC
SPCB MDL, HMDL
GB, GHB, GC, GHC, GD, GD-K JGE, JGS, JGH, JGC, JGU, JGX frames with interchangeable trip unit
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU with interchangeable trip unit
EHD, EHD-K, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FD-K GMCP
FDE, HFDE, FDCE HMCP, HMCPE
JD, HJD, JDC sealed breakers ELFD, ELHFD, ELFDC
JDB, HJDB, JDCB, JDB-K, HJDB-K ELKD, ELHKD, ELKDC
DK, DK-K ELJD, ELHJD, ELJDC
KD, HKD, KDC, CKD, CHKD sealed breakers GHBGFEP, GHCGFEP
KDB, HKDB, KDCB, CKDB, CHKDB
KDB-K, HKDB-K
LD, HLD, LDC sealed breakers
LDB, HLDB, LDCB, CLDB, CHLDB, CLDCB
LDB-K, HLDB-K
MDL, HMDL sealed breakers
MDLB, HMDLB, CMDLB, CHMDLB
MDLB-K, HMDLB-K
ND, HND, NDC, NDU, CND, CHND, CNDC
ND-K, HND-K, NGS, NGH, NGC, NGU, NGK
RD, RDC, CRD, CRDC, RD-K, RD-N, RGH, RGC, RGK
E125, EGB, EGE, EGS, EGH, EGC
E125K, EGK switches
J250, JGE, JGS, JGH, JGC, JGU, JGX sealed breakers
J250K, JGK switches
L630, LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU, LGX sealed breakers
L630K, LGK switches
Magnum DS, Magnum SB, DS, DSII
Series NRX
27.3-44
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
076
27.4-1
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breaker Overview Tables
077
QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors

Table 27.4-1. Eatons QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out
QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 095% noncondensing.
Two-pole DC interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed.
62.5 Vdc interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 1050A and 2500 AIC 55100A continuous.
Note: Circuit Breaker Type Codes: AF Arc Fault; P Plug-In; B Bolt-On; C Cable-In/Cable-Out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Circuit Breaker
Type Code
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
Number
of
Poles
Vac Vdc Federal
Spec.
W-C-375b
Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes
Vac Ratings Vdc Ratings
120 120/240 240 2448 62.5 80

HQP
HQP
HQP
P
P
P
1070
10125
10100
1
2
2, 3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 12a
10b, 11b, 12b
10,000
10,000
10,000
5000
5000

5000
5000
QPHW
QPHW
QPHW
P
P
P
1570
15125
15100
1
2
2, 3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
14a
14a
14b
22,000
22,000
22,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
QHPX
QHPX
QHPX
P
P
P
1570
15100
15100
1
2
3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
42,000
42,000
42,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
QHPW
QHPW
QHPW
P
P
P
1530
1530
1520
1
2
3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
15a
15a
15b
65,000
65,000
65,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
QPGF
QPGF
QPHGF
P, GF
P, GF
P, GF
1540
1550
1530
1
2
1
120
120/240
120
10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10,000
22,000
10,000
QPHGF
QPGFEP
QPGFEP
P, GF
P, GFEP
P, GFEP
1550
1540
1550
2
1
2
120/240
120
120/240
10a, 11a, 12a
10,000
22,000
10,000
QPHGFEP
BABRSP
BABRSP
P, GFEP
B
B
1530
1530
1530
1
1
2
120
120
120/240
22,000
10,000
10,000
BRRP
BRRP
CLRP
P
P
P
1530
1530
1530
1
2
1
120
120/240
120
10,000
10,000
10,000
CLRP
BAB
BAB
P
B
B
1530
1070
10125
2
1
2
120/240
120/240
120/240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 12a
10,000
10,000
10,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
BAB
BABRP
BABRP
B
B
B
10100
1530
1530
2, 3
1
2
240
120
120/240
10b, 11b, 12b
10,000
10,000
10,000
QBAF
QBCAF
QBHW
B, AF
B, AF, GF
B
1520
1520
1570
1, 2
1, 2
1
120/240
120/240
120/240
24, 48, 62.5
14a
10,000
10,000
22,000
5000
QBHW
QBHW
QBHAF
B
B
B, AF
15125
15100
1520
2
2, 3
1, 2
120/240
240
120/240
24, 48, 80
14a
14b
22,000
22,000
22,000
5000
5000
5000
QBHCAF
HBAX
HBAX
B, AF
B
B
1520
1570
15100
1, 2
1
2
120/240
120/240
120/240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
22,000
42,000
42,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
HBAX
HBAW
HBAW
B
B
B
15100
1530
1530
3
1
2
240
120/240
120/240
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
15a
15a
65,000
65,000
42,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
HBAW
QBGF
QBGF
B
B, GF
B, GF
1520
1540
1550
3
1
2
240
120
120/240
15b
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10,000
10,000
65,000
QBHGF
QBHGF
B, GF
B, GF
1530
1530
1
1
120
120/240
10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 11a, 12a
22,000
22,000
27.4-2
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
078
Table 27.4-1. Eatons QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out (Continued)
QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 095% noncondensing.
62.5 Vdc interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 1050A and 2500 AIC 55100A continuous.
Note: Circuit Breaker Type Codes: AF Arc Fault; P Plug-In; B Bolt-On; C Cable-In/Cable-Out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Circuit Breaker
Type Code
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
Number
of
Poles
Vac Vdc Federal
Spec.
W-C-375b
Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes
Vac Ratings Vdc Ratings
120 120/240 240 2448 62.5 80

QBGFEP
QBGFEP
QBHGFEP
B, GFEP
B, GFEP
B, GFEP
1540
1550
1530
1
2
1
120
120/240
120
10,000
22,000
10,000
QBHGFEP
QC
QC
B, GFEP
C
C
1530
1070
10100
2
1
2
120/240
120/240
120/240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 12a
22,000
22,000
10,000
10,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
QC
QCD
QCD
C
C
C
10100
1060
10100
2, 3, 4
1, 2
2, 3
240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 62.5
10b, 11b, 12b
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
3000
3000
3000
3000
QCF
QCF
QCF
C
C
C
1060
1520
1530
1, 2
1, 2
2, 3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 62.5
10,000
22,000
10,000
10,000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
QCR
QCR
QCR
C
C
C
1060
1520
1530
1, 2
1, 2
2, 3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 62.5
10,000
22,000
10,000
10,000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
QCHW
QCHW
QCHW
C
C
C
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
14a
14a
14b
22,000
22,000
22,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
QHCX
QHCX
QHCX
C
C
C
1570
15100
15100
1
2
3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
42,000
42,000
42,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
QHCW
QHCW
QHCW
C
C
C
1530
1530
1520
1
2
3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
15a
15a
15b
65,000
65,000
65,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
QCGF
QCGF
QCHGF
C, GF
C, GF
C, GF
1540
1550
1530
1
2
1
120
120/240
120
10,000
22,000
10,000
QCHGF
QCGFEP
QCGFEP
C, GF
C, GFEP
C, GFEP
1530
1540
1550
2
1
2
120/240
120
120/240
10,000
22,000
10,000
QCHGFEP
QCHGFEP
C, GFEP
C, GFEP
1530
1530
1
2
120
120/240
22,000
22,000

27.4-3
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
079
Table 27.4-2. Factory Modications
Contact the Eaton factory for modications available for QCR and
QCF breakers.
Table 27. 4-3. Factory-Installed Breaker Terminals
Clamp on line side only.

Modication
Type
Breaker
Type
Catalog
Sufx
Shunt trip (requires one extra
pole space on right side)
120, 208, 240 Vac
12, 24, 48 Vac/Vdc
Draws 2.6A at 120V
Draws 11A at 24 Vdc
QUICKLAG Types P, B and C
S
S1
Special calibration (50C)
Shock testing
Freeze testing
V
L
Y
Moisture-fungus treatment
Marine duty
Naval duty
400 Hz calibration
Specic DC ratings
(breaker marked with
a maximum Vdc rating)
QUICKLAG Types P, B, C and
Ground Fault
QUICKLAG Types P, B, C
F
H08
H09
G
Q thru Q9
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
Standard Line Terminal Standard Load Terminal Optional Terminals
Terminal
Type
Wire
Type
Wire
Range (AWG)
Terminal
Type
Wire
Type
Wire
Range (AWG)
Line Load
QUICKLAG Type P
HQP, QPHW,
QHPX, QHPW
1030
3550
55125
Plug-on female clips that
mate with the bus stabs
1
2
3
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
144
144
81/0
N/A 3
3
QUICKLAG Ground Fault

QPGF, QPHGF,
QPGFEP, QPHGFEP
1030
40
Plug-on female clips that
mate with the bus stabs
1 (single-pole)
4 (two-pole)
4
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu
144
148
148
N/A 3
3
QUICKLAG Type B
BAB, QBHW,
HBAX, HBAW
1030
3550
55125
Extended tangs that bolt
directly to the bus
1 (single- and two-pole)
2 (three-pole)
3
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
144
144
81/0
N/A 3
3
QUICKLAG Ground Fault/Arc Fault

QBGF, QBAF, QBCAF, QBHGF,
QBHAF, QBHCAF, QBGFEP,
QBHGFEP
1030
40
Extended tangs that bolt
directly to the bus
1 (single-pole)
4 (two-pole)
4
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu
144
148
148
N/A N/A
QUICKLAG Type C
QC, QCHW,
QHCX, QHCW
1020
2560
70100
5
6
7
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
TBD
TBD
TBD
5
2
3
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
1410
144
81/0
6, 7
5, 7
5
6, 7, 8
5, 6, 7, 8
5, 7, 8
QUICKLAG
QCR, QCF
1055
60
1
1
Cu/Al
Cu
TBD
TBD
1
1
Cu/Al
Cu
144
144
N/A N/A
QUICKLAG Ground Fault
QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP
1020
2550
5
6
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
TBD
TBD
1
1
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
144
144
6, 7
5, 7
5
5
QUICKLAG
QCD
1060
70100
9
10
Cu/Al
Cu
144
41/0
9
10
Cu/Al
Cu
144
41/0
See accessories
4-Prong Quick Connect
Catalog Sufx P
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8
Steel Box Lug Steel Box Lug Steel Box Lug Aluminum Box Lug
Aluminum Box Lug Aluminum Box Lug
Steel Ring Type
9
QCD Terminal Assembly
1060 Amperes
10
QCD Terminal Assembly
70100 Amperes
27.4-4
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series G Industrial Breakers Overview Table
080
Table 27.4-4. Industrial Circuit BreakersSeries G
Current limiting.
Not presently available for panelboard or switchboard mounting.
High instantaneous circuit breaker for selective coordination.
Not UL or CSA listed.

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No.
of
Poles
Volts Trip
Type
Federal
Specication
W-C-375b
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
120 120/
240
240 277 480 600 125 250 125/
250
E-Frame
EGB 15125 1
2, 3, 4
347
600Y/347
250 N.I.T.
35,000
25,000
25,000
18,000
18,000
10,000
10,000
EGE 15125 2, 3, 4 600Y/347 250 N.I.T. 35,000 25,000 18,000 10,000 10,000
EGS 15125 1
2, 3, 4
347
600Y/347
250 N.I.T.
N.I.T.
100,000
85,000
85,000
35,000
35,000
22,000
35,000
35,000
EGH 15125 1
2, 3, 4
347
600Y/347
250 N.I.T.
200,000
100,000
100,000
65,000
65,000
25,000
42,000
42,000
EGC
15125 3 600Y/347 250 N.I.T. 200,000 100,000 35,000 42,000

J-Frame
JGE
JGS
JGH
63250
63250
63250
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
600
600
600
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
65,000
85,000
100,000
25,000
35,000
65,000
18,000
18,000
25,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
JGC
JGU
JGX
63250
63250
63250
2, 3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
150,000
200,000
35,000
50,000
50,000
42,000
50,000
50,000
L-Frame
LGE
LGS
LGH
100600
100600
100600
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
23a
23a
23a
65,000
85,000
100,000
35,000
50,000
65,000
18,000
25,000
35,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
LGC
LGU
LGX
LHH
100600
100600
100600
125400
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
N.I.T.
23a
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
150,000
200,000
65,000
100,000
65,000
65,000
35,000
42,000
50,000
50,000
22,000
N-Frame
NGS 800, 1200
NGH 800, 1200
NGC 800, 1200
6001200
6001200
6001200
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
85,000
100,000
200,000
50,000
65,000
100,000
25,000
35,000
45,000
NGU 800
NGS
NHH
6001200
1600
150350
3
3
3
600
600
600
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
300,000
100,000
150,000
65,000
75,000
35,000
R-Frame
RGH
RGC
8001600
8001600
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
125,000
200,000
65,000
100,000
50,000
65,000

27.4-5
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series C Industrial Breakers Overview Table
081
Table 27.4-5. Industrial Circuit BreakersSeries C
100% rated.
Current limiting.
Not dened in W-C-375b.

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No.
of
Poles
Volts Trip
Type
Federal
Specication
W-C-375b
120 120/
240
240 277 480 600 125 250 125/
250
G-Frame
GHB
GHB
GHB
15100
15100
15100
1
2, 3
1
120
240
277
125
125/250
125
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
11a
10b, 11b,
12b, 14b,
65,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
14,000

14,000

GHB
HGHB
GHQ
15100
1530
1520
2, 3
1
1
277/480
277
277
125/250
125
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
15b
12c, 13a, 13b
12c, 13a, 13b
65,000
65,000
14,000
25,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
GHQRSP
GHBS
GBHS
1520
1530
1520
1
1, 2
1, 2
277
277/480
347/600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
12c, 13a, 13b
65,000
65,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
10,000
GD
GD
GHC
1550
15100
15100
2
3
1
480
480
120
125/250
250
125
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
13b
13b
12c, 13a
65,000
65,000
65,000
14,000
22,000
14,000
10,000
10,000
GHC
GHC
GHC
HGHC
15100
15100
15100
1530
2, 3
1
2, 3
1
240
277
277/480
277
125/250
125
125/250
125
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
13b
12c, 13a
13b
65,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
25,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
F-Frame
EDB
EDS
ED
100225
100225
100225
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
240
240
240
125
125
125
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
12b
12b
12b
22,000
42,000
65,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
EDH
EDC
EHD
100225
100225
15100
2, 3
2, 3
1
240
240
277
125
125
125
N.I.T.
14b
1
13a
100,000
200,000
14,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
EHD
FDB
FDB
15100
15150
15150
2, 3
2, 3
4
480
600
600
250
250
250
N.I.T.
13b
18a
18,000
18,000
18,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
FD
FD
FD
15225
15225
15225
1
2, 3
4
277
600
600
125
250
250
N.I.T.
13a
22a
65,000
65,000
35,000
35,000
35,000
18,000
18,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
FDE
HFD
HFD
15225
15225
15225
3
1
2,3
600
277
600
125
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
13a
22a
65,000
100,000
65,000
35,000
65,000
18,000
25,000
10,000
22,000
HFD
HFDE
FDC
15225
15225
15225
4
3
2, 3
600
600
600
250
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
24a
100,000
100,000
200,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
25,000
25,000
35,000

22,000
22,000
FDC
FDCE
15225
15225
4
3
600
600
250
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
35,000
25,000
22,000
J-Frame
JDB
JD
HJD
JDC
70250
70250
70250
70250
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
22a
22a
22a
22a
65,000
65,000
100,000
200,000
35,000
35,000
65,000
100,000
18,000
18,000
25,000
35,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
K-Frame
DK
KDB
KD
250400
100400
100400
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3, 4
240
600
600
250
250
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
I.T.
14b
23a
23a
65,000
65,000
65,000
35,000
35,000
25,000
25,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
CKD
HKD
CHKD
KDC
100400
100400
100400
100400
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
23a
23a
23a
23a
65,000
100,000
100,000
200,000
35,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
25,000
35,000
35,000
65,000
22,000
22,000
27.4-6
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series C Industrial Breakers Overview Table
082
Table 27.4-5. Industrial Circuit BreakersSeries C (Continued)
100% rated.
Current limiting.
Table 27.4-6. Current Limit-R Current Limiting Circuit BreakersNon-Fused Type
Table 27.4-7. TRI-PAC Current Limiting Circuit BreakersFused Type
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No.
of
Poles
Volts Trip
Type
Federal
Specication
W-C-375b
120 120/
240
240 277 480 600 125 250 125/
250
L-Frame
LDB
LD
CLD
300600
300600
300600
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
600
600
600
250
250
250
N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
23a
23a
23a
65,000
65,000
65,000
35,000
35,000
35,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
22,000
22,000
HLD
CHLD
LDC
CLDC
300600
300600
300600
300600
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
23a
23a
23a
23a
100,000
100,000
200,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
35,000
35,000
50,000
50,000
25,000
25,000
M-Frame
MDL
CMDL
HMDL
CHMDL
300800
300800
300800
300800
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
23a
23a
23a
23a
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
50,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
35,000
22,000
25,000
N-Frame
ND
CND
HND
6001200
6001200
6001200
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
23A
23A
23A
65,000
65,000
100,000
50,000
50,000
65,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
CHND
NDC
HNDC
NDU
6001200
6001200
6001200
6001200
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3
600
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
23A
23A
23A
100,000
200,000
200,000
300,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
150,000
35,000
65,000
65,000
75,000
R-Frame
RD 1600
CRD 1600
RD 2000
8001600
8001600
10002000
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
24a
24a
24a
125,000
125,000
125,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
50,000
50,000
50,000
RD 2500
CRD 2000
RDC 1600
10002500
10002000
8001600
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
24a
24a
25a
125,000
125,000
200,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
50,000
50,000
65,000
CRDC 1600
RDC 2000
RDC 2500
CRDC 2000
8001600
10002000
10002500
10002000
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
25a
25a
25a
25a
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No.
of
Poles
Volts Trip
Type
Federal
Specication
W-C-375b
120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 125/250

FCL
LCL
15100
125400
2, 3
2, 3
480
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
150,000
200,000
100,000
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No.
of
Poles
Volts Trip
Type
Federal
Specication
W-C-375b
120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 125/250

FB
LA
15100
70400
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
NB
PB
300800
6001600
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
250
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000

27.4-7
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Current Limiting Industrial Breakers Overview Tables
083
Table 27.4-8. Eaton Molded-Case Circuit Breakers in Assemblies
Including ground fault, arc fault and solenoid operated versions of each frame.
Frame Ampere
Range
Panelboards Switchboards Motor Control Centers Enclosed
Control
Bus
Plugs
Enclosed
Breaker
1A 2A 3A 3E 4 5P PRL-C IFS Freedom FlashGard
QUICKLAG
BAB
QB
QBH
15100
15100
15100

Series G
EG
JG
LG
15125
20250
100600

NG
RG
4001200
8002500

Series C
FD/ED
JD
KD
15225
70250
70400

LD
MDL
ND
RD
400600
300800
4001200
8002500

Current Limiting Breakers
FCL
LCL
FB
LA
NB
PB
15100
125400
15100
70400
300800
6001600
27.4-8
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
084
Circuit Breakers with Microprocessor Trip Units
Table 27.4-9. Digitrip RMS Circuit Breaker Trip Unit Selection (See Table 27.4-10 for details)
Optional feature.
Requires ammeter/cause-of-trip display.
Requires cause-of-trip LED module or ammeter/cause-of-trip display.
Requires Power Metering and Monitoring Module (PM3). See Page 27.4-41 for product details.
Only available in LG, NG and RG breakers.
Requires auxiliary alarm module below R-Frames.

Note: For time current curves for the trip units, see www.eaton.com.
Description Digitrip
310
Digitrip
310+
Digitrip
510
OPTIM
550
Digitrip
610
Digitrip
810
Digitrip
910
OPTIM
1050
Circuit Breaker Type
Molded-case F-Frame 225A
Molded-case JG250-Frame 250A
Molded-case K-Frame 400A
Molded-case L-Frame 600A LD
LG
Molded-case M-Frame 800A
Molded-case N-Frame 1200A ND
NG
Molded-case R-Frame 2500A RD
RG
Features
Curve shaping functions 5 6 9 10 9 9 9 10
Front adjustable
Programmable

Load monitoring Option

Diagnostics (cause-of-trip) Option

Power/energy monitoring Option

Harmonics
Waveform capture
Communications Option

Arcash Reduction Maintenance System (local and remote)
Ground fault alarm
Option

27.4-9
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
085
Table 27.4-10. Molded-Case Digitrip Selection Guide
No rating plugs necessary.
Only available on LG, NG and RG breaker.
Adjust by rating plug.
FDE and JG 2001200% x I

n
LG 2001200% x I
n
NG 200900% x I
n
RG 200800% x I
n

LS/LSG only.
Not to exceed 1200A.
L- and N-Frames *20100% x I

s
.
R-Frame *25100% x I
n.
By OPTIMizer/BIM.
Yes, with addition of Energy Sentinel.
Yes, with addition of power monitoring/

metering module (PM3).
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
I
s
= Sensor Rating
I
n
= Rating Plug
I
r
= LDPU Setting x I
n
Trip Unit
Type
Digitrip
RMS 310+
Digitrip
RMS 310
Digitrip
RMS 510
Digitrip
RMS 610
Digitrip
RMS 810
Digitrip
RMS 910
Digitrip
OPTIM 550
Digitrip
OPTIM 1050
rms sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Breaker Type
Frame
Ampere range
Interrupting rating
at 48V
FDE, JG, LG, NG, RG
152500A
35, 65, 100, 150 (kA)
K, L, M, N, R
152500A
35, 65, 100 (kA)
R
8005000A
65, 100 (kA)
R
8005000A
65, 100 (kA)
R
8005000A
65, 100 (kA)
R
8005000A
65, 100 (kA)
K, L, N
701200A
35, 65, 100 (kA)
K, L, N, R
705000
35, 65, 100 (kA)
Protection
Ordering options LS
LSG
LSI
LSIG
LS
LSG
LSI
LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG
LSI, LSI (A),
LSIG
LSI (A), LISG
Arcash Reduction
Maintenance System
No ALSI
ALSIG
No No No No No No No No
Fixed rated plug (I
n
)
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Long Delay Protection (L)
Adjustable rating
plug (I
n
)
Long delay pickup
Long delay time I
2
t
No
40100% frame
224 seconds
Yes
0.51.0(I
n
)
10 seconds
No
0.51.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
No
0.51.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
No
0.51.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
No
0.51.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
No
0.41.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
No
0.41.0 x (I
n
)
224 seconds
Long delay time I
4
t
Long delay
thermal memory
High load alarm
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
0.85 x I
r
No
Yes
0.85 x I
r
No
Yes
0.85 x I
r
15 seconds
Yes
0.51.0 x I
r
15 seconds
Yes
0.5-1.0 x I
r
Short Delay Protection (S)
Short delay pickup Varies by frame
200800% x (I
n
) 200600%
S1 and S2 x (I
r
)
200600%
S1 and S2 x (I
r
)
200600%
S1 and S2 x (I
r
)
200600%
S1 and S2 x (I
r
)
150800%
x (I
r
)
150800%
x (I
r
)
Short delay time I
2
t
Short delay time at
Yes
No
No
Inst300 ms
100 ms
No
No
Inst300 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
Short delay time Z.S.I. Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Optional Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I)
Instantaneous pickup No Varies by
frame
No 200800%
x (I
n
)
200600%
M1 and M2 x (I
n
)
200600%
M1 and M2 x (I
n
)
200600%
M1 and M2 x (I
n
)
200600%
M1 and M2 x (I
n
)
200800%
x (I
n
)
200800%
x (I
n
)
Discriminator
Instantaneous override
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)
Ground fault alarm
Ground fault pickup
2
t
Yes
20100% frame
No
Yes
Var/frame
No
No
25100% x I
n

100500 ms
No
25100% x I
n

100500 ms
No
25100% x I
n

100500 ms
No
25100% x I
n

100500 ms
20/25100%
20/25100%
100500 ms
20/25100%
20/25100%
100500 ms
Ground fault Z.S.I.
Ground fault
thermal memory
Inst300 ms
Yes
Yes
Inst500 ms
No
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
100500 ms
Optional
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
System Diagnostics
Cause of trip LEDs
Magnitude of
trip information
Remote signal
contacts
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
System Monitoring
Digital display
Current
Voltage
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Power and energy
Power quality-
harmonics
Power factor
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes (over
PowerNet only)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Communications
PowerNet No No No No Yes Yes Optional Yes
Testing
Testing method Test kit Test set Integral Integral Integral Integral OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet
(optional)
OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet
27.4-10
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
086
Digitrip OPTIM
Circuit Breaker Trip Units and Accessories
General Description
Digitrip OPTIM is a programmable
communicating microprocessor-based
electronic trip unit system for Eatons
molded-case circuit breakers. Digitrip
OPTIM trip units are available in
two models: Digitrip OPTIM 550 and
1050, for the K-, L-, N- and R-Frames
(702500A).
Digitrip OPTIM trip units are fully
programmable and can be applied as
a standalone breaker with a hand-held
Digitrip OPTIMizer programmer for
conguring the trip unit, displaying
information and testing. In addition,
OPTIM can be applied as a low voltage
assembly with a panel-mounted
Breaker Interface Module (BIM) to
congure, display and test. Alterna-
tively, OPTIM can be applied as part of
a fully integrated IMPACC/PowerNet/
Power Xpert
system. (See Tab 2.)

Features
Fully programmable, rms sensing
trip unit
Available in K, L, N and R Series C
breakers
Available in 80% and 100%
rated breakers
Available in LSI, LSIG or LSIA
congurations
Note: Ground fault alarm only.
Available in two models:
OPTIM 550 and OPTIM 1050
10 function time-current curve
shaping options, including a new
I
4
t long delay time or slope
Short delay and ground delay
(Optional on 550)
Additional programmable
protection features including
thermal memory and
discriminator functions
Advanced warning systems including
high load alarm, ground fault alarm
Full system diagnostics capability
System monitoring features including:
Phase currents (amps)
Power (kW)
Peak demand (kW)
Forward energy (kWh)
Reverse energy (kWh)
Total energy (kWh)
Power factor
Total harmonic distortion (%THD)
(amps)
Power Xpert communications saves
individual wiring of breakers
Hand-Held Programmer
The Digitrip OPTIMizer hand-held
programmer accesses, displays and
congures information from OPTIM
trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into
the front of the trip unit and is powered
by a nine-volt battery, or an auxiliary
power module.
An operator can use the OPTIMizer to:
Select breaker address
(50/60 Hz)
Set system baud rate
Set system password
Congure the system:
Select alarm levels
Breaker information
Metered values
Phase and ground
Trip/no trip
Panel-Mounted User Interface
The breaker interface module can
be mounted directly on the assembly
or at a remote location and can be
used to access, congure and display
information from OPTIM trip units.
An operator can use the breaker
interface module to:
(50/60 Hz)
Set system password
Congure the system:
Select alarm levels
Breaker information
Metered values
Phase and ground
Trip/no trip
Expanded energy monitoring:
Set addresses for group energy
monitoring
Group energy readings
Common alarm contacts:
Three Form C contacts
Saves wiring to each breaker
Local and remote indication:
Remote indication/alarming
Breaker status LED indication
Expanded communications:
Communicate with:
OPTIM trip units
Digitrip RMS 810
and 910 trip units
IQ Energy Sentinel
and Universal Sentinels
IQ Power Sentinels
A total of 50 devices
27.4-11
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Selection DataQUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
087
Table 27.4-11. QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
Two-pole interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed.
Type of Breaker Mounting/Electrical Connections
Plug-On Bolt-On
Thermal-Magnetic
HQP, QPHW, QHPX
Thermal-Magnetic
QHPW
Thermal-Magnetic
QPGF, QPHGF, QPGFEP,
QPHGFEP
Thermal-Magnetic
BAB, QBHW, HBAX
Thermal-Magnetic
HBAW
Circuit Breaker RatingsContinuous Current Rating at 40C and 095% Humidity (Noncondensing)
Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts
HQP QHPW QPGF BAB HBAW
570
10150
10100
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1530
1520
1-2
3
120/240
240
1540
1550
1
2
120
120/240
570
10150
10100
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1530
1520
1-2
3
120/240
240
QPHW QPHGF QBHW
1570
15125
15100
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1530
1530
1
2
120
120/240
1570
15125
15100
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
QHPX QPGFEP HBAX
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1540
1550
1
2
120
120/240
1570
15100
15100
1
2
3
120/240
120/240
240
QPHGFEP
1530
1530
1
2
120
120/240
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Per Single-Pole Breaker
W H D W H D W H D W H D W H D
1.00
(25.4)
2.94
(74.6)
2.38
(60.3)
1.00
(25.4)
2.94
(74.6)
2.38
(60.3)
1.00
(25.4)
3.19
(81.0)
2.38
(60.3)
1.00
(25.4)
2.94
(74.6)
2.38
(60.3)
1.00
(25.4)
2.94
(74.6)
2.38
(60.3)
AC Interrupting RatingsUL Listed Interrupting Ratings Shown (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts Amps I.R. Volts Amps I.R. Volts Amps I.R. Volts Amps I.R. Volts Amps I.R.
HQP QHPW QPGF, QPGFEP BAB HBAW
120/240, 240 10,000 120/240, 240 65,000 120, 120/240 10,000 120/240, 240 10,000 120/240, 240 65,000
QPHW QPHGF, QPHGFEP QBHW
120/240, 240 22,000 120, 120/240 22,000 120/240, 240 22,000
QHPX HBAX
120/240, 240 42,000 120/240, 240 42,000
DC Interrupting Ratings
Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R.
48
62.5
80
1-2
1
2
5000
2500
5000
48
62.5
80
1-2
1
2
5000
2500
5000
48
62.5
80
1-2
1
2
5000
2500
5000
48
62.5
80
1-2
1
2
5000
2500
5000
Accessories and ModicationsSee MCCB CD-ROM for Description and UL Installation Status
Handle lock devices
Shunt trip
Special calibration
Shock tested
Dummy breaker
Optional terminals
Handle lock devices
Shunt trip
Special calibration
Shock tested
Dummy breaker
Optional terminals
Bell alarm contacts
Auxiliary switch contacts
Handle lock devices
Shunt trip
Special calibration
Shock tested
Panelboard accessories
Dummy breaker
Optional terminals
Handle lock devices
Shunt trip
Special calibration
Shock tested
Panelboard accessories
Optional terminals
HQP, QPHW, QHPX QPHW QPGF, QPHGF,
QPGFEP, QPHGFEP
BAB, QBHW, HBAX HBAW
27.4-12
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Selection DataQUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
088
Table 27.4-12. QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
Type of Breaker Mounting/Electrical Connections
Bolt-On Cable-In/Cable-Out
Thermal-Magnetic
QBAF, QBGF, QBHGF,
QBGFEP, QBHGFEP
Thermal-Magnetic
QCR, QCF
Thermal-Magnetic
QC, QCHW, QHCX
Thermal-Magnetic
QCD
Thermal-Magnetic
QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP,
QCHGFEP
Circuit Breaker RatingsContinuous Current Rating at 40C and 095% Humidity (Noncondensing)
Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts Amperes Poles Volts
QBAF (Arc Fault) QCR, QCF QC QCD QCGF
1020
1020
1
2
120
120/240
1060
1060
1530
1
2
2-3
120
120/240
240
570
10125
10100
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
10100
10100
1-2
3
120/240
240
1540
1550
1
2
120
120/240
QBGF QCHW QCHGF

1540
1550
1
2
120
120/240
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1530
1550
1
2
120
120/240
QBHGF QHCX QCGFEP

1530
1530
1
2
120
120/240
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1530
1550
1
2
120
120/240
QBGFEP QHCW QCHGFEP

1540
1550
1
2
120
120/240
1530
1520
12
3
120/240
240
1550
1530
1
2
120
120/240
QBHGFEP
1530
1530
1
2
120
120/240
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Per Single-Pole Breaker
W H D W H D W H D W H D W H D
1.00
(25.4)
3.19
(81.0)
2.38
(60.3)
.50
(12.7)
3.94
(74.6)
2.63
(66.7)
1.00
(25.4)
3.75
(95.3)
2.44
(61.9)
1.00
(25.4)
3.75
(95.3)
2.63
(66.7)
1.00
(25.4)
3.75
(95.3)
2.44
(61.9)
AC Interrupting RatingsUL Listed Interrupting Ratings Shown (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts Amps
I.R.
Volts Amps I.R. Volts Amps
I.R.
Volts Amps
I.R.
Volts Amps I.R.
QBAF, QBGF, QBGFEP QCR, QCF QC QCD QCGF, QCGFEP
120, 120/240 10,000 120/240 10,000 120/240, 240 10,000 120/240, 240 10,000 120/240 10,000
QBHGF, QBHGFEP QCHW QCHGF, QCHGFEP
120, 120/240 22,000 120/240, 240 22,000 120 22,000
QHCX
120/240, 240 42,000
QHCW
120/240, 240 65,000
DC Interrupting Ratings
Volts Poles Amps

I.R.
Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps
I.R.
Volts Poles Amps
I.R.
Volts Poles Amps I.R.
62.5
125
1
2
3000
3000
48
62.5
80
1-2
1
2
5000
2500
5000
48
62.5
80
1-2
1
2
5000
2500
5000
Accessories and ModicationsSee MCCB CD-ROM for Description and UL Installation Status
Handle lock devices
Bell alarm contacts
Ring terminals
Handle lock devices
QCR mounting clips
Ring terminals
Quick connect
Terminals
Shunt trip
Shock tested
DIN rail mounting clip
Handle lock devices
Shunt trip
Special calibration
Shock tested
Face mounting plate
Base mounting hardware
Optional terminals
Dummy breaker
Handle lock devices
Shunt trip
Special calibration
Shock tested
Face mounting plate
Optional terminals
Dummy breaker
Handle lock devices
Bell alarm contacts
QBGF, QBHGF,
QBGFEP, QBHGFEP
QCR,QCF QC, QCHW,
QHCX, QCD
QHCW QCGF, QCHGF,
QCGFEP, QCHGFEP
27.4-13
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Selection DataQUICKLAG Solenoid-Operated
089
Solenoid-Operated, Remote-
Controlled Latching Types
BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP
and CLRP
BABRP and BABRSP Breakers
Single- and Two-Pole
General Description
The BABRP and BABRSP are bolt-on
branch circuit breakers designed for use
in panelboards. The BRRP is a plug-on
branch circuit breaker designed for use
in loadcenters not manufactured with
breakers with a 1.00-inch wide format
and are listed on the Compatibility
list for Classied Applications
Pub. 26271. In addition to providing
conventional branch circuit protection,
they include a unique solenoid-operated
mechanism that provides for efcient
breaker pulse-on and pulse-off operation
when used with a suitable controller like
Eatons Pow-R-Command lighting
control system. These breakers can
also be controlled by pushbutton or
a PLC unit.
Eatons BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and
CLRP breakers are remotely operated
molded-case circuit breakers ideally
suited for lighting control applications
or energy management applications.
Bolt-on line-side terminal
(BABRP, BABRSPType BA)
Plug-on line-side terminal
(BRRPType BR, CLRPType CL)
Cable connected load-side terminal
Four-position control terminal
Bi-metal assembly for thermal
overload protection
Fast-acting short-circuit protection
Arc-chute assembly for fast-acting
arc extinction
Three-position handle: OFF, TRIP
(Center), ON
Handle permits manual switching
when control power is lost
Mechanical trip indicator
15 and 20A breakers SWD
(switching duty) rated
HID ratings for HID (high intensity
discharge) lighting
All models HACR rated
Status feedback of control circuit
(BABRSP)
Series rated (BABRP, BABRSP only)
BRRP series rated same as
BR breakers
BABRP, BABRSP same as
BA breakers
Product Selection
Table 27.4-13. BABRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings
Continuous current rating at 40C.

Table 27.4-14. BABRP and BABRSP Wire Harness
Table 27.4-15. BABRSP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings

Table 27.4-16. BRRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
Ampere
Rating
Vac (50/60 Hz) Catalog

Number
120 120/240 277/480
1 15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BABRP1015
BABRP1020
BABRP1025
BABRP1030
2 15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BABRP2015
BABRP2020
BABRP2025
BABRP2030
Description Catalog
Number
This 60-inch (1524.0 mm) wire pigtail provides a connection from a single
BABRPs control plug to a customers pushbutton, relay or PLC. Each box
contains 12 pigtails. Wires are 22 AWG, 600V. Order in multiples of 12.
SLBKRPTL1
Number
of Poles
Ampere
Rating

Number
120 120/240 277/480
1 15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BABRSP1015
BABRSP1020
BABRSP1025
BABRSP1030
2 15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BABRSP2015
BABRSP2020
BABRSP2025
BABRSP2030
Number
of Poles
Ampere
Rating
Number
120 120/240
1 15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BRRP115
BRRP120
BRRP125
BRRP130
2 15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BRRP215
BRRP220
BRRP225
BRRP230
27.4-14
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
090
Table 27.4-17. CLRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings
Solenoid Operating Data
Power requirements: 24 Vac/Vdc
(20.4V minimum30V maximum)
Controlled signal:
+AC/DC 8 ms minimum with zero
cross, 300 ms maximum
AC: 1.3 cycles minimum,
18 cycles or 300 ms maximum
DC: 8 ms minimum,
300 ms maximum
Maximum duty cycle of 6 OPEN/
CLOSE cycles per minute
Current draw: open 1A, close 3/4A
Blue wire: power input (see power
requirements)
Black wire: remote opening
Red wire: remote closing
Yellow wire: feedback status from
power input, maximum 0.50A draw
(BABRSP only)
Operation
Tripping systemthe BABRP,
BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP circuit
breakers have a permanent trip
unit that contains a factory preset
thermal (overload) trip element in
each pole
Operating mechanismthe BABRP,
BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP circuit
breakers have an over-center toggle
mechanism that provides quick-
make, quick-break operation. The
operating mechanism is trip free.
An internal cross-bar provides a
common tripping of all multi-pole
circuit breakers
Operating/Application Data
Ambient temperature: 0 to 40C
Nominal pulse magnitude:
24 Vac/Vdc
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Maximum breaker cycling:
6 operations per minute
Tolerance: +10% to 15% of
nominal voltage
Humidity: 0 to 95% noncondensing
Number
of Poles
Ampere
Rating
Number
120 120/240
1 15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
CLRP115
CLRP120
CLRP125
CLRP130
2 15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
CLRP215
CLRP220
CLRP225
CLRP230
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 27.4-1. Control Circuit for the BABRP
and BABRSP
Line
Remote
Contact
Breaker
Contact
RM
b
RM
a
R
e
d
B
l
a
c
k
Y
e
l
l
o
w
B
l
u
e
On
Coil
Off
Coil
Remote
Status
Load
Line
Remote
Contact
Breaker
Contact
RM
b
RM
a
R
e
d
B
l
a
c
k
Y
e
l
l
o
w
B
l
u
e
On
Coil
Off
Coil
Remote
Status
BKR
a
BABRP
BABRSP
Load
27.4-15
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
091
Solenoid Operated
Remote-Controlled Latching
for Type GHBS, GBHS and
GHQRSP Breakers
GHBS and GHQRSP
General Description
Eatons GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP
circuit breakers are bolt-on branch
circuit breakers designed for use in
277/480 Vac panelboards. In addition
to providing conventional branch
circuit protection, they include a
unique solenoid-operated mechanism
that provides for efcient breaker
pulse-on and pulse-off operation
when used with a suitable controller
like Eatons Pow-R-Command lighting
control system.
Cable-connected load-side terminal
Status switchremote status and
breaker status available from
internal auxiliary switches
overload protection
Arc-runner and arc-chute assembly
for fast-acting arc extinction
Three-position breaker handle: OFF,
TRIP (Center), ON
Visual indication of the remotely
operated contacts position
(open, closed or trip)
Remote override handle permits
manual switching when control
power is lost
15 and 20A breakers SWD
(switching duty) rated
15 and 20A breakers HID rated
for HID (High intensity discharge)
lighting
All models HACR rated
Series rated with various Eaton
main circuit breakers
Product Selection
Table 27.4-18. GHBS UL 489 Interrupting Ratings

Table 27.4-19. GBHS CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings (Not UL Listed)

Table 27.4-20. GHQRSP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings
All UL listed circuit breakers are HID (high intensity discharge) rated.
Number
of Poles
Ampere
Rating

Number
120 240 277/480
1 15
20
30
65,000
65,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
GHBS1015D
GHBS1020D
GHBS1030D
2 15
20
30
65,000
65,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
GHBS2015D
GHBS2020D
GHBS2030D
Number
of Poles
Ampere
Rating

Number
347/600
1 15
20
10,000
10,000
GBHS1015D
GBHS1020D
2 15
20
10,000
10,000
GBHS2015D
GBHS2020D
Number
of Poles
Ampere
Rating

Number
120 120/240 277 480Y/277

1 15
20
30
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
GHQRSP1015
GHQRSP1020
GHQRSP1030
2 15
20
30
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
GHQRSP2015
GHQRSP2020
GHQRSP2030
27.4-16
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
092
Solenoid Operating Data
Power requirements: 24 Vac/Vdc (20.4V minimum
30V maximum)
Controlled signal: +AC/DC 8 ms minimum with zero
cross, 300 ms maximum
AC: 1.3 cycles minimum, 18 cycles or 300 ms maximum
DC: 8 ms minimum, 300 ms maximum
Maximum duty cycle of 6 OPEN/CLOSE cycles
per minute
Blue wire: power input (see power requirements)
Yellow wire: feedback status from power input,
maximum 0.50A draw
Operation
Mechanism manually operated by external handle allowing
ON, OFF and RESET operation. Handle assumes a center
TRIP position after performing protective response.
Operating/Application Data
Ambient temperature: 040C
Frequency: 4862 Hz
Humidity: 095% noncondensing
Table 27.4-21. Terminal Type
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 27.4-2. Typical Single-Pole Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram
for GHBS and GBHS Breakers
Figure 27.4-3. Typical Single-Pole Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram
for GHQRSP Breakers
Dimensions
Table 27.4-22. Dimensions Per Pole
Purchase separate AMP Inc. conductor plug #640426-3.
Excluding line terminal.
Excluding handle.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Circuit
Breaker
Amperes
Screw
Head
Type
Terminal
Type Range
GHQRSP 1520 Slotted Clamp #14#4 AWG
Circuit Breaker
Type
Width Height
Length
GHQRSP 1.00 (25.4) 4.63 (117.6) 2.81 (71.4)

Circuit Breaker
Solenoid
Solenoid
a
Common
28 Vac
AMP Inc.
Conductor
Plug
1
/2 Cycle
Maximum
28 Vac
Pulse Source Circuit Breaker
Open/Closed
Status
Auxiliary
Line
Breaker
Contact
Remote
Contact
Load
Y
e
l
l
o
w
GHQRSP
R
e
d
Status
B
l
a
c
k
On
Coil
Off
Coil
B
l
u
e
Power
Input
27.4-17
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Solenoid OperatedRemote Controlled Emergency Circuit Breaker
093
Solenoid Operated
Remote Controlled
Emergency Circuit Breaker
Solenoid OperatedRemote Controlled
Emergency Circuit Breaker
General Description
The GHQRSPEL circuit breaker
contains both a solenoid operated
remote switching circuit and a manu-
ally operated thermal-magnetic circuit
breaker. This Emergency Lighting
Circuit Breaker complies with the
2008 National Electrical Code; Section
700.12(F) for Sources of Power used in
emergency lighting applications.
Left pole: Integral solenoid
controlled contacts in series
with thermal-magnetic circuit
breaker pole
Right pole: Standard thermal-
magnetic circuit breaker pole
Both poles tied to same phase
Cable-connected load-side terminal
Status switchremote status and
breaker status available from
internal auxiliary switches
overload protection
Arc-runner and arc-chute assembly
for fast-acting arc extinction
Three-position breaker handle:
OFF, TRIP (Center), ON
Visual indication of the remotely
operated contacts position
(open, closed or trip)
Remote override handle permits
manual switching when control
power is lost
15 and 20A breakers SWD, and
HID rated
Product Selection
Table 27.4-23. Solenoid OperatedRemote
Controlled Emergency Circuit Breaker
Operating Data
Mechanism manually operated by
external handle allowing ON, OFF and
RESET operation. Handle assumes a
center TRIP position after performing
protective response.
Solenoid
Power requirements: 24 Vac/Vdc
(20.4V minimum to 30V maximum)
Controlled signal: +AC/DC 12 ms
minimum with zero cross, 300 ms
maximum
AC: 1.3 cycles minimum, 18 cycles
or 300 ms maximum
DC: 12 ms minimum, 300 ms
maximum
Maximum duty cycle of 6 OPEN/
CLOSE cycles per minute
Blue wire: power input
Yellow wire: feedback status from
power input, maximum 0.50A draw
Application
Ambient temperature: 040C
Frequency: 4862 Hz
Humidity: 095% noncondensing
Product Specications
GHQRSPEL circuit breakers incorporate
many of the same robust features as
other GHQRSP breakers including:
Handle rating: 20A (both switched
and unswitched circuits)
Maximum voltage rating: 277 Vac
Interrupting ratings: 65 kA at
240 Vac, 14 kA at 277 Vac
Maximum series connected
ratings: 200 kA at 240 Vac and
100 kA at 277V
Overcurrent protection
UL listed 489
UL listed switch duty rated (SWD)
and high intensity discharge
(HID) ratings
Lug wire size: (1) #128 Al, #148 Cu
per circuit, 75C conductors
Amperes Catalog
Number
15
20
GHQRSPEL2015
GHQRSPEL2020
27.4-18
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Solenoid OperatedRemote Controlled Emergency Circuit Breaker
094
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 27.4-4. The Need for Relay is Eliminated with Extra Box, Wiring and Selecting a Properly Rated Component
Note: Circuit breaker mounts into panelboard. Switched and unswitched conductors are connected directly to the breaker load side lug.
Figure 27.4-5. Typical Circuit Breaker Schematic for GHQRSP
Source
GHQRSPEL
Circuit Breaker
Manually Operated Circuit
Remotely Operated Circuit
Light Fixture Light Fixture Emergency
Light Equipment
Light Fixture
Status
Load
Remote
Contact
Breaker
Contact
Line
On
Coil
Off
Coil
Power
Input
Y
e
l
l
o
w
R
e
d
B
l
a
c
k
B
l
u
e
+
27.4-19
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series G Selection DataEG-Frame
095
Series G, E-Frame
Thermal-Magnetic
15125A
E125-Frame Breaker
Table 27.4-24. Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 27.4-25. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings
Not UL listed.
Note: EG breaker is HACR rated.
Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth
1
2
1.00 (25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
5.50 (139.7)
5.50 (139.7)
2.99 (75.9)
2.99 (75.9)
3
4
3.00 (76.2)
4.00 (101.6)
5.50 (139.7)
5.50 (139.7)
2.99 (75.9)
2.99 (75.9)
Frame Ratings
EG 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50,
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
EG
16, 32, 63
Table 27.4-26. UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
IEC only.
Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 42 kA.

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
120 220240 277 347 380415 480 600Y/

347
690
125 250
I
cu
I
cs
I
cu
I
cs
I
cu
I
cs
I
cu
I
cs
I
cu
I
cs
EGB125 1
2, 3, 4
35
25
25
25
25
18
18
18
18
10
10
10
10
EGE125 2, 3, 4 35 35 25 25 25 18 10 10
EGS125 1
2, 3, 4
100
85
85
43
43
35
22
40
30
35
22
35
35
35
35
EGH125 1
2, 3, 4
200
100
100
50
50
65
30
70
35
65
25
42
42
42
42
EGC125 3, 4 200 200 100 100 100 35 42 42
27.4-20
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series G Selection DataF-Frame
096
Series G, F-Frame 15225A
Electronic RMS 15225A
F-Frame Breaker
Table 27.4-28. Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units
Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth
3 4.13 (104.8) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)
Types Frame Ratings
FDE, HFDE,
FDCE
225 100, 110, 125, 150, 160,
175, 200, 225
160 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125,
150, 160
80 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,
70, 80
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.
Current limiting.
Electronics available on thee-pole only.

Table 27.4-30. Line and Load Terminals
UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type

240 277 480 600 125 250
FDE
HFDE
FDCE
3
3
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
65,000
100,000
200,000
35,000
65,000
100,000
18,000
25,000
25,000
10,000
22,000
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range (mm
2
)
Catalog Number
Package of
3 Terminals
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
100
150
225
Steel
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(1) #141/0
(1) #44/0
(1) #44/0
2.550
2595
2595
3T100FB
3TA150FB
3TA225FD
Optional Pressure Terminals
50
100
150
225
Aluminum
Aluminum
Stainless steel
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu
Cu/Al
(1) #14#4
(1) #141/0
(1) #44/0
(1) #6300 kcmil
2.516
2.550
2595
16150
3TA50FB
3TA100FD
3T150FB
3TA225FDK
27.4-21
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series G Selection DataJG-Frame
097
Series G, J-Frame
Electronic RMS, 20250A
Thermal-Magnetic, 63250A
J-Frame Breaker
Not UL listed.
Not UL listed.
Note: JG breaker is HACR rated.
Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth
2, 3
4
4.13 (104.9)
5.34 (135.6)
7.00 (177.8)
7.00 (177.8)
3.57 (90.7)
3.57 (90.7)
Frame Ratings
JG 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175,
200, 225, 250
JG
160
Frame Ratings
JG250
JG160
100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250

63, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 160
JG100
JG50
40, 45, 50, 63, 70, 80, 90, 100
20, 25, 30, 32, 40, 45, 50

JG-Frame circuit breakers include Cu/Al terminals T250FJ as standard.
When optional copper only terminals are required, order by catalog number.
Single terminals individually packed.
Standard line and load terminals.

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
220240 380415 480 600 690 250
I
cu
I
cs
I
cu
I
cs
I
cu
I
cs
JGE250
JGS250
JGH250
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
65
85
100
65
85
100
25
40
70
25
40
70
25
35
65
18
18
25
12
12
14
6
6
7
10
22
22
JGC250
JGU250
JGX250
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
200
200
200
200
200
200
100
150
200
100
150
200
100
150
200
35
50
50
16
18
18
12
14
14
42
50
50
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
Metric Wire
Range mm
2
AWG Wire
Range/Number
of Conductors
Catalog
Number
250
250
Stainless steel
Aluminum
Cu
Cu/Al
25185
25185
#4350 (1)
#4350 (1)
T250FJ
TA250FJ
Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals

250 Copper Cu/Al 25185 #4350 (1) TC250FJ
27.4-22
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series G Selection DataLG-Frame
098
Series G, L-Frame
Electronic RMS, 100630A*
Thermal-Magnetic, 250630A*
*UL Maximum is 600A
L-Frame Breaker
Table 27.4-36. Dimensions in Inches (mm),
Weight in Lbs (kg)
Table 27.4-37. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Rating
Not UL listed.
Table 27.4-38. Digitrip 310+
Note: 160, 315 and 630 are IEC ratings only.
LG breaker is HACR rated.
Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth Weight
3 5.48
(140)
10.13
(258)
4.09
(104)
16
(7.3)
4 7.22
(183)
10.13
(258)
4.09
(104)
20
(9.1)
Frame Ratings
LG
LG
250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600

320, 630
Frame Ratings
LG_630
LG_600
250, 300, 315, 350, 400, 500, 600, 630
250, 300, 315, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
LG_400
LG_250
160, 200, 225, 250, 300, 315, 350, 400
100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250
DC rating applies to substantially non-inductive circuits.
Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuits.
IEC rating is 300 kA at 240 Vac.

Includes LTS3K (three-pole) or LTS4K (four-pole) terminal covers.
Standard terminal included with complete breaker.

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
240240 380415 480 600 690 250
Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics

LGE630
LGS630
LGH630
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
65
85
100
65
85
100
35
50
70
35
50
70
35
50
65
18
25
35
12
20
25
6
10
13
22
22
42
22
22
42
LGC630
LGU630
LGX630
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
200
200
200
200
200
200
100
150
200
100
150
200
100
150
200
50
65
65
30
35
35
15
18
18
42
50
50
42
50
50
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm
2
Number of
Terminals
Included
Catalog
Number
400
400
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
500750 (1)
500750 (1)
240380 (1)
240380 (1)
3
4
3TA631LK
4TA631LK
400
400
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
500750 (1)
500750 (1)
240380 (1)
240380 (1)
3
4
3T631LK
4T631LK
630
630
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
2500 (2)
2500 (2)
35240 (2)
35240 (2)
3
4
3TA632LK
4TA632LK
630
630
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
2500 (2)
2500 (2)
35240 (2)
35240 (2)
3
4
3T632LK
4T632LK
400
400
Aluminum
Copper
Cu/Al
Cu
2500 (1)
2500 (1)
35240 (1)
35240 (1)
1
1
TA350LK
T350LK
27.4-23
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series G Selection DataNG-Frame
099
Series G, N-Frame
N-Frame Breaker
Table 27.4-42. Digitrip 310+ Electronic
Trip Units
Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth
3 8.25
(209.6)
16.00
(406.4)
5.50
(139.7)
Frame Ratings
800
1200
320, 400, 450, 500, 600, 630, 700, 800
500, 600, 630, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200
Table 27.4-43. Series G Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
UL 489 IEC 60947-2
240 480 600 220240 380415 660690
I
cu
I
cs
I
cu
I
cs
I
cu
I
cs
800, 1200A
NGS
NGH
NGC
3
3
3
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
65
100
200
50
65
100
25
35
50
85
100
200
85
100
100
50
70
100
50
50
50
20
25
35
10
13
18
800A
NGU 3 N.I.T. 300 150 75
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range (mm
2
)
Catalog
Number
Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals
700
1000
1200
1200
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(2) 1500 kcmil
(3) 3/0400 kcmil
(4) 4/0500 kcmil
(3) 500750 kcmil
50300
95185
120300
300400
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
TA1201NB1
700
1000
1200
Copper
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
Cu
(2) 2/0500 kcmil
(3) 3/0500 kcmil
(4) /0400 kcmil
70300
95300
95185
T700NB1
T1000NB1
T1200NB3
27.4-24
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series G Selection DataRG-Frame
100
Series G, R-Frame
R-Frame Breaker
Table 27.4-46. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit
Rating Plugs
Adjustable rating plug available.

Table 27.4-47. Digitrip 510/610/810/910
and Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit
Rating Plugs
Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth
3 15.50
(393.7)
16.00
(406.4)
9.75
(247.7)
4 20.00
(508.0)
16.00
(406.4)
9.75
(247.7)
Frame Rating Plugs
1600
2000
2500
800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1500, 1600
1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1600, 2000
1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500
Frame Rating Plugs

1600
2000
2500
800, 1000, 1200, 1600
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
1600, 2000, 2500
Table 27.4-48. Series G Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
UL 489 IEC 60947-2
240 480 600 220240 380415 660690
I
cu
I
cs
I
cu
I
cs
I
cu
I
cs
RGH
RGC
3, 4
3, 4
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
125
200
65
100
50
65
135
200
100
100
70
100
50
50
25
35
13
18
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
Hardware AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range (mm
2
)
Catalog
Number
Wire Terminal
1600
1600
2000
Aluminum
Copper
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu
Cu/Al
English
English
English
(4) 5001000 kcmil
(4) 1600 kcmil
(6) 2600 kcmil
300500
50300
35300
TA1600RD
T1600RD
TA2000RD
27.4-25
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series C Selection DataG-Frame
101
Series C, G-Frame
GHB Breaker and G-Frame
Table 27.4-50. G-FrameDimensions in Inches (mm)
Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum.
Two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
1570A breakers only.

Table 27.4-53. Terminal Types

GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP277V 30 mA GF Breaker
Application Notes
Type GHB are bolt-on panelboard breakers while type
GHC is a cable-in and cable-out breaker for stand-alone
mounting typically in a control panel or separate enclosure
GHCGFEP and GHBGFEP are earth leakage breakers,
rated for 30 mA ground fault protection
On all three-phase delta (240V) grounded B phase
applications, refer to Eaton
480Y/277V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for
three-phase delta (480V) grounded B phase applications
All two- and three-pole circuit breakers are of the common
trip type
Single-pole circuit breakers, 15 and 20A. Switching duty
rated (SWD) for uorescent lighting applications
Suitable for reverse-feed applications
HACR rated
Terminals
Line side (on GHC) and load side (on GHC and GHB) terminals
are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size listed below.
When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound.
Table 27.4-54. Terminals
Figure 27.4-6. Electrical Schematic
Do not ground neutral anywhere on load side of breaker.

Number of Poles Width Height Depth
1P G-Frame
2P G-Frame
3P G-Frame
1.00 (25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
3.00 (76.2)
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
2.81 (71.4)
2.81 (71.4)
2.81 (71.4)
GHCGFEP
GHBGFEP
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
4.88 (124.0)
4.00 (101.6)
2.81 (71.4)
2.81 (71.4)
Frame Ratings
GHB, GHC
GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
GHQ
HGHB
15, 20
15, 20, 25, 30
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of
Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
120 240 277 480 480Y/277 125 250
GDB
GD
GD
2, 3
2
3
65
65
14
14
22
10
10
10
GHQ
GHB
GHB
1
1
2, 3
65
65
65
14
14
14
14
14
HGHB
GHC
GHC
HGHC
1
1
2, 3
1
65
65
65
65
25
14
25
14
14
14
14
14
Circuit Breaker
Amperes
Terminal Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
1520
25100
Clamp (plated steel)
Pressure (aluminum body)
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(1) #1410
(1) #101/0
1520
2560
Clamp
Pressure
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(1) #14#10 AWG
(1) #101/0 AWG
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Type
Wire
Type
Wire
Range
1520
2560
Clamp
Pressure
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
#14#10 AWG
#10 1/0 AWG
Single
27.4-26
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series C Selection DataF-Frame
102
Series C, F-Frame
Thermal-Magnetic 10225A
Electronic RMS 15225A
F-Frame Breaker
Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth
1
2
1.38 (34.8)
2.75 (69.9)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
3.38 (85.7)
3.38 (85.7)
3
4
4.13 (104.8)
5.50 (139.7)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
3.38 (85.7)
3.38 (85.7)
Frame Ratings
ED, EDH, EDC 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
EHD, FDB, FD,
HFD, FDC,
HFDDC
10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45,
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110,
125, 150
FD, HFD, FDC 175, 200, 225
Types Frame Ratings
FDE, HFDE,
FDCE
225 100, 110, 125, 150, 160,
175, 200, 225
160 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125,
150, 160
80 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,
70, 80
Current limiting.
Electronics available on three-pole only.
HFDDC is UL only and is not tested to other standards.
Interrupting rating is 35,000A at 600 Vdc with three poles in series, for ungrounded systems only.
Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers.

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type

240 277 480 600 125 250
EDB
EDS
2, 3
2, 3
N.I.T. 22,000
42,000
10,000
10,000
ED
EDH
EDC
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
N.I.T. 65,000
100,000
200,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
EHD 1
2, 3
N.I.T.
18,000
14,000
14,000
10,000
10,000
FDB 2, 3, 4 N.I.T. 18,000 14,000 14,000 10,000
FD
FD
FDE
1
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
65,000
65,000
35,000
35,000
35,000
18,000
10,000
10,000
HFD
HFD
HFDE
1
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
100,000
100,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
25,000
10,000
22,000
FDC
FDCE
2, 3, 4 N.I.T. 200,000 100,000 35,000

25,000
22,000
HFDDC
3 N.I.T. 42,000
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range (mm
2
)
Catalog Number
Package of
3 Terminals
20 (EHD)
100
150
225
Steel
Steel
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(1) #14#10
(1) #141/0
(1) #44/0
(1) #44/0
2.54
2.550
2595
2595
3T20FB
3T100FB
3TA150FB
3TA225FD
Optional Pressure Terminals
50
100
150
225
Aluminum
Aluminum
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu
Cu/Al
(1) #14#4
(1) #141/0
(1) #44/0
(1) #6300 kcmil
2.516
2.550
2595
16150
3TA50FB
3TA100FD
3T150FB
3TA225FDK
27.4-27
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series C Selection DataJ-Frame
103
Series C, J-Frame
J-Frame Breaker
Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth
2, 3 4.13
(104.8)
10.00
(254.0)
4.06
(103.2)
4 5.50
(139.7)
10.00
(254.0)
4.06
(103.2)
Frame Ratings
JDB, JD, HJD
JDC, HJDDC
70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
225, 250
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip; I.T. is interchangeable trip.
Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
8 milliseconds time constant.
Current limiting.


Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type

240 480 600 250
600
JDB
JD
HJD
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
65,000
65,000
100,000
35,000
35,000
65,000
18,000
18,000
25,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
JDC
HJDDC
2, 3, 4
3
I.T.
I.T.
200,000
100,000
35,000
22,000
42,000
35,000
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
Metric
Wire
Range (mm
2
)
Catalog
Number
250
250
Aluminum
Stainless steel
Cu/Al
Cu
(1) #4350 kcmil
(1) #4350 kcmil
25185
25185
TA250KB
T250KB
27.4-28
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series C Selection DataK-Frame
104
Series C, K-Frame
K-Frame Breaker
Table 27.4-66. Digitrip 310 and OPTIM
Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs
160A is only available on Digitrip 310.
Adjustable rating plug available on

Digitrip 310.
Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth
2, 3 5.50
(139.7)
10.13
(257.2)
4.06
(103.2)
4 7.22
(183.4)
10.13
(257.2)
4.06
(103.2)
Frame Ratings
DK, KDB, KD, HKD,
KDC, HKDDC,
100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
225, 250, 300, 350, 400
Frame Rating Plugs
KD, HKD, KDC,

CKD, CHKD
70, 90, 100, 110, 125
, 150,
160, 175, 200, 225, 250
,
300, 350, 400
Table 27.4-67. NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
8 milliseconds time constant.
Current limiting.
100% rated.

Individually packed.
Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
Two-pole kit.
Three-pole kit.
Four-pole kit.
Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and three interphase barriers.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type

240 480 600 250
600
DK
KDB
KD
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
I.T.
65,000
65,000
65,000
35,000
35,000
25,000
25,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
HKD
KDC
HKDDC
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
3
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
100,000
200,000
65,000
100,000
35,000
65,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
35,000
CKD
CHKD
3
3
I.T.
I.T.
65,000
100,000
35,000
65,000
25,000
35,000
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG/Wire
Range/Number
Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range (mm
2
)
Catalog
Number
225
350
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
3350 (1)
250500 (1)
35185
120240
TA300K
TA350K
400 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0250 (2) 95120 2TA400K
3TA400K
4TA400K

225
350
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
3350 (1)
50500 (1)
35185
120240
T300K
T350K
400 Copper Cu 3/0250 (2) 95120 2T400K
3T400K
4T400K
400 Aluminum Cu/Al 2/0250 (2)

or
2/0500 (1)
70120
70240
70240
2TA401K
3TA401K
4TA401K
400 Aluminum Cu/Al 500750 (1) 300400 2TA402K
3TA402K
4TA402K
400 Copper Cu/Al 500750 (1) 2T402K
3T402K
4T402K

27.4-29
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series C Selection DataL-Frame
105
Series C, L-Frame
L-Frame Breaker
Rating Plugs
Table 27.4-72. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip
Unit Rating Plugs
Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth
2, 3 8.25
(209.6)
10.75
(273.1)
4.06
(103.2)
4 11.00
(279.4)
10.75
(273.1)
4.06
(103.2)
Frame Ratings
LDB, LD, CLD,
HLD, CHLD,
LDC, CLDC,
HLDDC
300, 350, 400, 450,
500, 600
Frame Rating Plugs
LDB, LD, CLD,
HLD, CHLD,
LDC, CLDC
300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
300/600 adjustable
Frame Rating Plugs
LD, CLD, HLD,
CHLD, LDC,
CLDC
70, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175,
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400,
500, 600
L/ R = 8 milliseconds minimum.
Two-pole circuit breaker or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.

Incorporating T/M trip unit only.
100% rated.
Current limiting.

Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type
Interrupting Capacity (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

240 480 600 250
600
LDB
LD, CLD
HLD
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
65,000
65,000
100,000
35,000
35,000
65,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
22,000
22,000
25,000
CHLD
LDC
CLDC
HLDDC
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
3
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
100,000
200,000
200,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
35,000
50,000
50,000
30,000
42,000
35,000
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/
Number of
Conductors
Metric
Wire Range
(mm
2
)
Catalog
Number
400 Aluminum Cu/Al (1) 4/0600 kcmil 120300 2TA401LDK (two-pole kit)
3TA401LDK (three-pole kit)
4TA401LDK (four-pole kit)
500
600
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(2) 250350 kcmil
(2) 400500 kcmil
120150
185240
TA602LD
2TA603LDK (two-pole kit)
3TA603LDK (three-pole kit)
4TA603LDK (four-pole kit)
Optional Copper Pressure Type Terminals

600 Copper Cu (2) 250350 kcmil 120150 T602LD
27.4-30
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series C Selection DataM-Frame
106
Series C, M-Frame
M-Frame Breaker
Rating Plugs
Width Height Depth
8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.2)
Frame Ratings
MDL 300, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
Frame Rating Plugs
MDL 400, 500, 600, 700, 800,
400/800 adjustable
Two poles or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL,
HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not DC rated.
100% rated. Not for use on DC.


Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type
Interrupting Capacity (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

240 480 600 250

MDL, CMDL
HMDL, CHMDL
2, 3
2, 3
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
65,000
100,000
50,000
65,000
25,000
35,000
22,000
25,000
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Catalog
Number
600
800
800
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(2) #1500 kcmil
(3) 3/0400 kcmil
(2) 500750 kcmil
TA700MA1
TA800MA2
TA801MA
600
800
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
(2) 2/0500 kcmil
(3) 3/0300 kcmil
T600MA1
T800MA1
27.4-31
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series C Selection DataN-Frame
107
Series C, N-Frame
N-Frame Breaker
Rating Plugs

Table 27.4-82. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip
Unit Rating Plugs
Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth
2, 3 8.25
(209.6)
16.00
(406.4)
5.50
(139.7)
4 11.13
(282.6)
16.00
(406.4)
5.50
(139.7)
Frame Rating Plugs
800
1200
400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100,1200
Frame Ratings
800
1200
400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 700, 800
600, 700, 800, 1000, 1200
100% rated.
800A maximum rating.
Successfully tested at 300 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 200 kAIC at 240 Vac.
Successfully tested at 75 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 65 kAIC at 600 Vac.


Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type

Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240 277 480 600
ND, CND
HND
CHND
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
65,000
100,000
100,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
25,000
35,000
35,000
NDC
CNDC
NDU
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
3
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
300,000
100,000
100,000
150,000
65,000
65,000
75,000
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range (mm
2
)
Catalog
Number
700
1000
1200
1200
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(2) 1500 kcmil
(3) 3/0400 kcmil
(4) 4/0500 kcmil
(3) 500750 kcmil
50300
95185
120300
300400
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
TA1201NB1
700
1000
1200
Copper
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
Cu
(2) 2/0500 kcmil
(3) 3/0500 kcmil
(4) 3/0400 kcmil
70300
95300
95185
T700NB1
T1000NB1
T1200NB3
27.4-32
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series C Selection DataR-Frame
108
Series C, R-Frame
R-Frame Breaker
Rating Plugs

Table 27.4-87. Digitrip 510/610/810/910
and Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit
Rating Plugs
Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth
3 15.50
(393.7)
16.00
(406.4)
9.75
(247.7)
4 20.00
(508.0)
16.00
(406.4)
9.75
(247.7)
Frame Rating Plugs
1600 800, 1000, 1200, 1250,
1400, 1500, 1600
2000 1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1600, 2000
2500 1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500
Frame Rating Plugs

1600
2000
2500
800, 1000, 1200, 1600
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
1600, 2000, 2500
100% rated versions.


Circuit
Breaker
Frame
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type

Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240 277 480 600
RD
CRD
RDC
CRDC
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
125
125
200
200
65
65
100
100
50
50
65
65
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
Hardware AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range (mm
2
)
Catalog
Number
Wire Terminal
1600
1600
2000
Aluminum
Copper
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu
Cu/Al
English
English
English
(4) 5001000 kcmil
(4) 1600 kcmil
(6) 2600 kcmil
300500
50300
35300
TA1600RD
T1600RD
TA2000RD
27.4-33
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series G Accessories and Modications
109
Table 27.4-90. Series G Breaker Accessories and Modications
Only one per pole.
Refer to the Eaton.

Breaker Frame E J L N R
Alarm lockout (make/break)

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination
Shunt trip
Control wire kit
Multi-wire kit
End cap kit
Terminal cover
Terminal shields
Terminal end covers
Interphase barriers
Handle mechanisms
Handle extension
Non-padlockable handle block
Padlockable handle block
Padlockable handle lock hasp
Key interlock kit
Sliding bar/walking beam interlock
Electrical operator
Rear connecting studs
Plug-in adapters
Drawout cassette
Earth leakage/ground fault protector
Power monitoring and metering module
Cause-of-Trip LED module
Ammeter/Cause-of-Trip display
DIgitrip 310+ test kit
Modications
Moisture fungus treatment

Freeze-tested circuit breakers
Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB
27.4-34
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Series C Breaker Accessories and Modications
110
Table 27.4-91. Series C Breaker Accessories and Modications
Make only (one pole).
Requires two breakers.
Refer to the Eaton.

Breaker Frame G F J K L M N R
Termination Accessories
Line and load terminals
Plug nut
Control wire terminal kit
Terminal shields
Interphase barriers
Multiwire connectors
Alarm lockout (1 make/1 break)

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)/alarm lockout
Standard shunt trip
Low energy shunt trip
Cylinder lock
Key interlock kit
Sliding bar interlock

Walking beam interlock

Electrical (solenoid) operator
Electrical (motor) operator
IQ Energy Sentinel
LFD current limiter
Plug-in adapters
Drawout cassette
Rear connecting studs
Panelboard connecting straps
Handle mechanisms
Door hardware/accessories
Solid-state (electronic) test kit
Handle extension
Ammeter/Cause-of-Trip display
Cause-of-Trip LED module
Power monitoring and metering module (PM3)
Digitrip 310+ test kit
Modications
Special calibration
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
Marine application
27.4-35
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
High Instantaneous Breakers
111
High Instantaneous
Circuit Breaker for
General Description
Eatons Electrical Sector introduces
new high-magnetic withstand molded-
case circuit breakers, specically
designed for critical operations and
selective coordination requirements.
The high-magnetic withstand LHH
and NHH frames continue the legacy
of circuit breaker innovation for which
Eaton is recognized throughout the
world. The LHH and NHH breakers
are equipped with 125 to 400A trip
units with high-magnetic capability.
This design enables the breakers
to withstand up to 90 times rated
current before opening under short-
circuit conditions.
The LHH and NHH circuit breakers
incorporate a higher level of instanta-
neous pickup, thus allowing for higher
current levels of selective coordination.
Standard molded-case circuit breakers
typically are furnished with a magnetic
pickup or electronic instantaneous
adjustment or instantaneous override
set at 10 times (10x) the continuous
trip rating.
Eatons LHH and NHH molded-case
circuit breakers are furnished with a
higher level of magnetic pickup or
electronic instantaneous settings
as indicated in Table 27.4-94. These
higher levels of magnetic pickup and
electronic instantaneous values
in turn allow the system designer to
obtain selective coordination at fault
current levels up to these higher ratings.
Greater values of selective coordination
are available based on manufacturer
tested combinations using the LHH
and NHH as line-side breakers and
standard breakers as load-side devices.
Refer to IA01200002E to determine the
maximum fault values that selective
coordination achieves. When the line-
side and load-side molded-case circuit
breaker trip ratings are chosen to
coordinate in the overload range, they
also can be selectively coordinated in
the fault range up to the values listed
in Table 27.4-94 or IA01200002E. For
overcurrents protected by circuit
breakers on the load-side of the LHH or
NHH, only the effected load-side circuit
breaker will open, while the line-side
LHH and/or NHH circuit breakers remain
closed, thus providing continuity of
power to the other critical loads supplied
by the LHH or NHH circuit breakers.
Benets of Using the LHH and
NHH Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Customer expectations and codes
are driving product development to
protect customers critical operations.
NEC
2005 and 2008 requires circuits

with elevators, emergency systems,
legally required standby systems,
health care essential systems and
critical operation power systems to be
selectively coordinated. Simply stated,
only the closest protective device
directly protecting the circuit having
an overcurrent (overload or fault)
condition should open.
All other overcurrent protective
devices within these systems shall
remain closed. Similarly, backup
power system designs of a critical
nature that are not code mandated may
also require overcurrent protective
devices to be selectively coordinated
as much as practicable to provide a
higher level of uptime.
Proven Technology and Performance
The LHH is based on the Series G
L-Frame circuit breaker, sharing the
same small footprint and eld-t
accessories as the L-Frame breaker.
The NHH is based on the Series G
N-Frame circuit breaker and shares the
same footprint and accessories as the
N-Frame breaker. NHH accessories
must be factory installed.
The LHH incorporates a thermal-
magnetic trip unit with xed thermal
and xed magnetic settings. The NHH
has an OPTIM electronic trip unit
with LSI adjustment capabilities. The
instantaneous setting is adjustable
from 1000 to 4000A or may be turned
off to default to the frame override
of 14,000A. A hand-held OPTIMizer
must be used with the NHH to adjust
short-time delay and instantaneous;
however, the long delay pickup is
xed and cannot be adjusted.
The LHH and NHH breakers are
available in Eatons panelboards
and switchboards.
UL
CSA
Product Selection
Table 27.4-92. LHH and NHH Catalog Numbers
Ampere
Rating
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit LSI Electronic Trip Unit
LHH Frame NHH Frame
125
150
175
LHH3125FFG
LHH3150FFG
LHH3175FFG
NHH3150T52X15
NHH3175T52X15
200
225
250
LHH3200FFG
LHH3225FFG
LHH3250FFG
NHH3200T52X15
NHH3225T52X15
NHH3250T52X15
300
350
400
LHH3300FFG
LHH3350FFG
LHH3400FFG
NHH3300T52X15
NHH3350T52X15
27.4-36
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
112
Three-pole
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125400A LHH
150350A NHH
Trip units:
LHHthermal-magnetic
NHHLSI electronic trip unit
No rating plugs required
Factory-sealed breakers
LHH uses same internal and
external accessories as standard
Series G L-Frame circuit breaker
NHH uses same internal and
external accessories as standard
Series G N-Frame circuit breaker
LHH and NHH Electrical Characteristics
Table 27.4-93. Short-Circuit Current Ratings (kA rms) AC 5060 Hz
Table 27.4-94. Continuous Current Ratings
Description Breaker Type
LHH NHH
Max. rated current (amperes) 400 350
NEMA UL 489
240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
250 Vac
100
65
35
42
100
65
35
IEC 60947-2
220 Vac
415 Vac
690 Vac
125/250 Vdc
100
70
25
22
100
70
25
Number of poles
Ampere range
3
125400
3
150350
Continuous
Current
Rating
Amperes
LHH NHH
Magnetic
Trip Point
Amperes
Continuous
Current
Multiplier
Instantaneous
Trip Point
Amperes
Continuous
Current
Multiplier
Short Delay
Pickup
Amperes
125
150
175
2500
2500
4000
20x
16x
22x
14,000
14,000
93x
80x
2251200
2601400
200
225
250
4000
6000
6000
20x
26x
24x
14,000
14,000
14,000
70x
62x
56x
3001600
3381800
3752000
300
350
400
6000
6000
6000
20x
17x
15x
14,000
14,000
47x
40x
4502400
5252800

27.4-37
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
113
Table 27.4-95. Dimensions
Figure 27.4-7. L-Frame
Figure 27.4-8. N-Frame
Description Height Width Depth Weight in
Lbs (kg)
LHH
NHH
10.13 (257.3)
16.00 (406.4)
5.48 (139.2)
8.25 (209.5)
4.09 (103.9)
5.50 (139.7)
12.36 (5.6)
46.80 (21.2)
5.58
141.7)
10.13
(257.3)
4.06
(103.1)
(
1.92
(48.8)
2.43
(61.7)
3.16
(80.3)
R 0.25
(6.4)
2.00
(50.8)
2.69
(68.3)
5.38
(136.7)
Breaker
Front View Four-Pole
C
L
CC
Side View Front Cover Cutout
Front Cover Cutout
3.44
(87.4)
1.91
(48.5)
1.50
(38.1)
6.38
(162.1)
3.19
(81.0)
R 0.25
(6.4)
3.68
(93.5)
9.25
(235.0)
Front View Three-Pole
8.25
(209.6)
16.00
(406.4)
Side View
5.50
(139.7)
Breaker C
L
CC
27.4-38
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
114
Motor Circuit Protectors, 31200A
Motor Circuit Protectors 31200A
Catalog Numbering System
Note: This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers
for circuit breakers or trip units.
Table 27.4-96. HMCP
On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only.

Table 27.4-97. GMCP/HMCPE
Table 27.4-98. 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Minimum
UL listed for use with Eaton motor starters.
Equipped with an electronic trip device.

Magnetic Trip Range/
NEMA Starter Size
A0 = 930/0
C0 = 2170/0
E0 = 45150/0
D0 = 4060/0
H1 = 90300/1
G2 = 80120/2
K2 = 150500/2
J2 = 115170/2
M2 = 210700/2
L3 = 160240/3
R3 = 3001000/3
T4 = 4501500/4
U4 = 7502500/4
A5 = 350700/5
C5 = 450900/5
D5 = 5001000/5
F5 = 6251250/5
G5 = 7501500/5
J5 = 8751750/5
K5 = 10002000/5
L5 = 11252250/5
W5 = 12502500/5
N5 = 15003000/5
R5 = 17503500/5
X5 = 20004000/5
L6 = 18006000/6
X6 = 5002500
Y6 = 10004000
X7 = 16006400
Y8 = 24009600
HMCP 003 A0 C
Motor Circuit
Protector Type
HMCP = 3-pole
HM2P = 2-pole
HMCPS= 3-pole
Continuous
Ampere Rating
003 = 3
007 = 7
015 = 15
025 = 25
030 = 30
050 = 50
070 = 70
100 = 100
150 = 150
250 = 250
400 = 400
600 = 600
800 = 800
12 = 1200
Suffix
C = Non-aluminum terminals
W = W/O terminals
X = Load terminals only
Y = Line terminals only
S = Stainless steel terms
(150A frame only)
No Sufx = Standard terminals on
line and load
(electronic)
Continuous Amperes MCP Trip Range (Amperes) MCP Catalog Number
JG-Frame
250 5001000
6251250
7501500
HMCPJ250D5L
HMCPJ250F5L
HMCPJ250G5L
8751750
10002000
11252250
12502500
HMCPJ250J5L
HMCPJ250K5L
HMCPJ250L5L
HMCPJ250W5L
LG-Frame
600 11252250
15003000
17503500
HMCPL600L6G
HMCPL600N6G
HMCPL600R6G
20004000
22504500
25005000
30006000
HMCPL600X6G
HMCPL600Y6G
HMCPL600P6G
HMCPL600M6G
GMCP/HMCPE 003 A0 C
Motor Circuit
Protector Type
GMCP = 3-pole
HMCPE = 3-pole
Continuous
Ampere Rating
003 = 3
007 = 7
015 = 15
030 = 30
050 = 50
060 = 60
063 = 63
070 = 70
100 = 100
Magnetic Trip Range
GMCP HMCPE
A0 = 1530
C0 = 3570
E0 = 75150
H1 = 150300
K2 = 250500
J2 = 300600
M2 = 320630
A0 = 933
C0 = 2177
E0 = 45165
H1 = 90330
K2 = 150550
M2 = 210770
R3 = 3001100
T3 = 5001500
Suffix
C = Non-aluminum
terminals
27.4-39
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
115
Motor Circuit Protector
Catalog Numbers and Ranges
Tables are available to provide specic
catalog numbers and application
ranges for the G-Frame (GMCP),
E-Frame (HMCPE), J-Frame (HMCP)
and K-Frame (HMCP) motor circuit
protectors. Motor circuit protector
models are available with earth
leakage ground fault protection.
Models are also available for motor
starters provided with electronic
overload relays rather than thermal
overload relays, such as the Eatons
Advantage motor starter.
Similar tables for the selection of
the settings are available with motor
control products that use motor circuit
protectors. As required by the NEC,
the HMCP setting is selected by using
the actual full load ampere data from
the motor nameplate. The correspond-
ing trip settings provided are within
13 times the minimum full load
amperes of the motor as required
by the NEC. The NEC allows a higher
setting for Design B energy efcient
motors.
See Volume 4Circuit Protection
Catalog, CA08100005E, (Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers, Section 25) for
detailed tables.
Accessories
Termination Accessories
Line and load terminals
Keeper nut/plug nut
Control wire terminal kit
Terminal shields
Terminal end covers
Interphase barriers
ELC current limiter
Multiwire connector
Only one internal accessory per
pole maximum
Alarm lockout (make/break)
Auxiliary switch/alarm lockout
Shunt tripstandard
Shunt triplow energy
Key interlock kit
Sliding bar interlockrequires
two breakers
Electrical (solenoid) operator
Handle mechanism
Door hardware/accessories
DIN rail adapter (GMCP only)
Modications
Freeze test
27.4-40
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Motor Protector Circuit Breaker
116
Series G Motor Protector
Circuit Breaker (MPCB)
Series G Motor Protector
Circuit Breaker (MPCB)
General Description
Eliminates need for separate
overload relay.
Can be used with contactor
to eliminate need for overload
relay and still create manual
motor control
Meets requirement for motor
branch protection, including:
Disconnecting means
Branch circuit short-circuit
protection
Overload protection
Features
Phase unbalance protection
Phase loss protection
Hot trip/cold trip
High load alarm
Pre-detection trip relay option
Class 10, 15, 20, 30 protection
IEC 60947-2
UL 489 rating
CSA C22.2
Product Selection
Table 27.4-99. JGMP Catalog Numbers
Table 27.4-100. LGMP Catalog Numbers
630A is not a UL listed rating. 600A is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.
Note: For pre-trip alarm option, order style number 5721B31G02.
Technical Data
Table 27.4-101. JGMPS and JGMPH Rating and Ampere Range
Table 27.4-102. LGMPS and LGMPH Rating and Ampere Range
630A is not a UL listed rating. 600A is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.
Continuous
Amperes
35 kAIC 65 kAIC
50
100
160
250
JGMPS050G
JGMPS100G
JGMPS160G
JGMPS250G
JGMPH050G
JGMPH100G
JGMPH160G
JGMPH250G
Continuous
Amperes
50 kAIC 65 kAIC
250
400
600
630
LGMPS250G
LGMPS400G
LGMPS600G
LGMPS630G
LGMPH250G
LGMPH400G
LGMPH600G
LGMPH630G
Maximum Rated Current (Amperes) 250
Breaker Type JGMPS JGMPH
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 5060 Hz
IEC 60947-2 220240 Vac I cu
I cs
85
85
100
100
380415 Vac I cu
I cs
40
40
70
70
660690 Vac I cu
I cs
12
6
14
7
NEMA UL 489 240 Vac 85 100
480 Vac 35 65
600 Vac 25 35
Number of poles 3 3
Ampere range 50250 50250
Maximum Rated Current (Amperes) 630
Breaker Type LGMPS LGMPH

Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 5060 Hz
IEC 60947-2 220240 Vac I cu
I cs
85
85
100
100
380415 Vac I cu
I cs
50
50
70
70
660690 Vac I cu
I cs
20
10
25
13
NEMA UL 489 240 Vac 85 100
480 Vac 50 65
600 Vac 25 35
Number of poles 3 3
Ampere range 250630
250630

27.4-41
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Power Monitoring and Metering Module
117
Molded-Case Circuit
and Metering Module (PM3)
Power Monitoring/Metering Module (PM3)
General Description
The Power Monitoring and Metering
Module (PM3) is a UL-listed add-on
communications module that
mounts directly to the load side
of three-pole molded-case circuit
breakers, similar to an earth leakage
module. The PM3 adds revenue
accurate power metering and breaker
status monitoring to new and/or exist-
ing Series C and Series G breakers.
Regardless of the type of trip unit
(thermal-magnetic or electronic), the
PM3 can be applied in applications
where power metering, circuit breaker
monitoring and/or communications
is essential. The PM3 is extremely
exible and can be used in main
breaker or feeder breaker applications.
The automatic voltage sensing
means that the same PM3 module
can be used on 208, 240 or 480 Vac
applications. It can also be installed
in reverse-feed and reverse-phasing
(CBA) applications.
The PM3 provides the following
metering, monitoring and
communications functions:
Metering
Phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic, Iavg)
Phase-to-phase voltages
(Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vavg)
Phase-to-neutral voltages
(Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vavg)
Real power (kW)total and
per phase
Reactive power (kVAR)total and
per phase
Apparent power (kVA)total and
per phase
Power factortotal and per phase
Real energy (WHr)forward,
reverse and net
Reactive Energy (VARHr)forward,
reverse and net
Apparent energy (VAHr)forward,
reverse and net
Accuracy
Voltage and amperage: 0.5% of
reading
Watts, VARs, VA: 1% of reading
Energy: 1% per ANSI C12.1
Revenue Grade Accuracy:
ANSI C12.1
Monitoring
Breaker status
Open/close statusthru breaker

auxiliary contact
Tripped statusthru breaker bell
alarm contact
Unit healthashing status LED
when module is powered
Breaker must include auxiliary contact

and bell alarm contact accessory.
Communications
INCOM and Modbus RTU
communications
Shielded-twisted pair
communications
Daisy-chaining of multiple units
Web-based communications
available through a Power
Xpert Gateway
TX and RX communication
diagnostic LEDs
Contact Eaton for availability.

Metering Module
Control Power
The PM3 is powered directly from the
circuit breaker voltage for applications
480 Vac and below. External control
power is not required for these
applications. However, an auxiliary
24 Vdc external power input is
included for applications requiring
communications capability even when
the breaker circuit is de-energized.
Note: For 600V applications, external 24 Vdc
auxiliary power is required.
Product Selection
Table 27.4-103. PM3 Product Selection
Contact Eaton for Modbus RTU availability.

Breaker
Frame
Line
Voltage
Power
Supply
Communications
Catalog
Number
Series C, F-Frame
(225A Frame)
auxiliary power
208, 240,
480, 600
24 Vdc auxiliary
power required
Series G, J-Frame
(250A Frame)
auxiliary power
208, 240,
480, 600
24 Vdc auxiliary
power required
Series C, K-Frame
(400A Frame)
auxiliary power
required
208, 240,
480, 600
24 Vdc auxiliary
power required
Series G, L-Frame
(600A Frame)
auxiliary power
208, 240,
480, 600
24 Vdc auxiliary
power required
27.4-42
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
118
30 mA Ground Fault
(Earth Leakage) Modules
Clockwise from Left: JG, LG
MCCBs Shown with Ground
Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
General Description
Eaton offers a three- and four-pole
30 mA ground fault (earth leakage)
protection module for JG and LG
breakers. The module does not restrict
the use of other breaker accessories.
UL-listed modules are available for
JG and LG MCCBs. The JG and LG
modules are both bottom mounted
for circuits up to 160 and 250A (JG),
or 400 and 630A for the LG.
The module is completely self-contained
because the current sensor, relay and
power supply are located inside the
product. Current pickup settings are
selectable from 0.03 to 10A for all
IEC-rated modules and JG UL-listed
module, and 0.0330A for the LG
UL-listed modules. Time delays are
also selectable from instantaneous
to 1.0 second for 0.10A settings and
above. A current pickup setting of
0.03A defaults to an instantaneous
time setting regardless of the time
dials position. Two alarm contacts
come as standard: a 50% pretrip and
a 100% after trip, both based only on
earth leakage current levels.
Product Selection
Table 27.4-104. EG-Frame Ground Fault
Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted,
120480 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Amperes Poles Catalog
Number
125
125
3
4
ELEBN3125G
ELEBN4125G
Table 27.4-105. EG-Frame Earth Leakage
Modules, IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted,
230415 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Table 27.4-106. JG-Frame Ground Fault
120480 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Table 27.4-107. JG-Frame Earth Leakage
Modules, IEC (Bottom Mounted,
230415 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Table 27.4-108. LG-Frame Ground Fault
120480 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Table 27.4-109. LG-Frame Earth Leakage
Modules, IEC (Bottom Mounted,
230415 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Table 27.4-110. Dimensions for Assembled
Breaker and Earth Leakage Module
Figure 27.4-9. UL-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
Figure 27.4-10. IEC-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
Number
125
125
3
4
ELEBE3125G
ELEBE4125G
Number
150
150
3
4
ELJBN3150W
ELJBN4150W
250
250
3
4
ELJBN3250W
ELJBN4250W
Number
160
160
3
4
ELJBE3160W
ELJBE4160W
250
250
3
4
ELJBE3250W
ELJBE4250W
Number
400
400
3
4
ELLBN3400W
ELLBN4400W
600
600
3
4
ELLBN3600W
ELLBN4600W
Number
400
400
3
4
ELLBE3400W
ELLBE4400W
630
630
3
4
ELLBE3630W
ELLBE4630W
Frame Height Width Depth
Three-Pole
EG
JG
LG
10.25 (260.3)
11.25 (285.8)
15.38 (390.7)
3.00 (76.2)
4.13 (104.9)
5.48 (139.2)
2.98 (75.8)
3.57 (90.7)
4.06 (103.1)
Four-Pole
EG
JG
LG
10.25 (260.3)
11.25 (285.8)
15.38 (390.7)
4.00 (101.6)
5.50 (139.7)
7.23 (183.6)
2.98 (75.8)
3.57 (90.7)
4.06 (103.1)
27.4-43
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Modules
119
Current Limiting Circuit
Breaker Modules
General Overview
Power demand continues to grow in
new and existing facilities. To meet
increased demand, larger utility
supplies, spot networks and large
facility transformers are installed.
The increased capacity of the electrical
source provides increased fault
currents. In the past, 65 and 100 kA
overcurrent protective devices may
have suited the job. The new systems
require in excess of 100 kA short-
circuit protection. Eaton manufactures
non-fused current limiting modules
150 kA at 480 Vac. Unlike fused
current limiters with a one-time use,
the current limiter module provides
automatic reset of the module after
interruption. Reset the molded-case
circuit breaker to restore power to the
system without worry of nding the
correct replacement fuse.
General Description
The current limiting breaker modules
use a reverse loop stationary contact
arm. When high short-circuit current is
owing through the contacts of these
modules, the positions of the reverse
loop and moving contact arm induce
opposing magnetic elds. The result-
ing ux lines cause rapid contact blow-
apart under fault conditions, resulting
in very high interrupting capacities
and providing current limiting
characteristics. Current limiting
breaker modules, in combination
with Series G E-Frame breakers,
are available from 15 to 100A and
have an interrupting rating up to
100 kA at 600 Vac.
These breakers are most commonly
applied when very high fault levels
are available and with applications
where the current limiting capability
is used upstream of the nal load
to limit current to the load. Typical
loads include lighting and power
distribution, and motor controller
applications.
Features and Benets
The combination of the Series G
E-Frame current limiting breaker
or HMCP and the current limiter
module provides the following
system protection:
Overloads, by using inverse time
current tripping characteristics of
the molded-case circuit breaker
Low-level short circuits, by using
delay tripping characteristics of the
molded-case circuit breaker
High-level short circuits, by using
ultra-high-speed, blow-apart
contacts of the current limiting
module in series with the circuit
breaker contacts. The high-level
current limiting action is achieved
by the use of special design, blow-
apart contacts. The opening speed
of the contacts is amplied by the
repulsion force in the slot motor and
reverse loop stationary contact arm
to effectively separate the contacts
under high-level fault conditions
in less than one millisecond. The
rapid rise of arc voltage introduces
impedance into the system, thus
limiting the amount of the otherwise
available fault current
Product Selection
Table 27.4-111. EG
Two interphase barriers required on line end mounted limiter; (2) line end of limiter. Four interphase
barriers required on load end mounted limiter; (2) line end of breaker (2) load end of limiter.
Table 27.4-112. HMCP
Two interphase barriers required on line end mounted limiter; (2) line end of limiter. Four interphase
barriers required on load end mounted limiter; (2) line end of breaker (2) load end of limiter.
UL Listed
(NEMA/IEC Rated)
Base Molded-Case
Circuit Breaker
Breaker with
Line Side
Mounted
Current Limiter
Breaker with
Load Side
Mounted
Current Limiter
Line and Load
Terminations
Included
Interphase
Barrier Included
for Limiter
EGC3015FFG
EGC3016FFG
EGC3020FFG
EGC3015FFGQ01
EGC3016FFGQ01
EGC3020FFGQ01
EGC3015FFGQ02
EGC3016FFGQ02
EGC3020FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EGC3025FFG
EGC3030FFG
EGC3032FFG
EGC3025FFGQ01
EGC3030FFGQ01
EGC3032FFGQ01
EGC3025FFGQ02
EGC3030FFGQ02
EGC3032FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EGC3035FFG
EGC3040FFG
EGC3045FFG
EGC3035FFGQ01
EGC3040FFGQ01
EGC3045FFGQ01
EGC3035FFGQ02
EGC3040FFGQ02
EGC3045FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EGC3050FFG
EGC3060FFG
EGC3063FFG
EGC3050FFGQ01
EGC3060FFGQ01
EGC3063FFGQ01
EGC3050FFGQ02
EGC3060FFGQ02
EGC3063FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EGC3070FFG
EGC3080FFG
EGC3090FFG
EGC3100FFG
EGC3070FFGQ01
EGC3080FFGQ01
EGC3090FFGQ01
EGC3100FFGQ01
EGC3070FFGQ02
EGC3080FFGQ02
EGC3090FFGQ02
EGC3100FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
Motor
Circuit
Protector
Breaker with
Line Side Mounted
Current Limiter
Breaker with
Load Side Mounted
Current Limiter
Line and Load
Terminations
Included
Interphase
Barrier Included
for Limiter
HMCPE003A0C
HMCPE007C0C
HMCPE015E0C
HMCPE003A0CQ01
HMCPE007C0CQ01
HMCPE015E0CQ01
HMCPE003A0CQ02
HMCPE007C0CQ02
HMCPE015E0CQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
HMCPE030H1C
HMCPE050K2C
HMCPE070M2C
HMCPE030H1CQ01
HMCPE050K2CQ01
HMCPE070M2CQ01
HMCPE030H1CQ02
HMCPE050K2CQ02
HMCPE070M2CQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
HMCPE100R3C
HMCPE100T3C
HMCPE100R3CQ01
HMCPE100T3CQ01
HMCPE100R3CQ02
HMCPE100T3CQ02
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
27.4-44
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
120
Table 27.4-113. Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module
Figure 27.4-11. EG-Frame with Current Limiter Module
Frame Height Width Depth
EG
HMCP
9.66 (245.7)
9.66 (245.7)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
2.98 (75.8)
2.98 (75.8)
9.66
(245.4) 4.17
(105.9)
3.61
(91.7)
0.56
(14.2)
3.00
(76.2)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
0.50
(12.7)
3.20
(81.3)
4.17
(105.9)
2.75
(69.9)
0.09
(2.3)
0.78
(19.8)
0.41
(10.4)
27.4-45
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Selection DataCurrent Limiting Breakers
121
Current Limiting
Non-Fused Type
FCL-Frame 15100A,
LCL-Frame 125400A
FCL-Frame
FCL-Frame Breaker
Table 27.4-114. FCL Interrupting
Capacity Ratings

Note: On all three-phase delta, grounded B
phase applications, refer to Eaton.
Terminals
Breakers listed include line and load
terminals. Terminals are Underwriters
Laboratories listed for wire sizes and
types listed below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint compound.
To order optional aluminum terminals,
add sufx Z to breaker catalog
number listed.
Table 27.4-115. FCL Terminals
Breaker with built-in ground fault protection.

Table 27.4-117. Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Ratings
Table 27.4-118. SELTRONIC Electronic Trip
Unit Rating Plug
Breaker with built-in ground fault protection.

LCL-Frame
LCL-Frame Breaker
Listed with Underwriters Laboratories
Except as Noted
Type LCL breakers are not dened in
Federal Specications W-C-375-b.
Table 27.4-119. LCL Interrupting
Capacity Ratings

Terminals
Two terminals are required per pole.
Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories
listed for wire type and range listed
below. When used with aluminum
cable, use joint compound.
Table 27.4-120. LCL Terminals
Volts AC
(50/60 Hz)
Trip
Type
(Symmetrical Amperes)
240
480
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
200,000
150,000
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
Standard Pressure Terminals
100 Al/Cu #141/0
Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
50
100
Al/Cu
Al/Cu
#14#4
#44/0
Frame Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth
FCL 2, 3 4.13
(104.8)
8.75
(222.3)
3.50
(88.9)
LCL, LCLG
2, 3 8.25
(209.6)
16.00
(406.4)
4.00
(101.6)
Frame Ratings
FCL 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50,
60, 70, 80, 90, 100
Frame Ratings
LCL, LCLG
125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250,

275, 300, 350, 400
Volts AC
(50/60 Hz)
Trip
Type
(Symmetrical Amperes)
240
480
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
100,000
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Terminal
Catalog
Number
Standard Copper Pressure Terminals
225
400
(1) #6350 kcmil Cu
(1) #4250 kcmil Cu,
plus
(1) 3/0600 kcmil Cu
T225LA
T401LA
225 (1) #6350 kcmil Cu, or
(1) #4350 kcmil Al
TA225LA1
400 (1) #4250 kcmil Al/Cu,
plus
(1) 3/0600 kcmil Al/Cu
TA400LA1
27.4-46
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
122
Current LimitingFused Type
FB TRIPAC 15100A,
LA TRI-PAC 70400A
FB TRI-PAC
FB TRI-PAC Breaker
Except as Noted
FB TRI-PAC breakers meet the
requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a
and 26a circuit breakers as dened
in Federal Specication W-C-375b.
Underwriters Laboratories Listed
600 Vac maximum: 200,000A
symmetrical.
Based on NEMA Test Procedures
250 Vdc maximum: 100,000A.
Terminals
Breakers listed include line and load
terminals. Terminals are Underwriters
Laboratories listed for wire sizes and
types listed below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint compound.
To order optional aluminum terminals,
add sufx Z to breaker catalog
number listed.
Table 27.4-121. FB TRI-PAC Terminals
Table 27.4-123. Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Ratings
LA TRI-PAC
LA TRI-PAC Breaker
Except as Noted
LA TRI-PAC breakers meet the
requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a
and 26a circuit breakers as dened
in Federal Specication W-C-375b.
symmetrical.
B phase applications, refer to Eaton.
Terminals
listed for wire size and type listed below.
When used with aluminum conductors,
use joint compound. To order optional
aluminum terminals, add sufx Z to
complete breaker catalog number.
Table 27.4-124. LA TRI-PAC Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
Standard Pressure Terminals
100 Al/Cu (1) #141/0
50
100
Al/Cu
Al/Cu
(1) #14#4
(1) #44/0
Frame Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth
FB 2, 3 4.13
(104.8)
8.75
(222.3)
3.50
(88.9)
LA 2, 3 8.13
(206.4)
16.00
(406.4)
7.75
(196.9)
Frame Ratings
FB TRI-PAC 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 90, 100
LA TRI-PAC 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,
225, 250, 300, 350, 400
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Terminal
Catalog
Number
225
225
(1) #6350 kcmil Cu
(1) #6250 kcmil Cu
T225LA
T225LBF
400 (1) #4250 kcmil Cu,
plus
(1) 3/0600 kcmil Cu
T401LA
225 (1) #6350 kcmil Cu, or
(1) #4350 kcmil Al/Cu
TA225LA1
400 (1) #4250 kcmil Al/Cu,
plus
(1) 3/0600 kcmil Al/Cu
TA400LA1
27.4-47
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
123
Current LimitingFused Type
NB TRI-PAC 300800A,
PB TRI-PAC 6001600A
NB TRI-PAC
NB TRI-PAC Breaker
Except as Noted
NB TRI-PAC breakers meet the
requirements for Class 16b, 17a and
26a circuit breakers as dened in
Federal Specication W-C-375b.
symmetrical.
Terminals
listed for wire size and type listed below.
When used with aluminum conductors,
use joint compound. To order optional
aluminum terminals, add sufx Z to
complete breaker catalog number.
Table 27.4-125. NB TRI-PAC Terminals
Table 27.4-127. Thermal-Magnetic Trip
Ratings
PB TRI-PAC
PB TRI-PAC Breaker
Except as Noted
PB TRI-PAC breakers meet the
requirements for Class 17a and 26a
circuit breakers as dened in Federal
Specication W-C-375b.
symmetrical.
B phase applications, refer to Eaton.
Bus Bar Connectors
T Connector for Cu/Al Bus
Two required per pole. For rear bus
connection. Accepts up to four bus
bolts. May be rotated 90.
T Connector for Cu/Al Bus
Cable Connector (Optional)
For T Connector. Accepts four
600 kcmil copper cables.
Optional Cable Connector
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Terminal
Catalog
Number
350
700
800
1 #1600 kcmil Cu
2 2/0500 kcmil Cu
3 3/0500 kcmil Cu
T350NB
T700NB1
T1000NB1
700
800
800
2 #1500 kcmil Al/Cu
3 3/0400 kcmil Al/Cu
3 500750 kcmil Al/Cu
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1201NB1
Frame Number
of Poles
Width Height Depth
NB 2, 3 8.25
(209.6)
22.00
(558.8)
5.50
(139.7)
PB 2, 3 12.06
(306.4)
22.13
(562.0)
9.06
(230.2)
Frame Ratings
NB TRI-PAC 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800
PB TRI-PAC 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200,
1400, 1600
27.4-48
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Selection DataCircuit Breaker Enclosures
124
NEMA 1 General Purpose
Surface or Flush Mounting
151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
NEMA 1
Eatons NEMA 1 enclosed breakers are
designed for indoor use in commercial
buildings, apartment buildings and
other areas where a general purpose
enclosure is applicable. The breaker
is front operable and is capable of
being padlocked in the OFF position.
(Padlocking not available on enclosures
for QUICKLAG breakers.) Ratings
through 1200A are listed with
Underwriters Laboratories as suitable
for service entrance application. Both
surface and ush mounted enclosures
are available.
UL File Number E7819
CSA File Number LR84319
NEMA 3R Rainproof
Surface Mounting
Interchangeable Hubs (through 400A)
151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
NEMA 3R
This general purpose outdoor service
center employs a circuit breaker inside
a weatherproof sheet steel enclosure
to serve as a main disconnect and
protective device for feeder circuits.
The operating handle can be padlocked
in the OFF position, and is interlocked
to prevent the door from opening when
the breaker is ON. Ratings through
1200A are listed by Underwriters
Laboratories as suitable for service
entrance application.
NEMA 4/4X, 5 Water and Dustproof
Stainless SteelType 304,
Surface Mounting
151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
NEMA 4/4X, 5
This enclosure meets NEMA 4/4X and
5 requirements for water and dustproof
applications and has no knockouts or
other openings. It is particularly well
suited for use in dairies, borax mines,
breweries, paper mills and other process
industries. The operating handle can
be padlocked in the OFF position, and
is interlocked to prevent the door from
opening when the breaker is ON. Ratings
through 1200A are Underwriters
Laboratories listed as suitable for
service entrance application.
NEMA 12 Dustproof
Surface Mounting
No Knockouts or Other Openings
151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
NEMA 12 Dustproof
The Eaton Type 12 enclosure is
designed in line with specications
for special industry application where
unusually severe conditions involving
oil, coolant, dust and other foreign
materials exist in the operating
atmosphere. The handle padlocks
in the OFF position and the cover is
interlocked with the handle mechanism
to prevent opening the cover with the
circuit breaker in the ON position.
Ratings through 1200A are listed by
Underwriters Laboratories as suitable
for service entrance application.
A NEMA 12 semi-dust-tight design
that includes knockouts is available.
These units are rated 15400A, 600 Vac,
500 Vdc.
NEMA 7/9 Hazardous Location
Cast Aluminum, Explosion-Proof
Surface Mounting
151200A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc
NEMA 7/9 Hazardous Location
Hazardous location, Class I, Groups B,
C, D, Divisions 1, 2; Class II, Groups E,
F, G, Divisions 1, 2. This special service
cast aluminum enclosure is supplied
with a wide, machined anged cover to
prevent igniting outside atmospheres
by arcing from inside the enclosure.
Front operable, the handle padlocks
in the OFF position. Enclosures rated
600A and above have lift-off hinges for
ease of assembly.
Note: XFDN050 is not Group B compliant.
UL File Number E84577 Enclosed
Circuit Breakers
Seismic Qualication
27.4-49
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
125
To determine enclosed circuit breaker dimensions, rst
select the desired frame size along with the desired NEMA
class of enclosure (from Table 27.4-128). This will determine
the enclosure catalog number.
Then, use Tables 27.4-132 through 27.4-138 to determine
appropriate dimensions for that selected catalog number.
Table 27.4-128. Enclosure Only Catalog Numbers Selection Guide
Suitable for use with single-pole breaker base mounting plate kit.
QCCBP required.
Maximum wire size: 4/0.
Three-pole only.
Table 27.4-128. Enclosure Only Catalog Numbers
Selection Guide (Continued)
Three- or four-pole.
65 kAIC at 480 Vac maximum.
Four-pole only.
Requires additional adapter plate.

Breaker
Frame
Breaker
Ampere
Range
Enclosure
NEMA
Class
Catalog
Number
Series C Breakers
GC, GHC, GD
two- and three-pole only
GHCGFEP
single-pole only
15100 1 surface
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
SGDN100
RGDN100
JGDN100
DGDN100
WGDN100
EHD, FD, FDB,
HFD, FDC
15100 1 surface
1 ush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
SFDN100
FFDN100
RFDN100
JFDN100
DFDN100
WFDN100
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC,
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC
(F Frame)
15225 1 surface
1 ush
3R
SEF3
FEF3
REF3
EHD, FD, FDB

HFD, FDC
1550
60225
7/9 cast alum.

7/9 cast alum.
XFDN050B
XFDN225B
FD, FDB, HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
125225 1 surface
1 ush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
SFDN225
FFDN225
RFDN225
JFDN225
DFDN225
WFDN225
JDB, JD, HJD, JDC 100250 1 surface
1 ush
3R
SJJ3
FJJ3
RJJ3
JD, JDB, HJD, JDC 125250 1 surface

1 ush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
7/9 cast alum.
SJDN250
FJDN250
RJDN250
JJDN250
DJDN250
WJDN250
XJDN250B
KD, KDB, HKD, KDC, DK 125400 1 surface
1 ush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
7/9 cast alum.
SKDN400
FKDN400
RKDN400
JKDN400
DKDN400
WKDN400
XKDN400B
LD, LDB, HLD 300600 1 surface
3R
12
4/4X, 5 st. steel
SLDN600
RLDN600
JLDN600
WLDN600
LD, LDB, HLD,
MDL, HMDL
300600
400800
7/9 cast alum. XMCN800B
MDL, HMDL, ND,
HND
4001200 1 surface
3R
12
4/4X, 5 st. steel
SNDN1200
RNDN1200
JNDN1200
WNDN1200
ND, HND 4001200 7/9 cast alum. XNDN1200B
Breaker
Frame
Breaker
Ampere
Range
Enclosure
NEMA
Class
Catalog
Number
Series G Breakers
EGB, EGE, EGS,
EGH, EGC
15225 1 surface
1 ush
3R
3R
SEF3
FEF3
REF3
REG4
JGE, JGS, JGH,

JGC, JGU
100250 1 surface
1 ush
3R
3R
SJJ3
FJJ3
RJJ3
RJG4
LGE, LGS, LGH 250600 1 surface

3R
12
4/4X, 5 st. steel
SLG630
RLG630
JLG630
WLG630
Earth Leakage Breakers

LGE, LGS, LGH used
with ELLBN
250600 1 surface
3R
12
4/4X, 5 st. steel
SLG630E
RLG630E
JLG630E
WLG630E
TRI-PAC Breakers
FB-P 15100 3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
RFDN150
JFDN150
DFDN150
WFDN150
LA-P
70400 1 surface
3R
12
4/4X
SNDN1200
RNDN1200
JNDN1200
WNDN1200
NB-P 500800 12
4/4X, 5 st. steel
JNDPN800
WNDPN800
27.4-50
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
126
Table 27.4-129. Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable
For use with RFDN100, SFDN100, SEF3, FEF3, REF3 and REG4
enclosures with breakers 100A and less.
For use with SJJ3, FJJ3, RJJ3 and RJG4 enclosures only.
Table 27.4-130. Raintight HubsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 27.4-131. Breather and Drain, Hazardous Enclosures
Maximum
Enclosure
Rating (Amperes)
Main Lug Size
Cu/Al
Ground Lug Size
Cu/Al
Catalog
Number
100 (1) 141/0 (1) 142 DH100NK
100 (all others) (1) 141/0 (1) 141/0 INK100

250 (1) 4350 kcmil (1) 4300 kcmil INK250
(1) 4350 kcmil (1) 4300 kcmil INK250G
400 (1) 4750 kcmil or

(2) 1/0250 kcmil
(1) 4300 kcmil INK400
600 (2) 250500 kcmil (1) 4300 kcmil INK600
1200 (3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or
(4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil
(1) #6250 kcmil INK1200
All rainproof enclosures
30400A are shipped with
plate over cutout. Hubs are
not supplied with screws
on 30400A enclosures.
Use screws from plate.
Hub Diameter Catalog
Number
Small Hubs
For use with
RGDN and RFDN
1.00 (25.4)
1.25 (31.8)
1.50 (38.1)
2.00 (50.8)
DS100H1
DS125H1
DS150H1
DS200H1
Large Hubs
For use with
RJDN. RKDN
has two cutouts
2.00 (50.8)
2.50 (63.5)
3.00 (76.2)
DS200H2
DS250H2
DS300H2
Required if using Type DS hubs
on RJDN and RKDN enclosures DS900AK
Description Compliance Conduit
Opening
Catalog
Number
A universal breather/drain
tting is installed in the top
of an enclosure to provide
ventilation to minimize
condensation and in the
bottom to allow drainage
of accumulated condensa-
tion while maintaining
explosion-proof integrity.
Type BD:
NEMA 7Class I,
Groups C, D;
Class I, Zone 1,
Group IIB
NEMA 9Class II,
Groups F, G
0.50 (12.7) XPBD2
Type DBB:
NEMA 7Class I,
Groups B,
C, D; Class I, Zone 1,
Group IIB
+ Hydrogen
NEMA 9Class II,
Groups E, F, G
0.50 (12.7) XPDBB50
27.4-51
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Technical Data and SpecicationsCircuit Breaker Enclosures
127
NEMA 1, 12, 12K, 3R
Note: Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
Table 27.4-132. NEMA 1 Surface Mounted (See Figure 27.4-12)
Total width, including door clip is 9.95 inches (252.7 mm).
Single centered mounting hole provided.
Maximum wire size: 500 kcmil.
For earth leakage applications. Includes an opening so that the settings are accessible without removing the cover.
Table 27.4-133. NEMA 1 Flush Mounted (See Figure 27.4-13)

Figure 27.4-12. NEMA 1 Surface Mounted Figure 27.4-13. NEMA 1 Flush Mounted
Catalog
Number
Maximum
Amperes
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Approximate Weight
in Lbs (kg)
A B C D E F
SGDN100
SFDN100
SEF3
SFDN225
SJJ3
SJDN250
100
100
225
225
250
250
17.50 (444.5)
19.13 (485.9)
23.45 (595.6)
23.25 (590.6)
34.69 (881.1)
34.70 (881.4)
8.56 (217.4)
9.13 (231.9)
8.38 (212.9)
8.56 (217.4)
10.90 (276.9)
10.92 (277.4)
6.28 (159.5)
5.20 (132.1)
6.51 (165.4)
6.28 (159.5)
7.49 (190.2)
7.20 (182.9)
13.03 (331.0)
17.00 (431.8)
18.88 (479.6)
18.75 (476.3)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
1.20 (30.5)
N/A
1.13 (28.7)
1.20 (30.5)
1.95 (49.5)
1.88 (47.8)
17.19 (436.6)
18.81 (477.8)
23.00 (584.2)
22.94 (582.7)
34.22 (869.2)
34.39 (873.5)
12 (5)
13 (6)
15 (7)
15 (7)
27 (12)
31 (14)
SKDN400
SLG630
SLG630E
SLDN600
SNDN1200
400
600
600
600
1200
38.81 (985.8)
51.06 (1296.9)
51.06 (1296.9)
45.88 (1165.4)
61.22 (1555.0)
11.06 (280.9)
21.87 (555.5)
21.87 (555.5)
14.31 (363.5)
21.44 (544.6)
10.94 (277.9)
9.96 (253.0)
9.96 (253.0)
12.38 (314.5)
15.41 (391.4)
34.00 (863.6)
51.63 (1311.5)
51.63 (1311.5)
46.56 (1182.6)
61.84 (1570.7)
9.28 (235.7)
1.94 (49.3)
1.94 (49.3)
1.91 (48.5)
1.97 (50.0)
38.50 (977.9)
50.13 (1273.3)
50.13 (1273.3)
45.56 (1157.2)
60.91 (1547.1)
53 (24)
90 (41)
90 (41)
81 (37)
178 (81)
Catalog
Number
Maximum
Amperes
in Lbs (kg)
A B C D E F
FFDN100
FEF3
FFDN225
FJJ3
FJDN250
FKDN400
100
225
225
250
250
400
18.81 (477.8)
24.50 (622.3)
24.56 (623.8)
36.00 (914.4)
36.02 (914.9)
40.13 (1019.3)
9.72 (246.9)
9.75 (247.7)
9.72 (246.9)
12.25 (311.2)
12.23 (310.6)
12.38 (314.5)
6.28 (159.5)
6.51 (165.4)
6.28 (159.5)
7.49 (190.2)
7.20 (182.9)
10.94 (277.9)
13.03 (331.0)
18.88 (479.6)
18.75 (476.3)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
34.00 (863.6)
1.86 (47.2)
1.82 (46.2)
1.86 (47.2)
2.63 (66.8)
1.88 (47.8)
2.94 (74.7)
18.50 (469.9)
23.00 (584.2)
24.25 (616.0)
34.22 (869.2)
35.70 (906.8)
39.81 (1011.2)
12 (5)
15 (7)
15 (7)
27 (12)
32 (15)
53 (24)
E
D A
C B
F
D
E
B C
A
27.4-52
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
128
Table 27.4-134. NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof (See Figure 27.4-14)
For earth leakage applications.

Table 27.4-135. NEMA 3R Rainproof (See Figure 27.4-15)
Single centered mounting hole provided on RFDN100, Series B.
For earth leakage applications.

Figure 27.4-14. NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof Figure 27.4-15. NEMA 3R Rainproof
Catalog
Number
Maximum
Amperes
in Lbs (kg)
A B C D E
JGDN100
JFDN100
JFDN225
100
100
225
19.91 (505.7)
19.91 (505.7)
25.66 (651.8)
9.16 (232.7)
9.16 (232.7)
9.16 (232.7)
9.31 (236.5)
9.31 (236.5)
9.31 (236.5)
18.53 (470.7)
18.53 (470.7)
24.28 (616.7)
1.70 (43.2)
1.70 (43.2)
1.70 (43.2)
16 (7)
19 (9)
19 (9)
JJDN250
JKDN400
JLG630
250
400
600
37.53 (953.3)
41.69 (1058.9)
53.37 (1355.6)
11.88 (301.8)
12.31 (312.7)
23.06 (585.7)
10.22 (259.6)
14.06 (357.1)
14.10 (358.1)
35.77 (908.6)
39.94 (1014.5)
51.63 (1311.4)
1.94 (49.3)
1.97 (50.0)
1.94 (49.3)
37 (17)
58 (26)
94 (43)
JLG630E
JLDN600
JNDPN800
600
600
800
53.37 (1355.6)
48.31 (1227.1)
63.59 (1615.2)
23.06 (585.7)
15.56 (395.2)
22.63 (574.8)
14.10 (358.1)
15.50 (393.7)
17.63 (447.8)
51.63 (1311.4)
46.56 (1182.6)
1.94 (49.3)
1.92 (48.8)
94 (43)
84 (38)
110 (50)
JNDN1200
DGDN100
DFDN100
1200
100
100
63.59 (1615.2)
19.91 (505.7)
19.91 (505.7)
22.63 (574.8)
9.16 (232.7)
9.16 (232.7)
17.63 (447.8)
9.31 (236.5)
9.31 (236.5)
61.84 (1570.7)
1.97 (50.0)
175 (80)
16 (7)
19 (9)
DFDN100E
DFDN225
DJDN250
DKDN400
100
225
250
400
25.66 (651.8)
25.66 (651.8)
37.53 (953.3)
41.69 (1058.9)
9.16 (232.7)
9.16 (232.7)
11.88 (301.8)
12.31 (312.7)
9.31 (236.5)
9.31 (236.5)
10.22 (259.6)
14.06 (357.1)
19 (9)
19 (9)
37 (17)
58 (26)
Catalog
Number
Maximum
Amperes
in Lbs (kg)
A B C D E
RGDN100
RFDN100
REF3
REG4
RFDN225
100
100
225
125
225
19.91 (505.7)
19.91 (505.7)
25.65 (651.5)
25.65 (651.5)
25.66 (651.8)
9.16 (232.7)
9.19 (232.7)
11.30 (287.0)
11.30 (287.0)
9.16 (232.7)
9.31 (236.5)
9.31 (236.5)
10.93 (277.6)
10.93 (277.6)
9.31 (236.5)
18.53 (470.7)
18.53 (470.7)
24.26 (616.2)
24.26 (616.2)
24.28 (616.7)
1.70 (43.2)
1.70 (43.2)
1.73 (43.9)
1.73 (43.9)
1.70 (43.2)
16 (7)
19 (9)
22 (10)
22 (10)
19 (9)
RJJ3
RJG4
RJDN250
RKDN400
RLG630
250
250
250
400
600
37.47 (951.7)
37.47 (951.7)
37.50 (952.5)
41.69 (1058.9)
53.37 (1355.6)
12.16 (308.9)
12.16 (308.9)
11.88 (301.8)
12.31 (312.7)
23.06 (585.7)
11.29 (286.8)
11.29 (286.8)
10.22 (259.6)
14.06 (357.1)
14.10 (358.1)
35.73 (907.5)
35.73 (907.5)
35.77 (908.6)
39.94 (1014.5)
51.63 (1311.4)
1.84 (46.7)
1.84 (46.7)
1.94 (49.3)
1.97 (50.0)
1.94 (49.3)
32 (15)
32 (15)
37 (17)
58 (26)
94 (43)
RLG630E
RLDN600
RNDN1200
600
600
1200
53.37 (1355.6)
48.31 (1227.1)
63.59 (1615.2)
23.06 (585.7)
15.56 (395.2)
22.63 (574.8)
14.10 (358.1)
15.50 (393.7)
17.63 (447.8)
51.63 (1311.4)
46.56 (1182.6)
61.84 (1570.7)
1.94 (49.3)
1.92 (48.8)
1.97 (50.0)
94 (43)
84 (38)
175 (80)
OFF OFF
EE
C
A
D
B
C
ON ON
F OFF
EE
A
D
B
27.4-53
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
129
Table 27.4-137. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals15250ADimensions in Inches (mm)
Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 27.4-139 for breaker weights.

Figure 27.4-17. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather-Resistant SealsDual 3 and 4 Point Mounting Available as Standard on F-Frame 100A and Below
Table 27.4-136. NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless SteelDimensions in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Approximate
Weight Lbs (kg)
Maximum
Amperes
Dimensions
A B C D E
WGDN100 16 (7) 100 19.91
(505.6)
8.84
(224.6)
9.31
(236.6)
18.53
(470.7)
1.70
(43.3)
WFDN100 16 (7) 100 19.91
(505.6)
8.84
(224.6)
9.31
(236.6)
18.53
(470.7)
1.70
(43.3)
WFDN150 20 (9) 150 25.66
(651.7)
8.84
(224.6)
9.31
(236.6)
24.28
(616.7)
1.70
(43.3)
WFDN225 20 (9) 225 25.66
(651.7)
8.84
(224.6)
9.31
(236.6)
24.28
(616.7)
1.70
(43.3)
WJDN250 39 (18) 250 37.50
(952.5)
11.56
(293.7)
10.22
(259.6)
35.77
(908.5)
1.94
(49.2)
Figure 27.4-16. NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless Steel
WKDN400 60 (27) 400 41.69
(1058.9)
11.75
(298.4)
14.06
(357.2)
39.94
(1014.4)
1.97
(50.0)
WLDN600 88 (40) 600 48.31
(1227.2)
14.91
(378.6)
15.50
(393.7)
46.56
(1182.7)
1.92
(48.8)
WLG630 39 (18) 600 37.50
(952.5)
11.56
(293.7)
10.22
(259.6)
35.77
(908.5)
1.94
(49.2)
WNDN1200 185 (84) 1200 63.59
(1615.3)
22.00
(558.8)
17.63
(447.7)
61.84
(1570.8)
1.97
(50.0)
E
B
D
A ON
OFF
C
Catalog
Number
Breaker
Size
Amperes
Number
of
Outlets
Dimensions Approximate
Weight
Mounting Inside Outside K

Dim
Standard
Conduit
Size
A B J C D E F G H Lbs kg
XFDN050B 1550 4 5.50
(139.7)
13.13
(333.5)
14.13
(358.9)
6.13
(155.7)
10.75
(273.1)
5.25
(133.4)
10.63
(270.0)
15.25
(387.4)
8.88
(225.6)
2.00
(50.8)
1.50
(38.1)
38 17.3
XFDN100B
60100 4 6.00
(152.4)
18.00
(457.2)
19.00
(482.6)
6.50
(165.1)
16.00
(406.4)
5.50
(139.7)
11.00
(279.4)
20.50
(520.7)
9.00
(228.6)
2.31
(58.7)
2.00
(50.8)
57 25.9
XFDN225B
125225 4 10.25
(260.4)
22.63
(574.8)
11.38
(289.1)
20.00
(508.0)
6.38
(162.1)
16.38
(416.1)
25.13
(638.3)
9.63
(244.6)
3.50
(88.9)
2.50
(63.5)
104 47.2
XJDN225B 70225 4 8.50
(215.9)
27.13
(689.1)
11.25
(285.8)
29.88
(759.0)
7.38
(187.5)
16.00
(406.4)
29.50
(749.3)
12.31
(312.7)
4.00
(101.6)
3.00
(76.2)
145 65.8
XJDN250B 250 4 9.50
(241.3)
27.25
(692.2)
11.25
(285.8)
29.88
(759.0)
8.06
(204.7)
16.38
(416.1)
35.00
(889.0)
12.38
(314.5)
4.19
(106.4)
4.00
(101.6)
170 77.2
(2) 1/2-inch
(12.7 mm)
NPT
27.4-54
September 2011
Sheet 27
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
130
Table 27.4-138. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather-Resistant Seals4001200ADimensions in Inches (mm)
Power cables must enter and leave from opposite ends (through-feed).
Figure 27.4-18. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather-Resistant Seals
Table 27.4-140. Circuit Breaker Enclosure Interpretation Data
N in this position indicates enclosure complies with NEC gutter space requirement.
XFDN050 is not Group B compliant.

Catalog
Number
Breaker
Size
Amperes
Overall
Enclosure
Enclosure
Mounting
Conduit Standard
Conduit
A B C E F H I Size Location Lbs kg
XKDN400B
400 35.00
(889.0)
16.38
(416.1)
12.63
(320.8)
9.50
(241.3)
27.25
(692.2)
3.00
(76.2)
4.19
(106.4)
4.00
(101.6)
1, 3 and 6, 8 170 77
XLDN600B 600 37.88
(962.2)
23.88
(606.6)
14.25
(362.0)
16.00
(406.4)
45.38
(1152.7)
4.00
(101.6)
5.00
(127.0)
4.00
(101.6)
1, 3 and 6, 8 419 191
XKCN800B 800 47.88
(1216.2)
13.63
(346.2)
12.81
(325.4)
16.13
(409.7)
40.75
(1035.1)
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
1, 3 and 6, 8 228 104
XNDN1200B
1200 64.00
(1625.6)
26.00
(660.4)
21.38
(543.1)
27.56
(700.0)
38.63
(981.2)
6.50
(165.1)
4.38
(111.3)
4.00
(101.6)
1, 3 and 6, 8 567 257
Table 27.4-139. Typical Breaker Weights
Frame Lbs kg
G
E
F
2
3
5
0.9
1.4
2.3
J
K
L
12
13
20
5.4
5.9
9.1
M
N
30
45
13.6
20.4
1st Field
Enclosure
Type
2nd Field
Breaker
Family
3rd Field
Maximum
Ampacity
NEMA
Enclosure
Type
Denitions
NEMA
Standard
NEMA 1 Flush F
Surface S
NEMA 3R R
NEMA 12 J
NEMA 12K D
NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless W
NEMA 7/9 Cast Al. X
G-Frame
F-Frame
J-Frame
K-Frame
L-Frame
M-Frame
N-Frame
50
100
150
225
250
400
600
1200
1 Type 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of
protection against contact with the enclosed equipment.
3R Type 3R enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree
of protection against falling rain, sleet and external ice formation.
12 Type 12 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily
to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt
and dripping noncorrosive liquids.
12K Type 12K enclosures with knockouts are intended for indoor use
primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt
and dripping noncorrosive liquids other than at knockouts.
4/4X Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily
to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain,
splashing water, and hose-directed water, and corrosion; and will
be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure.
5 Type 5 enclosures are used for indoor use primarily to provide a
degree of protection against dust and falling dirt.
7 Type 7 enclosures are for use indoors in locations classied
as Class I, Groups B, C or D as dened in the National Electrical Code.
9 Type 9 enclosures are for use in indoor locations classied as

Class II, Groups E, F or G as dened in the National Electrical Code.
Conduit Position No.
1 2 3
G-MTG.
Holes (4)
F
-
M
T
G
.
A
8 7 6
I
D
C
J B
H H
E-MT
1st
Field
R FD N
150
2nd
Field
3rd
Field
NEMA
Enclosure
Breaker
Frame
NEMA
Enclosure


September 2011

Contents

Switching DevicesLow Voltage
28.0-1

Sheet

28

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

001

S
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g

D
e
v
i
c
e
s
L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e


General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-2

General-Duty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-3

Heavy-Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-3

Heavy-DutySolar Photovoltaic Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-3

Six-Pole Motor Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-4

Heavy-Duty Double-Throw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-4

Quick-Connect Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-5

Enclosed Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-5

EnviroLine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-5

NEMA 7/9Hazardous Location Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-6

Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-7

Elevator Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-7

Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-10

Catalog Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-11

K-Series Switch Design Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-13

Accessories, Hubs, Lug Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-14

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-17

Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-25

Short-Circuit Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-27

Typical Fuse Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-28

Flex Center Factory Modications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.0-30
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty
Safety Switch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Elevator Control Switch

. . . . . . . . . . . .


Quick-Connect Double-Throw

. . . . . . .

Quick-Connect Double-Throw Safety Switches
28.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

28

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Safety Switches

General Description

002

Safety Switches

Safety switches have a number of
applications from service entrance to
branch circuit protection. They are also
horsepower rated for use as motor
circuit switches. The Application Guide

Table 28.0-1

, below, summarizes major
differences and similarities between
the heavy-duty and general-duty
type of Eatons safety switches.
Individual catalog pages and selection
tables provide more specic informa-
tion as to number of poles, voltage,
specications and horsepower ratings.

K-Series Switch Design

Note:

K-Series design available where the
letter K appears in the catalog number.

The efcient K-Series design uses
double-break, rotary blade action for
high performance and reliability. Here
are some of the characteristics of the
K-Series type of switch:

High visibility handle and nameplate
for indication of switch position
ON or OFF

Clear line terminal shields
on heavy-duty switches only

Unique Control Pole option
allows the addition of a late-make/
early-break, 15A switched pole for
disconnecting control power circuits

Generous wiring roommeeting or
exceeding NEC

wire bending space

Built-in fuse pullers in NEMA

4X
and 12 enclosed switches
through 200A

Side-hinged NEMA 3R enclosure
doors

Tangential knockouts in heavy-
duty NEMA 1 and 3R enclosures
through 200A

Type 304 or 316 stainless steel
enclosures for UL

NEMA 4X appli-
cationsdust-tight, watertight and
corrosion-resistant

NEMA 12 enclosures for 30800A
switches also rated for NEMA 3R
use when a factory provided drain
hole is opened

Rated for 60C/75C wire connection

Table 28.0-1. Safety Switch Application GuideSee Catalog Selection Tables for Specic Ratings

General-Duty Heavy-Duty EnviroLine Double-Throw Rotary

Application/
Features
General-Duty
Safety Switches
Heavy-Duty
Safety Switches

Type of facility Residential, commercial, light industrial Commercial, institutional, industrial
Maximum voltages 240 Vac250 Vdc in larger sizes 600 Vac250 Vdc and 600 Vdc
Short-circuit rating for
non-fused switches
10,000 rms symmetrical amperes 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes. Higher combination ratings
available with upstream Eaton molded-case circuit breakers
and fuses.
Short-circuit rating with
standard fuse clips
With Class H fuse clips10,000 rms
symmetrical amperes
Switches with Class H Fuse Clips10,000 rms amperes
8001200A switches with Class L fusing200,000 rms
Short-circuit rating with
fuse options
Class R fuse adaptation and 400600A switches with
T or J fuse adaptation100,000 rms amperes
Switches with Class R or Class J fusing and 200800A
switches with Class T fuse adaptation200,000A at 480V
and 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 600V
Ampere sizes 30, 60, 100, 200, 400, 600 30, 60, 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1200
Maximum horsepower ratings 200 hp at 240 Vac 250 hp at 240V, 500 hp at 480 and 600 Vac
UL (NEMA) enclosure types Type 1general purpose indoor use
Type 3Rrainproof and sleet-resistant
Type 1 indoor, 3R outdoor
Type 4 watertight and dust-tight
Type 4X watertight, dust-tight and corrosion-resistant
Type 12 indoor falling dust, dirt and liquids
Type 12/3R convertible to outdoor use
Type 7/9 hazardous (classied) locations
Terminals Box lug (screw pressure) for Al/Cu wire Box lug (screw pressure) for Al/Cu wire
Electrical interlock
snap-switch type
Field-installed kit, 200600A sizes Field- or factory-installed for all sizes
Control pole interlock Field-installed kit, 400600A sizes Field-installed for K-Series switches
Fuse pullers Not available Standard in Type 4X and 12 enclosed switches through 200A
eld-installed for all other 30200A switches


28.0-3

September 2011


Sheet

28

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Safety Switches

General DescriptionSelection Guide

003

General-Duty

General-Duty (Plug Fuse)
General-Duty (Cartridge Fuse)

For residential and commercial
applications. Suitable for light-duty
motor circuits and service entrance.

240 Vac

30600A

For short-circuit ratings, see
Technical Data

applications unless otherwise noted

Fusible and non-fusible switches
are 100% load break and load
make rated

The continuous load current of
fusible switches is not to exceed
80% of the rating of fuses employed
in other than motor circuits. Non-
fusible switches are 100% fully rated

200600A features K-Series design

Horsepower rated

Ample wire bending space provides
for easier installation

With Class R fuses, switches may be
used on systems capable of delivering
100,000A rms symmetrical

Note:

Plug fuse switches are not service
entrance rated.

Heavy-Duty

Heavy-Duty

For heavy commercial and industrial
applications where reliable performance
and service continuity are critical.

600 Vac, 600 Vdc maximum

301200A

Technical Data

Horsepower rated

make rated



Visible double break rotary blade
mechanism. Two points of contact
provide a positive open and close,
easier operation, and also help to
prevent contact burning for longer
contact life

Triple padlocking capability.
Personnel safety feature because
the large hasp can accommodate
up to three

3/8-inch (9.5 mm) shank
locks. Cabinet

door can be further
padlocked at the top and bottom

Interlocking mechanism. Door
cannot be opened when the handle
is in the ON position. Built-in
defeater mechanism provides for
user access when necessary

De-ionizing arc chutes. Arc chutes
conne and suppress the arcs
produced by contacts under load

Heavy-DutySolar
Photovoltaic Switch

Heavy-DutySolar Photovoltaic Switch

Marked as suitable for NEC 690 PV
applications up to 600 Vdc.

UL 98 listed

All switches are single-pole and
suitable for switching one circuit

Clear polycarbonate deadfront to
guard against accidental contact
with live parts

Suitable for positive and negative
grounded systems100% load
break rated with current owing in
either direction

NEC 690.17compliant labeling
warning that the switch terminals
may be energized in the open
position

NEC 690.14.(C) two required PV
System Disconnect labels included

Isolated ground terminals (neutral)
for grounded conductors

Ground lug for equipment
grounding conductor

NEMA 3R, 12 and 4X stainless
enclosures

Fusible and non-fusible congura-
tionsClass R fuse clips standard

Fuse clips are located on the center
pole to ensure that both fuse clips
are de-energizedmeets NEC
Article 690.16, which requires
isolation of the fuse from all
potential supply sources
28.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

28

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Safety Switches


004

Six-Pole Motor Circuit

Six-Pole Motor Circuit

A compact safety switch thats ideal for
use in heavy industry...when an in sight
disconnecting means is required for two-
speed motors that are remote from their
motor control devices.


30200A

Fusible or non-fusible

Trunk-type latches keep the cover
tightly closed and a neoprene
gasket seals out moisture and dust
from the switch assembly

Visible double break rotary blade
contact life

Clear line shield protection

Built-in fuse pullers

Clearly visible handle

Triple padlocking capability. Cabinet
door can be further padlocked at the
top and bottom


Heavy-Duty Double-Throw

Heavy-Duty Double-Throw

Used to transfer service from a normal
power source to an alternate source, or to
switch from one load circuit to another.

Technical Data

301200A switches are
horsepower rated



make rated



Wiring conguration for fusible
double-throw switches up through
600A are wired from factory for a
single load to be supplied by a nor-
mal or alternate source. Can be eld
modied to allow two loads to be
alternately supplied by a single
power source

800A fusible double-throw switches
must be ordered from the factory for
either two-source or two-load
conguration

1200A fusible double-throw
switches are available only for
two-source connections
Ample wire bending space provides
for easier installation
Visible double-break rotary blade
contact life
Triple padlocking capability.
Personnel safety feature because
the large hasp can accommodate
up to three 3/8-inch (9.5 mm)
shank locks
Clearly visible handle. The position
(ON or OFF) can be clearly seen
from a distance
Additional locking capability.
Cabinet door can be further
padlocked at the top and bottom
Clear line shield protects against
accidental contact with energized
parts. Probe holes enable the user
to test if the line side is energized
without removing the shield
UL listed switching neutral capability
is available on three-pole and
four-pole non-fusible double-throw
switches with the installation of
the proper bonding kit shown on
Page 28.0-14
28.0-5
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
005
Quick-Connect Switches
Quick-Connect Double-Throw
Provides a safe and quick means of
connecting portable generators to
facilities, transferring the building
to backup power, or providing for
temporary connection of portable loads.
Single-throw and double-throw
designs
Safety interlocks prevent access to
the receptacle compartment unless
the lower switch is in the open
position. This prevents against
accidentally unplugging a circuit
under load
Technical Data
30800A switches
make rated
Cam-Lok
or Posi-Lok
receptacle
options
NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure
ratings
Switching neutral option
Enclosed Rotary
Enclosed Rotary
Provides users with the ability to lock
directly wired motor loads in the OFF
position to comply with new OSHA lock-
out/tagout regulations. Also for machine
applications that require compact,
economical disconnect switches.
UL listed
Meets NEC Article 430 requirements
for a separate disconnect means
within sight of all motor loads
Padlockable in the OFF position
(up to three padlocks) to meet OSHA
lockout requirements
Available 1680A ratings
600 Vac, three- and four-pole
non-fusible device
Rated at highest available hp rating
(at 480 Vac, 16A10 hp, 25A15 hp,
30A15 hp, 40A20 hp, 60A30 hp,
80A40 hp)
Rated for making and breaking loads
Accepts auxiliary contacts
Capability to signal PLC controllers
Ground lug connection provided
Can be rated up to 65 kAIC,
when protected by applicable
upstream fusing
EnviroLine
Stainless Steel Switch
Eaton offers a line of safety switches
designed for your special application
and/or extreme environmental conditions.
EnviroLine Stainless Steel Switch:
Primarily for use in the meatpacking
and food processing industries, or
any application where water is
frequently used to hose down
equipment. In addition to the
stainless steel NEMA 4X enclosure,
the interior mechanism, back pan
and springs are all stainless steel.
Ratings for these heavy-duty
switches are 30400A, 240600 Vac,
available as fusible and non-fusible
switches
Window Switches
Window Switches: These switches
are available with either an upper
window over the switch contacts or
a lower window over the fuse block.
The upper window provides visual
verication of ON/OFF status. The
lower window switch allows for
visual verication of fuse status if
used in conjunction with fuses with
blown fuse indicator. Ratings are
30800A and 2001200A, 240600
Vac, fusible and non-fusible. Avail-
able in NEMA 12/3R, 4X stainless
steel enclosures
28.0-6
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
006
Receptacle Switches
Receptacle Switches: These heavy-
duty switches are pre-wired and
interlocked to polarized receptacles
for three-phase, three-wire, grounded
type power plugs. These are used
for portable power applications
such as welders, infrared ovens,
batch feeders, conveyors, and truck
and marine docks. Receptacles are
interlocked to handle mechanisms
so that power plugs may not be
inserted or removed when the
switch is in the ON position unless
noted otherwise. Ratings are
30100A, 600 Vac, NEMA 12,
4X stainless steel enclosures
Non-Metallic Switches
Non-Metallic Switch: This switch
has a KRYDON enclosure. This
is a compression molded berglass
reinforced polyester enclosure,
which is capable of withstanding
almost any corrosive environment.
Ratings are 30200A, 240600 Vac,
fusible and non-fusible. Enclosure is
NEMA 4X rated
Non-Metallic Halyester Switch
Non-Metallic Halyester
Switch: A
strong, yet lightweight heavy-duty,
corrosion-resistant, NEMA 4X
enclosed switch that withstands salt
environments and general outdoor
conditions better than standard
304-grade stainless steel at a more
competitive price point than other
non-metallic enclosures
316 Grade Stainless Steel Switches:
This option replaces the standard
304 Grade stainless steel and hard-
ware with 316 stainless. 316 stainless
holds up better in high salt environ-
ments found in coastal areas, and in
water/wastewater applications
NEMA 7/9Hazardous Location
Disconnect Switch
DS361UX
The cast aluminum enclosure is
ideally suited for harsh industrial
applications including petrochemi-
cal facilities, mining operations,
pharmaceutical plants and waste-
water treatment facilities. Eatons
Type DS switch is used as the
switching device. Ratings are
30100A, 600 Vac, fusible and
non-fusible
Table 28.0-2. EnviroLine Standards Compliances
Seismic Qualication
UL Classied
Standard 886
File No. E84577
CSA Certied
Standard C22.2
File No. LR 42131-6
Class I, division 1 & 2,
groups B, C and D
Class I, division 1 & 2,
groups B, C and D
Class II, division 1 & 2,
groups E, F and G
Class II, division 1 & 2,
groups E, F and G
Class III, division 1 & 2 Class III, division 1 & 2
NEMA Types 7 and 9 NEMA Types 7 and 9
Zone 1, IIB + H
2
Zone 1, IIB + H
2
28.0-7
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
General Description
007
Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty
Safety Switch
Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch
NEC Section 210.63 for Heating,
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration
Equipment requires a 125V, single-
phase, 15A- or 20A-rated receptacle
outlet be installed at an accessible
location for the servicing of heating,
air-conditioning and refrigeration
equipment. The receptacle must
be located on the same level and
within 25 ft (7.5m) of the heating,
air-conditioning and refrigeration
equipment. The receptacle outlet is
not to be connected to the load side of
the equipment disconnecting means.
The Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty
Safety Switch combines a safety
switch, 2 kVA control transformer,
and 15A GFI receptacle in a single
product. Ratings are 30200A, 240 or
600 Vac, NEMA 3R outdoor enclosures.
The auxiliary circuit is tapped off of the
line side of the safety switch and can
be operated independently of the main
switch circuit. Auxiliary circuit voltages
are available at either 208, 240, 480 or
600V. In 480V and 600V applications,
the auxiliary circuit disconnect and
overcurrent protection are provided by
a fusible deadfront disconnect switch
with Class J fuses. The short-circuit
rating is 200 kAIC. 208V and 240V
applications have a molded-case
breaker with a 100 kAIC rating as the
auxiliary circuit disconnect. The use of
the Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety
Switch eliminates the need for running
a separate 120V circuit common to
rooftop air-conditioning applications.
Figure 28.0-1. Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch Circuit Diagram
Incoming Lugs
Fuses
Load
Control Power
Transformer
Secondary
Fuse
Receptacle
15 Ampere or Optional
20 Ampere Available
(GFCI Receptacle Option Available 3 kVA
Transformer Required)
2-Pole
Breaker
The elevator control switch provides
an all-in-one product solution and
selective coordination for elevator
circuits. The elevator control switch
uses a shunt trip disconnect as standard
with Class J time-delay current-limiting
fuses for meeting several code and user
requirements for such circuits. Ratings
are 30200A, 600 Vac, NEMA 1, 3R,
12 and 4 enclosures. The elevator
control switch carries a 200 kAIC rms
symmetrical short-circuit rating.
Why do Buildings Require Eaton
Elevator Disconnects?
Eatons Elevator Disconnect is a
simple, all-in-one solution that takes
the mystery out of meeting the many
codes associated with re protection
and safety in elevator shafts. The model
national building codes that prescribe
the requirements for sprinklers, elevators
and electrical equipment, and how the
various systems shall interact are:
NFPA
70
(National Electrical Code
)
NFPA 72
(National Fire Alarm Code
)
ANSI/ASME A17.1
(Safety Code for Elevators and
Escalators)
NFPA 13 (Installation of
Sprinkler Systems)
In addition to these national codes,
state and local jurisdictions or other
agencies of the government (such as
the Veterans Administration) may edit
or amend the codes, as they deem
necessary for public safety.
28.0-8
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
General Description
008
Eatons Elevator Disconnect enables
consultants, contractors and building
owners to install a single device that
meets the requirements of the
various codes.
Why is There a Need for the Eaton
Elevator Disconnect?
1. According to 2010 NFPA 13, re
sprinkler protection is required
(with some exceptions) at the top
and bottom of elevator shafts.
Additionally, NFPA 13 requires
the installation of sprinklers in
the elevator machine room.
When sprinkler heads are installed
in elevator shafts, or in elevator
machine rooms, then they must
also be installed according to the
State-Adopted Elevator Code (in
many cases, ANSI/ASME A17.1).
2. The ASME A17.1 Safety Code
for Elevators and Escalators,
Rule 102.2 (c) (3), requires the
shutdown of power to the elevator
prior to the application of water
in the elevator machine room
or hoistway.
Shutdown of power is usually
accomplished with the use of a
shunt trip device in the elevator
circuit, and is done for two valid
safety concerns.
The rst of these is to minimize
the potential for electric shock
due to the release of water on
energized electrical equipment.
The second, and less obvious,
is to reduce the possibility of
elevator car slippage after the
car has gone to the recall oor
and the doors have opened. Slip-
page is possible when the hoisting
equipment (cables, sheave, braking
system, etc.) become wet from
discharged water.
Eatons Elevator Disconnect is
a fusible switch that is equipped
with a shunt trip mechanism. The
shunt trip is operated by a control
relay (called a Fire Safety Interface
Relay) in the unit that is wired to
a normally open contact in the
remote Fire Alarm Control
Panel (FACP).
When the FACP receives a signal
from the re alarm system that
there is going to be a sprinkler
release in an elevator shaft, a
normally open contact in the FACP
closes, energizing the Fire Safety
Interface Relay and completing a
circuit to initiate a trip.
The Fire Safety Interface Relay
is available with a 120 Vac or
24 Vdc coil. The 120 Vac coil
should be selected when powered
by the Elevator Disconnect control
circuit, and the 24 Vdc relay
should be selected when the
power is supplied from the re
alarm system.
Figure 28.0-2. Typical Hydraulic Elevator Components and Requirements
1
2
3
1
Sprinkler System
Fluid Tank
Controller
Elevator
Disconnect
Battery
Lowering
Device
Sprinklers
4
1 NFPA 13 requires sprinklers in
elevator shaft (with exceptions)
and in control room.
2 ASME A17.1 (Safety Code for
Elevators and Escalators) requires
shutdown of power to the
elevator prior to the release
of water.
3 NFPA 72 (Fire Alarm Code)
requires control circuit for
elevator shutdown to be
monitored for the loss of voltage.
4 NEC requires standby power
systems such as a battery
lowering device to be
disconnected by an auxiliary
contact in the elevator disconnect.
28.0-9
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
General Description
009
3. In addition to turning off power,
the model codes require other
functions that are satised by the
Eaton Elevator Disconnect. One
of these requirements is that the
shunt trip control circuit requires
monitoring. The NFPA 72
(Fire Alarm Code) requires:
Control circuits to shut down
elevator power shall be monitored
for the presence of operating
voltage. Loss of voltage to the
control circuit for the disconnecting
means shall cause a supervisory
signal to be indicated at the
control unit and required remote
annunciation.
Thus, there is a requirement
to monitor and to annunciate the
presence of shunt trip control
power. This is accomplished in the
Eaton Elevator Disconnect by the
Fire Alarm Voltage Monitoring
Relay option. This relay is either
a SPDT or a 3PDT relay. When
control power is present, the
closed relay contacts complete a
circuit to the FACP that indicate
the presence of control voltage.
If control voltage is lost, the con-
tact opens, signaling an alarm at
the FACP and/or monitoring and
annunciating a single elevator; all
that is required is the single-pole
relay. When wiring multiple
switches (for multiple elevators),
the three-pole relay option should
be chosen. However, if there is a
doubt, selecting the three-pole
relay will provide all the function-
ality that is needed.
Additional Requirements and Concerns
Many elevators are equipped with
backup power supplies to allow the
elevator to be lowered if power is lost.
For example, many hydraulic elevators
are equipped with a battery system
that opens a solenoid to lower the
elevator, and then provides power
to open the elevator doors.
This battery-lowering device is viewed
by the NEC as an emergency or
standby power system, and is
governed by Article 620.91.
4. Paragraph (C) requires that the
main disconnect be provided with
an auxiliary contact that discon-
nects the additional power source
from the load when the discon-
necting means is in the open
position. The purpose of this
auxiliary contact is to disconnect
the backup power system when
the elevator switch is opened
to prevent the elevator from auto-
matically lowering while being
maintainedwhich would
endanger maintenance personnel.
Eatons Elevator Disconnect
is supplied with a standard set
of 1NO and 1NC auxiliary
contacts that are wired to the
terminal blocks for this feature.
Other manufacturers offer this
as an option.
An additional concern that is not code
related is accidental signaling of a loss
of voltage if a switch is turned off for
maintenance or testing. For example,
if an Eaton Elevator Disconnect is
turned off to perform routine mainte-
nance, the control voltage will be
disconnected and it will send a signal
to the FACPwhich may alert the local
re department and initiate a re call.
To solve this problem, an optional
micro switch mounted on the main
switch can be supplied and eld-wired
in parallel with the alarm contact on
the Voltage Monitoring relay. Wiring in
this fashion would prevent an alarm
signal from being sent when the Eaton
Elevator Disconnect is turned off for
routine maintenance.
An additional standard feature on the
Eaton Elevator Disconnect is a Key-
To-Test switch to perform a functional
test of the operation of the shunt trip.
A pilot light signaling that the switch is
ON and a neutral lug are the only other
available options.
Figure 28.0-3. Shunt Trip Device Wiring Diagram
Shunt Trip
Device
From Feeder
L
1
L
2
L
3
Battery Lowering Device
To Elevator Controller
1. A shunt trip device is required if the
hoistway and/or machine room is sprinklered.
2. The location of the shunt trip device is required
to be in the elevator machine room.
To heat sensor(s)
or flow control
sensor.
Auxiliary Contact for Battery Lowering device
required by Art. 620.91(C). Purpose of this
contact is to distinguish between an actual
power failure and the opening of the
disconnect for maintenance.
Must be provided with overcurrent protection.
Must be lockable in the open position.
Must be externally operable.
Shunt trip control voltage
must be monitored for
loss of voltage. Loss of
voltage is required to
activate an annunciator
on the control unit. The
building fire alarm control
unit may be utilized for
this purpose
(ref. NFPA 72 3.9.4).
28.0-10
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
010
Safety Switch Selection Guide
Table 28.0-3. Safety Switch Selection Guide
NEMA Type 12 enclosures (30800A) can be eld modied to meet NEMA 3R rainproof requirements when a factory provided drain screw is removed.
Class J clips provided.

Table 28.0-4. EnviroLine Safety Switch Selection Guide
800A upper window switches are not UL listed.
Lower window switches are available through 600A.
NEMA Type 12 enclosures (30800A) can be eld modied to meet NEMA 3R rainproof requirements when a factory provided drain screw is removed.
Type Fuse
Type
Fuse
Class
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Enclosure Types
NEMA 1 NEMA 3R NEMA 12 NEMA 4
Painted
Steel
NEMA 4X
Stainless
Steel
NEMA 4X
Non-
Metallic
NEMA 4X
316 Grade
Stainless
Steel
NEMA
7/9
General-
duty
Single-throw
max. 240 Vac
horsepower
rated
Fusible Plug 30 1 and 2 Yes Yes
Cartridge H 30600 2 and 3 Yes Yes
Non-
fusible
30600 2 and 3 Yes Yes
Heavy-
duty
Single-throw
max. 600 Vac
horsepower
rated
Fusible Cartridge H
L
30600
8001200
2, 3
and 4
Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
400
1200A
Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
up to
200A
Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
up to
100A
Non-
fusible
301200 2, 3
and 4
Yes Yes Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
400
1200A
Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
up to
200A
Yes
up to
1200A
Yes
up to
100A
Six-pole
motor
circuit
Single-throw
max. 600 Vac
Fusible Cartridge H 30200 6 Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Non-
fusible
30200 6 Yes Yes
Yes
Double-
throw
Max. 600 Vac
horsepower
rated
Fusible Cartridge H
T (600V)
T (240V)
L
30200
400
600
8001200
2 and 3 Yes
up to
600A
Yes
up to
400A

Non-
fusible
301200 2, 3, 4
and 6
Yes Yes Yes
up to
400A
Yes
up to
400A

Rotary
switches
Max. 600 Vac Non-
fusible
16125 3, 4 Yes Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
Auxiliary
power
heavy-
duty
Max. 600 Vac
horsepower
rated
Fusible Cartridge H 30200 3 Yes
Non-
fusible
30200 3 Yes
Elevator
control
switch
Max. 600 Vac
horsepower
rated
Fusible Cartridge J 30200 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes
EnviroLine Fuse
Type
Fuse
Class
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Enclosure Types
NEMA 1 NEMA 3R NEMA 12 NEMA 4
Painted
Steel
NEMA 4X
Stainless
Steel
NEMA 4X
Non-
Metallic
Stainless enclosure
with stainless
mechanism
Fusible Cartridge H 30400 2 and 3 Yes
Non-
fusible
30400 3 Yes
Viewing window
upper or lower
Fusible Cartridge H
L
30600
800
3 Yes
Yes Yes
Non-
fusible
30800 3 Yes
Yes Yes
Welding receptacle Fusible Cartridge H 30100 3 Yes Yes
Non-
fusible
60 3 Yes Yes
Non-metallic Fusible Cartridge H 30200 3 Yes
Non-
fusible
30200 3 Yes
28.0-11
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
General DescriptionCatalog Numbering System
011
Table 28.0-5. Safety Switch Catalog Numbering System
For DC ratings, check individual switch ratings.

Table 28.0-6. Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch Catalog Numbering System
Series
K = DesignAll general-duty switches
above 200A and all heavy-duty
switches incorporate K-Series
switch design features listed on
the following page
B = Design general-duty 30100A
H = Design general-duty double-throw
switch (compact design 30100A)
Fusible/Non-Fusible
or Neutral
F = Fusible without neutral
U = Non-fusible
N = Fusible with neutral
NEMA Enclosure Ratings
G = NEMA 1
R = NEMA 3R
D = NEMA 12
P = NEMA 4 (painted steel)
W = NEMA 4X corrosion resistant
(304 Grade stainless steel)
C = NEMA 4X non-metallic
KRYDON (for Type DH)
X = NEMA 7 and 9 (for Type DS)
Switch Type
DP = General-duty/
plug fuse
DG = General-duty/
cartridge fuse
DH = Heavy-duty
DT = Double-throw
DS = Classified
location with
DS interior
Poles/Blades
1 = 1-Pole
2 = 2-Poles
3 = 3-Poles
4 = 4-Poles
6 = 6-Poles
Voltage
1 = 120 Vac
2 = 240 Vac
6 = 600 Vac
Amperes
1 = 30A
2 = 60A
3 = 100A
4 = 200A
5 = 400A
6 = 600A
7 = 800A
8 = 1200A
DH 3 6 1 N D K LW
Options
W = Upper viewing window
LW = Lower viewing window
X = EnviroLine stainless
(enclosure and mechanism)
GCL = Mill duty
CB = Provisions for cube fuses
(30100A, 600V)
316 = 316 Grade stainless steel
enclosure and hardware
Series
K = DesignAll general-duty switches above
200A and all heavy-duty switches incorporate
K-Series switch design features listed on the
following page
Fusible/Non-Fusible
or Neutral
F = Fusible without
neutral
U = Non-fusible
N = Fusible with neutral
NEMA Enclosure Ratings
R = NEMA 3R
Switch Type
DH = Heavy-duty
Poles/Blades
3 = 3-Poles
Voltage
2 = 240 Vac
6 = 600 Vac
Amperes
1 = 30A
2 = 60A
3 = 100A
4 = 200A
DH 3 6 1 F R K A1 480
Auxiliary Circuit Voltage
208 = 208V
240 = 240V
480 = 480V
600 = 600V
GFI Receptacle
A1 = 15A
A2 = 20A
28.0-12
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
General DescriptionCatalog Numbering System
012
Table 28.0-7. Quick-Connect Safety Switch Catalog Numbering System
When upper and lower switches are the same, the switch conguration is consolidated in one letter (e.g.,U not UU). Also, a switch with a neutral
will have either a solid neutral or a switched neutral, not both. Lastly, a switched neutral pole is never fused.
Heavy-duty single-throw switches will not have a lower switch option.
This eld is only used when a switch is completely non-fused.

Table 28.0-8. Elevator Control Switch Catalog Numbering System
100 VA with primary and secondary fusing (120V secondary).
To monitor shunt trip voltage.
NEMA 1 standard with no sufx designation required.

Note: All modules are three-pole, 600V and contain a key to test switch and mechanically interlocked auxiliary contact as standard.
Series
K = K
Upper Switch
U = Non-fusible
F = Fusible
N = Fusible with solid neutral
SN= Fusible with switched neutral
Enclosure
G = NEMA 1
R = NEMA 3R
Switch Type
DT = Heavy-duty
double-throw
DH = Heavy-duty
single-throw
Poles
2 = 2 poles
3 = 3 poles
4 = 4 poles
Maximum Voltage
2 = 240 Vac
6 = 600 Vac
Switch Ampacity
3 = 100A
4 = 200A
5 = 400A
6 = 600A
7 = 800A
Neutral
Blank = No neutral or included

with switch designation
N = Solid neutral
SN = Switched neutral
Receptacle Type
LC = Cam-Lok
LCR = Cam-Lok reverse pin
LP = Posi-Lok
PLR = Posi-Lok reverse pin
Lower Switch
U = Non-fusible
F = Fusible
N = Fusible with solid neutral
SN= Fusible with switched neutral
DT 3 6 5 N U R K LC
ES 1 T2 R2 G F1 R N
Switch Type
ES = Elevator
control
switch
Amperes
1 = 30A
2 = 60A
3 = 100A
4 = 200A
5 = 400A
Industrial
Control
Transformer
T2 = 208V
T3 = 240V
T1 = 480V
T4 = 600V
Fire Safety
Interface Relay
(3PDT, 10 A, 120 V)
R2 = 24 Vdc coil
R1 = 120 Vac coil
Pilot Light
ON
G = Green
R = Red
W= White
Fire Alarm Voltage
Monitoring Relay
F1 = Single-pole
F3 = Three-pole
Enclosure
Options
R = NEMA 3R
D = NEMA 12
W= NEMA 4X
stainless
Isolated
Full Capacity
Neutral Lug
N = Neutral
lug
28.0-13
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
General Description
013
All General-Duty Switches Above 100A and All Heavy-Duty Switches
Incorporate These K-Series Switch Design Features
Visible Double Break Rotary Blade Mechanism
Two points of contact provide a
positive open and close, easier
operation, and also help prevent
contact burning for longer contact life.
Clear Line Shield
Protects against accidental contact with
energized parts. Probe holes enable
the user to test if the line side is ener-
gized without removing the shield.
Not provided on general-duty switches.
Built-in Fuse Pullers (NEMA 12 and
4X 30200A Only)
Provide easy removal of fuses.
Clearly Visible Handle
The position (ON or OFF) can be
clearly seen from a distance and the
length provides for easy operation.
Triple Padlocking Capability
Personnel safety feature because the
large hasp can accommodate up to
three 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) shank locks.
Additional Locking Capability
Cabinet door can be further padlocked
at the top and bottom as applicable.
Note: Size of hasp in inches (mm):
30100A0.344 (8.7) 0.250 shank
2001200A0.50 (12.7) 0.375 shank
Interlocking Mechanism
Door cannot be opened when the
handle is in the ON position. Front side
operable defeater mechanism provides
for user access when necessary.
Tangential Knockouts
An ample number are provided on the
top, bottom and sides of both NEMA
Types 1 and 3R enclosures through 200A.
Bolt-On Hub Kits
For switches in a NEMA Type 3R, 12,
4 or 4X enclosure.
28.0-14
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
General DescriptionAccessories, Hubs, Lug Data
014
Accessories, Hubs, Lug Data
Table 28.0-9. Safety SwitchesAccessories
Ground bar kit is not listed on device publications.
Order one kit for three poles.
Order one kit for each pole.
Order one kit per switch.

Note: Accessories are not applicable to NEMA 7/9 switches.
Receptacle switches.
Order one kit for six poles.
The mechanism is reversed on these contacts.

DS200GK DH030NK DS16CP DS200EK1
DS36CL DS56CK DS30FP
DS22JK
DS12FK DS426TK
Description Catalog
Number
Neutral Kits/Ground Kits
30A DG
60100A DG
200A DG, DH (NEMA 1, 3R enclosures)
3060A DH
100A DH
200A DH (NEMA 4X, 12 enclosures)
400A DG, DH
600A DG, DH
400600A Fusible DT, 8001200A DH
30100A DT
200A DT
400A Non-fusible DT
600A Non-fusible DT
800A DT
1200A DT
DG030NB
DG100NB
DG200NK
DH030NK
DH100NK
DH200NK
DS400NK
DS600NK
DS800NK
DT100NK
DT200NK
DT400NK
DT600NK
DT800NK
DT1200NK
Ground Lug Kits
30100A DG
30100A DH, DT
200A DG, DH, DT

400600A DG, 4001200A DH, 4001200A DT
DG030GB
DS100GK
DS200GK
DS468GK
Switching Neutral Bonding Kits
30100A DT, three-pole, four-pole
DT100BK
DT200BK
DT400BK
DT600BK
DT800BK
Control Pole Kit
400600A DG, 301200A DH, 30800A DT DS16CP
Auxiliary Contact Kits
All switches (except 30100A DG) 1NO/1NC
All switches (except 30100A DG) 2NO/2NC
DS200EK1
DS200EK2
Copper Lug Kits
30A DH, DT
60A DH, DT
100A DH, DT
200A DH
400A DH (NEMA 4, 4X, 12 enclosures)
600800A DH (NEMA 4, 4X, 12 enclosures)
DS16CL
DS26CL
DS36CL
DS46CL
DS56CL
DS66CL
Crimp Lug Pad Kit (NEMA 4, 4X, 12 Enclosures)
400600A DH
800A DH
400800A neutral DH
DS56CK
DS76CK
DS800CNK
Description Catalog
Number
Fuse Puller Kits
3060A DH
3060A DH
100A DH
200A DH
DS30FP
DS60FP
DS100FP
DS200FP
J Fuse Adapter Kits
60A 240V DH
60A DT and receptacle switches
400A 600V DT
600A 240600V DH only
DS22JK
DS26JK
DT400JK
DS600JK
R Fuse Adapter Kits
30A DG
100A DG
30A 240V DH, DT
30A 600V DH, DT, 60A 240V DH, DT, 60A DG
60A 600V DH, DT
100A 240600V DH, DT
200A 240600V DH, DT, 200A DG
400A 240600V DH, 240V DT, 400A DG
600A 240600V DH, 600A DG
DG030RB
DG100RB
DS12FK
DS16FK
DS26FK
DS36FK
DS46FK
DS56FK
DS66FK
T Fuse Adapter Kits
200A 240V DH
200A 600V DH
400A 240V DG, DH
400A 600V DH
600A 240V DG, DH
600A 600V DH
800A 240V DH
800A 600V DH
8001200A 600V DH DT
DS426TK
DS466TK
DS526TK
DS566TK
DS626TK
DS666TK
DS726TK
DS766TK
Hookstick handle DH800HSH
Lubricating grease for safety switch blades and contacts
(Each kit contains three 30 cc tubes of lubricating grease.)
DSLUBEKIT
Auxiliary Contacts for:
1625A three-, four-pole rotary switches, includes holder
and contact (1NO/1NC)
3040A three-pole rotary switches, includes holder
and contact (1NO)
60125A three-pole rotary switches, includes holder
and contact (1NO)
3040A four-pole rotary switches, includes holder
and contact (1NO)
30125A three-, four-pole, contact only (1NC)
30125A three-, four-pole, contact only (1NO)
CMAC
CRAC3
CWAC3
CRAC4
CRAA
CRAB

28.0-15
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
General DescriptionAccessories, Hubs, Lug Data
015
Hubs
DS075H1
Table 28.0-10. Plate Type Hubs
for NEMA Type 3R Enclosures (Up to 200A)
Note: Catalog Number DS900AK Adapter KitPermits Installation of
Group 1 Hubs on 200A Type General-Duty, Heavy-Duty and Double-
Throw Switches.
Table 28.0-11. Myers Type Hubs
NEMA Type 3R (400A and Above)
NEMA Types 4, 4X (Stainless Steel), 12
Note: Contact the Flex Center at 1-888-329-9272 for information on
hubs for non-metallic NEMA 4X switches.
Table 28.0-12. Standard Lug Capacities
The maximum size aluminum or copper-clad aluminum wire allowable

for applications where the conductor enters or leaves the enclosure
through the wall opposite its terminal is #1 gauge.
Note: Although certain lug capacities are larger than required, only
minimum wire bending space is provided per the requirements
noted in NEC Tables 373.6 (a) and (b) for respective ampere ratings.
Group 1
General-Duty, Heavy-Duty,
Double-Throw Through 100A
Group 2
General-Duty, Heavy-Duty,
Double-Throw200A
Conduit Size Catalog
Number
Number
Inches mm Inches mm
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
19.1
25.4
31.8
38.1
50.8
DS075H1
DS100H1
DS125H1
DS150H1
DS200H1
2
2-1/2
3
50.8
63.5
76.2
DS200H2
DS250H2
DS300H2

Number
Inches mm
1/2
3/4
1
12.7
19.1
25.4
DS050MH
DS075MH
DS100MH
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
31.8
38.1
50.8
DS125MH
DS150MH
DS200MH
2-1/2
3
3-1/2
63.5
76.2
88.9
DS250MH
DS300MH
DS350MH
4
5
101.6
127.0
DS400MH
DS500MH
Ampere
Rating
Minimum
Wire Size
Maximum
Wire Size
Wire
Type
30A DP
30A DG
30A DH, DT
#14
#12
#14
#14
#10
#10
#6
#2
Cu OR
Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
60A DG
60A DH, DT
#14
#14
#1/0
#2
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
100A DG
100A DH, DT
#14
#14
#1/0
#1/0
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
200A DG, DT
200A DH Type 1 and 3R
200A DH Type 4 and 12
#6
#6
#6
250 kcmil
250 kcmil
300 kcmil
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
400A DG, DH, DT (2) #1/0
(1) #1/0
(2) 300 kcmil
(1) 750 kcmil
Cu/Al OR
Cu/Al
600A DG
600A DH
600A DT (Fusible)
(1) #2
(1) #1/0
(1) 600 kcmil
(1) 750 kcmil
Cu/Al AND
Cu/Al
600A DT (Non-fusible) (2) #250 (2) 500 kcmil Cu/Al
800A DH
800A DT
(4) #1/0
(3) #250
(4) 750 kcmil
(3) 500 kcmil
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
1200A DH, DT (4) #1/0 (4) 750 kcmil Cu/Al
Copper-Bodied Lugs
30A Cu
60A Cu
100A Cu
#14
#14
#6
#6
#4
#1/0
Cu
Cu
Cu
200A Cu
400A Cu
600A Cu
#6
#1/0
(2) #1/0
250 kcmil
500 kcmil
(2) 500 kcmil
Cu
Cu
Cu
28.0-16
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
General DescriptionLug Data, Connection Plugs
016
Table 28.0-13. Available Lug Capacities of the Double-Throw Switch Assembly with Cam-Lok or Posi-Lok Receptacles
Table 28.0-14. Quick-Connect Double-Throw Standard Receptacles and Corresponding Connection Plugs
(Part Numbers are Cooper Crouse-Hinds)
Note: Switches are not supplied with the mating plugs. Eaton will supply the plug if cord sets are ordered.
Double Throw Switch
SizeCam-Lok or
Posi-Lok Receptacles
Service
Terminal
Openings
Load
Terminal
Openings
Switched Neutral
Pole Load Terminal
Openings
Solid Neutral
Terminal
Openings
Ground
Terminal
Openings
Receptacle
Bypass
Terminal
100 (1) 1/014
AWG Cu/Al
(1) 1/014
AWG Cu/Al
(1) 1/014
AWG Cu/Al
(2) 1/014 AWG,
(1) 214 AWG Cu/Al
(3) 214
AWG Cu/Al
(1) 1032
Screw mounting
200 (1) 300 kcmil
6 AWG Cu/Al
(1) 250 kcmil
6 AWG Cu/Al
(1) 250 kcmil
6 AWG Cu/Al
(2) 250 kcmil6 AWG,
(1) 1/014 AWG,
(1) 214 AWG Cu/Al
(3) 214
AWG Cu/Al
(2) 1/4 Studs,
1.75-inch spacing
400 (1) 750 kcmil1/0
or
(2) 300 kcmil1/0
Cu/Al
(1) 750 kcmil1/0
or
(2) 300 kcmil1/0
Cu/Al
(1) 750 kcmil1/0
or
(2) 300 kcmil1/0
Cu/Al
(6) 500 kcmil,
(6) 250 kcmil
6 AWG Cu/Al
(4) 250 kcmil
6 AWG Cu/Al
(2) 1/2-13 UNC studs,
1.75-inch spacing
600 (4) 750 kcmil
3/0 Cu/Al
(4) 500250 kcmil
Cu/Al
(4) 500250 kcmil
Cu/Al
(6) 500250 kcmil,
(4) 250 kcmil
6 AWG Cu/Al
(4) 250 kcmil
6 AWG Cu/Al
(2) 1/2-13 UNC studs,
1.75-inch spacing
800 (4) 750 kcmil
3/0 Cu/Al
(4) 500250 kcmil
Cu/Al
(4) 500250 kcmil
Cu/Al
(6) 500250 kcmil,
(4) 250 kcmil
6 AWG Cu/Al
(4) 250 kcmil
6 AWG Cu/Al
(2) 1/2-13 UNC studs,
1.75-inch spacing
Double Throw Switch
SizeCam-Lok or
Posi-Lok Receptacles
Cam-Lok Connectors Posi-Lok Connectors
Receptacle Plug Receptacle Panel Plug
100 Ground (green)
Neutral (white)
A Phase (black)
B Phase (red)
C Phase (blue)
E1016-1635S
E1016-1636S
E1016-1600S
E1016-1602S
E1016-1612S
E-Z1016-8366
E-Z1016-8367
E-Z1016-8387
E-Z1016-8389
E-Z1016-8393
Two-pole, three-wire with solid neutral or three-pole, three-wire with
switched neutral pole (two-phase and single neutral pole): E0200-1696 /
three-pole, three-wire (no neutral): E0200-1686 / three-pole, four-wire
with solid neutral or four-pole, four-wire with switched neutral pole
(three-phase and single neutral pole): E0200-1687
E0200-281
E0200-282
E0200-283
E0200-284
E0200-285
200 Ground (green)
Neutral (white)
A Phase (black)
B Phase (red)
C Phase (blue)
E1016-1635S
E1016-1636S
E1016-1600S
E1016-1602S
E1016-1612S
E-Z1016-8366
E-Z1016-8367
E-Z1016-8387
E-Z1016-8389
E-Z1016-8393
E0200-281
E0200-282
E0200-283
E0200-284
E0200-285
400 Ground (green)
Neutral (white)
A Phase (black)
B Phase (red)
C Phase (blue)
E1016-1635S
E1016-1636S
E1016-1600S
E1016-1602S
E1016-1612S
E-Z1016-8366
E-Z1016-8367
E-Z1016-8387
E-Z1016-8389
E-Z1016-8393
E0400-281
E0400-282
E0400-283
E0400-284
E0400-285
600 Ground (green)
Neutral (white)
A Phase (black)
B Phase (red)
C Phase (blue)
(2) E1016-1635S
(2) E1016-1636S
(2) E1016-1600S
(2) E1016-1602S
(2) E1016-1612S
(2) E-Z1016-8366
(2) E-Z1016-8367
(2) E-Z1016-8387
(2) E-Z1016-8389
(2) E-Z1016-8393
switched neutral pole (two-phase and single neutral pole): (2) E0400-1696 /
three-pole, three-wire (no neutral): (2) E0400-1686 / three-pole, four-wire
(three-phase and single neutral pole): (2) E0400-1687
(2) E0400-281
(2) E0400-282
(2) E0400-283
(2) E0400-284
(2) E0400-285
800 Ground (green)
Neutral (white)
A Phase (black)
B Phase (red)
C Phase (blue)
(2) E1016-1635S
(2) E1016-1636S
(2) E1016-1600S
(2) E1016-1602S
(2) E1016-1612S
(2) E-Z1016-8366
(2) E-Z1016-8367
(2) E-Z1016-8387
(2) E-Z1016-8389
(2) E-Z1016-8393
switched neutral pole (two-phase and single neutral pole): (2) E0400-1696 /
three-pole, three-wire (no neutral): (2) E0400-1686 / three-pole, four-wire
(three-phase and single neutral pole): (2) E0200-1687
(2) E0400-281
(2) E0400-282
(2) E0400-283
(2) E0400-284
(2) E0400-285
28.0-17
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
LayoutDimensions
017
Dimensions
Table 28.0-15. General-Duty, Non-Fusible, 240V, Three-Pole, Single-Throw
Table 28.0-16. General-Duty, Fusible, 240V, Three-Pole, Solid Neutral, Single-Throw
Note: Not applicable to plug fuse.
Ampere
Rating
NEMA 1 NEMA 3R
Lbs (kg)
Lbs (kg)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
30 6.38
(162.1)
10.69
(271.5)
6.88
(174.8)
3.75
(95.2)
6
(2.724)
6.38
(162.1)
10.81
(274.6)
6.88
(174.8)
3.75
(95.2)
6
(2.724)
60 8.69
(220.7)
14.19
(360.4)
7.38
(187.5)
4.21
(106.9)
9
(4.086)
8.69
(220.7)
14.38
(365.3)
7.38
(187.5)
4.21
(106.9)
9
(4.086)
100 9.13
(231.9)
18.81
(477.8)
7.38
(187.5)
4.23
(107.4)
12
(5.448)
9.13
(231.9)
19.25
(489.0)
7.38
(187.5)
4.23
(107.4)
12
(5.448)
200 16.00
(406.4)
25.25
(641.4)
11.25
(285.8)
6.14
(156.0)
48
(21.792)
16.00
(406.4)
25.50
(647.7)
11.25
(285.8)
6.14
(156.0)
55
(24.97)
400 23.00
(584.2)
44.75
(1136.7)
12.63
(320.8)
7.27
(184.7)
100
(45.4)
23.00
(584.2)
45.19
(1147.8)
12.63
(320.8)
7.27
(184.7)
105
(47.67)
600 24.00
(609.6)
52.25
(1327.2)
14.25
(362.0)
8.95
(227.3)
130
(59.02)
24.00
(609.6)
52.70
(1338.6)
14.25
(362.0)
8.95
(227.3)
135
(61.29)
Ampere
Rating
NEMA 1, 3R NEMA 12, 4X Stainless Steel, 4
Lbs (kg)
Lbs (kg)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
30 8.13
(206.5)
15.88
(403.4)
10.00
(254.0)
5.25
(133.3)
20
(9.08)
8.13
(206.5)
17.88
(454.2)
10.00
(254.0)
5.50
(139.7)
22
(9.988)
60 8.13
(206.5)
15.88
(403.4)
10.00
(254.0)
5.25
(133.3)
20
(9.08)
8.13
(206.5)
17.88
(454.2)
10.00
(254.0)
5.50
(139.7)
22
(9.988)
100 11.13
(282.7)
21.69
(550.9)
10.00
(254.0)
5.25
(133.3)
27
(12.258)
11.13
(282.7)
24.00
(609.6)
10.25
(260.4)
5.50
(139.7)
30
(13.62)
200 16.00
(406.4)
27.63
(701.8)
11.25
(285.8)
6.14
(156.0)
52
(23.608)
16.00
(406.4)
34.38
(873.3)
11.50
(292.1)
6.44
(163.6)
61
(27.694)
400 23.00
(584.2)
45.19
(1147.8)
12.63
(320.8)
7.27
(184.7)
120
(54.48)
23.00
(584.2)
57.63
(1463.8)
12.63
(320.8)
7.19
(182.6)
135
(61.29)
600 24.00
(609.6)
52.70
(1338.6)
14.25
(362.0)
8.95
(227.3)
153
(69.462)
24.00
(609.6)
63.00
(1600.2)
14.25
(362.0)
8.88
(225.6)
203
(92.162)
800 25.38
(644.7)
56.69
(1439.9)
14.25
(362.0)
8.95
(227.3)
168
(76.272)
25.38
(644.7)
71.75
(1822.5)
14.25
(362.0)
8.88
(225.6)
213
(96.702)
1200 41.47
(1053.3)
70.31
(1785.9)
19.94
(506.5)
12.44
(316.0)
465
(211.11)
41.47
(1053.3)
70.31
(1785.9)
19.94
(506.5)
13.51
(343.2)
510
(231.54)
Dimensions are for estimating purposes only.
Figure 28.0-4. NEMA 1-3R 30100A
Figure 28.0-5. NEMA 1-3R 200600A
H
W D
D2
W
H
C
L
D2
D
28.0-18
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
LayoutDimensions
018
Dimensions (Continued)
Table 28.0-17. Heavy-Duty, Non-Fusible, 600V, Three-Pole, Single-Throw
Table 28.0-18. Heavy-Duty, Fusible, 240 and 600V, Three-Pole Solid Neutral, Single-Throw
Ampere
Rating
Lbs (kg)
Lbs (kg)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
30 8.13
(206.5)
15.88
(403.4)
10.00
(254.0)
5.25
(133.3)
16
(7.264)
8.13
(206.5)
12.13
(308.1)
10.00
(254.0)
5.50
(139.7)
17
(7.718)
60 8.13
(206.5)
15.88
(403.4)
10.00
(254.0)
5.25
(133.3)
16
(7.264)
8.13
(206.5)
12.13
(308.1)
10.00
(254.0)
5.50
(139.7)
17
(7.718)
100 11.13
(282.7)
21.69
(550.9)
10.00
(254.0)
5.25
(133.3)
22
(9.988)
11.13
(282.7)
24.00
(609.6)
10.25
(260.4)
5.50
(139.7)
28
(12.712)
200 16.00
(406.4)
27.63
(701.8)
11.25
(285.8)
6.14
(156.0)
46
(20.884)
16.00
(406.4)
34.38
(873.3)
11.50
(292.1)
6.44
(163.6)
55
(24.97)
400 23.00
(584.2)
45.19
(1147.8)
12.63
(320.8)
7.27
(184.7)
110
(49.94)
23.00
(584.2)
57.63
(1463.8)
12.63
(320.8)
7.19
(182.6)
125
(56.75)
600 24.00
(609.6)
52.70
(1338.6)
14.25
(362.0)
8.95
(227.3)
135
(61.29)
24.00
(609.6)
63.00
(1600.2)
14.25
(362.0)
8.88
(225.6)
167
(75.818)
800 25.38
(644.7)
56.69
(1439.9)
14.25
(362.0)
8.95
(227.3)
158
(71.732)
25.38
(644.7)
71.75
(1822.5)
14.25
(362.0)
8.88
(225.6)
175
(79.45)
1200 41.47
(1053.3)
70.31
(1785.9)
19.94
(506.5)
12.44
(316.0)
430
(195.22)
41.47
(1053.3)
70.31
(1785.9)
19.94
(506.5)
13.51
(343.2)
475
(215.65)
Ampere
Rating
Lbs (kg)
Lbs (kg)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
30 8.13
(206.5)
15.88
(403.4)
10.00
(254.0)
5.25
(133.3)
20
(9.08)
8.13
(206.5)
17.88
(454.2)
10.00
(254.0)
5.50
(139.7)
22
(9.988)
60 8.13
(206.5)
15.88
(403.4)
10.00
(254.0)
5.25
(133.3)
20
(9.08)
8.13
(206.5)
17.88
(454.2)
10.00
(254.0)
5.50
(139.7)
22
(9.988)
100 11.13
(282.7)
21.69
(550.9)
10.00
(254.0)
5.25
(133.3)
27
(12.258)
11.13
(282.7)
24.00
(609.6)
10.25
(260.4)
5.50
(139.7)
30
(13.62)
200 16.00
(406.4)
27.63
(701.8)
11.25
(285.8)
6.14
(156.0)
52
(23.608)
16.00
(406.4)
34.38
(873.3)
11.50
(292.1)
6.44
(163.6)
61
(27.694)
400 23.00
(584.2)
45.19
(1147.8)
12.63
(320.8)
7.27
(184.7)
120
(54.48)
23.00
(584.2)
57.63
(1463.8)
12.63
(320.8)
7.19
(182.6)
135
(61.29)
600 24.00
(609.6)
52.70
(1338.6)
14.25
(362.0)
8.95
(227.3)
153
(69.462)
24.00
(609.6)
63.00
(1600.2)
14.25
(362.0)
8.88
(225.6)
203
(92.162)
800 25.38
(644.7)
56.69
(1439.9)
14.25
(362.0)
8.95
(227.3)
168
(76.272)
25.38
(644.7)
71.75
(1822.5)
14.25
(362.0)
8.88
(225.6)
213
(96.702)
1200 41.47
(1053.3)
70.31
(1785.9)
19.94
(506.5)
12.44
(316.0)
465
(211.11)
41.47
(1053.3)
70.31
(1785.9)
19.94
(506.5)
13.51
(343.2)
510
(231.54)
Figure 28.0-6. NEMA 1, 3R 301200A
Figure 28.0-7. NEMA 4/4X and 12 30800A
Figure 28.0-8. NEMA 1, 3R 30800A
Figure 28.0-9. NEMA 12, 4X 30400A
W
H
C
L
D2
D
D W
C
L
H
D2
W
C
L
H
D
D2
W
H
D
D2
28.0-19
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
LayoutDimensions
019
Table 28.0-19. Heavy-Duty, Non-Fusible, 240 and 600V, Three-Pole, Double-Throw
Table 28.0-20. Heavy-Duty, Fusible, 240 and 600V, Three-Pole, Double-Throw
Ampere
Rating
NEMA 1, 3R NEMA 12, 4X Stainless Steel
Lbs (kg)
Lbs (kg)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
30 11.94
(303.3)
24.63
(625.6)
9.88
(251.0)
5.38
(136.7)
34
(15.436)
12.00
(304.8)
25.88
(657.4)
10.25
(260.4)
5.50
(139.7)
60
(27.24)
60 11.94
(303.3)
24.63
(625.6)
9.88
(251.0)
5.38
(136.7)
34
(15.436)
12.00
(304.8)
25.88
(657.4)
10.25
(260.4)
5.50
(139.7)
60
(27.24)
100 11.94
(303.3)
24.63
(625.6)
9.88
(251.0)
5.38
(136.7)
34
(15.436)
12.00
(304.8)
25.88
(657.4)
10.25
(260.4)
5.50
(139.7)
60
(27.24)
200 19.56
(496.8)
37.38
(949.5)
11.25
(285.8)
6.10
(154.9)
80
(36.32)
19.50
(495.3)
41.00
(1041.4)
11.63
(295.4)
6.48
(164.6)
105
(47.67)
400 23.13
(587.5)
53.81
(1366.8)
12.50
(317.5)
7.25
(184.2)
140
(63.56)
23.00
(584.2)
57.50
(1460.5)
12.50
(317.5)
7.25
(184.2)
185
(83.99)
600 24.13
(612.9)
63.31
(1608.1)
14.13
(358.9)
8.88
(225.6)
175
(79.45)

800 24.13
(612.9)
63.31
(1608.1)
14.13
(358.9)
8.88
(225.6)
175
(79.45)

1200 42.15
(1070.6)
78.11
(1984.0)
25.62
(650.7)
20.47
(519.9)
509
(231.09)

Ampere
Rating
NEMA 1, 3R NEMA 12, 4X Stainless Steel
Lbs (kg)
Lbs (kg)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Depth
(D2)
30 11.94
(303.3)
36.63
(930.4)
9.88
(251.0)
5.38
(136.7)
44
(19.976)
12.00
(304.8)
39.81
(1011.2)
10.25
(260.4)
5.50
(139.7)
45
(20.43)
60 11.94
(303.3)
36.63
(930.4)
9.88
(251.0)
5.38
(136.7)
44
(19.976)
12.00
(304.8)
39.81
(1011.2)
10.25
(260.4)
5.50
(139.7)
45
(20.43)
100 11.94
(303.3)
36.63
(930.4)
9.88
(251.0)
5.38
(136.7)
44
(19.976)
12.00
(304.8)
39.81
(1011.2)
10.25
(260.4)
5.50
(139.7)
45
(20.43)
200 19.56
(496.8)
50.88
(1292.4)
11.25
(285.8)
6.10
(154.9)
95
(43.13)
19.56
(496.8)
55.63
(1413.0)
11.63
(295.4)
6.46
(164.1)
100
(45.4)
400 25.38
(644.7)
74.75
(1898.7)
14.13
(358.9)
8.88
(225.6)
230
(104.42)
25.38
(644.7)
74.75
(1898.7)
14.13
(358.9)
8.92
(226.6)
260
(118.04)
600 27.44
(697.0)
86.13
(2187.7)
14.13
(358.9)
8.88
(225.6)
320
(145.28)

800 28.12
(714.2)
58.86
(1495.0)
25.62
(650.7)
20.47
(519.9)
282
(128.03)

1200 42.15
(1070.6)
78.11
(1984.0)
25.62
(650.7)
20.47
(519.9)
509
(231.09)

Figure 28.0-10. NEMA 1, 3R 301200A
Figure 28.0-11. NEMA 4/4X and 12 30800A
Figure 28.0-12. NEMA 1, 3R 30800A
Figure 28.0-13. NEMA 12, 4X 30400A
W
H
C
L
D2
D
D W
C
L
H
D2
W
C
L
H
D
D2
W
H
D
D2
28.0-20
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
LayoutDimensions
020
Figure 28.0-14. Quick-Connect Double-Throw 30/200ADimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 28.0-15. Quick-Connect Double-Throw 400ADimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 28.0-16. Quick-Connect Double-Throw 600800ADimensions in Inches (mm)
18.57
(471.7)
50.45
(1281.4)
Conduit
Entry
Allowed
Along
This
Side
61.24
(1555.5)
18.15
(461.0)
No Conduit
Entry This End
13.56
(344.4)
8.59 (218.2)
Conduit
Entry
Allowed
In This
Area
5.00
(127.0)
60.51
(1537.0)
95.75
(2432.1)
68.25
(1733.6)
62.89
(1597.4)
33.50
(850.9)
6.00
(152.4)
Grade
14.00
(355.6)
2.24 (56.9)
7.00 (177.8)
58.38
(1482.9)
4.14
(105.2)
38.90
(988.1)
23.65
(600.7)
93.11
(2365.0)
26.68
(677.7)
50.18
(1274.6)
10.63
(270.0)
26.25
(666.8)
15.61
(396.5)
5.12
(130.0)
2.65
(67.31)
44.43
(1128.5)
92.49
(2349.2)
17.75
(450.9)
16.00 (406.4)
8.02
(203.7)
8.00 (203.2)
4.42
(112.3)
1.37
(34.8)
2.93
(74.4)
20.95
(532.1)
.560
Mounting
Holes
87.25
(2216.2)
15.40
(391.2)
15.61
(396.5)
29.25
(743.0)
16.00 (406.4)
8.02
(203.7)
8.00 (203.2)
A
23.65
(600.7)
37.75
(958.9)
38.18
(969.8)
61.68
(1566.7)
5.12
(130.0)
4.42
(112.3)
93.11
(2365.0)
10.63
(270.0)
2.65
(67.3)
44.43
(1128.5)
92.49
(2349.2)
1.37
(34.8)
2.93
(74.4)
20.95
(532.1)
.560
Mounting
Holes
87.25
(2216.2)
28.0-21
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
LayoutDimensions
021
Figure 28.0-17. Quick-Connect Single-Throw 100ADimensions in Inches (mm)
27.43
(696.7)
38.15
(969.0)
18.57
(471.7)
1.93 (49.0)
6.25 (158.8)
28.42
(721.9)
13.68
(347.5)
8.61
(218.7)
37.40
(950.0)
39.12
(993.6)
39.78
(1010.4)
2.24
(56.9)
7.00
(177.8)
14.00
(355.6)
35.27
(895.9)
4.15
(105.4)
6.00 (152.4) Minimum
5.00
(127.0)
18.00
(457.2)
R0.25
1.06
(26.9)
Conduit Entry
Allowed Along
Left Side
0.56
Mounting
Holes
Grade
Conduit Entry
Allowed in Top
End Wall
Conduit Entry
Allowed in
this Area
18.00
(457.2)
18.57
(471.7)
40.89
(1038.6)
1.94
(49.3)
Conduit Entry
Allowed in
Top End Wall
Allowed Along
Left Side
0.56
Holes
Conduit Entry
Allowed in
This Area
13.68
(347.5)
42.53
(1080.3)
28.38
(720.8)
41.87
(1063.5)
40.15
(1019.8)
6.00 (152.4) Minimum
6.25 (158.8)
Grade
14.00 2.24
(56.9)
R0.25
38.02
(965.7)
4.15
(105.4)
28.0-22
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
LayoutDimensions
022
32.60
(828.0)
Conduit Entry
32.87
(834.9)
60.69
(1541.5)
74.3
(1888
Conduit Entry
Allowed in
This Area
Conduit Entry
Allowed Along
Left Side
16.10
(408.9)
6.00 (152.4) Minimum
11.14 (283.0)
12.00
(304.8)
73.79
(1874.3)
69.79
(1772.7)
51.64
(1311.6)
8.30 (210.8)
Grad
0.5
Mo
Hol
24.0
(609.
4.39
(111.5)
4.34
(110.2)
0.5
Mou
Hole
32.87
(834.9)
(1541.5)
85.59
(2174.0)
Conduit Entry
Conduit Entry
Allowed in
This Area
21.73
(551.9)
32.6
onduit Entry
lowed in Top
nd Wall
85.04
(2160.0)
81.03
(2058.2)
62.23
(1580.6)
6.00 (152.4) Minimum
13.96 (354.6) 24.0
(609
4.34
(110.2)
4.39
(111.5)
28.0-23
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
LayoutDimensions
023
Table 28.0-21. Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty Safety Switch
108 lbs (49 kg) with a 15A GFI receptacle; 130 lbs (59 kg) with a 20A GFI receptacle.
Table 28.0-22. Elevator Control Switch
Ampere
Rating
NEMA 3R
Lbs (kg)
Width (W) Height (H) Depth (D) Depth (D2)
30 26.58
(675.1)
24.93
(633.2)
16.00
(406.4)
11.29
(286.8)
60 26.58
(675.1)
24.93
(633.2)
16.00
(406.4)
11.29
(286.8)
100 26.58
(675.1)
24.93
(633.2)
16.00
(406.4)
11.29
(286.8)
Ampere
Rating
Width (W) Height (H) Depth (D)
NEMA 1
30 16.00
(406.4)
20.00
(508.0)
8.63
(219.2)
60 16.00
(406.4)
20.00
(508.0)
8.63
(219.2)
100 16.00
(406.4)
20.00
(508.0)
8.63
(219.2)
200 20.00
(508.0)
30.00
(762.0)
8.63
(219.2)
400 25.21
(640.3)
53.25
(1352.6)
12.69
(322.3)
NEMA 3R or 12
30 20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
8.00
(203.2)
60 20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
8.00
(203.2)
100 20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
8.00 (
203.2)
200 24.00
(609.6)
30.00
(762.0)
8.00
(203.2)
400 25.21
(640.3)
53.25
(1352.6)
12.69
(322.3)
Figure 28.0-21. Auxiliary Power Heavy-Duty
Switch Diagram
Figure 28.0-22. Elevator Control Switch
Diagram
W
D2
D
H
28.0-24
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
LayoutDimensions
024
Table 28.0-23. NEMA 7/9 Enclosure Sizes
Figure 28.0-23. NEMA 7/930100ADual 3 and 4 Point Mounting Available as Standard on Enclosures 1 and 2
Table 28.0-24. NEMA 7/9Dimensions in Inches (mm)
See Table 28.0-23 for threaded conduit sizes, one at top and one at bottom.
Note: Accessories and modications shown on Pages 28.0-14,
28.0-15, 28.0-30 and 28.0-31 are not applicable to NEMA 7/9
disconnect switches.
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Type Poles Voltage Standard Conduit
Size in Inches (mm)
Enclosure
Number
30 DS361FX Fusible
(Class J fuse
provisions)
3 600 Vac
125/250 Vdc
1.50 (38.1) 1
60 DS362FX 2.00 (50.8) 2
100 DS363FX 2.50 (63.5) 3
30 DS361UX Non-fusible 3 600 Vac
125/250 Vdc
1.50 (38.1) 1
60 DS362UX 1.50 (38.1) 1
100 DS363UX 2.00 (50.8) 2
Enclosure
Number
Mounting Dimensions Inside Dimensions Outside Dimensions Number
of
Conduits
K
Dimensions
Approximate
Weight
Lbs (kg)
A B J C D F G H
1 5.50
(139.7)
13.13
(333.5)
14.13
(358.9)
5.94
(150.9)
10.75
(273.1)
10.63
(270.0)
15.25
(387.4)
8.84
(224.5)
2
2.00
(50.8)
38
(17)
2 6.00
(152.4)
18.00
(457.2)
19.00
(482.6)
6.50
(165.1)
16.00
(406.4)
11.00
(279.4)
20.50
(520.7)
8.97
(227.8)
2
2.31
(58.6)
57
(26)
3 10.25
(260.4)
22.63
(574.8)
11.75
(298.4)
20.00
(508.0)
16.38
(416.1)
25.13
(638.3)
9.59
(243.6)
2
3.50
(88.9)
104
(47)
(2) 1/2-inch
(12.7 mm)
NPT
Dimensions are for estimating purposes only.
28.0-25
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
Technical Data
025
Maximum Horsepower Ratings
Table 28.0-25. General-Duty, Fusible and Non-Fusible,
120V with Time Delay Fuses
Table 28.0-26. General-Duty, Fusible and Non-Fusible,
240V with Time Delay Fuses
Table 28.0-27. Heavy-Duty, Non-Fusible, 120V
Table 28.0-28. Heavy-Duty, Fusible, 240V with Time Delay Fuses
Table 28.0-34. Double Throw, Fusible, 240V with Time Delay Fuses
Only available for use with fast acting fuses. Standard hp rating is shown.
Table 28.0-35. Double Throw, Fusible, 480V with Time Delay Fuses
Note: Ratings are based on three-pole designs.
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
2
3
3
7-1/2
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
3
10
15
7-1/2
15
30
200
400
600
15
60
125
200
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
2
3
5
10
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
200
3
10
15
15
7-1/2
15
30
60
400
600
800
125
200
250
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
200
7-1/2
20
30
50
15
30
60
125
400
600
800
250
400
500
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
200
10
25
40
50
20
50
75
150
400
600
800
350
500
500
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
200
3
10
20
15
10
20
40
60
400
600
800
125
200
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
200
7-1/2
20
40
50
20
50
75
125
400
600
800
250
400
500
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
200
10
25
50
50
30
60
100
150
400
600
800
350
500
500
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
3
10
15
7-1/2
15
30
200
400
600
15
60
125
50
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
7-1/2
20
30
15
30
60
200
400
50
125
250
28.0-26
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
Technical Data
026
Maximum Horsepower Ratings
Table 28.0-36. Double-Throw, Fusible, 600V with Time Delay Fuses
Table 28.0-37. Double-Throw, Non-Fusible, 120V
Table 28.0-41. Heavy-Duty, Non-Fusible, 480V, 600V Types 7 and 9
Table 28.0-42. Heavy-Duty, Fusible, 480V, 600V Types 7 and 9 with
Time Delay Fuses
Note: Ratings are based on three-pole designs.
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
10
25
40
20
50
75
200
400
50
150
350
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
2
3
5
10
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
200
3
10
20
15
10
20
40
60
400
600
800
125
125
125
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
200
7-1/2
20
40
50
20
50
75
125
400
600
800
250
250
250
Ampere
Rating
Single-Phase
AC
Three-Phase
AC
30
60
100
200
10
25
50
50
30
60
100
150
400
600
800
350
350
350
Ampere
Rating
Three-Phase, 480V
AC
Three-Phase, 600V
AC
30
60
100
200
20
40
75
125
20
50
75
150
Ampere
Rating
Three-Phase, 480V
AC
Three-Phase, 600V
AC
30
60
100
200
15
30
60
125
20
50
75
150
28.0-27
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
Technical DataShort-Circuit Ratings
027
General-Duty
Table 28.0-43. Short-Circuit Ratings Using Class R,
J or T Fusing where Applicable
Note: Class H fuse clips supplied as standard for 30600A.
Rated at 10,000 rms symmetrical when using class H fuses.
Heavy-Duty
Class L fuse connectors supplied as standard for 800A and 1200A.

Note: Class H fuse clips supplied as standard for 30600A. Rated at
10,000A rms symmetrical when using Class H fuses.
Double Throw
Note: Class H fuse clips supplied as standard for 30600A, except
Class T for 400A at 600V and 600A at 240V. Rated at 10,000A rms
symmetrical when using class H fuses.
Note: Class L fuse connectors supplied as standard for 800A
and 1200A.
Note: Safety switch short-circuit ratings are applicable to AC only.
Note: Safety switch I
2
t and Ip values are identical to UL maximum
acceptable I
2
t and Ip values for the corresponding class fuse.
Note: Table 28.0-45 is not applicable to the compact design shown
in Eatons Volume 2Commercial Distribution, CA08100003E, Tab 8,
Section 8.1. The compact design is suitable for use on a circuit capa-
ble of delivering not more than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
Short-Circuit Ratings of Non-Fusible Switches
The UL listed short-circuit ratings for Eatons non-fusible
switches are based on the switches being properly protected
by overcurrent protective devices. For applications that
require a UL listed short-circuit rating of 10,000 rms
symmetrical amperes or less, an Eaton non-fusible switch
must be properly protected by any overcurrent protective
device rated no greater than the ampere rating of the switch.
For applications that require a UL listed short-circuit rating
of greater than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes, an
Eaton non-fusible switch must be properly protected by
the appropriate class and size fusing noted. Otherwise, this
non-fusible switch must be replaced with an Eaton fusible
switch that uses the appropriate fusing required. Molded-
case circuit breaker protection of non-fusible Eaton switches
for applications that require a short-circuit rating of greater
than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes has been evaluated
and is summarized below. Refer to the reference tables for
typical Eaton fusible switch UL listed short-circuit ratings.
Table 28.0-46. UL Recognized Safety Switch/Circuit Breaker
Series-Connected Ratings
Ampere
Rating
Short-Circuit Ratings (Amperes)
Type 1 Type 3R
30
60
100
100k at 240V
100k at 240V
100k at 240V
100k at 240V
100k at 240V
100k at 240V
200
400
600
100k at 240V
100k at 250V
100k at 250V
100k at 240V
100k at 250V
100k at 250V
Ampere
Rating
Short-Circuit Ratings (Amperes)
Type 1 Type 3R Type 12 Type 4 and 4X
30 200k at 600V 200k at 600V 200k at 600V 200k at 600V
100 200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 600V 200k at 600V
400 200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
600 200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
800
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
200k at 480V
100k at 600V
1200
200k at 600V 200k at 600V 200k at 600V 200k at 600V

Ampere
Rating
Short-Circuit Ratings (Amperes) (600V)
Type 1 Type 3R Type 12 Type 4 and 4X
30
60
100
200
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
400
600
800
1200
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
Safety
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Maximum
System
Voltage AC
Circuit Breaker
Maximum
Short Circuit
Rating (rms
Symmetrical)
Circuit Breaker
Frame(s)
30 and
60
600 25,000
18,000
14,000
FDC, HFD, HFDE, EGH
FD, EGE
FDB
100 600 25,000
18,000
14,000
FDC, HFD, HFDE, EGH
FD, EGE
FDB
480 35,000 EGH, EGS
200 600 25,000
18,000
14,000
FDC, HFD, HFDE, HJD, JGH
FD, JD, JGE
FDB
480 65,000 HFD, HFDE, HJD, JGH
28.0-28
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
Technical DataFuse Dimensions
028
Typical Fuse Dimensions
Figure 28.0-24. Typical Fuse Dimensions in Inches
Note: For typical fuse dimensions in millimeters, see Figure 28.0-25 on Page 28.0-29.
A
B
250V 600V
Ampere A B A B
1/1030 2.00 0.56 5.00 0.81
3560 3.00 0.81 5.50 1.06
250V 600V
Ampere A B A B
70100 5.88 1.06 7.88 1.34
110200 7.13 1.56 9.63 1.84
225400 8.63 2.06 11.63 2.59
10.38 2.59 13.38 3.13
250V 600V
Ampere A B A B
110200 7.13 1.66 9.63 1.66
8.63 2.38 11.63 2.38
450600 10.38 2.88 13.38 2.88
A
B
T-Tron Fuses
JJN (300V) JJS (600V)
Cl J Class J
Low-Peak and Limitron Fuses
(600V)
Cl L Class L Low-Peak and Limitron Fuses
4000A) (600V)
NNote
800A
same dimensions, except tube

3-inch lgth. x 2-inch dia.; terminal
1.63-inch width x 1.25-inch thick.
Class RK5 and RK1 Cl T Class T
Fusetron, Low-Peak and
Limitron Fuses (250 and 600V)
FRN-R and FRS-R; LPN-RK
and LPS-RK; KTN-R and KTS-R
Basic dimensions are same as Class H
(formerly NEC) ONE-TIME (NON and NOS)
and SUPERLAG Renewable RES and
REN fuses.
Note: These fuses can be used to replace
existing Class H, RK1 and RK5 fuses relating
to dimensional compatibility.
70100 5.88 1.16 7.88 1.16
Low-Peak
Fusetron and Limitron
28.0-29
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
Technical DataFuse Dimensions
029
Typical Fuse Dimensions (Continued)
Figure 28.0-25. Typical Fuse Dimensions in Millimeters
Note: For typical fuse dimensions in inches, see Figure 28.0-24 on Page 28.0-28.
A
B
T-Tron Fuses
JJN (300V) JJS (600V)
Class J
Low-Peak and Limitron Fuses
LPJ and JKS (600V)
Class L Low-Peak and Limitron Fuses
KRP-C, KTU and KLU (6014000A) (600V)
Note: KRP-CL (150
800A
samedimensions, except tube

76.2 mm lgth. x 50.8 mm dia.; terminal
41.3 mm width x 31.8 mm thick.
Class RK5 and RK1
250V 600V
Ampere A B A B
1/1030 50.8 14.3 127.0 20.6
3560 76.2 20.6 139.7 27.0
250V 600V
Ampere A B A B
70100 149.2 26.9 200.0 34.0
110 181.0 39.6 244.5 46.7
52.3 295.3 65.8
450 263.5 65.8 339.7 79.5
250V 600V
Ampere A B A B
70100 149.2 29.5 200.0 29.5
110 181.0 42.2 244.5 42.2
60.5 295.3 60.5
450 263.5 73.2 339.7 73.2
A
B
Class T
Fusetron, Low-Peak and
Limitron Fuses (250 and 600V)
FRN-R and FRS-R; LPN-RK
and LPS-RK; KTN-R and KTS-R
Basic dimensions are same as Class H
(formerly NEC) ONE-TIME (NON and NOS)
and SUPERLAG Renewable RES and REN fuses.
Note: These fuses can be used to replace
existing Class H, RK1 and RK5 fuses relating
to dimensional compatibility.
Fusetron and Limitron
Low-Peak
28.0-30
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
Factory ModicationsFlex Center Facility
030
Flex Center
Introduction
The Safety Switch Flex Center is a
special facility at the site of Eatons
Cleveland, Tennessee, plant that is
dedicated to providing customized
safety switches that meet customers
challenging applications.
Eatons Safety Switch Flex Center is a
solutions center that provides real value:
A dedicated and knowledgeable
engineering/manufacturing/customer
service team to meet your needs
A production facility stocked with
a full array of equipment to get the
job done
The industrys shortest lead time
Easy ordering through our distributors
Description (Sufx) Item
Phenolic Nameplates (NP) . . . . . . . . 1
Fungus Proong (FP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Special Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Lock-On Provisions on
Heavy-Duty Safety Switches for
Most Enclosure Types (LO) . . . . . . . 4
Trapped Key Interlock
Systems (TK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Upper Cover Viewing Window (W) . . 6
Lower Cover Viewing Window (LW). . 7
Neutral Assemblies Factory
Installed for Double-Throw
Safety Switches (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Class R Fuse Clips Factory
Installed for Heavy-Duty
Switches (5 or 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Class T Fuse Clips Factory
Installed for Heavy-Duty
Switches (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Class J Fuse Clips Factory
Installed for Heavy-Duty and
Double-Throw Safety Switches (J) . 11
Fuse Pullers Factory Installed (FE) . . 12
Special Crimp Lug Pads Factory
Installed for General-Duty and
Heavy-Duty Switches (CK) . . . . . . . 13
Copper Lugs Factory
Installed (CL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Equipment Ground Lugs
Factory Installed (G) . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Custom Lug Congurations (L) . . . 16
Auxiliary Contacts Factory
Installed (2 or 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Control Pole Factory Installed (CP). . 18
Switching Neutral
Double-Throw (SN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Neutral Assemblies Factory
Installed for Single-Throw
Non-Fusible Safety Switches (N) . . . 20
1. Nameplates
Price covers up to three lines of text
with a maximum of 25 characters per
line. Standard nameplates are laser-
engraved plastic and have black letters
on a white background. Rotary-engraved
phenolic nameplates are also available
at a premium. Additional color
combinations and larger nameplates
are available. Customer must specify
the text when placing an order.
2. Fungus Proong
All non-metallic components of the
switch are coated with a moisture and
fungus-resistant varnish. The inhibitor
used meets military specication:
MIL-V-173C for MOISTURE AND
FUNGUS-RESISTANT TREATMENT.
The treated switch meets military
specication: MIL-T-152E for
MOISTURE AND FUNGUS-RESISTANT
TREATMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS,
ELECTRONICS AND ASSOCIATED
EQUIPMENT. Not UL listed.
To specify, add Sufx FP to standard
safety switch catalog number.
Example: DH363FGKFP.
3. Special Paint
Special paint colors are available
for order quantities of ve or more
switches. Colors available are red,
orange, yellow, green, black and white.
Custom color is applied over the
standard ANSI-61 gray nish.
Minimum quantity of ve of the same
color is required. To specify, add Sufx
LO to the standard catalog number.
For quantities less than ve, higher
ampere ratings, or other color request,
contact the Safety Switch Flex Center.
4. Lock-on Provisions on Heavy-Duty
Safety Switches for Most Enclosure Types
Available on 30800A Heavy-Duty
and Double-Throw Safety Switches.
Provision will accept a single lock. To
specify, add Sufx LO to the standard
catalog number.
5. Trapped Key Interlock Systems
Available only on Heavy-Duty and
Double-Throw Safety Switches.
Trapped Key Systems are used on
safety switches to prevent unautho-
rized operations or to predetermine
a series of power transfers by an
authorized operator.
Before system construction can begin,
the following information must be
provided to the Flex Center:
1. Username, address and
telephone number.
2. Complete coordination (lock
scheme) required with order.
To specify, add Sufx TK to the standard
catalog number.
6. Upper Cover Viewing Window
Upper Viewing Window is Centered
over the switching contacts to provide
visual verication of ON/OFF status.
Available on most Heavy-Duty NEMA 4X
Stainless Steel and NEMA 12 Double-
Throw enclosures. Not available on
nonmetallic enclosures. To specify, add
Sufx W to the standard catalog number.
Note: 30100A switches are now provided
with a full view cover window for blade
verication and blown fuse indication.
7. Lower Cover Viewing Window
Lower Viewing Window is positioned
over fuses and provides visual
verication of Blown Fuse Indicators.
Available in 30600A, two- and three-
pole Heavy-Duty NEMA 12, NEMA 3R
and NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Safety
Switches. Not available on nonmetallic
enclosures. To specify, add Sufx LW
to standard catalog number.
Note: 30100A switches are now provided
with a full view cover window for blade
verication and blown fuse indication.
8. Neutral Assemblies Factory Installed
for Double-Throw Safety Switches
To specify, add Sufx N to the standard
Example: DT361URKN
9. Class R Fuse Clips Factory Installed for
Heavy-Duty Switches
To specify, add Sufx 5 to the standard
catalog number for 240V application.
Add Sufx 6 to standard catalog
number for 600V application.
Example: DH324FRK5
10. Class T Fuse Clips Factory Installed
for Heavy-Duty Switches
To specify, add Sufx T to the standard
catalog number (catalog number
identies voltage).
Example: DH364FGKT
28.0-31
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Safety Switches
Factory ModicationsFlex Center Facility
031
11. Class J Fuse Clips Factory Installed
for Heavy-Duty and Double-Throw Safety
Switches
To specify by description. A table
of common 30A heavy-duty switches
with J fuse clips factory installed is
shown below (eld modication kits
are not available for 30A Heavy-Duty
Switches).
Table 28.0-47. Common 30A Heavy-Duty
Switches with J Fuse Clips Factory Installed
To specify, add Sufx J to the
standard catalog number (catalog
number identies voltage).
Example: DH363FGKJ
12. Fuse Pullers Factory Installed
To specify, add Sufx FE to the
standard catalog number.
Example: DH361FRKFE.
Note: Standard NEMA 12/3R, 4 and 4X
switches through 200A are supplied with
fuse pullers from the factory.
13. Special Crimp Lug Pads Factory Installed
for General-Duty and Heavy-Duty Switches
(Crimp Lugs are Not Included)
To specify add Sufx CK to the
standard safety switch catalog number.
Heavy-Duty Type DH Switches,
30200A, are adaptable to crimp
lugs; simply remove the box lugs.
14. Copper Lugs Factory Installed
To specify, add Sufx CL to the standard
Example: DH221FGKCL
15. Equipment Ground Lugs Factory
Installed for General-Duty and
Heavy-Duty Switches
To specify, add Sufx G to the standard
16. Custom Lug Congurations
Customer-specied lug arrangements
are available on heavy-duty and double-
throw safety switches. Contact the
Safety Switch Flex Center for price
and lead time.
17. Auxiliary Contacts Factory Installed
Provide Early-Make/Early-Break Operation
To specify 1NO/1NC contacts, add
Sufx 2 to the standard safety switch
catalog number.
To specify 2NO/2NC contacts, add
Sufx 3 to the standard safety switch
catalog number.
Example: DH423FGK2
Example: DT324FGK22
18. Control Pole Factory Installed Provides
Late-Make/Early-Break Operation
The K-Series Control Pole provides
one Normally Open contact, late-
make, early-break operation. It mounts
in the exact location as the neutral
block using the same pre-drilled holes.
This is directly connected to the power
pole operating shaft. Direct connection
and visible blades provide more
secure electrical interlocking than
handle linkage operation of a snap/
switch type interlock. This reliability
meets the requirements of many
specications for four-pole switches
when the fourth pole is required
for secure electrical interlocking.
To specify, add Sufx CP to the
standard Safety Switch catalog number.
Example: DH267FGKCP
19. Switching Neutral Double-Throw
UL listed for three-pole and four-pole
non-fusible double-throw safety
switches. Switching neutrals are
required for separately derived
systems when bonding the neutral of
the generator to a grounding system
at the generator.
To specify, add Sufx SN to the standard
Example: DT324URKSN
20. Neutral Assemblies Factory Installed for
Single-Throw Non-Fusible Safety Switches
Available on 200600A General-Duty
Safety Switches and 301200A Heavy-
Duty Safety Switches.
To specify, add Sufx N to the standard
Safety Switch Catalog Number.
Example: DH364UWKN
For application, availability or pricing
questions, contact Eaton.
Additional Safety Switch Flex
Center Design Offerings
Left-hand design (30200A)
Cover-mounted status lights and
selector switches
Integrated:
Surge protection devices (SPDs)
Current transformers
Double-throw receptacle switches
200% neutrals
1200A NEMA 4X stainless steel
Seam-welded stainless steel
Gang-operated kits:
Mechanically interlocks two or
three separate switches
Cam-Lok receptacles
Reverse feed
Integrated wattmeter
Custom enclosures
Double-throw switches with windows
316 Grade stainless steel
Mill duty
Literature
The Safety Switch Flex Centers inno-
vative approach to exible engineering,
manufacturing and customer service
provides the shortest production, design
and delivery cycle in the industry. Find
out more about how the Safety Switch
Flex Center can give you the safety
switch solutions you need...when you
need them.
Voltage Switch Type
Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
240 NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
NEMA 12
NEMA 4X
DH321FGKJ
DH321FRKJ
DH321FDKJ
DH321FWKJ
600 NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
NEMA 12
NEMA 4X
DH361FGKJ
DH361FRKJ
DH361FDKJ
DH361FWKJ
28.0-32
September 2011
Sheet 28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
032


September 2011

Contents

Motor Control CentersLow Voltage
29.0-1

Sheet

29

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

001

M
o
t
o
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

C
e
n
t
e
r
s
L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

Freedom 2100 and Freedom

FlashGard Motor Control Centers

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-1

Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-1

NEMA Wiring Classications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-2

Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-2

Wireways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-3

Bus System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-3

Starter Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-6

Feeder Tap Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-7

Stab Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-7

Handle Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-8

Device Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-9

Unit Wrapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-9

Unit Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-10

Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-10

Unit Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-10

Additional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-11

Control/Load Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-11

Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-11

Remote Racking Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-12

Voltage Presence Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-12

Automatic Insulation Tester. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-12

FlashGard Padlock Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-12

SPD Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-12

MCC Motor Control Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-13

Data Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-14

DeviceNet Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-15

PROFIBUS Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-15

Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-16

Web-Enabled MCC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-17

Harmonic Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-20

Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-21

Additional Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-22

Layout Guide Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-23

Layout and Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.1-24
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


FlashGard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Freedom 2100 Motor
Control Center
Freedom FlashGard
29.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

29

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

002



29.1-1

September 2011


Sheet

29

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard

General Description

003

Freedom 2100 and
Freedom FlashGard


Freedom 2100 Motor Control Center
Freedom FlashGard Motor Control Center

General Description

Freedom 2100
Introduction

Eatons Freedom 2100 motor control
centers (MCCs) provide a convenient
method for grouping motor control,
as well as associated distribution
equipment. Freedom 2100 Series
MCCs may be applied on electrical
systems up to 600V, 50 or 60 Hz,
having available fault currents of up
to 100,000A rms. Enclosure designs
include NEMA

1 Gasketed, NEMA 2,
12 and 3R. All controllers are assem-
bled with Eaton components of proven
safety, quality and reliability. All
components are wired in accordance
with NEC

and UL

standards. A
comprehensive range of communica-
tions options are available, including
DeviceNet, Modbus

, PROFIBUS

,
Modbus TCP and EtherNet/IP.

Freedom 2100 Features

UL 845 label

42, 65 and 100 kAIC ratings

Molded-case and air power
circuit breakers

Across-the-line, reduced voltage
and solid-state starters

Variable frequency drives and
VFD options

Unit latch

Spring-loaded door latches

All standard industrial
communication options


Panelboards and transformers

Freedom FlashGard
Introduction

Eatons Freedom FlashGard MCCs
are an industry rst in addressing the
dangers associated with an arc ash
event by minimizing the risk of arc
ash exposure, and lowering the PPE
requirements as dened by the NFPA

70E.2004, for low voltage applications.
Freedom FlashGard offers features to
help prevent injury from electric shock,
arc-ash burn and arc-blast impacts.
A retractable stab mechanism, 120V
based electromechanical and solid-
state motor control with communica-
tions capability enables these MCCs
to provide the highest level of safety,
quality and innovation for group
motor control. A comprehensive
range of communications options
are available, including DeviceNet,
Modbus, PROFIBUS and EtherNet/IP.
The new Freedom FlashGard MCC
uses a retractable stab mechanism,
called RotoTract, which allows
the electrical worker to connect and
disconnect power to the bucket with
the unit door closed. A visual indica-
tion is provided on the unit door on
the Connected and Disconnected
positions of RotoTract. A visual indica-
tion on the position of the shutters
that enclose the stabs is also provided
(open shutters indicates that stabs are
extended and closed shutters indicate
that the stabs are withdrawn). In
addition, a number of safety interlocks
prevents scenarios where removal or
insertion of FlashGard bucket could
compromise arc ash safety. A motor-
ized tool, such as an electric screwdriver
with a 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) square bit or
standard 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) drive ratchet
is required to operate RotoTracts
retractable stab mechanism. An
optional remote racking accessory
with a pendant station is available
as to enable the operator to connect
and disconnect starters safely behind
the arc ash boundaries prescribed by
National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA).

Freedom FlashGard Features

UL 845 label

42, 65 and 100 kAIC ratings

Retractable stab mechanism with
connected and disconnected
positions

Molded-case and air power
circuit breakers

Unit latch

Spring-loaded door latches

Remote racking

Across-the-line, reduced voltage
and solid-state starters

Variable frequency and solid-state
reduced voltage starter options

All standard industrial
communication options


Panelboards and transformers

Product Description

MCCs provide the best method for
grouping motor control as well as
associated distribution equipment.
Eatons Freedom 2100 and Freedom
FlashGard Series control centers are

specially designed to operate machinery,

industrial processes and commercial
building systems.
The MCC enclosure consists of a
strong and rigid steel channel frame-
work assembled into standardized
vertical sections and bolted together
to form a complete shipping section
of up to 80.00-inch (2032.0 mm)
maximum, four structures each.
Structures include horizontal and
vertical bus, insulation and isolation
barriers, horizontal and vertical
isolated wiring troughs, cable entrance
areas, and space for inserting starter
and control equipment.
All control units, removable or xed
mounted, are assembled with Eaton
components of proven safety, quality
and reliability. All components are
wired in accordance with NEC and
UL standards. Specically designed
bus stabs, insertion guides, handle
mechanisms and safety interlocks
are added to form a standardized
plug-in unit, which meets the highest
safety standards.
29.1-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

29

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43


General Description

004

Series MCCs may be applied on
electrical systems up to 600V, 50 or
60 Hz having available fault currents of
up to 100,000A rms. Enclosure designs
include NEMA 1 Gasketed, 2, 12, 3R,
3R Walk-in and 3R Walk-in Tunnel. An
ongoing temperature and short-circuit
design test program, as required by
UL 845, ensures a quality product that
meets the latest safety codes.
Freedom DC motor control centers are
available up to 250 Vdc, having avail-
able fault currents up to 22,000A rms.

NEMA Classications (ICS 3, Part 1)

Class I Control Centers

A mechanical grouping of combina-
tion motor control, feeder tap and/or
other units arranged in a convenient
assembly. Connections from the
common horizontal power bus to
the units are included. Interwiring or
interlocking between units or to
remotely mounted devices is not
included. Only diagrams of the
individual units are supplied.
When master terminal blocks are
specied, a sketch showing general
location of terminals is provided.

Class II Control Centers

The same as Class I, but designed
to form a complete control system.
They include the necessary electrical
interlocking and interwiring between
units and interlocking provisions to
remotely mounted devices. A suitable
diagram illustrating operation of the
control associated with the motor
control center will be provided.
When master terminal blocks are
specied, the terminal arrangement
and required wiring connections are
shown on the diagram.

NEMA Types of Wiring

Type A

includes no terminal blocks.
Combination line starters power
wiring are factory wired and assembled
in the structure in the most efcient
arrangement. Auxiliary devices can
be supplied, wired or unwired as
specied. All feeder circuit breaker
or fusible disconnect units are in
this classication.

Type B

duplicates Type A except that
all control wires terminate at blocks on
the side or near the bottom of each
unit. Plug-in type terminal blocks are
standard for all control wiring.

Type C-S

all factory-supplied control
terminals are brought to a master
terminal block located in the structure.

Type C-M

all factory-supplied control
terminals are brought to a master
terminal block located in a separate
marshaling structure.

Structures

Standard StructureSide View

Construction

The standard vertical structure is
90.00 inches (2286.0 mm) high and
20.00 inches (508.0 mm) wide. Front-
mounted-only structures can be
either 16.00 inches (406.4 mm) or
21.00 inches (533.4 mm) deep. Back-
to-back unit mounting is 21.00 inches
(533.4 mm) deep.
The structure framework is made of
12-gauge formed steel channels. The
subframes for the front and rear of
each structure are welded. These sub-
frames are then bolted to longitudinal
members to form the complete frame,
which is rigid and self-supporting.
Side, back and roof covers of 14-gauge
steel are mounted with screw fasteners
for quick and easy removal. All doors
are 14-gauge steel with a 0.50-inch
(12.7 mm) ange to provide a rigid,
secure closure for all openings. Doors
mounted on removable pin hinges are
provided on all unit compartments.
Vertical wireways, top horizontal
wireways and bottom horizontal
wireways are standard.
The unit pan forms the top barrier
of each unit space. In conjunction
with the unit wrapper, this provides
isolation between adjacent units
and wireways. The guide rails are an
integral part of this pan and provide
precise alignment of the unit stabs
on the vertical bus.

Standard Structure Arrangements

Standard structural height is
90.00 inches (2286.0 mm) with
9.00-inch (228.6 mm) horizontal wire-
ways available at top and bottom for
wiring. The balance of vertical com-
partments, 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm),
is available for mounting of control
units. This space can provide up to 12
6.00-inch (152.4 mm) high (X spaces)
or any combination thereof.

Note:

In the rear of common vertical bus
back-to-back structures, the top horizontal
wireway is 15.00 inches (381.0 mm) high
and the bottom wireway is 9.00 inches
(228.6 mm). This means that back-to-back
structures have only 66.00 inches
(1676.4 mm) 11X of usable space in
the rear. 72.00-inch (1828.8 mm) 12X of
mounting space is available with a 3.00-inch
(76.2 mm) bottom wireway. Two front-
mounted only structures can be supplied
in a back-to-back conguration, allowing
12X rear usable space (depth dimension
will increase).

Special Structures

In addition to the standard 20.00-inch
(508.0 mm) wide structure, extra wide
structures are available in 4.00-inch
(101.6 mm) increments up to
40.00 inches (1016.0) wide.
Reduced height structures, in
increments of 6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
1X from 90.00 to 54.00 inches (2286.0
to 1371.6 mm), are available for
applications with limited access.
Another special structure is a transition
section between Type W and the
Freedom 2100 Series. This structure
is 10.00 inches (254.0 mm) wide to
provide for horizontal bus splicing.


29.1-3

September 2011


Sheet

29

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43


General Description

005

Paint

All enclosure parts are thoroughly
cleaned and given a phosphatizing
treatment to inhibit rust and to prime
the metal for the nish coating. A 2 mil
thick electrostatic powder paint coat
is applied to all surfaces. The paint
type and process meets UL 1332 for
electrical equipment steel enclosures.
All exterior enclosure covers and
doors are painted ANSI 61 gray
(Munsell No. 8.3G/6.10/0.54). For
improved interior visibility, the
interior of the enclosure and
plug-in units are painted white
(Munsell No. N9.43/0.21B, 0.23).

Enclosures

The standard enclosure type is
NEMA Type 1 Gasketed General
PurposeIndoor. This enclosure
is appropriate for installations with
normal atmospheric conditions.
The NEMA Type 2 DripproofIndoor
employs a special roof panel with a
drip shield and water channels. This
prevents liquid from dripping onto
the front of the control center.
The NEMA Type 3R Rainproof and
Sleet ResistantOutdoor consists
of a NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure
mounted on a special base with an
outdoor house erected around and
over it. Non-walk-in, walk-in aisle
and tunnel types are available.
The NEMA Type 12 Dust-tight and
DriptightIndoor has gasketed
material around all doors, door
cutouts, cover plates, side, top and
back sheets. A gasketed bottom plate
is provided with this enclosure. This
construction provides maximum
protection against airborne matter
and dripping liquids.
Indoor enclosures comply with NEC
UL 845s Two Meter Rule when the
bottom of the MCC is at the same
level as the operators platform. MCCs
elevated on a raised pad or installed
on unembedded channel sills may
require operator handle extensions
for the uppermost operators. Handle
extensions are optionally available
and may be installed on-site.

Seismic Qualication

Refer to

Tab 1

for information on

Vertical Wireway

A vertical wireway is provided in each
structure. Located on the right side, it
extends the full 90.00-inch (2286.0 mm)
height of the structure. The width of the
wireway is 4-5/8 inches (117.5 mm) at
the rear of the vertical frame members.
Overall depth of the wireway is 8.00
inches (203.2 mm) providing a cross-
sectional area of nearly 35 square
inches (889 square mm) to easily
accommodate control and load
wiring. Supports are provided at
suitable intervals to secure all wiring
and cables.
The doors swing open 115 and
opposite to the unit doors for maxi-
mum accessibility. The doors are
mounted on concealed removable
pin hinges for quick detachment and
are secured in the closed position by
spring-loaded quarter-turn indicating
type fastener.

Horizontal Wireways

Top Horizontal Wireway
Bottom Horizontal Wireway

The top front horizontal wireway is
8.00 inches (203.2 mm) deep in front-
mounted only structures and in the
front of back-to-back mounted struc-
tures. It extends the full width of each
structure and is totally isolated from
the main horizontal bus. The bottom
horizontal wireway is 9.00 inches
(228.6 mm) high and extends the full
depth of the structure. The entire oor
area under the control center is open
for unrestricted conduit entry. For top
entry, the top wireway can be increased
to 15.00 inches (381.0 mm) high,
reducing the bottom wireway height
to 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
For back-to-back unit mounted,
the rear top horizontal wireway is
5.00 inches (127.0 mm) deep.
All horizontal wireway openings
are covered by doors for increased
accessibility. Each door is mounted
with removable pin hinges to allow
quick detachment.

Bus System

The bus system is designed to
efciently distribute power
throughout the MCC and provides
inherent mechanical strength in the
event of faults.

Vertical Bus

Vertical Bus Conguration

The vertical bus provides three-phase
power distribution from the main
horizontal bus into the vertical
compartments. The bus is a unique
angular conguration with a Z
shape for front-mounted structures
and for back-to-back. These shapes
have the inherent mechanical strength
to withstand fault stresses. They also
provide a smooth stabbing surface for
unit connection.

MCC Bus Layout
29.1-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

29

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43


General Description

006
Due to the high-strength capability
of the bus bars, bus bracing at
65,000 rms symmetrical amperes is
standard. Optional bracing is available
at 42,000 and 100,000A rms. Bus
braces are molded from a glass-
reinforced polyester material, which
is non-tracking and impervious
to moisture and other adverse
atmospheric operating conditions.
The vertical bus is available in
ratings of 600, 800 and 1200A for
front-mounted only, and 600, 800
and 1200A for back-to-back mounted.
Vertical bus bars are tin-plated copper
only. In addition to tin plating having
environmental superiority over silver,
its mechanical strength is better able to
withstand the stresses of unit insertion
and removal on and off the bus. Vertical
bus of the incoming section will match
the horizontal bus when applicable.
Isolation of the Freedom 2100 vertical
bus compartment from the unit
compartment is accomplished by
a full height barrier.
This is a single sheet of glass-
reinforced polyester with cutouts to
allow the unit stabs to engage the
vertical bus. Snap-in covers are
available for the cutout openings
to provide total isolation during
maintenance procedures.
Standard Isolation Barrier
Standard Isolation Barrier Rear View
When insulation and isolation of the
vertical bus is required, a labyrinth
design barrier, as shown below, as
an option for Freedom 2100 and as
a standard for Freedom FlashGard.
This barrier is molded glass-reinforced
polyester and forms a labyrinth
around the bus bars to prevent fault
propagation. This design provides
maximum protection against phase-to-
phase insulation breakdown. Thermal
efciency is maintained by a close
tolerance t between the bus bars
and the barrier, which minimizes
air pockets.
An automatic shutter mechanism
is standard with the labyrinth barrier
to provide complete isolation of the
vertical bus. The shutter moves auto-
matically to cover the stab openings
when a unit is removed. This provides
maintenance personnel with maxi-
mum protection because the vertical
bus is never exposed. As the unit is
reinserted in the compartment, the
shutter moves sideways to uncover
the stab openings in the barrier.
Labyrinth Barrier with
Automatic Shutter Mechanism
Horizontal Bus
Horizontal Bus
The main horizontal bus provides
three-phase power distribution from
the incoming line or primary discon-
nect device to each vertical structure in
the motor control center. The bus bars
are mounted in a vertical plane, edge
to edge. This mounting produces an
exceptionally strong assembly, able to
withstand high fault current stresses.
The main horizontal bus is rated at
600A as standard with ratings
of 800, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500 and
3200A optionally available. Tin-plated
copper horizontal bus bars are supplied
as standard. Silver-plated copper
horizontal bus bars are also available.
Note: 3200A horizontal bus available in
NEMA 1A enclosure only and 65C rise
above 40C ambient only.
The horizontal main bus is isolated
from the top horizontal wireway
compartment by a metal isolation
barrier. This two-piece steel barrier
extends to the full width of each vertical
structure. The two-piece design allows
access to bus connections without the
removal of the entire barrier, for added
maintenance convenience. The bus
bar layout permits front access to all
bus connections. This allows mainte-
nance personnel to make splices and
check splice bolt torques from the
front of the structure.
29.1-5
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
007
Neutral Assemblies
Neutral Bus (Bottom)
For three-phase, four-wire applica-
tions, a neutral landing pad is
provided as standard. This is a 100%
rated neutral. As an option, half or
fully rated neutral bus can be supplied
in the bottom of the entire MCC.
Ground Bus
Ground Bus (Top)
Copper ground bus, rated 300A
0.25-inch by 1.00-inch (6.4 mm by
25.4 mm) is supplied as standard.
Mounting is across the top of each
vertical structure in the horizontal
wireway. The bus can also be mounted
across the bottom when the bottom
9.00 inches (228.6 mm) are not
occupied by units or master terminal
blocks. A 0.25-inch by 2.00-inch
(6.4 mm by 50.8 mm) optional copper
ground bus rated 600 or 800A is
also available.
An optional 300A vertical tin-plated only
copper ground bus is available.
Located in the vertical wireway, it
provides direct starter unit grounding.
Units
General
Motor starter units are combination
type employing a linestarter and a
disconnect device of proven capability.
The disconnect device can be a motor
circuit protector, circuit breaker or
fusible switch. Eatons Type HMCP and
HMCPE motor circuit protectors are
furnished as standard.
All starters and soft starters through
NEMA Size 5 are a drawout design
except Size 5 electromechanical
reduced voltage.
All feeder breakers through 400A are a
drawout design.
All dimensions and ratings in the
following tables are based on NEMA
Design B, 1800 RPM motors.
The HMCP/HMCPE and starter
combination has a 65,000 rms
symmetrical ampere short-circuit
current rating as standard at 480V.
Starter units are available with
optional 100,000A short-circuit
current rating. Series C thermal-
magnetic circuit breakers (65 kAIC,
or optional 100 kAIC) for starter
units are also available.
starters meet or exceed IEC 947-4
Type II testing with HMCP, or R and
J fuses.
The fusible switch disconnect device
is the Type K. It is a quick-make, quick-
break, visible blade switch with fuse
clips for use with current-limiting or
dual element, rejection type, NEMA
Class J or R fuses. Rejection fuse clips
for Class RK-5 fuses are standard.
Fuses are not included as standard.
Both breaker and fuse selection must
take into consideration the total short-
circuit capacity of the system to which
the control center is connected.
Typical starter units available include
the following:
Full voltage, non-reversing
Full voltage, reversing
Two-speed, single winding
and two winding
Reduced voltage, autotransformer,
closed transition
Reduced voltage, wye delta
Reduced voltage, part winding
Reduced voltage, solid-state
Adjustable frequency drives
Each starter includes a stainless steel
corrosion-resistant safety ground clip
that makes connection before the
power stabs engage the vertical bus.
UnitsFreedom 2100 Starter
Freedom 2100 FVNR Starter
Freedom Series 2100 starter units
are equipped with Eatons Freedom
starters and contactors NEMA Sizes 1
through 5. Size 6 and 7 starters are
A200 type. These contactors have
been successfully applied in thousands
of the most demanding industrial
applications. Overload protection is
provided by a three-pole adjustable
ambient compensated, bi-metallic
thermal overload relay. The overload
relay also provides single-phase
sensitivity and isolated alarm contact.
As an option, the overload relay can
be upgraded to a standard solid-state
overload or an advanced solid-state
overload as described on Page 29.1-20.
An insulated hand reset button
extends through the compartment
door. Additionally, motor running data
and starter status/control are available
through one of the many industrial
communication protocols.
29.1-6
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
008
UnitsFreedom FlashGard Starter
Freedom FlashGard FVNR Starter
The Freedom FlashGard units are
equipped with a retractable stab
mechanism called RotoTract, that
allows the electrical worker to connect
and disconnect power to the bucket
with the unit door closed, thereby
minimizing exposure to arc ash. A
visual indication is provided on the
unit door on the Connected and
Disconnected positions of RotoTract.
A visual indication on the position of the
shutters that enclose the stabs is also
provided (open shutters indicate that
stabs are extended and closed shutters
indicate that the stabs are withdrawn).
A motorized tool such as an electric
screwdriver, drill with a 3/8-inch square
drill bit or standard 3/8-inch drive
ratchet is used to operate RotoTract
through its racking tool receiver.
Additional safety features of a
FlashGard unit include:
Unit LatchWhen the RotoTract is
in Connected or Test position,
this latch is mechanically inter-
locked to hook the bucket to the
divider pan that separates the
bucket from the unit above, thereby
preventing physical removal of the
bucket when it is connected to 480V
and/or control power. The unit latch
also prevents insertion of a bucket
with the stabs extended
RotoTract racking tool receiver
shutterWhen the breaker is in the
On position, the shutter for the
access hole in the RotoTract (access
hole is needed for the motorized
tool to retract the stabs) is closed,
thereby not allowing the stabs to
be retracted when the breaker
is energized
Freedom FlashGard starters are
equipped with electromechanical
starters and contactors NEMA
size 15.
UnitsAC Drives
Adjustable Frequency Drive
Adjustable Frequency Drives are
available from 0.51100 hp for
control of standard AC motors in
processes that benet from the ability
to change motor speed. Use of Inverter
Duty motors is recommended.
Controllers are available to handle
constant torque applications, such as
conveyors and crushers, and variable
Racking Tool Receiver
Power Stab
Position
Connected
Disconnected
Handle
Mechanism
Breaker
Starter
Unit Latch
Internal Shutter
Position
Open
Closed
Pilot Device
Island
Start, Stop,
Auto/Man
torque applications, such as fans and
pumps. Control schemes are available
for volts/Hz, open loop vector and
closed loop vector models. SVX9000
drive units include as standard: line
reactors and a door-mounted keypad.
Units up to 150 hp VT have a standard
output reactor for dV/dT ltering. MVX
drive units include as standard: a line
reactor, viewing window for drive
display and an output lter. All drive
structures are bus connected, which
allows for expansion of the MCC on
both sides of the structure. A wide
range of AFD features and options are
available to meet the requirements of
most applications. AFDs are available
in NEMA 1A gasketed enclosures.
AFDs are available in NEMA 3R
MCC enclosures from 1200 hp,
constant torque.
UnitsSolid-State
S801 SSRV Starter 135A
S801/S811 Solid-State Reduced
Voltage (SSRV) starters are designed
to reduce the inrush current to a motor
during starting and to limit the amount
of available starting torque, thus
reducing mechanical wear and utility
demand requirements. The amount
of starting current is eld adjustable
to match the specic requirements of
all applications.
Eatons S801/S811 SSRV controllers
are available with a wide variety of
standard features: kick start, soft stop,
phase loss and stall protection. S801/
S811 SSRV starters are 3070% smaller
than competitive designs.
Typical applications include conveyors,
compressors, machine tools, pumps
and fans.
29.1-7
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
009
UnitsDC Starters
DC Starter Unit
UL listed DC MCCs use combination
circuit breaker DC starters suitable for
motor starting duty only. Using Eatons
Type ME DC denite purpose contac-
tors, all DC starters are suitable for up
to 250 Vdc and have a 22 kA withstand
rating. Class 135 starting resistors for
reduced voltage starters are sized
for 200% starting current. Typical
applications include emergency lube
oil pumps, emergency seal oil pumps
and emergency turning gear motors.
Freedom 2100 Feeder Tap Units
Freedom 2100 Dual Feeder Tap Unit
Feeder tap units may contain either
circuit breakers or fusible switches.
Freedom 2100 drawout breaker units
include the xed trip Type HFD, single-
or dual-mounted in ratings through
150A and the interchangeable trip
Types HJD and HKD single-mounted
through 250A and 400A respectively.
Larger Series C
circuit breakers with

ratings to 2500A are xed-mounted.
Fusible feeder tap units use Eatons
Type K visible blade disconnect switch.
Fused switches are mounted in drawout
units through 400A with 30A and 60A
ratings available in dual mountings.
Fixed-mounted switch ratings of 600A
and 800A are also available.
All switches are supplied with fuse
dual-element rejection type. Types of
fuses include Class J, R or L, which are
supplied by others.
Freedom FlashGard Feeder
Tap Units
Circuit Breaker Handle Mechanism
Feeder tap units may contain either
circuit breakers or fusible switches.
Drawout breaker units include the
xed trip Type HFD, single-mounted
in ratings through 150A and the
interchangeable trip Type HJD single-
mounted through 250A and Type HKD
single-mounted through 400A. Larger
Series C circuit breakers with ratings
to 2500A are xed-mounted.
Fusible feeder tap units use Eatons
Type K visible blade disconnect switch.
Fused switches are mounted in drawout
units through 400A with 30A and 60A
ratings available in dual mountings.
Fixed-mounted switch ratings of 600A
and 800A are also available.
All switches are supplied with fuse
dual-element rejection type. Types of
fuses include Class J, R or L supplied
by others.
Freedom 2100 Stab Assembly
Freedom 2100 Plug-in Unit Bus Stabs
A tin-plated copper alloy stab incor-
porates the ultimate in mechanical
simplicity to provide precise control
of contact pressure on the bus.
This ensures a positive connection
yet permits easy unit insertion and
withdrawal. Self-aligning stabs are
mounted in a glass-reinforced plastic
insulation block that totally shrouds
each stab and absolutely ensures
positive alignment of the stabs with
the vertical bus. The insulation block is
also an integral part of the phase-to-
phase isolation system. Power wiring
is welded to the stabs and is totally
contained within the unit enclosure.
This means the vertical bus compart-
ment is completely free of wiring for
maximum safety and reliability.
Stab assemblies are accurately matched
to the electrical requirements of each
individual unit and are provided in
60, 150, 300 or 400A ratings (plug-in
through Size 5).
Freedom FlashGard Stab Assembly
Freedom FlashGard Plug-in Unit Bus Stabs
The Freedom FlashGard MCC uses a
retractable stab mechanism, called
RotoTract, that allows the electrician to
connect and disconnect power to the
bucket with the unit door closed.
A visual indication is provided on
the unit door on the Connected
and Disconnected positions of
RotoTract. A visual indication on the
position of the shutters that enclose
the stabs is also provided (open
shutters indicate that stabs are
extended and closed shutters indicate
that the stabs are withdrawn). A
motorized tool or standard 3/8-inch
(9.5 mm) drive ratchet is used to
operate RotoTracts retractable stab
mechanism. A wired remote racking
accessory is also available for operat-
ing RotoTract with a pendant station
safely beyond the NFPA-prescribed
ash protection boundaries.
Stabs Extended
Stabs Withdrawn
29.1-8
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
010
The stabs are constructed from a tin-
plated copper alloy, incorporating the
ultimate in mechanical simplicity to
provide precise control of contact
pressure on the bus. This ensures
a positive connection, yet permits
easy unit insertion and withdrawal.
The stabs are self-aligning and are
mounted in a glass-reinforced plastic
insulation block, which totally shrouds
each stab and ensures positive align-
ment of the stabs with the vertical bus.
The insulation block is also an integral
part of the phasephase isolation
system. Power wiring is welded to
the stabs and is totally contained
within the unit enclosure. The wire
is designed for a high level of
exibility to be suitable for RotoTracts
retractable stab mechanism.
Stab assemblies are accurately
matched to the electrical requirements
of each individual unit and are
provided in 60A, 150A, 300A or 400A
ratings (plug-in through Size 5).
Freedom 2100 Handle Mechanism
The handle mechanism is designed to
provide a high mechanical leverage so
that little effort is required to operate
any device.
The standard handle mechanism is a
vertical motion type device with four
positions: ON, OFF, TRIPPED and RESET.
Only circuit breaker types have tripped
and reset positions. It is securely
mounted to the front of the unit and
mechanically connected to the breaker
or fusible switch, eliminating alignment
problems. It provides a positive indica-
tion of the breaker or switch position,
even with the door open.
Unit Insertion Interlock
The handle and exterior front panel are
molded from the same plastic material
as the device panel. A textured surface
preserves the appearance. The ON
position indicator is at the top and is
a bright red. The OFF/RESET position
is at the bottom and is bright green.
The TRIP position, a bright yellow, is
in the middle, between the ON and OFF
position. All position indicator colors
contrast with the black background and
are highly visible even at considerable
distances. The operating handle is
designed for rugged duty and solid
operator feel.
Padlocking Bar
The handle mechanism provides
several safety features:
In the ON position, an interlock
prevents the unit door from being
opened. A door interlock defeater
screw located above the handle
is provided to enable authorized
maintenance personnel access to
the units when required
With the unit door open and the
operating handle in the ON position,
an interlock slides into a slot in the
divider pan above and prevents
removal of the unit. This same
interlock prevents insertion of the
unit unless the handle mechanism
is in the OFF position. The interlock
also prevents the operating handle
from being turned on with the unit
door open
To ensure that units are not energized
accidentally or by unauthorized per-
sonnel, the handle mechanism can
be padlocked in the OFF position.
Sufcient space is available for a
maximum of three padlocks. Where
critical processes are involved and
to prevent unauthorized shutdown,
the handle mechanism can be
modied to enable padlocking in
the ON position
Freedom FlashGard Handle
Mechanism
The handle mechanism is designed to
provide a high mechanical leverage, so
that little effort is required to operate
any device.
The standard handle mechanism is a
vertical motion type device with four
positions: ON, OFF, TRIPPED and RESET.
Only circuit breaker types have tripped
and reset positions. It is securely
mounted to the front of the unit and
mechanically connected to the breaker
or fusible switch, eliminating align-
ment problems. It provides a positive
indication of the breaker or switch
position, even with the door open.
Unit Insertion Interlock
The handle and exterior front panel are
molded from the same plastic material
as the device panel. A textured surface
preserves the appearance. The ON
position indicator is at the top and is
a bright red. The OFF/RESET position
is at the bottom and is bright green.
29.1-9
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
011
The TRIP position, a bright yellow, is
in the middle, between the ON and
OFF position. All position indicator col-
ors contrast with the black background
and are highly visible even at consid-
erable distances. The operating handle
is designed for rugged duty and solid
operator feel.
Padlocking Bar
The handle mechanism for Freedom
FlashGard provides several safety
features:
In the ON position, an interlock
prevents the unit door from being
opened. A door interlock defeater
screw located to the right of the
handle is provided to enable autho-
rized maintenance personnel access
to the units when required
The unit insertion interlock is located
to the left of the operating handle.
The interlock must be in the locked
position in order to turn the discon-
nect on. When the interlock is in the
locked position, the unit cannot be
withdrawn or inserted
To ensure that units are not
energized accidentally or by
unauthorized personnel, the handle
mechanism can be padlocked in
the OFF position. Sufcient space
is available for a maximum of three
padlocks. Where critical processes
are involved and to prevent
unauthorized shutdown, the
handle mechanism can be
modied to enable padlocking
in the ON position
Each unit has a safe lock position. This
interlock will lock the unit in a position
off the 480V bus and ensure the unit
cannot be inserted or withdrawn.
Freedom FlashGard Unit
Wrapper Side Latch
Device Panel
Standard Device Panel
The device panel can accommodate
up to six 1-3/16-inch (30.2 mm) Eatons
10250T type pilot devices such as
oiltight pushbuttons, indicating lights,
selector switches and miniature meters.
Molded into the panel is a knockout for
each device location. This facilitates the
future addition of devices to the panel.
The device panel is hinged on a
horizontal pivot tube extending across
the front of the unit. With the unit door
open, loosening two captive retaining
screws at the top of the panel and
sliding it 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) left,
permits it to swing down. This
provides ready access to the rear of
the panel and increased accessibility
to the unit interior.
Nameplates
Unit nameplates are engraved with
3/16-inch (4.8 mm) high white lettering
on a black background (black lettering
on a white background optional).
They are heat- and crack-resistant to
eliminate the need for replacement.
Nameplates are mounted with
stainless steel self-tapping screws.
Freedom 2100 Unit Wrapper
Freedom 2100 Plug-in Unit Wrapper
Freedom FlashGard Unit Wrapper
Freedom FlashGard Plug-in Unit Wrapper
The unit wrapper is fabricated of
14-gauge steel. After fabrication, it
is cleaned and given a rust inhibiting
phosphatizing treatment. The nish on
a unit wrapper is a baked Munsell No.
N9.43/0.21B, 0.23 white. This is highly
durable nish, gloss-white in color to
increase visibility within the unit and
to facilitate wiring and maintenance
procedures.
The unit wrapper consists of a three-
sided rugged steel shell including
the mounting base for the unit
components. The smallest unit
measures 13-3/4 inches (349.3 mm)
wide, 8.00 inches (203.2 mm) deep
and 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) high.
Units increase in 6.00-inch (152.4 mm)
increments to a maximum height of
72.00 inches (1828.8 mm).
The unit wrapper is designed to
provide ample space for cable entry
from the wireway to the unit.
The unit wrapper has four mounting
points, two on each side, which support
the unit in the structure. They engage
guide rails located near the top of each
unit space. This mounting point guide
rail system produces minimum friction
and allows units to be inserted and
withdrawn easily. The guide rails also
give precise alignment to the unit for
accurate stabbing on the vertical bus.
Unit
Side
Latch
Screw
29.1-10
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
012
The FlashGard unit wrapper is
equipped with a quarter-turn side
wrapper latch that securely holds the
unit in the compartment. The latch can
only be engaged when the stabs are
fully mated with the vertical bus. Upon
release of the latch, the unit can be
partially withdrawn such that the stabs
disengage from the vertical bus. In this
position, the latch can be re-engaged
to prevent the unit from being
returned to the fully stabbed position
or from being removed from the
structure. The latch can be padlocked
in this position to ensure that the
stabs remain disengaged during
maintenance.
Unit Maintenance
Plug-in Unit Maintenance
The Freedom 2100 three-piece unit
wrapper design facilitates easy work
bench maintenance. When removed
from the MCC, the unit top/side barrier
assembly can easily be swiveled
up and back for complete access to
components and wiring.
Terminal Blocks
A side-mounted, seven-circuit,
latching pull-apart terminal block is
standard on units with NEMA Type B
or C wiring. This industrial-grade
Eaton MCC terminal block provides
solid electrical connections while
conserving space and making
installation and maintenance easier.
Terminal blocks are mounted in knock-
outs on the vertical wireway side of
the unit housing affording greater
access to the unit compartment and
interior components. The two-piece
terminal block snap-locks together to
ensure permanent circuit continuity.
To aid installation and wiring checks,
the terminal marking strips for both
sides of the terminal block are fully
visible from the front of the starter
compartment.
Side MountedLatched
Pull-Apart Terminal Block
Heavy-duty saddle wire terminals are
of the resilient collar design, which
eliminates loose connections caused
by expansion and contracting of the
conductor as the current is switched
on and off. This unique design main-
tains constant pressure as the wire
expands and contracts. This 600V, 30A
rated terminal block will accept 12 AWG
stripped wires, as well as 14 AWG ring
or spade wire lugs. All terminal block
conductors are fully shielded for
added safety and cleanliness.
A 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) high (2X
space) starter unit accommodates up
to three side-mounted terminal blocks
providing a maximum of 21 points.
Larger units accommodate two addi-
tional 7-point terminal blocks for every
additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
1X space of unit height. The 6.00-inch
(152.4 mm) compact starter unit uses
a 9-point pull-apart terminal block,
which is installed along the top front
of the starter unit.
Control wiring within each starter
compartment consists of 16 AWG
control wire for Freedom FlashGard
MCCs and 2100 Series MCCs. Rated
105C, the ame-retardant, thermo-
plastic insulated wire is red. Power
wiring is black and sized to carry the
maximum full load current of the
starter unit.
Front-Rail-Mounted Terminal Blocks
For special applications, other types of
rail-mounted terminal blocks are also
available. They are installed horizon-
tally at the bottom front of the starter
unit. Refer to Eaton for terminal block
types available and space restrictions.
Unit Doors
Freedom 2100 12.00-Inch (304.8 mm)
Unit Door
Freedom FlashGard 12.00-Inch (304.8 mm)
Unit Door
Unit doors are formed of 14-gauge
steel with a 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) ange
on all four sides. The ange adds
rigidity to the door and provides a
surface to contain door gasketing. Cut-
outs are made in the door as required
to accommodate the operating handle
and device panel. The doors are
cleaned, phosphatized and given a
nish of gray, baked-on enamel ANSI 61
(Munsell No. N9.43/0.21B, 0.23).
The doors will open 115 opposite
to the wireway doors permitting
optimum access to the unit compart-
ment. The doors are mounted on
removable concealed pin hinges. This
permits quick removal of any door in
a vertical structure without disturbing
adjacent doors.
Doors 2X and larger are held closed
with a minimum of two quarter-turn
indicating-type fasteners. They securely
hold the door in the closed position,
yet allow quick and easy access to
the unit when required. The fasteners
provide a visual indication of the
latched position. The head slot of
the fastener is designed to prevent
screwdriver slippage.
29.1-11
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
013
Spring-Loaded Unit Door Quarter-Turn Latch
Options
Eatons starter and feeder tap units
can be modied to meet a variety of
specication requirements. Some
typical components that can be added
include: control power transformers
with two primary and one secondary
control fuses, control relays, solid-state
overload relays, ground fault relays,
current transformers, extra electrical
interlocks, pushbuttons, selector
switches, indicating lights, circuit
breaker shunt trip or undervoltage
release and auxiliary switches. In most
cases, one of these modications does
not increase starter unit size.
Additional Equipment
In addition to motor starter and feeder
units, additional equipment can be
supplied including the following:
Single-phase dry-type distribution
transformers in ratings of 0.5, 0.75,
1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
and 45 kVA
Three-phase dry-type distribution
transformers in ratings of 9, 15, 25,
30 and 45 kVA
Lighting panelboards with up to
42 circuits with either plug-in branch
breakers or bolt-on branch breakers,
120/240V, 120/208V or 480V, single-
or three-phase
Metering equipment including the
IQ family of solid-state power
monitors, voltmeters and ammeters
PLC and DCS I/O racks
S801/S811 family of solid-state
reduced voltage starters
SVX9000 and MVX9000 adjustable-
frequency controllers
Active harmonic correction units
Surge protective device (SPD) units
Size 4, 5 and 6 vacuum starters
and contactors
DeviceNet, Modbus, PROFIBUS,
Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP
Communications
Power Xpert
communications
Industrial Operator Interface
Industrial PLCs and PCs
Control and Load Terminations
Master Terminal Blocks at Bottom
(Class C Wiring)
For NEMA Type A wiring, each unit
is assembled and devices interwired.
Terminal blocks are not supplied and
control and load wiring is internal to
the unit.
For NEMA Type B wiring, control wires
are terminated at blocks within the
unit. Refer to the discussion of units
for types of terminal blocks available.
For NEMA Type C-S wiring, control
and load wires are extended from the
unit terminal blocks to master terminal
blocks located at the top or bottom of
each vertical structure.
The mounting location of the master
terminal block in front-mounted only
structures is in the existing horizontal
wireway space at the top or at the
bottom as shown above. When
mounting is made in an incoming
line section, 12.00 inches (304.8 mm)
of unit space must be used. When
mounting is made in the rear of
back-to-back mounted structures,
6.00 inches (152.4 mm) of unit space
must be used at the bottom and
12.00 inches (304.8 mm) used at
the top.
Master terminal blocks are rack-
mounted to permit removal of entire
assembly for ease of wiring during
installation and maintenance.
For NEMA Type C-M wiring, control
and load wires are extended from
the unit terminal blocks to master
terminal blocks located in a separate
marshaling structure.
Incoming Line
Incoming line cables entering the
MCC from either the top or bottom can
be easily terminated onto main lugs
or connected to a main disconnect.
All incoming line sections comply
with NEC wiring bending require-
ments as adopted by UL.
Main Lugs Only (MLO)
Up to 1200A rated horizontal bus,
cables, up to four per phase, are
terminated on crimp or screw lugs
mounted on adapters solidly bolted
to fully rated vertical bus. Top entry
cables are terminated at the top of
the MCC and bottom entry cables
are conveniently terminated near the
bottom. Table 29.1-84 shows spacing
requirements for various cable
congurations. MLO termination
for 1600, 2000, 2500 and 3200A
requires a full vertical section.
Note: 3200A main lugs only available in
NEMA 1A enclosure only and 65C rise
above 40C ambient only.
Main Disconnects
Incoming cables may also be easily
terminated on a main circuit breaker or
fused switch. A variety of main circuit
breakers are available. Tables 29.1-61
through 29.1-67 show spacing require-
ments for various main devices.
Metering
IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meter
Eatons IQ and Power Xpert family of
metering and power monitors includes:
IQ 250 microprocessor-based three-
phase power monitor replaces the
traditional ammeter, voltmeter and
instrument switches. Displays phase
currents, voltage, L-L, L-N, power-real
and reactive apparent, power factor,
frequency, energy (watthours,
VAR-hours and VA-hours).
29.1-12
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
014
IQ 260 includes all of the functions
of the IQ 250 plus THD readings for
voltage and current. Additionally, the
IQ 260 includes contact inputs and
outputs. This device is ideal for
incoming line monitoring.
IQ Analyzer provides extensive meter-
ing, power quality analysis, remote
input monitoring, control relaying,
analog input/outputs, and is communi-
cations capable. A display provides the
exibility of exhibiting large characters
with high visibility and small characters
for detailed descriptions.
These IQ power monitors each contain
their own voltage power pack for
systems up to 600V. Therefore,
separate potential transformers are
not required. Either two or three
separate current transformers must
be used. All IQ power monitors are
communications capable. Refer to
Tab 3 for further details.
Power Xpert 2000/4000/6000/8000
Meters are available with communica-
tion features for power management
and system software integration in
addition to a Web interface. Customers
and facility personnel can view the
metering data using a standard PC
Web browser. The new platform offers
advanced functionality like transient
capture, high sampling rate, open
communications, Web server gateway,
eld-upgradable rmware, expandable
memory and optional I/O.
Remote Racking Accessory
Remote Racking Accessory
Performs RotoTract racking safely
behind NFPA Arc Flash boundaries
120 Vac motor driven
Mounts to RotoTract mechanism
Wired pendant station for rack-in/
rack-out operation
Momentary jog
Mounting offset bracket to clear
device panel
Voltage Presence Indicator
(VoltageVision)
Voltage Presence Indicator (VoltageVision)
Hardwired voltage detector
connected to load side of disconnect
Enables operator to pre-verify
voltage presence with unit
door closed
Installable in a 30 mm pilot
device knockout
Dual redundant circuitry for
reliability
Phase insensitive
Automatic Insulation Tester
(Motorguard)
Automatic Insulation Tester (Motorguard)
Meggers equipment motor insula-
tion to continuously monitor integrity
of insulation for the period that the
equipment is de-energized
Applies 500 Vdc potential at current-
limited, operator-safe maximum
amperage of 200 microamperes
Alarms upon detection of a
threshold leakage to ground current
Visual alarm indication and lockout;
Form C contact available for remote
alarm status
FlashGard Padlock Accessory
FlashGard Padlock Accessory
Locks out RotoTract operation
during maintenance
Allows operation of FlashGard units
by authorized personnel only
Provided as standard on NEMA 12
FlashGard MCCs (prevents dust
entry into RotoTract access port)
Heavy-gauge steel construction
Surge Protective DeviceSPD
SPD (Surge Protective Device) with
Circuit Breaker Disconnect
SPD Series units feature advanced
thermodynamic fusing technology and
are available in 18.00 inch (457.2 mm)
space factors. All units (100400 kA)
meet UL 1449, 3rd Edition. Internal fuse
protection is up to 200 kAIC.
Standard MCC offering includes
Monitoring Display with dual-colored
status LEDs. Optional surge counter,
Form C alarm contacts and audible
alarm enable/disable are also available.
29.1-13
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
015
Communications
Eatons motor control centers offer
the industrys most comprehensive
communications solutions in
motor control providing seamless
communicating on all major industry
standard eld busses. Available with
communications to t new and
existing applications, Eatons motor
control centers are custom-made
assemblies of conveniently grouped
control equipment primarily used
for control of motors and power
distribution.
Eaton motor control centers not only
are capable of communicating to the
industry standard protocols, they
also have the ability to serve up Web
pages, so any Web client can monitor
and manage the MCC from any
location accessible to the LAN.
Ordering the MCC with the Power
Xpert
Gateway provides the ability

to communicate information to the
Web as well as provides a seamless
interface between the low voltage,
medium voltage and all meters.
MCC Motor Control
Communication Choices
This table is used to determine how
each of the communications types are
used within the MCC. The Freedom
communication solutions provide for
a single node per unit conguration
where each starter, drive, soft start,
breaker, meter or other control device
is a single node on the network.
Eatons Motor Control Centers
Table 29.1-1. Network Matrix
Note: The Freedom and FlashGard MCCs are Power Xpert capable with the PXG gateway
communicating to each bucket.
Network
Protocol
DeviceNet EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP Modbus
Serial
PROFIBUS DP
Topology Trunk drop Ethernet Ethernet Daisy chain Daisy chain
Node count 63 devices
per network
Devices
limited by
scanner (~250)
Devices
limited by
scanner (~250)
32 per segment
254 with
repeaters
32 per segment
127 with
3 repeaters
Speed 150150 Kbaud 10/100 meg 10/100 meg Usually
<115 Kbaud
500K to 12 meg
C306 OL C441K C441R C441R C441N C441S
C440 SSOL C441K C441R C441R C441N C441S
C441 SSOL C441K C441R C441R C441N C441S
SVX9000 OPTC7 OPTCI OPTCI OPTC2 OPTC3
Feeders C441K C441R C441R C441N C441S
S811 Soft
Starts
D77D-DNA D77D-EIP D77D-EMA D77D-EMA D77D-PNA
MP-3000,
MP-4000
DPONI Gateway Gateway MPONI Gateway
IQ 260 Gateway Gateway Gateway Native Gateway
29.1-14
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
016
Data Parameters
Each of the MCC types have different
ways to get to the target network, and
they also use varying types of starters/
drives and other types of equipment.
Each type of equipment has varying
types of data and control associated
with it. This table will aid in under-
standing the type of data available
when a style of MCC is selected. Each
of the devices has a rich set of data
associated with it; consulting the
user manual may be needed to deter-
mine all available data/parameters.
Table 29.1-2. Data Parameters
Description Data Graphic
S811 Soft Starts
DeviceNet
Modbus
Modbus TCP
PROFIBUS
EtherNet/IP
Line current (scaled/oat)
Average current (scaled/oat)
Power pole temperatures
% FLA
(Running current/FLA setting)
Thermal capacity
Fault/warning codes
Field wiring status
Handle position/breaker status
Coil voltage
Fault history
Status (Run/Fault/Warn/Control/Aux...)
SVX/M-Max Drives
DeviceNet
Modbus
Modbus TCP
PROFIBUS
EtherNet/IP
Speed (Hz)
Speed (rpm)
Torque
Current
Voltage
DC bus voltage temperature
Status (Run/Fault/Warn...)
Faults
Morerefer to manual
C441 IO
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS
Modbus
Modbus TCP
EtherNet/IP
Four AC inputs (DC is in an option)
(Running/Faulted/Breaker status, user denied)
Two B300 relay outputs (Run)
C440 SSOL
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS
Modbus
Modbus TCP
EtherNet/IP
Line currents
% thermal remaining
Faults
Ground current
Status (Run/Fault/input/output)
Morerefer to manual
C441 SSOL
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS
Modbus
Modbus TCP
EtherNet/IP
Line currents
% thermal remaining
% current unbalance
Line voltages
% voltage unbalance
Faults
kW
Status (Run/Fault/input/output)
Morerefer to manual
MP-3000
MP-4000
DeviceNet
Modbus RTU
Currents
Voltages
Power
Energy
Much morerefer to manual
Power Xpert
Gateway
to PowerNet
Data depends on target device
Trending
Logging
Fault indication and more
Operator Interface Provides local display of motor parameters
and system health. This option is available
when using Modbus communication.
Logic Control In a single bucket, a PLC is provided for local
control of the MCC components.
29.1-15
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
017
DeviceNet
DeviceNet is an industry standard eld bus governed by
ODVA and is supported by most major vendors of PLC and
DSCs. DeviceNet, like most major eld buses, provides
simplied control, increased diagnostics, reduced wiring
and data richness of the motor control centers. The Eaton
DeviceNet MCC solution provides users with signicantly
reduced installation time and increased uptime through the
integration of intelligent devices and advanced software
tools. Control products include: ODVA compliant motor
starters, variable speed drives, operator interface, line
metering and block I/O.
Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard Styles of MCC
Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard styles of MCC use
either a direct connect I/O block or direct connect advanced
solid-state overload relay to connect to DeviceNet. The
topology is a trunk drop conguration where the trunk runs
along the top of the MCC and each device is connected to
DeviceNet via a drop cable.
About DeviceNet
Learn more about DeviceNet by visiting the Open DeviceNet
Vendor Association at odva.org.
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS DP is an industry standard eld bus governed by
the PROFIBUS Trade Organization and is supported by most
major vendors of PLC and DSCs. PROFIBUS, like most major
eld buses, provides simplied control, increased diagnos-
tics, reduced wiring and data richness of the motor control
centers. The Eaton PROFIBUS MCC solution provides users
with signicantly reduced installation time and increased
uptime through the integration of intelligent devices and
advanced software tools. Control products include: motor
starters, variable speed drives, operator interface and
block I/O.
The Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard styles of MCC use
either a direct connect I/O block or direct connect advanced
solid-state overload relay to connect to the PROFIBUS. The
topology for PROFIBUS is daisy chain and each device in
the MCC will be daisy-chained together to meet the
PROFIBUS specication.
About PROFIBUS
Learn more about PROFIBUS by visiting the PROFIBUS
Trade Organization Association at probus.com.
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS
29.1-16
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
018
Ethernet
There are two supported protocols on Ethernet for the
Eaton MCC offeringEtherNet/IP (ODVA) and Modbus TCP
(Modbus IDA), which are both industry standard eld buses
and supported by most major vendors of PLCs and DSCs.
Ethernet, like most major eld buses, provides simplied
control, increased diagnostics, reduced wiring and data
richness of the motor control centers. Another added benet
of Ethernet is that a PC can connect directly to the control
system and monitor the MCC from any location where
remote access is permitted. The Eaton Ethernet MCC
solution provides users with signicantly reduced installa-
tion time and increased uptime through the integration of
intelligent devices and advanced software tools. Control
products include: motor starters, variable speed drives,
operator interface, meters and block I/O.
Understanding Ethernet
Ethernet can be a very misunderstood word and confusing
to someone who is trying to build a control or monitoring
system and doesnt have much experience specifying this
type of communication. To help bring some clarity to how to
specify Ethernet, this simple example is going to use an
analogy that most of us are very familiar with. When you are
at home and pick up the phone to call a friend or neighbor,
your conversation is transmitted across a land line (wire)
that can be compared to Ethernet. In this example, both the
land line and the Ethernet are the physical medias in which
the communication is transmitted. When you call your
friends to communicate to them, you need to talk in a
language that is understood by each other; this language
is called the protocol, which is no different than Ethernet,
for the devices to communicate to each other they need to
support the same language or protocol. Modbus TCP and
EtherNet/IP are two widely supported standards for Ethernet
industrial protocols. Modbus TCP is a standard founded by
Modbus IDA and natively supported by many major PLC
and DCS vendors. EtherNet/IP is another standard that is
founded by ODVA and supported primarily by AB and other
third-party vendors for use in PLC and DCS applications.
Now lets add another twist to the example, lets say that
you and a friend are talking in one protocol and then you
conference in two friends that talk another protocol. Using
the same physical media, the four of you can all communi-
cate to each other using multiple protocols. This is no
different than Ethernet where the physical media supports
both Modbus TCP and EtherNet/IP (and others) on the same
physical media at the same time.
In the Eaton MCC when Ethernet is applied, there is a bucket
in each lineup that houses an industrial rated Ethernet
switch and all the Ethernet devices are then wired back to
that switch to the customer to easily connect to the lineup
at one convenient location. Over this Ethernet connection,
not only can control and monitoring be performed, but also
conguration of the end devices allowing for easy access
for maintenance personnel to the equipment once they gain
access to the Ethernet system.
For more information or clarity on the supported Ethernet
protocols and the products that support Ethernet, please call
877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273) Option 2.
to EtherNet/IP
to EtherNet/IP
to Modbus TCP
to Modbus TCP
About Ethernet
Learn more about EtherNet/IP by visiting the ODVA Web site
at odva.org. Learn more about Modbus TCP by visiting the
Modbus IDA Web site at modbus.org.
Each Unit (Node)
Home Run Wired to
Ethernet Switch
Power Xpert Gateway
with Web Interface
29.1-17
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
019
Web-Enabled MCC
The Power Xpert Gateway provides Web-enabled, real-time
monitoring of electrical distribution and control equipment.
The Power Xpert Gateway makes integrating power equip-
ment (up to 96 devices) onto an Ethernet network fast and
easy. The PXG is installed in a motor control center, low/
medium voltage switchgear or switchboard to consolidate
data available from components such as breakers, meters,
motor controllers and protective relays. Through standard
onboard Web pages, Power Xpert Software or third-party
software, the PXG allows you to closely monitor the perfor-
mance of your power infrastructure with easily accessed,
real-time, Web-enabled data. In addition to Web-enabling
the components in the MCC, the PXG also makes all the data
available to upper level PLC, SCADA, and BMS type systems
over Modbus TCP, SNMP and BACnet/IP protocols.
Figure 29.1-1 through 29.1-6 represent typical Eaton
communications equipment found in MCCs. For more
available equipment and congurations, please contact
your local Eaton representative.
Figure 29.1-1. MCC CongurationModbus TCP
Figure 29.1-2. MCC CongurationWeb-Enabled
Power Xpert
Gateway
Modbus TCP

Power Xpert Gateway
QCPort Modbus 485 RTU
MVX9000 IT. S811 Any 485 RTU
SVX9000 device

PXM2250
PXM2260
PXM4000
PXM6000
PXM8000
Web

Power Xpert Gateway (Modbus TCP, SNMP, BACnet/IP and Webserver TCP/IP output)
Incom QCPort Modbus RTU 485
IPONI

DT3000 ATC 400, 600, 800 IT S811 MVX9000
DT3200 IQ DP-4000 SVX9000
PXM2000
FP-4000 IQ Analyzer 6000/6200 IQ 130 PXM6000
PXM4000
FP-5000 IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 IQ 140 PXM8000
FP-6000 MP-3000
MP-4000
IQ 150

CMU
IQ 220M/230M

BIMII
IQ 230M/330M

Universal RTD
IQ 250

SMLD

IQ Transfer
IQ 260

EDR-3000

IQ 220/320/230/330
FP-5000

FP-6000

C440

C441

IQES

SqD 3000

IQESU

SqD 4000

IQPSU

SqD PM710

DIM

SqD PM800

DT520MC, 810, 910, 1150
PML ION7350

OPTIM Trip Units
PML ION7550
PML ION7650
GE 369
GE 469
Nexus 1262/1272
Qualitrol 118
29.1-18
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
020
Figure 29.1-3. MCC CongurationModbus 485 RTU
Figure 29.1-4. MCC CongurationDeviceNet
Figure 29.1-5. MCC Conguration
PROFIBUS DP
Figure 29.1-6. MCC Conguration
EtherNet/IP
Modbus RTU 485

RS485-PONI EMA Modbus Adapter MMINT
QCPort IPONI

MVX9000 ATC 400, 600, 800 IT. S811
SVX9000 IQ DP-4000
IQ 130 IQ Analyzer 6000/6200
IQ 140 IQ Analyzer 6400/6600
IQ 150 MP-3000
IQ 220M/230M MP-4000
IQ 230M/330M CMU
IQ 250 IQ Transfer
IQ 260
EDR-3000
FP-5000
FP-6000
C441
C440
PXM2000
PXM4000
PXM6000
PXM8000
ATC 400,600,800
IQ DP-4000
IQ Analyzer 6000/6200
IQ Analyzer 6400/6600
MP-3000
MP-4000
CMU
BIMII
Universal RTD
IQ Transfer

DT3000
DT3200
FP-4000
FP-5000
FP-6000

SMLD

IQ 220/320/230/330

IQES

IQESU

IQPSU

DIM

DT520MC, 810, 910, 1150

OPTIM Trip Units
DeviceNet
DNA Adapter
QCPort

MVX9000 IT. S811
SVX9000
C441
C440
PROFIBUS DP

PMINT
PNA Adapter
QCPort

MVX9000 IT. S811 DT1150
SVX9000
C441
C440
EtherNet/IP
E/IP Adapter
QCPort

MVX9000 IT. S811
SVX9000
C441
C440
29.1-19
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
021
PLCs
Programmable controllers can be
mounted in all styles of the Eaton MCCs
in a wide variety of congurations.
Popular mounting congurations
include small PLCs (EZ) unit mounted
to replace relays and timers, medium-
sized PLCs with I/O for control of
an MCC lineup and also eldbus
mastering capabilities to control over
DeviceNet, Modbus or Modbus TCP.
Due to the exibility of PLCs and
the wide variety of applications and
congurations, the Eaton MCC is
designed to meet the mounting
requirements of most applications
to control not only the MCC but also
auxiliary equipment not in the MCC.
EZ PLC
EZ PLC
The EZ PLC is a timer and relay replacer
capable of being mounted directly
inside the MCC bucket and controlling
starters or other types of process
equipment. This small PLC comes
in styles that have AC or DC I/O and
analog I/O, and also the ability to
expand the I/O for larger I/O counts.
From the face of the EZ, a user can
change set points and count values
or other program values to easily
manipulate the process it is controlling.
ELC PLC
ELC PLC
FlexibilityHandle I/O counts from
10 I/O up to 256 I/O using a single
controller. ELCs eliminate the process
of counting I/O and deciding which
controller to use, as modules can easily
be added and removed as needed. ELC
modules come in many avors of I/O
from modules containing 4 in/4 out to
modules containing 8 in/8 out. ELC
controllers and modules mount to a
DIN rail, and the modules are added
by simply snapping them into the
mating connectors and closing the
attached locks.
Large PLC FeaturesInclude the
feature set of larger PLCs such as
multiple communication ports, remote
I/O, data storage, high-speed counters,
high-speed pulse outputs, interrupts,
timer resolution to 1 ms, PID, plus
much more. The ELC also has master-
ing capabilities to control DeviceNet,
Modbus and Modbus TCP slaves over
an industrial network.
Power of OneRegardless of the level
of integration needed, Eaton MCCs
provide an easy and comprehensive
solution to be part of a larger system
or be the entire system all by itself.
The Power Xpert gateway allows for
seamless integration into the Power
Xpert architecture, linking switchgear,
meters and medium voltage assem-
blies. When the MCC is the control,
integrating the ELC with one of the
Eaton operator interface units and
communicating to starters, drives,
soft starts, meters and feeder breakers
is integrated into a clean, easy-to-
use solution.
Monitoring and
Conguration Tools
For all the advanced MCC choices, a
tool is available to allow for congura-
tion and monitoring of the MCC and
its devices. The complimentary tool
located at www.eaton.com is called
CH Studio, and is a Windows-based
conguration and monitoring package.
CH Studio allows the user to custom
congure I/O data for the starters
and drives, to verify loads and
conguration parameters, and to
view the faults and operation status
of the end devices. In addition to this,
CH Studio is also able to print out
a detailed report for the system
programmer to use with designing
their program. To get an early start
on the system design, CH Studio
provided the ability to create the
system ofine and then synchronize
the ofine settings to the online
system once the MCC arrives.
29.1-20
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
022
Clean Control Center with Active
Harmonic ControlTypical Layout
The layout to the right is a typical
arrangement for Eatons Clean Control
Center including harmonic correction
units for nonlinear loads such as
AC Variable Frequency Drives. The
horizontal bus of the Clean Control
Center is virtually free of harmonic
current content at the point where
the harmonic correction unit connects
to the bus. From this point to the
connection at the utility bus, the Clean
Control Center complies with the most
stringent requirements of IEEE
519
and provides a clean waveform to the
upstream distribution system. Harmonic
correction may be applied to loads
fed directly from the MCC (e.g., MCC
mounted AC drives) or loads fed
indirectly from the MCC (e.g., MCC
mounted circuit breakers feeding
remote drives). Multiple correction
units may be used to achieve the level
of harmonic correction as required by
the amount of nonlinear loads within
the MCC lineup.
Harmonic Correction
The Clean Control Center uses a
harmonic correction unit to provide
harmonic cancellation directly on the
motor control center horizontal bus.
The harmonic correction unit senses
the load current and injects into the AC
lines a synthesized waveform that is
inverted compared to the remaining
signal. The result is a clean waveform
as seen by the upstream electrical
system. Single or multiple harmonic
correction units may be applied within
a Clean Control Center providing an
economical solution to excessive
harmonics due to AC drives or other
nonlinear loads. Use of the Clean
Control Center will provide compli-
ance to the most stringent 5% Total
Demand Distortion (TDD) require-
ments of IEEE 519. Clean Control
Center assemblies include a 24.00-inch
(609.6 mm) wide MCC structure, active
harmonic correction unit, current
transformers and a door-mounted
digital interface panel.
Figure 29.1-7. Clean Control Center with Active Harmonic ControlDimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: As seen by the upstream electrical systemcompliance to the most stringent
standards of IEEE 519 is ensured.
Figure 29.1-8. Clean Control Center Installation Diagram
Main
Breaker
Panelboard Harmonic
Correction
Unit 100A
SVX9000
AC Drive
(150 hp)
Starter
SPD Surge
Protection
Module
Starter
Starter
20.00
(508.0)
Load Side
Harmonics
Present
Source Side
Harmonics
Attenuated
Distribution
Transformer
SVX9000
AC Drive
(250 hp)
SVX9000
AC Drive
(30 hp)
SVX9000
AC Drive
(30 hp)
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
24.00
(609.6)
24.00
(609.6)
28.00
(711.2)
Source
XFMR
Alternate CT
Placement
Typical CT
Placement
Harmonic
Correction
Unit
Load(s)
29.1-21
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
023
Motor Protection
Eatons C440 and C441 solid-state
overload relay offers improved motor
protection due to high repeat accuracy
and fast reaction times to phase failures.
The state-of-the-art microelectronics
design permits the choice of relays
with different trip classes (Class 5, 10,
20, 30) to accommodate motors with
a variety of application needs.
The C440 solid-state overloads are
available on all Freedom starter sizes.
(Size 5 and up use CTs with the overload
relay.) Key features include:
Phase loss
Phase imbalance
Wide adjustment range
Low energy usage
Reduced heat
With the simple addition of a commu-
nication module, the C440 is capable
of communicating to one of the follow-
ing industrial eld busses: DeviceNet,
Modbus RTU, PROFIBUS, EtherNet/IP
or Modbus TCP.
The C441 Motor Insight
is a micro-
processor-based solid-state overload
relay providing superior motor protec-
tion, communications and motor
monitoring features. This overload
provides the standard set of protec-
tions that includes I
2
t, jam, stall and
phase protections. The C441 also
provides ground fault, phase reversal,
voltage unbalance, programmable trip
class, trip history, thermal capacity,
power factor and voltage, current and
power monitoring. With the simple
addition of a communication module,
the C441 is capable of communicating
to one of the following industrial
eld busses: DeviceNet, Modbus
RTU, PROFIBUS, EtherNet/IP or
Modbus TCP.
Key features of C441 Motor Insight
communicating overloads include:
DeviceNet, Modbus, PROFIBUS and
Ethernet communication options
Three-phase voltage monitoring
Three-phase current monitoring
kWh usage indication
Motor power factor indication
Last four faults history
Optional remote mounted display
I/O communication adapter with
four inputs and two outputs
Programmable set points, including:
Low voltage set point
High voltage set point
Voltage unbalance set point
CT multiplier/ratio settings
Overcurrent set point
Current unbalance trip point
Trip Class (5, 10, 15, 20, 30,
and/or Jam)
Rapid cycle timer
Restart delay timer
Underload restart delay timer
Number of restarts after faults
(Manual/Auto)
Undercurrent trip delay
Ground fault trip set point
MP-3000 Overload Relays
The MP-3000 motor overcurrent relay
is a microprocessor-based relay that
provides superior motor protection
for critical process motors. Standard
protective features provided in the
MP-3000 include: I
2
t, programmable
locked rotor protection, instantaneous
overcurrent, ground fault, under load,
jam, phase loss/unbalance/reversal,
limit starts per hour, alarm and trip
modes, and the capability to use
motor RTD for motor protection.
Functions are user programmable
via data entry and display panel
mounted in the door of the MCC.
The MP-3000 can be monitored via
its communications port. For further
details, refer to Tab 4.
MP-4000 Overload Relays
The MP-4000 motor overload relay
provides the ultimate in motor
protection. In addition to all the
protective features included in the
MP-3000, the MP-4000 also includes
voltage-based protection/metering
as well: undervoltage, negative
sequence, power factor, overvoltage,
over/under frequency and forward/
reverse power. For further details,
refer to Tab 4.
29.1-22
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
024
Additional Services
Startup Assistance
To ensure complete customer
satisfaction and to expedite equipment
startup for motor control centers, this
service provides a factory-trained
representative at the job site during
equipment energization. This service
is provided on a xed price basis. In
addition to factory directed startup,
the standard equipment warranty is
extended for a period of 24 months.
This service is especially benecial
when solid-state equipment is
incorporated within the MCC due to
the exibility in adjusting solid-state
equipment for each application.
Maintenance and Operational Training
A full range of training and operational
training programs are available for all
types of MCC-mounted equipment.
In addition, preventative maintenance
programs are available to ensure years
of trouble-free operation.
Retrots
Existing installations can many times
benet from some of the new
technology equipment available
in todays MCCs. Eaton offers a full
range of retrot capabilities to upgrade
existing MCC lineups. Examples
include: vacuum contactors, reduced
voltage solid-state starters, solid-state
metering and solid-state overload
protection. Starter retrot kits for
selective competitor MCCs are also
available. Consult factory for availability.
29.1-23
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
025
2100 Series Motor
Control Center
Freedom 2100 Motor Control Center
Quick Reference Layout Guide Index
Device Space Requirements Table Page
Combination Starters, Series C Motor Circuit Protectors
or Molded-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-4 29.1-24
Combination Starters, Fusible Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-13 29.1-29
SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-23 29.1-33
CPX9000 Clean Power Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-32 29.1-38
Option Groups for Combination Starters, Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-34 29.1-39
Main Incoming Line and Feeder Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-61 29.1-42
Main Incoming Line and Feeder Fusible Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-67 29.1-43
Lighting Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-68 29.1-44
Automatic Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-71 29.1-44
Dry-Type Distribution Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-72 29.1-45
Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-73 29.1-45
Surge Protective Device (SPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-74 29.1-45
DeviceNet Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-75 29.1-45
Freedom Communication Choices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-76 29.1-46
Metering and Protection Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-78 29.1-47
Harmonic CorrectionClean Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-80 29.1-48
Standard Structures and Structure Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-81 29.1-49
Structure Modications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-82 29.1-49
Bus Modications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-83 29.1-50
Main Lugs Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-84 29.1-50
MCC Ratings and Highlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-88 29.1-51
Control Power Transformer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-89 29.1-51
Starter Selection Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-90 29.1-52
Section Views/Plan Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.1-52
29.1-24
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Layout and Technical Data
026
Technical Data
Table 29.1-3. Short-Circuit Ratings for Motor Control (480V)
Table 29.1-4. Combination Starters with Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Motor circuit protector ratings are suitable for both NEMA Design B and NEMA Design E (high efciency) motors.
Per NEC, the motor circuit protectors may be adjusted to 17X motor FLA.
Standard combination starter units with HMCP/HMCPE magnetic only disconnect have short-circuit ratings of 65,000A at 480V. Optional HMCP/HMCPE
combination starter units are available with 100,000A at 480V.
E-Frame motor circuit protection available for size 13 starters only.
Optional combination starter units with thermal-magnetic breaker disconnects are available with either 65,000 or 100,000A at 480V.
Maximum of (three) pilot devices, (two) auxiliary contacts 100 VA CPT maximum. Standard lugs only.
12.00-inch (304.8 mm)/2X unit is standard.
18.00-inch (457.2 mm)/3X unit is standard.
Minimum 30.00-inch (762.0 mm) space needed with thermal-magnetic circuit breaker.
Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract.
1X additional space required with solid-state overloads.
1X additional space with advanced solid-state overload.
1200A HMCP frame available in 11X 66.00-inch (1676.4 mm).
For top entry, 8X space required.
Requires 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure.
30.00-inch (762.0 mm) space needed for thermal-magnetic circuit breaker.
7X with solid-state overloads.

Short-Circuit
Protective Device
Combination Starter
FV and RV (kA)
Solid-State
Reduced Voltage (kA)
Adjustable
Frequency Drives (kA)
HMCP motor circuit protector (standard rating)
HMCP motor circuit protector (optional rating)
65
100
65
100
65
100
MCCB molded-case circuit breaker (standard rating)
MCCB molded-case circuit breaker (optional rating)
Fusible switch
65
100
100
65
100
65
100
100
NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower HMCP/HMCPE
Frame
MCCB
Frame
Freedom 2100 Freedom FlashGard

Unit Size Unit Size
208V 240V 380V 480V 600V Inches (mm) X Space Inches (mm) X Space
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Type F206 Type F206
1 7.5 7.5 10 10 10
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
6.00 (152.4)
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
1X
2X
3X
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
2X
3X
2 10 15 25 25 25
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
6.00 (152.4)
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
1X
2X
3X
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
2X
3X
3 25 30 50 50 50
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
2X
3X
4X
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
3X
4X
4 40 50 75 100 100 150
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
2X
3X
4X
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
4X
5X
5
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
36.00 (914.4) 6X 36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
6X
7X
6
25
150
100
200
250
300
300
350
400
400
600 HLD/LDC
42.00 (1066.8) 7X
48.00 (1219.2) 8X
1200 HND
60.00 (1524.0) 10X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
7
300 600 600 1200 HND 72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Full Voltage Reversing Type F216 Type F216
1

7.5 7.5 10 10 10
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
3X
4X
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
4X
4X
2 10 15 25 25 25
125
150
E
HFD/FDC
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
3X
4X
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
4X
4X
3 25 30 50 50 50 125/150 HFD/FDC/E 24.00 (609.6)
6X 24.00 (609.6)
4X
4 40 50 75 100 100 150 HJD/JDC 30.00 (762.0)
5X 36.00 (914.4)
6X
5
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC
60.00 (1524.0) 10X
66.00 (1676.4) 11X
6
125
150
100
200
250
300
300
400
400
600
1200
HLD/LDC
HND
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X

29.1-25
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
027
Table 29.1-4. Combination Starters with Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded-Case Circuit Breakers (Continued)
Standard combination starter units with HMCP/HMCPE Magnetic Only disconnect have short-circuit ratings of 65,000A at 480V. Optional HMCP/HMCPE
E-Frame motor circuit protector available through size 3 starter only.
Add 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space for low speed disconnect.
42.00-inch (1066.8 mm) space needed with Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker. 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) space needed with thermal-magnetic
circuit breaker.
36.00-inch (914.4 mm) space needed for thermal-magnetic circuit breaker.
1X additional space required with standard SSOL and 2X additional space required with advanced SSOL.
Fixed assemblies not available with RotoTract.
Requires 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep, 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure.
For starting speed disconnect, add 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space.

NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower HMCP
Frame
MCCB
Frame

Unit Size Unit Size
Two-Speed One Winding, Constant/Variable Torque Type F946 Type F946
1 7.5 7.5 10 10 10
125
150
E
HFD/FDC 24.00 (609.6)
4X 24 (609.6)
4X
4X
2 10 15 25 25 25
125
150
E
HFD/FDC 24.00 (609.6)
4X
24 (609.6)
30 (762.0)
4X
5X
3 25 30 50 50 50
125
150
E
HJD/JDC 36.00 (914.4)
6X 36 (914.4)
6X
4 40 50 75 100 100
150
250
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC 36.00 (914.4)
6X 42 (1066.8)
7X
5
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC 72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72 (1828.8)
12X
Two-Speed Two Winding, Constant/Variable Torque Type F956 Type F956
1 7.5 7.5 10 10 10
125
150
E
HFD/FDC 24.00 (609.6)

4X 24.00 (609.6) 4X
2 10 15 25 25 25
125
150
E
HFD/FDC 24.00 (609.6)
4X 24.00 (609.6) 4X
3
25 30 50 50 50
125
150
E
HFD/FDC 30.00 (762.0)
5X 30.00 (762.0) 5X
4
30
40
40
50
60
75
75
100
100
150
250
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
5X
5X
42.00 (1066.8)
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
7X
5
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC 72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Reduced Voltage Autotransformer
Type F606 Type F606

2 10 15 25 25 25 150 HFD/FDC 36.00 (914.4) 6X 36.00 (914.4) 7X
3 25 30 50 50 50 150 HFD/FDC 54.00 (1371.6) 9X 48.00 (1219.2) 9X
4 30 50 75 100 100 150 HJD/JDC 54.00 (1371.6) 9X 54.00 (1371.6) 10X
5
50
75
60
100
100
150
125
200
150
200
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X
6 150 200 300 400 400 600 HLD/LDC 72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
7 300 600 600 1200 HND 72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Reduced Voltage Part Winding
Type F706 Type F706

1PW 10 10 15 15 15 150 HFD/FDC 24.00 (609.6)
4X 24.00 (609.6) 5X
2PW 20 25 40 40 40 150 HFD/FDC 24.00 (609.6)
4X 24.00 (609.6) 5X
3PW 40 50 75 75 75 150 HFD/FDC 30.00 (762.0)
5X 30.00 (762.0) 6X
4PW
60
75
60
75
125
150
100
150
125
150
150
250
400
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC 36.00 (914.4)
6X 36.00 (914.4)
7X
5PW
100
150
125
150
250
250
350
300
350
400
600
HKD/KDC
HLD/LDC 72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
29.1-26
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
028
Table 29.1-4. Combination Starters with Series C Motor Circuit Protectors or Molded-Case Circuit Breakers (Continued)
Standard combination starter units with HMCP/HMCPE magnetic only disconnect have short-circuit ratings of 65,000A at 480V. Optional HMCP/HMCPE
E-Frame motor circuit protector available through size 3 starter only.
Fixed assemblies not available with RotoTract.
Requires 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep, 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide structure.
NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower HMCP
Frame
MCCB
Frame

Unit Size Unit Size
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Open Transition
Type F806 Type F806

2YD 20 25 40 40 40 150 HFD/FDC 30.00 (762.0) 5X 30.00 (762.0) 6X
3YD
30
40
40
50
75
75
150
250
HFD/FDC
HJD/JDC 42.00 (1066.8) 7X 42.00 (1066.8) 8X
4YD
60
75
125
150
150
150
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC 42.00 (1066.8) 7X 48.00 (1219.2) 9X
5YD
100
150
125
150
200
250
250
300
300
400
600
HKD/KDC
HLD/LDC 72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Closed Transition
Type F896 Type F896

2YD 20 25 40 40 40 150 HFD/FDC 42.00 (1066.8) 7X 42.00 (1066.8) 8X
3YD 40 50 250 HFD/FDC 54.00 (1371.6) 9X 54.00 (1371.6) 10X
4YD
60
75
125
150
150
150
250
400
HJD/JDC
HKD/KDC 60.00 (1524.0) 10X 60.00 (1524.0) 11X
5YD
100
150
125
150
200
250
250
300
300
400
600
HKD/KDC
HLD/LDC 72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
29.1-27
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
029
Intelligent Technologies IT. S811 Solid-State
Reduced Voltage StarterHMCP
Eatons IT. S811 solid-state reduced voltage starter uses
SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit during
operation. The IT. solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc inputs
and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a disconnect,
starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT.
Motor Service Factor (SF) Effect on IT. Starter Selection
A 1.0 service factor motor may draw up to
1.00 x full load amperes
1.15 x full load amperes (15% more current)
IT. starters are current rated devices. In some cases,
a larger IT. SSRV starter must be supplied for 1.15 SF
motors. See the maximum horsepower chart below
Table 29.1-5. Standard-Duty RatingsMotor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Standard-duty ratings reect the maximum starting duty that these

units are designed to supply. If starting duty listed is to be exceeded,
reference severe duty Table 29.1-9 on Page 29.1-28.
Standard-duty ampere rating. See Table 29.1-8 below.

Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service Factor (SF).
Table 29.1-6. Option SizingDimensions in Inches (mm)
Option ts in standard unit space.

Note: Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.
Table 29.1-7. Control Options
Option adds 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) (1X) to 37 and 66A units.
Table 29.1-8. Standard-Duty Ratings
Ampere
Rating
IT. Width
(mm)
Maximum Horsepower or (kW) HMCP/
MCCB
Frame
Freedom 2100
Unit Size
Freedom FlashGard
Unit Size
208V 240V 380V 480V 600V Inches
(mm)
X
Space
Inches
(mm)
X
Space 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF
HMCP
37
66
65 10
15
10
20
10
20
10
20
15
30
18.5
30
20
40
25
50
30
50
30
60
100
100
12.00 (304.8) 2X 18.00 (457.2) 3X
105
135
135
110 30
40
30
40
30
40
40
50
45
55
55
75
60
75
75
100
75
100
100
125
150
150
250
18.00 (457.2) 3X 24.00 (609.6) 4X
180 200 60 60 150 150 250 36.00 (914.4) 6X 42.00 (1066.8) 7X
180
240
304
200 50
60
75
60
75
100

75
100
75
100
75
110
90
132
125
150
200
150
200
250
200
250

200
300
400
400
400
36.00 (914.4) 6X 42.00 (1066.8) 7X
304 200 132 160 400 36.00 (914.4) 6X 42.00 (1066.8) 7X
360
420
500
290 125
150
125
150
125
150
150
200
160
200
250
200
220
250
300
350
350
400
300
350
450
350
450
500
600
600
600
54.00 (1371.6) 9X 54.00 (1371.6)
9X
650
720
850
290 200
200
200
250
200
250
300
250
300
350
315
375
375
500
450
500
600
500
600
700
600
600
700
600
700
900
1200
1200
1200
72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
1000 290 350 400 500 560 700 800 900 1000 2000 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker Disconnect
37
66
65 10
15
10
20
10
20
10
20
15
30
18.5
30
20
40
25
50
30
50
30
60
150
150
12.00 (304.8) 2X 18.00 (457.2) 3X
105
135
110 30
40
30
40
30
40
40
50
45
55
55
75
60
75
75
100
75
100
100
125
150
225
18.00 (457.2) 3X 30.00 (762.0) 5X
180
180
200
50
60
60
60
75
90
125
150
150
150
250
250
36.00 (914.4) 6X 42.00 (1371.6) 7X
240
304
200 60
75
75
100
75
100
75
100
110
132
132
160
150
200
200
200
400
400
36.00 (914.4) 6X 42.00 (1371.6) 7X
304 200 200 250 250 300 600 36.00 (914.4) 6X 54.00 (1371.6)
9X
360
420
500
290 125
150
125
150
125
150
150
200
160
200
250
200
220
250
300
350
350
400
300
350
450
350
450
500
600
600
600
72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
650
650
720
850
290 200
200
200
250
200
250
300
250
300
350
315
375
375
500
450
500
600
500
600
700
600
600
700
600
700
900
800
1200
1200
1200
72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
1000 290 350 400 500 560 700 800 900 1000 2000 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
IT. Width
(mm)
Disconnect
Type
Starter
Size
Option Unit
Size
Structure
Width
Isolating Contactor
65
110
110
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
1, 2, 3
3, 4
5
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
54.00 (1371.6)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
200
290
290
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
5,6
6
7
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
32.00 (812.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
Bypass Starter
65
110
110
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
1, 2, 3
3, 4
5
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
54.00 (1371.6)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
200
290
290
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
5, 6
6
7
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
24.00 (609.6)
32.00 (812.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
Extra 50 VA Control Power Transformer
24 Vdc Control
Line or Load MOV Protection
Pump Control Option
DeviceNet Communications Module
Ramp Current %
of FLA
Ramp
Time
Starts
Per Hour
Similar to
Starting Method
300%
500%
350%
30 seconds
10 seconds
20 seconds
3
3
3
Soft start
Full voltage
Wye delta
480%
390%
300%
20 seconds
20 seconds
20 seconds
2
3
4
80% RVAT
65% RVAT
50% RVAT
29.1-28
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
030
IT06Intelligent Technologies IT. S811 Solid-State
Reduced Voltage StarterHMCP
SCRs when starting and a low impedance run circuit
during operation. The IT. solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc
inputs and two relay outputs. IT. soft start units include a
disconnect, a starter, 24 Vdc power supply and 100 VA CPT.
Table 29.1-9. Severe-Duty RatingsMotor Circuit Protector Disconnect
Severe-duty ratings listed reect the maximum starting duty these

units are designed to supply. For higher ratings, please contact factory.
Severe-duty ampere rating. See Table 29.1-12 below.

Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service
Factor (SF).
Table 29.1-10. Option SizingDimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.
Option adds 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) (1X) to 37 and 66 ampere units.
Table 29.1-12. Severe-Duty Ratings
Ampere
Rating
IT. Width
(mm)
Maximum Horsepower or (kW) HMCP/
MCCB
Frame
Freedom 2100
Unit Size
Freedom FlashGard
Unit Size
208V 240V 380V 480V 600V Inches
(mm)
X
Space
Inches
(mm)
X
Space
1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF 1.15 SF 1.0 SF
HMCP
22
42
65 5
10
5
10
5
10
7.5
15
7.5
18.5
11
22
10
25
15
30
15
30
20
40
100
100
12.00 (304.8) 2X 18.00 (457.2) 3X
65
80
80
110 15
20
20
25
20
25
20
30
22
37
30
37
40
50
50
60
50
60
60
75
100
100
150
18.00 (457.2) 3X 24.00 (609.6) 4X
115
150
150
192
200 30
40
40
50
30
50
40
50
55
55
90
55
75
90
75
100
75
100
100
125
100
150
150
150
250
250
36.00 (914.4) 6X 42.00 (1066.8) 7X
192 200 50 60 60 75 125 125 150 200 400 36.00 (914.4) 6X 42.00 (1066.8) 7X
240
305
290 60
75
75
100
100
100
110
132
132
160
150
200
200
250
250
300
400
400
54.00 (1371.6) 9X 54.00 (1371.6) 9X
365
420
480
290 100
125
125
150
125
150
150
200
160
200
220
200
220
250
250
300
350
300
350
400
300
350
450
350
450
500
600
600
600
54.00 (1371.6) 9X 54.00 (1371.6)
9X
525 290 350 450 600 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
600 290 450 500 500 600 1200 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker Disconnect
22
42
65 5
10
5
10
5
10
7.5
15
7.5
18.5
11
22
10
25
15
30
15
30
20
40
150
150
12.00 (304.8) 2X 18.00 (457.2) 3X
65
80
110 15
20
20
25
20
25
20
30
22
37
30
37
40
50
50
60
50
60
60
75
225
225
18.00 (457.2) 3X 30.00 (762.0) 5X
115
150
192
200 30
40
50
40
50
60
30
50
60
40
50
75
55
55
90
55
75
90
75
100
125
75
100
150
100
125
150
100
150
200
400
400
400
36.00 (914.4) 6X 42.00 (1066.8) 7X
240
305
290 60
75
75
100
100
100
110
132
132
160
150
200
200
250
250
300
600
800
72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
365
420
480
525
290 100
125
125
150
125
150
150
200
160
200
220
200
220
250
250
300
350
350
300
350
400
450
300
350
450
350
450
500
1200
1200
1200
1200
72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
600 290 450 500 500 600 1200 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
IT. Width
(mm)
Disconnect
Type
Starter
Size
Option Unit
Size
Structure
Width
Isolating Contactor
65
110
110
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
1, 2, 3
3, 4
5
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
54.00 (1371.6)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
200
290
290
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
5, 6
6
7
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
20.00 (508.0)
32.00 (812.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
Bypass Starter
65
110
110
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
1, 2, 3
3, 4
5
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
54.00 (1371.6)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
200
290
290
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
HMCP, MCCB
5, 6
6
7
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
24.00 (609.6)
32.00 (812.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
24 Vdc Control
Pump Control Option
Ramp Current %
of FLA
Ramp
Time
Starts
Per Hour
Similar to
Starting Method
450%
500%
350%
30 seconds
10 seconds
65 seconds
4
10
3
Soft start
Full voltage
Wye delta
480%
390%
300%
25 seconds
40 seconds
60 seconds
4
4
4
80% RVAT
65% RVAT
50% RVAT
29.1-29
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
031
Table 29.1-13. Combination Starters with Fusible SwitchesDimensions in Inches (mm)
Combination fused starter units rated 100 kAIC short-circuit current.
7X (42.00-inch [1066.8 mm]) unit size with solid-state overloads.
Certain items in unit option Groups B and C may require additional space. See Page 29.1-40.
For bottom entry of motor cables.
For top entry of motor cables.
Add 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) space for low speed fuses.
Bottom 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) space in rear is unusable.
Requires 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide and 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure.
NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower Switch
Rating

Unit Size Unit Size
Full Voltage Non-ReversingFusible Type F204 Type F204
1 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 30 12.00 (304.8) 2X 18.00 (457.2) 3X
2 10 15 25 25 25 60 12.00 (304.8) 2X 18.00 (457.2) 3X
3 25 30 50 50 50 60/100 24.00 (609.6) 4X 24.00 (609.6) 4X
4 40 50 75 100 100 100/200 36.00 (914.4) 6X 36.00 (914.4) 6X
5 75 100 150 200 200 400
54.00 (1371.6) 9X 60.00 (1524.0) 10X

6
150 200 300 400 400 600

66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
11X
12X
66.00 (1676.4)
72.00 (1828.8)
11X
12X
Full Voltage ReversingFusible Type F214 Type F214
1 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 30 18.00 (457.2) 3X 24.00 (609.6) 4X
2 10 15 25 25 25 60 18.00 (457.2) 3X 24.00 (609.6) 4X
3 25 30 50 50 50 100/200 30.00 (762.0) 5X 30.00 (762.0) 5X
4 40 50 75 100 100 200 40.00 (1016.0) 8X 54.00 (1371.6) 9X
5 75 100 150 200 200 400 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
6 150 200 300 400 400 600 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Two-Speed One WindingFusible Type F944 Type F944
1 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 30 24.00 (609.6) 4X 24.00 (609.6) 4X
2 10 15 25 25 25 60 24.00 (609.6) 4X 30.00 (762.0) 5X
3 25
25
30
30
50
30
50
50
50
60
100 36.00 (914.4) 6X 36.00 (914.4) 6X
4
40
50
75
100
60
100
100
200 60.00 (1524.0) 10X 60.00 (1524.0) 10X
5 75 100 150 200 200 400 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Two-Speed Two WindingFusible Type F954 Type F954
1 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 30 24.00 (609.6) 4X 24.00 (609.6) 4X
2 10 15 25 25 25 60 24.00 (609.6) 4X 30.00 (762.0) 5X
3
25
30
50
50
30
50
60
100 30.00 (762.0) 5X 36.00 (914.4) 6X
4
40
50
75
100
60
100
100
200 60.00 (1524.6) 10X 54.00 (1371.6)
10X
5 75 100 150 200 200 400 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Reduced Voltage AutotransformerFusible Type F604 Type F604
2 10 15 25 25 25 60 36.00 (914.4) 6X 36.00 (914.4) 7X
3 25 30 50 50 50 100 54.00 (1371.6) 9X 60.00 (1524.0) 10X
4 40 50 75 100 100 200 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
5 75 100 150 200 200 400 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
6 150 200 300 400 400 600 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
29.1-30
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
032
Table 29.1-13. Combination Starters with Fusible Switches (Continued)
Combination fused starter units rated 100 kAIC short-circuit current.
Requires 28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide and 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep section.
NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower Switch
Rating

Unit Size Unit Size
Reduced Voltage Part WindingFusible Type F704 Type F704
1PW 10 10 15 15 15 60 36.00 (914.4) 6X 24.00 (609.6) 5X
2PW
20
15
25
25
40
30
40
40
60
100
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
6X
6X
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
5X
5X
3PW
40
50
75
50
75
60
75
100
200
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
8X
8X
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
9X
9X
4PW
50
75
75
100
150
100
150
150
200
400
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
10X
54.00 (1371.6)
54.00 (1371.6)
10X
10X
5PW
100
150
100
150
200
250
250
350
300
350
400
600 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Open TransitionFusible Type F804 Type F804
2YD
15
20
15
25
30
40
40
40
60
100 30.00 (762.0) 5X 36.00 (914.4) 6X
3YD
25
40
30
50
50
75
60
75
75
100
200 54.00 (1371.6) 9X 54.00 (1371.6) 9X
4YD
50
60
60
75
100
150
125
150
150
200
400 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
5YD
100
150
125
150
200
250
250
300
300
400
600 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
6YD
250
300
200
250
350
350
400
500
400
500
700
350
500
700
700
400
600
800
1200
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
Reduced Voltage Wye Delta Closed TransitionFusible Type F894 Type F894
2YD
15
20
15
25
30
40
40
40
60
100 42.00 (1066.8)

7X 48.00 (1219.2)

8X
3YD
25
40
30
50
50
75
60
75
75
100
200 66.00 (1676.4) 11X 66.00 (1676.4) 12X
4YD
50
60
60
75
100
150
125
150
50
200
400
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
5YD
100
150
125
150
200
250
250
300
300
400
600 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
6YD
250
300
200
250
350
350
400
500
400
500
700
350
500
700
700
400
600
800
1200
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
12X

29.1-31
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
033
Reduced Voltage StarterFusible Switch
operation. The IT. S811 solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc
Table 29.1-14. Standard-Duty RatingsFusible
Standard-duty ampere rating. See Table 29.1-16 below.
Standard duty ratings reect the maximum starting duty that these units are designed to supply.
If starting duty listed is to be exceeded, reference severe duty Table 29.1-9 on Page 29.1-28.
Consult factory for unit width.
Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).
Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service Factor (SF).

Table 29.1-17. Option Sizing for Isolating Contactor and Bypass Starter
Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.

Ampere
Rating
IT.
Width
(mm)
Maximum Horsepower (kW) Switch
Rating
Freedom 2100 Unit Size FlashGard Unit Size
208V 240V 380V 480V 600V Inches
(mm)
X
Space
Inches
(mm)
X
Space
37
66
65 10
15
10
20
10
20
10
20
15
30
18.5
30
20
40
25
50
30
50
30
60
30/60
100
18.00 (457.2) 3X 24.00 (609.6) 4X
105
135
110 30
40
30
40
30
40
40
50
45
55
55
75
60
75
75
100
75
100
100
125
200
200
30.00 (762.0) 5X 36.00 (914.4) 6X
180
240
304
304
200 50
60
75
60
75
100
60
75
100
60
75
100
75
110
132
90
132
160
125
150
200
150
200
250
150
200
250
150
200
300
400
400
400
600
60.00 (1524.0) 10X 60.00 (1524.0) 10X
304 200 75 100 132 160 200 250 250 300 600 60.00 (1524.0)
10X 60.00 (1524.0)
10X
360
420
420
500
290 125
150
100
125
125
150
150
200
160
200
250
200
220
250
300
350
350
400
300
350
450
350
450
500
600
600
800
800
72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
650
720
850
290 200
200
200
250
200
250
300
250
300
350
315
375
375
500
450
500
600
500
600
700
600
600
700
600
700
900
1200
1200
1200
72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
1000 290 350 400 500 560 700 800 900 1000 1200 72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
24 Vdc Control
Pump Control Option
Ramp Current %
of FLA
Ramp
Time
Starts
Per Hour
Similar to
Starting Method
300%
500%
350%
30 Seconds
10 Seconds
20 Seconds
3
3
3
Soft start
Full voltage
Wye delta
480%
390%
300%
20 Seconds
20 Seconds
20 Seconds
2
3
4
80% RVAT
65% RVAT
50% RVAT
IT. Width
(mm)
Fused
Switch
Type
(Amperes)
Starter
Size
Option
Unit Size
Inches
(mm)
FlashGard
Unit Size
Inches
(mm)
Structure
Width
Inches
(mm)
65
110
110
30/60/100
100
200
1, 2, 3
3
4
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
54.00 (1371.6)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
54.00 (1371.6)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
200
290
290
400/800
600/800
800/1200
5, 6
6
7
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
32.00 (812.8)
36.00 (914.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
29.1-32
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
034
Reduced Voltage StarterFusible
operation. The IT. S811 solid-state starter has ve 24 Vdc
Table 29.1-18. Severe-Duty RatingsFusible
Severe-duty ampere rating. See Table 29.1-20 below.
Severe-duty ratings listed reect the maximum starting duty these units are designed to supply. For higher ratings, please contact factory.
Consult factory for width of unit.
Bottom exit only. Top exit unit is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) wide (rear is unusable).
Note: Most motors used in industrial applications are 1.15 Service factor (SF).

Table 29.1-21. Option Sizing for Isolating Contactor and Bypass Starter
Unit size includes space for IT. starter and option.

Ampere
Rating
IT.
Width
(mm)
Maximum Horsepower (kW) Switch
Rating
Freedom 2100 Unit Size FlashGard Unit Size
208V 240V 380V 480V 575V Inches
(mm)
X
Space
Inches
(mm)
X
Space
22
42
42
65 5
10
5
10
10
7.5
15
7.5
18.5
11
22
10
25
15
30
15
30
20
40
30/60
30/60
100
18.00 (457.2) 3X 24.00 (609.6) 4X
65
80
110 15
20
20
25
20
25
20
30
22
37
30
37
40
50
50
60
50
60
60
75
200
200
30.00 (762.0) 5X 36.00 (914.4) 6X
115
115
150
192
200
30
40
50
40
50
60
30
50
60
40
50
75
55
55
90
55
75
90
75
100
125
75
100
150
100
125
150
100
150
200
200
400
400
400
60.00 (1524.0) 10X 60.00 (1524.0) 10X
240
305
365
420
480
480
525
290 60
75
100
125
75
100
125
150
100
125
150
100
150
200
110
132
160
200
220
132
160
200
220
250
150
200
250
300
350
350
200
250
300
350
400
450
250
300
350
450
300
350
450
500
600
600
800
800
800
1200
1200
72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
600 290 450 500 500 600 1200 72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72.00 (1828.8)
12X
24 Vdc Control
Pump Control Option
Ramp Current %
of FLA
Ramp
Time
Starts
Per Hour
Similar to
Starting Method
450%
500%
350%
30 seconds
10 seconds
65 seconds
4
10
3
Soft start
Full voltage
Wye delta
480%
390%
300%
25 seconds
40 seconds
60 seconds
4
4
4
80% RVAT
65% RVAT
50% RVAT
IT. Width
(mm)
Fused
Switch
Type
(Amperes)
Starter
Size
Option
Unit Size
Inches
(mm)
FlashGard
Unit Size
Inches
(mm)
Structure
Width
Inches
(mm)
65
110
110
30/60/100
100
200
1, 2, 3
3
4
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
54.00 (1371.6)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
54.00 (1371.6)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
200
290
290
400/800
600/800
800/1200
5, 6
6
7
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
32.00 (812.8)
36.00 (914.4)
64.00 (1625.6)
29.1-33
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
035
SVX9000 130 hp at 480V Plug-in
Adjustable Frequency Drive Units
All Eatons standard units include a
disconnect, an AC choke, an output
reactor and a door-mounted keypad. All
plug-in units have a built-in dynamic
braking circuit, M3 frame. Standard
unit drives do not include a CPT.
Note: Output reactor not included on 240V
units. Standard on 380500V drives up to
125 hp (CT rating).
CT (I
H
): High overload drives are
capable of producing 200% starting
torque for 10 seconds and are rated
150% overload for one minute.
Essentially a constant torque drive.
VT (I
L
): Low overload drives are
Essentially a variable torque drive.
Table 29.1-22. Freedom 2100 SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives
For fusible disconnect, use typical option unit.

Note: Drive units t into a standard 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide MCC structure.
Table 29.1-23. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives in NEMA 3R MCCs
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCC.
A separate CPT bucket is provided for all AFDs (15 hp) listed in the table.

Note: Drive units t into a standard 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.
I
H
/I
L
Amperes
Nominal
hp I
H
/I
L
CB Type
Standard
Unit Space
Typical Options
Unit Space
Max. Option
Unit Space
HMCP MCCB Dim. (X) Dim.
(X) Dim. (X)

200240V
3.6
4.7
5.6
7
.75
1
1.5
2
7
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
3X
3X
3X
3X
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
5X
5X
5X
5X
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
6X
10
16
22
30
3
5
7.5
10
15
30
50
50
25
40
50
70
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
4X
4X
4X
7X
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
6X
6X
6X
8X
42.00 (1066.8)
42.00 (1066.8)
42.00 (1066.8)
54.00 (1371.6)
7X
7X
7X
9X
43
57
15
20
100
100
100
125
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
7X
7X
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
8X
8X
54.00 (1371.6)
54.00 (1371.6)
9X
9X
380500V
2.2
3.3
4.3
5.6
1
1.5
2
3
7
7
7
15
15
15
15
15
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
3X
3X
3X
3X
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
5X
5X
5X
5X
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
6X
7.6
12
16
23
5
7.5
10
15
15
30
30
30
15
25
35
50
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
4X
4X
4X
4X
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
6X
42.00 (1066.8)
42.00 (1066.8)
42.00 (1066.8)
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
7X
7X
7X
31
38
46
20
25
30
50
50
100
60
80
100
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
8X
8X
8X
54.00 (1371.6)
54.00 (1371.6)
54.00 (1371.6)
9X
9X
9X
I
H

Amperes
Nominal
hp I
H

I
L

Amperes
Nominal
hp I
L
CB Type
Unit Space (Typ./Max)

HMCP MCCB Dim. (X)
2.2
3.3
4.3
5.6
7.6
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
3.3
4.3
5.6
7.6
12.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
7
7
7
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
12.0
16.0
23.0
31.0
38.0
7.5
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
16.0
23.0
31.0
38.0
46.0
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
30
30
30
50
50
25
35
50
60
80
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
12X
46.0 30.0 61.0 40.0 100 100 72.00 (1828.8) 12X
29.1-34
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
036
Table 29.1-24. Freedom FlashGard Adjustable Frequency DrivesDimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: Drive units t into a standard 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide MCC structure.
I
H
/I
L
Amperes
Nominal
hp I
H
/I
L
CB Type
Standard
Unit Space
Typical Options
Unit Space
Max. Option
Unit Space
HMCP MCCB Dim. (X) Dim.
(X) Dim. (X)

200240V
3.6
4.7
5.6
7
.75
1
1.5
2
7
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
4X
4X
4X
4X
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
5X
5X
5X
5X
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
6X
10 3 15 25 30.00 (762.0) 5X 36.00 (914.4) 6X 42.00 (1066.8) 7X
16
22
30
5
7.5
10
30
50
50
40
50
70
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
5X
5X
5X
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
6X
6X
8X
42.00 (1066.8)
42.00 (1066.8)
54.00 (1371.6)
7X
7X
9X
43
57
15
20
100
100
100
125
42.00 (1066.8)
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
7X
54.00 (1371.6)
54.00 (1371.6)
9X
9X
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
10X
380500V
2.2
3.3
4.3
5.6
1
1.5
2
3
7
7
7
15
15
15
15
15
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
3X
3X
3X
3X
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
5X
5X
5X
5X
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
6X
6X
6X
6X
7.6
12
5
7.5
15
30
15
25
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
4X
4X
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
6X
6X
42.00 (1066.8)
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
7X
16
23
10
15
30
30
35
50
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
4X
4X
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
6X
6X
42.00 (1066.8)
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
7X
31 20 50 60 42.00 (1066.8) 7X 54.00 (1371.6) 8X 60.00 (1524.0) 10X
35
46
25
30
50
100
80
100
42.00 (1066.8)
42.00 (1066.8)
7X
7X
54.00 (1371.6)
54.00 (1371.6)
8X
8X
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
10X
Table 29.1-25. Plug-in Options
Up to ve option boards may be selected.

Please see Tab 31 for detailed information.
All options will t in typical and maximum

option unit.
This option will t in all units.
One of these options will t in 530 hp CT at

480V frame standard units, 130 hp CT at
480V typical and maximum option units.
All options will t in maximum option unit.
Use with bypass option.
DB resistors are to be mounted by the

customer external to the MCC.
Not available for 240V units.

Note: Output reactor or Dv/Dt lter not
required for motor lead lengths shorter
than 100 feet (30.4m)30 feet (9.1m) for
2 hp and below).
Note: Maximum motor lead length is
160 feet (48.8m) for 1.5 hp and below,
330 feet (100.6m) for 2 hp and 400 feet
(121.9m) for 3 hp and larger when using
a standard output reactor.
Note: Motor lead lengths up to 2000 feet
(609.6m) can be achieved by using the KLC
Dv/Dt lter.
Plug-in Options
Option Boards
I/O Expander
Encoder Expander
Interbus S Communications
Modbus Communications
PROFIBUS DP Communications
LonWorks Communications
Can Open (Slave) Communications
DeviceNet Communications
Johnson Controls N2 Communications

PROFIBUS DP (D9 Connector)
EtherNet/IP Communications
Modbus TCP Communications
Modbus (D9 Connector)
Plug-in Control Relays

One relay
Two relays
Three relays
Other Options
Automatic bypass circuit
Bypass drive test switch
Seven relay 120V control with CPT
Isolated signal processor
315 PSIG interface
Dynamic breaking resistors

Graphics keypad
Line fuses
RFI lter
Deduct to remove output lter
KLC 2000 ft (610m) Dv/Dt lter

Output contactor
Dual overloads
Three contactor bypass

29.1-35
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
037
SVX9000 30200 hp at 480V
Non-Plug-in Adjustable
Frequency Drive Units
disconnect, a line reactor, an output
reactor and a door-mounted keypad.
Standard units of 9X unit space must be
located in the bottom of the MCC and
there is no vertical bus in the lower
48.00 inches (1219.2 mm). There is no
vertical bus for 12X units.
Note: Output reactor not included on
200240V units. Standard on 380690V
drives up to 125 hp (CT rating).
CT (I
H
): High overload drives are
VT (I
L
): Low overload drives are
Drives with fusible disconnects require drive with option space.
28.00-inch (711.2 mm) wide, 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel.
32.00-inch (812.8 mm) wide, 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure built-in panel.
40.00-inch wide (1016.0 mm), 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel.
Table 29.1-27. SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives in NEMA 3R MCCs
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCC.
A separate CPT bucket is provided for all AFDs (15 hp) listed in the table.
32.00-inch (812.8 mm) wide, 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure built-in panel.
Note: Drive units t into a standard 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.
I
H
Amperes
Nominal
hp I
H
I
L

Amperes
Nominal
hp I
L
CB Type
Standard
Unit Space
Drive Option
Space
HMCP MCCB Dim. (X) Dim. (X)
200240V
70
83
113
25
30
40
70
83
113
139
25
30
40
50
100
100
100
150
125
175
200
150
54.00 (1371.6)
54.00 (1371.6)
54.00 (1371.6)
72.00 (1828.8)
9X
9X
9X
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
139
165
200
50
60
75
165
200
264
60
75
100
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
380500V, 50/60 Hz
61
72
87
40
50
60
61
72
87
105
40
50
60
75
100
100
100
150
125
150
175
225
54.00 (1371.6)
54.00 (1371.6)
54.00 (1371.6)
54.00 (1371.6)
9X
9X
9X
9X
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
105
140
170
205
75
100
125
150
140
170
205
100
125
150
150
250
400
300
400
500
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
245
200
261
300
200
250
400
400
600
600
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
I
H

Amperes
Nominal
hp I
H

I
L

Amperes
Nominal
hp I
L
CB Type
Unit Space (Typ./Max)

HMCP MCCB Dim. (X)
2.2
3.3
4.3
5.6
7.6
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
3.3
4.3
5.6
7.6
12.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
7
7
7
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
5X
5X
5X
5X
5X
12.0
16.0
23.0
31.0
38.0
7.5
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
16.0
23.0
31.0
38.0
46.0
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
30
30
30
50
50
25
35
50
60
80
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
12X
46.0
61.0
72.0
87.0
105.0
30.0
40.0
50.0
60.0
75.0
61.0
72.0
87.0
105.0
140.0
40.0
50.0
60.0
75.0
100.0
100
100
100
150
150
100
125
150
175
225
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
12X
140.0
170.0
205.0
245.0
100.0
125.0
150.0
200.0
170.0
205.0
261.0
125.0
150.0
200.0
250
400
400
400
300
400
600
600
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
29.1-36
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
038
Table 29.1-28. Freedom FlashGard SVX9000 Adjustable Frequency Drives
40.00-inch wide (1016.0 mm), 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep enclosure with built-in panel.
Fixed assemblies, no RotoTract for VFD unit. Breaker disconnect unit for the drive is provided
with RotoTract mechanism.
I
H
Amperes
Nominal
hp I
H
I
L
Amperes
Nominal
hp I
L
CB Type
Standard
Unit Space
Drive Option
Space
200240V
70
83
113
25
30
40
70
83
113
139
25
30
40
50
100
100
100
150
125
175
200
150
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
10X
10X
10X
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
139
165
200
50
60
75
165
200
264
60
75
100
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
380500V, 50/60 Hz
61
72
87
40
50
60
61
72
87
105
40
50
60
75
100
100
100
150
125
150
175
225
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
10X
10X
10X
10X
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
105
140
170
205
75
100
125
150
140
170
205
100
125
150
150
250
400
300
400
500
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
245
200
261
300
200
250
400
400
600
700
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
Table 29.1-29. Non-Plug-in Options

All options will t in option unit.

Not available for 240V units.

than 100 feet (30.4m)30.00 feet (9.1m)
for 2 hp and below).
Dv/Dt lter.
Note: Fusible units take option unit space.
Not all options will t in fusible units.
Non Plug-in Options
Option Boards
I/O Expander
Encoder Expander


One relay
Two relays
Three relays
Other Options
315 PSIG interface

Graphics keypad
Line fuses
RFI lter

Output contactor
Dual overloads
Dynamic breaking circuit

29.1-37
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
039
SVX9000 2001100 hp at 480V
Multi-Structure Adjustable
Frequency Drive Units
disconnect, a line reactor and a door-
mounted keypad. Disconnect and
drive unit are in separate structures,
structures are mechanically interlocked.
Structures have no vertical bus. These
drives are bottom exit only.
I
H
(CT): High overload drives are
I
L
(VT): Low overload drives are
The drives listed in this table are xed assemblies and not available with RotoTract mechanism.
60.00-inch (1524.0 mm) wide unit. Drive is in a 40.00-inch (1016.0 mm) wide structure and
disconnect is in a 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.
Contact factory for sizing.
100.00-inch (2540.0 mm) wide unit. 80.00-inch (2032.0 mm) drive is in (2) 40.00-inch (1016.0 mm)
wide structures, disconnect is in a 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.
116.00-inch (2946.4 mm) wide unit. 96.00-inch (2438.4 mm) drive is in (2) 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm)
wide structures, disconnect is in a 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure.
I
H
Amperes
Nominal
hp I
H
I
L
Amperes
Nominal
hp I
L
CB Type
Standard
Unit Space
Drive
Option Space
380550V
320
400
480
600
250
300
400
500
400
460
600
672
300
400
500
600
400
600
600
1200
800
800
1200
1600
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
700
880
1020
1070
600
700
800
900
880
1020
1070
1200
700
800
900
1000
1200
1200
1200
1600
1600
2000
2000
2000
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
12X
12X
12X
1200
1300
1000
1100
1600
1600
2500
2500
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
Table 29.1-31. Multi-Structure Options

All options will t in Option unit.

Dv/Dt lter not available 700 hp and above.
Consult factory for sizing and availability.

than 100 feet (30.4m)30 feet (9.1m) for
2 hp and below).
Dv/Dt lter.
Note: Fusible units take option unit space.
Not all options will t in fusible units.
Plug-in Options
Option Boards
I/O Expander
Encoder Expander


One relay
Two relays
Three relays
Other Options
315 PSIG Interface

Graphics keypad
Line fuses
RFI lter

Output contactor
Dynamic breaking circuit

29.1-38
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
040
CPX9000 Clean Power Drives
1500 hp at 480V
Eatons CPX9000 Clean Power Drives
use advanced 18-pulse, clean-power
technology that signicantly reduces
line harmonics at the drive input
terminals, resulting in one of the
purest sinusoidal waveforms.
I
H
(CT): High overload drives are
I
L
(VT): Low overload drives are
Table 29.1-32. CPX9000 Low Overload Clean Power Drives, Thermal-Magnetic Breaker and Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) Disconnect
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom FlashGard MCCs.
The CPX9000 drive uses the term Low Overload (I

L
) in place of the term Variable Torque and High Overload (I
H
) in place of the term
Constant Torque.
CPX9000 Drives in MCCs are available in thermal-magnetic breaker, motor circuit protector and fused disconnect congurations.
A minimum clearance of 4.00 inches (101.6 mm) should be provided at the back of CPX9000 Drive MCC section for ventilation.
Add 32.00 inches (812.8 mm) of width for bypass.
Requires 4.00 inches (101.6 mm) in rear for ventilation.

Table 29.1-33. CPX9000 Low Overload Clean Power Drives, Fusible Switch DisconnectDimensions in Inches (mm)
The CPX9000 product uses the term Low Overload (I

L
) in place of the term Variable Torque and High Overload (I
H
) in place of the term
Constant Torque.
A minimum clearance of 4.00 inches (101.6 mm) should be provided at the back of CPX9000 Drive MCC section for ventilation.
Add 32.00 inches (812.8 mm) of width for bypass.
Requires 4.00 inches (101.6 mm) in rear for ventilation.

Low Overload Drive
High Overload Drive
CB Type
Standard Unit Space Dimensions Inches (mm)
I
L
Amperes
Nominal hp
I
L
I
H

Amperes
Nominal hp
I
H
HMCP MCCB Width Height Depth (X)
34
40
52
25
30
40
27
34
40
20
25
30
50
100
100
80
100
125
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
65
77
96
50
60
75
52
65
77
40
50
60
100
100
150
150
175
225
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
124
156
180
100
125
150
96
124
156
75
100
125
150
250
400
300
400
400
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
240
302
361
200
250
300
180
240
302
150
200
250
600
600
600
600
600
600
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
68.00 (1727.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
414
477
515
350
400
450
361
414
477
300
350
400
600
600
1200
600
600
1200
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
106.00 (2692.4)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
28.00 (711.2)
12X
12X
12X
590 500
515 450
1200 1200 106.00 (2692.4) 90.00 (2286.0) 28.00 (711.2) 12X

Low Overload Drive
High Overload Drive
Fuse Switch Standard Unit Space Dimensions Inches (mm)
I
L
Amperes
Nominal hp
I
L
I
H

Amperes
Nominal hp
I
H
Fuse Switch Width Height Depth (X)
34
40
52
25
30
40
27
34
40
20
25
30
50
60
80
60
60
100
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
65
77
96
50
60
75
52
65
77
40
50
60
100
100
100
100
100
100
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
124
156
180
100
125
150
96
124
156
75
100
125
175
200
250
200
200
400
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
240
302
361
200
250
300
180
240
302
150
200
250
350
450
600
600
600
600
60.00 (1524.0)
60.00 (1524.0)
68.00 (1727.2)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
12X
12X
12X
414
477
515
350
400
450
361
414
477
300
350
400
600
600
800
600
600
1200
68.00 (1727.2)
68.00 (1727.2)
106.00 (2692.4)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
21.00 (533.4)
28.00 (711.2)
12X
12X
12X
590 500
515 450
800 1200 106.00 (2692.4) 90.00 (2286.0) 28.00 (711.2) 12X

29.1-39
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
041
Option Groups for AC Combination Starters, AC Drives
Note: Option groups are common to both Freedom 2100 and
Freedom FlashGard MCCs.
Option Group A
Table 29.1-34. Wiring Class
Control terminal blocks and device panels not included with

NEMA 1A wiring.
Table 29.1-35. 100 kA Circuit Breaker Starter Interrupting Capacity
Current limiter attachments are used. Add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to all
size 3 and 4 starters.
Table 29.1-36. Control Circuit TransformersTypical Sizing
Refer to Table 29.1-86 for actual ratings.

Note: Price includes one secondary and two primary fuses.
Table 29.1-37. Control Circuit Fusing
Note: Required in accordance with NEC for all starter units with
control wiring external to the MCC. See NEC, General for exceptions.
Table 29.1-38. Motor Starter Auxiliary Contacts
Maximum of four per contactor on multi-contactor starters and

6.00-inch (152.4 mm) units.
Table 29.1-39. Interlock for Switch or Breaker Operator
Note: For use when control circuit is fed from an external source.
Table 29.1-40. Internal Circuit Breaker Options
Table 29.1-41. Terminal Blocks
Use Burndy YAEV10-L36 for #10 AWG compression termination.

Table 29.1-42. Control Wire Options
Freedom Starter control terminals only available with spade

wire terminals.
Table 29.1-43. Miscellaneous Options
May add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) to unit size. Consult factory.
May add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm). Consult factory.

Table 29.1-44. Vacuum Contactors in Lieu of Air Break
Table 29.1-45. Ground Fault ProtectionInstantaneous or Adjustable
Description
NEMA Class IA
NEMA Class IC
NEMA Class IIB
NEMA Class IIC
NEMA Class IS (includes 1B wiring and 2B schematics)
Starter Type Voltage
Starters with HMCPs
Starters with thermal-magnetic circuit breakers
480
480
Starters with HMCPs
Starters with thermal-magnetic circuit breakers
600
600
Starter Size
1, 2 (100 VA)includes extra 50 VA
Extra 50 VA, size 1, 2
Description
Control fuse and auxiliary switch
Control fuse
Blown fuse indicator
Description
1NO or 1NC (sizes 14)
1NO or 1NC (sizes 56)
Maximum of eight on each contactor
Maximum of four on each contactor

Description
1NO1NC
2NO2NC
Description
Alarm contact
Auxiliary 1NO1NC
Auxiliary 2NO2NC
120V shunt trip
50C (thermal-magnetic)
Description
Side mounted
(Will accept stripped wire or ring/spade

wire lug12 AWG bare/14 AWG ring/spade)
Front railpressure connector
Front railpull apart
Front railutility/accepts ring wire lug.
Additional 6.00-inch (152.4
mm) space required for
Freedom starters sizes 14
Description
#16 AWG (standard)
#14 AWG
Wire markers
Spade wire terminals
Ring wire terminals
Wiring to common CPT

SIS power wiresubstitution
SIS control wiresubstitution
Starter Class 2 interwiring/per wire
Description
Mini ammeter and CT
Mini voltmeter
Mini elapsed time meter
Panel elapsed time meter
Operations counter
Wiring diagram on door
Coil surge suppressor
CT for remote metering (requires additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space)
Heater packs installed
Device labels
Blank device panels
Starter Type
FVNR
FVR, 2S2W, PW
RVAT, 2S1W, YD-Open
YD-Closed
Available sizes 46
Description
D64 relay (with zero sequence CT) Requires additional
6.00-inch (152.4 mm)
space
29.1-40
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
042
Table 29.1-46. Power FusesR, J Type
Table 29.1-47. Power Factor Capacitor Options
Table 29.1-48. Current Limiter Attachment for HMCP
Option Group B
Devices may require extra unit space.
Table 29.1-49. Timing Relays
Table 29.1-50. Control Relays
The six- and eight-pole units can be provided with four additional
non-convertible NO contacts.
Table 29.1-51. Alternators
Option Group C
Table 29.1-52. Monitoring Relays
Loop-powered devicesrequires 24 Vdc power source, which is

typically provided in the PLC.
Does not require separate 24 Vdc power source. Suitable for powering
analog meters.
Table 29.1-53. Extra Bi-Metallic Overload RelayType C306
Option Group D
Table 29.1-54. Solid-State Overload Relays
Size 4 starters require an additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) (1X) space

when used with solid-state overloads.
Ampere Rating
30
60
100
Optional
Optional
Optional
200
400
600
Optional
Optional
Optional
Description
Blown power fuse indicator (set of threeone per phase)
Description
Size 12
Size 3
Size 4
Requires additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space

Requires additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space
Type of Relay Mounting
Solid-state timer
PneumaticAGASTAT
Panel
Panel on or off delay
24-hour motor timer
7-day timer
Repeat cycle timer
Panel
Panel
Door or panel
Number of Poles Type
Two-pole
Four-pole
General purpose Type D7 socket relay
N300 xed contacts
Two-pole
Four-pole
Six-pole
Eight-pole
Ten-pole
Type AR machine tool relays
N600 convertible contacts
Two-pole
Three-pole
Four-pole
Six-pole
Eight-pole
Type MD26 relays

N600 convertible contacts
Description
Two-circuit alternator
Three-circuit alternator
Panel (additional 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) space
required on size 1s and size 2s)
Type of Relay
D60LA current sensing
voltage
transducer
Price includes 1 PT
Additional
6.00-inch
(152.4 mm)
space required
AC current
sensors
with CTs
05 thru 0100A
050 thru 0300A
0300 thru 0600A
AC current transducer, 420 mA,
self-powered with CTs
All Ratings
Phase monitoring relaythree-phase
Watt transducer, 420 mA, self-powered CTs
Description
Size 132A overload relay
Description
C440 solid-state overload with ground fault protection
C441 Motor Insight

MP-3000 motor protector
MP-3000 RTD module
29.1-41
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
043
Option Group E
Table 29.1-55. Oiltight Pushbuttons, Lights, Selector Switches
Maximum two devices per starter in dual units.
Maximum of six devices without increasing compartment space.

Option Group F
Options for 6.00-Inch (152.4 mm) Starter Units
Control terminal blocks are 300V rated and are limited
to 12 points maximum
Standard VA control transformer only
Table 29.1-56. Oiltight Pushbuttons, Lights, Selector Switches
On 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) starter units, pilot devices are limited to

three E22 devices.
Option Group G
Table 29.1-57. Remote Racking System
Table 29.1-58. FlashGard Locking Accessory
Option Group I
Optional Safety Accessories
Table 29.1-59. Automatic Insulation Tester
Table 29.1-60. Voltage Presence Indicator (VoltageVision)
Device Device Type
Pushbuttons
1 unit
2 unit
3 unit
10250T
Selector switches
2 position
3 position
4 position
Key operated adder
Pilot lights
Standard transformer 6V bulb
Standard transformer LED bulb
Push to test transformer 6V bulb
Push to test LED bulb
Pushbuttons
1 unit
2 unit
3 unit
E30
Selector switches
2 position
3 position
4 position
Key operated adder
Pilot lights
Push to test Transformer 6V bulb
Device Device Type
Pushbuttons
1 unit
2 unit
3 unit
E22
Selector switches
2 position
3 position
4 position
Key operated adder
Pilot lights
Push to test transformer 6V bulb
Description
Wired remote racking system for FlashGard MCC units
Description
Locking accessory for FlashGard MCC
Description
Automatic insulation tester
Automatic insulation tester with megohm meter (mounted in unit door)
Description
Voltage presence indicator (mounted on unit door)
29.1-42
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
044
Table 29.1-61. Main Incoming Line and Feeder Circuit BreakersMolded-Case Circuit BreakersDimensions in Inches (mm)
Frames reect standard circuit breakers. Unit spacings shown include sufcient space to terminate cables on any standard
breaker lug. If cable sizes exceed those listed, add 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) space for lug adapters.
See circuit breaker terminal data for variations.
Digitrip 310 LS is required and included in the price.
NEMA 1 gasketed only.
Digitrip 310 LS is standard and included in the pricing.
The main breaker requires the complete vertical section. The rear is unusable.
24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide.
Compact feeder units.

Table 29.1-62. Main Circuit BreakersMagnum DS Air Circuit Breakers Manually or Electrically Operated
Fixed MountedDimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: A 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) ller section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCC to allow for door opening.
Frame Size
(Amperes)
Circuit Breaker
Frame
Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) Main Unit Size Feeder Unit Size Maximum
Cable Size
240V 480V 575V Inches (mm) X Space Inches (mm) X Space

125
150
E125H
HFD
100
100
65
65
25
25
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
2X
3X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
1X

or 2X
2X
4/0 (one per phase)
4/0 (one per phase)
150
225
FDC
HFD
100
100
100
65
35
35
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
3X
3X
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
2X
3X
4/0 (one per phase)
4/0 (one per phase)
225 J250
FDC
100
100
100
100
35
35
18.00 (457.2) 3X 18.00 (457.2) 1X

or 3X 4/0 (one per phase)
250 J250
JDC
100
100
65
100
35
35
24.00 (609.6)
30.00 (762.0)
4X
5X
18.00 (457.2) 3X 350 kcmil (one per phase)
400 HKD
KDC
100
100
65
100
25
50
30.00 (762.0) 5X 30.00 (762.0) 4X 250 kcmil (two per phase)
or 500 kcmil
(one per phase)
CHKD
CKDC
100
100
65
100
25
50
30.00 (762.0) 5X 30.00 (762.0) 5X
600 HLD
LDC
100
100
65
100
35
50
24.00 (609.6) 4X 30.00 (762.0) 5X 500 kcmil (two per phase)
CHLD
CLDC
100
100
65
100
35
50
4X 24.00 (609.6) 4X
800 NDC 100 100 50 42.00 (1066.8) 7X 42.00 (1066.8) 7X 750 kcmil (three per phase)
CHND
CNDC
100
100
65
100
35
50
72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X
1200 HND
NDC
100
100
65
100
35
50
42.00 (1066.8) 7X 42.00 (1066.8) 7X 750 kcmil (three per phase)
CHND
CNDC
100
100
65
100
35
50
72.00 (1828.8) 12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X
2000 RD
RDC
CRD
CRDC
100
100
100
100
65
100
65
100
50
65
50
65
72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 750 kcmil (six per phase)

2500 RD
RDC
100
100
65
100
50
65
72.00 (1828.8)
12X 72.00 (1828.8) 12X 750 kcmil (six per phase)

Frame Size
Amperes
Circuit Breaker
Type
Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) Unit
Size
Enclosure
Width
Enclosure
Depth
240V 480V 575V
800 MDS-608
MDS-C08
65
100
65
100
65
100
72.00 (1828.8) 24.00 (609.6) 36.00 (914.4)
1600 MDS-616
MDS-C16
65
100
65
100
65
100
2000 MDS-620
MDS-C20
65
100
65
100
65
100
3200 MDS-632
MDS-C32
65
100
65
100
65
100
42.00 (1066.8)
29.1-43
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
045
Table 29.1-63. Main Circuit Breakers Magnum DS Air Circuit Breakers, Manually or Electrically Operated
Drawout MountedDimensions in Inches (mm)
A 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) ller section must be added between the main and the rest of the MCC to allow for door opening.
Structure is rear aligned.

Table 29.1-64. Digitrip Units
This table is common for both Freedom 2100 and Freedom

FlashGard MCCs.
Tie breaker adds an additional 20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide bus

transition section. Also two 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) ller sections will
be added to the MCC if the tie breaker is located in the center of
the MCC lineup. If the tie breaker is located between the two main
structures, the two 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) llers are not needed.
Table 29.1-65. Main-Tie-Main Auto Throw-Over Options

FlashGard MCCs.
PanelMate page layouts are pre-dened and not subject to

customer modications.
Table 29.1-66. Freedom 2100 Main Incoming Line and Feeder
Fusible SwitchesDimensions in Inches (mm)
Three-pole250V or 600 Vac. Fuses not included.
Suitable for 100,000A interrupting if Class RK fuses are used.
Type of SW K-SW 30800A.
High magnetic molded-case switch.
For bottom cable entry, add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space.
For bottom entry, add 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X space.
For top entry, add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space.

Table 29.1-67. Freedom FlashGard Main Incoming Line and Feeder
Fusible SwitchesDimensions in Inches (mm)
Three-pole250 or 600 Vac. Fuses not included.
Suitable for 100,000A interrupting if Class RK fuses are used.
Type of SW K-SW 30800A.
High magnetic molded-case switch.
For bottom cable entry, add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space.
For bottom entry, add 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X space.
For top entry, add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) or 1X space.

Frame Size
(Amperes)
Circuit Breaker
Type
Interrupting Capacity (kAIC) Unit
Size
Enclosure
Width
Enclosure
Depth
240V 480V 575V
800 MDS-608
MDS-C08
65
100
65
100
65
100
72.00 (1828.8) 24.00 (609.6)
42.00 (1066.8)
1600 MDS-616
MDS-C16
65
100
65
100
65
100
2000 MDS-620
MDS-C20
65
100
65
100
65
100
3200 MDS-632
MDS-C32
65
100
65
100
65
100
Type Unit Space
Inches (mm)
RMS 3101150 Refer to Page 21.4-10
for more details.
Options
Tie breaker
Electrically operated
72.00 (1828.8) or 12X
Accessories
UV release-instantaneous
Shunt trip (standard on electrically operated
breakers)
Key interlock on breaker
Auxiliary switch (3A/3B)

Cell position switch
Operations counter
Auxiliary power module (to test Digitrip)

Portable lift truck
Manual close pushbutton cover
Option Description
AT200 Standard PLC-based control scheme. No operator interface
(PanelMate) provided. Sequence of operations and external
controls are pre-dened and not subject to customer
modications. Type of voltage sensing device must be
chosen. If closed-transition operation is required, a
sync-check relay (device 25) must be used.
AT300 Same as AT200, except includes operator interface
(PanelMate).
AT300X Same as AT200, except customer modications are acceptable.

This is the proper choice for PLC-based systems with special
sequences, more than main-tie-main congurations, and/or
where special PanelMate page layouts are required.
AT300IQ Standard Automatic Transfer Control (ATC) controller-based
control scheme for main-main congurations. Either or both
sources may be generators. Includes manual-auto operation,
and generator control switch. If closed-transition operation is
required, a sync-check relay (device 25) must be used.
Switch
Rating
Amps
Fuse
Clip Size
Amps
Unit Space
Incoming Line Feeder
Inches (mm) X Space Inches (mm) X Space
30
60
30/30 Dual
30/60 Dual
30
60
30/30 Dual
30/60 Dual
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
3X
3X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
2X
60/60 Dual
100
200
400
60/60 Dual
100
200
400
18.00 (457.2)
30.00 (762.0)
48.00 (1219.2)
3X
5X
8X
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
30.00 (762.0)
42.00 (1066.8)
2X
3X
5X
7X
600
800
1200
600
800
1200
54.00 (1371.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
9X
8X
10X
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
8X
8X
10X
Switch
Rating
Amps
Fuse
Clip Size
Amps
Unit Space
Incoming Line Feeder
Inches (mm) X Space Inches (mm) X Space
30
60
30
60
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
3X
3X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
3X
3X
100
200
400
100
200
400
18.00 (457.2)
30.00 (762.0)
48.00 (1219.2)
3X
5X
8X
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
3X
5X
7X
600
800
1200
600
800
1200
54.00 (1371.8)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
9X
8X
10X
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
8X
8X
10X
29.1-44
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
046
Table 29.1-68. Lighting Panelboards
120/240V or 120/208V Lighting Panelboards TypePL1A
Fixed mounted, main lug only panelboards can be either

120/240V, single-phase, three-wire; 208Y/120V, three-phase,
four-wire.

FlashGard MCCs.
Note: For MCB, back feed panelboard branch circuit breaker,
or select separate feeder unit.
Note: Bolt-on single-, two-, three-pole breakers only.
Table 29.1-69. 277/480V or 480/600V Lighting Panelboards Type PRL3A
Fixed mounted, main lug only panelboards can be either

480 or 600V, three-phase, three-wire or 480Y/277V, three-
phase, four-wire. Mounted in bottom portion of structure.

FlashGard MCCs.
Note: For MCB, back feed panelboard branch circuit breaker,
or select separate feeder unit.
Note: Either plug-in or bolt-on single-, two-, three-pole breakers only.
Table 29.1-70. Lighting Panelboard Circuit Breakers
Eatons circuit breakers can be either plug-in or bolt-on,

single-, two- or three-pole through 240V. 600V maximum
single-, two- or three-pole circuit breakers are bolt-on.

FlashGard MCCs.
Table 29.1-71. Automatic Transfer SwitchesDimensions in
Inches (mm)

FlashGard MCCs.
ATVI designs include ATC controller door mounted microprocessor-

based monitoring device for use in open transition transfer switches
where rapid, reliable restoration of power in outage situations is essen-
tial. The ATC controller is a microprocessor-based logic controller to be
used with Eaton transfer switches. This device provides the operator
with an at-a-glance overview of switch status and parameters, as well
as key diagnostic data. Real-time values for volts and frequency can be
viewed via the front panel LED display, along with an indication of the
power source currently in use. The ATC controller continuously moni-
tors either single-phase or three-phase voltages for Source 1, Source 2
and the Load. Depending on the application, the user can customize
the ATC controller to meet specic application need.
Manually operated switch: MTVX = Single handle manual operation.

NTVS = Electrically operated non-automatic.
Requires 42.00-inch (1066.8 mm) deep structure.

Number
of
Circuits
Chassis Rating
(Amperes)
Unit Space
Inches (mm)
Single-
Phase
Three-Wire
Three-
Phase
Four-Wire
Single-Phase
Three-Wire
Three-Phase
Four-Wire
18
30
42
225
225
225
100
100
225
24.00 (609.6) or 4X
30.00 (762.0) or 5X
36.00 (914.4) or 6X
24.00 (609.6) or 4X
30.00 (762.0) or 5X
36.00 (914.4) or 6X
Number
of Circuits
Chassis
Rating
(Amperes)
Unit Space Inches (mm)
Three-Phase
Three-Wire
Three-Phase
Four-Wire
14
18
24
100
250
100
36.00 (914.4) or 6X
36.00 (914.4) or 6X
36.00 (914.4) or 6X
26
32
36
250
100
250
48.00 (1219.2) or 8X
48.00 (1219.2) or 8X
48.00 (1219.2) or 8X
42
42
12
100
250
400/600
48.00 (1219.2) or 8X
60.00 (1524.0) or 10X
36.00 (914.4) or 6X
60.00 (1524.0) or 10X
60.00 (1524.0) or 10X
14
30
42
400/600
400/600
400/600
48.00 (1219.2) or 8X
60.00 (1524.0) or 10X
48.00 (1219.2) or 8X
60.00 (1524.0) or 10X
72.00 (1828.8) or 12X
Poles Maximum
Voltage
Plug-in Bolt-on Ampere
Interrupting
Capacity
1/2/3
1/2/3
1/2/3
1/2/3
240
240
600
600
HQP
QPHW
BAB
QBHW
EHD
HFD
10,000
22,000
14,000
65,000
Ampere
Rating
Switch
Type
Interrupting
Rating (kA)
Unit
Width
Unit
Space
100
150
Eaton MTVX, NTVS

Eaton MTVX, NTVS
65
65
20.00 (508.0)
36.00 (914.4)
or 6X
100
150
Eaton ATVI
Eaton ATVI
65
65
48.00 (1219.2)
or 8X
225
300
400
Eaton ATVI
Eaton ATVI
Eaton ATVI
65
65
65
72.00 (1828.8)
or 12X
600
800
1000
Eaton ATVI
Eaton ATVI
Eaton ATVI
50
50
50
24.00 (609.6)
72.00 (1828.8)
or 12X
1000
1200
1600
2000
Eaton ATVISP
Eaton ATVISP
Eaton ATVISP
Eaton ATVISP
100
100
100
100
44.00 (1117.6)
72.00 (1828.8)
or 12X
100
150
ASCO Type 7000
ASCO Type 7000
65
65
20.00 (508.0)
72.00 (1828.8)
or 12X
260
400
ASCO Type 7000
ASCO Type 7000
65
35
28.00 (711.2)
600
800
ASCO Type 7000
ASCO Type 7000
35
50
36.00 (914.4)
1000
1200
ASCO Type 7000
ASCO Type 7000
50
100
40.00 (1016.0)

29.1-45
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
047
Table 29.1-72. Dry-Type Distribution Transformers
Transformer 1.02.0 kVA will include a circuit breaker

and fuses in a standard 2X unit
Transformers 3.0 kVA and above have taps and
electrostatic shields as standard
Transformers 3.0 kVA and above will include the
primary and secondary circuit breakers housed
behind a single door

FlashGard MCCs.
Transformers feeding an MCC mounted panelboard require a

secondary breaker or main breaker in panelboard.
Table 29.1-73. Power Factor Correction Capacitors
PF capacitors are electrolytic type and are optionally

available with external line fuses and blown fuse indicators.
Capacitors sizes must be specied by the customer.
Caution: Capacitors on the main bus of the MCC may affect
solid-state equipment. Please consult factory.

FlashGard MCCs.
Table 29.1-74. SPD (Surge Protective Device) with Circuit Breaker
Disconnect
Includes SuperVisor Monitoring Display with power quality

meter for volts, sag, swell, outage, transient counter, Form C
contact, alarm enable and disable, and circuit breaker disconnect.

FlashGard MCCs.
Also available in 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) unit (2X)

without circuit breaker disconnect.
Note: Specify three-phase delta or three-phase wye.
Table 29.1-75. DeviceNet Communications
DeviceNet-enabled components in MCCs eliminate up to 90%

of the control wiring versus traditional hardwired designs.
24 Vdc DeviceNet is prewired throughout the MCC. Trunk
cable is provided in the horizontal wireway. Drop cable is
provided for vertical wireways and units.

FlashGard MCCs.
IT. starters up to 66 amperes require additional 6.00 inches (152.4 mm)

when selecting DN50, DN65 DeviceNet interfaces.
Freedom Communications Choices
The Freedom MCC is capable of communicating on multiple
industrial networks connecting to any major brand of PLC
or Distributed Control System. The way the communications
is designed, it is possible to run multiple segments or even
multiple networks through one lineup. The Freedom MCC
has direct network connectivity to:
DeviceNet
Modbus RTU
EtherNet/IP
Modbus TCP
PROFIBUS DP
kVA
Rating
Unit
Space
Primary Breaker
(Included in Space Factor)
Secondary Breaker
(Included in
Space Factor)
230V 480V
Single-Phase
0.5
0.75
1
2X
2X
2X
15
15
15
15
15
15
1.5
2
3
2X
2X
4X
15
15
15
15
15
15
20
5
7.5
10
4X
4X
4X
15
20
25
15
20
30
30
40
60
15
20
25
5X
5X
5X
40
50
60
40
60
70
90
125
150
30
45
6X
7X
70
100
80
125
175
250
Three-Phase
9
15
25
5X
5X
6X
15
20
40
15
25
40
40
60
90
30
45
6X
6X
40
60
50
70
125
175
kvar
Rating
208V Unit Space 240V Unit Space 600V Unit Space
Inches
(mm)
X
Space
Inches
(mm)
X
Space
Inches
(mm)
X
Space
2
3
4
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
5
7.5
10
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
15
20
22.5
12.00 (304.8)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
2X
4X
4X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
25
30
40
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
4X
4X
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
12.00 (304.8)
2X
2X
2X
50
60
75
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
24.00 (609.6)
4X
4X
4X
90
100
120
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
4X
6X
6X
Description Unit Space
Inches
(mm)
X
Space
Surge Current Per Phase
100 kA SPD-100
120 kA SPD-120 (recommended branch unit)
160 kA SPD-160
200 kA SPD-200
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
3X
3X
3X
3X
250 kA SPD-250 (recommended service entrance)
300 kA SPD-300
400 kA SPD-400
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2)
3X
3X
3X
Part
Number
Description Space
Requirements
D77D-DNA QCPort interface to DeviceNet In power supply buckets
D77D-EMA
D77D-EMA
Modbus TCP communications
Modbus RTU485
In power supply buckets
MVXDN MVX adjustable frequency
drives DeviceNet interface
OPTC7 SVX9000 adjustable frequency

drives DeviceNet Interface
DN50, DN65 Discrete DeviceNet interface

for IT. solid-state starters
PS1 Single 5A power supply 2X

PS2 Dual 5A power supply 2X
PanelMate
1700
Operator interface for
DeviceNet system
12.00-inch (304.8 mm)/2X
DN50 DeviceNet I/O module 12.00-inch (304.8 mm)/
2X minimum
29.1-46
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
048
The devices capable of being integrated into the MCC on
these industrial networks are bi-metal and solid-state over-
loads (across the line starters), variable speed drives, soft
starts and feeder breakers; it is possible to integrate ATS
and meters as well depending on the industrial network.
DeviceNet Wiring
Table 29.1-76. Freedom Communications Choices
The type of data available from the devices include but are
not limited to the following.

FlashGard MCCs.
Each of the Freedom MCCs are factory wired and factory
tested prior to shipment with a common point provided
for the customer to connect their industrial network to.
Table 29.1-77. Freedom Communications
This table is common for both IT. MCC and IT. FlashGard MCC.
Power Xpert Gateway
Power Xpert Gateways (PXG) provide a cost-effective
method to easily Web-enable Eaton and third-party products.
The gateway consists of an embedded Web server that
allows the user to connect to Eaton MCC products, such
as breakers, meters starters, VFDs and soft starts. The
gateway provides the central connection point for the power
metering/monitoring/protective devices, allowing their
parameters to be monitored via the Web. Power Xpert
Gateways provide data communications to Eatons Power
Xpert Software to facilitate centralizing and gathering data
for long-term data archival, analysis and trending features.
The PXG600 allows you to enable preselected parameters
to be trended for each supported device. Selecting the trend
symbol will generate a real-time graph for that parameter
and can be viewed for the past 24 hours, seven days,
30 days or all past history. The PXG600 also offers direct
e-mail notications to up to 10 users. Select from event
notications, data logs and event logs. Information is
presented in organized, user-friendly Web pages and the
power monitoring equipment listed in Table 29.1-76, solid-
state overload relays, motor protective relays, solid-state
reduced voltage starters, adjustable frequency drives and
many more communicating devices. Additionally, the PXG
can provide communications to solid-state overload relays,
motor protective relays, solid-state reduced voltage starters,
adjustable frequency drives and much more.
The PXG has a feature called pass through, which allows a
Modbus TCP master to pass data through the PXG and get/
set device specic registers, and also allows the Modbus
TCP master to control the end device.
The standard Power Xpert Gateway bucket is 2X and
includes the PXG and 24 Vdc power supply.
Home Page
Trending Page (PXG600 Only)
Parameter C306
Bi Metal
Overload
C440
Solid-
State
Overload
C441
Solid-
State
Overload
VFD Soft
Start
Breaker
ON/OFF (control
and feedback)

Trip indication
Cause of trip
Trip reset
Operating current
(three-phase and
average)

Operating voltage
(three-phase and
standard)

Thermal capacity
kW
Frequency
Motor speed
Four generic inputs
Drive specic
parameters
Part Number Description Space

Requirements
OPTC7 SVX DeviceNet interface No space change
OPTCI SVX EtherNet/IP and
Modbus TCP interface
No space change
OPTC3/OPTC5 SVX PROFIBUS interface No space change
PS1 Single power supply 2X
PS2 Dual power supply 2X
PanelMate ePro Operator interface 2X
Network Interface
for Freedom
starters
DeviceNet, Modbus,
Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP,
PROFIBUS
No space change
29.1-47
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
049
Table 29.1-78. Power Metering Equipment
Add Gateway Card Kit (PXM-GCK).
To obtain this information over LAN rather than the standard Ethernet port, add the extra Communication Module PXCE-B.
Via Modbus RS-485.

Feature IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 IQ 250 IQ 260 PXM2250 PXM2260 PXM2270 IQA6600 PXM4000 PXM6000 PXM8000
Instrumentation
Current, per phase
Current demand
Voltage, per phase
(L,L, L-N)

Min,/max, readings I, V
Min,/max, readings
I, V, PF, F, W, VAR, VA

Frequency
View amps and volts;
phasors on display
Text only
Power
Real, reactive and apparent
power (W, VAR, VA)

Power factor, total
power demand

Demand Methods
Block interval
(sliding, xed)

Energy
energy, total (Wh, VAR, Vah)

THD
% THD amps and volts
(to 40th)
To 50th To 127th To 127th To 127th
Interharmonics
Communications
RS-485, Modbus RTU,
KYZ output
Option Option Option Modbus
option
KYZ
option
KYZ
option
KYZ
option
DNP 3.0
Digital I/O
Digital input with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
Digital output with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
Load shedding with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
with
I/O card
Analog I/O
Analog output
(01 mA or 420 mA)
with
analog
card
with
analog
card
with
analog
card
with
analog
card
with
analog
card
020 or
420
Ethernet via Local Area Network
HTTP (Web pages)

SMTP (e-mail)

NTP (time sync)

Modbus TCP/IP

Ethernet TCP/IP
Fiber optic Ethernet port

SNMP

Phasor diagram (Web

viewwye connected)

Live waveform
view snapshot

Ind. bar harmonics view
29.1-48
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
050
Table 29.1-78. Power Metering Equipment (Continued)
Table 29.1-79. Incoming Line Metering and Bus Protection

FlashGard MCCs.
Two electronic meters will t in a single 12.00-inch (304.8 mm) (2X) unit.
Ammeters require two CTs for three-phase/three-wire systems, and

three CTs for three-phase/four-wire systems. Voltmeters require two
PTs for three-phase/three-wire systems, and three PTs for three-phase/
four-wire systems.
Without disconnect 12.00 inches (304.8 mm) or 2X.

Harmonic Correction
Table 29.1-80. Clean Control Center
Eatons Clean Control Center is an integrated power correction

system that provides harmonic correction directly on the
MCC horizontal bus. The harmonic correction unit senses
the load current and dynamically injects into the horizontal
bus a synthesized waveform that cancels harmonic content
from nonlinear loads such as AC drives. The result is a clean
waveform. Clean Control Centers are UL 845 listed.

FlashGard MCCs.
Clean Control Center model includes 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide

MCE structure, current transformers and door-mounted digital
interface panel.
Multiple units can be applied in parallel for additional

harmonic correction.
Feature IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 IQ 250 IQ 260 PXM2250 PXM2260 PXM2270 IQA6600 PXM4000 PXM6000 PXM8000
Revenue Accuracy
ANSI C12.20 (0.5 or 0.2%) 0.50% 0.50% 0.50% 0.20% 0.20% 0.20% 0.20% 0.20% 0.20% 0.20% 0.20% 0.20%
Waveform Analysis
Waveform capture (threshold/input)
Volts disturbance, waveform
capture trigger

Excess Dv/Dt
Stores waveform captures 10
(8 cy ea)
2 GB 4 GB 8 GB
Sampling rate, max.
samples/cycle
128 4096 4096 100,000
Captured waveform displayed
on meter/GUI

Comtradestandard IEEE
le format

6 MHz impulse transient capture
Transient capture on neutral
Individual harmonics magnitude To 50th To 85th To 85th To 85th
Sub-cycle disturbance capturing
Number of 9's availability
PQ index graph
K-factor
Crest factor
ITIC performance curve
Flicker
Type Description Unit Space
Inches (mm)
Switchboard
meters
1% accuracy
Ammeter
Ammeter with switch
Voltmeter
Voltmeter with switch
12.00 (304.8)
or 2X
AM/VM
AM/VM with switches
Instrument
Transformers
600/800A CT
1000A CT
2000A CT
2500A CT
Consult
Eaton
480/120 PT 6.00 (152.4)
or 1X
Signal
transducers
Current (add CT) single-phase
Voltage (add PT)
Watt (add CT and PT) single-phase
6.00 (152.4)
or 1X
Voltage Protection
SPD (see Table 29.1-74 on Page 29.1-45)
Ground detection lightsthree-phase underground systems
System voltage monitor
Lightning arrester and surge capacitor
18.00 (457.2)
or 3X
6.00 (152.4)
or 1X
Ground Fault Sensing C-HRG Safe Ground High Resistance Ground System
Current Requires 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep,
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide structure
without a vertical wireway.
72.00 (1828.8)
or 12X
Voltage
Harmonic
Current
(Amperes)
Input
Voltage
Disconnect
Type
Standard
Unit Space
Inches (mm)
Standard
Unit
Space (X)
50A active
harmonic lter
Up to
480V
Molded-
case switch
72.00 H x 20.00 W
(1828.8 H x 508.0 W)
12X
100A active
harmonic lter
Up to
480V
Molded-
case switch
72.00 H x 20.00 W
(1828.8 H x 508.0 W)
12X
29.1-49
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
051
Standard Structures and Structure Options
Eatons standard Freedom 2100 Series
MCC structure is NEMA 1, gasketed,
90.00-inch (2286.0 mm) high,
20.00-inch (508.0 mm) wide with a
depth as shown in Figure 29.1-9. Each
standard structure has a 9.00-inch
(228.6 mm) high horizontal wireway
at the top and at the bottom and a
4.00-inch (101.6 mm) wide full height
vertical wireway at the right.
All wireway doors are hinged and
secured with 1/4-turn latches. The
standard busing is 600A, UL rated,
copper horizontal bus and 300A,
UL rated, copper vertical bus braced
for 65,000 symmetrical amperes.
Many other bus sizes and types are
available. Also included as standard
is a vertical bus isolation barrier.
Table 29.1-81. Standard Structures and Structure OptionsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 29.1-82. Structure ModicationsDimensions in Inches (mm)
The standard Freedom 2100 Series structure is designed to comply with the UL 2-meter
requirement. Disconnect operating handle is not more than 2 meters [78.00 inches (1981.2 mm)]
above the bottom of the MCC. Motor control centers elevated on a raised pad or installed
on unembedded channel sills may require operator handle extensions for the uppermost
operators. UL handle extension optionally available when required.
Description
Standard Structures
16.00 (406.4) deep structure Structure 1
21.00 (533.4) deep structure
Front mounting only Structure 2
Front and rear mounting Structure 3
4.00 (101.6) of additional structure width, 32.00 (812.8) maximum
8.00 (203.2) vertical wireway in lieu of standard 4.00-inch (101.6)
Special Structures
Single corner section for L conguration of MCC
Transition section
Series 2100 to Type W
10.00 (254.0) widefront aligned
Plug-in blank relay mounting space, per 6-inch Any 6.00 (152.4) height
Fixed-mounted relay back pan, full depth of structure
20.00 (508.0) structure with wireway, 13.00 (330.2) with usable panel
20.00 (508.0) structure without wireway, 17.00 (431.8) with usable panel
32.00 (812.8) with double door
Programmable controller mounting structure
(per complete structure with full xed mounting back pan)
20.00 (508.0) structure with wireway Complete section
20.00 (508.0) structure without wireway Complete section
Plexiglass see-through door insert for PLC structure 6.00 (152.4) increments
19.00 (482.6) instrumentation mounting racks installed in PLC structure Consult Eaton
Channel oor sills: 11-gauge, 1.00 x 3.00 (25.4 x 76.2)
NEMA 1 gasket
NEMA 12 dust-proof, includes bottom plate
Bottom plate for NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure
150-watt space heater, per structure
Thermostat for space heater control
Pullbox kit for cable and wiring to be eld mounted on top structure
12.00 (304.8) high
18.00 (457.2) high
24.00 (609.6) high
Rear hinged structure door, 72.00 (1828.8) high
NEMA 2 drip shield on top of MCC
NEMA 3R non-walk-infront-mounted, back-to-back
NEMA 3R walk-in aisle-front mounted
NEMA 3R walk-in tunnel type
NEMA 4Xconsult factory
Special reduced height structures
Seismic certication (earthquake qualication)
UL handle extension
Figure 29.1-9. StructureDimensions in

Inches (mm)
The standard Freedom 2100 Series structure

is designed to comply with the UL 2-meter
requirement. Disconnect operating handle
is not more than 2 meters [78.00 inches
(1981.2 mm)] above the bottom of the
MCC. Motor control centers elevated on
a raised pad or installed on unembedded
channel sills may require operator handle
extensions for the uppermost operators.
UL handle extension optionally available
when required.
16.00 (406.4)
20.00
(508.0)
90.00
(2286.0)
21.00 (533.4)
Structure 2
72-inch (1828.8 mm) Space
Front Mounted Only
Structure 3
72-inch (1828.8 mm) SpaceFront
66-inch (1676.4 mm) SpaceRear
Back-to-Back
Structure 1
72-inch (1828.8 mm) Space
Front Mounted Only
Top Horizontal
Wireway
Vertical
Wireway
Vertical
Compartment
Bottom
Horizontal
Wireway
20.00
(508.0)
21.00 (533.4)
20.00
(508.0)
29.1-50
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
052
Table 29.1-83. Bus ModicationsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Eatons Freedom 2100 Series MCCs bear the UL label. Service entrance labeling is available.
Requires 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure.
Requires 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure. Not available in back-to-back structure.
Contact Eaton for 3200A dimensions.
Vertical bus and unit stabs are tin-plated copper only.
Neutral is half-rating of horizontal bus.

Table 29.1-84. Main Lugs OnlyMechanical Lug Compartment (Three-Phase, Three- or Four-wire)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Provisions for terminating incoming line cables directly onto the MCC bus system. Up to 1200A, all lug landings are bolted to
a fully rated vertical bus in that section. MLO sections must be put at the top for top entry cables and at the bottom for bottom
entry cables. For smaller cable sizes, cable lugs may also be extended into an optional top hat as shown in this table.
Requires 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) = (1X) unit space.
Lug landings require the complete vertical section. The rear is unusable.
Description
Main Bus, Per Vertical Structure CuTin-Plated
(Standard)
Copper Horizontal Bus Ratings Tin-Plated 50C 65C
600A Size
800A Size
1200A Size
1600A Size
2000A Size
2500A Size
3200A Size
0.25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8)Bars/Phase 1
0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 1
0.25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5)Bars/Phase 2
0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 4
0.25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5)Bars/Phase 6
0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 8
N/A
0.25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8)Bars/Phase 1
0.25 x 2.00 (6.4 x 50.8)Bars/Phase 1
0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 1
0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 2
0.25 x 2.50 (6.4 x 63.5)Bars/Phase 4
0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 6
0.25 x 3.00 (6.4 x 76.2)Bars/Phase 8
21.00 (533.4) deep
21.00 (533.4) deep
21.00 (533.4) deep
21.00 (533.4) deep
Silver-plated bus main horizontal bus

Insulated main horizontal bus, per vertical structure (taping)
Vertical bus, per vertical structure: 300Acopper (tin-plated)
Increased bus capacity: rated at 600A (front-mounted only)
Rated at 600A (back-to-back)copper
Rated at 800A (back-to-back and front)
Rated at 1200A
Increased mechanical bus bracing, per vertical structure:
42,000A rms symmetrical short-circuit current
Vertical bus isolation barrier, per vertical structure
Labyrinth design insulation-isolation vertical bus barrier
Ground bus, 300A standard, per vertical structure
Increased capacity ground bus only, 600A, 1/4- x 2.00-inch (6.4 x 50.8 mm), per vertical structure
Plug-in grounding system, includes 300A vertical ground bus and unit grounding clips, per vertical structure
Neutral bus, ungrounded for three-phase, four-wire power, per vertical structure
Splice plates
Optional
Optional
Standard
Cu only
Standard
Cu only
Cu only
Optional
Standard
Optional
Standard
Optional Freedom
Standard Cu
Standard Cu
Cu
Cu
Maximum Cable
Size (kcmil)
Bus Rating
(Amperes)
Maximum Cables
per Phase
Cable Entry
(Top or Bottom)
Lug
Type
Unit
Space
X
Space
Enclosure
Width
350 600 2 Screw
Crimp
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
2X
3X
20.00 (508.0)
4 Top
Bottom
Screw
Screw
Crimp
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
3X
4X
6X
18.00-inch (457.2 mm)
top hat
Either
600 800 2 Screw
Crimp
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
3X
4X
4 Screw
Crimp
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
4X
6X
18.00-inch (457.2 mm)
top hat
Either
750 1000 2
4
Screw
Crimp
Screw
Crimp
24.00 (609.6)
36.00 (914.4)
36.00 (914.4)
48.00 (1219.2)
4X
6X
12X
12X
1000 1200 2 Screw
Crimp
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
5X
6X
1000 2500 8 Screw
Crimp
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
3200 Screw
Crimp
72.00 (1828.8)
72.00 (1828.8)
12X
12X
29.1-51
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
053
Bus Duct Entry Sandwich Type to Horizontal Bus or Main
DisconnectPull Box
Pull box and pre-fabricated bus connectors are supplied to
match the sandwich type bus duct end ange. Bus duct is
assumed to enter the top. Bus duct type and orientation to
the MCC must be provided.
Table 29.1-85. Bus Duct Entry to Horizontal Bus or Main Disconnect
Pull BoxDimensions in Inches (mm)

FlashGard MCCs.
Contact Eaton for 3200A dimensions.

Note: Consult factory for non-segregated bus requirements.
Table 29.1-86. Typical Heat Loss Data

FlashGard MCCs.
Table 29.1-87. Typical Weights in lbs (kg)
Weight for NEMA 1 structure with 600A horizontal and 300A

vertical bus.
Table 29.1-88. Freedom MCC Ratings and Highlights
Table 29.1-89. Control Power Transformer Data
All control power transformers are encapsulated and will

deliver rated secondary voltage at full load. Two primary
and one secondary fuses are furnished as standard.

FlashGard MCCs.
Maximum size without increasing starter space.
6.00-inch (152.4 mm) unit.

Horizontal Bus
Rating (Amperes)
Pull Box
Height
6001600
20002500
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
Description Current (A) Loss (W)
Vertical Sections
Horizontal Bus and
Ampacity
600
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3200
200
300
500
700
1000
1400
2050
Space heaters (each)
FVNR size 1
FVNR size 2
500
40
60
FVNR size 3
FVNR size 4
FVNR size 5
FNVR size 6
100
130
230
400
Description Weight
16.00-inch (406.4 mm) deep x 20.00-inch
(508.0 mm) wide structure
200 (91)
21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep x 20.00-inch
(508.0 mm) wide structure
260 (118)
Adder for Horizontal Bus
800A
1000A
1200A
10 (5)
15 (7)
18 (8)
1600A
2000A
2500A
3200A
24 (11)
30 (14)
38 (17)
49 (22)
Adder for Vertical Bus
600A
800A
1200A
30 (14)
40 (18)
60 (27)
Adder for Units FreedomInches (mm)
12.00 (304.8)
18.00 (457.2)
24.00 (609.6)
25 (11.4)
40 (18)
63 (29)
30.00 (762.0)
36.00 (914.4)
77 (35)
100 (45)
Feature Freedom
Vertical bus barrier
Communications from
starter units
DeviceNet, Modbus, PROFIBUS, EtherNet/IP
using E777 solid-state overload relay
Bus bracing 65 kA standard
42 and 100 kA available
Control wire #16 standard
Horizontal bus material Copper
Pilot devices 10250T
6.00-inch (152.4 mm)
starter compartment
F206 Size 1
FVNR sizes 3 and 4 18.00-inch (457.2 mm) compartment
FVNR size 6 54.00-inch (1371.6 mm) compartment
NEMA Size
Starter
Starter Type Freedom
Standard
VA Rating
Maximum
VA Rating
Size 1
Size 1
Size 2
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6
Full voltage
non-reversing
and reversing
100
100
100
N/A
150
200
200
150
150
100
150
N/A
250
250
350
250
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6
Autotransformer 100
150
200
250
200
150
250
250
350
350
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6
Two-speed
One winding
100
100
200
350
350
200
200
200
250
500
500
350
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6
Two-speed
Two winding
100
100
150
200
200
200
150
150
250
250
250
350
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6
Part winding 150
150
200
350
350
200
150
150
250
500
500
350
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6
Wye delta
(open or closed
transition)
200
350
350
200
200
200
200
500
500
350
29.1-52
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
054
Table 29.1-90. Starter Sizes Selection Guide

FlashGard MCCs.
Information is based on Table 430.150 of NEC (1999).
Information is based on use of copper conductorsTable 310.16 and

Tables 1, 4 and 5, Ch. 9 of NEC. If aluminum conductors are used refer
to Table 310.16 of NEC (1999).
Figure 29.1-10. Side View AFront Mounted Only
Master terminal block assembly furnished for Type C wiring only.

When location not specied, MTB supplied at the bottom.
Standard structure arrangement in front

Without MTB; A and B = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm)
With MTB at bottom; A and B = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm)
With MTB at top; A = 15.00 inches (381.0 mm),
B = 3.00 inches (76.2 mm)
Figure 29.1-11. Side View BFront and Rear Mounted
Master terminal block assembly furnished for Type C wiring only.

When location not specied, MTB supplied at the bottom.
Rear horizontal bus barrier not supplied with front mounted only structure.
Standard structure arrangement in front

Without MTB; A and B = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm)
With MTB at bottom; A and B = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm)
With MTB at top; A = 15.00 inches (381.0 mm), B = 3.00 inches (76.2 mm)
Standard structure arrangement in rear

Without MTB; C = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm),
D = 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm), E = 3.00 inches (76.2 mm)
With MTB at bottom; C = 0, D = 66.00 inches (1676.4 mm),
E = 9.00 inches (228.6 mm)
With MTB at top; C = 12.00 inches (304.8 mm),
D = 60.00 inches (1524.0 mm), E = 3.00 inches (76.2 mm)
Squirrel-Cage
Motor
Horsepower
230V, Three-Phase 460V, Three-Phase 575V, Three-Phase
Control Center
Starter NEMA
Size
Full Load
Current
Amperes
Wire Size
at 75C Max.
at 40C Amb.
Control Center
Starter NEMA
Size
Full Load
Current
Amperes
Wire Size
at 75C Max.
at 40C Amb.
Control Center
Starter NEMA
Size
Full Load
Current
Amperes
Wire Size
at 75C Max.
at 40C Amb.
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/2
1
1
1
1
2.2
3.2
4.2
6.0
14
14
14
14
1
1
1
1
1.1
1.6
2.1
3.0
14
14
14
14
1
1
1
1
0.9
1.3
1.7
2.4
14
14
14
14
2
3
5
7-1/2
1
1
1
1
6.8
9.6
15.2
22
14
14
12
10
1
1
1
1
3.4
4.8
7.6
11
14
14
14
14
1
1
1
1
2.7
3.9
6.1
9
14
14
14
14
10
15
20
25
2
2
3
3
28
42
54
68
10
8
6
4
1
2
2
2
14
21
27
34
14
10
10
8
1
2
2
2
11
17
22
27
14
12
10
10
30
40
50
60
3
4
4
5
80
104
130
154
3
1
1/0
3/0
3
3
3
4
40
52
65
77
8
6
4
3
3
3
3
4
32
41
52
62
8
8
6
4
75
100
125
150
5
5
6
6
192
248
312
360
4/0
300 kcmil
500 kcmil
24/0
4
4
5
5
96
124
156
180
2
1/0
3/0
4/0
4
4
5
5
77
99
125
144
3
2
1/0
2/0
200
250
300
6
480
2300 kcmil
5
6
6
240
302
361
300 kcmil
500 kcmil
24/0
5
6
6
192
242
289
4/0
300 kcmil
400 kcmil
Horizontal Bus Location
Vertical Bus Location
Location of
Ground Bus
10.50
(266.7)
12.12
(307.8)
3.12 (79.2)
4.62 (117.3)
4.62 (117.3)
Removable
Bus Barrier
Flat Rear Cover
Supplied on Front
Mounted Only
Structure
Minimum Rated Vertical
Bus Supplied as Standard
in Front Mounted Only
Structure
A 2.25
(57.2)
Front Horizontal
Wireway 7.16
(181.9) Deep
B
Floor Line
1.00
(25.4)
3-inch (76.2 mm) Channel Sills
Supplied Only When Specified
9.73 (247.14)
or 14.11 (358.4)
20.11 (510.8)
or 15.73 (399.5)
10.50
(266.7)
Location of Neutral Bus
When Specified
3.00
(76.2)
5.00 (127.0)

y Rear Horizontal Wireway
4.97 (126.2) Deep
Location of
Ground Bus
Front Horizontal
Wireway
7.16 (181.9) Deep
A
er Removable Bus Barrie
C
9.2) 3.12 (79
17.3) 4.62 (11
4.62 (117.3) 4.62 (11
10.50
(266.7)
2.25
(57.2)
12 12 12.12
(307.8)
15.00
(381.0)
B
3-inch (76.2 mm) Channel Sills
Supplied Only When Specified
Location of Neutral Bus Location of Neutral B
When Specified When Specified
Floor Line
C CC
D
E
1.00 (25.4)
5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (1
110.50
(266.7) 266 7
0 3.00
(76.2) (76 2
20.11 (510.8)
or 15.73 (399.5) or 15.73 (399.5
9.73 (247.14)
or 14.11 (358.4)

29.1-53
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom FlashGard
055
Figure 29.1-12. 20.00 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 16.00 Inches (406.4 mm)
Deep-Front Mounted Only (FMO)
Figure 29.1-13. 20.00 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 21.00 Inches (533.4 mm)
Deep-Front Mounted Only (FMO)
R bl Removable R bl
Top Cover
3.50 3 0
(88.9) (
3.50 3 50
(88.9) (
Top Conduit
Space
5.41
(137.4)
16.00
(406.4)
1.25
(31.8) (31.8)
Vertical Wireway
Door
17 50 17.50
(444.5)
20.00
(508.0)
Wire Tie
Brackets
7.31
(185.7)
VVertical
WWireway 4.81
(1122.2) Removable Bottom
Frame Members
Bottom Conduit Space
13 97 13.97
(354.8)
.70
(17.8)
16.00
(406.4)
.53 Dia.
2.00
(50.8) .53 Dia.
5.41
(137.4)
6.81
(173.0)
17.50
(444.5)
2.20
(55.9)
1.25
(31.8)
1 25 1.25
((31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
1.58
(40.1)
Removable
Top Cover
3.50
(88.9)
3.50
(88.9)
Top Conduit
Space
5.41
(137.4)
20.38
(517.7)
1.25
(31.8)
Vertical Wireway
Door
17.50
(444.5)
20.00
(508.0)
2.20
(55.9)
1 25 1.25
(31.8) (31.8)
16.00
(406.4) (406.4) (406.4) .53 Dia.
5.41
(137.4)
5.78
(146.8)
17 50 17.50 17 50
(444.50) 444.50 444.50
1.25
(31.8)
1 25 1.25 1 25
(31.8) (
5.41
(137.4)
1.58
(40.1)
Removable Bottom
Frame Members
.70 0 .70
) (17.8
.53 Dia. .
2.00 2 00
((50.8) (
WWire W Tie
Brackets Brackets Brackets
3 7.31 7 31
(185.7) (
VVertical V
Wireway Wireway Wireway
4.81
(122.2)
8.35 188
66.1) (466
Minimum length of anchor bolt

2.00 inches (50.8 mm) 0.36 inches
(9.1 mm)16 recommended.
Recommended maximum conduit height

above oor line 3.50 inches (88.9 mm).
Maximum conduit space with channel sills

17.50 x 9.73 inches (444.5 x 247.1 mm).
For multiple structure assemblies. Either one

or both of these members are removed to
provide maximum unrestricted conduit space
at bottom. Not to be removed for seismic.
This conduit space not recommended when

neutral bus required. Otherwise available.
Top rear conduit space not recommended

for conduit entry in FMO structure.
See Side View A Page 29.1-52 for
vertical dimensions.
29.1-54
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom FlashGard
056
Figure 29.1-14. 20.00 Inches (508.0 mm) Wide, 21.00 Inches (533.4 mm) Deep
Front- and Rear-Mounted
Figure 29.1-15. 10.00 Inches (254.0 mm) Wide, 16.00 or 21.00 Inches (406.4 or 533.4 mm) Deep
Transition Structure
Removable
Top Cover
3 50 3.50
(88.9)
3.50
(88.9)
Top Conduit
Space
5.41
(137.4)
21.00
(533.4)
1.25
(31.8) (31 8)
Front Vertical
Wireway Door Wireway Door
17 50 17.50
(444.5)
20.00
(508.0)
2.20
(55.9)
1.25
(31.8) (31.8)
2.20
(55.9)
3.22
(81.79)
Removable Bottom
Frame Members
18.35
(466.1)
1.32
(33.5)
16.00
(406.4)
.53 Dia.
2.00
(50.8)
.53 Dia.
5.41
(137.4)
17 50 17.50
(444.50) 444.50)
1 25 1.25
(31.8)
1 25 1.25
(31.8)
5.41
(137.4)
5.78
(146.81)
Wi Wire Ti Tie
Brackets
7.31 7.31
) (185.7)
VVertical
Wireway Wireway 4.81
(122.2) 122.2)
7 31 7.31
) (185.7)
4.81
(122.2)
Rear
Vertical
Wireway
Removable
Top Cover
Top Conduit
Space
20.38
(517.7)
oor 16.00
(406.4)
1.25
(31.8)
10 00 10.00
(254.0)
2.20
(55.9)
1.25
(31.8)
5.41
(137.4)
Removable Bottom
Frame Members
Bottom Conduit
Space
.70
(17.8)
.53 Dia.
(2)
5.41
(137.4)
1.25
(31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
5.41
(137.4)
5.78
(146.81)
5.00
(127.0)
Ground Bus
Location
2.25
(57.15)
Horizontal
Wireway
7.16 inches
(181.9 mm) deep
12.12
(307.9)
Horizontal Bus
Location
3.12
(79.25)
4.62
(117.35)
4.62
(117.35)
Removable Bus
Barrier
Flat Cover
Supplied on
Rear of Front
Mounted Only
Structure
Floor Line
When Specified
1.00
(25.4)
5.00
(127.0)
10.50
(266.7)
3.00
(76.2)
9.73 (247.14)
or 14.11 (358.4)
18.35 (466.1)
or 13.97 (354.8)
20.11 (510.8)
or 15.73 (399.5)
7.50
(190.5)
1.58
(40.1)
7.50
(190.5) (190.5
Minimum length of anchor bolt

2.00 inches (50.8 mm) 0.36 inches
(9.1 mm)16 recommended.
Recommended maximum conduit height

above oor line 3.50 inches (88.9 mm).
Maximum conduit space with channel sills

17.50 x 14.11 (444.5 x 358.4) in
21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure.
7.50 x 9.73 inches (190.5 x 247.1 mm) in
16.00-inch (406.4 mm) deep structure.
For multiple structure assemblies. Either

one or both of these members are removed
to provide maximum unrestricted conduit
space at bottom. Not to be removed
for Seismic.
This conduit space not recommended when

neutral bus required. Otherwise available.
Channel sills supplied only when specied.

For seismic loads, channel sills if required
must be embedded so top of channel sill
is still at oor level.
See Side View B Page 29.1-52 for
vertical dimensions.
29.1-55
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom FlashGard
057
Figure 29.1-16. 16.00-Inch (406.4 mm) DeepFront- and Rear-Mounted Corner Structure
Figure 29.1-17. 21.00-Inch (533.4 mm) DeepFront- and Rear-Mounted Corner Structure
0.50
(12.7)
Corner
Enclosure
Corner
Enclosure
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
19.22
(488.2)
19.22
(488.2)
16.00
(406.4)
16.00
(406.4)
16.00
(406.4)
Right-Hand Drawing
Right-Hand
Drawing
Front
1.25
(31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
5.65
(143.6)
4.62
(117.4)
11.48
(291.6)
1.25
(31.8)
5.40
(137.2)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
0.00
0.00
4.78
(121.4)
(Ref)
4.00
(101.6)
(Ref)
1.25
(31.8)
10.00
(254.0)
2.00
(50.8)
19.22
(488.2)
18.60
(472.5)
20.00
(508.0)
18.38
(466.9)
18.60
(472.5)
18.00
(457.2)
Top & Bottom
Conduit / Wire Space
Corner
Enclosure
Corner
Enclosure
21.00
(533.4)
21.00
(533.4)
21.00
(533.4)
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
20.00
(508.0)
23.60
(599.4)
23.60
(599.4)
24.38
(616.7)
24.38
(616.7)
Right-Hand
Drawing
Right-Hand
Drawing
Front
1.25
(31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
1.25
(31.8)
3.49
(88.7)
22.76
(578.1)
24.38
(616.7)
5.65
(143.5)
4.62
(117.4)
11.48
(291.6)
1.25
(31.8)
2.00
(50.8)
22.97
(538.4)
22.38
(568.5)
12.19
(309.6)
23.60
(599.4)
22.97
(583.4)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
4.00
(101.6)
(Ref)
4.78
(121.4)
(Ref)
5.40
(137.2)
Top & Bottom
Conduit / Wire Space
0.00
0.00
0.50
(12.7)
29.1-56
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom FlashGard
058
Figure 29.1-18. Freedom Series 2100 Motor Control Center Outline and Floor Plan NEMA 3R 28.85-Inch (732.8 mm) Deep Structure
Minimum length of anchor bolt 2.00 inches (50.8 mm). 38.00 (9.7 mm)16 recommended.
Recommended maximum conduit height above oor line 3.50 inches (88.9 mm).
Maximum conduit space with channel sills 15.78 x 16.6 inches (400.8 x 421.6 mm).
Master terminal block assembly furnished for type C wiring only. When location not specied MTB supplied at the bottom.
Recommended standard anchor bolting for Detail 1. When channel sills are used, see Detail 2.
This conduit space is not recommended when neutral bus is required. Otherwise available.
Top rear conduit space is not recommended for conduit entry in front mounted only structure.
Standard structure arrangement (in front) without master terminal block, A and B9.00 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at bottom,
A and B9.00 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at top: A15.00 inches (381.0 mm), B3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
Note: Rear horizontal bus barrier is not supplied with front-mounted only structure.
Minimum Rated Vertical Bus
Supplied on Front
Mounted Only Structures
Top
Conduit
Space
23.50 (596.9)
16.00
(406.4)
17.50
(444.5) (444.5)
0 3.00
(76.2) ( 6 2
3.78 (96.0) 8 (96.0
Bottom
Conduit
Space
Location of Neutral
Bus When Specified
Detail 1
4.00
(101.6)
2.25
(57.2)
Floor
Line
A A 01 02 03
4.31 (109.5)
20 (508.0)
15.69 (398.5)
Upper Horizontal
Wireway Door
2.25
(57.2) 57.2
Vertical VV
Wireway
25 75 25.75
(654.1) (654 1)
1 88 1.88
(47.8) (47 8)
2.87 (72.9)
28.85
(732.8) (732.8)
20.30
(515.6) (515.6)
0 3.50
(88.9)
Vertical VV
Wireway
Wire Tie
Brackets
(108.0) 4.25
4.81 (122.2)
(44.5) 1.75
SECTION A-A
4.62 (117.3)
0.75
(19.1)
Detail 2
24.85
(631 2) (631.2) (631 2)
2.12
(53.8)
5.00
(127.0)
B
Lower
Horizontal
Wireway
Door
n
Vertical Bus Locatio VV n
7.97 (204.2)
00. 8 18
(4.6) 4 6) 0.18 (4.6)
28 85 (732 8) 28.85 (732.8)
9.80
(248.9)
4.82
(122.4)
23 50 23.50
(599.4) (599 4)
(185.7) 7.31
94.62
(2403.3) 2403.3)
5.78 (146.8) 78 (14
24 85 (631 2) 24.85 (631.2)
9 5 5.25
(2419.4) 2419.4
A
C
L
CC
4.25
(108.0)
1.25
(31.8)
Max.
3.50
(88.9)
Channel Sills
4 x 1.56 (101.6 x 39.6)
0.75
(19.1)
24.85
(631.2)
23 35 23.35
(593.1) (593 1) (593.1)
90.00
(2286.0) 2286.0
2.38
(60.5)
2.25 2.25
(57.2) (57.2
1.755 (44.5) (44.5 11.75
(44.5)
0 4.00
(101.66)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0) 127.0)
33.00
(76.2) 3.75 3.75
(95.3) (95 3
3 75 3.75
(95.3) 95 3
24.85
(631.2)
23.35
(593.1)
0.75 (19.1)
15.78
(400.8)
1.56
(39.6)
14.04 4 04
1.88 (4 47.8)
29.1-57
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom FlashGard
059
Figure 29.1-19. NEMA 3R Walk-In Aisle StructuresDimensions in Inches (mm)
All doors open minimum of 105.
Rear vertical bus barrier not supplied with front-mounted only structure.
Standard structure arrangement (in front) without master terminal block, A and B9.00 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at bottom,
A and B9.00 inches (228.6 mm). With master terminal block at top: A15.00 inches (381.0 mm), B3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
Master terminal block assembly furnished for type C wiring only. When location is not specied MTB is supplied at the bottom.
Note: Minimum rated vertical bus supplied as standard. Rear conduit space not recommended for conduit entry in front mounted only
structure. Top rear conduit space not recommended for conduit entry in front mounted only structure.
14.17
(359.9)
7.31
(185.7)
1
2
3
2 3
Top Conduit Space
Vertical Wireway
4.81 (122.2)
71.00 (1803.4)
48.82 (1240.0)
Aisle
2.12
(53.8)
2.00
(50.8)
2.12
(53.8)
2.25
(57.2)
2.00
(50.8)
75.50 (1917.7)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
9.63
(244.6)
W
(228.6)
2.00
(50.8)
2.00
2.25
(57.2)
20.10 3.00
(76.2)
10.06
(255.5)
11.68
(296.7)
10.50
(266.7)
12.12
(307.8)
4.00
(101.6)
4.62
(117.3)
4.62
(117.3)
Ground Bus Location
2.25
(57.2) Ground Bus
15 Ref.
0.38
(9.7)
102.40
(2601.0)
B
2.00
(50.8)
0.38
(9.7)
0.38
(9.7)
W
Vertical
Bus
MTB Top
16.44 (417.6)
MTB Bottom
22.44 (570.0)
22.18
(563.4)
1.75
(44.5)
1.75
(44.5)
A
3.50
(88.9)
1.88
(47.8)
5.41
(137.4)
20.30
(515.6)
71.00
(1803.4)
Wire Tie
W
4.00
(101.6)
3.50
(88.9)
Door Opening
36.00 (914.4) W x 90.00 (2288.0) H
See
Detail A
5.00
(127.0)
11.68
(296.7)
10.50
(266.7)
When Specified
71.00
(1803.4)
1.81 (46.0) Isolation Barrier (Standard)
15.58 (395.7) Labyrinth Barrier
When Specified Insulated/Isolated
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
W-6.00
(152.4)
2.20
(55.9)
90.00
(2286.0)
4.00
(101.6)
29.1-58
September 2011
Sheet 29
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom FlashGard
060
Figure 29.1-20. NEMA 3R Walk-In Aisle StructuresDimensions in Inches (mm)
Minimum length of anchor bolt above grade 1.25 (31.75) (0.38-16 grade 5 torqued at 31 lb ft (43.4 Nm).
Recommended maximum conduit height above oor line 5.50 inches (139.7 mm).
Maximum conduit space B.
This conduit space not recommended when a neutral bus is required. The space is otherwise available.
Outdoor Structure
Width (W)
Indoor Structure
Width (A)
Maximum Conduit
Space (B)
23.50 (596.9)
27.50 (698.5)
20.00 (508.0)
24.00 (609.6)
17.50 x 15.98 (444.5 x 405.9)
21.50 x 15.98 (546.1 x 405.9)
31.50 (800.1)
35.50 (901.7)
28.00 (711.2)
32.00 (812.8)
25.50 x 15.98 (647.7 x 405.9)
29.50 x 15.98 (749.3 x 405.9)
Tie DownDetail A Bottom Conduit Space
W
W-6.00
(152.4)
3.00
(76.2)
4.00
(101.6)
71.00
(1803.4)
22.18
(563.4)
15.98
(406.0)
4.79
(121.7)
5.78
(146.8)
5.41
(137.4)
2.20
(55.9)
3.00
(76.2)
1.25
(31.8)
3/8-16 Stud and
Lockwasher
2.25
(57.2)
71.00
(1803.4)
75.50
(1917.7)


September 2011

Contents

Motor Starters and ContactorsLow Voltage
30.0-1

Sheet

30

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

001

M
o
t
o
r

S
t
a
r
t
e
r
s

a
n
d
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
s
L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

Manual Motor Control

MS Manual Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.1-1

B100 MMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.1-2
Lighting Contactors

Non-Combination Lighting Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.2-1

Electrically Held Non-CombinationCN35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.2-2

Mechanically Held Non-CombinationC30CNM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.2-5

Magnetically LatchedA202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.2-9

Enclosed Combination TypeECL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.2-11
NEMA Motor StartersElectromechanical

FreedomGeneral Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.3-1

FreedomTechnical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.3-2

C441 Motor Insight Motor Protection Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.3-11

C440/

XT

Electronic Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.3-13
Reduced VoltageElectromechanical


30.4-1

Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.4-2

Part Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.4-3

Wye-Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.4-4
Reduced VoltageSolid-State


30.5-1

S801 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.5-6


30.5-10


30.5-18

DS6 Soft Start Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.5-26

DS7 Soft Start Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.5-35

PSG Series DC Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.5-44
Enclosures

General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.6-1

Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.6-3
Group ControlMulti-Pak

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.7-1
Specications:

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010

Sections 16481, Sections 26 29 13.11,
16484, 26 29 13.13,
16485, 26 29 13.15,
16902 26 29 05
Enclosed S801 Soft Start and Freedom NEMA Starter with
C440 Electronic Overload Relay
30.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

30

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

002



30.1-1

September 2011

Motor Starters and ContactorLow Voltage

Sheet

30

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43


Type MS

003

MS Manual Starters

Maximum 1 hp, 120/277 Volts
Single-Phase

General Purpose Type 1 Enclosed
MS Starter


MS manual single-phase starters are
designed to give positive, accurate,
trouble-free overload protection to
single-phase motors rated up to 1 hp.
Typical applications are fans, machine
tools, motors, HVAC, and so on.

Table 30.1-1. MS Ratings

Enclosures

Type 1: General Purpose

Type 1: Flush Mounted, General
Purpose

Type 3, 4, 5: Watertight

Type 7D: Class I, Group D Hazardous
Locations

Type 9E, F, G: Class II, Groups E, F, G
Hazardous Locations

Red pilot light available for NEMA

1,
factory-installed or eld-installed kit

Typical Specications

Manual single-phase starters shall be
Eatons Type MS or approved equal for
motors rated not greater than 1 hp. They
shall be built and tested in accordance
with the applicable NEMA standards.
The starter shall have a quick-make,
quick-break toggle mechanism. The
overload shall have a eld adjustment
allowing up to 10% variance in ratings
of the nominal heater value.

Volts hp Poles

120/240V, 277 Vac
120/240 Vdc
240 Vdc
32 Vdc
1
1
1/4
1/4
1 or 2
2
1
1 or 2

Figure 30.1-1. Type 1 Enclosures (Boxes and Covers)
Figure 30.1-2. Watertight (Cast Aluminum) Figure 30.1-3. Hazardous Location
(Cast Aluminum)
Figure 30.1-4. Flush Plates
13/64 Diameter
2 Mounting Holes
1/2 Diameter Conduit
3 Single Knockouts
1 in Each End & Back
As Shown
Indicating Light
(When Used)
KO
KO
KO
KO
1.56
0.88
(22.4)
0.55
(14.0)
4.16
(105.7)
3.06
(77.7)
2.38
(60.5)
2.11
2.55
)
1.19
(30.2)
0.73
(18.5)
1.97
(50.0)
Typical Front View
(Single Unit)
Typical Side View

3/4 Inch Pipe To TT p
5.81
(147.6)
2.91
(73.7)
5.13
(130.3)
0.75
(19.1)
3.63
(92.2)
3/4 Inch Pipe To TT p
19/64 Diameter Lockout Hole
0.81
(20.6)
0.42
(10.7)
5.88
(149.4)
6.72
(170.7)
3.94
(100.1)
3.50
(88.9)
2.63
0.44
(11.2)

Dimensions in inches. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
Mounting Purposes
(2) Holes
Indicating
Light
Handle
Guard
1 Unit
2.75
(69.9)
1.38
(35.1)
1.53
(38.9)
1.64
(41.7)
0.78
(19.8)
0.34
(8.6)
1.52
(38.6)
1.06
(26.9)
0.66
(16.8)
0.31
(7.9)
3.28
(83.3)
1.64
(41.7)
0.22
(5.6)
4.50
(114.3)
2.25
(57.2)
30.1-2



CA08104001E
September 2011

Motor Starters and ContactorLow Voltage

Sheet

30

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43


Type B100

004

Type B100

Maximum 10 hp, 600 Volts

General Purpose Type 1 Enclosed
B100 Starter

Enclosures

Type 1: General Purpose

Type 4: Stainless Steel, Watertight

Type 7: Class I, Group D Hazardous
Locations

Type 9: Class II, Groups E, F, G
Hazardous Locations

Type 12: Dust-tight Industrial Use

Table 30.1-2. B100 Ratings


All three-phase manual starters and
single-phase starters rated above 1 hp
shall be Eatons Type B100 or approved
equal. They shall be built and tested in
accordance with the applicable
NEMA standards.
The starter must feature contact
operation that is quick-make,
quick-break and cannot be teased
into a partially open condition. There
must be a provision that blocks the
closure of the contacts while the line
terminals are exposed. Operating
handle or buttons must clearly show
by their position whether unit is ON,
OFF or TRIPPED.

NEMA
Size
Maximum Horsepower
115
Vac
200-230
Vac
460-575
Vac

Two-Pole, Single-Phase AC

M-0
M-1
M-1P(1-1/2)
1
2
3
2
3
5

Three-Pole, Three-Phase AC

M-0
M-1
2
3
3
7-1/2
5
10


Eatons B100 manual starter can be
used on non-reversing applications
up to10 hp, 600 Vac. It features a
three-pole block overload relay that
uses A200 starter heaters, straight-
through wiring, and will accept
auxiliary contacts.
B100 starters are available as toggle or
pushbutton-operated open and Type 1
enclosed devices, or toggle-operated
in Type 4, 7, 9 and 12 enclosures with
padlocking provision as standard. Red
pilot lights and one auxiliary contact
are available as options.

Figure 30.1-5. Type 1 Enclosed
Figure 30.1-6. Type 7/9 Enclosed

Dimensions in inches. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
Off
.218 Dia.
4 Mtg. Holes
1/2 x 3/4 Conduit K.O.
2 In Each Side
1/2 x 3/4 Conduit K.O.
2 In Bottom and 2 In
Top En TT d
6.00
(152.4)
4.72
(118.0)
7.59
(192.8)
1.02
(25.5)
0.92
(23.4)
0.92
(23.4)
4.98
(126.5)
1.63
)
3.25
(82.6)
5
(31.8)
3.98
(101.1) 1.05
(26.8) 2.36
(59.9)
0.63
(16.0)
1.02
(25.9)
2.50
(63.5)
1
IN
11.50 NPSK
2 Holes
.406 Slot
2 Reqd
OOfff On
6.03
(153.2)
7.13
(181.1)
8.38
(212.9)
4.06
(103.1)
8.25
(209.6)
7.77
(197.4)
12.06
(306.3)
1.38
(35.1)
0.50
(12.7)
6.31
(160.3)
10.25
(260.4)
5.13
(130.3)
3.56
(90.4)
4.19
(106.4)
6.00
(152.4)
0.88
(22.4)
5.13
(130.3)
2.56
(65.0)
5.00
(127.0)
9.19
(233.4)
1.50
(38.1)
2.05
(52.1)
8.28
(210.3)
0.63
(16.0)
0.17
(4.3)
3.00
(76.2)
6.00
(152.4)
0.09
(2.3)
10.16
(258.1)
5.13
(130.3)
2.56
(65.0)
5.00
(127.0)
9.19
(233.4)
1.50
(38.1)
2.33
(59.2)
8.28
(210.3)
5.97
(151.6)
4.78
(121.4)
3.00 3 00
(76.2)
9.41
(239.0)
0.27
(6.9)


30.2-1

September 2011


Sheet

30

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Lighting Contactors

General Description

005

Non-Combination
Lighting Contactors

60 Ampere, Five-Pole Electrically Held
30 Ampere, 12-Pole Mechanically Held
30 Ampere, Four-Pole Magnetically Latched

General Description

Lighting contactors are designed to
provide a safe, convenient means for
local or remote switching of tungsten
(incandescent lament) or ballast
(uorescent and mercury arc) lamp
loads. They are also suitable for other
loads such as low pressure and high
pressure sodium lamp loads and
other non-motor (resistive) loads.
They are not recommended for
most sign ashing loads.
These lighting contactors are designed
to withstand the large initial inrush
currents of tungsten lamp loads with-
out contact welding. The full family
of lighting contactors does not require
derating.


Loads:
Ballast Lamps

Fluorescent, mercury
vapor, metal halide sodium vapor,
quartz600V maximum.

Filament Lamps

Incandescent, infrared,

heating480V maximum, line-to-line;
277V maximum line-to-neutral.

Resistance Heating

Radiant and
convection heating, furnaces and ovens.


Electrically Held Lighting Contactors

Eatons CN35 or approved equal are
rated for lighting loads of 10300A.
They are built and tested in accordance
with applicable NEMA standards.

Mechanically Held Lighting Contactors

Eatons C30CNM or approved equal are
rated for lighting loads of 30A. They
shall be capable of being supplied in
a 212 pole single unit conguration.
These contactors are designed to with-
stand the large initial inrush currents
of tungsten and ballast lamp loads as
well as non-motor (resistive) loads
without contacts welding. The contac-
tor is capable of being operated such
that it will not switch to OFF during
the control power circuit power failures.

Magnetically Latched Lighting
Contactors

A202 or approved equal
are rated for lighting loads of 30
4000A. Magnetically latched enclosed
combination lighting contactors are
Type ECL12 (breaker) or ECL13 (fusible)
or approved equal for loads up to
30200A when integral short-circuit
protection is required.
These contactors are designed
currents of tungsten and ballast lamp
loads as well as non-motor (resistive)
loads without contacts welding.
The contactors are capable of being
mechanically held via a magnetic
latch design using a permanent
magnet. The contactor is operated
by a RUN signal and a STOP signal
preventing the contactor from switch-
ing to OFF during control circuit
power failure.

Table 30.2-1. Lighting Contactor Comparison

Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Electrically
Held
Mechanically
Held
Magnetically
Latched

10
20
30
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 12
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12

CN35
CN35
CN35

30
30
60
112
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12

C30CNE

C30CNM

A202
A202

60
100
100
200
2, 3, 4, 5
2, 3, 4, 5
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12

CN35
CN35

A202
A202

200
300
300
400
2, 3, 4, 5
2, 3, 4, 5
2, 3
2, 3

CN35
CN35

A202
A202
30.2-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

30

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Lighting Contactors

Electrically HeldCN35

006

CN35-Open (ECL03-Enclosed)

20 Ampere
60 Ampere

General Description

Lighting contactors are designed to han-
dle the switching of tungsten (incandes-
cent lament) or ballast (uorescent and
mercury arc) lamp loads as well as other
non-motor (resistive) loads. Ratings of
10400A, 112 poles, open or NEMA 1,
3R, 4/4X and 12 enclosed.


Loads:
Ballast Lamps

Fluorescent,
mercury vapor, sodium vapor,
quartz600V maximum.

Filament Lamps

Incandescent,
infrared, heating480V maximum.

Resistance Heating

Radiant
and convection heating, furnaces
and ovens.

Cover Control

See Enclosed
Control Product Guide PG.3.02.T.E
start-stop and hand-off-auto only.

Enclosures

Open, NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4/4X and 12.

Auxiliary Contacts

Eatons CN35 lighting contactors
include a NO maintaining auxiliary
contact mounted on right-hand side
(on 10A, two- and three-pole devices,
auxiliary contact occupies 4th power
pole positionno increase in width).
Enclosed devices include a NO auxiliary
contact only on the right-hand contactor.
The 1060A devices will accept addi-
tional auxiliary contacts on the top
and/or sides. The 100400A sizes will
accept side-mounted auxiliaries only.


Electrically-held lighting contactors
are Eaton Type CN35 or ELC03, or
approved equal for lighting loads of
10300A. They are built and tested
in accordance with applicable
NEMA standards.
These contactors are designed to
withstand the large initial inrush
loads without contact welding. Contac-
tors are capable of accepting up to 8
auxiliary contactstop and/or side
up to 60A and side only up to 400A.
Contactors are capable of being
operated by AC or DC control.

Table 30.2-2. RatingsCN35 AC Lighting
ContactorsElectrically Held

Listed ampere ratings are based on a maxi-
mum load voltage of 480V for tungsten lamp
applications and 600V for ballast or mercury
vapor type applications.

Additional power poles mounted on side(s)
of contactor.

Figure 30.2-1. Open Type
Figure 30.2-2. Open Type, 2030A Sizes,
FourSix Poles
Figure 30.2-3. Open Type, 2030A Sizes,
FourSix Poles

See Auxiliary Contacts for type and
location of auxiliary contacts supplied.

Table 30.2-3. Approximate Dimensions and Shipping Weights

Center mounting slot at bottom on 1030A sizes only.

Maximum
Ampere Rating

Number
of Poles

10
20
30
60
100, 200, 300
400
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 12
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12
2, 3, 4

, 5

2, 3, 4, 5
2, 3
G G A
To TT p
Mtd.
Aux.
Side
Mtd.
Aux.
To TT
Mtg. Holes for
#10-32 Screws Auxiliary
Contacts
A
U
X
U
X
D
F
CC
B E
To TT p
Mtd.
pp
Aux.
To TT p
Mtd.
pp
Aux.
TT
3 Mtg. Holes
for #10-32
Screws
Auxiliary
Contacts
A G F
C
AA
U
X
E
D
B
To TT p
Mtd.
pp
Aux.
To TT p
Mtd.
pp
Aux.
TT
3 Mtg. Holes
for #10-32
Screws
Auxiliary
Contacts
A G F
C
AA
U
X
E
D
B

Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting F G
D

E

Open Type

10
2030
2030
2030
2030
24
23
46
9
12
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
4.20 (106.7)
10.50 (266.7)
10.50 (266.7)
3.88 (98.5)
3.88 (98.5)
4.35 (110.5)
5.75 (146.0)
5.75 (146.0)
3.49 (88.6)
3.49 (88.6)
3.52 (89.4)
4.52 (114.8)
4.52 (114.8)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
3.50 (88.9)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
3.86 (98.0)
5.00 (127.0)
5.00 (127.0)
4.90 (124.5)
4.90 (124.5)
4.90 (124.5)
0.54 (13.7)
0.54 (13.7)
0.54 (13.7)
1.4 (0.63)
1.45 (0.65)
2.9 (1.3)
4.35 (1.96)
5.8 (2.6)
60
60
60
100
200
300
23
4
5
23
23
23
2.56 (65.1)
3.46 (87.8)
4.36 (110.7)
3.54 (89.9)
7.05 (179.1)
7.05 (179.1)
5.05 (128.3)
5.05 (128.3)
5.05 (128.3)
7.17 (182.1)
9.11 (231.4)
13.12 (333.2)
4.44 (112.8)
4.44 (112.8)
4.44 (112.8)
5.94 (150.9)
7.25 (184.2)
7.78 (184.2)
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
3.00 (76.2)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
6.63 (168.4)
8.50 (215.9)
12.50 (317.5)
5.80 (147.3)
5.80 (147.3)
5.80 (147.3)
0.54 (13.7)
0.54 (13.7)
0.54 (13.7)
0.54 (13.7)
3.4 (1.53)
3.5 (1.57)
3.55 (1.59)
9 (4.1)
20 (9.0)
23 (10.35)


30.2-3

September 2011


Sheet

30

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Lighting Contactors
Electrically HeldCN35
007
Enclosed Box Selection
Table 30.2-4. Type 1 Non-combination Lighting
ContactorsElectrically HeldCN35
Table 30.2-5. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Non-combination
Lighting ContactorsElectrically HeldCN35
Table 30.2-6. Type 1 Combination
Lighting Contactors
Table 30.2-7. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Combination
Lighting Contactors
Ampere Size
(Poles)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Contactorswithout Control Power Transformers
10 A (2P, 3P, 4P) 1 5 (2.3)
10A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P)
w/top adders
2 7.3 (3.3)
10A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 3 9.5 (4.3)
20A (2P, 3P) 1 5.2 (2.4)
20A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P)
w/top adders &
6P w/o top adder
2 7.3 (3.3)
20A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 3 9 (4.1)
20A (9P, 12P) w/top adders 3 9.3 (4.2)
30A (2P, 3P) 1 5.3 (2.4)
30A (2P, 3P, 4P) w/top adders 2 7.3 (3.3)
30A (5P, 6P) 3 9.0 (4.1)
30A (5P, 6P) w/top adders 3 9.2 (4.2)
30A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 3 9.5 (4.3)
30A (9P, 12P) w/top adders 3 9.7 (4.4)
60A (2P, 3P) 1 7 (3.2)
60A (2P, 3P) w/top adders 3 9.8 (4.4)
60A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P, 10P, 12P) 3 9.5 (4.3)
60A (4P, 5P) w/top adders 3 10 (4.5)
100A (2P, 3P) 4 35 (16)
100A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) 4 60 (27)
200A (2P, 3P) 4 70 (32)
200A (4P, 5P, 6P) 10 133 (60)
300A (2P, 3P) 10 113 (51)
300A (4P, 5P, 6P) 10 136 (62)
400A (2P, 3P) 10 125 (57)
Contactorswith Control Power Transformers
10A (2P, 3P, 4P) 2 11 (5.0)
10A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P, 9P,
10P, 12P, 20P) w/top
adders
3 13.1 (5.9)
20A (2P, 3P, 4P, 6P) 2 11 (5.0)
20A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) w/
top adders
3 13.1 (5.9)
20A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 3 13.5 (6.1)
20A (9P, 12P) w/top adders 3 13.5 (6.1)
30A (2P, 3P, 4P) 2 12 (5.4)
30A (2P, 3P, 4P) w/top adders 3 13.1 (5.9)
30A (5P, 6P) 2 12.5 (5.7)
30A (5P, 6P) w/top adders 3 13.5 (6.1)
30A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 3 13.9 (6.3)
30A (9P, 12P) w/top adders 3 14.1 (6.4)
60A (2P, 3P) 2 12.8 (5.8)
60A (2P, 3P) w/top adders 3 14 (6.4)
60A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P, 10P, 12P) 3 14 (6.4)
60A (4P, 5P) w/top adders 3 14.2 (6.4)
100A (2P, 3P) 4 39 (18)
100A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) 4 67 (30)
200A (2P, 3P) 10 117 (53)
200A (4P, 5P, 6P) 10 140 (64)
300A (2P, 3P) 10 120 (54)
300A (4P, 5P, 6P) 10 143 (65)
400A (2P, 3P) 10 132 (60)
Ampere Size
(Poles)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
10A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) 5 12 (5.4)
10A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 20 (9.1)
20A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 12 (5.4)
20A (6P) 5 14 (6.4)
20A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 20 (9.1)
30A (2P, 3P, 4P) 5 13 (5.9)
30A (5P, 6P) 6 14 (6.4)
30A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 20 (9.1)
60A (2P, 3P, 4P) 5 13 (5.9)
60A (5P, 6P) 6 16 (7.3)
60A (9P, 10P, 12P) 7 22 (10)
100A (2P, 3P) 8 49 (22)
100A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) 8 57 (26)
200A (2P, 3P) 8 110 (50)
300A (2P, 3P) 10 113 (51)
400A (2P, 3P) 10 125 57)
10A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P, 6P) 5 16 (7.3)
10A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 20 (9)
20A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 16 (7.3)
20A (6P, 9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 24 (11)
30A (2P, 3P, 4P) 6 18 (8.2)
30A (5P, 6P) 6 18 (8.2)
30A (9P, 10P, 12P, 20P) 7 24 (11)
60A (2P, 3P) 6 21 (10)
60A (4P, 5P, 6P) 6 23 (10)
60A (9P, 10P, 12P) 7 22 (10)
100A (2P, 3P) 8 56 (25)
100A (4P, 5P, 6P, 9P) 8 64 (29)
200A (2P, 3P) 8 117 (53)
300A (2P, 3P) 10 120 (54)
400A (2P, 3P) 10 132 (60)
Ampere Size Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Electrically Held3P Onlywith or without
30A A 35 (16)
60A A 36 (16)
100A C 65 (30)
200A with disconnect switch D 110 (50)
200A with thermal-magnetic
breaker
E 150 (68)
300A E 160 (73)
400A E 170 (77)
Ampere Size
(Device)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Electrically Held3P Onlywith or without
30A A 35 (16)
60A A 36 (16)
100A C 65 (30)
200A with thermal-magnetic
breaker
E 150 (68)
300A E 160 (73)
400A E 170 (77)
For enclosure box dimensions,
30.2-4
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Lighting Contactors
Electrically HeldTechnical DataCN35
008
Table 30.2-8. AC Magnet Coil Data
Table 30.2-9. dc Magnet Coil Data
UL Insulation RatingClass 130 (B),
105C temperature rise
Operational Limits85110%
of rated voltage for AC coils and
80%110% of rated voltage for
DC coils
Coil Data Notes
P.U. = Pickup time is the average time
taken from closing of the coil
circuit to main contact touch.
D.O. = Dropout time is the average
time taken from opening of
the coil circuit to main contact
separation.
Cold = Coil data with a cold coil.
Hot = Coil data with a hot coil.
All data is based on a standard
contactor with no auxiliary devices
and a 120 Vac or 24 Vdc magnet coil.
Coil data has a 5% range depending
on the application, therefore specic
data may vary.
Description Contactor Catalog Number/Size
CN35AN
10A
CN35BN
20A
CN35DN
30A
CN35GN
60A
CN35KN
100A
CN35NN
200A
CN35SN
300A
CN35TN
400A
Frame size 45 mm 45 mm 45 mm 65 mm 90 mm 180 mm 180 mm 180 mm
AC Magnet Coil Data
Pickup voltscold
Pickup voltshot
Pickup voltamperes
Pickup watts
Sealed voltamperes
Sealed watts
74%
78%
100
65
10
3.1
74%
78%
100
65
10
3.1
74%
78%
100
65
10
3.1
74%
78%
230
95
28
7.8
72%
76%
390
112
49.8
13
75%
77%
1158
240
100
27.2
75%
77%
1158
240
100
27.2
75%
77%
1158
240
100
27.2
Dropout voltscold
Dropout voltshot
Pickup time (ms)
Dropout time (ms)
45%
46%
12
12
45%
46%
12
12
45%
46%
12
12
49%
50%
20
14
50%
52%
14
11
63%
64%
23
15
63%
64%
23
15
63%
64%
23
15
Coil operating range 15% to +10%
Magnet coil data
UL listed rating
Class 130 (B)105C Temperature Rate
Maximum operating
altitude
6000
Mechanical life 20,000,000 10,000,000 6,000,000 5,000,000 5,000,000 5,000,000
Wire Range
Power terminals 1216
stranded,
1214 solid
Cu
1216
stranded,
1214 solid
Cu
816
stranded
10 14 solid
Cu
314 (upper) &/or
614 (lower)
Stranded or solid
Cu
1/014 Cu 350 kcmil6 Cu 350 kcmil8 Cu 600 kcmil2/0 Cu
Control Terminals 1216 Stranded
1214 Solid Cu
Contact Kit Part No.
Two-pole
Three-Pole
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
6-65-7
6-65-8
6-43-5
6-43-6
6-44
6-44-2
6-45
6-45-2
6-45
6-45-2
Auxiliary contact
rating
A600, P300
See Page 30.2-5
CN35AN
10A
CN35BN
20A
CN35DN
30A
CN35GN
60A
CN35KN
100A
CN35NN
200A
CN35SN
300A
CN35TN
400A
Frame size 45 mm 45 mm 45 mm 65 mm 90 mm 180 mm 180 mm 180 mm
Volts 24V
DC Magnet Coil Data
Pickup voltshot
Pickup voltamperes
Pickup watts
Sealed voltamperes
Sealed watts
80%
3.2
76.8
0.14
3.36
80%
3.2
76.8
0.14
3.36
80%
3.2
76.8
0.14
3.36
60%
6.2
88.4
0.21
4.96
61%
12.0
288.0
0.20
4.75
61%
12.0
288.0
0.20
4.75
61%
12.0
288.0
0.20
4.75
67%
18
400.0
0.22
5.3
Dropout voltshot
Pickup time (ms)
Dropout time (ms)
60%
22
17
60%
22
17
60%
22
17
29%
20
13
22%
38
14
22%
38
14
22%
38
14
25%
53
14
Maximum operating
altitude
3600 2400
30.2-5
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Lighting Contactors
Mechanically Held, 30A, 212 PoleC30CNM
009
Type C30CNMOpen
(ECCEnclosed)
C30CNM
General Description
Eatons C30CNM 30A mechanically
held lighting contactors are designed
for industrial, commercial and outdoor
lighting applications where efcient
control is required. The mechanically
held operation ensures that the con-
tactor will not switch to OFF during
control power failure. It also ensures
the removal of coil from the circuit for
noise-free operation and the elimination
of all coil losses after the contactor is
latched. The control module micropro-
cessor validates the control signal
before operation, so it will not respond
to momentary voltage spikes of noise.
The operation command has a built-in
0.4 second delay to avoid multiple
short-term commands that can cause
contact fatigue or failure. Also, the
feedback loop prevents the contactor
from getting out of sequence with
switches, even after power failures.
Mechanically held lighting contactors
are Eaton Type C30CNM or approved
equal and are rated for lighting loads
of 30A. They are capable of being
supplied in a 212 pole single unit
conguration.
These contactors are designed to with-
stand the large initial inrush currents of
tungsten and ballast lamp loads as well
as non-motor (resistive) loads without
contact welding. The contactor is capable
of being operated such that it will not
switch to OFF during control circuit
power failures.
Operation
Three-wire control is the choice for use
with momentary devices allowing
operation from multiple locations. A
momentary pulse of energy operates
the contactor while a second pulse on
an alternate leg returns the contactor
to its original state.
Two-wire control is the choice for single
output automatic operation or for
operation from single-pole devices.
When voltage is applied to the input
terminals the contactor is latched into
position (coil is removed from the circuit
while control voltage is continuously
supplied). When control voltage is re-
moved, the latch is disengaged and the
contactor is returned to its original state.
Main Power Poles
Table 30.2-10. Maximum AC Voltage and
Ampere Ratings
Table 30.2-11. Maximum Horsepower Rating
Table 30.2-12. Control Module
Table 30.2-13. Other Control Module
Characteristics
Auxiliary Contacts Rating:
600A, 24 Vdc, 24 VA
Ambient Temperature:
13 to 104F (25 to 40C)
Mounting Position:
Vertical three-point mounting only
Coil:
Inrush 248 VA
Sealed 28 VA
Wire Size
Table 30.2-14. Wire Specications
8 AWG stranded only.

Table 30.2-15. Type 1 Non-combination
Lighting ContactorsC30CN
Consult factory for combination enclosures.

Table 30.2-16. Type 3R, 4X and 12 Non-
combination Lighting ContactorsC30CN
Consult factory for combination enclosures.

Load
Type
Amps
Continuous
Poles
Single-
Phase
Three-
Phase
Ballast 30 347 Vac 600 Vac
General use 30 600 Vac 600 Vac
Tungsten 20 277 Vac 480 Vac
AC resistive 30 600 Vac 600 Vac
Normal Starting Duty
Volts Horsepower
Single-Pole, Single-Phase
110120
220240
1
2
Three-Pole, Three-Phase
200208
220240
440480
550600
3
5
10
15
Input
Voltage
Steady-State
Current at Rated
Voltage (mA)
Maximum
VA
1224 Vdc 42 2
24 Vac 80 5
115120 Vac 83 12
200277 Vac 91 30
Minimum pulse duration
(Three-wire control module)
250 ms
Maximum allowable
Leakage current
1.8 mA
EMI 35 V/m
Surge transient peak 6 kV
Frequency range 4070 Hz
Component Number
of
Cables
Wire Range
(Solid or
Stranded)
Wire
Temp.
Power
Poles
1 148 AWG 75C Cu
2 148 AWG
75C Cu
Coil 1 or 2 1814 AWG 60/75C
Cu
Control
Module
1 2212 AWG 60/75C
Cu
Auxiliary
Contacts
1 or 2 2212 AWG 60/75C
Cu
Ampere Size
(Poles)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Lighting Contactors
without Control Power Transformers
30A (212) 2 9 (4.1)
Lighting Contactors
with Control Power Transformers
30A (212) 3 13.5 (5.9)
Ampere Size
(Poles)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Lighting Contactors
30A (212) 6 14 (6.4)
Lighting Contactors
30A (212) 7 20 (9.1)
30.2-6
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Lighting Contactors
Mechanically Held, 30 Ampere, 212 PoleC30CNM
010
Components
Electrically Held Base Contactor
Electrically Held Base Contactor
The C30CNE20_0 electrically held base
contactor contains a 2NO power pole
as standard and will allow the addition
of power poles to build an electrically
held contactor up to 12 poles maximum.
A mechanically held module kit can
also be added to convert the electrically
held contactor into a mechanically held
contactor in the eld.
Table 30.2-17. Electrically Held Base Contactor
When ordering, select required contactor

by Catalog Number and replace the magnet
coil alpha designation in the Catalog
Number (...) with the proper Code Sufx
from Table 30.2-18.
Table 30.2-18. Coil Base Voltage (Digit 8)
Power
Poles
Catalog
Number
2NO C30CNE200
Voltage
(Digit 8)
Code
Sufx
115120V 60 Hz/110V 50 Hz
230240V 60 Hz/220V 50 Hz
460480V 60 Hz/440V 50 Hz
575600V 60 Hz/550V 50 Hz
200208V 60 Hz
A
B
C
D
E
265277V 60 Hz/240V 50 Hz
24V 60 Hz/20V 50 Hz
28V 60Hz/24V 50 Hz
347V 60 Hz
H
T
V
X
Power Poles
Power Poles
The C30CNM contactor accepts up to a
maximum six single- or double-pole
(or combinations) power poles. These
can be used to form up to:
12NO poles maximum when six
double-poles are used in NO positions
(16) or 8NC poles maximum with
four double-poles in the NC position
(14) and 4NO poles with two double-
poles in the 2NO positions (56)
Table 30.2-19. Power Poles
Mechanically Held Module Kits
Conversion Kits
These kits are for converting electri-
cally held contactors to mechanically
held units. Kits include control mod-
ule, latch, latch cover and auxiliary
contacts plus installation instructions.
Conversion kits are suitable for coil
voltages of 277V and below.
Table 30.2-20. Mechanically Held Module Kits
Figure 30.2-4. C30CNM ComponentsExploded View
Power
Poles
Catalog
Number
Single-pole
Double-pole
C320PRP1
C320PRP2
Coil
Volts
Control
Volts
Catalog
Number
Two-Wire
24277 Vac 110120 Vac
200277 Vac
24 Vac
1224 Vdc
C320MH2WA0
C320MH2WH0
C320MH2WT0
C320MH2WT1
Three-Wire
24277 Vac 110120 Vac
200277 Vac
24 Vac
1224 Vdc
C320MH3WA0
C320MH3WH0
C320MH3WT0
C320MH3WT1
30.2-7
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Lighting Contactors
011
Auxiliary Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
A mechanically held contactor with
a two-wire control module uses 1NC
auxiliary contact as standard for the
control wiring circuit. The mechanically
held contactor with a three-wire control
module uses 1NO1NC auxiliary
contacts as standard for the control
wiring circuit. See Table 30.2-21 for
possible additional auxiliary contact
congurations.
Table 30.2-21. Auxiliary Contact Congurations
Table 30.2-22. Auxiliary Contact Blocks
Replacement Parts
Magnetic Coils for the Base Contactor
Magnetic Coils
Table 30.2-23. Magnetic Coils
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 30.2-5. C30CNM Wiring Diagram
Two-Wire Three-Wire
None
1NO (single-pole)
2NO (double-pole)
None
1NC (double-pole)
1NO (double-pole)
1NC (double-pole)
1NO1NC
(NO single-pole
NC double-pole)
2NO1NC
(double pole)
1NO1NC (double-pole)
Auxiliary
Block
Catalog
Number
Single-pole
Double-pole
C320AMH1
C320AMH2
Coil
Voltage
Catalog
Number
115120V 60 Hz/110V 50 Hz
230240V 60 Hz/220V 50 Hz
460480V 60 Hz/440V 50 Hz
575600V 60 Hz/550V 50 Hz
200208V 60 Hz
9-3242-1
9-3242-2
9-3242-3
9-3242-4
9-3242-5
265277V 60 Hz/240V 50 Hz
24V 60 Hz/20V 50 Hz
28V 60 Hz/24V 50 Hz
347V 60 Hz
9-3242-6
9-3242-7
9-3242-8
9-3242-9
1
2
Line
Load
3
4
5
6
C30CNE Electrically Held
View A
CONTROL
Refer to View B for Control Connections
Optional
Auxiliary
Contacts
Optional
Auxiliary
Contacts
A1 A2
Coil
Coil
Voltage
ON and OFF Pushbuttons
View B
Optional Pilot Devices for Electrically Held Contactor
OFF AUTO
SS
* If Used
OFF
ON
AUTO
A1
L2 L1
A2
*
Fuse
*
Fuse
Remote
OFF
Remote
ON
ON ON
Pushbutton OFF
Pushbutton
OFF
Coil
Auxiliary
Contact
Auxiliary
Contact
OFF/ON or OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
A1
L2 L1
A2
*
Fuse
*
Fuse
Remote
Device
ON
OFF
Coil
Auxiliary
Contact
OFF/ON/AUTO or HAND/OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
A1
L2 L1
A2
*
Fuse
*
Fuse
Remote
Device
ON
OFF
Coil
Auxiliary
Contact
30.2-8
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Lighting Contactors
012
Figure 30.2-6. C30CNM Wiring Diagram
Dimensions
Figure 30.2-7. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
2
Line Load
3
4
5
6
C30CNM Mechanically Held
Refer to View A for 2-/3-Wire Control Options
2-WIRE CONTROL
Refer to View B for Control Connections
View A
Optional
N/O
Aux.
Contacts
Optional
NC
Aux.
Contact
P1
A1
C
L
A2
P2 P3
Electronic-Module
Not Used
P4 P5
Coil
Coil
Voltage
3-WIRE CONTROL
Refer to View C for Control Connections
Optional
N/O
Aux.
Contacts
Optional
NC
Aux.
Contact
P1
A1
L
C
O
A2
P2 P3
Electronic-Module
P4 P5
Coil
Coil
Voltage
OFF/ON or OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
View B
Optional Pilot Devices for 2-Wire Control
P1
A1 A2
P2 P3
Electronic-Module
P4 P5
Fuse
Fuse
Coil
Voltage Control
Voltage
OFF ON
(AUTO)
SS
Coil
HAND/OFF/AUTO or ON/OFF/AUTO Selector Switch
P1
A1 A2
P2 P3
Electronic-Module
P4 P5
Fuse
Fuse
Coil
Voltage
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* If Used
* If Used
Control
Voltage
Remote
Device
OFF
ON
AUTO
Coil
ON & OFF Pushbuttons
View C
Optional Pilot Devices for 3-Wire Control
P1
A1 A2
P2 P3
Electronic-Module
P4 P5
Fuse
Fuse
Coil
Voltage Control
Voltage
Coil
NO
Auxiliary
NC
Auxiliary
OFF
ON
Remote
OFF
Remote
ON
OFF/ON Selector Switch with Spring Return to Center
P1
A1 A2
P2 P3
Electronic-Module
P4 P5
Fuse
Fuse
Coil
Voltage
Control
Voltage
Coil
NO
Auxiliary
NC
Auxiliary
ON
OFF
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
O
N
O
N
O
N
O
N
O
N
O
N
P1
A1 A2
P2 P3 P4 P5
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
.35
(9.0)
NOTE:
1 Mounting dimensions remain the same
for 1 to 12 poles.
2 Line and Load terminals are interchangeable.
3 Up to 2NO and 2NC auxiliary contacts can be
added onto the base product.
4 Same power pole can be configured as
NO type or NC type in pole positions 1 4;
NO type only in positions 5 6.
SIDE VIEW TOP VIEW END VIEW
Power
Pole
Optional
Power
Pole
Optional NC
Aux Contacts
Optional NO
Aux Contacts
Mounting Holes
Accept
#10 Screws
2 NO
Aux
Contacts
1 NO
Aux
Contact
2 NC
Aux
Contacts
1 NC
Aux
Contact
3.86 (98.0)
.35 (9.0)
4.18 (106.2)
3.75 (95.3)
6.50
(165.1)
3.86
(98.0)
.59 (14.9)
7.39
(187.6)
.22 (5.5)
30.2-9
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Lighting Contactors
Magnetically Latched (Mechanically Held)A202
013
A202Open (ECL04Enclosed)
60 Ampere Size
General Description
AC lighting contactors provide a safe
convenient means for local or remote
switching of relatively large tungsten,
uorescent or mercury arc lamp loads.
They are also suitable for low pressure
and high pressure sodium lamp loads.
These lighting contactors are designed
currents of tungsten lamp loads with-
out contact welding. They are full
rated and do not require derating as
do standard motor control contactors.
Operation (Magnetic Latch)
A permanent magnet is built into the
contactor structure that will maintain
the contactor in its energized state
indenitely without using control
power. When energized, a DC current
is applied to the latch coil producing
a magnetic eld that reinforces the
polarity of the permanent magnet,
pulling in the contactor. The current
to the coil is disconnected by the coil
clearing interlock. In order to drop out
the contactor, it is necessary to apply
a eld through the STOP coil in the
reverse direction to the permanent
magnet. This momentarily cancels the
magnetic attraction and the contactor
drops out.
Enclosures
Open and NEMA Types 1, 3R, 4X and 12.
Specications
Terminals:
All except
30A devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . Al/Cu
30A devices . . . . . . . . . . . . Cu only
Ballast load 600 Vac, breaking
all lines
Tungsten lamp loads, maximum volts:
Line-to-line. . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Vac
Line-to-neutral . . . . . . . . . 277 Vac
Magnetically-held lighting contactors
are Eatons Type A202 or approved
equal for lighting loads of 30400A.
Magnetically-held combination lighting
contactors are Type ECL15 (breaker) or
ECL13 (fusible) or approved equal for
loads of 30200A when integral short
circuit protection is required.
These contactors are designed
loads without contacts welding.
The contactors are capable of being
magnetically held via a magnetic
latch design using a permanent
magnet. The contactor shall be
operated by a RUN signal and a STOP
signal preventing the contactor from
switching to OFF during control
circuit power failures.
Table 30.2-24. RatingsLatched AC
Lighting Contactors
Table 30.2-25. Non-Combination Lighting Contactors6 to 12 Pole
Figure 30.2-8. Open Type
Figure 30.2-9. Connection Diagram
Holding Circuit Auxiliary Contact or
Pushbutton Station not Included
Continuous Amperes
(Enclosed)
Number
of Poles
30
60
100
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
200
300
400
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
2, 3
2, 3
Continuous
Amperes
(Enclosed)
Number
of Poles
Pole
Conguration
Open Type
Wide A High B
30 6
8
10
12
3 x 3
4 x 4
5 x 5
4 x 4 x 4
7.13 (181.1)
7.13 (181.1)
10.63 (270.0)
12.38 (314.5)
4.46 (113.3)
4.46 (113.3)
4.46 (113.3)
6.88 (174.8)
60 6
8
10
12
3 x 3
4 x 4
5 x 5
5 x 5 x 2
7.13 (181.1)
10.63 (270.0)
10.63 (270.0)
15.00 (381.0)
4.46 (113.3)
4.46 (113.3)
4.46 (113.3)
6.88 (174.8)
100 6
8
10
12
3 x 3
5 x 3
5 x 5
5 x 5 x 2
9.75 (247.7)
12.38 (314.5)
15.00 (381.0)
34.13 (866.9)
6.88 (174.8)
6.88 (174.8)
6.88 (174.8)
27.50 (698.5)
200 6
8
10
12
3 x 3
5 x 3
5 x 5
5 x 5 x 2
9.75 (247.7)
12.38 (314.5)
15.00 (381.0)
34.13 (866.9)
6.88 (174.8)
6.88 (174.8)
6.88 (174.8)
27.50 (698.5)
C
B
A
Connections for
Control Stations
Elementary Diagram
Separate Control
Connections for Contactor
Front View Diagram
Off
2 3
1
1
Momentary
Pushbutton
Top
Auxiliary
Contact C
(Not Supplied)
L2
Control
Module
Line
When Supplied
Red
Maintained
Pushbutton
Fig. A
On
Off
2 3
Line
M
Load
Off
Momentary
Pushbutton
1
1
1
3
2
Off On
Maintained
Pushbutton
N.O.
N.C.
Top
Red
White M
M
C
L2
Red
Red
Black
Auxiliary
Contact
(When Used)
Connect separate control
lines to the No. 1 terminal
on the remote control
station and to the L2
terminal on the contactor.
Auxiliary
Contact
(When Used)
Poles to Load
Black
3 3
N.C. N.O.
2
2
White
On
Fig. B
Fig. 1
88888
M
On Off
M
~ ~
+
Red
M
M
M
M
~ ~
+
On
Control Voltage Lines
On
Off
30.2-10
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Lighting Contactors
Magnetically Latched (Mechanically Held)A202
014
Table 30.2-26. Type 1 Non-combination
Lighting ContactorsMagnetically
LatchedA202
Table 30.2-27. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12
Non-combination Lighting Contactors
Magnetically LatchedA202
Table 30.2-28. Type 1 Combination Lighting
Contactors
Table 30.2-29. NEMA 3R, 4/4X, 12 Combination
Lighting Contactors
Ampere Size
(Poles)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
30A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 8.5 (3.9)
30A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 3 13 (5.9)
30A (20P) 4 35 (16)
60A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 8.7 (3.9)
60A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 3 13.5 (6.1)
60A (20P) 4 40 (18)
100A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 4 40 (18)
100A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 85 (39)
100A (20P) 9 100 (45)
200A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 4 46 (21)
200A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 95 (43)
200A (20P) 9 110 (50)
300A (2P, 3P) 10 115 (52)
400A (2P, 3P) 10 125 (57)
30A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 12.5 (5.7)
30A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 3 17 (7.7)
30A (20P) 4 39 (18)
60A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 12.7 (5.8)
60A (6P, 8P, 10P) 3 17.5 (7.9)
60A (12P) 9 87 (39)
60A (20P) 4 44 (20)
100A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 4 47 (21)
100A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 92 (42)
100A (20P) 9 107 (49)
200A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 4 53 (24)
200A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 102 (46)
200A (20P) 9 117 (53)
300A (2P, 3P) 10 122 (55)
400A (2P, 3P) 10 132 (60)
Ampere Size
(Poles)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
30A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 13 (5.9)
30A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7 21 (10)
30A (20P) 8 46 (21)
60A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 14 (6.4)
60A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7 22 (10)
60A (20P) 8 48 (22)
100A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 8 50 (23)
100A (6P, 8P, 10P,12P) 9 58 (26)
100A (20P) 10 100 (45)
200A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 8 52 (24)
200A (20P) 10 105 (48)
300A (2P, 3P) 10 113 (51)
400A (2P, 3P) 10 125 (57)
30A (2P, 3P) 6 15 (6.8)
30A (4P, 5P, 6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7 28 (13)
30A (20P) 8 54 (25)
60A (2P, 3P) 6 16 (7.3)
60A (4P, 5P, 6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 7 29 (13)
60A (20P) 8 55 (25)
100A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 8 57 (26)
100A (6P, 8P, 10P, 12P) 9 65 (30)
100A (20P) 10 112 (51)
200A (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 8 59 (27)
300A (2P, 3P) 10 120 (54)
400A (2P, 3P) 10 132 (60)
Ampere Size Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Magnetically LatchedNon-reversing (3P Only)
with or without Control Power Transformers
30A A 35 (16)
60A A 36 (16)
100A C 65 (30)
200A with thermal-
magnetic breaker
E 150 (68)
300A E 140 (64)
400A E 190 (86)
Ampere Size Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Magnetically LatchedNon-reversing (3P Only)
30A A 35 (16)
60A A 36 (16)
100A C 65 (30)
200A with thermal-
magnetic breaker
E 150 (68)
300A with disconnect switch 72 375 (170)
300A with thermal-
magnetic breaker
E 160 (73)
400A with disconnect switch 72 425 (193)
400A with thermal-
magnetic breaker
E 210 (95)
30.2-11
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Lighting Contactors
Electrically Held and Magnetically Latched Combination Lighting, Three-Pole OnlyType ECL
015
Combination Lighting
Contactors
Types ECL12, ECL13, ECL14
and ECL15
General Description
Catalog Number ECL12, ECL13, ECL14
and ECL15 combination lighting con-
tactors offer convenient installation of
switching and overcurrent protection
in a single enclosure. Combination
lighting contactors are ideally suited
for industrial and commercial lighting
applications or where a lighting circuit
may have to be disconnected for peri-
odic maintenance. They may also be
applied on resistance heating loads.
Magnetically latched combination
lighting contactors are Eatons Type
ECL15 (breaker) or ECL13 (fusible) or
approved equal for loads of 30200A
when integral short-circuit protection
is required.
These contactors are designed to
withstand the large initial inrush
loads without contact welding. The
contactors are capable of being
magnetically held via a magnetic
latch design using a permanent magnet.
The contactor shall be operated by
a RUN signal and a STOP signal
preventing the contactor from switching
to OFF during control circuit power
failures.
Electrically held combination lighting
contactors are Eaton Type ECL14
(breaker) or ECL12 (fusible) or
approved equal for loads of 30400A
when integral short-circuit protection
is required.
These contactors shall be designed to
withstand the large initial inrush cur-
rents of tungsten and ballast lamp loads
as well as non-motor (resistive) loads
without contact welding. Contactors
shall be capable of accepting up to eight
auxiliary contactstop and/or side up to
60A and side only up to 400A. Contac-
tors shall be capable of being operated
by AC or DC control.
Features
Disconnect deviceseither a
Series C circuit breaker or a fusible
disconnect switch
Handle mechanismange
mounted
UL listed
UL service entrance approved for
NEMA 3R outdoor enclosure
Extra room for modications such
as a 24-hour time clock
Catalog Number Selection
Table 30.2-30. Enclosed Lighting Contactor Catalog Numbering System
For normally closed poles, see PG03300001E.
C30CN available in 30A only.

EC L 12 D 1 A 3 E - X
Design
L = CN35 or A202 lighting contactor
C = C30CN lighting contactor
Class
03 = Non-combination electrically held lighting contactor
04 = Non-combination mechanically held/magnetically
latched lighting contactor
12 = Combination electrically held lighting contactor
fusible disconnect
13 = Combination magnetically latched lighting
contactorfusible disconnect
14 = Combination electrically held lighting
contactorthermal-magnetic circuit breaker
15 = Combination magnetically latched lighting
contactorthermal-magnetic circuit breaker
Ampere Size
A = 10A
B = 20A
C = 30A
D = 60A
E = 100A
F = 200A
G = 300A
H = 400A
J = 600A
Enclosure Types
1 = Type 1General purpose
2 = Type 3RRainproof
3 = Type 4Watertight (painted)
4 = Type 4XWatertight (304-grade stainless steel)
6 = Type 7/9Explosion proof
8 = Type 12Dust-tight
9 = Type 4XWatertight (316-grade stainless steel)
Coil Voltage
A = 120/60 110/50
B = 240/60 220/50
C = 480/60 440/50
D = 600/60 550/50
E = 208/60
G= 550/50
H = 277/60
J = 208240/60
K = 240/50
L = 380/50
M = 415/50
P = 12 Vdc
Q = 24 Vdc
R = 48 Vdc
S = 125 Vdc
T = 24/60
U = 24/50
V = 32/50
W= 48/60
X = 104120/60
Y = 48/50
Z = By description
Modification Codes
(See PG03300001E)
Number of Poles
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 = Poles required
A = 10 Poles
B = 12 Poles
C = 20 Poles
Combination Devices = Three-pole only
Disconnect Fuse Clip Ratings
A = None
B = 30A/250V R
C = 30A/600V R
D = 60A/250V R
E = 30A/600V R
F = 100A/250V R
G= 100A/600V R
H = 200A/250V R
J = 200A/600V R
K = 400A/250V R
L = 400A/600V R
M = 600A/250V R
N = 600A/600V R
P = 800A/600V R
T = By description
Thermal-Magnetic Breaker Ratings
A = None
D = 20A
E = 30A
F = 60A
G= 100A
H = 200A
J = 300A
K = 400A
L = 600A
M= 800A
T = By description
30.2-12
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Lighting Contactors
Electrically Held and Magnetically Latched Combination Lighting, Three-Pole OnlyType ECL
016
Table 30.2-31. RatingsLatched ELC15
Series C Circuit Breaker Disconnect
Table 30.2-32. ELC13Fusible Disconnect
Switch
Table 30.2-33. RatingsElectrically-held
ELC14 Series C Circuit Breaker Disconnect
UL ballast and resistive ratings only.

Table 30.2-34. ELC12Fusible
Disconnect Switch
UL ballast and resistive ratings only.

Continuous
Amperes
(Enclosed)
Circuit Breaker
Ampere
Rating
System
Voltage
30
60
100
200
30
60
100
200
600
600
600
600
Continuous
Amperes
(Enclosed)
Fuse Clip
Ampere
Rating
System
Voltage
30
60
100
200
30
60
100
200
250, 600
250, 600
250, 600
250, 600
Continuous
Amperes
(Enclosed)
Circuit Breaker
Ampere
Rating
System
Voltage
30
60
100
30
60
100
600
600
600
200
300
400
200
300
400
600
600
600
Continuous
Amperes
(Enclosed)
Fuse Clip
Ampere
Rating
System
Voltage
30
60
100
30
60
100
250, 600
250, 600
250, 600
200
300
400
200
300
400
250, 600
250, 600
250, 600
Table 30.2-35. Factory Modications
Description Enclosure Used On
Standard Combination
Control transformers:
480 to 120V control transformer
100 VA extra capacity transformer
200 VA extra capacity transformer
240 to 120V control transformer with fuse in holder
Any
Lightning arrester
Undervoltage relay
On-off pushbutton
Hand-off-auto selector switch
Any
Addition of photoelectric receptacle and relay with

photo cell Installed (two-wire circuit)

24-hour time clock, 120V
24-hour time clock with day omission, 120V
7-day time clock, 120V
Cover plate for use in place of watertight hub on enclosure top


30.3-1
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Motor StartersElectromechanical
Freedom LineGeneral Description
017
NEMA Motor Starters
Freedom Series
NEMA AN16DN0AB
NEMA Size 1
General Description
The Freedom Series starters and
contactors listed in this catalog
feature a compact, space-saving
design and high strength, impact
and temperature-resistant insulating
materials. Starters and contactors
are available in the NEMA (National
Electrical Manufacturers Association)
style. The NEMA devices are sized
based on traditional NEMA
classications.
Features
Freedom NEMA
Adjustable bimetallic ambient
compensated overload relays
with interchangeable heater
packsavailable in three basic
sizes, covering applications up to
900 hpreducing the number of
different contactor/overload relay
combinations that have to be
stocked. Fixed heater overloads
are optional
Electronic overload relay (C440)
available as a stand-alone unit
and assembled with a Freedom
contactor
A full line of snap-on accessories
top and side mounted auxiliary
contacts, solid-state and pneumatic
timers, etc.
Straight-through wiringline lugs
at top, load lugs at bottom
Horizontal or vertical mounting
on upright panel for application
freedom
Screw type power terminals have
captive, backed-out self-lifting
pressure plates with screws
reduced wiring time
Accessible terminals for easy wiring.
Optional ngerproof shields avail-
able to prevent electrical shock
Top located coil terminals conve-
nient and readily accessible. 45 mm
contactor magnet coils have three
terminals, permitting either top or
diagonal wiringeasy to replace
European or U.S. style starters
or contactors without changing
wiring layout
Designed to meet or exceed NEMA,
UL, CSA, VDE, BS and other interna-
tional standards and listings
American engineeringbuilt by
Eaton, using the latest in statistical
process control methods to produce
high quality, reliable products
Sized based on standard NEMA
classications
Easy coil change and inspectable/
replaceable contacts
Available in open and NEMA Type 1,
3R, 4/4X and 12 enclosures
Standard: Designed to meet or
exceed UL, NEMA and CSA
UL listed: UL File #E1491, Guide
#NLDXOpen; UL File #E176513
Enclosed Combination Motor Con-
trollers; UL File #E19224Enclosed
Non-Combination Motor Controllers;
UL File #E195239Enclosed Power
Conversion Equipment
CSA certied: CSA File #LR353,
Class #321104 Open and NEMA 1
Enclosed
Certied Type 2 Coordination
Eatons Freedom Series NEMA starters
are now UL certied to achieve IEC 947
Type 2 coordination against 100,000A
short-circuit fault currents. Any brand
of properly selected fuse can be used.
Type 2 coordination means that the
starter will be suitable for further use
following a short-circuit fault.
Short-Circuit Protection
Fuses and inverse-time circuit breakers
may be selected per Article 430, Part D
of the National Electrical Code
to
protect motor branch circuits from
fault conditions. If higher ratings or
settings are required to start the motor,
do not exceed the maximum as listed
in Exception No. 2, Article 430.52.
30.3-2
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom LineTechnical DataNEMA Contactors and Starters
018
NEMA Sizes 00-8
Table 30.3-1. AC Coil Data
General Coil Data
Coil Offeringtape wound:
NEMA Sizes 000
UL insulation rating: Class 130 (B)
Coil Offeringencapsulated:
NEMA Sizes 13
UL insulation rating: Class 130 (A)
NEMA Sizes 45
UL insulation rating: Class 155 (F)
Operational Limits:
85% to 110% of rated voltageAC
80% to 110% of rated voltageDC
Table 30.3-2. Coil Data Notes
data may vary.
NEMA
Sizes
Motor
Voltage
Maximum
hp Rating
P.U. Volts P.U. Sealed D.O. Volts Maximum Operation
Rate Operations/Hour
P.U.
Time ms
D.O.
Time ms
Cold Hot VAR VA Watts VAR VA Watts Cold Hot
00 200
230
460
575
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
2
74% 78% 64 80 49 7.1 7.5 2.4 45% 46% 12,000 12 12
0 200
230
460
575
3
3
5
5
74% 78% 78 100 65 9.2 10 3.1 45% 46% 12,000 12 12
1 200
230
460
575
7-1/2
7-1/2
10
10
74% 78% 210 230 95 27 28 7.8 49% 50% 12,000 20 14
2 200
230
460
575
10
15
25
25
74% 78% 210 230 95 27 28 7.8 49% 50% 12,000 20 14
3 200
230
460
575
25
30
50
50
72% 76% 374 390 112 48 49.8 13 50% 52% 7200 14 11
4 200
230
460
575
40
50
100
100
73% 76% 1132 1158 240 96 100 27.2 54% 56% 2400 28 14
5 200
230
460
575
75
100
200
200
75% 77% 1132 1158 240 96 100 27.2 63% 64% 2400 25 13
Description
P.U. Pickup time is the average time taken
from closing of the coil circuit to main
contact touch.
D.O. Dropout time is the average time taken
from opening of the coil circuit to main
contact separation.
Cold Coil data with a cold coil.
Hot Coil data with a hot coil.
30.3-3
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom LineTechnical DataNEMA Contactors and Starters
019
Table 30.3-3. DC Coil Data
General Coil Data
Coil Offeringtape wound:
NEMA Sizes 000
UL insulation rating: Class 130 (B)
NEMA Sizes 13
UL insulation rating: Class 130 (A)
NEMA Sizes 45
UL insulation rating: Class 155 (F)
Operational Limits:
85% to 110% of rated voltageAC
80% to 110% of rated voltageDC
Table 30.3-4. Coil Data Notes
data may vary.
NEMA
Sizes
Motor
Voltage
P.U. Sealed D.O. Volts
(Hot)
P.U.
Time ms
D.O.
Time ms
Maximum Operation
Rate Operations/Hour
Mechanical
Life Millions
Amperes Watts Volts (Hot) Amperes Watts
00 and 0 12
24
48
120
6.4
3.2
1.6
0.64
76.8
76.8
76.8
76.8
80%
80%
80%
80%
0.28
0.14
0.07
0.028
3.36
3.36
3.36
3.36
60%
60%
60%
60%
22
22
22
22
17
17
17
17
3600
3600
3600
3600
5
5
5
5
1 and 2 12
24
48
120
15.4
6.2
2.9
1.1
126
88.4
76.2
67.3
68%
60%
56%
53%
0.42
0.21
0.11
0.041
4.98
4.96
5.04
4.87
30%
29%
28%
29%
21
20
20
20
12
13
14
16
3600
3600
3600
3600
2
2
2
2
3 12
24
48
120
24
12
6.1
2.5
293
288
295
298
65%
61%
62%
61%
0.40
0.20
0.097
0.038
4.84
4.75
4.67
4.57
23%
22%
22%
22%
39
38
37
37
14
14
14
16
3600
3600
3600
3600
2
2
2
2
4 and 5 24
48
120
240
18
9.0
3.3
1.7
400
400
450
440
67%
67%
65%
64%
0.22
0.11
0.05
0.02
5.3
5.2
5.4
4.9
25%
25%
28%
26%
53
49
56
49
14
16
19
21
2400
2400
2400
2400
2
2
2
2
Description
P.U. Pickup time is the average time taken
from closing of the coil circuit to main
contact touch.
D.O. Dropout time is the average time taken
from opening of the coil circuit to main
contact separation.
Cold Coil data with a cold coil.
Hot Coil data with a hot coil.
30.3-4
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom LineTechnical DataNEMA
020
Table 30.3-5. SpecicationsSizes 003
CN15A
NEMA Size 00
CN15B
NEMA Size 0
CN15D
NEMA Size 1
CN15G
NEMA Size 2
CN15K
NEMA Size 3
Conguration
Number of poles
Auxiliary contacts, standard
Add-on auxiliary contacts
2, 3, 4
4th pole NO (1)
Top (4) or side (4)
2, 3
Side NO (1)
Top (4) or side (3)
2, 3, 4, 5
Side NO (1)
Top (4) or side (3)
2, 3, 4, 5
Side NO (1)
Top (4) or side (3)
2, 3
Side NO (1)
Left side (4) or right side (3)
Frame size 45 mm 45 mm 65 mm 65 mm 90 mm
Maximum voltage rating 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac
Continuous ampere ratings (I) 9A 18A 27A 45A 90A
Maximum horsepower (hp)
Single-phase 115V
230V
1/3
1
1
2
2
3
3
7-1/2
7-1/2
15
Three-phase 200V
230V
460V
575V
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
2
3
3
5
5
7-1/2
7-1/2
10
10
10
15
25
25
25
30
50
50
Coil operating range % of rated voltage 15% to +10% 15% to +10% 15% to +10% 15% to +10% 15% to +10%
Operating temperature
Maximum operating altitude in feet (m)
Mechanical life
20 to 65C
6000 (1828)
20,000,000
20 to 65C
6000 (1828)
20,000,000
20 to 65C
6000 (1828)
10,000,000
20 to 65C
6000 (1828)
10,000,000
20 to 65C
6000 (1828)
6,000,000
Electrical life (480V/60 Hz)
AC-3
AC-4
4,000,000
90,000
3,000,000
85,000
5,000,000
200,000
3,500,000
62,000
1,700,000
80,000
Wire range
Power terminals 1216 stranded,
1214 solid Cu
816 stranded,
1014 solid Cu
814 stranded
or solid Cu
214 (upper) and/or
614 (lower)
stranded or solid Cu
1/014 Cu
Control terminals 1216 stranded,
1214 solid Cu
1216 stranded,
1214 solid Cu
1216 stranded,
1214 solid Cu
1216 stranded,
1214 solid Cu
1216 stranded
1214 solid Cu
Power terminal torque
Line and loadlb-in
7 15 20 40 (148 AWG)
45 (64 AWG)
50 (3 AWG)
35 (1410 AWG)
40 (8 AWG)
45 (64 AWG)
50 (31/0 AWG)
Auxiliary contact rating A600, P300
30.3-5
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
021
Table 30.3-6. SpecicationsSizes 45
CN15N
NEMA Size 4
CN15S
NEMA Size 5
Conguration
Number of poles
Auxiliary contacts, standard
Add-on auxiliary contacts
2, 3
Side NO (1)
2, 3
Side NO (1)
Frame size 180 mm 180 mm
Maximum voltage rating 600 Vac 600 Vac
Continuous ampere ratings (i) 135A 270A
Maximum horsepower (hp)
Single-phase 115V
230V
Three-phase 200V
230V
460V
575V
40
50
100
100
75
100
200
200
Coil operating range % of rated voltage 15% to +10% 15% to +10%
Operating temperature
Maximum operating altitude in feet (m)
Mechanical life
20 to 65C
6000 (1828)
5,000,000
20 to 65C
6000 (1828)
5,000,000
Electrical life (480V/60 Hz)
AC-3
AC-4
800,000
70,000
500,000
34,000
Wire range
Power terminals Open3/08 Cu;
Enclosed250 kcmil6 Cu/Al
750 kcmil2 or
(2) 250 kcmil3/0 Cu/Al
Control terminals 1216 stranded, 1214 solid Cu 1216 stranded, 1214 solid Cu
Power terminal torque
Line and loadlb-in
200 550
Auxiliary contact rating A600, P300
30.3-6
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
022
Table 30.3-7. 380V, 50 Hz StartersMaximum hp Ratings
Table 30.3-8. Motor FLA Current Ranges
Size 1 Lower Current Range for motor hp range 1/4 hp to 2 hp at 460V.

Table 30.3-9. Wire (75C) SizesAWG or kcmilNEMA Sizes 002Open and Enclosed
Two compartment box lug.

Table 30.3-10. Overload Relay UL/CSA Contact Ratings Control Circuit
DC ratings cover Freedom Series coils only.

Table 30.3-11. Electronic Overload Relays up to 1500A
Description NEMA Size
1 2 3 4 5 6
Maximum hp 10 25 50 75 150 300
Description NEMA Size
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
1.15 to
1.25 S.F.
0.473.81 3.1527.00 3.1545.00 9.9090.00 9.90135.00 38.30270.00 38.30540.00
1.0 S.F. 0.514.14 3.4327.00 3.4345.00 10.8090.00 10.80135.00 41.70270.00 41.70540.00
NEMA
Size
Cu
Only
Power TerminalsLine
00
0
1
2
#12#16 stranded, #12#14 solid
#8#16 stranded, #10#14 solid
#8#14 stranded or solid
#3#14 (upper) and/or #6#14 (lower) stranded or solid
AC Volts 120V 240V 480V 600V

NC Contact B600
Make and break amperes
Break amperes
Continuous amperes
30
3
5
15
1.5
5
7.5
0.75
5
6
0.6
5
NO Contact C600
Make and break amperes
Break amperes
Continuous amperes
15
1.5
2.5
7.5
0.75
2.5
3.375
0.375
2.5
3
0.3
2.5
45 mm 55 mm
Capacity
Load terminals
Terminal capacity
Tightening torque
1210 AWG (46 mm
2
)
86 AWG (616 mm
2
)
2025 lb-in (2.32.8 Nm)
2530 lb-in (2.83.4 Nm)
61 AWG (1650 mm
2
)
2530 lb-in (2.83.4 Nm)
Input, auxiliary contact and remote reset terminals
Terminal capacity
Tightening torque
2 x (1812) AWG
5.3 lb-in (0.81.2 Nm)
2 x (1812) AWG
5.3 lb-in (0.81.2 Nm)
Voltages
i
(three-phase)
i
(control)
690 Vac
500 Vac
690 Vac
500 Vac
Rated impulse withstand voltage
Overvoltage category/pollution degree
6000 Vac
III/3
6000 Vac
III/3
Table 30.3-12. Wire (75C) Sizes
AWG or kcmilNEMA Sizes 002
Open and Enclosed
Minimum per NEC. Maximum wire size:

Sizes 000 to 8 AWG and Sizes 12 to
2 AWG.
Table 30.3-13. Wire (75C) Sizes
AWG or kcmilNEMA Sizes 38
Open and Enclosed
Table 30.3-14. C306 Control Terminals
Cu Only
Terminal Wire
Size
Catalog
Number
Power TerminalsLoadCu Only
(Stranded or Solid)
32A
75A
45A
146 AWG
142 AWG
146 AWG
C306DN38
C306GN38
C396A_
NEMA
Size
Wire
Size
C306 Power TerminalsLine and Load
3 1014 AWG Al Cu
4 Open#8#3/0 Cu
Enclosed#6 250 kcmilAl Cu
5 750 kcmil#2 or
(2) #3/0 250 kcmilAl Cu
Description
(2) #12#16 stranded
(2) #12#14 solid
30.3-7
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom LineTechnical Data
023
Electrical LifeAC-3 and AC-4
Utilization Categories
Life Load Curves
Eatons Freedom Series NEMA
contactors have been designed and
manufactured for superior life perfor-
mance in any worldwide application.
All testing has been based on require-
ments as found in NEMA and UL
standards and conducted by Eaton.
Actual application life may vary
depending on environmental condi-
tions and application duty cycle.
Utilization Categories
AC-1Non-inductive or slightly
inductive loads, such as resistance
furnaces and heating.
AC-2Starting of slip-ring motors.
AC-3Squirrel cage motors; starting,
switching off motors during running.
AC-4Squirrel cage motors; starting,
plugging, inching or jogging.
Note: AC-3 tests are conducted at rated
device currents and AC-4 tests are con-
ducted at six times rated device currents.
All tests have been run at 460V, 60 Hz.
Contactor Choice
Decide what utilization category
your application is and choose the
appropriate curve
Locate the intersection of the
life-load curve of the appropriate
contactor with the applications
operational current (Ie), as found
on the horizontal axis
Read the estimated contact life
along the vertical axis in number
of operational cycles
Figure 30.3-1. AC-3 and AC-4 Utilization Categories
NEMA AC-3 Load Life, Sizes 00 5, 480 V 60 Hz
100,000,000
10,000,000
1,000,000
100,000
9
1 10
Break Amperes
100 1000
18 27 45 90 135 270
S
i
z
e

0
0
S
i
z
e

0
S
i
z
e

1
S
i
z
e

2
S
i
z
e

3
S
i
z
e

4
S
i
z
e

5
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
NEMA AC-4 Load Life, Sizes 00 5, 480 V 60 Hz
100,000,000
S
i
z
e

0
0
S
i
z
e

0
S
i
z
e

1
S
i
z
e

2
S
i
z
e

3
S
i
z
e

4
S
i
z
e

5
10,000,000
1,000,000
100,000
10,000
108 54
1 10
Break Amperes
100 1000 10,000
153 270 540 822 1620
30.3-8
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Freedom LineProduct Selection
024
Table 30.3-15. NEMA Freedom Line Enclosed Control Catalog Numbering System
Use for Sizes 03, HMCP 600V applications only.

Table 30.3-16. Magnetic Coil Codes (System Voltage)
When control power transformer modication codes (C1C11)

are used or when starter class includes CPT (i.e., ECN07, 18) see
Table 30.3-17 for system voltage code.
Table 30.3-17. Control Power Transformer Codes (System Voltage)
E C N 22 2 1 A A F -
Design
N= Freedom NEMA
2 = A200
Modification Codes
(See PG03300001E)
Coil Voltage and/or Control Transformers
See Table 30.3-16 and Table 30.3-17
Class
01 = Non-reversing contactorthree-pole
Non-reversing contactortwo-pole
Non-reversing contactorfour-pole
Non-reversing contactorfive-pole
02 = Reversing contactorthree-pole
05 = Non-combination non-reversing starter
06 = Non-combination reversing starter
07 = Non-combination non-reversing starter with CPT
08 = Non-combination single-phase non-reversing starter
16 = Combination non-reversing starterfusible disconnect
Combination non-reversing starternon-fusible disconnect
Special enclosure combination non-reversing starter
fusible/non-fusible disconnect
17 = Combination reversing starterfusible disconnect
Combination reversing starternon-fusible disconnect
18 = Combination reversing starterfusible disconnect with CPT
Combination reversing starternon-fusible disconnect
with CPT
22 = Combination non-reversing startercircuit breaker
Special enclosure combination non-reversing starter
circuit breaker
23 = Combination reversing startercircuit breaker
24 = Combination non-reversing startercircuit breaker with CPT
A= None
B = 30A/250V R
C = 30A/600V R
D= 60A/250V R
E = 60A/600V R
F = 100A/250V R
G = 100A/600V R
H = 200A/250V R
J = 200A/600V R
K = 400A/250V R
L = 400A/600V R
M= 600A/250V R
N = 600A/600V R
P = 800A/600V L
Q = 1200A/600V L
R = 1600A/600V L
S = 2000A/600V L
T = By description
HMCP/E or Breaker Ratings
A = None
B = 3A
C = 7A
D = 15A
E = 30A
F = 50A
W= 70A
G = 100A
H = 150A
J = 250A
K = 400A
L = 600A
M = 800A
N = 1000A
P = 1200A
Q = 2000A
R = 3000A
T = By description
5 = 3A
6 = 7A
7 = 15A
8 = 30A
9 = 50A
I = 100A
Cover Control
Type 1 non-combination
All others
E22 style combination
(Contact Eaton)
Contactors
3 = Three-pole
Enclosure Type
1 = Type 1General purpose
2 = Type 3RRainproof
3 = Type 4Watertight (painted steel)
4 = Type 4XWatertight (304-Grade stainless steel)
5 = Type 4XCorrosion (nonmetallic)
6 = Type 7/9Bolted hazardous location
7 = Type 7/9Threaded hazardous location
8 = Type 12Dust-tight
9 = Type 4X316-Grade stainless steel
NEMA Size
A= Size 00
0 = Size 0
1 = Size 1
2 = Size 2
3 = Size 3
4 = Size 4
5 = Size 5
6 = Size 6
7 = Size 7
8 = Size 8
9 = Size 9
Code Magnet Coil Code Magnet Coil Code Magnet Coil
A
B
C
D
E
G
H
J
120/60 110/50
240/60 220/50
460/60 440/50
575/60 550/50
208/60
550/50
277/60
208240/60
K
L
M
P
Q
R
S
T
240/50
380/50
415/50
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
125 Vdc
24/60
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
24/50
32/50
48/60
104120/60
48/50
By description
Code Primary Secondary
B
C
D
E
H
240/480220/440 wired for 240V
240/480220/440 wired for 480V
600/60550/50
208/60
277/60
120/60110/50
120/60110/50
120/60110/50
120/60
120/60
L
M
Q
R
S
380/50
415/50
208/60
240/480220/440 wired for 240V
240/480220/440 wired for 480V
110/50
110/50
24
24
24
T
U
V
W
X
600/60
277/60
380/50
415/50
240/480/600 wired for 480V
24
24
24
24
120
Y
Z
240/480/600 wired for 480V
By description
24
30.3-9
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
025
Table 30.3-18. Type 1 Freedom Contactors
Consult factory.
Table 30.3-19. Type 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom
Contactors
Consult factory.
Note: All Type 7 and 9, see PG03300001E.
Table 30.3-20. Type 1 Freedom
Non-combination Starters
Consult factory.
NEMA Size
(Poles)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Non-reversing Contactors
00 (2P, 3P, 4P) 1 5.25 (2.4)
00 (2P, 3P, 4P)
with top adders
2 7.3 (3.3)
0 (2P, 3P, 4P) 1 5.25 (2.4)
0 (2P, 3P, 4P)
with top adders
2 7.3 (3.3)
0 (5P) 2 7.3 (3.3)
1 (2P, 3P) 1 7.9 (3.6)
1 (2P, 3P)
with top adders
3 11 (5.0)
1 (4P, 5P) 2 8.3 (3.8)
2 (2P, 3P, 4P 5P) 2 8.5 (3.9)
3 (2P, 3P) 4 35 (16)
4 (2P, 3P) 4 47 (21)
5 10 113 (51)
6 F1E 325 (148)
7 F1E

8 F1E

9 F1E

00 (2P, 3P, 4P) 2 12 (5.4)
00 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
with top adders
3 15 (6.8)
0 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 12 (5.4)
0 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P)
with top adders
3 15 (6.8)
1 (2P, 3P) 2 12.2 (5.5)
1 (2P, 3P)
with top adders
3 12.5 (5.7)
1 (4P, 5P) 2 12.6 (5.7)
2 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 2 12.8 (5.8)
3 (2P, 3P) 4 40 (18)
4 (2P, 3P) 4 52 (24)
5 10 120 (54)
6 F1E 335 (152)
7 F1E

8 F1E

9 F1E

Three-Pole Reversing Contactors
00 2 7.8 (3.5)
0 2 8 (3.6)
1 3 11 (5.0)
2 3 12 (5.4)
3 4 67 (30)
4 4 154 (70)
5 10 170 (77)
6 F1E 425 (193)
7 F1E

8 F1E

9 F2E

NEMA Size
(Poles)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
00 5 14 (6.4)
0 (2P, 3P, 4P) 5 14 (6.4)
1 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 15 (6.8)
2 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 5 15.5 (7.0)
3 (2P, 3P) 8 45 (20)
4 (2P, 3P) 8 56 (25)
5 10 140 (64)
6 F1E 385 (175)
7 F1E

8 F1E

9 F1E

00 5 18 (8.2)
0 (2P, 3P, 4P) 5 18 (8.2)
1 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 6 19 (8.6)
2 (2P, 3P, 4P, 5P) 6 19.5 (8.9)
3 (2P, 3P) 8 52 (24)
4 (2P, 3P) 8 63 (29)
5 10 147 (67)
6 F1E 405 (184)
7 F1E

8 F1E

9 F1E

Three-Pole Reversing Contactors
00 6 18 (8.2)
0 6 18 (8.2)
1 6 19 (8.6)
2 6 19 (8.6)
3 8 47 (21)
4 9 69 (31)
5 10 170 (77)
6 F1E 495 (225)
7 F1E

8 F1E

9 F2E

NEMA Size Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Non-reversing Starters
00 1 7 (3.2)
00 with top adders/SSOL 2 10 (4.5)
0 1 7.1 (3.2)
0 with top adders/SSOL 2 10 (4.5)
1 1 7.9 (3.6)
12 with top adders/SSOL 3 11.5 (5.2)
2 2 8.5 (3.9)
3 4 35 (16)
4 4 47 (21)
5 10 139 (63)
6 F1E 360 (163)
7 F1E

8 F1E

9 F1E

00 3 15 (6.8)
0 3 15 (6.8)
1 3 16 (7.3)
2 3 16.2 (7.4)
3 4 42 (19)
4 4 54 (25)
5 10 146 (66)
6 F1E 385 (175)
7 F1E

8 F1E

9 F1E

Reversing Starters
00 2 8 (3.6)
0 2 8 (3.6)
0 with top adders 3 11 (5)
1 3 13 (5.9)
1 with top adders 3 13.4 (6.1)
2 3 15 (6.8)
3 4 43 (20)
4 9 65 (30)
5 10 165 (75)
6 F1E 450 (204)
7 F1E

8 F2E

9 F2E

Reversing Starters
00 with top adders 3 15 (6.8)
0 3 15 (6.8)
1 with top adders 3 17 (7.7)
2 3 19 (8.6)
3 4 50 (23)
4 9 72 (33)
5 10 172 (78)
6 F1E 495 (225)
7 F1E

8 F2E

9 F2E

30.3-10
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
026
Non-combination Starters
Consult factory.
Table 30.3-22. Type 1 Freedom
Combination Starters
Consult factory.
Table 30.3-23. Type 1 Freedom Non-reversing
Combination StartersNarrow Enclosure
Combination Starters
Consult factory.
NEMA Size /
IEC Frame
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
0 5 14.3 (6.5)
1 5 15.3 (6.9)
2 7 16 (7.3)
3 8 46 (21)
4 8 60 (27)
5 10 150 (68)
6 F1E 415 (188)
7 F1E

8 F1E

9 F1E

0 6 18 (8.2)
1 6 19 (8.6)
2 6 20 (9)
3 8 53 (24)
4 8 67 (30)
5 10 157 (71)
6 F1E

7 F1E

8 F1E

9 F1E

Reversing Starters
0 7 18.5 (8.4)
1 7 19.5 (8.9)
2 7 21 (10)
3 8 48 (22)
4 9 72 (33)
5 10 175 (79)
6 F1E 525 (238)
7 F1E

8 F2E

9 F2E

NEMA Size
(Device)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Non-reversing
with and without Control Power Transformers
0 A 37 (17)
1 A 38 (17)
2 A 39 (18)
3 C 72 (33)
4 (HMCP) C 90 (41)
4 (Disconnect switch) D 150 (68)
5 E 180 (82)
6 F1E 435 (197)
7 F2E

8 F2E

9 F2E

Reversing
0 B 42 (19)
1 B 43 (20)
2 B 44 (20)
3 C 84 (38)
4 D 173 (79)
5 F1E

6 F1E 550 (250)
7 F2E

8 F2E

9

Non-reversingOversized
012 B 44 (20)
NEMA Size Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
NEMA 1 Enclosed
012 I 35 (16)
NEMA 12 Enclosed
012 I 36 (16)
NEMA 12 Enclosed with Safety Door Interlock
012 I 37 (17)
NEMA Size
(Device)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Non-reversing
0 A 37 (17)
1 A 38 (17)
2 A 39 (18)
3 C 72 (33)
4 (HMCP) C 90 (41)
4 (Disconnect switch) D 150 (68)
5 E 180 (82)
6 F1E 435 (197)
7 F2E

8 F2E

9 F2E

Reversing
0 B 42 (19)
1 B 43 (20)
2 B 44 (20)
3 C 84 (38)
4 D 173 (79)
5 E 550 (250)
6 F1E

7 F2E

8 F2E

9

Non-reversingOversized
012 B 44 (20)
30.3-11
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
C441 Motor Insight
027
C441 Motor Insight
C441 Motor Insight Overload
and Monitoring Relay
General Description
Eatons C441 Motor Insight
, the
rst product in the intelligent power
control solutions family, is a highly
congurable motor, load and line
protection device with power monitor-
ing, diagnostics and exible communi-
cations, allowing the customer to save
energy, optimize their maintenance
schedules and congure greater
system protection, thus reducing
overall costs and downtime.
C441 Motor Insight is available in
either a line-powered or 120 Vac
control powered design, capable of
monitoring voltages up to 660 Vac.
Each of these units is available in
a 19A or a 590A FLA model. With
external CTs, C441 Motor Insight
can protect motors up to 540A FLA.
Available add-on accessories
include communication modules
for Modbus
, DeviceNet and
PROFIBUS
, all with I/O options.

For ease-of-use and operator
safety, C441 Motor Insight offers a
remote display that mounts easily
with two 30 mm knockouts.
Features
Size/Range
Broad FLA range of 1540A
Selectable trip class (530)
Four operating voltage options
Line-powered from 240 Vac,
480 Vac, 600 Vac
Control-powered from 120 Vac
Motor Control
Two output relays
One B300 Form C fault relay and
one B300 ground fault shunt relay
Other relay congurations are
available, including one Form A
and one Form B SPST (fault
and auxiliary relays) allowing
programmable isolated relay
behavior and unique voltages
One external remote reset terminal
Motor Protection
Thermal overload
Jam/stall protection
Current level alarming
Current imbalance
Current phase loss
Ground fault
Phase reversal
Load Protection
Undercurrent
Low power (kW)
High power (kW)
Line Protection
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Voltage imbalance
Voltage phase loss
Currentaverage and phase rms
Voltageaverage and phase rms
Powermotor kW
Power factor
Frequency
Thermal capacity
Run hours
Current imbalance %
Voltage imbalance %
Motor starts
Motor run hours
Options
Type 1, 12 remote display
Communication modules
Modbus
Modbus with I/O
DeviceNet with I/O
PROFIBUS with I/O
Modbus TCP with I/O
(contact product line)
EtherNet/IP with I/O
(contact product line)
Benets
Advanced diagnostics allows for
quick and accurate identication
of the root source of a motor, pump
or power quality fault; reducing
troubleshooting time and the loss of
productivity, reducing repeat faults
due to misdiagnosis, and increas-
ing process output and protability
Provides superior protection
of motors and pumps before
catastrophic failure occurs
Increases protability with greater
process uptime and throughput,
reduced costs per repair, reduced
energy consumption and extended
equipment life
Adjustments to overload congura-
tion can be made at any time
Safety
Terminal blocks are set back
from the display to reduce
operator shock hazard
Remote display (optional) does
not require that the operator open
the panel to congure the device
Flexibility
Offered in a variety of
congurations
External snap-on modules
provide support for multiple
communications protocols
Advanced power, voltage and
current monitoring capabilities
and remote display can be
used simultaneously
Highly congurable fault and
reset characteristics for numerous
applications
Fully programmable isolated
fault and auxiliary relays
Ease of Use
Bright LED display with easy-to-
understand setting and references
Powered from line voltage or
120 Vac control power
Remote display powered from
base unit
Full word descriptions and units
on user interface
cULus listed NKCR, NKCR7, 508
UL 1053 applicable sections for
ground fault detection
CSA certied (Class 3211-02)
CE
NEMA
IEC EN 60947-4-1
RoHS
30.3-12
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
C441 Motor Insight
028
Product Selection
Table 30.3-25. C441 Motor Insight
Table 30.3-26. C441 Motor Insight CT Multiplier and Wire Wrap Schedule
Underscore indicates Operating Voltage Code required.

Operating Voltage Codes:
Any manufacturers CTs may be used.

Accessories
Table 30.3-27. Communication Modules
Type 3R Kit with Remote Display Mounted Inside
C441 Motor Insight offers several accessories for the
customers ease of use and safety:
Types 1 and 12 remote display
Mounting plate adapter
Features and Benets
Remote display unit:
Same user interface as the overload relay
Enhanced operator safetyoperator can congure
the overload without opening the enclosure door
Type 3R kit mounts with standard 30 mm holes
Mounting plate for retrot in existing installations
Table 30.3-28. Type 3R Kit with Remote Display Mounted Inside
Communication Cables
The remote display requires a communication cable
to connect to the C441 Motor Insight overload relay:
Table 30.3-29. Communication Cable Lengths
Table 30.3-30. Current Transformer Kits
For more information about technical data and
specications as well as dimensions, see Volume 5
Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Section 31.
Power
Source
Monitoring
Range
Current
Range
Catalog
Number
240 Vac (170264) 170264 Vac 19A
590A
C441BA
C441BB
480 Vac (323528) 323528 Vac 19A
590A
C441CA
C441CB
600 Vac (489660) 489660 Vac 19A
590A
C441DA
C441DB
120 Vac (93.5132) 170660 Vac 19A
590A
C4410109NOUI
C4410590NOUI
Catalog
Number
Motor
FLA
No. of
Loops
No. of
Conductors
Through
CT Primary
CT
Multiplier
Setting
External
CT Kit
Catalog
Number
Current Range: 590A

C441_B and
C4410590NOUI
522.5A
6.6730A
3
2
4
3
4
3
1045A
2090A
1
0
2
1
2
1
Current Range: 19A

C441_A and
C4410109NOUI
15A
29A
1
0
2
1
2
1
60135A
120270A
240540A
0
0
0
1
1
1
150(150:5)
300(300:5)
600(600:5)
C441CTKIT150
C441CTKIT300
C441CTKIT600
Code Voltage
B 240 Vac
C 480 Vac
D 600 Vac
<empty> 120 Vac control power
Number
Modbus
Modbus communication module None C441M
Modbus communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441N
24 Vdc C441P
DeviceNet
DeviceNet communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441K
24 Vdc C441L
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441S
24 Vdc C441Q
EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP
Ethernet-based communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441R
24 Vdc C441T
Description Catalog
Number
Remote display Types 1 and 12 (UL 508)
Type 3R kit for remote display (UL 508)
Conversion plate
C4411
C4413
C441CMP1
Length in Inches (meters) Catalog
Number
9.8 (0.25)
39.4 (1.0)
D77E-QPIP25
D77E-QPIP100
78.7 (2.0)
118.1 (3.0)
D77E-QPIP200
D77E-QPIP300
Description Catalog
Number
Three 150:5 CTs to be used with C441 Motor Insight
C441CTKIT150
C441CTKIT300
C441CTKIT600
30.3-13
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
029
C440/XT Electronic
Overload Relay
General Description
Eatons electronic overload relay (EOL)
is the most compact, high-featured,
economical product in its class.
Designed on a global platform, the
new EOL covers the entire power
control spectrum, including NEMA,
IEC and DP contactors. The NEMA
and DP versions are offered with
the C440 designation while the IEC
offering has the XT designation. The
electronic design provides reliable,
accurate and value-driven protection
and communications capabilities in a
single compact device. It is the exible
choice for any application requiring
easy-to-use, reliable protection.
Eaton has a long history of innova-
tions and product development in
motor control and protection,
including both traditional NEMA,
as well as IEC control. It was from
this experience that the C440 was
developed, delivering new solutions
to meet todays demands.
C440 is a self-powered electronic
overload relay available up to 100A
as a self-contained unit. With external
CTs, C440 can protect motor up
to 1500 FLA. Available add-on
accessories include remote reset
capability and communication
modules with I/O for DeviceNet,
PROFIBUS and Modbus.
Features
Reliable, accurate, electronic
motor protection
Easy to select, install and maintain
Compact size
Flexible, intelligent design
Global product offering
available with NEMA, IEC and
DP power control
Size/Range
Broad FLA range (0.331500A)
Selectable trip class (10A, 10, 20, 30)
Direct mounting to NEMA, IEC and
DP contactors
Most compact electronic overload in
its class
Motor Control
Two B600 alarm (NO) and fault
(NC) contacts
Test/Trip button
Motor Protection
Thermal overload
Phase loss
Selectable (ON/OFF)
phase imbalance
Selectable (ON/OFF) ground fault
User Interface
Large FLA selection dial
Operating mode LED
DIP switch selectable trip class,
phase imbalance and ground fault
Selectable Auto/Manual reset
Feature Options
Remote reset
120 Vac
24 Vac
24 Vdc
Tamper-proof cover
Modbus RTU RS-485
DeviceNet with I/O
PROFIBUS with I/O
Modbus RTU with I/O (Q4 2010)
EtherNet/IP (planned)
Smartwire (planned)
Benets
C440 provides the users with peace
of mind knowing that their assets
are protected with the highest level
of motor protection and communi-
cation capability in its class
Extends the life of plant assets
with selectable motor protection
features such as trip class, phase
imbalance and ground fault
Protects against unnecessary
downtime by discovering changes
in your system (line/load) with
remote monitoring capabilities
Status LED provides added
assurance that valuable assets
are protected by indicating the
overload operational status
Flexibility
Available with NEMA, IEC and
DP contactors
Improves return on investment by
reducing inventory carrying costs
with wide FLA adjustment (5:1) and
selectable trip class
Design incorporates built-in ground
fault protection, thus eliminating the
need for separate CTs and modules
Flexible communication with
optional I/O enables easy integration
into plant management systems for
remote monitoring and control
Available as an open component
and in enclosed control and motor
control center assemblies
Individual phase currents rms
Average three-phase current rms
Thermal memory
Fault indication (overload, phase
loss, phase imbalance, ground fault)
Safety
Available in Eatons industry-leading
FlashGard MCCs
Tested to the highest industry
standards, such as UL, CSA,
CE and IEC
RoHS compliant
UL
CSA

CE
NEMA
IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660
ISO 13849-1 (EN954-1)
RoHS
ATEX directive 94/9/EC
Equipment Group 2, Category 2
30.3-14
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
030
Product Selection
Table 30.3-31. XT Electronic Overload Relays
Table 30.3-32. XT Electronic Overload Relays for use with Large Frame XT Contactors (LR)
Use CTs and 1-5A XT overload relay. CT kit does not include overload relay (order separately).
For Use with
XT Contactor Frame
For Use with
Contactor
Overload
Range (Amps)
Contact
Sequence
Frame
Size
Auxiliary Contact
Conguration
Type Catalog
Number
For Direct Mount to XT Contactors
B XTCE007B,
XTCE009B,
XTCE012B,
XTCE015B
0.331.65 45 mm NO-NC ZEB12-1,65 XTOE1P6BCS
15 ZEB12-5 XTOE005BCS
420 ZEB12-20 XTOE020BCS
C XTCE018C,
XTCE025C,
XTCE032C
0.331.65 45 mm NO-NC ZEB32-1,65 XTOE1P6CCS
15 ZEB32-5 XTOE005CCS
D XTCE040D,
XTCE050D,
XTCE065D,
XTCE072D
945 45 mm NO-NC ZEB65-45 XTOE045DCS
20100 55 mm ZEB65-100 XTOE100DCS
F, G XTCE080F,
XTCE095F,
XTCE115G,
XTCE150G,
XTCE170G
20100 55 mm NO-NC ZEB150-100 XTOE100GCS
With Ground Fault for Direct Mount to XT Contactors
B XTCE007B,
XTCE009B,
XTCE012B,
XTCE015B
0.331.65 45 mm NO-NC ZEB12-1.65-GF XTOE1P6BGS
15 ZEB12-5-GF XTOE005BGS
420 ZEB12-20-GF XTOE020BGS
C XTCE018C,
XTCE025C,
XTCE032C
0.331.65 45 mm NO-NC ZEB32-1.65-GF XTOE1P6CGS
15 ZEB32-5-GF XTOE005CGS
D XTCE040D,
XTCE050D,
XTCE065D,
XTCE072D
945 45 mm NO-NC ZEB65-45-GF XTOE045DGS
20100 55 mm ZEB65-100-GF XTOE100DGS
F, G XTCE080F,
XTCE095F,
XTCE115G,
XTCE150G,
XTCE170G
20100 55 mm NO-NC ZEB150-100-GF XTOE100GGS
XT
Contactor
Frame
For Use with
IEC Contactor
Ampere Range
(AC-3)
CT Range
(Amps)
Description CT Kit
Catalog
Number
Terminal
Size
Overload
Relay
Catalog
Number
Overload Relay
with Ground Fault
Catalog Number
L, M 185500A 60300 300: 5 panel-mount
CT kit with integrated lugs
ZEB-XCT300 750 kcmil
(2) 250 kcmil
3/0 Cu/Al
XTOE005CCSS XTOE005CGSS
M, N 300820A 120600 600: 5 panel-mount
CT kit with integrated,
pass-through holes
ZEB-XCT600 (2) 750 kcmil
3/0 Cu/Al
N 5801000A 2001000 1000: 5 panel-mount
pass-through holes
3/0 Cu/Al
R 1600A 3001500 1500: 5 panel-mount
pass-through holes
1/0 Cu/Al
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
2 4 6 98 96
97 95
30.3-15
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
031
Table 30.3-33. XT Electronic Overload Relays for Separate Mount
Table 30.3-34. C440 Electronic Overload Relays for Direct Mount to Freedom Series Contactors
CN15 contactor listed is non-reversing with a 120 Vac coil. For more options, see Volume 5Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E,
Tab 33, Section 33.1.
Table 30.3-35. C440 Electronic Overload Relays for Use with NEMA Contactors Sizes 48
Use CTs and 1-5A C440 overload relay. CT kit does not include overload relay (order separately).
Table 30.3-36. C440 Electronic Overload Relays for Separate Mount
Overload
Range (Amps)
Frame
Size
Contact
Sequence
Type Overload Relay
Catalog Number
Overload Relay with Ground
Fault Catalog Number
Overload Relay
0.331.65 45 mm ZEB32-1.65/KK XTOE1P6CCSS XTOE1P6CGSS
15 ZEB32-5/KK XTOE005CCSS XTOE005CGSS
20100 55 mm ZEB150-100/KK XTOE100GCSS XTOE100GGSS
For Use with Freedom
NEMA Contactor Size
For Use with
Contactor
Overload
Range (Amps)
Standard Feature Set
Catalog Number
Standard Feature Set with
Ground Fault Catalog Number
00 CN15AN3_B 0.331.65 C440A1A1P6SF00 C440A2A1P6SF00
15 C440A1A005SF00 C440A2A005SF00
420 C440A1A020SF00 C440A2A020SF00
0 CN15BN3_B 0.331.65 C440A1A1P6SF0 C440A2A1P6SF0
15 C440A1A005SF0 C440A2A005SF0
420 C440A1A020SF0 C440A2A020SF0
1 CN15DN3_B 0.331.65 C440A1A1P6SF1 C440A2A1P6SF1
15 C440A1A005SF1 C440A2A005SF1
420 C440A1A020SF1 C440A2A020SF1
945 C440A1A045SF1 C440A2A045SF1
2 CN15GN3_B 15 C440A1A005SF2 C440A2A005SF2
420 C440A1A020SF2 C440A2A020SF2
945 C440A1A045SF2 C440A2A045SF2
3 CN15KN3_ 20100 C440B1A100SF3 C440B2A100SF3
For Use with NEMA
Contactor Size
CT Range
(Amps)
Description CT Kit
Catalog Number
Terminal
Size
Overload Relay
Catalog Number
Overload Relay with Ground
Fault Catalog Number
4 and 5 60300 300: 5 panel-mount
pass-through holes
ZEB-XCT300 750 kcmil
(2) 250 kcmil
3/0 Cu/Al
C440A1A005SAX C440A2A005SAX
6 120600 600: 5 panel-mount
pass-through holes
3/0 Cu/Al
7 2001000 1000: 5 panel-mount
pass-through holes
3/0 Cu/Al
8 3001500 1500: 5 panel-mount
pass-through holes
1/0 Cu/Al
Overload
Range
Frame
Size
Overload Relay
Catalog Number
Overload Relay with
Ground Fault Catalog Number
0.331.65 45 mm C440A1A1P6SAX C440A2A1P6SAX
15 C440A1A005SAX C440A2A005SAX
420 C440A1A020SAX C440A2A020SAX
945 C440A1A045SAX C440A2A045SAX
20100 55 mm C440B1A100SAX C440B2A100SAX
1 3 5 97 95
2 4 6 98 96
30.3-16
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
032
Table 30.3-37. Type AN19/59 Freedom Series StartersNon-Reversing and Reversing
Underscore (_) indicates coils sufx required, see Coil Sufx table below.
Underscore (_) indicates OLR designation required, see C440 FLA Range table below.
Starter not shipped as an assembled unit. Order NEMA Size 4 contactor (CN15NN3A) plus current transformers (ZEB-XCT300) and 15A C440
overload relay (C440A1A005SELAX or C440A2A005SELAX).
NEMA Size 5 starter available with 60300A panel-mounted CTs. Starter shipped as an assembled unit with 15A C440 overload relay
(C440A1A005SELAX or C440A2A005SELAX).
Table 30.3-38. Coil Sufx Codes Table 30.3-39. C440 FLA Range (FVNR and FVR Starters Only)
Starter not shipped as an assembled unit. Order NEMA Size 4

contactor (CN15NN3A) plus current transformers (ZEB-XCT300)
and 15A C440 overload relay (C440A1A005SELAX or
C440A2A005SELAX).
NEMA
Size
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
Service Limit
Current Rating
(Amps)
Maximum UL Horsepower Three-Pole
Non-Reversing
Catalog Number
Three-Pole
Reversing
Catalog Number
Single-Phase Three-Phase
115V 230V 208V 240V 480V 600V
C440 Electronic Overload Relays
00
0
9
18
11
21
1/3
1
1
2
1-1/2
3
1-1/2
3
2
5
2
5
AN19AN0_ 5E _
AN19BN0_ 5E _
AN59AN0_ 5E _
AN59BN0_ 5E _
1
2
3
27
45
90
32
52
104
2
3
3
7-1/2
7-1/2
10
25
7-1/2
15
30
10
25
50
10
25
50
AN19DN0_ 5E _
AN19GN0_ 5E _
AN19KN0_ 5E _
AN59DN0_ 5E _
AN59GN0_ 5E _
AN59KN0_ 5E _
4
135
270
156
311
40
75
50
100
100
200
100
200
AN19SN0_ 5E _
AN59SN0_ 5E _
C440 with Ground Fault Electronic Overload Relays
00
0
9
18
11
21
1/3
1
1
2
1-1/2
3
1-1/2
3
2
5
2
5
AN19AN0_ 5G _
AN19BN0_ 5G _
AN59AN0_ 5G _
AN59BN0_ 5G _
1
2
3
27
45
90
32
52
104
2
3
3
7-1/2
7-1/2
10
25
7-1/2
15
30
10
25
50
10
25
50
AN19DN0_ 5G _
AN19GN0_ 5G _
AN19KN0_ 5G _
AN59DN0_ 5G _
AN59GN0_ 5G _
AN59KN0_ 5G _
4
135
270
156
311
40
75
50
100
100
200
100
200
AN19SN0_ 5G _
AN59SN0_ 5G _
Sufx Coil Volts and Hertz
A
B
C
120/60 or 110/50
240/60 or 220/50
480/60 or 440/50
D
E
H
600/60 or 550/50
208/60
277/60
J
K
L
208240/60
240/50
380415/50
N
T
U
550/50
24/60, 24/50
24/50
V
W
Y
32/50
48/60
48/50
NEMA Size OLR Code FLA Range OLR Code FLA Rating
00 1P6 0.331.65A 020 4.020A
005 1.05.0A
0 1P6 0.331.65A 020 4.020A
005 1.05.0A
1 1P6 0.331.65A 020 4.020A
005 1.05.0A 045 9.045A
2 005 1.05.0A 045 9.045A
020 4.020A
3 100 20100A
4
300 60300A
5
300 60300A
30.3-17
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
033
Accessories
Table 30.3-40. CT Kits
Customer can wire remote-mounted button

to reset module (i.e., 22 mm pushbutton,
catalog number M22-D-B-GB14-K10).
Communication
The C440 is provided with two levels
of communication capability.
Basic Communication via Expansion
ModuleMonitoring Only
Basic communication on the C440
is accomplished using an expansion
module. The expansion module
plugs into the expansion bay on
the C440 overload relay, enabling
communications with the overload via
their Modbus RTU (RS-485) network.
No additional parts are required.
Basic CommunicationModbus
Advanced Communication
Monitoring and Control
C440 also has the ability to communi-
cate on industrial protocols such as
DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU
and Modbus TCP, and Ethernet
(planned) while providing control
capability using I/O.
An expansion module (mentioned
earlier) combined with a communica-
tion adapter and a communication
module allows easy integration onto
the customers network.
Communication Module
The communication adapter comes
standard with four inputs and two
outputs (24 Vdc or 120 Vac) while
providing the customer with exible
mounting options (DIN rail or panel).
For more information about technical
data and specications as well as
dimensions, see Volume 5Motor
Control and Protection, CA08100006E,
Section 31.
Communication Adapter
with Communication Module
Description Catalog
Number
Safety Cover
Clear Lexan
cover that mounts

on top of the FLA dial and
DIP switches when closed
ZEB-XSC
Reset Bar
Assembles to the top of the
overload to provide a larger
target area for door-mounted
reset operators
ZEB-XRB
Remote Reset
Remote reset module
(24 Vdc)
C440-XCOM
Remote reset module
(120 Vac)
ZEB-XRR-120
Remote reset module
(24 Vac)
ZEB-XRR-24
30.3-18
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
034
30.4-1
September 2011
Motor Starters & ContactorsLow Voltage
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
035
Low Voltage Reduced Voltage
Starter Selection Guide
In general, the application will determine the type of starter required. In cases where more than one type starter will meet
the application requirements, reference to the table below will show which starter is best suited for the application.
Table 30.4-1. Reduced Voltage Starting Characteristics and Index
Includes autotransformer magnetizing current.

General Application
The following factors should be
considered when applying reduced-
voltage starters to a squirrel cage
motor-driven load.
1. The motor characteristics that will
satisfy the starting requirements of
the load.
2. The source of power and the effect
the motor starting current will have
on the line voltage.
3. The load characteristics and the
effect the motor starting torque will
have on the driven parts
during acceleration.
The starter protection required to
protect the load, motor, starter, cables
and power source during overload,
undervoltage and fault conditions.
A typical NEMA B motor started with
full voltage will develop as much as
150% full-load torque when started with
a starting current of around 600% full-
load current. These values may exceed
the mechanical limitations of the load
or electrical limitations of the source, or
both.
A reduced-voltage or reduced-inrush
starter will reduce both starting current
and starting torque. Care must be taken
when meeting power company limita-
tions that the motor will produce suf-
cient torque to accelerate the load to
near rated speed.
Part-winding starters are suited to
low starting torque loads such as
fans, blowers and m-g sets. Autotrans-
former starters should be used with
hard to start loads such as reciprocat-
ing compressors, grinding mills, and
pumps. Wye-delta starters are applica-
ble to high inertia loads with long accel-
eration times which as centrifugal
compressors and centrifuges.
All starters, in addition to overload pro-
tection, will provide either low voltage
release or low voltage protection
depending upon the pilot device used
with the starter. Low voltage release,
where power is applied to the motor
after a power failure, can be obtained by
using a two-wire pilot device
(temperature, switch and so on). Low
voltage protection, where power is not
applied to the motor after a power failure
until restarted by an operator, can be
obtained by using three-wire control
such as START STOP pushbuttons.
Closed transition wye-delta types
require adequate ventilation to remove
resistor heat.
Eaton also offers a line of solid-state
reduced-voltage starters known as
Easy-start.
Solid-state starters are ideally suited for
many loads including conveyor applica-
tions since they provide controlled
acceleration from zero to full load.
UL listingCombination E176513,
Non-Combination E19224.
Figure 30.4-1. Autotransformer Starting
Figure 30.4-2. Wye-Delta or Part
Winding Starting
Figure 30.4-3. Solid-State Starter
Starter
Type
Starting Characteristics Expressed in %
of Rated Starting Values (Approximate)
Remarks Page
Motor
Voltage
Motor
Current
Line
Current
Torque
Autotransformer
Class ECA42
80% Tap
65% Tap
50% Tap
80
65
50
80
65
50
67
45
28
64
42
25
The adjustable voltage taps permit wide adjustment of characteristics
in the eld.
30.4-2
Part winding
Class ECA45
100 65 65 50 Requires part winding motor. A nine-lead 230/460V dual voltage motor
may be used in 230V applications. Closed transition.
30.4-3
Wye-delta
Class ECA48
Class ECA51
100 33 33 33 Requires delta wound motor with wye connections.
Ideal for long accelerations. Closed transition is available.
30.4-4
Solid-state
S801/811
S611
DS6/DS7
Ramps
0100%
Adjustable
092%
Adjustable
092%
Adjustable
085%
Compatible with NEMA Design A, B or C motors.
Adjustable ramp up and ramp down.
30.5-1
thru
30.5-49
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
Full Voltage Starting
Full Load Current
Autotransformer
Starting on 65% Tap
Motor Speed Full Load
Speed
L
i
n
e

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
,

%

o
f

F
u
l
l

L
o
a
d
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
Full Voltage Starting
Part Winding Starting
Wye-Delta Starting
(Closed Transition)
Full Load Current
L
i
n
e

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
,

%

o
f

F
u
l
l

L
o
a
d
Motor Speed Full Load
Speed
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
KVA
Torque
L
i
n
e

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
,

%

o
f

F
u
l
l

L
o
a
d
100 80 60 40 20
Motor Speed Full Load Speed
30.4-2
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Autotransformer Type
036
General Description
Autotransformer type starters are
the most widely used reduced-voltage
starter because of their efciency and
exibility. All power taken from the line,
except transformer losses, is transmitted
to the motor to accelerate the load. Taps
on the transformer allow adjustment of
the starting torque and inrush to meet
the requirements of most applications.
The following characteristics are pro-
duced by the three voltage taps:
Table 30.4-2. Starting Characteristics
Not included 50 hp and below.
Includes transformer magnetizing current.

Closed transition is standard on all
sizes ensuring a smooth transition
from reduced to full voltage. Since
the motor is never disconnected from
the line there is no interruption of line
current which can cause a second
inrush during transition.
Duty cycle of these starters is as follows:
up to 200 hp, 15 seconds on each
4 minutes for 1 hour, repeated after
2 hours. Over 200 hp, three periods
of 30 seconds ON, 30 seconds OFF
repeated after 1 hour.
Design Features
Contactors(1S) (2S) (Run)
A three-pole (1S)
and a three-pole
contactor (2S) connect the motor to the
auto-transformer for reduced-voltage
starting (see Table 30.4-3 for size).
A three-pole contactor (Run) bypasses
the autotransformer and connects the
motor for full-voltage across-the-line
running (see Table 30.4-3 for size).
Tap Starting Torque
% Locked
Torque
Line Inrush
% Locked
Ampere
50%
65%
80%
25%
42%
64%
28%
45%
67%
Table 30.4-3. NEMA Contactor Size

Guidelines within Autotransformer Starters
1S is two-pole on sizes 7 and 8.

Operation (Refer to Schematic Diagram)
Closing the START button or other
pilot device energizes the start contactor
(1S). The interlock (1S) closes, energiz-
ing the timing relay (TR) and contactor
(2S) which seal in through the interlock
(2S). With the (1S) and (2S) contactors
closed, the motor is connected through
the autotransformer for reduced-voltage
start. After a preset time interval, the
(TR
TO
) contacts time open, de-energiz-
ing contactor (1S) and connecting the
autotransformer as a reactor in series
with the motor. Interlock (1S) immedi-
ately energizes the run contactor (R)
which seals in through its interlock (R).
The run contacts are now closed, and
the motor is running at full voltage.
Start contactor (2S) and relay (TR) are
de-energized when interlock (R) opens.
An overload, opening the STOP push-
button or other pilot device de-ener-
gizes the (R) contactor removing the
motor from the line.
Other Types
Autotransformer starters are also
available in combination and reversing
types.
Figure 30.4-4. Typical Schematic Diagram
Table 30.4-4. Type 1, 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom
Reduced Voltage Enclosures
Non-combination and breaker.
Consult factory.
Maximum
hp
NEMA Size
Starter Contactor
Run Starting
(1S)
(3-Pole)
(2S)
(3-Pole)
230V, 60 Hz
15
30
50
100
200
300
450
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
6
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
460575V, 60 Hz
25
50
100
200
400
600
900
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
6
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
TB1 TB1
Stop Start
TB2 TB3
TT
TB3
PS
Auto
Hand
Off
TB1 TB1
TT
OL
T1
T2
T3
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
RVNR AUTOXFMR (3-coil)
CKT BKR
or
SW & FU
#1
#2
#3
Stopped
Run
1S
TBX2
TR
TT
54
A1 A2
TR
On-Delay
1.5 15 Sec.
TB4
95 96 B
G
R
2 7
8 6
D C
A1 A2
R
A1 A2
1S
55
53
52
2S
51
8 5
1S
2S
OTT "E" "D"
Auto-Transformer
Overtemp SWa
R
1S
7 8 9 10
R
R
2S
R
2S
R
2S
3C
3E
3D
5D
5E
5C
1D
1C
1
0
0
%
0
%
1
0
0
%
18
0
%
6
5
%
0
%
1
0
0
%
6
5
%
0
%
1S
1S
1S
Size Type 1 Type 3R, 4X, 12
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Class 42: AutotransformerNon-combination
Class 43: Autotransformerwith Disconnect
Class 44: Autotransformerwith HMCP
24 E2 124 (56) E2 149 (68)
5 F1E 885 (402) F1E 1010 (459)
6
F1E 1220 (554) F1E 1345 (611)

6
F2E 1400 (636) F2E 1525 (692)

7 F2E

F2E

8 F2E

F2E

9

30.4-3
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Part-Winding Type
037
General Description
Part-winding starting provides conve-
nient, economical one-step acceleration
at reduced current where the power
company species a maximum or
limits the increments of current drawn
from the line. These starters can be
used with nine-lead dual-voltage
motors on the lower voltage and with
special part-winding motors designed
for any voltage. When used with dual-
voltage motors, it should be estab-
lished that the torque produced by
the rst half-winding will accelerate the
load sufciently so as not to produce
a second undesirable inrush when the
second half-winding is connected to the
line. Most motors will produce a start-
ing torque equal to between 1/2 to 2/3
of NEMA standard values with half of
the winding energized and draw about
2/3 of normal line current inrush.
Design Features
Contactors(1M) (2M)
A three-pole contactor (1M) connects
only the rst half-winding of the motor
for reduced inrush current on starting
(see table below for size). A three-pole
contactor (2M) connects the second
half-winding of the motor for running
(see table below for size).
Table 30.4-5. NEMA Contactor Size
Guidelines within Part Winding Starters
Maximum
hp
NEMA Size
Starter Contactor
(1M) (2M)
230V, 60 Hz
15
25
50
75
150
300
1 PW
2 PW
3 PW
4 PW
5 PW
6 PW
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
460575V, 60 Hz
15
40
75
150
350
600
1 PW
2 PW
3 PW
4 PW
5 PW
6 PW
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Overload Relay(OL)
Two three-pole Type B overload
relays provide starting and running
Timing Relay(TR)
An electrically operated pneumatic
relay provides accurate, adjustable
start-to-run transfer timing.
Other Types
Part-winding Type ECN45 starters are
also available in combination (Type 46
and 47), reversing and three-point
(primary resistor) types.
Closing the START button or other pilot
device energizes the start contactor
(1M) which seals in through its inter-
lock (1M) and energizes the timer (TR).
The (1M) contacts connect the rst
half-winding of the motor across the
line. After a preset time interval, the
timer (TR
TC
) contact closes energizing
contactor (2M). The (2M) contact con-
nects the second half-winding of the
motor across-the-line.
Opening the STOP button or other
pilot device de-energizes contactors
(1M), (2M) and timer (TR), removing
the motor from the line.
Table 30.4-6. Contactor Sequence
Figure 30.4-5. Typical Schematic Diagram
Table 30.4-7. Type 1, 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom
Reduced Voltage Enclosures
Consult factory.
Fusible.
Contactor Start Run
1M
2M
Select Overload Heater Packs for 50%
of Rated Full Load Motor Current
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
Part Winding
CKT BKR
or
SW & FU
#1
#2
#3
1M
2M
OL
OL
T1
T7
T3
T8
T9
Stopped
Run
1M
TBX2
TB1 TB1
Stop
Start
TB2 TB3
7 8
1M
1M
T.C. = TT Timed Closing
TB3
PS
Auto
Hand
Off
TB1 TB1
5 A1 A2
2M
A1 A2
TR
On-Delay 1.5
TB4
96
(1M) (2M)
OL OL
A
G
R
E
2 7
8
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Box
No.
Shipping
Weight
Lbs (kg)
Class 45: Part WindingNon-combination
2PW 3 25 (11) 7 75 (34)
3PW
4PW
9 47 (21) 9 95 (43)
5PW E 125 (47) E 180 (82)
6PW F1E 780 (354) F1E 880 (400)
7PW F2E

F2E

8PW F2E

F2E

Class 46: Part Windingwith Disconnect
Class 47: Part Windingwith Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Circuit Breaker
2PW C 68 (31) C 88 (40)
3PW D 162 (74) D 190 (86)
4PW E 230 (104) E 270 (123)
5PW F1E 440 (200) F1E 530 (241)
6PW
F1E 440 (200) F1E 620 (281)

6PW
F2E 515 (234) F2E

7PW F2E

F2E

8PW F2E

F2E

30.4-4
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Wye-Delta Type
038
General Description
Wye-delta type starters are applied
extensively to industrial air condition-
ing installations because they are par-
ticularly suited for starting motors
driving high inertia loads with resulting
long acceleration times. They are not,
however, limited to this application.
When six- or 12-lead delta-connected
motors are started wye-connected,
approximately 58% of line voltage is
applied to each winding and the motor
develops 33% of full-voltage starting
torque and draws 33% of normal
locked-rotor current from the line.
When the motor is accelerated, it is
reconnected for normal data operation.
Design Features
Contactors(1S) (1M) (2S) (2M)
A three-pole contactor (1S)
shorts
the motor leads T4-T5-T6 during
starting to connect motor in wye
(see Table 30.4-8 for size).
A three-pole contactor (1M) energizes
motor leads T1-T2-T3 for both wye and
delta connections (see Table 30.4-8
for size).
A three-pole contactor (2S) connects
resistors in series with the motor wind-
ings during the start-to-run transition
period (see Table 30.4-8 for size).
A three-pole contactor (2M) energizes
the motor leads T4-T5-T6 during run-
ning to connect the motor in delta
(see Table 30.4-8 for size).
Table 30.4-8. NEMA Contactor Size Guidelines
1S is two-pole on sizes 7 and 8.

Max.
hp
NEMA Size
Starter Contactor
(1M) (2M) (1S) (2S)
230V, 60 Hz
10
25
50
75
150
300
500
800
1 YD
2 YD
3 YD
4 YD
5 YD
6 YD
7 YD
8 YD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
460575V, 60 Hz
15
40
75
150
300
700
1000
1500
1 YD
2 YD
3 YD
4 YD
5 YD
6 YD
7 YD
8 YD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Closing the START button or other pilot
device energizes contactor (1S) whose
contacts connect the motor in a wye
connection. Interlock (1S) closes, ener-
gizing contactor (1M) and timer (TR).
The (1M) contacts energize the motor
windings in a wye. After a preset time
interval, timer (TR
TC
) contact closes
energizing contactor (2S). Interlock (2S)
opens, dropping out contactor (1S).
The motor is now energized in series
with the resistors. Interlock (1S) closes,
energizing contactor (2M), bypassing
the resistors and energizing the
delta connected motor at full voltage.
Interlock opens, de-energizes the timer
(TR) opening timer (TR
TC
) thus energiz-
ing contactor (2S).
An overload, opening the STOP button
or other pilot device de-energizes con-
tactors (1M) and (2M), removing the
motor from the line. (TRP) de-energizes
and locks out the control circuit if the
duty cycle of the transition resistors
is exceeded.
Wye-delta Class ECN51 closed transition
starters are also available in combina-
tion types and Class ECN48 open
transition non-combination and
combination starters.
Figure 30.4-6. Wye-DeltaOpen Transition
Figure 30.4-7. Wye-DeltaClosed Transition
51
Elementary Diagram
Select Overload Heater Coils for 58%
of Rated Full Load Motor Current
TB4
TBX2
ON-Delay 1.5-15 Seconds
54 55
52
53
5 6
R
Run
Stopped
G
7 8
Stop Start
Motor
T1
T3
T2
T5 1S
1S
1S
T4
T6
OL 1M
2M
1S 2M
1S
1M
2M
OL
95 96
TR
A2
1S
A1
A2
1M
A1
A2
2M
A1
2 7
8 6
1S
1M
TR
1S T.C.
E
Auto
TB1 TB1
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB1
Hand
OFF
TB3
PS
Shop Note:
Refer to Figure 2. Connect Green Ground
Wire to Panel Using Hole Located Adjacent
to Transformers Mounting Foot.
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
Wye-Delta Open Transition
Circuit Breaker
or Switch
and Fuse
1
2
3
T.O. = Timed Opening
T.C. = Timed Closing
8 5 TR
T.O.
1S
5 5 7 8
2M
TB1 TB1
Stop
Start
TB2 TB3
TB3
PS
Auto
Hand
Off
TB1 TB1
1S
1M
T.C. TT
55
TRP
2 7
8
A1 A2
A1 A2
1S
56
54
53
1S
1M
2S
A1 A2
52
6
TR
T.C. TT
1 3
2 7
E
A1 A2 51
2S
Stopped
Run
On-Delay 1.5
G
R
TB4
95 96
1 4
.
TBX2
2M
1M
T1A
T2A
OL
T1
T2
T3
Motor
T6
T4
T5
1S 1S
1S
2S
T
1
B
T
2
B
T
3
B
L1
L2
L3
L2
L3
WW
Closed Transition
or
SW & FU
#2
#3
R
e
s
i
s
t
o
r
R
e
s
i
s
t
o
r
R
e
s
i
s
t
o
rSelect Overload Heater Coils
for 58% of Rated Full Load
Motor Current
30.4-5
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Wye-Delta Type
039
Table 30.4-9. Type 1, 3R, 4/4X, 12 Freedom Reduced Voltage Enclosures
Fusible.
Consult factory.
Box No. Shipping Weight
Lbs (kg)
Box No. Shipping Weight
Lbs (kg)
Classes 48 & 51: Wye-DeltaNon-combination
Classes 49 & 52: Wye-Deltawith Disconnect
Classes 50 & 53: Wye-Deltawith Thermal
Magnetic Trip Circuit Breaker
2YD4YD E 185 (84) E 225 (102)
5YD F1E 605 (275) F1E 705 (320)
6YD
F1E 635 (288) F1E 735 (334)

6YD
F2E 715 (325) F2E 830 (377)

7YD F2E

F2E

8YD F2E

F2E

30.4-6
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
040
30.5-1
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General DescriptionSolid-State Reduced Voltage
041
Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters
General Description
Eaton offers a complete line of solid-
state reduced voltage devices ranging
from fractional horsepower applica-
tions to 1000A devices. The line comes
in voltages from 200 to 600 Vac and
operates on 50 or 60 Hz applications.
Units can be ordered as open
components or mounted in enclosures
(NEMA 1, 3R, 4X and 12). Motor
control center (MCC) mounting is
also possible with units through 700 hp
tting inside of a standard MCC.
These soft starters provide reduced
voltage starting of AC induction motors.
Motor voltage is controlled by means
of back-to-back SCRs (silicon controlled
rectiers) providing a smooth, stepless
start (and stop) of the motor driven load.
For more information, please
visit the Eaton Web site at
Designed to control acceleration and
deceleration of three-phase motors,
products are available from 0.25 to
50A and are suitable for mounting in a
variety of enclosures including Type 1,
12, 3R, 4, 4X and 7/9.
Eatons soft starters can be applied in
a wide array of customer applications.
Typical benets of soft starters
include:
Reduced starting torque stress on
mechanical equipment, allowing
longer life of belts, gears, pulleys and
motor shafts commonly weakened
during across-the-line starting
Reduction of voltage drop during
starting on weak utility systems
where the performance of nearby
equipment would be negatively
affected
Reduced inrush current during
starting which can result in lower
utility bills due to the reduction in
peak current demand charges
Smooth, stepless starting of a
motor, allowing superior exibility
over typical electromechanical
starting methods
Ability to start large loads on backup
generators during power outages
Elimination of the water-hammer
effect in hydraulic systems, which
can help to eliminate additional pipe
hangers and extend the life of the
system, pumps, valves and gaskets
Typical Applications
Centrifugal and screw compressors
Material handling equipment
Fans and blowers
Pumps
Cranes and hoists
Food processing
Machinery
Rock crushers
HVAC industry
Enclosure Types
Airborne particulate may be detrimental
to starter performance and reliability,
so caution must be exercised in
choosing the enclosure best suited
to the environment. The NEMA rating
of the enclosure denes its ability
to withstand the ingress of foreign
particulate as described below:
NEMA 1
A general purpose, indoor-type
enclosure.
NEMA 12
A dust-tight and drip-tight enclosure
for indoor industrial applications.
NEMA 3R
Enclosures are intended for outdoor
use, primarily to provide a degree of
protection against falling rain, sleet
and external ice formation.
NEMA 4
A watertight and dust-tight enclosure
for either indoor or outdoor use.
NEMA 4X
Identical to NEMA 4, with the additional
requirement that the enclosure be
corrosion-proof as well.
NEMA 7/9
Enclosures capable of preventing the
entrance of dust and withstanding
pressure resulting from an internal
explosion of specied gas.
30.5-2
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
042
Table 30.5-1. Solid-State Enclosed Control Catalog Numbering System
EC S 90 S 1 C A A
Type
S = Solid-state
Class
90 = Non-combination reduced voltage
soft starterS801
91 = Combination reduced voltage
soft starterfusible disconnectS801
soft startercircuit breakerS801
93 = Non-combination reduced voltage
soft starterS811
soft starterfusible disconnectS811
soft startercircuit breakerS811
Amperes
S801/S811
Q = 37
S = 66
V = 105
W = 135
Y = 180
Z = 240
1 = 304
2 = 360
3 = 420
4 = 500
5 = 650
6 = 720
7 = 850
8 = 1000
Voltage
B = 230V
C = 460V
D = 575V
E = 200V
Q = 24 Vdc
Cover Control
See Table 30.6-3 for options
A = None
B = 30A/250V R
C = 30A/600V R
D = 60A/250V R
E = 60A/600V R
F = 100A/250V R
G = 100A/600V R
H = 200A/250V R
J = 200A/600V R
K = 400A/250V R
L = 400A/600V R
M= 600A/250V R
N = 600A/600V R
P = 800A/600V L
Q = 1200A/600V L
R = 1600A/600V L
S = 2000A/600V L
T = By description
Breaker
A = None
B = 3A
C = 7A
D = 15A
E = 30A
F = 50A
W= 70A
G = 100A
H = 150A
J = 250A
K = 400A
L = 600A
P = 1200A
Q = 1600A
Enclosure Type
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 3R
3 = Type 4
4 = Type 4X (304-Grade SS)
6 = Type 7/9
8 = Type 12
9 = Type 4X (316-Grade SS)
30.5-3
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
043
Table 30.5-2. Solid-State Product Comparison
Table 30.5-3. Application and Environmental Considerations
The installation environment for a solid-state reduced voltage starter is of a prime concern. Conditions such as ambient
temperature, altitude and the presence of corrosives or moisture must all be considered when choosing the appropriate
starter size and enclosure type.
Note: Consult factory for applications outside of these parameters for additional information and sizing requirements.
Description S801
Soft Starter
S811 Communicating
Soft Starter
Maximum current range
Start type
Operating voltage
11000A
Ramp or current limit
200600 Vac
11000A
Ramp or current limit
200600 Vac
Operating frequency
Control voltage
Kick start
4763 Hz
24 Vdc
02 seconds adjustable
4763 Hz
24 Vdc
02 seconds adjustable
Ramp time range
Initial torque setting
Current limit setting
0.5180 seconds
0%85%
0%550%
0.5180 seconds
0%85%
0%550%
Soft stop
Pump control option
Overtemperature protection
060 seconds
Yes
Yes
060 seconds
Yes
Yes
Overload
Overload setting
Trip class setting
Phase loss/unbalance
Jam
Stall
Phase reversal
Yes
30%100%
5, 10, 20 and 30
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
30%100%
5, 10, 20 and 30
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Jog
Extended start
LED status indication
LED fault indication
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LCDYes
LCDYes
Description S801
Soft Starter
S811 Communicating
Soft Starter
Temperatureoperating (No derating)
Current rating (50C)
Limited duty cycle (50C)
25C to 40C
100%
Fully rated
30C to 50C
100%
Fully rated
Current rating (60C)
Limited duty cycle (60C)
Temperaturestorage
Altitude (meters)
10% reduction
Continuous duty cycle at 90%
40C to 70C
2000
Consult factory
Consult factory
50C to 70C
2000
30.5-4
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
044
Multi-Motor Operation
The S801/S811 line can be used
to control multiple motors if the
following conditions are met:
The current rating of the S801/S811
should be equal to or greater than
the total of the individual motor
full load amperes and the S801/S811
overload must be set for the
cumulative full load amperes
of the motors
Individual motor overcurrent
protection is provided by
other devices
The motors should not be
mechanically coupled together,
i.e., two motors on same shaft
NEC and local code requirements
for individual motor protection
and branch short circuit protection
are met
Motors are closely matched in total
load and size
Frequent Starting/Stopping
The number of starts and stops
allowable depends upon many factors.
The most important ones are:
1. Set level of the starting current limit
2. Start time
3. Run time
4. Off time before next start
The number of starts per hour is based
on the current carrying capacity of
the SCRs. A high start/stop duty may
require the oversizing of a soft starter.
If a high number of multiple starts
occur, the starter may trip due to the
overload protection for the motor or
it may trip on overtemperature of the
soft starter. In this situation, it is advis-
able to wait a period of 10 minutes
before restarting to avoid damage to
the soft starter and motor and allow
the units to cool down. The motor
manufacturer should be consulted
about the effect of a high number
of multiple starts on motor life.
Starting Torque
The reduced voltage applied to the
motor results in reduced inrush
current and a soft start. However,
it reduces the starting torque of the
motor. The relationship is as follows:
EXAMPLE: A 100 hp, 1800 RPM, 460V
NEMA B motor draws six times full
load amperes for starting, and starting
torque is 150% of full load torque.
If the same motor were started with
the S801 at 300% current limit, then
the available torque would be:
1/4 x 150% full load torque =
37.5% full load torque available
Heat Generation
Due to the voltage drop that occurs
across a SCR, there is heat generated
in the unit. For sizing an enclosure
or box size for the soft starters, it is
important to account for this heat
generation.
The S801/S811 lines use a bypass
contactor, so heat generation is mini-
mized. During steady-state conditions,
it generates about the same amount of
heat as an across-the-line starter of the
same size. During start and stopping
ramps it will generate three watts of
heat per ampere.
EXAMPLE: A 100 hp, 480V NEMA B
motor has a full load current of 125
amperes. A typical soft start on this
motor is 300% current limit for 40
seconds. The heat generation during
this time period is:
125 amperes x 300% =
375 watts for 40 seconds
At the end of the ramp, the bypass
contactor closes and total heat genera-
tion is reduced to much lower levels.
NEMA Design C and D Motors,
Wound Rotor Motors
These motors are used due to their
high starting torque characteristics.
When high starting currents and high
starting torques are required, it may
be necessary to order the extended
ramp option and oversize the soft
starter to match the application
requirements. Consult the factory
for application considerations.
Torque at reduced current
Torque at full current
---------------------------------------------------------------------- =
Current at reduced voltage
2
Current at full voltage
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
300
2
600
------------
90,000
360,000
--------------------- = =
30.5-5
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
General Description
045
Solid-State Reduced
Voltage Starters
Table 30.5-4. Non-combination Solid-State
Reduced Voltage
Enclosure space will also accommodate for

an DC Power Supply, two four-pole relays,
CPT, and terminal blocks. Also includes
space for a DNA module or MOV.
Contact Eaton for Box Dimensions not

shown in PG03300001E.
Note: All Type 7 and 9, see PG03300001E.
Table 30.5-5. Combination Solid-State
Reduced Voltage
Enclosure space will also accommodate for

an DC Power Supply, two four-pole relays,
CPT, and terminal blocks. Also includes
space for a DNA module or MOV.
Same as footnote
, but CPT is not included.

Upsize to B1 enclosure to include space for a
CPT and a full voltage bypass contactor.
Rating SSRV Non-combination
Box No.
37A
66A
105A
135A
180A
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
7A
7A
7A
B1
C
240A
304A
360A
420A
500A
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
10
10
650A
720A
850A
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
10
10
10
1000A S801/S811 10
Rating SSRV Comb. with
Fuses
Comb. with
HMCP
Box No.
Box No.
37A
66A
105A
135A
180A
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
B1
C
D
D
E
A1
A1
B1
C
E
240A
304A
360A
420A
500A
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
E
E
E
E
E
650A
720A
850A
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
1000A S801/S811 F1E F1E
30.5-6
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
S801 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starter
046
S801 Solid-State Reduced
Voltage Soft Starter
S801 Reduced Voltage Soft Starters
General Description
Eatons S801 line of reduced voltage
soft starters is very compact, multi-
functional, easy-to-install and
easy-to-program. Designed to control
acceleration and deceleration of three-
phase motors, the line is available in
current ranges from 12 to1000A and
is suitable for mounting in motor
control centers or in enclosed control
(NEMA 1, 4, 4X and 12) applications.
This product line is designed to compete
head-to-head with the high-end soft
starter market, offering improved
performance and dramatically smaller
size versus the competition. By having
the over-load functionality and bypass
contactors built into the unit, it reduces
the amount of wiring required during
installation and offers huge space
savings in the panel or enclosure.
The product is also designed to be
small enough to replace an existing
across-the-line starter (NEMA or IEC)
in the existing enclosure. This allows
customers to upgrade their existing
motor control centers and enclosed
control by replacing the starter they
have today with a soft starter, gaining
the benets of lower utility charges,
longer component life and less stress
on products and material systems.
This size benet allows users to save
the expense of replacing the existing
structure or adding a new one to
house a much larger soft starter.
The S801 line uses a total of six SCRs
to control the motor (three matched
pairs). The unit has a built-in overload
Table 30.5-6. S801 Open Soft Starters Catalog Numbering System
Not available on U-Frame.
U-Frame 500A unit does not have IEC Certication.

that is adjustable from 30% to 100% of
rating and can be set for Trip Class 5,
10, 20 or 30. It also provides additional
protection for jam, stall, phase reversal,
phase loss, overtemperature, under-
voltage and so on. Along with the
overload, the unit has a built-in run
bypass contactor. This device is closed
when the soft starter is up to speed
providing a low impedance bypass for
the SCRs and signicantly reducing the
amount of heat that is generated in the
soft starter.
The S801 is designed to work with
three-phase motors in a delta (three-
lead) conguration. The S801 works
with all motors from fractional horse-
power up to motors requiring 1000A of
steady-state current. The built-in over-
load (in ranges from 12 to 1000A) and
run bypass contactor makes installa-
tion and setup quick and easy. The
overload also offers some advanced
protective functions to give additional
motor protection.
With the pump control option, it is the
number one soft starter available for
pumping applications. The unique soft
stopping control provides a smooth
transition for stopping a motor and
eliminating the water-hammer
effect that can damage pipes, valves
and pumps.
Features
Built-in overload protection:
30%100% adjustment range
Trip Class 5, 10, 20 and 30
Jam
Stall
Phase reversal
Phase loss/unbalance
Shorted SCR detection
Overtemperature
Selectable ramp or current
limit start.
Kick Start:
Adjustable from 0%85%
initial torque
02.0 seconds adjustment time
Ramp Start:
Adjustable from 0%85%
initial torque
Current Limit Start:
Adjustable from 0%550% FLA
Soft Stop:
Adjustable from 0%60 seconds
Built-in run bypass contact
24 Vdc control
IP20 nger protection
Optional pump control
IEC 947 compliant
EN 60947-4-2
CE marked
CSA certied
UL listed
B = Level sensing
D = Inside the delta
L = Extended ramp start
S = Standard soft starter
overload
W= Without CIM (control
interface module)
S 801 N66 N 3 S
S = Soft Starter
801 = Non-combination Soft Starter
Ampacity Rating
N37= 37A
N66= 66A
R10 = 105A
R13 = 135A
T18 = 180A
T24 = 240A
T30 = 304A
U36= 360A
U42= 420A
U50 = 500A
V36 = 360A
V42 = 420A
V50 = 500A
V65 = 650A
V72 = 720A
V85 = 850A
V10 = 1000A
N= No options
P = Pump control
V = 690V option
3 = Three-pole device
30.5-7
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
047
S801 Enclosed Soft Starter
Enclosed S801 Soft Starter
General Description
24 Vdc ControlS801 soft starters
superiority begins with the control
package that features 24 Vdc control
running a digital signal processor, or
DSP, and using a low impedance run
circuit, all of which contribute to the
S801 soft starters safety, advanced
functionality and compact size.
Built-in Overload ProtectionWith
most wye-delta starters, many of the
advanced features of the S801 are
functions that must be added at the
expense of cost and space. The S801
soft starter, for example, has built-in
overload protection (overloads must
be added to wye-delta starters). So,
S801 soft starters are more compact,
easier to wire and less costly than their
wye-delta counterparts.
Reduced Power ConsumptionThe
S801 soft starter costs less in terms
of power consumption. An S801 soft
starter also reduces line brown-outs
and decreases overall energy usage.
For example, an S801 soft starter
controls peak power demand while
a full-voltage starter can apply
600800% FLA on startup.
Lower Starting TorqueSystem cost
savings are signicant with an S801
soft starter versus a full voltage starter.
With an S801 soft starter, mechanical
components can have longer life or
be reduced in size because of lower
starting torque values (250500% FLA
current with SSRV).
Fewer Mechanical ProblemsBecause
an S801 soft starter reduces stress on
a system by eliminating the jolts and
violent speed variations that full-voltage
starters introduce to a process,
fewer mechanical breakdowns
occur, improving the quality of
the product and process.
Features and Benets
Longer Life of System Equipment
With the impressive list of control
and protective functions, this new
line of products is designed to sig-
nicantly increase the protection
it offers to system equipment (e.g.,
motors, belts, pumps and so on).
The benet of increased system
equipment protection is longer
life and longer system equipment
uptime
Reduced Power DrawPower
control features like Ramp Start,
Current Limit Start and Jog Forward
provide maximum exibility in
selecting start proles, minimizing
both mechanical and electrical
stress while maximizing motor
performance
Improved SafetyS801 soft
starters offer ngerproof deadfront
construction, reducing the chance
of electrical shock. With the use
of 24 Vdc control power, pilot
devices and relays can be
operated more safely
System Cost SavingsWith
improved reliability, longer life of
system equipment, reduced power
draw, space savings and improved
safety, you enjoy the benet of a
signicant improvement in system
uptime and a reduction in system
downtime resulting in overall
system cost saving
Time SavingsTime savings in
using S801 soft starters are achieved
through a quick and easy setup
procedure, user-friendly operational
design, the longer life of system
equipment and improved safety
ProductivityOverall, S801 soft
starters signicantly improve your
productivity by saving you time and
money. This is demonstrated by
longer product life, longer runs
between breakdowns and the
ease of installation and operation
Enclosed Control
UL 508
IEC 947-4-2
EN 60947.2
CE marked EMC/LV directives
CSA22.2
Schematic Diagram
Figure 30.5-1. Wiring Diagram
01
02
03
L1
L2
L3
L1
IT Soft Start
L2
L3
T1
T2 Motor
T3
T1
T2
T3
L1
Power Supply
480 Vac24 Vdc
L2 L3
+ +
()
(Diode)
(+)
+
P
MX
Reset
1
2
24V Inputs
DC Only
Terminal Board
Applying Voltages Other Than
24 Vdc to Terminals P Thru 4
May Cause Serious Damage
to Soft-Start Control Board
3
4
Run
Internal
Auxiliary
Contacts
Fault
1
4
13
14
95
96
96
Customer
Control
Device
2
(+)
98
24 Vdc
or
120 Vac
MX
+
30.5-8
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
048
Base Ratings
Table 30.5-8 below is the base ratings for the S801 soft
starter. The tables included in this catalog are meant to
be a selection table for different applications, but to
match a unit to your exact application, consult with
your local Eaton representative or visit our Web site at
Table 30.5-8. Standard-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters
15 sec. start, 300% inrush, 40C, 1 start every 15 minutes. If these start parameters are exceeded, please refer to 290 mm V-Frame, 500A starter.
U-Frame 500A does not have IEC Certication.

Severe-Duty Ratings
Motor applications and customer needs come in many
different varieties. With the standard and severe duty rating
tables, we have attempted to provide guidelines on what
the S801 soft starter is capable of. If the application falls under
these categories, you can use these charts. For other applica-
tions, or when a question arises, contact Eaton Corporation
to assist you in selecting the proper soft starter.
Table 30.5-10. Severe-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters

Starting
Method
Ramp Current %
of FLA
Ramp Time
Seconds
Starts per
Hour
Ambient
Temperature
vs. Soft start
vs. Full voltage
vs. Wye-delta
vs. 80% RVAT
vs. 65% RVAT
vs. 50% RVAT
300%
500%
350%
480%
390%
300%
30
10
20
20
20
20.
3
3
3
2
3
4
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
Frame
Size
Maximum
Current
Three-Phase Motor Catalog
Number
kW Rating (50 Hz) hp Rating (60 Hz)
230 380400 440 200V 230V 460V 575V
Volt Volt Volt 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF
N 37
66
10
18.5
18.5
30
18.5
37
10
20
10
15
10
20
10
20
25
50
20
40
30
60
30
50
S801N37N3S
S801N66N3S
R 105
135
30
40
55
63
59
80
30
40
25
30
40
50
30
40
75
100
60
75
100
125
75
100
S801R10N3S
S801R13N3S
T 180
240
304
51
75
90
90
110
160
110
147
185
60
75
100
50
60
75
60
75
100
60
75
100
150
200
250
125
150
200
150
200
300
150
200
250
S801T18N3S
S801T24N3S
S801T30N3S
U 360
420
500
110
129
150
185
220
257
220
257
300
125
150
150
100
125
150
150
175
200
125
150
150
300
350
400
250
300
350
350
450
500
300
350
450
S801U36N3S
S801U42N3S
S801U50N3S
V 360
420
500
650
720
850
1000
110
129
150
200
220
257
315
185
220
257
355
400
475
560
220
257
300
425
450
500
600
125
150
150
250
100
125
150
200
150
175
200
250
300
350
400
125
150
150
200
250
300
350
300
350
400
500
600
700
800
250
300
350
450
500
600
700
350
450
500
600
700
900
1000
300
350
450
500
600
700
800
S801V36N3S
S801V42N3S
S801V50N3S
S801V65N3S
S801V72N3S
S801V85N3S
S801V10N3S
Starting
Method
Ramp Current %
of FLA
Ramp Time
Seconds
Starts per
Hour
Ambient
Temperature
vs. Soft start
vs. Full voltage
vs. Wye-delta
vs. 80% RVAT
vs. 65% RVAT
vs. 50% RVAT
450%
500%
350%
480%
390%
300%
30
10
65
25
40
60
4
10
3
4
4
4
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
Frame
Size
Maximum
Current
Number
kW Rating (50 Hz) hp Rating (60 Hz)
230 380400 440 200V 230V 460V 575V
N 22
42
5.5
11
10
18.5
11
22
5
10
5
10
7-1/2
15
5
10
15
30
10
25
20
40
15
30
S801N37N3S
S801N66N3S
R 65
80
15
22
30
40
33
45
15
25
15
20
20
30
15
25
50
60
40
50
50
75
50
60
S801R10N3S
S801R13N3S
T 115
150
192
33
45
55
59
80
100
63
90
110
30
50
60
30
40
50
40
50
75
30
50
60
75
100
150
75
100
125
100
150
200
100
125
150
S801T18N3S
S801T24N3S
S801T30N3S
U 240
305
365
75
90
110
110
160
185
147
185
220
75
100
125
60
75
100
75
100
150
75
100
125
200
250
300
150
200
250
200
300
350
200
250
300
S801U36N3S
S801U42N3S
S801U50N3S
V 240
305
365
420
480
525
600
75
90
110
129
147
160
185
110
160
185
220
257
280
315
147
185
220
257
295
335
375
75
100
125
150
150
150
200
60
75
100
125
150
150
150
75
100
150
150
200
200
250
75
100
125
150
150
150
200
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
150
200
250
300
350
350
450
200
300
350
450
500
500
600
200
250
300
350
450
450
500
S801V36N3S
S801V42N3S
S801V50N3S
S801V65N3S
S801V72N3S
S801V85N3S
S801V10N3S
30.5-9
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
049
Features
Able to t in place of existing
starters
Smallest unit on the market today
Very easy to install, wire and program
Reduces initial torque on motor
and loads
Able to control the maximum
inrush current
Benets
Reduced wear on belts, gears,
chains, clutches, shafts and bearings
Allows for controlling the inrush
current to the motor and reducing
electrical charges due to peak
energy demand
Reduced inrush current leads to
more stable power grid and can
lower peak demand charges
Elimination of water-hammer,
which can reduce installed cost of
pipe hangers and extend existing
system life
Less shock to product on conveyor
lines and material handling gear
24 Vdc control enhances personnel
and equipment safety
Table 30.5-11. Technical Data

Soft Starter
(Partial Catalog Number)
S801
N37
S801
N66
S801
R10
S801
R13
S801
T18
S801
T24
S801
T30
S801
U36
S801
U42
S801
U50
S801
V36
S801
V42
S801
V50
S801
V65
S801
V72
S801
V85
S801
V10
Maximum current capacity 37 66 105 135 180 240 304 360 420 500 360 420 500 650 720 850 1000
Width
Height
Depth
Weight in lbs (kg)
2.60 (66.1)
7.38 (187.4)
6.63 (168.4)
5.80 (2.6)
4.38 (111.3)
7.92 (201.2)
7.03 (178.6)
10.50 (4.8)
7.65 (194.3)
12.71 (322.8)
6.69 (169.9)
48.00 (21.8)
with lugs
41.00 (18.6)
without lugs
7.73 (196.3)
12.72 (323.1)
7.08 (179.9)
48.00 (21.8)
with lugs
41.00 (18.6)
without lugs
11.04 (280.4)
16.57 (420.9)
7.69 (195.3)
103.00 (46.0)with lugs
91.00 (41.4)without lugs
General Information
Bypass mechanical lifespan
Insulating voltage (Ui)
Ramp time range
Resistance to vibration
Resistance to shock
10M
660V
0.5180 seconds (0.5360 seconds extended ramp)
3g
15g
Electrical Information
Operating voltage
Operating frequency
Overload setting
Trip class
200600V
4763 Hz
30%100%
5, 10, 20 and 30
Cabling Capacity (IEC 947)
Number of conductors
Wire sizes
Type of connectors
1
142
Box lug
1
144/0
Box lug
1 or 2
2/0 to 500 kcmil
Add-on lug kit
2, 4 or 6
2/0 to 500 kcmil
Add-on lug kit
Control Wiring (12-Pin)
Wire sizes in AWG
Number of conductors (stranded)
Torque requirements in lb-in.
Solid, stranded or exible
maximum size in mm
2
2214
2 (or one AWG 12)
3.5
3.31
Control Power Requirements
Voltage range (24 V 10%)
Steady state current amperes
Inrush current amperes
Ripple
21.626.4
1.0
10
1%
21.626.4
1.4
10
1%
Relays (1) Class A and C
Voltage ACmaximum
Voltage DCmaximum
Amperesmaximum
240
120
3
Environment
Temperatureoperating
Temperaturestorage
Altitude
Humidity
Operating position
Pollution degree (IEC 947-1)
Impulse withstand voltage
(IEC 947-4-1)
30C to 50C (no derating) consult factory for operation >50C
50C to 70C
<2000mconsult factory for operation >2000m
<95% noncondensing
Any
3
4000V
30.5-10
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Solid-State Starters
050
Voltage Soft Starters
S811 Soft Starter
General Description
The S811 from Eaton offers all the
popular features of the S801, but adds
enhanced functionality with the new
DIM (Digital Interface Module) and
communications capabilities.
The S811 reduced voltage soft starter
is very compact, multi-functional,
easy to install and easy to program.
Designed to control the acceleration
and deceleration of three-phase
motors up to 690V, the line is available
from 11A through 1000A.
The S811 is designed to be a complete
package combining the SCRs, bypass
contactor and overload in one, very
compact unit. The S811 is available
as a component for panel mounting,
in motor control centers or in enclosed
control (NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 7/9
and 12).
motors, the S811 soft starter uses
silicon controlled rectiers (SCRs) to
control the voltage to soft start and
soft stop the motor. After the motor is
started, internal run bypass contactors
close, resulting in the motor running
directly across-the-line. The built-in
solid-state overload protects the motor
from overload conditions with sophis-
ticated algorithms that model true
motor heating, resulting in better
motor protection and fewer nuisance
trips. Advanced protective and
diagnostic features reduce downtime.
A voltage ramp start or current limit
start is available. Kick start is available
in either starting mode. The soft stop
option allows for a ramp stop time that
is longer than the coast to stop time.
The pump control option provides a
smooth transition for starting and
stopping a motor and eliminating
the water-hammer effect that can
damage pipes, valves and pumps.
The S811 offers an impressive array of
advanced protective features. Not only
are the protective features selectable,
but many offer variable settings allow-
ing the user to ne-tune the starter to
meet specic system requirements.
The S811 has an easy to use Digital
Interface Module (DIM) that allows the
user to congure the device and to
read system parameters. The DIM
includes an LCD display and keypad to
scroll through the various menus. The
DIM allows the user to modify control
parameters, enable or disable protec-
tions, set communication variables,
monitor system parameters such as
line voltages and currents, and access
the fault queue.
Figure 30.5-2. Digital Interface Module (DIM)
The DIM can be removed from the
S811 and remote mounted. Kits are
available to door mount the DIM,
enabling users to safely congure,
commission, monitor and trouble-
shoot the system at the electrical panel
without opening the enclosure door.
The S811 has built-in communications
capabilities that enable the soft starter
to be connected to a variety of
networks, including DeviceNet,
Ethernet, Modbus and PROFIBUS.
Multiple control components can be
connected to one Eaton gateway that
concentrates data from the devices
into a single node. Conguration is
simplea single press of the gateways
Auto Conguration button sets the
system up for default operation.
This automatically congures the I/O
assemblies to the system devices.
The data from these devices are then
assembled into a single input and
output messages.
The S811 communication parameters
can be congured with the DIM or
through the network using CH Studio
Component Manager. Advanced
communication conguration settings
provide the system integrator with
powerful tools to facilitate system
optimization.
Features and Benets
The DIM provides an intuitive,
easy-to-use human interface with
powerful conguration capabilities
to maximize system performance
Door or device mounted DIM
enables users to safely congure,
shoot the system at the electrical
panel without opening the
enclosure door
System operating parameters
can be monitored enterprise-wide
through a communications network.
Increase uptime by providing data
for process management and
preventive diagnostics
Run bypass mode greatly reduces
internal heating created by the
greater power dissipation in
the SCRs. Bypass contactor directly
connects the motor to the line and
improves system efciency by
reducing internal power losses
Internal solid-state overload
protection provides accurate current
measurement and trip settings.
Sophisticated algorithms solve
a series of differential equations
that model true motor heating and
cooling, resulting in superior motor
overload protection while minimizing
nuisance trips. Advanced selectable
protective features safeguard the
motor and system against a variety
of system faults
Internal run bypass contactors and
overload protection eliminate the
need for additional devices, reducing
enclosure sizes, minimizing installa-
tion and wiring time and reducing
overall assembly size and cost
Wide range of overload FLA settings
(31100% of rated current) and a
selectable trip class (530) offers
users the exibility to ne-tune the
starter to match specic application
requirements
ESC
ONLN SS OXFDO1 H STOP
Monitoring
PREV NEXT ENTER
30.5-11
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
051
Variable ramp times and torque
control settings provide unlimited
starting congurations, allowing for
maximum application exibility
Kick-start feature enables soft
starting of high friction loads
Soft stop control for applications
where an abrupt stop of the load
is not acceptable
Pump control option with sophisti-
cated pump algorithms on both
starting and stopping that minimize
the pressure surges that cause
water hammer. The pump control
option will maximize the life of the
pump and piping systems while
minimizing the downtime caused
by system failure
Six SCRs control all three motor
phases, providing smooth accelera-
tion and deceleration performance
Soft acceleration and deceleration
reduces wear on belts, gears, chains,
clutches, shafts and bearings
Reduce the peak inrush current
stress on the power system
Minimize peak starting torque to
diminish mechanical system wear
and damage
24 Vdc control module enhances
personnel and equipment safety.
Removable, lockable control terminal
block reduces maintenance costs.
Also provides the opportunity for
OEMs to reduce assembly and
test costs by using pre-assembled
wire harnesses
Protective Features
All protective features can be
congured, enabled or disabled
with the DIM or through the
communications network.
Motor Overload
The S811 includes electronic overload
protection as standard. The overload
meets applicable requirements for a
motor overload protective device. The
overload protects the motor from over
heat conditions with the use of sophisti-
cated algorithms that model true motor
heating, resulting in superior motor
protection and fewer nuisance trips.
The S811 calculates a thermal memory
value. A 100% value represents the
maximum safe temperature of the
motor. When the thermal memory
value reaches 100%, an overload trip
will occur removing power to the
motor. Upon trip, the S811 stores the
calculated motor heating value and
will not allow a motor re-start until the
motor has sufciently cooled. This
feature ensures the motor will not be
damaged by repeated overload trip,
reset and re-start cycles.
The thermal memory value can be
monitored through the DIM or the
communications network. The thermal
memory value can be of great use in
determining an impending overload
trip condition. Alarms can be imple-
mented in the process monitoring
system warning of an impending
trip before a trip occurs halting the
process. Costly system downtime
can be avoided.
The trip current is adjusted to match
the specic application requirements
by entering the motor nameplate full
load current rating and trip class. The
FLA adjustment includes a 3 to 1
adjustment range. The overload trip
class is adjustable from class 5
through class 30. The overload is
ambient temperature compensated
meaning its trip characteristics will
not vary with changes in ambient
temperature. The overload protection
can be enabled, disabled, or disabled
on start.
Short Circuit
The use of a short-circuit protective
device in coordination with the S811
is required in branch motor circuits
by most electrical codes. Short-circuit
coordination ratings with both fuses
and Eatons molded case circuit
breakers are available providing
customers with design exibility. The
S811 has short circuit coordination
ratings as an open component, an
enclosed starter, and in a motor
control center.
Jam
Excessive current and torque up to
locked rotor levels can occur in a jam
condition. The condition can result in
stress and damage to the motor, load,
mechanical system, and the electrical
distribution system. Jam protection
prevents the stress and damage from
a jam during normal run. After the
motor is started, a current greater than
300% FLA setting will cause the starter
to trip on a jam fault.
Stall
locked rotor levels can occur in a stall
condition. The condition can lead to an
overload trip and result in stress and
damage to the motor, load, mechani-
cal system, and the electrical distribu-
tion system. Stall protection prevents
stress and damage to a motor that has
not come up to speed, or stalled after
the soft start time. The S811 will trip to
protect the system in the event that the
motor did not get to the rated speed in
the dened soft start period. A current
greater than 200% FLA at the end of
the soft start period will cause the
starter to trip on a stall fault.
Pole Over Temperature
High ambient temperatures, extended
ramp times and high duty cycle condi-
tions may cause the S811 power pole
conductors to reach a temperature that
exceeds their thermal rating. The S811
is equipped with sensors that monitor
the temperature of the power poles.
Over temperature protection occurs
if the devices thermal capacity is
exceeded. The soft starter will trip
in over temperature conditions,
preventing device failure.
The device pole temperature value
can be monitored through the DIM or
the communications network. This
feature can be of use in determining
an impending over temperature trip
condition. Alarms can be implemented
in the process monitoring system
warning of an impending trip before a
trip occurs, halting the process. Costly
system shutdown can be avoided.
Phase Loss
Loss of a phase can cause a signicant
increase in the current drawn in the
remaining two phases. Phase loss
can lead to motor damage before an
eventual overload trip occurs. Phase
loss is typically an indication of a
failure in the electrical distribution
system. The S811 will detect a phase
loss and trip if any phase current drops
below a preset value. The phase loss
trip level is adjustable from 0% to
100% of the average of the other two
phase levels with an adjustable trip
delay of 0.1 to 60 seconds.
Phase Imbalance
Phase current or voltage imbalance
can cause a signicant increase in the
current drawn in the remaining two
phases. Phase imbalance can lead to
motor damage before an eventual
overload trip. Phase imbalance is
typically an indication of a failure in
the electrical distribution system or
the motor. The S811 will detect both
current and voltage phase imbalances
and trip if any phase becomes
imbalanced as compared to the
average of the other two phases.
The phase current imbalance trip level
is adjustable from 0% to 100% of the
average of the current in the other two
phases with an adjustable trip delay of
0.1 to 60 seconds.
30.5-12
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
052
The phase voltage imbalance trip level
average of the voltage in the other two
0.1 to 60 seconds.
Reset Mode
The S811 can be set up for automatic
or manual reset on trip. The manual
reset mode requires the operator to
physically press the RESET button
located on the soft starter. The over-
load can be manually reset through
the DIM or through the communica-
tions network. The overload can also
be electrically reset by energizing
a 24 Vdc input on the control
terminal block.
The automatic reset mode allows the
soft starter to be automatically reset as
soon as the trip condition is no longer
present. With the automatic reset
mode, after the fault is no longer
present, the motor will be restarted as
soon as a valid start signal is present.
Phase Reversal
The S811 can determine if the proper
line phase sequence is present by
default. The device will trip if the line
phase sequence is something other
than A-B-C. The S811 can be cong-
ured to operate under reversed
phase conditions (A-C-B).
Shorted SCR Detection
The S811 monitors the operation of
the power poles and will trip under a
shorted SCR condition.
Open SCR Detection
the power poles and will trip under an
open SCR condition.
Low Current
Low current conditions can be a result
of a loss of load or a failure in the
mechanical system. The S811 has low
current protection that will trip if the
average rms current falls below a
preset value. The low current protec-
tion can be programmed as a percent
of motor FLA from 0% to 100%.
Low Voltage
Low voltage conditions can result from
disturbances in the electrical power
distribution system. Low voltage
conditions can cause a malfunction
and damage to electrical equipment.
The S811 has low voltage protection
that will trip if the average rms
voltage falls below a preset value.
The low voltage protection can be
programmed as a percent of nominal
voltage from 1% to 99% with a
trip delay of 0.1 to 60 seconds.
High Voltage
High voltage conditions can result from
distribution system. High voltage
conditions can cause malfunctions
or failures of electrical equipment.
The S811 has high voltage protection
that will trip if the average rms voltage
is greater than a preset value. The high
voltage protection can be programmed
as a percent of nominal voltage from
101% to 120% with a trip delay of 0.1 to
60 seconds.
The S811 has an impressive array of
system monitoring capabilities that
allow users to access real time process
and diagnostic data. This data can be
viewed at the device with the DIM or
Data over a communications network
can provide valuable insight into the
condition of the equipment and pro-
cesses. Maintenance and production
personnel can monitor critical opera-
tional and maintenance data from a
central control station that can be
located far away from the production
facility. Process data can be monitored
to determine system anomalies that
may indicate a need for preventive
maintenance or an impeding failure.
Adjustments made through the com-
munications network can reduce costs
by minimizing the time traveling to the
location where the motor controls are
located. When faults do occur, real
time fault data can assist maintenance
in troubleshooting and planning repair
resources. Remote reset signals can
be given to tripped devices without
the need for manual intervention by
maintenance personnel.
Average Line Current
Provides the average of the three-
phase rms line currents in amps,
accurate to within 2%. Current data
can be used to indicate a need for
maintenance. Increased currents in
a xed load application can indicate
a reduction in system efciencies
and performance, signifying system
maintenance is due.
Average Pole Current
Provides the average of the three-
phase rms pole currents in amps,
accurate to within 2%. The pole
current is the current through the
soft starter. The line and pole current
will be identical in in-line applications,
and will differ in inside-the-delta
applications.
Average line current as a % FLA
Provides the average rms line
current as a percentage of the S811
FLA setting.
Three-Phase Line Currents
Provides three rms phase line currents
in amps, accurate to within 2%.
Imbalances or changes in the relative
phase current to one another can
indicate anomalies in the motor or
Three-Phase Pole Currents
Provides three rms phase pole
currents in amps, accurate to within
2%. The pole current is the current
through the soft starter. The line and
pole current will be identical in in-line
applications, and will differ in inside-
the-delta applications.
Three-Phase Line Voltages
Provides the individual rms three-
phase line voltages. Imbalances or
changes in the relative phase voltage
to one another can indicate anomalies
in the motor or electrical distribution
system. Voltage can be used to
monitor electrical distribution system
performance. Warnings, alarms and
system actions to low or high voltage
conditions can be implemented.
Percent Thermal Memory
Provides the real time calculated
thermal memory value. The S811
calculates thermal memory value. A
100% value represents the maximum
safe temperature of the motor. When
the thermal memory value reaches
100%, an overload trip will occur,
removing power to the motor.
The thermal memory value can be of
great use in determining an impending
overload trip condition. Alarms can be
implemented in the process monitor-
ing system warning of an impending
trip before a trip occurs, halting the
process. Costly system downtime can
be avoided.
DC Control Voltage
Monitors level of the 24 Vdc control
voltage. Fluctuations in control voltage
can cause component malfunction and
failure. System control voltage data
can be used to implement warnings,
alarms and system actions to low or
high voltage conditions.
30.5-13
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
053
Pole Temperature
Increases in pole temperature are
caused by increases in ambient
temperature, start/stop times and
start duty cycles. Changes in pole
temperatures represent a change
in system operating conditions.
Identifying unexpected operating
conditions or changes can prompt
maintenance and aid in process
evaluation activities.
Device Temperature
An increase in device temperature is
a strong indication of an increase in
ambient temperature. High ambient
temperature operation can be identi-
ed with the device temperature data.
Ambient temperature increases can be
due to loss of enclosure cooling fans
or blocked venting. High ambient
temperatures will reduce the life of all
electrical equipment in the enclosure.
Start Count
Start count data can be used to
monitor system output, schedule
preventative maintenance, identify
system anomalies and identify
changes in system operation.
Diagnostics
Fault Queue
Current fault and a fault queue
containing the last nine system
faults can be read through the DIM
or communications network. Fault
identication can minimize trouble-
shooting time and cost. The fault
queue can be remotely accessed
through a communications network
to assist in planning maintenance
resources. Thirty different faults
can be identied by the S811.
Control Status
The S811 provides data that represents
system conditions that can be read
through the DIM or the communica-
tions network. This data identies the
status of the system and the control
commands the system is requesting
of the S811. This can be used for
advanced troubleshooting and
system integration activities.
Breaker Status
The S811 has provisions to read and
display circuit breaker status. Eaton
communicating cover control or
other communicating protective
device is required to take advantage
of this feature.
User Manual
A comprehensive user manual is avail-
able and can be downloaded free of
charge from www.eaton.com/electrical
by performing a document search for
MN03902002E.
Accessories
Surge Suppressors
A surge suppressor can mount on
either the line or load side of the
S811 soft starter. It is designed to
clip the line voltage (or load side
induced voltage).
Surge Suppressor
Surge Suppressor Mounted on
a 200 mm Device
Table 30.5-12. Surge Suppressors
Table 30.5-13. S811 Open Soft Starters Catalog Numbering System
Not available in U-Frame.

Description Catalog
Number
600V MOV for 65 mm
and 110 mm units
EMS38
600V MOV for 200 mm and
290 mm units
EMS39
690V MOV for 200 mm and
290 mm units
EMS41
S 811 T 30 N 3 S
Ampacity Rating
37 = 37A
66 = 66A
10 = 105A
13 = 135A
18 = 180A
24 = 240A
30 = 304A
36 = 360A
42 = 420A
50 = 500A
65 = 650A
72 = 720A
85 = 850A
10 = 1000A
Frame Size
N = 65 mm
R = 110 mm
T = 200 mm
U = 200 mm
V = 290 mm
811 = Non-combination Soft Starter
N = No options
P = Pump control
V = 690V option
(Frame T18 through V85)
S = Standard soft starter

(configurable for edge
or level control)
D = Inside-the-delta
L = Extended ramp start
W= Without DIM
S = Soft starter
3 = Three-pole device
30.5-14
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
054
Operation
Starting and Stopping Modes
The S811 has a variety of starting and
stopping methods to provide superior
performance in the most demanding
applications. The motor can be started
in either Voltage Ramp Start or Current
Limit Start mode. Kick Start and Soft
Stop are available within both starting
modes.
Voltage Ramp Start
Provides a voltage ramp to the motor
resulting in a constant torque increase.
The most commonly used form of soft
start, this start mode allows you to
set the initial torque value and the
duration of the ramp to full voltage
conditions. Bypass contactors close
after ramp time.
Adjustable initial torque 085%
of locked rotor torque
Adjustable ramp time 0.5180
seconds (can be extended with
factory modication)
Current Limit Start
Limits the maximum current available
to the motor during the start phase.
This mode of soft starting is used
when it becomes necessary to limit the
maximum starting current due to long
start times or to protect the motor.
This start mode allows you to set
the maximum starting current as a
percentage of locked rotor current
and the duration of the current limit.
Bypass contactors close after current
limit time.
Maximum current of 085% locked
rotor current
seconds (can be extended with
factory modication)
Kick Start
Selectable feature in both Voltage
Ramp Start and Current Limit Start
modes. Provides a current and torque
kick for 0 to 2.0 seconds. This
provides greater initial current to
develop additional torque to break-
away a high friction load.
085% of locked rotor torque
02.0 seconds duration
Soft Stop
Allows for a controlled stopping of a
load. Used when a stop-time that is
greater than the coast-to-stop time is
desired. Often used with high friction
loads where a sudden stop may cause
system or load damage.
Stop time = 060 seconds
Figure 30.5-3. Starting CharacteristicsRamp Start
Figure 30.5-4. Starting CharacteristicsCurrent Limit Start
Figure 30.5-5. Starting CharacteristicsKick Start
Figure 30.5-6. Starting CharacteristicsSoft Stop
Run (FLA)
100%
L
o
c
k
e
d

R
o
t
o
r

T
o
r
q
u
e
Time (Seconds)
Initial
Torque
Run
Max.
Allowed
100%
FLA
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
Time (Seconds)
100%
L
o
c
k
e
d

R
o
t
o
r

T
o
r
q
u
e
Ramp
Time (Seconds)
Kick
Start
Run (FLA)
Ramp
Time (Seconds)
Run
30.5-15
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
055
Product Selection
Motor applications and customer needs
come in many different varieties. With
the standard and severe duty rating
tables, we have attempted to provide
guidelines on what the S811 soft
starter is capable of. If the application
falls under these categories, you can
use these charts. For other applica-
tions, or when a question arises,
consult with your local Eaton
Representative or call our Technical
Resource Center at (877) ETN-CARE.
Table 30.5-15. Product SelectionStandard-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters
500A rating does not have IEC Certication.

Starting
Method
Ramp Current
% of FLA
Ramp Time
Seconds
Starts
per Hour
Ambient
Temperature
vs. Soft start
vs. Full voltage
vs. Wye-delta
vs. 80% RVAT
vs. 65% RVAT
vs. 50% RVAT
300%
500%
350%
480%
390%
300%
30 sec.
10 sec.
20 sec.
20 sec.
20 sec.
20 sec.
3
3
3
2
3
4
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
Frame
Size
Max.
Current
Number
kW Rating (50 Hertz) hp Rating (60 Hertz)
230 380400 440 200V 230V 460V 575V
N 37
66
10
18.5
18.5
30
18.5
37
10
20
10
15
10
20
10
20
25
50
20
40
30
60
30
50
S811N37N3S
S811N66N3S
R 105
135
30
40
55
63
59
80
30
40
25
30
40
50
30
40
75
100
60
75
100
125
75
100
S811R10N3S
S811R13N3S
T 180
240
304
51
75
90
90
110
160
110
147
185
60
75
100
50
60
75
60
75
100
60
75
100
150
200
250
125
150
200
150
200
300
150
200
250
S811T18N3S
S811T24N3S
S811T30N3S
U 360
420
500
110
120
150
185
220
257
220
257
300
125
150
150
100
125
150
150
175
200
125
150
150
300
350
400
250
300
350
350
450
500
300
350
450
S811U36N3S
S811U42N3S
S811U50N3S
V 360
420
500
650
720
850
1000
110
129
150
200
220
257
315
185
220
257
355
400
475
560
220
257
300
425
450
500
600
125
150
150
250
100
125
150
200
150
175
200
250
300
350
400
125
150
150
200
250
300
350
300
350
400
500
600
700
800
250
300
350
450
500
600
700
350
450
500
600
700
900
1000
300
350
450
500
600
700
800
S811V36N3S
S811V42N3S
S811V50N3S
S811V65N3S
S811V72N3S
S811V85N3S
S811V10N3S
Starting
Method
Ramp Current
% of FLA
Ramp Time
Seconds
Starts
per Hour
Ambient
Temperature
vs. Soft start
vs. Full voltage
vs. Wye-delta
vs. 80% RVAT
vs. 65% RVAT
vs. 50% RVAT
450%
500%
350%
480%
390%
300%
30 sec.
10 sec.
65 sec.
25 sec.
40 sec.
60 sec.
4
10
3
4
4
4
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
50C
30.5-16
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
056
Table 30.5-17. Product SelectionSevere-Duty Rating Open Soft Starters
Frame
Size
Maximum
Current
Number
kW Rating (50 Hertz) hp Rating (60 Hertz)
230 380400 440 200V 230V 460V 575V
N 22
42
5.5
11
10
18.5
11
22
5
10
5
10
7-1/2
15
5
10
15
30
10
25
20
40
15
30
S811N37N3S
S811N66N3S
R 65
80
15
22
30
40
33
45
15
25
15
20
20
30
15
25
50
60
40
50
50
75
50
60
S811R10N3S
S811R13N3S
T 115
150
192
33
45
55
59
80
100
63
90
110
30
50
60
30
40
50
40
50
75
30
50
60
75
100
150
75
100
125
100
150
200
100
125
150
S811T18N3S
S811T24N3S
S811T30N3S
U 240
305
75
90
110
160
147
185
75
100
60
75
75
100
75
100
200
250
150
200
200
300
200
250
S811U36N3S
S811U42N3S
V 240
305
365
420
480
525
600
75
90
110
129
147
160
185
110
160
185
220
257
280
315
147
185
220
257
295
335
375
75
100
125
150
150
150
200
60
75
100
125
150
150
150
75
100
150
150
200
200
250
75
100
125
150
150
150
200
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
150
200
250
300
350
350
450
200
300
350
450
500
500
600
200
250
300
350
450
450
500
S811V36N3S
S811V42N3S
S811V50N3S
S811V65N3S
S811V72N3S
S811V85N3S
S811V10N3S
30.5-17
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
057
Table 30.5-18. SpecicationsS811 Soft Starter
UR Recognized Product.
Soft Starter
S811
N37
S811
N66
S811
R10
S811
R13
S811
T18
S811
T24
S811
T30
S811
U36
S811
U42
S811
U50
S811
V36
S811
V42
S811
V50
S811
V65
S811
V72
S811
V85
S811
V10
Maximum current capacity 37 66 105 135 180 240 304 360 420 500 360 420 500 650 720 850 1000
FLA range 11
37
20
66
32
105
42
135
56
180
75
240
95
304
112
360
131
420
156
500
112
360
131
420
156
500
203
650
225
720
265
580
320
1000
Dimensions
Width in inches (mm) 2.66 (67.6) 4.42 (112.2) 7.67 (194.8) 7.73 (196.3) 11.05 (280.6)
Height in inches (mm) 7.38 (187.4) 7.92 (201.2) 12.71 (322.9) 12.72 (323.1) 16.57 (420.8)
Depth in inches (mm) 6.48 (164.5) 6.64 (168.7) 6.39 (162.4) 7.08 (179.9) 7.35 (186.6)
Weight in lbs (kg) 5.80 (2.6) 10.50 (4.8) 48.00 (21.8) with lugs
41.00 (18.6) without lugs
48.00 (21.8) with lugs
103.00 (46.8) with lugs
General Information
Bypass mechanical
lifespan
10 million
Insulating voltage Ui 660V
Ramp time range 0.5180 seconds (0.5360 seconds extended ramp)
Resistance to vibration 3g
Resistance to shock 15g
Operating voltage 200600V
Operating frequency 4763 Hz
Overload setting 30100%
Trip class 5, 10, 20 and 30
Number of conductors One One One or two Two, four or six
Wire sizes 142 144/0 4 AWG to 500 kcmil 2/0 to 500 kcmil
Type of connectors Box lug Add-on lug kit
Control Wiring (12-Pin)
Wire sizes in AWG 2214
Number of conductors
(stranded)
Two
(or one AWG 12)
Torque requirements
in lb-in
3.5
Solid, stranded or exible
maximum size in mm
2
3.31
Voltage range (24V 10%) 21.626.4
Steady state current amps 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.4
Inrush current amps 10 10 10 10
Ripple 1%
Voltage ACmaximum 240
Voltage DCmaximum 120
Amperesmaximum 3
Environment
Temperatureoperating 30 to +50C (no derating) consult factory for operation > +50C
Temperaturestorage 50 to +70C
Altitude <2000mconsult factory for operation > 2000m
Humidity <95% noncondensing
Operating position Any
Pollution degree IEC 947-1 3
Impulse withstand voltage
IEC 947-4-1
6000V
30.5-18
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
S611 Solid-State Reduced Voltage Soft Starter
058
Voltage Soft Starter
S611 Solid-State Soft Starter
General Description
Eaton revolutionized the reduced
voltage control marketplace with its
advanced feature set and user-friendly
user interface module to enhance
system performance and to reduce
commissioning times. The S611 adds
enhanced functionality with network
communications, metering, monitor-
ing and diagnostics capabilities.
The Eaton line of S611 reduced voltage
soft starters is multi-functional, easy to
install and easy to program. Designed
to control the acceleration and deceler-
ation of three-phase motors up to 600V,
the line is available from 26 to 414A.
The S611 is designed to be a complete
package, combining the SCRs,
bypass contactor and overload in
one compact unit.
motors, the S611 soft starter uses
silicon controlled rectiers (SCRs)
to control the voltage to soft start and
soft stop the motor. After the motor is
started, internal run bypass contactors
close, resulting in the motor running
directly across-the-line. The built-in
solid-state overload protects the
motor from overload conditions with
sophisticated algorithms that model
true motor heating, resulting in better
motor protection and fewer nuisance
trips. Advanced protective and
diagnostic features reduce downtime.
A voltage ramp start or current limit
start is available. Kick start is available
in either starting mode. The soft stop
is longer than the coast to stop time.
The pump control option provides
a smooth transition for starting and
stopping a motor and for eliminating
the water-hammer effect that can
damage pipes, valves and pumps.
The S611 offers an impressive array of
advanced protective features. Not only
are the protective features selectable,
but many offer variable settings allow-
ing the user to ne-tune the starter to
meet specic system requirements.
The S611 has an easy-to-use user
interface module (UI) that allows the
user to congure the device and to read
system parameters. The UI includes
an LED display and a keypad to scroll
through the various parameters. The
UI allows the user to modify control
parameters, enable or disable protec-
tions, set communication variables,
monitor system parameters such as
line voltages and currents, and access
the fault queue.
Figure 30.5-7. User Interface
The UI can be removed from the
S611 and be remote mounted. Kits
are available to door mount the UI,
enabling users to safely congure,
shoot the system at the electrical panel
without opening the enclosure door.
This will help eliminate the possibility
of an arc ash incident.
Communications
The S611 has built-in communication
capabilities through two communica-
tions ports to connect the soft starter
to a variety of networks, including
Modbus (native), DeviceNet and
PROFIBUS.
The S611 communication parameters
can be congured with the UI.
Advanced communication congura-
tion settings provide the system
integrator with powerful tools to
facilitate system optimization.
30.5-19
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
059
Figure 30.5-8. Control Wiring Diagram
Table 30.5-19. Network Communications Reference
Features and Benets
The UI (user interface module)
provides an intuitive, easy-to-use
human interface with powerful
conguration capabilities to
maximize system performance
Door or device mounted UI enables
users to safely congure, commis-
sion, monitor and troubleshoot
the system at the electrical panel
without opening the enclosure
door, eliminating the possibility
of an arc ash incident
System operating parameters
can be monitored enterprise-wide
Increase uptime by providing data
for process management and
preventive diagnostics
Run Bypass mode greatly reduces
greater power dissipation in the
SCRs. Bypass contactor directly
connects the motor to the line and
improves system efciency by
reducing internal power losses
Internal solid-state overload
protection provides accurate
current measurement and trip
settings. Sophisticated algorithms
solve a series of differential
equations that model true motor
heating and cooling, resulting in
superior motor overload protection
while minimizing nuisance trips.
Advanced selectable protective
features safeguard the motor
and system against a variety of
system faults
Description Style
Number
Catalog
Number
Modbus communication adapter without I/O
Modbus communication adapter with 120 Vac I/O
Modbus communication adapter with 24 Vdc I/O
3-2372-001A
3-2372-003B
3-2372-004B
C441M
C441N
C441P
DeviceNet communication adapter with 120 Vac I/O
DeviceNet communication adapter with 24 Vdc I/O
PROFIBUS communication adapter with 120 Vac I/O
PROFIBUS communication adapter with 24 Vdc I/O
3-2372-001B
3-2372-002B
3-2398-001B
3-2398-002B
C441K
C441L
C441S
C441Q
Internal run bypass contactors
and overload protection eliminate
the need for additional devices,
reducing enclosure sizes, minimiz-
ing installation and wiring time,
and reducing overall assembly
size and cost
Wide range of overload FLA settings
(50100% of rated frame current)
and a selectable trip class (530)
offers users the exibility to ne-
tune the starter to match specic
application requirements
Variable ramp times and torque
control settings provide unlimited
starting congurations, allowing for
maximum application exibility
Kick-start feature enables soft
starting of high friction loads
Soft stop control for applications
is not acceptable
Pump control option with sophisti-
cated pump algorithms on both
starting and stopping that minimize
the pressure surges that cause
water hammer. The pump control
option will maximize the life of the
pump and piping systems while
minimizing the downtime caused
by system failure
Six SCRs control all three motor
phases, providing smooth accelera-
tion and deceleration performance
Soft acceleration and deceleration
reduces wear on belts, gears, chains,
clutches, shafts and bearings
Reduce the peak inrush currents
Minimize peak starting torque to
and damage
120 Vac control voltage enhances
ease of connections
Protective Features
All protective features can be
congured, enabled or disabled
with the UI or through the
30.5-20
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
060
Motor Overload
The S611 includes electronic overload
protection as standard. The overload
meets applicable requirements for a
motor overload protective device.
The overload protects the motor from
overheat conditions with the use of
sophisticated algorithms that model
true motor heating, resulting in
superior motor protection and fewer
nuisance trips.
The S611 calculates a thermal memory
value. A 100% value represents the
maximum safe temperature of the
motor. When the thermal memory
value reaches 100%, an overload trip
will occur removing power to the
motor. Upon trip, the S611 stores the
calculated motor heating value and
will not allow a motor re-start until
the motor has sufciently cooled. This
feature ensures the motor will not be
damaged by repeated overload trip,
reset and re-start cycles.
The thermal memory value can be
monitored through the UI or the
communications network. The thermal
memory value can be of great use in
determining an impending overload
trip condition. Alarms can be imple-
mented in the process monitoring
system warning of an impending
trip before a trip occurs halting the
process. Costly system downtime
can be avoided.
The trip current is adjusted to match
the specic application requirements
by entering the motor nameplate full
load current rating and trip class. The
FLA adjustment includes a 2 to 1
adjustment range. The overload trip
class is adjustable from class 5
through class 30. The overload is
ambient temperature compensated
meaning its trip characteristics will not
vary with changes in ambient temper-
ature. The overload protection can be
enabled, disabled, or disabled on start.
Short Circuit
The use of a short-circuit protective
device in coordination with the S611
is required in branch motor circuits
by most electrical codes. Short-circuit
coordination ratings with both fuses
and Eaton molded-case circuit breakers
are available providing customers with
design exibility. The S611 has short-
circuit coordination ratings as an open
component, an enclosed starter, and in
a motor control center.
Jam
locked rotor levels can occur in a jam
condition. The condition can result in
mechanical system and the electrical
distribution system. Jam protection
prevents the stress and damage from
a jam during normal run. After the
motor is started, a current greater than
300% FLA setting will cause the starter
to trip on a jam fault.
Stall
locked rotor levels can occur in a stall
condition. The condition can lead to
an overload trip and can result in
mechanical system and the electrical
distribution system. Stall protection
prevents stress and damage to a
motor that has not come up to speed,
or stalled after the soft start time. The
S611 will trip to protect the system in
the event that the motor did not get
to the rated speed in the dened soft
start period. A current greater than
200% FLA at the end of the soft start
period will cause the starter to trip on
a stall fault.
Pole Over Temperature
ramp times and high duty cycle condi-
tions may cause the S611 power pole
conductors to reach a temperature that
exceeds their thermal rating. The S611
is equipped with sensors that monitor
the temperature of the power poles.
Overtemperature protection occurs
if the devices thermal capacity is
exceeded. The soft starter will trip
in overtemperature conditions,
preventing device failure.
The device pole temperature value
can be monitored through the UI or
the communications network. This
feature can be of use in determining
an impending overtemperature trip
condition. Alarms can be implemented
in the process monitoring system
warning of an impending trip before a
trip occurs, halting the process. Costly
system shutdown can be avoided.
Phase Loss
Loss of a phase can cause a signicant
increase in the current drawn in the
remaining two phases. Phase loss
can lead to motor damage before an
eventual overload trip occurs. Phase
loss is typically an indication of a
failure in the electrical distribution
system. The S611 will detect a phase
loss and trip if any phase current drops
below a preset value. The phase loss
trip level is adjustable from 0% to
100% of the average of the other two
phase levels with an adjustable trip
delay of 0.160 seconds.
Phase Imbalance
Phase current or voltage imbalance
can cause a signicant increase in the
current drawn in the remaining two
phases. Phase imbalance can lead to
motor damage before an eventual
overload trip. Phase imbalance is
typically an indication of a failure in
the electrical distribution system or
the motor. The S611 will detect both
current and voltage phase imbalances
and trip if any phase becomes
imbalanced as compared to the
average of the other two phases.
The phase current imbalance trip level
average of the current in the other two
0.160 seconds.
The phase voltage imbalance trip level
average of the voltage in the other two
0.160 seconds.
Reset Mode
The S611 can be set up for automatic
or manual reset on trip. The manual
reset mode requires the operator to
physically press the RESET button
located on the soft starter. The
overload can be manually reset
through the UI or through the
The automatic reset mode allows the
soft starter to be automatically reset as
soon as the trip condition is no longer
present. With the automatic reset
mode, after the fault is no longer
present, the motor will be restarted as
soon as a valid start signal is present.
30.5-21
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
061
Phase Reversal
The S611 can determine if the proper
line phase sequence is present by
default. The device will trip if the line
phase sequence is something other
than A-B-C. The S611 can be cong-
ured to operate under reversed phase
conditions (A-C-B).
Shorted SCR Detection
the power poles and will trip under a
shorted SCR condition.
Open SCR Detection
the power poles and will trip under an
open SCR condition.
Low Current
Low current conditions can be a result
of a loss of load or a failure in the
mechanical system. The S611 has low
current protection that will trip if the
average rms current falls below a
preset value. The low current protec-
tion can be programmed as a percent
of motor FLA from 0% to 100%.
Low Voltage
Low voltage conditions can result from
distribution system. Low voltage
conditions can cause a malfunction
and damage to electrical equipment.
The S611 has low voltage protection
that will trip if the average rms
voltage falls below a preset value.
The low voltage protection can be
programmed as a percent of nominal
voltage from 1% to 99% with a trip
delay of 0.160 seconds.
High Voltage
High voltage conditions can result
from disturbances in the electrical
power distribution system. High
voltage conditions can cause
malfunctions or failures of electrical
equipment. The S611 has high voltage
protection that will trip if the average
rms voltage is greater than a preset
value. The high voltage protection
can be programmed as a percent of
nominal voltage from 101% to 120%
with a trip delay of 0.160 seconds.
The S611 has an impressive array of
system monitoring capabilities that
allow users to access real-time process
and diagnostic data. This data can be
viewed at the device with the UI or
Data over a communications network
can provide valuable insight into the
condition of the equipment and
processes. Maintenance and produc-
tion personnel can monitor critical
operational and maintenance data from
a central control station that can be
located far away from the production
facility. Process data can be monitored
to determine system anomalies that
may indicate a need for preventive
maintenance or an impeding failure.
Adjustments made through the
communications network can reduce
costs by minimizing the time traveling
to the location where the motor controls
are located. When faults do occur, real-
time fault data can assist maintenance
in troubleshooting and planning repair
resources. Remote reset signals can be
given to tripped devices without the
need for manual intervention by
maintenance personnel.
Average Line Current
Provides the average of the three
phase rms line currents in amperes,
accurate to within 2%. Current data
can be used to indicate a need for
maintenance. Increased currents in a
xed load application can indicate a
reduction in system efciencies and
performance, signifying system
maintenance is due.
Average Pole Current
Provides the average of the three-phase
rms pole currents in amperes, accurate
to within 2%. The pole current is the
current through the soft starter. The line
and pole current will be identical in
in-line applications, and will differ in
inside-the-delta applications.
Average Line Current as a % FLA
Provides the average rms line current as
a percentage of the S611 FLA setting.
Three-Phase Line Currents
Provides three rms phase line currents
in amperes, accurate to within 2%.
Imbalances or changes in the relative
phase current to one another can
indicate anomalies in the motor or
Three-Phase Pole Currents
Provides three rms phase pole currents
in amperes, accurate to within 2%. The
pole current is the current through the
soft starter. The line and pole current
will be identical in in-line applications.
Three-Phase Line Voltages
Provides the individual rms three-
phase line voltages. Imbalances or
changes in the relative phase voltage
to one another can indicate anomalies
in the motor or the electrical distribu-
tion system. Voltage can be used to
monitor electrical distribution
system performance.
Warnings, alarms and system actions
to low or high voltage conditions can
be implemented.
Percent Thermal Memory
Provides the real-time calculated
thermal memory value. The S611
calculates thermal memory value. A
100% value represents the maximum
safe temperature of the motor. When
the thermal memory value reaches
100%, an overload trip will occur,
removing power to the motor.
The thermal memory value can be of
great use in determining an impending
overload trip condition. Alarms can be
implemented in the process monitor-
ing system warning of an impending
trip before a trip occurs, halting the
process. Costly system downtime can
be avoided.
Pole Temperature
Increases in pole temperature are
caused by increases in ambient
temperature, start/stop times and
start duty cycles. Changes in pole
temperatures represent a change
in system operating conditions.
Identifying unexpected operating
conditions or changes can prompt
maintenance and aid in process
evaluation activities.
Power Monitoring
S611 does monitor the power and it
can be displayed on the UI.
30.5-22
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
062
Diagnostics
Fault Queue
Current fault and a fault queue
containing the last nine system
faults can be read through the UI
or the communications network. Fault
identication can minimize trouble-
shooting time and cost, and prevent
arc ash incidents. The fault queue
can be remotely accessed through
a communications network to assist
in planning maintenance resources.
30 different faults can be identied by
the S611.
Control Status
The S611 provides data that represents
system conditions that can be read
through the UI or the communications
network. This data identies the
status of the system and the control
commands the system is requesting
of the S611. This can be used for
advanced troubleshooting and
system integration activities.
Operation
Starting and Stopping Modes
The S611 has a variety of starting and
stopping methods to provide superior
performance in the most demanding
applications. The motor can be started
in either Voltage Ramp Start or Current
Limit Start mode. Kick Start and
Soft Stop are available within both
starting modes.
Voltage Ramp Start
Provides a voltage ramp to the motor
resulting in a constant torque increase.
The most commonly used form of soft
start, this start mode allows you to
set the initial torque value and the
duration of the ramp to full voltage
conditions. Bypass contactors close
after ramp time.
Adjustable initial torque 085% of
locked rotor torque
180 seconds (can be extended
with factory modication)
Current Limit Start
Limits the maximum current available
to the motor during the start phase.
This mode of soft starting is used
when it becomes necessary to limit the
maximum starting current due to long
start times or to protect the motor.
This start mode allows you to set
the maximum starting current as
a percentage of locked rotor current
and the duration of the current limit.
Bypass contactors close after current
limit time.
Maximum current of 085% locked
rotor current
180 seconds (can be extended
with factory modication)
Kick Start
Selectable feature in both Voltage
Ramp Start and Current Limit Start
modes. Provides a current and torque
kick for 02.0 seconds. This
provides greater initial current to
develop additional torque to break-
away a high friction load.
085% of locked rotor torque
02.0 seconds duration
Soft Stop
Allows for a controlled stopping of a
system or load damage.
Stop time = 060 seconds
Figure 30.5-9. Ramp Start
Figure 30.5-10. Current Limit Start
30.5-23
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
063
Figure 30.5-11. Kick Start Graphic
Figure 30.5-12. Stop Ramp Graphic
Edge and Level Sensing Control
Edge or level sensing is selected
with the Start Control parameter in
the Advanced Conguration Menu.
Factory default is level sensing.
Edge Sensing
Edge sensing requires 120 Vac power
be momentarily applied to the Start
terminal (with the Permissive terminal
120 Vac) to initiate a start under all
conditions. After a stop or fault occurs,
the 120 Vac must be removed, then
reapplied to pin 1 before another start
can occur. This control conguration
should be used when restarting of
the motor after a fault or stop must
be supervised manually or as a part
of a control scheme. The cycling of
120 Vac power to the Permissive
terminal before starting is required
regardless of the position of the auto
reset parameter.
Level Sensing
Level sensing will enable a motor to
restart after a fault is cleared without
cycling 120 Vac to the Permissive
terminal as long as:
Permissive terminal is supplied
with 120 Vac
The auto reset parameter is set
to enabled
All faults have cleared or have
been reset
This control conguration should be
used where it is desirable to restart a
motor after a fault without additional
manual or automatic control. An
example of this condition would be
on a remote pumping station where it
is desirable to automatically restart a
pump after a power outage without
operator intervention.
If the auto reset feature is used,
CAUTION must be exercised to
ensure that any restart occurs in
a safe manner.
30.5-24
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
064
Product Selection
Motor applications and customer
needs come in many different
varieties. The standard and severe-
duty rating tables provide guidelines
on what the soft starter is capable of.
If the application falls under these
categories, use these charts. For other
applications, or when a question
arises, consult a local Eaton
Representative or call the Eaton
Technical Resource Center.
Table 30.5-20. S611 Horsepower Ratings300% FLA at 15 Seconds at 50C
Options
Pump Control
For pump control option, change the 9th digit in the Catalog Number to P.
Table 30.5-21. S611 Horsepower RatingsPump Control Option
IEC 60947-4-2
UL listed
CSA certied (3211 06)
Maximum
Current
Amperes
60 Hz Catalog
Number
200V 230V 460V 575600V
1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV
52
65
77
15
20
20
10
15
20
15
20
25
15
20
20
40
50
60
30
40
50
50
60
75
40
50
60
S611A052N3S
S611A065N3S
S611A077N3S
99
125
156
30
40
50
25
30
40
30
40
60
30
40
50
75
100
125
60
75
100
100
125
150
75
100
125
S611B099N3S
S611B125N3S
S611C156N3S
180
242
302
60
75
100
50
60
75
60
75
100
60
75
100
150
200
250
125
150
200
150
250
350
150
200
250
S611C180N3S
S611D242N3S
S611E302N3S
361
414
125
150
100
125
150
N/A
125
150
300
350
250
250
350
450
300
350
S611E361N3S
S611F414N3S
Maximum
Current
Amperes
60 Hz Catalog
Number
200V 230V 460V 575600V
1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV 1.0 SF 1.15 SV
52
65
77
15
20
20
10
15
20
15
20
25
15
20
20
40
50
60
30
40
50
50
60
75
40
50
60
S611A052P3S
S611A065P3S
S611A077P3S
99
125
156
30
40
50
25
30
40
30
40
60
30
40
50
75
100
125
60
75
100
100
125
150
75
100
125
S611B099P3S
S611B125P3S
S611C156P3S
180
242
302
60
75
100
50
60
75
60
75
100
60
75
100
150
200
250
125
150
200
150
250
350
150
200
250
S611C180P3S
S611D242P3S
S611E302P3S
361
414
125
150
100
125
150
N/A
125
150
300
350
250
250
350
450
300
350
S611E361P3S
S611F414P3S
30.5-25
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
065
Table 30.5-22. SpecicationsS611 Solid-State Soft Starter
Soft Starter
S611A052 S611A065 S611A072 S611B099 S611B125 S611C156 S611C180 S611D242 S611E302 S611E361 S611F414
Maximum
current capacity
52 65 77 99 125 156 180 242 302 361 414
FLA range 2652 32.565 38.577 4899 62.5125 78156 90180 120242 151302 180.5361 207414
DimensionsInches (mm)
Width 11.58 (294.1) 11.58 (294.1) 11.58 (294.1) 11.58 (294.1) 17.56 (446.0) 17.56 (446.0)
Height 19.45 (494.0) 19.45 (494.0) 20.83 (529.1) 20.83 (529.1) 31.15 (791.2) 31.15 (791.2)
Depth 7.46 (189.5) 7.46 (189.5) 8.37 (212.6) 8.37 (212.6) 9.54 (242.3) 9.54 (242.3)
Weight in lbs (kg) 24 (11) 24 (11) 33 (15) 38 (15) 86 (39) 102 (46)
General Information
Bypass mechanical
lifespan
10 million
Insulating voltage 660V
Ramp time range 0.5180 seconds
Resistance to vibration 1g
Resistance to shock Meets ITSA standards
Operating voltage 130600V
Operating frequency 4763 Hz
Overload setting (frame) 50100% FLA
Trip class 5, 10, 20 and 30
Number of conductors One One One One One One One One Two Two Two
Wire sizes 142/0 142/0 142/0 142/0 2600
kcmil
2600
kcmil
2600
kcmil
2600
kcmil
2600
kcmil
2600
kcmil
2600
kcmil
Type of connectors Lug
Control Wiring
Wire sizes in AWG 2212
Number of conductors Two (or one 1214 AWG)
Torque requirements 3.5 lb-in
Maximum size 12 AWG
Voltage range
(24V 10%)
108132
Steady-state
current amperes
0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.75 0.75 0.75
Inrush current amperes 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 1
Ripple 1%
Voltage ACmaximum 120
Voltage DCmaximum 24
Amperesmaximum 3
Environment
Temperatureoperating 20 to +50C
Temperaturestorage 40 to +85C
Altitude <2000m, derate 0.5% per 100m >2000m
Humidity <95% noncondensing
Operating position Vertical, line side up
Pollution degree
IEC 947-1
3
Impulse withstand
voltage IEC 947-4-1
6000V
30.5-26
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
DS6 Soft Start Controllers
066
General Description
Eatons DS6 line of reduced voltage
solid-state soft start controllers is very
compact, multi-functional, easy to install
and easy to commission. Designed to
control the acceleration and deceleration
of three-phase motors, the device is
available for current ranges from
40 to 180A.
With its small size, it can easily t in
place of existing soft starters, wye-delta
starters, or across-the-line NEMA
and IEC starters. This feature allows
easy upgrades to existing systems.
The product is designed to be wired
in the three-phase line feeding the
three motor input leads as is done
for normal across-the-line starting.
The starter uses silicon controlled
rectiers (SCRs) to ramp the voltage
to the motor, providing smooth
acceleration and deceleration of the
load. After the motor is started, the
internal run bypass contactor closes,
resulting in the motor running directly
across-the-line. Internal run bypass
signicantly reduces the heat generated
as compared to non-bypass starters.
The soft stop option allows for a ramp
stop time that may be longer than
the coast-to-stop time. An external
over-load protection is needed.
Operation
Voltage Ramp Start
This start method provides a voltage
ramp to the motor, resulting in a
constant torque increase. This most
commonly used form of soft start
mode allows you to set the initial
voltage value and the duration of the
ramp to full voltage conditions.
Bypass contactor(s) close after ramp
time has elapsed.
Adjustable initial voltage 3092%
of full voltage
Adjustable ramp time 130 seconds
Soft Stop
Allows for a controlled stopping of
system or product damage. Setting the
soft stop time to a value of 0 turns off
this feature.
Soft stop time = 030 seconds

Figure 30.5-13. Start Ramp

Figure 30.5-14. Stop Ramp
Bypass
S
p
e
e
d
Time (Seconds)
Start Run
100%
S
p
e
e
d
Time (Seconds)
Run Soft Stop
100%
1 = Coast to Stop (Speed)
2 = Soft Stop Ramp (Voltage)
3 = Soft Stop Time
1
2
3
30.5-27
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
067
Features and Benets
Run Bypass mode greatly reduces
power dissipation across the SCRs.
The bypass contactor directly
connects the motor to the line
and improves system efciency
by reducing internal power losses
Less heat minimizes enclosure size
and cooling requirements, and
maximizes the life of all devices
in the enclosure
LED displays device status and
provides fault indication
Variable ramp times and voltage
control (torque control) settings
provide unlimited starting congu-
rations, allowing for maximum
Soft stop control suits applications
is not acceptable. Soft acceleration
and deceleration reduces wear on
belts, gears, chains, clutches, shafts
and bearings
Minimizes the peak inrush currents
Manages peak starting torque to
and damage
24 Vdc control module enhances
personnel and equipment safety
Protective Features
There are two auxiliary relays
First relay is a TOR relay that
closes when the TOR is achieved
(internal bypass relays close)
The second relay is a RUN relay
that closes when the RUN signal
is initiated and opens when RUN
signal is removed. It remains
closed during stop ramp time,
if set to a value greater than 0.
The RUN relay will also open
if a fault occurs
Mains connectionThe mains
connection is monitored for an
open condition and/or undervoltage
Motor connectionThe motor
connection is monitored for an
open condition
SCR faultsSCR performance is
monitored during the ramp cycle
for proper operation
Heat sink over/under temperature
High ambient temperatures,
extended ramp times and high duty
cycle conditions may cause the DS6
to exceed its thermal rating. When
temperature goes under 5C, unit
will trip as well. The DS6 is
equipped with sensors that monitor
the temperature of the device. The
soft starter will trip in over/under
temperature conditions, preventing
device failure
Bypass relayThe DS6 can detect if
the bypass relay fails to close after
the ramp start or opens while the
motor is running. The DS6 will
trip on a bypass dropout fault if
either of these conditions occur.
The device does not start when
bypass relay is closed and start
signal is applied
24 Vdc low voltageIf the control
voltage falls below 20 Vdc at any
time during operation, the unit
will fault
IEC 60947-4-2
EN 60947-4-2
UL listed (E251034)
CSA certied
CE

marked
C-Tick
Additional Information
Instruction Leaet IL03901001E
30.5-28
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
068
Product Selection
DS6 Soft Start Horsepower Ratings
Please refer to Application Note AP03900001E for additional information on proper size selection.
Table 30.5-23. DS6 Soft Start ControllersHorsepower Ratings
10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40C
Maximum values may be higher than allowed per NEC 430.52 and UL 508A 31.1.
XTOBXDIND panel mounting adapter must be used with this overload.
XTOBXTLL line and load lugs must be used with this overload.
ZEB-XCT300 current transformer must be used with this overload.

Table 30.5-24. 10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40C

Rated
Current
Amperes
Motor Power (hp) Maximum
Allowable
Breaker Size
Maximum
Allowable
Fuse Size
Recommended
XTOB Overload
Recommended
C440 Overload
Catalog
Number
200V 230V 460V
40
52
65
10
15
20
10
20
25
30
40
50
HFD3150L
HFD3200L
HJD3250
150A Class RK5
200A Class RK5
200A Class RK5
XTOB040DC1
XTOB057DC1
XTOB065DC1
C440A1A045SAX
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
DS6-34DSX041N0-N
DS6-34DSX055N0-N
DS6-34DSX068N0-N
77
96
124
25
30
40
30
30
50
60
75
100
HKD3300
HKD3350
HKD3400
300A Class RK5
350A Class RK5
500A Class RK5
XTOB100GC1S
XTOB100GC1S
XTOB125GC1S
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
C440A1A005SAX
DS6-34DSX081N0-N
DS6-34DSX099N0-N
DS6-34DSX134N0-N
156
180
50
60
60
75
125
150
HLD3450
HLD3500
500A Class RK5
500A Class RK5
XTOB160LC1
XTOB220LC1
C440A1A005SAX
C440A1A005SAX
DS6-34DSX161N0-N
DS6-34DSX196N0-N
Rated
Current
Amperes
Allowable
Breaker Size
Maximum
Allowable
Fuse Size
Recommended
XTOB Overload
Recommended
C440 Overload
Catalog
Number
200V 230V 460V
27
34
40
7.5
10
15
10
10
15
20
30
30
HFD3150L
HFD3200L
HJD3250
150A Class RK5
200A Class RK5
200A Class RK5
XTOB040DC1
XTOB040DC1
XTOB057DC1
C440A1A045SAX
C440A1A045SAX
C440A1A045SAX
DS6-34DSX041NO-N
DS6-34DSX055NO-N
DS6-34DSX068NO-N
52
65
80
15
20
30
20
25
30
40
50
75
HKD3300
HKD3350
HKD3350
300A Class RK5
350A Class RK5
500A Class RK5
XTOB057DC1
XTOB100GC1S
XTOB100GC1S
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
DS6-34DSX081NO-N
DS6-34DSX099NO-N
DS6-34DSX134NO-N
96
124
30
40
40
50
75
100
HLD3450
HLD3500
500A Class RK5
500A Class RK5
XTOB100GC1S
XTOB150GC1S
C440B1A100SAX
C440A1A005SAX
DS6-34DSX161NO-N
DS6-34DSX196NO-N
30.5-29
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
069
DS6 Soft Start kW Ratings
Table 30.5-25. DS6 Soft Start ControllerskW Ratings According to IEC 60947-4-2
10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40C

Table 30.5-26. 10 Second Ramp, 1 Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40C

Considerations
1. Either XTOB, C306 or C440 series
or equivalent overload protection
devices may be selected.
2. Contactor is optional for normal
applications. It is recommended
for mains isolation.
Power Supply
Eatons PSG and ELC power supplies
are recommended as a compact and
low-cost source for 24 Vdc power. The
light-weight, DIN rail mounted devices
have a wide input voltage range,
and robust screw terminals make
these power supplies easy to install
and use. These power supplies are
available in 1A and 2A models.
Table 30.5-27. Power Supply Selection
Rated
Current
Amperes
Motor Power (kW) Maximum
Allowable
Breaker Size
Maximum
Allowable
Fuse Size
Recommended
XTOB Overload
Recommended
C440 Overload
Catalog
Number
230V 400V
41
55
68
11
15
15
22
30
37
HFD3150L
HFD3200L
HJD3250
150A Class RK5
200A Class RK5
200A Class RK5
XTOB057DC1
XTOB057DC1
XTOB070GC1
C440A1A045SAX
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
DS6-34DSX041N0-N
DS6-34DSX055N0-N
DS6-34DSX068N0-N
81
99
134
22
30
30
45
55
75
HKD3300
HKD3350
HKD3400
300A Class RK5
350A Class RK5
500A Class RK5
XTOB100GC1S
XTOB100GC1S
XTOB150GC1S
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
C440A1A005SAX
DS6-34DSX081N0-N
DS6-34DSX099N0-N
DS6-34DSX134N0-N
160
196
45
55
90
110
HLD3450
HLD3500
500A Class RK5
500A Class RK5
XTOB160LC1
XTOB220LC1
C440A1A005SAX
C440A1A005SAX
DS6-34DSX161N0-N
DS6-34DSX196N0-N
Rated
Current
Amperes
Allowable
Breaker Size
Maximum
Allowable
Fuse Size
Recommended
XTOB Overload
Recommended
C440 Overload
Catalog
Number
230V 400V
28.8
37.5
46
7.5
11
11
11
18.5
22
HFD3150L
HFD3200L
HJD3250
150A Class RK5
200A Class RK5
200A Class RK5
XTOB040DC1
XTOB040DC1
XTOB057DC1
C440A1A045SAX
C440A1A045SAX
C440B1A100SAX
DS6-34DSX041NO-N
DS6-34DSX055NO-N
DS6-34DSX068NO-N
56
68
90
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
HKD3300
HKD3350
HKD3350
300A Class RK5
350A Class RK5
500A Class RK5
XTOB065DC1
XTOB100GC1S
XTOB100GC1S
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
C440B1A100SAX
DS6-34DSX081NO-N
DS6-34DSX099NO-N
DS6-34DSX134NO-N
106
134
30
37
55
75
HLD3450
HLD3500
500A Class RK5
500A Class RK5
XTOB160LC1
XTOB160LC1
C440A1A005SAX
C440A1A005SAX
DS6-34DSX161NO-N
DS6-34DSX196NO-N
Description Catalog
Number
85264V input and 24V output
ELC-PS01
PSS25F
100240 Vac input and 24 Vdc output
380480 Vac input and 24 Vdc output
PSG60E
PSG60F
30.5-30
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
070
Table 30.5-28. DS6 Soft Start Controllers
Description Unit DS6-34DSX041N0-N DS6-34DSX055N0-N DS6-34DSX068N0-N DS6-34DSX081N0-N
General
Standards IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2
Certications UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA
Ambient temperature
(operation)
C 0 to 40C, above 40C
derate linearly by 1% of
rated current per Celsius
to 60C
0 to 40C, above 40C
to 60C
0 to 40C, above 40C
to 60C
0 to 40C, above 40C
to 60C
Ambient temperature
(storage)
C 25 to +55C 25 to +55C 25 to +55C 25 to +55C
Altitude 01000m, above 1000m
rated current per 100m to
a maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m
a maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m
a maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m
a maximum of 2000m
Installation Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical
Protection degree IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Protection against contact Back of hand and nger-
proof (from front face)
Back of hand and nger-
Overvoltage category/
pollution degree
II/2 II/2 II/2 II/2
Shock resistance 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms
Vibration resistance
according to EN 60721-3-2
2M2 2M2 2M2 2M2
Dimensions in inches (mm)
(W x H x D)
3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47
(93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)
3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47
(93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)
3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47
(93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)
3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47
(93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)
Weight in lbs (kg) 4.00 (1.8) 4.00 (1.8) 4.00 (1.8) 4.00 (1.8)
Main Circuit
Rated operation voltage V 200460 Vac 200460 Vac 200460 Vac 200460 Vac
Mains frequency Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Rated impulse
withstand voltage
U
imp
1.2/
50 s
4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
Rated operation current I
e
40 52 65 77
Motor Power Ratings
200V hp 10 15 20 25
230V hp 10 20 25 30
460V hp 30 40 50 60
230V kW 11 15 15 22
400V kW 22 30 37 45
Overload cycle according
to EN 60947-4-2
40A: AC53a; 35; 7510 52A: AC53a; 35; 7510 65A: AC53a; 35; 7510 77A: AC53a; 35; 7510
30.5-31
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
071
Table 30.5-28. DS6 Soft Start Controllers (Continued)
Wire Specications
Power terminals (box terminals)
Single conductor
Terminal torque
AWG
lb-in
122/0
5380
122/0
5380
122/0
5380
122/0
5380
Control signals
Single conductor
Terminal torque
AWG
lb-in
16 min.
3.5
16 min.
3.5
16 min.
3.5
16 min.
3.5
Power Section
Rated impulse withstand voltage U
imp
1.2/
50 s
4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
Control Commands
Supply voltage control board
Nominal voltage
Nominal current ramp, TOR
Current peak (closing shorting contactors)
U
s
Vdc
mA
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
65
600 mA/50 ms
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
65
600 mA/50 ms
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
65
600 mA/50 ms
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
65
600 mA/50 ms
Voltage to the control terminals
(rated control voltage)
DC driven +24 Vdc +10%/15% +24 Vdc +10%/15% +24 Vdc +10%/15% +24 Vdc +10%/15%
Input current at 24 Vdc mA 14 14 14 14
Relay Outputs
Number of relays 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready)
Maximum voltage V 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc
Maximum current A 3A, resistive 3A, resistive 3A, resistive 3A, resistive
Soft Start Functions
Ramp times
Start ramp
Stop ramp
s
s
130
030
130
030
130
030
130
030
Initial voltage % line voltage 3092% 3092% 3092% 3092%
30.5-32
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
072
General
Standards IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2 IEC/EN 60947-4-2
Certications/marking UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA UL/CE/C-Tick/CSA
Ambient temperature
(operation)
C 0 to 40C, above 40C
to 60C
0 to 40C, above 40C
to 60C
0 to 40C, above 40C
to 60C
0 to 40C, above 40C
to 60C
Ambient temperature
(storage)
C 25 to +55C 25 to +55C 25 to +55C 25 to +55C
a maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m
a maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m
a maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m
a maximum of 2000m
Protection degree IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Protection against contact Back of hand and nger-
pollution degree
II/2 II/2 II/2 II/2
2M2 2M2 2M2 2M2
Dimensions in inches (mm)
(W x H x D)
3.66 x 6.89 x 5.47
(93.0 x 175.0 x 138.9)
4.25 x 8.46 x 7.01
(108.0 x 214.9 x 178.1)
4.25 x 8.46 x 7.01
(108.0 x 214.9 x 178.1)
4.25 x 8.46 x 7.01
(108.0 x 214.9 x 178.1)
Weight in lbs (kg) 4.00 (1.8) 8.16 (3.7) 8.16 (3.7) 8.16 (3.7)
Main Circuit
Rated operation voltage V 200460 Vac 200460 Vac 200460 Vac 200460 Vac
Rated impulse
withstand voltage
U
imp
1.2/
50 s
4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
Rated operation current I
e
96 124 156 180
Motor Power Ratings
200V hp 30 40 50 60
230V hp 30 50 60 75
460V hp 75 100 125 150
230V kW 30 30 45 55
400V kW 55 75 90 110
to EN 60947-4-2
96A: AC53a; 35; 7510 124A: AC53a; 35; 7510 156A: AC53a; 35; 7510 180A: AC53a; 35; 7510
30.5-33
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
073
Wire Specications
Power terminals (box terminals)
Single conductor
Terminal torque
AWG
lb-in
122/0
5380
12 AWG350 kcmil
44123
12 AWG350 kcmil
44123
12 AWG350 kcmil
44123
Control signals
Single conductor
Terminal torque
AWG
lb-in
16 min.
3.5
16 min.
3.5
16 min.
3.5
16 min.
3.5
Power Section
Rated impulse
withstand voltage
U
imp
1.2/
50 s
4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
Control Commands
Supply voltage control board
Nominal voltage
Nominal current ramp, TOR
Current peak (closing shorting contactors)
U
s
Vdc
mA
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
65
600 mA/50 ms
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
65
600 mA/50 ms
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
65
600 mA/50 ms
+24 Vdc +10%/15%
65
600 mA/50 ms
Voltage to the control terminals
(rated control voltage)
DC driven +24 Vdc +10%/15% +24 Vdc +10%/15% +24 Vdc +10%/15% +24 Vdc +10%/15%
Input current at 24 Vdc mA 14 14 14 14
Relay Outputs
Number of relays 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready) 2 (TOR, ready)
Maximum voltage V 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc 250 Vac, 60 Vdc
Maximum current A 3A, resistive 3A, resistive 3A, resistive 3A, resistive
Ramp times
Start ramp
Stop ramp
s
s
130
030
130
030
130
030
130
030
30.5-34
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
074
Figure 30.5-15. 2575 hp Models
Figure 30.5-16. 100150 hp Models
PEE
1.18
(30.0)
PE
1.18
(30.0)
0.88
(22.5)
0.88
(22.5)
3.66
(93.0)
5.08
(129.0)
6.34
(161.0)
1.38
(35.0)
5.47
(139.0)
6.89
(175.0)
1.38
(35.0)
1.38
(35.0)
0.59
(15.0)
0.59
(15.0)
(108.0)
2.07
(52.5)
7.01
(178.0)
8.47
(215.0)
PE
PE
6.22
(158.0)
7.87
(200.0)
30.5-35
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
075
General Description
Eatons DS7 line of reduced voltage
solid-state soft start controllers is very
compact, multi-functional, easy to
install and easy to commission.
motors, the device is available for
current ranges from 432A in four
frame sizes.
With its small size, it can easily t in
place of existing soft starters, wye-delta
starters, or across-the-line NEMA
and
IEC starters. This feature allows easy
upgrades to existing systems. The
product is designed to be wired in
the three-phase line feeding the three
motor input leads as is done for
normal across-the-line starting. The
starter uses silicon controlled rectiers
(SCRs) to ramp the voltage to the
motor, providing smooth acceleration
and deceleration of the load. After
the motor is started, the internal run
bypass relay closes, resulting in the
motor running directly across-the-line.
Internal run bypass signicantly reduces
the heat generated as compared to
non-bypass starters. The soft stop
may be longer than the coast-to-stop
time. An external overload protection
relay is needed.
Operation
Voltage Ramp Start
This start method provides a voltage
ramp to the motor, resulting in a
constant torque increase. This most
commonly used form of soft start
mode allows you to set the initial
voltage value and the duration of the
ramp to full voltage conditions.
of full voltage (120/230 Vac control
voltage)
of full voltage (24 Vac/Vdc control
voltage)
Adjustable ramp time 130 seconds
Bypass relays close at the end the
ramp time (TOR)
Soft Stop
Allows for a controlled stopping of
system or product damage. Setting the
soft stop time to a value of 0 turns off
this feature.
Soft stop time = 030 seconds

Figure 30.5-17. Start Ramp
Figure 30.5-18. Stop Ramp
Auxiliary Contacts
Auxiliary contacts are provided to
indicate soft start controller status.
Frame Size 1 (4A to 12A)One Relay
The auxiliary relay indicates when the
soft starter is at Top-of-Ramp (TOR).
Frame Size 2 (16A to 32A)Two Relays
One auxiliary relay indicates when the
soft starter is at Top-of-Ramp (TOR).
One auxiliary relay indicates that a RUN
command is present, including start
ramp, bypass and stop ramp times.
Bypass
S
p
e
e
d
Time (Seconds)
Start Run
100%
S
p
e
e
d
Time (Seconds)
Run Soft Stop
100%
1 = Coast to Stop (Speed)
2 = Soft Stop Ramp (Voltage)
3 = Soft Stop Time
1
2
3
30.5-36
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
076
Features and Benets
Run bypass mode greatly reduces
power dissipation across the SCRs.
The bypass relay directly connects
the motor to the line and improves
system efciency by reducing
internal power losses
Less heat minimizes enclosure size
and cooling requirements, and
maximizes the life of all devices
in the enclosure
LED displays device status and
provides fault indication
Variable ramp times and voltage
control (torque control) settings
provide unlimited starting congu-
rations, allowing for maximum
Soft stop control suits applications
is not acceptable. Soft acceleration
and deceleration reduces wear on
belts, gears, chains, clutches, shafts
and bearings
Minimizes the peak inrush currents
stress on the power system. Peak
starting torque can be managed to
and damage
24 Vac/Vdc control voltage enhances
personnel and equipment safety.
120/230 Vac control voltage is
also available
Auxiliary relays indicate status of
the soft start controllers
The TOR relay is active until
motor stop command is received
and/or the soft start controller
detects a fault condition
RUN relay is active during
the start ramp, bypass and
stop ramp
Protective Features
Mains connectionThe mains
connection is monitored for a phase
loss and/or undervoltage during
ramp up
Motor connectionThe motor
connection is monitored for an open
condition during the ramp
SCR faultsSCR performance is
monitored during the ramp cycle
for proper operation
Heat sink over/under temperature
ramp times and high duty cycle
conditions may cause the DS7 to
exceed its thermal rating. When
temperature goes under 5C, unit
will trip as well. The DS7 is equipped
with sensors that monitor the
temperature of the device. The
soft starter will trip in over/under
temperature conditions, preventing
device failure
Warning is indicated for an over-
temperature condition for the
next start
Bypass relay
The DS7 can detect if the bypass
relay fails to close after the ramp
start or opens while the motor is
running
The DS7 will also detect a condi-
tion whereas the bypass relay is
closed when the RUN command
is given
The DS7 will trip on a bypass
dropout fault if either of these
conditions occur
IEC 60947-4-2
EN 60947-4-2
UL listed
CSA certied
CE marked
C-Tick
Additional Information
Instruction Leaet IL03901001E
30.5-37
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
077
Product Selection
DS7 Soft Start Horsepower Ratings
Table 30.5-29. DS7 Soft Start ControllersHorsepower Ratings10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40C
Actual motor FLAs vary. Verify these devices cover the motor specic FLA.
Selections are based on motor FLA value at 480V.
Not to be used with 230V.
24 Vac/Vdc device.
120/230 Vac device.

Table 30.5-30. DS7 Soft Start ControllersHorsepower Ratings10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40C
24 Vac/Vdc device.
120/230 Vac device.

Rated
Current
Amperes
Allowable
Breaker Size
Maximum
Allowable
Fuse Size
Recommended
XTOB Overload
(Direct Connect)
Recommended
XTOE Overload
MMP
Connection
Kit to MMP
Catalog
Number
200V 230V 480V
3.7 0.75 0.75 2 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N
DS7-342SX004NO-N
6.9 1.5 2 3 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1
XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N
DS7-342SX007NO-N
7.8 2 2 5 HFD3020 20A Class RK5 XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N
DS7-342SX009NO-N
11 3 3 7.5 HFD3030 20A Class RK5 XTOB012BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR012BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N
DS7-342SX012NO-N
15.2 3 5 10 HFD3035 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE020CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N
DS7-342SX016NO-N
22 5 7.5 15 HFD3060 40A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N
DS7-342SX024NO-N
32 7.5 10 20 HFD3070 50A Class RK5 XTOB032CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR032BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N
DS7-342SX032NO-N
Rated
Current
Amperes
Allowable
Breaker Size
Maximum
Allowable
Fuse Size
Recommended
XTOB Overload
(Direct Connect)
Recommended
XTOE Overload
MMP
Connection
Kit to MMP
Catalog
Number
200V 230V 480V
3 0.5 0.5 1.5 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N
DS7-342SX004NO-N
4.8 1 1 3 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1
DS7-342SX007NO-N
6.9 1.5 2 3 HFD3020 20A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N
DS7-342SX009NO-N
9 2 2 5 HFD3030 20A Class RK5 XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N
DS7-342SX012NO-N
11 3 3 7.5 HFD3035 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE020CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N
DS7-342SX016NO-N
17.5 5 5 10 HFD3060 40A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N
DS7-342SX024NO-N
22 5 7.5 15 HFD3070 50A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N
DS7-342SX032NO-N
30.5-38
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
078
DS7 Soft Start kW Ratings
10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40C
24 Vac/Vdc device.
120/230 Vac device.

10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40C
24 Vac/Vdc device.
120/230 Vac device.

Considerations
1. Either XTOB or XTOE or equivalent
overload protection devices may
be selected. In addition, manual
motor protectorsMMP series
can also be considered.
2. Isolation contactor is required for
mains isolation.
24 Vdc Control Power
Eatons ELC power supplies are
recommended as a compact and
low-cost source for 24 Vdc power. The
light-weight, DIN rail mounted devices
have a wide input voltage range and
robust screw terminals make these
power supplies easy to install and use.
These power supplies are available in
1A and 2A models.
AC Control Power
24, 120 or 230 Vac may be used for
control power in accordance with the
model requirements.
Table 30.5-33. DC Power Supply Selection
Rated
Current
Amperes
Allowable
Breaker Size
Maximum
Allowable
Fuse Size
Recommended
XTOB Overload
(Direct Connect)
Recommended
XTOE Overload
MMP
Connection
Kit to MMP
Catalog
Number
230V 400V
3.8 0.75 1.5 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N
DS7-342SX004NO-N
7 1.5 3 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1
DS7-342SX007NO-N
9 2.2 4 HFD3020 20A Class RK5 XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N
DS7-342SX009NO-N
12 3 5.5 HFD3030 20A Class RK5 XTOB012BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR012BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N
DS7-342SX012NO-N
16 4 7.5 HFD3035 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE020CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N
DS7-342SX016NO-N
24 5.5 11 HFD3060 40A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N
DS7-342SX024NO-N
DS7-342SX032NO-N
Rated
Current
Amperes
Allowable
Breaker Size
Maximum
Allowable
Fuse Size
Recommended
XTOB Overload
(Direct Connect)
Recommended
XTOE Overload
MMP
Connection
Kit to MMP
Catalog
Number
230V 400V
2.5 0.33 1 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX004NO-N
DS7-342SX004NO-N
3.8 0.75 1.5 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1
DS7-342SX007NO-N
7 1.5 3 HFD3020 20A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N
DS7-342SX009NO-N
9 2.2 4 HFD3030 20A Class RK5 XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N
DS7-342SX012NO-N
DS7-342SX016NO-N
DS7-342SX024NO-N
DS7-342SX032NO-N
Description Catalog
Number
ELC-PS01
PSS25F
30.5-39
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
079
Table 30.5-34. DS7 Soft Start Controllers
Rated Control Circuit
Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc
Voltage 110/230 Vac
Unit DS7-340SX004NO-N
DS7-342SX004NO-N
DS7-340SX007NO-N
DS7-342SX007NO-N
DS7-340SX009NO-N
DS7-342SX009NO-N
DS7-340SX012NO-N
DS7-342SX012NO-N
General
Standards IEC/EN 60947-4-2;
GB14048.6; UL508;
CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;
CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE
marking
IEC/EN 60947-4-2;
GB14048.6; UL508;
CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;
CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE
marking
IEC/EN 60947-4-2;
GB14048.6; UL508;
CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;
CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE
marking
IEC/EN 60947-4-2;
GB14048.6; UL508;
CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;
CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE
marking
Certications/marking UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick
Ambient temperature
(operation)
C 0 to 40C, above 40C derate
linearly by 1% of rated
current per Celcius to 60C
0 to 40C, above 40C derate
Ambient temperature
(storage)
C 25 to 55C 25 to 55C 25 to 55C 25 to 55C
derate linearly by 2.5% of
rated current per 100m to a
maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m
maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m
maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m
maximum of 2000m
Protection class IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Protection class applies
to the front and operator
control and display
elements. Protection type
from all sides is IP00.
With optional covers from
the NZM range, protection
type IP40 from all sides can
be achieved
be achieved
be achieved
be achieved
Busbar tag shroud Back of hand and nger-
pollution degree
II/2 II/2 II/2 II/2
2M2 2M2 2M2 2M2
Mean heat dissipation at
rated duty cycle
W 0.2 0.35 0.35 0.6
Radio interference B B B B
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 45 x 130 x 95 45 x 130 x 95 45 x 130 x 95 45 x 130 x 95
in 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74
Weight kg 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35
lb 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77
Main Circuit
Rated operational voltage V 230460 Vac 230460 Vac 230460 Vac 230460 Vac
Rated operation current
AC 53
I
e
4 7 9 12
Motor Power Ratings
200V hp 0.75 1.5 2 3
230V hp 0.75 2 2 5
480V hp 2 3 5 10
230V kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3
400V kW 1.5 3 4 5.5
to EN 60947-4-2
4A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 7A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 9A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 12A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10
30.5-40
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
080
Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc
Voltage 110/230 Vac
DS7-342SX004NO-N
DS7-340SX007NO-N
DS7-342SX007NO-N
DS7-340SX009NO-N
DS7-342SX009NO-N
DS7-340SX012NO-N
DS7-342SX012NO-N
Wire Specications
Power terminals
Single conductorsolid or stranded
Terminal torque
AWG
lb-in
1810
11
1810
11
1810
11
1810
11
Control signals
Terminal torque
AWG
lb-in
1810
11
1810
11
1810
11
1810
11
Power Section
imp

1.2/ 50 s
4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
Rated insulation voltage 500 500 500 500
Control CommandsVac/Vdc
Supply voltage control board U
s
nominal Vdc 20.426.4 20.426.4 20.426.4 20.426.4
Current consumption at 24 Vac/Vdc mA 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6
Pickup voltage +17.3 to +27 +17.3 to +27 +17.3 to +27 +17.3 to +27
Dropout voltage +3 to 0 +3 to 0 +3 to 0 +3 to 0
Relay Outputs
Number of relays 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR)
Maximum voltage Vac 250 250 250 250
Maximum current A 1A 1A 1A 1A
Ramp times
Start ramp
Stop ramp
s
s
130
030
130
030
130
030
130
030
Control CommandsVac
s
nominal Vac 102253 102253 102253 102253
Current consumption at 24 Vac/Vdc mA 4 4 4 4
Pickup voltage Vac 102230 102230 102230 102230
Dropout voltage Vac 028 028 028 028
Relay Outputs
Number of relays 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR) 1 (TOR)
Maximum voltage Vac 250 250 250 250
Maximum current A 3A 3A 3A 3A
Ramp times
Start ramp
Stop ramp
s
s
130
030
130
030
130
030
130
030
30.5-41
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
081
Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc
Voltage 110/230 Vac
DS7-342SX016NO-N
DS7-340SX024NO-N
DS7-342SX024NO-N
DS7-340SX032NO-N
DS7-342SX032NO-N
General
Standards IEC/EN 60947-4-2;
GB14048.6; UL508;
CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;
CSA-C22.2 No 14-05 CE marking
IEC/EN 60947-4-2;
GB14048.6; UL508;
CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;
IEC/EN 60947-4-2;
GB14048.6; UL508;
CSA-C22.2 No 0-M91;
Certications/marking UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick UL/CE/CSA/C-Tick
Ambient temperature
(operation)
C 0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly
by 1% of rated current per Celcius
to 60C
0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly
to 60C
0 to 40C, above 40C derate linearly
to 60C
Ambient temperature
(storage)
C 25 to 55C 25 to 55C 25 to 55C
Altitude 01000m, above 1000m derate
linearly by 2.5% of rated current
per 100m to a maximum of 2000m
01000m, above 1000m derate
01000m, above 1000m derate
Installation Vertical Vertical Vertical
Protection class IP20 IP20 IP20
Protection class applies to
the front and operator
control and display ele-
ments. Protection type
from all sides is IP00.
With optional covers from the NZM
range, protection type IP40 from all
sides can be achieved
Busbar tag shroud Back of hand and nger-proof
(from front face)
Back of hand and nger-proof
(from front face)
Back of hand and nger-proof
(from front face)
pollution degree
II/2 II/2 II/2
Shock resistance 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms 8g/11 ms
2M2 2M2 2M2
Mean heat dissipation at
rated duty cycle
W 0.8 1.1 1.5
Radio interference B B B
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 45 x 150 x 118 45 x 150 x 118 45 x 150 x 118
in 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74 1.77 x 5.12 x 3.74
Weight kg 0.4 0.4 0.4
lb 0.88 0.88 0.88
Main Circuit
Rated operational voltage V 230460 Vac 230460 Vac 230460 Vac
Mains frequency Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Rated operation current
AC 53
I
e
16 24 32
Motor Power Ratings
200V hp 3 5 10
230V hp 5 7.5 10
480V hp 10 15 25
230V kW 4 5.5 7.5
400V kW 7.5 11 15
to EN 60947-4-2
16A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 24A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10 32A: AC53a; 3-5; 75-10
30.5-42
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
082
Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc
Voltage 110/230 Vac
DS7-342SX016NO-N
DS7-340SX024NO-N
DS7-342SX024NO-N
DS7-340SX032NO-N
DS7-342SX032NO-N
Wire Specications
Power terminals
Terminal torque
AWG
lb-in
186
11
186
11
186
11
Control Signals
Terminal torque
AWG
lb-in
1810
11
1810
11
1810
11
Power Section
imp

1.2/ 50 s
4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
Rated insulation voltage 500 500 500
Control CommandsVac/Vdc
s
nominal Vdc 20.426.4 20.426.4 20.426.4
Current consumption at 24 Vac/Vdc mA 1.6 1.6 1.6
Pickup voltage +17.3 to +27 +17.3 to +27 +17.3 to +27
Dropout voltage +3 to 0 +3 to 0 +3 to 0
Relay Outputs
Number of relays 2 (TOR, Ready) 2 (TOR, Ready) 2 (TOR, Ready)
Maximum voltage Vac 250 250 250
Maximum current A 1A 1A 1A
Ramp times
Start ramp
Stop ramp
s
s
130
030
130
030
130
030
Initial voltage % line voltage 30100% 30100% 30100%
Control CommandsVac
s
nominal Vac 102253 102253 102253
Current consumption at 102253 Vac mA 4 4 4
Pickup voltage Vac 102230 102230 102230
Dropout voltage Vac 028 028 028
Relay Outputs
Number of relays 2 (TOR, Run) 2 (TOR, Run) 2 (TOR, Run)
Maximum voltage Vac 250 250 250
Maximum current A 3A 3A 3A
Ramp times
Start ramp
Stop ramp
s
s
130
030
130
030
130
030
Initial voltage % line voltage 3092% 3092% 3092%
30.5-43
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
083
Figure 30.5-19. Frame Size 1
Figure 30.5-20. Frame Size 2
5.12
(130.0)
3.74
(95.0)
M4
1.38
(35.0)
1.78
(45.0)
4.80
(122.0)
4.92
(125.0)
Catalog Numbers
DS7-340SX004N0-N DS7-342SX004N0-N
DS7-340SX007N0-N DS7-342SX007N0-N
DS7-340SX009N0-N DS7-342SX009N0-N
DS7-340SX012N0-N DS7-342SX012N0-N
5.91
(150.0)
4.65
(118.0)
M4
1.38
(35.0)
1.78
(45.0)
5.51
(140.0)
Catalog Numbers
DS7-340SX016N0-N DS7-342SX016N0-N
DS7-340SX024N0-N DS7-342SX024N0-N
DS7-340SX032N0-N DS7-342SX032N0-N
30.5-44
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
PSG Series DC Power Supplies
084
PSG Series
DC Power Supplies
PSG Series
General Description
Eatons PSG Series of power supplies
is designed to be a high-performance,
high-quality line of products covering
a majority of 24 Vdc control applica-
tions. With global certications,
compact size and an impressive
operating temperature range, the
PSG Series ts a wide variety of
applications at a competitive price.
Eight models are offered, from 2.5A
up to 20A with both single- and three-
phase input voltage models available.
The PSG Series is a line of general-
purpose power supplies for use in a
wide variety of industrial control
applications. Applications include
communication networks, sensors,
PLCs and many other electrical
systems.
Each model is equipped with a rugged
metal housing, heavy-duty screw
terminals and a variety of protection
features, making the PSG one of the
most versatile industrial power supply
lines on the market.
Universal input voltages: 85264 Vac
for single-phase units, 320575 Vac
for three-phase units
Rugged aluminum housing stands
up to harsh environments
Current surge (power boost) of 1.5
times nominal current for 1 second
allows branch protection and
powering of high pickup loads
Wide operating temperature range:
20C to +75C (derating above 50C)
Adjustable DC voltage output
LED indicating light for DC OK
simplies troubleshooting
Compact size, with common depth
and height across all models, allows
for common panel depths and
family consistency
MTBF up to 800,000 hours ensures
uptime and reliability
Heavy-duty screw terminals with
nger-safe protective cover allow
use of ring-lug terminals
All-metal DIN rail mounting
hardware
Class 1, Division 2 hazardous
location rated
UL/cUL listedUL 508 (industrial
control equipment)
cURusUL 60950-1
IEC
EN
German safety
CSA certied (contact Eaton for
certication dates and status)
CE marked
RoHS compliant
Product Selection
Table 30.5-35. Power SupplySingle-Phase
Table 30.5-36. Power SupplyThree-Phase
Description Catalog
Number
85264 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output
85264 Vac input, 24 Vdc/5A output
PSG60E
PSG120E
PSG240E
PSG480E
Description Catalog
Number
320575 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output
PSG60F
PSG120F
PSG240F
PSG480F
30.5-45
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
085
Table 30.5-37. PSG Series DC Power Supplies
Ratings for single-phase models are at 115 Vac; three-phase models are at 400 Vac.
85264 Vac (DC input range 120375 Vdc).
320575 Vac (DC input range 450800 Vdc).

Capacity PSG60E
60W
PSG120E
120W
PSG240E
240W
PSG480E
480W
PSG60F
60W
PSG120F
120W
PSG240F
240W
PSG480F
480W
Input
Nominal voltage 100240 Vac 100240 Vac 100240 Vac 100240 Vac 3 x 400500
Vac
3 x 400500
Vac
3 x 400500
Vac
3 x 400500
Vac
Voltage range

Frequency 4763 Hz
(0 Hz at DC
input)
4763 Hz
(0 Hz at DC
input)
4763 Hz
(0 Hz at DC
input)
4763 Hz
(0 Hz at DC
input)
4763 Hz
(0 Hz at DC
input)
4763 Hz
(0 Hz at DC
input)
4763 Hz
(0 Hz at DC
input)
4763 Hz
(0 Hz at DC
input)
Nominal current
1.1A 1.4A 2.9A 5.7A 0.3A 0.5A 0.8A 1.6A

Inrush current
limitation
30A <80A N/A N/A <30A <30A <40A <50A

Mains buffering at
nominal load (typ.)
>20 ms >35 ms >20 ms >20 ms >30 ms >35 ms >35 ms >20 ms

Turn-on time <2.5 sec <1 sec <1 sec <1 sec <2 sec <1 sec <1 sec <1 sec
Internal fuse T3.15 AH/250V T3.15 AH/250V T6.3AH/250V F10H/250V 3.15AH/500V 3.15AH/500V 3.15AH/500V 3.15AH/500V
External fusing 6A, 10A or 16A 6A, 10A or 16A 10A or 16A 10A or 16A 3 x circuit
breakers 6A,
10A or 16A
3 x circuit
breakers 6A,
10A or 16A
3 x circuit
breakers 6A,
10A or 16A
3 x circuit
breakers 6A,
10A or 16A
Leakage current <1 mA <1 mA <3.5 mA <1 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA
Output
Nominal output
voltage
24 Vdc 2% 24 Vdc 2% 24 Vdc 2% 24 Vdc 2% 24 Vdc 2% 24 Vdc 2% 24 Vdc 2% 24 Vdc 2%
Adjustment range 2228 Vdc 2228 Vdc 2228 Vdc 2228 Vdc 2228 Vdc 2228 Vdc 2228 Vdc 2228 Vdc
Nominal current 2.5A 5A 10A 20A 2.5A 5A 10A 20A
Startup with
capacitive loads
Max. 8000 F Max. 10,000 F Max. 10,000 F Max. 10,000 F Max. 10,000 F Max. 10,000 F Max. 10,000 F Max. 10,000 F
Max. power
dissipation idling
nominal load approx.
10W 22.5W 42.5W 72W 9W 18W 36W 72W
Efciency (at 400 Vac
and nominal values)
>85% typ >84% typ >84% typ >86% typ >86% at 3 x
400 Vac;
>85% at 3 x
500 Vac
>86% at 3 x
400 Vac;
>85% at 3 x
500 Vac
>86% at 3 x
400 Vac;
>85% at 3 x
500 Vac
>86% at 3 x
400 Vac;
>85% at 3 x
500 Vac
Current surge
(at 24 Vdc)
3.75A 7.5A 15A 30A 3.75A 7.5A 15A 30A
Current surge time/
cycle
1 sec. (at 10-
sec. intervals)
1 sec. (at 10-
sec. intervals)
1 sec. (at 10-
sec. intervals)
1 sec. (at 10-
sec. intervals)
1 sec. (at 10-
sec. intervals)
1 sec. (at 10-
sec. intervals)
1 sec. (at 10-
sec. intervals)
1 sec. (at 10-
sec. intervals)
Residual ripple/peak
switching (20 MHz)
<50 mV/
<240 mVpp
<50 mV/
<240 mVpp
<50 mV/
<240 mVpp
<50 mV/
<240 mVpp
<50 mV/
<240 mVpp
<50 mV/
<240 mVpp
<50 mV/
<240 mVpp
<50 mV/
<240 mVpp
Parallel operation With O-ring
Diode
With O-ring
Diode
With O-ring
Diode
With O-ring
Diode
With O-ring
Diode
With O-ring
Diode
With O-ring
Diode
With O-ring
Diode
Galvanic Isolation
Input/output 4 kVAC (type
test)/3 kVAC
(routine test)
4 kVAC (type
test)/3 kVAC
(routine test)
4 kVAC (type
test)/3 kVAC
(routine test)
4 kVAC (type
test)/3 kVAC
(routine test)
4 kVAC (type
test)/3 kVAC
(routine test)
4 kVAC (type
test)/3 kVAC
(routine test)
4 kVAC (type
test)/3 kVAC
(routine test)
4 kVAC (type
test)/3 kVAC
(routine test)
Input/ground 1.5 kVAC (type
test)/1.5 kVAC
(routine test)
1.5 kVAC (type
test)/1.5 kVAC
(routine test)
1.5 kVAC (type
test)/1.5 kVAC
(routine test)
1.5 kVAC (type
test)/1.5 kVAC
(routine test)
1.5 kVAC (type
test)/1.5 kVAC
(routine test)
1.5 kVAC (type
test)/1.5 kVAC
(routine test)
1.5 kVAC (type
test)/1.5 kVAC
(routine test)
1.5 kVAC (type
test)/1.5 kVAC
(routine test)
Output/ground 1.5 kVAC (type
test)/500 Vac
(routine test)
1.5 kVAC (type
test)/500 Vac
(routine test)
1.5 kVAC (type
test)/500 Vac
(routine test)
1.5 kVAC (type
test)/500 Vac
(routine test)
1.5 kVAC (type
test)/500 Vac
(routine test)
1.5 kVAC (type
test)/500 Vac
(routine test)
1.5 kVAC (type
test)/500 Vac
(routine test)
1.5 kVAC (type
test)/500 Vac
(routine test)
30.5-46
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
086
Table 30.5-37. PSG Series DC Power Supplies (Continued)
10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 50 m/s/s, single amplitude (5G max.) for 90 min. in each X, Y, Z direction, in acc. with IEC 68-2-6.
30G (300 m/s/s) in all directions according to IEC 68-2-27.

Power Derating Curves
Figure 30.5-21. Vertical Mounting Position
PSG60E
PSG60F, PSG120E, PSG120F, PSG480E,
PSG480F
PSG240E, PSG240F
Capacity PSG60E
60W
PSG120E
120W
PSG240E
240W
PSG480E
480W
PSG60F
60W
PSG120F
120W
PSG240F
240W
PSG480F
480W
General/Physical Data
Housing material Aluminum
(Al5052)
Aluminum
(Al5052)
Aluminum
(Al5052)
Aluminum
(Al5052)
Aluminum
(Al5052)
Aluminum
(Al5052)
Aluminum
(Al5052)
Aluminum
(Al5052)
Signals Green LED for
DC OK
Green LED for
DC OK
Green LED for
DC OK
Green LED for
DC OK
Green LED for
DC OK
Green LED for
DC OK
Green LED for
DC OK
Green LED for
DC OK
MTBF >800,000 hrs >800,000 hrs >300,000 hrs >300,000 hrs >500,000 hrs >500,000 hrs >300,000 hrs >300,000 hrs
Dimensions (L) 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm
Dimensions (W) 32 mm 50 mm 85 mm 160 mm 70 mm 70 mm 85 mm 160 mm
Dimensions (H) 120 mm 115 mm 118.5 mm 115 mm 118.5 mm 118.5 mm 120.5 mm 115 mm
Weight (kg) 0.37 0.54 1.04 1.8 0.56 0.72 0.77 1.71
Operating temperature 20C to
+75C (>50C
derating)
20C to
+75C (>50C
derating)
20C to
+75C (>50C
derating)
20C to
+75C (>50C
derating)
20C to
+75C (>50C
derating)
20C to
+75C (>50C
derating)
20C to
+75C (>50C
derating)
20C to
+75C (>50C
derating)
Storage temperature 25C to
+85C
25C to
+85C
25C to
+85C
25C to
+85C
25C to
+85C
25C to
+85C
25C to
+85C
25C to
+85C
Operating humidity <95% RH, non-
condensing
<95% RH, non-
condensing
<95% RH, non-
condensing
<95% RH, non-
condensing
<95% RH, non-
condensing
<95% RH, non-
condensing
<95% RH, non-
condensing
<95% RH, non-
condensing
Vibration (operating)

Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Climatic class 3K3 according
to EN 60721
3K3 according
to EN 60721
3K3 according
to EN 60721
3K3 according
to EN 60721
3K3 according
to EN 60721
3K3 according
to EN 60721
3K3 according
to EN 60721
3K3 according
to EN 60721
Safety and Protection
Transient surge voltage Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor
Surge voltage protection
against internal surge
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Safety class Class I
with ground
connection
Class I
with ground
connection
Class I
with ground
connection
Class I
with ground
connection
Class I
with ground
connection
Class I
with ground
connection
Class I
with ground
connection
Class I
with ground
connection
Shock

L
o
a
d

(
%
)
Ambient Temperature (C)
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
L
o
a
d

(
%
)
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
L
o
a
d

(
%
)
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
30.5-47
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
087
DimensionsApproximate Dimensions in mm
Note: Dimensions are for reference only.
Figure 30.5-24. PSG60E
Figure 30.5-25. PSG60F
32.0 0.5
5.0 0.2
Catalog Number:
PSG60E
24V 2.5A
Adjust
DC OK
100-240V~1.5A
50-60Hz
SPEC LABEL
CAUTION
HOT SURFACE
121.0 0.5
105.2 0.5
120.5 0.5
70.0 0.5
SPEC LABEL
121.0
0.5
111.4 0.5
96.5 0.5
6.6
0.1
115.0 0.6
13.0
4.0
5.5
121.0
0.2
DC 24V 5A
AC 100-240V 2A
50-60 Hz
Adjust
DC OK
50.0 0.2
30.5-48
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
088
DimensionsApproximate Dimensions in mm (Continued)
70.0 0.5
121.0
0.5
111.3 0.5
96.4 0.5
SPEC LABEL
Adjust
DC OK
6.6
0.1
5.0 0.2
SPEC LABEL
CAUTION
HOT SURFACE
Catalog Number:
PSG240E
Adjust
DC OK
24V 10A
100-240V~5A
50-60Hz
121.0 0.5
105.2 0.5
118.5 0.5
85.0 0.5
Catalog Number:
PSG240F
Adjust
DC OK
24V 10A
3-Phase 400-500V~0.8A 50-60Hz
5.0 0.2
SPEC LABEL
CAUTION
HOT SURFACE
121.0 0.5
105.2 0.5
120.5 0.5
85.0 0.5
30.5-49
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
089
DimensionsApproximate Dimensions in mm (Continued)
121.0 0.5
24V 20A
Catalog Number:
PSG480E
100-240V~ 7A 50-60Hz
160.0 0.5 7.1
6.6 0.1
111.4 0.5
96.6 0.5
N L Adjust
DC OK
121.0 0.5
160.0 0.5
96.6 0.5
111.4 0.5
Catalog Number:
PSG480F
24V 20A 3-Phase 400-500V~1.4A 50-60Hz
Adjust
DC OK
7.1
6.6 0.1
30.5-50
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
090
30.6-1
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Enclosures
General Information
091
General Information
Technical Reference
Enclosure Types
Enclosures provide mechanical and
electrical protection for operator and
equipment. Brief descriptions of the
various types of Eatons enclosures
offered by Eaton are given below. See
NEMA Standards Publication No. 250
for more comprehensive descriptions,
denitions and/or test criteria.
Type 1
Type 1 (Conforms to IP40)for Indoor Use
Suitable for most applications where
unusual service conditions do not
exist and where a measure of protec-
tion from accidental contact with
enclosed equipment is required.
Designed to meet tests for rod entry
and rust resistance. Enclosure is sheet
steel, treated to resist corrosion.
Depending on the size, knockouts are
provided on the top, bottom and
sometimes on the side.
Type 3R
Type 3R (Conforms to IP52)for
Outdoor Use
Primarily intended for applications
where falling rain, sleet or external ice
formations are present. Gasketed
cover. Designed to meet tests for rain,
rod entry, external icing and rust resis-
tance. Enclosure is sheet steel, treated
to resist corrosion. Depending on the
size, a blank cover plate is attached to
the top (for a conduit hub) and knock-
outs are provided on the bottom.
Cover-mounted pilot device holes are
provided and covered with hole plugs.
Type 4 (Conforms to IP65)for Indoor or
Outdoor Use
Provide measure of protection from
splashing water, hose-directed water
and wind blown dust or rain.
Constructed of sheet steel with
gasketed cover.
Designed to meet tests for hose-down,
external icing and corrosion protec-
tion. When conduit connections are
specied, enclosure has two water-
tight hubs (power) installed top and
bottom or one control hub installed in
bottomdepending on size.
Cover-mounted pilot device holes are
provided and covered with hole plugs.
Type 4X
Type 4X (Conforms to IP65)for Indoor or
Outdoor Use
Provide measure of protection from
splashing water, hose-directed water,
wind blown dust, rain and corrosion.
Constructed of stainless steel with
gasketed cover. Designed to meet
same tests as Type 4 except enclosure
must pass a 200-hour salt spray corro-
sion resistance test.
Provided as 304-grade stainless steel
as standard. Select 316-grade option
for improved corrosion resistance.
30.6-2
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Enclosures
General Information
092
Type 7 & 9 Bolted
Type 7/9for Hazardous Gas Locations
For use in Class I, Group B, C or D;
Class II, Groups E, F and Class III
indoor locations as dened in the
National Electrical Code. Type 7/9
enclosures must withstand the pres-
sure generated by explosion of
internally trapped gases and be able to
contain the explosion so that gases in
the surrounding atmosphere are not
ignited. Under normal operation, the
surface temperature of the enclosure
must be below the point where it could
ignite explosive gases present in the
surrounding atmosphere. Designed to
meet explosion, temperature and
hydrostatic design tests.
Type 12
Type 12(Conforms to IP62)
for Indoor Use
Provide a degree of protection from
dripping liquids (non-corrosive),
falling dirt and dust. Designed to meet
tests for drip, dust and rust resistance.
Constructed of sheet steel. Hole plugs
cover pilot device holes. There are no
knockouts, hub cover plates or hubs
installed.
Many Eaton Type 12 enclosures are
suitable for use in Class II, Division 2,
Group G and Class III, Divisions 1 and
2 locations as dened in the National
Electrical Code.
Type 12Safety Interlock
The Type 12 enclosure can be ordered
with a safety interlock on the door that
can be padlocked off. A vault-type
door latch system is used. A tapered
plate holds the gasketed door tight
against the case edge to provide a
positive seal. The special door inter-
lock consists of the door handle and a
screwdriver operated cover defeater.
The cover defeater and the disconnect
interlock defeater are both recessed
screwdriver operated devices which
cannot be manipulated with other
types of tools.
Table 30.6-1. IEC IP Index of Protection Ratings
Table 30.6-2. NEMA Standard to
IP Equivalence
1st
Number
Description 2nd
Number
Description
0 No protection 0 No protection
1 Protection against solid objects
greater than 50 mm
1 Protection against vertically falling
drops of water
greater than 12 mm
2 Protection against dripping water
when tilted up to 15 degrees
greater than 2.5 mm
3 Protection against spraying water
greater than 1 mm
4 Protection against splashing water
5 Total protection against dust
limited ingress (dust protected)
5 Protection against water jets
6 Total protection against dust
(dust-tight)
6 Protection against heavy seas
7 Protection against the effects of
immersion
8 Protection against submersion
Type IP
1 40
3R 52
4 65
4X 65
12 62
30.6-3
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Enclosures
093
Table 30.6-3. Enclosure Selection and Reference ChartBox Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: See Eatons Enclosed Control guide or Web site for further details on enclosures.
Table 30.6-4. Noncombination Solid-State Reduced Voltage
Box Dimensions
Enclosure space will also accommodate for a DC Power Supply, two

four-pole relays, a CPT and terminal blocks. Also includes space for a
DNA module or MOV.
Same as footnote
, but CPT is not included. Upsize to 7A enclosure to

include space for a CPT and a full voltage bypass contactor.
Table 30.6-5. Combination Solid-State Reduced Voltage Box Dimensions
Enclosure space will also accommodate for a DC Power Supply, two

four-pole relays, a CPT and terminal blocks. Also includes space for a
DNA module or MOV.
Enclosure may be reduced to an A1, with all space for all items as in
footnote
, excluding relays and CPTs.
Same as footnote
, but CPT is not included. Upsize to B1 enclosure to

include space for a CPT and a full voltage bypass contactor.
Note: For enclosure box dimensions, refer to table above.
Box Designation NEMA Enclosure Type Width Height Depth
1 1 5.62 (142.7) 9.51 (241.6) 4.81 (122.2)
2 1 7.73 (196.3) 12.60 (320.0) 5.84 (148.3)
3 1 12.65 (321.3) 13.85 (351.8) 6.40 (162.6)
4 1 11.66 (296.2) 25.99 (660.1) 8.03 (204.0)
5 12, 3R, 4X 9.84 (250.0) 13.31 (338.1) 6.70 (170.2)
6 12, 3R, 4X 12.01 (305.1) 14.39 (365.5) 6.70 (170.2)
6A 12, 3R, 4X 12.01 (305.1) 14.39 (365.5) 8.44 (214.4)
7 12, 3R, 4X 12.26 (311.4) 14.37 (365.0) 6.70 (170.2)
7A 12, 3R, 4X 16.26 (413.0) 14.37 (365.0) 10.90 (276.9)
8 12, 3R, 4X 14.25 (362.0) 12.10 (307.3) 8.47 (215.1)
9 1, 12, 3R 4X 25.50 (647.7) 29.10 (739.1) 8.41 (213.6)
10 1, 12, 3R 4X 20.00 (508.0) 47.85 (1215.4) 10.48 (266.2)
A 1 10.50 (266.7) 27.06 (687.3) 6.66 (169.2)
A 12, 3R, 4X 10.50 (266.7) 28.98 (736.1) 6.66 (169.2)
A1 1 10.50 (266.7) 27.06 (687.3) 8.49 (215.6)
A1 12, 3R, 4X 10.50 (266.7) 28.98 (736.1) 8.49 (215.6)
B 1 15.50 (393.7) 23.06 (585.7) 6.66 (169.2)
B 12, 3R, 4X 15.50 (393.7) 24.98 (634.5) 6.66 (169.2)
B1 1 15.50 (393.7) 23.06 (585.7) 10.90 (276.9)
B1 12, 3R, 4X 15.50 (393.7) 24.98 (634.5) 10.90 (276.9)
C 1 20.50 (520.7) 30.50 (774.7) 8.44 (214.4)
C 12, 3R, 4X 20.50 (520.7) 32.36 (822.0) 8.44 (214.4)
D 1 29.50 (749.3) 35.00 (889.0) 8.75 (222.3)
D 12, 3R, 4X 29.50 (749.3) 38.10 (967.7) 8.75 (222.3)
E 1, 12, 3R, 4X 28.00 (711.2) 61.75 (1568.5) 10.68 (271.3)
F1E 1, 12, 3R, 4X 37.00 (940.0) 74.75 (1898.7) 19.25 (489.0)
F2E 1, 12, 3R, 4X 42.00 (1066.8) 92.90 (2360.0) 19.25 (489.0)
P1 1 8.50 (215.9) 32.98 (837.7) 6.66 (169.2)
P3 1 18.86 (479.0) 38.40 (975.4) 8.47 (215.1)
P5 1 21.00 (533.4) 48.40 (1229.4) 8.97 (227.8)
P7 1 28.80 (731.5) 60.58 (1538.7) 19.28 (489.7)
I 1, 12 8.62 (219.0) 27.06 (687.3) 6.66 (169.2)
J 1, 12, 3R 8.00 (203.2) 16.50 (419.1) 17.23 (437.6)
K 1, 12, 3R 8.00 (203.2) 19.50 (495.3) 7.23 (183.6)
L 1, 12, 3R 15.87 (403.1) 16.50 (419.1) 7.23 (183.6)
M 1, 12 15.87 (403.1) 24.50 (622.3) 7.23 (183.6)
Ampere
Rating
SSRV Non-
combination
Ampere
Rating
SSRV Non-
combination
Box No.
Box No.
0.827
37
50
66
105
135
180
S752
S801/S811
S752
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
6A
7A
6A
7A
7A
B1
C
304
360
420
500
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
G1
G1
10
10
650
720
850
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
10
10
10
240 S801/S811 G1
1000 S801/S811 10
Ampere
Rating
SSRV Comb.
with
Fuses
Comb.
with
HMCP
Ampere
Rating
SSRV Comb.
with
Fuses
Comb.
with
HMCP
Box
No.
Box
No.
Box
No.
Box
No.
0.827
37
50
66
105
135
180
S752
S801/S811
S752
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
B1
B1
C
C
D
D
E
A1
A1
A1
A1
B1
C
E
304
360
420
500
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
E
E
E
E
650
720
850
S801/S811
S801/S811
S801/S811
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
F1E
240 S801/S811 F1E E
1000 S801/S811 F1E F1E
30.6-4
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
094
30.7-1
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Group Control
Group Control Multi-Pak
095
Multi-Pak Four Compartment Enclosure
Showing Variety of Possible Equipment
Module Combinations Available
Eatons Multi-Pak Group Control is
designed to save time, space, and
expense in installing motor control
deviceswhether for residential,
commercial, or industrial buildings.
The modular assembly allows versatile,
on-the-job arrangement of Sizes 1
through 4 combination starters with
ambient compensated relays, incoming
or feeder circuit breakers or fusible dis-
connect switches, pushbuttons, control
transformers, timers, relays, and fuses.
The enclosures and separate, pre-wired
modules are eld-stocked and can be
ordered individually, permitting eld
tailoring to suit the application.
Benets
Enclosures and pre-wired equipment
modules are individually available
from stock. Each shipping carton
contains complete mounting and
installation instructions
Cuts installation time by 25 percent.
The pre-wired modules can be
installed easily, using only a
screwdriver, at the job site
Saves space over individually
mounted control
Can be wall or rack mounted
Has exible panel space for
auxiliary control items. Barriers
can be removed to provide
oversized compartments
Eliminates square duct or cable
entrance box
Simplies wiring
Permits quick, easy additions
and rearrangements
UL listedE69852, Guide NITW
Enclosure Features
The Type 1 enclosures are partitioned
into either four or six compartments,
to hold combination starter modules,
incoming or feeder circuit breakers, fus-
ible switches, or other auxiliary devices.
The barriers can be removed to provide
oversized spaces. Each enclosure holds
up to four Size 1 or 2 full-voltage, non-
reversing combination starter modules;
up to two Size 3 or 4 starter modules,
or a combination of both size ranges.
The compartments have hinged doors,
interlocked to prevent opening when the
breaker switch is in the ON position. The
disconnect operating mechanism can be
padlocked in the OFF position.
The Multi-Pak enclosure adapts easily
to installation requirements. Multiple
units can be arranged to suit the space
availablehorizontally on a single line
or two-high. Knockouts are provided at
the top, bottom and sides of the enclo-
sures for conduit connection. Conduit
can be installed and cables pulled as
dictated by the construction schedule.
Combination starter modules and
incoming or feeder devices can be
installed days, months or years later.
In addition to the barrier compartments,
the enclosure contains two wiring
troughs. The top section is a wireway
tted with three power terminal straps,
each having terminals for extension
to adjoining enclosures and to all four
compartments. The incoming line and
extension terminals are suitable for
either copper or aluminum conductors,
from No. 6 to 350 kcmil. At the bottom
of the enclosure is another wiring
trough for interconnecting wiring
and outgoing cables.
Hinging of the front doors provides
for easy access to each module.
The doors are also gasketed with a
re-retardant material. Knockouts
are provided on the doors for the
mounting of pushbuttons and
indicating lights.
The enclosure and wireway cover plates
come in ASA-70 light gray enamel. An
identication card retainer is mounted
on each compartment door. A dust- and
weather-resistant enclosure to house
the Type 1 enclosure is also available.
Typical Six Compartment Multi-Pak
After Assembly
30.7-2
September 2011
Sheet 30
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Group Control
096
Combination Starter Modules
Eatons starter modules consist of
a Class A200 magnetic line-starter,
prewired with a motor circuit protector
or a fusible DS disconnect switch on a
panel. Full-voltage non-reversing and
reversing, combination starters are
available. An external reset button is
mounted on the starter module door.
With its versatile, modular design, the
Multi-Pak starter permits a variety of
motor control groupings. One module
can contain many different arrange-
ments of devices, such as combination
linestarter with control transformers,
and/or relays, or two feeder circuit
breakers, or fusible switches.
The contactor design comprises a glass
polyester case with silver-cadmium
oxide alloy contacts, straight-through
wiring, out-front terminals, molded
coils, stainless steel kickout springs,
U-type magnet, and a shock absorber
baseplate.
The circuit breakers, equipped with
adjustable magnetic trip elements,
protect against short circuits. Standard
three-pole, inverse-time, and ambient
compensated thermal overload relays
protect against overload.
Fusible switches are equipped to
accept either 250V or 600V Class H, K,
and R cartridges fuses, with capacities
as listed by Underwriters Laboratories
for overcurrent protection.
ON-OFF operating mechanisms are
molded from an ABS re-resistant
material.
Components of each module have
individual printed labels identifying
size, voltage, ampere rating and so on.
The labels also contain a schematic
drawing reference number covering
the wiring of the component contained
in the module.
Technical Data
Dimensions and Wiring Arrangements
Four compartment enclosures are
32.00 inches (812.8 mm) wide, 26.00
inches (660.4 mm) high, and 7.00 inches
(177.8 mm) deep with provisions for
four-bolt wall mounting. Six compart-
ment enclosures are an additional
16.00 (406.4) inches wide. Enclosures
may be grouped together by nippling
through knockouts provided.
Load and control conduits may enter
at the top or bottom. Starter wiring
diagram and overload heater installa-
tion instructions are attached to each
starter door.
Dust and weather-resistant enclosures
for four or six module units are available.
These enclosures are 34.00 inches
(863.6 mm) or 50.00 inches (1270.0 mm)
wide, 31.00 inches (787.4 mm) high,
and 11.75 inches (298.5 mm) deep.
Figure 30.7-1. Wiring Arrangements
Figure 30.7-2. Type 1 EnclosuresDimensions in Inches (mm)
Outgoing Conduits May Be All
at Top, All at Bottom or Mixed TT
Outgoing Conduits May Be All
at To TT
One Compartment Used
to Feed Supply to Bottom
Supply Feed Thru Nipples
Supply Feed Thru Nipples
e
at To TT
(Either End)
Incoming Line
at Top or Side TT
(Either End)
26
52
H-Units at 32 Inches (812.8 mm) Each
1, 2 or 3 Units at 32 Inches (812.8 mm) Each
6.38
(162.1)
6.13
(155.7)
8.50
(215.9)
7.00
(177.8)
(8) Knockouts on
2-3/4 Centers (Top 8 Bottom TT )
(8) 1/2, 3/4, 1 Inch Knockouts
32.00
(812.8)
28.00
(711.2)
5.50
(139.7)
18.63
(473.1)
0.25
(6.4)
0.63
(16.0)
22.00
(558.8)
20.00
(508.0)
2.00
(50.8)
3.00
(76.2)
1.25
(31.8)
(4) Mounting Holes for 5/16 Bolts
(8) 2, 2-1/2 Inch
Knockouts
3.38
(85.9)
Note: For Six
Compartment
Enclosure
Add 16 Inches
to Width.
2.00
(50.8)
3.00
(76.2)
3.38
(85.9)
3.00
(76.2)
2.00
(50.8)
3.00
(76.2)


September 2011

Contents

Adjustable Frequency DrivesLow Voltage
31.0-1

Sheet

31

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

001

A
d
j
u
s
t
a
b
l
e

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
D
r
i
v
e
s
L
o
w

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

Application Guide
Motor Application and Performance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0-2

AC Drive Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0-2

AC Drive Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0-3
Motor Load Types and Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-5

Motor Load Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0-6
Drive Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.0-7

Selections Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.0-7
M-Max

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.1-1
CPX9000

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.2-1
CFX9000

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31.3-1
SVX9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.4-1
H-Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-1

H-Max Drives

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-2

H-Max IntelliPass and IntelliDisconnect

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5-11
Specications

See Eatons


CSI Format: . . . . . 1995 2010

Sections 16483A, 16483B, Sections 26 29 23.11, 26 29 23.13,
16483C, 16483D 26 29 23.16, 26 29 23.19

31.0-2



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

31

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Application Guide

002

Motor Application and
Performance

AFD Output Harmonics

For the purpose of performance
evaluation, the non-sinusoidal output
waveforms produced by AFDs are
represented by their mathematically
equivalent component parts. All
such waveforms consist of an innite
number of sinusoidal components of
different amplitudes and frequencies.
The fundamental component is the
good part of the waveform, which
provides power to the motor at the
desired operating frequencies.
The harmonics are unwanted
components, which provide unusable
voltages and currents to the motor
at frequencies that are multiples of
the fundamental.
State-of-the-art designs for pulse
width modulated AFDs provide a sine
weighted modulation strategy with a
high switching frequency, and reduced
output harmonic content as compared
to other types of drives. A motor
operating on a PWM drive will have
an additional heat loss due to the
harmonic content as compared
to utility line operation.
PWM drives that are comprised of
IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistor)
power devices are also capable of rapid
voltage rise times, which can stress the
insulation system of the AC motor.
For this reason, motors designed for
operation on IGBT PWM inverter power
incorporating insulation systems
rated for rapid voltage rise times and
higher operating temperatures are
recommended for use with the drives.
Standard motors with a 1.15 service
factor or energy efcient motors can
be used provided that additional drive
output ltering is incorporated to limit
voltage rise times and to reduce the
output harmonic content.

Multiple Motor Operation

Any number of motors can be
connected in parallel and controlled
on an open loop (frequency control)
conguration by a single AFD as long
as the total connected load does not
exceed the rating of the drive. A closed
loop vector controlled drive cannot be
used with multiple motors. Although
the basic principles of multiple
motor operation are not difcult to
understand, Application Engineering
assistance should be requested to
make certain that the application
is successful.
Because the frequency of the power
supplied by the AFD is the same for
all motors, the motors will always
operate at relatively the same speed.
With NEMA design B motors, the
speeds will be matched within 3% or
less, depending on the load variation
among the motors and their rated slip.
Exact speed matching between motors
is not possible. If an adjustable speed
ratio is required between motors, each
motor must be connected to its own
individual AFD.

AC Drive Application

Matching the AFD to the Motor

Voltage source AFDs are designed
for use with any standard three-phase
induction motor. AFD sizing and motor
matching are often simply a matter
of matching the AFD output voltage,
frequency and current ratings to the
requirements of the motor. If the load
torque exceeds 150% for Constant
Torque (CT) drives or 110% for Variable
Torque (VT) drives during starting or
intermittently while running the drive,
oversizing may be required.

Output Voltage and Frequency

For AFDs rated at 480V, motors
are connected for 460V at 60 Hz.
380V/50 Hz motors can also be used
because the V/Hz ratio, 380/50, is
7.6V/Hz, the same as a 460V/60 Hz
motor. 415V motors can be operated if
the AFD V/Hz adjustment is reset. With
proper V/Hz adjustment, 575V motors
can be operated at constant V/Hz up to
80% speed and at constant voltage
from 80% to 100% speed. Maximum
motor

torque and hp for this mode of
operation

is limited above 80% speed
because of the reduced V/Hz levels.
For AFDs rated at 240V, the motor will
be connected for 230V.

Output Current

The full load current ratings of typical
AFDs are matched to typical full load
motor current ratings as listed in

Table 430.150.
Generally, an AFD of a given horse-
power rating will be adequate for a
motor of the same rating, but the
actual motor current required under
operating conditions is the determin-
ing factor for AFD sizing. If the motor
will be run at full load, the AFD output
current rating must be equal to or
greater than the motor nameplate
current. If the motor is oversized to
provide a wide speed range, the AFD
should be sized to provide the current
required by the motor at the maximum
operating torque. Motor oversizing
should generally be limited to one
horsepower size increase.

Motor Protection

Motor overload protection must be
provided as required by applicable
codes. Direct motor protection is not
automatically provided as part of the
AC drive.
AFDs are equipped with electronic
protection circuits with an inverse
time or I

2

t characteristic equivalent
to a conventional overload relay.
Conventional overload relays are also
used with AFDs equipped with bypass.
If these current sensing protective
devices are used with motors driving
constant torque loads, the minimum
speed should be adjusted to prevent
the motor from running at speeds at
which overheating could occur, unless
the I

2

t circuit provides a speed and
load calibrated trip. The best means
of AC drive motor protection is direct
winding overtemperature sensing,
such as an overtemperature switch
or thermistor imbedded in the motor
windings. Overtemperature switches
are more convenient because they can
normally be connected directly to the
AC drive control circuit. Thermistors
generally require a special sensing

relay. Direct overtemperature protection

is preferred over overcurrent sensing
protective devices because motor
overheating can occur with normal
operating current at low operating
speeds.


31.0-3

September 2011


Sheet

31

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Application Guide

003

Motor short-circuit protection is not
required because the AC drive protec-
tion circuits nearly always adequately
protect the motor in this respect.
When a single AFD provides power to
multiple motors connected in parallel,
special considerations must be given
to motor protection. Individual over-
load protection must be provided for
each motor. Short-circuit protection
may be required for some applications.

Bearing and DV/DT Protection

The rapid voltage rise times present
in todays IGBT PWM drives may
cause current to ow in the motor
bearings due to shaft voltage caused
by capacitive coupling. This current
ow can result in minute electrical
discharges within the bearing,
potentially damaging the bearing
over time. Therefore a DV/DT lter
should be used where the drive and
motor are separated by 100 feet or
more. Using an insulated motor
shaft bearing and/or setting the
inverter carrier frequency to the lowest
acceptable level can help minimize the
potential for this phenomenon as well.

AC Drive Performance

Operator Control and Interface

Operator controls are often via the
drive keypad. In other situations, an
operator station or remote control
may be desired. If these requirements
cannot be achieved by remotely
mounting the keypad, terminal
blocks with digital and analog
interface capability are provided.

Acceleration and Deceleration

AFDs are always equipped with adjust-
able acceleration and deceleration
control. Acceleration and deceleration
rates must be adjusted to suit the
characteristics of the load to prevent
shutdown due to overcurrent or over-
voltage. Increasing acceleration or
deceleration times will proportionally
decrease the torque requirement.

Speed Range

The characteristics of the motor
usually determine the speed range
of an AC drive. The AFD output
frequency range is usually wider
than the range that can be effectively
used by the motor.

Speed Regulation

The open loop speed regulation of an
AC drive is determined by the motor
slip. Because NEMA design B motors
usually have 3% slip or less, at 60 Hz
and rated load the speed regulation of
the drive is 3%.
AFDs equipped with slip compensa-
tion or ux or vector control can
provide speed regulation, which is
better than the open loop regulation
of the motor. Slip compensation and
ux or vector control improves speed
regulation by increasing and decreas-
ing the operating frequency by a
small amount as the load increases
and decreases.
Further improvement in steady-state
speed regulation can be obtained by
using a tachometer generator to
provide speed feedback to a closed
loop speed regulator option, or
an external device such as the
Durant

Strider.

Service Deviation

Speed regulation species only
that portion of the drive speed
change that is directly caused by
a change in load. Several other factors
can cause unintended changes in the
drive operating speed. These factors
contribute to the drives service
deviation.

Table 31.0-1

lists some
of these factors and the typical effect
that they have on drive speed.

Table 31.0-1. Factors Affecting
Service Deviation
Current Limit

If an AC drive was not equipped with
current limit, the overcurrent trip circuits
would shut down the drive should the
motor draw excessive current due to
an overload or too rapid an acceleration
rate. Current limit provides a means of
maintaining control of the drive under
these conditions.
If the output current reaches the current
limit setting while the drive is running
at set speed, the drive will decelerate
to a lower speed. If possible, the speed
will decrease to whatever operating
speed is required to prevent exceeding
the current limit setting.
If the output current reaches the current
limit setting while the drive is acceler-
ating, the drive will deviate from the
programmed acceleration ramp and
accelerate at a rate that will prevent the
current from exceeding the set limit.
If the drive reaches the negative
current limit setting (if applicable)
while the drive is decelerating,
the drive will deviate from the
programmed deceleration ramp,
and decelerate at a rate that will
try to prevent the current from
exceeding the limit.

Regeneration Limit and Braking

Regeneration limit prevents the motor
from developing braking torque above
a limit that corresponds to the normal
losses that are inherent in the motor
and controller.
When the drive is equipped with
dynamic braking, the motor is allowed
to develop a higher level of braking
torque. The regenerated braking
energy is dissipated in the dynamic
braking resistors. A fully regenerative
drive includes circuitry that returns the
regenerated braking energy to the
power lines.

IR Compensation

A V/Hz AC drive can provide improved
starting torque and low speed overload
capability if the lower speed voltage
boost is changed automatically to
compensate for changing load
conditions. This feature is called IR
compensation. Without IR compensa-
tion, it is difcult to achieve the
maximum possible motor torque
because the voltage boost required
for maximum torque can cause the
motor to saturate and draw excessive
current when it is lightly loaded. The IR
compensation circuit senses the motor
load and reduces the voltage boost
when the motor is lightly loaded.

A ux control AC drive provides a similar

result by modifying its instantaneous
voltage and frequency to allow the
motor to develop the required torque
for the load.

Inuencing
Factor
Typical Speed
Change

Line voltage variations
within rated tolerance.
0.0%
Ambient temperature
variations of controller within
rated tolerance after warmup.
0.25%
Motor temperature variations.
Cold to maximum operating
temperature.
0.5%
31.0-4



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

31

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Application Guide

004

Installation Compatibility

The successful application of an
AC drive requires the assurance
that the drive will be compatible with
the environment in which it will be
installed. The following are some
of the aspects of compatibility that
should be considered.

Cooling Air

Even though AFDs are very efcient,
the heat produced in the controller
cabinet can be substantial. The
electronic circuitry is subject to
immediate failure if its operating
temperature limits are exceeded.
Junction temperatures of transistors,
SCRs and IGBTs typically can only
increase 2025C from full load to
failure. It is important to remove heat
through the usual mechanisms of
radiation, conduction (heat sinks) or
convection (fans). The enclosure must
be located away from direct sunlight
and hot surfaces. The room tempera-
ture must be kept within the specied
limits and adequate cooling air must be
allowed to ow around the enclosure.
Excessively moist, corrosive or dirty
air must be prevented from entering
the enclosure.

Isolation Transformers

Drive isolation transformers are
sometimes recommended or
specied by others for various
reasons. Eaton does not require
the use of isolation transformers
because Eaton drives are designed
to operate directly from plant power
distribution systems without using
isolation transformers.
Eaton AFDs are designed to withstand
line voltage transients and noise
generated by other equipment in a
typical installation environment when
applied to systems with the required
minimum impedance levels. They are
also designed to prevent nuisance levels
of noise from being reected back to
the power lines. Electronic protection
circuits fully protect the drives from
output short circuits and ground faults
regardless of available fault current
without requiring isolation or external
impedance. Isolation transformers
are generally not recommended as a
preventative or curative measure for
suspected difculties of these types.

Efciency

Figure 31.0-1

shows typical efciency
curves for an IGBT AFD. The efciency
of an AC drive can be accurately
determined only for a particular set
of operating conditions. The character-
istics of the motor and controller
are interrelated in such a way that a
change in the characteristics of either
component will cause a change in the
efciency of the other.
The efciency of the total AC drive
system cannot be accurately
determined from just the controller
efciency curves and the manufac-
turers published motor data.

Table 31.0-2

provides adjustment
factors that can be used to estimate
the total drive system efciency. The
adjustment factors take into account
efciency variations due to a typical
range of different motor characteris-
tics and operating conditions. The
factors include data from the controller
efciency curves and adjust for motor
characteristics at various speed and
load points.
To calculate total AC drive system
efciency, multiply the published
motor efciency by the adjustment
factors listed in

Table 31.0-2

. Use the
published motor efciency for full load
60 Hz operation only. The adjustment
factors account for changes in motor
efciency due to changing the speed
and load.

Figure 31.0-1. Typical AFD Efciency
Table 31.0-2. Adjustment Factors for Calculating Total AC Drive System Efciency

Percent
Speed
Constant Torque Load
Load: Percent of Rated Torque
Variable Torque Load
Adjustment
Factor
Percent
Torque 100 75 50 25

100
90
80
0.9300.950
0.9310.951
0.9300.951
0.9120.932
0.9120.933
0.9120.933
0.8780.899
0.8790.900
0.8780.900
0.8000.820
0.8000.821
0.8000.821
0.9300.950
0.9190.940
0.9000.921
100
81
64
70
60
50
0.9280.949
0.9240.946
0.9100.934
0.9090.931
0.9060.928
0.8920.916
0.8760.898
0.8720.895
0.8590.883
0.7980.820
0.7940.817
0.7820.806
0.8740.895
0.8360.859
0.7820.806
49
36
25
40
30
20
10
0.8890.915
0.8550.883
0.7930.826
0.6250.675
0.8720.897
0.8380.866
0.7660.810
0.6100.660
0.8390.864
0.8050.833
0.7460.780
0.5840.634
0.7630.788
0.7320.760
0.6750.709
0.5220.572
0.6890.714
16


31.0-5

September 2011


Sheet

31

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Application Guide

005

Example:

Suppose you wish to estimate AC
drive efciency for a 50 hp drive on a
centrifugal pump. Efciency is to be
estimated for operation at full speed and
70% speed. The motor is nameplated
94.5% NEMA nominal efciency.
From the variable torque columns in

Table 31.0-2

, the adjustment factors for
full speed operation range from 0.93 to
0.95 and the adjustment factors for
70% speed range from 0.874 to 0.895.

For 100% speed:

Eff. = 94.5 x 0.93 = 87.9%
(low estimate)

Eff. = 94.5 x 0.95 = 89.8%
(high estimate)

For 70% speed:

Eff. = 94.5 x 0.874 = 82.6%
(low estimate)

Eff. = 94.5 x 0.895 = 84.6%
(high estimate)

Power Factor

The power factor typically specied
for AFDs is displacement power factor,
which is dened as the cosine of the
angle between the fundamental voltage
and current. Many instruments used
for utility billing purposes give readings

equivalent to displacement power factor.

Another denition and measurement
method combines the effects of power
and harmonic content to dene total
power factor. Newer utility instrumen-
tation is capable of recording total
power factor, resulting in potential
power factor penalty billing.
Displacement power factor for a PWM
drive is approximately 0.95 at all oper-
ating points. The displacement power
factor is not signicantly affected by
the motor speed, the motor load or the
motor power factor. Total power factor
will vary with line voltage, utility feeder
size and total system and drive load.
should not be connected at the AC
drive power input. Correction should
be done on a plantwide basis. If capac-
itors are located too close to the drive,
or if drives represent a high percentage
of the total plant electrical load, there
may be an undesirable interaction
between the capacitors and the drives,
leading to a failure of either or both.
If the capacitors must be located near
the drive, a line reactor should be used
on the drive input to reduce the possi-
bility of interaction. Note that adding
this reactor does not eliminate the
potential for harmonic resonance.
To be assured of a solution that will
improve power factor and avoid
resonance, a system study must
be performed to determine the
optimum selection of capacitance
and inductive reactance.
must never, under any circumstances,
be connected at the AC drive controller
output. They would serve no useful
purpose, and they may damage
the drive.

AC Drive Input Harmonics

AFDs use a rectier to convert AC
line voltage to the DC levels required
by the inverter section. Rectiers are
nonlinear devices that cause a current
to be drawn from the line, which
includes many harmonics. These
harmonic currents will cause harmonic
voltages to be created in the line, which
may affect sensitive devices on the
same line. IEEE 519-1992 provides
recommendations for the harmonic
current levels reected to the utility
by any user, where the feeder ties into
the utility grid. For difcult installations
where the levels of IEEE 519 cannot be
met, or those using on-site generated
power, a Clean Power rectier can
be used. The Clean Power rectier
uses phase shifted semiconductors to
signicantly reduce harmonics to levels
well within the IEEE guidelines. For
more specic information, see CPX
section on

Page 31.2-1

.

Motor Load Types and
Characteristics

Introduction

This section of your

Application Guide

discusses the following topics on
motor load types and characteristics:

Motor load types

Other functional considerations
The process of selecting an electrical
adjustable speed drive is one where
the load is of primary consideration. It
is important to understand the speed
and torque characteristics as well as
horsepower requirements of the type
of load to be considered.
When considering load characteristics,
the following should be evaluated:

What type of load is associated
with the application?

Does the load have a shock
component?

What is the size of the load?

Are large inertial loads involved?

What are the motor considerations?

Over what speed range are heavy
loads encountered?

How fast is the load to be accelerated
or decelerated?
Motor loads are classied into three
main groups, depending on how
their torque and horsepower vary
with operating speed. The following
paragraphs deal with the various
motor load types usually found in
process, manufacturing, machining
and commercial applications.
31.0-6



CA08104001E
September 2011


Sheet

31

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Application Guide

006

Motor Load Types

Constant Torque Load

This type of load is frequently
encountered. In this group, the torque
demanded by the load is constant
throughout the speed range. The load
requires the same amount of torque at
low speeds as at high speeds. Loads of
this type are essentially friction loads.
In other words, the constant torque
characteristic is needed to overcome
friction.

Figure 31.0-2

shows the
constant torque and variable
horsepower demanded by the load.
As seen in

Figure 31.0-2

, torque
remains constant while horsepower is
directly proportional to speed. A look
at the basic horsepower equation also
veries this fact:
Torque x Speed
hp =
5252

Where:

Torque is measured in lb-ft.
Speed is measured in rpm.
5252 is proportionality constant.

Figure 31.0-2. Constant Torque Load

Examples of this type of load are
conveyors, extruders and surface
winders. Constant torque capability
may also be used when shock loads,
overloads or high inertia loads require
special drive sizing.

Constant Horsepower Load

In this type of load, the horsepower
demanded by the load is constant over
the speed range. The load requires
high torque at low speeds. From the
previous formula, you can see that
with the horsepower held constant,
the torque will decrease as the speed
increases. Put another way, the speed
and torque are inversely proportional
to each other.

Figure 31.0-3

shows the
constant horsepower and variable
torque demanded by the load.
Examples of this type of load are
center-driven winders and machine
tool spindles. A specic example of
this application would be a lathe that
requires slow speeds for rough cuts
where large amounts of material are
removed, and high speeds for ne cuts
where little material is removed. Usually
very high starting torques are required
for quick acceleration. Constant
horsepower range is usually limited
on an AC drive from base speed to
1.52 times base speed.

Figure 31.0-3. Constant Horsepower Load
Variable Torque Load

With this type of load, the torque is
directly proportional to some mathe-
matical power of speed, usually speed
squared (Speed

2

). Mathematically:
Horsepower is typically proportional to
speed cubed (speed

3

).

Figure 31.0-4

shows the variable torque and variable
horsepower demanded by the load.
Examples of loads that exhibit variable
load torque characteristics are centrif-
ugal fans, pumps and blowers. This type
of load requires much lower torque at
low speeds than at high speeds.

Figure 31.0-4. Variable Torque Load
Torque Constant
Operating
Speed
Nameplate
Speed
-----------------------------

2
=


31.0-7

September 2011


Sheet

31

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Application Guide

007

Drive Selection

Introduction

This section discusses the following
topics on selecting the appropriate
drive:

Selection considerations

Selecting a drive for a machine

Drive application questions

Selection Considerations

When selecting a drive and associated
equipment for an application, the
following points should be considered:

Environment

The environment in which the motor
and power conversion equipment
operates is of prime concern. Condi-
tions such as ambient temperature,
cooling air supply and the presence of
gas, moisture and dust should all be
considered when choosing a drive, its
enclosures and protective features.

Speed Range

The minimum and maximum motor
speeds for the application will
determine the drives base speed.

Speed Regulation

The allowable amount of speed
variation should be considered.
Does the application require
unvarying speed at all torque
values or will variations be tolerated?

Torque Requirements

The starting, peak and running torques
should be considered when selecting a
drive. Starting torque requirements
can vary from a small percentage of
the full load to a value several times
full load torque. The peak torque
varies because of a change in load
conditions or mechanical nature of the
machine. The motor torque available
to the driven machine must be more
than that required by the machine
from start to full speed. The greater
the excess torque, the more rapid the
acceleration potential.

Acceleration

The necessary acceleration time
should be considered. Acceleration
time is directly proportional to the
total inertia and inversely proportional
to the torque available.

Duty Cycle
Selecting the proper drive depends
on whether the load is steady, varies,
follows a repetitive cycle of variation
or has pulsating torques. The duty
cycle, which is dened as a xed
repetitive load pattern over a given
period of time, is expressed as the
ratio of on-time to the cycle period.
When the operating cycle is such that
the drive operates at idle, or a reduced
load for more than 25% of the time,
the duty cycle becomes a factor in
selecting the proper drive.
Heating
The temperature of a motor or
controller is a function of ventilation
and losses. Operating self-ventilated
motors at reduced speeds may cause
above normal temperature rises.
Derating or forced ventilation may be
necessary to achieve the rated motor
torque output at reduced speeds.
Drive Type
Does the application require perfor-
mance elements such as quick speed
response or torque control? These
may require the use of a ux vector
or closed loop vector drive, instead
of a volts per hertz drive.
Table 31.0-3. Drive Specications
Description hp Range Current Harmonic
Distortion
Applications
M-Max
H-Max
SVX
1/410
10600
3/4800
3540%
3540%
3540%
Micro drive
HVAC specic6 pulse
General use6 pulse
CFX
CPX
3/4400
25800
710%
3%
General use with passive lters
18 pulse clean power
31.0-8
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
008
31.1-1
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
M-Max Series
General Information
009
M-Max Series
M-Max Series Drives for Machinery Applications
General Description
Eatons M-Max Series sensorless
vector adjustable frequency AC drives
are the next generation of drives
specically engineered for todays
machinery applications. These micro-
processor-based drives have standard
features that can be programmed to
tailor the drives performance to
suit a wide variety of application
requirements. The M-Max product
line uses a 32-bit microprocessor
and insulated gate bipolar transistors
(IGBTs) that provide quiet motor
operation, high motor efciency and
smooth low-speed performance. The
size and simplicity of the M-Max make
it ideal for hassle-free installation.
Models rated at 575V, three-phase,
50/60 Hz are available in sizes ranging
from 1 to 7-1/2 hp. Models rated at
480V, three-phase, 50/60 Hz are
available in sizes ranging from 1/2 to
10 hp. Models rated at 240V, single-
or three-phase, 50/60 Hz are available
in sizes ranging from 1/4 to 3 hp.
Models rated at 115V, single-phase,
50/60 Hz are available in the 1/4 to
1-1/2 hp size range.
The standard drive includes a digital
display, and operating and program-
ming keys on a visually appealing,
efcient application programming
interface. The display provides drive
monitoring, as well as adjustment
and diagnostic information. The keys
are used for digital adjustment and
programming of the drive, as well as
for operator control. Separate terminal
blocks for control and power wiring are
provided for customer connections.
Features
Ease of usepreset application
macros, startup wizard, diagnostic
capabilities
Compact, space-saving design
Rugged and reliable150% for
1 minute, 50C rated, conformal
coated boards
DIN rail and screw mountable
Side-by-side installation
Parameter upload and download
without the need for a main
power supply
Industry-leading efciency delivers
energy savings to the customer
Integrated EMC lters make the
unit suitable for commercial and
industrial networks
Available in the enclosure class
IP20 as standard, options for IP21
and NEMA
1
Brake chopper as standard in
three-phase, applications of
frames 2 (FS2) and larger
Temperature-controlled fan
RS-485/Modbus
as standard
PID controller as standard
Several eldbus options
Product
Complies with EN61800-3 (2004)
Safety
61800-5-1
EN60204-1
CE
UL
cUL
IEC
RoHS compliant
See unit nameplate for more detailed

approvals.
EMC (At Default Settings)
EMC Category C2, C3 and C4
(Level H): With an internal RFI
lter option
I/O Specications
Digital inputs DI1DI6 are freely
programmable. The user can assign
multiple functions to a single input
Digital, relay and analog outputs are
freely programmable includes:
Six digital inputs
Two analog inputs
420 mA
010V
One analog output
One digital output
Two relay outputs
RS-485 interface
Reliability
Pretested components: standard
Computerized testing: standard
Final test with full load: standard
Conformal-coated boards
50C rated
150% for 1 minute
200% for 2 seconds
Eatons Electrical Services &
Systems: national network of
AF drive specialists
31.1-2
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
M-Max Series
Product Selection
010
Table 31.1-1. Catalog Numbering System
Product Selection
M-Max
MMX 1 1 AA 1D1 F 0 0
Software Designation
Series
AA
Description
MMX =Base catalog
number
Phase
1 = Single-phase
3 = Three-phase
Voltage
1 = 120V
2 = 230V
4 = 480V
5 = 575V
Output Current
1D6 = 1.6A
010 = 10A
EMC Filter
F = Filter
N = No filter
Enclosure Class
0 = NEMA 0 or IP2
Option
0 = Full version
Table 31.1-2. M-Max Basic Controller
Horsepower ratings are based on the use of a 240V, 460V and 575V NEMA B, four- or six-pole
squirrel cage induction motor and are for reference only. Units are to be selected such that the
motor current is less than or equal to the MMX rated continuous output current.
For 208V, 380V or 415V applications, select the unit such that the motor current is less than or
equal to the MMX rated continuous output current.
For MMX11_, MMX32_ and MMX35_, there are no options for units with lters.
hp
Volts
100%
Continuous
Current I
N
(A)
Nominal
Input
Current (A)
Frame
Size
Catalog
Number
1/4
1/2
3/4
200240V single-phase in
230V three-phase out
1.7
2.4
2.8
4.2
5.7
6.6
FS1
FS1
FS1
MMX12AA1D7F0-0
MMX12AA2D4F0-0
MMX12AA2D8F0-0
1/4
1/2
3/4
200240V three-phase in
1.7
2.4
2.8
2.7
3.5
3.8
FS1
FS1
FS1
MMX32AA1D7N0-0

MMX32AA2D4N0-0
MMX32AA2D8N0-0
1/2
3/4
1
1.3
1.9
2.4
2.2
2.8
3.2
FS1
FS1
FS1
MMX34AA1D3F0-0
MMX34AA1D9F0-0
MMX34AA2D4F0-0
1/4
1/2
3/4
1
1.7
2.4
2.8
3.7
9.2
11.6
12.4
15.0
FS2
FS2
FS2
FS2
MMX11AA1D7N0-0
MMX11AA2D4N0-0
MMX11AA2D8N0-0
MMX11AA3D7N0-0
1
1-1/2
2
3.7
4.8
7.0
8.3
11.2
14.1
FS2
FS2
FS2
MMX12AA3D7F0-0
MMX12AA4D8F0-0
MMX12AA7D0F0-0
1
1-1/2
2
3.7
4.8
7.0
4.3
6.8
8.4
FS2
FS2
FS2
MMX32AA3D7N0-0
MMX32AA4D8N0-0
MMX32AA7D0N0-0
1-1/2
2
3
3.3
4.3
5.6
4.0
5.6
7.3
FS2
FS2
FS2
MMX34AA3D3F0-0
MMX34AA4D3F0-0
MMX34AA5D6F0-0
1-1/2 100120V single-phase in
4.8 16.5 FS3 MMX11AA4D8N0-0
3 200240V single-phase in
9.6 15.8 FS3 MMX12AA9D6F0-0
3 200240V three-phase in
11.0 13.4 FS3 MMX32AA011N0-0
4
5
7-1/2
10
7.6
9.0
12.0
14.0
9.6
11.5
14.9
18.7
FS3
FS3
FS3
FS3
MMX34AA7D6F0-0
MMX34AA9D0F0-0
MMX34AA012F0-0
MMX34AA014F0-0
1
2
3
575V three-phase in
1.7
2.7
3.9
2.0
3.6
5.0
FS3
FS3
FS3
MMX35AA1D7N0-0
MMX35AA2D7N0-0
MMX35AA3D9N0-0
5
7-1/2
575V three-phase in
6.1
9.0
7.6
10.4
FS3
FS3
MMX35AA6D1N0-0
MMX35AA9D0N0-0

31.1-3
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
M-Max Series
Technical Data
011
Accessories
Table 31.1-3. M-Max Copy/Paste Module
Table 31.1-4. Optional Communication Modules
Ratings
Table 31.1-5. M-Max Basic Controller IP20 Standard Ratings
Table 31.1-6. Programmable Parameters
Table 31.1-7. Options
Specications
Table 31.1-8. M-Max Series Drives
Exception: 115V single-phase in, 230V three-phase out.
Only three-phase FS2 and FS3 drives are equipped with brake
chopper circuit.
Description Catalog
Number
Module is plugged onto the front of the drive to
provide: upload/download of all parameters, direct
link to a PC via USB interface for parameter assignment
via MaxConnect software, and copying of parameters
for a series of devices or when exchanging devices.
No PC required.
MMX-COM-PC
Description Catalog
Number
Communication adapter kit
CANopen network card
PROFIBUS DP network card with serial connection
MMX-NET-XA
XMX-NET-CO-A
XMX-NET-PS-A
PROFIBUS DP network card with Sub-D connection
DeviceNet network card
XMX-NET-PD-A
XMX-NET-DN-A
Protections
Overcurrent
protection
Trip limit 4.0 x I
H
instantaneously
Overvoltage
protection
115/230V series: 437 Vdc; 400V series: 874 Vdc;
575V series: 1048 Vdc trip level
Undervoltage
protection
115/230V series: 183 Vdc; 400V series: 333 Vdc;
575V series: 460 Vdc trip level
Ground fault
protection
Ground fault is tested before every start. In case
of ground fault in motor or motor cable, only the
frequency converter is protected
Overtemperature
protection
Yes
Motor overload
protection
Yes
Motor stall
protection
Yes
Motor underload
protection
Yes
Description
Application macros: basic, pump, fan and high load (hoist)
Programmable start/stop and reverse signal logic (sinking or sourcing)
Reference scaling
Programmable start and stop functions
DC-brake at start and stop
Programmable V/Hz curve
Adjustable switching frequency
Autorestart function after fault
Protections and supervisions (all fully programmable; off, warning, fault)
Current signal input fault
External fault
Fieldbus communication
Eight preset speeds
Analog input range selection, signal scaling and ltering
PID controller
Skip frequencies
3% line reactors
3% line reactors
Single-phase
Three-phase
Input Ratings
Input voltage (V
in
) +10%/15% (575V units: +15%/15%)
Input frequency (f
in
) 50/60 Hz (variation up to 4566 Hz)
Connection to
power
Once per minute or less (typical operation)
Output Ratings
Output voltage 0 to V
in

Continuous
output current
Continuous rated current I
N
at ambient
temperature max. 122F (50C), overload
1.5 x I
N
max. 1 min/10 min
Output frequency 0 to 320 Hz
Frequency
resolution
0.01 Hz
Initial output
current (I
H
)
Current 2 x I
N
for 2 seconds in every 20-second
period. Torque depends on motor
Control Characteristics
Control method Frequency control (V/Hz) open loop or sensorless
vector control
Switching
frequency
1.5 to 16 kHz; default 6 kHz
Frequency
reference
Analog input: resolution 0.1% (10-bit), accuracy
1% V/Hz. Panel reference: resolution 0.01 Hz
Field weakening
point
30 to 320 Hz
Acceleration time 0 to 3000 sec
Deceleration time 0 to 3000 sec
Braking torque DC brake: 30% x T
n
(without brake option)
Brake Resistor (Minimum Values)
230V Series FS2 35 ohms and FS3 26 ohms

400V Series FS2 75 ohms and FS3 54 ohms
575V Series FS# 103 ohms
Ambient Conditions
Ambient operating
temperature
14F (10C), no frost to 122F (+50C):
Rated loadability I
N
Storage
temperature
40F (40C) to 158F (70C)
Relative humidity 0 to 95% RH, noncondensing, non-corrosive,
no dripping water
Air quality Chemical vapors: IEC 721-3-3, unit in operation,
Class 3C2; Mechanical particles: IEC 721-3-3,
unit in operation, Class 3S2
Altitude 100% load capacity (no derating) up to 3280 ft
(1000m); 1% derating for each 328 ft (100m)
above 3280 ft (1000m); max. 6560 ft (2000m)
Vibration EN 60068-2-6; 3 to 150 Hz, displacement amplitude
1 mm (peak) at 3 to 15.8 Hz, max. acceleration
amplitude 1G at 15.8 to 150 Hz
Shock EN 50178, IEC 68-2-27 UPS Drop test (for applicable
UPS weights); storage and shipping: max. 15G,
11 ms (in package)
Enclosure class IP20
31.1-4
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
M-Max Series
Technical Data
012
Figure 31.1-1. M-Max I/O Interface
Analog
OUT
AUTOGEN
Ref
Current
Note: P) Parameter-selectable function.
Terminal Signal Factory Preset Description
1 +10V Ref. output voltage Maximum load 10 mA
2 AI1 Analog signal in 1 Freq. reference
P)
0+10 V Ri = 200k ohms [min.]
3 GND I/O signal ground
6 24V 24V output for DIs 20%, max. load 50 mA
8 DI1 Digital input 1 Start forward
P)
0+30 V Ri = 12k ohms min.
9 DI2 Digital input 2 Start reverse
P)
10 DI3 Digital input 3 Preset speed

P)
A A RS-485 signal A FB communication

B B RS-485 signal B FB communication
4 AI2 Analog signal in 2 PI actual value
P)
0[4]20 mA, Ri = 200k ohms
14 DI4 Digital input 4 Preset speed B1
P)
15 DI5 Digital input 5 Fault reset
P)
16 DI6 Digital input 6 Disable PI contr.
P)
18 AO Analog output Output frequency
P)
0[2]10V, RL = 500 ohms
20 DO Digital signal out Active = READY
P)
Open collector, max. load 48V/50 mA
22 RO11 Relay out 1 Active = RUN
P)
Max. switching load: 250 Vac/2A
or 250 Vdc/0.4A
23 RO12
24 RO21 Relay out 2 Active = FAULT
P)
Max. switching load: 250 Vac/2A
or 250 Vdc/0.4A
25 RO22
26 RO23
31.1-5
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
M-Max Series
Dimensions
013
Figure 31.1-2. M-Max Drives
Table 31.1-9. M-Max Drives
Figure 31.1-3. NEMA 1/IP21 M-Max Drives and Communication Adapter Kit
Table 31.1-10. NEMA 1/IP21 M-Max Drives and Communication Adapter Kit
Frame Type H1 H2 H3 W1 W2 W3 D1 D2 Weight in Lbs (kg)
FS1
FS2
FS3
6.16 (156.5)
7.68 (195.0)
10.33 (262.5)
5.79 (147.0)
7.20 (183.0)
9.93 (252.3)
5.40 (137.3)
6.69 (170.0)
9.50 (241.3)
2.58 (65.5)
3.54 (90.0)
3.94 (100.0)
1.49 (37.8)
2.46 (62.5)
2.95 (75.0)
0.17 (4.5)
0.22 (5.5)
0.22 (5.5)
3.88 (98.5)
4.00 (101.5)
4.27 (108.5)
0.27 (7.0)
0.27 (7.0)
0.27 (7.0)
1.213 (0.550)
1.543 (0.699)
2.183 (0.990)
Frame Type H W1 W2 W3 D
FS1
FS2
FS3
8.14 (206.7)
9.90 (251.5)
12.26 (311.5)
3.77 (95.7)
4.72 (120.0)
5.12 (130.1)
2.99 (75.9)
3.97 (100.8)
4.36 (110.8)
3.98 (101.2)
4.94 (125.5)
5.33 (135.3)
5.41 (137.5)
5.68 (144.2)
6.32 (160.5)
W1
H1 H2 H3
W2
W3
D2
D1
H
W1
W2
D
W3
31.1-6
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
014
31.2-1
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
015
CPX9000 Enclosed Drives
CPX9000150 hp I
L
General Description
Eatons CPX9000 Clean Power Drives
use advanced 18-pulse, clean power
technology that signicantly reduces
line harmonics at the drive input
terminals, resulting in one of the
purest sinusoidal waveforms available.
Enhancements to the CPX9000
Clean Power Drives include smaller
enclosures and higher temperature
ratings than CP9000 for selected drives.
The CPX9000 drive also delivers true
power factorin addition to reducing
harmonic distortion, the CPX9000 drive
prevents transformer overheating and
overloading of breakers and feeders,
which enables the application of
adjustable frequency drives on
generators and other high impedance
power systems.
CPX9000 Enclosed Products
Standard enclosedcovers a
wide range of the most commonly
ordered options. Pre-engineering
eliminates the lead time normally
associated with customer specic
options. Available congurations
are listed on Pages 31.2-531.2-18
Modied standard enclosed
applies to specic customer require-
ments that vary from the Standard
Enclosed offering, such as the need
for an additional indicating light or
minor modications to drawings.
Contact your local sales ofce for
assistance in pricing and lead time
Custom engineeredfor those
applications with more unique
or complex requirements, these
are individually engineered to the
customers needs. Contact your
local sales ofce for pricing and
lead time
Features and Benets
CPX9000 Clean Power Drive
features include:
25150 hp I
L
drives available in
30-inch enclosure
200 and 250 hp I
L
drives available in
48-inch enclosure
300400 hp I
L
drives available in
60-inch enclosure
500600 hp I
L
drives available in
80-inch enclosure
NEMA Type 1, NEMA 12 with
gaskets and lters
Input voltage: 480V, 208/230V
Complete range of control, network
and power options
Horsepower range:
480V, 25700 hp I
H
;
25800 hp I
L
208/230V, 25100 hp I
L
;
consult factory for details
Over 10 years of 18-pulse clean
power experience
31.2-2
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
016
Designed to exceed the IEEE 519-1992 requirements for
harmonic distortion, the CPX9000 is the clear choice for
applications in the water, wastewater, HVAC, industrial
and process industries where harmonics are a concern.
What are Harmonics?
Take a perfect wave with a fundamental frequency of 60 Hz,
which is close to what is supplied by the power company.
Figure 31.2-1. Perfect Wave
Add a second wave that is ve times the fundamental
frequency300 Hz (typical of frequency added to the
line by a uorescent light).
Figure 31.2-2. Second Wave
Combine the two waves. The result is a 60 Hz supply rich in
fth harmonics.
Figure 31.2-3. Resulting Supply
What Causes Harmonics?
Harmonics are the result of nonlinear loads that convert
AC line voltage to DC. Examples of equipment that are
nonlinear loads are listed below:
AC variable frequency drives
DC drives
Fluorescence lighting, computers, UPS systems
Industrial washing machines, punch presses, welders, etc.
How Can Harmonics Due to VFDs Be Diminished?
By purchasing Eatons 18-pulse Eaton drive that is
guaranteed to meet IEEE Std. 519-1992 Harmonic
Distortion Limits.
What are Linear Loads?
Linear loads are primarily devices that run across the line
and do not add harmonics. Motors are prime examples. The
downside to having large motor linear loads is that they draw
more energy than a VFD, because of their inability to control
motor speed. In most applications, there is a turn down
valve used with the motor that will reduce the ow of the
material, without signicantly reducing the load to the motor.
While this provides some measure of speed control, it is
extremely inefcient.
Why be Concerned About Harmonics?
1. Installation and utility costs increase. Harmonics cause
damage to transformers and lower efciencies due to
the IR loss. These losses can become signicant (from
16.621.6%), which can have a dramatic effect on the
HVAC systems that are controlling the temperatures
of the building where the transformer and drive
equipment reside.
2. Downtime and loss of productivity. Telephones and
data transmissions links may not be guaranteed to work
on the same power grids polluted with harmonics.
3. Downtime and nuisance trips of drives and other
equipment. Emergency generators have up to three
times the impedance that is found in a conventional
utility source. Thus the harmonic voltage can be up to
three times as large, causing risk of operation problems.
4. Larger motors must be used. Motors running across the
line that are connected on polluted power distribution
grids can overheat or operate at lower efciency due
to harmonics.
5. Higher installation costs. Transformers and power
equipment must be oversized to accommodate the
loss of efciencies. This is due to the harmonic currents
circulating through the distribution without performing
useful work.
How Does a VFD Convert Three-Phase AC to a Variable
Output Voltage and Frequency?
The 6-pulse VFD: The majority of all conventional drives that
are built consist of a 6-pulse conguration. Figure 31.2-4
represents a 6-diode rectier design that converts three-phase
utility power to DC. The inverter section uses IGBTs to convert
DC power to a simulated AC sine wave that can vary in
frequency from 0400 Hz.
f(x) = sin(x)
Volts
(v)
Time
(t)

f(x) =
sin(5x)
5
Volts
(v)
Time
(t)
f(x) = sin(x) +
Volts
(v)
Time
(t)
sin(5x)
5
31.2-3
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
017
Figure 31.2-4. 6-Diode Rectier Design
The 6-pulse VFD drive creates harmonic current distortion.
The harmonic current that is created is energy that can not
be used by customers and causes external heat and losses
to all components including other drives that are on the
same power distribution. Figure 31.2-5 is a 500 hp drive
with 167A of damaging harmonic current.
Figure 31.2-5. 6-Pulse Nonproductive Harmonic Current
Table 31.2-1. 6-Pulse Nonproductive Harmonic Current
Guidelines of Meeting IEEE Std. 519-1992 Harmonic Distortion Limits
The IEEE 519-1992 Specication is a standard that provides
guidelines for commercial and industrial users that are
implementing medium and low voltage equipment.
Table 31.2-2. Maximum Harmonic Current Distortion in % of the
Fundamental (120V through 69,000V)
The ratio ISC/IL is the ratio of the short-circuit current available at
the point of common coupling (PCC), to the maximum fundamental
load current. Consequently, as the size of the user load decreases
with respect to the size of the system, the percentage of harmonic
current that the user is allowed to inject into the utility system
increases.
Notes: TDD = Total demand distortion is the harmonic current
distortion in percent of the maximum demand load
current (15 or 30 minute demand).
I
SC
= Maximum short-circuit current at the PCC not counting
motor contribution.
I
L
= Maximum demand load current for all of the connected
loads (fundamental frequency component) at the PCC.
All of the limits are measured at a point of common coupling.
L2A
L1A
L3A
Output Transistors
IGBT Section
Dynamic Braking
Transistor
6-Pulse Diode
Bridge Rectifier
Converter Section
Inverter Section
() DC
(+) DC
Bus
Capacitors
AC
Motor
6-Pulse Circuit
Current harmonics
I
1
= 100% I
11
= 6.10% I
19
= 1.77%
I
5
= 22.5% I
13
= 4.06% I
23
= 1.12%
I
7
= 9.38% I
17
= 2.26% I
25
= 0.86%
Power = 500 hp
Harmonic current = 167A
1000
Current
Amps
500
0
-500
-1000
0.100 0.10625 0.1125
Time in Seconds
0.11875 0.125
Isc/I
L
Harmonic Order (Odd Harmonics) TDD
h<11 11h<17 17h<23 23h<35 35h
<20
20<50
50<100
4.0
7.0
10.0
2.0
3.5
4.5
1.5
2.5
4.0
0.6
1.0
1.5
0.3
0.5
0.7
5.0
8.0
12.0
100<1000
>1000
12.0
15.0
5.5
7.0
5.0
6.0
2.0
2.5
1.0
1.4
15.0
20.0
31.2-4
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
018
Figure 31.2-6. One-Line Diagram for Harmonic Analysis
The best way to estimate AFD harmonic contribution to an electrical system is to perform a harmonic analysis based on known system
characteristics. The one line in this gure would provide the data to complete the calculations.
Terms
PCC (point of common coupling) is dened as the
electrical connecting point between the utility and
multiple customers per the specications in IEEE 519
POA (point of analysis) is dened as where the harmonic
calculations are taken
An oscilloscope can make all measurements at the PCC
or POA to do an on-site harmonic evaluation
Harmonic Reduction Methods to Meet IEEE 519
1. Line Reactor
A line reactor is a three-phase series inductance lter on the
line side of an AFD. If a line reactor is applied on all AFDs, it
is possible to meet IEEE guidelines where 1025% of system
loads are AFDs, depending on the stiffness of the line and
the value of line reactance. Line reactors are available in
various values of percent impedance, most typically 11.5%,
3% and 5%. (Note: the SVX9000 comes standard with a
nominal 3% input impedance.)
Figure 31.2-7. Line Reactor
Advantages
Low cost
Can provide moderate reduction in voltage and
current harmonics
Available in various values of percent impedance
Provides increased input protection for AFD and its
semiconductors from line transients
Disadvantages
May not reduce harmonic levels to below
IEEE 519-1992 guidelines
Voltage drop due to IR loss
____Volts ____Volts
____Volts
____kVA
____Isc
____Impedance
PCC
Utility Side
Utility Side
Transformer
____Volts ____Volts
____Volts
____kVA
____Isc
____Impedance
Customer
Transformer
Customer
Generator
____Volts
____kVA
____Isc
____Impedance
Source A
Source B
Generator
Set
AC
Motor
AC
Motor
AC
Motor
Total Linear Motor Loads
Total Nonlinear Drive Loads
____AMPS
____AMPS
AC
Motor
AC
Motor
AC
Motor
AFD Motor
31.2-5
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
019
2. Clean Power Drives
When the total load is comprised of nonlinear load such
as drives and the ratio is Isc/I
L
, the greatest harmonic
mitigation is required. Under these conditions, the currents
drawn from the supply need to be sinusoidal and clean
such that system interference and additional losses are
negligible. The Eaton CPX9000 Clean Power Drive uses
a phase-shifting auto transformer with delta-connected
winding that carries only the ampere-turns caused by the
difference in load currents. This results in nine separate
phases. In this type of configuration, the total kVA rating
of the transformer magnetic system was only 48% that of
the motor load. A traditional isolated transformer system,
with multipulse windings, would require the full kVA rating
to be supported, which is more common in a MV step-
down transformer.
The integrated 18-pulse clean power drive, with near sine
wave input current and low harmonics will meet the
requirements of IEEE 519-1992 under all practical operating
conditions. The comparisons with 6-pulse and 12-pulse
systems are shown in Figures 31.2-5 and 31.2-9.
Figure 31.2-8. Basic 18-Pulse Rectier with Differential Delta Transformer
Figure 31.2-9. 500 hp 480V Drive with 18-Pulse Rectiers
Table 31.2-3. 500 hp 480V Drive with 18-Pulse Rectiers
Advantages
Virtually guarantees compliance with IEEE 519-1992
Up to four times the harmonic reduction of
12-pulse methods
Smaller transformer than isolation transformer used in
12-pulse converter
Disadvantages
Larger and heavier magnetics than applying a line reactor
on SVX or tuned harmonic lter/cap on CFX
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
A
C
N
Output Transistors
IGBT Section
Dynamic Braking
Transistor
Pre-Charge
Circuit
18-Pulse SCR
Bridge Rectifier
Converter Section
18-Pulse
Phase-Shifting
Auto-Transformer
Inverter Section
() DC
(+) DC
Diode Rectifiers
Bus
Capacitors
Three-Phase
AC Input
1
2
3
AC
Motor
18-Pulse Clean Power
Current harmonics
I
1
= 100% I
11
= 0.24% I
19
= 1.00%
I
5
= 0.16% I
13
= 0.10% I
23
= 0.01%
I
7
= 0.03% I
17
= 0.86% I
25
= 0.01%
Power = 428.8 kW
H
c
= 24A
1000
Current
Amps
500
0
-500
-1000
0.100 0.10625 0.1125
Time in Seconds
0.11875 0.125
31.2-6
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
020
Table 31.2-4. Specications
The EMI lter is optional in FR10 and larger.

Table 31.2-5. Standard I/O Specications
Feature
Description
NEMA Type 1
Primary Design Features
4566 Hz input frequency Standard
Output: AC volts maximum Input voltage base
Output frequency range: Hz 0500
Initial output current (I
H
) 250% for 2 seconds
Overload: 1 minute (I
H
/I
L
) 150%/110%
Enclosure space heater Optional
Oversize enclosure Standard
Output contactor Optional
Bypass motor starter Optional
Listings UL, cUL
Protection Features
Incoming line fuses Standard 200 kA rating
AC input circuit disconnect Optional
Phase rotation insensitive Standard
EMI lter FR6FR9

Input phase loss protection Standard
Input overvoltage protection Standard
Line surge protection Standard
Output short circuit protection Standard
Output ground fault protection Standard
Output phase protection Standard
Overtemperature protection Standard
DC overvoltage protection Standard
Drive overload protection Standard
Motor overload protection Standard
Programmer software Optional
Local/remote keypad Standard
Keypad lockout Standard
Fault alarm output Standard
Built-in Diagnostics Standard
MOV Standard
Input/Output Interface Features
Setup Adjustment Provisions
Remote keypad/display
Personal computer
Standard
Standard
Operator Control Provisions
Drive mounted keypad/display
Conventional control elements
Serial communications
115 Vac control circuit
Standard
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Speed Setting Inputs
Keypad
010 Vdc potentiometer/voltage signal
420 mA isolated
420 mA differential
315 psig
Standard
Standard
Congurable
Congurable
Optional
Analog Outputs
Speed/frequency
Torque/load/current
Motor voltage
Kilowatts
010 Vdc signals
420 mA DC signals
Isolated signals
Standard
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Congurable w/jumpers
Standard
Optional
Feature
Description
NEMA Type 1
Input/Output Interface Features (Continued)
Discrete Outputs
Fault alarm
Drive running
Drive at set speed
Optional parameters
Dry contacts
Open collector outputs
Additional discrete outputs
Standard
Standard
Programmable
14
1 (2 relays Form C)
1
Optional
Communications
RS-232
RS-422/485
DeviceNet
Modbus RTU
CANopen (slave)
PROFIBUS-DP
LonWorks

Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Performance Features
Sensorless vector control Standard
Volts/hertz control Standard
IR and slip compensation Standard
Electronic reversing Standard
Dynamic braking Optional
DC braking Standard
PID set point controller Programmable
Critical speed lockout Standard
Current (torque) limit Standard
Adjustable acceleration/deceleration Standard
Linear or S curve accel/decel Standard
Jog at preset speed Standard
Thread/preset speeds 7
Automatic restart Selectable
Coasting motor start Standard
Coast or ramp stop selection Standard
Elapsed time meter Optional
Carrier frequency adjustment 116 kHz
Standard Conditions for Application and Service
Maximum operating ambient
temperature
0 to 50C up to FR9
0 to 40C FR10 and larger, consult
factory for 50C rating above FR9
Humidity (maximum),
noncondensing
95%
Altitude (maximum without derate) 3300 ft (1000m)
Line voltage variation +10/15%
Line frequency variation 4566 Hz
Efciency >96%
Power factor (displacement) 0.99
6Digital input programmable 24 V: 0 10V, 1 18V, R
i
> 5 k
2Analog input congurable
w/jumpers
Voltage: 010V, R
i
> 200 k
Current: 0 (4)20 mA, R
i
= 250 k
2Digital output programmable Form C relays 250 Vac 2A or
30 Vdc 2A resistive
1Digital output programmable Open collector 48 Vdc 50 mA
1Analog output programmable
congurable w/jumper
020 mA, impedance 500 ohms,
resolution 106 3%
31.2-7
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
021
Table 31.2-6. CPX9000 Enclosed NEMA Type 1 Drive Catalog Numbering System
Brake chopper is standard in drives up to 30 hp I

H
or 40 hp I
L
. It is optional in larger drives.
Local/remote keypad is included as the standard control panel and as a digital HOA switch.
Some options are voltage and/or horsepower specic. Consult your Eaton representative for details.
See Pages 31.2-15 and 31.2-16 for descriptions.
Includes local/remote speed reference switch.
See Pages 31.2-17 and 31.2-18 for complete descriptions.
Consult Eaton for pricing and availability.

Communication Options
C2 = Modbus
C3 = PROFIBUS DP
C4 = LonWorks
C5 = PROFIBUS DP (D9
connector)
C6 = CANopen (slave)
C7 = DeviceNet
C8 = Modbus (D9 Type
connector)
CA = Johnson Controls N2
CI = Modbus TCP
CJ = BACnet
D3 = RS-232 with D9 connection
C P X 1 0 0 1 4 A A
Voltage Rating
4 = 480V
Product Family
CPX = Clean power 18-pulse
enclosed drives
Horsepower Rating
025 = 25 hp
030 = 30 hp
040 = 40 hp
050 = 50 hp
060 = 60 hp
075 = 75 hp
100 = 100 hp
125 = 125 hp
150 = 150 hp
200 = 200 hp
250 = 250 hp
300 = 300 hp
350 = 350 hp
400 = 400 hp
500 = 500 hp
600 = 600 hp
700 = 700 hp
800 = 800 hp
Enclosure Rating
1 = NEMA Type 1
6 = NEMA 12 filtered
ApplicationTorque/Braking
A = I
L
/no brake chopper
B = I
L
/internal brake chopper
D = I
H
/no brake chopper
E = I
H
Enclosed Style
A = Enclosed drive
Enclosed Options
Type
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
KF
KO
Door-mounted speed potentiometer
Door-mounted speed potentiometer with HOA

selector switch
315 psig follower

HAND/OFF/AUTO switch (22 mm)
MANUAL/AUTO reference switch (22 mm)
START/STOP pushbuttons (22 mm)
Bypass test switch for RA and RB
Standard elapsed time meter
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Addl. bypass
Control
L1
L2
LE
Power on and fault pilot lights
Bypass pilot lights for RA, RB, bypass options
Red RUN light
Light
Addl. bypass
Light
P1
PE
PF
PG
PH
PI
PN
Input disconnect
Output contactor
Output lter
MotoRx (up to 600 ft) 1000 V/S
DV/DT lter
Single overload relay
Dual overload relays
Dual overloads for bypass
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Addl. bypass
RA
RB
RC
RD
RG
Manual HOA bypass controller
Manual IOB bypass controller
Auto transfer HOA bypass controller
Auto transfer IOB bypass controller
Reduced voltage starter for bypass
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass
S7
S8
S9
10-inch expansion
20-inch expansion
Space heater
Enclosure
Enclosure
Enclosure

Build options alphabetically and numerically.
Engineered Options
HT = High temperature rating for 50C
(FR10 and above)
VB = Varnished boards
Control Options
B1 = 6 DI, 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc
B2 = 1 RO (NC/NO), 1 RO (NO), 1 Therm
B4 = 1 AI (mA isolated), 2 AO (mA isolated),
1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc
B5 = 3 RO (NO)
B8 = 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc, 3 Pt100
B9 = 1 RO (NO), 5 DI 42240 Vac Input
31.2-8
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
022
Product Selection
NEMA Type 1, 25150 hp (30 x 90 x 21.5)
CPX9000
Drive
Door-
Mounted
Keypad
18-Pulse Auto
Transformer
Input
Disconnect
(PI Option)
Pre-charge
Contactor
18-Pulse Diode
Rectier
Input
Fusing
Input Choke
When Ordering
Select a base catalog number
that meets the application
requirementsnominal horse-
power, voltage and enclosure rating.
(The enclosed drives continuous
output amp rating should be equal
to or greater than the motors full
load ampere rating.) The base
enclosed package includes a
standard drive, door-mounted
alphanumeric panel and enclosure
The CPX9000 product uses the term
High Overload (I
H
) in place of the
term Constant Torque (CT). Like-
wise, Low Overload (I
L
) is used in
place of the term Variable Torque
(VT). The new terms are a more
precise description of the rating.
The older terms included ambient
temperature ratings in addition
to overload ratings. In order to
minimize enclosure size and offer
the highest ambient temperature
rating, overload and temperature
ratings are now treated separately.
Ambient temperature ratings are
shown in Table 31.2-7. Consult the
factory for 50C ratings of FR10
and above
Table 31.2-7. Ambient Temperature Ratings
If dynamic brake chopper or
Control/Communication option is
desired, change the appropriate
code in the base catalog number
Note: All of the programming is exactly
the same as the standard SVX9000 drive.
Select enclosed options. Add
the codes as sufxes to the base
catalog number in alphabetical
and numeric order
Frame
Size
I
H
I
L
FR4FR9 50C 50C
FR10 and
above
40C 40C
31.2-9
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
023
Table 31.2-8. 480 Vac CPX9000 Base Drive Product Selection
See enclosure dimensions in Table 31.2-9.
Consult factory.
Table 31.2-9. CPX9000 Enclosure Dimensions
Enclosure sizes accommodate drive and options, including bypass and disconnect.
For other power options, consult your Eaton representative.
Consult factory.
Enclosure
Size
hp Current
(A)
Chassis
Frame
Drawing
Number
Low Overload DriveI
L
= Variable Torque
7 25
30
40
38
46
61
FR6
FR6
FR6
1
1
1
7 50
60
75
72
87
105
FR7
FR7
FR7
1
1
1
7 100
125
150
140
170
205
FR8
FR8
FR8
1
1
1
8 200
250
261
300
FR9
FR9
2
2
9 300
350
400
385
460
520
FR10
FR10
FR10
3
3
3
10 500
550
600
590
650
730
FR11
FR11
FR11
4
4
4
11 650
700
800
820
920
1030
FR12
FR12
FR12
High Overload DriveI

H
= Constant Torque
7 25
30
40
38
46
61
FR6
FR6
FR7
1
1
1
7 50
60
75
72
87
105
FR7
FR7
FR8
1
1
1
7 100
125
140
170
FR8
FR8
1
1
8 150
200
205
245
FR9
FR9
2
2
9 250
300
350
300
385
460
FR10
FR10
FR10
3
3
3
10 400
500
550
520
590
650
FR11
FR11
FR11
4
4
4
11 600
650
700
720
820
840
FR12
FR12
FR12
Enclosure
Size

Width Height Depth
7
8
9
30.00 (762.0)
48.00 (1219.2)
60.00 (1524.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
21.50 (546.1)
26.14 (664.0)
25.74 (653.8)
10
11
80.00 (2032.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
31.75 (806.5)
31.2-10
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
024
Dimensions
CPX Drawing 1Enclosure Size 7
Figure 31.2-10. 25150 hp I
L
and 25125 hp I
H
Construction: NEMA Type 1 Oversize
Finish: EnclosureANSI 61 Gray (Light)
30.00
(762.0)
15.50
(393.7)
21.50
(546.1)
Side View
15.00
(381.0)
8.00
(203.2)
8.50
(215.9) 18.75
(476.3)
5.75
(146.1)
1.75 (44.5) Typ.
24.45 (621.0)
28.05 (712.5)
20.00
(508.0)
26.25
(666.8)
4.79
(121.7)
Top View
Bottom View
10.00
(254.0)
Hinged Side
Door Clearance
at 90
2.00
(50.8)
3.50
(88.9)
90.00
(2286.0)
93.92
(2385.6)
84.37
(2143.0)
4.00 (101.6) Minimum
Free Air Space Required
Keypad
Exhaust
Air
For
Cable Entry
Operator Elements When Specified,
Mounted on These Panels
Intake Ventilating Slots
(Filtered on NEMA 12)
Key-Locking Handle
Quarter Turn Latch
(2 Places)
Opening for
Bottom Cable Entry
0.56 (14.2) Dia.
Mounting Holes
(4 Places)
Flanged Disconnect Supplied
with Circuit Breaker When Specified
Front View
31.2-11
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
025
Figure 31.2-11. 200250 hp I
L
and 150200 hp I
H
Construction: NEMA Type 1 Oversize
Finish: EnclosureANSI 61 Gray (Light)
24.00 (609.6)
25.14 (639)
Side View
9.50
(241.3)
22.47
(570.74)
5.48
(139.19)
7.73
(196.34)
12.50
(317.5)
45.22 (1148.59)
37.47 (951.74)
3.01 (76.45)
8.25
(209.6)
1.25
(31.8)
31.00
(787.4)
21.45 (544.8) 21.31 (541.3)
48.00 (1219.2)
Front View
Top View
90.00
(2286.0)
93.50
(2374.9)
84.37
(2143.0)
Opening for Top Cable Entry
(2 Places)
Keypad
Operator Elements When Specified,
Mounted on These Panels
Key-Locking Handle
Quarter Turn Latch
(2 Places)
Bottom View
0.56 (14.2) Dia.
Mounting Holes
(4 Places)
Opening for
Bottom Cable Entry
Flanged Disconnect Supplied
with Circuit Breaker When Specified
4.00 (101.6) Minimum
31.2-12
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
026
Figure 31.2-12. 300400 hp I
L
and 250350 hp I
H
25.00 (635.0)
26.14 (664.0)
9.75
(247.7)
Top View
1.5 (38.1)
43.5 (1104.9)
90.00
(2286.0)
93.50
(2374.9)
4.00 (101.6) Minimum
60.00 (1524)
Front View
Bottom View
Side View
7.46 x 15.00
(189.5 x 381.0)
Access in Top
2 Places
8.50 x 12.00 (215.9 x 304.8)
Bottom Access
0.56 (14.2) Dia.
Mounting Hole
5 Places
27.06
(687.3)
27.36
(694.9)
90 Max.
Door
Opening
29.05
(737.9)
11.93
(303.0)
25.00
(635.0)
18.84
(478.5)
8.20
(208.3)
2.00 (50.8)
22.90 (581.7)
32.72 (831.1)
46.30 (1176.0)
54.90 (1394.5)
Key-Locking Handle
Access
Plate
4 Places
90 Max.
Door
Opening
Finish: Enclosure ANSI 61 Gray (Light)
Material: Enclosure and Backplate 12 ga.
= .1046 Cold Rolled Steel
Operator
Elements
When Specified,
Mounted on
These Panels
Keypad
Quarter Turn Latch
(2 Places)
Flanged Disconnect
Supplied with
Circuit Breaker
When Specified
31.2-13
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
027
Figure 31.2-13. 500600 hp I
L
and 400500 hp I
H
30.50 (774.7)
31.75 (806.5)
9.03
(229.4)
Top View
15.63
(397.0)
90.00
(2286.0)
84.37
(2143.0)
93.50
(2374.9)
4.00 (101.6) Minimum
35.75 (908.1) 35.75 (908.1)
80.00 (2032.0)
Front View
Side View
21.00 x 10.00
(533.4 x 254.0)
Access in Top
21.00 x 10.00 (533.4 x 254.0)
Bottom Access
17.79
(451.9)
29.04
(737.6)
4.87
(123.7)
2.00 (50.8)
15.64
(397.3)
38.00 (965.2)
42.02 (1067.3)
Bottom View
78.02 (1981.7)
Finish: Enclosure ANSI 61 Gray (Light)
Material: Enclosure and Backplate12 ga.
= 0.1046 Cold Rolled Steel
Operator
Elements
When
Specified,
Mounted
on These
Panels
Keypad
Key-Locking
Handle
Intake Ventilating
Slots (Filtered on
NEMA 12)
Quarter Turn
Latch (4 Places)
Flanged
Disconnect
Supplied with
Circuit Breaker
When Specified
31.2-14
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
028
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 31.2-14. Power Diagram 25250 hp I
L
and 25200 hp I
H
Figure 31.2-15. Power Diagram 300+ hp I
L
and 250+ hp I
H
Figure 31.2-16. Power Diagram 25250 hp I
L
and 25200 hp I
H
with Bypass
Figure 31.2-17. Power Diagram 300+ hp I
L
/250+ hp I
H
with Bypass
18-Pulse
Transformer
18-Pulse
Diode Bridge
9000X
Drive
Circuit
Breaker
Motor
Input
Fusing
I
Inverter Input
Contactor
18-Pulse
Transformer
6-Pulse
Diode Bridge
9000X
12-Pulse Drive
Circuit
Breaker
Motor
Input
Fusing
Pre-charge
Complete
Contactor
18-Pulse
Transformer
Optional
Reduced
Voltage Starter
18-Pulse
Diode Bridge
9000X
Drive
HMCP
Output
Contactor
Mechanical
Interlock
Motor
M
Inverter Input
Contactor
I
Bypass
Contactor
L
(ITTT )
Input
Fusing
Overload
18-Pulse
Transformer TT
Optional
Reduced
Voltage Starter VV
9000X
12-Pulse Drive
HMCP
Output
Contactor
p
Mechanical
Interlock
Motor
M
Inverter Input
Contactor
p
I
Bypass
Contactor
yp
L
Fusing
Overload
6-Pulse
Diode Bridge
Pre-charge
Complete
g
Contactor
p
e
(ITTT)
31.2-15
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
029
Options
Control/Communication Option Descriptions
Table 31.2-10. Available Control/Communications Options
Option Description Option
Type
K1 Door-Mounted Speed PotentiometerProvides the CPX9000 with the ability to adjust the frequency reference using a door-
mounted potentiometer. This option uses the 10 Vdc reference to generate a 010V signal at the analog voltage input signal
terminal. When the HOA bypass option is added, the speed is controlled when the HOA switch is in the hand position. Without
the HOA bypass option, a two-position switch (labeled local/remote) is provided on the keypad to select speed reference from the
speed potentiometer or a remote speed signal.
Control
K2 Door-Mounted Speed Potentiometer with HOA Selector SwitchProvides the CPX9000 with the ability to start/stop and adjust
the speed reference from door-mounted control devices or remotely from customer supplied inputs. In HAND position, the drive
will start and the speed is controlled by the door-mounted speed potentiometer. The drive will be disabled in the OFF position.
When AUTO is selected, the run enable and speed reference are controlled from remote inputs. Speed reference can be either
010 Vdc or 420 mA. The drive default is 420 mA, parameter is eld programmable. Run enable is controlled by a dry contact
closure. This option requires a customer supplied 115V power source.
Control
K3 315 psig FollowerProvides a pneumatic transducer that converts a 315 psig pneumatic signal to either 08 Vdc or a 19 Vdc
signal interface with the CPX9000. The circuit board is mounted on the inside of the front enclosure panel and connects to the
users pneumatic control system via 6 ft (1.8m) of exible tubing and a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) brass tube union.
Control
K4 HAND/OFF/AUTO Switch for Non-bypass CongurationsProvides a three-position selector switch that allows the user
to select either a Hand or Auto mode of operation. Hand mode is defaulted to keypad operation, and Auto mode is defaulted
to control from an external terminal source. These modes of operation can be congured via drive programming to allow for
alternate combinations of start and speed sources. Start and speed sources include keypad, I/O and Fieldbus.
Control
K5 MANUAL/AUTO Speed Reference SwitchProvides door-mounted selector switch for Manual/Auto speed reference. Control
K6 START/STOP PushbuttonsProvides door-mounted START and STOP pushbuttons for either bypass or non-bypass
congurations.
Control
KF Bypass Test Switch for RB and RAAllows the user to energize the AF drive for testing while operating the motor on the bypass
controller. The Test Switch is mounted on the inside of the enclosure door.
Addl. bypass
KO Standard Elapsed Time MeterProvides a door-mounted elapsed run time meter. Control
L1 Power On and Fault Power LightsProvides a white power on light that indicates power to the enclosed cabinet and a red fault
light that indicates a drive fault has occurred.
Light
L2 Bypass Pilot Lights for RB, RA Bypass OptionsA green light indicates when the motor is running in inverter mode and an
amber light indicates when the motor is running in bypass mode. The lights are mounted on the enclosure door, above the
switches.
Addl. bypass
LE RUN Pilot LightProvides a green run light that indicates the drive has been commanded to start. Light
P1 Input Disconnect Assembly Rated to 100 kAICHigh Interrupting Motor Circuit Protector (HMCP) or circuit breaker that provides
a means of short-circuit protection for the power cables between it and the CPX9000, and protection from high-level ground
faults on the power cable. Allows a convenient means of disconnecting the CPX9000 from the line and the operating mechanism can
be padlocked in the OFF position. This is factory mounted in the enclosure.
Input
PE Output ContactorProvides a means for positive disconnection of the drive output from the motor terminals. The contactor coil
is controlled by the drives run or permissive logic. NC and NO auxiliary contacts rated at 10A, 600 Vac are provided for
customer use. Bypass options RB and RA include an output contactor as standard. This option includes a low VA 115 Vac
fused control power transformer and is factory mounted in the enclosure.
Output
PF Output FilterUsed to reduce the transient voltage (DV/DT) at the motor terminals. The output lter is recommended for cable
lengths exceeding 100 ft (30m) with a drive of 3 hp and above, for cable lengths of 33 ft (10m) with a drive of 2 hp and below, or for
a drive rated at 525690V. This option is mounted in the enclosure, and may be used in conjunction with a brake chopper circuit.
Output
PG MotoRx (300600 ft) 1000 V/S DV/DT FilterUsed to reduce transient voltage (DV/DT) and peak voltages at the motor
terminals. This option is comprised of a 0.5% line reactor, followed by capacitive ltering and an energy recovery/clamping circuit.
Unlike the output lter (see option PF), the MotoRx recovers most of the energy from the voltage peaks, resulting in a lower
voltage drop to the motor, and therefore conserving power. This option is used when the distance between a single motor and
the drive is 300600 ft (91183m). This option can not be used with the brake chopper circuit. The output lter (option PF) should
be investigated as an alternative.
Output
PH Single Overload RelayUses a bimetallic overload relay to provide additional overload current protection to the motor on con-
gurations without bypass options. It is included with the bypass congurations for overload current protection in the bypass
mode. The overload relay is mounted within the enclosure, and is manually resettable. Heater pack included.
Output
PI Dual Overload RelaysThis option is recommended when a single drive is operating two motors and overload current protec-
tion is needed for each of the motors. The standard conguration includes two bimetallic overload relays, each sized to protect a
motor with 50% of the drive hp rating. For example, a 100 hp drive would include two overload relays sized to protect two 50 hp
motors. The relays are mounted within the enclosure, and are manually resettable. Heater packs not included.
Output
PN Dual Overloads for BypassThis option is recommended when a single drive is operating two motors in the bypass mode and
overload current protection is needed for each of the motors. The standard conguration includes two bimetallic overload
relays, each sized to protect a motor with 50% of the drive hp rating. For example, a 100 hp drive would include two overload
relays sized to protect two 50 hp motors. The relays are mounted within the enclosure, and are manually resettable.
Addl. bypass
31.2-16
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
030
Table 31.2-10. Available Control/Communications Options (Continued)
Option Description Option Type
RA Manual HOA Bypass ControllerThe manual HAND/OFF/AUTO (HOA)three-contactorbypass option provides a means of
bypassing the CPX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. This option consists
of an input disconnect, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted HOA selector
switch and an INVERTER/BYPASS switch. The HOA switch provides the ability to start and stop the drive in the inverter
mode. The Bypass includes an input contactor, an output contactor, and a bypass starter with an electronic overload relay.
The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked.
Bypass
RB Manual IOB Bypass ControllerThe manual INVERTER/OFF/BYPASS (IOB)three-contactorbypass option provides a means
of bypassing the CPX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. This option
consists of an input disconnect, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted IOB
selector switch. The Bypass includes an input contactor, an output contactor, and a bypass starter with an electronic overload
relay. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked.
Bypass
RC Auto Transfer HOA Bypass ControllerThe manual HAND/OFF/AUTO (HOA)three-contactorbypass option provides
a means of bypassing the CPX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line.
The circuitry provides an automatic transfer of the load to across the line operation after a drive trip. This option consists
of an input disconnect, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted HOA selector
switch and an INVERTER/BYPASS switch. The HOA switch provides the ability to start and stop the drive in either mode.
The Bypass includes an input contactor, an output contactor, and a bypass starter with an electronic overload relay. The
contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked. Door-mounted pilot lights are provided, which indicate bypass
or inverter operation. A green light indicates when the motor is running in inverter mode and an amber light indicates
when the motor is running in bypass mode.
WARNING: The motor may restart when the overcurrent relay is reset when operating in bypass, unless the HOA selector
switch is turned to the OFF position.
Bypass
RD Auto Transfer IOB Bypass ControllerThe auto INVERTER/OFF/BYPASS (IOB)three-contactorbypass option provides a
means of bypassing the CPX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. The
circuitry provides an automatic transfer of the load to across the line operation after a drive trip. This option consists of
an input disconnect, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted IOB selector
switch. The Bypass includes an input contactor, an output contactor, and a bypass starter with an electronic overload relay.
The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked. Door-mounted pilot lights are provided, which indicate bypass
or inverter operation. A green light indicates when the motor is running in inverter mode and an amber light indicates when
the motor is running in bypass mode.
Warning: The motor may restart when the overcurrent relay is reset when operating in bypass, unless the IOB selector switch
is turned to the OFF position.
Bypass
RG Reduced Voltage Starter for BypassUsed in conjunction with bypass option RA, RB, RC or RD. This option adds S801 or
S811 Series reduced voltage soft starter to bypass assembly for soft starting in bypass mode.
Bypass
S7 10-Inch ExpansionExpansion cabinet allows for special components, customer-supplied components or oversized cables.
Note: Enclosure expansion rated NEMA Type 1 only.
Enclosure
S8 20-Inch ExpansionExpansion cabinet allows for special components, customer-supplied components or oversized cables.
Note: Enclosure expansion rated NEMA Type 1 only.
Enclosure
S9 Space HeaterPrevents condensation from forming in the enclosure when the drive is inactive or in storage. Includes a
thermostat for variable temperature control. The 400W heater requires a customer supplied 115V remote supply source.
Enclosure
31.2-17
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
031
CPX9000 Series Option Board Kits
The CPX9000 Series drives can accom-
modate a wide selection of expander
and adapter option boards to custom-
ize the drive for your application
needs. The drives control unit is
designed to accept a total of ve
option boards (see Figure 31.2-18).
The CPX9000 Series factory-installed
standard board conguration includes
an A9 I/O board and an A2 relay output
board, which are installed in slots A
and B.
Figure 31.2-18. CPX9000 Series Option Boards
Table 31.2-11. Option Board Kits
Option card must be installed in one of the slots listed for that card. Slot indicated in Bold is the preferred location.
AI = Analog Input; AO = Analog Output, DI = Digital Input, DO = Digital Output, RO = Relay Output
OPTC2 is a multi-protocol option card.

A
B
C
D
E
Option Kit
Description
Allowed Slot
Locations
Field Installed Factory Installed SVX Ready Programs

Catalog
Number
Option Designator Basic Local/
Remote
Standard MSS PID Multi-P. PFC
Standard I/O Cards (See Figure 31.2-18)
2 RO (NC/NO) B OPTA2
6 DI, 1 DO, 2 AI, 1AO,
1 +10 Vdc ref, 2 ext
+24 Vdc/ EXT +24 Vdc
A OPTA9
Extended I/O Card Options
6 DI, 1 ext
+24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc
B, C, D, E OPTB1 B1
1 RO (NC/NO), 1 RO (NO),
1 Therm
B, C, D, E OPTB2 B2
1 AI (mA isolated),
2 AO (mA isolated), 1 ext
+24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc
B, C, D, E OPTB4 B4
3 RO (NO) B, C, D, E OPTB5 B5
1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc,
3 Pt100
B, C, D, E OPTB8 B8
1 RO (NO), 5 DI
42240 Vac input
B,C, D, E OPTB9 B9
Communication Cards
Modbus D, E OPTC2 C2
Modbus TCP D, E OPTCI CI
BACnet D, E OPTCJ CJ
Johnson Controls N2 D, E OPTC2 CA
PROFIBUS DP D, E OPTC3 C3
LonWorks D, E OPTC4 C4
PROFIBUS DP
(D9 connector)
D, E OPTC5 C5
CANopen (slave) D, E OPTC6 C6
DeviceNet D, E OPTC7 C7
Modbus
(D9 Type connector)
D, E OPTC8 C8
RS-232 with
D9 connection
D, E OPTD3 D3
31.2-18
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CPX9000
Enclosed Drives
032
Modbus RTU Network Communications
The Modbus Network Card OPTC2 is
used for connecting the CPX9000 as
a slave on a Modbus network. The
interface is connected by a 9-pin
DSUB connector (female) and the
baud rate ranges from 300 to
19200 baud. Other communication
parameters include an address range
from 1 to 247; a parity of None, Odd
or Even; and the stop bit is 1.
Network Communications
The OPTC2 eldbus board provides
communication between the
CPX9000 drive and a Johnson
Controls Metasys N2 network.
With this connection, the drive
can be controlled, monitored and
programmed from the Metasys
system. The N2 eldbus is available
as a factory-installed option and as a
eld-installable kit.
PROFIBUS Network Communications
The PROFIBUS Network Card OPTC3 is
used for connecting the CPX9000 as a
slave on a PROFIBUS-DP network. The
interface is connected by a 9-pin DSUB
connector (female). The baud rates
range from 9.6K baud to 12M baud,
and the addresses range from 1 to 127.
LonWorks Network Communications
The LonWorks Network Card OPTC4
is used for connecting the CPX9000
on a LonWorks network. This interface
uses Standard Network Variable Types
(SNVT) as data types. The channel
connection is achieved using a
FTT-10A Free Topology transceiver
via a single twisted transfer cable. The
communication speed with LonWorks
is 78 kBits/s.
CANopen (Slave) Communications
The CANopen (slave) Network Card
OPTC6 is used for connecting the
CPX9000 to a host system. According
to ISO 11898, standard cables to be
chosen for CANbus should have a
nominal impedance of 120 ohms, and
specic line delay of nominal 5 nS/m.
120 ohm line termination resistors
required for installation.
DeviceNet Network Communications
The DeviceNet Network Card OPTC7
is used for connecting the CPX9000
on a DeviceNet Network. It includes
a 5.08 mm pluggable connector.
Transfer method is via CAN using a
two-wire twisted shielded cable with
two-wire bus power cable and drain.
The baud rates used for communica-
tion include 125k baud, 250k baud
and 500k baud.
Table 31.2-12. I/O Specications for the Control/Communication Options
Analog voltage, input 010V, R
i
200k ohms
Analog current, input 0 (4)20 mA, R
i
= 250 ohms
Digital Input 24V: 0 10V, 1 18V, R
i
> 5k ohms
Auxiliary voltage 24V (20%), maximum 50 mA
Reference voltage 10V 3%, maximum 10 mA
Analog current, output
Analog voltage, output
0 (4)20 mA, R
L
= 500 k, resolution 10 bit, accuracy 2%
0 (2)10V, R
L
1k ohm, resolution 10 bit, accuracy 2%
Relay output
Max. switching voltage
Max. switching load
Max. continuous load
300 Vdc, 250 Vac
8A/24 Vdc, 0.4A/300 Vdc, 2 kVA/250 Vac
2A rms
Thermistor input R
trip
= 4.7k ohms
31.3-1
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CFX9000 Drives
General Description
033
CFX9000 Drives
CFX9000 Enclosed Drives
General Description
Eatons CFX9000 Clean Power Drives
use tuned passive lters to signicantly
reduce line harmonics at the drive
input terminals.
The CFX9000 drive also delivers true
power factorin addition to reducing
harmonic distortion, the CFX9000
drive prevents transformer overheat-
ing and overloading of breakers and
feeders, which enables the application
of adjustable frequency drives on
generators and other high impedance
power systems.
CFX9000 Enclosed Products
Standard enclosedcovers a wide
range of the most commonly
ordered options. Pre-engineering
eliminates the lead time normally
associated with customer specic
options. Available congurations
are listed on Pages 31.3-331.3-8
Modied standard enclosed
applies to specic customer require-
ments that vary from the Standard
Enclosed offering, such as the need
for an additional indicating light or
minor modications to drawings.
Contact your local sales ofce for
assistance in pricing and lead time
Custom engineeredfor those
applications with more unique or
complex requirements, these are
individually engineered to the
customers needs. Contact your
local sales ofce for assistance in
pricing and lead time
Terms
PCC (point of common coupling)
is dened as the electrical
connecting point between the
utility and multiple customers
per the specications in IEEE 519
POA (point of analysis) is dened
as where the harmonic calculations
are taken
An oscilloscope can make all
measurements at the PCC or POA to
do an on-site harmonic evaluation.
Figure 31.3-1. One-Line Diagram for Harmonic Analysis
____Volts ____Volts
____Volts
____kVA
____Isc
____Impedance
PCC
Utility Side
Utility Side
Transformer
____Volts ____Volts
____Volts
____kVA
____Isc
____Impedance
Customer
Transformer
Customer
Generator
____Volts
____kVA
____Isc
____Impedance
Source A
Source B
Generator
Set
AC
Motor
AC
Motor
AC
Motor
Total Linear Motor Loads
Total Nonlinear Drive Loads
____AMPS
____AMPS
AC
Motor
AC
Motor
AC
Motor
The best way to estimate AFD harmonic contribution to an electrical system is to perform a harmonic analysis based on known system
characteristics. The one line in this gure would provide the data to complete the calculations.
31.3-2
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CFX9000 Drives
General Description
034
Harmonic Reduction Methods to Meet IEEE 519
1. Line Reactor
A line reactor is a three-phase series inductance on the line
side of an AFD. If a line reactor is applied on all AFDs, it is pos-
sible to meet IEEE guidelines where 1025% of system loads
are AFDs, depending on the stiffness of the line and the value
of line reactance. Line reactors are available in various values
of percent impedance, most typically 11.5%, 3% and 5%.
Note: The 9000X drives come standard with a nominal 3%
input impedance.
Figure 31.3-2. Line Reactor
Advantages
Low cost
Can provide moderate reduction in voltage and
current harmonics
Available in various values of percent impedance
Disadvantages
May not reduce harmonic levels to below
IEEE 519-1992 guidelines
Voltage drop due to IR loss
2. Passive Filters
Tuned harmonic lters involve the series connection of
an inductor with the shunt connection of an inductor and
capacitor to form a low impedance path to ground for a
specic range of frequencies. This path presents an alternative
to the ow of harmonic currents back into the utility source.
Table 31.3-1. 100 hp CFX9000 480V Drive with Integrated Passive Filter
Figure 31.3-3. 100 hp CFX9000 480V Drive with Integrated Passive Filter
Advantages
Low cost for smaller horsepower applications
More effective harmonic attenuation than 12-pulse drives
Provides increased input protection for AFD from
line transients
Disadvantages
Capacitors age over time, unlike magnetics
Not as effective as 18-pulse drives
Challenging to retrot with bypass applications
Figure 31.3-4. CFX9000 Drive with Integrated Passive Filter
AFD Motor
Passive Filter
Current harmonics
I
1
= 100%
I
5
= 3.76%
I
7
= 1.65%
I
11
= 0.24%
I
13
= 1.1%
I
17
= 0.80%
I
19
= 0.50%
I
23
= 0.55%
I
25
= 0.80%
Power = 100 hp
H
c
= 8.6A
200
Current
Amps
100
0
100
200
Time
Three-Phase
Input
AC Input
Reactor
L1A
L2A
L3A
1
2
3
Output Transistors
IGBT Section
Dynamic Braking
Transistor
6-Pulse Diode
Bridge Rectifier
Converter Section
Shunt
Fusing
Tuned
Shunt
Reactor
Tuned
Harmonic
Capacitor
Inverter Section
() DC
(+) DC
Bus
Capacitors
AC
Motor
31.3-3
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CFX9000 Drives
General Description
035
Features and Benets
CFX9000 Integrated Filter Clean Power
Drive features include (at 480V):
UL Type 1, UL Type 12, UL Type 3R
and NEMA 12 with gaskets and lters
Input voltage: 480V, 230V, 575V
Complete range of control, network
and power options
Horsepower range:
480V, 7-1/2400 hp I
L
230V, 7-1/2100 hp I
L
; consult
factory for details
575V, 15400 hp I
L
; consult
factory for details
Single enclosure for both drive
and lter reduces eld wiring
and enables convenient bypass
installation
Packaged solution ensures optimal
coordination of drive and lter
UL
cUL
508C
Product Identication
CFX9000 DriveUL Type 12, 40 hp
Input
Reactor
Optional
Breaker
Disconnect
(P1)
Shunt
Fusing
Tuned
Shunt
Reactor
SVX9000
Drive
Tuned
Harmonic
Capacitor
Door-Mounted
Keypad
31.3-4
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CFX9000 Drives
036
Table 31.3-2. 208 Vac
Table 31.3-3. 230 Vac
hp NEC
Current
Chassis
Frame
NEMA 1 NEMA 12 NEMA 3R
Disconnect
Only
Power
Options
Disconnect
Only
Power
Options
Disconnect
Only
Power
Options
Low Overload Drive (Variable Torque)
7-1/2
10
15
24.2
30.8
46.2
FR5
FR5
FR6
DWG-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DWG-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
20
25
30
59.4
74.8
88.0
FR6
FR7
FR7
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-5
DRW-5
40
50
60
114.0
143.0
169.0
FR7
FR8
FR8
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-4
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-5
DRW-6
DRW-6
75
100
211.0
273.0
FR8
FR9
DRW-7
DRW-8
DRW-7
DRW-8
DRW-7
DRW-8
DRW-7
DRW-8
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
High Overload Drive (Constant Torque)
7-1/2
10
15
24.2
30.8
46.2
FR5
FR6
FR6
DWG-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DWG-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
20
25
30
59.4
74.8
88.0
FR7
FR7
FR7
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-5
DRW-5
DRW-5
40
50
60
114.0
143.0
169.0
FR8
FR8
FR8
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
75
100
211.0
273.0
FR9
FR9
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
hp NEC
Current
Chassis
Frame
Disconnect
Only
Power
Options
Disconnect
Only
Power
Options
Disconnect
Only
Power
Options
7-1/2
10
15
22.0
28.0
42.0
FR5
FR5
FR6
DWG-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DWG-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
20
25
30
54.0
68.0
80.0
FR6
FR7
FR7
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-5
DRW-5
40
50
60
104.0
130.0
154.0
FR7
FR8
FR8
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-4
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-5
DRW-5
DRW-6
75
100
192.0
248.0
FR8
FR9
DRW-7
DRW-8
DRW-7
DRW-8
DRW-7
DRW-8
DRW-7
DRW-8
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
7-1/2
10
15
22.0
28.0
42.0
FR5
FR6
FR6
DWG-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DWG-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
20
25
30
54.0
68.0
80.0
FR7
FR7
FR7
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-5
DRW-5
40
50
60
104.0
130.0
154.0
FR8
FR8
FR8
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-4
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-5
DRW-6
DRW-6
75
100
192.0
248.0
FR9
FR9
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
31.3-5
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CFX9000 Drives
037
Table 31.3-4. 480 Vac
Consult factory.
hp NEC
Current
Chassis
Frame
Disconnect
Only
Power
Options
Disconnect
Only
Power
Options
Disconnect
Only
Power
Options
7-1/2
10
15
11.0
14.0
21.0
FR4
FR5
FR5
DWG-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DWG-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
20
25
30
27.0
34.0
40.0
FR5
FR6
FR6
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
40
50
60
52.0
65.0
77.0
FR7
FR8
FR8
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-5
DRW-5
75
100
125
96.0
124.0
156.0
FR8
FR9
FR8
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-5
DRW-5
DRW-5
150
200
250
180.0
240.0
302.0
FR8
FR9
FR9
DRW-3
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-7
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-3
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-7
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-4
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-5
DRW-6
DRW-6
300
350
400
361.0
414.0
477.0
FR10
FR10
FR10
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9

7-1/2
10
15
11.0
14.0
21.0
FR4
FR5
FR5
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
20
25
30
27.0
34.0
40.0
FR5
FR6
FR6
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
40
50
60
52.0
65.0
77.0
FR6
FR7
FR7
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-5
DRW-5
75
100
125
96.0
124.0
156.0
FR7
FR8
FR8
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-4
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-5
DRW-6
DRW-6
150
200
250
180.0
240.0
302.0
FR8
FR9
FR9
DRW-7
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-7
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-7
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-7
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
300
350
361.0
414.0
FR10
FR10
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
31.3-6
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CFX9000 Drives
038
Table 31.3-5. 575 Vac
Consult factory.
hp NEC
Current
Chassis
Frame
Disconnect
Only
Power
Options
Disconnect
Only
Power
Options
Disconnect
Only
Power
Options
15
20
25
17.0
22.0
27.0
FR6
FR6
FR6
DWG-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DWG-1
DRW-1
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
30
40
50
32.0
41.0
52.0
FR6
FR7
FR7
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-5
DRW-5
60
75
100
62.0
77.0
99.0
FR8
FR8
FR8
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
125
150
200
125.0
144.0
192.0
FR9
FR9
FR9
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
250
300
400
242.0
289.0
382.0
FR10
FR10
FR10
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9

10
15
20
14.0
17.0
22.0
FR6
FR6
FR6
DWG-1
DWG-1
DWG-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DWG-1
DWG-1
DWG-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
25
30
40
27.0
32.0
41.0
FR6
FR7
FR7
DWG-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DWG-1
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-3
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-2
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-4
DRW-5
DRW-5
50
60
75
52.0
62.0
77.0
FR8
FR8
FR8
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-7
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
100
125
150
99.0
125.0
144.0
FR9
FR9
FR9
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-8
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
DRW-6
200
250
300
192.0
242.0
289.0
FR10
FR10
FR10
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9
DRW-9

31.3-7
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CFX9000 Drives
039
CFX9000 Drives
Table 31.3-6. Primary Design Features
Table 31.3-7. Protection Features
The EMI lter is optional in FR10.

Table 31.3-8. Input/Output Interface Features
Table 31.3-9. Communications
4566 Hz input frequency
Output: AC volts maximum
Output frequency range
Standard
Input Voltage Base
0320 Hz
Initial output current (I
H
)
Overload (1 minute [I
H
/I
L
])
Enclosure space heater
250% for 2 seconds
150%/110%
Optional
Oversize enclosure
Output contactor
Bypass motor starter
Listings
Standard
Optional
Optional
UL, cUL, 508C
Incoming line fuses
AC input circuit disconnect
Phase rotation insensitive
Optional
Optional
Standard
EMI lter
Input phase loss protection
Input overvoltage protection
StandardFR6 thru FR9
Standard
Standard
Line surge protection
Output short circuit protection
Output ground fault protection
Standard
Standard
Standard
Output phase protection
Overtemperature protection
DC overvoltage protection
Standard
Standard
Standard
Drive overload protection
Motor overload protection
Programmer software
Standard
Standard
Optional
Local/remote keypad
Keypad lockout
Fault alarm output
Standard
Standard
Standard
Built-in diagnostics
Surge protective device
Standard
Optional
Setup Adjustment Provisions
Personal computer
Standard
Standard
Operator Control Provisions
Drive mounted keypad/display
Conventional control elements
Standard
Standard
Standard
Serial communications
115 Vac control circuit
Optional
Optional
Speed Setting Inputs
Keypad
010 Vdc potentiometer/voltage signal
420 mA isolated
Standard
Standard
Congurable
420 mA differential
315 psig
Congurable
Optional
Analog Outputs
Speed/frequency
Torque/load/current
Motor voltage
Standard
Programmable
Programmable
Kilowatts
010 Vdc signals
420 mA DC signals
Isolated signals
Programmable
Congurable w/jumpers
Standard
Optional
Discrete Outputs
Fault alarm
Drive running
Drive at set speed
Optional parameters
Standard
Standard
Programmable
14
Dry contacts
Open collector outputs
Additional discrete outputs
2 relays Form C
1
Optional
RS-232
RS-422/485
DeviceNet
Standard
Optional
Optional
Modbus RTU
CANopen (slave)
PROFIBUS-DP
Optional
Optional
Optional
LonWorks
EtherNet/IP/Modbus TCP
Optional
Optional
Optional
BACnet Optional
31.3-8
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CFX9000 Drives
040
Table 31.3-10. Performance Features
Table 31.3-11. Standard Conditions for Application and Service
Units FR10 rated 40C.

Table 31.3-12. Standard I/O Specications
Table 31.3-13. I/O Specications for Control/Communication Options
For applications above 3A, consult instruction manual.

Sensorless vector control
Volts/hertz control
IR and slip compensation
Standard
Standard
Standard
Electronic reversing
Dynamic braking
DC braking
Standard
Optional
Standard
PID setpoint controller
Critical speed lockout
Current (torque) limit
Programmable
Standard
Standard
Adjustable acceleration/deceleration
Linear or S curve acceleration/deceleration
Jog at preset speed
Standard
Standard
Standard
Thread/preset speeds
Automatic restart
Coasting motor start
7
Selectable
Standard
Coast or ramp stop selection
Elapsed time meter
Standard
Optional
Maximum operating
ambient temperature
0 to 40C, contact factory for 50C

Humidity (maximum),
noncondensing
95%
Altitude 100% load capacity (no derating)
up to 3280 ft (1000m); 1% derating
for each 328 ft (100m) above
3280 ft (1000m); max. 9842 ft (3000m)
Line voltage variation
Line frequency variation
+10/15%
4566 Hz
Efciency
Power factor (displacement)
>96%
0.99
Sixdigital input programmable 24V: 0 10V, 1 18V,R
i
>5 kohms
Twoanalog input
congurable w/jumpers
Voltage: 010V, R
i
>200 kohms
Current: 0 (4)20 mA, R
i
= 250 kohms
Twodigital output
programmable
Form C relays 250 Vac or
30 Vdc 2A resistive
Onedigital output
programmable
Open collector 48 Vdc 50 mA
Oneanalog output
programmable congurable
w/jumper
020 mA, R
L
max. 500 ohms
10 bits 2%
Analog voltage, input 010V, R
i
200 kilohms
Analog current, input 0 (4)20 mA, R
i
= 250 ohms
Digital input 24V: 0 10V, 1 18V, R
i
>5 kilohms
Auxiliary voltage 24V (20%), max. 50 mA
Reference voltage 10V 3%, max. 10 mA
Analog current, output 0 (4)20 mA, R
L
= 500 kilohms,
resolution 10 bit, accuracy 2%
Analog voltage, output 0 (2)10V, R
L
1 kohm, resolution
10 bit, accuracy 2%
Relay output maximum
switching voltage
300 Vdc, 250 Vac
switching load
3A/24 Vdc, 300 Vdc, 250 Vac

continuous load
2A rms
Thermistor input R
trip
= 4.7 kohms
31.3-9
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CFX9000 Drives
041
Table 31.3-14. CFX9000 Enclosed Drives Catalog Numbering System
Brake chopper is standard in 208V, 230V

and 480V drives up to FR6; optional in all
other drives.
Local/remote keypad is included as the

standard control panel.
Some options are voltage and/or

horsepower specic. Consult your
Eaton representative for details.
See Pages 31.3-12 and 31.3-13 for complete

descriptions.
Includes local/remote speed reference switch.
See Pages 31.3-10 and 31.3-11 for complete

descriptions.
Consult Eaton for availability.

Table 31.3-15. Ambient Temperature Ratings
For high temperature rating, select HT option code and

contact factory.
If dynamic brake chopper or control/
communication option is desired,
change the appropriate code in the
base catalog number
All of the programming is
exactly the same as the standard
SVX9000 drive
Select enclosed options. Add
the codes as sufxes to the base
catalog number in alphabetical and
numeric order
Enclosed Options
Type
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
KF
KO
Door-mounted speed potentiometer
Door-mounted speed potentiometer with

HOA selector switch
315 psig follower

HAND/OFF/AUTO switch (22 mm)
MANUAL/AUTO reference switch (22 mm)
START/STOP pushbuttons (22 mm)
Bypass test switch for RA and RB
Standard elapsed time meter
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Addl. bypass
Control
L1
L2
LE
Power, RUN and fault pilot lights
Bypass pilot lights for RA, RB, bypass options
Red RUN light
Light
Addl. bypass
Light
P1
P3
P7
P8
PE
PF
PG
PH
PI
PN
Input circuit breaker
Input line fuses (200 kAIC)
Input power surge protection
SPD surge protective device
Output contactor
Output lter
MotoRx (up to 600 ft) 1000 V/S DV/DT lter
Single overload relay
Dual overload relays
Dual overloads for bypass
Input
Input
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Addl. bypass
RA
RB
RC
RD
RG
Manual HOA bypass controller
Manual IOB bypass controller
Auto transfer HOA bypass controller
Auto transfer IOB bypass controller
Reduced voltage starter for bypass
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass
S4
S5
S6
S9
Floor stand 6.00 inches
Space heater
Enclosure
Enclosure
Enclosure
Enclosure
Enclosure Rating
1 = UL Type 1
2 = UL Type 12
3 = UL Type 3R
CFX 050 1 4 A A
Product Family
CFX = Integrated
filter clean
power drive
Horsepower Rating
007 = 7-1/2
010 = 10
015 = 15
020 = 20
025 = 25
030 = 30
040 = 40
050 = 50
060 = 60
075 = 75
100 = 100
125 = 125
150 = 150
200 = 200
250 = 250
300 = 300
350 = 350
400 = 400
Build Alphabetically and Numerically
Voltage Rating
1 = 208V
2 = 230V
4 = 480V
5 = 575V (575600V)
ApplicationTorque/Braking
A = I
L
/no brake chopper
B = I
L
D = I
H
/no brake chopper
E = I
H
Enclosed Style
A = Enclosed drive
Communication Options
C2 = Modbus
C3 = PROFIBUS DP
C4 = LonWorks
C5 = PROFIBUS DP (D9 connector)
C6 = CANopen (slave)
C7 = DeviceNet
C8 = Modbus (D9 type connector)
CA = Johnson Controls N2
CI = Modbus TCP/EtherNet/IP
CJ = BACnet
D3 = RS-232 with D9 connection
Control Options
B1 = 6 DI, 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc
B = 1 RO (NC-NO), 1 RO (NO), 1 therm
B4 = 1 AI (mA isolated), 2 AO (mA isolated),
1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc
B5 = 3 RO (NO)
B8 = 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc, 3 Pt100
B9 = 1 RO (NO), 5 DI 42240 Vac input
Engineered Options
HT = High temperature rating
for 50C
VB = Varnished boards
Enclosure Size I
H
I
L
B, C, 9
7, 8
40C
50C
40C
50C
31.3-10
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CFX9000 Drives
Options
042
Options
CFX9000 Series Option Board Kits
The CFX9000 Series drives can
accommodate a wide selection of
expander and adapter option boards
to customize the drive for your
application needs. The drives control
unit is designed to accept a total of
ve option boards.
The CFX9000 Series factory-installed
standard board conguration includes
an A9 I/O board and an A2 relay output
board, which are installed in slots
A and B.
Figure 31.3-5. Option Boards
Table 31.3-16. Option Board Kits
AI = Analog Input; AO = Analog Output, DI = Digital Input, DO = Digital Output, RO = Relay Output
Option card must be installed in one of the slots listed for that card. Slot indicated in bold is the preferred location.
OPTC2 is a multi-protocol option card.

A
B
C
D
E
Option Kit Description
Allowed Slot
Locations
Field
Installed
Factory
Installed
SVX Ready Programs
Catalog
Number
Option
Designator
Basic Local/
Remote
Standard MSS PID Multi-P. PFC
Standard I/O Cards
2 RO (NC/NO) B OPTA2
6 DI, 1 DO, 2 AI, 1AO, 1 +10 Vdc ref,
2 ext +24 Vdc/ext +24 Vdc
A OPTA9
Extended I/O Cards
6 DI B, C, D, E OPTB1 B1
1 RO (NC/NO), 1 RO (NO), 1 therm B, C, D, E OPTB2 B2
1 AI (mA isolated), 2 AO (mA isolated) B, C, D, E OPTB4 B4
3 RO (NO) B, C, D, E OPTB5 B5
3 Pt100 RTD board B, C, D, E OPTB8 B8
1 RO (NO), 5 DI 42240 Vac input B, C, D, E OPTB9 B9
Communication Cards
Modbus D, E OPTC2 C2
Modbus TCP D, E OPTCI CI
BACnet D, E OPTCJ CJ
EtherNet/IP D, E OPTCK CK
Johnson Controls N2 D, E OPTC2 CA
PROFIBUS DP D, E OPTC3 C3
LonWorks D, E OPTC4 C4
PROFIBUS DP (D9 connector) D, E OPTC5 C5
CANopen (slave) D, E OPTC6 C6
DeviceNet D, E OPTC7 C7
Modbus (D9 type connector) D, E OPTC8 C8
RS-232 with D9 connection D, E OPTD3 D3
31.3-11
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CFX9000 Drives
Options
043
Modbus RTU Network Communications
The Modbus Network Card OPTC2 is
used for connecting the 9000X Drive
as a slave on a Modbus network. The
interface is connected by a 9-pin DSUB
connector (female) and the baud rate
ranges from 300 to 19,200 baud. Other
communication parameters include an
address range from 1 to 247; a parity
of None, Odd or Even; and the stop
bit is 1.
PROFIBUS Network Communications
The PROFIBUS Network Card OPTC3 is
as a slave on a PROFIBUS-DP network.
The interface is connected by a 9-pin
DSUB connector (female). The baud
rates range from 9.6K baud to 12M
baud, and the addresses range from
1 to 127.
LonWorks Network Communications
The LonWorks Network Card OPTC4 is
on a LonWorks network. This interface
uses Standard Network Variable Types
(SNVT) as data types. The channel
connection is achieved using a
FTT-10A Free Topology transceiver
via a single twisted transfer cable.
The communication speed with
LonWorks is 78 kBits/s.
CANopen (Slave) Communications
The CANopen (Slave) Network
Card OPTC6 is used for connecting
the 9000X Drive to a host system.
According to ISO 11898 standard
cables to be chosen for CANbus
should have a nominal impedance
of 120 ohms, and specic line delay
of nominal 5 as/m. 120 ohm line
termination resistors required
for installation.
DeviceNet Network Communications
The DeviceNet Network Card OPTC7
is used for connecting the 9000X Drive
on a DeviceNet Network. It includes
a 5.08 mm pluggable connector.
Transfer method is via CAN using a
two-wire twisted shielded cable with
two-wire bus power cable and drain.
The baud rates used for communica-
tion include 125K baud, 250K baud
and 500K baud.
Johnson Controls Metasys N2 Network
Communications
The OPTC2 eldbus board provides
communication between the 9000X
Drive and a Johnson Controls Metasys
N2 network. With this connection, the
drive can be controlled, monitored
and programmed from the Metasys
system. The N2 eldbus is available
as a factory-installed option and as a
eld-installable kit.
Modbus/TCP Network Communications
The Modbus/TCP Network Card
OPTCI is used for connecting the
9000X Drive to Ethernet networks
using Modbus protocol. It includes
an RJ-45 pluggable connector. This
interface provides a selection of
standard and custom register values
to communicate drive parameters.
The board supports 10 Mbps and
100 Mbps communication speeds.
The IP address of the board is cong-
urable over Ethernet using a supplied
software tool.
BACnet Network Communications
The BACnet Network Card OPTCJ
is used for connecting the 9000X Drive
to BACnet networks. It includes a
5.08 mm pluggable connector. Data
transfer is Master-Slave/Token
Passing (MS/TP) RS-485. This interface
uses a collection of 30 Binary Value
Objects (BVOs) and 35 Analog Value
Objects (AVOs) to communicate drive
parameters. The card supports 9.6,
19.2 and 38.4 Kbaud communication
speeds and supports network
addresses 1 to 127.
EtherNet/IP Network Communications
The EtherNet/IP Network Card
OPTCK is used for connecting the
9000X Drive to Ethernet/Industrial
Protocol networks. It includes an
RJ-45 pluggable connector. The
interface uses CIP objects to
communicate drive parameters
(CIP is Common Industrial Protocol,
the same protocol used by DeviceNet).
The board supports 10 Mbps and
100 Mbps communication speeds. The
IP address of the board is congurable
by Static, BOOTP and DHCP methods.
31.3-12
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CFX9000 Drives
Options
044
Control/Communication Option Descriptions
Table 31.3-17. Available Control/Communications Options
Type
K1 Door-Mounted Speed PotentiometerProvides the drive with the ability to adjust the frequency reference using a door-mounted
potentiometer. This option uses the 10 Vdc reference to generate a 010V signal at the analog voltage input signal terminal. When the
HOA bypass option is added, the speed is controlled when the HOA switch is in the HAND position. Without the HOA bypass option, a
two-position switch (labeled local/remote) is provided on the keypad to select speed reference from the speed potentiometer or a remote
speed signal.
Control
K2 Door-Mounted Speed Potentiometer with HOA Selector SwitchProvides the drive with the ability to start/stop and adjust the speed
reference from door-mounted control devices or remotely from customer supplied inputs. In HAND position, the drive will start and
the speed is controlled by the door-mounted speed potentiometer. The drive will be disabled in the OFF position. When AUTO
is selected, the drive run and speed control commands are via user-supplied dry contact and 420 mA signal.
Control
K3 315 psig FollowerProvides a pneumatic transducer that converts a 315 psig pneumatic signal to either 08 Vdc or a 19 Vdc
signal interface with the drive. The circuit board is mounted on the inside of the front enclosure panel and connects to the users
pneumatic control system via 6 ft (1.8m) of exible tubing and a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) brass tube union.
Control
K4 HAND/OFF/AUTO Switch for Non-Bypass CongurationsProvides a three-position selector switch that allows the user to
select either a HAND or AUTO mode of operation. HAND mode is defaulted to keypad operation, and AUTO mode is defaulted to
control from an external terminal source. These modes of operation can be congured via drive programming to allow for alternate
combinations of start and speed sources. Start and speed sources include keypad, I/O and eldbus.
Control
K5 MANUAL/AUTO Speed Reference SwitchProvides door-mounted selector switch for MANUAL/AUTO speed reference. Control
K6 START/STOP PushbuttonsProvide door-mounted START and STOP pushbuttons for either bypass or non-bypass congurations. Control
KF Bypass Test Switch for RB and RAAllows the user to energize the AF drive for testing while operating the motor on the bypass
controller. The Test Switch is mounted on the inside of the enclosure door.
Addl.
bypass
KO Standard Elapsed Time MeterProvides a door-mounted elapsed run time meter. Control
L1 Power On, Run and Fault LightsProvide a white power on light that indicates power to the enclosed cabinets, a green run light
and a red fault light that indicates a drive fault has occurred.
Light
L2 Bypass Pilot Lights for RB, RA Bypass OptionsA green light indicates when the motor is running in inverter mode and an amber
light indicates when the motor is running in bypass mode. The lights are mounted on the enclosure door, above the switches.
Addl.
bypass
LE Red Run Pilot Light (22 mm)Provides a red run pilot light that indicates the drive is running. Light
P1 Input Circuit BreakerHigh interrupting circuit breaker that provides a means of short-circuit protection for the power cables between
it and the CPX9000, and protection from high-level ground faults on the power cable. Allows a convenient means of disconnecting the
CPX9000 from the line and the operating mechanism can be padlocked in the OFF position. This is factory mounted in the enclosure.
Standard rating is 65 kAIC at 208/480V. 100 kAIC is available as an option.
Input
P3 Input Line Fuses Rated to 200 kAICProvide high-level fault protection of the drive input power circuit from the load side of the fuses
to the input side of the power transistors. This option consists of three 200 kA fuses, which are factory mounted in the enclosure.
Input
P7 MOV Surge SuppressorProvides a metal oxide varistor (MOV) connected to the line side terminals and is designed to clip line
side transients.
Input
P8 SPD Surge Protective Device with 50 kA RatingProvides transient voltage protection, eliminating surges and spikes that can
damage the diode bridge of the drive.
Input
PC Capacitor ContactorThis option provides a contactor between the tuned reactor and capacitor to disconnect the capacitor from
the circuit when desired, typically at light or no load conditions. This contactor is wired to a programmable relay output.
Input
PE Output ContactorProvides a means for positive disconnection of the drive output from the motor terminals. The contactor coil is
controlled by the drives run or permissive logic. NO auxiliary contacts rated at 10A, 600 Vac are provided for customer use. Bypass
options RB and RA include an output contactor as standard. This option includes a low VA 115 Vac fused control power transformer
and is factory mounted in the enclosure.
Output
PF Output FilterUsed to reduce the transient voltage (DV/DT) at the motor terminals. The output lter is recommended for cable lengths
exceeding 100 ft (30m) or for a drive rated at 525690V. This option is mounted in the enclosure, and may be used in conjunction with a
brake chopper circuit.
Output
PG MotoRx (300600 ft) 1000 V/S DV/DT FilterUsed to reduce transient voltage (DV/DT) and peak voltages at the motor terminals. This
option is comprised of a 0.5% line reactor, followed by capacitive ltering and an energy recovery/clamping circuit. Unlike the output lter
(see option PF), the MotoRx recovers most of the energy from the voltage peaks, resulting in a lower voltage drop to the motor, and
therefore conserving power. This option is used when the distance between a single motor and the drive is 300600 ft (91183m).
This option cannot be used with the brake chopper circuit. The output lter (option PF) should be investigated as an alternative.
Output
PH Single Overload RelayUses a bimetallic overload relay to provide additional overload current protection to the motor on
congurations without bypass options. It is included with the bypass congurations for overload current protection in the
bypass mode. The overload relay is mounted within the enclosure, and is manually resettable. Heater pack included.
Output
PI Dual Overload RelaysThis option is recommended when a single drive is operating two motors and overload current protection is
needed for each of the motors. The standard conguration includes two bimetallic overload relays, each sized to protect a motor with
50% of the drive hp rating. For example, a 100 hp drive would include two overload relays sized to protect two 50 hp motors. The relays
are mounted within the enclosure, and are manually resettable. Heater packs not included.
Output
PN Dual Overloads for BypassThis option is recommended when a single drive is operating two motors in the bypass mode and
overload current protection is needed for each of the motors. The standard conguration includes two bimetallic overload relays,
each sized to protect a motor with 50% of the drive hp rating. For example, a 100 hp drive would include two overload relays sized
to protect two 50 hp motors. The relays are mounted within the enclosure, and are manually resettable.
Addl.
bypass
31.3-13
September 2011
Sheet 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CFX9000 Drives
Options
045
Table 31.3-17. Available Control/Communications Options (Continued)
Enclosed Drive Options
Table 31.3-18. Conformal (Varnished) Coating
See catalog number description to order.

Table 31.3-19. Light Options Table 31.3-20. Control Options
Type
RA Manual HOA Bypass ControllerThe manual HAND/OFF/AUTO (HOA)three-contactorbypass option provides a means of
bypassing the CFX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. This option consists of
an input HMCP, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted HOA selector switch and
an INVERTER/BYPASS switch. The HOA switch provides the ability to start and stop the drive in the inverter mode. IEC type input,
bypass and input contactors are provided. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (see wiring diagram on
Page 31.3-24).
Bypass
RB Manual IOB Bypass ControllerThe manual INVERTER/OFF/BYPASS (IOB)three-contactorbypass option provides a means of
bypassing the CFX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. This option consists
of an input HMCP, a fused control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted IOB selector switch.
IEC type input, bypass and input contactors are provided. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (see wiring
diagram on Page 31.3-24).
Bypass
RC Auto Transfer HOA Bypass Controller The manual HAND/OFF/AUTO (HOA)three-contactorbypass option provides a means of
bypassing the CFX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. The circuitry provides
an automatic transfer of the load to across the line operation after a drive trip. This option consists of an input HMCP, a fused
control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted HOA selector switch and an INVERTER/BYPASS
switch. The HOA switch provides the ability to start and stop the drive in either mode. IEC type input, bypass and input contactors
are provided. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (see wiring diagram on Page 31.3-24). Door-mounted
pilot lights are provided that indicate bypass or inverter operation. A green light indicates when the motor is running in inverter
mode and an amber light indicates when the motor is running in bypass mode.
Warning: The motor may restart when the overcurrent relay is reset when operating in bypass, unless the IOB selector switch is
turned to the OFF position.
Bypass
RD Auto Transfer IOB Bypass ControllerThe auto INVERTER/OFF/BYPASS (IOB)three-contactorbypass option provides a means
of bypassing the CFX9000, allowing the AC motor to be operated at full speed directly from the AC supply line. The circuitry provides
an automatic transfer of the load to across the line operation after a drive trip. This option consists of an input HMCP, a fused
control power transformer, and a full voltage bypass starter with a door-mounted IOB selector switch. IEC type input, bypass and
input contactors are provided. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (see wiring diagram on Page 31.3-24).
Door-mounted pilot lights are provided that indicate bypass or inverter operation. A green light indicates when the motor is
running in inverter mode and an amber light indicates when the motor is running in bypass mode.
Warning: The motor may restart when the overcurrent relay is reset when operating in bypass, unless the IOB selector switch is
turned to the OFF position.
Bypass
RG Reduced Voltage Starter for BypassUsed in conjunction with bypass option RA, RB, RC or RD. This option adds IT. Series reduced
voltage soft starter to bypass assembly for soft starting in bypass mode.
Bypass
S4 Floor Stand 6.00-inchRaises F box off the ground 6.00 inches (152.4 mm). Recommended when box is not installed on an
appropriate concrete pad.
Enclosure
S5 Floor Stand 22.00-inchConverts a Size B or C, normally wall mounted enclosure to a oor standing enclosure with a height of
22.00 inches (558.8 mm).
Enclosure
S6 Floor Stand 12.00-inchConverts a Size C or D, normally wall mounted enclosure to a oor standing enclosure with a height of
12.00 inches (304.8 mm).
Enclosure
S9 Space HeaterPrevents condensation from forming in the enclosure when the drive is inactive or in storage. Includes a thermostat
for variable temperature control. Heater requires a customer supplied 115V remote supply source.
Enclosure
Chassis
Frame
Delivery
Code
FR6
FR7
FR8
FP
FP
FP
FR9
FR10
FR11
FR12
FP
FP
FP
FP
Description Catalog
Number Sufx
Power on, run, fault LED
lights (22 mm)
L1
Power on, fault LED
lights (22 mm)
L3
Green LED run light (22 mm) LA
Green LED stop light (22 mm) LD
Red LED run light (22 mm) LE
Red LED stop light (22 mm) LF
Red LED fault light (22 mm) LG
Power on white LED
light (22 mm)
LJ
Miscellaneous LED
light (22 mm)
LU
Description Catalog
Number Sufx
Door-mounted speed
potentiometer
K1
Door-mounted speed
potentiometer with HOA
selector switch
K2
315 psig follower K3
HOA selector switch K4
MANUAL/AUTO reference
switch
K5
START-STOP pushbuttons K6
Type D2 control relay SD
On-delay relay SE
Off-delay relay SF
Additional terminal blocks
per 4 points
SD
31.3-14
For more informati

Eaton Consultant Guide

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Eaton Consultant Guide

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Electrical Sector

BIL values in bold typeface are listed as

BIL values in bold typeface are listed as

Lower levels where surge arrester

If electrical life support or critical care areas

Normal Source Normal Source

20 Breaker Type and

150 VCP-W 1000

9 (is less than 15) =

Where system X/R ratio is 15 or less, the

23,720 amperes rms = =

15 480 amperes rms , = =

Using 80% taps.

Starting Torque per Unit of

40% Starting, 40% Pull-In

NEC 2011 NFPA 70: National Electrical Code

molded case breakers,

-listed for safe operation

Values of the coefcient of grounding (expressed as a percentage of maximum phase-to-phase

Ground-fault current in percentage of the three-phase short-circuit value.

Additional to UL 1449 ratings.

Loose Wiring Twisted Wires

Generally, magnitude decreases as harmonic

Special systems are those where the rate

All power generation equipment is limited

Maximum Harmonic Current Distortion in

Include ground fault trip.

23 Temperature control device A device that functions to raise or to lower the

41 Field circuit breaker A device that functions to apply, or to remove,

42 Running circuit breaker A device whose function is to connect a machine

46 Reverse-phase, or phase balance,

59 Overvoltage relay A relay that functions on a given value of

66 Notching or jogging device A device that functions to allow only a specied

73 Load-resistor contactor A device that is used to shunt or insert a step of

74 Alarm relay A device other than an annunciator, as covered

78 Phase-angle measuring relay A device that functions at a predetermined phase

79 AC reclosing relay A relay that controls the automatic closing and

86 Locking-out relay An electrically operated hand, or electrically, reset

94 Tripping or trip-free relay A relay that functions to trip a circuit breaker,

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Circulating dust, lint, bers and yings

Oil and coolant seepage

Occasional temporary submersion

Provides a Degree of Protection Against the

Occasional temporary submersion

Provides a Degree of Protection Against

Gasoline, hexane, butane, naphtha, propane,

Flour, starch, grain dust

For busway impedance data, see

and associated ttings

and associated ttings

Expected availability 4Q11.

508, Standard for Programma-

Expected availability 4Q11.

Required IPONI for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.

Required a WPONI for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.

Requires a QSNAP for connection to the Power Xpert Gateway.

Transceiver (XCVR) Common Connected to:

B A None Floating None

Available and valid in continental United States only.

We strongly recommend a review of the latest Hardware Capability List at www.eaton.com/pxs.

Power Xpert 1 Day

Supported by Power Xpert Enterprise Edition.

Supported by Power Xpert Enterprise Edition.